$3233
Sree
a
3:
eerie ssess
sogaaaceesi fits
soesasesesesastiessstseebtaisst
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2008 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation
https://archive.org/details/greekenglishlexi00grimuoft
GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON
OF THE
NEW TESTAMENT
? a UA e ~ > , eee 2
dpxyn wadevoews 7 TOV dvoudtwy eioxeries.
EPICTETUS, Diss. i. 17, 12
maius quiddam atque divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis
litterarum figuris comprehendi queat.
HERMANN, Opuscc. ill. 253-
TA PHMATA A EfQ AEAAAHKA YMIN TINEYMA EZTIN KAI ZOH EETIN
Poa
Saas A
Sa,
GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON)
OF THE
NEW TESTAMENT
BEING
@rimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Cestamenti
TRANSLATED REVISED AND ENLARGED
BY
JOSEPH HENRY THAYER, D.D.
HON. LITT.D. DUBLIN
BUSSEY PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT CRITICISM AND INTERPRETATION IN
THE DIVINITY SCHOOL OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY
CORRECTED EDITION
NEW YORK - CINCINNATI - CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
Copyright, 1886, by Harper & Broruens.
All rights reserved.
Copyright, 1889, by Harper & Broraers,
All rights reserved.
=E-P 10
MADE INU. s. 4,
PREFACE.
WARDS the close of the year 1862, the “Arnoldische Buchhandlung” in Leipzig
published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared,
upon the basis of the “Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica” of C. G. Wilke (second edition,
2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. Witinatp Grimm of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor
Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical
lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen’s Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of
Passow’s Dictionary edited by Rost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a
word’s significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to
show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly
to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to
produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of
exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The
successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of
scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg; and since its
completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the
New Testament extant.
An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce
the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for
October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun; but it was protracted by
engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity —as it seemed — of preparing
the authorized translation of Liinemann’s edition of Winer’s New Testament Grammar, which
was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann.
Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm’s work was called for.. To the typographical
accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared
in its completed form in 1879. “ Admirable”, “unequalled”, “invaluable”, are some of the
epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of
the book by competent critics in Germany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor
Schiirer’s review of it in the Theologische Literaturzeitung for January 5, 1878: “The use of
Professor Grimm’s book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the
best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work
vl PREFACE.
of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an
acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every
student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament,
and consequently for the study of Theology in general.”
Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such
changes in his work as might in my judgment the better adapt it to the needs of English-
speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a
strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing
a new book prepared on my predecessor’s as a basis, and —alike in justice to him and for
the satisfaction of students —to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the
silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should
render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm’s work. (See [] in the list of
“Explanations and Abbreviations” given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on
me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw-
backs the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of
justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of
the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect-
ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation.
Some of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in
connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here
be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and—so far
as practicable — modern) ; to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words; to give
the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of
interest to the general student; to render complete the enumeration of (representative) verbal
forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others); to append to every verb
a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament; to supply the New
Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk; to note
more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions; to introduce brief discussions
of New Testament synonyms; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the .
“ Authorized Version” but also of the Revised New Testament; to multiply cross references ;
references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical
(Kihner, Kriiger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.); also to the best English and American
Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The
Speaker’s Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest
exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare,
etc.); and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopedias (Smith, Alexander’s Kitto,
McClintock and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various
Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul.
Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place:
One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New
Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings 1n the current editions of
the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may
PREFACE. a
entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In
the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant
printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after
general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of
the text of the ‘ Receptus ’, together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf.
In his second edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the
present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm’s second edition undergone
thorough revision (see, for example, “Griesbach ” in the list of “Explanations and Abbrevia-
tions ”’), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and
of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted.
Again: the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions
holding in classic usage (as they are laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not
be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the
contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of
comparison by which the direction and degree of a word’s change in meaning can be measured.
When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and
instructive.
On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand,
although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But
they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Fick, or even more
frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vani¢ek, as the most compendious
digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts
of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when
such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon.
The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should
not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. <A student
often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it
bears in a given context or discussion: —or, to state the same truth from another point of
view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or
another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the
passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to
some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing
the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the
objections to opposing interpretations.
Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended
upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon
the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter
into his labors. Any one who consults such articles as aiwv, aidvios, BaotAeia trot Geod etc.,
Sixaros and its cognates, Sdéa, éAmis, Cw7}, Odvaros, Oeds, Kdcpos, K’ptos, TloTIs, TVEDWA, odps, copia, Twlw
and its cognates, vids rod dévOpurou, vids Tod Oeod, Xpurrds, and the like, will find, it is believed, all
the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the
comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been
VU PREFACE.
added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded
as supplementing or correcting those of Professor Grimm.
Convenience often prescribes that the archzological or historical facts requisite to the
understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for
fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the
editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor; yet with the constant exercise of
self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that
succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original.
In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at
different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose
use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to
guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it
serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten.
Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a
different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies
dissent from him, It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the
passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen —
now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi-
nal; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same
topic ; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access;
now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether.
It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to
grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The
expert can easily train his eye to run over them; and yet even for him they may have their
use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but
also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the
decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest.
Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it
seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and
especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find
that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of
the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other
portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament
vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology
— which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found
elsewhere.
Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many
years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen,
by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must be
made to Grorce B. Jewert, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eaton now of Middlebury
College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-verified aii the biblical and classical
PREFACE. =
references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering
valuable aid in correcting many of the proofs; the latter has gathered the passages omitted
from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal
forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation,
and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly
labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the
lamented Dr. ABBort been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every
user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go
through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, in accordance
with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on
the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf’s Editio Octava
Critica Major. ‘
To Dr. Caspar Rent Grecory of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena
just named in advance of their publication; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press,
Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott’s
Lexicon.
No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present
volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several
laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure
than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself
to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every
remaining blemish
— iva 6 Adyog TOD Kupiou Tpéxy Kat Sosalyrar
J. H. THAYER.
CaMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS.
Dec. 25, 1885.
In issuing this “Corrected Edition” opportunity has been taken not only to revise the
supplementary pages (725 sq.), but to add in the body of the work (as circumstances per-
mitted) an occasional reference to special monographs on Biblical topics which have been
published during the last three years, as well as to the Fourth Volume of Schmidt’s Synonymik
(1886), and also to works which (like Meisterhans) have appeared in an improved edition.
The Third edition (1888) of Grimm, however, has yielded little new material; and Dr. Hatch’s
“ Essays in Biblical Greek ” comes to hand too late to permit references to its valuable dis-
cussions of words to be inserted.
To the correspondents, both in England and this country, who have called my attention to
errata, I beg to express my thanks; and I would earnestly ask all who use the book to send
me similar favors in time to come : — dreXés ovdev ovdevds pérpov.
April 10, 1889.
LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS
QUOTED OR REFERRED TO IN THE LEXICON.
N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Liddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also
ef Freund’s Triennium Philologicum (1874) vols. i. and ii., of Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace’s
Dictionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann’s Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of
reference. An asterisk (*) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk (+) death.
B.C
AcCHILLES TATIUS .
Acts of Paul and Theela, of Pilate, ¥e
Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Barna-
bas, etc., at the earliest from .. .
PA T:TAN@eieeee routs” Nemes bree Ten le
UMES CHINE Sica Wise! es Uteh ite. To te te 345
AE SCHYLUS st 0 fo ites Sue 8025) T456'
IA SOP Meas cwizce bien fo els fe, tei) Tei‘ %e 570
AB TLUSMMe, cnbcusela. « % « me
AGATHARCHIDES@ uss fe) cs ohetel en odiliviaé
AwtcAaEUS MYTILENAEUS .... - 610
AT CUPHRON/@ERe) (clbiei sins 6) or
FATIC MANGE cus cl gsi goune) clomie’ee: wel ae 610
ALEXANDER APHRODISIENSIS . . .
ATEXIS 0. 5s Ob ACA ee ery hin 350
AmBROSE, Bp. of Nika. a artes ee Vos
AmMIANUS MARCELLINUS ....
Ammonivs, the grammarian. .. .
IANROREON e's coc feo os ssi) wel ce 530
ANAXANDRIDES ..... ad 350
ZX NACSUMANIDEB 0) J), 6 6) 0) er ee 580
FANDOCIDES asics co) elite tits diets = 405
AANTDIPHANES( Ags 9s, < 6 6 0 % © 380
ANTIPHON .. SOCED Cake: EOC 412
Antoninus, M. AURELIUS . ...
APpoLLoporRus of Athens . ... . 140
APOLLONIUS DyscoLus .....
APOLLONIUS RHODIUS. .... .- 200
APPYAN@ Et) each avcmereiiics xe
APPULEIUS... :
AQUILA (translator of the O. T. ) aie
FAATIUS Ummm teen Seok et we. ce evr 8 270
ARCHILOCHUS . See 700
ARCHIMEDES, the mathomatisiari ae 250
ARCHYTAS . Seen oa iess «(C400
A.D.
500 ?
2d cent. on
c. 180
c. 500
200 ?
200
374
+ c. 400
390
+180
140
150
160
a cent. (under
Hadrian.)
1 But the current Fables are not his; on the History of Greek
Fable, see Rutherford, Babrius, Introd. ch. ii.
? Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genuine.
B.O.
AREDARUSIES (a sh, 3 6, oy) © ou (opens
ARISMAENE TUSitcy ac, teflhetlc iacnmrenme
ARISTEAS! . . . SP Re tice ee te 270
ARISTIDES, P. pee Siar Onn Chane
ARISTOPHANES. . .. . . . « “444, {380
ARISTOPHANES, the grammarian . - 200
ARISTOTLE *384, 7322
ARRIAN (pupil and end of Epictetus)
ARTEMIDORUS DaLpIaNus_ (oneiro-
Guses 2 6 0 6 4¢ 6 ao 5 6 Ce
JNUSPNSTUS 9 0G oO 6 9 g 0 ¢
ATHENAEUS, the grammarian .. .
ATHENAGORAS of Athens . . .. .
AUGUSTINE, Bp. of Hippo. . .. .
Ausonius, Decimus Macnus . .
Basrius (see Rutherford, Babrius, Intr.
tig) a Se - + « « (some say 50?)
BARNABAS, Epistle written ....
Baruch, Apocryphal Book of . . . .
Jenene ww)? 6 5 6 ¢ 5 6 od
BastL THz Great, Bp. of ‘Cesarea :
BASin Of Seleuciarsmceic: etitennelonnts
Bel and the Dragon. . . «© « « « 2dcent.?
IBTONSECn Celene silted brew iet eva ws 200
CAESAR, GAIUS emme - . tMarch 15, 44
CaALLIMACHUS.. . se sah amet 260
Canons and Costindonn peace.
CaPITOLINus, JULIUS (one of the “ Hist.
August. scriptores sex”) . . . .
Gisoy 6. 6 BS nee Go SG 6 6 % 399
CEDRENUS!,% fone! ile ily caetels
*c. 100
160
1373
228
1772
+430
tc. 390
c. 225
c. 100?
c. 752
c. 900
1379
450
8d and 4th eeat.
c. 310
1050
1 But his letter is spurious; see Hody, De Bibl. text. orig. L. i.;
A. Kurz, Arist. ep. etc (Bern 1872).
2 The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work
of Justinian and consisting of sixty books.
It was begun under
the emperor Basil of Macedonia (+886), completed under his son
Leo, and revised in 945 under Constantine Porphyrogenitus; (ed.
Heimbach, 6 vols. 1833-70).
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
B.C.
Cetsus, A. wee the medical
WHItGR Nc Pert em coy. Pe eat ees. ic:
CHAREST cs wep eit cet 1e)0 Hie iene 820
CHARITON ..- - - HeiSc
Curysiprus of Tyana (in ‘Athenaeus)
Curysostom, Dro, the orator, see Dio Chrys.
Curysostom, JoHN, Bp. of Constan-
tinopleys =... «4 © Ete
CICERO) soe) onal re . tDec. 7, 48
CLEMENS ALEXANDRINUS. . =. - -
Ciemens Romanus, Epistle written .
CLEOMEDES. . - + «+ © © © « @
COLUMELLA. 0°. 2s 5 + -s
ConsTANTINUS PORPHYROGENITUS,
emperorfrom .... + + + «
Constitutiones apostolicae. . . + + «
GRATINUB | 0s) s) se) ss ee te. «(ABB
ORITTAR HCN et rciuie ret heise fe ets 411
OTRSrAs 7 ta ttciine Met etiaes or veice te 401
CURTIUS Gc ais hice Least ere slelebietite
GVPRUAN Gs fteneteice, Hed gre seers bts
Gyn of-Alexandria)) sate ie. %s, Us
CrRIT Ol sOrusslemiy.s «<6 «lo
WRMOCRITUS) se) «0. 6 0s © \« 430
DEMOSTHENES. . - « - « « «» *385, (322
Dexippus, the historian .... .
Dipymus of Alexandria .... .
WITOMG-RSSTUS ee.) ole) tests, ver iektle
WO | CHRYSOSTOM: (<< uel fe. Ws)
IOCLES ct gar tst en ee). feceni saute: 46 470
ITODORUS NICULUS = = «© « « © \c 40
DIoGENES LAERTIUS .... -»
Diocnetus, Epistleto . .. .
Dionysius PseupO-AREOPAGITA . .
Dionysius of Halicarnassus. . . . 30
Dionysius PERIEGETES .....
IDIGECORTDEBH «lo, eae ell semen vets
Dirnimps) = =. - 4 300
Ecclesiasticus (Wisdom ‘a Tess the
Son of Sirach; Grk. trams.) . . . ¢. 132?
ENNIUS . a, (ecuae tate Piette tie 4169
Enoch, Book ne cis eo cc feat 2d cent. on
EPHREM Syrus .. are aeiteers
PICHARMUS = «= % 8's 480
Maton eo Soc ua os eds.
ISPICURUS:. oy isils) cules te: tat vom O4 ost 2TO.
EPIMENIDES. .. oekeh ie rts 600
ErrpHantius, Bp. of Salamis . Ses
ERATOSTHENES. . Ey se 1 C296
Esdras, First Book of (Vulgate Third) ist cent. ?
Esdras, Second Book Ae Fourth)
Esther, Additionsto . . « « e 2d cent. ?
Etymologicum Magnum... .
IUBULUB’s «5 + « % % et tine 350
Evciip : Ae Oe 300
IUROUIST ss) 6 « « % ee oes 429
EvuRIPIDES ie . *480, t406
Eusesivs, Bp. of Ceesarea 1 ofite mace
Evustatuivs of gare pe re gram
Marianie’ Fah 1. 45%: a
XII
A.D. B.O.
Evutuymivs Z1IGABENvS or Zigadenus
20 (Zygadenus). . - « » « « « e
ELORUS, JULIUS) acini cMene = ite
450? GALEN. . - 5 :
q GELLIUs, Avis ‘(authiox of Noctes
Atticag)" sic. (stot tepekel Relic Mamita
GENESIUS .. “
+407 Geoponica (20 bks.. on " agriculture com-
piled by Cassianus Bassus). . . .
200 GrermManus of a re
93-97 younger. . sine eel tevie
100? Goreaias of eosin BO Oo lors t30
50 Grecory of Nazianzus . . ... -»
Grecory of Nyssa . . .
911-959 HarpocraTion (lexicon to the Ten
8d and 4th cent. Attic Orators) . . . 2... « «
ISD YVUP Coo ped Oo do 0a 4 510
Hecesiprus (quoted in Eusebius) .
Hexioporvs, Bp. of Tricca in Thessaly
50 HeERactipes Ponticus (but the Alleg.
+257 Homer. are spurious). . . . - - 390
1444 HERACKITUS ec) a) leet a none 500
t386 IGRMAS) 3 o xele) ot en kenVennon entre
HERMIPPUS)< 6 <0) ciel ennenete 432
IIRRMOGENES © <0) en's). <0 tel tesla elitcmnte
ec. 270 Hero ALEXANDRINUS . «. + « « - 250
c. 395 HeRopian, the grammarian . . . -
200° Heropian, the historian .. -. -
100 HierODOTUS <2) lo- eps) toot cee AOS e0S
HeEsIoD . . Sa Cyiicy 5.0.15 850 ?
Hesycuivs of Alexandria, the lexicog-
c. 200 Tapher ts feet ko tie colon Moone
2dor3dcent | HIEROCLES . .. . Bi PeuitelN Comets
500 ? HIERONYMUS, see reeoraes
HIIMERIOS) G06) coe ie) ee ass col neonate
300? HIPPOCRATES: *. s/o) ey oe ee 430
100? HIPPOLY TUB). Nepal ee eee ee
HIPPONAX .. ~ a, UREA 540
Hirrius (the contuneton of Caesar’s
Commentaries)\2) 2s) ete t43
Homers ys matte s 900 ?
HOoRAPOLLO, prammniatiaa ° Sle Site
c. 375 Horace’. eG. 2), Kita toute utente t8
Hyrrerpers (0%. . 4% ke tte ce eee
100 IenaTIUS. . . Li Rieter yale
TRENAEUS, Bp. of Lyons S'S) site carer Alte
LEV Goh SECM GAO cura bod do Jc 370
T4038 Isrporus HisPaeEnsis, Bp. of Seville
IsockaTes 4... « % = «© = « =, So0,oea
JAMBLICHUS. . :
Istcent.? | Jeremiah, Ep. of (6th ch. of Baruch)
JEROME (Sophronius (?) Eusebius Hie-
1000 ? FONYVIOUE) js 4s Seuss ies temic
JOANNES DAMASCENUS. . + « © «
JOANNES MoscHus - .. + + = »
SOSEPHUS! .c.dely ist oes) i) een
uaith) woo omnes rere Vf) UN)
tc. 340 JuLian, Roman emperor fon ae
JUSTINIAN, Roman emperor from . .
1160 Justin, the historian .... . -
JUSTIN MARTYR . »© «© «© © © e 8
JOVENAL is) Gili. Ot teat ipo: co ihe mre! Tors
- Called Pamphili (as friend of the martyr Pamphilus).
ANCIENT AUTHOR®
A.D
T636
3800
lst cent. %
$420
730
t620
75
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
B.C.
WGACTANTIUS. < - < «| « « = «
LaMPRIDIUS, the historian. . .. .
Leo ‘Philosophus’,emperor. . . .
Lipanius, the rhetorician. ... .
GVA Mel stelle | aetvis) Wes) Jishile cer le." ie
IGONGINUS) fs) cite! st) fel) je eo
Loneus ... SeeanD
Lucan, the epic poet ust ier st 78
Lucian of Samosata, the satirist . .
Luciuius, the Roman satirist .. .
Lucretius, the Roman poet. . . -
LYcOPHRON. .. . aipetaer tee
Lycurcus of Athens, the orator ..
Lynceus. . . Saar gies
Lystas, the Athenian orate: opened
IN area 4 WS gwen Gem dy cemdinc
HGXSTPPUStsuisr tales lcs ee) (6
Macarius . . SO Ow DMC
Maccabees, First Book of ° oe
Maccabees, Second Bookof. ... -
Maccabees, Third Bookof ... 4. .
Maccabees, Fourth Book "he 2» «let. cent?
MacHon. . . . et etese ee 280
Macropius. .. . BAe tues Wer iss
MALaALas, Joun, the he atta Per)
Manassas, Prayer Of, soc." 8” 6”
MANETHO, the ile ada shes
MAaRCION. . . = « sy 65 0
MAXIMUS EYRIUS ya- lelset «0 ts
ME tA, Pompontus, the Roman one
FADHET Aneel ‘
MELEAGER, the foaniee of the ope
gram. anthologies . . ..... 60
MetiT0, Bp. of Sardis . . . .. .
MENANDER, the poet. . . . :
MENANDER, the Byzantine Haren °
MIMNERMUS, the poet . .... .
Morris, the “ Atticist” and lexicog-
PAPE ee list) “ater lahat ts, Slants va
IMOSCHION Rs cmbion serie isis Watbter net v6
Moscuus . . a oe ace en a Cea
Musonius Rurus SUA CRENS ena iialt Joh is
INEMEISEUSi sedis Gel tdviel (16 °
INEBOSP hess era on neh, haa tits - *90, 124
NICANDBRteirewiartedne ie ee va) «ROOF
Niceruorvs, patriarch of Constanti-
uO Ss WG ioe . sis: t's
NICEPHORUS Be iennne. the histo-
rian . Sui Je Wise
Niczrnorvs Grrconas, Byadutine hie-
torian .
NIcETAS ectenctnars (eieo GHaniates))
Byzantine historian . .
Nicodemus, Gospel of, see Beis: of Pilate
Nicotaus DaMascenus ..... 14
Nicomacuus GERASENUS. .
Nius, the pupil and friend of John
Chrysostom :
Nonnus of Panopolis)i in liner Epypt,
ChE POCb) ween. 62 ow
Noumenivs of Apameia, the philoso-
pher (as quoted by Origen). . . .
“59
105-63 ?
c. 75?
325
c. 600
A.D.
310
310
886
350
t17
250
400?
T65
160?
c. 350
c. 402
420
600 ?
140
45
ce. 175
583
2d cent.
110?
66
400?
828
$1137
$1359
1200
50
420
500 ?
c. 150
XII
B.C.
NumMEnNIvs (as quoted by Athen.) . . c. 350
OcrLttus Lucanus .. .. .. . 400?
OxrcuMEnNIvs, Bp. of Trica . . . .
Otympioporus, the Neo-Platonic phi-
TosOpher ss see ey SS
Opprian of Anazarbus in Cilicia (auth.
of the GAteutixd) .
OpPian of ag in Syria’ (anth. of
the kuynyetixd) . ret ILO Oman er
ORIGENM re euhotret oeletls* ot sate
Orosius PAULUS. . . « « «© « «
(Oi TON A saxofon
Ovipe aes! se aver ee ee ae es
PALAEPHATUS. . . 4
Paptias, Bp. of Hierapolis, ‘first half of
JORG 6) oh Bde as SGeodioe nc
PETRUS ALEXANDRINUS . . «+ - .«
PHALARIS, spurious epistles of . . .
PHAvorinus, VARINUS! . ... .
RHIEEMON]) COMICUS| =.= 2" et sct 6" 330
Ded) Gg, G MO! Ge GilaOy Dyce Gy O Lodhi
IPHTLODEMUSE tanec) rote er wee) et tere 50
PHILOSTRATUST «aie ene = ene
PHOCYLIDES .. . : . 540
PsEUDO-PHOCYLIDES (in the Sibyl.
Oraeyig. voy. en 5 Bs Cobban
Puortivs (Patriarch of Constantinople)
Purynicuos, the Soi aah
PHYLARCHUS .. . : ° 210
PinpDaR . . *521(4 yes after Aeschylus), t441
Prato, Comicus, contemporary of Ari-
stophanes. . . bon phntieolec 427
Prato, the aibeenin cote fe IETS Tae?
PLAuToSsie. : a4 Sabre tot sos
Puriny the elder, the naturalist . . .
Puiny the younger, the nephew and
adopted son of the preceding . . .
Prorinvs, the philosopher 54
PLUTARCH . . ac °
Po.iux, author of the Si pounaeucly -
PoLyAENus, author of the orparnyh-
POU oy BG A oy Oe. do 3
PoLyBius . T122
POLYCARE cies ssi te
Porpuyry, pupil of Bigeness
POSIDIPPUS. .. - . 280
PosIDonIvs, niilodaper (fencer ue
Ciceroand Pompey) . .... .- 78
Procius, philosopher ..... -
(IPROPERTIUS Nie 6-1) ene ee sei
Protevangelium Jacoi . . . +». .
Psalter of Solomon. . . «. « «+ « » 63-48?
Pseuuus the younger, philosopher .
Protemy, the geographer. . . . -
PYTHAGORAS .. . Spears 531
QUINTILIAN, phetonicin lreaher af
Pliny the younger. . - .. -»
QuiInTUS SMYRNAEUS . .. «© «© «
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
A.D.
950?
237
Ist cent. ?
850
180
179
T113
1270
T120
180
163
+155, Feb.23
270
450
2d cent.
1050
160
t95
380 ?
1 The Latin name of the Italian Guarino Favorino, who died
A. D. 1537, and was the author of a Greek Lexicon compiled mainly
from SuYdas, Hesychius, Harpocration, Eustathius, and Phryni-
chus. ist ed, Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere since.
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
B.C.
SatLusT ... 606 eR RE
Sapientia (Sal.), see Werte of Solomon.
SaPPrHo 610
Seneca, L. ANNagws, the philosopher
(son of the rhetorician) :
Septuagint, Greek translation of 0. T. ¢. 280-150
Sextus EmPpiricus
Sibylline Oracles, of various dates, rang-
ing perhapsfrom ......- - 170
Srx1us Iraticus, poet... .. -
Simonipes of Amorgos, “ Jambo-
graphus” . enc Cp eee Me a 693
Srmonipes of Ceos (author of the epi-
taph on the Spartans that fell at
Thermopylae) BA so “oo 5 525
Srpuicius, the commentator on Aris-
totle and Epictetus ....-. «
Sirach, see Ecclesiasticus.
Socrates ‘Scholasticus’, of Constan-
tinople, historian . . « + « « «
Socrates (in Stobaeus) . . « « -
Soxinus, surnamed Polyhistor . .
Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter etc.
Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom ete.
Soon, the lawgiver and poet. . . . 594
Song of the Three Children. . » « 2d cent.?
SoPHOCLES . .. . ~ « © « *496, t406
Sopuronius of DAINGACHE ssaoteiercias
SoTaDES. .. ae uch Olah ec ?
SozoMEN, iistarian aheon fe epeltas-aee
Srartius, the Roman poet. . . « «
SToBaEws, i.e. John of Stobi in Mace-
donia (compiler of Anthol.) . . .
Srrano, the geographer . .. . « *66
STRATON, epigrammatist Ol aoe
SrrRaTTIs, comic poet .... . 407
Suetonius, the historian, friend of
Pliny the younger. . . ..- =. -
Suipas, the lexicographer. . .
Susanna .. pO oto le Ist cent. ?
SyMMACHUS fennelaoe of the O. T.
into Greek) . . = eis
SyNEsIvus, pagan piuleee per! and
bishop of Ptolemais . .... .
FLAGUTUS <= te) oy oWllon len) oh aeiftedis tis
TaTIAN . do 6
Teaching of the Twelve Anne sivas ria
TRRENCR.«%%. 0m, © 8) 5 00% t159
XIV
t65
2252
to the 4th cent.
7101
439
300 ?
638
450
196
500 ?
$24
150?
+160
1100?
200?
410
t¢.117
c. 160
2d cent. ?
4
TERTULLIAN. . 0 ¢
Testaments of the T: ipalon Patriarehs wa
THEAGES!., .< <<) (s\ ‘ejareuter enone
THEMISTIUS. . « © «© © © © « «
DHEOCRITUS#= <0 lo MtomonoMoltenne
TLHEODORET <1 yon (eto olor el tote
THeoporus METOCHITA . .
THEODOTION (translator of O. T. into
Greek) before . . . . » « « e
THEOGNIS
THEOPHILUS, Bp. of ean Po.
THEOPHRASTUS, pupil and successor of
Aristotle ire: kere) v0) mt ai ois
TueopHyr act, Abp. of Bulgaria . .
THEOPHYLACT SIMOCATTA . «+ «= «
THomMas MaaisTEr, lexicographer and
PTLAMMAPIAN Sw ooo MICS TEs
ARRAN 6 6 6 4 6 5b oo 6
TIRULLUS) ) -uictiron oth on ole mone
TimaAEvs, the historian of Sicily . .
TimaeEvs the Sophist, author of Lexicon
to Plato . . se
Timageus of Pour) yiheeonan se
losopher .. . GH o 40
Timon, the “ Sillographus” or satirist .
TIMOCLES Sonim ein it~ e tect
Tobit: «0s; Mowers: Tete ioe ohio Baca ts
TRYPHIODORUS, a versifier ... -
Tzrrzes, Byzantine grammarian and
loo o OOO GO
VALERIUS MAXIMUS ....--. -
Varro, “vir Romanorum eruditissi-
us) (Quintil:) art eee
VEGETIUS, on the artofwar. .. .
NAGEEIGR 6 0 9 So 6
Vitruvius, the sale ieaean ee on
architecture . . . 5
Voriscus, historian (cf. iGamtauenelte
Wisdom of Solomon (abbr. Sap.) . .
XENOPHANES, founder of the Eleatic
philosophyqgeo) <0 -ren tion enetome
XENOPHON . .. . - (Anabasis)
Xenopuon of Ephesus, romancer . .
ZENovot Cititmipy-mecne- annem
ZEeNoDOoTDS, first librarian at Alexan-
GB Go 6 6 os MicWasts
ZONARAS, the eheonttier! ay pois waves
Zosimus, Roman historian ... -
B.C,
280
322
423
tis
260
375?
c. 279
350
c. 200?
ANCIENT AUTHORS,
A.D.
+2202
c. 125%
355
420
1300
160
180
1078
610
1310
250?
420?
c. $310
400?
1118
420
LIST OF BOOKS
REFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR’S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREME
ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE.
Alberti = Jounnes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in
sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725.
Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the
edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and
Brandis ; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 1831-1870. Of the
Rhetcric, Sandys’s edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge,
1877) has been used.
Baumlein = W. Béaumlein, Untersuchungen iiber griechi-
sche Partikeln. Stuttgart, 1861.
B.D. = Dr. William Smith’s Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols.
London, 1860-64. The American.edition (4 vols., N. Y.
1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Hackett and
Abbot, has been the edition used, and is occasionally
referred to by the abbreviation “Am. ed.”
BB. DD. = Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the
work just named, and the third edition of Kitto’s Cyclo-
pzxdia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex-
ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870.
Bnhdy.= G. Bernhardy, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der
Griechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1829.
B. = Alexander Buttmann, Grammar of the New Testament
Greek. (Authorized Translation with numerous Addi-
tions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.)
Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page
of the translation, with the corresponding nage of the
German original added in a parenthesis.
Bitm. Ausf. Spr. or Sprehl. = Philipp Buttmann, Ausfihr-
liche Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., 1st vol. 1830, 2d
vol. 1839.)
Bttm. Gram. = Philipp Buttmann’s Griechische Gram-
matik. The edition used (though not the latest) is the
twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berlin,
1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth
edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by
Harper & Brothers, 1851. Whenthe page is given, the
translation is referred to.
Bttm. Lexil.= Philipp Buttmann’s Lexilogus u. s. w. (Ist
vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was
translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one
volume by John Murray, London, 1836.
“Bible Educator” = a collection (with the preceding name)
of miscellaneous papers on biblical topics by various
writers under the editorship of Rev. Professor E. H.
Plumptre, and published in 4 vols. (without date) by
Cassell, Petter, and Galpin.
Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A Practical Introduction to
Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised: Oxford,
1881.
Cremer = Hermann Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches Worter-
buch der Neutestamentlichen Gracitaét. ‘Third greatly
enlarged and improved Edition’: Gotha, 1883. Of the
‘Fourth enlarged and improved Edition’ nine parts
(comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to
hand, and are occasionally referred to. A translation
of the second German edition was published in 1878
by the Messrs. Clark.
Curtius = Georg Curtius, Grundziige der Griechischen Ety-
mologie. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst
Windisch: Leipzig, 1879.
Dict. of Antiq. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui-
ties. Edited by Dr. William Smith. Second edition:
Boston and London, 1869, also 1873.
Dict. of Biog. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography
and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols.
Boston and London, 1849.
Dict. of Chris. Antiq. = A Dictionary of Christian Antiqui-
ties, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible.
Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel
Cheetham. 2 vols. 1875-1880.
Dict. of Chris. Biog. = A Dictionary of Christian Biogra-
phy, Literature, Sects and Doctrines; etc. Edited by
Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace: vol.
i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii. 1882; (not yet complete).
Dict. of Geogr. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geogra-
phy. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 2 vols. 1854-1857.
Edersheim = Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of
Jesus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereotyped.
London and New York, 1884.
Elsner = J. Elsner, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis
libros etc. 2 vols., Traj. ad Rhen. 1720, 1728.
Etym. Magn. =the Etymologicum Magnum (see List of
Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s edition (1 vol. folio,
Oxford, 1848) has been used.
Fick = August Fick, Vergleichendes Worterbuch der In-
dogermanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Got
tingen, 1874-1876.
List oF Books.
xvVI
List oF Books.
Gottling = Carl Goettling, Allgemeine Lehre vom Accent McC. and S.=McClintock and Strong's Cyclopedia of
der griechischen Sprache. Jena, 1835.
Goodwin = W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and
Tenses of the Greek Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston
and Cambridge, 1871.
Graecus Venetus—=the Greek version of the Pentateuch,
Proy., Ruth, Canticles, Eccl., Lam., Dan., according to a
unique MS. in the Library of St. Mark’s, Venice; edited
by O. vy. Gebhardt. Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592.
Green =Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on the Grammar
of the New Testament etc. ete. A new Edition. Lon-
don, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1862.
Also, by the same author “Critical Notes on the New
Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Gram-
mar of the New Testament Dialect.” London, Samuel
Bagster and Sons, 1867.
Hamburger=J/. Hamburger, Real-Encyclopadie fiir Bibel und
Talmud. Strelitz. First Part 1870; Second Part 1883.
Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Herm.
Herzog = Real-Encyklopiidie fiir Protestantische Theologie
und Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols. with index,
1854-1868. ’
Herzog 2 or ed. 2 =a second edition of the above (edited by
Herzog t, Plitt +,and Hauck), begun in 1877 and not yet
complete.
Hesych. = Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.)
The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena,
1858-1868).
Jelf = W. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language.
Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Sub-
sequent editions have been issued, but without, it is
believed, material alteration.)
Kautzsch= E. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama-
ischen. Leipzig, 1884.
Keim = Theodor Keim, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara u. s. w.
8 vols. Ziirich, 1867-1872.
Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae
Linguae Particulis, ed. R. Klotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol.
li. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842.
Krebs, Observy. = J. T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test.
e Flavio Josepho. Lips. 1755.
Kriiger = K. W. Kriiger, Griechische Sprachlehre fiir Schu-
len. Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq.
Kypke, Observv. = G. D. Kypke, Observationes sacrae in
Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graecis et
antiquitatibus. 2 vols. Wratisl. 1755.
L. and S. = Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon etc.
Seventh edition, 1883.
Lob. ad Phryn., see Phryn. ed. Lob.
Loesner = C. F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test. e
Philone Alexandrino. Lips. 1777.
Lghtft. = Dr. John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the
17th century.
Bp. Lghtft. = J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Bishop of Durham; the
8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala-
tians is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his com-
mentary on Philippians, the 7th edition of his commen-
tary on Colossians and Philemon.
Lipsius = K. H. A. Lipsius, Grammatische Untersuchungen
iiber die Biblische Griicitit (edited by Prof. R. A. Lip-
sius, the author’s son). Leipzig, 1863.
Matthiae = August Matthid, Ausfiihrlich Griechische Gram-
matik. Third edition, 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835.
Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature. 10
vols. 1867-1881 ; with Supplement, vol. i. (1885), vol. ii.
with Addenda (1887). New York : Harper and Brothers.
Meisterhans = K. Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen
Inschriften. Berlin, 1885. (2d edition, 1888.)
Mullach= F. W. A. Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen
Vulgarsprache u. s. w. Berlin, 1856.
Munthe = C. F. Munthe, Observationes philolog. in sacros
Nov. Test. libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et
Lips. 1755.)
Palairet = E. Palairet, Observationes philol.-crit. in sacros
Novi Foederis libros ete. Lugd. Bat. 1752.
Pape= W Pape, Griechisch-Deutsches Handworterbuch.
Second edition. 2 vols. Brunswick, 1866. A continuation
of the preceding work is the “ Worterbuch der Griechi-
schen Kigennamen.” Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben-
seler. 1863-1870.
Passow = Franz Passow’s Handworterbuch der Griechischen
Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz.
1841-1857.
Phryn. ed. Lob.=Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo-
rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig,
1820. (Cf. Rutherford.)
Poll. = Pollux (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The
edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio,
1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf,
5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.)
Pss. of Sol. Psalter of Solomon; see List of Ancient
Authors, ete.
Raphel= G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam
«..ex Xen., Polyb., Arrian., et Herodoto collectae. 2
vols. Lugd. Bat. 1747.
Riddell, Platonic Idioms=A Digest of Idioms given as an
Appendix to “ The Apology of Plato” as edited by the
Rey. James Riddell, M. A.; Oxford, 1867.
Riehm (or Riehm, HWB.) = Handworterbuch des Biblischen
Altertums u.s.w. edited by Professor Edward C. A.
Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884.
Rutherford, New Phryn.= The New Phrynichus, being a
revised text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phryni-
chus, etc., by W. Gunion Rutherford. London, 1881.
Schaff-Herzog = A Religious Encyclopedia etc. by Philip
Schaff and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and
Wagnalls, New York. Revised edition, 1887.
Schenkel (or Schenkel, BL.) = Bibel-Lexikon u. s. w. edited
by Professor Daniel Schenkel. 5 vols. Leipz. 1869-1875.
Schmidt = J. H. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechi-
schen Sprache. 4 vols. Leipz. 1876, 1878, 1879, 1886.
Schéttgen = Christiani Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal-
mudicae etc. 2 vols. Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742.
Schiirer = Emil Schiirer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen
Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1874. The “Second Part” of a
new and revised edition has already appeared under the
title of Geschichte des Jiidischen Volkes im Zeitalter
Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for the portion of
the original work which it covers) the references have
been made, although for convenience the title of the
first edition has been retained. An English translation
is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark).
Scrivener, F. H. A.: — A Plain Introduction to the Criticism
of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge
and London, 1883.
List or Books.
Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis ete. Cambridge and
London, 1864.
A Full Collation of the Codex Sinaiticus with the
Received Text of the New Testament etc. Second
Edition, Revised. Cambridge and London, 1867.
Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament ete.
Cambridge and London, 1875.
Sept.—the translation of the Old Testament into Greek
known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the
sixth edition of Tischendorf’s text (edited by Nestle) is
referred to ; 2 vols. (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The
double verse-notation occasionally given in the Apocry-
phal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha
and select Pseudepigrapha by O. F. Fritzsche; Leipzig,
1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine,
Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked
respectively by an appended Comp., Ald., Vat., Alex.
For the first two the testimony of the edition of Lam-
bert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on.
The abbreviations Aq., Symm., Theod. or Theodot.,
appended to a reference to the O. T. denote respectively
the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Symmachus, and
Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc.
“Lag.” designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde,
of which the first half appeared at Gottingen in 1883.
Soph. = EF. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and
Byzantine Periods (from B.c. 146 to a.D. 1100.) Bos-
ton: Little, Brown & Co, 1870. The forerunner (once
or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title
“A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming
vol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American
Academy.” Cambridge, 1860.
Steph. Thes. =the “ Thesaurus Graecae Linguae” of Henry
Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vols.
Paris, 1831-1865. Occasionally the London (Valpy’s)
edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred
to.
Suid. = Suidas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s
edition (2 vols. folio, Oxford, 1834) has been followed.
‘Teaching’ =The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles (Ar-
bax tev Sddexa atooTdAwy.) The edition of Harnack
XVII
List oF Books.
(in Gebhardt and Harnack’s Texte und Untersuchungen
u.s.w. Second vol., Pts. i. and ii., Leipzig 1884) has
been followed, together with his division of the chapters
into verses.
Thiersch= Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik ws. w.
Third edition. Leipzig, 1826.
Trench= Abp. R. C. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testa-
ment. Ninth edition, improved. London, 1880.
Vanitek = Alois Vaniéek, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo-
gisches Worterbuch. 2 vols. Leipz. 1877.
By the same author is “ Fremdworter im Griechischen
und Lateinischen.” Leipzig, 1878.
Veitch = William Veitch, Greek Verbs irregular and de-
fective, etc. New Edition. Oxford, 1879.
Vig. ed. Herm.= Vigeri de praecipuis Graecae dictionis
Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition.
Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by
Rev. John Seager was published at London in 1828.
Vulg. =the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate.
Professor Tischendorf’s edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been
followed.
Wetst. or Wetstein=J. J. Wetstein’s Novum Testamen-
tum Graecum etc. 2vols. folio. Amsterdam, 1751, 1752.
W. = G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testa-
ment etc. Revised and Authorized Translation of the
seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine-
mann; Andover, 1883. Unless otherwise indicated, it is
referred to by pages, the corresponding page of the orig-
inal being added in a parenthesis. When Dr. Moulton’s
translation of the sixth German edition is referred to,
that fact is stated.
Win. RWB.=G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realworterbuch
u.s.w. Third edition. 2 vols., Leipzig and New York,
1849.
Win. De verb. Comp. etc. = G. B. Winer, De verborum
cum praepositionibus compositorum in Novo Testamente
usu. Five academic programs; Leipzig, $843.
Other titles, it is believed, are so fully given as to be easily
verifiable.
EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
As respects Punctuation —it should be noticed, that
since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are
given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek
Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a
form of the Present Tense which is in use, and one which
is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet.
This is done by putting a se mi-colon after a Present which
actually occurs, and a colon after a Present which is a
mere alphabetic locum tenens.
Further: a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic
voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such
voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not)
indicates that said voucher or reference applies to other
passages, definitions, etc., besides the one which it imme-
diately follows. The same principle governs the insertion
or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as
“absol.”, “ pass.”, etc.
A hyphen has been placed between the component parts
of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in
actual use; otherwise the hyphen is omitted.
[] Brackets have been used to mark additions by the Amer-
ican editor. To avoid, however, a complexity which
might prove to the reader confusing, they have been
occasionally dispensed with when the editorial additions
serve only to complete a statement already made in part
by Professor Grimm (as, in enumerating the forms of
verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs com-
pounded with ody which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ;
but in no instance have they been intentionally omitted
where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor
Grimm an opinion for which he is not responsible.
* An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the
instances of the word’s occurrence in the New Testament
are noticed in the article. Of the 5594 words composing
the vocabulary of the New Testament 5300 are marked
with an asterisk. To this extent, therefore, the present
work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon
A superior * or » or ° etc. appended to a verse-numeral
designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given
word or construction in that verse. The same letters ap-
pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first,
second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. ete.
after a page-numeral designates the subdivision of the page.
The various forms of the GREEK TExT referred to are
represented by the following abbreviations :
R or Rec. = what is commonly known as the Textus Recep-
tus. Dr. F. H. A. Scrivener’s last edition (Cambridge
and London 1877) has been taken as the standard.! To
designate a particular form of this “ Protean text” an
abbreviation has been appended in superior type; as, ™
for Elzevir, * for Stephen, * for Beza, e™* for Erasmus.
G or Grsb.= the Greek text of Griesbach as given in his
manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Owing to a dis-
regard of the signs by which Griesbach indicated his
judgment respecting the various degrees of probability
belonging to different readings, he is cited not infre-
quently, even in critical works, as supporting readings
which he expressly questioned, but was not quite ready
to expel from the text.
L or Lchm. = Lacnmann’s Greek text as given in his larger
edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text
of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 1831,) is re-
ferred to, the abbreviation “ min.” or “ ster.” is added to
his initial.
T or Tdf.=the text of Tischendorf’s “Editio Octava
Critica Major ” (Leipzig, 1869-1872).
Tr or Treg. =“ The Greek New Testament” ete. by S. P.
Tregelles (London, 1857-1879).
WH=“The New Testament in the Original Greek. The
Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott D.D. and Fen-
ton John Anthony Hort D.D. Cambridge and London,
Macmillan and Co. 1881.”
KC=“Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vaticani”
as edited by Professors Kuenen and Cobet (Leyden,
1860).
The textual variations noticed are of course mainly those
which affect the individual word or construction under dis-
cussion. Where an extended passage or entire section is
textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9=20; Jn. v.
3 fin.-4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be
known, or at least it is not stated under every word contained
in the passage.
As respects the NUMBERING OF THE VERSES —the edition
of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been
1 Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, which was
followed by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheau in the Theolo-
gische Literaturzeitung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106.
ExpLANATIONS AND
followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of
Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc.). Variations from this
standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu-
meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition
in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the
variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek.
In quotations from the EnciisH BIBLE—
A. V.= the current or so-called “‘ Authorized Version ” ;
R. V.=the Revised New Testament of 1881. But when a
rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be
assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con-
trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by
R. V. is found in the Revision only.
A. S. = Anglo-Saxon.
Abp. = Archbishop.
absol. = absolutely.
acc. or accus. = accusative.
acc. to = according to.
ad 1. or ad loc. =at or on the passage.
al. = others or elsewhere.
al. al. = others otherwise.
Ald. =the Aldine text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List
of Books).
Alex. =the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept.
in List of Books).
ap. = (quoted) in
App. = Appendix.
appos. = apposition.
Aq. = Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books).
art. = article.
augm. =augment.
auth. or author. = author or authorities.
B. or Bttm. see List of Books.
B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books.
betw. = between.
Bibl. = Biblical.
Bp. = Bishop.
br. = brackets or enclose in brackets.
c. before a date = about.
Cantabr. = Cambridge.
cf. = compare.
ch. = chapter.
cl. =clause.
cod., codd. = manuscript, manuscripts.
Com., Comm.=commentary, commentaries.
comp. = compound, compounded, etc.
compar. = comparative.
Comp. or Compl =the Complutensian text of the Septua-
gint (see Sept. in List of Books).
contr. = contracted, contract.
dim. or dimin. = diminutive.
dir. disc. =direct discourse.
e. g. =for example.
esp. = especially.
xIx
ABBREVIATIONS.
ex., exx. example, examples.
exc. = except.
excrpt.—=an excerpt or extract.
fin. or ad fin. at or near the end.
G or Grsb. = Griesbach’s Greek text (see above).
Graec. Ven. = Graecus Venetus (see List of Books).
i. e. = that is.
ib. or ibid. in the same place.
indir. disc. indirect discourse.
init. or ad init.—at or near the beginning.
in |. or in loc. = in or on the passage.
i. q.-=the same as, or equivalent to.
KC =Kuenen and Cobet’s edition of the Vatican text (sew
above).
L or Lchm. = Lachmann’s Greek text (see above).
L. and S. = Liddell and Scott (see List of Books).
1. or lib. = book.
1c., ll. cc. =passage cited, passages cited.
Lag.= Lagarde’s edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in
List of Books).
mrg.=the marginal reading (of a critical edition of the
Greek Testament).
Opp. = Works.
opp. to= opposed to.
paral. =the parallel accounts (in the Synoptic Gospels).
Pt. or pt. = part.
q. Vv. = which see.
R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above).
r.= root.
rel. or relat. = relative.
sc. =namely, to wit.
Skr. = Sanskrit.
sq., qq. = following.
Steph. = Stephanus’s Thesaurus (see List of Books).
Stud. u. Krit.=the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Ger.
man Theological Quarterly.
s. v.—=under the word.
Symm.=Symmachns, translator of the Old Testament into
Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books).
T or Tdf. = Tischendorf’s Greek text (see above).
Theod. or Theodot.=Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of
Books).
Tr or Treg. = Tregelles’s Greek text (see above).
u. i.=as below.
u. 8. =as above.
Vv. = see.
var. = variant or variants (various readings).
Vat.=the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in the
List of Books).
Vulg.=the Vulgate (see List of Books).
w.=with (especially before abbreviated names of cases).
writ. = writer, writers, writings.
WH= Westcott and Hort’s Greek text (see above).
Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselves.
sae Y nae. am
ad chiro ania nyu 083i I 8 ut
* a i — apa) deed dent) ei siadnwbst ee precy £
_ dedooll lo AL syn) moro09 F areal Ah paw y
: tad ae EY
oad; tari ult of afte
cm Seve Piet sas — “ail stale
ocdiraioad nl) tao 2 ia = th) be so gt Ua page it
egeaany ott) wu duu oh ih ay Tati nh “EGHr a i
u wd peiavin bes 10°84 Sie) ot = of} ) jh -ttce elt ela oe
ga) Heel quien? atta to moiihd e'yatot) bos qodaed =A “¢d siete ides
(ov ode
Aarsode ana) 1091 doit) «4 frunto= dnlad tok Orie
Aadtoodl ty ded aoe) S200" foe flobdSabe= 4ifind ab ; 7 oh
: wel od ois -
i tts) iy sit ke aj
Ces ee notify > itd | ara
‘ i ‘ i ape |
» ¢ : . . S ‘ ae ’
i ries i : cc i. > prey 7 Bh
Ay (Ee | aS ye 7
heii tape | RE ot sie om) vulyrantiyoe 4
: ¥
; : ee ; ve v
+} m4 ahd > . j 4 ‘ UP j 1 ny Pie = ,
! ‘ oF Apa — ant gears oot
ray % bie i \
hel See lay ~~ iM
‘ een rN
4 ; ea WAT tf
3 t i la
roe |
|
Pain
U pea, aie, hbege
f ‘ae | “yA
i rt |
vA 7
o
a if aahieaers (=
p04 oabasemayin
othe 2. mine lente
ents
a
God
ft te
NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON.
A
A a, adda
A, a, dda, 70, the first letter of the Greek alphabet,
opening the series which the letter closes. Hence the
expression é¢yo eye ro A [LT Tr WH adda] kai 75 O
(oa L WH], Rev. i.8, 11 Ree., which is explained by the
appended words 7) dpx7) kai 7d TéAos, Xxi. 6, and by the
further addition 6 mpa@ros kal 6 éoxatos, xxii. 13. On
the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4;
xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73]. et
when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is
1. privative (orepnrixdy), like the Lat. in-, the Eng.
un-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is
prefixed, as dBapns ; or signifying what is contrary to it,
as dros, atysdw; before vowels generally av-, as dvairtos.
2. copulative (dpocrdy), akin to the particle dua
[cf. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellow-
ship, as in addeAdds, dxodovbos. Hence it is 3. in-
tensive (emratixdv), strengthening the force of terms,
like the Lat. con in composition; as atevitw fr. drevns
[yet cf. W.100(95)]. This use, however, is doubted or
denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element. i. 34
sq.]. Cf. Kihner i. 741, § 339 Anm. 5; [Jelf § 3426];
Bttm. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; [Donaldson, Gram. p. 334;
New Crat. §§ 185, 213; L. and S.s. v.].*
*Aapav, indecl. prop. name (6 ’Aapar, -dvos in Joseph.),
}08 (fr. the unused Hebr. radical WS TS, —Syr. pact”
libidinosus, lascivus, —[enlightened, Fiirst; acc. to Die-
trich wealthy, or fluent, like 1's], ace. to Philo, de
ebriet. § 32, fr. 1 mountain and equiv. to épewds), Aaron,
the brother of Moses, the first high-priest of the Israel-
ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order: Lk. i. 5;
Acts vii. 40; Heb. v.4; vii. 113 ix. 4.*
*"ABadduv, indecl., TIN, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr.
138 to perish), J a xxxi. 12. 2. the place of destruc-
tion i. q- Orcus, joined with inv, Job xxvi. 6; Prov.
xv. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to fhe an-
gel-prince of the infernal regions, the iniliieiee of death
and author of havoc on earth, and is rendered in Greek
by *ArroAAvo@v Destroyer, Rev. ix. 11.*
‘AB.idbap
GBaprs, -és, (Bdpos weight), without weight, light; trop.
not burdensome: dBapy ipiv eyavtov éeripnoa I have
avoided burdening you with expense on my account,
2 Co. xi. 9; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)*
*ABBa [WH -8a], Hebr. 18 father, in the Chald. em-
phatic state, 828 i. e. 6 zarnp, a customary title of God in
prayer. Whenever it occurs in the N. T. (Mk. xiv. 36;
Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation
subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by
the fact that the Chaldee 838, through frequent use in
prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred
proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added
the appellative from their own tongue.*
"APeA [WH "AQ. (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop.
name (in Joseph. [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] "ABeXos, -ov), 937
(breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam
(Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from his short life and sudden
death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxix.
6): Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; Heb. xi. 4; xii. 24.*
*ABid, indecl. prop. name (Joseph. antt. 7, 10, 3; 8,
10, 1 6°ABias [W. § 6,1 m.], -a), M38 and IN GGity
father is Jehovah), Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. D. sv. a
1. aking of Judah, son of Rehoboam: Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv.
31; xv. a); 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal
family, from whom, when David divided the priests into
twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia,
the eighth in order, took its name: Lk. i. 5.*
*ABid8ap, indecl. prop. name (though in Joseph. antt.
6, 14, 6 ’ABia@apos, -ov), WIN (father of abundance),
Abiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest : Mk. ii. 26, —
where he is by mistake confounded with Ahimelech his
father (1 S. xxi. 1 sqq.); [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1
Chr. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 K.ii.
26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would
seem that double names were esp. common in the case
of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph. vit. §§ 1, 2)
and that father and son often bore the same name (cf
Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. l.c. and antt. 20, 9, 1). See Me
Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].*
"ABirnvn 2
"ABAnvy [WH ‘ABerd. (see s. v. ec )], -7s, 7, (Sc. xopa,
the district belonging to the city Abila), Abilene, the
name of a region. lying between Lebanon and Hermon
towards Phoenicia, 18 miles distant from Damascus and
37 [acc. to the Itin. Anton. 38] from Heliopolis: Lk. iii.
1. Cf. Avoavias [and B. D. s. v.].*
*AProvd, 6, indecl. prop. name, 137738 (father of the
Jews [al. of glory]), Adcud, son of Zorobabel or Zerub-
babel: Mt. i. 13.*
*ABpadp [Rect ‘ABp.; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] (Joseph.
“ABpapos, -ov), DIN (father of a multitude, cf. Gen.
xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish
nation: Mt. i. 1 sq.; xxii. 32; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. viii. 33;
Acts iii. 25; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., andelsewhere. He is ex-
tolled by the apostle Paul as a pattern of faith, Ro. iv. 1
sqq. 17 sqq.; Gal. iii. 6 (cf. Heb. xi. 8), on which account
all believers in Christ have a claim to the title sons or
posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Ro. iv. 11.
a-Buocos, in classic Greek an adj., -os, -ov, (fr. 6 Buaads
i. q. Bvdds), bottomless (so perhaps in Sap. x. 19), un-
bounded (mAovros &Bvocos, Aeschyl. Sept. (931) 950).
In the Scriptures 7 ¢8vccos (Sept. for DINN) se. xwpa, the
pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of ‘the
deep’ sea: Gen. i. 2; vii. 11; Deut. viii. 7; Sir. i. 3;
xvi. 18, ete.; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the
lowest parts of the earth: Ps. lxx. (1xxi.) 21 é« rav aBio-
gwy tis yjs, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) raprapov GBvooa
xdopuara, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 aBvoowr aveétyviaota
cAiuara, ibid. 59, 3 6 emBderav ev tais dBiacos, of God ;
[Act. Thom. 32 6 ryv aBvecor tov taprdpov oikav, of the
dragon]), both as the common receptacle of the dead,
Ro. x. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii.
31; Rev. ix. 1 sq. 11; xi. 7; xvii.8;xx.1,3. Among prof.
auth. used as a subst. only by Diog. Laért. 4, (5,) 27 karnA-
Ges eis pédawav Tdoutews GBvocov. Cf. Knapp, Scripta
var. Arg. p. 554 sq.; [J. G. Miiller, Philo’s Lehre von der
Weltschépfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed.s. v. Deep].*
“AyaBos(on the breathing see WH. Intr. § 408], -ov, 6,
the name of a Christian prophet, Agabus: Acts xi. 28 ;
xxi. 10. (Perhaps from 3}y to love [ef. B. D. s. v.].)*
ayaBoepyéw, -@; (fr. the unused EPI — equiv. to
épdw, épydfouat— and dyaGdv); to be dyaboepyds, benefi-
cent (towards the poor, the needy): 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V.
do good). Cf. dyafovpyéw. Found besides only in eccl.
writ., but in the sense to do well, act rightly.*
Gya8o-rordw, -@; 1 aor. inf. dyaforomoa; (fr. dyabo-
srawds) 5 1. to do good, do something which profits
others: Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. dyaddv moujoa; Lk. vi. 9]; to
show one’s self beneficent, Acts xiv. 17 Rec.; twd, to do
some one a favor, .o benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to
aun, Zeph. i. 12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). a
to do well, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to duaprave) ;
fii. 6,17; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, ex-
cept in a few of the later in an astrological sense, to
Furnish a good omen.)*
AyaSorota [WH -roria (see 1,¢)], -as, 9, @ course of
right action, well-doing: év ayaboro:ia, 1 Pet. iv. 19 i. q.
dyaOorowirres acting uprightly (cf. xii. Patr. Jos. § 18];
ayabos
if we read here with L Tr mrg. év dyaGonotiats we must
understand it of single acts of rectitude [cf. W. § 27, 3;
B. § 123, 2]. (In eccl. writ. dyaOor. denotes benefi-
cence.)*
&yalorotds, -dv, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14.
[Sir. xlii. 14; Plut. de Is. et Osir. § 42.]*
aya0ds, -7, -dv, (akin to ayaa to wonder at, think
highly of, dyaorés admirable, as explained by Plato,
Crat. p. 412. [al. al.; ef. Donaldson, New Crat. § 323]),
in general denotes “ perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac
facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione
nominis, officio ac lege” (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p.
134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. It
can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, quali-
ties and affections of the soul, deeds, times and sea-,
sons. To this general signif. can be traced back all
those senses which the word gathers fr. the connec-
tion in which it stands; 1. of a good constitution or
nature: yn, Lk. viii. 8; Sévdpov, Mt. vii. 18, in sense
equiv. to ‘fertile soil,’ ‘a fruitful tree,’ (Xen. oec. 16, 7
yn ayabn, .. - yj Kakn, an. 2, 4, 22 yapas moAXAns x. dyabys
ovons). In Lk. viii. 15 dya@y xapdia corresponds to the
fig. expression “good ground”, and denotes a soul in-
clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn sav-
ing truth and ready to bear the fruits (kapmovs dyaous,
Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. useful, salutary:
déors ayabn (joined to dHpnya réAeov) a gift which is
truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 17; dduatra dyaOa, Mt. vii.
11; évroAy ay. a commandment profitable to those who
keep it, Ro. vii. 12, ace. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to eds
TO cupdepor elonyoupern, hence the question in vs. 13: 76
ovv dayabov eyoi yéyove Oavatos; ay. pepis the ‘good
part,’ which insures salvation to him who chooses it,
Lk. x. 42; épyov ay. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, etc.) the
saving work of God, i. e. substantially, the Christian
life, due to divine efficiency, Phil. i. 6 [ef. the Comm.
ad loc.]; ets adyabdv for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28
(Sir. vii. 13; mavra trois evoeBeor eis ayabd, ... Tois duap-
Twdois eis Kaka, Sir. XXXix. 273 1d Kakdv... yiyvera eis
dyaOov, Theognis 162); good for, suited to something:
mpos oikodopny, Eph. iv. 29 [.cf. W. 363 (340)] (Xen.
mem.4,6,10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is
good, pleasant, agreeable, joyful, happy: jpépat ay. 1 Pet.
iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 Macc.
x. 55); Amis, 2 Th. ii. 16 (axapia éAnis,Tit. ii. 13);
avveidnots, a peaceful conscience, i. q. consciousness of
rectitude, Acts xxili. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. 15;
reconciled to God, vs. 21. 4. excellent, distinguished :
so ti ayaddv, Jn. i. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable :
Mt. xii. 34; xix. 16; Lk. vi. 45; Acts xi. 24; 1 Pet. iii.
11, etc.; movnpot x. dyadoi, Mt. v. 45; xxii. 10; dyad. kui
Sixatos, Lk. xxiii. 503; xapdia ayaby x. xadn, Lk. viii. 15
(see xadds, b.); fulfilling the duty or service demanded,
dovAe dyabé x. moré, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; upright, free
from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the
people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum-
mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18;
Lk. xviii. 19); dy. Onoavpds in Mt. xii. 835; Lk. vi. 45
ayaboupyéw
denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure
thoughts which are brought forth in speech; miotts dy.
the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10
(WH mrg. om.]; on dyad. epyov, ay. Epya, see Epyov.
In a narrower sense, benevolent, kind, generous: Mt.
xx. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; pveia, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii.
20) ; beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 4; 330, Jer. xxxiii. 11;
Ps. xxxiv. 9; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 “optimus i. e.
beneficentissimus”’), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is,
Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death;
for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does
so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received
favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker’s
Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de-
notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and
in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches: Lk. i.
53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4; Sap. vii. 11); ta dya6d cov
comforts and delights which thy wealth procured for
thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to kaka, as in Sir.
xi. 14); outward and inward good things, Gal. vi. 6, cf.
Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king-
dom: Ro. x. 15; ra péddovra ay. Heb. ix. 11; x. 1. 2.
what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro.
xii. 2; épyateo Oat 76 ay. Ro. ii. 10; Eph. iv. 28; mpaccew,
Ro. ix. 11; [2 Co. v.10]; Sianew, 1 Th. v. 153 pupet-
aOa, 3 Jn. 11; xoddaoOa ré ay. Ro. xii. 9; ti pe épwras
mept Tov ayabod, Mt. xix. 17 G L T Tr WH, where the
word expresses the general idea of right. Spec., what
is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs: in the
phrase dedkovos ets 76 dy. Ro. xiii 4; of rendering ser-
vice, Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21; 1d dy. cov the favor thou
conferrest, Philem. 14.
[It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the
Sept. that 110 good is predominantly [?]| rendered by xaaAds.
... The translator of Gen. uses a&ya6ds only in the neut.,
good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for the
other translators. ...In the Greek O. T., where of dSika:o: is
the technical designation of the pious, of adya@ol or 6 ayadds
does not occur in so general a sense. The avnp ayabds is
peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3); cf. besides
the solitary instance in 1 Kings ii.32. Thus even in the usage
of the O. T. we are reminded of Christ’s words, Mk. x. 18,
ovdels ayabds ei wh cis 6 Oeds. In the O. T. the term ‘right-
eous’ makes reference rather to a covenant and to one’s rela-
tion to a positive standard ; aya@és would express the abso-
lute idea of moral goodness” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u.
bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p.19. On
the comparison of aya0és see B. 27 (24).]
dyaSoupyéw, -@; Acts xiv.17L T Tr WH for R dya6o-
The contracted form is the rarer [ef. WH. App.
p- 145], see dyafoepyew; but cf. xaxodpyos, tepoupyéw-*
ayabwoivn, -ns, 7, [on its formation see W. 95 (90);
WH. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and eccl. writ.,
uprightness of heart and life, [A. V. goodness]: 2 Th. i.
11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindness, benefi-
eence); Ro. xv. 14; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench § lxiii.;
Ellic. and Bp. L¢htft. on Gal. 1. ¢.]*
GyadAdopat, see dyaAXido.
GyadXlacis, -ews, 7, (dyaAAdw), not used by prof. writ.
but often by the Sept.; exultation, extreme joy: Lk. i.
ny
ITOL@.
>
ayaTraw
14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv.
(xlv.) 8) oil of glddness with which persons were
anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer,
alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses
as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which
the Son of God has been exalted.*
ayaddudw, -6, and -doua, (but the act. is not used
exc. in Lk. i. 47 [myadXiaca], in Rev. xix. 7 [ayah-
Ac@pev] LT Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrg.
(aya\dare), cf. WH. App. p. 169]); 1 aor. jyadXaca-
pny, and (with a mid. signif.) myaddudOnv (Jn. v. 35;
Rec. nyaddudoOnv) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr.
dyd\Aopat to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45))), often in
Sept. (for 573, YW, j27, wiw), to exult, rejoice exceed-
ingly: Mt. v.12; Lk. x. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet.
i. 8; iv. 13; éy run, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in
which the joy originates [cf. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)];
but Jn. v. 35 means, ‘to rejoice while his light shone’
[i. e. in (the midst of) ete.]. emi ru, Lk. i. 47; foll. by
iva, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it
had been promised him that he should see. This divine
promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise; cf.
W. 339 (318); B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.*
d-yapos, -ov, (ydyos), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32;
used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and
elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said dvavdpos.*
dyavaKkréw, -; 1 aor. nyavaktnoa; (as mAeoverrew COMES
fr. mdoevéxrns, and this fr. md€ov and ¢yw, so through a
conjectural dyavaxrns fr. ayav and Gyouat to feel pain,
grieve, [al. al.]); to be indignant, moved with indigna-
tion: Mt.xxi.15; xxvi.8; Mk. x. 14; xiv.43; epi rwos
[ef. W. § 33 a.], Mt. xx.24; Mk. x. 413 foll. by ére, Lk.
xiii. 14. (From Hdt. down.) *
dyavakryots, -ews, 9, indignation: 2Co. vii.11. [(From
Plat. on.) ]*
dyardo, -; [impf. 7yarov] ; fut.dyarqow; 1 aor. nya-
moa; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. 7yamjxapuev 1 Jn. iv. 10 WH
txt.], ptep. 7yamnxos (2 Tim. iv. 8); Pass., [pres. dya-
napa]; pf. ptep. nyamnpevos; 1 fut. dyarnOnoopat; (akin
to dyapa [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see dyads, init.]); to love,
to be full of good-will and exhibit the same: Lk. vii. 47;
1Jn.iv.7sq.; | with ace. of the person, to have a pre-
ference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 43
sqq-; xix. 19; Lk. vii.5; Jn. xi.5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi.
11; xii. 15; Gal. v.14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and
elsewhere; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris-
tians towards one another; of the benevolence which
God, in providing salvation for men, has exhibited by
sending his Son to them and giving him up to death,
Ins aia) 16% tRo: wis 3792), Cha 16 ig In sive 1119s
[noteworthy is Jude 1 L T Tr WH trois év 66 rarpi
nyarnuevos ; see ev, 1.4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii.
12]; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human
salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20;
Eph. v. 2; of the love with which God regards Christ,
dn! 1.1355 [vi/20 amnesia 0G xv. 09 5.) E phi i. 16;
When used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word
ayarn
involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe-
dience, grateful recognition of benefits received: Mt. vi.
24; xxii. 37; Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. ii. 9; viii. 3; Jas. i. 12;
1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, and elsewhere. With an
ace. of the thing dyardw denotes to take pleasure in the
thing, prize it above other things, be unwilling to abandon it
or do without it: Sixavocvynv, Heb. i. 9 (i. e. steadfastly
to cleave to); ryv dd€av, Jn. xii. 43; tHv mpwroxabedpiar,
Lk. xi. 43; 7d oxdros and 76 das, Jn. iii. 19; Tov Kdopor,
1 Jn. ii. 15; rov viv aiéva, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which
last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advan-
tages and joys; ry uyny atrav, Rev. xii. 11; (any,
1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it
agreeable to himself) ; to welcome with desire, long for :
Ty emupavecav avtod, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap.i.1; vi. 13; Sir.
iv. 12, ete.; so of a person: nyamn@n, Sap. iv. 10, ef.
Grimm ad loc.). Concerning the unique proof of love
which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it
is said 7ydanoev adrovs, Jn. xiii. 1, ef. Liicke or Meyer
ad loc. [but al. take nya. here more comprehensively,
see Weiss’s Mey., Godet, Westcott, Keil]. The combi-
nation aydmnv dyaray tia occurs, when a relative inter-
venes, in Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. ii. 4, (2 8. xiii. 15 where
TO picos 6 euionoey adryy is contrasted; cf. Gen. xlix. 25
evA\dynoe oe <dAoyiav; Ps. Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude-
pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric. i. p. 966; Libri Apocr. etc.,
ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] dd&av fy édd€acev aitnv); cf. W.
§ 32, 2; [B. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 54.
On the difference betw. dyardw and durée, see piréo.
Cf. dyamn, 1 fin.
ayarn, -ns, 7, 2 purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt-
tenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago re-
stored ayarnoey in place of aydmns, ev in Plut. sympos.
quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof.
auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used dydmnats. “The Sept.
use dyamn for 1378, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8;
vil. 6; viii. 4, 6, 7; [‘‘ It is noticeable that the word first
makes its appearance as a current term in the Song
of Sol.;— certainly no undesigned evidence respect-
ing the idea which the Alex. translators had of the
love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl.
Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1,6; [2 S. xiii.
15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo
and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it.
Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it
occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and
Reyv., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter,
Jude” (Bretschn. Lex. s. v.); [Philo, deus immut. § 14].
In signification it follows the verb dyardw; conse-
quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene-
volence: Jn. xv. 18; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the
love of men to men; esp. of that love of Christians
towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by
their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the
soul or as expressed: Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8;
xiv: 1; 2 Co. ii. 45 Gal. -v. 63 Philem.5,:7 3 1.Timsi
5; Heb. vi. 10; x. 24; Jn. xiii. 35; 1 Jn. iv. 7; Rev.
ti. 4,19, etc. Of the love of men towards God: 4 dydmn
4 ayaTntos
Tod Oeov (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; In. v.
42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (rod marpés); iii. 17; iv. 12; v.3. Of
the love of God towards men: Ro. v. 8; viii. 39; 2 Co.
xiii. 13 (14). Of the love of God towards Christ: Jn. xv.
10; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men:
Jn. xv. 9 sq.; 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19.
In construction: dy. ets twa, 2 Co. ii. 8 [7]; Eph. i.
15 [L WH om. Tr mrg. br. rav aydmny]; rH e& ipar ev
jpiv i. e. love going forth from your soul and taking up
its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co.
viii, 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 329 (288)]; pe? spar
i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24; pe?
pov i. e. seen among us, 1 Jn.iv.17. Phrases: ¢yew
dydarny eis twa, 2 Co. ii. 4; Col. i. 4 [L T Tr, but WH
br.J; 1 Pet. iv. 8; dydrnv diddva to give a proof of
love, 1 Jn. iii. 1; ayaway aydrny twa, Jn. xvii. 26;
Eph. ii. 4 (v. in dyaraa, sub fin.) ; dy. tod mvedparos i. e.
enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 30; 6 vids ris
dyamns the Son who is the object of love, i. q. dyamnrés,
Col. i. 13 (W. 237 (222); [B. 162 (141)]); 6 Oeds ris
dy. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11; xémos ris ay.
troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th.
i. 35 ay. ths adnOeias love which embraces the truth,
2 Th. ii. 10; 6 Oeds ayarn é€oriv God is wholly love, his
nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8,16; piAnpa
dyamns a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual affec-
tion, 1 Pet. v. 14; dca rhv ay. that love may have oppor-
tunity of influencing thee (‘in order to give scope to the
power of love’ De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; é&
ayarn lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21;
on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element],
Eph. iv. 15 (where ev dy. is to be connected not with
GAnOevovres but with avénoaper), vs. 16; €& dyamns inilu-
enced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; kara d@ydzny in a manner
befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together
with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3;
v. 8, Col. i. 4 sq.; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words
ayamn, ayanar, cf. Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849,
p- 646 sq.; on the idea and nature of Christian love
see Kostlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. ete. p. 248 sqq.,
332 sqq.; Riickert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius,
Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq.; [Jteuss, Théol.
Chrét. livr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Plur. dyarat, -av,
agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu-
tual love which used to be held by Christians before the
celebration of the Lord’s supper, and at which the
poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par-
took in common with the rest of food provided at the
expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13
L Tr txt. WH mrg.), cf. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq.; Acts ii. 42,
46; xx. 7; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr. c. 3;
Cypr. ad Quirin. 3, 3; Drescher, De vet. christ. Agapis.
Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D.s. v.
Love-Feasts; Dict. of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Agapae; more
fully in McC. and S. s. v. Agape].
ayarntés, -7, -dv, (ayardw), beloved, esteemed, dear,
favorite; (opp. to éxOpés, Ro. xi. 28): 6 vids pou (rot
Gcot) 6 ayamnrés, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii. 1?
"Ayap
{here WH mrg. take 6 dy. absol., connecting it with
what follows]; xii. 18; xvii. 5; Mk. i. 11; ix. 7; Lk.
iii. 22; ix. 35 (where Lmrg. T Tr WH 6 éxdedeypevos) ;
2 Pet. 1. 17;:cf. Mk. xiis'6 ; “Ley xx13'y [cil Ascensio
Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25, ete.]. dya-
mntot Geov [ W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is applied
to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by
him to be worthy of eternal life: Ro. i. 7, cf. xi. 28 ;
eels i. 2" Cologne a2 et sept. Ps lixs ile) hes evar
(eviii.) 7; exxvi. (exxvii.) 2, dyamnroi cov and avrod, of
pious Israelites). But Christians, bound together by
mutual love, are dyarnroi also to one another (Philem.
16; 1 Tim. vi. 2); hence they are dignified with this
epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro.
xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct
(Ro. xii. 19; 1 Co. iv. 14; [Philem. 2 Rec.]; Heb. vi.
Peas tor) tobets in Ll; 2 Petes th Im. Th%
GLTTr WH], etc.). Generally foll. by the gen.; once
by the dat. dyam. nyiv, 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2;
B. 190 (165) ]. ayarnros év kvpio beloved in the fel-
lowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro.
xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In
class. Grk. fr. Hom. Il. 6, 401 on; cf. Cope on Aristot.
rhet. 1, 7, 41.]
"Ayap [WH "Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], 4, indecl.,
(in Joseph. ’Aydpa, -ns), 12) (flight), Hagar, a bond-
maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael
(Gen. ‘xvi.):° Gal. iv. 24,'[25 L txt. T om. Tr br-].
Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for-
merly dwelt among them, Gal. i. 17) called the rocky
Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to 740 (SS
i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred” to em-
ploys the name Hagar allegorically to denote the servile
sense of fear with which the Mosaic economy imbued
its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note *;
Bp. Lghtft.’s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal.
Bret
ayyapeto ; fut. dyyapevow; 1 aor. hyydpevoa; to em-
ploy a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word
of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but
adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. angariare). ”Ayyapou were
public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by appointment
of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses
ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from
one to another and so convey them the more speedily to
their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson’s
note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); cf. Gesenius, Thesaur.
s. v. N18; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanitek, Fremd-
-worter s. v. dyyapos]. These couriers had authority to
press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels,
even men they met, [cf. Joseph. antt. 13, 2,3]. Hence
dyyapeve twa denotes to compel one to go a journey,
to bear a burden, or to perform any other service:
Mt. v. 41 (doris oe dyyapetoet pidiov év i. e. whoever
shall compel thee to go one mile); xxvii. 32 (jyyapevoay
iva apn i. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.*
Gyyetov, -ov, Td, (i. q. TO ayyos), a vessel, receptacle:
Mt. xiii. 48 [R G L]}; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.) *
ayryeXos
GyyeAla, -as, 7, (ayyedos), @ message, announcement,
thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where
Ree. has émayyedia) [ef. Is. xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From
Hom. down. ]*
ayyéAhw ; [1 aor. ifyyeda, Jn. iv. 51 T (for annyy.
RGL Tr br.)]; (ayyedos) ; to announce: dyyéAdovea,
Jn. xx.18 LT Tr WH, for R G dmayyéAd. [From Hom.
down. Comp.: dv-, dm-, 6i-, €&-, ém-, mpo-en-, Kar-,
mpo-kat-, Tap-ayyéhAw. | *
ayyedos, -ov, 0, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is
sent Mt. xi. - 805 LES vii 24,27 5! ix: 52): Mn 12%
Jas. ii. 25. [Fr. Hom. down.] 2. In the Scriptures,
both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host
of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish
and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the
universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute
his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk.
xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts
vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to
make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.;
Aisi Fexxviiti23 Mite F.e20 ek NS) texov iio eine
xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions dyyedos
(angel, messenger of God, ys) and a@yyedou Kupiov or
iyy. Tov Oeov. They are subject not only to God but
also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i.
21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return
to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser-
vants and attendants: Mt. xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv.
81; xxv. 31; 2 Th. i. 7, ef. Jude 14. Single angels
have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv.
18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq.; Jn. v. 4 [R L}.
Respecting the adyyedos tis aBiooov, Rev. ix. 11, see
*ABaddav, 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men-
tioned in Mt. xviii. 10; Acts xii. 15. ‘The angels of the
churches’ in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 183 ili. 1, 7, 14 are not
their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits who exer-
cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them
that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or
of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their
angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into
the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Diisterdieck, [ Alford, ] on
Rev. i. 20, and Liicke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii.
p- 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Phil’p. p. 199 sq.].
dua Tovs ayyedous that she may show reverence for the
angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of
Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. & 6
ayyeAos in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained
neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in
heaven, nor of demons triumphed over by him in the
nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to
whom he appeared after his resurrection. This appel-
lation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily un-
derstood from the nature of the hymn from which the
passage epavepabn . . . ev 56€ seems to have been taken;
cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic.
ad loc.]. In Jn.i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beau-
tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent
the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge
v
ayyos
of his Messianic office, and the signal proofs to appear
in his history of a divine superintendence. Certain of
the angels have proved faithless to the trust committed
to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin,
Jude 6; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch e. vi. ete., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and
now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41; Rev. xii. 7, cf. 1 Co.
vi. 3 [yet on this last passage cf. Meyer; he and others
maintain that dyy. without an epithet or limitation never
in the N. T. signifies other than good angels]. Hence
@yyedos Satay is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote
a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See daipyor;
[ Soph. Lex. s. v. @yyedos; and for the literature on the
whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the
reff. there given add G. L. Hahn, Theol. des N. T., i.
pp. 260-384; Delitzsch in Riehm s. v. Engel; Kiibel
in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.].
dyyos, -eos, 7d, (plur. dyyn), i. q. dyyeiov q. v.: Mt.
xiii. 48 T Tr WH. (From Hom. down; [cf. Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 23].)*
dye, (properly impy. of aw), come! come now! used,
as it often is in the classics (W. 516 (481)), even when
more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.*
ayeAn, -ns, 7, (dyw to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.;
Mk. v. 11, 13; Lk. viii. 32 sq. (From Hom. down.) *
Gyeveaddynros, -ov, 6, (yeveadoyéw), of whose descent
there is no account (in the O. T.), [R. V. without gene-
alogy]: Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 py yeveadoyovpevos). No-
where found in prof. auth.*
a&yevis, -cos (-ovs), 6, 9, (yevos), Opp. to evyevns, of no
family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu-
tation; often used by prof. writ., also in the secondary
sense ignoble, cowardly, mean, base., In the N. T. only
in 1 Co. i. 28, ra dyevn Tod Kécpov i. e. those who among
men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj.
in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].*
dytd{o; 1 aor. pyiaca; Pass., [pres. dyca¢opar]; pf. nyi-
agua; 1 aor. nyiaoOnv; a word for which the Greeks use
ayi¢ew, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to wap, wp)
and eccl. writ.; to make adyov, render or declare sacred
or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render
or acknowledge to be venerable, to hallow: 16 dvopa tov
Geov, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxix. 23; Ezek. xx. 41;
Xxxvill. 23; Sir. xxxili. (xxxvi.) 4); [Lk. xi. 2]; rov
Xpioroy, 1 Pet. ili. 15 (RG Oe). Since the stamp
of sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to
whatever has any connection with God, dyad¢ew de-
notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to
God, to consecrate and so render inviolable; a. things
(nav mpawréroxoy, ta apoenxa, Deut. xv. 19; hyépay, Ex.
xx. 8; oikov, 2 Chr. vii. 16, etc.) : tov ypuodv, Mt. xxiii.
17; 1d d@por, vs. 19; oxedos, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons.
So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate
himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn.
xvii. 19; God is said éysaca Christ, i. e. to have selected
him for his service (cf. adopitew, Gal. i, 15) by having
committed to him the oflice of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf.
Jer. i. 5; Sir. xxxvi. 12 [e& airay jyiace, wat mpos adrov
fryer, of his selection of men for the priesthood]; xlv.
6 ay Los
4s) xlix. 7. Since only what is pure and without
blemish can be devoted and offered to God (Lev. xxii.
20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), dysafw signifies 3. to
purify, (awd tév axaBapordy is added in Lev. xvi. 19;
2S. xi. 4); and a. to cleanse externally (pos thy ris
gapkos ka@apétnta), to purify levitically: Heb. ix. 13;
1 Tim. iv. 5. b. to purify by expiation, free from the
guilt of sin: 1 Co. vi. 11; Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29;
xiii. 12; ii, 11 (equiv. to 195, Ex. xxix. 33, 36); cf.
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 340 sqq., [Eng. trans. ii. 68
sq.]. ¢. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn.
xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, ef. Jn. viii.
32); 1 Th. v. 23; 1 Co. i. 2 (€v Xptord “Ingod in the
fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 (é
mvevpate dyio imbued with the Holy Spirit, the divine
source of holiness); Jude 1 (L T Tr WH jyamnpévos
fiqusvol)® (ey, scxar ade In general, Christians are
called nyacpevoe [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who,
freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been
brought near to God by their faith and sanctity, Acts
xx. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 dyafeoOa is used in
a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians
themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with-
drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and
brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit dis-
playing itself among Christians; cf. Neander ad loc.*
dytacpds, -ov, 6, a word used only by bibl. and eccl.
writ. (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. Hal. 1, 21, dyopds is
the more correct reading), signifying 1. consecration,
purification, rb dytdfew. 2. the effect of consecration:
sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to
whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7;
Ro. vi. 19, 22, 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; dysaopos
mvevparos sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th.
ii. 13; 1 Pet.i. 2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq.
(It is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.]; Ezek.
xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11]; Sir. vii. 31, ete.) [On its use in
the N. T. ef. Ellic. on 1 Th. iv. 3; iii. 13.]*
dytos, -a, -ov, (fr. rd dyos religious awe, reverence ;
df, &Coua, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents,
{Curtius § 118]), rare in prof. auth.; very frequent in
the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for wimp; —-1._properly
reverend, worthy of veneration: rd dvopa Tov beod, Lk. i.
49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev.
iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, ete.), i. q. €vdofos. Hence used a. of
things which on account of some connection with God
possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as
places sacred to God which are not to be profaned,
Acts vii. 33; rémos dyos the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on
which pass. see BdeAvypa, c.); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the
holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29; ii. 18; 1d d@ysov and
ra aya [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf.
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec. that part of
the temple or tabernacle which is called ‘the holy
place’ (WIpD, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2
[here Rec* reads ayia]; dysa dyiwy [ W. 246 (231), cf. Ex.
xxix. 87; xxx. 10, etc.] the most hallowed portion of
the temple, ‘the holy of holies,’ (Ex. xxvi. 33 [cf. Joseph.
ary vos
antt. 3, 6, 4]), Heb. ix. 3, in ref. to which the simple
ra Gy is also used: Heb. ix. 8, 25; x. 19; xiii. 11;
fic. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8,12; x. 19; dyia mods
Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5;
xxvii. 53; Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 2; xxii. 19, (1s. xlvili. 2;
Neh. xi. 1,18 [Compl.], etc.) ; 1d dpos rd &yov, because
Christ’s transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18;
4 (Gc00) ayia Sia6qjxn i. e. which is the more sacred be-
cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72; 1rd dyov, that
worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35; the
blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6; éywrarn miotis, faith
(quae credituri.e.the object of faith) which came from
God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude
20; in the same sense dyia évroAn, 2 Pet. ii. 21; KAnous
dyia, because it is the invitation of God and claims us
as his, 2 Tim. i. 9; dysat ypadai (ra BiBAia ra Gya,
1 Mace. xii. 9), which came from God and contain his
words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God
employs; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5; angels,
1 Th. iii. 13 ; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec.]; Rev. xiv. 10; Jude
14; prophets, Acts iii. 21; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (oi)
dyiot (rod) Oeod avOpwror, 2 Pet. i. 21 [R GL Tr txt.];
worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety,
Mt. xxvii. 52; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God,
to be, as it were, exclusively his; foll. by a gen. or
dat.: r@ xupio, Lk. ii. 23; tod Geod (i. q. exAexTos Tov
6cov) of Christ, Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34, and acc. to the true
reading in Jn. vi. 69, cf. x. 36; he is called also 6 &ytos
mais Tov Geov, Acts iv. 80, and simply 6 dyios, 1 Jn. ii.
20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the
title of dy:or, because God selected them from the other
nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in
his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22; 2 Ksdr.
viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T.
transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se-
lected éx rod xéopov (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the
influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered,
through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom
of God: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xix. 6), cf. vs. 5; Acts ix. 13,
Bo) Al xxvis hO GRO! lees Vill. 203. eal. Lospxva. 15):
Co. vi.1, 2) Philsiv. 21 sq. Col. 1.12; Heb. vi.210s
Jude 3; Rev. v. 8, ete.; [ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints].
3. of sacrifices and offerings; prepared for God with
solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to axa@apros) : 1 Co. vii.
14, (cf. Eph. v. 3); connected with dywpos, Eph. i. 4 ;
v. 27; Col. i. 22; dmapy7, Ro. xi. 16; Ovoia, Ro. xii. 1.
Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, upright,
holy: 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2; xi. 44); 1 Co. vii. 34;
Sixatos x. dytos, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20; dytos x.
dixatos, of Christ, Acts ili. 14; distinctively of him, Rev.
iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn.
xvii. 11; Gytae dvacrpodpai, 2 Pet. iii. 11; vopos and
evroAn, i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii.
12; piAnua, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love,
iin. We, Jose 0 ©o.xwi.. 20.2) 2,Cos xill, 12" Ro. xvint6.
On the phrase 16 Gytoy mvevpa and 76 mvedpa TO Gyiov,
see mvedpa, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes,
in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq.; [Baudissin,
ayvita
Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq.;
Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq.; esp.] Cremer,
Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans. of 2d ed. p. 34
sqq:; Oehler in Herzog xix. 618 sqq.; Zezschwitz, Pro
fangriicitit u.s. w. p. 15 sqq.; Trench § Ixxxviii.; Camp-
bell, Dissertations, diss. vi., pt. iv. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181].
dytorns, -nTos, 7, sanctity, in a moral sense; holiness:
2Co.i.12 L T Tr WH; Heb. xii. 10. (Besides only
in 2 Mace. xv. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of thie
termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) *
dywwovvy [on the w see reff. in dyaOwovvn, init.], -ns, 9,
a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 (64)]; 1. (God’s
incomparable) majesty, (joined to peyadompemera, Ps. xev.
(xevi.) 6, cf. exliv. (exlv.) 5): mvedpa dywovrns a spirit
to which belongs dywovrn, not equiv. to mvedpa aytoy,
but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted
with his odpé, Ro. i. 4; cf. Riickert ad loc., and Zeller
in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf.
Mey. ad loc.; Gifford (in the Speaker’s Com.). Most
commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard
the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness].
2. moral purity: 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1.*
GyKadn, -ns, 7, (ayKn, aykas [fr. r. ak to bend, curve,
ef. Lat. uncus, angulus, Eng. angle, ete.; cf. Curtius § 1;
Vaniéek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm:
deEacOa eis tas dyxadas, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also
said ayxas AaBeiv, ev adyxadats Trepipepery, etc., see évay-
kaXi¢oua. [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.)] *
dykirtpov, -ov, To, (fr. an unused dyxi¢@ to angle [see
the preceding word]), a fish-hook: Mt. xvii. 27.*
dykvpa, -as, 7, [see ayxadn], an anchor — [ancient an-
chors resembled modern in form: were of iron, provided
with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often
but by no means always without flukes ; see Roschach in
Daremberg and Saglio’s Dict. des Antiq. (1873) p. 267;
Guhl and Koner p. 258]: pimrew to cast (Lat. jacere),
Acts xxvii. 29 ; exreivewv, vs. 30; mepracpetv, vs.40. ‘Fig-
uratively, any stay or safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19;
Eur. Hee. 78 (80); Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).*
dyvadhos, -ov, 6, 7, (yvarrw to dress or full cloth, cf.
appados), unmilled, unfulled, undressed : Mt. ix. 16; Mk.
ii. 21. [Cf. Moeris s. v. devarrov; Thom. Mag. p. 12, 14.]*
dyvela [WH dyvia (see I, ¢)], -as, 7, (dyvevw), purity,
sinlessness of life: 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite,
Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] *
dyvitw; 1 aor. iyuoa; pf. ptep. act. yikes; pass.
ryviopevos; 1 aor. pass. nyvicOnv [W. 252 (237) ]; (dyvos);
to purify ; 1. ceremonially: éuavrov, Jo. xi. 55 (to
cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means
of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices) ; the pass.
has a reflexive force, to take upon one’s self a purifica-
tion, Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (130, Num. vi. 3), and
is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon them-
selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine
and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement
and from shaving the head [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Nazarite].
2. morally: ras xapdias, Jas. iv. 8; ras Wuyds, 1 Pet. is
22; éavrov, 1 Jn. iii. 8. (Soph., Eur., Plut., al.)*
aryvic 0s
dyvurpss, -od, 6, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. 3,
22, i. p.469, 13; Plut. de defect. orac. 15]: Acts xxi. 26
(equiv. to 143, Num. vi. 5), Naziritic; see éyvigo, 1.*
Gyvoew (TNO [cf. ywaoke]), -d, [impv. dyvoeira 1 Co.
xiv. 38 R G Tr txt. WH mrg.]; impf. 7yvoovv; 1 aor.
nyvonoa; [Pass., pres. dyvoodpa, ptep. ayvoovpevos; fr.
Hom. down]; a. to be ignorant, not to know: absol.,
1 Tim. i. 13; rwa, ri, Acts xiii. 27; xvii. 23; Ro. x. 3;
év tux (as in [ Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii.
p- 717 [but the reading nyvoovy eri raat rovTos is NOW
given here; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant. ete., ed.
Sinker, Cambr. 1869]), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to
resolve the expression thus: év rovrous, d dyvoovct Bac-
prpoovres, W. 629 (584), [ef. B. 287 (246) |; foll. by azz,
Ro. ii. 4; vi. 3; vii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antece-
dent clause dri «rd. is to be supplied again); ov é€Aw
ipas dyvoeiv, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic ]}
scitote: foll. by an ace. of the obj., Ro. xi. 25; tsep ruvos,
Ort, 2 Co. i. 8; wept twos, 1 Co. xii. 1; 1 Th. iv. 13; foll.
by ort, Ro. i. 18; 1 Co. x. 1; in the pass. dyvoetra: ‘he
is not known’ i. e. ace. to the context ‘he is disregarded,’
1 Co. xiv. 38 L T Tr mrg. WH txt. ; dyvoovpevor (opp.
to emtywwokopevor) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9;
dyvoovpevos Tux unknown to one, Gal. i. 22; ov« dyvoeiv
to know very well, ri, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10). b. not
to understand : ri, Mk. ix. 32; Lk. ix. 45. c. to err, sin
through mistake, spoken mildly of those who are not
high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v.15; 2 Mace.
xi. 31): Heb. v. 2, on which see Delitzsch.*
&yvonpa, -ros, To, a sin, (strictly, that committed through
ignorance or thoughtlessness [ A. V. error]): Heb. ix. 7
(1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. xxiii. 2); ef. dyvo€a, c.
[and Trench § lxvi. ].*
dyvora, -as, 7, (fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge,
ignorance, esp. of divine things: Acts xvii. 30; 1 Pet.
i. 14; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv.
22); of moral blindness, Acts iii. 17. [Cf. dyvoéw.]*
adyvés, -7, -dv, (dCouat, see ayios) ; 1. exciting rever-
ence, venerable, sacred : wip Kai 7 o7odds, 2 Mace. xiii.
8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Kur. Or. 1604 dyvds yap
eipt xEtpas, GAN ov tas dpevas, Hipp. 316 sq. dyvas...
xeipas aiwatos gépets, xeipes pev ayvai, gdpyy 8 exe
Hiacpa); a. pure from carnality, chaste, modest: ‘Tit.
ii. 5; mapOévos an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace.
xvill. 7). b. pure from every fault, immaculate: 2 Co.
vii. 21 > "Phils iv. S* 1Pimev, 22s"0Pet i. 2s 1 dhe.
3 (of God [yet cf. ékeivos 1 b.]); Jas. iii. 17. (From Hom.
down.) (Cf. reff. s. v. dyios, fin. ; Weste. on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]*
ayvorns, -7TOos, 7, [ayvos], purity, uprightness of life :
2 Co. vi. 6; in 2 Co. xi. 3 some critical authorities
add kat trys dyvornros after dm\ornros (so L Tr txt., but
Tr mrg. WH br.), others read ris dyvorntos Kat before
amor. Found once in prof. auth., see Boeckh, Corp.
Inserr.i. p.583 no. 1133 1. 15: Sccavoodyns evexev kai &yvd-
TTOos.*
dyvas, adv., purely, with sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).*
ayvwola, -as, 7, (yvaots), want of knowledge, igno-
rance: 1 Pet. ii. 15; 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1).*
8 arypavréa
&-yvworos, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], unknown: Acts xvii.
23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Altar].*
Gyop4, -as, 7, (dyelpe, pf. iyopa, to collect), [fr. Hom.
down | ; 1. any collection of men, congregation, as-
sembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the
N. T. the forum or public place,— where trials are held,
Acts xvi. 19; and the citizens resort, Acts xvii. 17; and
commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (az’ dyopas
sc. eMMovres on returning from the market if they have
not washed themselves they eat not; W. § 66, 2 d. note);
accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or vil-
lage: Mt. xi. 16, (LE. vii. 32); Mk. vi. 56; Mt. xx. 3;
xxii. 7; Mk. xii. 38; [Lk. xi. 43]; xx. 46. [See B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Market. ]*
ayopatw ; [impf. nydpafov ; fut. dyopdow); 1 aor. jyo-
paca; Pass., pf. ptep. nyopacpévos; 1 20K. fyyopacénv;
(ayopa); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy
(properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.];
used a. literally: absol. Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15;
Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; i, Mt. xiii. 44, 46;
xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with mapa
and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept.,
Polyb.]; éx and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen.
of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said
to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it
were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly
understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9, 10]; 1 Co. vii.
23 (with gen. of price added; see rij, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1.
He is also said to have bought them for God év7@
aipate avtov, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they,
too, are spoken of as purchased azo ris ys, Rev. xiv. 3,
and amo tev avOparer, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn
from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked)
men. But adyopdg{w does not mean redeem (eEayopata),
—as is commonly said. [Comp.: é&-ayopago. |
&yopatos (rarely -aia), -atov, (dyopa), relating to the
market-place; 1. frequenting the market-place, (either
transacting business, as the xamndou, or) sauntering idly,
(Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus, Germ. Pflastertreter,
our loafer): Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 ¢. ayopatot kat
gaidor, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually
transacted in the market-place: d@yopaior (sc. nuépar [W.
590 (549)] or ovvodor [Mey. et al.]) ayovra, judicial
days or assemblies, [A. V. mrg. court-days], Acts xix.
38 (ras dyopaious moveic bat, Strabo'13, p. 932), but many
think we ought to read adydpator here, so G L cf. W.
53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc.; Lipsius, Gram.
Untersuch. p. 26;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5; Gottling
p- 297; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].*
Gypa, -as, 7, [ayo]; 1. acatching, hunting: Lk. v. 4.
2. the thing caught: 7 @ypa rév ixver ‘the catch or haul
of fish’ i. e. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.*
&ypdpparos, -ov, [ypaupal], illiterate, without learning:
Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish
schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 ypappara py peuabnxas).*
dyp-avdew, -w; 10 be an aypavios (dypos, avdAn), i. &
to live in the fields, be under the open sky, even by night:
Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a.; Plut. Num. 4).*
aypevw
Gypevw: 1 aor. iypevoa; (aypa); to catch (properly,
wild animals, fishes): fig., Mk. xii. 13 iva adrov aypevdowor
Acy@ in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re-
mark elicited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20.
(In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of
love, captivate; cf. mayevo, Mt. xxii. 15; caynveva,
Leian. Tim. 25.) *
dypt-€atos, -ov, (dyptos and €Aaos or edaia, like dypiap-
medos); 1. of or belonging to the oleaster, or wild olive,
(oxvtadnv dypehaoy, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [cf. Lob. Para-
lip. p. 376]); spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2.) As
subst. dyptedaos the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to
kaddedavos [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 6]), also called by the
Greeks xorwvos, Ro. xi. 24; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii.
495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive, and Tristram, Nat.
Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377,
‘the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster
or Oil-tree ’. |*
Gyptos, -a,-ov, (dypds), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. living
or growing in the fields or the woods, used of animals in
a state of nature, and of plants which grow without
culture: pede ayptov wild honey, either that which is
deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the
bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [ef. vs. 26]), ete., or more cor-
rectly that which distils from certain trees, and is gath-
ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin.
speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says gverat map’
a’rois wéAt TOAD TO KaAOUpEVOY AypLoV, @ XparTar TOTS
pe? vOaros; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer s. v. dxpis): Mt. iii.
4; Mk. i. 6. 2. fierce, untamed: xvpata Oaddoons,
Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).*
*Ayplirras, -a (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. 60
(59); B. 20 (18)), 6, see “Hpwdns, (3 and) 4.
dypés, -od, 6, [fr. aya; prop. a drove or driving-place,
then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager, Germ. Acker, Eng. acre;
Fick, Pt.i. p. 8]; a. a field, thecountry: Mt. vi. 28;
xxiv. 18, Lk.xv.15; [Mk.xi.8 TTr WH], ete. b.
i. q. xwpiov, a piece of land, bit of tillage: Actsiv. 37; Mk.
x. 29; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. Cc. of aypoi the farms,
country-seats, neighboring hamlets: Mk. v. 14 (opp. to
mods); vi. 36; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Hom. on.)]
GypuTVew, -@; (aypumvos equiv. to avmvos); to be sleep-
less, keep awake, watch, (i. q. ypnyopéw [see below]) ;
[fr. Theognis down]; trop. to be circumspect, attentive,
ready: Mk. xiii. 33; Lk. xxi. 36; es rt, to be intent
upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18; imép tuvos, to exercise con-
stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from
shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [SYN. dypumvety, ypnyo-
petv, vnpecv: “dypumvew may be taken to express sim-
ply ... absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of
it when due to nature, and thence a wakeful frame of
mind as opposed to listlessness; while ypryopeiy (the
offspring of éeypjyopa) represents a waking state as
the effect of some arousing effort... i.e. a more stir-
ring image than the former. The group of synonyms
is completed by yndecy, which signifies a state untouched
by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence,
one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or
”
ayo
bewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for warinesg
(cf. vape kai péeuvao’ amoreiv) against spiritual dangers
and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, ete.” Green, Crit. Notes
on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]*
dyputvia, -as, 7, sleeplessness, watching: 2 Co. vi. 5;
xi. 27. [From Hdt. down.]*
dy; impf. 7yov; fut. do; 2 aor. #yayor, inf. qyayeiv,
(more rarely 1 aor. 7a, in émayw 2 Pet. ii. 5); Pass.,
pres. dyonac; impf. jyduny; 1 aor. #yOnv; 1 fut. ax67-
copa; [fr. Hom. down]; to drive, lead. 1. properly
[A. V. ordinarily, to bring]; a. to lead by laying
hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti-
nation: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7; Lk. xix. 35; Mk. xi.
7 (T Tr WH gépovow) ; [Lk. xix. 80]; riva foll. by eis
with acc. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2.¢.]; x.
34; (qyayov k. elonyayoy eis, Lk. xxii. 54); Jn. xviii. 23;
Cts Vi. 19 ix, Docmyil. > (eG he sx Sh RRL, p24
Rec. ; xxiii. 10, 31; éi with acc., Acts xvii. 19; éws,
Lk. iv. 29; mpds twa, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii.
40; Acts ix. 27; Jn. viii. 3[Rec.]. _ b. to lead by accom-
panying to (into) any place: eis, Acts xi. 26 (25); ws,
Acts xvii. 15; spés teva, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43); ix.
13; Acts xxiii. 18; foll. by dat. of pers. to whom, Acts
xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B.
284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 d@yew adrodvs ait). c. to
lead with one’s self, attach to one’s self as an attendant:
twa, 2 Tim. iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 14, (Joseph. antt. 10, 9, 6
arnpev eis Thy Atyumtov dywy Kal ‘Tepeniay). Some refer
Acts xxi. 16 to this head, resolving it dyovres Mvdcwva
map © &evcOapev, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as
above. d. to conduct, bring: twa, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn.
vil. 45,5; [xix. 4,13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 375 xx.
12; xxv. 6, 23; w@dov, Mk. xi. 2 (where T Tr WH
gépere) ; [Lk. xix. 30, see a. above]; tiva ru or ri Tim,
Mt. xxi. 2; Acts xiii. 23 G L T Tr WH. e. to lead
away, to a court of justice, magistrate, etc.: simply,
Mk. xiii. 11; [Acts xxv. 17]; émi with acc., Mt. x. 18;
Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH dmayopévovs) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1];
Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic); [mpds with
ace., Jn. xviii. 13 L T Tr WH]; to punishment: simply
(2 Mace. vi. 29; vii. 18, ete.), Jn. xix. 16 Grsb. (R kat
annyayov, which L T Tr WH have expunged); with
telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 32; [foll. by ta, Mk. xv. 20 Lchm.];
émi aogayny, Acts viii. 32, (emt Oavarm, Xen. mem. 4, 4,
3)s7an.) 1,16; 310)). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, guide,
direct: Jn. x. 163 eis peravoray, Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead
through, conduct, to something, become the author of
good or of evil to some one: els dd€av, Heb. ii. 10, (eis
[al. emi] xadoxdyabiay, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14; eis Sovdeiay,
Dem. p. 213, 28). c. to move, impel, of forces and
influences affecting the mind: Lk. iv. 1 (where read é»
7H €pnue [with L txt. T Tr WH]); mvedpare Geod dyeoOar,
Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; éemOvpias, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim-
ply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2— unless im-
pelled by Satan’s influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20;
Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) sq.]. 3. to pass a day,
keep or celebrate a feast, etc. : tpitny nuépav aye sc. 6
"Ispand, Lk. xxiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply airs
ayoyn
ar 6 “Inaois; still others take dye: as impers., one passes,
Vulg. tertia dies est; see B.134 (118)]; yeveriav dyope-
vov, Mt. xiv.6 RG; dyopaio: (q. v. 2), Acts xix. 38; often
in the O. T. Apocr. (cf. Wahl, Clavis Apocr. s. v. ayo,
3), in Hdt. and Attic writ. 4. intrans. to go, depart,
(W. § 38, 1, p. 251 (236); [B. 144 (126)]): dyoper let
us go, Mt. xxvi. 46; Mk. xiv. 42; Jn. xiv. 31; mpds
ria, Jn. xi. 15; eis with ace. of place, Mk. i. 38; Jn.
xi. 7, (Epict. diss. 3, 22,55 @yopev émt rov avOuraroyv) ;
{foll. by iva, Jn. xi. 16. COoMP.: av, én-av-, an-, cur-arr-,
di-, eio-, map-ero-, €&-, ém-, KAT-, LET-, TAp-, TEpt-, MPO-, Mpoo-,
ovr, ém-our-, in-dyw. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] *
aywyt, -7s, 7, (fr. dye, like edwdy fr. 0); 1. prop-
erly,aleading. 2. figuratively, a. trans. a conduct-
ing, training, education, discipline. b. intrans. the life
led, way or course of life (a use which arose from the
fuller expression dywyi Tod Biov, in Polyb. 4, 74, 1. 4; cf.
Germ. Lebensfiihrung): 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. V. conduct],
(Esth. ii. 20; 2 Mace. iv. 16; 9 €v Xptoré aywyn, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; ayv) dywyn, ibid. 48, 1). Often in
prof. auth. in all these senses.*
ayav, -Gvos, 6, (ayo); 1. a place of assembly (Hom.
Il. 7, 298; 18,376); spec. the place in which the Greeks
assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian,
the Olympian) ; hence 2. a contest, of athletes, run-
ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase
(used by the Greeks, see rpéxyo, b.) rpexew tov ayava,
Heb. xii. 1, that is to say ‘ Amid all hindrances let us
exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of
perfection set before the followers of Christ’; any
struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing
in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the
gospel: 1 Th. ii. 2; Phil. i. 30; 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim.
LVe te: b. intense solicitude, anxiety: mepi twos, Col.
ii. 1 [ef. Eur. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical
use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf.
Grimm on Sap. iv. 1; [Howson, Metaphors of St. Paul,
Essay iv.; Conyb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St.
Paul, ch. xx.; Me. and S. iii. 733° sq.; BB.DD. s. v.
Games ].*
a&ywvla, -as, 1); 1. i. q. dyov, which see. 2. It is
often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 #6
Pikinros ev PdBo Kai woAAn dywvia) down, of severe
mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish: Lk.
‘xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; (2 Mace. iii. 14,
16; xv.19; Joseph. antt. 11,8, 4 6 dpytepeds jv ev dywvia
cai deer). [Cf Pield, Otium Norv. iii. on Lk. 1. ¢.]*
ayovitopar; impf. nyo dunv; pf. yyovicpat; a depon.
mid. verb [cf. W. 260 (244)]; (dyav) ; 1. to enter a
contest; contend in the gymnastic games: 1 Co. ix. 25.
2. univ. to contend with adversaries, fight: foll. by iva
pn, Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with
difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: Col.
1 295° Dimeivs 10°C LP Trstxt: WEP txt:; for” Rec.
évediCopeOa) ; aywvifoua dyava (often used by the
Greeks also, esp. the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv.
ae 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain
something ; foll. by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24; dr€p twos év rais
10
ader pos
mpocevxais, wa, Col. iv. 12. [CoMP.: ayr-, én-, xat-,
ovv-ayeviCouat. |*
*ASan, indecl. prop. name (but in Joseph. * Adapos, -ov),
DIN (i. e. acc. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62
ed. Mang., ynivos ; acc. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 ynyevjs;
acc. to Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 2 ruppds, with which Gesenius
agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first
man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 38;
Ro. v.14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq.; Jude 14.
Tn accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the
former Adam (WNIT DT), the first man, the author
of ‘all our woe,’ and the latter Adam (}}7987 078),
the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ
is called 6 €ryaros ’Adap (see éryxaros, 1) and contrasted
with 6 mp@ros dvOpwmos; Ro. v. 14 6 pedX@v se. ’Adap.
[2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WH mrg.
(cf. "Adpeiv). |*
GSamavos, -ov, (Samdvn), without expense, requiring no
outlay: 1 Co. ix. 18 (a ddanavoy 6jow 7rd evayyedtov
‘that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous’).*
*AS8 or "AddSei T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and
s. v. et, ¢], 6, the indecl. prop. name of one of the ances-
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*
adeAq, -Hs, 7, (see adeAdos), [fr. Aeschy]l. down], sis-
ter; 1. a full, own sister (i.e. by birth): Mt. xix.
29; Lk. x. 39 sq.; dn. xi. 1, 3,5; xix. 25> Ro. xyiio,
etc.; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt.
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see adeAdds, 1. 2. one connected
by the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; ix. 5;
Philem. 2 LT Tr WH; Jas. ii. 15; with a subj. gen., a
Christian woman especially dear to one, Ro. xvi. 1.
&SeAdds, -od, 6, (fr. a copulative and deAdis, from the
same womb; cf. dyaotwp), [fr. Hom. down]; l. a
brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only
of the same father or the same mother): Mt. i. 2; iv. 18,
and often. That ‘the brethren of Jesus,’ Mt. xii. 46, 47
[but WH only in mrg.]; xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 3 (in the
last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq.; Jn. ii.
1 QeM vate (Sis) ACtS in 4G alesis O ele COnmixein mae
neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary
(which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [cf.
Thilo, Cod. Apocr. N. T. i. 362 sq.]), nor cousins, the
children of Alpheus or Cleophas [i. e. Clopas] and Mary
a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion
among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Au-
gustine [cf. Bp. Lehtft. Com. on Gal., diss. ii.]), accord-
ing to that use of language by which adeAdds like the
Hebr. ns denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen.
xiv. 16)1 S. ax. 29 °K. Se. is 1 Chima, 22.
ete.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear prin-
cipally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G]; Lk. ii. 7— where,
had Mary borne no other children after Jesus, instead
of vidy mpwrdroKov, the expression vidy povoyevn would
have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, cf. Jn. vii. 5,
where the Lord’s brethren are distinguished from the
apostles. See further on this point under "Idx@Bos, 3.
[Cf. B. D. s. v. Brother; Andrews, Life of our Lord,
pp- 104-116; Bib. Sacr. for 1864, pp. 855-869; for 1869
aderAporns
pp- 745-758; Laurent, N. T. Studien pp. 153-193; Mc-
Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.] 2. according to a
Hebr. use of mx (Ex. ii. 11; iv. 18, etc.), hardly to be
met with in prof. auth., having the same national ances-
tor, belonging to the same people, countryman; so the
Jews (as the onéppa ABpadp, viot Iapanh, cf. Acts xiii.
26; [in Deut. xv. 3 opp. to 6 a\Xérptos, cf. xvii. 15 ;
xv. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called adeAgoi:
Mt. v. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15); vii. 23; xxii.
5; xxviii. 15, 21; Ro. ix. 3; in address, Acts ii. 29;
iii. 17; xxiii. 1; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix.
17 the word nx is used interchangeably with jy} (but,
as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of Jsraelites), so in the
sayings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 245; vii. 3 sqq., ddeAds is
‘used for 6 mAnoiov to denote (as appears from Lk. x.
29 sqq.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same
father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de-
scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26) ;
cf. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to
another by the bond of affection; so most frequently of
Christians, constituting as it were but a single family:
Mt. xxiii. 8; Jn. xxi. 23; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.]; ix.
S0eexi01; Galia2s) 1 Cos ve 1b} Philkvis 14, ete-; in
courteous address, Ro. i. 13; vii. 1; 1 Co. i. 10; 1 Jn.
ii. 7 Rec., and often elsewhere ; yet in the phraseology
of John it has reference to the new life unto which men
are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father,
even God: 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq.; iii. 10, 14, ete., cf. v. 1.
5. an associate in employment or office: 1 Co. i. 1;
2Co. i. 1; ii. 13(12); Eph. vi. 21; Col. i. 1. 6. brethren
of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood; see 1
above. b. all men: Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.]; Heb. ii.
11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] c. apostles: Mt.
Xxvilil. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are
destined to be exalted to the same heavenly d0€a (q. v.
III. 4b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29.
&SeAhorys, -yTos, 7, brotherhood; the abstract for the
concrete, a band of brothers i.e. of Christians, Chris-
tian brethren: 1 Pet. ii. 17; v.9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17,
the connection of allied nations; 4 Mace. ix. 23; x. 3,
the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed.
Reiske]; often in eccl. writ.) *
G-5ndos, -ov, (Ojos), not manifest: Lk. xi. 44; indis-
tinct, uncertain, obscure: gavn, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk.
auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. d7Aos,fin.; Schmidt ch. 130.]*
GSnASTHs, -nTOs, 7, Uncertainty: 1 Tim. vi. 17 mAovrov
adndornre equiv. to mAovtT@ ddnr@, cf. W. § 34, 3a.
[Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]*
GShAws, adv., uncertainly: 1 Co. ix. 26 ott tpéexa,
@s ovk addndos i.e. not uncertain whither; cf. Mey.
ad loc. [(Thuc., al.)]*
GSnpovew, -@; (fr. the unused dédjyor, and this fr. a
priv. and djpos; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at
home, cf. Germ. unheimisch, unheimlich; cf. Bttm. Lexil.
ii. 136 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol.
Proleg. p. 238, cf. p. 160) et al. connect it with adjpor,
adjoac; see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 26]); to be troubled,
distressed: Mt. xxvi. 87; Mk. xiv. 33; Phil. ii. 26.
na
adixéw
(Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 3 adnpovnoa ras yvyas, and often in
prof. auth.) *
*ASns, ddns, -ov, 6, (for the older ’Aidns, which Hom.
uses, and this fr. a priv. and i8eiv, not to be seen, [cf. Lob.
Path. Element. ii. 6 sq.]); in the classics 1. a prop.
name, Hades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions; so in
Hom.always. 2. an appellative, Orcus, the nether world,
the realm of the dead (cf. Theocr. idyll. 2,159 schol. ryv rod
Gdov xpover mUAnY: TovT éatw drobaveira}|. In the Sept.
the Hebr. Dinw is almost always rendered by this word
(once by 6avaros, 2 S. xxii. 6); it denotes, therefore, in
bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x.
21) and dismal place (but cf. yéevva and mapadeios) in
the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8; Is. lvii. 9;
Am. ix. 2, ete.; see @Bvocos), the common receptacle
of disembodied spirits: Lk. xvi. 23; eis a8ovu sc. dopov,
Acts ii. 27, 31, acc. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W.
592 (550) [B. 171 (149)]; (but L T Tr WH in vs. 27
and T WH in both verses read eis ddnv; so Sept. Ps. xv.
(xvi.) 10); mvAae adov, Mt. xvi. 18 (avAwpoi adov, Job
XXXVili. 17; see mUAn); KAeis Tov ddov, Rev. i. 18;
Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L
T Tr WH read @avare for R G adn [cf. Acts ii. 24 Tr
mrg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx.13 sq. Metaph. éws adov [xara-
Baivew or] xataBiBatecGac to [go or] be thrust down
into the depth of misery and disgrace: Mt. xi. 23 [here
L Tr WH xaraBaivewv]; Lk. x. 15 [here Tr mrg. WH txt.
kataBaivew]. [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. v.”Acdns
in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades
cf. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii.
pp- 261-406; on the doctrinal significance of the word
see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rev.
pp: 364-377.]*
&-5.d-Kpitos, -ov, (Siakpive to distinguish); 1. undis-
tinguished and undistinguishable: devn, Polyb. 15, 12, 9;
Aéoyos, Leian. Jup. Trag. 25; for 33, Gen. i. 2 Symm.
2. without dubiousness, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see
Siaxpive, Pass. and Mid. 3 [al. without variance, cf. 81a-
kpiva, 2]): 7 avebev copia, Jas. iii. 17 (Ignat. ad Eph.
3,2 Inoods Xpioros 1rd advaxpitov nuav (nv [yet al. take
the word here i. q. inseparable, ef. Zahn in Patr. Apost.
Opp., ed. Gebh., Harn. and Zahn, fase. ii. p. 7; see also
in general Zahn, Ignatius, p. 429 note; Bp. Lghtft. on
Ignat. |. c.; Soph. Lex.s.v. Used from Hippocr. down. }).*
aSidAeurrros, -ov, (Suadeir@ to intermit, leave off), uninter-
mitted, unceasing: Ro. ix.2; 2 Tim.i.3. [Tim. Loer. 98 e.]*
dSiarelrtws, adv., without intermission, incessantly, ase
siduously: Ro. i.9; 1 Th. i. 2(3); ii. 13; v.17. [Polyb.,
Diod., Strabo; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]*
G-5.a-pBopia, -as, 7, (fr. aduapOopos incorrupt, incor-
ruptible; and this from ddvapOeipw), incorruptibility,
soundness, integrity: of mind, év ry ddackadia, Tit. ii.
7 (LT Tr WH ad@opiay). Not found in the classics."
aSikéw, -@; [fut. aducjow]; 1 aor. ndiknoa; Pass.,
[pres. adccodpar]; 1 aor. nd.cnOnv; literally to be adtkos.
1. absolutely; a. to act unjustly or wickedly, to sin:
Rey. xxi. 11; Col. iii. 25. b. to be a criminal, to have
violated the laws in some way: Acts xxv. 11, (often so
aodiknpa
in Grk. writ. [ef. W. § 40, 2¢.]). ©. todo wrong: 1 Co.
vi. 8; 2 Co. vii. 12. d. to do hurt: Rev. ix. 19. 2.
transitively; a. ri, to do some wrong, sin in some re-
spect: Col. iii. 25 (8 ndixnoe ‘the wrong which he hath
done’). b. twa, to wrong some one, act wickedly
towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13
(by fraud); 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. ddicetoOar to be
wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. adicovdpar
to suffer one’s self to be wronged, take wrong [W.
§ 38, 3; ef. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 87 sq.]: 1 Co.
vi. 7; twa ovdév [B. § 131,10; W. 227 (213)], Acts
xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; rea m1, Philem. 18; [adccovpevor
pioOdy ddicias (R. V. suffering wrong as the hire of
wrong-doing), 2 Pet. ii. 13 WH Tr mrg.].
to hurt, damage, harm (in this sense by Greeks of every
period): Lk. x. 19; Rev. vi. 6; vii. 2 sq.; ix. 4, 10;
xi. 5; pass. od pry adtxnOy ex tod Oavarov shall suffer
no violence from death, Rev. ii. 11.*
&8iknpa, -ros, ro, (ddicew), [fr. Hdt. on], a misdeed [16
dixov ... 6rav mpax6y, adixnua ear, Aristot. Eth. Nic.
5, 7]: Acts xviii. 14; xxiv. 20; Rev. xviii. 5.*
&Sixla, -as, 7, (dduxos), [fr. Hdt.down]; = 1. injustice,
of a judge: Lk. xviii. 6; Ro. ix. 14. 2. unrighteous-
ness of heart and life; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 25 Grsb.;
Acts viii. 23 (see avvdeopos); Ro. i. 18, 295 ii. 85 vi.
13; 2 Tim. ii. 19; opp. to 4 adnOea, 1 Co. xiii. 6; 2 Th.
ii. 12; opp. to 4 Stkacoovvn, Ro. iii. 5; Heb. i. 9 Tdf. ;
owing to the context, the guilt of unrighteousness, 1 Jn.
i. 93 darn ths ddixias deceit which unrighteousness
uses, 2 Th. ii. 10; perOds ddixias reward (i. e. penalty)
due to unrighteousness, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see adicéw, 2 b.
fin.]. b. spec., unrighteousness by which others are
deceived: Jn. vii. 18 (opp. to adnOns); papwvas rhs
dduxias deceitful riches, Lk. xvi. 9 (ef. darn tod mXovrov,
Mt. xiii. 22; others think ‘riches wrongly acquired’ ;
[others, riches apt to be used unrighteously; ef. vs. 8 and
Mey. ad loc.]) ; xdopos tis ddixias, a phrase having ref-
erence to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. kéopos, 8) ;
treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (oikovounos ths adixias, [al. take it
generally, ‘acting unrighteously’]). 3. a deed violat-
ing law and justice, act of unrighteousness: maca ddikia
,
Cc. Tuva,
dpapria eori, 1 Jn. v.17; épydrat ths adikias; Lk. xiii. 27;
ai ddixiat iniquities, misdeeds, Heb. viii. 12 (fr. Sept.
Jer. xxxvili. (xxxi.) 34; cf. Dan. iv. 20 (24)) 3 puodds
aduxias reward obtained by wrong-doing, Acts i. 18;
2 Pet. ii. 15; spec., the wrong of depriving another
of what is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically
ealled ddixia).*
aStkos, -ov, (dikn), [fr. Hes. down]; descriptive of one
who violates or has violated justice ; 1. unjust, (of
God as judge): Ro. iii. 5; Heb. vi. 10. 2. of one
who breaks God’s laws, unrighteous, sinful, (see déxia,
2): [1 Co. vi. 9]; opp. to dSixatos, Mt. v. 45; Acts xxiv.
15; 1 Pet. iii. 18; opp. to evoeBys, 2 Pet. ii. 9; in this
sense acc. to Jewish speech the Gentiles are called
adixot, 1 Co. vi, 1 (see duapt@dds, b. B.). 3. spec., of
one who deals fraudulently with others, Lk. xviii. 11;
who is false to a trust, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to maros) ;
2 QOvUVaTOS
deceitful, papwvas, ibid. vs. 11 (for other interpretations
see ddixia, 2 b.).*
ddikws, adv., unjustly, undeservedly, without fault: ma-
oxew, 1 Pet. ii. 19 [A. V. wrongfully. (Fr. Hdt. on.) ]*
"ASpelv, 6, Admin, the indecl. prop. name of one of
the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33, where Tdf. reads
Tov Adpew tov Apvei for Rec. rod ’Apap (q. v-), [and WH
txt. substitute the same reading for rod ’ApuwadaB8 rod
’Apdp of R G, but in their mrg.’ Adap (q. v. 2) for Adpeiy;
on the spelling of the word see their App. p. 155].*
&-SdKipos, -ov, (Sdxiyos), [fr. Eur. down], not standing
the test, not approved; properly of metals and coin,
dpyvpwoy, Is. i. 22; Prov. xxv. 4; vousopa, Plat. lege.
v. p- 742 a., al.; hence, which does not prove itself to
be such as it ought: yh, of sterile soil, Heb. vi. 8; ina
moral sense [A. V. reprobate], 1 Co. ix. 27; 2 Co. xiii.
5-7; vods, Ro. i. 28; awept tiv wiorw, 2 Tim. iii. 8;
hence, unfit for something: mpos mav épyov ayabdy ad.
Ditto"
a-Sod0s, -ov, (Soros), [fr. Pind. down], guileless; of
things, unadulterated, pure: of milk, 1 Pet. ii. 2. [Cf.
Trench § lvi.]*
*ASpapurryvés, -7, -ov, adj., of Adramyttium ( Adpapvr-
tov, Adpapurrevov, "Adpappvreroy [also "Atpapvr., etc., cf.
Poppo, Thue. pt. i. vol. ii. p. 441 sq.; Wetst. on Acts,
as below; WH ‘Adpapuvrnvos, ef. their Intr. § 408 and
App. p. 160]), a sea-port of Mysia: Acts xxvii. 2, [mod-
ern Edremit, Ydramit, Adramiti, ete.; cf. Me. and S.
s. v. Adramyttium ].*
*ASpias [WH ‘Adp.], -ov, 6, Adrias, the Adriatic Sea
i. e., in a wide sense, the sea between Greece and Italy:
Acts xxvii. 27, [ef. B. D. s. v. Adria; Dict. of Grk. &
Rom. Geog. s. v. Adriaticum Mare ].*
ddpétys [Rec adp.],-nros, 7, or better (cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. 417) ddporns, -jros, [on the accent cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. s. v.; Chandler §§ 634, 635], (fr. ddpds
thick, stout, full-grown, strong, rich [2 K. x. 6, 11, ete.]),
in Grk. writ. it follows the signif. of the adj. ddpés; once
in the N. T.: 2 Co. viii. 20, bountiful collection, great
liberality, [R. V. bounty]. (a8poovvn, of an abundant
harvest, Hes. épy. 471.) *
aSuvaréw, -@: fut. ddvvarnaw; (advvatos); a. not to
have strength, to be weak ; always so of persons in classic
Grk. b. a thing advvatei, cannot be done, is impos-
sible; so only in the Sept. and N. T.: ov« ddvvarnoe
mapa tO Oem [rod beod L mrg. T Tr WH] wav prpa,
Lk. i. 37 (Sept. Gen. xviii. 14) [al. retain the act. sense
here: from God no word shall be without power, see
napa, I. b. ef. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.];
ovdév advvarnoer tiv, Mt. xvii. 20, (Job xlii. 2).*
a-5vvaros, -ov, (Svvayar), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. without
strength, impotent: trois moat, Acts xiv. 8; fig. of Chris-
tians whose faith is not yet quite firm, Ro. xv. 1 (opp.
to duvarés). 2. impossible (in contrast with duvarov) :
mapa Tu, for (with) any one, Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x. 27; Lk.
Xvili. 27; 7d advv. Tod vopov ‘what the law could not do’
(this God effected by, etc.; [al. take ro advy. here as nom.
absol., cf. B. 8381 (326); W. 574 (534); Meyer or Gif-
aow
t
ford ad loc.]), Ro. viii. 3; foll. by ace. with inf., Heb.
vi. 4,18; x.4; by inf., Heb. xi. 6.*
dSe (deidSw); common in Grk. of every period; in
Sept. for 131w ; lo sing, chant; 1. intrans.: revi, to the
praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Eph. v. 19; Col.
iii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a
devout and grateful soul). 2. trans.: @dyv, Rev. v.
Deo miele) VISE
del, [see aiwy |, adv., [fr. Hom. down], always; 1. per-
petually, incessantly: Acts vii. 51; 2 Co. iv. 11; vi. 10;
Tit. 1.12; Heb.iii.10. 2. invariably, at any and every
time when according to the circumstances something is
or ought to be done again: Mk. xv. 8 [T WH om.] (at
every feast); 1 Pet. iii. 15; 2 Pet. i. 12.*
der6s,-ov, 6, (like Lat. avis, fr. dns on account of its
wind-like flight [ef. Curtius § 596]), [fr. Hom. down], in
Sept. for Ww, an eagle: Rev. iv.7; viii. 13 (Rec. ayyedov) ;
xii. 14. In Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 37 (asin Job xxxix.
30; Prov. xxx. 17) it is better, since eagles are said
seldom or never to go in quest of carrion, to understand
with many interpreters either the vultur percnopterus,
which resembles an eagle (Plin. h. n. 10, 3 “quarti
generis — viz. aquilarum — est percnopterus”), or the
vultur barbatus. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Adler; [ Tristram,
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 172 sqq.]. The meaning of
the proverb [cf. exx. in Wetst. on Mt. l. ¢.] quoted in
both passages is, ‘where there are sinners (cf. mraépa),
there judgments from heaven will not be wanting ’.*
dLvpos, -ov, (Cun), Hebr. M¥D, wnfermented, free from
leaven; properly: dpro., Ex. xxix. 2; Joseph. antt.
3, 6,6; hence the neut. plur. ra a€vpa, )¥D, unleavened
loaves; 7 €opt) Tov dtiper, NI¥QT IN, the (paschal)
festival at which for seven days the Israelites were
accustomed to eat unleavened bread in commemoration
of their exit from Egypt (Ex. xxiii. 15; Lev. xxiii. 6),
Lk. xxii. 1; 7 mpwrn (sc. nuépa) trav ag. Mt. xxvi. 17;
Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7; ai nuepar roy ag. Acts xii. 3 ;
xx. 6; the paschal festival itself is called ra dupa, Mk.
xiv. 1) [icf. 1 Esdr: i. 10,19; W.176 (166); B. 23(21)].
Figuratively : Christians, if such as they ought to be,
are called a¢vpou i. e. devoid of the leaven of iniquity,
free from faults, 1 Co. v. 7;. and are admonished
éopraceww ev avpos eidckpuveias, to keep festival with the
unleavened bread of sincerity and truth, vs. 8. (The
word occurs twice in prof. auth., viz. Athen. 3, 74
(aprov) a¢vporv, Plat. Tim. p. 74 d. d¢upos capé flesh not
yet quite formed, [add Galen de alim. fac. 1, 2].) *
"Atop, Azor, the indecl. prop. name of one of the
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13 sq.*
"Alwros, -ov, 7, TW, Azotus, Ashdod, one of the five
chief cities of the Philistines, lying between Ashkelon
and Jamnia [i. e. Jabneel] and near the Mediterranean :
Acts viii. 40; at present a petty village, Esdiid. A suc-
cinct history of the city is given by Gesenius, Thesaur.
iii. p. 1366; Rauwmer, Palistina, p. 174; [Alex.’s Kitto
or Me. and S.-s. v. Ashdod ].*
andia, -as, 7, (fr. dndyjs, and this fr. a priv. and 7dos
pleasure, delight), [fr. Lysip. down]; 1. unpleasant-
13
aberéw
ness, annoyance. 2. dislike, hatred: év anédia, cod.
Cantabr. in Lk. xxiii. 12 for Rec. év éy@pa.*
GnHp, dépos, 6, (nut, tw, [cf. dvepos, init.]), the air (par-
ticularly the lower and denser, as distinguished from the
higher and rarer 6 aiénp, cf. Hom. Il. 14, 288), the at-
mospheric region: Acts xxii. 23; 1 Th. iv. 17; Rev. ix.
2; xvi. 17; 6 dpywy rns e£ovoias tod depos in Eph. ii. 2
signifies ‘the ruler of the powers (spirits, see é¢fovcia
4 c. BB.) in the air,’ i. e. the devil, the prince of the de-
mons that according to Jewish opinion fill the realm of
air (cf. Mey. ad loc.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air; Stuart
in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed,
anp denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Hom. I. 17,
644; 3,381; 5, 356,ete.; Polyb. 18, 3,7), but is nowhere
quite equiv. to oxdéros, —the sense which many injudi-
ciously assign it in Eph. 1. c. dépa d€pew (cf. verberat
ictibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss
their aim) i. e. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 263 eis
dépa Nadeiv (verba ventis profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932))
‘to speak into the air’ i. e. without effect, used of
those who speak what is not understood by the hearers,
1 Co: xiv. 9.*
a0avacia, -as, 7. (abavatos), immortality: 1 Co. xv.
53 sq.; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as 6 povos
éxov adavaciav, because he possesses it essentially —‘ ex
THs OlkeLas Ovalas, OK EK OeAnpaTos GAXoOv, KaOarrep oi AouTrol
mavres aOavarot’ Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61
p- 84 ed. Otto. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) *
&-O¢putros, -ov, a later form for the ancient and prefer-
able a@épuoros, (Oepitos, Oepiotos, OepiCw, Oéus law,
right), contrary to law and justice, prohibited by law,
illicit, criminal: 1 Pet. iv. 3 [here A. V. abominable];
adewirov éori tue with inf., Acts x. 28.*
a-Geos, -ov, (Geos), [fr. Pind. down], without God, know-
ing and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. v. h.
2, 31 declares ort pydeis tov BapBapwy aOeos; in classic
auth. generally slighting the gods, impious, repudiating
the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain
Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 14, 4),
and subsequently Christians were called a@@eo. by the
heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, etc.). In Eph. ii. 12 of
one who neither knows nor worships the true God;
so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5; Gal. iv. 8); Clem.
Alex. protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott. dOéovs .
Gedv yvonxaat, Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 aiyumrtaki abedrns,
Hos. iv. 15 Symm. oikos a@eias a house in which idols are
worshipped, Ignat. ad Trall. 10 @@eou tovreotiw amiarot
(of the Docetae); [al. understand Eph. 1. c. passively
deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo; on the various mean-
ings of the word see Mey. (or Ellic.) ].*
&-Becpos, -ov, (Gecpds), lawless, [A. V. wicked]; of one
who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies
his lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. [Sept., Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Plut.]*
dberéw, -@; fut. dberHow; 1 aor. nOérnoa; a word met
with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb. ; a.
properly, to render a@Oerov; do away with Oeroy Tt i. e.
something laid down, prescribed, established: SsaOnkny, Gal.
a \ oy] ”
- » Ol TOV OVT@WS OVYTAa
abérnats
iii. 15, (1 Macc. xi. 36; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, etc.) ; acc. to
the context, ‘to act towards anything as though it were
annulled’; hence to deprive a law of force by opinions
or acts opposed to it, to transgress it, Mk. vii. 9; Heb.
x. 28, (Ezek. xxii. 26); miorw, to break one’s promise
or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Polyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 29, 3,
al.; Diod. excerpt. [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 562, 67).
Hence _b. to thwart the efficacy of anything, nullify,
make void, frustrate: tnv BovAny tov Oeov, Lk. vii. 30
(they rendered inefficacious the saving purpose of God) ;
rv ovveow to render prudent plans of no effect, 1 Co.
i. 19 (Is. xxix. 14 [where xp’, yet cf. Bos’s note]).
c. to reject, refuse, slight: tv xapw tov Oeod, Gal. ii. 21
fal. refer this to b.]; of persons: Mk. vi. 26 (by break-
ing the promise given her); Lk. x. 16; Jn. xii. 48;
1 Th. iv. 8; Jude 8 (for which xarappoveiy is used in
the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use
of this word see Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
abérnots, -ews, 7, (aberéw, gq. V.; like vovOérnars fr.
vovbereiv), abolition: Heb. vii. 18; ix. 26; (found occa-
sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9; Diog.
Laért. 3, 39, 66; in the grammarians rejection; more
frequently in eccl. writ.).*
"Abfvat, -dv, ai, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)),
Athens, the most celebrated city of Greece: Acts xvii.
Lowsqss acyl WG; 1. Phe 1s 1*
’"AOnvaios, -ala, -aiov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sq.*
GOA€w, -G; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. aéAnon];
(aOXos a contest); fo engage in a contest, contend in
public games (e. g- Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with
the poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit, in wrestling, running,
or any other way: 2 Tim. ii. 5; (often in classic auth.
who also use the form aédevw). [COmP.: cvv-abhéa. | *
GAnors, -ews, 7), contest, combat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down) ;
fig. dOAnows waOnparwr a struggle with sufferings, trials,
Heb. x. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4; Clem. mart. 25 ].*
pol{w: pf. pass. ptep. nOpowrpevos; (fr. aOpdos i. q.
Opdos [a noisy crowd, noise], with a copulative [see A,
a, 2]); to collect together, assemble; pass. to be assembled,
to convene: Lk. xxiv. 33 L T Tr WH. ([Soph.,] Xen.,
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; O. T. Apocr.; sometimes in
Sept. for Y3p:) [Comp. : ém-, ovv-abpoita. | *
G0vpew, -@ ; common among the Greeks fr. [ Aeschyl., ]
Thue. down; to be GOvpos (@upods spirit, courage), to be
disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21.
(Sept. 1 S. i. 6 sq., etce.; Judith vii. 22; 1 Mace. iv.
27.) *
a0d0s [R G Tr], more correctly adéos (L WH and T
[but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among
both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars; cf. Steph.
Thes. i. col. 875 c.; Lob. Path. Element. i. 440 sq. (cf.
ii. 377) ; see I, ¢]), -ov, (Aon [i. e. Awin, cf. Etym. Mag.
p- 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat. down], unpunished,
innocent: aia adaov, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt.
Sixaov], (Deut. xxvii. 25; 1 S. xix. 5, ete.; 1 Mace. i.
37; 2 Mace. i. 8); amo twos, after the Hebr. | ‘pi
({ Num. xxxii. 22; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41; 2 S. iii. 28; W.197
(185); B. 158 (138)]), ‘innocent (and therefore far)
14
Adio
from,’ innocent of, Matt. xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur-
der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; do
rhs dpaprias, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. v. 31].
The Greeks say a@@¢ds twos [both in the sense of free
from and unpunished for].*
atyeos [WH -yos; see their App. p. 154, and I, ¢],
-eia, -evov, (aif, gen. ~yés goat, male or female), of a goat,
(cf. kapndecos, tmmeos, Vetos, mpoBaretos, etc.) : Heb. xi.
37. [From Hom. down. ]*
alytados, -ov, 6, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Hom.
down]: Mt. xiii. 2,48; Jn. xxi. 4; Acts xxi. 5; xxvii.
39,40. (Many derive the word from dyvupi and dds, as
though equiv. to axrn, the place where the sea breaks ;
others fr. aiyes billows and as [Curtius § 140; Vanitek p.
83]; others fr. diaow and dds [Schenk], L. and S., s. v.],
the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.) *
Aiytrrvos, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian: Acts
Vil. 22; 24528 sxx 3 Sis ee Ds exiee2 ee
Atyvurros, -ov, 7, [always without the art., B. 87 (76) ;
W. § 18, 5 a.], the proper name of a well-known coun-
try, Egypt: Mt. ii. 13 sq.; Acts ii. 10; Heb. iii. 16, etc. ;
more fully y7 Atyumros, Acts vii. 36 [not L WH Tr txt.],
40's. xiii. 17 5. Heb: viii. 955 Jude 75; (Gax. vais \yie26,
ete.; 1 Mace. i. 19; Bar. i. 19 sq., etc.) ; 7 yy Atyumros,
Acts vii. 11; év Alyimrov sc. yn, Heb. xi. 26 Lchm.,
but cf. Bleek ad loc.; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)].
In Rey. xi. 8 Aly. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e.
for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and
his followers, and so to be likened to the Egyptians in
their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeavy-
ors to crush his people.
GiBtos, -ov, (for deidios fr. dei), eternal, everlasting :
(Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20; Jude 6. (Hom. hymn. 29, 3;
Hes. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in
Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (¢w7 aidios), § 31; de opif.
mund. § 2, § 61; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3; de post.
Cain. § 11 fin. Syn. see aimmos].) *
aiSds, (-oos) -ots, 7; fr. Hom. down; a sense of shame,
modesty: 1 Tim. ii. 9; reverence, Heb. xii. 28 (Aatpevew
bed pera aidods kai evdaBeias, but L T Tr WH evtAaBeias
kai d€ous). [SYN. aid@s, aio xuvvyn: Ammonius distin-
cuishes the words as follows, aidas cai aicxvvn diadéper,
Ott 7) pev aids eoTw evTpot mpos ExacTov, ws ceBopevws
tis €xer* aiaxvyn & ed’ ols €xkaotos duaptav aicxvverat, ws
pi) Seov tt mpakas. Kal aidetrar pev Tes Tov maTEpa* aicxuve-
rat b€ ds peOvoxeras, etc., etc.; accordingly aid. is promi-
nently objective in its reference, having regard to
others; while aicy. is subjective, making reference to
one’s self and one’s actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is
often said that ‘aid. precedes and prevents the shame-
ful act, aicy. reflects upon its consequences in the shame
it brings with it’ (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). aid.
is the nobler word, aicx. the stronger; while “aid. would
always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, aicy.
would sometimes restrain a bad one.” Trench §§ xix.
xe ||/*
Al®lowp, -orros, 6, (aidw to burn, and dy [dy] the face ;
swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. ‘v/33): Acts viii. 27, here
élua
the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or
Abyssinia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and
including the island Meroé; [see Dillmann in Schenkel
i. 285 sqq.; Alex.’s Kitto or Me. and S. s. v. Ethiopia.
Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515 ].*
aipa, -ros, rd, blood, whether of men or of animals ;
1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7
sq.; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6° (on which passages cf. Ex. vii.
20 sqq-) ; xix. 13; pious aiparos, Mk. v. 25, [(anyn aip.
29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; @pdpuBou aiparos, Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where
the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden,
Acts xv.'20, 29; xxi. 25; ef. Lev. iii. 17}; vii. 16 (26);
xvii. 10; see Knobel on Lev. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on
Lev., Preliminary Essay § 1]; Rickert, Abendmahl, p.
94. b. As it was anciently believed that the blood is
the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl.
Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq.)]), the
phrase odpé x. aiua (07) 1W3, a common phrase in Rab-
binical writers), or in inverse order aiua x. cap€, denotes
man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co.
xv. 50; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between
man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph.
vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv.
18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of
divine things, Gal. 1.16; Mt. xvi. 17. ce. Since the
first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood
(Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad Il. 6, 211 (ii. 104, 2) 76 S€ aiparos
ayTi Tod orreppatos pacw oi cool, ws Tod omeppatos VAnY
TO aiva éxovtos), the word serves to denote generation
and origin (in the classics also) : Jn. i. 13 (on the plur.
ef. W. 177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [R G]. d. It is
used of those things which by their redness resemble
blood : af. crapvAzjs the juice of the grape [‘ the blood
of grapes,’ Gen. xlix. 11; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. xxxix.
26; 1.15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, ete.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; ref-
erence to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. eis aiua,
of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)), ig. ds aia,
Rev. vi. 12. 2. blood shed or to be shed by violence
(very often also in the classics); a.: Lk. xiii. 1 (the
meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred
while they were sacrificing, so that their blood mingled
with the blood [yet cf. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ;
ai. agov [or Sixacov Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an
innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt. xxvii.
A; éxxew and éxxvvew aiva (D7 Dv, Gen. ix. 6; Is. lix.
7, etc.) to shed blood, slay, Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 50;
Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6* [here Tadf.
aiwata]|; hence aiya is used for the bloody death itself :
Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19,
yet cf. 1d. above;] xx. 26; Rev. xvii. 6; péypis aipa-
tos unto blood i.e. so as to undergo a bloody death,
Heb. xii. 4, (rév airiov ths... uexpis aiyatos otdceas,
Heliod. 7, 8); rupx atparos ‘price of blood’ i. e. price
received for murder, Mt. xxvii. 6; dypos aiparos field
bought with the price of blood, Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. ywpiov
aiparos, Acts i. 19——- unless in this latter passage we
prefer the explanation, which agrees better with the
15
aipoppoew
context, ‘the field dyed with the blood of Judas’;
the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following
Hebraistic expressions: év airy aipata (Rec. aipa [so L
Tr WH)]) ectipéén i. e. it was discovered that she was
guilty of murders, Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. adédis aipdrey,
Ezek. xxiv. 6); rd aiva aitod ed’ jpas (sc. €XO€érw) let
the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25;
TO aipa ipav emt rHv Keadiy wuav (sc. édOéra) let the
guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own ac-
count, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2S. i. 16; Josh. ii. 19, etc.) ;
emdyew TO aiwa Tivos émi twa to cause the punishment of
a murder to be visited on any one, Acts v. 28; éx(nreiv
TO aia twos amo twos (/D WD /D DF Wd, 2 S. iv. 11;
Ezek. iii. 18, 20; xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the
penalty for another’s death, Lk. xi. 50; the same idea
is expressed by éxd:xety To aipa twos, Rev. vi. 10; xix.
2. b. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial
victims having a purifying or expiating power (Lev.
xvii. 11): Heb: ix. 7, 12°sq. 18-22, 25; x. 45 xi. 28;
xiii. 11. ¢. Frequent mention is made in the N. T.
of the blood of Christ (aiva rod Xpiorov, 1 Co. x. 16;
Tov kupiov, Xi. 27; Tov dpviov, Rev. vii. 14; xii. 11, cf.
xix. 13) shed on the cross (ai. rod oravpod, Col. i. 20) for
the salvation of many, Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24, ef.
Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 (dzo-
AUrpwots Sia Tov ai. ad’tod; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.);
1 Pet. 1. 19 (see adyopag, 2b.) ; having expiatory effi-
cacy, Ro. iii. 25; Heb. ix. 12; by which believers are
purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix.
14; xii. 24; [xiii. 12]; 1 Jn.i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8); Rev.
i. 5; vii. 14; 1 Pet. i. 2; are rendered acceptable to
God, Ro. v. 9, and find access into the heavenly sanc-
tuary, Heb. x. 19; by which the Gentiles are brought
to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13,
and in general all rational beings on earth and in
heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with whicl,
Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28,
and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since
Christ’s dying blood served to establish new religious
institutions and a new relationship between men and
God, it is likened also to a federative or covenant sacri-
Jice: 76 aia ths dvaOjxns the blood by the shedding of
which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28 ;
Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29; xiii. 20
(cf. ix. 20); add, 1 Co. xi. 25; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject
this pass. ] (in both which the meaning is, ‘this cup con-
taining wine, an emblem of blood, is rendered by the
shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant’),
1 Co. xi. 27; (ef. Cic. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus san-
guine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis
sanciam Romanum foedus). sivew 1d aipa adrod (i. e.
of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of Christ’s
death, Jn. vi. 53 sq. 56. [ Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 34 sq.]*
aiparexxuola, -as, 7, (aiua and éexyivw), shedding of
blood: Heb. ix. 22. Several times also in ecel. writ.*
aipoppocw, -@; to be aiudppoos (atua and pew), to suffer
from a flow of blood: Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. 38,
where it means menstruous, and in medical writ.) *
Aivéas
Alvéas, -ov, 6, Ae/neas, the prop. name of the para-
lytic cured by Peter: Acts ix. 33 sq.*
alverts, -ews, up (aivéw), praise: Ovoia aivecews (NII
mn, Lev. vii. 13), Heb. xiii. 15 a thank-offering,
[A. V. ‘sacrifice of praise ’], presented to God for some
benefit received ; see Ouvcia, b. (atveats often occurs in
Sept., but not in prof. auth.) *
alvéw, -6; (found in prof. auth. of every age [“ only
twice in good Attic prose” (where émaw. mapaw. etc.
take its place), Veitch], but esp. freq. in Sept. and the
Apocr. of the O. T.; from aivos); to praise, extol: tov
deov, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 37; xxiv. 53 [WH om. Tr txt.
br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of
person, 7@ Oe@, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev.
xix. 5 L T Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for
5 min), 1 Chr. xvi. 36; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 ete. (for
5 Son); [W.§ 31,1 £; B. 176 (153). Comp. éz-, wap-
atvew. |.*
alviypa, -ros, ro, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190), ]
Aeschyl. down; fr. aiviooouac or aivitropai te to express
something obscurely, [fr. aivos, q. v-]); 1. an obscure
saying, an enigma, Hebr. NYT (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept.
mpoBrnua). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where
év aiviypare is not equiv. to aivvypatixds i. e. duaupds
obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of
which we are engaged, as Bere & tin, Mt. vi. 4; ef.
De Wette ad loc.; the apostle has in mind Num. xii.
8 Sept.: év cider kal ov de aimyyaray. [Al. take éy lo-
cally, of the sphere in which we are looking; al. refer
the pass. to 1. and take éy instrumentally. ] *
atvos, -ov, 6, (often used by the Grk. poets) ;
saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse:
xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3); Lk. xviii. 43.*
Alvay, 7, (either a strengthened form of }7}' and equiv.
to jy, or a Chaldaic plur. ig. PS shina [al. al.]),
sen, indecl. prop. name, either of a place, or of a
fountain, not far from Salim: Jn. iii. 23, [thought to be
Wady Far’ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan; see
Conder in “ Pal. Explor. Fund” for July 1874, p.191 sq.3
Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq. ; esp. Stevens in Journ. of
Exeget. Soc., Dec. 1883, pp. 128-141. Cf. B. D. Am. ed.].*
alpects, -ews, 7} 1. (fr. aipéw), act of taking, cap-
ture: ths moAews, the storming of a city; in prof. auth.
2. (fr. aipéopar), choosing, choice, very often in prof.
writ.: Sept. Lev. xxii. 18; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that
which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action;
hence one’s chosen opinion, tenet; ace. to the context,
an opinion varying from the true exposition of the
Christian faith (heresy): 2 Pet. ii. 1 (ef. De Wette ad
loe.), and in eccl. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. a
body of men separating themselves from others and
following their own tenets [a sect or party]: as the Sad-
ducees, Acts v. 17; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5; xxvi. 5;
the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with
a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. Laért.
1 (13,) 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy).
5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and
Gal. v. 20; 1 Co. xi.19. [Cf. Mey. Il..cc.; B.D.
LS a
Mt.
aims:
16
apo
Am. ed. s. v. Sects; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829;
Campbell, Diss. on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] *
aiperitw: 1 aor. ypérica [Treg. jp., see I,e]; (fr. aipe-
tds, see aipew); to choose: Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in
O. T. Apocr. and in ecel. writ.; the mid. is found in
Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf.
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 144.) *
aipetikds, -7, -dv, [see aipéw]; 1. fitted or able to
take or choose a thing ; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis-
matic » factious, a follower of false doctrine: Tit. iii. 10.*
ailipécn, -@: [thought by some to be ss to aypa, aypéw,
xelp, Eng. grip, etc.; ef. Bttm. Lexil. i. 131— but see
Curtius § 117]; to take. In the N. v. in the mid.
only: fut. aipjoopar; 2 aor. eiAduny, but G L T Tr WH
etAapnv, 2 Th. ii. 13, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH.
App. p. 165;] W. § 13, 1a.; B. 40 (35), see dmépyoua
init.; [ptep. Aduevos, Heb. xi. 25]; to take for one’s self, to
choose, prefer: Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 13; padXor foll.
by inf. with # (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Comp.:
dv-, ap-, d«-, €&, xaO-, Tept-, mpo-atpéw. | *
alpw (contr. fr. poet. deipw); fut. dp@; 1 aor. fpa,
inf. dpa, impv. dpov; pf. jpxa (Col. ii. 14); Pass.,
[pres. atpowac]; pf. Appar (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. #pOnv;
(on the rejection of iota subscr. in these tenses see
Btim. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut.
apOjcopar; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q.
xiv); to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise
from the ground, take up: stones, Jn. vill. 59; serpents,
Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up-
wards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rev. x. 5; the eyes,
Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, ery
out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ;
THY Wux7v, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly
(with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, ete.); in Jn. x.
24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and
hope, ef. Liicke [or Meyer] ad loc. ec. to draw up:
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (dvaorav, Hab. i. 15); oxadny, Acts
xxvii. 17; anchors from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii.
13, where supply ras ayxvpas; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W.
594 (552); B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one’s self
and carry what has been raised, to bear: twa emi xepar,
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xe. (xci.) 12); a sick man,
Mk. ii. 3; (vyov, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27); a bed, Mt.
ix. 6; Mk. ii. 9, 11 sq; Lk. v.. 24.sq.; Jn. v..8=12);
tov otavpov, Mt. [x. 38 Lehm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32;
Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21 [in R Lbr.]; xv. 21; [Ai@ov, |
Rev. xviii. 21; to carry with one, [A. V. take]: Mk. vi. 8:
Lk. ix. 8; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed
in class. Grk. by the mid. aipeo@a. 3. to bear away
what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its
place: Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23, (@p@nre be thou taken up,
removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place); Mt. xxii.
13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; xx. 1. b. to take
off or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31,
38 sq.; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; to rend
away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. c. to remove: 1 Co.sveyn 2
(east out from the church, where dp67 should be read
for Ree. é€ap69); tropically: faults, Eph. iv. 31: ty
, hi
aig @avopat
dyapriav, Jn. i. 29, [36 Lehm. in br.], to remove the guilt
and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin
be neither imputed nor punished (aipew dyaptnya, 1 S.
xv. 253 dvopnua, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for
an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 ras duaprias npdy atpew
is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin,
while we enter into fellowship with Christ, who is free
from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to
carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20; xv. 37;
xx. 14; xxiv. 17 sq.; Mk. vi. 29, 43; viii. 8, 19 sq. ;
xiii. 15 sq.; Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 31; Jn. xx. 2, 13, 15;
Acts xx. 9. e. to appropriate what is taken: Lk.
xix. 21 sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to take away from another
what is his or what is committed to him, to take by force:
Lk. vi. 30; xi. 52; ri ao with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii.
12g x4 $9 xoxv. 28s LK... viii 12, '18 5 xix. 24, 26%
[Mt. xxv. 29]; Mk. iv. (15), 25; Jn. x. 18; xvi. 22;
perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom
anything is taken, Lk. vi. 29; xi. 22; Jn. xi. 48, unless
one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. g. to take
and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to
take from among the living, either by a natural death,
Jn. xvii. 15 (ek rod koopov take away from intercourse
with the world), or by violence, Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk.
Xxill. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition
of and 7Hs yns, Acts xxii. 22; aiperar amd tis yas 7) Cw)
avtov, of a bloody death inflicted upon one, Acts viii. 33
(Is. liii. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, de-
stroy: xewpoypapov, Col. ii. 14; cause to cease: rhv
xpiow, Acts viii. 33 (Is. lili. 8). [Comp.: da-, é&, éz-,
peT-, ovv-, Umrep-aipa. |*
alcOdvopar: 2 aor. jaOounv; [fr. Aeschyl. down];
depon. mid. fo perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses ;
2. with the mind; to understand: Lk. ix. 45.*
alc Oycts, -ews, 7), (aicdavonar), [fr. Eurip. down], per-
ception, not only by the senses but also by the intellect ;
cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10,
ete., i. q. NY): Phil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the
understanding of ethical matters, as is plain from what
is added in vs. 10.*
alo Oynrhpiov, -ov, To, an organ of perception, external
sense, [Hippoc.]; Plat. Ax. 366 a.; Aristot. polit. 4, 3,
9, al.; faculty of the mind for perceiving, understanding,
judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 aicOnr. tis Kapdias,
4 Mace. ii. 22 [com. text] ra vdov aicOntnpia).*
aisxpokepSis, -és, (alaypos and xepdos; cf. aioxporabns
in Philo [de merc. meretr. § 4]), eager for base gain,
[greedy of filthy lucre]: 1 Tim. iii. 3 Ree., 8; Tit. i. 7.
(Hdt. 1, 187; Xen., Plat., al.; [cf. turpilucricupidus,
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 63].) *
aicxpoKepdas, adv., from eagerness for base gain, [for
filthy lucre]: 1 Pet. v. 2, ef. Tit. i. 11. Not found
elsewhere.*
alcxpodoyla, -as, 7, (fr. alrypoddyos, and this fr. ate ypos
and dey), foul speaking (Tertull. turpiloquium), low and
obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speaking]: Col. iii. 8.
(Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.; Trench
§ oxxiv.']*
17
ay
ai.TEe@
alo x pés, -d, -dv, (fr. alos baseness, disgrace), base, dis-
honorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i. 11.*
aloxpétns, -nTros, 7, baseness, dishonor: Eph. v. 4
[A. V. filthiness]. (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)*
alexuvn, -ns, 9, (aicxos [cf. aicypds]); 1. subjec-
tively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything,
sense of shame: yer aicyivns suffused with shame, Lk.
xiv. 9; Td xpumra ths aicxivns those things which
shame conceals, opp. to davépwats rhs dAnOetas, 2 Co. iv.
2 (evil arts of which one ought tobe ashamed). 2. ob-
jectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb.
xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19
(opp. to défa). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: # aiaytvn
THs yupvornros (gen. of appos.) nakedness to be ashamed
of, Rev. iii. 18, ef. xvi. 15; plur. [cf. W. 176 (166)] ai
aicxdvat basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13.
[(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syn. see aides, fin.]*
alsxive: (aicxos [ef. aicxpéds]) ; 1. to disfigure:
mpéowmov, Hom. Il. 18, 24, and many others. 2. to
dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxix. 15. 3. to suffuse with
shame, make ashamed: Sir. xiii. 7. In the N. T. only
pass., alcxtvoua; fut. aicxvvOjncopa; 1 aor. noxvvOnv; to
be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed :
2 Co. x. 8; Phil. i. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 16; wy aicyvvbdpev
am avrov that we may not in shame shrink from him,
1 Jn. ii. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 aicyvvOqoerac dd rpordmov
[Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13; cf. B. § 147, 2]); foll. by inf.
(on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 8. [Comp.: ézs
(-pat), kat-aoxvve. ] *
airéw, -©; fut. airnow; 1 aor. #rnoa; pf. Arnka; Mid.,
pres. airodpar; impf. jrovuny; fut. airnoowac; 1 aor.
atnodpny ; [fr. Hom. down]; to ask; mid. to ask for
one’s self, request for one’s self; absol.: Jas. i. 6; Mt.
vii. 7; mid., Jas. iv. 3; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 8; airei-
o6ai Tt, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv. 7; Mk. vi. 24; x. 38; xi. 24;
xv. 43; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 52; Acts xxv. 3, 15,
etc.; aireiy with acc. of the pers. to whom the request
is made: Mt. v. 42; vi. 8; Lk. vi. 30; aireio@ac with
ace. of the pers. asked for — whether to be released,
Mt. xxvii. 20; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mre. saparr.
q. v.]; Lk. xxiii. 25; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii.
213; aireiy te awd twos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt.;
[Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH; (so
airetoOa in Plut. Galb. 20) [cf. B. 149 (130)]; ri mapa
twos, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 RG T Tr mre. WH mr¢.;
Jas. i.5; 1 Jn. v.15 RG; foll. by the inf., Jn. iv. 9;
mid., Acts ix. 2; [aireiy te ev r. dvduate Xporod, Jn. xiv.
13; xvi. 24 (see dvopa, 2 e.); Tl ev TH mpocevyn, Mt.
xxi. 22]; airety rua 71, Mt. vii. 9; Lk. xi. 11; Mk. vi.
22; Jn. [xiv. 14 T but L WH Tr mre. br.]; xvi. 23;
vmép twos foll. by ta, Col. i. 9 [ef. B. 237 (204) ]; airet-
oOa with the ace. and inf., Lk. xxiii. 23; Acts ili. 14;
with inf. only, Acts vii. 46 (jrnaaro eipeiv he asked that
he himself might find ; others wrongly translate 7rjcaTo
desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea of demanding
prominent: aireiv rt, Lk. i. 63; 1 Co. i. 22; ruvd tt, Lk.
SUAS Pet: wis:
[The constructions of this word in the Greek Bible, the
aiTnua
Apost. Fathers, etc., are exhibited in detail by Prof. Ezra
Abbot in the No. Am. Rey. for Jan. 1872, p. 182 sq. He
there shows also (in opposition to Trench, § xl., and others)
that it is not “ the constant word for the seeking of the infe-
rior from the superior,” and so differing from épwrdw, which
has been assumed to imply ‘a certain equality or familiarity
between the parties’; that the distinction between the words
does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking
and the person asked; but that airéw signifies to ask for
something to be given not done, giving prominence to the
t hing asked for rather than the person, and hence is rarely
used in exhortation. *Epwrdw, on the other hand, is to re-
quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring
more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta-
tion, etc. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer,
4te Aufl.s.v. The latter distinguishes airéw from similar
words as follows: “ airéw denotes the request of the will,
émOuuéw that of the sensibilities, déoua: the asking of
need, while épwrdw marks the form of the request, as does
etxeo0a also, which in classic Greek is the proper expres-
sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying itself
in prayer.” ’Epwrdw, airéw and déouam are also compared
briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16),
who concludes of épwrdw “it cannot serve to indicate directly
any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent.
The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having
relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when
carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing
inseparable from the act of direct interrogation” ; cf. further
Schmidt ch. 7. Comp.: am-, éf-, em-, map-(-ya1), mpoo-attéw. |
alrnpa, -ros, 76, (airéw), [fr. Plato down], what is or
has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; plur. [A. V. requests],
Phil. iv. 6 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; things asked for, 1 Jn. v.
15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.]*
airla, -as, 73 1. cause, reason: Acts x. 21; xxii.
24; xxviii. 20; kara macayv airiay for every cause, Mt.
xix. 3; 8¢ hy airiay for which cause, wherefore, Lk. viii.
47; 2 Tim. i. 6,12; Tit. i. 138; Heb. ii. 11; ef. Grimm
on 2 Mace. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy
of punishment; crime of which one is accused: Mt.
xxvii. 37; Mk. xv. 26; Jn. xviii. 38; xix. 4, [6; Acts
xxiii. 28]; airia Oavarov [A. V. cause of death] crime
deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii.
18. 3. charge of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27.
(All these signif. in prof. writ. also; [but L. and S. now
make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 the words
ei oUTws eotiv 7 airia Tod avOpamrov pera Tis yuvatkds find a
simple explanation in a Latinism (causai. q. res: si ita res
se habet, etc.) if the case of the man with his wife is so.*
alriapa, -ros, 7d, See aitiwpa.
[alridopat, -@uar: to accuse, bring a charge against;
nttacdpeba is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the
mponttacdyeba of the printed texts. (Prov. xix. 3; Sir.
xxix. 5; freq. in prof. writ.) Syn. see xarnyopéw.*]
alrios, -a, -ov, that in which the cause of anything
resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. 6 airtos the
author: awtnpias, Heb. v. 9 (the same phrase is freq.
in prof. writ.; cf. the opp. ai. r7s dm@Xeias in Bel and
the Dragon vs. 41; trav caxav, 2 Mace. xiii. 4; Leian.
Tim. 36 ed. Lips.; rév dyaéav, Isocr. ad Phil. 49 p.
106 a.; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94.sq.). 2. rd
18
2.
aAtL@Yp
aircoy i. q. 9 atria; a. cause: Acts xix. 40 [cf. B.
400 (342) n.]. b. crime, offence: Lk. xxili. 4, 14, 22.
(airtos culprit.) [See airia, 3.]*
airlwpa, -ros, Td, (airidouac) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the read-
ing of the best codd. adopted by G L T Tr WH for Ree.
aitiaua: accusation, charge of guilt. (A form not found
in other writ.; [yet Mey. notes airiwois for airiaats,
Eustath. p. 1422, 21; see B. 73; WH. App. p. 166].)*
aidviStos, -ov, (aipyns, aparys, apve q. v.), unexpected,
sudden, unforeseen: Lk. xxi. 34 [here WH eviéb., see
their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151]; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap.
xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17; 3 Mace. iii. 24; Aeschyl.,
Thue. 2, 61 76 aipvidiov kat ampoodoxnrov, Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut., Dion. Hal., al.) *
alxpadwota, -as, 7, (aiyuade@ros, q. v.), captivity: Rev.
xiii. 10; abstr. for concer. i. q. aiyudda@roe (cf. adeApdrns
above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. lxvii. (Ixviii.) 19, [ef. B. 148
(129); W. 225 (211)]); also e¢ tus aixpadkwoiav cuvaye
(ace. to the common but doubtless corrupt text), Rev.
xiii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, ete.). [Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., Plut., al.]*
aixpadwredw; 1 aor. 7ypadwrevoa; a later word (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 92 (88)]); to make captive,
take captive: 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec.; freq. in the Sept. and
O. T. Apoer. ; to lead captive: Eph. iv. 8 (Ezek. xii. 3;
[1 Esdr. vi. 15]).*
alxpadwrifa; 1 fut. pass. aixparwricOnoopa; a.
equiv. to aiyuad@rov moo, which the earlier Greeks use.
b. to lead away captive: foll. by eis with ace. of place,
Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob.i. 10). ce. fig. to sub-
jugate, bring under control: 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage
see vénua, 2); twa tim, Ro. vii. 23 [yet T Tr & ete. in-
sert év before the dat.]; to take captive one’s mind, capti-
vate: yuvacxapra, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Ree.], (Judith xvi. 9
TO KdAXOS aiTHs HXMAA@TICE Wuyny aitod). The word
is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr.,
Heliod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); Ellic.
on 2 Tim. 1. c.].*
aixp-ddXwrtos, -ov, (fr. aiyun a spear and ddords, verbal
adj. fr. d\évat, prop. taken by the spear), [fr. Aeschyl.
down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).*
aldy, -dvos, 6, (as if aiév— poet. for aei— dp, so teaches
Aristot. de caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279%, 27; [so Proclus
lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241; et al.]; but more prob-
able is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that
aidv is so connected with dye to breathe, blow, as to
denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf.
Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But alav (=aiFav) is now gen-
erally connected with alei, det, Skr. évas (aivas), Lat.
aevum, Goth. aivs, Germ. ewig, Eng. aye, ever; ef. Curtius
§ 585; Fick, Pt. i. p.27; Vanitek p. 79; Benfey, Wur-
zellex. i. p. 7 sq.; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400;
Pott, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442; Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. dei; Cremer, edd. 2, 3,4 (al-
though in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm); Pott and
Fick, however, connect it with Skr. dyus rather than
évas, although both these forms are derived from 7 to
go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, Vanitek, u. s.).] In
7
aL@V
Greek authors 1. age (Lat. aevum, which is aiov
with the Aeolic digamma), a human lifetime (in Hom.,
Hdt., Pind., Tragic poets), life itself (Hom. Il. 5, 685
pe Kal Aizrot aiwy etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity
of time, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38 a.; Tim. Locr.
p- 97d. [quoted belew]; Plut., al.). With this signifi-
cation the Hebrew and Rabbinic idea of the word 051
(of which in the Sept. afov is the equiv.) combines in
the bibl. and eccl. writ. Hence in the N. T. used
1. a. univ.: in the phrases eis rév aidva, D719 (Gen.
vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58; xiv. 16; Heb. v. 63 Vi
20, ete.; and strengthened eis 16v ai@va tov ai@vos, Heb.
iS fir... Ps. xlivs (xly.),7 Alex. cf. W.)§.36,,2] (Tob.
vi. 18; Ps. Ixxxii. (ixxxiii.) 18, ete.); els aidva, Jude
13; eis mpépay aidvos unto the day which is eternity
(gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [ef. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)];
with a negation: ~ever, Jn. iv. 14 [Lchm. in br.]; viii.
mie x 20, x1. 20, *xi. oO; t Col/viil. 13°; or’ nol jor
ever, not always, Jn. viii. 35; els tovs aidvas unto the
ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the
individual ages whose sum is eternity): [Lk. i. 33];
Moet. 20; 1X. 55 Bi--005 [xvi 2¢ RG Tr WH; 2'Co.,
xi. 31; Heb. xiii. 8; eis mavtas r. ai@vas, Jude 25; eis
Tovs ai@vas Tov aiwyewy (in which expression the endless
future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of
which are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2;
among the various phrases to express duration com-
posed of this word with prep. or adjuncts, (which to the
number of more than fifteen are to be found in the
Sept., cf. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of
the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. T.]):
[Roe xvie2t, ber: Gal. 1 5: [Phil tv:20]; 1 ‘Tim. 1.
7 f2 Time iv. £3; O° Pet.-iv. 11 |; Rey. 1£°6, 18" iv:
oes Vento Wile tos Xe Gs Kl. LO: XV. Cy RI. Os RK.
10; xxil. 5; eis aidvas aiwvwy, Rev. xiv. 11; 6 aioy rev
ai@vey the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages,
Eph. iii. 21 (ef. Mey. [or Ellic.] ad loc.) ; dé tév aldvev
from the ages down, from eternity, Col. i. 26; Eph. iii.
9; mpo tav aimvev before time was, before the founda-
tion of the world, 1 Co. ii. 7; apdOeois trav aiavev
eternal purpose, Eph. iii. 11. _b. in hyperbolic and
popular usage: amo Tov aidvos (Ddiyn, Gen. vi. 4, cf.
Deut. xxxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within
the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21;
xv. 18, (Tob. iv. 12 of matépes fudv amd Tod aidvos;
Longin. 34 rods dm’ aidvos pnropas); also éx Tod aidvos,
Jn. ix. 32, (1 Esdr. ii. 19, 22 (23); Diod. iv. 83 of the
temple of Venus ryv e& aidvos apynv AaBov, 17, 1 Tods
e€ aidvos Baoweis, [excerpt. de legat. xl.] p. 632 ri é&
al@vos mapadedouerny éhevOepiav). 2. by meton. of the
container for the contained, of aidves denotes the worlds,
the universe, i. e. the aggregate of things contained in
time, [on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb.
i. 2; xi. 3; and (?) 1 Tim. i. 17; [Rev. xv. 3 WH
txt.; ef. Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 18; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir.
xxxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Noé § 12 bis; de mundo
§ 7; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 2;
35, 3 (matnp tr. a.); 55, 6 (Beds r. a.); Constt. Ap. 7, 34;
19
2?
at@v
see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. eve. i. p. 106 n.]. So
aidy in Sap. xiii. 9; xiv. 6; xviii. 4; the same use oc-
curs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic; cf. Bleek,
Hebrierbr. ii. 1, p. 36 sqq.; Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.
1036; [cf. the use of oi aidves in the Fathers i. q. the
world of mankind, e. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2]. 3. As
the Jews distinguished 41 0\j7n the time before the
Messiah, and 837 diya the time after the advent of the
Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. d. Hebrierbr. p. 204 sqq.;
[Schiirer § 29,9]), so most of the N.'T. writers distin-
guish 6 ai@y odros this age (also simply 6 aidy, Mt. xiii. 22;
Mk. iv. 19 GL TTr WH; 6 éveoras aidy, Gal. i. 43 6
vov aiov, 1 Tim. vi.17; [2 Tim. iv. 10]; Tit. ii. 12), the
time before the appointed return or truly Messianic ad-
vent of Christ (i. e. the wapovaia, q. v.), the period of insta-
bility, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery,
—and aidy peddwr the future age (also 6 aidy éxeivos, Lk.
xx. 35; 6 aloy 6 epyopuevos, Lk. xviii. 30; Mk. x. 30;
ol aid@ves of émepyopevor, Eph. ii. 7), i. e. the age after
the return of Christ immajesty, the period of the con-
summate establishment of the divine kingdom and all
its blessings: Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 21; cf. Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of ‘this age’
are mentioned in the N. T. with censure: 6 aiwy otros,
by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits
of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called
viol Tov ai. rovrov in Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 843 xara Tov aiava
Tov Kogpov tovtov conformably to the age to which this
(wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [cf. Trench § lix.
sub fin.]; ayanav tov viv aidva, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see
dyamdw); dpxovtes Tov ai. TovTov, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see dpywy) ;
6 Oeds rod ai. rovrov the devil, who rules the thoughts
and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4; ai pepipvae
Tov aiavos the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk.
iv. 19; mAovowos ev T@ viv aid rich in worldly wealth,
1 Tim. vi. 17; copia rod ai. rovr. such wisdom as be-
longs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to
the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6; cu¢nrytns Tod ai. ror. disputer,
sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20; cuvrédea
rou ai. rovr. the end, or rather consummation, of the age
preceding Christ’s return, with which will be connected
the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the de-
molition of this world and its restoration to a more ex-
cellent condition [ef. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 39 sq. 49;
xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; it is called cuvréXeta Tay aidvwy in
Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 10, test. Benj. 11
(cf. Vorstman p. 133) ]; ra reAn tev aidver the ends (last
part) of the ages before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11;
duvdpets Tov péAAovTos ai@vos powers which present them-
selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the
Holy Spirit, Heb. vi.5 ; rov aiavos éxeivou tvxeiv to partake
of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among
the N.'T. writers James does not use the word aiav.
[On the word in its relation to xécuos see Trench § lix.
Its biblical sense and its relation to D?\)) are discussed by
Stuart, Exeget. Essays on Words relating to Fut. Punish-
ment, Andover, 1830 (and Presbyt. Publ. Committee, Phil.) ;
Tayler Lewis in Lange’s Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51; J. W.
Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 1880. See esp.
27
ati@V
E. Abbot, Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, etc.,
(New York, 1867), Index of subjects s. vy. For its meanings
in eccl. writ. see Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. i. col. 140 sqq., cf.
ii. col. 1609; Huet, Origeniana (App. to vol. iv. of De la
Rue’s Origen) lib. ii. c. ii. quaest. 11, § 26. Its use in Hom.,
Hes., Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Aristot., Plato, Tim.
Locr., is exhibited in detail by E. S. Goodwin in the Christ.
Exam. for March and May, 1831, March and May, 1832.
“On aidy as the complete period, either of each particular life
or of all existence, see Arist. cael. 1, 9, 15; on aidy and
xpévos, cf. Philo [quis rer. div. her. § 34] i. 496, 18 sq.; [de
mut. nom. § 47] i.619, 10sq.” L.and S. ed.6; see also Philo
de alleg. leg. iii. 8; quod deus immut. § 6 fin.; de prof. § 11;
de praem. et poen. § 15; and (de mund. opif. § 7) esp. J. G.
Miller, Phi\u’s Lehre v. d. Weltschépfung, p. 168 (Berl. 1864).
Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as fol-
lows: both words denote the abstract idea of time and with
special reference to its extent or duration; xpévos is the
general designation for time, which can be divided up into
portions, each of which is in its turn a xpévos; on the other
hand, aiév, which in the concrete and simple language of
Homer (Pindar and the Tragedians) denotes the allotted
lifetime, even the life, of the individual (Il. 4,478 pivuvOad.0s
dé of aidy etc.), in Attic prose differs from xpévos by denot-
ing time unlimited and boundless, which is not conceived of
as divisible into aiéves (contrast here biblical usage and see
below), but rather into xpdévo:. In philosophical speech it is
without beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 c. d. xpévw 5€ ra
mépea Tdade Tas mepiddws A€yorTi, &s exdounoev 6 Beds ody
Kéou@* ov yap hv mpd Kdonw &oTpa* Sidwep ovS eviavtTds oF
apav mepiodot, als wetpéera 6 yevvards xpdvos ovTos. ecixwy
dé dott TH ayevvdtw xpdvw, dv ai@va moTayopevoues* ws
yap mot aldiov mapdderyua, Toy idavikdy Kdopoy, bd 6 wpavds
eyevvdbn, odtws ws mpos wapdderyua, Toy ai@va, bde 6 xpdvos
civ Kooum edamtovpynn — after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d.
(where see Stallbaum’s note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 34 rods 5¢€
wet evoeBelas Kk. dikacoctyns C@vTas (6p@) vy Te Tots Tapodor
xpévots aopards didyovras kat wep) Tov cUuTmayTOs ai@vos
ndtovs Tas eAmldas €xovtas. The adj. &xpovos independent
of time, above and beyond all time, is synon. with aidévos ;
where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter-
nity begins: Nonnus, metaph. evang. Johan. i. 1, &xpovos Hy,
akixntos, ev appytw Adyos apxh. Thoroughly Platonic in
east are the definitions of Gregory of Nazianzus (orat.
XXXVlil. 8) aidy yap o’re xpdvos odte xpdvou Tt mépos: OvdE
yap wetpntdv, GAN’ brep juiv 6 xpdvos jAlov Popa weTpovmevos,
ToUTO ToIs aidlols aidy, T) TUUMapEeKTELVdmEVOY TOls OvaLY oid
TL Xpovikoy kivnua Kal Sidornua (Suicer u. s.). So Clem.
Alex. strom, i. 13, p. 756 a. ed. Migne, ‘O 7 ody aidy rod
xpévov To pédAAov Kal Td everTHs, abTap 5H Kal Td TapwxnKds
Instances from extra-biblical writ. of
the use of aiéy in the pluralare: roy am aidvwv uddor,
Anthol. vol. iii. pt. ii. p. 55 ed. Jacobs; eis aiévas, ibid. vol.
iv. epigr. 492; é mepitporijs aidvwy, Joseph. b. j. 8, 8, 5; eis
ai@vas Siauéver, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. The dis-
cussions which have been raised respecting the word may
give interest to additional reff. to its use by Philo and Jo-
sephus. Philo: 6 mas (das, obumas) or mas (etc.) 6 aidv:
de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 1 (a noteworthy passage,
cf. de congressu erud. § 11 and reff. s. v. @dvaros) ; de sacrif.
Ab. et Caini § 11; quod det. pot. § 48; quod deus immut.
§ 1, § 24; de plantat. § 27; de sobrietate § 13; de migr. Abr.
§ 2; de prof. § 9; de mut. nom. § 34; de somn. ii. § 15, § 31,
§ 38; de legat. ad Gaium § 38; (6) waxpds ai.: de sacrif. Ab.
et Caini § 21; de ebrietate § 47; de prof. § 20; ai. ufkioros:
akaptalws cuvicrnot.
20
Alwvios
de sobrietate § 5; de prof. § 21; 6 &mepos ai.: de legat. ad
Gaium § 11; 6 €umpooGer ai.: de praem et. puoen. § 6 ; ai
moAvs: de Abrah. § 46; rls ai.: de merc. meretr. § 1; 6: ai.:
de cherub. § 26; de plantat. § 27; eis roy ai.: de gigant. § 5;
év (7@) ai.: de mut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction) ;
quod deus immut. § 6; ef ai.: de somn. i. § 3; én’ ai.: de
plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo § 7; mpd ai.: de mut. nom.
§ 2; mpds ai.: de mut. nom. § 11; (6) ai.: de prof. § 18; de
alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 22; de migr. Abr. § 22; de
somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Josepho § 5; de vita Moys. ii. § 3;
de decalogo § 14; de victimis § 3; frag. in Mang. ii. 660
(Richter vi. p. 219); de plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de mundo § 7.
Josephus: (6) was aidy: antt. 1, 18, 7; 3,8,10; ¢. Ap. 2,
11,3; 2, 22,1; maxpds ai.: antt. 2, 7,3; woAds ai.: c. Ap. 2,
31, 1; Togodros ai.: c. Ap. 1, 8, 4; mA%O0s ai@vos: antt
prooem. § 3; am ai.: b.j. prooem. § 4; dr ai.: antt. 1,18, 8;
4,6,4; b.j. 6, 2,1; eis (rdv) ai.: antt..4, 8,18; 5, 1, 27; 7,
9; 53) 751145) 55 €F atc b.: SOS 5: (6) aicantt.9, 252)
b. j. 1, 21, 10; plur. (see above) 3, 8,5. See aidmos.]
alévios, -ov, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Heb. ix. 12; Num.
xxv. 13; Plat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1;
[ef. WH. App. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -os,
-a, -ov,(alov); 1. without beginning or end, that which
always has been and always will be: Oeos, Ro. xvi. 26, (6
povos ai@vios, 2 Mace. i. 25); mvedpa, Heb. ix. 14. 2.
without beginning: xpovots aiwvious, Ro. xvi. 25; mpd xpo-
vev aioviov, 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2; evayyédvov a gospet
whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose
of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. with-
out end, never to cease, everlasting: 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to
mpoakatpos) ; ai@vov avroy, joined to thee forever as a
sharer of the same eternal life, Philem. 15; Bapos d0&ns,
2 Co. iv. 17; Baowdeia, 2 Pet. i. 11; d0€a, 2 Tim. ii. 10;
1 Pet. v.10; Cw (see (an, 2 b.); KAnpovouia, Heb. ix.
15; Avtpwots, Heb. ix. 12; mapaxAnors, 2 Th. ii. 16;
oxnvat, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (the
habitations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, ef.
Jn. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernacula aeterna, quae
praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsche 5 Esdr.) ii. 11];
similarly Hades is called aiaos romos, Tob. iii. 6, cf.
Eccl. xii. 5); owrnpia, Heb. v. 9; [so Mk. xvi. WH, in
the (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]. Opposite ideas
are: kodaows, Mt. xxv. 463; xpiwa, Heb. vi. 2; kpiots,
Mk. iii. 29 (Ree. [but L T WH Tr txt. dyaprnparos ;
in Acta Thom. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., €orat cot rovro eis aperw
dpaptiay kai AUTpov aiwviwy mapant@pdrer, it has been
plausibly conjectured we should read Avrpoy ainoyr (cf.
Heb. ix. 12)]); dAeOpos [Lehm. txt. ddr€Opios], 2 Th. i.
9, (4 Mace. x. 15); wip, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12
aiavio rupt K. Bacdvors, at eis Gdov Tov aidva ovK avncovat
Ge).
[Of the examples of aidévios from Philo (with whom it is
less common than aidios, q. v., of which there are some fifty
instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2;
de caritate § 17; kdéAacis ai. frag. in Mang. ii. 667 fin.
(Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; ef. de praem. et poen. § 12. Other
exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod
deus immut. § 30; quis rer. div. her. § 58; de congressu
quaer. erud. § 19; de prof. § 38; de somn. ii. § 43; de Jose-
pho § 24; guod omn. prob. lib. § 4, § 18; de ebrietate § 32;
de Abrah. § 10; (wh ai.: de prof. § 15; @eds (6) ai.: de plan
axalapoia
tat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis); de mundo § 2. From Jose-
phus: antt. 7, 14, 5; 12, 7,3; 15, 10, 5; b. j. 1, 33, 2; 6, 2,
1; «Aéos ai.: antt. 4, 6, 5; b.j. 3, 8,5; urqun ai.: antt. 1,
13,4; 6, 14,4; 10, 11,7; 15, 11,1; olkoy wey aidvov exes
(of God), antt. 8, 4,2; épvadxOn 6 Iwdvyns Secpots aiwvins,
b. j. 6, 9, 4.
Syn. atS:os, aidvios: aid. covers the complete philo-
sophic idea — without beginning and without end ; also either
without beginning or without end ; as respects the past, it
is applied to what has existed time out of mind. aidyos (fr.
Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasurableness of eter-
nity (while such words as cvvex4s continuous, unintermitted,
diareAns perpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable
to an abstract term, like aidéy); aiévos accordingly is esp.
adapted to supersensuous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim.
Locr. 96 c. Oedy 5é Toy meV aidvioy vdos dp7H pdvos etc.; Plat.
Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc.); 38 b. ¢.; legg. x. p.
904 a. avdAcOpor 5é by yevduevov, GAA’ ovK aidviov. Cf. also
Plato’s S:arévios (Tim. 38 b.; 39 e.). Schmidt ch. 45.]
dxaSapola, -as, 7, (dxabapros), [fr. Hippocr. down],
uncleanness ; a. physical: Mt. xxiii. 27. b. ina
moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profli-
gate living: Ro. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v.
19; Eph. iv. 19; v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv.7; used
of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.)
Cf. Tittmann i. p. 150 sq.*
axaldprns, -nros, 7, impurity: Rev. xvii. 4,— not found
elsewhere, and the true reading here is ra axd@apra rns.*
dxdapros, -ov, (kabaipw), [fr. Soph. down], in the Sept.
i. q. NV, not cleansed, unclean; a. ina ceremonial
sense, that which must be abstained from according to
the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted: Acts x.
14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of
men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. lii. 11, of things pertain-
ing to idolatry); Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a
moral sense, unclean in thought and life (freq. in Plat.) :
Eph. v. 5; ra dxaapra ris mopveias, Rev. xvii. 4 (ace.
to the true reading); mvevpara, demons, bad angels, [in
twenty-three pass. of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.]: Mt. x.
1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26; iii. 11, etc.; Lk. iv. 33, 36; vi.
US “eters Actsiv. 164 “villiy7; Rev. xvi. 33) xviiiz 12,
(mvevpata movnpa in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vil. 21; viii. 2;
xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.).
Gkarpéopat, -ovwar: [impf. nxarpovuny]; (dkaipos inop-
portune) ; to lack opportunity, (opp. to evkarpéw ): Phil.
iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zonar.; dxapeitv, Diod. excerp.
Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. ]. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)*
dxaipws, (Kaipos), adv., unseasonably, [A. V. out of
season], (opp. to evkaipws): 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea-
sonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4; [Aeschyl. Ag.
808]; Plat. de rep. x. p. 606 b.; Tim. 33 a.; 86 ¢.;
Xen. Eph. 5, 7; Joseph. antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) *
d-kakos, -ov, (kakos) ; a. without guile or fraud,
harmless; free from quilt: Heb. vii. 26; [ef. Clement.
frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lahtfi. S. Clement of Rome
etc. p. 219): dkaxos 6 Llatnp mvedpa edwxev Cikaxor].
b. fearing no evil from others, distrusting no one, (cf.
Eng. guileless]: Ro. xvi. 18. ([Aeschyl.,] Plat., Dem.,
Polyb., al.; Sept.) [Cf. Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. p.
27 sq. ]*
21
b]
axatacTacia
dxav0a, -ns, 7, (akn a point [but see in dxun]); a. a
thorn, bramble-bush, brier: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Heb.
vi. 8; eis ras dxavOas i. e. among the seeds of thorns, Mt.
xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. emt], 18 [Tdf. éwi]; Lk. viii.
14 (vs. 7 €v péow trav axavOdv) ; em Tas ax. i. e. upon
ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden,
Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thorny plant: orépavov é& axavbar,
Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2,—for bare thorns might have
caused delirium or even death; what species of plant is
referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read dxdvOev,
from dxavOos, acanthus, bear’s-foot; but the meaning of
axav6a is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ. ;
ef. the class. Grk. Lexx. s. v. [On the “Crown of
thorns” see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Mc. and S.]*
dkavOivos, -ov, (axavOa; cf. ayapdytivos), thorny, woven
out of the twigs of a thorny plant: Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix.
5. (Is. xxxiv. 13.) Cf. the preceding word.*
d-kaptros, -ov, (kapmos), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without
fruit, barren; 1. prop.: Sévdpa, Jude 12. 2. metaph.
not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. unfruitful]:
Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit.
iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing nothing to the instruc-
tion, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14;
by litotes pernicious, Eph. v. 11, (Sap. xv. 4; ef. Grimm
on Sap. i. 11).*
d-KaTd-yvworos, -ov, (kataywaokw), that cannot be con-
demned, not to be censured: 'Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47,
and several times in eccl. writ.) *
d-Kata-KaAuTTos, -ov, (katakadvmTw), not covered, un-
veiled: 1 Co. xi. 5,13. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2; [Sept., Philo].) *
d-kard-KpiTos, -ov, (katakpivw), uncondemned ; punished
without being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Not
found in prof. writ.) *
G-Kata-AvTos, -ov, (karadvw), indissoluble; not subject to
destruction, [A. V. endless]: (on, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace.
xvi) Dion.,Hal. 10,;31.) *
dxataracros, -ov,— found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd.
A and B, from which L WH Tr mrg. have adopted
it instead of the Rec. dxararatvarous, q. v- It may be
derived fr. maréopa:, pf. rémacpat, to taste, eat; whence
dxatdraortos insatiable. In prof. writ. caramaoros [which
Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading]
signifies besprinkled, soiled, from kataracow to besprin-
kle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see
B. 65 (57), [and WH. App. p. 170].*
dkatdmavetos, -ov, (kararavw), unable to stop, unceas-
ing; passively, not quieted, that cannot be quieted ; with
gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. ii. 14
[R GT Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, sc. which
they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., Plut.) *
dxatactacta, -as, 7, (akatdotatos), instability, a stale
of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas.
iii. 16; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.14,1; [Prov. xxvi. 28; Tob.
iv. 13]); plur. disturbances, disorders: of dissensions,
2 Co. xii. 20; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (ef. Mey. ad loc.) ;
of the tumults or commotions of war; Lk. xxi. 9. (Polyb.,
Dion. Hal.) *
QKaATUCTATOS
d-Katd-cratos, -ov, (kabiornut), unstable, inconstant,
restless: Jas. i. 8, and L T Tr WH in iii. 8 also, but less
fitly ; [cf. Hermae Past. |. ii. mand. 2, 3 aovnpoy veda
€otw % Katadadid, Kai dxatdotaroy Saipovov, pnderore
eipnvevoy, adda etc.]. ([Hippocr. et al.] Polyb. 7, 4, 6,
al. [Sept. Is. liv. 11].) *
d-katdoxeros, -ov, (karéyw to restrain, control), that
cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8 R G. (Job xxxi. 11;
3 Mace. vi. 17; Diod. 17, 38 dar. Sdxpva, al.)*
"AxeASapd, or ’AxeAdaynay (Lchm.), [or ‘Acedd. WH
(see their Intr. § 408)], or "AyeAdapay (T Tr), fr. Chald.
NDT opn (field of blood), Akeldama: Acts i. 19; see
aina, a [B. D. s.v.3 esp. Kautzsch, Gram. pp. 8, 173].*
dxépatos, -ov, (kepavyvpt) } ; a. unmixed, pure, as
wine, metals. b. of the mind, without admixture of
evil, free from guile, innocent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro.
xvi. 19; Phil. ii. 15; (and freq. in prof. writ.). [Cf.
Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.; Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. 27 sq. ]*
dxhuis, -€s, (kAiv@), not inclining, firm, unmoved: Heb.
x.) 25. ae in prof. writ.) *
dxpafw: 1 aor. #xuaca; (axun); to flourish, come to
maturity : Rev, xiv. 18. (Very freq. in prof. writ.) *
axph, -As, 7, (cf. axn [on the accent cf. Chandler § 116;
but the word is ‘a mere figment of the grammarians,’
Pape (yet cf. L. and S.) s. v.], atypn, Lat. acies, acuo) ;
among the Greeks a. prop. a point, to prick with (cf.
[the classic] aixuy). b. extremity, climax, acme, highest
degree. c. the present point of time. Hence accus.
[W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.); B. 153 (134)] dxpny with
adverbial force, i. q. €rt, Even now, even yet: Mt. xv. 16.
(Theocr. id. 4, 60; Polyb. 4, 36, 8; Strat. epigr. 3 p.
101 ed. Lips. ; Strabo 1. i. [e. 3 prol.] p. 56; Plut. de
glor. Athen. 2, 85, al.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 123.*
dxot, -7s, 7, (fr. an assumed pf. form 7#xoa, cf. ayopa
above [but cf. Epic dxoun; Curtius p. 555]); = 1. hear-
ing, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing:
1 Co. xii. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 8. Hebraistically, akon axovew
by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii.
14; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9); cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3
p- 339; § 54, 3 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the
organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 1; 2 Tim.
iv. 3,4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard;
a. instruction, namely oral; spec. the preaching of the
gospel, [A. V. txt. report]: Jn. xii. 38; Ro. x. 16 sq. (ris
eniorevoe TH akon nuav; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. Ay, which
in 2S. iv. 4, ete., is rendered apne akon Tictews
preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubens-
predigt), Gal. iii. 2,5; dyos axojs i. gq. A. dxovobeis [cf.
W. 531 (494 sq.)]: 1 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iv. 2. b. hear-
say, report, rumor; twwds, concerning any one: Mt. iv.
24; xiv. 1; xxiv.6; Mk. i. 28; xiii. 7. (Freq. in Grk.
writ.) *
dxohov0éw, -d; fut. dxodkovdnow; impf. mKxodovGovy ;
1 aor. nxodovOnca; pf. neotovénxa (Mk. x. 28 LT Tr
WH); (fr. dxodAovOos, and this fr. a copulative and xédev-
dos road, prop. walking the same road) ; 1. to follow
one who precedes, join him as his attendant, accompany
him: Mt. iv. 25; viii. 19; ix. 19; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 7;
22
> /
aKOU®m@
y. 24, [37 Lchm.]; xiv.51[R G@]; Lk. xxii. 39, 54; Xxiii.
27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xvill. 15; xx. 6, ete.;
Acts xii. 8; xiii. 43; xxi. 36; 1 Co. x. 4; distinguished
fr. mpodyev in Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9; trop. 7a épya
avta@v akoAovbe per’ avtav, their good deeds will accom-
pany them to the presence of God the judge to be
rewarded by him, Rev. xiv. 13; on the other hand,
nKodovOnaay avtns ai duapria aypt Tov ovpavod, Rev. xviii.
5, but here for nxodovOnoavy G LT Tr WH have re-
stored éexodAnOnoav; Lonpeta Tots meoTeVoaow axodovbyet
ravra, Mk. xvi. 17 Tr WH txt. (where al. rapaxoX. q. v.)].
to follow one in time, succeed one: Rey. xiv. 8 sq.
(Hdian. 1, 14, 12 (6) ra yotdr dxodovOycavra, al.) Since
among the ancients disciples were accustomed to acconi-
pany their masters on their walks and journeys — [al.
derive the usage that follows from the jigurative sense
of the word directly ; cf. e. g. 2 Mace. viii. 36 7d
axodovbetv Tots vopors; M. Antonin. |. vii. § 31 dxodov-
Onoov Gem, and Gataker ad loc. ], acohovdéw denotes 2.
to join one as a disciple, become or be his disciple; side
with his party, [A. V. follow him]: Mt. iv. 20, 22; ix. 9;
xix. 27 sq.5 Mk. 1.0183) vin.t34s) Lc tv. Ipeaipetes
Jn. viii. 12 (where Jesus likens himself to a torch which
the disciple follows); ov« dxoNovbet “piv he is not of
our band of thy disciples, Mk. ix. 38. to cleave stead-
Jastly to one, conform wholly to his example, in living and if
need be in dying also: Mt. x. 88; xvi. 24; Jn. xii. 26 ;
xxi. 22. This verb is not found in the Epp. exe. in
1 Co. x. 4. As in the classics, it is joined mostly with
a dat. of the obj.; sometimes with pera twos, Lk. ix. 49;
Rev. vi. 8 [Treg. mrg. dat.]; xiv. 13; (so also in Grk.
writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. P- 353 sq.; [Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 458 sq.]) ; dmiow twos, Mt. x. 38; Mk.
viii. 34 (where R L WH Tr mrg. edéeiv), Hebe 707
sydd Ine, cf. 1 K. xix. 215 see W. 234 (219) ; [B. 172
(150), cf. dod. katorw Twos, Arstph. Plut. 13. Comp.:
e&, ém-, KaT-, Tap-, Tvy- akoovbee |.
dxovw [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense cf. W.
274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. yxovoy; fut. (in
best Grk. usage) dxovooua, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL;
Acts iii. 22; vil. 37 BR Gy xvii 32) s[aec: 922) Gey,
22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form)
dxovow, Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x.
16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14
[R G]; and T Tr WH in Tus ¥. 255-28; (ef. Wis82\(79) seb.
53 (46) [Veitch s. v.]); [1 aor. #xovca, Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf.
axnxoa; Pass.,[ pres. dxkovopat; 1 fut. axovaOnoopat]; 1 aor.
novo Onv; (fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe
endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii.
37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt. xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the facul-
ty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in
exhortations : dxovere, Mk. iv. 33; dxovoare, Jas. ii. 5;
6 €xov Ota akovew axoverw, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both
T WHom. Trbr. dxovew] ; Mk. iv. 23; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ;
6 €xwv obs akovodtw, Kev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22,
ete. 3. trop. to understand, perceive the sense of
what is said: Mt. xiii. 15 sq.; Mk. viii. 18; 1 Co. xiv.
2. II. with an object [B. § 132,17; W. 199 (187 sa-)];
2. dxovw 1, to hear something ; a. to perceive by the
ear what is announced in one’s presence, (fo hear im-
mediately): ryv dovny, Mt. xii. 19; Jn. iii. 8; Rev.
iv. 1; v.11; xviii. 4; Acts xxii. 9, ete.; Tov domacpdr,
Lk. i. 41 (cf. 44); TadsAaiav, the name ‘Galilee,’ Lk.
xxiii. 6 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. Tad.; cf. B. 166 (145) };
dvdotaow vexpov, the phrase ‘avdor. vexpdv,’ Acts xvii.
32; tov Noyov, Mk. v. 36 [RG L] (on this pass. see mapa-
xovw, 2); Mt. xix. 22; Jn. v. 24, etc.; rods doyous,
Acts ii. 22; v. 24; Mt. vii. 24; pnyara, 2 Co. xii. 4;
ri Néyovow, Mt. xxi. 16; pass., Mt. ii. 18; Rev. xviii.
22 sq.; Tt &k Twos, 2 Co. xii. 6 [R G]; foll. by dr [B.
800 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2; Mk. xvi. 11; Jn. iv. 42;
xiv. 28. b. to get by hearing, learn (from the mouth
of the teacher or narrator): Acts xv. 17; Mt. x. 27 (6
eis TO ods dxovere, What is taught you in secret) ; Ro. xv.
21; Eph. i. 13; Col. i. 6; Jn. xiv. 24; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24;
iii. 11; Xpiorov i. e. to become acquainted with Christ
from apostolic teaching, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. paOety rov Xpiorov,
vs. 20 [B. 166 (144) note; W.199 (187) note]); _ pass.,
Lk. xii. 3; Heb. ii. 1; ri with gen. of pers. fr. whom
one hears, Acts i. 43 ri mapa twos, Jn. viii. 26,40; xv.
D5 AeNcts cx 22)> xxvilin225°2 Tim: it: 2; (Thuc.i6;93 ;
Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. mapa]; Plat. rep. vi.
p- 506 d., al.; [B. 166 (145); W. 199 (188)]); [mapa
twos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)]; | &
twos, Jn. xii. 84 (€« Tov vouwov, from attendance on its
public reading); azo with gen. of pers., 1 Jn.i.5; with
mepi twos added, Acts ix. 13; foll. by dé, Mt. v. 21,
27, 33, 38,43. c. axovw tt, a thing comes to one’s ears, to
Jind out (by hearsay), learn, (hear [(of)] mediately):
with ace. of thing, ra gpya, Mt. xi. 2; 60a éroier, Mk.
iii. 8 [Treg. txt. movet] ; modeuous, Lk. xxi. 9; Mt. xxiv.
6; Mk. xiii. 7; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been
mentioned: Mt. ii. 3; xxii. 7 [R L]; Mk. ii. 17; iii.
21; Gal. i. 13; Eph. i. 15; Col. i. 4; Philem. 5, etc.
foll. by drt, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk. vi. 55;
xy 28/9 Jin, this 2h ab-es: BIDE Sd (HS ore, 1S TERE abe BIS
mept twos, Mk. vii. 255; ri mepi twos, Lk. ix. 9; xvi. 2;
xxiii. 8[RGL];_ foll. by an ace. with ptep. [B. 303
(260)]:: Lk. iv. 23; Acts viix12; 2 Th. iii: 11;°3Jn.
4; foll. by acc. with inf. in two instances [cf. B. Ll. ¢.]:
Jn. xii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass.: Acts xi. 22 (jKxovcdn
6 Noyos eis Ta Gta THs exkAnoias was brought to the ears) ;
1 Co. v. 1 (dxoverat ropveia ev ipiv); Mt. xxviii. 14
(€av axovaOy rovro ent [L Tr WH mrg. ind] rod nyepo-
vos); Mk. ii. 1; Jn. ix. 32 qxovabn dre. d. to give ear
to teaching or teacher: rovs Adyous, Mt. x. 14; to follow
with attentive hearing, rov Adyor, Jn. viii. 43 ; ra pyyata
tou Geo, 47. e. to comprehend, understand, (like Lat.
audio): Mk. iv. 33; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lchm. mrg. avaywo-
oxete) yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. dxovew is
not joined with the genitive of the obj. unless one hear
the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144) ];
a. with gen. of a person; simply; a. to perceive any
one’s voice: oo i.e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in
the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14,
_W. 199 (187) note?]. B. to give ear to one, listen,
aKkovuw 2
axpiBns
hearken, (Germ. ihm zuhéren, ihn anhéren): Mt. ii. 9 ;
Mk. vii. 14; xii. 37; Lk. ii. 46; x. 16; xv. 1; xix. 48;
xxi. 38; Acts xvii. 32; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass.
Tivos Tepi Tivos); XXV. 22; Jn. vi.60. y. to yield to, hear
and obey, hear to one, (Germ. auf einen héren) : Mt. xvii.
55 (MK .vix. °75 Duk. ix. 85); Ini 111/295 ox.78's), Acta'nn
22 sq.; iv. 19; vii. 37 [RG]; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence
8. its use by John in the sense to listen to, have regard
to, of God answering the prayers of men: Jn. ix. 81; xi.
41; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. (the Sept. render pnw by eicaxodw).
e. with gen. of pers. and ptcp. [B. 301 (259)}: Mk. xiv.
DSi hluks xvii eS6i1 (Ins 437 evil. 32!-) Acts 1.6, elles
Rey. xvi. 5; ifxovoa rov dvatactnpiov ێyovros, Rev. xvi.
7GLT [Tr WH cod.Sin.], a poetic personification ;
cf. De Wette ad loc., W. § 30, 11. b. with gen. of a
thing: rys BAaodnpias, Mk. xiv. 64 (Lcehm. rv Bda-
odnpiay, as in Mt. xxvi. 65; the ace. merely denotes the
object ; ts BAao®@. is equiv. in sense to avrod BAaodnpovy-
tos, [cf. B. 166 (145)]) ; tv Adyar, Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii.
24 rovs Adyous) ; Jn. vii. 40 (L T Tr WH cod. Sin., but
R G rov Aoyor, [cf. B.u.s.]); cvppovias x. xopav, Lk. xv.
25; tov orevaypov, Acts vii. 34; rhs amodoyias, Acts
xxii. 1. The frequent phrase dkovew ths povis (i. g. POW
ipa, Ex. xviii. 19) means a. to perceive the distinct
words of a voice: Jn. v. 25,28; Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii.
te Heb.tlint 1a shived: Rev. xivels 7 sexi: 3. B. to
yield obedience to the voice: Jn. v. 25 (oi axovoartes sc.
tis povyns); X. 16, 27; xvill. 37; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn.
xii. 47; xviii. 37; Lk. vi. 47; Acts xxii. 1, it is better
to consider the pron. pod which precedes as a possess.
gen. rather than, with B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a
double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of
the thing. The Johannean phrase dxovew mapa Tot
Geod, or ri mapa Oeov, signifies a. to perceive in the soul
the inward communication of God: Jn. vi. 45. b. to be
taught by God’s inward communication: Jn. viii. 26, 40,
(so, too, the simple dkovew in v. 30); to be taught by the
devil, ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH, nxotcare
mapa Tov Tarps, in Jn. vill. 38. For the rest cf. B. 165
(144) sqq.; 301 (258) sqq. [Comp.: 61, eic-, éx-, map-,
Tpo-, Um-akove. |
dxpacia, -as, 7, (dxpatns), want of self-control, inconti-
nence, intemperance: Mt. xxiii. 25 (Grsb. ddicia); 1 Co.
vii. 5. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.524sq. ([(Aristot. on.)] *
dxparts, -€s, Zen. -€os, -ovs, (Kparos), without self-con-
trol, intemperate: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof. writ. fr.
Plato and Xen. down.) *
dxparos, -ov, (Kepavvupt), unmixed, pure: Rev. xiv. 10
(of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ.
and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).*
dxpiBera, -elas, 7, (axpiBns), exactness, exactest care:
Acts xxii. 3 (kata dxpiBevav Tov vduov in accordance
with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [ef. Isoc. areop.
p- 147 e.]). [From Thuc. down. ]*
dxpiBijs, -€s, gen. -ovs, exact, careful. The neut. compar.
is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv.
22; 4 dxpiBeorarn aipects the straitest sect i.e. the most
precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and
axpiBow
in observing even the more minute precepts of the law
and of tradition, Acts xxvi. 5. [From Hdt. down.]*
dxpiBéw, -@: 1 aor. nxpi8woa; (dxpiBys); ‘1. in prof.
writ. to know accurately, to do exactly. 2. to investi-
gate diligently: Mt. ii. 7, 16, (dxpiBas eeragew, vs. 8) ;
Aristot. gen. anim. 5, 1; Philo, m. opif. § 25 wera maons
é€eracews axpiBodvres. [Al. to learn exactly, ascertain;
ef. Fritz. or Mey. on Mt. u. s.] *
dxpiBas, adv., exactly, accurately, diligently: Mt. ii. 8;
Lk. i. 3; Acts xviii. 25; 1 Th. v. 2; axpiBas wepurarewv
to live carefully, cireumspectly, deviating in no respect
from the law of duty, Eph. v. 15. [Fr. Aeschyl. down. ] *
axpls, -iSos, 7, [fr. Hom. down], a locust, particu-
larly that species which especially infests oriental coun-
tries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of
them almost every spring are carried by the wind from
Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that coun-
try migrate to regions farther north, until they perish
by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed
to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned
with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites
also (ace. to Lev. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them;
(cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Heuschrecken; Furrer in Schen-
kel iii. p. 78 sq.; [BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of
the Bible, p. 313 sqq.]): Mt. iii.4; Mk.i.6. A marvel-
lous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Rev. ix.
3, 7, ef. 2, 5 sq. 8-12; see Diisterdieck ad loc.*
dxpoattptov, -ov, 7d, (axpodopa: to be a hearer), place
of assemblage for hearing, auditorium; like this Lat.
word in Roman Law, axpoar. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a
place set apart jor hearing and deciding cases, [yet cf.
Mey. ad loc.}. (Several times in Plut. and other later
writers.) *
dxpoarts, -ov, 6, (axpodouar, [see the preceding word]),
a hearer: rov vopov, Ro. ii. 13; tod Adyov , Jas. i. 22 sq.
25. (Thuc., Isocr., Plat.,,.Dem., Plut.) *
axpoBvoria, -as, 7, (a word unknown to the Greeks,
who used 7 axporoa bia and 16 dxporéa tor, fr. réa6n i. e.
membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that tiv 6a Onv
of the Greeks was pronounced ri» Biotny by the Alex-
andrians, and axpoSvoria said instead of daxporoabia —
i. €. Td Gkpov ths moaOns; cf. the acute remarks of
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 136, together with the
opinion which Winer prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te
Aufl. s. v.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of mow the prepuce,
the skin covering the glans penis; a. prop.: Acts xi.
$; Ro. ii. 25, 26"; 1 Co. vil. 195 /Gal.v, 6:41.15 5, Cok
iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); év axpoBvoria
ov having the foreskin ( Tertull. praeputiatus), uncir-
cumcised i.e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; év axp. sc. dv, 1 Co.
vii. 18; equiv. to the same is 8” dxpoBvatias, Ro. iv. 11;
n €v TH akpoB. miots the faith which one has while he is
uncircumcised, Ro.iv.11 sq. _b. by meton. of the abstr.
for the concr., having the foreskin is equiv. toa Gentile :
XO. li. 26 *; iil. 30; iv. 9; Eph. ii. 11; 9 &k hicews axpof.
one uncircumcised by birth ora Gentile, opp. toa Jew who
shows himself aGentile in character, Ro. ii. 27; evayye-
Avov THs axpo8. gospel to be preached to the Gentiles, Gal.
24
araBaoTtpov
Thee c. in a transferred sense: 7 ¢xpo8. ths capkds
(opp. to the weprroun dyetporoinros or regeneration, Col.
ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted
in the oap&é were not yet extinct, Col. ii. 13 (the expression
is derived from the circumstance that the foreskin was
the sign of impurity and alienation from God, [cf. B. D.
s. v. Circumcision ]).*
dxpo-ywviatos, -aia, -atov, a word wholly bibl. and eccl.,
[W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], (xpos extreme, and ywvia
corner, angle), placed at the extreme corner; dios cor-
ner-stone; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept.
Is. xxviii. 16 for 725 }28. For as the corner-stone
holds together two walls, so Christ joins together as
Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who
were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet ef.
Mey. ad loc.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq.
And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice,
but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner
carelessly ; so some are built up by the aid of Christ,
while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8;
see yovia, a.*
dxpoBiviov, -ov, 7d, (fr. dkpos extreme, and Gis, gen.
Owds, a heap; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener-
ally in plur. ra dxpoOina the first-fruits, whether of crops
or of spoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from
the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods,
Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35); in the Bible only once: Heb. vii.
4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc., Plut., al.) *
&kpos, -a, -ov, (akn point [see axun]), [fr. Hom. down],
highest, extreme; 10 axpov the topmost point, the extremity
[ef. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Heb. xi. 21 [see mpoo-
kuvew, a. fin.]; axpa, akpov yns, ovpavod, the farthest
bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven:
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; cf. Deut. iv. 32; xxviii. 64;
Tis) x15 ery x oe
*AxdXas, -ov, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20
(18) ], 6, Aquila, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert
to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating
the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi.
3; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Tim. iv. 19; [see B. D.].*
Gkvpdw, -@; 1 aor. nKipwoa; (axupos without author-
ity, not binding, void; fr. xtpos force, authority), to
render void, deprive of force and authority, (opp. to kupd@
to confirm, make valid): é¢vroAnv, Mt. xv. 6 [R G;
vopov, ibid. TWH mrg.]; Adyov (ibid. L Tr WH txt.];
Mk. vii. 13, (cf. dOeréw) ; Suadnenv, Gal. iii. 17. ({1 Esdr.
vi. 831]; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.) *
dKwdvtws, adv., (korvw), without hindrance :
Xxvill. 31. [Plato, Epict., Hdian. | *
akwv, dkovoa, axov, (contr. fr. déxwv, a priv. and éxwr
willing), not of one’s own will, unwilling: 1 Co. ix. 17.
(Very freq. among the Greeks.) *
[ada, rd, read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13; Mk. ix. 50; Lk.
xiv. 34; see das. |
cdAdBacrpov, -ov, Td, (in the plur. in Theocr. 15, 114;
Anth. Pal. 9, 153; in other prof. writ. 6 and 4 dAdBa-
otpos; [the older and more correct spelling drops the
p, cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v. 1885 d.; L. and S. s. v. dda
Acts
aralovela
Baorpos]), a box made of alabaster, in which unguents are
preserved, (Plin. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] “unguenta
optime servantur in alabastris””) ; with the addition of
pvpov (as in Leian. dial. mer. 14, 2; [Hadt. 3, 20]): Lk.
vii. 37; Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L T adopt rov
addB., Tr WH [Mey.] ryv ad. ; Mt. and Lk. do not add
the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they
use the word, [ef. Tdf.’s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win.
RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.*
ddafovela, and ddagovia (which spelling, not uncommon
in later Grk., T WH adopt [see I, ¢]), -as, 7, (fr. ddago-
vevouat i. e. to act the adagar, q- V-) ; a. in prof. writ.
[fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, some-
times also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration
see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7; Aristot. eth. Nic.
4, 13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk.; [also Trench § xxix. ]. b.
an insolent and empty assurance, which trusts in its own
power and resources and shamefully despises and violates
divine laws and human rights: 2 Mace. ix. 8; Sap. v. 8.
ce. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the
stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting|: Jas. iv. 16
(where the plur. has reference to the various occasions
on which this presumption shows itself; [cf. W. § 27, 3;
B. 77 (67)]); tov Biov, display in one’s style of living,
[R. V. vainglory|, 1 Jn. ii. 16."
ddatdyv, -dvos, 6, 7, (4@An wandering), [fr. Arstph. on],
an empty pretender, a boaster: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2.
[Trench §xxix.; Tittmanni. p. 73sq.; Schmidt ch. 172, 2.]*
ddaddto; [fr. Pind. down]; a. prop. to repeat fre-
quently the cry d\add, as soldiers used to do on entering
battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout: Ps. xlvi.
(xlvii.) 2; xv. (Ixvi.) 2; and in prof. writ. c. to
wail, lament: Mk. v. 38, (9°9°7) Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv.
34)); cf. ddodvGa, Lat. ululare. [Syn.see kdaiw fin.] dd.
to ring loudly, to clang: 1 Co. xiii. 1, [ef. év xupBddous
adaduypov, Ps. cl. 5 |.*
d-AdAnTos, -ov, (AaAynros fr. Nadkew; [ef. W. 23]), not to
be uttered, not to be expressed in words: orevaypoi mute
sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief,
Ro. viii. 26, [al. ‘which (from their nature) cannot be
uttered’; cf. Mey. ad loc.; W. 97 (92) ]. (Anth. Pal. 5,
4 guvictopa adadnror i. e. of love-secrets.) *
G-hados, -ov, (AdAos talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl.
on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech: Mk.
vii. 37; mvevpa, Mk. ix. 17, 25, because the defects of
demoniacs were thought to proceed from the nature and
peculiarities of the demons by which they were pos-
sessed. (Sept. Ps. xxxvii. (xxxvill.) 14; xxx. (xxxi.)
19; dAdAov Kat Kakovd mvevpatos mAnpns, Plut. de orac.
def. 51 p. 438 b.) *
das, -aros, 76, (a later form, found in Sept. and N. T.
[Aristot. de mirab. ausc. § 138; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3],
ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220; dat. ddare Col. iv. 6), and
GAs, adds, 6, (the classic form [fr. Hom. down]; Sir.
MenLts (la) xin, 19s Sap. x. 7° 1 Mace. =. 29h ete:
Mk. ix. 49 ddi dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.],
and in vs. 50 L T Tr WH da ace. [yet without the
art.] with nom. rd Gdas), finally, nom. and acc. aa Tdf.
25
adexTopopwvia
in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see
his note) ] (similar to yada, gen. yaAaros, a form noted
by certain grammarians, see [WH. App. p. 1583]
Kiihner i. 353 sq.; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir.
(xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt; 2:
Salt with which food is seasoned and sacrifices are
sprinkled: Mk. ix.49 RG; cf. ddifw. 2. ddas ris ys;
those kinds of saline matter used to fertilize arable
land, Mt. v.13; here salt as a condiment cannot be
understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix.
23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); ef. Grohmann in Kiiuf-
fer’s Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is,
‘It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened
to arable land) the influences required for a life of devo-
tion to God.’ In the statement immediately following,
éay O€ ddas krX., the comparison seems to be drawn from
salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended;
[but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout
the pass., and take yj to denote the mass of mankind,
see s. v. 4 b. and ef. Tholuck et al. ad loc.].. In Mk.
ix. 50* and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health
and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue ;
[cf. Mey. on the former pass. ]. 3. Salt is a symbol
of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 °, because it protects food
from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. <Ac-
cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the
Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to par-
take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz;
[BB.DD. s. v. Salt]; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4.
Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech: Col. iv. 6 [where
see Bp. Lehtft.].*
"Adacoa: Acts xxvii. 8; cf. Aacata.
[ddcevs, 6, T WH uniformly for dduevs, see Tdf.’s note
on Mk. i. 16 and N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1.; esp. ed. 8,
Proleg. p. 82 sq.; WH. App. p. 151.]
drcihw: impf. 7recov; 1 aor. FrAewa; 1 aor. mid.
impv. dAewvat; [allied with Aim-os grease; cf. Curtius
§ 340; Vanitek p. 811; Peile p. 407; fr. Hom. down];
to anoint: twa or ti, Mk. xvi. 1; Jn. xii. 3; teva or ri
tut [W. 227 (213)], as eAai@, Lk. vii. 46*; Mk. vi. 13;
Jas. v. 14; pup, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46%; Mid:
Mt. vi. 17 (lit. ‘anoint for thyself thy head,’ unge tibi
caput twum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v.
Anoint, ete. Syn. : “ deipev is the mundane and profane,
xpcew the sacred and religious, word.” Trench § xxxviii.
Comp.: é&-aXeida |.*
dAdekTopodwvia, -as, 7, (adexrwp and dary [W. 25]),
the crowing of a cock, cock-crowing: Aesop. fab. 79 [44].
Used of the third watch of the night: Mk. xiii. 35; in
this passage the watches are enumerated into which the
Jews, following the Roman method, divided the night ;
[ef. Win. RWB. s. v. Nachtwachen; B. D.s. v. Watches
of Night; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing ; Wetst. on
Mt. xiv. 25; Wéieseler, Chron. Syn. p. 406 note]. (For
writ. who use this word see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and
add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 83, 24;
Orig. i. 825 b.; Constt. Ap. 5, 18; 5, 19; 8, 34].) *
GNEKTWP
Gd€krap, -opos, 6, acock, (Lat. gallus gallinaceus) : Mt.
xxvi. 34, 74sq.; Mk. xiv. 30, 68 [Lchm. br.], 72; Lk. xxii.
34, 60 sq.3 Jn. xiii.38; xviii. 27. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
229; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 307; W. 23; see also
BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 221 sq. ;
esp. Egli, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Theol., 1879 p. 517 sqq.].*
Aref avSpeds, -cws, 6, an Alexandrian, a native or a resi-
dent of Alexandria (a celebrated city of Egypt): Acts
vi. 9: xviii. 24. [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.) ]*
*AdcEavSpivds [cf. Tdf.’s note on Acts xxvii. 6; GL Tr
Cobet, al. -8pivos; Chandler § 397 note], -n, -6v, Alexan-
drian: Acts xxvii. 6; xxviii. 11. [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)]*
*AdétavSpos [i. e. defender of men], -ov, 6, Alexander ;
‘1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross
of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kin-
dred of the high priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain
Jew: Acts xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an op-
ponent of the apostle Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. iv.
14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the
same man; cf. e. g. Ellic. on the former ].*
dAevpoy, -ov, 76, (dAevw to grind), wheaten flour, meal:
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. Hesych. a\evpa kupiws ta tov
girov, dAdura S€ trav kpOav. (Hadt., Xen., Plat., Jo-
seph., al.) *
dAnPera, -as, 7, (dAnOns), [fr. Hom. down], verity, truth.
I. objectively; 1. univ. what is true in any matter
under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious,
false): Jas. ili. 14; GAnOecav deve, epetv, Jn. viii. 45 sq.;
xvi. 7; Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. xii. 6; 1 Tim. ii. 7; etrev aro
nacay tiv adnGeav, everything as it really was, Mk. v.
33, (so in classics); paprupety Ty adnOeia to testify ac-
cording to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33; ina
broader sense, AaXeiv adnOevay to speak always according
to truth, Eph. iv. 25; [aAnOeias pnuata anopbeyyopat, as
opp- to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 25]; dd7Oeca
éyévero, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14.
év adnécia in truth, truly, as the case is, according to
fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the
divine nature); 2 Co. vii. 14; Col. i. 6; én’ adneias
a. truly, in truth, according to truth: Mk. xii. 32; Lk.
iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i.§ 1). b. of
a truth, in reality, in fact, certainly: Mk. xii. 14; Lk.
xx. 21; [xxii. 59]; Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Rom,
1 Cor. 23, 5 and 47, 3); [cf. W. § 51, 2f.; B. 336 (289) ];
kar dAnéevav in accordance with fact, i. e. (ace. to the
context) justly, without partiality: Ro. ii. 2; etre mpo-
pacet, etre adnOeia, Phil. i. 18; é€v Epyw kK. adnOeia,
1 Jn. iii. 18 [Rec. om. év; so Eph. iv. 21 WH mrg.].
2. In reference to religion, the word denotes what is
true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man,
(‘moral and religious truth’); and that a. with the
greatest latitude, in the sceptical question ri €ori ad7-
dea, Jn. xviii. 38 ; b. the true notions of God which
are open to human reason without his supernatural in-
tervention: Ro. i. 18; also 7 aAnOeva Oeov the truth of
which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, ef. 19, (4) adnOeva rod
Xpiorov, Evang. Nicod. c. 5,2; accordingly it is not, as
many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God [yet
26
arnbetw
see Mey. ad loc.]); truth, the embodiment of which the
Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 20. c. the truth,
as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and
the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respect-
ing the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions
of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and
to the corrupt opinions and precepts of false teachers
even among Christians: 7 dAj@eva tod evayy. the truth
which is the gospel or which the gospel presents, Gal. ii.
5, 14, [ef. W. § 34, 3 a.]; and absol. 4 dAnOera and
ahndea: Jn. i. 14, 17; viii. 32, 40; [xvi. 13]; xvii. 19;
1 Jn. i. 8; ii. 4, 21; 2Jn.1-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Rec.); v. 7;
2 Co. iv..2; xi. 83) Eph. ay. (24592) Th.71.710; 22; 1
Tim. ii. 7 (€v miorec x. dAnOeia in faith and truth, of
which I became a partaker through faith) ; iii. 15; iv.
35 vi. 55 2 Lim ain ss mei Tt. 114s 2 Pet:
i. 12; [3 Jn. 8,12]; 6 Adyos tHs adnOeias, Col. i.5; Eph.
i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Adyos ddnOelas, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i.
18; 680s ths ad. 2 Pet. ii. 2; miotis adnOeias, 2 Th. ii.
13 [W. 186 (175) ]; taxon tis ad. 1 Pet. i. 225 emiyve-
aus ths GA. Heb. x. 26; 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 25; iii.
7; [ Tit. i. 1]; avedpa ris ad. the Spirit (of God) which
is truth (1 Jn. v.6) and imbues men with the knowledge
of the truth, Jn. xiv.17; [xvi. 13]; xv. 26; 1 Jn. iv. 6;
eyo eipe 7 ad7nOeca I am he in whom the truth is summed
up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6; 7 ddnGerd cov [ Ree. |
(i. e. Oeod) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from
thee, Jn. xvii. 17; [€or adnbeva Xprorov év epoi i. e.
controls, actuates, me, 2 Co. xi. 10]; etvat éx tHs dAnOeias
to be eager to know the truth, Jn. xviii. 37 (see éx, II. 7,
and eiui,V.3d.); to proceed from the truth, 1 Jn. ii. 21;
to be prompted and controlled by the truth, 1 Jn.iii. 19;
paptupewv tH adnO. to give testimony in favor of the
truth in order to establish its authority among men, Jn.
xviii. 37; dd7nOecav woreiv to exemplify truth in the life,
to express the form of truth in one’s habits of thought
and modes of living, Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn. i. 6, (Tob. xiii. 6;
iv. 6; cf. Neh. ix. 33; 68dv dAnOeias aiperiCerOa, Ps.
exviii. (cxix.) 30); so also mepumateiy ev tH ad. 2 Jn. 4;
3 Jn. 3 sq.3; dzeiOeiv rn ad. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8;
so also mAavnOnvat ard ths ad. Jas. v. 19. II. sub-
jectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor
of mind which is free from affectation, pretence, simula-
tion, falsehood, deceit: Jn. viii. 44; sincerity of mind
and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony
with divine truth: 1 Co. v. 8; xiii. 6 (opp. to adecia) ;
Eph. iv. 21 [see I. 1 b. above]; v. 9; [vi. 14]; cov 7
dAndeca the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of
thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3;
7) GAnOeva Tov Geod which belongs to God, i. e. his holi-
ness [but cf. wepiooeva, 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7; spec. ve-
racity (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8; ev
adnéeia sincerely and truthfully, 2 Jn.1; 3Jn.1. The
word is not found in Rey. ([nor in 1 Thess., Philem.,
Jude]). Cf. Hélemann, “ Bibelstudien”, (Lpz. 1859) 1te
Abth. p.8 sqq.; [ Wendtin Stud. u. Krit., 1883, p. 511 sqq.]*
dAnPevw ; in prof. writ. ({[Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot.,
al.) to speak the truth; a. to teach the truth: rin
arnOns
Gal. iv. 16. b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) :
Eph. iv. 15. [R. V. mrg. in both pass. to deal truly. ]*
dAnOhs, -és, (a priv. and A7jOw, AaGeiv [AavOdvw], 1d
Anos, — cf. dpabns; lit. not hidden, unconcealed), [itis
Hom. down]; 1. true: Jn. iv. 18; x. 41; xix. 35;
1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp.
to Spaya); Phil. iv. 8; paprupia, Jn. v. 31 sq.; viii.
13 sq. 17; xxi. 24; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. i. 135; xpious, just,
Jn. viii. 16 (L T Tr WH adn); mapoumia, 2 Pet. ii.
22; xdpis, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12.
2. loving the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii.
16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to
mArdvos); of God, In. iii. 33; viii. 26; Ro. ili. 4 (opp. to
Wevorns)- 3. i. gq. dAnOwds, 1: In. vi. 55 (L T Tr
WH,;; for Rec. dAndés), as in Sap. xii. 27, where aAné7s
Geds is contrasted with obs eSdcovv Geovs. Cf. Riickert,
Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this
wordand the next, see Trench § viii. ; Schmidt ch. 178, 6.]*
dAnPivds, -7, -dv, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down;
[twenty-three times in Jn.’s writ.; only five (acc. to
Lchm. six) times in the rest of the N. T.]) ; 1. “that
which has not only the name and semblance, but the real
nature corresponding to the name” (Tittmann p. 155;
[particularly applied to express that which is all that it
pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adul-
terated metal” Donaldson, New Crat. § 258; see, at
length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to
the idea signified by the name, real and true, genuine;
a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary,
simulated, pretended: Oeds (NPN WON, 2 Chr. xv. 3),
1 Th. i. 9; Heb. ix. 14 Lchm.; Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. v. 20.
(arn Ooi pirat, Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it con-
trasts realities with their semblances: oxnvj, Heb. viii.
2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (6 immos contrasted
with 6 év 77 eixdu, Ael. v. h. 2, 3.) c. opp. to what is
imperfect, defective, frail, uncertain: Jn. iv. 23, 37; vil.
28; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah,
Rev. iii. 7; das, Jn. i. 9; 1 In. ii. 8; xpiots, In. vill. 16
(L T Tr WH; Is. lix.4); «pices, Rev. xvi. 7; xix. 2;
dpros, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn.
vi. 32; dymedos, Jn. xv. 1; paprupia, Jn. xix. 35; pdprus,
Rev. iii. 14; Seomdrns, Rev. vi. 10; 6d0/, Rev. xv. 3;
coupled with mords, Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11; substantively,
TO adnOwov the genuine, real good, opp. to external
riches, Lk. xvi. 11, (Lois pév yap adnOwds mrodros év
ovpav@, Philo de praem. et poen. § 17, p. 425 ed.
Mang.; cf. Wetst. on Lk. I. c.]; aOAnrai, Polyb. 1, 6, 6).
2. i. q. adnOns, true, veracious, sincere, (often so in Sept.) :
kapdia, Heb. x. 22 (wer adnOeias *v xapdia adrnOu7, Is.
XXXvili. 3); Adyot, Rev. [xix. 9]; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, (Plut.
apoph. p. 184 e.). [Cf. Cremer 4te Aufl. s. v. adjOea. ] *
ddA; (a com. Grk. form for the Attic dréo, cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41; Lk. xvii.
35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves
to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5),
who were called by the Greeks yuvaixes aXerpides (Hom.
Od. 20, 105); [cf. B. D. s. v. Mill].*
dAnPds, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, in
27
anra
reality; most certainly: Jn. 1.47 (48); iv. 42; vi. 14, 05
Rec.; vii. 26, 40; viii. 81; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. 83; xxvi.
73; [Mk. xiv. 70; Mt.] xxvii. 54; [Mk. xv. 39]; Lk.
ix, 275 xil.44: xxi. 3; Acts xi 1151 Th. 113s. 1 Jn;
et hy
dAtets, -€ws, 6, (GAs, adds, the sea), [fr. Hom. down];
a fisherman, fisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq.; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk.
v. 2, —in all which pass. T and WH have dneeis fr. the
form dAeevs, q. v.*
Arevw; (dAvevs); to fish: Jn. xxi. 3. [Philo, Plut.]*
dArifw: (ars, ddds, salt); to salt, season with salt, sprin-
kle with salt; only the fut. pass. is found in the N. T.:
ev tin GAtoOnoera; by what means can its saltness be
restored? Mt. v.13; @vaia adi dduoOnoera, the sacrifice
is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to
God, Mk. ix. 49 [R GL Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13; Ezek.
xliii. 24; Joseph. antt. 3, 9, 1; cf. Knobel on Lev.
p- 369 sq.; Win. RWB. s. v. Salz; [BB.DD.s. v. Salt]) ;
mas mupt ddioOnoera, every true Christian is rendered
ripe for a holy and happy association with God in his
kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afflictions and
trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge
and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this ex-
tremely difficult passage is explained differently by
others; [cf. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history
of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [ef.
Soph. Lex.]; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] dAé-
ante ev Xptora, iva py diapOapy tes ev dpiv.) [Comp.:
ovv-ari¢w, — but see the word. | *
dAioynpa, -ros, Td, (aAvoyew to pollute, which occurs
Sir. xl. 29; Dan. i. 8; Mal. i. 7,12; akin to dAwa. ddkwéo
to besmear [ Lat. linere, cf. Lob. Pathol. Element. p. 21;
Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex.
p- 145]), pollution, contamination: Acts xv. 20 (rod
dméxecOar xtd. to beware of pollution from the use
of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, cf. vs. 29).
Neither ddiwyéw nor ddioynpua occurs in Grk. writ.*
dG, an adversative particle, derived from adda,
neut. of the adj. a@AAos, which was originally pronounced
addés (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly,
other things sc. than those just mentioned. It differs
from 8é, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441
sq. (411)]. I. But. So related to the preceding words
that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con-
cessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6;
Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii.
48: Ro. v« 14 sq-; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6;
Phil. ii. 27 (adAN 6 Oeds etc.), ete. 2. an objection:
Jue vil 20:1 ho. 18) sqg.5 1 ConxveSacedas. 11. 18:
3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7;
5 PB} 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk.
xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation,
nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp.
with cai added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21; xxiv. 22. dAX’ ovdé,
but... not even (Germ. ja nicht einmal): Lk. xxiii. 14;
Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. otre]; ef. Fritzsche o»
Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardina
matter, especially before imperatives: Mt. ix. 18; Mk
anXra
ix. 22; xvi. 7; LK. vii. 7; Jn. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts ix.
6 [not Rec.]; x. 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti-
cally: aX’ iva, i. e. adda TodTo yéyover, iva, Mk. xiv. 49 ;
Jno xii tes xv. 203 2 Inn. 19: 8. after a condi-
tional or concessive protasis it signifies, at the begin-
ning of the apodosis, yet [ef. W. 442 (411)]: after kai
ei, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [RG]; Mk. xiv. 29 RGL, (2 Mace.
viii. 15); after ei cai, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co.
iv. 16; v. 16; xi. 6; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26); after
et, 1 Co. ix. 2; Ro. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after éap,
1 Co. iv. 15; after etmep, 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. WH br.
ad’ ]; ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq.; Kiihner ii.
p- 827, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding pev: Mk.
ix. 18 [T om. Tr br. pév]; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20;
1 Co. xiv. 17. 10. it is joined to other particles;
adda ye [Grsb. dddaye] (twice in the N. T.): yet at least,
1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely (aber freilich), Lk. xxiv. 21 [L T
Tr WH add kai yea and ete.], cf. Bornemann ad loc.
In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are
not combined without the interposition of the most
emphatic worc between them; cf. Bornemann Il. c.;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 sq. 24 sq.; Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p.
101; [W. 444 (413) ]. ad 7 (arising from the blending
of the two statements ovdev GAXo Ff and ovdey aAXo, adda)
save only, except: 1 Co. iii. 5 (where dAN 7 omitted
by G L T Tr WH is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir.
XXXvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after adda itself, 2 Co. i. 13
[here Lehm. br. a\W before 7]; cf. Klotz u.s. ii. 31 sqq.;
Kiihner ii. p. 824 sq. § 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374
(320) ]. ad od but not, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 (Gif punctu-
ated maperikpavay ; adN ov) for ‘but why do I ask? did
not all,’ ete.; cf. Bleek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. adv
ovxi will he not rather? Lk. xvii. 8. II. preceded by
a negation: but (Lat. sed, Germ. sondern) ; 1. ovk
(un) ...ddAd: Mt. xix. 11; Mk. v. 39; Jn. vii. 16;
1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [ovdev]; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tim. v.
23 [unkxerc], ete. By a rhetorical construction ovk
. a\dd sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much
.as: Mk. ix. 37 (ot« ewe Séyerat, adda Tov arocTei-
Aavra pe); Mt. x. 20; Jn. xii. 44; Acts v. 4; 1 Co. xv.
10; 1 Th. iv. 8; by this form of speech the emphasis is
laid on the second member; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p.
773 sqq.; W. § 55, 8 b.; [B. 356 (306)]. od pdvov...
ada kai not only... but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [4A
iva kai, etc.]; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When xai is
omitted (as in the Lat. non solum... sed), the grada-
tion is strencthened: Acts xix. 26 [Lehm. adds kat];
1 Jn. v. 6; adda TOANG paddor, Phil. ii. 12; ef. Fritzsche
l. c. p. 786 sqq.; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317).
2. The negation to which ddd pertains is suppressed,
but can easily be supplied upon reflection [W. 442
(412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in each passage,
before dda supply ‘ you will say you did not go out into
the wilderness for this purpose’); Acts xix. 2 (we have
not received the Holy Spirit, but ...); Gal. ii. 3 (they
said not one word in opposition to me, but...) ; 2 Co.
vii. 11 (where before ada, repeated six times by ana-
phora, supply od povoy with the accus. of the preceding
28
addopat
word). It is used in answers to questions having the
force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts
xv. 11; 1 Co. x. 20. dAda Wa [or GAN’ iva, cf. W. 40;
B. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297);
620 (576); Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.]: Jn. i. 8 (sup-
ply adda HAGev, wa) ; ix. 3 (GAAA TUpAds eyevero [or eye
vnOn], va); Mk. iv. 22 (adAa totoire eyevero, iva). [“The
best Mss. seem to elide the final a before nouns, but
not before verbs” Scrivener, Plain Introduction, ete.,
p- 14; but see Dr. Gregory’s full exhibition of the facts
in Tdf. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that
“elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a,
almost always before v, often before ¢ and n, rarely
before o and @, never before 4; and it should be noticed
that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words
ev, iva, OTL, ov, ws, prefer the form dA”; see also WH.
App. p. 146. Cf. W. § 5,1.; B. p. 10.]
dAAdoow: fut. d\Ad€o; 1 aor. #AAa~a; 2 fut. pass.
d\Xaynoopar; (aAdos); [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to change:
to cause one thing to cease and another to take its
place, ra €6n, Acts vi. 14; rv devnv to vary the voice,
i. e. to speak in a different manner according to the
different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and
form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now
severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad
loc.]. to exchange one thing for another: ri &v tu,
Ro. i. 23 (a Yn Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; the Greeks say da-
Adooew ti twos [cf. W. 206 (194), 888 (863); Vaughan
on Rom.1|.¢.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq.; Heb. i.
12. [Come.: dz-, dt-, kat-, ao-Kat-, pet-, Tvy-adAdaooe. |*
raxdbev, adv., from another place: Jn. x. 1 (i. q.
a@\dobev [which the grammarians prefer, Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritschl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 11]; cf.
éxaotaxdbev, mavtaxdbev). [(Antiph., al.) ]*
ddAAaxod, adv., i. g. GAoH, elsewhere, in another place:
Mk. i. 38 (T "De txty Wie Dr mre. br) Ci Bome-
mann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph.,
Xen., al.; see Thom. M. and Moer. as in the preced.
word. | *
dAAnyopew, -@: [pres. pass. ptep. adAnyopovpevos |; i. e.
Go péev ayopeto, Gdrdo S€ voeéw, “aliud verbis, aliud
sensu ostendo” (Quint. instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle-
gorically or in a figure: Gal. iv. 24. (Philo, Joseph.,
Plut., and gram. writ.; [ef. Mey. on Gal. 1. e.].) *
GdAnAovia, [ WH. ‘AAX. and -a; see Intr. § 408], Hebr.
m-159n, praise ye the Lord, Hallelujah: Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq.
6. [Sept. Pss. passim; Tob. xiii. 18; 3 Mace. vii. 13.]*
é\Afvov, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat.
-ols, -ats, -ols ; ACC. -oUs, -as, -a, One another ; reciprocally,
mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxvill. 25;
to. 1. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Hom.
down. |
GAdoyevis, -és, (GAXos and yévos), sprung from another
race, a foreigner, alien: Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen.
xvii. 27; Ex. xii. 43, ete.], but nowhere in prof. writ.)*
GdAopar; impf. HAASpy; aor. HAayny and HAduny (Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47) ]); to
leap (Lat. salio): Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. 7AAero;
aAAos
GLT Tr WH aro); to spring up, gush up, of water,
Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. salire, Vere. ecl. 5, 47; Suet.
Octav. 82). [Comp.: e&-, e-addopat. | *
GAXos, -7, -o, [cf. Lat. alius, Germ. alles, Eng. else; fr.
Hom. down], another, other; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii.
42; xx. 3; Mk. vi. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (dAdo
pev GAXo), and often. b. as an adj.: Mt. ii. 12; iv.
21; Jn. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 29 (GAN cuveidnars i. €. 7 our.
@\Aov Twos). c. with the art.: 6 Gos the other (of
two), Mt. v. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107) ];
ot cAAoe all others, the remainder, the rest: Jn. xxi. 8;
1 Co. xiv. 29.
[Syn. AAs, Erepos: &A. as compared with ér. denotes
numerical in distinction from qualitative difference; %A. adds
(‘one besides’), ér. distinguishes (‘one of two’); every ér.
is an @A., but not every HA. is a ér.; *A. generally ‘ denotes
simply distinction of individuals, érepos involves the sec-
ondary idea of difference of kind’; e.g. 2 Co. xi. 4; Gal.i.
6,7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass. ; Trench
§ xev.; Schmidt ch. 198.]
&ddoTpLo-erlokoros (LT Tr WH addorprez.), -ov, 6,
(ad\Xdrpios and emricxoros), one who takes the supervision
of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a
meddler in other men’s matters |: 1 Pet. iv. 15 (the writer
seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate
zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether
public or private, civil or sacred —in order to make them
conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (ef.
Einl. ins N. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat.
delator.|_ The word is found again only in Dion. Areop.
ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another’s office),
and [Germ. of Const. ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteler.
Eccl. Graec. Mon. ii. 481 b.; [ef. W. 25, 99 (94) ].*
GASTpLos, -a, -ov; 1. belonging to another (opp. to
tdtos), not one’s own: Heb. ix. 25; Ro. xiv. 4; xv. 20;
2°Co. x. 15 sq.5 1.Tim. v.22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk.
xvi. 12 (opp. to TO tperepor). 2. foreign, strange:
yn, Acts vii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; not of one’s own family,
alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. Il.
5, 214; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).*
GAASHvAOS, -ov, (GAXos, and PddAov race), foreign, (in
prof. auth. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down); when used in
Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen-
tile, [A. V. one of another nation]: Acts x. 28. (Philo,
Joseph.)*
ddAws, adv., (dAdos), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise:
1 Tim. v. 25 (ra GAXas exovra, which are of a different
sort i. e. which are not cada épya, [al. which are not
mpoonaAa }).*
dAodw, -@; (connected with 7 ddws or 7 ddan, the
floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out); to
thresh, (Ammon. 16 emt tH GA@ mare kai rpiBew ras
ordaxvas): 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv.
4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.*
d-Aoyos, -ov, (Adyos reason) ; 1. destitute of reason,
brute: ێa, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap.
xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason,
absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11,1; Thue. 6, 85;
often in Plat., Isocr., al.).*
29
aromne
GAs [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -ys, 7, (com-
monly €vAadén, ayddAoxov), Plut., the aloe, aloes: Jn.
xix. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in
eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and
bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in
embalming the dead (as, ace. to Hdt., the Egyptians
did), Hebr. n° and mons [see Mihlau and Volck
s. vv.], Num. xxiv. 6; Ps. xlv. 9; Prev. vii. 17; Cant.
iv. 14. Arab. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloé [Low § 235; BB.DD].*
GAs, dAds, 6, see GXas.
GAuKés, -7, -dv, salt (i. q. GApvpds): Jas. iii. 12.
({Hippoer., Arstph.,] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e.; Aristot.,
Theophr., al.) *
dAvToSs, -ov, (Avan), free from pain or grief: Phil. ii. 28.
(Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Plat. down.)*
dAvots, or as it is com. written Gdvors [see WH. App.
p- 144], -ews, 7, (fr. a priv. and Ave, because a chain is
addvros i. e. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w.
eikew to restrain, ddi¢@ to collect, crowd; Curtius § 660;
Vanitek p. 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or
any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound: Mk. v. 3; Acts
Xxl. 33; xxviii. 20; Rev. xx. 1; ev ddvoec in chains, a
prisoner, Eph. vi. 20; ov« emaucxvv6n thy GX. pov he was
not. ashamed of my bonds i. e. did not desert me be-
cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec. used of a
manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are
bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Mk. u.i.; per contra
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8]: Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29];
Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hat. down.)*
dAvotredts, -€s, (AvowreAns, See Avoirehew), UNprosil-
able, (Xen. vectig. 4,6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious :
Heb. xiii. 17. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)*
dAda, rd, indecl.: Rev. i. 8; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. See A.
*Addaios [WH ‘AdAd., see their Intr. § 408], -aiov, 6,
can, cf. 13M ’Ayyaios, Hag.i.1), Alpheus or Alpheus;
1. the father of Levi the publican: Mk. ii. 14, see Aevi,
4, 2. the father of James the less, so called, one of
the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15;
Actsi. 13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn.
xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called KAwzas
after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. ‘DIN ace.
to which M was changed into x, as M09 gacex, 2 Chr.
xxx. 1. Cf. IdxkwBos, 2; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Alpheus ;
also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp.
92,103); Weitzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 1883, p. 620 sq. ].*
drwy, -ovos, 7, (in Sept. also 6, cf. Ruth iii. 2; Job
Xxxix. 12), i. q. 9 GA@s, gen. Gro, a ground-plot or thresh-
ing-floor, i. e. a place in the field itself, made hard after
the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed
out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass., by
meton. of the container for the thing contained, doy is
the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed
out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr.
1, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place
ddéva) ; [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by
Aristot. de vent. 3, Opp. ii. 973%, 14].*
dddamé, -exos, 7, @ fox: Mt. viii. 20: Lk. ix. 58.
adAwaots
Metaph. a sly and crafty man: Lk. xiii. 32; (in the
same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol.
30, 2; Pind. Pyth. 2, 141; Plut. Sulla 28, 5).*
wors, -ews, 7, (GAdw, Gdioxopat to be caught), a catch-
ing, capture: 2 Pet. ii. 12 eis GAwou to be taken, [some
would here take the word actively: to take]. (Fr.
Pind. and Hdt. down.) *
gpa [Skr. sa, sama; Eng. same; Lat. simul; Germ.
sammt, etc.; Curtius § 449; Vanitek p. 972. Fr. Hom.
down |; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together :
Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 3; 1 Tim. v. 13;
Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. iii. 12. 2
prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat.: Mt. xiii.
29. dua mpwt early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, Gin Grk.
writ. dua TO HAlw, dua TH Hpepa)- In 1 Th. iv. 17 and
v. 10, where Gua is foll. by ctv, dua is an adv. (at the
same time) and must be joined to the verb.®
[Synx. Gua, duod: the distinction given by Ammonius
(de diff. voc. s. v.) et al., that @uais te mporal, duov local,
seems to hold in the main; yet see Ro. iii. 12, and cf. Hesych.
eA
dualts, -és, Zen. -ovs, (uavOdva, whence éuador, 7d pddos,
ef. ddnOns), unlearned, ignorant: 2 Pet. iii. 16. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
duapévrivos, -ov, (fr. dudpavros, as pddwos made of
roses, fr. pddov a rose; cf. dxdvO.vos), composed of ama-
ranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or
fades, and when plucked off revives if moistened with
water; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immor-
tality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.]; Plin. h. n. 21
(15), 23 [al.47]): orépavos, 1 Pet. v.4. (Found besides
only in Philostr. her. 19, p. 741; [and (conjecturally) in
Boeckh, Corp. Inserr. 155, 39, c. B. C. 340].)* —*
dudpavros, -ov, (fr. papaivw; cf. duiavros, aparros, etc.),
not fading away, unfading, perennial; Vulg. immarcesci-
bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [Diosce. 4, 57, al.];
see duapdvtivos): 1 Pet. i.4. Found elsewhere only in
Sap. vi. 13; [€w7 dap. Sibyll. 8, 411; Boeckh, Corp.
Inscrr. ii. p. 1124, no. 2942 c, 4; Leian. Dom. ec. 9].*
dpaprave; fut. duaprnow (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15;
in the latter pass. LT Tr WH give dyaprnowper for
RG dpaprncopev), in class. Grk. dyaprnoopa; 1 aor.
(later) nudptnoa, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (cf. W.
82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. qyaprov; pf. nudprnka;
(ace. to a conjecture of Bitm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv.
and peipw, peipopat, pepos, prop. to be without a share in,
sc. the mark); prop. to miss the mark, (Hom. Il. 8, 311,
etc.; with gen. of the thing missed, Hom. II. 10, 372;
4, 491; rov oxorov, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.; ris dod,
Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly
to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor,
to door go wrong. [Even the Sept., although the Hebr.
xUN also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve
duapt. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the
Hebr. signifies to miss one’s aim in the literal sense,
they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in par-
ticular efapapravew, Judg. xx. 16.” Zezschwitz, Profan-
graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the N. T.
30
admaptia
to wander from the law of God, violate God’s law, sin;
a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. v. 14; viii. 11; ix. 2 sq.;
1 Jn. i. 10; ii. 1; iii. 6, 8 sq.; v- 18; Ro. ii. 12; iil. 23;
vy. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph.
iv. 26; 1 Tim. v. 20; Tit. iii, 11; Heb. ili, 17; x. 26
(éxovoiws) ; [2 Pet. ii. 4]; of the violation of civil laws,
which Christians regard as also the transgression of divine
law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. dpuapravew duapriav to commit
(lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, (peydAnv dpapriay, Ex. xxxii.
30 sq. Hebr. ARUN NUN; alcxpay dp. Soph. Phil. 1249;
peydAa duaptypara duapravew, Plat. Phaedo p.113 e.); ef.
dyatraw, sub fin. dpapravew eis teva [B. 173 (150); W. 233
(219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (L.T WH om. Tr mrg. br. eis c€),
21; Lk. xv. 18, 21; xvii. 3 Rec.,4; 1 Co. viii. 12; ri eis
Kaicapa, Acts xxv. 8; eis 70 tStov o@pa, 1 Co. vi. 18, (eis
atrovs te kat eis dAdovs, Plat. rep. 3, p. 396 a.; eis rd
ciov, Plat. Phaedr. p. 242 c¢.; eis Oeovs, Xen. Hell. 1, 7,
19, ete.; (ef. dp. xupio Oe, Bar. i. 13; ii. 5]); Hebraisti-
cally, évamidv (7397) twos [B. § 146, 1] in the presence of,
before any one, the one wronged by the sinful act being,
as it were, present and looking on: Lk. xv. 18, 21, (18.
vii. 6; Tob. iii. 3, ete.; [ef. évavre xvpiov, Bar. i. 17]).
[For reff. see duapria. Comp.: mpo-apaptave. |*
dpdprnpa, -ros, rd, (fr. duaptéw i. q. duaprave, cf. aoi-
knua, ddioynpa), a sin, evil deed, [“ Differunt 7 dpapria et
ro dudprnua ut Latinorum peccat us et peccatum. Nam
rd dudprnua et peccatum proprie malum facinus indi-
cant; contra # duapria et peccatus primum peccationem,
ro peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentem, valent.”
Fritzsche ; see éuapria, fin. ; cf. also Trench § lxvi.]: Mk.
iii. 28, and (LT Trtxt. WH) 29; iv. 12 (where GT Tr
txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. ra dpapr.); Ro. iii. 25; 1 Co.
vi. 18; 2 Pet. i 9 (REL WH txt. Tr mrg.] duapridv).
In prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. down; [of bodily de-
fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; dp. prnpovxdr, Cic. ad Att.
13, 21; dp. ypaduxdy, Polyb. 34, 3, 11; Orav pev Tapaddyws
f BAdBn yevnta, drdxnua: Grav b€ pr mapaddyas, dvev de
kaxias, dudptnpa Srav b€ cidas pev py mpoBovdevoas Oe,
ddixnpa, Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 10 p. 1135”, 16 sq. ].*
dpapria, -as, 7, (fr. 2 aor. dyapteiv, as amoruxia fr.
dmoruyeiv), a failing to hit the mark (see duapravo). In
Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thue. down). 1st, an error
of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. im
Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861)
p-57n.99]). 2d, a bad action, evil deed. Inthe N. T.
always in an ethical sense, and 1. equiv. to ro duap-
ravew a sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com-
mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and actior
(cf. Cic. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; id’ dpapriay
elvac held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9; émipévew 7H duapria, Ro.
vi. 1; droOvnokew Th dp. and Civ ev airy, Ro. vi. 2; thy dp.
ywaokev, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 213 vexpos 7H dp. Ro. vi.
11; wept duaprias to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [ef.
Mey.]; capa tis du. the body as the instrument of sin,
Ro. vi. 6; dwdrn THs dp. the craft by which sin is accus-
tomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; dv@pwmos tis du. [dvouias
T Tr txt. WH txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he
seems unable to exist without it, the man utterly given up
dyapria
to sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. § 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense 7
dpapria (i. q. rd Guaprdvew) as a power exercising domin-
ion over men (sin as a principle and power) is rhetorically
represented as an imperial personage in the phrases 7
dp. Baowrever, kuptever, xatrepyacera, Ro. v. 21; vi. 12,
14; vii. 17, 20; Sovdrevew 7 dy. Ro. vi. 6; dSovdAos ris
ép. Jn. viii. 34 [WH br. Gom. rs du.J; Ro. vi. 17; vdpos
ris dp. the dictate of sin or an impulse proceeding from
it, Ro. vii. 23; viii. 2; Svvapes rjs du. 1 Co. xv. 56; (the
prosopopeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, ace. to the read-
ing dyapria, in Sir. xxvii. 10). ‘Thus dyapria in sense,
but not in signification, is the source whence the
several evil acts proceed; but it never denotes vitiosity.
2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin,
an offence, a violation of the divine law in thought or in
act (7 duapria éoriv 7 dvouia, 1 Jn. iii.4); a. generally:
Jas. i. 15; Jn. viii. 46 (where duapr. must be taken to
mean neither error, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt-
ing the people, but sin viewed generally, as is well
shown by Liicke ad loc. and Ullmann in the Stud. u.
Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [cf. his Siindlosigkeit Jesu
p- 66 sqq. (Eng. trans. of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)]; the
thought is, ‘If any one convicts me of sin, then you may
lawfully question the truth and divinity of my doctrine,
for sin hinders the perception of truth’); ywpis duaprias
so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. 15; moveiy duap-
riav and rv dp. In. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 7;
1 Pet. ii. 22; yew duapriay to have sin as though it were
one’s odious private property, or to have done something
needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, Jn. ix.
41; xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; 1 Jn.i. 8, (so aia éyew, of one
who has committed murder, Eur. Or. 514); very often
in the plur. dyapria [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing.
occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16; [Jas. v. 16
LT Tr WH]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., etc.; mAjOo0s dpapriar,
Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; movety dyaprias, Jas. v. 15; also
in the expressions d@eots duapti@v, dduevat ras dp., etc.
(see adinut, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself
denote the quilt or penalty of sins, but the sins are con-
ceived of as removed so to speak from God’s sight,
regarded by him as not having been done, and there-
fore are not punished. éy dyapt. od eyervnOns dros thou
wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born,
i. e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. ix.
34; ev rais du. aroOvnckew to die loaded with evil deeds,
therefore unreformed, Jn. viii. 24; ru év dpaprias eva
still to have one’s sins, sc. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17.
b. some particular evil deed: tiv ap. tavtny, Acts vii. 60 ;
maoa duapria, Mt. xii. 31; duapria mpos Oavarov, 1 Jn. v. 16
(an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from
the state of (#7 received from Christ into the state of
Oavaros (cf. Oavaros, 2) in which he was before he be-
came united to Christ by faith; cf. Liicke, DeWette, [esp.
Westcott, ad 1.]). 3. collectively, the complex or
aggregate of sins committed either by a single person or by
many: aipew THY dp. Tod Kdopov, Jn. i. 29 (see aipa, 3
€.) 3 droOvickew éy TH dp. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ;
mepi duaprias, sc. Ovoias [W. 583 (542); B. 393 (336)],
31
Ape“ Tos
expiatory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (acc. to the usage of the
Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. HXUN and
non, e.g. Lev. v.11; vii. 27 (37); Ps. xxxix. (1) 7)
xepis duaprias having no fellowship with the sin which
he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for
the concrete, i. q. duaptwdds: Ro. vii. 7 (6 vopos dpapria,
opp. to 6 vdpos dytos, vs. 12); 2 Co. v. 21 (roy... duapriav
éroinoev he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner).
Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq.; [see dydprnpa;
Trench § lxvi.].
Gudptupos, -ov, (uaprus), without witness or testimony,
unattested: Acts xiv. 17. (Thuc., Dem., Joseph., Plut.,
Leian., Hdian.) *
dpaptwdds, -dv, (fr. the form dydpro, as deidwdos from
geiSouar), devoted to sin, a (masc. or fem.) sinner. In
the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called
dpaptaAds who is a. not free from sin. In this sense
all men are sinners; as, Mt. ix. 13; Mk. ii.17; Lk. v. 8,
32'S, Ds oavin Lo ho. t2* ve[8 1 9%. 9 Pim, 15
Heb. vii. 26. b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked ;
a. univ.: 1 Tim.i.9; Jude 15; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. vi. 32—
84; vil. 37, 393 xv. 7, 10; Jn.ix. 16, 24 sq. 31; Gal. ii.
7; Heb. xii. 3; Jas. iv.8; v.20; 1 Pet.iv.18; dyapria
itself is called duaptwdds, Ro. vii. 13. —B. spec., of men
stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g.
the tax-gatherers: Lk. xv. 2; xvill. 13; xix. 7; hence the
combination reA@vat xai dpapradoi, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; xi. 19;
Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen,
called by the Jews sinners xar’ e£oxnv (1 Mace. i. 34;
ii. 48, 62; Tob. xiii. 6): Mt. xxvi. 45 [7]; Mk. xiv. 41;
Lk. xxiv. 7; Gal. ii. 15. (The word is found often in
Sept., as the equiv. of RUM and yw, and in the O. T.
Apocr.; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic.
2, 9 p. 11095, 33; Plut. de audiend. poét. 7, p. 25 c.)*
dpaxos, -ov, (uaxn), in Grk. writ. [fr. Pind. down]
commonly not to be withstood, invincible; more rarely
abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4,1, 16; Hell. 4, 4,
9); in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious: 1 Tim.
ii. 3; Tit. iii. .2.*
dpdw, -@: 1 aor. qunoa; (fr. dua together; hence to
gather together, cf. Germ. sammeln; [al. regard the init.
a as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng.
mow, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that
of gathering in secondary ; cf. Vani¢ek p. 673]); freq. in
the Grk. poets, to reap, mow down: tas x@pas, Jas. v. 4.*
dye8vo-ros, -ov, 7, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet
and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19; ace. to Phavorinus so
called 8:a 76 dreipyew THs pebns [so Plut. quaest. conviv.
iii,1; 35.6]): Rev. xxi. 20...; [C£..B. D. s..v.]*
dyedéw, -@; fut. queAnow; 1 aor. nueAnoa; (fr. awedns,
and this fr. a priv. and pedo to care for); very com. in
prof. auth.; to be careless of, to neglect: twds, Heb. ii. 3 ;
viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foll. by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 RG;
without a case, dveAnoavtes (not caring for what had just
been said [A. V. they made light of it]), Mt. xxii. 5.*
G-peprrros, -ov, (wepqopat to blame), blameless, deserv-
ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis), free from fault
or defect: Lk.i.6; Phil. ii. 15; iii. 6; 1 Th. iii. 13 [WH
AMELTTTOWS
mrg. duéuntos]; Heb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lack-
inz); in Sept. i. q. oA, Job i. 1, 8 ete. Com. in Grk.
writ. [Cf. Trench § ciii.]*
G-péurrrws, adv., blamelessly, so that there is no cause for
censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [iii. 183 WH mrg.]; v. 23. [Fr.
Aeschyl. down. Cf. Trench § ciii.]*
Gépiavos, -ov, (uepyva), free from anxiety, free from
care: Mt. xxviii. 14; 1 Co. vii. 82 (free from earthly
cares). (Sap. vi. 16; vii. 23; Hdian. 2, 4, 3; 3, 7,11;
Anth. 9, 359, 5; [in pass. sense, Soph. Ajax 1206].) *
d-peTabetos, -ov, (ueraTiOnur), not transposed, not to be
transferred ; fixed, unalterable: Heb. vi. 18; 76 duerade-
tov as subst., immutability, Web. vi. 17. (3 Mace. v. 1;
Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *
d-pera-Kivytos, -ov, (weTaKiwvew), not to be moved from its
place, unmoved; metaph. firmly persistent, [A. V. unmov-
able]: 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a.; Dion. Hal.
8, 74.7 [ Joseph. c. Ap.'2,°16, 9'; 2)'32; 3°; 2,35; 4 ]:)*
G-peTapeAntos, -ov, (jeTapeAopat, prerapeder), not re-
pented of, unregretted: Ro. xi. 29; swrtnpia, by litotes,
salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10 [al. con-
nect it with werqaoay|. (Plat., Polyb., Plut.) *
dperavontos, -ov, (ueTavoew, q. V-), admitting no change
of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent: Ro. ii. 5.
(In Leian. Abdic. 11 [passively], i. q. duetayéAnros, q. V-;
[Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)*
GyueTpos, -ov, (weTpov a measure), without measure, im-
mense: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. (eis Ta Guetpa Kavyacda to
boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, ex-
cessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206,
ed. Jacobs. )*
apy, Hebr. 28; 1. verbal adj. (fr. }28 to prop;
Niph. to be firm), firm, metaph. faithful: 6 duny, Rev.
iii. 14 (where is added 6 paptus 6 miotds k. dAnOwds). 2.
it came to be used as an adverb by which something is
asserted or confirmed: a. at the beginning of a dis-
course, surely, of a truth, truly; so freq. in the discourses
of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk.: dpujy dA€éyo tpiv ‘I sol-
emnly declare unto you,’ e.g. Mt. v.18; Mk. iii. 28;
Lk. iv. 24. ‘The repetition of the word (div aunv), em-
ployed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has
the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52);
iii. 3. b. at the close of a sentence; so it is, so be it,
may it be fulfilled (yévorro, Sept. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii.
15, ete.): Ro.i. 25; ix.5; Gal.i.5; Eph. iii. 21; Phil. iv.
20; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb. xiii. 21; 1 Pet. iv.11; Rev. i. 6,
and often; cf. Jer. xi. 5; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6; 1 K. i. 30.
It was a custom, which passed over from the synagogues
into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had
read or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to
God, the others in attendance responded Amen, and
thus made the substance of what was uttered their own:
1 Co. xiv. 16 (76 auny, the well-known response Amen),
cf. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq.; Neh. v.13; viii. 6.
2 Co. i. 20 ai emayyeXia... 7d vai, Kai... 7d apny, i. e.
had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D.s.v. Amen.]
GyATwp, -opos, 6, 7), (unTnp), without a mother, mother-
tess; in Grk. writ- 1. born wethout a mother, e. g.
32
"AumrAias
Minerva, Eur. Phoen. 666 sq., al.; God himself, inasmuch
as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft
of a mother, Hat. 4, 154, al. 3. born of a base or un-
known mother, Eur. Ion 109 ef. 837. 4. unmotherly,
unworthy of the name of mother: pyryp dunrep, Soph.
El. 1154. Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5.
in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ‘ whose mother is not
recorded in the genealogy’: of Melchizedek, Heb. vii. 3;
(of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. haer.
§ 12; [ef. Bleek u.s.]); ef. the classic dvodupmds.*
d-plavTos, -ov, (ytaivw), not defiled, unsoiled ; free from
that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and de-
based, or its force and vigor impaired: koirn pure, free
from adultery, Ieb. xiii. 4; «Anpovouia (without defect),
1 Pet. 1.4; @pnoxeia, Jas. i. 27; pure from sin, Heb. vii.
26. (Also in the Grk. writ.; in an ethical sense, Plat.
lege. 6, p. 777 e.; Plut. Pericl. c. 39 Bios xaOapds Kat
apiavtos.)*
"ApwwadaB, 6, 77D) (servant of the prince, [al. my
people are noble; but cf. B. D.s. v.]), [A. V. Aminadab],
the prop. name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr.
ii. 10 [A. V. Amminadab]): Mt. i. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [not
WH. See B. D. s. v.].*
&ppos, -ov, 7, sand; acc. to a Hebr. comparison ap. ris
Gadaoons and dp. mapa rd xeidos THs Gad. are used for
an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Heb. xi. 12;
Rev. xx. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Acc. to the con-
text sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr.
often, Plut., Sept. often.) *
dpves, -ov, 6, [fr. Soph. and Arstph. down], a lamb:
Acts viii. 32; 1 Pet.i. 19; rod Geo, consecrated to God,
Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is likened to a
sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and
patiently endured, to expiate sin.
dorBh, -7s, 7, (fr. dueiBa, as adoupy fr. addeipa, oroi8n
fr. ore(Bw), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital,
recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of
the mid. dueiBoua to requite, return like for hke): ina
good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.*
Gprredos, -ov, 7, [fr. Hom. down], a vine: Mt. xxvi. 29;
Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii. 18; Jas. iii. 12. _InJn. xv. 1,4 sq.
Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts
to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses
into his followers his own divine strength and life. dur.
Ths yns in Rey. xiv. 18 [Rec% om. ris au], 19, signifies
the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are
likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into
the wine-press, and trodden there.*
dyureAoupyss, -0v, 6, 7, (fr. Gumedos and EPTQ), a vine-
dresser: Lk. xiii. 7.. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al.; Sept.
for 073.)*
dureXdv, -@vos, 6, a vineyard: Mt. xx. 1 sqq.; xxi. 28,
[33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xili. 6]; xx. 9 sqq.;
1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept.; Diod. 4,6; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)*
’"Apmdlas [T ’AumAlatos, Tr WH Limrg. ’Apmdcaros ;
hence accent ’Aumdras; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505;
Chandler § 32], -ov, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the
Lat. Ampliatus, which form appears in some authorities,
See apviov.*
’Aurriaros
ef. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi.
8. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p.174; ef. The Atheneum
for March 4, 1882, p. 289 sq.]*
*Apmdlaros (Tdf.) or more correctly ’Aymdaros (L
mre. Tr WH) i. q. ’AprAias, q. Vv.
dpivew: 1 aor. mid. jpuvapny; [allied w. Lat. munio,
moenia, ete., Vanitek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk.
writ. [fr. Hom. down] to ward off, keep off any thing
from any one, ri re, acc. of the thing and dat. of pers. ;
hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assist any
one (Thue. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Mid. dptvopas, with ace.
of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one’s self; to
defend one’s self against any one (so also 2 Mace. x. 17;
Sap. xi. 3; Sept. Josh. x. 13); to take vengeance on any
one (Xen. an. 2, 3, 23; Joseph. antt. 9, 1, 2): Acts vii.
24, where in thought supply rév dduodvra [cf. B. 194
(168) note; W. 258 (242)].*
dudidte; [fr. audi, lit. to put around]; to put on,
clothe: in Lk. xii. 28 L WH dyduager for Rec. auduévyvar.
(A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Job
xxix. 14; [xxxi. 19]; xl.5; Ps. lxxii.6 Symm.; several
times in Themist.; ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 112; [Veitch
s.v.; B.49 (42 sq.) ; Steph. s. v. col. 201 c. quotes from
Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 7d pev dudielw eort
kowas, To b€ audiafo Awpixdy, Gomep TO UmomEfw Kai
tromadta|.) Cf. duu o.*
audi-Badrdrw ; to throw around, i. q. mepiBaddo, of a gar-
ment (Hom. Od. 14, 342); to cast to and fro now to one
side now to the other: anet, Mk.i. 16 GLT Tr WH [ace.
to T Tr WH used absol.; cf. of duduBoreis, Is. xix. 8].
(Hab. i. 17.)*
dudiBrnortpov, -ov, 76, (aupuBdddo), in Grk. writ. any-
thing thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains,
a garment; spec. a net for fishing, [casting-net]: Mk. i.
16 RG.L; Mt. iv. 18.. (Sept.; Hes. scut..215; Hdt. 1,
141; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syn. see dixrvov, and cf.
Trench § Ixiv.; B. D.s. v. net.]*
dudrelo, i. q. dudsevvyr; in Lk. xii. 28 dugueCer T Tr.
Cf. audiago.
dudi-evvupe; pf. pass. nudlecuar; (evyvyc); [fr. Hom.
down J; to put on, to clothe: Lk. xii. 28 (RG; cf. duduego) ;
Mt. vi. 30; & ru [B. 191 (166) ], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.*
*Audtarodts, -ews, 7, Amphipolis, the metropolis of
Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia]; so called,
because the Strymon flowed around it ['Thuc. 4, 102];
formerly called ’Evvéa 680i (Thuc. 1,100): Acts xvii. 1
[see B. D.].*
Gudodoyv, -ov, Td, (audi, 6dds), prop. a road round any-
thing, a street, [Hesych. dugdoda: ai priya. ayuai. diodo:
(al. du€£0dor Stopvypai, al. 7 mAateia); Lex. in Bekk. An-
ecdota i. p. 205, 14 "Audodov: 7 adomep ex TeTpayavou
Suryeypappérn 606s. For exx. see Soph. Lex.; Wetst. on
Mk. 1. c.; cod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.’s
note) |]: Mk. xi.4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and
in Grk. writ.) *
dydrepor, -ar, -a, [fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the
one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, etc.; ra duddrepa, Acts
xxiii. 8; Eph. ii. 14.
315) av
G-popntos, -ov, (~wpdoua), that cannot be censured,
blameless: Phil. ii. 15 RG (ef. réxva popnra, Deut.
xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Hom. Il. 12, 109; [Ilesiod,
Pind., al.;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)*
dpwpov, -ov, rd, amomum, a fragrant plant of India,
having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce]
and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment
was made (Plin. h. n. 12, 13 [28]): Rev. xviii. 13 GL
T Tr WH. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]*
G-pwpos, -ov, (uapos), without blemish, free from faulti-
ness, as a victim without spot or blemish: 1 Pet. i. 19
(Ley. xxii. 21); Heb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is
made to the sinless life of Christ. Ethically, without
blemish, faultless, unblamable: Eph. i. 4; v. 27; Col. i.
29> .Bhil.ii, 15)L. Dd: WH >, Inde) 243. Rev.) xini.ds
(Often in Sept.; [Hesiod, Simon., Iambl.], Hdt. 2, 177,
Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theocr. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench
§ ciii.; Tittmann i. 29 sq.]*
"Apay, 6, indecl., Amon, (;\08 artificer [but ef. B. D.]),
king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah:
Mt.i.10, [LT Tr WH <pas. Cf. B..D.].*
"Apds, 6, Amos, (7718 strong), indecl. prop. name of one
of Christ’s ancestors: {Mt.i.10 LT Tr W 11]; Lk. iii. 25.*
dy, a particle indicating that something can or could
occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of
certain fortuitous causes. In Lat. it has no equivalent ;
nor do the Eng. haply, perchance, Germ. wohl (wol),
etwa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The
use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious
exx. fr. Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [cf. B. 216
(186) sqq. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exhibited (by
Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.].
It is joined _ I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen-
tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the
impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 (eyivaoxey ay, sciret,
he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (€Xéyere av ye would say) ; Mt.
xxiii. 30 (non essemus, we should not have been); Jn.
WiiAG svi 42's 3x, 41): xv. 195) xvill.)36%) 1 Co. xi.315
Gal. i. 10; iii. 21 [but WH mrg. br.]; Heb. iv. 8; viii. 4,
7. 2. with the indic. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the
plpf. subj. like the fut. pf. subj., J would have done it),
to express what would have been, if this or that either
were (ei with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or
had been (ei with the aor. or plpf. preceding): Mt. xi.
21 and Lk. x. 13 (ay perevénoay they would have re-
pented); Mt. xi 23; xii. 7 (ye would not have con-
demned); Mt. xxiv. 43 (he would have watched), 22 and
MK. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i.e. all even now
would have to be regarded as those who had perished ;
cf. W. 304 (286)); Jn. iv. 10 (thou wouldst have asked) ;
Xiv. 2 (etrov dv I would have said so); 28 (ye would have
rejoiced) ; Ro. ix. 29 (we should have become); 1 Co. ii.
8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes the
condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered
from what is said: Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (J should
have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given
it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf.: Jn. xi. 21
[R Tr mrg.] (ovx dy erebvqxes [LT Tr txt. WH aze6avev}
av 34
would not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. ovx« dav
dréOave) ; Jn. xiv. 7 [not Tdf.] (ei with the plpf. preced-
ing); 1 Jn. ii. 19 (they would have remained with us).
Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., esp. the later) dy is omitted,
in order to intimate that the thing wanted but little
(impf.) or had wanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being
done, which yet was not done because the condition was
not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Bttm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858,
p- 489 sqq.; [N. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. ii. 33; W. § 42, 2 p. 305 (286)), e. g. Jn. vill. 39
(where the dy is spurious); xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; Acts
xxvi. 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (a before edexare
has been correctly expunged by L'T Tr WH). II.
Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad-
verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the
Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ. irgend,
etwa). 1. foll. by a past tense of the Indicative, when
some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of ;
where, “when the thing itself which is said to have
been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved
in dy belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoun or
particle” (Klotz ad Dev. p. 145) [ef. W. § 42, 3.a.]; dao
dv as many as: Mk. vi. 56 (G00 ay #rrovro [iavro L
txt. T Tr txt. WH] adrod as many as touched him (cf. B.
216 (187)]); Mk. xi. 24 (60a dv mpocevydpevor airetobe
{Grsb. om. dv], but L txt. T Tr WH have rightly restored
Soa mpocevxeabe k.aireiabe). KaOdre dv in so far or so often
ws, according as, (Germ. je nachdem gerade) : Acts ii. 45;
ty. 35. as dv: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were
led [ef. B. § 139, 13; 383(329)sq.]). 2. foll. bya Sub-
junctive, a. the Present, concerning that which
may have been done, or is usually or constantly done
(where the Germ. uses mégen); nvixa dv whensoever, as
often as: 2 Co. iii. 15 L T Tr WH; és dy whoever, be he
who hemay: Mt. xvi. 25 (LT Tr WH éav) ; [MK. viii. 35
(where T Tr WH fut. indic.; see WH. App. p. 172)];
Lk. x. 5 (L T Tr WH aor.), 8; Gal. v.17 (T Tr WH ap,
Lbr. édv); 1 Jn. ii. 5; iii. 17; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19) ;
xvi. 2; 1 Co. xi. 27, ete. doris dy: 1 Co. xvi. 2 [Tr WH
éav; WH mrg. aor.]; Col. iii. 17 (Ltxt. Tr WH eédv). doo
av: Mt. vii. 12 (T WH éav); xxii. 9 (L T Tr WH ear).
6rov av whithersoever: Lk. ix. 57 (L. Tr éav); Rev. xiv. 4
(LTr[T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted imaye, defended
also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. iii. 4 (RGLTrmrg. in
br.). dadxes av how often soever: 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where
LT Tr WH eav). as dy in what way soever: 1 Th. ii. 7
({ef. Ellic. ad loc.; B. 232 (200)], LT TrWHeav). b.
the Aorist, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf.; ds av: Mt.
v. 21, 22 (elm whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ;
31 sq. [in vs. 32 L T Tr WH read as 6 drodvov]; x.
11; xxvi. 48 (Tdf. éav); Mk. iii. 29, 35; ix.41,ete. dots
av: Mt. x. 33 [L Tr WH txt. om. av]; xii. 50; Jn. xiv.
13[Trmrg. WH pres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. eav), ete. doo
av: Mt. xxi. 22 (Treg. dv); xxiii. 3(T WH eav); Mk. iii.
28 (Tr WH édv); Lk. ix. 5 (LT Tr WH pres.); Jn. xi.
22; Acts ii. 39 (Lehm. ods); iii. 22. dmov dv: Mk.
xiv. 9 (T WH éav); ix. 18 (LT Tr WH éay). aypus ob
dy until (donec): 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec.; Rev. ii. 25. ws dv
ava
until (usque dum): Mt. ii. 13; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk. vi.
10; Lk. xxi. 32; 1 Co. iv. 5, ete. jvixa dv, of fut. time,
not until then, when .. .or then at length, when ...: 2Co.
iii. 16 (T WH txt. eav) [cf. Kiihner ii. 951; Jelf ii. 565).
@s av as soon as [B. 232 (200)]: 1 Co. xi. 834; Phil. ii.
23. a’ ob dv eyepOn, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what-
ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But édv
(q. v.) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men-
tioned, instead of av; and in many places the Mss. and
edd. fluctuate between dy and éay, (exx. of which have
already been adduced); [ef. Tdf. Prolee. p. 96; WH.
App. p. 173 “ predominantly dy is found after conso-
nants, and eay after vowels” ]. Finally, to this head
must be referred érav (i. q. ére dv) with the indic. and
much oftener with the subj. (see érav), and ores ay, al-
though this last came to be used as a final conjunction
in the sense, that, if it be possible: Lk. ii. 835; Acts iii.
20 (19); xv. 17; Ro. iii. 45; see drs, II.1b. [Cf. W.309
(290 sq.); B. 234 (201).] III. dy is joined to the
Optat. [W. 303 (284); B. 217 (188)]; when a certain
condition is laid down, as in wishes, J would that ete.:
Acts xxvi. 29 (evfaiunv [Tdf. ev&aunv] av I could pray, se.
did it depend on me) ; in direct questions [W.1.c.; B.
254 (219)]: Acts viii. 31 (was dv Suvaiuny; i.e. on what
condition, by what possibility, could I? ef. Xen. oec. 11,
5); Acts xvii. 18 (ri dv 6€Xo .. . eye what would he
say ? it being assumed that he wishes to utter some defi-
nite notion or other); Acts ii. 12 RG; in dependent
sentences and indirect questions in which the nar-
rator introduces another’s thought [W. § 42,4; B.l.c.]:
Lk. i. 62; vi. 11; ix. 46; [xv. 26 L br. Tr WH; cf. xviii.
36 Lbr. Tr br. WH mrg.]; Acts v. 24; x.17; xvii. 20
RG. IV. avis found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5
(e? pn te dv [WH br. av], except perhaps, sc. yévoiro, [but
cf. Bttm. as below]). as dy, adverbially, tanquam (so
already the Vulg.), as if: 2 Co. x. 9 (like écmep av in Grk.
writ. ; cf. Kiihner ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4; Jelf § 430]; B.
219 (189); [L. and S. s. v. D. III.]).
éy, contr. from éav, if; foll. by the subjunc.: Jn. xx.
23 [Lchm. édv. “Also by the (pres.) indic. in 1 Jn. v. 15
Lchm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further,
LT Tr WH have received dy in Jn. xiii. 20; xvi. 23;
[so WH Jn. xii. 32; cf. W. 291 (274); B. 72 (63)].*
ava, prep., prop. upwards, up, (cf. the adv. dve, opp. to
card and kdrw), denoting motion from a lower place to a
higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only
with the accus. 1. in the expressions dvd péoov (or
jointly avdyecor [so R* Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the midst,
in the midst, amidst, among, between, — with gen. of place,
Mt. xiii. 25; Mk. vii. 31; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass. see
péoos, 2 sub fin.]; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf.
Sir. xxv. 18(17) ava péoov rod (Fritz. rév) mAnoiov airov ;
ef. W.§ 27, 1 fin. [B. 332 (285) ], (Sir. xxvii. 2; 1 Mace. vii.
28; xiii 40, etc.; in Sept. for 713, Ex. xxvi. 28; Josh.
xvi. 9; xix. 1; Diod. 2, 4 ava pécor rev xerhé@v [see peoos,
2]); dva pépos, (Vulg. per partes), in turn, one after an-
other, in succession: 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Rec** writes ava-
| s€pos], (Polyb. 4, 20, 10 ava pépos adewv). 2. joined to
avaBabmos
numerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B.
331 sq. (285)]: In. ii. 6 (ava perpyras dvo 7) tpeis two or
three metretz apiece); Mt. xx. 9 sq. (€AaBov ava Syvdapiov
they received each a denarius); Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. WH om.
dvd; ix. 14]; x. 1 (dva dv0 [WH ava dv0 [dv0]] two by
two); Mk. vi.40 (L T Tr WH xara); [Rev. iv. 8]; and
very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 398 (372). It is used
adverbially in Rev. xxi. 21 (ava eis €xaoros, like ava réeo-
capes, Plut. Aem. 32; cf. W. 249 (234); [B. 30 (26) ]).
3. Prefixed to verbs ava signifies, a. upwards, up, up
to, (Lat. ad, Germ. auf), as in avakpovewy, avaBaivey,
dvaBddrev, avaxpatey, etc. b. it corresponds to the
Lat. ad (Germ. an), to [indicating the goal], as in avay-
yé\Aew [al. would refer this to d.], dvamrew. c. it de-
notes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as
d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back,
Cf. Win.
in dvayevvav.
backwards, as in avaxapmrew, avaxapeiv, etc.
De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.*
dva-Babpds, -ov, 6, (Sabuds, and this fr. Baive) ; 1.
an ascent. 2. a means of going up, a flight of steps,
a stair: Acts xxi. 35,40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 324 sq.*
dva-Balvw ; [impf. dveBawoy Acts iii. 1; fut. dvaBnoopat
Ro. x. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. avaBeBnxa; 2 aor.
aveBnv, ptcp. avaBds, impv. avaBa Rev. iv. 1 (dvaBnOe
Lchm.), plur. avaBare (for RG avaBnre) Rev. xi. 12 L
T Tr[WH; cf. WH. App. p. 168°]; W. $14, 1h.; [B. 54
(47); fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 12323 a. to go up,
move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (émi), Lk. xix.
4; upon the roof of a house (émi), Lk. v. 19; into a ship
(eis), Mk. vi. 51; [Mt. xv. 39 GTrtxt.; Acts xxi. 6
Tdf.]; eis 0 dpos, Mt. v. 1; Lk. ix. 28; Mk. ili. 13; ets rd
trepaov, Acts i. 13; eis rov ovpavdv, Ro. x. 6; Rev. xi. 12;
eis Tov ovp. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ;
vi. 62, and in the phrase dvaf. mpos rov marepa, Jn. Xx. 17.
(It is commonly maintained that those persons are fig.
said dvaBeBnxéva eis Tov ovpavev, who have penetrated the
heavenly mysteries: Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov.
xxiv. 27 (xxx.4); Bar.iii.29. But in these latter pass.
also the expression is to be understood literally. Andas
respects Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ
brought his knowledge of the divine counsels with him
from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to
his incarnation. Now the natural language was ovdeis
jv év To ovpav@; but the expression dvaBéBnxev is used
because none but Christ could get there except by as-
cending. Accordingly ei yn refers merely to the idea,
involved in avaBeBnxcv, of a past residence in heaven.
Cf. Meyer [or Westcott] ad loc.) Used of travelling toa
higher place: eis ‘Iepoodd. Mt. xx. 17 sq.; Mk. x. 32 sq.,
etc. ; eis 70 iepdv, Jn. vii. 14; Lk. xviii.10. Often the place
to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but
is easily understood from the context: Acts viii. 31 (into
the chariot) ; Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor,
acc. to the reading dvaBdas restored by L T Tr txt. WH
for RG dvaBoncas), etc.; or the place alone is men-
tioned from which (dm, éx) the ascent is made: Mt. iii.
16; Acts vill. 39; Rev. xi. 7. b. in a wider sense
35
, ,
avayavtov
of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring
up: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27; of smoke rising
up, Rev. viii. 4; ix. 2; of plants springing up from the
ground, Mt. xiii. 7; Mk. iv. 7, 32, (as in Grk. writ.;
Theophr. hist. plant. 8, 3, and Hebr. n9y); of things
which come up in one’s mind (Lat. suboriri) : avaBaiv. émi
Thy Kapd. or ev TH kapdia, Lk. xxiv. 38; 1 Co. ii. 9; Acts
Vii. 23 (avéBn ei tiv x. it came into his mind i. e. he re-
solved, foll. by inf.), after the Hebr. 35-bx n5y, Jer. iii.
16, ete. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages, prayers, deeds,
brought up or reported to one in a higher place: Acts
x. 4; xxi. 31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the
cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp.: mpoo-,
ovv-avaBaivea. |
ava-Bé\dw: 2 aor. mid. aveBaddopnp ; 1. to throw or
toss up. 2. to put back or off, delay, postpone, (very
often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop. to
defer for one’s self): twa, to hold back, delay; ina
forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic.
Verr. act. 2,1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and decid-
ing (adjourn) any one’s case: Acts xxiv. 22; cf. Kypke
[or Wetst.] ad loc.*
dva-BiBdtw: 1 aor. dveBiBaca; to cause to go up or as-
cend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.): Mt.
xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 mpds trav ynv aveBiBale ras
€avrov tpinpes).*
dva-Brérw ; 1 aor. avéBrea; [fr. Hdt. down]; a
to look up: Mk. viii. 24, [25 RGL]; xvi. 4; Lk. xix. 5;
xxi. 1; Acts xxii. 13; eis rwa, ibid.; ets roy ovpavdv, Mt.
xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 34, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370 b. ;
Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight: Mt. xi.
5; xx. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., ete. ({ Hat. 2, 111;] Plat.
Phaedrus p. 243 b. mapaypypa aveBdeYe, Arstph. Plut.
126); used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from
birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 11 (12) (cf. Meyer
ad loc.), 17 sq. (Paus. 4, 12, 7 (10) cuvéBn tov ’Oquovea
. » - TOV Ek yeverns TUp roy avaBréeyar). Cf. Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. ill. p. 7 sq.
dva-Brepis, -ews, 7, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19),
(Sept. Is. lxi. 1). [Aristot.]*
dva-Bodw, -@: 1 aor. dveBonoa; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt.
down]; to raise a cry, to cry out anything, say it shout-
ing: Lk. ix. 38 (LT Tr WH €Bénoe); Mk. xv. 8 (where
read dvaBads, see dvaBaiva, a. sub fin.); with the addition
of davy peyddn, Mt. xxvii. 46 [Tr WH Limrg. eBénoe],
(as Gen. xxvii. 38; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De
verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.; [and see Boda, fin.].*
ava-BoAn, -7s, 7, (avaBadrw, q. v.), often in Grk. writ.,
a putting off, delay: movetoGat avaBodny to interpose (lit.
make) delay, Acts xxv. 17, (as in Thue. 2,42; Dion. Hal.
11, 33; Plut. Camill.c. 35).*
évayatov, -ov, Td, (fr. ava and yaia i. e. yn), prop. any-
thing above the ground; hence a room in the upper part
of a house: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 12,(in GL T Tr WH).
Also written dy@yav (which Tdf. formerly adopted ;
ef. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. dvaxelwv]), avayeov
(Rec.), dvwyewy; on this variety in writing cf. Lod. ad
Phryn. p. 297 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 358];
avayyérXro
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; B. 13 (12); [ WH. App.
p- 151].*
av-ayyéAAw; impf. dvyyyeAdov; [fut. dvayyeA@]; 1 aor.
avnyyeiva; 2 aor. pass. avnyyéAnv, Ro. xv. 21; 1 Pet.i. 12
(several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31; W. 82 (78);
[Veitch s. v. dyyéAAw]); to announce, make known, (cf.
dva, 3b.]: ri, Acts xix. 18; foll. by ér, Jn. v.15 [L mrg.
WH txt. T eirev]; doa rd. Acts xiv. 27; [Mk. v.19 R
GLmrg.]; [absol. with ets, Mk. v. 14 Rec.]; equiv. to
disclose: ri run, Jn. iv. 25; xvi. 18-15; used of the for-
mal proclamation of the Christian religion: Acts xx.
20; 1 Pet.i.12; 1Jn.i.5; aepi twos, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii.
15); to report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in
Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 3,
21; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they
have seen or heard, [ef. ava u. s.]: ri, Acts xvi. 38
(where L T Tr WH amnyy.) ; 2 Co. vii. 7.
dvo-yevvaw, -@: 1 aor. aveyevvnoa; pf. pass. avayeyér-
vmpar; to produce again, beget again, beget anew; metaph.:
twa, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he
lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God,
1 Pet.i.3; passively ék twos, ibid. i. 23. (In the same
sense in ecel. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Among prof.
auth. used by Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 ra@v éx Tov orao.d few
avtois dvayevvopevav [yet Bekker av yevopever| dewav
which originated.)*
ava-ywookw ; [impf. aveyiveokey Acts vill. 28]; 2 aor.
avéyvor, [inf. dvayvova Lk. iv. 16], ptep. avayvovs; Pass.,
[pres. avaywaoxopar|; 1 aor. dveyyooOny; in prof. auth.
1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately,
to acknowledge; hence 2. to read, (in this signif.
[first in Pind. O. 10 (11). 1”] fr. [Arstph.,] Thue.
down): ri, Mt. xxii. 31; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. vi. 3; Jn. xix.
20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co.i. 13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lehm.
mrg.|; Rev.i.3; v.4 Rec.; twa, one’s book, Acts viii.
28, 30; év with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 55 xxi. 42; Mk.
xii. 26; with ellipsis of év7@ vouw, Lk. x. 26; foll. by or
[objective], Mt. xix.4; [foll. by 67 recitative, Mt. xxi.
16]; ri émoinoe, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not
mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes :
Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Acts xv. 31; xxiii. 34; Eph.
iii. 4; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2. to read to others, read aloud:
2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Moiojs i. q.
the books of Moses); [Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 27]; 1 Th.
v.27; Colvav. 16.*
évaykato ; [impf. nvayxafov]; 1 aor. nvdyxaca; 1 aor.
pass. nvayxaoOnv; (fr. avaykn); [fr. Soph. down]; to
necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force,
threats, etc., or by persuasion, entreaties, etc., or by
other means: twa, 2 Co. xii. 11 (by your behavior
towards me); twa foll. by inf., Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii.
19; Gal. ii. 83,14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv.
22; Mk. vi. 45; Lk. xiv: 23.*
avayKatos, -aia, -aiov, (avaykn), (fr. Hom. down (in vari-
ous senses) ], necessary ; a. what one cannot do with-
out, indispensable: 1 Co. xii. 22 (ra péAn); Tit. iii. 14
(xpéta). b. connected by the bonds of nature or of
friendship: Acts x. 24 (avayxaio. [A. V. near] didor).
36
bJ /
avadetkvupe
c. what ought according, to the law of duty to be done,
what is required by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24.
avaykatdy eort foll. by ace. with inf., Acts xiii. 46; Heb.
vill. 3. dvaykaiov nyetoOa to deem necessary, foll. by
inf.) Phil. i1;/253¢2 Cov ixt5*
avaykacraés, adv., by force or constraint; opp. to €xov-
ciws, 1 Pet. v. 2. (Plat. Ax. p. 366 a.)*
évayKn, -1s, 7) 1. necessity, imposed either by the
external condition of things, or by the law of duty, re-
gard to one’s advantage, custom, argument: kar’ avayknv
perforce (opp. to kara éxovorov), Philem. 14; && avayxns
of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 12 (neces-
sarily); €x@ dvdyknv I have (am compelled by) neces-
sity, (also in Grk. writ.): 1 Co. vii. 37; Heb. vii. 27; foll.
by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 RLbr.; Jude 3; dav. pou
enixertar necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16; dvaykn
(i. q. dvayxaidy éore) foll. by inf.: Mt. xviii. 7; Ro. xiii.
5; Heb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in asense rare
in the classics (Diod. 4, 43), but very common in Hellen-
istic writ. (also in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 7, ete.; see W. 30),
calamity, distress, straits: Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Th.
iii. 7; plur. év dvaykas, 2 Co. vi. 45 xii. 10.*
ava-yvwpitw: 1 aor. pass. dveyywpiabnv; to recognize:
Acts vii. 13 [Tr txt. WH txt. éyywpic6n | was recognized
by his brethren, cf. Gen. xlv.1. (Plat. politic. p. 258 a.
advayvapicew Tols cuyyeveis.)*
Gvd-yvwots, -ews, 7, (dvayiwooka, q. V-) ; a. a know-
ing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on]: Acts
xiii. 15; 2 Co. iii. 14; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q.
sTpn.)*
av-dyo: 2 aor. avnyayov, inf. avayayeiv, [ptep. dvaya-
yov|; Pass., [pres. dvayouar]; 1 aor. [ef. sub fin.] avn-
x4nv; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, to lead or bring into
a higher place; foll. by eis with ace. of the place: Lk.
ii. 22; iv. 5 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.]; xxii. 66 [T
Tr WH amnyayor]; Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 (es
r. épnpov, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan). iva éx
vexpav fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper
world, Heb. xiii. 20; Ro. x. 7; twa 76 da@ to bring one
forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place),
and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4;
Avaiav r@ cid@d~@ to offer sacrifice to the idol, because
the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navi-
gators are kat éoxynv said avayeo@a (pass. [or mid. ])
when they /aunch out, set sail, put to sea, (so avaywyn
in Justin. Mart. dial. ce. Tr. c. 142 [and in the classics ]) :
Likesvini 122); vAretstexanie 03 3vaxcva-y Lis Pixie (21s oxox SES >
xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2,4, 12, 21; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb.
1, 21,4; 23, 3, ete.) [Comp.: é-avayo. | *
éva-Selkvupt: 1 aor. avederéa, [impv. avaderEov; fr. Soph.
down]; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all
to behold (Germ. aufzeigen) ; hence to show accurately,
clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 ef.
6): Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast
chosen). Hence dvaé. twa to proclaim any one as elected
to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general,
etc., messenger): Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 23, 25; x.
11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48,
avabevéis
Soi," 33) Died) 1)'66is\.18, 98; ' Plut.Caes:..87,.-etc. ;
Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.). Cf. Win. De-verb. comp. Pt.
iii. p. 12 sq.*
ava-Serkis, -ews, 7), (avadeixvupt, q. V-), @ pointing out,
public showing forth; rév xpdver, Sir. xliii. 6. a pro-
claiming, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected
to office (Plut. Mar. 8 trdrev avaderEs [cf. Polyb. 15, 26,
7]): Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced
[A. V. of his shewing] to the people as the forerunner
of the Messiah; this announcement he himself made at
the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).*
dva-Séxopar: 1 aor. avedeEaunv; fr. Hom. down; to
take up, take upon one’s self, undertake, assume; hence
to receive, entertain any one hospitably: Acts xxviii. 7;
to entertain’ in one’s mind: ras ésayyeXias, i. e. to em-
brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 17.*
ava-SiSwpe: 2 aor. ptcep. avadovs ; 1. to give forth,
send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants
yielding fruit, ete.; in prof. auth. 2. acc. to the sec-
ond sense which ava has in composition [see avd, 3 b.],
to deliver up, hand over: émotodnv, Acts xxiii. 33, (the
same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and Plut.).*
dva-Ldw, -@: 1 aor. avé(noa; a word found only in the
N. T. and eccel. writ.; to live again, recover life; a.
prop., in Rec. of Ro. xiv. 9; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop.
one is said ava¢jv who has been vexpés in a trop. sense;
a. to be restored to a correct life: of one who returns to
a better moral state, Lk. xv. 24 [WH mre. éfycer] ([A. V.
is alive again], cf. Mey. ad loc.), 32 (I Tr WH é¢ye).
B. to revive, regain strength and vigor: Ro. vii. 9; sin is
alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the
fall of Adam; yet it is destitute of power (vexpd éo7t)
in innocent children ignorant of the law; but when they
come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power
in them also. Qthers less aptly explain avé(nae here
began to live, sprang into life, (Germ. lebte auf ).*
ava-{ntéw, -@; [impf. dve(nrovy]; 1 aor. ave(ntnaa; ‘to
run through with the eyes any series or succession of
men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make
diligent search, Germ. daran hinsuchen, aufsuchen’ (Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 14): teva, Lk. ii. 44, (and
45 Ltxt. T Tr WH); Acts xi. 25. (See exx. fr. Grk.
writ. [fr. Plato on] in Win. 1. c.) *
ava-Lovvup: fo gird up; mid. to gird up one’s self or
Jor one’s self: avafwodpevor tas dodvas, 1 Pet. i. 13, ie.
prepared, —a metaphor derived from the practice of the
Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their move-
ments were accustomed, when about to start on a jour-
ney or engage in any work, to bind their long and flow-
ing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them
with a leathern girdle; cf. mepifawvyu. (Sept. Jude.
xviii. 16; Prov. xxix. 35 (xxxi. 17); Dio Chrys. or. 72,
2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139
d., al.)*
ava-lwrupéw, -3; (ro Camupov i.e. a. the remains of
a fire, embers; 0. that by which the fire is kindled
anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows) ; to kindle anew,
rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of dva- cf. Ellic.
37
avabepariva
on 2 Tim. as below]; generally trop., to kindle up, in-
Jlame, one’s mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10,
16 of a horse roused to his utmost; Hell. 5, 4, 46; An-
tonin. 7, 2 davracias; Plut. Pericl. 1,4; Pomp. 41, 2;
49,5; Plat. Charm. p. 156 d.; ete.): 7d ydpiopa, 2 Tim.
i. 6, i. @. 7d mvedpa, vs. 7. Intrans. to be enkindled, to
gain strength: Gen. xlv. 27; 1 Mace. xiii. 7, and in prof.
auth.; dvatwmupnodte 7) miotis, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3
[see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. ].*
dva-Qahkw: 2 aor. dvéGadov; (Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 7;
Sap. iv.4; very rare in Grk. writ. and only in the poets,
cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 195; [Veitch s. v. a\Xo; W.
87 (83); B. 59 (52)]); to shoot up, sprout again, grow
green again, flourish again, (Hom. Il. 1, 236; Ael. v. h.
5, 4); trop. of those whose condition and affairs are
becoming more prosperous: Phil. iv. 10 dve@ddere rd
imep ewov dpoveiv ye have revived so as to take thought for
me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specifica-
tion, W. 317 (298); cf. Ellic. ad loc.].. Others, ace. to
a trans. use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek.
xvii. 24; Sir. i. 18, etc.), render ye have revived (allowed
to revive) your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an
object-acc., W. 323 (303); B. 263 (226); cf. Bp. Lehttft.
ad loe.]; against whom see Meyer ad loc.*
dva-Gepa, -ros, 7d, (i. G. TO avateBeipevor) ; 1. prop.
a thing set up or laid by in order to be kept; spec. a
votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god
was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put
in some other conspicuous place: 2 Mace. ii. 13, (Plut.
Pelop. ce. 25); Lk. xxi. 5 in LT, for dvaOjpaoe RG Tr
WH,;; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the
codd.; Moeris, dvdéOnua arrixkds, avabepa EAAnvikas. CE.
émtOnpa, emiOepua, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [cf. 445;
Paral. 417; see also Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p.41]. 2.
avaOepa in the Sept. is generally the translation of the
Heb. o7n, @ thing devoted to God without hope of being
redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28,
29]; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction,
Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, ete. [W. 32]; a thing abominable
and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence
in the N. T. dvadeya denotes a. acurse: dvabenatt ava-
Ocparifew, Acts xxiii. 14 [W. 466 (434); B. 184 (159)].
b. a man accursed, devoted to the direst woes (i. q. émt-
katapatos): dvabepa got, Gal. i. 8 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 22;
dvaepa déyeww twa to execrate one, 1 Co. xii. 3 (RG,
but L T Tr WH have restored dva6epa "Inaods, sc. €oT@) ;
dvaGepa eivat dd Tod Xpiotod, Ro. ix. 3 (pregnantly i. q.
doomed and so separated from Christ). Cf. the full re-
marks on this word in Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 247
sqq-; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq.; [a trans. of the latter
by Prof. Riddle in Schaff’s Lange on Rom. p. 302 sqq. ;
see also Trench §v.; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. 1. c.; Elli-
cott ibid.; Tholuck on Rom. 1. e.; BB.DD. s. vv. Anath-
ema, Excommunication ].*
ova-Geuarite; 1 aor. dveBepatica; (davdbeua, q. V-); a
purely bibl. and eccl. word, to declare anathema or ac-
cursed ; in the Sept. i. q. DIN to devote to destruction,
(Josh. vi. 21, etc.; 1 Mace. v. 5); éavréy to declare one’s
> /
avabewpéw
self liable to the severest divine penalties, Acts xxiii.
12,21; dva@éyare avabeparifew (Deut. xiii. 15; xx. 17,
[W. § 54, 3; B. 184 (159) ]) éauroy foll. by inf., to bind
one’s self under a curse to do something, Acts xxiii. 14.
absol., to asseverate with direful imprecations: Mk. xiv.
71. [Comp.: xat-avabepari¢a. | *
éva-Sewpéw, -@; prop. ‘to survey a series of things from
the lowest to the highest, Germ. daran hinsehen, ldngs
durchsehen’, [to look along up or through], (Win. De verb.
comp. Pt. iii. p. 3); hence to look at attentively, to observe
accurately, consider well: ri, Acts xvil. 23, Heb. xiii. 7.
(Diod. Sic. 12, 15 é& émumodis pev Oewpovpevos ..- dvabew-
povpevos dé Kai per’ axpiBeias e€eraCopevos; 14, 109; 2,
5; Leian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1
[uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)*
éva-Onpa, -ros, 70, (dvariOnuc), a gift consecrated and
laid up in a temple, a votive offering (see avabepa, 1): Lk.
xxi. 5 [RG@TrWH]. (8 Mace. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on
2 Mace. iii. 2; koopetv dva@jpact occurs also in 2 Mace.
ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. dvaOjpaci te Ke-
koounkapev Ta iepa avtav, Hdt. 1, 183 7d pev dy iepov
ovTw Kexoopntar’ éote dé Kai (Sta dvabnpata ToAAa.)*
avatSea (TWH avaidia; see I, c), -as, 7, (avacdns, and
this fr. 9 aidws a sense of shame); fr. Hom. down;
shamelessness, impudence: Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate
man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. importunity]).*
dy-alpects, -ews, 7, (fr. avarpéw, 2, q. v.), a destroying,
killing, murder, ‘taking off’: Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Ree.
(Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4;
2 Mace. v. 13. Xen. Hell. 6, 3,5; Hdian. 2, 13, 1.)*
dy-aipew, -@; fut. avedo, 2 Th. ii. 8 (LT Tr WH tat. ef.
Jud. vii. 13; Dion. Hal. 11,18; Diod. Sic. 2,25; cf. W.
82 (78); [B. 53 (47); Veitch s. v. aipéw, “ perh. late
€\S”’]), for the usual dvaipnow; 2 aor. avethov; 2 aor. mid.
dvetAounv (but dveiAaro Acts vii. 21, avethay Acts x. 39,
aveiiare Acts ii. 23, in GLT Tr WH, after the Alex.
form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq.; B. 39 (34) sq. [see aipéw]) ;
Pass., pres. avaipovpar; 1 aor. dyypeOnv; — 1. to take up,
to lift up (from the ground) ; mid. to take up for myself
as mine, to own, (an exposed infant): Acts vii. 21; (so
dvaipeioOat, Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7;
[Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18,
etc. }). 2. to take away, abolish; a. ordinances, es-
tablished customs, (to abrogate): Heb. x.9: b. aman,
to put out of the way, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and
Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 66] Thuc. down): Mt. ii. 16; Lk.
xxii. 2; xxiii. 32; Acts ii. 23; v. 33, 36; vii. 28; ix. 23
sq. 29; x. 39; xii. 2; xiii. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27;
xxv. 3; xxvi.10; 2 Th. ii.8 LT Tr WH txt.; éavrov, to
kill one’s self, Acts xvi. 27.*
dy-altios, -ov, (airia) guililess, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7.
(Often in Grk. writ.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. ‘pai Sus. 62.)*
ava-xa0-i{w: 1 aor. avexafica; to raise one’s self and
sit upright; to sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mrg.
WH org. éexabioev]; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19;
Plut. Alex. c.14; and often in medical writ.; with
éaurdév, Plut. Philop. c. 20; mid. in same sense, Plat.
Phaedo c. 3 p. 60 b.)*
38
avakeparatow
ava-Katvitw; (Kavos); to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ.
auffrischen) : twa eis peravotay so to renew that he shall
repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isocr. Areop. 3; Philo, leg. ad Gaium
§ 11; Joseph. antt. 9, 8,2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6; Leian.
Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps. cii. (ciii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 30, ete. ;
eccl. writ.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10.*
dva-Kaivow, -@: [pres. pass. dvaxawovpa]; a word
peculiar to the apostle Paul; prop. to cause to grow up
(ava) new, to make new; pass., new strength and vigor
is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16; to be changed into a new
kind of life, opposed to the former corrupt state, Col.
iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Mey.
on Col. l.c.; Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 dvaxawvo-
mow. Cf, Késtlin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq. ]*
dva-Kaivwots, -ews, 7, a renewal, renovation, complete
change for the better, (cf. avaxavvow) : Tov voos, object. gen.,
Ro. xii. 2; mvevparos dyiov, effected by the Holy Spirit,
Tit. iii. 5. (Etym. Magn., Suid.; [Herm. vis. 3, 8, 9;
other eccl. writ.]; the simple xaivwors is found only in
Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10.) [Cf. Trench § xviii.]*
éva-kadimrw: [Pass., pres. ptep. avaxadumropevos ; pf.
ptcp. dvaxexaduppevos | ; to unveil, to uncover (by
drawing back the veil), (i. q. m3, Job xii. 22; Ps. xvii.
(xviii.) 16): xaAvppa . . . py) avaxadurropevoy the veil...
not being lifted (lit. unveiled) [so WH punctuate, see
W. 534 (497); but LT Alf. ete. take the ptep. as a
neut. ace. absol. referring to the clause that follows with
dre: it not being revealed that, ete.; (for avaxaX. in this
sense see Polyb. 4, 85,6; Tob. xii. 7,11); see Meyer ad
loc.], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand-
ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (avaxadimrew ovyxaduppa, Deut. xxii.
30 Alex.) ; dvaxexaduppéevm mpooamem with unveiled face,
2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded,
but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ.
(The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Aristot. de sens. 5,
vol. i. p. 444°, 25], Polyb., Plut.)*
dva-kaprrw: fut. dvaxapyw; 1 aor. avexaya; to bend
back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ;
in Sept. i. q. 23) intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk.
x. 6 (where the meaning is, ‘ your salutation shall return
to you, as if not spoken’); Acts xviii. 21; Heb. xi. 15.*
ava-Kepat; [impf. 3 pers. sing. dvéxerro]; depon. mid.
to be laid up, laid: Mk. v. 40 R Lbr. [cf. Eng. to lay out].
In later Grk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf.
B.D. s. v. Meals]; the earlier Greeks used xetoOat, xara-
xeicba, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq.; Fritzsche [or
Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10): Mt. ix. 10; xxii. 10 sq.; xxvi.
7,20; Mk. [vi. 26 T Tr WH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk. vii.
37 (LT Tr WH karaxecrar); xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec.
avuvavakeup.) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat together, to
dine: Jn. vi.11. [Cf. dvarimra, fin. COMP.: ovv-ava-
keupat. | *
ava-Kehodratdw, -@: [pres. pass. avaxepadaodpat; 1 aor.
mid. inf. avaxepadatwoacba]; (fr. kebadaidw, q. V., and
this fr. cepadatov, q. v-); to sum up (again), to repeat
summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the
substance of a speech; Quintil. 6. 1 ‘rerum repetitio et
congregatio, quae graece avaxepadaiwors dicitur ’, [épyov
‘ dvakXivo@
pyropixis . . . avaxepadaimoacba mpds avapynow, Aristot.
frag. 123, vol. v. p. 1499*, 33]); so in Ro. xiii. 9. In
Eph. i. 10 God is said dvaxepadkawoacOa ta ravta ev TO
Xpiora, to bring together again for himself (note the
mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin)
into one combined state of fellowship in Christ, the uni-
versal bond, [cf. Mey. or Ellic. on Eph. 1. ¢.]; (Protev.
Jac. 13 eis eve avexearaiwOn 1 ioropia Ada, where cf.
Thilo).*
dva-KAlvw: fut. dvaxkAww@; 1 aor. avexduva; Pass., 1 aor.
avekdlOnv; fut. dvaxdOjoopar; [fr. Hom. down]; to lean
against, lean upon ; a. to lay down: twa, Lk. ii. 7 (ev
(7H) parvn). b. to make or bid to recline: Mk. vi. 39
(€réra€ev avrois, sc. the disciples, avaxNivat [-kAc6jvae L
WH txt.] mdvras i.e. the people); Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH
karéxAwav); xii. 37. Pass. to lie back, recline, lie down:
Mt. xiv. 193 of those reclining at table and at feasts,
Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. 11,— in the last
two pass. used fig. of participation in future blessedness
in the Messiah’s kingdom.*
ava-KétrTw: 1 aor. dvexowa; to beat back, check, (as the
course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]):
va foll. by an inf. [A. V. hinder], Gal. v. 7 Rec., where
the preceding éerpéxere shows that Paul was thinking of
an obstructed road; cf. éyxérrw.*
dva-kpaé{w: 1 aor. [rare and late,” Veitch s. v. cpato;
8. 61 (53) ] avéxpa&a; 2 aor. avéxpayov (Lk. xxiii. 18 T
Tr txt. WH); to raise a cry from the depth of the throat,
‘o cry out: Mk. i. 23; vi.49; Lk. iv. 33; viii. 28; xxiii.
18. Exx. fr. prof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.
iii. p. 6 sq.*
dva-kplvw ; 1 aor. avexpiva; Pass., [pres. avaxpivopac] ;
1 aor. avexpiénv; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic) ; prop.
by looking through a series (ava) of objects or particulars
to distinguish (xpivw) or search after. Hence a. to
investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, ques-
tion: Acts xvii. 11 (ras ypadas); 1 Co. x. 25, 27 (not
anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before
you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spec. in a
forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to
hold an investigation ; to interrogate, examine, the ac-
cused or the witnesses; absol.: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv.
8. twa, Acts xii. 19; xxviii. 18; pass., Actsiv.9. Paul
has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term
arodoyia shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 3 he speaks of rots
ene avaxpivovor, investigating me, whether I am a true
apostle. b. univ. to judge of, estimate, determine (the
excellence or defects of any person or thing): ri, 1 Co.
ii. 15; twa, 1 Co. iv. 3 sq.; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15; xiv.
24. (Cf. Lghtft. Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq.
Am. ed.).]*
Gvd-Kpiots, -ews, 7, an examination; as a law-term
among the Greeks, the preliminary investigation held
for the purpose of gathering evidence for the informa-
tion of the judges (Meier and Schémann, Att. Process,
pp- 27, [622; ef. Dict. of Antiq. s. v.]); this seems to
be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.*
ava-kuAlw: 1. to roll up. 2. to roll back: avaxe-
39
avarvots
KvAcorat 6 AiOos, Mk. xvi.4 T Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen.
vi. p. 237 ¢.; Leian. de luctu 8; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
dva-Kumrw: 1 aor. avexupa; to raise or lift one’s self
Up; a. one’s body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7,10; (Xen.
de re equ. 7,10, al.; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one’s soul;
to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28; (Xen. oec. 11, 5;
Joseph. b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).*
dva-AapBdvw ; 2 aor. avédaBov; 1 aor. pass. aveAnpOnv
(avedjppony LT Tr WH; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54);
Veitch (s. v.AapBdvw) ; see AapBavw, and s. v. M, p]); [fr.
Hdt. down]; = 1. to take up, raise: eis rov otpavdv, Mk.
Xvi. 19; Acts i. 11; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. 11); without
case, Acts i. 2,22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385)],
(Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to
carry or use it): Acts vii.43; Eph. vi. 13,16. to take
to one’s self: twa, in order to conduct him, Acts xxiii.
31; or as a companion, 2 Tim.iv.11; or in Acts xx. 13
sq. to take up sc. into the ship.*
ava-Ans (avadnuyis LT Tr WH; see M, p), -ews, 9,
(avahapBavw), [fr. Hippoer. down], a taking up: Lk. ix.
51 (se. eis tov otparvdy of the ascension of Jesus into
heaven; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18; Swicer,
Thesaur. Eccles. s. v.; and Meyer on Lk. 1. ¢.]).*
dv-adioxw: fr. the pres. dvadéw [3 pers. sing. dvadoi,
2 Th. ii. 8 WH mrg.] come the fut. dvadeow; 1 aor.
dvjwoa and avddwoa [see Veitch]; 1 aor. pass. dvn\a-
@nv; (the simple verb is found only in the pass. éAioxopat
to be taken; but a in ddioxopa is short, in dvadicxw
long; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv.; “the
diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans. sense of the pf.,
and above all the difference of sense, indicate a diff.
origin for the two verbs.” lL. and §.]);_ [fr. Pind.
down ]; 1. to expend; to consume, e. g. ypyyara (to
spend money ; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume,
use up, destroy: Lk. ix. 54; Gal. v.15; 2 Th. ii. 8 RG
WH mre. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7; Prov. xxiii. 28; Gen.
xli. 30, ete.) [Comp.: kxat-, mpoo-avadicoxw. | *
évadoyla, -as, 7, (avadoyos conformable, proportional),
proportion: kata tHv avadoyiav ths TioTews, i. q. KaTa TO
peétpov miotews received from God, Ro. xii. 6, ef. 3.
(Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)*
dva-oyitopar: 1 aor. avehoyirdpny; dep. mid. to think
over, ponder, consider: commonly with acc. of the thing,
but in Heb. xii. 3 with ace. of the pers. ‘to consider by
weighing, comparing,’ etc. (3 Mace. vii. 7. Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) *
dvados, -ov, (dds salt), saltless, unsalted, (@prot avaXot,
Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1; dpros dvados, Plut. symp. v.
quaest. 10 § 1): ddas dvadop salt destitute of pungency,
Mk. ix. 50.*
[dvaddw, see avaXicoxw. |
dva-Avots, -ews, 7. (avadva, q. V-)} 1. an unloosing
(as of things woven), a dissolving (into separate parts).
2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from
moorings preparatory to setting sail, cf. Hom. Od. 15,
548; [or, ace. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment;
ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), Germ. Aufbruch: 2 Tim.
iv. 6 (departure from life; Philo in Flacc. § 21 [p. 544
avadAvw
ed. Mang.] # ék rod Biou reAevtaia dvddvors; [Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 44,5 &@ykaprov k. Teheiav Ex xov thy avadvow; Euseb.
h. e. 3, 32, 1 paprupio tov Biov dvadioa, ct. 3, 34]. CE.
dvdd\vots ard ovvovaeias, Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 1).*
dva-kuw: fut. dvakvow; 1 aor. dvédvaa; 1. to un-
loose, undo again, (as, woven threads). 2. to depart,
Germ. aufbrechen, break up (see avadvots, 2), 80 very
often in Grk. writ.; to depart from life: Phil. i. 23,
(Leian. Philops. c. 14 dxra@xaidexaérns dv avedvev; add
Ael. v. h. 4, 23; [dvéAuvoev 6 erioxoros TAdrav ev kupio,
Acta et mart. Matth. § 31]). to return, ex Trav yapor,
Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] cf. Kuinoel [and
Wetstein] ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 25.*
dvapdprytos, -ov, (fr. dv priv. and the form duapréo),
sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one who cannot
sin. In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxix. 19;
2 Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42; [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj.
§ 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, ef. Ull-
mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng.
trans. p. 995. Cremer:s. v. ]-*
ava-pévw; [fr. Hom. down]; rwd, to wait for one
(Germ. erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await
one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with the
added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [ef. El-
licott ad loc.]. Good Greek; cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iii. p. 15 sq.*
[dva-pépos, i. e. dvd pépos, see ava, 1.]
[avd-perov, i. e. dva pécor, see avd, 1.]
dya-pipvicke ; fut. dvayyno (fr. the form pyaw); Pass.,
[pres. dvapipvyoxopa|; 1 aor. dveuynoOnv; [fr. Hom.
down]; to call to remembrance, to remind: twa tt one of
a thing [W. § 82, 4a.], 1 Co. iv. 17; to admonish, twa
foll. by inf., 2 Tim. i. 6. Pass. to recall to one’s own mind,
to remember; absol.: Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing,
Mk. xiv. 72 Ree. i, Mk. xiv. 72 L T Tr WH; context-
ually, to (remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii.
15; Heb. 32732) "er Wars, 10'e);' [(B. S327 1416
Matth. ii. p. 820 sq. [Comp.: Syn.
see avapynots fin. ]*
Gvapvycts, -ews, 7, (dvayypyvnoKw), a remembering, recol-
lection: eis tT. éuiv avayynow to call me (affectionately)
to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co.
xi. 24.sq. év avdrais (sc. Ovalas) avaprnots dpaptioy in
offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. e.
the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacri-
fices, Heb. x. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.*
[Syn. avduynors, drduvnois: The distinction between these
words as stated by Ammonius et al. — viz. that avduv. denotes
an unassisted recalling, dréuv. a remembrance prompted by
another, — seems to be not wholly without warrant; note
the force of b7e (cf. our ‘sug-gest’). But even in class. Grk.
the words are easily interchangeable. Schmidt ch. 14;
Trench § cvii. 6, ef. p. 61 note; Ellic. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim.
i. 5.]
dva-vedw, -@: to renew, (often in Grk. writ.); Pass. [W.
§ 39, 3 N. 3; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal
force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc.] dvaveota6a
T®@ mvevpare to be renewed in mind, i. e. to be spiritually
transformed, to take on a new mind [see vois, 1 b. fin.;
,
€7r-avapLipvnoKe.
40
avaTravw
nvevpa, fin.}, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Tittmann i. p. 60; [Trench
§§ Ix. xviii.], and dvaxawdw above.*
ava-viw : [‘in good auth. apparently confined to the
pres.’; 1 aor. avévna]; to return to soberness (x péOns.
which is added by Grk. writ.); metaph.: 2 Tim. ii. 26
ex THs TOU diaBdAov mrayidos [W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free
from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind
[‘one’s sober senses’]. (Philo, legg. alleg. ii. § 16 dva-
vypel, Tort €ore petavoet; add Joseph. antt. 6, 11, 10;
Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5,1.) [See dypu-
mvew, fin. |*
"Avavias [WH. ‘Avav., see their Intr. § 408], -a [but on
the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Ananias (71733N, fr. }3m to be
gracious, and 71: Jehovah, [cf. Mey. on Acts v. 1]):
1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of
Sapphira: Acts v. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus:
Acts ix. 10-18; xxii. 12 sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus,
and high priest of the Jews c. A.D. 47-59. In the year
66 he was slain by the Sicarii: Acts xxiii. 2 sq.; xxiv.
1 sq.; Joseph. antt. 20, 5, 2; 6,2; 9, 2-4; b.j. 2,17, 6;
9. ‘(CEB D: a v.1*
dv-avti-ppyntos [ WH dvavripnros; see P, p],-ov, (a priv.,
dayri, and pyrds fr. PEQ to say), not contradicted and not
to be contradicted ; undeniable, [not to be gainsaid]; in the
latter sense, Acts xix. 36. (Occasionaily in Grk. writ.
fr. Polyb. down.)*
avavtippytes [ WII davavripnras, see their App. p. 163,
and P, pj, adv., without contradiction: Acts x. 29 (1 came
without gainsaying). Polyb. 23, 8, 11, [al.].*
dv-dfvos, -ov, (a priv. and aévos), [fr. Soph. down], un-
worthy (rwos): unfit for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.*
dy-atiws, adv., [fr. Soph. down], in an unworthy man-
ner: 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Ree. [Cf. W. 463 (481).]*
dva-ravots, -ews, 7, (avaravo), [fr. Mimnerm., Pind.
down |; 1. intermissiun, cessation, of any motion, busi-
ness, labor: dvdmavow ovk €xovat Aeyovres [ Rec. Neyovra }
equiv. to ovk dvaravovrat héyorres they incessantly say,
Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation: Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi.
24; Rev. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed
tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28; li. 27;
Sap. iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a
respite, e. g. of soldiers; cf. Schmidt ch. 25; Bp. Lghtét.
on Philem. 7; Trench § xli.] *
dva-ravw: fut. dvaratow; 1 aor. dveravoa; pf. pass.
dvaréravpa ; Mid., [pres. avarravop.at | ; fut. dvatravoopat
(Rey. vi. 11 [Lchm. ed. min., Tdf. edd.'2, 7, WH; but
GLT Tr with R -cavrar]), ae in the colloquial speech
of inferior Grk. dvaranoopa (Rev. xiv. 13 L T Tr WH,
cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans. p. 64 sq.; Kiihner i. 886 ;
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 170]; see also in
énavaravw); 1 aor. averavoauny; (a common verb fr.
Hom. down): to cause or permit one to cease from any
movement cx labor in order te recover and collect his
strength (note the prefix ava and distinguish fr. kara-
Tavo, lees avaravats, fin.]), to give rest, dafresh: mid. to
give one’s self rest, take rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after
travelling, Mk. vi. 31; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi.
45; Mk. xiy. 41; of the sweet repose one enjoys after
/
avaTrel\Ow
toil, Lk. xii. 19; to keep quiet, of calm and patient expec-
tation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead,
Rev. xiv. 13 (ek rév kovwy exempt from toils [ef. B. 158
(138)]; Plat.Critias in. ex waxpas 6500). By a Hebraism
(oy m3, Isa. xi. 2) 76 mvetpa ep’ tas avamaverar rests
upon you, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv.14. Act. to refresh,
the soul of any one: tivd, Mt. xi. 28; 1d mvevpd Twos,
1 Co. xvi. 18; ra omddyyva Twés, Philem. 20. In pass.,
Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (amo ravt@v tev from your
sight, attentions, intercourse). [Comp.: é7-,cvr- (-pat). }*
éva-re(Ow ; to stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ. aufreizen),
to solicit, incite: rwda te moujoa, Acts xviii. 13. So also
in Hdt., Thuc., Plat., Xen., al.*
dvasreipos, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf.
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22: dia rod n Hv
tpitny, ov dia THs ev SupOdyyou ws oi ayuadeis]) in some
Mss. in Lk. xiv. 13, 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH; [see
WH. App. p. 151]) for avarnpos, q. v-
dvo-réparw : 1 aor. avereuwa; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl.
down]; 1. to send up; i.e. a. toa higher place;
b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Plut.
Marius c. 17; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8; Joseph. b. j.
2, 20, 5]): rea mpds tia, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15; Acts xxv. 21
LTTrWH. ~— 2. tosend back. vwa, Philem. 12 (11);
teva tu, Lk. xxiii. 11.*
dva-ryddaw: [1 aor. ptep. dvamndjcas}]; (Hom. Il. 11,
379; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.); to leap up, spring up,
start up: avarndnoas, Mk. x.50 LT Tr WH; ef. Fritzsche
ad loc. (1S. xx. 34; Prov. xviii. 4 [Ald. etc.]; Tob.
M45 vie'3 31 Vii.16:)*
avd-1npos, -ov, (prop. mnpés fr. the lowest part to the
highest —ava; hence Suid. 6 ka imepBodiy memnpwpévos,
[ef. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs,
maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member
of the body: Lk. xiv. 13, 21 dvamnpous, xywXovs, tupdors.
In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain
Mss. the spelling dvameipovs — manifestly false, as aris-
ing from itacism. (Plat. Crito p.53 a. ywXol kat rupdol
kat GAAot avarnpor; Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585%,
29) yivovra €€ avarnpwy avarnpo; Lys. ap. Suid. piva kat
&ra avarnpos ; 2 Mace. viii. 24 rots weXeowv dvarnpovs.)*
ava-rirtw: 2 aor. avémecor, 3 pers. plur. averecov Mk.
vi. 40 (T Tr WH averecay); Jn. vi. 10 (LT Tr WH
averecav), inf. dvaneceiy, impv. avamece Lk. xiv. 10 (Ree.
avarecov fr. 1 aor. aveneca, | (Grsb. avarecat i. e. 1 aor.
mid. impv.)]); Lk. xvii. 7 [RG avameca, cf. WH. App.
p- 164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; see rinrw], ptcp. dvarecar ;
ef. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71); [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59); fr.
Eur. down]; to lie back, lie down: absol., Mk. vi. 40;
Jn. vi. 10, (se. on the ground) ; él tiv yqv, Mt. xv. 35; emt
ths yns, Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 216; [W. 23 (22)]) for dvaxXivopa to recline at table:
Lkoxi.37 ; -xiv10.s) xvii. 7); (xxii. 145. Jn. Xi. 125 xxi.
20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back,
Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an act rather than a
state, and in the last pass. differs from avdxeipat, vs. 23,
by indicating a change of position. | *
dva-rAnpow, -@; fut. dvawAnpoow; 1 aor. dverAnpwca;
41
:
avacTacts
[pres. pass. dvamAnpovpar]; (ava to, up to, e. g. to fill a
vessel up to the brim; up to the appointed measure or
standard, Germ. an fiillen); [fr. Eurip. down]; a Ie
to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 223);
hence trop. dyaprias, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is still
wanting to complete the number of their sins; on the
meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16; Dan. viii. 23; ix. 24; Mt. xxiii.
32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). dvamdnpoira 4 mpodpnreia the
prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corre-
sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. rév vdpor to fulfil i. e. observe
the law perfectly, Gal. vi. 2, (Barn. ep. 21 dvamd. racav
evrohnv) ; Tov Tomov tivds to fill the place of any one,
1 Co. xiv. 16 (after the rabbin. DIP xoD to hold the
position of any one, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]). 2. to
supply : ro borepnua, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 17
(they by their presence supplied your place in your ab-
sence); cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. dAN’ et re e&€Aurrov, cov
epyov (sc. eoriv) avamAnpoom. Cf. Win. De verb.
comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq.; [Ellic. on Phil. 1. ¢., or Mey.
on Gal. 1.c. Comp.: dvt-, mpoo-avarAnpdo |.*
avatroAdynTos, -ov, without defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20;
also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1.
(Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) *
ova-rriccw: 1 aor. averrvEa; (ava—cf. the Germ. auf
1. q. Quseinander, see dvakiw — and mricow to fold up,
roll together); to unroll, [i. e. open for reading]: 7
BiBrjiov (as in Hdt. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17 [RGT],
(2 K. xix.14). The books of the Hebrews were rolls
(F720) fastened to [one or] two smooth rods and fur-
nished with handles, so that they could be rolled up and
unrolled; [cf. B. D.s. v. Writing].*
dy-arrw; 1 aor. avna; 1 aor. pass. avnhOnv; to light
up, kindle: Lk. xii. 49; Acts xxviii. 2[RG]; Jas. iii. 5.
[From Hdt. down. ] *
dy-aplOunros, -ov, (a priv. and dpiOuéw), innumerable:
Heb. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.]*
ava-ceiw; 1 aor. avecerca; to shake up; trop. to stir
up, excite, rouse: tov dxydov, Mk. xv. 113; tov Aadv, Lk.
xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91; 14,10; Dion. Hal. antt.
8, 81.)*
dvo-ckevatw ; (ocKevatw, fr. oxedos a vessel, utensil) ;
1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to
carry it away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8.
Mid. to-move one’s furniture (when setting out for some
other place, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5,4 érav d€ dvackevatwvrat,
ouvTiOnot pév exactos Ta oKeEvn) ; hence 2. of an
enemy dismantling, plundering, a place (Thue. 4, 116);
to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, ete.; trop.
Wuxas, to turn away violently from a right state, to un-
settle, subvert: Acts xv. 24.*
dva-cmdw, -d: avacracw; 1 aor. pass. dvearracbnv; to
draw up: Lk. xiv.5; Acts xi.10. [From Hom. down. ]*
ava-cracis, -ews, 7, (avicrnut), [fr. Aeschyl. down];
1. a raising up, rising, (e. g. fr. a seat): Lk. ii. 34 (opp.
to mr@o.s; the meaning is ‘It lies [or ‘is set’ A. V.]
like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to
climb; but others will strike against it and fall’). 2.
arising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrectio), [Aeschyl.
,
davacTaTow
Eum. 648]; a. thatof Christ: Actsi.22; ii.31; iv.
33; Ro. vi.5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 21; with the addi-
tion of vexpav, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase : the resurrection-
of-the-dead, although it has come to pass as yet only in
the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2a.
fin.); éx vexpav, 1 Pet.i.3. b. that of all men at the
end of the present age. This is called simply avagracts
or 9 avdoracis, Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 23;
Lk. xx. 27, 33, 36; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2
Tim. ii. 18 ; by meton. i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn.
xi. 25; with the addition of 7 é« vexpov, Lk. xx. 35; Acts
iv. 2; or simply of rév vexpav [on the distinction which
some (e. g. Van Hengel on Ro. i. 4; Van Hengel and Bp.
Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 11; Cremer s. v.) would make between
these phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78) ], Mt. xxii.
31; Acts xvii. 32; xxiii. 6; xxiv. 15 [Rec.], 21; xxvi.
23; 1 Co. xv. 12 sq. 21,42; Heb. vi. 2. dvdor. (wis res-
urrection to life (av. ets Conv, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [ef. Dan. xii.
2]), and dy. ris xpicews resurrection to judgment, Jn. v.
29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)); the former is 7
dvdot. trav dixaiwv, Lk. xiv. 143 xpeitrwy advacracts, Heb.
xi. 35 (so called in comparison with a continuance of life
on earth, which is spoken of as an dvdoraots by a kind of
license; [ef. W. 460 (429)]). 9 dvaor. 7 mpwrn in Rev.
xx. 5 sq. will be that of true Christians, and at the end
of a thousand years will be followed by a second resur-
rection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq.
On the question whether and in what sense Paul also
believed in two resurrections, separated from each other
by a definite space of time, cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr.
fiir wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res-
urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were
restored to life before burial: Heb. xi. 35.*
avacratéw, -@; 1 aor. dvectdtwoa; a verb found no-
where in prof. auth., but [in Dan. vii. 23 Sept.; Deut.
xxix. 27 Graec. Venet.] several times in the O. T. frag-
ments of Aquila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g.
Ps. lviii. 11; Is. xxii. 3], and in Eustathius, (fr. dvacraros,
driven from one’s abode, outcast, or roused up from
one’s situation; accordingly equiv. to dvacrarov roo),
to stir up, excite, unsettle; foll. by an ace. a. to excite
tumults and seditions in the State: Acts xvii. 6; xxi.
38. b. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating
religious error: Gal. v. 12.*
dva-cravpdw, -3; to raise up upon across, crucify, (avd
as in dvacxodomi¢w): Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.
lii. p. 9 sq.; [Winer admits that in Heb. 1]. c. the meaning
to crucify again, or afresh, may also be assigned to this
verb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent
in prof. writ. for such a sense is, from the nature of the
case, not surprising ].*
dva-rrevatw: 1 aor. aveorévaka; to draw sighs up from
the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply: Mk. viii. 12.
(Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17); 2 Mace. vi. 30, and in
Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschy]. choéph. 335,] Hdt. 1, 86 down.) *
ava-rtpépw: fut. dvaotpeyw; [1 aor. aveorpeiya; Pass.,
pres. avacrpepopa]; 2 aor. averrpadny ; 1. to turn
42
avatiOnus
upside down, overturn: ras tpané{as, Jn. ii. 15, (Sigpous,
Hom. Il. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W.
251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. revertor,
(as in Grk. writ.; in Sept. i. q. 33%): Acts v. 22; xv.
16 (here dvaorpéyw xai has not like the Hebr. 33” the
force of an adverb, again, but God in the Messiah’s
advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of
as having previously abandoned; cf. W. 469 (4387)).
3. to turn hither and thither; pass. reflexively, to turn
one’s self about, sojourn, dwell, év in a place ; a. liter-
ally: Mt. xvii. 22, where L TWH Tr txt. cvotpepopevar,
cf. Keim ii. p. 581 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. 5;
Ezek. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. like the Hebr.
7 to walk, of the manner of life and moral character,
to conduct one’s self, behave one’s self, live: 2 Co. i. 12
(€v r@ koopm); 1 Tim. iii. 15 (ev otk Oeod); Eph. ii. 3
(€vois among whom); 2 Pet. ii. 18 (ev mAavn). simply
to conduct or behave one’s self, ‘walk’, (Germ. wandeln) :
1 Pet.i.17; Heb. x. 33; (xadés) xiii. 18. (Cf. its use
e.g. in Xen. an. 2, 5, 14; Polyb.1, 9,7; 74,13; 86,5
ete., (see dvaorpopy, fin.); Prov. xx. 7 Sept.; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; etc.]*
dva-crpodpt, -7s, 7, (fr. the pass. dvactpepopat, see the
preceding word), prop. ‘walk,’ i. e. manner of life, be-
havior, conduct, (Germ. Lebenswandel): Gal.i.13; Eph.
iv. 22; 1°Tim: iv. 123) Jas.iii.35) 1 Pet. 1515, 08s;
iii. 1 sq. 16; 2 Pet. ii. 7; plur. dysat dvaorpopai the ways
in which holy living shows itself, 2 Pet. iii.11. Hence
life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Heb. xiii. 7.
(This word, in the senses given, is found in Grk. writ.
fr. Polyb. 4, 82,1 down; in the Scriptures first in Tob.
iv. 14; 2 Mace. v. 8; add Epict. diss. 1, 9,5; 4, 7, 5,
[and (fr. Soph. Lex. s.v.) Agatharchides 134, 12; 153,
8; Aristeas 16].)*
dva-raccopar; [1 aor. mid. inf. dvaragacOa}; (mid.
of avardcow), to put together in order, arrange, compose :
diunynow, Lk. i. 1 (so to construct [R. V. draw up] a nar-
rative that the sequence of events may be evident.
‘Found besides only in Plut. de sollert. anim. c. 12, where
it denotes to go regularly through a thing again, re-
hearse it; [in Eccl. ii. 20 Ald., and in eccl. writ. e. g.
Tren. 3, 21, 2 sub fin.]).*
dva-réd\dw ; 1 aor. avererda; pf. avaréradka; a. trans.
to cause to rise: tov fAcov, Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bring-
ing forth plants, Gen. iii. 18; of a river producing
something, Hom. Il. 5, 777). b. intrans. to rise, arise:
light, Mt. iv. 16, (Is. lviii. 10); the sun, Mt. xill. 6; Mk.
iv.6; xvi. 2; Jas.i. 11; the clouds, Lk. xii. 54; doodo-
pos, 2 Pet.i.19. trop. to rise from, be descended from,
Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used ava-
rédAew of the sun and moon, and emureAdew of the stars;
but Aelian., Paus., Stob. and other later writ. neglect
this distinction; see Lob. ad Phryn. p.124sq. [Comp.:
e&-avaredAw. | *
dva-r(Onpr: 2 aor. mid. dveOéunv; [in various senses fr.
Hom. down]; in the mid. voice to set forth a thing
drawn forth, as it were, from some corner (ava), to set
forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before]: rwi 71, Acts
,
avatoAn
xxv. 14; Gal. ii. 2, (2 Macc. iii. 9; [Mic. vii. 5]; Artem.
oneir. 2, 64 rwi rd dvap; Diog. Laért. 2,17, 16 p. 191
ed. Heubn.; Plut. amat. narr. p. 772d.) Cf. Fritzschio-
rum Opusce. p. 169; [Holsten, Zum Evang. des Paulus
u. d. Petrus p. 256 sq. COoMP.: mpoo-avariOnyt. | *
avato\t, -7s, 7, (fr. dvatéAA@, q. V.), as in Grk. writ. ;
1. a rising (of the sun and stars); light rising &e& vous,
LES i 78: 2. the east (the quarter of the sun’s ris-
ing): Mt. ii. 2,9; Rev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. dvaroAa@v) ; Hdian.
2, 8, 18 (10); 3, 5,1; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14, 3, [6; 1, 26,
6; Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 5,6; Ignat. ad Ro. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb.
h. e. 4, 26, 14; with nAiov added, Rev. vii. 2[RGT Tr
WHtxt.]; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 176 (166) ]:
Mt. ii. 1; viii. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt.,
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; Philo in Flace. § 7); with the
addition of mAiov, Rev. xvi. 12 [-Ans T Tr txt. WH txt. ;
vii. 2 L WH mrg. }.*
ava-rpérw ; [1 aor. avérpepal; to overthrow, overturn, de
stroy: [rac rpaméfac, Jn. ii. 15 WH txt.]; ethically, to sud
vert : oikove families, Tit. i. 11. rv trivwy rior, 2 Tim.
ii. 18. (Common in Grk. writ., and in the same sense. )*
dva-rpéw : 2 aor. pass. averpadny; pf. pass. ptep. ava-
teOpappevos; 1 aor. mid. dveOpeWapnv; to nurse up, nour-
ish up, (Germ. aufndhren, auffiittern); prop. of young
children and animals nourished to promote their growth
(Xen. mem. 4, 3, 10, etc.; Sap. vii. 4); to bring up: Lk.
iv.16 TWHmrg.; Acts vii. 20 sq.; with the predomi-
nant idea of forming the mind, Acts xxii. 3, (4 Mace.
x. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp.
ete: Pt. iii: p. 4.*
dva-paivw: 1 aor. avépava, Doric for the more com.
avepnva, (Acts xxi. 3 RT WH [with Erasm., Steph.,
Mill|; cf. Passow p. 2199; [ Veitch, and L. and S.,s. v.
gairw; W.89 (85); B. 41 (35)]; see émaivw); Pass.,
[pres. avapaivopar]; 2 aor. avepaynv; [fr. Hom. down];
to bring to light, hold up to view, show; Pass. to appear,
be made apparent: Lk. xix. 11. An unusual phrase is
avadavevtes thy Kimpov having sighted Cyprus, for avada-
veions nuiv ths Kumpou, Acts xxi. 3; cf. B. 190 (164); W.
§ 39, 1a. p. 260 (244); here R* T WH [see above] read
avapavavres thy K. after we had rendered Cyprus visible
(to us); [R. V. had come in sight of Cyprus. ].*
ava-hépw; fut. avoicw (Lev. xiv. 20; Num. xiv. 33,
etc.) ; 1 aor. dvnveyxa; 2 aor. avnveyxov; [see reff. s. v.
ep; impf. pass. avepepounv; fr. Hom. down]; 1. to
carry or bring up, to lead up; men to a higher place:
Mt. xvii. 1; Mk. ix. 2; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf.om. WH
reject the cl.]. dvadépew ras duaprias émi ro Evdov, 1 Pet.
ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, sc. in order to expi-
ate them by suffering death, [cf. W. 428 sq. (399)]). 2.
to put upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept.
for myn of presentation as a priestly act, cf. Kurtz
on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), Ovaias, Ovaiav, etc., (Isa. lvii. 6,
etc.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 53 with ém 7d
Ovotacrnpiov added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20; Lev. xiv.
20; [Bar.i.10; 1 Mace. iv. 53]); [éavrov, Heb. vii. 27,
T Tr mrg. WH mrg. mpocevéyxas]. Cf. Kurtzu.s. 3.
43
? ,
Avédpovixo.
to lift up on one’s self, to take upon one’s self, i. e. to place
on one’s self anything as a load to be upborne, to sus-
tain: ras duaprias i. e. by meton. their punishment, Heb.
ix. 28 (Is. liii. 12; rv mopveiav, Num. xiv. 33); cf. Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.*
dva-pwvew, -@: 1 aor. avepavnaa; to cry out with a loud
voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk.i.42. (1 Chr. xv. 28; xvi.
4; [Aristot. de mund. 6, vol. i. p. 400%, 18]; Polyb.,
often in Plut.)*
dva-X vets, -ews, 7, (avayew [to pour forth]), rare in Grk.
writ. [Strabo, Philo, Plut.; av. yuyjs, in a good sense,
Philo de decal. § 10 mid.]; an overflowing, a pouring
out: metaph., 1 Pet. iv. 4 dowrias dvayvois the excess
(flood) of riot in which a dissolute life pours itself
forth.*
dva-Xwpew, -@; 1 aor. dveywpnoa; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ;
1. to go back, return: Mt. ii. 12 sq. [al. refer this to next
head]. 2. towithdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room:
Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some
other place, or shun sight: Mt. ii. 14,22; iv.12; xii. 15;
Riv. 3; exve Zhe exvi Sep Mik iss In. va. 15 edt
gevyer]; Acts xxiii. 19 (kar idiay) ; xxvi. 31.*
ava-utis, -ews, 7, (avayiyw, q. v.), a cooling, refresh-
ing: Acts ili. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be
ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven; Vulg.
refrigerium. (Ex. viii.15; Philo de Abr. § 29; Strabo
10, p. 459; and in eccl. writ.)*
dva-poxw: 1 aor. dvévéa; to cool again, to cool off,
recover from the effects of heat, (Hom. Od. 4, 568; II. 5,
795; Plut. Aem. P. 25, ete.); trop. to refresh: twa, one’s
spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i.
16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, re-
vive, refresh one’s self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 14;
2S. xvi. 14; Ex. xxiii. 12; 1S. xvi. 23; ete., in] 2 Mace.
iv. 46; xiii. 11; and in the later Grk. writ.)*
avSparrobioris, -ov, 6, (fr. avdpamodi¢w, and this fr. rd
avdparodov—fr. avnp and movs—a slave, a man taken in
war and sold into slavery), a slave-dealer, kidnapper,
man-stealer, i. e. as well one who unjustly reduces free
men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others
and sells them: 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat.,
Dem., Isocr., Lys., Polyb.)*
’AvSpéas, -ov, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning
manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ;
B. D. s. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in
Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the
Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ: Jn. i. 40, 44
(41, 45); vi. 8; xii. 22; Mt.iv.18; x.2; Mk.i. 16, 29;
i. 18; xii.3; Lk. vi. 14; Acts1. 13*
avhpitw: (aynp); to make a man of or make brave,
(Xen. oec. 5,4). Mid. pres. avdpi¢ouar; to show one’s
self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [A. V. quit you like
men]. (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Mace. ii. 64;
Xen., Plat., App., Plut., al.)*
*Av8pdvikos, -ov, 6, Andronicus, (a Grk. name, [lit. man
of victory; for its occurrence see Pape, Eigennamen,
s. v.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul: Ro.
xvi. 7.*
avdpopovos
dyv8po-ddvos, -ov, 6, a manslayer: 1'Tim.i.9. (2 Mace.
ix. 28; Hom., Plat., Dem., al.) [Cf. povevs.]*
dy-€ykAnTOs, -ov, (a priv. and éyKadéa, q. V.), that can-
not be called to account, unreprovable, unaccused, blame-
less: 1Co.i. 8; Col. i. 22; 1 Tim. iii. 10; Tit.i. 6 sq. (3
Mace. v. 31; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) [Cf.
Trench § ciii.] *
dy-exSifynros, -ov, (a priv. and exdunyéouat, q. V.), Un-
speakable, indescribable: 2 Co. ix. 15 dwped, to describe
and commemorate which words fail. (Only in eccl. writ.
[Clem. Rom.1Cor. 20,5; 49,4; Athenag., Theoph., al. ].)*
dy-ek-hdAntos, -ov, (a priv. and exdadew), unspeakable :
1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ({Diose.
medicam. p. 93 ed. Kiihn]; Heliod. 6, 15 p. 252 (296) ;
and in eccl. writ.)*
dvéxXeurrros, -ov, (a priv. and ékNeime to fail), unfailing:
Lk. xii. 33. ({Hyperid. p. 58" ed. Teubner]; Diod. 4,
84; 1, 36, cf. 8,16; Plut. de orac. defect. p. 438 d., and
in eccl. writ.)*
dv-extds, -ov, and in later Grk. also -ds, -y, -ov [cf. W.
68 (67); B. 25 (22)], (avéyoua: to bear, endure); fr.
Hom. down; bearable, tolerable: avexrotepov garat the
lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22, 24; Mk.
vis dd oR Dibres! ike. 12114.
down.)*
dy-eXen Pov, -ov, Zen. -ovos, (a priv. and denny), without
mercy, merciless: Ro.i. 31. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37
p- 1442*, 13]; Prov. v. 9, etc.; Sir. xiii. 12, ete.; Sap. xii.
Dec ety)
dv-€deos, -ov, without mercy, merciless: Jas. i. 138 LT
Tr WH, unusual form for advitews RG. The Greeks
said dyydens and avedens, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq. ;
W. 100 (95).*
avepifw: (dvepos); to agitate or drive by the wind; pres.
pass. ptep. aveurCduevos, Jas. i. 6. Besides only in schol.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
on Hom. Od. 12, 336 €v6a jv oxern mpos 7d pty avepicer Oa,
[Hesych. s. v. avapvEa- avepioar; Joannes Moschus
(in Patr. Graec. Ixxxvii. p. 3044 a.) avepicovros tod mAolov
velificante nave]. The Greeks said avepow. Cf. Krvde0-
vi¢omau.*
Gvepwos, -ov, 6, (dw, dnut to breathe, blow, [but etymolo-
gists connect dm with Skr. vd, Grk. anp, Lat. ventus,
Eng. wind, and dveyos with Skr. an to breathe, ete.; cf.
Curtius §§ 419, 587; Vaniéek p. 28]), [fr. Hom. down],
wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [cf. (Trench
§ Ixxiii.) wvedpa, 1 fin.]: Mt. xi. 7; xiv. 24; Jas. iii. 4,
etc.; of a very strong and tempestuous wind: Mt. vii.
25; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. viii. 24, ete. of réooapes dvepor, the
four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)),
ms yns, Rev. vii. 1; hence the four quarters of the
heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow): Mt. xxiv.
31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24).
Metaph. dveyos tis didacKadias, variability and empti-
ness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14.
av-evSexros, -ov, (a priv. and évdexros, and this fr. évdé-
xopua, q. V.), that cannot be admitted, inadmissible, unal-
lowable, improper: avevdexrov eote Tod pn eAOeiv it cannot
be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1 [W. 328 (308) ;
44
> /
aAVvVEVN@
B. 269 (231)]}. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 6 dpiOpos mpos Tov
pédAovta xpdvov avevdexros, [ Diog. Laert. 7, 50}, and sev-
eral times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.) *
aveEepevvntos, I Tr WH -pavvnros [ef. Tf. Proleg. p.
81; B. 58 (50); Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 117;
see épavvdw }, -ov, (a priv. and é&-epevvaw), that cannot be
searched out: Ro. xi. 38. (Symm. Prov. xxv. 3; Jer.
xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)*
dveEi-Kakos, -ov, (fr. the fut. of avéyouat, and xakéy; cf.
classic de€ixakos, duynoixaxos), patient of ills and wrongs,
Jorbearing: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Leian. jud. voce. 9; [Justin
M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)*
aveEtxviacros, -ov, (a priv. and e€:yud¢w to trace out),
that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended,
[A. V. unsearchable]: Ro. xi. 33; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v.
9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24]; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. ed.
Tdf., Proleg. § xxix.]; several times in eccl. writ.)*
dv-er-aleXuvTos, -ov, (a priv. and emaucxvvw), (Vulg.
inconfusibilis), having no cause to be ashamed: 2 Tim. ii.
15. ([Joseph. antt. 18, 7,1]; unused in Grk. writ. [W.
236 (221)].)*
dv-er-Anmros [LT Tr WH -Anumros; see M, p], -ov, (a
priv. and émuAapBave), prop. not apprehended, that cannot
be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open
to censure, irreproachable, [Tittmann i. p. 31; Trench
§ ciii.]: 1 Tim. iii. 2; v.7; vi.14. (Freq. in Grk. writ.
fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)*
av-épxopar: 2 aor. avnddov; [fr. Hom. down]; to go
up: Jn. vi. 3; to a higher place; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 17
[LTrmrg. ampdOov], 18; (1 K. xiii. 12). [Comp.:
en-avepxop.at. | *
dv-erts, -ews, 7, (avinus to let loose, slacken, anything
tense, e. g. a bow),. a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a
more tolerable condition in captivity: €yew dveow to be
held in less rigorous confinement [R. V. have indulgence ],
Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph. antt. 18, 6,10 dudaky pev yap kat
THpHols Hv, peTa pevTor averews THs eis Siaray). relief,
rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7; from the troubles of
poverty, 2 Co. viii. 13; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co.
ii. 13 (12); vii. 5. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. [Hdt.
5, 28] down.) [SyYN. see avdravots, fin. | *
dy-erdfw; pres. pass. dverafouar; (erafm to examine,
test); to investigate, examine; twa, to examine judicially :
Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Judg. vi. 29 cod. Alex.; Sus. [i. e.
Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed.
Tdf.]._ Not found in prof. auth.)*
avev, prep. with gen., without: 1 Pet. iii. 1; iv. 9.
with gen. of the pers. without one’s will or intervention,
(often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down): Mt. x. 29.
[Compared with yapis, see Tittm. i. p. 93 sq.; Ellic. on
Eph. ii. 12; Green, Crit. Notes, ete. (on Ro. iii. 28).]*
av-eb-Beros, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not fit:
Acts xxvii. 12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53 ].)*
av-evplokw: 2 aor. davedpor, 3 pers. plur. dvedpav, Lk.
ii. 16 (T Tr WH; see evpioxw) ; to find out by search:
rid, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 13 sq.*
av-éxw: in the N. T. only in the mid. avéyouar; fut.
aves
avéfopar (W. 83 (-9)\: impf. qvecyduny 2 Co. xi. [1 Rec*!”],
4 [Rec.] (GT TrWH rg. dvetyouny [cf. Moeris ed.
Piers. p. 176; (but L WH txt. in vs. 4 avéy.); cf. WH.
App. p. 162; W. 72 (70); B. 35 (31)]); 2 aor. nvecxo-
pny Acts xviii. 14 (LT Tr WH avecyduny, reff. u. s.) ;
to hold up, (e. g. kepadny, xeipas, Hom. et al.) ; hence in
mid. to hold one’s self erect and firm (against any pers.
or thing), to sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear
with, endure, with a gen. of the pers. (in Grk. writ. the
accus. is more com., both of the pers. and of the thing),
of his opinions, actions, etc.: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19;
Lk. ix. 41; 2 Co. xi.19; Eph. iv. 2; Col. iii.13. foll. by
gen. of the thing: 2 Th. i. 4 [WH mre. évey.] (ais by
attraction for dv, unless ds be preferred [B. 161 (140);
cf. W. 202 (190)]). foll. by pexpdv re with gen. of both
pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (acc. to the reading pov
puxpdv te adpoovyns [Ree LT TrWH]; cf. Meyer
ad loc.). without a case, 1 Co. iv. 12 (we endure). foll.
by et tus, 2 Co. xi. 20. Owing to the context, to bear
with i. e. to listen: with gen. of the pers., Acts xviii. 14;
of the thing, 2 Tim. iv. 3; Heb. xiii. 22. [Comp.: mpoo-
avexo. |*
dvepids, -od, 6, [for d-vemt-wds con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne-
pos, Germ. nichte, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342], a
cousin: Col. iv. 10. (Num. xxxvi.11; Tob. vii.2.) [Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.;
also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister’s Son. ]*
avnPov, -ov, 7d, dill, anise [(?); cf. BB.DD.s. v.;_ Tris-
tram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 419 sq.]: Mt. xxiii. 23.
(Arstph. nub. 982; [Aristot., al.]; often in Theophr.
hist. pl.) *
av-qkw; [impf. avjxey]; in Grk. writ. to have come up
to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foll. generally by
eis 71; hence in later writ. dvpxee ri rue something apper-
tains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed
by others (1 Mace. x. 42; xi. 35; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and
then ethically 76 dvjKxov what is due, duty, [R. V. befitting],
Philem. 8; ra ovx avyjxovra unbecoming, discreditable,
Eph. v. 4 (LT Tr WH 4 ov avjxev, W. 486 (452) ; [B.
350 (301) ]); impers. @s avnxe as was fitting, sc. ever
since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270
(254); ef. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
dv-hepos, -ov (a priv. and jpepos), not tame, savage,
fierce: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anacr. 1, 7]
Aeschyl. down.)*
avip, avdpos, 6, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this
word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ;
for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and
so to distinguish a man from a woman; either a. asa
male: Acts viii. 12; xvii.12; 1Tim.ii.12; or b. asa
husband: Mt.i.16; Mk. x.2; Jn. iv. 16 sqq.; Ro. vii. 2
sqq:5'1 Co: vil. 2.sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii.'2;12; Tit.
i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt.i.19; Rev.
xxi. 2, etc. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis-
tinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38
(where avdpes, yuvaixes and radia are discriminated) ;
with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue:
1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to vamos); Eph. iv. 13; Jas. iii. 2, (in
45
avOpak
the last two pass. réAevos dvnp)- 3. univ. any male
person, @ man; so where ris might have been used:
Lk. viii. 41; ix. 38; Acts vi.11; x.5,ete. where avnp
and tis are united: Lk. vili. 27; Actsv.1; x.1. or
avnp and os he who, ete.: Ro. iv. 8; Jas.i.12. where
mention is made of something usually done by men, not
by women: Lk. xxii. 63; Acts v.36. where angels or
other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms
of men: Lk. ix. 30; xxiv.4; Acts x.30. where it is so
connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force
of a substantive: dvjp dyaprwddos a sinner, Lk. v. 8;
Aerpot avdpes, Lk. xvii. 12; or is joined to appellatives:
dvip ovevs, Acts iii. 14; av. mpodpyrns, Lk. xxiv. 19,
(83) we, Judg. vi. 8; [cf. W. 30; § 59,1; B. 82 (72);
other reff. s. v. avOpwrros, 4 a. fin.]); or to gentile names:
apes Nuvevirar, Mt. xii. 41; avnp lovdaios, Acts xxii. 3;
av. Aidiow, Acts viii. 27; avd. Kumpior, Acts xi. 20; esp.
in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5d.; B.
82 (72)], Actsi.11; ii. 14; xiii. 165 xvii. 22, ete.; even
avdpes adeAoi, Acts i. 16; [ii. 29,37; vii. 2]; xiii. [15],
26, ete. 4. when persons of either sex are included,
but named after the more important: Mt. xiv. 35; Acts
iv. 4; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts
l. c.) to dispute even these examples; but al. would refer
several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31; Jas. i. 20) to
the same head].
av0-icrnp.: pf. avOeornka; 2 aor. avreorny, [impv. av-
tiatnte |, inf. avtiarnvat; Mid., pres. av@ioraya; impf.
avOardpnv; (avti and torn); to set against; as in Grk.
writ., in the mid., and in the pf. plpf. [having pres. and
impf. force, W. 274 (257)] and 2 aor. act., to set one’s
self against, to withstand, resist, oppose: pf. act., Ro. ix.
19; xili. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [RG]. 2’ aor. act., Mt. v. 39;
Dk xxi 15.) Acts vi. 10; Gali. 11; Niph. vie 1357 2° im:
iii. 8; [iv.15 LT TrWH]. impv., Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v.
9. . Mid. > pres.,2 Tim. 11.8) “impr, Acts xii. 8.*
dv0-oporoydopat, -ovpar: [impf. avOwporoyovpny]; (avti
and 6poroyéouar) ; in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) 1.
to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree
mutually (in turn), to make a compact. 3. to acknowl-
edge in the presence of (avri before, over against; cf.
eEoporoyeio bat €vavre kupiov, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.): tras duaptias
to confess sins, Joseph. antt. 8, 10, 3 [Bekk. reads avopo-
Aoyoupevous]; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). wi, to declare
something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give
thanks to him, Lk. ii. 38; (for 737 in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.)
13; 8 Mace. vi. 33; [Dan. iv. 31 (34) Sept.; Test. xii.
Patr. test. Jud. § 1]).*
av0os, -eos, 70, [fr. Hom. down]; a flower: Jas. i. 10
sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24.*
avOpaxid [on accent cf. Etym. Magn. 801, 21; Chand-
ler § 95], -as, 7, @ heap of burning coals: Jn. xviii. 18;
Xx1. 95" (Sir. x1 325 4 Mace? ix:/20;>" Hom: I '9,'213,
ete.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Coal.]*
av0pak, -axos, 6, coal, (also, fr. Thue. and Arstph. down,
a live coal), avOp. rupds a coal of fire i. e. a burning or
live coal; Ro. xii. 20 dvOp. mupds c@pevew emt thy Kehadny
b) ,
avOpwrdperKos
twos, a proverbial expression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signify-
ing to call up, by the favors you confer on your enemy,
the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which
shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head),
that he may the more readily repent. The Arabians
call things that cause very acute mental pain burning
coals of the heart and fire in the liver; cf. Gesenius in
Rosenmiiller’s Bibl.-exeg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his
Thesaurus i. 280; cf. also BB.DD. s. v. Coal]. *
avOpwr-dperkos, -ov, (avOpwros and dpeckos agreeable,
pleasing, insinuating; cf. evapecxos, dvodpeckos, avta-
peoxos in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 621); only in bibl. and
eccl. writ. [W. 25]: studying to please men, courting the
favor of men: Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22. (Ps. lii. (liii.) 6 ;
[Ps. Sal. iv. 8, 10].)*
avOpdmuvos, -ivn, -wov, (avOpwros), [fr. Hdt. down],
human; applied to things belonging to men: yeipes,
Acts xvii. 25 LT TrWH; qvors, Jas. ili. 7; or insti-
tuted by men: «riots, [q. v. 3], 1 Pet. ii. 13; adjusted to
the strength of man: meipacpos [R. V. a temptation such
as man can bear], 1 Co. x. 13 (ef. Neander [and Heinrici]
ad loe.; Pollux 3, 27, 131 6 ov« ay Tis Uropeverev, 6 ovK ay
Tis eveykn -.. 70 O€ evavtiov, koupdr, evopor, dictov, av-
O@pamuvov, avextov). Opp. to divine things, with the im-
plied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec.; 13
(codia, originating with man); iv. 3 (dvO@pemivn npépa
the judicial day of men, i. e. human judgment). av6po-
mwov eyo, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as
is usual among men, who do not always suitably weigh
the force of their words; by this expression the apos-
tle apologizes for the use of the phrase dovAwOjvar 77H
dixacoavvn ).*
avOpwrroKtdvos, -ov, (kreivo to kill), a manslayer, mur-
derer: Jn. viii. 44. contextually, to be deemed equal to
a murderer, 1 Jn. iii. 15. (Eur. Iph. T. (382) 389.) (Cf.
Trench § Ixxxiii. and qovevs. ]*
avOpwrros, -ov, 6, [ perh. fr. avnp and oy, i. e. man’s face;
Curtius § 422; Vaniéek p.9. From Hom. down]; man.
It is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature,
without distinction of sex, a human being, whether male
or female: Jn. xvi. 21. And inthis sense a. with the
article, generically, so as to include all human individ-
uals: Mt. iv. 4 (én dpt@ (noerat 6 dvOpwros); Mt. xii. 35
(6 ayaOés av6. every good person); Mt. xv. 11, 18; Mk.
li. 27; vii. 15,18, 20; Lk.iv.4; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § 18, 8];
vii. 51; Ro. vii. 1,ete. b. so that a man is distinguished
from beings of a different race or order; a. from ani-
mals, plants, etc.: Lk. v.10; Mt.iv.19; xii.12; 2 Pet.
i 265) Rev. ix. 4,7, 1O;1b 21S. x1. 15) ete. ip. from
God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32;
xix.6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. ii. 15 [T WH om., L Tr br.] (opp.
to angels); Jn. x. 33; Acts x. 26; xiv.11; 1 Th. ii. 13;
Gal. i. 10, 12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil. ii. 7,7 (8); 1 Tim.
ii. 5; Heb. viii. 2; xiii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4, ete. c. with
the added notion of weakness, by which man is led
into mistake or prompted to sin: ot« dvOpamoi (RG
capxixol) €ore; 1 Co. iii. 4; copia avOpwrav, 1 Co. ii. 5;
avOparev emOvpia, 1 Pet. iv. 2; cara ¢z@amroy mepimateire
46
avOpwrros
ye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iii. 3; Aadeiv or
Aeyetv kata GvOpwrov, to speak according to human modes
of thinking, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii.5; xara avOpwrov dé yo,
I speak as a man to whom analogies from human affairs
present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an
example drawn from ordinary human life, Gal. iii. 15;
kara avOp. Onprouaxeiv, as man is wont to fight, urged on by
the desire of gain, honor and other earthly advantages,
1 Co. xv. 32; ovx €orte xara avOp. is not accommodated
to the opinions and desires of men, Gal. i. 11; [for exx.
of xara av6. in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom.u. s.];
with the accessory notion of malignity: mpooéyere
amo tav avOpmmwv, Mt. x. 17; eis xetpas avOparav, Mt.
xvii. 22; Lk. ix. 44. d. with the adjunct notion of
contempt, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.) : Jn. v. 12; the
address ® a@vOpere, or av6pwre, is one either of contempt
and disdainful pity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. Gorg. p. 452 b. od
dé... tis et, & advOpwre), or of gentle rebuke, Lk. xxii.
58,60. The word serves to suggest commiseration: td
[T Tr WH i602 | 6 avép. behold the man in question, mal-
treated, defenceless, Jn. xix. 5. e. with a reference
to the twofold nature of man, 6 éow and 6 é£w avOpwros,
soul and body: Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; 2 Co. iv. 16,
(Plat. rep. 9, 589 a. 6 évtds avOpwros; Plotin. Enn. 5, 1,
10 6 elaw avOp.; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 61sq; [Mey.
on Ro. 1.¢.; Ellic. on Eph. 1. ¢.]); 6 xpumrés ths xapdias
avOp. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofold
moral condition of man, 6 madatds (the corrupt) and 6
kawvos (6 véos) avOp. (the truly Christian man, conformed
to the nature of God): Ro. vi. 6; Eph. ii. 15; iv. 22, 24;
Col. iii. 9 sq. g. with a reference to the sex, (context-
ually) a male: Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without
the article, dvOpwmos, a. some one, a (certain) man,
when who he is either is not known or is not import-
ant: i.q. tis, Mt. xvii. 14; xxi. 28; xxii.11; Mk. xii. 1;
xiv. 13; Lk. v. 18; xiii. 19, ete. with the addition of ris,
Mts xvitis 12% Sok. x23 0) xive 256 sexcvenlble- eevee olor
Jn.v.5. in address, where the speaker either cannot
or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20; or where the writer
addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii.1, 3. b. where
what is said holds of every man, so that av@p. is equiv.
to the Germ. indef. man, one: Ro. iii. 28; 1 Co. iv. 1;
vii. 1; xi. 28; Gal.ii.16. So also where opp. to domes
tics, Mt. x. 36; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10; to a father, Mt.
x. 35; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 36 sq.,—in
which passages many, confounding sense and signifi-
cation, incorrectly say that the word av@p. signifies father
of a family, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur. of
dvOp. is sometimes (the) people, Germ. die Leute: Mt.
v. 18, 16% vi.:5, 18; vu. 27> xvi. 13 Lk exes
Vili. 24, 27; Jn. iv. 28; ovdels dvOparav (nemo homi-
num) no one, Mk. xi. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 16. 4. It is joined
a. to another substantive, —a quasi-predicate of office,
or employment, or characteristic, — the idea of the pred:
icate predominating [W. § 59,1]: dvO@pwmos Europos a
merchant (-man), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH txt. om. avp.]; oie
deaondtns, Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 1; xxi. 33; Baowevs, Mt.
XViii. 23; xxii. 2; qgayos, Mt. xi. 19. (So in Hebr.
; ,
avOuTratevw
DD WR a eunuch, Jer. xxxviii. 7 sq., | WX a priest,
Lev. xxi. 9; also in Grk. writ.: dv. 63irns, Hom. Il. 16,
263, al. ; are Matthiae § 430, 6; [Kriiger § 57, 1,1]; but
in Attic this combination generally has a contemptuous
force; cf. Bnhdy. p. 48; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic.
epp- ad diversos 12, 22, 1). b. toa gentile noun: dvé.
Kupnvatos, Mt. xxvii. 32; “Iovdatos, Acts xxi. 39;
patios, Acts xvi. 37; xxil. 25, (acc. to the context, a Ro-
man citizen). 5. 6 avOp., with the article, the partic-
ular man under consideration, who he is being plain
from the context: Mt. xii.13; xxvi. 72; Mk. iii.5; Lk.
xxiii. 6; Jn. iv. 50. otros 6 av6., Lk. xiv. 30; Jn. ix. 16,
24 [LTrmrg. WH]; xi. 47; 6 av. otros, Mk. xiv.
71; Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 47; Jn. ix. 24 [RGT Trtat.];
xviii. 17; Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 31,32. 6 av.
éxeivos, Mt. xii. 45; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. 6. Phrases:
6 avO. ras duaprias (or with T Tr txt.WH txt. r. dvopias),
2 Th. ii. 3, see duapria, 1 p. 30 sq. avO. rod Geod a man
devoted to the service of God, God’s minister: 1 Tim.
vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the evangelists, the associates
of the apostles) ; 2 Pet.i. 21 (of prophets, like DTN wR
often in the O. T.; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For
6 vids Tov avOpwrov and viol rav avOp., see under vids.
av0-vratevw ; (avri for i.e. in lieu or stead of any one,
and trarevo to be izaros, to be supreme, to be consul) ;
to be proconsul: Acts xviii. 12[RG; cf. B. 169 (147)].
(Plut. comp. Dem. ec. Cic. c. 3; Hdian. 7, 5, 2.) *
av-vzraros, -ov, 6, [see the preceding word], proconsul :
Acts xiii. 7, 8,12; xviii. 12 LT Tr WH; xix. 38. The
emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into
senatorial and imperial. The former were presided
over by proconsuls; the latter were administered by
legates of the emperor, sometimes called also proprae-
tors. (Polyb., Dion. H., Leian., Plut., and often in Dio
Cass.) [B.D.s.v. Proconsul; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Prov-
ince; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878,
p- 289 sq.]*
dyv-inpt, [ptep. plur. dvevres]; 2 aor. subj. ave, ptep.
plur. avévres; 1 aor. pass. avé@nv; to send back; to relar;
contextually, to loosen: ti, Acts xvi. 26, (rots Secpovs,
Plut. Alex. M. 73); xxvii. 40. trop. tHv ameAnp, to give
up, omit, calm [?], Eph. vi. 9; (ryv €x@pav, Thuc. 3, 10;
iv épynv, Plut. Alex. M. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to
let sink: Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).*
dy-(iews, -wv, gen. -w, (fAews, Attic for Taos), without
mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [RG]. Found nowhere
else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. dvéAeos.*
dvurros, -ov, (virrw to wash), unwashed: Mt. xv. 20;
Mk. vii. 2, and RL mrg.in 5. (Hom. I]. 6, 266, ete.)*
dy-iornpt: fut. dvacrnow; 1 aor. avéornoa; 2 aor. ay
éorny, impv. avaotn& and (Acts xii. 7; Eph. v. 14 and
L WH tat. in Acts ix. 11) dvdora (W. § 14, 1h.; [B. 47
(40)]); Mid., pres. avicraya: fut. avacrncopa; [fr.
Hom. down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1
aor. and fut. act., fo cause to rise, raise up, (D°P7);
a. prop. of one lying down: Actsix.41. b. to raise up
from death: Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34,
(so in Grk. writ.). c. to raise up, cause to be born:
‘Po-
47
“Avvas
omreppa offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [ef. W.
33 (32)]; tov Xpiordy, Acts ii. 30 Rec. to cause to ap-
pear, bring forward, twa tw one for any one’s succor:
mpopntmy, Acts ili. 22; vii. 37; roy maida atrod, Acts iii.
26. II. Intransitively, in the pf. plpf. and 2
aor. act., and in the mid.; 1. to rise, stand up; used
a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed): Mk. i.
35; v.42; Lk. viii. 55; xi. 7; Acts ix. 34,40. of per-
sons lying on the ground: Mk. ix. 27; Lk. xvii. 19;
xxii. 46; Acts ix. 6. b. of persons seated: Lk. iv. 16
(avéotn avayveva); Mt. xxvi.62; Mk. xiv. 60; Acts
xxiii. 9. c¢. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere:
Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii. 14; [x.50 RG]; Lk. iv. 38; xxiii. 1;
Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves
for a journey, (Germ. sich aufmachen): Mk. vii. 24; x.
1; Lk. i. 39; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxii. 10. In the
same way the Hebr. Dap (esp. Dp*)) is put before verbs
of going, dig awttaice. etc., M Sldeag to the well
known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to
the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence
formerly Dp*) and dvaords were sometimes incorrectly
said to be redundant ; ef. W. 608 (565). dvaarjva and
to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been
doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground:
Lk. xxii. 45. d. of the dead; 2 aor., with éx vexpar
added: Mt. xvii. 9 RG WH mrg.; Mk. ix. 9 sq.; xii. 25;
Lk. xvi. 31; xxiv. 46; Jn. xx. 9; Eph. v. 14 (here fig.) ;
with é« vexp@v omitted: Mk. viii. 31; xvi. 9; Lk. ix. 8,
19, [22 L T Trmrg. WH mrg.]; xxiv. 7; Ro. xiv. 9 Rec.;
so (without é« vexp.) in the fut. mid. also: Mt. xii. 41;
[xvii. 23 L WH mrg.]; xx. 19 [RGL Trmrg. WH mrg.];
Mk. x. 34; Lk. xi. 32; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23 sq.; 1 Th. iv.
16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, proph-
ets, priests, leaders of insurgents: Acts v. 36 sq.; vii.
18. mid., Ro. xv.12; Heb. vii.11,15. of those about
to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk.
x. 25; Acts vi. 9; or to undertake some business, Acts
v.6; or to attempt something against others, Acts v. 17.
Hence dvaornva: eri twa to rise up against any one: Mk.
iii. 26, (Sy Dip). [Syn. see éeyeipw, fin. Comp.: ér-,
eLaviornu. |
“Awa [WH “Avra, see their Intr. § 408], -as [on this
gen. cf. B. 17 (15); Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 138], 7,
Anna, (7131) grace), the prop. name of a woman (so in
1S. i. 2 sqq.; ii. 1 Alex.; Tob. i. 9, 20, ete.), a prophetess,
in other respects unknown: LK. ii. 36.*
"Avvas [WH “Avvas, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this
gen. cf. W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), 6, (in Joseph. *Avaves; fr.
Hebr. 33M to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews,
elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of
Syria c. a. D. 6 or 7; but afterwards, A. D. 15, deposed
by Valerius Gratus, the procurator of Judza, who put in
his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after
Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office
passed to Simon; from Simon ec. A.D. 18 to Caiaphas,
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.); but Annas, even after he
had been put out of office, continued to have great influ-
ence: Jn. xviii. 13,24. This explains the mistake [but
GVONTOS
see reff. below (esp. to Schiirer), and cf. apytepevs, 2] by
which Luke, in his Gospel iii. 2 (ace. to the true read-
ing dpytepéws) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to him the
pontificate long after he had been removed from office.
Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Annas; Keim in Schenkel i. p.
135 sq.; Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fiir wissensch. Theol.
for 1876, p. 580 sq. [also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23
iv.; and BB.DD. s. v.].*
&-véntos, -ov, (vontds fr. voew) ; 1. not understood,
unintelligible ; 2. generally active, not understanding,
unwise, foolish: Ro.i. 14 (opp. to soot); Lk. xxiv. 25;
Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. iii. 3. émeOupiae avonror, 1 Tim. vi. 9.
(Prov. xvii. 28; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13; and often in Attic
writ.; [cef. Trench § lxxv.; Ellic. on Gal. iii. 1; Schmidt
ch. 147 § 20].)*
Gvowa, -as, 7), (dvous [i. €. dvoos without understand-
ing ]), want of understanding, folly: 2 Tim. iii. 9. mad-
ness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [dv0 & dvoias
yen, TO ev paviav, TO dé ayaGiav, Plato, Tim. p. 86 b.].
({[Theogn. 453]; Hat. 6,69; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)*
Gv-olyw ; (dvd, olyw i. e. olyvupe); fut. avoigo; 1 aor.
#voEa and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) avéwéa
(an earlier form) [and nveoEa WH in In. ix. 17, 32 (cf.
Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota
subser.; see I, ¢]; 2 pf. avémya (to be or stand open; cf.
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; [ Rutherford, New Phryn.
p- 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ. give this force
mostly to the pf. pass.); Pass., [pres. avotyouat Mt. vii.
8L Trtxt. WHmrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; pf.
ptep. dvewypévos and jvewypevos, (nvovypevos Acts ix. 8
Tdf.); 1 aor. dvedxOnv, nvedxOnv, and nvoixOny, inf. dve-
wxOjvac (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. nvotynv
(the usual later form); 1 fut. avorxOnooua (Lk. xi. 9
Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. avovynoopar; (on these forms, in
the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, cf.
[ Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161,170; Bttm.
Gram. p. 280 [21st Germ. ed.]; Bttm. N. T. Gr. 68 (55);
W. 72 (70) and 83 (79); [Veitch s. v.])» to open: a
door, a gate, Acts v.19; xii. 10, 14; xvi. 26 sq.; Rev.
iv. 1; very often in Grk. writ. Metaph., to give en-
trance into the soul, Rev. iii. 20; to furnish opportunity
to do something, Acts xiv. 27; Col. iv. 3; pass., of an
opportunity offered, 1 Co. xvi. 9; 2 Co. ii. 12; Rev. iii.
8; cf. @ipa. simply avoiyew rwi to open (the door [B.
145 (127)]) to one; prop.: Lk. xii. 36; Acts v. 23; xii.
16; Jn. x.3; ina proverbial saying, to grant something
asked for, Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq.; parabolically, to
give access to the blessings of God’s kingdom, Mt. xxv.
11; Lk. xiii. 25; Rev. iii. 7. rods @noavpovs, Mt. ii. 11,
(Sir. xliii. 14; Eur. Ion 923); ra pynpeia, Mt. xxvii. 52;
raos, Ro. ili. 13; 1d ppéap, Rev. ix. 2. heaven is said to
be opened and something to descend fr. it, Mt. iii. 16; Lk.
iii. 21; Jn. i.51 (52); Acts x. 11; or something is said
to be seen there, Acts vii. 56 RG; Rev. xi. 19 (6 vads
-- 6€VT@ ovpav@) ; [xv. 5]; xix.11. dvoly. 7d ordua: of
a fish’s mouth, Mt. xvii. 27; Hebraistically, of those who
begin to speak [W. 33 (32), 608 (565)], Mt. v.2; Acts
vill. 82, 353; x. 34; xviii. 14; foll. by eis BAaognyiav [-pias
48
aVOLWS
LT Tr WH], Rev. xiii. 6; ev mapaBodais, i.e. to make
use of (A. V. in), Mt. xiii. 35, (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2;
év éreat Leian. Philops. § 33); mpds rwa, 2 Co. vi. 11 (To
oTdpa Tuay avéewye mpos twas Our mouth is open towards
you, i. e. we speak freely to you, we keep nothing back) ;
the mouth of one is said to be opened who recovers the
power of speech, Lk. i. 64; of the earth yawning, Rev.
xii. 16. av. dkods twos i. e. to restore the faculty of hear-
ing, Mk. vii. 35 (LT Tr WH). av. rods éfpOadpois [Wis
33 (32)], to part the eyelids so as to see, Acts ix. 8, 40;
twos, to restore one’s sight, Mt. ix. 30; xx. 33; Jn. ix.
10, 14, 17, 21, 26, 30, 32; x. 21; xi. 37; metaph., Acts
xxvi. 18 (to open the eyes of one’s mind). dvoty rh
oppayida, to unseal, Rev. v. 9; vi. 1, 3,5, 7, 9,12; viii. 1;
av. 76 BiBXiov, BiBdapid.oy, to unroll, Lk. iv. 17 L Tr WH;
Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx. 12. [Comp.: dravotyo.]*
dv-o1Ko-Sopéw, -@: fut. avoixodopnow; to build again,
(Vulg. reaedijico): Acts xv.16. ([{'Thue. 1, 89, 3]; Diod.
11, 39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 31; Hdian. 8, 2, 12 [5
ed. Bekk.].)*
Gvorkts, -ews, 7, (avolyw, q. V-), an opening: ev avoike
Tov oTdpuartés pov as often as I open my mouth to speak,
Eph. vi. 19. (Thue. 4, 68,4; trav muddy, id. 4, 67, 3;
xetA@v, Plut. mor. [symp. l. ix. quaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)*
dvopla, -as, 7, (avouos); 1. prop. the condition of
one without law, — either because ignorant of it, or because
violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquity,
wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (T Trtxt.
WH txt.; cf. duapria, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7; Tit. ii. 14; 1 In. iii.
4. opp. to 7 duxatcoovyn, 2 Co. vi. 14; Heb. i. 9 [not Tdf.],
(Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24 dvopia paddov 7) dixacorvvn ypapevor) ;
and to 7 dixaroovvn and 6 dyiacpds, Ro. vi. 19 (rH avopia
eis THv avopiay to iniquity — personified — in order to work
iniquity) ; movetv THY avopiay to do iniquity, act wickedly,
Mt. xiii. 41; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, epya¢eo@at
ty av. Mt. vii. 23; plur. ai avoziae manifestations of dis-
regard for law, iniquities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi.
(xxxii.) 1); Heb. viii. 12 [RGL]; x. 17. Cn Grk.
writ. fr. [Hdt. 1, 96] Thuc. down; often in Sept.) [Syn.
ef. Trench § lxvi.; Tittm.i.48; Ellic. on Tit. ii. 14.]*
G-vopos, -ov, (vdpos) ; 1. destitute of (the Mosaic)
law: used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges-
tion of ‘iniquity’; just asin Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where
dvopot arepitunroe and addAsdrprot are used together). 2.
departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless,
wicked; (Vulg. iniquus; [also injustus]): Mk. xv. 28 [R
L Tr br.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.) ;
opp. to 6 dikavos, 1 Tim.i.9; 6 dvopos (Kar e€oxnv), he in
whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abode, 2 Th.
ii.8; dv. épyov an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8; free from
law, not subject to law, [Vulg. sine lege]: pn dv avopos
Geos [B. 169 (147)] (Rec. 6eG), 1 Co. ix. 21. (Very
often in Sept.) [Syn. see dvopia, fin.]*
dvépws, adv., without the law (see avopos, 1), without a
knowledge of the law: av. duaprdavey to sin in ignorance
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; dméAAvaGa to perish, but
not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid. (davdéuws ¢nv to
live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. c. 10
avop0ow
§ 39; dvdpws addAvoGa to be slain contrary to law, as
in wars, seditions, etc., ibid. c. 44 § 168. In Grk. writ.
generally unjustly, wickedly, as 2 Mace. viii. 17.)*
dv-op06, -d: fut. dvopAacw; 1 aor. dvapOwaa; 1 aor.
pass. avepOw6nv (Lk. xiii. 13; without the aug. avopOa6nv
LTTr; cf.[WdH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [W. 73]
(70)); 1. to set up, make erect: a crooked person, Lk.
xiii. 13 (she was made straight, stood erect); drooping
hands and relaxed knees (to raise them up by restoring
their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear again, build
anew: oxnyny, Acts xv. 16 (Hdt. 1, 19 rév mov... Tov
éverpnoav; 8,140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8,12, etc.; in various
senses in Sept.).*
dy-dori0s, -ov, (a priv. and dotos, q. v.), unholy, impious,
wicked: 1 Tim. i. 9; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (In Grk. writ. from
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) *
dvox 4}, -s, 7, (compare dvéyouai Tivos, 8. V. dvéxw p. 45),
toleration, forbearance; in this sense only in Ro. ii. 4;
iii. 26 (25). (In Grk. writ.a holding back, delaying,
fr. dvéyw to hold back, hinder.) [Cf. Trench § liii.]*
dvt-aywvifopar; to struggle, fight; mpds rt, against a
thing, Heb. xii. 4 [ef. W. § 52, 4,3]. (Xen., Plat., Dem.,
etc.)*
dyt-dANaypa, -ros, Td, (avri in place of, in turn, and
@ aypa see ddddoow), that which is given in place of
another thing by way of exchange ; what is given either in
order to keep or to acquire anything: Mt. xvi. 26; Mk.
vill. 37, where the sense is, ‘nothing equals in value the
soul’s salvation.’ Christ transfers a proverbial expres-
sion respecting the supreme value of the natural life
(Hom. Il. 9, 401 od yap enol Wuxns avragévov) to the life
eternal. (Ruthiv.7; Jer. xv. 13; Sir. vi. 15, ete.; Eur.
Or. 1157; Joseph. b. j. 1, 18, 3.)*
avtT-ava-TAnpow, -@; (avTi and dvamAnpda, q. V.); to fill
up in turn: Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, ‘what is wanting
of the afflictions of Christ to be borne by me, that I
supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ con-
ferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions
laid upon him’); [Mey., Ellic., ete., explain the word
(with Wetst.) by ‘avri torepnuaros succedit dvamAnpwpa’;
but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc., who also quotes the pas-
sages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio
Cass. 44,48; Apollon. Dysc. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14,
1 (ef. Bttm. ad loc.]; 114, 8; 258, 3; 337, 4.)*
avt-aTro-SiSwpt: fut. dvranodmaw; 2 aor. inf. avramodov-
vat; 1 fut. pass. dvtarodoOnoopar; (avri for something
received, in return, drodidwps to give back); to repay,
requite ; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35;
evyaptotiay tii, 1 Th. iii. 9. b. in a bad sense, of
penalty and vengeance; absol.: Ro. xii. 19; Heb. x.
30, (Deut. xxxii. 35); OAdpw roi, 2 Th. i. 6. (Very
often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses; in Grk.
writ. fr. [Hdt.] Thue. down.)*
avt-a1rd-S0pn.0, -ros, Td, (see avramrodidwt), the thing paid
back, requital; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv.12. _ b.
in a bad sense: Ro. xi. 9. (In Sept. i. q. 9:03, Judg. ix.
16 [ Alex.], etc.; the Greeks say avramddoats [cf. W. 25 ].)*
dvr-ard-Soc1s, -ews, 7, recompense: Col. iil. 24.
49
(Ir !
> =
avTt
Sept. i. q. 5304, Is. lix. 18, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc.
down.)*
dvr-atro-kplvopar; 1 aor. pass. avramexpiOny [see dmo-
Kptvo, ii.]; to contradict in reply, to answer by contradict-
ing, reply against: twi mpds tt, Lk. xiv. 6; (Sept. Judg.
v. 29 [Alex.]; Job xvi. 8; xxxii. 12; Aesop. fab. 172
ed. de Furia, [p. 353 ed. Coray]). Hence i. q. to alter-
cate, dispute: with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. (In a mathe-
matical sense, to correspond to each other or be parallel,
in Nicomach. arithm. 1, 8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed. Hoche].)
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 17.*
Gvt-cirrov, a 2 aor. used instead of the verb avridéyeuw,
to speak against, gainsay; [fr. Aeschyl. down]: Lk. xxi.
15; Acts iv.14. Cf. eiov.*
avr-exw: Mid., [pres. avréxouar]; fut. avOé£opar; to ,
hold before or against, hold back, withstand, endure; in
the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one’s self directly opposite
to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to
him: tivds, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; trav aobevar, to aid
them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14; rod Adyov, to hold to,
hold it fast, Tit.i.9. (Deut. xxxii. 41; Is. lvi. 4, 6; Prov.
iii. 18, etc., and often in Grk. writ.) Cf. Kiuhner
§ 520 b. [2te Aufl. § 416, 2; ef. Jelf § 536]; W. 202 (190);
[B. 161 (140) ].*
ayrt [before &v, av’; elsewhere neglecting elision] a
preposition foll. by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante
and the Germ. prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which
the N. T. writ. coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (341)) ;
1. prop. it seems to have signified over against, opposite
to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412; [ef. Cur-
tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc-
cession, for, instead of, in place of (something). a. univ.
instead of: avri ixvos dd, Lk. xi. 11; dvti mepiBodaiov
to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15; avri rod Aéyew, Jas.
iv. 15, (avri rod with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329
(309); B. 263 (226)]). b. of that for which any thing
is given, received, endured: Mt. v. 38; xvii. 27 (to
release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to
obtain the joy; cf. Bleek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad
loc.) ; of the price of sale (or purchase): Heb. xii. 16;
Nirpov dvyti moddGv, Mt. xx. 28; Mk.x.45. Then oc.
of recompense: kakov dvti Kaxod arodiddvat, Ro. xii. 17;
1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). av" ap
equiv. to avti rovTwy, dre for that, because : JABre ANS, sabe
44; Acts xii. 23; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx.
in Wetst. on Luke i. 20]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 710; [W.
364 (342), cf. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. wx nnn,
Deut. xxi. 14; 2K. xxii.17). d. of the cause: av dv
wherefore, Lk. xii. 3; dvti rovrou for this cause, Eph. v.
31. e. of succession to the place of another: ‘Apx.
Baowrever dvti ‘Hpedov in place of Herod, Mt. ii. 22, (1 K.
xi. 44; Hdt.1, 108; Xen.an.1, 1,4). xdpe avti xape-
ros grace in the place of grace, grace succeeding grace
perpetually, i. e. the richest abundance of grace, Jn. i.
16, (Theogn. vs. 344 avr’ dnév avias [yet cf. the context
vs. 842 (vss. 780 and 778 ed. Welcker); more appro-
priate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de poster.
Caini § 43, vol. ii. 39 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer-
avTtBardr\(w
dot. 1. vi. c. 13 § 622]). 3. As a prefix, it denotes
a. opposite, over against: avrir€pav, avrimapepxeOa. bd.
the mutual efficiency of two: avriBadAew, avtixadeiy,
ayridowdopeiv. cc. requital: avripioOia, avrarodidap. a.
hostile opposition: avrixpioros. e. official substitution,
instead of: avOvraros.*
dvri-BddAw; fo throw in turn, (prop. Thue. 7, 25; Plut.
Nic. 25): Adyous mpos adAndovs to exchange words with
one another, Lk. xxiv. 17, [ef. 2 Mace. xi. 13].*
avti-S.a-rlOnpe: [pres. mid. dvridiaridepar]; in mid. to
place one’s self in opposition, to oppose: of heretics, 2 Tim.
ii. 25, cf. De Wette [or Holtzm.] ad loc.; (several times
in eccl. writ.; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand
in turn: twa, Diod. exc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed.
Dind.; absol. to retaliate, Philo de spec. legg. § 15; de
concupise. § 4]).*
dvriSikos, -ov, (Sikn); as subst. 6 avtidicos =a. an op-
ponent in a suit at law: Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 58; xviii. 3,
(Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an
adversary, enemy, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1S.
ii. 10; Is. xli. 11, etc.): 1 Pet. v.8 (unless we prefer to
regard the devil as here called dyridixos because he ac-
cuses men before God).*
dyti-Beots, [(riOnuc), fr. Plato down],-ews, 7; = a. Op-
position. b. that which is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (av-
ridéces THS Wevdwy. yvoo. the inventions of false knowl-
edge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true
Christian doctrine).*
aytt-Ka0-lornpt : 2 aor. avtixaréeotny; [fr. Hdt. down];
in the trans. tenses 1. to put in place of another.
2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army
in line of battle); in the intrans. tenses, to stand against,
resist: Heb. xii. 4, (Thue. 1, 62. 71).*
dyti-kad€w, -@: 1 aor. avrexadeoa; to invite in turn:
tid, Lk. xiv. 12. [-Xen. conviv. 1, 15. ]*
avri-Ketpar ; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to,
in a local sense, ([Hippocr. de aére p. 282 Foes. (191
Chart.) ; Strab. 7, 7,5]; Hdian. 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekk.); 3,15,
17 (8 Bekk.) ; [ef. Aristot. de caelo 1, 8 p.277%,23]). 2.
to oppose, be adverse to, withstand: tuwi, Lk. xiii. 17; xxi.
15; Gal. v.17; 1 Tim.i.10. simply (6) dvttxeipevos, an
adversary, [Tittmann ii. 9]: 1 Co. xvi. 9; Phil. i. 28; 2 Th.
uu. 4; 1 Timi. 4, (Die Cass. 39, 8.2 Bx. xxii. 22) 2
Mace. x. 26, etce.; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
avrikpy (1 TWH arexpus [Chandler § 881; Treg.
avrixpis. Cf. Lob. Path. Elementa ii. 283]; ad Phryn. p.
444; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.]; Bitm. Ausf.
Spr ii. 366), adv. of place, over against, opposite: with
gen., Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ.; Philo de vict.
off. §3; de vit. Moys. iii. §7; in Flace. § 10.) *
dvTi-AapBavw: Mid., [pres. avtiAayBavowa}|; 2 aor.
avredaBopunv; to take in turn or in return, to receive one
thing for another given, to receive instead of; in mid.,
freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lay hold of, hold fast
to, anything: rivds. 2. to take a person or thing in
order as it were to be held, to take to, embrace; with a
gen. of the pers., to help, succor: Lk. i. 54; Acts xx. 35,
(Diod. 11,13; Dio Cass. 40, 27; 46,45; often in Sept.).
50
"Aytwo yeva
with a gen. of the thing, to be a partaker, partake of:
ths evepyecias of the benefit of the services rendered by
the slaves, 1 Tim. vi. 2; cf. De Wette ad loc. (unre éa6i-
wv mAedvav ndovay avriAnWera, Porphyr. de abstin. 1,
46; [cef. Euseb. h. e. 4, 15, 37 and exx. in Field, Otium
Norv. pars. iii. ad l.c.]) [Comep.: ovvavTi-AapBavopa. |*
dyti-Acyw ; [impf. dvrédeyor] ; to speak against, gainsay,
contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WH om.]; xxviii.
19; Tit.i.9. revi, Acts xiii. 45. foll. by wn and ace. with
inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [Lmrg. Tr WH déyovres], (as in Grk.
writ.; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.; [W. § 65, 2 B.;
B. 355 (305)]). to oppose one’s self to one, decline to obey
him, declare one’s self against him, refuse to have anything
to do with him, (cf. W. 23 (22)]: revi, Jn. xix. 12, (Leian.
dial. inferor. 30, 3); absol., Ro. x. 21 [ef. Meyer]; Tit.
ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. dvridéyouat I am dis-
puted, assent or compliance is refused me, (W. § 39, 1):
LK. ii. 34; Acts xxviii. 22.*
avti-rnyus [LT Tr WH -Anpyis; see M, p], -ews, 7, (avti-
AapBdvouat), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thue. 1,
120), a laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection
of a disputant, etc. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi.
20 [cf. vs. 1]; 1 Esdr. viii. 27 ; Sir. xi. 12; li. 7; 2 Mace.
xv. 7, ete.); plur., 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of
the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.*
dytioyla,-as, 1, (dvridoyos, and this fr. dvriéyw), [fr.
Hdt. down]; 1. gainsaying, contradiction: Heb. vii. 7;
with the added notion of strife, Heb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii.
16; Deut. xix.17,ete.). 2. opposition in act, [ this sense
is disputed by some, e. g. Liin. on Heb. as below, Mey.
on Ro. x. 21 (see avriAéyw); contra ef. Fritzsche on Ro.
l.c.J: Heb. xii. 35 rebellion, Jude 11, (Prov. xvii. 11).*
avti-AoBopew -@ : [impf. dvreAorddpouv | ; to revile in turn,
to retort railing: 1 Pet. ii. 23. (cian. conviv. 40; Plut.
Anton. 42; [de inimic. util. § 5].)*
avt(-Autpoy, -ov, Td, what is given in exchange for another
as the price of his redemption, ransom: 1'Tim. ii. 6. (An
uncert. translator in Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9; Orph. lith. 587;
fief. W.. 25]].)*
ayti-petpew, -@: fut. pass. dvtiperpnOnocopar; to measure
back, measure in return: Mt. vii. 2 Rec.; Lk. vi. 38 (L.
mrg. WH mrg. perpéw], (in a proverbial phrase, i. q. to
repay; Leian. amor. c. 19).*
avTiptoOla, -as, 7, (avtiuicbos remunerating) a re-
ward given in compensation, requital, recompense; a. in
a good sense: 2 Co. vi. 13 (rHv adray dvtipic Olav mAarTuv-
Onre kat tpets, a concise expression for Be ye also en-
larged i. e. enlarge your hearts, just as I have done (vs.
11), that so ye may recompense me, — for rd avré, 6 éorw
avryucbia; cf. W. 530 (493), and § 66, 1 b.; [B. 190
(164); 396 (339)]). b. in a bad sense: Ko. i. 27.
(Found besides only in Theoph. Ant.; Clem. Al.; [Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 3.5; 9, 7; 11, 6], and other Fathers. )*
*Avrioxeta, -as, 7, Antioch, the name (derived fr. various
monarchs) of several Asiatic cities, two of which are men-
tioned in the N. T.; 1. The most celebrated of all,
and the capital of Syria, was situated on the river Oron-
tes, founded by Seleucus [I. sometimes (cf. Suidas s. v.
*Aptioyevs
DéAevxos, col. 3277 b. ed. Gaisf.) called] Nicanor [else-
where (cf. id. col. 2137 b. s. v. KoAagoaevs) son of Ni-
canor; but commonly Nicator (cf. Appian de rebus
Syr. § 57; Spanh. de numis. diss. vii. § 3, vol. i. p. 413) ],
and named in honor of his father Antiochus. Many
‘EAAnuorai, Greek-Jews, lived in it; and there those
who professed the name of Christ were first called
Christians : Acts xi. 19 sqq.; Xili. 1; xiv. 26; xv. 22 sqq. ;
Gal. ii. 11; ef. Reuss in Schenkel i. 141 sq.; [BB. DD.
s.v.; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 121-126 ; also the
latter in the Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Renan, Les Apdtres,
eh. xii. |: 2. A city of Phrygia, but called in Acts
xiii. 14 Antioch of Pisidia [or acc. to the crit. texts the
Pisidian Antioch (see Muoidios)] because it was on the
confines of Pisidia, (more exactly 7 mpos Tuotdia, Strabo
anni, 8) se Actsnxive 19; 21);°2) Tima. 11.) This
was founded also by Seleucus Nicator, [cef. BB. DD. s. v. ;
Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 168 sqq. ].*
*Avrioxes, -€ws, 6, an Antiochian, a native of Antioch :
Acts vi. 5.*
dyti-rap-<pxopat: 2 aor. dvrimapndOov; to pass by op-
posite to, [A. V. to pass by on the other side]: Lk. x. 31 sq.
(where the meaning is, ‘he passed by on the side oppo-
site to the wounded man, showing no compassion for
him’). (Anthol. Pal. 12, 8; to come to one’s assistance
against a thing, Sap. xvi. 10. Found besides in eccl. and
Byzant. writ.) *
*Avrimas [ Tdf. ’Avreimas, see s. v. et, ¢],-a (cf. W. § 8, 1;
[B. 20 (18)]), 6, Antipas (contr. fr. Avrimatpos W. 103
(97)), a Christian of Pergamum who suffered martyrdom,
otherwise unknown: Rey. ii. 13. On the absurd inter-
pretations of this name, cf. Diisterd. [ Alf., Lee, al.] ad
loc. Fr. Gérres in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1878, p. 257 sqq., endeavors to discredit the opinion
that he was martyred, but by insufficient arguments.*
"Avtiratpis, -idos, 7, Antipatris, a city situated between
Joppa and Cesarea, in a very fertile region, not far
from the coast ; formerly called XaBap{a8a [al. Kapapoa-
Ba (or -caBa) | (Joseph. antt. 13, 15, 1), and afterwards
rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in
honor of his father Antipater (Joseph. b. j. 1, 21, 9): Acts
xxiii. 31. Cf. Robinson, Researches ete. iii. 45 sq. ; Later
Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478-
498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq. ].*
dvti-répay, or (acc. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down)
avrimepa [T WH], avrimepa [L Tr; cf. B. 321; Lob.
Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, over
against, on the opposite shore, on the other side, with a gen. :
LK. viii. 26.*
avtitriarrw; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot.
down]; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against: twi,
Acts vii. 51. (Ex. xxvi.5; xxxvi.12ed. Compl.; Num.
xxvii. 14; often in Polyb., Plut.)*
GVTL-OTPATEVOHAL ; 1. to make a military expedition,
or take the field, against any one: Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26.
2. to oppose, war against: tii, Ro. vii. 23. (Aristaenet.
2,1, 13.)*
dyTi-tdoow or -rrw : [pres. mid. avtiratgopar | ; to range
51
avTAéew
in battle against; mid. to oppose one’s self, resist: revi,
Io -xitie 2)) Jas. 1v-16) v. 6 lebetsv.los Cl. brov. 1. 54.
absol., Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
down.) *
ayti-tyTos, -ov, (TUmTw), in Grk. writ. 1; prop.-a-
actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting
light; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back,
repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile.
In the N. T. language dvrirvmoy as a subst. means al
a thing formed after some pattern (rimos [q. v. 4 a.]),
(Germ. Abbild): Heb. ix. 24 [R. V. like in pattern].
2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something
in the Messianic times which answers to the type (see
tumos, 4.) prefiguring it in the O. T. (Germ. Gegenbild,
Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge:
1 Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness ].*
dvri-xpirtos, -ov, 6, (avTi against and Xpicrés, like
avrideos opposing God, in Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, ete.,
Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers; [see
Soph. Lex. s. v., cf. Trench § xxx.]), the adversary of the
Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the
Messiah’s advent, concerning whom the Jews had con-
ceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36
sqq.; Vii. 25; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. xxxviii. xxxix.
Cf. Hisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq. ;
Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber’s Encyel. iv. 292 sqq.
s. v. Antichrist ; Béhmer, Die Lehre v. Antichrist nach
Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol.
iv. p. 405 sqq. The name 6 avtixpuctos was formed
perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses
it, [five times]; he employs it of the corrupt power and
influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that
which is at work in false teachers who have come from the
bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating
error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, ‘what ye have
heard concerning Antichrist, as about to make his ap-
pearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfilled
in the many false teachers, most worthy to be called
antichrists ,’ [on the om. of the art. cf. B. 89 (78) ]); 1 Jn.
iv. 3; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22; 2
Jn. 7. In Paul and the Rev. the idea but not thename
of Antichrist is found; yet the conception differs from
that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an
individual man [ef. B. D. as below], of the very worst
character (rov dvOp. ths dpaprias; see duapria, 1), in-
stigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God:
2 Th. ii. 3-10. The author of the Apocalypse discovers
the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome,
and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return
from the dead: Rev. xiii. and xvii. (Often in eccl.
writ.) [See B. D.s.v. (Am. ed. for additional reff.), also
B. D. s. v. Thess. 2d Ep. to the; Kahler in Herzog ed.
2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89.}*
dvthéw, -@3 1 aor. fvTAnoa; pb. ivrAnka; (fr. 6 dvrAos,
or 16 divrAov, bilge-water, [or rather, the place in the hold
where it settles, Eustath. com. in Hom. 1728, 58 6 rézos
év0a Gdwp cuppéer, 76 Te Gvabev kal ex Tv Gppouar]); — a.
prop. to draw out a@ ship’s bilge-water, to bale or pump
avTAnpa
out. b. univ. to draw water: Jn. ii. 8; iv. 15; dap,
Jn. ti. 9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 18, 203) Ex. i116, 19; Is,
xii. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
dvrAnpa, -ros, 7d; a. prop. what is drawn, (Dioscor. 4,
64). b. the act of drawing water, (Plut. mor. [de solert.
an. 21,1] p. 974 e. [but this example belongs rather under
c.]). ¢. a thing to draw with [cf. W. 93 (89)], bucket
‘and rope let down into a well: Jn. iv. 11.*
dvropPadpew, -d; (dvrépOadpos looking in the eye) ;
1. prop. to look against or straight at. 2. metaph. fo
bear up against, withstand: r@ avéu@, of a ship, [ef. our
‘look the wind in the eye,’ ‘face’ (R. V.) the wind]: Acts
xxvii.15. (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb.; in eccl. writ.)*
&vvBpos, -ov, (a priv. and vdwp), without water: mnyai,
2 Pet. ii. 17; rdmou, desert places, Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 24,
(4 avvSpos the desert, Is. xliii. 19; Hdt. 3, 4, ete. ; in Sept.
often y7 avvdpos), [desert places were believed to be the
haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.),
and Gesen. or Alex. on the former pass.; cf. further,
Bar. iv. 35 ; Tob. viii. 3; 4 Mace. xviii. 8; (Enoch x. 4) ;
Rey. xviii. 2; cf. d. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Gesell.
xxi. 609]; vepeAat, waterless clouds (Verg. georg. 3, 197
sq. arida nubila), which promise rain but yield none,
Jude 12. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
dy-uToKpttos, -ov, (a priv. and tzoxpivoua), unfeigned,
undisguised: Ro. xii. 9; 2 Co. vi. 6; 1 Tim. i.5; 2 Tim.
i. 55 1 Pet. i. 22; Jas. iii. 17. (Sap. v. 19; xviii. 16. Not
found in prof. auth., except the adv. dvumoxpiras in
Antonin. 8, 5.) *
GyuTroTaKTos, -ov, (a priv. and troracow) ; 1. [pas-
sively] not made subject, unsubjected : Heb. ii. 8, [Artem.
oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected
to control, disobedient, unruly, refractory: 1 Tim.i.9; Tit.
i. 6,10, ([Epict. 2,10,1; 4, 1, 161; Philo, quis rer. div.
her. § 1]; dnynows avur. a narrative which the reader
cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 36, 4; 3, 38,4; 5,
21, 4).*
dvw, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; a. above, in a higher
place, (opp. to kdrw) : Acts ii. 19; with the article, 6, 7,
70 dvw: Gal. iv. 26 (7 dvw ‘Tepovoadnp the upper i. e. the
heavenly Jerusalem); Phil. iii. 14 (4 dv@ xKAjous the call-
ing made in heaven, equiv. to érovpauos, Heb. iii. 1);
the neut. plur. ra dv@ as subst., heavenly things, Col. iii.
1 sq.; €x roy dvw from heaven, Jn. viii. 23. €ws dvw, Jn.
ii. 7 (up to the brim). b. upwards, up, on high: Jn. xi.
41 (aipw) ; Heb. xii. 15 (dvw pvec).*
dvwyarov and dywyeov, see under avayatov.
dvwbev, (yw), adv.; a. from above, trom a higher place:
and dvobev (W. § 50, 7 N. 1), Mt. xxvii. 51 [Tdf. om.
and); Mk. xv. 38; ek tév dvwbev from the upper part,
from the top, Jn. xix. 23. Often (also in Grk. writ.)
used of things which come from heaven, or from God as
dwelling in heaven: Jn. iii. 31; xix.11; Jas. i. 173; iii.
15,17. b. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then, from the begin-
ning on, from the very first: Acts xxvi.5. Hence ci
anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use some-
what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among
them ; cf. his comm. on Jn. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3,
52
aEvos
7 av. yevvnOnva, where others explain it from above, i. e.
from heaven. But, ace. to this explanation, Nicodemus
ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one
to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [cf.
Westcott, Com. on Jn. p.63]. Of the repetition of phys-
ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18
[i. p. 26 ed. Reiff] (dvdpi) ere r@ Exovre éyxvov yuvaixa
onpaive maida a’t@ yevvnoecOat Gpowov Kata TavTa. ovT@
yap avober avtos dd€ee yervacOa; cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 18,
3 diriavy dvobev roveioba, where a little before stands
mporepa didia; add, Martyr. Polye. 1, 1; [also Socrates
in Stob. flor. exxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meineke (iii. 438 ed.
Gaisf.) ; Harpocration, Lex. s. vv. dvadixaoacOat, avabe-
cba, avarrodi(opeva, avacvvragts ; Canon. apost. 46 (al. 39,
Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444); Pseudo-Basil, de bapt.
1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537); Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (opp. iv.
322 c. Dela Rue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth
Gospel, etc. (Boston 1880) p. 34 sq.]. mdAw dvwbev (on
this combination of synonymous words cf. Kiihner § 534,
1; [Jelf § 777, 1]; Grimm on Sap. xix. 5 (6)): Gal. iv. 9
(again, since ye were in bondage once before).*
GvwrepiKds, -1), -dv, (dvwTepos), Upper: Ta dvwTepika pep,
Acts xix. 1 (i.e. the part of Asia Minor more remote
from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is
used by [Hippocr. and] Galen.)*
dvadrepos, -€pa, -epov, (compar. fr. ava, cf. xarwrepos,
see W. §11, 2 c.; [B. 28 (24 sq.)]), higher. The
neut. dvwrepov as adv., higher; a. of motion, to a higher
place, (up higher): Lk. xiv.10. _b. of rest, in a higher
place, above i.e. in the immediately preceding part of
the passage quoted, Heb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 3, 1,1
tpitn avatepov BiBrw. (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)*
dv-whedijs, -€s, (a priv. and épedos) ; fr. Aeschyl. down ;
unprofitable, useless: Tit. iii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Heb.
vii. 18 (dca 7d adras avwedés on account of its unprofita-
bleness).*
délvn, -ys, n, ([perh. fr.] dyvupn, fut. a€o, to break), an
axe: Lk. iii. 9; Mt.iii.10. (As old as Hom. and Hdt.)*
d£vos, -a, -ov, (fr. dy, d&w; therefore prop. drawing
down the scale; hence) a. weighing, having weight;
with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as)
another thing, of like value, worth as much: Bods aétos,
Hom. II. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194)],
as G&. Séka pv@v, common in Attic writ.; may Tiptoy ovK
d&wov aitns (codpias) eat, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; ovk
gore orabuos mas dévos eykpatods Wuyns, Sir. xxvi. 15;
ovx G&a mpos r- Od€av are of no weight in comparison
with the glory, i.e. are not to be put on an equality
with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and
W. 405 (378); [B. 540 (292)]. b. befitting, congru-
ous, corresponding, twds, to a thing: ths peravoias, Mt.
iii. 8; Lk. iii. 8; Acts xxvi. 20; déia &v empagapev, Lk.
xxiii. 41. Gétdv éore it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2 Th.
i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8); B. it is worth the while, foll. by
rov with ace. and inf., 1 Co. xvi.4;— (in both senses very
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hdt. down, and often
with éori omitted). c. of one who has merited any-
thing, worthy, —both in a good reference and a bad;
ak.w
a. ina good sense; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x.
10; Lk. vii. 4; [x. 7]; Acts xili. 46; 1 Tim.i. 15; iv. 9;
v.18; vi.1. foll. by the aor. inf.: Lk. xv. 19, 21; Acts
xiii. 25; Rev. iv. 11; v. 2,4,9,12; foll. by a: Jn. i. 27
(wa vow, a construction somewhat rare; cf. Dem. pro
cor. p. 279, 9 a&wodv, tva BonOnon [(dubious) ; see s. v. iva,
II. 2 init. and c.]) ; foll. by és with a finite verb (like Lat.
dignus, qui): Lk. vii. 4 [B. 229 (198)]. It stands alone,
but so that the context makes it plain of what one is
said to be worthy: Mt. x. 11 (to lodge with); Mt. x. 13
(sc. tas eipnyns); Mt. xxii. 8 (sc. of the favor of an invi-
tation); Rev. iii. 4 (se. to walk with me, clothed in
white). with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one’s
fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it: Mt.
x. 87 sq.; Heb. xi. 38, (rod Oeod, Sap. ii.5; Ignat. ad
Eph. 2). B. in a bad sense; with a gen. of the thing:
mAnyov, Lk. xii. 48; @avdrov, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts [xxiii
29]; xxv. 11, [25]; xxvi. 31; Ro. i. 32; absol.: Rev.
xvi. 6 (se. to drink blood).*
G£6w, -@; impf. 7£iovv; 1 aor. 7£iw@oa; Pass., pf. n&(o-
prac; 1 fut. a€imOnoouar; (a£os); as in Grk. writ. a.
to think meet, fit, right: foll. by an inf., Acts xv. 38;
XXVlii. 22. b. to judge worthy, deem deserving: twa
with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7; rua twos, 2 Th. i.
11; pass. with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17; Heb. iii.
3; x.29. [Comp.: xar-a£idw. | *
G£lws, adv., suitably; worthily, in a manner worthy of:
with the gen., Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. i. 27; Col.i.10; 1 Th.
ii.12; Eph.iv.1; 3Jn.6. [From Soph. down. ]*
G-dpatos, -ov, (6pdw), either, not seen i. e. unseen, or
that cannot be seen i. e. invisible. In the latter sense
of God in Col. i. 15; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb. xi. 27; 1a adpara
avtov his (God’s) invisible nature [perfections], Ro. i.
20; ra épara kat ta adpara, Col. i. 16. (Gen. i. 2; Is.
xlv.3; 2 Macc. ix.5; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.)*
Gr-ayyéAAw; impf. dmrnyyeAAov; fut. drayyeA@; 1 aor.
annyyeka; 2 aor. pass. dmnyyéAnv (LK. viii. 20); [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. amo twos to bring tidings (from a
person or thing), bring word, report: Jn.iv.51 [RGL
Tr br.]; Acts iv. 23; v. 22; [xv. 27]; with dat. of the pers.,
Mt. ii. 8; xiv. 12; xxviii. 8, [8 (9) Rec.], 10; Mk. xvi.
[10],13; Acts v.25; xi. 13; [xxiii. 16,19]; revi vc, [Mt.
xi. 4; xxviii. 11 (here Tdf. avayy.)]; Mk. [v.19 (Lmrg.
R G dvayy.)]; vi. 30; Lk. [vii. 22; ix. 36]; xiv. 215 xxiv.
9; Acts xi. 13; [xii.17; xvi. 38 LT Tr WH; xxiii. 17];
tivi foll. by dz, Lk. xviii. 37; [Jn. xx. 18 RG; foll. by
mas, Lk. viii. 36]; ri mpds twa, Acts xvi. 36; Twi epi
twos, Lk. vii. 18; xiii. 1; ri mepi revos, Acts xxviii. 21;
[foll. by A€ywy and direct disc., Acts xxii. 26]; foll. by
ace. with inf., Acts xii. 14; efg with ace. of place, to
carry tidings to a place, Mk. v. 14 (Ree. dvnyy.); Lk.
vill. 34; with addition of an ace. of the thing announced,
Mt. viii. 33, (Xen. an. 6, 2 (4), 25; Joseph. antt. 5, 11,
33 els tovs avOparovs, Am. iv. 13 Sept.). 2. to pro-
claim (dé, because what one announces he openly lays,
as it were, off from himself, cf. Germ. ab kiindigen), to
make known openly, declare: univ., repi twos, 1 Th. i. 9;
‘rit mepi r. In. xvi. 25 LT Tr WH); by teaching, ri, 1 Jn.
9
(3)
5
aTa\Adoow
i. 2sq.; by teaching and commanding, rwi m1, Mt. viii.
33; rwi, with inf., Acts xxvi. 20; [xvii. 30 TWH Tr
mrg.]; by avowing and praising, Lk. viii. 47; tii ri,
Heb. ii. 12 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 23 [yet Sept. dupynoopac)) ;
[Mt. xii. 18]; foll. by 6r, 1 Co. xiv. 25.*
dn-dyxo [cf. Lat. angustus, anxius, Eng. anguish, etc.;
Curtius § 166]: 1 aor. mid. amnyéapny; to throttle, stran-
gle, in order to put out of the way (amé away, cf. dro-
xreivw to kill off), Hom. Od. 19, 230; mid. to hang one’s
self, to end one’s life by hanging: Mt. xxvii. 5. (2S. xvii.
23; Tob. iii. 10; in Attic from Aeschyl. down.)*
dm-dyo; [impf. ampyoy (Lk. xxiii. 26 Tr mre. WH
mrg.)]; 2 aor. dmpyayov; Pass., [pres. amdyouar]; 1 aor.
annxOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead away: Lk. xiii. 15
(sc. amd ths paryns); Acts xxiii. 10 (Lchm. [ed. min.]) ;
17 (se. hence); xxiv. 7[ RG] (away, ek rav xeipav jpar) ;
1 Co. xii. 2 (led astray mpds ra eidwda). Used esp. of
those led off to trial, prison, punishment: Mt. xxvi. 57;
xxvii. 2,31; Mk. xiv. 44,53; xv. 16; Lk. xxi.12 (T Tr
WH); [xxii. 66 T Tr WH]; xxiii. 26; Jn. xviii. 13 RG
[#yayov LT Tr WH]; xix. 16 Rec.; Acts xii. 19; (so
also in Grk. writ.). Used of a way leading to a certain
end: Mt. vii. 13, 14 (els ryv am@deay, eis THy Cwny).
[Compe. : cvrardyw. | *
G-ralSevtos, -ov, (madevw), without instruction and dis-
cipline, uneducated, ignorant, rude, [W. 96 (92)]: ¢yrn-
ces, stupid questions, 2 Tim. ii. 23. (In classies fr.
[Eurip.,] Xen. down; Sept. ; Joseph.)*
dr-aipw: 1 aor. pass. amnpOnv; to lift off, take or carry
away; pass., amd twos to be taken away from any one:
Mt.ix.15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk.v. 35. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) *
dar-attéw, -@; to ask back, demand back, exact something
due (Sir. xx. 15 (14) onpepov Savecet kal aviprov amaitnoe) :
Lk. vi. 30; rHv Wuxny cov amatrodvow [Tr WH airotow ]
thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, is demanded
back, Lk. xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 rd ras Wuyxis amairndeis
xpeos). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
dr-akyéw, -@: [pf. ptep. amndrynkws]; to cease to feel
pain or grief; a. to bear troubles with greater equa-
nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thue. 2, 61 ete. b. to
become callous, insensible to pain, apathetic: so those whe
have become insensible to truth and honor and shame
are called dmndynkéres [A. V. past feeling] in Eph. iv.
19. (Polyb. 1, 35, 5 amnAynxvias uyxas dispirited and
useless for war, [cf. Polyb. 16, 12, 7].)*
dr-add\doow: 1 aor. dmnA\a~a; Pass., [pres. amad\do-
copa]; pf. inf. dmmAdAdyOar; (ad\Adoow to change; azo,
sc. rwds); com. in Grk. writ.; to remove, release; pass.
to be removed, to depart: am aitév tas vooous, Acts xix.
12 (Plat. Eryx. 401 ¢. ef ai vooow dmadXayeinoay €x TeV
gwpudrwv); in a transferred and esp. in a legal sense,
aré with gen. of pers., to be set free, the opponent being
appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one:
Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2,
9,6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: teva, Heb. ii. 15;
(in prof. auth. the gen. of the thing freed fr. is often
added; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1, p. 339 sq.).*
aTraddorTpLow
an-addotpidw, -d: pf. pass. ptcp. dmpAorpiwpevos ; to
alienate, estrange; pass. to be rendered addérpuos, to be
shut out from one’s fellowship and intimacy: twés, Eph.
ii. 12; iv. 18; sc. rod Geov, Col. i. 21, (equiv. to 14, used
of those who have estranged themselves fr. God, Ps.
Ivii. (Iviii.) 4; Is. i. 4 [Ald. etce.]; Ezek. xiv. 5,7; [Test.
xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 10]; r@v watpiwy doyparer, 3 Macc.
i. 3; amadXorpiovy tiva Tov Kada@s Exovros, Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 14,2). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.,] Plato down.)*
daradés, -7, -dv, tender: of the branch of a tree, when full
of sap, Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28. [From Hom. down. ]*
ar-avTdw, -@: fut. dravtnow (Mk. xiv. 13; but in better
ark. daravtncopa, cf. W. 83 (79); [B. 53 (46)]); 1 aor.
dnnvtnaa; to go to meet; in past tenses, fo meet: tui, Mt.
xxviii. 9 [T Tr WH iz-]; Mk. v.2 RG; xiv. 13; Lk. xvii.
12[L WHom. Tr br. dat.; T WH mrg. read tr-|; Jn. iv.
51 RG; Acts xvi. 16 [RG L]. Inamilitary sense of a
hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 RG, asin 1 S. xxii. 17; 2
S. i. 15; 1 Mace. xi. 15, 68 and often in Grk. writ.*
GmravTHo us, -Ews, 7, (anavTdw),a meeting; eis andavtnaly
tivos or ten to meet one: Mt. xxv.1 RG; vs. 6; Acts
xXVvili. 15; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26,8; Diod. 18, 59;
very often i, Sept. equiv. to N8IP9 [cf. W. 30].) *
drag, adv., onve, one time, [fr. Hom.down]; a. univ.:
2'Co. xi. 25; heb. ix. 26 sq.; 1.Pet. iii. 20, Ree:shere
dra€, Heb. xii. 26 sq. ; dra€ rod éviavrov, Heb. ix. 7, [ Hdt.
8, 59, ete.]. b. like Lat. semel, used of what is so done
as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition,
once for all: Heb.vi.4; x.2; 1 Pet. iii. 18; Jude vss. 3,
5. c. cai dra xai dis indicates a definite number [the
double xai emphasizing the repetition, both once and
again i. e.] twice: 1 Th. 4,18; Phil. iv. 16; on the other
hand, dma€ cai Sis means [once and again i. e.] several
times, repeatedly: Neh. «iii. 20; 1 Mace. iii. 30. Cf.
Schott on 1 Th. ii. 18, p. 86, [Meyer on Phil. 1. ¢.].*
d-rapa-Bartos, -ov, (mapaBcivw), fr. the phrase mapaBai-
yey vouov to transgress i. e. to violate, signifying either
unviolated, or not to be violated, inviolable: iepwotvvn un-
changeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor,
Heb. vii. 24; cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. (A later
word, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313; in Joseph., Plut., al.)*
a-Trapa-cKEevarros, -ov, (Tapacke aw), unprepared : 2 Co.
rx 4. (Xen. (Cyr 23/4, 155 ,ane 1, 0) Gy (vars 2,3,,215
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 41; Hdian. 3, 2,19 [(11) ed. Bekk.];
adv. drapackevaotas, [ Aristot. rhe. Alex. 9 p. 1430* 3];
Clem. hom. 32, 15.) *
Gr-apveopat, -odpat: depon. verb; fut. amapynoopa; 1
aor. arnpynocaunv; 1 fut. pass. drapynbnooua with a pass.
signif. (Lk. xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [ef. B. 53 (46)]);
to deny (abnego): twa, to affirm that one has no acquaint-
ance or connection with him; of Peter denying Christ:
Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72, [Lk. xxii. 61];
Jn. xiii. 38 RGLmrg.; more fully dz. pn eidێvae Incodr,
Lk. xxii. 34 (L Tr WH om. py, conceruing which cf.
Kihner ii. p. 761; [Jelf § 749, 1; W. § 65, 2 B.; B. 355
(305)]). éavrév to forget one’s self, lose sight of one’s
self and one’s own interests: Mt. xvi. 24, Mk. viii. 34;
Lk. ix. 23 R WH mrg.*
54
¢
aTjvras
drapr. [so Tdf. in Jn., T and Tr in Rev.], or rather dz’
pre (cf. W. § 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275),
Lipsius p. 127]; see dpre), adv., from now, henceforth:
Mt. xxiii. 39; xxvi. 29, 64 (in Lk. xxii. 69 do rod viv);
Jn. i. 51 (52) Rec.; xiii. 19; xiv. 7; Rev. xiv. 13 (where
connect an’ dpte with paxdpior). In the Grk. of the O. T. it
is not found (for the Sept. render AAyN by azé rod viv),
and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. Pl. 388; Plat.
Com. So. 10] in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ.
For the similar term which the classic writ. employ is
to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. dzapri),
and has a different signif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf.
Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. i. p. 296; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
20 sq.*
dmaptirpds, -ov, 6, (arapri¢w to finish, complete), com-
pletion: Lk. xiv. 28. Found besides only in Dion. Hal.
de comp. verb. c. 24; [Apollon. Dyse. de adv. p. 532, 7,
al..;\cf. W.'p. 24].*
dr-apx4, -7s, 7, (fr. dmdpxona: a. to offer firstlings
or first-fruits ; >. to take away the first-fruits; cf. do in
drodexardw), in Sept. generally equiv. to NWN; the jirst-
Jruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a
natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which
were offered to God; cf. Win. R WB. s. v. Erstlinge,
[BB.DD. s. v. First-fruits]: 7 amapxn sc. rod pupayaros,
the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves
were to be prepared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16.
Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons
consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: dm. tis
"Ayalas the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a
Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with eis Xpuordvy added, Ro.
xvi. 5; with a reference to the moral creation effected
by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called
arapxn tus (a kind of first-fruits) trav tov beod Kricpator,
Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc.), [noteworthy is eiAaro vpas 6
Oeds amapyny ete. as first-fruits}| 2 Th. ii. 13 L Tr mrg.
WH mrg.; Christ is called dr. taév Kexousnuevov as the
first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep,
1 Co. xv. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify
that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is
guaranteed ; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as
it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har-
vest). b. of persons superior inexcellence to others
of the same class: so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain
class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ
beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 amapyn €dé-
yeTO ov pdvov TO mpa@Tov TH TaEet, GAG Kal TO Tp@Tov TH
Tin). C. of €xovtes THY am. TOU mvevpatos Who have the
first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (rod my».
is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23; ef. what Winer § 59,
8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see
Weiss in ed. 6] who take rod mv. as a partitive gen.,
so that of ¢y. r. am. Tov mv. are distinguished from the
great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently.
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down.) *
das, -aca, -av, (fr. dua [or rather & (Skr. sa; cf. a
copulative), see Curtius § 598 ; Vanicek p. 972] and ras;
stronger than the simple was), [fr. Hom. down]; quite
> /
aTacTulouat
all, the whole, all together, all; it is either placed before
a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 215 viii. 37; xix. 37;
or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 (els roy xécpov dravra into
all parts of the world) ; Lk. iv. 6 (this dominion whole-ly
i.e. all parts of this dominion which you see); xix. 48.
used absolutely, —in the masce., as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii.
16 ([T WH Trmrg. waow]; [iv.40 WH txt. Tr mrg.]; v.
26; ix. 15 [WH mrg. wavras]; Mk. xi. 32 [Lchm. ravres];
Jas. iii. 2;— in the neut., as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28
[RG]; Acts ii. 44; iv.32 [L WH Tr mrg. ravra]; x. 8;
xi. 10; Eph. vi. 13; once in John viz. iv. 25 T Tr WH;
[dmavres obrot, Acts ii. 7 LT; dmavres tpeis, Gal. iii. 28 at
Tr; cf. was, II. 1 fin. Rarely used by Paul; most fre-
quently by Luke. On its occurrence, cf. Alford, Grk.
Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16].
on-aormd{opat: 1 aor. amnomacdpuny; to salute on leav-
ing, bid farewell, take leave of: twa, Acts xxi. 6 L T Tr
WH. (Himer. eclog. ex Phot. 11, p. 194.) *
Gratdw,- @; 1 aor. pass. ymarnOnv; (andtn); fr. Hom.
down ; to cheat, deceive, bequile: tiv kapdiav airov [RT Tr
WH nrrg., air. G, éavr. L WH txt.], Jas. i. 265 reva re, one
with a thing, Eph. v. 6 ; pass. 1 Tim. 1i. 14 (where L T Tr
WH efamarnbcioa), cf. Gen. ili. 13. . Comp.. €£-arardaw.]*
ararn, -ns, 7, (fr. Hom. down], deceit, deceitfulness :
Col.ii. 8 ; rod wAovTov, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; ris ddcxias,
2 Th. ii. 10; rys duaprias, Heb. iii. 13; ai emiOvpiae ths
aratns the lusts excited by deceit, i.e. by deceitful influ-
ences seducing to sin, Eph. iv. 22, (others, ‘deceitful
lusts’; but cf. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. admarau: 2 Pet. ii. 13
(where L Tr txt. WH mrg. ev dyarais), by a paragram
(or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf.
dyamn, 2), because these were transformed by base men
into seductive revels.*
amatwp, -opos, 6, 7, (matnp), a word which has almost
the same variety of senses as dunrwp, q.v.; [fr. Soph.
down]; [without father i. e.] whose father is not recorded
in the genealogies: Heb. vii. 3.*
Gr-avyaopa, -ros, To, (fr. dmavyafo to emit brightness,
and this fr. avyn brightness; cf. drookiacpa, dmeixacpa,
areikouopa, annxnua), reflected brightness: Christ is
called in Heb. i. 3 dmavy. ris d0&ns tod Oeov, inasmuch
as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God; so that the
same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically,
which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii.
45 (xiv. 9): 6 Oewpar ewe Oewpet tov mewwarra pe. (Sap.
vii. 26 ; Philo, mund. opif. § 51; plant. Noé § 12; de con-
cup. § 11; and often in eccl. writ.; see more fully in
Grimm on Sap.1.c., p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still
adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin-
guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad
loc.; Soph. Lex. s.v.; Cremer s. v.]*
ar-eidov, (amo and eidov, 2 aor. of obsol. eta), serves as
2 aor. of apopaw, (cf. Germ. ab sehen) ; 1. to look
away from one thing and at another. 2. to look at
from somewhere, either from a distance or froma certain
present condition of things; to perceive: ws av amido (L
T Tr WH aida [see ddeidSov]) ra mepi eve as soon as I
shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A. V.
55
>
aTreipactos
how it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23.
5, etc.) *
dare(Bera, [ WH -dia, exc. in Heb. as below (see I, «)],-as,
7. (ameOns), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obsti-
nacy, and in the N. T. particularly obstinate opposition to
the divine will: Ro. xi. 30, 32; Heb. iv. 6,11; viot r. dmet-
Geias, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see
vids, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii.
6 [R G Lbr.]. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; Plut., al.)*
drebew, -; impf. nreiAouv; 1 aor. nreiOnaa; to be ameOns
(q. v-); not to allow one’s self to be persuaded ; not to com-
ply with; a. to refuse or withhold belief (in Christ, in
the gospel; opp. to moreiw): 76 vid, In. iii. 36; ro
Ady, 1 Pet. ii. 8; iii. 1; absol. of those who reject the
gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient; cf. b.]: Acts xiv. 2;
xvii. 5 [Rec.]; xix. 9; Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 7(T Tr WH
amotousw). b. to refuse belief and obedience: with dat.
of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (77 dAnOeta) ; xi. 30 sq. (7
Ge) ; 1 Pet.iv. 17; absol., Ro. x. 21 (Is. lxv. 2) ; Heb. iii.
18; xi. 31; 1 Pet. iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to 17D,
710; in Grk. writ. often fr. Aeschyl. Ag. 1049 down ; in
Hom. et al. am6eiv.) *
arrevOijs, -€s, Zen. -ovs, (7e(Mouar), impersuasible, uncom-
pliant, contumacious, [A. V. disobedient]: absol., Lk. i.
1.715) Lite 1.165; Ti+ 8\5) rit, 2, Tima. 23 “Rosi. 304f Acts
xxviogl9. -( Deut. xxi.. 185) Num. xacg10 5 ls; socx9;
Zech. vii. 12; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; [in Theogn.
1235 actively not persuasive |.) *
Gmehéw, -@: impf. nreiAovy; 1 aor. mid. 7rewnodpny;
to threaten, menace: 1 Pet. ii. 23; in mid., ace. to later
Grk. usage ([App. bell. civ. 3, 29]; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2),
actively [B. 54 (47)]: Acts iv. 17 (amen [L T Tr WH
om.] aeAeio Oa, with dat. of pers. foll. by py with inf.,
with sternest threats to forbid one to etc., W. § 54, 3;
[B. 183 (159)]). (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: mpoo-
atrethéw. |*
dred, -75, 7, a threatening, threat: Acts iv. 17 R G (cf.
dmewew), 29; ix.1; Eph. vi. 9. (From Hom. down.) *
Gar-ep; (eiui to be); [fr. Hom. down]; to be away, be
absent: 1. Cos v.3342) Cos xo 111 5 xilin2, 10:5, Cols tio
Phil. i. 27; [in all cases exc. Col. 1. c. opp. to mapecue].*
dar-cipt: impf. 3 pers. plur. amyjecay; (eis to go); [fr.
Hom. down]; to go away, depart: Acts xvii. 10.*
aar-etrov : (eizov, 2 aor. fr. obsol. éxa) ; 1. to speak
out, set forth, declare, (Hom. Il. 7, 416 ayyeXinv aréemev,
9, 309 rov pvdov amoeeiv). 2. to forbid: 1 K. xi. 2,
and in Attic writ. 3. to give up, renounce: with ace.
of the thing, Job x. 3 (for D8), and often in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down. In the same sense 1 aor. mid. ameirayny,
2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. aicyivn, 1); so
too in Hdt.1, 59; 5, 56; 7,14, [ete.], and the later writ.
fr. Polyb. down.*
dme(pacros, -ov, (metpatw), as well untempted as un-
temptable : ameipactos kaxay that cannot be tempted by
evil, not liable to temptation to sin, Jas. i. 13; cf. the
full remarks on this pass. in W. § 30, 4 [cf. § 16, 3 a.; B.
170 (148)]. (Joseph. b. j.5, 9,3; 7, 8, 1, and eccl. writ.
The Greeks said ameiparos, fr. metpaw.) *
(In Sept., Jon. iv.
GTrELOOS
Garetpos, -ov, (meipa trial, experience), inexperienced in,
without experience of, with gen. of the thing (as in Grk.
writ.) : Heb. v.18. [(Pind. and Hdt. down.)]*
dar-ex-5éxopar; [impf. dre&edexdunv]; assiduously and
patiently to wait for, [cf. Eng. wait it out]: absol., 1 Pet.
iii. 20 (Rec. éxd€éxopat) ; ti, Ro. vill. 19, 23, 255 1 Co. i.
7; Gal. v. 5 (on this pass. cf. Amis sub fin.) ; with the
ac¢. of a pers., Christ in his return from heaven: Phil.
iii. 20; Heb. ix. 28. Cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritz
schiorum Opusce. p. 155 sq.; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.
iv. p. 14; [Ellic. on Gal. l.c.]. (Scearcely found out of
the N. T.; Heliod. Aeth. 2, 35; 7, 23.)*
Gar-ex-Svopat: 1 aor. amexducapny ; 1. wholly to put
off from one’s self (axé denoting separation fr. what is
put off): tov madady avOpwror, Col. iil. 9. 2. wholly
to strip off for one’s self (for one’s own advantage), de-
spoil, disarm: twa, Col. ii. 15. Cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 sq., [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii. 15]. (Jo-
seph. antt. 6, 14, 2 dmexdvs [but ed. Bekk. perexdds] hv
Baowdtxny écOnra.) *
am-k-Svots, -ews, 7, (amexdvouat, q.v.), a putting off;
laying aside: Col. ii. 11. (Not found in Grk. writ.) *
dar-eXavvw: 1 aor. amndaca; to drive away, drive off:
Acts xviii. 16. (Com. in Grk. writ.) *
Gar-eXeypds, -o0, 6, (deAeyx to convict, expose, refute ;
éAeyuds conviction, refutation, in Sept. for €Aeyéus),
censure, repudiation of a thing shown to be worthless:
édbeiv eis ameeypoy to be proved to be worthless, to be
disesteemed, come into contempt [R. V. disrepute], Acts
xix. 27. (Not used by prof. auth.)*
Gar-ehevBepos, -ov, 6, 7, a manumitted slave, a freedman,
(ard, cf. Germ. los, [set free from bondage ]) : rod kupiov,
presented with (spiritual) freedom by the Lord, 1 Co.
vii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) *
*AmédAns [better -AAns (so all edd.); see Chandler
§§ 59, 60], -od, 6, Apelles, the prop. name of a certain
Christian: Ro. xvi. 10. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p.
174.]*
ar-edmritw (Lchm. apeAmi¢o, [cf. gram. reff. s. v. dpet-
dov]); to despair [W. 24]: pndev amedrifovtes nothing
despairing se. of the hoped-for recompense from God the
requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WH mrg. pndéva aredr.; if this
reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing
of no one, or even causing no one to despair (cf. the
Jerus. Syriac). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take
pndeva as neut. plur., a form thought to be not wholly un-
precedented ; cf. Steph. Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix.
19; 2 Mace. ix. 18; Sir. xxii. 21; [xxvii. 21; Judith ix.
11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)*
anr-évavtt, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (273) ]; 1. over
against, opposite: tov radov, Mt. xxvii. 61; [rod ya¢odu-
Aakiov, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mrg. }. 2. in sight of,
before: Mt. xxi. 2 RG; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt.
xatévavrt); Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.)
2). 3. in opposition to, against: trav Soypatwy Kai-
capos, Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr. ;
Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)*
GarépavTos, -ov, (repaivw to go through, finish; cf. aya-
56
arrépyouat
pavros), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless «
yeveadoyia, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job
xxxvi. 26; 3 Mace. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) *
Gmepioractws, adv., (mepiomdw, q. V.), without distrac-
tion, without solicitude: 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective
occurs in Sap. xvi. 11; Sir. xli. 1; often in Polyb. [the
adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4,18, 6; 12, 28, 4; cf. W. 463 (431)]
and Plut.) *
G-rep(-TpnTOS, -ov, (mepiTeuvw), uncircumcised ; metaph.
Grepitpnto tH kapdia (Jer. ix. 26; Ezek. xliv. 7) kai r-
aoi (Jer. vi. 10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e.
whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitions,
obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for 54 yy; 1 Mace.
i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de migr. Abr. § 39]; Plut. am.
prol. 3.) *
dar-épxopat; fut. amekevoopar (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv.
28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. dmmjAOov (am7njdOa in Rev. x. 9
[where RG Tr -Oov], anj\6av LT Tr WH in Mt. xxii.
22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), etc., and
WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13,1; Mullach p. 17 sq.
[226]; B. 39 (34); [Soph. Lex. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123;
WH. App. p. 164 sq.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. p. lxiv.;
Scrivener, Introd. ps 562; Collation, etc., p. liv. sq.]);
pf. dmedyAvOa (Jas. i. 24); plpf. dmeAnrAvOew (In. iv. 8) ;
[fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a place), to depart;
1. properly, a. absol.: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v.
20; Lk. viii. 39; xvii. 23; Jn. xvi. 7, ete. Ptep. ameAdav
with indic. or subj. of other verbs in past time to go
(away) and ete.: Mt. xiii. 28,46; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25;
xxvi. 36; xxvii. 5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v.14. b. with
specification of the place into which, or of the per-
son to whom or from whom one departs: eis with
ace. of place, Mt. v. 30 L T Tr WH; xiv.15; xvi. 21;
xxii. 5; Mk. vi. 36; ix. 43; Jn. iv. 8; Ro. xv. 28, etc.;
eis 6d0v €Ovav, Mt. x. 5; eis To mépav, Mt. viii. 18; Mk.
viii. 13; [80 ipav eis Maxed. 2 Co. i. 16 Lehm. txt.]; emi
with acc. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 R GT]; xxiv. 24; emi
with acc. of the business which one goes to attend to:
emi (the true reading for RG eis) tiv eumopiav aitod, Mt.
xxii. 5; éxei, Mt. ii. 22; €€@ with gen., Acts iv. 15; mpos
twa, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev. x. 9; amo twvos, Lk. i. 38;
viii. 37. Hebraistically (cf. ‘708 77) amépx. oricw
tivds to go away in order to follow any one, go after him
ficuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him as a leader :
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; in the same sense dmepy. mpés tiva,
Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9,16 (29); used also of those
who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog-
raphers (following Suidas, ‘dméA6y + avri rod émavedOn ’)
incorrectly ascribe to awépxeoOa also the idea of return-
ing, going back,— misled by the fact that a going away
is often at the same time a going back. But where this
is the case, it is made evident either by the connection,
as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as eis Tov otkov
avrov, Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 30, (otkade, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6);
mpos éavrév [Treg. mp. airov] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G,
but L Tr br. TWH reject the vs.]; Jn. xx. 10 [here T
Tr mpés adrovs, WH m. air. (see avrov)]; eis ra Griga,
Jn. vi. 66 (to return home); xviii. 6 (to draw back, re-
aTréexw
treat). 2. trop: of departing evils and sufferings,
Mk. i. 42; Lk. v. 13 (9 Aempa anndOev am aitod); Rev.
ix. 12; xi. 14; of good things taken away from one, Rev.
xviii. 14 [RG]; of an evanescent state of things, Rev.
xxi. 1 (Rec. mapjdbe), 4; of a report going forth or
spread eis, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. e&j\Gev].
am-éxw; [impf. ametyov Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt. ;
pres. mid. amreyouat] ; 1. trans. a. to hold back,
keep off, prevent, (Hom. Il. 1, 97 [Zenod.]; 6, 96; Plat.
Crat. c. 23 p. 407b.). b. to have wholly or in full, to
have received (what one had a right to expect or de-
mand; cf. dzrodiSdvat, amoAapBavew, [| Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iv. p.8; Gram. 275 (258); B. 203 (176); ace. to
Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) dwo denotes corres pon-
dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos-
session to the desire, ete.]): twa, Philem. 15; pico,
Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; mapdkAnow, Lk. vi. 24; mavra, Phil. iv.
18; (often so in Grk. writ. [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
l.c.]). Hence cc. dméyet, impers., it is enough, suffi-
cient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is ‘ye have
slept now long enough’; so that Christ takes away the
permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer ;
ef. Meyer ad loc.; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-)
Anacr. in Odar. (15) 28, 33; Cyril Alex. on Hag. ii.
9 [but the true reading here seems to be aréya, see P. E.
Pusey’s ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intrans. to be away,
absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; azo,
Lk. vii. 6; xxiv. 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; xv.
8; Mk. vii. 6, (Is. xxix. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one’s self
off, abstain: amo twos, from any thing, Acts xv. 20
[RG]; 1 Th. iv. 3; v. 22, Jobi. 1; ii. 3; Ezek. viii. 6);
twos, Acts xv. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Pet. ii.11. (So in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
amoréw, -o; [impf. nricrovy]; 1 aor. nriotnoa; (am-
oTOS) ; 1. to betray a trust, be unfaithful: 2 Tim. ii. 13
(opp. to motos pever); Ro. iii. 3; [al. deny this sense in
the N. T.; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. |. c.; Ellie. on
ral Grier Ra call 2. to have no belief, disbelieve: in the
news of Christ’s resurrection, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv.
41; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11; in the tidings con-
cerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (opp. to me
orevo), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 T Tr WH]; Acts xxviii. 24. (In
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)*
amotia, -as, 7, (fr. dmucros), want of faith and trust;
1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraying a
trust): Ro. iii. 3 [ef. reff. s. v. dmurréw, 1]. 2. want of
Saith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine
power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of
God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19; in the divine mission of
Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 6; by opposition to the gos-
pel, 1 Tim.i.13; with the added notion of obstinacy,
Ro. xi. 20, 23; Heb. iii. 12. contextually, weakness of
faith: Mt. xvii. 20 (where LT Tr WH ddAcyomoriav) ;
Mk. ix. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)*
d-rurtos, -ov, (muoros), [fr. Hom. down], without faith
or trust ; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted,
perfidious): Lk. xii. 46; Rev. xxi. 8. 2. incredible,
of things: Acts xxvi.8; (Xen. Hiero 1, 9; symp. 4,
57
? U
ajo
49; Cyr. 3,1, 26; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c.; Joseph. antt. 6,
10, 2, etc.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas
disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn.
xx. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co.
Vis 65 Viiv 12-15 5) x. 275 xiv. 22eqqh;faLimv: 8];
with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co.
iv. 4; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them-
selves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without
trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 17; Mk.ix.19; Lk. ix. 41.*
drhérns, -nTos, 7), singleness, simplicity, sincerity, men-
tal honesty; the virtue of one who is free from pretence
and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,
3; Hell. 6, 1,18, down): év dmAdrnre (LT Tr WH éyic-
TTL) Kal eiAcKpweia Ged i. e. infused by God through the
Spirit [W. § 36, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; év dad. ris kapdias
(53) Ww, 1 Chr. xxix. 17), Col. iii. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap.
1. 1); eis Xpuorov, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e.
single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wisdom
in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3; év
dmdornte in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii.
8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions,
liberality, [Joseph. antt. 7, 13, 4; but in opposition see
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 62 sq.]: 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11,
13 (rhs Kowevias, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling
s. v. ‘ Kinfalt’ in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.*
dmhois, -7, -odv, (contr. fr. -dos, -6n, -dov), [fr. Aeschyl.
down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing compli-
cated or confused; without folds, [ef. Trench § lvi.]) ;
whole; of the eye, good, fulfilling its office, sound: Mt.
vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, —[al. contend that the moral sense
of the word is the only sense lexically warranted; cf.
Test. xii. Patr. test. Isach. § 3 od xarehadnod Twos, etc.
Topevopevos ev amdorntt opOadpar, ibid. § 4 mavra 6pa
ev GrAdryrt, pt emidexopevos dpOarpois movnpias amd THs
mAavns Tod Koopov; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].*
dmhés, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down ], simply, openly, frank-
ly, sincerely: Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).*
aaré, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive,
(Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]),
Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On
its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr.
1) is traceable, cf. W. 364 sq. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B.
321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words
beginning with a vowel see Tdf. Proleg. p. 94; ef. W.
§ 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order
to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples,
but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by
this preposition. zd, then, is used
I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation,
after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing,
removing, expelling, throwing, ete., see aipw, dmépxopuat,
dmotwacow, anoxapew, abiotnu, pevyw, etc.) : ameoma-
a6n aw avtav, Lk. xxii. 41; Bade amd cov, Mt. v. 29 sq.;
exBado 76 kaphos avd [LT Tr WH ek] rod dpOadpod, Mt.
vii. 4; af’ [L WH Tr txt. map’ (q. v. I. a.) | fs exBeBAnket
Sacudma, Mk. xvi. 9; xadeide ad Opdvev, Lk.i.52. 2. of
the separation of apart from the whole; where of
a whole some part is taken: azo Tov ivatiov, Mt. ix. 16;
’ /
amgtro
a6 pedtoolov xnpiov, Lk. xxiv. 42 [RG, but Tr br. the
clause]; azo ray dWapiay, Jn. xxi. 10; ra amd tov moiov
fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44; évoggicato amo
ms tysns, Acts v. 2; exxe® amo Tod mvevparos, Acts ii.
17; éxAeEdpevos aw aitay, Lk. vi. 13; riva ard trav dvo,
Mt. xxvii. 21; dv éripnoavro amd vidv Iopana, sc. tives [R.
V. whom certain of the children of Israel did price (cf.
ris, 2.c.); but al. refer this to I. 2 d. aa. fin. q. v.], Mt.
XXxVii. 9, (€£jAOov amd tev iepéwy, sc. tives, 1 Mace. vii.
33); after verbs of eating and drinking (usually joined
in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [cf. B. 159 (139);
W. 198 (186) sq.]): Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vil. 28; mivew and,
Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. ex). 3. of any
kind of separation of one thing from another by which
the union or fellowship of the two is destroyed;
a. after verbs of averting, loosening, liberating, ransom-
ing, preserving: see ayopatw, ama\Adcow, aroctpEepa,
€Aevbepda, beparreva, xabapitw, ovw, AUTPdw, AV@, PYopat,
cHlw, puddoow, etc. b. after verbs of desisting, abstain-
ing, avoiding, ete.: see dméya, mavw, KataTave, Bdr€éTro,
mpocexw, Pvraccopua, etc. c. after verbs of concealing
and hindering: see xpimtw, koAvw, tapaxadinto. ad.
Concise constructions, [ef. esp. B. 322 (277)]: avadepa
aro Tov Xpiorod, Ro. ix. 3 (see dvdeua sub fin.) ; Aovew
and Tay TAnyev to wash away the blood from the stripes,
Acts xvi. 33; peravoeiv amd ths Kaxias by repentance to
turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; dmoOvnokew
amo twos by death to be freed from a thing, Col. ii. 20;
Pbeiperbar awd THs amAdrnTos to be corrupted and thus
led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3; eicaxov-
aGeis aro Tt. evAaBeias heard and accordingly delivered
from his fear, Heb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of
his godly fear [cf. II. 2b. below]). 4. of a state of
separation, i.e. of distance; and a. of distance of
Place,—of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii.
34; xxiv. 31, etc.; after paxpav, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii.
34; Jn. xxi. 8; after dréyew, see améyw 2; dmb dvwbev
€ws caro, Mk. xv. 38; amo paxpobev, Mt. xxvii. 55, ete.
[ef. B. 70 (62); W. § 65, 2]. Acc. to later Grk. usage
it is put before nouns indicating local distance: Jn. xi.
18 (jv éyybs as amd oradiwy Sexarevre about fifteen fur-
longs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xiv. 20, (Diod. i. 51 érava rips
moAews ao Sexa oxoivev Nipynv dpvEe, [also 1,97; 4,56;
16,46; 17, 112; 18,40, 19,' 25, ete.;. cf. Soph. Lex.
s. v. 5]; Joseph. b. j. 1, 3, 5 rotro ad’ é€axociay cradiov
évrevOev eoriv, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 18, 5 dare trols mpa-
Tous vexpovs amo Svow oradiov caturecew, Vit. Oth. ec. 11,
1 xareotpatorédevoev aro TmevtnKovta otadiwy, vit. Philop.
c. 4, 3 qv yap aypos a’t@ amd atadioy etkoot THS TOAEwS) ;
ef. W. 557 (518) sq.; [B. 153 (133)]. b. of distance
of Time,—of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat.
inde a): amd ths Spas éxeivns, Mt. ix. 22; xvii. 18; Jn.
xix. 27; am’ ex. rHs nuepas, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi. 53; [amd
mpatns nuepas, | Actsxx. 18; Phil.i.5 [LT Tr WH ris mo.
nu]; ap nuepov dpxaiwv, Acts xv. 7; am érav, Lk. viii.
43; Ro. xv. 23; am aidvos and amo tr. aiwver, Lk. i. 70,
etc.; am apxijs, Mt. xix. 4, 8, etc.; amd xaraBoAns Kocpou,
Mt. xiii. 35 [LT Tr WHom. xooup.], etc.; amd kticews
58
a
ajo
koopov, Ro. i. 20; dd Bpéhous from a child, 2 Tim. iii.
15; dro ths mapbevias, Lk. ii. 36; ad’ Hs (sc. nuépas) since,
Lk. vii. 45; Acts xxiv.11; 2 Pet.iii.4; ag’ fs mpepas,
Col. i. 6,9; ag’ od equiv. to amd rovrov ore [cf. B. 82
(71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25; xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18,
(Hat. 2,44; and in Attic) ; ad’ od after rpia érn, Lk. xiii.
7T Tr WH; azo rod viv from the present, henceforth, Lk. i.
48; v.10; xii. 52; xxu..69; Acts xyviil 6; .2.Co. v. 16;
do tore, Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21; xxvi.16; Lk. xvi. 16; amd
mépvot since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2;
aro mpwi, Acts xxviii. 23; cf. W. 422 (393); [B. 320
(275)]; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. ce. of distance of
Order or Rank, — of the terminus from which in any
succession of things or persons: amé detrovs (sc. adds)
kat katwtépw, Mt. ii. 16, (rods Aeviras dé eixooaerovs
kat emavo, Num.i. 20; 2 Esdr. iii. 8); amd "ABpadap ews
Aaveid, Mt. i. 17; €Bdopos dad’ Adap, Jude 14; ard puxpovd
€ws peydadov, Acts vili. 10; Heb. viii. 11; adpyerOar amd
tivos, Mt. xx. 8; Lk. xxiii. 5; xxiv. 27; Jn. viii. 9; Acts
VANS GIR >: Bil
II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place
whence; or of causal origin, the cause from which. 1.
of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is
taken; a. after verbs of coming; see épxopuat, jKa, ete. :
aro [L Tr WH am’ ] dyopas se. édOovres, Mk. vil. 4; dyyedos
am’ (Tov) ovpavod, Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ];
Tov am ovpavav sc. Aadovvta, Heb. xii. 25, etc.; of the
country, province, town, village, from which any one has
originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324
(279)]: Mt. ii. 1; iv. 25; Jn. i. 44 (45); xi. 1; piaamod
dpous Suwa, Gal. iv. 24. Hence 6 or of amé twos a native of,
a man of, some place: 6 amd Na¢apeO the Nazarene, Mt.
xxi. 11; 6 am0 Aptpadaias, Mk. xv. 43; Jn. xix. 38 [here
GLTrWH om. 6]; of amo Iommns, Acts x. 23; of amo
"Iradias the Italians, Heb. xiii. 24 [cef. W. § 66,6]. A
great number of exx. fr. prof. writ. are given by Wieseler,
Untersuch. iib. d. Hebriierbr. 2te Hilfte, p. 14 sq. b.
of the party or society from which one has proceeded,
i.e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary
of it: of dd ris éxkAnoias, Acts xii. 1; of amd ris aipe-
gews Tov Papicaiwy, Acts xv. 5, (asin Grk. writ.: of a6
Ths Sroas, of amd ris Axadnpius, ete.). c. of the material
from which a thing is made: amd tpixydv Kapndov, Mt.
iii. 4 [W. 370 (347); B. 324 (279)]. d. trop. of that
from or by which a thing is known: am6 tov xaprav
envywwaokew, Mt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lehm. €k r. x. ete.]
(Lys. in Andoec. § 6; Aeschin. adv. Tim. p. 69 ed.
Reiske) ; pavOdvew amd tivos to learn from the example
of any one, Mt. xi. 29; xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; but in
Gal. iii. 2; Col. i. 7; Heb. v. 8, pav. amd Tivos means
to learn from one’s teaching or training [cf. B. 324
(279) c.; W. 872 (848)]. e. after verbs of seeking, in-
quiring, demanding : amareiv, Lk. xii. 20[Tr WH air.];
(nreiv, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with ex [cf. W. § 50,
2]); ex¢nreiv, Lk. xi. 50 sq.; see airéw. 2. of causal
origin, or the Cause; and a. of the material cause,
so called, or of that which supplies the material for the
maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: so
Ce
avo
yeuifer Oa, xopraler Oat, mrovreiv, Suaxoveiy amd riw»s, — see
those verbs. b. of the cause on account of which
anything is or is done, where commonly it can be ren-
dered for (Lat. prae, Germ. vor): ov« ndvvato amd rod
8xAov, Lk. xix. 3; ovxére toyvoav amd rod mAnOous, Jn.
xxi. 6, (Judith ii. 20); amo r. dd&ns Tod pwrds, Acts xxii.
11; [here many would bring in Heb. v. 7 (W. 371 (348) ;
B. 322 (276)), see I.3d.above]. c. of themoving or
im pelling cause (Lat. ex, prae; Germ. aus, vor), for,
out of : amd THs xapas avtov tmdye, Mt. xiii. 44; amd rod
@oBov for fear, Mt. xiv. 26; xxviii. 4; Lk. xxi. 26.
Hebraistically : poSeioOae amd twos (J) 877), Mt. x. 28;
LK. xii. 4; Qevyew amé tivos (q79 032 ), to flee for fear of
one, Jn. x. 5; Mk. xiv. 52(RG, but L Tr mrg. br. av
avrav) ; Rev. ix.6; cf. pevyw and W. 223 (209 sq.). d.
of the efficient cause, viz. of things from the force of
which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose
will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence,
direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: azo
tow umvov by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 9; amd cov
onuetov, Mt. xii. 35; amd ddéns eis Sdéav, 2 Co. iii. 18
(from the glory which we behold for ourselves [ef. W.
254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we
share, cf. Meyer ad loe.); did xupiov mvevpatos by the
Spirit of the Lord [yet ef. B. 343 (295) ], ibid.; éreApov
dm0 mpoowrov Tov kupiov destruction proceeding from the
(incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th.
i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26
Sept., cf. Ewald); on the other hand, avawuéts amd mpo-
oamov tT. x. Acts iii. 20 (19); dmexravOnoav amo (Ree. te)
tov mAnyav, Rev. ix. 18. ad’ éavrov, ad’ éavtav, am’ epav-
Tov, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself (myself,
etc.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distin-
guished from another’s instruction, [cf. W. 372 (348)]:
ieee ot exxdoOireiner ve 19130) xd. Oill- exive dl O}-psvae
13; xviii. 34 [L Tr WH azo ceavur.]; 2 Co. iii.5; x. 7 [T
Tr WH eq’ é. (see emi A. I. 1 ¢’.)]; of one’s own will and
motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another:
Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 42; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one’s
own power: Jn. xv. 43 by one’s power and on one’s own
judgment: Jn. viii. 28; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in
Kypke, Observ. i. p. 391. (Cf. edyny éyovres af’ (al. ef’ see
ent A. I. 1 f.) éavrov, Acts xxi. 23 WH txt.] after verbs
of learning, knowing, receiving, azo is used of him to whom
we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf.W.
370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p.7 sq.; B. 324
(279); Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23; per contra Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. i. 12]: dkovew, Acts ix. 13; 1Jn.i.5; ywooxew,
ME. xv. 45; AapBavew, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; 1 Jn. ii. 27; iii.
22 LT Tr WH; €yew, 1 Jn. iv. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3, etc.;
mapadapBave, 1 Co. xi. 23; d€yerOar, Acts xxviii. 21;
respecting pavOavew see above, II. 1 d.; Aatpedw ro bed
ano mpoyovey after the manner of the darpeia received
from my forefathers [cf. W. 372 (349); B. 322 (277)], 2
Tim. i. 3. yiverai pot, 1 Co. i. 30; iv. 5; xapis ad Geod
or tov Geod, from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7; 1
Co. i. 3; Gal. i. 3, and often; cai rodro amé beod, Phil. i. 28.
GaéoatoXos amd etc., constituted an apostis by authority
59
,’
aTroBaiva
and commission, etc. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal.i.1. after
macxew, Mt. xvi. 21; [akin to this, acc. to many, is Mt.
XXVil. 9 dv eriynoavTo dro Tay vidy Iopand, R. V. mrg.
whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel; but see
in I. 2 above]. bb. When azo is used after passives
(which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222
sqq-; [B. 325 (280); W. 371 (347 sq.)]), the connection
between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser
and more remote than that indicated by id, and may
often be expressed by on the part of (Germ. von Seiten),
[A. V. generally of]: dmd rod beod amodedevypévov ap-
proved (by miracles) according to God’s will and ap-
pointment, Acts ii. 22; dio Oeod metpatopa the cause of
my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 13; dme-
arepnuevos ['T Tr WH ddvorep.] ad’ tpav by your fraud,
Jas. v.45; amodoxipafer Oa, Lk. xvii. 25; [edixarmdn y copia
aro tav Téxvev, Lk. vii. 35 ace. to some; see dixatda, 2];
TOToy Nroagpevov aro Tov Geov by the will and direction
of God, Rev. xii. 6 ; 6xyXovpevor amo (Ree. ims, [see 6yA€w })
mvevpateov axadapr. Lk. vi. 18 (whose annoyance by dis-
eases [(?) cf. vs. 17] proceeded from unclean spirits
[A. V. vexed (troubled) with ete.]); dm r. capkos éomAo-
pevov by touching the flesh, Jude 23; [add Lk. i. 26 T Tr
WH ameordAn 6 ayyeXos ard (RG Limo) rot beov)}. As
in prof. auth. so also in the N. T. the Mss. sometimes
vary between azo and vo: e. g.in Mk. viii. 31; [ Lk. viii.
43]; Acts iv. 36; [x. 17, 33; xv. 4]; Ro. xiii. 1; [xv.
24]; Rev ix. 18; see W. 370 (347) sq.; B. 325 (280)
sq-; [ef. Vincent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App.
§ 41].
III. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in-
dicating the manner or degree in which anything is
done or occurs, are the following: do tr. xapdidv ipaov
from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. xviii.
35; do pepous in part, 2 Co. i. 14; ii. 5; Ro. xi. 25; xv.
24; dd pias sc. either davns with one voice, or yvopns or
Wuxns with one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel
ad loc.; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.); yet see Lob. Par-
alip. p. 363]).
IV. The extraordinary construction azo 6 dy (for Ree.
a7r0 TOU 6) kal 6 HY Kal 6 €pxopevos, Rev. i. 4, finds its ex-
planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used
the words 6 Sy xrA. as an indeclinable noun, for the
purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name
mi; cf. W. § 10, 2 fin.; [B. 50 (43)].
V. In composition az indicates separation, liberation,
cessation, departure, as in d7oBdAXo, aroxdrta, arokvuXia,
droAv@, aToAUTpwots, amadyéw, atepxouat; finishing and
completion, as in drapri¢w, aworehew ; refers to the pat-
tern from which a copy is taken, as in droypadety, adopor-
ov, etc.; or tohim from whom the action proceeds, as
in dnodeikvupt, amoroApae, etc.
arro-Baivw: fut. amoBnoopar; 2 aor. ameBnv; 1. to
come down from: a ship (so even in Hom.), amd, Lk. v. 2
[Tr mrg. br. an airav]; ets rHv ynv, Jn. xxi. 9. 2:
trop. to turn out, ‘ eventuate,’ (so fr. Hdt. down): dmo8r-
cerat bpiv eis paptupioy it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; eis
gwrtnpiav, Phil. i. 19. (Job xiii. 16 ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) *
aTroBaArw
daro-BaAXw : 2 aor. aréBadov; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw
off; cast away: a garment, Mk. x. 50. _ trop. confidence,
Heb. x. 35.*
dro-BAérw: [impf. améBderov]; to turn the eyes away
from other things and fix them on some one thing ; to look
at attentively : eis re (often in Grk. writ.) ; trop. to look
with steadfast mental gaze: eis t. proOarrodociav, Heb. xi.
26 [W. § 66, 2d.].*
ar6-BAnTos, -ov, thrown away, to be thrown away, re-
jected, despised, abominated: as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4,
(in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. equiv. toxpv unclean; Hom. I. 2,
361; 3,65; Lcian., Plut.).*
daro-Bodh, -7s, 7, a throwing away; 1. rejection, re-
pudiation, (dmoBadXeoba to throw away from one’s self,
cast off, repudiate): Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to mpéaAnpyts aitar,
objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. amoBaddA@ in the
sense of lose): Acts xxvii. 22 amoBodn Wuy7s ovdepia
éorat €€ tuoy no one of you shall lose his life [W. § 67,
le.]. (Plat., Plut., al.) *
Gro-ylvopat: [2 aor. areyevouny | ; 1. to be removed
from, depart. 2. to die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down); hence trop. amoy. tui to die to any thing: tais
duapriats aroyevopevor i. e. become utterly alienated from
our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. § 52, 4, 1 d.; B. 178 (155) ].*
&tro-ypar, -7s, 77, (amoypapw) ; a. a writing off, trans-
cript (from some pattern). b. an enrolment (or regis-
tration) in the public records of persons together with their
property and income, as the basis of an azoripnots (census
or valuation), i.e. that it might appear how much tax
should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37;
on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. ef. Schiirer,
Ntl. Zeitgesch. § 17, pp. 251, 262-286, and books there
mentioned ; [McClellan i. 392-399; B. D. s. v. Taxing ].*
amo-ypadw: Mid., [pres. inf. amoypapeoOar|; 1 aor.
inf. aroypayacOa ; [pf. pass. ptep. droyeypappevos ; fr.
Hdt. down]; a. to write off; copy (from some pattern).
b. to enter in a register or records; spec. to enter in the
public records the names of men, their property and income,
to enroll, (cf. droypadn, b.); mid.to have one’s self registered,
to enroll one’s self [W.§ 38, 3]: Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5; pass. of ev
ovpavots aroyeypappevot those whose names are inscribed
in the heavenly register, Heb. xii. 23 (the reference is
to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the
figure being drawn from civil communities on earth,
whose citizens are enrolled in a register).*
Garo-Seikvupt; 1 aor. amédecEa; pf. pass. ptep. dmodedery-
pevos; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Nem. 6, 80 down);
1. prop. to point away from one’s self, to point out, show
forth; to expose to view, exhibit, (Hat. 3, 122 and often) :
1 Co. iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare : twa, to show, prove
what kind of a person any one is, Acts ii. 22 (where cod.
D gives the gloss [ d<doxip jaopevor) ; 2 Th. ii.4 [Lchm. mre.
arodevyviovra]. to prove by arguments, demonstrate: Acts
xxv. 7. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.*
G1rd-Serkts, -ews, 7), (arodeixvupt, q. V.), [fr. Hdt. down];
a. a making manifest, showing forth. . a demonstration,
proof: amddeéis mvevpatos cai Suvdyews a proof by the
Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in
60
aTrodléwpu
the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and
thus persuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (contextually opposed
to proof by rhetorical arts and philosophic arguments,
—the sense in which the Greek philosophers use the
word ; [see Heinrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 sq.]).*
daro-Sexatevw, Lk. xviii. 12, for dmodexaréw q.v.; [ef.
WH. App. p. 171].
aro-Sexatow, -@, inf. pres. dmodexaroiv, Heb. vii. 5 T
Tr WH (cf. Delitzsch ad loc.; B. 44 (38); [Tdf.’s note
ad loc. ; WH. Intr. § 410]); (Sexard@ q. v.); a bibl. and
eccl. word ; Sept. for Wy; to tithe i.e. _ 1. with ace. of
the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing: Mt. xxiii. 23;
Lk. xi. 42; xviii. 12 where T WH, after codd. &* B only,
have adopted drodexaredw, for which the simple Sexareva
is more common in Grk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Deut.
xiv. 21(22)). 2. ruva, to exact, receive, a tenth from any
one: Heb. vii. 5; (1S. viii. 15,17). [B.D.s.v. Tithe.]*
amé-Sexros [so L T WH accent (and Ree. in 1 Tim. ii.
3) ; al. dwodexrés, cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 498; Gottling p. 313
sq-; Chandler § 529 sq.], -ov, (see dmodéyoua), a later
word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable: 1 Tim. ii. 3; v. 4.*
G1ro-S€x oar; depon. mid. ; impf. dwedexdunv; 1 aor. aze-
deEdunv; 1 aor. pass. amedéxOnv; common in Grk. writ.,
esp. the Attic, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. used only by
Luke ; to accept what is offered from without (aré, cf. Lat.
excipio), to accept from, receive: twa, simply, to give
one access to one’s self, Lk. ix. 11 LT Tr WH; Acts
xxvill. 30; with emphasis [cf. Tob. vii. 17 and Fritzsche
ad loc.], to receive with joy, Lk. viii. 40; to receive to
hospitality, Acts xxi. 17 L T Tr WH; to grant one ac-
cess to one’s self in the capacity in which he wishes to be
regarded, e. g. as the messenger of others, Acts xv. 4 (L
T Tr WH maped¢yOnoav) ; asa Christian, Acts xviii. 27;
metaph. ri, to receive into the mind with assent: to ap-
prove, Acts xxiv. 3; to believe, rovAdyov, Acts ii. 41; (so
in Grk. writ. esp. Plato; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).*
GroSypew, -&; 1 aor. amrednunoa; (amddnpos, q. Vv.) 3; to
go away to foreign parts, go abroad: Mt. xxi. 33; xxv. 14
sq.; Mk. xii.1; Lk. xv. 13 (eis xopav); xx.9. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
&1r6-Snp.0s, -ov, (fr. awd and 8y0s the people), away
from one’s people, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. so-
Journing in another country]. [From Pind. down. ]*
Grro-SiSwp., pres. ptcp. neut. amodidody (fr. the form
-615d@, Rev. xxii. 2, where T Tr WH mrg. -d:dots [see
WH. App. p. 167]) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. dredidouv (for the
more com. azedidocar, Acts iv. 383; cf. W. § 14, 1c.) ; fut.
amrodwow; 1 aor. awédwxa; 2 aor. amédwv, impv. amddos,
subj. 3 pers. sing. dod@ and in 1 Thess. v. 15 Tdf. azrodot
(see didape), opt. 3 pers. sing. awobwy [or rather, -6on ; for
-do7 is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for aodoin,
ef. W.§ 14,1 ¢.; B.46 (40); yet LT Tr WH adzodacer) ;
Pass., 1 aor. inf. dodoOnvat; Mid., 2 aor. daedépny, 3 pers.
sing. drédoro (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH azedero; cf. B.
47 (41); Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [ WH. App. p.
167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, and
the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it;
prop. to put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ.
atrodvopiva
abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq.
who regards az as denoting to give from some reserved
store, or to give over something which might have been
retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty ; cf.
Cope on Aristot. rhet.1,1,7]); 1. to deliver, relinquish
what is one’s own: 70 g@pa Tov Incod, Mt. xxvii. 58; hence
in mid. to give away for one’s own profit what is one’s own,
i. e. to sell [W. 253 (238)]: ri, Acts v. 8; Heb. xii. 16;
twa, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp.
the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for 739, Gen.
xxv. 33 etc.; Bar. vi. [i.e. Ep. Jer.] 27 (28)). 2. to
pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a
burden, is thrown off, awd, by being paid) : a debt (Germ.
abtragen), Mt. v. 26; xviii. 25-30, 34; Lk. vil. 42; x. 35;
xii. 59; wages, Mt. xx.8; tribute and other dues to the
government, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. xii.17; Lk. xx. 25; Ro.
xiii. 7; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41; Heb. xii. 11; Rev. xxii.
2; dpxovs things promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf.
Num. xxx. 3, (edxnv a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.) ; con-
jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3; duoiBds grateful requitals, 1 Tim.
v.43 Adyov to render account: Mt. xii. 36; Lk. xvi. 2;
Acts xix. 40; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt.; Heb. xiii. 17;
1 Pet. iv. 5; papripiov to give testimony (as something
officially due), Acts iv. 33. Hence _ 38. to give back, re-
store: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lchm. mrg.]; ix. 42; xix. 8.
4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense: Mt.
vi. 4, 6, 18; xvi. 27; Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14; Rev.
Xviii. 6; xxii. 12; kakdv avti kakod, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v.
15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: avr-arodidwpe. |*
daro-St-opitw ; (diopi{@, and this fr. dpos a limit); by
drawing boundaries to disjoin, part, separate from anoth-
er: Jude 19 (of amodwopifovtes éavrovs those who by
their wickedness separate themselves from the living
fellowship of Christians; if €aur. be dropped, with Rec**
GLT Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep-
arations). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 1290», 25].)*
drro-SoKipdtw : (see doxiudtw); 1 aor. dwedSoxiyaca; Pass.,
1 aor. dredokiuaoOnv; pf. ptcp. drodedoxipacpevos ; to dis-
approve, reject, repudiate: Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. viii. 31; xii.
10; Uk Ix. 226 evil. 2D xx. 17s 1 Pets 11.4,/75 Heb. xii,
17. (Equiv. to ON? in Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 22; Jer. viii. 9,
ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)*
&1ro-50x 7H, -7s, 7, (dmodéxouar, q. v.), reception, admis-
sion, acceptance, approbation, [ A. V. acceptation]: 1 Tim.
1.15; iv.9. (Polyb. 2, 56,1; 6, 2, 13, ete. ; 6 Adyos aro-
Soxns tuyxaver id. 1, 5,5; Diod. 4, 84; Joseph. antt. 6, 14,
4; al. [cf. Meld, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 124].) *
amd-Geors, -ews, 7, [amoriOnur], a putting off or away: 2
Pet.i. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoc.
and Plato down. | *
a1ro-84 Kn, -nNs, 7, (amroriOnut), a place in which any thing
is laid by or up; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner,
barn|: Mt. i. 12; vi. 265, xii. 30; Lk. ii. 173 xi1::18;
24. (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 26; Thue. 6, 97.)*
arro-Oncavpitw; to put away, lay by in store, to treasure
away, [seponendo thesaurum colligere, Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future
use: 1 Tim. vi. 19. [Sir. iii. 4; Diod., Joseph., Epict., al.]*
61
> /
aTroOvncKe
dtro-8X(Bw ; to press on all sides, squeeze, press hard: Lk.
vili.45. (Num. xxii. 25; used also of pressing out grapes
and olives, Diod. 3, 62; Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].) *
aro-Oyickw, imp. améOvnoxov (Lk. viii. 42); 2 aor.
améOavov ; fut. admofavoipa, Ro. v. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24,
(see 6ynoxw) ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; to die
(amd, so as to be no more; [ef. Lat. emorior; Eng. die
off or out, pass away]; Germ. absterben, ver sterben) ;
I. used properly 1. of the natural death of men:
Mt. ix. 24; xxii. 24; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. iv.47; Ro. vii. 2,
and very often ; dmoOvncxovtes avOpamo subject to death,
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [B. 206 (178) ]. 2. of the violent
death —both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt.
xxvi. 35; Acts xxi. 13 etc.; 1 Pet. iii.18 L T Tr WH txt.;
ev ddv@ paxaipas, Heb. xi. 37; of the punishment of
death, Heb. x. 28; often of the violent death which
Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, ete. 3.
Phrases: dmoOvnck. ék Tivos to perish by means of some-
thing, [cf. Eng. to die of], Rev. viii. 11; év rH dpapria,
ev tats dwapriacs, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed,
Jn. vill. 21, 24; ev r@ Adaw by connection with Adam,
1 Co. xv. 22; év kvpio in fellowship with, and trusting in,
the Lord, Rev. xiv. 13; dmoOvnok. mm to die a certain
death, Ro. vi. 10, (@avarov paxpov, Charit. p. 12 ed. D’Or-
ville [1. i. c. 8 p. 17, 6 ed. Beck; cf. W. 227 (213) ; B. 149
(130) ]); 7H dpaptia, used of Christ, ‘that he might
not have to busy himself more with the sin of men,’ Ro.
vi. 10; éavr@ to become one’s own master, independent,
by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [ef. Meyer]; r@ xupi@ to become
subject to the Lord’s will by dying, Ro. xiv. 8 [ef. Mey.];
dua tia i. e. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 11; on the phrases azro-
Ovnok. mepi and trep twos, see mepi I. c. 6. and imep I.
2and 8. Oratorically, although the proper signification
of the verb is retained, ka® 7yépav amrobvncxw I meet
death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31,
ef. 2.Co. vi. 9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12; of
seeds, which while being resolved into their elements in
the ground seem to perish by rotting, Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv.
36. II. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of eternal
death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery,
and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13;
Jniivieeo0 sexi 265 2. of moral death, in various
senses; a. to be deprived of real life, i.e. esp. of the
power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope
of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor
of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ,
the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2. b. with dat. of the
thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to
become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from
all connection with it: 76 véu@, Gal. ii. 19, which must
also be supplied with dro@avévr es (for so we must read
for Rec®!2 dmodavdyt os) in Ro. vii. 6 [ef. W. 159 (150) ];
tH duapria, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I.
3 above); dmé rév crotxetwy Tod Kdopov SO that your re-
lation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (aad rév waar,
Porphyr. de abst. animal. 1, 41 [ef. B. 322 (277) ; W. 370
(347)]); true Christians are said simply do6aveiy, as hav-
ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them
atokabiotnm
away from God, Col. iii. 3; since they owe this habit of
mind to the death of Christ, they are said also amoaveiv
civ Xpiotd, Ro. vi. 8; Col. ii. 20. [Comp.: ovrazo-
OvicKe. |
Grro-kab-loTnpt, dmoxabioraw (Mk. ix. 12 dzoxaiora
RG), and droxa@ioravw (Mk. ix. 12 LT Tr [but WH
droxarioctdve, see their App. p. 168]; Acts i. 6; cf. W.
78 (75); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. amroxaragtnow; 2 aor.
drexaréotny (with double augm., (cf. Ex. iv. 7; Jer. xxiii.
8], Mk. viii. 25 T Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. amoxateoraény
or, ace. to the better reading, with double augm. azexare-
ordbny, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 10 (Ignat. ad Smyrn.
11; cf.[ WH. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.) ; [B. 35 (31)];
Mullach p. 22); asin Grk. writ. to restore to its former state ;
2 aor. act. to be in its former state: used of parts of the
body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi.
10; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. vill. 25; of the
restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3); of
the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii.
11; Mk. ix. 12; of a man at a distance from his friends
and to be restored to them, Heb. xiii. 19.*
éaro-kadvmrw : fut. droxahv Wo; 1 aor.drexaduwa; [ Pass.,
pres. dmoxadvmrouat|; 1 aor. drexadipOnv; 1 fut. amo-
cavpOnoopat; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and] Plat. down; in
Sept. equiv. to 792 ; 1. prop. to uncover, lay open what
has been veiled or covered up; to disclose, make bare: Ex.
xx. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq.; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; ra
o776n, Plat. Prot. p. 352 a.; ryv xepadny, Plut. Crass. 6.
2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose,
what before was unknown; a. pass. of any method
whatever by which something before unknown becomes
evident: Mt. x. 26; Lk. xii.2. b. pass. of matters which
come to light from things done: Lk. ii. 35 [some
make the verb mid. here]; Jn. xii. 38 (Is. lili. 1); Ro. i.
18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. ¢. amoxadimnrew ri
tut is used of God revealing to men things unknown |
[Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28; Ps. xevii. (xeviii.) 2; 1S. ii.
27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation : —
whether by deeds, Mt. xi. 25; xvi. 17; Lk. x. 21 (by in-
timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ; — or by the
Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30; Eph. iii. 5; Phil. iii. 15;
1 Pet. i. 12; rov vidv adrov ev €uoi who, what, how great
his Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men:
Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass. of things, previously
non-existent, coming into being and to view: as, 7 ddéa,
Ro. viii. 18 (eis mas to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v.
1; 7 cwrnpia, 1 Pet. i. 5; 7 wiotis, Gal. iii. 23; the day
of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass. of persons, previ-
ously concealed, making their appearance in public: of
Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now
hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30; of Anti-
christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.*
{On this word (and the foll.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the
Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. 34 sq.); Liicke, Ein].
in d. Offenb. d. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq.; esp. F. G. B. van
Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis mavepody et amoxadvmrew in
N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1849. gavepdw is thought to describe an ex-
ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but
single or isolated ; amoxaAvmTw an internal disclosure, to the
62
’ /
ATrOKAPAO, Kia
believer, and abiding. The aoxdAviyis or unveiling precedes
and produces the pavépwors or manifestation ; the former looks
toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to
whom the revelation is made. Others, however, seem to
question the possibility of discrimination; see e. g. Fritz-
sche on Rom. vol. ii. 149. Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13.]
atro-Kaduipis, -ews, 1), (dokadUTTe@, q- V-), an uncovering ;
1. prop. a laying bare, making naked (1 S. xx. 30).
2. tropically, in N.'T. and eccl. language [see end], a.
a disclosure of truth, instruction, concerning divine
things before unknown—esp. those relating to the
Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself,
or by the ascended Christ, esp. through the operation of
the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished
from other methods of instruction; hence, cara azmoxd-
vw yropifer@a, Eph. iii. 3. mvetpa awoxadiwews, a
spirit received from God disclosing what and how great
are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen.
of the obj., rod puornpiov, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the
subj., kupiov, Intod Xpiotovd, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by
ecstasies and visions, [so 7]); Gal.i.12; Rev. i. 1 (rev-
elation of future things relating to the consummation of
the divine kingdom) ; kar’ amoxadvyuy, Gal. ii. 2; Aadeiv
ev amok. to speak on the ground of [al. in the form of}
a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co.
xiv. 6; equiv. to amoxexaduppevov, in the phrase azoxa-
uw éexew, 1 Co. xiv. 26. b. equiv. to 7d amoxadv-
mregOa as used of events by which things or states or
persons hitherto withdrawn from view are made visible
to all, manifestation, appearance, cf. dmoxahimre, 2, d.
and e.: das eis amoxad. eOvav a light to appear to the
Gentiles[al. render ‘a light for a revelation (of divine
truth) tothe Gentiles,’ and so refer the use to a. above],
Lk. ii. 32; dmok. Sixatoxpicias Oeod, Ro. ii. 5; rev viav
tov Geov, the event in which it will appear who and what
the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at
the last day, Ro. viii. 19; ts dd€ns Tod Xprorod, of the
glory clothed with which he will return from heaven, 1
Pet. iv. 13; of this return itself the phrase is used azo-
Kadvipis Tov Kupiov I. Xpiotod : 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Co.i. 7; 1 Pet.
i. 7,13. (Among Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once,
Cat. maj. ec. 20, of the denudation of the body, [also in
Paul. Aemil. 14 d. iddrwv; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 32
d. duaprias; cf. Sir. xi. 27; xxii. 22 ete. See Trench
§ xciv. and reff. s. v. doxadvmra, fin. ]) *
Grro-kapadoxia, -as, 7, (fr. amoxapadoxeiv, and this fr. ard,
kapa the head, and 6oxety in the Ion. dial. to watch ;
hence xapadoxeiv [ Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6;
Eur., al.] to watch with head erect or outstretched, to
direct attention to anything, to wait for in suspense;
amoxapadoxeiv (Polyb. 16, 2, 8; 18, 31, 4; 22, 19, 3;
[Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p. 235 ed. Reiske];
Joseph. b. j. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 7 Aq. for
Sdinnn), anxiously [?] to look forth from one’s post.
But the prefix dé refers also to time (like the Germ.
ab in abwarten, [cf. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies
constancy in expecting; hence the noun, found in Paul
alone and but twice, denotes), anxious |?] and persistent
expectation: Ro. viii. 19; Phil. i. 20. This word is very
aTrokaTadNacow
4
fully discussed by C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum
Opusce. p. 150 sqq.; [ef. Ellic. and Lghtft. on Phil. 1. ¢.].*
dtro-Kat-adAdoow Or -Tr@: 1 aor. dwoxatnAdaea; 2 aor.
pass. dmoxarn\Aaynre (Col. i. 22 (21) L Tr mrg. WH mrg.);
to reconcile completely (amd), [al. to reconcile back again,
bring back to a former state of harmony; Ellic. on Eph.
ii. 16; Bp. Lghtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20; Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 7 sq.; yet see Mey. on Eph. Ll. ¢.;
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 278; (see azo V.) ], (cf. karad-
Adoow): Col. i. 22 (21) [ef. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]; twa
tun, Eph. ii. 16; concisely, mavra eis avrov [better adtov
with edd.; cf. B. p. 111 (97) and s. v. airod |, to draw to
himself by reconciliation, or so to reconcile that they
should be devoted to himself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200)
but cf. § 49, a.c. 6.].. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor
mm, the/Grk, O; 1.)
aro-KaTda-cTaris, -ews, 7, (dmoxabiornut, q.V.), restora-
tion: trav mavrev, the restoration not only of the true
theocracy but also of that more perfect state of (even
physical) things which existed before the fall, Acts iii.
21; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Often in Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.)*
[Gro-Kat-oTdavw, see atoxabiotnp. |
amd-Kear; to be laid away, laid by, reserved, (amo as in
adnoOncaupifw [q. v.], amoOnkn); a. prop.: Lk. xix. 26.
b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one, awaiting
him: Col. i. 5 (€Amis hoped-for blessedness) ; 2 Tim. iv.
8 (arédavos) ; Heb. ix. 27 (dmoOaveiv, as in 4 Mace. viii.
10). (In both senses in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down.) *
arokepaditw: 1 aor. umexepadica; (Keadn); to cut off
the head, behead, decapitate: Mt. xiv. 10; Mk. vi. 16, 27
(28); Lk. ix. 9. <A later Grk. word: [Sept. Ps. fin.];
pict.’ diss. 1, 1, 19;:24; 29; Artem. oneir. 1,35; cf.
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. 'T. p. 690 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 341.*
Gtro-kNelw : 1 aor. amekAevoa ; to shut up: tiv Ovpav, Lk.
xiii. 25. (Gen. xix. 10; 2S. xiii. 17sq.; often in Hdt.;
in Attic prose writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
Gtro-KoTTw : 1 aor. drexowa; fut. mid. droxdyouat; to
cut off, amputate: Mk. ix. 43, [45]; Jn. xviii. 10, 26;
Acts xxvii. 32; ddedov kai droxowovra I would that they
(who urge the necessity of circumcision would not only
circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate them-
selves (or cut off their privy parts), Gal. v.12. amoké-
nmreoOa occurs in this sense in Deut. xxiii. 1; [Philo de
alleg. leg. iii. 3 ; de vict. off. § 13; cf. de spec. lege.i.§7];
Epict. diss. 2, 20,19; Leian. Eun. 8; [Dion Cass. 79, 11;
Diod. Sic. 3, 31], and other pass. quoted by Wetst. ad
loc. [and Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Others incorrectly : I would
that they would cut themselves off from the society of
Christians, quit it altogether; [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc. ].*
&m6-KpuLa, -Tos, TO, (a7roKpivopat, q. V.in dzoKpivw), an
answer: 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, ‘On asking
myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril,
J answered, “I must die.”’ (Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 6 of
an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in
Polyb. excpt. Vat. 12, 26°, 1].)*
63
/
aTOKPUTT@
pa]; i. to part, separate; Pass. to be parted, separated,
(1 aor. dmexpiOnv was separated, Hom. Il. v. 12; Thue.
2,49; [4, 72]; Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10; [other
exx. in Veitch s. v.]).” ii. to give sentence against one, de-
cide that he has lost; hence Mid., [ pres. dmoxpivoyat; 1 aor.
3 pers. sing. amexpivato]; (to give forth a decision from
myself [W. 253 (238) ]), to give answer, to reply; so from
Thuc. down (and even in Hdt. 5, 49 [Gaisf.]; 8, 101
[Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses ir oxpivopa). But
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. do not give this
sense to the pass. tenses dmexpiOnv, amoxptOncopa. “The
example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b. [ef.
Stallb. p. 388] is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex.
p- 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dia-
logue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is
sometimes introduced by copyists.” Lobeck ad Phryn. p.
108; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 186 sq.; Veitch
s. v.; W. 23 (22)]. But from Polyb. down droxpi6qvae
and amoxpivacéa are used indiscriminately, and in the
Bible the pass. forms are by far the more common. In the
N. T. the aor. middle amexpivaro is found only in Mt.
OG 7a YS INOS othe GILF IElS tit, GS semi HE dino ve ive
19; xii. 23[RGLTr mrg.]; Acts iii. 12; in the great
majority of places amexpi6n is used; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B.
51 (44)]. 1. to give an answer to a question proposed,
to answer; a. simply: xadés, Mk. xii. 28; vouveyds, 34;
épOas, Lk. x. 28; mpds tt, Mt. xxvii. 14. b. with ace.:
Adyov, Mt. xxii. 46 ; oddev, Mt. xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; xv.
4 sq. oc. with dat. ete.: vi éxdore, Col. iv. 6; together
with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 113 vi.
7, 68, ete.; the dat. omitted: Jn. vii. 46; viii. 19, 49, ete.
mpos twa, Acts xxv.16. joined with davat, or héyeuv, or
eiveiv, in the form of a ptep., as dmoxpibels etme or ey
or Aéeyee: Mt. iv. 4; viii. 8; xv. 13; Lk.ix. 195 xiii. 2;
Mk. x. 3, etc.; or amexpidn Aéyov: Mt. xxv. 9, 37, 44;
Lk. iv.4[RGL]; viii.50[RGTr mrg. br.]; Jn. i. 26;
x. 33 [Rec.]; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says
dmexpiOn Kai ete: Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 19; iv. 13; vii. 16, 20
[R G], 52, ete. d. foll. by the inf.: Lk. xx. 7; foll. by
the ace. with inf.: Acts xxv. 4; foll. by éru: Acts xxv. 16.
2. In imitation of the Hebr. nay (Gesenius, Thesaur.
ii. p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something
has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks
refer [W. 19]: Mt. xi. 25; xii. 38; xv. 15; xvil. 4; xxii.
ieexviie dit Mik. ax. 5)[6 DP Tr Wi 3 3245 x14 ei.
35; Lk. xiv. 3; Jn. ii. 18; v.17; Acts iii. 12; Rev. vii.
13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10,
iii. 4, etc.; 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Macc. xv. 14.)
[Comp.: avt-arroxpivopat. |
dmré-Kpiris, -ews, 7, (amoKpivopat, See amoxpive), a reply-
ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9.
(From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., andj
Hdt. down.) *
atro-kpvmrw : 1 aor. amexpua; pf. pass. ptep. amoxexpup-
pevos; a. tohide: ri, Mt. xxv. 18 (LT Tr WH eéxpuwe).
b. Pass. in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : codia,
1 Co. ii. 7; puarnprov, Col. i. 26 (opp. to pavepovo Gat) ;
Grro-Kpivw : [Pass., 1 aor. awexpiény; 1 fut. aroxpiOnoo- | with the addition of ev 7@ Oca, Eph. iii. 9; ri amo tuvos,
atréKpuos 64
Lk. x. 21; Mt. xi. 25 (L T Tr WH ékpuwas), in imitation
of the Hebr. 1, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10; exviii. (cxix.)
19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; cf. xpvmro, [B. 149 (130);
189 (163); W. 227 (213)]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
amékpudos,-ov, (aroxpUmrw), hidden, secreted : Mk. iv. 22;
Lk. viii. 17. stored up: Col. ii. 8. (Dan. xi. 43 [Theod. ];
Is. xlv.3; 1 Macc. i. 23; Xen., Eur.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
the word, Col. 1. c., and Ign. i. 851 sq.].)*
drro-xrelvw, and Aeol. -«revyw (Mt. x. 28 LT Tr; Mk.
98.5 CL. te Le xn be Drs 2- Cosine LT De:
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507 sq.; [7d/. Proleg. p. 79]; W.
83 (79); [B. 61 (54) ]), droxréva (Grsb. in Mt. x. 28; Lk.
xii. 4), droxraivw (Lehm. in 2 Co. iii. 6; Rev. xiii. 10),
aroxrévvuvtes (Mk. xii. 5 WH); fut. aoxrev@; 1 aor.
aréxrewa; Pass., pres. inf. dmoxrévveoOa (Rev. vi. 11
GLT Tr WH); 1 aor. dmexravOnv (Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii.
227; W.1.c.; [B. 41 (35 sq.)]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1.
prop. to kill in any way whatever, (aro i. e. so as to put
out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill of], Germ. abschlach-
ten): Mt. xvi. 215; xxii. 6; Mk. vi. 19; ix. 31; Jn. v.18;
viii. 22; Acts iii. 15; Rev. ii. 13, and very often ; [aoxr.
ev Oavarw, Rev. ii. 233; vi. 8, ef. B. 184 (159); W. 339
(319)]. to destroy (allow to perish): Mk. iii. 4 [yet al.
take it here absol., to kill]. 2. metaph. fo extinguish,
abolish : rhv €xOpav, Eph. ii. 16 ; to inflict moral death, Ro.
vii. 11 (see droOmmoxa, II. 2) ; to deprive of spiritual life
and procure eternal misery, 2 Co. iii. 6 [Lehm. azroxraives ;
see above].
daro-Kvéw, -, OF doko, (hence 3 pers. sing. pres. either
droxvei [so WH] or azoxvet, Jas. i. 15; cf. W. 88 (84);
B. 62 (54)); 1 aor. dmexinoa; (kiw, or kvéw, to be preg-
nant; cf. éykvos); fo bring forth from the womb, give
birth to: teva, Jas. i. 15; to produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace.
xv. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Plut., Leian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4;
Hdian. 1, 5, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 1, 4, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.].) *
aaro-kvAlw: fut. aroxuAiow ; 1 aor. dmrexvAcoa; pf. pass.
[3 pers. sing. amoxexvktorae Mk. xvi. 4 RG Lbut T Tr
WH avakex. |, ptep. dmoxexuAtopevos ; to roll off or away:
Mt. xxviii. 2; Mk. xvi. 3; Lk. xxiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 8, 8,
10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3;
Leian. rhet. praec. 3.) But see avaxuXio.*
Grro-AapBavw ; fut. arodAnyoua (Col. iii. 24; LT Tr
WH arodnpweobe; see AapBavw) ; 2 aor. ameXaBov ; 2 aor.
mid. areAaSounv; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to receive (from
another, azo [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5; Ellic. ibid. and Win.
De verb. comp. ete. as below]) what is due or promised
(cf. drodidwp, 2): +. viobeciay the adoption promised to
believers, Gal. iv. 5; ra dya@d cov thy good things, “ which
thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed
due to thee” (Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 13),
Lk. xvi. 25. Hence 2. to take again or back, to recover:
Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WH daBeiv]; xv. 27; and to receive
by way of retribution: Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH
txt. Ad8y); xxiii. 41; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn: 3; Col. ii. 24.
3. to take from others, take apart or aside; Mid. teva, to
take a person with one aside out of the view of others:
with the addition of ard rod dyXov kar’ idiav in Mk. vii.
aTrONAL Mt
33, (Joseph. b. j. 2, 7, 2; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 21;
‘Yordaorea drokaBov povvov, Hdt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran.
78; idta €va tev tpi@v amodaBav, App. b. civ. 5, 40).
4. to receive any one hospitably: 3 Jn. 8, where L T Tr
WH have restored tmoAapBaverv.*
darédavors, -ews, 7, (fr. awodavw to enjoy), enjoyment
(Lat. fructus): 1 ‘Tim. vi. 17 (eis amédavow to enjoy) ;
Heb. xi. 25 (duaprias aod. pleasure born of sin). (In
Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thue. down.)*
dtro-Aelrrw: [impf. aréAeurov, WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 18,
20; Tit. i.5]; 2 aor. dwédurov; (fr. Hom. down]; 1. to
leave, leave behind: one in some place, Tit. i. 5 L T Tr
WH; 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Pass. aodeimerat it remains, is
reserved: Heb. iv. 9; x. 26; foll. by acc. and inf., Heb.
iv.6. 2. to desert, forsake: a place, Jude 6.*
atro-Aetxw: [impf. dmédeyor]; to lick off, lick up: Lk.
xvi. 21 RG; cf. emdeiyo. ([ Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478];
Athen. vi. ¢. 13 p. 250 a.) *
&r-ddAvpe and amodAAvw ([dawodkAver Jn. xii. 25 T TrWH],
impv. adzoAdve Ro. xiv. 15, [ef. B. 45 (89); WH. App. p.
168 sq.]); fut. dmoA€ow and (1 Co. i. 19 aod fr. a pass.
in the O. T., where often) dmod@ (cf. W. 83 (80); [B.
64 (56) ]); laor. am@deca; to destroy; Mid., pres. aod-
Avpac; [impf. 3 pers. plur. dmwAdvvro 1 Co. x. 9 T Tr
WH]; fut. drododpar; 2 aor. dtwAopunv; (2 pf. act. ptep.
aro\wdos) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy
i. e. to put out of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to,
ruin: Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34; xvii. 27, 29; Jude 5; rip
codiay render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived,
1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) ; to kill: Mt. ii. 13;
xii. 14; Mk. ix. 22; xi. 18; Jn. x. 10, etce.; contextually,
to declare that one must be put to death: Mt. xxvii. 20;
metaph. to devote or give over to eternal misery: Mt. x.
28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one’s conduct to cause
another to lose eternal salvation: Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to
perish, to be lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; a.
properly: Mt. viii. 25; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 33; Jn. xi. 50; 2
Pet. iii. 6; Jude 11, ete.; amodAdAvpar Awd, Lk. xv. 17; ev
payaipa, Mt. xxvi. 52; xataBaddopevor, aAd’ ovK amoddd-
pevor, 2 Co. iv. 9. B. tropically, to incur the loss of true
or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: Jn.
iii. 15 [R Lbr.], 16; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in
mind, that acc. to John’s conception eternal life begins
on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by
faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; xv. 18; 2 Pet. iii. 9.
Hence of cafépevor they to whom it belongs to partake of
salvation, and of drodAvpevor those to whom it belongs to
perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con-
trasted by Paul: 1 Co. i. 18; 2Co. ii. 15; iv. 3; 2 Th. ii.
10, (on these pres. pteps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206
(178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, to vanish away:
i) evmpéereta, Jas. i. 11; the heavens, Heb.i. 11 (fr. Ps. ci.
(cii.) 27); to perish, —of things which on being thrown
away are decomposed, as péAos Tov Ga@paros, Mt. v. 29
sq-; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in
some other way, as Bpdats, Jn. vi. 27 ; xpuaiov, 1 Pet. i. 7;
—or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve
the use for which they were designed, as of aoxoi: Mt.
» AtroAAU@v
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37. 2. to destroy i.e. to lose ;
a. prop.: Mt. x. 42; Mk. ix. 41 (roy pucOor adrov); Lk.
xv. 4, 8, 9; ix. 25; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; 2 Jn. 8, ete.
b. metaph. Christ is said to lose any one of his followers
(whom the Father has drawn to discipleship) if such a
one becomes wicked and fails of salvation: Jn. vi. 39, ef.
xviii. 9. Mid. to be lost: Opié ex ris Kepadys, Lk. xxi.
18; 0. awd ths Kepadys, Acts xxvii. 34 (Rec. wecetrat) ;
ra Aapmrpa amadeTo aro cov, Rey. xviii. 14 (Rec. amndée).
Used of sheep, straying from the flock: prop. Lk. xv. 4
(76 arodwdos, in Mt. xviii. 12 76 wAav@pevoy). Metaph.
in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people
of Israel to a flock (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 6; Ezek. xxxiv. 4,
16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left
to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal sal-
vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are
called ra mpéBata Ta adrrokwdéra Tod oikov “Iopand: Mt. x.
6; xv. 24, (Is. liii.6; 1 Pet. ii. 25); and Christ, reclaim-
ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and
is said (yreiv kal cw ew 7d amodwdds: Lk. xix. 10; Mt.
xviii. 11 Rec. [Comp.: cuv-ardddvme. |
*Aroddtvwv, -ovtos, 6, (ptep. fr. dwoAdvw), Apollyon (a
prop. name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse),
i. e. Destroyer: Rev. ix. 11; ef. ’ABaddar, [and B.D.
Hvel|-=
*AmrodAwvla, -as, 7, Apollonia, a maritime city of Mace-
- donia, about a day’s journey [acc. to the Antonine Itiner-
ary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which
Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [36 miles fur-
ther]: Acts xvii.1. [See B. D.s. v.]*
’Arroddds [ ace. to some, contr. fr. "AzoAA@vios, W. 102
(97) ; ace. to others, the o is lengthened, cf. Fick, Griech.
Personennamen, p. xxi.], gen. -o (cf. B. 20 (18) sq.; [W.
62 (61)]), accus. - (Acts xix. 1) and -dy (1 Co. iv. 6 T
ee Wik 5) Wit eae TS WH 3 ef.) Wa Appanpe lois
Kuhner i. p. 315), 6, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who
became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity,
attached to the apostle Paul: Acts xviii. 24; xix. 1; 1
Co. i. 12; iii. 4 sqq. 22; iv. 6; xvi. 12; Tit. iii. 13.*
Grrohoyeopat, -odpar; impf. aeAoyovpny (Acts xxvi. 1);
1 aor. amredoynoapny ; 1 aor. pass. inf. arodoynOnvat, in a
reflex. sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. Adyos),
prop. to speak so as to absolve (amo) one’s self, talk one’s
self off of a charge ete. ; 1. to defend one’s self, make
one’s defence: absol., Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foll. by
ért, Acts xxv. 8; ri, to bring forward something in de-
fence of one’s self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so
in Grk. writ. also) ; ra epi euavrod ar. either I bring for-
ward what contributes to my defence [?], or I plead my own
cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; mepi with
gen. of the thing and émi with gen. of pers., concerning a
thing before one’s tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of
the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that
I am innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in
one’s eyes [A. V. unto], Acts xix. 33; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat.
Prot. p. 359 a.; often in Leian., Plut. ; [ef. B. 172 (149)]).
2. to defend a person or a thing (so not infreq. in
proi. auth.): Ro. ii. 15 (where acc. to the context the
65
> /
aTvroAvw
deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; ra zepi
€nov, Acts xxvi. 2 (but see under 1).*
Garohoy (a, -as, 7), (See drohoyéopar), verbal defence, speech
in defence: Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7,17
(16); 2 Tim. iv. 16; with a dat. of the pers. who is to hear
the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make
good his cause: 1 Co. ix. 3; 1 Pet. iii. 15; in the same
sense 7) dod. 7 mpds twa, Acts xxii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).*
atro-Aovw : to wash off or away; in the N. T. twice in
1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6, i. p.
585 ed. Mang.]: dmedovoaade, 1 Co. vi. 113; Bamrioat kai
drddovoa Tas dpaprias cov, Acts xxii. 16. For the sin-
ner is unclean, polluted as it were by the filth of his sins.
Whoever obtains remission of sins has his sins put, so to
speak, out of God’s sight, —is cleansed from them in
the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob-
tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have
gone down into the baptismal bath [lavacrum, ef. Tit.
ili. 5; Eph. v. 26] are said dod\ovcacOa to have washed
themselves, or tas dpapt. amodovcacba to have washed
away their sins, i.e.to have been cleansed from their
sins.*
daro-AiTpwcs, -ews, 7, (fr. dmoAuTpdw signifying a. to
redeem one by paying the price, cf. Avtpov: Plut. Pomp.
24; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8; Zeph. iii.1; b. to let one go
free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a.;
Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [cf.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected
by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation
procured by the payment ofaransom; 1. prop.: méAe@v
aixpadotor, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass. in prof. writ.
where the word has as yet been noted; [add, Joseph.
antt. 12, 2,3; Diod. frag. 1. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind.;
Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in
the N. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the
death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God
and the merited penalty of sin: Ro. iii. 24; Eph. i. 7;
Col. i. 14, (cf. eEayopatw, dyopatw, Auvtpdw, etc. [and
Trench § Ixxvii.]) ; aoAvrp. Tov rapaBacewy deliverance
from the penalty of transgressions, effected through
their expiation, Heb. ix. 15, (cf. Delitzsch ad loc. and
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178); juepa arodutpaceas,
the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced
from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and
from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30; in
the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1
Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption,
i. e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we
could have none), and is to be taken in the phrase dzro-
AUrp. THs mepemomoews, Eph. i. 14, the redemption which
will come to his possession, or to the men who are God’s
own through Christ, (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; tod caparos,
deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro.
viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred
and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ
from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, ef. xviii. 7 sq.; deliverance or
release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.*
drro-Avw ; [impf. deAvov]; fut. dmodvcw; 1 aor. arre-
Avoa; Pass., pf. dmodéAvpar; 1 aor. amedvOnv; [fut. azo-
aTropaccw
AuGnoopar|; impf. mid. areAvdpuny (Acts xxviii. 25) ; used
in the N. T. only in the historical books and in Heb.
xlil. 23; to loose from, sever by loosening, undo, [see a6,
Veils 1. to set free: twa twos (so in Grk. writ. even
fr. Hom. down), to liberate one from a thing (as from a
bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (dmroA€Avoa [thou hast been loosed
i. e.] be thou free from [cf. W. § 40, 4] r7s doOeveias [LT
arort.ac0.|). 2. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ;
tTwd, a. a suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given
by a decisive answer: Mt. xv. 23; Lk. ii. 29 (‘me whom
thou hadst determined to keep on earth until I had seen
the salvation prepared for Israel, cf. vs. 26, thou art now
dismissing with my wish accomplished, and this dismis-
sion is at the same time dismission also from life’ —in ref-
erence to which dove is used in Num. xx. 29; Tob.
iii. 6; [cf. Gen. xv. 2; 2 Mace. vii. 9; Plut. consol. ad
Apoll. § 13 ef. 11 fin.]); [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid de-
part, send away: Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq.; xv. 32, 39; Mk. vi.
36,45; viii. 3, 9; Lk. viii. 38; ix. 12; xiv. 4; Acts xiii. 3;
xix. 41 (rv éxxAnoiav) ; pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. to
let go free, torelease; a. acaptive, i. e. to loose his bonds
and bid him depart, to give him liberty to depart: Lk.
xxii. 68 [R GL Tr in br.]; xxiii. 22; Jn. xix. 10; Acts
xvi. 35 sq.; xxvi. 32 (dodehvoba edivaro [might have
been set at liberty, cf. B. 217 (187), § 139, 27¢.; W. 305
(286) i.e.] might be free; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 12 [see 1 above,
and W. 334 (313) ]); Acts xxviii. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 23 ; aon.
ria tun to release one to one, grant him his liberty: Mt.
Exyvi 15,17, 21,96; Mk. xv16,/9, 115153 Dk xxilis (16);
17 [RL in br.], 18, 20, 25; (Jn. xviii. 39]. b. to acquit
one accused of a crime and set him at liberty: Jn. xix.
12; Actsiii.13. c. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave
to depart: Acts iv. 21,23; v.40; xvii.9. d. to release a
debtor, i. e. not to press one’s claim against him, to remit
his debt: Mt. xviii. 27; metaph. to pardon another his
offences against me: Lk. vi. 37, (ris duaprias dmodvec Oat,
2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as arodve tiv
yuvaixa to dismiss from the house, to repudiate: Mt. i.
19; v. 31 sq.; xix. 3, 7-9; Mk. x. 2, 4, 11; Lk. xvi. 18;
[1 Esdr. ix. 36]; and improperly a wife deserting her
husband is said rév dvdpa avodvew in Mk. x. 12 [ef. Diod.
12, 18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to
historic accuracy [yet cf. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 10], makes
Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage,
acc. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [ reff.
in Mey. ad1.]) ; (cf. nbvwi, Jer. iii. 8; Deut. xxi. 14 ; xxii.
195,29). 5. Mid. droAvopua, prop. to send one’s self
away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re-
turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).*
dro-pacow: (udccw to touch with the hands, handle,
work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. dropdo-
copua to wipe one’s self off, to wipe off for one’s self: Tov
kovoprov wpiv, Lk. x. 11. (In Grk. writ. fr. Arstph.
down.) *
Grro-vépn.w ; (véuw to dispense a portion, to distribute), to
assign, portion out, (amd as in drobidop [q. v., cf. ad, V.]):
Twi Te Viz. Tyunv, showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (so Hdian.
1, 8,13 THv Tuy Kal THY evxyapiotiay, Joseph. antt. 1, 7,
66
aTropp (7TTw
1; 7@ émiokér@ Tacav evrporny, Ignat. ad Magnes. 3;
first found in [Simon. 97 in Anthol. Pal. 7, 253, 2 (vol. i.
p- 64 ed. Jacobs)]; Pind. Isthm. 2, 68; often in Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.).*
atro-virrrw : to wash off; 1 aor. mid. amevuaynv; in
mid. to wash one’s self off, to wash off for one’s self: tas
xetpas, Mt. xxvii. 24, ef. Deut. xxi. 6 sq. (The earlier
Greeks say drovi¢w — but with fut. dmoviyo, 1 aor. dré-
vuwa; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [30 (17)]; Plut.
Phoc. 18; Athen. iv. ¢. 31 p. 149 ¢., arovimra, although
this is found [but in the mid.] even in Hom. Od. 18,
1795)"
aro-minrw: 2 aor. aremecov; [(cf. mint); fr. Hom.
down]; to fall off, slip down from: Acts ix. 18 [W. § 52,
450 ani].*
dmro-Trhavaw, -@; 1 aor. pass. drenAavnbnv; to cause to
go astray, trop. to lead away from the truth to error: tuva,
Mk. xiii. 22; pass. to go astray, stray away from: amd tips
miotews, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ({Hippoer.]; Plat. Ax. p. 369 d.;
Polyb. 3, 57,4; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
aro-rA€w ; 1 aor. dwemdevoa; [fr. Hom. down]; to sail
away, depart by ship, set sail: Acts xiii. 4; xiv. 26; xx.
153 sorqpie, IS
dtro-rhtve : [1 aor. amémAvva (?)]; to wash off: Lk. v. 2
(where L Tr WH txt. étAvvov, TWH mre. -av, for R G
arémhuvav [possibly an impf. form, ef. B. 40 (35);
Soph. Glossary, ete. p. 90]). (Hom. Od. 6, 95; Plat.,
Plut., and subseq. writ.; Sept. 2S. xix. 24, [cf. Jer. ii. 22,
iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].)*
drro-mviyo: 1 aor. anémméa; 2 aor. pass. amemviyny;
(a6 as in droxteivw q. v. [cf. to choke off ]); to choke:
Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mrg. émméav) ; Lk. viii. 7 (of seed over-
laid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with
water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i.e. p.
883, 28 ete.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).*
dmropéw, -@: impf. 3 pers. sing. nmdpet (Mk. vi. 20 TWH
Tr mrg.) ; [pres. mid. dopodpatr] ; to be dropos (fr. a priv.
and mépos a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e.
to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting,
to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way
to turn; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) modda nrdper he
was in perplexity about many things or much perplexed
(ef. Thue. 5, 40,3; Xen. Hell. 6, 1,4; Hdt. 3,4; 4,179;
Aristot. meteorolog. 1, 1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to be at a loss
with one’s self, be in doubt; notto know how to decide or
what to do, to be perplexed: absol. 2 Co. iv. 8; epi tevos,
Lk. xxiv.4 LT Tr WH; zepi rivos rus eyes, Jn. xiii. 22 ;
drropovpat ev ipiv I am perplexed about you, I know not
how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal.
iv. 20; aropovpevos éyw ets [T Tr WH om. eis] riv wepi
rovrov [-rav LT Tr WH] ¢yrnow I being perplexed how
to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or
these things], Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt.
down; often also in Sept.) [Comp.: &:-, e£-amropéw. | *
aropta, -as, 4, (dropew, q- V-), the state of one who is
dtropos, perplexity: Lk. xxi. 25. (Often in Grk. writ. fr.
[ Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.) *
dro-ppirrw: 1 aor. areppiya [T WH write with one p;
arroppavifw
parents, (so Aeschyl. choéph. 247 (249)) ; hence metaph.
dnoppavabertes ad’ tpev bereft of your intercourse and
society, 1 Th. ii. 17 [here Rec! (by mistake) aropan-
abevtes |.*
daro-okevatw: 1 aor. mid. drecxevacaunv; (oKevatw to
prepare, provide, fr. cxedos a utensil), to carry off goods
and chattels; to pack up and carry off; wid. to carry off
one’s personal property or provide for its carrying away,
(Polyb. 4, 81, 11; Diod. 13, 91; Dion. Hal. 9, 23, etc.) :
arooxevacduevor having collected and removed our bag-
gage, Acts xxi. 15; but LT Tr WH read émcxevacdpe-
vot (q- V.)-*
arro-cKiacpa, -ros, Td, (oxiatw, fr. oxia), a shade cast by
one object upon another, a shadow: tpomns amookiacpa
shadow caused by revolution, Jas.i.17. Cf. amavyacpa.*
Gtro-c Td, -@ ; 1 aor. améoraca; | aor. pass. ameoracOny ;
to draw off, tear away: r. waxatpav to draw one’s sword, Mt.
xxvi. 51 (€xomav T. pax. (or pouaiay), 1S. xvii. 51 [ Alex.
ete.]; omav, 1 Chr. xi. 11; Mk. xiv. 47); amoomav rovs
pabntas oricw €avtav to draw away the disciples to their
own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. h. 13, 32).
Pass. reflexively : droomacOevtes am’ airay having torn
ourselves from the embrace of our friends, Acts xxi. 1;
aneondobn aw avrey he parted, tore himself, from them
about a stone’s cast, Lk. xxii. 41; cf. Meyer ad loc. (In
prof. auth. fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down.) *
droctac ia, -as, 7, (apiorapuar), a falling away, defection,
apostasy; in the Bible sc. from the true religion: Acts
Sod ie 2 he aos a ( idoshs xxiis 22); }2 Chryxxixay 19);
Xxxili. 19]; Jer. ii. 19; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl.; 1 Macc.
ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say améaraois ; see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 528; [W. 24].*
drortactov, -ov, 7d, very seldom in native Grk. writ.,
defection, of a freedman from his patron, Dem. 35, 48
[940, 16]; in the Bible 1. divorce, repudiation: Mt.
xix. 7; Mk. x. 4 (BiBXiov drooraciov, equiv. to 19D
nm book or bill of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1, 3; [Is.1. 1;
Jer. iii. 8]). 2. a bill of divorce: Mt.v. 31. Grotius
ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc., give a copy
of one.*
dro-creyatw: 1 aor. areoréyaca; (creyala, fr. oréyn) 3
to uncover, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, with his
hearers, was in the trep@ov q. v., and it was the roof of
this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus
are said to have ‘dug out’; [cf. B.D. s. v. House, p.
1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303; 8, 3, 30, p. 542.) *
aro-oTeAAw; fut. drooreA@; 1 aor. améoreida; pf. are-
oraAka, [3 pers. plur. améoradkay Acts xvi. 36 L T Tr WH
(see yivoua init.) ; Pass., pres. drooreAAopuat |; pf. dméorad-
pat; 2 aor. admeoraAnv; [fr. Soph. down]; prop. to send
off, sena awuy ; 1. to order (one) to go to a place ap-
fon
see P,p]; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw away, cast down; re-
flexively, to cast one’s self down: Acts xxvii. 43 [R.V. cast
themselves overboard]. (So in Leian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ;
[Chariton 3, 5, see D’Orville ad loc.]; cf. W. 251 (236); | ¢
[B. 145 (127)].)*
dr-ophavitw: [1 aor. pass. ptcp. droppanobeis |; (fr.
dphavos bereft, and azo se. twos), to bereave of a parent or
7 aTrooTEAAw
pointed; a. either persons sent with commissions,
or things intended for some one. So, very frequently,
Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix.
37; Lk. x.16; Jn. v. 36, ete. he, too, is said to have sent
his apostles, i.e. to have appointed them: Mk. vi. 7; Mt.
x.16; Lk. xxii. 35; Jn. xx. 21, etc. messengers are sent:
Lk. vii. 3; ix. 52; x. 1; servants, Mk. vi. 27; xii. 2; Mt.
9D
32;
xxi. 36; xxii. 3; an embassy, Lk. xiv. xix. 143; an-
gels, Mk. xiii. 27; Mt. xxiv. 31, ete. Things are said
to be sent, which are ordered to be led away or con-
veyed to any one, as Mt. xxi. 3; Mk. xi. 33 70 Opémavov
i.e. reapers, Mk. iv. 29 [al. take droaréAXw here of
the “putting forth” of the sickle, i.e. of the act of reap-
ing ; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13 ; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. v. réuma, b.) J;
tov Aoyov, Acts x. 36; xiii. 26 (LT Tr WH é£azeordan) ;
TH emayyeXiav (equiv. to Td éemnyyeApevor, i. e. the prom-
ised Holy Spirit) ef’ tpas, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WH é€a-
moaTe Aw]; Ti Ova xerpos Tuvos, after the Hebr. 173, Acts
xi. 30. b. The Place of the sending is specified : doar.
els Tuva torov, Mt. xx. 2; Lk. i. 26; Acts vii. 34; x. 8;
xix. 22; 2 Tim. iv. 12; Rev. v. 6, ete. God sent Jesus els
rov koopov: Jn. iii, 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. eds
[unto i.e.] among: Mt. xv. 24; Lk. xi.49; Acts [ xxii. 21
WH mrg.]; xxvi. 17; [év (by a pregnant or a Lat. con-
struction) cf. W. £50, 4; B. 329 (283): Mt. x. 16; Lk.
x. 33 yet see 1 a. above]; dzicw tivds, Lk. xix. 143 umpo-
obev twos, Jn. iii. 28; and mpd mpocwmov tivds, after
the Hebr. =359, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10;
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; x. 1. mpés teva, to one: Mt. xxi.
34, 37; Mk. xii. 2 sq.; Lk. vii. 3, 20; Jn. v. 33; Acts
viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, ete. Whence,or by or from
whom, one is sent: tmd rod deov, Lk. i. 26 (T Tr
WH azo); mapa Geov, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9); aad with gen.
of pers., from the house of any one: Acts x. 17 [T WH
Tr mrg. i776], 21 Rec.; é« with gen. of place: Jn. i. 19.
ce. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin.
following: Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxii. 3; Lk.i.19; iv. 18 (Is.
Ixi. 1, [on the pf. cf. W. 272 (255); B. 197 (471)]); LE.
ix. 2; Jn. iv. 38; 1Co.i.17; Rev. xxii. 6. [foll. by eis for.
eis Scaxoviav, Heb. i. 14. foll. by va: Mk. xii. 2,13; Lk.
xx lO} 202 Inaie 19); i175) vil 32> 1 Incadve 9h [oll by,
dros: Actsix.17.] foll. by an acc. withinf.: Acts v. 21.
foll. by tua with a pred. ace. : Acts ili. 26 (etAoyotvra
tpas to confer God’s blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176)
sqq-]) ; Acts vii. 35 (apyovra, to be aruler); 1 Jn. iv. 10.
d. dmooréd\Newv by itself, without an ace. [ef. W. 594
(552); B. 146 (128)]: as dmooréAXew mpds tiva, JN. V
33; with the addition of the ptcp. A€yar, A€eyouaa, AE
yovres, to say through a messenger : Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. iii.
31 [here @evoirres aitév R G, xadoivres ait. L T Tr
WH]; Jn. xi. 3; Acts xiii. 15; [xxi. 25 repli rév memoreu-
kétov €Ovav nueis ameoreiAauev (L Tr txt. WH txt.) xpl-
vavres ete. we sent word, giving judgment, ete.]. When
one accomplished anything through a messenger, it is ex-
pressed thus: dmootei\as or wéuWas he did so and so; as,
amooteidas avei\e, Mt. ii. 16; Mk. vi. 17; Acts vil. 14;
Rev. i. 1; (so also the Greeks, as Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 6 wéuyas
jpora, Plut. de liber. educ. ¢. 14 mépypas aveide tov Ocd-
aTroaTepéw 68
xptrov; and Sept. 2 K. vi. 13 amooreitas Anwoua adrov).
2. to send away i. e. to dismiss; a. to allow one to de-
part: twa ev apéoet, that he may be in a state of liberty,
Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. lviii. 6). b. to order one to depart,
send off: Mk. viii. 26; rwa xevdv, Mk. xii. 3. c. to drive
away: Mk. v.10. [Comp.: é§-, cuv-arooré\dw. SYN. see
méeurra, fin. |
dmo-orepéw, -@; 1 aor. aneorépnoa; [Pass., pres. dmo-
orepovpat|; pf. ptep. ameorepypevos ; to defraud, rob, de-
spoil: absol., Mk. x. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; dAAnAouvs to with-
hold themselves from one another, of those who mutually
deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5. Mid. to allow
one’s self to be defrauded [W. § 38, 3]: 1 Co. vi. 7; Tuva
twos (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a thing; pass.
areotepnpevot THs GAnbeias, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [W. 196 (185); B.
158 (138)]; ri to defraud ofa thing, to withdraw or keep
back a thing by fraud: pass. puoOos ameotepnpevos, Jas.
v. 4 (T Tr WH dgvorepnpevos, see apuarepew ; [ cf. also
a6, II. 2d. bb. p. 59°]), (Deut. xxiv. 14 [(16) Alex.];
Mal. iii. 5).*
d1ro-7TOAN, -7S, 7, (aToTTEhA®) ; 1. a sending away:
Tyod€ovtos eis StxeAiavy, Plut. Timol. 1, etc.; of the
sending off of a fleet, Thue. 8,9; also of consuls with an
army, i. e. of an expedition, Polyb. 26, 7, 1. 2. a send-
ing away i. e. dismission, release: Sept. Eccl. viii. 8.
3. a thing sent, esp of gifts: 1 K. ix. 16 [Alex.]; 1 Macc.
ii. 18 ete. ef. Grimm ad loc. 4. in the N. T. the office
and dignity of the apostles of Christ, (Vulg.. apostolatus),
apostolate, apostleship: Acts i.25; Ro. i.5; 1 Co. ix. 2;
Gal. ii. 8.*
Gmréc-ToNos, -ov, 0; 1. a delegate, messenger, one sent
forth with orders, (Hdt. 1, 21; 5, 38; for mow in 1 K. xiv.
6 [ Alex.]; rabbin. m°9w) : Jn. xiii. 16 (where 6 dméor. and
6 m€u\as avrov are contrasted) ; foll. by a gen., as rap éek-
kAnovav, 2 Co. viii. 23; Phil. ii. 25; ardor. rijs duodoyias
npev the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, God’s chief
messenger, who has brought the kAno1s émoupavios, as
compared with Moses, whom the Jews confess, Heb. iii.
iff 2. Specially applied to the twelve disciples whom
Christ selected, out of the multitude of his adherents, to
be his constant companions and the heralds to proclaim to
men the kingdom of God: Mt. x. 1-4; Lk. vi. 13; Acts i.
26; Rev. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gospel
and Epistlesof John; [{“the word dméarodos occurs 79
times in the N. T., and of these 68 instances are in St.
Luke and St. Paul.” Bp. Lghtft.]. With these apostles
Paul claimed equality, because through a heavenly inter-
vention he had been appointed by the ascended Christ
himself to preach the gospel ameng the Gentiles, and
owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man’s
instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself,
and moreover had evinced his apostolic qualifications by
many signal proofs: Gal. i. 1, 11 sq.; ii. 8; 1 Co.i. 17;
ix. 1 sq.; xv. 8-10; 2 Co. iii. 2sqq.; xii. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 7;
2 Tim. i. 11, cf. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul,
apostles surpassed as well the various other orders of
Christian teachers (cf. diSdcxados, evayyedtorns, mpo-
gnrns), as also the rest of those on whom the special
aTroauvaywyos
gifts (cf. ydpropa) of the Holy Spirit had been bestowed,
by receiving a richer and more copious conferment of
the Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28sq.; Eph.iv.11. Certain false
teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves
the name and authority of apostles of Christ: 2 Co. xi.
513.5 DRG vaniiene: 3. Ina broader sense the name is
transferred to other eminent Christian teachers; as
Barnabas, Acts xiv. 14, and perhaps also Timothy and
Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), ef. too Ro. xvi. 7 (?). But in
Lk. xi. 49; Eph. iii. 5; Rev. xviii. 20, ‘ apostles’ is to be
taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of
the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 92-101; Har-
nack on ‘Teaching’ ete. 11, 3; ef BB.DD. s. v.]
drocropari{a ; (cropari¢w —not extant —from ordpa) ;
prop. to speak amd orépatos, (cf. aroarnbila) ; 1. to
recite from memory: Themist. or. 20 p. 238 ed. Hard. ;
to repeat to a pupil (anything) for him to commit to mem-
ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 ¢., 277 a.; used of a Sibyl
prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. to ply with questions,
catechize, and so to entice to [off-hand] answers: rwa, Lk.
Lo
daro-oTpédw ; fut. drootpeya ; 1 aor. dméatpeia; 2 aor.
pass. ameotpadny; [pres. mid. amoorpéedopa; fr. Hom.
down]; 1. to turn away : twa or ti am twos, 2'Tim. iv.
4 (tv axonv amd THs adnOeias) ; to remove anything from
any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. lix. 20); amoorpédpeuy riva simply,
to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to
defection, [A. V. pervert], Lk. xxiii. 14. 2. to turn
back, return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put back thy
sword into its sheath); Mt. xxvii. 3, of Judas bringing
back the shekels, where T Tr WH éorpewe, [cf. Test. xii.
Patr: test. Jos. $17]. (Inthe same sense for 2 wm, Gen.
Kiv. 16; xxviii. 155 xlili. 11 (12), 20:(21),ete:; Bar.
8; ii. 34, ete.) 3. intrans. to turn one’s self away, turn
back, return: amb tev rovnpioy, Acts iii. 26, cf. 19, (amo
dpaprias, Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.]; to return from
a place, Gen. xviii. 33 ; 1 Mace. xi. 54, ete.; [see Kneucker
on Bar. i. 13]; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 12); cf. Meyer on Acts
l. c.; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning
away every one of you, ete.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor.
pass., to turn one’s self away from, with ace. of the obj.
(cf. [Jelf § 548 obs. 1; Kriig. § 47, 23,1]; B.192 (166));
to reject, refuse: twa, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; thy adn-
Gecav, Tit. i. 14; in the sense of deserting, twa, 2 ‘Vim. i. 15.*
dmro-arvyéw, -@; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro.
xii. 9; (Hdt.2, 473/06;\ 1295) Soph.) Hur., fal). “The
word is fully discussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes
the dwo- as expressive of separation (cf. Lat. re for-
midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see azd, V.) ].*
dmroruvaywyos, -ov, (cuvaywyn, q. V-), excluded from the
sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, [A. V.
put out of the synagogue]: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2.
Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with
Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in
doubt ; cf. Win. [or Riehm] R W B. s. v. Bann ; Wieseler
on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle in
Schaff’s Lange’s Romans pp. 304-306; cf. B. D. s. v.
Excommunication]. (Not found in prof. auth.)*
aTroTadgaw
Gro-racow: to set apart, to separate; in the N. 'T. only
in Mid. amordogopa; 1 aor. ameraEdpny; 1. prop. to
separate one’s self, withdraw one’s self from any one, i.e.
to take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [ete.]) :
mui, Mk. vi. 46; Lk. ix. 61; Acts xviii. 18, 21 [here L T
Tr om. the dat.]; 2 Co. ii. 13. (That the early Grk.
writ. never so used the word, but said aomd¢ea ai twa, is
shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq.; [ef. W. 23 (22) ;
B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: rwi,
Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph. antt. 11, 6,8; Phil. alleg.
iii. § 48; rais rod Biov ppovrict, Euseb. h. e. 2,17, 5; [ro
Bie, Ignat. ad Philadelph. 11, 1; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2,
9; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor.6, 4 and 5 where see Gebh. and
Harn. for other exx., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
Garo-rehéw, -@ ; [1 aor. pass. ptcp. dmoredecGeis |; to per-
fect; to bring quite to an end: iacers, accomplish, Lk. xiii.
32 (LT Tr WH for R G émured@) ; 7 Gwaptia amorede-
oOcioa having come to maturity, Jas.i.15. (Hdt., Xen.,
Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
Garo-rlOnpr: 2 aor. mid. aredéuny; [fr. Hom. down]; to
put off or aside; in the N. T. only mid. to put off from
one’s self: ra tuatia, Acts vii. 58 ; [to lay up or away, év TH
gvdaky (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L T Tr WH (so eis puda-
rnv, Lev. xxiv. 12; Num. xv. 34; 2 Chr. xviii. 26; Polyb.
24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said
to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces :
as ra €pya tov oxorous, Ro. xiii. 12 ; — Eph. iv. 22 [cf. W.
347 (325); B. 274 (236) ], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet.
ii. 1; Heb. xii. 15 (rv dpyny, Plut. Coriol. 19; rév mdov-
Tov, THv padakiap, ete. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; 7. édkevOepiav
k. mappnoiay, ibid. 9, etc.).*
dro-tiwacow; 1 aor. dmeriva€a; [1 aor. mid. ptep. dazo-
twagédyevos, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.]; to shake off: Lk. ix.
5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1 S. x..2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch.
253; [dmorwax67, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kiihn].) *
a@ro-rivw and dzo-ria: fut. droricw; (azo as in amobi-
Swpt [cf. also do, V.]), to pay off; repay: Philem. 19.
(Often in Sept. for bow’; in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) *
daro-roApdw, -@ ; prop. to be bold of one’s self (amo [q. Vv.
V.]), i. e. to assume boldness, make bold: Ro. x. 20; ef.
Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p.15. (Occasionally in
Thuc., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *
drotopta, -as, 7, (the nature of that which is dmdropos,
cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough; fr. do-
Téuv@), prop. sharpness, (differing fr. dmroropn a cutting
off, a segment); severity, roughness, rigor: Ro. xi. 22
(where opp. to ypyororns, as in Plut. de lib. edue. c. 18
to mpaorns, in Dion. Hal. 8, 61 to 76 éemerkés, and in Diod.
p- 591 [excpt. Ixxxiii. (frag. ]. 32, 27, 3 Dind.)] to qpe-
porns).*
Grorépws, adv., (cf. dmorouia); a. abruptly, precipi-
tously. b. trop. sharpiy, severely, [cf. our curtly]: Tit. i.
13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. dmorouos cf. Grimm on
Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20,
Bae vie’ &, 10s xi. 109 xii. 9, xvii? 15; refers to tthe
similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim.
27; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Val. Max. 2, 7,
14, ete.; see also Polyb. 17, 11, 2; Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 1].*
69
aTroxpnats
daro-rpérw : [fr. Hom. down]; to turn away; Mid. [pres.
amotpemopat, impv. drorpérov] to turn one’s self away
Jrom, to shun, avoid: twa or ri (see drootpedw sub fin.),
2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33; Aeschyl. Sept. 1060; Eur.
Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 815», 18; Polyb.
al.].)*
aar-ovela, -as, 7, (ameivar), absence: Phil. ii. 12.
Aeschyl. down. | *
Garo-pépw : 1 aor. dmnveyka; 2 aor. inf. dmeveyxeiv; Pass.,
[pres. inf. aropéper@ac}; 1 aor. inf. ameveyOqva; [fr.
Hom. down]; éo carry off, take away: twvd, with the idea
of violence included, Mk. xv. 1; eis rézov tia, Rev. xvii.
3; xxi. 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring away
(Lat. defero): ri eis with ace. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3; rt
amo Twos eri Twa, With pass., Acts xix. 12 (LT Tr WH
for Rec. émupeperba).*
drro-pevyw [ptcp. in 2 Pet. ii. 18LT Tr WH; W. 342
(321)]; 2 aor. amepvyov; [fr. (Hom.) batrach. 42, 47
down]; to flee from, escape; with acc., 2 Pet. ii. 18
(where L T wrongly put a comma after amo. [W. 529
(492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158
(138) 5 Wo§ 52; 451 e:],; 2 Petia
aaro-beyyouar; 1 aor. amepbeyEdunv; to speak out,
speak forth, pronounce, not a word of every-day speech,
but one “belonging to dignified and elevated discourse,
like the Lat. profari, pronuntiare; properly it has the
force of to utter or declare one’s self, give one’s opinion,
(einen Ausspruch thun), and is used not only of prophets
(see Kypke on Acts ii. 4,— adding from the Sept. Ezek.
xiii. 9; Mic. v. 12; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men
and philosophers (Diog. Laért. 1,63; 73; 79; whose
pointed sayings the Greeks call drop6éypara, Cic. off. 1,
29)”; [see POeyyouat]. Accordingly, “it is used of the
utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus-
trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the
Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14; and also of the disclosures
made by Paul to [before] king Agrippa concerning the
dmokaduyis kupiov that had been given him, Acts xxvi.
25.” Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16.*
daro-opritopat; (poprif{w to load; dpros a load), to
disburden one’s self; ti, to lay down a load, unlade, dis-
charge: tov yopuov, of a ship, Acts xxi. 3; cf. Meyer and
De Wette ad loc.; W. 349 (328) sq. (Elsewhere also
used of sailors lightening ship during a storm in order to
avoid shipwreck: Philo de praem. et poen. § 5 KuBep-
UNTNS, XEypwovov emvywopevav, aropoprifera ; Athen. 2, 5,
p- 37 c. sq. where it occurs twice.) *
amré-xX pots, -ews, 7, (dmoxpdopzat to use to the full, to
abuse), abuse, misuse: Col. ii. 22 & €orw mavra eis pOopav
TH amroxpnoe “all which (i.e. things forbidden) tend to
destruction (bring destruction) by abuse”; Paul says
this from the standpoint of the false teachers, who in
any use of those things whatever saw an “abuse,” i.e. a
blameworthy use. In opposition to those who treat the
clause as parenthetical and understand droxpnots to
mean consumption by use (a being used up, as in Plut.
moral. p. 267 f. [quaest. Rom. 18]), so that the words do
not give the sentiment of the false teachers but Paul’s
[From
aToYywpew 70
judgement of it, very similar to that set forth in Mt. xv.
17; 1 Co. vi. 13, cf. De Wette ad loc. [But see Meyer,
Ellicott, Lightfoot. *
Garo-xwpéw, -@; 1 aor. amexopnoa; [fr. Thuc. down];
to go away, depart: @-6 twos, Mt. vii. 23; Lk. ix. 39;
Acts xiii. 13; [absol. Lk. xx. 20 Tr mrg.].*
drro-xwpifw: [1 aor. pass. dmexpicOnv|; to separate,
sever, (often in Plato) ; to part asunder: pass. 6 ovpavds
arexwpicbn, Rev. vi. 14; reflexively, to separate one’s
self, depart from: dmoxwpicOjvat adtovs am addAndov, Acts
XVeogse
arro-pixw; to breathe out life, expire; to faint or swoon
away: Lk. xxi. 26. (So Thue. 1, 134; Bion 1, 9, al.;
4 Macc. xv. 18.)*
"Amos, -ov, 6, Appius, a Roman praenomen; ’Amziou
gpopov Appii Forum (Cic. ad Att. 2,10; Hor. sat. 1, 5,
3), [R. V. The Market of Appius], the name of a town
in Italy, situated 43 Roman miles from Rome on the
Appian way, — (this road was paved with square [(?)
polygonal] stone by the censor Appius Claudius Caecus,
B. C. 312, and led through the porta Capena to Capua,
and thence as far as Brundisium) : Acts xxviii. 15. [Cf.
BB.DD.]*
d-rpéc-tTos, -ov, (mpoceva to go to), wnapproachable, in-
accessible: pas ampéatrov, 1 Tim. vi. 16. (Polyb., Diod.,
[Strabo], Philo, Leian., Plut.; @éyyos ampéatrov, Tatian
c. 20; dd€a [pas], Chrys. [vi. 66 ed. Montf.] on Is.
Wi-.25)*
dmpdoKotros, -ov, (mpookdrT@, q.- V- ) ; 1. actively,
having nothing for one to strike against; not causing to
stumble; a. prop.: 686s, a smooth road, Sir. xxxv.
(xxxii.) 21. b. metaph. not leading others into sin by
one’s mode of life: 1 Co. x. 32. 2. passively, a. not
striking against or stumbling; metaph. not led into sin;
blameless: Phil. i. 10 (joined with eiAckpwets). b. with-
out offence: ovveidnots, not troubled and distressed by a
consciousness of sin, Acts xxiv. 16. (Not found in prof.
auth. [exec. Sext. Emp. 1, 195 (p. 644, 13 Bekk.) ].)*
arporwmoAqmrws [-Anumtws LT Tr WH; cf. reff. s. v.
M, »|, a word of Hellenistic origin, (a priv. and mpoce-
moArmTns, q. V.), without respect of persons, i.e. impar-
tially: 1 Pet. i. 17, (Ep. of Barn. 4, 12; [Clem. Rom. 1
Cor.1,3]). (The adj. dmpoowméAnrros occurs here and
there in eccl. writ.) *
G-wrairros, -ov, (rain, q. v-), not stumbling, standing
Jirm, exempt from falling, (prop., of a horse, Xen. de re
eq. 1,6); metaph.: Jude 24. [Cf. W. 97 (92); B. 42
(37).]*
Gartw; 1 aor. ptep. das; (cf. Lat. apto, Germ. heften) ;
[fr. Hom. down]; 1. prop. to fasten to, make adhere
to; hence, spec. to fasten fire to a thing, to kindle, set on
Jire, (often so in Attic) : Avxvov, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33; xv.
8, (Arstph. nub. 57; Theophr. char. 20 (18); Joseph.
antt. 4, 3,4); mip, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WH wepe
aWavrev |; tupav, Acts xxviii. 2 LT Tr WH. 2. Mid.,
[pres. drropac]; impf. yrrounv [Mk. vi. 56 RG Tr mre.];
1 aor. nWadpnv; in Sept. generally for 3, 3°37; prop.
to fasten one’s self to, adhere to, cling to, (Hom. Il. 8, 67);
aT@Xela
a. to touch, foll. by the obj. in gen. [W. § 30, 8c.; B. 167
(146); ef. Donaldson p. 483]: Mt. viii. 3; Mk. iii. 10;
vil. 33; vill. 22, ete.; Lk. xviii. 15; xxii. 51,— very
often in Mt., Mk. and Lk. In Jn. xx. 17, py pov drrov is
to be explained thus: Do not handle me to see whether
Tam still clothed with a body ; there is no need of such
an examination, “for not yet” ete.; cf. Baumg.- Crusius and
Meyer ad loc. [as given by Hackett in Bib. Sacr. for
1868, p. 779 sq., or B. D. Am. ed. p. 1813 sq.]. b. yuvat-
kos, of carnal intercourse with a woman, or cohabitation,
1 Co. vii. 1, like the Lat. tangere, Hor. sat. 1, 2,54; Ter.
Heaut. 4, 4,15, and the Hebr. 3733, Gen. xx. 6; Prov. vi.
29, (Plat. de legg. viii. 840 a.; Plut. Alex. Magn. c. 21).
c. with allusion to the levitical precept dxa@aprov ja)
adntecOe, have no intercourse with the Gentiles, no fel-
lowship in their heathenish practices, 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr.
Is. lii. 11); and in the Jewish sense, px) ayn Col. ii. 21
(the things not to be touched appear to be both women
and certain kinds of food, so that celibacy and abstinence
from various kinds of food and drink are recommended ;
cf. De Wette ad loc. [but also Meyer and Bp. Lehtft.;
on the distinction between the stronger term dareaOat
(to handle?) and the more delicate @:yeiv (to touch ?) cf.
the two commentators just named and Trench § xvii. In
classic Grk. also dmreaOa is the stronger term, denoting
often to lay hold of, hold fast, appropriate; in its carnal
reference differing from @ryydvew by suggesting unlaw-
fulness. @vyydvew is used of touching by the hand as a
means of knowledge, handling for a purpose; Wndadav
signifies to feel around with the fingers or hands, esp. in
searching for something, often to grope, fumble, cf. nda-
pivda blindman’s buff. Schmidt ch. 10.]). d. to touch i.e.
assail: twos, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, ete.).
[Comp. : av-, xa6-, mept-arro. |
’Amdia, -as, 7, Apphia, name of a woman: Philem. 2.
[ Apparently a Phrygian name expressive of endearment,
cf. Suidae Lex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. "Ama: ddeAdis x.
adeddod troxdpicpa, ete. cf. ’"Ampus. See fully in Bp.
Lehtft.’s Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 306 sqq.]*
anr-w0éw, -6: to thrust away, push away, repel; in the
N. T. only Mid., pres. drwOéopar (-odpar) ; 1 aor. dtwodpny
(for which the better writ. used drewoapuny, cf. W 90 (86) ;
B. 69 (61)) 3; to thrust away from one’s self, to drive away
from one’s self, i. e. to repudiate, reject, refuse: twa, Acts
Vil. 275,393) xiii. AG Ras ad-l(sq. lees (hers
ii. 86 (37); iv. 30; vi. 19; Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 14 and often.
In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
darddeva, -as, 9, (fr. awddAvpt, q. V-); 1. actively, a
destroying, utter destruction : as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22;
Tov pvpov, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a
gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to rnpyars) ;
the putting of a man to death, Acts xxv. 16 Rec.; by
meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2
Pet. ii. 2 Ree.; but the correct reading doeAyelas was
long ago adopted here. 2. passively, a perishing, ruin,
destruction; a. in general: rd dpyvpidy cov avy cot Ein eis
am. let thy money perish with thee, Acts viii. 20 ; Buéifew
Twa eis OAeOpov x. ammAecav, with the included idea cf
tne ee
a
”
apa
misery, 1 Tim. vi. 9; aipévets am@Xeias destructive opin-
ions, 2 Pet. ii. 1; emdyew éavrois ama@)e.ay, ibid. cf. vs. 3.
b. in particular, the destruction which consists in the loss
of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those
excluded from the kingdom of God: Rey. xvii. 8, 11, ef.
xix. 20; Phil. iii.19; 2 Pet. iii. 16; opp. to 7 mepuroinows
Ths Wuyns, Heb. x. 39; to 7 (on, Mt. vii. 13; to cwrnpia,
Phil. i. 28. 6 vids THs amoXeias, a man doomed to eternal
misery (a Hebraism, see vids, 2): 2 Th. ii. 3 (of Anti-
christ) ; Jn. xvii. 12 (of Judas, the traitor) ; yucpa kpicews
kK. dmoNelas Tov aveBGv, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr.
Polyb. u. s. [but see Aristot. probl. 17, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916°,
26; 29, 14, 10 ibid. 952», 26; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 1120,
2, ete.]; often in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr.)*
apa, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal
root AP@ to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius § 488; Vanitek
p- 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated
fully by Kiihner ii. §§ 509, 545; [Jelf §§ 787-789],
and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 160-180, among others; [for
a statement of diverse views see Bawmlein, Griech. Par-
tikeln, p. 19 sq.]. It intimates that, “under these cir-
cumstances something either is so or becomes so” (Klotz
l.c. p. 167): Lat. igitur, consequently, [differing from
ovv in ‘denoting a subjective impression rather than a
positive conclusion.’ L. and S. (see 5 below)]. In the
N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings
of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does
not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. §§ 53, 8 a. and
61,6. Itis found 1. subjoined to another word : Ro.
Vii. 21; vili.1, Gal. ili. 7; eset dpa since, if it were other-
wise, 1 Co. vii. 14; [v. 10, ef. B. § 149,5]. When placed
after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a
preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist-
ing only inthe mind. ris dpa who then? Mt. xviii. 1 (i. e.
one certainly will be the greater, who then?); Mt. xix.
25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved; you say that the
rich will not; who then?); Mt. xix. 27; xxiv. 45 (I bid
you be ready; who then etc.? the question follows from
this command of mine); Mk. iv. 41; Lk. i. 66 (from all
these things doubtless something follows ; what, then ?) ;
LK. viii. 25; xii. 42; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which
then ?); Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared ; what, then,
has become of him?). i dpa, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since
the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ;
Acts vii. 1 [Rec.] (dpa equiv. to ‘since the witnesses tes-
tify thus’); Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous,
perhaps the thought etc.) ; etmep dpa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (83-DN,
et dpa, Gen. xviii. 3). ovd« dpa, Acts xxi. 88 (thou hast
a knowledge of Greek; art thou not then the Egyptian,
as I suspected ?); pare dpa (Lat. num igitur), did I then
etc., 2 Co. i. 17. 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ.
(cf. B. 371 (318); [W. 558 (519)]) it is placed at the
beginning of a sentence; and so, so then, accordingly,
equiv. to dare with a finite verb: dpa paprupetre [pdprv-
pes eore T Tr WH], Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. xxiii. 31 Sore pap-
tupeite); Ro. x. 17; 1 Co. xv. 18; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in
LT Tr WH noconditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii.
12; Gal. iv. 31 (LT Tr WH 8&6); Heb. iv. 9. 3. inan
ith
apaos
apodosis, after a protasis with ¢, in order to bring out
what follows as a matter of course, (Germ. so ist ja the
obvious inference is): Lk. xi. 20; Mt. xii. 28; 2 Co. v.
14 (15) (R G, a protasis with e preceding); Gal. ii.
21; ili. 29; v.11; Heb. xii. 8; joined to another word,
1 Co. xv. 14. 4. with yé, rendering it more pointed,
dpaye [L. Tr uniformly dpa ye; so R WH in Acts xvii.
27; cf. W. p.45; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely
then, so then, (Lat. itaque ergo): Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26;
Acts xi. 18 (L T Tr WH om. yé); and subjoined to a
word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. dpa ovv, a
combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen-
tence (W. 445 (414); B. 371 (318), [dpa ad internam
potius caussam spectat, ody magis ad externam.” Klotz
ad Devar. ii. p. 717; dpa is the more logical, ody the
more formal connective; “ dpa is illative, ody continua-
tive,” Win. l. c.; cf. also Kuhner § 545, 3]), [R. V.] so
then, (Lat. hine igitur) : Ro. v. 18; vii. 3, 25; viii. 12; ix.
16, 18; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. odv) ; 19 [L mrg. dpa];
Galiviald; Eph. 19 91 Thov. 65.2 Dhe ns 15.*
dpa, an interrogative particle [“implying anxiety
or impatience on the part of the questioner.” L. and
S. s. v.], (of the same root as the preceding dpa, and only
differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon
the first syllable, which is therefore circumflexed); — 1.
num igitur, i. e. marking an inferential question to which
a negative answer is expected: Lk. xviii. 8; with ye
rendering it more pointed, dpa ye [G T dpdaye]: Acts viii.
30; [apa ody... didkopev Lehm. ed. min. also maj. mrg.
are we then pursuing ete. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i.e.
a question to which an aflirmative answer is expected,
in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ. so ist also wohl 2),
he is then? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write
dpa, so that this example is referred to those mentioned
under dpa, 3, and is rendered Christ is then a minister of
sin; but pa yévorro, which follows, is everywhere by
Paul opposed to a question). Cf. W. 510 (475) sq. [also
B. 247 (213), 871 (818); Herm. ad Vig. p. 820 sqq.;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 180 sqq.; speaking somewhat
loosely, it may be said “ dpa expresses bewilderment as
to a possible conclusion. . . dpa hesitates, while dpa con-
cludes.” Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.].*
dpa. -as, 1), 1. a prayer; asupplication ; much often-
er 2. an imprecation, curse, malediction, (cf. katapa) ;
so in Ro. iii. 14 (cf. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in Sept.
(In both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
*ApaBia, -as, 7, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known
peninsula of Asia, lying towards Africa, and bounded by
Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the
Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and the
Ocean]: Gal. i. 17; iv. 25.*
[dpaBév Tdf., see dppaSav. |
[dpaye, see apa, 4. |
[dpdye, see dpa, 1.]
"Apap, Aram [or Ram], indecl. prop. name of one of
the male ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3 sq.; Lk. iii. 33
[not T WH Tr mrg.; see ’Adpeiv and ’Apved].*
dpados T Tr for appados, q. v.
"Apa
“Apa, -a8os, 6, an Arabian: Acts ii. 11.*
apyéw, -2; (to be dpyés, q. v.); to be idle, inactive ; con-
textually, to linger, delay: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ois rd xpia éxmadat
ovk apyei, i.e. whose punishment has long been impend-
ing and will shortly fall. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.)
[Come. : xar-apyéw. |*
apyés, -dv, and in later writ. fr. Aristot. hist. anim. 10,
40 [vol. i. p. 627%, 15] on and consequently also in the
N. T. with the fem. apy, which among the early Greeks
Epimenides alone is said to have used, ‘Tit. i. 12; ef. Lod.
ad Phryn. p. 104 sq.; id. Paralip. p. 455 sqq.; W. 68
(67), [ef. 24; B. 25 (23)], (contr. fr. depyos which Hom.
uses, fr. a priv. and épyov without work, without labor,
doing nothing), inactive, idle; a. free from labor, at
leisure, (dpyév eiva, Hdt. 5,6): Mt. xx. 3, 6 [Rec.]; 1
Tim. v.13. b. lazy, shunning the labor which one ought
to perform, (Hom. Il. 9, 320 6, 7 depyos avyp, 6, Te TOAAG
€opyas) : miorts, Jas. ii. 20 (L T Tr WH for RG vexpa) ;
yaorépes apyat i. e. idle gluttons, fr. Epimenides, Tit. i. 12
(Nicet. ann. 7, 4, 135 d. eis apyas yaorépas oxetnynoas) ;
dpyos kai dxapmos eis tt, 2 Pet. i. 8. c. of things from
which no profit is derived, although they can and ought
to be productive; as of fields, trees, gold and silver, (cf.
Grimm on Sap. xiv. 5; [L. and 8. s. v. I. 2]) ; unprofit-
able, pia apysv, by litotes i. q. pernicious (see dkapros) :
Mt. xii. 36.*
[Syn.apyds, Bpadus, vwOpds: apy. idle, involving blame-
worthiness ; Bp. slow (tardy), having a purely temporal ref-
erence and no necessary bad sense ; vw@p. sluggish, descrip-
tive of constitutional qualities and suggestive of censure.
Schmidt ch. 49; Trench § civ.]
apyvpeos -ovs, -€a -G, -eov -ovv, of silver; in the contracted
formin Acts xix. 24 [but WH br.]; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev.
ix. 20. [From Hom. down. ]*
dpyvpiov, -ov, 7d, (fr. dpyupos, q. v.), [fr. Hdt. down];
1. silver: Acts iii. 6; vil. 16; xx. 33; 1 Pet. 1.185 [1
Co: 12 ir Wi: 2. money: simply, Mt. xxv.
18, 27; Mk. xiv. 11; Lk. 1x, 3; x1x.'15, 233 xxi. 5; Acts
viii. 20; plur., Mt. xxviii. [12], 15. 3. Spee. a silver
coin, silver-piece, (Luther, Silberling), pw, aikdos, shekel
[see B. D. s. v.], i. e. a coin in circulation among the
Jews after the exile, from the time of Simon (c. B. c.
141) down (cf. 1 Macc. xv. 6 sq. [yet see B. D. s. v.
Money, and reff. in Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 7]) 5 ac-
cording to Josephus (antt. 3, 8, 2) equal to the Attic
tetradrachm or the Alexandrian didrachm (cf.
orarnp [ B.D. s. v. Piece of Silver]): Mt. xxvi. 15; xxvii.
3,5 sq. 9. In Acts xix. 19, dpyupiou pupiddes mévre fifty
thousand pieces of silver (Germ. 50,000 in Silber i. q.
Silbergeld), doubtless drachmas [cf. dyvdpioy] are meant ;
cf. Meyer [et al.] ad loc.*
dpyvpoKétros, -ov, 6, (dpyupos and xémrw to beat, ham-
mer; a silver-beater), a silversmith: Acts xix. 24. (Judg.
xvii. 4; Jer. vi. 29. Plut. de vitand. aere alien. c. 7.) *
apyupos, -ov, 6, (apyds shining), [fr. Hom. down], silver:
1 Co. iii. 12 [T Tr WH dpyvpior] (reference is made to
the silver with which the columns of noble buildings
were covered and the rafters adorned); by meton.
things made of silver, silver-work, vessels, images of the
72
“Apétas
gods, etc.: Acts xvii. 29; Jas. v. 3; Rev. xviii. 12. silver
coin: Mt. x. 9.*
"Apetos [' Tdi. “Apros] wayos, -ov, 6, Areopagus (a rocky
height in the city of Athens not far from the Acropolis
toward the west; mayos a hill,”Apevos belonging to (Ares)
Mars, Mars’ Hill; so called, because, as the story went,
Mars, having slain Halirrhothius, son of Neptune, for the
attempted violation of his daughter Alcippe, was tried
for the murder here before the twelve gods as judges;
Pausan. Attic. 1, 28, 5), the place where the judges con-
vened who, by appointment of Solon, had jurisdiction of
capital offences, (as wilful murder, arson, poisoning, ma-
licious wounding, and breach of the established religious
usages). The court itself was called Areopagus from
the place where it sat, also Areum judicium (Tacit.
ann. 2, 55), and curia Martis (Juv. sat. 9, 101). To
that hill the apostle Paul was led, not to defend himself
before the judges, but that he might set forth his
opinions on divine subjects to a greater multitude of
people, flocking together there and eager to hear some-
thing new: Acts xvii. 19-22; cf. vs. 32. Cf. J. H. Krause
in Pauly’s Real-Encycl. 2te Aufl. i. 2 p. 1497 sqq. s. v.
Areopag; [ Grote, Hist. of Greece, index s. v.; Dicts. of
Geogr. and Antiq.; BB.DD. s. v. Areopagus; and on
Paul’s discourse, esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mars’ Hill].*
’Apeorrayirys, ‘Tdf. ~yeirns [see s. v. et, ¢], -ov, 6, (fr. the
preceding [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 697 sq.]), a member of the
court of Areopagus, an Areopagite: Acts xvii. 34.*
dpecketa (T WH -xia [see I, «]),-as, 7, (fr. dperxetdo to
be complaisant; hence not to be written [with R GL
Tr] dpéoxea, [cf. Chandler § 99; W. § 6, 1 g.; B. 12
(11)]), desire to please: wepurareiv a€iws Tov Kupiov eis
macav apeokeiar, to please him in all things, Col. i. 10;
(of the desire to please God, in Philo, opif. § 50; de
profug. § 17; de victim. § 3 sub fin. In native Grk. writ.
commonly in a bad sense: Theophr. char. 3 (5); Polyb.
31, 26,5; Diod. 13, 53; al.; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.]).*
dpéckw ; impf. j#peckov; fut. dpéow; 1 aor. ijperca; (APQ
[see dpa init.]); [fr. Hom. down]; a. to please: twi, Mt.
xiv: 63 Mk. vi. 2259Ro. vili-/8is))ev. 29) ) Phen 156) ive;
1 Co. vii. 32-34; Gal. i. 10; 2 Tim. ii. 4; evamdy
tivos, after the Hebr. 13, Acts vi. 5, (1 K. iii. 10; Gen.
xxxiv. 18, etc.). b. to strive to please; to accommodate
one’s self to the opinions, desires, interests of others: twit,
1 Co. x. 33 (rdvra maow apéoxw) ; 1 Th. ii. 4. dpéoxew
éavra, to please one’s self and therefore to have an eye
to one’s own interests: Ro. xv. 1, 3.*
dperrés, -7, -dv, (apéoxw), pleasing, agreeable: ruvi, Jn.
viii. 29; Acts xii. 3; évamedv twos, 1 Jn. iii. 22 (cf.
dpéoka, a.) ; dpeotdy eore foll. by ace. with inf. i is fit,
Acts vi. 2 [yet cf. Meyer ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr.
[Soph.] Hdt. down.) *
*"Apéras [WH ‘Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -a (cf. W.
§ 8,1; [B. 20 (18) ]), 6, Aretas, (a name common to many
of the kings of Arabia Petraea or Nabathaean Arabia
(cf. B. D. s.v. Nebaioth] ; ef. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch.
§ 17 b. p. 233 sq.); an Arabian king who made war (A. D.
36) on his son-in-law Herod Antipas for having repu-
apeTn T
diated his daughter ; and with such success as complete-
ly to destroy his army (Joseph. antt. 18, 5). In conse-
quence of this, Vitellius, governor of Syria, being ordered
by Tiberius to march an army against Aretas, prepared
for the war. But Tiberius meantime having died
[March 16, a. D. 37], he recalled his troops from the
march, dismissed them to their winter quarters, and
departed to Rome. After his departure Aretas held
sway over the region of Damascus (how acquired we do
not know), and placed an ethnarch over the city : 2 Co.
xi. 32. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Wieseler in Herzog i.
p- 488 sq.; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 238 sq.; Schiirer in
Riehm p. 83 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Aretas; Meyer
on Acts, Einl. § 4 (cf. ibid. ed. Wendt) }.*
dpe}, -7s, 7, [see dpa init.], a word of very wide signi-
fication in Grk. writ.; any excellence of a person (in
body or mind) or ofa thing, an eminent endowment, prop-
erty or quality. Used of the human snind and in an
ethical sense, itdenotes 1. avirtuous course of thought,
feeling and action; virtue, moral goodness, (Sap. iv. 1;
v. 13; often in 4 Mace. and in Grk. writ.): 2 Pet. i. 5
[al. take it here specifically, viz. moral vigor; ef. next
head]. 2. any particular moral excellence, as modesty,
purity; hence (plur. ai dperai, Sap. viii. 7; often in 4
Mace. and in the Grk. philosophers) ris dpern, Phil. iv.
8. Used of God, it denotes a. his power: 2 Pet. i. 3.
b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ‘ which shine
forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of
our salvation’ (Jn. Gerhard): 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for
Wn splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of
the Messiah; in plur. for ny>in praises, of God, Is. xliii.
Sle susmLiiget Bis Liat f.) ;
dpi, 6, nom. not in use; the other cases are by syncope
apvos (for dpévos), apvi, apva; plur. dpves, apydv, apvact,
dpvas, a sheep, a lamb: Lk. x. 3. (Gen. xxx. 32; Ex.
xxiii. 19, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
dpOpéw, -O: 1 aor. npiOunoa; pf. pass. ApiOynpat ;
(apsOpos) ; (fr. Hom. down]; to number: Mt. x. 30; Lk.
xii. 7; Rev. vii. 9. [Comp.: kat-apiOpéw. | *
dp.Oyds, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a number; a. a fixed
and definite number: rév dpiOudv mevraxicyirtot, in num-
ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. 16; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often
in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (216); [B. 153 (134)]); ék rod
dpiOuod tav dwdexa, Lk. xxii. 3 ; ap. avOpamov, a number
whose letters indicate a certain man, Rev. xiii. 18. b.
an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude: Acts vi. 7; xi.
21; Rev. xx. 8.
*Apipabata [WH ‘Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -as, 7,
Arimathea, Hebr. 7199 (a height), the name of several
cities of Palestine; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1275.
The one mentioned in Mt. xxvii. 57; Mk. xv. 43; Lk.
xxiii. 51; Jn. xix. 38 appears to have been the same as
that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel,
in Mount Ephraim: 1 S.i. 1, 19, ete. Sept. "Appadaip,
and without the art. “Payaéu, and acc. to another read-
ing ‘PayaOaip, 1 Macc. xi. 34; “Payaéa in Joseph. antt.
13, 4,9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus
von Naz. iii. 514; [B. D. Am. ed.].*
2
3 Apparyedav
*Aplorapxos, -ov, 6, [lit. best-ruling], Aristarchus, a cer-
tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ‘ fellow-captive’ with
Paul [cf. B. D. Am. ed.; Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on Col. as
below]: Acts xix: 29; xx. 4: xxvii 2; Col: iv. 10;
Philem. 24.*
dpiotdw, -O: 1 aor. npiotnoa; (To Gpioroy, q. V.); a.
to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. ‘Cyr. 6, 4,1; and
often in Attic). b. by later usage to dine: mapa Tum,
LK. xi. 37; (Gen. xliii. 24; Ael. v. h. 9, 19).*
dpiorepds, -d, -dy, left: Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xxiii. 33; [Mk.
x. 37 T Tr WH, on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3]; démAa apr
orepa i. e. carried in the left hand, defensive weapons, 2
Co. vi.7. [From Hom. down. ] *
*ApioréBovdos, -ov, 6, [lit. best-counselling], Aristobulus,
a certain Christian [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. and Bp. Lehtft.
on Phil. p. 174 sq.]: Ro. xvi. 10.*
dpiorov, -ov, Td, [fr. Hom. down]; a. the jirst food,
taken early in the morning before work, breakfast;
dinner was called Seirvov. But the later Greeks called
breakfast 76 axpariopa, and dinner dpiotov i. e. detmrvov
peonpSpwov, Athen. 1,9,10p.11b.; and so in the N.T.
Hence b. dinner: Lk. xiv. 12 (oveiv dpiorov 7) Seimvor,
to which others are invited); Lk. xi. 38; Mt. xxii. 4
(€roagew). [B. D. s.v. Meals; Becker’s Charicles, se.
vi. excurs. i. (Eng. trans. p. 312 sq.).]*
dpketés, -1, -dv, (dpxéw), sufficient: Mt. vi. 34 (where
the meaning is, ‘ Let the present day’s trouble suffice for
a man, and let him not rashly increase it by anticipating
the cares of days to come’; [on the neut. cf. W. § 58, 5;
B. 127 (111) ]); dpxerév r@ padnry [ A.V. it is enough for
the disciple i.e.] let him be content etc., foll. by iva, Mt. x.
25; foll. by an inf., 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Chrysipp. ap. Athen.
3, 79 p. 113 b.)*
apkéw, &; 1 aor. #pxeoa; [Pass., pres. apxovpac]; 1 fut.
dpxecOnoona; to be possessed of unfailing strength; to be
strong, to suffice, to be enough (as against any danger;
hence to defend, ward off, in Hom.; [al. make this the
radical meaning, cf. Lat arceo ; Curtius § 7]): with dat.
of pers., Mt. xxv. 9; Jn. vi. 7; dpket cou 7 xapis wou my
grace is sufficient for thee, sc. to enable thee to bear the
evil manfully; there is, therefore, no reason why thou
shouldst ask for its removal, 2 Co. xii. 9; impersonally,
dpket jpiv tis enough for us, we are content, Jn. xiv. 8.
Pass. (as in Grk. writ.) to be satisfied, contented: ti,
with a thing, Lk. iii. 14; Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 8; (2
Mace. v. 15); émi rut, 3 Jn. 10. [Comp.: én-apxéw.]*
&pxros, -ov, 6, 7, or [so GL T Tr WH] dpkos, -ov, 6, 7,
a bear: Rev. xiii. 2. [From Hom. down.]*
dppa, -aros, ro, (fr. APQ to join, fit; ateam), a chariot :
Acts vili. 28 sq. 88; of war-chariots (i. e. armed with
scythes) we read dppata immrev rodAGv chariots drawn by
many horses, Rev. ix. 9, (Joel ii. 5. In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down).*
‘AppayeSév [Grsb. *Apu., WH*Ap Mayeday, see their
Intr. § 408; Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] or (so Rec.) ’Appayeddav,
Har-Magedon or Armageddon, indecl. prop. name of an
imaginary place: Rev. xvi. 16. Many, following Beza
and Glassius, suppose that the name is compounded of
apmota
74
apralw
77 mountain, and {739 or }1739, Sept. Mayeda, MayedSa. | b. apy. God and Christ, is used of these who by cher-
Megiddo was a city of the Manassites, situated in the
great plain of the tribe of Issachar, and famous for a
double slaughter, first of the Canaanites (Judg. v. 19),
and again of the Israelites (2 K. xxiii. 29 sq.; 2 Chr.
xxxv. 22, cf. Zech. xii. 11); so that in the Apocalypse
it would signify the place where the kings opposing
Christ were to be destroyed with a slaughter like that
which the Canaanites or the Israelites had experienced
of old. But since those two overthrows are said to have
taken place eri vdare May. (Judg. 1. c.) and €v ro
medi@ May. (2 Chr. |. ¢.), it is not easy to perceive
what can be the meaning of the mountain of Megiddo,
which could be none other than Carmel. Hence, for
one, I think the conjecture of L. Capellus [i. e. Louis
Cappel (akin to that of Drusius, see the Comm.)] to be
far more easy and probable, viz. that ‘Appayedwv is for
‘Appapeyedov, compounded of 820M destruction, and
j139. [Wieseler (Zur Gesch. d. N. T. Schrift, p. 188),
Hitzig (in Hilgenf. Einl. p. 440 n.), al., revive the deriva-
tion (cf. Hiller, Simonis, al.) fr. yr city of Megiddo. ]*
dppotw, Attic dpporrw: 1 aor. mid. nppoodunv; (dppos,
gq. ¥.)s 1. to join, to fit together; so in Hom. of car-
penters, fastening together beams and planks to build
houses, ships, ete. 2. of marriage: dppoew rut thy
@vyarépa (Hdt. 9, 108) to betroth a daughter to any one;
pass. dppocerar yuri) avdpi, Sept. Prov. xix. 14; mid.
dppocacba thy Ovyarépa Tivos (Hdt. 5, 32; 47; 6, 65)
to join to one’s self, i. e. to marry, the daughter of any
one; dppdcacOai tii twa to betroth, to give one in mar-
riage to any one: 2 Co. xi. 2, and often in Philo, cf.
Loesner ad loc.; the mid. cannot be said to be used
actively, but refers to him to whom the care of betroth-
ing has been committed; [cf. B. 193 (167); per contra
Mey. ad loc.; W. 258 (242) ].*
dppds, -od, 6, (APO to join, fit), a joining, a joint: Heb.
iv. 12. (Soph., Xen., al.; Sir. xxvii. 2.) *
dpvas, see apnv.
’Apvet, 6, indecl. prop. name of one of the ancestors of
Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 T WH Tr mre.*
dpvéopat, -odpat; fut. dpyicopar; impf. jpvovpny; 1 aor.
npynodpnyv (rare in Attic, where generally npynOny, cf.
Matth. i. p. 538 [better Veitch s. v.]); pf. f#ovnuar; a
depon. verb [(fr. Hom. down) | signifying 1. to deny,
i. e. eireiv. . .ovK [lo say... not, contradict]: Mk. xiv. 70;
Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. i. 20; xviii. 25, 27; Lk. viii. 45; Acts
iv. 16; foll. by érz od instead of simple 67, in order to
make the negation more strong and explicit: Mt. xxvi.
72; 1 Jn. ii. 22; (on the same use in Grk. writ. cf.
Kiihner ii. p. 761; [Jelf ii. 450; W. § 65, 2 B.; B. 355
(305) }). 2. to deny, with an ace. of the pers., in
various senses: a. dpv. Incovv is used of followers of
Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that
Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to disown]:
Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9; [Jn. xiii. 88 L txt. T Tr WH];
2 Tim. ii. 12, (dpv. 70 dvoua aitov, Rev. iii. 8, means
the same); and on the other hand, of Jesus, denying
that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33; 2 Tim. ii. 12.
ishing and disseminating pernicious opinions and immo-
rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and
Christ : 1 Jn. ii. 22 (cf. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7-11); Jude 4; 2 Pet.
ii. 1. c. apy. éavtdv to deny himself, is used in two senses,
a. to disregard his own interests : Lk. ix. 23 [R WH mrg.
arapv.|; cf. dmrapveopa. BB. to prove false to himself, act
entirely unlike himself: 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny i.e.
abnegate, abjure; ri, to renounce a thing, forsake it: ray
do€Bevav k. Tas emOvpias, Tit. ii. 12; by act to show es-
trangement from a thing: tiv riorw, 1 Tim. v. 8; Rev.
ii. 13; ryv Sdvapyw THs evoeBeias, 2 Tim. iii. 5. 4. not
to accept, to reject, refuse, something offered : rd, Acts
ill. 14; vil. 35; with an inf. indicating the thing, Heb.
xi. 24. [Comp.: am-apvéopat. |
dpviov, -ov, rd, (dimin. fr. apy, q. v-), [fr. Lys. down],
a little lamb, a lamb: Rey. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol-
lowers ra dpvia pov in Jn. xxi. 15; 76 dpviov is used of
Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the
sins of men, very often in Rev., as v. 6, 8,12,etce. (Jer.
xi. 19; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 4, 6; Joseph. antt.
8, 8, 10.)*
Gporpidw, -@ ; (dporpov, q. v-); to plough: Lk. xvii. 7;
1 Co. ix. 10. (Deut. xxii. 10; [1 K. xix. 19]; Mie. iii.
12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more
ancient dpdw; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sq. [W. 24].) *
dpotpoy, -ov, Td, (apdw to plough), a plough: Lk. ix. 62.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
dprayn, -7s, 7, (4pra(w), rapine, pillage; 1. the act
of plundering, robbery: Heb. x. 34. 2. plunder, spoil:
Mt... xxii; 25 > Lk. xi239.-(s.aik, 14e), Nahsas 128 in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
dpraypds, -ov, 6, (dpmatw) ; 1. the act of seizing, rob-
bery, (so Plut. de lib. educ. c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a.
the only instance of its use noted in prof. auth.). 2.
a thing seized or to be seized, booty: adpmaypov nycio@ai tt
to deem anything a prize, — a thing to be seized upon
or to be held fast, retained, Phil. ii. 6; on the meaning
of this pass. see poppy; (17yeto@at or rroteta Bai Ti Gpraypa,
Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2; vit. Const. 2, 31; [Comm. in Lue.
vi., cf. Mai, Nov. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165]; Heliod. 7, 11
and 20; 8, 7; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1,8 p. 330 d.]; ut om-
nium bona praedam tuam duceres, Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 15, 39 ;
{see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. 111) ; Wetstein
ad loc.; Cremer 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.]).*
dprdtw ; fut. dprdoe [Veitch s. v.; cf. Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 407]; 1 aor. #pmaca; Pass., 1 aor. prac ny ;
2 aor. ypmaynv (2 Co. xii. 2,4; Sap. iv. 11; ef. W. 83
(80); [B. 54 (47); WH. App. p.170]); 2 fut. dpmayn-
copat; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius § 331); fr. Hom. down];
to seize, carry off by force: ri, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see
Svaprdtw)]; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one’s self
eagerly: thv Baoweiav tov Oeod, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6,
5, 18, ete.) ; to snatch out or away: ri, Mt. xiii. 19; ri &«
xeupds Tivos, Jn. xX. 28 sq.5 Tiva ek mupds, proverbial, to
rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am.
iv.11; Zech. iii. 2); twa, to seize and carry off speedily,
Jn. vi. 15; Acts xxiii. 10; used of divine power trans
apmragé
ferring a person marvellously and swiftly from one place
to another, to snatch or catch away: Acts viii. 39; pass.
mpos t. Oedv, Rev. xii. 5; foll. by €ws with gen. of place,
2 Co. xii. 2; els r. mapddetcov, 2 Co. xil. 4; eis aepa, 1
Th. iv.17. [Comp.: d-, ovv-aprage. }*
dptrag, -ayos, 6, adj., rapacious, ravenous: Mt. vii. 15;
Lk. xviii. 11; as subst. a robber, an extortioner: 1 Co. v.
20 sq.; vi. 10. (In both uses fr. [Arstph.], Xen. down.)*
dppaBdv [Tdf. dpaBav: 2 Co. i. 22 (so Lehm.); v. 5,
(but not in Eph. i. 14), see his Proleg. p.80; Wd4/. App.
p- 148; cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; B. 32 (28 sq.) ; cf. P, p],-@vos, 6,
(Hebr. y)27y, Gen. xxxviil. 17 sq. 20; ir. arp to
pledge; a word which seems to have passed from the
Pheenicians to the Greeks, and thence into Latin), an
earnest, i. e. money which in purchases is given as a
pledge that the full amount will subsequently be paid
[Suid. s. v. dpaBer], (cf. [obs. Eng. earlespenny ; caution-
money], Germ. Kaufschilling, Haftpfennig) : 2 Co. i. 22;
v. 5, Tov appaBva Tov mvevparos i. e. TO TrEdpAa ws appa-
Bava sc. ts K\npovoyias, as is expressed in full in Eph.
i. 14 [cf. W. § 59, 8 a.; B. 78 (68)]; for the gift of the
Holy Spirit, comprising as it does the Suvdyes rod peéd-
Aovros aidvos (Heb. vi. 5), is both a foretaste and a
pledge of future blessedness ; cf. s. v. amapyn, c. [B.D.
s.v. Earnest.] (Isae. 8, 23 [p. 210 ed. Reiske]; Aristot.
pole, Ayo fp. 6259*, 12; al.)*
dppados, ‘I’ Tr WH dpados (cf. W. 48; B. 32 (29);
[WH. App. p. 163; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; cf. P, p]), -ov,
(panrrw to sew together), not sewed together, without a
seam: Jn. xix. 23.*
appyv, see dpony.
Gp-pytos, -ov, (pytds, fr. PEQ); a. unsaid, unspoken:
Hom. Od. 14, 466, and often in Attic. b. unspeakable
(on account of its sacredness), (Hdt. 5, 83, and often in
other writ.): 2 Co. xii. 4, explained by what follows:
a ovk efdv avOpwre@ Aadjoa.*
dppworos, -ov, (pwvvupt, q. V.), without strength, weak;
sick: Mt. xiv. 14; Mk. vi. 5,13; xvi.18; 1 Co. xi. 30.
({Hippocer.], Xen., Plut.) *
ApoevoKoitns, -ov, 6, (dpaqv a male; xoirn a bed), one
who lies with a male as with a female, a sodomite: 1 Co.
vi. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10. (Anthol. 9, 686, 5; eccl. writ.) *
dpony, -evos, 6, dpaev, Td, also (acc. to R G in Rey. xii.
5, 13, and in many edd., that of Tdf. included, in Ro. i.
27° ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 78; [W. 22]) dppny,
-evos, 6, appev, 70, [fr. Hom. down], male: Mt. xix. 4;
Mk. x. 6; Lk. ii. 23; Ro.i. 27; Gal. iii. 28; Rev. xii. 5,
13 (where Lchm. reads dpoevay; on which Alex. form
of the acc. cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; 66 (64) ; Mullach p. 22 [ef.
p- 162]; B.13 (12); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 36; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 118; Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 6, 2 p. 158; WH.
App. p- 157; Scrivener, Collation ete. p. liv.]).*
“Aprtepds, -G, 6, (abbreviated fr. "Apreuidapos [i. e. gift
of Artemis], cf. W. 102 (97); [B. 20 (17 sq.); Lob.
Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 sq.; Chandler § 32]), Artemas, a
friend of Paul the apostle: Tit. iii. 12. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]*
"Aprepis, -Sos and -tos, 4, Artemis, that is to say,
the so-called Tauric or Persian or Ephesian Ar-
75
y
ApTos
temis, the goddess of many Asiatic peoples, to be dis-
tinguished from the Artemis of the Greeks, the sister of
Apollo; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. p. 39; [B. D.s. v. Diana].
A very splendid temple was built to her at Ephesus,
which was set on fire by Herostratus and reduced to
ashes; but afterwards, in the time of Alexander the
Great, it was rebuilt in a style of still greater magnifi-
cence: Acts xix. 24, 27 sq. 34 sq. Cf. Stark in Schenke)
i. p. 604 sq. s. v. Diana; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
Lond. 1877].*
aprépov, -ovos (LT Tr WH -wvos, cf. W. §9,1d.; [B.
24 (22) |), 6, top-sail Lor foresail?] of a ship: Acts xxvii.
40; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwr.
of St. Paul, p. 192 sq.; Graser in the Philologus, 3d
suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq. ].*
dptt, adv., acc. to its deriv. (fr. APQ to draw close to-
gether, to join, Lat. arto; [ef. Curtius § 488]) denoting
time closely connected ; 1. in Attic “just now, this
moment, (Germ. gerade, eben), marking something begun
or finished even now, just before the time in which we
are speaking ” (Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20): Mt. ix. 18;
1 Th. iii. 6, and perhaps Rev. xii. 10. 2. ace. to later
Grk. usage univ. now, at this time; opp. to past time:
Jn. ix. 19, 25; xiii. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal.i.9 sq. opp.
to future time: Jn. xiii. 37; xvi. 12, 31; 2 Th. ii. 7; opp.
to fut. time subsequent to the return of Christ: 1 Co.
xill. 12; 1 Pet.i.6,8. of present time most closely lim-
ited, at this very time, this moment: Mt. iii. 15; xxvi. 53;
Jn. xiii. 7; Gal. iv. 20. dype tis dpte Spas, 1 Co. iv. 11;
€ws aptt, hitherto; until now, up to this time: Mt. xi. 12;
Invi 10% Vv. 17d xvis, 24 31 Cosine 13: wit secve Gs 1 Ont
ii. 9. dm apt, see amaptt above. Cf. Lobeck ad Phryn.
p- 18 sqq.; [utherford, New Phryn. p. 70 sq. |.*
[Syn. &pts, 75, viv: Roughly speaking, it may be said
that &pri just now, even now, properly marks time closely con-
nected with the present; later, strictly present time, (see
above, and compare in Eng. “just now” i. e. a moment ago,
and “ just now ” (emphat.) i.e. at this precise time). viv now,
marks a definite point (or period) of time, the (objective)
immediate present. 75 now (already) with a suggested ref-
erence to some other time or to some expectation, the sub-
jective present (i. e. so regarded by the writer). #5y and
&pre are associated in 2 Thess. ii. 7; viv and #6n in 1 Jn. iv.
8. See Kiihner §§ 498, 499; Bdumlein, Partikeln, p. 138 sqq.;
Ellic. on 1 Thess. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv. 6.]
apti-yévyyntos, -ov, (apt and yerydw), just born, new-
born: 1 Pet. ii. 2. (Leian. Alex. 13; Long. past. 1, (7)
Te2,da) At)
Gptvos, -a, -ov, (APO to fit, [cf. Curtius § 488 ]) ; 1.
fitted. 2. complete, perfect, [having reference appar-
ently to ‘special aptitude for given uses’]; so 2 Tim.
ili. 17, [ef. Ellicott ad loc.; Trench § xxii.]. (In Grk
writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
dpros, -ov, 6, (fr. APQ to fit, put together, [cf. Etym
Magn. 150, 36—but doubtful]), bread; Hebr. om7;
1. food composed of flour mixed with water and baked ;
the Israelites made it in the form of an oblong or round
cake, as thick as one’s thumb, and as large as a plate or
platter (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Backen; [BB.DD.]);
apTue@
hence it was not cut, but broken (see xAdovs and kAd@) :
Mt. iv. 3; vii. 9; xiv.17,19; Mk. vi. 36 at Tr WH om.
L br.], 37 sq.; Lk. iv. 3; xxiv. 30; Jn. vi. 5 sqq.; Acts
xxvii. 35, and often; dprot tis mpobecews, loaves conse-
crated to Jehovah, see zpoecrs ; on the bread used at the
love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 35], cf. Mt. xxvi.
26; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,46; xx. 7; 1
Co. x. 16 sq.; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and like
the Hebr. om), food of any kind: Mt. vi. 11; Mk. vi. 8;
Lk. xi. 3; 2Co. ix. 10; 6 apros tay texvev the food served
to the children, Mk. vii. 27; dprov dayeiv or eaGiew to
take food, to eat (ON? 958) [W. 33 (32)]}: Mk. iii. 20;
Lk. xiv. 1, 15; Mt. xv. 2; dprov dayetv mapa twvos to
take food supplied by one, 2 Th. iii. 8; rov éavrod dpr.
éoiew to eat the food which one has procured for him-
self by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; pyre aprov €oiwr,
pyre oivoy river, abstaining from the usual sustenance,
or using it sparingly, Lk. vii. 33; tp@yew tov dprov pera
twos to be one’s table-companion, his familiar friend, Jn.
xiii. 18 (Ps. xl. (xli.) 10). In Jn. vi. 32-35 Jesus calls him-
self rdv dprov Tov Ocod, T. a. €k TOU Ovpavod, T. a. THS (wis,
as the divine Adyos, come from heaven, who containing
in himself the source of heavenly life supplies celestial
nutriment to souls that they may attain to life eternal.
dpriw: fut. dprucw; Pass., pf. wprupar; 1 fut. aprvéy-
copuat; (APQ to fit); to prepare, arrange ; often soin Hom.
In the comic writers and epigrammatists used of pre-
paring food, to season, make savory, ({ra oya, Aristot.
eth. Nic. 3, 13 p. 1118*, 29]; nptupevos oivos, Theophr.
de odor. § 51 [frag. 4, c. 11]); so Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv.
34g metaph. 6 Adyos adarte npTupevos, full of wisdom and
grace and hence pleasant and wholesome, Col. iv. 6.*
"Appatas, 6, Arphaxad, (W218), son of Shem (Gen.
x; 22, 04. xi- 10,12, icf. Jos..antt.1,/6, 4))): Lk i,/36.*
apx-ayyedos, -ov, 6, (fr. apxt, q. v-, and dyyedos), a bibl.
and eccl. word, archangel, i. e. chief of the angels (Hebr.
“w chief, prince, Dan. x. 20; xii. 1), or one of the princes
and leaders of the angels (DWN oO WH, Dan. x. 13):
1 Th. iv. 16; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile dis-
tinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the
author of the book of Enoch, ix. 1 sqq.; cf. Dillmann
ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to
the four sides of the throne of God) of the highest rank;
but others, and apparently the majority (Tob. xii. 15,
where cf. Fritzsche; Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven
(after the pattern of the seven Amshaspands, the high-
est spirits in the religion of Zoroaster). See s. vv. Ta-
Bpind and Miyanr.*
apxaios, -aia, -aiov, (fr. dpyn beginning, hence) prop.
that has been from the beginning, original, primeval, old,
ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions: Lk. ix.
8,19; Acts xv. 7, 21; xxi. 16; 2 Pet. 11,5; Rev. xii: 9;
xx. 2; of dpxaiot the ancients, the early Israelites: Mt.
v. 21, 27 [Rec.], 33; ra dpyaia the man’s previous moral
condition: 2 Co. v. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and
Hdt. down.)*
[Syn. apxatos, radardés: in wad. the simple idea of
time dominates, while apy. (“ onuaiver cal 7d apxis éxerOat,”
76 apxn
and so) often carries with it a suggestion of nature or origi-
nal character. Cf. Schmidt ch. 46; Trench § lxvii.]
*Apxé-Aaos, -ov, 6, Archelaus, (fr. 4pyw and dads, ruling
the people), a son of Herod the Great by Malthace, the
Samaritan. He and his brother Antipas were brought
up with a certain private man at Rome (Joseph. antt.
17,1, 38). After the death of his father he ruled ten
years as ethnarch over Judea, Samaria, and Idumza,
(with the exception of the cities Gaza, Gadara, and
Hippo). TheJews and Samaritans having accused him
at Rome of tyranny, he was banished by the emperor
(Augustus) to Vienna of the Allobroges, and died there
(Joseph. antt. 17, 9, 3; 11,4; 13, 2; b. j. 2,7, 3): Mt.
ii. 22. [See B. D. s. v. and cf. ‘Hpaédns.]*
épx4, -7s, 7, [fr. Hom. down], in Sept. mostly equiv. to -
WNT, WNT, mon; 1. beginning, origin; a. used
absolutely, of the beginning of all things: év apy7, Jn. i.
1 sq. (Gen. i. 1); am apxnjs, Mt. xix. 4 (with which cf.
Xen. mem. 1, 4, 5 6 e& apxns mody avOpwrovs), 8; Jn.
vill. 44; 1 Jn. i. 1; ii. 13 sq.; iii. 8; more fully dw dpyjs
ktioews or kdopov, Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. x. 6; xiii. 19; 2 Th.
ii. 13 (where L[ Tr mrg. WH mrg. ] amapyny, q. v.) ; 2 Pet.
ili. 4; xar’ dpxds, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26). b. ina
relative sense, of the beginning of the thing spoken of:
€& dpxijs, fr. the time when Jesus gathered disciples, Jn.
vi. 64; xvi.4; dw dpyijs, Jn. xv. 27 (since I appeared in
public); as soon as instruction was imparted, 1 Jn. ii.
[7], 24; iii. 11; 2 Jn. 5 sq.; more fully év dpyq tod evay-
yeriov, Phil. iv. 15 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2 [see note in
Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and cf. ] Polye. ad Philipp. 11, 3);
from the beginning of the gospel history, Lk. i. 2; from
the commencement of life, Acts xxvi. 4; ev apy, in the
beginning, when the church was founded, Acts xi. 15.
The ace. dpynv [cf. W. 124 (118) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i.
18] and rv apynv in the Grk. writ. (cf. Lennep ad Pha-
larid. p. 82 sqq. and p. 94 sqq. ed. Lips.; Briickner in De
Wette’s Hdbch. on John p. 151) is often used adver-
bially, i. q. dAws altogether, (properly, an acc. of ‘direc-
tion towards’: usque ad initium, [cf. W. 230 (216); B.
153 (134) ]), commonly followed by a negative, but not
always [cf. e.g. Dio Cass. frag. 101 (93 Dind.); xlv. 34
(Dind. vol. ii. p. 194); lix. 20; lxii. 4; see, further,
Lycurg. § 125 ed. Miitzner]; hence that extremely diffi-
cult passage, Jn. viii. 25 ryv... duiv, must in my opinion
be interpreted as follows: J am altogether or wholly (i. e. in
all respects, precisely) that which I even speak to you (1
not only am, but also declare to you what I am; therefore
you have no need to question me), [ef. W. 464 (432); B.
253 (218)]. dpyjv AapBavew to take beginning, to begin,
Heb. ii. 3. with the addition of the gen. of the thing
spoken of: ddivev, Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) [(here
RG plur.); rév onpetov, Jn. ii. 11]; qpepav, Heb. vii. 3;
rou evayyeXiov, that from which the gospel history took
its beginning, Mk. i. 13; trys tmroordcews, the confidence
with which we have made a beginning, opp. to peéxpe
rédous, Heb. iii. 14. ra orotxeta ths apyns, Heb. v. 12
(ris dpxjs is added for greater explicitness, as in Lat. ru-
dimenta prima, Liv.1,3; Justin. hist. 7,5; and prima
ee
a
a ee
apXNVOS
elementa, Horat. sat. 1, 1, 26, etc.); 6 7Hs dpyns Tov
Xpiorov Adyos equiv. to 6 rod Xpirtod Adyos 6 THs apx7s,
i. e. the instruction concerning Christ such as it was at
the very outset [ef. W. 188 (177) ; B.155 (136)], Heb.
vi.l. 2. the person or thing that commences, the first per-
son or thing in a series, the leader : Col. i. 18; Rev. i. 8 Rec. ;
xxi. 6; xxii. 13; (Deut. xxi. 17; Job xl. 14 (19), etc.).
8. that by which anything begins to be, the origin, active
cause (a sense in which the philosopher Anaximander,
8th cent. B. C., is said to have been the first to use the
word; cf. Simpl. on Aristot. phys. f. 9 p. 326 ed. Brandis
and 32 p. 334 ed. Brandis, [cf. Tetchmiiller, Stud. zur
Gesch. d. Begriffe, pp. 48 sqq. 560 sqq.]): 9 dpxy ths
xrioews, of Christ as the divine Adyos, Rev. iii. 14 (cf.
Diisterdieck ad loc.; Clem. Al. protrept. 1, p. 6 ed.
Potter, [p. 30 ed. Sylb.] 6 Adyos apxn Octa rev ravrov ;
in Evang. Nicod. c. 23 [p. 308 ed. Tdf., p. 736 ed.
Thilo] the devil is called 7 dpy7 tod Oavdrov kal pita
is dpaptias). 4. the extremity of a thing: of the cor-
ners of a sail, Acts x. 11; xi. 5; (Hdt. 4, 60; Diod.
1, 35; al.). 5. the first place, principality, rule, magis-
tracy, [cf. Eng. ‘ authorities’ ], (dpyw twés): Lk. xii. 11;
xx. 20; Tit. iii. 1; office given in charge (Gen. xl. 13, 21;
2 Mace. iv. 10, ete.), Jude 6. Hence the term is trans-
ferred by Paul to angels and demons holding dominions
entrusted to them in the order of things (see d@yyeNos,
2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 21]):
Ro; vail..383 4: Co. xv.. 24; Eph. i. 215: 111. 103‘ vi. 125
Col. i.16; ii.10, 15. See efoucia, 4 ¢. BB. *
dpxnves, -dv, adj., leading, furnishing the first cause or
occasion: Eur. Hipp. 881; Plat. Crat. p. 401 d.; chiefly
used as subst. 6, 7, apxnyds, (apyn and aya) ; 1. the
chief leader, prince: of Christ, Acts v. 31; (Aeschyl.
Ag. 259; Thue. 1, 132; Sept. Is. iii. 5 sq.; 2 Chr. xxiii.
14, and often). 2. one that takes the lead in any thing
(1 Mace. x. 47 dpy. Adywv eipnuikav) and thus affords an
example, a predecessor in a matter: ths miotews, of Christ,
Heb. xii. 2 (who in the pre-eminence of his faith far sur-
passed the examples of faith commemorated in ch. xi.),
[al. bring this under the next head; yet cf. Kurtz ad
loc.]. So dpxnydés dpaprias, Mic. i. 13; (ydovs, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1; trys ordacews kat dixooracias, ibid. 51,
1; tHs amooracias, of the devil, Iren. 4, 40, 1; rovavrns
diroo0pias, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 983° 20].
Hence 3. the author : ths wns, Acts ili. 15; THs corn-
pias, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : raév ravrov,
of God, [Plato] Tim. Locr. p. 96 ¢.; rod yévous Trav av-
6parav, of God, Diod. 5, 72; dpynyds kai atrios, leader and
author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, 66, 10; Hdian. 2, 6,
22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.1, p.3801 sq.*
dpxt, (fr. dpy, dpxés), an inseparable prefix, usually
to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who
is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Ober-,
Erz-, [Eng. arch- (chief-, high-)]), as adpxayyedos, apye-
roipny [q. V-], apxlepevs, apxiarpos, apxtevvovxos, apxume-
perns (in Egypt. inscriptions), etce., most of which belong
to Alexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. T'hiersch, De Pen-
tateuchi versione Alex. p. 77 sq.
17
apxvepeds
dpx-teparikds, -7, -dv, (d4pxe and feparixds, and this fr.
iepdopat [to be a priest ]), high-priestly, pontifical : yévos,
Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inserr. Graec. no. 4363; see Schiirer
as cited s. v. dpyvepevs, 2 fin.]. (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 7; 6,
Aes Te es Li
dpx-tepevs, -€ws, 6, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who
above aX others was honored with the title of priest, the
chief of the priests, oman 1715 (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. xxxv.
25, [later WNIT [75, 2 K. xxv. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 11, ete.]) ;
Mt. xxvi. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the
Ep. to the Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the
common duties of the priesthood; but his chief duty
was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the
Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex-
cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins
of the people (Lev. xvi.; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside
over the Sanhedrin, or supreme Council, when convened
for judicial deliberations (Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts xxii. 5;
xxiii. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could
aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe
of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly
family ; and he on whom the office was conferred held
it tilldeath. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes,
when the kings of the Seleucide and afterwards the
Herodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them:
selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office
neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was
conferred on any one for life; but it became venal, and
could be transferred from one to another according to
the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to
pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter-
vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of
the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical
dignity (Joseph. antt. 20, 10; see “Awvas). Cf. Win.
RW B.s. v. Hoherpriester; Oehler in Herzog vi. p. 198
sqq:; [BB.DD. s. vv. Highpriest, Priest, etc. The
names of the 28 (27?) above alluded to are given, to-
gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schiirer
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597-607]. 2. The
plur. dpxtepeis, which occurs often in the Gospels and
Acts, as Mt. ii. 4; xvi. 21; xxvi.3; xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 31;
xiv. 1; xv.1; Lk. xix. 47; xxii. 52, 66; xxiii. 45 xxiv. 20;
Jn. vil. 32; xi.573 xviii. 35; Acts iv. 23; v. 24; ix. 14,
21; xxii. 303; xxiii. 14, etc., and in Josephus, comprises,
in addition to the one actttally holding the high-priestly
office, both those who had previously discharged it and
although deposed continued to have great power in the
State (Joseph. vita 38; b. j. 2,12,6; 4,3,7; 9; 4,4, 3;
see” Avvas above), as well as the members of the families
from which high-priests were created, provided they had
much influence in public affairs (Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 2).
See on this point the learned discussion by Schiirer, Die
dpxtepets im N.T., in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, p.
593 sqq. and in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23 iii. p. 407
sqq- [Prof. Schiirer, besides reviewing the opinions of
the more recent writers, contends that in Bo instance
where indubitable reference to the heads of the twenty-
four classes is mads (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv
apxeTrotuny
3 sq.; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 14; Ezra x. 5; Neh. xii. 7; nor in
Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called apytepeis; that the
nearest approximations to this term are periphrases
such as Gpyovres TOV iepéwv, Neh. xii. 7, or @vAapyor trav
iepéwv, Esra apocr. (1 Esdr.) viii. 92 (94); Joseph. antt.
11,5,4; and that the word dpyxcepeis was restricted in its
application to those who actually held, or had held, the
high-priestly office, together with the members of the
few prominent families from which the high-priests still
continued to be selected, cf. Acts iv. 6; Joseph. b. j. 4,
3, 6.] 3. In the Ep. to the Heb. Christ is called
‘high-priest,’ because by undergoing a bloody death he
offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and
has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually
intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17; ili. 1; iv. 14; v. 10;
vi. 20; vii. 26; viii. 1; ix.11; cf. Winzer, De sacerdotis
officio, quod Christo tribuitur in Ep. ad Hebr. (three
Programs), Leips. 1825 sq.; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des He-
brierbriefes, ii. pp. 431-488. In Grk. writ. the word is
used by Hat. 2, [(87), 142,] 143 and 151; Plat. legg. 12
p- 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5; Plut. Numac. 9,
al.; [often in Inserr.]; once (viz.. Lev. iv. 3) in the
Sept., where iepeds yéyas is usual, in the O. T. Apocr. 1
Esdr. v. 40; ix. 40, and often in the bks. of Mace.
dpxt-rotuny, -evos [so L T Tr WH KC (after Mss.), but
Grsb. al. -unv, -wévos; cf. Lob. Paralip. p 195 sq.; Steph.
Thesaur. s. v.; Chandler § 580], 6, a bibl. word [Test.
xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8], chief shepherd: of Christ the
head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4; see zouuny, b.*
"Apxurmos [Chandler § 308], -ov, 6, [i.e. master of the
horse], Archippus, a certain Christian at Colosse : Col.
iv. 17; Philem. 2. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
and Philem. p. 308 sq. ]*
dpxiruvaywyos, -ov, 6, (cvvaywyn), ruler of a synagoque,
nojan ws: Mk. v. 22, 35 sq. 38; Lk. viii. 49 ; xiii. 14;
Acts xiii. 15; xviii. 8,17. It was his duty to select the
readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the
discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all
things were done with decency and in accordance with
ancestral usage; [cf. Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Synagogue].
(Not found in prof. writ.; [yet Schiirer (Theol. Literatur-
Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inserr. Graec. no 2007 f.
(Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221° (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894,
9906; Mommsen, Inserr. Regni Neap. no. 3657; Garrucci,
Cimitero degli antichi Ebreif p. 67; Lampridius, Vita
Alexandr. Sever. c. 28; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. c. 8;
Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in
Tdf.’s Ev. Apocr. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275, 284; Justin.
dial. c. Tryph. c. 137; Epiph. haer. 30, 18; Euseb. h. e.
7, 10, 4; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden
in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt
(Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq.].) *
Gpxi-TeKTwVv, -ovos, 6, (TEKTwY, q. V-), @ master-builder,
architect, the superintendent in the erection of buildings :
1 Co. iii. 10. (Hdt., Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.; Is.
iii. 3; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Macc. ii. 29.) *
dpxi-reAdvns, -ov, 6, a chief of the taz-collectors, chief
publican: Lk. xix. 2. [See reravns.]*
78
apy
dpxt-rplkALvos, -ov, 6, (rpixAcvoy [or -vos (sc. oikos), 2 room
with three couches]), the superintendent of a dining-room,
a Tpixdundpyns, table-master: Jn. ii. 8 sq. [cf. B.D. s. v.
Governor]. It differs from “the master of a feast,”
ovpmoc.apyxns, toast-master, who was one of the guests se-
lected by lot to prescribe to the rest the mode of drink-
ing; cf. Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 1. But it was the duty of
the dpxcrpixAcvos to place in order the tables and couches,
arrange the courses, taste the food and wine beforehand,
ete. (Heliod. 7, 27.) [Some regard the distinction be-
tween the two words as obliterated in later Grk.; cf.
Soph. Lex. s. v., and Schaff’s Lange’s Com. on Jn. 1. ¢.]*
dpxopar, see apy.
dpx ; [fr. Hom. down]; to be first. 1. to be the first
to do (anything), to begin, —a sense not found in the
Grk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler: twos [B. 169
(147)], Mk. x. 42; Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10). See dpyov.
Mid., pres. dpyouat; fut. dpEouar (once [twice], Lk. xiii.
26 [but not Tr mrg. WH mrg.; xxiii. 30]); 1 aor. np&d-
unv; to begin, make a beginning: amo twos, Acts x. 37
[B. 79 (69); cf. Matth. § 558]; 1 Pet. iv. 17; by bra-
chylogy dp&dpuevos amo tivos €ws twos for, having begun
from some person or thing (and continued or continu-
ing) to some person or thing: Mt. xx.8; Jn. viii. 9 [i.e.
Rec.]; Acts i. 22; cf. W. § 66, 1 ¢.; [B. 374 (320)]; dpéd-
pevoy is used impers. and absol. a beginning being made,
Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Hat. 3, 91; cf. W. 624 (580) ; [B. 374
sq. (821)]); carelessly, apEdwevos ad Movoéws kat amd
mavtav mpopntav Siupynvevey for, beginning from Mo-
ses he went through all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27; W.
§ 67, 2; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. Sv ApEaro moetv re Kai di8d-
ake, dxpt As iuepas which he began and continued both
to do and to teach, until ete., Acts i. 1 [W. § 66, 1 c.; B.
u. s.]. ”Apxouat is connected with an inf. and that so of-
ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter-
preters thought it constituted a periphrasis for the finite
form of the verb standing in the inf., as yp£aro Knpiooew
for exnpvée. But through the influence principally of
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), cf. W. § 65, 7d., it is now
conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was
arash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example
which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes :
a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im-
portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word:
Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ
began to speak concerning John, which he did not do
while they were present) ; Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin
to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) ;
Lk. xv. 14 (the beginning of want followed hard upon the
squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28; 2 Co. iii. 1; esp.
when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its
continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7; viii. 31 (cf. ix.
31; x. 33 sq.); or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp.
to exreAeoat); Jn. xiii. 5 (ef. 12). b. apy. denotes some-
thing as begun by some one, others following: Acts xxvii.
35 sq. [W. § 65, 7d.]. c. apx. indicates that a thing was
but just begun when it was interrupted by something
else: Mt. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of corn,
dpyov
but they were prevented from continuing by the inter-
ference of the Pharisees); Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered
before all had finished), 74; Mk. ii. 23; iv. 1 (he had
scarcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto
him); Mk. vi. 2; x. 41; Lk. v. 21; xii. 45sq.; xiii. 25;
Acts xi. 15 (cf. x. 44); xviii. 26, and often. d. the ac-
tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have
been mentioned; but in order that the more attention
may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer
to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be-
ginning, is expressly pointed out: Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xiv.
18; Acts ii. 4, etc. e. dpx. occurs in a sentence which
has grown out of the blending of two statements: Mt. iv.
17; xvi. 21 (fr. amd tore exnpvée... eec&e, and rére
ApEaro xnpvoocew... decxvvew). ‘The inf. is wanting
when discoverable from the context: apydpevos, sc. to
discharge the Messianic office, Lk. ili. 23 [W. 349
(328)]; dpédpevos sc. Aéeyew, Acts xi. 4. [CompP.: ey
(-yat), mpo-ev-(-yar), Um-, mpo-vm -dpyxe. |
dpxwv, -ovros, 6, (pres. ptcp. of the verb dpya), [fr.
Aeschyl. down], a ruler, commander, chief, leader : used
of Jesus, dpywv tov Bacidéwy ths ys, Rev. i. 5; of the
rulers of nations, Mt. xx. 25; Acts iv. 26; vii. 35;
univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3; Acts xxiii. 5; espe-
eially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (where note
the antithesis: whom they refused as dpyovra kal d:xa-
ony, him God sent as dpyovra— leader, ruler— kai Autpa-
mv); Acts xvi. 19. of apyovres Tov aidvos rovrov, those
who in the present age (see aiwv, 3) by nobility of birth,
learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the
greatest influence, whether among Jews or Gentiles, 1 Co.
ii. 6, 8; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 sqq. Of the members
of the Jewish Sanhedrin: Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20;
Jn. iii. 1; vil. 26, 48; xii.42; Actsiii.17; iv. 5, 8; xiii.
27; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues :
Mt. ix. 18, 23; Lk. viii. 41 (Gpy@v rhs cvvaywyns, cf. Mk.
v. 22 apytovvaywyos), and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18;
adpxav toy Papicaiwy, one who has great influence among
the Pharisees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devil, the prince of
evil spirits: (6) dpxov rev dapoviav, Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24;
Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15 ; 6 dpy. rod Kdopov, the ruler of the
irreligions mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31; xiv. 30; xvi. 11,
(in rabbin. writ. poipn Ws apx. Tov aidvos rTovrou,
Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad Magn. 1, 3]; dpywv rod xatpod ras
avopias, Barn. ep. 18, 2); tas eEovcias rod dépos, Eph. ii. 2
(see anp). [See Hort in Dict. of Chris. Biog., s.v. Archon.]*
dpwpa, -ros, ro, (fr. APO to prepare, whence dprvw to
season; [al. connect it with r. ar (dpdw) to plough (cf.
Gen. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume: Mk. xvi. 1; Lk.
xxiii. 56; xxiv.1; Jn. xix.40. (2 K.xx. 13; Esth. ii. 12;
Cant. iv. 10,16. [Hippocr.], Xen., Theophr. and subseq.
writ.) *
‘Aca, 6, (Chald. 88 to cure), Asa, king of Judah, son
of king Abijah (1 K. xv. 8 sqq.): Mt.i.7 sq. [LT Tr
WH read ’Aca¢ q. v.]*
a@rvatvo: in 1 Th. iii. 3, Kuenen and Cobet (in their
N. T. ad fidem cod. Vat., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xc.]), fol-
sowing Lchm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J.
79
agényeva
J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck. Opusce.
ii. 246-249] in his larger edit., conjectured and received
into their text pndév acaiveoOa, which they think to be
equiv. to dyOecOar, xaheras pépew. But there is no ne-
cessity for changing the Rec. (see caiva, 2 b. B.), nor can
it be shown that doaivw is used by Grk. writ. for avdw.*
d-wddevtos, -ov, (gadevw), unshaken, unmoved: prop.
Acts xxvii. 41; metaph. BaovAela, not liable to disorder
and overthrow, firm, stable, Heb. xii. 28. (Eur. Bacch.
391; edevOepia, Diod. 2,48 ; evSaipovia, ibid. 3,47; novia,
Plat. Ax. 370 d.; Plut., al.) *
"Acdh, 6, (08 collector), a man’s name, a clerical
error for R G’Aga (q. v.), adopted by L T Tr WH in
Mt. i. 7 sq.*
d&-oPerros, -ov, (oBevvupe), unquenched (Ovid, inexstinc-
tus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis) : mip, Mt. iii.
12; Lk. iii. 17; Mk. ix. 43, and RG Lbr. in 45. (Often
in Hom.; ip ao. of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 76; [of the fire on the altar, Philo de
ebriet. § 34 (Mang. i. 378); de vict. off. § 5 (Mang. ii.
254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15, (3)15; see
also Plut. symp. 1. vii. probl. 4; Aelian. nat. an. 5,3; cf.
Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 15].) *
dé Bera, -as, 7), (aoeBns, q. V-), want of reverence towards
God, impiety, ungodliness: Ro. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit.
ii. 12; plur. ungodly thoughts and deeds, Ro. xi. 26 (fr.
Is. lix. 20); ra pya aoeBeias [Treg. br. aae8.] works of
ungodliness, a Hebraism, Jude 15, ef. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B.
§ 132, 10]; ai émOupia tov aceBeroy their desires to do
ungodly deeds, Jude 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur.], Plat.
and Xen. down; in the Sept. it corresponds chiefly to
pwa.)*
dxeBéw, -&; 1 aor. noeBnoa; (doeBns, q. v.); from
[Aeschyl.], Xen. and Plato down; to be ungodly, act im-
piously: 2 Pet. ii. 6; doeBeiv epya doeBeias [Treg. br.
doeBetas], Jude 15, cf. W. 222 (209); [B. 149 (130)].
(Equiv. to ywa, Zeph. iii. 11; yw, Dan. ix. 5.) *
doeBis, -€s, (o¢8w to reverence); fr. Aeschyl. and
Thuc. down, Sept. for pw; destitute of reverential awe
towards God, contemning God, impious: Ro. iv. 5; v. 63
1 Tim. i. 9 (joined here with dyaprwdds, as in 1 Pet. iv.
18); 2 Pet. ii. 5; iii. 7; Jude 4, 15.*
doéAyera, -as, 7, the conduct and character of one who
is doedyns (a word which some suppose to be com-
pounded of a priv. and 3éAyn, the name of a city in Pi-
sidia whose citizens excelled in strictness of morals [so
Etym. Magn. 152, 38; per contra cf. Suidas 603 d.];
others of a intens. and cadayety to disturb, raise a din ;
others, and now the majority, of a priv. and céAyo i. q.
GéAyw, not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), un-
bridled lust, excess, licentiousness, lasciviousness, wanton-
ness, outrageousness, shamelessness, insolence: Mk. vii.
22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken
of); of gluttony and venery, Jude 4; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3;
2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. dmwdeias), 18; of carnality,
lasciviousness: 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v.19; Eph.iv. 19; 2
Pet. ii. 7; plur. “wanton (acts or) manners, as filthy
words, indecent bodily movements, unchaste handling of
donpos 80
males and females, etc.” (Fritzsche), Ro. xiii. 13. (In
bibl. Grk. besides only in Sap. xiv. 26 and 3 Mace. ii. 26.
Among Grk. writ. used by Plat., Isocr. et sqq.; at length
by Plut. [Lucull. 38] and Lcian. [dial. meretr. 6] of the
wantonness of women [ Lob. ad Phryn. p.184n.].) Cf.
Tittmann i. p. 151 sq.; [esp. Trench § xvi. ].*
Gonpos, -ov, (ona a mark), unmarked or unstamped
(money); unknown, of no mark, insignificant, ignoble :
Acts xxi. 39. (3 Macc. i. 3; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down;
trop. fr. Eur. down.) *
*Actp, 6, an indecl. Hebr. prop. name, (7w® [1. e. hap-
py, Gen. xxx. 13]), (in Joseph. ”Aonpos, -ov, 6), Asher,
the eighth son of the patriarch Jacob: Lk. ii. 36; Rev.
vil. 6.*
acGevea, -as, 7, (acGevns), [fr. Hdt. down], want of
strength, weakness, infirmity; a. of Body; a. its native
weakness and frailty: 1 Co. xv.43; 2 Co. xiii.4. B. feeble-
ness of health; sickness: Jn. v.5; xi. 4; Lk. xiii. 11,12;
Gal. iv. 13 (do@évera tis capxés) ; Heb. xi. 34; in plur.:
Mt. viii. 17; Lk. v.15; viii. 2; Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Tim. v.
23. b. of Soul; want of the strength and capacity re-
quisite a. to understand a thing: Ro. vi. 19 (where aod.
capxés denotes the weakness of human nature). 8. to do
things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of
skill in speaking, in the management of men: 1 Co. ii.
3. -y. to restrain corrupt desires ; proclivity to sin : Heb.
v. 2; vii. 28; plur. the various kinds of this proclivity,
Heb. iv. 15. 8. to bear trials and troubles: Ro. viii. 26
(where read 77 do@eveia for Rec. rais doOeveias) ; 2 Co.
xi. 30; xii. 9; plur. the mental [?] states in which this
weakness manifests itself: 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sq.*
doGevew, -B; impf. nodévovv; pf. naGevnxa (2 Co. xi. 21
LT TrWH); Laor. noOevnoa; (aoGevis) ; [fr. Eur. down];
to be weak, feeble; univ. to be without strength, power-
less: Ro. viii. 3; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab-
stains from the use of his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4; and
of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co.
xiii. 9; contextually, to be unable to wield and hold sway.
over others, 2 Co. xi. 21; by oxymoron, érav aaOeva, rére
duvards eiye when I am weak in human strength, then am
I strong in strength divine, 2 Co. xii. 10; ets twa, to be
weak towards one, 2 Co. xiii. 3; with a dat. of the respect
added: mioret, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19; miores, to
be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris-
tian, Ro. xiv. 1; simple doeveiv with the same idea sug-
gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br.]; 1 Co.
viii. 9 Rec., 11 sq.; tis doGevet, kat ovK acevo; who is
weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law-
ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of
the same weakness? 2 Co. xi. 29. contextually, to be
weak in means, needy, poor: Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph.
pax 636]; Eur. in Stob. 145 vol. ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), cf.
De Wette [more fully Hackett, per contra Meyer] ad
loc. Specially of debility in health: with vécos added,
Lk. iv. 40; simply, to be feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [RG Tr
mrg. br.]; Mt. xxv. 36,39 L txt. T Tr WH; Jn. iv. 46;
xi. 1-3, 6; Acts ix. 37; Phil. ii. 26 sq.;-2 Tim. iv. 20;
Jas. v. 14; of aaGevoivres, and aaGevodrres, the sick, sick
"Aowdpyns
folks: Mt. x. 8; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. ix. 2 Rec.; Jn. v. 3, 7s
13 Tdf.; vi. 2; Acts xix. 12.*
doGeévnpa, -aros, Té, (dobevéw), infirmity: Ro. xv. 1
(where used of error arising from weakness of mind).
[In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11, 7 vol. i. 638%,
37; gen. an. 1, 18 ibid. p. 726* 15.]*
dobevis, -és, (7d oOevos strength), weak, infirm, feeble ;
[fr. Pind. down]; a. univ.: Mt. xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38;
1 Pet. iii. 7; 1rd doOeves rod Geov, the act of God in which
weakness seems to appear, viz. that the suffering of the
cross should be borne by the Messiah,1 Co. i. 25. b. spec.:
contextually, unable to achieve anything great, 1 Co. iv.
10; destitute of power among men, 1 Co. i. 27 [Lchm.
br.]; weaker and inferior, pédos, 1 Co. xii. 22; sluggish
in doing right, Ro. v. 6; wanting in manliness and dig-
nity, 2 Co. x. 10; used of the religious systems anterior
to Christ, as having no power to promote piety and sal-
vation, Gal. iv. 9; Heb. vii. 18; wanting in decision
about things lawful and unlawful (see doOevéw), 1 Co.
vill. 7,-9.1 LT Tr WH) 10ssix. 226.1 Thivw.d4se.es ar
the body, feeble, sick: Mt.xxv. 39 RG L mrg., 43 sq.;
Lk. ix. 2 L.Tr br.;) x. 9; Acts itv. 9;>-v. 15. 5q.5° 1'Co:
xi. 30.*
*Acta, -as, 7, Asia; 1. Asia proper, 7 idiws Kadov-
pevn Acia (Ptol. 5,2), or proconsular Asia[often so called
from the 16th cent. down; but correctly speaking it was
a provincia c onsularis, although the ruler of it was vested
with ‘proconsular power.’ The ‘Asia’ of the N. T.
must not be confounded with the ‘ Asia proconsularis’
of the 4th cent.], embracing Mysia, Lydia, Phrygia and
Caria [cf. Cic. pro Flac. ¢. 27]: Acts vi. 9 [Lom. Tr mrg.
br.]; xvi. 6 sqq.; 1 Pet.i. 1; Rev.i.4; and, apparently, Acts
xix, 26; xx. 169/12 Co. 4. 85) 2 Dimaraaveter Clin
RW B.s. v. Asien; Stark in Schenkel i. p. 261 sq. ; [BB.
DD. s. v. Asia; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii.;
Wieseler, Chron. d. apost. Zeit. p. 31 sqq.]. 2. 14
part of proconsular Asia, embracing Mysia, Lydia, and
Caria, (Plin. h. n. 5, 27, (28) [al. 5, 100]): Acts ii. 9.
’"Actavés, -ov, 6, a native of Asia, Asian, Asiatic: Acts
xx. 4. -[ (Thue; ale) i*
"Acvapyys, -ov, 6, an Asiarch, President of Asia: Acts
xix. 31. Each of the cities of proconsular Asia, at the
autumnal equinox, assembled its most honorable and
opulent citizens, in order to select one to preside over
the games to be exhibited that year, at his expense, in
honor of the gods and the Roman emperor. Thereupon
each city reported the name of the person selected to a
general assembly held in some leading city, as Ephesus,
Smyrna, Sardis. This general council, called 76 xowédv,
selected ten out of the number of candidates, and sent
them to the proconsul; and the proconsul, apparently,
chose one of these ten to preside over the rest. This
explains how it is that in Acts l.c. several Asiarchs
are spoken of, while Eusebius h. e. 4, 15, 27 mentions
only one; [perhaps also the title outlasted the ser-
vice]. Cf. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. s. v.
Asiarchen; [BB.DD.s. v.; but esp. Le Bas et Wadding-
ton, Voyage Archéol. Inserr. part. v. p. 244 sq.; Kuhn.
——
NES OE Re hc) Ge:
aciTia
Die stidtische u. biirgerl. Verf. des rom. Reichs, i. 106
sqq-; Marquardt, Rom. Staatsverwalt. i. 374 sqq. ; Stark
in Schenkel i. 263; esp. Bp. Lghtft. Polycarp, p. 987 sqq.].*
deitta, -as, 4}, (dotros q. V-), abstinence from food (wheth-
er voluntary or enforced) : ody long, Acts xxvii. 21.
(Hat. 3, 52; Eur. Suppl. 1105; [Aristot. probl. 10,35 ;
eth. Nic. 10 p. 1180°, 9]; Joseph. antt. 12, 7; al.)*
é-stros,-ov, (ciros), fasting; without having eaten: Acts
xxvii. 33. (Hom. Od. 4, 788; then fr. Soph. and Thue.
down. )*
dokéw,-6; 1. to form by art, to adorn; in Homer.
2. to exercise (one’s self), take pains, labor, strive; foll.
by an inf. (as in Xen. mem. 2, 1, 6; Cyr. 5, 5, 12, etc.) :
Acts xxiv. 16.*
dokés, -ov, 6, a leathern bag or bottle,in which water or
wine was kept: Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37 sq.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) [BB.DD.
s. v. Bottle; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 92.] *
dopévws, adv., (for yopevas ; fr. 7Sopar), with joy, glad-
ly: Acts ii. 41 [Rec.]; xxi. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
[the adv. fr. Aeschyl.] down.) *
G-cohos, -ov, (copes), unwise, foolish: Eph. v. 15.
[From Theogn. down. ]*
dorétopat; [impf. 7omafouny]; 1 aor. nomacduny; (fr.
ona with a intensive [q. v., but cf. Vanicek p. 1163 ;
Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 324 sq.]; hence prop. to draw to
one’s self [W. § 38, 7 fin.]; cf. doxaipw for cxaipw, aorai-
pe for oraipa, dorapi¢o for orapifw) ; [fr. Hom. down];
a. with an acc. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid wel-
come, wish well to, (the Israelites, on meeting and at
parting, generally used the formula 17 piv); used
of those accosting any one: Mt. x. 12; Mk. ix. 15; xv.
18; Lk. i. 40; Acts xxi. 19. of those who visit one to
see him a little while, departing almost immediately af-
terwards: Acts xviii. 22; xxi. 7; like the Lat. salutare,
our ‘ pay one’s respects to,’ of those who show regard for
a distinguished person by visiting him: Acts xxv. 13,
(Joseph. antt. 1,19, 5; 6,11,1). of those who greet one
whom they meet in the way: Mt. v. 47 (in the East even
now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each
other) ; Lk. x. 4 (asa salutation was made not merely by
a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em-
bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting
frequently). of those departing and bidding farewell:
Acts xx. 1; xxi.6[RG]. of the absent, saluting by
letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-23; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12
(13) ; Phil. iv. 21 sq.; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 sq.3 1 Th. v. 26,
etc. ev dirnuart: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii.
12; 1 Pet. v.14. b. with an acc. of the thing, to receive
joyfully, welcome : ras émayyeXias, Heb. xi. 13, (rv cup-
gopay, Kur. Ion 587; ry evvorav, Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 3;
Tovs Adyous, ibid. 7, 8, 43 so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524).
[Compe.: am-acmdcopar. |
domacpds, -ov, 6, (aomdfopa), a salutation, — either
oral: Mt. xxiii. 7; Mk. xii.38; Lk. i. 29, 41,44; xi. 43;
xx. 46; or written: 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th. iii.
17. [From Theogn. down. ]*
G-omdos, -ov, (omidos a spot), spotless: duvds, 1 Pet. i.
81
aoTHp
19; (tos, Hdian. 5, 6, 16 [7 ed. Bekk.]; uAov, Anthol.
Pal. 6, 252, 3). metaph. free from censure, irreproach-
able, 1 Tim. vi. 14; free from vice, unsullied, 2 Pet. iii.
14; amo Tov Koopov, Jas. i. 27 [B. § 132, 5]. (In ecel.
writ.) *
doris, -idos, 7, an asp, a small and most venomous ser-
pent, the bite of which is fatal unless the part bitten be
immediately cut away: Ro. iii. 13. (Deut. xxxii. 33;
Is. xxx. 6 [ete. Hdt., Aristot., al.] Ael. nat. an. 2, 24; 6,
38; Plut. mor. p. 380 f. i. e. de Isid. et Osir. § 74; Op-
pian. cyn. 3,433.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Asp; Tristram, Nat.
Hist. of the Bible, p. 270 sqq.]*
aorovb0os, -ov, (aovd7 a libation, which, as a kind of
sacrifice, accompanied the making of treaties and com-
pacts; cf. Lat. spondere) ; [fr. Thuc. down]; 1. with-
out a treaty or covenant; of things not mutually agreed
upon, e. g. abstinence from hostilities, Thuc. 1, 37, ete.
2. that cannot be persuaded to enter into a covenant, im-
placable, (in this sense fr. Aeschyl. down; esp. in the
phrase domovdos modepos, Dem. pro cor. p. 314, 16;
Polyb. 1, 65,6; [Philo de sacrif. §4]; Cic. ad Att. 9,
10, 5; [ef. Trench § lii.]): joined with doropyos, Ro. i.
31 Rec.; 2 Tim. iii. 3.*
Gooapiov, -ov, To, an assarium or assarius, the name of
a coin equal to the tenth part of a drachma [see dyvapiov |,
(dimin. of the Lat. as, Rabbin. 10°), [a penny]: Mt. x.
29; Lk. xii. 6. (Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v.
Farthing. ]*
docov, adv., nearer, (compar. of ayyxe near [cf. éyyts ]) :
Acts xxvii. 13 [here Rec.**’Aga. (or”Aac. q. v.), Recbe &
aoo., (cf. Tdf. ad loc.) ; but see Meyer]. (Hom., Hdt.,
tragic poets; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 4.) *
”Acoos [so all edd., perh. better -cads ; Chandler § 317,
cf. § 319; Pape, Eigennamen sg. v. ], -ov, 7, Assos, a mari-
time city in Asia Minor, on the Aigean Sea [Gulf of
Adramyttium], and nine [ace. to Tab. Peuting. (ed.
Fortia d’Urban, Paris 1845, p. 170) 20 to 25] miles [see
Hackett on Acts as below ] distant [to the S.] from Troas,
acity of Lesser Phrygia: Acts xx. 13 sq.; [formerly read
also in Acts xxvii. 13 after the Vulg.; cf. dacov. See
Papers of the Archzol. Inst. of America, Classical
Series i. (1882) esp. pp. 60 sqq.].*
dotatéw, -@; (doratros unstable, strolling about; cf.
dxatdaotatos); to wander about, to rove without a settled
abode, [A. V. to have no certain dwelling-place]: 1 Co. iv.
11. (Anthol. Pal. appendix 39, 4.) *
do-retos, -ov, (atu a city); 1. of the city; of pol-
ished manners (opp. to é&ypotkos rustic), genteel, (fr. Xen.
and Plat. down). 2. elegant (of body), comely, fair,
(Judith xi. 23; Aristaenet. 1,4, 1 and 19, 8): of Moses
(Ex. ii. 2), Heb. xi. 23; with r@ Oe@ added, unto God,
God being judge, i.e. truly fair, Acts vii. 20; ef. W.§ 31, 4
a. p. 212 (199); [248 (232)]; B.179 (156); (Philo, vit.
Moys. i. § 3, says of Moses yeryndeis 6 mais evObs dw éve-
gnvev aorevorépar i) kat iStornv). [Cf. Trench § evi. *
dxtip, -épos, 6, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the
sky), cf. dorpov, Lat. stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; Fick,
Pt. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Vanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom.
aoTnplKTos
down]; a star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [acc. -épay 8* C; see
Gponv fin.]; xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev.
vi. 13; viii. 10-12; ix. 1; xii. 1, 4; 6 dornp avrod, the
star betokening his birth, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. ‘the star of the
Messiah,’ on which cf. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeo-
rum § 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner’s
Zeitschr. f. d. histor. Theol. for 1847, fase. 3; [B. D.s. v.
Star of the Wise Men]); by the figure of the seven
stars which Christ holds in his right hand, Rev. i. 16;
ii.1; iii. 1, are signified the angels of the seven churches,
under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20; see what was
said s. v. @yyedos, 2. dotnp 6 mpwivos the morning star,
Rev. xxii. 16 [Rec. dpOpuvos | ; i. 28 (Sa0w ait@ Tov aorepa
t. mpwivoy I will give to him the morning star, that he
may be irradiated with its splendor and outshine all
others, i. e. I will cause his heavenly glory to excel that
of others). dorépes mavnra, wandering stars, Jude 13
(these are not planets, the motion of which is scarcely
noticed by the commonalty, but far more probably comets,
which Jude regards as stars which have left the course
prescribed them by God, and wander about at will — cf.
Enoch xviii. 15, and so are a fit symbol of men mAavartes
kat mAava@pevor, 2 Tim. iii. 13).*
aornpiktos, -ov, (atnpitw), unstable, unsteadfast: 2 Pet.
ii. 14; iii. 16. (Anthol. Pal. 6, 203, 11.) *
doropyos, -ov, (aropyn love of kindred), without natural
affection: Ro. i. 31; 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aeschin., Theocr.,
Plut., al.) *
aotoxéw, -@: 1 aor. nordxynoa; (to be doroyos, fr.
aroxos a mark), to deviate from, miss, (the mark): with
gen. [W. § 30, 6], to deviate from anything, 1 Tim. i. 6
(Sir. vii. 19; viii. 9); mepi re, 1 Tim. vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii.
18. (Polyb., Plut., Leian., [al.].)*
dorpamnh, -7s, 7, lightning: Lk. x. 18; xvii. 24; Mt. xxiv.
21; xxwvill. 3; plur., Rey. iv.5; vill. 5; xi, 19; xvi. 18;
of the gleam of a lamp, Lk. xi. 36 [so Aeschyl. frag. (fr.
schol. on Soph. Oed. Col. 1047) 188 Ahrens, 372 Dind. ].*
dorparre; (later form orpdmra, see domd Copa: init.
[prob. allied with dornp q. v.]); to lighten, (Hom. Il. 9,
237; 17, 595, and often in Attic): Lk. xvii. 24. of
dazzling objects: éo6ns (RG écOnoes), Lk. xxiv. 4
(and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. Oed. Col. 1067;
Eur. Phoen. 111, down). [Comp.: ¢&, Tept-aoTparrw. | *
Gotpov, -ov, Td, [(see dornp init.), fr. Hom.down]; 1.
a group of stars, a constellation ; but not infreq. also 2.
i.q. dornp a star: Lk. xxi. 25; Acts xxvii. 20; Heb. xi.
12; the image of a star, Acts vii. 43.*
"A-ciy-xpitos [T WH ’Acivep.], -ov, 6, (a priv. and
avykpivw to compare; incomparable); Asyncritus, the
name of an unknown Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.*
d-oippwvos, -ov, not agreeing in sound, dissonant, inhar-
monious, at variance: mpos addAndovs (Diod. 4, 1), Acts
xxviii. 25. (Sap. xviii. 10; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 8, 1];
Plat., Plut., fal.}.) *
a-civeros, -ov, unintelligent, without understanding: Mt.
xv. 16; Mk. vii. 18; stupid: Ro.i. 21; x.19. In imita-
tion of the Hebr. 523, ungodly (Sap. i. 5; Sir. xv. 7 sq-
[cf. douvereiv, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 158]), because a wicked
82
> ,
acWTlLa
man has no mind for the things which make for salva-
tion: Ro. i. 31 [al. adhere here to the Grk. usage; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) [Cf.
codes, fin. ]*
a-cvv-YeTos, -ov, 1. wuncompounded, simple, (Plat.,
Aristot., al.). 2. (cvvridena to covenant), covenant-
breaking, faithless: Ro. i. 31 (so in Jer. iii. 8, 11; Dem.
de falsa leg. p. 383, 6; cf. Pape and Passow s. v.; dour
Gereiy to be faithless [Ps. lxxii. (Ixxiii.) 15; 2 Esdr. x. 2;
Neh. i. 8, etc.]; dovvOecia transgression, 1 Chr. ix. 1
[Ald., Compl. ; 2 Esdr.ix. 2, 4; Jer. iii. 7]; edouvOereiv
to keep faith; [cf. Trench § lii.]).*
arpadea, -as, 7, (dopadns), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; a.
Jirmness, stability: €v maon aod. most securely, Acts v.
23. trop. certainty, undoubted truth: Neyer (see ddyos,
I. 7), Lk. i. 4, (rod Adyou, the certainty of a proof, Xen.
mem. 4, 6,15). b. security from enemies and dangers,
safety: 1 Th. v. 3 (opp. to kivduvos, Xen. mem. 3, 12, 7).*
dorhadis, -€s, (cpaddw to make to totter or fall, to
cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo, Germ. fallen, ete., Eng. fall, fail],
opdddopuat to fall, to reel), [fr. Hom. down]; a. firm
(that can be relied on, confided in) : ayxupa, Heb. vi. 19
(where L and Tr have received as the form of ace. sing.
aogadny ['Tdf. 7 -Ajv; cf. Tdf. ad loc.; Delitzsch, Com.
ad loc.] see dpony). trop. certain, true: Acts xxv. 26;
TO aodadés, Acts xxi. 34; xxii.30. b. suited to confirm:
twi, Phil. iii. 1 (so Joseph. antt. 3, 2, 1).*
dopaditw: 1 aor. pass. inf. dadadioOnvac; 1 aor. mid.
nopartoauny ; (aopadns); esp. freq. fr. Polyb. down; to
make firm, to make secure against harm ; pass. to be made
secure: Mt. xxvii. 64 (6 ragos) [B. 52 (46)]; mid.
prop. to make secure for one’s self or for one’s own ad-
vantage, (often in Polyb.): Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; to make
fast tovs modas eis To EvAov, Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2d.;
B. § 147, 8].*
dopadas, adv., [fr. Hom. down], safely (so as to prevent
escape): Mk. xiv. 44; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly: ywa-
oxew, Acts ii. 36 (eiddres, Sap. xviii. 6).*
aoxnpovew, -@; (to be doynuwy, deformed ; tv Keda-
Anv acxnpoveiv, of a bald man, Ael. v. h. 11, 4) ; to act un-
becomingly ({Eur.], Xen., Plat., al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5; emi twa,
towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for
her, 1 Co. vii. 36.*
doxnportvn, -ns, 7, (acxnpov ); fr. Plato down; un-
seemliness, an unseemly deed: Ro. i. 27; of the pudenda,
one’s nakedness, shame: Rev. xvi. 15, as in Ex. xx. 26;
Deut. xxiii. 14, ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.)*
GX Fpov, -ovos, neut. doxnuov, (cxjpa); a. deformed.
b. indecent, unseemly: 1 Co. xii. 23, opp. to etoynpov.
({Hdt.], Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
dcwrla, -as, 7, (the character of an dowros, i. e. of an
abandoned man, one that cannot be saved, fr. cada, od@
i. q. cbCo, [d-cw-ro-s, Curtius § 570]; hence prop. incor-
rigibleness), an abandoned, dissolute, life; profligacy, prod-
igality, [R. V. riot]: Eph. v. 18; Tit. i. 6; 1 Pet. iv. 4;
(Prov. xxviii. 7; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Plat. rep. 8, p. 560 e.;
Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 1, 5 (3) p. 1120*, 3; Polyb. 32, 20,
9; 40, 12, 7; cf. Cic. Tusc. 3, 8; Hdian. 2, 5, 2 (1 ed.
ao0WTWS
Bekk.), and elsewhere). Cf. Tittmann i. p. 152 sq.;
[Trench § xvi.].*
acatws, adv., (adj. dowros,on which see dawria), dis-
solutely, profligately: ¢jv (Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk.
xv. 13 [A. V. riotous living |.*
Graktéw, -@: 1 aor. nraxtnoa; to be drakrtos, to be disor-
derly; a. prop. of soldiers marching out of order or
quitting the ranks: Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 6, etc. Hence b.
to be neglectful of duty, to be lawless: Xen. Cyr. 8,1, 22;
oec. 5, 15; Lys. 141, 18 [i.e. c. Alcib. or. 1 § 18], al. c.
to lead a disorderly life: 2 Th. iii. 7, ef. 11.*
G-takxtos, -ov, (racow), disorderly, out of the ranks,
(often so of soldiers); irregular, inordinate (drakrot
nOovai immoderate pleasures, Plat. legg. 2, 660 b.; Plut.
de lib. educ. ¢. 7), deviating from the prescribed order or
meal Dh. ve.,d45 ef 2) Th. in. 6. (In Grk. writ. ir.
[Hdt. and] Thuc. down; often in Plat.) *
é-raktws, adv., disorderly: 2 Th. iii. 6 ataxtws mepura-
teiv, which is explained by the added kat px) Kata thy
mapadoow Hv mapedaBe map nuov; cf. ibid. 11, where it is
explained by pndev epyatcuevor, adda reprepyaCopevor.
(Often in Plato.) *
drekvos, -ov, (rexvov), without offspring, childless: Lk.
xx. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr.
Hesiod opp. 600 down.)*
drevitw; 1 aor. nrévoa; (fr. arevns stretched, intent,
and this fr. reiyw and a intensive ; [yet cf. W. § 16,4 B.a.
fin., and s. v. A, a, 3]); to fix the eyes on, gaze upon: with
dat. of pers., Lk. iv. 20; xxii. 56; Acts iii. 12; x.4; xiv. 9;
xxiii. 1; foll. by eis with acc. of pers., Acts iii. 4; vi. 15;
xiii. 9; metaph. to fix one’s mind on one as an example,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 2; ets rt, Acts i.10; vii. 55; 2 Co.
iii. 7, 13; ets tt, to look into anything, Acts xi. 6. (3
Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, 11, 5 [i. e. 6, 11%, 12
Dind.]; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. évar.]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 12, 3;
Leian. cont. 16, al.) *
Grep, prep., freq. in the poets [fr. Hom. down], rare
in prose writ. fr. Plat. [?] down; without, apart from:
with gen. [ Dion. Hal. 3,10; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5];
in the Bible only in 2 Macc. xii. 15; Lk. xxii. 6 (drep
éxAov in the absence of the multitude; hence, without
tumult), 35. [‘ Teaching’ 3, 10; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.]*
aripdtw; 1 aor. ntrivaca; [Pass., pres. arysatouar]; 1
aor. inf. atiwacOjvar; (fr. drysos; hence) to make dripos,
to dishonor, insult, treat with contumely, whether in word,
in deed, or in thought : [Mk. xii. 4 T Tr mrg. WH (cf.
atiysdaw and -wow)]; Lk. xx. 11; Jn. viii. 49; Acts v. 41;
Ro. ii. 23; Jas. ii. 6 [W. § 40, 5, 2; B. 202 (175)]. Pass.:
Ro. i. 24, on which cf. W. 326 (305 sq.); [and § 39, 3
N. 3]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) *
G-risdw, -@: [1 aor. nTivnoal; (Tyun); to deprive of
honor, despise, treat with contempt or contumely : tid, Mk.
xii. 4 L Tr txt. nripnoay (see dripatw and -yow). (In
Grk. writ. [chiefly Epic] fr. Hom. down.) *
Gripsla, -as, 7, (atiuos), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace, [fr.
Hom. down]: 1 Co. xi. 14; opp. to dda, 2 Co. vi. 8; 1
Co. xv. 43 (év dria sc. dv, in a state of disgrace, used
of the unseemliness and offensiveness of a dead body) ;
83
av0dons
kat’ dripiay equiv. to drives, with contempt sc. of myself,
2 Co. xi. 21 [R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. card, II.
fin.]; man atipias base lusts, vile passions, Ro. i. 26, ef.
W.§ 34,3 b.; |B. § 132,10]. eis dripiay for a dishonor-
able use, of vessels, opp. to run: Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii.
20.*
Gripos, -ov, (rin); fr. Hom. down; without honor, un-
honored, dishonored: Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; 1 Co. iv.
10 (opp. to €vdo€os) ; base, of less esteem: 1 Co. xii. 23
[here the neut. plur. of the compar., driyydrepa (Rec.*#
aTiwrepa) |.*
atindw, -@: [pf. pass. ptep. 7rywpevos]; (Aros); fr.
Aeschyl. down ; to dishonor, mark with disgrace: Mk. xii.
4 KG, see atizdw [and dripage |.*
atpls, -idos, 7, vapor: Jas. iv. 14; xamvod (Joel ii. 30
[al. ili. 3]), Acts ii. 19 [opp. to carves in Aristot. meteor.
2, 4 p. 359°, 29 sq., to vedos ibid. 1, 9 p. 346", 32].
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 75 and] Plat. Tim. p. 86 e.
down.) *
G-ropos, -ov, (réeuvw to cut), that cannot be cut in two or
divided, indivisible, [ Plat. Soph. 229 d.; of time, Aristot.
phys. 8, 8 p. 263°, 27]: év dréu@ in a moment, 1 Co.
xv. 52.*
G-romros, -ov, (Tdémos), out of place; not befitting, unbe-
coming, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down; very often in
Plato); in later Grk. in an ethical sense, improper,
wicked: Lk. xxiii. 41 (@romév tt mpaooey, as in Job xxvii.
6; 2 Mace. xiv. 23); Acts xxv. 5 LT Tr WH; (Sept.
for ys Job iv. 8; xi. 11, etc. Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 6;
Plut. de aud. poét. ce. 3 mavAa and aroma) ; of men: 2 Th.
ill. 2 (Groot kat tovnpoi; Luth. unartig, more correctly
unrighteous [(iniquus), A. V. unreasonable, cf. Ellic. ad
loc.]). inconvenient, harmful: Acts xxviii. 6 pndév dromov
eis avTov yiwdpevoy, no injury, no harm coming to him,
(Thue. 2, 49; Joseph. antt. 11, 5, 2; Hdian. 4, 11, 7 [4,
ed. Bekk.]).*
’"Arrédeva [-Aia T WH (see I, ¢) |, -as, 7, A ttalia, a mar-
itime city of Pamphylia in Asia, very near the borders
of Lycia, built and named by Attalus Philadelphus, king
of Pergamum; now Antali [or Adalia; cf. Dict. of Geog.]:
Acts xiv..25,*
avyafo: 1 aor. inf. adydoar; (avyn) ; 1.) aniGrk.
writ. transitively, to beam upon, irradiate. 2. inthe
Bible intrans. to be bright, to shine forth: 2 Co. iv. 4 [L
mrg. Tr mrg. catavy. see dwtiopds, b.], (Lev. xiii. 24-28,
[ete.]). [Comp.: &-, xat-avyd¢o. |*
avyh, -is, 7, brightness, radiance, (cf. Germ. Auge [eye],
of which the tragic poets sometimes use avyn, see Pape
for L. and S.; ef. Lat. lumina]), especially of the sun;
hence 7Aiov is often added (Hom. and sqq.), daylight;
hence dypus [-pe T Tr WH] avyas even till break of day,
Acts xx. 11 (Polyaen. 4, 18 p. 386 xara ray mparny avyny
THs Nuépas). [SYN. see deyyos. fin.]*
Adyovoros, -ov, 6, Augustus [ef. Eng. Majesty; see
oeBaords, 2], the surname of G. Julius Caesar Octavia-
nus, the first Roman emperor: LK. ii. 1.*
av0dbns, -es, (fr. adrés and 7dopat), self-pleasing, self-
willed, arrogant: Tit.i. 7; 2 Pet.ii.10. (Gen. xlix. 3, 7;
> /
av@aipetos
Prov. xxi. 24. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down.) [Trench § xciii.]*
av-alperos, -ov, (fr. avros and aipéopar), self-chosen ; in
Grk. writ. esp. of states or conditions, as dovAeia, Thuc.
6, 40, etc., more rarely of persons; voluntary, of free
‘choice, of one’s own accord, (as orpatnyds, Xen. an. 5, 7,
29, explained § 28 by 6s éavrdv €Anrat) : 2 Co. viii. 3, 17.*
avbevréw, -d ; (a bibl. and eccl. word ; fr. avevrns contr.
fr. avroevrns, and this fr. airds and évrea arms [al. évrns,
‘ef. Hesych. cuvevtns: ovvepyos; cf. Lobeck, Technol. p.
121]; hence a. acc. to earlier usage, one who with his
own hand kills either others or himself. 0. in later Grk.
writ. one who does a thing himself, the author (rns mpakews,
Polyb. 23, 14, 2, etc.) ; one who acts on his own authority,
autocratic, i. q. avtoxpatwp an absolute master ; cf. Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 120 [also as above; cf. W. § 2,1 c.]); to
govern one, exercise dominion over one: twos, 1 Tim.
ie 12%
avdéw, -@: 1 aor. niAnoa; [pres. pass. ptcp. To avAov-
plevov]; (avdos); to play on the flute, to pipe: Mt. xi.17;
Lk. vii. 32; 1Co. xiv. 7. (Fr. [Alem., Hdt.,] Xen. and
Plat. down.) *
avd, -7s, 7, (dw to blow; hence) prop. a place open to
the air (8:amvedpevos Toros avAn éyerar, Athen. 5,15 p.
189 b.); 1. among the Greeks in Homer’s time an
uncovered space around the house, enclosed by a wall, in
which the stables stood (Hom. Od. 9, 185; Il. 4, 433) ;
hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the
open country in which flocks were herded at night, a sheep-
fold: Inox. 1, 16. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the
house, Hebr. \¥1, Sept. addy, Vulg. atrium. Inthe O. T.
particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the
temple at Jerusalem; so in the N. T. once: Rev. xi. 2
(rv atdAny thy eEwbev [Rect Exwbev| rod vaov). The
dwellings of the higher classes usually had two avAai, one
exterior, between the door and the street, called also
mpoavrtov (q. v.); the other interior, surrounded by the
buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned
Mt. xxvi. 69 (where ¢£@ is opp. to the room in which the
judges were sitting); Mk. xiv. 66; Lk. xxii.55. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Hauser ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Court; BB.DD.
s. v. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace: Mt. xxvi.
3, 58; Mk. xiv. 54; xv. 16; Lk. xi. 21; Jn. xviii. 15, and
so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 74 down [cf.
Eustath. 1483, 39 r@ tis atiAns dvouare ra Sparta Sydot,
Suid. col. 652 ¢. addy: 9 rod Baowéws oikia. Yet this sense
is denied to the N. T. by Meyer et al.; see Mey. on Mt.
ier*
avAnTts, -ov, 6, (atvAéw), a flute-player : Mt. ix. 23; Rev.
xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hdt. 6, 60
down.) *
avAifopar: depon.; impf. nddctounyv; 1 aor. nidioOnv
[ Veitch s. v.; B.51 (44); W.§ 39, 2]; (avAn) ; in Sept.
mostly for 19; 1. prop. to lodge in the court-yard
esp. at night; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pass the
night in the open air, bivouac. 3. univ. to pass the
night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 (é&epyopevos
nvrifero eis rd Spos, going out to pass the night he retired
84
auTapKews
to the mountain; cf. B. § 147,15). (In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down.) *
atdés, -od, 6, (a, adw), (fr. Hom. down], a pipe: 1Co.
xiv. 7. [Cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. v.]*
avtdvw, and earlier (the only form in Pind. and Soph.
[Veitch s. v. says, ‘Hes. Mimnerm. Soph. Thuc. always
have av or av€oua, and Pind. except avéava: Fr. 130
(Bergk)’]) avéw (Eph. ii. 21; Col. ii. 19) ; impf. niéavov;
fut. avénow ; 1 aor. nvEnoa; [Pass., pres. avEavouat]; 1 aor.
nv&nOny ; 1. trans. to cause to grow, to augment: 1
Co. ili. 6 sq.; 2Co.ix.10. Pass. to grow, increase, become
greater: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.8 L T Tr WH; 2 Co.x. 15;
Col. i. 6 [not Rec.]; eis tay ériyvwow rod Oeod unto the
knowledge of God, Col.i.10 (GL T Tr WH rf emiyraces
tov Geov); eis cwrnpiay [not Rec.] to the attaining of sal-
vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. acc. to later usage (fr. Aristot.
an. post. 1,13 p. 78°, 6, etc., down; but nowhere in Sept.
[ef. B. 54 (47); 145 (127); W. § 38, 1]) intrans. to grow,
increase: of plants, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec.; Lk. xii.
27 [not Tdf.; Trmrg. br. avé.]; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants,
Lk. i. 80; ii. 40; of a multitude of people, Acts vii. 17.
of inward Christian growth: eis Xpuorov, in reference to
[W. 397 (3871); yet cf. Ellic. ad loc.] Christ, Eph. iv.
15; eis vadv, so as to form a temple, Eph. ii. 21; év xapure,
2 Pet. iii. 18; with an acc. of the substance, ryv avénow,
Col. ii. 19 [ef. W. § 32,2; B. § 131, 5, also Bp. Lehtft.’s
note ad loc.]; of the external increase of the gospel
it is said 6 Aoyos nv—ave: Acts vi. 7; xii. 24; xix. 20;
of the growing authority of a teacher and the number of
his adherents (opp. to €Aarrovc Oat), Jn. iii. 30. [Comp.:
ouv-, uTep-avéave. | *
avéyots, -ews, 7, (avéw), increase, growth: Eph. iv. 16;
tov Oeod, effected by God, Col. ii. 19; cf. Meyer ad loc.
({Hat.], Thuc., Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
aigtw, see avEdva.
avptov, adv., (fr. avpa the morning air, and this fr. ave
to breathe, blow; [ace. to al. akin to nas, Lat. aurora;
Curtius § 613, ef. Vaniéek p. 944]), to-morrow (Lat. cras) :
Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; Acts xxiii. 15 Rec., 20; xxv. 22;
1 Co. xv. 32 (fr. Is. xxii. 13) ; onpepov cai avpiov, LK. xiii.
32 sq.3 Jas. iv. 13 [Rec.st G; al. orp. i avp.]. 9 avptov se.
nuepa [W. § 64, 5; B. § 123, 8] the morrow, Mt. vi. 34;
Acts iv. 3; éi ryv avptov, on the morrow, i. e. the next
morning, Lk. x. 35; Actsiv. 5; 76 [L ra; WH om.] ris
avpwov, what the morrow will bring forth, Jas. iv. 14.
[From Hom. down. ]*
aviernpds, -d, -dv, (fr. avo to dry up), harsh (Lat. aw
sterus), stringent of taste, avarnpov kal yAuKd (kal mexpdv),
Plat. lege. 10, 897 a.; otvos, Diog. Laért. 7, 117. of
mind and manners, harsh, rough, rigid, [cf. Trench
§ xiv.]: Lk. xix. 21, 22; (Polyb. 4, 20, 7; Diog. Laért.
7, 26, etc. 2 Macc. xiv. 30).*
avtapKeia, -as, 7, (adtapkns, q. V-), @ perfect condition
of life, in which no aid or support is needed; equiv. to
Teredtns KTHoEws ayabav, Plat. def. p. 412 b.; often in
Aristot. [defined by him (pol. 7, 5 init. p. 1326", 29) as
follows : rd mdvra trdpxew Kk. Sei Oat pnOevds airapkes ; cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 11]; hence, a sufficiency of the
avTapKns
necessaries of life: 2 Co. ix. 8; subjectively, a mind con-
tented with its lot, contentment: 1 Tim. vi. 6; (Diog.
Laért. 10, 130).*
avrdpxns [on the accent see Chandler § 705],-es, (adrds,
dpxew), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sufficient for one’s self, strong
enough or possessing enough to need no aid or support;
independent of external circumstances; often in Grk.
writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 1, 32 down. Subjectively,
contented with one’s lot, with one’s means, though the slender-
est: Phil. iv. 11, (so Sir. xl. 18; Polyb. 6, 48, 7; Diog.
Laért. 2, 24 of Socrates, adrdpxns kai ceuvds). [Cf£. adrap-
reva. | *
avro-KaTd-KptTos, -ov, (avTos, karaxpive), self-condemned :
Tit. iii. 11; (eccl. writ. [cf. W. § 34, 3]).*
airéparos, -ov, and -n, -ov, (fr. a’rés and peuaa to desire
eagerly, fr. obsol. theme pdw), moved by one’s own in
pulse, or acting without the instigation or intervention of
another, (fr. Hom. down); often of the earth producing
plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits
growing without culture; [on its adverbial use cf. W.
§ 54, 2]: Mk. iv. 28; (Hadt. 2, 94; 8, 138; Plat. polit. p.
272 a.; [Theophr. h. p. 2,1]; Diod. 1, 8, ete. Lev. xxv.
5,11). of gates opening of their own accord: Acts xii.
10, (so in Hom. Il. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 7; Apoll.
Rh. 4, 41; Plut. Timol. 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21; [Dion
Cass. 44, 17]).*
avrémrns, -ov, 6, (ad’tds, OIITQ), seeing with one’s own
eyes, an eye-witness, (cf. aitjxoos one who has himself
heard a thing) : Lk.i. 2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
abrés, -7, -6, pron. (“ derived from the particle ad with
the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself
it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has
either been previously mentioned or, when the whole
discourse is looked at, must necessarily be vupplied.”
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vanitek p. 268]). It is
used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T.
far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this
very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they de-
viate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On
classic usage cf. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which
dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger
pp. 732-736.]
I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to
distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with
another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. i
When used to express Opposition or Distinction,
it is added a. to the subjects implied in the verb, the
versonal pronouns éya, nueis, ov, etc., being omitted: Lk.
v. 37 (avros éxyvOnoera the wine, as opp. to the skins);
Lk. xxii. 71 (airol yap jnxovcayev we ourselves, opp. to
witnesses whose testimony could have been taken); Jn.
li. 25 (avrés éyivwckev, opp. to testimony he might have
called for); Jn. iv. 42 (we ourselves, not thou only) ; Jn.
ix. 21 [T Tr WH om.]; Acts xviii. 15 (dWeoGe airol) ;
xx. 34; xxii. 19; 1 Th.i. 9, ete.; with a negative added,
‘he does not himself do this or that,’ i. e. he leaves it to
others: Lk. vi. 42 (airds, viz. thou, ot BXérav); Lk. xi.
46 (avroi, viz ye, ov mpoowavere), 52; Jn. xviii. 28; 3
85
aid
avuTos
Jn. 10. With the addition of xai to indicate that a thing
is ascribed to one equally with others: Lk. xiv. 12
(unmore kal avroi ce dytixadécwor); Xvi. 28; Acts ii. 22
[GL T TrWH om. kat]; Jn. iv. 45; xvii. 19,21; Phil.
ii. 24, ete. In other pass. cai aitds is added to a subject
expressly mentioned, and is placed after it ; and in trans-
lation may be joined to the predicate and rendered like-
wise: Lk. i. 36 (9 ovyyevns cov Kat adri cuverAnhvia vidv
tly kinswoman herself also, i. e. as well as thou); Mt.
XXVii. 57 (6s kal adrés euadnrevoe [L T Tr WH txt. red6n]
T@ "Inoov); Lk. xxiii. 51 [RG]; Mk. xv. 43; Acts viii.
13 (6 d€ Sivwv kai aitos éemiorevoe) ; XV. 32; xxi. 243 1
Jn. ii. 6; Gal. ii. 17; Heb. xiii. 3. b. it is added to
subjects expressed, whether to pronouns personal or
demonstrative, or to nouns proper or common: Jn. iii.
28 (avroi vpeis ye yourselves bear witness, not only have
I affirmed); Acts xx. 30 (€& iuav airav from among
your own selves, not only from other quarters) ; Ro. xv.
14 (kat adrds eyo I of myself also, not only assured by
report, cf. i. 8); 1 Co. v.13 (e€& ipay aitav from your
own society, opp. to them that are without, of whose
character God must be the judge) ; 1 Co. vii. 35; xi. 13;
1 Th. iv. 93 adrot otros, Acts xxiv. 20; adrov rovrov
(masc.), Acts xxv. 25; "Incovs avros Jesus himself, per-
sonally, opp. to those who baptized by his command,
Jn. iv. 2; avtés "Ingots, opp. to those who believed on
him on account of his miracles, Jn. ii. 24; Jesus himself,
not others only, Jn. iv. 44; adr. Aaveid, opp. to the doc-
tors of the law, whose decision did not seem quite to
agree with the words of David, Mk. xii. 36 sq.; Lk. xx.
42; avros 6 Saravas, opp. to his ministers, 2 Co. xi. 14;
avros 6 beds, God himself, not another, Rev. xxi. 3; avra
Ta émovpdma, the heavenly things themselves [i. e. sanc-
tuary ], opp. to its copies, Heb. ix. 23 [see émoupdnos, | c. ].
ce. it is used to distinguish one not only from his compan-
ions, disciples, servants, — as Mk. ii. 25 (adros kal of per
avTov) ; Jn. ii. 12; iv. 53; xviii. 1,— but also from things
done by him or belonging to him, as Jn. vii. 4 (ri moved Kat
¢nret avtés [L Tr mrg. WH mrg. atro]); 1 Co. iii. 15 (twos
70 €pyov Kataxanoerat, adtos b€ awOncera); Lk. xxiv. 15
(airés (6) "Inaots, Jesus himself in person, opp. to their
previous conversation about him). d. self to the exclu-
sion of others, i. e. he ete. alone, by one’s self: Mk. vi. 31
(ipeis adroit ye alone, unattended by any of the people;
ef. Fritzsche ad loc.) ; Jn. xiv. 11 (61a ra €pya atta [WH
mrg. aitod]); Ro. vii. 25 (adrés éy I alone, unaided by
the Spirit of Christ; cf. viii. 2); 2 Co. xii. 13 (airs eya,
unlike the other preachers of the gospel) ; Rev. xix. 12;
ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 733 iii.; Matth. § 467, 5; Kiihner
§ 468 Anm. 2; [Jelf § 656, 3]; with the addition of
povos (as often in Attic writ.): Jn. vi. 15. e. self, not
prompted or influenced by another, i. e. of one’s self, of
one’s own accord: Jn. xvi. 27 (so even Hom. Il. 17, 254;
and among Attic writ. esp. Xen.). 2. When it gives
Prominence, it answers a. to our emphatic he, she,
it: Mt. i. 21 (adrés cooee HE and no other); Mt. v. 4-10
(adroi); vi. 4 [RG]; xvii. 5 (adrod dxovere) ; Lk. vi. 35;
xvii. 16 ; xxiv. 21; Jn. ix. 21 (airos [T Tr WH om.]...
autos
airév...airdés); Acts x. 42 [L txt. Tr txt. WH odros];
Gal. iv. 17 (adrovs) ; Eph. ii. 10 (adrovd) ; Col.i. 17; 1 Jn.
ii. 2; iv. 5; Jas. ii.6 sq. So in Grk. writ. also fr. Hom.
down; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 734 v. It is used with the same
force after relative sentences, where Greek prose uses
otros: Mt. xii. 50 (o7us dv mpinon - . . , adtds pov ddeAdds
éorw, where in Mk. iii. 35 otros) ; Mt. xxvi. 48 ; Mk. xiv.
44; cf. B. 107 (94) sq. Less emphatically, adrés is put
before subjects, serving to recall them again: Mt. iii. 4
(airés 5€ Iwas now he, whom I spoke of, John) ; Mk.
vi. 17 (avros yap ‘Hpwdns) ; Ro. viii. 16 (avr ro mvevpa).
b. it points out some one as chief, leader, master of
the rest (often so in Grk., as in the well-known phrase of
the Pythagoreans airs épa [cf. W. § 22, 3, 4 and p. 150
(142)]): of Christ, Mt. viii. 24 ; Mk. iv. 38; vi. 47; viii.
29; Lk. v. 16 sq.; ix. 51; x. 38; of God, LK. vi. 35;
Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Jn. iv. 19 [mot Lchm.]. c. it answers
to our very, just, exactly, (Germ. eben, gerade): Ro. ix. 3
(airs ¢ym I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi-
cal to the Israelites); 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore
myself lowly in your presence, as ye said); avra ra épya,
Jn. v. 36; often in Luke ev airy ry nuépa or Spa, aire
T@ katp@, in that very day, hour, season: Lk. ii. 38; x. 21;
x. 12s xi. 1,°81 5 xx.) 19 xxi. 1253 xxiv.3) 885 )Acts
xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul airé rovro this very
thing: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 6; eis avro
tuito for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. ix.
17; xiii. 6; 2 Co. v.5; Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; and in
the same sense [ for this very thing] the simple accus.
(as in Attic, cf. Matth. § 470, 7; Kihner ii. 267 Anm. 6 ;
W. § 21 N. 2) rotro air, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ad
loc. ], and avré rovro, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here avro‘].
d. even, Lat. vel, adeo, (in Hom. ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
733 ii.) : kat adrn 4 Ktiows, Ro. viii. 21; ovdé 7 pvows adtn,
1 Co. xi. 14; kai [Tr om. L WH br. kai] adros 6 vids, 1 Co.
xv. 28; kai avry Sdppa even Sarah herself, although a
feeble old woman, Heb. xi. 11 [yet WH mrg. reads the
dat. a’tn Sdappa; see xaraBorn, 1].
II. airds has the force of a simple personal pronoun
of the third person, answering to our unemphatic he, she,
it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique
cases, him, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, —
as in the gen. absolute, e. g. avrod €AOdvros, Aadnoavtos,
ete.; or in the ace. with inf., ets 75 efvae adrods dvatoXo-
ynrous, Ro. i. 20; or after prepositions, é& avrod, ev aire,
etc.; or where it indicates the possessor, 6 matnp avrod ;
or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active
verb, as émidacet avT@, Mt. vii. 9; domdcacbe aitny, Mt.
x. 12; agels adrovs, Mt. xxvi. 44; jv dtavevov adrois, Lk.
i. 22; ov« ela avta dade, Lk. iv. 41; 9 cKoria avTo ov
xaréA\aBe, Jn.i.5. But see avrod below. 2. Contrary
to Grk. usage, in the N. T. even in the Nominative it
is put for a simple personal pronoun of the third person,
where the Greeks say ofros or 6 5€, or use no pronoun at
all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93)
sqq-; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not
decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage
illustrated under I. 1; — those in which airés is used of
86
autos
Christ, apparently to I. 1b. But, in my opinion, the
question is settled even by the following: airds, Mt.
xiv. 2; Mk. xiv. 15; Lk.i. 22; xv. 14; so too in the Sept.
(cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98); Sir. xlix. 7;
Tob. vi. 11; adroit, Mk. ii. 8 (odrws adroit S:adoyiCovra in
Grsb.); Lk. ix. 36; xiv. 1; xxii. 23; adré, Lk. xi. 14
[Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.].. Whether airy and adrai
also are so used, is doubtful; cf. B. 109 (95). 3:
Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted,
being evident from the context: Mk. vi. 5 (ém@els, se.
avrois); In. iii. 34 (didwor, se. avT@) ; Jn. x. 29 (dedaxé
pot, SC.avrovs) ; Acts xiii. 3 (dméAvear, sc. avtovs); Rev.
XVili. 21 (€Badev, sc. avrov), etc. 4. Not infrequently
avros in the oblique cases is added to the verb, although
the case belonging to this very verb has preceded: Mt.
Vill. 1 (karaBdyre S€ adr [L. Tr WH gen. absol.] dad rod
dpous NKodovOnoay aita) ; Mt. iv. 16; v.40; viii. 23, 28
[RG]; ix. 28; xxv. 29 (a6 [om. by LT Tr WH] rod py
€xovros ... am aitov); xxvi. 71 [RGLbr. T]; Mk. v. 2
[RG]; ix. 28[RG]; Jn. xv. 2 (wav kAnpa. . . aiper ado) ;
Acts vii. 21 [RG]; Jas. iv. 17; Rev. ii. 7; vi. 4 [L Tr
mrg. br.]; cf. W. § 22,4 a.; B. 142 (125). Doubtless
the writer, while writing the earlier words with the in-
tention of joining them to the leading verb to follow,
marked off these very words as a clause by themselves,
as if they formed a protasis; and so, when he came to
the leading verb, he construed it just as though it were
to form an apodosis. 5. By a Hebraism airds is used
redundantly inrelative sentences: js eye 70 Ovyarpiov
aitis, Mk. vii. 25 ; ob T@ podomt adrod, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (RG
T, but Tr mrg. br. avrov) ; esp. in the Apocalypse: nv
ovdeis Svvarat kAcioa aitnv, Rey. iii. 8 (ace. to the true
text); ois €5d6n adrois, Rev. vii. 2; add vs. 9; xiii. 12;
xvii. 9; far oftener in the Sept.; rare in Grk. writ. [fr.
Callim. ep. 44]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 709; [B. § 143, 1]; W.
22,4 b. where add to the exx. Hdian. 8, 6, 10 [5 Bekk.]
ois emioit@ou avrois Tas owas TONELs TUAAL GvolyvurToO.
But to this construction must not be referred Mt. iii. 12
ob TO mrvov év Th xeupt avTod, nor 1 Pet. ii. 24 ds ras
Guaptias nuav avtos avnveyxev. For in the latter pas-
sage aitds is in contrast with us, who must otherwise
have paid the penalty of our sins; and in the former the
sense is, ‘he holds his winnowing-shovel in his hand.’
6. Very often adros is used rather laxly, where the
subject or the object to which it must be referred is not
expressly indicated, but must be gathered especially
from some preceding name of a province or city, or from
the context : Mt. iv. 23 (aepuryev tiv TadiAaiav diddoKev ev
tais cuvaywyais adray, i. e. of the Galileans) ; Acts viii. 5
(Sapuapelas exnpvooer avtois, i. €. Tos Dapapetras) ; Xx. 2
(avtovs, i. e. the inhabitants rév pepav éexeiver ); 2 Co. ii.
13 (adrois, i. @. the Christians of Troas); Mt. xix. 2 (6yAoe
ToAXol kat €Gepdmevaev avtous, i. e. their sick); 1 Pet. iii.
14 (péBov adray, i.e. of those who may be able caxécat
you, vs. 13); Lk. xxiii. 51 (77 BovdAj adray, i. e. of those
with whom he had been a BovAeutns) ; Heb. viii. 8 (adrots
[LT WH Tr mrg. airovs; see peudopar] i. e. rois Exouee
rhv diadnkny thy mparnv) ; Lk. ii. 22 (rot caBapiopov aitar,
avTou
of the purification prescribed by the law of Moses to
women in child-bed); Jn. viii. 44 (Wevorns éoriv cal 6
marnp avtov, i. e. of the liar; cf. Baumg.-Crusius and
Meyer ad loc.). By this rather careless use of the pro-
noun it came about that at length avroi alone might be
used for GvOpwmoa: Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14, 17
[here T WH Tr mrg. a’rov]; cf. W. § 22, 3; B. § 127, 8.
7. Sometimes, in relative sentences consisting of several
members, the second member is not joined to the first by
the relative és, but by a loose connection proceeds with
cai avtos; as, Lk. xvii. 31; Acts iii. 13 (Ov tpets rapedoxare
kal npynoaobe avrov [L T WH om. Tr br. airév]) ; 1 Co.
viii. 6 (€£ 08 ra mavra Kal Hpets eis adtov, for Kat eis dv
jpeis); 2 Pet. ii. 3. This is the usage likewise of Greek
as well as of Hebrew; cf. W. 149 (141); [B. 283 (243)];
Bnhdy. p. 304.
III. 6 airos, 7 av’ty, 76 avro, with the article, the same ;
1. without a noun: 6 avtos, immutable, Heb. i. 12; xiii.
8, (Thue. 2, 61); 7o ad’ro:— roeiv, Mt. v. 46 [R GT
WH txt., 47 L T Tr WH]; Lk. vi. 33; Aéyew, to profess
the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; dvedifew, not in the same
manner but reproached him with the same, cast on him
the same reproach, Mt. xxvii. 44, (dveidi¢erv rovadra, Soph.
Oed. Col. 1002). ra a’ra: Acts xv. 27; Ro. ii. 1; Eph.
vi. 9. émt rd adrd [Rec* passim émroavto] (Hesych.
pov, emt Tov avTov Torov), to the same place, in the same
place: Mt. xxii. 34; Acts i. 15; ii. 1; 1 Co. xi. 20; xiv. 23,
(Ps. ii. 2; 2S. ii. 13; 3 Macc. iii.1; Sus. 14); together:
LK. xvii. 35; Acts iii. 1 [LT Tr WH join it to ch.
ii.; 1 Co. vii. 5]; kara TO avrd, (Vulg. simul), together :
Acts xiv. 1 (for 1", Ex. xxvi. 24; 1 K. ili. 18; exx. fr.
Grk. writ. are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 69 sqq.).
Like adj. of equality 6 avrés is foll. by the dat.: év kai
76 avro TH eEvpnyuevy, 1 Co. xi. 5, (Sap. xviii. 11; 4 Mace.
viii. 5; x. 2, 13, and often in Grk. writ., cf. W. 150 (141)).
2. With a noun added: Mt. xxvi. 44; Mk. xiv. 39 (rov
avrov Adyov) ; Lk. vi. 3883[RG L mrg.] (76 aire perp) 5
Phil. i. 80; 1 Co. i. 10 (€v 7@ adr@ voi); 1 Co. xii. 4 (7d
8€ adrd mvedpa), etc. 1a adra (with the force of a subst. :
the same kind) trav ma@nuarwv, 1 Pet. v.9. [Cf. radra.]
avrod, prop. neuter genitive of the pron. adrds, in that
place, there, here: Mt. xxvi. 36; [Lk. ix. 27 (RL &de)];
Acts xv. 34 (a spurious vs. [see WH. App. ad loc.]) ; xviii.
19 (L Tr mrg. éxet); xxi. 4 (Lehm. atrois).*
avtod, -s, -ov, of himself, herself, itself, i. q. Eavrod, q. V-
It is very common in the edd. of the N. T. by the Elzevirs,
Griesbach, Knapp, al.; but Bengel, Matthaei, Lchm.,
Tdf., Trg. have everywhere substituted avrod, aia, ete.
for avtov, attra, etc. “For I have observed that the
former are used almost constantly [not always then?
Grimm] not only in uncial codd. of the viii. ix. and x.
cent., but also in many others (and not N. T. codd. alone).
That this is the correct mode of writing is proved also
by numerous examples where the pron. is joined to prep-
ositions ; for these last are often found written not ed,
ad, peO, xa, avd, etc., but em, am, pet, xat, avr.” Taf.
Proleg. ad N. T., ed. 2 p. xxvi. [ed. 8 p. 126]; cf. his
Proleg. ad Sept., ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xxxiii. (not in
87
apaipew
ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it
forth at length in his note on Heb. i. 3, vol. ii. 1 p.
67 sqq. The question ig hard to decide, not only be-
cause the breathings and acCents are wanting in the
oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the
mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he
will speak in his own person, or acc. to the thought of
the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority
of the passages in the N. T. avrod is correctly restored;
but apparently we ought to write dv airod (Rec. éavrot
[so L mrg. T WH)), Ro. xiv. 14 [Ltxt. Tr 8¢ abr]; ets
avrov, Col. i. 20 [al. eis atr.]; adros mepi avrod [T Tr txt.
WH éavrov), Jn.ix.21. Cf. W.151 (143); [B.111(97) sq.;
Bp. Lghtft. on Col.1. ¢., and see esp. Hort in Westcott and
Hort’s Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq. ; these editors have in-
troduced the aspirated form into their text “nearly twen-
ty times” (e. . Mt. vi. 34; Lk. xii. 17, 215 xxiii. 12; xxiv.
125-Jn. 11.24:;)xii. 825 xix. 175 xx. 103 Acts:xiv.17 Ro.
W227 2Co. 119505) Ephga 5 ; Phil) tiie 20s) 1 Invi;
Rev. viii. 6, etc.). Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 432].
aitédwpos, -ov, (a’tds and dap a thief, dwpa a theft),
[fr. Soph. down]; prop. caught in the act of theft; then
univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime;
very often in the phrases é’ avropope (as one word
eravTopape) Twa hapBavew, pass. AapBaveo Oat, katadap-
BavecOa, drioxec Oa, (fr. Hdt. 6, 72 on), the crime being
specified by a participle: poryevouern, Jn. viii. 4 [R G],
as in Ael. nat. an. 11,15; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn.
[x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Nicias 4, 5; Eumen. 2, 2]; Sext.
Empir. adv. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fabric. ].*
avrd-xeup, -pos, 6, (avtds and yelp, cf. waxpdxerp, adcxo-
xetp), doing a thing with one’s own hand: Acts xxvii. 19.
(Often in the tragedians and Attic orators.) *
avxéw ; (in pres. and impf. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
but rare in prose); prop. to lift up the neck, hence to
boast: peydda adyxei, Jas. ili. 5 L T Tr WH for R G pe-
yadavxet q. v.*
avdxXpNpss, -d, -dv, (advypew to be squalid), squalid, dirty,
(Xen., Plat., sqq.), and since dirty things are destitute of
brightness, dark: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 76
Aapmpov 7} atiABov . . - i) TovvayTioy adypnpoy Kal adapres.
(Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.) *
dp-aipéw, -&; fut. ddaipnow (Rev. xxii. 19 Ree. [fr.
Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority; see Tdf.’s
note]), and dpedS (ibid.G LT Tr WH;; on this rarer fut.
cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) ; 2 aor. apeiAov; 1 fut. pass.
apaipeOnoopa; Mid., pres. aparpodpar; 2 aor. apedAduny ;
[see aipéw]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; éo take from,
take away, remove, carry off : ti, Lk. i. 25; to cut off, rd
oriov, Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv.47[(L T Tr WH 16 drapiov] ;
Lk. xxii. 50 [76 ods], (rHv kepadny twos, 1 Mace. vii. 47;
for N93, 1 S. xvii. 51); to take away, ri awd with gen.
of a thing, Rev. xxii. 19; ri dd with gen. of pers. Lk.
x. 42 [T WH om. L Tr br. ad], (Gen. xxxi. 31; Job
xxxvi. 7; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], ete.); mid. (prop. to
take away or bear off for one’s self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev.
iv. 10; Mic. ii. 8; in Grk. writ. with a simple gen. for
dro Twos); apatpeiv tas duaptias to take away sins, of
apavns
victims expiating them, Heb. x. 4, (Jer. xi. 15; Sir. xlvii.
11); mid. of God putting out of his sight, remembering
no more, the sins committed by men, i.e. granting par-
don for sins (see dpaptia, 2 a.): Ro. xi. 27.*
&bavijs, -¢s, (paivw), not manifest, hidden: Heb. iv. 13.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) [Cf.
&pAos, and Schmidt ch. 130.]*
&pavitw; [Pass., pres. apavifopat]; 1 aor. npavicOny ;
(adpavys); a. to snatch out of sight, to put out of view, to
make unseen, (Xen. an. 3, 4, 8 7Atov vepeAn mapaxadvyaca
nddvce sc. tyv wodw, Plat. Phil. 66 a. apavigovres xpv-
mropev). b. to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume :
Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. and Sept. [cf. B.
§ 130, 5]); Pass. to perish: Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor
Schrecken vergehen) ; to vanish away, Jas. iv. 14, (Hat. 7,
6; 167; Plat. et sqq.). c. to deprive of lustre, render
unsightly; to disfigure : ts mpdcwmor, Mt. vi. 16.*
abavirpds, -ov, 6, (ahavitw, q. v-), disappearance; de-
struction: Heb. viii. 13. (Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Leian., al.; often in Sept., particularly for naw and
maw.)*
d-pavros, -ov, (fr. gaivouat), taken out of sight, made
invisible: adavros éyéveto an avtaév, he departed from
them suddenly and in a way unseen, he vanished, Lk.
xxiv. 31. (In poets fr. Hom. down; later in prose writ.
also; Diod. 4, 65 éumeoayr eis 76 ydopa . . . davros éyévero,
Plut. orac. def. c.1. Sometimes angels, withdrawing
suddenly from human view, are said dgaveis yiverOa:
2 Mace. iii. 34; Acta Thom. § § 27 and 43.) *
adbeSpev, -dvos, 6, apparently a word of Macedonian
origin, which Suidas calls ‘barbarous’; the place into
which the alvine discharges are voided; a privy, sink;
found only in Mt. xv. 17; Mk. vii. 19. It appears to
be derived not from aq’ édpav a podicibus, but from
adedpos, the same Macedon. word which in Lev. xii. 5;
xv. 19 sqq. answers to the Hebr. 11) sordes menstruorum.
Cf. Fischer’s full discussion of the word in his De vitiis
lexx. N. T. p. 698 sqq.*
aedia (dpeidera Lchm.,see s. v. €1,1),-as, 7, (the dispo-
sition of a man who is adedys, unsparing), unsparing
severity: with gen. of the object, rod caparos, Col. ii. 23
(rév cwopatev apedeiv, Lys. 2, 25 (193,5); Diod. 13, 60;
79 ete. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]; in Plat. defin. p.
412 d. apedia means liberality).*
&b-ciBov, i. q. dmetdov,q. v. Cf. B. 7; Mullaen p. 22;
W. 45 (44); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 91 sq., Sept. ed. 4 Proleg.
p- xxxiii.; Scrivener’s ed. of cod. Cantab. Intr. p. xlvii.
(11); esp. WH. App. p. 143 sq., Meisterhans § 20, and
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 23; Curtius p. 687 sq.].
ahehorys, -nTos, 7, (fr. adeAns without rock, smooth,
plain, and this fr. peAdAevds rocky land), simplicity, [A.V.
singleness |: xapdias, Acts ii. 46, (found only here [and in
eccl. writ.]. The Greeks used apéAeta).*
ad-<Amifo, i. q. ameArifa, q. v.; cf. apeidor.
ah-eois, -ews, 7, (apinuc) ; 1. release, as from bond-
age, imprisonment, etc.: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. lxi. 1 sq.;
Polyb. 1, 79, 12, etc.). 2. a&peots dpapridy forgiveness,
pardon, of sins (prop. the letting them go, as if they had |
88
aginst
not been committed [see at length Trench § xxxiii.]),
remission of their penalty: Mt. xxvi: 28; Mk. i. 4; Lk.
i. 77; iil. 3; xxiv. 47; Acts ii. 38; v. 31; x. 43; xiii. 38;
xxvi. 18; Col. i. 14; rév mapamroparev, Eph. i. 7; and
simply aeous: Mk. iii. 29; Heb. ix. 22; x. 18, (pdvov,
Plat. legg. 9 p. 869 d.; é€yxAnparwr, Diod. 20, 44 [so
Dion. Hal. 1. 8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; esp. 7, 64;
dpaptnparwv, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 17; al.]).*
ahh, -js, 7, (4nrw to fasten together, to fit), (Vulg.
junctura [and nexus]), bond, connection, [ A. V. joint (see
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below)]: Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii.
19. (Plut. Anton. c. 27.)*
apbapaia, -as, 7, (apOapros, cf. dxabapoia), (Tertull.
and subseq. writ. incorruptibilitas, Vulg. incorruptio [and
incorruptela]), incorruption, perpetuity : rov koopov, Philo
de incorr. mund. § 11; it is ascribed to ré Oeioy in Plut.
Arist. c. 6; of the body of man exempt from decay after
the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (év apé. sc. dv), 50, 53 sq.;
of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 Mace.
xvii. 12), Ro. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 10. tiva dyamay év apéap-
cia to love one with never diminishing love, Eph. vi.
24 [cf. Mey. ad loc. The word seems to have the mean-
ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Rec.*].*
a-p8apros, -ov, (Pbeipw), uncorrupted, not liable to cor-
ruption or decay, imperishable: of things, 1 Co. ix. 25;
1 Pet. i. 4, 23; ili. 4; [apO. knpvypa ris aiwviov owrnpias,
Mk. xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]. im-
mortal: of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52; of God, Ro. i.
23; 1 Tim. i. 17. (Sap. xii. 1; xviii. 4. [Aristot.],
Plut., Leian., al. [Cf. Trench § lxviii.])*
G-8opia, -as, 7, (4pOopos uncorrupted, fr. POeipw), wn-
corruptness: Tit. ii. 7 LT Tr WH; see adiapOopia.*
a-inpt; pres. 2 pers. sing. adeis (fr. the form dpéw,
Rev. ii. 20 for Rec. éas), [3 pers. plur. agrodow Rev. xi.
9 Tdf. edd. 2, 7,fr.a form aduéw ; cf. B. 48 (42) ]; impf. 3
pers. sing. #dte, with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i.
34; xi. 16, fr. the form dpi ; whence also pres. 1 pers.
plur. adiovey Lk. xi. 4 L T Tr WH for adiepev Rec. and
3 pers. adiovaw Rev. xi.9 L T Tr WH; [see WH. App.
p- 167]; fut. dpyow; 1 aor. apixa, 2 pers. sing. -ces Rev.
ii. 4 T Tr WH (cf. comidw] ; 2 aor. impv. ages, apere, subj.
3 pers. sing. apy, 2 pers. plur. adpjre, [inf. ddeivae (Mt.
xxiii, 23: T Tr) WH; Lkeyv2idtxt-20 De wii,
ptep. deis, apevres; Pass., pres. adieua, [yet 3 pers.
plur. apiovra: Jn. xx. 23 WH mrg. ete.; cf. dpiw above];
pf. 3 pers. plur. apéwvra: (a Doric form [ef. W. § 14, 3 a.;
B 49 (42); Kiihner § 285, 4], Mt. ix. 2,5; Mk. ii. 5, [9]
— in both these Gospels L [exc. in Mk. mrg.] T Tr WH
have restored the pres. 3 pers. plur. apievrac; Lk. v. 20,
233 vii. 47, [48]; Jn. xx. 23 L txt. T Tr txt. WH txt.
1 Jn. ii. 12); 1 aor. apeOnv; fut. apebnooua ; cf. W. § 14,
3; B. 48 (42); [WH. App. p. 167; Veitch s. v. tinue];
(fr. ao and inc); [fr. Hom. down]; to send from (dro)
one’s self; 1. to send away; a. to bid go away or
depart: rovs dxdous, Mt. xiii. 36 [al. refer this to 3 be-
low]; rHv yuvaixa, of a husband putting away his wife,
1 Co. vii. 11-13, (Hdt. 5, 39; and subst. decors, Plut.
Pomp. c. 42, 6). b. to send forth, yield up, emit: ré
apinus
nvedpa, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 (ryv uyny, Gen. xxxv.
18; Hdt. 4, 190 and often in other Grk. writ. [see wvetpa,
2]), Powny to utter a cry (emittere vocem, Liv. 1, 58), Mk.
xv. 37 (Gen. xlv. 2 and often in Grk. writ. ; [ef. Heinichen
on Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 17]). . to let go, let alone, let be ;
a. to disregard: Mt. xv. 14. 8B. to leave, not to discuss
now, a topic, used of teachers, writers, speakers, etc.:
Heb. vi. 1, (Eur. Andr. 392; Theophr. char. praef. § 3;
for other examples fr. Grk. writ. see Bleek on Heb. vol.
ii. 2 p. 144 sq.), [al. take the word in Heb. 1. c. as expres-
sive of the duty of the readers, rather than the purpose of
the writer; and consequently refer the passage to 3 be-
low]. y. toomit, neglect: Mt. xxiii. 23, [Lk. xi. 42 R G];
Mk. vii. 8; Ro.i. 27. d. to let go, give up, a debt, by not
demanding it (opp. to kpareiv, Jn. xx. 23), i. e. to remit,
forgive: rd Sdvecov, Mt. xviii. 27; tiv dperny, Mt. xviii.
32; ra dhetAnuara, Mt. vi. 12; ra maparra@para, vi. 14 sq. 5
Mk. xi. 25 sq. [T Tr WH om. verse 26]; ras duaprias, ra
dpaprnpara, ras avopias, Mt. ix. 2, 5 sq.; xii. 31; Mk. ii. 5,
7; iii. 28; Lk. v. 20 sq. 23; Ro. iv. 7 (fr. Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.)
1); 1 Jn. i. 9; Jas. v. 15, (Is. xxii. 14; xxxiii. 24, etc.) ;
r. émivoay ths Kapdias, Acts viii. 22, (rv airiay, Hat. 6,
30; ra xpea, Ael. v. h. 14, 24); absolutely, aguevar revi to
forgive one: Mt. xii. 32; xviii. 21, 35; Mk. iv. 12; Lk.
xi. 4; xii. 10; xvii. 3 sq.; xxiii. 34 [L br. WH reject the
pass.]. e. to give up, keep no longer: rhv mparny aydrny,
Rev. ii. 4. 2. to permit, allow, not to hinder; a. foll. by
a pres. inf. [B. 258 (222)]: Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16 dere
épxecbat kal pu) Kovere adrd, Mt. xiii. 30; Mk. i. 34; Jn.
xi. 44; xviii. 8. by the aor. inf.: Mt. viii. 22; xxiii. 13
(14); Mk. v. 37; vii. 12, 27; Lk. viii. 51; ix. 60; xii. 39;
Rev. xi. 9. b. without an inf.: Mt. iii. 15 (apes apr per-
mit it just now). with acc. of the pers. or thing permitted :
Mt. iii. 15 rore dbinow adrov, Mk. v. 19; xi. 6; xiv. 6; Lk.
xiii. 8; Jn. xii. 7 RG; xi. 48; Acts v.38 (LT Tr WH;
RG édoare); Rev. ii. 20 (Rec. eas). c. abinue rwi tr, to
give up a thing to one: Mt. v. 40 (apes avT@ kai 7d indriov).
d. foll. by va: Mk. xi. 16; Jn. xii. 7 LT Tr WH, a later
construction, cf. W. § 44, 8; B. 238 (205). e. foll. by
the simple hortative subjunc.: Mt. vii. 4; Lk. vi. 42
(des €xBadrw) ; Mt. xxvii. 49; Mk. xv. 36, (agere Soper) ;
Epict. diss. 1, 9, 15 apes SdeiEapev, 3, 12, 15 apes ida.
Cf. B. 209 (181) sq.; W. 285 (268). 3. to leave, go
away from one; to depart from any one, a. in order to
go to another place: Mt. xxii. 22 ; xxvi. 44; Mk. viii. 13
(Mt. xvi. 4 xaradir@v); xii. 12; xiii. 34; Jn. iv. 3; xvi.
28. b. to depart from one whom one wishes to quit:
Mt. iv. 11; so of diseases departing, dpjxév twa 6 muperos,
Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; Lk. iv. 39; Jn.iv.52. c. to de-
part from one and leave him to himself, so that all mutual
claims are abandoned : rév marépa, Mt. iv. 22; Mk. i. 20;
Mt. xviii. 12 (Lk. xv. 4 xatadeimer). Thus also aduévae
ta éavtov to leave possessions, home, etc.: Mt. iv. 20;
mix. 27, 29; Mk.1. 18; x. 28sq.; Lk. v. 11; xvill. 28'sq.
d. to desert one (wrongfully): Mt. xxvi. 56; Mk. xiv.
50; Jn.x.12. e. to goaway leaving something behind:
Mt. v. 24; Jn. iv. 28. f. to leave one by not taking him
as a companion : opp. to wapaAapBavew, Mt. xxiv. 40 sq. ;
89
/
adouovow
Lk. xvii. 34 sq. g. to leave on dying, leave behind one:
rexva, yuvaixa, Mt. xxii. 25; Mk. xii. 20, 22, (Lk. xx. 31
kata\eir@). h. to leave so that what is left may re-
main, leave remaining: ov py apeOy &de AiOos emi Aidov
Lor Aiém], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi.6. i. dqvévae
foll. by the ace. of a noun or pron. with an acc. of the
predicate [B. § 144, 18]: Lk. x. 30 (juOavq); In. xiv.
18 (twa dppavov) ; Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35, (but Lehm.
om. €pnyos in both pass., WH txt. om. in Mt., G T Tr
WH om. in Luke; that being omitted, dgvevar means to
abandon, to leave destitute of God’s help); Acts xiv.17
(dudprupoy éavtév [LT Tr airév (WH air. q. v.)]).
&p-ikveopat, -odpar: 2 aor. adixopny ; (ixveouat to come) 5
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to come from
(dro) a place (but often the prep. has almost lost its
force) ; to come to, arrive at; in the N. T. once, tropically :
Ro. xvi. 19 (duav taxon eis mavtas adixero your obedi-
ence has reached the ears of [A. V.is come abroad unto}
all men; Sir. xlvii. 16 eis vnoous adixero Td dvopa gov.
Joseph. antt. 19, 1, 16 ets rd O€arpov . . . apixero 6 Ndyos).*
a-pid-dyabos, -ov, (a priv. and diAdyabos), opposed to
goodness and good men, [R. V. no lover of good]; found
only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.*
d-piA-dpyupos, -ov, (a priv. and duddpyupos), not loving
money, not avaricious; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1
Tim. iii. 3; Heb. xiii. 5. (Cf. Trench § xxiv.]*
Ab-tEts, -ews, 77, (adexveowat), in Grk. writ. generally
arrival; more rarely departure, as Hdt. 9, 17; Dem.
1463, 7; [1484, 8]; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,47; 3 Mace. vii.
18; and so in Acts xx. 29.*
ap-lornpr: 1 aor. dxéornoa; 2 aor. aneatnv; Mid.,
pres. apioraya, impv. adiorago (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.; cf.
W. § 14,1 e.); [impf. ddiorapny]; fut. aroorncopac;
1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, to
make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. to
excite to revolt: Acts v. 37 (dméotnce adv... drigw avTov
drew away after him; twa amo twos, Deut. vii. 4, and in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively,
in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, to stand off, stand aloof, in
various senses [as in Grk. writ.] acc. to the context: do
with gen. of pers. to go away, depart, from any one, Lk.
xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9; cf. Mt. vii. 23 doxywpeire dm’ euov) ;
Acts xii. 10; xix. 9; to desert, withdraw from, one, Acts
xv. 88; to cease to vex one, Lk. iv. 13; Acts v. 38; xxii.
29; 2 Co. xii. 8; to fall away, become faithless, ar Oeod,
Heb. iii. 12; to shun, flee from, amo ts adixias, 2 Tim.
ii. 19. Mid. to withdraw one’s self from: absol. to fall
away, Lk. viii. 13; [ris micrews, 1 Tim. iv. 1, cf. W. 427,
428 (398)]; to keep one’s self away from, absent one’s
self from, Lk. ii. 37 (ot« adpioraro and ['T Tr WH om.
dd | Tod iepov, she was in the temple every day) ; from
any one’s society or fellowship, 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.*
ave, adv., (akin to aidyns, see in aipvidios above), sud-
denly: Acts ii. 2; xvi. 26; xxviii.6. (Sept.; [Aeschyl.],
Thue. and subseq. writ.) *
abésBws, adv., (poBos), without fear, boldiy: Lk. i. 74;
Phil. i. 14; 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down. ]*
a-oporde, -a@: [pf. pass. ptcp. dpopowwpevos (on augm.
adopaw
see WH. App. p. 161)]; to cause a model to pass off
(amo) into an image or shape like it, — to express itself in
it, (cf. ametxalew, areckovilery, anomAdocety, arrouipeto Oar);
to copy; to produce a fac-simile : ra kaha eidn, of painters,
Xen. mem. 3, 10, 2; often in Plato. Pass. to be made
like, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Ep. Jer. 4 (5),
62 (63), 70 (71); and in Plato.) *
Gdb-opdw, -@; to turn the eyes away from other things
and fix them on something; cf. awoB\érw. trop. to turn
one’s mind to: eis twa, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 66, 2 d.], (es
6eov, 4 Mace. xvii. 10; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. ef. Bleek
on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 862). Further, cf. ametdov.*
ab-opitw; impf. apapifov ; Attic fut. apopr@ Mt. xxv. 32
(T WH adgopiow) ; xiii. 49, [W. § 13,1 ¢.; B.37 (32)];
1 aor. apwpica; Pass., pf. ptep. apwpiopévos; 1 aor.
impv. adopicOnre; (6pi¢w to make a épos or boundary) ;
to mark off from (amo) others by boundaries, to limit, to
separate: éavrov, from others, Gal. ii. 12; rods padnras,
from those unwilling to obey the gospel, Acts xix. 9; éx
peoov tTiwav, Mt. xiii. 49; amo twos, xxv. 32. Pass. in a
reflex. sense: 2 Co. vi. 17. absol.: in a bad sense,
to excluae as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22; in a good sense, rua
eis Tt, to appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do
something), Acts xiii. 2; Ro. i. 1; twa foll. by a telic
inf., Gal. i. 15 [(?) seethe Comm. ad loc.]. ({Soph.], Eur.,
Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al.; very often in Sept. esp. for
TIT, PII, OVD, 79, ete.) *
ah-opyy, -7s, 7, (amo and dppn q. V-); 1. prop. a
place from which a movement or attack is made, a base
of operations: Thue. 1, 90 (ryv MeAorovyncov macw ava-
xXopnolv Te kai apoppny ixaviy eivar); Polyb. 1,41,6. 2.
metaph. that by which endeavor is excited and from which
it goes forth ; that which gives occasion and supplies matter
for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail
ourselves of in attempting or performing anything: Xen.
mem. 3, 12, 4 (rots €avt@v maiot KadXiovs adoppas els Tov
Biov karadetrovor), and often in Grk. writ. ; AapBdvewv, to
take occasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 11; d:ddvat, 2
Co. v.12; 1 Tim. v. 14, (3 Mace. iii. 2; both phrases often
also in Grk. writ.) ; 2 Co. xi. 12; Gal. v.13. On the mean-
ings of this word see Viger. ed. Herm. p. 81 sq.; Phryn.
ed. Lob. p. 223 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 304].*
abpitw; (appos) ; to foam: Mk. ix.18, 20. (Soph. El.
719; Diod. 3, 10; Athen. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al.].)
[Comp.: én-adpite. |*
&dpds, -od, 6, foam: Lk. ix. 39. (Hom. Il. 20, 168;
fal.].) *
adpooivn, -ns, 7, (appwv), foolishness, folly, senseless-
ness: 2 Co. xi. 1,17, 21 ; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk.
vii. 22. [From Hom. down.]*
&ppwv, -ovos, 6, 7, -ov, 7d, (fr. a priv. and dpny, cf. ev-
dpev, capper), (fr. Hom. down], prop. without reason
([etSwAa, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4]; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14),
senseless, foolish, stupid ; without reflection or intelligence,
acting rashly: Lk. xi. 40; xii. 20; Ro. ii. 20; 1 Co. xv.
36; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to dpovipos, asin Prov. xi. 29) ;
2 Co. xii. 6,11; Eph. v. 17 (opp. to ovmeévres); 1 Pet.
ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt ch. 147 § 17.]*
90
ayrus
ah-virvéw, -3: 1 aor. apimvwca; (imvow to put to sleep,
to sleep); a. to awaken from sleep (Anthol. Pal. 9, 517,
5). b. to fall asleep, to fall of f to sleep: Lk. viii. 23;
for this the ancient Greeks used caO@umvow; see Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1, 1.]*
ad-voerepéw, -@: (a later Grk. word); 1. to be be-
hindhand, come too late (amo so as to be far from, or to
fail, a person or thing); used of persons not present at
the right time: Polyb. 22, 5, 2; Posidon. ap. Athen. 4,
37 (i.e. 4 p.151e.); [al.]; dad dyabijs jpepas to fail (to
make use of) a good day, to let the opportunity pass by,
Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fail, to with-
draw, take away from, defraud: 1d pavva cov ovx advorte-
pnaas amo orduaros aitav, Neh. ix. 20 (for yin to with-
hold); pf. pass. ptep. apvorepnuévos (j0O0s), Jas. v. 4
T Tr WH after 8 B*, [Rec. amweorepnuévos, see amocrte-
pew, also s. v. amo, II. 2 d. bb., p. 59°].*
ddpwvos, -ov, (pwr7), voiceless, dumb; without the faculty
of speech; used of idols, 1 Co. xii. 2 (ef. Ps. exv. 5 (exiii.
13); Hab. ii. 18) ; of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. xiv. 10
tocavta yevn paver kat ovdev a’tav [LT Tr WH om.
avr.]| apwvor, i. e. there is no language destitute of the
power of language, [R. V. txt. no kind (of voice) is with-
out signification], (cf. the phrases Bios aBiwros a life un-
worthy of the name of life, ydpis ayapis). used of one
that is patiently silent or dumb: duvds, Acts viii. 32 fr.
Is. liiti. 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl.
down.)*
"Axat [WH "Ayas], 6, (so Sept. for 18 possessing, pos-
sessor; in Joseph. ’Ayadgns, -ov, 6), Ahaz, king of Judah,
[fr.c. B.C. 741 to c. B. C. 725; cf. B. D.s. v. Israel, king-
dom of}, (2 K. xvi. 1 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq.; Is. vii. 1
sqq-): Mt. i. 9.*
’"Axata [WH ’Ayaia (see I, ¢)], -as, 9, Achaia; a
in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern
Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. B. C. 146
on [yet see Dict. of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em-
bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. T.:
Acts xviii: 12;°27; xix. 21; Ro: xy. 26; xvi. 5) Rees
Co. xvi. 155 2 Covi. 13x! 25x15 105 hea sae a
Sve"
’Axaikés, -od, 6, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of
Corinth: 1 Co. xvi. 17.*
ax dpioros, -ov, (yapiCouar), ungracious; a. unpleasing
(Hom. Od. 8, 236; 20,392; Xen. oec. 7, 37; al.). b.
unthankful (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 90 down): Lk.
vi. 853 2) Dime. 2. 9 (Sir. xxix 275) Sap. acvisi2o))*
["Axas, Mt. i. 9 WH; see”Ayag.]
*Axetp, 6, Achim, prop. name of one of the ancestors
of Christ, not mentioned in the O. T.: Mt. i. 14.*
d-xeipo-rolnros, -ov, (xetporroinros, q. V.), not made with
hands : Mk. xiv. 58; 2 Co. v. 1; Col. ii. 11 [where ef. Bp.
Lehtft.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Sept.
[W. § 34, 3].)*
PAxeASapdx: Actsi.19 T Tr for R G’AxeASaua q. v-]
dxus, -vos, 7, a mist, dimness, (Lat. caligo), esp. over
the eyes, (a poetic word, often in Hom.; then in Hesiod,
Aeschyl.; in prose writ. fr. [Aristot. meteor. 2, 8 p. 367°,
aypelos
17 etc. and] Polyb. 34, 11, 15 on; [of a cataract, Dios-
cor. Cf. Trench § c.]): Acts xiii.11. (Joseph. antt. 9,
4, 3 ras Tov ToAEpiov ders duavpocat Tov Oedv TmrapeKddet
dydvv avrais emBaddvra. Metaph. of the mind, Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6 ayAvos yee.) * ©
dex petos, -ov, (xpetos useful), useless, good for nothing:
Mt. xxv. 30 (SodA0s, ef. Plat. Alc. i. 17 p. 122 b. trav
oixerav Tov axpevorarov) ; by an hyperbole of pious mod-
esty in Lk. xvii. 10 ‘the servant’ calls himself axpetov,
because, although he has done all, yet he has done noth-
ing except what he ought to have done; accordingly
he possesses no merit, and could only claim to be called
‘ profitable,’ should he do more than what he is bound to
do; cf. Bengel ad loc. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54 aypeiov cai avadedés. Sept.
2 S. vi. 22 equiv. to 9aw low, base.) [Syn. cf. Tittmann
ii. p. 11 sq.; Ellic. on Philem. 11.]*
ax pedw, -@: 1 aor. pass. nxpermOnv ; (axpetos, q. V.); to
make useless, render unserviceable: of character, Ro. iii.
12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3), where L mrg. T Tr WH read
nxpewOnoay fr. the rarer dypeos i. q. dxpetos. (Several
times prop. in Polyb.) *
&-xpyoros, -ov, (ypnoros, and this fr. ypdopac), useless,
unprofitable: Philem. 11 (here opp. to evypnaros). (In
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach. 70; Theogn.] down.)
[Syn. cf. Tittmann ii. 11 sq.; Trench $c. 17; Ellic. on
Philem. 11.]*
dxpt and éxpis (the latter of which in the N. T. is
nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be-
fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is
so far regarded that we almost constantly find adypu fs
NHEepas, axpis ov, cf. B. 10 (9); [W. 42]; and dypu od is
not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 25 by L T
Tr WH and Lk. xxi. 24 by T Tr WH; [to these in-
stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 T WH; xv. 25
TWH; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148); on the
usage in secular authors (‘where -pz is the only Attic
form, but in later auth. the Epic -pis prevailed’, L. and
S. s. v.) ef. Lobeck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq.;
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 64; further, Klotz ad Devar.
vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq.]); a particle indicating the terminus
ad quem. (On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz u.s. p.
224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep. now of a
conj., even to; until, to the time that; (on its derivation
see below). 1. asa Preposition it takes the gen.
[ef. W. § 54, 6], and is used a. of Place: Acts xi. 5;
xii. 6; xx. 4 [T Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]; xxviii.
15; 2 Co. x. 13 sq.; Heb. iv. 12 (see pepropos, 2); Rev.
xiv. 20; xviii. 5. b. of Time: dypu xacpod, until a sea-
son that seemed to him opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but ef.
katpos, 2 a.]; until a certain time, for a season, Acts
xiii. 11; [a@ype (vel pexpr, q. v. 1 a.) rod Oepicpod, Mt. xiii.
30 WH umrg. cf. gws, I. 5]; dype fis quépas until the day
that etc. Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2;
[dype (Rec. et al. gos) ris quépas fs, Acts i. 22 Tdf.];
aixpe ravrns THs juepas and dype rhs Hpépas Tavrns, Acts
91
anpuxos
li. 29; xxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; dype [-pes RG] tpepov wevre
even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five
days, Acts xx. 6; dypis [-pe TT Tr WH] avyijs, Acts xx. 11;
Gyo Tov voy, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i. 5; dype réAovs, Heb.
vi. 11; Rev. ii. 26; see besides, Acts iii. 21; [xxii. 22];
Rori013\5-v..13 3/1 Co. iv; 115-2 Count 14> Gal. iy. 2;
Phil. i. 6 [-pp LT WH]. c. of Manner and Degree:
dxpt Oavdrov, Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto
death) ; Rev. ii. 10 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev.
xil. 11; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb.
iv. 12 [see pepiopos, 2]. d. joined to the rel. od (aypis
od for dxpe rovrov, o) it has the force of a conjunc-
tion, until, to the time that: foll. by the indice. pret., of
things that actually occurred and up to the beginning of
which something continued, Acts vii. 18 (dypis of
aveotn Baowevs) ; xxvii. 33. foll. by a subj. aor. having
the force of a fut. pf., Lk. xxi. 24 LT Tr WH; Ro. xi.
25; 1 Co. xi. 26 [Rec. aypts ob dv]; Gal. iii. 19 [not
WH txt. (see 2 below)]; iv.19 [T Tr WH péxpis];
Rev. vii. 3 Rec.*!* G; dypus od ay until, whenever it may
be [cf. W. § 42, 5 b.], 1 Co. xv. 25 [Rec.];. Rev. ii. 25.
with indice. pres. as long as: Heb. iii. 13; ef. Bleek ad loe.
and B. 231 (199). 2. dypis without od has the force
of a simple Conjunction, until, to the time that:
foll. by subj. aor., Lk. xxi. 24 RG; Rev. vii. 3 L T Tr
WES xv.<6's [xvan 27 Rees]; xxos) [>> an air wili|s
with indic. fut., Rev. xvii. 17 [L T Tr WH]; [aypus av
foll. by subj. aor., Gal. iii. 19 WH txt. (see 1 d. above) ].
Since dype is akin to axn and dxpos [but cf. Vanicek p.
22; Curtius § 166], and peéype to paKxos, paxpds, by the
use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is
said to extend is likened to a height, by the use of
pexpt, toalength; dyps, indicating ascent, signifies up
to; expt, indicating extent, is unto, as far as; ef. Klotz
u. Ss. p. 225 sq. But this primitive distinction is often
disregarded, and each particle used of the same thing ;
ef. d@ypt téAous, Heb. vi. 11; péxpe TeAovs, ibid. iii. 6, 14;
Xen. symp. 4, 37 mepieori pou kai eoOiovre Ay pe Tod pH
mewny apixeo ba kal mivovte pé x pe Tov py Suny. Cf. Fritz-
sche on Ro. v. 13, vol. i. p. 308 sqq.; [Ellic. on 2 Tim.
ii. 9. ”Aype occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke; else-
where in the four Gospels only in Mt. xxiv. 38.].*
ax vpov, -ov, To, a stalk of grain from which the kernels
have been beaten out; straw broken up by a threshing
machine, chaff: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. (In Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt. 4, 72; Xen. oec. 18. 1, 2,6 down; mostly in plur.
Ta dxvpa; in Job xxi. 18 Sept. also of the chaff wont to
be driven away by the wind.) *
d-pevdis, -Es, (Weidos), without lie, truthful: Tit. i. 2.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. theog. 233 down.) *
dv80s, -ov, 7, wormwood, Absinthe: Rev. viil. 11; 6
duos ibid. is given as a prop. name to the star which
fell into the waters and made them bitter.*
dipuxos, -ov, (Wruxn), without a soul, lifeless : 1 Co. xiv. 7.
(In Grk. writ. from [Archil., Simon. and] Aeschylus
down.) *
92
B
Badr
Badd [so accented also by Pape (Kigenn. s. v.), Kue-
nen and Cobet (Ro. as below); but L T (yet the name
of the month, 1 K. vi. 5 (38), Baad) Tr WH etc. Baad ;
so Etym. Magn. 194, 19; Suid. 1746 a. ete. Dind. in
Steph. Thesaur. s. v. Baad or Badd ], 6, 7, an indecl. noun
(Hebr. 5y3, Chald. 73 contr. fr. 933), lord: Ro. xi. 4.
This was the name of the supreme heavenly divinity
worshipped by the Shemitic nations (the Phenicians,
Canaanites, Babylonians, Assyrians), often also by the
Israelites themselves, and represented by the Sun: rq
Badd, Ro. xi. 4. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v.
and J. G. Miiller in Herzog i. p. 637 sqq.; Merz in Schen-
kel i. 322 sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm p. 126 sq. Since
in this form the supreme power of nature generating
all things, and consequently a male deity, was wor-
shipped, with which the female deity Astarte was as-
sociated, it is hard to explain why the Sept. in some
places say 6 Ba*> (Num. xxii. 41; Judg. ii. 13; 1 K. xvi.
31; xix. 18, etc.), in others 4 Baad (Hos. ii. 8; 1 S. vii.
4, ete. [yet see Dillmann, as below, p. 617]). Among
the various conjectures on this subject the easiest is
this: that the Sept. called the deity 7 Badd in derision,
as weak and impotent, just as the Arabs call idols
goddesses and the Rabbins nivbx ; so Gesenius in
Rosenmiiller’ s Repert. i. p. 139 and Tholuck on Ro. 1. ¢.;
[yet cf. Dillmann, as below, p. 602; for other opinions
and reff. see Meyer ad loc.; cf. W. § 27, 6oNed. « But
Prof. Dillmann shows (in the Monatsbericht d. Akad. zu
Berlin, 16 Juni 1881, p. 601 sqq.), that the Jews (just
as they abstained from pronouncing the word J: ehovah)
avoided uttering the abhorred name of Baal (Ex. xxiii.
13). Asa substitute i in Aramaic they read My}, sont
or $3N5, and in Greek aicytvn (cf. 1 K. xviii. 19, 25).
This substitute in Grk. was suggested by the use of
the fem. article. Hence we find in the Sept. 4 B. every-
where in the prophetic bks. Jer., Zeph., Hos., etc., while
in the Pentateuch it does not prevail, nor even in Judges,
Sam., Kings, (exe. 1 S. vii. 4; 2 K. xxi. 3). It disap-
pears, too, (when the worship of Baal had died out) in
the later versions of Aq., Sym., etc. The apostle’s use in
Ro. l. e. accords with the sacred custom ; cf. the substi-
tution of the Hebr. nv32 in Ish-bosheth, Mephi-bosheth,
ete. 2 S. ii. 8, 10; iv. 4 with 1 Chr. viii. 33, 34, also 2S.
xi. 21 with Judg. vi. 32; etc.]*
BaPvddv, -dvos, , (Hebr. 933 fr. 952 to confound, ace.
to Gen. xi. 9; cf. Aeschyl. Pers. 52 BaBuddv & 1) TONU-
XpvTos Tappytxtov dxov méwmet ovpdnv. But more cor-
rectly, as it seems, fr. 53 383 the gate i. e. the court or
city of Belus [Assyr. Bab-I/ the Gate of God; (perh. of
Il, the supreme God); cf. Schrader, Keilinschr. u. d. |
Badive
Alt. Test. 2te Aufl. p. 127 sq.; Oppert in the Zeitsch. d.
Deutsch. Morg. Gesellschaft, viii. p. £95]), Babylon,
formerly a very celebrated and large city, the residence
of the Babylonian kings, situated on both banks of the
Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius
Hystaspis threw down its gates and walls, and Xerxes
destroyed [?] the temple of Belus. At length the city
was reduced almost to a solitude, the population hav-
ing been drawn off by the neighboring Seleucia, built
on the Tigris by Seleucus Nicanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin-
son in B. D.s.v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi.
and viii., vol. ii. Essay iv.] The name is used in the
New 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet.
v. 13 (where some have understood Babylon, a small
town in Egypt, to be referred to; but in opposition cf.
Mayerhoff, Einl. in die petrin. Schriften, p. 126 sqq.;
[ef. 3 fin. below]). 2. of the territory, Babylonia:
Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle-
gorically, of Rome as the most corrupt seat of idolatry
and the enemy of Christianity : Rev. xiv. 8 [here Rec.*”
BaBovAwy]; Xvi. 19; xvii. 5; xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the
opinion of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [ef. 1 fin. above]).*
Babws, adv., deeply: épOpov Babeas sc. dvros (cf. Bnhdy.
p- 338), deep in the morning, at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1
LT Tr WH; so Meyer ad loc. But Baééws here is more
correctly taken as the Attic form of the gen. fr. Ba6us,
q. v.; cf. B. 26 (23); [Lob. Phryn. p. 247].*
Babyuds, -od, 6, (fr. obsol. Baw i. q. Baiva, like orabpos
[fr. Gorn-pe]), threshold, step; of a grade of dignity and
wholesome influence in the church, [R. V. standing], 1
Tim. iii. 13 [ef. Ellic. ad loc.]._ (Used by [Sept. 1 S. v.
5; 2K. xx. 9; also Sir. vi. 36]; Strabo, [Plut.], Leian.,
Appian, Artemid., [al.]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324.) *
Bd80s, -eos (-ovs), 76, (connected with the obsol. verb
Bato, Baw [but cf. Curtius § 685; Vanitek p. 195]; cf.
Babis, Bacowrv, and 6 Buds, 6 Bvacds; Germ. Boden),
depth, height, —[ace. as measured down or up]; 1.
prop.: Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; Ro. viii. 39 (opp. to dopa) ;
Eph. iii. 18 (opp. to dos); of ‘the deep’ sea (the ‘high
seas’), Lk. v. 4. 2. metaph.: 7 xara Bdbous mr@xeia
avtav, deep, extreme, poverty, 2 Co. vill. 2; ra Bd@n rod
beov the deep things of God, things hidden and above
man’s scrutiny, esp. the divine counsels, 1 Co. ii. 10 (rod
|‘ Sarava, Rev. ii. 24 Rec.; xapdias avOpmrov, Judith viii.
14; [ra B. ris Ocias yoooews, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 40,1 (cf.
Lehtft. ad loc.)]); inexhaustible abundance, immense
amount, mAovrov, Ro. xi. 33 (so.also Soph. Aj. 130; Babs
'mdovtos, Ael. v. h. 3, 18; xaxév, [Aeschyl. Pers. 465,
iste Eur. Hel. 303; Sept. Prov. xviii. 3).*
Babive : [impf. ¢8abvvov]; (Babvs) ; to make deep: Lk.
Babds
vi. 48, where éoxawfe kai ¢Baduve is not used for Babéws
Zoxave, but ¢Babvve expresses the continuation of the
work, [he dug and deepened i. e. went deep]; cf. W. § 54,
5. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Balds, -eia, -v, [cf. BdOos], deep; prop.: Jn. iv. 11.
metaph.: Umvos, a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7;
often also in Grk. writ.) ; dpOpos (see Babéws), Lk. xxiv.
1 ([Arstph. vesp. 216]; Plat. Crito 43 a.; Polyaen. 4, 9,
1; é@rt Babéos dpOpov, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Philo
de mutat. nom. § 30; de vita Moys. i. § 32]); ra Badea
rod Sarava, Rev. ii. 24 (G L T Tr WH; cf. Baéos).*
Batov [al. also Bdiov (or even Baioy, Chandler ed. 1 p.
272); on its deriv. (fr. the Egyptian) cf. Steph. Thesaur.
s. Vv. Bais], -ov, 76, a palm-branch ; with réy howixwy added
[so Test. xii. Patr. test. Naph. § 5] (after the fashion of
oixodeorérns Tis oiklas, Umordd.oy Tay Trodar, [cf. W. 603
(561)]), Jn. xii. 13. (A bibl. and eccles. word: 1 Mace.
xiii. 51; Cant. vii. 8 Symm.; Lev. xxiii. 40 unknown trans.
In the Grk. church Palm-Sunday is called 7} kuptaxy tev
Baiov. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 18 sqq.;
[Sturz, Dial. Maced. ete. p. 88 sq.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.]-)*
Bodadp, 6, indecl., (in Sept. for d p03, ace. to Gesenius
[“ perhaps ”’] fr. 53 and Dy non-populus, i. e. foreign ; ace.
to Jo. Simonis equiv. to Dy pa a swallowing up of the
people; in Joseph. 6 Bédapos), Balaam (or Bileam), a
native of Pethor a city of Mesopotamia, endued by Je-
hovah with prophetic power. He was hired by Balak
(see Baddk) to curse the Israelites ; and influenced by the
love of reward, he wished to gratify Balak; but he was
compelled by Jehovah’s power to bless them (Num. xxii.—
xxiv.; Deut. xxiii. 5 sq.; Josh. xiii. 22; xxiv. 9; Mic. vi.
5). Hence the later Jews saw in him a most abandoned
deceiver: Rev. ii. 14; 2 Pet.ii.15; Jude 11. Cf. Win.
RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v.*
Badd, 6, indecl., (p23 empty [so Gesen. in his Thesaur.,
but in his later works he adopts (with Fiirst et al.) an act.
sense ‘one who makes empty,’ ‘a devastator,’ ‘ spoiler’ ;
see BD. Am. ed. s. v.]), Balak, king of the Moabites
(Num. xxii. 2 sq. and elsewhere): Rey. ii. 14.*
Baddvriov and Baddavriov (so L T Tr WH; cf. ['Tdf.
Proleg. p. 79]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 620; W. p.43; Passow,
Lex. [also L. and S.] s. v.), -ov, 7d, @ money-bag, purse :
Lk. x. 4; xii. 33; xxii. 35 sq. (Sept. Job xiv.17 cf. [Simon.
181]; Arstph. ran. 772; Xen. symp. 4, 2; Plat. Gorg.
p- 508 e.; Hdian. 5, 4, 4 [3 ed. Bekk.], and other writ.) *
BorAAw; fut. Bara; pf. BEBAnKa; 2 aor. €Badov (3 pers.
plur. €8adov in Lk. xxiii. 34; Acts xvi. 23, ¢Badav, the
Alex. form, in Acts xvi. 37 L T Tr WH; [Rev. xviii. 19
Lchm., see WH. App. p. 165 and] for reff. arépyouar
init.) ; Pass., [pres. Baddouar]; pf. BeBAnuac; plpf. éBe-
BAnpnv; 1 aor. €BANOnv; 1 fut. BAnOnoouar; to throw, —
either with force, or without force yet with a purpose,
or even carelessly ; 1. with force and effort:
BadXew tid panicpacr to smite one with slaps, to buffet,
Mk. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, twa Bad-
Aew AiBous, BeAeor, TdEo1s, etc., Kakois, Woyo, TKoppact,
etc., in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow i. p. 487; [L. and S.s. v.
T. 1 and 3]; for the Rec. ¢8addov we must read with
93
Barrow
Fritzsche and Schott ¢Badov, fr. which arose ¢\aBop,
adopted by L T Tr WI; Badet and AaBeiy are often
confounded in codd. ; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. v. 6; [Scriv-
ener, Introd. p. 10]); Baddew Aious emi run or twa, Jn.
Vili. (7), 59; xoov emt ras kepadas, Rev. xviii. 19 [WH
mrg. emeB.]; Komoprov eis Tov aépa, Acts xxii. 23; ti eis
tv Oadacoav, Mk. ix. 42; Rev. viii. 8; xviii. 21; els rd
mop, Mt. iii. 10; xviii. 8; Lk. iii. 9; Mk. ix. 22; Jn. xv.
6; eis kA(Bavov, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; eis yéevvav, Mt. v.
[29], 30[ RG]; Mk. ix. 47; eis r. yqv, Rev. viii. 5, 7; xii.
4, 9, 18; eis r. Anvor, Rev. xiv. 19; eis r. Aysvnv, Rev. xix.
20; xx. 10, 14 sq. ; eis Tr. dBvocov, Rev. xx. 3; absol. and
in the pass. to be violently displaced from a position
gained, Rev. xii. 10 LT Tr WH. an attack of disease
is said BdAXeww twa eis KAY, Rev. ii. 22; Pass. to lie sick
abed, be prostrated by sickness: BéBAnpat emi Kdivns, Mt.
ix. 2; Mk. vii. 30 [RG Lumrg.]; with emi cAns omitted,
Mt. viii. 6, 14, cf. Lk. xvi. 20; ruva eis pudakny, to cast one
into prison, Mt. v. 25; xviii. 30; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19
[RG L], 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts xvi. 23 sq. 37; Rev. ii. 10;
[B. emi twa thy xeipa or Tas xeipas to lay hand or hands
on one, apprehend him, Jn. vii. 44 L Tr WH, also 30 L
mrg.]; dpémavov eis yiv to apply with force, thrust in, the
sickle, Rev. xiv. 19; pdxaipav Baddew (to cast, send) én
t. ynv, Mt. x. 34, which phrase gave rise to another
found in the same passage, viz. elpnynv Badd. ent tr. yqv
to cast (send) peace; ¢&, to cast out or forth: Mt. v.
13; xiii. 48; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); 1 Jn. iv. 18; Jn. xv. 6;
éavtov Kat to cast one’s self down: Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9;
éavrov eis tr. OdAacoay, Jn. xxi. 7; pass. in a reflex. sense
[B. 52 (45)], BAnOnre, Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23; ri ad’
éavrov to cast a thing from one’s self, throw it away: Mt.
v. 29 sq.; xviii. 8; dap ek Tov oropuaros, Rev. xii. 15 sq.
(cast out of his mouth, Luther schoss aus threm Munde) ;
évomiov with gen. of place, to cast before (eagerly lay
down), Rev. iv. 10; of a tree casting its fruit because
violently shaken by the wind, Rev. vi. 13. Intrans. to
rush (throw one’s self [cf. W. 251 (236) ; 381 (357) note;
B. 145 (127)]): Acts xxvii. 14; (Hom. Il. 11, 722; 23,
462, and other writ.; [cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 1]). pk
without force and effort; to throw or let go of a thing
without caring where it falls: kdnpov to cast a lot into the
urn [B. D. s. v. Lot], Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk.
xxiii. 34; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; (xvBous, Plat.
lege. 12 p. 968 e. and in other writ.). to scatier: xompia
[Rec.* xompiav], Lk. xiii. 8; seed emi ris yns, Mk. iv. 26 ;
els knov, Lk. xiii. 19. to throw, cast, into: apytpvov eis
rov xopBavav [L mrg. Tr mrg. xopBav], Mt. xxvii. 6;
xaAxkov, Sapa, etc., eis Td yaCodvAdkvor, Mk. xii. 41-44;
Lk. xxi. 1-4, cf. Jn. xii. 6. Baddew ti tin, to throw, cast,
a thing to: tov aprov Tots Kuvapiots, Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii.
27; &umpoobev rwvos, Mt. vii. 6; ev@mdy tivos, Rey. ii. 14
(see oxavdadov, b. B.) ; to give over to one’s care uncertain
about the result: apyvpwov rots tpame¢irats, to deposit, Mt.
xxv. 27. of fluids, to pour, to pour in: foll. by eis, Mt.
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37; Jn. xiii. 5, (otvoy eis ro
miOov, Epictet. 4, 13,12; of rivers, poor eis Gda, Ap. Rhod.
2, 401, etc.; Sept. Judg. vi. 19 [Ald., Compl.]); to pour
Barrifo
out, émi twos, Mt. xxvi. 12. 3. to move, give motion
to, not with force yet with attention and for a pur-
pose; eis 74, to put into, insert: Mk. vii. 33 (rods SaxrvAovs
els Ta Ora) ; JN. Xx. 25, 27; xviii. 11; yaXivous eis 76 oTdpa,
Jas. iii. 3; to let down, cast down: Jn. v. 7; Mt. iv. 18
[ef. Mk. i. 16 Rec.]; Mt. xvii. 27. Metaph. : eis rhv xapdi-
ay tw0s, to suggest, Jn. xiii. 2 (ri év @up@ twos, Hom. Od.
1, 201; 14, 269; eis vovv, schol. ad Pind. Pyth. 4, 133;
al.; €uBddXew eis vodv rev, Plut. vit. Timol. ce. 3). [Comp.:
apdu-, ava-, avti-, amo-, dia-, €k-, €4-, Tap-eu-, eml-, KaTa-,
pera-, mapa-, Tept-, Tpo-, Tup-, Urep-, UTro-BddXa. |
Barritw; [impf. ¢8amrifov]; fut. Barricw; 1 aor. €Ba-
mrica; Pass., [pres. Barritouar]; impf. eBamrifsuny; pf.
ptep. BeBamricpevos; 1 aor. _BarticOnv; 1 fut. BarrirOy-
copa; 1 aor. mid. éBanticduny ; (frequent. [?] fr. Barro,
like BadXiw fr. BaddAw) ; here and there in Plat., Polyb.,
Diod., Strab., Joseph., Plut., al. I. 1. prop. to dip
repeatedly, to immerge, submerge, (of vessels sunk, Polyb.
1,51, 6; 8, 8,4; of animals, Diod. 1, 36). 2. to cleanse
by dipping or submerging, to wash, to make clean with
water ; in the mid. and the 1 aor. pass. to wash one’s self,
bathe; so Mk. vii. 4 [where WH txt. pavric@vra]; Lk.
xi. 38, (2 K. v. 14 ¢Banricato ev T@ “Iopdavyn, for 530;
Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 30; Judith xii. 7). 3. metaph. to
overwhelm, as iStwtas tais eiaopais, Diod. 1, 73; épAnpact,
Plut. Galba 21 ; 77 cupdopa BeBarriopevos, Heliod. Aeth.
2,3; and alone, to inflict great and abounding calamities
on one: €Bamticav thy modu, Joseph. b. j. 4, 3, 3; 4 dvopia
pe Barrier, Is. xxi. 4 Sept.; hence BamrifecOa Barrio pa
(cf. W. 225 (211); [B. 148 (129)]; ef. Nover Oar rd Aov-
tpov, Ael. de nat. an. 3, 42), to be overwhelmed with ca-
lamities, of those who must bear them, Mt. xx. 22 sq. Ree. ;
Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50, (cf. the Germ. etwas auszubaden
haben, and the use of the word e. g. respecting those who
cross a river with difficulty, gos rév paoray of wefot Ba-
nriCopevor OteBavov, Polyb. 3, 72,4; [for exx. see Soph.
Lex. s. v.; also T. J. Conant, Baptizein, its meaning and
use, N. Y. 1864 (printed also as an App. to their revised
version of the Gosp. of Mt. by the “ Am. Bible Union”’) ;
and esp. four works by J. W. Dale entitled Classic, Ju-
daic, Johannic, Christic, Baptism, Phil. 1867 sqq.; D. B.
Ford, Studies on the Bapt. Quest. (including a review of
Dr. Dale’s works), Bost. 1879]). II. In the NT. it
is used particularly of the rite of sacred ablution, first in-
stituted by John the Baptist, afterwards by Christ’s com-
mand received by Christians and adjusted to the con-
tents and nature of their religion (see Bdmricpa, 3), viz.
an immersion in water, performed as a sign of the re-
moval of sin, and administered to those who, impelled by
a desire for salvation, sought admission to the benefits
of the Messiah’s kingdom ; [for patristic reff. respecting
the mode, ministrant, subjects, ete. of the rite, ef. Soph.
Lex. s. v.; Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Baptism]. a. The
word is used absolutely, to administer the rite of ablu-
tion, to baptize, (Vulg. baptizo; Tertull. tingo, tinguo, [cf.
mergito, de corona mil. § 3]): Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 25 sq. 28;
ili. 22 sq. 26; iv. 2; x.40; 1 Co. i. 17; with the cognate
noun 70 Surtiopa, Acts xix.4; 6 Bamritwy substantively
94 | Barticpa
i. q. 6 Barriorns, Mk. vi. 14, [24 T Tr WH]. teva, In.
iv.1; Acts viii. 38; 1 Co.i.14,16. Pass. to be baptized :
Mt. iii. 13 sq. 16; Mk. xvi. 16; Lk. iii. 21; Acts ii. 41;
vili. 12, 13, [36]; x.47; xvi. 15; 1 Co.i.15 L T Tr WH;
x.2L T Tr mrg. WH mrg. Pass. in a reflex. sense [i. e.
Mid. ef. W. § 38, 3], to allow one’s self to be initiated by
baptism, to receive baptism: LK. [iii. 7,12]; vii. 30; Acts ii.
38; ix. 18; xvi.33; xviii. 8; with the cognate noun rd Ba-
nricpa added, Lk. vii. 29; 1 aor. mid., 1 Co. x.2 (LT Tr
mrg.WH mrg. €BarricOncav [cf.W. § 38, 4 b.]); Acts xxii.
16. foll. by a dat. of the thing with which baptism is per-
formed, téart, see bb. below. b. with Prepositions;
aa. eis, to mark the element into which the immersion
is made: eis rév "Iopdaynv, Mk. i. 9. to mark the end:
eis petdvoay, to bind one to repentance, Mt. iii. 113; es
76 “Iwavvov Barticpa, to bind to the duties imposed by
John’s baptism, Acts xix. 3 [cf. W. 397 (371)]; ets dvoud
twos, to profess the name (see évoua,2) of one whose fol-
lower we become, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii. 16; xix. 5;
1 Co. i. 13,155; els dpeow dpapriay, to obtain the forgive-
ness of sins, Acts ii. 38; eis rov Mavajv, to follow Moses
as a leader, 1 Co. x. 2. to indicate the effect: eis &
cpa, to unite together into one body by baptism, 1 Co.
xl. 133 eis Xpeordy, eis Tov Oavatov avrov, to bring by bap-
tism into fellowship with Christ, into fellowship in his
death, by which fellowship we have died to sin, Gal. iii.
27; Ro. vi. 3, [ef. Mey. on the latter pass., Ellic. on the
former]. bb. év, with dat. of the thing in which one is
immersed: é€v r@ “Iopddvyn, Mk. i. 5; ev ro VdarTe, Jn. i. 31
(L T Tr WH ev 06., but cf. Mey. ad loc. [who makes the
art. deictic]). of the thing used in baptizing: év véart,
Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i.8 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. ev];
Jn. i. 26, 33; cf. B. § 133, 19; [cf. W. 412 (384); see
ev, I. 5 d.a.]; with the simple dat., vdar1, Lk. iii. 16 ;
Acts i. 55 xi. 16. ev mvevpare ayio, to imbue richly with
the Holy Spirit, (just as its large bestowment is called an
outpouring): Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i.8 [L Trbr. ev]; Lk. iii.
16; Jn.i. 33; Acts 1.5; xi. 16; with the addition kat rupi
to overwhelm with fire (those who do not repent), i. e. to
subject them to the terrible penalties of hell, Mt. iii. 11.
ev 6vdépatt Tov kupiou, by the authority of the Lord, Acts
x. 48. ce. Pass. emi [L Tr WH ev} T® ovopate "Inaov
Xptorod, relying on the name of Jesus Christ, i. e. repos-
ing one’s hope on him, Acts ii. 38. dd. inép rap
vexpov on behalf of the dead, i. e. to promote their eternal
salvation by undergoing baptism in their stead, 1 Co. xv.
29; cf. [W. 175 (165) ; 279 (262); 382 (358); Meyer (or
Beet) ad loc.]; esp. Neander ad loc.; Riickert, Progr.
on the passage, Jen. 1847; Paret in Ewald’s Jahrb. d.
bibl. Wissensch. ix. p. 247; [cf. B. D. s. v. Baptism XIL
Alex.’s Kitto ibid. VI. ].*
Barrio pa, -ros, TO, (Bantif@), a word peculiar to N. T.
and eccl. writ., immersion, submersion ; 1. used trop.
of calamities and afflictions with which one is quite oyer-
whelmed: Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec.; Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50,
(see Barri¢o, I. 3). 2. of John’s baptism, that
purificatory rite by which men on confessing their sins
were bound to a spiritual reformation, obtained the par-
Carrio pos
don of their past sins and became qualified for the benefits
of the Messiah’s kingdom soon to be set up: Mt. iii. 7;
xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. vii. 29; xx. 4; Actsi. 22; x. 37;
Xvili. 25 ; [xix. 3]; Bar. peravoias, binding to repentance
[W. 188 (177)], Mk. i. 4; Lk. iii. 3; Acts xiii. 24; xix. 4.
3. of Christian baptism; this, according to the view
of the apostles, is a rite of sacred immersion, commanded
by Christ, by which men confessing their sins and pro-
fessing their faith in Christ are born again by the Holy
Spirit unto a new life, come into the fellowship of Christ
and the church (1 Co. xii. 13), and are made par-
takers of eternal salvation ; [but see art. “ Baptism” in
BB.DD., McC. and S., Schaff-Herzog]: Eph. iv. 5 ; Col.
ii. 12 [L mrg. Tr -p@ q. v.]; 1 Pet. iii. 21; efs rov Oavaroy,
Ro. vi. 4 (see Barriga, I. b. aa. fin.). [Trench § xcix.]*
Bamrricpés, -ov, 6, (Bamtifw), a washing, purification
effected by means of water: Mk. vii. 4, 8 [RG L Tr in
br.] (fe0rav kai mornpiwv); of the washings prescribed
by the Mosaic law, Heb. ix. 10. Bamrticpav didaxijs
equiv. to d:day7s rept Barriopar, Heb. vi. 2 [where L txt.
WH txt. Barr. d:8axjv], which seems to mean an expo-
sition of the difference between the washings prescribed
by the Mosaic law and Christian baptism. (Among
prof. writ. Josephus alone, antt. 18, 5, 2, uses the word,
and of John’s baptism; [respecting its interchange with
Banriopa cf. exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 2 and Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. ii. 12, where L mrg. Tr read Bamricpos; cf.
Trench § xcix. ].) *
Bartioths, -ov, 6, (Banrifw), a baptizer; one who ad-
ministers the rite of baptism; the surname of John, the
forerunner of Christ: Mt. iii. 1; xi. 11 sq.; [xiv. 2, 8;
xvi. 14; xvii. 13]; Mk. vi. 24 [T Tr WH 10d Barrigovros |,
25; vill. 28; Lk. vii. 20, 28 [T Tr WHom.], 33; ix. 19; also
given him by Josephus, antt. 18, 5, 2, and found in no other
prof. writ. (Joh. d. Tiiufer by Breest (1881), Kohler (’84). |*
Barro: [fut. Bayo, Jn. xiii. 26 T Tr WH]; 1 aor.
éBava ; pf. pass. ptep. BeBaypevos ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; in Sept. for bau ; a. to dip, dip in, immerse: ti,
Jn. xiii. 26 [but in 26* Lchm. éuBawas, as in 26° L txt.
RG]; foll. by a gen. of the thing into which the object is
dipped (because only a part of it is touched by the act
of dipping), Lk. xvi. 24 (cf. drecOai twos, Mover Oat Tora-
poto, Hom. Il. 5, 6; 6, 508; cf. B. § 132, 25; [W. § 30,
8 c.]). b. to dip into dye, to dye, color: iparvov aipatt,
Rev. xix. 13 [Tdf. mepipepappevov, see s. Vv. mepippaive ;
WH fpepavricpevor, see pavti¢w]. (Hdt. 7, 67; Anth. 11,
68; Joseph. antt. 3, 6,1.) [Comp.: éu-Bamro. | *
Bap, Chald. 43 (cf. Ps. ii. 12; Prov. xxxi. 2]; Bap Iwva
son of Jonah (or Jonas): Mt. xvi. 17, where LT WH
Baptwva (q. v-) Barjonah (or Barjonas), as if a surname,
like BapyaBas, etc. [R.V. Bar-Jonah. Cf. "Iovas, 2.]*
BapaBBas, -a, 6, (fr. 13 son, and Sas father, hence son
of a father i. e. of a master [cf. Mt. xxiii. 9]), a captive
robber whom the Jews begged Pilate to release instead of
Christ: Mt. xxvii. 16 sq. (where codd. mentioned by
Origen, and some other authorities, place "Ijaovv before
BapaBBayv, approved by Fritzsche, De Wette, Meyer,
Bieek, al.; [cf. WH. App. and Tdf.’s note ad loc.; also
95
Bap@oropaios
Treg. Printed Text, etc. p. 194 sq.]), 20 sq. 26; Mk. xv.
(il) toe Lk xxi: 18st ne xvas 4.0.*
Bapak, 6, indecl., (p73 lightning), Barak, a commander
of the Israelites (Judg. iv. 6, 8): Heb. xi. 32. [BB.DD.]*
Bapax(as, -ov, 6, [71'373 Jehovah blesses], Barachiah :
in Mt. xxiii. 35 said to have been the father of the Zach-
ariah slain in the temple ; cf. Zayapias.*
BapBapos, -ov ; 1. prop. one whose speech is rude,
rough, harsh, as if repeating the syllables BapBap (cf.
Strabo 14, 2, 28 p.662; avoparomenoinra 7 AeEts, Etym.
Magn. [188, 11 (but Gaisf. reads Bpayxos for BapBapos) ;
ef. Curtius § 394; Vanicek p. 561]); hence 2.
one who speaks a foreign or strange language which is
not understood by another (Hdt. 2, 158 BapBapous mavras
of AiyUmtiot Kadéovar Tovs pu) iat duoy\wooous, Ovid.
trist. 5, 10, 37 barbarus hic ego sum, quia non intelligor
ulli) ; so 1 Co. xiv. 11. 3. The Greeks used BapBapos
of any foreigner ignorant of the Greek language and the
Greek culture, whether mental or moral, with the added
notion, after the Persian war, of rudeness and brutality.
Hence the word is applied in the N. T., but not re-
proachfully, in Acts xxviii. 2, 4, to the inhabitants of
Malta [i. e. Medirn, q. v.], who were of Pheenician or
Punic origin; and to those nations that had, indeed,
some refinement of manners, but not the opportunity ot
becoming Christians, as the Scythians, Col. iii. 11 | but
cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. But the phrase "EAAnves re Kar
BapBapor forms also a periphrasis for all peoples, or indi-
cates their diversity yet without reproach to foreigners
(Plat. Theaet. p. 175 a.; Isocr. Euag. c. 17 p. 192b.;
Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 and in other writ.) ; so in Ro. i. 14.
(In Philo de Abr. §-45 sub fin. of all nations not Jews.
Josephus b. j. prooem. 1 reckons the Jews among bar-
barians.) Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. ii. 21 p. 61; [Bp.
Lghtft. on Col. u. s.; B.D. s. v. Barbarian ].*
Bapéw, -6: to burden, weigh down, depress; in the N. T.
found only in Pass., viz. pres. ptcep. Bapovjevor, impv.
BapeicOw; 1 aor. €BapnOnv; pf. ptcp. BeBapnuevos; the
better writ. do not use the pres.; they use only the
pteps. BeBapnos and BeBapnuevos; see Matth. § 227; W.
83 (80); [B. 54 (47); Veitchs.v.]. Used simply: to be
weighed down, oppressed, with external evils and calami-
ties, 2 Co. i. 8; of the mental oppression which the
thought of inevitable death occasions, 2 Co. v.4; dp@ad-
pot BeBapnpevor, sc. Urve, weighed down with sleep, Mk.
xiv. 40 (LT Tr WH xaraBapuvopevor); Mt. xxvi. 43;
with dmv added, Lk. ix. 32; év (3) xpaumady, Lk. xxi.
34 Ree. Bapyybacw, [see Bapivw}, (Hom. Od. 19, 122
oiv@ BeBapnores, Diod. Sic. 4, 38 7H voow); wn Bapeiobo
let it not be burdened, sc. with their expense, 1 Tim. v.
16, (eicopais, Dio Cass. 46, 32). [Comp.: ém-, kara-
Bapéw. | *
Bapéws, adv., (Bapis, q. v-), heavily, with difficulty: Mt.
xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (Is. vi. 10). [From Hdt. on.]*
Bap@oropaios, -ov, 6, Con 4.3 son of Tolmai), bar-
tholomew, one of the twelve apostles of Christ: Mt. x. 3;
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Actsi.13. [See Na@avand ana
BB.DD.] *
Bapinoods 96
Bap-tnoois, 6, (13 son, iw Jesus), Bar-Jesus, a cer-
tain false prophet: Acts xiii. 6 [where Tdf. -cod; see
his note. Cf. Edvpas].*
Bap-wvas, -a [cf. B. 20 (17 sq.)], 6, (fr. 13 son, and
73° Jonah [al. }37) i.e. Johanan, Jona, John; cf. Mey.
on Jn. i. 42 (43) and Lghtft. as below]), Bar-Jonah [or
Bar-Jonas}, the surname of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17
[L T WH; in Jn. i. 42 (48); xxi. 15 sqq. son of John;
see Lghtft. Fresh Revision, etc., p. 159 note (Am. ed.
p- 137 note) ]; see in Bap and "Ievas, 2.*
BapvaBas, -a [B. 20 (18)], 6, (13 son, and $33; ace. to
Luke’s interpretation vids mapaxAnoews, i. e. excelling in
the power tis mapaxAnoews, Acts iv. 36; see mapakdnats,
5), Barnabas, the surname of Joses [better Joseph], a
Levite, a native of Cyprus. He was a distinguished
teacher of the Christian religion, and a companion and
colleague of Paul: Acts ix. 27; xi. 22, [25 Rec.], 30; xii.
25; xili—xv.; 1 Co.ix.6; Gal. ii. 1, 9,13; Col. iv. 10.*
Bapos, -eos, ro, heaviness, weight, burden, trouble: load,
emutiOevat Tivi (Xen. oec. 17, 9), to impose upon one diffi-
cult requirements, Acts xv. 28; BadAeu emi tia, Rev. ii.
24 (where the meaning is, ‘I put upon you no other in-
junction which it might be difficult to observe’; cf.
Diisterdieck ad loc.) ; Baorafew 76 Bapos twos, i. e. either
the burden of a thing, as rd Bapos tijs yuepas the weari-
some labor of the day Mt. xx. 12, or that which a person
bears, as in Gal. vi. 2 (where used of troublesome moral
taults; the meaning is, ‘bear one another’s faults’).
ai@viov Bapos d0€ns a weight of glory never to cease, i. e.
vast and transcendent glory (blessedness), 2 Co. iv. 17;
cf. W. § 34, 3; (wAovrov, Plut. Alex. M. 48). weight i. q.
authorily: év Bape: eivat to have authority and influence,
1 Th. ii. 7 (6), (so also in Grk. writ.; ef. Wesseling on
Diod. Sic. 4, 61; [exx. in Suidas s. v.]). [Sy¥N. see
Gykos. | *
BapoaBas [-ca88as LTTrWH; see WH. App. p.
159], -a [B. 20 (18) ], 6, Barsabas [or Barsabbas] (i. e.
son of Saba [al. Zaba]}) ; 1. the surname of a certain
Joseph: Acts i. 23, [B. D. s. v. Joseph Barsabas]. 2!
the surname of a certain Judas: Acts xv. 22, [B. D.s. v.
Judas Barsabas].*
Bap-ripatos [Tdf. -uaios, yet cf. Chandler § 253], -ov, 6,
(son of Timzus), Bartimeus, a certain blind man: Mk.
x. 46.*
Bapive: to weigh down, overcharge: Lk. xxi. 34 (1 aor.
pass. subj.) BapvvOaow Rec. [ef. W. 83 (80); B. 54 (47)],
for Bapnéoow; see Bapéw. [Comp.: xata-Bapivo.]*
Bapis, -eia, -v, heavy; 1. prop. i. e. heavy in weight :
gopriov, Mt. xxiii. 4 (in xi. 830 we have the opposite,
eadpor). 2. metaph. a. burdensome: évrodn, the
keeping of which is grievous, 1 Jn. v.83. b. severe, stern:
emtatoAn, 2 Co. x. 10 [al. imposing, impressive, cf. Wet-
stein ad loc.]. c. weighty, i. e. of great moment: ra Bapv-
Te€pa Tov vouov the weightier precepts of the law, Mt.
xxiii. 23; aividpara [better airidpara (q. v-)], Acts xxv.
7. d. violent, cruel, unsparing, [A. V. grievous]: dvxKou,
Acts xx. 29 (so also Hom. Il. i. 89; Ken. Ages. 11, 12).*
Baputios, -ov, (Bapis and ripz), of weighty (i. e. great)
Pactrelia
value, very precious, costly: Mt. xxvi. 7 [R G Tr txt.
WH], (so Strabo 17 p. 798; selling at a great price,
Heliod. 2, 30 [var.]; possessed of great honor, Aeschyl.
suppl. 25 [but Dindorf (Lex. s. v.) gives here (after a
schol.) severely punishing ]).*
Bacavitw: [impf. €¢8acdnov]; 1 aor. é8acduca; Pass.,
[pres. Bacavigoya]; 1 aor. €BacavicOnv; 1 fut. Bacan-
cOnoonar; (Bacavos) ; 1. prop. to test (metals) by the
touchstone. 2. to question by applying torture. 3.
to torture (2 Mace. vii.13); hence — 4. _ univ. fo vex with
grievous pains (of body or mind), to torment: rid, Mt.
vill. 29; Mk. v.7; Lk. viii. 28; 2 Pet. ii.8; Rev. xi. 10;
passively, Mt. viii. 6; Rev. ix.5; xx. 10; of the pains of
child-birth, Rev. xii. 2 (cf. Anthol. 2, p. 205 ed. Jacobs) ;
with év and the dat. of the material in which one is tor-
mented, Rev. xiv. 10. 5. Pass. to be harassed, dis-
tressed ; of those who at sea are struggling with a head
wind, Mk. vi. 48; of a ship tossed by the waves, Mt.
xiv. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. Often in O. T.
Apocr.) *
Bacavicpss, -00, 6, (Bacavita, q. V-) ; 1. a testing by
the touchstone or by torture. 2. torment, torture; a.
the act of tormenting: Rev. ix. 5. b. the state or con-
dition of those tormented: Rey. xviii. 7, 10,15; 6 kamvos
Tov Bavauopov aitay the smoke of the fire by which they
are tormented, Rey. xiv.11. (4 Macc. ix.6; xi. 2; [al.];
bad wine is‘called Bacavopds by Alexis in Athen. 1, 56
p- 30 f.) *
Baravorijs, -ov, 6, (Bacavifw), one who elicits the truth
by the use of the rack, an inquisitor, torturer, ({ Antiphon ;
al.}; Dem. p. 978,11; Philo in Flace. § 11 end; [de
concupise. § 1; quod omn. prob. lib. 16; Plut. an vitios.
ad infel. suff. § 2]); used in Mt. xviii. 34 of a jailer
(SecpopvAaé Acts xvi. 23), doubtless because the busi-
ness of torturing was also assigned to him.*
Bacavos, -ov, 7, [Curtius p. 439]; a. the touchstone,
[called also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by which gold
and other metals are tested. b. the rack or instrument
of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth. c.
torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease,
Mt. iv. 24; of the torments of the wicked after death,
ev Bacavos vmapyew, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. iii. 1; 4 Mace.
xill. 14); hence 6 rézos tis Bacavov is used of Gehenna,
Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.) *
Bactrcla, -as, 7, (fr. Baoikevw; to be distinguished fr.
Bacitera a queen; cf. iepeta priesthood fr. iepevo, and
i€peca a priestess fr. iepevs), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. royal
power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 33; xix. 12, 15;
xxii. 29; Jn. xviii. 36; Acts i. 6; Heb.i. 8; 1 Co. xv.
24; Rev. xvii. 12; of the royal power of Jesus as the
triumphant Messiah, in the phrase ¢pyeoOa ev rH Bac.
avrod, i. e. to come in his kingship, clothed with this pow-
er: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [eis riyv 8. L mrg. Tr mrg.
WH txt.]; of the royal power and dignity conferred on
Christians in the Messiah’s kingdom: Rev. i. 6 (ace. to
Tr txt. WH mre. éeroincev juiv or L nuav [yet RG TWH
txt. Tr mrg. jas] Baoideiav [ Rec. Baowreis]); Tod Beod,
the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rev. xii.
Baoinreia
~
10. 2. a kingdom i.e. the territory subject to the
rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq.; xxiv. 7; Mk. iii. 24; vi.
23; xiii. 8; Lk. xi. 17; xxi. 10; plur.: Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv.
5; Heb. xi. 33. 3. Frequent in the N. T. in refer-
ence to the Reign of the Messiah are the following
phrases: 9 Bacwela rod Geod (NTINT NID, Targ. Is.
xl. 9; Mic. iv. 7), prop. the kingdom over which God rules ;
9 Baoidcia Tod Xpiorov (NIVWT miaon, Targ. Jonath. ad
Is. liii. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be
founded by God through the Messiah and over which the
Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; 7 Bao. tav
ovpavav, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33
times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is
of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ.
onwn mibon is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed
universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes
simply 7 BacAeia: Mt. iv. 23, etc. ; Jas. ii. 5; once 7 Bac.
tov Aaveid, because it was supposed the Messiah would be
one of David’s descendants and a king very like David,
Mk. xi. 10; once also 7 Bac. rod Xpiorod kat Geod, Eph. v.
5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel —
who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after
four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one an-
other and the last of them shown itself hostile to the
people of God, at length its despotism should be broken,
and the empire of the world pass over for ever to the holy
people of God (Dan. ii. 44; vii. 14, 18, 27) — the Jews
were expecting a kingdom of the greatest felicity, which
God through the Messiah would set up, raising the dead
to life again and renovating earth and heaven; and that
in this kingdom they would bear sway for ever over all
the nations of the world. This kingdom was called the
kingdom of God or the kingdom of the Messiah; and in
this sense must these terms be understood in the utter-
ances of the Jews and of the disciples of Jesus when
conversing with him, as Mt. xviii. 1; xx. 21; Mk. xi. 10;
Lk. xvii. 20; xix. 11. But Jesus employed the phrase
kingdom of God or of heaven to indicate that perfect order
of things which he was about to establish, in which all those
of every nation who should believe in him were to be gathered
together into one society, dedicated and intimately united
to God, and made partakers of eternal salvation. This
kingdom is spoken of as now begun and actually pres-
ent, inasmuch as its foundations have already been
laid by Christ and its benefits realized among men
that believe in him: Mt. xi. 12; xii. 28; xiii. 41 (in
this pass. its earthly condition is spoken of, in which it
includes bad subjects as well as good); Lk. xvii. 21; 1
Co. iv. 20; Ro. xiv. 17 (where the meaning is, ‘the es-
sence of the kingdom of God is not to be found in ques-
tions about eating and drinking’); Col. i.13. But far
more frequently the kingdom of heaven is spoken of as
a future blessing, since its consummate establishment
is to be looked for on Christ’s solemn return from the
skies, the dead being called to life again, the ills and
wrongs which burden the present state of things being
done away, the powers hostile to God being vanquished :
97
Bacirela
27; xiii. 28 sq.; xiv. 15; xxii. 18; 2 Pet. i. 11; also in
the phrases eiaépyeoOai cis t. Bao. T. ovpavar or r. beov:
Mt. v.20; vii. 21; xviii. 8; xix. 28, 24; Mk. ix. 47; x,
23, 24, 25; Lk. xviii. 24 [T Tr txt. WH eionopevorrar],
25; Jn. iii. 5; Acts xiv. 22; KAnpovdpos tis Bacideias,
Jas. ii. 5; KAnpovopety tr. B. 7. 6.; see d. below. By a sin-
gular use 7 Bac. Tov Kupiov 7 émovpavios God’s heavenly
kingdom, in 2 Tim. iv. 18, denotes the exalted and perfeet
order of things which already exists in heaven, and into
which true Christians are ushered immediately after
death; cf. Phil. i. 23; Heb. xii. 22 sq. The phrase Bac.
T@v ovpavay or Tov Geod, while retaining its meaning king-
dom of heaven or of God, must be understood, according
to the requirements of the context, a. of the beginning,
growth, potency, of the divine kingdom: Mt. xiii. 31-33;
Mk. iv. 30; Lk. xiii. 18. b. of its fortunes: Mt. xiii. 24;
Mk. iv. 26. c. of the conditions to be complied with in
order to reception among its citizens: Mt. xviii. 23; xx.
1; xxii. 2; xxv. 1. d. of its blessings and _ benefits,
whether present or future: Mt. xiii. 44 sq.; Lk. vi. 20;
also in the phrases (nreiv riv Bac. 7. Geod, Mt. vi. 33
[L T WH om. r. Ocod]; Lk. xii. 31 [adrod L txt. T Tr
WH]; d€yecOa r. Bac. tr. 6. os madiov, Mk. x. 15; Lk.
Xvill. 17; KAnpovopetv tr. B. tr. 6. Mt. xxv. 34; 1 Co. vi.
9 sq.; xv. 50; Gal. v. 21; see in kAnpovopew, 2. e. of
the congregation of those who constitute the royal ‘city
of God’: woety twas Baordeiav, Rev. i. 6 G T WH txt.
Tr mrg. [cf. 1 above]; v. 10 (here RG Bacueis, so R in
the preceding pass.), cf. Ex. xix. 6. Further, the foll.
expressions are noteworthy: of persons fit for admis-
sion into the divine kingdom it is said avtév or rowotrav
eot 9 Bac. Tay ovp. or Tov Oeod: Mt. v. 3, 10; xix. 14;
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. S:ddvae ruvi +. Bac. is used of
God, making men partners of his kingdom, Lk. xii. 32;
mapaXapBavew of those who are made partners, Heb. xii.
28. da tiv Bac. T. ovp. to advance the interests of the
heavenly kingdom, Mt. xix. 12; &vexev rijs Bao. r. 6. for the
sake of becoming a partner in the kingdom of God, Lk.
xviii. 29. Those who announce the near approach of the
kingdom, and describe its nature, and set forth the condi-
tions of obtaining citizenship in it, are said dvayyéAXew rt.
Bao. r. 6. Lk. ix. 60; evayyediCeo Oat thy B. 7. 8. Lk. iv. 43 ;
viii. 1; xvi. 16; mepi trys Bao. r. 6. Acts viil. 12; knpiooew
thy Bao. t. 8. Lk. ix. 2; Acts xx. 25; xxvili. 31; 76 evay-
yeXuov THs Bao. Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; with the addi-
tion of rod Oeov, Mk. i. 14 RLbr. #yyexev 7 Bao. r. ovp.
or Tov Geod, is used of its institution as close at hand: Mt.
iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15; Lk. x. 9,11. it is said épyeoOa
i. e. to be established, in Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20;
Mk. xi. 10. In accordance with the comparison which
likens the kingdom of God to a palace, the power of ad-
mitting into it and of excluding from it is called xNeis
tis B. Tr. ovp. Mt. xvi. 19; KAetew thy B. Tr. ovp. to keep
from entering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14). viol r7s Bac. are those
to whom the prophetic promise of the heavenly kingdom
extends: used of the Jews, Mt. viii. 12; of those gathered
out of all nations who have shown themselves worthy of
Mt. vi. 10; viii. 11; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 1; xv. 43; Lk. ix. | a share in this kingdom, Mt. xiii. 38. (In the O. Tt
Bactrevos
Apocr. 7 Bac. rod Geod denotes God’s rule, the divine ad-
ministration, Sap. vi. 5; x. 10; Tob. xiii. 1; so too in Ps.
cii. (ciii.) 19; civ. (cv.) 11-13; Dan. iv. 33; vi. 26; the
universe subject to God’s sway, God’s royal domain, Song
of the Three Children 32; 7 Baoweia, simply, the O. T.
theocratic commonwealth, 2 Mace. i. 7.) Cf. Fleck, De
regno divino, Lips. 1829; Baumg.-Crusius, Bibl. Theol.
p- 147 sqq.; Tholuck, Die Bergrede Christi, 5te Aufl. p.
55 sqq. [on Mt. v. 3]; Clin, Bibl. Theol. i. p. 567 sqq.,
ii. p. 108 sqq.; Schmid, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 262 sqq.
ed. 4; Baur, Neutest. Theol. p. 69 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. d. N. T. § 13; [also in his Leben Jesu, bk. iv. ch.
2]; Schiirer, [Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29 (esp. par. 8) and
reff. there; also] in the Jahrbb. fiir protest. Theol.,
1876, pp. 166-187 (cf. Lipsius ibid. 1878, p. 189); [B.D.
Am. ed. s. v. Kingdom of Heaven, and reff. there].
Bac iretos, (rarely -eia), -evor, royal, kingly, regal: 1 Pet.
ii. 9. As subst. rd Bacitetov (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 3; Prov.
xviii. 19 Sept.; Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 4), and much oftener
(fr. Hdt. 1, 30 down) in plur. ra Bacideca (Sept. Esth.
i. 9, etc.), the royal palace: Lk. vii. 25 [A. V. kings’
courts ].*
Bactrets, -€ws, 6, leader of the people, prince, com-
mander, lord of the land, king; univ.: ot Baoweis ths
yas, Mt. xvii. 25; Rev. xvi. 14[L.T Tr WH om. ris ys],
etc.; trav €Ovav, Lk. xxii. 25; of the king of Egypt, Acts
vii. 10, 18; Heb. xi. 23, 27; of David, Mt.i. 6; Acts xiii.
22; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq.;
Lk.i.5; Acts xii. 1; xxv. 135 of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv..9;
Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of aking, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; “re-
ges Syriae, regis Antiochi pueros, scitis Romae nuper
fuisse,”’ Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17,59; [Verg.
Aen. 9, 223]) ; of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2; 1 Pet. ii.
17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ. in the Roman
age, as in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 6; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.];
of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]); of
the Messiah, 6 Baotdevs tev “Iovdaiwv, Mt. ii. 2, etc.; Tod
"Iopand, Mk. xv. 32; Jn. i. 49 (50); xii. 13; of Chris-
tians, as to reign over the world with Christ in the mil-
lennial kingdom, Rev. i. 6; v. 10 (Rec. in both pass. and
Grsb. in the latter; see Baowdela, 3 e.); of God, the su-
preme ruler over all, Mt. v. 35; 1 Tim. i. 17 (see aiav,
2); Rev. xv. 3; Baowrets Baotewy, Rev. xvii. 14 [but
here as in xix. 16 of the victorious Messiah]; 6 Bac.
tay Baowdevovtay, 1 Tim. vi. 15, (2 Mace. xiii. 4; 3 Mace.
v. 35; Enoch 9,4; [84, 2; Philo de decal. § 10]; cf. [xv-
pwos tov Bac. Dan. ii. 47]; Kiptos t. kuvpiov, Deut. x. 17;
Ps. exxxy. (cxxxvi.) 3; [so of the king of the Par-
thians, Plut. Pomp. § 38, 1]).
Bacttedw; fut. Baoikevow; 1 aor. eBacidevoa; (Bact-
Aevs) ; —in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] with gen. or dat.,
in the sacred writ., after the Hebr. (Oy Swi), foll. by
éni with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT WH om.
‘Lr br. emi); Rev. v.10; foll. by ei with acc. of the
pers., Lk. i. 33; xix. 14, 27; Ro. v.14; [ef. W. 206 (193
8q-); B. 169 (147) ]—1%0 be king, to exercise kingly power,
29 reign: univ., 1 Tim. vi. 15; Lk. xix. 14,27; of the
governor of a country, although not possessing kingly
98
Bactalo
rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6; of the
rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33; 1 Co. xv. 25; Rev.
xi. 15; of the reign of Christians in the millennium,
Rey. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the
word to denote the supreme moral dignity, liberty, bless-
edness, which will be enjoyed by Christ’s redeemed ones:
Ro. v. 17 (cf. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.); 1 Co. iv. 8.
Metaph. to exercise the highest influence, to control: Ro.
vy. 14, 17, 21; vi. 12. The aor. €Bacidevoa denotes I
obtained royal power, became king, have come to reign, in
1 Co. iv. 8 [cf. W. 302 (283); B. 215 (185)]; Rev. xi.
17; xix. 6, (as often in Sept. and prof. writ.; cf. Grimm
on 1 Mace. p. 11; Breitenbach or Kiihner on Xen.
mem. 1, 1,18; on the aor. to express entrance into a
state, see Bnhdy. p. 382; Kriiger § 53, 5,1; [Kihner
§ 386, 5; Goodwin § 19 N.1]). [Comp.: ocup-Baot-
A€va. | *
Bactdukds, -7, -dv, of or belonging to a king, kingly,
royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince,
a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27;
often in Joseph.). subject to a king: of a country, Acts
xii. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: é6ns, Acts
xii. 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: vopos, Jas. ii.
8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 ¢. 7d dpOdv vopos eari Bacwrkkés,
Xen. symp. 1, 8 Baowduxdv Kaddos; 4 Mace. xiv. 2).*
[BactXlokos, -ov, 6, (dimin. of Baowevs), a petty king;
a reading noted by WH. in their (rejected) marg. of Jn.
iv. 46,49. (Polyb., al.)*]
Bacittooa, -7s, 7, queen: Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Acts
vill. 27; Rev. xviii. 7. (Xen. oec. 9, 15; Aristot. oec.
9 [in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 84; cf. frag. 385 (fr. Poll. 8,
90) p. 1542%, 25]; Polyb. 23, 18, 2 [excrpt. Vales. 7],
and often in later writ.; Sept.; Joseph.; the Atticists
prefer the forms Baowis and Bacide.a; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 225; [on the termination, corresponding to Eng. -ess,
cf. W. 24; B. 73; Soph. Lex. p. 37; Sturz, De dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 151 sqq.; Curtius p. 653].) *
Baors, -ews, 7, (BAQ, Baiva) ; 1. a stepping, walk
ing, (Aeschyl., Soph., al.). 2. that with which one
steps, the foot: Acts iii. 7, (Plat. Tim. p. 92a. et al.;
Sap. xiii. 18).*
Backaivw: 1 aor. é8acxava, on which form cf. W. [75
(72)]; 83 (80); [B. 41 (35); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 sq.;
Paralip. p. 21 sq-]; (8a¢w, Baoxw [dcx | to speak, talk) ;
riva [W. 223 (209)]; ‘1. to speak ill of one, to slander,
traduce him, (Dem. 8, 19 [94,19]; Ael. v. h. 2, 13, etc.).
2. to bring evil on one by feigned praise or an evil eye,
to charm, bewitch one, (Aristot. probl. 20, 34 [p. 926°,
24]; Theocr. 6, 39; Ael. nat. an. 1, 35); hence, of those
who lead away others into error by wicked arts (Diod.
4,6): Gal. iii. 1. Cf. Schott [or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc. ;
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 462.*
Bacrdatw; fut. Baordcow; 1 aor. ¢€Bacraca; i. to take
up with the hands: Aibous, Jn. x. 31, (AGav, Hom. Od. 11,
594; rHv paxatpay amd ths yas, Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7).
2. to take up in order to carry or bear; to put upon one’s
self (something) to be carried; to bear what is burden-
some: tov cravpov, Jn. xix.17; Lk. xiv. 27, (see orazcos
Batos
2a. and b.); Metaph.: Baoragew t1, to be equal to un-
derstanding a matter and receiving it calmly, Jn. xvi.
12 (Epict. ench. 29, 5); gopriov, Gal. vi. 5; Baorace
ro xkpiva, must take upon himself the condemnation of
the judge, Gal. v. 10 (wdw Nii, Mic. vii. 9). Hence
to bear, endure: Mt. xx. 12; Acts xv. 10 (¢(uydv); Ro.
mye de; Gal. vi. 2;) Rev. ii. 2sq. . (pict. diss. 1, 3, 2);
Anthol. 5, 9, 3; in this sense the Greeks more com-
monly use depev.) 3. simply to bear, carry: Mt. iii.
MM. xiv. 135) k.vil. 14; xxii. 105 Revscxvils 4;
pass., Acts ili. 2; xxi. 35. 16 dvoud pou evartov €Ovar,
so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles,
i. e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name
to the Gentiles, Acts ix. 15. to carry on one’s person:
Lk. x. 4; Gal. vi. 17 [ef. Ellic. ad loc.]; of the womb
carrying the fetus, Lk. xi. 27; to sustain, i. e. uphold,
support: Ro. xi. 18. 4. by a use unknown to Attic
writ., to bear away, carry off: vooous, to take away or
remove by curing them, Mt. viii. 17 (Galen de compos.
medicam. per gen. 2, 14 [339 ed. Bas.] Wapas te Oepa-
mevet kai Ur@nia Baoracec) [al. refer the use in Mt. 1. ec.
to 2; cf. Meyer]. Jn. xii. 6 (€8dora¢e used to pilfer [R.
V. txt. took away; cf. our ‘shoplifting’, though perh. this
lift is a diff. word, see Skeat s. v.]); Jn. xx. 15, (Polyb.
1, 48, 2 6 Gvepos Tods mipyous TH Bia Baorager, Apollod.
bibl. 2, 6, 2; 3,4, 3; Athen. 2, 26 p. 46 f.; 15, 48 p. 693 e.;
very many instances fr. Joseph. are given by Krebs,
Observv. p. 152 sqq.). [Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] *
Baros, -ov, 7 and (in Mk. xii. 26 GLTTr WH) 6,
(the latter acc. to Moeris, Attic; the former Hellenistic ;
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 532; W. 63 (62) [cf. 36; B. 12
(11)]), [fr. Hom. down], a thorn or bramble-bush [cf.
B. D. s. v. Bush]: Lk. vi. 44; Acts vii. 30, 35; emi rod
(ris) Barov at the Bush, i. e. where it tells about the Bush,
Mk. xii. 26; Lk. xx. 37; cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xi. 2; [B.D.
auv. Bible LV: 1].*
Batos, -ov, 6, Hebr. n3 a bath, [A. V. measure], a Jew-
ish measure of liquids containing 72 sextarii [between
8 and 9 gal. ], (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9): Lk. xvi. 6 [see B.D.
s.v. Weights and Measures II. 2].*
Barpaxos, -ov, 6, a frog, (fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach., and
Hadt.] down): Rev. xvi. 13.*
Barrodoyéw [T WH Barrad. (with 8 B, see WH. App.
p: 152)],-@: 1 aor. subj. Barrodoynow; a. to stammer,
and, since stammerers are accustomed to repeat the
same sounds, b. to repeat the same things over and
over, to use many and idle words, to babble, prate; so Mt.
vi. 7, where it is explained by év r7 moAvdAoyia, (Vulg.
multum loqui; [A. V. to use vain repetitions]); cf. Tho-
luck ad loc. Some suppose the word to be derived from
Battus, a king of Cyrene, who is said to have stuttered
(Hdt. 4, 155); others from Battus, an author of tedious
and wordy poems; but comparing Barrapi¢ew, which
has the same meaning, and BapBapos (q. V.), it seems
far more probable that the word is onomatopoetic. (Sim-
plic. in Epict. [ench. 30 fin.] p. 340 ed. Schweigh.) *
BS€Avypa, -ros, 76, (BSeAvooopuat), a bibl. and eccl. word;
in Sept. mostly for 721A, also for py and ypw, a Soul
99
BeBatow
thing (loathsome on acct. of its stench), a detestable thing;
(Tertull. abominamentum) ; Luth. Greuel; [A. V. abom-
ination]; a. univ.: Lk. xvi. 15. b. in the O. T. often
used of idols and things pertaining to idolatry, to be
held in abomination by the Israelites; as 1 K. xi. 6 (5);
XX. (xxi) 26; 2 K. xvi. 3; xxi. 2; 1 Esdr. vil.13; Sap.
xii. 23; xiv. 11; hence in the N. T. in Rev. xvii. 4 sq.
of idol-worship and its impurities; movety BdeAvypa xk.
Weddos, Rev. xxi. 27. c. the expression 7d Bd. ths épn-
pwoews the desolating abomination [al. take the gen. al. ;
e. g. Mey. as gen. epex.] in Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14,
(1 Mace. i. 54), seems to designate some terrible event
in the Jewish war by which the temple was desecrated,
perh. that related by Joseph. b. j. 4,9, 11 sqq. (Sept.
Dan. xi. 31; xii. 11, 80. (ris) épnpeocews for DN’ Ypv
and on “wv, Dan. ix. 27 85. rav épnueacewy for DY¥IDW
Dvn the abomination (or abominations) wrought by the
desolator, i.e. not the statue of Jupiter Olympius, but a
little idol-altar placed upon the altar of whole burnt-
offerings; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 31; Hengstenberg,
Authentie des Daniel, p. 85 sq.; [the principal explana-
tions of the N. T. phrase are noticed in Dr. Jas. Mori-
son’s Com. on Mt. 1. c.].) *
BSeAuKTSs, -7, dv, (BSeAUcoopat), abominable, detestable:
Tit. i. 16. (Besides only in Prov. xvii. 15; Sir. xli. 5;
2 Mace. i. 27; [cf. Philo de victim. offer. § 12 sub fin. ].)*
PScAtoow: (8d5ém quietly to break wind, to stink) ;
1. to render foul, to cause to be abhorred: tiv dopnv, Ex.
v. 21; to defile, pollute: tas yuyds, r. Wuyxnv, Lev. xi. 43;
xx. 25; 1 Mace. i. 48; pf. pass. ptep. é8deAvypevos abomi-
nable, Rev. xxi. 8, (Lev. xviii. 30; Prov. viii. 7; Job xv.
16; 3 Mace. vi. 9; BdeAvcadpevos, 2 Mace. v. 8). In
native Grk. writ. neither the act. nor the pass. is found.
2. BdeAvoocoua; depon. mid. (1 aor. ¢BdeAvEauny often
in Sept. [ Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 10]; in Grk. writ. depon. pas-
sive, and fr. Arstph. down) ; prop. to turn one’s selfaway
from on account of the stench; metaph. to abhor, detest:
TU NOs Me 226"
BéBatos, -aia (W. 69 (67); B. 25 (22)), -aov, (BAQ,
Baivw), (fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast, firm; prop.: ayxu-
pa, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: eémayyeXia, Ro. iv.
16; KAjows Kal exAoyn, 2 Pet. i. 10; Adyos mpodpnrikds, 2
Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Heb. iii. 14; eAmis, 2 Co.
i. 7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; rappnoia, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH
Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, Aoyos,
Heb. ii. 2; dca6qxn, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same mean-
ings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
BeBard, -&; fut. BeBardow; 1 aor. €BeBaiwoa; Pass.,
[pres. BeBavodpar]; 1 aor. €8eBarHOnv; (BeBatos) ; to make
Jirm, establish, confirm, make sure : rév Xéyov, to prove its
truth and divinity, Mk. xvi. 20; ras émayyeAtas make
good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Ro. xv.
8 (so also in Grk. writ. as Diod. 1,5); Pass. : 7d paprvpiov
Tov Xpicrov, 1 Co.i.6; 7 cwrnpia... eis quads €BeBatwOn,
a constructio praegnans [W. § 66, 2 d.] which may be re-
solved into ets fuas mapedobn Kal ev jpiv BeBaros eyevero,
Heb. ii. 3 ef. 2; see BeBatos. of men made steadfast and
constant in soul: Heb. xiii. 9; 1 Co. i. 8 (BeBaraoee tpas
BeBaiwous
dveykAnrous will so confirm you that ye may be unre-
provable [W. § 59, 6 fin.]); 2 Co. i. 21 (BeBarov nuas
eis Xpiordv, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship
with Christ; cf. Meyer ad loc.); ev r7 miore:, Col. ii. 7
[LT Tr WH om. ev]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Thue. and Plat.
down.) [Comp.: dca-BeBacoopat. | *
BeBalwors, -ews, 7, (BeBadw), confirmation: rod evayye-
Xiov, Phil. i. 7; eis BeBaiwouy to produce confidence, Heb.
vi. 16. (Sap. vi. 19. Thuc., Plut., Dio Cass., [al.]) *
BeBndos, -ov, (BAQ, Baive, Bndds threshold) ; 1. ac-
cessible, lawful to be trodden; prop. used of places; hence
2. profane, equiv. to 5n [i. e. unhallowed, common],
Lev. x.10; 1S. xxi.4; opp. to dyios (as in [Ezek. xxii.
26]; Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18): 1 Tim. iv. 7; vi. 20;
2 Tim. ii. 16; of men, profane i.e. ungodly: 1 Tim.i. 9;
Heb. xii. 16. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)
[Cf. Trench § ci.]*
BeBnr\da, -6; 1 aor. €BeByrAwaa; (BEBndos) ; to profane,
desecrate: 76 aaB8Barov, Mt. xii. 5; 7d iepdv, Acts xxiv. 6.
(Often in Sept. for 54n; Judith ix. 8; 1 Mace. ii. 12,
etc. ; Heliod. 2, 25.) *
BeeAfeBovA and, as written by some [yet no Greek]
authorities, BeeACeSov8 [cod. B BeefeBovA, so cod. & exc.
in Mk. iii. 22; adopted by WH, see their App. p. 159; ef.
B. 6], 6, indecl., Beelzebul or Beelzebub, a name of Satan,
the prince of evil spirits: Mt. x. 25; xil. 24,27; Mk. iii.
22; Lk. xi. 15,18,19. The form Beeh¢eBovdA is composed
of 5337 (rabbin. for 521 dung) and 5ya, lord of dung
or of filth, i. e. of idolatry; cf. Lightfoot on Mt. xii. 24.
The few who follow Jerome in preferring the form Beed-
(<BouB derive the name fr. 3321 Spa, lord of flies, a false
god of the Ekronites (2 K. i. 2) having the power to
drive away troublesome flies, and think the Jews trans-
ferred the name to Satan in contempt. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Beelzebub: and J. G. M(iiller) in Herzog vol. i. p.
768 sqq.; [BB.DD.; cf. also Meyer and Dr. Jas. Mori-
son on Mt. x. 25; some, as Weiss (on Mk.1.c.; Bibl. Theol.
§ 23 a.), doubt alike whether the true derivation of the
name has yet been hit upon, and whether it denotes Satan
or only some subordinate ‘ Prince of demons’]. (Besides
only in eccl. writ., as Ev. Nicod. c. 1 sq.) *
BeAlaoa, 6, (oy93 worthlessness, wickedness), Belial, a
name of Satan, 2 Co. vi. 15 in Rec.be#*2 L. But BeAiap
(q. v-) is preferable, [see WH. App. p. 159; B. 6].*
BeXlap, 6, indecl., Beliar, a name of Satan in 2 Co. vi.
15 Rec.** GT Tr WH, ete. This form is either to be as-
cribed (as most suppose) to the harsh Syriac pronuncia-
tion of the word BeAiad (q. v-), or must be derived from
wy” 53 lord of the forest, i.e. who rules over forests and
deserts, (cf. Sept. Is. xiii. 21; Mt. xii. 43; [BB.DD.s. v.
Belial, esp. Alex.’s Kitto]). Often in eccl. writ.*
Bedovn, -ns, 7), (B€Aos); a. the point of a spear. b. a
needle: Lk. xviii. 25 LT TrWH;; see padis. ([Batr. 130],
Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., al.; ef. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 90.)*
BéXos, -eos, 76, (BaAAw), a missile, a dart, javelin, arrow:
Eph. vi. 16. [From Hom. down.]*
BeAriwv, -ov, gen. -ovos, better; neut. adverbially in 2
‘Lim. i. 18 [W. 242 (227); B. 27 (24). Soph., Thuc., al.}*
100
BynOeoSa
Benapiv [-yetv L T Tr WH; see WH. App. 155, and
S. V. €t, t],6,({"12733; i.e. [2-}2 son of the right hand, i. e.
of good fortune, Gen. xxxv. 18), Benjamin, Jacob’s
twelfth son; vA1) Bercapiy the tribe of Benjamin: Acts
xiii. 21; Ro. xi. 1; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. vii. 8.*
Bepvixn, -ns, n, (for Bepevixn, and this the Macedonic
form [cf. Sturz, De dial. Mae. p. 31] of @epevixn [i. e. vic-
torious]), Bernice or Berenice, daughter of Herod Agrip-
pa the elder. She married first her uncle Herod, king
of Chalcis, and after his death Polemon, king of Cilicia.
Deserting him soon afterwards, she returned to her
brother Agrippa, with whom previously when a widow
she was said to have lived incestuously. Finally she
became for a time the mistress of the emperor Titus
(Joseph. antt. 19, 5,1; 20, 7,1 and 3; Tacit. hist. 2, 2
and 81; Suet. Tit. 7): Acts xxv. 13, 23; xxvi. 30. Cf.
Hausrath in Schenkel i. p. 396 sq.; [ Farrar, St. Paul, ii.
599 sq. ].*
Bépoua, -as, 7, (also Beppora [i. e. well-watered ]), Berea,
a city of Macedonia, near Pella, at the foot of Mount
Bermius: Acts xvii. 10, 13.*
Bepouaios, -a, -ov, Berean: Acts xx. 4.*
[BnScaida, given by L mrg. Tr mrg. in Lk. x. 13 where
Ree. etc. ByOcaida, q. v.]
BnOaBapa, -as, [-pa Rec.bezst, indecl.], 4, (AIAY M3
place of crossing, i. e. where there is a crossing or ford,
ef. Germ. Furthhausen), Bethabara: Jn. i. 28 Ree. [in
Rec.” of 1st decl., but ef. W. 61 (60)]; see [WH.
App. ad loc. and] Bnéavia, 2.*
Bravia, -as, 7, (773) 1°32 house of depression or misery
[ef. B.D. Am. ed.]), Bethany; 1. a town or village
beyond the Mount of Olives, fifteen furlongs from Jeru-
salem: Jn. xi. 1, 18; xii. 1; Mt. xxi. 17; xxvi.6; Lk. xix.
29 [here WH give the accus. -md (see their App. p. 160),
cf. Tr mrg.]; xxiv. 50; Mk. xi.1,11sq.; xiv.3; nowa
little Arab hamlet, of from 20 to 30 families, called el-
’Aziriych or el-’Azir (the Arabic name of Lazarus) ; cf.
Robinson i. 431 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.]. 2. a town or
village on the east bank of the Jordan, where John bap-
tized: Jn. i. 28 LT Tr WH, [see the preceding word].
But Origen, although confessing that in his day nearly
all the codd. read év BnOavia, declares that when he
journeyed through those parts he did not find any place
of that name, but that Bethabara was pointed out as the
place where John had baptized; the statement is con-
firmed by Eusebius and Jerome also, who were well ac-
quainted with the region. Hence it is most probable that
Bethany disappeared after the Apostles’ time, and was
restored under the name of Bethabara; cf. Liicke ad
loc. p. 391 sqq. [Cf. Prof. J. A. Paine in Phila. S. S.
Times for Apr. 16, 1881, p. 243 sq.]*
BnOeoS4, 4, indec., (Chald. 830M 3; i. e. house of
mercy, or place for receiving and caring for the sick),
3ethesda, the name of a pool near the sheep-gate at
Jerusalem, the waters of which had curative powers:
Jn. v. 2 [here Lmrg. WH mrg. read BnOcaida, T WH txt.
BnO¢aba (q. v.)]. What locality in the modern city is
its representative is not clear; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.;
BnOfaba
Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 117 sq.; Robinson i. 330 sq.
342 sq.; [B.D. s. v.; “The Recovery of Jerusalem ”
(see index) |. "
BnOta0d, 4, (perh. fr. Chald. sn7i na house of olives;
not, as some suppose, SAW N° house of newness, Germ.
Neuhaus, since it cannot be shown that the Hebr. 1 is
ever represented by the Grk. ¢), Bethzatha: Jn. v. 2
T [WH tst.] after codd. § LD and other authorities
(no doubt a corrupt reading, yet approved by Keim ii.
p- 177, [see also WH. App. ad loc.]), for Rec. BnOeada,
q.v- [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.]*
BnOdcép, 7, [indecl.], (in Joseph. not only so [antt. 8,
10, 1), but also BnOdcepn, "IS enbt!! 6S FL Hat 1, en ieee
3]; amd BnOd€pwr, 5, 2, 8; &x ByOdecuor, 5, OM O RELA,
13; 9,2]), Bethlehem, (ony m3 house of beeen a little
town, named from the fertility of its soil, six Roman
miles south of Jerusalem; now Beit Lachm, with about
3000 [5000 ”, Baedeker] inhabitants: Mt. ii. 1, 5 sq. 8,
16; Lk. ii. 4,15; Jn. vii. 42. Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.; Rob-
inson i. p. 470 sqq.; Raumer p. 313 sqq. ; ‘obler, Beth-
lehem in Palistina u.s.w. 1849; [Socin (i.e. Baedeker),
Hadbk. etc., s. v.; Porter (i.e. Murray) ib.; BB.DD.].*
ByPoaisa [WH -oadd; see I, «| and (Mt. me 21 RG
T WH) -day, 7, indecl. but with ace. [which may, how-
ever, be only the alternate form just given; cf. WH.
App. p. 160] Byécaidav [B. 17 oo sq-) 3 Win. 61 (60);
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 sq.], (Syr. is p Oe i. e. house or
place of hunting or fishing), Bethsaida; 1. a small
city (woXts, Jn. i. 44 (45)) or a village (képn, Mk. viii. 22,
23) on the western shore of the Lake of Gennesaret:
Jn. i. 44 (45); Mt. xi. 21; Mk. vi.45; Lk. x. 13 [here
Lumrg. Tr mrg. Bydcaida; cf. Tdf. Projeg. u. s.]; Jn.
xii. 21 (where rjs TadwAaias is added). 2. a village
in lower Gaulanitis on the eastern shore of Lake Gennes-
aret, not far from the place where the Jordan empties
into it. Philip the tetrarch so increased its population
that it was reckoned as a city, and was called Julias in
honor of Julia, the daughter of the emperor Augustus
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2,1; Plin. h.n. 5,15). Many think
that this city is referred to in Lk. ix. 10, on account of
Mk. vi. 32,45; Jn. vi. 1; others that the Evangelists
disagree. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Raumer p. 122 sq.;
[BB.DD. s. v. 3. In Jn. v. 2 Lehm. mrg. WH mre.
read Bnéaaida; see s. v. BnOecda. |*
BnPpayq [but Lehm. uniformly, Treg. in Mt. and Mk.
and RG in Mt. +7 (B. 15; W. 52 (51); ef. Tdf. Proleg.
p- 103); in Mt. xxi. 1 Tdf. ed. 7 -ogayy], 9, indecl., (fr.
m3 and 15 house of unripe figs), Bethphage, the name
of a country-seat or hamlet (Euseb. cails it xépn, Jerome
aD on the Mount of Olives, near Bethany: Mt. xxi.
; Mk. xi. 1 RG Trtxt. WH txt., but Tr mrg. in br. ;
tk xix. 29. [BB.DD. g.vei*
Bina, -ros, rd, (fr. BAQ, Baive), [fr. Hom. (h. Merc.),
Pind. down]; 1. a step, pace: Brua modes the space
which the foot covers, a foot-breadth, Acts vii. 5 (for
529-13 Deut. ii. 5, cf. Xen. an. 4, 7,10; Cyr. 7, 5, 6).
2. a raised place mounted by steps; a platform, tribune:
101
BuBrios
used of the official seat of a judge, Mt. xxvii. 19; Jn
xix. 13; Acts xviii. 12, 16 sq.; xxv. 6, 10,[17]; of the
judgment-seat of Christ, Ro. xiv. 10 (LT Tr WH row
Geod); 2 Co. v.10; of the structure, resembling a throne,
which Herod built in the theatre at Caesarea, and from
which he used to view the games and make speeches to
the people, Acts xii. 21; (of an orator’s pulpit, 2 Mace.
xiii. 26; Neh. viii. 4. Xen. mem. 3, 6,1; Hdian. 2, 19,
2 [1 ed. Bekk.]).*
BipvAdos, -ov, 6, 7, beryl, a precious stone of a pale
green color (Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (20) [i. e. 37, 79]): Rev.
xxi. 20. (Tob. xiii. 17; neut. BypvdAdcov equiv. to ONY,
Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix. 13)). Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Edelsteine, 11; [esp. Riehm, HWB. ib. 3 and 12].*
Bla, -as, 7; 1. strength, whether of body or of mind:
Hom. and subseq. writ. 2. strength in violent action,
force: pera Bias by the use of force, with violence, Acts
v. 26; xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; shock ray kupar@v, Acts xxvii. 41
[R G, but Tr txt. br. al. om. trav kuparev]; dia 7. Biav rod
dyXov, the crowd pressing on so violently, Acts xxi. 35.
[Syn. see dvvayss, fin. ]*
Bidtw: (Bia); to use force, to apply force; twa, to
force, inflict violence on, one; the Act. is very rare and
almost exclusively poetic, [fr. Hom. down]; Pass. [B.
53 (46) ] in Mt. xi. 12 7 Baowdela Tr. odp. Biderar, the king-
dom of heaven is taken by violence, carried by storm, i. e.
a share in the heavenly kingdom is sought for with the
most ardent zeal and the intensest exertion; cf. Xen.
Hell. 5, 2, 15 (23) wddeus tas BeBiacpevas; [but see Weiss,
Jas. Morison, Norton, in loc.]. The other explanation :
the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence sc. from its ene-
mies, agrees neither with the time when Christ spoke the
words, nor with the context; cf. Fritzsche, De Wette,
Meyer, ad loc. Mid. Bragopa foll. by ets re to force one’s
way into a thing, (és thy Moridaav, Thue. 1, 63; és ro ea,
7,69; eis rv mapeuBodny, Polyb. 1, 74,5; eis Ta evrds,
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; eis 76 orpardmedov, Plut. Otho
12, ete.): eis r. Baowdelav Tod Geod, to get a share in the
kingdom of God by the utmost earnestness and effort,
Lk. xvi. 16. [Comp.: mapaBia¢ouat. | *
Biauos, -a, -ov, (Bia), violent, forcible: Acts ii. 2 [A. V.
mighty]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Biacris, -od, 6, (Biatw) ; 1. strong, forceful: Pind.
Ol. 9, 114 [75]; Pyth. 4, 420 [236; but Pind. only uses
the form Biards, so al.]. 2._ using force, violent: Philo,
agric. § 19. In Mt. xi. 12 those are called Buaorai by
whom the kingdom of God Biagerat, i. e. who strive to
obtain its privileges with the utmost eagerness and
effort.*
PiBAapiStov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of the dimin. B:8Adprov fr.
7 BiBXos), a little book: Rev. x. 2, 8 [L Tr WH B:Bnriov,
Tdf. 2 and 7 BiBAddprov, q. v-], 9,10. Not found in prof.
auth. [Herm. vis. 2, 4, 3]; cf. W. 96 (91).*
PiPALSdprov, -ov, 7d, (fr. BrBAidov, like iwaridaproy fr.
ipatidiov), a little book: Rev. x. 8 Tdf. cau 2 and] 7.
(Arstph. frag. 596.) *
BiBAlov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of BiBdAos), a small book, a
scroll: Lk. iv. 17, 20; Jn. xx. 30; Gal. iii. 10; 2 Tim. iv.
BiBros
13, etc.; a written document; a sheet on which some-
thing has been written, 8. drooraciou [bill of divorce-
ment]: Mt. xix.7; Mk. x.4; see drograguov, 1. BiBdéov
Cas, the list of those whom God has appointed to eter-
nal salvation: Rev. xiii. 8 [Rec. 77 Bi8dw]; xvii. 8; xx.
12; xxi. 27; see (wn, 2b. [From Hdt. down. ]
BiBdos, -ov, 7, (or rather 7 BvBAos [but the form Bir.
more com. when it denotes a writing], the plant called
papyrus, Theophr. hist. plant. 4, 8, 2 sq. ; [ Plin. h. n.
13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)]; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular sub-
stance of its stem (for it was an endogenous plant) ]
paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 433 sq. ;
esp. Dureau de la Malle in the Mémoires de l’Acad. d.
Inserr. etc. tom. 19 pt. 1 (1851) pp. 140-183, and (in
correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot
in the Library Journal for Nov. 1878, p. 323 sq., where
other reff. are also given]), a written book, a roll or scroll:
Mt. i. 1; Lk. iii. 4; Mk. xii. 26; Actsi. 20; rigs (wigs,
Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, ete.; see BiBAiov. [From Aeschyl.
down. |
BiBpdckw: pf. 8é8paxa; to eat: Jn. vi. 13.
writ. fr. Hom. down; often in Sept.) *
Bubvvia, -as, 7, Bithynia, a province of Asia Minor,
bounded by the Euxine Sea, the Propontis, Mysia,
Phrygia, Galatia, Paphlagonia: Acts xvi. 7; 1 Pet.i.1.
[Cf. B. D.s.v.; Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Geog. s. v.; Cony-
beare and Howson, St. Paul, ete. ch. viii. ] *
Bios, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down]; a. life extensively,
i.e. the period or course of life [see below and
Trench § xxvii.]: Lk. viii. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 4;
1 Jn. ii. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 3 [Rec.}. b. (as often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 230, 575; Hdt., Xen.) that by which
life is sustained, resources, wealth, [A. V. living]: Mk.
xii. 44; Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. cl.]; xv. 12,
30; xxi. 43 1 Jn. iii. 17 [goods]. (For on in Prov.
xxxi. 14 (xxix. 32).) *
[Syn. Bios, (w%: ¢. existence (having death as its antithe-
sis); B.the period, means, manner, ofexistence. Hence
the former is more naturally used of animals, the latter of
men; cf. zoology, biography. N.T. usage exalts (w, and
so tends to debase Bios. But see Bp. Lghtft. Ign.ad Rom. 7.|
Bidw, -d: 1 aor. inf. Bidca; for which in Attic the 2
aor. inf. Bidvat is more common, cf. W. 84 (80); [B. 54
(48); Veitch or L. and S. s. v.]; (Bios); [fr. Hom. down];
to spend life, to live: tov xpovov, to pass the time, 1 Pet. iv.
2; (Job xxix. 18; nuepas, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 2). [Syn.
see Bios, fin.]*
Biwors, -ews, 7, manner of living and acting, way of life:
Acts xxvi. 4. (Sir. prolog. 10 d:a tis evvopov Bidceas ;
not found in prof. auth.) *
Biwtikéds, -7, -ov, pertaining to life and the affairs of this
life: Lk. xxi. 34; 1 Co. vi. 3 sq. (The word, not used in
Attic, first occurs in Aristot. h. a. 9, 17, 2 [p. 616, 27];
xpetat Brwrixai is often used, as Polyb. 4, 73, 8; Philo, vit.
Moys. iii. § 18 fin. ; Diod. 2, 29; Artemid. oneir. 1, 31.
Cf. Lob. ad .Phryn. p. 354 sq.) *
PraBepds, -d, -ov, (BAdwrw), hurtful, injurious, (Xen.
mem. 1, 5, 3 opp. to @pPeAmos): 1 Tim. vi. 9 emOupiae
(In Grk.
10
2 Bracdnpla
BraBepat, cf. ndovat BA. Xen. mem. 1, 3,11. (Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e.h. Mere. 36 (taken fr. Hes. opp.
365)] down; once in Sept., Prov. x. 26.) *
PrAdrrw: fut. Bray; 1 aor. ~BdaWa; fo hurt, harm, in-
jure: twa, Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. iv. 35. (Very often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down; Tob. xii. 2; 2 Mace. xii. 22, etc.) *
BAacrdve, 3 pers. sing. pres. subj. 8\aora fr. the form
Braorao, Mk. iv. 27 L'T Tr WH (cf. B. 55 (48) ; [Eccl.:
ii. 6; Herm. sim. 4, 1 sq.]); 1 aor. e8ddaornoa (cf. W.
84 (80); [B. l¢.]); 1. intransitively, to sprout, bud,
put forth leaves: Mk. iv. 27; Mt. xiii. 26; Heb. ix. 45,
(Num. xvii. 8; Joel ii. 22, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind.
down). 2. in later Grk. writ. transitively, to produce:
tov kaprrov, Jas. v. 18. (Gen. i. 11, etc.) *
Badoros [i. e. a sprout], -ov, 6, Blastus, the chamber-
lain of king Herod Agrippa I.: Acts xii. 20 [ef. Mey.
ad loc. ].*
Pracdypew, -&; impf. é8rtacpnuovv; 1 aor. €Bdraodn-
pnoa; Pass., [pres. BAacpnpodpar]; 1 fut. Braodnundy-
copat; (BAaopnpos, q. Vv.) ; to speak reproachfully, rail at,
revile, calumniate, (Vulg. blasphemo); absol.: Lk. xxii.
653 Acts xiii. 455 xviil.65 xxvi. 11; 1 Tim.i. 20; 1 Pet.
iv.4; with ace. of pers. or thing (as in later Grk., Joseph.,
Plut., Appian, etc.): Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. iii. 28 L T Tr
WH: xy. 29; Lk. xxiil..39;5 Tit. 1.2; Jas, i. ¥5hude
10; with the cognate noun BAacdnpiar, to utter blasphe-
my (Plat. legg. 7 p. 800 c.; see dyad ad fin.), Mk. iii.
28 R G (where LT Tr WH Goa for éaas, see above) ;
[foll. by ev, 2 Pet. ii. 12; cf. Bttm. as at end, and see
dyvoew, a.]. Pass. BAacdnyovpar to be evil spoken of, re-
viled, railed at: Ro. iii. 8; xiv. 16; 1 Co. iv. 13 (T WH
Tr mre. dvodnuovpevor); x. 30; Tit. ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 2;
Td dvopa twos, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 1. Spee. of those
who by contemptuous speech intentionally come short
of the reverence due to God or to sacred things (for |
11, 2 K. xix. 6, 22 cf. 4; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. x. 34);
absol.: Mt. ix.3; xxvi. 65; Mk.ii.7 LT Tr WH; [Jn.
x. 36]; rov Oeov, Rev. xvi. 11, 21; tHv Oeav, Acts xix. 37
(GLE Tr WH rhv Gedy); 7d dvoua rod Geod, Rev. xiii.
6; xvi. 9; 7d mvedpa Tod Beod (BAacdnpeira), 1 Pet. iv.
14 Rec.; dofas, Jude 8; 2 Pet. ii. 10 (see do€a, III. 3b. y.);
eis TO mvetpa TO ay. Mk. iii. 29; Lk. xii. 10, (els Aeovs,
Plat. rep. 2 p. 381 e.). The earlier Grks. say BAac¢.
els Twa, Tept or kara twos; [on the N. T. constructions
cf. W. 222 (208); 629 (584); B. 146 (128)]*
Pracdnypta, -as, 7, railing, reviling, (Vulg. blasphemia) ;
a. univ. slander, detraction, speech injurious to another's
good name : Mt. xii. 31; xv. 19; Mk. iii. 28; vii. 22; Eph.
iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 4; Jude 9 (xpiots Bra-
odnpias, i. q. kpiots BAdonpos in 2 Pet. ii. 11, a judgment
pronounced in reproachful terms); Rev.ii.9. _b. spe-
cifically, impious and reproachful speech injurious to the
divine majesty: Mt. xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 7 [RG]; xiv. 64;
Lk. v. 21; Jn. x. 33; Rev. xiii. 5 [not Lehm.]; évoya or
évopara Braodnpias i. q. Braodnua (cf. W. § 34, 3 b.;
[B. § 132, 10]): Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see yéuo] ;
Tov mvevparos, gen. of obj., Mt. xii. 31; mpos Tov Oeov, Rev.
xiii. 6. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.; for 788), Ezek. xxxv.
Brdodnpos
12.) [{BB.DD. s. v. Blasphemy; Campbell, Diss. on the
Gospels, diss. ix. pt. ii.]*
Prdo-hypos, -ov, (SAGE sluggish, stupid, and dyn speech,
report, [al. BAdrrw (q. v.) and q.]), speaking evil, slan-
derous, reproachful, railing, abusive: Acts vi. 11 (pnyara
Brdodnpa cis Mwvojy cai rov Gedy); [vi. 13 Ree. (p. BA.
Kata TOU TOmov Tod dyiov)]; 2 Pet. ii. 11 (see BAaodnuia,
a.); Rev. xiii. 5 [Lehm.]; BAdodnpos as subst. a blas-
phemer: 1 Tim. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Is. Ixvi. 3; Sap. i.
6; Sir. iii. 16; 2 Mace. ix. 28; [x. 36 (cf. 4)]; in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down.) *
Br€ppa, -ros, To, (BAEmw); alook, glance: BrXéupare k. axo7
in seeing and hearing, 2 Pet. ii. 8 [ef. Warfield in Presbyt.
Rev. for 1883 p. 629 sqq. ]. (Eur., Arstph., Dem., Plut., al.) *
Prérw ; [impf. €Brerov]; fut. BrAeyw; 1 aor. €BreWa;
[pres. pass. BAéronar]; Sept. for 83, 139, TIN, Wan;
in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; to see, discern; 1.
with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have
the power of seeing, opp. to rupdAds: Mt. xii. 22: xiii. 16;
Paver en IX. 15, 195-25; Acts ix. 9; Ro: xi. 8,105
Rev. iii. 18, ete. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15;
Xen. mem. 1, 3,4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, ete. Ex. iv. 11;
xxiii. 8, etc. Tob. xi. 15). 16 Bree sight, the power
of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (GLTTrWHom. 7d). _—b. to
perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look, descry; a.
absol.: BAerdvrav aitay while they were looking, Acts i.
9; [xxii 11 Trmrg. WH mrg.]; épyou cai Bree, Rec. in
Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7. B. with acc. of pers. or thing: Mt.
Wii3; xi.4; xxiv. 2; Mk. v. 31; viii. 23 sq.; xiii. 2;
Lk. vi. 41; xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.];
Jn. i. 29; Acts iv. 14, etc.; [Rev. xviii. 18 Rec. épavres ];
tv povnv, him who uttered the voice, Rev. i.12; épaya,
Acts xii. 9; he who has free access to one, as princes,
ministers, and personal friends have to a king, is said
BX. 76 mpdcwrdy Twos (qoen 35 8), 2 K. xxv. 19; Jer.
lii. 25; Esth. i. 14); hence in Mt. xviii. 10 angels of
closest access or of highest rank are referred to (see
apxayyedos). Pass. ra Brerdpeva the things that are
seen: 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 3 (LT Tr WH ro Brerdpevor,
the sum-total or complex of things seen) ; €Amis BAeropevy
hope of things that are seen, i. e. that are present, Ro.
viii. 24. c. to turn the eyes to anything, to look at,
look upon, gaze at: yuvaixa, Mt. v. 28; ets re or twa [W.
§ 33 g.], Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 22; Acts iii. 4; efs rov
ovpavov, Acts i. 11 T Tr WH; in the sense of looking into
(i. e. in order to read), BiBdiov, Rev. v. 3 sq. d. univ.
to percewe by the senses, to feel: rov dvepov ioxupov [T WH
om. icy. ], Mt. xiv. 30, (krvmov dédopxa, Aeschyl. sept. 104).
e. to discover by use, to know by experience: ri, Ro. vii.
23; foll. by drs, 2 Co. vii. 8; by attract. 7d Onptov, re KrA.
Rev. xvii. 8; tmép 6 Bremer pe for brep todTo, 6 BXeéret pe
évra, lest he think me greater than on personal knowl-
edge he finds me to be, 2 Co. xii.6. | 2. metaph. to see
with the mind’s eye; a. fo have (the power of) un-
derstanding: Bdemovtes ov BXErovoer, though endued with
understanding they do not understand, Mt. xiii. 13; Lk.
Vili. 10. b. to discern mentally, observe, perceive, dis-
cover, uaderstand ; absol.: dv eadmrpov, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of
103
Boaw
the omniscient God Bdérwv ev rd kpurra seeing in secret,
where man sees nothing, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 [here LT Tr
WH Bi. ev tr. kpupaiw); eyyifoveay tiv juécpav, Heb. x.
25 (fr. certain external signs); "Incoir . . . éoreavape-
vov, we see (from his resurrection and from the effects
and witness of the Holy Spirit) Jesus crowned, Heb. ii.
9; foll. by ért, Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22. cc. to turn the
thoughts or direct the mind to a thing, to consider, contem-
plate, look to; absol. BXémere take heed: Mk. xiii. 23, 33;
with an ace. of the thing or pers., 1 Co. i. 26; x. 18;
2Co. x. 7; Phil. iii. 2; Col. ii. 5; foll. by was with indie.
[W. 300 (282); B. 255 (219)], Lk. viii. 18; 1 Co. iii.
10; Eph. v. 15; to weigh carefully, examine, foll. by
interrog. ri with indic. Mk. iv. 24; eis mpdcwndy twos,
to look at i. e. have regard to one’s external condition,
—used of those who are influenced by partiality: Mt.
xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14. By a use not found in Grk. auth.
éavtov Bdérew to look to one’s self (i. q. sibi cavere): Mk.
xiii. 9; foll. by iva py [cf. B. 242 (209)], 2 Jn. 8; Bre
Tew amo Twos (i. q. sibi cavere ab aliquo) to beware of one
[W. 223 (209), cf. 39 (38); B. 242 (209), ef. 323 (278)],
Mk. viii. 15; xii. 38; look to in the sense of providing,
taking care: foll. by wa, 1 Co. xvi. 10; foll. by py with
subj. aor., Mt. xxiv.4; Mk. xiii. 5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts xiii.
40; 1 Co. viii. 9 (ums); x. 12; Gal. v.15; Heb. xii.
25; foll. by py with fut. indic., Col. ii. 8; Heb. iii. 12.
The Grks. say épav pn, (ef. W. 503 (468 sq.); B. 242 sq.
(209) ]. 3. in a geographical sense, like Lat. specto
[Eng. look], of places, mountains, buildings, etec., turned
towards any quarter, as it were facing it: foll. by xara
with ace., Acts xxvii. 12 [ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Phenice],
(Sept. [Num. xxi. 20]; Ezek. xi. 1; [xliv. 1; xlvii. 1];
mpos, Xen. Hell. 7, 1,17; mem. 3, 8, 9; Hdian. 6, 5, 2;
Diog. Laért. 1, 2, 48; Sept. Ezek. ix. 2; xl. 24; [xlvi.
1]; eis, viii. 3, ete. [for other exx. see Soph. Lex. s. v.]).
[Syn. see s. V. épada. COMP.: dva-, amo-, dia-, epu-, emt,
mept-, mpo-BA€Tra. |
BAnrtéos, -a, -ov, (BddAdAw), which must be thrown or put,
(see Bd\Xo, 2); found only in neut.: Mk. ii. 22 (WH
Tom. Trbr.); Lk. v. 88 BAnréov éori foll. by ace. rév
oivov, cf. Matth. § 447, 3a.; [B. 190 (165)]. (Besides
only in Basil i. p. 137 ce. ed. Benedict.) *
Boavepyés ({[RG, so Suid. (ed. Gaisf. 751 a.); but] LT
Tr WH Boammpyés), Boanerges, Hebr. 1) *13 1. e. sons of
thunder (as Mark himself explains it), [the name given
by our Lord to James and John the sons of Zebedee]:
Mk. iii. 17; 3 pronounced Boa as Noabhyim for Nebhy-
im}; see Lghtft. Horae Hebr. ad loc.; w39, in Ps. lv. 15
a tumultuous crowd, seems in Syriac to have signified
thunder; so that the name Boavnpyes seems to denote
fiery and destructive zeal that may be likened to a thun-
der-storm, and to make reference to the occurrence nar-
rated in Lk. ix.54. [Cf. Dr. Jas. Morison’s Com. on Mk.
Le.; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.]*
Bodw, -@; fimpf. ¢Bdwy Acts xxi. 34 Rec.]; 1 aor.
€Bénoa; (Bon); fr. Hom. down; in Sept. mostly for
NIP, PLL PLY, to ery aloud, shout, (Lat. boo) ; 1. to
raise a cry: of joy, Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); of pain,
Boés
Mt. xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH; Actsviii.7. 2. to cry
i. e. speak with a high, strong voice: Mt. iii. 3, Mk.i. 3, Lk.
iii. 4, Jn. i. 23, (all fr. Is. xl. 3); Mk. xv. 34; Lk. ix. 38
(RG dvaB.); [xviii 38]; Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 34 Ree. ;
xxv. 24 (RG ém.). 3. mpds twa to cry to one for
help, implore his aid: Lk. xviii. 7 [T Tr WH air@; cf.
W. 212 (199)], (1 S. vii. 8; 1 Chr. v. 20; Hos. vii. 14,
ete. for 5s px): [Comp. : ava-, ém-Bodo. | *
[Syyn. Bodo, karéw, kpdlw, kpavyd Cw: It is not un-
instructive to notice that in classic usage KaAeiy denotes
‘to cry out’ for a purpose, to call; Body to cry out as a mani-
festation of feeling; xpd(ew to cry out harshly, often of
an inarticulate and brutish sound; thus caAciy suggests in-
telligence; Body sensibilities; xpd¢ew instincts;
hence, Body esp.a cry for help. xpavyd(ew, intensive of
xpd¢w, denotes to cry coarsely, in contempt,etc. Cf. Schmidt
ch. 3.]
Boés, 6, Mt. i. 5 T WH, for Rec. Bodg, q. v.
Bor, -7s, 7, a cry: Jas. v. 4 (of those imploring ven-
geance). From Hom. down.*
BorPea, -as, 7, (see Bonbéw), help: Heb. iv. 16, (often
in Sept., chiefly for Typ and Wy; in Grk. writ. fr.
Thue. and Xen. down); plur. helps : Acts xxvii. 17
[see Hackett ad loc.; B.D. s. v. Ship 4; Smith, Voyage
and Shipwr. of St. Paul, pp. 106 sq. 204 sq.; cf. tmogeav-
vu |.*
Bon-9éw, -3; 1 aor. ¢BonOnca; (fr. Bon a cry and 6
to run); in Sept. chiefly for 71%; in Grk. writ. fr.
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; prop. to run to the cry (of
those in danger) ; hence univ. to help, succor, bring aid:
ri, Mt. xv. 25; Mk. ix. 22, 24 (BonOer pov tH amoria,
“quod fiduciae meae deest bonitate tua supple,” Gro-
tius); Acts xvi. 9; xxi. 28; 2 Co. vi. 2; Heb. ii. 18;
Rev. xii. 16.*
Bonds, -dv, helping, (vies, Hdt. 5, 97; ornprypa, Tob.
viii. 6); mostly as subst. [so fr. Hdt. down] a helper:
Heb. xiii. 6 (of God, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 7, as often
in Sept.).*
Bé0vvos, -ov, 6, a pit, a ditch: Mt. xii. 11; xv.14; Lk.
vi. 39. (Solon in Bekker’s Anecd. i. 85; Xen. oec. 19,
3; Theophr. hist. pl. 4, 2, 2 [(var.); al.]; Sept. 2S.
Xviii. 17, etc.) *
Bodh, -7s, 7, (BdAAw), a throw: w@oet AiBov BoArny about
a stone’s throw, as far as a stone can be cast by the hand,
Lk. xxii. 41, (@aei roEov Bodnv, Gen. xxi. 16; péype AiBov
x. axovtiov BoAjs, Thuc. 5, 65; e& dxovtiov BoAns, Xen.
Hell. 4, 5, 15).*
BoArlt{w: 1 aor. €BoAvca; (BoAls a missile, dart; a line
and plummet with which mariners sound the depth of
the sea, a sounding-lead) ; to heave the lead, take sound-
ings: Acts xxvii. 28. (Besides only in Eustath.; [Mid.
intrans. to sink in water, Geopon. 6, 17].) *
BoXls, -id0s, 7, (BaAXw), a missile, dart, javelin: Heb.
xii. 20 Rec. fr. Ex. xix. 18. (Neh. iv. 17; Num. xxiv.
8; [Sap. v. 22; Hab. iii. 11]; Plut. Demetr. 3.) *
Boéf, 6, (13/5 fleetness [but see B.D. Am. ed.]), Booz,
[more commonly] Boaz, a kinsman of Ruth, afterwards
her (second) husband, (Ruth ii. 1 sqq.; 1 Chr. ii. 11):
104
Bovan
Mt. i. 5 [Boos L Tr, Bogs TWH]; Lk. iii. 32 [L T Tr
WH Bods ].*
BopBopos, -ov, 6, dung, mire: 2 Pet. ii. 22. (Sept.;
Aeschyl., Arstph., Plat., sqq.; év BopBopw kudierOa, of
the vicious, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 29.) *
Boppas, -a [W. § 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, (equiv. to
Bopéas, -éov), often [in Attic writ.], in Sept. for }i5¥;
1. Boreas; the north-north-east wind. 2. the north:
Lk. xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13, [cef. W. 121 (115) s. v. pe
onp pia].
Bockw; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to feed: Mk.
v.14; Lk. xv. 153; dpvia, mpoBara, Jn. xxi. 15, 17, (in a
fic. disc. portraying the duty of a Christian teacher to
promote in every way the spiritual welfare of the mem-
bers of the church); 6 Booxov a herdsman: Mt. viii. 33;
Lk. viii. 34. In Pass. and Mid. [pres. ptep. Booxopevos,
cf. W. § 38, 2 note] of flocks or herds, to feed, graze:
Mt. viii. 30; Mk. v. 11; Lk. viii. 32. (In Sept. for
lel hg
[Syn. Béookety, roimalyvery: m. is the wider, B. the nar-
rower term; the former includes oversight, the latter de-
notes nourishment; 7. may be rendered tend, B. specifically
feed. See Trench § xxv.; Mey. on Jn. u. s.; Schmidt ch. 200.]
Bocép, 6, (Viva a torch, a lamp; Sept. Beop, Num.
xxii. 5; xxxi. 8; Deut. xxiii. 4; by change of J} into a,
Boodp), Bosor, the father of Balaam: 2 Pet. ii. 15 [WH
txt. Bewp |.*
Boravn, -ns, 7, (Boom), an herb fit for fodder, green
herb, growing plant: Heb. vi. 7. (Hom., Pind., Plat.,
Eur., Diod., Ael., al. Sept. for sw, VN, Avy. [Met-
aph. of men, Ignat. ad Eph. 10, 3; ad Trall. 6,1; ad
Philad. 3, 13)"
Bérpus, -vos, 6, a bunch or cluster of grapes: Rev. xiv.
18 [ef. B. 14 (13)]. (Gen. xl. 10; Num. xiii. 24 sq.
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Bovdeutis, -0d, 6, a councillor, senator, (buleuta, Plin.
epp.): first in Hom. Il. 6, 114; of a member of the
Sanhedrin, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 50. (Job iii. 14;
eV 3) jog
Bovdrcto : 1. to deliberate, take counsel, resolve, give
counsel, (Is. xxiii. 8; [fr. Hom. down]). 2. to be a
councillor or senator, discharge the office of a senator:
Xen. mem. 1, 1,18; Plat. Gorg. p.473 e.; [al.]. In the
N. T. Mid., [pres. BovAevouar; impf. ¢Bovdevopny; fut.
Bovretdoopa, Lk. xiv. 31 Lmrg. TWH; 1 aor. eBovdAevoa-
pyv]; 1. to deliberate with one’s self, consider: foll.
by ei, Lk. xiv. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 8). 2. to take
counsel, resolve: foll. by inf., Acts v. 33 [RGTTr
mrg.]; xv. 87 [Rec.]; xxvii. 39; ri, 2 Co. i. 17; foll.
by wa, Jn. xi. 53 LT Trtxt. WH; xii. 10 [cf. W. § 38,
3]. [Comp.: mapa- (-par), cvp-Bovrevo. | *
Bovdh, -7s, 9, (BovAopac), fr. Hom. down; often in
Sept. for M¥y ; counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where
distinguished fr. 9 mpd&s); Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see
riOnut, 1 a.),42; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5; 7 Bovdy rod Geod, Acts
xiii. 36; esp. of the purpose of God respecting the sal-
vation of men through Christ: Lk. vii. 30; Acts ii. 23;
iv. 28; [Heb. vi. 17]; macay tiv Bovdrjy rod Geod all the
BovAnpa
contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; 7 BovA1 rod
Oednparos avrov the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.*
BotAnpa, -ros, 76, (BovAopar), will, counsel, purpose :
Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. ix. 19; 1 Pet. iv. 3 (Rec. OeAnua).
(2 Mace. xv. 5; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.) [Syn.
cf. éo, fin. ] *
PovAopat, 2 pers. sing. BovrAer Lk. xxii. 42 (Attic for
BovAn, cf. W. § 13, 2.a.; B. 42 (37)); impf. eBovdduny
(Attic [(cf. Veitch), yet commonly] jBovdcuny) ; 1 aor.
eBovdnOnv (Mt. i. 19) and 7BovdnOny (2 Jn. 12 RG; but
al. éBovA7n6. cf. [ WH. App. p. 162]; W.§ 12,1¢.; B.33
(29)) ; Sept. for Fax, yan; [fr. Hom. down]; to will,
wish ; and 1. commonly, to will deliberately, have a
purpose, be minded : foll. by an inf., Mk. xv. 15; Acts v.
28, 33 (L WH Tr txt. for RG T eBovdevovro) ; xii. 4; xv.
37 (LT Tr WH for R eBovdevoaro) ; xviii. 27 ; xix. 30;
xi. 30; xxiii. 28; xxvii. 43; xxvill. 18; 2 Co.i. 15;
Heb. vi. 17; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 10 (rods Bovdopevous se.
emidexerOat Tors adeAdovs); Jude 5; Jas. i. 18 (Bovdndeis
dmexunoev nuas of his own free will he brought us forth,
with which will it ill accords to say, as some do, that they
are tempted to sin by God). with an acc. of the obj.
rovro, 2 Co. i.17(L T Tr WH for R Bovdevopevos) ; foll.
by an ace. with inf. 2 Pet. iii. 9. of the will electing or
choosing between two or more things, answering to
the Lat. placet mihi: Mt. i. 19 (cf. évOupetoOar, 20) ; xi.
27 [not L mrg.]; Lk. x. 22; xxii.42; Acts xxv. 20; [1
Co. xii. 11]; Jas. iii.4; iv. 4; foll. by the subj. BovAeo Oe,
ipiv anodvow; is it your will I should release unto you?
(cf. W. § 41a. 4b.; B. § 139, 2), Jn. xviii. 39. of the
will prescribing, foll. by an acc. with inf.: Phil. i.
12 (ywaokew bpas Bovrdouac I would have you know,
know ye); 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 14; Tit. iii. 8. 2. of will-
ing as an affection, to desire: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. vi.
9 (of BovAdpevor mAovreiv); Acts xvii. 20; xviii. 15;
€BovAopuny (on this use of the impf. seé B. 217 (187) sq. ;
[ef. W. 283 (266); Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]), Acts
xxv. 22; Philem. 13. On the difference between BovAouas
and @édo, see OéXa, fin.*
Bovvés, -ov, 6, a Cyrenaic word acc. to Hdt. 4, 199,
which Eustath. [831, 33] on Il. 11, 710 says was used by
Philemon [Noé. 1], a comic poet (of the 3d cent. B. c.).
It was rejected by the Atticists, but from Polyb. on [who
(5, 22, 1 sq.) uses it interchangeably with A\dgos] it was
occasionally received by the later Grk. writ. (Strabo,
Pausan., Plut., al.) ; in Sept. very often for 733; (perh.
fr. BAQ to ascend [cf. Hesych. Bovvol: Bwpoi, and Bopides
in Hdt. 2, 125 (Schmidt ch. 99, 11)]); @ hill, eminence,
mound: Lk. iii. 5 (Is. xl. 4); xxiii. 30 (Hos. x. 8). Cf.
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 153 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 355 sq.; [Donaldson, New Crat. § 469 ].*
Bots, Bods, ace. sing. Body, [acc. plur. Béas, B. 14 (13)],
6, 7, an ox,a cow: Lk. xiii. 15; xiv. 5,19; Jn. ii. 14 sq.;
1 Co. ix. 9; 1 Tim. v.18. [From Hom. down.]*
Bpafetov, -ov, 7d, (BpaBevs the arbiter and director of a
contest, who awards the prize; called also BpaBeuris,
Lat. designator), the award to the victor in the games, a
prize, (in eccl. Lat. brabeum, brabium), (Vulg. bravium) :
105
Bpéxo
1 Co. ix. 24; metaph. of the heavenly reward for Chris-
tian character, Phil. iii. 14. (Oppian, cyn. 4, 197;
Lycophr. 1154; timopuovas Bp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 5
[where see Lghtft., Gebh. and Harn.]; ap@apaias, Mart.
Polyce. 17.) *
BpaBevw ; in Grk. writ. fr. Isoc.and Dem. down; 1.
to be a BpaBevs or umpire (see BpaBeiov). 2. to decide,
determine. 3. to direct, control, rule: Col.iii. 15 [where
see Meyer ; contra, Bp. Lghtft. Comp.: xara-BpaBetw.]*
Bpadive; (Bpadvs); to delay, be slow; 1. rarely
trans. to render slow, retard: tiv owrnpiar, Sept. Is. xlvi.
13; pass. 606s, Soph. El. 1501 [ef. O. C. 1628]. Mostly
2. intrans. to be long, to tarry, loiter, (so fr. Aeschyl.
down): 1 Tim. iii. 15; unusually, with gen. of the thing
which one delays to effect, 2 Pet. iii. 9 ris emayyedias
[A. V. is not slack concerning his promise |i. e. to fulfil his
promise; cf. W. § 30,6 b. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22.)*
Bpadumdo€w, -@ ; (8padvs and mois) ; to sail slowly: pres.
ptep. in Acts xxvii. 7. (Artem. oneir. 4, 30.) *
Bpabdus -cia, -v, slow; a. prop.: els Tr, Jas. i. 19. bz
metaph. dull, inactive, in mind ; stupid, slow to apprehend
or believe, (so Hom. Il. 10, 226; opp. to cuverds, Polyb.
4, 8, 7; rov vovv, Dion. Hal. de Att. oratt.7 [de Lys.
judic.]; dvopa6ia Bpadutis ev padnoe, Plat. defin. p.
415 e.): with a dat. of respect, 77 xapdia, Lk. xxiv. 25.
[SY¥N. see dpyés, fin.] *
Bpadurjs (on accent cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 417 sq. ;
[Chandler §§ 634, 635; W. 52 sq. (52)]), -jros, 9, (Bpa-
dvs), slowness, delay: 2 Pet. ili. 9. (From Hom. down.) *
Bpaxtwv, -ovos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], the arm: the Bpa-
xtov of God is spoken of Hebraistically for the might, the
power of God, Lk. i. 51 (cf. Deut. iv. 34; v.15; xxvi.'8) ;
dm, xi. S8y (leslie!) ; Acts xii. 67"
Bpax vs, -eia, -v, short, small, little, (fr. Pind., Hdt., Thue.
down); a. of place; neut. Bpaxv adverbially, a short
distance, a little: Acts xxvii. 28 (2S. xvi. 1; Thue. 1, 63).
b. of time; Bpayv ti a short time, for a little while: Heb.
ii. 7, 9, (where the writer transfers to time what the
Sept. in Ps. viii. 6 says of rank); Acts v. 34 [here
LT Tr WH om. 11]; pera Bpaxv shortly after, Lk. xxii. 58.
c. of quantity and measure; Bpaxd m [Tr txt. WH
om. L Tr mrg. br. ri] some little part, a little: Jn. vi. 7
(Bpaxv tt Tov pedcros, 1S. xiv. 29; €Aacoy Bpayv, Joseph.
antt. 9, 4, 2; Bpaxtratos AiBavwrds, Philo de vict. off.
§ 4); dca Bpaxéwy in few sc. words, briefly, Heb. xiii. 22
(so [Plat., Dem., al. (cf. Bleek on Heb. 1. c.)] Joseph.
b. j. 4, 5, 43 é€v Bpaxyutdr@ dydodv to show very briefly,
Xen. Cyr. 1, 2; 15).* -
Bpédos, -ovs, 7d; | a. an unborn child, embryo, fatus:
Lk. i. 41, 44; (Hom. Il. 23, 266; Plut. rep. Stoic. 41°
To Bp. ev tH yaotpi). b. a new-born child, an infant, a
babe, (so fr. Pind. down) : Lk. ii. 12, 16; xviii. 15; Acts
vii. 19; 1 Pet. ii. 2; amd Bpéedous from infancy, 2 Tim.
iii. 15 (so éx Bpépous, Anth. Pal. 9, 567).*
Bpéxw; 1 aor. €8peEa; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; i.
to moisten, wet, water: Lk. vii. 38 (7. modas Saxpuor, cf.
Ps. vi. 7), 44. 2. in later writ. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p: 291 [W. 23]) to water with rain (Polyb. 1€, 12, 3), to
Bpovtn
cause to rain, to pour the rain, spoken of God: émi ria,
Mt. v. 45; to send down like rain: xvpuos €Bpe&e Oeiov x.
mip, Gen. xix. 24; yadafav, Ex. ix. 23; [ydvva, Ps. lxxvii.
(Ixxviii.) 24]; impers. Bpéxer tt rains (cf. W. § 58, 9 b.
B.): Jas. v. 17; with added ace., mip x. Oetov, Lk. xvii.
29; with added subject, terds, Rev. xi. 6.*
Bpovrh, -is, 7, thunder: Mk. iii. 17 (on which see
Boavepyés) ; Jn. xii. 29; Rev. iv. 5; vi. 1; vill. 5; x. 3.sq.;
xi. 19; xiv. 2; xvi. 18; xix.6. [From Hom. down. ]*
Bpox 4, -As, 7, (Bpéxa, q- v-), a later Grk. word (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 291), a besprinkling, watering, rain: used
of a heavy shower or violent rainstorm, Mt. vii. 25, 27;
Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 10; civ. (cv.) 32, for 0Y3.*
Bpdxos, -ov, 6, a noose, slip-knot, by which any person
or thing is caught, or fastened, or suspended, (fr. Hom.
down) : Bpdxov em Barre rivi to throw a noose upon one,
a fig. expression borrowed from war [or the chase] (so
Bp. meptBadrdew tui, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 34; Joseph.
b. j- 7, 7,4), i.e. by craft or by force to bind one to some
necessity, to constrain him to obey some command, 1 Co.
vii. 35.*
Bpvypés, -00, 6, (Bpdxa, q. v-), a gnashing of teeth: with
trav dddvtwv added, a phrase denoting the extreme an-
guish and utter despair of men consigned to eternal
condemnation, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 42, 50; xxii. 13; xxiv.
51; xxv. 30; Lk. xiii. 28. (In Sir. li. 3 Bpuvypés is at-
tributed to beasts, which gnash the teeth as they attack
their prey; in Prov. xix. 12 Sept. for O73 snarling,
growling; in the sense of biting, Nic. th. 716, to be de-
rived fr. Bpvxw to bite; cf. Fritzsche on Sir. as above,
p- 308.)*
Bpix: [impf. @8pvxov]; to grind, gnash, with the
teeth: éSdvtas emi twa, Acts vii. 54, (Job xvi. 9; Ps.
xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12 for D1W3 PIN
and 0: PIN; intrans. without odévras, [ Hermipp. ap. ]
Plut. Pericl. 33 fin.; [Hipp. (see L. and S.)]). Of the
same origin as Bpixw (cf. deyo and dew), to bite, chew ;
see Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 735; [Ellendt, Lex.
Soph. s. v. Bpvxa |.*
Bpve ; 1. intrans. to abound, gush forth, teem with
juices, (Lakin to BAva, Prva ; see Lob. Techn. p. 22 sq. ;
Curtius p. 531], cf. Germ. Brust, Briihe); often so fr.
Hom. down (Il. 17, 56 epvos dvOci Bpvec). 2. more
rarely trans. to send forth abundantly: absol. to teem, 7
y7 Bpve, Xen. venat. 5, 12; with an acc. of flowers,
fruits, Xdperes pda Bpvovar, Anacr. 44, 2 (37, 2); to send
forth water, Jas. iii. 11.*
Bpdpa, -ros, 7d, (Bpdw i. q. BiBpacxw), that which is
eaten, food ; (fr. Thue. and Xen. down): 1 Co. viii. 8,
13; x. 3; Ro. xiv. 15, 20; plur.: Mt. xiv. 15; Mk. vii. 19;
Bk iis V1 six. 13:50 Co.wat 16 Mims ive 3 5 Meb: xiii:
9; Bpdpara x. ropata meats and drinks, Heb. ix. 10 (as
in Plat. legg. 11 p. 932e.; 6 p. 782 a.; Critias p. 115 b.;
in sing. Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 17). of the soul’s aliment, i. e.
either instruction, 1 Co. iii. 2 (as solid food opp. to ré
106
Bopos
yd\a), or that which delights and truly satisfies the mind,
Jn. iv. 34.*
Bpadcipos, -ov, (Specs), eatable: Lk. xxiv. 41. (Lev.
xix. 23; Ezek. xlvii.12. Aeschyl. Prom. 479; [Antiatt.
in Bekker, Anecd. p. 84, 25].) *
Bpaors, -ews, 7, (Bpdw, BiBpacka) ; 1. the act of eat-
ing, (Tertull. esus): Bpaots x. méous, Ro. xiv. 17 (on
which see Bactdeia, 3); with gen. of the obj. 1 Co. viii.
4 (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 619 c. maidwv airod); in a wider
sense, corrosion: Mt. vi. 19 sq. 2. as almost every-
where in Grk. writ. that which is eaten, food, aliment:
Heb. xii. 16; e’s Bpaow for food, 2 Co. ix. 10 (Sap. iv.
5); Bpaots cai{so WH txt. Trmrg.; al. 4] wdéacs, Col. ii.
16, (Hom. Od. 1, 191; Plat. legg. 6, 783 ¢.; Xen. mem.
1, 3,15; [ef. Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 200 note; per
contra Mey. or Ellic. on Col. |. ¢.]). used of the soul’s
aliment — either that which refreshes it, Jn. iv. 32, or
nourishes and supports it unto life eternal, Jn. vi. 27, 55.*
Bpockw, unused pres. whence pf. BéBpwxa; see Bi-
Bpocke.
Bv0ife; [pres. pass. BuOifouar]; (BuOds, q. v.); to
plunge into the deep, to sink: é0te Buvbi¢ecbat avra, of
ships (as Polyb. 2, 10,5; 16, 3,2; [Aristot., Diod., al.]),
so that they began to sink, Lk. v. 7; metaph. ruva eis dhe
Opov [A. V. drown], 1 Tim. vi. 9.*
Bu8ds, -ov, 6, the bottom (of a ditch or trench, Xen. oec.
19,11); the bottom or depth of the sea, often in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. Prom. 432 down; the sea itself, the deep sea:
2 Co. xi. 25, as in Ps. evi. (evii.) 24; so Lat. profundum
in Lucan, Phars. 2, 680 “ profundi ora videns.” *
Buporeds, -€ws, 6, (B¥poa a skin stripped off, a hide), a
tanner: Acts ix. 43; x. 6,32. (Artem. oneir. 4, 56.)
[Cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Tanner. ]*
Bicowos, -7, -ov, (7 Bvocos, q. v.; cf. dxavOwos, apua-
pavtwos), made of fine linen; neut. Biacwor sc. ipariov
(W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]), (a) fine linen (garment) :
Rev. xviii. 12 (Rec. Buooov), 16; xix. 8,14 [WH mrg.
AevkoBiaawov (for Bicawwov evkdv)]. (Gen. xli. 42;
1 Chr. xv. 27. <Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Diod. 1, 85; Plut.,
aly)
Bicwos, -ov, 7, [ Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.], byssus, a
species of Egyptian flax (found also in India and Achaia)
—or linen made from it—very costly, delicate, soft,
white, and also of a yellow color, (see respecting it
Pollux, onomast. ]. 7 ¢. 17 § 75): Lk. xvi. 19; Rev. xviii.
12 Rec. (In Sept. generally for ww, also 33, cf. 1 Chr.
xv. 27; 2 Chr. v. 12; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Baumwolle;
[BB.DD. s. vv. Byssus and Linen]. Joseph. antt. 3, 6,
1 sq.; 3, 7, 2; Philostr. vit. Apoll: 2, 20 [p. 71 ed.
Olear.]; on the flax of Achaia growing about Ellis, cf.
Pausantsds) 5.) 2ieiaee Laie)
Bwpds, -ovd, 6, (see Bouvvds), an elevated place; very
freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a raised place on
which to offer sacrifice, an altar: Acts xvii. 23. (Often
in Sept. for M37.) *
107
TaBBaba
TaBBaea [-64 WH], 7, indecl., Gabbatha, Chald. xn3,
(Hebr. 33 the back); hence a raised place, an elevation,
(cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste Tholucks
u.s.w. p. 102 sq.; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. luth. Theol.
for 1876, p.605 ; [ Wiinsche, Neue Beitrige u.s.w. p. 560];
but see the somewhat diff. opinion of Keim, Jesu von
Nazara, iii. 365): Jn. xix. 13, where is added the
rather loose interpretation Av@darpearor, i. e. a stone pave-
ment, which some interpreters think was a portable
pavement, or the square blocks such as the Roman gen-
erals carried with then, to be laid down not only under
their seats in general, but also under those they occupied
in administering justice (cf. Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 and
Casaubon ad loc.). This opinion is opposed by the cir-
cumstance that John is not accustomed to add a Greek
interpretation except to the Hebr. names of fixed Jewish
localities, cf. v. 2; ix. 7; xix. 17; and that this is so in
the present case is evident from the fact that he has
said eis rézov, i. e. in a definite locality which had that
name. Besides, it cannot be proved that that custom of
the military commanders was followed also by the gov-
ernors of provinces residing in cities. Doubtless the
Chaldaic name was given to the spot from its shape,
the Greek name from the nature of its pavement.
Cf. below under AOdotpwrov; Win. RWB. s. v. Litho-
stroton; [BB.DD.s. v. Gabbatha; Tholuck, Beitriige
zur Spracherklirung u.s.w. p. 119 sqq.].*
TaBpimA, 6, (78°23, fr. 92) strong man, hero, and 5x
God), indecl., Gabriel, one of the angel-princes or chiefs
of the angels (Dan. viii. 16; ix. 21): Lk. i. 19, 26; see
apxayyedos [and reff. s. v. dyyedos, fin.; BB.DD. s. v.].*
yayypawva, -7s, 7, (ypdw or ypaivw to gnaw, eat), a gan-
grene, a disease by which any part of the body suffering
from inflammation becomes so corrupted that, unless
a remedy be seasonably applied, the evil continually
spreads, attacks other parts, and at last eats away the
bones: 2 Tim. ii. 17 [where cf. Ellic.]. (Medical writ.
[ef. Wetst. ad I. e.]; Plut. discr. am. et adulat. c. 36.) *
T48, 6, (4) fortune, cf. Gen. xxx. 11; [xlix. 19; on the
meaning of the word see B.D. s. v.]), indecl., Gad, the
seventh son of the patriarch Jacob, by Zilpah, Leah’s
maid: Rev. vii. 5.*
Tabapnvés, -7, -dv, (fr. the prop. name Tadapa; cf. the
adj. "ABAnvn, Maydadnvn), of Gadara, a Gadarene. Gad-
ara was the capital of Perea (Joseph. b. j. 4, 7, 3),
situated opposite the southern extremity of the Lake
of Gennesaret to the south-east, but at some distance
from the lake on the banks of the river Hieromax (Plin.
h. n. 5, 16), 60 stadia from the city Tiberias (Joseph.
vita 65), inhabited chiefly by Gentiles (Joseph. antt. 17,
yalopuNdxiov
11,4); cf. Win. RWB.s.v. Gadara; Riietschi in Herzog
iv. p. 636 sq.; AKneucker in Schenkel ii. 313 sq.; Riehm,
HWB. p. 454; [BB.DD. s. v.]. X@pa tev Tadapnvav
the country of the Gadarenes, Gudaris: Mk. v. 1 Ree.;
Lk. viii. 26 Ree., 37 RG [but here 4 Tepixwpos tav T.],
and in Mt. viii. 28 TTrWH; but the Mss. differ in
these pass.; see Tepacnvoi and Tepyeonvot.*
yata, -ys, 7, a Persian word, adopted by the Greeks
and Latins (Cie. off. 2, 22), the royal treasury, treasure,
riches, (Curt. 3, 13, 5 pecuniam regiam, quam gazam
Persae vocant): Acts viii. 27. ([Theophr.], Polyb.,
Diod. 17, 35 and 64; Plut., al. Sept. 2 Esdr. v. 17;
vil. 20.) *
Tata, -ns [B. 17 (15)], 9, (Ip i.e. strong, fortified,
(cf. Valentia); the ) being represented by y, ef. 77%3°
Topoppa), formerly a celebrated city of the Philistines,
situated on a hill near the southern border of the land
of Israel, between Raphia and Ascalon, twenty stadia
[‘at the most,’ Arrian.exp. Alex. 2, 26; “seven,” Strabo
16, 30] from the sea and eleven geographical miles from
Jerusalem. It was fortified and surrounded by a mas-
sive wall. Although held by a Persian garrison, Alex-
ander the Great captured it after a siege of two months,
but did not destroy it ({Joseph. antt. 11, 8,4]; Diod.
17,48; Plut. Alex. 25; Curt. 4,6 sq.). Afterwards, in
the year B. c. 96, Alexander Jannzus, king of the Jews,
took it after a year’s siege and destroyed it (Joseph.
antt. 13, 13, 3). Gabinius rebuilt it B. c. 58 (Joseph.
l.c. 14, 5,3). Finally the emperor Augustus gave it
[B. c. 30] to Herod the Great (Joseph. 1. c. 15, 7, 3),
after whose death it was annexed to Syria (Joseph. I. c.
17,11, 4). Modern Ghuzzeh [or Ghazzeh], an unforti-
fied town, having an area of two English miles, with
between fifteen and sixteen thousand inhabitants. Men-
tioned in the N. T. in Acts viii. 26, where the words
avrn early épnuos refer to 7 6dds; Philip is bidden to take
the way which is épnyos, solitary; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W.
§ 18, 9 N. 3; B. 104 (91)]. A full history of the city
is given by Stark, Gaza u. d. philistiiische Kiste. Jena,
1852; a briefer account by Win. RWB. [see also BB.
DD.] s. v. Gaza; Arnold in Herzog iv. p. 671 sqq.*
yalo-puddxtov, -ov, To, (fr. yata, q. v-, and @vAakn ; hence
i. q. OnoavpodvAakiov, Hesych.), a repository of treasure,
esp. of public treasure, a treasury: Esth. iii. 9; 1 Esdr.
viii. 18, 44; 1 Mace. iii. 28. In Sept. used for now?
and 13v)) of apartments constructed in the courts of the
temple, in which not only the sacred offerings and things
needful for the temple service were kept, but in which
also the priests, etc., dwelt: Neh. xiii. 7; x. 37 sqq.; of
the sacred treasury, in which not only treasure but also
Taios
the public records (1 Mace. xiv. 49; cf. Grimm ad loc.)
were stored, and the property of widows and orphans was
deposited (2 Mace. iii. 10; cf. Grimm ad loc.) : 1 Mace.
xiv. 49; 2 Mace. iii. 6, 28, 40; iv. 42; v.18. Josephus
speaks of both yafopvAdkca (plur.) in the women’s court
of Herod’s temple, b. j. 5, 5, 2; 6, 5, 2; and 716 yagod.,
antt. 19, 6,1. Inthe N. T., in Mk. xii. 41,43; Lk. xxi.
1; Jn. viii. 20 (é€v To yafop. at, near, the treasury [yet
ef. W. § 48, a. 1 c.]), rd yag. seems to be used of that re-
ceptacle mentioned by the Rabbins to which were fitted
thirteen chests or boxes, N)7DiW i. e. trumpets, so called
from their shape, and into which were put the contribu-
tions made voluntarily or paid yearly by the Jews for
the service of the temple and the support of the poor;
ef. Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. et Talm. p. 536 sq.; Liicke
[Tholuck, or Godet] on Jn. viii. 20; [B.D. Am. ed.s. v.
Treasury]. (Strabo 2 p. 319 [i. e. 7, 6, 1]-)*
Téios [ WH Taios (cf. I, ¢)], -ov, 6, Gaius or Caius; the
name of a Christian 1. of Derbe: Actsxx.4. 2. of
Macedonia: Acts xix. 29. 3. of Corinth, Paul’s host
during his [second] sojourn there: Ro. xvi. 23; 1 Co. i.
14. 4. of an unknown Christian, to whom the third
Ep. of John was addressed: 3 Jn. vs.1. [B.D. Am. ed.
s.v. Gaius; Farrar, Early Days of Christianity, ii. 506. ] *
yaAa, -Aakros [cf. Lat. Jac; Curtius § 123], ro, [from
Hom. down], milk: 1 Co. ix. 7. Metaph. of the less
difficult truths of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 2; Heb.
v. 12 sq. (Quintil. 2, 4, 5 “doctoribus hoc esse curae
velim, ut teneras adhue mentes more nutricum mollius
alant et satiari velut quodam jucundioris disciplinae
lacte patiantur,” [ef. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p. 329,
ef. p. 261]); of the word of God, by which souls newly
regenerate are healthfully nourished unto growth in the
Christian life, 1 Pet. ii. 2.*
Tadarns, -ov, 6, a Galatian, (see Tadaria): Gal. iii. 1.
(1 Mace. viii. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 20.) *
Todaria, -as, 7, Galatia, Gallogrecia, a region of Asia
Minor, bounded by Paphlagonia, Pontus, Cappadocia,
Lycaonia, Phrygia, and Bithynia. It took its name from
those Gallic tribes that crossed into Asia Minor B. c. 278,
and after roaming about there for a time at length set-
tled down permanently in the above-mentioned region,
and intermarried with the Greeks. From B.c. 189 on,
though subject to the Romans, they were governed by
their own chiefs; but B. c. 24 [al. 25] their country was
formally reduced to a Roman province, (cf. Liv. 37, 8;
38, 16 and 18; Joseph. antt. 16,6; Strabo 12, 5,1 p. 567;
Blor. 2, 11,3. eo.) 1,/27))ietGalsis25. Co. xvie 1 32; Vim:
iv. 10[T Tr mrg. PadAiav]; 1 Pet.i.1. Cf. Grimm, Ueb.
d. (keltische) Nationalitit der kleinasiat. Galater, in
the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 199 sqq.; replied to by K.
Wieseler, Die deutsche Nationalitat d. kleinas. Galater.
Giitersl. 1877; [but see Hertzberg in the Stud. u. Krit.
for 1878, pp. 525-541; Bp. Lehtft. in his Com. on Gal.,
Dissertation i. also Intr. § 1].*
Tadarikés, -7, -dv, Galatian, belonging to Galatia: Acts
ENVIRO EXVAlL y2o.e
yoAtvn, -ns, 7, (adj. 6, 9, yaAnvds calm, cheerful), calm-
108
yapew
ness, stillness of the sea, a calm: Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39;
Lk. viii. 24. (From Hom. down.) *
TadwAaia,-as, 7, Galilee, (fr. nyoan, 2 Kxv..29; San,
Josh. Xk. * Sous bi) VIS: 1 K. ix. 11,1. e. the circle
or circuit, by which name even before the exile a cer-
tain district of northern Palestine was designated ; Sept.
TadvAaia); the name of a region of northern Palestine,
bounded on the north by Syria, on the west by Sidon,
Tyre, Ptolemais and their territories and the promontory
of Carmel, on the south by Samaria and on the east by
the Jordan. It was dividedinto Upper Galilee (extend-
ing from the borders of Tyre and Sidon to the sources of
the Jordan), and Lower Galilee (which, lower and more
level, embraced the lands of the tribes of Issachar and
Zebulun and the part of Naphtali bordering on the Sea of
Galilee): 7 dv kal 7 Kat TadiAaia (Joseph. b. j. 3, 3, 1,
where its boundaries are given). It was a very fertile
region, populous, having 204 towns and villages (Joseph.
vit. 45), and inasmuch as it had, esp. in the upper part,
many Gentiles among its inhabitants (Judg. i. 30-33;
Strabo 16, 34 p. 760), it was called, Mt. iv. 15, TadaAaia
rav ever (Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1)), and, 1 Mace. v. 15, PadcAaia
addodpvAwy. Often mentioned in the Gospels, and three
times in the Acts, viz. ix. 31; x. 37; xiii. 31. [Cf. Mer-
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, Boston 1881. ]
Taduraios, -aia, -aiov, Galilean, a native of Galilee: Mt.
xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xiii. 1 sq.; xxii. 59; xxiii. 6;
Jn. iv. 45);) Acts. 1s) ais 75 v.13 7-*
TadAta, -as, 7, Gallia: 2 Tim. iv.10 T Tr mrg., by
which is to be understood Galatia in Asia Minor or TaA-
hia 7 eda, App. b. civ. 2,49. [See esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on Gal. pp. 3, 31 (Am. ed. pp. 11, 37).]*
TadAtwyv, -wvos, 6, Gallio, proconsul of Achaia, elder
brother of L. Annaeus Seneca the philosopher. His
original name was Marcus Annaeus Novatus, but after
his adoption into the family of Junius Gallio the rheto-
rician, he was called Gallio: Acts xviii. 12,14,17. [CE.
B.D. Am. ed.; Farrar, St. Paul, i. 566 sq.]*
Tapoduma, 6, Ore dna recompense of God [God the
avenger, Fiirst]; Num. i. 10; ii. 20), indecl., Gamaliel
(distinguished by the Jews from his grandson of the
same name by the title })17, the elder), a Pharisee and
doctor of the law, son of R. Simeon, grandson of Hillel,
and teacher of the apostle Paul. He is said to have had
very great influence in the Sanhedrin, and to have died
eighteen years before the destruction of Jerusalem. A
man of permanent renown among the Jews: Acts v. 34;
xxii. 3. Cf. Grdtz, Gesch. d. Juden, iii. p. 289 sqq.;
Schenkel, BL. ii. p. 328 sqq.; [esp. Alex.’s Kitto s. v.
Gamaliel I. (cf. Farrar, St. Paul, i. 44 and exe. v.)].*
yopéw, -@; impf. é¢ydpouv (Lk. xvii. 27); 1 aor. éynpa
(the classic form, [Mt. xxii. 25 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xiv.
20; 1 Co. vii. 28° RG, 28") and éyaunaa (the later form,
Mt. v. 32; [xxii. 25 RG]; MK. vi.17; x. 11; 1 Co. vii.
9, [28° L T Tr WH], 33); pf. yeyaunxa; 1 aor. pass.
eyaunOnv; (cf. W. 84 (80); B.55 (48); Bitm. Ausf. Spr.
ii. 134; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 742; [Veitch s.v.]); 1.
used of the man, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to lead
ryapilor
in marriage, take to wife; a. with the addition of yuvaixa
or other ace.: Mt. v. 32 [here WH br. the cl.]; xix. 9;
Mk. vi. 17; x.11; Lk. xiv. 20; xvi. 18. b. without a
case, absol. to get married, to marry, [ef. B. 145 (127)]:
Mt. xix. 10; xxii. 25, 30; xxiv. 38; Mk. xii. 25; Lk. xvii.
27; xx. 34 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 28, 33; (Ael. v. h. 4, 15 of yeya-
pyxdres, Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4; opp. to dyayor, Xen. symp.
9,7). Pass. and Mid. yauéopai tux, of women [ Lat. nu-
bere alicui, cf. B. § 133, 8], to give one’s self in marriage
[W. § 38, 3]: 1 aor. pass., Mk. x. 12 (where L T Tr WH
yapnon addov for RG yan} addr); 1 Co. vii. 39. 2.
contrary to Grk. usage, the Act. yayety is used of women,
to give one’s self in marriage; and a. with the ace.:
Mk. x. 12 L T Tr WH (see above); b. absol.: 1 Co.
vii. 28, 34 (4 yapnoaca, opp. to 7 dyapos) ; 1 Tim. v. 11,
14. 3. absol. of both sexes: 1 Tim. iv. 8; 1 Co. vii.
9 sq. 36 (yapeirwoar, sc. the virgin and he who seeks her
to wife). In the O. T. yapeiy occurs only in 2 Mace.
xiv. 25.*
yopuitw; [Pass., pres. yauifouar; impf. é¢yapeCdunr] ;
(yapos); to give a daughter in marriage: 1 Co. vii. 38°
[L T Tr WH, 38°] GL T Tr WH; Pass.: Mt. xxii. 30
LT Tr WH;; [xxiv. 38 TWH]; Mk. xii. 25; Lk. xvii.
27; xx. 35 [WH mrg. yapioxovra]. (The word is men-
tioned in Apoll. de constr. 3, 31 p. 280, 10 ed. Bekk.)
[Comp.: éx-yapuifa. | *
yaopiokw, i. q. yapite, q. v- Mt. xxiv. 38 Lehm.]; Pass.
[pres. yapioxopat]; Mk. xii. 25 RG; Lk. xx. 34 LT Tr
WH, [35 WH mrg.; cf. W. 92 (88); and Tdf.’s note
on Mt. xxii. 30]. (Aristot. pol. 7, 14,4 etc.) [Comp.:
ex-yapioke. | *
pos, -ov, 6, [prob. fr. r. gam to bind, unite; Curtius
p- 546 sq.], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; 1. a wed-
ding or marriage-festival: Jn. ii. 1 sq.; Rev. xix. 7 (un-
der the figure of a marriage here is represented the inti-
mate and everlasting union of Christ, at his return from
heaven, with his church) ; 16 detmvov tov yapov, ibid. 9 (a
symbol of the future blessings of the Messiah’s kingdom) ;
esp. a wedding-banquet, a marriage-feast: Mt. xxii. 8, 10
[here T WH Tr mrg. vupdor], 11, 12; plur. (referring
apparently to the several acts of feasting), Mt. xxii. 2
sqq.9; xxv. 10; Lk. xii. 36; xiv. 8, (cf. W. § 27, 3; B.
23 (21)). 2. marriage, matrimony: Heb. xiii. 4.*
yap, a conjunction, which acc. to its composition, ye
and dpa (i. q. dp), is properly a particle of affirma-
tion and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily
as the case stands, “ the thing is first affirmed by the par-
ticle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the
force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p.
232; cf. Kihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415)
sq.]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently
the reason and nature of something previously men-
tioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use
of this particle, either the reason and cause of a forego-
ing statement is added, whence arises the causal or
argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam,
enim; Germ. denn); or some previous declaration is ex-
plained, whence ydp takes on an explicative force:
109
yap
Jor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmlich).
Thus the force of the particle is either conclusive,
or demonstrative, or explicative and declara-
tory; cf. Rost in Passow’s Lex. i. p. 535 sqq.; Kiihner
ii. pp. 724 sqq. 852 sqq.; [ef. L. andS.s. v.]. The use
of the particle in the N. T. does not differ from that in
the classics.
I. Its primary and original Conclusive force is
seen in questions (in Grk. writ. also in exclamations) and
answers expressed with emotion; where, acc. to the con-
nexion, it may be freely represented by assuredly, verily,
Sorsooth, why, then, etc. : év yap Tove ete. ye profess not
to know whence he is; herein then is assuredly a mar-
vellous thing, why, herein etc. Jn. ix. 30; od ydp, adda
etc. by no means in this state of things, nay verily, but
etc. Acts xvi. 37; certainly, if that is the case, 1 Co. viii.
i1 LT Tr WH. It is joined to interrogative particles
and pronouns: yp ydp etc. Jn. vii. 41 (do ye then sup-
pose that the Christ comes out of Galilee? What, doth
the Christ, etc.?); pn yap... ovK, 1 Co. xi. 22 (what!
since ye are so eager to eat and drink, have ye not, ete.?) ;
tis yap, ti ydp: Mt. xxvii. 23 (ri yap Kaxov eroinaer, ye
demand that he be crucified like a malefactor, Why, what
evil hath he done ?); Mt. ix. 5 (your thoughts are evil;
which then do ye suppose to be the easier, etc. ?) ; Mt. xvi.
26; xxiii. 17,19; Lk. ix. 25; Acts xix. 355 ri ydp; for ri
yap €or, what then ? i.e. what, under these circumstances,
ought to be the conclusion? Phil. i. 18 [ef. Ellic. ad loc.]};
mas yap, Acts viii. 31; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 245 sqq.; Kihner
ii. p. 726; [Jelf ii. p. 608]; W. 447 (416). Here belongs
also the vexed passage Lk. xviii. 14 i) yap éxeivos (so G T
Tr mrg., but L WH Tr txt. wap’ exeivov) or do ye sup-
pose then that that man went down approved of God?
cf. W. 241 (226).
II. It adduces the Cause or gives the Reason of
a preceding statement or opinion ; 1. univ.: Mt. ii.
Bey waeg24j;) Miki 2 22) 9" ix: 6's) ak; 185 cei. 4 ne
25.3, Acts ii. 255 Rosi. 9,11; 1 Co. xi. 5; Heb. i} 8; 1 dn:
ii. 19; Rev. i. 3, and very often. In Jn. iv. 44 yap
assigns the reason why now at length Jesus betook him-
self into Galilee; for the authority denied to a prophet
in his own country (Galilee), he had previously to seek
and obtain among strangers; cf. 45; Meyer [yet see ed.
6 (Weiss)] ad loc.; Strauss, Leben Jesu, i. 725 ed. 3;
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 385 sq. ed. 1 [Am. trans. pp.
100, 168]; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl. Wissensch. x. p. 108
sqq- 2. Often the sentences are connected in such a
way that either some particular statement is established
by a general proposition (‘the particular by the uni-
versal’), as in Mt. vii. 8; xiii. 12; xxii. 14; Mk. iv. 22,
25; Jn. iii. 20; 1 Co. xii. 12; Heb. v. 13, etc.; or what
has been stated generally, is proved to be correctly
stated by a particular instance (‘the universal by the
particular’): Mk. vii. 10; Lk. xii. 52, 58; Ro. vil. 2; 1
Co. i. 26; xii. 8. 3. To sentences in which some-
thing is commanded or forbidden, yap annexes the rea-
son why the thing must either be done or avoided: Mt.
i. 20 sq.; ii. 20; iii. 9; vii. 2; Ro. xiii. 11; Col. iii. 3;
yap
1 Th. iv. 3; Heb. ii. 2, and very often. In Phil. ii. 13
yap connects the verse with vs. 12 thus: work out your
salvation with most intense earnestness, for nothing
short of this accords with God’s saving efficiency within
your souls, to whom you owe both the good desire and
the power to execute that desire. 4. To questions,
yap annexes the reason why the question is asked: Mt.
ii. 2 (we ask this with good reason, for we have seen
the star which announces his birth); Mt. xxii. 28; Ro.
Kv 0)s; IaCoxxiv-494 Gal aio: 5. Frequently the
statement which contains the cause is interrogative; ris,
ti yap: Lk. xxii. 27; Ro. iv. 3; xi. 34; 1 Co.ii. 16; vii.
16; Heb.i.5; xii. 7; ré yap for ri yap éore, Ro. iii. 3 (cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.; [Ellic. on Phil. i. 18]); tva ri yap, 1
Co. x. 29; moia yap, Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. yap].
6. Sometimes in answers it is so used to make good the
substance of a preceding question that it can be ren-
dered yea, assuredly: 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. ii. 20; ef.
Kuhner ii. p. 724.7. Sometimes it confirms, not a sin-
gle statement, but the point of an entire discussion: Ro.
ii. 25 (it is no advantage to a wicked Jew, for etc.). On
the other hand, it may so confirm but a single thought
as to involve the force of asseveration and be rendered
assuredly, yea: Ro. xv. 27 (evééxnoav yap); so also kai
yap, Phil. ii. 27. 8. It is often said that the sentence
of which yap introduces the cause, or renders the reason,
is not expressed, but must be gathered from the con-
text and supplied in thought. But that this ellipsis
is wholly imaginary is clearly shown by Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 1 p. 236 sq., cf. W. 446 (415) sq. The particle is
everywhere used in reference to something expressly
stated. Suffice it to append a very few examples; the
true nature of many others is shown under the remain-
ing heads of this article: In Mt. v. 12 before yap some
supply ‘nor does this happen to you alone’; but the rea-
son is added why a great reward in heaven is reserved
for those who suffer persecution, which reason consists
in this, that the prophets also suffered persecution, and
that their reward is great no one can doubt. In Ro. viii.
18 some have supplied ‘do not shrink from this suffer-
ing with Christ’; but on the use of yap here, see III. a.
below. On Mk. vii. 28 [T Tr WH om. L br. yap],
where before kal yap some supply ‘but help me,’ or ‘ yet
we do not suffer even the dogs to perish with hunger,’
see 10 b. below. In Acts ix. 11 before yap many supply
‘he will listen to thee’; but it introduces the reason for
the preceding command. 9. When in successive state-
ments ydp is repeated twice or thrice, or even four or five
times, either a. one and the same thought is confirmed
by as many arguments, each having its own force, as there
are repetitions of the particle [Mey. denies the codrdi-
nate use of yap in the N. T., asserting that the first is
argumentative, the second ex plicative, see his Comm.
on the pass. to follow, also on Ro. viii. 6]: Mt. vi. 32; Ro.
xvi. 18 sq.; or b. every succeeding statement contains
the reason for its immediate predecessor, so that the state-
ments are subordinate one to another: Mk. vi. 52; Mt.
xvi. 25-27; Jn. iii. 19 sq.; v.21 sq.; Acts ii. 15; Ro. iv.
110
rye
13-15 ; viii. 2 sq. 5 sq.; 1 Co. iii. 3 sq.; ix. 15-17 (where
five times in GL T Tr WH); 1 Co. xvi. 7; Jas. ii. 10,
etc.; or c. it is repeated in a different sense: Mk. ix.
39-41; Ro. v. 6 sq. (where cf. W. 453 (422)); x. 2-5
(four times) ; Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. the first yap,
LWHurg. om. the second]. 10. «ai yap (on which cf.
Kiihner ii. p. 854 sq.; W.448 (417); [Ellic. on 2 Thess.
iii. 10]) is a. for, and truly, (etenim, namque, [the sim-
ple rendering for is regarded as inexact by many; cf.
Mey. on 2 Co. xiii. 4 and see Hartung, Partikeln, 1.137 sq. ;
Kriiger § 69, 32, 21]): Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xxii. 37 [L Tr
br. yap]; 1 Co. v. 7; xi. 9; xii. 13. b. for also, for even,
(nam etiam): Mt. viii. 9; Mk. x. 45; Lk. vi. 32; Jn. iv.
45; 1 Co. xii. 14, ete. In Mk. vil. 28 cai yap [RG L br.]
Ta kuvapta etc. the woman, by adducing an example, con-
firms what Christ had said, but the example is of such a
sort as also to prove that her request ought to be granted.
ré yap for indeed (Germ. denn ja): Ro. vii. 7; cf. Fritz-
sche ad loc.; W. 448 (417). idod yap, see under idov.
III. It serves to explain, make clear, illus-
trate, a preceding thought or word: for i. q. that is,
namely ; a. so that it begins an exposition of the
thing just announced [cf. W. 454 (423) sq.]: Mt. i. 18
[RG]; xix.12; Lk. xi. 30; xviii. 32. In Ro. viii. 18 yap
introduces a statement setting forth the nature of the
ovvdotacOjva just mentioned. _b. so that the explana-
tion is intercalated into the discourse, or even added by
way of appendix: Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16; ii. 15; v. 42;
Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. xvi. 5. In Mk. xvi. 4 the information
jv yap péyas opddpa is added to throw light on all that
has been previously said (in vs. 3 sq.) about the stone.
Iv. As respects Position: yap never occupies the
first place in a sentence, but the second, or third, or even
the fourth (6 tov Geod yap vids, 2 Co. i. 19 —ace. to true
text). Moreover, “not the number but the nature
of the word after which it stands is the point to be no-
ticed,” Hermann on Soph. Phil. 1437.
yaortp, -pds (poet. -épos), 7, in Grk. auth. fr. Hom.
down ; in Sept. for 103; 1. the belly; by meton. of
the whole for a part, 2. Lat. uterus, the womb: év ya-
orpi éxew to be with child [see éy, I. 1 b.]: Mt.i. 18, 23;
xxiv. 19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Th.v.3; Rev. xii.
2; (in Sept. for 777, Gen. xvi. 4 sq. ; 2OO-G pil, AA Isp
vii. 14, ete.; Hdt. 3, 32 and vit. Hom. 2; Artem. oneir.
2,18 p. 105; 3, 32 p.177; Pausan., Hdian., al.) ; ova-
AapBaverba ev yaorpi to conceive, become pregnant, Lk.
acral 3. the stomach; by synecdoche a glutton, gor-
mandizer, a man who is as it were all stomach, Hes. theog.
26 (so also ydorpis, Arstph. av. 1604; Ael. v. h. 1, 28; and
Lat. venter in Lucil. sat. 2, 24 ed. Gerl. ‘ vivite ventres’) :
yaorépes apyai, Tit. i. 12; see apyds, bs
yé, an enclitic particle, answering exactly to no one
word in Lat. or Eng.; used by the bibl. writ. much more
rarely than by Grk. writ. How the Greeks use it, is
shown by (among others) Hermann ad Vig. p. 822 sqq. :
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 272 sqq.; Rost in Passow’s Lex.
i. p. 538 sqq.; [L. and S.s.v.; 7. S. Evans in Journ.
of class. and sacr. Philol. for 1857, p. 187 sqq.J. It indi-
yé
eates that the meaning of the word to which it belongs
has especial prominence, and therefore that that word
is to be distinguished from the rest of the sentence and
uttered with greater emphasis. This distinction “ can
be made in two ways, by mentioning either the least
important or the most; thus it happens that yé seems
to have contrary significations: at least and even” (Her-
mann 1. c. p. 822). 1. where what is least is indi-
cated ;. indeed, truly, at least: dca ye thy avaideray, Lk. xi.
8 (where, since the force of the statement lies in the
substantive not in the preposition, the Greek should have
read dca rv ye avaid., cf. Klotz |. c. p. 327; Rost 1. e. p.
542; [L.and 8. s. v. [V.]); dua ye 76 mapéxewv prot kdzrov, at
least for this reason, that she troubleth me [A. V. yet
because etc.], Lk. xviii. 5 (better Greek dia 16 ye ete.).
2. where what is most or greatest is indicated ; even:
és ye the very one who etc., precisely he who etc. (Germ.
der es ja ist, welcher etc.), Ro. viii. 82; cf. Klotz 1. e. p.
305; Matthiae, Lex. Euripid. i. p. 613 sq. 3. joined
to other particles it strengthens their force; a. ddd ye
[so most edd.] or dA\dye [Grsb.] (cf. W. § 5, 2): Lk.
xxiv. 21; 1 Co. ix. 2; see adda, I. 10. b. dpa ye or dpaye,
see dpa,4. dpa ye,seedpa,l. c. etye [soGT, but L Tr
WH ei ye; cf. W.u.s.; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 123],
foll. by the indic. ¢f indeed, seeing that, “of a thing be-
lieved to be correctly assumed” (Herm. ad Vig. p. 831;
ef. Fritzsche, Praeliminarien u.s.w. p. 67 sqq.; Anger,
Laodicenerbrief, p. 46; [W. 448 (417 sq.). Others hold
that Hermann’s statement does not apply to the N. T.
instances. Acc. to Meyer (see notes on 2 Co. v. 3; Eph.
iii. 2; Gal. iii. 4) the certainty of the assumption resides
not in the particle but in the context; so Ellicott (on Gal.
l.c., Eph. 1. c.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1.c.; Col.i. 23. Her-
mann’s canon, though assented to by Bornemann (Cyrop.
2, 2, 3 p. 132), Stallbaum (Meno p. 36), al., is qualified
by Baumlein (Partikeln, p. 64 sq.), who holds that yé
often has no other effect than to emphasize the condition
expressed by ef; cf. also Winer ed. Moulton p. 561]), if,
that is to say; on the assumption that, (see etrep s. v. ei, III.
13): Eph. iii. 2; iv. 21; Col. i. 23; with cai added, if
that also, if it be indeed, (Germ. wenn denn auch): etye
[L Tr WH mrg. et rep] kai evdvodpevor, od yupvot ebped.
if indeed we shall be found actually clothed (with a new
body), not naked, 2 Co. v. 3 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; etye kat
eiky) SC. Tooavta emdbere, if indeed, as I believe, ye have
experienced such benefits in vain, and have not already
received harm from your inclination to Judaism, Gal. iii.
4 [yet cf. Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft., al. ad loc.]. d. ef dé
hye Lor ef S¢ wy ye Lchm. Treg.] (also in Plat., Arstph.,
Plut., al. ; ef. Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc. p. 95; Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 527), stronger than ei 8€ yn [B. 393 (336
sq.); cf. W. 583 (543); 605 (563) ; Mey. on 2 Cor. xi. 16],
a. after affirmative sentences, but unless perchance, but
if not: Mt. vi. 1; Lk.x. 6; xiii. 9. B. after negative sen-
tences, otherwise, else, in the contrary event: Mt. ix. 17;
LK. v. 36 sq.; xiv. 32; 2Co.xi.16. e. xaiye [so GT,
but L Tr WH kai ye; cf. reff. under eye above], (cf.
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 319; [W.438 (408)]), . and at
muita
TcOonpavij
least: Lk. xix. 42 [Tr txt. WH om. L Trmrg. br.]. 8.
and truly, yea indeed, yea and: Acts ii. 18; xvii. 27 LT
Tr WH. f. xairovye [so GT WH, but L kairo ye, Tr
kai rou ye; cf. reff. under c. above. Cf. Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 2 p. 654; W. 444 (413)], although indeed, and yet
indeed: Jn. iv. 2; also in Acts xiv. 17 [RG]; xvii. 27
Rec. g. pevovrye see in its place.
[and in its place ].*
TeSemv, 6, indecl. [in the Bible (cf. B. p. 15 (14)), and
in Suidas (e. g. 1737 a.) ; but] in Joseph. antt. 5, 6, [3 and]
4 Tedewv, -avos, (jiy73 cutting off, [al. tree-feller i. e.
mighty warrior], fr. 3), Gideon, a leader of the Israel-
ites, who delivered them from the power of the Midianites
(Judg. vi—viii.): Heb. xi. 32 [where A. V. unfortunately
follows the Grk. spelling Ge deon].*
yéewva [al. would accent yeevva, deriving it through the
Chaldee. In Mk. ix. 45 Rec.* yéeva], -ys [B. 17 (15)],
7, (fr. DI 13, Neh. xi. 30; more fully DII-j32 N32, Josh.
xv. 8; xviii. 16; 2 Chr. xxviii. 3; Jer. vii. 32 ; Dan 3,
2 K. xxiii. 10 K’thibh; Chald. D2, the valley of the
son of lamentation, or of the sons of lamentation, the
valley of lamentation, 037 being used for D7} lamenta-
tion; see Hiller, Onomasticum; cf. Hitzig [and Graf] on
Jer. vii. 31; [Béttcher, De Inferis, i. p. 82 sqq.]; acc. to
the com. opinion 037) is the name of a man), Gehenna,
the name of a valley on the S. and E. of Jerusalem [yet
apparently beginning on the W., cf. Josh. xv. 8; Pressel
in Herzog s. v.], which was so called from the cries of
the little children who were thrown into the fiery arms
of Moloch [q.v.],i. e. of an idol having the form of a
bull. The Jews so abhorred the place after these horri-
ble sacrifices had been abolished by king Josiah (2 K.
xxlii. 10), that they cast into it not only all manner of
refuse, but even the dead bodies of animals and of un-
buried criminals who had been executed. And since
fires were always needed to consume the dead bodies,
that the air might not become tainted by their putrefac-
tion, it came to pass that the place was called yéewa tod
nupos [this common explanation of the descriptive gen.
tov mupds is found in Rabbi David Kimchi (fl. ¢. a. p.
1200) on Ps. xxvii. 13. Some suppose the gen. to refer
not to purifying fires but to the fires of Molech; others
regard it as the natural symbol of penalty (cf. Lev. x. 2;
Num. xvi. 35; 2 K.i.; Ps. xi. 6; also Mt. iii. 11; xiii. 42;
2 Th. i. 8, etc.). See Béttcher,u.s. p.84; Mey., (Thol.,)
Wetst. on Mt. v. 22]; and then this name was transferred
to that place in Hades where the wicked after death will
suffer punishment: Mt. v. 22, 29 sq.; x. 28; Lk. xii. 5;
MK. ix. 43, 45; Jas. iii. 6; yéevva rod mupds, Mt. v. 22;
xviii. 9; Mk. ix.47 [RG Trmrg. br.]; xpiovs rns yeévrys,
Mt. xxiii. 33; vids rqs yeévyns, worthy of punishment in
Gehenna, Mt. xxiii. 15. Further, ef. Dillmann, Buch
Henoch, 27, 1 sq. p. 131 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed.; Béticher,
u. s. p. 80 sqq.; Hamburger, Real-Encycl., Abth. 1. s. v.
Holle; Bartlett, Life and Death eternal, App. H.].*
TeOonpava, or PeOonuavei (T WH), or TeOonuavet (L
Tr) ; [on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; W.
§6,1m.; indecl. B. 15 (14)], (fr. nj press, and x)pw ail),
h. pyreye, see pyri,
yelT@v 112
Gethsemane, the name of a ‘ place’ (y@piov [an enclosure
or landed property]) at the foot of the Mount of Olives,
beyond the torrent Kidron: Mt. xxvi. 36; Mk. xiv. 32.
[B. D. Am. ed. s, v.]*
yeltwv, -ovos, 6, 7, [fr. yn, hence originally ‘of the same
land,’ cf. Curtius § 132], fr. Hom. down, a neighbor: Lk.
Rival 2s) xve G19 o Ine wKS.
yeAdw, -@ ; fut. yeAdow (in Grk. writ. more com. yeddoo-
pat[ B. 53 (46); W.84 (80) ]); [fr. Hom. down]; to laugh:
Lk. vi. 21 (opp. to kAaiw), 25. [Comr.: xcata-yeddo. ]*
yéAws, -wros, 6, laughter: Jas.iv.9. [ From Hom. down. ]*
yenlfw: 1 aor. éyeuioa; Pass., [pres. yeuifouac]; 1 aor.
eyepioOnv; (yeuo, q.v-); to jill, fill full; a. absol. in
pass.: Mk. iv. 37; Lk. xiv. 23. b. ri tivos, to fill a thing
full of something: Mk. xv. 36; Jn. ii. 7; vi. 13; Rev. xv.
8, (Aeschyl. Ag. 443; al.); ri dad twos, of that which
is used for filling, Lk. xv. 16 [not WH Trmrg.]; also in
the same sense ti €k tivos, Rev. viii. 5; [ef. Lk. xv. 16 in
WH urg.], (} non, Ex. xvi. 32; Jer. li. 34, ete. [cf.
W. § 30, 8b.; B. 163 (143)]).*
yépo, defect. verb, used only in pres. and impf., [in
N. T. only in pres. indic. and ptep.1; to be full, filled full ;
a. ruvods (as generally in Grk. writ.) : Mt. xxiii. 25 Lehm.,
27; Lk. xi. 39; Ro. iii. 14 (fr. Ps. ix. 28 (x.7)); Rev. iv.
6,8; v.8; xv. 7; xvii. 3 R G (see below), 4; xxi. 9. b.
éx twos: Mt. xxiii. 25 (yéuovow e& dprayns [L om. Tr br.
e&] their contents are derived from plunder; see yepifo,
b. [and reff. there]). ce. Hebraistically (see mAnpda, 1
[ef. B. 164 (143); W. § 30, 8 b.]), with acc. of the mate-
rial, yéuovra [ Treg. yeuov ra] dvduata Baodnuias, Rev.
xvii. 3 [LT Tr WH (see above and cf. B.80 (70)) ].*
yeved, -Gs, 7, (TENQ, yivona [cf. Curtius p.610]) ; Sept.
often for 1; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. abe-
getting, birth, nativity: Hdt. 3, 33 ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 8, ete. ;
{others make the collective sense the primary signif.,
see Curtius u. s.]. 2. passively, that which has been
begotten, men of the same stock, a family; a. prop. as
early as Hom.; equiv. to NMDwn, Gen. xxxi. 3, etc.;
oa ew ‘PaydSnv kx. tiv yeveay adtns, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 5.
the several ranks in a natural descent, the successive mem-
bers of a genealogy: Mt. i. 17, (€B8dun yeved odds eorw
an6 tod mpwtov, Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 2). b. metaph. a
race of men very like each other in endowments, pursuits,
character ; and esp. in a bad sense a perverse race: Mt.
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; xvi. 8; [Acts ii. 40].
3. the whole multitude of men living at the same time: Mt.
xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30; Lk. i. 48 (waoas ai yeveai) ; xxi.
32; Phil. ii. 15; used esp. of the Jewish race living at
one and the same period: Mt. xi. 16; xii. 39,41 sq. 45;
xvi. 4; xxiii. 36; Mk. viii. 12, 38; Lk. xi. 29 sq. 32, 50
sq-; xvii. 25; Acts xiii. 86; Heb. iii. 10; avOpwmo tis
yeveas tavtns, Lk. vii. 31; dvdpes ris yev. trav. Lk. xi. 31;
thy d€ yevedv avrov tis Sinynoerat, who can describe the
wickedness of the present generation, Acts viii. 33 (fr.
Is. lili. 8 Sept.) [but cf. Mey. ad loe.]. 4. an age (i.e.
the time ordinarily occupied by each successive genera-
tion), the space of from 30 to 33 years (Hat. 2, 142 et al.;
Heraclit. in Plut. def. orac. c. 11), or 6 xpdvos, év @ yer-
ryeveTh
vavra trapexet Tov €€ alrov yeyevynuevoy 6 yevynoas (Plut.
l.c.); in the N. T. com. in plur.: Eph. iii. 5 [W. § 31,
9 a.; B. 186 (161)]; wapwynuévais yeveais in ages gone
by, Acts xiv. 16; amé rév yevear for ages, since the gener-
ations began, Col. i. 26; ek yevedv dpxaiwy from the gen-
erations of old, from ancient times down, Acts xv. 21; eis
yeveas yeveay unto generations of generations, through
all ages, for ever, (a phrase which assumes that the longer
ages are made up of shorter; see ai@y, 1 a.): Lk. i. 50
RL(o Ws 73) Is. li. 8) ; eis yeveds x. yeveds unto genera-
tions and generations, ibid. T Tr WH equiv. to 3171 779,
Ps. Ixxxix. 2 sq.; Is. xxxiv. 17; very often in Sept.; [add,
els Tagas Tas yeveds TOV ai@vos Tav aiwvwy, Eph. iii. 21, ef.
Ellic. ad loc.] (yeved is used of a century in Gen. xv. 16,
cf. Knobel ad loc., and on the senses of the word see the
full remarks of Keim iii. 206 [v. 245 Eng. trans.]).*
yeveadoyéw, -@: [pres. pass. yeveadoyodpat]; to act the
genealogist (yeved and déyw), to recount a family’s origin
and lineage, trace ancestry, (often in Hdt.; Xen., Plat.,
Theophr., Leian., Ael., al.; [Sept. 1 Chr. v. 2]); pass. to
draw one’s origin, derive one’s pedigree: €k twos, Heb.
Vii. 6.*
yeveadoyla, -as, 7, a genealogy, a record of descent or
lineage, (Plat. Crat. p. 396 c.; Polyb. 9, 2,1; Dion. Hal.
antt. 1,11; [al.]. Sept. [edd. Ald., Compl.] 1 Chr. vii.
5, 7; ix. 22; [iv.33 Compl.; Ezra viii. 1 ib.]); in plur.
of the orders of ons, according to the doctrine of the
Gnosties: 1 Tim.i.4; Tit. iii. 9; ef. De Wette on Tit. i.
14 [substantially reproduced by Alf. on 1 Tim. 1. c¢.; see
also Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, pp. 126 sq. 134 sq. 143].*
yevéowa, -wv, ra [cf. W. 176 (166)], (fr. the adj. yeve-
ovos fr. yéveows), a birth-day celebration, a birth-day feast :
Mk. vi. 21; Mt. xiv. 6; (Alciphr. epp. 3, 18 and 55; Dio
Cass. 47, 18, ete.; 7 yevéotos nu€pa, Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7).
The earlier Greeks used yevéowa of funeral commemora-
tions, a festival commemorative of a deceased friend
(Lat. feriae denicales), see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 103 sq.;
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 184; W. 24 (23)]. Cf.
Keim ii. p. 516 [iv. 223 Eng. trans. ].*
yéverts, -ews, 7, (TENQ [Curtius § 128]), in Grk. writ.
for the first time in Hom. II. 14, 201 [ef. 246]; 1.
source, origin: BiBdos yevérews Tivos a book of one’s lin-
eage, i. e. in which his ancestry or his progeny are enu-
merated (i. q. NiTIA 190, Gen. v. 1, ete.), [Mt. i. 1].
2. used of birth, nativity, in Mt. i. 18 and Lk. i. 14, for
Rec. yévvnors (qpépar ris yevéoeds pov equiv. to ag’ od
eyevvnOnv, Judith xii. 18 cf. 20); mpdcwmov ths yeveoews
his native (natural) face, Jas. i. 23. 3. of that which
follows origin, viz. existence, life: 6 rpoxds THs yeverews
the wheel [cf. Eng. “ machinery ”’] of life, Jas. iii. 6 (cf.
Grimm on Sap. vii. 5); but others explain it the wheel
of human origin which as soon as men are born begins
to run, i. e. the course [cf. Eng. “round’’] of life.*
yeverh, -7/s, 7, (TENQ, yivouac), (cf. Germ. die Geworden-
heit), birth; hence very often é« yeverns from birth on
(Hom. Il. 24, 535; Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 13, 1 p. 1144, 6
ete.; Polyb. 3, 20,4; Diod. 5, 32, al.; Sept. Lev. xxv. 47):
Jniiss 1
yevnpa
yéevnpa, -aros, rd, (fr. yivouar), a form supported by the
dest Mss. in Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xii. 18; xxii.
18; 2 Co. ix. 10, and therefore adopted by T [see his
Proleg. p. 79] Tr [L WH (see WH. App. p. 148 and be-
low) ], printed by Grsb. only in Lk. xii. 18; 2 Co. ix. 10,
but given by no grammarian, and therefore attributed by
Fritzsche (on Mk. p. 619 sq.) to the carelessness of tran-
scribers, — for Rec. [but in Lk. 1. c. R*t reads yeynp.] yer
ynpa,q. Vv. In Mk. xiv. 25 Lchm. has retained the com-
mon reading; [and in Lk. xii. 18 Tr txt. WH have
girov. In Ezek. xxxvi. 30 codd. A B read yevnuara].*
yevvaw, -@ ; fut. yervnow; 1 aor. éyévvnaa; pf. yeyevynka;
[Pass., pres. yevvdopat, -@pai]; pf. Yeyevvn pan 5 ton.
éyerrnOnv; (fr. yevva, poetic for yévos) ; in ye writ. fr.
Pind. down; in Sept. for 19°; to beget; 1. properly :
of men begetting children, Mt. i. 1-16; Acts wants, PANE
foll. by é« with gen. of the mother, Mt. i. 3, 5, 6; more
rarely of women giving birth to children, Lk. i. 13, 57;
Xxiiil. 29; Jn. xvi. 21; efs SovAeiay to bear a child unto
bondage, that will be a slave, Gal. iv. 24, ([-Xen. de rep.
Lae. 1, 3]; Leian. de sacrif.6; Plut. de liber. educ. 5;
al.; Sept. Is. Ixvi. 9; 4 Macc. x. 2, etc.). Pass. to be
begotten: ro ev aitn yevynOév that which is begotten in
her womb, Mt. i. 20; to be born: Mt. ii. 1, 4 [W. 266
(250) ; B. 203 (176) ]; xix. 12; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Lk.
i. 35; Jn. iii. 4; [Acts vii. 20]; Ro. ix. 11; Heb. xi. 23;
with the addition eis roy xéopov, Jn. xvi. 21; foll. by ev
with dat. of place, Acts xxii. 3; dé twos, to spring from
one as father, Heb. xi. 12 [L WH mrg. éyevn. see Tdf.
ad loc.]; é« twos to be born of a mother, Mt. i. 16; éx
mopveias, Jn. viii. 41; é& aiparav, éx Oehnpatos avdpos, Jn.
i. 13; ex ths capkéds, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.*'” yeyernp.]; év duap-
riats dAos, Jn. ix. 34 (see dwapria, 2 a.) ; ets tt, to be born
for something, Jn. xviii. 37; 2 Pet. ii. 12 [Tdf. yeyernp.
so Rec.st 2]; with an adj.: rupdds yeyevynpat, Jn. ix. 2,
19 sq. 32; “Papatos to be supplied, Acts xxii. 28; 77
Siarexro, ev 7 eyevvnOnpev, Acts ii. 8 ; -yevynOeis kata capKa
begotten or born according to (by) the working of nat-
ural passion; xara mvevpa according to (by) the working
of the divine promise, Gal. iv. 29, cf. 23. ae Sean
a. univ. fo engender, cause to arise, excite : paxas, 2 2 Tim.
ii. 23 (8AaBnv, AUvmny, ete. in Grk. writ.). b. in a Jew-
ish sense, of one who brings others over to his way of
life : tpas éyevynoa I am the author of your Christian
life, 1 Co. iv. 15; Philem. 10, (Sanhedr. fol. 19, 2 “If
one teaches the son of his neighbor the law, the Scrip-
ture reckons this the same as though he had begotten
him”; [cf. Philo, ler. ad Gaium § 8]). cc. after Ps. ii. 7,
it is used of God making Christ his son; a. formally to
show him to be the Messiah (vidy rod God), viz. by the
resurrection: Acts xiii. 33. £. to be the author of the
divine nature which he possesses [but cf. the Comm. on
the pass. that follow]: Heb.i.5; v.5. d. peculiarly, in
the Gospel and 1 Ep. of John, of God conferring upon
men the nature and disposition of his sons, imparting to
them spiritual life, i.e. by his own holy power prompting
and persuading souls to put faith in Christ and live a
new life consecrated to himself; absol.: 1 Jn. v. 1;
8
113
ryévos
mostly in pass., €k Oeod or ex Tov Beod eyerynbnoay, yeyer-
rat, ‘yeyevynpevos, ete.: Jn. i. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 29 [ Ree. ye-
yemnrar]; iii. 9; iv. 7; v. 1, 4, 18; also ék rod mvevparos
yervacOa, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.**. yeyevnp.], 8; €€ tdaTos Kai
mvevpartos (because that moral generation is effected in
receiving baptism [(?) cf. Schaff’s Lange, Godet, West-
cott, on the words, and reff. s. v. Bamticpa, 3]), In. iii. 5;
avobev yevvacOa, Jn. ili. 3, 7 (see dvwbev, c.) equiv. to
texvov Beov yiverOar, i. 12. [Comp.: dva-yevydw. |*
yévvnpa, -ros, 7d, (fr. yevvaw), that which has been be-
gotten or born; a. as in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Soph.
down, the offspring, progeny, of men or of animals: éye-
dvav, Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; (yuvatkor,
Sir. ox. 18)3')).0 fr: Polyb.' [/1,'71, 1’ete.]'on [et. W. 28),
the fruits of the earth, products of agriculture, (in Sept.
often yevynuara ths yjs): Lk. xii. 18 (where Tr [txt.
WH] rov otrov) ; trys aureXov, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25;
Lk. xxii. 18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 286. Metaph. fruit,
reward, profit: ths Sukavoavyns, 2 Co. ix. 10, (Hos. x. 12;
tis codias, Sir. i. 17; vi. 19). Further, see yévnya.*
Tewnoapéer [so G T Tr WH], -peO [Lehm. in Mt. xiv.
34], [Tevnoaper Rec. in Mk. vi. 53; cf. Tdf. ed. 2 Proleg.
p- xxxv., ed. 7 Proleg. p. liv. note?], (Targums 70°}) or
30133 [ace. to Delitzsch (Romerbr. in d. Hebr. iibers. p.
27) 10°34, 10333]; Tevynodp, 1 Mace. xi. 67; Joseph. b. j.
2, 20, 6 etce.; Genesara, Plin. 5, 15), Gennesaret, a very
lovely and fertile region on the Sea of Galilee (Joseph.
b. j. 3, 10, 7): 9 yy Tevvno. Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; 9
Aipyn Tevyno. Lk. v. 1, anciently N33 0°, Num. xxxiv.
11,or 733 B*, Josh. xii. 3, fr. the city m3, Deut. iii. 17,
which was near by; called in the Gospels j 7) Oahaooa THs
T'aAtAaias, Mk. i. 16; Mt. iv. 18; 7 @adacoa tis TiBepi-
ddos, Jn. vi. 1; xxi. 1. The lake, acc. to Joseph. b. j. 3,
10, 7, is 140 stadia long and 40 wide; [its extreme di-
mensions now are said to average 121m. by 63 m., and
its level to be neazly 700 ft. below that of the Mediter-
ranean]. Cf. Riietschi in Herzog v. p. 6 sq.; Furrer in
Schenkel ii. p. 322 sqq.; [Welson in “The Recovery of
Jerusalem,” Pt. ii.; Robinson, Phys. Geog. of the Holy
Land, p. 199 sqq.; BB.DD. For conjectures respecting
the derivation of the word cf. Alex.’s Kitto sub fin. ; MJer-
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, § vii.].*
yéevvycis, -ews, 7, (yevvdw), a begetting, engendering,
(often so in Plat.) ; ss birth: Ree. in Mt.i. 18 and
Lk. i. 14; see yeveots, 2.
yevvyrs, -7, -dv, (yervaw), begotten, born, (often in Plat. ;
Diod. 1, 6 sqq- .); after the Hebr. (AYN 339°, Job xiv. 1,
etc.), yevynrot yuvakar [B. 169 (147), born of women]
is a periphrasis for men, with the implied idea of weak-
ness and frailty: Mt. xi. 11; Lk. vii. 28.*
yévos, -ous, 75, (TENQ, yivopa), race; a. offspring:
twos, Acts xvii. 28 sq. (fr. the poet Aratus) ; Rev. xxii.
16. b. family: Acts [iv. 6, see apxvepeds, 2 fin.]; vil. 13
[al. refer this to c.]; xiii. 26. ¢. stock, race: Acts Vii.
19; 2 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 5; Gal. i. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 9; (Gen.
xi. 6; xvii. 14, ete. for D3); nation (i. e. nationality or
descent from a particular people): Mk. vii. 26; Acts iv.
36; xviii. 2,24. d. coner. the aggregate of many mde
Tepacnvos
viduals of the same nature, kind, sort, species: Mt. xiii. 47 ;
114 ¥4
take of my banquet); hence, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29; 1 Co. | down, i. q. to fee/, make trial of, experience: twos, Heb.
xii. 10, 28; xiv. 10. (With the same significations in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Tepaonvds, -ov, 6, Gerasene, i.e. belonging to the city
Gerasa (ra I'epaca, Joseph. b. j. 3, 3, 3): Mt. viii. 28
[Lchm.]; Mk. v.1 [LT WH Tr txt.]; Lk. viii. 26 and 37
[L Tr WH] ace. to very many codd. seen by Origen. But
since Gerasa was a city situated in the southern part of
Ferra (Joseph. 1. c., ef. 4, 9, 1), or in Arabia (Orig.
opp: iv. 140 ed. De la Rue), that cannot be referred to
here; see Tadapnvds, and the next word.*
Tepyeonvds, -7, -dv, Gergesene, belonging to the city
Gergesa, which is assumed to have been situated on the
eastern shore of Lake Gennesaret: Mt. viii. 28 Rec. But
this reading depends on the authority and opinion of
Origen, who thought the variants found in his Mss.
Tadapnvav and Tepaonvar (see these words) must be made
to conform to the testimony of those who said that there
was formerly a certain city Gergesa near the lake. But
Josephus knows nothing of it, and states expressly (antt.
1, 6, 2), that no trace of the ancient Gergesites [A. V.
Girgashites, cf. B. D. s. v.] (mentioned Gen. xv. 20;
Josh. xxiv. 11) had survived, except the names preserved
in the O. T. Hence in Mt. viii. 28 we must read Tada-
pnvav [so 'T Tr WH] and suppose that the jurisdiction
of the city Gadara extended quite to the Lake of Gennes-
aret; but that Matthew (viii. 34) erroneously thought
that this city was situated on the lake itself. For in Mk.
v. 14 sq.; Lk. viii. 34, there is no objection to the sup-
position that the men came to Jesus from the rural dis-
tricts alone. [But for the light thrown on this matter
by modern research, see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gadara;
Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 34 sqq.; Wilson
in “The Recovery of Jerusalem ” p. 286 sq.]*
yepovola, -as, 7, (adj. yepovo.os, belonging to old
men, yépwv), a senate, council of elders; used in prof.
auth. of the chief council of nations and cities (éy rats
ToAect ai yepovoia, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 16; in the O. T. of
the chief council not only of the whole people of Israel,
Ex. iii. 16, ete.; 1 Mace. xii. 6, ete. ; but also of cities,
Deut. xix. 12, ete.) ; of the Great Council, the Sanhedrin
of the Jews: Acts v. 21, where to 76 cuvedpuov is added
Kal naoay Thy yepovciay Tay vidv Iopand and indeed (kai
explicative) all the senate, to signify the full Sanhedrin.
[Cf. Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung d. Juden in Rom
in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt. Leips.
1879, p. 18 sq.; Hatch, Bamp. Lects. for 1880, p. 64 sq. ]*
Yépwv, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], an old man: Jn. iii. 4.
[Syn. cf. Augustine in Trench § evii. 2.]*
yetw: [cf. Lat. gusto, Germ. kosten; Curtius § 131]; to
cause to taste, to give one a taste of, twa (Gen. xxv. 30).
In the N. T. only Mid. yevouac: fut. yevoouar; 1 aor.
€yevodpny ; 1. to taste, try the flavor of: Mt. xxvii. 34;
contrary to better Grk. usage (cf. W. § 30, 7c. [and p. 36;
Antnol. Pal. 6, 120]) with ace. of the obj.: Jn. ii. 9. 2.
to taste, i.e. perceive the flavor of, partake of, enjoy:
twos. Lk. xiv. 24 (yevoerai pov tov Seinvov, i. e. shall par-
vi. 4; pra Oeod, ib. 5, (tHs yuooews, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
36,2). as in Chald., Syr. and Rabbin. writers, yeveo@a
tov Oavarov [ W. 33 (32)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Mk. ix. 1; Lk.
ix. 27; Jn. vili.52; Heb. ii. 9; [ef. Wetstein on Mt. 1. c.3,
Meyer on Jn. 1. c.; Bleek, Liinem., Alf. on Heb. 1. e.].
foll. by ére: 1 Pet. ii. 3 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 9). 3. to
take food, eat: absol., Acts x. 10; xx. 11; ef. Kypke,
Observy. ii. p. 47; to take nourishment, eat —[but sub-
stantially as above ], with gen. undevos, Acts xxiii. 14; with
the ellipsis of a gen. denoting unlawful food, Col. ii. 21.*
yewpyew, -@ : [pres. pass. yewpyovpar]; (yewpyds, q. V-) ;
to practise agriculture, to till the ground: rv ynv (Plat.
Theag. p. 121 b.; Eryx. p. 392 d.; [al.]; 1 Esdr. iv. 6;
1 Mace. xiv. 8); Pass.: Heb. vi. 7.*
yeapyvov, -ov, 76, a (cultivated) field: 1 Co. iii. 9 [A. V.
husbandry (with marg. tillage) ]. (Prov. xxiv. 45 (30);
xxxi. 16 (xxix. 34); Theag. in schol. Pind. Nem. 3, 21;
Strabo 14, 5, 6 p. 671; [al.].)*
yewpyds, -ov, 6, (fr. yf and EPTQ), fr. [Hdt.], Xen. and
Plat. down; a hushandman, tiller of the soil: 2 Tim. ii.
6; Jas. v. 7; several times in Sept. ; used of a vine-dresser
(Ael. nat. an. 7, 28; [Plat. Theaet. p. 178 d.; al.]) in
Mt. xxi. 33 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sq. 7,9; Lk. xx. 9 sq. 14,
16s Insxve lt
yi, gen. ys, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. yaia), Sept. very
often for 778 and 7178, earth ; 1. arable land: Mt.
xiii. 5, 8,283.5 Mik.iv.18)/20,) 26; 28.31% auk cman 79 sane
35 (34); Jn. xii. 24; Heb. vi. 7; Jas. v. 7; Rev. ix. 4;
of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed,
with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: éx yns
xotkds, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a
standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii.
85; xxvii. 51; Mk. vill. 6; 1x. 20; xiv. 35; Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i.e
Rec.]; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main land, opp. to sea or
water: Micitve tsi wvie 4773) 1ukcva/Sisj aval 2 (cue) Memvaae 2s
xxi. 8.sq. 11; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole,
the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp.
to the heavens: Mt. v.18, 35; vi.10; xvi.19; xviii. 18;
xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. ii. 14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19;
iv. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 5,7, 10,13; Rev. xxi. 1; ra emit rijs ys
the things and beings that are on the earth, Eph. i. 10;
Col. i. 16 [T WHom. L Trbr. ra]; involving a suggestion
of mutability, frailty, infirmity, alike in thought and in
action, Mt. vi. 19; ra emi rhs yhs (equiv. to ra emiyea,
Phil. iii. 19) terrestrial goods, pleasures, honors, Col. iii.
2 (opp. to ra dvw); Ta péAn bpov Ta emi THs yys the mem-
bers of your earthly body, as it were the abode and
instruments of corrupt desires, Col. iii. 5; 6 dv ex ths yas
... AaAe? (in contrast with Christ as having come from
heaven) he who is of earthly (human) origin, has an
earthly nature, and speaks as his earthly origifi and
nature prompt, Jn. iii. 31. b. the inhabited earth, the
abode of men and animals: Lk. xxi. 35; Actsi. 8; x. 12;
xi. 6; xvii. 26; Heb. xi. 13; Rev. iii. 10; aipew fwny
Tivos OF Twa amd THs yys, Acts viii. 33; xxU. 22; KAnpo-
yipas
vopetv THY yy (See KAnpovopew, 2), Mt. v. 5 (4); mip Bad-
New emt [Ree. eis] ry yqv, i. e. among men, Lk. xii. 49, cf.
51 and Mt. x. 34; émi rs yjs among men, LK. xviii. 8;
Jn. xvii. 4. 5. a country, land enclosed within fixed
boundaries, a tract of land, territory, region; simply, when
it is plain from the context what land is meant, as that
Giathe Jews Lksiv. 253" xxi. 23; Rorvix. 28s) Jas.iv.
17; with a gentile noun added [then, as a rule, anar-
throus, W. 121 (114 sq.)]: y7 “Iopand, Mt. ii. 20 sq.;
"Tovda, Mt. ii. 6 ; Pevynoaper, Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; So-
Sdpav x. Toudppwv, Mt. x. 15; xi. 24; Xaddaiwv, Acts vii.
4; Atyumros, (see Atyumros); 7) “Iovdaia yn, Jn. ili. 22;
with the addition of an adj.: a\Aorpia, Acts vii. 6; exeivn,
Mt. ix. 26, 31; with gen. of pers. one’s country, native
land, Acts vii. 3.
yiipas, -aos (-ws), Ion. ynpeos, dat. ynpei, ynpet, rd, [fr.
Hom. down], old age: Lk. i. 36 év ynpe G LT Tr
WH for Ree. év ynpa, a form found without var. in Sir.
xxv. a; [also Ps. *xeis(xcii-)) 155 cf. Gen. xv. 15 Alex.;
xxi. 7 ib.; xxv. 8 ib.; 1 Chr. xxix. 28 ib.; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 10, 7 var.; cf. Tdf. Prolee. p. 117]; Fritzsche
on Sir. iii. 12; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 155; W.
[36 and] 64 (62); [B. 15 (14) ].*
ynpackw or ynpdw: 1 aor. éynpaca; fr. Hom. down; [ef.
W. 92 (88); Donaldson, New Crat. § 387]; to grow old:
Jn. xxi. 18; of things, institutions, etc., to fail from age,
be obsolescent: Heb. viii. 13 (to be deprived of force and
authority ; [here associated with mada.otpevos — the lat-
ter (used only of things) marking the lapse of time, while
ynpaokev carries with it a suggestion of the waning
strength, the decay, incident to old age (cf. Schmidt ch.
46,7; Theophr. caus. pl. 6, 7,5): “that which is becom-
ing old and faileth for age” etc.]).*
yivopat (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot.
on for Attic yiyvouac) ; [impf. éywopnv]; fut. yernoopar; 2
aor. éyevouny (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. yevovro ; [ ptep.
yevapevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in
signif., 1 aor. pass. eyevnOnv, rejected by the Atticists (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p.
75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts
iv.4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, ete.), impv. yevnOnro (Mt.
vi. 10; xv. 28, etc.) ; pf. yeyévnuat and yeyova, 3 pers. plur.
yeyovay LT Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rev. xxi. 6 (ef.
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p.
37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73)
sq-; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. yeyovas];
plpf. 3 pers. sing. éyeydve. (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.]; Acts
iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH yeyoves, cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33
(29); Tdf.’s note on the pass.]); to become, and
1. to become, i. e. to come into existence, begin to be, re-
ceive being: absol., Jn. i. 15, 30 (€umpoobev pov yéyover) ;
Jn. viii. 58 (mplv ABpadp yevécOar) ; 1 Co. xv. 37 (7d cpa
TO yevnadpevor) ; ek Twos, to be born, Ro. i. 3 (€k omépparos
Aavid); Gal. iv. 4 (éx yuvackds); Mt. xxi. 19 (unére &k
gov Kapros yevnrat, come from) ; of the origin of all things,
Heb. xi. 3; 61a twos, Jn.i. 3,10. to rise, arise, come on,
apvear, of occurrences in nature or in life: as yiverac
Bpovrn, Jn. xii. 29; aorpann, Rev. vill. 5; cevopds, Rev.
115
| vi.17 [not Tdf.].
yvopat
[vi. 12; xi. 13]; xvi. 18; yadnvn, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv.
39; LK. viii. 24; Aaidayp, Mk. iv. 37; yoyyvopds, Acts
vi. 1; (yrnocs, Jn. iii. 25 [foll. by éx of origin; erdots kai
¢nrnows], Acts xv. 2 [Grsb. questions ¢yr., Rec. reads
ou(nr.]; médewos, Rev. xii. 7; 7 Baowdeia [or ai B.] Krad.
Rey. xi. 15; xii. 10; yapa, Acts viii. 8, and in many other
exx. Here belong also the phrases yiverat quépait be- |
comes day, day comes on, Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii. 66;
Acts xii. 18; xvi. 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39; y. dpe
evening comes, Mk. xi. 19, i. q. y. dyia, Mt. viii. 16; xiv.
15, 23; xvi. 2[T br. WH reject the pass.]; xxvi. 20;
Mk. xiv. 17; Jn. vi. 16, etc.; mpoia, Mt. xxvii.1; Jn.
xxi. 4; vvg, Acts xxvii. 27 (cf. s. v. emeyiv. 2]; oxoria, Jn.
Hence
2. to become i. q. to come to pass, happen, of events;
a. univ.: Mt. v.18; xxiv. 6, 20, 34; Lk. i. 20; xii. 54;
xxi. 28; Jn. i. 28; xiii. 19, etc.; rodro yéyovev, iva etc. *
this hath come to pass that ete., Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4; xxvi.
56; Ta yevoueva or ywopeva, Mt. xviii. 31; xxvii. 54;
xxvill. 11; Lk. xxiii. 48; [cf. ra yevdueva ayaba, Heb.
ix. 11 LWH txt. Trmrg.]; 16 yevdpevor, Lk. xxiii. 47;
To yeyovos, Mk. v. 14; Lk. xxiv. 12 [Tom. L Trbr. WH
reject the vs.]; Acts iv. 21; 76 pjya ro yeyoves, Lk. i.
15; ra peddovta yiveoOa, Lk. xxi. 36; Acts xxvi. 22; rypv
avaoracw 76n yeyovevat, 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; Oavarov yevopevov
a death having taken place (Germ. nach erfolgtem Tode),
Heb. ix. 15. ar) yévorro, a formula esp. freq. in Paul (and
in Epictetus, ef. Schweigh. Index Graec: in Epict. p. 392),
Jar be it! God forbid! (ef. Morison, Exposition of Rom.
iii., p. 31 sq.]: Lk. xx.16; Ro. iii. 4, 6,31; vis 2,15; vii.
Melo xe FA er 1 it 291 Co. vido > Gabvia t7 en, Of
(equiv. to m2 ny Josh. xxii. 29, etc.) ; ef. Sturz, De dial.
Maced. ete. p. 204 sq.; ti yéyovev, dre ete. what has come ~
to pass, that ete. i. q. for what reason, why? Jn. xiv. 22 (ri
eyevero, ott. . . Eccles. vii. 11 (10); ri éoruy, os ete., Eur.
Troad. 889). |b. Very common in the first three Gos-
pels, esp. that of Luke, and in the Acts, is the phrase cat
eyevero (19°) foll. by 1); cf. W. § 65,4 e. [also § 44, 3 ¢.],
and esp. B.§ 141,6. a. Kai éyevero xai with a finite verb:
Mk. ii. 15 ([Tr txt. kai yiverar], TWH kai yiv. [foll. by
ace. and inf.]); Lk. ii. 15 [R G Lbr. Trbr.]; viii. 1; xiv.
1; xvii.11; xix.15; xxiv. 15 [WH br. xai]; foll. by kat
idov, Mt. ix. 10 [T om. «ai before i§.]; Lk. xxiv. 4. 8.
much oftener kai is not repeated: Mt. vii. 28; Mk. iv. 4;
Lk. i. 23; 11. [15 T WH], 46; vi- 12; vil. 11; ix. 18, 33; xi.
1; xix. 29; xxiv. 30. y. «ai eyev. foll. by acc. withrinf. :
Mk. ii. 23 [W. 578 (537) note]; Lk. vi. 1, 6 [RG eéyev. dé
kai]. c. In like manner eyéveto d€ a. foll. by kai with
a finite verb: Lk. v.1; ix. 28 [WH txt. om. L br. eat,
51; x.38RGT,LTrmrg. br. cai]; Actsv.7. B. eyevero ©
6¢ foll. by a fin. verb without cai: Lk. i. 8; ii. 1, 65; [vi.
12RG Lj; viii. 40 [WH Tr txt. om. éyev.]; ix. 375 xi.
14, 27. y. éyevero dé foll. by ace. with inf.: Lk. iii. 21;
fralG eh Er WH; 12 T Te Wis xvi. 22; Acts tv.
5; ix. 3 [without d¢], 32, 37; xi. 26 RG; xiv. 1; [xvi.
16; xix. 1]; xxviii. 8, [17]. 5. éeyev. dé [as b€ éyév.] foll.
by rod with inf.: Acts x. 25 (Rec. om. rod), cf. Mey. ad
loc. and W. 328 (307); [B.270(232)]. | d. with dat. of
rylvopat
pers. to occur or happen to one, befall one: foll. by inf.,
Acts xx. 16; ay yévnrat (sc. adr@) evpetv ard, if it happen
to him, Mt. xviii. 13; eyo d€ pn yevorro kavyac Oat far be it
from me to glory, Gal. vi. 14, (Gen. xliv. 7,17; 1 K. xx.
(xxi.) 3; Alciphr. epp. 1, 26); foll. by ace. with inf. i
happened to me, that etc.: Acts xi. 26 LT Tr WH [but
ace. implied]; xxii. 6, 17, [cf. W. 323 (303); B. 305
(262)]; with adverbs, go, fare, (Germ. ergehen) : ed, Eph.
vi. 3, (yu yevorrd cot ovTw kaxas, Ael. v. h. 9, 36). with
specification of the thing befalling one: ri yéyovey [L T
Trtxt. WH eyev.] adr, Acts vii. 40 (fr. Ex. xxxii. 1);
eyevero[L. T Tr WH eyivero] raon Wux7 poBos fear came
upon, Acts ii. 43. — Mk. iv. 11; ix. 21; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. v.
14; xv. 7; Ro. x1 25. 1 Co. iv.53/2'Co. 8 [Ge Ur
WHon. dat.]; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with the
ellipsis of nuiv, Jn. 1.17. éyévero (atr@) ywoun a purpose
occurred to him, he determined, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230),
but T Tr WH read eyév. yrouns; see below, 5 e. a.].
foll. by prepositions: ém airy upon (Germ. bei or an)
her, Mk. v. 33 [RG Lbr.]; eis rwa, Acts xxviii. 6.
3. to arise, appear in history, come upon the stage:
of men appearing in public, Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 6, [on which
two pass. cf. W. 350 (328); B. 308 (264) sq.]; 2 Pet. ii.
1; yeydvacr, have arisen and now exist, 1 Jn. ii. 18.
4. to be made, done, finished: ta épya, Heb. iv. 3; dia
xetpar, of things fabricated, Acts xix. 26; of miracles to
be performed, wrought: 8a rev xetpov twos, Mk. vi. 2;
did tivos, Acts ii. 43; iv. 16,30; xii. 95; to twos, Lk. ix.
7 (RL [but the latter br. tm’ adrod]); xili. 17; xxiii. 8;
yevoueva eis Kadapy. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for
its benefit (W. 416 (388) ; [ef. B. 333 (286) ]), Lk. iv. 23
[Ree. ev 77 K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re-
quests, etc. to be done, executed: Mt. vi. 10; xxi. 21; xxvi.
42; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xiv. 22; xxiii. 24; Acts xxi. 14; ye-
vngerat 6 Aoyos will be accomplished the saying, 1 Co. xv.
54. joined to nouns implying a certain action: 7 dro-
Aeva yeyove, Mk. xiv. 4; amoypadn, Lk. ii. 2; emayyedia
yevouevn vd Geod given by God, Acts xxvi. 6; dvdxpiots,
Acts xxv. 26; vowou perabeots, Heb. vii. 12; aeors, Heb.
ix. 22. of institutions, laws, ete. to be established, en-
acted : ré oaBBarov éyevero, the institution of the Sabbath,
Mk. ii. 27; 6 vopos, Gal. iii. 17 ; od yeyover odrws hath not
been so ordained, Mt. xix. 8. of feasts, marriages, en-
tertainments, ‘o be kept, celebrated: ré maoxa, Mt. xxvi.
2 (i. q. Ny), 2 K. xxiii. 22); 7d caBBarov, Mk. vi. 2; ra
eykaivia, Jn. x. 22; [yevecious yevopévors (cf. W. § 31, 9b.;
RG yeveciov ayopevov), Mt. xiv. 6], (ra "OAdpma, Xen.
Hell. 7, 4, 28; "IoOu1a, 4, 5, 1); ydpos, Jn. ii. 1.
yévnrat év euoi so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15.
5. to become, be made,“ in passages where it is speci-
fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren-
dered, as respects quality, condition, place, rank, charac-
ter” (Wahl, Clavis Apocr. V. T. p. 101). a. with a
predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj.: of AiOou
otro aprot yevwvra, Mt. iv. 3; Lk. iv. 3; dap olvor yeye-
oO
OUT@S
mpevov, Jn. ii. 9; dpyvepeds yevouevos, Heb. vi. 20 ; dudkovos,
Col. i. 25; 6 Adyos oap§ eyevero, Jn. i. 14 5 avyp, 1 Co. xiii.
11, and many other exx. ; ydpis ovxére yiverat yapts grace
116
ry vopat
ceases to have the nature of grace, can no longer be called
grace, Ro. xi. 6; dkapmos yivera, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19;
—in Mt. xvii. 2; Lk. viii. 17; Jn. v. 6, and many other
places. contextually, to show one’s self, prove one’s self:
Lk. x..36); xix: 175 xxiv,195\Ro. xi. 34; xvi. 2; 2 Co.
18 Rec.; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 7; Heb. xi. 6, ete. ; esp. in exhor-
tations: yiverOe, Mt. x. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; Eph.
iv. 32; Col. iii. 155 pa) yivov, Jn. xx. 273; py yiveoOe, Mt.
vi. 16; Eph. v. 7,17; 1 Co. x. 73 yu) yevopeda, Gal. v. 26;
hence used declaratively, i. q. to be found, shown: Lk.
xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were
sinners); Ro. iii. 4; 2 Co. vii. 14;—-yivouai rivi tis to
show one’s self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20,
22. _b. with an interrog. pron. as predicate : ri 6 Iérpos
eyevero what had become of Peter, Acts xii. 18 [ef. use of
ri eyev.in Act. Phil. in Hell. § 23, Tdf. Acta apost. apocr.
p- 104]. c. yiverOa ws or aoei twa to become as or like
toone: Mt. x. 25; xviii.3; xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii.
44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9) ;
1 Co. iv.13; Gal.iv.12. d. yiveoOai eis re to become i. e.
be changed into something, come to be, issue in, something
(Germ. zu etwas werden) : éyevnOn eis kepadny yevias, Mt.
xx. 49° Milk. oxi) 110) Wkeexcxenli CACts rived deeetaateurs
— all after Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 22. Lk. xiii. 19 (eis devdpov
peya); Jn. xvi. 20; Acts v. 36; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. lxviii.
(Ixix.) 23); 1 Th. iii. 5; Rev. viii. 11; xvi. 19, ete. (equiv. to
5 1°71; but the expression is also classic; cf. W. § 29, 3 a. ;
B.150(131)). — e. yiveoOar with Cases; a. with the gen.
to become the property of any one, to come into the power
of a person or thing, [ef. W. § 30,5; esp. B. 162 (142)]:
Lk. xx. 14 [Lmrg. éorav], 33; Rev. xi. 15 ; [yvopns, Acts
xx. 3 T Tr WH (cf. éAidos peyadns yiv. Plut. Phoc. 23,
4)]; mpodnreia idias émdvoews ov yiverar NO One Can ex-
plain prophecy by his own mental power (it is not a mat-
ter of subjective interpretation), but to explain it one
needs the same illumination of the Holy Spirit in which
it originated, for ete. 2 Pet. i. 20. yevéoOar with a gen.
indicating one’s age, (to be) so many years old: Lk. ii.
42;1Tim.v.9. 8. with the dat. [ef. W. 210 sq. (198) ]:
yiveoOat avdpi to become a man’s wife, Ro. vii. 3 sq. (77
weed, Lev. xxii. 12; Ruthi.12,ete.). f. joined to prep-
ositions with their substantives; &y ru, to come or pass
into a certain state [ef. B. 330 (284)]: év ayevia, LK. xxii.
44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; év éxordoer, Acts xxii.
17; év wvevpart, Rey. i. 10; iv. 2; ev d6& [R. V. came with
(in) glory], 2 Co. iii. 7; év mapaBdoer, 1 Tim. ii. 14; ev
€avt@, to come to himself, recover reason, Acts xii. 11
(also in Grk. writ.; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749); ev
Xpio7e, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be-
come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7; év 6uotmpate avOparer, to
become like men, Phil. ii. 7; €v Aoyw Kodaxelas [R. V.
were we found using] flattering speech, 1 Th. ii.5. eave
twos to be placed over a thing, Lk. xix. 19. pera twos or
civ tun to become one’s companion, associate with him:
Mk. xvi. 10; Acts vii. 88; xx. 18; timo twa to be made
subject to one, Gal. iv. 4. [Cf.h. below.] — g. with speci-
fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest: eis
with acc. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some
yivackw
thing, Acts xx. 16 > xxi. 17; xxv. 15; os eyeveTo . . . els
Ta Sra pov when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44;
eis with ace. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Rev. xvi. 2
RG; of blessings, Gal. iii. 14; 1 Th. i. 5 [Lehm. wpés; Acts
xxvi. 6 L T Tr WH]; yevéoOat emi rod romov, Lk. xxii.
40; emi ris yas, In. vi. 21 [Tdf. emi rv y.]; dde, ib. 25
(éxei, Xen. an. 6,3 [5], 20; [cf. B. 71]); emi with ace. of
place, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts xxi. 35; (Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.];
eyevero Stwypos emi tiv exkAnoiay, Acts viii. 1; éyevero
oBos or OapBos emi mavras, Lk. i. 65; iv. 36; Acts v. 5,
11; [€xoraois, Acts x. 10 (Rec. émemecev)]; €Axos kaxov
k. movnpov emi tT. avOpwrous, Rev. xvi. 2 LT Tr WH;
éyévero phua emi tiva, Adyos Or pwrn mpos twa (came to) :
LK. iii. 2; Jn. x. 85; Acts vii. 31 [Rec.]; x. 13, (Gen. xv.
1, 4; Jer. i. 2,11; xiii. 8; Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1); [emay-
yeAia, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6 Rec.]; xara with acc. of place,
Lk. x. 32[Tr WH om.]; Acts xxvii. 7, (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1,
15) ; xara with gen. : 7d yevopevor pyua ka@ OAns Tis "lov-
8aias the matter the report of which spread throughout
all Judea, Acts x. 37; mpés twa, 2 Jn. 12 (Rec. eddeiv) ;
1 Co. ii. 3; ody run, to be joined to one as an associate,
LK. ii. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3,8); eyyds yiverOa, Eph. ii. 13;
twos, Jn. Vi. 19; h. [with ex of the source (see 1
above): Mk. i. 11 (Tdf. om. éeyev.); ix. 7 (T Trmrg.
WH); Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35; Acts xix. 34]; yiveoOa ex
pecov, to be taken out of the way, 2 Th. ii. 7; yeveoOa
épobvupadcv, of many come together in one place, Acts xv.
25 cf. ii. 1 [but only in RG; yevopevors 6pobvpaddr in xv.
25 may mean either having become of one mind, or possi-
bly having come together with one accord. On the alleged
use of yivoua in the N. T. as interchangeable with eipi
see Fritzschior. Opusce. p. 284 note. Comp.: amo-, d1a-,
€m-, Tapa-, Tvp- Tapa-, Tpo-yivopat. }
ywooke (Attic yryvaoke, see yivoua init.; fr. TNOQ,
as BiBpocke fr. BPOQ) ; [impf. éyivwoxoy]; fut. yyoooua ;
2 aor. éyvev (fr. PNOMI), impv. yo, yrorw, subj. yra
(3 pers. sing. yvot, Mk. v. 43; ix. 30; Lk. xix.15 LT Tr
WH, for RG yo [B. p. 46 (40); cf. diSepe init.]), inf.
yrova, ptep. yvovs; pf. éyvaxa (Jn. xvii. 7; 3 pers. plur.
yivopat init.); plpf.
eyvaxew; Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. ywookerac (Mk. xiii.
28 Trmrg.)]; pf. éyveopa; 1 aor. eyvaoOny; fut. yvooOn-
copa; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for yt; Lat.
NoOsco, novi (i. €. ENOSCcO, ZNOV1) ;
I. univ. 1. to learn to know, come to know, get a
knowledge of; pass. to become known: with ace., Mt. xxii.
18; Mk. v.43; Acts xxi. 34; 1 Co. iv. 19; 2 Co. ii. 4; Col.
iv.8; 1 Th. iii. 5,etc. Pass., Mt. x. 26; Acts ix. 24; Phil.
iv. 5, etc.; [impers. ywookera, Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.T 2, 7];
tl ex twos, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 1 Jn.iv. 63 rivd or ri
ev rw, to find a sign ina thing by which to know, to recog-
nize in or by something, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35; 1
Jn. iv. 2; cara ri yyooouat TovTO, the truth of this promise,
Lk. i. 18 (Gen. xv. 8) ; mepi ris Suday7js, Jn. vii. 17. often
the object is not added, but is readily understood from
what precedes: Mt. ix. 80; xii. 15 (the consultation held
by the Pharisees) ; Mk. vii. 24 (he would have no one
know that he was present); Mk. ix. 30; Ro. x. 19, ete.;
éyvoxav for eyvekacr, see reff. in
Na lef
ywooKkw
foll. by dre, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. iv. 1; v. 6; xii. 9, etc.; foll.
by the interrog. ri, Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xvi. 4; amd twos, to
learn from one, Mk. xv. 45. with ace. of pers. to recog-
nize as worthy of intimacy and love, to own; so those
whom God has judged worthy of the blessings of the gos-
pel are said td tov Oeod ywwoxeaOa, 1 Co. viii. 3; Gal.
iv. 9,[on both ef. W. § 39, 3 Note 2; B. 55 (48)]; neg-
atively, in the sentence of Christ oddérore éyvav ipas, I
never knew you, never had any acquaintance with you,
Mt. vii. 23. to perceive, feel: yyw 76 capart, rt etc. Mk.
v. 29; éyvor Svvauw eeOovcay an’ épov, Lk. viii. 46.
2. to know, understand, perceive, have knowledge of; a.
to understand: with acc., ra Aeyoueva, Lk. xviii. 34; 4
avaywaookes, Acts viii. 30; foll. by 6x1, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn.
viii. 27 sq.; 2 Co. xiii. 6; Gal. iii. 7; Jas. ii. 20; foll. by
interrog, ri, Jn. x. 6; xiii. 12, 28; 6 Kxarepyatopat ov yt-
vookw I do not understand what I am doing, my conduct
is inexplicable to me, Ro. vii. 15. b. to know: 76 O€Anpa,
Lk. xii. 47; ras xapSias, Lk. xvi. 15 ; rov py yvdvra duapriav
ignorant of sin, i. e. not conscious of having committed it,
2 Co. v. 21; émvorody ywvwokopern Kal avaywookopern, 2 Co.
iii. 2; rua, to know one, his person, character, mind,
plans: Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 24; Acts xix.15; 2 Tim. ii. 19
(fr. Num. xvi. 5); foll. by 67, Jn. xxi. 17; Phil. i. 12;
Jas. i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 20; foll. by acc. with inf. Heb. x. 34;
foll. by an indirect question, Rev. iii. 3; éAAnvioti ywack.
to know Greek (graece scire, Cic. de fin. 2, 5): Acts xxi.
37, (€mioracba ovpioti, Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 31; graece nescire,
Cic. pro Flac. 4, 10); tore (Rec. eore) ywaoxovtes ye
know, understanding etc. [R. V. ye know of a surety,
ete.], Eph. v. 5; see W. 355 (333) ; [cf. B. 51 (44); 314
(269)]. impv. ywaokete know ye: Mt. xxiv. 32 sq. 43;
Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. x.11; Jn. xv.18; Acts ii. 36; Heb. xiii.
23; 1 Jn. ii. 29. 3. by a Hebraistic euphemism [cf.
W. 18], found also in Grk. writ. fr. the Alexandrian age
down, yweaoxw is used of the carnal connection of male
and female, rem cum aliquo or aliqua habere (cf. our
have a [criminal] intimacy with): of a husband, Mt. i.
25 of the woman, Lk. 1.34; (Gen. iv.1, 17; xix. 83/1
S. i. 19, ete.; Judith xvi. 22; Callim. epigr. 58,3; often
in Plut.; ef. Végelin, Plut. Brut. p.10 sqq.; so also Lat.
cognosco, Ovid. met. 4, 596; novi, Justin. hist. 27, 3, 11).
II. In particular ywaoke, to become acquainted with,
to know, is employed in the N. T. of the knowledge of
God and Christ, and of the things relating to them or pro-
ceeding from them; a. rdv Gedy, the one, true God, in
contrast with the polytheism of the Gentiles: Ro. i. 21;
Gal. iv. 9; also rév pdvov dAnOcvov Oedv, Jn. xvii. 3 cf, 1 Jn.
v. 20; rov Oedv, the nature and will of God, in contrast
with the false wisdom of both Jews and Gentiles, 1 Co.
i. 21; tov warépa, the nature of God the Father, esp.
the holy will and affection by which he aims to sanctify
and redeem men through Christ, Jn. viii. 55; xvi. 3;
1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. 14 (13); iii 1, 6; iv. 8; a peculiar knowl-
edge of God the Father is claimed by Christ for him-
self, Jn. x. 15; xvii. 25; yvoOe roy Kvprov, the precepts
of the Lord, Heb. viii. 11; 76 @eAnpa (of God), Ro. ii.
18; voor xupiov, Ro. xi. 84; 1 Co. ii. 165 rHv codiay rod
yluvacko
Geod, 1 Co. ii. 8; tas ddovs rod Oeod, Heb. iii. 10 (fr.
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10). b. Xpeordy, his blessings, Phil.
iii. 10; in Xpiorov éeyvxevac cata odpka, 2 Co. v. 16,
Paul speaks of that knowledge of Christ which he had
before his conversion, and by which he knew him merely
in the form of a servant, and therefore had not yet seen
in him the Son of God. Ace. to J ohn’s usage, ywooker,
€yvaxevat Xptordéy denotes to come to know, to know, his
Messianic dignity (Jn. xvii. 3; vi. 69); his divinity (roy
an’ apxjs, 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. cf. Jn. i. 10), his consummate
kindness towards us, and the benefits redounding to us
from fellowship with him (in Christ’s words yweokoyat
ind Tov éuav, Jn. x. 14 [ace. to the crit. texts ywaokovoly
pe ta eua]); his love of God (Jn. xiv. 31); his sinless
holiness (1 Jn. iii. 6). Johnunites morevey and ywockery,
at one time putting morevew first: vi. 69 (ef. Schaft’s
Lange or Mey. ad loc.]; but at another time ywockeuw :
x. 88 (ace. to RG, for which L 'T Tr WH read iva yére
kal ywooknre [R. V. know and understand]); xvii. 8 [L
br. x. €yv.]; 1 Jn. iv. 16 (the love of God). c. y. ra rod
mvevparos the things which proceed from the Spirit, 1 Co.
ii. 143 ro wvedua T. aAnOeias Kal TO Tv. THS TAAaYns, 1 Jn. iv.
6 ; Ta puornpia THs BacwXelas Tov ovpavar, Mt. xiii. 115; rhv
a\nOecav, Jn. viii. 32; 2 Jn. 1; absol., of the knowledge
of divine things, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of the knowledge of
things lawful for a Christian, 1 Co. viii. 2.
[Sxyn. yevdonery, cldévat, ewmictacbat cvviévat:
In classic usage (cf. Schmidt ch. 13), ywéonew, distinguished
from the rest by its original inchoative force, denotes a dis-
criminating apprehension of external impressions, a knowl-
edge grounded in personal experience. eiSévar, lit. ‘to have
seen with the mind’s eye,’ signifies a clear and purely mental
perception, in contrast both to conjecture and to knowledge
derived from others. érlorac@a: primarily expresses the
knowledge obtained by proximity to the thing known (cf.
our understand, Germ. verstehen) ; then knowledge viewed as
the result of prolonged practice, in opposition to the process
of learning on the one hand, and to the uncertain knowledge
of a dilettante on the other. gouvy:éva: implies native insight,
the soul’s capacity of itself not only to lay hold of the phe-
nomena of the outer world through the senses, but by combi-
nation (ody and féva) to arrive at their underlying laws.
Hence cuvvévat may mark an antithesis to sense-perception ;
whereas yivéoxew marks an advance upon it. As applied
e. g. to a work of literature, yivéoKxew expresses an acquaint-
ance with it; émiorac@a the knowledge of its contents;
ovvievat the understanding of it, a comprehension of its mean-
ing. ywdéorew and eidéva: most readily come into contrast
with each other; if eidévarand érlorac@q are contrasted, the
former refers more to natural, the latter to acquired knowl-
edge. In the N. T., as might be expected, these distinctions
are somewhat less sharply marked. Such passages as John
1. 26, 31,48 (49) ; vii. 27 sq.; xxi. 17; 2Co.v. 16; 1 Jn. v. 20
may seem to indicate that, sometimes at least, yiwdonw and
olda are nearly interchangeable; yet see Jn. iii. 10, 11 ; viii.
55 (yet cf. xvii. 25); 1 Jn. ii. 29 (know .. . perceive), and the
characteristic use of eidéva: by John to describe our Lord’s
direct insight into divine things: iii. 11 ; v. 32 (contrast 42) ;
Vil. 29; viii. 55; xii. 50, ete; cf. Bp. Lghtft.’s note on Gal.
iv. 9; Green, ‘Critical Notes’ etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. 55);
Westcott on John ii. 24. yiwéonw and éertorapa are associ-
ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97); ofa and
118
yrAoooa
ywoéokw inl Co.ii. 11; Ephv.5; ofda and érioraum in Jude
10. Comp.: dva-, dSia-, émi-, kara-, mpo-yivdoKw.|
yAcdkos, -ous, Td, must, the sweet juice pressed from the
grape; Nicand. alex. 184, 299; Plut., al.; Job xxxii. 19;
sweet wine: Acts ii. 13. [Cf. BB. DD. s. vy. Wine.] *
yAukis, -eta, -v, sweet: Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to mkpov); 12
(opp. to ddvkdv); Rev. x. 9, [10]. [From Hom. down.]*
yAaéooa, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down], the tongue ; 1. the
tongue, a member of the body, the organ of speech: Mk.
vii. 33, 35; Lk. i. 64; xvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Jas. i. 26;
iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. ii. 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10].
By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that
member of the body which is chiefly engaged in some act
has ascribed to it what belongs to the man; the tongue
is so used in Acts ii. 26 (7yadXtdoato 7 yAdood pov); Ro.
ii. 13; xiv.11; Phil. ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of
the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign
tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. e. the language
used by a particular people in distinction from that of
other nations: Acts ii.11; hence in later Jewish usage (Is.
Ixvi. 18; Dan. iii. 4; v.19 Theod.; vi. 25; vii. 14 Theod.;
Jud. iii. 8) joined with puAy, dads, Z6vos, it serves to desig-
nate people of various languages [cf. W. 32], Rev. v. 9;
vil. 95 x. 115 xi 9) xii. 7 sox1v./65 xvii. 155) Dadeieene-
pats yhwooats to speak with other than their native i. e. in
foreign tongues, Acts ii. 4 cf. 6-11; yNeooats Aadetv Kat-
vats to speak with new tongues which the speaker has not
learned previously, Mk. xvi. 17 [but Tr txt. WH txt. om.
Tr mrg. br. cawvais]; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 sqq. [cor-
rect and supplement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 10;
cf. also B. D. s. v. Tongues, Gift of |. From both these
expressions must be carefully distinguished the simple
phrases Aaketvy yAwooats, yAoooats hadeiv, Aadev yAooon,
yhooon dadeiv (and mpocevxecOat yhooon, 1 Co. xiv. 14),
to speak with (in) a tongue (the organ of speech), to speak
with tongues ; this, as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 7 sqq., is the
gift of men who, rapt in an ecstasy and no longer quite
masters of their own reason and consciousness, pour forth
their glowing spiritual emotions in strange utterances,
rugged, dark, disconnected, quite unfitted to instruct or to
influence the minds of others: Acts x. 46; xix. 6; 1 Co.
xii. 30; xiii. 1; xiv. 2,4—-6, 13, 18, 23, 27,39. The origin of
the expression is apparently to be found in the fact, that
in Hebrew the tongue is spoken of as the leading instru-
ment by which the praises of God are proclaimed (9 rév
Ociwv duvev pedh@dds, 4 Mace. x. 21, cf. Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.)
28; xv. (Ixvi.) 17; lxx. (Ixxi.) 24; exxv. (exxvi.) 2; Acts
ii. 26; Phil. ii. 11; Nadety ev yAwoon, Ps. xxxviil. (xxxix.)
4), and that according to the more rigorous conception
of inspiration nothing human in an inspired man was
thought to be active except the tongue, put in motion by
the Holy Spirit (karaypyrat €repos avrovd tots Pwrntnpios
dpyavois, oTopate Kal yh@Ttn mpos pyvvow Ov av Gedy,
Philo, rer. div. haer. § 53, [i.510 ed. Mang.]) ; hence the
contrast 64a Tov vods [crit. edd. 76 vot | Aadeiv, 1 Co. xiv.
19 cf. 9. The plur. in the phrase yA@ooats dadeiv, used
even of a single person (1 Co. xiv. 5 sq.), refers to the
various motions of the tongue. By meten. of the cause for
yA@oo oKojoVv
the effect, yAdooa tongues are equiv. to Adyot ev yAooon
(1 Co. xiv. 19) words spoken in a tongue (Zungenvortra-
ge): xili. 8; xiv. 22; yeévm yAwooar, 1 Co. xii. 10, 28, of
which two kinds are mentioned viz. mpooevyn and Wadpos,
1 Co. xiv. 15; yAdooay éx, something to utter with a
tongue, 1 Co. xiv. 26. [On ‘Speaking with Tongues’
see, in addition to the discussions above referred to,
Wendt in the 5th ed. of Meyer on Acts (ii. 4); Heinrici,
Korinthierbriefe, i. 372 sqq.; Schaff, Hist. of the Chr.
Church, i. 234-245 (1882); Farrar, St. Paul, i. 95 sqq. ]*
yAwoodKopov, -ov, 70, (for the earlier yAwoooxkopetoy or
yrwocokopiov [W. 24 (23), 94 (90); yet see Boeckh,
Corp. inserr. 2448, vili. 25, 31], fr. yAdooa and Kopéw to
tend); a. a case in which to keep the mouth-pieces of
wind instruments. b. asmall box for other uses also; esp.
a casket, purse to keep money in: Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 98 sq. (For ji78 a chest, 2 Chr. xxiv.
8, 10 sq.; Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 2; Plut., Longin., al.) *
yadets, -ews, 6, (also [earlier] kvadevs, fr. yvartw or
kvant@ to card), a fuller: Mk. ix. 3. (Hdt., Xen., and
sqq-; Sept. Is. vii. 3; xxxvi. 2; 2 K. xviii. 17.) *
yvijowos, -a, -ov, (by syncope for yernowos fr. yivopat,
yev-, [cf. Curtius § 128]), legitimately born, not spurious ;
genuine, true, sincere: Phil. iv. 3; 1 Tim. i. 2; Tit.i.4;
TO THS ayamns yunovov i. . THY yunaovornra [ A. V. the sin-
cerity |, 2 Co. viii. 8. (From Hom. down.) *
yvyoiws, adv., genuinely, faithfully, sincerely: Phil. ii.
20. [From Eur. down. ] *
yvsos, -ov, -6, (for the earlier [and poetic] dvodos,
akin to védos [so Bttm. Lexil. ii. 266; but see Curtius
pp: 704 sq. 706, ef. 535; Vanicek p. 1070]), darkness,
gloom: Heb. xii. 18. (Aristot. de mund. c. 2 fin. p. 392»,
12; Leian. de mort. Peregr. 43; Dio Chrys.; Sept. also
for 31) a cloud, Deut. iv. 11, ete. and for Dy, ‘ thick
cloud,’ Ex. xx. 21, etc.; [Trench § c.].) *
youn, -ns, 7, (fr. yuooKo) ; 1. the faculty of know-
ing, mind, reason. 2. that which is thought or known,
one’smind; a. view, judgment, opinion: 1 Co.i. 10; Rev.
xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done,
aa. by one’s self, resolve, purpose, intention: éyévero
youn (T Tr WH yrouns, see yivopa: 5 e. a.] rod troorpe-
ew, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230)]. bb. by others, judg-
ment, advice: §iSovar yyopuny, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40]; 2 Co. viii.
10. cc. decree: Rev. xvii. 17; yapis tis ons yv@pns,
without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in
Grk. writ.; [cef. Schmidt, ch. 13,9; Mey. on 1 Co. i. 10].) *
yopite; fut. yropicw (Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. vi. 21; Col.
iv. 7), Attic -@ (Col. iv. 9 [L WH -icw; B. 37 (82);
WH. App. p. 163]); laor. éyy@pica; Pass., [ pres. yvwpi-
Coua]; 1 aor. éeyywpicOnv; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
down [see ad fin.]; Sept. for yin and Chald. payn;
1. trans. to make known: ri, Ro. ix. 22 sq.3 ri tun, Lk.
iy sn. xv lowixval 263 Acts i. 28; \2\Co. vitist:
Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass. in these two exx.]; Eph. vi. 21;
Col. iv. 7,9; 2 Pet. i.16; riwvi rd pvornpov, Eph. i. 9;
iii. 3 [GLTTr WH read the pass.]; vi. 19; tui dre,
1 Co. xii. 3; Twi te, dre i. q. rwi dre Tt, Gal. i. 11; foll. by
ri interrog. Col. i. 27; mepi twos, Lk. ii. 17 LT Tr WH;
119
yvworTos
yropi{écOw mpos Tov Gedy be brought to the knowledge of
God, Phil. iv. 6; yuwpi¢erOat eis ravra ra €6yn to be made
known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26; contextually
and emphatically i. q. to recall to one’s mind, as though
what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xv. 1; with
acc. of pers. [(Plut. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to
become known, be recognized: Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. WH
txt. 2. intrans. to know: ri aipnoopat, ov yywpita, Phil.
i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate ri aip.; od yv.; some refer
this to 1 (R. V.mrg. I do not make known), cf. Mey. ad
loc. In earlier Grk. yrwpi¢w signifies either ‘to gain a
knowledge of,’ or ‘ to have thorough knowledge of.’ Its
later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found
only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487; cf. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287;
Bp. Leghtft. on Phil. lc. Comp.: dva-, dta~yvapite }.*
yao, -ews, 7, (ywaoko), [fr. Thuc. down], knowl-
edge: with gen. of the obj., owrnpias, Lk. i. 77; Tov
Oeov, the knowledge of God, such as is offered in the
gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul’s exposition of it, 2 Co.
x. 53 ths do€ns tov Oeov ev mpooar@ Xpiorod, 2 Co. iv. 6 ;
"Inoov Xporov, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8; 2 Pet.
iii. 18; with subj. gen. rod Aeov, the knowledge of things
which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. -yv@ats, by itself, sig-
nifies in general intelligence, understanding : Eph. iii. 19;
the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv.
14; 1 Co.i.5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged
knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more
advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8; xiii. 2,8; xiv. 6; 2Co. vi. 6; viii. 7;
xi. 6; esp. of things lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1
Co. viii. 1,7, 10 sq.; the higher knowledge of Christian
and divine things which false teachers boast of, yevdoru-
pos yvdats, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [ef. Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe,
p- 132 sq.]; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living,
2 Pet. i.5; and in intercourse with others : cata yvoouw,
wisely, 1 Pet. iii. 7. objective knowledge : what is known
concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20;
Col. ii. 3; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. xi.
52. Where yvaors and codia are used together the for-
mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the
latter wisdom as exhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1
Co. xii. 8; Col. ii. 3. [“yv. is simply intuitive, aog. is
ratiocinative also; yv. applies chiefly to the appre-
hension of truths, cod. superadds the power of reason-
ing about them and tracing their relations.” Bp. Lghtft.
on Col.1.c. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro.
l. c.), “-yv. perspicientia veri, cop. sapientia aut mentis
sollertia, que cognita intellectaque veritate utatur, ut res
efficiendas efficiat.”” Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. c.) nearly re-
verses Lehtft.’s distinction ; elsewhere, however (e. g. on
Col. l. c., ef. i. 9), he and others regard cod. merely as
the more general, yv. as the more restricted and special
term. Cf. Lehtft. u. s.; Trench § lxxv.]*
yaeorns, -ov, 6, (a knower), an expert; a connoisseur :
Acts xxvi. 3. (Plut. Flam. c. 4; Oeds 6 trav xpurrav
yvoorns, Hist. Sus. vs. 42; of those who divine the future,
{OSs -xcevalis) 3,95 etc.) i>
ywords, -7, -ov, known: Acts ix. 423; revi, Jn. xviii. 15
sq.; Actsi.19; xv.18 RL; xix.17; xxviii. 22; yvoorop
yoyyuto
€or vpiv be it known to you: Acts ii. 14; iv. 10; xiii. 38;
xxviii. 28; contextually, notable, Acts iv. 16; yvwordr
motecy to make known, disclose: Acts xv. 17 sq. GT Tr
WH [al. construe yvwor. as pred. of ratdra: R. V. mrg.
who doeth these things which were known; cf. Mey. ad
loc.]. 1d yvwordv tod Geov, either that which may be
known of God, or i. q. ywaots rod Geov, for both come to
the same thing: Ro. i. 19; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. and W.
235 (220), [and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. oi
yrooroi acquaintance, intimates, (Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 12;
[Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 9,19]; Neh. v.10): LK. ii. 44 ; xxiii.
49. (In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
yoyy*{o ; impf. éydyyufov; 1 aor. éyoyyvoa; to murmur,
mutter, grumble, say anything in a low tone, (ace. to Pollux
and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the
rovOputw and rovdopv¢w of the more elegant Grk. writ. ;
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 358 ; [W. 22; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
ii. 14]); hence of those who confer together secretly, ri
mepi twos, Jn. vii. 32; of those who discontentedly com-
plain: 1 Co. x. 10; mpos twa, Lk. v. 30; per’ adAnrovr,
Jn. vi. 43; ward twos, Mt. xx. 11; mepé tivos, Jn. vi. 41,
61. (Sept.; Antonin. 2,3; Epict. diss. 1, 29, 55; 4, 1,
79; [al.].) [Comp.: d1a- yoyyiga. ] *
yoyyvapes, -ov, 6, (yoyyu¢w, q. V-), @ murmur, murmur-
ing, muttering; applied to a. secret debate: mepi tivos,
Jn. vii. 12. b. secret displeasure, not openly avowed:
mpos twa, Acts vi. 1; in plur. yapis or dvev yoyyvopev
without querulous discontent, without murmurings, i. e.
with a cheerful and willing mind, Phil. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iv.
9 (where L T Tr WH read the sing.). (Ex. xvi. 7 sqq. ;
Sap. i. 10 sq. ; Antonin. 9, 37.) *
yoyyverts, -ov, 6, a murmurer, (Vulg., Augustine, mur-
murator), one who discontentedly complains (against
God; for peuyyiporpor is added): Jude 16. [ Prov. xxvi.
21 Theod., 22 Symm.; xxvi. 20, 22 Graec. Ven.]*
y6ns, -nTos, 6, (yodaw to bewail, howl) ; 1. a wailer,
howler: Aeschyl. choéph. 823 [Hermann et al. yonrns ].
2. a juggler, enchanter, (because incantations used to be
uttered in a kind of howl). 3. a deceiver, impostor :
2 Tim. iii. 13; (Hdt., Eur., Plat., and subseq. writ.).*
Todyoda [Tr WH, or -6a R G LT (see Tdf. Proleg.
p. 102; Kautzsch p. 10); also-o6 L WH mrg. in Jn. xix.
17; ace. -av Tdf. in Mk. xv. 22 (WH -ay, see their App.
p- 160), elsewhere indecl., W. 61 (60) ], Golgotha, Chald.
87292, Heb. naa (fr. 553 to roll), i. e. xpaviov, a skuil
(Lat. calvaria], the name of a place outside of Jerusa-
lem where Jesus was crucified; so called, apparently,
because its form resembled a skull: Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk.
xv. 22; Jn. xix.17. Cf. Tobler, Goleatha. St. Gall. 1851 ;
Furrer in Schenkel ii. 506 sqq.; Keim, Jesus von Naz.
iii. 404 sq.; [Porter in Alex.’s Kittos. v.; F. Howe, The
true Site of Calvary, N. Y., 1871].*
Tépoppa. [or Popoppa, cf. Chandler § 167 ], -as, 7, and -wv,
ra, (cf. B. 18 (16); Zdf. Proleg. p. 116; WH. App. p.
156], Gomorrah, (179), cf. 717 Gaza), the name of a city
in the eastern part of Judaa, destroyed by the same earth-
quake (cf. B. D.s. v. Sea, The Salt] with Sodom and its
neighbor cities: Gen. xix. 24. Their site is now occu-
120
ypappa
pied by the Asphaltic Lake or Dead Sea [ef. BB. DD.
s. vv. Gomorrah and Sodom]: Mt. x. 15; Mk. vi. 11 RL
in br.; Ro. ix. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 6; Jude 7.*
Yop0s, -ov, 6, (yew); a. the lading or freight of a ship,
cargo, merchandise conveyed ina ship: Acts xxi. 3, (Hat.
1,194; [Aeschyl.], Dem., al.; [in Sept. the load of a
beast of burden, Ex. xxiii.5; 2 K.v.17]). b. any mer-
chandise: Rev. xviii. 11 sq.*
yovels, -€ws, 6, (TENQ, yéyova), [Hom. h. Cer., Hes.,
al.]; a begetter, parent; plur. of yoveis the parents: Lk. ii.
41,43 Ltxt. T Tr WH; [viii. 56]; xxi.16; Jn. ix. 2, 3,
20, 22, 23; 2Co. xii.14; Ro.i.30; Eph. vi.1; Col. iii.
20; 2 Tim. iii. 2; acc. plur. yoveis: Mt. x. 21; [xix. 29
Lehm. mrg.]; Lk. ii. 27; [xviii. 29]; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn.
ix. 18]; on this form cf. W. § 9, 2; [B. 14 (13)].*
y6vvu, yovaros, To, [fr. Hom. down], the knee: Heb. xii.
12; teOévae ta yovata to bend the knees, kneel down, of
persons supplicating: Lk. xxii. 41; Acts vii. 60; ix. 40;
xx. 86; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so
also mpoominrey trois yévaci twos, Lk. v. 8 (of a suppliant
in Eur. Or. 1332); xdymrew ra ydvara to bow the knee, of
those worshipping God or Christ: rwi, Ro. xi. 4; mpds
twa, Eph. iii. 14; reflexively, yévu xaymrec revi, to i.e. in
honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; év dvdpare Inood,
Phil. ii. 10 (Is. xlv. 23).*
yovuteréw, -@; 1 aor. ptcp. yovumernoas; (yovurerns,
and this fr. yévu and TIETQ i. q. mimrw) ; to fall on the
knees, the act of one imploring aid, and of one express-
ing reverence and honor: tui, Mt. xvii. 14 Rec.; twa,
ibid.G LT Tr WH; Mk.i.40 RG Tr txt. br. WH br.; x.
17; cf. W. 210 (197); [B. 147 sq. (129)]; é€umpoobev
twos, Mt. xxvii. 29. (Polyb., Heliod.; eccl. writ.) *
ypappa, -ros, To, (ypadw), that which has been written ;
1. a letter i. e. the character: Lk. xxiii. 38 [R G Lbr. Tr
mrg. br.]; Gal. vi. 11. 2. any writing, a document or
record; a. a note of hand, bill, bond, account, written ac-
knowledgment of debt, (as scriptio in Varr. sat. Men. 8, 1
[cf. Edersheim ii. 268 sqq.]): Lk. xvi. 6 sq. (Joseph.
antt. 18, 6,3], in Ltxt. T Tr WH plur. ra ypdppara; so
of one document also in Antiph. p. 114, (30); Dem. p.
1034, 16; Vulg. cautio). b. a letter, an epistle: Acts
XXvili. 21; (Hdt. 5, 14; Thue. 8, 50; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,
26, ete.). C. Ta iepa ypappara the sacred writings (of the
O. T.; [so Joseph. antt. prooem. § 3; 10, 10,4 fin.; c. Ap.
1,10; Philo, de vit. Moys. 3, 39; de praem. et poen. § 14;
leg. ad Gai. § 29, ete.— but always ra i. y.]): 2 Tim. iii. 15
[here TWH om. L Tr br. ra]; ypdaupa i. q. the written
law of Moses, Ro. ii. 27; Matcéws ypdppara, Jn. v. 47.
Since the Jews so clave to the letter of the law that
it not only became to them a mere letter but also a hin-
drance to true religion, Paul calls it ypaupa in a disparag-
ing sense, and contrasts it with 7d mvevya i. e. the divine
Spirit, whether operative in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 29,
or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro.
vii. 6; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7RGT WH read the
plur. written in letters, so Lmrg. Tr mrg.]. 3. Ta
ypappara, like the Lat. litterae, Eng. letters, i.q. learning :
Acts xxvi. 24; eid€évai, peuabnxévar yp. (cf. Germ. studirt
ypapparevs
haben), of sacred learning, Jn. vii. 15. (pavOdvew, émiora-
cat, etc., ypdppata are used by the Greeks of the rudi-
ments of learning; cf. Passow i. p. 571; [L. and S. s. v.
Tsta.}:)*
ypappareds, -ews, (acc. plur. -eis, W. § 9, 2; [B. 14
(13)]), 6, (ypappa), Sept. for 19D and ww; 1. in
prof. auth. and here and there in the O. T. [e. g. 2S.
wii hy ¢xx.125'3)2 Ki. xix.'2') xxv. 19; Ps. xliv. (alv.) 2],
a clerk, scribe, esp. a public scribe, secretary, recorder,
whose office and influence differed in different states:
Acts xix. 35, (Sir. x. 5); [ef. Lghtft. in The Contemp.
Rev. for 1878, p. 294; Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
App. Inserr. fr. the Great Theatre, p. 49 n.]. 2. in
the Bible, a man learned in the Mosaic law and in the
sacred writings, an interpreter, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 34; 1
Co. i. 20, (called also vourxds in Lk. x. 25, and vopodida-
oxados in Lk. v.17; [Meyer (on Mt. xxii. 35), while deny-
ing any essential diff. betw. ypayparevs and vouixds
(cf. Lk. xi. 52, 53 — yet see crit. txts.), regards the latter
name as the more specific (a jurisconsult) and Classic,
yp: as the more general (a learned man) and Hebraistic ;
it is also the more common in the Apocr., where vou.
occurs only 4 Mace. v. 3. As teachers they were called
vopodidackarto. Cf. B. D. s. v. Lawyer, also s.v. Scribes
I. 1 note]); Jer. viii. 8 (cf. ii. 8); Neh. viii. 1 sq.; xii.
26, 36; 2 Esdr. vii. 6, 11, and esp. Sir. xxxviii. 24, 31
sqq.; xxxix. 1-11. The ypaypareis explained the mean-
ing of the sacred oracles, Mt. ii. 4 [yp. rod Aaod, Josh. i. 10;
1 Mace. v. 42; cf. Sir. xliv. 4]; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 115 xii.
35; examined into the more difficult and subtile ques-
tions of the law, Mt. ix.3; Mk. ii. 6 sq.; xii. 28; added
to the Mosaic law decisions of various kinds thought to
elucidate its meaning and scope, and did this to the detri-
ment of religion, Mt. v. 20; xv. 1 sqq.; xxiii. 2 sqq.; Mk.
vii. 1 sqq.; ef. Lk. xi. 46. Since the advice of men skilled
in the law was needed in the examination of causes and
the solution of difficult questions, they were enrolled in
the Sanhedrin; and accordingly in the N. T. they are
often mentioned in connection with the priests and elders
of the people: Mt. xxi. 15; xxvi.3 RG; Mk. xi. 18, 27;
Beene eve ei eke xin, 47 sex. 1s ex 2.) NCE Schirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 25 ii.; Alépper in Schenkel v. 247
sqq.; [and thorough articles in BB.DD. s. v. Scribes; cf.
W. Robertson Smith, The O. T. in the Jewish Ch., Lect.
iii. J. 3. univ. a religious teacher: ypappareds pabnrev-
Geis cis anv Bao. Toy ovp. a teacher so instructed that
from his learning and ability to teach advantage may
redound to the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xiii. 52 [but GT
Tr WH read pad. 77 Bacwdeia (L ev tr. 8.); and many in-
terpret made a disciple unto the k. of h. (which is person-
ified); see uabnreva, fin. }.
ypamrds, -7, -dv, written: Ro. ii.15. [Gorg. apol. Palam.
p- 190 sub fin. ; Sept.; al.]*
ypaby, -7s, 7, (ypape, cf. yAuvpy and yAigpw); a. a
writing, thing written, [fr. Soph. down] : raaa ypagn every
scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; plur. ypadai
&ya, holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the O. T.),
Ro. i. 2; mpodnrixai, Ro. xvi. 26 ; ai ypadhai trav mpodnrar,
121
ypadw
Mt. xxvi. 56. b. 9 ypadn, the Scripture car eEoxnv, the
holy scripture (of the O. T.), — and used to denote either
the book itself, or its contents [some would restrict the
sing. ypapn always to a particular passage; see Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 22]: Jn. vii. 38; x. 35; Acts viii. 32;
Owlve 8 5) Galeiine 22s) iva sO)eJasvaieo lekeetiiGr sD
Pet. i. 20; also in plur. ai ypapai: Mt. xxi. 42; xxvi. 54;
Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xxiv. 27; Jn. v. 39; Acts xvii. 2, 11;
xviii. 24, 28; 1 Co. xv.3 sq.; once ai ypapai comprehends
also the books of the N.'T. already begun to be collected
into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by meton. 7 ypadn is used
for God speaking in it: Ro. ix.17; Gal. iv.30; 9 ypapn
is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in
Gal. iii.8. eidévar ras ypadas, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii. 24;
ouvmevat, Lk. xxiv. 45. ©. a certain portion or section of
holy Scripture: Mk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21; Jn. xix. 37; Acts
i. 16. [Cf. B.D. s. v. Scripture. ]
ypadw; [impf. ¢ypadov]; fut. ypayw; 1 aor. éypawa;
pf. yeypapa; Pass., [pres. ypddopuac]; pf. yéypappat ;
[plpf. 3 pers. sing. eyéypanro, Rev. xvii. 8 Lehm.]; 2
aor. eypadny; (prop. to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave ;
ef. Germ. graben, eingraben; ypaev 8€ of doréov cixpis
aiypn, Hom. Il. 17, 599; onpara ypawas €v mivaxi, ib. 6,
169; hence to draw letters), to write; 1. with reference
to the form of the letters; to delineate (or form) letters
on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material: r@ da-
KTUA® €ypager eis THY ynv made figures on the ground, Jn.
viii. 6 Rec. ; ovr@ ypdpw so am I accustomed to form my
letters, 2 Thess. iii. 17; mndtxows ypdppace éypaya with
how large (and so, ill-formed [?]) letters I have written,
Gal. vi. 11; cf. Winer, Riickert, Hilgenfeld ad loc. [for
the views of those who regard éyp. as covering the close
of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey.; ef. W. 278
(261); B. 198 (171 sq.) ]. 2. with reference to the
contentsof the writing; a. to express in written char-
acters, foll. by the words expressed: ¢ypawe héyov: "lady-
vns €oTt TO dvopa avtov, Lk. i. 63; pn ypade: 6 Bacwdreds
Tov “lovdaiov xrrd. Jn. xix. 21; ypayov: paxadpuor kr.
Rev. xiv. 13. ypade m1, Jn. xix. 22; pass. Rev. i. 35 ti
emt Tt, Rey. il. 17; xix. 163 ri emi rua, iii. 12; esi twos,
xiv. 1. b. to commit to writing (things not to be for-
gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 (ypawov a eides) ;
x. 4; ypddew eis BiBdXiov, Rev. i. 115 emt rd BuBAlov rhs
Cons, Rev. xvii. 8; yeypapu. ev T. BiBAi@ [Lor tH BiBAr@], ev
rots BuBAtots, Rev. xiii. 8; xx. 12,15; xxi. 27; xxii. 18,
19; ra ovopara ipav eypadn [év-(ey- Tr see N,v) yeyp.T Tr
WH] ev rois ovpavois, i.e. that ye have been enrolled
with those for whom eternal blessedness has been pre-
pared, Lk. x. 20; ypapew ri rev, to record something for
some one’s use, Lk.i.3. c. eypadn and yéypamra: (in the
Synoptists and Paul), and yeypaupevoy eori (in John),
are used of those things which stand written in the sacred
books (of the O. T.); absol. yéypamrat, foll. by the quo-
tation fr. the sacred vol.: Mt. iv. 4, 6 sq. 10; xxi. 13;
Mk. vii. 6; xi. 17; xiv. 27; Lk. iv. 8; xix. 46; xados
yeypanra, Acts xv. 15, very often in Paul, as Ro. i. 17;
ii. 24; iii. 4 [see below]; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 9; 2 Co. viii. 15;
ix. 9; xaOdmep yeyp. Ro. xi. 8 T Tr WH; [iii. 4 T Tr
ypacons
WH]; yeyparra yap, Mt. xxvi. 31; Lk. iv. 10; Acts
ARI Osho, xi. 19> xivs 115 Colm ocyGalen 0,13
Ree. ; iv. 22, 27; 6 Noyos 6 yeypappevos, 1 Co. xv. 54; Kara
rd yeypaupevor, 2 Co. iv. 13; yeypaypevoy éori, Jn. ii. 17;
vi. 31; xii. 14; eypadn d€ mpds vovbeciay nua, 1 Co. x.
11; éeypddn Sv qyas for our sake, Ro. iv. 24; 1 Co. ix. 10;
with the name of the author of the written words or of
the books in which they are found: yeypamra: év BiBo
Wadpor, Acts i. 20; ev BiBA@ trav mpopnrar, Acts Vii. 42;
ev t@ mpata [R WH Sevrepo] Wadpo, Acts xiii. 33; ev
‘Hoaia, Mk. i. 2 [not Ree.], ete. rua or ri to write of i. e.
in writing to mention or refer to a person or a thing: dy
€ypaye Movons whom Moses had in mind in writing of
the Messiah, or whose likeness Moses delineated, Jn. i.
45 (46); Maitons ypaper tiv Stxaoov'vny tiv €k vopou,
Moses, writing the words 67 6 mouoas adta xKTX., points
out the righteousness which is of the law, Ro. x. 5. ye-
ypanrar, ypadewv, etc. mepi tivos, concerning one: Mt.
xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Jn. v. 46; Acts xiii. 29; émit rov
viov Tod avOpearov, that it should find fulfilment in him,
Mk. ix. 12 sq. [ef. iva, I. 2b.]; em adre, on him i. e. of
him (cf. W. 393 (368) [and emi, B. 2 f. B.]), Jn. xii. 16;
Ta yeypaupeva TO via TOU avOp. written for him, allotted
to him in Scripture, i. e. to be accomplished in his ca-
reer, LK. xviii. 31; cf. W. §31, 4; [yet ef. B. 178 (154) ];
Mwions éypavvev tpiv iva ete. Moses in the Scripture com-
manded us that ete. [ef. B. 237 (204)], Mk. xii. 19; Lk.
xx. 28. d. ypadew twi to write to one i. e. by writing (in
a written epistle) to give information, directions, ete. to
one: Ro. xv. 15; 2 Co. ii. 4, 9 [dat. implied]; vii. 12;
Philem. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 15; 1 Jn. ii. 12 sqq.; 80 odtyor, 1
Pet. v. 12; dca weAavos kal kaddpov, 3 Jn. 13; foll. by the
words written or to be written in the letter: Acts xv.
23; Rev. ii. 1,8, 12,18; iii. 1, 7,14; ypadew rei 71, 1 Co.
xiv. 37; 2 Co.i. 13; ii.3 [LT Tr WH om. the dat.]; Gal.
i. 20; 1 Tim. iii. 14; 1 Jn.i.4 [RGU]; ii. 1; wepé rivos,
1 Juni 26; Acts xmy./26'3 2: Cosixs 1s: 1 Dhaive9isay. 1s
Jude 3; da xerpds Twos, to send a letter by one, Acts xv.
23 [see xeip]; ypadpew rwi, foll. by an inf., by letter to
bid one do a thing, Acts xviii. 27; foll. by py with inf.
(to forbid, write one not to ete.), 1 Co. v. 9, 11. 3.
to fill with writing, (Germ. beschreiben) : BuBdiov yeypap-
pevov €owbev Kat dmicbev a volume written within and be-
hind, on the back, hence on both sides, Rev. v. 1 (Ezek.
ii. 10); ef. Diisterdieck, [ Alford, al.] ad loc. 4. to
draw up in writing, compose : BiBdiov, Mk. x. 4; Jn. xxi.
25 [Tdf. om. the vs.; see WH. App. ad loc.]; ritAov, Jn.
xix. 19; éemoroAnv, Acts xxiii. 25; 2 Pet. ili. 1; évroAnv
tut to write a commandment to one, Mk. x. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 7
sq-; 2Jn.5. [Comp.: dro-, éy-, émt-, xara-, mpo-ypade. |
ypaebns, -es, (fr. ypaids an old woman, and eidos), old-
womanish, anile, [ A. V. old wives’]: 1 Tim. iv. 7. (Strabo
1 p. 32 [p. 44 ed. Sieben.]; Galen; al.) *
Yenyopew, -G; 1 aor. eypyydpnaa; (fr. eypyyopa, to have
been roused from sleep, to be awake, pf. of éyeipw; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 118 sq.; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 158;
[W. 26 (25); 92 (88)]); to watch; 1. prop: Mt.
xxiv. 43; xxvi. 38,40; Mk. xiii. 34; xiv. 34, 37; Lk. xii.
Y22
yupvorns
37, 39 RGL Trtxt. WH txt. As to sleep is often i. q.
to die, so once, 1 Th. v. 10, ypny. means to live, be alive
on earth. 2. Metaph. to watch i.e. give strict attention
to, be cautious, active :— to take heed lest through remiss-
ness and indolence some destructive calamity suddenly
overtake one, Mt. xxiv. 42; xxv. 13; Mk. xiii. 35, [37];
Rey. xvi. 15; or lest one be led to forsake Christ, Mt.
xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; or lest one fall into sin, 1 Th. v.
6; 1 Co. xvi. 13; 1 Pet. v. 8; Rev. iii. 2 sq-; or be cor-
rupted by errors, Acts xx. 31; év ran, to be watchful in,
employ the most punctilious care in a thing: Col. iv. 2.
(Sept.; [Bar. ii. 9; 1 Mace. xii. 27; Aristot. plant. 1, 2
p- 816°, 29.37]; Joseph. antt.11,3,4; Achill. Tat. ; al.)
[SYN. see dypumvéw. Comp.: d1a- ypnyopéw. ]*
yuuvatw; [pf. pass. ptep. yeyupvacpevos]; (yupvds) ;
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. prop. to ex-
ercise naked (in the palestra). 2. to exercise vigor-
ously, in any way, either the body or the mind: éavrév
mpos evoeBevav, of one who strives earnestly to become
godly, 1 Tim. iv. 7: yeyupvacpevos exercised, Heb. v. 14;
xii. 11; kapdiav yeyupy. mreoveEias (Rec. mrcoveéias), a
soul that covetousness or the love of gain has trained in
its crafty ways, 2 Pet. ii. 14; cf. W. § 30, 4.*
yupvacia, -as, 7, (yuuvat); a. prop. the exercise of
the body in the palestra. b. any exercise whatever:
TwpatiKy yuuvacia, the exercise of conscientiousness rel-
ative to the body, such as is characteristic of ascetics
and consists in abstinence from matrimony and certain
kinds of food, 1 Tim. iv. 8. (4 Mace. xi. 19. In Grk.
writ. fr. Plat. legg. i. p. 648 c. down.) *
yupvytevo (yupvirevo na De WEL: ick ad ay: Proleg.
p- 81; W. 92 (88)]); (yupunrns); [A. V. literally to be
naked i. e.] to be lightly or poorly clad: 1Co.iv.11. (So
in Dio Chrys. 25, 3 and other later writ.; to be a light-
armed soldier, Plut. Aem. 16; Dio Cass. 47, 34, 2.) *
yupvés, -7, -dv, in Sept. for DV and Dp, naked, not
covered ; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing: Mk.
xiv. 52; Rev. iii. 17; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; 7d yupvov, sub-
stantively, the naked body: émt yupvod, Mk. xiv. 51; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.; (ra yupvd, Leian. nav. 33). b. ill-
clad: Mt. xxv. 36, 38, 43 sq.; Acts xix. 16 (with torn
garments); Jas. ii. 15; (Job xxii. 6; xxiv. 10; xxvi. 6).
c. clad in the undergarment only (the outer garment or
cloak being laid aside): Jn. xxi. 7; (1 S. xix. 24; Is. xx.
2; Hes. opp. 389; often in Attic; so nudus, Verg. Georg.
ae 991) d. of the soul, whose garment is the body,
stript of the body, without a body: 2 Co. v. 3, (Plat. Crat.
c. 20 p. 408 b. 9 Wux7) yupvt) TOU TapaTos). 2. metaph.
a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare: Heb. iv. 13, (yupvds 6 adns
évariov avtov, Job xxvi. 6; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 585). b. only, mere, bare, i. q.
WiArds (like Lat. nudus) : yupvds Koxkos, mere grain, not
the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5
onéppata Trecovta eis THY yay Enpa kal yupva dcadverat).*
yupverns, -nros, 7, (yupvos), nakedness: of the body,
Rev. iii. 18 (see aioytvn, 3); used of want of clothing,
Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin.
11, 27.)*
yuvarKkapLov
yuvarkdptoy, -ov, To, (dimin. fr. yuv7n), a little woman ;
used contemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. 6 [A. V. silly women ;
ef. Lat. muliercula}]. (Diocles. com. in Bekk. Anecd. p.
87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occasionally in Epictet.) On
dimin. ending in apiov see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; Fritz-
sche on Mk. p. 638; [ef. W. 24, 96 (91) ].*
yevaiketos, -ela, -eiov, of or belonging to a woman, femi-
nine, female: 1 Pet. iii. 7. (From Hom. down; Sept.) *
yevt}, -aikos, 7; 1. univ. a woman of any age, wheth-
er a virgin, or married, or a widow: Mt. ix. 20; xiii. 33;
xxvii. 55; Lk. xiii. 11; Acts v. 14, ete.; 7 peyynoreupevn
rut yun, Lk. ii. 5 RG; 7 vravdpos yun, Ro. vii. 2 5 -yurn
xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua,
Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq.;
Eph. v. 22, ete. ; yuvn twos, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xix. 3,5; Acts
Wodear 5 1 Co. viin 2; Eph. vy. 28; Rev. 11::20,iG.L WH
mrg.|, ete. of a betrothed woman: Mt. i. 20, 24. 9 yur
Tov matpos his step-mother : 1 Co. v. 1 (AN NwWK, Lev. xviii.
8). éyew yuvaixa: Mt. xiv.4; xxii. 28; Mk. vi. 18; xii.
23; Lk. xx. 33; see éyo, I. 2b. fin. ydvat, as a form of
address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii.
57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and
favor, Lk. xiii. 12; Jn. iv. 215 or in respect, Jn. ii. 4;
xix. 26, (as in Hom. Il. 3, 204; Od. 19, 221; Joseph. antt.
1, 16, 3).
123
Oalpoviov
Téy, 6, (414), indecl. prop. name, Gog, king of the land
of Magog [q. v. in BB.DD.], who it is said in Ezek.
XXXviii. sq. will come from the remote north, with innu-
merable hosts of his own nation as well as of allies, and
will attack the people of Israel, reéstablished after the
exile; but by divine interposition he will be utterly de-
stroyed. Hence in Rev. xx. 8 sq. 6 Tey and 6 Maywy
are used collectively to designate the nations that at the
close of the millennial reign, instigated by Satan, will
break forth from the four quarters of the earth against
the Messiah’s kingdom, but will be destroyed by fire
from heaven.*
yovia, -as, 7, [fr. Hdt. down], an angle, i.e. a. an
external angle, corner (Germ. Ecke): rév rarevov, Mt.
vi. 5; Kesbadr ywvias, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx.
17; Actsiv.11; 1 Pet. ii. 7,(735 ws, Ps. cxvii. (exviii.)
22), the head of the corner, i. e. the corner-stone, (axpo-
youaios, q. V-); ai tTéooapes ywvia ths ys, the four ex-
treme limits of the earth, Rev. vii. 1; xx. 8. b. like
Germ. Winkel, Lat. angulus, Eng. (internal) corner,
i. q. a secret place: Acts xxvi. 26, (so Plat. Gorg. p. 485 d.
Biov Bi@va ev ywvia, Epict. diss. 2, 12,17; [for other ex-
amples see Wetstein on Acts |. c.; Stallbaum on Plato
en) =
A
Aafis (the form in Rec. after the more recent codd.
[minuscules, ef. Tdf. on Mt. i. 1, and Treg. on Lk. iii.
31]), Aavid (Grsb., Schott, Knapp, Theile, al.), and Aav-
ei6 (L T Tr WH [on the e see WH. App. p. 155 and
s.v. e4,¢]; cf. W.p.44; Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 538;
in Joseph. [antt. 6, 8,1 sqq. also Nicol. of Damase. fr. 31 p.
114] Aavidns, -ov), 6, (117, and esp. after the exile 11,
[i. e. beloved]), David, indecl. name of by far the most
celebrated king of the Israelites: Mt. i. 1, 6,17, ete. 4
oxnyy A. Acts xv. 16; 7 Kelis Tou A. Rev. iii. 7; 6 Opovos
A. Lk. i. 32; é vids A., a name of the Messiah, viz. the
descendant of David and heir to his throne (see vids,
1 b.); 7 pi¢a A. the offspring of David, Rev. v. 5; xxii.
16; 7 Baowdeia rou A. Mk. xi. 10 (see Bacureia, 3); &v
Aavié, in the book of the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [al.
take it personally, cf. i. 1 sq.; yet see év, I. 1 d.].
Saipovifopar; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. Sayovcbeis; (Salyer) ;
to be under the power of a demon: ddXos Kar’ GAAnv Saipo-
vi¢erat tdxnv, Philem. in Stob. ecl. phys. 1 p. 196; of
the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth.
In the N. T. Sapontépuevor are persons afflicted with
especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such
as paralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilepsy,
melancholy, insanity, ete.), whose bodies in the opinion
of the Jews demons (see Saiuovov) had entered, and so
held possession of them as not only to afflict them with
ills, but also to dethrone the reason and take its place
themselves; accordingly the possessed were wont to ex-
press the mind and consciousness of the demons dwell-
ing in them; and their cure was thought to require the
expulsion of the demon —[but on this subject see B.D.
Am. ed. s. v. Demoniacs and reff. there; Weiss, Leben
Jesu bk. iii. ch. 6]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16, 28,33; ix. 32;
Mil 223 Kvn 22s Mkoin382s vi ld sq} Jn: x1 2Ue Cage
vuobeis, that had been possessed by a demon [demons],
Mk. v.18; Lk. viii. 36. They are said also to be dxAov-
pevot bro OY amd Tvevpatey axabdprov, Lk. vi. 18 [T Tr
WH evoyd.]; Acts v. 16; xaraduvacrevopevor td Tod dia-
Bodov i. e. by his ministers, the demons, Acts x. 38.*
Saipdvioy, -ov, Td, (neut. of adj. Sarwomos, -a, -ov, divine,
fr. daiuwv; equiv. to 7d Geiov) ; 1. the divine Power,
deity, divinity; so sometimes in prof. auth. as Joseph.
b. j. 1, 2,8; Ael. v. h. 12, 57; in plur. cxawa Saipona,
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1 sq., and once in the N. T. £éva dauyd-
ua, Acts xvii. 18. 2. a spirit, a being inferior to God,
superior to men [mav ro Saypomov pera&v é€ott Oeod Te Kat
datpoviemdns
@vnrod, Plat. symp. 23 p. 202 e. (where see Stallbaum)],
in both a good sense and a bad; thus Jesus, after his
resurrection, said to his disciples ov« eiui daydmov ava-
parov, as Ionat. (ad Smyrn. 3, 2) records it; mvevpa
Satnoviov dxaddprov (gen. of apposition), Lk. iv. 33;
(rovnpov, Tob. iii. 8,17; Satudvioy 4 mvedpa mrovnpdr, ibid.
vi. 8). But elsewhere in the Scriptures used, without
an adjunct, of evil spirits or the messengers and ministers
of the devil [W. 23 (22)]: Lk. iv. 35; ix. 1, 42; x. 17;
Jn. x. 21; Jas. ii. 19; (Ps. xc. (xci.) 6; Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv.
14; Tob. vi. 18; viii. 3; Bar. iv. 35); mvedpara Sapoviar
(Rec. Sadvev) i.e. of that rank of spirits that are
demons (gen. of appos.), Rev. xvi. 14; dpywv rev daipo-
viev, the prince of the demons, or the devil: Mt. ix. 34;
xii. 24; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15; they are said elaépyeoOat
eis twa, to enter into (the body of) one to vex him with
diseases (see Sauovitouar): Lk. viii. 30, 32 sq.; €«BAn-
Ojva and e&€pxecOat €k rivos Or amo twos, when they are
forced to come out of one to restore him to health: Mt.
ix. 33; xvii. 18; Mk. vii. 29, 30; Lk. iv. 35,41; viii. 2,
33,35. eéexBadAevv Satudma, is used of those who compel
demons to come out: Mt. vii. 22; xii. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 34,
39; Lk. ix. 49, ete. yew daydmov, to have a demon, be
possessed by a demon, is said of those who either suffer
from some exceptionally severe disease, Lk. iv. 33; viii.
27 (ex. Sayudva) ; or act and speak as though they were
mad, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. vii. 20; vill. 48 sq. 52;
x. 20. According to a Jewish opinion which passed
over to the Christians, the demons are the gods of the
Gentiles and the authors of idolatry; hence damova
stands for oD oN Ps. xev. (xevi.) 5, and ow Deut.
xxxii. 17; Ps. ev. (evi.) 37, cf. Bar. iv. 7: mpookvveiv ra
daiudma Kat Ta €idwda, Rev. ix. 20. The apostle Paul,
though teaching that the gods of the Gentiles are a fiction
(1 Co. viii. 4; x. 19), thinks that the conception of them
has been put into the minds of men by demons, who
appropriate to their own use and honor the sacrifices
offered tv idols. Hence what the Gentiles @vovct, he
says Saipoviors Ovovaw Kai ov Ged, 1 Co. x. 20 (fr. the
Sept. of Deut. xxxii. 17, cf. Bar. iv. 7), and those who
frequent the sacrificial feasts of the Gentiles come into
fellowship with demons, 1 Co. x. 20 sq.; [ef. Baudissin,
Stud. zur semit. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (St. ii. 4) p. 110
sqq-]. Pernicious errors are disseminated by demons
even among Christians, seducing them from the truth,
1 Tim.iv.1. Josephus also makes mention of Sapoma
taking possession of men, antt. 6, 11, 2 sq.; 6, 8, 2; 8,
2,5; but he sees in them, not as the N. T. writers do,
bad angels, but the spirits of wicked men deceased, b. j.
R698:
SarpowdSns, -es, (Saysduov, q. V., and eidos), resembling
or proceeding from an evil spirit, demon-like: Jas. iii. 15.
[Schol. Arstph. ran. 295; Ps. xc. 6 Symm. ] *
Salpewv, -ovos, 6, 7); 1. in Grk. auth. a god, a god-
dess; an inferior deity, whether good or bad; hence
dyabodaipoves and xaxodaivoves are distinguished [cf. W.
23 (22)]. 2. Inthe N. T. an evil spirit (see Sapdmor,
2): Mt. viii. 31; Mk. v.12 [RL]; Lk. viii. 29 [RGL
124
Aapacknvos
mrg.]; Rev. xvi. 14 (Rec.); xviii. 2 (where LT Tr WH
daipoviwv). [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Demon; cf. da
poviCopat. | *
Sdaxvw; tobite; a. prop. withthe teeth. b. metaph.
to wound the soul, cut, lacerate, rend with reproaches:
Gal. v. 15. So even in Hom. Il. 5, 493 piOos Sdxe
gppevas, Menand. ap. Athen. 12, 77 p. 552 e., and times
without number in other auth.*
Saxpv, -vos, Td, and ro Sdxpvov, -ov, [fr. Hom. down],
a tear: Mk. ix. 24 RG; Acts xx.19,31; 2Co.ii.4; 2
Tim. i.4; Heb. v.7; xii.17. The (nom.) form rd 6a-
kpvoyv in Rev. vii. 17; xxi. 4, (Is. xxv. 8). dat. plur.
daxpvor in Lk. vii. 38, 44, (Ps. exxy. (exxvi.) 5; Lam.
RS
Saxptw: 1 aor. eddxpvoa; to weep, shed tears: Jn. xi.
35. [From Hom. down. Syn. see kalo, fin.]*
SaxrvALos, -ov, 6, (fr. daxrvAos, because decorating the
fingers), a ring: Lk. xv. 22. (From Hdt. down.) *
SaxTuXos, -ov, 6, [fr. Batrach. 45 and Hdt. down], a
finger: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xi. 46; xvi. 24; Mk. vii. 33;
Jn. viii. 6 Rec.; xx. 25,27; év daxrvA@ Geod, by the power
of God, divine efliciency by which something is made
visible to men, Lk. xi. 20 (Mt. xii. 28 év mvevpate Oeou) ;
Ex. viii. 19, [cf. xxxi. 18; Ps. viii. 4].*
Aadpavovda [on the accent cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103], n,
Dalmanutha, the name of a little town or village not far
from Magdala [better Magadan (q. v.) ], or lying within
its territory: Mk. viii. 10 (cf. Mt. xv. 39), see Fritzsche
ad loc. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.].. Derivation of the name
uncertain; cf. Keim ii. 528 [(Eng. trans. iv. 238), who
associates it with Zalmonah, Num. xxxiii. 41 sq., but
mentions other opinions. Furrer in the Zeitschr. des
Deutsch. Palaestin.-Vereins for 1879, p. 58 sqq. identi-
fies it with Minyeh (abbrev. Manutha, Lat. mensa) ].*
Aadpatia [Lehm. Ae\p. (“ prob. Alexandrian but pos-
sibly genuine,” Hort)], -as, 4, Dalmatia, a part of Ilyri-
cum on the Adriatic Sea; on the east adjoining Pannonias
and upper Moesia, on the north separated from Liburnia
by the river Titius, and extending southwards as far as
to the river Drinus and the city Lissus [cf. Dict. of Geog.
s.v.; Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, ii. 126 sq.; Lewin, St.
Paul, ii. 357]: 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Sapdfw: 1 aor. édduaca; Pass., [pres. Saudouar]; pf.
Seddpacpa; [akin to Lat. domo, dominus, Goth. gatam-
jan; Eng. tame; cf. Curtius § 260]; com. fr. Hom.
down; to tame: Mk. v. 4; Jas. ili. 7; to restrain, curb,
THY yAoooar, Jas. iii. 8.*
Sdpadts, -ews, 7, (fem. of 6 Sauddns a young bullock
or steer), a young cow, heifer, (Aeschyl., Dion. Hal.,
Leian., al.); used in Num. xix. 2, 6, 9 sq. for 775 and
in Heb. ix. 13 of the red heifer with whose ashes, by the
Mosaic law, those were to be sprinkled who had become
defiled. (Besides in Sept. chiefly for 753)'.) *
Adpapts, -iSos, 7, Damaris, a woman of Athens con-
verted by Paul: Acts xvii. 34; [cf. Mey. ad loc.; B.D.
era a
Aapacknyds, -7, -ov, of Damascus, Damascene; sub-
stantively of Aayacxnvoi: 2 Co. xi. 32.*
Aapackos
Aapackés, -ov, 7, Damascus, (Hebr. pwr), a very an-
cient (Gen. xiv. 15), celebrated, flourishing city of Syria,
lying in a most lovely and fertile plain at the eastern
base of Antilibanus. It had a great number of Jews
among its inhabitants (Joseph. b. j. 2, 20, 2 cf. 7, 8, 7).
Still one of the most opulent cities of western Asia,
having about 109,000 inhabitants [in 1859 about
150,000; of these 6,000 were Jews, and 15,000 Chris-
tians” (Porter)]: Acts ix. 2 sqq.; xxii. 5 sqq.; 2Co. xi.
32; Gal.i.17. [Cf. BB.DD.s. v., esp. Alex.’s Kitto.]*
Saveitw (T WH davife [see I, «]); 1 aor. éddveroa (Lk.
vi. 84 Ltxt. TWH Tr mrg.); 1 aor. mid. édavecodyny ;
(Savevov, q. v-); [fr. Arstph. down]; to lend money: Lk.
vi. 34 sq.; Mid. to have money lent to one’s self, to take a
loan, borrow [cf. W. § 38, 3; Riddell, Platon. idioms, § 87]:
Mt. v. 42. (Deut. xv. 6,8; Prov. xix.17; in Grk. auth.
fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) *
[Syn.: daveiCw, Kkixpnme: 5. to lend on interest, as a
business transaction ; kfyp. to lend, grant the use of, as a
friendly act.]
Sdavecov [WH danor, see I, c], -efov, 7d, (Savos a gift),
a loan: Mt. xviii. 27. (Deut. xv. 8; xxiv. 13 (11);
Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2,3; Diod.1, 79; Plut.; al.) *
Saveorys (T WH danorns [see I,e |), -od, 6, (Saveifo,
q: V-), @ money-lender, creditor: Lk. vii. 41. (2 K. iv. 1;
Ps. eviii. (cix.) 11; Prov. xxix. 13; Sir. xxix. 28. Dem.
p: 885, 18; Plut. Sol. 13, 5; de vitand. aere, etc. 7, 8;
[al.].)*
Savifw, see daveilw.
Aavaa, 6, (08°37 and 537 i. e. judge of God [or God
is my judge]), Daniel, prop. name of a Jewish prophet,
conspicuous for his wisdom, to whom are ascribed the
well-known prophecies composed between B. c. 167-164;
[but cf. BB.DD.]: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec.*
[Saviov, see daverov. |
Savers, see daverorns.-
Saravaw, -@ : fut. daravyow; 1 aor. éSaravnaa; (Saray) ;
fr. [Hdt. and] Thuc. down; to incur expense, expend,
spend: ti, Mk. v. 26 (1 Mace. xiv. 32); éwi with dat. of
pers., for one, in his favor, Acts xxi. 24; wtép twos, 2 Co.
xii. 15. in a bad sense, to waste, squander, consume :
mavta, Lk. xv. 14; iva ev rais ndovais tpav Saravnonre,
that ye may consume, waste what ye receive, in luxuri-
ous indulgence —[év marking the realm in rather than
the object on]: Jas. iv. 3. [Comp.: ék-, mpoo- Samavda. | *
Sardvn, -ns, 7, (fr. dato to tear, consume, [akin are
deimvov, Lat. daps ; Curtius § 261]), expense, cost: Lk. xiv.
28. (2 Esdr. vi. 4; 1 Mace. iii. 30, ete. Among Grk.
writ. Hes. opp. 721, Pind., Eur., Thuc., et sqq.) *
AavetS and Aavid, see AaBid.
8€ (related to 6, as pev to pny, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive,
but, moreover, (W. § 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more
freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other
books, very rare inthe Epp. of John and the Apocalypse.
[On its general neglect of elision (when the next word
begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App.
p- 146; W.§5,1a.; B.p.10sq.] It is used 1.
125 de
univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is
added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ¢ay
yap apnre ... cay dé py apyre, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; éav de 6
OpOarpos xrr. Mt. vi. 23; eAedoovrar dé nuepa, Mk. ii. 20;
it Opposes persons to persons or things previously men-
tioned or thought of,—either with strong emphasis:
eyw dé, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; mets d¢,1 Co. i. 23;
2 Co. x. 18; ov dé, Mt. vi. 6; tpets dé, Mk. viii. 29; of dé
viol r7s BaowWetas, Mt. viii. 12; ai ddamexes... 6 O€ vids
tov avOp. Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; mas 6 dads... of dé
@apicaior, Lk. vii. 29 sq.; 6 d€ mvevpatixds, 1 Co. ii. 15,
and often; — or with a slight discrimination, 6 d€, adrds d€:
Mikenis 4 dist ivid4is) vid ds) vila; NMt.x1il. 295/37, 52 sexy.
23 sqq.; Lk. iv. 40,43; v. 16; vi. 8; viii. 10,54; xv. 29;
oi dé, Mt. ii. 5; Mk. iii. 4; viii. 28, etc., etc.; with the addi-
tion also of a prop. name, as 6 dé “Inaots: Mt. viii. 22
[ Td. om. I.]; ix.12[RG Trbr.], 22 [Tdf. om. *I.]; xiii.
57; Mk.i.41[RGLmrg. Tr mrg.]; drop. dé (6) Sinan,
Lk. vii. 43 RG Lbr.; 7 &€ Mapia, Lk. ii. 19, ete. 2.
prev... d€, see pev. 3. after negative sentences, but,
but rather (Germ. wohl aber): Mt. vi. 19 sq. (um Onoav-
picere ... Onoavpiere 5€); x. 5 sq.; Acts xii. 9,14; Ro.
iii. 4; iv. 5; 1Co.i.10; vii. 37; 1 Th. v. 21 [not Rec.];
Eph. iv. 14 sq.; Heb. ii. 5 sq.; iv. 138,15; ix. 12; x. 26 sq.;
xii. 13; 1 Pet. i.12 (ody éavrois tyiv [ Rec. ny.] dé); Jas.
IAKSisqesutiol ls 4. it is joined to terms which are re-
peated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions
as tend to explain and establish them more exactly; in
this use of the particle we may supply a suppressed neg-
ative clause [and give its force in Eng. by inserting J
say, and that, so then, ete.]: Ro. iii. 21 sq. (not that com-
mon dtxavoovyvn which the Jews boast of and strive after,
but Occatoo. dia mictews) ; Ro. ix. 30; 1 Co. ii. 6 (copiav
d€ od Tod aidvos TovTov) ; Gal. ii. 2 (I went up, not of my
own accord, but etc.); Phil. ii. 8; cf. Alotz ad Dev. ii.
2 p. 361 sq.; L. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. ii. col. 928 ; [ef.
W. 443 (412)]. 5. it serves to mark a transition to
something new (dé metabatic); by this use of the parti-
cle, the new addition is distinguished from and, as it were,
opposed to what goes before: Mt. i. 18; ii. 193; x. 21;
LE. . xi. 13; xii. ; Jn. vil. 14,37; Acts vi. 1; Ko. yi
28; 1 Co. vii. 1; viii. 1, ete., ete. ; so also in the phrase
eyevero b€, See yivouat, 2 c. 6. it introduces explana-
tions and separates them from the things to be explained :
Jn. iii. 19; vi. 39; 1 Co. i. 12; vii. 6, 29; Eph. v. 32, ete. ;—
esp. remarks and explanations intercalated into the dis-
course, or added, as it were, by way of appendix: Mk. v.
13 (Fear b¢ ete. R Lbr.) ; xv. 25; xvi. 8[ RG]; Jn. vi.10;
ix. 14; xii. 3; rodro dé yéyove, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4. Owing
to this use, the particle not infrequently came to be con-
founded in the Mss. (of prof. writ. also) with yap; cf.
Winer on Gal. i. 11; Fritzsche on Mk. xiv. 2; also his
Com. on Rom. vol. i. pp. 234, 265; ii. p.476; iii. p. 196;
[W. 452 (421); B. 363 (312)]. 7. after a parenthe-
sis or an explanation which had led away from the sub-
ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse
again [cf. W. 443 (412)]: Mt. iii.4; Lk.iv.1; Ro. v. 8;
2 Co. ii. 12; v. 8; x. 2; Eph. ii. 4; cf. Klotz ad Devar.
dénos
ii. 2 p. 376 sq. 8. it introduces the apodosis and,
as it were, opposes it to the protasis: Acts xi.17 RG (1
Mace. xiv. 29; 2 Mace. i. 34); after a participial con-
struction which has the force of a protasis : Col. i. 22 (21);
cf. Matthiae ii. 1470; Kiihner ii. 818; [Jelf § 770]; Klotz
u. s. p.370sq.; [B. 364 (312) ]. OS Kaliates OF OU ioe
also, yea and, moreover also: Mt. x. 18; xvi. 18; Lk. ii. 35
[WH txt.om. LTr br. 6€]; Jn. vi.51; xv. 27; Acts iii. 24;
xxii. 29; Ro. xi. 23; 2 Tim. iii. 12; 1Jn.i.3; 2 Pet. i.
5; ef. Klotzu.s. p. 645 sq.; B. 364 (312); [also W. 443
(413); Ellic. on 1 Tim. iii. 10; Mey. on Jn. vi. 51]. kat
eav de yea even if: Jn. viii. 16. 10. dé never stands
as the first word in the sentence, but generally second ;
and when the words to which it is added cannot be sep-
arated, it stands third (as in Mt. x. 11; xviii. 25; Mk. iv.
34; Lk. x. 31; Acts xvii. 6; xxviii. 6; Gal. iii. 23; 2 Tim.
iii. 8, ete.; in od pdvor dé, Ro. v. 3, 11, etc.), or even in
the fourth place, Mt. x.18; Jn. vi. 51; vill. 16 sq.; 1 Jn.
ina 1 Co. iv. 185° (LE xx. 690 Tor WH]:
S€nots, -ews, 7, (Seouar); 1. need, indigence, (Ps. xxi.
(xxii.) 25; Aeschin. dial. 2, 39 sq.; [Plato, Eryx. 405 e.
bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385°, 27]). 2. a seek-
ing, asking, entreating, entreaty, (fr. Plat. down) ; in the
N.T. requests addressed by men to God (Germ. Bittge-
bet, supplication); univ.: Jas. v. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as
often in the Sept., joined with mpocevyxn (i. e. any pious
address to God [see below]): Acts i. 14 Ree.; Eph. vi.
18; Phil. iv. 6; plur. 2 Tim.i. 3; joined with mpocevyxai,
1 Tim. v. 5; with ynoreta, Lk. ii. 37; moveioOar dSénow,
Phil. i. 43 a. Senoes, Lk. v. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 1. contextu-
ally, of prayers imploring God’s aid in some particular
matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i. 19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppli-
cation for others: [2 Co.i. 11]; mepi twos, Eph. vi. 18;
tmép tivos, 2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; with the addition
mpos tov Oedv, Ro. x. 1.*
[Syn. dénors, tpocevxn, Evtevkis: mp., as Prof.
Grimm remarks, is unrestricted as respects its contents,
while 5. is petitionary; moreover zp. is a word of sacred char-
acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas 6. may also be
used of a request addressed toman. In Byzantine Grk. it is
used of a written supplication (like our petition) ; cf. Soph.
Lex.s.v. See more at length Trench § li.; also Bp. Lghtft.
on Phil. iv. 6; Ellic. on Eph. vi. 18; ef. Schmidt ch. vii. In
1 Tim. ii. 1 to these two words is added évrevéts, which ex-
presses confiding access to God; thus, in combination, Sénots
gives prominence to the expression of personal need, mpoo-
evx7 to the element of devotion, éyrevéis to that of child-
like confidence, by representing prayer as the heart’s con-
verse with God. See Huther’s extended note ad loc. ; Ellic.
ad loc.; Trench u. s.]
Set; subjunc. pres. dé); impf. éec; an impers. verb
[ef. B. § 132, 12; ef. § 131, 3; fr. Hom. down]; (déa,
sc. twos, to have need of, be in want of; cf. Germ. es
bedarf ), it is necessary, there is need of, it behooves, is
right and proper. foll. either by the inf. alone (cf. our
one ought), or by the acc. with inf. [ef. B. 147 (129)],
it denotes any sort of necessity; as a. necessity
lying in the nature of the case: Jn. iii. 30; 2 Tim. ii.
6. b. necessity brought on by circumstances or by
126
dSecxvv@
the conduct of others toward us: Mt. xxvi. 35 (kav 8€y
pe anoOaveiv), cf. Mk. xiv. 31; Jn. iv. 4; Acts xxvii. 21;
2 Co. xi. 30; [xii. 1 LT Tr WHtxt.]; or imposed by a
condition of mind: Lk. ii. 49; xix. 5. c. necessity in
reference to what is required to attain some end: Lk.
xii. 12; Jn. iii. 7; Acts ix.6; xvi. 80; 1 Co. xi. 19; Heb.
ix. 26 (on this cf. W. 283 (266); [also B. 216 (187) ;
225 (195) ]); Heb. xi. 6. d. a necessity of law and
command, of duty, equity: Mt. xviii. 33; xxiii. 23; Lk.
41.425 x14; xv. 325) xvii xxi. 75) Jniv. 205
Acts v. 29; xv. 5; Ro. i. 27 (dvruysoOiav, hv ede, sc. dro-
AapBaverOa, the recompense due by the law of God);
Ro. viii. 26; xii. 3; 1 Co. viii. 2, etc. or of office: Lk.
iv.43; xiii. 33; Jn.ix.4; x.16; Eph. vi. 20; Col. iv. 4;
2 Tim. ii. 24. e. necessity established by the counsel
and decree of God, esp. by that purpose of his which
relates to the salvation of men by the intervention of
Christ and which is disclosed in the O. T. prophecies:
Mt. xvii. 10; xxiv.6; Mk. ix.11; Actsiv.12; 1 Co. xv.
53; in this use, esp. of what Christ was destined finally
to undergo, his sufferings, death, resurrection, ascen-
sion: Lk. xxiv. 46 [RGLbr.]; Mt. xxvi. 54; Jn. iii. 14;
Acts iii. 21, etc. (of the necessity of fate in Hdt. 5, 33;
with the addition xara 76 Oeompomtor, 8,53; Thue. 5, 26.)
[Syn.: 57, xp: Sef seems to be more suggestive of
moral obligation, denoting esp. that constraint which arises
from divine appointment ; whereas xp signifies rather the
necessity resulting from time and circumstance. Schmidt
ch. 150.|
Setypa, -ros, To, (Seixvupe) 5 a. prop. thing shown.
b. a specimen of any thing, example, pattern: mupos
aiwviov, set forth as a warning, Jude 7. (From Xen.,
Plat., Isocr. down.) *
Seayparitw: 1 aor. ederyuatica; (detypa); to make an
example of, to show as an example; twa, to expose one
to disgrace (cf. mapadetyparifw, Oearpi(w): Mt.i.19 LT
Tr WH; Col. ii.15. A word unknown to Grk. writ.
[Cf. Act. Petr. et Paul. § 33; W. 25 (24); 91 (87);
devrypaticpos occurs on the Rosetta stone, line 30; Boeckh,
Inserr. 4697. Comp. : mapa-derypariga. |*
Sexvow (Serxview, Mt. xvi. 21; Secxviers, Jn. ii. 18; rod
detxviovros, Rev. xxii. 8 [not Tdf.]) and Seckvupe (1 Co.
xii. 31; Mt.iv.8; Jn. v. 20; cf. B. 45 (39)); fut. deEw;
1 aor. ée€a; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. decyOeis (Heb. viii. 5) ;
Sept. mostly for AXW; to show, exhibit ; 1. prop. to
show i. e. expose to the eyes: twi tt, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 5;
xx. 24 (for Rec. émdcié.); xxii. 12; xxiv. 40 [RGL,
but Tom. Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Mk. xiv. 15; Jn.
xx. 20; Acts vii. 3; 6dov tux, metaph., in which one
ought to go, i. e. to teach one what he ought to do, 1 Co.
xii. 831; Kata rov timov Tov SetyOevra oo, Heb. viii. 5;
éaurov Serxvivar Twi to expose one’s self to the view of
one, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; Set£ov nyiv rov
marépa render the Father visible to us, Jn. xiv. 8 sq.; of
things presented to one in a vision: rwi tt, Rev. xvii. 1;
xxi. 9 sq.3 xxii. 1,8; detéal run, & Sei yeverOa, Rev. i. 1;
iv. 1; xxii. 6. to show, i. q. to bring to pass, produce
what can be seen (Germ. sehen lassen) ; of miracles per-
SetAla
formed in presence of others to be seen by them: onpeiov,
Jn. ii. 18, (Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 66; ofa, Hom. Od. 3,
174; Il. 13, 244); é€pya &k twos, works done by the aid
of one, Jn. x. 32; tiv emupdveray “Invov Xpiorov, spoken
of God, as the author of Christ’s visible return, 1 Tim.
vi. 15; épya Secxvvew is used differently in Jn. v. 20, to
show works to one for him to do. 2. metaph. a.
with acc. of the thing, to give the evidence or proof of a
thing: miorw, Jas. ii. 183; Ti €k Tivos, as THv mioTLW eK TOV
épywr, ibid.; ra epya ex THs Kans avacrpopys, Jas. iil. 13.
b. to show by words, to teach: foll. by ori, Mt. xvi. 21
(didacxe in Mk. viii. 31 for Secxvve); foll. by an inf.
Acts x. 28. [Comp.: ava-, amo-, év-, émt-, vro-Seixvup. | *
Seria, -as, 7, (SetAds), timidity, fearfulness, cowardice :
2 Tim.i. 7. (Soph., [Hdt.], Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc., and
subseq. writ.) *
[Syn. detAia, Pd Bos, evAaBera: “of these three words
the first is used always in a bad sense; the second is a mid-
dle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil,
and lying pretty evenly between the two; the third is quite
predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not
altogether escaped being employed in an evil.” Trench § x.
q- v.; cf. d€0s.]
Sedidw, -@; (Seria, q. v.) ; to be timid, fearful: Jn. xiv.
27. (Deut. xxxi. 6; i. 21 and often in Sept. ; Sir. xxii.
Gy xxxi. (xxxiv:) 1654 Macc. xiv. 4." Diod: 20, 78.
The Greeks prefer the comp. azodeAa.) *
SetXds, -7, -ov, (Seid to fear), timid, fearful: Mt. viii.
26; Mk. iv. 40; in Rev. xxi. 8 of Christians who through
cowardice give way under persecutions and apostatize.
(From Hom. down.) *
Seiva, 6, 7, 70; gen. Seivos; dat. dei; acc. Tov, THY, TO
deiva (cf. Matthiae § 151), such a one, a certain one, i. e.
one whose name I cannot call on the instant, or whose
name it is of no importance to mention; once in the
Scriptures, viz. Mt. xxvi. 18. (Arstph., Dem., al.) *
Seas, adv., (Seuvds), terribly, grievously: Mt. viii. 6;
Lk. xi. 53. [From Hdt. down. ] *
Seurvew, -@: [fut. Seervnow]; 1 aor. edeimvnoa; (Sei-
mvov); to sup: Lk. xvii. 8; xxii. 20 [WH reject the
whole pass., see their App.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; in an alle-
gory, Seumvnow pet avtod, I will make him to share in
my most intimate and blissful intercourse: Rev. iii. 20.*
Setrrvov, -ov, 7d, and acc. to a rare and late form 6
detrvos in Lk. xiv. 16 Lchm. [ef. Tdf. on Rev. xix. 9, 17,
also W. 65 (64); on deriv. cf. 8amdvn], (in Hom. the
morning meal or breakfast, cf. Passow [more fully L. and
S.]s.v.; this the Greeks afterwards call 16 dpicror q. v.
[and reff. there], designating as 76 detmvoy the evening
meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu-
ally held at evening: Lk. xiv. 17, 24; Jn. xiii. 2,4; xxi.
20; plur.: Mt. xxiii. 6; Mk. xii. 39; Lk. (xi. 43 Lchm.
in br.) ; xx. 46; used of the Messiah’s feast, symbolizing
salvation in the kingdom of heaven: Rev. xix. 9, 17;
kuptakov Seimvov (see Kupiakds, 1),.1 Co. xi. 20; roveiv
Seirvov, Lk. xiv. 12 (dpiorov i) Seimvov); 16 (Dan. v. 1
[Theodot.]); with the addition rwi, Mk. vi. 21; Jn.
xii. 2, 2. univ. food taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.*
127
AexatroXus
SerorSarpovia, -as, 7, (Secodaipwv), fear of the yods; 1.
in a good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion:
Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph..antt. 10, 3, 2; Kai Geodiri)s
Bios, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. q. 7 SetNia mpds 7d Saipdnoy
(Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [ef. Jebb p. 263 sq.]); su-
perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24,5]; Plut. [Sol. 12, 4]; Alex. 75,
1; de adulat. et am. 25, and in his Essay wept ras devor-
Saovias; Antonin. 6, 30 GeooeBis xopis dSecodatpovias.
3. religion, in an objective sense; in which sense Jose-
phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews
pay Tas TOY GdXwv EOvar SeroSarpovias eEovdevitew. Festus
in the presence of Agrippa the Jewish king employs
the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19,
of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave his own judg-
ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz,
Profangricitiit u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59; [K. F. Her-
mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. Alterthiimer, § 8 note 6;
Trench § xlviii.; (cf. Kenrick, Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108
sqq.; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 80 sq.) ].*
Se.ot-Saipnwv, -ov, gen. -ovos, (deiSw to fear, and daipav
deity), fearing the deity or deities, like the Lat. religiosus ;
used either 1. in a good sense, reverencing god or the
gods, pious, religious: Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 58; Ages. 11, 8;
Aristot. pol. 5,11 [p. 1315*, 1]; or 2. in a bad sense,
superstitious : Theophr. char. 16 (22); Diod. 1, 62; 4,
51; Plut. de adul. c. 16; de superstit. c.10 sq. Paul
in the opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts
xvil. 22, calls them, with kindly ambiguity, cara mdvra
deavdarpoveorepous (sc. than the rest of the Greeks [W.
244 (229)], cf. Meyer ad loc.), as being devout without
the knowledge of the true God; ef. Bengel ad loe.*
S€xa, of, ai, ra, [fr. Hom. down], ten: Mt. xx. 24, ete.
Aries nuepa@v deka, i.e. to last a short time: Rey. ii. 10;
ef. Dan. i. 12, 14; Num. xi. 19; Ter. heaut. 5, 1, 36
decem dierum vix mi est familia.
Sexa-Bvo, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later
(see Passow s. v. déka [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.; ef. W. 23
(22); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept.; i. q.
dadexa, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places
LT Tr WH 8adexa; [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, 7].*
[Sexa-€&, sixteen: Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg. (Sept., al.) *]
[Sexa-oxre for déxa kal dxra, eighteen: Tdf. in Lk. xiii. 4,
11, but WH om. L Tr br. kai; cf. s. v. xai, I. 1 b.*]
Seka-revre, for the earlier mevrexaidexa, fifteen: Jn. xi.
183) Acts xxvii. 285° Gali 1. 18; [Gen. vii, -20) Ald:,
Compl.; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Macc. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3
var.; Diod. 2,13; Plut. Dion 38, 1; al.; cf. dexadvo].*
Aeké-roXts, -ews, 9, Decapolis (regio decapolitana, Plin.
h. n. 5, 16.17), i. e. a region embracing ten cities. This
name is borne by a district of the tribe of Manasseh
beyond the Jordan and bordering upon Syria, embrac-
ing ten principal cities with smaller towns also scattered
in among them. But the ancient geographers vary in
their enumeration of these ten cities. Pliny 1. ce. reckons
Damascus among them, which Josephus seems to have
excluded, calling Scythopolis peyiorny tis Sexarodews,
b. j. 3, 9, 7. All seem to agree in this, that Gadara,
Hippo, Pella and Seythopolis were of the number. Cf.
dexaTécoapes
Win. RWB. s. v. Decapolis; Vaihinger in Herzog iii.
325 sq.; Riehm, HWB. 266 sq.; [BB.DD.s. v.]: Mt.
iv. 25;.Mk. v. 20; vii. 31.*
Sexa-récoapes, -wy, ol, ai, -capa, ra, fourteen: Mt. i. 17;
2.Co. xii. 2; Gal.ii.1. [Gen.xxxi. 41; Dob. viii. 193 x.
7; Polyb. 1, 36, 11; cf. dexadvo. | *
Sexarn, -ns, 7, (Sexaros), the tenth part of any thing,
a tithe; specially the tenth part of booty taken from the
enemy: Heb. vii. 2,4; the tithes of the fruits of the
earth and of the flocks, which, by the law of Moses, were
presented to the Levites in the congregation of Israel:
Heb. vii. 8 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Simon. 133 Bgk. ;
Hdt. 2, 135]; 4, 152 down; Sept. for Wyn.) (CE.
BB.DD. s. v. Tithe. ] *
Sékatos, -7, -ov, (Sea), [fr. Hom. down], the tenth: Jn.
i. 39 (40); Rev. xxi. 20; 7d Séxarov, subst., the tenth
part: Rev. xi. 13.*
Sexatéw, -@: pf. dedexarwxa; pf. pass. Sedexdrwpar; (de-
katos); to exact or receive the tenth part (for which Grk.
writ. use dexatevo [W. 24]): with ace. of pers. from
whom, Heb. vii. 6 [on the pf. cf. W. § 40, 4a.; Lghtft.
St. Clement, App. p. 414]; Pass. to pay tithes (Vulg.
decimor): Heb. vii. 9. (Neh. x. 37.) [Comp.:
Sexarow. | *
Sexrds, -7, -ov, (S€xouar), accepted, acceptable: Lk. iv.
24; Phil. iv. 18; tei, Acts x. 35; the phrases) keuipas
dexros, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for ys ny), and éevavros
dexrds, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. Ixi. 2 for f¥7 Nv), denote that
most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of
God profusely abound. (Ex. xxviii. 34; Is. lvi. 7, [ete.].
Among prof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. § 20
p. 350.) *
Sehedtw ; [pres. pass. dehedCouar|; (SeAcap abait); 1.
prop. to bait, catch by a bait: Xen. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al.
2. as often in prof. auth., metaph. to bequile by blandish-
ments, allure, entice, deceive: twa, 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18; Jas.
i. 14, on this pass. cf. Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 22
mpos emOvpias eXavverat i Up Nndovis SeheaCera.*
[AcAparia see AaAparia. |
S€vBpov, -ov, 7d, a tree: Mt. vii. 17, etc.; yiverOar dévdpov
or eis devdpov, to grow to the shape and size of a tree,
_ Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19. [(Hom., Hdt.), Arstph.,
Thue. down. ]
Sefto-BéXos, -ov, 6, (fr. deEuds and Barra), throwing with
the right hand, a slinger, an archer: Acts xxiii. 23 in
Lchm. ed. min.; ef. the foll. word.*
SeEtoAaBos, -ov, 6, (SeEids and AapBavw), a word un-
known to the earlier writ., found in Constant. Por-
phyrogenitus (10th cent.) de them. 1, 1, who speaks
of defohdSor, as a kind of soldiers, in company with
bow-men (rofogépor) and peltasts; [they are also men-
tioned by Theoph. Simoc. (hist. 4, 1) in the 7th cent. ;
see the quotations in Meyer]. Since in Acts xxiii. 23
two hundred of them are ordered to be ready, appar-
ently spearmen are referred to (carrying a lance in the
right hand); and so the Vulg. has taken it. The great
number spoken of conflicts with the interpretation of
those who suppose them to be soldiers whose duty it was
amro-
128
deEvos
to guard captives bound by a chain on the right hand.
Meyer ad loc. understands them to be [either] javelin-
men [or slingers ].*
Sekvds, -d, -dv, (fr. d€youar, fut. dSé£ouat, or fr. Sékw, which
is akin to deixvype; prop. of that hand which is wont to
take hold of as well as to point out; just as dos comes fr.
a&w, fut. of dyw; [ef. Curtius §§ 11, 266]), the right: Mt.
v. 29, 39; Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xviii 10; Rev. x. 2; 4 dea
xelp, Mt. v. 30; Lk. vi. 6; Acts iii. 7; Rev. i. 16; xiii.
16; and (with xeip omitted) 7 defsd (like dpuorepd),
Mt. vi. 3; xxvii. 29; Rev. i. 20; ii. 1; v.73 émi thy Se&vav
Lon the right hand i. e.] at the right side, Rev. v. 1 [but
al. take it more closely, in the right hand; cf. vs. 7 and
xx. 1]; diddvar ri Se€vdv or ras Se€ids, to pledge either
a mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right
hands: Gal. ii. 9 (1 Mace. vi. 58; xi. 50, 62, 66; xiii. 50;
2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11; xiii. 22; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur.
ii. pp. 566 and 599; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6,
6; 2,5, 3; Joseph. antt. 18, 9, 3 decay re kal miori diSdva
tui); God is said to have done something 77 de£a adrod
with his right hand i.e., ace. to Hebr. idiom, by his own
power [ef. W. 214 (201)]: Acts ii. 833; v. 31; ra dada Ta
deta, arms carried in the right hand and used for attack,
as the sword, the spear, cai dpiorepa those carried in the
left hand, for the purpose of defence, as the shield: 2
Co. vi. 7; ra deka pep rod mAoiov, In. xxi. 6. ra defud
the right side [W.176 (166)]: Mk. xvi. 5; ek de&av
twos on one’s right hand (Lat. ad alicuius dextram), Mt.
XXv. 33 sq.; xxvii. 38; Mk. xv.27; Lk.i.11; xxiii. 33;
evar, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8, he is at my right
hand, sc. asa leader, to sustain me). Asin thisexpression
the Greeks use the prep. éx, so the Hebrews sometimes
use 7) (}710"1) from i.e. at the right, //5 Syxp from i.e.
at the side of any one) and the Romans ab (sedere a
dextra alicuius, proximum esse ab aliquo), because they
define the position of one standing or sitting next another
by proceeding from the one next to whom he is said to
stand or sit [cf. W. 367 (344)]. xaOioar ex deEvav x. €&
evovipev Tivos Bacées, to occupy the places of honor
nearest the king, Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37, 40; (aw
TUSK 1°, 1 K. ii. 19; Ps. xliv. (lea) 10). Hawes after
Ps. cix. (ex.) 1 as Boel to the Messiah (Mt. xxii. 44;
Mk. xii. 836; Lk. xx. 42), Christ is said to have ascended
xaOnaOa or wilh ex de€vav (at or on the right hand) of
God, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; xvi. 19; Lk. xxii. 69;
Acts ii. 34; Heb. i. 13; etvac or xabica év dSe&a r. Oeod,
Ro. viii. 34; Eph. i. 20; Col. iii. 1; Heb. i. 3; viii.1; x.12;
xii. 2, — to indicate that he has become a partner in God’s
universal government (cf. Knapp, De J. Chr. ad dextram
dei sedente, in his Scripta var. arg. p. 41 sqq.; [ Stuart,
Com. on Heb., excurs. iv.]). That these expressions are
tobe understood in this figurative sense, and not of a fixed
and definite place in the highest heavens (as Chr. Fr.
Fritzsche in Nov. Opusce. acad. p. 209 sqq. tries to prove,
after the orthodox theologians of the reformed church),
will be questioned by no one who carefully considers
Rev. iii. 21. Christ is once spoken of as éaras éx detav
tov Oeov, as though in indignation at his adversaries [ace.
Sévpuar
to others, to welcome his martyred servant] he had risen
from his heavenly throne, Acts vii. 55 sq.
Séopar; 3 pers. sing. impf. ed€ero (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 220; W. 46; [Veitch s. v. dw to need fin.]), Lk. viii.
38 (where Lehm. édeeiro, Tr WH édciro; cf. Mey. ad loc.;
[WH. App. p. 166]; B.55 (48)); 1 aor. édenOnv; (fr.
dém to want, need; whence mid. d¢oua to stand in need
of, want for one’s self); [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to want,
lack: twos. 2. to desire, long for: twos. 3. to ask,
beg, (Germ. bitten); a. univ.—the thing asked for be-
ing evident from the context : with gen. of the pers. from
whom, Gal. iv. 12; the thing sought being specified
in direct discourse: Lk. v. 123 viii. 28; ix. 38 (acc. to
the reading ériB\ewov RL); Acts viii. 34 (S€ouai cov,
mept Tivos 6 mpopntns Acyer TovTo; of whom, I pray thee,
doth the prophet say this?); Acts xxi. 39; 2 Co. v. 20;
foll. by the inf., Lk. viii. 88; ix. 38 (ace. to the reading
émBréya Tr WH); Acts xxvi. 3 (where G LT Tr WH
om. gov after Séouar) ; foll. by tva, Lk. ix. 40 (cf. W. 335
(315); [B. 258 (222)]); foll. by ro‘with inf. 2 Co. x. 2
fef. B. 263 (226), 279 (239); W. 321, 322 (301 sq.)];
with gen. of pers. and ace. of thing, 2 Co. viii.4 (GL T
Tr WH; for Ree. adds d€€ac6a juas without warrant),
[ef. B. 164 (148); W.198 (186)]. b. spec. of requests
addressed to God ; absol. to pray, make supplication: Acts
iv. 31; rod Oeov, Acts x. 2; foll. by ef dpa, Acts viii. 22
[B. 256 (220); W. 300 (282) ]; rod kupiov, draws etc. Mt.
ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; without the gen. dcod, — foll. by et mas,
Ro. i. 10 [ef. W. and B. Il. ec.]; by wa, Lk. xxi. 365 xxii.
32; by the telic eis ro, 1 Th. iii. 10 [cf. B. 265 (228)];
Umép Twos mpos Tov KUpLoy, dws, Acts vill. 24. [SYN. see
airéw and denots. COMP.: mpoo-déopat. | *
S€ov, -ovros, 76, (ptep. of dei, q. v.), fr. [Soph. and] Hat.
down, thai of which there is need, which is requisite, due,
proper: Séov éori there is need, 1 Pet. i. 6 [T Tr txt. WH
om. Tr mre. br. é.]; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xix. 36;
Ta 1 O¢ovra that are not proper, 1 Tim. v. 13.*
8€0s, -ous, Td, (Seidw), [fr. Hom. down], fear, awe : pera
evAaBetas kai Séovs, Heb. xii. 28 L T Tr WH.*
[Syn. 8 é0s (apprehension), 66 Bos (fear): Ammonius s. v>
5. says 5é0s Kal PoBos diapeper: Séos wev yap eorte ToAvxpd-
vios kakod bmdvoia. poBos dé 7 TapavTixa tTdnots. Plato
(Laches p. 198 b.): d€os yap elvar tpocdoKlay weAAOVTOS Kakod.
Cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Protag. p. 167; Schmidt ch. 139;
and see s. v. de:Aia.|
AepBaios, -ov, 6, of Derbe, a native of Derbe: Acts xx. 4.*
AépBn, -ns, 7, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, on the confines
of Isauria, [on its supposed site see Lewin, St. Paul, i.
151 sq.; B.D. s.v.; ef. Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, Index
walt) Acts xiv: 61205 xvis 1*
Séppa, -ros, 7d, (fr. depo or deipw, as xéppa fr. keipw), a
skin, hide, leather: Heb. xi. 37. (Hom. et sqq.) *
Sepparivos, -7, -ov, (S¢pua), made of skin, leathern (Vulg.
pelliceus): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6; cf. 2 K.i. 8. (Hom.,
Hat., Plat., Strab., al.) *
Sépw; 1 aor. edecpa; 2 fut. pass. dapnoopa ; 1. to
flay, skin: Hom. Il. 1,459; 23, 167, ete. 2. to beat,
thrash, smite, (cf. Germ. durchgerben, [low Eng. hide]), so
sometimes in prof. auth. fr. Arstph. ran. 619 [ef. vesp.
9
129
deo poptrak
485] down: tiva, Mt. xxi. 35; Mk. xii. 3, 5; Lk. xx. 10
sq-; Xxii. 63; Jn. xviii. 23; Acts v. 40; xvi. 37; xxii.
19; eis mpdcwror dépew twa, 2 Co. xi. 20; dépa dépew
(see dnp), 1 Co. ix. 26; Pass.: Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 47
(Sapnoerat roddds, sc. rAnyds, will be beaten with many
stripes) ; 48, (ddiyas, cf. Xen. an. 5, 8, 12 malew ddJLyas,
Soph. El. 1415 maiew dumdqv, Arstph. nub. 968 (972)
tuntecOar mroddds, Plat. lege. 8 p. 845 a. paotryovcba
mdnyas; cf. [W. 589 (548)]; B. [82 (72)]; $134, 6).*
Seopevw ; [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. eSecpetero (Lk.
viii. 29 T Tr WH)]; (Seopds); a. to put in chains:
Lk. viii. 29 T Tr WH; Acts xxii. 4; (Sept. Jude. xvi. 11;
Eur. Bacch. 616; Xen. Hier. 6, 14; Plat. lege. Tp
808 d.). b. to bind up, bind together: doptia, Mt. xxiii.
45 (pdypara, Gen. xxxvii. 7; Judith viii. 3. [Hes. opp.
479, al.]).*
Seopew, -@: [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. éSecpeiro | ; to bind,
tie: Lk. vili.29 RG L; see deopeva. ({ Aristot. de plant.
Papeete, 2b; alu Eleliads 8:9) ))=
Séopn, -ns, or as others write it [e. g. Rec.*t T; yet ef.
Lob. Paralip. p. 396; Chandler § 132] Secpn, -7s, 7, (Sew),
a bundle: Mt. xiii. 30. (Ex. xii. 22. Dem., Dion.
Hal., al.) *
S€optos, -ov, 6, bound, in bonds, a captive, a prisoner,
[fr. Soph. down]: Mt. xxvii. 15 sq.; Mk. xv. 6; Acts
Vis 25, 27s )ixxili. 18 xxv.145,277 xxvii 16 (RG;
17; Heb. x. 34 GLT Tr txt. WH; xiii. 3; 6 déopos
Tod Xpiorov "Inoov, whom Christ, i. e. his truth which I
have preached, has put in bonds (W. 189 (178) ; [B. 169
(147) ]), Eph. iii. 1; 2 Tim.i.8 ; Philem. 1, 9; in the same
sense 6 d€opuos ev xupio, Eph. iv. 1; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on
Philem. 13].*
Seopds, -od, 6, (Séw), [fr. Hom. down], a band or bond:
Mk. vii. 35 (€AvOn 6 Seopods THs yAwoons airod, i. e. the
impediment in his speech was removed); Lk. xiii. 16
(AvOjvat amb Tod Secpod, of a woman bowed together,
held fast as it were by a bond). The plur. form ra de-
opa, the more com. form in Grk. writ. (W. 63 (62) [ef. B.
23 (21); see below]), is found in Lk. viii. 29; Acts xvi.
26; xx. 23; the other form of Secpoi in Phil. i. 13 (ore
tous Seapovs pou davepods ev Xprota yeveoOat, so that my
captivity became manifest as made for the cause of Christ),
[‘‘ Seopa sunt vincula quibus quis constringitur, sed de-
apos est in carcerem conjectio et captivitas in vinculis ...
Utraque forma et ceteri Graeci omnes et Attici utuntur,
sed non promiscue ut inter se permutari possint.” Cobet
as quoted in Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 353]; the gen.
and dat. in Acts xxii. 30 Rec.; xxiii. 29; xxvi. 29, 31;
Phil. i. 7, 14, 16 (17); Col. iv. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 9; Philem.
10; Heb. x. 34 R Tr mrg.; xi. 36; Jude 6; ev trois decpois
rov edayyeXiov, in the captivity into which the preaching
of the gospel has thrown me, Philem. 13 [W. 189 (178) ;
cf. ref. s.v. S€optos, fin. ].*
Seopo-dirak, -kos, 6, (Secpds and ura, like Oncavpo-
pvraé [ef. W. 100 (95)]), a keeper of a prison, a jailer :
Acts xvi. 23, 27,36. (Joseph. antt. 2,5, 1; Leian. Tox.
30; [Artem. oneir. 3, 60; al.]; dpySecpopvAag, Gen
XxXxix. 21-23.)*
Seo pu@TnpLov
Seopwripiov, -ov, To, a prison, jail: Mt. xi. 2; Acts v.
21,23; xvi. 26. (Gen. xl. 3; [Hdt.], Thuc., Plat., Dem.,
al.).*
Seopadtys, -ov, 6, one bound, a prisoner: Acts xxvii.
1,42. (Gen. xxxix. 20; Bar.i.9; Hdt., Aeschyl., Soph.,
Thuc., subseq. writ.) *
Seométys, -ov, 6, [fr. Pind. down], a master, lord (as of
SovAot, oixerar): 1 Tim. vi. 1, [2]; 2 Tim. ii. 21; Tit. ii.
9; 1 Pet. ii. 18; God is thus addressed by one who calls
himself his dodAos: Lk. ii. 29, ef. Acts iv. 24, 29, (Seazo-
Ts Tav mavtav, Job v. 8; Sap. vi. 8); Christ is so called,
as one who has bought his servants, 2 Pet. ii. 1; rules
over his church, Jude 4 [some take 6. here as designating
God; cf. R. V. mrg.]; and whose prerogative it is to
take vengeance on those who persecute his followers,
Rev. vi. 10.*
[Syn. 5eomdr7s, ktpios: 8. was strictly the correla-
tive of slave, 5odAo0s, and hence denoted absolute ownership
and uncontrolled power; «vpios had a wider meaning, appli-
cable to the various ranks and relations of life, and not sug-
gestive either of property or of absolutism. Ammonius s. v.
deomdrys says 5. 6 TaY apyupwrhtwry: Kipios 5E Kal maThp viod
ka) avtdés Tis €avtov. So Philo, quis rer. div. heres § 6 écTe
tov Seamdrny KuUpiov eivat Kal ert doavel poBepdy Kvpiov, ov
pdvoy Td Kipos Kal Td Kpdtos amdvTwy avnupevoy, AAG Kab
déos kal pdBov tkavdy euroijoa. Cf. Trench § xxviii.; Wool-
sey, in Bib. Sacr. for 1861, p. 599 sq.; Schmidt ch. 161, 5.]
Seipo, adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. of place, a. hither;
to this place. b. in urging and calling, here! come!
(Sept. esp. for 7? and 7339) suit. xix. 210i: Mile. x.y 28 lek,
XViii. 22; Jn. xi. 43 (Sedpo €Ew come forth). Acts vii. 34;
Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; Sedpo els yqv, nv krA. Acts vii. 3
(Sedpo eis Tov oikdv gov, 1 K. i. 53; eis Hrodepaida, 1 Mace.
xii.45). 2. of time, hitherto, now: aypt tov dedpo up to
this time, Ro.i.13 (uéype Sedpo, [ Plat. lege. 7 p. 811 ¢.];
Athen. 1, 62 p. 34.c.; Plut. vit. Num. 4; Pomp. 24).*
Sedre, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf.
B. 70 (61)]; perhaps fr. dedp’ tre [yet see Bitm. Gram.
2ite Aufl. $115 Anm. 8], see dedpo, 1; 1. fr. Hom.
down, come hither, come here, come: foll. by an impy.,
devre, kAnpovopnoare, Mt. xxv. 34; dedre, ere, Mt. xxviii.
6; Jn. iv. 29; Sedre, apiotnoate, Jn. xxi. 12; Sedre, cvva-
xOnre (Ree. 8. cai cuvayeobe), Rev. xix. 17. dette drica
prov come after me, be my disciples: Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17,
(equiv. to 78 19, 2 K. vi. 19) ; dedre els r. yapous, Mt.
xxii. 4; eis €pnuwov tomov, Mk. vi. 31; Sedre mpos pe, Mt.
xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come !
come now! foll. by a hortat. subj.: Sedre, amoxreivoper,
Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 and RG in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept.
mostly for 199, sometimes for 383.) *
Sevtepatos, -aia, -aiov, (Sevrepos), [Hdt., Xen., al.], of
or belonging to the second; of one who comes, or does a
thing, on the second day (cf. rperaios, rerapraios, etc.) :
Sevrepaion FAOopev, Acts xxviii. 13; cf. W. § 54, 2; [B.
§ 123, 9].*
Sevtepé-mrpwros, -ov, second-first (cf. Sevrepeoxaros sec-
ond-last, last but one): ev caBBarw Sevreporparw in Lk.
vi. 1 seems to be, the second of the first sabbaths after the
feast of the Passover; cf. Redslob in the Intelligenzblatt
130
déyouas
zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl.
Wissensch. i. p. 72; [ WH. App. ad loe.]. The various
opinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and McClel-
lan] ad loc. and Liibkert in the Stud. und Krit. for 1835,
p- 664 sqq. (ustrat. in vita Eutych. n. 95 calls the first
Sunday after Easter devreporparny kuptaxny). [But the
genuineness of the word is questionable. It is wanting in
NBL1, 33, 69 and some other authorities. Hence Tr txt.
WH om. the word, L Tr mrg. br. it. Tischendorf, after
expunging it in his 2d ed., restored it in his 7th, subse-
quently put it in brackets, and finally (ed. 8) inserted
it again. It is questioned or discarded, by Mey., Bleek,
Alf., Weiss (on Mk. p. 101), Holtz., Hilgenf., Volkm.,
Farrar (Com. ad loc. and Life of Christ i.435), al. For
the evidence see Tdf.’s note, and for discussions of it
see WH. App. ad loc. ; Scrivener, Intr. p.515 sq. ; Green,
“ Developed Criticism” ad loe.]*
Sevtepos, -€pa, -epov, [fr. Hom. down; Curtius § 277],
second: Mt. xxii. 26; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xii. 38; Jn. iv. 54;
Rey. iv. 7, ete.; the second, the other of two: Mt. xxii.
$95 Mk. -xi.315, 13Co. xvi Ave ina. 1012 Petamaalte
Heb. vill. 7; x. 9; devrepos Oavaros (see Oavatos, 3), Rev.
ii. 11; xx. 14; xxi. 8; devrépa yapis in 2 Co.i. 15 is not
a double benefit, but a second, opp. to the former which
the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing
through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them mpére-
pov, [WH txt. Trmrg. read deur. xapay, q. v.]. The
neuter devrepov is used adverbially in the second place, a
second time [ef. W. § 37,5 Note 1]: Jn. iii. 4; Rev. xix.
3; mad is added, as often in Grk. writ. (see dvadev,
fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also 7d Sevrepov, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude
5; é« Sevrépov (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24;
Acts xi. 9; Heb. ix. 28; ef. W. § 51, 1 d.; with maw added,
Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15, (Hom. Od. 3, 161 emi Setrepov
adtis) ; €v T@ Sevtep@ at the second time, Acts vii. 13 (when
they had come the second time) ; devrepov in a partition,
then, in the second place: 1 Co. xii. 28.
S€xopat; [fut. 2 pers. plur. dé£eo6e, Eph. vi. 17 Rec.>e?];
1 aor. édeEaunv; pf. dédeypai (Acts viii. 14) ; depon. mid. ;
Sept. mostly for np?; 1. totake with the hand: r6
ypappa [L txt. T Tr WH ra ypappara), Lk. xvi. 6 sq.; 7d
rotnptov, Lk. xxii. 17; to take hold of, take up, tr. mept-
kepadaiay, Tt. paxatpay, Eph. vi. 17; 7o maidiov eis ras
daykddas, Lk. ii. 28. 2. to take up, receive, (Germ. auf
nehmen, annehmen); a. used of a place receiving one:
dv Set ovpavor dé£aaGa (ovp. is subject), Acts iii. 21, (Plat.
Theaet. p. 177 a. reXeurnoavras avtovs ...6 Tay Kakav
xaapos Toros ov de€erar). b. with ace. of pers. to receive,
grant access to, a visitor; not to refuse intercourse or friend-
ship: Lk. ix. 11 RG; Jn. iv. 45; 2 Co. vii. 15; Gal. iv.
14; Col. iv.10; to receive to hospitality, Mt. x. 14, 40 sq. ;
Mk. vi. 11 ikon 5 O8itex.) Bali) Actsexscl@ivec:
Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; ra:diov,
to receive into one’s family in order to bring up and edu-
cate, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48; to receive eis
T. otkous, Tas oxnvas, Lk. xvi. 4,9; Sé&ar ro wvedpd pov, to
thyself in heaven, Acts vii. 59. c. with acc. of the thing
offered in speaking, teaching, instructing ; to receive fa-
dé@
vorably, give ear to, embrace, make one’s own, approve,
not to reject: tov ddyov, Lk. viii. 13; Acts vili. 143 xi.
1; xvii. 11; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 13; Jas. i. 21; ra rod mvev-
patos, 1 Co. ii. 14; ryv mapakAnow, 2 Co. vill. 17; rhv ayamny
THs dAnOeias sc. commended to them, 2 Th. ii. 10; [add
the elliptical constr. in Mt. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ;
to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4
Rec. 4d. to receive i. q. to take upon one’s self, sustain,
bear, endure : twa, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. 16,
(rv ddixiay, Hebr. Xv}, Gen. 1. 17; may, d éeav érax6%,
Sir. ii. 4; pddov yaderdv, Hom. Od. 20, 271, and often in
Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ. empfangen) :
emotonas, Acts xxii. 5; ypdupara, Acts xxviii. 21; ryv
Baouciav To Oeod, to become a partaker of the benefits
of God’s kingdom, Mk. x.153; Lk. xviii. 17; Adyia Covra,
Acts vii. 38 ; evayyéAuov, 2 Co. xi. 4; rHv yap Tod beod,
2 Co. vi. 1;—i. q. to learn: Phil. iv. 18 [(?) see the
Comm. ad loc. ].*
[Syn. Séxouat, AauBdvw: The earlier classic use
of these verbs sustains in the main the distinction laid down
in the glossaries (e. g. Ammonius s. v. AaBetv: AaBety peév
éott, TO Keluevoy Tt aveAcoOar SdtacOa Sé, TO Sidduevoy ex
xetpés), and the suggestion of a self-prompted taking still
adheres to A. in many connexions (cf. AaBety Tia yuvatka,
apxhv AaBetv) in distinction from a receiving of what is
offered ; in use, however, the words overlap and distinctions
disappear ; yet the suggestion of a welcoming or an ap-
propriating reception generally cleaves to 6. See Schmidt
eh. 107, who treats of the comp. of 5. in detail. Comr.: dva-,
aimo-, dia-, cio-, ek-, Am-eK-, ev-, eml-, Tapa-, Tpoo-, Umo-dexomau. |
Sw: [fut. dyow]; 1 aor. ednoa; pf. ptep. dedexas (Acts
xxii. 29); Pass., pf. dédeuae; 1 aor. inf. SeOjvar (Acts xxi.
83); Sept. chiefly for \0%; [fr. Hom. down] ; to bind, tie,
fasten ; 1. prop.: ri, ets deopas, Mt. xiii. 30 [Tr WH
br. G prob. om. eis, cf. B. 150 (131) ; W. 225 (211) ]; 60dun
Téaoapow apyais dedeu. a sheet bound by the four cor-
ners (to the sky), Acts x. 11 (GL T Tr WH om. deden.
kai); an animal, to prevent it from straying about, dvos
deSeuevn, wa@dos Sedeuevos, Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix.
30; with mpds r. Ovpavy added, Mk. xi. 4; with ace. of
pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains :
ayyéAous, Rev. ix. 14; a madman, redas kal ddvoeot, Mk.
v. 3 sq.; captives, Mt. [xii. 29]; xiv. 3; xxii. 13; xxvii.
25 Mk. [iii. 27]; vi.17; xv.1; Jn. xviii. 12; Acts ix. 14;
xi. il; xxii. 29; Rev. xx. 2; Pass., Mk: xv.7'; Inexviil:
24; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. Sedepevov dyew
twa); Acts xxi. 13; xxii.5; xxiv.27; Col. iv. 3; ddtvoeot,
Acts xii. 6; xxi. 33; 6 Adyos Tov Geod od Sێdera., fig. for
these bonds of mine in no way hinder its course, i. e.
the preaching, extension, and efficacy of the gospel, 2
Tim. ii. 9; the bodies of the dead, which were wont to
be bound with bandages and linen cloths: 6 reOynxas
dedepevos Tovs Todas K. Tas xeipas Ketpiars, bound hand and
foot with grave-cloths, Jn. xi. 44; rd cdpa dOoviows (Taf.
2, 7 é€v oOov.), to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 40. 2.
metaph. a. Satan is said 6j0a: a woman bent together,
i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos-
session of the woman and preventing her from standing
upright, Lk. xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to bind, i. e. put under
131
dndtow
obligation, sc. of law, duty, etc.: dedeuevos TH mvevpare,
bound or constrained in my spirit,i. e. compelled by my
convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth.
as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. avaykn Séderar i) mpoorarres av-
T®); with dat. of pers. dedéoOae tii to be bound to one:
avdpi, of a wife, Ro. vii. 2; yuvacxi, of a husband, 1 Co.
vii. 27; d€derae absol., opp. to éAevbépa eori, ibid. 39;
(Achill. Tat. 1, 11 p. 41 addy S€depar mapbévw, Jambl.
vit. Pyth. 11, 56 rip pev dyapov, ... tiv dé mpos avdpa be-
Sepevnv). c. by a Chald. and rabbin. idiom (equiv. to
0s) to forbid, prohibit, declare to be illicit: Mt. xvi.
19 . xviii. 18. [Comp.: xara-, rept, cvv-, trro-déa. | *
84, (shortened fr. 75 [al. al.]), a particle which, the
Epic phrases 6) rére, 53) yap excepted, is never placed
at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some pre-
ceding word, and indicates that “what it introduces can
be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in
truth” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392): now therefore,
then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, ete.—al-
though neither Lat., Germ., [nor Eng.] has a word pre-
cisely equiv. to 67). 1. added to relative pronouns:
ds 6n who is such a one as, who preéminently, who then,
Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory
subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be
done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may
be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 612°),
where the Lat. says agedum, jam, Germ. doch, nur, [ Eng.
now, only, but]: Lk. ii. 15; Acts [vi. 3 LL WH mrg. br. ];
xiii. 2; xv. 36; 1 Co. vi. 20, (Sir. xliv. 1). 3. surely,
certainly: 2 Co. xii. 1 RG.*
Syravyds, (fr. dp7Aos and avyn), radiantly, in full light,
clearly: Mk. viii. 25 TWH mrg. with codd. 8*CLA for
Ree. tndavyés. Hesych. says dnAavyas: dyav pavepas ;
add dyXavyéor Texpnpiors, Democrit. in Fabricius, Biblioth.
Gr. iv. p. 333. With the exception of this word [én\o-
move, (Plut. Pericl. 33, 8; al.)] and the very rare dnAo-
gavns, d57Aos is not found in composition.*
SiAos, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], clear, evident, manifest :
Mt. xxvi. 73; d7yAov sc. éoriv it is manifest, evident, foll.
by dre (4 Mace. ii. 7; Xen. an. 1, 3, 9; al.): 1 Co. xv. 27
[here some would take the words adverbially and paren-
thetically i.e. SnAovore manifestly cf. W. § 64, 2 a.]; Gal.
iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 7 (here L T Tr WH om. 87)ov).*
[Syn. d5A0s, pavepds: 5. evident, what is known and un-
derstood, . manifest, as opp. to what is concealed or invisible ;
5. points rather to inner perception, ¢. to outward appear-
ance. Cf. Schmidt ch. 129.]
Syddw, -d; [impf. ednArovv; fut. dyrac@]; 1 aor. €dy-
hooa; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing. édyAovro (1 Pet. i. 11
WH mrg.)]; 1 aor. ednkw@Onv; (djdos) ; Sept. for yn
and sometimes for 777 ; in Grk. auth. fr. [Aeschyl. and]
Hdt. down; to make manifest: ri, 1 Co. iii. 13; to make
known by relating, to declare: ri, Col. i. 8; twit mepi twos,
dri, 1 Co. i. 11; to give one to understand, to indicate,
signify: ti, Heb. xii. 27; 2 Pet. i. 14; foll. by ace. with
inf. Heb. ix. 8; els ru, point unto, 1 Pet. i. 11.*
[Syn. 5ynAda, eugavi lw: eud.to manifest to the sight,
make visible ; 5. to render evident to the mind, of such dis-
closures as exhibit character or suggest inferences; hence
Anas
esp. of prophetical, typical, or other supernatural disclosures.
Cf. Schmidt ch. 129 § 6; Bleek on Heb. ix. 8.]
Anpas, 6, Demas, (prop. name, contracted apparently
fr. Anunrpros, cf. W. 103 (97); [on its declension, cf. B.
20 (18)]),a companion of Paul, who deserted the apos-
tle when he was a prisoner at Rome and returned to
Thessalonica: Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Snpnyopéw, -@ : [impf. ednunydpovr]; (to be a dnunyopos,
fr. dios and ayopevw to harangue the people) ; to address
a public assembly, make a speech to the people: €dnunydper
mpos avtovs [A. V. made an oration], Acts xii. 21. (Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. Prov. xxx. 31 (xxiv. 66);
4 Mace. v. 15.) *
Anpartpros, -ov, 6, Demetrius ;
Ephesus, a heathen: Acts xix. 24, 38.
Christian: 3 Jn. 12.*
Syproupyss, -0d, 6, (Sypeos public, belonging to the peo-
ple, and EPTQ; cf. icpoupyds, dumehoupyés, etc.), often in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a. prop. a workman for the
public. b. univ. the author of any work, an artisan,
framer, builder: rexvirns x. Snpeoupyds, Heb. xi. 10; (Xen.
mem. 1,4, 7 [ef. 9] codod twos Snpeovpyod réxvnpa. God
is called 6 tov ovpavod Snusovpyds in Plat. rep. 7 p. 530 a. ;
6 Onp. rev Od@v in Joseph. antt. 1, 7, 1, and often in ecel.
writ. from Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20,11; 26,15 33, 2 on;
[ef. Philo, de mut. nom. § 4; de opif. mund. ed. Miiller
p- 133; Piper, Einl. in monument. Theol. § 26; Soph.
Lex. s. v.]. In the Scriptures, besides, only in 2 Mace.
iv. 1 kax@v Onp-). [Cf Trench § cv.]*
SHpos, -ov, 6, the people, the mass of the people assembled
in a public place: Acts xii. 22; xix. 33; dyew [RG],
ciced Oeiv eis Tov Sjpov: Acts xvii. 5 [LT Tr WH mpoay. |;
xix. 30. [From Hom. down. ]*
[Syn. 540s, Aads: in classic Grk. 570s denotes the peo-
ple as organized into a body politic, Aads the unorganized
people at large. But in biblical Grk. Aads is used esp. of the
chosen people of God ; d4uos on the other hand (found only
in Acts) denotes the people of a heathen city. Cf. Trench
§ xeviii.; Schmidt ch. 199.]
Sypdcros, -a, -ov, esp. freq. in Attic; belonging to the
people or state, public (opp. to ios): Acts v. 18; in dat.
fem. dypooia used adverbially (opp. to idia) [ef. W. 591
(549) note], publicly, in public places, in view ofall: Acts
xvi. 37; xviii. 283; Onp. Kai Kar’ oikovs, Acts xx. 20; (2
Mace. vi. 10; 3 Mace. ii. 27; in Grk. writ. also by public
authority, at the public expense).*
Snvapvov, -ov, 7d, [ Plut., Epict., al.], a Lat. word, a de-
narius, a silver coin, originally consisting of ten [whence
its name |, afterwards [fr. B. Cc. 217 on] of sixteen asses ;
about [3.898 grams, i. e. 8} pence or 162 cents; rapidly
debased fr. Nero on; ef. BB.DD. s. v. Denarius]: Mt.
vill, 28, xx..2, 9,155 xx. 19s Miko gi ova. 1D: xy,
Ds, Lk. vil. 41; x. 85> xxi 245) One vie G eel sc INeV. V1.
6 [ef. W. 587 (546); B. 164 (143)]; 1d ava Syvapioy se.
év the pay of a denarius apiece promised to each work-
man, Mt. xx. 10 T Tr [txt., Trmrg. WH br. ro].*
Sq-wore (fr. 57 and wore), adv., now at length (jam
aliquando) ; at any time ; at last, ete., just exactly ; [hence
it generalizes a relative, like the Lat. cumque ; see Lob.
1: a silversmith of
2. a certain
132 bua
ad Phryn. p. 373]: 6 dnmore voonpatt, with whatsoever
disease, Jn. v. 4 [RG, but L oi@dnrorotv].*
8q-7rov [L WH 67 ov; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.
123 sq.], adv., (fr. 67 and ov), prop. now in some way,
whatever that way ts ; it is used when something is affirmed
in a slightly ironical manner, as if with an affectation of
uncertainty, perhaps, doubtless, verily : ov Symov not surely
(Germ. doch nicht etwa), hardly I trow; (ef. Rost in
Passow i. p. 613°; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 427 sq.). Once
in Scripture: Heb. ii. 16.*
[Ata, see Zevs. |
Sd, [“ written 6¢ before a vowel, exc. in prop. names
and 2 Co. v. 7; Ro. viii. 10” Tdf. Proleg. p. 94], akin
to dis and Lat. dis in composition, prop. denoting a divis-
ion into two or more parts; a preposition taking the
gen. and the ace. In its use the bibl. writ. differ in no
respect fr. the Grk.; ef. W.377 (853) sqq.; 398 (372) sq.
A. with the GENITIVE: through; L.,of Place;
1. prop. after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion,
or an act, that occurs through any place: 6¢ a@Ans 6d00
avaywpeiv, Mt. ii. 12; d¢ avidpav rorey, Mt. xii. 43; dia
Ths Dapapeias, Jn. iv.4; dia rys Ovpas, Jn. x. 1 sq.; add,
Mt. xix. 245° Miki 235" x. 25" xi 1 Ge Klay. 30; ve lon
Rv. 255 2,Co. x1..836 Heb. 1x01 ie). 7 12 CU. nom
vpov, through your city, Ro. xv. 28; [on da mavrop,
Acts ix. 32, see was, II. 1]; 6 8a mavrwyv, diffusing his
saving influence through all, Eph. iv. 6; ca fecOa dia
mupos, 1 Co. iii. 15; dcac@g. d¢ vdaros, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Ev.
Nicod. ¢. 9 p. 568 sq. ed. Thilo [p. 228 ed. Tdf.] da
Garacons ws dua Enpas); Brerew S¢ eoomtpov, 1 Co. xiii.
12 [cf. W. 380 (356)]. Add the adverbial phrase 6v
éXov from top to bottom, throughout, Jn. xix. 23 (met-
aph. in every way, 1 Mace. vi. 18). From this use of
the preposition has come 2. its tropical use of a
state or condition in which (prop. passing through
which as through a space) one does or suffers some-
thing, where we, with a different conception, employ
with, in, ete. (Germ. bei, unter, mit): 6 dia ypdapparos k.
mepitouns mapaBatns vopov, Ro. ii. 27 [W. 380 (355) ]; of
muorevovtes O¢ axpoBvortias who believe though uncireum-
cised (see dxpoBvoria, a.), Ro. iv. 11; 61a mpookoppartos
éoOiecv, with offence, or so as to be an offence [ef. W. 380
(356), and see rpdckoppa], Ro. xiv. 20; dia mioteas mept-
mate, ov bia eidovs (see eidos, 1), 2 Co. v. 7; Ta dua
[Lchm.mrg. (cf. Tr mrg.) 7a tua (see Mey. ad loc.) ] rod
coparos, done in the body (i. e. while we were clothed
with our earthly body [al. take éca here instrumentally ;
see III. 2 below]), 2 Co. v.10; dca moAAav daxpvor, 2 Co.
ii. 4; 8:4 86&ys, clothed with glory, 2 Co. iii. 11; épyerOa,
ceioépy- Sua Twos with a thing, Heb. ix. 12; 1 Jn. v. 6, [but
cf. W. 380 (355) ]; 80 bropovns, Ro. Vili. 25, (dua mevOous
To ynpas Suayev, Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 6; cf. Matthiae ii.
p- 1353).
II. of Time [ef. W. 380 (356); Ellic. or Mey. on
Gal. ii. 1; Fritzsche as below]; 1. of continued
time; hence a. of the time throughout (during) which
anything is done: Mt. xxvi. 61; Mk. xiv. 58; 8¢ odns
(rijs RG) vuxrés, Lk. v. 5; 81a wavros rod (qv, Heb. ii. 15;
dia
dca mavros [so L WH Tr (exe. Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53)],
or written together d:aravrds [so G T (exe. in Mt.) ; cf.
W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continually,
always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii.
25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr.
Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24); 2'Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15,
(often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a
thing is done: 8a 74s vueros (LT Tr WH da vuxris), by
night, Acts v. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph.
1,10); d¢ tepav teccapdkovra, repeatedly within the
space of forty days, Acts i. 3 ;— (denying this use of the
prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p.
164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted
under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time
elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed
through: Gal. ii. 1 [ef. W. 380 (356)]; de jpepar,
(some) days having intervened, after (some) days, Mk. ii.
1; 8¢ érév mAetovor, Acts xxiv. 17; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in
Fritzsche on Mk. p.50; [W. 380 (356) ; L. and S.s. v. A.
II. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 2; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 14].
III. of the Means or Instrument by which any-
thing is effected; because what is done by means of a
person or thing seems to pass as it were through the
same [cf. W. 378 (354) ]. 1. of one who is the author
of the action as well as its instrument, or of the effi-
cient cause: 8v adrod (i. e. rod Beov) Ta mara SC. eoTiv
or éyevero, Ro. xi. 36; also dv ob, Heb. ii. 10; dv ob exAn-
Onre, 1 Co.i. 9; add [Gal. iv. 7 L T Tr WH, see below];
Heb. vii. 21 (9 iarpuxy maca dia Tod Geod rovrov, i. e. Aes-
culapius, cuBepvarat, Plat. symp. p. 186 e.; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. vol. i. p. 15, [and for exx. Soph. Lex. s.v.1]); of
him to whom that is due which any one has or has done;
hence i. q. by the fault of any one: &¢ ob 1d oKxavdadov
épxerar, Mt. xviii. 7; 80’ €vds avOp. 7 dwapria . . . clone,
Ro. v. 12, cf. 16-19; nodever dia tis capkds, Ro. vill. 3;
by the merit, aid, favor of any one: ev (a7 Baoievoovar
dua ete. Ro. v. 17, ef. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 215; da rod Xpuorod,
and the like: Ro. v.1sq.11; Acts x.43; Gal. iv. 7
[Rec., but see above]; do€atew r. Oedv dua Incot Xpicrod,
1 Pet. iv. 11, and edyapioteiv r@ Oe@ Sia “Ino. Xp. Ro. i.
8; vii. 25 (where L T Tr WH txt. yapus r@ Oe@) ; Col. iii.
17, — because the possibility both of glorifying God and
of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ;
KavxyaoOat ev TH Oe@ dia Ino. Xp. Ro. v.11; avaraverOa
id Tivos, Philem. 7; of memuorevxdres dia THs yapiros, Acts
XViil. 27; modAjs etpnyns Tvyxavortes bia God... dua THS
ans mpovoias, Acts xxiv. 2 (3); tmepuxav dia Tod ayarn-
aavtos nas, Ro. viii. 37; meprooevew Sia Tivos, by the
increase which comes from one, Phil. i. 26; 2 Co. i. 5;
ix. 125; dia rhs buav Senoews, Phil. i. 19; add, Philem. 22;
Boi t2se2 Covi 4: (Galviv. 23; 1° Pet. i. 5. 2. of the
instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instru-
mental cause in the stricter sense: —with gen. of
pers. by the service, the intervention of, any one; with gen.
of thing, by means of, with the help of, any thing; a. in
passages where a subject expressly mentioned is said to
do or to have done a thing by some person or by some
thing: Mk. xvi. 20 (rod xvpiov Tov Adyov BeBatodvros dia
133
dua
tT. onpeiov); Lk. i. 70; Acts i. 16; ii. 22 (répace x. onpei-
ous, ols emoinoe Sv avrov 6 Beds); Vili. 20; x. 36; xv. 23
(ypawavres did xetpos adtav); Xx. 28; xxi. 19; xxviii.
25; Ro. ii. 16; iii. 31; vii. 13; [viil. 11 Rec.bez elz L ed.
mine WE txt: 9 sv. 183-xviel Sg. Gori. Bi [ek Wi
381 (357) ]; ii. 10; iv.15; vi. 14; xiv.9,19[RG)}; xv.
57; 2Co.i.4; iv. 14 RG; v.18, 20; ix. 13 [cf. W. 381
(35 7)]] ion 919 eis 1.75 Eph: i255 di. 16 5 Cole i420, 224 an:
Se Thi iveies, 27 Th. td4; Liteitivd;) Heb. i122)3:pR
Gy Sei Ariewisd 2iy wile DO ip Ixy 26g: iid ND,) Led byt Ding
Rey. i. 1; yy e& vdaros (material cause) kc. 6¢ ddatos cuve-
aTaoa TH TOD Oeod oye, 2 Pet. ili. 5 [W. 419 (390) cf.
217 (204)]. b. in passages in which the author or prin-
cipal cause is not mentioned, but is easily understood
from the nature of the case, or from the context: Ro. i.
12; 1 Co. xi. 12 [ef. W. 381 (357) ]; Phil. i. 20; 1 Th. iii.
7; 2 Th. ii. 2,15; Heb. xi. 39 [ef. W. nu. s., also § 50, 3];
xii. 11,15; 1 Pet. i. 7; dca wodA@v paptipar, by the me-
diation (intervention) of many witnesses, they being
summoned for that purpose [cf. W. 378 (354); A. V.
among], 2 Tim. ii. 2. Where it is evident from the relig-
ious conceptions of the Bible that God is the author or
first cause: Jn. xi. 4; Acts v. 12; Eph. iii. 10; iv. 16;
Col. ii. 19; 2 Tim. i. 6; Heb. x. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 6; oa€e-
oGa dia tr. riotews, Eph. ii. 8; ouveyeiperGar dia tr. rior.
Col. ii. 12; StxacodaOa dia r. wior. Gal. ii. 16, cf. Ro. iii.
30; in the phrases &:a rod "Ino. Xpeorov, and the like:
Ini. Misti) Lh; Acts xiiie383Rox idea? slo Co. xv:
57; 1Jn.iv.9; Phil. i.115; dca rod evayyediov, 1 Co. xv. *
2; Eph. iii. 6; 8a Adyou Geod, 1 Pet. i. 23, cf. 3; dia
vopov, Ro. iii. 27; iv. 13; 80 droxadiwews “Ino. Xp. Gal.
i, 12, cf. 15 sq.; Oca Tov (dyiov) mvevparos, Ro. v. 5; 1 Co.
xii. 8; Eph. iii. 16; muorevew did twos (see motevo,
1b. y.), In. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; onpetoy yeyove bv aitay,
Acts iv. 16; 6 Aoyos b¢ ayyéAwy NadnOeis, Heb. ii. 2, cf.
Gal. iii. 19; 6 vopos dia Moioews €566n, Jn. i. 17; in pas-
sages in which something is said to have been spoken
through the O. T. prophets, or some one of them [ef.
Loghtft. Fresh Revision ete. p. 121 sq.}: Mt. ii. 5,17 LT
Tr WH, 23; [iii. 3 LT Tr WH); iv. 14; vili.17; xii.
17; xxi. 4; xxiv. 15; xxvii. 9; Acts ii. 16; or to have
been so written: Lk. xviii. 31; with the added mention
of the first cause: ind rod Kupiov bua Tod mpod. Mt. i. 22;
ii. 15, ef. Lk. i. 70; Acts i. 16; xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 2; in
passages relating to the Logos: mdvra dv’ adrov (i. e.
through the divine Logos [cf. W. 379 (355) ]) éyévero or
éxria6y: Jn. i. 3; 1 Co. viii. 6 (where he is expressly
distinguished from the first cause: ¢€ avrov [W. 419
(391)]); Col. i. 16 [W. 1. c.], ef. Heb. i. 2, (Philo de
cherub. § 35). The instrumental cause and the princi-
pal are distinguished in 1 Co. xi. 12 (81a ris yuvatkos . . «
ex tov beod); Gal. i. 1 (am dvOporer .. . d¢ dvOparov [cf.
W. 418 (390)]). 3. with the gen. of a thing did is used
to denote the manner in which a thing is done, or the
formal cause: ete dua mapaBodns, Lk. viii. 4; etre Ov
épdparos, Acts xviii. 9; amayyéAAew dd Adyov, by word of
mouth, Acts xv. 27; 7d Ady@ bv emoroddy, 2 Co. x. 11,
ef. 2 Th. ii. 15; mioris évepyoupérn d¢ dyamns, Gal. v. 6;
oud
kexdpiorar OC erayyedias, Gal. iii. 18; Sovdevew dia rHs
ayanns, Gal. v.13; emoredAdXew dia Bpaxéwv, Heb. xiii.
22; ypapew Sv ddiyor, 1 Pet. v. 12, (Plat. Gorg. p. 449 b.
dua paxpaev Adyous wroteia ar [see ddLyos, fin.; cf. W. § 51,
1b.]); dea xaprov kai pédavos, 2 Jn. 123; dca pedavos k.
kaddpov, 3 Jn. 13, (Plut. Sol. 17,3). To this head I
should refer also the use of 61a revos in exhortations etc.,
where one seeks to strengthen his exhortation by the
mention of a thing or a person held sacred by those
whom he is admonishing (dca equiv. to by an allusion to,
by reminding you of [ef. W. 381 (357)]): Ro. xii. 1;
xy. 305.1, Con. 20; 2. Cos. 15 10h. iv: 2 [yet ci: W.379
(355) note]; 2 Th. iii. 12 RG.
B. with the AccusATIVE [W. 398 (372) sq.]. ‘I. of
Place; through; often so in the Grk. poets, once in the
N. T. acc. to LT Tr WH viz. Lk. xvii. 11 81a péoov
Sapapeias, for RG dia pecov Sap. [but see péecos, 2].
II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which
anything is or is not done; by reason of, because of
(Germ. aus Grund). 1. of the reason for whicha
thing is done, or of the efficient reason, when for
ereater perspicuity it may be rendered by [cf. Kiihner
§ 434 Anm.]; a. with ace. of the thing: 8v¢ qy, viz.
Tv Tov Oeov nuepay (prop. by reason of which day i. e.
because it will come [ef. W. 400 (373)]), 2 Pet. iii. 12;
d:a r. Adyov (prop. by reason of the word i. e. because
the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3; dia 7d O€Anua
gov (Vulg. propter voluntatem tuam i. e. because thou
didst will it), Rev. iv. 11; add, Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14,
(dvaBi@okerar Sia THY Tov matpos vow, Plato, symp. p.
203 e.); cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 1. —_-b. with ace. of
the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, any-
thing is or is done: 6:a roy warépa .. . d¢ ewe (prop. be-
cause the father lives... because I live [ef. W. 399
(373)]), Jn. vi. 57; Sua tov trordéavra, by the will of
him who subjected it, opp. to ovx éxovoa, Ro. viii. 20
[ef. Win. 399 (373) note]; ay etrns ore Sua Kvpiov ameé-
ony, Sir. xv. 11; so too in the Grk. writ. of every age;
ef. Kriiger § 68, 23; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 25. Much
oftener 2. of the reason or cause on account
of which anything is or is done, or ought to be done;
on account of, because of; a. in the phrases 6:a todto
for this cause; for this reason; therefore; on this account;
since this is so? Mt. vi. 25; xii. 27, 31; xiii: 13, etc.;
Mics) vise Anes 3x1. 24 el komexte 49) extiven 2 Ok ne MenvilenG Obs aLiXe
23) - ACES) 11s 26s) NOs ZO Ve WGie Ve Me) wexaTT AO) wexv.0o)
1 Co-ivd7; xi. 109805, 2 Cos ive, Eph. i615 suv. 175
Ved (OLE 1 SP sh Mor shh SI Terk ay 7S OM Mogrie ails a Biree
ne 105 Hebi: 19s 1p dmenvevos orn 0; Rey. vite
15; xii. 12; xviii. 8. foll. by dr, for this cause... be-
cause, therefore ... because: Jn. v. 16, 18; viii. 473; x.
17; xii. 18, 39; 1 Jn. iii. 1; cf. Tholuck ed.7 on Jn. x.
17, {he questions, at least for x. 17 and xii. 39, the canon
of Meyer (on xii. 39), Luthardt (on x. 17), al., that in this
phrase in Jn. the rovro always looks backwards]. in the
opposite order (when the words that precede with 67 are
to be emphasized): Jn. xv. 19. It indicates the end
and purpose, being foll. either by iva, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1
134
dua
Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15, (in the opp. order, Jn. i. 31); or
by démws, Heb. ix. 15. dia ri [so L Tr WH] and written
together d:ari [so GT; ef. W.45; Lipsius, Gram. Unters.
p- 126], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; xvii. 19;
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 30; Jn. vii. 45; Acts v. 3; Ro. ix. 32; 1
Co. vi. 7; Rev. xvii. 7. 80 fy airiay, see aitia,1. tis 7 airta,
dv qv, Acts x. 21; xxiii. 28; 6a tavtny tH airiav, Acts
XXviil. 20; 6a radra, Eph. v.6,ete. b. used, with the ace.
of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is im-
pelled to some act [Eng. for; cf. W. 399 (372)]: da @O6-
voy, because prompted by envy, for envy, Mt. xxvii. 18;
Mk. xv. 10; dca tov PoBov twos, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 38; xx.
19; Rev. xviii. 10,15; dca ryv wodAnv ayanny, Eph. ii. 4.
of any other cause on account of which one is said to do
or to have done something, —as in Mt. xiv. 3,9; xv. 3, 6;
Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq.; xii. 11; xiv. 11; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro.
iii. 25 (Ova Thy mapeow TeV Tpoyey. duaptnu. because of the
pretermission etc., i. e. because he had left the sins un-
punished); Ro. vi. 19; xv. 15; 2 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iv. 13
(8¢ dodevevay THs capKés, on account of an infirmity of the
flesh, i. e. detained among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler
[or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc.) ; — or to suffer or have suffered
something, Mt. xxiv. 9; xxvii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts
KK SD 32 Connell Colnini. 6 aa Pet ynihaaihvev, aero
vi. 9; —or to have obtained something, Heb. ii. 9; v. 143 1
Jn. ii. 12 ;— or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10;
xi. 28; Eph. iv. 18; Heb. v. 12 [W. 399 (373) ]; vii. 18.
of the im peding cause, where by reason of some per-
son or thing something is said to have been impossible:
Mt. xiii. 58; xvii. 20; Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts
xxi. 34; Heb. iii. 19; iv. 6. 6a with the ace. of a pers.
is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. for the sake of ]: Mk.
iis 27 5: dn. i: 42s xi0.80. 1Comxt 65 Hebai As wis
dua Tovs éxAextovs, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; 2 Tim. ii.
10; da Xprordv for Christ’s sake, to promote his cause,
1 Co. iv. 10; Sv tpas, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9;
Phil. i. 24; 1 Th.i.5. 8d twa, because of the example
set by one: 2 Co. ii. 10; Ro. ii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 2; dia rov
Xpiordv for Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Phil.
iii. 7 (equiv. to va Xpiorov Kepdnae, vs. 8). c. dia Td,
because that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either
standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 23; — or having a
subject ace. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12; Mk. v. 4; Lk. ii.
4; xix.11; Acts iv. 2; xii. 20; xvili. 2; xxvil.4, 9; xxviii.
18; Phil. i. 7; Heb. vii. 24; x. 2; Jas. iv. 2;— or with its
subject ace. evident from the context, as Mt. xiii. 6; Mk.
iv. 6; Lk. xi. 8; xviii.5; xxiii. 8; Acts viii. 11; xviii. 3.
C. In Composition &a indicates _1. a passing
through space or time, through, (d:aBaive, depyopa, di-
Aigw, etc.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (diapéve, d:a-
Te€éw, Suatnpéw), and completeness of action (Scaxabapi¢e,
Scatovyvye). 3. distribution (dadid@pu, deayyedAro, dta-
dnpifw). 4. separation (Siadvo, duatpéw). 5. rival-
ry and endeavor (dtarriva, Suaxaredeyxopuat; cf. Herm. ad
Vig. p. 854; [Winer, as below, p. 6]). 6. transition
from one state to another (duadAdoow, di0pdw). [C£. Win-
er, De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v.; Valckenaer on Hdt. 5,
18; Caitier. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39; tA
SiaBaivo
Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. priip. zusammeng. verba
im N. T. p.17 sq.] No one of the N. T. writers makes
more freq. use of verbs compounded with éc4 than Luke,
[see the list in Winer, u. s. p. 3 note; on their constr. W.
§ 52, 4, 8].
Sia-Balivw: 2 aor. dueByv, inf. diaBnvar, ptep. duaBds ; as
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; (Plin. pertranseo) ; to pass
through, cross over; a. transitively : tiv @addaccar ws dua
énpas, Heb. xi. 29. b. intrans.: mpds twa, Lk. xvi. 26;
eis with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 9; (for V2y,15S. xiii. 7).*
Sta-BddAw : 1 aor. pass. dreBANOnY ; 1. prop. to throw
over or across, to send over, (ri diatiwos). 2. very often,
fr. Hdt. down, to traduce, calumniate, slander, accuse,
defame (cf. Lat. perstringere, Germ. durc hziehen, [61a
as it were from one to another; see Winer, De verb.
comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 17]), not only of those who bring a
false charge against one (die8Anto mpobs adrov ddikas,
Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 3), but also of those who disseminate
the truth concerning a man, but do so maliciously, insidi-
ously, with hostility (ef. Lucian’s Essay de calumn. non
temere credend.], (Dan. iii. 8 Sept.; Dan. vi. 24 Theo-
dot.) ; so dteBANOn aire ws Siackopri¢wv, Lk. xvi. 1 (with
dat. of pers. to whom the charge is made, also in Hat. 5,
35, et al.; twa mpos twa, Hdt. 5, 96, et al.; foll. by as
with ptep., Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 23; Plat. epp. 7 p. 334 a.).
[SYN. see xatnyopew. | *
Sta-PBeBardopar (-otvpar); mid. to affirm strongly, assert
confidently, [cf. W. 253 (238)]: mepi twos (Polyb. 12,
2) 26) 51) Mam.) 7, ef Wi. App. p> 16i7))3 hits ni.
8. (Dem. p. 220, 4; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ael.) *
Sia-Brerrw: fut. diaBreyro; 1 aor. dueBreyra; to look
through, penetrate by vision; a. to look fixedly, stare
straight before one (Plat. Phaedo p. 86 d.): duéBrewe, of
a blind man recovering sight, Mk. viii. 25 T WH Tr txt.
[some refer this tob.]. _b. to see clearly: foll. by an inf.
expressing the purpose, Mt. vii. 5; Lk. vi.42. (Aristot.,
Pluit.) *
StaBodos, -ov, (dvaBadro, q. v.), prone to slander, slander-
ous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut., al.): 1
Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. ii. 3; as subst. 6 d:aBodos,
a calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see katnyopéw,
fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11,5; [Aristot., al.]): Sept. Esth. vii.
4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. 6 diaBodos
[also dua. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118); B. 89
(78) ] is applied kar’ e€oxnv to the one called in Hebr.
jOW, 6 caravas (q. V-), viz. Satan, the prince of demons,
the author of evil, persecuting good men (Jobi.; Zech.
iii. 1 sqq., ef. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God
and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with dis-
eases by means of demons who take possession of their
bodies at his bidding; the malignant enemy of God and
the Messiah : Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11]; xiii. 39; xxv. 41; Lk.
iva 2, [3,9 RD, 6, 113]5 viii. 12; Jn. xiii..2; Acts x. 38;
ph. iv. 27; vi. 11; 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb.
ii. 14: Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v. 8; Jude 9; Rev. ii..103 xii.
9,12; xx. 2,10; (Sap. ii. 24; [cf. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 6; 1 Chr.
xxi.1]). Men who resemble the devil in mind and will
are said eivat ex Tov diaBodov to be of the devil, prop. to de-
135
Sidyo
rive their origin from the devil, trop. to depend upon the
devil in thought and action, to be prompted and governed
by him: Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; the same are called
texva tov diaB. children of the devil, 1 Jn. iii. 10; viot
tov 6. sons of the devil, Acts xiii. 10, cf. Mt. xiii. 38; Jn.
Vili. 38; 1Jn. iii. 10. The name é:a8onos is fig. applied
to a man who, by opposing the cause of God, may be
said to act the part of the devil or to side with him: Jn.
vi. 70, cf. Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. curay fin.] *
St-ayyéAAw ; 2 aor. pass. dinyyéAnv; fr. Pind. down; to
carry a message through, announce everywhere, through
places, through assemblies of men, etc.; to publish abroad,
declare, [see dia, C. 3]: ri, Lk. ix. 60; Acts xxi. 26 (Otay
yeAXov, sc. to all who were in the temple and were
knowing to the affair); with the addition ev racy rH ya,
Ro. ix. 17 fr. Ex.ix. 16. (Lev. xxv. 9; Josh. vi.10; Ps.
ii. 7; [lviii. (lix.) 13]; Sir. xliii. 2; 2 Mace. iii. 34.) *
Sid-ye, see ye, 1.
Sia-yivopar: 2 aor. dueyevouny ; 1. to be through, con-
tinue. 2. to be between, intervene; hence in Grk. writ.
fr. Isaeus (p. 84, 14, 9 [or. de Hagn. hered.] xpover diaye-
vouevoy) down, the aor. is used of time, to have intervened,
elapsed, passed meanwhile, [ef. xypdvov perakd diayevopevov
Lys. 93, 6]: nuepov Stayevopevwy twav, Acts xxv. 13;
ixavov xpovov Stayevopevov, Acts XxXvil. 9 ; Scayevopevov Tov
oaBBarov, Mk. xvi. 1.*
Sta-ywwookw ; fut. Scayvaooua; 1. to distinguish (Lat.
dignosco), i. e. to know accurately, ascertain exactly: ti,
Acts xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2.
in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic.
cognosco): ta xa@’ tpas your case, Acts xxiv. 22; (2
Mace. ix. 15; Dem. p. 629, 25; p. 545, 9; al.).*
Sta-yvepifw: 1 aor. dueyyapioa; to publish abroad, make
known thoroughly: mept twos, Lk. ii. 17 RG. Besides,
only in [ Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang.
and] in Schol. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate.*
Sid-yvwos, -ews, 7, (see dtaywvaok@) ; 1. a distin-
guishing. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. cognitio), examina-
tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 18; Plat. legg. 9 p.865 c.):
Acts xxv. 21.*
Sia-yoyyvtw: impf. dieydyyugov; to murmur (é&a i.e.
either through a whole crowd, or ‘among one another,’
Germ. durch einander [cf. 8:4, C.]); hence it is always
used of many indignantly complaining (see yoyyi¢@) :
Lk. xv. 2; xix.7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7,8; [Num. xiv. 2]; Josh.
ix. 24 (18), etc.; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24; Clem. Alex. i.
p- 528 ed. Pott.; Heliod. 7, 27, and in some Byzant. writ.)
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.*
Sta-ypnyopew, -@: 1 aor. dveypnydpnoa; to watch through,
(Hdian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] maons tis vucros .. . dia-
yenyopnaavtes, Niceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571
a.); to remain awake: Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome
the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down,
BeBapnp- Urvo); [al. (e.g. R. V. txt.) to be fully awake,
cf. Niceph. u. s. p. 205 f. S0fav ameBadounv dorep oi dia-
yenyoprcartes Ta €v Tois Umvors dveipara; Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11 sq. ].*
Si-dyo ; 1. to lead through, lead across, send across.
diadéyopmat 136
2. with rdv Biov, roy xpdvov, etc., added or understood,
to pass: Biov, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (very often in Grk. writ.) ;
diayew év Tim, sc. Tov Biov to live [W. 593 (551 sq.) ; B.
144 (126)], Tit. iii. 3 (€v pdrocodia, Plat. Phaedr. p.
259 d.3 év eipyvy Kai cxodj, Plut. Timol. 3).*
Sia-Séxopar: 1 aor. duedeEaunv; prop. to receive through
another anything left or bequeathed by him, to receive in
succession, receive in turn, succeed to: tiv oxnyny the
tabernacle, Acts vii. 45. (tiv apxny, thy BacvdeLar, etc.,
in Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.) [Cf. d€xopat. |*
SdSnpa, -ros, 7d, (d:ad€w to bind round), a diadem, i.e.
the blue band marked with white with which Persian
kings used to bind on the turban or tiara; the kingly or-
nament for the head: Rev. xii. 3; xiii. 1; xix. 12. (Xen.
Cyr. 8, 3,13; Esth.i.11; ii.17 for 103; 1 Mace. i. 9.)*
[Synx. 51ddnua, orégpavos: or. like the Lat. corona is
a crown in the sense of a chaplet, wreath, or garland — the
badge of “victory in the games, of civic worth, of military
valor, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness”; d:d5yua is a crown
as the badge of royalty, BaciAcias yydpioua (Lucian, Pise. 35).
Cf. Trench § xxiii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 1; Dict. of
Christ. Antiq. s. v. Coronation p. 464sq.; B.D. Am. ed.s.v.
Diadem; but ef. erépavos, a.]
S1a-SiSwpt; fut. duadvdoow (Rev. xvii. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor.
d:€bw@xa ; 2 aor. impv. diados; Pass., impf. 3 pers. sing.
duediSo0ro (Acts iv. 35), for which L T Tr WH read Ste-
didero (see amobidopt) ; 1. to distribute, divide among
several [cf. 8a, C. 3]: ri, Lk. xi. 22; ri run, Lk. xviii. 22
(Lehm. 86s); Jn. vi. 11 (Tdf. fSexev) ; pass. Acts iv. 35.
Its meaning is esp. illustrated by Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 7 rév
Kipov AaBdvra tov Kpedv diadidvat Trois . . . Peparevtais
. . ToadTa errolet, Ews Stedidov mavta a édaBe Kpéa. 2
to give over, deliver: ri tun, Rev. xvii. 13; but here G L
T Tr WH have restored dddacr (cf. Sida, init.).*
$14-50xX 0s, -ov, 6, 7, (Suadeyopar), succeeding, a successor :
Acts xxiv. 27. (Sir. xlvi. 1; [xlviii. 8]; 2 Mace. xiv. 26;
often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 5, 26 down.) *
Sia-Lwovvio or dvaf@vyvps: 1 aor. dieCwoa; 1 aor. mid.
dieCwodunv; pf. pass. ptep. dieCaopevos; to bind or gird
all around (1a; this force of the prep. appears in the
trop. use of the verb in Plut. Brut. 31, 2 as & 9 proé pueioa
kai dtal(woaca mavtayxdbev tHy ToAwW diehape Tod-
An) : €avrov, Jn. xiii. 4; Pass. dalavvypal ri to be girded :
® (by attraction for 6 [yet cf. Mey.]) Av dieCoopévos, Jn.
xiii. 5; Mid. d&caf@vvupai re to gird one’s self with a thing,
gird a thing around one’s self: Jn. xxi. 7; (Ezek. xxiii.
15 [Alex.]. in Grk. writ. occasionally fr. Thue. on).
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v.,p. 13.*
SiabAKn, -ns, 7, (ScariOnur); 1. a disposition, arrange-
ment, of any sort, which one wishes to be valid, (Germ.
Verordnung, Willensverfiigung): Gal. iii. 15, where un-
der the name of a man’s disposition is meant specifically a
testament, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of
that disposition [cf. Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loe.]; esp. the
last disposal which one makes of his earthly possessions
after his death, a testament or will (so in Grk. writ. fr.
[Arstph.], Plat. lege. 11 p. 922 c. sqq. down): Heb. ix.
16 sq. 2. a compact, covenant (Arstph. av. 440),
very often in the Scriptures for m3 (Vulg. testamen-
d1aOjKn
tum). For the word covenant is used to denote the close
relationship which God entered into, first with Noah
(Gen. vi. 18; ix. 9 sqq. [ef. Sir. xliv. 18]), then with
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob and their posterity (Lev.
xxvi. 42 [ef. 2 Mace. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen.
xv. and xvii.), and afterwards through Moses with the
people of Israel (Ex. xxiv.; Deut. v. 2; xxviii. 69 (xxix.
1)). By this last covenant the Israelites are bound to
obey God’s will as expressed and solemnly promulged in
the Mosaic law; and he promises them his almighty
protection and blessings of every kind in this world,
but threatens transgressors with the severest punish-
ments. Hence in the N.T. we find mention of ai makes
ths SvaOnkns (IVI3N ning), Deut. ix. 9, 15), the tables of
the law, on which the duties of the covenant were inscribed
(Ex. xx.); of 7 KBords ris Sia8. (139 TIN, Deut. x.
8; xxxi. 9; Josh. iii. 6, ete.), the ark of the covenant or
law, in which those tables were deposited, Heb. ix. 4 ;
Rey. xi. 19; of 7 Sta@nxn mepitophs the covenant of cir-
cumcision, made with Abraham, whose sign and seal was
circumcision (Gen. xvii. 10 sqq.), Acts vii. 8; of rd aia
THs SvaOnkns the blood of the victims, by the shedding and
sprinkling of which the Mosaic covenant was ratified,
Heb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8; of af dsaOjKa the covenants,
one made with Abraham, the other through Moses with
the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mrg. 7 dca8nxn] (Sap.
XVili. 22; Sir. xliv. 11; 2 Mace. viii. 15; Ep. of Barn. 9;
[ef. W. 177 (166)]); of ai dtaOqKa THs emayyedias, the
covenants to which the promise of salvation through the
Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 12 (cuv@pxar dyabar tirro-
oxéoeov, Sap. xii. 21); for Christian salvation is the
fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those coy-
enants, esp. to that made with Abraham: Lk. i. 72 sq.;
Acts iii. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (where dca6qxn is
God’s arrangement i. e. the promise made to Abraham).
As the new and far more excellent bond of friendship
which God in the Messiah’s time would enter into with
the people of Israel is called AWIN 1°73, Kaw ScaOjKy
(Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31),— which divine promise Christ
has made good (Heb. viii. 8-10; x. 16), — we find in the
N. T. two distinct covenants spoken of, dv0 duabjKar (Gal.
iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the
former of which (79 mparn StaOqxn, Heb. ix. 15, 18, ef.
viii. 9) the latter is contrasted, as kawvy dca6yxn, Mt. xxvi.
28; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass. in RGL [in Mt. in Tr
also]); Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25;
2 Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8; xpetrrwy Siabqxn, Heb. vii. 22;
alévos Siabqen, Heb. xiii. 20; and Christ is called xpeir-
rovos or Kaw7s or véas Siabnxns peoitns: Heb. viii. 6; ix.
15; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise
faith in Christ, and God promises them grace and salva-
tion eternal. This covenant Christ set up and ratified by
undergoing death; hence the phrases 76 aiya rhs Kawns
SiwaOyxns, Td aipa ris StaOqKns, (see aiua sub fin.), [Heb.
x. 29]; 7d alud pov ris Sua6nxns, my blood by the shed-
ding of which the covenant is established, Mt. xxvi. 28
T WH and Mk. xiv. 24 T Tr WH (on two gen. after one
noun cf. Matthiae § 380, Anm. 1; Kiihner ii. p. 288 sq.;
‘
el
Svaipeocs
[Jelf § 543, 1, cf. § 466; W.§ 30, 3 Note 3; B. 155 (136)]).
By metonymy of the contained for the container 7 radaca
dcaOnen is used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of the sacred books of the
O. T. because in them the conditions and principles of
the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be
noted the amphiboly or twofold use [cf. Philo de mut.
nom. § 6] by which the writer to the Hebrews, in ix. 16
sq., substitutes for the meaning covenant which dca0j«y
bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of testament (see 1 above),
and likens Christ to a testator, — not only because the
author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be-
queathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring
to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is
made possible for the disciples of Christ by his death
(ix. 15), and that even the Mosaic covenant had been
consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led
the Latin Vulgate to render va6j«n wherever it occurs
in the Bible [i. e. in the New Test., not always in the
Old; see B.D. s. v. Covenant, and B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Testament] by the word testamentum.*
St-alpeots, -ews, 7, (Ovaipew, q. V-) 5 1. division, dis-
tribution, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. distinction, differ-
ence, (Plat. Soph. p. 267 b. riva d:aipeow ayvwoias te Kai
yracews Onoopuev; al.) ; in particular, a distinction arising
from a different distribution to different persons, [A.V.
diversity |: 1 Co. xii. 4—6, cf. 11 dcarpody idia Exaor@ Kabos
BovAerau.*
Si-atpew, -@; 2 aor. dvethov; 1. to divide into parts,
to part, to tear, cleave or cut asunder, (Hom. and subseq.
writ.; Gen. xv. 10; 1 K. iii. 25). 2. to distribute: ti
run (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,51; Hell. 3, 2, 10): Lk. xv. 12; 1
Co. xii. 11; (Josh. xviii. 5; 1 Chr. xxiii. 6, etc.).*
[Sia-KaSaipw: 1 aor. dvexadapa (un-Attic and later form ;
ef. Moeris, ed. Piers. p. 137; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25; Veitch
s. v. kaaipw), inf. Suaxabapar; to cleanse (throughly cf. da,
C. 2 ie.) thoroughly: Lk. iii. 17 TWH Lure. Tr mre. ;
for RG dvaxabapifw. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat. down.) *]
Sia-Ka8apitw: fut. duaxadapio [ B. 37 (32); W.§ 13,1 ¢.;
WH. App. p. 163]; to cleanse thoroughly, (Vulg. per-
mundo): tiv Gova, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17 [T WH ete.
Siaxabapa, q. v.]. (Not found in prof. auth., who use
Siaxabaipw, as tv dda, Alciphr. ep. 3, 26.) *
Sta-Kat-eAcyxopar: impf. divaxarnr\eyydpuny; to confute
with rivalry and effort or in a contest (on this use of the
prep. dia in compos. cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 854; [al. give
it here the sense of completeness ; see dia, C. 2]): with
dat. of pers. [W. § 31,1f.; B. 177 (154) ]; not found exc.
in Acts xviii. 28 [R. V. powerfully confuted].*
Staxovéw, -d; impf. dinxdvouy (as if the verb were com-
pounded of é:a and dkovéw, for the rarer and earlier form
edvaxdvovr, cf. B. 35 (31); Ph. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. §86 Anm.
6; Kriiger § 28, 14, 13); [fut. dsaxovrmow]; 1 aor. dinkd-
moa (for the earlier éS:axdvnoa) ; Pass., pres. ptep. d:a-
kovovpevos; 1 aor. inf. ScaxovnOjvat, ptcp. dcaxovnbeis ;
(dtdkovos, q. v.) ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.], Hdt. down ; to
be a servant, attendant, domestic; to serve, wait.upon; 1.
univ.: [absol. 6 dcaxovav, Lk. xxii. 26]; with dat. of
pers. to minister to one ; render ministering offices to : Jn.
1387
ditakovia
xii. 26; Acts xix. 22; Philem. 13; Pass. to be served,
ministered unto (W. § 39,1; [B. 188 (163)]): Mt. xx.
28; Mk.x.45. 2. Like the Lat. ministrare, to wait
at table and offer food and drink to the quests, [ef. W. 598
(552) ]: with dat. of pers., Mt. iv. 11; viii. 15; Mk.i. 13,
31; Lk. iv. 39; xii. 37; xvii. 8; absol. 6 Staxovaev, Lk.
xxii. 27; soalso of women preparing food, Lk. x. 40; Jn.
xii. 2; (Menand. ap. Athen. 6 c. 46, p. 245 ¢.; Anacr.
4,6; al.; pass. dcaxovetoOat id twos, Diod. 5, 28; Philo,
vit. contempl. § 9). 3. to minister i.e. supply food and
the necessaries of life: with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 44;
xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 41; dipxdvouv adrois ék (Rec. dd)
Tay Umapxovr@v avtais, Lk. viii. 3; to relieve one’s neces-
sities (e. g. by collecting alms): Ro. xv. 25 ; Heb. vi. 10;
tparé{as , to provide, take care of, distribute, the things
necessary to sustain life, Acts vi. 2. absol., those are
said dcaxoveir, i. e. to take care of the poor and the sick,
who administer the oflice of deacon (see d:axovos, 2) in
the Christian churches, to serve as deacons: 1 Tim. iii.
10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen-
eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace.
of the thing, fo minister i. e. attend to, anything, that may
serve another’s interests: yapis Staxovovpevn bp par, 2
Co. viii. 19; [adporns, ibid. 20]; daa Sinxdvnoe, how many
things I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. 18; émvrrody
diaxovnbeioa i jnpav, an epistle written, as it were, by
our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 3. with ace. of the
thing and dat. of pers., to minister a thing unto one, to
serve one with or by supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; ri
eis €auTovs, i. e. els GAANAOvs to one another, for mutual
use wleletaiive, 0."
Staxovia, -as, 7), (Suaxovos), [fr. Thuc., Plat. down], ser-
vice, ministering, esp. of those who execute the commands
of others; 1. univ.: 2 Tim. iv. 11; Heb. i. 14. 2:
of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro-
mote religion among men; a. of the office of Moses:
7 Svak. Tov Oavdrov, concisely for the ministration by
which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings
death, 2 Co. iii. 7; tis kataxpicews, the ministration by
which condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the
office of the apostles and its administration: Acts i.
D725 xx. 248 xxi, 193! Ro: xis/13 92 Co. v.15) vi. 35
1 Tim. i. 12; rod Adyov, Acts vi. 4; tod mvetparos, the
ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and
be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. ili. 8; tis Suxato-
avvns, by which men are taught how they may become
righteous with God, ibid. 9; 77s kara\Xay7s, the ministry
whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered
reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18; mpods thy tpav dca-
koviav, that by preaching the gospel I might minister
unto you, 2 Co. xi. 8. ¢. of the ministration or service
of all who, endowed by God with powers of mind and
heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously
and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among
men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, etc. : 1 Co.
xii.5; Eph. iv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 5. What ministry is re-
ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the ministra-
tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian
dSuaKovos
affection: 1 Co. xvi. 15; Rev. ii. 19, esp. of those who
succor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac-
tions [Acts xii. 25]; the care of the poor, the supplying
or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Handreichung) :
Acts vi. 1; 2 Co. ix. 133 9 d:axovia 7 eis rods dyious, 2 Co.
vill. 4; ix. 1; 7 dvaxovia rns Aecroupyias, the ministration
rendered through this Ne:rovpyia, 2 Co. ix. 12; méprew
eis Staxoviay rw, to send a thing to one for the relief of
his want [ A. V. to send relief unto], Acts xi. 29 (kopiceww
xXpnpata ToAXG eis Staxoviay rav xnpev, Acta Thomae § 56,
p- 233 ed. Tdf.); Scaxovia pov 7 eis ‘Iepovoad. “ my min-
istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis-
tration intended for Jerusalem ” (Fritzsche), Ro. xv. 31
[here L Tr mrg. read 7 S@poopia . . . év etc. ]. 4. the
office of deacon in the primitive church (see d:dkovos,
2); Rosai. 7. 5. the service of those who prepare
and present food: Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oec. 7, 41).*
SidKovos, -ov, 6, 7, (of uncert. origin, but by no means,
as was formerly thought, compounded of da and kéus,
so as to mean prop. ‘raising dust by hastening’; ef.
eyxoveiv ; for a in the prep. dia is short, in d:dkovos long.
Bitm. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 231 sq.] thinks
it is derived fr. obsol. diakw i. q. Sux [allied with d:adxe ;
ef. Vanicek p. 363]); one who executes the commands
of another, esp. of a master; a servant, attendant, min-
ister ; 1. univ.: of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii.
13; with gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 26; xxiii. 11;
Mk. ix. 35; x. 43, (in which pass. it is used fig. of those
who advance others’ interests even at the sacrifice of their
own) ; THs exkAnoias, of one who does what promotes the
welfare and prosperity of the church, Col. i. 25; Ssdkovor
tov Geov, those through whom God carries on his admin-
istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4; teachers
of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5; 2 Co. vi.4; 1 Th. iii.
2RTTrWH txt. Lmrg.; the same are called d:dcovor
(rod) Xprorod, 2 Co. xi. 23; Col. i. 7; 1 Tim. iv. 6; ev xupio,
in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7; [Eph. vi. 21]; 6 d:dk.
pov my follower, Jn. xii. 26; rod Sarava, whom Satan
uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [dpaprias, Gal. ii. 17];
Oudk. meptrouns (abstr. for coner.), of Christ, who labored
for the salvation of the circumcised i. e. the Jews, Ro. xv.
8; with gen. of the thing to which service is rendered,
i. e. to which one is devoted: kawhs diabqxns, 2 Co. iii. 6 ;
Tov evayyediov, Eph. iii. 7; Col. i. 23; dSceacoodyns, 2 Co.
as 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office
assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has
charge of and distributes the money collected for their
use, [cf. BB.DD., Dict. of Christ. Antiq., Schaff-Herzog
s. v. Deacon; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. dissert. i. §i.;
Julius Miiller, Dogmatische Abhandlungen, p. 560
sqq-]: Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 12, cf. Acts vi. 3 sqq.;
7) Suakovos, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp. 10, 97), a wo-
man to whom the care of either poor or sick women was
entrusted, Ro. xvi.1 [ef. Dicts. as above, s. v. Deaconess ;
Lghtft. as above p. 191; B. D. s. v. Phebe]. 3. a
waiter, one who serves food and drink: Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in
Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3, 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31,4, 5;
Leian. de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, ps29l as; 10;
138
diaxpivo
420e.; see diaxovéw, 2 and -via, 5; [also Wetst. on Mt. iv.
02" ;
[Syn. 5idkovos, SodA0s, Oepdrwy, brnpérns: “did-
kovos represents the servant in his activity for the work; not
in his relation, either servile, as that of the 500A0s, or more
voluntary, as in the case of the @epdrwy, to a person”
Trench ; [yet cf. e. g. Ro. xiii.4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 ete.]. S00A0s
opp. to €AevGepos, and correlate to deamdrns or kdpios, denotes
a bondman, one who sustains a permanent servile relation to
another. @epdmwy is the voluntary performer of services,
whether as a freeman or a slave ; it is a nobler, tenderer word
than dovAos. snp. acc. to its etymol. suggests subordi-
nation. Cf. Trench § ix.; B. D.s. v. Minister; Mey. on
Eph. iii. 7; Schmidt ch. 164.]
Staxdcror, -ar, -a, (wo hundred : Mk. vi. 37; Jn. vi. 7, ete.
St-axovw: fut. duaxovcoua; prop. to hear one through,
hear to the end, hear with care, hear fully, (cf. 8a, C. 2]
(Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause, Acts xxiii.
35; so in Deut. i. 16; Dio Cass. 36, 53 (36).*
Sta-Kpivw ; impf. duexpivov; 1 aor. duekpwva; Mid., [pres.
Siaxpivouar]; impf. dvexpedpnv; 1 aor. StexpiOny (in prof.
auth. in a pass. sense, to be separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B.
52 (45) ]); in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; in Sept. chiefly
for 0D, also for 1 T ete. 1. to separate, make a dis-
tinction, discriminate, [cf. dra, C. 4]: ovdev dréexpwe perakd
nav Te kal avrav, Acts xv. 9; pndev Scaxpivavra, making
no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12
LT Tr WH; like the Lat. distinguo, used emphatically :
to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest,
in effect i.q. to prefer, yield to him the preference or
honor: twa, 1 Co. iv. 7 [ef. W. 452 (421)]; ro capa (rod
kupiov), 1 Co. xi. 29. 2. to learn by discrimination,
to try, decide: Mt. xvi. 3 ['T br. WH reject the pass.]; 1
Co. xiv. 29; éavrdv, 1 Co. xi. 813 to determine, give judg-
ment, decide a dispute: 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass.and Mid. to be
parted, to separate one’s self from; 1. to withdraw from
one, desert him (Thue. 1,105; 3, 9); of heretics withdraw-
ing from the society of true Christians (Sozom. 7, 2 [p. 705
ed. Vales.] ek rovrov of ev Staxpibertes idia exxAnoiagor) :
Jude 22 ace. to the (preferable) reading of L T Tr txt.
ehéeyyere Suaxpwopevors, those who separate themselves from
you, i.e. who apostatize ; instead of the Rec. édecire d:a-
kpwopevo, Which is to be rendered, making for yourselves
a selection; cf. Huther ad loc.; [others though adopting
the reading preferred above, refer dvaxp. to the following
head and translate it while they dispute with you; but
WH (see their App.) Tr mrg. follow codd. 8B and a few
other author. in reading édeare Swaxpivopévovs ace. to
which dcaxp. is probably to be referred to signification 3:
R. V. txt. “on some have mercy, who are indoubt”]. 2.
to separate one’s self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive
with, dispute, contend: with dat. of pers. Jude 9, (Polyb.
2, 22,11 [cf. W. § 31,1¢g.; B.177 (154) ]); mpés teva, Acts
xi. 2, (Hdt. 9, 58). 3. in a sense not found in prof.
auth. to be at variance with one’s self, hesitate, doubt: Mt.
xxi. 21; Ro. xiv. 23; Jas. i. 6; év 77 kapdia avrod, Mk. xi.
23 ; ev éavt@ [i. e.-rois], Jas. ii. 4 [al. refer this to 1: do
ye not make distinctions among yourselves]; pndev dcaxpe-
vouevos, nothing doubting i. e. wholly free from doubt,
Sudxpiows
Jas. i. 6; without any hesitation as to whether it be law-
ful or not, Acts x. 20 and acc. to RG in xi. 12; od dve-
pion Th amoria he did not hesitate through want of faith,
Ro. iv. 20.*
Sid-Kpioris, -ews, 7, (Staxpive), a distinguishing, discern-
ing, judging: mvevpatar, 1 Co. xii. 10; kaXod re Kal Kaxov,
Heb. v. 143 pi eis Suaxpioers Sadoy:opar not for the pur-
pose of passing judgment on opinions, as to which one is
to be preferred as the more correct, Ro. xiv. 1 [see d:a-
Noyiopos, 1}. (Xen., Plat., al.) *
Sta-kwdvw: impf. duex@Avoy; (did in this compound does
not denote effort as is com. said, but separation,
Lat. dis, cf. Germ. verhindern, Lat. prohibere; cf. da-
kXelo, to separate by shutting, shut out ; cf. Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17 sq.); to hinder, prevent: twa,
Mt. iii. 14 [on the tense cf. W. § 40, 3.c.; B. 205 (178) ].
(From Soph. and Thue. down.) *
Sia-Aadkéw: impf. dueAdAovv; impf. pass. dcehadovpyv;
to converse together, to talk with, (8a denoting by turns,
or one with another; see dvaxaredéyyouat), Ti, pass.
[were talked of ], Lk. i. 65; mpds ddXnAovs (as Polyb. 23,
9, 6), ri dv romoecav [-caey al. ], of the conference of men
deliberating, Lk. vi. 11. (Eur. Cyel. 175.) *
Sia-A€yopar; impf. dueAeydunv; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing. dte-
hé~aro (LT Tr WH in Acts xvii. 25 xviii. 19)]; 1 aor.
dieAéx nv; (mid. of dad€ya, to select, distinguish) ; iL.
to think different things with one’s self, mingle thought with
thought (cf. Sadoyi¢opar) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so
in Hom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, dis-
course with one, argue, discuss: absol., Acts [xviil. 4];
xix. 8 sq.; [xx. 9]; mepi twos, Acts xxiv. 25; revi, with
one, Acts xvii. 17; xviii. 19; xx. 7; Heb. xii. 5; amé ray
ypapar, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts
xvii. 2; mpds twa, Acts xvii. 17; xxiv. 12; with the idea
of disputing prominent: mpds ddAndovs, foll. by interrog.
tis, Mk. ix. 34; mept twos, Jude 9.*
Sta-Aetrw: [2 aor. dueAurov]; to interpose a delay, to in-
termit, leave off for a time something already bequn: od
diéderre [T WH mre. d:éXeurev] katadiAovea (on the ptep.
cf. W. § 45, 4 a.; [B. 300 (257)]), she has not ceased
kissing, has continually kissed, Lk. vii. 45. (Is. v. 14;
Jer. xvii. 8; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
Sid-AekTos, -ov, 7), (Suareya) ; 1. conversation, speech,
discourse, language (Plat., Dem., al.). 2. fr. Polyb.
[ef. Aristot. probl. 10, 38 rod dvOparov pia pavn, adda
duaArextot todAai| down, the tongue or language peculiar
to any people: Acts i. 19; ii. 6, 8; xxi.40; xxil. 2; xxvi.
14. (Polyb. 1, 80, 6; 3, 22,3; 40, 6, 3 sq.; peOepynvever
eis THY “EXAnver Siadextov, Diod. 1, 37; maca pev diddexros,
7 & AAnuxyn Scahepdvtes dvoyatwv movtet, Philo, vit.
Moys. ii. § 7; [cf. Miiller on Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 22, 4 fin.].)*
[Sta-Aismdve (or -Avurdve): impf. dveAiumavoyv; to in-
termit, cease: kAai@v od dteXipmavev, Acts vill. 24 WH (re-
jected) mrg.; cf. W. 345 sq. (323 sq.); B. 300 (257).
(Tobit x. 7; Galen in Hippocr. Epid. 1, 3; ef. Bornem.
on Acts l. ¢c.; Veitch s. v. Acumave.) *]
Si-adddoow: 2 aor. pass. dindddynv; (see dud, C. 6);
1. to change: ti dvri twos [cf. W. 206 (194)]. 2. to
139
SiapapTvupopar
change the mind of any one, to reconcile (so fr. [Aeschyl.]
Thuc. down): twa trun. Pass. to be reconciled, rwi, to re-
new friendship with one: Mt. v. 24; (1 S. xxix. 4; 1
Esdr. iv. 31). See Fritzsche’s learned discussion of this
word in his Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [in opp. to
Tittmann’s view that it implies mutual enmity; see
kata\\dooe, fin.]; cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. pp.
7,10; [ Tholuck, Bergrede Christi, p. 171 (on Mt. v. 24) ].*
Sia-Aoylfopar; dep. mid.; impf. dveAoysfounv; [1 aor.
SteAoyrodpnv, Lk. xx. 14 Lehm.]; (é:d as in dcadéyouat) ;
to bring together different reasons, to reckon up the reasons,
to reason, revolve in one’s mind, deliberate: simply, Lk. i.
29; v. 21; év rm kapdia, Mk. ii. 6, 8; Lk. v. 22; with ad-
dition of mepi ruvos, Lk. ili. 15 ; ev éavr@ [or -rots |], with-
in himself, ete., Mk. ii. 8; Lk. xii. 17; év €avrois i. q. ev
addnAous among themselves, Mt. xvi. 7 sq.; mpos éavrovs
i. q. mpos GAANAovs, one turned towards another, one with
another, Mk. ix. 33 Rec.; xi. 31 L T Tr WH; Lk. xx.
14; mpos adAndous, MK. viii. 16 ; Tap €aurots [see zrapd,
II. c.], Mt. xxi. 25 [L Tr WH txt. ev €.]; dre, Jn. xi. 50
Ree. ; dtc equiv. to mept rovrov ériz, Mk. viii. 17. (For
awr several times in the Psalms; 2 Mace. xii. 43; in
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) *
Sia-Aoyirpds, -ov, 6, (dcadoyiCopar), Sept. for NawMn
and Chald. }¥y9, in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down, the thinking
of a man deliberating with himself; hence 1. athought,
inward reasoning: Lk. ii. 35; v. 22; vi. 8; ix. 46 sq.;
Ro. xiv. 1 [yet some bring this under 2]; the reasoning
of those who think themselves to be wise, Ro. i. 21; 1
Co. iii. 20; an opinion: kptral diadoyiopev movnpay judges
with evil thoughts, i.e. who follow perverse opinions, rep-
rehensible principles, Jas. ii. 4 [ef, W. 187 (176)]; pur-
pose, design: Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21. 2. a deliberat-
ing, questioning, about what is true: Lk. xxiv. 38; when
in reference to what ought to be done, hesitation, doubt-
ing: xopis yoyyvopar kai diadoyicper, Phil. ii. 14 [‘ yoyy.
is the moral, dcad. the intellectual rebellion against
God’ Bp. Lghtft.]; ywpis dpyns x. duadoyiopod, 1 ‘Tim. ii.
8; [in the last two pass. al. still advocate the rendering
disputing; yet cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. ¢.].*
Sia-Adw : 1 aor. pass. SueAVOqv ; to dissolve [ef. dua, C. 4]:
in Acts v. 36 of a body of men broken up and dispersed,
as often in Grk. writ.*
Sta-papripopar; dep. mid.; impf. denaprupduny (Acts
ii. 40 Rec.); 1 aor. Scewaprupayny; in Sept. mostly for
yn; often in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down; see a multitude
of exx. fr. them in Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 20
sqq-3 to call gods and men to witness [ dca, with the inter-
position of gods and men; cf. Ellic. (after Win.) on 1
Tim-iv..214)5 1. to testify, i. e. earnestly, religiously to
charge: foll. by an impv. Acts il. 40; évezov Tov Oeod x.
Xporod "Inood, 2 Tim. iv.1, (2 K. xvii. 13; Xen. Cyr. 7,
1,17 od py mpdtepov euBadXe Tots Trodepiors, Suaaprvpopat,
mplv ete.) ; also with evamtoy Tov Oeod xrX. foll. by iva [cf.
B. 237 (204)], 1 Tim. v. 21, (foll. by un, Ex. xix. 21);
foll. by the inf. 2 Tim. ii. 14 [not Lehm.], (Neh. ix. 26).
2. to attest, testify to, solemnly affirm: Acts xx. 23; 1 Th.
iv.6; Heb. ii. 6; foll. by érz, Acts x. 42; with dat. of pers.
Siapayowar
to give solemn testimony to one, Lk. xvi. 28; with acc. of
the obj. to confirm a thing by (the interposition of)
testimony, to testify, cause it to be believed: tov Néyov Tov
kupiov, Acts vill. 25; 70 evayyeAov, Acts xx. 24; thy Ba-
oiXclay Tov Geov, Acts xxviii. 23; for all the apostolic in-
struction came back finally to testimony respecting things
which they themselves had seen or heard, or which had
been disclosed to them by divine revelation, (Acts i. 21
sq-; v.32; x.41; xxii. 18); with the addition of eis and
an ace. of the place unto which the testimony is borne :
ra Tept épov eis ‘Iepova. Acts xxiii. 11; with the addition
of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : rots
‘lovdalots toy Xpiordv “Incodv, the Messianic dignity of
Jesus, Acts xviii. 5; "Iovd. rv peravorav kai trict, the
necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21, (77 ‘Iepova.
ras dvopias, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).*
Sia-paxopar: impf. duepaxduny; to fight it out; contend
fiercely: of disputants, Acts xxiii. 9. (Sir. viii. 1, 3;
very freq. in Attic writ.) *
Sia-pévw ; [impf. dcewevoy]; 2 pers. sing. fut. dvamevets
(Heb. i. 11 Knapp, Bleek, al., for Rec. [G LT Tr
WH al.] Scapeévers); 1 aor. dtépewva; pt. Stapepervnxa; to
stay permanently, remain permanently, continue, [cf. per-
dure; Sua, C. 2] (Philo de gigant. § 7 mvetpa Oeiov pévew
duvaroy ev uy, Stapevery Se advvarov): Gal. il. 5; opp.
to awdAAvpar, Heb. i. 11 fr. Ps. ci. (cii-) 27; with an adj.
or ady. added denoting the condition : d:ێpewe kodds, Lk.
i. 22; ovr, as they are, 2 Pet. iii. 4; to persevere: év rim,
Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.) *
Sia-pepi{w: impf. dvenepefov; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur.
Siapepioare; Pass., [pres. dcapepiopar]; pf. ptep. dcape-
peptopevos; 1 aor. StepepioOnv; fut. dapeprrOnoopat ; [ Mid.,
pres. SiapepiCowa; 1 aor. dreveprrapny |; to divide; a
to cleave asunder, cut in pieces: (Ga SiapepioOevra sc. by
the butcher, Plat. lege. 8 p. 849 d.; ace. to a use pecu-
liar to Lk. in pass. to be divided into opposing parts, to be
at variance, in dissension: émi twa, against one, Lk. xi.
17 sq.3 émi ru, xii. 52 sq. 2. to distribute (Plat. polit.
p- 289 e.; in Sept. chiefly for pon): ri, Mk. xv. 24 Rec.;
vt tut, Lk. xxii. 17 (where L T Tr WH eis €avrovs for
RG €avrois); Acts ii. 45; Pass. Acts ii. 3; Mid. to dis-
tribute among themselves: ri, Mt. xxvii. 85; Mk. xv. 24
GLT Tr WH; Lk. xxiii. 34; with éavrois added, [Mt.
xxvii. 35 Rec.]; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19.*
Sia-pepiopds, -od, 6, (StapepiCw), division ; 1. a part-
ing, distribution: Plat. legg. 6 p. 771 d.; Diod. 11, 47;
Joseph. antt. 10, 11, 7, Sept. Ezek. xlviii. 29; Mic. vii.
2. 2. disunion, dissension: opp. to eipnyn, Lk. xii.
51; see diapepico, 1.*
Sta-vépw: 1 aor. pass. dteveweOnv; to distribute, divide,
(Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.): pass. eis rov Nadv to be dis-
seminated, spread, among the people, Acts iv. 17.*
Sia-vedw ; to express one’s meaning by a sign, nod to,
beckon to, wink at, (dua, because “ the sign is conceived of
as passing through the intervening space to him to whom
it is made” Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 4): Lk.
1, 22. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Sir. xxvii. 22; Diod. 3,
18; 17.37; Leian. ver. hist. 2, 44; Icarom. 15; [al.].)*
140
SuaTrepaw
Sta-vonpa, -ros, Td, (Stavo€w to think), a thouyht: Lk. xi.
17. (Sept.; Sir.; often in Plat.) *
Sidvora, -as, 7, (Sid and vods), Sept. for 25 and 325;
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl.] Hdt. down; 1.
the mind as the faculty of understanding, feeling, desiring:
Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 30 (Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. x. 27; Eph.
i.18 Rec. ; iv. 18; Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; 1 Pet. i.13. 2.
understanding: 1 Jn. v. 20. 3. mind i. e. spirit (Lat.
animus), way of thinking and feeling: Col. i. 21; Lk. i.
515 2 Pet. iii. 1. 4. thought; plur. contextually in a
bad sense, evil thoughts: Eph. ii. 3, as in Num. xv. 39
punoOncecbe macav Tay evToday Kupiov. . Kai od Siaotpa-
pnoecbe oricw tay Savoia bpay.*
Sv-av-olyw ; impf. dienvovyov; 1 aor. SujvorEa; Pass., 1 aor.
SenvotxOnv ; [2 aor. dinvotyny]; pf. ptep. dujvorypevos (Acts
vii. 56 L T Tr WH) ; [on variations of augm. see reff. s. v.
avoiyw|; Sept. chiefly for MPa and Na; occasionally in
prof. auth. fr. Plat. Lys. p. 210 a. down; to open by di-
viding or drawing asunder (8ut), to open thoroughly (what
had been closed) ; 1. prop.: dpoev d:avotyov pytpay,
a male opening the womb (the closed matrix), i. e. the
first-born, Lk. ii. 23 (Ex. xiii. 2, ete.); odpavods, pass.,
Acts vii. 56 L T Tr WH; the ears, the eyes, i. e. to restore
or to give hearing, sight: Mk. vii. 834,35 RG; Lk. xxiv.
31, (Gen. iii. 5, 7; Is. xxxv. 5; 2 K. vi. 17, etc.). 2;
trop.: tas ypadds, to open the sense of the Scriptures,
explain them, Lk. xxiv. 32; rdév votv twos to open the
mind of one, i. e. cause him to understand a thing, Lk.
xxiv. 45; tiv kapdiay to open one’s soul, i. e. to rouse in
one the faculty of understanding or the desire of learn-
ing, Acts xvi. 14, (2 Mace. i. 4; Themist. orat. 2 de
Constantio imp. [p. 29 ed. Harduin ] dcavoryerai pov 7 kap-
dia x. Suavyeoréepa yiverat 7 Wuyx7n); absol., foll. by érs, to
explain, expound sc. aras, i. e. tas ypadas, Acts xvii. 3.
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 19 sq.*
Sta-vuxtepedw ; (opp. to dinpepev@); to spend the night,
to pass the whole night, (ef. da, C. 1]: &v run, in any em-
ployment, Lk. vi. 12. (Diod. 13,62; Antonin. 7, 66; Plut.
mor. p. 950 b.; Hdian. 1, 16, 12 [5 Bekk.] ; Joseph. antt.
6, 13,9; b.j. 2,14, 7 [Job ii. 9; Phil. incorr. mund. § 2;
in Flac. § 6]; with ry vixra added, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 3.)*
St-aviw: 1 aor. ptep. diavieas ; to accomplish fully, bring
quite to an end, finish: tov mdodv, Acts xxi. 7. (2 Mace.
xii. 17; fr. Hom. down.) [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii.
p- 85 sq.]*
Sta-ravrds, see dia, A. II. 1. a.
Sta-srapa-rpiBh, -7s, 7, constant contention, incessant
wrangling or strife, (maparpi8n attrition; contention,
wrangling); a word justly adopted in 1 Tim. vi. 5 by
GLT Tr WH (for Ree. rapadcarprBai, q. v.); not found
elsewhere [exc. Clem. Al. ete.]; ef. W. 102 (96). Cf.
the double compounds é:araparnpeiv, 2 S. iii. 30; also
(doubtful, it must be confessed), dcarapaxdmropa, 1 K.
vi. 4 Ald.; Ssarapofivw, Joseph. antt. 10, 7,5. [Steph.
gives also d:arapayw, Greg. Nyss. ii. 177 b.; Stamapa-
AapBavw; Siarapaciwraw, Joseph. Genes. p. 9 a.; dia-
napacvpe, Schol. Lucian. ii. 796 Hemst. ] *
Sta-repdw, -d; 1 aor. dtewepaca; to pass over, cross over,
a ph en i ark i a es,
. a,
oe
SiaTrAEw
e.g. ariver, a lake: Mt. ix.1; xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53 [here
T WH follow with emt ray yay for (to) the land (cf. R. V.
mrg.)]; foll. by ets with acc. of place, Mk. v. 21; Acts
xxi. 2; mpds with ace. of pers. Lk. xvi. 26. ({Eur.], Ar-
stph., Xen., subseq. writ. ; Sept. for 73).) *
Sia-rA€w: 1 aor. ptcp. diamAevoas; (Plin. pernavigo),
to sail across: méXayos (as often in Grk. writ.), Acts
xxvii. 5 [W. § 52, 4, 8].*
Sta-rovew: to work out laboriously, make complete by la-
bor. Mid. [pres. Scarovodpar]; with 1 aor. pass. Scezro-
wmOnv (for which Attic writ. dverovnodunv); a. to exert
one’s self, strive; b. to manage with pains, accomplish
with great labor ; in prof. auth. in both senses [fr. Aeschy].
down]. c. to be troubled, displeased, offended, pained,
[ef. collog. Eng. to be worked up; W. 23 (22)]: Acts iv.
2; xvi. 18. (Aquila in Gen. vi. 6; 1 S. xx. 30; Sept. in
Eccl. x. 9 for 1¥}91; Hesych. dcarovnbeis - Aumneis.) *
Sia-ropedw : to cause one to pass through a place ; to car-
ry across ; Pass., [pres. Svamopevowat ; impf. dverropevopnr] ;
with fut. mid. [(not found in N. T.) ; fr. Hdt. down]; to
Journey through a place, go through: as in Grk. writ. foll.
by 6a with gen. of place, Mk. ii. 23 L Tr WH txt.; Lk.
vi. 1; foll. by ace. [W. § 52, 4, 8] to travel through: Acts
xvi.4; absol.: Lk. xviii. 36; Ro. xv. 24; with the addition
[SYN. see épyouau. | *
Si-arropéw, -@ : impf. dunmdpovy; Mid., [ pres. inf. dcatro-
petoOa (Lk. xxiv. 4 RG)]; impf. diujropotvpny (Acts ii.
12 T Tr WH); in the Grk. Bible only in [Dan. ii. 3
Symm. and] Luke; prop. thoroughly (6ia)amopéw (q. V-),
to be entirely at a loss, to be in perplexity: absol. Acts ii.
12; foll. by 8a rd with inf. Lk. ix. 7; mepi rwos, Lk. xxiv.
4 (here the mid. is to be at a loss with one’s self, for which
L T Tr WH read the simple dopeto@a:) ; Acts v. 24; év
éavr@ foll. by indir. discourse, Acts x.17. (Plat., Aristot.,
Polyb., Diod., Philo, Plut., al.) *
Sia-rpayparevopar: 1 aor. dverpaypatrevoduny; thorough-
ly, earnestly (61a) to undertake a business, Dion. Hal. 3, 72;
contextually, to undertake a business for the sake of gain:
Lk. xix. 15. (In Plat. Phaedo p.77 d. 95 e. to examine
thoroughly.) *
Sia-mpiw: impf. pass. Scempiduny ; to saw asunder or in
twain, to divide by a saw: 1 Chr. xx. 3; Plat. conv. p.
193 a.; Arstph. eqq. 768,and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to
be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation,
[A. V. cut to the heart], Acts v. 33; with the addition
Tais kapdias adt@v, Acts vii. 54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35); peyddas
exadératvov kat Sterpiovto Kad’ jar, Euseb. h. e. 5, 1, 6
[15 ed. Heinich. ; ef. Gataker, Advers. mise. col. 916 g.].*
Si-apratw: fut. duaprdow; 1 aor. [subj. 3 pers. sing.
dvaprdcy |, inf. diapraca; to plunder: Mt. xii. 29* (where
LT Tr WH dprdoa), 29° (R T Tr WH); Mk. iii. 27.
[From Hom. down. ] *
Sva-ppfyvupe and dvappnoow (Lk. viii. 29 [R G; see be-
low ]); 1 aor. Sceppn&a; impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. dueppyyvuto
(Lk. v. 6, where Lehm. txt. dvepyyruro and T Tr WH
dtepnooero (L mrg. depp.), also LT Tr WH 8capnoowv
in Lk. viii. 29; [WH have dcépnéev in Mt. xxvi. 65,
and d:apnéas in Mk. xiv. 63; see their App. p. 163, and
kata Trodews kal Kopas, Lk. xiii. 22.
141
dvacTropa
8. v. P, p]); to break asunder, burst through, rend asunder :
ra Seopa, Lk. viii. 29 ; rd Sikrvov, pass., Lk. v. 6; ra iparea,
xeravas, to rend, which was done by the Jews in extreme
indignation or in deep grief [cf. B. D.s. v. Dress, 4]: Mt.
xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts xiv. 14, cf. Gen. xxxvii. 29,
34, ete.; 1 Mace. xi. 71; Joseph. b.j. 2, 15,4. (Sept.,
[Hom.], Soph., Xen., subseq. writ.) *
Stacahew, -@: 1 aor. duecapnoa; (cadns clear) ; alr
to make clear or plain, to explain, unfold, declare: ri
mapaBoAnv, Mt. xiii. 36 L Tr txt. WH; (Eur. Phoen.
398; Plat. legg. 6, 754 a.; al.; Polyb. 2,1,1;3,52,5). 2.
of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate:
Mt. xviii. 31; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb.1,46,4; 2, 27, 3).
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 622 sqq.; Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11.*
Sta-celw: 1 aor. Suéoecoa; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down;
to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job
iv. 14 for "MDM), to agitate; like concutio in juridical
Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other
property : revd, Lk. iii. 14 [A. V. do violence to]; 3 Mace.
vii. 21; the Basilica; [Heinichen on Euseb. h.e. 7, 30, 7].*
Sta-ckopmitw; 1 aor. dvecxdpmioa; Pass., pf. ptep. die-
oKxopmicpevos ; 1 aor. StecxopricOny ; 1 fut. dSuecxopmicOy-
gopuat ; often in Sept., more rarely in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb.
1, 47,4; 27, 2,10 on (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 25]);
to scatter abroad, disperse: Jn. xi. 52 (opp. to cuvayw) ;
of the enemy, Lk. i. 51; Acts v. 37, (Num. x. 35, etc.;
Joseph. antt. 8, 15,4; Ael. v. h. 13, 46 (1, 6) 6 dSpdxov
Tovs pev Steoxdpmice, Tors dé améxtewe). Of a flock of
sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31 (fr. Zech. xiii. 7); Mk. xiv. 27; of
property, to squander, waste: Lk. xv. 13; xvi. 1, (like éca-
oneipo in Soph. El. 1291). like the Hebr. 777 (Sept.
Ezek. v. 2, 10,12 [Ald.], etc.) of grain, to scatter i. e. to
winnow (i.e. to throw the grain a considerable distance, or
up into the air, that it may be separated from the chaff;
opp. to cvvaye, to gather the wheat, freed from the chaff,
into the granary [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Agriculture]): Mt.
SOS PE OX
Sia-cmdw: Pass., [pf. inf. dveomacda]; 1 aor. dveama-
aOnv; to rend asunder, break asunder: ras advaes, Mk.
v. 4 (ras vevpds, Judg. xvi. 9); of a man, to tear in
pieces: Acts xxiii. 10, (rods avdpas kpeovpynddv, Hat. 3,
13).*
Sta-cme(pw: 2 aor. pass. dceamapyny; to scatter abroad,
disperse; Pass. of those who are driven to different places,
Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and]
Hdt. down ; very often in Sept.) *
Sia-cropa, -ds, 7, (Suacmeipw, cf. such words as dyopa,
diadOopa), (Vulg. dispersio), a scattering, dispersion: aré-
pov, opp. to cvpuréts x. mapacevéis, Plut. mor. p. 1105 a. ; in
the Sept. used of the Israelites dispersed among foreign
nations, Deut. xxviii. 25; xxx. 4; esp. of their Babylo-
nian exile, Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 17; Is. xlix. 6; Judith v.
19; abstr. for concr. of the exiles themselves, Ps. exlvi.
(exlvii.) 2 (i. q. D7) expelled, outcasts) ; 2 Mace. i. 27;
eis T. Staomropav TOY “EAAnvy unto those dispersed among
the Greeks [W. § 30, 2 a.], Jn. vii. 35. Transferred to
Christians [i. e. Jewish Christians (?)] scattered abroad
StacTéAAw
among the Gentiles: Jas. i. 1 (é€v 77 dtaomopa, sc. ovat) ;
maperiOnuot Siagropas Idvrov, sojourners far away from
home, in Pontus, 1 Pet.i. 1 (see mapemidnuos). [BB.DD.
s. v. Dispersion; esp. Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 31.]*
Sia-créA\Aw: fo draw asunder, divide, distinguish, dis-
pose, order, (Plat., Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.; often in
Sept.) ; Pass. 76 dtaareAAGpevor, the injunction: Heb. xii.
20, (2 Mace. xiv. 28). Mid., [ pres. &saaréAAopar] ; impf.
SteoredASunv; 1 aor. dueorechayny; to open one’s selfi.e.
one’s mind, to set forth distinctly, (Aristot., Polyb.);
hence in the N. T. [so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12]
to admonish, order, charge: twi, Mk. viii. 15; Acts xv.
24; foll. by va [cf. B. 237 (204) ], Mt. xvi. 20 R T Tr WH
mrg.; Mk. vii. 36; ix. 9; d&teoreiAaro woAXa, iva ete. Mk.
v. 43.*
Siaornpa, -ros, 7d, [(Scaorqvac) |, an interval, distance ;
space of time: os apav tpidv diaor. Acts Vv. 7, ([ék« moAAov
S:acrjparos, Aristot. de audib. p. 800°, 5 ete.]; rerpaerés 6.
Polyb. 9,1, 1; [ovpmas 6 xpdvos nuep@v x. vurtav éote Oud-
arpa, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried s. v. p.
66]).*
S.a-croAn, -7s, 1), (SuaoreAAw, cf. dvatoAn), a distinction,
difference: Ro. iii. 22; x. 12; of the difference of the
sounds made by musical instruments, 1 Co. xiv. 7.
({Aristot., Theophr.], Polyb., Plut., al.) *
Sta-ctpépw; 1 aor. inf. diaorpeyrar; pf. pass. ptep. dre-
orpappevos [cf. WH. App. p. 170 sq.]; fr. Aeschyl. down;
a. to distort, turn aside: tas ddovs kupiov tas evbeias, fig-
uratively (Prov. x. 10), to oppose, plot against, the saving
purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence b.
to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt: to
€@vos, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41,1; 8, 24,3); rua aro
tivos, to corrupt and so turn one aside from ete. Acts
xlil. 8, (Ex. v. 4; voluptates animum detorquent a vir-
tute, Cic.) ; dvertpaupévos perverse, corrupt, wicked: Mt.
xvii. 075° Lko ids Acts: 805) Philaiidb.*
Sta-cof{w: 1 aor. duecwoa; 1 aor. pass. dreodOnv; in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; often in Sept., esp. for vd and
yewin; to preserve through danger, to bring safe through ;
to save i. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our collog. bring
him through): Lk. vii. 3; pass. Mt. xiv. 36; to save i.e.
keep safe, keep from perishing: Acts xxvii. 43; to save
out of danger, rescue: Acts xxviii. 1; ék ris Oadacons,
ibid. 4 ; —as very often in Grk. writ. (see exx. in Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of
the person to whom or of the place to which one is
brought safe through: mpos @nduca, Acts xxiii. 24; emi
thy ynv, Acts xxvii. 44; els tt, 1 Pet. iii. 20.*
dia-rayt, -7s, 7, (Suaracow), a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv.
11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use d:dragis),
a disposition, arrangement, ordinance: Ro. xiii. 2; édd-
Bere Tov vopuov eis diarayas dyyedov, Acts vii. 53, ye re-
ceived the law, influenced by the authority of the ordain-
ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive
what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration of an-
gels [nearly i. q. as being the ordinances etc.], similar
to eis vopa bexerOa, Mt. x. 41; see eis, B. II. 2 d.; [W.
398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the
142
Svat Ons
Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God’s
assistants in the solemn proclamation of the Mosaic law,
ef. Deut. xxxiii. 2 Sept.; Acts vii. 38; Gal. iii. 19; Heb.
ii. 2; Joseph. antt. 15, 5,3; [Philo de somn. i. § 22; Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. ¢.].*
§id-raypa, -ros, To, (Staragaw), an injunction, mandate:
Heb. xi. 23 [Lehm. d0ypa]. (2 Esdr. vii.11; Add. Esth.
iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. fin., line 14]; Sap. xi. 8; Philo,
decal. § 4; Diod. 18, 64; Plut. Marcell. c. 24 fin.;
fal.) *
Sta-rapdcow, or -rrw: 1 aor. pass. duerapayOnv ; to agi-
tate greatly, trouble greatly, (Lat. perturbare): Lk. i. 29.
(Plat., Xen., al.) *
Sia-rdcow; 1 aor. dueraéa; pf. inf. diarerayévar (Acts
xviii. 2 [not Tdf.]); Pass., pf. ptep. diareraypévos; 1 aor.
ptep. dcatayOeis; 2 aor. ptep. dsatayeis; Mid., pres. dca-
racooua; fut. duatafoua; 1 aor. duera~aunyv; (on the
force of dia cf. Germ. ver ordnen, [ Lat. dis ponere, Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 7 sq.]); fo arrange, ap-
point, ordain, prescribe, give order: twi, Mt. xi. 1; 1 Co.
xvi. 1; foll. by ace. with inf., Lk. viii. 55; Acts xviii. 2
[here T reray. Tr mrg. br. dva-; rwi foll. by inf. 1 Co. ix.
14]; ri, pass., 6 vopos Siatayeis b¢ ayyédov (see dtatayn) :
Gal. iii. 19, (Hes. opp. 274); tui m1, pass.: Lk. iii. 13;
xvii. 9 [Rec.], 10; Acts xxiii. 31. Mid.: 1 Co. vii. 17;
ovt@ Av duatetaypevos (cf. W. 262 (246); [B. 193 (167)]),
Acts xx. 13; rwi, Tit. i. 5; ri, 1 Co. xi. 345; revi, foll. by
inf.: Acts vii. 44; xxiv. 23. [Comp.: ém-dvaraccopat. | *
Sta-reAEw, -@; to bring thoroughly to an end, accomplish,
[ef. dua, C. 2]; with the addition of rov Biov, rov xpovor,
etc., it is joined to participles or adjectives and denotes
the continuousness of the act or state expressed by the
ptep. or adj. (as in Hdt. 6,117; 7,111; Plat. apol. p.
31 a.); oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined
with the same force simply to the pteps. or adjs.: thus
docrot Suaredeire ye continue fasting, constantly fast, Acts
xxvii. 33 (so dagadéorepos [al. -raros] Siaredet, Thue. 1,
34; often in Xen.; W. 348 (326); [B. 304 (261) ]).*
Sia-rypéw, -@; 3 pers. sing. impf. duernper; to keep con-
tinually or carefully (see dia, C. 2): Lk. ii. 51, (Gen.
xxxvii. 11); euaurdv & Twos (cf. rnpeiv &k Twos, Jn. xvii.
15), to keep one’s self (pure) from a thing, Acts xv. 29;
amo twos for 71w foll. by 1, Ps. xi. (xii) 8. (Plat.,
Dem., Polyb., al.) *
Sia-ri, see dud, B. II. 2 a. p. 134”.
Sia-rlOnpe : fo place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint,
(ef. Sd, C. 3]. In the N. T. only in Mid., pres. dcariOe-
pac; 2 aor. duebéunv; fut. dabnoopar; 1. to arrange,
dispose of, one’s own affairs; a. tl, of something that
belongs to one (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. down) ;
with dat. of pers. added, in one’s favor, to one’s advan-
tage; hence to assign a thing to another as his possession :
tii Baowdeiay (to appoint), Lk. xxii. 29. b. to dispose
of by will, make a testament: Heb. ix. 16 sq.; (Plat. lege.
11 p. 924 e.; with SuaOnenv added, ibid. p. 923 c., ete.).
2. drariBepar SiaOqany rwi (7D NX 13 N73, Jer. XXXViiL
(xxxi.) 31 sqq.), to make a covenant, enter into cove
nant, with one, [cf. W. 225 (211); B. 148 (129 sq-)]:
Svat piBo
Heb. viii. 10, (Gen. xv. 18) ; pos twa, Acts iii. 25; Heb.
x. 16, (Deut. vii. 2); pera twos, 1 Mace. i. 11. The
Grks. said ouvridewa mpos twa, ai mpds twa ovvOnKat,
Xen. Cyr. 3,1, 21. [Comp.: dvri-ScatiOnpe. | *
Sta-rp(Bw; impf. duvetpyBov; 1 aor. duverpupa; to rub
between, rub hard, (prop. Hom. Il. 11, 847, al.) ; to wear
away, consume; xpdovoy or npepas, to spend, pass time:
Acts xiv. 3, 28; xvi. 12; xx.6; xxv. 6, 14, (Lev. xiv. 8;
Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.); simply to stay, tarry, (cf. B.
145 (127); W. 593 (552)]: Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54 [WH Tr
txt. guewev]; Acts xii. 19; xiv. 18 (Lchm. ed. min.); xv.
35; (Judith x. 2; 2 Macc. xiv. 23, and often in prof.
auth. fr. Hom. I]. 19, 150 down).*
Sta-rpodh, -7s, 7, (Suarpepw to support), sustenance :
1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49; Menand. ap. Stob.
floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.]; Diod. 19, 32; Epict.
ench. 12; Joseph. antt. 2, 5,7; 4,8, 215; often in Plut.;
1 Mace. vi. 49.) *
Sit-avydtw: 1 aor. diujvyaca; to shine through, (Vulg.
elucesco), to dawn; of daylight breaking through the
darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [cf. Act. Andr. 8
p- 116 ed. Tdf.]): 2 Pet.i.19. [Plut. de plac. philos.
3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]*
Stavyjs, -és, (avyn), translucent, transparent: Rev. xxi.
21, for the Rec. daparns. ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll.
Rh., Leian., Plut., Themist.; often in the Anthol.) *
Stadavijs, -¢s, (Suapaivw to show through), transparent,
translucent: Rev. xxi. 21 Rec.; see diavyns. (Hadt.,
Arstph., Plat., al.) *
Sia-hepw ; 2 aor. Sunveyxoy [but the subj. 3 pers. sing.
Sueveyxn (Mk. xi. 16), the only aor. form which occurs,
can come as well fr. 1 aor. diunveyxa; cf. Veitch s. v.
depo, fin.]; Pass., [pres. diapepopar|; impf. dvehepdopny ;
[fr. Hom. (h. Mere. 255), Pind. down]; 1. to bear or
carry through any place: oxevos dia Tov tepov, Mk. xi.
16. 2. to carry different ways, i.e. a. trans. to carry
in different directions, to different places: thus persons
are said d:apeper Oa, who are carried hither and thither
in a ship, driven to and fro, Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7
p- 144; oxddos tm evavtioy mvevpater duapepopevov, Philo,
migr. Abr. § 27; Leian. Hermot. 28; often in Plut.);
metaph. to spread abroad: 8.epepeto 6 Adyos Tov Kupiov
d: GAns THs xwpas, Acts xiii. 49, (dyyeAdas, Leian. dial.
deor. 24,1; nun diadeperar, Plut. mor. p. 163 d.). b.
intrans. (like the Lat. differo) to differ: Soxiagew ra
diapépovra to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to
distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful,
Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, (Scdkpuots Kadod re kai Kaxov, Heb.
v. 14); cf. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. 111 ed. 5.; Theoph.
Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto Soxipagovres ta Suadepovra,
HjTOL Pas, 7) TKOTOS, 7) AevKOY, ) peAav KTA.); [al., adopting a
secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans-
late (cf. A. V.) to approve the things that excel; see Mey.
(yet cf. ed. Weiss) on Ro. 1. c.; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.].
Siapépw tivos, to differ from one, i.e. to excel, surpass
one: Mt. vi. 26; x. 31; xii. 12; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so
in Attic auth.) ; twos &v run, 1 Co. xv. 41; [rivds odder,
Gal. iv. 1]. c. impersonally, duapéper it makes a differ-
143
duayrevata@
ence, it matters, is of importance: ovdév pot duaeper it
matters nothing to me, Gal. ii. 6, (Plat. Prot. p. 316 b.
npiv ovdeyv Stadeper, p. 358 e.; de rep. 1 p. 340¢c.; Dem.
124, 3 (in Phil. 3,50); Polyb. 3, 21,9; Ael. v. h. 1, 25;
al.; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 394; Wetst. on Gal. 1. c.]).*
Sia-hevyw: [2 aor. duepvyov]; fr. Hdt. down; to flee
through danger, to escape: Acts xxvii. 42, (Prov. xix. 5;
Josh. viii. 22).*
Sia-pypltw; 1 aor. duehnpyioa; 1 aor. pass. depnpiaOny ;
to spread abroad, blaze abroad : tov \é6yov, Mk. i. 45; Mt.
xxvill. 15 [T WH mrg. éepnpicd.]; twa, to spread abroad
his fame, verbally diffuse his renown, Mt. ix. 31; in Lat.
diffamare aliquem, but in a bad sense. (Rarely in Grk.
writ., as Arat. phaen. 221; Dion. Hal. 11, 46; Palaeph.
incred. 14, 4; [cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p.
14 sq. ].)*
Sia-pOeipw; 1 aor. duepOepa; Pass., [pres. dvapGeipo-
par]; pf. ptep. duepOappevos; 2 aor. dvepOdpnv; Sept.
very often for Nmv, occasionally for ban; in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; 1. to change for the worse, to cor-
rupt: minds, morals; tyv ynv, i.e. the men that in-
habit the earth, Rev. xi. 18; dvepOappevor rov vodv, 1 Tim-
vi. 5, (rv Scavoray, Plat. legg. 10 p. 888 a.; Thy yoouny,
Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 21; rods épOadpovs, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12).
2. to destroy, ruin, (Lat. perdere); a. to consume, of bodily
vigor and strength: 6 €£@ nav avOparos diapbeiperat [is
decaying}, 2 Co. iv. 16; of the worm or moth that eats pro-
visions, clothing, etc. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. de-
lere) : Rev. viii. 9; to kill, dtapOeiperv rovs ete. Rev. xi. 18.*
Sta-hOopa, -as, 7, (diapGeipw), corruption, destruction ;
in the N. T. that destruction which is effected by the de-
cay of the body after death: Acts ii. 27, 315 xiii. 834-37
[ef. W. § 65, 10], see eid, I: 5 and tmoarpepa, 2. (Sept.
for nnw; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)*
8id-popos, -ov, (Siapepw) 5 1. different, varying in
kind, (Hdt. and sqq.): Ro. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10. 2:
excellent, surpassing, ({Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : com-
par. Suahopwrepos, Heb. i. 4; vill. 6.*
Sia-pvddoow: 1 aor. inf. dvapvdagéa; fr. Hdt. down;
to guard carefully: twa, Lk. iv. 10 fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11.
“The seventy chose to employ this term esp. of God’s
providential care; cf. Gen. xxviii. 15; Josh. xxiv. 17;
Ps. xl, (xli.) 3. Hence it came to pass that the later
writers at the close of their letters used to write diadvu-
Aarro, SuavAdkor tpas 6 Geds, cf. Theodoret. iii. pp. 800,
818, 826, (edd. Schulze, Nosselt, ete. Hal.).” Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16.*
Sva-xepi{w : 1 aor. mid. dveyerpioduny ; to move by the use
of the hands, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr.
[ Andoc., Lys.], Xen. and Platodown). Mid. to lay hands
on, slay, kill [with one’s own hand]: twa (Polyb. 8, 23, 8;
Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts
Wo OR seas Pilie
Sta-xAevatw; to deride, scoff, mock, [‘deridere i. e.
ridendo exagitare” Win.]: Acts ii. 13 G LT Tr WH.
(Plat. Ax. p. 364 b.; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 49};
Aeschin. dial. 3, 2; Polyb. 17, 4,4; al.; eecles. writ.) Ct.
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17.*
oraywpifo
tia-xwplt{w: fo separate thoroughly or wholly (cf. 8&a, C.
2), (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept.). Pass. pres. dia-
xpifopa ([in reflex. sense] cf. droxwpifw) to separate
one’s self, depart, (Gen. xiii. 9,11, 14; Diod. 4,53): amé
twos, Lk. ix. 33.*
SiSaxtikds, -7, -dv, (i. q- Stdackadixds in Grk. writ.), apt
and skilful in teaching: 1 Tim. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (de
Scxrix?) dperr, the virtue which renders one teachable,
docility, Philo, praem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud.
§7].)*
SiSanrds, -, -dv, (diddoKe) 5 1. ‘hat can be taught
(Pind., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. taught, instructed, foll. by
gen. by one [cf. W.189 (178); 194 (182); B. 169 (147) ]:
tov Geov, by God, Jn. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13; mvevparos dyiou
[GL T Tr WH om. dyiov], by the (Holy) Spirit, 1 Co. ii.
13. (vovOernparta keivns SiSaxra, Soph. El. 344.) *
SiSackadia, -as, 7, (Sudaoxados), (fr. Pind. down]; 1.
teaching, instruction: Ro. xii. 7; xv. 4 (eis thv nperepav
d:Sackadiav, that we might be taught, [A. V. for our
learning]); 1 Tim. iv. 13, 16; v.17; 2 Tim. iii. 10, 16;
ate 7. 2. teaching i.e. that which is taught, doc-
trine : Eph. iv. 14; 1 Tim.i.10; iv.6; vi.1,3; 2 Tim. iv.
3; Tit.i.9; ii. 1,10; plur. dsdacxadiat teachings, precepts,
(fr. Is. xxix. 13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; dvOpamor, Col. ii.
22; Satpovioyv, 1 Tim. iv. 1.*
SiSdckados, -ov, 6, (Sudacxw), a teacher; in the N. T. one
who teaches concerning the things of God, and the duties
of man; 1. of one who is fitted to teach, or thinks
himself so: Heb. v. 12; Ro. ii. 20. 2. of the teachers
of the Jewish religion: Lk. ii. 46; Jn. iii. 10; hence the
Hebr. 34 is rendered in Greek é:ddoxaXdos: Jn.i. 38 (39) ;
xx. 16; cf. below, under paSBi, and Pressel in Herzog
xu. p. 471 sq.; [Campbell, Dissert. on the Gospels, diss.
vii. pt. 2]. 3. of those who by their great power as
teachers drew crowds about them; a. of John the Bap-
tist: Lk. iii.12. b. of Jesus: Jn.i.38 (39); iii. 25 viii. 4;
xi. 28; xiii. 13 sq.; xx. 16; often in the first three Gospels.
4. by preéminence used of Jesus by himself, as the one
who showed men the way of salvation: Mt. xxiii. 8 L T
he WEL: 5. of the apostles: 6 d:dacxados trav eOvar,
of Baul Eimsaiaia Dimes es 6. of those who
in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the
work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy
Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, cf.
Jas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians: 2
Tim. iv. 3. [Hom. (h. Mere. 556), Aeschyl., al.]
SiSaoKw; impf. ediSackoy; fut. dudaéo; 1 aor. edidaka;
1 aor. pass. éd:6axOnv; (AAQ [cf. Vanitek p. 327]) ; [fr.
fom. down]; Sept. for yin, 7717, and esp. for 319;
1. absol. a. to hold discourse with others
in order to instruct them, deliver didactic discourses: Mt.
ly. 235 xxi. 23; Mk. 1.20; vi.6§ xivi 49%, Lkav. 15): :v.
17; vi.6; Jn. vi. 59; vii. 14; xviii. 20, and often in the
Gospels; 1 Tim. ii. 12. b. to be a teacher (see d:da-
ovodos, 6): Ro. xii. 7. c¢. to discharge the office of teach-
e* conduct one’s self as a teacher: 1 Co. iv. 17. 2. in
construction; a. either in imitation of the Hebr. 5 q95
(Job xxi. 22), or by an irregular use of the later Greeks
to teach;
144
dudayn
(of which no well-attested example remains exe. one in
Plut. Marcell. c. 12), with dat. of person : r@ Baddk, Kev.
ii. 14 (acc. to the reading now generally accepted for the
Rec. «4 réy Bad.) ; cf. B. 149 (130); W. 223 (209), ef.
227 (213). b. ace. to the regular use, with ace. of pers.,
to teach one: used of Jesus and the apostles uttering in
public what they wished their hearers to know and re-
member, Mt. v. 2; Mk. i. 22; ii. 13; iv. 2; Lk. v.3; Jn.
vili. 2; Acts iv. 2; v.25; xx. 20; rods "EAAnvas, to act
the part of a teacher among the Greeks, Jn. vii. 35; used
of those who enjoin upon others to observe some ordi-
nance, to embrace some opinion, or to obey some pre-
cept: Mt. v. 19; Acts xv. 1; Heb. viii. 11; with esp.
reference to the addition which the teacher makes to
the knowledge of the one he teaches, to impart instruc-
tion, instil doctrine into one: Acts xi. 263; xxi. 28; Jn.
ix. 84; Ro. ii. 21; Col. ii. 16; 1 Jn. ii. 27; Rev. ii. 20:
c. the thing taught or enjoined is indicated by a foll.
ore: Mk. viii. 31; 1 Co. xi. 14; by a foll. infin., Lk. xi.
1; Mt. xxviii. 20; Rev. ii. 14; mepi rivos, 1 Jn. ii. 27;
ev Xpiot@ dSidaxOqvat, to be taught in the fellowship of
Christ, Eph. iv. 21; foll. by an ace. of the thing, to teach
i.e. prescribe a thing: dackaXias, évrdd\pata avOparev,
precepts which are commandments of men (fr. Is. xxix.
13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7, [B. 148 (129)]; ry 6d6v rod
Oeod, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21; ratdra, 1 Tim.
iv..11; & py det, Tit. i115 ¢o explain, expound, a thing:
Acts xvill. 11, 25; xxviii. 81; dooraciav amb Moicéws,
the necessity of forsaking Moses, Acts xxi. 21. d. with
ace. of pers. and of thing, to teach one something [W. 226
sq. (212); B. 149 (130)]: [exetvos tpas didaker wavra,
Jn. xiv. 26]; rod dibdckew tas tiva ta ororxeia, Heb. v.
12 (where R G T Tr and others read—not so well—
riva; [but cf. B. 260 (224) note, 268 (230) note]) ; érépous
d:dd£a, sc. a’rd, 2 Tim. ii. 2; hence pass. didayOjvai re
[B. 188 (163); W. 229 (215)]: Gal. i. 12 (edcdayxn», se.
avtd), 2 Th. ii. 15.
§15ax%, -7s, 7, (idackw), [fr. Hdt.down]; — 1. teach-
ing, viz. that which is taught: Mk.i. 27; Jn. vii. 16; Acts
xvii. 19; Ro. [vi. 17]; xvi. 17; 2 Jn. 10; Rev. ii. 243 4
65. twvos, one’s doctrine, i. e. what he teaches: Mt. vii.
28: xvi. 123 xxii. 833; Mk.i. 223 xi. 18; Lk. iv. 82; Jn:
xviii. 19; Acts v. 28; Rev. ii. 14 sq.; 9 ddayn of God,
Tov Kuplov, Tov Xpiorov, the doctrine which has God,
Christ, the Lord, for its author and supporter: Jn. vii.
17; Acts xiii. 12; 2Jn. 9; with the gen. of the object,
doctrine, teaching, concerning something: Heb. vi. 2 [W.
187 (176); 192 (181); 551 (513)]; plur. Heb. xiii. 9.
2. [the act of] teaching, instruction, (cf. ddacxaXia [on the
supposed distinction betw. the two words and their use
in the N. T. see Ellic. on 2 Tim. iv. 2; they are asso-
ciated in 2 Tim. iv. 2,3; Tit.i.9]): Actsii.42; 2 Tim.
iv. 2; ev 7H diayn, while he was teaching, a phrase by
which the Evangelist indicates that he is about to cite
some of the many words which Jesus spoke at that
time, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; rod xara tiv Sidaynv morod
Adyou, the faithful word which is in accordance with the
received (2 Tim. iii. 14) instruction, Tit. i. 9; in partic-
didpaxy pov
ular, the teaching of the d:Sdaoxados (q. v. 6) in the relig-
ious assemblies of Christians: Aadeiv év didayq to speak
in the way of teaching, in distinction from other modes
of speaking in public, 1 Co. xiv. 6 ; éyw ddaynv, to have
something to teach, ibid. 26.*
S(Spaxpov, -ov, 70, (neut. of the adj. didpaypos, -ov, sc.
vopiopa; fr. dis and dpayun), a didrachmon or double-
drachma, a silver coin equal to two Attic drachmas or
one Alexandrian, or half a shekel, [about one third of a
dollar] (see in dpyvpiov, 3): Mt. xvii. 24. (Sept. often
for Pw [Poll., Galen].) *
5iSupos, -7, -ov, and -os, -ov, twofold, twain, (double, Hom.
Od. 19, 227; as rpidvpos triple, rerpadvyos quadruple,
émradupos) ; hence twin (sc. mais, as rpidupoe raides, viol,
Germ. Drillinge, three born at a birth), Hebr. o&n, a
surname of the apostle Thomas [cf. Luthardt on the
first of the foll. pass.; B.D. s.v. Thomas]: Jn. xi. 16;
xx 24. xx1:;'2." (Hom. IL 23, 641.) *
Slop. (5:50, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [did Tr, yet see
WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. 8:d0acr (Rev. xvii. 13
[not Rec.]), impv. di5ov (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers.
sing. édidov, 3 pers. plur. édidour (edidocay, Jn. xix. 3 L T
Tr WH [see ¢yo]); fut. doow; 1 aor. edwxa [2 pers.
sing. -xes, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg., 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v.
kortaw |, subjunc. daon [and doceper| fr. an imaginary
indic. form édea, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr
mrg. WH decer); Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH bce; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch
s. v. 618. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40;
WH. App. p. 172]); pf. dédxa [on the interchange
between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb
ef. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ededaxew and without augm.
[W. § 12,9; B. 33 (29)] dedaxew, Mk. xiv. 44; and L
txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. Sedaxeroay, Jn.
xi. 57; 2 aor. subjune. 3 pers. sing. 66 [day, Jn. xv. 16 Tr
mrg.; Eph. i.17 WH mrg.; 2 Tim. ii. 25 L WH mrg.;
doi, Mk. viii. 37 T Tr WH; cf. B. 46 (40); WH. App. p.
168; Kuenen and Cobet, praef. p. 1xi.], plur. ddpev, dare,
daovy, optat. 3 pers. sing. dén for doin, Ro. xv. 5; [2 Th.
i 16]; 2 Tim: 1. 16,18; [ii 25 T Tr WH txt.; Ephei.
17RG;; iii. 16 RG] and elsewhere among the variants
({cef. W. § 14,1 ¢.; B. 46 (40), cf. § 139, 37 and 62]; see
[WH. App. u.s.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122;] Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 846; [Kiihner § 282 Anm. 2; Veitch s. v. d/Sepe ad
fin.]), impv. des, dore, inf. dodvar, ptep. dovs; Pass., pf.
Sedopar; 1 aor. €dd6nv; 1 fut. SoAjaopar; cf. B. 45 (39)
sq-; [WHu.s.]. In the Sept. times without number for
103, sometimes for 03%; and for Chald. 37°; [fr. Hom.
down]; to give;
A. absolutely and generally: paxapiov éote paddov
§Sovat, 7) AauBavew, Acts xx. 35.
B. In construction; I. ruvi re, to give something
to some one,—%in various senses; 1. of one’s own ac-
cord to give one something, to his advantage; to bestow,
give asa gift: Mt.iv.9; Lk. i. 32; xii. 32, and often;
Souara [cf. B. 148 (129)], Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13; Eph.
iv. 8 (Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); 1ra@ tmdpyorvra what thou
hast tots mrwxois, Mt. xix. 21; ypypara, Acts xxiv. 26.
145
SiSeps
2. to grant, give to one asking, let have: Mt. xii. 39; xiv.
7 sq.; Xvi. 4; xx. 235 Mk. vi. 22, 25; viii. 12; x. 40;
Lk. xi. 29; xv. 16; Jn. xi. 22; xiv. 16; xv. 16; xvi. 23%
Acts iii. 6; Jas.i.5; [noteworthy is 1 Jn. v. 16 ddcet (se.
prob. 6 Oeds) aire {wiv rois dpaprdvovow ete., where
avr@ seems to be an ethical dat. and r. duap. dependent
on the verb; see B. 133 (116) note, ef. 179 (156); W. 523
(487), cf. 530 (494)]; in contradistinction from what
one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. 3. to supply, furnish,
necessary things: as dprov rwi, Mt. vi. 11; Lk. xi. 3; Jn.
vi. 32, 51; tpopny, Mt. xxiv. 45; Bodou, Jn. vi. 27; be-
sides in Mt. xxv. 15, 28 sq.; Mk. ii. 26; iv.25; Lk. vi.
4; vill. 18; xii.42; xix. 24, 26; Jn.iv.10, 14,15; Eph.
vi. 19. 4. to give over, deliver,i.e. a. to reach out,
extend, present: as Mt. xiv. 19; xvii. 27; Mk. vi. 41;
xiv. 22 sq.; Lk. ix.16; xxii. 19; 7d opior, In. xiii. 26;
7d nornpioy, Jn. xviii. 11; Rev. xvi. 19; ras yeipas 8186-
va to give one the hand, Acts ix. 41; Gal. ii.9. b. of a
writing : aroordaatov, Mt. v.31. c. to give to one’s care,
intrust, commit; aa. something to be administered;
univ.: mavri @ €566n modv, Lk. xii. 48; property, money,
Mt. xxv. 15; Lk. xix. 13,15; dymeddva, a vineyard to
be cultivated, MK. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 16; ras kdeis [kretdas]
ths Bao. Mt. xvi. 19; rHv kpiow, Jn. v. 22; xpipa, Rev.
xx. 4; rv e€ovoiav éavtav, Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]; ra
epya, iva teAetwow ata, Jn. Vv. 36; 1d épyov, va ronoe,
Jn. xvii. 4; 76 dvopa Tov Oeod, to be declared, Jn. xvii. 11
[not Rec.,12T Tr WH]. bb. to give or commit to some
one something to be religiously observed: 8vaOnxnv meptro-
pins, Acts vii. 8; tiv meptrouny, the ordinance of circum-
cision, Jn. vii. 22; rov voor, ibid. vs. 19; Adya Cdvra,
Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligatory, to
pay: wages or reward, Mt. xx. 4,14; xxvi. 15; Rev. xi.
18; dpyvptoy, as a reward, Mk. xiv. 11; Lk. xxii. 5;
taxes, tribute, tithes, ete.: Mt. xvii. 275 xxii. 17; Mk.
xii. 14 (15) 5 Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2; Heb. vii. 4; @vciay se. ro
kupia, Lk. ii. 24 (Ovolay drodotvat ro Ged, Joseph. antt.
7, 9,1); Adyov, render account, Ro. xiv. 12 [L txt. Tr txt.
arro6. |. 6. did@pe is joined with nouns denoting an
act or an effect; and a. the act or effect of him who
gives, in such a sense that what he is said écddva (either
absolutely or with dat. of pers.) he is conceived of as
effecting, or as becoming its author. Hence didape
joined with a noun can often be changed into an active
verb expressing the effecting of that which the noun de-
notes. Thus 6:ddvar aivoy td Oe is equiv. to aivety roy
Geov, Lk. xviii. 43; amoxpioiv tur 1. q. aroxpiverOa, Jn.
i. 22; xix. 9; éeyxompy Sodvat TO evayyeNig 1. q. €yxomreww
TO evayy. to hinder (the progress of) the gospel, 1 Co.
ix. 12; évroAny run i. q. evréAXeoOal tim, Jn. xi. 573 xii.
49; xiii. 34; 1 Jn. ili. 23; d0£av rw i. q. So€aterw twa (see
d0€a, II.); epyaciay, after the Lat. operam dare, take
pains, [A. V. give diligence], i. q. épyagerOa, Lk. xii. 58;
[oupBovrALor, cf. the Lat. consilium dare, i. q. cvupBovdev-
ecOa, Mk. iii. 6 Trtxt. WHtxt.]; SsaorodAny ri i. q.
dtacrAAAew 71, 1 Co. xiv. 7; mapayyeNiav, 1 Th. iv. 2;
mapakAnow, 2 Th. ii. 16; €deos i. q. edeciv, 2 Tim. i. 16,
18; dydmnv, show [A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. iii. 1; exdixnosy,
Sidmpe
2 Th. i. 8; Bacanopoy, Rev. xviii. 7; pamiopa i. q. pari-
Cew twa, Jn. xviii. 22; xix. 3; Pirnua i. q. pudreiv twa,
Lk. vii. 45. or b. the noun denotes something to be
done by him to whom it is said to be given: didovar revi
perdvoay, to cause him to repent, Acts v. 31; xi. 18;
yvaow carnpias, Lk. i. 77; eAnida Twi, 2 Boise (Ge 7:
Joined with nouns denoting strength, faculty, power,
virtue, SéSape (rwi te) is equiv. to to furnish, endue, (one
with a thing): Lk. xxi. 15 (Oooo tyiv oropa k. copiar) ;
Acts vii. 10; ée€ovoiav, Mt. ix. 8; x.1; Lk. x. 19; Jn.
xvii. 2; Rev. ii. 26; vi. 8; xiii. 7; didvocay, 1 Jn. v. 20;
ovveowv, 2 Tim. ii. 7; and in the very common phrase
d.d0var TO mrvedpa. [I/. 8. revi revos to give to one (a
part) of ete.: Rev. ii. 17 (GL T Tr WH) dao aire tov
pavva, cf. W. 198 (186); B. 159 (139).]
II. SiSwpi re without a dative, and didapi ria. il
diSepi te; a. with the force of to cause, produce, give
forth from one’s self: terov, from heaven, Jas. v. 18;
xaprév, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7, 8 sq., (Deut. xxv. 19; Sir.
xxiii. 25); onpeta, Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 [not Tdf.];
Acts ii. 19, (Ex. vii. 9; Deut. xiii. 1, etc.) ; tmdderypa,
Jn. xiii. 15; héyyos, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (pds,
Is. xiii. 10); Qavnv, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; da tHs yAooons
Adyov, ibid. 9; yvopny, to give one’s opinion, to give ad-
vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. viii, 10. b. Srddvae xAnpous
Ova 103, Lev. xvi. 8), to give i. e. hand out lots, se. to
be cast into the urn [see kAjpos, 1], Acts i. 26. c. didapi
vt with pred. acc.: Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45, (to give up asa
Avtpov); Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiy-
alent). 2. didwpi twa; a. where the noun refers to
the office one bears, to appoint: xpurds, Acts xiii. 20. b.
to cause to come forth: didwpt €x Tis cvvaywyns Tov Sarava
Tov Aeyovrar (sc. tuvds [cf. B. 158 (138); W. § 59, 4b.]),
Rey. iii. 9; so also the sea, death, Hades, are said to
give (up) the dead who have been engulfed or received
by them, Rev. xx. 13. 3. SiSa@pi teva tin; a. to give
one to some one as his own: as the object of his saving
care, Heb. ii. 13; to give one to some one, to follow him
as a leader and master, Jn. vi. 37, 39; x. 29; xvii. 6, 9,
12 [but see B. I. 4. c. aa. above], 24; xviii. 9; in these
pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ,
i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the
author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into
intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them ‘his
own’ (ra eva, Jn. x. 14). b. to give one to some one to
care for his interests: Jn. iii. 16 (€daxev sc. aire, i. €. TO
koopm); Acts xili.21. ¢. to give one to some one to whom
he already belonged, to return: Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 ame-
Sexe [so Lmreg. in vii. 15]). . didpe euaurdv rin, to
one demanding of me something, J give myself up as it
were; an hyperbole for disregarding entirely my private
interests, I give as much as ever I can: 2 Co. viii. 5. 4.
didwpi riva with a predicate ace.: éavrdv rimov, to render
or set forth one’s self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9; with
a predicate of dignity, office, function, and a dat. of
the person added for whose benefit some one invested
with said dignity or office is given, that is, is bestowed:
avtov édaxev kechadiy trép mavta TH exkAnoia, head over
146
bdeput
all things to the church, Eph. i. 22; @Swxev rods peév dro-
atodous KTA. SC. TH ExkAnoia, Eph. iv.11. For in neither
of these passages are we obliged, with many interpreters,
to translate the word appointed, made, after the use of
the Hebr. 13; esp. since in the second Paul seems to
wish to confirm the words quoted in vs. 8, @wxe Séuara
Those in the church whom Christ has
endued with gifts and functions for the common advan-
tage the apostle reckons among the dduara given by him
after his ascension to heaven.
III. Phrases in which to the verb dideu, either stand-
ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an
infinitive, either alone or with an accusative; diSepé tue
foll. by an infin. denoting the object: diSepi tux payeiy,
give, supply, something to eat, give food [B. 261 (224);
W. 318 sq. (299) ], Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk. vi. 37;
v.43; Lk. viii. 55; ix. 13; Rev. ii. 7; meiy, Jn. iv. 7, 10;
with the addition of an object acc. depending on the
gayev or meiv: Mt. xxvii. 34; Mk. xv. 23 [RGL]; with
an acc. added depending on the verb didame: Jn. vi. 31;
Rev. xvi. 6; foll. by an infin. indicating design [ef. B.
u. s.], 0 grant or permit one to ete.: Lk. i. 73 sq. (Sovvat
nuw apdBas AaTpevev a’T@) ; Jn. v.26; Acts iv. 29; Ro. .
xv. 5; Eph. iii. 16; Rev. iii. 21; vi.4; vii. 2; [foll. by eis
with the infin. : Ro. xv. 16, ef. B. 265 (228)]; by aconstr.
borrowed from the Hebrew, xai doo rois . . . kai mpody-
tevoovot, Rev. xi. 3; in the passive, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv.
11 (iptv dedora yrova. [G LT Tr WH om. yrdva] to you
it has been granted etc.) ; foll. by the ace. and inf.:
don [LT Tr WH 80] tyiv.. . karouxnoa tov Xpiorov ev
tais kapdias tev, Eph. ili. 16 sq.; eOwxev avrov eudavn
yeverOa, Acts x. 40; od daces tov dowdy cov ideiv dia-
POopay (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10), Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35. 2
did@pi tum, foll. by iva, to grant or permit, that ete. [B.
238 (205); W. 337 (316), cf. 545 (507) ]: Mk. x. 37; Rev.
xix. 8. to commission, Rev. ix. 5.
IV. did@pi te, or tei te, or rivi or twa, foll. by a prep-
osition with a noun (or pronoun) ; 1. rivi €x twos [ cf.
W. § 28,1; B. 159 (189) ]: ddre hyiv (a part) ex Tov eXatov
ipov, Mt. xxv. 8; ex r@v dpror, easily to be supplied from
the context, Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; ek rot mvevparos avrov
edoxev nu, 1 Jn. iv. 13; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 6 Beds ov
didwor 76 mvevpa ex petpov, by measure i. e. according to
measure, moderately, [cf. W. § 51, 1 d.]; otherwise in
Rey. iii. 9 diS@pu ex Hs cvvaywyns, (see II. 2 b. above).
twi and twos: Lk. xx. 10 Wa azo Tod Kaprov Tov apmedo-
vos daow [LT Tr WH decovew] aire, sc. the portion
due. i foll. by e’s with a noun, to give something to be
put into, Lk. vi. 38 pérpov Sacovow eis Tov KoATOY ipaev
(shall they give i. e. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk.
xv. 22 dre Saxrvdtov eis tHy xetpa avrov (put a ring on
his hand) ; eis rov aypér for the field, to pay its price, Mt.
xxvii. 10; revi te eis Tas xeipas, to commit a thing to one,
deliver it into one’s power: Jn. xiii. 3 (Hebr. 2 113 {N3,
Gen. ix. 2; xiv. 20; Ex. iv. 21); eis r. Suavorav, or emt Tas
xapolas (Jer. Xxxviil. (xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten
upon the heart, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; or ets r. kapdias with
inf. of the thing, Rev. xvii. 17; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 d:ddvae
tois avOpwrots.
dveyelpw
rivi te eis THY Wuxnv). éavrov diddvar eis with acc. of place,
to betake one’s self somewhere, to go into some place:
Acts xix. 31, (eis rémovs mapaBddous, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; ets
rérous Tpaxeis, Diod. 14,81; eis ras epnuias, Diod. 5, 59;
Joseph. antt. 15, 7,7; eis kounv ruvd, Joseph. antt. 7,9, 7).
2. diSwpi re &v TL, i. e. to be or remain in, so that it is in,
[ef. W. 414 (386); B. 329 (283) ]: ev rH xetpi twos, Jn.
iii. 35; ev rais kapdias, 2 Co. i. 22; evr Kapd. twos, 2 Co.
viii. 16, (cf. 1 K. x. 24); elpnyny Sovva ev ry yn to bring
peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. did@pi te vmep
tivos, give up for ete. [ef. W. 383 (358) sq.]: Jn. vi. 51;
éavrov Umeép twos, Tit. ii. 14; €avrov avridutpov trep Twos,
1 Tim. ii. 6 ; éavrov wept [R WH txt. trrep; cf. wepi, I. c. 5. ]
rav duaptiay, for sins, i. e. to expiate them, Gal. i. 4.
4. diddvar Twi Kata Ta Epya, THY mpakiv, to give one acc.
to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds:
Rev. ii. 23 [Ps. xxvii. (xxvili.) 4]; (cf. drodacer, Mt. xvi.
20") Ko. ii. 6). 5. Hebraistically, dé6axa évamidy cov
Ovpay avewypevnv I have set before thee a door opened
i. e. have caused the door to be open to thee, Rev. iii. 8.
[Syn. d:d0vai, dwpeto@ar: 65. to give in general, an-
tithetic to AauBavewy ; Swp. specific, to bestow, present ; 5:5. might
be used even of evils, but dwp. could be used of such things
only ironically ; see Séua, fin. Comp.: dva-, amo-, avt-atro-,
dia-, €x-, emi-, weTa-, Tapa-, mpo- didwyuu.|
Si-eyelpw ; 1 aor. dunyepa; Pass., impf. dinyeepduny [but
Tr WH (Tedd. 2, 7) d:eyeipero in Jn. vi. 18, cf. B. 34 (30) ;
WH. App. p. 161]; 1 aor. ptep. dceyepOeis; to wake up,
awaken, arouse (from repose; differing from the simple
eyeipw, which has a wider meaning) ; from sleep: twa,
Mk. iv. 38 [here T Tr WH eyeipovow]; Lk. viii. 24; pass.,
Lk. viii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; Mk. iv. 39; with the addi-
tion aro Tov Urvov, Mt. i. 24 (LT Tr WH eyepéeis) ; from
repose, quiet: in pass. of the sea, which begins to be agi-
tated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the mind ;
stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1, as in 2 Macc.
xv. 10, ria rots Ovpois. (Several times in the O.T.
Apocr. [cf. W. 102 (97)]; Hippoer., [Aristot.], Hdian.;
occasionally in Anthol.) *
St-evOupcopar, -ovpar ; to weigh in the mind, consider : wept
twos, Acts x. 19, for Rec. évéup. (Besides, only in eccl.
writ.) *
Si-<E€pxopor: [2 aor. dueEnrOov]; to go out through
something: diefeAOodoa, sc. dia Gpvydvev, Acts xxviii. 3
Tdf. edd. 2, 7. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph., Hdt.],
Eur. down.) *
81-€£-080s, -ov, 7; fr. Hdt. down; a way out through,
outlet, exit: dveEodo trav ddav, Mt. xxii. 9, lit. ways through
which ways go out, i.e. acc. to the context and the design
of the parable places before the city where the roads from
the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high-
ways, the same being also their entrances; [cf. Ob. 14;
Ezek. xxi. 21; the R. V. renders it partings of the high-
ways]. The phrase figuratively represents the territory
of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to
go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T.
p- 634 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is
equiv. to the Hebr. nixyin, Num. xxxiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and
147
dvepxKopuat
often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen-
gesetzten Verba u. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the
crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most
frequented spots. | *
St-eppnvela, -as, 7, (Suepunveva, q. v.), interpretation: of
obscure utterances, 1 Co. xii. 10 L txt. (Not yet found
elsewhere.) *
St-eppnvevtys, -ov, 6, (Steppnveda, q. v.), an interpreter:
1 Co. xiv. 28 [L Tr WH mrg. épyny.j. (Eccles. writ.) *
Si-eppnvedw ; impf. denppnvevoy and (without augm. cf.
B. 34 (30)) dteppnvevoy (Lk. xxiv. 27 LL Tr mrg.); 1 aor.
(also without augm.; so “all early Mss.” Hort) dcep-
pnvevoa (Lk. 1. c. T Tr txt. WH); [pres. pass. dreppunvevo-
pat]; to interpret [6a intensifying by marking transition,
(cf. Germ. verdeutlichen) ; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.
v. p. 10sq.]; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said,
explain, expound : ri, Lk. xxiv. 27; absolutely, 1 Co. xii.
GUS sn Oe IGE Bile 2. to translate into one’s native
language: Acts ix. 36, (2 Mace. i. 36; Polyb. 3, 22, 3,
and several times in Philo [cf. Siegfried, Glossar. Phil.
Se Well) <2
Si-€pxopar; impf. Sinpxounv; fut. dcehevooua (Lk. ii.
35; see W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 58 (50)]); 2 aor. d7d4or;
pf. ptep. dueAnAvdas (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Hom. down];
1. where d:a has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf.
dia, C.]): to go through, pass through, [on its construc-
tions cf. W. § 52,4, 8]; a. dia twos, to go, walk, jour-
ney, pass through a place (Germ. den Durchweg neh-
men): Mt. xii. 43; xix. 24 RL Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Mk.
x. 25 [Rec.* eioehOety]; Lk. xi. 24; xviii. 25 L Trmrg.;
Jn. iv. 4; 1 Co. x.15 dca peécou airy, through the midst
of a crowd, Lk. iv. 30; Jo. viii. 59 Rec. ; [dia péeoov (L T
Tr WH 6. peoor, see dia, B. I.) Sapapeias, Lk. xvii. 11];
&e ipar, i. e. dia THS yopas tuar, 2 Co. i. 16 (where Lehm.
txt. dred Oeiv) ; [da ravrwv sc. Tov dyiwy (see mas, II. 1),
Acts ix. 32]. b. with ace. to travel the road which leads
through a place, go, pass, travel through a region: Lk.
Kix Acts, sat. 105 sx. 6s) xiv. 24:5 xv. 3,4 des sovieao
XVii. 23 (ra oeBacpara) ; Xvili. 23 ; xix. 1,21; xx. 2; 1Co.
xvi. 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: riv puynv dceAevoerae
poudaia, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart,
with gen. Hom. II. 20, 263; 23,876). c. absolutely:
exeivns Sc. 6500 (de before exeivns in Rec. is spurious) qpyed-
he duepxecOa, for he was to pass that way, Lk. xix. 4.
d. with specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre}
fix 6a makes reference to the intervening space to be
passed through or gone over: évéade, Jn. iv. 15 T WH,
Tr mrg.; [es thy Ayaiav, Acts xviii. 27]; eis ro mépay,
to go, cross, over to the farther shore, Mk. iv. 35; Lk.
Vill. 22; 6 @avaros dindOev cis mavras avOpwrovs, passed
through unto all men, so that no one could escape its
power, Ro. v. 12; €ws rivds, go even unto, ete. Lk. ii. 15;
Acts ix. 38; xi. 19, 22 RG[W. 609 (566)]. 2. where
dua answers to the Latin dis [cf. dua, C.]; to go to differ-
ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9; Am. vi. 2): Acts viii. 4, 40;
[x. 38]; dceAOdvres amd ths Wepyns having departed from
Perga sc. to various places, Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this
to 1, understanding dteA@ovres of passing through the ex-
dvepwTdw
tent of country]; év ols di7AOov among whom i.e. in
whose country J went about, or visited different places,
Acts xx. 25; dujpyovro xara tas kopas they went about
in various directions from one village to another, Lk. ix.
6; of a report, to spread, go abroad: d:épxerat 6 dAédyos,
Lk. v. 15; Thue. 6, 46; Xen. an. 1, 4, 7.. [Syn. see
€pxopat. | *
Siepwrdw: 1 aor. ptcp. dSuepwrnoas ; to ask through (i. e.
ask many, one after another): ri, to find out by asking,
to inquire out, Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb.,
Dio Cass. 43, 10; 48, 8.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete.
Pt. v. p. 15.*
Sverts, -€s, (Sis and éros), [fr. Hdt. down], of two years,
two years old : amd Sierovs sc. raidds, Mt. ii. 16, ef. Fritzsche
ad loc.; [others take d:cerovs here as neut.; see Meyer ].*
Seria, -as, 7, (from duer7s, cf. rpueria, rerpaeria), the
space of two years: Acts xxiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo
in Flace. § 16; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xli. 1; xlv. 5].) *
Sue-nyeopat, -odpat, [impv. 2 pers. sing. duyyov, ptep. din-
youpevos |; fut. dupynoopar; 1 aor. denynoduny; to lead or
carry a narration through to the end, (cf. the fig. use of
Germ. durchfiihren); set forth, recount, relate in full:
absol. Heb. xi. 32; ri, describe, Acts viii. 33 (see yeved,
3); revi foll. by indir. disc., ros etc., Mk. v. 16; Acts ix.
27; xii. 17 [here T om. Tr br. the dat.]; foll. by 4 ei8ov,
Mk. ix. 9; 60a éroince or eroinoay, Lk. viii. 39; ix. 10.
(Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. often for 150.)
[Comp.: éx-dinyéopat. | *
Si-HyNTIs, -ews, 7, (Senyéouat), a narration, narrative :
Lk. i. 1; used of the Gospel narratives also in Euseb.
h. e. 3, 24, 7; 3,39, 12; ef. Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35
(34) ; ix. 15, ete.; 2 Mace. ii. 32; vi. 17.)*
Si-nvekts, -es, (fr. Sinveyxa, duapépw, as the simple
nvexns fr. yveyxa, dépw), fr. Hom. down, continuous:
eis TO Sunverés, continually, Heb. vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14, (de
KraTwp és TO Sunvexes npebn, App. b. c. 1, 4).*
80draccos, -ov, (dis and Oadacca) ; 1. resembling
[or forming | two seas: thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2,
5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i.e.
washed by the sea on both sides (Dio Chrys. 5 p. 83):
témos §0adacgos, an isthmus or tongue of land, the ex-
tremity of which is covered by the waves, Acts xxvii.
41; al. understand here a projecting reef or bar against
which the waves dash on both sides; in opposition cf.
Meyer ad loc. (In Clem. hom. p. 20, ed. Dressel [Ep.
Petr. ad Jacob. § 14], men dddyoror x. evdordCovres rept
Tav THs anOecias éerayyeApatrwy are allegorically styled
térot Ovbddaccot S€ Kai Onpia@ders.) *
St-ikvéopor [LL WH ducky. (see I, c) }, -odpsae ; to go through,
penetrate, pierce: Heb. iv. 12. (Ex. xxvi. 28; Thuc.,
Theophr., Plut., al. ; in Homer transitively, to go through
un narrating.)*
Si-tornpr: 1 aor. dueornoa; 2 aor. dveorny; [fr. Hom.
down]; to place separately, put asunder, disjoin; in the
mid. [or pass.] and the pf. and 2 aor. act. to stand apart,
to part, depart: Bpaxd dé dvactnoavtes, sc. Eavtovs or tiv
vavv (cf. B. 47 (41)), when they had gone a little distance
148
Sixavos
viz. from the place before mentioned, i. e. having gone
a little farther, Acts xxvii. 28; of time: dtacrdons Spas
puds one hour having intervened, Lk. xxii. 59; dueorn
a7 av’ray parted, withdrew from them, Lk. xxiv. 51.*
8.-iox vplfopar [LL WH ducx. (see I, e) ]: impf. dvioyupitc-
Bn; 1. to lean upon. 2. to affirm stoutly, assert
confidently: Lk. xxii. 59; Acts xii. 15. (Lys., Isae.,
Plat., Dem., Joseph. antt. 2, 6,4; Ael. hist. an. 7, 18;
Dio Cass. 57, 23; al.) *
[Sixdgw; 1 aor. pass. édicacOnv; fr. Hom. down; to
Judge, pass judgment: absol. Lk. vi. 37 Tr mrg. (al. xa-
radik.).* |
SixaroKpiola, -as, 7, righteous judgment: Ro. ii. 5. (an
uncert. trans. in Hos. vi. 5 [where Sept. xpiva]; Test.
xii. patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547, and [$15] p. 581, ed.
Fabric. ; Justin. Mart. resp. de resurrect. xi. (15) 28 p.
360 ed. tert. Otto; [Hippol. p. 801 a.ed. Migne]; Basil
iii. p. 476 d. ed. Garn. or p. 694 ed. Par. alt. 1839. [Cf.
W.. 2513 99)(94)]]:)i*
Sikatos, -aia, -aov, (fr. dikn right), [fr. Hom. down],
prop. the Hebr. prs, observant of n Sixn, righteous, ob-
serving divine and human laws; one who is such as he
ought to be; (Germ. rechtbeschaffen; in the earlier lan-
guage, whence appropriated by Luther, gerecht in a
broad sense; in Grk. writ. used even of physical things,
as Ummos, Xen. mem. 4, 4,53 yndcov dixardrarov, most fer-
tile, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 38; [Gppa Sixacor, ib. 2, 2, 26]); als
in a wide sense, upright, righteous, virtuous, keeping the
commands of God; a. univ.: Mt. i. 19 (the meaning is,
it was not consistent with his uprightness to expose his
betrothed to public reproach); Mt. x. 41; xiii. 43, 49;
XXili; 28; xxv. 37,465 Lk. 1.6, 17; xiv.14 5 xviil.\9)s me
20; Ro. v. 7 [ef. W. 117 (111)]; 1 Tim.i. 9; Jas. v. 6,
16; 2 Pet. dit. 125.1 Jn. i)7; [10 Lehm.))5 Revs
11; opp. to duaprwdAol Kal aceBeis, 1 Pet. iv. 18; Sikavoe
kat aduxot, Mt. v.45; Acts xxiv. 15; used of O. T. char-
acters noted for piety and probity: Mt. xiii. 17; [xxiii.
29]; Heb. xii. 23; thus of Abel, Mt. xxiii. 35; Heb. xi.
4; of Lot, 2 Pet. ii. 7 sq. (Sap. x. 4 sq.) ; of those who
seem to themselves to be righteous, who pride them-
selves on their virtues, whether real or imaginary: Mt.
ix..13; Mk. 11.17; Lk. -v. 325 xv. 7,.(Eeel. vii 17) Gian
Joined with evAaBns, Lk. ii. 25 (7On evAaB7 x. Sixata, 7d
Sixaov x. evAaBés, Plat. polit. p. 311 a. b.); with aos,
Mk. vi. 20; with dya6és, Lk. xxiii. 50; with PoBovpevos rov
Gedv, Acts x. 22; &pya Sixara, opp. to rovnpa, 1 Jn. iii. 12.
Neut. 7d Sixatoy, that which regard for duty demands, what
is right: 2 Pet.i. 13; plur. Phil. iv. 8; Sikaudy eort, Eph.
vi. 1; Phil. i. 7; with the addition of évemov rot beod, God
being judge, Actsiv.19. b. the negative idea predomi-
nating: innocent, faultless, guiltless, (for »)3, Prov. i. 11;
Job ix. 23, ete.) ; thus used of Christ in the speech of
Gentiles: Mt. xxvii. 19, 24 RG Lbr. Tr br. WH mrg.;
Lk. xxiii. 47; aipa Sixaov (Prov. vi. 17; Joel iii. 19
(24); Jon. i. 14), Mt. xxiii. 85; [xxvii. 4 Tr mrg. WH
txt.]; 9 évrody dyia x. dcxaia (having no fellowship
with sin [al. al., see the Comm. ad loc.]) «. aya6n, Ro. vii.
12. _c. preéminently, of him whose way of thinking,
Sixatocvvn
feeling, and acting is wholly conformed to the will of
God, and who therefore needs no rectification in heart or
life ; in this sense Christ alone can be called Sixasos : Acts
vii. 52; xxii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1; dysos x. Sixavos,
Acts iii. 14; among the rest of mankind it is rightly de-
nied that one Sixcacos can be found, Ro. iii. 10 (Keel. vii.
21 (20) dvOpwmos ovk €ore Sixatos Ev TH yn, Os Tounoer ayabov
kai ovx duaptncera). of God: holy, Ro. iii. 26 (where
it is to be closely rendered just or righteous, on account
of the following xai tov Stxavodvra and the justifier or who
pronounces righteous, but the substantial meaning is
holy, that quality by virtue of which he hates and pun-
ishes sin); 1 Jn. ii. 29. d. contextually, approved of
God, acceptable to God, (Germ. gottwohlgefallig) : Ro. v.
19; with the addition éx ricrews, acceptable to God by
faith [W. 136 (129)]: Ro.i.17; Gal. iii. 11; Heb. x. 38;
dix. mapa TO eG, Ro. ii. 13. 2. In a narrower sense,
rendering to each his due; and that ina judicial sense, pass-
ing just judgment on others, whether expressed in words or
shown by the manner of dealing with them: Tit. i. 8;
so of God recompensing men impartially according to
their deeds, Rev. xvi. 5; in the same sense also in Jn.
xvii. 25 (who does not award the same fate to the loving
and faithful disciples of Christ and to ‘the world’); 1
Jn. i. 9 (who executes the laws of his government, and
therefore also the law concerning the pardon of sins) ;
6 dixavos kpirns, of Christ, 2 Tim. iv. 8; xpiows dixaia, Jn.
waoos vil. 24; 2) Th.ji, 5; plur:, Rev: xvi. 75) xix. 2} al
6001 Tr. Geod Sikarat x. dAnOwai, Rev. xv. 3; neut. 7d Sikaroy,
what is due to others, Col. iv. 1; what is agreeable to
justice and law, Lk. xii. 57; dixaoy se. eorir, it is agreeable
to justice, 2 Th. i. 6; accordant with deserts, Mt. xx. 4,
and 7 Rec. [See reff. s. v. duxaida, fin.; cf. dyads, fin. ] *
Sixaocivy, -ns, 7, (Sikacos); most frequently in Sept.
for pry and pry, rarely for 10%}; the virtue or quality
or state of one who is dixatos; 1. in the broad sense,
the state of him who is such as he ought to be, righteousness
(Germ. Rechtbeschaffenheit) ; the condition acceptable to
God (Germ. Gottwohlgefdlligkeit); a. univ.: Adyos THs
Sixacoovyns (like Aoyos tHs KatadAayns, A. TOU Travpov),
the doctrine concerning the way in which man may at-
tain to a state approved of God, Heb. v. 13; Bacdeds
Stkavoovyns, the king who himself has the approbation of
God, and who renders his subjects acceptable to God,
Heb. vii. 2; cf. Bleek ad loc. b. integrity, virtue, purity
of life, uprightness, correctness in thinking, feeling, and
acting: Mt. iii. 15; v.6, 10,20; vii 1GLT Tr WH; Acts
xiii. 10; xxiv. 25; Ro. vi. 13, 16, 18-20 (opp. to duapria,
avopia, and dkafapaia); Ro. viii. 10 (opp. to dyapria) ;
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see c.]) ; 2 Co. vi. 7, 14 (opp. to dvouia, as in
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24); 2 Co. xi. 15; Eph. v. 9; vi. 14; Phil.
Bidet Timevi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iii. 16} iv. 8; Tits iid;
feb. 1.9; xii. 115 Jas. ii..18 5 1 Pet. iiti.1245, 2 Pet. i1:.5;
21; iii. 13, and very often in the O. T.; év 650 dtxavocvyns,
walking in the way of righteousness i. q. an upright,
righteous, man, Mt. xxi. 32; rod Oeov, the righteousness
which God demands, Mt. vi. 33; Jas.i. 20; of righteous-
ness which manifests itself in beneficence : 2 Co. ix. 9 sq.
149
Ouxatocvvyn
(cf. Tob. xiv. 11; Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1151; so
Chald. APS, Dan. iv. 24, andin the Talmud and rabbin.
writ. [Buxtorf. col. 1891 (p. 941 ed. Fischer) ; cf.W. 32]) ;
where d:k. cai dovdrns are connected, — Lk. i. 75; Eph.
iv. 24, (Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4 and occasion-
ally in prof. writ.),—the former denotes right conduct
towards men, the latter piety towards God (cf. Plat.
Gorg. p. 507 b.; Grimm on Sap. p. 181 sq.; [ef. Trench
§ Ixxxviii. p. 328 sq.; for additional exx. see Wetst. on
Eph. l. c.; ef. dcvos]; evoeBera x. Sixaroovvn, Diod. 1, 2);
mrotev THY Stkatoa. to do righteousness, to live uprightly :
1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7; iii. 10 [not Lchm.]; and in Rev. xxii.
11 ace. to the text now accepted; in like manner épyd¢e-
aba Sixacoovynv, Acts x. 35; Heb. xi. 33; Cv rH Stxato-
avvn, to live, devote the life, to righteousness, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ;
mAnpovv racav duxatoovyny, to perform completely whatever
is right, Mt. iii.15. When affirmed of Christ, duaoctvy
denotes his perfect moral purity, integrity, sinlessness:
Jn. xvi. 8, 10; when used of God, his holiness: Ro. iii.
5, 25 sq. c. in the writings of PAUL 7 dixatoovvn has a
peculiar meaning, opposed to the views of the Jews and
Judaizing Christians. To understand this meaning, the
foll. facts esp. must be kept in view: the Jews as a peo-
ple, and very many who had become converts from among
them to Christianity, supposed that they secured the
favor of God by works conformed to the require-
ments of the Mosaic law, as though by way of merit; and
that they would thus attain to eternal salvation. But this
law demands perfect obedience to all its precepts,
and threatens condemnation to those who do not render
such obedience (Gal. iii. 10, 12). Obedience of this
kind no one has rendered (Ro. iii. 10), neither Jews nor
Gentiles (Ro. i. 24— ii. 1),—for with the latter the
natural law of right written on their souls takes the place
of the Mosaic law (Ro. ii. 14 sq.). On this account Paul
proclaims the love of God, in that by giving up Christ,
his Son, to die as an expiatory sacrifice for the sins of
men he has attested his grace and good-will to mankind,
so that they can hope for salvation as if they had not
sinned. But the way to obtain this hope, he teaches, is
only through faith (see miots [esp. 1 b. and d.]), by
which a man appropriates that grace of God revealed
and pledged in Christ; and this faith is reckoned by
God to the man as éccacoovvn; that is to say, 6. denotes
the state acceptable to God which becomes a sinner’s posses-
sion through that faith by which he embraces the grace of
God offered him in the expiatory death of Jesus Christ
(see Stxaido, 3 b.). In this sense 7 dccacoovvn is used
without an adjunct in Ro. iv. 5 sq. 11; v.17, 21; ix. 30 sq.;
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see b.]); 1 Co. i. 30; Gal. v.53 Scxacoovyn
Geov, 7) Tov Geod dixacoovrn, the righteousness which God
ascribes, what God declares to be righteousness [ W. 186
(175) ], Ro. i. 17; ii. 21; x. 3; by a pregnant use, equiv.
to that divine arrangement by which God leads men to a
state acceptable to him, Ro. x. 4; as abstract for con-
crete, equiv. to those whom God accounts righteous, 2
Co. v. 21; dx. Oeod dud rictews, Ro. iii. 22; 4 dex. rhs
miorews, Which is acquired by faith, or seen in faith, Ro.
d1Kalow
iv. 11, 13; 7 €« Oeov dixatoo. which comes from God, i.e.
is adjudged, imputed, Phil. iii. 9 (where the addition emi
Ty miore: depends on éxyoy, having. . . founded upon faith
[cf. W. 137 (130); 392 (367); yet cf. Ellic. ad loc.]);
9 ex miatews Sixacoc. Which comes from faith, Ro. ix. 30;
x. 6; 9 dca miatews Xpiorod, Phil. iii. 9; 9 kata miotiy di-
kaoc- according to, appropriate to, faith, Heb. xi. 7 (but
it should be kept in mind that the conception of ‘faith’
in the Ep. to the Heb. is broader than in Paul’s writings
[ef. e. g. Kurtz ad loc.]); Christ is called dcxavoovvn, as
being the one without whom there is no righteousness,
as the author of righteousness, 1 Co. i. 30 ; eis dixacoodyny,
unto righteousness as the result, to obtain righteousness,
Ro. x. 4, 10; 9 miotis Noyi¢eral tux eis Sixacoovyny faith
is reckoned to one for righteousness, i. e. is so taken into
account, that righteousness is ascribed to it or recognized
in it: Ro. iv. 3, 6,9, 22; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 23; 7 dtaxovia
Tis Sixatoa. (see dSiaxovia, 2 b.), 2 Co. iii. 9. Opposed to
this ducacoovvn arising from faith is 7 é« vopouv dcxatoc., a
state acceptable to God which is supposed to result from
obedience to the law, Ro. x. 5 sq. ; 7) dux. €v voz relying on
the law, i.e. on imaginary obedience to it, Phil. iii. 6; 7
idia dixatoc. and 7 éu7 dix., such as one supposes that he
has acquired for himself by his own works, Ro. x. 3;
Phil159) ciaGal nin 20 2 1ii-2 2. in a closer sense,
justice, or the virtue which gives each one his due; it is said
to belong to God and Christ, as bestowing todripov riot
upon all Christians impartially, 2 Pet. i. 1; of judicial
justice, Ro. ix. 283 RGTrmrg. in br.; xpivew ev Suxato-
ovvn, Acts xvii. 31; Rev. xix. 11. [See reff. s. v. dixaida,
fin. |*
Sikardw, -o ; fut. Sixacwow; 1 aor. edikaiwoa; Pass., [ pres.
dixaovpar]; pf. deducaiwpar; 1 aor. edicarwOnv ; fut. dixaro-
O@nooua; (dixaos); Sept. for pis and puyn; Als,
prop. (ace. to the analogy of other verbs ending in da, as
tuprda, dovAdw) to make Sixatos; to render righteous or
such as he ought to be; (Vulg. justifico) ; but this mean-
ing is extremely rare, if not altogether doubtful; éd:kat-
woa TH Kapdiav pov stands for 339 ‘D1 in Ps. Ixxii.
(Ixxili.) 13 (unless J have shown my heart to be upright
be preferred as the rendering of the Greek there). 2.
twa, to show, exhibit, evince, one to be righteous, such
as he is and wishes himself to be considered (Ezek. xvi.
51 sq.; rHv Wuxny adrod, Jer. iii. 11, and, probably, &-
xatovv Bixaov, Is. lili. 11): 9 copia edtxaiwbn ard Tov
texvev aitns, the wisdom taught and exemplified by John
the Baptist, and by Jesus, gained from its disciples (i. e.
from their life, character, and deeds) the benefit of be-
ing shown to be righteous, i. e. true and divine [cf. B.
322 (277); al. interpret, was acknowledged to be right-
eous on the part of (nearly i. q. by) her children; cf. B.
325 (280); see amd, I. 2d. bb.], Lk. vii. 35; Mt. xi. 19
[here T Tr txt. WH read épyav i. e. by her works];
Pass., of Christ: edicaraOn ev mvevpart, evinced to be
righteous as to his spiritual (divine [(?) cf. e. g. Ellic. ad
loc., or Mey. on Ro. i. 4]) nature, 1 Tim. iii. 16; of God:
Straws SixatwO7s ev trois Adyous cov, Ro. iii. 4 fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6
(kvpios pdvos SixarwOnoerat, Sir. xviii. 2); pass. used re-
150
diKaLow
flexively, to show one’s self righteous : of men, Rev. xxii.
11 Rec.; (ri dtxatwOapev ; Gen. xliv. 16). 3. twa, to
declare, pronounce, one to be just, righteous, or such
as he ought to be, (cf. 601d to declare to be like, liken i. e.
compare; datd@, Sap. vi. 11; a&id@, which never means
to make worthy, but to judge worthy, to declare worthy,
to treat as worthy; see also cowdw, 2b.); a. with the
negative idea predominant, to declare guiltless one
accused or who may be accused, acquit of a charge or
reproach, (Deut. xxv. 1; Sir. xiii. 22 (21), ete.; an un-
just judge is said d:cacovv Tov aoeB7 in Ex. xxiii. 7; Is. v.
23): éavrdv, Lk. x. 29; pass. ov Sedixaiwpat, sc. with God,
1 Co. iv. 4; pregnantly with amd rév dépapriay added, to
be declared innocent and therefore to be absolved from
the charge of sins [ef. B. 322 (277)], Acts xiii. 38 (39)
(so dé dpaprias, Sir. xxvi. 29; simply, to be absolved, se.
from the payment of a vow, Sir. xviii. 22 (21)); hence
figuratively, by a usage not met with elsewhere, to be freed,
dré ths dpaprtias, from its dominion, Ro. vi. 7, where cf.
Fritzsche or [(less fully) Meyer]. b. with the posi-
tive idea predominant, to judge, declare, pronounce,
righteous and therefore acceptable, (God is said dtxavovv
dixacov, 1 K. viii. 82): €avrov, Lk. xvi. 15; edcxaiwoay Tov
Gecv declared God to be righteous, i.e. by receiving the
baptism declared that it had been prescribed by God
rightly, Lk. vii. 29; pass. by God, Ro. ii. 13; && épyov
edtxa.@On, got his reputation for righteousness (sc. with
his countrymen [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]) by
works, Ro. iv. 2; ék rav Adywv, by thy words, in contrast
with carudixager Oar, sc. by God, Mt. xii. 37. Especially
is it so used, in the technical phraseology of Paul, re-
specting God who judges and declares such men as put
faith in Christ to be righteous and acceptable to him,
and accordingly fit to receive the pardon of their sins
and eternal life (see Sicaoovvy, 1 c.): thus absolutely,
duxacovy twa, Ro. iii. 26; iv. 5; viii. 30, 33 (se. nas, opp.
to éyxadetv) ; with the addition of ék« (in consequence of)
miatews, Ro. iii. 30; Gal. iii. 8; of dca THs wicrews, Ro.
iii. 30; men are said dixatovoba, dikarwOnvar, TH xapere
rou Geov, Tit. iii. 7; Swpedy TH xdp. Tt. Oeod, Ro. ili. 24;
mioret, Ro. iii. 28; é« micrews, by means of faith, Ro. v.
1; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 24; ev 7@ aipate tod Xpiorod (as the
meritorious cause of their acceptance, as the old
theologians say, faith being the apprehending or
subjective cause), Ro. v. 9; év 7@ dvdpate Tov Kupiov
"Inaovd kat év T@ TvEvpaTL TOU Beod jyar, by confessing the
name of the Lord (which implies faith in him, Ro. x. 10,
cf. 2 Co. iv. 13), and by the Spirit of God (which has
awakened faith in the soul), 1 Co. vi. 11; év Xpioro
through Christ, Gal. ii. 17; Acts xiii. 39; it is vehement-
ly denied by Paul, that a man Sd:xatodrat €€ Epywr vopov,
Gal. ii. 16,—with the addition évdmov adrov, i. e. of
God, Ro. iii. 20, ef. vs. 28; iv. 2, (see Sucacoovyn, 1 ec. sub
fin.) ;—a statement which is affirmed by James in ii. 21,
24 sq. (though he says simply ¢& épywv dixarovrat, signifi-
cantly omitting vdyov); to the same purport Paul de-
nies that a man dcxavodrat ev vou@, in obeying the law, or
by keeping it, Gal. v. 4; with the addition waa ré Oee,
Sikarwpa
in the sight of God, Gal. iii. 11. Lk. xviii. 14 teaches
that a man ducavovra by deep sorrow for his sins, which
so humbles him that he hopes for salvation only from
divine grace.
The Pauline conceptions of Sixatos, dixatoovvn, Sixarow,
are elucidated esp. by Winzer, De vocabulis Sixatos, etc.,
in Ep. ad Rom., Lips. 1831; Usteri, Paulin. Lehrbegriff
p- 86 sq. ed. 4 etc.; Neander, Gesch. der Pflanzung u.s.w.
ii. p. 567 sqq. et passim, ed. 3, [Robinson’s trans. of ed.
4, pp. 382 sqq., 417 sqq.]; Baur, Paulus p. 572 sqq.
[(Zeller’s) ed. 2, vol. ii. 145-183; Eng. trans. vol. ii. p.
134 sqq.]; Rauwenhoff, Disquisitio etc., Lugd. Bat. 1852;
Lipsius, Die paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, Lpz. 1853;
Schmid, Bibl. Theologie des N. T. p. 562 sqq. ed. 2, [p.
558 sqq. ed. 4; Eng. trans. p. 495 sq.]; Ernesti, Vom
Ursprung der Siinde u.s.w. i. p. 152 sqq.; Messner, Lehre
der Apostel, p. 256 sqq., [summary by S. R. Asbury in
Bib. Sacer. for 1870, p. 140 sq.]; Jul. Kostlin in the
Jahrbb. fiir deutsche Theol. 1856 fase. 1 p. 85 sqq.;
Wieseler, Commentar ii. d. Br. an d. Galater, p. 176 sqq.
[see in Schaff’s Lange’s Rom. p. 122 sq.]; Aahnis, Lu-
therische Dogmatik, Bd. i. p. 592 sqq.; Philippi, Dog-
matik, v. 1 p. 208 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. § 65;
Ritschi, Die christl. Lehre v. d. Versohnung u. Rechtf.
ii. 318 sqq.; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 172 sqq. [ Eng.
trans. vol. i. p. 171 sqq.; but esp. Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit.
Expos. of the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp.
163-198. On the patristic usage see Reithmayr, Gala-
terbrief, p. 177 sq.; Cremer, Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p.
285; Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.].
In classic Grk. d:carow (lonic dixaréw, Hdt.) is ils
i. q. Sixatov vouifw, to deem right or fair: ri, often foll.
by the inf.; to choose what is right and fair, hence univ.
to choose, desire, decide: Hdt., Soph., Thuc., al. 2s
with ace. of person, 7d dikavov mo@ twa to do one justice,
in a bad sense, viz. to condemn, punish, one: Hdt., Thuc.,
Plat., al.; hence dicavotoba, to have justice done one’s
self, to suffer justice, be treated rightly, opp. to adicetoba,
Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 9, 11 p. 1136*, 18 sqq. (In like
manner the German rechtfertigen in its early forensic
use bore a bad sense viz. to try judicially (so for avaxpi-
ve, Acts xii. 19 Luther), then condemn; execute judg-
ment, esp. put to death.) *
Sixalwpa, -ros, ro, (fr. dicardw; 6 dSedixaiwrar or Td dedi-
katouevov), Sept. very often for pn, mpM, and 05wr1; for
myn, Deut. xxx. 16; 1 K. ii. 3; plur. occasionally for
D WPd; 1. that which has been deemed right so as to
have the force of law; a. what has been established and
ordained by law, an ordinance: univ. of an appointment
of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32; plur. used of
the divine precepts of the Mosaic law: rov xupiov, Lk.
i. 6; Tov vopov, Ro. ii. 26; 7d Stxaiwpa Tod vopov, collec-
tively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Ro. viii.
4; dikaropata Aatpeias, precepts concerning the public
worship of God, Heb. ix. 1; Sixatmpata capkes, laws re-
specting bodily purity [(?) cf. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b.
@ judicial decision, sentence; of God — either the favor-
able judgment by which he acquits men and declares
151
éidoryos
them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16; or unfavorable: sen-
tence of condemnation, Rev. xv. 4, (punishment, Plat. lege.
9,864e.). 2. a righteous act or deed : ra dtkat@pata Tov
dyiov, Rev. xix. 8 (rév rarépav, Bar. ii. 19); évos dtxai-
wpa, the righteous act of one (Christ) in his giving him-
self up to death, opp. to the first sin of Adam, Ro. v. 18,
(Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 7, 7 p. 1135%, 12 sq. kadetrae dé
padXoy Oixavorpaynpa 76 Kowor, dixaiwpa b€ Td emavopbwpa
Tov adiknparos, [cf. rhet. 1, 13, 1 and Cope’s note on 1, 3,
9]). [CEf. reff. in Scxardw. | *
Sikalws, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; 1. justly, agreeably
to right: kpivew (see dixaos, 2), 1 Pet. ii. 23; to suffer,
Lk. xxiii. 41. 2. properly, as is right: 1 Co. xv. 34.
3. uprightly, agreeably to the law of rectitude: 1 Th. ii.
10 (6ciws kat dixaiws, as Plat. rep. 1 p. 331 a. [ef. Trench
§ lxxxviii. p. 328]]); Tit. ii. 12.*
Stkaiwors, -ews, 7, (fr. Suxarow, equiv. to Td dixacovy, the
act Tov OtkatovvTos ; in extra-bibl. writ. fr. Thuc. on, the
justification or defence of a cause; sentence of condem-
nation; judgment in reference to what is just), the act
of God’s declaring men free from guilt and acceptable to
him; adjudging to be righteous, [A. V. justification]: dia
Tv Stkaiwow nuev, because God wished to declare us
righteous, Ro. iv. 25; eis ducaloow Cons, unto acquittal,
which brings with it the bestowment of life, Ro. v. 18.
[Cf. reff. in 8cxatde. | *
SikacrrHs, -ov, 6, (duxalw), a judge, arbitrator, umpire :
Lk. xii. 14 [here crit. texts xpernv]; Acts vii. 27 (fr. Ex.
ii. 14); Acts vii. 35. (Sept. for uDw; in Grk. writ. fr.
[ Aeschyl. and] Hdt. on.) *
[SyNn. Sixacrhs, kpirnhs: acc. to etymol. and classic usage
5. is the more dignified and official term ; «. gives prominence
to the mental process, whether the ‘judge’ be a magistrate
or not. Schmidt ch. 18, 6.]
Sixn, -ns, 7, [allied with Setkvyps, Curtius § 14], fr.
Hom. down; 1. custom, usage, [cf. Schmidt ch. 18,
4 cf.3]. 2. right, justice. 3. asuitatlaw 4.4
judicial hearing, judicial decision, esp. a sentence of con-
demnation; so in Acts xxv. 15 [LT Tr WH karadixny].
5. execution of the sentence, punishment, (Sap. xviii. 11;
2 Mace. viii. 11): Sikny tméyew, Jude 7; Sikny rivew
(Soph. El. 298; Aj. 113; Eur. Or. 7), to suffer punish-
aos V2 AN ie se Se 6. the goddess Justice, avenging
justice: Acts xxviii. 4, as in Grk. writ. often fr. Hes.
theog. 902 on; (of the avenging justice of God, personi-
fied, Sap. i. 8, ete.; cf. Grimm ad loc. and Com. on 4
Mace. p. 318, [he cites 4 Mace. iv. 13, 21; vill. 13, 21;
ix. 9; xi. 3; xii. 12; xviii. 22; Philo adv. Flace. § 18;
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 8]).*
Sixrvov, -ov, To, [perhaps fr. AIKEIN to cast, cf. Etym.
Maen. col. 275, 21], a net: Mt. iv. 20 sq.; Mk. i. 18 sq.;
LE. v. 2,.4-6; Jn. xxi. 6, 8,11. (Hom: et sqq.) *
[Syn. d/ervov, auplBAnotpoy, caynv7: 5. seems to be
the general name for nets of all kinds; whereas aug. and cay.
designate specifically nets for fishin g:— the former a cast-
ing-net, generally pear-shaped ; the latter a seine or drag-net.
Cf. Trench § lxiv.; B.D. s. v. Net.]
Sidoyos, -ov, (Sis and A€yw); 1. saying the same thing
twice, repeating: Poll. 2,118 p. 212 ed. Hemst.; whence
610
&iAoyeivy and d:Aoyia, Xen. de re equ. 8, 2. 2. double-
tongued, double in speech, saying one thing with one person,
another with another (with intent to deceive): 1 Tim.
iii. 8.*
6, conjunction i. q. 8? 6, [fr. Thuc. and Plato down],
wherefore, on which account: Mt. xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 35; vii.
Us Acts x29) Ronis 24nd) LC Onxits Ose) COnwie 1s
Heb. iii. 7; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. i. 13, and often. [Cf. W.
445 (414); B. 233 (200); on Paul’s use, see Ellic. on
Gal. iv. 31.]
St-o8etm: impf. diadevorv; [1 aor. diodevoa] ; 1. to
pass or travel through: tomov twa, Acts xvii. 1; (Sept.,
Polyb., Plut., al.). 2. to travel hither and thither, go
about: with cara wow xa kopnv added, through city
and village, Lk. viii. 1.*
Avovicros, -ov, 6, Dionysius, an Athenian, a member
of the Areopagus, converted to Christianity by Paul’s
instrumentality: Acts xvii. 34. [Cf. B.D.s. v.]*
8.6-mrep, conjunction, (fr. 6:6 and the enclitic particle
mép [q- v-]), [fr. Thue. down]; on which very account,
[A. V. wherefore]: 1 Co. viii. 13 [Treg. 8:6 wep]; x. 14;
xiv. 13 where L T Tr WH 6&10.*
Somers, -és, (fr. Avs of Zeus, and rer for rimtw; in
prof. writ. also Svimerns), fallen from Zeus, i. e. from
heaven: rd dvomereés, sc. @yadpa (which is expressed in
Eur. Iph. T. 977; Hdian. 1, 11, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.; cf. W.
234 (219); 592 (551)]), an image of the Ephesian Ar-
temis which was supposed to have fallen from heaven,
Acts xix. 35; [ef. Meyer ad loc.; Farrar, St. Paul, ii.
13 sq.].*
Sid6pPwpa, -ros, rd, (fr. StopOdw to set right); correction,
amendment, reform: Acts xxiv. 2 (3) LT Tr WH for
RG xaropOwparav. (Hippocr., Aristot., Polyb. 3, 13;
Plut. Num.17; Diog. Laért. 10, 121; [ef. Lob. ad Phryn.
p: 250 sq. ].) *
Si-dpOwors, -ews, 7, (fr. dtopAda) ; 1. prop. in a
physical sense, a making straight, restoring to its natural
and normal condition something which in some way pro-
trudes or has got out of line, as (in Hippocr.) broken or
misshapen limbs. 2. of acts and institutions, refor-
malion: xatpis SiopOacews a season of reformation, or
the perfecting of things, referring to the times of the
Messiah, Heb. ix. 10. (Aristot. Pol. 3, 1, 4 [p. 1275»,
13}; vdéyov, de mund. 6 p. 400°, 29; [ef. Joseph. c. Ap.
, 20, 2]; Polyb. 8, 118, 12 tév moderevpdtrwv, Diod. 1,
5 r@v duaptnpudror, Joseph. antt. 2, 4, 4; b. j. 1, 20, 1;
al.; {cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq.].)*
St-optcow; Pass., 1 aor. inf. duopvxOjvac (Mt. xxiv. 43
T Tr WH; Lk. xii. 39 TWH Trmrg.); 2 aor. inf. 810-
puynva, (cf. WH. App. p. 170; fr. Hom. down]; to dig
through: a house (Xen. symp. 4, 30; Job xxiv. 16 Sept.),
Mt. xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 39; absol. Mt. vi. 19 sq. [W. 594
(552); B. 146 (127)].*
[ Ads, see Ais. |
Atéo-Kovpot (Phrynichus prefers the form Aoxopor;
in earlier Attic the dual tr Avooxép@ was more usual, cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 235), -ev, oi, (fr. Ads of Zeus, and
Kovpos or xopos boy, as xopn girl), Dioscuri, the name
1 tS
152
dicTomos
given to Castor and [(Polydeuces, the Roman)] Pollux,
the twin sons of Zeus and Leda, tutelary deities of
sailors: Acts xxviii. 11 [R. V. The Twin Brothers; cf.
B.D. s. v. Castor and Pollux ].*
Si-671, conjunction, equiv. to dia rovro, 6rt; 1. on
this account that, because, [cf. W. 445 (415)}: Lk. ii. 7;
xxi. 28; Acts [xili. 35, where RG 6:0]; _ xvii. 31 Rec.;
xx. 26 TWH Trmrg.; xxii. 18; 1 Co. xv. 9; Gal. ii. 16
(LT Tr WH 6re); Phil. ii. 26; 1 Th. ii. 8; iv. 6; Heb.
xi. 5, 23; Jas. iv.3; 1 Pet.i. 16, 24; ii. 6 [Rec. 8:0 kai].
2. for (cf. Fritzsche on Ro. i. 19, vol. i. p. 57 sq.; [per
contra Mey. ad loc.; Ellic. on Gal. ii. 16; (ef. Jebb in
Vincent and Dicksén, Modern Greek ete. ed. 2, App.
§ 80, 3)]): Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 20 Ree. ; xviii. 10; Ro.i. 19,
21; iii. 20; viii. 7; (1 Th. ii. 18 L T Tr’ WH for RG
d:0); [1 Pet. i. 16 Tdf. From Hdt. down.]*
Avotpephs [L WH -rpegns; cf. Chandler §§ 634, 637],
6, (fr. Avds and rpéda, nourished by Zeus, or foster-child
of Zeus), Diotrephes, a Christian man, but proud and
arrogant: 3 Jn. vs.9 sq. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.]*
Sumddos (-ovs), -dn (-7), -dov (-odv), [fr. Hom. down],
twofold, double: 1 Tim. v. 17; Rev. xviii. 6; dumAorepos
(a compar. found also in Appian. hist. praef. § 10, from
the positive form diAds [B. 27 (24) ]) tyav, twofold more
than yourselves, Mt. xxiii. 15 [(cf. Just. M. dial. 122)].*
Simddw, -&: [1 aor. edimAwoa]; (diAd0s); to double:
diuthooate airy [only RG] dda [ra 5. T Tr WH br.]
i. e. return to her double, repay in double measure the
evils she has brought upon you, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V.
double unto her the double]. (Xen. Hell. 6,5, 19; Plut.
Cam. 41; Diog. Laért. 6, 22.) *
Sts, adv., [Curtius § 277; fr. Hom. down], twice: Mk.
xiv. 30,72; dis rov caBBarov twice in the week, Lk. xviii.
12; kal dak kai dis (see dma, c.), Phil. iv. 16; 1 Th. ii.
18. In the phrase Sis dro@avovra, Jude 12, Sis is not
equiv. to completely, absolutely; but the figure is so ad-
justed to the fact, that men are represented as twice
dead in a moral sense, first as not having yet been re-
generated, and secondly as having fallen from a state of
grace ; see anodvnoxa, I. 4; [but ef. the various interp.
as given in (Mey.) Huther or in Schaff’s Lange (Fronm.)
ad loc. Inthe Babyl. Talm. (Ber. 10 a.) we read, ‘ Thou
art dead here below, and thou shalt have no part in the
life to come’ ].*
Ais, an unused nominat. for Zevs, gen. Aids, ace. Ala
(Atay, Acts xiv. 12 Tdf. ed. 7; see in dppnv and B. 14
(378)), Zeus, Jupiter, the supreme divinity in the belief
of Greeks and Romans; the father of gods and men:
Acts xiv. 12sq. (2 Mace. vi. 2.) [Cf. Zevs.] *
Sto-pupids, -ados, 4, twice ten thousand, two myriads :
Rev. ix. 16 LT (WH Sis pupiddes), for RG dv0 pupiddes.*
Siora{w: 1 aor. edictaca; (dis); to doubt, waver: Mt.
xiv. 81; xxviii. 17. (Plat., [Soph.], Aristot., Plut., al.) *
Slo-ropos, -ov, (Sis and oropua), having a double mouth,
as a river, Polyb. 34, 10, 5; [680i i. e. branching, Soph.
O.C.900]. As oroua is used of the edge of a sword and
of other weapons, so dieropos has the meaning two-edged :
used of a sword in Heb. iv. 12; Rev. i. 163 ii. 12, and
Svory (Avot
acc. to Schott in xix. 15; also Judges iii. 16; Prov. v. 4;
Ps. exlix. 6; Sir. xxi. 3; &ios; Eur. Hel. 983.*
Sto-x ror, -ar, -a, two thousand: Mk. v. 13.
Hdt. down. | *
Si-vAito [Rk G T Tr dwar. (see Y, v) ]; (dAi¢@ to defecate,
cleanse from dregs or filth) ; to filter through, strain thor-
oughly, pour through a filter: tov kovewra, to rid wine of a
gnat by filtering, strain out, Mt. xxiii. 24. (Amos vi. 6
SwAtopevos oivos, Artem. oneir. 4, 48 edSo€av SwriCew
mporepov Tov oivov, Dioscor. 2,86 dia paxous Awov dwribev
[et passim; Plut. quaest. conviv. 6,7, 1, 5]; Archyt. ap.
Stob. floril. i. p. 13, 40 metaph. Beds eiAtxpuy Kal Sir
opevay €xet THY apeTtay.) *
Sixafw: 1 aor. inf. duydoar; (diya) ; to cut into two parts,
cleave asunder, dissever: Plat. polit. p. 264 d.; metaph.
diyafw Tivd Kata Twos, to set one at variance with [lit.
against] another: Mt. x. 35. [Cf. Fischer, De vitiis
lexx. etc. p. 334 sq. | *
Sixooracia, -as, 7, (Ocxooraréw to stand apart), dissen-
sion, division; plur.: Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. iii. 3 [Rec.];
Gal. v. 20. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Solon in Dem.
p- 423, 4 and Hat. 5, 75 on; [1 Mace. iii. 29].) *
SixoTopew, -d: fut. d.yorounow; (dcyorouos cutting in
two) ; to cut into two parts (Ex. xxix. 17): Mt. xxiv. 51;
Lk. xii. 46, — in these passages many suppose reference
to be made to that most cruel mode of punishment, in use
among the Hebrews (1S. xv. 33) and other ancient nations
(see Win. RWB. s. v. Lebensstrafen; [B. D. s. v. Pun-
ishments, III. b.3; esp. Wetstein on Mt. 1. c.]), by which
criminals and captives were cut intwo. But in the text
the words which follow, and which imply that the one
thus ‘cut asunder’ is still surviving, oppose this interpre-
tation ; so that here the word is more fitly translated cut
up by scourging, scourge severely, [but see Meyer on Mt.
l.¢.j. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) *
Supaw, -o, subjunc. pres. 3 pers. sing. dupa (In. vii. 37;
Ro. xii. 20; often so fr. the Maced. age on for the Attic
dup, cf. W. § 13, 3 b.; [B. 44 (38)]; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
61); fut. dupnow; 1 aor. edinoa; (dia thirst); [fr.
Hom. down]; ¢o thirst; 1. absolutely, to suffer thirst;
suffer from thirst: prop., Mt. xxv. 35, 37,42, 44; Jn. iv.
15; xix. 28; Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 11; figuratively, those
are said to thirst who painfully feel their want of, and
eagerly long for, those things by which the soul is re-
freshed, supported, strengthened: Jn. iv. 13 sq-; vi. 35;
vii. 37; Rev. vii. 16; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; (Sir. xxiv. 21 (20);
li. 24). 2. with an ace. of the thing desired: ray &-
katoovrny, Mt. v. 6, (Ps. Ixii. (Ixiii.) 2; in the better Grk.
writ. with gen.; cf. W. § 30,10 b.; [B. 147 (129) ]; éAevbe-
pias, Plat. rep. 8 p. 562 ¢.; rujs, Plut. Cat. maj. 11; al.;
Svc 17).*
Sios, -eos (-ovs), 7d, thirst: 2 Co. xi. 27.
down, for the older dia. ] *
Sipuxos, -ov, (Sis and Wuyn), double-minded; a. wa-
vering, uncertain, doubting: Jas. i. 8, (oi dipuxoe Kal of
duordCorres mepi Tis Tov Oeov Suvduews, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
11, 2; radairwpoi iow oi Sipvyon, of Siordgovres Thy Wuynv
Lal. rH Wux7], ibid. 23, 3; pi yivov dipuyos ev mpocevyy
[From
[From Thuc.
153
doypa
gov, i €orat 7) ov, Constt. apostol. 7,115; px) yivov dipvyos
€v mpooevxH Tov, pakdptos yap 6 py diotacas, Ignat. ad
Heron. 7; [cf. reff. in Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 19, 5]).
b. divided in interest sc. between God and the world:
Jas.iv.8. Not found in prof. writ. [ Philo, frag. ii. 663 ].*
Siwypds, -ov, 6, (Oudkw), persecution: Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv.
17; x. 30; Acts viii. 1; xiii. 50; Ro. viii. 35; plur., 2 Co.
xii. 10; 2 Th.i.4; 2 Tim. iii.11. [Fr. Aeschyl. down. ] *
Sidktys, -ov, 6, (dtaKkw), a persecutor: 1 Tim. i. 13.
Not found in prof. writ.*
Simkw ; impf. ediwxoyv; fut. dof (Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk.
xxi. 12; Jn. xv..20; 2S. xxii. 38; Sap. xix. 2; a rarer
form for the more com. Attic Suoéoua, cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. 154; W.84 (80); [B. 53 (46); esp. Veitch s. v.;
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 377]); 1 aor. édiwéa; Pass.,
[pres. Suoxopar]; pf. ptep. dediaypevos; 1 fut. draxAnoopar;
(fr. dé@ to flee) ; Sept. commonly for 79 ; 1. to make
to run or flee, put to flight, drive away: (twa) amd rodeos
eis modu, Mt. xxiii. 34, cf. x. 23 Grsb. 2. to run swiftly
in order to catch some person or thing, to run after; absol.
(Hom. Il. 23, 344; Soph. El. 738, etc.; diaxew dSpdpe,
Xen. an. 6, 5, 25; cf. 7, 2, 20), to press on: fig. of one
who in a race runs swiftly to reach the goal, Phil. iii. 12
(where distinguished fr. caraXapBavew, [ef. Hdt. 9, 58;
Leian. Hermot. 77]), vs. 14. to pursue (in a hostile
manner) :*twd, Acts xxvi. 11; Rev. xii. 13. Hence,
3. in any way whatever to harass, trouble, molest one ;
to persecute, (cf. Lat. persequor, Germ. verfolgen): Mt.
v. 10-12, 44; x. 23; Lk. xxi. 12; [xi. 49 WH Tr mrg.];
Jn. v. 16; xv. 20; Acts vii. 52; ix. 4 sq.5 xxii. 4, 7 sq.;
EXVI. 14 sq: 7! Ros xl. 14 301 Co! iv. 12); xv.'95*2) Co. iv.
OF Gallo a2sireives29 -avedys (Phileas
12; Pass. with a dat. denoting the cause, fo be maltreated,
suffer persecution on account of something, Gal. vi. 12
[here Lrg. T read d:@kovra: (al. -ckwvrar), see WH. App.
p- 169; on the dat. see W. § 31, 6 c.; B. 186 (161)].
4. without the idea of hostility, to run after, follow after:
some one, Lk. xvii. 28. 5. metaph. with ace. of thing,
to pursue i. e. to seek after eagerly, earnestly endeavor to
acquire: Ro. ix. 30 (distinguished here fr. xataXapBa-
vew); 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22, (in both pass. opp. to
evyetv) ; vdpov dixatocvyns, Ro. ix. 31, (Prov. xv. 9; ro d-
kaov, Deut. xvi. 20; Sir. xxvii. 8, where distinguished fr.
caradapBavew); tT. pidro€eviar, Ro. xii. 13; ra rhs eipnyns,
Ro. xiv. 19 [here Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH mrg. T read de
cxopev (for the diakwpev of al.), see WH. App. p. 169]; r.
ayarny, 1 Co. xiv. 1; 76 dyaOdv, 1 Th. v. 15; etpnynv, Heb.
xii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 11 (here joined with (yreiy 71); times
without number in Grk. writ. (fr. Hom. Il. 17, 75 dtoKxew
dkiynta On; as Tids, apernv, Ta xada, [cf. W. 30.]).
[Comp.: ék-, kata-Si@xo. | *
Sdypa, -ros, 7d, (fr. Soxew, and equiv. to 7d dedoypevor),
an opinion, a judgment (Plat., al.), doctrine, decree, ordi-
nance}; 1. of public decrees (as rhs rédeas, Plat. legg.
1 p. 644 d.; of the Roman Senate, [Polyb. 6, 13, 2];
Hdian. 7, 10, 8 [5 ed. Bekk.]): of rulers, Lk. ii. 1; Acts
xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 23 Lehm., (Theodot. in Dan. ii. 13; iii.
10; iv. 3; vi. 13, ete., — where the Sept. use other words).
doypatifw
2. of the rules and requirements of the law of Moses, 3
Mace. i. 3; duatnpnows trav dyiwv doyparwy, Philo, alleg.
lege. i. § 16; carrying a suggestion of severity, and of
threatened punishment, tov vépov rav evroAay ev ddypact,
the law containing precepts in the form of decrees [ A. V.
the law of commandments contained in ordinances], Eph.
ii. 15; 1d Kad” nav xeipdypador rots Séypact equiv. to Td
rois Séypaor (dat. of instrument) dv xa6’ nuay, the bond
against us by its decrees, Col. ii. 14; cf. W.§ 31, 10 Note 1,
[B. 92 (80); on both pass. see Bp. Lghtft.on Col. 1. e.].
3. of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right
living: Acts xvi. 4. (Of all the precepts of the Chris-
tian religion: BeBarwOqvai év trois Séypacww Tov Kupiov Kat
tay arootoAwy, Ienat. ad Magnes. 13,1; of the precepts
(‘ sentences’ or tenets) of philosophers, in the later prof.
writ. : Cic. acad. 2, 9, 27 de suis decretis, quae philosophi
vocant dogmata.) [On the use of the word in general,
see Bp. Lghtft. as above; (cf.‘ Teaching’ etc. 11, 3).]*
Soyparitw: to decree, command, enjoin, lay down an or-
dinance: Diod. 4, 83, etc. ; Esth. iii. 9; 2 Mace. x. 8 [ete. ] ;
Sept. (not Theodot.) Dan. ii. 13; Pass. [pres. doyparigo-
pat]; ordinances are imposed upon me, I suffer ordinances
to be imposed upon me: Col. ii. 20 [R. V. do ye subject
yourselves to ordinances ; cf. W. § 39,1 a.; B. 188 (168) ;
Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
Soxéw, -@ ; impf. éddxovr; 1 aor. é0fa; (akin to déyoua
or déxouar, whence déxos an assumption, opinion, [cf. Lat.
decus, decet, dignus; Curtius § 15; ef. his Das Verbum,
i. pp- 376, 382]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to be of opin-
ion, think, suppose : foll. by ace. with inf., Mk. vi. 49[RG
L Tr]; 2 Co. xi. 16; 1 Co. xii. 23 ; with an inf. relating
to the same subject as that of doxéw itself, Lk. viii. 18
(6 doxet exe) ; xxiv. 37 (eddxouv mveipa Oewpeiv); Jn.
Valo Oh exile 2 A ChSexTIe NO smexocyaTs LO COsmiisal Siewayate
AQ 5 vill. 5x. 12; say. 375 (Gal.-va. Sis Phil: 1i.4 <} Jasea!
26; pn Odénre Aeyew ev éavtois do not suppose that ye
may think, Mt. iii. 9; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. foll. by éru,
Mt. vi. 7; xxvi. 53; [Mk. vi. 49 T WH]; LK. xii. 51;
xiii. 2, 4; xix. 11; Jn. v. 45; xi. 13, [31 T Tr WH]; xiii.
29; xx.15; 1Co.iv. 9; 2 Co. xii. 19; Jas. iv.5. soused
thatthe object is easily understood from the context : Mt.
xxiv. 44 (9 Spa od Soxeire 6 vids rod avOpdhmou epyerat) ;
Lk. xii. 40; xvii. 9 [RG Lbr. Tr mre. br.]; forming a
parenthesis in the midst of a question: dc, Sokeire,
xetpovos d&iwOncerat tinwpias; Heb. x. 29; (Arstph.
Acharn. 12 mas rodr évewwé pov, Soxeis, tiv xapdiav;
Anacr. 40, 15 [i. e. 35 (33), 16] mécov, Soxeis, rovovaw,
€pws, daovs ov BadAes;). [Syn. see jyceopat, fin.] 2.
intrans. to seem, be accounted, reputed: Lk. x. 36; xxii.
24; Acts xvii. 18; xxv. 27; 1 Co. xii. 22; 2 Co. x. 9;
Heb. xii. 11; é50fa enavT@ deiv mpaéa, I seemed to my-
self, i.e. I thought, Acts xxvi. 9 [ef. B. 111 (97)]3 of
Soxovrres apyew those that are accounted to rule, who
are recognized as rulers, Mk. x. 42; of Soxodvres eivai rT
those who are reputed to be somewhat (of importance),
and therefore have influence, Gal. ii. 6, [9], (Plat. Euthyd.
p- 303 c.); simply, of Soxodvres those highly esteemed, of
repute, looked up to, influential, Gal. ii. 2 (often in Grk.
154
Soxiun
writ. as Eur. Hec. 295, where cf. Schiifer ; [cf. W. § 45,
7]). By way of courtesy, things certain are sometimes
said doxety, as in Heb. iv. 1 (cf. Cic. offic. 3, 2, 6 ut tute
tibi defuisse videare) ; 1 Co. xi. 16 [but cf. Mey. ad loe.];
cf. W. § 65, 7 ¢. 3. impers. doxei por, it seems to me;
i.e. a. I think, judge: thus in questions, ti oou (ipiv)
Soxet ; Mt. xvii. 25 ; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi.
66; Jn. xi. 56; xara 7d Soxodv avrois as seemed good
to them, Heb. xii. 10, (Leian. Tim. § 25, and mapa rd
Soxovv nuiv, Thuc. 1, 84). b. eo&€ por it seemed good to,
pleased, me; I determined: foll. by inf., Lk. i. 3; Acts xv.
22, 25, 28, 34 Rec.; also often in Grk. writ. Comp.:
€U-, Ouv- Ev- Sokew.*
[Syn. doxetv2, palvec@ar: daly. (primarily of luminous
bodies) makes reference to the actual external appear-
ance, generally correct but possibly deceptive; Sox. refers
to the subjective judgment, which may or may not
conform to the fact. Hence such a combination as doxKe?
gaiverOa: is no pleonasm. Cf. Trench § lxxx.; Schmidt
ch. 15.]
Soxipdtw; [fut. Soxiudcw)]; 1 aor. doxiuaca; Pass.,
[pres. doxipdgopar]; pf. Sedoxipacpar; (doKyos); Sept.
chiefly for }N3; as in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt., Thue.], Xen.
and Plat. on, to try; 1. to test, examine, prove, scruti-
nize (to see whether a thing be genuine or not), as
metals: ypvoiov da mupos (Isocr. p. 240 d. [i. e. Pana-
then. § 14]; ad Demon. p. 7 b. [here Bekk. Bacavigoper] ;
Sept., Prov. viii. 10; Sir.ii.5; Sap. iii. 6; apyupov, Prov.
xvii. 3, [cf. Zech. xiii. 9]), 1 Pet. i. 7; other things: Lk.
xi. 56; xiv. 19; 2’Co.vill. 8;'Gal.-vi. 43 1 Th. 14-5) 21
ra dtapeporta, Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, [al. refer these pass.
to 2; see duahepa, 2 b.]; men, 1 Tim. iii. 10 (in the pass.) ;
éaurov, 1 Co. xi. 28; 2 Co. xiii. 5, (ef. e&eratew éavrov, Xen.
mem. 2, 5, 1 and 4); Oeov, Heb. iii. 9 (RG, fr. Ps. xciv.
(xcv.) 9; on the sense of the phrase see retpa¢a, 2 d. B.) ;
ra mvevpara, foll. by et whether ete. 1 Jn. iv. 1; foll. by
indir. disc., Ro. xii. 2; 1 Co. iii. 13; Eph. v. 10. 250
recognize as genuine after examination, to approve, deem
worthy: 1 Co. xvi. 3; twa orovdaiov dvra, 2 Co. viii. 225
ev & Soximacer for ev rovt@, 6 Soxipager in that which he
approves, deems right, Ro. xiv. 22; dedoxiuacpeba br6 Tot
beov muarevOrvat TO evayyedvov we have been approved by
God to be intrusted with the business of pointing out to
men the way of salvation, 1 Th. ii. 4; ov« édoxiwacay rov
Oedv yew év envyvocer they did not think God worthy to
be kept in knowledge, Ro. i. 28. [On Soxiatw (as com-
pared with me:patw) see Trench § lxxiv.; Cremer s. v.
meipat@. COMP.: amodokipato. | *
Soxipacia, -as, 7, a proving, putting to the proof: met
pagew év Soxacia to tempt by proving, Heb. iii. 9 LT
Tr WH. ([Lys.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.;
AiOos Soxipacias, Sir. vi. 21.) *
SoKupn, -7s, 7), (Soxiuos) ; 1. in an active sense, a
proving, trial: OXivews, through affliction, 2 Co. viii. 2.
2. approvedness, tried character: Ro. v. 4; 2 Co. ii. 9;
Phil. ii. 22; rhs Staxovias, exhibited in the contribution,
2 Co.MaxLSs 3. a proof [objectively], a specimen of
tried worth: 2 Co. xiii. 3. (Diose. 4, 186 (183); occa-
sionally in eccl. writ.) *
b0KiwLov
be
Soxiwiov, -ov, To, (Soxipun) ;
proving: ths micrews, Jas. i. 3.
Bekk.]; in Sept. of a crucible or furnace for smelting :
Prov. xxvii. 21; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7.
minarien u.s.w. pp. 40, 44.*
Séxipos, -ov, (Séxouac); fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop.
accepted, particularly of coins and metals, Gen. xxiii. 16;
2 Chr. ix. 17; Leian. Herm. 68, etc.; hence univ. proved,
tried: in the N. T. one who is of tried faith and integ-
rity [R. V. approved], Ro. xvi. 10 (rév Sdxipov év XptoTe,
the approved servant of Christ); 1 Co. xi. 19; 2 Co. x.
18; xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15 (wapioravar éavrdv Séxipov TO
Oem); Jas. i. 12. 2. accepted i. q. acceptable, pleasing :
evdpeotos TO Oe@ x. Soxipos [L mrg. -pous] trois avOpaross,
Ro. xiv. 18.*
Soxés, -ov, 7, (fr. d€xopar for S€youar, in so far as it has
the idea of bearing [cf. Curtius § 11]); fr. Hom. down;
a beam: Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq.*
SéAtos, -a, -ov, (Sddos); fr. Hom. on; deceitful: 2 Co.
male gi3..*
Sodidw: (dodAtos) ; to deceive, use deceit: in Ro. iii. 13,
fr. Ps. v. 10, impf. éSoAcodcay an Alexandrian form for
eOodiovv, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349; W.§ 13, 2f.; Mul-
lach p. 16; B. 43 (37); [cf. yo]. (Not found in prof.
writ.; [Numb. xxv. 18; Ps. civ. (ev.) 25. Cf. W. 26
(25)}.)*
S6Xos, -ov, 6, (fr. déA@ to catch with a bait [(?); Lat.
dolus, cf. Curtius § 271]; see deded¢w above) ; prop. bait,
Hom. Od. 12, 252; a lure, snare; hence craft, deceit,
guile: Mt. xxvi. 4; Mk. xiv. 1; vii. 22; Jn. i. 47 (48);
Acts xiii. 10; 2 Co. xii. 16; Ro. i. 29; 1 Th. ii. 3 (ovK
€ort ev Sddw, there is no deceit under it); 1 Pet. ii. (09
22, and Rev. xiv. 5 Rec., after Is. lili. 9; Aadeiv ddrXov
to speak deceitfully (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14), 1 Pet.
iii. 10.*
Soddw, -6; (dodos) ; 1. to ensnare: Hes., Hdt. and
succeeding writers. 2. to corrupt, ([BdéAXov and
AiBavor, Dioscor. 1, 80. 81]; Tov otvov, Leian. Hermot. 59):
Tov Aoyov Tov Beot, divine truth by mingling with it wrong
notions, 2 Co. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii. and see xamy-
Nevo. | *
Sépa, -ros, 76, (SiSopme), a gift: Mt. vii.11; Lk. xi. 13;
Eph. iv. 8; Phil. iv.17. (Plat. def. p- 415 b.; Plut.;
often in Sept., chiefly for min.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt.
p. 291 sq. [who quotes Varro de ling. Lat. ]. iv. p. 48 ed.
Bip. “dos erit pecunia si nuptiarum causa data: haec
Graece Swrivn, ita enim hoc Siculi: ab eodem Donum.
Nam Graece ut ipsi Sapov, ut alii déua, etut Attici ddats.”’ |*
[Syw. d6ua, 5d015, SOpov, Swped: Bbc. act. a giving, pass.
thing given, cf. medical “ dose ”: dap. specific “ present,” yet
not always gratuitous or wholly unsuggestive of recom-
pense; but dwped differs from dep. in denoting a gift which
is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover-
155
L. i. q. rd Soxipdew, the
2. that by which some-
thing is tried or proved, a test: Dion. Hal. ars rhet. 11;
yAdooa yevoews Soxiutov, Longin. de sublim. 32,5; doxi-
puov S€ otpatiwrav xdpyatos, Hdian. 2, 10, 12 [6 ed.
3. equiv. to Soxiun,
2: tov ths miotews, your proved faith, 1 Pet. i. 7.
This word is treated of fully by Fritzsche in his Priili-
dofa
eign; a Sdo1s Geo0 is what God confers as possessor of all
things ; a dwped Ocod is an expression of his favor; a dapov
Geov is something which becomes the recipient’s abiding pos-
session. Philo de cherub. § 25, says mavu ékdnAws mapiords
(Num. xxviii. 2), 871 ray bvTwy Ta ev xdpiTos méons Hklwrat,
h kaAcirat 5601s, Ta 5€ dpelvovos, As bvoua oiKeiov dwped.
Again, de leg. alleg. iii. § 70 (on the same bibl. pass.), d:a-
Tnphoeis bri Sapa Soudrwy diapépovor Ta piv yap ~udacw
MeyeBous TeAclwy ayaa Sndrodow... 7d BE eis Bpaxttarov
€oradrat KTA. Hence ddua, ddars, gift; dwped, SHporv, henefac-
tion, bounty, etc.; yet cf. e. g. Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. § 1
€y@ eit ZaBovady, dda1s aya) Tots yovedot pov, with Gen.
XXX. 20 dedapnta 6 Beds wor SGpov Kaddy...k. exddAece TY
dvoua avtod ZaBovAdy. Cf. Schmidt ch. 106.]
86fa, -7, 7, (Soxéw), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. most freq.
for 1j25, several times for Ti, 137, ete. ;
I. opinion, judgment, view: in this sense very often in
prof. writ.; but in the Bible only in 4 Mace. v. 17 (18).
II. opinion, estimate, whether good or bad, concerning
some one; but (like the Lat. existimatio) in prof. writ.
generally, in the saered writ. always, good opinion con-
cerning one, and as resulting from that, praise, honor,
glory: Lk. xiv. 10; Heb. iii. 3; 1 Pet. v. 4; opp. to
aripia, 2 Co. vi. 8; opp. to aicyuyn, Phil. iii. 19; joined
with rip, Ro. ii. 7,10; 1 Pet. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; 8é£a twos,
praise or honor coming to some one, Lk. ii. 32; Eph. iii.
13; coming from some one, Jn. vill. 54; xii. 43; ray
avOparev, Tov Oeov, Jn. xii. 43; Ro. iii. 23 ; persons whose
excellence is to redound to the glory of others are called
their d0éa: thus, tyeis eore 7 S0éa Hudr, 1 Th. ii. 20;
adeAot nev d6£a Xpiotod, 2 Co. vill. 23. (yreiv rhv iSiav
ddEav, or r. 66€. adrovd, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; of God, to
endeavor to promote the glory of God, Jn. vii. 18;
Enreiv ddfav €€ avOporev, 1 Th. ii. 6; tiv dd€av r. mapa
Tov Oeov, Jn. v. 44; AauBavew dd€av (Lat. captare hono-
rem) to seek to receive, catch at glory, Jn. v. 41, 44; to
receive glory, 2 Pet.i.17; Rev. v. 12; ry» ddéay, the glory
due [cf. W. 105 (100) sq.; B. 88 (77); Ellic. on Gal. i.
5, cf. B. 89 (78)], Rev. iv. 11; duddvae dd€av TO bea,
mim Waa oi or (Jer. xiii. 16) 101, to give or ascribe
glory to God, why and how being evident in each
case from the context: thus, by declaring one’s grati-
tude to God for a benefit received, Lk. xvii. 18; by not
distrusting God’s promises, Ro. iv. 20; by celebrating
his praises, Rev. iv. 9; xi. 13; xiv. 7; [xvi. 9]; xix. 7
(rnv dd€av the glory due); by rendering its due honor
to God’s majesty, Acts xii. 23; dds ddéav 76 Ged, ac-
knowledge that God knows all things, and show that
you believe it by the confession you are about to make,
Jn. ix. 24, cf. 1S. vi. 5; Josh. vii. 19; Ev. Nicod. ¢. 14 [p.
622 ed. Thilo, 296 ed. Tdf.]; cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 12.
els do€av Geod, so as to honor God, to promote his glory
(among men): Ro. xv. 7; 1 Co. x. 31; Phil.i. 11; ii. 11;
eis THY O0€. T. Beov, Ro. iii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 15; T@ Oe@ mrpos
do€av, 2 Co. i. 20; mpos tv Tod kupiov So€av, 2 Co. viii. 19 ;
umep THs Oo€ns Tod Oeov, Jn. xi. 4; in doxologies: do€a ev
vioros bed, Lk. ii. 14, cf. xix. 38 ; avT@ 7 do€a, Ro. xi.
36 ; Eph. iii. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 18; 6 7 dd€a, Ro. xvi. 27; Gal.
i. 5; 2 Tim. iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 21; r@ 6e@ 9 Soka, Phil. iv.
d0€a
20; rey wat Sofa, 1 Tim. i. 17. [Even in classic Grk.
doéa is a word of wide signif., ranging from one’s private
opinion, fancy, to public opinion, repute, renown
(xréos; cf. the relation of @nyn to pdavar). Coupled with
tin it denotes rather the splendid condition (evident
glory), tysn the estimate and acknowledgment of it
(paid honor). ]
III. As a translation of the Hebr. 3/33, in a use for-
eign to Grk. writ. [W. 32], splendor, brightness ; 1.
properly: rod dwrds, Acts xxii. 11; of the sun, moon,
stars, 1 Co. xv. 40 sq.; used of the heavenly brightness,
by which God was conceived of as surrounded, Lk. ii. 9;
Acts vii. 55, and by which heavenly beings were sur-
rounded when they appeared on earth, Lk. ix. 31; Rev.
xviii. 1; with which the face of Moses was once made
luminous, 2 Co. iii. 7, and also Christ in his transfigura-
tion, Lk. ix. 32; d0£a rov kupiov, in Sept. equiv. to 123
Mim, in the targ. and talm. 7)°DW, Shekinah or Shechi-
nah [see BB.DD. s. v.], the glory of the Lord, and simply
7 So€a, a bright cloud by which God made manifest to
men his presence and power on earth (Ex. xxiv. 17; xl.
28 (34) sqq., etc.) : Ro. ix.4; Rev. xv.8; xxi. 11, 23; hence,
6 Oeds tis d56Ens (God to whom belongs d0€a) &pbn, Acts
Vii. 2; XepouBeiv d0éns, on whom the divine glory rests
(so d0€a without the article, Ex. xl. 28 (34); 1 S.iv. 22;
Sir. xlix. 8), Heb. ix. 5. 2. magnificence, excellence,
preéminence, dignity, grace: Baowetat Tov Koopov k. 7 So€a
avToy, i. e. their resources, wealth, the magnificence and
greatness of their cities, their fertile lands, their throng-
ing population, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 6; 7 d0&a rav Baoidetov
ths yns, Rev. xxi. [24; rav éOvav, ibid.] 26; used of
royal state, splendid apparel, and the like: Mt. vi. 29;
Lk. xii. 27, (Esth. v.1; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5); glorious form
and appearance: e. g. of human bodies restored to life,
opp. to 7 atyia which characterized them when they
were buried, 1 Co. xv. 43; 9 d0£a ris capkos “omne id,
quod in rebus humanis magnificum dicitur ” (Calvin), 1
Pet. i. 24; etvai tux d0&a to be aglory, ornament, to one,
1 Co. xi. 15; univ. preéminence, excellence: 2 Co. iii. 8-11.
3. majesty; a. that which belongsto God; and a. the
kingly majesty which belongs to him as the supreme
ruler ; so in pass. where it is joined with Bactdeia, Sivapts,
kpdtos, efovaia, and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec.; esp. in
doxologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11; v.11 RG; Jude 25; Rev. i.
6; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those
cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass. similar to each other
in form it is not always clear whether d0éa is used to de-
note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii.
12 7 evdoyla k. 7 Sdéa K. 9 copia k. f evxaptoTia K. H THyLH
k. 7 loxvs, Rev. xix. 1 ) owrnpia x. 7 Soka kK. H TYh K. A
dvvawis ; likewise in Rev. v. 12, [13]. of the judicial
majesty of God as exhibited at the last day, Jude vs. 24.
aynp eixav x. Sofa Oeod imdpxwy, whose function of govern-
ment reflects the majesty of the divine ruler, 1 Co. xi. 7;
(7) yurn So€a avdpds, because in her the preéminence and
authority of her husband are conspicuous, ibid. 8. maj-
esty in the sense of the absolute perfection of the
deity : Ro. i. 23; 2 Co. iv.6; Heb.i.3; 2 Pet.i. 17; 1 Pet.
156
d0&a
iv. 14; év d6€p i. q. evddéas, i. e. as accords with his di-
vine perfection, Phil. iv. 19 [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc.]; of the majesty of his saving grace: Ro. ix. 23;
Eph. i. 12, 14, 18; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 11; 2 Pet.i. 3 [W.
381 (356)]; more fully d0€a rHs ydpiros, Eph. i. 6; 6 ra
typ THs So€ns, the Father whose characteristic is majesty,
Eph. i. 17; the majesty of God as exhibited in deeds of
power: Jn. xi. 40; Ro. vi. 4 (whence dd€a for tj, Sept.
Is. xii. 2; xlv. 24); hence 76 xpdtos ris dd€ns adrod, the
might in which his majesty excels, Col. i. 11. b. maj-
esty which belongs to Christ; and a. the kingly
majesty of the Messiah, to which belongs his kingly state,
the splendor of his external appearance, the retinue of
angels, and the like (see in III. 1): Mk. x. 37; in this
sense it is said that Christ will come hereafter to set up
the Messianic kingdom év r7 60&y tov warpds, clothed by
the Father in kingly array, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38;
LK. ix. 26; pera duvapews x. dd&ns mwodAjs, Mt. xxiv. 30;
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27 ef. Mt. xxv. 31; Tit. ii. 13; 1 Pet.
iv. 13; also caOicat émi Opovov S0€ns aitod, Mt. xix. 28;
xxv. 31, cf. 1S. ii. 8; 9 d0€a rs iaxvos adrod, the majesty
of his Messianic power with which he will punish his
adversaries, 2 Th. i. 9. B. the absolutely perfect inward
or personal excellence of Christ: 2 Co. iii. 18; iv. 4; in
which he excels by virtue of his nature as 6 @cios Noyos,
Jn. i. 145 xii. 41; of which majesty he gave tokens in
the miracles he performed, Jn. ii. 11 cf. xi. 40; 6 xiptos
ths do&ns, 1 Co. ii. 8; Jas. ii. 1. y. the majesty (glory) of
angels, as apparent in their exterior brightness, Lk. ix.
26; in a wider sense, in which angels are called do€a: as
being spiritual beings of preéminent dignity: Jude vs. 8;
2 Pet. ii. 10. 4. a most glorious condition, most exalted
state; a. of that condition with God the Father in heay-
en to which Christ was raised after he had achieved his
work on earth: Lk. xxiv. 26; Jn. xvii. 5 (where he is
said to have been in the same condition before his incar-
nation, and even before the beginning of the world) ; ib.
22, 24; Heb. ii. 7,9; 1 Pet.i. 11, 21; 7d cpa ris Sofns
avtov, the body in which his glorious condition is mani-
fested, Phil. iii. 21; dveAnpn ev d0€y, was taken up (into
heaven) so that he is now ev d0&, 1 Tim. iii. 16 [ef. W.
413 (385); B. 328 (283)]. b. the glorious condition of
blessedness into which it is appointed and promised that
true Christians shall enter after their Saviour’s return from
heaven: Ro. viii. 18, 21; ix. 23; 2 Co. iv. 17; Col. i. 27
(twice; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; iii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. ii.
10; 1 Pet. v. 1; which condition begins to be enjoyed
even now through the devout contemplation of the divine
majesty of Christ, and its influence upon those who con-
template it, 2 Co. iii. 18; and this condition will include
not only the blessedness of the soul, but also the gain of
amore excellent body (1 Co. xv. 43; Phil. iii. 21); ef.
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 203 sqq. ; 7 doa
tov 6eov, which God bestows, Ro. v.2; 1 Th. ii. 12; d0€a
Tov Kup. Hu. Ino. Xp. the same in which Christ rejoices,
2 Th. ii. 14 (cf. Ro. viii. 17, ete.); eis ddéav npar, to
render us partakers of Sofa, 1 Co. ii. 7. Cf. Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. des N. T. § 76 d.*
do&dfw
Sofd{w ; [impf. edd£ator] ; fut. dodo; 1 aor. eddfaca;
Pass., [pres. do&dCouar]; pf. deddEaopar; 1 aor. edo€aaOny ;
(86£a); Vulg. honorifico, glorifico, clarifico ; Sept. chiefly
for 335, several times for 189, (in Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq.
35 SofdteoOar stands for |p to shine) ; 1. to think,
suppose, be of opinion, (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat.,
Thuc., et sqq.; nowhere in this sense in the sacred writ-
ings). 2. fr. Polyb. (6, 53, 10 dedofacpevor em’ aperp) on
to praise, extol, magnify, celebrate: twa, pass., Mt. vi. 2;
Lk. iv. 15; éavréy, to glorify one’s self, Jn. viii. 54; Rev.
xviii. 7; Tov Néyor Tod Kupiov, Acts xiii. 48; rod dvopa TOD
kupiov, Rev. xv. 4; tov dedv, Mt. v. 16; ix: 8) xve Si) MR.
ii. 12; Lk. v. 25 sq.; vii. 16; xiii. 13; xvii. 15; xviii. 43;
xxiii. 47; Acts xi. 18; xxi. 20 [Rec. xvpiov]; Ro. xv. 6,
9 [W. § 44,3b.; 332 (311)]; 1 Pet. ii. 12; iv. 14 Rec.;
with the addition of emi tw, for something, Lk. ii. 20;
Acts iv. 21; 2 Co. ix. 13; év evo, on account of me (prop-
erly, finding in me matter for giving praise [cf. W. 387
(362) sq.]), Gal. i. 24; €v 7 dvdpart rovr@, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L
rr WH. 3. to honor, do honor to, hold in honor:
tiv Staxoviay pov, by the most devoted administration of
it endeavoring to convert as many Gentiles as possible to
Christ, Ro. xi. 13 ; a member of the body, 1 Co. xii. 26;
6eov, to worship, Ro. i. 21; with the adjunct év7@ capart,
by keeping the body pure and sound, 1 Co. vi. 20; 7o
6avdr@, to undergo death for the honor of God, Jn. xxi.
19. 4. By ause not found in prof. writ. to make glori-
ous, adorn with lustre, clothe with splendor; a. to impart
glory to something, render it excellent: pf. pass. dedd€a-
cpa toexcel, be preéminent; dedofacpevos excelling, emi-
nent, glorious, 2 Co. iii. 10; dedofacpevn xupa surpassing
i. e. heavenly joy, [A. V. full of glory], 1 Pet.i. 8. b.
to make renowned, render illustrious, i. e. to cause the
dignity and worth of some person or thing to become mani-
fest and acknowledged : tov XMéyov tov Geod, 2 Th. iii. 1;
Christ, the Son of God, Jn. viii. 54; xi. 4; xvi. 14; xvii.
10; God the Father, Jn. xiii. 31 sq.; xiv. 13; xv. 8; xvii.
1,4; 1 Pet.iv.115 70 dvopa Tov Oeod, Jn. xii. 28. cc. to
exalt to a glorious rank or condition (Is. xliv. 23; lv. 4,
ete. ; joined to voor, Is. iv. 2; Esth. iii. 1): ody éavrdv
éddéace did not assume to himself the dignity (equiv. to
ovx éavT@ THY Tiny €daBe, vs. 4), the words yevnOjvar ap-
xvepéa being added epexegetically (W. § 44, 1), Heb. v.
5; of God exalting, or rather restoring, Christ his Son
to a state of glory in heaven: Jn. vii. 39; xii. 16, [23];
xili. 31 sq.; xvii. 1,5; Acts iii. 13; (see dd£a, II. 4 a.);
of God bringing Christians to a heavenly dignity and
condition, (see dd£a, III. 4 b.): Ro. viii. 30. [Comp.:
ev-, cuv-bo€aa. | *
Aopkas, -dSos, 7, (prop. a wild she-goat, a gazelle, “apa
TO Sepkw, TO Brera: dévdepkes yap Td Cov k. evouparov”
Etym. Magn. [284, 6]), Dorcas, a certain Christian wo-
man: Acts ix. 36, 39; see TaBi6a.*
Sdais, -ews, 7, (didapr) ; 1. a giving, [fr. Hadt.
down]: Aoyos Sdcews x. AnWews, an account of giving
and receiving [i. e. debit and credit accounts ; cf. Adyos
Il. 3], Phil. iv. 15; here Paul, by a pleasant euphemism,
refers to the pecuniary gifts, which the church bestow-
157
dSovA0¢
ing them enters in the account of expenses, but he him-
self in the account of receipts; cf. Van Hengel ad loc. ;
so ddars Kai Anes, of money given and received, Sir. xli.
19; xlii. 7; [Herm. mand. 5, 2, 2], and plur. Epict. diss. 2,
9, 12. 2. a gift, [fr. Hom. down]: Jas. i.17. [Syn.
see Soya, fin. |*
Sérys, -ov, 6, (Sidr), for the more usual dornp, a giver,
bestower: 2 Co. ix. 7 fr. Prov. xxii. 8. Not found else-
where.*
Sovlaywyéw [Rec.* -ayay-], -6; (Sovddywyos, cf. mada-
yoyos) ; to lead away into slavery, claim as one’s slave,
(Diod. Sic. 12, 24, and occasionally in other later writ.) ;
to make a slave and to treat as a slave i. e. with severity,
to subject to stern and rigid discipline: 1 Co. ix. 27.
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum N. T. p. 472 sq.*
Sovdeia (Tdf. -ia, [see I, ¢]), -as, 7, (Sovrevw) 5 slavery,
bondage, the condition of a slave: ths POopas, the bond-
age which consists in decay [W. § 59, 8 a., cf. B. 78 (68) ],
equiv. to the law, the necessity, of perishing, Ro. viii.
21; used of the slavish sense of fear, devoid alike of
buoyancy of spirit and of trust in God, such as is produced
by the thought of death, Heb. ii. 15, as well as by the
Mosaic law in its votaries, Ro. viii. 15 (mvetpa Sovdelas) ;
the Mosaic system is said to cause dovAeta on account of
the grievous burdens its precepts impose upon its adhe-
rents: Gal. iv. 24; v.1. [From Pind. down. ]*
Sovdedw; fut. dovAevow; 1 aor. edovAevoa; pf. dSedov-
Aevka; (SovdAos) ; Sept. for Ty ; 1. prop. to be a slave,
serve, do service: absol., Eph. vi. 7; 1 Tim. vi. 2; revi,
Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ix. 12; said of nations in
subjection to other nations, Jn. viii. 33; Acts vii. 7; men
are said SovAevew who bear the yoke of the Mosaic law,
Gal. iv. 25 (see dovAeta). 2. metaph. to obey, submit
to; a. in a good sense: absol. to yield obedience, Ro.
vii. 6; rut, to obey one’s commands and render to him the
services due, Lk. xv. 29; God: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13;
1 Th. i.9; kvpim and r@ kxvpio, Acts xx. 19; Ro. xii. 11
(not Rec.", see below); Eph. vi. 7; Christ: Ro. xiv.
18; Col. iii. 24; voue Oeod, acc. to the context, feel myself
bound to, Ro. vii. 25; rots Oeois, to worship gods, Gal. iv.
8; r@ xap@ (Anth. 9,441, 6), wisely adapt one’s self to,
Ro. xii. 11 Ree." (see above), ef. Fritzsche ad loc. ; per-
form services of kindness and Christian love: adAnAas,
Gal. v. 13; used of those who zealously advance the in-
terests of anything: os marpi rexvoy avy euol eSovdevoev
els TO evayyeioy equiv. to ws marpi Texvoy Sovdever, eyol
edovAevoev Kal OUT@ aiv epuor edovdA. etc. Phil. ii. 22 [W.
422 (393) ; 577 (537)]. +b. ina bad sense, of those who
become slaves to some base power, to yield to, give one’s
self up to: tH dpapria, Ro. vi. 6; vou dpaprias, Ro. vii.
25; émOupias x. ndovais, Tit. iii. 3, (Xen. mem. 1, 5, 5;
apol. Socr. 16; Plat. Phaedrus p. 238 e.; Polyb. 17, 15, 16;
Hdian. 1, 17, 22 [9 ed. Bekk.]) ; 77 KowNia, Ro. xvi. 18,
(yaorpi, Anthol. 11, 410,4; Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8; abdomini
servire, Sen. de benef. 7, 26, 4; ventri obedire, Sall. [Cat. i.
1]); papeva, to devote one’s self to getting wealth : Mt. vi.
24; Lk. xvi. 13. rots arotxeiors Tov Koopov, Gal. iv. 9.*
SodXos, -n,-ov, (derived by most fr. d€@ to tie, bind;
SovA0@
by some fr. AEAQ to ensnare, capture, [(?) al. al.; cf.
Vanitek p. 322]); serving, subject to: mapearnoare tra
LEAN Upor Sodvd\a TH axaGapoia, Ro. vi. 19. Then substan-
tively, 7 dovAn a female slave, bondmaid, handmaid: rod
Geov, Tow xvpiov, one who worships God and submits to
him, Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 (iii. 2)); Lk. i. 38, 48.
6 80vA0s, Sept. for 3277; 1. a slave, bondman, man of
servile condition; a. properly: opp. to édevOepos, 1 Co.
vii. 21; xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11; Rev.
vi. 15; xiii. 16; xix. 18; opp. to kvpios, Seamdrns, oiko-
8eororns, Mt. x. 24; xiii. 27 sq.; Lk. xii. 46 ; Jn. xv. 15;
Eph.vi..5; Colha.22;.av./15.1. im. vi. 1 5,« Titi. 95
and very often. b. metaph. a. one who gives himself
up wholly to another’s will, 1 Co. vii. 23; or dominion,
THs dwaprias, Jn. viii. 34; Ro. vi. 17, 20; rhs POopas, 2
Pet. ii. 19, (trav ndovav, Athen. 12 p. 531 ¢.; trav ypnua-
tov, Plut. Pelop. c. 3; rod mivew, Ael. v. h. 2,41). B.
the dodo Xprcrov, rod Xprcrov, "Ingo Xprorov, are those
whose service is used by Christ in extending and ad-
vancing his cause among men: used of apostles, Ro. i. 1;
Gales,40*oPhil. a: 1542 Tim. ai. 246, /Tit.a. Ws Jassdal:
2 Pet. i. 1; of other preachers and teachers of the
gospel, Col. iv. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jude vs. 1; of the
true worshippers of Christ (who is xiptos ravtwy, Acts
x. 36), Eph. vi. 6. the 800Ace rod Geov, MIM ‘II}, are
those whose agency God employs in executing his pur-
poses: used of apostles, Acts iv. 29; xvi. 17; of Moses
(Josh. i. 1), Rev. xv. 3; of prophets (Jer. vii. 25; xxv.
4), Rev. i.1; x. 7; xi. 183 of all who obey God’s com-
mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29; Rev. ii. 20; vii. 3;
xix. 2,5; xxii. 3,6; (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23; lxviii. (Ixix.)
37; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4,21). y. dovAds Twos, devoted to
another to the disregard of one’s own interests: Mt. xx.
27; Mk. x. 44; strenuously laboring for another’s sal-
vation, 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. aservant, attendant, (of a king):
Mt. xviii. 28, 26 sqq. [Syn. see d:axovos. ]
Sovddw, -@: fut. dovrlocw; 1 aor. edovAwoa; pf. pass.
8eSovA@pa; 1 aor. pass. eSovA@Onv; (SovAos) ; [fr. Aes-
chyl. and Hdt. down] ; to make a slave of, reduce to bond-
age; a. prop.: twa, Acts vil. 6; rovr@ kai [yet T WH
om. Tr br. cat | deSovAwras to him he has also been made a
bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. b. metaph.: é¢uavrov tun give
myself wholly to one’s needs and service, make myself a
bondman to him, 1 Co. ix.19 ; dovA0dcGai rin, to be made
subject to the rule of some one, e. g. rf dixacootivn, TO
6ed, Ro. vi. 18, 22; likewise imo 11, Gal. iv. 3; dedovdo-
pevos ov, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Tit. ii. 3
(SovAevew otve, Liban. epist. 319); dedovA@par ev Tin, to
be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity,
in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [Comp.: xata-dovddw. | *
S0x%, -7)s, 7, (Sé€xouae to receive as a guest), a feast,
banquet, (cf. our reception]: Soynv rod, Lk. v. 29; xiv.
13. Gi. q. MAW, Gen. [xxi. 8]; xxvi. 30; Esth. i. 3; v.
4 sqq.; Athen. 8 p. 348 f.; Plut. moral. p. 1102 b. [i.e.
non posse suay. vivi etc. 21, 9].) *
Spdxwyv, -ovros, 6, (apparently fr. dépxopuat, 2 aor. edpa-
cov; hence dpaxay prop. equiv. to 6& Brérav [Etym.
Magn. 286, 7; cf. Curtius § 13]); Sept. chiefly for pan,
158
dvvapat
a dragon, a great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early
as Hom. Il. 2, 308 sq., ete.). From it, after Gen. iii.
1 sqq., is derived the fig. description of the devil in Rev.
xii. 3-17; xiii. 2,4,11; xvi. 13; xx. 2. [Cf. Baudissin,
Studien zur semitisch. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (iv. 4) p.
281 sqq.]*
Spdpw, to run, see tpéxa.
Spdcoopat; 2o grasp with the hand, to take: twa, 1 Co.
iii. 19 [B. 291 (250); W. 352 (330)]. (In Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; Sept.) *
Spaxpn, -7s, 7, (Spdocoua, [hence prop. a grip, a hand-
ful}), [fr. Hdt. down], a drachma, a silver coin of [near-
ly ] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see Syvdpiov) :
LK. xv. 8 sq.*
Spémravoy, -ov, 70, (i. q. Speravn, fr. Sper to pluck, pluck
off), a sickle, a pruning-hook, ahooked vine-knife, such as
reapers and vine-dressers use: Mk. iv. 29; Rev. xiv.
14-19. (Hom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.) *
Spdpos, -ov, 6, (fr. APAMQ [q. v.] ; cf. vopos, rpdpos, and
the like), a course (Hom. et sqq.); in the N. T. fig., the
course of life or of office : mknpovaba Tov Spdpov, Acts xiii.
25; reNevcoov, Acts xx. 24; rede, 2 Tim. iv. 7.*
ApovetAa [al. Apovovdda, cf. Chandler § 120], -s, 9,
Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa the elder, wife of Felix,
the governor of Judza, a most licentious woman (Joseph.
antt. 20, 7, 1 sq.): Acts xxiv. 24; cf. Win. RWB. [and
B. D.] s. v.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19, 4.*
Svvapar, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. dvvacas
and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr.
Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 359; [ WH. App. p.168; W. § 13, 2b.; Veitch
s. v-]), dvvn (MK. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [Lk. xvi. 2
T WH Tr txt. ]; Rev. ii. 2); impf. eSvrvaynv and Attic
7Ovvdpnv, between which forms the Mss. and editions are
almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk.
viii. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 75., so
RG in Mt. xxvi. 9; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rev. xiv. 33
on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37;
Rey. xiv. 83, L T Tr WH all read &€8., so T WH in Mt.
xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162;
W.§ 12,1b.; B. 33 (29)]; fut. duunoowac; 1 aor. nduvnOns
and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt.
xvii. 16 cod. B) ndvvacOnv (cf. [WH u. s. and p. 169];
Kiihner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; W. 84 (81); B. 33
(29); Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 402]); Sept. for Peeve to
be able, have power, whether by virtue of one’s own ability
and resources, or of a state of mind, or through favora-
ble circumstances, or by permission of law or custom ;
a. foll. by an inf. [W. § 44, 3] pres. or aor. (on the dis-
tinction between which, cf. W. § 44, 7). a. foll. py a
pres. inf.: Mt. vi. 24; ix.15; Mk. ii. 7; iii. 23; Lk. vi.
39; Jn. iii. 2; v. 19; Acts xxvii. 15; 1 Co. x. 21; Heb.
v. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 9; Rev. ix. 20, and often. f. foll. by an
aor. inf.: Mt. iii. 9; v.14; Mk. i. 45; ii. 4; v. 3; Lk. viii.
19; xiii. 11; Jn. ili. 3 sq.; vi. 52; vii. 34,36; Acts iv. 16
[R G]; v.39; x. 47; Ro. viii. 39; xvi. 25; 1 Co. ii. 14;
iii. 1; vi. 5; 2 Co. iii. 7; Gal. iii. 21; Eph. iii. 4,20; 1 Th.
iii. 9; 1 Tim. vi. 7, 16; 2 Tim. ii. 13; iii. 7, 15; Heb. ip
duvapis
18; iii. 19; [xi. 19 Lchm.]; Jas. i. 21; Rev. iii. 8; v. 3;
v.. 17, and very often. b. with inf. omitted, as being
easily supplied from the context: Mt. xvi. 3 [here 'T br.
WH reject the pass.]; xx. 22; Mk. vi.19; x.39; Lk. ix.
40; xvi. 26; xix. 3; Ro. viii. 7. c. joined with an accus.
dvvapai tt, to be able to do something (cf. Germ. ich vermag
etwas): Mk. ix. 22; Lk. xii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 8, (and in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on). d. absol., like the Lat. possum
(as in Caes. b. gall. 1, 18, 6), i. q. to be able, capable,
strong, powerful: 1 Co. iii. 2; x. 13. (2 Chr. xxxii. 13;
1 Mace. v. 40 sq.: in 2 Mace. xi. 13 cod. Alex., and
often in Grk. writ. as Eur. Or. 889; Thue. 4, 105; Xen.
an. 4, 5, 11 sq.; Isoc., Dem., Aeschin.)
Sivapts, -ews, 7; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for oN, m9,
ty, MD, NI¥ (an army, a host); strength, ability, power ;
a. univ. inherent power, power residing in a thing by vir-
tue of its nature, or which a person or thing exerts and
puts forth: Lk. i. 17; Acts iv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Co. iv.
7; xii. 9 (7 Svvapts ev doGeveia Tedctrat [RG redewwdrar]) ;
xiii. 45 1 Th.i. 5; Heb. vii. 16; xi. 34; Rev. i. 16; xvii.
13; idia Suvdper, Acts ili. 12; peyadn Suvdper, Acts iv. 33;
éxdot@ kata Thy idiay dvvayv, Mt. xxv. 15; brép dvvapuy,
beyond our power, 2 Co. i. 8; év duvdauer sc. dv, endued
with power, Lk. iv. 36; 1 Co. xv. 43; so in the phrase
épxecOar ev Suvape, Mk. ix. 1; powerfully, Col. i. 29; 2
Th. i. 115; contextually i.q. evidently, Ro. i. 4; év duvaper
onpeiov x. Trepatwy, through the power which I exerted
upon their souls by performing miracles, Ro. xv. 19; dvv.
eis tt, Heb. xi. 11; Sdv. emi ra Sayoma kcal vooovs Oepa-
mevew, Lk. ix. 1; 7 Sdvayis ts duaprias 6 vouos, sin exer-
cises its power (upon the soul) through the law, i. e.
through the abuse of the law, 1 Co. xv. 56; rs avaoracews
tov Xpiotov, the power which the resurrection of Christ
has, for instructing, reforming, elevating, tranquillizing,
the soul, Phil. iii. 10; rijs evoeBeias, inhering in godliness
and operating upon souls, 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; Suvayers peAXovros
aiavos (see aiwyv, 3), Heb. vi. 5; ro mvevpa ths Suvdpews
(see mvedyua, 5), 1 Pet. iv. 14 Lehm.; 2 Tim. i. 7; dvvapis
is used of the power of angels: Eph. i. 21 [cf. Mey.
ad loc.]; 2 Pet. ii. 11; of the power of the devil and
evil spirits, 1 Co. xv. 24; rod éyOpod, i. e. of the devil,
Lk. x. 19; rod Spaxovros, Rev. xiii: 2; angels, as excelling
in power, are called Suvapers [cf. (Philo de mutat. nom.
§ 8 duvdpers dowpatro) Mey. as above; Bp. Lehtft. on
Col. i. 16; see dyyedos]: Ro. viii. 38; 1 Pet. iii. 22. 9
ddvapis Tod Beod, univ. the power of God: Mt. xxii.
29; Mk. xii. 24; Lk. xxii. 69; Acts viii. 10; Ro. i. 20;
ix. 17; 1 Co. vi.14; ddvaues dWiorov, Lk. i. 35; 7 Sdvapus,
esp. in doxologies, the kingly power of God, Mt. vi.
13 Rec. ; Rev. iv. 11; vii. 12; xi. 17; xii. 10; xv. 8; xix.
1; and the abstract for the concrete (as 773239 in Jew-
ish writ. ; cf. Buctorf, Lex. talm. col. 385 [p. 201 sq. ed.
Fischer ]) equiv. to 6 Suvards, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62;
dvvapus Tov Geod is used of the divine power considered
as acting upon the minds of men, 1 Co. ii. 5; 2 Co. vi.
7; Eph. iii. 7, 20; [2 Tim.i. 8; 1 Pet. i. 5]; ets twa, 2
Co. xiii. 4 [but WH in br.]; Eph. i. 19; évdveoOar Svvapuv
€& vyous, Lk. xxiv. 49; by meton. things or personsin
159
dvvauzs
which God’s saving power shows its efficacy are called dv-
vapers Oeov : thus 6 Xpucros, 1 Co. i. 24; 6 Adyos Tov araupod,
1 Co.i.183; 1d evayyeduov, with the addition eis cw~npiav
marti etc. Ro. i. 16 [cf. W. § 36,3 b.]. Svvayues is ascribed
to Christ, now in one sense and now in another: a power
to heal disease proceeds from him, Mk. v. 30; Lk. v. 17;
vi. 19; vill.46; the kingly power of the Messiah is his,
Mis scxiv. 605" (Mk xii 26 Js Lik. cx. (279 2) Pets 1916 5
Rey. v. 12; d@yyedou ths duvapews adrov (see dyyeXos, 2),
ministering to his power, 2 Thess. i. 7 |W. § 34, 3 b. note];
metaphysical [or essential] power, viz. that which
belongs to him as 6 Oeios Adyos, in the expression 7é pyya
Ts Svvap. avtov the word uttered by his power, equiv.
to his most powerful will and energy, Heb. i. 3; moral
power, operating on the soul, 2 Co. xii. 9 RG; and called
7) Oeia avrov Suvays in 2 Pet. i. 3; 7 Svvapss Tov kupion,
the power of Christ invisibly present and operative in a
Christian church formally assembled, 1 Co. v. 4. duvapes
Tov dylov mvevparos: Acts i.8 [W.125 (119)]; a.
adytov x. Svvayis, Acts x. 38; amoderéis mvevpatos cat dv-
vapews (see amdderéts, b.), 1 Co. ii. 45 ev ry Suvaper rov
mvevparos, under or full of the power of the Holy Spirit,
Lk. iv. 14; év duvaper mvevparos dyiov, by the power and
influence of the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 13; by the power
which, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, I exerted
upon their souls, Ro. xv.19. —_b. specifically, the power
of performing miracles: Acts vi. 8; maca Svvayus, every
kind of power of working miracles (with the addition
kal onpeiots x. Tépact), 2 Th. ii. 9; plur.: [Mt. xiii. 54;
xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14]; 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Gal. iii.5; évep-
ynpata Suvapewr, 1 Co. xii. 10; by meton. of the cause for
the effect, a mighty work [cf. W. 32; Trench § xci.]: 8-
vauw trovetv, Mk. vi. 5; ix. 89; so in the plur., Mk. vi. 2;
LK. xix. 37; joined with onpeia, Acts viii. 13; with onpeia
x. tepara, Acts ii. 22; 2 Co. xii. 12; Heb. ii. 4 [?]; wocety
duvdpers, Mt. vil. 22; [xiii. 58]; Acts xix. 11; yivovra
Suvapers, Mt. xi. 20 sq. 23; Lk.x.13. c¢. moral power
and excellence of soul: 1 Co.iv. 19; 2 Co. iv. 7; Eph. iii.
16; Col.i.11. . the power and influence which belong to
riches; (pecuniary ability), wealth: rod orpnvous, ‘riches
ministering to luxury’ (Grotius), Rev. xviii. 3; xara v-
vay kat rep [al. rapa | Suvayiv, according to their means,
yea, beyond their means, 2 Co. viii. 3; (in this sense, for
Sn, Sept. Deut. viii. 17 sq.; Ruth iv. 11; not infreq. in
Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8,4, 34; an. 7, 7,21(36)). e.
power and resources arising from numbers: Rev. iii. 8.
f. power consisting in or resting upon armies, forces,
hosts, (so, both in sing. and in plur., often in Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt., Thue., Xen. on; in the Sept. and in Apocr.) ;
hence dvvdpers rod ovpavod the hosts of heaven, Hebraisti-
cally the stars: Mt. xxiv. 29; Lk. xxi. 26; and 6. ev rots
ovpavois, Mk. xiii. 25; equiv. to DOW NAY, 2 K. xvii.
16; xxiii. 4; Is. xxxiv. 4; Jer. viii. 25 Dan. viii. 10, etc.
[ef. caBawd]. g. Like the Lat. vis and potestas, equiv.
to the (force i. e.) meaning of a word or expression: 1
©o. xiv.511; (Plat. Crati pi 394° b-5" Polybs 20, 9, 21;
Dion. Hal. 1, 68; Dio Cass. 55, 3; al.).*
[Syn. Bia Sdvauts, evepyera, eEovacla, icxvs, kparos:
buvayow
Bia force, effective, often oppressive power, exhibiting itself
in single deeds of violence; dvv. power, natural ability, gen-
eral and inherent ; évépy. working, power in exercise, opera-
tive power; egouc. primarily liberty of action ; then, authority
—eitheras delegated power, or as unrestrained, arbitrary
power; iox. strength, power (esp. physical) as an endowment ;
Kpdros, might, relative and manifested power — in the N. T.
chiefly of God ; 7d kpdtos rijs iox. Eph. vi. 10, 7 évépy. THs Suv.
Eph. iii. 7, ) évépy. Tod Kp. tis iox. Eph.i.19. Cf. Schmidt
ch. 148; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 19.]
Suvapcw, -@: [pres. pass. duvayoipat]; to make strong,
confirm, strengthen: Col.i. 11; [Eph. vi. 10 WH mrg.];
1 aor. eSvvapwOnoay, Heb. xi. 34 (RG éved.). (Ps. xvii.
(Ixviii.) 29; Eccl. x. 10; Dan. ix. 27 [Theod.; Ps. lxiv.
(ixv.) 4 Aq.; Job xxxvi. 9 Aq.] and occasionally in eccl.
and Byz. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 605; [W. 26
(25)].) [Comp.: év-duvapoa. ] *
Suvderys, -ov, 6, (Svvaya); fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. on;
powerful ; 1. a prince, potentate: Lk. i. 52; used of
God (Sir. xlvi. 5; 2 Mace. xv. 3, 23, ete.; of Zeus, Soph.
Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. 15. 2. a courtier, high officer,
royal minister: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of great
authority; but see Meyer ad loc.], (Suvdara: bapaw, Gen.
], 4)*
Suvatéw, -@; (Suvards); to be powerful or mighty; show
one’s self powerful: 2 Co. xiii. 3 (opp. to doOeva) ; to be
able, have power : foll. by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L T Tr WH;
2Co.ix.8 L T Tr WH. Not found in prof. writ. nor
in the Sept.*
Suvarés, -7, -dv, (Ovvauat); [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for
31; able, powerful, mighty, strong; 1. absolutely; a.
mighty in wealth and influence: 1 Co. i. 26; (Rev. vi. 15
Rec.) ; of dvvaroi, the chief men, Acts xxv. 5, (Joseph.
b. j. 1, 12, 4 RKov Iovdaiwy of Suvatoi; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1;
Thue. 1,89; Polyb. 9, 23,4). 6 duvards, the preéminently
mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i.49. b. strong in sow:
to bear calamities and trials with fortitude and patience,
2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. xiii. 9;
firm in conviction and faith, Ro. xv. 1. 2. in con-
struction; a. duvards eius with inf., to be able (to do some-
thing; [B. 260 (224); W. 319 (299) ]): Lk. xiv. 31; Acts
xi. 17; Ro.iv. 21; xi. 23; xiv.4 RG; 2 Co.ix.8 RG;
2 Tim. i. 12; Tit.i. 9; Heb. xi. 19 (Lehm. ddvarac) ; Jas.
iii. 2. b. Suvurds ev rum, mighty i. e. excelling in some-
thing: év épyw x. Ady, Lk. xxiv. 19; ev Adyots kal epyots,
Acts vii. 22; év ypadais, excelling in knowledge of the
Scriptures, Acts xvili. 24. c. mpds te, mighty i. e. having
power for something: 2 Co. x. 4. 4d. neuter duvaroy [in
pass. sense, cf. B. 190 (165) ] possible: e? Suvarov (€or),
Mt. xxiv. 24; xxvi. 39; Mk. xiii. 22; xiv. 35; Ro. xii.
18; Gal. iv. 15; ov« Av Suvardy foll. by inf. Acts ii. 24;
duvardy ti €ori tun [B. 190 (165)], Mk. ix. 23; xiv. 36;
Acts xx. 16 ; rapa 6c mavra buvara éort, Mt. xix. 26; Mk.
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. 76 duvarév adrod, what his power
could do, equiv. to thy dvvayw adrod, Ro. ix. 22, ef. W.
§ 34, 2.*
Sivw, dvo; 2 aor. Suv; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ. transi-
tively) édvca (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WH), cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr.
ii. p. 156 sq.; W. p. 84 (81); B. 56 (49); [Veitch s. vv.];
160
duc epujvevtoy
to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in: ir. the
N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the
sea), Mk. i. 32; Lk.iv.40. So times without number in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 11; Lev. xxii.
7, etc.; Tob. ii. 4; 1 Mace. x. 50. [Comp.: ék-, da-er-
(-at), €v, én-ev-, map-evo-, emt-dUve. | *
Svo, genit. indecl. dvo (as in Epic, and occasionally in
Hat., Thue., Xen., Polyb., al. for dvotv, more common in
Attic [see Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 289 sq.]); dat.
dvai, dvoiv, ([-oi in Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts xxi. 33
(Tr -civ), -civin Mt. xxii. 40; Mk. xvi.12; Lk. xii.52(RG
-a(); Acts xii. 6 (R GL-of) ; Heb. x. 28; Rev. xi.3 (RG
-o1) ; cf. Td. Proleg. p.98; WH. App. p. 147]—aform not
found in the older and better writ., met with in Hippocr.,
Aristot., Theophr., frequent fr. Polyb. on, for the Attic
dvoiv); ace. dvo (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 210; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. i. p. 276 sq.; W. § 9, 2 b.; Passow i. p. 729); two:
absol., ovk ére eat dU0, GANG oapé pia, Mt. xix.6; Mk. x. 8;
dvo 4 tpeis, Mt. xviii. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 29; rpets ei duct x. dvo
em tpict, Lk. xii. 52; ava and xara 8vo, two by two [W.
398 (372); 401 (374); B. 30 (26)], Lk. ix.3 [WH om.
Tr br. ava}; x. 1 [WH ava dvo [dv0]; cf. Acta Philip.
§ 36, ed. Tdf. p. 92]; Jn. ii. 6 [apiece]; 1 Co. xiv. 27; dvo0
dvo two and two, Mk. vi. 7 (so, after the Hebr., in Gen.
vi. 19, 20; but the phrase is not altogether foreign even
to the Grk. poets, as Aeschyl. Pers. 981 pupia pupia for
kara pupiddas, cf. W. 249 (234), [ef. 39 (38) ]); neut. es
dvo into two parts, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; with gen.
Svo Tév pabntav(airod),Mk. xi. 1; xiv. 13; Lk. xix. 29;
[Mt. xi. 2 RG]; rév oixerav, Acts x. 7. dvo && aire»,
Lk. xxiv. 13 [ef. Bttm. 158 (138); Win. 203 (191)}.
with a noun or pronoun: dvo dammorCopevor, Mt. viii. 28.
dvo0 payatpat, Lk. xxii. 38; emi ordparos dv0 paptiper, Mt.
xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1; Svot cupios, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi.
13; eide d¥0 ddeAGovs, Mt. iv. 18; preceded by the article,
of Svo the two, the twain: Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x.8; 1 Co. vi.
16; Eph. v. 31; rods dvo, Eph. ii. 15; ai [Rec. only] dvo
diaOjKar, Gal. iv. 24; obra [Lchm. br. ovr. ] of Sto vioi pov,
Mt. xx. 21; wept rav dio ddeApav, Mt. xx. 24; €v ravras
tais Suc evrodais, Mt. xxii. 40; rods dvo0 ixOtas, Mt. xiv.
19; Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16; d00 Snvapia, Lk. x. 35.
Sus, an inseparable prefix conveying the idea of dif fi-
culty, opposition, injuriousness or the like, and
corresponding to our mis-, un- [Curtius § 278]; opp. to ed.
Svo-Bacraxtos, -ov, (Bacratw), hard [A. V. grievous] to
be borne: Mt. xxiii. 4 [T WH txt. om. Tr br. dvaBdor. ]
and Lk. xi. 46 gopria dvaBacrakra, said of precepts hard
to obey, andirksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3; Philo, omn.
prob. lib. §5; Plut. quaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 f.)*
Sucevtepia, -as, 7, (€vrepov intestine), dysentery, (Lat.
tormina intestinorum, bowei-complaint): Acts xxviii. 8
RG; see the foll. word. (Hippocr. and med. writ. ;
Hat., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.) *
Sucevtépiov, -ov, To, a later form for ducevrepia, q. V- :
Acts xxviii. 8 LT Tr WH. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 518.*
Sucepphveutos, -ov, (épunvevw), hard to interpret, difti-
cult of explanation: Heb.v.11. (Diod. 2, 52; Philo ce
somn. § 32 fin.; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) *
Svc1s
[Svots,-ews, 7; 1. a sinking or setting, esp. of the
heavenly bodies ; 2. of the quarter in which the sun
sets, the west: Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘ Shorter Conclu-
sion.’» (So both in sing. and in plur.: Aristot. de mund.
3 p. 393,17; 4 p. 394", 21; Polyb. 1, 42, 5 etc.)*]
Stckodos, -ov, (koAov food) ; 1. prop. hard to find
agreeable food for, fastidious about food. 2. difficult
to please, always finding fault; (Eur., Arstph., Xen.,
Plat., al.). 3. univ. difficult (Xen. oec. 15, 10 7 yewp-
yia dvoxodds eore pabe) : rds SvoKoAdy Ecru, foll. by ace.
with inf., Mk. x. 24.*
SucKddws, adv., (Svcxodos), [fr. Plato down], with diffi-
culty: Mt. xix. 23; Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24.*
Sucp%, -7s, 7), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], much often-
er in plur. [W. § 27, 3] dvopai, ai, (Sv or dvve, q.v-),
sc. nAiov, the setting of the sun: Lk. xii. 54 [ace. to the
reading of T WH Tr mrg. emi 6. may possibly be un-
derstood of time (cf. W. 375 sq. (852)); see emi, A. II. ;
al. take the prep. locally, over, in, and give dvop. the
meaning which follows ; see emi, A. I.1b.]; the region of
sunset, the west, [anarthrous, W.121 (115) ]: Rev. xxi. 13;
aro avaroAG@v kai Sucpov, from all regions or nations, Mt.
viii. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Hebr. wow Nj2n,
Josh. i. 4. Often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. on, both with
and without 7A‘ov.*
Suevoytos, -ov, (voew), hard to be understood: 2 Pet. iii.
16. (ypnopds, Leian. Alex. 54; Diog. Laért. 9, 13 due-
vontov Te Kal OuoeEnyntov ; [ Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 816*,3].)*
Svopypcw, -@ : [ pres. pass. duadnuotpar] ; (Svodnpos) ;
to use ill words, defame ; pass. to be defamed, 1 Co. iv. 13
TWH Trmrg. (1 Mace. vii. 41; in Grk. writ. fr. Aes-
chyl. Agam. 1078 down.) *
Svepyputa, -as, 7, both the condition of a dvaqnpos, i. e.
of one who is defamed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of
one who uses opprobrious languag. viz. defamation, re-
proach : 8a duodnpias k. evpnpias [A. V. by evil report and
good report], 2 Co. vi. 8. (1 Mace. vii. 38; 3 Mace. ii.
26. Dion. H. 6, 48; Plut. de gen. Socr. § 18 p. 587 f.) *
Siw, see Suva.
$48exa., of, ai, td, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20;
x.1; [LT Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for dexadvo];
Rev. vii. 5 [RGe']; xxi. 21, ete.; of Sadexa, the twelve
apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix.
XG 5. Xi hI Mt, xvi. 14, 20% Lk. xxii. 3.) ete,
SwSeKaros, -7, -ov, twelfth: Rev. xxi. 20. [Fr. Hom. on.]*
SwSexd-pvrov, -ov, ro, (fr. dadexa, and gvAn tribe), the
twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as
consisting of twelve tribes: Acts xxvi. 7. (Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 55, 6; Prot. Jac. ¢. 1, 3; Aads 6 SwSexapvdros, Orac.
Sibyll. Cf. Sexapudos, rerpdadvados, Hdt. 5, 66; [W. 100
(95)].)*
161
Swpohopia
Sapa, -ros, ro, (Séu to build) ; 1. a building, house,
(Hom. et sqq.). 2. a part of a building, dining-room,
hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script. equiv. to 1,
house-top, roof [W. 23]: Mt. xxiv. 17; Mk. xiii. 15; Lk.
v.19; xvii. 31. The house-tops of the Orientals were
(and still are) level, and were frequented not only for
walking but also for meditation and prayer: Acts x. 9;
hence emi dwpdrav, on the house-tops, i. e. in public: Mt.
x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; emt 7d ddpa. .
"Iopand, 2 8. xvi. 22.*
Swped, -as, 7, (OiSwpr) ; from [ Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down;
agit: Jn.iv. 10; Acts viii. 20; xi. 17; Ro. v.15; 2 Co. .
ix. 15; Heh. vi. 4; 4 xdpes €00n kara Td pérpov Tis Swpeas
Tov Xpiorov, according to the measure in which Christ
gave it, Eph. iv. 7; with an epexegetical gen. of the
thing given, viz. rod dyiov mvevparos, Acts ii. 38; x. 45;
Otxacocvyns, Ro. v. 17 [L. WH Tr mre. br. r. dap.]; THs
xapiros Tov Oeov, Eph. iii. 7. The ace. dwpeav (prop. as
a gift, gift-wise [cf. W. 230 (216); B. 153 (134) ]) is used
adverbially ; Sept. for 03m; a. freely, for naught, gratis,
gratuitously: Mt. x. 8; Ro. iii. 24; 2 Co. xi. 7; 2 Th. iii. 8;
Rey. xxi. 6; xxii. 17, (Polyb. 18,17, 7; Ex. xxi. 11 ; Swpedv
divev apyvupiou, Is. lii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet
no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without just
cause, unnecessarily: Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5°
Xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19); Gal. ii. 21, (Job i. 9 [?]; Ps. xxxiv
(xxxv.) 7 [where Symm. dracriws]; so the Lat. gratuitus.
Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor, Sen. epp. 105, 3 [bk. xviii. ep
2, § 3] odium aut est ex offensa... aut gratuitum). [Syn.
see doua, fin. | *
Swpedv, see Swped.
Swpéw, -@: to present, bestow, (Hes., Pind., Hdt., al.) ;
pass. Lev. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more
frequently as depon. mid. dwpéopat, -odpat (Hom. et sqq.):
1 aor. édopnodpny; pf. Sedopnpar; tui Tt, Mk. xv. 45;
2ebete indy Ae
Sapypa, -ros, 70, (Swpéopar) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction:
Ro. v.16; Jas.i. 17. ({[Aeschyl.], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf.
Soua, fin. | *
Sapov, -ov, ro, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for
]2 2p, often also for ANID and WwW; a gift, present: Eph.
ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; of gifts offered as an expression of
honor, Mt. ii. 11; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to
God, Mt. v. 23 sq.; vili.4; xv. 5; xxiii. 18 sq.; Mk. vii.
11; Heb. v. 1; viii. 3 sq.; ix. 9; xi. 4; of money cast into
the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the
support of the poor, Lk. xxi. 1, [4]. [S¥N. see deya, fin. | *
Swpodopia, -as, 7, (Swpodpdpos bringing gifts), the offering.
of a gift or of gifts: Ro. xv. 31 L Trmrg. ef. d:axovia, 3.
(Alciphr. 1, 6; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Hemst.]; several
times in eccles. writ.) *
. kat opOadpovs mavros
162
E
”
é€a
éa, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of
wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the
impvy. pres. of the verb éay [acc. to others a natural,
instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in
prose writ. (as Plat. Prot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah!: Mk. i.
24 RG; Lk. iv. 34; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 32 sq.*
éay ; I. aconditional particle (derived fr. ef dv), which
makes reference to time and to experience, introducing
something future, but not determining, before the event,
whether it is certainly to take place; 7, in case, (Lat.
si; Germ. wenn; im Fall, dass; falls; wofern); cf., among
others, Hermann ad Viger. p.832; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2
p- 450 sqq.; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with
the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the
more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the
subjunc. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (€av ody 6 dpOadpos cou
dmdovs 7, if it be the case, as to which I do not know,
that thine eye etc.); ibid. 23; xvii. 20; Lk. x.6 ; Jn. vii.
17; viii. 54 [RGL mrg.]; ix. 31; xi. 9,10; Acts v. 38;
xO. Ale ho. 1. 2d'sq2; 1 Con. 165 "Gal. v.25 1 Wim a:
8 [not Lchm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 ete.
b. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat.
fut. perf.: Mt. iv. 9 (€av mpooxuvnons pot if thou shalt
have worshipped me) ; v. 46; ix. 21; Mk. iii. 24; ix. 50;
Lk. xiv. 34; xvii. 4; xx. 28; Jn. v. 43; xi. 57; Ro. vii. 2;
x. 9; 1 Co. vii. 8, 39; viii. 10; xvi. 10 (€av €AOn Tupo-
Geos; for although he was aiready on his way to Cor-
inth, yet some hindrance might still prevent his arriv-
ing) ; 2 Co. ix.4; Gal. vi. 1; Jas. ii. 2; 1 Jn. v. 16 [Lchm.
pres.]; Rev. iii. 20, and often; also in the oratio obliqua,
where the better Grk. writ. use the Optative: Jn. ix. 22;
xi. 57; Acts ix. 2 (W. 294 (276); [cf. B. 224 (193)]).
The difference between the Pres. and the Aor. may be seen
especially from the following passages: 2 Tim. ii. 5 éay
&€ cai GOAF tis, ov oreavodrat, Edy py vouiws aOAnon, 1
Co. xiv. 23 éav obv ovvedOn 1 ExkAnoia . . . Kal TavTes yhoo-
oats Aadaou, eicé Dwar dé iSi@rat 7} Amiorot, vs. 24 eav Se
mavtes mpopntevwouy, eio€AOn S€ tis ameortos, Mt. xxi. 21
€av €xnte miotw Kai pr StaxpiOnre. Also ei (“quod per
‘se nihil significat praeter conditionem,” Klotz 1. ¢. p.
455) and éay are distinguished in propositions subjoined
the one to the other [W. 296 (277 sq.)]: Jn. xiii. 17 e
Taira oldare, pakdptol €ore, €av TounTe avtd, JN. iii. 12; 1
Co. vii. 36; in statements antithetic, Acts v. 38 sq.; or
parallel, Mk. iii. 24-26. Finally, where one of the evan-
gelists uses ef another has éav, but so that each particle
retains its own force, inasmuch as one and the same thing
is differently conceived of by the different minds: Mk.
ix.43 éav oxavdarily [-Aion L mrg. T WH txt.] 7 yelp cov,
and vs. 47 eav 6 ddpOadpds cov oxavdariln oe, i. e. if so
7
€ap
be that ete.; on the other hand, Matthew, in xviii. 8 sq.
and v. 29 sq. concerning the same thing saysei. _c. irreg-
ularly, but to be explained as an imitation of the Hebr. ox
which is also a particle of time (cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. y.
4), éav with the Subjune. Aor. is used of things which the
speaker or writer thinks will certainly take place, where
drav when, whenever, should have been used: €av iwa,
Jn. xii. 32; édv ropevda, Jn. xiv. 3; eav havepw6y, 1 Jn.
ii. 28 (LT Tr WH, for érav RG) ; iii. 2; eav dxovonre,
Heb. iii. 7 fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 8; (av etoeAOns els Tov
vuppava, Tob. vi. 17 (16) [al. érav]; eav drobava, Odor
pe, Tob. iv. 3, cf. vs. 4 érav amobavn, Oayov airny; for DN
when, Is. xxiv. 13; Am. vii. 2). |. sometimes when the
particle is used with the Subj. Aor. the futurity of a thing
is not so much affirmed as imagined, it being known to
be something which never could happen: éay etry 6
movs, if the foot should say, or were to say, 1 Co. xii.
15; e€dv €AOw mpods twas yAdooas Aaday, 1 Co. xiv. 6
2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the
time of Aristotle on, éay is connected also with the In-
dicative, [cf. Klotz l.c. p. 468 sqq.; Kiihner § 575
Anm.5; W. 295 (277); B. 221 (191) sq.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 124 sq.; WH. App. p. 171; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Vin-
cent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77]; and
a. with the indic. Future, in meaning akin, as is well
known, to the subjunc.: [éav dv0 cvpdovncovow, Mt.
xvii. 19 T Tr]; éav odrot ovwmnoovat, Lk. xix. 40 L T ‘fr
WH; éav.. . ddnynoe, Acts viii. 31 T Tr WH, (€av BeBn-
A@oovow avrd, Lev. xxii.9); butalso b. with the indic.
Present: édv daveifere, Lk. vi. 34 Lmrg. Tr txt.; éav
otnkere, 1 Th. iii. 8 T Trtxt. WH; éav re droOvnoxoper,
Ro. xiv. 8 Lechm. with an indic. Preterite, but one
having the force of a Pres.: éav[Lchm. dv] oiSapev, 1 Jn.
v.15 without var. 3. édy joined with other particles;
a. eav b€ Kai but if also, but even if, [A. V. but and if (re-
tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)]; with the Subjunc.: Mt. xviii.
17; 1 Co. vii. 11, 28; 2 Tim.ii.5. b. éav cat: Gal. vi.
1. c. dav pn if not, unless, except; with the subjunc.
Present: Mt. x. 13; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lchm. txt. aor.]; Acts
xv. 1 [Rec.]; 1 Co. viii. 8; ix. 16 [RG L mre. TWH
mrg.]; Jas. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 215; with the subjunc. Aorist :
Mt. vi. 15; xviii. 35; Mk. iii. 27; Jn. iii. 3; viii. 24; 1 Co.
xiv. 6 sq. 9; Ro. x. 15; [xi. 23 RL]; 2 Tim. ii.5; Rev. ii.
5,22 [RL], and often. with the Indicative pres. : éav py
mortevete, Jn. x. 38 Tdf. In some passages, although the
particles éay pn retain their native force of unless, if not,
yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate
them but that, without : Mt. xxvi. 42 (the cup cannot pass
by without my drinking it); ov yap éotw xpumrdy, eav
pn pavepwOy (Treg.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall
éav7rep
be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex-
cept that it should be made manifest), Mk. iv. 22; ovdeis
éorw, os adjxev oikiav . . . €ay jut) AGBy, but that shall re-
ceive (properly, unless he shall receive .. . it cannot be
said that any one has left), Mk. x. 29, 30, [ef. B. § 149, 6.
On the supposed use of éav pn (ef yn) as equiv. to adda,
ef. Mey. on Mt. xii. 4; Gal. i. 7; ii 16; Fritzsche on Ro.
xiv. 14 fin.; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. ll. ce. See ei,
Iil.8e.8.] d. éavrep [L Tr separately, eav rep] if only,
if indeed: Heb. iii. 6 (where L br. rep, and T Tr WH
read éav), 14; vi. 3; it occurs neither in the Sept. nor in
the O. T. Apocr.; on its use in Grk. writ. cf. Klotz, 1. ¢.
jp. 483 sq. e. éav Te... eay TE, SVE... Sive, whether...
or: Ro. xiv. 8; (often in Sept. for ON ... DN, as Ex. xix.
13; ‘Lev. ii. 1; Deut. xviii: 3). Cf. Klotz, |e. p. 479
sq-; Kiihner § 541; [B. 221 (191)]. f. «ay for xai éay,
see xdv. II. The classic use of the conditional par-
ticle éay also in the contracted form dy (see p. 34° above)
seems to have led the biblical writers of both Testaments
to connect éav with relative pronouns and adverbs in-
stead of the potential particle dv, as ds éavy {so Tdf. in
12 places], 6 eay [so Tdf. uniformly], etc. (this use
among prof. writ. is very doubtful, cf. W. p. 310 (291);
B72) (63)): Mt. v.19; x. 14[RG]; xv.5; Mk. vi. 22
sq.; Lk. ix. 48 [WH dy]; xvii. 33; Acts vii. 7[R GT];
1 Co. vi. 18; Eph. vi. 8 [RG Ltxt.]; 3 Jn. 5, etc.; drov
eav, Mt. viii. 19; xxvi.13; Mk. vi.10[L Tr dv]. éoanes
eav, Rev. xi. 6. o& é€av, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (1 Mace. vi. 36).
xaOo éav, 2 Co. viii. 12 [Tdf. av; doris éav, Gal. v. 10 T
Tr WH; jis av, Acts iii. 23 Tdf. For many other exx.
see Soph. Lex. s. v. édv, 3.]_ In many places the codd.
vary between eay and ap; cf. dy, I. p. 34; [and esp. Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96].
éav-trep, see eav, I. 3 d.
éavtod, -7s, -ov, etc. or (contracted) avrod, -js, -od, (see
p- 87); plur. éavr@v; dat. -ois, -ais, -ois, etc. ; reflexive
pronoun of the 3d person. It is used 1. of the 3d
pers. sing. and plur., to denote that the agent and the
person acted on are the same; as, cwtew éavrév, Mt.
xxvil. 42; Mk. xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 35; twodv éaurdv, Mt.
xxiii. 12, ete. eavt@, eavrdv are also often added to
middle verbs: d:eyepioavro éavtois, Jn. xix. 24 (Xen.
mem. 1, 6,13 movetoOar Eavto idrov) ; cf. W. § 38, 6; [B.
§135,6]. Of the phrases into which this pronoun enters
we notice the following: ad’ éavrod, see amd, II. 2d. aa.;
dv éavrod of itself, i. e. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr
L txt. read atr.]; &v €auT@, see in d:adoyifer Oa, Aéeyetv,
ceive. eis éavtov épyecba to come to one’s self, to a
better mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). xa6’ éaurév by
one’s self, alone: Acts xxviii. 16; Jas.ii. 17. map’ €auTo,
by him i.e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3).
mpos éavtov, to himself i. e. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12
[RG; T om., WH (but with air.) reject, L Tr (but the
latter with adr.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr air.
(see abrovd) |; with [cf. our to] himself, i. e. in his own mind,
spocevyecOa, Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Mace. xi. 13) ;
in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos-
sessive pronoun, as rovs €avta@y vexpovs: Mt. viii. 22; Lk.
163
‘EBpaios
ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the 1st and 2d
pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is
thereby occasioned; thus, év éavrois equiv. to év hyiv av-
tois, Ro. viii. 23; éavrovs equiv. to nuas adtovs, 1 Co. xi.
31; ad’ éavrod i. q. dd ceavrod [read by L Tr WH], Jn.
xviii. 34; é€avréy i. q. ceavrdv [read by L T Tr WH], Ro.
xiii. 9; €avrots for tiv avrois, Mt. xxiii. 31, etc.; ef. Mat-
thiae § 489 II.; W.§ 22,5; [B. § 127, 15]. 3. It is
used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun
adAnov, addAndots, GAAnAous, reciprocally, mutually, one
another: Mt. xvi. 7; xxi. 38; Mk. x. 26 [Tr mrg. WH
avrov]; xvi. 3; Lk. xx. 5; Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 13, 16;
1 Pet. iv. 8, 10; see Matthiae § 489 III. ; Kihnerii. p. 497
sq-; Bnhdy. p. 2738; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13].
édw, -@; impf. elwv; fut. dow; 1 aor. etaca; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. to allow, permit, let: foll. by the inf., ovx
ay etace Stopvynva [T Tr WH -y6qvac], Mt. xxiv. 43; by
the acc. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (ov« e/a aira
Aadeiv); Acts xiv. 16; xxiii. 32; xxvii. 32; xxviii.4; 1 Co.
x. 13; by the ace. alone, when the inf. is easily supplied
from the context, ovk elavev adtovs, sc. mopevOqvat, Acts
XVI. 7; oUK etwy avtdv, SC. eiveAGetv, Acts xix. 30; [ef. W.
476 (444) ]. 2. twa, to suffer one to do what he wishes,
not to restrain, to let alone: Rev. ii. 20 Rece.; Acts v. 38
RG; éare sc. adrovs, is spoken by Christ to the apostles,
meaning, ‘do not resist them, let them alone,’ (the fol-
lowing €ws rovrov is to be separated from what precedes;
[al. connect the words closely, and render ‘ suffer them
to go even to this extreme’; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed.
Weiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave:
Tas aykupas .. . etwy eis THY Oddaccayr, they let down into
the sea [i. e. abandoned; cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009* bot. ],
Acts xxvii. 40. [Comp.: mpoo-edo. ]*
EBSopnyKovTa, oi, ai, ra, [fr. Hdt. down], seventy: Acts
vil. 14 [here Rec.®!2 €8dounkovramevre |; xxiii. 23; xxvii.
37; of €8dounkovra [é88. dvo L br. WH br.], the seventy
disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve
apostles: Lk. x. 1,17. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Seventy Dis-
ciples. | *
[€BS5opnovra-—E for €Bdounkovra e€&, seventy-six: Acts
Xxvii. 37 Rec.*]
€BSopynxovraxis, [Gen. iv. 24], seventy times: €Bdopnkov-
Takis émrd, seventy times seven times, i. e. countless times,
Mt. xviii. 22 [cf. W. § 37,5 Note 2; B. 30 (26) and see
énta, fin.; al. (cf. R. V. mrg.) seventy-seven times, see
Mey. ad loc. ].*
[éBSopnxovta-evre, seventy-five: Acts vil. 14 Rec.e#
(Gen. xxv. 7; Ex. xxxix. 6 (xxxviii. 27); 1 Esdr. v.12).*]
€BSopos, -7, -ov, seventh: Jn. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4; Jude
14; Rev. viii. 1; xi. 15, ete. [From Hom. down. ]
’"Eép [R* G], more correctly [L T WH]”EBep [on the
accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Treg. ”EB., cf.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408; ef. B. D.s. v.
Heber], 6, Hber or Heber, indeclinable proper name of a
Hebrew: Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).*
‘EBpaixés, -7, -dv, Hebrew: Lk. xxiii. 38 (R GL br. Tr
mrg. br.).*
‘EBpaios [WH ’Efp., see their Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, a
‘EBpais
Hebrew (07 2y a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv.
13, afterwards transferred to his posterity descended
from Isaac and Jacob; by it in the O. T. the Israelites
are both distinguished from and designated by foreign-
ers, as afterwards by Pausan., Plutarch, al. The name
is now generally derived from 42) for 1737 ay i.e. of
the region beyond the Euphrates, whence 2) equiv. to
one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen.
xiv. 13 Sept. 6 meparns. Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr.
Sprache u. Schrift, p. 11 sq.; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987;
Knobel, Volkertafel der Genesis, p. 176 sqq.; Bleek, Kin.
in d. A. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Eng. trans. i. 76 sq.]; [B. D.
s.v. Hebrew. For Syn. see Iovdaios.]). Inthe N.T. 1.
any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation: 2 Co. xi. 22;
Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Euseb. h. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo,
the Alexandrian Jew, ‘EBpaios, although his education
was Greek, and he had little [if any ] knowledge even of
the Hebrew language; and in Praep. evang. 8, 8, 34 he
applies the same word to Aristobulus, who was both an
Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jew.) 2. Ina nar-
rower sense those are called ‘ESpaios who lived in Pales-
tine and used the language of the country, i. e. Chaldee;
from whom are distinguished of “EAAnuorai, q. v. That
name adhered to them even after they had gone over to
Christianity: Acts vi. 1. (Philo in his de conf. lingg.§ 26
makes a contrast between “ESpato: and jets; and in his
de congr. erud. grat. § 8 he calls Greek 7 nuerépa Stadexros.
Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He-
brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke
Aramaic or Greek, equiv. to muaroi €€ “E8paiwv; so in the
heading of the Epistle to the Hebrews; called by Euseb.
h. e. 3, 4, 2 of €€ “EBpaiay dvres. [Cf. K. Wieseler, Unters.
ii. d. Hebraerbrief, 2te Hiilfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.] *
‘EBpats [WH ’E£p., see their Intr. § 408], -idos, 7, He-
brew, the Hebrew language; not that however in which
the O. T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal-
daic, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; cf. A.
Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at the
time of Jesus and the apostles had long superseded it
in Palestine: Acts xxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 14; ‘EBpats gavn,
4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. D.s. v. Shemitic Lan-
guages etc.; ib. Am. ed.s.v. Lang. of the New Test. ]*
‘EBpaiort [WH ’EGp., see their Intr. § 408], adv.,
(€Bpaitw), in Hebrew, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing
word and reff.): Jn. v. 2; xix. 13,17, 20; [xx. 16 T Tr
WH Lbr.]; Rev. ix. 11; xvi. 16. ([Sir. prol. line 13.]*
eyy({w ; impf. #yyifov; Attic fut. éyyo (Jas. iv.8 [Bttm.
37 (32); W. § 13, 1 ¢.]); 1 aor. F#yyoa; pf. #yyca;
(€yyis); in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on; Sept. for
Wi) and 7p. 1. trans. to bring near, to join one thing
to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v.
8. 2. intrans. to draw or come near, to approach;
absol., Mt. xxi. 34; Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28;
xxi. 1; xxiv. 15; Acts vii. 17; xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [Heb.
x. 25]; pf. myyixe has come nigh, is at hand: 9 Baoid. rod
Geo, Mi. iii! 25 ivi 175 x.7; MK E1550Lk wld with
the addition ép tpas, vs. 9; 7 épnuwors, Lk. xxi. 20; 7
@pa, Mt. xxvi. 45; 6 mapadiSovs pe, Mt. xxvi. 46; [Mk.
164
éyryus
xiv. 42 (where Tdf. #yyoev)]; 6 xatpos, Lk. xxi. 8;
nuepa, Ro, xiii. 12; 76 rédos, 1 Pet. iv. 7; 7 mapovaia rob
kupiou, Jas. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the person or
the place approached : Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; xxii. 47;
Acts ix. 3; x.9; xxii. 6; éyyiCew 7é dea (in Sept. used esp.
of the priests entering the temple to offer sacrifices or to
perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix. 22; xxxiv.30;
Ley. x. 3, ete.): to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Ree., fr. Is.
xxix. 13; to turn one’s thoughts to God, to become ac-
quainted with him, Heb. vii. 19; Jas. iv. 8; 6 Oeds eyyie
tii, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his
grace and help, Jas. iv. 8. Foll. by eis and the ace. of the
place: Mt..xxi. 1; Mk. xi.15 Gk xviii. 85); mix, 29)ssxxiv
28; [foll. by mpos w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see B. § 147, 28;
al. regard this as a pregn. constr., cf. W. §§ 48, e.; 66,
2d.]; péxpe Oavarov Ayyiwe, to draw nigh unto, be at the
point of, death, Phil. ii. 30 (eyyi€ew ets Oavarov, Job xxxiii.
22); with an adv. of place, éaovu kdémrns ovk eyyite, Lk.
xii. 33. [Compe.: mpoo-eyyi¢w. | *
[€yyrorre, neut. plur. superl. (fr. éyyis) as adv., nearest,
next: WH (rejected) mrg. in Mk. vi. 36 (al. xixdo).*]
€y-ypadw [T WH evyp., see ev, III. 3]: pf. pass. eyye-
ypappar; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; to engrave ; in-
scribe, write in or on: ti, pass. with dat. of the means
[with] and foll. by ev with dat. of the place (in minds,
tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2,3; to record, enrol: ra dvépara, pass.
Lk. 20.2 an Waele %
€yyvos, -ov, 6, 7, a surety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor) :
Kpettrovos Siabykns eyyvos, he by whom we get full assur-
ance of the more excellent covenant made by God with
us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con-
nected with it, Heb. vii. 22. (2 Macc. x. 28; Sir. xxix.
15 sq. Xen. vect. 4,20; Aeschin. Epp. 11,12 p. 128 a.;
Aristot. oec. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. 1350*, 19], Polyb., Diod., al.)*
éyyts, adv., (fr. év and yviov [limb, hand], at hand; [but
rather allied w. ayy, dyyw, anxius, anguish, etc.; see
Curtius § 166; Vanicek p. 22]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
for 317); near; 1. of Place and position; a.
prop. : absol. Jn. xix. 42, [ef. also 20 G L T Tr WH (but
see below) ]; with gen. (Matthiae § 339, 1 p. 812; W.
195 (188); [471 (439); B. § 132, 24]), Lk. xix.11; Jn.
iii. 23; vi. 19, 23; xi. 18, 54; xix. 20 [Rec., but see above ];
Acts i. 12; with dat. (Matthiae § 386, 6; Kiihner § 423,
13; [Jelf § 592, 2]), Acts ix. 38; xxvii. 8. _b. trop-
ically; of éyy’s, those who are near of access to God i.e.
Jews, and of paxpdv, those who are alien from the true
God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles :
Eph. ii. 17 (cf. Is. lvii. 19) 3 eyyds yiveoOar, to be brought
near, sc. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii.
13, (so with the Rabbins not infrequently to make nigh
is equiv. to to make a proselyte, cf. Wetstein ad 1. c.;
[ Schéttgen, Horae ete. i. 761 sq.; Valek. Schol. i. 363]) ;
eyyis cov 76 phud éotev, near thee i. e. at hand, already,
as it were, in thy mind, Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut. xxx. 14, [cf.
B.§ 129,11; W. 465 (434) ]. 2. of Time; concern-
ing things imminent and soon to come to pass: Mt. xxiv.
32; xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30, 31; Jn. ii. 13;
vi. 4; vii. 2; xi. 55; Rev.i. 3; xxii. 10; of the near ad-
éryryUTE pov
vent of persons: 6 xuptos éyyus, of Christ’s return from
heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in another sense, of God in Ps. exliv.
(exlv.) 18); with the addition emi @vpas, at the door,
Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; eyyis cardpas, near to being
cursed, Heb. vi. 8; apaviopov, soon to vanish, Heb. viii.
13.*
éyytrepov, neut. of the compar. éyyirepos (fr. éyyis),
used adverbially, nearer: Ro. xiii. 11.*
€yelpw; fut. éyepo; 1 aor. #yepa; Pass., pres. éyeipo-
par, impv. 2 pers. sing. eyeipov (Mk. ii. 9 Tr WH), Lk.
viii. 54 (where L Tr WH éyeue), 2 pers. plur. éyeipeoe ;
pf. eynyeppar; 1 aor. nyépOnv [ef. B. 52 (45); W. § 38,
1]; 1 fut. éyepOnooua; Mid., 1 aor. impv. éyerpar Ree. ;
but, after good codd., Grsb. has in many pass. and lately
LT Tr WH have everywhere in the N. T. restored
éyetpe, pres. act. impv. used intransitively and employed as
a formula for arousing ; properly, rise, i. e. up! come ! cf.
dye; so in Eur. Iph. A.624; Arstph. ran. 340; cf. Fritzsche
on Mk. p. 55; [B. 56 (49), 144 (126) sq.; Kihner § 373,
2]; Sept. generally for yy and DDT; fo arouse, cause
to rise ; 1. asin Grk. writ. fr. Homer down, to arouse
from sleep, to awake: Acts xii. 7; [Mk. iv. 38 T Tr WH];
pass. to be awaked, wake up, [A. V. arise, often including
thus the subseq. action (cf. 3 below) ]: Mt. xxv. 7; Mk. iv.
27; [dio Tov Urvov, Mt.i. 24 LT Tr WH]; eyepdets with
the impv. Mt. ii. 13, 20; with a finite verb, Mt. ii. 14, 21;
viii. 26; [ Lk. viii. 24 RG L Tr mrg. ]; éyeipeoOe, Mt. xxvi.
46; Mk. xiv. 42. Metaph. e& vmvou éyepOnvat, to arise
from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to
God, Ro. xiii. 11; likewise éyeupe [Rec. -par] arise, 6
xabevdov, Eph. v. 14. 2. to arouse from the sleep of
death, to recall the dead to life: with vexpovs added, Jn.
v.21; Acts xxvi. 8; 2Co.i. 9. éyetpe [Rec. -par] arise,
Mk. v. 41; pass. eyeipov, Lk. viii. 54[RGT]; eyépOnr,
arise from death, Lk. vii. 14; éyeipovrat of vexpoi, Mt. xi.
mepluk. vil. 22 3) xx.'575 1Conxv: 15,16, 29, 32) (Is. xxvi.
19); éyeipew ex vexpov, from the company of the dead
fet. W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78) ], Jn. xii. 1,9; Acts iii. 15;
iv. 10; xiii. 30; Ro. iv. 24; viii. 11; x. 9; Gal. i. 1; Eph.
feZOe Coli 12s ty0h: a. 10) Heb. xiv 119/31) Retyi: 20:
pass., Ro. vi. 4, 9; vii.4; 1 Co. xv.12, 20; Jn. ii. 22; xxi.
14; Mk. vi. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. éx vexp.]; Lk. ix. 7;
[Mt. xvii. 9 L T Tr WH txt.]; dao rév vexpov, Mt. xiv.
25 XXVil. 64; XXvill. 7, (vexpdv ex Oavarov kal €& adov, Sir.
xlviii. 5; for YP, 2 K. iv. 31); eyetpew simply: Acts
v. 30; x.40; xiii. 37; 1 Co.vi. 14; 2Co.iv. 14; pass., Mt.
xvi. 21; xvii. 23 [L WH mre. dvaornoerac]; [xx.19 T Tr
txt. WH txt.]; xxvi. 32; xxvii. 63; Mk. [vi. 16 TWH
(see above) ]; xvi. 6; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WH reject the clause],
34; Ro. iv. 25; 1 Co. xv. 4, ete. 3. in later usage gen-
erally to cause to rise, raise, from a seat, bed, etc. ; pass.
and mid. to rise, arise; used a. of one sitting: éyet-
pera [L. Tr WH nyep6n] taxv, Jn. xi. 29, cf. vs. 20; pres.
act. imperative éyeipe (see above), Mk. x. 49 [not Ree. ],
cf. vs. 46 ; hence (like the Hebr. D3), Gen. xxii. 3; 1 Chr.
xxii. 19), in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. dviornut,
II. 1 ¢. it is used before verbs of going, etc.: éyepbels
nrorovbe [-noev RG] air, Mt. ix. 19; éyepe [R G -pac]
165
>
eyKawvia
kal werpnoov, Rey. xi. 1. b. of one reclining : éyeiperac
ex Tov Oeimvov, Jn. xiii. 4; éeyeipeoOe, Jn. xiv. 31. cc. of
one lying, to raise up: ryeipev airdv, Acts x. 26; éyépOnre
arise, Mt. xvii. 7; @yeupe (see above) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr
txt. br.]; myépOn amd ths yns he rose from the earth,
Acts ix. 8; do [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a
pit, Mt. xii. 11. d. of one ‘down’ with disease, lying
sick: act., Mk. ix. 27; Acts ili. 7; éyepet adrov 6 kipios,
will cause him to recover, Jas. v. 15; pass. Mt. viii. 15,
éyetpe ([ Rec. -pat, so Grsb. (doubtfully in Mt.) ], see above)
arise: Mt. ix.5; Jn.v. 8; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br. }.
4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear; a. to cause lo
appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract
the attention of men): #yepe TO “Iopand owrhpa, Acts
xiii. 23 Rec.; #yeupev avtots tov Aaveid eis Baoiéa, Acts
xiii. 22 (so Dp, Judg. ii. 18; iii. 9,15); pass. éye(popat,
to come before the public, to appear, arise: Mt. xi. 11; xxiv.
11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vii.16; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266
(250); B. 204 (177)]; contextually, to appear before a
judge: Mt. xii.42; Lk. xi. 31. -b. ei twa to raise up,
incite, stir up, against one; pass. to rise against: Mt. xxiv.
7; Mk. xiii. 8; Lk.xxi.10. c. to raise up i. e. cause to
be born: rékxva rwi, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; xépas owrnpias,
LK. i. 69 (see dviornut, I. c. eEaviornut, 1); Odipw ois
decpois pov, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e.
the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib
ulation, Phil. i. 16 (17) LT Tr WH. — 4d. of buildings
to raise, construct, erect: tov vadv, Jn. iil. 19 sq. (so ODA
Deut. xvi. 22; 1 K. xvi. 32. Aelian. de nat. an. 11, 10,
Joseph. antt. 4, 6,5; Hdian. 3, 15, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; 8, 2,12
[5 ed. Bekk.]; Leian. Pseudomant. § 19; Anthol. 9, 696.
1 Esdr. v. 43 ; Sir. xlix.13; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. g.
5, 40; sepulcrum, Cie. légg. 2, 27, 68). [Ammonius: dava-
aTnvat kal eyepOnva Siapepe> dvacrnvat pev yap emt
épyov, eyepOnvar dé €& vrvov; cf. also Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 sq. But see exx. above. Comp.:
du-, €&-, en-, ovv-eyeipa. |
eyepots, -ews, 7, (€yelpw), a rousing, excitation : rod bupod,
Plat. Tim. p. 70 c.; a rising up, Ps. exxxviii. (exxxix.)
2; resurrection from death: Mt. xxvii. 53.*
éykaberos ['T’ WH evx., see ev, III. 3], -ov, 6, 7, (€yxadi-
nye [to send down in (secretly)]), suborned to lie in
wait; a lier-in-wait, spy, [cf. Lat. insidiator; Eng. insid-
tous]: used in Lk. xx. 20 of one who is suborned by
others to entrap a man by crafty words. (Plat. Ax. p.’
368 e.; Dem. p. 1483, 1; Joseph. b. j.6,5, 2; Polyb. 13,
5, 1, al.; Sept., Job [xix. 12]; xxxi. 9.) *
eykaivia [T WH evk., see ev, III. 3], -wy, ra, (fr. év and
kawvds) ; Only in bibl. and eccl. writ., [on the plur. cf. W.
§ 27, 3; B. 23 (21)]; dedication, consecration; thus in 2
Esdr. vi. 16,17; Neh. xii. 27 for 433M; in particular,
[Vulg. encaenium i. e. renovation], an annual feast cele-
brated eight days beginning on the 25th of Chislev (mid-
dle of our December), instituted by Judas Maccabaeus
[B. c. 164] in memory of the cleansing of the temple from
the pollutions of Antiochus Epiphanes (ai jyépar éyxac-
vicpov tov bvataarnpiov, 1 Mace. iv. 59): Jn. x. 22. Cf.
Win. RWB. [aiso Riehm, HWB.] s. v. Kirchweihfest ;
b] /
éyKawvilw
Oehler in Herzog iv. p. 389; Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 54;
iv. 52; Dillmann in Schenkel iii. 534 sq.; [BB.DD.
(esp. Kitto) s. v. Dedication, Feast of the].*
éy-kawwito [TWH eévk., see ev, HI. 3]: 1 aor. évexainoa;
pf. pass. éykexaiviopac; a word exclusively bibl. and eccl.
[W. 33]; to innovate,i. e. 1. torenew: 2 Chr. xv. 8.
2. to do anew, again: onpeia, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 6.
3. to initiate, consecrate, dedicate, (Deut. xx. 5; 1 K.
viii. 63; 1. xi. 14, ete.): SsaOnenv, Heb. ix. 18; ddr,
Heb. x. 20.*
€y-Kakéw, -@ [(see below); 1 aor. evexdxnoa]; (kakds) ;
[prop. to behave badly in; hence] to be weary in any-
thing, or to lose courage, flag, faint: adopted by LT Tr
WH in place of R G éxxaxéw (q. v.) in Lk. xviii. 1; 2 Co.
iv. 1,16; Gal. vi. 9; Eph. iii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 13 — except
that T WH write ev. in Lk. xviii. 1; Gal. vi. 9; Eph.
iii. 13; so WH in 2 Th. iii. 13, also; see ev, III. 3; (ef.
Tdf.’s note on 2 Co. iv. 1; Meyer ibid., who thinks that
éxx. may have been a colloquial form. See the full exhi-
bition of the usage of the Mss. given by Dr. Gregory in
his Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, p. 78.] (Found a few times in
Symmachus [Gen. xxvii. 46; Num. xxi. 5; Is. vii. 16;
also Prov. iii. 11 Theod.]; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 2, 2; in
prof. writ. only in Polyb. 4, 19, 10 ro wépmew ras BonOeias
évexaxnoayv they culpably neglected to send aid, [add
Philo de confus. lingg. § 13 (Mang. i. 412, 36) od« éxka-
Koupevos exvauOny |.)*
€y-kadéw [see ev, III. 3]-@; fut. éyxadéow; impf. evexd-
Aovr; [ pres. pass. €yxadovpat]; prop. to call (something) in
some one (ey [i. e. prob. in his case ; or possibly, as rooted
in him ]); hence, to call to account, bring a charge against,
accuse: as in classic Grk. foll. by dat. of the person [cf.
W.§ 30, 9 a.], Acts xix. 38; xxiii. 28, (Sir. xlvi. 19) ; cara
with gen. of the pers. to come forward as accuser against,
bring a charge against: Ro. viii. 33. Pass. to be accused
(cf. B. § 134, 4, [§ 133, 9; yet cf. Mey. on Acts as below,
W.u.s.]); with gen. of the thing: ordcews, Acts xix.
40, (doeBeias és Tov TiBépiov eyxAnOeis, Dio Cass. 58, 4;
act. with dat. of the pers. and gen. of the thing, Plut.
Arist. 10,9; see W.u.s.; Matthiae § 369); epi rov-
Tw, Sy éyxadovpat, unless this is to be resolved into epi
rovray & etc., ace. to the well-known construction éyxa-
Aeivy revit Tt, Acts xxvi. 2; mepi tivos (act. Diod. 11, 83)
Acts xxiii. 29; xxvi. 7, [B. § 133, 9]. (In Grk. writ. fr.
Soph. and Xen. down.) [SyN. see xatnyopéa, fin.] *
€y-kata-Aelrw [ Acts ii. 27, 31, TWH éve.; T also in
Ro. ix. 29, see his note and cf. év, III. 3]; [impf. éykaré-
Aecrov (WHI txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16)]; fut. éycaradeipo;
2 aor. éyxatéhumov; Pass., [pres. éyxaradeimouat]; 1 aor.
€yxareheipOnv; Sept. for ary ; 1. to abandon, desert,
(ev equiv. to & ru, in some place or condition), i. e. to
leave in straits, leave helpless, (colloq. leave in the lurch) :
twa, Mt. xxvii. 46 and Mk. xv. 34 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2;
Heb. xiii. 5; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9; after the Hebr. a1y with
4, ruva els ddov [or 45yv], by forsaking one to let him go
into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27, 31 (not R).
to desert, forsake : twd, 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16; rip emiovvaywyny,
Heb. x. 25. 2. to leave behind among, to leave surviv-
166
eyxpateta
ing: nuiv oméppa, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (Hes. opp. 376,
Thuc., sqq-) *
éy-kat-orxew ['T WH evk., see ev, III. 3], -&; to dwell
among : é€v avrois among them, 2 Pet. ii. 8. (Very rare
in prof. writ. as [Hdt. 4, 204]; Eur. frag. [188] ap. Dion
Chrys. or. 73 fin.; Polyb. 18, 26, 13.) *
éy-kavxdopar [T WH evk., see ev, III. 3]; to glory in:
foll. by év with dat. of the obj. (Ps. li. (lii.) 3; xevi. (xevii.)
7; ev. (cvi.) 47), 2Th.i.4 LTTrWH. (With simple
dat. of thing in eccl. writ. and Aesop’s Fables.) *
ey-kevtpitw [T WH evk., see ev, I1I.3]: 1 aor. éverew
tptoa; Pass., 1 aor. evexevtpicOnv; 1 fut. eyxevtpraOnoopat ;
to cut into for the sake of inserting a scion; to inoculate,
ingraft, graft in, (Aristot. ap. Athen. 14, 68 [p. 653 d.];
Theophr. h. p. 2, 2,5; Antonin. 11, 8): rua, Ro. xi. 17,
19, 23, 24 [ef. W. § 52, 4,5]; in these pass. Paul likens
the heathen who by becoming Christians have been ad-
mitted into fellowship with the people for whom the
Messianic salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees
inserted into a cultivated stock ; [cf. Beet on vs. 24;
B.D. s. v. Olive].*
éykAnpa [see ev, III. 3], -ros, rd, (€yxakew), accusation :
the crime of which one is accused, Acts xxv. 16; €ykAnpa
éxewv, to have laid to one’s charge, be accused of a crime,
Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attic writ. fr. Soph. and Thue.
on:)*
oe see karnyopéw; cf. Isoc. 16, 2 Tas wey yap dixas
imwép Tay idiwy EeyKANMAaAT WY Aayxdvousi, Tas BE KaTNYO-
plas bmep tav Ths wéAcws MpayudTwy To.ovvTat, Kal TAcio
xpdvoy SiarpiBover Thy matépa pov Sia BarAAovTes F KTA.]
éy-KopBoopat [see ey, III. 3], -odpar: [1 aor. mid. évexop-
Booayny]; (fr. év and xouBdw to knot, tie, and this fr.
xopuBos knot, band, (Germ. Schleife), by which two things
are fastened together), to fasten or gird on one’s self; the
éyxopBopa was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which
was fastened to the girdle of the vest [e&wpis], and dis-
tinguished slaves from freemen; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 ray
tarewopp. eyxopBwoacébe, gird yourselves with humility
as your servile garb (€yxéuBpa) i. e. by putting on humil-
ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea
lies in the phrase is shown by C. F. A. Fritzsche, with his
usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 259 sqq.*
éy-korh [ WH eévk. T exk., see ev, IIT. 3], -Hs, 7, (€yxdrro),
properly, a cutting (made in the road to impede an en-
emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12.
(Diod. 1, 32; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ;
Longin. de sublim. 41, 3; [al.].) *
éy-kérrw [in Acts T WH évk., so T in 1 Pet. where R
éxk.; see ev, III. 3]; 1 aor. évexoyva; Pass., [pres. éyxérro-
par]; impf. évexomtdéuny; to cut into, to impede one’s course
by cutting off his way; hence univ. to hinder (Hesych. :
€urrodiCw, SiaxwAvw) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1,
12; in the N. T. with ace. of the obj., 1 Th. ii. 18; foll.
by inf., Gal. v. 7 (see dvaxonmtw) ; inf. preceded by roi,
Ro. xv. 22; eis rd pry eyxdrrecOat Tas mpotevxas bpev, that
ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii.
7; i. q.to detain [A. V. to be tedious unto] one, Acts xxiv.
4 [cf. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq. ].*
éyxpdreaa [see év, III. 3], -as, 4, (eyxparns), self-control,
eyKpaTevouar
Lat. continentia, temperantia, (the virtue of one who mas-
ters his desires and passions, especially his sensual ap-
petites): Acts xxiv. 25; Gal. v. 23 (22); 2 Pet. i. 6.
(Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sir. xviii. 29; 4 Mace. v. 34.) *
éykpatevopnar [see ev, III. 3]; depon. mid.; to be self
controlled, continent (€yxparns) ; to exhibit self-government,
conduct one’s self temperately: [used absol. Gen. xliii.
30]; with dat. of respect, r7 yAooon, Sir. xix. 6 var.;
wayvra, in everything, every way, 1 Co. ix. 25 (ina figure
drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for
the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and
sexual indulgence) ; ovx« éyxpareveo Oat, said of those who
cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Cc. vii. 9. Though this
word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ. that have
come down to us [exc. in Aristot. eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p.
1223°, 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Phry-
nichus ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 25].*
éyxpatis [see ev, III. 3], -és, (patos) ; 1. prop.
equiv. to 6 ev kparet ov, strong, robust: Aeschyl., Thuc.,
sqq: 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing),
with a gen. of the object ; so fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down.
3. mastering, controlling, curbing, restraining : appodicior,
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1; Hdovqs, ibid. 4, 5, 10; éavrov, Plat. ;
absol. (without a gen.), controlling one’s self, temperate,
continent, ({ Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. 1146, 10 sqq.]; Sir.
xxvi. 15; Sap. viii. 21; Philo de Jos. § 11): Tit. i. 8.*
€y-kpivw [T WH evx., see ev, III. 3]: [1 aor. évéxpwa] ;
to reckon among, judge among: twa tim, to judge one
worthy of being admitted to a certain class [A. V. to
number with], 2 Co. x.12. (From Xen. and Plato down.) *
€éy-kptwrTw: 1 aor. evéexpua; to conceal in something,
tl eis te (Diod. 3, 63 ; Apollod. 1, 5,1 § 4); contextually,
to mingle one thing with another: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii.
21 here T Tr WH éxpuwev. (ri run, Hom. Od. 5, 488.) *
éykvos [WH évx., see ev, ILI. 3.], -ov, for the more
usual éykcipor, (fr. ev and kv), big with child, pregnant:
Lk. ii. 5. (Hadt.1, 5 ete.; Diod. 4, 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,
33.) *
€y-xplw [see ev, III. 3]: 1 aor. act. impv. éyxpicov, mid.
(in T Tr) ¢yxpioa [but L WH 1 aor. act. infin. eyxpioat
(Grsb. éyxpica; cf. Veitch s. v. ypia, fin.)]; to rub in,
besmear, anoint; Mid. to anoint for one’s self: rovs épOar-
pous, Rev. iii. 18 [ef. Bttm. 149 sq. (131); W. § 32, 4a.].
(Tob. vi. 9; xi. 7; Strab., Anthol., Epict., al.)*
€y&, gen. euov, enclitic pod; dat. éuoi, enclitic pot; ace.
€ue, enclitic pe; plur. nets, etc.; personal pronoun, J.
1. The nominatives éya and jets, when joined to a verb,
generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis,
as Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (eyo pev... 6 8€);
Mt. iii. 14 (ey. . . Zy@, kai od) ; v. 22, 28, 39, and often;
jueis, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; fpeis x. of bapi-
aio, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are
used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them,
as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2;
Lk. vii. 27; cf. B. §129, 12. i8o0d éyd, °197, behold me,
here am I: Acts ix. 10 (1 S. iii. 8). eyo, like *38, Tam:
Jn. i.23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)].
2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace.
167
eoapila
are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with
prepositions: é€umpooev pov, Jn. i. 15; diam pov, Mt.
iii. 11; loyupdrepds pov, ibid.; tis wou #Wato, Mk. v. 31;
Aeyet por, Rev. v. 5; apynonrai pe, Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9,
(on the accent in these expressions cf. W. § 6, 3; [Lip-
sius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq.; Lob. Path. Elementa
ii. p. 323 sq.; Tdf. N.'T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. lxi. sq.; ed. 8
p- 104]); but dv’ eyod, kar’ euov, mpd euod, etc., adv, ev enol,
mept, Ov’, em’, Kar’, ets eué. The only exception is mpos, to
which the enclitic pé is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 36;
Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely mpds épé, Jn.
vi. 37%, and acc. to LT Tr WH in Acts xxii. 8, 13;
xxiv. 19; [also Acts xxiii. 22T Tr WH; Jn. vi. 35 and
45 T Trtxt.WH; Lk.i.43 TWH; Mt. xix. 14; Jn. vi.
37°, 65, Tdf.; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. WH mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11
LTr; but mpds pe, Mt. iii. 14 Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf.
Lipsius u. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms éyod,
€pol, €ve are used in case of emphasis or antithesis; thus,
epnov, Lk. x. 16 ; ewoi, Jn. vii. 23; x. 38, etc.; éué, Mk. xiv.
7; Jn. vii. 7, ete. 3. Asinclassic Greek, pod and jay
are very often used for the possessive pronouns éuds and
nuetepos [B. § 127, 21]; and when soused, a. they are
generally placed after their substantives, as 6 oikdés pov, 9
(w1 nuaev, etc. — the fuller form éyod only for the sake of
distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 127, 22], as unrépa airoo
kal eyov, Ro. xvi. 13; mictews tuov te Kai eyo, Ro. i. 12.
But b. they are sometimes placed before substantives,
even which have the article, when no emphasis resides
in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22,
7N.1; B.u.s.]: pov rots Adyous, Mt. vii. 24, 26; even
before prepositions, pov tro thy oréynv, Mt. viii. 8; less
frequently nur, as nur thy wéAw, Acts xvi. 20; it is
prefixed for emphasis in nuav 76 woAtrevpa, Phil. iii. 20,
cf. W. u.s.; Rost § 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a
multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth.; [ef. Kriiger, § 47, 9, 12
who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst.
having the art. the reflexive gen., with airod ipsius,
and dAAnAor, requires the attributive position, the
personal gen., and avrov ejus, the partitive posi-
tion ]. 4. ri e€pot (nuiv) cal coi (ipiv); what have 1
(we) to do with thee (you)? [ef. B. 138 (121); W. 211
(198) ; 585 (544) ]}: Mt. viii. 29; Mk. i. 24; v. 7; Lk. viii.
28; Jn.ii.4; Heb. 37) >= 7D; Judg. xi. 12; 2K. iii. 13,
2\S. xvi. 10; 2:Chr. xxxv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 243 also in
classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2; Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16;
Ti npivk. avt@, ibid. 1, 1,16; ri euoi cai avrots, ibid. 1, 27,
13; 22,15. ti yap por, what does it concern me? what
have I to do etc.: 1 Co. v.12; ef. Bos, Ellipses Graec. p.
599, ed. Schaefer; Bnhdy. p. 98; Kriiger § 48, 3, 9;
Kihner ii. 364 sq.; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W.
586 (545))].
eSaditw: Attic fut. edapio [B. 37 (32); W.§ 13,1 ¢.];
(see dagdos); to throw to the ground,—both of cities,
buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men; in
both applications in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) ef. W.
§ 66,2e.]. (Ps. exxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 9; Is. iii. 26; Ezek.
xxxi. 12; Hos. xiv. 1 (xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [Ald.]; rare in
prof. writ., as [ Aristot. probl. 23, 29]; Polyb. 6, 33, 6.)*
édagos
€5acos, -eos (-ovs), Td, bottom, base, ground: imrew eis
ro €Sados, Acts xxii. 7. (Sept. ; in class. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
€Spatos, (rarely fem. -aia [ W. § 11, 1]),-atov, (€dpa seat,
chair) ; 1. stiting, sedentary, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2:
firm, immovable, steadfast, (Eur., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T.
metaph., of those who are fixed in purpose: 1 Co. xv.
58; Col. i. 23; €ornxev év tH kapdia, 1 Co. vii. 37.*
€Spaiwpa, -ros, 7d, (€Spaidw to make stable, settle firmly),
a stay, prop, support, (Vulg. firmamentum) : 1 Tim. iii. 15
[A.V. ground]. (Eccl. writ.) *
*"Etexlas [WH ‘E¢-; L -xeias, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 85],
(™pin strength of Jehovah, i. e. strength given by Je-
hovah; Germ. Gotthard; Sept. ’E¢exias), [gen. -ov, ef. B.
17 (16) no. 8], Hezekiah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1
sqq-; XX. 1 sqq.; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.): Mt. i. 9, 10.*
€BcAo-Opnoxela ['T WH -xia, see I, |, -as, 7, (fr. €6€A@
and 6pnckeia, q. v. (ef. W.100 (95) ]), voluntary, arbitrary
worship, (Vulg. superstitio), [A. V. will-worship], i. e.
worship which one devises and prescribes for himself,
contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which
ought to be directed to Christ ; said of the misdirected
zeal and practices of ascetics: Col. ii. 23; Suid. é@eXo-
Cf. €OeXddovXos,
eGehodovdeia, eGehompo€evos one who acts the part of a
proxenus without having been appointed to the office,
etc. The explanation of others: simulated, counterfeit re-
ligion (cf. in Greek lexicons €6edogirdaogos, ebeAdxwgos,
etc.), does not square so well with the context. (The
word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv.
p- 1880, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. elxi. p. [1460 b.
ed. Migne] 1331, Halle ed.; [ Euseb. h. e. 6,12, 1; Jerome
ep. cxxi. vol. i, 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. 1, 16 [i.
p- 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes eOehome pio o Opnoxeia
to the Pharisees.)*
€BédAw, see Pero.
€Bitw : (€Bos q. v.); to accustom; Pass. to be accustomed ;
pf. ptep. rd eiOiopevoy usage, custom: tod vdpov, pre-
scribed by the law, Lk. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc.,
Xen., Plat., al.) *
ebvapxns, -ov, 6, (fr. €6vos and dpyw), [i. q. founder of
a nation, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 56], an ethnarch, one
set over a people as ruler, but without the authority and
name of king (Leian. in Macrob. § 17 avti é@vdpyou
Bacihevs avayopevbeis Boordpov; so the governor whom
the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called é@vdpyns,
of whom Josephus says, antt. 14, 7, 2, 6s Siouxet re To COvos
kai S.aira kpicers kai cvpBodaiwv emimedetrat Kal mpooray-
paTwy, ws dv rodurelas dpywv avtotedois ; likewise Simon
Maccabaeus, 1 Macc. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2; Joseph. antt.
13, 6,6; cf. [19, 5, 2]; b. j. 2, 6,3): 2 Co. xi. 32 6 €Ovapyns
"Apéra tov Baothéws, the governor of Damascene Syria,
ruling in the name of king Aretas[(q. v.); ef. B. D.s. v.
Governor, 11 ].*
€Bvikds, -7, -ov, (€Ovos) ; 1. adapted to the genius or
customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national: Polyb.,
Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or language of for-
eigners, strange, foreign; so in the grammarians [cf. our
Opnokei: idim OeAnpari o€Bet Td Sood.
168
él, b
‘ gentile ’]. 3. in the N. T. savoring of the nature of
pagans, alien to the worship of the true God, heathenish;
substantively, 6 €Ovuxds the pagan, the Gentile: Mt. xviii.
17; plur., Mt. v. 47 GLT Tr WH; vi. 7; and 3 Jn. 7
Lie Tr WH
eOvikas, adv., (see €Ovxos), like the Gentiles: Gal. ii. 14,
[W. 463 (431). Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5; Diog. Laért.
7, 56]*
€Ovos, -ous, TO} 1. a multitude (whether of men or
of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop,
swarm: €@vos éraipwr, €bvos *Ayatav, €Ovos Aadv, Hom. I. ;
€Ovos pedtooawy, 2, 87; puiawy Ovea, ib. 469. 2. a
multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (76
eOvos 7d Ondv 7) TO appev, Xen. oec. 7, 26): wav EOvos
avOparav, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems
to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt.
xxl. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ¢Ovos émi €Ovos, Mt. xxiv. 7;
Mk. xiii. 8; of dipxovres, of Baotreis Tov ebvav, Mt. xx. 25;
Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people,
Lk. vii. 5; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 85; Acts x.
22); xxiv. 2 (3'), 10's) xxvit 45) xoevill-/192 4. (ra) vn,
like 0°19 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping
the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [cf. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt.
iv. 15 (Tadvdala roy ebvor), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 RG; cf.
Rey. xv. 3 GL T Tr WH mre. after Jn. x. 7], and very
often; in plain contradistinction to the Jews: Ro. iii.
29; ix. 24; (1Co.i.23GL7T Tr WH]; Gal. i 8yete.; ¢
Aads (rod Geov, Jews) cai ra €Ovn, Lk. ii. 32; Acts xxvi.
17, 23; Ro. xv./10. 5. Paul uses ra €6vn even of Gen-
tile Christians: Ro. xi. 18; xv. 27; xvi. 4; Gal. ii. 12
(opp. vs. 13 to of “Iovdato i. e. Jewish Christians), vs. 14;
Eph. iii. 1, cf. iv. 17 [W. § 59, 4 a.; B. 130 (114)].
os, -eos (-ovs), [cf. 700s], ro, fr. Aeschyl. [Agam.
728 (?); better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 39;
€Oos é€ori tev foll. by an inf., Jn. xix. 40; Acts xxv. 16;
Heb. x. 25; contextually, usage prescribed by law, in-
stitute, prescription, rite: Lk.i. 9; ii. 42; Acts xvi. 21;
XXL. 215 xxvi. 3; xxviii. 17; repirepverOa To Cer Maiceas,
Acts xv. 1; a\da€er ra €6n & mapedwxe Movions, Acts vi. 14.*
€0w (of the pres. only the ptep. €@ev is used, in Hom.):
pf. etwOa, to be accustomed, used, wont; [plpf. as impf.
(W. 274 (257 sq.)) etwOew]; foll. by inf.: Mt. xxvii. 15;
Mk. x. 1. Ptep. rd efwOds in a pass. sense, that which is
wont; usage, custom: kata TO eiwOds Ti as one’s custom
is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.*
[et, v: ec and « are freq. interchanged in N. T. spelling.
This is due partly to itacism, partly to the endeavor to mark
the « sound as long or short. See the remarks on this subject
in WH. App. p. 152 sq. (ef. Intr. § 399); Tdf. Proleg. p. 83
sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. et. The use of « for e is noticed s. v. I, 1;
instances in which e: is substituted for : are the foll.: ’ABe:-
Anvh WH; ’Addef T Tr WH; Avreiras T; Apeorayelrns T;
Beviauely LT Tr WH; Aaveld LT Tr WH; ’E¢exelas L;
"EAauelrns TWH; ’EAciodBer WH; 'Eodei TTr WH; Ev-
veixn Rec.**; ‘HAel T Tr WH; ’HaAclas T WH; ‘lepecxd T
WH,;; ‘lepocoAupeirns T WH; "Iopandetrns T WH, so Tr in
Jn. i. 47 (48); "Iwoelas L T Tr WH; Keis L T Tr WH;
Kupeivos Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Aevefs T WH, so Trexc. in Mk.
ii. 14; Aevefrns T WH, so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36; Aeve:tixds
T WH MeaAxel T Tr WH; Nupef T Tr WH; Nivewelrns T
ef 169 ci
WH, so Trin Mt. xii. 41; ’O¢elas L T Tr WH; MesAaros T
WH; Sceuceiv T Tr WH; ToBeidbd WH; XepovBeiv LT
Tr WH (-Biu R G); Xopa¢ely T Tr WH; adeldcia LL; cidéa
T Tr WH; érapxela T WH; emmddera WH; rei 'T ; wavoiet
TWH; faBpei TWH; paBBovvel WH; caBaxdavei T Tr
WH; radcidd WH; raéxerov WH; rpareCeirns T WH.]
el, is first a conditional particle, (f (Lat. s:) ; secondly,
an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne).
I. ef ConpITIONAL (on the difference between it and
édy, see éav, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety
of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. al
with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is
simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to
have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2; ef. 42,
2; (B.220(190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll.
in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (e otras
gor 7 airia... ov cuppeper yaunoa) ; xi. 14; Ro. vii.
16; 20 ; viii. 25; xiv.155 1Co.ix.17; Gal. 1.185 v.18;
Heb. xii. 8; Jas. ii. 8 sq., ete. B. foll. by an Imperative
in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix.17 L Tr
txt. WH txt.]; Mk. iv. 23; vii.16 RG L; Jn.xv.18; Acts
xiii. 15; xxv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15; Jas. iii. 14, ete.; or the
aor., as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31; xix. 17 [RG T Trmrg.
WH nrg. ]; Mk. ix. 22 [ef. B. 55 (48) ]; UK. xxii. 67 (66) ;
1 Co. vii. 9. y. foll. by the Future in the apodosis: Lk.
xvi. 31; Acts v.39 LT Tr WH;; xix. 39; Ro. viii. 11, 13;
2 Co. xi. 30, etc. 8. foll. by the Perfect or the Aorist in
the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is,
something else has or has not occurred: Mt. xii. 26, 28;
Lk. xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 16; Gal. ii. 21; Ro. iv. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 20.
e. foll. by the Imperfect, either with or without dy, where
in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the
apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be
the case. Three passages falling under this head have
a doubtful or disputed text: ei éyere (T Tr WH, for the
RG Leilyere) ... ehéyere av ete. Lk. xvii. 6; ef... pynpo-
vevovow (T Tr, for RG L WH éuvnpdvevov) . . . etyov av,
Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense the writer refers
to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re-
corded in the sacred Scriptures; cf. rovadta déyovtes vs.
14); ef réxva rod ’ABp. core (G LT Tr WH, for R fre)
... emoetre (( WH txt. rou.] R Ladd dy), Jn. viii. 39; cf.
Bttm. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1858 p. 474 sqq. [N. T. Gram.
§ 139, 26; but cf. Mey. on Lk.1.c.]. But 2 Co. xi.4 2...
knpiooe ... aveixerbe GT Tr WH mrg. (avéxeobe L WH
txt.) must not be referred to this head; here Paul in the
protasis supposes something which actually occurred,
in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred
viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con-
tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers.
On the difficulty of the passage cf. Holsten in the Zeit-
schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874,p.1 sqq.; [cf. also B.
226 (195); but W. 306 (287) and Mey. ad loc.]. ¢ with
a question as the apodosis: Mt. vi. 23; Jn. v.47; vil. 23;
viii. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. with the Ind. Future: Mt.
xxvi. 33; Jas. ii. 11 RG; 1 Pet.ii. 20. oc. with the Ind.
Perfect: Jn.xi.12; Actsxvi. 15; Ro. vi. 5; xi. 6 (where
after ef supply Acippa yeyovev fr. what precedes), 2 Co. ii.
5; v.16; vii.14. 4. with the Ind. Aorist,—foll. by the
Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix.8; Ro. iv. 2; xv. 27; foll.
by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11,12; Jn. xviii.
23; 1 Co. iv. 7; ix. 11; foll. by the Aor. in the apodosis,
Rev. xx. 15; by the Impv. in the apodosis, Jn. xviii. 23 ;
xx 15 js Roy xi. 7 sq: 5/1 Dim:sve 9)'105;"Philem.'18y7 by
the Fut. in the apodosis, Jn. xiii. 32; xv. 20; Heb. xii.
25 (where supply ov« éexpevEdpueba in the apodosis). 2.
Not infrequently, when a conclusion is drawn from some-
thing that is quite certain, ei with the Indic. is used argu-
mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to ézei, (ef. the
use of Germ. wenn) [ef. W. 448 (418) ]: Mt. xii. 28; Lk.
RRM GAs) Manville 4 Os Vad vd. OF VANS L sPexl.1G, slios
Col. ii. 20; iii. 1, ete. 3. When it is said what would
have been, or what would be now or in the future, if
something else were or had been, e? is used with the Impf.,
Plpf., and Aor. ind.; in the apodosis it is followed in
direct disc. by av with the impf. or the plpf. or the aor. ;
sometimes dy is omitted, (on the causes of the omission,
see B. § 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques-
tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. ef with the Impf., foll.
in the apodosis by ay with the impf.: Mt. xxiii. 30; Lk.
Vii. 39 (ed odtos Hy mpopyrns, eyiveckev ay if this man were
a prophet, he would know); Jn. v. 46; viii. 42; ix. 41;
xveitoise te Coo mi -8lerGal. we LOkeb: wi. 4-7 GEI.
were etc. there would not be sought ete. viz. in the O. T.
passage quoted vs. 8); by a question in the apodosis:
1 Co. xii. 19; Heb. vii. 11; by dy with the aor., where
the Latin uses the plupf. subjunc.: Jn. xi. 32 («i 7s dbe
if thou hadst been here, ov« dv aréOavé pov 6 adeApos my
brother would not have died [when he did (cf. below) ;
B. § 139, 25 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur-
ation]); Jn. iv. 10; xviii. 30 (e7 jut) Hv odTOS KaKoTroLds, OVK
dv cot maped@xapev adtév, we would not have delivered
him to thee); Acts xviii. 14; by ay with the plupf.: Jn.
xi. 21 (ef Hs Bde . . . ov« dv ereOv7jxer, would not have died
[and be now dead; ef. W. 304 (285) and see above; but
L T Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]); 1 Jn. ii. 19.
b. ei with the Plpf., foll. in the apodosis by dy with the
plpf. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj.:
Mt. xii. 7 (ed eyv@xevre if ye had understood i.e. if ye
knew, ov« dv xareduxdoate tovs avaitiovs ye would not
have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 and Lk. xii.
39, (ef 70ec if he had perceived i. e. if he knew, éypnydpn-
cev dv he would have watched, sc. before the thief had
approached [Tr txt. WH om. dv in Lk. 1. c.]) ; Jn. iv. 10;
viii. 19; xiv. 7[RGL]. c. with the Aor. in the same
sense as the Lat. plpf. subjunc.: €2 e560n vépos . . . dvras
dv éx vopov Av 4 Sixacoovvy if a law had been given, right-
eousness would in truth come from the law, Gal. iii. 21;
el a’rovs “Inoovs xatéemavoev if Joshua had given them
rest, ov« dy wept GAAns eAader he would not be speaking,
sc. in the passage quoted, Heb. iv. 8; apodosis without
ay, Jn. xv. 22, see av I. 3 p. 33 sq. 4. As in classic
Greek, ei with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing
wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where or
might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is
either not quite certain, or, although certain, yet in ac-
cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre-
et 170 et
sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthiae ii. p. 1474
sq.; Kiihner ii. p. 887 sq.; [Jelf § 804, 9]; W. § 60, 6; [B.
§ 139, 52]). Thus it is joined — to the verb @avpdgw : eav-
pacev, ei 7On TeOvnxe, for the matter had not yet been in-
vestigated; hence it is added emnp@rnoev aitdv, et 75n
[RG TTrmrg. WH mrg. maka} ameOaver, Mk. xv. 44;
pty Oavudcere, ef pucet tpas o Kdopos (the thing is certain)
1 Jn. iii. 13; to the phrase dmioroyv kpiverar: Acts xxvi.
8, (with mapadof£ov preceding, Leian. dial. mort. 13, 1) ;
to caAddv éorw and Avorredet: Mk. ix. 42 and Lk. xvii. 2
(Mt. xviii. 6 has cupdéepe, va); Mt. xxvi. 24 and Mk.
xiv. 21; topéya éori: 1 Co. ix. 11 (on which see 8 below);
2 Co. xi. 15; ti O€dea, ef 75 avnhOy (76 wip), how would I
if (i. e. that) it were already kindled (but it has not yet
been kindled), Lk. xii. 49 (al. al., but cf. Meyer ad loc.; [so
B. 1. c.; ef. W. 448 (418); see tis, le. y. fin.]; Sir. xxiii.
14 BeAnoets, ei pt) eyevvnOns; [in addition to the other inter-
pretations noticed by Win. and Mey. Il. cc. mention may
be made of that which takes 6éA@ as subjunc.: what am
J to choose if (as I may well assume) it has already been
xindled; cf. Green, ‘Crit. Notes’ ad loc.]). 5. Con-
trary to Greek usage, in imitation of the Hebr. O8, et with
the Indie. is so used in oaths and asseverations that by
aposiopesis the formula of imprecation [constituting
the apodosis] is suppressed (W. § 55 fin.; B. § 149, 4):
Gpny A€eyo piv, et SoOnoera . . . cnuetov (fully expressed,
‘may God punish me, if it shall be given,’ i.e. it shall by
no means be given), Mk. viii. 12; Soca, ei eivehevoovrat
eis Tv Katdnavoiv pov (fully, ‘let my name no longer be
Jehovah, if they shall enter’ etc.), Heb. iii. 115; iv. 3, fr.
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11 Sept. (Hebr. ox, Gen. xiv. 23; Num.
xiv. 30; 1S. xiv. 45, ete.; we have the full expression
in 1 S. iii. 17; Cant. fi. 7, ete.). 6. Sometimes, as in
classic Grk., after a protasis with ef and the Indic., the
apodosis is suppressed on account of mental agitation
and left to be supplied by the reader or the hearer from
the context, (cf. W. 599 sq. (557)): ef Bovder mapeveyxetv
To moTHptov tovTo (sc. mapéeveyxe [but here L Tr WH
adopt the impv. in place of the inf.; yet cf. B. 396
(339) ]), Lk. xxii. 42; ei d€ rvedpa eAadnoev ate 7) ayye-
Aos, supply in place of an apodosis the question what
then? Acts xxiii. 9 (the apod. added in Rec., pr Geo-
paxGpev, is spurious); ef éyvws... 7a mpos eipnyny cov,
sc. emioteves dv éyuoi, Lk. xix. 42 [B. 396 (339) ]. th
The conditional ei is joined with the O ptative, to in-
dicate that the condition is merely thought of or
stated as a possibility, (ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.
491 sqq.; W. 293 (275) sq.; B. § 139, 24). No example
of this construction is found in the Gospels; very few
in the rest of the N.T. a. univ. in short intercalated
clauses: ei rvxor if it so chance, it may be, (see ruvyxava,
2), 1 Co. xiv. 10; xv. 87; ef O€Xoe TO OeAnpa Tov Beod, 1
Pet. iii. 17 (Rec. Oder). b. where it indicates that
something may occur repeatedly (cf. Klotz 1. e. p.
492 sq.): et kat macyorre, 1 Pet. iii. 14 [cf. W.u.s.]. c.
where the condition represents the mind and judgment
of others: eie 4» €Bovdevovro [R G-cavto], ef divawro
eEaoa [WH txt. exoaoa (q. v.)] Td wAotoy, into which
bay [or rather ‘upon which beach’; see é£w6éw] they
determined to run the ship, if they could; as though the
navigators had said among themselves, ¢£@oopev, ef Suvd-
peda, Acts xxvii. 39; so also ef rt €xorev mpds pe, if they
think they have anything against me, Acts xxiv. 19.
8. with the Subjunctive, when it is assumed that
something may take place, but whether it will in reality is
unknown before the event, in order to make the event
seem to be more certain than if éay were used (Klotz
l.c. p. 500 sqq.; W. 294 (276) sq.; B. § 139, 22): ei...
Oepiowper, 1 Co. ix. 11 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, [Lchm. mrg.; al.
-souev]; (Sept. Gen. xliii. 3 sq.; Sir. xxii. 26; 4 Macc.
vi. 20). But see III. below, under ei yy, ef pyre, et ras,
€lre .. . €lTE, EL TIS.
II. ei INTERROGATIVE, whether. ‘The conditional
particle gets this force if a question is asked about any-
thing, whether it is or is not so, and that about which
the question is put is uttered as it were conditionally ”
(Klotz 1. c. p. 508; [W. § 57,1; Bttm. 248 (214) sqq ;
254 (218) sq.]). 1. As in Grk. writ. in an indirect
question after verbs of seeing, asking, deliberating,
knowing, saying, etc. a. with the Indic. Present:
as ovd’ ei mvevpa Gyov Eatw, nKovoawev (prop., acc. to
the conditional force of the particle, ‘if there is [i. e. has
appeared, been given; cf. eiui, I. 2] a Holy Spirit, we did
not even hear’), Acts xix. 2; iSapev, ei pyerar, Mt. xxvii.
49; Mk. xv. 36; Bovdeverae [T WH L mrg. -cerac], «i
duvarés eotw, Lk. xiv. 31; iva etrns, ei od ef, Mt. xxvi.
63; [wa yoo rny Soxiuny tpav ei (WH mrg. 7) . . danxooi
éare, 2 Co. ii. 9 (see WH. Intr. § 404)]; after ov« oida,
Jn. ix. 25; after xpivare, Acts iv. 19; Soxuacere [(?),
metpacere |, 2 Co. xiii. 5. b. with the Indic. Future
[ef. W. 300 (282); B. § 139, 61 b.]: 8denOnrt, et apa
apeOnoerai oor, Acts viii. 22; ri oidas, ef... cwoets, 1
Co. vii. 16 ; mapernpour, ei Oeparevores | Tdf. -revee], Mk. iii.
2 and in Lk. vi. 7 [RG WH mrg.]; 7A6ev (se. to see), ef
dpa tievtpnoe, Mk. xi. 13. cc. with the Indic. Aorist:
ovK otda, €t Tiva GAXov €Bartica, whether I baptized, 1 Co.
i. 16; éemnpwtnoay, et mada [L Tr txt. WH txt. 7] are-
6avev, whether he were long dead, Mk. xv. 44; eizé pou,
ei... amédoc6e, Actsv. 8. d. with the Subjunctive
Aorist [ef. B. 255 sq. (220); W. 298 (280) sq.]: Stake,
ei kai katraAdB@ I press on (sc. metp@pevos Or oKoTrar, try-
ing to see), whether I may also lay hold, Phil iii. 12.
So si is used in Latin, e. g. Nep. vit. Hann. 8 Hannibal
... Africam accessit in finibus Cyrenaeorum (sc. exper-
turus), si forte Carthaginienses ad bellum possent induci ;
Caes. b. g. 1, 8, 4 si perrumpere possent, conati; add
Caes. b. g. 2, 9, 1. Cf. Kiihner ii. p. 1032 sq.; [Jelf
§ 877b.]. 2. Contrary to the usage of Grk. auth.,
like the Hebr. o8 and interrog. 1, it is used in the Sept.
and the N. T. (esp. by Luke) also in direct ques-
tions (cf. the colloq. use of the Germ. 0b; e. g. ob ich’s
wohl thun soll?) ; cf. W. § 57, 1; B. 248 (214), and, in
opposition to those who have striven to absolve the sa-
cred writers from this misuse of the particle (esp. Fritz-
sche and Meyer [see the latter’s note on Mt. xii. 10 and
Lk. xiii. 23; he quotes with approval the language of
ei 171 et
Ast (Lexicon Platon. vol. i. 601), ‘dubitanter inter-
rogat, ita ut interrogatio vide atur directa esse’]), cf.
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 30 sqq. : —etré
Tbs aUT@, KUpte, et dALyou of cw {dpevor; Lk. xiii. 23; Kvpre,
ei mata€opev ev paxaipa [-py T Tr WH]; Lk. xxii. 49;
kupte, ef. . . amoxabtoravers T. Baoweiav; Acts i. 6; cf. be-
sides, Mt. xii. 10; xix. 3; Mk. viii. 23 (acc. to the read-
ing of [Tdf. 2, 7} Tr [mrg. WH txt.] ef re Brerers for
RGLTTr txt. WH mrg. Breer) ; Acts xix. 2, etc. (Gen.
Xvil. 17; xiii. 6; 1S. x. 24, etc.; in the O. T. Apocr. 2
Mace. vii. 7; xv. 3; 4 Macc. xviii. 17 fr. Ezek. xxxvii.
3 Sept.; Tob. v. 5).
III. ei with other particles and with the indef. pron.
ths, Th. 1. ei dpa, see dpa, 1. 2. eye, see ye, 3 c.
3. ef d€ Kai, a. but ifalso, so that cai belongs to some
word that follows: Lk. xi. 18 (but if Satan also). b.
but though, but even if, so that cai belongs to e?: 1 Co. iv.
7; 2Co. iv. 3; v.16[RG; al. om. dé]; xi. 6; see 6 below.
4. ci dé pn, but if not; ifit is or were otherwise, [B. 393
(336 sq.), ef. 345 (297) ; W. as below]: Jn. xiv. 2 (ei dé
pn, SC. ovtas Av), 11 (et dé pn, sc. euol morevere, i. e. MY
words). As in these passages so generally the phrase
stands where a word or clause must be repeated in
thought from what immediately precedes; it thus has
the force of the Lat. alioquin, otherwise, or else, [W. 583
(543)]: Rev. ii. 5, 16; also after negative declarations,
Mk. ii. 21 sq.; cf. Matthiae § 617 b. 5. ei dé pnye, see
yé, 3d. 6. eixai, a. if even, if also, (cf. et dé kai, 3 a.,
[and 7 below]): 1 Co. vii. 21 [cf. Mey. ad loc.; Bp.
Lghtft. on Philem. p. 324]; 2 Co. xi.15. b. though, al-
though: Lk. xi. 8; 2 Co. iv. 16; vii. 8, 12; Phil. ii. 17;
Col. ii. 5 [ei yap cai]; Heb. vi. 9; with the optat. 1 Pet.
iii. 14; see I. 7 b. above. 7. Kai ei, even if: Mk. xiv.
29 [(T Tr WH ef cat]; 1 Pet. iii. 1; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 519
[who says, “In ef xai the conditional particle « has
the greater force; in xai ef the conjunctive particle
cai. Hence kai ei is used of what is only assumed to
be true; ei cai, on the other hand, of what is as it is said
to be.” Biaumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 151) says, “In
ei kai the xai naturally belongs to the conditional clause
and is taken up into it, 7f even; in the combination kat
ei the xai belongs to the consequent clause, even if.
Sometimes however the difference disappears.” Kriiger
(§ 65, 5,15): “with xai e?, the leading clause is regarded
as holding under every condition, even the one
stated, which appears to be the most extreme; with e?
cai the condition, which may also come to pass, is re-
garded as a matter of indifference in reference
tothe leading clause ;” Sauppe (on Dem. Ol. ii. § 20) is
very explicit: “al ei and ei cai both indicate that some-
thing conflicts with what is expressed in the leading
clause, but that that is (or is done) notwithstanding. «ai
«i, however, represents the thing adduced in the condi-
tional sentence to be the only thing conflicting ; but when
the conditional particle precedes (ei cai), the represen-
tation is that something which is (or may be) accom-
panied by many others (xai) conflicts ineffectually. Ac-
cordingly the phrase xai ef greatly augments the force of
what follows, ei cai lays less emphasis upon it; although
it is evident that ef cai can often be substituted for nai
ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on
Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley,
Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. ef wn, a. in a conditional
protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses
as the simple ei, see I. above, if not, unless, except, [W.
477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33;
xv. 22,24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire
following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been
said, only, save that, (Lat. nist quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk.
vi.5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition ei py
€xdoT@ xTA. strives to prevent any one in applying what
had been said a little while before, viz. o¥ SeSovAwrar. . .
ev rotovrors to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironi-
cal answers, unless perchance, save forsooth that, (Kih-
ner § 577, 7; [Jelf § 860, 5 Obs.]): ef wy xpy Cope Krr.
2 Co. iii. 1 Rec. cc. ei wn very often coalesce into one
particle, as it were, which takes the same verb as the
preceding negation: unless, i. q. except, save, [Kiuhner
§ 577, 8; B. 359 (308)]; | a. univ.: Mt. xi. 27; xii. 39;
Mik: ii. 265; viti-14; Jn. ii. 13; Ro. vil. 7 59 xiii. 1,850.
Co. viii. 4; xii. 3; 2 Co. xii. 5, ete. as in classic Greek,
povos, povov, is added pleonastically: Mt. xvii. 8; xxi.
19; xxiv. 36 ; Acts xi. 19; Phil. iv. 15; Rev. xiii. 17, etc.
B. after negatives joined to nouns it is so used as to re-
fer to the negative alone (hence many have regarded it
as used for dAAd [i.e. as being not exceptive but ad-
versative]), and can be rendered in Lat. sed tantum,
but only: Mt. xii. 4 (ovn éfdv qv aire payeiv ovb€ rois per
avrov, ei pr Tois iepedor povors, as if ovx eLdv nv payeiv
alone preceded) ; Lk. iv. 26 sq.; Ro. xiv. 14; Rev. ix.
4; xxi. 27 (éav pris so used in Gal. ii. 16; on Gal. i. 19
see IaxwBos, 3); cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 195;
[see eav, I. 3c. and reff.]._-y. when preceded by the in-
terrogative ris in questions having a negative force: Mk.
teh ake Jee o: x1) 15s 1. Cori Ds 2. Conn, 2 xa
13; Heb. 185 1 Jn.ii. 225, v.5; (Xen-.cecs9, 1; Ar-
stph. eqq.615). 6. with other conjunctions: «i pi iva,
Jn. x. 105; ef yy drav, Mk. ix. 95 ri eorwy, ef yn dre etc., 2
Co. xii. 13; Eph. iv. 9. e. it has its own verb, and
makes a phrase by itself: 6 ovx« €orw GAXo, ef py TwEes
elow of Tapagcovtes tas Which means nothing else, save
that there are some who trouble you, Gal. i. 7 [so
Winer (Com. ad loc.) et al.; but see Meyer]. . exros
ei pn, arising from the blending of the two expressions
ei pr and eéxros ei, like the Lat. nist si equiv. to praeter-
quam si, except in case, except: 1 Tim. v. 19; with the
indic. aor. 1 Co. xv. 2; with the subjune. pres. 1 Co. xiv.
5; (Leian. de luctu c. 19; dial. meret. 1, 2, ete.). Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 459; W.§ 65, 3c.; [B. indexs. v. éxrés
ei pn ]- 9. ef pny, assuredly, surely, in oaths: Heb. vi.
14 LT Tr WH (for RG?# pny [q. v.]) and several times
in Sept. as Ezek. xxxiii. 27; xxxiv. 8; [cf. xxxvi. 5;
XXXvili. 19; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 23], ete.; here, if ef did not
come from # by itacism, ef pny must be explained as‘a
confusion of the Hebraistic ef yn (see I. 5 above) and
the Grk. formula of asseveration 4 pny; cf. Bleek on Heb.
et LT
vol. ii. 2 p. 248 sqq., and what Fritzsche says on the
other side, Com. on Bar. ii. 29; Judith i. 12; [cf. Kneu-
cker on Bar. 1. c.; B. 359 (808); Tdf. Proleg. p.59; WH.
App. p. 151; B. D.s. v. New Testament, I. 31]. 10.
ei py Tt Or ptt, unless in some respect, unless perchance,
unless indeed : ironically, with the indic. pres. 2 Co. xiii.
5; hesitatingly, with the subjunc. aor. Lk. ix. 13; cf.
Meyer ad loc. [also W. 294 (276); B. 221 (191)]; ef pq
tu dv: 1 Co. vii. 5, see Gv, TV. 11. e? od (fully discussed
by W. § 55, 2c. and B. 345 (297) sqq.), ifnot; this com-
bination is used much more frequently in the N. T. than
in the more elegant Grk. auth.; it differs from ei 7 in
this, that in the latter yn belongs to the particle ei, while
in e? od the ov refers to some following word and denies
it emphatically, not infrequently even coalescing with it
into asingleidea. a. when the idea to which ov belongs
is antithetic a. toa positive term, either preceding
or following: ei d5€ od porxevers hovevers Sé, Jas. ii. 11
[in R G the fut.]; ef yap 6 Beds... ovK edeicaro,...
G\N\a... mapedaxey eis kpiow, 2 Pet. ii. 4 sq.3 €¢ Kat ov
Boo... dud ye. dace, Lk. xi. 8; ef od Tod... €t O€
moe, JN. X. 37 sq.3 ef yap EMLOTEVETE ...,€ OC... OV TH
otevere, Jn. v. 46 sq.; add, Mk. xi. 26 RGL; Ro. viii.
9; 1 Co. ix. 2; xi.6; Jas. iii. 2. B. to some other idea
which is negative (formally or virtually): ei... ov«
dxovovow,ovde ... meccOnoovra, Lk. xvi. 31; ef... ovx
epeiaato, ovde cod etoera | Rec. -onrar}, Ro. xi. 21; add,
1 Co. xv. 13, 15-17; 2 Th. iii. 10; foll. in the apodosis
by a question having the force of a negative: Lk. xvi.
ll sq.; Jn. iii. 12; 1 Tim. ili.5. sy. the od denies with
emphasis the idea to which it belongs: xaddv jv avira, ei
ovk eyevyyOn, good were it for him not to have been born,
Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. 8. the whole emphasis is
placed on the negative itself: ei od ovk ef 6 Xpiords, Jn.
i. 25. b. the ov coalesces, as it were, with the word to
which it belongs into a single idea: ei d€ ov« éyxparevor-
rat, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9; ef tus raév iio
ov mpovoet [or -etrae ‘T Tr txt. WH mrg.], neglects, 1
Tim. v. 8; add, Lk. xiv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. xx. 15,
ete. 12. ef obv, if then: Mt. vi. 23; vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13,
36; Jn. xiii. 14; xviii.8; Acts xi. 17; Col. iii. 1; Philem.
17. [On ei per odv see per II. 4. ] 13. cimep [so TWH
(exe. in 2 Co. v. 3 mrg.), but L Tr ef wep; cf. W. 45;
Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 123], (e¢ and zép, and this ap-
parently from zepi), prop. if on the whole; if only, pro-
vided that, is used “of a thing which is assumed to be,
but whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt ” (Herm.
ad Vig. p. 831, [so W. 448 (417); but ef. Baéumlein,
Griech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 bot.) ; A/otz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. etye (in ye, 3 c.) and the reff. to
Mey., Lghtft., Ellic., there given]): Ro. viii. 9,17; 1 Co.
vill. 5; xv. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L T Tr WH e?); by
a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about
which there is no doubt: 2 Th. i. 6; Ro. iii. 30 L T Tr
WH; 2 Co. v. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 14. ef mows [L Tr
WH] or eizas [G T], if in any way, if by any means, if
possibly: with the optat. pres. (see I. 7 above), Acts
xxvii. 12; interrogatively, with the indic. fut. Ro. i. 10;
2 €lOw
with the subjune. aor., so that before ei the word cxomap
or metp@pevos must be mentally supplied (see I. 1d
above): Ro. xi. 14; Phil. iii. 11. 15s j\ciré .| ssvelre
a. whether... or [as disjunc. conjunc., sive ... sive; cf.
W. 440 (409 sq.) ; B. 221 (191) ], without a verb follow-
ing: Ro. xii. 6-8; 1 Co. iii. 22; viii. 5; 2 Co. v. 98q.;
Phil.is:18, 20,27 3.2 Dh; wad be iColo1. 16, 20% d-Pet ni
13 sq.; etre odv... etre, 1 Co. xv. 11; foll. by the indice.
pres., 1 Co. xii. 26; xiii. 8; 2 Co. i. 6; foll. by the sub-
junc. pres. 1 Th. v. 10, where the use of the subjune.
was occasioned by the subjunc. ¢(jo@pev in the leading
clause; cf. W. 294 (276); B.221(191). b. whether...or
[as indirect interrogatives, utrum...an; cf. B. 250 (215)]
(see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Matthiae p. 1476 sq.) : after
ovk oida, 2 Co. xii. 2sq. 16. ef Tus, ef ru: exx. of this
combination have already been given among the preced-
ing; here may be added et tus érepos, et re €repov, and if
(there be) any other person or thing, — a phrase used as
a conclusion after the mention or enumeration of several
particulars belonging to the same class (in the classics
el Tis GAXos, €i Kal Tis GAXoOs, Kal Et TL GAXo, etc., in Hdt.,
Xen., Plat., al.): Ro. xiii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10; e¢ ts with
subjune. pres. Rev. xi. 5 Rec.; with the subjune. aor.,
ibid. T Tr WH txt.
[elye, see yé, 3c. ]
elSéa, -as, 7, Mt. xxviii. 3 T Tr WH, a poet. form for idéa,
q: v-[ef. WH. App. p. 153], (Bar. vi. [ep. Jer.] 62; Arstph.
Thesm. 438 var.). Cf. B.5; [W. 48 (47); see e, ¢].*
elSos, -ovs, Td, (EIAQ), in Sept. chiefly for WNW) and
4NA; prop. that which strikes the eye, which is exposed
to view ; 1. the external appearance, form, figure,
shape, (so fr. Hom. down): Jn. v. 37; copartix@ €idet,
Lk. iii. 22; 76 eidos Tod mpoowmov airod, Lk. ix. 29; dia
eiSovs, aS encompassed with the visible appearance (of
eternal things), (see dua, A. I. 2), 2 Co. v. 7, com. ex-
plained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth.: im Schauen) ;
but no ex. has yet been adduced fr. any Grk. writ. in
which eidos is used actively, like the Lat. species, of vision ;
(oTdpa kata ordpa, ev et det, kal ov Ot dpaydtev kat évv-
mviwv, Clem. homil. 17, 18; cf. Num. xii. 8 Sept.). 2;
form, kind : ao mavrds €iSous movnpod amexeoe, i. e. from
every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Th. v. 22 [cf. rovnpés, sub
fin.]; (Joseph. antt. 10, 3, 1 wav eidos movnpias. The
Grks., esp. Plato, oppose 70 eidos to ro yevos, as the Lat.
does species to genus. Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 2).*
elSw, iw, Lat. video, [Skr. vid, pf. véda know, vind-a-
mi jind, (cf. Vedas); Curtius § 282], an obsol. form of
the present tense, the place of which is supplied by épdo.
The tenses coming from ¢iS@ and retained by usage form
two families, of which one signifies to see, the other to
know.
I. 2 aor. eidov, the com. form, with the term. of the
1 aor. (see reff. s. v. dmrépyopat, init.) ida, Rev. xvii. 3
L,6 LT Tr; 1 pers. plur. eiSayev, LT Tr WH in Acts
iv. 20; Mk. ii. 12; Tr WH in Mt. xxv. 37; WH in Mt.
xxv. 38; Mk. ix. 38; Lk. ix. 49; 3 pers. plur. eda»,
T WH in Lk. ix. 832; Tr WHin Lk. x. 24; Acts vi. 15;
xxviii. 4; T Tr WH in Mk. vi. 50; LT Tr WH in Jn
€lOw
i. 39 (40); Acts ix.35; xii. 16; WH in Mk. vi. 33; add
iSav Tdf. in Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; iSov (an Epic form,
cf. Matthiae i. p. 564; [Veitch p. 215]; very freq. in
Sept. and in 1 Mace., ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 54; on
the freq. interchange of iSov and eidoy in codd., ef. Jacobs
ad Achill. Tat. 2,24; [WH. App. pp. 162, 164; Tdf-
Sept. Proleg. p. lx.; N.T. Proleg. p. 89; B. 39 (34)]),
MdtomyWey. av. 1) vi. 1, 2,558,912: vil.l,ete.; 3 pers.
sing. tev, Tdf. in Lk. v. 2; Rev.i. 2; 2 pers. plur. tere,
Phil. i. 30 Rec.; 3 pers. plur. (Sov, Tdf. in [Lk. ii. 20];
Jn. xix. 6; subjunc. iS; impv. ide (Attic ide, cf. W. § 6,
1a.; [B.62 (54); Géttling, Accentl. 52]), [2 pers. plur.
tere, Jn. i. 39 (40) RGL]; inf. deiv; ptcp. dor; (Sept.
mostly for 781, sometimes for 71M and yy"); fo see (have
seen), be seeing (saw), i.e. 1. to perceive (with the
eyes; Lat. conspicere, Germ. erblicken); a. univ. twa
or ri: Mt.ii.2; iv.16; xiv. 14; xxviii. 6; Mk.i.10, 16;
ii. 14; Lk. v. 26; vii. 22; Jn.i. 47 (48) sq.3 vi. 26; xix.
6; Acts ix. 35; xii. 16; Gal. i.19; 1 Tim. vi. 16, and very
often. ovd¢rore ovtws eiSouev we never saw in such fash-
ion, i.e. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 12, old Germ.
also hat man nicht gesehen, seit etc.; cf. Kuinoel ad Mat.
p- 280 ed. 4. i8ety re and dxovoai 71 are conjoined in Lk.
vii. 22; Acts xxii. 14; 1 Co. ii.9; Jas. v.11; idety and
ideiv re are also used by those to whom something is pre-
sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates
that he saw this or that: Rev. i. 12,17; iv. 1 [here eidov
x. Sov a formula peculiar to Rev. ; see idov, sub fin.]; v.
1 sq. 6, 11; vi. 9; vii. 1, 9, ete.; Jn. xii. 41; iSety dpapa,
Acts x. 17; xvi. 10; iSeiv ev dpayart, Acts ix. 12 [RG];
x. 3; é€v ry opaoe, Rev. ix. 17; elliptically idety re &k Twos
sc. éxrropevbev, Rev. xvi. 13, cf. i. 16; Hebraistically (on
which see W. § 45, 8; B. § 144, 30) id8av efdSov I have
surely seen: Acts vii. 34 after Ex. ili. 7. Frequent in
the historical books of the N. T. is the ptep. idav, iSovres,
continuing the narrative, placed before a finite verb, and
either having an acc. added, as in Mt. ii. 10; iii. 7; v.1;
Willy Bebo We, Wye RP ab, ONS I Ree pb SIR dhne ye Ge
vi. 14; Acts xiii. 12; xiv. 11, etc.; or the ace. is omitted,
as being evident from the context: Mt. ix. 8, 113 xxi.
20; Mk. x.14; Lk. i. 12; ii.17; Acts iii. 12; vii. 31, etc.
b. with the ace. of a pers. or a thing, and a ptep. [cf.
W. §45,4a.]: Mt. iii. 7,16; viii.l4; Mk.i. 16; vi. 33;
Lk. 1x49; xxi. 2; Jn. i. 33, 47 (48) sq.; Acts iii. 9);
xi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 10; 1 Jn. v.16; Rev. ix. 1, and often.
ce. foll. by dru: Mk. ii. 16 L T Tr WH; ix. 25; Jn. vi.
22, 24, ete. dd. foll. by an indirect question with the
indic.: with ris, Lk. xix. 3; with ri, Mk. v. 14; with
mnyAdtkos, Gal. vi. 11. — e. epyou kal ie, a formula of invi-
tation, the use of which leaves the object of the seeing to
be inferred by the hearers from the matter under consid-
eration: Jn. xi. 34 (35); i. 46 (47) (here i8e is equiv. to
by seeing learn, sc. that Jesus is the Messiah), and Grsb.
in Rev. vi. 1,5; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) (where T Tr WH
épx: x. OeoOe). The Rabbins use the phrases "iM) 8
and 81) 82 to command attention. f. ideiv used
absol. and moreve are contrasted in Jn. xx. 29. Pf
like the Lat. video, to perceive by any of the senses: Mt.
173
eldw
xxvii. 54; Mk. xv. 39; Lk. xvii. 15. 3. univ. fo per-
ceive, notice, discern, discover: thy riarw avtav, Mt. ix. 2;
tas evOupnoers altar, ib. 4 (where L Tr WH txt. cides
for idov) ; r. Stadoyopor ths kapdias avTav, Lk. ix. 47 [T
WH txt. Tr mrg. eidas]; ide with acc. of the thing, Ro.
xi. 22; foll. by ov, Mt. xxvii. 3, 24; Acts xii.3; xiv. 9;
xvi. 19; Gal. ii. 7, 14; ie, drt, Jn. vii. 52; (dety teva, Gre,
Mk. xii. 34 [Trbr. the acc. ]. 4. fo see, i. e. to turn
the eyes, the mind, the attention to anything; a. to
pay atiention, observe: foll. by ei interrog. Mt. xxvii. 49 ;
by woramos, 1 Jn. iii. 1. b. mepi tuvos (cf. Lat. videre de
aliqua re), to see about something [ A. V. to consider of },
i.e. to ascertain what must be done about it, Acts xv. 6.
c. to inspect, examine: ri, Lk. xiv. 18. d. tuva, to look
at, behold : Jn. xxi. 21; Mk. viii. 33. 5. to experience,
ri, any state or condition [cf. W. 17]: as rév @avarov, Lk.
ii. 26; Heb. xi. 5, (Joseph. antt. 9, 2, 2 [oidev]), cf. Jn.
viii. 51 (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 49); ryv dtapOopay, to
pass into a state of corruption, be dissolved, Acts ii. 27,
31; xiii. 35-37, (Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10); tHv Baw. tr. Beod,
to partake of salvation in the kingdom of God, Jn. iii.
3; mévOos, Rev. xviii. 7; tiv d0€av rod Oeod, by some mar-
vellous event get a signal experience of the beneficent
power of God, Jn. xi. 40; orevoxwpias, 1 Mace. xiii. 3,
(dddxou xdpw, Hom. Il. 11, 243); on the same use of the
verb M81 and the Lat. videre, cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii.
p- 1246. #yepav, to live to see a day (a time) and en-
joy the blessings it brings: nuépas aya@ds, 1 Pet. iii. 10
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; rv quépav éunv (Christ’s lan-
guage) the time when I should exercise my saving power
on earth, Jn. viii. 56; etd sc. r. qu. eunv, from the abode
of the blessed in paradise he in spirit saw my day, ibid.
(see dyaAAtda, sub fin.) ; emOupnoere piav Tay npepOv.. .
iSeiv, ye will wish that even a single day of the blessed
coming age of the Messiah may break upon your
wretched times, Lk. xvii. 22; so in Grk. writ., esp. the
poets, Fuap, nuepav ideiv, in Latin videre diem; ct. Kuinoel
on Jn. vill. 56. 6. with acc. of pers. to see i. e. have
an interview with, to visit: Lk. viii. 20; Jn. xii. 21; Acts
xvi. 40; xxviii. 20; Ro. i. 11; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Phil. i. 27;
1 Th. iii. 6; 2 Tim.i.4; 3 Jn. 14; 76 rpdowmdv twos: 1 Th.
ii. 17; iii. 10, (Leian. dial. d. 24, 2 [ef. Rutherford on Babr.
11, 9]); with an ace. of place, to visit, go to: Acts xix. 21.
[Syn.: ‘When efdoy, ‘div are called “ momentary preter-
ites,” it must not be supposed that thereby a quickly-past
action is designated ; these forms merely present the action
without reference to its duration.... The un-
augmented moods, too, are not exclusively past, but present
or future as well, — the last most decidedly in the imperative.
Now it is obvious that when a perception is stated without
regard to its duration, its form or mode cannot have
prominence; hence ideiv is much less physical than dpav.
ideiv denotes to perceive with the eyes; épav [q. v.], on the
other hand, to see, i. e. it marks the use and action of the
eye as the principal thing. Perception as denoted by idety,
when conceived of as completed, permits the sensuous ele
ment to be forgotten and abides merely as an activity of the
soul; for olda, eidévat, signifies not “to have seen,” but “to
know.”’ Schmidt ch. xi. Comp.: am-, ém-, mpo-, cuv-, bmep-
etdow.|
€ld@
II. 2 pf. oida, ofdas (1 Co. vii. 16; Jn. xxi. 15, for the
more com. oi 6a), otSapev (for toner, more com. in Grk.),
otdate (tore, the more usual classic form, is found only in
Eph. v.5 G LT Tr WH and Heb. xii. 17, [ prob. also in
Jas. i. 19 ace. to the reading of L'T' Tr WH; but see be-
low]), otSace (and once the Attic tvao1, Acts xxvi. 4),
impv. tore, once, Jas. i. 19 L T Tr WH, [but see above],
subjune. eida, inf. efdévar, ptcp. eidas, etdvia (Mk. v. 33;
Acts v. 7); plpf. #dew, 2 pers. everywhere des, 3 pers.
7e, plur. 2 pers. 7decre, 3 pers. 75evoay (for the more com.
noecay [ Veitch p. 218; B. 43 (38)]); fut. e’djow (Heb.
viii. 11) ; cf. W. 84 (81); B. 51 (44); Sept. chiefly for
yv; like the Lat. novi it has the signification of a pres-
ent to know, understand ; and the plpf. the signif. of an
impf.; [cf. W. 274 (257)].
1. to know: with acc. of the thing, Mt. xxv. 13; Mk.
ey 1M) ink os chs Sati Saha Ue Nai as leo ay (fo J
Co. ii. 2; Rev. ii. 2, 9, ete.; rodro [ Rec. ; al. ravra] foll.
by dre ete. Jude 5; with acc. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 72, 74;
Jn. i. 31; vi.42; Actsiii.16; 2 Co. v.16, etc.; rov Gedy,
Tit. i. 16, cf. Jn. viii. 19; xv. 21; Gentiles are called oi
py eiddres Tr. Oedvy in 1 Th. iv. 5; 2 Th.i. 8, ef. Gal. iv. 8;
the predicate of the person is added (as often in Attic),
eidas avtov avdpa Sikaov, sc. dvra, Mk. vi. 20 [B. 304
(261)]; in the form of a ptep. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus.
of the object by attraction (W. § 66,5 a.; B. 377 (823))
an epexegetical clause is added [cf. esp. B. 301 (258)],
with drt, 1 Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq.; Acts xvi. 3; or
an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24; Lk.
iv. 34; xili. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. eidevae is used
with the ace. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41; 1 Pet. v. 9; foll. by
6ru, Mt. ix. 6; Jn. xix. 35; Acts ii. 30; Ro. v. 3, and very
often; otéapev foll. by drt is not infrequently, so far as
the sense is concerned, equiv. to it is well known, ac-
knowledged : Mt. xxii. 16 ; Lk. xx. 21; Jn. iii. 2; ix. 31;
Ror iil? ano eevin 04 Seva 2 2428); -2'Cosve le alibrm a:
8; 1 Jn. iii. 2; v. 20; cf. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr.
et Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp.
in Paul, is the interrog. formula ov« otSare and # otk
oldate 6tt, by which something well known is commended
to one for his thoughtful consideration: Ro. xi. 2; 1 Co.
iii. 16; v.63 vi. 2sq. 9, 15 sq. 19; ix. 13, 24; ov« oiSare
foll. by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.]; ov« otdas drt, Jn.
xix. 10; ov« yOere, Lk. ii. 49; eiS€vae foll. by an indir.
quest. [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. ix. 21, 25, 30; xiv.
5; xx.13; 1 Co.i.16; vil. 16; 2 Co. xii. 2.sq.;, Ro. viii.
26; Eph. vi. 21; 1 Tim. iii. 15, and very often. 2. to
know i. e. get knowledge of, understand, perceive; a. any
fact : as, ras evOvpnoers, Mt. xii. 25; tHv tadeprow, Mk.
xii. 15; rods dtakoyiopovs aitav, Lk. vi. 8; xi. 17; with
the addition of ev éavr@ foll. by 6m, Jn. vi. 61. b. the
force and meaning of something, which has a definite
meaning: 1 Co. ii. 11 sq.; tyv mapaBodny, Mk. iv. 13;
puotnpta, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foll. by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18.
c. as in class. Grk., foll. by an inf. in the sense of to know
how (Lat. calleo, to be skilled in): Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi.
18; xii. 56; Phil. iv. 12; 1 Th.iv.4; 1 Tim. iii. 5; Jas.
iv. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 9; @s oiSare, sc. doparicacba, Mt. xxvii.
174
€lKOGL
65. 3. Hebraistically, etSévar twa to have regard for
one, cherish, pay attention to: 1 Th. v.12, (Sept. Gen.
xxxix. 6 for yt). [SYN. see ywacka. |
elSwdetov [-Acov T WH; see I, c], -ov, 7d, (etS@dov, q. V.;
cf. "AckAnreiov, ’AmohXawveiov, “Hpakdeiov, etc. [W. 95
(90) ]), an idol’s temple, temple consecrated to idols: 1 Co.
vill. 10 (1 Mace. i. 47; x. 83; 1 Esdr. ii. 9; not found
in prof. auth.; for in the frag. fr. Soph. [152 Dind.] ip
Plut. de amico et adul. c. 36 édédta has of late been
restored ).*
elSwAd8uTos, -ov, (eidwAov and Oiw), a bibl. and eccl.
word [W. 26; 100 (94) ], sacrificed to idols; 7d etSwAdbv-
tov and ra eidwAdOura denote the flesh left over from the
heathen sacrifices ; it was either eaten at feasts, or sold
(by the poor and the miserly) in the market: Acts xv.
29; xxi. 25; 1 Co. viii. 1, 4, 7,10; x.19, 28 (here L txt-
T Tr WH read iepdéurov, q. v.); Rev. ii. 14, 20. [Cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 308 sq.]*
elS8wAo-Aarpeta [-rpia WH; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (€tdwdoyp,
q. v., and Aarpeia), (Tertull. al. idololatria), the worship
of false gods, idolatry: Gal. v. 20; used of the formal sac-
rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14; of
avarice, as a worship of Mammon [q. v. ], Col. iii. 5 [Bp.
Lghtft. ad loc.]; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry
and peculiar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Eccl. writ. [ef. W. 26].)*
elS8wAoAatpnNs, -ov, 6, (eiSwAov, and Adrprs i. e. a hireling,
servant, slave), a worshipper of false gods, an idolater,
(Tertull. idololatres) : 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15;
any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the
worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11; vi. 9; esp. one who at-
tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of
the offered victims, 1 Co. x. 7; a covetous man, as @
worshipper of Mammon, Eph. v. 5; cf. Meyer ad loc.
(Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 100 (94 sq.) ].)*
elSwdov, -ov, Td, (eidos [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn.
296, 9]), in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, an image, likeness,
i. e. whatever represents the form of an object, either
real or imaginary; used of the shades of the departed
(in Hom.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the
mind, ete.; in bibl. writ. [an idol, i. e.] 1. the image
of a heathen god: Acts vii.41; 1 Co. xii. 2; Rev. ix. 20,
(Is. xxx. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, ete.; Oeav 4 Satpdver
eidwda, Polyb. 31, 3, 13) ; 2. a false god: Acts xv.
20 (on which see adioynpa); Ro. ii. 22; 1 Co. viii. 4, 7;
x. 19; 2 Co. vi. 16; 1 Th.i. 9, (often in Sept.) ; pvAao-
cew éavtov ard rT. eiddAwv, to guard one’s self from all
manner of fellowship with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21."
eka (L WH R& eixy; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 342;
B. 69 (61); [W.§5,4e.; Jelf § 324 Obs. 6; Kihner
§ 336 Anm. 7; esp. Etym. Magn. 78, 26 sq.; and reff. s. v.
I,]), adv.; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. in-
considerately, without purpose, without just cause: Mt. v.
22 RGTrbr.; Ro. xiii. 4 (i. e. ‘not to hide it in the
scabbard, but to draw it’ Fritzsche); Col. ii. 18. 2:
in vain; without success or effect: 1 Co. xv. 2; Gal. iii.
4; iv.11. [From Xenophon, Aeschyl. down.]*
elkoot [or -o1w; Tdf. uses ot ten times before a conso-
nant, and says -o« “etiam ante vocalem fere semper in
w”
€LK@
codd. antiquiss.” Proleg. p. 98; WH everywhere -ou,
ef. their App. p. 148; B. 9], oi, ai, rd, twenty: Lk. xiv.
31; Acts i. 15, etc. [From Hom. down. |
elke : 1 aor. effa; to yield, [A. V. give place]: rwi, Gal.
ii. 5. (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: tn-eixw.]*
EIKQ: whence 2 pf. gona with the force of a pres.
[W. 274 (257)]; to be like: ri, Jas. i. 6, 23. [From
Hom. down. }*
elxav, -dvos, (acc. eixdvav, Rev. xiii. 14 Lehm.; see
dpony ), 9, (EIKQ, q. v.); [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down];
Sept. mostly for DoY; an image, figure, likeness; a. Mt.
xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx. 24; Ro. i. 23; 1 Co. xv. 49;
Rev. xiii. 14 sq. ; xiv. 9,11; xv. 2; xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4;
7) eixov Tov mpayparov, the image of the things (sc. the
heavenly things), in Heb. x. 1, is opp. to 7 ocd, just as
in Cic. de off. 8, 17 solida et expressa effigies is opp. to
umbra; eixav t. Oeod is used of the moral likeness of re-
newed men to God, Col. iii. 10; eikav rod viod tod Oeod
the image of the Son of God, into which true Christians
are transformed, is likeness not only to the heavenly
body (cf. 1 Co. xv. 49; Phil. iii. 21), but also to the most
holy and blessed state of mind, which Christ possesses :
Ro. viii. 29; 2Co.iii. 18. b. metonymically, efk@y twos,
the image of one; one in whom the likeness of any one
is seen: etkov beod is applied to man, on account of his
power of command (see ddéa, III. 3 a. a.), 1 Co. xi. 7; to
Christ, on account of his divine nature and absolute
moral excellence, Col. i.15; 2 Co. iv. 4; [ef. Bp. Lghtft.
and Mey. on Col. 1. c.].*
[Syn. cixdv, duolwpa : du. denotes often not mere
similarity but likeness (see duotwua, b. and cf. Mey. on Ro. i.
23), visible conformity to its object ; eix. adds to the idea of
likeness the suggestions of representation (as a de-
rived likeness) and manifestation. Cf. Trench § xv.;
Lghtft. u. s.]
elAxptvera (-ia T [WH, seel,+; on the breathing see
WH. App. p. 144]), -as, 7, (etAccpuns, q. V.), purity, sin-
cerity, ingenuousness : 1 Co. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 175 rod Geod,
which God effects by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. i. 12 [W.
§ 36, 3b.]. (Theophr., Sext. Empir., Stob.) *
elAuxpuvijs, -€s, (Lon the breathing see WH. App. p.
144; L.and S.s. v. fin.]; com. supposed to be fr. efAy or
€An sunlight, and xpivw, prop. found pure when unfolded
and examined by the sun’s light; hence some write eid.
[see reff. above]; acc. to the conjecture of others fr.
eiAos, eidetv, prop. sifted and cleansed by rapid move-
ment or rolling to and fro), pure, unsullied, sincere ; of the
soul, an eiAccpevns man: Phil. i. 10; drdvora, 2 Pet. iii. 1.
(Sap. vii. 25, where cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb.; [see, on the
word, also Trench § Ixxxv.]; [Hippocr.], Xen., Plat.,
[Aristot., Plut.], Polyb., Philo, [al.].)*
[Syn. efArkpiv js, kaapéds: Acc. to Trench u.s. the
former word expresses freedom from the falsehoods, the
latter from the defile ments, of the flesh and of the world. ]
eiAtoow, Ionic and poetic and occasional in later prose
for édicow [W. § 2, 1 a.]: [pres. pass. eiAiooopar]; (eto
to press close, to roll up, [ef. L. and S. s. v. fin.]), fo roll
up or together: Rev. vi. 14 RG; but LT Tr WH have
restored éAicoou. (From Hom. down.) *
175
’ 5
EL pb
elyl (fr. €w, whence éyi in inscriptions [?]; Aeol. eupi
[Curtius (yet éupu, so G. Meyer) § 564; Veitch p. 228]}),
impv. tot, €or, less usual rw, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v. 12;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.)
31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to éorw
(or irw), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers.
plur. écrwoap, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. etvar; impf.
—ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, 7», 2 pers.
foda (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form js (Mt.
EUV 2h. 25 ww. M111, $2 so xxt US Rev. i Loney
Tr WH), 3 pers. qv, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid.
form, com. in later Grk. [cf. Veitch p. 226 ], #unv (Mt. xxv.
35 sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 cf. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10,
ete.), plur. #ueOa (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts
xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; (Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph.
ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp.
149, 152; fut. Zooua; cf. W.§ 14, 2; B.49 sq. (43); to
be;
I. eiui has the force of a predicate [i.e. is the sub-
stantive verb]: to be,i.e. 1. toexist; a. passages
in which the idea of the verb preponderates, and some
person or thing is said fo exist by way of distinction
from things non-existent: éotw 6 beds, Heb. xi. 6; 6
dv kal 6 qv [W. 68 (66), cf. 182 (172); B. 50 (43)], Rev.
i.4,[8; iv. 8]; xi. 17; xvi.55 ev dpyn qv 6 Aoyos, Jn. i. 1;
mp ’ABpaap yeveoOar, éy® eipi, Jn. vill. 58 [so WH mrg.
in 24, 28; xiii. 19 (see I. 5 below) ]; mpd rod rov Kocpor
eivat, Jn. Xvii. 53 Av, Kat ovK oT Kaimep eotiv Rec., acc.
to the better reading cai mapeoran [G Tr WH, but L T
napeora, correctly ; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 108 Anm. 20;
Chandler § 803], Rev. xvii. 8; éopev, Acts xvii. 28; ra
py dvra and ra évra things that are not, things that are,
Ro. iv. 17; things that have some or have no influence,
of some or of no account, 1 Co. i. 28, (€kadeoev nuas ovK
évras Kat 7O€Anoev ex pr dvTos evar jas, Clem. Rom. 2
Cor. i. 8 [ef. Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and esp. on Herm.
vis. 1, 1, 6]). Hence b. i. q. to live: ei jpeba [or jpev
Rec.] év rais juepas tov natépwr judy if we had been
(viz. living) in the days of our fathers, Mt. xxiii. 30;
ov etvae is used (as in class. Grk., ef. Passow i. p. 792,
[L. and S.s.v. A. I. 1]) of the dead [who are not, are no
more]: Mt.ii.18. co. i. q. to stay, remain, be in a place :
Mt. ii. 18,15; Mk.i.45[L WH br. qv]; v. 21; Lk. i. 80;
see V. 4 below. da. i. q. to be found, the subject being
anarthrous; as, #v GvOpwmos there was (found, Germ. es
gab) a man, etc.: Lk. xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23; Jn. iii. 1;
iv. 6; v. 2; vi. 105 1 Co. vill. 5; xii. 4-6; xiv. 10; xv-
44; 1 Jn. v. 16, and often; €covrar éuraixra, Jude 18;
éort, Hv, €otat with a negative: ov« €ore Sikauos there is
not (sc. found) a righteous man, Ro. ii. 10; add 12, 18;
wnovos ovx éorat ére there shall be no longer time, Rey. x.
6; add, Rev. xxii. 3,5 [ Rec. adds éxet]; xxi. 25 [here exet
stands]; dvdoracts vexpav ovx eat, 1 Co. xv. 12; par) etvae
avaoraow, Mt. xxii. 23 and its parall.; Acts xxiii. 8. Here
belong also the phrases eiciy, oi etc., otrwes etc., there are
(some) who etc.: Mt. xvi. 28; xix. 12; Mk. ix.1; Lk. ix.
27; Jn. vi. 64; Acts xi. 20; ovdeis éoriv, ds, Mk. ix. 39
sq.; x. 29; Lk. i. 61; xviii. 29; with a noun added, é£
ell 1
pepat eioiv, ev ais etc. Lk. xiii. 14; ris €orw, ds, Mt. vii. 9
[L Tr WH om. eor.]; xii. 11 [Tr om. WH br. éor.]; €orev
6 with a ptcp. there is (viz. is not wanting) one that ete.
Jn. v. 32 [?], 45; viii. 50. e. when used of things,
events, facts, etc., etvais i. q. to happen, take place:
viv xpiows eotiv, In. xii. 31; yoyyvopos nv, In. vii. 12;
OspuBos rov aod, Mk. xiv. 2; cyiopa, oxiopara, Jn. ix.
16; 1Co.i. 10; xii. 25; Epides, 1 Co.i. 11; aipéoers, 1 Co.
xi. 19; mevOos, mévos, kpavyn, Rev. xxi. 4; €oovrar Arpot
x. Aowot [R G Tr mrg. in br., al. om. x. Aowp. | K. Tevrpol,
Mt. xxiv. 7; avaykn peyddn, Lk. xxi. 23 ; avacraow peéd-
New EceaOa, Acts xxiv. 15. of times and seasons: yeepov
€orw, Jn. x. 22; wé, In. xiii. 30; Woyxos, Jn. xviil. 18;
kavowv, Lk. xii. 55; éomépa, Acts iv. 3; rpota, Jn. xviii. 28
[Rec.]; oxoria, Jn. xx. 1; gor, Av Opa,—as extn, Lk.
xxiii. 44; Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [L T Tr WH]; i. 39 (40),
etc.; also of feasts: Jn. v. 1, 10; ix. 14; Acts xii. 3; Lk.
xxiii. 54; Mk. xv. 42. univ. ro éodpevov what will be,
follow, happen: Lk. xxii. 49; mére ravra €orar; Mt. xxiv.
3; més éota rovTo; Lk. i. 34; after the Hebr., cai éora
(equiv. to 7°M)) foll. by the fut. of another verb: Acts ii.
17 (fr. Joel ii. 28 (iii. 1)) ; 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; Acts
iii. 23; Ro. ix. 26 (fr. Hos. i. 10 (ii. 1)). ri ody eoriv;
what then is it? i. e. how stands the case? what follows
therefore? Acts xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. 2. i. q.
mdpeys, to be present; to be at hand; to be in store: oivos
ovx éorw, Jn. ii. 3 Tdf.; mapmdddov [Rec.] 6xAou dvros,
when there was present, Mk. viii. 1; add, ii.15; Mt. xii.
10 RG; Heb. viii. 4; otr@ yap jv mvetpa (Gyov), was
not yet present, i.e. had not yet been given [which some
authorities add], Jn. vii. 39; so also in the words ef rvedpa
dywov éorw [but RG Tr accent dydv éor., cf. Chandler
§ 938], Acts xix. 2; axovoas . . . 6vra cira, that there was
an abundance of grain, Acts vil. 12; ddvayts kupiou Av eis
To iacGa avtovs, was present to heal them, Lk. v. 17.
3. éorw with inf., as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down (see
Passow i. p. 792 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. A. VI]; see exx.
fr. the O. T. Apocr. in Wahl, Clavis apocryph. p. 155),
it is possible to ete.; with a negative (as more com. in
classic Grk. also), it is impossible: Heb. ix. 5; 1 Co. xi.
20, [cf. W. § 44, 2 b.].
II. civi [as acopula] connects the subject with the
predicate, where the sentence shows who or what a per-
son or thing is as respects character, nature, disposition,
race, power, dignity, greatness, age, etc. iS pha 9
e€y@ eiye mpecBurns, Lk. i. 18; eyo eipe PaBpmr, Lk. i. 19;
Epnuos é€oTl O TOTOS, Mt. xiv. aye mpopnrns et ov, Jn. iv.
19; ov ef 6 Xpiotds, Mt. xxvi. 63; xaOapoi éore, Jn. xiii.
10; tpeis eote To das THs yns, Mt. v.13; “Iovdatous evar
éavtovs, Rev. iii. 9, cf. ii. 9, and countless other exx. 2:
eiui, as a copula, indicates that the subject is or is to be
compared to the thing expressed by the predicate:
oppayis pou Ths dmoctoAns tpeis eore, ye are, as it were,
the seal attesting my apostleship, i. e. your faith is proof
that the name of apostle is given me rightfully, 1 Co. ix.
2; 7 emoroAn (sc. cvoratixn, cf. vs. 1) tyeis eore, i. e. ye
yourselves are like a letter of recommendation for me,
or ye serve as a substitute for a letter of recommenda-
6 ebpLt
tion, 2 Co. iii. 2; rotré éore T6 oapd pov, this which I
now hand to you is, as it were, my body, Mt. xxvi. 26;
Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; tpeis vads Oeod eoré [L txt.
T Tr txt. WH jyeis . . . eopeév] ye [we] are to be regarded
as the temple of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19; 6 beds
vados autns eariv [eote(v) RG Tr], x. 7d dpviov, they are to
be regarded as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem-
ple in the city because present with every one in it, Rev.
xxi. 22. Hence 3. civat, getting an explicative
force, is often i. q. to denote, signify, import, as 6 aypéds
eat 6 kdopos, Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 sq. 22 sq.; Lk. viii. 11
sq. 14 sq.; Gal. iv. 24 sq.; Rev. xvii. 15; xix. 8, (Sept.
Gen. xli. 26 sq.; Ezek. xxxvii. 11); todr €or [so TWH
uniformly, exe. that WH om. v ededx. in Heb. ii. 14],
Lehm. rovréorw [exe. in Ro. x. 6, 7,8; also Treg. exe. in
Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Actsi.19; Ro. ix. 8; x. 6, 7, 8;
sometimes written tovré eorev, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 111; ef.
W. 45; B. 11 (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to
TovTo onpaiver) Which is either inserted into the discourse
as a parenthesis, or annexed to words as an apposition
[ef. W. 530 (493); B.400 (342). It is to be distinguished
from rovro d5€ eotw: TovT é€otw introduces an incidental
explanation for the most part of the language; rovro
8€ éorw subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen-
erally to the thought; (cf. our “that is to say,” and
“that is”); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc.]: Mt.
xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Acts i.19; Ro. vii. 18; x. 6-8;
Philem. 12; Heb. ii. 14; vii. 5, etc.; likewise 6 €ort, Mk.
iii. 17; vii. 11, 34; Heb. vii. 2; 6 eore peOepynvevdpevor,
this signifies, when interpreted, etc. Mk. xv. 34; Acts iv.
36; see 6c. below. 4. In the Bible far more frequent-
ly than in prof. auth., and in the N. T. much oftener in
the historical than in the other books, a participle
without the article serves as the predicate, being
connected with the subject by the verb eiva: (cf. W. § 45,
5 and esp. B. 309 (265) sqq.); anda. so as to form a
mere periphrasis of the finite verb; a. with the Pres-
ent ptcp. is formed—a periphrasis of the pres.: éott
mpocavarAnpovoa ... kal mepicoevovoa, 2 Co. ix. 12;—a
periph. of the impf. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and
Luke [B. 312 (268)]: Hv xabevdov, Mk. iv. 38; Av mpoa-
yov, X. 32; hv ovyxadnpevos, xiv. 54; fv diavevov, Lk. i.
22; foav kaOnpevot, V. 17; Av exBdddov, Xi. 14; Aoav Kabe-
(épevoe [Lehm., al. caOnpevor], Acts ii. 2, and other exx. ;
once in Paul, Phil. ii. 26 éxumodav jv; —a periph. of the
fut.: €vovrat mimrovres [éxm. RG], Mk. xiii. 25. B. with
the Perfect ptep. is formed —a periph. of the aor.
[impf. (?)]: 4v éords, Lk. v. 1; —a periph. of the plpf. :
joav eAndvOdres, cuvedndvOvia, Lk. v.17; xxiii. 55; esp.
with the pf. pass. ptep.: jv 9 emeypapy emcyeypappevn, Mk.
Xv. 26; Av avr@ Kexpnuatiopevor, Lk. ii. 26; hv reOpappevos,
Lk. iv. 16 ; add, viii. 2; xxili.51; Actsi.17,etc. y. once
with an Aorist ptcp. a periph. of the plpf. is formed:
jv ... Brnbeis (R GL Tr mrg. BeBAnuévos) ev rH Pudakh,
Lk. xxiii. 19 T Tr txt. WH; on the same use of the aor.
sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. Passow i. p. 793; [L and S.
s. v. B. 2; yet ef. B. § 144, 24 fin.]. _b. so as to indi-
cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq.
a2 ip
E€bLul
(266)]: #v diddoxor was wont to teach, Mk. i. 22; Lk.
iv. 31; xix. 47; #v[T Tr txt. WH 9d6ev] knpioowr, Mk.
i. 39; Lk. iv. 44; Aoav ynotevorres held their fast, Mk. ii.
18; foav cvAdadodvtes were talking, Mk. ix. 4; jv ovyKv-
mrovoa, Lk. xiii. 11; Av OedAwv, Lk. xxiii. 8; Av mpoadexd-
pevos, Mk. xv. 43 (Lk. xxiii. 51 mpooedexero) ; once in
Paul, Gal. i. 23 foray dxovovres. with the Future [cf.
B. 311 (267)]: €orat dedepevor, €orat NeAvpévor, i. q. shall
remain bound, shall remain loosed, Mt. xvi. 19; gora
maroupérn shall continue to be trodden down, Lk. xxi. 24,
and other exx. c. to signify that one is in the act of
doing something: #v épydpevov was in the act of coming,
Jn. i. 9 [ef. Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.]; jv imoorpepar, Acts
viii. 28. . the combination of eiva: with a ptcp. seems
intended also to give the verbal idea more force and
prominence by putting it in the form of a noun [see B.
and W. u.s.|: qv éy@v xtnpata moddd (Germ. wohlha-
bend, (Eng. was one that had}), Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22;
gon ovwrav, Lk. i. 20; fv eroracadpevos (obedient, in sub-
jection), Lk. ii. 51 ; to eEovciay €ywv, be thou ruler over,
Lk. xix. 17 ; Av cuvevdoxar, Acts viii. 1; (av ety, Rev.i. 18,
and in other exx. three times in Paul: e? .. . 7Amxéres
éopev povov if we are those who have only hoped, or to
whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. 19; qv... karad-
Adooar, the reconciler, 2 Co. v.19; druva €or Adyov Exovra
copias, are things having a reputation of wisdom, Col. ii.
23, (Matthiae § 560 [(so Kiihner § 353 Anm. 3)] gives
exx. fr. prof. auth. in which several words intervene be-
tween efva: and the ptep.). e. Of quite another sort are
those exx. in which eivac has its own force, being equiv.
to to be found, to be present, to stay, (see I. above), and
the ptcp. is added to express an act or condition of the
subject (cf. B. § 144, 27): év rots pyqpace... jv (was
i. e. stayed) kpdtwv, Mk. v. 5; jv b€ exet (was kept there)
. . . Booxopévn, Mk. v. 11; Mt. viii. 30; joav ev rH 686
avaBaivovres, Luther correctly, they were in the road, go-
ing up ete. Mk. x. 32; eioiv avdpes . . . evxry Exovres, Acts
xxi. 23; add, Mt. xii. 10 [RG]; xxvii. 55; Mk. ii. 6, (in
the last two exx. #aav were present) ; Lk. iv. 33; Jn. i. 28;
iii. 23; Acts xxv. 14; Ro. iii. 12, etc.; avadev eorw,
xataBaivoy etc. (insert a comma after €ariv), is from above,
xataBaivov etc. being added by way of explanation, Jas.
i. 17 [ef. B. 310 (266)]. 5. The formula eyo eiys (I
am he), freq. in the Gospels, esp. in John, must have its
predicate supplied mentally, inasmuch as it is evident
from the context (cf. Kriiger § 60, 7); thus, éyo eis,
sc. "Incovs 6 Naf. Jn. xviii. 5 [here L mrg. expresses 6
"Ingots, WH mrg. "Ine.], 6, 8; itis J whom you see, not
another, Mt. xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. xxiv. 36 (Lcehm.
in br.); Jn. vi. 20; se. 6 xaOnpevos x. mpocatrar, Jn. ix.
9; simply eiui, J am teacher and Lord, Jn. xiii. 13; ove
eipi se. €& atrav, Lk. xxii. 58; Jn. xviii. 25; I am not
Elijah, Jn. i. 21; spec. Iam the Messiah, Mk. xiii. 6 ;
xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 8; Jn. iv. 26; viii. 24, 28; xiii. 19; I
am the Son of God, Lk. xxii. 70 (like 817 738, Deut.
xxxii. 39; Is. xliii. 10); cf. Keim iii. 320 [Eng. trans. vi.
34; Hofmann, Schriftbeweis, i. 63 sq.]. The third pers.
is used in the same way: éxetvds €oTwy, SC. 6 vids Tov Geod,
LTT
>? ’
elpet
Jn. ix. 375; sc. 6 mapadwowv epué, Jn. xiii. 26. 6. Of
the phrases having a pronoun in place of a predi-
cate, the following deserve notice: a. tis eips, e?, eoriv,
a formula of inquiry, used by those desiring — either to
know what sort of a man one is whom they see, or what
his name is, Jn.i. 19; viii. 25; xxi. 12; Acts xxvi. 15;—
or that they may see the face of some one spoken of, and
that he may be pointed out to them, Lk. xix. 3; Jn. ix.
36 ; ov ris et 6 with a ptep., who (i. e. how petty) art thou,
that etc.? the question of one administering a rebuke and
contemptuously denying another’s right to do a thing,
Ro. ix. 20; xiv. 4, (Strabo 6, 2, 4 p. 271 od ris ef 6
Tov “Ounpov Weywv ws pvOdypapov;); eye tis eipe; who
(how small) am J? the language of one holding a modest
opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness, Acts
xi. 17, cf. Ex.iii. 11. b. etui ris, like swm aliquis in Lat.,
to be somebody (eminent): Acts v. 363 eivai 7, like the
Lat. aliquid esse, to be something (i. e. something excel-
lent): Gal. ii. 6; vi. 3; in these phrases ris and ri are
emphatic; cf. Kiihner § 470, 3; [W.170(161); B.114
(100)]; etvai ve after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii.
7, ef. Mey. ad loc. ; also in questions having a negative
force, 1 Co. x. 19 [cef. W. § 6, 2]. ovd€év eis, 1 Co. xiii.
2; 2 Co. xii. 115; ovd€y éoru, it is nothing, is of no ac-
count, Mt. xxiii. 16, 18; Jn. viii. 54; Acts xxi. 24; 1 Co.
vii.19. c. ris éott, e. g. 7 mapaBoAn, what does it mean ?
what is the explanation of the thing? Lk. viii. 9 ris ety 9
mapaBoaAy avtn; Acts x. 17 ri dy ein 7O dpapa; Mk. i. 27
ti €ott rouro; what is this? expressive of astonishment,
Lk. xv. 26 ri ety radra; what might be the cause of the
noise he heard? Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. x. 6 riva fv, a eAdder
avtois. ti éote What does it mean? Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7;
Lk. xx. 17; Jn. xvi. 17 sq. 3 ti €orw ef py drt, Eph. iv. 9;
see II. 3 above. 4. ovros, avtn, todTd eatw foll. by a
noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, etc. a. is so
employed that the pronoun refers to something which
has just been said: otros ydp éate 6 vdpos, the law is
summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this,
Mt. vii. 12. 8B. in John’s usage it is so employed that
the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a
noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as
it were for the predicate : atrn early 1) vikn ... 7 miotts
jpav, 1 Jn. v. 4; avty cotiv ) paptupia Tov Oeod, fy ete.
1Jn. v.9 Rec. odros, adrn, rovtd éote foll. by re [B. 105
(92) ; ef. W. 161 (152)]: Jn. iii. 19; 1 dn.i.5; v. 11, 14;
foll. by iva (to say that something ought to be done, or
that something is desired or demanded [cf. W. 338
(317); B. 240 (207)]): Jn. vi. 29, 39 sq.; xv. 12; 1 Jn.
iii. 11, 23; v. 3; foll. by dre ete. Jn. i. 19 [W. 438 (408) }.
7. The participle dv, obaa, dv, dvres, dvra, joined to a sub-
stantive or an adjective, has the force of an intercalated
clause, and may be translated since or although I am, thou
art, ete., [here the Eng. use of the ptep. agrees in the main
with the Grk.]: ei odv tpeis, sovnpot dures, oidare, Mt. vii.
11; add, xii. 34; Lk. xx. 36; Jn. iii. 4; iv. 9; Acts xvi. 21;
Ro. v. 10; 1 Co. viii. 7; Gal. ii. 3; Jas. iii. 4, and often;
twice with other participles, used adjectively [B. 310
(266)]: dvres dmndXotpr@pevor, Col. i. 21; eoxoricpevor
elpi 178 €Lpt
[R G, al. -rapevor], Eph. iv. 18. 8. Sometimes the
copula éorw (with the accent [see Chandler § 938]) stands
at the beginning of a sentence, to emphasize the truth of
what the sentence affirms or denies: Lk. viii. 11; 1 Tim.
vi. 6; fore 5€ riots etc. Heb. xi. 1 (although some explain
it here [as a subst. verb], ‘ but faith exists’ or ‘is found,’
to wit in the examples adduced immediately after [see
W.§ 7, 3]); several times so used in Philo in statements
(quoted by Delitzsch on Heb. xi. 1) resembling defini-
tions. ov« éorw: Mt. xiii.57; Mk. xii. 27; Acts x. 34;
1 Co. xiv. $35 Jas. iil. 15.
III. ciyi joined with Adverbs; 1. with adverbs
of place; a. where? to be, be busy, somewhere: éxei,
Mt. ii. 15; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 1 [L om. Tr br. jv], ete. ;
evOade, Acts xvi. 28; ow, Jn. xx. 26; od, Mt. ii. 9; xviii.
20; Actsxvi. 13; dmov, Mk. ii.4; v.40; Jn. vi. 62; Acts
xvii. 1, etc.; mov, Mt. ii. 2; Jn. vii. 11, etc.; Sde, Mt.
xxvili. 6; Mk. ix. 5, etc. b. with adverbs of dis-
tance: dmévarri twos, Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2);
€xros twos, 2 Co. xii. 2, [3 ywpis r. LT Tr WH]; éumpo-
ov tivos, Lk. xiv. 2; éevros tevos, Lk. xvii. 21; éevamov
twos, Rey. i.4; vii. 15; paxpay amo twos, Jn. xxi. 8; Mk.
xii. 34; moppo, Lk. xiv. 32; éemdve, Jn. iii. 31*, [31° GT
WH nrg. om. the cl.]; of the situation of regions and
places: dvrirépa [or -rimepa etc. see s. v.] twvds, LK. viii.
26; éyyis, — now standing absol. Jn. xix. 4%; now with
gen., Jn. xi. 18; xix. 20, etc. ; now with dat., Acts ix. 38;
xxvii. 8. c. whence? to be from some quarter, i. e. to
come, originate, from: mobev, Mt. xxi. 25; Lk. xiii. 25,
27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29; xix. 9; ii. 9 (wodev €oriv sc. 6
oivos, whence the wine was procured) ; evredOev, Jn. xviii.
36. 2. with adverbs of quality; ovrws eipi, to be
thus or so, to be such; absol. Mt. xiii. 49; with ev ty
added, Mt. xx. 26 [here RG T €ora]; ovrws éorat, so will
it bei.e. come to pass, Mt. xiii. 40, (49 [see above]) ;
ovTas é€oriy or éorat, of things, events, etc., such is or will
be the state of the case [W. 465 (434) ]: Mt. xix. 10; xxiv.
27, 37,39; Mk. iv. 26; Ro. iv. 18 (Gen. xv. 5); so of
persons, Jn. iii. 8. xaOas éorw as, even as, he ete. is, 1
Jn. iii. 2, 7; iv. 17; efui Somep tes to be, to do as one,
to imitate him, be like him, Mt. vi. 5 [RG]; Lk. xviii.
11{RGTWH txt.]; €orw co dorep ete. regard him
as a heathen and a publican, i. e. have no fellowship with
him, Mt. xviii. 17; eiut &s or doei ris, to be as i. e. like
or equal to any one, Mt. [vi. 5 LT Tr WH]; xxii. 30;
xxviii. 3; Lk. xi. 44; [xviii. 11 L Tr WH mrg.]; xxii.
27; 1 Co. vii. 29sq.; ra omdayxva meptocorépas eis Spas
éorw he is moved with the more abundant love toward
you, 2 Co. vii. 15.— But see each adverb in its place.
IV. eiui with the oblique cases of substantives or of
pronouns ; 1. ecivai revos, like the Lat. alicusus esse,
i. q. to pertain to a person or a thing, denotes any kind of
possession or connection (Possessive Genitive); cf. Krii-
ger $47, 6,4sqq.; W.§ 30,5 b.; B.$132,11. a. of things
which one owns: €orat cov waa [ Rec. ravra], Lk. iv. 7;
ov €or 7 (am air, Acts xxi. 11; add, Mk. xii. 7; Jn.
x. 12; xix. 24;—or for the possession of which he is
fitted: twos é€otrw p Bacireia r. op. or row Geo, he is fit
for a share in the kingdom of God, Mt. v. 3,10; xix. 14;
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. mavra ipadr eos, all things
serve your interests and promote your salvation, 1 Co
iii. 21. b. of things which proceed from one: 2 Co. iv.
7. c. to be of one’s party, be devoted to one: 1 Co. i. 12;
2 Tim. ii. 19; rod Xpsorod, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. viii. 9; 1 Co.
i. 12; 2Co. x. 7; hence also rijs 6800 (se. rod kupiou) etvat,
Acts ix. 2 [ef. B. 163 (142)]. a. to be subject to one ; to
be in his hands or power: Mt. xxii. 28; Acts xxvii. 23;
Ro. ix. 16; xiv. 8; 1 Co. iii. 23; vi. 19, 20 Rec.; mvevpa-
ros, Lk.ix.55 Rec. Hence e. tobe suitable, fit, for one:
Actsi. 7. f. to be of a kind or class : eivat vuxros, oxérovs,
nuepas, 1 Th. v. 5, 5; or to be of the number of [a partit.
gen., cf. B. 159 (139) ]: Acts xxiii. 6; 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim.
i. 15. g. with a gen. of quality: Heb. x. 39; xii. 11.
h. withagen. of age: Mk. v. 42; Lk. iii. 23; Acts iv. 22,
(Tob. xiv. 11). With this use (viz. 1) of eivat, those ex-
amples must not be confounded in which a predicate
nominative is to be repeated from the subject (cf. Kriiger
§ 47, 6,1): ov« €orww 6 Geds vexpar, add\Aa (avrer, SC. Beds,
Mt. xxii. 32, ef. Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ravrara pnuata
ov« éote Saipomouevov, sc. pnuata, Jn. X. 21; ov« éorw
dxaraotagias 6 Geos, adda eipnuns, 1 Co. xiv. 33; addXo
BiBXrLov, 6 eott tHS Cwns, Rev. xx. 12; add, 2 Co. ii. 3;
1 Pet. iii. 3. 2. eiui with the dative (cf. Kriiger
§ 48, 3 [who appears to regard the dat. as expressing a
less close or necessary relationship than the gen.]; W.
§ 31,2); a. Ears pos, npiv, ete. it is mine, ours, etc., I, we,
ete., have: Lk. i. 7; ii. 7,10; xiv. 10; Jn. xviii. 10, 39;
xix. 40; Acts vii. 5; viii. 21; x. 6; Ro. ix. 2,9; 1Co.
ix. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 11, and often. ov« €ore quiv [al. dp.] 7
mdAn mpos ete. we have not a struggle against etc. Eph.
vi. 12; eioiv hiv we have here etc. Acts xxi. 23; ri
éorat Huiv what shall we have? what will be given us?
Mt. xix. 27; tpiv éorw 7 émayyeXia the promise belongs
to you, Acts ii. 39. b. eivai revi te 10 be something to (or
for) some one, used of various relations, as of service,
protection, etc.: cxedos éexdoyns €aTi poe obTos, SC. Tov
with inf. Acts ix. 15; €veoOé pou pwaprupes, Acts [i. 8
RG, ef.] xxii. 15; Evouat air@ Geds x. avtds Eorat por
vids, Rev. xxi. 7; €aovrai pot ads, 2 Co. vi. 16 [RG];
eis TO eivat avTov... matepa... Tois etc. Ro. iv. 11. cc.
eivai Twi tt, to be to one as or for something, to pass for
ete.: 1 Co.i. 18; ii. 14; ix. 2, ef. Mt. xviii.17. d. eivat
twi tt, to be i. e. conduce, redound to one for (or as)
something (cf. Kriiger § 48, 3, 5): 1 Co. xi. 14 sq.; 2
Co. ii. 15; Phil. i. 28; ovat 8€ pot ore, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hos.
ix. 12). e. €orat tui, will come upon, befall, happen to,
one: Mt. xvi. 22; Lk.i. 45. f. Acts xxiv. 11 od mAcious
eloi poe tepat Sexadvo [L T Tr WH om. # and read
da5exa] not more than twelve days are (sc. passed) to
me i. e. it is not more than twelve days. Lk. i. 36 odros
ny exros eotw airy this is the sixth month to (with) her.
Those passages must not be brought under this head ip
which the dative does not belong to the verb but de-
pends on an adjective, as xados, xowwrds, pidos, ete.
V. ciui with Prepositions and their cases. ai.
amo tsvos (romov), to come from, be a native of: Jn.1.44
a a
le
ety
(45) [ef.dmd,I.1a.]. 2. eis ri, a. tohave betaken
one’s self to some place and éo be there, to have gone into
(cf. W. § 50,4 b.; [B. 333 (286)]): ets olkov, Mk. ii. 1
[RG; al. &]; eis rov dypov, Mk. xiii. 16 [RG]; ets r.
xoirnv, Lk. xi. 7; eis rov xoAmov, Jn. i. 18, where cf.
Tholuck, [W. 415 (387); B. u.s.]; (on Acts viii. 20 see
dmodea, 2a.). metaph. fo come to: eis xoAny mixpias
(hast fallen into), Acts viii.23. b. to be directed towards
a thing: Sore rv miotw tyar ... eivat eis Oedv, 1 Pet.
i. 21; to tend to anything: Ro. xi. 36 [W. § 50,6]. c.
to be for i. e. conduce or inure to, serve for, [B. 150 (131)
sq.; W. § 29,3 a.]:1 Co. xiv. 22; Col. ii. 22; Jas. v. 3; poi
eis €Adxtordv eo, it results for me in, i. e. I account it,
a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (eis opeAevav, Aesop. fab.
124, 2). d. In imitation of the Hebr. 717 foll. by 7,
eiva eis Twa or Tt stands where the Greeks use a nomi-
native [W. and B. u. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. eis, 3]:
Mt. xix. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31
éoovra eis cdpxa piav (fr. Gen. ii. 24); 1 Jn. v. 8 €is ro &
eiow, unite, conspire, towards one and the same result,
agree in one; 2Co. vi. 18 (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 1); Heb.
i. 5 (2 S. vii. 14) ; vill. 10. 3. €x tuvos, a. tobeof
i. e. a part of any thing, to belong to, etc. [W. 368 (345) ;
ef. B. 159 (139)]: 1 Co. xii. 15sq.; &« revev, of the num-
ber of: Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 69sq.; Lk. xxii. 58; Jn.
i. 24; vi. 64,71 [RT]; vii. 50; x. 26; xviii.17, 25; Acts
xxi. 8; 2 Tim. iii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 19; Rev. xvii. 11, (Xen.
mem. 3, 6,17); &« row apiOyov two, Lk. xxii. 3. b. to
be of i. e. to have originated, sprung, come, from [W. § 51,
1d.; B. 327 (281 sq.)]: Lk. xxiii. 7; Jn.i. 46 (47); iii. 31
(6 dv x ris ys) ; iv. 22; vii. 52; viii. 23 ; xviil. 36; Acts
iv. 6; xix. 25; xxiii. 34; Gal. iii. 21; 1 Jn.iv. 7; 6s éore
é& ipav, your fellow-countryman, Col.iv. 9. c. to be of
i.e. proceed from one as the author [W. 366 (344) sq.;
B. 327 (281)]: Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17; Acts v. 38 sq.;
2 Co. iv. 7; 1 Jn. ii. 16; Heb. ii. 11; elvac €& odpavoi, &&
avOpemwy, to be instituted by the authority of God, by
the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4;
to be begotten of one, Mt.i.20. . to beof i.e. be con-
nected with one; to be related to, [cf. Win. § 51,1 d.; cf.
in ex, I. 1 a. and 7]: 6 vdpos otk éotw ex mictews, has no
connection with faith, Gal. iii. 12; e& épywv vdpov eiva
(Luth. mit Werken umgehen), Gal. iii. 10; esp. in John’s
usage, to depend on the power of one, to be prompted and
governed by one, and reflect his character: thus etva: éx
rov SiaBdAov, Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. ili. 8; €« tov movnpod, 1
Jn. iii. 12; é« row ndopov, Jn. xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 1 Jn.
iv. 5; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is
equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1
Jn. ii. 16; opp. to éx rod Geov etvat, Jn. viii. 47; 1 In. iv.
1-3; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as
begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see yewvdw, 2 d.):
1 Jn. iv. 4,6; v. 19; 3 Jn. 11; éx ris dAnOeias eiva, either
to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii.
21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed by
the love and pursuit of truth, as Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii.
19; 6 dv ek tis yas ex THs yas éoti, he who is from the
earth as respects origin bears the nature of this his earth-
179
eipt
ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 31. e. to be of i.e. formed
Srom: Rev. xxi. 21; 1 Co. xi. 8. 4. évtivi, a. with
dat. of place, to be ini. e. be present, to stay, dwell; «a
prop.: Mt. xxiv. 26; Lk. ii. 49, etc.; on the surface of a
place (Germ. auf), as év ry 666, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere;
ev t@ ayp@, Lk. xv. 25. at: év de&a tov Geov, Ro. viii.
34; to live, dwell, as in a city: Lk. xviii. 3; Acts ix. 10;
Phil. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 2, ete.; of God, év ovpavois, Eph. vi. 9;
of things which are found, met with, in a place: 2 Tim.
ii. 20, etc. B. things so pertaining to locality that one
can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by
them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and
improp., as eva év To pati, év TH oxoria: 1 Jn. ii. 9,
11; 1 Th. v. 4; év capi, Ro. vii. 5; viii. 8, (see adpé, 4).
b. tobe ina state or condition [see B. 330 (284); cf.
W. § 29, 3b. and év, I. 5 e.]: év eipnvy, Lk. xi. 21; &v
€xOpa, xxiii. 12; ev xpiparte, ibid. 40; év repirouy, ev axpo-
Bvoria, Ro. iv. 10; év dé, 2 Co. iii. 8, etc.; hence
spoken of ills which one is afflicted with: év fice: aiparos,
Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, (€v t7 véow, Soph. Aj. 271; in
morbo esse, Cic. Tusc. 3, 4, 9); of wickedness in which
one is, as it were, merged, év rais duapriats, 1 Co. xv. 17;
of holiness, in which one perseveres, év riores, 2 Co. xiii.
5. ¢. tobein possession of, provided with a thing [W.386
(361)]: Phil. iv. 11; & é€ovcia, Lk. iv. 32; év Bape (see
Bapos,fin.),1 Th. ii. 7 (6). . to be occupied in a thing
(Buhdy. p. 210; [see ev, 1.5 g.]): év rH éopry, in cele-
brating the feast, Jn. ii. 23; to be sedulously devoted to
[A. V. give one’s self wholly to| a thing, 1 Tim. iv. 15,
(Hor. epp. 1, 1, 11 omnis in hoc sum). e. a person or
thing is said to be in one, i. e. in his soul: thus, God (by
his power and influence) in the prophets, 1 Co. xiv. 25;
Christ (i. e. his holy mind and power) in the souls of his
disciples or of Christians, Jn. xvii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 5; 16
mvevpa THs GAnbeias, Jn. xiv. 17; friends are said to be
ev Ti Kapdia of one who loves them, 2 Co. vii. 3. vices,
virtues, and the like, are said to be inone: as 8ddos, Jn.
1.47 (48); ddccia, Jn. vii. 18; @yvoua, Eph. iv. 18; dapria,
1 Jn. iii. 5; dAnOewa, Jn. viii. 44; 2 Co. xi. 10; Eph. iv.
21; 1Jn.i. 8; ii. 4, (aAnGeta cai xpiows, 1 Mace. vii. 18);
ayarn, Jn. xvii. 26; 1 Jn. ii. 15; 6 Adyos avrov (r. Geov)
ovx éotw ev nuiv, God’s word has not left its impress on
our souls, 1 Jn. i. 10; 16 as ovK Eotw év avra, the effi-
cacy or influence of the light is not in his soul, [rather,
an obvious physical fact is used to suggest a spiritual
truth: the light is not in him, does not shine from within
outwards], Jn. xi. 10; oxoria,1Jn.i.5; oxdvdadov, 1 Jn.
ii. 10 i. e. there is nothing within him to seduce him to
sin (cf. Diisterdieck and Huther ad loc.). Acts xiii. 15
(if ye have in mind any word of exhortation etc. [W.
218 (204 sq.)]). f£. év ré Oe@ eivat is said a. of
Christians, as being rooted, so to speak, in him, i.e. inti-
mately united to him, 1 Jn. ii.5; v.20; . of all men,
because the ground of their creation and continued being
is to be found in him alone, Acts xvii. 28. g. witha
dat. of the pers. to be in, —[i. e. either] among the num-
ber of: Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. ii. 44; Ro. i. 6;
—f[or, in the midst of: Acts ii. 29; vii. 44 Rec., ete.]
> la
Elpat
h. noteworthy, further, are the following: gore ri év rut
there is something (to blame) in one, Acts xxv. 5; some-
thing is (founded [A. V. stand]) in a thing, 1 Co. ii. 5;
ovK €otiv ev ovdevi GAA@ H Gewrtnpia salvation is (laid up,
embodied) in none other, can be expected from none,
Acts iv. 12; with dat. of the thing, 7s (contained, wrapped
up) in something: Eph. v. 18; Heb. x. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 18.
5. eiut éi a. tevds, to be on: émt rod daparos, Lk.
xvii. 31; ext ths Kepadns, Jn. xx. 7; to be (set) over a
thing, Acts viii. 27; to preside, rule, over, Ro. ix. 5. b.
revi, to be at [W. 392 (367)]: emi Ovpas, Mt. xxiv. 33;
Mk. xiii. 29. c. revd, tobe uponone: xapis nv emi twa,
was with him, assisted him, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33 ; mvedpa
jv emi teva, had come upon one, was impelling him, Lk. ii.
25, ef. Lk. iv. 18; Sept. Is. lxi. 1; add, Gal. vi. 16; eivat
emt Td avrd, to be (assembled) together [cf. adréds, III. 1],
Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ace.
to the reading re for Rec. cuvepyecée). 6. eipi
kata a. tevds, to be against one, to oppose him: Mt.
xii. 30; Lk. ix. 50; xi. 23; Gal. v. 23; Ro. viii. 31 (opp.
to wtmép tuos, as in Mk. ix. 40). b. kard tu, according
to something : kata odpka, kata mvedpa, to bear the char-
acter, have the nature, of the flesh or of the Spirit, Ro.
vill. 5; etvacxar’ avOpwrov, Gal. i. 11; kar’ adnOecar, Ro. ii.
2. 7. petd Tivos, a. to be with (i. e. to associate
with) one: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. iii. 14; v.18; Lk. vi. 3; Jn.
lil. 26 ; xii. 17; xvi. 32; Actsix. 39, and often in the Gos-
pels; Rev. xxi. 3; of ships accompanying one, Mk. iv. 36;
of what is present with one for his profit, 2 Jn. 2; Ro. xvi.
20; Hebraistically, to be with one i.e. as a help, (of God,
becoming the companion, as it were, of the righteous) :
Lk. i. 66; Jn. iil. 25 viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii. 9; x. 38; xi.
2 exviiie 102 2 Coy xine ehilsiv. 9 2) In. oy ek. Wits
xxviii. 20, (Gen. xxi. 20; Judg. vi. 12, ete.). b. to be
(i. e. to codperate) with: Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (Xen.
an. 1, 3, 5 [al. iévac]). 8. celui mapa a. Tevds, to
(have come and so) be from one: Christ is said eiva
mapa Tov Oeov, Jn. vi. 46; vii. 29; ix. 16, 33; rl mapa
twos, is from i. e. given by one, Jn. xvii. 7. b. revi, to
be with one: Mt. xxii. 253 obk etvat mapa To Oe@ is used
to describe qualities alien to God, as mpoowmoAnuwia,
Ro. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 9; adcxia, Ro. ix.14. c. revd (rémov),
by, by the side of: Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. rpés
teva (cf. W. 405 (378) ], a. towards: mpos éomépav eori
it is towards evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. b. by (turned tow-
ards): Mk. iv. 1. c. with one: Mt. xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3;
ix.19; Lk. ix. 41; Jn. i.1 (ef. Mey. ad loc. ]. 10. civ
Tevt, a. to associate with one: Lk. xxii. 56; xxiv. 44;
Acts xiii. 7; Phil. i. 23; Col. ii. 5; 1Th.iv. 17. b. to be
the companion of one, to accompany him: Lk. vii. 12 [Re
T Tr br. WH]; viii. 38; Actsiv. 13; xxii. 9; 2 Pet. i.
18. c. to be an adherent of one, be on his side: Acts v.
17; xiv.4[A. V. to hold with], (Xen. Cyr. 5,4,37). 11.
eiui imép a. tevds, to be for one, tu favor his side:
Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, (opp. to eipt xara
twos). b. teva, to be above one, to surpass, excel him:
LK. vi. 40. 12. ims reva [cf. B. 341 (293)], a. to
be under (i. e. subject to) one: Mt. viii. 9 RG T Tr; Ro.
180
3
€LTTOV
iti. 9°;"vi. 14 sq: ; ‘Gali. 10; 25 5 v.18 5/1) Tie vi. Es be
to be (locally) under a thing: e. g. under a tree, Jn. i. 48
(49); acloud, 1 Co.x.1. Further, see each preposition
in its own place.
VI. As in classical Greek, so also in the N. T. eiué is
very often omitted (cf. Winer § 64, I. 2, who gives nu-
merous exx. [cf. 596 (555) ; 350 (328 sq.) ]; B. 136 (119)
sq-), eoriv most frequently of all the parts: Lk. iv, 18;
Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 16; Heb. v. 13, ete. ;
in exclamations, Acts xix. 28, 34; in questions, Ro. ix.
14; 2 Co. vi. 14-16; ri ydp, Phil. i.18; Ro. iii. 3; ri odv,
Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15; also e¢, Rev. xv. 4; eit, 2 Co. xi. 6;
eopev, exre, 1 Co. iv. 10; etait, Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. xiii. 8, ete. ;
the impv. €or, Ro. xii. 9; Heb. xiii. 4 sq.; gore, Ro. xii.
9; 1 Pet. iii. 8; ef in wishes, Mt. xvi. 22; Gal. vi. 16,
ete.; even the subjune. 7 after iva, Ro. iv. 16; 2 Co. viii.
11 [after drs], 13; often the ptcp. av, dvres, as (see B.
§ 144, 18) in Mk. vi. 20; Acts xxvii. 33; in the expres-
sions of ek qepttouns, 6 €k miaTews, Of Um vdpor, etc.
[Comp.: dm-, év-, (€E-eart,) wap-, cvp-map-, ovv-erpt. |
etut, fo go, approved of by some in Jn. vii. 34, 36, for
the ordinary eiyi, but cf. W. § 6,2; [B.50 (43). Comp.:
din-, ela-, €&-, €m-, ovv-erp. | *
civekev, SC@ eveka, EVEKED.
el-trep, see ef, III. 13.
elrrov, 2 aor. act. fr. an obsol. pres. EMQ [late Epic an.
in composition ; see Veitch] (cf. émos [Curtius § 620),
Ton. EIN (like épwrda, eipwt.; EAicow, eidioc.) ; sub-
june. eir@, impv. eime, inf. etmeiv, ptep. elmav; 1 aor.
eira (Jn. x. 34 RGTTr WH, fr. Ps. Ixxxi. (1xxxii.)
6; Acts xxvi. 15 L T Tr WH; Heb. iii. 10 Lchm. fr.
Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10; add [Mk. ix. 18 T WH Tr txt. ];
Job xxix. 18; xxxil. 8) ete: ; (Sir) xxiv, sino) a
Mace. vi. 11, ete.; cf. Kithner i. 817, [esp. Veitch s. v.
pp- 232, 233]), 2 pers. etras (Mt. xxvi. 25, [64]; Mk. xii.
32 [not TWH; Jn. iv. 17 where T WH again ~res; Lk.
xx. 39]), 3 pers. plur. efwav (often in L'T Tr WH [i. e.
out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between
3 pers. plur. ~rov of the Rec. and -ray, the latter ending
has been adopted by L in 56, by T in 82, by Tr in 74, by
WH in104, cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123], e.g. Mt. xii. 2; xxvii.
6; Jn. xviii. 30, etc.) ; impv. eitadv (Mk. xiii. 4 L T Tr
WH; Lk. x. 40 TWH Tr mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26 G LT
Tr WH, [also Mt. iv. 3 WH; xviii. 17 TWH; xxii. 17
T WHTr mrg.; xxiv. 3 WH; Lk. xx. 2T Tr WH; xxii.
(66)67 T Tr WH; Jn. x. 24 T WH], for the Attic etrov,
ef. W.§6, 1 k.; [Chandler § 775]; Fritzsche on Mk. p.
515 sqq.; [but Win. (p. 85 (81)) regards eimdy as impv.
of the 2nd aor.; ef., too, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 348; B. 57
(50); esp. Fritz. l.c.]), in the remaining persons eizdrw
(Rev. xxii.17), etware (Mt. [x. 27; xxi. 5]; xxii. 45 xxvi.
18, etc.; Mk. [xi. 3]; xiv. 14; xvi. 7; [Lk. x. 10; xiii.
32; xx. 3; Col. iv. 17]), eimarwoay (Acts xxiv. 20) also
freq.in Attic, [Veitch s. v.; WH. App. p. 164 ; Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 219]; ptep., after the form chiefly Ion.,
cinas ([Jn. xi. 28 Tr WH]; Acts vii. 37 L T Tr WH
[also xxii. 24; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 35]); the fut. épa is from the
Epic pres. eipw [cf. Lob. Technol. p. 137]; on the other
s
€LTTOV
hand, from PEO come pf. eipyka, 3 pers. plur. eipnxacw
(Acts xvii. 28), etpnxavy (Rev. xix. 3; see yivopat), inf.
eipnxeva, Heb. x. 15 L'TTrWH; Pass., pf. 3 pers.
sing. eipnra, ptep. efpnuevov; plpf. etpnxev; 1 aor. eppeOnv
(Rev. vi. 11; ix.4 and R G T WH in Mt. v. 21 sqq.;
LL Tr' WH in Ro..ix. 12,26; Gal. iii. 16), [ striet”
(cf. Veitch p. 575)] Attic éppnOnv (Mt. v. 21 sqq.L Tr;
RG in Ro. ix. 12, 26; Gal. iii. 16; [cf. B.57 (50); WH.
App. p- 166 ]), ptep. pndeis, pnbev; Sept. for 18; lospeak,
say, whether orally or by letter ;
1. with an accus. of the obj.; a. with acc. of the
thing: eimeiv Adyov, Mt. viii. 8 Rec.; Jn. ii. 22 [L T Tr
WH]; vii. 36; xviii. 9, 32; pnua, Mk. xiv. 72 [Knapp
et al.]; eimeiv Adyor eis teva, i. q. BAaodnpetv, Lk. xii. 10;
also xara twos, Mt. xii. 32; os mos eimeiv, so to say (a
phrase freq. in class. Grk., ef. Weiske, De pleonasmis gr. p.
47; Matthiae § 545; Delitzsch on Heb. as below; [Kiih-
ner § 585, 3; Kriiger § 55, 1,2; Goodwin § 100; W. 449
(419); 317 (298)]), Heb. vii. 9, (opp. to dkpiBet Adyo,
Plat. rep. 1, 341 b.); tyv adndevav, Mk. v. 33; adnOecav
€p@, 2 Co. xii. 6; tovro ddnes eipynxas, Jn. iv. 18 [W. 464
(433) n.]; tletmw; what shall I say? (the expression of
one who is in doubt what to say), Jn. xii. 27; m@s épet 76
dunv ...; 1 Co. xiv. 16; ti épotdpev; or ti ody éepodpev;
what shall we say? i. e. what reply can we make? or, to
what does that bring us? only in the Ep. to the Ro.
[W.§ 40, 6] viz. iii.5; vi. 1; vii. 7; ix. 14, 30; with pos
ravra added, viii. 31; eimeiy te epi tevos, Jn. vii. 39; x.
41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the
New are usually introduced as follows: 1d pnO€v iro rod
[LT Tr WH om. rod] xupiov 81a rod mpodnrov, Mt. i. 22 ;
ii. 15; td rod Oeov, Mt. xxii. 31; bmd rov mpopnrov Rec.
Mt. xxvii. 35, cf. ii. 17; 7d pynOev dia twos, Mt. ii. 17 LT
ir WE a yi. tae Lis xi chisexiin 35 s¢extend >
XXVIl. 9; 76 eipnuevoy dia Tov mpod. Acts ii. 16; 1d eipnue-
vov, Lk. ii. 24; Acts xiii. 40; Ro. iv. 18; éeppe6n, Mt. v.
21, etc.; xaOws eipnxey, Heb.iv. 3. b. with ace. of the
pers. to speak of, designate by words: év etrov, Jn. i. 15
[(not WH txt.) ; B.377 (323); cf. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. (say
of )]; 6 pyOeis, Mt. iii. 3. eireiv twa Kadas, to speak well
of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (ed etrety reva, Hom. Od. 1,
302); xaxas, to speakill of one, Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. xxii.
28; ef. Kihner § 409, 2; 411, 5; [W. § 32, 1b. 8.; B.
146 (128)]. c. with an ellipsis of the ace. aird (see
avtdés, II. 3): Lk. xxii. 67; Jn. ix. 27; xvi. 4, ete. od
elas (SC. avrd), i. €. you have just expressed it in words;
that’s it; it is just as you say: Mt. xxvi. 25, 64, [a rabbin-
ical formula; for exx. cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on vs.
25; al. seem to regard the answer as non-committal,
e.g. Origen on vs. 64 (opp. iii. 910 De la Rue); Wiinsche,
Erlaut. der Evang. aus Talmud usw. on vs. 25; but cf.
the éy@ eipe of Mk. xiv. 62; in Mt. xxvi. 64 WH mrg.
take it interrogatively ]. 2. the person, to whom a
thing is said, is indicated a. by a dat.: eimetv ri trun, Lk.
vii. 40, and very often; etov ipiv sc. aird, I (have just)
told it you; this is what I mean; let this be the word: Mt.
xxviii. 7; cf. Bnhdy. p. 381; [Jelf § 403, 1; Goodwin
§ 19,5; esp. (for exx.) Herm. Vig. p. 746]. wi wepi
181
>
E€LTTOV
rivos [cf. W. § 47,4], Mt. xvii. 13; Jn. xviii. 34. to say
anything to one by way of censure, Mt. xxi. 3; to cast
in one’s teeth, épeiré poe tiv mapaBoAny, Lk. iv. 23. to
tell what anything means, e. g. 7d puarjprov, Rev. xvii. 7.
b. by the use of a prep.: mpds twa [ef. B. 172 (150) ;
Kriiger § 48, 7, 13], to say (a thing) to one, as Lk. iv.
23; v. 4; xii. 16, and many other places in Luke; to
say a thing in reference to one [W. 405 (378)], Mk.
xii. 12; Lk. xviii. 9; xx. 19. 3. cirov, to say, speak,
simply and without an acc. of the obj., i. e. merely to de-
clare in words, to use language; a. with the addition ef
an adverb or of some other adjunct : dois, Mt. xxvi. 35 ;
a@oavtos, Mt. xxi. 30; xadws, Mt. xxviii. 6; Lk. xxiv. 24;
Jn. i. 23; vii. 88; ele dua mapaBodjys, making use of a
parable [see dua, A. III. 3] he spake, Lk. viii. 4 ; ev mapa-
Bodais, Mt. xxii. 1; with an instrumental dative: eie
Ady, say in (using only) a (single) word, sc. that my ser-
vant shall be healed, Mt. viii. 8 (where Rec. Adyov) ; Lk.
vii. 7. b. with the words spoken added in direct dis-
course; so a hundred times in the historical books of the
N.T., as Mt. ix. 4:sq.; viii. 32; [xv. 4 L: Tr WH], etc.;
1 Co. xii. 15; [2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. T Tr WH, (cf. 4 below) ];
Heb. i. 5; iii. 10; x. 7, [15 LT Tr WH], 30; xii. 21; Jas.
ii. 8,11; Jude 9; Rev. vii. 14; méuas eimev he said by
a messenger or messengers, Mt. xi. 2 sq. The following
and other phrases are freq. in the Synoptic Gospels: 6 d¢
dmoxpileis eirev, as Mt. iv. 4; xv. 13; Kai dmoxpiOels eter,
Mt. xxiv. 43 daoxpibeioa 4 unrnp etmev, Lk. i. 60; dmoxpibeis
6 Sipe eirev, Lk. vii. 43, etc. ; dmoxpiOévtes S€ etrov [-rav
T Tr WH], Lk. xx. 24; but John usually writes dmexpién
kal eimev: Jn.i.48 (49); 11-19; ili. 103 iv. 10, 13,17; vi.
26, 29; vii. 16, 20[ RG], 52; ix.11[RGL br.], 30, 36 [L
Tr mrg. om. WH br. x. eim.]; xiii. 7; xiv. 23; xviii. 30;
—[etrav aité héyorres, Mk. viii. 28 T WH Tr mrg., cf.
xii. 26]. ce. foll. by ére: Mt. xxviii. 7; Mk. xvi. 7; Jn.
Vi. 36; vii. 42; vill. 55; xi. 40; xvi. 15; xviii. 8; 1 Jn. i. 6,
8,10; 1Co.i. 15; xiv. 23; xv. 27 [L br. WH mrg. om.
ért]. a. foll. by ace. and inf.: ri odv épodpev ABpadp Tov
matépa Huav evpnxevac [WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. evpne.;
cf. 1 b. above] xara oapxa; Ro. iv. 1. 4. elev some-
times involves in it the idea of commanding [cf. B. 275
sq. (237)]: foll. by the inf., etre SoOyjvat avtn payeiv, Mk.
v.43; eimé 7H adeAPO pov pepicacGar per’ €pov Thy KANpo-
vopiav, Lk. xii. 13; daa dv eimwow tpiv (sc. tnpew [in-
serted in R G]), rnpeire, Mt. xxiii. 3, (Sap. ix. 8). foll.
by the acc. and inf., 6 eimay ex oxdrovs pas Mappa, 2 Co.
iv.6{[R GL mrg,, ef. B. 273 sq. (235); but Ltxt. T Tr
WH read Adpet, thus changing the construction fr. the
ace. with infin. to direct discourse, see 3b. above];
cizev aire (for €avte, see avtod) PwrnOjvat rods Sovdovs
rovrous, he commanded to be called for him (i. e. to him)
these servants, Lk. xix. 15; cf. W. § 44, 3 b.; Kriiger
§ 55, 3, 13. foll. by ia with the subjune.: Mt. iv. 3; xx.
21; Lk. iv. 3; to elreiv is added a dat. of the pers. bidden
to do something, Mk. iii. 9; Lk. x. 40 cf. iv. 3; Rev.
vi. 11; ix. 4. “Moreover, notice that iva and odpa are
often used by the later poets after verbs of command-
ing;”’ Hermann ad Vig. p. 849; ef. W. § 44.8; [B. 237
€l7rws
(204) ]. 5. By a Hebraism eimeiy ev éaur@ (like D8
393, Deut. viii. 17; Ps. x. 6 (ix. 27) ; xiii. (xiv.) 1; Esth.
vi. 6) is equiv. to to think (because thinking is a silent
soliloquy): Mt. ix. 3; Lk. vii. 39; xvi.3; xviii. 4 (else-
where also Aéyewv €v €avt@) ; and eimeiv ev TH Kapdia avTov
amounts to the same, Lk. xii. 45; Ro. x. 6; but in other
passages eimov, €eyor, ev Eavrois isi. q. €v GAAnAos: Mt.
xxi. 38; see Aéya, I. 1 d. 6. eizeiv twa with a pred-
icate accus. to call, style, one: éxeivous etre Oeovs, Jn. xX.
35; dpyas eipnxa pidrovs, Jn. xv. 15; (Hom. Od. 19, 334;
Xen. apol. Socr. § 15; Leian. Tim. § 20). [Comp.: ar-,
am-, mpo- €trrov. |
el-rrws, see ei, IIT. 14.
elpnvedw; (eipnyn) ; 1. to make peace: 1 Mace. vi.
60; Dio Cass. 77, 12, ete. 2. to cultivate or keep peace,
i. e. harmony ; to be at peace, live in peace: 2 Co. xiii. 11;
év dddndows, Mk. ix. 50; ev é€avrois [T Tr adrois], 1 Th.
v. 13; pera tivos, Ro. xii. 18; (Plat. Theaet. p. 180 b.;
Dio Cass. 42, 15, etc.; Sept.).*
elpfivn, -ns, 7, (apparently fr. eipw to join; [al. fr. etpe
i.q-Aéyo; Etym. Magn. 303, 41; Vaniéek p. 892; Lob.
Path. Proleg. p. 194; Benfey, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept.
chiefly for Di7w; [fr. Hom. down]; peace, i.e. 1. a
state of national tranquillity ; exemption from the rage and
havoc of war: Rev. vi. 4; modAz eipnun, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ;
7a [WH txt. om. ra] pos efpyynv, things that look tow-
ards peace, as an armistice, conditions for the restoration
of peace, Lk. xiv. 32; aireioOa eipnynv, Acts xii. 20;
éxew eipnyny, of the church free from persecutions, Acts
1x nO 2. peace between individuals, i. e. harmony,
concord: Mt. x. 34; Lk. xii. 51; Acts vii. 26; Ro. xiv.
17; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v.22; Eph.ii.17; iv. 3; iq. the
author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [ef. B. 125 (109)]; ev eipnyn,
where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18;
6d0s eiprjyns, way leading to peace, a course of life pro-
moting harmony, Ro. iii. 17 (fr. Is. lix. 8); per’ eipnuns,
in a mild and friendly spirit, Heb. xi. 315 sroceiv eipnyny,
to promote concord, Jas. iii. 18; to effect it, Eph. ii. 15;
(nretv, 1 Pet. iii. 11; dt@xew, 2 Tim. ii. 22; with pera
mavtov added, Heb. xii. 14; ra ris eipnyns Sioxerv, Ro.
xiv. 19 [cf. B. 95 (83); W. 109 (103 sq.)]. spec. good
order, opp. to dxatagtacia, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 3. after the
Hebr. pyw, security, safety, prosperity, felicity, (because
peace and harmony make and keep things safe and pros-
perous): Lk. xix. 42; Heb. vii. 2; eipnuy x. dopddea,
opp. to repos, 1 Th. v. 3; &v eipnyy eoti ra imdpyxovra
‘vrov, his goods are secure from hostile attack, Lk. xi.
81; dmaye eis eipnrvnv, Mk. v. 34, and ropevov eis eip. Lk.
vil. 50; viii. 48, a formula of wishing well, blessing, ad-
dressed by the Hebrews to departing friends (DYouy 7,
1S.i.17; xx. 42, ete.; properly, depart into a place or
state of peace; \ cf. B. 184 (160)]) ; mopeverOa ev eipnun,
Acts xvi. 36, and imayere ev eipnyn, Jas. ii. 16, go in peace
i. e. may happiness attend you; dmodvew twa per’ elpnyns,
to dismiss one with good wishes, Acts xv. 33; év elpnyn,
with my wish fulfilled, and therefore happy, Lk. ii. 29
(see drodve, 2 a.); mpoméurew twa ev elp. free from dan-
ger, safe, 1 Co. xvi. 11 [al. take it of inward peace or
182
elpnvixos
of harmony; cf. Mey. ad loc.]. ‘The Hebrews in invok-
ing blessings on a man called out 79 diow (Judg. vi.
23; Dan. x. 19) ; from this is to be derived the explana-
tion of those expressions which refer apparently to the
Messianic blessings (see 4 below): elpnyn T@ otk
tout, let peace, blessedness, come to this household, Lk.
x. 5; vids elpnyns, worthy of peace [cf. W. § 34, 3 N. 2;
B. 161 sq. (141) ], Lk. x. 6; €AOérw 1) eipyyn em adror, let
the peace which ye wish it come upon it, i. e. be its lot,
Mt. x. 13; to the same purport émavar. 7 cip. tp. em’ adror,
Lk. x. 6; 1 eip. bp. mpos dtpas emotpadpyta, let your peace
return to you, because it could not rest upon it, i. e. let
it be just as if ye had not uttered the wish, Mt. x. 13.
4. spec. the Messiah’s peace: Lk. ii. 14; 680s etpnyns, the
way that leads to peace (salvation), Lk. i. 79; «ip. ev
ovpar@, peace, salvation, is prepared for us in heaven,
Lk. xix. 38; evayyedi¢erOa eipnynv, Acts x. 36. 5. ace.
to a conception distinctly peculiar to Christianity, the
tranquil state of a soul assured of its salvation through
Christ, and so fearing nothing from God and content with
its earthly lot, of whatsoever sort that is: Ro. viii. 6; &v
eipnvn sc. dvres is used of those who, assured of salvation,
tranquilly await the return of Christ and the transfor-
mation of all things which will accompany that event,
2 Pet. iii. 14; [wAnpodv raons . . . eipnyns €v TO mioTeEvewy,
Ro. xv. 13 (where L mrg. ev. eipnvy)]; €xewv ev Xpore
eipnyny (opp. to ev Ta Koopm Odj exew), Jn. Xvi. 33;
éyew elp. mpos tT. Oeov, with God, Ro. v. 1, (eip. mpés twa,
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 b.; ef. Diod. 21, 12; [ef Mey. on Ro.
l.c.3; W. 186 (175); 406 (379)]); evayyediferOat eipnrynr,
Ro. x. 15[RG Tr mrg. in br.] ; 1d evayyédcov ris eipnyns,
Eph. vi. 15; in the expression eipnynv adinut krX. Jn. xiv.
27, in which Christ, with allusion to the usual Jewish
formula at leave-taking (see 3 above), says that he not
merely wishes, but gives peace; 9 eipyvn tov Xpiorou,
which comes from Christ, Col. iii. 15 [Rec. @eov]; rod
cod, Phil. iv. 7, [ef.W. 186 (175)]. Comprehensively of
every kind of peace (blessing), yet with a predominance
apparently of the notion of peace with God, eipnvn is used
—in the salutations of Christ after his resurrection, eipnyy
ipiv (09> didv’), Lk. xxiv. 36 [T om. WH reject the
cl.]; Jn. xx. 19, 21, 26; in the phrases 6 kvpuos ris eipnyys,
the Lord who is the author and promoter of peace, 2
Th. iii. 16; 6 eds ris eip. Ro. xv. 33; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii.
11; Phil. iv. 9; 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. xiii. 20; in the salu-
tations at the beginning and the close of the apostolic
Epp.: Ro. i. 7; 1 Co. i. 3; 2Co. i. 2; Gal.i. 3; vi. 16;
Eph. i. 2; vi. 23; Phil. i. 2; Col. i. 2; 1 Th.i. 1; 2 Th.
j. 23 iii. 16; 1 Tim.i.2; 2 Tim.i. 2; Tit.i.4; [Philem. 3];
1 Pet. i. 2; v.14; 2 Pet.i.2; 2Jn.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); [Jude
2]; Rev. i. 4. Cf. Kling in Herzog iv. p. 596 sq. 8. Vv.
Friede mit Gott; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 83 b.;
[ Otto in the Jahrbb. fiir deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678
sqq.; cf. W. 549 (511)]. 6. of the blessed state of
devout and upright men after death (Sap. iii. 3): Ro.
iAO%
elpnvixds, -7), -Ov, 1. relating to peace: émorjpat, the
arts of peace, Xen. oec. 1, 17; épya, ibid. 6,1; xpeta,
elpnvotrovéw
Diod. 5, 31; often in 1 Macc. 2. peaceable, pacific,
loving peace: Jas. iii. 17; (Plat., Isoc., al. ; Sept.). Ss.
bringing peace with ut, peaceful, salutary, (see eipnyn, 3):
feb. xii. 11.*
elpnvo-rovew, -@: [1 aor. elpnvoroinaa]; (eipnvorowos) ;
to make peace, establish harmony: Col. i. 20. (Prov. x.
10; in Mid., Hermes ap. Stob. eclog. ph. 1, 52 [984].)*
elpnvorroids, -dv, masc. a peace-maker (Xen. Hell. 6, 3,
4; Dio Cass.) ; pacific, loving peace: Mt. v. 9; [others
(cf. A. V.) dispute this secondary meaning ; see Meyer
ad loc. ].*
elpw, fut. gpa, see etov.
els, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting
entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards,
for, among. It is used
A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going,
coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying,
throwing, sending, ete. ; 1. of a place entered, or
of entrance into a place, into; and_ a. it stands be-
fore nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or
one in which an object can be hidden: as es (r9v) mow,
Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; eds r.
oixov, Mt. ix. 7; cvvaywynv, Acts xvii. 10; mAotov, Mt. viii.
23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; OaAacoay, Mt. xvii. 27;
&Bvooov, Lk. viii. 31; odpavov, Lk. ii. 15; xdopov, Jn. i.
9; iii. 19, etc.; ra (Oca, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6;
dmroOnknv, Mt. iii. 12; eis ra Ora, Lk. i. 44; eds ras Covas
or ¢avnv, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; eis dépa, 1 Co. xiv.
9; eis wip, Mk. ix. 22, etc. ; ets avrdv, of a demon entering
the body of a man, Mk. ix. 25. with ace. of pers. (Germ.
zu jemand hinein), into the house of one (cf. Kiihner
§ 432, 1,1a.; [Jelf § 625, 1 a.]): els tiv Avdiay, Acts
xvi. 40 Rec., but here more correctly rpés with G LT Tr
WH; cf. W. § 49, a, a. (ets €uaurdy, Sap. viii. 18). yivopae
eis with ace. of place, see yivoua, 5g. b. before names
of cities, villages, and countries, eis may be rendered
simply to, towards, (Germ. nach ; as if it indicated merely
motion towards a destination; [cf. W. § 49, a, a.]); as
eis ‘IepoodAupa, eis Aayackér, eis Beporay, etc. ; eis Sraviay,
Alyumrov, TadtAaiar, ete. ; but it is not to be so translated
in such phrases as eds tHv “Iovdaiav yqy, ete., Jn. ili. 22 ;
Mt. ii. 12 cf. 20, 215; ets ra pépn ras TadcAatas, Mt. ii. 22,
ete. c. elliptical expressions are — eis adov, sc. Sdpov,
Acts ii. 27 [Rec.], 31 [not T WH]; see dns, 2. émirrodal
eis Aazackor, to be carried to D., Acts ix. 2; 7 dtakovia
pou 7 ets [L Trmrg. ev] ‘Iepova. (see in dcaxovia, 3), Ro.
xv. 31; cf. Bnhdy. p. 216. d. efs means among (in
among) before nouns comprising a multitude; as, eis
tovs Anoras, Lk. x. 36; eis [L mre. emt] tas axdvOas, Mk.
iv. 7 (for which Lk. viii. 7 gives ev péow tév dxavbar) ;
or before persons, Mk. viii. 19 sq.; Lk. xi. 49; Jn. xxi.
25> ‘Actsxvin> 6 5) xxi/29.>).xxil.) 21; 30 so xxvanel fen bee
amoateAAw, 1 b.; or before a collective noun in the
singular number, as els rv Sjuov, Acts xvii. 5; xix. 30;
sis tov dyAov, Acts xiv. 14; eis rov Aadv, Acts iv.17. 2.
Tf the surface only of the place entered is touched or
occupied, eis, like the Lat. in, may [often] be rendered
on, upon, (Germ. auf), [sometimes by unto, — (idioms
183
,
Els
vary) ], to mark the limit reached, or where one sets foot.
Of this sort are eis ro mépay [| A. V. unto], Mt. viii. 18 ;
xiv. 22; Mk. iv. 35; els ray yqv, Lk. xii. 49 (CL T Tr WH
emi); Acts xxvi. 14; Rev. viii. 5,7; ix. 3; xii. 4,9; els
Thy KAivny, Rev. ii. 22; eis dddv, Mt. x. 5; Mk. vi. 8; Lk.
i. 79; eis rhv dddy, Mk. xi. 8° [L mre. év w. dat., 8° RG
Lis els T. aypov, Mt. xxii. 5; Mk. xiii. 16; els TO épos
[or eis dp.; here A. V.uses into], Mt. v. 1; xiv. 23; xv.
29; xvii.1; Mk. iii.13; ix. 2; Lk. ix.28; Jn. vi.3, etc.;
els Ta Seta, Jn. Xxi. 6; oreipew eis re (rH oapka), Gal. vi.
8 [here A. V. unto; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; avariarew eis
témov, Lk. xiv. 10; d€xouat eis tas dykddas, Lk. ii. 28;
Tumtew els THY Kearny, Mt. xxvii. 30, [cis thy ovaydva,
Lk. vi. 29 Tdf.; pamigew eis r. cvaydva, Mt. vy. 39 LT Tr
txt. WH, where RG emi], and in other phrases. 3.
of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity
of a place; where it may be rendered to, near, towards,
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 81 sq. [for exx. only]): eis r.
Oadacoar, Mk. iii. 7G LT Trmrg.; eis réduy, Jn. iv. 5 cf.
28; els TO prqpetor, Jn. xi. 31, 38; xx. 1,3 sq. 8; eyyitew
eis etc. Mt. xxi. 1; Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xviii. 35; xix. 29; eis
tovs ppaypovs, Lk. xiv. 23; mimrew eis r. rddas, at, Jn. xi. 32
[T Tr WH aps]; kdivew 76 rpdcemor eis r. ynv, Lk. xxiv.
5; ets tHv xetpa, on, Lk. xv. 22. 4. of the limit to
which; with acc. of place, as far as, even to: Adpmew
éx...eis, Lk. xvii. 24; with ace. plur. of pers. fo, unto:
Acts xxiii. 15 (eis tuas, for RG mpds) ; Ro. v. 12; xvi. 19;
2 Co. ix. 5 [L Tr mpds]; x. 14. 5. of local direc-
tion; a. after verbs of seeing: éraipew tovs dpOah-
pos els Tt, twa, Lk. vi. 20; Brérew, Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii.
22; Acts iii. 4; dvaBdéerew, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16;
Acts xxii. 13; éuBdemew, Mt. vi. 26; drevifew,q.v. b.
after verbs of saying, teaching, announcing,
etc. (cf. Germ. die Rede richten an etc.; Lat. dicere ad
or coram; [Eng. direct one’s remarks to or towards] ;
exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Bnhdy. p. 217; Passow
i. p. 802°; [L. and S. s.v. I. b. 3]; Kriiger § 68, 21, 6):
KNpUToEW, AS hv KNnpiocwr eis Tas TUVaywyas a’TaY Eis
éAnv tnv Tad. preaching to the synagogues throughout all
Galilee, Mk. i. 89 (Rec. év tais ovvay., as Lk. iv. 44
[where T WH Tr txt. now eis; ef. W. 416 (387) ; B. 333
(287); but in Mk. ].c. T Tr txt. WH now read 7A6ev
knpvocev KTr.]); 7d evayy: els ddov T. kécpov, Mk. xiv. 9;
els mavra ta €6vn, Mk. xiii. 10; Lk. xxiv. 475 eis dyads, 1
Th. ii. 9; dmayyéAdew [Ree. dvayy.] 7 eis, Mk. v. 14; Lk.
viii. 34; yvwpifew, Ro. xvi. 26 ; evayyeriverbar, 2 Co. x.
16; ets dyads, 1 Pet. i. 25; Aeyew [Rec. ; al. Nadeiv] eis tov
kéopov, Jn. viii. 26; [Aadeiv rov Adyor eis Thy Tepyny, Acts
xiv. 25 T WH mrg.]; dvapapripecOa and paprupeiv, Acts
Xxili. 11.
II. of Time; 1. it denotes entrance into a
period which is penetrated, as it were, i. e. duration
through a time, (Lat. in; Germ. hinein, hinaus) : eis rov
aiava, and the like, see aidy, 1 a.3 eis Td Sunvexés, Heb.
vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 143; els rn modda, Lk. xii. 19; rH eme-
pwokovon (jpuépa) eis play caBBdrer, dawning into [A. V.
towards] the first day of the week, Mt. xxviii.1. Hence
2. of the time in which a thing is done; because he
>
els
who does or experiences a thing at any time is conceived
of as, so to speak, entering into that time: eis tov Karpov
avray, in their season, Lk. i. 20; eis ro peAXov sc. €ros,
the next year, [but s. v. péAAw, 1. Grimm seems to take
the phrase indefinitely, thenceforth (cf. Grk. txt.)], Lk.
xiii. 93 eis TO pera&d oaBBarov, on the next sabbath, Acts
xiii. 42; els rd waduv, again (for the second, third, time),
2 Co. xiii. 2. 3. of the (temporal) limit for which
anything is or is done; Lat. in; our for, unto: Rev.
ix. 15; els tv avpiov sc. nuépay, for the morrow, Mt. vi.
34; Acts iv. 3;
nuépavy Xpiorov, Phil. i. 10; ii. 165 eis yepav arodvtpo-
cews, Eph. iv. 30. 4. of the (temporal) limit to
which; unto i. e. even to, until: Acts xxv. 21; 1 Th. iv.
On the phrase
eis Muepav kpioews, 2 Pet. ii. 9; ili. 7; ets
15; eis exeivny tH nuepav, 2 Tim. i. 12.
els TéAos, See TéAOS, 1 a.
B. Used MeTAPHORICALLY, eis I. retains the force
of entering into anything, 1. where one thing is
said to be changed into another, or to be separated into
parts, or where several persons or things are said to be
collected or combined into one, ete.: droBaivew ets tt,
Phil. i. 19; yiveoOau eis tu, see yivoua, 5 d.; eivar eis tu,
see eiyi, V. 2 [a. fin.] c. and d.; orpépew tu eis tt, Rev.
xi. 6; peraorpepew, Acts ii. 20; Jas. iv. 9; peradAdooes,
Ro. i. 26; peracynparifer@a, 2 Co. xi. 13 sq.3 ovvotKo-
Sopueto Oa, Eph. ii. 22; xrigew twa eis, Eph. ii. 15; Nap-
Bavew te eis, Heb. xi. 8; Aoyi€er@ar els Tr, see NoyiCouat,
la. éaxiobn eis dvo, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38, (Polyb.
2, 16,11 oyi¢era: eis S00 pépn); Séew eis Seopds, Mt. xiii.
30 [G om. Tr WH br. eis]; ets év reXevcovc Oa, Jn. xvii.
23; ovvayew eis ev, Jn. xi.52. 2. after verbs of going,
coming, leading, etc., efs is joined to nouns desig-
nating the condition or state into which one passes,
falls, etc. : eivepxeoOar eis THY BaciXd. Tev ovpay. or Tov beod,
see Buowdeia, 3 p. 97°; eis tr. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8; xix. 17;
xxv. 46; eis r. yapav, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; eis koNaow aidnor,
ib. 46; epyeoOa eis xpiow, Jn. v. 24; eioepew, cioépy.
eis metpagpov, Mt. vi. 13; xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WH
€AGnre] ; EpxerOa eis Td xetpov, Mk. v. 26 ; eis ameheypdv,
Acts xix. 27; eis mpoxomny, Phil. i. 12; peraBaiver eis r.
Conv, Jn. v.24; 1 Jn. iii. 145; mopeverOar eis Odvarov, Lk.
Xxll. 333 Umdyew eis am@Aeav, Rev. xvii. 8, 11; tmayew
or ropeverOa eis eipnyny, see eipnyn, 3; troarpépey eis
diapOopay, Acts xiii. 34; ouvrpéxew els avaxvawv, 1 Pet.
iv. 4; Baddew eis Odi, Rev. ii. 22; mepirpérew eis
paviay, Acts xxvi. 24; peraorpepew and orpépew eis tr,
Acts ii. 20; Rev. xi. 6; ddnyetv eis r. adnOecav ['T ev rH ad. ],
Jn. xvi. 13; atypadrorifew eis imaxonv, 2 Co. x. 53 mapa-
didova eis Oriyev, Mt. xxiv. 9; eis Oavarov, 2 Co. iv. 11;
eis xpiua Oavarov, Lk. xxiv. 20; cuyxdelew eis dmeibecar,
Ro. xi. 32; é€umimrew eis kpiva, eis dvediopor Kai rayida,
eis metpagpov, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.3 vi. 9. 3. it is used of
the business which one enters into, i. e. of what he
undertakes : elcépyeoOat cis T. korov Twos, to take up and
carry on a labor begun by another, Jn. iv. 38; tpéxew
eis moAeuov, Rev. ix. 9; Epyopat eis droxadvWes, I come,
in my narrative, to revelations i. e. to the mention of
them, 2 Co. xii. 1.
184
lg
II. eis after words indicating motion or direc-
tion or end; 1. it denotes motion to something,
after verbs of going, coming, leading, calling, ete., and
answers to the Lat. ad, to: xadeiv rua eis ydpov, ydpous,
deimvor, ete. to invite to, ete., Mt. xxii. 3 ; Lk. xiv. 8, 10;
Jn. li. 25 kadety tia eis peravoray, etc., Lk. v. 32; 2 Th.
ii. 14; dyew tid cis peravorav, Ro. ii. 4; emurrpépew eis
To pas, Acts xxvi. 18; exrpémecOar cis paravodoyiay, 1
Tim. i. 6; peraridecOat eis erepov evayyer. Gal. i. 6; yopi-
cat eis petavo.av, 2 Pet. iii. 9, ete. 2. of ethical di-
rection or reference; a. univ. of acts in which the
mind is directed towards, or looks to, something : BAérew
eis mpoowmov Twos (see Brew, 2¢.); dmoBdérew eis T.
pcOarodociav, Heb. xi. 26; adopay eis... Incvdy, ib.
xii. 2 (see A. I. 5 a. above); muotevew eis twa, and the
like, cf. under moreva, mioris, €Amice, [éAmis], ete. ; éme-
Oupiay éxew els tu, directed towards ete. Phil. i. 23;
Aéeyew eis Twa, to speak with reference to one, Acts ii. 25
(Diod. Sic. 11, 50); A€yew re eis Tr, to say something
in reference to something, Eph. v. 32; Nadeiv tu ets TH,
to speak something relating to something, Heb. vii. 14;
dpvvew els tt, to swear with the mind directed towards,
Mt. v. 35; evdoxeiv els twa, Mt. xii. 18 [RG]; 2 Pet.i.
17. b. forone’s advantage or disadvantage; a.
for, for the benefit of, to the advantage of: eis nas, Eph.
i. 19; efs tpas, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but WH br.]; Eph. iii. 2;
Col. i. 25; mXouretv eis Geov, to abound in riches made
to subserve God’s purposes and promote his glory, Lk.
xii. 21 [so too W. 397 (371); but cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad
loc.]; Christ is said mdovureiv eis mdavtas, to abound in
riches redounding to the salvation of all men, Ro. x. 12;
mAcovatew ets tt, Phil. iv. 17; é€Xenuoodvny roreiv eis TO
eévos, Acts xxiv. 17; eis rovs mrwxovs, for the benefit
of the poor, Ro. xv. 26; es robs dyious, 2 Co. viii. 45 ix.
1, cf. 133; xomeay ets twa, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11; eis Xporor,
to the advantage and honor of Christ, Philem. 6; épya-
(ecOai te eis teva, Mk. xiv. 6 Rec.; 3 Jn. 5; Necroupyds eis
ra @6ym, Ro. xv. 16; yevopeva eis Kadapvaovp (for Ree.
év Kamepvaovp [cf. W. 416 (388); B. 333 (286)]), Lk.
iv. 23. §. unto in a disadvantageous sense, (against) :
pndeév Gromov eis avtov yevopevoy, Acts xxvill. 6. c. of
the moodor inclination, affecting one towards any
person or thing; of one’s mode of action towards;
a. in a good sense: dyamn ets Twa, unto, towards, one,
Ro. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 4,8; Col. i.4, 1 Th. iii. 12; rd adré ets
dAAnrous ppoveiv, Ro. xii. 16; edcoropyos, ib. 10; dido-
€evos, 1 Pet. iv. 9; ypnoros, Eph. iv. 32; dmoxarah-
Adooev ets adrév [al. adr. see avrov], Col. i. 20 [cf. W.
397 (371)]. B. in a bad sense: duapradvew eis tiva (see
dpaptdve, b.); Aéyov eieiv and Bracdnpety cis twa, Lk.
xii. 10; Mk. iii. 29; BAdodnpos eis twa, Acts vi. 11;
Braohnuaer Aێyo eis twa, Lk. xxii. 65; emBovdn ets Twa,
Acts xxiii. 30; €y@pa, Ro. viii. 7; avtidoyia, Heb. xii.
3; Oappeiv eis twa, 2 Co.x.1. a. of reference or
relation; with respect to, in reference to; as regards,
(cf. Kiihner ii. 408 c.; [Jelf § 625, 3 e.]): Lk. vii. 30;
Acts xxv. 20 [T Tr WH om. eis]; Ro. iv. 20; xv. 2; 2
Co. x. 16; xiii. 3; Gal. vi. 4; Eph. iii. 16; Phil. i. 5; ii.
ets 185
22; 1 Th. v. 18; eis ri eSicracas; ‘ (looking) unto what
(i. e. wherefore) didst thou doubt ? Mt. xiv. 31; cf. Her-
mann ad Oed. C. 528’ (Fritzsche). of the considera-
tion influencing one to do anything: peravoeiv eis
kipuypa twos, at the preaching of one, i. e. out of regard
to the substance of his preaching, Mt. xii. 41; dé€yerOai
tuva eis dvoua twos, Mt. x. 41 sq.; eis duarayas ayyeA@v
(see Suarayn), Acts vii. 53. e. with ace. of the pers.
towards (Germ. nach einem hin), but in sense nearly
equiv. to the simple dat. to, unto, after verbs of ap prov-
ing, manifesting, showing one’s self: dmodedery-
pévos eis tuas, Acts ii. 22 ; evderEwv evdeixvycOat, 2 Co. viii.
24; havepwbevres eis tmas, 2 Co. xi. 6 (LT Tr WH dhave-
pocartes SC. THY yvaow). 3. it denotes the end;
and a. the end to which a thing reaches or extends,
i.e.measure or degree: [épepev els rprdxovra, Mk. iv.
SP rtxt. WH; ick B. 30 .(27);.L. and S.s. v. A. ET
2]; «is ra cperpa, 2 Co. x. 13; eis meptoceiay, 2 Co. x. 15;
eis brepBodny (often in Grk. writ., as Eur. Hipp. 939;
Aeschin. f. leg. § 4), 2 Co.iv.17. of the limit: eis 76 co-
dpoveiy, unto moderation, modesty, i. e. not beyond it, Ro.
xii. 3. b. the end which athing isadaptedtoattain
(a use akin to that in B. I. 2 b.; [ef. W. 213 (200)]):
apyos k. dkaprros eis tt, 2 Pet. i. 8; evOeros, Lk. ix. 62 RG;
xiv. 35 (34); e¥ypnoros, 2’ Tim. iv. 11; ypyommos, 2 Tim.
ii. 14 RG, Svvapovtpevos, Col. i. 11; Oeodidaxros, 1 Th. iv.
9; Bpadus, Jas. i. 19; codds, Ro. xvi. 19; Pas els drrokd-
Au, Lk. ii. 32; Svvapes fs etc. Ro. i. 16; Heb. xi. 11;
avayevvay eis, 1 Pet. i. 3 sq.; avaxatvdw, Col. ili. 10; co-
hitew twa eis, 2 Tim. iii. 15; ioxverv eis, Mt. v.13. c.
the end which one has in view, i.e. object, purpose;
a. associated with other prepositions [cf. W. § 50,5]: ék
mliorews eis riot, to produce faith, Ro. i. 17, cf. Fritzsche,
Meyer, Van Hengel, ad loc. ; €& adrod cai S60 adrod kai eis
avtov, answering to his purposes (the final cause), Ro. xi.
36; €€ ob Ta WavTa Kal jpets eis adTov, 1 Co. viii. 6; d? adrod
kal eis avrov (see da, A. III. 2 b. sub fin.), Col. i. 16;
8¢ avrod eis avrdv, Col. i. 20. B. shorter phrases: eis
rovro, to this end, Mk. i. 38; [Lk. iv. 43 RG Tr mrg.];
els avré rovro [R. V. for this very thing], 2 Co. v. 5; eis
rovro... wa ete. Jn. xvili. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 8; Ro. xiv. 9; 2
Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 6; eis ai’rd tovro... draws etc. Ro.
ix. 17; wa, Col. iv. 8; Eph. vi. 22 ; ets ri, to what purpose,
Mt. xxvi. 8; Mk. xiv. 4; eis 6, to which end, for which
cause, 2 Th. i.11; Col. i. 29. y. univ.: Bamri¢o els twa,
tt (see Bamrifa, II. b. aa.); madaywyds eis rov Xprorov,
Gal. iii. 24; cuvyxexAeropevot eis tr. miotiv, that we might
the more readily embrace the faith when its time should
come, Gal. iii. 23; povpovpevor eis THY cwrnpiar, that
future salvation may be yours, 1 Pet. i. 5; dyopdgew eis
tT. €optny, JN. xiii. 29; ets dAeOpov capxds, 1 Co. v. 5; eis
rT. nuetepay SidackaXiay, Ro. xv. 4, and in many other exx.
esp. after verbs of appointing, choosing, preparing, do-
ing, coming, sending, etc.: xetwat, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. i. 17
(16); 1 Th. iii. 3; raoow, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; raooopa, Acts
xiii. 48 ; ddopitw, Ro. i.1; Acts xiii. 2; mpoopi{w, Eph.
1.53 1 Co. ii. 7; aipéopar, 2 Th. ii. 13; rideuar, 1 Tim. i.
12; 1 Pet. ii. 8; xataprifw, Ro. ix. 22 sg.; amooredAo.
>
els
Heb. i. 14; mwéurw,1 Th. iii. 2, 5; Col. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 16
[L br. efs]; 1 Pet. ii 14; pxoua, Jn. ix.39; moveiv te ets,
1 Co. x. 31; xi. 24. Modelled after the Hebr. are the
phrases, éyetpewv twa eis Baridéa, to be king, Acts xiii. 22 ;
avatpepeoOai twa eis viov, Acts vii. 21; réOeud ce els
pas ebvav, Acts xili. 47 (fr. Is. xlix. 6 Alex.); cf. Gesenius,
Lehrgeb. p. 814; B. 150 (131); [W.§ 32,4b.]. 8. ets 71,
indicating purpose, often depends not on any one pre-
ceding word with which it coalesces into a single phrase,
but has the force of a telic clause added to the already
complete preceding statement; thus, eis d0€av rod Geod,
Ro. xv. 7; Phil. i. 11; ii. 11; ets PdBov, that ye should
fear, Ro. viii. 15 ; eis evderEw, that he might show, Ro.
iii. 25; eis Cwiv aimvoyv, to procure eternal life (sc. for
those mentioned), Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27, (in which passages
the phrase is by many interpp. [e. g. De Wette, Mey.,
Lange; cf. W. 397 (371) note] incorrectly joined with
G\deoOae and pevew [cf. Thol., Luthardt, al.]); Ro. v.
21; 1 Tim. i. 16; Jude 21; add, Mt. vill. 4; xxvii. 7;
MS vids Acts:xt! 18% "Reh xe4ePhilst 25; forges
Tim. ii. 25; Rev. xxii. 2, etc. . eis ro foll. by an inf.,
a favorite construction with Paul (cf. B. 264 (227) sq.;
Harmsen in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874,
pp. 345-360), is like the Lat. ad with the gerundive. It
is of two kinds; either aa. efs ro combines with the
verb on which it depends into a single sentence, as mapa-
decovow aitov... eis TO €unaiEa, (Vulg. ad deludendum),
Mt. xx. 19; eis 70 cravpwOjva, Mt. xxvi. 2; oixodounOn-
cera eis TO Ta ElOwADOUTA ecbiew, (Vulg. aedificabitur ad
manducandum idolothyta), 1 Co. viii. 10; py oikias ovK
éxere eis TO eo Olew k. rive, 1 Co. xi. 22; eis ro mpooepew
ddpa te kai bvoias kabiorara, (Vulg. ad offerenda munera
et hostias), Heb. viii. 3; add, Heb. ix. 28; 1 Th. ii. 16;
iv. 9; Phil. i. 23; or Bf. efs rd with the inf. has the
force of a separate telic clause (equiv. to iva with the
subjunc.), [Meyer (on Ro. i. 20) asserts that this is its
uniform force, at least in Ro. (cf. his note on 2 Co. viii.
6); on the other hand, Harmsen (u. s.) denies the telic
force of e’s ré before an inf. Present; cf. also W. 329
(309); esp. B. as above and p. 265 note; Ellic. on 1
Thess. ii. 12; and see below, d. fin.]: Lk. xx. 20
RG; Acts iii. 19 [T WH apes]; Ro. i. 11; iv. 16, 18;
Mieed Ween: 2s escv. 8; 135-1 Cor ix: 185x265 Gal im 14;
Eph. i. 12,18; 1 Th. ii. 12,16; iii.5; 2Th.i. 5; ii. 2,10;
Jas. i. 18; Heb. ii. 17 ; vii. 25; ix. 14, 28; xii. 10; xiii. 21;
eis TO py, lest, 2 Co. iv. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 7. dd. the end by
which a thing is completed, i.e. the result or ef-
fect: Actsx.4; Ro. vi. 19 (eis r. dvopiay [but WH br.],
so that iniquity was the result); x. 10; xiii. 14; 1 Co.
xi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 16; Eph. v. 2, ete.; e’s ro with inf. so
that [cf. BB. above]: Ro. i. 20; 2 Co. viii. 6.
C. CONSTRUCTIONS in some respects PECULIAR.
1. Various forms of pregnant and brachylogical
construction (W. §66, 2; [less fully, B. 327 (282)];
Bnhdy. p. 348 sq.) : cae teva eis etc. to save by trans-
lating into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 [see cd¢w, b. sub fin.]; dca-
cote, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Sept. Gen. xix. 19, and often in
Grk. writ.) ; uicOovcbat épyaras eis rt. aumedova, to go
els 186 els
into etc. Mt. xx. 1; €Aevbepody eis etc. Ro. viii. 213 dzo-
diddvae Twa eis Atyumtov, Acts vii. 9; evoxos els yéevvar,
to depart into ete. [cf. B. 170 (148) note], Mt. v. 22; xAav
eis twas, to break and distribute among etc. Mk. viii. 19;
adopariverOa eis Td EvAov, Acts xvi. 24; KraaOar xypvodv
eis r. Cavas, Mt. x. 9; evreruAcypevoy eis eva roror, rolled
up and laid away in ete. Jn. xx. 7. 2. Akin to this is
the very common use of eis after verbs signifying rest
or continuance in a place, because the idea of a pre-
vious motion into the place spoken of is involved (cf. W.
§ 50, 4b.; B. 332 (286) sq.; Kiihner ii. p. 317; [Jelf
§ 646,1]; Bnhdy. p. 215; [yet cf. also exx. in Soph. Lex.
8. V. eis, 1]) : edpéOn eis ”ACwroy, sc. transferred or carried
off to, Acts viii. 40, cf. 39 mvedpa Kupiov Hpmace Tov Pidur-
mov, (Esth. i. 5 rois €Oveou rots evpeOeiow cis tT. modw;
so havetcOa is foll. by eis in 2 Mace. 1.33; vii. 22). det
He THY EoptHy moijoat eis Iepoo. sc. by going, Acts xviii. 21
Rec. ; likewise €éroiuws ¢yw amobaveiv els ‘Iepoo. Acts xxi.
13 (Hoaoriwy cis "ExBatava ameOave, Ael. v. h. 7, 8);
ovveBarev nyiv eis”"Aoocov, Acts xx. 14; 7 peAdovaoa doa
eis nuas amoxadkuvpOnvar, which shall be revealed (and
conferred) on us, Ro. viii. 18. Kxarotkeiv eis 7oAW, eis yav,
to come into a city and dwell there, Mt. ii. 23; iv. 13;
Acts vii. 4, [cf. Num. xxxv. 33; 2 Chr. xix.4ete.]; also
maporxetv, Heb. xi. 9 (évorxetv, Xen. an. 1, 2, 24); orjvar,
éotnxevat (because it is nearly equiv. to to have placed
one’s self) ets tt, Lk. vi. 8; Jn. xx. 19, 26; 1 Pet. v. 12;
ka@joGa, to have gone unto a place and to be sitting
there, Mk. xiii. 3; 2 Th. ii. 4, (on this use of these two
verbs in Grk. auth. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1344 sq.; [ef. W.
and B.u.s.]). eivae ets with ace. of place see eiui, V. 2 a.;
oi eis T. oikov pov sc. ovres, Lk. ix. 61; Tois eis paxpdv sc.
ovor (Germ. ins Ferne hin befindlich), Acts ii. 39. ouva-
yerGa foll. by eis with acc. of place: to go toa place and
assemble there, Mt. xxvi. 3 and Acts iv. 5 RT, (1 Esdr.
v.46 (47); ix. 3). Sometimesa word implying motion,
occurring in the same sentence, seems to have occasioned
the connection of a verb of rest with eis, as it were by
a kind of attraction [B. u.s.]: eEepyopevos nidriCero eis 7d
épos, Lk. xxi. 37; dxovoas... dvta atria eis Atyumrov
[ Ree. otra év Aly.] eEaréoreev etc. Acts vii. 12 ; rapada-
govoly vpas eis ovvedpta k. els Tuvvaywyas Sapnoecbe, Mk.
xiii. 9 [W. 416 (387), B. 333 (287)]; Umaye, vivae [ but
L br.] e’s rt. xokvpSnOpav, Jn. ix. 7, although virrecOat
eis te can also be used (as Aover Oa eis TO Badaveiov, Alci-
phr. epp. 3, 43; eis Aouvrpévas, Athen. 10 p. 438 e.; Aov-
ew Twa eis axadny, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 71), since the water
with which one bathes flows down into the pool. Cf.
Beyer, De praepositt. eis et évin N. T. permutatione.
Lips. 1824, 4to.
D. ADVERBIAL PHraAsss (cf. Matthiae § 578 d.):
eis TEs (See Tédos, 1 a.) ; eis TO mau, see A. IT. 2 above;
eis TO mavtehés, perfectly, utterly, Lk. xiii. 11 [ef. W. § 51,
1 c.]; eis Kevov (see xevos, 3); eis bmdvrnow and eis ardv-
thaw, see each subst.
In composition eis is equiv. to the Lat. in and ad.
els, pia, ev, gen. €vos, pias, évos, a cardinal numeral,
one. Used 1. univ. a. in opp. to many; and
a. added to nouns after the manner of an adjective:
Mt. xxv. 15 (opp. to révre, dv0) ; Ro. v. 12 (opp. to max
tes); Mt. xx. 13; xxvii. 15; Lk. xvii. 34 [but L WH br.];
Acts xxviii. 13; 1 Co. x. 8; Jas. iv. 138 [R G], and often;
mapa pilav sc. mAnyny [W. 589 (548); B. 82 (72)], save
one [W. § 49, g.], 2 Co. xi. 24; with the article, 6 cis
avOpwros, the one man, of whom I have spoken, Ro. vy.
15. 8B. substantively, with a partit. gen.,— to denote
one, whichever it may be: play tay évrohav, one command-
ment, whichever of the whole number it may be, Mt. v.
19; add, Mt. vi. 29; xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42; LK. xii. 27;
Xvii. 2, 22; or, that one is required to be singled out
from a certain number: Lk. xxiii. 39; Jn. xix. 34, ete.
foll. by ék with the gen. of a noun signifying a whole, to
denote that one of (out of) a company did this or that:
Mt. xxii. 35; xxvi. 21; xxvii. 48; Mk. xiv. 18; Lk. xvii.
15; Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 8, 70; xii. 2 [T WH Tr mrg. in
br.], 4 [Tr om. é«]; xiii. 21, 23 [Rec. om. é«]; xviii. 26;
Rev. v. 5; vii. 13; ix.13; xiii. 3 [Rec. om. ek]. y. absol.:
Mt. xxiii. 8-10; Heb. ii. 11; xi. 12; and where it takes
the place of a predicate, Gal. iii. 20 [ef. W. 593 (551) ],
28 (ye that adhere to Christ make one person, just as
the Lord himself) ; cuvayec eis ev, to gather together into
one, Jn. xi. 52; movety ra auorepa ev, Eph. ii. 14; with
the article, 6 eis, the one, whom I have named, Ro. v. 15,
19. b. in opp. to a division into parts, and in ethi-
cal matters to dissensions: év o@pa, moda peAn, Ro.
xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12, 20; év eivas, to be united most
closely (in will, spirit), Jn. x. 30; xvii. 11, 21-23; ev éu
mvevpatt, pia Woyx7, Phil. i. 27 cf. Acts iv. 32, (cf. Cie.
Lael. 25 (92) amicitiae vis est in eo, ut unus quasi ani-
mus fiat ex pluribus) ; dé puas (see amo, III. p. 59°),
Lk. xiv. 18. ¢. with a negative following joined to the
verb, eis... ov or pn, (one... not,i. e.) no one, (more
explicit and emphatic than ovdeis): €v €& adtay ov mecei-
ra, Mt. x. 29; besides, Mt. v.18; Lk. xi. 46; xii. 6; this
usage is not only Hebraistic (as that language has no
particular word to express the notion of none), but also
Greek (Arstph. eccl. 153; thesm. 549; Xen. an. 5, 6, 12;
Dion. Hal. verb. comp. 18, etc.), cf. W. 172 (163) ; [B.
121 (106)]. 2. emphatically, so that others are
excluded, and eis is the same as_- a. aa single (Lat. unus
i. q. unicus) ; joined to nouns: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. viii. 14
(ovK... €t yy €va Gprov); Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xii. 52; Jn. xi.
50; vii. 21; 1 Co. xii. 19; Eph. iv. 5,ete.; absol.: 1 Co.
ix. 24; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); 1 Tim. ii. 5; Jas. iv. 12, ete.;
ovdé eis, not even one: Mt. xxvii. 14; Jn. i. 83 Acts iv.
32; Ro. iii.10; 1 Co. vi. 5 [R G]; otk gor ews évds [there
is not so much as one], Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3;
cf. Lat. omnes ad unum, alltoaman. Neut. év, one thing,
exclusive of the rest; one thing before all others: Mk. x.
21; Lk. xviii. 22; x. 42 [but WH only txt.]; Jn. ix. 25;
Phil. iii. 13 (14); Jas.ii.10. b. alone: ovdeis.. . ei py
eis 6 Oeds, Mk. ii. 7 (for which in Lk. v. 21 pdvos 6 Oeds) ;
Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19. c. one and the same (not at
variance with, in accord with one’s self): Ro. iii. 30;
Rev. xvii. 13, 17 [Lom.]; xviii. 8; 7d &v poveiv, Phil.
ii. 2 [WH mrg. aird]; év eivat are one, i.e. are of the
els
same importance and esteem, 1 Co. iii. 8; eis rd év etvae
(see eiui, V. 2d.),1Jn.v. 8; more fully rd év cai 7d adro,
1 Co. xii. 11; €v Kai rd adrd Tim, 1 Co. xi. 5. 3. the
numerical force of eis is often so weakened that it hardly
differs from the indef. pron. ris, or from our indef. article
(W. 117 (111), [ef. 29 note 2; B. 85 (74)]): Mt. viii. 19
(eis ypauparevs) ; xix. 16; xxvi. 69; Jn. vi. 9 (madaprov
év, where T Tr WH om. and L br. év) ; Rev. viii. 13; ix.
13, (Arstph. av. 1292; Xen. mem. 3, 3,12; Plat. de rep.
6 p. 494 d.; legge. 9 p. 855 d., etc.; esp. later writ. ;
PRabr ilo iiss 3 Msdr: iv. 18; Gen: xxi. 15:5)\2 Sin.
18; Judith xiv. 6]; so the Hebr. tmx, Dan. viii. 3; Gen.
xx iss Soils de Kieowxi. (xx.) 13; see Gesenius,
Lehrgeb. p. 655); eis tus (Lat. unus aliquis), a certain
one; one, I know not who; one who need not be named:
with a subst. Mk. xiv. 51 (L Tr WH om. eis); or foll.
by a gen. Mk. xiv. 47 where L Tr om. WH br. ris; foll.
by ék, e&, with gen.: Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xi. 49, (& tu Trav
pnuarov, Judith ii. 13, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Wet-
stein on Mk. xiv. 51; Matthiae § 487). 4. it is used
distributively [W. § 26, 2; esp. B.102(90)]; a. eis...
kal eis, one... and one: Mt. xvii. 4; xx. 21; xxiv.40 LT
Tr WH, 41; xxvii. 38; Mk.iv.8[RGL WH mrg.], 20
(RG LTrmrg. WH mrg. in br.]; ix. 5; x.37; xv. 27; Lk.
ix. 33; Jn. xx. 12; Gal. iv. 22; (in Grk. auth. eis pev... eis
dé, as Aristot. eth. 6, 1,5; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4); with the art.
prefixed, 6 eis the one, Lk. xxiv.18RG; foll. by 6 eis, the
one... the other, Mt. xxiv. 40 RG; foll. by 6 érepos, Mt.
vi. 24: Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 13>; xvii. 34 R WH; xviii. 10
RG TWH mrg.; Acts xxiii. 6; efs (without the art.)
...6 repos: Lk. xvi. 13°; xvii. 34 G@ LT Tr; xviii. 10
L Tr WH txt.; wévte... beis .. . 6 GAXos, Rev. xvii. 10.
b. eis exaoros, every one: Actsii. 6 ; xx. 31; Eph. iv. 16;
Col. iv. 6; foll. by a partit. gen.: Lk. iv. 40; xvi. 5; Acts
LENS eRva2 Fy ext 126 30 Cos xii 18:3, Ephiive halle
ii. 11; cf. B. 102 (89) sq.; dva eis exaoros (see ava, 2),
Rev. xxi. 21. ce. a solecism, com. in later Grk. (ef.
Leian. soloec. [Pseudosoph.] § 9; W.§ 37,3; B. 30 (26)
sq-; Fritzsche on MK. p. 613 sq.; [ Soph. Lex.s. v. caOeis]),
is xa@ eis, and in combination xadeis, (so that either cara
is used adverbially, or eis as indeclinable): 6 Ka@ eis, i. q.
eis €xaoros, Ro. xii. 5 (where L T Tr WH 716 ka@ eis, as
respects each one, severally ; ef. what is said against this
reading by Fritzsche, Com. iii. p. 44 sq., and in its favor
by Meyer); with a partit. gen. 3 Mace. v. 34; eis ca&
[T WHTr mre. xara] cis, every one, one by one, Mk. xiv.
19; Jn. viii. 9; Ka@ va, kad év, (as in Grk. writ.), of a
series, one by one, successively: xa@ év, all in succession,
Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; xa@ &va madvtes, 1 Co. xiv. 31
(Xen. venat. 6, 14); xca® év &eaorov, Acts xxi. 19 (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 6, 22 (27); Ages. 7, 1); bpeis oi kad va Exacros,
ye severally, every one, Eph. v. 33. 5. like the Hebr.
IMs, eis is put for the ordinal mpéros, first [W. § 37, 1;
B. 29 (26)]: pia caBBarev the first day of the week, Mt.
xxviii. 1; Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx. 1, 19; Acts
xx. 7; 1Co. xvi.2 [LT Tr WH pia caBBarov]; (in Grk.
writ. so used only when joined with other ordinal num-
bers, as eis kal rpinxoords, Hdt. 5, 89; Diod. 16, 71. Cic.
187
ela épxopat
de senect. 5 uno et octogesimo anno. [Cf. Soph. Lex.
Suivi)
elo-dyw: 2 aor. eionyayov; [pres. pass. elodyopac] ; [fr.
Hom. down]; Sept. chiefly for #713; 1. to lead in:
tid foll. by e/s with ace. of place, Lk. xxii. 54 [Tr mrg,
br.]; Acts ix. 8; xxi. 28, 29, 37; xxii. 24 (for Rec. aye
oOa); de, Lk. xiv. 21; the place into which not being
expressly noted: Jn. xviii. 16 (se. ets ry atAnv) ; Heb. 1,
6 drav ... eioaydyn, Aéyet, God, having in view the time
when he shall have again brought in the first-born into the
world (i. e. at the time of the mapovaia) says ete. 2.
to bring in, the place into which not being expressly
stated: Acts vii. 45 (sc. ets tyv ynv); Lk. ii. 27 (se. es
TO tepdv). [COomP.: map-e.oaye. |*
elo-akovw : fut. eivaxovooua; Pass., 1 aor. eionxovcOnv;
1 fut. eicaxoveOjcopa ; Sept. very often for pnw, but
also for 73) to answer; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 8, 97
down ; to hearken unto, to give ear to; i. e. 1. to give
heed to, comply with, admonition; to obey (Lat. obedio
i. e. ob-audio) : twos, 1 Co. xiv. 21, (Deut. i. 43 ; ix. 23;
Sir. iii. 6, etc.). 2. to listen to, assent to, a request;
pass. to be heard, to have one’s request granted; a. of
persons offering up prayers to God: Heb. v. 7 (on which
see dd, I. 3d. fin.); Mt. vi.7. b. of the prayers offered
up: Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 31, (Ps. iv. 2; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.)
29) (26), etc.).*
elo-S€xopar: fut. eiadéEouai; to receive kindly, i. e. con-
textually, to treat with favor: twa, 2 Co. vi. 17. [From
Pind. and Soph. down. Syn. cf. d€xopuar, fin.] *
elo-euyst, inf. elouevar; impf. eionew; (ete [cf. B. 50
(43)]); [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, enter: foll. by eis
with the name of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete.
Pt. il. p. 11), Acts iii. 3; xxi. 26; Heb. ix. 6 [W. 267
(251)]; mpds rea, Acts xxi. 18.*
elo-€pxopar; fut. eloeAevooua; 2 aor. eianAOov, 2 pers.
plur. eionddare (Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -Oere), impv. eioeAOare
(Mt. vii. 13 but R G-@ere, [3d pers. sing. -Oaroa Mk. xiii.
15, RG -Oérw]); see amépxouat, init.; pf. eioeAndvéa, 3
pers. plur. eiveAnAvdav (Jas. v. 4, for RG eioeAnrAvdaow,
see yivouat, init.); Sept. mostly for 8/3; to go or come
into or in; to enter; 1. prop., of men and of animals:
foll. by e’s with specification of the place (cf. Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq.), as into a house,
into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts
xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place,
— when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix.
25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.]; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 cf.
25; xxiv. 3; Acts i. 13; v. 7,10; x. 2535 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq. ;
or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii.
24; xvii. 7; eis is also added to signify among: Acts
xix. 80; xx. 29; eioépy. Sea twos, to enter (a place)
through something: &:a rys rviAns, to enter the king-
dom of God (compared to a palace) through the gate,
Mt. vii. 13; Lk. xiii. 24; dca trys Oupas eis rT. addAnv, In.
x. 1 sq.; add, Mt. xix. 24 GT Tr txt. WH txt.; [Mk. x.
25 R* Lmrg. Trmrg.]; Lk. xviii. 25 RG T Tr txt. WH;
cicépx- td THY oTeynv, by entering to come under the
roof, i. e. enter my house, Mt. viii. 8; with adverbs:
eloépyouat
émov, Mk. xiv. 14; Heb. vi. 20; &8e, Mt. xxii. 12; foo,
Mt. xxvi. 58; eis with ace. of pers., into one’s house,
Acts xvi. 40, but on this pass. seeeis, A. I. 1a. eiaépy. mpos
tiva, to one, i.e. into his house, visit, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. i.
98 "Acts x. 3; xi. 35 xvi 40'GT TrwH; xxviii. 8;
Rev. iii. 20; to an assembly of persons, Acts xvii. 2.
Moreover the following deserve notice: a. the phrase
civépxerOat kal e&€pxecOa, to go in and out, (the Hebr.
MANY) NZ, or reversed Nj3} ANY, usually denotes one’s
whole mode of living and acting, Deut. xxviii. 6; 1S.
xxix. 6, etce.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 184 sq.), is used
of familiar intercourse with one: év ravti xpov@ @ eiondOe
x. eénrdev ef’ yas 6 Kuptos, equiv. to elondOe eh Hyas x.
e&p be ap jy. Acts i. 21, (Eur. Phoen. 536 és otkous eion be
x. e&nr@ [W. 624 sq. (580); but ef. B. 390 (334)]); fig-
uratively, of moral pursuits unimpeded by difficulties,
Jn. x. 9. b. eioépx. eis is joined with nouns designat-
ing not a place, but what occurs in a place: eis rovs
yapous, Mt. xxv. 10; els rv yapav Tov kuplov, 21, 23. c.
ciaedOewv eis twa is used of demons or of Satan taking
possession of the body of a person: Mk. ix. 25; Lk. viii.
30; xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27. d. of things: —as of food, that
enters into the eater’s mouth, Mt. xv. 11; Acts xi. 8;
figuratively, hope is called a@yxupa eivepxopern eis TO €ow-
TEpov Tov KatareTdoparos, i.e. we firmly rely on the hope
that we shall be received into heaven, Heb. vi. 19; cries
of complaint are said cicépy. eis Ta Ord Twos, i. e. to be
heard, Jas. v. 4; of forces and influences: mvedpa Cons
eiandGev ev adtrois (Tr om. WH br. ev; Rec. én’ adrovs
[B. 338 (291) ]), a pregnant construction, the breath of life
entered into and remained in them, Rev. xi. 11 [W. § 50,
4; B. 329 (283) ]. 2. Metaph. used, a. of entrance
into any condition, state of things, society, employment :
eis tT. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45; els
t. Baowd. Tay ovpavar or Tod Oeod (see Bacireia, 3 p. 97):
Tovs eiaepxouevovus, that are trying to enter, or rather,
that have taken the road to enter, are (engaged in) en-
tering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14); Lk. xi. 52; used absol. of
those who come into (i.e. become members of) the
Christian church, Ro. xi. 25, (hence in 1 Co. v. 12 sq. of
éow and oi €&w are distinguished) ; eis r. kardavow, Heb.
iii. 11,18; iv. 1,3, 5 sq.10sq.; ets rav doéav, Lk. xxiv. 26;
cis metpacpor, to come (i. e. fall) intotemptation, Mt. xxvi.
41; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WH €)@nre]; Lk. xxii. 40, 46; eis
Tov Korrov Tivos (see eis, B. 1. 3), Jn. iv. 38. cioépyeod.
eis T. koopor, to enter the world [cf. W. 18], is a. i. q.
to arise, come into existence, begin to be [i. e. among men]:
used thus of sin and death, Ro. v.12; of death, Sap. ii.
24; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4; of idols, Sap. xiv. 14. B.
of men, to come into life: whether by birth, Antonin. 6,
56; or by divine creation, Philo, opif. mund. § 25. y.
to come before the public: 2 Jn.7 [Rec.]; to come to men,
of Christ, Jn. xviii. 37; eivepyop. eis tr. kdopov, when he
cometh into the world, i.e. when he was on the point of
entering it, viz. at his incarnation, Heb. x. 5. b. of
thoughts coming into the mind: eiondbe Siadoyiopos ev
avrois, a pregnant construction, there came in and estab-
lished itself within [al. take ev outwardly: among (cf.
188
7
€lTa
dcadoy. fin.) ] them, Lk. ix. 46 [ef. W. 413 (385)]. The
Grks. fr. Hom. down use eiaépxeoOai teva of thoughts and
feelings, as pdBos, pévos, mdOos, etc. [cf. W. 427 (398).
Comp. en-, map-, cvv- evoepxopat. |
elo-Kah€opar, -ovuat, (mid. of eioxadéw): 1 aor. ptep.
cioxaeodpevos; to call in unto one’s self, to invite in to
one’s house: rwa, Acts x. 23. [Polyb., al.]*
elc-o80s, -ov, 7), (600s), [fr. Hom. on], an entrance, i. e.
both the place or way leading into a place (as. a gate), and
the act of entering ; only in the latter sense in the N. T.
With gen. of place, rév dyiwv, entrance into the holy place,
i.e. reception into heaven, Heb. x. 19 [but in 20 appar-
ently called 686s]; eis rt. Baowdeiav tov Kupiov, 2 Pet. i.
11; of the act of coming forward to administer an office,
Acts xiii. 24; with mpos twa added, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1.*
elo-rSa, -@: 1 aor. cicerndnoa; to spring in: eis Tov
dyAov, Acts xiv. 14 Rec. (see éxmnddw) ; to rush in impet-
uously, Acts xvi. 29. (Xen., Dem., al.; Sept. Am. v.19.) *
elo-rropevopar (pass. of eiomopeva to lead into, Eur. El.
1285); impf. eioeropevdunv (Mk. vi. 56); to go into,
enter ; 1. prop. a. of persons: foll. by eis with ace.
of place, Mk. i. 21; vi. 56; xi.2; Acts iii. 2; dmov, Mk.
v. 40; ov, Lk. xxii. 10[R G, cf. B. 71 (62); W. § 54, 7];
without specification of place where that is evident from
the context, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33; xix. 30; xara rovs otkous,
to enter house after house [A. V. every house, see xara,
II. 3 a.a.], Acts viii. 3; mpds tua, to visit one at his
dwelling, Acts xxviii. 30; elomopeverOar x. exmopeverbar
pera Tivos, to associate with one, Acts ix. 28 (evamuidy Tivos,
Tob. v. 18; see elaépyoua, 1 a.). b. when used of
things it isi. q. to be carried into or put into: so of
food, which is put into the mouth, Mk. vii. 15, 18, [19];
Mt. xv. 17, (see ciogpyoua, 1 d.). 2. metaph. : | eis
tv Bacwrelav Tov beod, Lk. xviii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; see
Baoureia, 3 p. 97>]; of affections entering the soul, Mk.
iv. 19; see elrépyoua, 2b. (Of the earlier Grk. writ.
Xen. alone uses this verb, Cyr. 2, 3, 21; Sept. often
for $13.) *
elo-rpéxw: 2 aor. eicedpapov; to run in: Acts xii. 14.
[Thuc., Xen., al.] *
elo-hépw; 1 aor. eionveyka; 2 aor. elonveyxov; [pres.
pass. eloépopar; fr. Hom. down]; to bring into, in or to;
a. ri, foll. by e’s with acc. of place, 1 Tim. vi. 7; pass.
Heb. xiii. 11; rid sc. eis t. oikiav, Lk. v. 18 sq.3 [Twa
emt r. ovvaywyds ete. Lk. xii. 11 T Tr txt. WH]; ri es
Tas akods twos, i.e. to tell one a thing, Acts xvii. 20
(pépew re eis Ta Sra twos, Soph. Aj. 149). b. to lead
into: Twa els wetpacpov, Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4. [Comp.:
mrap-eiapepw. | *
elra, adv. of time, then; next; after that: Mk. viii. 25 ;
Lk. viii. 12; Jn. xiii. 5; xix. 27; xx. 27; Jas.i. 15; with
the addition of a gen. absol. to define it more precisely
Mk. iv. 17; asin classic Grk., it stands in enumerations,
to mark a sequence depending either on temporal
succession, as Mk. iv. 28 (see eirev); 1 Co. xv. 5-7 (etra
[T érecra, so in mrg. Tr WH]... éwetra... &rerra...
era [T @recra, so in mrg. L Tr WH]); 1 Co. xv. 24
(mecca... etra); 1 Tim. ii. 13; or on the nature of the
ELTE
things enumerated, 1 Co. xii. 28 (mpérov . . . 8evrepov
...Tplirov...érera...eira for which L T Tr WH
%nerra); [1 Tim. iii. 10]; in arguments it serves to add
a new reason, furthermore (Germ. sodann) : Heb. xii. 9.*
etre, see ei, III. 15.
elrey a very rare [Ionic] form for etra (q. v.) : Mk. iv.
28 TWH. (Cf. Kuenen et Cobet, Nov. Test. ete. praef.
p. xxxiii.; Lob. Phryn. p. 124, also Pathol. Gr. Element.
ii. 155; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. and s. v. émecrev.]*
elwOa, see Oa.
éx, before a vowel é&, a preposition governing the gen-
itive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as
separation from, something with which there has been
close connection; opp. to the prepositions eis into and ev
in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [cf.
W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used
I. of PLace, and 1. univ. of the place from
which; from a surrounding or enclosing place,
from the interior of: dpros, dyyedos, pas €& ovpavod,
Jn. vi. 31 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG dé]; Gal. i. 8;
dvarodn, Svvayis €& Uyyous, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after
verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, free
ing, removing, releasing, etc. : jxew x THs “Iovdaias
eis r. TadsAaiay, Jn. iv. 47; éképyerOat éx twos out of the
body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here
L mrg. dé]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the
body, Mk. v. 30 [ef. B. 301 (258) ; W. 346 (324) ; Mey.
ed. Weiss ad loc.]; ek rév pynpetov, Mt. viii. 28; xxvii.
53; éxmopevecOa, Mt. xv. 11, 18 sq.; xaraBaivew ex
rod ovpavod, Mt. xxviii. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33; €&
ayew, Acts xii. 17; pevyetv, Acts xxvii. 30 ; Kader, Mt. ii.
15; metaph. ék tov oxdrovs eis Td Has, 1 Pet. ii. 9; exBar-
Ae Td Kdpcos ex Tod dpOadpod, Mt. vii. [4 (R Gard) ], 5;
Lk. vi. 42 (opp. to év 76 dpOadp@) ; Tl éx rod Onoavpod, Mt.
xii. 35 [but see under II. 9 below] ; xiii. 52; ré Sdaipovtoy
éx twos, out of the body of one, Mk. vii. 26; dmoxvAtev
tov didov ex [L Tr txt. and; cf. W. 364 (342) note] rps
Oipas, Mk. xvi.3; atpew, Jn. xx. 1 sq.; xwew, Rev. vi. 14;
od ew ex yns Aiyunrov, Jude 5; diaca ew €x rhs Oadacons,
Acts xxviii. 4. Metaph., é« tis xetpds tevos, out of the
power of one [cf. B. 182 (158)]: after eێpyeoOa, Jn. x.
39; after dmayew, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; after dpmagew, Jn.
x. 28 sq.; after éfaipetoOa, Acts xii. 11; after pueo@ar,
Lk. i. 74; after cwrmpia, Lk. i. 71. after mivew, of the
thing out of which one drinks [differently in II. 9 below]:
x Tov mornpiou, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 1 Co. xi. 28; é«
merpas, 1 Co. x.4; éx rov ppearos, Jn. iv. 12; after éabiew,
of the place whence the food is derived, éx rod iepod, 1 Co.
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read raéxxrd.]. of the place forth
from which one does something : d:dacxety x Tov mAotov,
Lk. v. 3 [here Tdf. év etc.]. It is joined also to nouns
designating not a place, but what is done in a place:
eyeiperOa €x rod Seimvov, Jn. xiii. 4; avadvew ex Tov
yapov, Lk. xii. 36. 2. from the midst (of a group,
number, company, community) of many; a. after
verbs of going, leading, choosing, removing,
etc. a. before collective nouns, as efoAeOpevw ex Tov
haov. Acts iii. 23; mpoBiBatw or cvpBiBalw ex Tod dydov,
189
>
eK
Acts xix. 33; éxdéyew ex rov kdopov, Jn. xv. 19. ee
pecou twav ahopifey, Mt. xiii.49; eépyecOa, Acts xvii.
33; apmafew, Acts xxiii. 10; e€aipewv,1 Co. v. 13; éx
maons puAns Kk. yAwoons ayopafew, Rev. v. 9; éx mavros
yéevous ovvdyev, Mt. xiii. 47. B. before plurals: duordvat
ria €x twov, Acts ili. 22; é« vexpdov, Acts xvii. 313; dvi-
oratai Tis €x vexpav, Acts x. 41; xvii. 3; eyeipew twa éx
vexpov, Jn. xii. 1, 9,173; Acts iii. 15; iv. 10; xiii. 30;
Heb. xi. 19, ete.; 7 avaoracis éx vexpov, Lk. xx. 35; 1 Pet.
i. 3; dvdyewv Twa ex vexpov, Ro. x. 7; éxdéyew, Acts i. 24;
xv. 22; xadeiv, Ro. ix. 24; éyevero Cytnots ex Trav etc. Jn.
iii. 25 [but cf. II. 1 b.; W. 368 (345)]. b. before words
signifying quantity: after eis, as Mt. x. 29; xxvi. 21;
Lk, xvii. 15, and often; mwoAAoi, Jn. xi. 19, 45, ete.; of
mAeious (mAeioves), 1 Co. xv. 63 ovdeis, Jn. vii. 19; xvi.
5, and elsewhere; xiAcddes ek maons duds, Rev. vii. 4;
after the indef. ris, Lk. xi. 15; xii.13; Jn. vi. 64; vii.
48; ris yur ex rod dxAov, Lk. xi. 27; with rwés to be
added mentally [ef. W. 203(191) ; B. 158 (138)]: Jn. ix.
40 [(?) better, vii. 40]; xvi. 17; Rev. xi. 9, (1 Esdr. v.
45 (44)); twas: Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xi. 49; xxi. 16; 2 Jn.
4; Rev. ii. 10; cf. Fritzsche, Conjectanea in N. T. p. 36
note; after the interrog. ris, who? Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xi.
5, ete.; tis marnp, Lk. xi. 11 [L T Tr WH]; preceded
by a generic noun: avOpwros éx tay ete. Jn. iii. 1. c.
elvat €k Two, to be of the number, company, fellowship,
etc., of ; see eiui, V. 3 a. 3. from a local surface,
as sometimes the Lat. ex for de; down from: xataBaivew
€x tov dpovs (Hom. Il. 13, 17; Xen. an. 7, 4, 12; Sept.
Ex. xix. 145 xxxii.1; Deut. ix. 15; x. 5; Josh. ii. 23),
Mt. xvii. 9 (for the more com. azéd rod dp. of Rec. and the
parallel pass. Mk. ix. 9 [here L WH txt. Tr mrg. éx];
Lk. ix. 37; [cf. Mt. viii. 1]); Opi& ex rns xeadtjs amoh-
Avra (unless we prefer to regard éx as prompted here
by the conception of the hair as fixed in the skin),
Lk. xxi. 18; Acts xxvii. 34 [here L T Tr WH azo; cf.
W. 364 (342) note]; éxmimrew ex rav xeipar, of the chains
with which the hands had been bound, Acts xii. 7;
kpeuacOa €x twos, Acts xxviii. 4, (1 Mace. i. 61; 2 Mace.
vi. 10; so the Grks. fr. Hom. down); gayeiv éx rov
@vovaornpiov, the things laid upon the altar, Heb. xiii.
10. Akin to this is é£eAOeiv é« tov Oeov, from an abode
with God (for the more usual azo r. Oeov), Jn. viii. 42.
4. of the direction whence; éx defav, Lat. a dex-
tra, lit. from i.e. (Germ. zu) on the right, see dekos; so
ex Seftas, €& dpiorepas, sc. ywpas [or xetpos which is
sometimes expressed ; W. 592 cf. 591; B. 82 (72)], (also
in Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 15); e& évavrias, over
against, Mk. xv. 39 (Hdt. 8, 6; Sir. xxxvii. 9; 1 Mace.
iv. 34; Sap. iv. 20); metaph. [W. § 51, 1d.] 6 e€ evar
rias [A. V. he that is of the contrary part], our opponent,
adversary, Tit. ii. 8; éx putdv, from the roots, i. e. utterly,
Mk. xi. 20 (Job xxviii. 9; xxxi. 12). 5. of the con-
dition or state out of which one comes or is brought:
aatew ex Oavarov, Heb. v. 7; Jas. v. 20; pyerOar ex
[Lehm. aro] Odipews, Rev. vii. 14; peraBaivew ex rod
Oavarov eis tr. Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14; eyepOjvae e€
Umvov, Ro. xiii. 11 [ef. W. 366 (344) note]; Cavres ex
ex 190
vexpav, alive from being dead (i. e. who had been dead
and were alive again), Ro. vi. 13; ¢w7 ex vexpav i. e. of
those that had been vexpol, Ro. xi. 15, (€Aevbepos é€x dovAov
kal mAovotwos ex mTwXov yeyovws, Dem. p. 270 fin.; e&k
mAovaiov mevnra yever Oat kai ex Baorrews iStarnv parjvat,
Xen. an. 7, 7, 28; yiyvouar rupdds éx Sedopxoros, Soph.
O. T. 454; €dadov e& avdpis yeverOa, Palaeph. 3, 2;
add, Lys. adv. Ergocl. init.; Tac. ann. 1, 74 ex pauperi-
bus divites, ex contemtis metuendi). Also of the state
out of the midst of which one does something : 逫 7oA\Ans
Oripews ypadew, 2 Co. ii. 4. 6. of any kind of sep-
aration or dissolution of connection witha thing
or person [cf. B. 157 (138)]: dvamaveoOa éx (released
from) rév kénov, Rev. xiv. 13; dvavnpew ex (set free
from) rijs Tod SuaBoAov mayidos, 2 Tim. ii. 26; peravodr éx
etc. Rev. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 20 sq.; xvi. 11; émorpépew [LT
Tr WH éroorp.] éx ({L dad], by severing their connec-
tion with) r7js evroAns, 2 Pet. ii. 21; tpetv twa ex etc. to
keep one at a distance from ete. [ef. B. 327 (281)], Jn.
xvii. 15; Rev. iii. 10; also darnpeiv, Acts xv. 29; vixav éx
twos, by conquest to free one’s self from the power of one
[ef. B. 147 (128); W. 367 (344) ], Rev. xv. 2; iyodaGa ex
tis ys, to be so lifted up as to dissolve present relations
to the earth [‘ taken out of the sphere of earthly action’
Westcott], Jn. xii. 32; édevOepos ex mavrwv (elsewhere
always amo twos), 1 Co. ix. 19. 7. Hebraistically :
exdixeiy TO aiud Tivos €x xetpos Twos (TD DI Op), 2 K.
ix. 7), to avenge the blood (murder) of one at the hand
of (on) the slayer, Rev. xix. 2 [B. 182 (158)]; xpivew ro
Kpiva twos €x twos, to judge one’s judgment on one,
vindicate by vengeance on [cf. B. u. s.], Rev. xviii. 20
(cf. Sept. Ps. exviii. (cxix.) 84).
II. of the Oriain, Sourcr, CAUSE; 1. of gen-
eration, birth, race, lineage,nativity; a. after
verbs of begetting, being born, ete.: év yaorpi éxew
éx twos, Mt. i. 18 cf. 20; Kxoirny éyew ek r. Ro. ix.10; yer
vay twa ex with gen. of the woman, Mt. i. 3, 5 sq. 16;
yiveoOat ex yuvads, to be born of a woman, Gal. iv. 4
cf. 22 sq.; yervacOa e& aipdrav, ex OeXnpatos capkos, Jn.
i. 13; ék ris oapkos, Jn. ili. 6; €x mopvetas, Jn. viii. 41 ;
eyetpew Twi rexva ex, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; (ris) éx xaprod
tis 6ogvos aitov, Acts ii. 30 (Ps. exxxi. (cxxxii.) 11); 9
ex diaews axpoBvoria, Ro. ii. 27. In a supernatural
sense: To mvetpa TO ex Oeov sc. dv, from the divine nature
[ef. W. 193 (182)], 1 Co. ii. 12 cf. Rev. ii. 11; men are
said yervaoOar €x mvevparos, Jn. iii. 5 sq. 8; yeyevynuévor
eivat éx Oeod (see yervdw, 2 d.), and to the same purport
evar éx Ocod, 1 Jn. iv. 4, 6; v. 19, (seeeiué, V. 3 d. [and
ef. 7 below]). b. elvar, yevéoOat, Epyebar, etc., éx with
the name of the city, race, people, tribe, family, ete., to
spring or originate from, come from: éx Naaper eivat, Jn.
1.46 (47); €« modews, i. 44 (45) ; €& Sv, sc. warépwr [?], Ro.
ix. 5; €& olkov tivos, Lk. i. 27; ii. 43 ék yéevous, Phil. iii.
5; Acts iv. 6; ‘ESpatos e& “EBpaiwv, Phil. iii. 5; ex pudjs,
Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. xi.1; é& Iotda, Heb. vii.
14; ex omépparos twos, Jn. vii. 42; Ro.i. 3; xi. 1; with-
out a verb: e& é6vav duaprwdoi, sinners of Gentile birth,
Gal. ii.15; of the country to which any one belongs: eiva
2
€x
ex THs eovoias ‘Hpwdov, Lk. xxiii. 7; e& émapxias, Acts
xxiii. 34; 6 dv ex ths ys, In. iii. 31. 2. of any oth-
er kind of origin: «amvos éx ris Sd&ns Tov Oeod, Rev.
xv. 8; ék ray Iovdaiwy éori, comes from the Jews, Jn.
iv. 22; eivat x twos, to proceed from any one as the au-
thor, Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17, 22; Ro. ii. 29; 2Co. iv. 7; 1
Jn. ii. 16, 21, ete.; with éoriv to be mentally supplied: Ro.
xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6, (see ets, B. II. 3c. a.); 1 Co. xi. 12;
2 Co. iii.5; v.18; Gal. v.85; gpya ek rod marpds pov, works
of which my father is the author, i. e. which I, endued
with my father’s power, have wrought, Jn. x. 323 oixo-
Souzn €x Oe0d, whose author is God, 2 Co. v.13 ydpiopa, 1
Co. vil. 7; dedopuevov éx rod marpéds, Jn. vi. 65; add, Jn.
xviii. 3; 1 Co. vii. 7. 9 &« Oeod Sixavoodvn, that comes
from God, i.e. is adjudged by him, Phil. iii. 9; 7 && ipay
ev jpiv [WH txt. nyu. év dp.] ayarn, love proceeding from
you and taking up its abode in us, i. e. your love the in-
fluence of which we feel [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 157
(137)], 2 Co. viii. 7; 6 €€ dpav (ydos, your zeal, 2 Co. ix.
2[RG; cf. W.u.s.note; B. u.s.]; Braodnpia &x twos,
calumny from i. e. disseminated by, Rev. ii. 9 [not Rec. ];
eivat €& ovpavod, e& avOpwrar, see eipi, V. 3 c.; with the
suggested idea of a nature and disposition derived from
one’s origin: ov« éaTw éx Tod Kéapov Tovrou, is not of
earthly origin nor of earthly nature, Jn. xviii. 36; é« rns
yas éorw, is of an earthly nature, Jn. iii. 31; ék tis yas
Aadeiv, to speak as an earthly origin prompts, ibid.; hu-
man virtues are said to be from God, as having their
prototype in God and being wrought in the soul by his
power, 7 ayamn éx Tov Geod eorwv,1Jn.iv.7. 3. of the
material out of which a thing is made, etc.: 9 yury ex
rov avdpds, from “ one of his ribs,” 1 Co. xi. 12; orépa-
vov e& axavOav, Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2; add, Jn. ii. 15;
ix/6; Rosix. 213.1 Co. xvi 47\5) Revo xviii.d2§ xxi. 20,
Akin is 4. its use to note the price, because the
money is, as it were, changed into that which is bought,
(the simple gen. of price is more common, cf. W. 206
(194); [B. § 132, 13]): ayopager re x revos, Mt. xxvii. 7,
(Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 24); xraaOat ex, Acts i. 18, (avet-
oa éx, Palaeph. 46, 3 sq.); cupdevety ex Snvapiov (be-
cause the agreement comes from the promised denary [cf.
W. 368 (345); B.u. s.]), Mt. xx. 2. Cognate to this is the
phrase roveiv éavt@ idovs €k Tov papwva, Lk. xvi.9. 5.
esp. after neut. and pass. verbs, ex is used of the cause
(whether thing or person) by which the act expressed
by the accompanying verb is aided, sustained, ef-
fected: dpereicOar & twos, Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11;
(nprova bat, 2 Co. vii. 9 ; Numeta Oat, 2 Co. ii. 2; esp. in the
Apocalypse: ddcKeicOa, Rev. li. 113; amo@avety, vill. 11;
[dmoxreiverOat], ix. 18; pwriferOa, xviii. 1 ; oxoticverOat
[LTWH axorovebat |, ix. 2; mupoda Gat, iil. 18; yepifer Oat,
xv. 8 (cf. Is. vi. 4); Jn. vi. 135 yewew, Mt. xxiii. 25
(where L om. Tr br. e&); mAnpodoOu, Jn. xii. 3 [Treg.
mare. éemAnobn|; xoptaterOa, Rey. xix. 21; mdAoureiv,
xviii. 3, 19; peOvoxerOat, peOvew, xvii. 2, 6 [not Treg.
marg.]; Cv ex, Ro. i. 17; 1 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iii. 11;
avénow rroveiaOar, Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; reAevodaGat,
Jas. ii. 22; wexomiaxas, Jn. iv. 6, (Ael. v. h. 3, 23 &k rot
“
> .
Ks
morov exadevoev). Also after active verbs: yepifer, Jn. vi.
13; Rev. viii. 5; woritew, Rev. xiv. 8; [on éx with the
gen. after verbs of fulness, cf. B. 163 (142 sq.); W. 201
(189) ]. 6. of that on which a thing depends, or
from which it results: ov« €or 7 Cw ex Tay Umapyor-
tov, does not depend upon possessions, i. e. possessions
cannot secure life, Lk. xii. 15; evmopia nay éore ex THs
épyacias tavrns, Acts xix. 25; 1d €€ tpay, as far as de-
pends on you, Ro. xii. 18; in the Pauline phrases dikatos,
Suxatocvvn, Sixavodv ex migtews, e€ Epywr, see [the several
words, esp. ] p. 150; e& (as the result of, in consequence of)
épyov AaBeiv 7d mvevpa, Gal. iii. 2,55; && dvacracews AaBew
tovs vexpovs, Heb. xi. 35; eotavpwbn && aoOeveias, 2 Co.
xiii.4; add, Ro. xi.6; Gal. iii. 18, 21 sq.; Eph. ii. 8 sq.
7. of the power on which any one depends, by which
he is prompted and governed, whose character he
reflects: €« Oeov (equiv. to Oedmvevarov) Nadeiv, 2 Co. ii. 17;
in the Johannean expressions, eivac éx Oeod, Jn. viii. 47
(in a different sense above, II. 1 a.) ; &« rod diaBddov, ex
Tov movnpou, ek Tod Kdcpou, see eiui, V.3 d.; €k THs adnOeias
eivat, to be led by a desire to know the truth, be a lover
of the truth, Jn. xviii. 37; 1Jn. iii. 19; of éx vopov, the
subjects of the law, Ro. iv. 14; of é& épiOeias equiv. to
of épbevopevor [cf. éprOeia], Ro. ii. 8; 6 €x miorews equiv.
to 6 motevowr, Ro. ili. 26; iv.16. etvae éx twos also means
to be bound to one, connected with him; to have relations
with him; see etyi, V. 3d.; hence the periphrasis of éx
mepttouns, the circumcised: Acts xi. 2; Ro. iv. 12; Gal.
ii. 12; of Ovres ex mepitours, Col. iv. 11; of éx meptrouis
motoi, Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. 8. of the
cause for which: éx tov rovov, for pain, Rev. xvi. 10;
of the reason for (because of) which: Rev. viii. 13; xvi.
11; é« rovrov, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; ef. Meyer on these
pass. [who urges that éx rovrov used of time denotes
“the point of departure of a temporal series” (W. 367
(344)): from this time on, thenceforth. 'This argument
seems not to be decisive in the second example (Jn. xix.
12), for there the verb is in the imperfect. On the
use of the phrase in classic Grk. see L. and S. s. v. é«, II.
1; Kriiger §68,17, 7. Cf. our Eng. upon this, hereupon,
in which the temporal sense and the causal often seem
to blend. See below, IV. 1 fin.]. 9. of the supply
out of (from) which a thing is taken, given, received,
eaten, drunk, ete. [cf. W. § 30, 7 and 8; B. 159 (139)
sqq.]: AapBaver ex, Jn. i. 16; xvi. 14 sq.; d:d0var, diadi-
Sova, Mt. xxv. 8; Jn. vi. 11; 1 Jn.iv. 13; éoOiew, 1 Co.
ix. 7; xi. 28; dayeiv, Jn. vi. 26, 50sq.; Rev. ii. 7; pere-
xew, 1 Co. x. 17 (but see peréxw) ; miverv, Mt. xxvi. 29;
Mk. xiv. 25; Jn. iv. 13 sq.; Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3, (differ-
ently in I. 1 above) ; AaXety ex ray (Siwy, Jn. viii. 44; é€k
Tov Tepiooevpatos THs Kapdias, Mt. xii. 34; exBadrecy, ib.
35 [this belongs here only in case @jncavpos is taken in the
sense of treasure not treasury (the contents as distin-
guished from the re pository); cf. I. 1 above, and s. v.
Onoavpos |; Badrew ex (a part), Mk. xii. 44; Lk. xxi. 4.
10. of that from which any thing is obtained: ovd-
heyewv €& dxavOav, tpvyav ex Barov, Lk. vi. 44; Oepicew
ex, Gal. vi. 8. 11. of the whole of which anything
191 eK
is a part: 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. [cf. W. 368 (345) ]. 12.
of the source; a. univ.: é& éuavrov ovk €AaAnoa, Jn.
xil. 49, (oddev ex caurjs Aéyers, Soph. El. 344). b. of
the source of conduct, as to be found in the state of
the soul, its feelings, virtues, vices, etc.: é« xapdias,
Ro. vi. 17; &€k Wuyns, Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 23, (1 Mace.
Vill. 27; €x THs Wuxns domdfecOa, Xen. oec. 10, 4); &k
xadapas kapdias, 1 Tim. i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22
[L T Tr WH om. ka.]; && OAns ths Kapdias . . . Wuyijs
... Ovavoias xr. MK. xii. 30 sqq. (Sap. viii. 21; 4 Mace.
vii. 18); éx miorews, Ro. xiv. 23; && eiduxpiveias, 2 Co. ii.
17; e& epiOeias, Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet see epieia]. cc. of
the source of knowledge: xarnyeioOa éx, Ro. ii. 18;
dxovew ék, Jn. xii. 343; yewooxew, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44;
1 Jn. iv. 63 emomrevew, 1 Pet. ii. 12. Seckvivar, Jas. ii.
18; dpi¢ew, to declare, prove to be, Ro. i. 4 [ef. s. v.
épi¢w, 2 and Mey. ad loc. ]. 13. of that from which a
rule of judging or acting is derived; after, accord-
ing to, [cf. W. 368 (345)]: Kpivew éx, Lk. xix. 22 [A. V.
out of thine own mouth, etc.]; Rev. xx. 12 (Xen. Cyr.
2, 2, 21 ek rev epywv kpiverOar); Sixarovv, xatad.xacery,
Mt. xii. 37; dvopdagew éx, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. II. 10, 68;
Soph. O. T. 1036, etc.) ; é« rod éyew, according to your
ability, 2 Co. viii. 11.
III. By ATTRACTION, common in classic Grk. (cf. W.
§ 66, 6; [B. 377 sq. (323)]), two prepositions coalesce
as it were into one, so that éx seems to be used for év,
thus dpa: ta ék ts oikias adtov concisely for ra év rH
oixia avtov é& avtis, Mt. xxiv. 17; 6 matnp 6 e& ovpavod
Sacer for 6 matnp 6 ev oipav@ Sacer x Tov ovpavod, Lk. xi.
13; ryv ex Aaodikelas emearoAny for rv eis Aaodik. yeypap-
pevnv kat é€x Aaodikeias Kopuoréav, Col. iv. 16, (2 Mace.
iii. 18). [To this constr. some would refer émvyvovs év
éavt@ tTHv €& avrov Svvapw e&edOoicar, Mk. v. 30, resolv-
ing thy ev ait@ Svvapw e£eAdovoay €& aitov; cf. Field,
Otium Norvicense, pars iii. ad loc. ]
IV. of Time [W. 367 (344)]; 1. of the (temporal)
point from which; Lat. ez, inde a; from, from ... on,
since: é€k xpdvev ixavov, Lk. viii. 27 [RG Trmrg.]; &«
yeverns, Jn. ix. 1 (Hom. Il. 24, 535; Od. 18, 6); é« Kot-
Alas pntpos (see Kowdia, 4); ex veorntos, Mt. xix. 20 [RG];
Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4 (Hom. Il. 14, 86);
€x TOU aiavos (see aiwv, 1 b.), Jn. ix. 32 (Ael. v. h. 6, 13;
12, 64 é& aidvos); e& dpxns, Jn. vi. 64; xvi. 4; €x yeveav
dpxaiov, Acts xv. 21° e& érav oxrw, Acts ix. 33; €K TrOA-
ov erav, Acts xxiv. 10; e& airns (sc. Spas), forthwith,
instantly (see e€autis) ; €& ixavod [(sc. xpovov) ; but L T
Tr WH here éé ixavav ypovwr), of a long time, Lk. xxiii.
8, (€x woddov, Thue. 1, 68; 2, 88); with an adverb: éx
mad.ddev, Mk. ix. 21 LT Tr WH, (ek mpotbev, 1 Mace.
x. 80), cf. W. § 65, 2; [B. 70 (62)]. Many interpreters
translate é« tovrov, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12, from this time,
but cf. II. 8 above. 2. of succession in time, a
temporal series: ex Sevrépov (as it were, proceeding
from, beginning from the second), a second time (see
Sevrepos) ; €x rpirov, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ex rpir.];
juepav e€& nuepas (diem ex die, Cic. ad Att. 7, 26; Caes.
b. g. 1, 16, 4; diem de die. Liv. 5, 48) from day to day,
4
EXaACTOS
day after day, 2 Pet. ii. 8, (Gen. xxxix. 10; Num. xxx.
15; [2 Chr. xxiv. 11]; Sir. v. 7; Eur. Rhes. 437 (445)
etc.; éros é€& Erous, Lev. xxv. 50; émavrdv €& evavrod,
Deut. xv. 20).
V. ApvVERBIAL PurRaskEs [cf. W. § 51, 1 d.], in which
lies the idea 1. of direction whence: é& éva~
rias, cf. 1.4 above. 2. of source: éx cuppavov, by
consent, by agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5; é& avayxns of neces-
sity, i. e. by compulsion, 2 Co. ix. 7; necessarily, Heb.
vil 12. 3. of the measure or standard: ék pe-
povs, so that each is a part of the whole, proportion-
ately, [R. V.mrg. each in his part], 1 Co. xii. 27, cf.
Meyer ad loc.; in part, partly, 1 Co. xiii. 9 sqq.; ék
perpov i. q. petpias, by measure, moderately, sparingly,
Jn. iii. 34; e& tvornros, by equality, in equal proportion,
2 Co. viii. 13 (14) (€& tvov, Hdt. 7, 135); &« meptocod,
beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr. br. ].
VI. In ComposITION é« denotes 1. egress: éxBaiva,
efépxoua. 2. emission, removal, separation: €xBdadXo,
exmeut@, e£atpew. 3. origin: €xyovos.° 4. public-
ity: e€ayyéddo. 5. the unfolding, opening out, of
something tied together or rolled up: éxreivw, exmeravyupe.
6. is i. q. utterly, entirely, mavredas, [cf. Eng. out and
out], denoting completion and perfection: éxmAnpdw,
extedew. Cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 120 sq.
éxagros, -7, -ov, Sept. for wx, [fr. Hom. down], each,
a. joined to a substantive: é€kaorov dévdpor,
Lk. vi. 44; €xaot@ otpatimry, Jn. xix. 23; xara pyva
€xaoroy, every month, Rev. xxii. 2 [not Rec.]; «af
exdotny nuepav, Heb. iii. 13; cf. W. 111 (106); B. § 127,
30. preceded by eis, Lat. unusquisque, every one: with
a substantive, Eph. iv. 16; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. b. used
substantively: Jn. vii. 53 [Rec.]; Acts iv. 35; Ro. ii.
6; Gal. vi. 4, ete.; once plur. ékaoror: Rev. vi. 11 Rec.
With a partitive genitive added: nyuoyv, Ro. xiv. 12;
ipov, Lk. xiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 12; Heb. vi.11; avdrav, Jn.
vi. 7[ RG]; trav omepparwy, 1 Co. xv. 38. eis exacros,
every one (see eis, 4b.) : without a partit. gen., Acts xx.
31; Col. iv. 6; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40; Acts ii. 3;
xvil. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, ete. €xaoros, when it denotes
individually, every one of many, is often added apposi-
tively to nouns and pronouns and verbs in the plural
number, (Matthiae ii. p. 764 sq.; [W. 516 (481); B.
131 (114)]): mets dxovopev exactos, Acts ii. 8; oKop-
every ;
moOnre €xaoros, JN. Xvi. 32; e€mopevovro mavtes...,
éxaoros ..., Lk. ii. 3; add, Acts iii. 26; 1 Pet. iv. 10;
Rev. v. 8; xx. 13; likewise eis €xaoros, Acts ii. 6; xxi.
26; bpets of xa@’ Eva Exactos THY EavToU yuvaika ayatraTa,
you one by one, each one of you severally, Eph. v. 33.
In imitation of the Hebr., &aoros r@ adeAPo avrod
(VND wr, Gen. xxvi. 31), Mt. xviii. 35; pera rod mn-
cio adrod (TSI-ON WR, Judg. vi. 29, etc.), Eph. iv. 25,
ef. Heb. viii. 11 Ree.
éxderote, adv., at every time, always: 2 Pet. i. 15.
(Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.) *
éxaréy, oi, ai, ra, [fr. Hom. down], a hundred: Mt.
xiii. 8 (sc. xaprovs) ; xviii. 12; Jn. xix. 39, ete.
éxarovraérns | R GT), -es, and éxarovraerns [LL Tr WH],
192
éxBadrw
-és, (fr. €rardvand éros; on the want of uniformity in ac-
centuation among authors, copyists, and grammarians
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 406 sq.; W. §6, 1b.; B. 29 (26);
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. dexérys; esp.
Chandler §§ 703, 709; Gottling p. 323 sq.]), centenarian,
a hundred years old: Ro.iv.19. (Pind. Pyth. 4, 502.) *
éxarovtamAaclwy, -ov, a hundredfold, a hundred times
as much: Mt. xix. 29 [RG]; Mk. x. 30; Lk. viii. 8. (2
S. xxiv. 3; Xen. oec. 2, 3.) *
€xatovtapxys, -ov, 6, (€karoy and dpyw; on the termi-
nations dpxns and apyos see the full exposition in W.
61 (60); cf. B. 73 (64); Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc. p.
151 sq.; [Tdf Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156 sq.]),
a centurion: Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.], 13 GLT Tr WH;
[xxvii 54 T]; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 TWH; [xxiii. 47 T
TrWH]; Acts x. 1,22; xxi.32 L TTr WH; [xxii. 26
LT WH]; xxiv. 23; xxvii.1, 6 L T Tr WH, 11 GLT
Tr WH, 31, 43 L T Tr WH;; gen. plur. T WH in Acts
xxiii. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. 11 d.; Hat.
7, 81; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.). See the foll. word.*
éxatévrapxos, -ov, 6, i. q. Exatovrapyns, q.Vv-: Mt. viii. 5,
8 [in 5, 8, Tdf. -apxns], 13 Rec.; xxvii. 54 [Tdf. -apyns] ;
Lk. vii. 2, 6 (T WH -apyns]; xxiii. 47 [T Tr WH -dp-
xns]; Acts xxi. 32 RG; xxii. 25, 26 [L T WH -dpyns];
xxvii. 6 [RG, 11 Rec., 43 RG], also xxviii. 16 Rec.;
gen. plur., Acts xxiii. 17 and 23 RGLTr. (Xen. Cyr.
5, 3,41; Plut., al.) [Cf. Meisterhans p. 53 sq.]*
éx-Baivw: 2 aor. e£€8ynv; [fr. Hom. down]; to go out:
Heb. xi. 15 L T Tr WH.* ;
é-Baéddw; impf. 3 pers. plur. 退B8addov (Mk. vi. 13
[Tr mrg. aor.]); fut. éxBadro; plpf. exBeBrAnxew (without
augm., Mk. xvi. 9; cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); 2 aor.
e€eBadov; [Pass. and Mid. pres. éxBadAopac]; 1 aor.
pass. e€BAnOnv; fut. pass. éexBAnOnoopar; [fr. Hom.
down]; Sept. generally for w3, occasionally for wsin,
writ, yw ; to cast out; to drive out; to send out;
1. with the included notion of more or less vio-
lence; a. to drive out, (cast out): a person, Mt. xxi.
12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15 (ek); Lk. xx. 12, ete.; pass.
Mt. viii. 12 [T WH (rejected) mrg. e€eAevoovrat}; Sarpo-
ma, Mt. vii. 22; viii. 16,31; ix.33; Mk.i. 34,39; Lk.
xi. 20; xili. 32, etc.; €« rivos, Mk. vii. 263 dao, Mk. xvi.
9 [LWHTr txt. mapa]; & rem, by, through [W. 389
(364) ], Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24, 27 sq.; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15,
19 sq.; TO dvopari twos, Mt. vii. 22; [Mk. ix. 38 R*G];
emt t@ ov. twos, Lk. ix.49 [WH Trmrg. év; ev ro dv. Mk.
ix. 38 R¢= L T Tr WH]; Acyo, Mt. viii. 16; rua eo
THs moAews, Lk. iv. 29; Acts vii. 58. b. to cast out:
iva foll. by &&w, Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34 sq.; xii. 31 (sc. out
of the world, i. e. be deprived of the power and influ-
ence he exercises in the world); Lk. xiii. 28; €€@ with
gen., Mt. xxi. 39; Mk. xii. 8; Lk. xx. 15. athing:
excrement from the belly into the sink, Mt. xv. 17;
mid. éxBadddpevor (i. €. for themselves, that they might
the more easily save the ship and thereby their lives)
rov cirov eis tr. Oadacay, Acts xxvii. 38. c. to expel
a person from a society: to banish from a family, Gal.
iv. 30 (Gen. xxi. 10); é [Tdf.om. éx] rns éxxAnoias, 3
exBacis
Jn.10. . to compel one to depart: amd rév dpiwr, Acts
xiii. 50; to bid one depart, in stern though not violent
language, Mt. ix. 25; Mk. v.40; Acts ix. 40; xvi. 37
(where distinguished fr. éfdyew); to bid one go forth
to do some business, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2. e. so em-
ployed that the rapid motion of the one going is trans-
ferred to the one sending forth; to command or cause
one to depart in haste: Mk. i. 43; Jas. ii. 25; ra mavta
(sc. mpoBara), to let them out of the fold so that they
rush forth, [al. to thrust them forth by laying hold of
them], Jn. x. 4. f. to draw out with force, tear out:
ri, Mk. ix. 47. g. with the implication of force over-
coming opposing force; to cause a thing to move straight
on to tts intended goal: riv Kpiow eis vixos, Mt. xii. 20.
h. to reject with contempt; to cast off or away: To évopa
Twos ws trovnpoy, Lk. vi. 22, (Plat. Crito p. 46 b.; de rep.
2 p. 377 ¢.; Soph. O. C. 636, 646; of actors driven from
the stage, hissed and hooted off, Dem. p. 449, 19). =
without the notion of violence; a. to draw out,
extract, one thing inserted in another: rd xapqos ro ev
T@ 6POarue, Lk. vi. 42; &« rod dpOadpod, ibid. and Mt.
vil. 5; amd tov opd. 4 (where LT Tr WH éx). bz to
bring out of, to draw or bring forth: ti é« tov Onoavpod,
Mt. xii. 35; xiii. 52; money from a purse, Lk. x. 35.
c. to except, to leave out, i. e. not receive: ti, foll. by é&w
[or é£wGer], Rev. xi. 2 (leave out from the things to be
measured, equiv. to i) adtnv petpnons). 4. foll. by eis
with ace. of place, to lead one forth or away somewhere
with a force which he cannot resist: Mk. i. 12. [On the
pleonastic phrase éx8. ¢£w (or €£wOev) cf. W. § 65, 2.
éx-Baocis, -ews, 7, (€xBaivw) ; 1. an egress, way out,
(Hom., et al.): applied fig. to the way of escape from
temptation into which one eioépyerat or eioeperat (see
these words), 1 Co. x. 13. 2. in a sense foreign to
prof. auth., the issue [(cf. its objective sense e. ¢. Epict.
diss. 2, 7, 9)] i. q. end: used of the end of life, Sap. ii.
17; €xB. ths avacrpod7s tweyv, in Heb. xiii. 7, is not
merely the end of their physical life, but the manner in
which they closed a well-spent life as exhibited by their
spirit in dying; cf. Delitzsch ad loc.*
&x-Bodh, -7s, 7, (€xBadrA@) ; a. a casting out. b.
spec. the throwing overboard of goods and lading whereby
sailors lighten a ship in a storm to keep her from sinking,
(Aeschyl. sept. 769; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 1, 5 [p. 1110+,
9]; Leian. de merc. cond. 1): moveioOar éxBornv, Lat.
jacturam facere, to throw the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii.
18; with raév cxevay added, Sept. Jon. i. 5; rav popriar,
Poll. 1, 99 p. 70 ed. Hemsterh.*
éx-yapitw; Pass., [pres. exyapyifouar]; impf. é€eyapi-
Counv; to give away (€x out of the house [cf. W. 102
(97)]) in marriage: a daughter, 1 Co. vii. 38° RG,
[ibid.” Rec.]; Mt. xxiv. 38 RGTrtxt. Pass. to marry,
to be given in marriage, Mt. xxii. 30 RG [cef. Tdf.’s note
ad loc.]; Lk. xvii. 27 RG; see yapitw. Not found
elsewhere.*
éx-yaploxw, i. q. exyapifw, q. v-: Pass. [pres. éxya-
pickowa]; Lk. xx. 34 sq. RG; cf. yapioxw and Fritzsche
eon Mk. p. 529 sqq. Not found elsewhere.*
193
éxduréw
Ex-yeves, -ov, (€xyivouar), sprung from one, born, begotten,
(Hom. and sqq.); commonly as a subst. 6, 7 €xyovos, o¢
éxyovat, a son, daughter, offspring, children, descendants ;
in Sept. com. in neut. plur. éxyova and ra éxyova, for
15, Deut. vii. 13 [Alex.]; xxviii. 4, etc.; D'N¥RY,
Tsvcxlviiis 19 5) 1xi.:9); 13; Is. xlix. 15; also in Sir. xl. 15;
xliv. 11, ete. In the N. T. once: 1 Tim. v. 4 réxva 4
éxyova, grandchildren, [(A. V. renders it by the obsol.
nephews; cf. Eastwood and Wright, Bible Word-Book,
or B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Nephew) ].*
éx-Saravaw: [fut. éxdararnow}; 1 fut. pass. éxdamava-
Onoopa; to exhaust by expending, to spend wholly, use
up: tas mpocddous, Polyb. 25, 8,4. Pass. reflexively, to
spend one’s self wholly: foll. by imép twos, of one who con-
sumes strength and life in laboring for others’ salvation,
2 Co. xii. 15; ef. Kypke ad loc.; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
éx-Séxopar; impf. efedexounv; (ex from some person
or quarter) ; 1. to receive, accept, ((Hom.], Aeschyl.,
Hadt., sqq.). 2. to look for, expect, wait for, await: ri,
Jn. v.3 RL; Heb. xi. 10; Jas. v.7; teva, Acts xvii.
16; 1 Co. xvi. 11; dAAnAous exdéxecbe wait for one
another, sc. until each shall have received his food, 1 Co.
xi. 33, cf. 215; foll. by ws etc. Heb. x. 13; [absol. 1 Pet.
iii. 20 Rec., but see Tdf.’s note ad loc.]. Rarely with
this meaning in prof. auth., as Soph. Phil. 123; Apollod.
1,9, 27§ 35 &ws av yémrai t, Dion. Hal. 6,67. [Comp.:
dm-exdéxoua. Cf. d€youar, fin. ]*
€x-Sdos, -ov, (djAos), evident, clear, conspicuous: 2 Tim.
iii. 9. (Hom. Il. 5, 2; Dem. p. 24, 10; Polyb.)*
&xSnpew, -@; 1 aor. inf. exdnunoar; (€kdnuos away from
home) ; 1. to go abroad (Hat., Soph., Plat., Joseph.,
al.); hence univ. to emigrate, depart: éx tov caparos,
from the body as the earthly abode of the spirit, 2 Co.
v. 8. 2. to be or live abroad: 2 Co. v. 9; ard roo
xuptov, abode with whom is promised us, 2 Co. vy. 6; in
these exx. opp. to évdnya, q. v.*
éx-SiSwpr: Mid., fut. exdocouar; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing.
e€edoro, T WH e&édero (see amodidape) ; a com. word in
Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Il. 3, 459 on; to give out of one’s
house, power, hand, stores ; to give out, give up, give over;
hence also to let out for hire, to farm out, Hat. 1, 68;
yewpyiar dé éxdedopevac Sovdrors, Plat. legg. 7 p. 806 d.;
al. In the N. T., Mid. to let out for one’s advantage:
Mt. xxi. 33, 41 [Ree. éxddcera, cf. Tdf.’s note; B. 47
2) peMks xis 15 Lk xx. 9.*
éx-Si-nyéopar, -ovuar; dep. mid.; prop. to narrate in full
or wholly; univ. to relate, tell, declare: ri, Acts xiii. 41
(Hab. i. 5); xv. 3. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 23 p. 1434,
4]; Joseph., [Philo], Galen, [al.]; Sept.) *
e&Sixéw, -@; fut. exdienow; 1 aor. e&edixnoa; (&xdixos,
q: v-); Sept. for DP3, TP2, vdw ; a. tia, to vindicate
one’s right, do one justice, [A. V. avenge]: Lk. xviii. 5
(1 Mace. vi. 22); twa amd twos, to protect, defend, one
person from another, Lk. xviii. 3; éavtéyv, to avenge one’s
self, Ro. xii. 19. b. ri, to avenge a thing (i.e. to pun-
ish a person for a thing): ryv mapaxony, 2 Co. x. 6; rd
aiud twos amd or ék Twos, to demand in punishment the
blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer
EKOLKHOLS
the penalty of his crime, [A. V. avenge one’s blood on
or at the hand of]: Rev. vi. 10; xix. 2; see éx, I. 7.
(In Grk. auth. fr. [Apollod.], Diod. down.).*
ék-Slknors, -ews, 7, (exdixew, q. V-), Sept. for mp) and
dpi, NIP2, baw (hizek. xvi. 38; xxiii. 45) and nvaw;
a revenging ; vengeance, punishment: Ro. xii. 19 and
Heb. x. 30 fr. Deut. xxxii. 35; 2 Co. vii. 11; Lk. xxi.
22; moeiy rhv exdixnoiv Tivos, to vindicate one from
wrongs, accomplish the avenging of, Lk. xviii. 7 sq.;
twi, to avenge an injured person, Acts vii. 24 (Judg. xi.
36); exdixnais twos, objec. gen., the punishment of one,
1 Pet. ii. 14; dcddvae exdixnoiv tem, to inflict punishment
on, [render vengeance to] one, 2 Th. i. 8; cf. [Sir. xii.
6]; Ezek. xxv. 14. (Polyb. 3, 8, 10.) *
éxSixos, -ov, (dik right, justice, penalty) ; 1. with-
out luw and justice (cf. Lat. exlex), unjust: Aeschyl.,
Soph., Eur., Ael.n.an.16,5. 2. exacting penalty from
(€x) one; an avenger, punisher: Ro. xiii. 4; mepi twos,
1 Th. iv. 6; (Sap. xii. 12; Sir. xxx. 6; 4 Mace. xv. 26
(29); [Plut. de garrul. § 14 p. 509 f.]; Hdian. 7, 4, 10
[5 ed. Bekk.; al.]).*
éx-SidKw: fut. exduofo; 1 aor. €£ediwéa; 1. to drive
out, banish: ria, Lk. xi. 49 [here WH Trmrg. di@fovew ;
some refer this to 2]; (Thuc. 1, 24; Leian. Tim. 10;
Sept. 1 Chr. viii. 13; Joel ii. 20, ete.). 2. to pursue
i. q. to persecute, oppress with calamities: twa, 1 Th. ii.
15 [some refer this to 1]; (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 157; Sir.
xxx. 19; Dem. 883, 27).*
€x-Sotos, -ov, (€xdidwur), given over, delivered up, (to
enemies, or to the power, the will, of some one): AapBa-
vew Twa éxdorov, Acts ii. 23 (but AaBdvres is rejected by
GLTTrWH); ddovac or woety twa exd. Hdt. 3, 1;
Dem. 648, 25; Joseph. antt. 6, 13,9; Palaeph. 41, 2;
al.; Bel and the Dragon vs. 22; éavrdv &xd. didovae ro
@avarw, Ignat. ad Smyrn. 4, 2.*
éx-5oxh, -7s, 9, (exdéxouar), the act or manner of receiv-
ing from; hence in prof. auth. 1. reception. a
succession. 3. [a taking in a certain sense, i. e.]
interpretation. 4. once in the sacred writings, expec-
tation, awaiting, (cf. ékdéyoua, 2]: Heb. x. 27.*
éx-50w: 1 aor. é€éSvca;‘ 1 aor. mid. é£edvocdunv; (dv) ;
to take off: twa, to strip one of his garments, Mt. xxvii.
28 [L WH org. évdto.]; Lk. x. 30; tid re (as in Grk.
fr. Hom. down), [a thing from a person]: Mt. xxvii. 31;
Mk. xv. 20; Mid. to take off from one’s self, to put off
one’s raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3,4, 19); fig. to
put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. be un-
clothed]: 2 Co. v.4; the reading éxdvodpyevor, adopted
in vs. 3 by certain critics [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al.],
is due to a correction by the copyists; see yupvds, 1 d.
[Comp.: am-exdvopa. | *
éxet, adv. of place, there; a. properly: Mt. ii. 13,
15; v. 24, and freq. In Lk. xiii. 28 éxet is not used for
ev exeive to xatp@ foll. by drav (at that time... when
etc.), but means in that place whither ye have been ban-
ished; cf. Meyer ad loc. of éxei, sc. dvres, Standing
there, Mt. xxvi. 71 [Tr mrg. airoi éxet]. It answers to
a relative adv.: ob ro mvedua, éxet éAevOepia, 2 Co. iii. 17
194
€KELVOS
Rec. ; Mt. vi. 21; xviii. 20; xxiv. 28; Mk. vi.10; Lk.
xii. 34; Hebraistically, where a preceding adv. or rel.
pron. has already attracted the verb, éxet is added to
this verb pleonastically: Rev. xii. 6 GT Tr WH (érov
Exel exet TOrov), 14 (Grou tpéderar exet); cf. Deut. iv. 5,
14, 26; 1 Mace. xiv. 34, and what was said p. 86%, 5
on the pron. adrés after a relative. b. by a negligent
use common also in the classics it stands after verbs of
motion for éxeice, thither: so after damépyouat, Mt. ii.
22; peraBaive, Mt. xvii. 20; tmdyo, Jn. xi. 8; Epyoua,
Jn. xviii. 3; mpomewropa, Ro. xv. 24; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
pp- 43 sq. 128; Hermann on Soph. Antig. 515; Trachin.
1006; Bttm. on Philoct. 481; W. § 54,7; B. 71 (62)
and 378 (324).
exeiOev, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V.
sometimes from thence]: Mt. iv. 21; Mk. vi. 1; Lk. ix. 4;
Jn. iv.43; Acts xiii.4; and often in the historical bks.
of the N. T. oi éxeiOev elliptically for of éxetOev SuaBjvae
Oedovres, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L WH om. oi).
éxeivos, -n, -o, (fr. éxet, prop. the one there, cf. Germ.
dortig, der dort), demonst. pron., that man, woman, thing
(Lat. ille, illa, illud); properly of persons, things, times,
places somewhat remote from the speaker. _—_1. used ab-
solutely, a. in antithesis, referring to the more remote
subject: opp. to odros, Lk. xviii. 14; Jas. iv. 15; tpiv
... exeivors, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; éxeivor. . . pets,
Heb. xii. 25; dANou... GANou. . . exeivos, Jn. ix. 93 exel-
voy... ene, JN. ili. 30; of Iovdator . . . exetvos Se, In. ii.
20 sq.; 6 ev kvpios “Incods [RGTom.’I. WH Tr mrg.
br.] .. . éxetvor 6¢, Mk. xvi. 19 sq., ete. b. of noted per-
sons (as in classic Grk.): in a bad sense, that notorious
man, Jn. vii. 11; ix. 28; in a good sense, — of the Lord
Jesus, 1 Jn. ii. 6; iii. 3, 5,7, 16; iv.17; of the Holy Spirit,
with an apposition added, éxetvos, rd mvedpua THs GAnOeias,
Jn. xvi. 13. c. referring to a noun immediately pre-
ceding, he, she, it, (Lat. is, ea, id, Germ. selbiger) : Jn. vii.
45; v.46; Mk. xvi. 11; Acts iii. 13, etc.; cf. W. § 23, 1;
[B.104 (91). Here perhaps may be noticed its use to-
gether with airdés of the same subject in the same sen-
tence: é{@ypnpévor tr’ adrod (i. e. the devil) eis 7d exeivov
O€Anpa, 2 Tim. ii. 26; cf. Thuc. 1, 132,6; 4, 29,3; Xen.
Cyr. 4,5, 20; see Riddell, Apol. of Plato, App. § 49;
Kiihner § 467, 12; cf. (wypéw, 2]; equiv. to an emphatic
(Germ. er) he, ete., Mt. xvii. 27; Jn. 1.8; v.43; Tit. iii.
7; equiv. to the forcibly uttered Germ. der (that one
etc.), in which sense it serves to recall and lay stress upon
nouns just before used [cf. our resumptive the same; W.
§ 23,4]: Jn.i.18; v.39; xii.48; xiv. 26; xv. 26; esp.
is it thus resumptive of a subject expressed participially
[B. 306 (262 sq.)]: Mk. vii. 15 [T WHom. Tr br. the
pron.], 20; Jn. i. 33; ix. 37 (exeivds €orw, sc. 6 vids Tod
Geod, see eit, II. 5); Jn. x. 1; xiv. 21; Ro. xiv. 14; 2
Co. x. 18; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 33 6 yap Adyxnv axovar, éket-
vos Kal THY \uxny Te Tapaxova). d. foll. by dre, Mt.
xxiv. 43; foll. by ds, Jn. xiii. 26; Ro. xiv. 15. =
joined with nouns, and then the noun with the article
either precedes, or (somewhat more rarely) follows i
(W. 162 (153)), [B. 119 (104) sq.]; a. in contrasts:
€KELTE
} mpaTn éxeivn, Heb. viii. 7. b. used to distinguish
accurately from others the things or the persons spoken
of, (Germ. selbig): Mt. vii. 25,27; x.15; xviii. 32; Mk.
iii. 24 sq.; Lk. vi. 48 sq.; Jn. xviii. 15, and often; esp.
of Time,—and of time past: év rais npépas exeivats,
DIN 073, at that time which has been spoken of; said of
time which the writer either cannot or will not define
more precisely and yet wishes to be connected with the
time of the events just narrated: Mt. iii. 1; Mk. i. 9;
viii. 1; Lk. ii. 1, (Ex. ii. 11; Judg. xviii. 1; 1S. xxviii.
1); cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 106 sq.; at the time under
consideration: Lk. iv. 2; ix. 36; the same phrase is used
of time future: Mt. xxiv. 19; Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29
(iii. 2)); Rev. ix. 6; likewise in the singular, év ékeivy
rh npepa, Lk. xvii. 31; Jn. xvi. 23,26. But the solemn
phrase ékeivy 4 uépa, OF 7 jpépa éexeivy, simply sets future
time in opposition to the present, that fateful day, that
decisive day, when the Messiah will come to judge: Mt.
Withee seluk.ivitescox. 12): 2) Thi ds \2)Rimeind2 518
Rev. xvi. 14 (where L T Tr WH om. éxeivys); so in the
phrase 6 aiay éxeivos, Lk. xx. 35. 3. éxeivns (in Ree. d¢
exeivms), scil. 6800, adverbially, (by) that way: Lk. xix.
4; W. § 64,5; [B. 171 (149); see moios, fin.]. John’s
use of the pronoun ékeivos is discussed by Steztz in the
Stud. u. Krit. for 1859, p. 497 sqq.; 1861, p. 267 sqq.,
and by Alex. Buttmann, ibid. 1860, p. 505 sqq. and in
Hilgenfeld’s Zeitsch. fiir wissenschaftl. Theol. 1862, p.
204 sqq-; Buttmann clearly proves in opp. to Steitz
that John’s usage deviates in no respect from the
Greek; Steitz, however, resorts to psychological consid-
erations in the case of Jn. xix. 35, [regarding ék. there
as expressing the writer’s inward assurance. But Steitz
is now understood to have modified his published
views. |
éxetore, adv. of place, thither, towards that place: Acts
xxi. 3, on which see W. 349 (328); used for exe? in the
pregn. constr. tovs éxetoe dvtas, collected there, Acts
xxii. 5, (Acta Thomae § 8); ef. W. § 54, 7.*
&k-{ntéw, -6; 1 aor. e€e(ntnoa; Pass., 1 aor. eEe(nrnOnv;
1 fut. ex{nrnOnoopa; (ex out from a secret place, from
all sides) ; Sept. very often for w 1, also for wpa, ete. ;
a. to seek out, search for: properly, twa, 1 Mace. ix. 26;
figuratively: tov kvpioy, tov Oedv, to seek the favor of
God, worship him, Acts xv. 17; Ro. iii.11 [Tr mrg. WH
mrg. (nrav]; Heb. xi. 6, (Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2; xxxiii.
(xxxiv.) 5; Lxviii. (Ixix.) 33; Amos v. 4, etc.). b. to
seek out i. e. investigate, scrutinize: ri, Sir. xxxix. 1, 3;
mepi Twos, to examine into anything, 1 Pet. i. 10, where
it is joined with éfepevvav [to seek out and search out],
as in 1 Mace. ix. 26. c. to’seek out for one’s self, beg,
crave: Heb. xii. 17. d. to demand back, require: ré
aiva tav mpopytay dro ths yeveas tavtns, to take ven-
geance on this generation for the slaughter of the proph-
ets (after the Hebr., cf. 2S. iv.11; Ezek. iii. 18; see ek,
I. 7): Lk. xi. 50, [51]. (In prof. auth. thus far only a
single passage has been noted in which this word ap-
pears, Aristid. or. 8, i. p. 488 [i. e. orat. 38, i. p. 726 ed.
Dind.].) *
195
éxkAnola
ex-LAtnois, (exnréw, q-V-), -ews, 73 1. an investigat-
ing. 2. a subject of subtle inquiry and dispute, [R. V.
questioning]: 1 Tim. i. 4 T Tr [WH; see Ellic. ad loc.
and cf. oikovopia]. (Basil Caes., Didym. Al.) *
éx-Oap Pew, -d: Pass., [pres. éxOapBoodpa]; 1 aor. é&e-
OapBnOnv; (€xOapBos, q. v.) ; 1. trans. to throw into
amazement or terror; to alarm thoroughly, to terrify: Sir.
xxx. 9; [Job xxxiii. 7 Aq., Compl.]. 2. intrans. to
be struck with amazement; to be thoroughly amazed, as-
tounded; in Grk. writ. once, Orph. Arg. 1217. In the
N. T. only in the pass. and by Mark: to be amazed, for
joy at the unexpected coming of Christ, ix. 15; to be
struck with terror, xvi. 5 sq.; joined with adnpoveir,
xiv. 33.*
€k-OapBos, -ov, (AauBos, cf. ExpoBos), quite astonished,
amazed: Acts iii. 11. (Polyb. 20, 10, 9. Eccl. and
Byzant. writ.; terrifying, dreadful, Dan. vii. 7 Theod.) *
&Yavpato: [impf. é£eOavpatov]; to wonder or marvel
greatly (see éx, VI. 6): emi rem, at one, Mk. xii. 17 T WH.
(Sir. xxvii. 23; xliii. 18; Dion. Hal., Longin., al.) *
éx-Yeros, -ov, (€xriOnur), cast out, exposed: mrureiv €xOera
(equiv. to éxridevar) ra Bpedn, Acts vii. 19. (Eur. Andr.
70; [Manetho, apoteles. 6, 52].)*
éx-ka8alpw: 1 aor. e€exaGapa [on the a cf. B. 41 (35)];
(éx either i. q. utterly or for @« twos); in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Il. 2, 153 down; to cleanse out, clean thoroughly:
€uauTov amd twos, to avoid defilement from one and so
keep one’s self pure, 2 Tim. ii. 21; with ace. of the thing
by the removal of which something is made clean, [ A. V.
purge out}, 1Co.v.7. (For ¥ i. q. to cleanse, Judg. vii.
4 var.; for 1/3 i. q. to take away, Deut. xxvi. 13.) *
éx-kalw: 1 aor. pass. éfexavOnv; 1. to burn out.
2. to set on fire. pass. to be kindled, to burn, (Hdt. and
sqq.; often in Sept.) : properly, of fire; metaph. of the
fire and glow of the passions (of anger, Job iii. 17; Sir.
xvi. 6, and often in Plut.) ; of lust, Ro. i. 27, (Alciphr. 3,
67 ovtws é&exavOnv eis Epwra).*
éxxaxéw, -@; [1 aor. é£exaxnoa]; (xakds) ; to be utterly
spiritless, to be wearied out, exhausted; see éyxaxéw (cf.
W. 25).
éx-KevTéw, -@: 1 aor. eLexevrnca; 1. to put out, dig
out: ra dppara, Aristot. h. a. 2, 17 [p. 508, 6]; 6,
De 2. to dig through, transfiz, pierce: twa, Rev. i. 7;
dyrovrat eis dy (i. e. eis TodTov, dv [cf. W. 158 (150) ]) e&e-
Kevrnoay, Jn. xix. 87. (Polyb. 5, 56, 12; Polyaen. 5, 3,
8; for 1p3, Judg. ix. 54; 179 to kill, Num. xxii. 29. 2
Mace. xii. 6. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexice. etc. p.540 sq.)*
éx-kAdw; 1 aor. pass. eEexddaOnv; to break off; to cut
off: Ro. xi. 17, 19, 20 R GT WH (on this vs. see xAaw).
(Sept. Lev. i. 17; Plat. rep. 10 p. 611 d.; Plut., Alciphr.,
al.) *
éx-kAelw: 1 aor. inf. éxxAcioat; 1 aor. pass. eEexAei nv ;
[fr. (Hdt.) Eur. down]; to shut out: Gal. iv. 17 (viz.
from intercourse with me and with teachers cooperating
with me) ; i. q. to turn out of doors: to prevent the ap-
proach of one, pass. in Ro. iii. 27.*
éxxAnoia, -as, 7, (fr. éxxAnros called out or forth, and
this fr. éxxadéw) ; prop. a@ gathering of citizens called out
exxAno ia
from their homes into some public place; an assembly; so
used 1. among the Greeks from Thue. [cf. Hat. 3,
142] down, an assembly of the people convened at the
public place of council for the purpose of deliberating:
Acts xix. 39. 2. in the Sept. often equiv. to ap the
assembly of the Israelites, Judg. xxi. 8; 1 Chr. xxix. 1,
etc., esp. when gathered for sacred purposes, Deut. xxxi.
30 (xxxii. 1); Josh. viii. 35 (ix. 8), etc.; in the N. T.
thusin Acts vii. 38; Heb. ii. 12. 3. any gathering or
throng of men assembled by chance or tumultuously : Acts
XIXAO2) 41s 4. in the Christian sense, a. an assem-
bly of Christians gathered for worship : év éxxAnoia, in the
religious meeting, 1 Co. xiv. 19, 35; év rais éxxAnaiats,
ib. 34; ovvépyecOa ev exxAnaia, 1 Co. xi. 18; cf. W.§ 50,
4a. b. acompany of Christians, or of those who, hoping
for eternal salvation through Jesus Christ, observe their
own religious rites, hold their own religious meetings,
and manage their own affairs according to regulations
prescribed for the body for order’s sake; aa. those
who anywhere, in city or village, constitute such a com-
pany and are united into one body: Acts v. 11; viii.
SF Col iv. 173) vi. 45° Philo iv115s (BiJn}6*fef) WH122
(116)]; with specification of place, Acts viii. 1; xi. 22;
Ro. xvi. 1; 1 Co. iv.17; vi.4; Rev. ii. 1, 8, ete.; Geooa-
Aovexewv, 1 Th. i. 1; 2 Th. i. 13; Aaodtcéwy, Col. iv. 16;
with gen. of the possessor, rod 6eov (equiv. to M17 Op,
Num. xvi. 3; xx. 4), 1 Co. xi. 22; and mention of the
place, 1 Co. i. 2; 2Co.i. 1. Plur. ai éxxAnoiae: Acts xv.
41; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 19; Rev. i. 4; iii. 6, etc. ;
with rod Oeov added, 1 Th. ii. 14; 2 Th.i.4; rod Xpiorod,
Ro. xvi. 16; with mention of the place, as ris Agias,
Tadartas, etc.: 1 Co. xvi. 1,19; 2 Co. viii. 1; Gal. i. 2;
THs lovdaias tats év Xpor@, joined to Christ [see év, I. 6 b.],
i. e. Christian assemblies, in contrast with those of the
Jews, Gal. i. 22; éxxAnoia tov evar, gathered from the
Gentiles, Ro. xvi. 4; tév dyiwv, composed of the saints,
1 Co. xiv. 33. 9 éxxAngia car’ otkdy twos, the church in
one’s house, i. e. the company of Christians belonging to
a person’s family; others less aptly understand the
phrase of the Christians accustomed to meet for worship
in the house of some one (for as appears from 1 Co. xiv.
23, the whole Corinthian church was accustomed to
assemble in one and the same place; [but see Bp.
Leghtft. on Col. iv. 15]): Ro. xvi. 5; 1 Co. xvi. 19; Col. iv.
15; Philem. 2. The name 7 éxxAnoia is used even by
Christ while on earth of the company of his adherents
in any city or village: Mt.xviii.17. bb. the whole body
of Christians scattered throughout the earth; collectively,
all who worship and honor God and Christ in whatever
place they may be: Mt. xvi. 18 (where perhaps the Evan-
gelist employs thy éxxAnoiay although Christ may have
said thy Baoweiay pov); 1 Co. xii. 28; Eph. i. 22; iii. 10;
v. 23 sqq. 27, 29, 32; Phil. iii. 6; Col. i. 18, 24; with
gen. of the possessor : rod xupiov, Acts xx. 28 [R Tr mrg.
WH r-. Ocov |; rod Oeov, Gal. i. 13; 1 Co. xv. 9; 1 Tim. iii. 15.
cc. the name is transferred to the assembly of faithful
Christians already dead and received into heaven: Heb.
xii. 23 (on this pass. see in droypada, b. and mpwréroxos,
196
exreya
fin.). [In general, see Trench § 1, and B. D.’s. v. Church,
also Am. ed.; and for patristic usage Soph. Lex. 8. v.]
éx-wAlve [Ro. xvi. 17 T Tr WH]; 1 aor. éééxAwa; in
Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; Sept. chiefly for 130 and 74);
intrans. to turn aside, deviate (from the right way and
course, Mal. ii. 8, [cf. Deut. v. 32]); metaph. and absol.
to turn (one’s self) away [B. 144 (126) sq.; W. 251
(236)], either from the path of rectitude, Ro. iii. 12
(Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3); or from evil (a malis declinare,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 6): awd xaxov, 1 Pet. iii. 11 (Ps. xxxiii.
(xxxiv.) 15; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 27; Prov. iii. 7); aro with
gen. of pers. to turn away from, keep aloof from, one’s
society; to shun one: Ro. xvi. 17, (ots, Ignat. ad Eph.
1)
€x-kohupBdw, -: 1 aor. ptcp. éxcodkupByaas; to swim
out of: Acts xxvii. 42. (Eur. Hel. 1609; Diod., Dion.
Hal.) *
€x-kopitw: impf. pass. éfexouitdunv ; to carry out; adead
man for burial (Polyb. 35, 6, 2; Plut. Agis 21; Hdian.
2,1, 5 [2 ed. Bekk.], etc.; in Lat. efferre): Lk. vii. 12.*
ék-komt, -75, 7, [Polyb., Plut., al.], see éyxomn.
éx-Korw : fut. éxceoww ; 1 aor. impv. ékxowov, subjunc.
exxow ; [Pass., pres. éxxomropat]; 2 aor. e£exdmnv; 2 fut.
exkomoopat; to cut out, cut off; a. properly: of a tree,
Mie) Hk 103 wits) 19 90k: i.e xi. 7,0) GEldis S5L9R,
etc.) ; a hand, aneye: Mt. v. 30; xviii. 8, (rov dpOudpor,
Dem. p. 744, (13) 17); pass. & twos, a branch from «
tree, Ro. xi. 22, 24. b. figuratively: rv dopyny, to cur
off occasion, 2 Co. xi. 12, (ryv €Amida, Job xix. 10). In
1 Pet. ili. 7 read éeyxémrecOa: ; see éyxdrra.*
€x-kpépapar (mid. of exxpeydvyypt, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr.
ii. 224 sq.; [Veitch s. v. kpésapac]; B. 61 (53)) : [impf.
efexpeyapnv|; to hang from: é&expepato avtov dxover,
hung upon his lips (Verg. Aen. 4, 79), Lk. xix. 48, where
T WH eé€expéuero, after codd. XB, a form which T con-
jectures “a vulgari usu haud alienum fuisse;” (cf. B. u.s.;
WH. App. p- 168]. (Plat., Philo, Plut., al.) *
€x-kpépopat, see the preceding word.
éx-Aahew, -: 1 aor. inf. ékAaAjoua; to speak out, di-
vulge: twi, foll. by dr, Acts xxiii. 22. (Judith xi. 9;
Demosth., Philo, Dio Cass., al.) *
€x-Adprw: fut. exAduye; to shine forth: Mt. xiii. 43;
Dan. xii. 3 var. (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
éx-AavOdvw : fo cause to forget; Mid. to forget; pf. éxre-
Anopas, foll. by gen.: Heb. xii. 5. (Hom. et sqq.) *
éx-Aéyw : pf. pass. ptcp. éxAeAeypevos, once in Lk. ix.
35 Lmrg. T Tr WH; Mid., impf. e€edeyopny (Lk. xiv. 7) ;
1 aor. e€eAeEdunv; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for
M3; to pick out, choose; in the Ni T. (exe. Lk. ix,/35,
where the reading is doubtful) always mid., éxAéyopat, to
pick or choose out for one’s self: ri, Lk. x. 42; xiv. 7;
twd, one from among many (of Jesus choosing his disci-
ples), Jn. vi. 70; xiii. 18; xv. 16; Actsi. 2; amd twor,
from a number of persons (Sir. xlv. 16), Lk. vi. 13; &x
Tov kéopov, Jn. xv. 19 ; used of choosing one for an office,
Acts vi. 5; foll. by && rwav, Acts i. 24; to discharge
some business, Acts xv. 22, 25; év nyiv (al. dpiv) e&ede-
Earo 6 eds, foll. by the acc. and inf. denoting the end,
éxX€ElTTw®
God made choice among us i. e. in our ranks, Acts xv. 7,
where formerly many, misled by the Hebr. 3 .n3 (1 S.
xvi. 9; 1 K. viii. 16, etc., and the Sept. of these pass.),
wrongly regarded év npiv as the object on which the mind
of the chooser was as it were fixed; [W. § 32, 3 a.; B.
159 (138)]. Especially is God said éxde£acOa those
whom he has judged fit to receive his favors and sepa-
rated from the rest of mankind to be peculiarly his own
and to be attended continually by his gracious oversight :
thus of the Israelites, Acts xiii. 17 (Deut. xiv. 2,
[ef. iv. 37]; 2 Mace. v. 19); of Christians, as those
whom he has set apart from among the irreligious mul-
titude as dear unto himself, and whom he has rendered,
through faith in Christ, citizens in the Messianic king-
dom: Mk. xiii. 20; 1 Co.i. 27 sq.; with two acc. one of
the object, the other of the predicate [W. § 32, 4 b.],
Jas. ii. 5; rea ev Xpiore, so that the ground of the choice
lies in Christ and his merits, foll. by ace. with inf. denot-
ing the end, Eph. i. 4. In Lk. ix. 35 Lmrg. T Tr WH
Jesus is called 6 vids rod Beod 6 exdedeypevos (R GL txt.
dyannros), as being dear to God beyond all others and
exalted by him to the preéminent dignity of Messiah ;
but see ékXexrds, 1 b.*
éx-Aelrw; fut. exreiyw; 2 aor. ef€durrov; 1. trans.
a. to leave out, omit, pass by. b. to leave, quit, (a place) :
76 Cqv, Tov Biov, to die, 2 Macc. x. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 23;
Soph. Electr. 1131; Polyb. 2, 41, 2, al.; Dion. Hal. 1, 24;
Luc. Macrob. 12; Alciphr. 3, 28. 2. intrans. to fail;
i. e. to leave off, cease, stop: ra érn, Heb. i. 12 fr. Ps. ci.
(cii.) 28 (where for DDA); 7 riots, Lk. xxii. 32; riches,
ace. to the reading ékAimy (L txt. T Tr WH), Lk. xvi.
9 (often so in Grk. writ., and the Sept. as Jer. vii. 28;
XXxViil. (li.) 30). as often in classic Grk. fr. Thue.
down, it is used of the failing or eclipse of the light of
the sun and the moon: rov mAiou éxAurovros [WH eéxdci-
movros|, the sun having failed [or failing], Lk. xxiii. 45
Tdf.; on this (without doubt the true) reading [see esp.
WH. App. ad loc., and] cf., besides Tdf.’s note, Keim
iii. 440 [Eng. trans. vi. 173] (Sir. xvii. 31 (26)). to
expire, die; so ace. to RG Limrg. éxAimnre in Lk. xvi. 9,
(Tob. xiv. 11; Sap. v. 13; Sept. for yr), Gen. xxv. 8,
etc.; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 29; Lam.i.19; for nan, Jer. xlix.
(xlii.) 17, 22. Plat. legg. 6, 759 e.; 9,856 e.; Xen. Cyr.
8, 7, 26).*
éx-AexTés, -7, -ov, (€xAeyw), picked out, chosen; rare in
Grk. writ., as Thue. 6,100; Plat. legg. 11 p. 938 b.; 12,
948 a., etc.; Sept. for 133 and 1"M3; in the N. T. a
chosen by God, and_ a. to obtain salvation through
Christ (see ékXeyw); hence Christians are called oi
éxAextot Tov Geov, the chosen or elect of God, [cf. W. 35
(34) ; 234 (219)], (MI ‘'N3, said of pious Israelites,
Is. lxv. 9, 15, 23; Ps. civ. (ev.) 43, cf. Sap. iv. 15): Lk.
xviii. 7; Ro. viii. 33; Col. iii. 12; Tit.i.1; without the
gen. Geov, Mt. xxiv. 22, 24; Mk. xiii. 20, 22; 1 Pet. i.1;
with the addition of rov Xpiorov, as gen. of possessor,
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27 [T Trom.gen.]; KAnrot rai
éxdexroi x. murrol, Rev. xvii. 14; yévos éxArexrov, 1 Pet. ii.
9 (fr. Is. xliii. 20, ef. Add. to Esth. viii. 40 [vi. 17, p. 64
197
exAvw
ed. Fritz.]); éxAexroi, those who have become true par-
takers of the Christian salvation are contrasted with
kAnroi, those who have been invited but who have not
shown themselves fitted to obtain it, [al. regard the
‘called’ and the ‘chosen’ here as alike partakers of
salvation, but the latter as the ‘choice ones’ (see 2 be-
low), distinguished above the former; cf. Jas. Morison
or Meyer ad loc. ], Mt. xx. 16 [here T WH om. Tr br. the
cel.]; xxii. 14; finally, those are called éxXexroi who are
destined for salvation but have not yet been brought to
it, 2 ‘Tim. ii. 10 [but cf. Huther or Ellic. ad loc.]. b.
The Messiah is called preéminently 6 éxXexros row Oeod,
as appointed by God to the most exalted office conceiv-
able: Lk. xxiii. 35, cf. ix. 85 Lmrg.T Tr WH; cf.
Dillmann, Das Buch Henoch [ibers. u. erklart; allgem.
Einl.], p. xxiii. c. Angels are called éxXexroi, as
those whom God has chosen out from other created
beings to be peculiarly associated with him, and his high-
est ministers in governing the universe: 1 Tim. v. 21;
see dytos, 1 b.; papripopa dé eyo pev tuav ta ayia Kat
tous iepovs adyy€Aous Tov beov, Joseph. b. j. 2,16, 4 sub
fin.; [yet al. explain by 2 Pet. ii.4; Jude 6; cf. Ellic. on
Labim. Ee:)): 2. univ. choice, select, i. e. the best of
its kind or class, excellent, preéminent: applied to cer-
tain individual Christians, 2 Jn. 1, 13; with ev xupio
added, eminent as a Christian (see év, I. 6 b.), Ro.
xvi. 13; of things: AiAos, 1 Pet. ii. 4, [6], (Is. xxviii. 16; 2
Esdr. v.8; Enoch ec. 8 Grk. txt., ed. Dillmann p. 82 sq.).*
ékdoyn, -7s, 7, (€xdeyw), election, choice ; a. the act
of picking out, choosing: oxevos exroyns (gen. of quality ;
cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B. 161 (140 sq.) ]), i. q. €xAexrov, se. Tod
Geov, Acts ix.15; spec. used of that act of God’s free
will by which before the foundation of the world he de-
creed his blessings to certain persons ;— 7 kar’ exAoynv
mpoGears, the decree made from choice [ A. V. the purpose
acc. to election, ef. W. 193 (182)], Ro. ix. 11 (ef. Fritz-
sche ad loc. p. 298 sqq.) ;— particularly that by which
he determined to bless certain persons through Christ,
Ro. xi. 28; kat’ éxAoyny xapiros, according to an election
which is due to grace, or a gracious election, Ro. xi. 5;
with gen. of the pers. elected, 1 Th. i. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10.
b. the thing or person chosen: i. q. éxdexroi, Ro. xi. 7.
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Dion. Hal., al.)*
&-Avw: [Pass., pres. éxAvouar]; pf. ptep. éxreAupevos ;
1 aor. é£eAvOnv; 1 fut. exAvdnoopar; often in Grk. writ.
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl. down ; 1. to loose, unloose (cf.
Germ. auslisen), to set free: twd Tivos and €k Tivos. 2.
to dissolve; metaph. to weaken, relax, exhaust, (Sept. Josh.
x. 6; Jer. xlv. (xxxviii.) 4; Aristot. h. an. 9, 1 sub fin.
[p. 610°, 27]; Joseph. antt. 8, 11,3; 13, 8,1). Com-
monly in the Pass. a. to have one’s strength relaxed, to
be enfeebled through exhaustion, to grow weak, grow weary,
be tired out, (often so in Grk. writ.): of the body, Mt.
ix. 36 Rec.; xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3; thus for 47, 1 S. xiv.
28; 2S. xvii. 29; for 739, 2S. iv. 1 ete.; of the mind,
Gal. vi. 9 (pH éxAvopevoe if we faint not, sc. in well-do-
ing). Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 17. b. to despond,
become faint-hearted: Heb. xii. 5, (Deut. xx. 3; Prov.
exudoow
iii. 11); with rats Wuxais added, Heb. xii. 3; rots ca-
pact, Tais Wuyais, Polyb. 20, 4,7; ry oxy, 29, 6, 14;
40, 12, 7; ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. ix. 8; 2 Mace. iii. 24.*
ék-pacow; impf. eféuaccov; 1 aor. éfeuaka; to wipe
off, to wipe away: with acc. of object and dat. of instru-
ment, Lk. vii. 38,44; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3; xiii. 5. (Soph.,
Eur., Hippocr., Aristot., al. Sir. xii. 11; Bar. vi. (ep.
Jer.) 12, 23 (13, 24).)*
éx-puxtnpltw: impf. efeuuxrnpitov; to deride by turning
up the nose, to sneer at, scoff at: twa, Lk. xvi. 143 xxiil.
35. (For ay), Ps. ii 43, [xxxiv, (xxxv.) 16]; 2.K. xix.
21 [here the simple verb]; 1 Esdr. i. 49 Alex.; Ev.
Nicod. ce. 10. Prof. writ. use the simple verb (fr. purnp
the nose) ; [cf. W. 25].) * ;
ék-vebw: 1 aor. e£evevoa; 1. to bend to one side (rH
«epady, Xen. ven. 10, 12). 2. to take one’s self away,
withdraw: Jn. vy. 13, where Chrysostom says that ¢éé&€-
vevoe is equiv. to eێxAwe; but others derive the form
from éxvew, gq. v. (Sept. for 30, Judg. iv. 18 Alex.; 739,
to turn one’s self, Judg. xviii. 26 Alex.; 2K. ii. 24; xxiii.
16; [add 3 Mace. iii. 22; Joseph. antt. 7, 4,2]. In prof.
auth. also transitively, to avoid a thing; as ra BéAn, Diod.
15, 87; mAnyny, ib. 17, 100.) *
€x-VEw : 1. properly, to swim away, escape by swim-
ming, (Thue. 2, 90). 2. to escape, slip away secretly,
({Pind. Ol. 13, 163]; Eur. Hipp. 470, ete.) ; in this sense
many interpp. take efevevce in Jn. v. 13. But Jesus
withdrew not to avoid danger but the admiration of the
people; for the danger first arose after his withdrawal.*
éx-vqidw: 1 aor. e£ernra; a. prop. lo return to one’s
self from drunkenness, become sober, (Gen. ix. 24; [1S8.
xxv. 37]; Joeli.5; [Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 2]; Lynceus ap.
Ath. 4, 5 p. 130 b.). b. metaph. to return to soberness
of mind (cf. avavnpw): 1 Co. xv. 34, (Plut. Dem. 20).*
Exovoros, -ov, (€kwv ), voluntary: Kata éxovoror, of free
will, Philem. 14. (Num. xv. 3; xa@ éxovoiav, Thue. 8,
27 —[“ The word understood in the one case appears to
be rpérov (Porphyr. de abst. 1, 9 xa6’ éxovctov tpdmoy,
comp. Eur. Med. 751 éxovaiw rpdém@) ; in the other, yraunv
so €xovoia [doubtful, see L. and S.], e& éxovcias, ete. ;”
ef. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 1. c.; cf.
W. 463 (432)].)*
éxovelws, adv., [fr. Eur. down], voluntarily, willingly,
of one’s own accord: Heb. x. 26 (éx. duapravew [A. V.
to sin wilfully] is tacitly opposed to sins committed
inconsiderately, and from ignorance or from weakness) ;
1: Petaiva,2.%
€éx-rahat, adv., (fr. €k and mada, formed like éxrore [cf.
W. 24 (23); 422 (393); B. 321 (275)]), from of old; of
a long time: 2 Pet. ii. 3; iii. 5. (A later Grk. word, fr.
Philo down; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sqq.) *
ex-reipatw ; fut. exmespaocw; [1 aor. ééereipaca, 1 Co. x.
9° Lmrg. TWH mrg.]; a word wholly biblical [put by
Philo (de congr. erud. grat. §30, Mang. i. 543) for Sept.
retpa¢. in quoting Deut. viii. 2]; to prove, test, thoroughly
[A. V. tempt]: ria, his mind and judgment, Lk. x. 25;
tov Gedy, to put to proof God’s character and power:
Mt. iv. 7; Lk. iv. 12, after Deut. vi. 16, where for 7D);
198
) Ne
EXTANT TW
Tov Xptordy, by irreligion and immorality to test the
patience or the avenging power of Christ (exalted to
God’s right hand), 1 Co. x. 9* [(yet L T WH Tr txt.
xvpiov), 9° Lmrg. TWH mrg. Cf. Ps. lxxvii. (Ixxviii.)
18].*
éx-tréprrw: 1 aor. e€emeuwa; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. exmep-
pbeis; to send forth, send away: Acts xiii. 4; xvii. 10.
[From Hom. down. ] *
éx-repiooas, adv., exceedingly, out of measure, the more:
used of intense earnestness, Mk. xiv. 31 LT TrWH
(for Rec. ex mepiovod ); not found elsewhere. But see
UmepekTrepiaaa@s.*
éx-reravvupt: 1 aor. efereraca; to spread out, stretch
forth: ras xeipas mpds twa, Ro. x. 21 fr. Is. xv. 2. (Eur.,
Polyb., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
éx-r7Sd, -@: 1 aor. eEenndaca; to spring out, leap
forth: eis r. dxydov, Acts xiv. 14 GLT Tr WH. (eis rév
Aadv, Judith xiv. 17; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hat.
down. Deut. xxxiii. 22.) *
éx-rlartw; pf. exmémrwxa ; 2 aor. e€émecov; 1 aor. e€€-
meca (Acts xii. 7 LT Tr WH; Gal. v. 4; on this aor.
see [minrw and] dmépyoua); [fr. Hom. down]; to fall
out of, to fall down from; 1. prop.: ai dd\voets x Tov
xetpav (see éx, I. 3 [cf. W. 427 (398) and De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. ii. p. 11]), Acts xii. 7 (€« rs Onxns, Is. vi. 13;
éx Tod ovpavod, Is. xiv. 12); absol.: Mk. xiii. 25 RG;
Acts xxvii. 32; Jas. i. 11; 1 Pet. i. 24; of navigators,
éxr. eis (i. e. from a straight course) to fall off i. e. be
driven into [cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Phileb. p. 106 sq. ;
al. supply ‘from deep water,’ and render éxm. to be cast
away], Acts xxvii. 17, 25, 29, in this last vs. LT Tr WH
have adopted éem. xara, (often in Grk. writ., as eis yny,
Eur. Hel. 409; eis rov Auseva, Thue. 2, 92). 2. met-
aph. a. twos [W. 427 (398), and De verb. comp. ete.
u. s.], to fall from a thing, to lose it: ths xaperos, Gal. v.
4; tov idiov ornprypod, 2 Pet. iii. 17, (rjs mpds rov Sjpoy
evvoias, Plut. Tib. Gracch. 21; Baodeias, Joseph. antt.
7,9, 2; also with prepositions, é€x rav edvrwv, Hadt. 3, 14;
dnd tav édridev, Thue. 8, 81); mddev, Rev. ii. 5 Ree.
(€xeiOev, Ael. v. h. 4, 7). b. absol. to perish; to fail,
(properly, to fall from a place which one cannot keep,
fall from its position) : 7 d@yamn, 1 Co. xiii. 8 RG; to fall
powerless, fall to the ground, be without effect: of the
divine promise of salvation by Christ, Ro. ix. 6.*
éx-rdéw: [impf. e&€mdeov]; 1 aor. e€€mdevoa; to sail
from, sail away, depart by ship: dmé with gen. of place,
Acts xx. 6; eis with ace. of place, Acts xv. 39; xviii. 18.
[Soph., Hdt., Thuc., al.] *
éx-rAnpéw: pf. éxmerAnpoxa; to fill full, to fill up com-
pletely; metaph. rnv émayyediar, to fulfil i. e. make good :
Acts xiii. 33 (32), as in Polyb. 1,67, 1. [From Hdt.
down. |*
éx-AHpwors, -ews, 7, a completing, fulfilment: r. nuepov
r. dyvopov, the time when the days of purification are
to end, Acts xxi. 26. [Dion. Hal., Strab., Philo, al.] *
éx-rdqoow, -rrw: Pass., [pres. €xmAnocopat or -rropat
(so RG Mt. xiii. 54; Tr WH Acts xiii. 12)]; impf. e&
exAnooounv; 2 aor. e£erAdynv; com. in Grk. fr. Hom.
2 !
EKXTTVED -
down; prop. to strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or
away; to cast off by a blow, to drive out; commonly, to
strike one out of self~possession, to strike with panic, shock,
astonish; Pass. to be struck with astonishment, astonished,
amazed ; absol.: Mt. xiii. 54; xix. 25; Mk. vi. 2; x. 26;
LK. ii. 48; used of the glad amazement of the wonder-
ing people, Mk. vii. 37; émi r7 didayn, Mt. vii. 28; xxii.
33; Mk. i. 22; xi. 18; Lk.iv.32; Acts xiii. 12; [émi 7 peya-
Aewdtnte, Lk. ix. 43], (€ml r@ xadrer, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27;
ént 7H Oéa, Ael. v. h. 12,41; [W.§ 33, b.]; by the Greeks
also with simple dat. and with acc. of the thing, as Sap.
xiii. 4; 2 Mace. vii. 12).. [Syn. see oBéo, fin. ] *
éx-rvéw: 1 aor. e&€rvevaoa; to breathe out, breathe out
one’s life, breathe one’s last, expire: Mk. xv. 37, 39; Lk.
xxiii. 46, and often in Grk. writ., both without an object
(fr. [Soph. Aj. 1026] Eur. down), and with Biov or yuyny
added (fr. Aeschyl. down).*
€x-mropevopar; impf. éeropevduny; fut. exmopevoouat ;
(pass. [mid., cf. ropevw] of éxmopeva to make to go forth,
to lead out, with fut. mid.) ; [fr. Xen. down]; Sept. for
R¥°; to go forth, go out, depart; 1. prop.; with men-
tion of the place whence: amd, Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46;
é£@ (THs wodews), Mk. xi. 19; ex, Mk. xiii. 1; exetOev, Mk.
vi. 11; mapa tevos, from one’s abode, one’s vicinity, Jn.
Xv. 26, (dkovo@pev Ta éxmopevdueva mapa kupiov, Ezek.
Xxxili. 30); without mention of the place whence or
whither, which must be learned from the context: Lk.
iii. 7; Acts xxv. 4; with mention of the end to which:
emt twa, Rev. xvi. 14; mpds tua, Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5; ék-
mopeverOar cis 68dv, to go forth from some place into the
road [or on his way, cf. 680s, 1 b.], Mk. x. 17; on Acts
ix. 28 see elamopevouat, 1 a. demons, when expelled, are
said to go out (sc. from the human body): Mt. xvii. 21
RGL; Actsxix.12GLT Tr WH. [food (excrement) ]
to go out i. e. be discharged, Mk. vii. 19. to come forth,
€k TOY pvnueiwv, of the dead who are restored to life and
leave the tomb, Jn. v. 29. 2. fig. to come forth, to issue,
to proceed: with the adjuncts éx rod avOpmmov, éx THs
kapOias, €x Tov ordyuatos, of feelings, affections, deeds,
sayings, Mt. xv. 11,18; Mk. vii. 15 L T Tr WH, 20; Lk.
iv. 22; Eph. iv. 29; [€owOev ex 77s xapdias, Mk. vii. 21;
with écw6ev alone, ibid. 23]; mav prua éxmop. da orduaros
Geod, every appointment whereby God bids a man to be
nourished and preserved, Mt. iv. 4, fr. Deut. viii. 3. to
break forth: of lightnings, flames, etc., ék twos, Rev. iv. 5;
ix. 17 sq.; xi.g§. to flow forth: of a river (ék r.), Rev.
xxii. 1. to project, from the mouth of one: of a sword,
Rev. i. 16; xix. 15, 21 Rec. to spread abroad, of a ru-
mor : foll. by eis, Lk. iv. 37. [Syn. cf. épyouas, fin.]*
€x-ropvetw: 1 aor. ptep. fem. éxmopvetoaca; (the prefix
éx seems to indicate a lust that gluts itself, satisfies itself
completely); Sept. often for 731; to go a whoring, ‘give
one’s self over to fornication’ A. V.: Jude 7. Not found
in prof. writ. [Test. xii. Patr. test. Dan § 5; Poll. 6, 30
(126).]*
éx-rrbw: 1 aor. e€émruca; to spit out (Hom. Od. 5, 322,
etc.) ; trop. to reject, spurn, loathe: ri, Gal. iv. 14, in
which sense the Greeks used xaramriew, mooomrvey,
199
EXTELV@
mrvew, and Philo rapamriew; cf. Kypke and Loesner [or
Ellic.] on Gal. 1. c.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 17.*
ex-pildw,-: 1 aor. e€epifwoa; Pass.,1 aor. éLepitobnv ;
1 fut. éxpitwOnoopa; to root out, pluck up by the roots: ti,
Mt. xiii. 29; xv. 13; Lk. xvii. 6; Jude12. (Jer.i. 10;
Zeph. ii. 4; Sir. iii. 9; [Sap. iv.4]; 1 Mace. v. 51 [Alex.];
2 Mace. xii. 7; [Sibyll. frag. 2, 21; al.]; Geopon.) *
éx-rracis, -ews, 7, (eEiornpe) ; 1. univ. in Grk. writ.
any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state ;
displacement, (Aristot., Plut.). 2. a throwing of the
mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether
such as makes a lunatic (8cavoias, Deut. xxviii. 28; rav
Aoytcpar, Plut. Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some
sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself,
so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his
mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and
wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the
forms and images lying within, and thinks that he per-
ceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him
by God, (Philo, quis rerum divin. heres § 53 [cf. 51; B.D.
s.v. Trance; Delitzsch, Psychol. v.5]) : érémecev [ Rec., al.
€yéveto] én avrov éxotaats, Acts x. 10; eidev ev exorace
dpapa, Acts xi. 5; yevéoOat ev exorace:, Acts xxii. 17, ef.
2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 3. In the O. T. and the New amaze-
ment [cf. Longin. 1,4; Stob. flor. tit. 104, 7], the state of
one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of
an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and won-
der: efyev avtas tpdpos kal €xoraows, Mk. xvi. 8; e&€arn-
cay exorace: peyadn, Mk. v. 42 (Ezek. xxvi. 16); éxoraots
€XaBev Gravras, Lk. v. 26; éemAnoOnoav GapBovs x. exota-
cews, Acts iii. 10; (for N1N, trembling, Gen. xxvii. 33 ;
1 S. xiv. 15, ete.; 35, fear, 2 Chr. xiv. 14, etc.).*
éx-oTpédw : pf. pass. eEeorpappat ; 1. to turn or twist
out, tear up, (Hom. Il. 17, 58). 2. to turn inside out,
invert; trop. to change for the worse, pervert, corrupt,
(Arstph. nub. 554; Sept. Deut. xxxii. 20): Tit. iii. 11.*
[éx-cdtw: 1 aor. éééawoa; to save from, either to keep
or to rescue from danger (fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) :
eis alytadov éxoaoat TO mAotoy to bring the ship safe to
shore, Acts xxvii. 39 WH txt.; al. €€doat, see ¢£wbew, and
ela 7 ef
éx-tapdcow ; post-classical ; to agitate, trouble, exceed-
ingly: tr. rédw, Acts xvi. 20. (7. Sjpov, Plut. Coriol. 19,
and the like often in Dion Cass. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5;
Sap. xvii. 3, ete.) *
éx-relvw; fut. extevd; 1 aor. eferewa; [fr. Aeschyl.,
Soph., Hdt. down]; Sept. com. for 743, v1 and nw;
to stretch out, stretch forth: rnv xeipa (often in Sept.),
Mt. viii: 3)3)xiis) 135 xiv: 31 ;xxvi.. 51; Mik.ji.) 413 ii.
5; Lk. v. 13; vi. 10; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xxvi. 1; with
the addition of émi tiva, over, towards, against one —
either to point out something, Mt. xii. 49, or to lay
hold of a person in order to do him violence, Lk. xxii.
53; éxr. rT. xeipa eis taow, spoken of God, Acts iv. 30;
dykvpas, properly, to carry forward [R. V. lay out] the
cable to which the anchor is fastened, i. e. to cast anchor.
[‘‘ the idea of extending the cables runs into that of car
| rying out and dropping the anchors ” (Hackett) ; cf. B. D.
EXTENEW
Am. ed. p. 3009* last par.], Acts xxvii. 30. [Comp.: ér-,
irrep-exreiva. | *
éx-redéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. exreh€oar; to finish, complete :
Lk. xiv. 29 sq. (From Hom. down; i. q. m3, Deut.
xxxii. 45.) *
éx-révera, -as, 4, (exrevns), a later Grk. word, (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 311); a. prop. extension. b. intentness
(of mind), earnestness: év éxreveia, earnestly, Acts xxvi. 7.
(2 Mace. xiv. 38; Judith iv. 9. Cf. Grimm on 3 Macc.
vi. 41 [where he refers to Cic. ad Att. 10, 17, 1].)*
éxrevfs, -és, (exreivw), prop. stretched out; fig. intent,
earnest, assiduous : mpocevyn, Acts xii. 5 RG (edxn, Ignat.
[interpol.] ad Eph. 10; dénots x. ixecia, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
59,2); dyad, 1 Pet. iv. 8. Neut. of the compar. éxre-
vearepov, as adv., more intently, more earnestly, Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. (éxrevns pidros, Aeschyl.
suppl. 983; Polyb. 22, 5,4; then very often fr. Philo
on; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311.) *
éxtevas, adv., earnestly, fervently: Acts xii. 5 LT Tr
WH; dyaray, 1 Pet. i. 22. (Jonah iii. 8; Joel i. 14; 3
Mace. v.9. Polyb. ete. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311; [W.
25; 463 (431)].)*
éx-rl@npe: 1 aor. pass. ptep. exreOeis; Mid., impf. efers-
Oéunv; 2 aor. e&eb€unv; to place or set out, expose ; a:
prop.: an infant, Acts vii. 21; (Sap. xviii. 5; [Hdt. 1,
112]; Arstph. nub. 531; Ael. v. h. 2,7; Lecian. de
sacrif. 5, and often). 2. Mid. metaph. fo set forth, de-
clare, expound: Acts xi. 4; ri, Acts xvill. 26; xxviil. 23;
({Aristot. passim]; Diod. 12, 18; Joseph. antt.1, 12, 2;
Athen. 7 p. 278 d.; al.).*
éx-tiwacoow: 1 aor. impv. extidfare ; 1 aor. mid. ptep.
extwakauevos ; to shake off, so that something adhering
shall fall: rov yoov, Mk. vi. 11; rév komoprdv, Mt. x. 14
(where the gen. ra@v rodav does not depend on the verb
but on the subst. [L T WH mrg., however, insert éx]) ;
by this symbolic act a person expresses extreme con-
tempt for another and refuses to have any further inter-
course with him [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Dust] ; Mid. to shake
off for (the cleansing of) one’s self: T.Komoprov ... emi
twa, against one, Acts xiii. 51; ra iudria, dust from gar-
ments, Acts xviii. 6; [ef. B. D. u.s.; Neh. v.13]. (to knock
out, rovs dddvras, Hom. Il. 16, 348; Plut. Cat. maj. 14.)*
éxros, -n, -ov, the sixth: Mt. xx. 5, ete. [From Hom.
down. ]
éxtés, adv., (opp. to évros, q. v.), outside, beyond; a.
TO exrds, the outside, exterior, with possess. gen., Mt. xxiii.
26 (cf. ro €£wOev rod mornpiov, 25). On the pleonastic
phrase éxros ei pn, see ef, HI.8d. b. It has the force of
a prep. [cf. W. § 54,6], and is foll. by the gen. [so even
in Hom.]; a. outside of: éxrds rod c@paros out of the
body, i. e. freed from it, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. (in vs. 3 L T Tr
WH read ywpis for éxrds) ; etvau éxros rod cap. [A. V.
without the body i. e.], does not pertain to the body, 1
Co. vi. 18. B. beyond, besides, except: Acts xxvi. 22
(where the constr. is ovdév Aéywv exros TovTwv, dre oi...
€\dAnoay ete. [cf. B. 287 (246); W. 158 (149) sq.]); 1
Co. xv. 27. (Sept. for 729 foll. by 1p, Judg. viii. 26;
sadn, 1K. x. 13; 2 Chr. ix. 12; xviiz\1'9:))7
200
expevya
éx-rpérw: Pass., [pres. éxrpémouat]; 2 aor. eLerparny;
2 fut. éxrpamnoopuat ; 1. to turn or twist out; pass. in
a medical sense, in a fig. of the limbs: tva pi ro ywoddr
extpany, lest it be wrenched out of (its proper) place,
dislocated, [R. V. mrg. put out of joint], (see exx. of this
use fr. med. writ. in Steph. Thesaur. iii. col. 607 d.), i.e.
lest he who is weak in a state of grace fall therefrom,
Heb. xii. 13 [but Liinem., Delitzsch, al., still adhere to
the meaning turn aside, go astray; cf. A. V., R. V. txt.].
2. to turn off or aside; pass. in a mid. sense [cf. B. 192
(166 sq.)], to turn one’s self aside, to be turned aside; (in-
trans.) to turn aside; Hesych.: é&erpannoav: é&€kdwvay,
(rns 6800, Leian. dial. deor. 25, 2; Ael. v. h. 14, 49 [48];
é£w rns odov, Arr. exp. Al. 3, 21, 7 [4]; absol. Xen. an.
4,5,15; Arstph. Plut. 837; with mention of the place
to which, Hdt. 6, 34; Plat. Soph. p. 222 a.; al.); figu-
ratively: eis paratodoyiay, 1 Tim. i. 6; emi rods pudous, 2
Tim. iv. 4; dio twos, to turn away from one in order to
follow another, 1 Tim. v. 15, (eis adixous mpda€ers, Joseph.
antt. 8,10, 2). with ace. to turn away from, to shun a
thing, to avoid meeting or associating with one: ras Kevo-
gewvias, 1 Tim. vi. 20, (rév €Xeyxov, Polyb. 35, 4, 14;
TadXous exrperecOar kai cvvodoyv devyew tiv per ator,
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 40).*
éx-tpepw ; fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. to nourish up to
maturity; then univ. to nourish: thy éavrod capa, Eph.
Wai29. 2. to nurture, bring up: ra rékva, Eph. vi. 4.*
[Exrpopos, adj., (cf. expoBos), trembling exceedingly, ex-
ceedingly terrified : Heb. xii. 21 Tr mrg. WH mrg., after
codd. Sin. and Clarom. (al. éyrpoyos, q. v.). Not found
elsewhere.* ]
Ek-Tpwpa, -Tos, TO, (€xTiTpwoKw to cause or to suffer abor-
tion; like &«Bpopa fr. éxBi8pockw), an abortion, abortive
birth; an untimely birth: 1 Co. xv. 8, where Paul likens
himself to an ékrpwya, and in vs. 9 explains in what sense:
that he is as inferior to the rest of the apostles as an im-
mature birth comes short of a mature one, and is no more
worthy of the name of an apostle than an abortion is of
the name of achild. (Num. xii. 12; Eccl. vi. 3; Job
iii. 16; in Grk. first used by Aristot. de gen. an. 4, 5, 4
[p- 773, 18]; but, as Phrynichus shows, p. 208 sq. ed.
Lob., [288 sq. ed. Rutherford], duS\opa and éfapBropa
are preferable; [Huztable in “ Expositor” for Apr. 1882
p- 277 sqq.; Bp. Lahtft. Ignat. ad Rom. 9 p. 230 sq. J.) *
éx-hépw ; fut. €£oicw; 1 aor. eEnveyxa; 2 aor. €EnveyKov;
1. to carry out, to bear forth: rwa, Acts y, 15; the dead
for burial, Acts v. 6, 9 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Il. 24, 786 down; see éexxopifw); ri, Lk. xv. 22; 1
Tim. vi. 7. 2. to (bring i. e.) lead out: twa, Mk. viii.
23 T Tr txt. WH. 3. to bring forth i. e. produce : of
the earth bearing plants, Heb. vi. 8 [cf. W. § 45, 6 a.];
(Hdt. 1,193; Xen. oec. 16, 5; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 and often;
Sept., Gen. i. 12; Hag. i. 11; Cant. ii. 13).*
éx-evyw : fut. expevEouar; pf. exmehevya; 2 aor. €&-
épvyov; [fr. Hom. down]; to flee out of, flee away; a.
to seek safety in flight; absol. Acts xvi. 27; éx Tov oixov,
Acts xix. 16. b. to escape: 1 Th. v. 3; Heb. ii. 3; ri,
Lk. xxi. 36; Ro. ii. 3; rwa, Heb. xii. 25 L T Tr WH;
éexpoBéw
[ras yeipds tevos, 2 Co. xi. 33. Cf. W.§ 52, 4,4; B. 146
(128) sq. ].*
éx-oPéw, -@; to frighten away, to terrify; to throw into
violent fright: twa, 2Co.x.9. (Deut. xxviii. 26; Zeph.
iii. 13, etc.; Thuc., Plat., al.) *
ExoBos, -ov, stricken with fear or terror, exceedingly
frightened, terrified: Mk. ix. 6; Heb. xii. 21 fr. Deut. ix.
19. (Aristot. physiogn. 6 [p. 812°, 29]; Plut. Fab. 6.) *
éx-hiw; 2 aor. pass. eLehinv (W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60) ;
Kriiger § 40, s. v. pvw; [ Veitch ibid. ]) ; [fr. Hom. down];
to generate or produce from; to cause to grow out: Grav 6
kAddos . . . Ta PvAAa expvy (subj. pres.), when the branch
has become tender and puts forth leaves, R (not R*) GT
WH in Mt. xxiv. 32 and Mk. xiii. 28; [al., retaining the
same accentuation, regard it as 2 aor. act. subj. intrans.,
with ra @vA. as subject; but against the change of sub-
ject see Meyer or Weiss]. But Fritzsche, Lchm., Treg.,
al. have with reason restored [after Erasmus] éx@un (2
aor. pass. subj.), which Grsb. had approved: when the
leaves have grown out,—so that ra pvAAa is the subject.*
éx-xéw and (a form censured by the grammarians, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 726) ékydvw (whence pres. pass. ptep.
exxuvoyevos and, in L T Tr WH after the Aeolic form,
exxuvvopevos [cf. B. 69 (61); W.§ 2,1 d.; Tdf Proleg.
p- 79]: Mt. xxiii. 35; xxvi. 28: Mk. xiv. 24; Lk. xi. 50
[where Tr txt. WH txt. exxeyupevov for éxxuvvdpevor | ;
xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]); impv. plur. exyéere
(Rev. xvi. 1 L TWH; on which uncontr. form ef. Bitm.
Gram. p. 196 [p. 174 Robinson’s trans.]; B. 44 (38);
[some would make it a 2 aor., see WH. App. p. 165]);
fut. ékye@ (Acts ii. 17 sq.; Ex. xxix. 12), for which the
earlier Greek used éxyevow (W. 77 (74); [ef. 85 (82);
esp. B. 68 (60)]); 1 aor. eféyea, 3 pers. sing. e&éyee
({whereas the 3 sing. of the im pf. is contr. -€yee -€yes,
cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 299 sq.]; ef. Bttm. Gram.
p- 196 note ** [Eng. trans. u. s. note ¢]), inf. éxyeas (Ro.
iii. 15; Is. lix. 7; Ezek. ix. 8); Pass., [pres. exyetras,
Mk. ii. 22 RG LTrmrg.br.; impf. 3 pers. sing. e£eyeiro,
Acts xxii. 20 R G, é£eyivvero L T Tr WH]; pf. éxxeé-
xupar; 1 aor. e€exvOnv; 1 fut. exyvOnooua (see B. 69
(60) sq.); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 39; to pour out;
a. prop.: gidaAnv, by meton. of the container for the
contained, Rey. xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; of wine, which
when the vessel is burst runs out and is lost, Mt. ix. 17;
Mk. ii. 22 [RGLTrmrg. in br.]; Lk. v. 37; used of
other things usually guarded with care which are poured
forth or cast out: of money, Jn. ii. 15; e&eyvOn ra om)ay-
xva, of the ruptured body of a man, Acts i. 18 (é£eyv6n
7 kowXia avrod eis Tr. yv, of a man thrust through with a
sword, 2S. xx. 10). The phrase aiva éxyeiv or éxxv-
v(v)ew is freq. used of bloodshed: [Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi.
50; Acts xxii. 20; Ro. ili. 15; Rev. xvi. 6* (where Tdf.
aizata)]; see aiua, 2 a. b. metaph. i. q. to bestow or
distribute largely (cf. Fritzsche on Tob. iv. 17 and Sir.
i. 8): rd mvevpa Td dytov or awd Tov mvevpaTos, i. e. the
abundant bestowal of the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33 fr.
Joel ii. 28, 29 (iii. 1, 2); émi rwa, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45;
Tit. iti. 6; 1) ayamn rov Oeod exxéyuta ev tais Kapdias
201
€NaLov
nav da mv. dyiov, the Holy Spirit gives our souls a rich
sense of the greatness of God’s love for us, Ro. v. 5;
(opyny, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 8, [cf. xvi. 11]). The pass.,
like the Lat. effundor, me effundo, is used of those who
give themselves up to a thing, rush headlong into it, (ye-
Awrt, Alciphr.; eis éraipas, Polyb. 32, 11,4): absol. rq
mAdvy Tov Badaap piobov e£exvOnoar, led astray by the
hire of Balaam (i. e. by the same love of reward as Ba-
laam) they gave themselves up, sc. to wickedness, Jude
11, (so €xxvOnva in Arstph. vesp. 1469 is used absol. of
one giving himself up to joy. The passage in Jude is
generally explained thus: “for hire they gave themselves
up to [R. V. ran riotously in] the error of Balaam”’; cf.
W. 206 (194) [and De Wette (ed. Briickner) ad loc.]).*
é-xive, and (LT Tr WH) ékxxivyw, see eéxyéo.
[Comp.: wmep- exxvve. ]
&x-xwpéw, -&; [fr. Soph. and Hdt. on]; to depart from;
to remove from in the sense of fleeing from: Lk. xxi. 21.
(For 193, Am. vii. 12.) *
ex-poxw: 1 aor. e£eyuEa; to expire, to breathe out one’s
life (see éxmvew): Acts v. 5,10; xii. 23. (Hippocr.,
Jambl.) *
éxav, -ovoa, -dv, unforced, voluntary, willing, of one’s
own will, of one’s own accord: Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 17.
[From Hom. down. ]*
édaia, -as, 7, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for m1; 1. an
olive tree: Ro. xi. 17, 24; plur. Rev. xi. 4. 1d dpos trav
éAav (for NIT IN, Zech. xiv. 4), the Mount of Olives,
so called from the multitude of olive-trees which grew
upon it, distant from Jerusalem (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6)
five stadia eastward (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Oelberg; Ar-
nold in Herzog x. p. 549 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iv.
354 sq.; [Grove and Porter in BB.DD.]): Mt. xxi. 1;
xxiv. 3; xxvi. 30; Mk. xi. 1; xiii. 3; xiv. 26; Lk. xix.
37; xxii. 39; Jn. vill. 1 Rec.; (on LK. xix. 29; xxi. 37,
see éAawv). 2. an olive, the fruit of the olive-tree:
Jas. iii. 12.*
EXatov, -ov, 7d, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for jw,
also for 19¥7; olive-oil: used for feeding lamps, Mt. xxv.
3 sq. 8; for healing the sick, Mk. vi. 13; Lk. x. 34; Jas.
v.14; for anointing the head and body at feasts (Athen.
15, c. 11) [ef. s. v. pupov], Lk. vii. 46; Heb. i. 9 (on
which pass. see dya\Xiaois) ; mentioned among articles
of commerce, Lk. xvi. 6; Rev. vi. 6; xviii. 13. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Oel; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 354; Schneder-
mann, Die bibl. Symbolik des Oelbaumes u. d. Oeles, in
the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1874, p. 4 sqq.; [B. D.
s. v. Oil, IJ. 4; and Mey. ed. Weiss on Mk. vi. 13].*
€Latdv, -dvos, 6, (the ending wy in derivative nouns in-
dicatine a place set with trees of the kind designated
by the primitive, as dadvav, ireov, Spupawr, cedpwr, cf.
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 422 sqq.; Kiihneri. p. 711; (Jelf
§ 335 d.]); an olive-orchard, a place planted with olive
trees, i.e. the Mount of Olives [ A. V. Olivet] (see éXaia, 1) :
Acts i. 12 (81a rod €Aat@vos dpous, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 2).
In Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37 also we should write ré dpos rd
caovpevov eka (so LT Tr, [but WH with RG -év]);
likewise in Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6 mpos dpos ro moocayo
Enrayirns
pevdpevov edarwy; b. j. 2,13, 5 and 5, 2, 3 eis (xara)
€Aai@y Kadovpevor Gpos; 6, 2, 8 kata TO EAai@y dpos ; [but
in Joseph. ll. cc. Bekker edits -év]. Cf. Fritzsche on
Mk. p. 794 sq.; B. 22 (19 sq.); W. 182 (171) n. 1; [but
see WH. App. p. 158°]. (The Sept. sometimes render
nt freely by éAawv, as Ex. xxiii. 11; Deut. vi. 11; 15S.
vill. 14, ete.; not found in Grk. writ.) *
*Edapirns (T WH ’EXapeirns, [see s. v. et, ¢]), -ov, 6, an
Elamite, i. e. an inhabitant of the province of Elymais,
a region stretching southwards to the Persian Gulf, but
the boundaries of which are variously given (cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Elam; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. p. 747 sqq.;
Dillmann in Schenkel ii. p. 91 sq.; Schrader in Riehm
p- 358 sq.; Grimm on 1 Mace. vi. 1; [BB.DD. s. vv.
Elam, Elamites]): Actsii.9. (Is. xxi. 2; in Grk. writ.
’*Edvpaios, and so Judith i. 6.) *
&doowv [in Jn., Ro.] or -rr@v [in Heb., 1 Tim.; cf. B.
7], -ov, (compar. of the Epic adj. éAayvs equiv. to puxpds),
[fr. Hom. down], Jess, —either in age (younger), Ro. ix.
12; or in rank, Heb. vii. 7; or in excellence, worse (opp.
to xadés), Jn. ii. 10. Neuter €darrov, adverbially, less
[se. than etc., A. V. under; cf. W. 239 (225); 595 sq.
(554); B. 127 sq. (112)]: 1 Tim. v. 9.*
ékarrovew [B. 7], -@: 1 aor. nAatrévnoa; (€Aarrov) ;
not found in prof. auth. [yet see Aristot. de plant. 2, 3
p- 825%, 23]; to be less, inferior, (in possessions): 2 Co.
viii. 15 fr. Ex. xvi. 18. (Prov. xi. 24; Sir. xix. (5) 6;
also transitively, to make less, diminish: Gen. viii. 3;
Prov. xiv. 34; 2 Mace. xiii. 19, etc.) *
ékarréw [B. 7], -@: 1 aor. ndarrwoa; Pass., [pres.
éXatrovpat|; pf. ptep. nAarrapevos; (€Aartwy); to make
less or inferior: twa, in dignity, Heb. ii. 7; Pass. to be
made less or inferior: in dignity, Heb. ii. 9; to decrease
(opp. to avédvw), in authority and popularity, Jn. iii. 30.
(Many times in Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. on.) *
étatvw; pf. ptep. €Andaxws; Pass., [pres. €Aavvopac];
impf. 7Aavvdpnv; to drive: of the wind driving ships or
clouds, Jas. iii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 17; of sailors propelling a
vessel by oars, to row, Mk. vi. 48; to be carried in a
ship, to sail, Jn. vi. 19, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; often also with vja or vaty added); of demons
driving to séme place the men whom they possess, Lk.
viii. 29. [Comp.: dm-, cuv-edavva. | *
ekadpla, -as, 7, (eAadppds), lightness; used of levity and
fickleness of mind, 2 Co. i. 17; a later word, cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 343.*
&adpds, -d, -dv, light in weight, quick, agile; a light
dopriov is used fig. concerning the commandments of
Jesus, easy to be kept, Mt. xi. 30; neut. rd éAadpdr,
substantively, the lightness: rhs Odivews [A. V. our light
affliction], 2 Co. iv. 17. (From Hom. down.) *
hax eros, -n, -ov, (superl. of the adj. puxpds, but com-
ing fr. ékayvs), [(Hom. h. Mere. 578), Hdt. down], small-
est, least, — whether in size: Jas. iii. 4; in amount: of
the management of affairs, murros ev eXayiorw, Lk. xvi.
10 (opp. to €v moAA@) ; xix. 17; ev eAaxiotw adios, Lk.
xvi. 10; in importance: what is of the least moment,
1 Co. vi. 2; in authority: of commandments, Mt. v. 19;
202
eeyy wo
in the estimation of men: of persons, Mt. xxv. 40, 453
in rank and excellence: of persons, Mt. v.19; 1 Co. xv.
9; of a town, Mt. ii. 6. ovdé [RG ore] €Adyiorov, not
even a very small thing, Lk. xii. 26; eyol eis eAdyuordy
éore (see cipi, V. 2 c.), 1 Co.ive 3:*
€haxtororepos, -a, -ov, (compar. formed fr. the superl.
éAdxioros ; there is also a superl. éXayiordraros; “it is
well known that this kind of double comparison is com-
mon in the poets; but in prose, it is regarded as faulty.”
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136; ef. W. § 11, 2 b., [also 27 (26);
B. 28 (25)]), less than the least, lower than the lowest:
Eph. iii. 8.*
éA\dw, see eAavva.
*"Eded{ap, (77 po whom God helps), 6, indecl., Eleazar,
one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 15.*
éhedw, adopted for the more com. éAeéw (q. v-) by LT Tr
WH in Ro. ix. 16 and Jude 23, [also by WH Trmrg. in
22]; (Prov. xxi. 26 cod. Vat.; 4 Macc. ix. 3 var.; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 2; Polye. ad Philip. 2, 2). Cf. W. 85
(82); B. 57 (50); [Mullach p. 252; WH. App. p. 166;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122].*
eeypds, -od, 6, (eheyxw), correction, reproof, censure : 2
Tim. iii. 16 L T Tr WH for RG €deyyxov. (Sir. xxi. 6;
XXXV. (xxxii.) 17, etc.; for MMDIA chastisement, punish-
ment, 2 K. xix. 3; Ps. exlix. 7; [Is. xxxvii. 3; ete.]. Not
found in prof. writ.)*
Ereykts, -ews, 7, (eAeyyo, q- v-), refutation, rebuke;
(Vulg. correptio; Augustine, convictio): €heyéw éryer
idias mapavopias, he was rebuked for his own transgres-
sion, 2 Pet. ii. 16. (Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 22 [p. 74 ed.
Olear.]; Sept., Job xxi. 4; xxiii. 2, for My complaint;
[Protevangel. Jacob. 16, 1 1d ddwp ris ed€ykews xvpior
(Sept. Num. v. 18 7d Swp rod édeypov) ].) *
edeyXOs, -ov, 6, (€EA€yyo); 1. a proof, that by which
a thing is proved or tested, (rd mpaypa Tov €deyxov Sacer,
Dem. 44, 15 [i.e.in Phil. 1, 15]; ris evyuyxias, Eur. Here.
fur. 162; évOad’ 6 €deyxos Tov mpayparos, Epict. diss. 3, 10,
11; al.): ray [or rather, mpaypatwy] od Breropevar,
that by which invisible things are proved (and we are
convinced of their reality), Heb. xi. 1 (Vulg. argumen-
tum non apparentium [Tdf. rerum arg. non parentum]) ;
[al. take the word here (in accordance with the preced-
ing imdcraots, q. Vv.) of the inward result of proving viz.
a conviction ; see Liinem. ad loc. ]. 2. conviction (Au-
gustine, convictio) : mpos €Xeyxov, for convicting one of
his sinfulness, 2 Tim. iii. 16 RG. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al. ;
Sept. chiefly for NMDsn.) *
ehéyxo ; fut. ehéyE@; 1 aor. inf. éhéyEar, impv. €deyEov;
[Pass., pres. €Aéyxopat ; 1 aor. ehéyxOnv] ; Sept. for M3in;
1. to convict, refute, confute, generally with a suggestion
of the shame of the person convicted, [* éheyyew hat ei-
gentlich nicht die Bedeutung ‘ tadeln, schmiihen, zurecht-
weisen,’ welche ihm die Lexika zuschreiben, sondern
bedeutet nichts als tiberfiihren” (Schmidt ch. iv. § 12)]:
twa, of crime, fault, or error; of sin, 1 Co. xiv. 24;
edeyxopevor td TOU vo“ov ws TapaBara, Jas. ii. 9; bd
Ths suveOnoews, Jn. viii. 9 R G (Philo, opp. ii. p. 649
[ed. Mang., vi. 203 ed. Richter, frag. repi dvacraceaws kat
éNcewvos
xpicews| TO auverdds €Aeyxos adexacTos kal mavrwv ayev-
d€araros); foll. by mepi with gen. of thing, Jn. viii. 46 ;
xvi. 8, and L T Tr WH in Jude 15, (Arstph. Plut. 574) ;
contextually, by conviction to bring to light, to expose: ri,
Jn. iii. 20, cf. 21; Eph. v. 11, 13, (Arstph. eccl. 485;
Ta kpurta, Artem. oneir. 1, 68; emordyevos, ws ei Kal
AdOoe 7 emiBovdy Kx. py eheyxGein, Hdian. 3, 12, 11 [4 ed.
Bekk. ]; al.) ; used of the exposure and confutation of false
teachers of Christianity, Tit.i. 9,13; tavra €deyye, utter
these things by way of refutation, Tit. ii. 15. 2. to
Jind fault with, correct; a. by word; to reprehend se-
verely, chide, admonish, reprove: Jude 22 LT Tr txt.;
1 Tim. v. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 2; teva epi twos, Lk. iii. 19;
contextually, to call to account, show one his fault, de-
mand an explanation: twa, from some one, Mt. xviii. 15.
b. by deed; to chasten, punish, (ace. to the trans. of the
Hebr. majn, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 2, ete.; Sap. xii. 2):
Heb. xii. 5 (fr. Prov. iii. 11); Rev. iii. 19. [On this
word cf. J. C. Hare, The Mission of the Comforter,
note L; Trench §iv. Comp.: é&, dta-kar-(-pat). ]*
éeewwds, -7, -ov, (€Aeos), fr. Hom. down, to be pitied,
miserable: Rev. iii. 17, [where WH have adopted the
Attic form éAewos, see their App. p. 145]; compar. 1
Co. xv. 19. [Cf. W. 99 (94).]*
€heéw, -; fut. CAenow; 1 aor. HAenoa; Pass., 1 aor.
nrenOnv ; 1 fut. €kenOnoopa; pf. ptep. nAenuevos ; (€Aeos) ;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. most freq. for }1M to be gracious,
also for OM to have mercy; several times for Son to
spare, and 0M) to console; to have mercy on: twa [W.
§ 32, 1b. a.], to succor one afflicted or seeking aid, Mt.
ix. 27; xv. 223 xvii. 15; xviii. 33; xx. 30 .sq.; Mk.v. 19
[here, by zeugma (W. § 66, 2 e.), the éca is brought
over with an adverbial force (W. 463 (431 sq.), how];
x. 478q.; Lk. xvi. 24; xvii. 13; xviii. 38 sq.; Phil. ii.
27; Jude 22 Rec.; absol. fo succor the afflicted, to bring
help to the wretched, [A. V. to show mercy], Ro. xii. 8;
pass. to experience [A. V. obtain] mercy, Mt. v. 7. Spec.
of God granting even to the unworthy favor, benefits,
opportunities, and particularly salvation by Christ: Ro.
ix. 15,16 RG (see éXeaw), 18; xi. 32; pass., Ro. xi. 30 sq. ;
1 Co;viin25 52 Co;,.1v.. 1; 1! Tim..3..18).16 -:). Petaind om
[Syn. €Ae€w, oixtelpw: ea. to feel sympathy with the
misery of another, esp. such sympathy as manifests itself in
act, less freq. in word; whereas oixr. denotes the inward
feeling of compassion which abidesin the heart. A criminal
begs éAcos of his judge; but hopeless suffering is often
the object of oixripuds. Schmidt ch. 143. On the other
hand, Fritzsche (Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 315) makes oikr.
and its derivatives the stronger terms: éA. the generic word
for the feeling excited by another’s misery ; oir. the same,
esp. when it calls (or is ‘suited to call) out exclamations
and tears. |
eXennocivn, -ns, 77, (eAenpov), Sept. for TOM and MPT
(see Siuxacoctvn, 1 b.); = 1. mercy, pity (Callim. in Del.
152; Is. xxxviii. 18; Sir. xvil. 22 (24), etc.), esp. as ex-
hibited in giving alms, charity: Mt. vi. 4; movety éXenuo-
ovvny, to practise the virtue of mercy or beneficence, to
show one’s compassion, [ A. V. do alms], (cf. the similar
phrases Sixacoovvnv, adndevav, etc. roveiv), Mt. vi. 1 Rec.,
203
éX€os
2, 3, (Sir. vii. 10; Tob. iv. 7; xii. 8, etc.; for Ion nvy,
Gen. xlvii. 29); éAenpootvas, acts of beneficence, bene-
factions [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)], Acts x. 2; ets
twa, Acts xxiv. 17. Hence 2. the benefaction itself,
a donation to the poor, alms, (the Germ. Almosen [and
the Eng. alms] being [alike] a corruption of the Grk.
word) : edennoovrny diSdva [(Diog. Laért. 5, 17)], Lk.
x1. 41; xii. 33; aireiy, Acts iii. 2; AapBdvew, ib. 3; Tm pos THY
eXenuoo. for (the purpose of asking) alms, Acts iii. 10;
plur., Acts ix. 36; x. 4, 31.*
eXetpov, -ov, merciful: Mt. v. 7; Heb. ii. 17.
Hom. Od. 5, 191 on; Sept.] *
[€Xewvds, see eAeewvos. |
€Xe0s, -ov, 6, mercy: that of God towards sinners, Tit.
ill. 5; €Aeov AapwBavew, to receive i. e. experience, Heb.
iv. 16; that of men: readiness to help those in trouble,
Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7 (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; Mt. xxiii. 23. But
in all these pass. LT Tr WH have adopted the neut.
form rd €Aeos (q- v.), much more com. in Hellenistic
writ. than the masc. 6 €Aeos, which is the only form in
classic Grk. [Soph. (Lex. s. v.) notes ro €A. in Polyb. 1, 88,
2; and Pape in Diod. Sic. 3, 18 var.]. The Grk. Mss.
of the O. T. also freq. waver between the two forms.
Cf. [WH. App. p. 158]; W. 66 (64); B. 22 (20).*
€Xeos, -ovs, To, (a form more common in Hellenistic
Grk. than the classic 6 €Xeos, q. v.), mercy ; kindness or
good will towards the miserable and afflicted, joined with
a desire to relieve them; 1. of men towards men:
Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; xxiii. 23, (in these three pass. acc. to
LT Tr WH); Jas. ii. 13; iii. 17; mocetv €Xeos, to exer-
cise the virtue of mercy, show one’s self merciful, Jas.
ii. 13; with the addition of pera twos (in imitation of the
very com. Hebr. phrase 3 DY ION wy, Gen. xxi. 23;
xxiv. 12; Judg. i. 24, etc.; ef. Thiersch, De Pentateuchi
vers. Alex. p. 147; [W. 33 (32); 376 (353) ]), to show,
afford; mercy to one, Lk. x. 37. 2. of God towards
men; a. univ.: Lk. i. 50; in benedictions: Gal. vi. 16;
1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; [(prob.) Tit. i. 4 RL]; 2 Jn.
3; Jude 2. eweyaduve xuptos TO €Xeos adrov per’ avs,
magnified his mercy towards her, i. e. showed distin-
guished mercy to her, (after the Hebr., see Gen. xix. 19),
Lk. i. 58. b. esp. the mercy and clemency of God in
providing and offering to men salvation by Christ: Lk.
i. 54; Ro. xv. 9; Eph. ii. 4; [Tit. iii. 5 L T Tr WH; Heb.
iv. 16 L T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 3; omddyyva edéous (gen.
of quality [cf. W. 611 (568)]), wherein mercy dwells,
—as we should say, the heart of mercy, Lk. i. 78; rrovety
€Aeos pera Tivos (see 1 above), Lk. i. 72; oxevn €déovs,
vessels (fitted for the reception) of mercy, i. e. men
whom God has made fit to obtain salvation through
Christ, Ro. ix. 23; 1@ tywerep@ edeet, by (in consequence
of, moved by) the mercy shown you in your conversion
to Christ, Ro. xi. 31 [ef. W. § 22, 7 (cf. § 61,3 a.); B. 157
(137)]. 3. the mercy of Christ, whereby at his
return to judgment he will bless true Christians with
eternal life: Jude 21; [2 Tim. i. 16, 18, (on the repeti-
tion of xvpios in 18 cf. Gen. xix. 24; 1S. iil. 21; xv.
22; 2Chr. vii. 2; Gen. i. 27, etc. W. § 22, 2); but Prof.
[From
éXevbepia
Grimm understands xiptos here as referring to God;
see xuptos, c.a.]. [Cf. Trench § xlvii.; and see éAcéw
fin. | *
edevbepla, -as, 7, (éAevOepos), liberty, [fr. Pind., Hat.
down]; in the N.T. a. liberty to do or to omit things
having no relation to salvation, 1 Co. x. 29; from the
yoke of the Mosaic law, Gal. ii. 4; v. 1,13; 1 Pet. ii. 16;
from Jewish errors so blinding the mental vision that it
does not discern the majesty of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17; free-
dom from the dominion of corrupt desires, so that we do
by the free impulse of the soul what the will of God re-
quires : 6 vopos rhs €Aevbepias, i. e. the Christian religion,
which furnishes that rule of right living by which the
liberty just mentioned is attained, Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; free-
dom from the restraints and miseries of earthly frailty:
so in the expression 7 eAevbepia ths ddEns (epexecet.
gen. [W. 531 (494) ]), manifested in the glorious condi-
tion of the future life, Ro. viii. 21. b. fancied liberty,
i. e. license, the liberty to do as one pleases, 2 Pet. ii. 19.
J. C. Erler, Commentatio exeg. de libertatis christianae
notione in N. T. libris obvia, 1830, (an essay I have never
had the good fortune to see).*
ehevBepos, -epa, -epov, (EAEY@Q i. q. €pyouat [so Curtius,
p- 497, after Etym. Magn. 329, 43; Suid. col. 1202 a. ed.
Gaisf.; but al. al., cf. Vanicek p. 61]; hence, prop. one
who can go whither he pleases), [fr. Hom. down],
Sept. for ‘wan, free ; 1. freeborn; in a civil sense,
one who is not a slave: Jn. viii. 33; 1 Co. vii. 22; xii. 183
Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11; Rev. vi. 15; xiii. 16;
xix. 18; fem., Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. (opp. to 7 maidioxn);
of one who ceases to be a slave, freed, manumitted : yive-
aba €deVOepor, 1 Co. vii. 21. 2. free, exempt, unre-
strained, not bound by an obligation: 1 Co. ix.13 ék
mavrwy (see ek, I. 6 fin.), 1 Co. ix. 19; awd twos, free from
i. e. no longer under obligation to, so that one may
now do what was formerly forbidden by the person or
thing to which he was bound, Ro. vii. 3 [ef. W. 196 sq.
(185); B. 157 sq. (138), 269 (231)]; foll. by an inf. [W.
319 (299); B. 260 (224) ], eAevd€pa eoriv. . . yaunOjvat
she is free to be married, has liberty to marry, 1 Co. vii.
39; exempt from paying tribute or tax, Mt. xvii. 26.
3. in an ethical sense: free from the yoke of the
Mosaic law, Gal. iv. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 16; from the bondage
of sin, Jn. viii. 36; left to one’s own will and pleasure,
with dat. of respect, r7 dixacoovvn, so far as relates to
righteousness, us respects righteousness, Ro. vi. 20 (W.
§ 31,1k.; B. § 133, 12).*
fevbepdw, -@: fut. eAevdepdow; 1 aor. ArEevdepwoa;
Pass., 1 aor. ndevdepoOnv; 1 fut. eAevOepwOjcopar; (€dAev-
Gepos); [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to make free, set at liberty:
from the dominion of sin, Jn. viii. 32, 36; tuvd dod Twos,
one from another’s control [W. 196 sq. (185); B. 157
sq. (138)]: dd rod vdpou r. duaptias x. Tov Oavdrov (see
vopos, 1), Ro. viii. 2; dad r. duaprias, from the dominion
of sin, Ro. vi. 18, 22; amo r. SovAelas r. POopas eis rt.
eXevbepiar, to liberate from bondage (see Sovdeta) and to
bring (transfer) into etc. (see eis, C. 1), Ro. viii. 21;
with a dat. commodi, r7 éXevbepia, that we might be pos-
204
EXKW
sessors of liberty, Gal. v.1; ef. B. § 133, 12 [and Bp.
Lghtft. ad loc. ].*
EXevots, -ews, 7, (Epyouat), a coming, advent, (Dion.
Hal. 3, 59): Acts vii. 52. (ev rp éXevoet airtod, i. e. of
Christ, cai émipaveia ti borépa, Act. Thom. 28; plur.
ai éhevoets, of the first and the second coming of Christ
to earth, Iren. 1, 10.) *
eXeavtivos, -ivn, -wvov, (€débas), of ivory: Rev. xviii.
12. [Alcae., Arstph., Polyb., al.]*
*Edtaxeip, ( DON whom God set up), Eliakim, one of
the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13; Lk. iii. 30.*
[€Atypa, -atos, 76, (€Aioow), a roll: Jn. xix. 39 WH txt.,
where al. read piypa,q.v. (Athen., Anth. P., al.)*]
"Edtetep, (1 my God is help), Eliezer, one of the
ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 29.*
"Edwov8, (fr. 8 and Wn glory, [?]), Eliud, one of the
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 14 sq.*
"EdtoéBer [WH ’Edevo., see WH. App. p. 155, and
s. v. et, ¢], (paweds my God is my oath, i. e. a worshipper
of God), Elisabeth, wife of Zacharias the priest and
mother of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5 sqq.*
*EXtocwaios and (so LT) ‘Educaios [cf. Tdf Proleg. p.
107; TrWH ’ENoaios, cf. WH. App. p. 159], -ov, 6,
(ywrdsx my God is salvation), Elisha, a distinguished
O. T. prophet, the disciple, companion, and successor of
Elijah (1 K. xix. 16 sq.; 2 K. i—xiii.): Lk. iv. 27.*
€Xicow: fut. digo [Recs éd.]; [pres. pass. Aiooopat;
fr. Hom. down]; to roll up, fold together: Heb. i. 12
[where T Trmrg. dAAd&es], and Rev. vi. 14 LT Tr
WH; see citicow.*
éAkos, -eos (-ovs), [cf. Lat. uleus, ulcerare; perh. akin
to €Axo (Etym. Magn. 331, 3; 641, 3), yet cf. Curtius
§ 23], ro; 1. a wound, esp. a suppurated wound; so
in Hom. and earlier writ. 2. fr. [Thuc.], Theophr.,
Polyb. on, a sore, an ulcer: Rev. xvi. 2; plur., Lk. xvi.
21; Rev. xvi.11. (for pny, Ex. ix. 9; Jobii. 7, ete:) *
€dxéw, -@: to make sore, cause to ulcerate (Hippocr.
and Med. writ.); Pass. to be ulcerated; pf. ptep. pass.
nrxapévos (LT Tr WH eidxop. [ WH. App. p. 161; W.
§ 12, 8; B. 34 (30)]), full of sores: Lk. xvi. 20, (Xen.
de. fé.equdy 455 Sy)
éXAkta, see €Aka.
@Axw (and in later writ. €Axdw also [Veitch s. v.; W.
86 (82)]); impf. efAxov (Acts xxi. 30); fut. EAxdow [€Ak.
Rect Jn. xii. 32]; 1 aor. efAxvoa ({inf. (Jn. xxi. 6)
Edkvoa Rez ez 1, T WH, -cioa R*G Tr]; cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. § 114, vol. ii. p. 171; Kriiger § 40 s. v.; [Lob.
Paralip. p. 35 sq.; Veitch s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for WD; to draw; 1. prop.: 7d dixrvov, Jn. xxi. 6,
11; pdxatpay, i. e. unsheathe, Jn. xviii. 10 (Soph. Ant.
1208 (1233), ete.); twa, a person forcibly and against
his will (our drag, drag off), €&w Tov iepov, Acts xxi. 30;
els thy ayopdv, Acts xvi. 19; ets xpernpta, Jas. ii. 6 (mpos
rov djpov, Arstph. eqq. 710; and in Latin, as Caes. b. g.
1, 53 (54, 4) cum trinis catenis vinctus traheretur, Liv.
2, 27 cum a lictoribus jam traheretur). 2. metaph.
to draw by inward power, lead, impel: In. vi. 44 (so in
Grk. also; as émiOupias... EAxovons emt ndovas, Plat.
‘EXXas
Phaedr. p. 238 a.; td ths ndovns Axopevor, Ael. h. a. 6,
31; likewise 4 Macc. xiv. 13; xv.8 (11). ¢rahit sua
quemque voluptas, Vergil, ecl. 2,65); mavrus Ehxtow mpos
épavrov, I by my moral, my spiritual, influence will win
over to myself the hearts of all, Jn. xii. 32. Cf. Mey.
on Jn. vi. 44; [Trench § xxi. Comp.: e&€\xa.] *
‘E\AGs, -ddos, 7, Greece i.e. Greece proper, as opp. to
Macedonia, i. q. "Ayaia (q. v.) in the time of the Ro-
mans: Acts xx. 2 [cf. Wetstein ad loc.; Mey. on xviii.
12].
"EAAny, -nvos,6; 1. a Greek by nationality, whether
a native of the main land or of the Greek islands or
colonies: Acts xviii. 17 Rec. ; “EAAnvés re Kai BapBapot,
Ro. i. 14. 2. in a wider sense the name embraces
all nations not Jews that made the language, cus-
toms, and learning of the Greeks their own; so that
where "EAAnves are opp. to Jews, the primary reference
is to a difference of religion and worship: Jn. vii. 35 (cf.
Meyer ad loc.); Acts xi. 20 GLT Tr [cf. B.D. Am. ed.
peserl; Actssxvieel, 35; [xxis 28]; 1 Coli: 22, 23Ree. ;
Gal. ii. 3, (Joseph. antt. 20, 11, 2); "Iovdatoi te kal “EAAr-
ves, and the like: Acts xiv. 1; xviil.4; xix.10,17; xx.
Bile LXes ih IBS mes Oe mii, G)e sq ls Il (Cope PLoS sx, Ss
xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11. The word is used in
the same wide sense by the Grk. church Fathers, cf.
Vito on Tatian p. 2; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]. The “EdAnves
spoken of in Jn. xii. 20 and Acts xvii. 4 are Jewish
proselytes from the Gentiles; see mpoanAvtos, 2. [Cf.
B. D. s. v. Greece etc. (esp. Am. ed.) | *
“EdAnvikds, -7, -dv, Greek, Grecian: Lk. xxiii. 38 ['T
WH Tr txt. om. L Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Rev. ix. 11.
[From Aeschyl., Hdt. down. ]*
‘EAAnvls, -idos, 7; 1. a Greek woman. 2. a Gen-
tile woman; not a Jewess (see "EAAnv, 2): Mk. vii. 26;
Acts xvii. 12.*
‘EAAnucrys, -ov, 6, (fr. AAnvige to copy the manners
and worship of the Greeks or to use the Greek language
[W. 94 (89 sq.), ef. 28]), a Hellenist, i. e. one who imi-
tates the manners and customs or the worship ef the
Greeks, and uses the Greek tongue; employed in the
N. T. of Jews born in foreign lands and speaking Greek,
[Grecian Jews]: Acts xi. 20 R[WH; see in”EAAny, 2];
ix. 29; the name adhered to them even after they had
embraced Christianity, Acts vi. 1, where it is opp. to
oi ‘EBpaia, q. v. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Hellenisten ;
Reuss in Herzog v. p. 701 sqq.; [BB.DD. s. v. Hellen-
ist: Farrar, St. Paul, ch. vii.; Wetst. on Acts vi. 1].*
“Padquori, adv., (édAnvitw), in Greek, i. e. in the
Greek language: Jn. xix. 20; Acts xxi. 37. [Xen. an.
196185 alcl*
ehroyda, i. q. EAAoyew, q- V-
ehroyéw [see ev, ITT. 3], -6; [Pass., 3 pers. sing. pres.
eddoyetraa RG Ltxt T Tr; impf. eAdroyaro Lmrg. WH;
ef. WH. App. p. 166; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Mullach p.
252; B. 57 sq. (50); W. 85 (82)]; (Adyos a reckoning,
account) ; to reckon in, set to one’s account, lay to one’s
charge, impute: rodro épot éddAdyer (LL. T Tr WH edddya
{see reff. above]), charge this to mv account. Philem.
205
éAtris
18; sin the penalty of which is under consideration, Ro,
v. 13, where cf. Fritzsche p. 311. (Inscr. ap. Boeckh
i. p. 850 [no. 1732 a.; Bp. Lghtft. adds Edict. Diocl. in
Corp. Inserr. Lat. iii. p. 836; see further his note on
Philem. 18; cf. B. 57 sq. (50) ].) *
*"EApoddép (Lehm.* EApaddap, T'Tr WH ’Edpadap [on the
breathing in codd. see Td. Proleg. p. 107]), 6, Elmodam
or Elmadam, proper name of one of the ancestors of
Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*
&dritw; impf. 7Amifov; Attic fut. Ama (Mt. xii. 21,
and often in Sept. [(whence in Ro. xv. 12); ef. B. 37
(382); W.§13,1¢.]; the com. form éAmiow does not.
occur in bibl. Grk.); 1 aor. #Amua; pf. HAmKa; [pres.
pass. €Amigouar]; (eAmis, q. v-); Sept. for MYA to trust;
70M to flee for refuge ; Sm to wait, to hope; to hope
(in a religious sense, to wait for salvation with joy and
full of confidence): ri, Ro. viii. 24 sq.; 1 Co. xiii. 7;
(ra) éAmCopeva, things hoped for, Heb. xi. 1 [but WH
mrg. connect éAm. with the foll. rpayp.]; once with dat.
of the obj. on which the hope rests, hopefully to trust
in: T@ dvdpare avrov (as in prof. auth. once rq rdyn,
Phoei3, 9i,p2), Mts, x2) “Gly TAs Wii (ef. (B.. 276
(153)]; xaos, 2 Co. viii. 5. foll. by an inf. relating to
the subject of the verb éAmi¢w [cf. W. 331 (311); B.
259 (223)]: Lk. vi. 34; xxiii. 8; Acts xxvi.7; Ro. xv.
24° 1,Co. xvii 75) Phil; 1. [119i], 23; 2 Tims iii 145.2 In:
12; 3Jn.14; foll. by a pf. inf. 2 Co. v. 11; foll. by dre
with a pres. Lk. xxiv. 21; ére with a fut., Acts xxiv. 26;
2 Co. i. 13; xiii. 6; Philem. 22. Peculiar to bibl. Grk.
is the constr. of this verb with prepositions and a case
of noun or pron. (cf. B. 175 (152) sq. [ef. 337 (290);
W. § 33, d.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. iv. 10]): ets tua, to direct
hope unto one, Jn. v. 45 (pf. nAmixare, in whom you have
put your hope, and rely upon it [W. § 40, 4 a.]); 1
Pet. ii. 5 L T Tr WH; with addition of 67 with fut.
2 Co. i. 10 [L txt. Tr WH br. érz, and so detach the foll.
clause]; émi tun, to build hope on one, as on a foundation,
(often in Sept.), Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10); 1 Tim. iv.
10; vi. 17; & tum, to repose hope in one, 1 Co. xv. 19;
foll. by inf. Phil. ii. 19; emi with ace. to direct hope
towards something: emi rt, to hope to receive something,
1 Pet. i. 13; émt tov Oedv, of those who hope for some-
thing from God, 1 Pet. ii, 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and
often in Sept.). [Comp.: dz-, mpo-eAri¢o. | *
€rls [sometimes written édmis; so WH in Ro. viii.
20; Tdf.in Acts ii. 26; see (in 2 below, and) the reff.
s. v. aeidov ], -i8os, 7, (EAr@ to make to hope), Sept. for
nova and nY30, trust; MOM that in which one confides
or to which he flees for refuge; Mmpn expectation, hope;
in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of
good or of ill; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation
of evil, fear; as,» Tov Kax@v édris, Leian. Tyrannic. c.
3; tod PdBov eAzris, Thue. 7, 61; Kak éAmis, Plat. rep.
1 p. 330 e. [ef. legg. 1 p. 644 ¢. fin.]; moynpa éAm. Is.
XXvili. 19 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics,
and always in the N. T., in a good sense: expectation of
good, hope; and in the Christian sense, joyful and con-
fident expectation of eternal salvation: Acts xxiii. 63
"EXvpas
xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4sq.; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1
Pet. i. 3; iii. 15; aya) edris (often in prof. auth., as
Plat. Phaedo67c.; plur. éAmides dyaai, legg. 1 p. 649 b.;
Xen. Ages. 1, 27), 2 Th. ii. 16; Amis Breropevn. hope
whose object is seen, Ro. vill. 24; 6 @eds rhs €dmidos,
God, the author of hope, Ro. xv. 13; 7 mAnpodopia ris
€\midos, fulness i. e. certainty and strength of hope, Heb.
vi. 115 1) duodoyia ris eAm- the confession of those things
which we hope for, Heb. x. 23; rd xavxnpua THs Am. hope
wherein we glory, Heb. iii. 6; émevoaywyn Kpeirrovos €h-
ridos, the bringing in of a better hope, Heb. vii. 19;
édmis with gen. of the subj., Acts xxviii. 20; 2 Co. i. 7
(6); Phil. i. 20; with gen. of the obj., Acts xxvii. 20;
Ro. v. 2; 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Th. v.8; Tit. iii. 7; with gen.
of the thing on which the hope depends, 7 €Amis THs epya-
gias av’tav, Acts xvi. 19; ris kAnoews, Eph. i. 18; iv. 4;
Tov evayyeXiov, Col. i. 23; with gen. of the pers. in whom
hope is reposed, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (136) ]. én’ [or eq’
—so Actsii. 26 LT; Ro. iv. 18 L; viii. 20 (21) T WH; cf.
Scrivener, Introd. ete. p.565 ; (but see above, init.) | eAmidu,
relying on hope, having hope, in hope, (Eur. Here. fur.
804; Diod. Sic. 13, 21; ém éAmids dyab7, Xen. mem. 2,
1, 18) [W. 394 (368), ef. 425 (396); B. 337 (290)]:
Acts ii. 26 (of a return to life); Ro. iv. 18; with gen.
of the thing hoped for added: (ays alwviov, Tit. i. 2;
Tov perexew, 1 Co. ix. 10 [GL T Tr WH]; in hope, foll.
by ér, Ro. viii. 20 (21) [but Tdf. reads dé]; on ac-
count of the hope, for the hope [B. 165 (144) ], with gen.
of the thing on which the hope rests, Acts xxvi. 6. zap’
édrida, beyond, against, hope [W. 404 (377)]: Ro. iv. 18
(i. e. where the laws of nature left no room for hope).
éxeev edmida (often in Grk. writ.): Ro. xv. 4; 2 Co.
iii. 12; with an inf. belonging to the person hoping, 2
Co. x. 15; Amida éxew eis [Tdf. mpds] Gedy, foll. by ace.
with inf. Acts xxiv. 15, (eis Xpworov exe tas €Amidas,
Acta Thomae § 28; [r. Amida eis tr. "Inoody ev tr. mvev-
pare €yovres, Barn. ep. 11, 11]); émt with dat. of pers. 1
Jn. ill. 3; €Amida py Exovtes, (of the heathen) having no
hope (of salvation), Eph. ii. 12; 1 Th. iv. 13; 9 Amis
éorw eis Oedy, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21. By meton.
it denotes a. the author of hope, or he who is its foun-
dation, (often so in Grk. auth., as Aeschyl. choéph.
776; Thue. 3, 57; [ef. Ignat. ad Eph. 21, 2; ad Magn.
11 fin.; ad Philad. 11, 2; ad Trall. inser. and 2, 2, etc. ]):
1 Tim. i.1; 1 Th. ii. 19; with gen. of obj. added, ris
d6£€ns, Col. i. 27. b. the thing hoped for: mpoode-
xeoOat Thy paxapiav édrida, Tit. ii. 13; Amida dixacootyns
amexdéxeoOa, the thing hoped for, which is righteous-
ness [cf. Mey. ed. Sieffert ad 1.], Gal. v. 5, (apoodoxav
Tas U7 Oeod édmidas, 2 Mace. vii. 14); dca eArida tv aro-
Keiwevny ev Tots oipavois, Col. i. 5; kparnoat ths mpoxerpe-
vns €Aridos, Heb. vi. 18 (cf. Bleek ad loc.).— Zéckler,
De vi ac notione vocis éAmis in N. T. Gissae 1856.*
"Edvpas, 6, [B. 20 (18) ], Elymas, an appellative name
which Luke interprets as payos, — derived either, as is
commonly supposed, fr. the Arabic : (elymon),
oc
i. e. wise; or, acc. to the more probe*le opinion of De-
206
éuBateva
litzsch (Zeitschrift f. d. Luth. Theol. 1877, p. 7), fr. the
Aramaic 8°98 powerful: Acts xiii. 8. [BB.DD.s. v.]*
&wi (LT ‘Edo, [WH edai; see I, 1]), Eloi, Syriac
form (aon, *FO8) for Hebr. shy (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2):
Mk. xv. 34. (Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p.11.]*
épavrod, -7s, -ov, (fr. euod and avrov), reflexive pro-
noun of Ist pers., of myself, used only in gen., dat., and
ace. sing. [cf. B. 110 (96) sqq.]: am’ euavrod, see amo, IL.
2d.aa.; tm éeuvavrdy, under my control, Mt. viii. 9; Lk.
vii. 8; euaurdv, myself, as opp. to Christ, the supposed
minister of sin (vs. 17), Gal. ii. 18; tacitly opp. to an
animal offered in sacrifice, Jn. xvii. 19; negligently for
autos éeue, 1 Co. iv. 3 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. As in Grk.
writers (Matthiae § 148 Anm. 2, i. p. 354; Passow s. v.
p- 883), its force is sometimes so weakened that it
searcely differs from the simple pers. pron. of the first
person [yet denied by Meyer], as Jn. xii. 32; xiv. 21;
Philem. 13.
éu-Batvw [see ev, III. 3]; 2 aor. eveBnv, inf. epBiva.
ptep. euBas; [fr. Hom. down]; fo go into, step into: Jn.
v.4 RL; els 76 mAoiov, to embark, Mt. viii. 23, and
often.
éu-BadAdw [see ev, III. 3]: 2 aor. inf. éuBareiv; to throw
in, cast into: eis, Lk. xii. 5. [rom Hom. down. Comp.:
map-euarro. | *
éu-Bamrrw [see ev, III. 3]: 1 aor. ptep. €uBawas; to dip
in: ri, Jn. xiii. 26* Lehm., 26° RG Ltxt.; ry xeipa ev
TO TpvBAriw, Mt. xxvi. 23; mid. 6 <uBamropevos per €p.0%
[Lehm. adds rv xeipa] eis ro [Wil add & in br.] rpx
Bdiov, Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Xep., al.) *
euBarevw [see ev, III. 3]; (€uBarns stepping in, going
in); to enter; 1. prop.: médAw, Eur. El. 595; marpi-
dos, Soph. O. T. 825; ets 7d dpos, Joseph. antt. 2, 12, 1:
to frequent, haunt, often of gods frequenting favorite
spots, as vaaov, Aeschyl. Pers. 449; t@ xepie, Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 77; often to come into possession of a thing:
thus eis vadv, Dem. p. 894, 7 [6 Dind.]; thy yjv, Josh.
xix. 51 Sept.; to invade, make a hostile incursion into, eis
with acc. of place, 1 Mace. xii. 25, ete. 2. tropically,
(cf. Germ. eingehen); a. to go into details in narrating:
absol. 2 Mace. ii. 30. _b. to investigate, search into, scru-
tinize minutely: rats émuotnpats, Philo, plant. Noé § 19;
& pi édpaxe éuBarevwr, things which he has not seen, i. e.
things denied to the sight (cf. 1 Jn. iv. 20), Col. ii. 18, —
where, if with GL [in ed. min., but in ed. maj. rein-
serted, yet in br.] T Tr WH Huther, Meyer, we expunge
yn, we must render, “going into curious and subtile
speculation about things which he has seen in visions
eranted him”; but ef. Baumg.-Crusius ad loc. and W.
$ 55, 3e.; [also Reiche (Com. crit.), Bleek, Hofm., al.,
defend the py. But see Tdf. and WH. ad loc., and Bp.
Lehtft.’s ‘detached note’; ef. B. 349 (300). Some in-
terpret “(conceitedly) taking his stand on the things
which” etc.; see under 1]; Phavor. euSarevoar: em Piva
ra evdov ekepevvnoa }) oxomjoa; [similarly Hesych. 2293.
vol. ii. p. 73 ed. Schmidt, ef. his note; further see reff.
in Suidas, col. 1213 d.].*
eupibalw
éu-BiBdtw: 1 aor. éveBiBaca; to put in or on, lead in,
cause to enter; as often in the Greek writ. rea eis Td
mAotov: Acts xxvii. 6.*
éu-BAremw [see ev, III. 3]; impf. evéBAerov; 1 aor. eve-
Brewa, ptep. euBr¢Was; to turn one’s eyes on; look at;
1. prop.: with ace. Mk. viii. 25, (Anth. 11, 3; Sept.
Judg. xvi. 27 [Alex.]); tui (Plat. rep. 10, 608 d.; Polyb.
15, 28, 3, and elsewhere), Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x. 21, 27;
xiv. 67; Lk. xx. 17; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 36, 42 (43), (in all
these pass. €uSreyas adr@ or adrois Neyer or etrey, cf. Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3, 2 €uBrerwr ait@ Edeyev). eis T. ovpavév, Acts i.
11 RGL, (eis r. yay, Is. v. 30; vill. 22; els dpOarpor,
Plat. Ale. 1 p. 132 e.). Absol., ovk éveBderov I beheld
not, i. e. the power of looking upon (sc. surrounding
objects) was taken away from me, Acts xxii. 11 [Tr mrg.
WU mrg. Bren], (2 Chr. xx. 24 [Ald.]; Xen. mem. 3,
$1510); 2. fig. to look at with the mind, to consider:
Mt. vi. 26, (Is. li. 1 sq.; Sir. ii. 10; xxxvi. (xxxili.) 15;
with ace. only, Is. v. 12; with dat., 2 Mace. xii. 45).*
éu-Spipdopar [see ev, III. 3], -dpar, depon. verb, pres.
ptep. éuBpipwpevos (Jn. xi. 38, where Tdf. éuBpiov pe-
vos; See épwtde, init.); impf. 3 pers. plur. éveBpipavro
(Mk. xiv. 5, where Tdf. -wodvro, cf. épardw u. s.); 1
aor. eveBpyinodpny, and (Mt. ix. 30 LT Tr WH) éve-
Bpypndny [B. 52 (46)]; (Bpysdoua, fr. Bpiun, to be
moved with anger) ; to snort in (of horses; Germ. darein
schnauben): Aeschyl. sept. 461; to be very angry, to be
moved with indignation: rwi (Liban.), Mk. xiv. 5 (see
above); absol., with addition of év éavr@, Jn. xi. 38;
with dat. of respect, ib. 33. In a sense unknown to
prof. auth. to charge with earnest admonition, sternly to
charge, threateningly to enjoin: Mt. ix. 30; Mk. i. 43.*
épéw, -6 [(cf. Skr. vam, Lat. vom-ere; Curtius § 452;
Vaniéek p. 886 sq.)]: 1 aor. inf. éueoar; to vomit, vomit
forth, throw up, fr. Hom. down: tia ex tod ordyaros, i. e.
to reject with extreme disgust, Rev. iii. 16.*
ep-patvopar [see ev, III. 3]; revi, to rage against [A. V.
~ to be exceedingly mad against] one: Acts xxvi. 11; be-
sides only in Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5.*
"Eppavovnh, 6, Immanuel, (fr. 31) and by, God with
us), i. q. savior, a name given to Christ by Matthew, i.
23, after Is. vii. 14. Area. to the orthodox interpreta-
tion the name denotes the same as OeavOpwros, and has
reference to the personal union of the human nature
and the divine in Christ. [See BB. DD. s. v.]*
*Eppaovs (in Joseph. also ’Appaovs), 7, Emmaus (Lat.
gen. -untis), a village 30 stadia from Jerusalem (acc.
to the true reading [so Dind. and Bekk.] in Joseph. b. j.
7, 6, 6; not, as is com. said, foll. the authority of Luke,
60 stadia), apparently represented by the modern Kulo-
nieh (cf. Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel, 2te Ausg.
vi. p. 675 sq.; [Caspari, Chronolog. and Geograph.
Intr. to the Life of Christ $191; Sepp, Jerus. u. d. heil.
Land, i. 52]): Lk. xxiv. 13. There was a town of the
same name in the level country of Judea, 175 stadia
from Jerusalem, noted for its hot springs and for the
slaughter of the Syrians routed by Judas Maccabaeus,
1 Mace. iii. 40, 57; afterwards fortified by Bacchides,
207
euTraila
the Syrian leader, 1 Mace. ix. 50, and from the 3d cent.
on called Nicopolis [B. D.s.v. Emmaus or Nicopolis].
A third place of the same name was situated near Tibe-
rias, and was famous for its medicinal springs. Cf. Keim
iii. p. 555 sq. (Eng. trans. vi. 306 sq.) ; Wolff in Riehm p.
376 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D. Am. ed. p. 731].*
eupevo [Tdf. evpevw, Acts xiv. 22; see ev, III. 3]; 1
aor. evéwewa; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; (Augustine,
immaneo), to remain in, continue; a. prop.ina place: &
rut, Acts xxviii. 30 T Tr WH. b. to persevere in
anything, a state of mind, ete.; to hold fast, be true to,
abide by, keep: rn miotret, Acts xiv. 22 (vou, dpkots, ete.
in the Grk. writ.) ; év rw (more rarely so in the classics,
as év tais omovdais, Thuc. 4, 118; ev rH miore, Polyb. 3,
70, 4): év [so RG only] rots yeypappevors, Gal. iii. 10 fr.
Deut. xxvii. 26; év 77 SuaOnxn, Heb. viii. 9 fr. Jer. xxxviil.
(xxxi.) 32. [Cf. W. § 52, 4, 5.]*
eppéow, i. q. ev pcow, (see pécos, 2): Rev. i. 13; ii. 1;
iv. 6; v.63 xxii. 2, in Tdf. ed. 7; [see his Proleg. p. xlviii.,
(but nowhere in ed. 8, see the Proleg. p. 76 sq.); cf.
WH. App. p. 150; B. 8].
*"Eppop CEppop LT Tr, [but WH ‘Eypop, see their
Intr. § 408] ), 6, (119M i. e. ass), Emmor [or Hamor,
ace. to the Hebr.], proper name of a man: Acts Ki fe;
see concerning him, Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sq.*
éu6s, -7), -ov, “Eb. €uov), possess. pron. of the first pers.,
mine; a. that which I have; what I possess: Jn. iv. 34;
xiii. 35; [xv. 11 9 yapan en (see peva, I.1 b. a.)]; xviii.
36; Ro. x. 1; Philem. 12, and often; 77 éuy xeepi, with
my own hand [B. 117 (102) note], 1 Co. xvi. 21; Gal.
vi. 11; Col. iv. 18; as a predicate, Jn. vii. 16; xiv. 24;
xvi. 15; substantively, ro éuov that which is mine, mine
own, esp. my money, Mt. xxv. 27; divine truth, in the
knowledge of which I excel, Jn. xvi. 15; univ. in plur.
ra ena my goods, Mt. xx. 15; Lk.xv.31. b. proceeding
from me: oi époi doyot, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 [here
Tr mrg. br. Ady.]; 6 Adyos 6 €puos, In. Vill. 37; 7 EvroAr
7 evn, In. xv. 12; 4 euy Sidaxn, In. vii. 16, and in other
exx. c. pertaining or relating to me; a. appointed
for me: 6 xaipos 6 épos, Jn. vii. 6. B. equiv. to a gen.
of the object: 4 éu avdprnots, Lk. xxii. 19; 1 Co. xi.
24; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by W. § 22, 7; [Kiih-
ner § 454, Anm. 11; Kriiger § 47, 7,8]. y. €orw éudv
it is mine, equiv. to, it rests with me: Mt. xx. 23; Mk.
x. 40. In connecting the article with this pron. the
N. T. writ. do not deviate fr. Attic usage; cf. B.
$124, 6.
éuratypovt [see év, IIT. 3], -js, 7, (€umaifw), derision,
mockery: 2 Pet. iii. 3G LT Tr WH. Not found else-
where.*
ép-rarypds [see ev, III. 3], -od, 6, (€umaigw), unknown
to prof. auth., @ mocking, scoffing: Heb. xi. 36; Ezek.
xxii. 4; Sir. xxvii. 28; Sap. xii. 25; [Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.)
8]; torture inflicted in mockery, 2 Mace. vii. 7 [ete.].*
éu-raltw [see év, III. 3]; impf. évérarCov; fut. éumaigo
(Mk. x. 34 for the more com. -fotpar and -fopuat) ; 1 aor.
évémraéa (for the older évémaca) ; Pass., 1 aor. éverraiyOnv
(Mt. ii. 16, for the older éveraicOnv) ; 1 fut. éymarxOnoopat;
€uTAlKTNS
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 240 sq.; Kriiger § 40 s. v. raifo;
[Veitch ibid.]; B. 64 (56) sq.); to play in, twi, Ps.
ciii. (civ.) 26; Eur. Bacch. 867. to play with, trifle with,
(Lat. illudere) i.e. a. to mock: absol.. Mt. xx. 19;
xxvii. 41; Mk. x. 34; xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 11; ret (Hat.
4, 134), Mt. xxvii. 29, [31]; Mk. xv. 20; Lk. xiv. 29;
xxii. 63; xxiii. 36; in pass. Lk. xviii. 32. b. to delude,
deceive, (Soph. Ant. 799); in pass. Mt. ii. 16, (Jer. x.
15).*
ép-raixrys [see ev, III. 3], -ov, 6, (€umaifw), a mocker,
a scoffer: 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 18; playing like children,
Is. iii. 4. Not used by prot. auth.*
éu-trepi-raréw [T WH ev-, see ev, III. 3], -d: fut. eume-
pimatnow ; to go about in, walk in: &v tit, among per-
sons, 2 Co. vi. 16 fr. Lev. xxvi. 12. (Jobi. 7; Sap. xix.
20; [Philo, Plut.], Leian., Achill. Tat., al.) *
éu-mlrAnpe [not eumep mA. (see ev, III. 3); for eupho-
ny’s sake, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95; Veitch p. 536] and
epmumddo (fr. which form comes the pres. ptep. éummdar,
Acts xiv. 17 [W. § 14,1 f.; B. 66 (58) ]); 1 aor. evérAnoa;
1 aor. pass. éverAnoOnv; pf. pass. ptep. eumemAnopevos ;
Sept. for xD and in pass. often for yaw to be satiated;
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to fill up, fill full: twa
twos, to bestow something bountifully on one, Lk. i. 53;
Acts xiv. 17, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 14; Ps. evi. (evii-) 9;
Is. xxix. 19; Sir. iv. 12); to fill with food, i. e. satisfy,
satiate ; pass., Lk. vi. 253; Jn. vi. 12, (Deut. vi. 113 viii.
10; Ruth ii. 14; Neh. ix. 25, ete.) ; to take one’s jill of,
glut one’s desire for: pass. with gen. of pers., one’s inter-
course and companionship, Ro. xv. 24; ef. Kypke ad
loc. ; rod kadXous adrns, gazing at her beauty, Sus. 32.*
éu-mumrpaw [see ev, III. 3], (for the more com. éumimpyus,
fr. riumpnpe to burn ; onthe dropping of the wef. éwrimd ye,
init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; to burn, set on jire; pres. infin.
pass. éumurpac Gat to be (inflamed, and so) swollen (Hesych.
miumpav... dvoav; Etym. Magn. 672, 23 mimpaca: dv-
caoa; Joseph. antt. 3, 11, 6; etc.) ; of the human body
to swell up: from the bite of a viper, Acts xxviii. 6
Tdf., for RG ete. mipmpacOa, q. v. [and Veitch s. v.
miprpnpe ].*
ép-wirre [see ev, III. 3]; fut. eumecoduac; 2 aor. év-
érecov; [fr. Hom. down]; fo fall into: eis Bddvvov, Mt.
xii. 11, and Ltxt. T Tr WH in Lk. vi. 39; eis gpéap,
Lk. xiv.5 [RG]; to fall among robbers, eis rods Anords,
Lk. x. 36, and in metaph. phrases, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; vi.
9; eis xeipds Tivos, into one’s power: rov Oeov, to incur
divine penalties, Heb. x. 31, as in 2 8S. xxiv. 14; 1 Chr.
7 O.Se UIST toy thee UtsFie
éu-rhéxw [see ev, III. 3]: Pass., [pres. eumdexopar]; 2
aor. ptep. €umAakels; to inweave; trop.in pass., with dat.
of thing, fo entangle, involve in: 2 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. ii.
20. (From Aeschyl. down.) *
€p-tAoKh [see ev, III. 3], -Hs, 9, (€umdexw), an inter-
weaving, braiding, a knot: tptxyov [Lehm. om.], an elab-
orate gathering of the hair into knots, Vulg. capillatura,
[A. V. plaiting], 1 Pet. iii. 3 (xouijs, Strab. 17 p. 828).*
ép-trvéw [1 WH ev-, see ev, III. 3]; 1. to breathe
in or on, [fr. Hom. down]. 2. to inhale, (Aeschyl.,
208
éut poo Bev
Plat., al.) ; with partitive gen., amwe:Ans x. povov, threat-
ening and slaughter were so to speak the element from
which he drew his breath, Acts ix.1; see Meyer ad loc.,
ef. W. § 30, 9 ¢.; [B. 167 (146)]; éeumveov fans, Sept.
Josh. x. 40.* .
€p-tropevopat [see ev, III. 3]: depon. pass. with fut. mid.
epmopevoopuat ; (fr. eumopos, q. v.) ; to go a trading, to travel
Sor business, to traffic, trade, (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.) : Jas.
iv. 13 [R* G here give the 1 aor. subj. -copeba]; with
the ace. of a thing, to import for sale (as €Xatop eis Atyu-
mov, Sept. Hos. xii. 1 ; roppupav amé Powikns, Diog. Laért.
7, 2; yAadxas, Leian. Nigrin. init.) ; to deal in; to usea
thing or a person for gain, [A. V. make merchandise of ],
(Gpav tov cwparos, Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8; ’Aomacia everro-
pevero mANOn yuvakaov, Athen. 13 p. 569 f.): 2 Pet. ii. 3;
ef. W. 223 (209); [B. 147 (129) ]*
éwrropia [see ev, III. 3], -as, 7, (€umopos), trade, mer-
chandise: Mt. xxii. 5. (Hesiod, sqq. ; Sept.) *
éumdprov [see ev, III. 3], -ov, 76, (€umopos), a place
where trade is carried on, esp. a seaport; a mart, emporium;
(Plin. forum nundinarium): oixos €umopiov a market
house (epexeget. gen. [W. § 59, 8 a.; A. V. a@ house of
merchandise]), Jn. ii. 16. (From Hdt. down; Sept.) *
ép-tropos [see ev, III. 3], -ov, 6, (rdpos) ; id. Qe
en’ adAXorpias vews mAE€wv pia bor, 6 émBarns; so Hesych.,
with whom agree Phavorinus and the Schol. ad Arstph.
Plut. 521; and so the word is used by Homer. 2.
after Hom. one on a journey, whether by sea or by land,
esp. for traffic; hence 3. a merchant, (opp. to xamndAos
a retailer, petty tradesman): Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23;
avOpwros eumopos (see avOpwros, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH
txt. om. dvOp.]. (Sept. for 7md and 455.) *
éu-mpyOw: 1 aor. évéerpnoa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
Ww and m3; to burn; destroy by fire: rhv wodw, Mt.
MK (er,
ép-tpoobev (Tdf. in Rev. iv. 6 évmp. [see ev, III. 3; cf.
Bttm. 8]), adv. of place and of time, (fr. év and mpdaGev,
prop. in the fore part); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly ~
for 1399; before. In the N. T. used only of place;
1. adverbially, in front, before: Rev. iv. 6 (opp. to dme-
obev, as in Palaeph. 29, 2). before: mopeverOa, to pre-
cede, to go before, Lk. xix. 28; mpodpupav eumpooder, ib.
4[T WH eis 76 eump., cf. Hdt. 4, 61 (8, 89)], like mpo-
mropeveo bat éumpoabev, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 23 [fig. Plato, Gorg.
p- 497 a. mpoide ets TO Eump.]; Ta Eumpoaber the things
which lie before one advancing, the goal set before one,
Phil. iii. 13 (14) (opp. to ra ériow). 2. it serves as a
prep., with the gen. [B. 319 (274); W. § 54,6]; a. be-
fore, i. e. in that local region which is in front of a per-
son or a thing: Mt. v. 24; vii. 6; Lk. v.19; xiv. 2; to
prostrate one’s self ¢umpoobev rev modav Tivos, Rev. xix.
10; xxii. 8; yovumereiv ump. twos, Mt. xxvii. 29; mopev-
ecOa eur. twos, to go before one, Jn. x. 4; amoared-
AerOa Eur. Tivos, to be sent before one, Jn. iii. 28;
cadritew €um. twos, Mt. vi. 2; riv 6ddv xatackevacat,
where éump. twos is nearly equiv. to a dat. [ef. B. 172
(150)], Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2 Rec.; LK. vii. 27. b. be
fore, in the presence of, i. q. opposite to, over against
ELT TV® 2
ore: otjvat, Mt. xxvii. 11; dpodoyetv and apveicba [B.
176 (153) ], Mt. x. 32 sq.; xxvi. 70; Lk. xii. 8, [9 Lchm.];
also Gal. ii. 14; 1 Th.i.3; ii. 19; iii. 9,135; before one,
i.e. at his tribunal: Mt. xxv. 32; xxvii. 11; Lk. xxi.
36; Acts xviii. 17; 2Co.v. 10; 1 Th. ii.19; [1 Jn. iii.
19]. Here belong the expressions eddoxia, OéAnud €ore
eumpoober Ocoi, it is the good pleasure, the will of God, Mt.
xi. 26; xviii. 14; Lk. x. 21, formed after Chald. usage ;
for in 1 S. xii. 22 the words mim ONIN, God wills, Jona-
than the targumist renders *. D1) sp; cf. Fischer, De
vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 329 sq.; [ef. B.172(150)]. ec.
before i. e. in the sight of one: Mt. v. 16; vi. 1; xvii. 2;
xxiii. 138 (14); Mk. ii. 12 T Trmrg. WH; ix. 2; Lk. xix.
27; Jn. xii. 57; Acts x.4 LTTrWH. dz. before, de-
noting rank: yeyovevat €ump. twos, to have obtained
greater dignity than another, Jn. i. 15, 30, also 27 RL
br.; (Gen. xlviii. 20 €@nxe tov ’Edpaip eumpoobev tod
Mavago7; (cf. Plat. leg. 1, 631 d.; 5,743 e.; 7, 805 d.]).*
ép-rriw [see ev, II]. 3]; impf. évemrvov; fut. €urrica ;
1 aor. evéntvoa; fut. pass. eumtvcdnoona; [fr. Hdt.
down]; to spit upon: ti, Mk. x. 843; xiv. 65; xv. 19;
eis TO Mpocwndy Tivos, Mt. xxvi. 67 (Num. xii. 14; Plut.
ii. p. 189 a. [i. e. reg. et imper. apotheg. Phoc. 17]; xara
To mpdcwr. tit, Deut. xxv. 9); ets twa, Mt. xxvii. 30;
Pass. to be spit upon: Lk. xviii. 32. Muson. ap. Stob.
floril. 19,16. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. x. 17; [Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 66].*
épgavys [see ev, IIT. 3], -€s, (€upaivw to show in, ex-
hibit), manifest: yivowat revi, in its literal sense, Acts
x. 40; fig., of God giving proofs of his saving grace and
thus manifesting himself, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixv.1. [From
Aeschyl. down. | *
épavitw [see ev, III. 3]; fut. eud@aviow [B. 37 (32)];
1 aor. évepavioa ; 1 aor. pass. eveavicOnv; fr. Xen. and
Plato down; (€udarns) ; 1. to manifest, exhibit to
view : €auTdv Ti, prop. to present one’s self to the sight of
another, manifest one’s self to (Ex. xxxiii. 13), Jn. xiv.
22; metaph. of Christ giving evidence by the action of
the Holy Spirit on the souls of the disciples that he is
alive in heaven, Jn. xiv. 21. Pass. to show one’s self,
come to view, appear, be manifest: twi (of spectres, Sap.
XVii. 45 avrois Oeods éudbaviterOa A€yovres, Diog. Laért.
prooem. 7; so of God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13,1), Mt. xxvii.
53; 7 mpotwre Tov Geod, of Christ appearing before God
in heaven, Heb. ix. 24; (of God imparting to souls the
knowledge of himself, Sap. i. 2; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol.
12,4) 2. to indicate, disclose, declare, make known :
foll. by 6m, Heb. xi. 14; with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 15;
ti mpds twa, ib. 22; tt xara Tivos, to report or declare
a thing against a person, to inform against one, Acts
xxiv. 1; xxv. 2; mepi tevos, about one, Acts xxv. 15.
[Syn. see dnd. | *
Ep-oBos [see ev, III. 3], -ov, (foBos), thrown into fear,
terrified, affrighted: Lk. xxiv. 5,[87]; Acts x.43; (xxii.
9 Rec.) ; xxiv. 25; Rev. xi. 13. Theophr. char. 25 (24),
1; [1 Mace. xiii. 2; in a good sense, Sir. xix. 24 (21)].
(Actively, inspiring fear, terrible, Soph. O. C. 39.) *
ép-pvodw, - [see ev, III. 3]: 1 aor. évepvanaa; to blow
09 ep
or breathe on: twa, Jn. xx. 22, where Jesus, after the
manner of the Hebrew prophets, expresses by the sym-
bolic act of breathing upon the apostles the communi-
cation of the Holy Spirit to them, — having in view the
primary meaning of the words M35 and mvedua [cf. e. g.
Ezek. xxxvii. 5]. (Sept.; Diose., Aret., Geop., al.; [to
inflate, Aristot., al.].) *
ep-utos [see ev, III. 3], -ov, (€uddw to implant), in
prof. auth. [fr. Hdt. down] inborn, implanted by nature ;
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdb. on Sap. [xii. 10] p. 224; um-
planted by others’ instruction: thus Jas. i. 21 tov €udurov
Adyov, the doctrine implanted by your teachers [al. by
God; cf. Briickner in De Wette, or Huther ad loc.],
dé£acd6c ev mpadtnrt, receive like mellow soil, as it were.*
év, a preposition taking the dative after it; Hebr. 3;
Lat. in with abl.; Eng. in, on, at, with, by, among. [W.
§ 48 a.; B. 328 (282) sq.] It is used
I. Locatiy; 1. of Place proper; a. in the in-
terior of some whole; within the limits of some space:
ev yaorpi, Mt. i. 18; ev BnOdeeu, Mt. ii. 1; €v 7H wodet,
Lk. vii. 37; ev rH “lovdata, ev TH epnue, ev TO TAOIo, ev TA
ovpav@, and innumerable other exx. b. in (on) the
surface of a place, (Germ. auf): év r@ dpet, Jn. iv. 20
sq-; Heb. viii. 5; év mda&i, 2 Co. ili. 3; €v 77 dyopa, Mt.
xx. 3; ev 7H 600, Mt. v. 25, ete. c. of proximity, at,
near, by: év tais yavias tov mrateav, Mt. vi.5; ev ro
Dirwdp, at the fountain Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; év r@ yato
gvraxio, In. viii. 20 [see B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Treasury ;
and on this pass. and the preceding cf. W. 385 (360) ];
kabivew ev rH Seka Oeod ete., at the right hand: Heb. i.
3; viii. 1; Eph. i. 20. d. of the contents of a writ-
ing, book, ete.: év 1H émortodn, 1 Co. v. 9; é€v xepadids
BiBriov ypapew, Heb. x. 7; é€v tH BiBAo, TO BiBdio, Rev.
xiii. 8; Gal. iii. 10; ev r@ vou, Lk. xxiv. 44; Jn. i. 45
(46); év rots mpodpnras, in the book of the prophets,
Acts xiii. 40; év ‘HAla, in that portion of Scripture
which treats of Elijah, Ro. xi. 2, ef. Fritzsche ad loc. ;
[ Delitzsch, Brief a.d. Romer, p.12; W. 385 (360) ; B. 331
(285)]; év Aaviéd, in the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [see
AaBié, fin.]; év 7 ‘Qoné, in the prophecies of Hosea,
Ro. ix. 25. e. trop. applied to things not perceived
by the senses, as év 79 xapdia, év tais kapdias, Mt. v. 28;
xiii. 19; 2 Co. iv. 6, and often; év rais cuverdnoect, 2 Co.
vy. 11. 2. with dat. of a Person, in the person,
nature, soul, thought of any one: thus év r@ Oe@ xéxpuTrat
} Cot tpay, it lies hidden as it were in the bosom of
God until it shall come forth to view, Col. iii. 3, ef. Eph.
ili. 9; év avr, i. e. in the person of Christ, catocxet may
To mAnpwpa ete., Col. i. 19; ii. 3 [(?), 9]. phrases in
which 7 duapria is said to dwell in men, Ro. vii. 17 sq. ;
or 6 Xptords (the mind, power, life of Christ) etvar, [Jn.
xvii. 26]; Ro. viii. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 5; peévew, Jn. vi. 56;
[xv.4,5]; cq, Gal. ii. 20; poppotaOa, Gal. iv. 19; Aadeiv.
2 Co. xiii. 3; 6 Aoyos Tov Beov eivat, 1 Jn. i. 10; peverv,
Jn. v. 38; évorxeiv or oikeiy 6 Aoyos TOV Xpiarod, Col. iii.
16; ro mvedpa (of God, of Christ), Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co.
iii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 143; 1O &y tem yxdpropa, 1 Tim. iv. 14;
2 Tim. i. 6; évepyetv &y rum, Mt. xiv. 25 Eph. ii. 2; 1 Co.
dy 210 ds
xii. 6, etc.; évepyeicOat, Col. i. 29; xarepyd{ecOa, Ro.
vii. 8. after verbs of revealing, manifesting: dmo-
cadvyat év euoi, in my soul, Gal. i. 16; avepdv €or eév
avrois, Ro. i. 19. ev €avr@, év éavrois, within one’s self
i. e. in the soul, spirit, heart: after the verbs eidévat,
Jn. vi. 61; eimeiv, Lk. vii. 39; xviii. 4; euBpipacda, Jn.
xi. 88; orevafew, Ro. viii. 23; ScadoyiterOa, Mk. ii. 8
(alternating there with év rais xapdiats, cf. vs. 6); Lk.
xii. 17; dvamopetv, Acts x. 17; Aéyev, Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21;
‘Lk. vii. 49; also 2 Co. i. 9; for other exx. of divers
kinds, see elpi, V. 4 e. 3. it answers to the Germ. an
{on; often freely to be rendered in the case of, with, ete.
W. § 48, a.3a.], when used a. of the person or
thing on whom or on which some power is oper-
ative: iva ovtw yevyrat ev euol, 1 Co. ix.15; moety te &v
tim, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1341;
{W.u.s. and 218 (204 sq.);. B. 149 (130)]. —_b. of that
in which something is manifest [W.u.s.]: pavOdvew
év tum, 1 Co. iv. 6; ywooxew, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35;
1 Jn. iii. 19 (exx. fr. the classics are given by Passow
i. 2 p. 908°; [ef. L. and S.s. v. A. III.]); likewise of that
in which a thing is sought: (yreiv €v rum, 1 Co. iv. 2.
c. after verbs of stumbling, striking: mpooxomrew,
Ro. xiv. 21; mraiew, Jas. ii. 10; oxavdariterOat, q. v. in
its place. 4. with, among, in the presence of, with dat.
of pers. (also often in the classics; cf. Matthiae ii. p.
1340; W. 385 (360) and 217 sq. (204)): 1 Co. ii. 6; &v
6pOarpois nuav, Mt. xxi. 42; év euol, in my judgment,
1 Co. xiv. 11; [perh. add Jude 1 LT Tr WH; but ef.
6 b. below]. To this head some refer év ipiv, 1 Co. vi.
2, interpreting it in your assembly, cf. Meyer ad loc.;
but see 5 d. y. 5. used of that with which a person
is surrounded, equipped, furnished, assisted,
or acts, [W. § 48,a.1b.]; a. in i. q. among, with col-
lective nouns: év té dyAo, Mk. v. 30 [W. 414 (386)];
év TH yeved tavrn, among the men of this age, Mk. viii.
38; €v r@ yéver pou, in my nation i. e. among my country-
men, Gal.i. 14; esp. with dat. plur. of persons, as év
Hpiv, ev duly, among us, among you, év dAAnAos, among
yourselves, one with another: Mt. ii. 6; xi.11; Mk. ix.
60; Lk.i.1; Jn.i. 14; xiii. 35; Acts ii. 29; 1 Co. iii. 18;
v.1,and often. _b. of the garments with (in) which
one is clad: év éevdvuace and the like, Mt. vii. 15; Mk.
xii. 38; Lk. xxiv. 4; Jn. xx.12; Acts x. 30; Heb. xi.
37; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. iii. 4; nudtecpevoy ev inarious, Mt.
xi. 8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. iyar.J; Lk. vii. 25; mepuBadXe-
o6a v ivarias, Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4 [L WH txt.om. év]. ce.
of that which one either leads or brings with him, or
with which he is fur nished or equipped; esp. after
verbs of coming, (év of accompaniment), where we
often say with: év déka yittdow tmavrav, Lk. xiv. 31;
HAGev ev pvpidor, Jude 14; ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 17;
eicepxecOat ev aipvart, Heb. ix. 25; €v 76 ddatt kK. &v TO
aivart, 1 Jn. v. 6 (i. e. with the water of baptism and
the blood of atonement, by means of both which he has
procured the pardon of our sins, of which fact we are
assured by the testimony of the Holy Spirit); év paBde,
3 Co. iv. 21; ¢v mAnpdpart eddoyias, Ro. xv. 29: dbOdveww
év TS evayyeNio, 2 Co. x. 14; ev rvevpare x. Suvdper “Hnrov;
imbued or furnished with the spirit and power of Elijah,
Lk. i. 175 év tH Bactdeia adrod, furnished with the regal
power of the Messiah, possessed of his kingly power,
[B. 330 (284)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [WH txt. L
mrg. Trmrg. es tyv B.]. Akin is its use 4. of the
instrument or means by or with which anything is
accomplished, owing to the influence of the Hebr. prep.
3 much more common in the sacred writ. than in prof.
auth. (cf. W. § 48, a. 3 d.; B. 181 (157) and 329 (283)
sq.), where we say with, by means of, by (through); a
in phrases in which the primitive force of the prep. is
discernible, as ev mupt xataxaiew, Rev. xvii. 16 [T om.
WH br. év]; ev ddate adigew or aprvev, Mt. v. 13; Mk.
ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 34; év 7 aipate Aevkavev, Rev. vii. 145
ev aiwate kabapi¢ew, Heb. ix. 22; év vdare Banritew, Mt.
iii. 11, ete. (see Bamrig, II. b. bb.). B. with the dat.,
where the simple dat. of the instrument might have been
used, esp. in the Revelation: év payaipa, ev poppaig
aroxreivev, Rev. vi. 8; xiii. 10; matagoew, Lk. xxii. 49;
aré\AvobGa, Mt. xxvi. 52; xaramareiv ev tois trociv, Mt.
vii. 6; €v Bpaxiom avrod, Lk. i. 51; év daxrvAw Oeod, Lk.
xi. 20, and in other exx.; of things relating to the soul,
as ev dyraope, 2 Th. ii. 13 [W. 417 (388)]; 1 Pet. i. 2;
€v TH mapakAnoet, 2 Co. vii. 7; €v mpocevyn, Mt. xvii. 21
[T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; edAoyeiv ev evAoyia, Eph.
i. 3; Stxaovoba €v T@ aipatt, Ro. v.9. y. more rarely
with dat. of pers., meaning aided by one, by the interven-
tion or agency of some one, by (means of) one, (ef. W.
389 (364); B. 329 (283) sq.]: é€v r@ dpxorte rev Satpo-~
viov, Mt. ix. 34; év érepoyAwaoots, 1 Co. xiv. 21; xpiver
T. oikouperny ev avdpi, Acts xvii. 31; ev tpiv xpiverar 6
Koopos (preceded by oi dytoe Tov Koopov Kpwodow), 1 Co.
vi. 2; épydtecOa ev tim, Sir. xiii. 4; xxx. 13,34. 6.
foll. by an inf. with the article, in that (Germ. dadurch
dass), or like the Lat. gerund [or Eng. participial noun;
ef. B. 264 (227)]: Acts iii. 26; iv. 30; Heb. ii. 8; viii.
13. _e. of the state or condition in which anything
is done or any one exists, acts, suffers; out of a great
number of exx. (see also in yivoua, 5 f., and epi, V.4
b.) it is sufficient to cite: ev Baoavots, Lk. xvi. 23; év
T® Gavatw, 1 Jn. ili. 14; ev (wp, Ro. v.10; ev rots Seopois,
Philem. 13; év metpacpois, 1 Pet. i. 63 ev dpordpare
capkos, Ro. viii. 3; ev woAA@ aydu, 1 Th. ii. 25 ev d6En,
Phil. iv. 19; 2 Co. iii. 7 sq.3 ometperat ev pOopa kta. it
(se. that which is sown) is sown in a state of corrup-
tion, sc. dv, 1 Co. xv. 42 sq.;3 ev éroiuw éyew, to be pre-
pared, in readiness, 2 Co. x. 6; év éxotdoe, Acts xi. 5;
xxii. 17; very often so used of virtues and vices, as és
evoeBela kK. cenvorntt, 1 Tim. ii. 2; év dycaope, 1 Tim. ii
15; &v kawornte (wis, Ro. vi. 4; év rH avoxn Tov Oeov
Ro. iii. 26 (25); ev xaxia kat POdve, Tit. iii. 3; év mavoup
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2; also with an adverbial force: as é:
Suvduet, powerfully, with power [W. § 51,1 e.; B. 33¢
(284) ], Mk. ix.1; Ro.i.4; Col. i. 29; 2 Thi. 115 xpive
ev Sixatoovyn, Acts xvii. 31; Rev. xix. 11; év yap, in joy,
joyful, Ro. xv. 32; év éxreveia, Acts xxvi. 7; ev omovdy,
Ro. xii. 8; év ydpers, Gal. i. 6; 2 Th. ii. 165 év rayet. Lk.
2
€V
xviii. 8; Ro. xvi. 20; Rev.i.1. [Here perh. may be
introduced the noteworthy adv. phrase éy aot rovrors,
with all this, Lk. xvi. 26 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH for RG
émt m. 7. (see emi, B. 2.d.); also év maou, in all things
[R. V. withal], Eph. vi.16 Ltxt.T Tr WI.] A similar
use occurs in speaking _f. of the form in which any-
thing appears or is exhibited, where ¢v may be repre-
sented by the Germ. als [Eng. as]; twice so in the
N. T.: copiav Aadeiv ev pvotnpiw (as a mystery [here
A. V. in]), 1 Co. ii. 7; ev r@ aire imodciypare mimrew,
Heb. iv. 11 [(A. V. after); \al. regard this as a preg-
nant constr., the év marking rest after motion (R. V.mrg.
into); ef. Kurtz or Liinem. ad loc.; B. 329 (283); and
7 below]; (Sidovae ru ev Swpea, 2 Mace. iv. 30; Polyb. 23,
3,4; 26, 7,53 év pepidi, Sir. xxvi. 3; AapBavew te ev
gépvn, Polyb. 28, 17,9; exx. fr. Plato are given by Ast,
Lex. Plat. i. p. 702; Lat. in mandatis dare i.e. to be
considered as orders, Caes. b. g. 1,43). [Here perhaps
may be noticed the apparent use of év to denote “the
measure or standard” (W. § 48, a. 3 b.; Bnhdy.
p- 211): év perp, Eph. iv. 16 (see perpoy, 2); epeper ev
éEnxovra etc. Mk. iv. 8 WH txt. (note the eés, q. v- B. I.
3.a.); Kapmropopovow év tpidkorra ete. ibid. 20 T Tr txt.
WH txt.; but some would take ev here distributively,
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 8.] g. of the things in (with)
which one is busied: 1 Tim. iv. 15; Col. iv. 2; év ois,
Acts xxvi. 12; év aira, in preaching the gospel, Eph.
vi. 20; €v 7H €opry, in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23
[L Tr br. ev]; év 7 didax7, in giving instruction, while
teaching, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; see efui, V.4d.; Passow
i. p. 910°; [L. and S. s. v. I. 1]. h. of that in which
anything is embodied or summed up: ev ait@ ar
nv, i. e. that life of which created beings were made par-
takers was comprehended in him, Jn. i. 4; €v rovr@ To
hoyw avaxedadavovrat, Ro. xiii. 9, (on Eph. i. 10 see dva-
keadaidw) ; macav T. ovyyeveray ev Yruxais €BdounKovta
mevre, comprised in, consisting of, seventy-five souls, Acts
vii. 14 [W. 391 (366) ]. 6. of that in which any per-
son or thing is inherently fixed, implanted, or
with which it isintimately connected; a. of the
whole in which a part inheres: prop., pevew év tH
dumcho, Jn. xv. 45 €v évi gdpare pédy rwoddd, Ro. xii. 4;
fig. kpepacda év tin, Mt. xxii. 40. b. of a person to
whom another is wholly joined and to whose power
and influence he is subject, so that the former may be
likened to the place in which the latter lives and
moves. So used in the writings of Paul and of John
particularly of intimate relationship with God or with
Christ, and for the most part involving contextually the
idea of power and blessing resulting from that union;
thus, efvas or peveiv ev T® Tatpi or ev To Oew, of Christ,
Jn. x. 38; xiv. 10sq.; of Christians, 1 Jn. iii. 24; iv. 13,
15 sq.3 ¢ivae or pévew in Christ, of his disciples and wor-
shippers, Jn. xiv. 20; xv. 4 sq.3 pevew év TO vid K. ev TO
matpi, 1 Jn. ii. 24; ev Ged, i. e. amplified and strength-
ened in the fellowship of God and the consciousness of
that fellowship, épyaecOai ri, Jn. iii. 21; mappnovatec Oa,
1 Th. ii. 2. Of frequent use by Paul are the phrases
211
?
eV
ev Xpiora, ev Xpiore@ “Inood, ev xvpia, (cf. Fritzsche, Com.
on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 sqq.; W. 889 (364); Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 ¢.), ingrafted as it were wn
Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord:
Ro: ili. 24; vi.11; 23; vii. 89:; 1 Co. 1.4;.2 Co. i. 14%
Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v.6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ev];
ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i.1, 13; ii.1; 1 Pet.
iii. 16; v.10; ornxew ev kupio, Phil. iv. 1; tva eipedo ev
aire, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most
intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; eivar ev Xpiord
Ino. 1 Co. i. 30; of ev Xp. "Ino. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14;
koacbar ev Xpiota@, OvncKew ev kupio, to fall asleep, to
die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in
it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rev. xiv. 13. Since such
union with Christ is the basis on which actions and
virtues rest, the expression is equivalent in meaning
to by virtue of spiritual fellowship or union with Christ;
in this sense it is joined to the following words and
phrases: mémevopas, Ro. xiv. 14 [W. u. s. and 390 note];
merrocOevat, Gal. v.10; Phil. i. 14; 2 Th. iii. 4; mappnoiav
éyew, Philem. 8; éAmigew, Phil. 11.19; xavynow €xew,
Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co. xv. 31; avijxev, Col. iii. 18; 7d adrd
gpoveiv, Phil. iv. 2; braxovew, Eph. vi. 1 [Lom. Tr WH
br. é€v k.]; pas, Eph. v. 8; av€er, ii. 21; Cworroreta Oar, 1
Co. xv. 22; 6 Komos ovK €ote Kevos, ib. 58; Gysos, Phil.
i. 13 ysaopevos, 1 Co.i. 2; Nadetv, 2 Co. ii. 173 xii. 19;
dAnbevav eye, Ro. ix. 1; Aeyew x. papruperOa, Eph. iv.
17. Hence it denotes the Christian aim, nature,
quality of any action or virtue; thus, evdpecroy eév
kupio, Col. iii. 20 GL T Tr WH; rpood€xecOai twa, Ro.
xvi. 2; Phil. ii. 29; domd¢erOai twa, Ro. xvi. 8, 22; 1 Co.
xvi. 19; xomav, Ro. xvi. 12 [W. 390 note; Lbr. the cl.];
yaunOjvat, 1 Co. vii. 39; xaipew, Phil. ili. 1; iv. 4, 10;
mapakavev, 1 Th. iv. 1; mpoitoracOai twos, 1 Th. v. 12;—
or is equiv. to in things pertaining to Christ, in the cause
of Christ: vnmios, 1 Co. iii. 1; bpovipos, 1 Co. iv. 10;
madaywyol, 15; dd0i pov, 17; Ouipas pou avewypevns ev
kupio, in the kingdom of the Lord, 2 Co. ii. 12. dexar-
odaba €v Xptore, by faith in Christ, Gal. ii. 17. Finally,
it serves as a periphrasis for Christian (whether
person or thing): rods ex tay Napkiooou tovs dvras ێv
kupi (opp. to those of the family of Narcissus who were
not Christians), Ro. xvi. 11; dvOpemos év Xp. a Chris-
tian, 2 Co. xii. 2; ai ékkAnoia ai ev Xp. Gal. i. 22; 1 Th.
ii. 143 of vexpot €v Xp. those of the dead who are Chris-
tians, 1 Th. iv. 16; ékXexrds év x. a Christian of mark,
Ro. xvi. 13; 8dxos ev Xp. an approved Christian, Ro.
Xvi. 10; Séopeos év kvp. a Christian prisoner (tacitly opp.
to prisoners of another sort [W. 388 (363)]), Eph. iv.
1; muords Stdkovos év x. Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7; Sdtaxovia,
17; év Xp. yevvav twa, to be the author of one’s Christian
life or life devoted to Christ, 1 Co. iv. 15; decpot év Xp.
bonds occasioned by one’s fellowship with Christ, Phil.
i. 13 [al. connect év Xp. here with gavepovs]; it might
be freely rendered as Christians, as a Christian, in 1 Co.
ix. 1 sq.; Philem. 16. €v mvevpare (dyie) eivat, to be in
the power of, be actuated by, inspired by, the Holy Spirit:
Ro. viii. 9 (here in opp. to év capki); yiverOa, Rev. i
év
10; iv. 2; év mvevpare beod Aadrew, 1 Co. xii. 3; ev mvev-
pare Or év Tv. TO ayi@ or ev Tv. Oeov Sc. By, (being) ini. e.
under the power of the Spirit, moved by the Spirit [cf. B.
330 (283 sq.); W. 390 (364 sq.) ]: Mt. xxii. 43; Mk. xii.
36; Lk. ii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. xvii. 3; xxi.10. dvOpe-
mos ev mvevpatt akabapT@, Sc. dv, in the power of an un-
clean spirit, possessed by one, Mk. i. 23; &v r@ movnp@
xeia Oat, to be held in the power of Satan,1Jn.v.19. of
év voue, subject to the control of the law, Ro. iii.19. &
7@ Adan droOvyjcxev, through connection with Adam, 1
Co. xv. 22. ce. of that in which other things are con-
tained and upheld, as their cause and origin: ev
avr@ (i.e. in God) ¢@pev xrd. in God is found the cause
why we live, Acts xvii. 28; év air@ (in Christ, as the
divine hypostatic Neyos) éxricOn Ta mavra, in him resides
the cause why all things were originally created, Col. i. 16
(the cause both instrumental and final as well, for
év a’r@ is immediately afterwards resolved into 60 avrod
x. eis avrov [cf. W. § 50, 6 and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]); ra
mavra ev ait@ ouveatnke, Col. i. 17; €v Ioadk xAnOnoerat
cou orepua, Ro. ix. 7; Heb. xi. 18, fr. Gen. xxi. 12; dyed-
(eo Oa ev with dat. of thing, Heb. x. 10, ef. 1 Co. vi. 11;
€v TovT@ morevouer, in this lies the reason why we be-
lieve, Jn. xvi. 30, cf. 1 Co. iv.4; év d equiv. to év tovra,
ort, [in that], since: Ro. viii. 3; Heb. ii. 18; vi. 17, [see
8e. below]. Closely related is the use of ev d. of
that which gives opportunity, the occasion: épuyev
€v TO Ady@ TovTe (oni. e. at this word; cf. W. § 48, a.
3c.), Acts. vil. 29. e. after certain verbs denoting an
affection, because the affection inheres or resides, as
it were, in that to which it relates, [cf. B. 185 (160 sq.) ;
W. 232 (217 sq.) ]; see evdoxéw, eddoxia, evppatvopat, Kav-
xdoua, xalpw, etc.; likewise sometimes after eAmif{o,
morevw@, miotis, (which see in their prop. places), be-
cause faith and hope are placed in what is believed or
hoped for. 7. after verbs implying motion éy w.
the dat. is so used as to seem, according to our laws of
speech, to be employed for es with the ace.; but it in-
dicates the idea of rest and continuance succeeding the
motion; cf. W. § 50,4; B. 328 (282) sq.: thus after
droaréAdo, Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; eioépyeoOar, Lk. ix. 46;
tev. xi. 11 [not R Tr; WH br. ev]; eEێpyxerOa, Lk. vii.
17; 1 Th.i. 8, (but not after épyec@a in Lk. xxiii. 42,
on which pass. see 5 c. above); xataBaivew, Jn. v.4 [RL;
cf. W.§ 50,4a.]; emorpevrae arecbeis ev ppovncer dixaior,
that they may abide in ete. Lk. i. 17; xadeiv év eipnyn, év
dyraopa, ev pia eAdmidi, equiv. to eis Td etvar nuas (ipas)
ev ete.: 1 Co. vii. 15; 1 Th.iv. 7; Eph. iv. 4; esp. after
ridévat and ioravat, which words see in their places. On
the same use of the prep., common in Homer, somewhat
rare in the classic auth., but recurring freq. in writ. of
a later age, see W.1.c.; Passowi. 2 p. 909°; [cf. L. and
Sai8-tvtel 8]. 8. Constructions somewhat pecul-
iar: a. éy Aiyvnrov sc. yj (by an ellipsis com. in Grk.
writ., cf. Passow i. 2 p. 908°; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2]; W.
384 (359); [B. 171 (149)]): Heb. xi. 26 [Lehm.]; put
see Alyumros. b. expressions shaped by the Hebr.
idiom : ayopafew ev with dat. of price (for the price is
Oe ev
the means by which a thing is bought [cf. W. § 48, a.
3 e.]), Rev. v. 9, (€v dpyupio, 1 Chr. xxi. 24). dAAao-
gew Te ev Tun (See dAAdoow), to exchange one thing for
another (prop. to change something and have the ex-
change in [cf. W. 388 (363) note; 206 (194)]): Ro. i.
23, 25 [here pernddakav]. duvupe ev run (3 Y3W), cf.
Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1355; [W. § 32, 1 b.; B.
147 (128)]), to swear by (i. e. the name of some one
being interposed), or as it were relying on, supported
by, some one [cf. W. 389 (364)]: Mt. v. 34-36; xxiii.
16, 18-22; Rev. x. 6. C. dpodoy® ev tuu after the
Syriac (2 oll [not the Hebr., see Fritzsche on Mt.
p- 886; B.176 (153); W. § 32, 3 b., yet ef. § 4, a.]),
prop. to confess in one’s case (or when one’s cause is at
stake [ef. W.1.¢.; Fritzsche]. c.; Weiss, Das Matthiius-
evang. p. 278 note? (and in Mey. on Mt. ed. 7)]), the
nature of the confession being evident from the context;
as, to confess one to be my master and lord, or to be my
worshipper: Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; [ef. Westcott, Canon,
p- 305 note 1]. d. on the very com. phrase ev dvépari
Tivos, See voua (esp. 2). [e.\the phrase év @ varies in
meaning acc. to the varying sense of év. It may be, a.
local, wherein (i. q. €v tovrm év ): Ro. ii. 1; xiv. 22;
2 Co. xi. 12. B. temporal, while (cf. II. below; W.
§ 48,:a; 2)! MEL nS 195) Ek. vase ine vies Witkin:
13 (Ree. €ws, q. v.). -y- instrumental, whereby: Ro. xiv.
21. §. causal, Eng. in that (see Mdtzner, Eng. Gram.,
trans. by Grece, iii. 452, — concomitance passing over
into causal dependence, or the substratum of the ac-
tion being regarded as that on which its existence
depends; cf. ‘in those circumstances I did so and so’),
on the ground of this that, because: Ro. viii. 3, etc.; see
in 6c. above. Acc. to the last two uses, the phrase
may be resolved into ev rovr@ dre or ev Tova 6 (cf. W.
§ 23, 2 b. and b.); on its use see W. 387 (362) note; B.
331 (284 sq.); Bnhdy. p. 211; esp. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. ii. p. 93 sq. ] :
II. With the notion of Time éy marks __a.._ periods
and portions of time in which anything occurs, in, on,
at, during: é€v th nuépa, ev tH vuxti, Jn. xi. 9 sq., ete. ;
év Tais jépats exeivars, Mt. iii. 1, etc. ; év caBBare, Mt.
xii. 2, and in many other exx.; é€v r@ Sevrépa, at the sec-
ond time, Acts vii. 13; év ré xabefjs, Lk. viii. 1; év 7
peta&v, in the meantime [W. 592 sq. (551)], In. iv. 31;
[ev eoydr@ xpdvm, Jude 18 Rec.]. b. before substan-
tives signifying an event, it is sometimes equiv. to at the
time of this or that event, (Germ. bei) ; thus év r7 maduy-
yeveoia, Mt. xix. 285 év tH mapovaia a’tod or pov, 1 Co.
xv.) 233 1 Thi 195 ets [WS's0./5)'; se hala et
Jn. ii. 28 ; év 77 avaoracet, Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk.
xiv. 14; xx. 33; ev ry €oxatyn oaArcyy., at (the sounding
of) the last trumpet, 1 Co. xv. 52; év ri aroxadtWee of
Christ,<2.Rhsis 75)bet. 106 lss iva 13: c. before in-
finitives with the article [B. 263 (226) sq.; W. § 44, 6]:
before the inf. present it signifies while, as: Mt. xiii. 4
(€v TO orreipey), 25 (ev Tr. kadevderv ros avOpa@movs) ; Mt.
xxvii. 12; Mk. vi.48); Lk. i.21 [ef B: L'c.]; xxiv.'51;
before the inf. aorist,
d. within, in
1 Cor xi'21; 'Gal-iv. 18, ete:;
when, after that: Lk. ix. 36; xix. 15, ete.
the course of: ev tpiow jpepas, Mt. xxvii. 40; Mk. xv.
29 [L T Trom. WH br. ev]; Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. ev],
20; cf. W. § 48, a. 2; [B. § 133, 26].
III. In Composition. Prefixed to Adjectives ev
denotes lying or situated in some place or condition,
possessed of or noted for something; as in evdduos, vdo-
fos, uoBos. Prefixed to Verbs it signifies 1. re-
maining, staying, continuing in some place, state, or con-
dition; as, éveipt, eppéeva, €voikéw. 2. motion into
something, entering into, mingling in; as, euBaive, ep-
Barevo, éykadéw (summon to court), éyypape, eyxpuTro.
3. in eudvade, eumpndw, eumrio it answers to Germ. an
(on).
Before B, u, 7, ¢, W, év changes to éu-, before y, x, &, x, to
éy-, before A to éa-, although this assimilation is neglected
also in the older codd. [in x “ not often changed,” Scrivener,
Collation ete. p. lvi.; “in some words assimilation is con-
stant acc. to all or at least all primary Mss. while in a com-
paratively small number of cases authority is divided. Speak-
ing generally, assimilation is the rule in compounds of éy, re-
tention of yin those of ody” (Prof. Hort). Following manu-
script authority T WH write éevypdde, éevedberos, eveaivia,
évrawl(w, eveatoikew, evkavxdoua, eveevtpl(w, eviplyw, évme-
pimatéw, evirvéew; T evaortw; WH evkorn, évavos; but L T
Tr WH retain eyxaréw, eyrAnua, éyKouBdoum, eyKpdre.a,
eykparevoual, eyKpaths, eyxplw, eAdAoyew (-dw), euBaivw, éu-
BaddAw, euBarrw, éuBarevw, éuBAérw, euBpiudomat, euuaivoua,
eumaryuovn, eumaryuds, eumailw, eumaixtns, eumlrAnm, eu-
mintw, euTrA€Kw, EuTAOKN, euTopevouat, eumopla, eumdpioy, ep-
Topos, euTTVw, euparis, eudaviw, upoBos, €uputos; LT Tr
éyxvos; L Tr WH éuméva, Eumpocdev; L Tr eyypdopw,
eyKaberos, eyraivia, eykavilw, eykakew, eyKkaTadeimw, éyKar-
O1Kew, CykKavxdoua, eykevTpi(w, eykowh, eykdtTw, eyKplyw,
euTepimatew, eumvew; T eumimpdw; T WH are not uniform
in éykakéw, eyxatadeirw; nor T in eupevw, Eumpocbev; nor
WH in eyxérrw.— Add LT Tr WH avéyxaAnros, mapeu-
BadrAw, rapeuBoan. See Gregory in the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8,
p- 76 sqq.; Hortin WH. App. p. 149; Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit.
for 1862, p. 179 sq.; esp. Meisterhans p. 46.]
év-aykadifopar: 1 aor. ptcp. éevayxadiodpevos; (mid.
i. q. eis ras dyxadas déyouat, Lk. ii. 28) ; to take into the
arms, embrace: twa, Mk. ix. 36; x. 16. (Prov. vi. 10;
xxiv. 48 (33); Meleag. in Anth. 7, 476,10; Plut.; Al-
ciphr. epp. 2, 4; al.) *
€v-ddwos, -ov, or evadtos, -a, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, 1], (ads
the sea), that which is in the sea, marine; plur. ra évdd\ua
marine animals, Jas. iii. 7. (Often in Grk. writ.; the
Epic form eivddvos as old as Hom.) *
év-avtt, adv., (€v and dyri, prop. in that part of space
which is opposite), before: as a prep. foll. by a gen. [B.
319 (273)]; €vavre rod Beov, MT 159, before God, i. e.
in the temple, Lk. i. 8 [Tr mrg. evavtiov]; in the judg-
ment of God, Acts viii. 21 GL T Tr WH; [évavr bapaa,
Acts vii. 10 Tdf.; cf. B. 180 (156)]. (Very often in
Sept., and in the Palestin. Apocr. of the O. T.; but no-
where in prof. auth.) *
év-avtlos, -a, -ov, (avrios set against), [fr. Hom. down],
prop. that which is over against; opposite; used 1.
evaryxartfouat 2
13
évdeka
primarily of place; opposite, contrary: of the wind
(Xen. an. 4, 5, 3), Mt. xiv. 24; Mk. vi. 48; Acts xxvii.
4; e€& evavrias [W.591 (550); B. 82 (71) ], opposite, over
against (see éx, I. 4), with gen. Mk. xv. 39. 2. me-
taph. opposed as an adversary, hostile, antagonistic in feel-
ing or act: 1 Th. ii. 15 (on which pass. [for confirmatory
reff. to anc. auth.] cf. Grimm on 3 Mace. vii. 4 [on the
other hand, see Liinem. on 1 Thess. ]. ¢.]); 6 && évavrias,
an opponent [A. V. he that is of the contrary part], Tit. ii.
8; €vavriov moveiy Ti tun, to do something against one,
Acts xxviii. 17 ; €vavria mparreiv mpos TO dvoud Tivos, Acts
xxvi. 9. Neutr. évayriov, adv., as a prep. is constr. with
the gen. [B. 319 (273) ], before, in the sight of, in the pres-
ence of, one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often
for 309 and >" also for yy): Mk. ii. 12 (T Tr mre.
WH épmpoobev); Lk. xx. 26; Acts vii. 10 (évavtivy
®@apaw, when he stood before Pharaoh [here Tdf. évavrt,
q- v-]); Acts viii. 32; Hebraistically, in the judgment,
estimation, of one, Lk. xxiv.19; [i. 6 T Tr WH], (Gen.
x. 9,etc.). [16 evavrior 1. e. rovvavrioy see in its place. | *
€év-dpxopar: 1 aor. evnpéduny; to begin, make a begin-
ning: with dat. of the thing fr. which the beginning is
made, Gal. iii. 3; ri, Phil. i. 6; 2 Co. vili. 6 Lehm. ed.
min. (Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian.; generally with
gen. of the thing begun, as in Sir. xxxvi. 29 (26) ; xxxviii.
16; 1 Mace. ix. 54. in Eur. with acc., of beginning sac-
rificial rites; at length, to govern, rule, with gen. Josh.
x. 24 Sept.) [Comp.: mpo-evdpyopat. | *
€vatos, see évvaros.
év-ypadw, see ev, II]. 2 and 3.
évSens, -és, (fr. evd€m to lack, mid. to be in need of),
needy, destitute: Acts iv. 34. (From [Soph.], Hdt.
down ; Sept.) *
€v-Serypa, -ros, 7d, (evdeixvupne), token, evidence, proof,
[A. V. manifest token]: 2 Th. i. 5 [ef. B. 153 (134)].
(Plat. @ritias p. 110 b.; Dem. 423, 13.) *
év-Selxvupe : fo point out, (Lat. indicare; Germ. anzei-
gen), fr. Pind. down; in mid. first in Hom.; in the N. T.
only in Mid. : [pres. évdeicyupac]; 1 aor. evedecEdunv; prop.
to show one’s self in something, show something in one’s
self (cf. B. 192 (166) ]; 1. to show, demonstrate, prove,
whether by arguments or by acts: ri, Ro. ix. 22 (joined
with yvwpioa); Eph. ii. 7; Tit. ii. 10; iii. 2; Heb. vi.
11; with two acc., the one of the object, the other of
the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; ri év ru, dat. of the pers., Ro.
ix? (ir xix. 16, fief; W. 254 (238)]) 51 Dimoies zi
eis TO Gvoua Tivos, Heb. vi. 10; rv evderkev evdeixvvabar (as
in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b.; cf. W. 225 (211)); ets teva,
2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth: riwi
(dat. of pers.) kaka, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. I. 15, 17.*
€v-Berkts, -ews, 77, (evdeixvupr), demonstration, proof: i.e.
manifestation, made in act, rhs Suxacoavvns, Ro. iii. 25 sq. ;
THs aydnns, 2 Co. vill. 24; i. q. sign, evidence, [A. V.
evident token], amwXeias, Phil. i. 28. [Plat., al.]*
év-Bexa, oi, ai, ra, eleven: of evdexa, the eleven apostles
of Christ remaining after the death of Judas the traitor,
Mt. xxviii. 16; Mk. xvi. 14; Lk. xxiv. 9, 33; Acts i. 26;
ii. 14. [From Hom. down.]*
e /
EVOEKATOS
év-Séxaros, -dtn, -arov, eleventh: Mt. xx. 6,9; Rev. xxi.
20. [From Hom. down. ] *
év-Séxopat; (o receive, approve of, admit, allow, (as rov
Adyov, Hdt. 1, 60). Impersonally, évdexerae it can be
allowed, is possible, may be, (often thus in Grk. prose fr.
Thue. down): foll. by ace. w. inf. Lk. xiii. 33, cf. xvii. 1.
[Cf. d€yopuat, fin. ] *
év8npew, -@; 1 aor. inf. évdnunaa; (€vdnuos one who is
among his own people or in his own land, one who does
not travel abroad; opp. to éxdnuos), prop. to be among
one’s own people, dwell in one’s own country, stay at home
(opp. to éexdnuew, amodnuéw; see those words); i. q. to
have a fixed abode, he at home, év r@ capart, of life on
earth, 2 Co. v. 6,9; mpds Tov kvpsoy, of life in heaven, ib.
8. (Rare in the classics, as Lys. p. 114, 36.) *
eviidtokw (i. q. evdvm [cf. B. 56 (49)]); impf. mid.
eved.Ovaokdyunv ; to put on, clothe: twa moppipav, Mk. xv.
17 LT Tr WH; mid. to put on one’s self, be clothed in
[w. ace. B.191 (166); W.§ 32,5]: indriov, Lk. viii. 27
[RGLTr mrg.]; mopdvpav, Biooor, Lk. xvi. 19; (28.
i. 24; xiii. 18; Prov. xxix. 39 (xxxi. 21); Judith ix. 1;
Sir. |. 11; Joseph. b. j. 7, 2).*
évSukos, -ov, (dikn), according to right, righteous, just :
Ro. iii: 8; Heb. ii. 2.. (Pind., Trag., Plat.) *
év-Sounors (evdopeo to build in), and evdaunows T Tr WH
({see WH. App. p. 152] Sapdw to build), -ews, 7, that
which is built in, (Germ. Hinbau): tov reixous, the mate-
rial built into the wall, i. e. of which the wall was com-
posed, Rev. xxi. 18; elsewhere only in Joseph. antt. 15,
9, 6, of a mole built into the sea to form a breakwater,
and so construct a harbor.* .
év-Sofdf{w : 1 aor. pass. evebo€acOnv ; to make évdo€os, to
glorify, adorn with glory, (Vulg. glorifico, clarifico) : in
pass. 2 Th. i. 12; evdo€acOjva ev rots dyios, that his glory
may be seen in the saints, i. e. in the glory, blessedness,
conferred on them, 2 Th. i. 10. (Ex. xiv. 48 Ezek.
XXvViii. 22, etc.; Sir. xxxviii. 6. Not found in prof. auth.) *
€vSokos, -ov, (Sdéa), held in good or in great esteem, of
high repute; a. illustrious, honorable, esteemed, (Xen.,
Plat., sqq.) : 1 Co. iv. 10, (thus in Sept. for 3333, 1 S. ix.
6; xxii. 14; Is. xxiii. 8, etc.; Sir. xi. 6; xliv. 1, ete.).
b. notable, glorious: ta évSoéa, wonderful deeds, [A. V.
glorious things], Lk. xiii. 17; (for 1879), Ex. xxxiv. 10).
<. splendid: of clothing, [A. V. gorgeous], Lk. vii. 25;
figuratively i. q. free from sin, Eph. v. 27.*
évSupa, -tos, 7d, (evduw), garment, raiment, (Gell., Lact.
indumentum) : Mt. vi. 25, 28; Lk. xii. 23; spec. a cloak,
an outer garment: Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 11 sq. (€v8. ydapou a
wedding garment) ; Mt. xxviii. 3; 5 mpoBdrov, sheep’s
clothing, i. e. the skins of sheep, Mt. vii. 15 [al. take
the phrase figuratively: ‘with a lamb-like exterior ’].
([Strab. 3, 3, 7]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 7; [antt. 3, 7, 2];
rlut. Sol. 8; Sept. for w25.) *
év-Suvapdw, -@; 1 aor. éveduvdpaca; Pass., [pres. impv.
Z pers. sing. évduvdayov, 2 pers. plur. évduvayotaGe |; impf.
3 pers. sing. éveduvayovro; 1 aor. éveduvapwOnv; (fr. év-
Bvvapos equiv. to 6 ev Suvajer dv); to make strong, endue
with strength, strengthen: twa, Phil. iv. 12; 1 Tim.1.12; 2
214
EVOMLNTLG
Tim. iv. 17; passively, to receive strength, be strengthened,
increase in strength: Acts ix. 22; éy rw, in anything, 2
Tim. ii. 1; €v xvpia, in union with the Lord, Eph. vi. 10;
with dat. of respect, 17 miores, Ro. iv. 20; aad avéeveias,
to recover strength from weakness or disease, Heb. xi.
34 RG; (in a bad sense, be bold, headstrong, Ps. li. (lii.)
9; [Judg. vi. 34 Alex., Ald., Compl.; 1 Chr. xii. 18
Alex.; Gen. vii. 20 Aq.]; elsewhere only in eccl. writ.).*
év-Sivw [2 ‘Tim. iii. 6] and év-dvo [Mk. xv. 17 RG];
1 aor. evedvoa; 1 aor. mid. éveducaunv; pf. ptep. mid. or
pass. evdedupevos; Sept. for ¥27; as in the classics, 1.
trans. (prop. to envelop in, to hidein), to put on: twa Tt,
a. in a literal sense, to put on, clothe with a garment: Mt.
xxvil. 31; [with rua alone, ib. 28 L WH mrg.]; Mk. xv.
17 RG, 20; Lk. xv. 22. Mid. to put on one’s self, be
clothed with: ri |B. 191 (166); ef. W. § 32,5], Mt. vi. 25;
Lk. xii. 22; [viii. 27 IT WH Tr txt.];, Mk. vi. 9} Acts
xii. 21; evdedupevos with ace. of a thing, Mk. i. 6; Mt.
Zxil. 11 '[B.148/(029)') ch Wo St32)2) shew. ite
6; xix. 14; évdvodpuevos (opp. to yupvds) clothed with a
body, 2 Co. v. 3, on which pass.see yé, 3 c., (Aristot. de
anima 1, 3 fin. p. 4075, 23 wWuxny..
b. in metaphorical phrases: of armor fig. so called,
evdvecOa Ta Orda [L mrg. épya] tod dwrds, Ro. xiii. 12;
THY TavoTtAiav Tov Oeod, Tov Oapaxa THs dikavoovens, Eph.
vi. 11, 14; Oapaxa rictews, 1 Th. v. 8 (with double acc.,
of obj. and pred., @apaxa Sixaocvrnv, Sap. v. 19 (18),
(ef. Is. lix. 17]; prop. ézAa, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 18; tov Aa-
paka,an.1,8,3). tobe furnished with anything, adorned
with a virtue, as if clothed with a garment, évivecOat
apOapciav, abavaciav, 1 Co. xv. 53 sq.; [omdayyxva oiktup-
pod, Col. iii. 12]; Svvapuv, Lk. xxiv. 49, (éoxvv, Is. li. 9;
[lit 1; dvvapev, etrpemescav, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 1; aiaydvnr,
Psvixxxivin(xxxv.) 265 cxmxicn (exxxii) Si; 1) Macena:
293 Stxacocvynv, Job xxix. 14; Ps. exxxi. (Cxxxii.) 9;
aartnpiay, ibid. 16; etc.]; Sve adxnv, Hom. Il. [9, 231];
19, 36; €vyvoOae and éemevyvcGar adxny, Il. 20, 381; Od.
9, 214 ete.; many similar exx. in Hebr. and Arabic,
ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. 742; Lat. induere novum in-
. evdverGar odpa).
genium, Liv. 3, 33); Tdv Kawov dvOpwror, i.e. a new pur-
pose and life, Eph. iv. 24; Col. iii. 10; "Incotv Xpurrdy,
to become so possessed of the mind of Christ as in
thought, feeling, and action to reremble him and, as it
were, reproduce the life he lived, Ro. xiii. 14; Gal. iii.
27; (sim.larly the Greeks and Romans said [ef. W. 30],
rov Tapkivov évdverOa, Dion. t.al. 11, 5,5; pias rov
otpatiatny evedy tov coduorny, Liban. ep. 9683; prodi-
torem et hostem induere, Tac. ann. 16, 28; ef. Fritzsche
on Rom. iii. p. 143 sq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 317 sqq. ;
[Gataker, Advers. misc. 1, 9 p. 223 sqq.]). 2. in-
trans. to creep into, insinuate one’s self into; to enter: év-
Suvovtes eis Tas oikias, 2’ Tim. iii. 6. [Comp.: én-evdde. ]*
év-Sucts, -ews, 7, (evdtw), a putting on, (Germ. das An-
ziehen, der Anzug): tv ipatiov, 1 Pet. iii. 3; (clothing,
Job xli. 4; Athen. 12 p. 550¢.; Dio Cass. 78, 3; an
entering, Plat. Crat. p. 419 ¢.).*
év-Stw, see evduva.
év-Sipnors, see evddpunors.
eveyKa
éveykw, see hepa.
év-€5pa, -as, 7, (fr. év and dpa a seat), a lying in wait,
ambush: Acts xxiii. 16 [Rect 76 évedpov,q. v.]; évedpav
moverv, Acts xxv. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., sqq.) *
éveSpevw; (evedpa); to lie in wait for, to lay wait for,
prepare a trap for: twa, a person, Lk. xi. 54 [G om. éved.
ait., T om. airdv]; Acts xxiii. 21. (Thuc., Xen., sqq.;
Sept.) *
€veSpov, -ov, 7d, i. g. evedpa, a lying in wait, an ambush :
Acts xxiii. 16 Rec.* (Sept.; Sap. xiv. 21; Sir. xi. 29; 1
Mace. ix. 40, etc.; not found in prof. auth.) *
év-eukéw, -@: 1 aor. éveiAnaa; to roll in, wind in: twa
tu, one in anything, Mk. xv. 46. (1S. xxi. 9; [ Aristot.
mund. 4 p. 396%, 14; Philo], Plut., Artemid., Philostr.,
al;)*
év-eyt; (eiut); [fr. Hom. down]; to be in: ra evdvra
what is within, i. e. the soul, Lk. xi. 41 (equiv. to 70
écwbev tuav, vs. 39); this is to be regarded as an ironi-
cal exhortation (similar to that in Amos iv. 4) adjusted
to the Pharisees’ own views: ‘as respects your soul (ra
evivra ace. absol.), give alms (to the needy), and behold
all things are clean unto you (in your opinion)’; cf.
Bornemann ad loc. Most interpreters think ra évdvra
to be the things that are within the cup and the platter (obj.
ace. after ddre, with éAenu. as pred. acc. ], and to be spoken
of unjustly acquired riches to be expended in charity.
FStill others (following the same construction) take ra
éevévra (sc. Sovvac) in the sense of the things within your
power, (R. V.mrg. which ye can); cf. Steph. Thesaur.
s. v. col. 1055 a.; but see Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.] More-
over, in the opinion of many ém, [1 Co. vi. 5 GLT Tr
WH; Jas. i. 17;] Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11 ete., is con-
tracted from éveort; but see below under év.*
évexa (only before consonants [ Rec. three times (Grsb.
twice) out of twenty-five]), and evecey [R G 19 times, L
(out of 26) 21 times, Tr 20, WH 18, T17], or in a form
at first Ionic etvexev (Lk. iv. 18 [Rec. €v.; xviii. 29 T
WH; Acts xxviii. 20 TWH]; 2 Co. iii. 10 [RG Lmrg.
év.]; vil. 12 [RG], both the last forms alike before con-
sonants and vowels [ef. s. v. N,v; W.§5,1d.1; B. 10
(9); Kriiger (dialects) § 68, 19,1; WH. App. p. 173]),
a prep. foll. by the genitive, on account of, for the sake
of, for: Mt. v. 10 sq.; xvi. 25; xix. 29; Mk. viii. 35; Lk.
vi. 22; Acts xxviii. 20; Ro. viii. 36; 2 Co. iii. 10; évexev
rovtou, for this cause, therefore, Mt. xix. 5; rovrwy, Acts
xxvi. 21; rivos €vexev, for what cause, wherefore, Acts
xix. 32; before rov with inf. expressing purpose [ W. 329
(309); B. 266 (228)], 2 Co. vii. 12; of eivexev, because,
Lk. iv. 18; cf. Meyer ad loc.
évevqykovTa, See evvevnKovTa.
éveds, S€e evveds.
évépyeta, -as, 9, (evepyns, q. V-), working, efficiency; in
the N. T. used only of superhuman power, whether of
God or of the devil; of God: Eph. iii. 7; Col. ii. 12;
f) evépyeta H evepyoupern, Col. i. 29; with a relative inter-
vening, évepyeiv évépyecav, Eph. i. 19 sq.3 Kar’ evepyevav
év pérpw évds éxdotov pépovs, acc. to the working which
agrees with the measure of (is commensurate with)
215
evevAOYEW
every single part, Eph. iv. 16; xara r. évépyecav rod
dvivacGa avrév «rd. according to the efliciency by which
he is able to subject all things to himself, Phil. iii. 21.
evepy. TOU Satava, 2 Th. ii. 9; mavns, the power with
which error works, ys. 11. (Sap. vii. 17, ete. ; 2 Mace.
iii. 29; rs mpovoias, 3 Mace. iv. 21; not found in Sept.;
in the classics first in Aristot.; [on évépyeta, EvEpyely,
of diabolic influences, cf. Miiller on Barn. ep. 19, 6].)
[SyNn. see dvvayus, fin. | *
évepyéw, -@; 1 aor. evnpynaa; pf. éevnpynxa (Eph. i. 20
LT Wiitxt. Trmrg.); (evepyds [see evepyns]) ; pF
intrans. to be operative, be at work, put forth power: foll.
by ev with dat. of pers., Mt. xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14; Eph. ii.
2; foll. by the dat. of advantage (dat. com.; [cf. Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. as below ]), to work for one, aid one, ets rt,
unto (the accomplishing of) something [W. 397 (371)]:
eis drooToAny, unto the assumption [or discharge ] of the
apostolic office; eis ra €6vn, i. q. ets atootodny [cf. W.
§ 66, 2d.; B. § 147, 8] trav edvav, Gal. ii. 8. 2. trans.
to effect: ri, 1 Co. xii. 11; [Eph. i. 11]; evepyeiv évép-
year, Eph. i. 19 sq.; ti ev tun, dat. of pers., 1 Co. xii. 6
[B..3124). (109) iis; Gall. tit: Sy ) Philiv 13! 3. Mid.,
pres. evepyovpar; [impf. evnpyovpnv]; (not found in the
O. T. or in prof. auth., and in the N. T. used only by
Paul and James [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below]); it
is used only of things (cf. W. § 38, 6 fin.; [B. 193 (167)]),
to display one’s activity, show one’s self operative: [2 Th.
ii. 7 (see pvortnptoy, 2 fin.)]; foll. by év with dat. of the
thing, where, Ro. vii. 5; év with dat. of the condition,
2Co.i.6; ¢v with dat. of pers. in whose mind a thing
shows itself active, 2 Co. iv. 12; Eph. iii. 20; Col. i. 29;
1 Th. ii. 13; foll. by dca with gen. of thing, Gal. v. 6.
In Jas. v. 16 evepyoupevn does not have the force of an
adj., but gives the reason why the denots of a righteous
man has outward success, viz. as due to the fact that
it exhibits its activity [‘“‘works”] (inwardly), i. e. is
solemn and earnest. (The act. [and pass. ] in Grk. writ.
fr. Aristot. down.) [Onthis word cf. (besides Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. ii. 8; v. 6) Fritzsche and Vaughan on Ro. vii. 5;
Ellic. on Gal. ii. 8.] *
évepynpa, -ros, Td, (evepyew), thing wrought; effect, op-
eration: plur. [R. V. workings], 1 Co. xii. 6; with the ad-
dition of the epexeget. gen. duvduewr, ibid. 10. (Polyb.,
Diod., Antonin., [al.].) *
évepytis, -€s, (1. q. evepyos, equiv. to 6 dv ev TO epy@
[Eng. at work]), active: Heb. iv. 12; by a somewhat in-
congruous fig., in 1 Co. xvi. 9 a @vpa évepyns is spoken
of, ‘an opportunity for the working of the gospel’;
evepy- yivomat €v Tevt, in something, Philem. vs. 6. ([Aris-
tot. ], Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) *
év-eoTas, See evioTnL.
év-evdoyéw, -@: 1 fut. pass. évevAoynOjoopa; (the prep.
seems to refer to the pers. on whom the blessing is
conferred ; cf. Germ. einsegnen) ; to confer benefits on,
to bless: pass. foll. by év with dat. of that in which lies
the ground of the blessing received or expected, Acts
iii. 25 (where the Rec. gives ré omépy., dat. of the in-
strument; [WH read the simple evAoy.]); Gal. iii. 8
evexX@
where Rec.>*¢? has the simple evAoy. (Gen. xii. 3;
KVilil. 18; xxvi. 4 Alex.; [Ps. lxxi. (ixxii:))17 Ald.,
Compl.]; Sir. xliv. 21; not found in prof. auth.) *
év-e-xw; impf. evetyov; [pres. pass. évéxyouar]; to have
within, to hold in; a. pass. to be held, be entangled,
be held ensnared, with a dat. of the thing in which one
is held captive, — very often in Grk. writ., both lit. (as
7 mayn, Hdt. 2, 121, 2) and fig. (as dyyeAia, Pind. Pyth.
8, 69; pidormuia, Eur. Iph. A. 527; xaxd, Epict. diss. 3,
22, 93): (vy@ Sovdelas, Gal. v. 1; [6Atpeow, 2 Th. i. 4
WH mrg.], (aceBeiats, 3 Mace. vi. 10).
to be enraged with, set one’s self against, hold a grudge
against some one: Mk. vi. 19; Lk. xi. 53, (Gen. xlix. 23);
the expression is elliptical, and occurs in full (x 6A ov rwi
to have anger in one’s self against another) in Hdt. 1, 118;
8,27; 6,119; see a similar ellipsis under mpocéyo. [In
this last case the ellipsis supplied is roy voov, W. 593
(552); B. 144 (126); Meyer et al. would supply the
same after évéyew in Mk. and Lk. ll. ce. and render the
phrase to have (an eye) on, watch with hostility; but
De Wette, Bleek, al. agree with Grimm. Many take the
expression in Lk. ].c. outwardly, to press upon (R. V.
txt.); see Steph. Thes. s. v.; L. and 8S. s. v.; Hesych.
evexer* pynotkakele Ey KELT at. | *
év0a-Se, adv., (fr. €va and the enclitic 5¢; Kriiger § 9,
8, 1 and 2; [cf. W. 472 (440); B. 71 (62)]), [fr. Hom.
down]; a. here: Lk. xxiv.41; Acts x.18; xvi. 28; xvii.
6; xxv. 24. b. hither: Jn. iv. 15 sq.; Acts xxv. 17.*
évOev, adv., (fr. €v and the syllable dev, indicating the
place whence), hence: Mt. xvii. 20 LTTrWH; Lk.
xvi. 26 GLTTrWH. [From Hom. down.]*
évOupéopat, -odpzar; a depon. pass.; 1 aor. ptep. évOv-
pnOecis; fr. Aeschyl. down, with the object now in the
gen: now in the ace.; cf. Matthiae § 349, ii. p. 823;
Kuhner § 417 Anm. 9, ii. p. 310; [Jelf § 485]; Kriiger
§ 47, 11, 1 and 2; (fr. ev and Oupds); to bring to mind,
revolve in mind, ponder: ri, Mt. i. 20; ix. 4; to think,
to deliberate: mepi twos, about anything, Acts x. 19
Ree. (So also Sap. vi. 16; Plat. rep. 10 p. 595 a.; Isoc.
ep. 9 p. 614, § 9 Bekk.) [Comp.: d:-evOvpéopat. | *
évOdpnors, -ews, 7, a thinking, consideration: Acts xvii.
29 [A. V. device]; plur. thoughts: Mt. ix. 4; xii. 25;
Heb. iv. 12 [here Lmrg.sing.]. (Rare in the classics;
Hippocr., Eur., Thuc., Leian.) *
év i. q. evi, the accent being thrown back, same as ey,
used adverbially [W. § 50, 7 N. 2] for €veore, is in, is
among, has place, is present, (Hom. Od. 21, 218; Thue.
2,40): Gal. iii. 28 (three times); Col. iii. 11; Jas. i. 17;
with addition of év tuiv, 1 Co. vi. 5 (where Ree. éorwy) ;
in prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. on very often, it can
be, is possible, is lawful; [here some would place Jas. 1. ¢.].
The opinion of many [e. g. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 642;
Meyer on Gal. 1. c.; ef. Ellic. ibid.] that é is a con-
tracted form for éveors is opposed by the like use of
mapa, ava, which can hardly be supposed to be con-
tracted from mdpeor, aveort; cf. Kriiger § 9,11,4; W.
80 (77); Gotiling, Lehre v. Accent ete. p. 380; [Chan-
dler § 917 sq.; B. 72 (64); Lob. Path. Element. ii. 315 ].*
b. evéxyw rwi,
216
EVVEVNKOVTAEVVER
éviauTés, -ov, 6, @ year: Jn. xi. 49, 51; xviii. 13; Acts
xi. 26; xviii. 11; Jas. v.17; Rev. ix. 15; plur., of the
Jewish years of Jubilee, Gal. iv. 10 [cf. Ellic. ad loe.];
moteiv euavrov, to spend a year, Jas. iv. 13; dma&é tov em-
avrov, Heb. ix. 7 (like émraxis ths nuépas, Lk. xvii. 4),
[ef. W. § 30,8 N. 1; Kriiger § 47,10, 4]; xar’ émavurdy,
yearly, Heb. ix. 25; x. 1,3, (Thue. 1, 93; Xen. oec. 4,6;
an. 3, 2, 12); in a wider sense, for some fixed and defi-
nite period of time: Lk. iv. 19 (fr. Is. lxi. 2), on which
pass. see dextdés. [From Hom. down. ]*
[Syn. éviaurdés, €ros: originally év. seems to have de-
noted (yet cf. Curtius § 210) a year viewed as a cycle or
period of time, @r. as a division or sectional portion of time.]
év-lornp.: pf. eveotnka, ptcp. eveatnxas (Heb. ix. 9),
and by syncope éveoras; fut. mid. évornoopar; to place
in or among; to put in; in pf., plpf., 2 aor., and in mid.
(prop. as it were to stand in sight, stand near) to be upon,
impend, threaten: 2 Th. ii. 2; fut. mid. 2 Tim. iii. 1.
pf. ptep. close at hand, 1 Co. vii. 26; as often in Grk.
writ. (in the grammarians 6 éveoras sc. xpdvos is the
present tense [cf. Philo de plant. Noé § 27 rpipepiys xpdvos,
ds els Tov TrapeAndvO6Ta Kal eveaT@ta Kal péAdovTa Témve-
vba mepvxerv |), present: 6 katpos 6 eveatas, Heb. ix. 9; ra
eveot@ta opp. to ra peAdovta, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22;
6 éveoTas aidy movnpéds in tacit contrast with r@ wéAAorre
aia, Gal. i. 4, (Basil. ep. 57 ad Melet. [iii. p. 151 ¢. ed.
Benedict. ] apeduza diddypara 7 €pdd.a wpds Te Tov eveat@ta
ai@va kat Tov peAAovra). [Many (so R. V.) would adopt
the meaning present in 2 Th. ii. 2 and 1 Co. vii. 26 also;
but cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. e.] *
év-toxvw; 1 aor. évicxvoa; [cf. B. 145 (127)]; AB
intrans. to grow strong, to receive strength: Acts ix. 19
[here WH Tr mrg. émoyv6n]; (Aristot., Theophr., Diod.,
Sept.). 2. trans. to make strong, to strengthen, (2 S.
xxii. 40; Sir. 1.4; Hippocer. leg. p. 2, 26 6 xpdvos tavra
mavra euoxver) ; to strengthen one in soul, to inspirit:
Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ].*
évk-, see eyx- and s. v. ev, II. 3.
[év-pévw, see eupevw and s. v. ev, IIT. 3.]
évvatos or évatos (which latter form, supported by the
authority alike of codd. and of inscrr., has been every-
where restored by LT Tr WH; cf. [s.v. N,v; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 80]; Kriiger § 24, 2,12; W.43; [found once
(Rev. xxi. 20) in Ree."*]), -arn, -arov, [fr. Hom. down],
ninth: Rev. xxi. 20; the évarn dpa, spoken of in Mt. xx.
5; xxvii. 45 sq.; Mk. xv. 33 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 44; Acts iii.
1; x. 3, 30, corresponds to our 3-o’clock in the after-
noon; for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the
twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the
first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth
with us. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Hour.]*
évvéa, of, ai, ra, [fr. Hom. down], nine: Lk. xvii. 17;
see the foll. word.*
évvevnxovra-evvea, more correctly évevikovta evvea (i. e.
written separately, and the first word with a single y, as
by LT Tr WH;; cf. [s.v. N,v; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; WH.
App. p. 148]; W. 43 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue.
p- 95), ninety-nine: Mt. xviii. 12sq.; Lk. xv. 4, 7.*
> f
€VVEOS
évveés, more correctly eveds (LT Tr WH [ef. the pre-
ceding word ]), -ov, 6, (it seems to be identical with dvews
i. q. unused dvavos, dvaos, fr. dw, avw to cry out, hence
without sound, mute), dumb, mute, destitute of the power
of speech, (Plat., Aristot.): Is. lvi. 10, ef. Prov. xvii. 28 ;
évedv i) Suvdpevov Aadjoa, of an idol, Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.)
40; unable to speak for terror, struck dumb, astounded :
so elarnkeroay eveoi, stood speechless (Vulg. stabant stupe-
facti), Acts ix.7; Hesych. euSpovrndevres: eveol yevdpevot.
Cf. Alberti, Glossar. in N. T. p. 69. In the same sense
dmnvedbn, Dan. iv. 16 Theodot., fr. amevedw.*
év-vetw: impf. evevevov; to nod to, signify or express by
a nod or sign: rwi tt, Lk. i. 62. (Arstph. in Babyloniis
frag. 58 [i.e. 22 ed. Brunck, 16 p. 455 Didot]; Lceian.
dial. meretr. 12,1; with dpadyo added, Prov. vi. 13; x.
OD)
évvora, -as, 7, (vods) ; 1. the act of thinking, consid-
eration, meditation; (Xen., Plat.,al.). 2. a thought, no-
tion, conception; (Plat. Phaedo p. 73 ¢., etc.; esp. in phil-
osoph. writ., as Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; Acad. 2, 7 and 10;
Epict. diss. 2, 11, 2 sq., etc.; Plut. plac. philos. 4, 11, 1;
Diog. Laért. 3, 79). 3. mind, understanding, will ;
manner of thinking and feeling ; Germ. Gesinnung, (Eur.
Hel. 1026; Diod. 2, 30 var.; rocavtyy évvoray eurorety TNL,
Isoc. p. 112 d.; typnoov thy €unv Boudry Kal évvotay, Prov.
iii. 21; huddooew evvoray ayabny, v. 2): so 1 Pet. iv. 1;
plur. with xapdias added (as in Prov. xxiii. 19), Heb.
iv. 12 [A. V. intents of the heart], cf. Sap. ii. 14.*
y-vopos, -ov, (vdpos) ; 1. bound to the law; bound
by the law: Xpior, or more correctly Xpeorod LT Tr
WH, 1 Co. ix. 21 [cf. B. § 132, 23]. 2. as in Grk. writ.
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl. down, lawful, regular: Acts xix. 39
[on which see Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for
1878, p. 295; Wood, Ephesus etc., App. p. 38].*
tvvuxos, -ov, (vvE), nightly, nocturnal, (Hom., Pind.,
Tragg.). Neut. adverbially, by night: Mk. i. 35, where
LT Tr WH have neut. plur. évvvxa [cf. W. 463 (432) ;
B. § 128, 2].*
év-ouxéw, -; fut. evorow; 1 aor. évexnoa; Sept. for
Iw); to dwell in; in the N. T. with & ru, dat. of pers.
in one, everywhere metaphorically, to dwell in one and
influence him (for good) : év rw, in a person’s soul, of the
Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 11; 2 Tim. i. 14; of miorts, 2 Tim.
i. 5; [of sin, Ro. vii. 17 T WH (for simple oixeiv)]; ev
ipiv, in your assembly, of Christian truth, Col. ili. 16; &
avrois, in a Christian church, of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, ef. 1
Co. iii. 16; [al. understand the phrase in Col. and Co.
ll. ec. internally, “in your hearts”; but see Meyer].*
év-6vra, Td, See eveypt.
év-opxitw; to adjure, put under oath, solemnly entreat,
with two acc., one of him who is adjured, one of him by
whom he is adjured [B. 147 (128)]: 1 Th.v.27L T Tr
WH, for RG épxitw, [on the inf. foll. ef. B. 276 (237)].
Elsewhere not found except once [twice] in mid. évop-
xiCoua in Boeckh, Inscrr. ii. p. 42, no. 1933 ; [and Joseph.
antt. 8, 15, 4 Dind., also Bekk.]; the subst. évopxiopds
occurs in Synes. [1413 b. Migne]; once also évopxéw in
Schol. ad Leian. Catapl. c. 23 évopxd oe xara Tod rarpés ;
217
EvOYOs
[to which Soph. Lex. s. v. adds Porph. Adm. 208, 18
evopK® oe eis Tov Gedy iva amédOns }.*
évotys, -nTos, 7, (fr. eis, évds, one), unity (Aristot.,
Plut.) ; i. q. unanimity, agreement: with gen., ris rictews,
Eph. iv. 13; rod mvedpartos, ib. vs. 3.*
év-oxA€éw, -@; [pres. pass. ptep. evoyAovpevos]; (dyAEo,
fr. 6xyAos a crowd, annoyance); in the classies fr. Ar
stph., Xen., Plat. on; to excite disturbance, to trouble,
annoy, (ev, ina person) ; in Grk. writ. foll. by both rid
and rwi; pass. with dad twos, Lk. vi. 18 T Tr WH;
absol. of the growth of a poisonous plant, fig. represent-
ing the man who corrupts the faith, piety, character, of
the Christian church: Heb. xii. 15 fr. Deut. xxix. 18
after cod. Alex. which gives évoyAy for év yoAR, which
agreeably to the Hebr. text is the reading of cod. Vat.
(Gen. xlviii.1; 1S. xix.14, ete.) [Comp.: map-evoxdéo. |*
Evoxos, -ov, 1. q. 6 evexdpuevos, one who is held in any-
thing, so that he cannot escape; bound, under obligation,
subject to, liable: with gen. of the thing by which one is
bound, dovAetas, Heb. ii. 15 ; used of one who is held by,
possessed with, love and zeal for anything; thus réav
BiBXiov, Sir. prolog. 9; with dat. rots épwrckois, Plut. ;
[on supposed distinctions in meaning betw. the constr.
w. the gen. and w. the dat. (e. g. ‘the constr. with the dat.
expresses liability, that with the gen. carries the mean-
ing further and implies either the actual or the right-
ful hold.’ Green) see Schafer on Demosth. v. p. 323;
cf. W. § 28, 2; B. 170 (148)]. As in Grk. writ., chiefly
in a forensic sense, denoting the connection of a person
either with his crime, or with the penalty or trial, or with
that against whom or which he has offended; soa.
absol. guilty, worthy of punishment: Lev. xx. 9, 11,13, 16,
27; 1 Mace. xiv. 45. b. with gen. of the thing by the
violation of which guilt is contracted, guilty of anything:
TOU O@paros kK. TOD aipatos Tov Kupiov, guilty of a crime
committed against the body and blood of the Lord, 1 Co.
xi. 27 [see Meyer; W. 202 (190sq.)]} mavr@v, sc. evrad-
pdrov, Jas. ii. 10; of €voxoi gov, Is. liv.17. c¢. with gen.
of the crime: al@viov duaptnuatos [an eternal sin], Mk. iii.
29 LT Tr txt. WH; (trav Braiov, Plat. legg. 11, 914 e.;
kromjs, Philo de Jos. § 37; tepoovAias, 2 Mace. xiii. 6;
Aristot. oec. 2 [p. 1349%, 19], and in other exx.; but much
oftener in the classics with dat. of the crime; cf. Passow or
[L. and S.]s.v.). d. with gen. of the penalty : @avarov,
Mk. xiv. 64; Mt. xxvi. 66; Gen. xxvi. 11; alwviou xpicews,
Mk. iii. 29 Rec.; Seopod [al. dat.], Dem. p. 1229, 11. e.
with dat. of the tribunal; liable to this or that tribunal i. e.
to punishment to be imposed by this or that tribunal:
Th Kpicet, TO cvvedpio, Mt. v. 21 sq.; €voxos ypaPy, to be
indicted, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 64; cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr.
ii. 1 p. 340 sq.; [W. 210 (198)]. f. by ause unknown
to Grk. writ. it is connected with ets and the acc. of the
place where the punishment is to be suffered: eis 7. yee
vav Tod trupés, a pregn. constr. [W. 213 (200); 621 (577) ]
(but ef. B. 170 (148) [who regards it as a vivid circumlo-
cution for the dat.; ef. Green, Crit. Notes (ad loc.) ‘liable
as far’ in respect of penal consequence ‘as the fiery G.”])
viz. to go away or be cast into etc. Mt. v. 22.*
évTadpa
évr- see éum- and s. v. év, III. 3 fine print.
évradpa, -ros, 7d, (evréAXopar [see evrehAAw]), a precept:
plur., Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; Col. ii. 22. (Is. xxix. 13
8iSdoKovres evtdd\para avOpwrev ; [Job xxiii. 11,12]. Not
found in prof. auth.; [W. 25].)*
évrapidtw; 1 aor. inf. évraduacat; to see to ra evradua
(fr. év and rados), i. e. to prepare a body for burial, by
the use of every requisite provision and funereal adorn-
ment, to wit, baths, vestments, flowers, wreaths, per-
fumes, libations, etc.; to lay out a corpse (Lat. pollin-
gere): Mt. xxvi. 12; Jn. xix. 40. (Gen. 1. 2 sq.; Anthol.
11, 125, 5; Plut. de esu carn. 1, 5, 7 mor. p. 995 c.) *
évradiacpds, -0v, 6, (evragidtw, q. v-), preparation of a
body for burial: Mk. xiv.8; Jn. xii. 7. (Schol. ad Eur.
Phoen. 1654; [Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1009].) *
év-ré\Aw: (TéEAN@ Equiv. to reA€w) ; several times in
the poets (Pind. Olymp. 7, 73) and the later writers
(évréradxe, Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 5 [but Bekk. évrerad Oat];
xabas évreraAtai cot, passively, Sir. vii. 31); generally,
and so always in the N. T., depon. mid. évreAAopat; fut.
évreAodpat; 1 aor. everechdunv; pf. 3 pers. sing. évréradrat
(Acts xiii. 47) ; Sept. very often for M¥; to order, com-
mand to be done, enjoin: mepi twos, Heb. xi. 22; éverei-
Aaro Aéyor, Mt. xv.4 [RT]; rvi, Actsi. 2; [with Aéyov
added, Mt. xvii. 9]; with otrw added, Acts xiii. 47; xaOas,
(Mk. xi.6 RL mrg.]; Jn. xiv. 31 RGT; foll. by inf. Mt.
xix. 7; ruvi, foll. by inf. [B. § 141, 2; 275 (237)], In. viii.
5 Ree.; tui, iva [cf. B. 237 (204)], Mk. xiii. 34 (Joseph.
antt. 7, 14,5; 8,14, 2); revi re, Mt. xxviii. 20; Mk. x. 3;
Jn. xv. 14,173 ri wepi twos, gen. of pers., Mt. iv. 6; Lk.
iv. 10, fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11 sq. diabqxnv évré\XeoOat mpéds
tiva, to command to be delivered to one, Heb. ix. 20; cf.
eveteihato av’t@ mpos Aadv adtod, Sir. xlv. 3; the phrase
évtéAANeo Gat (rivi) SuaOnknv occurs also in Josh. xxiii. 16;
Judg. ii. 20; Jer. xi. 4; Ps. ex. (exi.) 9, but in another
sense, as appears from the full expression dcaOjxnv, qv
évereikato tpiv moetv, Deut. iv. 13. [SYN. see xedevo,
fin. ] *
éevreiOev, adv. of place, from this place, hence, (as éxet-
Gev thence): Mt. xvii. 20 RG; Lk. iv. 9; xiii. 31; xvi.
26 Rec.; Jn. ii. 16; [vii. 3]; xiv. 31; xviii. 36; évredOev
kK. evtevdev, on the one side and the other, on each side: Jn.
xix. 18; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. [cf. Num. xxii. 24; Dan. xii.
5 Theodot.]; metaph. hence, i. e. from that cause or ori-
gin, from this source, i. q. éx tovrovu [see ék, II. 8], Jas. iv.
1 [W. 161 (152); B. 400 (342)].*
ev-reviis, -ews, 7, (€vrvyxdve, q. v.), a falling in with,
meeting with, (ai trois Anerais évrevEers, Plat. politic.
p- 298d.) ; an interview, a coming together, to visit, con-
verse, or for any other cause; that for which an interview
is he.d, a conference or conversation (Polyb., Diod., al.), a
petition, supplication (Diod. 16, 55; Joseph. antt. 15, 3,
8; Plut. Tib. Gracch. 11); used of prayer to God: 1
Tim. iv. 5; plur. [A. V. intercessions], 1 Tim. ii. 1, (Plut.
Num. 14 rovetoOar ras mpos rd Oeiov evrev&ers).
Séenors, fin. | *
ێvtipos, -ov, (ryun), held in honor, prized; hence, pre-
hous: dios, 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, (Is. xxviii. 16); honorable,
218
[S¥YN. see |
EVvTOS
noble, Lk. xiv. 8; rwi, dear to one, Lk. vii. 2; Evripopy
éxew tid to hold one dear or in honor, to value highly,
Phil. ii. 29. [(Soph., Plat., al.)]*
évToA, -As, 7, (evTeAX@ Or evTeAXopat, q. V-), fr. Pind.
and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 711, in the Pss. the
plur. €vrodai also for D°3DD ;_ an order, command, charge,
precept ; 1. univ. a charge, injunction: Lk. xv. 29;
evroAny auBdvew mapa twos, Jn. x. 18; mpds twa, Acts
xvii. 15; ANaBeww evrodas mrepi twos, Col. iv. 10; that which
is prescribed to one by reason of his office, évroAny éxew
foll. by inf., Heb. vii. 5; évroAjy diddvae wi, Jn. xiv. 31
LTr WH; with ri etry added, of Christ, whom God
commanded what to teach to men, Jn. xii. 49; 4 évroAn
avrov, of God, respecting the same thing, vs. 50. 2.
a commandment, i. e. a prescribed rule in accordance with
which a thing is done; a. univ. évyroAy capxixn [-ivg G
LT Tr WH], a precept relating to lineage, Heb. vii. 16;
of the Mosaic precept concerning the priesthood, Heb.
vil. 18; of a magistrate’s order or edict: évroAjy diddvat,
iva, Jn. xi.57. b. ethically; a. used of the command-
ments of the Mosaic law: 7 évroAy tov beov, what God
prescribes in the law of Moses, Mt. xv. 3, (and RG in
vs. 6); Mk. vii. 8sq.; esp. of particular precepts of this
law as distinguished from 6 véyos (the law) their body
or sum: Mt. xxii. 36,38; Mk. x. 5; xii. 28 sqq.; Ro. vii.
8-13; xiii. 9; Eph. vi. 2; Heb. ix. 19; xara r. évroAny,
according to the precept of the law, Lk. xxiii. 56; plur.,
Mt. [v. 19]; xxii. 40; Mk. x. 19; [Lk. xviii. 20]; typet
tas évrodds, Mt. xix. 17; mopeveoOa ev r. évtodais, Lk. i.
6; d vdopos Tov evrodar, the law containing the precepts,
Eph. ii. 15 (see ddéypa, 2). B. of the precepts of Jewish
tradition: évrodat dvépwmev, Tit. i. 14. y. univ. of the
commandments of God, esp. as promulgated in the Chris-
tian religion: 1 Jn. iii. 23; iv. 21; v. 3; éevroAny diddvat,
1 Jn. iii. 23 ; evroAny Exew, va, 1 Jn. iv. 21; évroAnv AaBeiv
mapa Tod matpds, 2 Jn. 4; tHpnors evroA@v Oeod, 1 Co. vii.
19; rypew Tas evrodds adrod, 1 Jn. ii. 3 sq.; ili. 22, 245 v.
2 [here L T Tr WI wotopev], 3; or tod Geov, Rev. xii.
17; xiv. 12; moveiy ras évto\ds avtov, Rev. xxii. 14 RG;
mepimateiv Kata Tas evToAds avtov, 2 Jn. 6; of those
things which God commanded to be done by Christ, Jn.
xv. 10°; of the precepts of Christ relative to the orderly
management of affairs in religious assemblies, i Co. xiv.
37 RGL Tr WH; of the moral precepts of Christ and
his apostles: évroArjy diddvat, a, Jn. xiii. 345; evrodAny
ypapew, 1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; [2 Jn. 5]; ras evrodds rnpeiv, Jn.
[xiv.15]; xv. 10°; yew ras evr. x. THpetv avtds, “habere
in memoria et servare in vita” (Augustine), Jn. xiv. 21;
avrn éotw 7 evt.wva, Jn. xv. 12, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 23. 9 evrodn,
collectively, of the whole body of the moral precepts of
Christianity: 1 Tim. vi. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 2, (thus
9 €vToAy Tov Geod, Polyc. ad Phil. 5).*
évtémtos, -ov, (romos), a dweller in a place; a resident or
native of a place: Acts xxi.12. (Sopa. 7, Plac., al.) *
epeds, adv., ([fr. év], opp. to éxras). within, inside: with
gen. evros tuav, within you, i. e. *n the midst of you, Lk.
xvii. 21, (€vrds airév, Xen. an. 1, 10, 3 [but see the
pass.]; évrds rovtwy, Hell. 2, 3, 19; al.) ; others, within
évT perro
you (i. e. in your souls), a meaning which the use of the
word permits (évrdés pou, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 4; cviii.
(cix.) 22,etce.; [Hippol. ref. haer. 5, 7.8; Petrus Alex.
ep. can. 5]), but not the context; 1d evrds, the inside,
Mt. xxiii. 26.*
év-rpérw; [Mid., pres. evrpemouar ; impf. éverperdunv] ;
2 aor. pass. éverpamny ; 2 fut. mid. [i. e. pass. with mid.
force, B. 52 (45) ] évrpamnoopat; prop. to turn about, so
in pass. even in Hom. ; ria, prop. to turn one upon him-
self, i. e. to shame one, 1 Co. iv. 14 (Diog. Laért. 2, 29 ;
Ael. v. h. 3,17; Sept.); pass. to be ashamed: 2 Th. iii.
14; Tit. ii. 8. Mid., reva, to reverence a person: Mt.
xt. 003) Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xviii. 2,45) xx. 133; Heb. xii. 9;
Ex. x. 3; Sap. ii. 10; Polyb. 9, 36,10; 30, 9, 2; @eous,
Diod. 19, 7; soin Grk. writ., esp. fr. Plut. on; the earlier
Greeks said évrpemea Gai twos ; so also Polyb. 9, 31, 6; [cf.
W. § 32,1 b.a.; B. 192 (166)].*
év-rpéw : [pres. pass. ptcp. evrpedpdpevos]; to nourish
in: Twa Tu, @ person in a thing; metaph. to educate,
form the mind : rois Aéyos THs Tiatews, 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; rots
vouas, Plat. lege. 7 p. 798 a.; Philo, vict. offer. § 10 sub
fin.; Tots iepois ypdupaor, Phil. leg. ad Gai. § 29 sub fin.*
€v-rpopos, -ov, (rpdpos, cf. euoBos), trembling, terrified :
Acts vii. 32 and xvi. 29 éyrp. yevdpevos, becoming tremu-
lous, made to tremble; Heb. xii. 21 [Tr mrg. WH mrg.
éxtpopos, q. v.]. (Sept.; 1 Mace. xiii. 2; Plut. Fab. 3.) *
év-tpomt, -75, 7), (€vTpema@, q. V-), Shame: mpos évtpomny
bpiv Neyo [or Aad@], to arouse your shame, 1 Co. vi. 5;
xv. 34. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 8, 20;
respect, reverence, Soph., Polyb., Joseph., al.) *
év-rpupdw, -@; (see rpupdw and tpudn) ; to live in lux-
ury, live delicately or luxuriously, to revel in: év tats
aratras [L Tr txt. WH mrg. dydrats, see adyamn, 2] atrav,
(on the meaning see dmdrn), 2 Pet. ii. 13 [ef. W. § 52, 4,
5]. (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 30; Diod. 19, 71; also to take de-
light in: év dyaOois, Is. lv. 2; with dat. of thing, 4 Mace.
viii. 7; Hdian. 3, 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.].) *
év-rvyxavo; 2 aor. evérvyov; generally with a dat.
either of pers. or of thing; 1. to light upon a person
or a thing, fall in with, hit upon, a person or a thing; so
often in Attic. 2. to go to or meet a person, esp. for
the purpose of conversation, consultation, or supplication,
(Polyb., Plut., Aelian, al.) : with the addition wepi twos,
gen. of person, for the purpose of consulting about a per-
son, Acts xxv. 24 [R. V. made suit]; to make petition:
everuxov TO kupig Kal EdenOnv avrod, Sap. viii. 21; évérvyov
T@ Baowe thy ardd\vow . . . airovpevor, 3 Mace. vi. 37;
hence, to pray, entreat: tmép with gen. of pers. to make
intercession for any one (the dat. of the pers. approached
in prayer being omitted, as evident from the context),
Ro. viii. 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, (foll. by wept with gen. of
person, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 56, 1); rwi kara twos, [to
plead with one against any one], to accuse one to any one,
Ro. xi. 2, ef. 1 Mace. viii. 32; x. 61, 63 sq.; xi. 25. (Not
found in Sept.) [Comp.: imep-evrvyydve. | *
év-tvAlgow: 1 aor. évervdréa ; pf. pass. ptep. évrervAuy-
pevos; toroll in, wrap in: twa cwddu, Mt. xxvii. 59 (evo.
Tr, [ev] o. WH); Lk. xxiii. 53; Ev. Nicod.c. 11 fin. to
219
€V@TrLOp
roll up, wrap togetner: pass. Jn. xx. 7.
692; nub. 987; Athen. 3 p. 106 sq.) *
év-Tumdw, -@: pf. pass. ptcp. évrerum@péevos; to engrave,
imprint (a figure) : [foll. by dat. (Ree. with év) ], 2 Co. iii.
7 [ef. W. 634 sq. (589) ]. (Aristot., Dio Cass., Plut., and
in earlier frag. in Athen.)*
év-vBpile: 1 aor. ptep. évyBpicas; to treat with con-
tumely: Heb. x. 29. (From Soph. on.) *
évurrvdtw (€vimmor, q. v.): to dream (Aristot. h. an. 4,
10, ete.), and dep. évummagouat (Hippocr., Plut. Brut. e.
24); so always in the Bible, for pon, with fut. pass.
evurvmacOnoona, and com. with aor. pass. évumndabny,
more rarely mid. évurveacdpny (Gen. xxxvii. 9; Judg. vii.
13); éwmma évummdtecda (in Sept. for niDi7N Don),
to dream (divinely suggested) dreams: Acts ii. 17 fr.
Joel iii. 1 (ii. 28); but the reading évumviors (évumnd-
¢ec@a) was long ago restored, which reading also cod.
Alex. gives in Joel. Metaph. to be bequiled with sensual
images and carried away to an impious course of conduct:
Jude 8.*
éviarviov, -ov, Td, (ev and Umvos, what appears in sleep;
fr. Aeschyl. down), a dream (Lat. insomnium), a vision
which presents itself to one in sleep: Acts ii. 17, on
which pass. see évurmatw. (Sept. for pyoN-) i
évomiov, neut. of the adj. éva@mos, -ov, (i. q. 6 ev art ov,
one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii.
11; prot évwmior, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets
the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)],
and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any
prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in
Sept. for *}°313 and 299, also for 33) and 339; among
N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the
Rey., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used
1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over
against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns
his eyes; a. prop.: etvat evar. tivos, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15;
[xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that efvae must be mentally supplied
before évamov, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix. 13; after orjvat,
Acts x. 30; é€otnxéeva, Rev. vii. 9; vill. 2; xi. 4; xil. 4;
Xx. 12; mapeotynxeva, Lk. i. 19; Acts iv. 10; ioravat,
Acts vi. 6; xcaOjcOa, Rev. xi. 16; @vpa dvewypevn ev.
twos, i. q. a door opened for one (see Oupa, c. y. [B. 173
(150)]), Rev. iii. 8; after verbs signifying motion to a
place: ridévas, Lk. v.18 ; dvaBaivew, Rev. viii. 4; Baddew,
Rev. iv. 10; mimrew or weceiv (of worshippers), Rey.
iv.10; v.8; [vii. 11]; mpooxuveiv, Lk. iv. 7; Rev. iii. 9;
xv. 4, [cf. B. u. s.; 147 (129); W. 214 (201)]. b. in
metaphorical phrases after verbs signifying motion:
Baordtew 7d dvopa...éevamiov eOvav (see Baotife, 3),
Acts ix. 15; oxavdada BadXew ever. tivos, to cast stum-
bling-blocks (incitements to sin) before one, Rev. ii. 14;
after mpocpxecOat, to go before one like a herald, Lk. i.
17; [after mpomopeverOa, Lk. i. 76 WH]. in phrases in
which something is supposed to be done by one while
standing or appearing in the presence of another (cf.
B. 176 (153)]: after apveicOa, Lk. xii. 9 (Lchm. éumpo-
abev) ; [dmapveicbat, ibid.]; dpodoyetv, Rev. iii. 5 [Ree.
efop.]; xatnyopeiv, Rev. xii. 10; [Gdew, Rev. xiv. 3];
(Arstph. Plut.
’Evas
xavyacGa, to come before God and glory, 1 Co. i. 29;
Stxaody éavrdv, Lk. xvi. 15. ec. ig. apud (with) ; in the
soul of any one: xapa yiverat évamiov tav ayyédov, Lk.
xv. 10 [al. understand this of God’s joy, by reverent
suggestion described as in the presence of the angels; cf.
ev oup. Vs. 7]; €ora cor Sd&a evar. TV ovvavaketmevor, Lk.
xiv. 10 [al. take this outwardly; cf. 2 below]; after
verbs of remembering and forgetting: eis pynpo-
avvov evar. (LT Tr WH éurpoobev) rod Geov, Acts x. 4;
prnoOnva ever. tT. Oeov, Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19; émde-
Anopevor évar. t. Oeov, Lk. xii. 6 [ef. B. § 134, 3]. 2
before one’s eyes; in one’s presence and sight or hearing ;
a. prop.: gayeivy evwm. twos, Lk. xxiv. 43; this same
phrase signifies a living together in Lk. xiii. 26 (2S.
xi. 13; 1 K. i. 25); onueta roe, Jn. xx. 303 dvaxpivew,
Lk. xxiii. 14; evar. roAA@v papriper, 1 Tim. vi. 12; add
LK. [v. 25]; viii. 47; Acts xix. 9, 19; xxvii. 35; [1 Tim.
v.20) 5:03) Ins 6:3) Rev. iii. 55) [xiii. 13-5xive' a0]. 4b.
metaph.: mriorw ye évomov tov Geov, have faith, satisfied
with this that it is not hidden from the sight of God,
Ro. xiv. 22; duapravew év. tivos (see duaptave ad fin.),
Lk. xv. 18, 21; esp. in affirmations, oaths, adjurations:
€vamtov Tov Geov, Tov Kupiov, etc., Gal. i. 20; 1 Tim. v. 21;
vi. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 14; iv.1. Hence those are said to do
something in the presence of one who have him present
to their thought, who set him before their mind’s eye:
mpowpapunv [mpoop. L T Tr WH] roév kvpiov evar. pov,
Acts ii. 25; ramewvotvcOa év. rov xupiov, Jas. iv. 10, (Sir.
ii. 17). . atthe instance of any one, by his power and
authority: Rev. xiii. 12, 14; xix.20. 4d. before the eyes
of one, i.e. if he turns his eyes thither: Heb. iv. 13 (where
ovx apavns évam. avrod is explained by the following
yupva ... tots pOadpois avtov; cf. Job xxvi. 6 yupvos 6
adns év@mtov avtov, before his look, to his view). e. be-
Sore one i.e. he looking on and judging, in one’s judg-
ment [W. 32; B.172 (150); § 133,14]: epavnoay evar.
aita@v @oel Anpos, Lk. xxiv. 11 (ef. Greek “Hpaxdeidy
Anpos mavra Soxei elvac); SO esp. évwmtov Tov GBeov, Tod
kuptov, after the foll. words: ra dpeord, 1 Jn. iii. 22;
BdedAvypa, Lk. xvi. 15; Sixacos, Lk. i. 6 (T Tr WH évav-
tiov); Acts iv. 19; Scxavotcba, Ro. iii. 20; evapectos,
Heb. xiii. 21; edOvs, Acts viii. 21 Rec.; xaddv, arddexrov,
1 Tim. ii.3; v.4; Ro. xii. 17; 2Co. viii. 21; peéyas, Lk.
1.15; modvredés, 1 Pet. iii. 45 wemAnpapevos, Rev. iii. 2;
apéoxew, Acts vi. 5 (Deut. i. 23 [Alex.]; 2S. iii. 36;
[W. § 33, f.]); in the sight of God i.e. God looking on
and approving: Lk. i. 75; Acts x. 33; 2 Co. iv. 2; vii. 12.
in the sight of God, or with God: ebpioxew xdpw (jT] 8¥D
often in the O. T.), to be approved by God, please him,
Acts vii. 46.*
*Evés (WN [i. e. man, mortal]), Enos, son of Seth
(Gen. iv. 26): LK. iii. 38.*
évwtifopar: in bibl. writ. depon. mid.; 1 aor. impv. 2
pers. plur. évwricacbe 3 i. q. év driots Séxouae (Hesych.),
to receive into the ear; give ear to: ri, Acts ii. 14; Sept.
for } 7871; elsewhere only in eccl. and Byzant. writ.,
and in these also as depon. pass. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis
lexice. p. 693 sq.; [Sturz, Dial. Alex. p. 166; W. 33].*
220
eEayus
*Evéx [WH ‘Evy, see their Intr. § 408], (“Avayos,
-ov, 6, Joseph. antt. 1, 3,4; Hebr. 3j3r initiated or initi-
ating, [ef. B. D. s.v.]), Enoch, father of Methuselah (Lk.
iil. 87); on account of his extraordinary piety taken up
alive by God to heaven (Gen. v. 18-24; Heb. xi. 5; [ef.
Sir. xliv. 16; Joseph. antt. 1, 38, 4]); in the opinion of
later Jews the most renowned antediluvian prophet; to
whom, towards the end of the second century before
Christ, was falsely attributed an apocalyptical book
which was afterwards combined with fragments of other
apocryphal books, and preserved by the Fathers in
Greek fragments and entire in an Ethiopic transla-
tion. This translation, having been found among the
Abyssinian Christians towards the close of the last cen-
tury, has been edited by Richard Laurence, archbishop of
Cashel (“ Libri Henoch versio aethiopica.”” Oxon. 1838),
and by A. Dillmann (“ Liber Henoch, aethiopice.” Lips.
1851); it was translated into English by R. Laurence
(1st ed. 1821; 3d ed. 1838 [reprinted (Scribners, N. Y.)
1883; also (with notes) by G. H. Schodde (Andover,
1882) ], into German by A. G. Hoffman (Jen. 1833-38, 2
vols.) and by A. Dillmann (Lips. 1853) ; each of the last
two translators added a commentary. From this book is
taken the ‘ prophecy’ in Jude 14 sq.; [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.),
also Dict. of Chris. Biog., s. v. Enoch, The Book of].*
ef, see ék.
é§, of, ai, rd, indecl. numeral, siz: Mt. xvii. 1; Lk.
xiii. 14, ete.
éf-ayyéAAw: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. efayyeiAnre ;
first in Hom. Il. 5, 390; properly, to tell out or forth
[see éx, VI. 4], to declare abroad, divulge, publish: [Mk.
xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; with He-
braistic emphasis, to make known by praising or proclaim-
ing, to celebrate, [A. V. show forth]: 1 Pet. ii. 9. (For
950, Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 28; Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 13, ef. Sir.
xliv. 15.) *
eEayopdtw: 1 aor. efnydpaca; [pres. mid. eayopd(o-
pat] 5 1. to redeem i. e. by payment of a price to re-
cover from the power of another, fo ransom, buy off, (cf.
ex, VI. 2]: prop. deparawwida, Diod. 36,1 p.530; metaph.
of Christ freeing men from the dominion of the Mosaic
law at the price of his vicarious death (see dyopata,
2b.), rwa, Gal. iv. 5; with addition of ek ris katrdpas Tod
vopov, Gal. ili. 13. 2. to buy up, Polyb. 3, 42, 2; Plut.
Crass. 2; Mid. ri, to buy up for one’s self, for one’s use
[W. § 38, 2b.; B. 192 (166 sq.)]: trop. in the obscure
phrase eéay. tov xatpdév, Eph. v. 16 and Col. iv. 5, where
the meaning seems to be to make a wise and sacred use
of every opportunity for doing good, so that zeal and
well-doing are as it were the purchase-money by which
we make the time our own; (act. eEayopageww Karpov, to
seek [to gain time (A. V.) i. e.] delay, Dan. ii. 8; mid.
with ace. of thing, ‘by ransom to avert evil from one’s
self’, ‘to buy one’s self off or deliver one’s self from
evil’: dca pas Spas tHv ai@voy Kodaow eEayopatdpevor, of
the-martyrs, Mart. Polye. 2, 3).*
eE-dyw; 2 aor. eényayov; Sept. often for yin; to lead
out [cf. ék, VI. 1]: rwa (the place whence being sup
eEaipéw
plied in thought), Mk. xv. 20 (of the city to punishment
[but Lehm. dyovow]); Acts xvi. 37, 39; v.19 and xvi.
39 (from prison) ; Acts vii. 36 (from Egypt); Jn. x. 3
(sheep from the fold); with ¢£w added [in RG Lbr.],
Lk. xxiv. 50; &£ rjs kouns, Mk. viii. 23 R GL Trmrg.
[ef. W. 603 (561)]; with the addition of é« w. gen. of
place, Acts vii. 40; xii. 17; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; foll.
by eis with ace. of place, Acts xxi. 38.*
éE-o.péw, -: 2 aor. impv. éfeke; Mid., [pres. ptcp.
e€arpovpevos]; 2 aor. e€eAdunv and in Alex. form (LT
Tr WH) égecddpny (Acts vii. 10 [so Grsb.]; xii. 11 [so
Grsb.]; xxiii. 27; see reff. in [aipew and] dmépxopuat),
inf. éfeAéoOar (Acts vii. 34); Sept. usually for 1x7; to
take out [cf. éx, VI. 2]; 1. to pluck out, draw out, i. e.
to root out: rov opOadpor, Mt. v. 29; xviii. 9. 2. Mid.
a. to choose out (for one’s self), select, one person from
many: Acts xxvi. 17 (so for >a in Is. xlix. 7 [but there
the Sept. has éfedeEdunv; perh. Is. xlviii. 10 is meant]
and sometimes in Grk. writ.; first in Hom. Od. 14, 232)
[al. refer Acts l. c. to the next head; (see Hackett ad
loc.) |]. b. to rescue, deliver, (prop. to cause to be res-
cued, but the middle force is lost [ef. W. 253 (238)]):
tiva, Acts vii. 34; xxiii. 27; twa ék ruos, Acts vii. 10;
xii. 11; Gal. i. 4; (Ex. iii. 8, ete.; Aeschyl. suppl. 924;
Hdt. 3, 137; Dem. 256, 3; Polyb. 1, 11, 11).*
eE-alpw: fut. €€apo (1 Co. v.13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. impv. 2
pers. plur. é£dpare (ib. GLT Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. é&np-
ny, to lift up or take away out of a place; to remove [cf.
ex, VI. 2]: teva éx, one from a company, 1 Co. v. 2 Ree.
[see aipw, 3 c.]; vs. 13 fr. Deut. [xix. 19 or] xxiv. 9.*
eE-aréw, -@: 1 aor. mid. e&nrnadunv; to ask from, de-
mand of, [cf. éx, VI. 2]. Mid. to ask from (or beg) for
one’s self: twa, to ask that one be given up to one from
the power of another, —in both senses, either for good,
to beg one from another, ask for the pardon, the safety, of
some one, (Xen. an. 1, 1,3; Dem. p. 546, 22; Plut. Per.
32; Palaeph. 41, 2); or in a bad sense, for torture, for
punishment, (Plut. mor. p. 417 d. de defect. orac. 14; in
prof. auth. often with this sense in the act.) ; so of Satan
asking the apostles out of the power and keeping of God
to be tried by afflictions (allusion being made to Job i.
1-12): Lk. xxii. 31 (Test. xii. Patr. p. 729 [test. Benj.
§ 3] €av ra mvevpata Tov BeAiap eis macav movnpiay OXI-
Wes eEarnowvra tyuas).*
eEalpvys [WH e&epums (exe. in Acts xxii. 6), see
their App. p. 151], adv., (aiguns, dpvw, dpves suddenly),
of a sudden, suddenly, unexpectedly: Mk. xiii. 36; Lk.
ii. 13; ix. 39; Acts ix. 3; xxii.6. (Hom. et al.; Sept.)*
éf-axohovdéw, -@: fut. éfaxodovbnow; 1 aor. ptep. é&a-
kodovOnaas; to fullow out or up, tread in one’s steps; a.
T 60@ twos, metaph., to imitate one’s way of acting:
2° Pet? i15,-ef Isr bit BL: b. to follow one’s author-
tty: pvOos, 2 Pet.i.16; Joseph. antt. prooem. 4, (dpyxn-
yots, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14,1; Svat Bactdedou, Test. xii.
Patr. p. 643 [test. Zeb. § 9]). c. to comply with, yield
to: aoedyetas [Rec. drwXeias], 2 Pet. ii. 2, (rvetduace
mAdyns, Test. xii. Patr. p. 665 [test. Napht. § 3; rois
movnpois StaBovAios, xii. Patr. p. 628 test. Is. § 6]; cf.
221
eEaTrooTéEAN@
also Am. ii. 4; Job xxxi. 9; Sir. v. 2). Among prof.
auth. Polyb., Plut. occasionally use the word; [add Dion.
Hal. de comp. verb. § 24 p. 188, 7; Epictet. diss. 1, 22,
16].*
éEaxdorot, -at, -a, six hundred: Rev. [xiii. 18]; xiv. 20.*
eEarelpw: fut. e€areifw; 1 aor. ptcp. efareipas; 1
aor. pass. infin. éfarecpOnvac [(WH -AcPOjvar; see their
App. p. 154, and s. v. I, ¢ below) ]; 1. (e& denoting
completeness (cf. éx, VI. 6]), to anoint or wash in
every part, hence to besmear: i. q. cover with lime (to white-
wash or plaster), rd retxos, Thuc. 3, 20; rods toiyous tot
iepod [here to overlay with gold ete.], 1 Chr. xxix. 4; zip
oixiav, Lev. xiv. 42 (for TW). 2. (e&- denoting re-
moval [cf. éx, VI. 2]), to wipe off, wipe away: Sdxpvov
aro [GLT Tr WH ex] trav dfpOadrpav, Rev. vii. 17;
xxi. 4 [RG WHnrg,, al. ék]; to obliterate, erase, wipe
out, blot out, (Aeschyl., Hdt., al.; Sept. for mm): ri, Col.
ii. 14; 1d dvopa ex THs BiBdov, Rev. iii. 5 (Ps. lxviii.
(Ixix.) 29, cf. Deut. ix. 14; xxv. 6); ras dyaprias, the
guilt of sins, Acts iii. 19, (Ps. evili. (cix.) 13; 76 dvé-
pnua, tas avouias, Is. xliii. 25; Ps. 1. (li.) 113 Sir. xlvi.
20; rt. duaptias amadeipew, 3 Mace. ii. 19).*
é-GdAopar; fo leap up: Acts iii. 8. (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1,
27, et al.; Sept. Is. lv. 12.)*
eE-avarracis, -ews, 7, (eLaviornpt, q. V.), a rising up
(Polyb. 8,55,4); @ rising again, resurrection: tev vexpav
or (L T Tr WH) 7 &k rév vexpov, Phil. iii. 11.*
é€-ava-réAAw: 1 aor. e€avereida; 1. trans. to make
spring up, cause to shoot forth: Gen. ii. 9, ete. 2. in-
trans. to spring up: Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5. (Rare in
prof. auth. [cf. W. 102 (97) ].) *
é€-av-iornpt: 1 aor. e€aveatnca; 2 aor. eEavéotny; 1.
to make rise up, to raise up, to produce: omeppa, Mk. xii.
19; Lk. xx. 28, (Hebr. yyy Dp, Gen: xxxviil.8); 2.
2 aor. act. fo rise in an assembly to speak (as in Xen. an.
6, 1, 30): Actsixv. 5.*
é€-arratdw, -@; 1 aor. efnmdtnoa; 1 aor. pass. ptep.
fem. éfamarnOcioa; (e& strengthens the simple verb [cf.
ex, VI. 6]), to deceive: Ro. vii. 11; xvi. 18; 1 Co. iii. 18;
2 Co. xi. 3; 2 Th. ii. 3; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 [L T Tr WH].
(From Hom. down ; twice in the O. T. viz. Ex. viii. 29;
Sus. vs. 56.) *
éfamiva, (a somewhat rare later Grk. form for é&arivns,
e£aifvns, q. v- [W. § 2, 1 d.]), adv., suddenly: Mk. ix. 8.
(Sept.; Jambl., Zonar., al.; Byzant.) *
éf-arropew and (so in the Bible) depon. pass. é£amopéo-
pat, -odpar; 1 aor. eEnmopnOnv; to be utterly at a loss, be
utterly destitute of measures or resources, to renounce all
hope, be in despair, [cf. éx, VI. 6], (Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
al.): 2 Co. iv. 8 (where it is distinguished fr. the simple
aropéopa); twés of anything: rod ¢qy, 2 Co. i. 8, on this
gen. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 828 sq. (rod dpyupiov, to be utterly
in want of, Dion. Hal. 7, 18; act. with dat. of respect,
tois Aoyiopois, Polyb. 1, 62, 1; once in the O. T. absol.
Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 16).*
€f-arro-oréAAw; fut. eLarooreAd; 1 aor. e£aréoreida;
[2 aor. pass. efameordAnv]; Sept. very often for now;
prop. to send away from one’s self (amd) out of the place
eEaoTilo
or out of doors (ék [q. v. VI. 2]); 1. to send forth:
twa, with commissions, Acts vii. 12; [xii. 11]; Gal. iv.
4; foll. by inf. of purpose, Acts xi. 22 (but L T Tr WH
om. the inf.) ; eis €4vn, unto the Gentiles, Acts xxii. 21
[WH mrg. droor.]; used also of powers, influences,
things, (see dmogréAXa, 1 a.) : THY emuyyedlav, the prom-
ised blessing, Lk. xxiv.49 T Tr WH; 16 rveiya eis ras
xapOias, to send forth i.e. impart the Spirit to our hearts,
Gal. iv. 6; [7d . . . knpvypa tis aiwviov owrnpias, Mk. xvi.
WH in (rejected) ‘ Shorter Conclusion’]; tyiv 6 Aoyos
... egameotdAn, the message was sent forth, i. e. com-
manded to be announced, to you, Acts xiii. 26 LT Tr
WH. 2. to send away: twa eis ete. Acts ix. 30; foll.
by inf. of purpose, Acts xvii. 14; twa xevov, Lk. i. 53;
xx. 10,11. (Dem., Polyb., Diod.) *
éE-apritw: 1 aor. inf. é£apricac; pf. pass. ptep. ééypri-
opevos; (see dprios, 2); rare in prof. auth.; to complete,
jinish; a. to furnish perfectly: twa, pass., mpos tt, 2
Tim. iii. 17 (wodepeiv . . . rots Gmact kad@s eEnpriopevot,
Joseph. antt.3, 2,2). b. ras nuepas, to finish, accomplish,
(as it were, to render the days complete): Acts xxi. 5
(so amapri¢ew thy dxtapnvov, Hipp. epid. ii. 180 [ef. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 447 sq.]).*
eE-arrparre. 1. prop. to send forth lightning, to
lighten. 2. to flash out like lightning, to shine, be ra-
diant: of garments, Lk. ix. 29; (of gleaming arms, Nah.
iii. 3; Ezek. i. 4, 7; @oB@ x. xkdddci ToAA@ Tryphiodor.
10833) ci. -We102 (97)))2
é§-autis and ¢& airng [so Rec. MK. vi. 25], (sc. rac wpac
[W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), on the instant; forth-
with: MK. vi. 25; Acts x. 83; xi. 11: xxi. 32: xxiii. 30
[RG WH]; Phil. ii. 23. (Cratin. in Bekk. anecd. i.
p- 94; Theogn., Arat., Polyb., Joseph., al.) *
éEeyelpw [1 Co. vi. 14 Lehm. txt.]; fut. e€eyepd; 1 aor.
eényetpa; to arouse, raise up (from sleep; Soph., Eur.,
Xen., al.) ; from the dead (Aeschyl. cho. 495), 1 Co. vi.
14. to rouse up, stir up, incite: twa, to resistance, Ro. ix.
17 (rév Ovpov twos, 2 Mace. xiii. 4, cf. 2 Chr. xxxvi. 22),
where some explain the words éfnyewpa ce I have raised
thee up into life, caused thee to exist, or I have raised thee
to a public position, set thee up as king (Joseph. antt. 8,
11, 1 Bacwdeds yap e€eyeiperat tm’ euov); but the objec-
tion to these interpretations lies in the fact that Paul
draws from vs. 17 what he says in vs. 18, and therefore
e€eyeipey must be nearly synonymous with oxAnpiveuw,
[but see Meyer ].*
ef-epe; impf. e&jeoav; (eipe); to go out, go forth: foll.
in Rec. by é« with gen. of place, Acts xiii. 42; without
mention of the place, that being known from the context,
Acts xvii. 15; xx. 7; émt ray yi (from the water), to es-
cape to the land, Acts xxvii. 43.*
€&-eyut from eiui, see é&erre.
éf-eheyxw: 1 aor. inf. efedeyEar; (€& strengthens the
simple verb [cf. ék, VI. 6]); to prove to be in the wrong,
convict, (chiefly in Attic writ.) : by punishing, riva repi
tuvos, Jude 15 Rec. (see eheyx@, 1) of God as judge, as
in Is. ii. 4; Mic. iv. 3 for mrain.*
#<dxw : [pres. pass. ptep. éfeAxdpevos]; to draw out,
222
eEépyouar
(Hom., Pind., Attic writ.) ; metaph. i. g. to lure forth,
[A. V. draw away]: timd ris... émOupias é€eAxopevos,
Jas. i. 14, where the metaphor is taken from hunting
and fishing: as game is lured from its covert, so man by
lust is allured from the safety of self-restraint to sin.
[The language of hunting seems to be transferred here
(so elsewhere, cf. Wetst. ad loc.) to the seductions of a
harlot, personated by éem@upia; see rixto. | *
dw, see eEaipew.
é€épapa, -ros, ro, (fr. €€epaw to eject, cast forth, vomit
forth; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 64), vomit; what is cast out
by vomiting: 2 Pet. ii. 22, ef. Prov. xxvi. 11. (Dioscor.
de venenis c. 19 (p. 29 ed. Spreng.) [an example of the
verb. Cf. Wetst. on Pet. l. c., and esp. Gataker, Advers.
miscell. col. 853 sq. ].) *
[é-epavvaw T Tr WH for e£epevrdw, q. v.; see épavvda. |
éf-epevvdw, -@ : 1 aor. eEnpevynoa; to search out, search
anxiously and diligently: mepi twos, 1 Pet. i. 10 [where
T Tr WH eepavy. q. v.]. (1 Mace. iii. 48; ix. 26; Sept.;
Soph., Eur., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
e&-€pxopar; impf. eEnpxounv; fut. efeXevoouar; 2 aor.
e&jAOov, plur. 2 pers. e&ndAOere, 3 pers. €&AOov, and in
LT Tr WH the Alex. forms (see dépyopat, init.) eénr-
Gare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, etc.), €€7AGav
(1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Gov; 3 Jn. 7, etc.]); pf.
efeAnAvba; plpf. €&eAnrAvdew (LK. viii. 38, etc.) ; Sept. for
N¥) times without number ; to go or come out of; aL
properly ; a. with mention of the place out of which
one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of
those who leave a place of their own accord: with the
gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (L T Tr WH insert ééw) ; Acts xvi.
39 RG. foll. by é«: Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii.
59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll.
by é€o with gen. — with addition of eis and ace. of place,
Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or mapd with acc. of place,
Acts xvi. 13; or mpos twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii. 13.
ef€py. ano with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 RG; Mk. xi.
12; Lk. ix. 5; Phil. iv. 15; [Heb. xi. 15 RG]; é£épy.
exetOev, Mt. xv. 21; Mk. vi. 1,10; Lk. ix. 45 [xi. 53 T Tr
txt. WH txt.]; Jn. iv. 43; dev eEndOov, Mt. xii. 44; Lk.
xi. 24 [yet see 8. below]. e&épy. éx etc. to come forth
from, out of, a place: Mt. viii. 28; Rev. xiv. 15, 17, 18
[Lom. WH br. é&7A.]; xv. 6; eEeAOeiv amo, to come out
(towards one) from, Mt. xv. 22. In the Gospel of John
Christ, who by his incarnation left his place with God
in heaven, is said é&eOeciv mapa tov Geod: xvi. 27 and RG
Limrg. in vs. 28; dad Tov Oeod, xili. 3; xvi. 303 €k Tod
cod, from his place with God, from God’s abode, viii. 42
and L txt. T Tr WH in xvi. 28. 8B. of those expelled or
cast out (esp. of demons driven forth from a body of
which they have held possession) : €« tevos, gen. of pers. :
Mk. i. 25 sq.3 v. 8 [L.mrg. dé]; vii. 29; Lk. iv. 35 R Tr
mrg.; or dé twos, Mt. xii. 43; xvii. 18; Lk. iv. 35 LT Tr
txt. WH; viii. 29, 33, 35; xi. 24 [yet see a. above]; Acts
xvi. 18; [xix. 12 Rece.]. y. of those who come forth, or
are let go, from confinement in which they have been
kept (e. g. from prison): Mt. v. 26; Acts xvi. 40. b.
without mention of the place from which one goes out;
eEépyouat
a. where the place from which one goes forth (as a house,
city, ship) has just been mentioned: Mt. [viii. 12 Tdf.];
ix. 31 sq. (from the house, vs. 28); x. 11 (sc. exetOev, i. e.
€x THs TOAEWS ) KOUNS Exeivns) ; Xii. 14 (cf. 9) ; xviii. 28 (cf.
24); xiv. 14; Mk.i. 45 (cf. 43 e&€Badev adrdv) ; Lk. i. 22
(from the temple) ; viii. 27; x. 35 [Rec.]; Jn. xiii. 30, 31
(30), ete.; so also when the verb é&¢pyeoOa refers to the
departure of demons: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; vii. 30;
ix. 29; Acts viii. 7; xvi. 19 (where for the name of the
demon itself is substituted the descriptive clause 7 eAris
T. €pyagias avtav; see 2 e. 6.). B. where one is said to
have gone forth to do something, and it is obvious that he
has gone forth from his home, or at least from the place
where he has been staying: foll. by an inf., Mt. xi. 8;
xiii. 3 [inf. w. rov]; xx.1; Mk. iii. 21; iv. 3 [R Ginf. w.
rov (Tr br. rov) ]; v. 14 Rec.; Lk. vii. 25 sq.; Acts xx. 1;
Rev. xx. 8; with the addition of emi rwa (against), Mt.
xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; eis rovro, Mk. i. 38;
iva, Rev. vi. 2; also without any inf. or conjunction indi-
cating the purpose: Mk. vi. 12; viii. 11; xiv. 16; xvi. 20;
Dew 2 axe on. Xx1.,.03 Acts x. 235 xxad t>2)iCo. vit:
17; foll. by ets with acc. of place: Mt. xxii. 10; xxvi. 30,
705) ME vill. 27; xi. 11; Lk. vi..12: xiv. 20, 23; Jn.1..43
(44); Acts xi. 25; xiv. 20; 2 Co. ii. 13; the place to
which one goes forth being evident either from what goes
before or from the context: Mt. xxiv. 26 (se. ets tiv épy-
pov); xxvii. 32 (from the city to the place of crucifixion) ;
e£épx. alone is used of a people quitting the land which
they had previously inhabited, Acts vii. 7, ef. Heb. xi. 8 ;
of angels coming forth from heaven, Mt. xiii. 49. é£épx.
eis amavrnoiv Tivos, to meet one, Mt. xxv. 1 [LT TrWH
umavt.], 6; [eis amavt. ur vravr.| twi, Jn. xii. 13; Acts
xxvili. 15 RG; es cuvavrnciv rum, Mt. viii. 34 [L T Tr
WH otravr.]. Agreeably to the oriental redundancy of
style in description (see aviornus, II. 1 ¢.), the participle
efeAOav is often placed before another finite verb of de-
parture: Mt. viii. 32; xv. 21; xxiv. 1 (é&eA@ov [from the
temple, see xxi. 23] eopevero amd Tod iepod, he departed
from its vicinity); Mk. xvi. 8; Lk. xxii. 39; Acts xii. 9,
17; xvi. 36,40; xxi.5,8. 2. figuratively; a. && river,
€x pécou Twer, to go out from some assembly, i. e. to for-
sake it: 1 Jn. ii. 19 (opp. to peuevnxerocav peb nuav); 2
Co. vi. 17. b. to come forth from physically, arise from,
to be born of: ex with gen. of the place from which one
comes by birth, Mt. ii. 6 (fr. Mic. v. 2); é&k tHs dadvos
rwés, Hebr. O°¥ 92 8¥? (Gen. xxxv. 11; 1 K. viii. 19;
[ef. W. 33 (32)]), Heb. vii. 5. c. &k yetpds Tivos, to go
forth from one’s power, escape from it in safety: Jn. x.
39. d. eis rov Kécpov, to come forth (from privacy) into
the world, before the public, (of those who by novelty of
opinion attract attention): 1Jn.iv. 1. e. of things;
a. of report, rumors, messages, precepts, etc., 3 q- to be
uttered, to be heard: dwn, Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; i. q. to be
made known, declared : 6 Xé-yos Tov Geod foll. by aro twor,
from their city or church, 1 Co. xiv. 36; i. q. to spread,
be diffused: 4 nun, Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 14; 9 dxon, Mk.
4.28; (Mt. iv. 24 Trmrg.]; 6 POdyyos, ra pyyara, Ro. x.
18; 6 Adyos the word, saying, Jn. xxi. 23; Lk. vii. 17;
22
3 €Ens
9 miomts twos, the report of one’s faith, 1 Th. i. 8; i. q.
to be proclaimed: Séypa, an imperial edict, rapa twos, gen,
pers., Lk. ii. 1. B. to come forth i. q. be emitted, as from
the heart, the mouth, etc.: Mt. xv. 18 sq.; Jas. iii. 10;
[ef. poppaia ex tov orduatos, Rev. xix. 21 G LT Tr
WH]; i. q. to flow forth from the body: Jn. xix. 34; i. q.
to emanate, issue: Lk. viii. 46; Rev. xiv. 20. y. e&€pyxe-
aOa (am dvaroda@v), used of a sudden flash of lightning,
Mt. xxiv. 27. 6. that eێpyeoOar in Acts xvi. 19 (on
which see 1 b. a. above) is used also of a thing’s vanish-
ing, viz. of a hope which has disappeared, arises from
the circumstance that the demon that had gone out had
been the hope of those who complain that their hope
has gone out. On the phrase eicépxeo@ar x. eEépyerOar
[Comp.: d:-e£epyopau. |
é&eor, impers. verb, (fr. the unused €&expe), it is law-
ful; a. foll. by the pres. inf.: Mt. xii. 2, 10 [Tdf. inf.
aor. ], 12; xiv.4; Lk. vi.2[>.RGT]; xiv.3 [LT TrWH
inf. aor.]; with the aor. inf.; Mt. [xv. 26 LT]; xxii.
17; xxvii. 6; MK. ii. 4; xii. 14; Lk. vi. 9; Acts ii. 29
(e&ov eirety scil. €orw, allow me, [al. supply éori, B. 318
(273); W.§ 64, I. 2a., cf. § 2,1 d.]); with the inf. omitted
because readily suggested by the context, Mk. ii. 24 and
Ree. in Acts vill. 37. b. foll. by dat. of pers. and a pres.
inf.: Mk. vi. 18; Acts xvi. 21; xxii. 25; and an aor. inf.:
Mt. xix. 3 [L T WH om. dat.]; xx. 15; Mk. ii. 26[RG
Ls Pr txts] 5, x25 oko xx. 22,8 Gis dnawi 105 avait 38);
Acts xxi. 37; é&dv jv, Mt. xii. 4; d ov« edu, sc. éari, 2 Co.
xii. 4; with the inf. omitted, as being evident from the
context: mavru (por) €€earw, sc. moetv, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 23.
c. foll. by the ace. and inf.: Lk. vi. 4; xx. 22 T Tr WH ;
so here and there even in classic writ.; ef. Rost § 127
Anm. 2; Kiihner § 475 Anm. 2; [B. § 142, 2].*
é-erdtw: 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. éerdaare, inf. ¢£e-
raga; to search out; to examine strictly, inquire: rept
twos and with the adv. axpi8as added, Mt. ii. 8; foll. by
an indir. quest. Mt. x. 11; reva inquire of some one, foll.
by a direct question, Jn. xxi.12. (Sept.; often in Grk.
writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
[eEévns, see eLaidrns. ]
eEnyeopar, -ovpar; impf. eEnyoupny ; 1 aor. e€nynoapny ;
1. prop. to lead out, be leader, go before, (Hom. et al.).
2. metaph. (cf. Germ. ausfiihren) to draw out in narra-
tive, unfold in teaching; a. to recount, rehearse: [w. acc.
of the thing and dat. of pers., Acts x. 8]; w. acc. of thing,
Lk. xxiv. 35; Acts xxi. 19; without an acc., foll. by rel.
pron. or adv., dca éroinaev, Acts xv. 12; kaos, 14, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 190, Judg. vii. 13,
ete.). b. to unfold, declare: Jn.i. 18 (sc. the things re-
lating to God; also used in Grk. writ. of the interpreta-
tion of things sacred and divine, oracles, dreams, ete. ; cf.
Meyer ad loc.; Alberti, Observationes ete. p. 207 sq.).*
éfqKxovra, of, ai, rd, sixty: Mt. xiii. 8, 23, etc.
éffjs, adv., (fr. éya, fut. €w; cf. €xouai twos to cleave
to, come next to, a thing), successively, in order, (fr. Hom.
down); 6, 4, To é&js, the next following, the next in suc-
cession: son é&ns nuépa, Lk. ix. 37; elliptically ev rn €&%}s,
sc. juepa, Lk. vii. 11 (here WH txt. Tr txt. L mrg. ev
see in eia€pyopat, 1 a.
éEnyéw
r@ éfis sc. xpovg, soon afterwards); rH é&js, sc. quépa,
Acts 2cxls We xxve li eoxvale 15.5
é&-nxéw, -d: to sound forth, emit sound, resound; pass.
éenyetrai te the sound of something is borne forth, is
propagated: dp’ tyav e€nxnrat 6 Noyos Tod Kupiov, from
your city or from your church the word of the Lord
has sounded forth i. e. has been disseminated by report, 1
Th. i. 8, ef. De Wette ad loc. (Joel iii. 14 (iv. 19); Sir.
xl.13; 3 Mace. iii. 2. Polyb. 30, 4, 7 [not Dind.]; Philo
‘n Flace. § 6; [quis rer. div. her. §4]; Byzant.) *
tts, -ews, 9, (Exo, fut. €£w), a habit, whether of body or
of mind (Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) ; a power acquired by
custom, practice, use, (“firma quaedam facilitas, quae apud
Graecos €&s nominatur,” Quint. 10, 1 init.); so Heb.
v.14, (€v rovrows ixavny e&w mepuomoapevos, Sir. prol. 7;
ew exew ypauparixys, Polyb. 10,47, 7; év rots modepexois,
21, 7, 3; €v dorpodoyla peyiorny e&w €xewv, Diod. 2, 31;
Aoyixny cE. mepurotovpevos, Philo, alleg. legg. 1, 4).*
&-iornpe: likewise efcora@ and é&ioravw (Acts viii. 9
ptep. e&varav RG, e&iordvov L'T Tr WH [see tornpe]) ;
1 aor. e€€ornoa; 2 aor. e&€arnv; pf. inf. eerraxevar; Mid.,
[pres. inf. ¢&ioravOar]; impf. 3 pers. plur. e&iorayro ;
1. In pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position,
to displace: twa tov dpoveiv, to throw one out of his
mind, drive one out of his senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12;
dpevor, Eur. Bacch. 850 ; hence simply to amaze, astonish,
throw into wonderment: twa, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9.
2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to
be amazed, astounded: Mt. xii. 23; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii.
56; Acts ii. 7, 12; vili. 13; ix. 21; x.45; xii. 16, (Sept.
for 17m, to tremble, Ex. xix. 18; Ruth iii. 8, ete.) ; é&¢-
otnoav exoracet peyddn, they were amazed with a great
amazement (see éxoraots, 3), Mk. v. 42; ev €avrois ée&i-
oravto, Mk. vi.51; with dat. of the thing: payeias &&-
eoraxevat, had been put beside themselves with magic
arts, carried away with wonder at them, Acts viii. 11
[but this form of the perf. is transitive; ef. B. 48 (41);
Veitch 339]; eEiaravro émi with dat. of thing, Lk. ii. 47
(Ex. xix. 18; Sap.v.2). b. to be out of one’s mind, be-
side one’s self, insane: 2 Co. v. 13 (opp. to cwdpoveiv) ;
Mk. iii. 21 [cf. B.198 (171); W.§ 40,5 b.]; (Grk. writ.,
where they use the word in this sense, generally add
tov ppoveiv, trav ppevav: Isoc., Eur., Polyb., al.).*
éf-.rxtw: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. e€irytonre, to
be eminently able, to have full strength, [cf. ex, VI. 6]:
foll. by an inf. Eph. iii. 18. (Sir. vii. 6; rare in Grk.
writ., as Dioscor., Strab., Plut.) *
€£-ob0s, -ov, 7, (dds), exit, i. e. departure: Heb. xi. 22;
metaph. n €£08ds twos the close of one’s career, one’s
final fate, Lk. ix. 31; departure from life, decease: 2 Pet.
i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2; vii. 6; [Philo de caritate § 4];
with addition of rod ¢yv, Joseph. antt. 4, 8,2; [of rod
Biov, Just. dial. c. Tryph. § 105].*
éEodoOpetw and (acc. to the reading best attested by
the oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LT Tr WH
[see ddobpedw]) eEorcOpevw: fut. pass. é£oAoOpevOnoouar;
to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to extirpate: ék
tru haod, Acts iii. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the
224
e£ovdevow
O. T. Apocr., and in Test. xii. Patr.; Joseph. antt. 8,
11,1; 11, 6,6; hardly in native Grk. writ.) *
éE-opodoyéw, -@: 1 aor. eLwpordynaa; Mid., [pres. é&
oporoyoipar]; fut. eoporoyjoopat; [1 aor. subj. 3 pers.
sing. -ynonta, Phil. ii. 11 RG Ltxt. Tr txt.WH]; (eé
either forth from the heart, freely, or publicly, openly [ef.
W. 102 (97)]); act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro-
Sess ; 1. to confess: tas duaprias, Mt. iii. 6; Mk. i. 5;
(Jas. v.16 LT Tr WH], (Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 6; [ef. b. j.
5, 10,5; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51,3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]);
tas mpages, Acts xix. 18; ra mapamra@para, Jas. v. 16
RG; (jrrav, Plut. Eum. c. 17; rv ddnOevav dvev Baod-
vev, id. Anton. c. 59). 2. to profess i. e. to acknowl-
edge openly and joyfully: 16 dvopa twos, Rev. iii. 5 Rec.;
foll. by 67, Phil. ii. 11; with dat. of pers. [ef. W. § 31,
1f.; B. 176 (153)] to one’s honor, i. e. to celebrate, give
praise to (so Sept. for 5 myn, Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 5; ev.
(evi.) 47; exxi. (exxii.) 4, ete.; [W. 32]): Ro. xiv. 11;
xv. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 3);
twit (dat. of pers.) foll. by ére: Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21.
to profess that one will do something, to promise, agree,
engage: Lk. xxii. 6 [Lchm. om.]; (in this sense the
Greeks and Josephus use éuodoyeiv).*
e£-dv, see e£eore.
€£-opkite ; 1. to exact an oath, to force to an oath,
(Dem., Polyb., Apollod., Diod., Plut., al.), for which the
earlier Grks. used eEopxow, [cf. W.102(97)]. 2. to ad-
jure: twa xara Twos, one by a person [cf. xara, I. 2 a.],
foll. by iva [B. 237 (205) ], Mt. xxvi. 65; (Gen. xxiv. 3).*
eE-opkirtis, -ov, 6, (e£opki¢a) ; 1. he who exacts an
oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs
a formula of conjuration for expelling demons: Acts
xix. 13. (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,5; Leian. epigr. in Anthol.
11, 427; often in the church Fathers.) *
éE-optcow: 1 aor. ptep. eEopvEavres; fr. Hdt. down;
1. to dig out: rovs dpOarpods (prop. to pluck out the
eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Alex.]; 1S. xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116;
Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 1; Lceian. dial. deor. 1, 1; al.) cai
d.ddvac Trevi, metaph. to renounce the most precious things
for another’s advantage, Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions
see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5,67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35; [Wet-
stein ad loc.]); in opposition to a very few interp. who,
assuming that Paul suffered from a weakness of the
eyes, understand the words literally, “ Ye would have
plucked out your sound eyes and ‘have put them into
me,” see Meyer ad loc.; [cf. reff. s. v. cxdAoy, fin.J. 2.
to dig through: rnv oréyny, Mk. ii. 4.*
é€-ovSevew, -: 1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. e€ov-
devnOn ; pf. pass. ptep. eEovdernuevos; to hold and treat
‘as of no account, utterly to despise : tov Adyov, pass., 2 Co.
x. 10 Lehm. to set at nought, treat with contumely: a
person, pass., Mk. ix. 12 L Tr WH, (Ezek. xxi. 10). Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; [B. 28 (25); W. 91 (87); Soph.
Lex. s. v.; WH. App. p. 166].*
é&-ovdevdu, -@: [1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing.
éEovdevw7 |; i. q. e€oudevew, q. V.: Mk. ix. 12 RG; often
in Sept., esp. for 7132 and OND. [Cf. reff. in the preced
ing word. ]*
€fouv0evéw
e€ov8evew, -@; 1 aor. eLovdevnoa; Pass., pf. ptcep. efov-
Oemnpevos; [1 aor. ptep. eLovbevnbeis]; (see ovdeis); to
make of no account, to despise utterly: twa, Lk. xviii. 9;
Ro. xiv. 3,10; 1 Co. xvi. 11; ri, 1 Th. v. 20; Gal. iv. 14
(where it is coupled with exrriw ); in pass. oi é£ovBevn-
pévot, 1 Co. vi. 4; ra eLovdernpeva, 1 Co. i. 28 (see dyevns) ;
6 Adyos eEovdevnuevos, 2 Co. x. 10 [here Lehm. e§ovd.];
& (Aidos 6) eEovdenbeis bd Trav oixodopovvrwr, set at
nought, i. e. rejected, cast aside, Acts iv. 11. To treat
with contempt (i. e. acc. to the context, with mockery) :
Lk. xxiii. 11; (for 133, Prov. i. 7; 713, Ezek. xxii. 8, etc. ;
OND, 1S. viii. 7. Sap.iv.18; 2 Macc. i. 27; Barn. ep. 7,
9; "and other ecel. writ.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182;
{and reff. s. v. éfoudevéa, fin. ].*
efovdevdw, i. . e£ovdevew, q. v.: Mk. ix. 12 Tdf.*
éfouria, -as, 7, (fr. tears, e€dv, q. v.), fr. Eur., Xen.,
Plato down; Sept. for 79v7 and Chald. jOIw; power.
1. power of choice, liberty of doing as one pleases;
leave or permission: 1 Co. ix. 12, 18; €yew eovciar,
2 Th. iii. 9; with an inf. added indicating the thing to
be done, Jn. x. 18; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; Heb. xiii. 10 [WH
br. €&.]; foll. by an inf. with rod, 1 Co. ix. 6 (LT Tr
WH om. rod); with a gen. of the thing or the pers. with
regard to which one has the power to decide: Ro.
ix. 21 (where an explanatory infin. is added [B. 260
(224)]); 1 Co. ix. 12; emt rd Evdov rhs Cwns, permission
to use the tree of life, Rev. xxii. 14 [see emi, C. I. 2e.];
efovaiav éxew tepi Tov idiov OeAjparos (opp. to avayxny
gyew [cf. W. § 30, 3 N.5]), 1 Co. vii. 37; ev ry idia
e€ovaia, [appointed, see riOnue, 1 a. sub fin.] according to
his own choice, Actsi. 7; é€vtq of e€ovcia banpyey, i. e. at
thy free disposal, Acts v. 4; used of liberty under the
gospel, as opp. to the yoke of the Mosaic law, 1 Co. viii.
4p 2. physical and mental power; the ability or
strength with which one is endued, which he either possesses
or exercises: Mt. ix. 8; Acts viii. 19; Rev. ix. 3, 19;
xiii. 2,45 xviii. 1; foll. by an inf. of the thing to be
done, Mk. iii: 15; Lk. xii.5; Jn.i.12; Rev.ix. 10; xi.
6; xiii. 5; foll. by rod with the inf. Lk. x. 19; avrn éoriv
9 e€0vgia tov oKérovus, this is the power that darkness
exerts, Lk. xxii. 53; movety eEovaiav to exert power, give
exhibitions of power, Rev. xiii. 12; év éouvcia eivat, to be
possessed of power and influence, Lk. iv. 32; also efov-
ciav éxew (both expressions refer to the ability and
weight which Jesus exhibited in his teaching) Mt. vii.
29; [Mk. i. 22]; kar’ eovoiay powerfully, Mk. i. 27; also
ev e€ovoia, Lk. iv. 36. 3. the power of authority
(influence) and of right: Mt. xxi. 23; Mk. xi. 28; Lk.
xx. 2; spoken of the authority of an apostle, 2 Co. x. 8;
xiii. 10; of the divine authority granted to Jesus as
Messiah, with the inf. of the thing to be done, Mt. ix. 6;
Mk..ii. 10; Lk. v. 24; Jn. v. 27; ev rota e€ovaia; clothed
in what authority (i. e. thine own or God’s?), Mt. xxi.
P5427 MKS xa! 28,129) 39> ALK. xx. '2,08i5) delegated
authority (Germ. Vollmacht, authorization): mapa Tivos,
with gen. of the pers. by whom the authority is given, or
received, Acts ix. 14; xxvi.10,12[RG]. 4. the power
of rule or government (the power of him whose will
225
efovaratw
and commands must be submitted to by others and
obeyed, [generally translated authority]); a. univ.: Mt.
xXxviil. 18; Jude 25; Rev. xii. 10; xvii. 13; AapBavew
efovoiav as Baowers, Rev. xvii. 12; eipt bd eovaiar, I
am under authority, Mt. viii. 9; with rasodpevos added,
(Mt. viii. 9 LWH br.]; Lk. vii. 8; éeovcia rivds, gen.
of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as trav
mvevpateav Tav axabaprov, Mk. vi. 7; with dore éxBadrew
avra added, Mt. x. 1; efovaiay maons capxds, authority
over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (maons capkds kupeiav, Bel
and the Drag. vs. 5); [gen. of the subject, rod arava,
Acts xxvi. 18]; émi teva, power over one, so as to be able
to subdue, drive out, destroy, Rev. vi. 8; émt ra darpdma,
Lk. ix. 1; or to hold submissive to one’s will, Rev. xiii.
7; émi tas mAnyas, the power to inflict plagues and to
put an end to them, Rev. xvi. 9; él trav eOvav, over the
heathen nations, Rev. ii. 26; émi twos, to destroy one,
Rev. xx. 6; €xew e£ovciay emi tov mupos, to preside, have
control, over fire, to hold it subject to his will, Rev. xiv.
18; exit tav idadrov, xi. 6; emavw tivds eEovciay éxeww, to
be ruler over a thing, Lk. xix.17. b. specifically, a.
of the power of judicial decision; e£ovaiay éyew
with an inf. of the thing decided: oravpa@cat and dzmodv-
cai tia, Jn. xix. 10; foll. by xara twos, the power of
deciding against one, ibid. 11; mapadovvai twa... 77
efovaoia tod ryeudvos, Lk. xx. 20. B. of authority to
manage domestic affairs: Mk. xiii. 34. c. me-
tonymically, a. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk.
iv. 6; jurisdiction: ék ths e&ovoias ‘Hpwdov éoriv, Lk.
xxii. 7 (i Maee.ivi. 11 [ef.-Ps. extit(exiv.) 29 Is: xxxix
2]). B. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use
of honestates, dignitates, auctoritates [so the Eng. authori-
ties, dignities, etc.] in reference to persons ) ; aa. a
ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32):
Ro. xiii: 1=3)) plors: Lkeixii. 113, Rowxitis 1 5 Dit. ui.
1. BB. the leading and more powerful among created be-
ings superior to man, spiritual potentates; used in the
plur. of a certain class of angels (see apyn, Svvapis, Opdvos,
kuptdrns) : Col. i. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. ii. p. 226 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l.c.]) ; with ev
rois eroupavins added, Eph. iii. 10; aaa e€ovaia, 1 Co.
xv. 24; Eph. i. 21; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons:
in the plur., Eph. vi. 12; Col. ii. 15; collectively [ef. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 469], 7 €€0vaia rov dépos (see arp), Eph. ii.
2; rov oxérovs, Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or ec. a.)
above (cf. Lk. xxii. 53 in 2), and regard oxdros as per-
sonified ; see oxdros, b. ]. d. a sign of the husband’s
authority over his wife, i. e. the veil with which propriety
required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as Ba-
oeia is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal
power, i.e. a crown). [SyN. see dvvaues, fin. On the inf.
after é& and é€. éyew cf. B. 260 (223 sq.).] *
eEoverdt{w; 1 fut. pass. eFovoracOjcopa; (e€ovcia) ;
i. q. e€ovaiav éxw, to have power or authority, use power :
[év mAeloot €&. woAAGY povapxior, Aristot. eth. Eud. 1, 5
p- 1216", 2]; ev dripows, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 44; ruvds, to
be master of any one, exercise authority over one, Lk. xxii.
25; tov caparos, to be master of the body, i. e. to have
ef0x7)
full and entire authority over the body, to hold the body
subject to one’s will, 1 Co. vii. 4. Pass. foll. by td twos,
to be brought under the power of any one, 1 Co. vi. 12.
(Sept. several times in Neh. and Ececl., chiefly for 9w
and vow.) [Comp.: xar-e£ovordga. | *
e£ox, -ns, 9, (fr. €&€yw to stand out, be prominent; cf.
bmepoxn) } 1. prop. in Grk. writ. any prominence or
projection, as the peak or summit of a mountain (é7’
‘e£oxn mérpas, Job xxxix. 28 Sept.); in medical writ. a
protuberance, swelling, wart, etc. 2. metaph. eminence,
excellence, superiority, (Cic. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 e€oxq in
nullo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem exaequat); day
Spes of kar eEoxnv dvres THs wéews, the prominent men
of the city, Acts xxv. 23.*
éE-urvitw: 1 aor. subjune. eEumvicw; (dmvos); to wake
up, awaken out of sleep: [trans. airév], Jn. xi. 11.
({Judg. xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6,
31; Plut. [de solert. anim. 29,4]; Test. xii. Patr. [Levi
§ 8; Jud. § 25, ete.]; the better Grks. said dgumvifa,
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 224; [W. § 2, 1d.].)*
éE-vrvos, -ov, (Urvos), roused out of sleep: Acts xvi. 27.
(1 Esdr. iii. 3; (Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 2].) *
tw, adv., (fr. e&, as €ow and eioo fr. és and eis) ; 18
without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi. 4; joined
with verbs: éordva, Mt. xii. 46,47 [WH txt. om. the
vs.]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. 16; xx.
11 [Lehm. om.]; xa6jcda, Mt. xxvi. 69; or with some
other verb declaring that the person without is doing
something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. 6 ¢&,
absol. he who is without, prop. of place; metaph., in
plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church (cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; Mey. on Mk. as below]:
1 Co. v. 12, 138; Col. iv. 5; 1 Th.iv.12; those who are
not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (cf. Meyer)
WH unrg. é£wev, gq. v.]. With a noun added: af Zo
modes, foreign, Acts xxvi.11; 6 €€w avOpwmos, the outer
man, i. e. the body (see avpwmos, 1 e.), 2 Co.iv.16. — b.
it takes the place of a prep. and is joined with the gen.,
without i. e. out of, outside of, [W. § 54,6]: Lk. xiii. 33;
Acts xxi. 5; Heb. xiii. 11, 12. 2. after the verbs of
going, sending, placing, leading, drawing, etc.,
which commonly take prepositions or adverbs signifying
rest in a place rather than those expressive of motion
toward a place, é€@ has the force of the Lat. foras (Germ.
hinaus, heraus), forth out, out of; a. adverbially, after
the verbs e€€pyoua, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 68; Lk. xxii.
62; Jn. xix.4,5; Rev. iii. 12; dyo, Jn. xix. 4, 13; Tpoaye,
Acts xvi. 30; e€d¢yo, Lk. xxiv.50[R GLbr.]; BdAA and
éxBaddw, Mt. v. 13; xiii. 48; Lk. viii. 54 RG; xiii. 28;
xiv. 35 (34); Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34, 35; xii. 31; xv. 6; Acts
ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; Sedpo Ea, Jn. xi.
43; €€o moveiv twa, Acts v.34. b. as a prep. with the
gen.: after dmeAOeiv, Acts iv. 15; dmooreAd\ev, Mk. v.
10; éxBadAew, Mk. xii. 8; Lk. iv. 29; xx. 15; Acts vii.
58; e€€pxecOa, Mt. xxi. 17; Acts xvi. 13; Heb. xiii. 13;
exrropeverOa, Mk. xi. 19; e&ayew, Mk. viii. 23[RGLTr
mrg.}; cupew teva, Acts xiv. 19; &dxewv teva, Acts xxi. 30.
226
éTrayyenia
dvabev, méppwber), from without, outward, [cf. W. 472
(440)]; 9 1. adverbially: (outwardly), Mt. xxiii. 27 sq.;
Mk. vii. 18; 2 Co. vii. 5; ro wey, the outside, the exte-
rior, Mt. xxiii, 25; Lk. xi. 39 sq.; ékBaddXew éEwbev (for
1G é€w), Rev. xi. 2? LT Tr WH; of ééw6ev for of Zéa,
those who do not belong to the Christian church, 1 Tim.
ili. 7; [cf. Mk. iv. 11 WH mrg. and s. v. fw, 1 a.]; 6 abe
xdopos the outward adorning, 1 Pet. iii.3. 2. as a prep-
osition with the gen. [ef. W. § 54, 6]: Mk. vii. 15; Rev.
xi. 2* (Re GL T Tr WH; xiv. 20 where Ree. o].*
é£-w6€w, -@: 1 aor. €€woa [so accented by GT ed. 7 Tr,
but L WH eféoa] and in Tdf. é€éoa [ WH. App. p. 162]
(cf. W. p. 90 (86); [B. 69 (61); Steph. Thesaur. and
Veitch s. v. d6é@]) 5; to thrust out; expel from one’s abode:
Acts vii. 45, (Thue., Xen., al.). to propel, drive: rd
mowov eis atyaddv, Acts xxvii. 39 [WH txt. exoaoa;
see exoa tw], (the same use in Thuc., Xen., al.).*
e€Srepos, -€pa, -epov, (a comparative fr. é£a, cf. éowrepos,
dv@tepos, KaTwTEpos), Outer: To oKdTos TO eEwrepov, the
darkness outside the limits of the lighted palace (to
which the Messiah’s kingdom is here likened), Mt. viii.
12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30. [(Sept.; Strabo, al.)]*
éouxa, see EIKO.
€oprafw; (éoptn); to keep a feast-day, celebrate a fes-
tival: 1 Co. v. 8, on which pass. see a¢upos. (Sept. for
jam; Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.; épré¢w, Hat.) *
€opry, -7s, 7, Sept. for 3n; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down;
in Hat. éprn; a feast-day, festival: Lk. ii. 42; Jn. v. 1;
vi. 4; vii. 2,37; Col. ii. 16; 1 éopty rod macyxa: Lk. ii.
41 [W. 215 (202); B. 186 (161)]; Jn. xiii. 13 ig. 9
€optn tav atipov, Lk. xxii. 1; év rH éoprn, during the
feast, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; Jn. iv. 453; vii. 11; xii.
20; elvar ev TH €optn, to be engaged in celebrating the
feast, Jn. ii. 23, ef. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc. ;
eis THY €optyy, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; dvaBaivew (to
Jerusalem) eis ryv éopryy, In. vii. 8, 10; epyerOac eis tiv
éoptnv, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; xii. 125 rhs éoprns pecovons,
in the midst of the feast, Jn. vii. 14; xara €oprny, at
every feast [see cara, I. 3 a. 8.], Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. xv.
6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Ree.]; thv €oprny morety to keep, cele-
brate, the feast, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xara 16 €60s ris
€opris, after the custom of the feast, Lk. ii. 42.*
ér-ayyeAla, -as, 7, (€mayyeAA@) 5 1. announcement :
1 Jn. i. 5 (Rec., where ayyeAia was long since restored) ;
kat’ éerayyediav Cons THs év Xptor@ "Inood, to proclaim life
in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 [W. 402 (376);
cf. xara, IL. fin. But others give émayy. here as else-
where the sense of promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise;
a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given:
mpoodéxerOar tiv amo Twos emayyediay (assent; the ref-
erence is to a promise to surrender Paul to the power
and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 2i; [add, émayye-
Alas 6 Adyos odros, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the
divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva-
tion by Christ, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 14]: Acts vil.
17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gal. iii. 17 sq. 21;
iv. 23; Heb. xi. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see Bpa8vve. );
tiwSev, adv., (fr. c£w, opp. to gécwbev fr. gow; cf. | Heb. viii. 6; xi. 9; foll. by the inf. Heb. iv. 1; yiverai
émrayyéArw
run, Ro. iv. 13; mpos twa, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6; éppnOn
tui, Gal. iii. 16; éori tun, belongs to one, Acts ii. 39;
émayyeAreoOa tTHv em. 1 Jn. ii. 25; Exew emayyedias, to
have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [ef. W. 177
(166)]; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8; etva: év émayye-
hig, joined with a promise [al. al.; cf. W. 391 (366) ],
Eph. vi. 2; 1 yq THs emayyeXias, the promised land, Heb.
xi. 93 ra réexva THs emayyedias, born in accordance with
the promise, Ro. ix. 8; Gal. iv. 28; rd mvedpa ths émay-
yeAias 7d Gyvov, the promised Spirit, Eph. i. 13; ai d.a67-
Kat THs emayyeAlas, covenants to which was united the
promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12;
) €mayyeXia Tov Oeov, given by God, Ro. iv. 20; in the
plur. 2 Co. i. 20; ai emayyeAXiat rév marépwy, the promises
made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8; with the gen. of the
object, ras Cons, 1 Tim. iv. 8; Hs mapovaias airov, 2
Pet. iii. 4; kar’ éemayyeXiay according to promise, Acts
xiii. 23; Gal. iii. 29; 80 emayyeXias, Gal. iii. 18. b. by
meton. a promised good or blessing (cf. édmis, sub fin.) :
Gal. iii. 22; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic.];
dmooreAXe THY emayyediav Tov Tmatpos pov, the blessing
promised by my Father, Lk. xxiv. 49; mepuévew, Acts
1.4; xopi¢erOa thy émayyediav, Heb. x. 36; xi. [13 T Tr
WH, mpocddxecbar Lj, 39; AapBavew ras emayyeXias,
Heb. xi. 13 [RG]; emrvyydavew éemayyedar, ib. vs. 33;
kAnpovouetv Tas emayyedias, Heb. vi. 12; emirvyxavery ths
enayyeXias, ib. 15; cAnpovopuot rhs emayyeXias, vs. 17 — (to
reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 15, 17 with xi. 18, 39, which at
first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac-
cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the
expiatory sacrifice offered at length to God by Christ,
were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before
Christ’s return from heaven; [al. explain the appar-
ent contradiction by the difference between the initial
and the consummate reception of the promise; see
the Comm. ad 1.]); with the epexeget. gen. AaBeiy thy
emayyeXiav Tov dyiov mvevparos, the promised blessing,
which is the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33; Gal. ii. 14, [ef.
W. § 34, 3 a. fin.]; ryv éenayyeAiav tis aiwviov KAnpovo-
pias, Heb. ix.15. ([Dem. 519, 8; Aristot. eth. Nic. 10,
1 p. 1164*, 29]; Polyb. 1, 43, 6, and often; Diod. 1, 5;
Joseph. antt. 3, 5,1; 5, 8,11; 1 Mace. x. 15.)*
ér-ayyédhw : [pres. mid. émayyéAAopar]; pf. pass. and
mid. émnyyeApac; 1 aor. mid. émnyyeAduny; from Hom.
down ; 1. f0 announce. 2. 10 promise: pass. @
emnyyeArat, to whom the promise hath been made, Gal.
iii. 19. Mid. to announce concerning one’s self; i. e.
1. to announce that one is about to do or to furnish some-
thing, i. e. to promise (of one’s own accord), to engage
(voluntarily) : 6 émayyethdpevos, Heb. x. 23 ; xi. 11; émny-
yeAra, he hath promised, foll. by \éywv, Heb. xii. 26;
Twi, to give a promise to one, Heb. vi. 13; ri, Ro. iv. 21;
Tit. i. 2; revi re, Jas. i. 12; ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 19; éayyediav,
to give a promise, 1 Jn. ii. 25 (Esth. iv. 7; [cf. W. 225
(211); B. 148 (129)]); foll. by the inf. [cf. W. § 44, 7¢.]:
ME. xiv.11; Acts vii.5. 2. to profess; ri, e.g. an art,
to profess one’s self skilled in it (ryv dpernv, Xen. mem.
1, 2, 7; rv orpanay, Hell. 3, 4, 3; copiay, Diog. Laért.
227
bd /
ETALPW
prooem. 12; cwPpoovvnv, Clem. Al. paedag. 3, 4 p. 299,
27 ed. Klotz; [cf. L. and S. s. v. 5]): Oeoo€Bevav, 1 Tim.
li. 10; yodou, vi. 21. [Comp. mpo-erayyeAa. | *
ém-GyyeApa, -ros, TO, (€mayyeAAw), @ promise: 2 Pet. i.
4; iii. 13. (Dem., Isoc., al.) *
ér-ayw, [pres. ptcp. émdywy]; 1 aor. ptep. émaéas (W.
p- 82 (78); [Veitch s. v. dyw]); 2 aor. inf. érayayeiv; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 8°37; to lead or bring upon:
twi tt, to bring a thing on one, i. e. to cause something to
befall one, usually something evil, 2 Pet. ii. 1, 5, (mjpa,
Hesiod. opp. 240; drav, Soph. Ajax 1189; yipas vécous
emayet, Plat. Tim. 33 a.; éavrois Sovdeiav, Dem. p. 424, 9;
dewvd, Palaeph. 6,7; kaka, Bar. iv. 29; dpuérpntov vdep, 3
Mace. ii. 4, and in other exx.; in the Sept. emi tua 71, as
kaka, Jer. Vi. 19; xi. 11, etc.; mdnynv, Ex. xi. 1; also in a
good sense, as ayadd, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 42; twi evdpo-
ovvnv, Bar. iv. 29). eémayew 76 aia twos emi twa, to bring
the blood of one upon any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt
of, make him answerable for, the violent death inflicted
on another: Acts v. 28, (like éemayew duapriav émi twa,
Gen. xx. 9; Ex. xxxii. 21, 34; daprias rarépwy emi rékva,
Ex. xxxiv. 7).*
ér-aywvitonat; to contend: rwi, for a thing, Jude 3.
(r@ ’AvviBa, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2; rats
vikats, added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13,
4; by others in diff. senses.) *
érr-aSpol{w: [pres. pass. ptcp. émabporCdpevos |; to gather
together (to others already present): pass. in Lk. xi. 29.
(Plut. Anton. 44, 1.) *
*Eraiveros [so W. § 6, 11. (cf. Chandler § 325) ; Exar
veros Recst T; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Lipsius, Gram.
Unters. p. 30 sq.; Roehl, Inserr. index iii.], (émawvéw),
-ov, 6, Epenetus, the name of a Christian mentioned in
Rorexvis os"
érr-aivew, -©; fut. emawéow (1 Co. xi. 22, for the more
com. éraiveoopat, cf. W. 86 (82); [B. 53 (46)]; L txt. Tr
mrg. eraw@) ; 1 aor.émjveca; (€mrawwos) ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 54m and nav; to approve, to praise, (with the
eri cf. Germ. be- in beloben [Passow s. v. émi, IV. C. 3
ce.]): twd, Ro. xv. 11; 1 Co. xi. 22; ruva, foll. by dre [ef.
W. § 30, 9 b.J, Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2; absol., foll. by
ort, 1 Co. xi. 17.*
émr-atvos, -ov, 6, (€mi and aivos [as it were, a tale for an-
other; cf. Bitm. Lexil. § 83,4; Schmidt ch. 155]) ; ap-
probation, commendation, praise: Phil. iv. 8; &« twos,
bestowed by one, Ro. ii. 29; é€matvov exew €x Tivos, gen.
of pers., Ro. xiii. 3; 6 €mawos yernoetat Exdor@ amd Tod
Geod, 1 Co. iv. 5; with gen. of the pers. to whom the
praise is given, Ro. ii. 29; 2 Co. viii. 18; eis émawov, to
the obtaining of praise, 1 Pet.i. 7; eis érawdv twos, that
a pers. or thing may be praised, Eph. i. 6,14; Phil. i. 11;
[wéeumerOat eis Em. Tivos, 1 Pet. ii. 14]; etvae eis érawdv
twos to be a praise to a pers. or thing, Eph. i. 12.*
érr-aipw; 1 aor. émppa, ptcp. émdpas, impv. 2 pers. plur.
émdpare, inf. émapar; pf. émnpxa (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.); [Pass.
and Mid., pres. éaipopat]; 1 aor. pass. émnpOnv; (on the
om. of iota subser. see aipw init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept.
chiefly for xiv}, also for 0°97}; to lift up, raise up, raise
MZ
eral yUvopaL
on high: rov aprépova, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (ra ioria,
Plut. mor. p. 870 [de Herod. malign. § 39]); ras yetpas,
in offering prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6; Ps. exxxiii.
(exxxiv.) 2); in blessing, Lk. xxiv. 50 [cf. W. § 65, 4c. ]
(Lev. ix. 22 [yet here €€dpas]; Sir. 1. 20) ; ras xepadds,
of the timid and sorrowful recovering spirit, Lk. xxi.
28 (so avyeva, Philo de prof. § 20); rods opOadpors, to
look up, Mt. xvii. 8; Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. iv. 35; vi. 5; ets
twa, Lk. vi. 20; eis rov ovpavev, Lk. xviii. 13; Jn. xvii.
1; tv horny, Lk. xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22,
(Dem. 449, 13; Sept. Judg. ii. 4; ix. 7; 2S. xiii. 36) ;
Tv mTépvay emi twa, to lift the heel against one (see
mrépva), Jn. xiii. 18. Pass. éanpOn, was taken up (of
Christ, taken up into heaven), Acts i. 9; reflex. and
metaph. to be lifted up with pride, to exalt one’s self: 2
Co. xi. 20 (Jer. xiii. 15; Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4;
XXXV. (xXxxii.) 1; 1 Macc. i. 3; ii. 63; Arstph. nub. 810;
Thue. 4, 18; Aeschin. 87, 24; with dat. of the thing of
which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zeph. i. 11; Hat. 9,
49; Thue. 1, 120; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24); —on 2 Co. x.
5 see tWopa.*
ér-aroxvvopat ; fut. émaurxvvOnoopna; 1 aor. érnaxuvOny,
and with neglect of augm. émaioyivOnv (2 Tim. i. 16 LT
Tr WH; cf.[ WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (80); [W. § 12
fin.]); fr. Aeschyl. down; to be ashamed (éri on account
of [ef. Is. i. 29 Alex. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8]; see aioyivw) :
absol. 2 Tim. i. 12; teva [on the accus. ef. W. § 32, 1b. a.;
B. 192 (166) ], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 ; ri, of
a thing, Ro. i. 16; 2Tim.i. 8,16; emi rem, dat. of a thing,
Ro. vi. 21; foll. by the inf. Heb. ii. 11; with the acc. of
a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Heb. xi. 16. (‘Twice in
the Sept.: Is. i. 29 [Alex. ]; Job xxxiv. 19.) *
€r-OLTEW, -O } 1. to ask besides, ask for more: Hom.
Tl. 23, 593. 2. to ask again and again, importunately :
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3;
[xviii. 35 L T Tr WH]; (Ps. eviii. (cix.) 10; Sir. xl. 28;
Soph. Oed. Col. 1364).*
é-axodov0éw, -a; 1 aor. émnKxodovénaa ; to follow (close)
upon, follow after; in the N. T. only metaph. rots iyveci
twos, to tread in one’s footsteps, i. e. to imitate his ex-
ample, 1 Pet. ii. 21; with the dat. of a pers. 1 Tim. v.
24 (opp. to mpodya, to go before; the meaning is, ‘ the
sins of some men are manifest now, even before they are
called to account, but the misdeeds of others are exposed
when finally judgment is held’; ef. Huther [or Ellic.]
ad loc.) ; €py@ aya66, to be devoted to good works, 1 Tim.
y. 10; used, with the dat. of the pers. to be mentally sup-
plied, of the miracles accompanying the preaching of
Christ’s ministers, Mk. xvi. 20. (Arstph., Thuc., Xen.,
Plato, sqq.; occasionally in Sept.) *
ér-axovw: 1 aor. émjxovaa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. often
for My and pow; 1. to give ear to, listen to; to per-
ceive by the ear. 2. to listen toi. e. hear with favor,
grant one’s prayer, (Aeschyl. choéph. 725; trav edyar,
Leian. Tim. 34): twos, to hearken to one, 2 Co. vi. 2 fr.
Ts. xlix. 8; often so in Sept.*
ér-akpodopat, -aua:: 3 pers. plur. impf. émnxpoarto ; to
listen to: with the gen. of a pers. Acts xvi. 25. (Plat.
228
Sg
E€TTAV@
comic. in Bekk. anecd. p. 360; Leian. Icarom. 1; Test.
xii. Patr. p. 710, test. Jos. § 8.) *
én-dv, con}. (fr. ewet and dy), after, when: with the sub-
junc. pres. Lk. xi. 34; with the subjune. aor., answering
to the Lat. fut. exact. (fut. perf.), Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xi. 22.
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 547.*
eravaykes, (avayxn, [hence lit. on compulsion]), neces-
sarily: mAnv tev éravayxes Tovtwv, besides these things
which are necessarily imposed, Acts xv. 28 [B. 27 (24)].
(Hdt., Andoe., Plato, Dem., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut.,
Aelian, Epict.) *
ér-av-dyw; 2 aor. inf. éravayayeiv, impv. émavayaye,
[ptep. emavayayorv, Mt. xxi.18 TWH txt. Trmrg.]; 1.
lit. to lead up upon, sc. rd motor, a ship upon the deep,
i.e. to put out, Lk. v./3 (Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 28; 2 Mace.
xii. 4) ; with efs r6 Babos added, into the deep, ibid. 4.
2. to lead back; intrans. to return [ef. B. 144 (126)]:
Mt. xxi. 18; (2 Mace. ix. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1,3; Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., Hdian., al.).*
ér-ava-pipvyokw ; to recall to mind again: twa, remind-
ing one, Ro. xv. 15. (Rare; Plato, legg. 3 p. 688 a.;
Dem. 74, (7) 9; [Aristot.].) *
€mr-AVO-TAVE : 1. to cause to rest upon anything:
Sept. in Judg. xvi. 26 ace. to cod. Alex.; Greg. Nyss.
2. Mid., [pres. émavaravopat]; fut. éravaraicopat, and
(Lk. x. 6 TWH after codd. 8B) ésavaranaopa (see
dvatravw) ; to rest upon anything: tui, metaph. 76 vopo,
to lean upon, trust to, Ro. ii. 17 (Mie. iii. 11; 1 Mace. viii.
12). to settle upon, fix its abode upon ; émi twa, with the
included idea of antecedent motion towards (see eis, C. 2
p- 186") : 7 eipnyn em adror i. e. shall rest, remain, upon
him or it, Lk. x. 6 (rd mvetdpa emi rwa, Num. xi. 25; 2 K.
ii. 155 éxi tun, Num. xi. 26 var.).*
émr-av-epxopat; 2 aor. emavnAdov; to return, come back
again: Lk. x. 35; xix. 15. (Hqdt.; freq. in Attic writ.) *
érr-av-lorype: fut. mid. ésavacrnoopmar; to cause to rise
up against, to raise up against; Mid. to rise up against
(Hdt., Arstph., Thue., Polyb., al.) : émié reva, Mt. x. 21;
Mk. xiii. 12, as in Deut. xix. 11; xxii. 26; Mic. vii. 6.*
érr-av-dpQwors, -ews, 7, (€mavopOdw), restoration to an up-
right or a right state; correction, improvement, (in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down): of life and character, 2 Tim. iii.
16 [cf. rov Oedv... xpdvov ye mpos éravépbwow (airois)
mpoorcaverv, Plut. de sera num. vind. 6]; with rod Biov
added, Polyb. 1, 35,1; Epict. diss. 3, 21,15; ceavrov,
id. ench. 51,1; [7OcKy d€ ta mpos avOpemivear éravépbwow
70av, Philo de ebriet. § 22; cf. de confus. lingg. § 36 fin.];
(cf. émavopOovv kai eis perdvotay arayewv, Joseph. antt. 4,
6, 10).*
ér-dveo, adv., (émi and dvw [cf. W. 102 (97); B. 319
(273)]), Hdt. et sqq.; often in the Sept.; above; bE
adverbially, a. of place: Lk. xi. 44; b. of number;
beyond, more than: mpaOnvat emdvw tpiaxociwv Snvapiav,
sold for more than three hundred denaries, Mk. xiv. 5;
@pbn eravw mevraxociots adedois, by more than five hun-
dred brethren, 1 Co. xv. 6; cf. W. § 37, 5; [B. 168
(146) ]. 2. as a preposition it is joined with the gen.
[W. § 54,6], a. of place: Mt. ii. 9; v.14; xxi. 7 RG;
Saas, S 2
€TAPaTos
xxiii. 18, 20, [22]; xxvii. 37; xxviii. 2; Lk. iv. 39; [x.
19]; Rev. vi. 8 [WH br. the gen.]; xx. 3, [11 Tr txt.].
b. of dignity and power: ée£ovciay éyew éemavw twos, Lk.
xix. 17, [19]; émavw mavrov éori, Jn. iii. 31°, [31° (but
here GT WH mrg. om. the cl.) ]."
é-Gparos, -ov, (€mapdoua [to call down curses upon]),
accursed: Jn. vii. 49 LTTrWH. (Thuc., Plato, Aes-
chin., Dio Cass., al.) *
én-apkéw, -@; 1 aor. [émjpxeca], subjunc. éemapkéeow;
properly, to avail or be strong enough for . . . (see dpkéw) ;
hence —_a.. to ward off or drive away, ri ti, a thing for
another’s advantage i. q. a thing from any one (Hom.),
to defend. b. to aid, give assistance, relieve, (Hdt.,
Aeschyl., al.) : rei, 1 Tim. v. 10; Mid. to give aid from
one’s own resources, 1 Tim. v. 16 acc. to the reading
érapxeioOw (Ltxt.T Tr WU mrg.) for émapkxeirw (RG L
mrg. WH txt.); (xara Sdvapiv GdAndos emapkeiv, Xen.
mem: 2,\ 7; 1).*
émdpxetos, -ov, belonging to an €mapyxos or prefect; 7
emapxetos Sc. e€oucia, i. q. 7 emapxia (see the foll. word),
a prefecture, province: Acts xxv.1TWHmrg. So 7
emapxtos, Euseb. h. e. 2, 10, 3 (with the var. émdpyevov) ;
2p 26 wa oo ne: Gemart.peales 1 > 13, dik
érapxia [-yeia I’ WH (see ex, ¢)], -as, 7, (fr. érapyxos
i.e. 6 ém apyn dv the one in command, prefect, goy-
ernor), prefecture; i. e. 1. the oflice of érapyxos or
prefect. 2. the region subject to a prefect; a province
of the Roman empire, either a larger province, or an ap-
pendage to a larger province, as Palestine was to that
of Syria [cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. p. 144 sqq.]: Acts xxiii.
34; xxv. 1 [see the preced. word]; (Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Dio Cass.). Cf. Krebs, Observv. ete. p. 256 sqq.; Fischer,
De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 432 sqq.; [BB.DD. (esp. Kitto)
s. v. Province ].*
€m-avaAts, -ews, 7, (emi and avs tent, place to pass the
night in; hence a country-house, cottage, cabin, fold),
a farm; a dwelling, [A. V. habitation]: Acts i. 20 fr. Ps.
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 26. (Diod., Plut., al.; also a camp, military
quarters, Plato, Polyb.) *
€r-avpiov, adv. of time, i. q. ém avpiov, on the morrow;
in the N. T. 14 émavpsov, sc. nuépa, the next day, on the
morrow: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xi. 12; Jn. i. 29; Acts x.
9, ete.; Sept. for NINN.
€r-avToddpw, see a’tépwpos, p. 87°.
*Eradpas, -a [ B. 20 (17 sq.) ], 6, Epaphras, a Christian
man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23. The
conjecture of some that the name is contracted from
"Eradpddiros (q. v. [cf. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that
these two names belong to one and the same man, is not
probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epaphras; Bp. Lehtft.
Com. on Phil. p. 61 note 4]. The name is com. in
inscriptions.*
ér-adpifw; to foam up (Mosch. 5,5); to cast out as
foam, foam out: ri, Jude 18 calls the godless and grace-
less set of whom he speaks xtpara érappitovra ras éavtaev
uicxvvas, i. e. (dropping the figure) impelled by their
restless passions, they unblushingly exhibit, in word and
deed, their base and abandoned spirit; cf. Is. lvii. 20.*
9 eTTElTrep
"Emahpddtros, -ov, 6, (fr. "Adpodirn, prop. ‘charming’),
Epaphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry:
Phil. ii. 25; iv. 18. See ’Emadpas above.*
ém-eyelpw: 1 aor. émnyepa; fo raise or excite against:
tt emi twa, Acts xiii. 50 (Siwypdv) ; xard tivos, to stir up
against one: ras puxas ... kara Tov ddeApar, Acts xiv. 2.*
ére(, [fr. temporal émi and éi, lit. thereupon when; Cur-
tius, Erliut. etc. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 356, 7], conjune-
tion, (Lat. cum), when, since, [cf. W. § 53, 1] $s sed! 1
of time, after; so once in the N.'T.: Lk. vii. 1 (where
LT Tr txt. WH txt. éseidn). 2. of cause, etc., since,
seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 T Tr Wiis
xxvii. 6; Mk. xv. 42; Lk.i. 34; Jn. xiii. 29; xix. 31;
1 Co. xiv. 12; 2 Co. xi. 18; xiii.3; Heb.v. 2,11; vi. 13;
ix. 17; xi. 11; émet odv since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6.
Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech,
we must often supply in thought between émei and the
proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it
is (or were) otherwise; so that the particle, although
retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other-
wise, else, or for then, (Germ. sonst); so in Ro. xi. 6, 22;
Heb. ix. 26; émet dpa, 1 Co. v. 10; vii. 14, [ef. W. § 53,
8 a.]; émei alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (447);
B. 233 (200)]: Ro. iii. 6; 1 Co. xiv. 16; xv. 29; Heb. x.
2; (4 Mace. i. 33; ii. 7,19; vi. 34 (35); vii. 21; viii. 8).
Cf. Matthiae § 618; [B. § 149, 5].*
éret-57, conjunction, (fr. émei and 67), Lat. cum jam,
when now, since now, [ef. W. 434 (404), 448 (417); Ellic.
on Phil. ii. 26]; 1. of time; when now, after that;
so once in the N. T.: Lk. vii. 1 L T Tr txt. WH txt. 2.
of cause; since, seeing that, forasmuch as: Mt. xxi. 46
[R GL]; Lk. xi.6; Acts xiii. 46; xiv. 12; xv. 24; 1 Co.
1. 21, 225 xiv. 165 xv. 215 [2 Cov. 4: Ree.*}; Phil. 26*
emet-Sy-tep [éeidn mep Lehm.], conjunction, (fr. eet,
6n and wép), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg.
quoniam quidem, since now, [ef. W. 448 (417) ]: Lk. i. 1.
(Aristot. phys. 8, 5 [p. 256", 25]; Dion. Hal. 2, 72; Philo
ad Gai. § 25, and Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
én-eidov ['Tdf. 7 epeidov]; impv. émide (Lehm. equde, cf.
W.§5,1d.14; B. 7; [reff. s. v. dpetdov]; besides see
eido, I.); to look upon, to regard: foll. by a telic inf.,
ereidev adeAeiv TO dvetdds pov ([R. V. looked upon me to
take away etc.], Germ. hat hergeblickt), Lk. i. 25; emi te,
to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, ef. Lat. ani-
madvertere), Acts iv. 29.*
erent; (emi, and ets to go); to come upon, approach ;
of time, to come on, be at hand; ptcp. emty, -ovca, -dv,
next, following: th éemtovon, sc. nwepa, on the following
day, Acts’ xvi. Jd ; xx 15 3 xxi. 118;.(Polyb. 2,-255 11;
5, 18, 10; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,6; [Prov. xxvii. 1]; etc.);
with #u¢pa added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down),
Acts vii. 26; 19 émtovon vuxti, Acts xxiii. 11. Cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 464.*
ével-srep, conjunction, (émel, mép), since indeed, since at
all events; [it introduces a “known and unquestioned
certainty ”]: Ro. iii. 30 RG (but L Tr et rep, TWH
etrep). Cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 784; [Biumlein p. 204;
W. 448 (417). Fr. the Tragg. down. ]*
eTrELTAYwYN
ém-er-aywyt, -7s, 7, a bringing in besides or in addition
to what is or has been brought in: kpeirrovos €dmidos, Heb.
vii. 19. (In Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 2 used of the introduction
of a new wife in place of one repudiated ; érépwy intpar,
Hippocr. p. 27 [vol. i. p. 81 ed. Kithn]:; mpooamerv, of
characters in a play, Dion. Hal. ser. cens. 2, 10; in the
plur. of places for letting in the enemy, Thue. 8, 92.) *
ém-ero-epxopar: fut. emeroehevoouat ; 1. to come in
besides or to those who are already within; to enter after-
wards, (Hdt., Thue., Plato, al.). 2. to come in upon,
come upon by entering; to enter against: émi twa, ace. of
pers., Lk. xxi. 35 LT Trtxt. WH; with simple dat. of
pers. 1 Mace. xvi. 16.*
meta, adv., (€mi, eira), thereupon, thereafter, then,
afterwards; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 RG; Lk.
xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21; Jas. iv. 14; pera rodro is added re-
dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 65, 2;
[B. 397 (840)]); a more definite specification of time is
added epexegetically, wera éry rpia, Gal. i. 18; dca Se-
xatecodpev érav, Gal. ii. 1. b. in enumerations it is
used a. of time and order: aporov... érera, 1 Co.
xv. 46; 1 Th. iv. 17; mpdrepov .. . éeuta, Heb. vii. 27;
drapxy... émecra, 1 Co. xv. 23; etra [but T Tr mre. WH
mrg. meta] .. . €metra, 1 Co. xv. 5, 6; éetra... émecra,
ib. 7 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH mrg. 8. of order alone:
mparov ... émetra, Heb. vii. 2; tpirov... émetra.. . €ret-
ta (RG eira),1 Co. xii. 28.*
én-éxeva (i. q. em éxeiva sc. pépn (ef. W. §6, 11. fin.]),
adv., beyond: with the gen., BaBvA@vos, Acts vii. 43.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down both with and without
the gen.; in the Sept. Am. v. 27; Gen. xxxv. 163; Jer.
KK Ls)
ér-ex-retvo: [pres. mid. ptcp. émexrewvdpevos]; to
stretch out to or towards; Mid. to stretch (one’s self) for-
ward to: with dat. of thing indicating the direction [W.
§ 52,4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see €umpoodev, 1 fin.).*
érevdurns, -ov, 6, (erevduve or éerevdva, q. V., [cf. W. 25 ;
94 (90) ]), an upper garment, (‘Tertull. superindumentum) :
Jn. xxi. 7, where it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse
or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work.
(Soph. frag. 391 Dind.[(248 Ahrens) ; Poll. 7,45 p. 717];
Sept. twice [thrice] for yn, 1 S. xviii. 4 [Alex.]; 2S.
xiii. 18; [add Lev. viii. 7 Alex.].) *
én-ev-Stw: 1 aor. mid. inf. érevdtcacGar; ‘0 pul on over
[A. V. to be clothed upon]: 2 Co. v. 2, 4.
11; actively, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 12.) *
ém-epxopar; fut. émeAevoouat; 2 aor. émpdOov (3 pers.
plur. émmAdav, Acts xiv. 19 L T Tr WH); Sept. chiefly
for 8/3; 1. to come to, to arrive; a. univ., foll. by
aro with a gen. of place, Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; ¢o
come on, be at hand, be future: év rots aidat trois érepxo-
pevos, Eph. ii. 7, (Is. xli. 4, 22, 23; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down); of that which time will bring, to impend: 4 ra-
Aatrwpia 7 émepxopern, Jas. v.13 rwi, Lk. xxi. 26, (Is.
Ixiii. 4; also of things favorable, 7 edAoyia, Sir. iii. 8).
2. to come upon, overtake, one; so even in Hom., as of
steep, tuvd, Od. 4, 793; 10,31; revi, 12, 311; of disease,
11, 200; é€wi ria, a. of calamities: Lk. xxi. 35 RG;
230
(Plut. Pelop. |
eTEPWOTN LA
Acts viii. 24; xiii. 40 [L T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br.
ep’ v.], (Gen. xlii. 21; Mic. iii. 11; Zeph. ii. 2; 2 Ch. xx.
9; Jer. v. 12 [here 7€er]). b. of the Holy Spirit, de
scending and operating in one: Lk. i. 35; Acts i. 8. e.
of an enemy attacking one: émedav vixnon adrév, Lk. xi.
22; (Hom. Il. 12, 136; 1 S. xxx. 23; w. dat. of pers.
IIdian. 1, 8, 12 [6 Bekk.]).*
érr-epwtdw,-@; impf. emnpwreav; fut. ésepwrnow; 1 aor.
€mmpatnca; 1 aor. pass. ptep. érepwrnbeis ; Sept. mostly
for 9Nw, sometimes for W771; 1. to accost one with an
inquiry, pul a question to, inquire of, ask, interrogate,
[emt directive, uniformly in the N.T.; Mey. on Mk.
xi. 29 (cf. émt, D. 2)]: red, Mk. ix. 325 xii. 34; Mt. xxii.
46; Lk. ii. 46; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Jn. xviii. 21 RG; rwa re,
ask one any thing, Mk. vii. 17 L T Tr WH; xi. 29; Lk.
xx. 40; teva trept twos, one about a thing, Mk. vii. 17 RG;
(Lk. ix. 45 Lehm.], (Hdt. 1, 32; Dem. 1072, 12): foll.
by Aé€yov with the words used by the questioner, Mt. xii.
10:3 xvil. 105) Mikaixeils xii. WSs besa; 24's) xx?
xxiii. 3 [RG L], and often in the Synoptic Gospels; foll.
by ei, whether, Mk. viii. 23; xv. 443; Lk. xxiii. 6; or some
other form of the indirect question, Acts xxiii. 34; émnpo-
tov deyovres [LT Tr WH om. deéy.], ris etn, Lk. viii. 9;
émepwrav Gedy to consult God (Num. xxiii. 3; Josh. ix. 20
(14); Judg.i. 1; xviii.5; Is. xix. 3, ete.; Thue. 1, 118,
[ete.]), hence to seek to know God’s purpose and to do his
will, Ro. x. 20 fr, Is. Ixv. 1. 2. by a usage foreign
to the Greeks, to address one with a request or demand ;
to ask of or demand of one: foll. by the inf. Mt. xvi. 1 (so
érep. twa tT, Hebr. ONw, in Ps. exxxvi. (cxxxvil.) 3; [this
sense is disputed by some; see Zezschwitz as referred to
at end of next word; cf. Weiss on Mt. 1. c., and see
épotaw, 2]).
ér-epotnpa, -ros, 7d, (€mepwrdw) ; 1. an inquiry, a
question: Hdt. 6,67; Thue. 3, 53. 68. 2. a demand ;
so for the Chald. x)xw in Dan. iv. 14 Theod.; see érepw-
Taw, 2. 3. As the terms of inquiry and demand often
include the idea of desire, the word thus gets the signi-
fication of earnest seeking, i. e. a craving, an intense de
sire (sO émepwray ets rt, to long for something, 2 8. xi. 7—
[but surely the phrase here (like 5 Oxw) means simply
to ask in reference to, ask about]). If this use of the
word is conceded, it affords us the easiest and most con-
gruous explanation of that vexed passage 1 Pet. iii. 21:
“which (baptism) now saves us [you] not because in re-
ceiving it we [ye] have put away the filth of the flesh,
but because we [ye] have earnestly sought a conscience
reconciled to God ” (cuvednaews adyabns gen. of the obj.,
as opp. to capkos purov). It is doubtful, indeed, whether
eis bedv is to be joined with emepornua, and signifies a
craving directed unto God [W. 194 (182) — yet less fully
and decidedly than in ed. 5, p. 216 sq. ], or with ovveidnats,
and denotes the attitude of the conscience towards (in
relation to) God; the latter construction is favored by a
comparison of Acts xxiv. 16 ampécxorov ovveidnow exew
mpos tov Oedv. The signification of érep. which is ap-
proved by others, viz. stipulation, agreement, is first met
with in the Byzantine writers on law; “moreover, th
’ /
ETTEN @
formula xara r6 émepotnua THs ceuvoratns BovAjs, common
in inscriptions of the age of the Antonines and the follow-
ing Cesars, exhibits no new sense of the word éi:pwrnya;
for this formula does not mean ‘acc. to the decree of the
senate’ (ex senatus consulto, the Grk. for which is cata
ra dé€arra th Bovdj), but ‘after inquiry of or application
to the senate,’ i. e. ‘with government sanction.’” Ze-
eschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten-
tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; [Farrar, Early Days of Christi-
anity, i. 138 n.; Kahler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 1878)
pp- 331-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana-
logical) passive sense of ézep. viz. ‘the thing asked
(the demand) of a good conscience towards God’ i. q.
the avowal of consecration unto him].*
ér-€xw; impf. emeiyov; 2 aor. émécxov; 1. to have
or hold upon, apply: sc. rv voov, to observe, attend to, foll.
by an indir. quest., Lk. xiv. 7; wi, dat. of pers., to give
altention to one, Acts iii. 5; 1 Tim. iv. 16, (with dat. of a
thing, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 2; 2 Mace. ix. 25; Polyb. 3, 43,
2, ete.; fully dpOadpdv tum, Leian. dial. mar. 1, 2). 2:
to hold towards, hold forth, present : Aéyov Cw7s, asa light,
by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Phil. ii.
16 [al. al., cf. Mey. or Ellic. ad loc.]. 3. to check ({cf.
Eng. hold up], Germ. anhalten): sc. éuavrév, to delay,
stop, stay, Acts xix. 22, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down;
[ef. W. § 38,1; B. 144 (126); Fritzsche on Sir. v. 1].*
érnpedtw ; (€mnpeca [spiteful abuse, cf. Aristot. rhet. 2,
2,4]); toinsult; to treat abusively, use despitefully; to re-
vile: twa, Mt. v. 44 RG; Lk. vi. 28, (with dat. of pers.,
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 31; 3, 5,16); in a forensic sense, to
accuse falsely: with the acc. of a thing, 1 Pet. iii. 16.
(Xen., Isaeus, Dem., Philo, Plut., Leian., Hdian.; to
threaten, Hdt. 6, 9 [but ef. Cope on Aristot. u. s.].) *
érl, [before a rough breathing 颒 (occasionally in Mss.
em; see e. g. Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some in-
stances before a smooth breathing (as ef’ éAmids, Acts
ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); seeddeidov. It neglects
elision before proper names beginning with a vowel
(exe. Atyumroyv Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s
txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq. ;
cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr.
local prefix dpi; Curtius § 335], joined to the gen., the
dat., and the ace.; its primary signification is upon (Lat.
super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note]).
A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336
(289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on
which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with
the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abid-
ing, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.;
of doing anything: émi «divs, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii.
34; émt rov dparos, Mt. xxiv. 17; Lk. xvii. 31; én’ épy-
pias (cf. on a desert), Mk. viii. 4; és raév veperdy, Mt.
xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; énl (rqs) yns, Mt. vi. 10; ix. 63 xxiii.
9; xxvill. 18; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 19, and very often;
emt ths Oaddoons, on (the surface of) the sea, Mt. xiv.
25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, [49]; Rev. v. 13,
and, ace. to the interp. of many, Jn. vi. 19; but cf. Baumg.-
Crusius ad loc. [per contra, cf. Liicke ad loc.; Meyer on
231
,
€7rs
Mt. 1. c.J, (Job ix.8; Baditew ed? ddaros, Leian. philops.
13; emi rod meAdyous diadeovres, v. h. 2,4; [ Artem. oneir.
3, 16}; on a different sense of the phrase émt ris Oaddo-
ans see 2 a. below [W. 374 (351) ]); moveiv onpeia em rev
doGevovvrwy, to be seen upon the bodies of men, exter-
nally, (on the sick [cf. W.375 (351) ]), Jn. vi. 2; éxd@voa
and xaOnyat [kabéCopar]| emi, Mt. xix. 28; xxiii. 2; xxiv.
3; xxv.31; xxvii. 19; Jn. xix.13; Acts xx.9; Rev. ix.
17, ete. ; €orny, €ornxa emi, Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi.40; Rev.
x. 5,8; where parts of the body are spoken of : émi yeupar,
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11; émi tis Kehadfs, Jn. xx. 7; 1 Co.
xi. 10; Rev. x. 1 RG [al. ace.]; xii. 1; cwddva emi yupvod,
MK. xiv. 51; émi rod peramov [or -rav], Rev. vii. 3; ix.
4; xiii. 16 [Rec., al. ace.]; xiv.9. _b. Like the prep. ép
(see the exposition s. v. év, I. 7 p. 212"), so also éwi with
the gen. is used after verbs expressing motion to indi-
cate the rest following the motion; thus after Bad\ew,
Mk. iv. 26; Mt. xxvi. 12; omeipew, Mk. iv. 31; riOévat,
Jn. xix. 195 Acts v.15; (Lk. viii. 16 L)T Tr' WH];
éemutiOevat, Lk. viii. 16 [RG]; xacévar, Acts x. 113 rinrecy,
Mk. ix. 20; xiv. 35; émypapev, Heb. x. 16 RG; edxcvev,
Jn. xxi. 11 RG; epxecOa, Heb. vi. 7; Rev. iii. 10; [ava-
rede, Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH]; yevopevos emi rod
rorov (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Lk. xxii. 40,
[ef. W. p. 376 (352) and see below, C. I. 1 b. fin.]. xpepav
riva emi (Hebr. Sy mA, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 22, etc.),
for which the Latin has suspendere ex, de, a, and alicui,
Acts v.30; x. 39; Gal.iii.13. c. fig. used of that upon
which any thing rests, (like our upon) [ef. W. 375
(351); B. 336 (289); Ellic. on 1 Tim. as below]: ta
oraby emt ordpatos ete. (Ca-oy Dap? Deut. xix. 15), rest-
ing on the declaration, etc., Mt. xviii. 16 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1;
more simply ézi paptvpar, 1 Tim. v.19; in the adv. phrase
ém dAnOeias (on the ground of truth), see dAndeca, I. 1.
[e’. akin is its use (with a personal or a reflex. pron.) to
denote dependence, as in hoy:fécOw ef’ (al. af’ q. v.
II. 2d. aa.) éavrod, 2 Co. x.7T Tr WH (for himself, i. e.
apart from and independently of others; R. V. with him-
self); cf. Kithner ii. 432; L.andS.s.v.A.L1d.J 4.
fig. used of things, affairs, persons, which one is
set over, over which he exercises power; Lat.
supra, our over [ef. below, B. 2 b. and C. I. 2e.]: em
navrov, Ro. ix. 5; Eph. iv. 6 (where ézi, da and év are
distinguished); kaOicrnpi twa éxi twos, Mt. xxiv. 45;
xxv. 21, 28; Lk. xii. 42; Acts vi. 3, (Gen. xxxix. 4, 5;
1 Mace. vi. 14; x. 37, etc.; Plat. rep. 5 p. 460 b., etc.) ;
Sidwpi tur e~ovaolay emi twos, Rev. ii. 26; exw efovoiav
émt twos, Rev. xx.63 Baowdevew emi twos, Mt. ii. 22 RG
Tr br.; Rev. v. 10; yew ed’ éavtod Bacrhéa, Reve re 115
yew Baowrelav ert tov Baciewr, Rev. xvii. 18; 6s Av emt
ris yatns, who was over the treasury, Acts viii. 27; 6 emt
rov Kotravos, he who presided over the bed-chamber, the
chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (Passow i. 2 p. 1035* gives
many exx. fr. Grk. auth. [ef. L. and S. s. v. A. HI. 1; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 474; Soph. Lex. s. v.]; for exx. fr. the O. T.
Apocr. see Wahl, Clavis Apocr. p. 218"). e. of that to
which the mental act looks or refers: éyew én
twos, to speak upon (of) a thing, Gal. iii. 16 (Plato,
ETL
Charm. p. 155 d.; legg. 2 p. 662 d.; Ael. v. h. 1, 30;
scribere super re, Cic. ad Att. 16, 6; disserere super, Tac.
ann. 6, 28; cf. W. 375 (351); [B. 336 (289)]). f. of
one on whom an obligation has been laid: edxyny éxew
ed’ éavrov, have (taken) on themselves a vow, have
bound themselves by a vow, Acts xxi. 23 [WH txt. ag’
éavt. (see aro, II. 2 d. aa.)]. 2. used of vicinity,
i.e. of the place at, near, hard by, which, (Germ. bei, an) ;
a. prop. xéAmos 6 én mootOniov, Hdt. 7, 115; emt rav
6upav, [Acts v. 23 LT Tr WH] (1 Mace. i. 55; [Plut.
G. Gracch. 14, 3 p. 841 c.]); cf. Matthiae il. p. 1366
§ 584; Passow s. v. p. 1034”; [L. and S.s.v. I. 1 a. sub
fin.]. But the exx. of this signification adduced from
the N. T. [with the exception of Acts 1. c.] (and most
of those fr. Grk. auth. also) are such as to allow the ren-
dering of émi by super also, over or above [so W. 374 sq.
(351)]: emi ris Oaddoons at the sea, upon the shore, or
above the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, Jn. vi. 19
(?[cf. 1 a. above]); xxi. 1, (Ex. xiv. 2; Deut. i. 40; 1
Mace. xiv. 34; xv. 113; Polyb. 1, 44, 4; cf. the French
Boulogne sur mer, Chalons sur Marne, [Eng. Stratford
on Avon], etc.; émt rod morapov, Ezek. i. 1; [Xen. an.
4, 3, 28]; emt rod “Iopdavov, 2 K. il. 7); eoOiew ent rs
tpamre(ns twos (Germ. tiber Jemands Tische essen, (cf.
Eng. over one’s food, over one’s cups, etc.]), food and
drink placed upon the table, Lk. xxii. 30 cf. 215 ouxny
emt THs O00, a fig-tree above (i. e. higher than) the way,
Mt. xxi.19. _b. before, with gen. of a pers., in the pres-
ence of one as spectator, or auditor, [W. 375 (351); B.
336 (289)]: Mt. xxviii. 14 [L Tr WH mrg. ind]; Mk.
Klis OA Cts x X1ve 1920 sexxvs 9) scxvi Died! Col wvaaell
6; 2 Co. vii. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [some bring this under II.
below; see paprupéw]; emt tod Bnuaros Kaicapos, Acts
xxv.10. cc. émi rov (Rec. trys) Barov at the bush, i.e. at
the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken
of, Mk. xii. 26 (see ev, I. 1 d.). II. of Time when;
with gen. of a pers. in the time or age of a man, [“ in the
days of” |; at the time when an office was held by one;
under the administration of, [ef. W. 375 (352); B. 336
(289) ]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 25 iv. 27; Acts xi, 28; (1
Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this
phrase is equiv. to “in or of the reign ete. of,” and is
preceded by a specification of the year etc., see B. D.
Am. ed. p. 651 note]; 2 Macc. viii. 19; xv. 22; for
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 2 p. 1035,
[less fully in L. and S.s.v. A. II.]). with the gen. of a
thing, at the time of any occurrence: émi ris perotecias
BaSvAavos, at the time of the deportation to Babylon,
Mt. i. 11; [on Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH see dvcpn |; of
the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on: én
Tv Tpocevxay pov, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers,
when I am praying, Ro. i. 10 (9); Eph. i. 16; 1 Th. i.
2; Philem. 4. of time itself, én’ ésydrwy and (acc. to
another reading) eayadrov tev jpepar (lit. at the end of
the days): 2 Pet. iii. 3; Heb. i. 2 (1), (for the Hebr.
DD INN, Gen. xlix.1; Num. xxiv. 14; Jer. xxxvii.
(xxx.) 24; Mic.iv. 1; Dan. x. 14); én’ éoxdrov Tod xpédvou,
Jude 18 LT TrWH; [ray xpdver, 1 Pet. i. 20 LT TrWH].
2 €mi
fate 23
B. with the Darive, used of Place [W. 392 (366)
sq.; B. 336 (289) sq.]; and 1. properly; a. of the
place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl.,
Germ. auf with the dat.) [Eng. on, etc.], where contin-
uance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of : ef’ 6 (L
txt. T Tr WH Gmov) xaréxerro, Mk. ii. 4; AtOos emi AiOw
[-6ov T Tr WH], Mk. xiii. 2; émi mivax, Mt. xiv. 8,11;
Mk. vi. 255 emi rots xpaBBaros, Mk. vi. 55; dvaxdivae
mavras émit T@ xopte, Mk. vi. 39; émexetro én’ aire, lay
upon it, Jn. xi. 38; ep immos, Rev. xix. 14. b. of the
place in which (Lat. in with the abl., Germ. au/
with the acc.), after verbs expressing motion towards
a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the
motion, [ Eng. upon, at, etce.]: Baddew AlOov eri tin, dat. of
pers., Jn. viii. 7 Rec. ; ofxodopety, Mt. xvi. 18 ; errotxodopeiv,
Eph. ii. 20; émPaddecv, Mt. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 36 émBdddew
emi Tt); emtppanrew, Mk. ii. 21 (where L T Tr WH have
émi with acc.); émmintev, Acts viii. 16. c. of the
place above which (Lat. super, Germ. iiber, [Eng.
over]): ém avta, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which
Mt. xxvii. 37 é€mava ts keadjs adrov). d. of the
place at, or by, or near which: émi @vpais and émi 7H
dupa, Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Acts v. 9. (and often
in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1037*; [L. and S. s. v.
B. I. 1a.; ef. A. I. 2a. above]); emt rH mpoBarixy, Jn.
v. 2; emt t@ moraua, Rev. ix. 14; émi tH orva, Acts iii.
11; ew [LT Tr WH aap’) atrois éemipeivar, Acts xxviii.
14. 2. Metaph.; a. of that upon which any action,
effect, condition, rests as a basis or support; prop.
upon the ground of; and a. of that upon which any-
thing is sustained or upheld: (Hy emi ten, to sus-
tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where L Tr, the sec-
ond time, év; [cf. W. 389 (364) note]); Lk. iv. 4, (Deut.
viii. 3 for by mn; Plat. Alcib. 1 p. 105 ¢.; Plut. de
cup. divit. 7 p. 526d.; Alciphr. epp. 3, 7, ete.) ; oumevac
émt Tots dpros, to understand by reasoning built upon
the loaves, Mk. vi. 52 [ef. W. 392 (367) ; B. 3837 (290)}.
B. of that upon which anything rests (our upon):
em eAmids [see in éAmis, 2]; supported by hope, in hope,
(cf. W. § 51, 2£.], Actsii. 26; Ro. iv. 185 1-Co. ix: 10,
[differently in e. below]; to do any thing émi r@ dvopari
twos, relying upon the namei. e. the authority of any
one [cf. W. 393 (367)]: eAXevoovra: emi Tm dvopati pov,
appropriating to themselves the name of Messiah, which
belongs to me, Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in
which pass. A€yovres, Ort €y@ eit 6 Xpioros is added by
way of explanation) ; Bamrigeo@ac emi [L. Tr WH ev] ro
dv. Xpiorod, so as to repose your hope and confidence in his
Messianic authority, Acts li. 38; d€yec@ai twa eri To ov.
pov, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted
to my authority and instruction, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37;
Lk. ix. 48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his
name being introduced, appeal being made tohis authority
and command: as xnpvocew, didackev, etc., Lk. xxiv. 47;
Acts iv. 17, 18; v. 28,40; Suva rroceiv, Sarpova exBar-
Ae, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [cf. W.
393 (367) ], Mk. ix. 39; Lk.ix.49[WH Trmrg. éyv]. .
of that upon which as a foundation any super
5)
€7Tt
structure is reared: vouobereiaba, Heb. vii. 11 (er
avry, for which L T Tr WH have em airijs) ; viii. 6 ; after
verbs of trusting, believing, hoping, ete.: dpkei-
cba eri tu, 3 Jn. 10; mappnordgecOa, Acts xiv. 3; memor-
6éva, Mt. xxvii. 43 Ltxt. WH mrg.; Lk. xi. 22; xviii.
9; Mk. x. 24 [T WHom. Trmrg. br. the cl.]; 2 Co. i.
9; Heb. ii. 13; muorevew, Lk. xxiv. 25; Ro. ix. 33; x.11,
etc. ; eAmicer (see éAmitw), [cf. C. I. 2g.a. below]. 8. of
the reason or motive underlying words and deeds,
so that émi is equiv. to for, on account of, [W.394 (368);
B. 337 (290)]: Mt. xix. 9 RG T Tr WH txt.; Lk. v. 5
(émi 76 pyuari cov, at thy word, Germ. auf; [cf. W. § 48,
ce. d.; in reliance on]); Acts iii. 16 [WH om.]; iv. 9;
xi. 19 [L Tr mrg. have the gen.]; xxi. 24; 1 Co. viii. 11
(dro\dvo$a emi tin, Germ. zu Grunde gehen iiber ete.
[cf. W. 394 (368) note, but L T Tr WH read év]) ; Phil.
iii. 9; after aivetvy, Lk. ii. 20; do€aCew, Actsiv. 21; 2Co.
ix. 13 [ef. W. 381 (357) ]; paprupeiv, Heb. xi. 4; edyape
orev etc. to give thanks for,1 Co.i.4; 2 Co. ix. 15; Phil.
1.5; 1 Th.iii.9. ep’ 6 (equiv. to em rovra, dre for that,
on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Ro. v.
12 (on the various interpp. of this pass. see Dietzsch,
Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50 sqq.); 2 Co. v. 4
_ [Rect éwresdy J; Phil. iii. 12, (ef 6— 6 caravas — ovk taxvoe
Oavaraca avtovs, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 29 p. 138 ed. Otto ;
ep @ Tevvaduov éypaev, for the reason that he had ac-
cused Gennadius, Synes. ep. 73; cf. Hermann ad Vig.
p- 710; the better Greeks commonly used é@’ ois in the
same sense, cf. W. 394 (368) ; [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro.
l. c.; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.]). Used esp. after verbs sig-
nifying a mental affection or emotion, where we
also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i.
2, p. 1039"; Kriiger § 68, 41, 6; [cf. W. 393 (368) c.]):
as ayaddav, Lk. i. 47; yatpew, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i. 14;
xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, ete.; yapa éorat, Lk. xv. 7; yapav
(Rec. yapw) xo, Philem. 7; mapaxadciv, mapaxadeicba,
2 Co. i.4; vii.13; 1 Th. iii. 7; «date, Lk. xix. 41 RG;
xorrerov moveiv, Acts viii. 2; korrecOa, Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr
WH txt. the acc.]; ddvvacOa, Acts xx. 38; ddodvCetv,
Jas. v. 1; orvyvdgew, Mk. x. 22; ovddAumeioOa, Mk. iii.
55 peravoetv eri, to grieve over, repent of, 2 Co. xii. 21;
ondayxviCecda, Mt. xiv. 14 GLT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 34
RG; Lk. vii. 13 [Tdf. the ace.]; paxpodupeiv, Mt. xviii.
26 [Tr the acc.], 29 [L Tr the acc.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see
paxpobupew, 2]; Jas. v.73 dpyiterOa, Rev. xii. 17 [Lchm.
om. emi]; exmAnooec Oa, Mt. vii. 28; Mk.i. 22; Lk. iv. 32;
Acts xiii. 12; darapdooeo Oat, Lk. i. 29; &&icracOat, Lk. ii.
47; OauBetoOa, Mk. x. 24; O@apBos, Lk. v.9; Acts iii. 10;
Oavpatew, Mk. xii. 17; Lk. ii. 33; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26;
Acts ili. 12 ; kavyaoOa, Ro. v. 2; emarrxiveoOat, Ro. vi. 21;
mapa{nAovv and trapopyi¢ew tia emi run, Ro. x. 19. €. of
the rule, orcondition [W. 394 (368) d.]: én’ édmids, a
hope being held out or given, Ro. viii. 20; Tit. i. 2, (differ-
ently in B. above) ; émi ducly . . . udprvow, on condition
that two witnesses testify to the matter in question, [at
(the mouth of) two ete.; cf. W. 392 (367)], Heb. x. 28;
ert vexpois, equiv. to dvtwy vexpav (in the case of the dead),
if any one has died, Heb. ix.17. t. of the purpose
‘ 233
eri
and end [unto, for; W. 394 (368) e.]: én’ dvopare avrod,
to worship and profess his name, Acts xv. 14 Rec. ; xadeiv
twa emi tun, Lat. ad aliquid, Gal. v. 13; 1 Th. iv. 7, (én
fevia, Xen. an. 7, 6,3; cf. W.u.s.); KrioOevres emi fpyous
ayaOois, Eph. ii. 10; dpoveiv émi tux to take thought for
a thing, Phil. iv. 10; 颒 6 (bya later Grk. impropriety
for emi rin, cf. W. § 24,4; [B. § 139, 59; but on the ex-
treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of ds in direct
questions, see Pres. T. D. Woolsey in the Bibliotheca
Sacra for Apr. 1874, p.314 sqq.]) mapec; for what pur-
pose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid [al. quod | venisti?
Mt. xxvi. 50 R [but GL T Tr WH ef’ 6, see C.1.2¢.y.
aa. below] (Theoph. emi roim oxora; cf. Hdt. 7, 146
muOopevos, em oict jAOov; [but the view of many ancient
expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis :
“that for which thou hast come —do” is thoroughly es-
tablished by Dr. Woolsey u.s.]). of the issue or unde-
signed result: Aoyouayeiv émi katacrpopy rev dxovédr-
tov, 2 Tim. ii. 14; (rots emt apedeia merounpevors emi BAGBN
xpno@a, Xen. mem. 2, 3,19). 4. of the pattern or
standard [A. V. after; W. 394 (368) f.]: xadeiv twa
emt T@ dvopati Twos, to call one after the name of another,
Lk. i. 59 (Neh. vii. 63 [W. 410 (382) ]); emi rd dpompari
twos after the likeness of a thing, Ro. v.14. b. of that
over which one is placed, for its care or adminis-
tration: émt rots imapyoval tia Kabcoravat, Lk. xii. 44
(cf. A. I. 1 d. above, [also C. I. 2 e. below]; Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 474 sq.; Bnhdy. p. 249; [W. 393 (367) a.]).
ce. used of a hostile aim, against (for exx. fr. Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down, see Passow i. 2 p. 1036*; [cf. L. and S. s. v.
B. 1.1 ¢.; W.392 (367); B. 337 (290) ]): Lk. xii. 52sq.;
Adis yevopern ert Stepave [-vov, L Tr mrg.], Acts xi. 19
[A.V.about]. d. of that to which anything is added
(so that it is, as it were, upon it); in addition to; over and
above, [W. 393 (367 sq.) b.]: 2 Co. vii. 13 (L T Tr WH
emt d€ tT mapaxAnoe tpav [but L T Tr WH jyev] mepio-
corépws xr. but in addition to the comfort given (us) by
you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly etc. [A. V. in ete.
(of condition)]); Kepdaivew re emi tur, Mt. xxv. 20, 22
RG; yew Avmpy ext Avr, Phil. ii. 27 Ree. (Eur. Iph. T.
197 hovos emi péve, Troad. 596 eri 8 adyeow adyea, Soph.
O. C. 544 emt véc@ véoov; [cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. c.; but
GLTTr WH give the acce., see C. I. 2 c. below]) ; rpoa-
rideva emt, Lk. iii. 20; emt mace rovrots, besides all this,
Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. T Tr mrg. WH ev; see ev, I. 5e.
p- 2117]; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. T Tr WH ey (and there is
No rovrois) ; see ev, u. s.]; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15; 1
Mace. x. 42; [classic exx. in Wetst. on Lk. 1. c.]); add also
Heb. viii. 1 [see Liinem. ad loc.]; ix. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 16.
e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of
time) with the principal matter under consideration, (in
Germ. generally bei, i. e. at, on, etc.) [W. 392 (367)]:
evxaptoTe T@ Oe@ pov emi macy TH pveia Upaor, at every men-
tion of you, as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but
see Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. ad 1.,and s. v. ras, I. 2]; omer
Sowa emi 77 Ovoia, while engaged in (busied over) the
sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; émt cuvredeia tov ai@vev, Heb. ix.
26; ext rH mpwrn diaOynn, ib. 15; omeipew and Gepifew
érré
én’ evAoyias, so that blessings attend, i. e. bountifully,
freely, 2 Co. ix. 6; émi maon rH avdyxn, 1 Th. iii. 7; emi ro
mapopytoue vpov while your anger lasts, Eph. iv. 26 ; émi
rout@ meanwhile, i.e. while this was going on [(?), upon
this], Jn.iv.27. f. of the object of anaction,and a.
where the Germ. uses an, [ Eng. on (nearly i. q. to) ]? mpao-
gew trem rin, Acts v. 35 (like Spay ri emi rum, Hat. 3, 14;
Ael. n. an. 11, 11); ef. Bnhdy. p. 250 bot.; [but see B.
337 (290)]; 6 yéyovev é€m’ adrn, Mk. v. 33 [T Tr WH om.
Lbr. éi]; avamAnpotoba, Mt. xiii. 14 Rec. £. where
the Germ. says iiber, [Eng. upon, of, concerning], after
verbs of writing, speaking, thinking: yeypappeva
én’ aito, Jn. xii. 16 (Hat. 1, 66); mpopnrevecv, Rev. x. 11;
paprupeiv, xxii. 16 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. [see paprupéa,
a.], (Sofa émt rH evoeBeia, an opinion about, on, piety, 4
Mace. v. 17 (18)).
C. with the AccusaTIvE [W. § 49,1; B. 337 (290)
sq-]3 I. of Place; 1. properly; a. of the place
above, over, which, our up on, on to: after verbs
signifying motion and continuance, edGeiv, mepura-
rew ént ta VOata, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; emt tHv Oadaccay, ib.
25 LT Tr WH, 26 R G, (adeiv emi rovtov, Hom. Od. 1,
183); avareceiv ext tv ynv, Mt. xv. 35; émt ro ornOos
rivos, Jn. Xxi. 20; avaxAcOnvat emt ro’s yoprous, Mt. xiv.
19 RG; xarotxeiv émi wav 16 mpoowmrov (L.T Tr WH rar
ros mpoowmov [cf. mas, I. 1 ¢.]) ras yns, Acts xvii. 26;
xabjcOa, Lk. xxi. 35; 7AOe Arwds ef’ GAnv THY ynv, Acts
vii. 11; oxodtos éyevero éxt macay thy ynv, Mt. xxvii. 45.
over i. e. along: eiornket emt Tov aiytadov, Mt. xiii. 2 [W.
408 (380); differently in d. below]. b. of motion to
a place whose surface is occupied or touched (Germ.
auf with the acc.), upon, unto, etc.; after verbs of going,
coming, ascending, descending, falling, ete.:
mopeverOa emi thy ddov, Acts vill. 26; ix. 11; emt ras
dieEdSous, Mt. xxii. 9; mpoépyerOar, Acts xx. 13 [here Tr
WH mre. mpocépy.]; pevyew, Mt. xxiv. 16 (where L Tr
WH txt. eis); e&epyer Oat, Lk. viii. 27; e&cévar, Acts xxvii.
43; émBaiverv, Mt. xxi.5; dvaBaivew, Lk. v.19; xix. 4;
Acts x. 9; Rev. xx. 9; caraBSaivew, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br.
WH reject the pass.]; Rev. xvi. 21; dmépyerOa, Lk.
xxiii. 33 [L Tr WH épyecOat]; mimrew emi rtovs modas,
Acts x. 253 én mpoowmoy, to fall upon the face, Mt. xvii.
6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v.12; xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 25; Rev. vii. 11.
After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, build-
ing, laying, throwing, etc.: ri@éva, Mt. v. 15; Lk.
xi. 33; émuribeva, Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk.xv.5; Actsxv. 10, etc.;
riOévat Ta yovata emi, Acts xxi. 5; oixodopetv, Mt. vii. 24,
26; Lk. vi. 49; Ro. xv. 20; émoxodopeiv, 1 Co. iii. 12;
Oepedcoov, Lk. vi. 48; Baddrew, Jn. viii. 59; Rev. ii. 24;
xiv. 16; xviii. 19 ; émBadAew, Lk. v. 36 (éeB. emi ten, Mt.
ix. 16); émBadXew ras yeipas emi tia, Mt. xxvi. 50, ete.
(see émSdddw, 1 a.); emippimrew, Lk. xix. 35 and tropi-
cally 1 Pet. v. 7; pamitew, Mt. v. 39 [L T Tr txt. WH
eis]; tuntewv, Lk. vi. 29 [Tdf. eis]; dvaBiBacew, Mt. xiii.
48 [not Lehm. txt.]; émBiBaew, Lk. x. 34; xarayev, Lk.
v. 11; owpevev, Ro. xii. 20; diddvat, Lk. vii. 44; xix. 23;
Rev. viii. 3; avafépeuv, 1 Pet. ii. 24; xpeuav, Mt. xviii. 6
“LT Tr WH epi); ypddew, Rev. ii. 17; iii. 12; xix. 16;
234
> 1
€7Tt
emcypapew, Heb. viii.10. After verbs which include an-
other verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance
into, (where Germ. uses auf or tiber; our on, to, ete.) :
dvaredrev, Mt. v. 45; Bpéyev, ibid.; mvéew, Rev. vii. 1
(here we see the difference betw. éxi with the gen. to
blow over a thing, Germ. iiber, and émi with the ace. to
blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it, Germ. einen
anwehen, wehend auf einen kommen); [apparently nearly
the same view of the distinction betw. the cases is taken
by Thiersch § 274, 6; Hermann on Eur. Alcest. 845.
But Kriiger (§ 68, 40, 3), Kiihner (ii. § 438, I. 1 b.), al.,
regard é€. with the acc. as denoting merely movement
towards a place, while é. with the gen. involves the idea
of actual or intended arrival; cf. L. and §.s.v. A. I. 1.
Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially
synonymous: e.g. Bitm. Gram. § 147 (p. 417 Eng.
trans.); Matthiae § 584; Passow p. 1034*;—esp. in
the N. T., see W. 409 sq. (382); 408 (381) note; B. 338
(291). On the variations of case with this prep. in the
Rev. cf. Alford on iv. 2]; StacwOqva exi ri yay, Acts
xxvii. 44. c. It is used of persons over whom anything
is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them,
(Germ. tiber with the dat.) [W. 408 (381) note]: évoud-
(ev Td Gvoua "Incov émi tiva, to name the name of Jesus
(as a spell, a magic formula) over one, sc. that help
may come to him from that name, Acts xix. 13; mpoo-
evxerOa eri twa, Jas. v. 14. d. As eis (q. v. C. 2p.
186*), so éwi also stands after verbs of rest and con-
tinuance [B. 337 (290) sq.; W. § 49, 1.1]: xadeddew
eri tt, Mk. iv. 38; orqva, Rev. xi. 11; oradjvat emi tr,
Rev. xii. 18 (xiii. 1); €ornxevar, Jn. xxi. 4 (€ni rv aiytadov
LT Tr mrg. WH mrg.; otherwise where many are
spoken of; see a. fin. above); Rev. xiv. 1; xa6joOa,
Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [Rec. dat.]; xi. 16; xiv.
14,16 [L T Tr WH txt. gen.]; xvii. 3; xix. 11; xexa-
Oixévar, xadioa, Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 30; Jn. xii. 14;
Rey. xx. 4; xaicecOar, Mt. xix. 28; oxnvoov, Rev. vii.
153; xetoOa, 2 Co. iii. 153 xaraxeioOar, Lk. v. 25 T Tr
WH; eiva emi rd adrd, to be together, assembled, in
the same place: Lk. xvii. 35; Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44, —
to come together, of sexual intercourse, 1 Co. vii. 5 GL
T Tr WH; cvvedeiv eri 76 aird have convened, come
together, to the same place, 1 Co. xiv. 23 [L txt. €ddeiv];
simply eri rd adré se. dvres, together, Acts iii. 1 [but L T
Tr WH (so R. V.) connect emi r. a. here with ii. 47]; 2S.
ii. 13 [ef. B. 338 (291)]. e. used of motion or arrival
into the vicinity of a place (not to the place itself) ;
near; to,as faras; (Germ.an, bei, zu, hin... zw): émird
pynpetov Lor pyjpa], Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 12 [L Tr br. T
om. WH reject the vs. ], 22, 24; és rods dvaBabyods, Acts
xxi. 35 5 EpyeoOar emi rt VOwp, Acts viii. 36 ; emi ry wiAny,
Acts xii. 103 émirrnvat emi rov muA@va, Acts x.17; xara-
Baivew éri tiv Oddaccar, Jn. vi. 16, etc., etc.; with the ace.
of a pers. to, near to one : Jn. xix. 33; Acts xxv.12; 2 Th.
ii.1; Rev. xvi. 14; esp. to judges, kings, etc., i. q. to their
tribunal: Mt. x.18; Lk. xii. 58; xxi.12; xxiii. 1; Acts
ix. 21; xvi. 19. alsoin pregn. constr. after verbs of sit-
ting, standing, etc.: caOjc0a emi rd reA@mov, Mt. ix.
a UliA
ETL
9; Mk. ii. 14; €ornxéeva emi, Rev. iii. 20; xv. 2; émornva
emi, Acts x. 17; xi. 11; émt ryv defidv on the right hand,
Rev.v.1. f. of mere direction towardsa terminus
(so that the terminus itself is not reached) : mopeveoOat emt
To atrodwAds, to recover it (where we say afler), Lk. xv.
4; exreivew tas xeipas emi, against one, to take him, Lk.
xxii. 53; towards one, in pointing him out, Mt. xii. 49;
e&épxerOar éxi AnoTHy, to take a robber, Mt. xxvi. 55;
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52, cf. Lk. xiv. 31. 2 elt 18
used metaphorically, a. with the acc. of a pers. after
verbs of coming, falling, bringing, ete. a. of
evils befalling (falling ‘upon’) one, and of pertur-
bations coming upon the mind: 76 aiva twos (the
penalty for slaying him) ee or épxerar emi teva, Mt. xxiii.
35 sq.; XXVil. 25; émdyew 7d aiua Tivos emi twa, Acts v.
28; €pxeoOar and jew eri tua, of other evils, Jn. xviii.
4; Eph. v. 6; Rev. iii. 3; after yiveo@a, Lk. i. 65; iv.
36; Acts v. 5; émépyeoOar [émevoepy. LT Tr WH], Lk.
xxi. 355 émemimrew, Lk.i. 12; Acts xiii. 11[LT Tr WH
ninrew]; xix.17[L Traimrewv]; Ro. xv. 3 (fr. Ps. lxviii.
(Ixix.) 10); Rev. xi. 11 [Ree. minrev]; émuorjva, Lk.
xxi. 34. B. of blessings coming upon one: after ¢pyerOat,
Mt. x. 13; émemimrew, of a trance, Acts x.10[LT Tr
WHEL yiverOar]; emurknvody, 2 Co. xii. 9; epOacev and
iyycev ep tyas (upon you sc. fr. heaven, [cf. W. 407
(380) note]) 7 Baowela rod Oeov, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. x. 9;
xi. 20. the Holy Spirit is said at one time émi rwa
exxeioOa, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45; Tit. iii. 6; at another,
arooreAXecOa [or eEarooreA. T Tr WH], Lk. xxiv. 49;
again, émépyeoOa, Acts i. 8; once more, xataBaivew, Mk.
i. 10 [Ltxt. T Tr WH eis]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. i.33; emecer
6 KAjpos ext twa, Acts i. 26; after words of rest and
continuance: yapis jv émi twa, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33;
éravaraverOa, Lk. x.6; the Holy Spirit is said at one
time émi tia peévew, descending upon one to remain on
him, Jn. i. 32 sq. [B. 338 (291)]; and again avaravecOat,
1 Pet. iv. 14. _b. of one upon whom anything is im-
posed, as a burden, office, duty, etc.: ryv wépypvay emup-
pirrew éri Oedv, 1 Pet. v. 7; cuvredety SiaOqeny emi tia, to
put a covenant upon one, to be kept by him, Heb. viii. 8,
(in Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 6 "> Dy m3 N13 istomake a
covenant against one). c. of that to which anything is
added, [Eng. upon (nearly i. q. after) ]: Admn emi Adm»,
Phil. ii. 27 GL T Tr WH (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 27; Ezek.
vii. 26; [esp. Is. xxviii. 10, 13; cf. Lat. super in Liv. 1,
50; 22, 54 ete.]; see above, B. 2 d.); [so some take
oikos ém oikov, Lk. xi. 17, B. 338 (291) ; see otkos, 2]; ém-
kaeiv dvoua emi tiva (see emtxadéw, 2 [and B. 338 (291)]),
to call (put) a name upon one, Acts xv. 17; Jas. ii. 7.
d. of the number or degree reached; Lat. usque ad
[W. § 49, 1. 3.a.]: et cradious dadexa, Rev. xxi. 16 [R®™
T Tr WH txt. gen.] (Xen. mem. 1, 4,17; an. 1,7, 15;
Polyb. 3, 54,7; Song of the Three 23); émi rpis, Vulg.
per ter, for three times, thrice: Acts x.16; xi. 10 (so eds
tpis, Hdt. 1, 86; Xen. an. 6, 4, 16. 19; Cyr. 7, 1, 4 ete.
[ef. W. 422 (394) ]); emt mAetov more widely, to a greater
degree, further, the more, [differently below, II. 1]: Acts
iv. 17; [xx.9 WH mrg.]; 2 Tim. ii. 16; iii. 9; éd’
235 earl
eT
daov, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, [differently II. 1 be-
low]: Mt. xxv. 40,45; Ro. xi. 13. e. of care, pow-
er, control over anything, (Germ. iiber with the acc.)
[W. § 49, 1. 3 b.], (cf. above, A. I. 1d. and B. 2 b.): Ba-
,oireve emi twa (Hebr. by own), Lk.i. 33; xix. 14, 27;
Ro. v. 14; yovpevov em’ Atyumtov, Acts vil. 10; nadiornut,
Heb. ii. 7 R [ (fr. Ps. viii. 7), L Tr WH br.]}; esi rov otkor
avrov sc. eari, Heb. ili. 6 ; iepéa péyav emi rév oikov Tov Beod
sc. kabeotnxdta, Heb. x. 21; xadcoravar dixaoriy eri, Lk.
xii. 14 (dpyovra, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 fin.) ; e€ovoia, Lk. x. 19;
Rey. vi. 8; xvi. 9; xxii. 14; puddooew pudakas, Lk. ii. 8 ;
of usurped dignity : tmepaiperOa emi mavta he yopevov Oedr,
2 Th. ii. 4 cf. Dan. xi. 36 sq. [al. refer the use in Th. 1. c. to
g. y. BB. below]. Akin to this is the expression moros émt
tt (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things
intrusted toits care), Mt.xxv.21. f. of the end which
the mind reaches or to which it is led; Lat. ad, to,
unto: émotpepew, emcatpeperbar emi twa, esp. to God,
eli? VACtSiixeto Di Xie 2 i acive llapsexexwie 2 Oley Grakuive
9; 1 Pet.ii. 25. g. of direction towards a person
or athing; a. after verbs of trusting and hoping,
(Germ. auf, upon; see above, B. 2 a. y.): after édmigey,
1 Pet. i. 13; iii. 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.) ;
motevew, Acts ix.42; xi. 17; xvi.31; xxii. 19; Ro. iv.
24; miores, Heb. vi. 1; memoweva, Mt. xxvii. 43 (where
L txt. WH mrg. émi with dat.). B. of the feelings,
affections, emotions, Germ. iiber, over: xémropat,
Rev. i. 7; xviii. 9 [RG L WH org. w. dat.]; xAaiw, Lk.
xxiii. 28; Rev. xviii. 9; edppaiverOa, Rev. xviii. 20[G L
T Tr WH w. dat.]. unto, towards, Lat. erga: omdayxvi-
Copa, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ix. 22; [paxpoOupéw, Mt.
xviii. 26 Tr, 29 L Tr]; ypyords, Lk. vi. 35; ypnordrns, Ro.
xi. 22; Eph.ii.7. y. of the direction of the will and
action; aa. of purpose and end [W. § 49,1. 3d.]: emt
10 Bantiopa avrov, to receive his baptism, Mt. iii. 7; émt
Oewpiay ravtnv, Lk. xxiii. 48; ef’ 6 mdper, Mt. xxvi. 50 G L
T Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. ¢.); where aim and result
coalesce: él rd cupdepor, Heb. xii. 10. BB. of things
done with hostility; against: after dmoropia, Ro. xi.
22; dvaornva, Mk. iii. 26; eyeiperOa, Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk.
xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 10; éeyetpecy diwypdv, Acts xiii. 50; pepi-
oOjva, Mt. xii. 26; Mk. iii. 24 sq.; ematpew re emi, Jn.
xiii. 18; pdprup, 2 Co. i. 23; papripiov, Lk. ix. 5; adoyr
poveiy, 1 Co. vii. 36 (ets rwwa, Dion. Hal. 2, 26); poryarOa,
Mk. x. 11; rodpav, 2 Co. x. 2; Bpdyeww dddvras, Acts vii.
54. yy. of that to which one refers in writing or
speaking [cf. W. § 49, l. 3 d.]: after Neyer, Heb. vii.
13; 6 odv paxapicpos .. . dxpoBvariay, sc. Aéyerar [W.
587 (546), cf. B. 394 (338)], Ro. iv. 9; mpopnreia, 1 Tim.
i. 18; on Mk. ix. 12 sq. see ypapw, 2c. 88. uponi. e.
in reference to; for: after BadXew KAnpov, Mk. xv. 24;
Jn. xix. 24; ef. Fritzsche on Mark p. 686 [who com-
pares Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19, and remarks that an Attic
writ. would have said émi reve]. II. of Time [W.
§49,1.2]; 1. of time during or for [‘for the space of ”]
which (Germ. auf, wdhrend): émi &rn rpia, Lk. iv. 25
[R GT WH mrg.]; emi juepas mAeiovs, Acts xiii. 31 ; add
also xvi. 18; xvii. 2; xviii. 20; xix. 10; Heb. xi. 30, ete.,
éeriBaiva
and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; ef. Passow s. v.
p- 1044, [L. and S. s. v. C. I]; ef’ dc0v yxpdvov for so
long time as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; and
simply éd’ écov as long as [differently in I. 2 d. above],
Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet.i.13; ed ixavov long enough, for a con-
siderable time, Acts xx. 11; éi m\eiov somewhat long,
too long [differently in I. 2d. above]: Acts xx. 9 [not
WH mrg., see u. s.]; xxiv. 4. 2. about, towards,
(Germ. gegen): emi rnv atpiov on the morrow, Lk. x. 35;
Acts iv. 5; éml ryv a@pav ris mpooevyns, Acts ili. 1; em
To mpot, Mk. xv. 1 [R G]; rarely so in Grk. writ., as
Arr. exp. Al. 3, 18, 11 (7) émi [al. iad] thy eo.
D. In ComposITION éwi denotes 1. continuance,
rest, influence upon or over any person or thing: ézi-
yetos, emoupavos, emdnuew, emavarravopat, etc. 2. mo-
tion, approach, direction towards or to anything: éza-
kov@, emBodw, emBderw, eextetva, ete. 3. imposi-
tion: emcxai€w, emiriOnut, emiBiBalw, ertBapew, errypapa,
€mippinta, éemitacow, etc. 4. accumulation, increase,
addition: ¢rewaywyn, éemicvydyw, emicwpevw, emikadéw
(by acognomen), ete. 5. repetition: éma:réw, émavapt-
punoke,ete. 6. up, upward: éraipa, éravayea, ernappita,
ete. 7. against: émBovdn, énaviotnpt, émiopKos, emt-
opkéw, etc. 8. superintendence: émorarns.
ém-Baive; 2 aor. éereBnv; pf. ptep. emBeBnkos; at
to get upon, mount: emi tt, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 1,
etc.; Gen. xxiv. 61); 1@ mAolw [to embark in], Acts
xxvii. 2 (Thue. 7, 70); eis ré wdotov, Acts xxi. 6 RG;
used without a case, of going aboard (a ship), Acts xxi.
2; to go up: eis ‘lepoodd. Acts xxi. 4 L T Tr WH, [yet
al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter: eis with
the ace. of place, Acts xx. 18; with the dat. of place
(as also in Grk. writ.), Acts xxv. 1.*
émt-BaddAw ; impf. emeBaddov; fut. emiBar@; 2 aor. éreé-
BaXov, [3 pers. plur.-Aav, Acts xxi. 27 T Tr WH; Mk. xiv.
46 T WH, (see dmépyouas,init.)]; 1. Transitively, a.
to cast upon: twit Bpdxov, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; rwi ra ivatia, Mk.
xi. 7; [your emi ras xed. Rev. xviii. 19 WH mrg.]; to lay
upon, emi Twa THY XElpa OF Tas xeipas, used of seizing one
to lead him off as a prisoner: Mt. xxvi. 50; Mk. xiv. 46
RGL; Lk. xx. 19; xxi.12; Jn. vii. 30 [L mre. éBarer],
44 (L Tr WH the simple BadAXew) ; Acts v. 18; xxi. 27,
(for the Hebr. 5 ON v now, Gen. xxii. 12); also rds
x€tpas jek Mk. xiv. 46 T Tr WH; Acts iv. 3, (Polyb. 3,
2,8; 5,5; Leian. Tim. 4); émBadAew ras yxeipas foll. by
the if ihe aff the purpose, Acts xii. 1; tv yeipa
er’ dpotpov, to put the. hand to the plough (to begin
work), Lk. ix. 62. b. to put (i.e. sew) on: émiBAnua
ent ipariov, Lk. v. 36; emt iuariw, Mt. ix. 16. 2. In-
trans. (asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, [ef. W. 251 (236);
B. 144 (126) sq.]) to throw one’s self upon, rush upon:
eis TO TAotov, of waves rushing into a ship, Mk. iv. 373 to
put one’s mind upon a thing, attend to, with the dat. of
the thing: rovr yap émiBddAov for if you think thereon,
Antonin. 10, 30; pndevi yap émBaddXew pnderépay (i. e.
THY aicOnow Kai tiv vdnow) ywpis TOU mMpooTimrovTos €ida-
Aov, Plut. plac. phil. 4, 8; absol. émBadwv, sc. ro pyyuate
tov "Inaov, when he had considered the utterance of
236
ETT UyELOS
Jesus, Mk. xiv. 72; cf. Kypke, [Wetst., McClellan] ad |
loc.; B. 145 (127); [and for the diff. interpp. see Mey.
and esp. Morison ad loc. ]. 3. Impersonally, émBahrAet
pot it belongs to me, falls to my share: ro émiBadXov (sc.
pol) pepos THs ovoias, Lk. xv. 12 (ernparwv rd émBddXov,
Hdt. 4, 115; 16 emBadXov adrois pépos, Diod. 14, 17, and
the like often in other writ. [see Meyer; cot émBadX\e 9
kAnpovonia, Tob. vi. 12 (cf. iii. 17; 1 Mace. x. 30, ete.) ]).*
ém-Bapéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. émBapnoa; to put a burden
upon, to load, (ef. émi, D. 3]; trop. to be burdensome ; so in
the N. T.: twa, 1 Th. ii.9; 2 Th. iii.8 ; absol. iva ph ém-
Bape ‘that I press not too heavily ’ i. e. lest I give pain by
too severe language, 2 Co. ii.5. (Dion. Hal., Appian.) *
émt-BiBdfw: 1 aor. emeBiSaca; to cause to mount; to
place upon, (ef. emt, D. 3]: rwa or ri éni tt, Lk. x. 34;
xix. 35; Acts xxiii. 24. (Thue., Plat., Diod., al.; Sept.
several times for 3°37.) *
ém-Bdérw: 1 aor. éméPAeWa; in the Sept. often for
wan and 133, also for M81; to turn the eyes upon; to
look upon, gaze upon, (emi upon [ cf. éxi, D. 2]): ext twa,
contextually, to look upon one with a feeling of admira-
tion and respect, to look up to, regard, Jas. li. 3; contextu-
ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid, i. q.
to have regard for, to regard, Lk. ix. 38 (where for ézi-
Breov [RL] and éeriB\ear [GT] write [with Tr WH]
emiBreWat, 1 aor. act. inf. ; cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc.,
and above in déopuat, 3 a., [also B. 278 (234) note]); ém
tv tareivooiv twos, Lk. i. 48; often in the O. T. in the
same'sense, as. 1S. i. 11; ix. 165 Ps. xxiv.) (xxv.)i16,
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 17; Tob. iii. 3, ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph.
and Plato down, both lit. and fig.) *
érrt-BAnpa, -ros, Td, (€miBdrdrw), that which is thrown or
put upon a thing, or that which is added to it; an addition ;
spec. that which is sewed on to cover arent, a patch; Vulg.
assumentum [(also commissura)], (i. q. €mippapa): Mt.
ix. 16; Mk. ii..21; Lk. v. 36. [Sept., Plut., Arr.]*
ém-Bodw, -@; to cry out to (ef. émi, D. 2], ery out: foll.
by ace. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 RG, [but L T Tr WH
Bode, q. v.2,and fin. From Hom., Hdt. down].*
émt-Bovdh, -7s, 7, a plan formed against one [cf. émi, D.
7], a plot: Acts ix. 24; yiverai tut emBovAn wimd twos,
Acts xx. 33; els twa, Acts xxiii. 30; plur. Acts xx. 19.
(From [Hat.], Thue. down.) *
éri-yapBpevw : fut. émvyapBpevow; to be related to by
marriage, enter into affinity with; 1. Sept. for JAN, to
become any one’s father-in-law or son-in-law: twi, Gen.
xxxiv. 9; 1S. xviii. 22sqq.; 2 Chr. xviii.1; 2 Esdr. ix.
1 Mace. x. 54, 56. 2. riva, for 03°, to marry the
widow of a brother who has died childless: Gen. xxxviii.
8; Mt. xxii. 24, where allusion is made to the levirate
law recorded in Deut. xxv. 5-10; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Leviratsehe; [BB. DD.s. v. Marriage]. (Not found in
native Grk. auth. [exe. schol. ad Eur. Or. 574 sqq.; cf.
W..:26):)*
ém(-yevos, -ov, (emi and yn), existing upon the earth,
earthly, terrestrial: oixia, the house we live in on earth,
spoken of the body with which we are clothed in this
world, 2 Co. v. 1; compara eniyea, Opp. to emovpdana, |
err uy tvopee
Co. xv. 40; absolutely, of émiyeso. (opp. to of émovpdavior
and oi xataxOdvor), those who are on earth, the inhabit-
ants of the earth, men, Phil. ii. 10; ra emiyesa, things
done on earth, spoken of the new birth wrought by the
Holy Spirit, Jn. iii. 12; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg.
p- 212 sq.; Ta emiyera ppoveiv, to set the mind on the
pleasures and good things of earth, Phil. iii. 19; codia
emiyetos (opp. to 7 avabev Karepxopemn), the wisdom of
man, liable to error and misleading, Jas. iii. 15. (From
Plato down; nowhere in the O. T.) *
émt-ylvopar: 2 aor. emeyevduny ; 1. to become or
happen afterwards; to be born after. 2. to come to,
arrive: of time, teocapecxaidexatn wv& emeyevero, Acts
xxvii. 27 L [ed. ster.], T [edd. 2, 7]; (€apos éemvyiyverat
&pn, Hom. Il. 6, 148). 3. to arise, spring up, come on:
émvyevouevov vorov, a south wind having sprung up, Acts
xxviii. 13; (Thue. 3, 74; 4, 30).*
ém-ywooko; [impf. emeyivwokov]; fut. emiyyooopat; 2
aor. éréyvov; pt. emeyvoxa; [Pass., pres. émrywaokopat ;
1 aor. éneyvooOnv]; (€xi denotes mental direction tow-
ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept.
chiefly for yt! and 433, 130; 1. to become thorough-
ly acquainted with, to know thoroughly; to know accu-
rately, know well, [see reff. s. v. értyywors, init.]: 1 Co.
xiii. 12 (where ywookw ex pepovs and envy. i. e. to know
thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [W.
§ 39, 3 N.2]); with an acc. of the thing, Lk. i. 4; 2 Co.i.
13; tHv xapwv Tov Beod, Col. i. 6 ; THY ddAnOeav, 1 Tim. iv. 3;
THv odov THs Stkaoovuns, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [ef. B. 305 (262)];
TO Stkaiwpa Tov Geo, Ro. i. 32; ri foll. by dre (by the fa-
miliar attraction [W. 626 (581); B. 376 (322); some
bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge]),
1 Co. xiv. 87; ruvd, one’s character, will, deeds, deserts,
etc., 1 Co. xvi. 18; 2 Co.i.14; [pass. opp. to dyvoovpmevor,
2 Co. vi. 9]; teva amo tivos (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20
[Lehm. éx] (“a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cogno-
scere,” for the more common ez, Caes. b. g. 1, 22, 2 [ef. B.
324 (278sq.); W. 372 (348) ]); by attraction ruvd, dre
etc. 2 Co. xiii. 5; emiywooket rov vidv, Tov marépa, Mt. xi.
Nite 2. univ. to know; a. to recognize: twa, i. e. by
sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person
is, Mt. xiv. 35; Mk. vi. 54; Lk. xxiv. 16, 31; Mk. vi. 33
[RT, but G WH mrg. without the accus.]; by attrac-
tion, ruvd, drt, Acts ili. 10; iv. 13; twa, his rank and
authority, Mt. xvii. 12; with acc. of the thing, to recog-
nize a thing to be what it really is: thv povny rod Teérpov,
Acts xii. 14; trav yqv, Acts xxvii. 39. b. to knowi. q.
to perceive: ri, Lk. v. 22; ev éavr@, foll. by acc. of the
thing with a ptep. [B. 301 (258) ], Mk. v. 30; foll. by dru,
Lk. i. 22; r@ mvevpare foll. by 671, Mk. ii. 8. ¢. to know
i.e. to find out, ascertain: sc. adro, Acts ix. 30; foll. by
ort, Lk. vii. 37; xxiii. 7; Acts xix. 34; xxii. 29; xxiv. 11
LT Tr WH; xxviii. 1; ri, foll. by an indirect quest.,
Acts xxiii. 28 L T Tr WH; [6¢ ny airiay etc. Acts xxii.
24]; mapa twos (gen. of pers.) repi tivos (gen. of thing),
Acts xxiv. 8. d. to knowi.e. to understand : Acts xxv.
10. [From Hom: down. ]*
énlt-yvwors, -ews, 7), (€mrywacke, g..V- (cf. also Bp. Lghtft.
237
eTLONnUr@
on Col. i. 9; Trench § lxxv. ad fin.]), precise and cor-
rect knowledge; used in the N. T. of the knowledge of
things ethical and divine: absol., Phil. i. 9; Col. iii. 10;
kar’ émiyvwow, Ro. x. 2; with gen. of the thing known,
Col. i. 9; ii. 2; Philem. 6; ris adnOeias, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2
Tim. ii. 25; iii. 7; Tit. i. 1; Heb. x. 26; rijs dpaprias,
Ro. iii. 20; with gen. of the person known ;— of God,
esp. the knowledge of his holy will and of the blessings
which he has bestowed and constantly bestows on men
through Christ: Eph. i. 17; Col. i. 10; 2 Pet. i. 2; of
Christ, i.e. the true knowledge of Christ’s nature, dig-
nity, benefits: Eph. iv. 13; 2 Pet. i. 8; ii. 20; of God
and Christ: 2 Pet. i. 2; Oedv €yew ev emtyvace, i. e. to keep
the knowledge of the one true God which has illumined
the soul, Ro. i. 28. (Polyb., Plut., Hdian., [al.]; Sept.
occasionally for Ny; 2 Mace. ix. 11.) *
émi-ypaht, -js, 7), (emerypadw), an inscription, title: in
the N. T. of an inscription in black letters upon a
whitened tablet [B. D. s. v. Cross], Lk. xxiii. 38; with
the gen. ris airias, i. e. of the accusation, Mk. xv. 26,
(ypdppara tH aitiay THs Oavarwoews airov Sndodvra, Dio
Cass. 54, 3; cf. Sueton. Calig. 32; Domit. 10); of the
inscription on a coin: Mt. xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx.
24. (From Thue. down.) *
émi-ypadw: fut. emeypayw; pf. pass. ptep. émeyeypap-
pevos; plpf. 3 pers. sing. émeyeypanto; to write upon, in-
scribe: émvypapny, Mk. xv. 26 and L Tr br. in Lk. xxiii.
38; dvdpara, Rev. xxi. 12; év run, Acts xvii. 23; fig. to
write upon the mind, i. e. to fix indelibly upon it, cause
to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it:
vopous emt kapdias [-Oiav T WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; emt
trav diavorov, Heb. x. 16 RG, em tHv dcavoray, ibid. L T
Tr WH, (rods Adyous emt 7d mAdros THs Kapdias, Prov.
vii. 3). [From Hom. down. ] *
ému-Se(kvupt; 1 aor. exedecéa; [pres. mid. emideixvupac] ;
to exhibit, show, [as though for ex position or exami-
nation (Schmidt ch. 127, 5); fr. Pind., Hdt. down.];
a. to bring forth to view: ri, Mt. xxii. 19; and Lk. xx. 24
Ree. ; ti tu, Lk. xxiv. 40 RG; éavrdv tum, Lk. xvii. 14;
to show i. e. bid to look at, ri ru, Mt. xxiv. 1; to show
i. e. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked
at: onpetov, Mt. xvi. 1; Mid. with acc. of the thing, to
display something belonging to one’s self: xir@vas, the
tunics as their own, Acts ix. 39 [see Meyer]. b. to prove,
demonstrate, set forth to be known and acknowledged:
Heb. vi. 17; foll. by the acc. and inf. Acts xviii. 28.*
ém-Sexopar; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to receive hospi-
tably: rwa,3 Jn. 10 (Polyb. 22, 1, 3). 2. to admit, i. e.
not to reject: twa, one’s authority, 3 Jn. 9 (rovs Adyous,
1 Mace. x. 46; maideiav, Sir. li. 26). [Cf. d€youat, fin. ] *
émvBnpew, -@; (emiOnuos) ; 1. to be present among
one’s people, in one’s city or in one’s native land, [cf. éni,
D. 1], (Thuc., Plato, al.; opp. to drodnpeiv, Xen. Cyr.
7,5, 69 ; emidnpety ev rade T@ Bio, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 12
[p- 88 ed. Otto]). 2. to be a sojourner, a foreign resi-
dent, among any people, in any country: Acts ii. 10; of
emdnpoovres Eevor, Acts xvii. 21; (Xen., Plato, Theophr.,
Leian., Aelian, al.).*
émrLolaTaooopat
ém-tia-raccopat; to ordain besides, to add something to
what has been ordained, [cf. émi, D. 4]: Gal. iii.15. Not
found elsewhere.*
ém-5(Sopt: 3 pers. sing. impf. émedidov; fut. emidaco ;
1 aor. éréd@xa; 2 aor. ptep. plur. émddvres; 1 aor. pass.
ereddOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to give over; 1. to hand,
give by handing: twi m1, Mt. vii. 9 sq.; Lk. xi. 11 sq. ;
xxiv. 30,42; Jn. xiii. 26 [RGL]; Acts xv. 30; pass.
Lk. iv. 17. 2. to give over, i.e. give up to the power or
will of one (Germ. preisgeben) : Acts xxvii. 15 (sc. €avrovs
or TO moto T@ avéuw).*
ém-Bi-0p0dw (see didpAwors) : to set in order besides or
further (what still remains to be set in order, [cf. émi, D.
4]): Tit.i. 5, where, for the common reading émditopAaon
(1 aor. mid. subjunc.), Lchm. has adopted émdiopOaans
(1 aor. act. subjunc.). Found also in inscriptions
(Boeckh ii. 409, 9), and in eccl. writ.*
ém-Bvw ; to go down, set (of the sun): Eph. iv. 26, on
which see emi, B. 2 e. (Deut. xxiv.17 (15); Jer. xv. 9;
[Philo de spec. legg. 28]; and with tmesis, Hom. Il. 2,
413.)*
émeixerca [WH -xia, see I, ¢], -as, 9, (émerxns, q- V-),
mildness, gentleness, fairness, [‘sweet reasonableness’
(Matthew Arnold)]: Acts xxiv. 4; joined with rpadrns
fiqzv.], 2 Coix.1 3)\Plat.(Periel: 89> with piravOperia,
Polyb. 1, 14, 4; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 36; with ypnorérns,
Hdian. 5,1, 12 [6 ed. Bekk.]. Cf. Plato, defin. p. 412 b.;
Aristot. eth. Nic. 5,10. (Bar. ii. 27; Sap. ii. 19; xii. 18;
2 Mace. ii. 22; 3 Mace. iii. 15.) *
[Syn. €mreixeta, tpadrys: “mp. magis ad animum,
ém. vero magis ad exteriorem conversationem pertinet ”
(Estius on 2Co. x. 1). “ap. virtus magis absoluta; ému.
magis refertur ad alios” (Bengel, ibid.). See at length
Trench § xliii.]
emuetkhs, -€s, (eikds, what is reasonable) ; 1. seemly,
suitable, (fr. Hom. down). 2. equitable, fair, mild,
gentle: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. iii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Jas. iii. 17.
Neut. 7d émvecxes (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down)
tpav i. g. 9 emeixeca tov, Phil. iv. 5.
fin. |*
em-{nréw, -O; impf. éme(nrovv; 1 aor. éeneCyrnaa; fr.
Hdt. down ; Sept. for w97 and in 1S. xx. 1; Ecel. vii. 29
(28) for wpa; to inquire for, seek for, search for, seek
diligently, (Germ. herbeisuchen [the ém- seems to be di-
rective rather than intensive]): ruvd, Lk. iv. 42 (for Rec.
e(jrouv) ; Acts xii. 19; i. q. to desire, wish for, crave: ti,
Mt. vi. 32; Lk. xii. 30; Ro. xi. 7; Phil. iv.17; Heb. xi.
14; xili. 14; mepi riwvos, Acts xix. 39 [RG T] (but if
your inquiry or desire has reference to other matters) ;
with the inf. Acts xiii. 7 (as in Polyb. 3,57, 7; Diod. 19,
8) 5 1. q. to demand, clamor for: onpeiov, Mt. xii. 39; xvi.
4; Mk. viii. 12 RG; Lk. xi. 29 (where T Tr WH rei
[as L T Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.]).*
emBavarios, -ov, (Aavaros), doomed to death: 1 Co. iv.
9. (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 35.) *
ertBeots, -ews, 1, (emttiOnur), a laying on, imposition:
Tay xetpar, Acts vill. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim.i. 6; Heb.
vi. 2. The imposition of hands, yetpoOecia, was a sacred
[See émveikeca,
238
? /
emrOupta
rite transmitted by the Jews to the Christians, and em-
ployed in praying for another, or in conferring upon him
divine blessings, especially bodily health, or the Holy
Spirit (at the administration of baptism and the inaugu-
ration to their office of the teachers and ministers of the
church): Gen. xlviii. 14; Num. xxvii. 18, 23; Deut.
xxxiv. 9; 2K. v.11, etce.; Mt. xix.13; Mk. xvi. 18; Acts
vi. 6; xiii. 3; xix. 6, etc. [See B. D. s. v. Baptism (sup-
plement) ; McCl. and Strong and Dict. of Chris. Antiq.
s. v. Imposition of Hands. ] *
érOupew, -@; [impf. emeOvpovr]; fut. emOvpnow; 1 aor.
éerneOipnoa; (Ovpds); fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for 738
and 32M; prop. to keep the Oupds turned upon a thing,
hence [cf. our to set one’s heart upon] to have a desire for,
long for; absol. to desire [A. V. lust], Jas. iv. 2; to lust
after, covet, of those who seek things forbidden, Ro. vii.
7; xiii. 9 (fr. Ex. xx. 17)5 1 Co. x. 6)(4 Maec. m1. 6)5
kara Twos, to have desires opposed to [A.V. dust against] a
thing, Gal. v. 17 [B. 335 (288)]; tus, to long for, covet
a thing, Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1; of sexual desire,
yevackos, Mt. v. 28 Rec. [see below] (maidds i) yuvatds,
Xen. an. 4, 1, 14; with the gen. also in Ex. xxxiv. 24;
Prov. xxi. 26; xxiii. 3,6; Sap. vi.12; Sir. xxiv. 19 (18),
etc.) ; contrary to the usage of the better Grk. writ. with
the acc. of the object, Mt. v. 28 L Tr (WH br.), and with-
out an obj. Tdf. (Ex. xx. 17; Deut.v. 21; Mic. ii. 2; Sap.
xvi. 3; Sir. i. 26 (23), ete. ; cf. W. § 30, 10b.); as often
in Grk. writ., foll. by the inf.: Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. xv. 16;
[xvi. 21]; xvii. 22; 1 Pet. i.12; Rev. ix. 6; foll. by the
ace. with the inf. Heb. vi. 11; émOupia éemeOvpnoa I have
greatly desired, Lk. xxii. 15; cf. W. § 54,3; B. § 133,
22 a.* }
émvOupntys, -ov, 6, (€miOupew), one who longs for, a
craver, lover, one eager for: kaxav, 1 Co. x. 6 (Num. xis
4). In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.*
érOupla, -as, 7, (embupew), [fr. Hdt. on], Sept. chiefly
for MINA, MN, WOM; desire, craving, longing: Lk. xxii.
15 (on which see in éemOupe, fin.); Rev. xviii. 14; ryv
ertOupiav éyew els tT, the desire directed towards, Phil. i.
23; év moAAW emtOvpia with great desire, 1 Th. ii. 17;
plur. ai wepi ra Nowra émeOupia, Mk. iv. 19 [W. § 30, 3 N.
5]; spec. desire for what is forbidden, lust, (Vulg. con-
cupiscentia) : Ro. vii. 7sq.; Jas. i. 14 sq. ; 2 Pet.i.4; maos
értOupias, 1 Th. iv. 5; emvOvpia xakn, Col. iii. 5, (Prov. xxi.
26; [xii. 12]; Plat. legg. 9 p. 854 a.; movnpd, Xen. mem.
1, 2, 64; dyaOn, Sir. xiv. 14 where see Fritzsche, [who
cites also Prov. xi. 23; xiii. 12]); plur., Gal. v. 24; 1
Tim. vi. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iv. 3; 1 Pet.i.14; iv. 2; with
a gen. of the object, émOvpia pracpod, for unclean inter-
course, 2 Pet. ii. 10 [al. with W. § 34, 3 b. take puacp. as
gen. of quality]; with a gen. of the subject, ai émé@upia
rav kapdiav, Ro. i. 24; with a gen. of the thing by which
the desire is excited, 7 émiOupia tod Kéopov, 1 In. ii.
17; rod gapatos, Ro. vi. 12; ths amdtns (see amarn),
Eph. iv. 22; ris wapkds, rav dpOadper, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (cf.
Huther ad loc.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; redety emOvpiav capkds,
Gal. v. 16; ai capktxat emOvpia, 1 Pet. ii. 11 (puyexat,
coparikat, 4 Mace: i. 32); ai xooptxai emOvpia, Tit. il
arixadifa
12; eis émOupias to arouse lusts, Ro. xiii. 14; moveiv ras
emovyeas, Jn. vill. 44; bmaxovew rais emOvpias, Ro. vi.
12 [LT Tr WH]; Sovdcvew emOupias (see Sovdreva, 2
b.), Tit. iii. 3; adyeoOar emOvpias, 2 Tim. iii. 6; mopeve-
aba ev emOvpias, 1 Pet. iv. 3; mopeverOa xara ras emt-
dupias, Jude 16, 18; 2 Pet. ili. 3; avaorpeperOat ev rats
émOupias ris oapkos, Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. cf. maos, and
see Trench § Ixxxvii. ] *
ém-Ka0-ifo: 1 aor. émexadica ; 1. to cause to sit
upon, to set upon: Mt. xxi. 7 Rec.** 2. intrans. fo sit
upon: Matt. |. c. [Rec.*] GL T Tr WH al.*
émt-Kadew, -3: 1 aor. émexadeoa; [ Pass. and Mid., pres.
émixadovpat|; pf. pass. emKxexAnuar; plpf. 3 pers. sing.
emexekAnro, and with neglect of augm. [cf. W. § 12, 9; B.
33 (29) ] éemixéxAnro (Acts xxvi. 32 Lchm.); 1 aor. pass.
emexAnOnv; fut. mid. émxadeoopwat; 1 aor. mid. émexade-
odynv ; Sept. very often for 8p ; 1. to put a name
upon, to surname: twa (Xen., Plato, al.), Mt. x. 25 G
T Tr WH (Ree. éxadecav) ; pass. 6 émixadovpevos, he who
is surnamed, Lk. xxii. 3 RG L; Acts x.18; xi. 13; xii.
12; xv. 22 RG; also os éemuxadeira, Acts x. 5, 323 6 ém-
kAnOeis, Mt. x. 3 [RG]; Acts iv. 36; xii. 25; i. q. Os éme-
KA76n, Acts i. 23. Pass. with the force of a mid. [cf. W.
§ 38, 3], to Hegee one’s sao be surnamed: Heb. xi. 16;
Mid. w. red: 1 Pet. i. 17 ei marépa éemixadeiobe rév ete. i.e.
if ye call (for yourselves) on him as father, i. e. if ye sur-
name him your father. 2. émuxadeirat TO dvopa Tivos
éni twa, after the Hebr. “a Sp 5 ow N13, the name
of one is named upon some one, i. e. he is called by his
name or declared to be dedicated to him (cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. ili. p. 1232*): Acts xv. 17 fr. Am. ix. 12 (the
name referred to is the people of God); Jas. ii. 7 (the
name oi tov Xptorov). 3. rwi with the acc. of the
object; prop. to call something to one (cf. Eng. to cry out
upon (or against) one]; to charge something to one as a
crime or reproach; to summon one on any charge, prose-
cute one for a crime; to blame one for, accuse one of,
(Arstph. pax 663; Thuc. 2, 27; 3, 36; Plat. lege. 6,
761 e.; 7, 809 e.; Dio Cass. 36, 28; 40,41 and often in
the orators (cf. s. v. catnyopew]): €i TO oikodeomdry Beeh-
CeBovr émrexadecay (i. e. accused of commerce with Beel-
zebul, of receiving his help, cf. Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24; Mk.
iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15), roo@ paddov Trois oixtaxois avtod, Mt.
x. 25 L WH mrg. after cod. Vat. (see 1 above), a read-
ing defended by Rettig in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1838,
p- 477 sqq. and by Alex. Bttm. in the same journal for
1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132);
[also by Weiss in Mey. ed. 7 ad loc.]. But this expres-
sion (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard
not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant
scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of
this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the
Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelze-
bul. = #. to call upon (like Germ. anrufen), to invoke ;
Mid. to call upon for one’s self, in one’s behalf: any one
as a helper, Acts vii. 59, where supply rév xvpiov "Incovv
(BonOov, Plat. Euthyd. p. 297 c.; Diod. 5, 79); rua
udprvupa, as my witness, 2 Co. i. 23 (Plat. legg. 2, 664 c.) ;
239
€mruxoupia
as a judge, i.e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto: tat-
capa, Acts xxv. 11 sq. ; xxvi. 32: xxviii. 19; [rdv ZeBa-
orov, Acts xxv. 25]; foll. by the inf. pass. Acts xxv. 21 (to
be reserved). 5. Hebraistically (like MIM OWA NID
to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Gen.
iv. 26; xii. 8; 2 K. v. 11, etc.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p.
1231” [or Hebr. Lex. s. v. 81)]; an expression finding
its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God
ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name:
Ps. iii. 2; vi. 2; vii. 2, etc.) emcxadodpar Td dvopa Tod Kupiov,
I call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i.e. to
invoke, adore, worship, the Lord, i.e. Christ: Acts ii. 21
(fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) 5 ix. 14, 21; xxii. 16; Ro. x. 13
sq-; 1 Co. i. 2; rév xvptov, Ro. x. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 22;
(often in Grk. writ. émxadeiobat rovs Oeovs, as Xen. Cyr.
7,1, 35; Plat. Tim. P: 27 ¢.; Polyb. 15, 1, 13).*
Ce ae -Tos, TO, (€muxahimro), a covering, veil;
prop. in Sept.: Ex. xxvi. 14; xxxvi. 19 Compl. [ef.
xxxix. 21 Tdf.]; metaph. i. q. a pretext, cloak: rijs kakias,
1 Pet. ii. 16 (wAovros b€ wo\A@v emixadupp’ eat KaKkav,
Menand. ap. Stob. flor. 91, 19 [iii 191 ed. Gaisf.];
“quaerentes libidinibus suis patrocinium et velamen-
tum,” Seneca, vita beata 12).*
émi-Kadvmrw: [1 aor. éemexadkipOnv]; to cover over: ai
dpapriat émxavmrovrat, are covered over so as not to
come to view, i. e. are pardoned, Ro. iv. 7 fr. Ps. xxxi.
(xxxii.) 1.*
émt-kaT-dparos, -ov, (emuxatapaoua to imprecate curses
upon), only in bibl. and eccl. use, accursed, execrable, ex-
posed to divine vengeance, lying under God’s curse: Jn.
vii. 49 RG; Gal. iii. 10 (Deut. xxvii. 26) ; ibid. 13 (Deut.
Xxi. 23); (Sap. ili. 12 (13); xiv. 8; 4 Mace. ii. 19; in
Sept. often for 9398).*
émi-Kepat; impf. émexeiunv; to lie upon or over, rest
upon, be laid or placed upon; a. prop.: émi rum, Jn. xi.
38; sc. on the burning coals, Jn. xxi.9. b. figuratively,
a. of things: of the pressure of a violent tempest, ye:-
pavos emixeysevov, Acts xxvii. 20 (Plut. Timol. 28, 7) ;
dvaykn pot émixectrat, is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hom.
Il. 6, 458) ; écxeiyeva, of observances imposed on a man
by law, Heb. ix. 10 [ef. W. 635 (589)]. B. of men; t&
press upon, to be urgent: with dat. of pers. Lk. v. 1;
émexewTo airovpevot, Lk. xxiii. 23 (oAA@ paddXov erreKerto
aéiav, Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; paddov eméxewwro BAaodn-
povrtes, 20, 5, 3).*
émt-Kehdw : [1 aor. érexetka]; to run a ship ashore, to
bring to land; so fr. Hom. Od. 9, 148 down; ééxe:Aav
(RG ér@xeidav) tHv vadv, Acts xxvii. 41 L T Tr WH;
but in opposition see Meyer ad loc. [Cf. B.D. Am. ed.
p- 3009.]*
[émt-Kebddarov, -ov, Td, head-money, poll-taz, (Aristot. oec.
2 p. 13469, 4 and 1348, 32): Mk. xii. 14 WH (rejected)
mre. for Kqvaov (al.).*]
*Emxotpetos [-pios ‘IT WH; see I, c], -ov, 6, Epicurean,
belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the philosopher : Acts
xvii. 18.*
émtxoupla, -as, 7, (€muxoupew to aid), aid, succor: Acts
xxvi. 22. (Sap. xiii. 18; fr. Thuc. and Eur. down.) *
émicoww
émv-xptvw: 1 aor. emexpwa; to adjudge, approve oy one’s
decision, decree, give sentence: fell. by the acc. with inf.,
Lk. xxiii. 24. (Plato, Dem., Plut., Hdian., al.) *
émt-apBave; 2 aor. mid. eredaBdpunv; to take in addi-
tion [ef. emi, D. 4], to take, lay hold of, take possession
of, overtake, attain to. In the Bible only in the mid.;
Sept. for M8 and pn; a. prop. to lay hold of or to
seize upon anything with the hands (Germ. sich an etwas
anhalten) : trav apAaorev vynds, Hdt. 6,114; hence, univ.
to take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. xiv.
31; Lk. ix. 47 [Tr WH acc.]; (xxiii. 26 RG); Acts
xvii. 19; xxi. 30, 33; with acc. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L
T Tr WH, but in opposition see Meyer; for where the
ptep. émAaBdpevos is in this sense joined with an acc.,
the ace., by the oyjpa dé kowod, depends also upon the
accompanying finite verb (cf. B. § 132, 9; [so W. (ed.
Liinem.) 202 (190)]): Actsix. 27; xvi. 19; xviii. 17, cf.
Lk. xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing: rs xetpds Tivos,
Mk. viii. 23; Acts xxiii. 19; of a leader, and thus met-
aph. of God, Heb. viii. 9 [ef. W. 571 (531); B. 316
(271)]; with gen. of a pers. and of a thing: ema. tivos
Adyov, pyyatos, to take any one in his speech, i. e. to lay
hold of something said by him which can be turned
against him, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr Adyor], 26 [WH Tr mrg. roo
for avrod]|; émA. ths aiwviov [al. dvrws| Cwns, to seize
upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life,
1 Tim. vi. 12, 19, [ef. W. 312 (293)]. b. by a metaph.
drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from
peril, to help, to succor, (cf. Germ. sich eines annehmen) :
twos, Heb. ii. 16; in this sense used besides only in Sir.
iv. 11 and Schol. ad Aeschyl. Pers. 739. In Appian.bel.
civ. 4, 96 the act. is thus used with the dat.: nyiv ro
Saydviov éemdapBaver.”
émt-AavOdvopat; pf. pass. emeAeAnopar; 2 aor. mid. érre-
Aabopnv; Sept. often for NIW; to forget: foll. by the inf.,
Mt. xvi. 5; Mk. viii. 14; foll. by an indir. quest. Jas.
i. 24; in the sense of neglecting, no longer caring for:
with the gen., Heb. vi. 10; xiii. 2,165; with the acc. (cf.
W. § 30,10 c.; Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2, ii. p. 820 sq.),
Phil. iii. 13 (14); with a pass. signification (Is. xxiii. 16;
Sir. iii. 14; xxxii. (xxxv.) 9; Sap. ii. 4, ete. [cf. B. 52
(46) ]): émAeAnopevos forgotten, given over to oblivion,
i.e. uncared for, évamiov tov Oeod before God i. e. by
God (Sir. xxiii. 14), Lk. xii. 6. [(From Hom. on.) ]*
ém-héyw: [pres. pass. ptep. emiAeyduevos]; 1 aor. mid.
ptep. emAeEdpevos ; 1. to say besides [cf. emi, D. 4],
(Hdt. et al.) ; to surname (Plato, legg. 3 p. 700 b.): in
pass. Jn. v. 2 [Tdf. rd Aey.], unless the meaning to name
(put a name upon) be preferred here; cf. érovoydta.
2. to choose for (Hat. et sqq.; Sept.) ; mid. to choose for
one’s self: Acts xv. 40 (28. x. 9; Hdt. 3,157; Thue.
7, 19; Diod. 3, 73 (74); 14, 12; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4,
and others).*
ém-Acirw: fut. emaAciw; to fail, not to suffice for (any
purpose, for the attainment of an end): rwa 6 ypdvos,
time fails one, Heb. xi. 32 and many like exx. in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down; see Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2
p. 8187
240
ETL LEVO
ém-Aclxw: impf. eméAetxyor ; to lick the surface of, liek
over ([cf. emi, D.1]; Germ. belecken): with the acc. of a
thing, Lk. xvi. 21 L T Tr WH; (in Long. past. 1, 24
(11) a var. for émitpéyw).*
emAnopovy, -Hs, 7), (€mAnopev forgetful [W. 93 (89)]),
Sorgetfulness : akpoatns émuAnopovns, a forgetful hearer
[cf. W. § 34, 3b.; B. 161 (140)], Jas. i. 25. (Sir. xi. 27
(25).)*
éri-houtros, -ov, (Aourds), remaining besides, left over,
[ef. ewi, D. 4]: 1 Pet.iv.2. (Sept.; Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) *
erri-Avots, -ews, 7, (€mtAv@, q. V.), a loosening, unloosing
(Germ. A uflésung); metaph. interpretation: 2 Pet. i.
20, on which pass. see yivoua, 5e.a. (Gen. xl. 8 Aq.;
Heliod. 1, 18; but not Philo, vitacontempl. § 10, where
emdeiEews was long ago restored.) *
émt-Avw: impf. eweAvov; 1 fut. pass. émiAvOnoopa; a.
properly, to unloose, untie (Germ. auflésen) anything
knotted or bound or sealed up; (Xen., Theocr., Hdian.).
b. to clear (a controversy), to decide, settle: Acts xix.
39; to explain (what is obscure and hard to understand) :
Mk. iv. 34 (as in Gen. xli. 12 var.; Philo, vita contempl.
§ 10; de agricult. § 3; Sext. Empir. 2, 246; ypidous,
Athen. 10 p. 449 e.; also in mid., Athen. 10 p. 450 f.;
Joseph. antt. 8, 6, 5, and often by the Scholiasts).*
émt-paptupew, -@; to bear witness to, establish by testi-
mony: foll. by the acc. with inf., 1 Pet. v.12. (Plato,
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) [Comp.: cvv-ermaprupéw. | *
emipéreta,, -as, 7), (emipedns careful), care, attention: Acts
xxvii. 3. (Prov. iii. 8; 1 Mace. xvi. 14; 2 Mace. xi. 23;
very com. in Grk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)*
émt-peA€opar, -ovpar, and emyeAowar: fut. emyseAnoopar;
1 aor. émepeAnOnv; with gen. of the object, to take care of
a person or thing (éwi denoting direction of the mind
toward the object cared for [cf. émi, D. 2]): Lk. x. 34 sq. ;
1 Tim. iii. 5. (Gen. xliv. 21; 1 Mace. xi. 37; 1 Esdr.
vi. 26; used by Grk. writ. esp. of prose fr. Hdt. down.) *
émipedas, adv., diligently, carefully: Lk. xv. 8.*
ém-pevw ; [impf. ééuevov]; fut. emipevo; 1 aor. eme-
pewa; to stay at or with; to tarry still; still to abide, to
continue, remain; a. prop. of tarrying in a place: éy
*Edéoo, 1 Co. xvi. 8; év rH capki, to live still longer on
earth, Phil. i. 24 (GT WH om. év) ; adrod, there, Acts xv.
34 [Rec.]; xxi. 4 [Lehm. avrois]; with dat. of thing: rq
capki, to abide as it were a captive to life on earth, Phil.
i.24 GTWH; éni rem, with one, Acts xxviii. 14 [L T
Tr WH aap’]; mpos twa, with one, 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal. i.
18; with specification of time how long: Acts x. 48;
xxi. 4, 10; xxviii. 12,14; 1 Co.xvi. 7. b. trop. to per-
severe, continue; with dat. of the thing continued in
[ef. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p.10 sq.] : r7 dyapria,
Ro. vi. 1; 17 amortta, Ro. xi. 23; 77 mioret, Col. i. 23; in
the work of teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 16 (7 i) ddixetv, Xen.
oec. 14, 7; rH pynoreia, Ael. v.h. 10,15); with dat. of the
blessing for which one keeps himself fit: ri ydpert, Acts
xiii. 43 Ree.; 17 xpnorornt, Ro. xi. 22; with a ptep.
denoting the action persisted in: Jn. viii. 7 Rec.; Acts
xii. 16; ef. B. 299 sq. (257); [W. § 54, 4].*
€TLVEVW
ém-vedw: 1 aor. érévevoa; fr. Hom. down; to nod to;
trop. (by anod) to express approval, to assent: Acts xviii.
20, as often in Grk. writ.*
émlvoua, -as, 7), (emwoew to think on, devise), thought,
purpose: Acts viii. 22. (Jer. xx. 10; Sap. vi. 17, etc. ;
often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. down.) *
émopkéw, -@: fut. émopxnoe, cf. Kriger § 40 s. v., and
§ 39, 12,4; [Veitch s.v.; B.53 (46)]; (emlopkos, q.v.) 5
to swear falsely, forswear one’s self: Mt. v. 33. (Sap.
xiv. 28; 1 Esdr. i. 46; by Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
éni-opxos, -ov, (fr. ei [q. v- D. 7] against, and épkos) ;
[masce. as subst.] a false swearer, a perjurer: 1 Tim.i.10.
(From Hom. down.) *
émiotoa, see emer.
émovovos, -ov, a word found only in Mt. vi. 11 and Lk. xi.
v
°
3, in the phrase dpros émovows ([Pesh.] Syr. [SowS
Vo >
9 the bread of our necessity, i. e. necessary for
us [but the Curetonian (earlier) Syriac reads Ldudo|
continual ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below, I. 3 p. 214 sqq.; Tay-
lor, Sayings of the Jewish Fathers, p. 139 sq.]; Itala
[Old Lat.] panis quotidianus). Origen testifies [de orat.
27] that the word was not in use in ordinary speech, and
accordingly seems to have been coined by the Evange-
lists themselves. Many commentators, as Beza, Kui-
noel, Tholuck, Ewald, Bleek, Keim, Cremer, following
Origen, Jerome (who in Mt. only translates by the bar-
barous phrase panis supersubstantialis), Theophylact,
Euthymius Zigabenus, explain the word by bread for
sustenance, which serves to sustain life, deriving the word
from ovoia, after the analogy of e£ovcvos, évodoros. But
ovgia very rarely, and only in philosophic language, is
equiv. to dmapéts, as in Plato, Theaet. p. 185 c. (opp. to
TO py etvac), Aristot. de part. anim. i. 1 (7 yap yéveows
vera Tis ovalas eativ, GAN ovx 7 ovcia Eveka Ths yevereas ;
for other exx. see Bonitz’s Index to Aristot. p. 544), and
generally denotes either essence, real nature, or sub-
stance, property, resources. On this account Leo Meyer
(in Kuhn, Zeitschr. f. vergleich. Sprachkunde, vii. pp.
401-430), Kamphausen (Gebet des Herrn, pp. 86-102),
with whom Keim (ii. 278 sq. [ Eng. trans. iii. 340]), Weiss
(Mt. l. e.), Delitzsch (Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. 1876 p.
402), agree, prefer to derive the word from ezeiva: (and
in particular fr. the ptcp. era, émovovos for émévrios, see
below) to be present, and to understand it bread which is
ready at hand or suffices, so that Christ is conjectured to
have said in Chald. NIPNI xn? (ef. ‘pn on? my allow-
ance of bread, Prov. xxx. 8) or something of the sort.
But this opinion, like the preceding, encounters the great
objection (to mention no other) that, although the ¢ in emi
is retained before a vowel in certain words (as émuopkos,
emopkéw, emiocaonat, etc. [cf. Bp. Lghtft., as below, I.
§ 1]), yet in emetvac and words derived from it, érovcia,
érovatwdns, it is always elided. Therefore much more cor-
rectly do Grotius, Scaliger, Wetstein, Fischer (De vitiis
lexx. etc. p. 306 sqq.), Valckenaer, Fritzsche (on Mt. p.
267 sqq.), Winer (97 (92)), Bretschneider, Wahl, Meyer,
[Bp. Lghtft. (Revision ete., App.) ] and others, compar-
241
émritro0ew
ing the words éxovovos, €beAovatos, yepovatos, (fr. Exav, e6€-
Aor, yepor, for Exovrios, €OeAdvrios, yepovtvos, cf. Kiihner i.
§ 63, 3 and § 334, 1 Anm. 2), conjecture that the adjec-
tive éemuovovos is formed from émmyv, émiotca, with refer-
ence to the familiar expression 4 émovca (see éretp),
and dpros émtovavos is equiv. to apros tis émuovons nuépas,
food for (i. e. necessary or sufficient for) the morrow.
Thus émovotov and onpepoy admirably answer to each
other, and that state of mind is portrayed which, piously
contented with food sufficing from one day to the next, in
praying to God for sustenance does not go beyond the
absolute necessity of the nearest future. This explana-
tion is also recommended by the fact that in the Gospel
according to the Hebrews, as Jerome testifies, the word
émiovatos was represented by the Aramaic 1m, “quod
dicitur crastinus”’; hence it would seem that Christ him-
self used the Chaldaic expression 7999 "4 xond>. Nor
is the prayer, so understood, at variance with the mind
of Christ as expressed in Mt. vi. 34, but on the contrary
harmonizes with it finely; for his hearers are bidden
to ask of God, in order that they may themselves be
relieved of anxiety for the morrow. [See Bp. Lehtft.,
as above, pp. 195-234; McClellan, The New Test. ete.
pp- 632-647; Tholuck, Bergpredigt, Mt. 1. c., for earlier
ref
émt-rinrw; 2 aor. érémecov, 3 pers. plur. émémevav, Ro.
xv. 3 L T Tr WH [cf. daépyopar init.]; pf. ptep. émure-
mrokwos; [see mimrw|; Sept. for 533; to fall upon; to
rush or press upon ; a. prop.: tii, upon one, Mk. iii.
10; to lie upon one, Acts xx. 10; émi Tov tpdynddv Tivos,
to fall into one’s embrace, Lk. xv. 20; Acts xx. 37, (Gen.
xlvi. 29; Tobit xi. 8, 12; 3 Mace. v. 49); to fall back
upon, émi to otnO0s Twos, Jn. xiii. 25 RGT. b. metaph.
emi twa, to fall upon one, i. e. to seize, take possession of
him: Bos, Lk.i. 12; Acts xix.17[L Tr érecey]; Rev.
xi. 11 L T Tr WH; éxoraois, Acts x. 10 Rec.; dydvs,
Acts xiii. 11[RG]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its
inspiration and impulse: emi tux, Acts vill. 16; emi twa,
x. 44 [Lehm. émece]; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5); of reproaches
cast upon one: Ro. xv. 3 [Noteworthy is the absol.
use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. éemecey (al. éyevero) ord-
ows. (From Hat. down.)]*
émt-mAnoow: 1 aor. émémdnka; a. prop. to strike
upon, beat upon: Hom. Il. 10, 500. b. trop. to chas-
tise with words, to chide, upbraid, rebuke: 1 Tim. v. 1.
(Hom. Il. 12, 211; Xen., Plato, Polyb., al.) *
ém-ro0éw, -@; 1 aor. émendOnoa; prop. méOov exw emi
wm [i.e. emt is directive, not intensive; cf. emi, D. 2]
(cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq.) ; to long for, de-
sire: foll. by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2; iSety twa, Ro.i. 11; 1
Th. iii. 6; 2 Tim. i. 4; Phil. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br.; ri,
1 Pet. ii. 2 (i tu, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2); teva, to be possessed
with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30. 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26
RGT Tr WH nrg. ; to pursue with love, to long after:
2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 8, (ras évtodas Oeov, Ps. exviii.
(exix.) 131); absol. to lust [i. e. harbor forbidden desire]:
Jas. iv. 5, on which pass. see POdvos. (Hdt., Plat., Diod.,
Plut., Leian.) *
3 ‘
éemuTroOnats
ém-1é0yots, -ews, 7, longing: 2 Co. vii. 7,11. (Ezek.
xxiii. 11 Aq.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 21,131 p. 527 a.) *
ém-160nTOs, -ov, longed for: Phil.iv.1. ([Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 65,1; Barn. ep. 1,3]; App. Hisp. 43; Eustath.;
[ef. W. § 34, 3].)*
émurrobia [ WH -rdeta, see s. v. et, «],-as, 9, longing: Ro.
xv. 23; dma€ Neydp. [On the passage cf. B, 294 (252). ]*
émi-ropevopat; fo go or journey to: mpds twa, Lk. viii.
4; (foll. by éwé with the acc. Ep. Jer. 61 (62); Polyb. 4,
9, 2; freq. used by Polyb. with the simple ace. of place:
both to go to, traverse regions, cities (so thy yhv, Ezek.
xxxix. 14 for 11) ; ras duvapets, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also
to make a hostile inroad, overrun, march over).*
ém-pparrw (T Tr WH émpamra, see P, p); (parrw to
sew); to sew upon, sew to: éni rut [RG; al. twa], Mk.
iL 2h
ém-pplrrw (LT Tr WH eémpinta, see P, p): 1 aor.
éreppia; (pintw) ; to throw upon, place upon: ti én Tt,
Lk. xix.35; (Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) :
THY péptuvay eri Gedy, i. e. to cast upon, give up to, God,
1 Pet. v. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (lv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Hom.
Od. 5, 310 down.] *
énlo-nwos, -ov, (ojuaa sign, mark) ; 1. prop. having
a mark on it, marked, stamped, coined : dpytpiov, xpvass,
(Hat., Thuc., Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. marked
(Lat. insignis). both in a good and bad sense ; in a good
sense, of note, illustrious: Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.) ;
in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. 16 (Eur.
Or. 249; Joseph. antt. 5,7, 1; Plut. Fab. Max. 14; al.).*
émoitiopds, -ov, 6, (emtotrifouat to provision one’s
self) ; 1. a foraging, providing food, (Xen., Plut.,
al.). 2. supplies, provisions, food [ A. V. victuals]: Lk.
ix. 12 (Sept., Xen., Dem., Hdian., al.).*
ém-oxéerropat; fut. 3 pers. sing. émeoxéWera, Lk. i. 78
Trmrg. WH; 1 aor. ereoxeyapnv; fr. Hdt. down; Sept.
often for 199; to look upon or after, to inspect, examine
with the eyes; a. twvd, in order to see how he is, i. e. to
visit, go to see one: Acts vii. 23; xv. 36, (Judg. xv. 1);
the poor and afflicted, Jas. i. 27; the sick, Mt. xxv. 36,
43, (Sir. vii. 35; Xen. mem. 3, 11, 10; Plut. mor. p. 129 e.
{de sanitate praecept. 15 init.]; Lceian. philops. 6, and in
med. writ.). b. Hebraistically, to look upon in order to
help or to benefit, i. q. to look after, have a care for, pro-
vide for, of God: twa, Lk. vii. 16 ; Heb. ii. 6, (Gen. xxi.
1); Ex, tv. 315. Paiva.) 5s, Ixxix., (xxx.)\155, Sin xlyi:
14; Jud. viii. 33, etc.) ; foll. by a telic inf. Acts xv. 14;
absol. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 21) yet with a statement of
the effect and definite blessing added, Lk. i. 68; éze-
oxevaro [WH Tr mrg. émoxeéyerac] nas dvatodn &&
dYous a light from on high hath looked [al. shall look]
upon us (cf. our the sun looks down on us, etc.), i. e. sal-
vation from God has come to us, Lk. i. 78. (in the O. T.
used also in a bad sense of God as punishing, Ps.
Ixxxvili. (Ixxxix.) 33; Jer. ix. 25; xi. 22, etc.) c. to
look (about) for, look out (one to choose, empioy, etc.) :
Acts vi. 3.*
ém-oxevatw: to furnish with things necessery; Mid. to
furnish one’s self or for one’s se2f: émurxevacdusva, bav-
242
eTLTKOTY;
ing gathered and made ready the things necessary for
the journey, Acts xxi. 15 L T Tr WH, for R G dmocxev-
acdpevot (which see in its place).*
ém-oknVvow, -@: 1 aor. éreoxyvwca; to fix a tent or habi-
tation on: émt ras oikias, to take possession of and live
in the houses (of the citizens), Polyb. 4, 18, 8; rats
oixias, 4, 72,1; trop. emi twa, of the power of Christ
descending upon one, working within him and giving
him help, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. 9.*
ém-oxidto; [impf. émeckiagoy, Lk. ix. 34 Lmrg.T Tr
txt. WH]; fut. émuoxidow; 1 aor. éreckxiaca; to throw a
shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow: tui,
Acts v. 15. From a vapgrous cloud that casts a
shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud
surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness:
twa, Mt. xvii. 5; Lk. ix. 34; rwi, Mk. ix. 7. Tropi-
cally, of the Holy Spirit exerting creative energy upon
the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a
use of the word which seems to have been drawn from
the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the
immediate presence and power of God): with the dat.
Lk. i. 835. (In prof. auth. generally w. an ace. of the
object and in the sense of obscuring: Hdt. 1,209; Soph.,
Aristot., Theophr., Philo, Leian., Udian., Geop. Sept.
for 20 to cover, Ps. xe. (xci.) 4; exxxix. (exl.) 8; for
jaw, Ex. xl. 29 (35) emeokiagey emt ri axnyny 7 vepedrn;
[ef. W. § 52, 4, 7].)*
émt-oKotréw, -@; to look upon, inspect, oversee, look after,
care for: spoken of the care of the church which rested
upon the presbyters, 1 Pet. v. 2 [[T WH om.] (with rv
exkAnoiay added, Ignat. ad Rom. 9,1); foll. by yn [q. v.
II. 1 a.] i. q. Lat. caveo, to look carefully, beware: Heb.
xii. 15. (Often by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
ém-ckomy, -7s, 7, (e€micxomew), inspection, visitation,
(Germ. Besichtigung) ; a. prop.: els émtok. Tov mardos
to visit the boy, Leian. dial. deor. 20, 6; with this ex-
ception no example of the word in prof. writ. has yet
been noted. b. In biblical Grk., after the Hebr.
77p2, that act by which God looks into and searches
out the ways, deeds, character, of men, in order to ad-
judge thei their lot accordingly, whether joyous or sad;
inspection, investigation, visitation, (Vulg. usually visita-
tio): so univ. év émurxorn Wuxev, when he shall search
the souls of men, i. e. in the time of divine judgment,
Sap. iii. 18; also év Spa éemuxomis, Sir. xviii. 20 (19);
so perhaps év npuépa émuoxomis, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [see below];
in a good sense, of Giod’s gracious care: tov Katpov ths
emirkorrns Tov, i. €. Tov Katpov ev @ emeckeWaro ce 6 Geds,
in which God showed himself gracious toward thee and
offered thee salvation through Christ (see émoxémropat,
b.), Lk. xix. 44; év xaipé émtoxorys, in the time of divine
reward, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lchm.; also, in the opinion of many
commentators, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [al. associate this pass. with
Lk. xix. 44 above; cf. De Wette (ed. Briickner) o
Huther ad loc.]; fr. the O. T. cf. Gen. 1. 24 sq.; Job
xxxiv. 9; Sap. ii. 20; iii. 7, ete. with a bad reference.
of divine punishment: Ex. iii. 16; Is.x.3; Jer. x. 15
Sap. xiv. 11; xix. 14 (15); [etc.; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.}
émrlioKomTros
ce. after the analogy of the Hebr. Mpa (Num. iv. 16;
1 Chr. xxiv. 19 [here Sept. emioxeyis |, ete.), oversight
i. e. overseership, office, charge; Vulg. episcopatus: Acts
i. 20, fr. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 8; spec. the office of a bishop
(the overseer or presiding officer of a Christian
church): 1 Tim. iii. 1, and in eccl. writ.*
éml-oKxotros, -ov, 6, (emioxemToma), an overseer, 2 man
charged with the duty of seeing that things to be done
by others are done rightly, any curator, guardian, or
superintendent; Sept. for TPds Judg. ix. 28; Neh. xi.
9,14, 22; 2 K. xi. 15, ete.; 1 Macc. i. 51. The word
has the same comprehensive sense in Grk. writ. fr.
Homer Odys. 8, 163; Il. 22, 255 down; hence in the
N. T. émiok. rév uxév guardian of souls, one who
watches over their welfare: 1 Pet. ii. 25 ([rév mavrés
mvevparos KTiatTny K. emiokorov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3];
dpxvepeds Kal mpootdrns tov Wuxav juav Incods Xp. ibid.
61, 3; [ef. Sir. i. 6]), cf. Heb. xiii. 17. spec. the super-
intendent, head or overseer of any Christian church; Vulg.
episcopus: Acts xx. 28; Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i.
7; see mpecBurepos, 2 b.; [and for the later use of the
word, see Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Bishop].*
ém-omdo, -6: fr. Aeschyl. down; to draw on: py emt
ondob, sc. axpoSvoriay, let him not draw on his fore-
skin (Hesych. pi) emvamrda bw > pi éAxver@ To Seppa) [ A. V.
let him not become uncircumcised], 1 Co. vii. 18. From
the days of Antiochus Epiphanes [B. c. 175-164] down
(1 Mace. i. 15; Joseph. antt. 12, 5, 1), there had been
Jews who, in order to conceal from heathen persecutors
or scoffers the external sign of their nationality, sought
artificially to compel nature to reproduce the prepuce,
by extending or drawing forward with an iron instru-
ment the remnant of it still left, so as to cover the
glans. The Rabbins called such persons 0°33w1, from
yz to draw out, see Buxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1274 [(ed.
Fischer ii. 645 sq.). Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Circumcision,
esp. McC. and S. ibid. II. 2.]*
ém-omelpw: 1 aor. énéomerpa; to sow above or besides:
Mt. xiii. 25 LT TrWH. (Hdt., Theophr., [al.].) *
érlcrapar (seems to be the Ionic form of the Mid. of
epiotnut. Isocrates, Aristot., al., also use émornoat Thy
Sidvotav, tov vouv, éavtdv for to put one’s attention on, fix
one’s thoughts on; indeed, the simple émorjoa is used
in the same sense, by an ellipsis analogous to that of
tov voov with the verbs mpocéyew, ereyerv, and of thy dw
with mpooBadrAew; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 281 sq.
Hence ériorayai is prop. to turn one’s self or one’s mind
to, put one’s thought upon a thing); fr. Hom. down;
Sept. chiefly for yt}; (cf. Germ. sich worauf verstehen) ;
a. to be acquainted with: ri, Acts xviii. 25; Jas. iv. 14;
Jude 10; teva, Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is
said or is to be interpreted, to understand: Mk. xiv. 68;
1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to know: mepi tuvos, Acts xxvi. 26;
foll.-by an acc. with a ptcep. Acts xxiv. 10 [W. 346 (324);
B. 301 (258)]; foll. by or, Acts xv. 7; xix. 25; xxii.
19; foll. by as, Acts x. 28; by mas, Acts xx. 18; by mod,
Heb. xi. 8. [Syn. see yuwaoke. | *
émi-oracis, -ews, 7, (ehiotnut, ebiorapar), an advanc-
243
’ /,
eTrLaTpEepa
ing, approach; incursion, onset, press: ths kaxias (Vulg.
malorum incursio), 2 Mace. vi. 3, where cf. Grimm; used
of the pressure of a multitude asking help, counsel, etc.,
tui (on which dat. ef. W. § 31,3; [B. 180 (156) ]; Kiihner
§ 424, 1) to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 LT Tr WH (but others
would have us translate it here by oversight, attention,
care, a com. meaning of the word in Polyb.); used of a
tumultuous gathering in Acts xxiv.12LTTrWH. Cf.
Beune:*
émotarnys, -ov, 6, (epiotnut), any sort of a superintend-
ent or overseer (often so in prof. writ., and several times
in Sept., as Ex. i. 11; v.14; 1 K. v.16; 2K. xxv. 19;
Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii. 2; xxxi.12); a master,
used in this sense for *3> by the disciples [cf. Lk. xvii.
13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus “ not
from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his
authority” (Bretschneider) ; found only in Luke: v. 5;
Vill. 24,45; 1x: 33,49): xvii. 13.*
ém-oréh\dw: 1 aor. eméeoreha; prop. to send to one a
message, command, (Hat. et sqq.); émurodas, to send
by letter, write a letter, Plato, epp. p. 363 b., hence
simply to write a letter [cf. W. § 3, 1 b.]: rwi, Heb. xiii.
22 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7,1; 47, 38; 62,1; and often in
Grk. writ.) ; to enjoin by letter, to write instructions: Acts
xxi. 25 RGTTrmrg.WHmrg.; _ foll. by rod with an
inf. expressing purpose [cf. W. 326 (306); B. 270
(232)]: Acts xv. 20.*
émirThpov, -ov, gen. -ovos, (emictapuac), intelligent, ex-
perienced, [esp. one having the knowledge of an ex pert;
cf. Schmidt ch. 13 §§ 10, 13]: Jas. iii. 13. (From Hom.
down; Sept.) *
ém-ornpl{w; 1 aor. émeotnpiéa; a later word; to estab-
lish besides, strengthen more; to render more firm, confirm:
tia, one’s Christian faith, Acts xiv. 22; xv. 32, 41;
xviii. 23 R G.*
émi-cToAn, -7s, 7, (emuaTé AX), a letter, epistle: Acts xv.
30; Ro. xvi. 22; 1 Co.v.9, etce.; plur., Acts ix. 2; 2Co.
x. 10, ete.; emeatoAai avotarixat, letters of commendation,
2 Co. iii. 1 [W. 176 (165). On the possible use of the
plur. of this word interchangeably with the sing. (cf.
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 113, 8), see Bp. Lghtft. and
Meyer on Phil. iii. 1. (Eur., Thuc., al.)]
ém-cropitw ; (ardua); prop. to bridle or stop up the
mouth; metaph. to stop the mouth, reduce to silence: Tit.
i. 11. (Plato, Gorg. p. 482 e.; Dem. 85, 4; often in
Plut. and Lcian.) *
em-orpépw ; fut. émotpeyya; 1 aor. eméotpeya; 2 aor.
pass. émeotpadpny; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for JT, 330
and 307}, 739, and times without number for 33¥ and
wv; 1. transitively, a. to turn to: én tov Oeov, to
the worship of the true God, Acts xxvi. 20. b. to cause
to return, to bring back; fig. rwa ét kvpiov tov Gedy, to the
love and obedience of God, Lk. i. 16; émi réxva, to love
for the children, Lk. i. 17; év hpovncer Stxaiwv, that they
may be in [R. V. to walk in] the wisdom of the righteous,
Lk. i. 173; reva éxi twa, supply from the context emi rip
GAndevav and éni tv ddov, Jas. v. 19 sq. 2. intrans.
(W. § 38, 1 [cf. p. 26; B. 144 (126 sq.)]); a. fo turn,
emia Tpopn
to turn one’s self: émt rov xvptov and emi tov Oedv, of Gen-
tiles passing over to the religion of Christ, Acts ix. 35;
xi. 21; xiv. 15; xv. 19; xxvi. 20, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 25; ampos
mi, Acts ix. 40; mpos rov Oedv, 1 Th. i. 9; 2 Co. iii. 16;
amo Tivos ets Tt, Acts xxvi. 18. b. to turn one’s self about,
turn back: absol. Acts xvi. 18; foll. by an inf. express-
ing purpose, Rev. i.12. . to return, turn back, come
back; «a. properly: Lk. ii. 20 Rec. ; viii. 55; Acts xv. 36 ;
with the addition of dmiow (as in Ael. v. h. 1, 6 [var.]),
foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mt. xxiv. 18; foll. by ets with
acc. of place, Mt. xii. 44; [Lk. ii. 39 TWH Trmmrg.]; es
ra omiow, Mk. xiii. 16; Lk. xvii. 31; emi re, to, 2 Pet. ii.
22. B. metaph.: émi m1, Gal. iv. 9; emi teva, Lk. xvii. 4
Rec., but G om. émi oe; mpds teva, ibid. LT Tr WH; &k
ths évrodjs, to leave the commandment and turn back to
a worse mental and moral condition, 2 Pet. ii. 21 RG;
absol. to turn back morally, to reform: Mt. xiii. 15; Mk.
iv. 12; Lk. xxii. 32; Acts iii.19; xxviii. 27. In the mid.
and 2 aor. pass. a. fo turn one’s self about, to turn
around: absol., Mt. ix. 22 RG; Mk. v.30; viii. 33; Jn.
xxi. 20. b. to return: foll. by mpés [WH txt. eri] twa,
Mt. x. 13 (on which pass. see eipyvn, 3 fin.); émt rov Oedv,
1 Pet. ii. 25 (see 2a. above); toreturn to a better mind,
repent, Jn. xii. 40 [R G].*
ém-orpohh, -js, 7, (emuotpepw), conversion (of Gentiles
fr. idolatry to the true God [cf. W. 26]): Acts xv. 3.
(Cf. Sir. xlix. 2; xviii. 21 (20); in Grk. writ. in many
other senses.) *
ém-ovv-dyw ; fut. émisvvadéw; 1 aor. inf. émovvagar; 2
aor. inf. émuovvayayeiv; Pass., pf. ptcp. émervrnypevos ;
1 aor. ptep. emcvvaybeis ; [fut. emurvvayOnoopat, Lk. xvii.
37 T Tr WH]; Sept. several times for Dx, yp, TAP ;
1. to gather together besides, to bring together to others
already assembled, (Polyb.). 2. to gather together
against (Mic. iv. 11; Zech. xii. 3; 1 Mace. iii. 58, etc.).
3. to gather together in one place (émi to): Mt. xxiii. 37;
xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk. xiii. 34; Pass.: Mk. i.33; Lk.
xii. 1; xvii. 37 T Tr WH, (Ps. ci. (cii.) 235; ev. (cvi.) 47;
2 Mace. i. 27, etc.; Aesop 142).*
émi-ovv-aywyt, -7s, 7, (emicuvayw, q. V-); | a. a gather-
ing together in one place, i. q. To emeavvayerOa (2 Mace.
ii. 7): emi twa, to one, 2 Th.ii. 1. b. (the religious)
assembly (of Christians): Heb. x. 25. *
ém-cvv-rpéexw ; to run together besides (i. e. to others
already gathered): Mk. ix. 25. Not used by prof.
writ.*
ém-cioracts, -ews, 7, (emirvvicrapat to collect togeth-
er, conspire against) a gathering together or combining
against or at. Hence 1. a hostile banding together or
concourse: roteiy emtsvoracur, to excite a riotous gather-
ing of the people, make a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 RG; 1
Esdr. v. 70 Alex.; Sext. Empir. adv. eth. p. 127 [p.571,
20 ed. Bekk.; cf. Philo in Flac. § 1]; ruvds, against one,
Num. xxvi. 9; a conspiracy, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20. 2.
a troublesome throng of persons seeking help, counsel,
comfort: twos, thronging to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 RG (see
énioracts); Luther, dass ich werde angelaufen.*
étmodadts, -€s, (opaddo to cause to fall), prone to fall:
244
érreTiOnps
mAods, a dangerous voyage, Actsxxvii.9. (Plato, Polyb.,
Plat:,/als)*
ér-toxtw: [impf. éricxvor] ; 1. trans. to give addi-
tional strength ; to make stronger, (Sir. xxix. 1; Xen. oec.
11, 13). 2. intrans. to receive greater strength, grow
stronger, (1 Mace. vi. 6; Theophr., Diod.): éricyvop
Aeyovres, they were the more urgent saying, i. e. they
alleged the more vehemently, Lk. xxiii. 5.*
ém-cwpevw: fut. emicawpevow; to heap up, accumulate
in piles: 88aoxddovs, to choose for themselves and run
after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut.
Athen., Artemid., al.) *
ém-rayn, -7s, 7, (emtrdcow), an injunction, mandate,
command: Ro. xvi. 26; 1 Co. vii. 25; 1 Tim.i.1; Tit. i. 3;
peta maons emrayns, with every possible form of authors
ity, Tit. ii. 15; kar’ émeraynv, by way of command, 1 Co.
vii. 6; 2Co. viii. 8. (Sap. xiv. 16, ete.; Polyb., Diod.)*
ém-taccw; 1 aor. emeraka; (rdoow); to enjoin upon,
order, command, charge: absol. Lk. xiv. 22; rui, Mk. i.
27; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36; viii. 25; ruvi rd avnxov, Philem. 8;
revi foll. by the inf., Mk. vi. 39; Lk. viii. 31; Acts xxiii.
2; foll. by ace. and inf. Mk. vi. 27; foll. by direct dis-
course, Mk. ix. 25. (Several times in Sept. ; Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt. down.) [Syn. see xedeva, fin. ]*
ém-red€w, -@; fut. emireA€ow; 1 aor. éweredeca; [pres.
mid. and pass. émreAovpat | ; 1. to bring to an end,
accomplish, perfect, execute, complete: substantively, ro
emreheoat, 2 Co. viii. 11; ri, Lk. xiii. 32[R G]; Ro. xv.
28; 2 Co. vii. 1; viii. 6, 11; Phil.i.6; Heb. viii.5; ras
Aarpeias, to perform religious services, discharge relig-
ious rites, Heb. ix. 6 (similarly in prof. writ., as Opnokeias,
Hat. 2, 37; dpras, 4, 186; Ovoiav, Ovoias, 2, 633; 4, 26;
Hdian. 1. 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Aevroupyias, Philo de som.
i. § 37). Mid. (in Grk. writ. to take upon one’s self: ra
Tov ynpws, the burdens of old age, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 8;
@avatov, Xen. apol. 33; with the force of the act.: ri,
Polyb. 1, 40,16; 2, 58,10) to make an end for one’s self,
i. e. to leave off (cf. matvw) : TH wapki, so as to give your-
selves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it, Gal. iii. 3 [oth-
ers take it passively here: are ye perfected in etc., cf.
Meyer]. 2. to appoint to, impose upon: twit maOjpara,
in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9 (rv dixny, Plat. legg. 10 fin.).*
émuttSevos, -ela, -etov, also -os, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, 1], (ere
tnoes, adv., enough; and this acc. to Buttmann fr. én
rade [? cf. Vaniéek p. 271]); = 1. fit, suitable, conven-
ient, advantageous. 2. needful; plur. ra émirndeca esp.
the necessaries of life (Thue. et sqq.): with addition of
Tov oa@paros, Jas. ii. 16.*
ém-r(Onpt, 3 pers. plur. emeteOaor (Mt. xxiii. 45 cf. W.
§ 14,1 b.; B.44 (38); Bttm. Ausf. Spr.i. p. 505; Kiih-
ner i. p. 643; [Jelf § 274; and on this and foll. forms
see Veitch s. vv. riOnut, rtOéw]), impv. émeriOe (1 Tim.
vy. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bittm. Ausf. Spr. i.
p- 508; Kiihner § 209, 5; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]); impf. 3
pers. plur. émetiOovy (Acts vill. 17 RG), éreridecay (ib.
LT Tr WH,;; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509: B. 45 (39));
fut. émOnow; 1 aor. éreOnka; 2 aor. eméOnv, impv. emibes
(Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. 18; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid,
emiT Law
[pres. émiriBepar] ; fut. émOnoopar; 2 aor. émeOeuny; [1
aor. pass. émereOnv (Mk. iv. 21 RG)]; in Sept. chiefly
for |}, DW and DWT; 1. Active: a. to put or lay
upon: ti émi mt, Mt. xxiii. 4; xxvii. 29 R GL; Mk. iv. 21
RG; Lk. xv. 5; Jn. ix. [6 WH txt. Tr mrg.], 15; [xix. 2
Lumrg., see below]; Acts xv. 10 [cf. W. 318 (298) ; B.
261 (224)]; xxviii. 3; ri emi ruvos, gen. of thing, Mt.
xxvii. 29 T Tr WH; e with dat. of thing, Mt. xxvii. 29
LTTr WH; ri xeipa [or tds xetpas or xetpas] emi twa,
Mt. ix. 18; Mk. viii. 25[( WH Tr txt. €@nxev)]; xvi. 18;
Acts viii. 17; [ix. 17]; Rev.i.17 Rec.; emi twa mAnyas,
calamities, Rev. xxii. 18 [but see b. below]; édvw rwds,
Mt. xxi. 7 RG; xxvii. 37; emi twos, Lk. viii. 16 RG; ri
tum, Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 2 [not L mrg., see above] ;
Acts xv. 283; rwi dvoya, Mk. iii. 16 sq.; revi ras xeipas, Mt.
xix. 13 [cf. B. 233 (201) ; W. 288 (270 sq.)], 15; Mk. v.
23 ; [viii. 23, here Tr mrg. atrov]; Lk. iv. 40; xiii. 13;
Acts vi. 6; viii. 19; xiii. 3; xix.6; xxviii. 8; 1 Tim. v.
22; [ruwi rH xeipa, Mk. vii. 32]; xetpa [RG, yeipas or
ras xeipas L T Tr WH], Acts ix. 12; rwi mAnyds, to in-
flict blows, lay stripes on one, Lk. x. 380; Acts xvi.
23. b. toaddto: Rev. xxii. 18 (opp. to dparpeiy vs. 19).
2. Middle; a. tohave put on, bid to be laid on; ti eénitt
(Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,4): ra mpds tHv xpeiar, sc. wi, to provide
one with the things needed [al. put on board sc. the ship],
Acts xxviii. 10. b. to lay or throw one’s self upon; with
dat. of pers. to attack one, to make an assault on one:
Acts xviii. 10; Ex. xxi. 14; xviii. 11; 2 Chr. xxiii. 13,
and often in prof. writ.; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 593
(552). Comp.: ouvemridnu. | *
émi-Tipsde, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. éreriua, 3 pers. plur.
e€retipwv; 1 aor. éretivnoa; Sept. for 11; in Grk.
writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor: tia, Hat. 6, 39.
2. to raise the price of: 6 citos émetysnbn, Dem. 918, 22;
al. 3. to adjudge, award, (fr. tyun in the sense of
merited penalty) : thv Sixnv, Hdt. 4, 43. 4. to tax with
fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so
Thuc., Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2; revi,
charge one with wrong, Lk. [ix. 55]; xvii. 3; xxiii. 40;
to rebuke —in order to curb one’s ferocity or violence
(hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to re-
strain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), Mt.
viii. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39,415 viii. 24; ix.
42; Jude 9 [where Rec.” strangely émitiujoae (1 aor.
act. inf.) for -unoa: (opt. 3 pers. sing.) ]; or to keep one
away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Mk. x.
13; foll. by ta (with a verb expressing the opposite of
what is censured): Mt. xx. 31; Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii.
39; with the addition of Aéyav [cat Aéyet, or the like]
and direct discourse: Mk. i. 25 [T om. WH br. Aéyor];
viii. 33; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 35; xxiii. 46, (cf. Ps. ev. (evi.) 9;
CxViii. (cxix.) 21; Zech. iii. 2; and the use of aya in Nah.
i. 4; Mal. iii. 11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to ad-
monish or charge sharply: tivi, Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 30;
Lk. ix. 21 (emitiypnoas adrois mapnyyetey, foll. by theinf.),
xix. 39; with fva added, Mt. xvi. 20 LWHtxt.; Mk.
vill. 30; ta py, Mt. xii. 16; Mk. iii. 12. [Cf Trench
§ iv: Schmidt ch. 4, 11.]*
245
éTriupaveta
émutipla, -as, 7), (emitysdw), punishment (in Grk. writ. rd
emitipsov) : 2 Co. ii. 6 [B. § 147, 29]. (Sap. iii. 10; [al.].) *
[ém-ro-auré, Rec. in Acts i. 153; ii. 1, etc.; see airés,
III. 1, and cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Unters. p. 125 sq.]
ém-rperw; 1 aor. éméetpeyra; Pass., [pres. émetpéropa];
2 aor. éemerpdmnv; pf. 3 pers. sing. émurérpamrat (1 Co.
xiv. 34 RG); fr. Hom. down; 1. to turn to, transfer,
commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave: 1 Co.
xvi. 7; Heb. vi. 3; rwi, Mk. v.13; Jn. xix. 38; with an
inf. added, Mt. viii. 21; xix. 8; Lk. viii.32; ix. 59,61;
Acts xxi. 39 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and without the dat. Mk.
x. 4; foll. by acc. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L T Tr
WH mopevevrs) ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7, 8; Plato, lege. 5 p.
730d. Pass. émirpémerai tum, with inf.: Acts xxvi. 1;
Xxvili. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 34.*
[émurporevw; (fr. Hdt. down); to be émirpomos or proc-
urator: of Pontius Pilate in Lk. iii. 1 WH (rejected)
mrg.; see their App. ad loc.*]
émt-Tpoth, -7s, 7, (emiTpem@), permission, power, commis-
sion: Acts xxvi. 12. (From Thuc. down.) *
émltpotros, -ov, 6, (émirpemw), univ. one to whose care or
honor anything has been intrusted; a curator, guardian,
(Pind. OI. 1, 171, et al.; Philo de mundo § 7 6 eds xai
matip Kat Texvitns Kal emitpoTos Tv €v ovpava@ TE Kal ev
Koop). Spec. 1. a steward or manager of a house-
hold, or of lands ; an overseer: Mt. xx. 8; Lk. viii. 3;
Xen. oec. 12, 2; 21,9; (Aristot. oec. 1, 5 [p. 1344, 26]
SovAwy dé eid dbo, émitporos kal epyatns). 2. one who
has the care and tutelage of children; either where the
father is dead (a guardian of minors: 2 Mace. xi. 1;
xiii. 2; émirporos déppdver, Plato, lege. 6 p. 766 c.; Plut.
Lye. 3; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael.
veh. 3,:26)° Galvivi2*
émi-Tvyxavw: 2 aor. éméruxov; 1. to light or hit
upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plato).
2. to attain to, obtain: Jas. iv. 2; with gen. of thing,
Heb. vi. 15; xi. 33; with acc. of thing: rovro, Ro. xi. 7
(where Rec. rovrov). Cf. Matthiae § 328; [W. 200
(188) ].*
ém-palvw; 1 aor. inf. empava (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
24 sqq.; W.89 (85); B.41 (35); [Sept. Ps. xxx. (xxxi.)
17; exvii. (exviii.) 27, cf. xvi. (Ixvii.) 2]); 2 aor. pass.
erepavny; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to show to or
upon; to bring to light. 2. intrans. and in Pass. to
appear, become visible; a. prop.: of stars, Acts xxvii.
20 (Theocr. 2, 11); revi, to one, Lk. i. 79. b. fig. i. q.
to become clearly known, to show one’s self: Tit. iii. 4;
moves eitentie dl
emubdvera, -as, 7, (emupavns), an appearing, appearance,
(Tertull. apparentia); often used by the Greeks of a
glorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad-
vent to help; in 2 Mace. of signal deeds and events
betokening the presence and power of God as helper;
cf. Grimm on Mace. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough
exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Note B) in
the Journ. Soe. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq.
(1882)]. In the N. T. the ‘advent’ of Christ, — not
only that which has already taken place and by which
emipayvns
his presence and power appear in the saving light he
has shed upon mankind, 2 Tim. i. 10 (note the word
gewricarros in this pass.); but also that illustrious return
from heaven to earth hereafter to occur: 1 Tim. vi. 14;
2 Tim. iv. 1,8; Tit. ii. 13 [on which see esp. Prof. Abbot
u. s.]; 7 emupdvea (i. e. the breaking forth) trys mapov-
gias avrov, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.]*
émipavis, -€s, (emupaivw), conspicuous, manifest, illus-
trious: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the
Sept. here and in Judg. xiii. 6 [Alex.]; Hab. i.7; Mal.
i. 14 thus render the word §1j} ‘terrible, deriving it in-
correctly from 7X1 and so confounding it with 7893.*
ém-patoke (i. q. the empacxo of Grk. writ., cf. W.
90 (85); B. 67 (59)): fut. éemupatow; to shine upon:
rwvi, Eph. v. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will pour
upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light
to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5; xxxi. 26;
[xli. 9]; Acta Thomae § 34.) *
ém-pepw ; [impf. erepepov]; 2 aor. inf. émeveyxeiv;
[pres. pass. éemiepopat] ; 1. to bring upon, bring for-
ward : airiay, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic
writ. fr. Thuc. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5,2; Joseph.
antt. 2,6, 7; 4, 8, 23; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)),
Acts xxv. 18 (where LT Tr WH éepov) ; xpiow, Jude
9. 2. to lay upon, to inflict: thy dopynv, Ro. iii. 5
(mAnynv, Joseph. antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring upon i.e.
in addition, to add, increase: Odi Trois Secpois, Phil. i.
16 (17) Rec., but on this pass. see éyeipw, 4 ¢.; (mip
emtpepe rupi, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [ef. W. § 52,
4, 7]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, (pdppakor,
Plat. ep. 8 p. 354 b.): ri emi tua, in pass., Acts xix. 12,
where L T Tr WH arodépeo 6a, q. v.*
ém-hovew, -@: [impf. émepavovy]; to call out to, shout:
foll. by direct disc., Lk. xxiii. 21; Acts xii. 22; foll. by
the dat. of a pers., Acts xxii. 24; ri, Acts xxi. 34 LT
Tr WH. [(Soph. on.)]*
em-packw; [impf. erépwoxor]; to grow light, to dawn
[ef. B. 68 (60)]: Lk. xxiii. 54; foll. by eis, Mt. xxviii.
1, on which see eis, A. II. 1.*
emxetpew, -@: impf. emexeipovv; 1 aor. énexeipnoa;
(xetp) 5 1. prop. to put the hand to (Hom. Od. 24,
386, 395). 2. often fr. Hdt. down, to take in hand,
undertake, attempt, (anything to be done), foll. by the
inf.: Lk.i.1; Acts ix. 29; xix. 13; (2 Mace. ii. 29; vii.
19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.*
ém-xéw; fr. Hom. down; to pour upon: ri, Lk. x. 34
(sc. émi ra tpavpara; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. v. 0) 53
emt-xopnyéw, -@; 1 aor. impv. éemiyopnynoare; Pass.,
[pres. emtxopyyovpar]; 1 fut. émxopyynOncopa; (see yopn-
yew); io supply, furnish, present, (Germ. darreichen) :
mivi tt, 2 Co. ix. 10; Gal. iii. 5; i. g. to show or afford
by deeds: ryv dperny, 2 Pet. i. 5; in pass., eicodos, fur-
nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. 11; Pass. to be supplied, min-
wstered unto, assisted, (so the simple yopnyeioOa in Xen.
rep. Athen. 1,13; Polyb. 3, 75,3; 4, 77,2; 9, 44, te
Sir. xliv.6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, where Vulg.
subministratum. (Rare in prof. writ. as Dion. Hai. 1,
246
”
€7TO$
42; Phal. ep. 50; Diog. Laért. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr.
probl. 1, 81].) *
ém-xopnyla, -as, n, (emexopnyew, q. V-), (Vulg. submin-
istratio), a supplying, supply: Eph. iv. 16; Phil. i. 19.
(Eccl. writers.) *
ém-xplo: 1 aor. eméxpica; to spread on, anoint: ri émi
7t, anything upon anything, Jn. ix. 6 [WH txt. Tr mrg.
ereOnxev|; ri, to anoint anything (sc. with anything),
ibid. 11. (Hom. Od. 21,179; Leian. hist. serib. 62.) *
ér-orxodopew, -@; 1 aor. ém@xoddounoa, and without
augm. émotxoddunoa (1 Co. iii. 14 T Tr WH; cf. Tdf.’s
note on Acts vii. 47, [see oikodopew]) ; Pass., pres. émoc-
kodouovpat; 1 aor. ptcp. émorxodopunbévres; in the N. T.
only in the fig. which likens a company of Christian
believers to an edifice or temple; to build upon, build up,
(Vulg. superaedifico); absol. [like our Eng. build up]
viz. ‘to finish the structure of which the foundation has
already been laid,’ i. e. in plain language, to give con-
stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con-
formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where L T Tr WH oikod.
[Vulg. aedifico}); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Tdf.); emt
tov Gepedtov, 1 Co. ili. 12; ri, ibid. 14; év Xpiord, with
the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual
life, Col. ii. 7; émotxodopnd. emi Oepedio tev dmogrodor,
on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping
the fig.) gathered together into a church by the apostles’
preaching of the gospel, Eph. ii. 20; éouxodopetv éavrdv
th mioret, Jude 20, where the sense is, ‘resting on your
most holy faith as a foundation, make progress, rise like
an edifice higher and higher.’ (‘Thuc., Xen., Plato, al.) *
ém-oxeAAw: 1 aor. emw@xerta; to drive upon, strike
against: thv vady [i. e. to run the ship ashore], Acts
xxvii. 41 RG; see émxéAdkw. (Hat. 6, 16; 7, 182;
Thue. 4, 26.) *
€r-ovopatw: [pres. pass. émovoudtoua]; fr. Hdt. down;
Sept. for NTPs o put a name upon, name; Pass. to be
named: Ro. ii. 17; ef. Fritzsche ad loc.*
éx-orrevw [ptcp. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LT TrWH]; 1 aor.
ptep. émromrevoartes ; 1. to be an overseer (Homer,
Hesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attentively; to
watch (Aeschyl., Dem., al.): ri, 1 Pet. iii. 2; && revos,
Sc. tHv avaotpodny, 1 Pet. ii. 12.* ;
érémrys, -ov, 6, (fr. unused edna) ; 1. an over-
seer, inspector, see érioxomos; (Aeschyl., Pind., al.; of
God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39; vii. 35; 3 Mace. ii. 21; Add.
to Esth. v.1; avépwrivev épywv, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59,
3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything: so in 2
Pet. i. 16; inasmuch as those were called érénra by
the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high-
est] grade of the Eleusinian mysteries (Plut. Alcib. 22,
and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig-
nate those privileged to be present at the heavenly spec-
tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.*
€rros, -eos, (-ovs), TO, @ word: ws Eros eimeiv (see etrov,
1 a. p. 181°), Heb. vii. 9.*
[Syn. ros seems primarily to designate a word as an ar-
ticulate manifestation of a mental state, and so to differ from
pijua (q. v.),the mere vocable ; for its relation to Adyos see
Adyos I. 1.
érroupavLos
ér-ovpavios, -ov, (ovpavds), prop. existing in or above
heaven, heavenly ; 1. existing in heaven: 6 ratnp emov-
panos, i. e. God, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. (Aeoi, beds, Hom. Od.
17,484; Il. 6, 131, etce.; 3 Mace. vi. 28; vii. 6); of émou-
pavuot the heavenly beings, the inhabitants of heaven,
(Leian. dial. deor. 4, 3; of the gods, in Theoer. 25, 5):
of angels, in opp. to émiyecot and karaxOonmot, Phil. ii. 10;
Ienat. ad Trall. 9, [ef. Polye. ad Philipp. 2]; oapara,
the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, ace. to the
universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as
animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 376; Gfrérer, Philo
etc. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq.; Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p.
306; yet cf. Mey.ed. Heinrici ad loc.], cf. Job xxxviii. 7;
Enoch xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. xv. 40; 4
BaotXeia 7 emoup. (on which see p. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; sub-
stantially the same as 7 zarpis 7 émoup. Heb. xi. 16
and ‘IepovoaAnp emoup. xii. 22; kAjows, a calling made
(by God) in heaven, Heb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref.
to its end as well as to its origin; cf. Liinem. ad loc.],
ef. Phil. iii. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noé
§ 6]. The neut. ra erovpana denotes [cf. W. § 34, 2]
a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes
of God to grant salvation to men through the death of
Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see emiyeuos). b. the heavenly re-
gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels:
Eph. i. 3, 20 (where Lchm. txt. ovpavois) ; ii. 65 iii. 10;
the lower heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi.
12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s.v. Air]. c¢. the heavenly temple
or sanctuary: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly
origin and nature: 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to xoikds); 4
Swped 7) eroup. Heb. vi. 4.*
érrd, oi, ai, ra, seven: Mt. xii. 45; xv. 34; Mk. viii. 5
sq.; Lk. ii. 36; Acts vi. 3, ete.; often in the Apocalypse;
of énrd, sc. Stdxovot, Acts xxi. 8. In Mt. xviii. 22 it is
joined (instead of émrdxis) to the numeral adv. éBdoun-
kovrats, in imitation of the Hebr. paw, Ps. exviii. (exix.)
164; Prov. xxiv. 16; [see €Bdounxovraxis, and cf. Keil,
Com. on Mt. l. c.].
émrdxis, (era), seven times: Mt. xviii. 21 sq.; Lk. xvii.
4. ((Pind., Arstph., al.)]*
émraxis-x (rot, -at,-a, seven thousand: Ro. xi.4. [(Hdt.)]*
rw, see etirov.
"Epacros, -ov, 6, Erastus, (€paores beloved, [cf. Chan-
dler § 325; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 30]), the name
of two Christians: 1. the companion of the apostle
Paul, Acts xix. 22; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth,
Ro. xvi. 23. Which of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv.
20 cannot be determined.*
épavvaw, a later and esp. Alexandrian [cf. Sturz, Dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 117] form for epevvdw, q.v. Cf. Tdf.
ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. xxxvii.; [ed. maj. p. xxxiv.; esp.
ed. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.]; B. 58 (50).
épydtopat; depon. mid.; impf. eipyagouny (npyatouny,
Acts xviii. 3 LT Tr WH; [so elsewh. at times; this
var. in augm. is found in the aor. also]; cf. W. § 12, 8;
B. 33 (29 sq.); Steph. Thesaur. iii. 1970 c.; [Curtius, Das
Verbum, i. 124; Cramer, Anecd. 4,412; Veitch s. v.]);
1 aor. eipyaoduny (npyac. Mt. xxv. 16; [xxvi. 10]; Mk.
247
épyacia
xiv. 6, in T WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 T
Tr WH; cf. reff. as above]); pf. eipyacpa, in a pass.
sense [cf. W. § 38, 7e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk.
writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.]; (épyov); Sept. for Syd, 73y,
sometimes for NWy ; 1. absol. a. to work, labor, do
work: it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14;
Jn. v.17; ix.4; 2 Th. iii. 10; with addition of rais
xepot, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th.iv.11; with acc. of time:
voxta kal nuepav, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but Ltxt. T Tr WH the
gen., as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see jyépa, 1a.); cf. W. § 30, 11
and Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5]; with the predominant idea
of working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 (€v 7@ dumedon); Acts
xviii. 3; 1 Co. ix. 6; 2 Th. iii. 12; ace. to the concep-
tion characteristic of Paul, 6 épya¢ouevos he that does
works conformed to the law (Germ. der Werkthdtige) :
Ro. iv.4 sq. _ b. ¢o trade, to make gains by trading, (cf.
our “do business”): év tux, with a thing, Mt. xxv. 16
(often so by Dem.). 2. trans. a. (to worki.e.) to
do, work out: ri, Col. iii. 23; 2 Jn. 8 (with which [ace.
to reading of L T Tr txt.] cf. 1 Co. xv. 58 end); pndev,
2 Th. iii. 11; epyoy, Acts xiii. 41 (Oya Syd, Hab. i. 5);
€pyov kaddv eis twa, Mt. xxvi. 10; ev run (dat. of pers.
[ef. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Rec. eis eué]; épya,
wrought, pass., Jn. iii. 21; ra epya tov Oeod, what God
wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28; ix. 4; rod kupiov, to give
one’s strength to the work which the Lord wishes to
have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; 16 dyaOdv, [ Ro. ii. 10]; Eph.
iv. 28; mpds twa, Gal. vi. 10; caxdv revi tt, Ro. xiii. 10
(teva te is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kiihner § 411, 5]);
ti eis twa, 3 Jn. 5. with ace. of virtues or vices, (to work
i. e.) to exercise, perform, commit: Sixacocvynv, Acts x.
35; Heb. xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2; Zeph. ii. 3); ry dvo-
piav, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; duapriay,
Jas. ii. 9. onpetov, bring to pass, effect, Jn. vi. 30; ra
iepd, to be busied with the holy things i. e. to administer
those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi-
ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also,
1 Co. ix. 13; tHv Oddaccar lit. work the sea (mare exerceo,
Justin. hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [ef. “ do busi-
ness on,” Ps. evii. 23] and make one’s living from it, Rev.
Xviii. 17 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk.
writ., as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966°, 26]; Dion. Hal.
antt. 3,46; App. Punic. 2; [Lcian. de elect. 5; W. 223
(209)]). to cause to exist, produce: ri, so (for RG xa-
tepyatera) 2 Co. vii. 10 LT Tr WH; Jas. i. 20 LT Tr
WH. b. to work for, earn by working, to acquire, (cf.
Germ. erarbeiten) : thv Bpaow, Jn. vi. 27 (ypnyara, Hat.
1, 24; ra émirndeca, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2; Dem. 1358, 12;
apyvptov, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d.; Biov, Andoc. myst.
[18, 42] 144 Bekk.; @ycavpovs, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6;
Bpapa, Palaeph. 21, 2; al.); acc. to many interpreters
also 2 Jn. 8; but see 2a. above. [CoMP.: kxat-, mept-,
mpoo-epyaouat. | *
épyacta, -as, 7, (epyatopat) ; 1. i. gq. rd épyaterOa,
a working, performing: axaapaias, Eph. iv. 19. 2.
work, business: Acts xix. 25 (Xen. oec. 6, 8 et al.).
3. gain got by work, profit: Acts xvi. 19; mapéyxew épya-
ciav tui, ib. 16; xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above];
epyarns
(Xen. mem. 3, 10,1; cyneg. 3,3; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4.
endeavor, pains, [A. V. diligence]: didwpe épyaciay, after
the Latinism operam do, Lk. xii. 58 (Hermog. de invent.
3, 5, 7).
épyarns, -ov, 6, (€pyatopuat) ; 1. as in Grk. writ. a
workman, alaborer: usually one who works for hire, Mt.
x. 10; Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer,
Mt. ix. 37 sq.; xx. 1sq.8; Lk. x. 2; Jas. v.4, (Sap. xvii.
16) ; those whose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen
in the restricted sense], Acts xix. 25 (opp. to rots texvi-
ras [A. V. craftsmen], ib. 24), cf. Bengel ad loc.; those
who as teachers labor to propagate and promote Christi-
anity among men: 2 Co. xi. 13; Phil. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii.
15; cf Mt 1x37 ‘8q5 7° LE: x2. 2. one who does, a
worker, perpetrator : rns aduxias, Lk. xiii. 27 (ris avopias,
1 Mace. iii. 6 ; rév Kaday Kal cepvov, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).*
epyov, -ov, To, anciently Fépyov, (Germ.Werk, [Eng. work;
ef. Vanitek p. 922]); Sept. for 5», m714y. and count-
less times for MINI and Nwyn; work i. e. 1. busi-
ness, employment, that with which any one is occupied :
Mk. xiii. 34 (Sidovar twit 1d Epyov airod); Acts xiv. 26
(xAnpodv); 1 Tim. iii. 1; thus of the work of salvation
committed by God to Christ: d:ddvac and redevodv, Jn.
xvii.4; of the work to be done by the apostles and other
Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of
the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v.
13; Phil. i. 22; 76 epyov tivds, gen. of the subj., the work
which one does, service which one either performs or
ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; €pyov moveiv twos to do
the work of one (i. e. incumbent upon him), evayyedt-
orod, 2 Tim. iv.5; 7d €pyov Twos i. e. assigned by one and
to be done for his sake: 76 épyov rod Oeod reXecovv, used
of Christ, Jn. iv. 34; (rod) Xpiorod (WH txt. Tr mrg.
xupiov), Phil. ii. 30; tov kupiov, 1 Co. xv. 58; xvi. 10; with
geu. of thing, eis épyov duaxovias, Eph. iv. 12, which means
either to the work in which the ministry consists, the
work performed in undertaking the ministry, or to the
execution of the ministry. of that which one under-
takes to do, enterprise, undertaking: Acts v. 38 (Deut.
xv. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, any
thing accomplished by hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. rot-
npa, kticpa): 1 Co. iii. 13-15; with the addition of rév
xetpav, things formed by the hand of man, Acts vii. 41;
of the works of God visible in the created world, Heb.
i. 10, and often in Sept.; ra ev r7 yn epya. the works of
nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10; of the arrange-
ments of God for men’s salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec.; 76
€py. Tov Geod what God works in man, i. e. a life dedi-
cated to God and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20; to the same effect,
substantially, épyov ayaOdv, Phil. i. 6 (see dyabés, 2); ra
épya tov diaBddov, sins and all the misery that springs
from them, 1 Jn. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done:
the idea of working is emphasized in opp. to that which
is less than work, Jas. i. 25; Tit. i. 16; 7d épyov is dis-
tinguished fr. 6 Adyos: Lk. xxiv. 19; Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co.
x. 11; Col. iii. 17; 2 Th. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 18, (Sir. iii. 8) ;
plur. év Adyous Kal év epyous, Acts vii. 22 (4 Mace. v. 38
(37); for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk.
248
epryov
writ., see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 268 sq.; Bergler on
Alciphr. p. 54; Bornemann and Kiihner on Xen. mem.
2, 3,6; Passow s. v. p. 1159; [L.and S.s.v. I. 4; Lob.
Paralip. pp. 64 sq., 525 sq.]). épya is used of the acts
of God—both as creator, Heb. iv. 10; and as gov-
ernor, Jn. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41; Rev. xv. 3; of sundry
signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him
and to accomplish their salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [cf. gpya
ts copias ib. 19 T WH Tr txt.], and esp. in the Gosp. of
John, as v. 20, 36; vii. 3; x.38; xiv. 11sq.; xv. 24, (cf.
Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2); they are
called ra épya rod marpds, i. e. done at the bidding and
by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37; ix. 3sq., cf. x. 25, 32;
xiv. 10; cada, as beneficent, Jn. x. 32 sq.; and connected
with the verbs deckvivat, roveiv, épyaCeoOa, reAevoiv. Epya
is applied to the conduct of men, measured by the
standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad,
Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. xi. 48; Jn. iii. 20; Rev. ii.6; xvi. 11,
etc.; or good, Jn. iii. 21 ; Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20-22, 24-26 ;
iii. 13; Rev. ii. 5, 9 [Rec.], 19; iii. 8; vdéuos épywr, the
law which demands good works, Ro. iii. 27; with a
suggestion of toil, or struggie with hindrances, in the
phrase xataravew dnd tév epyav avtov, Heb. iv. 10; to
recompense one xara ta €pya avtod, Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv.
14; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. lxi. (Ixii.) 13), ef. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev.
XVill.6; xx.12sq.; the sing. 7d €pyov is used collectively
of an aggregate of actions (Germ. das Handeln), Jas. i.
4; rwos, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling
and acting, his aims and endeavors: Gal. vi.4; 1 Pet. i.
17; Rev. xxii. 12; 7d €pyov Tov vdpov, the course of action
demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: adya@ov
épyov, i.e. either a benefaction, 2 Co. ix. 8; plur. Acts
ix. 86; or every good work springing from piety, Ro. ii.
72 Col.ic 103 QE Ai. 17 OG eee a: 2s
17; Heb. xiii. 21 [T WHom. épy.]; plur. Eph. ii. 10;
or what harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii.
3; Tit.iii. 1; epyov caddy, a good deed, noble action, (see
kados, b. and c.): Mt. xxvi.10; Mk. xiv. 6; plur. (often
in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25; vi. 18; Tit.
ii. 7; ili. 8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. 1.12; ra épya ra ev
Sixacocvvyn equiv. to ra Sixaa, Tit. ili. 5; ra €pya tov Geod,
the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 28
(Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same
sense épya pov i. e. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26; €pyov riarews,
wrought by faith, the course of conduct which springs
from faith, 1 Th.i. 3; 2 Th.i.11; €pya déta ris peravoias,
Acts xxvi. 20; €pya memAnpwpéva evortov Tov Geov, Rev.
iii. 2; %pya movnpa, Col. i. 21; 2 Jn. 11, ef. Jn. iii. 19; vii.
7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; @pya vexpd, works devoid of that life
which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrought,
which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of
God and of all reward: Heb. vi. 1; ix. 14; dkapma, Eph.
v. 11 (dypynora, Sap. iii. 11; the wicked man pera rv
épyav av’tov ovvaroneirat, Barn. ep. 21,1); dvopa, 2 Pet.
ii. 8; €pya doeBetas, Jude 15; Tod oxdrovs, done in dark-
ness, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11; [opp. to épy. rod dards,
Ro. xiii. 12 L mrg.]; in Paul’s writ. épya vdpov, works
demanded by and agreeing with the law (cf. Wieseler,
- epebiten
Com. iib. d. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.): Ro. iii. 20, 28;
ix. 32 Rec.; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 2, 5,10; and simply épya:
Ror iy. 2,:6sr-ix 12 (11) 5 ab, 32.G LT Tr WH 30xi5.6;
Eph. ii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see dixaid, 3b.). ra epya tuvds
moeiv, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth-
er, to follow in action another’s example: Abraham’s,
Jn. viii. 39; that of the devil, Jn. viii. 41.
épeOifw; 1 aor. npébica; (€pcOw to excite); to stir up,
excite, stimulate: twa, in a good sense, 2 Co. ix. 2; as
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, in a bad sense, to pro-
voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lchm. rapopyitere.*
€pelBw: to fix, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptcp. épei-
gaca (7 mpg@pa), stuck [R. V. struck], Acts xxvii. 41.
(From Hom. down.) *
€pevyopar: fut. epevEouae ; 1. to spit or spue out,
(Hom.). 2. to be emptied, discharge itself, used of
streams (App. Mithr. c. 103); with the ace. to empty,
discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters: Lev. xi. 10
Sept. 3. by a usage foreign to classic Greek [W. 23
(22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter: Mt. xiii.
35 (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2; cf. xviii. (xix.) 3; cxliv. 7
[Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 63; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].*
épevvdw, -@ ; 1 aor. impv. epevvnoov; (7 épevvaa search) ;
fr. Hom. down; to search, examine into: absol. Jn. vii.
52* ri dn. v. 39; Ro. vii: 27; 1 Co. 11.10); Rev. 1: 23
with which passage cf. Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; xx. 12; foll.
by an indir. quest. 1 Pet. i.11 (2S. x. 3; Prov. xx. 27).
The form épavyaw (q. v. in its place) T Tr WH have
received everywhere into the text, but Lehm. only in
Rev. ii. 23. [Comp.: é&- epevvdw. | *
épnpla, -as, 7, (€pnuos), a solitude, an uninhabited re-
gion, a waste: Mt. xv. 33; Mk. viii.4; Heb. xi. 38; opp.
to dds, 2 Co. xi. 26, as in Joseph. antt. 2, 3, 1.*
€pnpos, -ov, (in classic Grk. also-os, -n, -ov, ef. W. § 11,
1; [B. 25 (23); on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 393, 394;
W. 52 (51)]); 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin-
habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 32; Lk.
iv. 42; ix.10 [RGL], 12; Acts i. 20,ete.; 7680s, leading
through a desert, Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Taga,
sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid
and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances,
kindred ; bereft; (so often by Grk. writ. of every age, as
Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 112; ¢pnyos
Te kal Ud mavtov KatadecOeis, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed.
Bekk.]; of a flock deserted by the shepherd, Hom. II. 5,
140): yuyn, a woman neglected by her husband, from
whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is.
liv.1; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ’s presence, in-
struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 [L and WH txt. om.];
Lk. xiii. 35 Ree.; ef. Bleek, Erklir. d. drei ersten Evv.
ii. p. 206, (cf. Bar. iv.19; Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ;
2 Mace. viii. 35). 2. subst. 7 €pnuos, sc. yoapa; Sept.
often for 1371); @ desert, wilderness, (Hdt. 3, 102): Mt.
xxiv. 26; Rev. xii. 6,14; xvii. 3; af Zpnuor, desert places,
lonely regions: Lk. i. 80; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti-
vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the
desert of Judea [cf. W. § 18, 1], Mt. ili. 1; Mk.i. 3 sq.;
249
€pidiov
LK. i. 80; iii. 2,4; Jn. i. 23; of the desert of Arabia,
Acts vii. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44; 1 Co. x. 5; Heb. iii. 8, 17.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wiiste; Furrer in Schenkel v. 680
sqq-; [B. D.s. vv. Desert and Wilderness (Am. ed.)].
épnpdw, -@: Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33))
epnuovrar]; pf. ptep. npnuwpevos ; 1 aor. npnuwbnv; (€pn-
pos); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. usually for 199, 24NG, 0D;
to make desolate, lay waste; in the N.T. only inthe Pass. :
mow, Rev. xviii. 19; to ruin, bring to desolation: Ba-
otdeiav, Mt. xii. 25; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught:
modrov, Rev. xviii. 17 (16); npnuwpevny kai yuri rocety
twa, to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rev. xvii.
LG.
ephpacts, -ews, 7, (epnudw), a making desolate, desola-
tion: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see Bde-
Avypa,c. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9,13; Sept. several times
for NN, Tw, etc.) *
épitw: [fut. épicw, cf. B. 37 (32)]; (€pis); to wrangle,
engage in strife, (Lat. riz ari): Mt. xii. 19, where by the
phrase ovx« épicer the Evangelist seems to describe the
calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of
the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and
practices. [(From Hom. down.)]*
épdela (not épidea, cf. W. § 6, 1 g.; [Chandler § 99])
[-dia WH; seel,cand Td/. Proleg. p. 88], -etas, 9, (€pibevo
to spin wool, work in wool, Heliod. 1,5; Mid. in the same
sense, Tob. ii. 11 ; used of those who electioneer for office,
courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar-
istot. polit. 5, 3; the verb is derived from ¢pi6os working
for hire, a hireling; fr. the Maced. age down, a spinner
or weaver, a worker in wool, Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a
mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office,
Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302, 4 and 13088, 14]; hence,
apparently, in the N. T. @ courting distinction, a desire
to put one’s self forward, a partisan and factious spirit
which does not disdain low aris; partisanship, factiousness :
Jas. iil. 14, 16; kar épiOeiav, Phil. ii. 3; Ionat. ad Phila-
delph. § 8; of && épuOeias (see ex, IT. 7), Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet
see ex, II. 12 b.]; i. q. contending against God, Ro. ii. 8
[yet cf. Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]; in the plur. ai épiOeia
[W. § 27,3; B. § 123, 2]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20. See
the very full and learned discussion of the word by
Fritzsche in his Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq.; [of which a
summary is given by Ellic. on Gal. v. 20. See further
on its derivation, Lobeck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365; cf. W.
94 (89) ].*
Epiov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of 7d pos or etpos), wool: Heb.
ix. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down. ]*
Epis, -iSos, 7, acc. épv (Phil. i. 15), pl. épides (1 Co. i.
11) and pes (2 Co. xii. 20 [RG Tr txt.; Gal. v.20 RG
WHnumrg.]; Tit. iii. 9 [R GLTr]; see [WH. App. p.
157]; Lob.ad Phryn. p. 326; Matthiae § 80 note 8 ; Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq.; [W. 65 (63); B. 24 (22)]); conten-
tion, strife, wrangling: Ro. i. 29; xiii. 13; 1 Co. i. 11;
ii. 3; 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; Phil. i. 15; 1 Tim. vi. 4;
Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]*
épidiov, -ov, Td, and Epidas, -ov, 6, a kid, a young goat:
Mt. xxv. 32 sq.; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14, p. 661 b.]*
Eppas
‘Eppds, acc. ‘Epyay jcf. B. 20 (18)], 6, (Doric for
‘Eppijs), Hermas, a certain Christian (whom Origen and
others thought to be the author of the book entitled
“The Shepherd ” [ef. Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog.
s. v. Hermas 2]): Ro. xvi. 14.*
éppnvela [WH -via; see I, c], -as, 7, (Epunveta), interpre-
tation (of what has been spoken more or less obscurely
by others): 1 Co. xii. 10 [L txt. dvepp. q. v.}5; xiv. 26.
[From Plato down. |*
Eppnvevtts, -ov, 6, (Epunveva, q. V-), an interpreter: 1
Co. xiv. 28 LTrWHmrg. (Plat. politic. p. 290¢.; for
yr) in Gen. xlii. 23.) *
éppnvetdw : [pres. pass. épunvevouac]; (fr. “Epuns, who
was held to be the god of speech, writing, eloquence,
learning) ; 1. to explain in words, expound: [Soph.,
Eur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans-
late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue
into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4,4): Jn.i. 38 (39) RG
T, 42 (43); ix. 7; Heb. vii. 2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for 039.)
[Comp.: &:-, pe-epunveda. | *
‘Eppijs, acc. ‘Epujv, 6, prop. name, Hermes; l. a
Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury):
Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.*
“Eppoyévns, [i.e. born of Hermes; Tdf.’Eppoy. ], -ous, 6,
Hermogenes, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 15.*
épmerov, -ov, 7d, (fr. pw to creep, crawl, [ Lat. serpo;
hence serpent, and fr. same root, reptile; Vaniéek p.
1030 sq.]), a creeping thing, reptile; by prof. writ. used
chiefly of serpents; in Hom. Od. 4, 418; Xen. mem. 1,
4, 11 an animal of any sort; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad-
rupeds and birds, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro. i. 23; and to
marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7; on this last pass. cf. Gen.
ix. 3. (Sept. for wp7 and yyw.) *
épu@pds, -d, -dv, red; fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only
in the phrase 9 é¢pvépa Oadaoca the Red Sea (fr. Hat.
down [cf. Rawlinson’s Herod. vol. i. p. 143]), i. e. the
Indian Ocean washing the shores of Arabia and Persia,
with its two gulfs, of which the one lying on the east is
called the Persian Gulf, the other on the opposite side
the Arabian. Inthe N. T. the phrase denotes the upper
part of the Arabian Gulf (the Herodpolite Gulf, so called
[i. e. Gulf of Suez]), through which the Israelites made
their passage out of Egypt to the shore of Arabia: Acts
vii. 36; Heb. xi. 29. (Sept. for 41D-0», the sea of sedge or
sea-weed [cf. B. D. as below]. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Meer rothes; Pressel in Herzog ix. p. 239 sqq.; Furrer
in Schenkel iv. 150 sqq.; [B. D.s. vv. Red Sea and Red
Sea, Passage of; Trumbull, Kadesh-Barnea, p. 352 sqq. ].)*
€pxopar, impv. epyou, epxeobe, (for the Attic i, ire fr.
ejut) ; impf. npxounv (for 7ev and 7a more com. in Attic) ;
fut. €Aevoouar; — (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 103 sqq.; Veitch s. v.]; Matthiae § 234;
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq.; Kriiger § 40 s. v.; Kiihner
§343; W.§ 15s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. ednAvda; plpf.
eAndvOew; 2 aor. 7AOov and (occasionally by LT Tr WH
[together or severally ]—as Mt. vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x. 13;
xiv. 34; xxv. 86; Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 163 v. 7;
Vi.17; viii. 35; x1. 2; xxiii. 33; xxiv. 1, 23]; Jn. [1.39 (40);
250
Epyopuar
ili. 26]; iv. 27; [xii.9]; Acts xii. 10; [xiv. 24]; xxviii.
14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form 96a (see dmépyoua
init. for reff.) ; Sept. for N13, rarely for 78 and 9);
[fr. Hom. down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of
persons; a. univ. to come from one place into another,
and used both of persons arriving,—as in Mt. viii. 9; xxii.
3; Lk. vii. 8; xiv. 17 [here WH mrg. read the inf., see
their Intr. § 404], 20; Jn. v. 7; Acts x. 29; Rev. xxii. 7,
and very often; of épydpevot x. of imdyovres, Mk. vi. 31;
—and of those returning, as in Jn. iv. 27; ix. 7; Ro. ix.
9. Constructions: foll. by dad w. gen. of place, Mk.
vii. 1 ; xv. 21; Acts xviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 9; w. gen. of pers.,
Mk. v.35; Jn. iii. 2; Gal. ii. 12, ete.; foll. by ék w. gen. of
place, Lk. v. 17 [L txt. ovvépyx.]; In. iii. 31, ete. ; foll. by
eis w. acc. of place, to come into: as eis 7. oikiav, Tov oikov,
Mt. ii. 11; viii. 14; Mk. i. 29; v. 38, ete.; eis ry moder,
Mt. ix. 1, and many other exx.; foll. by eis to, towards,
Jn. xx. 3sq.; els rd mépav, of persons going in a boat,
Mt. viii. 28; of persons departing ék ... es, Jn. iv. 545
dia w. gen. of place foll. by eis (Rec. apds) to, Mk. vii. 31;
eis T. €optnv, to celebrate the feast, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; év
w. dat. of the thing with which one is equipped, Ro. xv.
29; 1 Co. iv. 21; foll. by émi w. ace. of place, (Germ.
tiber, over), Mt. xiv. 28; (Germ. auf), Mk. vi. 53; (Germ.
an), Lk. xix. 5; [xxiii. 33 L Tr]; Acts xii. 10, 12; to
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. iii. 7; xxi. 19; Mk. xi. 13; xvi.
2; Lk. xxiv. 1; w. ace. of pers., Jn. xix. 33; to one’s
tribunal, Acts xxiv. 8 Rec.; against one, of a military
leader, Lk. xiv. 31; xara w. acc., Lk. x.33; Acts xvi. 7;
mapa w. gen. of pers. Lk. viii. 49 [Lchm. dad]; w. ace.
of place, to [the side of], Mt. xv. 29, mpos to, w. ace. of
pers., Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15; [xiv. 25 L T Tr WH]; Mk. ix.
14; Lk.i.43; Jn. i. 29; 2 Co. xiii. 1, and very often, esp.
in the Gospels; amo twos (gen. of pers.) mpds teva, 1 Th.
ili. 6; with simple dat. of pers. (prop. dat. commodi or
incommodi [cf. W. § 22,7 N. 2; B. 179 (155)]): Mt.
xxi. 5; Rey. ii. 5,16, (exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v.
p- 1184* bot.; [Land 8. s. v. II. 4]). with adverbs
of place: modev, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; Rev. vii. 13; dvwdev,
Jn. iii. 831; dmoGev, Mk. v. 27; Sde, Mt. viii. 29; Acts
ix. 21; évOade, Jn. iv. 15 [RGLTr], 16; eéxet, Jn.
xviii. 3 [ef. W. 472 (44U)]; mod, Heb. xi. 8; Eas rivds,
Lk. iv. 42; dype tevds, Acts xi. 5. The purpose for
which one comes is indicated — either by an inf., Mk.
[v.14L T Tr WH]; xv. 36; Lk.i. 59; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15
[T WH &épx.], and very often; or by a fut. ptep., Mt.
xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27; or by a foll. iva, Jn. xii. 9; eis
tovro, iva, Acts ix. 21; or by &d twa, Jn. xii. 9. As
one whois about to do something in a place must neces-
sarily come thither, in the popular narrative style the
phrases épyxerat kai, 7AGe Kai, ete., are usually placed be-
fore verbs of action: Mt. xiii. 19, 25; Mk.ii. 18; iv. 15;
v. 333 vi. 29; xii. 9s xiv. 37; Lk. viii. 12,47; Jn. vi. 15;
XiN48 ¢ ‘xii, 22s) xix, S8s' xx. 19, 265 xxi71S% Sims:
Rev. v. 7; xvii. 1; xxi.9; Epyou x. ide (or Bree), Jn. i.
46 (47); xi. 84; {and Rec. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also
Grsb. exc. in vs. 3]; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ((T Tr WH
dWeode], see cid, I. 1 e.);— or Addy is used, foll. by a
Epyopmar
finite verb: Mt. ii. 8; viii. 7; ix. 10,18; xii. 44; xiv. 12,
33[(RG L]; xviii. 31; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25
[Tdf. eioedO.]; xii. 14, 42; xiv. 45; xvi. 1; Acts xvi. 37,
39 ;— or épxopevos, foll. by a finite verb : Lk. xiii. 14; xvi.
21; xviii. 5. in other places é\@wv must be rendered
when I (thou, he, etc.) am come: Jn. xvi. 8; 2 Co. xii. 20;
Phil. i. 27 (opp. to dry). 8. to come i. e. to appear,
make one’s appearance, come before the public: so kar’
é£0xnv of the Messiah, Lk. iii, 16; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 27, 31;
Heb. x. 37, who is styled pre-eminently 6 épxopevos, i. e.
he that cometh (i. e. is about to come) acc. to prophetic
promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W.
341 (320); B. 204 (176 sq.)]: Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 19 sq.;
with eis rov koopor added, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; év r@ dvopare
Tov kupiov, he who is already coming clothed with divine
authority i. e. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy-
fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, —
taken fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 25 sq.: Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39;
Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38 [Tdf. om. épy. (so WH
in their first mrg.)]; Jn. xii. 13. épyeoOat used of Elijah
who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the
Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11-13; of John
the Baptist, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. i. 31; with eis
paprupiay added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of
‘false Christs” and other deceivers, false teachers, ete. :
Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass. with
the addition émi r@ dvdpuari pov, relying on my name, i. e.
arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic
dignity); Jn. x. 8; 2Co. xi. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii.
10; with the addition ev r@ dvouare tO idim in his own
authority and of his own free-will, Jn. v. 43. of the Holy
Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the
invisible helper of Christ’s disciples after his departure
from the world: Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 7 sq. 13. of the ap-
pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious
teacher and the author of salvation: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii.
34; Jn. v.43; vii. 28; viii. 42; with the addition of eis
r. koopor foll. by iva, Jn. xii. 46; xviii. 37; ets xpiva, iva,
Jn. ix. 39; foll. by a telic inf. 1 Tim. i. 15; épyerOat dricw
twos, after one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30;
6 €AOav SC VSaros Kai aiparos, a terse expression for, ‘he
that publicly appeared and approved himself (to be
God’s son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation
through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death
which he underwent ’[cf. p. 210* bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6; épxe-
o6a foll. by a telic inf., Mt. v. 17; x.34.sq.; Lk. xix. 10;
foll. by iva, Jn. x. 10; €AnAvdévac and épyerbar ev capki
are used of the form in which Christ as the divine Logos
appeared among men: 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3[Rec.]; 2Jn. 7. of
the return of Jesus hereafter from heavenin
majesty: Mt. x. 23; Actsi.11; 1Co.iv.5; xi. 26; 1
Th. v. 2; 2 Th. i. 10; with ev 79 80é adrod added, Mt.
xvi. 27; xxv. 31; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; emi rav vepedav
(borne on the clouds) pera Suvdpews x. SdEns, Mt. xxiv.
30; ev vededats, ev veéAy xrd., Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27;
év 7 Baowdela avtov (see év, I. 5c. p. 210" top), Mt. xvi.
28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [eis r7v B. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.]
b. of time, like the Lat. venio: with nouns of time, as
251
Ep youas
épxovrat Hepat, in a fut. sense, will come [cf. B. 204 (176
sq-.); W. § 40, 2a.], Lk. xxiii. 29; Heb. viii. 8 fr. Jer.
XXXViil. (xxxi.) 31; €Aevoovrat juepat, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii.
20; Lk.v. 35; xvii. 22; xxi. 6; 7AOev 7 npepa, Lk. xxii.
7; Rev. vi. 17; €pyera: Spa, dre, Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25;
xvi. 25; foll. by iva, Jn. xvi. 2,32; 7AGev, is come, i. e. is
present, Jn. xvi. 4, 21; Rev. xiv. 7,15; éAndvde 7 Spa,
wa, Jn. xii. 23; xiii. 1 (LT Tr WH dev) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii.
1; €AnAvOer 7 Spa avrovd, had come (Lat. aderat), Jn. vii.
30; viii. 20; epy. vwvé, Jn. ix. 43 9 nuépa tov Kupiov, 1 Th.
v. 2; «atpoi, Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc-
cur at a definite time: 6 Oepiopos, Jn. iv. 35 ; 6 yapos Tod
dpviov, Rev. xix. 7; 7AGev 4 kpiots, Rev. xviii. 10. in imi-
tation of the Hebr. 839, 6, 7, rd epydpevos, -Ev, -evor, is
i.q. to come, future [ef. B. and W.u.s.]: éaiov, Mk. x. 30;
Lk. xviii. 30; 7 €oprn, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; 97 dpyn, 1 Th.
i. 10; ra épydpeva, things to come, Jn. xvi. 13 (O°837 the
times to come, Is. xxvii. 6) ; in the periphrasis of the
name of Jehovah, 6 dv xai 6 nv kal 6 €pxopevos, it is
equiv. to éodpevos, Rev. i.4; iv. 8. oc. of things and
events (so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent
of natural events: morapoi, Mt. vii. 25[RG]; k«araxdv-
opos, Lk. xvii. 27; Acpos, Acts vii. 11; of the rain coming
down enti ris yns, Heb. vi. 7; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii.
4,32; Mk. iv. 4; of a voice that is heard (Hom. Il. 10,
139), foll. by é« with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 17 [?]; Mk. ix.
7([T WH Trurrg. éeyévero]; Jn. xii. 28; of things that are
brought: 6 Avxvos, Mk. iv. 21 (emorodn, Liban. ep.
458; other exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Kypke, Kui-
noel, al., on Mk. 1.¢.). 2. metaph. a. of Christ’s
invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power
which through the Holy Spirit he will exert in the souls
of his disciples: Jn. xiv. 18, 23; of his invisible advent
in the death of believers, by which he takes them to
himself into heaven, Jn. xiv. 3. _b. equiv. to to come
into being, arise, come forth, show itself, find place or in-
fluence : ra oxdvdada, Mt. xviii. 7; Lk. xvii. 1; ra dyada,
Ro. iii. 8 (Jer. xvii. 6) 3 76 TeAecov, 1 Co. xiii. 10; 9 riots,
Gal. iii. 23, 253 9 dmooracia, 2 Th. ii. 3; 7 Baowdela rod
Geod, i. q. be established, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20,
etc.; 9 évroAn, i. q. became known, Ro. vii. 9. c. with
Prepositions: é« ras [Lchm. and] OAiews, suffered
tribulation, Rev. vii. 14. foll. by ets, to come (fall) into
or unto: els rd xeipov, into a worse condition, Mk. v. 26;
eis metpacpov, Mk. xiv. 38 T WH; eis amedeypov (see
dmedeypos), Acts xix. 27; eis rv Gpav ravdrny, Jn. xii. 27;
eis xpicw, to become liable to judgment, Jn. v. 24; eis
eriyvacw, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim.
iii. 7; ets rd avepov, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22; eis
mpokory eAndvée, has turned out for the advancement,
Phil. 1.12; épy. ets ru, to come to a thing, is used of a
writer who after discussing other matters passes on to
a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1; «is éavrov, to come to one’s
senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17
(Fpict. diss. 8, 1,15; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. § 3, p.
702 ed. Fabric.). épy. emi twa to come upon one: ina
bad sense, of calamities, Jn. xviii.4; in a good sense, of
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16: Acts xix. 6: to devolve
a, A
Epa
upon one, of the guilt and punishment of murder, Mt.
xxiii. 35. py. mpds Tov ‘Incovr, to commit one’s self to
the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with
him, Jn. v. 40; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, 65; mpds rd pas, to sub-
mit one’s self to the power of the light, Jn. iii. 20 sq.
II. togo: dricw twos CNS 327), to follow one, Mt. xvi.
24; [Mk. viii. 34 R L Tr mrg. WH]; Lk. ix. 23; xiv.
27, (Gen. xxiv. 5, 8; xxxvii. 17, and elsewhere); mpos
twa, Lk. xv. 20; ovv rium, to accompany one, Jn. xxi. 3
[ef. B. 210 (182)]; 68dv pyecOa, Lk. ii. 44 [ef. W.
226 (212)]. [Comp.: dv-, én-av-, am-, O-, eio-, €m-€Ls-, Tap-
<to-, ouv-eto-, €&, du-e&-, em-, KaT-, Tap-, avti-rap-, TeEpt-,
Tpo-, Tpoo-, Tvr-epxopat. |
[Syn.: EpxecOat, (Balveryv,) ropeverOat, xwpeiv:
with the N.T. use of these verbs and their compounds it may be
interesting to compare the distinctions ordinarily recognized
in classic Grk., where épyeo@a: denotes motion or progress
generally, and of any sort, hence to come and (esp. éAdety)
arrive at, as well as to go (Balvew). Balvew primarily signi-
fies to walk, take steps, picturing the mode of motion; to go
away. mopevecOa expresses motion in general, — often con-
fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the
bearing; hence the regular word for the march of an
army. xwpetv always emphasizes the idea of separation,
change of place, and does not, like e. g. mopever@ar, note the
external and perceptible motion, —(a man may be recog-
nized by his wopela). Cf. Schmidt ch. xxvii.]
ép@, see eizov.
épwrdu, -@, [ (inf. ray L T Tr, -rav RG WH; seel, ¢)];
impf. 3 pers. plur. np@Twv and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH,
Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) npwrovy, cf. B. 44 (38); [W. 85 (82);
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Soph. Lex. p.41; WH. App. p. 166;
Mullach, Griech. Vulgarspr. p. 252]; fut. éparjcw; 1 aor.
npotnoa; Sept. for xv; to ask, i. e. 1. as in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down to question: absol., Lk. xxii. 68 ; Jn.
viii. 7 [R]; teva, Jn. ix. 21; xvi. 19, 30; [xviii. 21 where
Rec. érep.], etc.; with the addition of Aéywy and the
words of the questioner: Mt. xvi. 13; Lk. xix. 31 [om.
Aeyov; xxii. 3 T Tr WH]; Jn.i.19, 21; v.12; ix.19;
xvi. 5; twa te (cf. W. § 32,4 a.], Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. iv. 10;
Lk. xx. 3; Jn. xvi. 23 [al. refer this to 2]; twa mepi twos,
Lk. ix. 45 [Lchm. éwep.]; Jn. xviii. 19. 2. to ask i.e.
to request, entreat, beg, beseech, after the Hebr. >xvi, in a
sense very rare in prof. auth. (Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14 [but
here the text is uncertain; substitute antt. 7, 8, 1; ef.
Dr. Ezra Abbot in No. Am. Rev. for 1872, p. 173 note];
Babr. fab. [42, 3]; 97, 3; Apoll. synt. p. 289, 20; cf. W.
pp- 30 and 32): twa, Jn. xiv. 16; with the addition of
Aéyov and the words of the asker, Mt. xv. 23; Jn. xii.
21; foll. by impv. alone [B. 272 sq. (234)], Lk. xiv. 18
sq.; Phil. iv. 3; foll. by iva [cf. W. § 44, 8 a.; B. 237
(204)], Mk. vii. 26; Lk. vii. 36; xvi. 27; Jn. iv. 47;
xvii. 153 xix. 31,38; 2 Jn. 5; 1 Th.iv.1; by das, Lk.
vil. 3; xi. 37; Acts xxiii. 20; by the inf. [B. 258 (222);
cf. W. 335 (315)], Lk. v. 8; viii. 37; Jn. iv. 40; Acts
ili. 35 x. 48; xxiii. 185 1 Th. v. 125 reva mepi rivos, Lk.
iv. 38; Jn. xvii. 9, 20; 1 Jn. v. 16; trep Tivos [foll. by
eis w. inf.; cf. B. 265 (228)], 2 Th. ii. 1 sq.; epwrav ra
[WH txt. om. ra] zpos eipnyny (see eipnrn, 1), Lk. xiv. 32.
[SYN. see airéa, fin. Comp.: &:-, ém-ep@rda |
252
éo bia
eo Ons, -jros, 7, (fr. evvyps, eoOnv, hence it would be
more correctly written éo6ys [so Rec.“* in Lk.], cf.
Kiihner i. p. 217, 3), formerly FeoOns (cf. Lat. vestis,
Germ. Weste, Eng. vest, ete.), clothing, raiment, apparel:
Lk. xxiii. 11; xxiv.4 LT Tr WH; Actsi.10 RG; x. 30;
xli. 21; Jas. ii. 2 sq. [From Hom. down.]*
éxOnots [ Rec.** &06.], -ews, 7, (fr. éoOéo, and this fr.
eaOns, q. V-), clothing, apparel: plur., Lk. xxiv. 4 R G;
Acts i. 10 LT Tr WH; [cf. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18;
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 7 and Heinichen’s note]. (Rare in prof.
writ. [Aristot. rhet. 2, 8, 14 var.]; cf. W. § 2, 1c.) *
érOlw and écda, q. v., (lengthened forms of édo [cef.
Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. p. 429]); impf. #o6cov; 2 aor.
2payov (fr. BATQ); fut. pdyoua (2 pers. payer, Lk.
xvil. 8 [reff. s. v. xaraxavydopat, init.]), for the classic
edouat, see Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 185; Kiihner i. p. 824;
[W. 89 (85); B. 58 (51); but esp. Veitch s. v.]; Sept.
for 5283 [fr. Hom. down]; to eat; Vulg. manduco, [edo,
ete.]; (of animals, to devour); a. absol.: Mt. xiv. 20
sq-; xv. 37,38; xxvi. 26; Mk. vi. 31; viii. 8; Jn. iv. 31,
and often; év ro gayeiv, in eating (the supper), 1 Co.
xi. 21; dddvae rwi dayeiv, to give one (something) to
eat, Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk.v.43; vi.37; Lk. ix.
13, (and with addition of an ace. of the thing to be eaten,
Jn. vi. 31, 525 €« twos, Rev. ii. 7; [ef. W. 198 (187) sq.])5
épew tii hayeiv, to bring one (something) to eat, Jn.
iv. 83; spec. in opp. to abstinence from certain kinds of
food, Ro. xiv. 3, 20; é€oOiew x. rivew (and payeiv x. mew),
to use food and drink to satisfy one’s hunger and thirst,
1 Co. xi. 22; contextually, to be supported at the ex-
pense of others, 1 Co. ix. 4; not to shun choice food and
in a word to be rather a free-liver, opp. to the narrow
and scrupulous notions of those who abstain from the
use of wine and certain kinds of food, Mt. xi. 19; Lk.
vii. 34; opp. to fasting (7d vorevew), Lk. v. 33; of
those who, careless about other and esp. graver matters,
lead an easy, merry life, Lk. xii. 19; xvii. 27 sq.; 1 Co.
xv. 32, (Is. xxii. 13); of the jovial use of a sacrificial
feast, 1 Co. x. 7 fr. Ex. xxxii. 6; preceded by a nega-
tive, to abstain from all nourishment, Acts xxiii. 12, 21;
to use a spare diet, spoken of an ascetic mode of life,
Mt. xi. 18; of fasting, Acts ix. 9; éoOiew (x. mivev) pera
rivos, to dine, feast, (in company) with one, Mt. ix. 11;
Mk. ii. 16; Lk. v. 30; with one (he providing the enter-
tainment), i. e. at his house, Lk. vii. 36; pera rav webvdr
rev ete., of luxurious revelling, Mt. xxiv. 49; Lk. xii.
45; émt rparé(ns rod Xptorod, the food and drink spread
out on Christ’s table, i. e. to enjoy the blessings of the
salvation procured by Christ (which is likened to a ban-
quet), Lk. xxii. 30; éo@iew revi, to one’s honor, Ro. xiv.
6. b. construed w. an ace. of the thing, to eat (con-
sume) a thing [W. 198 (187) note]: Mt. vi. 25; Mk.i.
6; Jn. iv. 32; vi. 31; Ro. xiv. 2; 1 Co. vill. 13; x. 25,
etc.; dprov, to take food, eat a meal, (after the Hebr.
ond Doe, Gen. xliii. 25; Ex. ii. 20; 1 S..xx. 24; Prov.
Xxiii. 7), Mt. xv.2; Mk. iii. 20; Lk. xiv. 1, 155 rov éav-
tov dprov, obtained by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; dprop
mapd twos (gen. of pers.) to be supported by one, 2 Th.
éc0w
iii. 8; ra mapd twos, the things supplied by one, Lk. x.
7, i. q. ra mapatiOeyeva in vs. 8 [cf. W. 366 (343)]; 1 Co.
x. 273 pyre Gprov €o8. pyre oivoy mivew, to live frugally,
Lk. vii. 33; 16 xupiakov Seimvoy ayeiv, to celebrate the
Lord’s supper, 1 Co. xi. 20; 1d macya, to eat the paschal
lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi.17; Mk.
Silo 4 Wiki. 8211, 15, 16 lL Tir We sedm
xviii. 28; ras Ovoias, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts,
said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16
(where &y stands by attraction for &, because eoOiew
with a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the N.
T. [W. 198 (187) note]). by a usage hardly to be met
with in class. Grk. (W. § 28,1; [B. 159 (139)]), & ruvos,
to (take and) eat of athing: Lk. xxii. 16 [RG]; Jn. vi.
26, 50 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 28; on the other hand, é« rod Kaprov
(LT Tr WH rov xaprov), ex tov yadakros eo ie, in 1 Co.
ix. 7, is to support one’s self by the sale of the fruit and
the milk [but cf. B. as above, and Meyer ad loc.]. ek
with gen. of place: éx Tov iepod, draw their support from
the temple, i. e. from the sacrifices and offerings, 1 Co.
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read ra ék tr. i.]; also ék @votaoty-
piov, i. e. from the things laid on the altar, Heb. xiii. 10
[W. 366 (344)]. by a Hebraism (71 528), az twos [cf.
W. 199 (187)]: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28. Metaph. to
devour, consume: twa, Heb. x. 27; ri, Rev. xvii. 163; of
rust, Jas. v. 3. [CompP.: xat-, cvv-ecdia. |
€o0w, i. q. €oOiw, a poetic form in use fr. Hom. down,
very rare in prose writ.; from it are extant in the N. T.
the ptcp. @odev in Mk. i. 6 TTr WH; [Lk. x.7 LT Tr
WH]; Lk. vii. 33 L Tr WH, [also 34 WH]; the pres.
subj. 2 pers. plur. éo@nre in Lk. xxii. 30 LT Tr WH;
[cf. xarecOiw]. It occurs several times in the Sept., as
Lev. xvii. 10; Judg. xiv. 9 [Alex.]; Is. ix. 20; Sir. xx.
16; éaGere, Lev. xix. 26. Cf. [Tdf Proleg. p. 81]; B.
58 (51).
*Eodel (T Tr WH, [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v.
et, +]) or ’EoXi, 6, sli, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk.
ili. 25.*
éox-orrpov, -ov, Td, (OIITQ), a mirror: 1 Co. xiii. 12;
Jas. i. 23. (Sap. vii. 26; Sir. xii.11; Pind. Nem. 7, 20;
Anacr. 11, [7 (6)] 3; Plut.; al.) The mirrors of the
ancients were made, not of glass [cf. B.D. s. v. Glass,
fin.], but of steel; Plin. h. n. 33, (9) 45; 34, (17) 48
[but see the pass. just referred to, and B.D. s. v. mirror].*
éomépa, -as, 9, (€amepos of or at evening), evening, even-
tide: Acts iv. 3; xxviii. 23; mpos €or. éoriv, it is towards
evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. [From Pind. and Hdt. down.]*
[érmepivds, -7, -dv, belonging to the evening, evening:
vAakn, Lk. xii. 38 WH (rejected) mrg. (Sept.; Xen.,
Dio Cass., Athen., al.)*]
’"Eopop [or ’Eopov in Lk. R Ltxt.Trmrg.; WH
‘Eop., see their Intr. § 408], 6, Esrom or Hezrom or Hes-
ron, one of Christ’s ancestors: Mt. i. 3; Lk. iii. 33.*
[’'Eopév or ‘Eop. see the preceding word. |
éxxaros, -n, -ov, (fr.éyw, €oyxov adhering, clinging close ;
[ace. to al. (Curtius § 583 b.) superl. fr. &&, the outer-
most]), Sept. for 7X, MINN; [fr. Hom. down]; ez-
treme, last in time or in place; 1. joined to nouns:
253
éxXartos
rémos, the last in a series of places [A. V. lowest], Lk
xiv. 9 sq.; ina temporal succession, the last: €xyaros
€xOpes, that remains after the rest have been conquered,
1 Co. xv. 26; Kodpavrns, that remains when the rest
have one after another been spent, Mt. v. 26; so Aerrdv,
Lk. xii. 59; 9 oy. odAmey€, the trumpet after which no
other will sound, 1 Co. xv. 52, cf. Meyer ad loc.; ai écy.
mAnyai, Rev. xv. 1; xxi. 9; 4 éoyarn jpépa tis éopris,
Jn. vii. 37. When two are contrasted it is i. q. the
latter, opp. to 6 mpa@ros the former (Deut. xxiv. 1-4):
thus ra €pya (opp. to rav mparev), Rev. ii. 19; 9 wAdvn,
Mt. xxvii. 64 (where the meaning is, ‘lest the latter
deception, caused by the false story of his resurrection,
do more harm than the former, which was about to pro-
duce belief in a false Messiah’); 6 €cyaros ’Adau, the
latter Adam, i. e. the Messiah (see Addy, 1), 1 Co. xv.
45. 1 éox. nuépa, the last day (of all days), denotes
that with which the present age (N17 poy", see aiav,
3) which precedes the times of the Messiah or the glori-
ous return of Christ from heaven will be closed: Jn. vi.
39 sq. 44, [54]; xi. 24; xii. 48. of the time nearest the
return of Christ from heaven and the consummation of
the divine kingdom, the foll. phrases are used: éoyary
apa, 1 Jn. ii. 18; ev caip@ eox. 1 Pet. i. 5; ev ecx. xpdva,
Jude 18 Ree., én’ éxxarov xpévov ibid. Tr WH; év écya-
ras nuepats, Acts ii. 17; Jas. v. 3; 2 Tim. iii. 1; for other
phrases of the sort see 2 a. below; ém éoydrav trav xpd-
vov, 1 Pet. i. 20 RG, see below. 2. 6, 9, TO €x. absol.
or with the genitive, a. of time: of évyaro, who had
come to work last, Mt. xx. 8, 12, [14]; the meaning of
the saying écovrat mp@rot Ecxarot kai €oyaTou mperot is not
always the same: in Lk. xiii. 30 it signifies, those who
were last invited to enter the divine kingdom will be
first to enter when the opportunity comes, i. e. they will
be admitted forthwith, while others, and those too who
were first among the invited, will be shut out then as
coming too late; in Mt. xix. 30; xx. 16 it means, the
same portion in the future kingdom of God will through
his goodness be assigned to those invited last as to
those invited first, although the latter may think they
deserve something better; cf. Mk. x. 31. 6 mparos x. 6
éox. i. e. the eternal, Rev. i. 11 Rec., 17; ii. 8; xxii.
13. €axaros as a predicate joined to a verb adverbially
[ef. W. 131 (124); § 54, 2]: Mk. xii. 6; éecyarn (RG;
but see below) mavrwy amébave, Mk. xii. 22. &ryarov,
éoxata, used substantively [cf. B. 94 (82) § 125, 6]
in phrases, of the time immediately preceding Christ’s
return from heaven and the consummation of the divine
kingdom: én’ éoxdrov or €axdrav rev nuepaov, Heb. i. 2
(1); 2 Pet. iii. 3, (Barn. ep. 16, 5); trav xpdvwr, 1 Pet.
i. 209 é@ eaydrov Tov xpovov, Jude 18 L T (see 1 above, and
eri, A. II. fin.), cf. Riehm, Lehrbegr. d. Hebrierbriefes,
p- 205 sq. ra €oyara with gen. of pers. the last state of
one: Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. ii. 20 [but without
gen. of pers.]. Neut. €ryarov, adv., lastly: [w. gen. of
pers., Mk. xii. 22 LT TrWH]; 1 Co. xv. 8. b. of
space: rd €oyarov rns yns, the uttermost part, the end,
of the earth, Actsi. 8; xiii.47. cc. of rank, grade of
éovaTas
worth, last i. e. lowest: Mk. ix. 35; Jn. viii. 9 Rec.; 1Co.
ivat.*
éoxdarws, adv., extremely, [Xen. an. 2, 6,1; Aristot.,
al.j; ecydrws e€xew (in extremis esse), to be in the last
gasp, at the point of death: Mk. v. 23. Diod. excrpt.
Vales. p. 242 [i. e. fr. 1. 10 § 2,4 Dind.]; Artem. oneir.
3,60. The phrase is censured by the Atticists; cf.
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 704 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
389; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 178 sq.; [Win. 26].*
tow, adv., (fr. és, for etow [fr. Hom. on] fr. eis; cf. W.
52; [B. 72 (63); Rutherford, New Phryn. p.432]); 1.
to within, into: Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; with gen.
Mk. xv. 16 [W. § 54, 6]. 2. within: Jn. xx. 26; Acts
v. 23; 6 cw dvOpwmos, the internal, inner man, i. e. the
soul, conscience, (see avOpwzos, 1 e.), 2 Co.iv.16 LT Tr
WH; Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; of éo@, those who belong
to the Christian brotherhood (opp. to oi €€ [q. v. in
ééw, 1 a.]), 1 Co. v. 12.*
Zrwev, (ow), adv. of place, fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; [1. adverbially ;] a. from within (Vulg. de
intus, ab intus, intrinsecus, [ete.]) : Mk. vii. 21, 23; Lk.
zi.) 2\Canwvit 5. b. within (cf. W. § 54, 7): Mt.
vii. 15; xxiii. 25, 27, 28; Rev.iv. 8; v.1 [cf. ypado, 3];
6 écwbev dvOpwros, 2 Co. iv. 16 RG (see gow, 2); 1d
écwev, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40; with
gen. of pers. i. q. your soul, ibid. 39. [2. asa prep. with
the gen. (W § 54,6): Rev. xi. 2 Rec." (see e£wfev, 2).]*
éxwtepos, -€pa, -epov, (compar. of gow, [cf. B. 28 (24
sq.)]), inner: Acts xvi. 24; 16 €a@repov Tov KatameTd-
cparos, the inner space which is behind the veil, i. e. the
shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn
from the earthly temple, Heb. vi. 19.*
éraipos, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 4; @ comrade,
mate, partner, [A. V. fellow]: Mt. xi. 16 (where T Tr
WH ois érépos [q- v. 1 b., and cf. WH. Intr. § 404)) ;
voc. in kindly address, friend (my good friend): Mt. xx.
13); xxii. 12; xxvi. 502*
érepd-yAworos, -ov, 6, (€repos and yAéooa), one who
speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to opdyAwo-
cos): Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 1 Aq.; Polyb. 24, 9,5; Strab.
8 p. 833; [Philo, confus. lingg. § 3; al.]; but different-
ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly
strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ;
see what is said about ‘speaking with tongues’ under
yAoooa, 2
érepodiSackahew, -@; (€repos and ddacxanos, cf. Kako-
Sidackareiv, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 10, 5); to teach other or
different doctrine i. e. deviating from the truth: 1 Tim.
i. 3; vi. 3. (Ignat. ad Polye. 3, and al. eccl. writ.) *
érepo-Luyéw, -@; (érepdtvyos yoked with a different
yoke; used in Ley. xix. 19 of the union of beasts of
different kinds, e.g. an ox and an ass), to come under
an unequal or different yoke (Beza, impart jugo copulor),
to be unequally yoked : rwi (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10
N.4; B. § 133, 8), trop. to have fellowship with one who is
not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid-
ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.*
éreoos, -€pa, -epov, the other; another, other; [fr. Hom.
254
]
eTt
on]; Sept. chiefly for 1mx. Itrefers 1. tonumber.
as opp. to some former pers.or thing; a. without the
article, other : joined to a noun (which noun denotes some
number or class within which others are distinguished
from the one), Mt. xii. 45 and Lk. xi. 26, émra érepa
mvevpurta, i. e. from the number of the zvevpara or demons
seven others, to be distinguished from the one already
mentioned; add, Mk. xvi. 12; Lk. vi. 6; ix. 56, ete. ; Jn.
xix. 37; Acts ii. 40; iv. 12, ete.; Ro. vii. 3; viii. 39; xiii. 9;
erepat yeveat, other than the present, i. e. past generations,
Eph. iii. 5; as in class. Grk. @AXos, so sometimes also
érepos is elegantly joined toa noun that is in apposition:
twice so in Lk., viz. érepot 800 Kaxodpyor two others, who
were malefactors [Bttm. differently § 150, 3], Lk. xxiii.
325 érepous €BSopunkovra equiv. to érépous paOnrds, otrwes
qoav €B5. Lk. x. 1; reliqua privata aedificia for ‘the rest
of the buildings, which were private’ Caes. b. g. 1, 5; ef.
Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. p. 147 sq.; W. 530 (493);
[Joseph. c. Ap.1,15,3 and Miiller’s note]. simply, with-
out a noun, i. q. ddXos tis another, Lk. ix. 59; xxii. 58;
Acts i. 20; Ro. vii. 4; érepot oAXol, Mt. xv. 30; Lk. viii.
3; Acts xv. 353; oddev érepov, Acts xvii. 21; érepa, other
matters, Acts xix. 39 RGT; moda kat érepa, many
other things also [hardly “also,” see xai, I. 3; cf. remark
s.v. mokvs, d. a. fin.], Lk. iii. 18 ; érepos with gen. of pers.
Gal. i. 19; ra érépwy (opp. to ra éavrod), Phil. ii. 4; &.
with ris added, Acts viii. 34; neut. 1 Tim. i. 10; [ev
érép, introducing a quotation, Heb. v. 6, ef. Win. 592
(551) —but in Acts xiii. 35 supply pape]. in partitive
formulas: dAAou.. . €repot dé, Heb. xi. 36 cf. Acts ii. 13;
6 mparos ... erepos, Lk. xiv. 19 sq.3 xvi. 7; 6 Sevrepos
.- + €repos, Lk. xix. 20 (where L T Tr WH 6 érepos);
tives... €repor dé, Lk. xi. 16; @ pev... ddd Oe...
érép@ b€ ... Gddw bé, 1 Co. xii. 9 sq. 3 of pév...GAAoe [L of]
dé... €repor de, Mt. xvi. 14. _b. with the article, the
other (of two): of érepar, the others, the other party, Mt.
xi. 16 T Tr WH (see éraipos). distinctively : efs or 6
eis ...6 repos, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 413 xvi. 13; xvii.
34 sq.; Xviil. 10; xxiii. 40; 7d €repov mAoiov, Lk. v. 7;
tH O€ érépa sc. nuepa, the next day, the day after, Acts
xx. 15; xxvii. 8, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 10, [al.]). 6 €repos, the
other, when the relation of conduct to others is under
consideration is cften put by way of example for any
other person whatever, and stands for ‘the other affected
by the action in question’ [and may be trans. thy neigh-
bor, thy fellow, ete.]: Ro. ii. 1; xiii.8; 1Co. vi.1; x. 24,
29; xiv. 17; Gal. vi. 4; [Jas. iv. 12 RG]; plur. oi, ai,
Ta €repot, -at, -a, the others i. e. the rest, Lk. iv.43. It re-
fers 2. to quality; another i. e. one not of the same
nature, form, class, kind; different, (so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down): Ro. vii. 23; 1 Co. xiv. 21; xv. 40; 2 Co.
xi. 4; Gal. i. 6; Heb. vii. 11, 13,15; Jas. ii.25; Jude 7.
[SyYN. see aNos. ]
érépws, adv., otherwise, differently: Phil. iii.15. [From
Hom. (apparently) down. ] *
én, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. ‘of times “a.ofa
thing which went on formerly, whereas now a differ-
ent state of things exists or has begun to exist: added
érouata
255
€T0s
to a ptep., Mt. xxvii. 63; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44; Acts ix. 13; | orpariras, Acts xxiii. 23; ruvi teva, one for one, Lk. i.
xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol.: ér (de) avrov
Nadoovtos, Mt. xii. 46; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43;
Lk. viii. 49; xxii.47; add, Lk. ix. 42; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx.
1; Acts x. 44; Ro. v. 8; Heb.ix. 8; with a finite verb,
Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning
of a sentence: ére yap Xpiords dvtwy jpav aod. . . . ame-
Oave, Ro. v. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 p. 553 (515); [B. 389
(333)]; with another notation of time, so that it may be
trans. even (cf. Lat. jam) : éru éx xothias pnrpds, Lk. i. 15
(ére ex Bpépeos, Anthol. 9, 567,13; ere am’ dpxis, Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. 6 p. 104 d.)._b. of a thing which
continues at present, even now: Mk. viii. 17 RG; Lk.
xiv. 22; Gal. i. 10; 1 Co. xv. 17; with viv added, 1 Co.
iii. 2 [L WH br. ére]; further, longer, (where it is
thought strange that, when one thing has established
itself, another has not been altered or abolished, but is
still adhered to or continues): Ro. iii. 7; vi. 2; ix. 19;
Gal. v.11. oc. with negatives: od... €rt, ovK ert, nO
longer, no more, Lk. xvi. 2; xx. 36; xxi. 1, 4; xxii. 3;
iva py ére lest longer, that ...no more, Rev. xx. 3; ov py
ért, Rev. iii. 12; xviii. 21-23; ovddeis, undeis, -depuia, -Oev
ért, nobody, nothing more, Mt. v.13; Heb. x. 2, (see pnxére,
OvKETL). 2. of degree and increase; with the
comparative, even, yet: Phil. i. 9; Heb. vii. 15, (W.
240 (225)). of what remains, [yet]: Jn. iv. 35; vii. 33;
xii. 35; xiii. 33; Mt. xix. 20; Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xviii. 22;
of what is added, besides, more, further: ért adma&, Heb.
Xil. 26 sq. 3 ére €va #) Ovo, Mt. xviii. 16 ; add, Mt. xxvi. 65 ;
Heb. xi. 32; re dé yea moreover, and further, (Lat. prae-
terea vero), Heb. xi. 36 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1; Diod. 1,
74; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 4); ére dé kai (but or) yea
moreover also (Lat. praeterea vero etiam), Lk. xiv. 26 R
GT Lumrg.; Acts ii. 26 ; rt te ai and moreover too (Lat.
insuperque adeo), Lk. xiv. 26 L txt. Tr WH; Acts xxi.
28, [ef. B. § 149, 8; W. 578 (537) note].
éropdtw ; fut. érouusdow; 1 aor. 7roiuaca; pf. jroiuaxa
(Mt. xxii. 4 LT Tr WH); Pass., pf. nroiuacpar; 1 aor.
ytouacOnv; (€roruos) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often
for }})3 and })3i}; to make ready, prepare: absol. to
make the necessary preparations, get everything ready, Lk.
xii. 47; of preparing a feast, Lk. xxii. 9, 12, (Gen. xliii.
15; 1 Chr. xii. 39); w. dat. of pers., for one: of prepar-
ing a lodging, Lk. ix. 52 [W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5];
a supper, Mk. xiv. 15; also w. a telic inf. added, Mt. xxvi.
17; foll. by wa [cf. B. 237 (205)], Mk. xiv. 12; w.
ace. of the thing: @ 7roipwacas the things which thou hast
prepared (as a store), Lk. xii. 20; [ri deurvnow, Lk. xvii.
8]; 16 dpiorov, Mt. xxii. 4; 1d maoya, Mt. xxvi. 19; Mk.
xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; dpopara, Lk. xxiii. 56; xxiv. 1 ;
térov Twi, Jn. xiv. 2 sq.; Eeviav, Philem. 22; [ovpBovrAcop,
Mk. xv.1 TWH mrg., cf. cup8.]; tiv 6d0v Kupiov (by a
fig. drawn from the oriental custom of sending on before
kings on their journeys persons to level the roads and
make them passable), to prepare the minds of men to
give the Messiah a fit reception and secure his blessings:
Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, (fr. Is. x]. 3); 1.765 [ta érou-
uaod7n 7 680s Tav Baciéwv, Rev. xvi. 12]; w. acc. of pers.,
17; éavrdv, Rev. xix. 7; foll. by ta [ef. B. 237 (205)],
Rev. vill. 6; romacpern ws vipdn, i. e. beautifully
adorned, Rey. xxi. 2; nromacp. eis t1, prepared i. e. fit
for accomplishing any thing, 2 Tim. ii. 21; Rev. ix. 7;
prepared i.e. kept in readiness, eis tiv Spav x. 72€pav
ete., for the hour and day se. predetermined, Rev. ix. 15.
In a peculiar sense God is said érowpaoa re for men, i. e.
to have caused good or ill to befall them, almost i. q. to
have ordained ; of blessings: ri, Lk. ii. 31; Rev. xii. 6;
ruvi Tt, Mt. xx. 23; xxv. 34; Mk. x. 40; [1 Co. ii. 9];
Heb. xi. 16; of punishment: rwi 7, Mt. xxv. 41.
[CoMP.: mpo-eroupaga. | *
érowpacla, -as, 7, (€roiatw, cf. Oavpacia, eikacia, ép-
yacia) ; 1. the act of preparing: tis tpopis, Sap. xiii.
12; tay kAwapiwv, Artem. oneir. 2, 57. 2. i. q. érot-
porns, the condition of a pers. or thing so far forth as pre-
pared, preparedness, readiness: Hipp. p. 24 [i. 74 ed.
Kiihn] ; Joseph. antt. 10, 1,2; readiness of mind (Germ.
Bereitwilligkeit), ths capdias, Ps. ix. 38 (x. 17): év érot-
pacia Tov evayyeXlov, with the promptitude and alacrity
which the gospel produces, Eph. vi. 15.*
érousos (on the accent cf. [Chandler § 394]; W. 52
(51)), -y (2 Co. ix. 5; 1 Pet. i. 5), -ov, and -os, -ov (Mt.
xxv. 10 [cf. WH. App. p. 157"; W. § 11,1; B. 25 (22)]);
fr. Hom. down; prepared, ready; a. of things: Mt.
xxii. 4, 8, [(Lk. xiv. 17)]; Mk. xiv. 15 [Lbr. ér.]; 2 Co.
ix. 5; ready to hand: ra érowa, the things (made) ready
(in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches al-
ready founded by them, 2 Co. x. 16; i. q. opportune,
seasonable, 6 xatpds, Jn. vii. 6; Garnpia éroiun amoKadv-
6qva, on the point of being revealed, 1 Pet.i.5. _b. of
persons ; ready, prepared: to do something, Acts xxiii.
21; to receive one coming, Mt. xxiv. 44; xxv. 10; Lk.
xii. 40; mpos 7, for (the doing of) a thing, Tit. ili. 1;
1 Pet. iii. 15; foll. by the inf. [ef. B. 260 (224)], Lk.
xxii. 33; by rod with inf., Acts xxiii. 15 [B. § 140, 15;
W. § 44,4 a.]; év €éroipo éxa, to be in readiness, foll. by
the inf. (Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 34 sub fin.): 2 Co. x. 6
(ef. W. 332 (311)]. (For 7123, Ex. xix. 11,15; Josh.
viii. 4, etc.) *
érolpws, adv., [fr. Thue. on], readily; éroipws éxw to
be ready: foll. by inf., Acts xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1
Pet. iv. 5 [(mot WH)]. (Sept. Dan. iii. 15; Diod. 16,
28; Joseph. antt. 12, 4,2; 13, 1, 1.)*
%ros, -ovs, [gen. plur. éray, cf. B. 14 (13)], ro, [fr.
Hom. down], Hebr. 73¥, a year: Lk. iii. 1; Acts vii.
30; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8; Rev. xx. 3, ete.; érn €xew,
to have passed years, Jn. viii. 57; with ev aoGeveia
added, Jn. v. 5 [cf. W. § 32, 6]; etvat, yiverOa, yeyove-
vat érav, &. g. Sddexa, to be twelve years old [cf. Eng. (a
boy) of twelve years]: Mk. v.42; Lk. ii. 42; iii. 23 [ef.
W. 349 (328)]; viii. 42; Actsiv. 22; yeyovvia €Aarrov
érav éénxovra, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W.
590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which
a thing is done [W. § 31, 9a.; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 205
Acts xiii. 20; acc., in answer to the quest. how long ?:
Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 25; Lk. ii. 365 xiii. 7 sq. 11,16; xv.
ev 256
29; Acts vii. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17; Rev. xx. 2,
4,6. preceded by a prep.: amd, from... on, since, Lk.
viii. 43; Ro. xv. 23; in the same sense ex, Acts ix. 33;
xxiv. 10[A. V. of many years]; dua with gen., ... years
having intervened, i. e. after [see da, LI. 2]: Acts xxiv.
17; Gal. ii. 1; efs, for... years, Lk. xii. 19; éwi with
ace. (see émi, C. Il. 1 p. 235° bot.), for (the space of),
Acts xix. 10; pera with acc., after, Gal. i. 18; iii. 17;
mpd with gen., before [Eng. ago; cf. mpd, b.}, 2 Co. xii. 2;
cat é€ros, yearly, Lk. ii. 41. [Syn. ef. emaurds. }
ev, adv., (prop. ev, the unused neut. of the adj. évs in
Hom.), well: ed mpacow, not as many interp. take it,
contrary to ordinary Grk. usage, to do well i.e. act
rightly (which in Greek is expressed by é6p@@s or kaos
mpacow), but to be well off, fare well, prosper, Acts xv.
29 [R. V. it shall be well with you] (Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8;
2,4,6; 4, 2,26; oec. 11,8; Joseph. antt. 12,4, 1; doris
Kad@s mpatret, evyi Kal ed mparrer; Plat. Alc. i. p. 116 b.;
ei €U mpatrovat adixouvtes, Prot. p. 333 d.; et tus GAXos ed
pev eroingey tuas ed mpdtrwv, Dem. 469, 14; and some
began their letters with ed mpdrrew, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 19;
Diog. Laért. 3, 61 and Menagius (Ménage) in loc. In
one passage alone, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 14, the drift of the
discussion permits Socrates to deviate from common
usage by attaching to the phrase the notion of right con-
duct, acting well; [yet this sense occurs in eccles. Grk.,
see e. g. Justin M. apol. 1, 28 and Otto’s note; cf. L.
and S. s. v. mpdoow, IV.]); iva ed cou yévnra that it
may be well, things may turn out well, with thee, Eph.
vi. 3 (Gen. xii. 13; [Ex. xx. 12]; Deut.iv. 40; [v. 16];
Orat. Az. [i. e. Song of the Three Children] vs. 6);
movety teva, to do one good, Mk. xiv. 7 [here T om. the
ace.; LTr WH read dat.], (Judith x. 16; Bar. vi. (i.e.
Ep. Jer.) 37 (38); Sir. xiv.11; Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,30). In
commendations, ed (SodA€ dyabe), well! well done! Mt.
xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xix.17 RG; Xen. venat. 6, 20; see
evye.*
Eva [WH Eva (see their Introd. § 408); Rec. Eva, so
G Tr in 1 Tim. ii. 13, where R* Eta], -as [B. 17 (15)],
7, (713M, explained Gen. iii. 20), Eve, the wife of Adam:
2 Co. xa: Siu Tam. ii. 13/4
evayyeAlfw: 1 aor. einyyehica (Rev. x. 7; xiv. 6; 1S.
xxxi. 9; 2S. xviii. 19; W. 71 (69); [B. 35 (30)]); Pass.,
pres. evayyedifoua; pf. ptep. evnyyedcopevoe (Heb. iv.
2); 1 aor. einyyedioOnv; Mid., pres. evayyediCopat; impf.
evnyyedc(ouny (Acts viii. 25 LT Tr WH); 1 aor. etnyye-
Atrdunv; (evdyyeAos bringing good news); Sept. for
wa; to bring good news, to announce glad tidings; Vulg.
evangelizo [ete.]; used in the O. T. of any kind of good
news: 18S.xxxi. 9; 2S.i.20; 1 Chr. x. 9; of the joyful
tidings of God’s kindnesses, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 10; 76 ca-
typtov Beod, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 2; in particular, of the
Messianic blessings: Is. xl. 9; lii. 7; 1x. 6; Ixi. 1, ete.;
in the N. T. used esp. of the glad tidings of the coming
kingdom of God, and of the salvation to be obtained in
it through Christ, and of what relates to this salvation.
L Inthe Active (rarein Grk. auth. also, in fact found
only in later Grk., as Polyaen. 5, 7; eUnyyeAixet avTa,
evayyerico
Dio Cass. 61, 13; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268; [W. 247):
w. dat. of the pers. to whom the news is brought, Rev.
x. 7 Rec.; w. ace. of the pers. to whom the announce-
ment is made, ibid. GL T Tr WH; Rev. xiv. 6 RG; bya
construction not found elsewhere, émi twa (cf. Germ. die
Botschaft an einen bringen), ibid. G LT Tr WH. II.
Passive [cf. W. 229 (215); B. 188 (163)]; of persons,
glad tidings are brought to one, one has glad tidings pro-
claimed to him: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; Heb. iv. 2,6; of
things, to be proclaimed: evayyeditera 4 Bacideia Tod
Geov, the glad tidings are published of the kingdom of
God close at hand, Lk. xvi. 16; 16 evayyeduov, the joyful
announcement of man’s salvation is delivered, Gal. i. 11
[B. 148 (129 sq.)]; 7d pyya ro evayyeAroGev eis dyas, the
word of good tidings brought unto you (see eis, A. I. 5
b. [ef. W. 213 (200) ]), 1 Pet. i. 25; impers. edayyeAio6n
twi, the good news of salvation was declared, 1 Pet. iv.
6. III. as deponent Middle (in Grk. writ. fr.
Arstph. eqq. 643 down), to proclaim glad tidings; spec.
to instruct (men) concerning the things that pertain to
Christian salvation: simply, Lk. ix. 6; xx. 1; Acts xiv.
7; Ro. xv. 20; 1 Co.i.17; ix. 16,18; rim Adyo ednyye-
Aioapnv vpiv ei Karéxere, if ye hold fast in your minds
with what word (i. e. with what interpretation; for he
contrasts his own view of Christian salvation with his
opponents’ doctrine of the resurrection) I preached to
you the glad tidings of salvation, 1 Co. xv. 2. w. dat.
of pers. (as com. in Grk. writ.), to any one: Lk. iv. 18
fr. Is. lxi. 1; spec. to bring to one the good tidings con-
cerning Jesus as the Messiah: Gal.i.8; iv. 13; Ro. i.
15; evayy. w. ace. of the thing: univ., rv miotw rivds,
to bring good tidings of the faith in which one excels,
1 Th. iii. 6; of Messianic blessings: eipnyny, Acts x. 36;
Ro. x. 15 [RG Tr mrg. br.] (fr. Is. lii. 7); rnv Baowdelav
tT. Oeov, Lk. viii. 1; ra epi rns Bao. r. Oeov, Acts viii. 12
(where GLT Tr WH om. ra; cf. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 2
6 pev... TH yuvatkl wept TovTwy evnyyedi{ero) ; THY miaTLY,
the necessity of having faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23. ri
ru [B. 150 (131)], Lk. i. 19; ii. 10; Acts xvii. 18[T Tr
WHom. dat.]; Eph. ii. 17; rwi tr. Bao. rov Oeov, Lk. iv.
43; evayy. Incoty rov Xpordy or (so L T Tr WH) rov
Xptorov "Ingovy, to proclaim the glad news of Jesus the
Christ, Acts v.42, and (which comes to the same thing)
Tov kuptoy Inoody, Acts xi. 20; Tov vidv tod Beov ev rois
€6veor, among the Gentiles, Gal. i. 16; roy "Inoovv rim,
Acts viii. 35; with cat ryv avdoraciv tux added, Acts
xvii. 18 (where T Tr WH om. adrots) ; tov Adyov, to an-
nounce the glad tidings of the Messiah, or of the king-
dom of God, or of eternal salvation offered through
Christ, Acts viii. 4; rév Adyov Tov Kupiov, Acts xv. 35;
ro evayyéAtov, 1 Co. xv. 1; w. dat. of the pers. added to
whom it is preached, 2 Co. xi. 7; rév mAovrov [rd mAov-
ros] rou Xpicrov ev trois €Oveor, among the Gentiles [but
LT Tr WH om. év], Eph. iii. 8. By a constr. unknown
to the earlier Grks. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268), with
ace. of the pers. to whom the announcement is made
[W. 223 (209)]: Lk. iii. 18; Acts xvi. 10; Gali. 9
(where it is interchanged with evayy. rem vs. 8); 1 Pet.
evaryyێdvov
i. 12, (Justin M. apol. 1, 33); twa 7, acc. of the thing
(Alciphr. epp. 3,12; Heliod. 2,10; Euseb. h. e. 3, 4;
[cf. W. 227 (213); B. 150 (131))]), foll. by dre ete. Acts
xiii. 832; rwa foll. by inf. Acts xiv. 15; tas xapas, tas
méAets, Acts viii. 25, 40; xiv. 21; [eis ra tmepexeva,
2 Co. x. 16 (cf. W. 213 (200), and II. above). Comp.:
Apo-evayyediCouat. | *
ebayyéAtov, -ov, 76, (evayyedos [cf. evayyeditw]), Hebr.
mwa and 173; 1. a reward for good tidings (cf.
ra didacKddua, the fees given the dSdcxados), Hom. Od.
14,152; Cic.ad Att. 2,3 and 12; 13,40; Plut. Demetr.
17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2S. iv. 10. 2. good tidings:
Leian. asin. 26; App. b. civ. 4,20; Plut.; al.; plur.
Sept. 2S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt.; but in each place evay-
yedia should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20
dump evayyedias. Inthe N. T. spec. a. the glad tidings
of the kingdom of God soon to be set up, and subsequently
also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom:
Miesat U5: -yils 353) x. 29s xiii. 105. xiv. 9); xvi..1550 Mt.
xxvi. 13; w. agen. of the obj. added: tas Bacwelas, Mt.
iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; Mk.i.14 RLbr. After the
death of Christ the term 1d edayyéAcoy comprises also
the preaching of (concerning) Jesus Christ as having
suffered death on the cross to procure eternal salvation
for men inthe kingdom of God, but as restored to life
and exalted to the right hand of God in heaven, thence
to return in majesty to consummate the kingdom of God;
so that it may be more briefly defined as the glad tidings
of salvation through Christ; the proclamation of the grace
of God manifested and pledged in Christ; the gospel
[A-S. god-spell (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.)]: Acts
vets howd 16 GER Dr WH x: 165)xi2 28571 (Cox iv.
15; ix. 14,18[G LT TrWH], 23; xv.1; 2 Co. viii. 18;
Gal. ii. 2; Eph. iii. 6; vi. 19 [L WH br. evay.]; Phil. i. 5,
i, diode (lG));% [lier 22) citets, eB. LL. Zia scivesds Loves
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2]; 1 Th. ii.4; 2 Tim.i. 8,10; w.
gen. of the obj., the gospel concerning etc.: tov Xpiarod
[ef. W. 186 (175) sq-], Ro. i. 16 Rec.; xv. 19, 29 Rec. ;
1 Co: ix. 12, 18: [Rec.]; 2 Co. ii. 125 ix.135 x. 14; Gal.
i. 7; Phil. i. 27; 1 Th. iii. 2; rod xupiov jue "Ino. Xp.
2 Th. i. 8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. Xprorod]; rod viod rod
Oeov, Ro. i. 9 cf. Mk.i.13; rns cwrnpias ipov, Eph. i. 13;
ths eipnyns, Eph. vi. 15; tas ydpiros tov Oeov, Acts xx.
24; rns ddEns Tod pakapiov Oeov, 1 Tim. i. 113; rns ddéns
tov Xpiotov, 2 Co. iv. 4. 7 ddAnOera Tov evayyediov, the
truth contained in the gospel [cf. W. 236 (221 sq.)],
Gal. ii. 5, 14; Col. i.5; 7 éAmis tod evayy. the hope which
the gospel awakens and strengthens, Col. i. 23; 4 miorus
tov evayy. the faith given the gospel, Phil. i. 27; oi
Seapot tr. evayy. (see Seopds, fin.), Philem. 13; érepov
evayy. of another sort, i. e. different from the true doc-
trine concerning Christian salvation, Gal. i. 6; 2 Co. xi.
4; aimmov evayy. the contents of which were decreed by
God from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. with gen. of the au-
thor; and that a. of the author of the subject-matter
or facts on which the glad tidings of man’s salvation
rest, and who wished these glad tidings to be conveyed
tomen: 1rd evayy. Tov beov, Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. xi. 7; 1 Th.
257
evryevns
ii. 2, 8 sq.; 1 Pet. iv. 17; more fully rov 6eov mepi tov
viovd adrod, Ro. i. 1-3. B. of the author of the partic-
ular mode in which the subject-matter of the gospel is
understood (conception of the gospel) and taught to
others; thus Paul calls his exposition of the gospel (and
that of the teachers who agree with him), in opposition
to that of those teaching differently, ro evayy. nya :
2 Co. iv. 3, [cf. rd ed. Td evayyeduobev im’ épuov, Gal. i.
11]; xara 76 evayy. pov, as I expound it, Ro. ii. 16; xvi.
Soge2 Lim. d1-08. y- of him who preaches the gospel:
npov, 1 Th.i.5; 2 Th.ii.14. with gen. of those to
whom it is announced: rjs mepiropuis (i. e. Trav mepererpn-
pevev), to be preached to the circumcised or Jews; and
TO ev. THS akpoBvortias, to be carried to the Gentiles, Gal.
Lieids b. As the Messianic rank of Jesus was proved
by his words, his deeds, and his death, the narrative of
the sayings, deeds, and death of Jesus Christ came to be
called evayyédtov: so perhaps in Mk. i. 1; for the pas-
sage may also mean, ‘glad tidings concerning Jesus
Christ began to be prociaimed even as it is written,’ viz.
by John the Baptist; cf. De Wette ad loc. At length
the name was given to awritten narrative of the glad
tidings; so in the titles of the Gospels, on which see
card, II. 3c.a. [On the eccl. senses of the word, see
Soph. Lex. s. v.] *
ebayyeAor Hs, -0v, 6, (evayyeAiCw), a bibl. and eccl. word,
a bringer of good tidings, an evangelist (Vulg. evangelis-
ta). This name is given in the N. T. to those heralds of
salvation through Christ who are not apostles: Acts xxi.
8; Eph. iv. 11; 2 Tim. iv. 5. [B. D.s. v. Evangelist. ]*
edapertéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. evapeornoa; pf. inf. edype-
ornxevat, and without augm. evapeorynk. Heb. xi. 5 L WH
[ef. WH. App. p. 162; B. 35 (30)]; to be well-pleasing :
7@ be (Sept. for OTONT-N¥ FANT, Gen. v. 22, 24;
vi. 9), Heb. xi. 5 sq. (Sir. xliv. 16; Philo de Abr. § 6;
de exsecr. § 9; revi, Diod. 14, 4). Pass. pres. evape-
orovpa; tui [B. 188 (163); W. § 39,1 .], to be well
pleased with a thing: Heb. xiii. 16 (Diod. 3, 55; 20,79;
Diog. Laért. 10, 137).*
ev-dpeoros, -ov, (fr. ev and dpeords), well-pleasing, ac-
ceptable: Ro. xii. 2; rwi, to one, Ro. xii. 1; xiv. 18; 2 Co.
v. 9; Eph. v. 10; Phil. iv. 18; év re, in anything, Tit. ii
9; ev xupia (see ev I. 6 b., p. 211” mid.), Col. iii. 20 (R om.
év) ; év@mov with gen. of pers., in one’s judgment: Heb.
xiii. 21. (Sap. iv. 10; ix. 10; Clem. Al. [strom. 2,19 p.
481, 21 ete.; Just. M. apol. 1, 44 sub fin.; Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 49, 5].) See the foll. word.*
et-apéorws, adv., in a manner well-pleasing to one, ac-
ceptably: r@ Oe, Heb. xii. 28. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5;
gladly, willingly, Epict. diss. 1, 12, 21; frag. 11.)*
EiBovdos, -ov, 6, [lit. of good counsel], Eubulus, a
Christian : 2 Tim. iv. 21.*
ev-ye, used in commendation, well done! Lk. xix.17LT
Tr WH. (Arstph., Plat.,al.; Sept. for mx.) Cf. ed, fin.”
evyevijs, -¢s, (fr. ed and yevos) ; 1. well-born, of noble
race: Lk. xix. 12 (ofa prince) ; 1 Co.i. 26. 2. noble-
minded: compar. evyevéorepos, Acts xvii. 11. (Sept.;
often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. andTragg. down.) *
Enola 258
evSia, -as, n, (fr. evdvos, -ov, and this fr. ed and Zevs,
gen. Avs, Zeus, the ruler of the air and sky), a serene
sky, fair weather: Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the
passage]. (Sir. iii. 15; Pind., Aeschyl., Hippocr., Xen.,
and sqq.) *
ev-Soxéw, -@ ; impf. 1 pers. plur. evdoxodpev (1 Th. ii. 8
[where WH after cod. Vat. nidox.; W.and B. as below }) ;
1 aor. evddxnoa and (in Heb. x. 6, 8, LT Tr; 1 Co. x. 5
LTrWH; Ro. xv. 26, 27 and 1 Th. iii. 1 T Tr WH ; Mt.
xii. 18 T Tr; Mt. iii. i7 T; Col.i. 19 L mrg.) ndddxnoa,
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 456 and 140; W. 71 (69); [B.
34 (69) ;. Tdf. Proleg. p. 120; WH. App. p. 162]; (fr.
ed and doxéa, cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 370, who treats
of the word fully and with his usual learning [cf. W.
101 (95)]); Sept. mostly for 4¥2; among Grk. writ.
used esp. by Polyb., Diod., and Dion. Hal.; 1. as in
prof. auth., foll. by an infin., it seems good to one, is one’s
good pleasure ; to think it good, choose, determine, decide :
Lk. xii. 32; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal. i.15; once foll. by acc. w.
inf., Col.i. 19 [ef. Bp. Lghtft.; W. § 64, 3b.; B. § 129, 16];
with the included idea of kindness accompanying the de-
cision, Ro. xv. 26 sq.; to do willingly what is signified by
the inf., to be ready to, 1 Th. ii. 8; to prefer, choose rather,
[A. V. we thought it good], 1 Th. iii. 1; Sir. xxv. 16;
more fully paddXov evdoxa, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. by a usage
peculiar to bibl. writ., foll. by & run, to be well pleased
with, take pleasure in, a pers. or thing [ef. W. 38, 232
(218) ;;, Be 185» (260) ]is) MG. Siok; <xiisyi8 irs xvi:
5; Mk.i.11; Lk. iii. 22, [on the tense in the preceding
pass. cf. W. 278 (261); B. 198 (171)]; 1 Co.x.5; 2 Co.
xii. 10; 2 Th. ii. 12 RGLbr.; Heb. x.38, (3 yan, 2 S.
xxii. 20; Mal. ii. 17; 3 M¥7, Ps. exlix. 4). foll. by eis
twa (i.e. when directing the mind, turning the thoughts,
unto), to be favorably inclined towards one (ef. W. § 31,
5; B. § 133, 23]: Mt. xii. 18 RG; 2 Pet. i.17; w. sim-
ple ace. of pers. to be favorable to, take pleasure in [cf.
W. 222 (209)]: Mt. xii. 18 L TWH; with acc. of the
thing : Heb. x. 6, 8, (Ps. lL. (li.) 18, 21; Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 2;
Gen. xxxiii. 10; Lev. xxvi. 34, 41); as in Grk. writ.
also, w. the dat. of the pers. or thing with which one is
well pleased: 2 Th. ii. 12 T Tr WH (see above); 1
Mace. i. 43; 1 Esdr. iv. 39. [Comp.: ouv-evdoxéo. |*
evSoxia, -as, 7, (fr. eddoxéw, as evAoyia fr. eddoyéw),
unknown to prof. auth. [ Boeckh, Inserr. 5960], found in
the O. T. in some of the Pss. (for })¥7) and often in Sir;
on itcf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 371 sq.; [esp. Bp. Lghtft.
on Phil. i.15]; prop. beneplacitum (Vulg. [ed. Clement. ]
Eph. i. 9); 1. will, choice: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21,
(on both pass. see €umpoobev, 2 b.); Sir. i. 27 (24);
XxxvVi. 13, ete. ; in particular, good-will, kindly intent, be-
nevolence: Eph. i. 5,9; Phil. ii. 13, (Ps. 1. (li.) 20; Sir. ii.
16; xi. 17 (15) ete.); 8v etdoxiay, prompted by good will,
Phil. i. 15. 2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction: with
gen. of the thing that pleases, 2 Th. i. 11; ev avOpwras
evdoxia, either among men pleasure produced by salva-
tion, or God’s pleasure in men, Lk. ii. 14 RG Tr mre.
WH mrg.; avOpwro evdoxias, men in whom God is well
p.eased [i.e. not a particular class of men (viz. believ-
evOuvas
ers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in
Christ’s birth], ibid. L T Tr txt. WH txt. [see WH.
App. ad loc.; Field, Otium Norv. iii. ad loc.], (Ps. exliv.
(exlv.) 16; Sir. ix. 12). 3. desire (for delight in any
absent thing easily begets a longing for it): Ro. x. 1;
cf. Philippi and Tholuck ad loc.*
evepyecia, -as, 7, (evepyerns); a good deed, benejit: 1
Tim. vi. 2 (on which see dvtiAapBave, 2); with gen.
of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [W. 185
(174)], Actsiv. 9. (2 Mace. vi. 13; ix. 26 ; Sap. xvi. 11,
24; in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down.) *
evepyeTéew, -@; (evepyerns), 10 do good, bestow benefits :
Acts x. 38. (Sept.; often in Attic writ.) *
evepyétys, -ov, 6, a benefactor (fr. Pind. and Hat.
down); it was also a title of honor, conferred on such
as had done their country service, and upon princes;
equiv. to Soter, Pater Patriae: Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hdt.
8, 85; Thuc. 1, 129; Xen. vect 38, 11; Hell. 6, 1, 4;
Plat. de virt. p. 379 b.; al.; cf. 2 Mace. iv. 2; joined
with owrnp, Joseph. b. j. 3, 9, 8; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12
[Tdf. viii. ]. 25]; Diod. 11, 26.) *
ev-Beros, -ov, (fr. ed and Oerds), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
and Hippocr. down; prop. well-placed; a. fit: ets Tt,
Lk. ix. 62 RG; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 et al.) ; with
dat. of the thing for which: Lk. ix. 62 L T Tr WH (76
mpaypatt, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149,4]). b. useful:
vwi, Heb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend
on the ptep.]; (of time, seasonable, Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 6;
Susan. 15).*
ei0€ws, adv., (fr. evvs), straightway, immediately, forth-
with: Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks.,
esp. Mark’s Gospel [where, however, T Tr WH have
substituted ed@vs in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere
only in Gal. i. 16 ; Jas.i. 24; Rev. iv. 2, (for o8nd, Job
v. 3). shortly, soon: 3 Jn. 14. [From Soph. down. ]
edOvSpopew, -@: 1 aor. evOuvdpdunoa [see evdoxew]; (€v-
Ovdpopos, i.e. edOvs and dSpdpos) ; to make a straight course,
run a straight course: foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts
Xvi. 11; etOvdpounras 7AOov eis, Acts xxi. 1. (Philo,
alleg. lege. iii. § 79; de agricult. § 40.) *
eiOupew, -&; (€vOuuos) ; 1. trans. to put in good
spirits, gladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat. de rep.
2, 383 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen.,
Plat.). 2. intrans. to be joyful, be of good cheer, of
good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v.13. (Eur.
Cycl. 530; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) *
ev-Oupos, -ov, (ed and Avyds) ; 1. well-disposed, kind,
(Hom. 0d.14,63). 2. of good cheer, of good courage: Acts
xxvii. 36; [compar. as adv. xxiv. 10 Ree. (see edOdpes) ],
(Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down ; 2 Mace. xi. 26).*
eW0ipws, adv., [Aeschyl., Xen., al.], cheerfully: Acts
xxiv. 10 L T Tr WH, for Rec. ev@updrepov the more con-
Jidently.*
e0svw; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. edOivare; (dus) ;
a. to make straight, level, plain: rv 68dv, Jn. i. 23 (Sir.
ii. 6; xxxvil. 15). b. to lead or guide straight. to keep
straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : 6 evdivew, the
steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cyct
evdus
15; of a charioteer, Num. xxii. 23; Isocr. p. 9; al.)
[Comp. : xat-evdivw. | *
e00Us, -eia, -v, Sept. for Iw, [fr. Pind. down], straight;
a. prop. straight, level: of a way, [ Mt. iii. 3]; Mk. i. 3;
Lk. iii. 4; Actsix.11; els evdetav (LT Tr WH eis ev6eias),
sc. 6ddv (an ellipsis com. also in class. Grk. cf. W. § 64,
5), Lk. iii. 5; evOeta ddd the straight, the right way, is fig.
used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal
i. e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ai 680i xvpiov, the right
and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the
Three vs. 3). b. trop. straightforward, upright, true,
sincere, (as often in prof. auth.): xapdia, Acts viii. 21
(evOeis ty xapdia often in the Pss., as vii. 11; xxxi.
Gem.) 11: xxxy. (xxxyvi.) 11).*
e00vs, adv., [fr. Pind. down], i. q. ev6€ws, with which it
is often interchanged in the Mss. [see evdéws]; straight-
way, immediately, forthwith: Mt. iii. 16; xiii. 20; Jn.
xiii. 32, ete. [Cf. Phryn. ed. Lod. p. 145.]
evOdrns, -nTos, 7, (fr. the adj. eddus), rectitude, upright-
ness: trop. paBdos evOutnros, an impartial and righteous
government, Heb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7.*
edkatpéw, -@: impf. evxaipovy [so L T Tr WH in Mk.
vi. 31; RG in Acts xvii. 21] and nvxaipow [RG in
Mk. 1l.c.; LT Tr WH in Acts |. c.], (betw. which the
Mss. vary, see evdoxéa, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. evxarpyoe ;
(evxatpos); a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p.125sq.; [/tutherford, New Phryn. p. 205;
Suph. Lex. s. v.]); to have opportunity: 1 Co. xvi. 12; to
have leisure, foll. by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31
[(Plut. ii. p. 223 d. Cleom. Anax. §9)]; to give one’s
time to a thing, ets tt, Acts xvii. 21.*
evdxatpla, -as, 7, (evKarpos), seasonable time, opportunity:
(nrewv ev., foll. by [iva B. 237 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 16;
[Lk. xxii. 6 Lechm. mrg.]; by rod with inf. Lk. xxii. 6.
(Sept.; in Grk. writ. first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) *
ev-Katpos, -ov, (ed and Kaipds), seasonable, timely, oppor-
tune: BonOeva, Heb. iv. 16; myepa eve. a convenient day,
Mk. vi. 21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29; [Ps. ciii. (civ.) 27; Soph.
O. C. 32]; Theophr., Polyb., al.) *
edkalpws, adv., seasonably, opportunely; when the op-
portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 11; opp. to dxaipas (q. V.),
2 Tim. iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8,3; Plat. and sqq.;. Sir.
KV. 22;,),*
€U-KoTros, -ov, (ev and xozos), that can be done with
easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al.; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace.
iii. 18; in the N. T. only in the phrase EVKOT@TEPOV €oTL,
—foll. by inf., Mt. ix.5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; by ace. w.
inf., Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25; Lk. xvi.17; xviii. 25.*
evAGBea, -elas, 7, the character and conduct of one who
is evdaBns (q- V-); 1. caution, circumspection, dis-
cretion: Soph., Eur., Plat., Dem., sqq.; Sept. Prov.
Xxvill. 14; joined w. mpovoca, Plut. Marcell. 9; used of
the prudent delay of Fabius Maximus, Polyb. 3, 105, 8;
7 €vA. ower mavra, Arstph. av. 377; i. q. avoidance,
mAnyar, Plat. legg. 7 p. 815 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno
the Stoic contrasts 7 evAdB. caution, as a evdoyos exkALots
a reasonable shunning, with 6 poBos, Diog. Laért. 7, 116,
ef. Cic. Tuse. 4, 6, 13). 2. reverence, veneration: 7
259
evrAoyéw
mpos TO Oeioy evr. Diod. 13,12; Plut. Camill. 21; de ser.
num. vind. c. 4, and elsewh.; mpds rods vouous, Plut. Ages.
15; deod, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § 9; simply reverence
towards God, godly fear, picty: Heb. xii. 28 and, in the
opinion of many, also v. 7 [cf. amo, II. 2 b.; see below].
3. fear, anxiety, dread: Sap. xvii. 8; for 7387, Josh.
xxii. 24; Joseph. antt.11, 6,9; Plut. Fab. 1 (the etBovdla
of Fabius seemed to be evAaBera) ; so, most probably, in
Heb. v. 7 (see [above and] azo, I. 3 d.), for by using
this more select word the writer, skilled as he was in the
Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of
God than if he had used @dBos. [Syn. see decdéa, fin. ;
ef. Trench § xlviii.; Delitzsch on Heb. v. 7.]*
evAaBeopat, -oduar: 1 aor. ptcp. evAaBnOeis; prop. to
show one’s self evhaBns, i.e. 1. to act cautiously, cir-
cumspectly, (Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be-
ware, fear: as in 1 Mace. iii. 30; xii. 40 [ Alex. etc.] and
often in prof. auth., foll. by py lest [B. 241 sq. (208)],
Acts xxiii. 10 RG (Deut. ii. 4; 1 S. xviii. 29; Job xiii.
25; Jer. v. 22; Dan. iv. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 16; Sir. xli. 3).
3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (rov Oedv, Plat. lege. 9
P»979,0.5 Sept. Proy. 18; xxiv. 28)(xxx. 5): Nal 1.
7): God’s declaration, Heb. xi. 7.*
evAaBns, -es, (ed and AafBeiv), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat.:
down ; 1. taking hold weil, i. e. carefully and surely;
cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [ A. V.
devout]: Acts ii. 5; viii. 2, (Mic. vii. 2 [Alex. etc.]);
joined with dixcavos (as in Plat. polit. p. 311 b.): Lk. ii.
25; vA. kata Tov vopov, Acts xxii. 12 LT Tr WH. [Cf.
reff. s. v. evAaBeca, fin. ] *
edAoyéw,-@; fut. evAoynow; impf. evAoyour and nddAdyouv
(Mk. x. 16, where the Mss. fluctuate betw. the two forms
[ef. WH. App. p. 162]); 1 aor. etAsynoa (nidAdynaa, Mt.
xiv. 19 L Tr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L; Heb. xi. 20 and 21 L);
pf. evAdynxa (nvAdynxa, Heb. vii. 6 L; see edvdoxew init. [ef.
Veitch s. v.; Tdf. on Lk.1.c.]); Pass., pf. ptep. etrAoyn-
pevos; 1 fut. evAoynOncopa; (evAoyos); Sept. very often
for 313 and 3}3; Vulg. benedico; mostly w. acc. of the
obj., to bless one ; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele-
brate with praises: rov Oedv, Lk. i. 645 ii. 28; xxiv.
51, 53 [Tdf. om.]; Jas. iii. 9; absol. in the giving of
thanks: Mt. xiv. 19; xxvi. 26 [cf. 3 below]; Mk. vi. 41;
villi. 7 RG T[?]; xiv. 22 [ef. 3 below]; Lk. xxiv. 30;
1 Co. xiv. 16. (When used in this sense evAoyety differs
from edxapioreiv in referring rather to the form, edy. to
the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage
purely bibl. and eccl. like the Hebr. 393, — 2. fo in-
voke blessings : rwd, upon one, Mt. v.44 Rec.; Lk. vi. 28;
Ro. xii. 14; absol., 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 9; of one tak-
ing leave, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq.; of one at the point of death,
Heb. xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9); in congratulations, Heb.
vii. 1, 6 sq. (Gen. xiv. 19); Mk.x.16 RGL; Lk. ii. 34;
evoynuevos (9313), praised, blessed, [cf. evAoyntés |: Mt.
xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9sq.; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38; Jn.
xii. 13, (in all which pass. it is an acclamation borrowed
fr. Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 26). 3. with ace. of a thing, fo
consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God’s bless-
ing on a thing, prax him <o bless tt to one’s use, pronounce
evrAoynT os
a consecratory blessing on: iyOvd:a, Mk. viii. 7 L Tr WH;
rovs Gprous, Lk. ix. 16; rd mornptov, 1 Co. x. 16; ryv
Ovoiay, 1 S. ix. 13; and perh. rov dprov, Mt. xxvi. 26;
Mk. xiv. 22, (but see above under 1); cf. Rickert, Das
Abendmahl, p. 220 sq. 4. of God, to cause to prosper,
to make happy, to bestow blessings on, [cf. W. 32]: tua,
Acts iii. 26; foll. by ev with dat. of the blessing, ev macy
evAoyia, with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 (é€v dya6ois,
Test. xii. Patr. [test. Jos. § 18] p. 722 [ev evAoyiats yas,
€v mpwtoyernuact kaprar, test. Isach. § 5 p. 626 sq.]);
evAoyay evrAoynow ce (after the Hebr., Gen. xxii. 17; see
etdo, I. 1 a. [for reff.]), I will bestow on thee the greatest
blessings, Heb. vi. 14; Gal. iii. 8 Rec." (see évevdo-
yew), 9; evAoynuevos favored of God, blessed, Lk. i. 42°
(cf. Deut. xxviii. 4); ev yuvacgi, blessed among women,
i. e. before all other women, Lk. i. 283 RGLTr txt. br.;
42%, (cf. W. 246 (231); [B. 83 (73)]); edAoynpevoe tod
martpos (i. q. td Tod marpés, like evr. id Geod, Is. lxi. 9;
Ixv. 23; cf. W. 189 (178) and § 30, 4; [cef. B. § 132, 23]),
appointed to eternal salvation by my father, Mt. xxv. 34.
[Comp.: év-, xat-evdoyew. ] *
evdoynTés, -dv, (evoyéw), Sept. for 7393, a bibl. and
eccl. word; blessed, praised, Vulg. benedictus: applied
to God, Lk. i. 68; Ro. i. 25; ix. 5 [on its position here
ef. W. 551 (512 sq.); Ps. Ixviii. (Ixvii.) 20; Gen. xxvii.
29; Pss. of Sol. 8,40. 41; also1 K. x. 9; 2 Chr.ix. 8; Job
i. 21; Ps. cxii. (cxiii.) 2; Ruthii.19; Dan. ii. 20, and esp.
the elaborate discussion of Ro. 1. c. by Professors Dwight
and Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete. i. pp. 22-55,
87-154 (1882)]; 2 Co. i. 3; xi. 81; Eph. 1.3; 1 Pet. i.
3; cf. B. § 129, 22 Rem. [contra, W. 586 (545); Mey. on
Gal. i. 5]; absol. 6 evAoynrds, of God: Mk. xiv. 61. [The
distinction betw. evAoynrds and edAoynpevos is thus stated
by Philo (de migr. Abr. § 19, i. 453 Mang.) :
. TO pev yap T@ Tepukevat, TO dé
evAoyntés,
ov pdvov evoynuevos: . .
T@ vopiCerOa éyerar pdvov . . . TO TeuKevar evAoyias
G&vov . . . Gmep evdoyntov ev Trois ypnopois adera. CF.
Gens xive 19) 2057 19S. xxv. 32.033) Dob. xm 16 cod:
Sin.; contra, Jud. xiii. 18. EvAoynrés is applied to
men in Gen. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 29; Deut. vii. 14; Judg.
xvii. 2; 1S. xv.13; Ruthii. 20; Jud. and Tob. u. s. ete.
See Prof. Abbot’s careful exposition u. s. p. 152 sq.]*
evdoyla, -as, 7, (e’Aoyos) ; Sept. for 7373; Vulg. bene-
dictio; as in class. Grk. 1. praise, laudation, pane-
gyric: of God or Christ, Rev. v. 12, 13; vii. 12. 2)
jine discourse, polished language: Plat. rep. 3 p. 400 d.;
Luc. Lexiph. 1; in a bad sense, language artfully adapted
to captivate the hearer, fair speaking, fine speeches:
Ro. xvi. 18 (joined with ypyorodoyia, the latter relating
to the substance, edAoyia to the expression) ; plur. in
Aesop, fab. 229 p. 150 ed. Cor. éav od evAoyias edropijs,
éywyé gov ov xndopuat, [but why not gen. sing.?]. Bya
usage unknown to native Grks. 3. an invocation of
blessings, benediction: Heb. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 10, (Gen.
xxvil. 35 sq. 38, al.; Sir. iii. 8; xxxvii. 24; Joseph. antt.
4, 8,44); see evAoyew, 2. 4. consecration: To trornptov
ths evAoyias, the consecrated cup (for that this is the
meaning is evident from the explanatory adjunct 6 evAo-
260
€V000@
youpev, see evdoyew 38 [al. al.; cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad
loc.';’ W189". 78))) 3.4 Co. x.016: 5. a (concrete)
blessing, benefit, (Deut. xi. 26, ete.; Sir. vii. 32; xxxix.
22, etc.); univ. 1 Pet. iii. 9; of the blessings of Chris-
tianity, Ro. xv. 29; Eph. i. 3; 9 evAoyia tov ’ABp. the
salvation (by the Messiah) promised to Abraham, Gal.
iii. 14; of the continual fertility of the soil granted by
God, Heb. vi. 7 (Lev. xxv. 21; terds evdAoyias, Ezek.
XXXiv. 26; cf. edAoyetv dypdv, Gen. xxvii. 27) ; of the bless-
ing of a collection sent from Christians to their brethren,
2 Co. ix. 5 (of the gifts of men, Gen. xxxiii. 11; Judg. i.
15; 1S. xxv. 27); em evAoyiats, that blessings may ac-
crue, bountifully (opp. to peSopevws), 2 Co. ix. 6 (see emi,
B. 2 e. p. 234* top).*
ev-peta-5otos, -ov, (ev and peradidwpe), ready or free to
impart; liberal: 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. ready to distribute].
(Antonin. 1, 14; 6, 48.) *
Eivlen [R* -veixn (see et, «); lit. conquering well], -ns,
9, Eunice, the mother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.*
ev-voew, -@; (evvoos); to wish (one) well; to be well-dis-
posed, of a peaceable spirit: twi, towards any one, Mt.
v. 25. (3 Mace. vii. 11; Soph., Arstph., Xen., Polyb.,
Plut., Hdian.) *
evvowa, -as, 7, (evvoos), good-will, kindness: 1 Co. vii. 3
Rec. ; per’ evvoias, Eph. vi. 7. [From Aeschyl. down. ] *
edvoux (tw: 1 aor. edvovxica; 1 aor. pass. edvvovyiaOny ;
[on the augm. cf. B. 34 (30); WH. App. p. 162]; to cas-
trate, unman: pass. td twos, Mt. xix. 12*; metaph.
evvovx. €autéy to make one’s self a eunuch, viz. by ab-
staining (like a eunuch) from marriage, Mt. xix. 12% (Jo
seph. antt. 10, 2, 2; Leian., Dio Cass., al.) *
ebvodxos, -ov, 6, (fr. edvn a bed, and éyw), Sept. DD;
fr. Hdt. down; prop. a bed-keeper, bed-quard, superin-
tendent of the bedchamber, chamberlain, in the palace of
oriental monarchs who support numerous wives; the
superintendent of the women’s apartment or harem, an
office held by eunuchs; hence a. an emasculated
man, a eunuch: Mt. xix. 12°. But eunuchs in ori-
ental courts held other offices of greater or less impor-
tance, like the oversight of the treasury, held by the
Ethiopian eunuch mentioned in Acts viii. 27, 34, 36, 38
sq.; ef. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 973; [B. D. s. v. Eunuch].
b. one naturally incapacitated — either for marriage, Mt.
xix. 12*; or for begetting children, Sap. iii. 14, ef. Grimm,
exgt. Hdb. ad loc. c. one who voluntarily abstains
Jrom marriage: Mt. xix. 12%. Fischer, De vitiis lexx.
N. T. ete. p. 485 sqq. treats of the word more fully.*
Evobdia [(lit. prosperous journey), -dia R* (lit. fra-
grant) ], -as, 7, Euodia, a Christian woman [transformed
by A. V. into a man, Euodias]: Phil. iv. 2 [see Bp.
Lehtf. ad loc. ].*
ev-086w, -@: [Pass., pres. evododuar; fut. evodwAnoopuat;
1 aor. subj. evod067, 1 Co. xvi. 2 WH mrg. who regard
the evodéra of the text here as perf. (either ind. or
subj.) see their App. p. 172]; (e¥odos) ; Sept. principally
for Nox and Moxy; to grant a prosperous and expedi-
tious journey, to lead by a direct and easy way: Gen.
xxiv. 48; much more freq. tropically, to grant a success-
evrrapedpos
ful issue, to cause to prosper: ti, as thy dddv twos, Gen.
xxiv. 21,40; Is. lv. 11, ete.; ra épya twés, Sap. xi. 1; in
the Pass. always trop. to prosper, be successful : of per-
sons, Josh. i. 8; Prov. xxviii. 13 ; 2 Chr. xiii. 12; xviii.
11, etc.; 3 Jn. 2; eimas etod@Ojcopa édOciv if haply I
shall be so fortunate as to come, Ro. i. 10; of things: 2
Esdr. v. 8; Tob. iv. 19; 1 Mace. iii. 6, etc. ; r@ Kdeo-
pévet evwdaOn Td mpTypLa, Hdt. 6, 733 6, re dv evodarat
[see above, init.] whatever (business) has prospered,
i. e. (contextually) its gains, 1 Co. xvi. 2.*
ei-mdp-eSpos, -ov, (ed, and mapedpos [sitting beside]),
sitting constantly by; assiduous: mpos Tb ebmdpedpov TO
xupiw, that ye may be constantly devoted to the Lord
and his cause, 1 Co. vii. 35, for Rec. eirpdaedpov, which
does not differ in sense, [A.V. attend upon]. (Hesych.
evmapedpov: KaA@s trapapevov.) *
ev-rrevOhs, -és, (ed, and weiMowa to comply with, obey),
easily obeying, compliant, [A. V. easy to be intreated]:
Jas. iii. 17. (Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) *
ei-repl-oratos, -ov, (fr. ed and mepriornut), skilfully
surrounding i. e. besetting, sc. to prevent or retard run-
ning: Heb. xii. 1 [some passively (cf. Isocr. 135 e.),
well or much admired (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. (Not found
elsewhere.) *
ev-rovta [-roua WH (cf. I, ¢, fin.) ], -as, 7, (edrods), a
doing good, beneficence: Heb. xiii. 16; Arr. exp. Alex.
7, 28,8; Alciphr. 1, 10; Lceian. imag. 21; a benefit,
kindness, Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 2; (plur. ib. 19, 9, 1).*
ev-ropéw, and (esp. in later Grk.) mid. evopeopat,
-ovpar: impf. 3 pers. sing. nimopetro (RG) and edzop. (L
T Tr WH;; for reff. see evdoxéw, init.) ; (ev’mopos well
off) ; to be well off, have means: Acts xi. 29 [A. V. ace.
to his ability]. (Lev. xxv. 26, 28, 49; often in the
classics.) *
ev-rropla, -as, 7, (evmopos, see the preced. word), riches,
means, wealth: Acts xix. 25. (Xen., Plat., al.; in diff.
senses in diff. auth.) *
et-mpérmeta, -as, 7, (evmpemns well-looking), goodly ap-
pearance, shapeliness, beauty, comeliness: tod mporwmon,
Jas.i.11. (Thuc., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb:, Plut.; Sept.) *
ev-rpdo-SexTos, -ov, (ed and mpoadexopuar), well-received,
accepted, acceptable: Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. vi. 23 viii. 12;
‘rwi, Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 5. (Plut. praecept. rei publ.
were. 4, lvepy SOle.;) ecel: writ.) *
ev-mrpdo-eSpos, -ov, (ev, and mpdcedpos [sitting near]),
see evmapedpos.
ev-mpocwméw, -@: 1 aor. inf. e’mpocannoa ; (edTpdcwmos
fair of face, of good appearance) ; to make a fair show;
to please [a weak trans. (?); yet Vulg. placere]: év
capxi, in things pertaining to the flesh, Gal. vi. 12.
(Elsewh. only in Chrysost. hom. ad Eph. xxii. § 5, Opp.
xi. 173 c. ed. Montf. [var.] and several times in Byzant.
writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
edp-aKvrAwv, -wvos, 6, (fr. edpos and Lat. aquilo, like
evpdvoros, and euroauster [B. 16 (15) ]), Vulg. ewroaquilo;
the Euraquilo,a N. E. wind: Acts xxvii. 14 LT Tr
WH, for Rec. evpoxdvdSwv (Grsb. edpuxr.) q. v. (Not
found elsewhere.) [B. D 8. v. Euroclydon.] *
261
evuplioKw
evplokw; impf. evpicxoy (Mk. xiv. 55 [RG T]; Lk.
xix. 48 [RG T]; Acts vii. 11 [exe. Tr WH]) and more
rarely nupucxoy (cf. Kiihner § 343, 1. 825 sq. [esp. Veitch
s. v. fin. | and reff. under evdoxéw) ; fut. etppow; pf. evpnxa;
1 aor. edpnoa (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks.,
occurs in Aesop. f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.];
Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 721; W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14
Rec. ; 2 aor. edpov, 1 pers. plur. in Alex. form | WH. App.
p- 164; B. 39 (84); W. § 13,1 (see dmépyouat) | evpaper,
Lk. xxiii. 2 T Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. edpav, Lk. viii. 35
Tr WH; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often edpocav); Pass.,
pres. evpioxopac; impf. 3 pers. sing. etpioxero, Heb. xi.
5 RG, nipioxero LT Tr WH, (ef. Bleek and Delitzsch
ad loc. [Veitch u. s.]); 1 aor. etpe@nv; fut. etpeOncopa;
2 aor. mid. etpounv and later etpayny (Heb. ix. 12, [cef.
reff. above (on 2 aor. act.) ]) ; Sept. numberless times for
N¥D, sometimes for WN to attain to, and for Chald.
naw; [fr. Hom. down]; to find; i. e.
1. prop. to come upon, hit upon, to meet with; a. after
searching, to find a thing sought: absol., opp. to ¢nretv, Mt.
vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (Cyree kal etpyoes, Epict. diss. 4, 1,
51); rea, Mt. ii. 8; Mk. i. 37; Lk. ii. 45; Acts xi. 26
(25) ; xis 22572! Corn 13 (12) 42 amet ts) avev. xx.
15, etc.; ovy evpioxero, he had vanished, Heb. xi.5; witha
specification of place added: mépay w. gen. Jn. vi. 25; év
w. dat. Acts v. 22; evpéOn eis, Acts viii. 40 (see eis, C. 2);
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. vii. 14; xiii. 465 xviii. 13;
ike xxiv. Sie dnr x 9ist Acts vil. 11r;* ko: vil, 1 Sekvec.,
etc.; foll. by indir. disc., Lk. v. 19; ovxy etpeOncav, had
disappeared, Rev. xvi. 20, cf. xviii. 21; w. dat. of ad-
vantage, Rev. xx. 11; foll. by ev w. dat. of place, Mt.
xxi. 19; Rev. xii. 8. teva or tl (yrety x. ovx evpioxetv:
Mt. xii. 43; xxvi.60; Mk. xiv. 55; Lk. xi. 24; xiii. 6 sq.;
Jn. vii. 34; Rev. ix. 6,(2 K.ii.17; Neh. vii. 64; Ps. ix.
36 [x. 15]; Keel. vii. 29; Ezek. xxii. 30; xxvi. 21 Ald.
Comp.; Hos. ii. 7); yi cai ra ev airy épya ebpeOnoerat
shall be found sc. for destruction, i. e. will be unable to
hide themselves from the doom decreed them by God,
2 Pet. iii. 10 Tr WH, after the strange but improbable
reading of codd. 8B and other authorities; [see WH.
Intr. § 365 and App. ad loc.]. b. without previous
search, to find (by chance), to fall in with: twa, Mt.
XVili. 28 ; xxvii. 32; Jn.i. 41 (42), 45 (46) ; v.14; ix. 35;
Acts xiii. 6; xviii. 2; xix. 1; xxviii. 14; foll. by ev w.
dat. of place, Jn. ii. 14. ri, Mt. xiii. 44; xvii. 27; Lk.
iv. 17; Jn. xii. 14; Acts xvii. 23; foll. by ev w. dat. of
place, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9.
with a pred. ace. is used of those who come or return to
a place, the predicate ptep. or adj. describing the state
or condition in which the pers. or thing met with is
found, or the action which one is found engaged in:
w. an adj., Acts v. 10; 2 Co. ix. 4; xii. 20; w. a
ptep. [ef. B. 301 (258)], Mt. xii. 44; xx. 6; xxi. 2;
xxiv. 46; xxvi. 40, 43; Mk. xi. 2; xiii.36; xiv. 37, 40;
Lk. ii. 12; vii. 10; viii. 35; xi. 25; xil. 37, 43; xix. 30;
Mxi 2s xxiv. 2, 38% Acts v. 233 pimerasex 27 sxx. 2;
xxiv. 12, 18; xxvii. 6; foll. by cams. Mk. xiv. 16: Lk.
C. evpiox@ Twd OF TL
evpokAvowy
xix. 832; xxii.13; foll. by a pred. substantive to which
dvra must be supplied, Acts xxiv. 5 [ef. W.§ 45, 6b.; B.
304 (261) ]. 2. tropically, to find by inquiry, thought,
examination, scrutiny, observation, hearing; to find out
by practice and experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un-
derstand: xatnyopiavy, Lk. vi. 7 [T Tr txt. WH. xarnyo-
petv]; teva foll. by ptcep. in the predicate, Acts xxiii. 29;
by ore, Ro. vii. 21; after an examination (eipagew), rwa
[ri] w. a pred. adj. [ptep.], Rev. iii. 2; of a judge: airiay
Oavarov, Acts xiii. 28; airiay, Kakov, adiknua €v tut, Jn.
XVili. 88; xix. 4,6; Acts xxiii. 9; xxiv. 20; after a com-
putation, w. an acc. of the price or measure, Acts xix.
19; xxvii. 28 ; after deliberation, 76 7i mounowor, Lk. xix.
48; TO mas KoAdowvTat aitovs, Acts iv. 21. Pass. evpi-
okopa. to be found, i.e. to be seen, be present: Lk. ix. 36
(Gen. xviii. 31); often like the Hebr. xx1) to be dis-
covered, recognized, detected, to show one’s self out, of
one’s character or state as found out by others (men,
God, or both), (cf. W. $65, 8): evpéOn ev yaorpi €xouca,
Mt. i. 18; ta etpeOdor xabas x. nets, 2 Co. xi. 123 €v-
pen rot 7 evrod2 eis Oavarov sc. ovaa, the commandment,
as I found by experience, brought death to me, Ro. vii.
10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none showed themselves as hay-
ing returned); Actsv. 39; 1Co. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co.v.
3; Gal. ii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. v. 4; rwi, dat. of the
pers. taking cognizance and judging [W.$31, 10; B.
187 (162)], 2 Pet. iii. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet cf. B.
l. c. and §133, 14; W.§31,4a.]; iva etpe0a ev aire i.e.
ev Xpiora, sc. dv, Phil. iii. 9; oxnpare eipebeis ws avOpo-
mos, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph. b. j. 3, 6, 1; so the Lat.
invenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; reperior, Tuscul. i. 39, 94).
evpioxew Oedv (Opp. to (nreiv adrdv, see (nréw, 1 ¢. [cef.
éx(ntéw, a.]), to get knowledge of, come to know, God, Acts
Xvil. 27; evpioxeraé (6 Oeds) run, discloses the knowledge
of himself to one, Sap. i. 2; ef. Grimm, exgt. Hdb. ad
loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch. i. § 5; Orig. ec. Cels.
7,42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. edpickerat 6
Geds is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im-
plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4,15; Jer. xxxvi.
(xxix.) 13); hence edpé@nv [L and Tr in br. WH mrg.
add ev] rots éué pn Cyrovor, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixv. 1, means,
acc. to Paul’s conception, I granted the knowledge and
deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ.,
to find for one’s self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure :
Avtpwou, Heb. ix. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage,
the Act. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense
(ef. B. 193 (167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.]: thy puyny, Mt. x.
39; xvi. 25; avdravow (Sir. xi. 19) rais Wuyais buar,
Mt. xi. 29; peravoias rérov, place for recalling the de-
cision, changing the mind, (of his father), Heb. xii. 17
[cf. W. 147 (139)]; oxnvopa rd bed, opportunity of
building a house for God, Acts vii. 46; ebp. ydpuv, grace,
favor, Heb. iv. 16; ydpw mapa 76 6€6, Lk. i. 30; evomov
tov Geov, Acts vii. 46; Zdeos mapa kuptiov, 2 Tim. i. 18;
C23 XX, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3; xxx. 27; xxxii. 6;
Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, ete.; 1 Esdr. viii. 4).
[Comp.: dv-eupicxa. |
eipo-KAtSwv, -wvos, 6, (fr. efpos the S. E. wind, and
262
eVTXNMLOTUYH
kAvowy a wave), a S. E. wind raising mighty waves: Acts
xxvii. 14 Ree. But respectable authorities read edpr-
kdvdev, preferred by Griesbach et al., from edpis broad,
and xdvdev, a wind causing broad waves (Germ. der
Breitspiilende, the Wide-washer); Etym. Magn. pet 72,
30 8. V. tupavs “tupav ydp €otiy 7 Tov avenou opodpa mvon,
Os kal edpukdvdwv Kadetra.” Others edpaxidoy, q. v.*
edpv-xwpos, -ov, (evpis broad, and yapa), spacious,
broad: Mt. vii. 13. (Sept.; Aristot. h. anim. 10, 5 [p.
637%, 32]; Diod. 19, 84; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3;
ey Apwalf 18,72)).))*
ev-o€Beva, -as, 9, (evoeBns), reverence, respect; in the
Bible everywhere piety towards God, godliness: Acts iii.
12; 1 Tim. ii. 25 iv. 7; 85) vi. 5 sq. 115 2 Tim. iii. 5:2
Pet. i. 3, 6 sq.; 9 kar evoeBeray didackaXia, the doctrine
that promotes godliness, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [see xard, I. 3 d.];
7 d\nOea 7 kar’ evoeBevav, the truth that leads to godli-
ness, Tit. i. 1; 1d puornpiov ths edoeBetas, the mystery
which is held by godliness and nourishes it, 1 Tim. iii.
16 ; in plur., aims and acts of godliness, 2 Pet. iii. 11; ef.
Pfleiderer, Paulinism. p. 477 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 209 sq. ].
(Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; often in Joseph. ;
Sept. Prov. i. 7; xiii. 11; Is. xi. 2; Sap.x.12; often in
4 Mace.; mpds rév Oedv, Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2; [mepi rd
Geiov] c. Ap. 1, 22, 2; eis Oeovs Kai yoveas, Plat. rep. 10
p- 615¢.) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 181.] *
ed-oeBew, -; (evens); to be evoeBns (pious), to act
piously or reverently (towards God, one’s country, magis-
trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rey-
erence is due); in prof. auth. foll. by eis, mepi, mpds twa;
rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (rods Oeovs) and
in the Bible: rév iScov otkov, 1 Tim. v. 4; Oedv, to wor-
ship God, Acts xvii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var.; xi. 5;
[Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 11, 1].*
evoeBns, -és, (ed and oeBopa), pious, dutiful (towards
God [A.V. devout, godly]; etoeBéw): Acts x. 2,7; xxii.
12 RG; 2 Pet. ii. 9. ((Theogn.], Pind., Tragg., Ar-
stph., Plat., al.; thrice in Sept. for 2°43 noble, gener-
ous, Isa. xxxii. 8; for pry, Is. xxiv. 16; xxvi. 7; often
in Sir. and 4 Mace.) [Cf£. Trench § xlviii-] *
evocBas, adv., piously, godly: Gyv, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit.
ii. 12. (Pind. [-8és], Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; 4 Mace.
vii. 21 [Fritzsche om. ].) *
evonpos, -ov, (ed and o7jpa a sign), well-marked, clear
and definite, distinct: Xdyos, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to
be understood]. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb.,
Plut.) *
evomAayXvos, -ov, (ed and omAdyxvor, q. V.), prop. havs
ing strong bowels ; once so in Hippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foés.,
i. 197 ed. Kiihn]; in bibl. and eccl. lang. compassionate,
tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32; 1 Pet. iii. 8; prec. Manass.
7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. § 29); Test. xii. Patr. test.
Zab. § 9; cf. Harnack’s note on Herm. vis. 1, 2].*
edoxnpdves, adv., (see evaynpav), in a seemly manner,
decently: 1 Co. xiv. 40; mepurareiv, Ro. xiii. 138; 1 Th.
iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4; Cyr.
1,18,;8 sq.) ale
edoxnpooivn, -ns, 7, (evaxnuwr, q. V.), charm or elegance
evo LOV
of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesty, seemliness
(Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.); of external charm,
comeliness: 1 Co. xii. 23.*
evox fpov, -ov, (cd, and oyna the figure, Lat. habitus) ;
1. of elegant figure, shapely, graceful, comely, bearing
one’s self becomingly in speech or behavior, (Eur., Arstph.,
Xen., Plat.): ra evaxjpova juar, the comely parts of the
body that need no covering (opp. to ra doxnpova nuar,
vs. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24; of morals: mpds rd evoynpov, to
promote decorum, 1 Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in-
fluential, wealthy, respectable, [R. V. of honorable estate]:
Mk. xv.43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph. de vita
sua § 9; Plut. parallel. Graec. et Rom. c. 15 p. 309 b.) *
edrévas, adv., (fr. c¥rovos, and this fr. ed and teivw to
stretch [cf. at full stretch, well strung, ete.]), vehemently,
forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8;
2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9,6; Arstph. Plut. 1095;
Diod., al.) *
evrparreAla, -as, 7, (fr. edvtpamedos, fr. ed, and tpérw to
turn: easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas-
antry, humor, facetiousness, ({Hippocr.], Plat. rep. 8 p.
563a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 3;
Plut., al.); in a bad sense, scurrility, ribaldry, low jesting
(in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4; in a mild-
er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 13; [1 edrpameAia memadevpevn
UBpis eoriv, rhet. 2, 12, 16 (cf. Cope in loc.) ; ef. Trench
§ xxxiv.; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays etc. p. 187 sqq.
(Speech at Eton) 1882].*
Eirvxos [i. e. fortunate; on accent cf. W. 51; Chan-
dler § 331 sq.], -ov, 6, Hutychus, a young man restored
to life by Paul: Acts xx. 9.*
evnpla, -as, 7, (evpnuos, q- V-), prop. the utterance of
good or auspicious words; hence good report, praise:
2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to dvognpia), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed.
Dind.]; Ael. v. h. 3,47. (In diff. senses in other auth.
fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat. down.) *
evpnpos, -ov, (ev and dyn), sounding well; uttering
words of good omen, speaking auspiciously: neut. plur.
evpnpa, things spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will
to others, Phil. iv. 8[A.V. of good report, (R. V. mrg.
gracious) ]. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
ev-popéw, -@: 1 aor. edtpdpnoa (Lcehm. niddpnoa, see
reff. in eddoxéw, init.) ; (evpopos [bearing well]); to be
fertile, bring forth plentifully: Lk. xii. 16. (Joseph. b. j.
2, 21, 2; Hippocr., Geop., al.) *
evppalvw; Pass., pres. evppaivouar; impf. edppawvounv
(Acts vii. 41, where a few codd. nidp. [cf. WH. App.
p- 162]); 1 aor. etppdvOnv and LT Tr WH nip. (Acts
ii. 26; see reff. in eddoxéw, init.) ; 1 fut. edppavOncopa ;
(ed and pny); in Sept. very often actively for Naw to
make joyful, and pass. for mv to be joyful, sometimes
for 12) to sing; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to glad-
den, make joyful: tiva, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to Aumeiv). Pass.
to be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32;
Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut.
xxxii. 43); Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); Rev. xi. 103 xii.
263
evyaploTéw
12; év rw, lo rejoice in, be delighted with, a thing, Acts
vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); emi tum, Rev. xviii. 20 L T
Tr WH (for Ree. ew airny); of the merriment of a feast,
Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxvii. 7);
with Aaympds added, to live sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19
(Hom. Od. 2, 311; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 12).*
Eidparns, -ov, 6, Euphrates, a large and celebrated
river, which rises in the mountains of Armenia Major,
flows through Assyria, Syria, Mesopotamia and the
city of Babylon, and empties into the Persian Gulf,
(Hebr. n5 [i. e. (prob.) ‘the great stream’ (Gen. i.
18); ef. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag d. Par. p. 169]): Rev.
ix,,14; xvi. 12. -[B. D. s..v. and reff. there.]*
evppootvn, -ns, 7, (evppor [well-minded, cheerful]), fr.
Hom. down; good cheer, joy, gladness: Acts ii. 28 (Ps.'
xv. (xvi.) 11); xiv. 17.*
edxapirtéw, -6; 1 aor. edyapiornca (Acts xxvii. 35)
and niyapiornoa (Ro. i. 21 GLT TrWH; see reff. in
evOokéw, init.) ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. edxapiorn On
(2 Co. i. 11); (edxaptoros, q. V-) 5 1. to be grateful,
feel thankful; so in the decree of the Byzantinesin Dem.
pro cor. p. 257, 2. 2. to give thanks (so Posid. ap.
Athen. 5 p. 213e.; Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.,
Epictet., al.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18 [W. 23 (22)]):
rivt, esp. T@ Ged, Lk. xvii. 16; Acts xxvii. 35; xxviii. 15;
Ro. xiv. 6; xvi. 4; 1 Co. xiv. 18 [see below]; Phil. i. 3;
Col. i. 8,12; Philem. 4; (w. the ace. [hence as nom. ]
in the passive, iva... imép trav adyabav 6 Beds edxapioTi-
rat, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 36). simply, so that ro
Ges must be added mentally: Ro. i. 21; [1 Co. xiv. 17];
1 Th. v. 18; esp. where the giving of thanks customary
at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating,
is spoken of: Mt. xv. 36; xxvi. 27; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 23;
Lk. xxii. 17,19; Jn. vi. 11, 23; 1 Co. xi. 24; edyapiorety
TO OeG Sia Ino. Xprorod, through Christ i.e. by Christ’s
help (because both the favors for which thanks are
given and the gratitude which prompts the thanks are
due to Christ [ef. W. 378 (354) note]): Ro. i. 8; vii. 25
R WH mrg.; Col. iii. 17; 16 Oe@ ev dvopare Xpiorov
(see dvona, 2e.), Eph. v. 20. Of that for or on account
of which thanks are given to God, we find—repi twos,
gen. of pers., concerning, with regard to one, [1 Th.
i. 2]; 2 Th. i. 3 [cf. Ellic. in loc.]; w. 67. added epex-
egetically, Ro. i. 8 (where R G inép); 2 Th. ii. 13; w.
addition of éxi and dat. of the thing for, on account
of, which, 1 Co. i. 4; tmép rivos, gen. of pers., Eph. i.
16; imép w. gen. of the thing, for, on account ef, 1 Co.
x. 30; Eph. v. 20; the matter or ground of the thanks-
giving is expressed by a foll. ére: Lk. xviii. 11; Jn. xi.
41; 1Co.i.14; 1 Th.ii.13; Rev. xi.17; or is added
asyndetically without dru, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Aake LT Tr
WH, for which R G \adGy, the ptep. declaring the cause
which prompts to thanksgiving [W. 345 sq. (324); B.
300 (258)]). Once edyap. 1, for a thing, in the pass.
2 Co. i. 11 [cf. B. 148 (130); W. 222 (209)]; in the
Fathers edxapioreiv te is to consecrate a thing by giving
thanks, to ‘bless’: 6 evxapiotnOeis dpros x. oivos, Justin
M. apol. 1, 65 fin.; evxapiornbeioa tpody, ibid. c. 66;
evyaptoTtia
eiciy ot evxapiorovet Wirdy Vdwp, Clem. Al. strom. i. p.
317 ed. Sylb.; [cf. Suicer, Thesaur. i. 1269. “The
words evxdpiotos, evxapioreiv, evyaptoria, occur in St.
Paul’s writings alone of the apostolic Epistles” (Bp.
Lghtft.; cf. Ellic. on Col. i. 12)].*
evxaptotla, -as, 7, (evxapioTos, q. V-) ; 1. thankful-
ness: decree of the Byzantines in Dem. p. 256, 19;
Polyb. 8, 14, 8; Add. to Esth. vi. 4 ed. Fritz.; 2 Macc.
ii. 27; Sir. xxxvii. 11; mpos twa, Diod. 17, 59; Joseph.
antte 3.3: 2. the giving of thanks: Acts xxiv. 3; for
God’s blessings, 1 Co. xiv. 16; 2 Co. iv. 15; Eph. v. 4
(cf. 1 Th. v. 18); Phil. iv. 6; Col. ii. 7; iv. 2; 1 Th. iii.
9; 1 Tim. iv. 3sq.; Rev. iv.9; vii.12; w. dat. of the
pers. to whom thanks are given: r@ deo (cf. W. § 31, 3;
[B. 180 (156)]; Kithner § 424, 1), 2 Co. ix. 11 (rod Oeov,
Sap. xvi. 28); in plur., 2 Co. ix. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 1.*
evxdpuotos, -ov, (ed and yapifouar), mindful of favors,
grateful, thankful: to God, Col. iii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3,
49; Plut.; al.); pleasing, agreeable (cf. Eng. grateful in
its secondary sense]: edvydporot Aoyot, pleasant conver-
sation, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,15; acceptable to others, winning :
yur edydpiaotos eyeiper avdpt do€av, Prov. xi. 16; liberal,
beneficent, Diod. 18, 28.*
vx, -Hs, 9, (evxopnat), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a pray-
er to God: Jas. v. 15. 2. a vow (often so in Sept. for
73) and 17), also for 41) consecration, see dyvi¢w) : evxnv
exer, to have taken a vow, Acts xviii. 18; with é@’
€avrov added (see emi, A. I. 1 f. p. 232%), Acts xxi. 23.*
evxopat; impf. niydunv (Ro. ix. 3) and edydpunv (Acts
xxvii. 29 T Tr, see eddoxéw init. [cf. Veitch s.v.; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 121]) ; [1 aor. mid. ev&aunv Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf.,
where others read the opt. -aiunv; depon. verb, cf. W.
§ 38, 7]; 1. to pray to God (Sept. in this sense for
Sbann and Ny): 7G Oe@ (as very often in class. Grk.
fr. Hom. down [ef. W. 212 (199); B. 177 (154)]), foll.
by ace. w. inf., Acts xxvi. 29; mpds rov Oedv (Xen. mem.
1, 3, 2; symp. 4, 55; often in Sept.), foll. by ace. w. inf.
2 Co. xiii. 7; tmép w. gen. of pers., for one, Jas. v. 16
where L WH txt. Tr mrg. mpoce’'yeoOe (Xen. mem. 2, 2,
10). [Syn. see airéa, fin. ] 2. to wish: ri, 2 Co. xiii.
9; foll. by ace. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re-
ligious sense, to pray, pray for, in both the preceding
pass.]; Acts xxvii. 29; ndxdpunv (on this use of the impf.
ef. W. 283 (266); B.§ 139,15; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philem.
13]) etvat, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [Come.: mpoo-
evxopat. | *
ev-xpyoros, -ov, (ed and ypdopac), easy to make use of,
useful: w. dat. of pers. 2 Tim. ii. 21; opp. to aypnatos,
Philem. 11; ets rs, for a thing, 2 Tim.iv.11. (Diod. 5,
40; Sap. xiii. 13; mpds 71, Xen. mem. 3, 8, 5.)*
etx ew, -@; (etypvxos); to be of good courage, to be of
a cheerful spirit: Phil. ii. 19. (Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 9;
[Poll. 3, 28 § 135 fin.]; in epitaphs, edoye! i. gq. Lat.
have pia anima !)*
evwSia, -as, 7, (fr. evadns; and this fr. ed and da, pf.
édada); a. asweet smell, fragrance, (Xen., Plat., Plut.,
Hdian., al.); metaph. Xpiorod evwdia eopev TH Ged, i. e.
(dropping the fig.) our efficiency in which the power of
264
"Edecos
Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to God, 2 Co.
ii. 15. b. a fragrant or sweet-smelling thing, incense :
Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, ete.; hence dopz edwdias, an
odor of something sweet-smelling, in Sept. often for
Mim 3-M, an odor of acquiescence, satisfaction; a sweet
odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex.
xxix. 18; Lev.i. 9, 13, 17, ete., agreeably to the ancient
[anthropopathic] notion that God smells and is pleased
with the odor of sacrifices, Gen. viii. 21; in the N. T.
by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a thing well-
pleasing to God: Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. 605 (562)
cf. 237 (222)].*
[Biwsia, -as, Phil. iv. 2 Rec. for Evodia, q. v.]
evavupos, -ov, (ed and dvoya) ; 1. of good name
(Hes., Pind.), and of good omen (Plat. polit. p. 302 d.;
legg. 6 p. 754 e.); in the latter sense used in taking
auguries ; but those omens were euphemistically called
evovupa which in fact were regarded as unlucky, i. e.
which came from the left, sinister omens (for which
a good name was desired); hence 2. left (so fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down): Acts xxi. 3; Rev. x. 2; e&
evovipov [cf. W. § 27,3; § 19s. v. de&ia; B. 89 (78)],
on the left hand (to the left): Mt. xx. 21, 23; xxv. 33,
41; xxvii. 38; Mk. x. 37 [RGL], 40; xv. 27.*
ép-ddAopat; 2 aor. ptep. epadrdpevos LT Tr WH; (ei
and d\Aopuat, q. v-); fr. Hom. down; to leap upon, spring
upon: emt twa, Acts xix. 16 [here RG pres. ptep.];
(1S. 216 siacine) Sevi-all3) 4
ép-drraf [Treg. in Heb. ef’ dma&; cf. Lipsius, gram.
Unters. p. 127], adv., (fr. émi and dma& [cf. W. 422
(398); B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. e. a. our all
at once: 1 Co. xv. 6. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 10;
Heb. vii. 27; ix.12; x.10. (Lcian., Dio Cass., al.) *
édeiSov, see emetdov.
’"Edecivos, -n, -ov, Ephesian: Rev. ii. 1 Rec.*
*Edéoros, -a, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. e. a native or in-
habitant of Ephesus: Acts xix. 28, 34 sq.; xxi. 29.*
"Edeoos, -ov, 7, “phesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor,
capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular
Asia [see ’Acia], situated on the Icarian Sea between
Smyrna and Miletus. Its chief splendor and renown
came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned
one of the wonders of the world. It was burned down
B. C. 356 by Herostratus, rebuilt at the common expense
of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan.
7, 2,6sq.; Liv. 1,45; Plin. h.n. 5, 29 (31); 36,14 (21)),
and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly
destroyed by,the Goths. At Ephesus the apostle Paul
founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise
is awarded in Rev. ii. 1 sqq. The name of the city oc-
curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24; xix.1,17, 26; xx. 16 sq.;
1 Co. xv. 32; xvi. 8; Eph. i. 1 (where ev ’Edéo@ is omitted
by cod. Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by T
WH Trmrg.; see WH. App. ad loc.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Ephesians, The Ep. to the]); 1 Tim. i. 3; 2 Tim. i. 18;
iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (acc. toG LT Tr WH) ii. 1.
Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena
1874; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877) ].*
epevperys
édh-evperijs, -ov, 6, (€pevpioxe to find out), an inventor,
contriver, (Anacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran.
1499): xaxaov, Ro. i. 30 (kaxév ebperai, Philo in Flace.
64 mid.; 6 xaway ddicnuarwy evperns, ibid. § 10; maons
kakias evperns, 2 Mace. vii. 31; Sejanus facinorum om-
nium repertor, Tacit. ann. 4, 11).*
é-npepla, -as, 7, (epnpepros, -ov, by day, lasting or act-
ing for a day, daily), a word not found in prof. auth. ;
Sept. in Chron. and Neh. ; 1. a service limited to
a stated series of days (cf. Germ. Tagdienst, Wochen-
dienst); so used of the service of the priests and Levites:
Neh. xiii. 30; 1 Chr. xxv. 8; 2 Chr. xiii. 10, etc. 2;
the class or course itself of priests who for a week at a time
performed the duties of the priestly office (Germ. Wdoch-
nerzunft): 1 Chr. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 13, etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 2,
15; so twice in the N. T.: Lk. i. 5,8. For David di-
vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which
in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en-
tire week from sabbath to sabbath, 1 Chr. xxiv.4; 2 Chr.
viii. 14; Neh. xii. 24; these classes Josephus calls rarpuai
and epnpepides, antt. 7, 14,7; de vita sua 1; Suidas, éepn-
pepia: 1» marpid. A€yerar Se kal 7 THS Nuepas Aetroupyia.
Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD. s. v.
Priests; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii. ]*
é-fepos, -ov, (i. q. 6 emt nuépav wv) ; 1. lasting for
a day (Pind., Hippocr., Plut., Galen.; al.). 2. daily:
9 tpop7 (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hal. 8, 41; Aristid. ii. p.
398 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15.*
Eide, see eretdov.
éd-txvéopat, -odwar; 2 aor. inf. epixeoOa; [fr. Hom.
down]; to come to: axpe w. gen. of pers. 2 Co. x. 13; to
reach: ets twa, ibid. 14.*
éb-lorypt: 2 aor. emeatny, ptcp. émioras, impv. émiarnh;
pf. ptep. epearas; to place at, place upon, place over; in
the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indic. 3 pers. sing.
éniorata (for édior.), 1 Th. v. 3 T Tr WH; see reff.
s. v. apeidov] and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf.
and 2 aor. (see aviornpt); to stand by, be present: LK. ii.
38; Acts xxii. 20; emdvw w-gen.of pers. to stand over
one, place one’s self above, Lk. iv. 39; used esp. of per-
sons coming upon one suddenly: simply, Lk. x. 40; xx.
1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii.
7; w. dat. of pers., Acts iv. 1; xxiii. 11; of the advent
of angels, Lk. ii. 9; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Leian. dial.
deor. 17,1; freq. of dreams, as Hom. Il. 10, 496; 23,
106; Hdt. 1, 34; al.); w. dat. of place, Acts xvii. 5;
foll. by émi with acc. of place, Acts x.17; xi. 11; of
evils coming upon one: w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see
above]; émi twa, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9; xix. 1; Soph.
O. R. 777; Thue. 3, 82). i. q. to be at hand i.e. be
ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, ef. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547;
Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand i.e. impend: of time, 2
Tim. iv. 6. to come on, of rain, Acts xxviii. 2. [Comp.:
kat-, curehiornt. | *
[épvldtos, see aidvidios. |
"Edpaty or (so R Tr) ’Edpaip [cf. I, ¢, fin.], (8 LH
‘Eqpep, Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop. name of
a city situated acc. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow
265
exo
and Parthey, p. 196, 18, twenty], acc. to Jerome twenty
miles from Jerusalem; acc. to Joseph. b. j. 4, 9, 9 not
far from Bethel; conjectured by Robinson (Palest. i.
444 sq. [cf. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald
et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called
et-Taiyibeh, a short day’s journey N. E. of Jerusalem:
Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim iii. p. 7 sq.
[Eng. trans. v. 9; esp. Schiirer, Gesch. i. 183].”
eppada, ephphatha, Aram. NNDNS (the ethpaal impv.
of the verb md, Hebr. Nd, to open), be thou opened
(i. e. receive the power of hearing; the ears of the deaf
and the eyes of the blind being considered as closed) : Mk.
vii. 34. [See Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.] *
€x8és and (Rec., so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) y6és (on
which forms cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq.; [esp. Ruth-
erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.]; Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr.
ii. 2 p. 1000; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81; W. pp. 24,45; B. 72
(63) ]), adv., yesterday: Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28; of time
just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph. down.]*
€xOpa, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. éyApds), enmity: Lk. xxiii.
12; Eph. ii. 14 (15), 16; plur. Gal. v. 20; €y6pa (Lehm.
éxOpa fem. adj. [Vulg. inimica]) Oeot, towards God, Jas.
iv. 4 (where Tdf. r6 Oe@) ; e's Oedv, Ro. viii. 7; by meton.
i. q. cause of enmity, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer.
(From Pind. down.) ]*
ex Opds, -d, -dv, (€xOos hatred) ; Sept. numberless times
for 2°), also for >¥, several times for x3iv and N2w?D, a
hater ; 1. passively, hated, odious, hateful (in Hom.
only in this sense): Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to dyamnrés). 2.
actively, hostile, hating and opposing another: 1 Co. xv.
25; 2 Th. iii. 15; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed,
Jas. iv. 4 Lchm.; Gal. iv. 16, cf. Meyer or Wieseler on
the latter pass. used of men as at enmity with God by
their sin: Ro. v. 10 (ef. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21; Jas. iv. 4)
[but many take éy@p. here (as in xi. 28, see 1 above) pas-
sively; cf. Meyer]; r7 dcavoia, opposing (God) in the
mind, Col. i. 21; éyOpds dvOpemos, a man that is hostile,
a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28; 6 éy@pés, the hostile one
(well known to you), i. e. kar’ e€oynv the devil, the most
bitter enemy of the divine government: Lk. x. 19, cf.
Mt. xiii. 39 (and eccl. writ.). 6 éyOpds (and é€yOpds) sub-
stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst.,
is trans. in A. V., exc. twice (R. V. once) foe: €oxaros
€xOpés, 1 Co. xv. 26]: w. gen. of the pers. to whom one
is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq.; x. 36; xiii. 25; Lk.i. [71], 74;
Vi. 27, 35; xix. 27,43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in
the words of Ps. cix. (ex.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44; Mk.
xii. 36; Lk. xx. 43; Actsii. 35; 1 Co. xv. 25 [Lbr.; al.
om. gen. (see above)]; Heb. i. 13; x. 13. w. gen. of
the thing: Acts xiii. 10; tod cravpov tov Xpiorov, who
given up to their evil passions evade the obligations
imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.*
éxuSva, -ns, 9, a viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hdt.,
Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.) ; yevyqpara éxidvav offspring
of vipers (anguigenae, Ovid, metam. 3,531), addressed to
cunning, malignant, wicked men: Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34;
KXG Go lake lle d
txw; fut. 2; impf. efyov, [1 pers. plur. efyapev, 2 Jn.
y”
EXY@
5 T Tr WH], 3 pers. plur. e¢yav (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH;
Rev. ix. 8 LT Tr WH;; but cf. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35))
and etyooav (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bttm.
in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his
N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Taf.
Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; cf. doAuw]) ; pres.
mid. ptcp. éxopnevos; to have,—with 2 aor. act. €oyov;
pf. €oynxa ;
I. Transitively. 1. to have i. q. to hold; a. to
have (hold) in the hand: ri ev rh yeupi, Rev. i. 163 vi. 5;
x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6,
etc.; Heb. viii. 3. _b. in the sense of wearing (Lat.
gestare) ; of garments, armsand the like: ro évdupa, Mt.
ili. 4; xxii. 12; xara xehadjs yor, sc. ri, having a cov-
ering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head
covered [B. § 130, 5; W. § 47, k. ef. 594 (552)], 1 Co.
xi. 4; @mpaxas, Rev. ix. 17; payarpay, Jn. xviii. 10; add,
Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3; of a tree having (bearing)
leaves, Mk. xi. 13; ev yaorpi €yew, sc. €uBpvov, to be
pregnant [ef. W. 594 (552); B. 144 (126)], (see yaornp,
2).
paptupiav, 1 Jn. v.10; ev xapdia éxew twa, to have (carry)
one in one’s heart, to love one constantly, Phil.i. 7. ¢.
trop. to have (hold) possession of the mind ; said of alarm,
agitating emotions, etc.: efyev avras Tpopos K. éxaTaats,
Mk. xvi. 8 (Job xxi. 6; Is. xiii. 8, and often in prof.
auth.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1294 sq.; [L. and S.s. v. A. I.
8]). . to hold fast, keep: 4 pva cov, hv etxov drroket-
pevny ev covdapio, Lk. xix. 20; trop. roy Oedv yew ev
émtyvooet, Ro. i. 28; to keep in mind, tds éevrodds, Jn.
xiv. 21 (see évrodn, sub fin.) ; rHv paprtupiav, Rev. vi. 9;
Metaph. ev éavr@ Exew tO amoxpiya, 2 Co. i. 93 rH
xii. 17; xix. 103 ro puornpiov Ths mictews ev Kabapa ovvet-
djoe, 1 Tim. ili. 9; tror’rwow byiavovtwy Aoywr, 2 Tim.
i. 13. e. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com-
prise, involve: €pyov, Jas. i. 4; ii. 17; kodaow, 1 Jn. iv.
18; pucOarodociay, Heb. x. 35 (Sap. viii. 16). See exx.
fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq.; [L. and S. s. v.
A.I. 8 and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aestimo, to re-
gard, consider, hold as, [but this sense is still denied by
Meyer, on Lk. as below; Mt. xiv. 5]: twa w. ace. of the
predicate, €ye pe mapyntnuéevov, have me excused, Lk. xiv.
18; rea as mpopytny, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, (€xeu Iavviy x.
"lauBpny ws Oeovs, Ev. Nicod. 5) ; twa évripov (see évtipos),
Phil. ii. 29; rHv Yuynv pov [G om. pov] rystav epavte, Acts
xx. 24 RG} rwa eis rpopyrny (a Hebraism [see eis, B. II.
3c. y. fin.]), for a prophet, Mt. xxi.46 L T Tr WH, cf. B.
§ 131, 73 twa, dre dvrws [T Tr WH dvrws, dre ete.] mpo-
pnts jv, Mk. xi. 32, cf. B. § 151, 1 a.; [W. § 66, 5 a.].
2. to have i.q.to own, possess; a. external things
such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils,
goods, food, ete.: as rév Biov, Lk. xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17;
x. 21; dyada, Lk. xii. 19; mpoBara, Lk. xv. 4; Jn. x. 16;
dpaypds, Lk. xv. 8; mdota, Rev. xviii. 19; kAnpovopiar,
Eph. v. 5; [ef. Mt. xxi. 38 LT Tr WH, where R G xard-
oxapev|; pepos foll. by ev w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xx.
6; @vovacrnprov, Heb. xiii. 10; daa éyers, Mk. x. 21; xii.
266
”
EX@
44; Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xviii. 25; pndev, 2 Co. vi. 10; ri dé
éxets, 6 etc. 1 Co. iv. 7; with a pred. ace. added, elyov
dravra kowd, Acts ii. 44; absol. éyew, to have property,
to be rich: ov« and py gyew [A. V. to have not], to be
destitute, be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; xxv.29; Mk. iv. 25; Lk.
viii. 18; xix. 26; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Co. viii. 12, (Neh. viii.
10; 1 Esdr. ix. 51, 54; Sir. xiii. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth.
in Passow s. v. p. 1295”; [L. and 8. s.v. A. I. 1; ef. W.
594 (552) ]); 逫 rod €xew, in proportion to your means
[see éx, II. 13 fin.], 2 Co. viii. 11. b. Under the head
of possession belongs the phrase éyew td as com-
monly used of those joined to any one by the bonds of
nature, blood, marriage, friendship, duty, law, compact,
and the like: marépa, Jn. viii. 41; adedqovs, Lk. xvi. 28;
avSpa (a husband), Jn. iv. 17 sq.; Gal. iv. 27; yuvaixa, 1
Co. vii. 2,12 sq. 29; réxva, Mt. xxi. 28; xxii. 24; 1 Tim.
ili.4; Tit. 1.6; viovs, Gal. iv. 22; omépya, offspring, Mt.
Xxli. 25; ynpas, 1 Tim. v. 16; daoOevoivras, Lk. iv. 40;
pidrov, Lk. xi. 5; madaywyovs, 1 Co. iv. 15; éyew Kvprov,
to have (be subject to) a master, Col. iv. 1; deamorny, 1
Tim. vi. 2; Baowdéa, Jn. xix.15; with ed’ éavrav added,
Rey. ix. 11; €xee tov kpivovra avrov, Jn. xii. 48; Exew
oikovopov, Lk. xvi. 1; dovdAov, Lk. xvii. 7; dpytepea, Heb.
iv. 14; viii. 1; moweva, Mt. ix. 36; yev im euavtov orpa-
tiaras, Lk. vii. 8; éxew Tov vidy x. tov marépa, to be in
living union with the Son (Christ) and the Father by
faith, knowledge, profession, 1 Jn. ii. 23; (v.12); 2Jn.9.
With two accusatives, one of which serves as a predicate:
matépa Tov ABpadp, Abraham for our father, Mt. iii. 9;
add, Acts xiii. 5; Phil. iii. 17; Heb. xii. 9; few ria
yuvaixa, to have (use) a woman (unlawfully) as a wife,
Mt. xiv. 4; Mk. vi. 18; 1 Co. v. 1 [where see Meyer], (of
lawful marriage, Xen. Cyr. 1, 5,4). oc. of attend-
ance or companionship: é€yew twa pe® Eavrod, Mt.
xv: 80s) xxvi. 115) Mkiii.| 19isuxivi) 7i;! Intex. 82 Gat
éxew re to have athing in readiness, have at hand, have in
store: ovK €xopev ei py mevte Gprous, Mt. xiv. 17; add, xv.
34; Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.]; iv. 11; xii. 35; 1 Co. xi. 22; xiv.
4 ¢ fs ,’ Ul > lod E = 2 ~
26; ovkK €xw, & mapabnow aire, Lk. xi. 6; rod cuvdtw
Tovs Kaprovs pov, Lk. xii. 17; ri (cf. B. § 139, 58) dayaor,
Mk. viii. 1 sq.; ¢yeev teva, to have one at hand, be able to
make use of : Moicéak. t. mpopnras, Lk. xvi. 29; mapa-
kAnrov, 1 Jn. ii. 1; paptupas, Heb. xii. 1; ovdێva ey@ ete.
Phil. ii. 20; dvOpzov, vaete. Jn. v. 7. e. a person or
thing is said ¢yew those things which are its parts or
are members of his body: as yeipas, médas, d6Oadpors,
Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 48, 45,47; ods, Rev. ii. 7, 11,
ete.; dra, Mt. xi. 15; Mk. vii. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the
vs.]; viii. 18; péAn, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; wdpka x.
darea, Lk. xxiv. 89; dxpoBvoriav, Acts xi. 3; an animal
is said ¢yew head, horns, wings, etc.: Rev. iv. 7 sq.; v.
6; viii. 9; ix. 8 sqq.; xii. 3, ete.; a house, city, or wall,
éyew Oepedrious, Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14; oraow, Heb.
ix. 8; [add éemorodjv éxovcay (RG meptéx.) Tov tirov
rovrov, Acts xxiii. 25]. f. one is said to have the dis-
eases or other ills with which he is affected or af-
flieted: paorvyas, Mk. iii. 10; do@eveias, Acts xxviii. 9;
wounds, Rey. xiii. 14; Odi, Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28;
EXO
Rev. ii. 10. Here belong tke expressions daiponov éxeuw,
to be possessed by a demon, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 335 viii.
27; Jn. vii. 20; viii. 48 sq. 52; x..20; BeedCeBovd, Mk.
iii. 22; mvedpa dxadapror, Mk. iii. 30; vii. 25; Lk. iv. 33;
Acts viii. 7; mvedpa movnpov, Acts xix. 13; mvetpa aabe-
veias, i. e. ademon causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 11; mvedpa
adadov, Mk. ix. 17; Aeye@va, Mk. v.15. — g. one is said
to have intellectual or spiritual faculties, endow-
ments, virtues, sensations, desires, emotions,
affections, faults, defects, ete. : copiav, Rev. xvii.
9; yvadou, 1 Co. viii. 1, 10; xapiopara, Ro. xii. 6 5 mpo-
gnreiav, 1 Co. xiii. 2; rior, Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21; Mk.
me. ke xviie Acts’ xiv. 9; Ro; xiv: 225-2 Ting
19; Philem. 53; wemoiOnow, 2 Co. iii. 4; Phil. ili. 4; map-
pynoiav, Philem. 8; Heb. x. 19; 1 Jn. ii. 285 iii. 215 iv. 17;
v. 14; ayamny, Jn.v. 42; xiii. 35; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iv. 16;
1 Co. xiii. 1 sqq.; 2 Co. ii.4; Phil. ii. 2; Philem. 5; 1
Pet. iv. 8; éAmida (see éAmis, 2 p. 206* mid.) ; (prov, zeal,
Ro. x. 2; envy, jealousy (€v r7 capdia), Jas. iil. 14 5 yap
rwi, to be thankful to one, Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2
Tim. i. 3; Ovpov, Rev. xii. 12; tmopovny, Rev. ii. 3;
poBor, 1 Tim. v. 20; xapav, Philem. 7 [Rec." xdpw]; 3
Jn. 4 [WH txt. yap]; Admnv, Jn. xvi. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3;
Phil. ii. 27; emOupiav, Phil. i. 23; éemmodiav, Ro. xv. 23;
pveiav twos, 1 Th. iii. 6. cuveidnorv Kadny, ayadny,
dmpooxonoy: Acts xxiv. 16; 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16;
Heb. xiii. 18; cuveidyow dpaptiav, Heb. x. 2; dyvwciav
Oeow, 1 Co. xv. 34; daoGeverav, Heb. vii. 28; dyapriav, Jn.
ix. 41; xv. 22, ete. h. of age and time: 7Asxiay,
mature years (A. V. to be of age), Jn. ix. 21, 23; érn, to
have (completed) years, be years old, Jn. viii. 57; with
év ru added : in a state or condition, Jn. v. 5 [W. 256
(240) note ?; B. § 147, 11]; in a place, réooapas npeépas
ev T@ pnpet@, Jn. xi. 17; beginning or end, or both, Heb.
vii. 3; Mk. iii. 26; Lk. xxii. 37 [see réAos, 1a.]. i. €yew
rt issaid of opportunities, bonefits, advantages,
conveniences, which one enjoys or can make use of:
Bdbos yns, Mt. xiii. 5; yyy mohAnv, Mk. iv. 5; ixuada, Lk. viii.
6; katpov, Gal. vi. 10; Heb. i. 15; Rev. xii. 12; eEovaiay,
see e€ovgia, passim; eipiynv dua revos, Ro. v. 1 (where we
must read ¢youev, not ~vith TTrWHLmrg. (cf. WH.
Intr. § 404) | éyaper) ; AevOepiav, Gal. ii. 45 mvedpa Acod,
1 Co. vii. 40; mvedpa Xprorod, Ro. viii. 9; vodv Xpicrod,
1Co. ii. 16; Conv, Jn. v. 4%; x. 10; xx. 313 rHv Cony, 1
Jn. v.12; fwnv aimmov, Mt. xix. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36
[cf. W. 266 (249)]; v.24, 39; vi.49,47, 54; 1Jn.v. 13;
¢mayyedtas, 2 Co. vii. 1: Heb. vii. 6; proOov, Mt. v. 46;
vi. 1; 1 Co.ix.17; ra airnuara, the things which we have
asked, 1 Jn. v. 15; @rawvov, Ro. xiii. ); repny, Jn. iv. 44;
Heb. iii. 3; Adyov codias, a reputation for wisdom, Col.
ii. 23 [see Adyos, I. 5 fin.]; kaptrov, Ro. i. 1°35 vi. 21 sq. 3
xapu, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. WH txt. yapav];
xapiopa, 1 Co. vii. 7; mpooaywyn”, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12;
avdravow, Rev. iv. 8; xiv. 11; dmoAavolv tivos, Heb. xi.
25; mpopacw, Jn. xv. 22; kavynua, that of which one
may glory, Ro. iv. 2; Gal. vi. 4; kavxnow, Ro. xv. 17.
k. yew tT is used of one on whom something has been
laid, on whom it is incumbent as something to be
267
EXw
borne, observed, performed, discharged: avayxny, 1 Co.
vii. 37; dvaykny foll. by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 (RL
br. Tr mrg. br.]; Heb. vii. 27; ypeiav reds (see xpeta, 1);
evxnv ep éavtav, Acts xxi. 23 ; vopov, Jn. xix. 7; evroAny,
2 Jn. 5; Heb. vii. 5; emeraynv, 1 Co. vii. 25; dcaxoviar,
2 Co. iv.1; mpakw, Ro. xii. 4; dydva, Phil. i. 30; Col. ii.
1; €ykAnpa, Acts xxiii. 29; xpiva, 1 Tim. v. 12. 1.
éxew te is used of one to whom something has been in-
trusted: ras kets, Rev.i. 18; iii. 7; rd yAwoooxopor,
Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29. m. in reference to complaints
and disputes the foll. phrases are used: ¢yw m [or
without an acc., cf. B. 144 (126)] xara twos, to have
something to bring forward against one, to have some-
thing to complain of in one, Mt. v. 23; Mk. xi. 25; foll.
by orc, Rev. ii. 45 €y@ xara cod oXLya, ore etc. ib. 14 [here
L WH mrg. om. drt], 20 [here GL T Tr WH om. 62.];
éyw te mpds tiva, to have some accusation to bring against
one, Acts xxiv. 19; ov¢ntnow ev éavtois, Acts xxviii. 29
[Rec.]; ¢ytnpata mpds twa, Acts xxv. 193; Adyov exew
mpds twa, Acts xix. 38; mpaypa mpds twa, 1 Co. vi. 1;
popudiy mpds twa, Col. iii. 13; kpivara pera tevos, 1 Co. vi.
7. n. phrases of various kinds: €yew twa kata mpdcw-
mov, to have one before him, in his presence, [ A. V. face to
face; see mpdawmov, 1 a.], Acts xxv. 16; Kolrny €k Twos,
to conceive by one, Ro. ix. 10; rovro €yets, dre etc. thou
hast this (which is praiseworthy [cf. W. 595 (553) ]) that
ete. Rev. ii. 6; év uot ovk exer ovdev, hath nothing in me
which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ. er
hat mir nichts an), Jn. xiv. 30; 6 €orw .. . caBBarov €xov
60dv, a sabbath-day’s journey distant (for the distance is
something which the distant place has, as it were), Acts
i. 12; cf. Kypke ad loc. 0. ¢y with an inf. [W. 333
(313); B. 251 (216)], a. like the Lat. habeo quod w. the
subjunc., i. q. to be able: éyw dmodovrat, Mt. xviii. 25; Lk.
vii. 42; xiv. 14; ri mounoa, Lk. xii. 4; oddev eiyov avrecrrety,
they had nothing to ppose (could say nothing against
it), Acts iv. 14; kar’ ovdevds elye peifovos dudca, Heb.
vi. 13; add, Jn. viii. 3 (Rec.); Acts xxv. 26 [cf. B. as
above]; Eph. iv. 28; Tit. ii. 8; 2 Pet. i. 15; the inf. is
om. and to be supplied fr. the context: 6 éoyxev, sc.
moujoat, Mk. xiv. 8; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow
s. v. p- 1297"; [L. and S.s.v. A. III. 1]. 8B. is used of
what there is a certain necessity for doing: Barricpa
exo BanricOjvat, Lk. xii.50; Exo ool te eimew, vil. 40;
drayyeida, Acts xxiii. 17,19; AadAjoat, 18; Katyyopjoat,
Acts xxviii. 19; moAAa ypddew, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13.
II. Intransitively. a. (Lat. me habeo) to hold one’s
self or find one’s self so and so, to be in such or such a
condition : éroiuws éyw, to be ready, foll. by inf., Acts
xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1 Pet. iv.5 [not WH]; écxdrws
(see éoyaras), Mk. v. 23; kaxas, to be sick, Mt. iv. 24:
Vili. 16; ix. 12; [xvii. 15 L Trtxt. WH txt. ], ete.; cadres,
to be well, Mk. xvi. 18; xouydrepov, to be better, Jn. iv.
52; mas, Acts xv. 36; év éroiua, foll. by inf., 2 Co. x. 6.
b. impersonally: dos exer, it is otherwise, 1 Tim. v.
25; ovrws, Acts vii. 1; xii. 15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9; 1d vov
éyov, as things now are, for the present, Acts xxiv. 25
(Tob. vii. 11, and exx. fr. later prof. auth. in Kypke,
@
¢g
€w@s
Observy. ii. p. 124; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 9; [cf. W. 463
(432).
III. Mid. éyouai ruvos (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down),
prop. to hold one’s self to a thing, to lay hold of a thing,
to adhere or cling to; to be closely joined to a pers. or
thing [cf. W. 202 (190); B. 192 (166 sq.), 161 (140)]:
Ta €xoueva THs Tw@Tnpias, Vulg. viciniora saluti, connected
with salvation, or which lead to it, Heb. vi. 9, where cf.
Bleek; 6 éxopevos, near, adjoining, neighboring, border-
ing, next: of place, kwpomeAes, Mk. i. 38 (vqc0s, Isocr.
paneg. § 96; of eyouevor, neighbors, Hdt. 1, 134); of
time, 7H éxopern sc. jpépa, the following day, Lk. xiii. 33 ;
Acts xx. 15, (1 Macc. iv. 28; Polyb. 3, 112,1; 5,13, 9);
with juepa added, Acts xxi. 26; caSBdrw, Acts xiii. 44
(where R T Tr WH txt. epyopevm) ; evravrd, 1 Mace. iv.
28 (with var. épyopevw ev.) ; Tod exouevou Erovs, Thue. 6,
3. [ComMpP.: ay, mpoo-av-, avt-, amr-, €V-, €7-, KAT-, MET-, TaAp-,
TEpt-, Tpo-, Mpoo-, Tuv-, UTEp-, UT-EXa- |
éws, a particle marking a limit, and
I. as a CoNJUNCTION signifying 1. the tempo-
ral terminus ad quem, Zill, until, (Lat. donec, usque
dum); asin the best writ. a. with an indie. pret.,
where something is spoken of which continued up to a
certain time: Mt. ii. 9 (€os... €otn [e€orabn L T TrWH)) ;
xxiv. 39, (1 Macc. x. 50; Sap. x. 14, ete.). b. with av
and the aor. subjune. (equiv. to the Lat. fut. perf.), where
it is left doubtful when that will take place till which it
is said a thing wil! continue [cf. W. § 42, 5]: to éxei,
€ws dv eirw oot, Mt. ii. 13; add, v. 18; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk.
vi. 10; xii. 36; Lk. xvii.8; xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Heb. i.
13; after a negative sentence: Mt. v. 18, 26; x. 23 [T
WH om. dv]; xii. 20; xvi. 28; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 34; Mk.
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; xxi. 32; 1 Co.iv.5; with the aor. subj.
without the addition of dv: Mk. vi. 45 RG; xiv. 32 [here
Trmrg.fut.]; Lk. xv.4; [xii.59TTrWH; xxii. 34.LT
Tr WH); 2 Th. ii. 7; Heb. x. 13; Rev. vi. 11 [Rece. éws
00]; ov ave(noav ews teheoO7 Ta xia Erm, did not live
again till the thousand years had been finished (elapst
Suerint), Rev. xx.5 Rec. Cf. W. § 41 b. 3. oc. more
rarely used with the indic. pres. where the aor. subj. might
have been expected [ W. u.s.; B. 231 (199)]: so four times
€ws €pxouat, Lk. xix. 13 (where L T Tr WH eva for éas,
but cf. Bleek ad loc.) ; Jn. xxi. 22 sq.; 1 Tim. iv. 13; €as
amodver, Mk. vi. 45 LT Tr WH, for R G dzodvon (the
indic. being due to a blending of dir. and indir. disc.; as
in Plut. Lycurg. 29, 3 deity ody exeivous éupevew tois Kabe-
OTGot vopos...€wsemavecw). a. once with the indic.
fut., acc. to an improbable reading in Lk. xiii. 35: €ws 7&ee
Tdf., Gos av 7fee Lehm., for RG éws ay 7&3 [but WH
(omitting av én dre) read €ws eimnre; Tr om. ay and br.
7 6.; cf. B. 231 (199) sq.]. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down, as long as, while, foll. by the indic. in all
tenses, —in the N. T. only in the pres. : &ws nuéepa eoriv,
Jn. ix. 4 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. os]; gos (LT Tr WH as)
To has €xere, Jn. xii. 35 sq., (€ws Ere Has ear, Plat.
Phaedo p. 89 c.) ; [Mk. vi. 45 (cf. c. above) ].
I. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an
ADVERB. Lat. usoue ad; and 1. used of a tempo-
268
€ws
ralterminus ad quem, until, (unto); a. like a prep
osition, w. a gen. of time [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]:
€ws ai@vos, Lk. i. 55 Grsb. (Ezek. xxv. 15 Alex.; 1 Chr.
xvii. 16; Sir. xvi. 26 Fritz.; xxiv. 9, etc.); tas quepas,
Mt. xxvi. 29; xxvii. 64; Lk. i. 80; Acts i. 22 [Tdf. dype];
Ro. xi. 8, etc.; Spas, Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. xxiii.
44; trys mevtnxootis, 1 Co. xvi. 8; réAous, 1 Co.i. 8; 2 Co.
i.135 Ths onpepov sc. juepas, Mt. xxvii. 8; rod viv, Mt.
xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19, (1 Mace. ii. 33); ynpa ews érap
oydonk. Tecodpwy a widow (who had attained) even unto
eighty-four years, Lk. ii. 37 LT Tr WH; before the
names of illustrious men by which a period of time
is marked: Mt.i.17; xi. 13; Lk. xvi.16 (where T Tr WH
pexpt); Acts xili. 20; before the names of events:
Mt. i. 17 (as perotxecias BaBvAdvos) ; ii. 153 xxiii. 35;
xxviii. 20; Lk. xi. 51; Jas. v. 7; €ws tov edGetv, Acts viii.
40 [B. 266 (228); cf. W. § 44.6; Judith i. 10; xi. 19,
ete.]. b. with the gen. of the neut. rel. pron. od or érov
it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time
when); a. és ov (first in Hdt. 2, 143; but after that
only in later auth., as Plut. et al. [W. 296 (278) note;
B. 230 sq. (199)]): foll. by the indic., Mt. i. 25 [WH
br. 00]; xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21; Acts xxi. 26 [B.1.c.]; foll.
by the subj. aor., equiv. to Lat. fut. pf., Mt. xiv. 22; xxvi.
36 (where WH br. od and Lehm. has éws od av); Lk. xii.
50 [Rec.; xv. 8 Tr WH]; xxiv. 49; Acts xxv. 21; 2 Pet.
i. 19; after a negative sentence, Mt. xvii. 9; Lk. xii. 59
[RGL; xxii. 18 Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12,
14,21. 8. ws drov, aa. until, till (the time when):
foll. by the indic., Jn. ix. 18; foll. by the subj. (without
av), Lk. xiii. 8; xv. 8[RGLT]; after a negation, Lk.
xxii. 16,18[RGLT]. BB. as long as, whilst (Cant. i.
12), foll. by the indic. pres., Mt. v. 25 (see dypu, 1 d. fin.).
c. before adverbs of time (rarely so in the earlier and
more elegant writ., as €ws de, Thuc. 3, 108; [cf. W. § 54,
6 fin.; B. 320 (275)]): €ws dprt, up to this time, until
now [ Vig. ed. Herm. p. 388], Mt. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v.
Lis. xvi. 24> 1 In. i. 95) L'Co; iv. 13 5 vill. 73 xve6), eas
more; how long? Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41;
Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (xiii.) 2.sq.; 2S. ii. 26;
1 Mace. vi. 22); €ws onpepov, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. ace. to
a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, employed of the local
terminus ad quem, unto, as far as, even to; a. likea
prep., with a gen. of place [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]:
€ws Gdov, €ws Tod ovpavod, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15; add, Mt.
xxiv. 31; xxvi. 58;, Mk. xiii. 27;, Lk. ii. 15; iv. 29; Acts
1.83 .xi19, 22: xvi, 15; xxi. 25; 2 Co. x2.) wane
gen. of pers., to the place where one is: Lk. iv. 42; Acts
ix. 38, (€ws ‘YrepBopewy, Ael. v. hh. 3,18). b. with ad-
verbs of place [W. and B. as in c. above]: €ws ava, Jn.
ii. 7; €ws €ow, Mk. xiv. 54; €ws xatw, Mt. xxvii. 51;
Mk. xv. 38; ws Sde, Lk. xxiii. 5 [cf. W. § 66, 1 c.].
c. with prepositions: €ws é£w rs modews, Acts xxi. 5;
éws eis, Lk. xxiv. 50 [RGLmrg., but Ltxt. T Tr WH
éws mpds as far as to (Polyb. 3, 82,6; 12,17,4; Gen.
xxxvili. 1)]; Polyb. 1, 11, 14; Ael. v. h. 12, 22. 3.
of the limit (terminus) of quantity; with an adv. of
number: éws émraxis, Mt. xviii. 21; with numerals: Mt.
Z,¢
xxii. 26 (€ws radv émta) ; cf. xx. 8; Jn. viii. 9 (Rec.) ;
Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; ov« gariw ws évds, there is
not so much as one, Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3. 4.
of the limit of measurement: €ws juioous, Mk. vi. 23;
Esth. v. 3, 6 Alex. 5. of the end or limit in acting
[Z, {, on its substitution for o see 3, o, s-]
ZaRovddy, 6, indecl., QiaF [but on the Hebr. form see
B. D.] habitation, dwelling, Gen. xxx. 20), Vulg. Zabu-
lon; Zebulun, the tenth son of Jacob; by meton. the
tribe of Zebulun: Mt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.*
Zaxxatos, -ov, 6, (73! pure, innocent; cf. 2 Esdr. ii. 9;
Neh. vii. 14), Zaccheus, a chief tax-collector: Lk. xix.
By Be.) a. Ds 8. ¥-]"
Zap4, 6, (M11 a rising (of light)), indecl., Zarah [better
Zerah], one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3; cf. Gen.
XXXViii. 30.*
Zaxaptas, -ov, 5, (MIDI and 377931 i. e. whom Jehovah
remembered), Zacharias or Zachariah or Zechariah;
1. a priest, the father of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5,
12 sq. 18, 21, 40, 59, 67; ili. 2. 2. a prophet, the son
of Jehoiada the priest, who was stoned to death in the
mid. of the rx. cent. before Christ in the court of the
temple: 2 Chr. xxiv. 19 sqq.; Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51.
Yet this Zachariah is called in Mt. 1. c. the son not of
Jehoiada but of Barachiah. But most interpreters now
think (and correctly) that the Evangelist confounded
him with that more noted Zachariah the prophet who
lived a little after the exile, and was the son of Bara-
chiah (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose prophecies have a place
in the canon. For Christ, to prove that the Israelites
throughout their sacred history had been stained with
the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first
and the last example of the murders committed on good
men; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew
canon. But cpinions differ about this Zachariah. For
according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek
church follows (and which has been adopted by Chr. W.
Miiller in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq.,
and formerly by Hilgenfeld, krit. Untersuchungen tb. die
Evangg. Justins, ete., p. 155 and die Evangg. nach ihrer
Entstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the
Baptist is meant (cf. Protev. Jac. c. 23); others think
(so quite recently Keim, iii. 184 [ Eng. trans. v. 218], ef.
Weiss, das Matthiiusevang. p. 499) a certain Zachariah
son of Baruch (ace. to another reading Bapicxaiov), who
during the war between the Jews and the Romans was
slain by the zealots év péom To iepe, as Joseph. b. j. 4,
5,4 relates. Those who hold this opinion believe, either
that Jesus divinely predicted this murder and in the
269
Can
and suffering: é€ws rovrov, Lk. xxii. 51 [see édw, 2];
€ws Tov Oepiopov, Mt. xiii. 30 L Tr WH txt.; &as Oavdrov,
even to death, so that I almost die, Mk. xiv. 34; Mt.
xxvi. 38, (Sir. iv. 28; xxxj. (xxxiv.) 13; xxxvii. 2;
4 Mace. xiv. 19).
Z
prophetic style said épovetcare for govedcere [cf. B.
§137,4; W. 273 (256) n.; § 40,5 b.], or that the Evange-
list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an
anachronism put this murder into the discourse of Jesus.
These inventions are fully refuted by Fritzsche on Mt.
1. c., and Bleek, Erklar. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p. 177
sqq-; cf. Hilgenfeld, Hinl. in d. N. T. p. 487 sq.; [and
Dr. James Morison, Com. on Mt., 1. c.; B. D. s. v. Zech-
ariah 6 and s. v. Zacharias 11].*
{tdw, -d, Cys, Cp, inf. gv [so LT, but RG WH --, Tr
also (exc. 1 Co. ix. 14; 2 Co.i. 8); cf. W. §5,4¢.; WH.
Intr. § 410; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 5 sq.], ptep. (av;
impf. é{av (Ro. vii. 9, where cod. Vat. has the inferior
form (nv [found again Col. iii. 7 e¢jre]; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. ii. p. 38 ; [ WH. App. p. 169; Veitch s. v.]); fut.
in the earlier form (jaw (Ro. vi. 2 [not Lmrg.]; Heb.
xii. 9; LT Tr WH also in Jn. [v. 25]; vi. [51 T WH],
57, 58 [not L; xiv.19 T Tr WH]; 2 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv.
15), and much oftener [(?) five times, quotations ex-
cepted, viz. Mt. ix. 18; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xi. 25; Ro. viii.
13; x.5; ef. Moulton’s Winer p. 105] the later form,
first used by [Hippocr. 7, 536 (see Veitch s. v.)] Dem.,
¢noopa; 1 aor. (unused in Attic [Hippocr., Anth. Pal.
Plut., al. (see Veitch)]) {joa (Acts xxvi. 5, etc.); ef.
Bttm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. 191 sq.; B. 58 (51); Kriiger i.
p- 172; Kiihner i. 829; W. 86 (83); [Veitch s. v.]; Hebr.
mn; [fr. (Hom.) Theogn., Aeschyl. down] ; éo live;
I. prop. 1. to live, be among the living, be alive (not
lifeless, not dead): Acts xx. 12; Ro. vii. 1-3; 1 Co. vii.
$95°2 Co.4. 8iv. 11: '1-Th. av. 15,17; Rey.-xix 20) etc;
Wvy7 Coca, 1 Co. xv. 45 and R Trmrg. Rev. xvi. 3; dia
mavtos tod (qv, during all their life (on earth), Heb. ii.
15 (Scaredeiv rdvra tov tov Cv xpovor, Diod. 1, 74 [cf. B.
262 (225)]); ere Cav (ptep. impf. [ef. W. 341 (320))),
while he was yet alive, before his death, Mt. xxvii. 63;
with év capxi added, of the earthly life, Phil. i. 22; 6 d¢
viv ¢e év capxi, that life which I live in an earthly body,
Gal. ii. 20 [B. 149 (130); W. 227 (213)]; &v aire CGper,
in God is the cause why we live, Acts xvii. 28; (aca
réOvnxe, 1 Tim. v. 6; epol rd Cav Xptorés, my life is de-
voted to Christ, Christ is the aim, the goal, of my life.
Phil. i. 21; ¢évres are opp. to vexpoi, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk.
xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; (dvres wai vexpoi, Acts x. 42; Ro.
xiv. 9; 2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; in the sense of living
and thriving, 2 Co. vi. 9; 1 Th. iii. 8; @ ev époi
Xpioros, Christ is living and operative in me, i. e. the
holy mind and energy of Christ pervades and moves me,
Gal. ii. 20; ék Suvdapews Geod Cyy eis twa, through the
power of God to live and be strong toward one (sc. in
correcting and judging), 2 Co. xiii. 4; in the absol. sense
God is said to be 6 (av: Mt. xvi. 16; xxvi. 63; Jn. vi.
57; vi.69 Rec.; Acts xiv.15; Ro. ix. 26; 2 Co. iii. 3;
vi. 16°" Theis 9S 1 tam a 15s ay. 10; “vi. 17 RG;
Heb. ili. 12; ix. 14; x. 31; xii. 22; Rev. vii. 2, (Josh. iii.
LO DK xix: 16 3) Tsexxxvin. 45°07; “Hos.110; Dan:
vi. 20 Theod., 26, ete.); with the addition of eis rovs
aiavas Tov aiwvwy, Rev. iv. 9; xv.7; (@ eyo CIN—N,
Num. xiv. 21; Is. xlix. 18, ete.) as J live, (by my life),
the formula by which God swears by himself, Ro. xiv.
11. i. q. to continue to live, to be kept alive, (Gatus hv
emOupei, meipacOw wKav, Xen. an. 3, 2, 26 (39)): éav 6
Kipios Oed\jon Kai Cyowper [-copev LT Tr WH), Jas. iv.
15 [B. 210 (181); W. 286 (268 sq.)]3 Cy em apro (Mt.
iv.4,etc.) see emi, B. 2a. a. (Tob. v. 20); nv &k Tivos, to
get a living from a thing, 1 Co. ix. 14; also when used
of convalescents, Jn. iv. 50 sq.53; with ex ris appo-
arias added, 2 K.i. 2; viii. 8 sq. figuratively, to live
and be strong: év rovrots (for Rec. év adrois) in these
vices, opp. to the ethical death by which Christians are
wholly severed from sin (see aroOvnoke, II. 2 b.), Col. iii.
7; ef. Meyer ad loc. i. q. to be no longer dead, to recover
life, be restored to life: Mt. ix. 18; Acts ix. 41; so of
Jesus risen from the dead, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv. 5, 23;
Acts 1.38% xxv. 19; “Ro. vi. 105-2 Co. xii. 45" opp: to
vexpos, Rev. i. 18; 11.8; e(joev came to life, lived again,
Ro. xiv. 9 GL T Tr WH (opp. to ameéave); Rev. xiii.
14; xx.4,5 [Rec. avé¢.], (Ezek. xxxvii. 9 sq.; on the
aorist as marking entrance upon a state see Baowevo,
fin.) ; Gv é« vexpav, trop. out of moral death to enter
upon a new life, dedicated and acceptable to God, Ro. vi.
13; [similarly in Lk. xv. 32 TTrWH]. i. q. not to be
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 (where a@v@pwrrot amoOvnckovres dying
men i. e. whose lot it is to die, are opp. to 6 (ov). 2.
emphatically, and in the Messianic sense, to enjoy real
life, i.e. to have true life and worthy of the name, —active,
blessed, endless in the kingdom of God (or €w7 aiwvios; see
(on, 2b.)> LK: x. 28; Jn. v.25; xi. 25; Ro. 1.175 ‘viii.
13; xiv. 9[(?) see above]; Gal. iii. 12; Heb. xii. 9; with
the addition of éx miatews, Heb. x. 38; of eis rév aidva, Jn.
vi. 51, 58; ov Xpror@, in Christ’s society, 1 Th. v. 10;
this life in its absolute fulness Christ enjoys, who owes it
to God; hence he says €@ &:a rév rmatepa, Jn. vi. 57; by
the gift and power of Christ it is shared in by th faith-
ful, who accordingly are said ¢jaew dv airov, Jn. vi. 7;
60 airod, 1 Jn.iv.9. with a dat. denoting the respect,
mvevpart, 1 Pet. iv.6; dvoya exes Ore Cys Kal veKpos ef, thou
art said to have life (i. e. vigorous spiritual life bringing
forth good fruit) and (yet) thou art dead (ethically),
Rey. iii. 1. In the O. T. jv denotes to live most happily
in the enjoyment of the theocratic blessings: Lev. xviii. 5;
Wentaive les vi. ts xxx. 16: 3. to live i. e. pass life,
of the manner of living and acting; of morals or char-
Saw 2
70
Cedyos
acter: jera avdpés with acc. of time, of a married woman,
Lk. il. 36; ywpis vépov, without recognition of the law,
Ro. vii. 9; Bapsoaios, Acts xxvi. 5; also év kéope, Col. ii.
20; with ev and a dat. indicating the act or state of the
soul: ev mioret, Gal. ii. 20; ev rH duaptia, to devote life
to sin, Ro. vi. 2; with adverbs expressing the manner:
evoeBas, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. ii. 12; dodres, Lk. xv. 13;
eOvixas, Gal. ii. 14; adikws, Sap. xiv. 28; Gv run (dat.
of pers., a phrase com. in Grk. auth. also, in Lat. vivere
alicut; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 176 sqq.), to
devote, consecrate, life to one; so to live that life results
in benefit to some one or to his cause: TO Oe@, Lk. xx.
38; Ro. vi. 10 sq.; Gal. ii. 19, (4 Mace. xvi. 25); 76
Xpior@, 2 Co. v. 15; that man is said €av7é Civ who
makes his own will his law, is his own master, Ro. xiv.
7; 2Co.v. 15; w. dat. of the thing to which life is de-
voted: 17 Sicarvoovvy, 1 Pet. ii. 243; mvevparr, to be actu-
ated by the Spirit, Gal. v. 25; xara oapxa, as the flesh
dictates, Ro. viii. 12 sq.
II. Metaph. of inanimate things; a. vdep fév, DYD
Dp) (Gen. xxvi. 1£; Lev. xiv. 5; ete.), living water, i. c.
bubbling up, gushing forth, flowing, with the suggested
idea of refreshment and salubrity (opp. to the water of
cisterns and pools, [ef. our spring water ]), is figuratively
used of the spirit and truth of God as satisfying the
needs and desires of the soul: Jn. iv. 10 sq.3 vii. 38:
emt (aoas myas vdarav, Rey. vii. 17 Ree. — b. having
vital power in itself and exerting the same upon the soul:
edrnis Coca, 1 Pet. i. 3; Adyos Beod, 1 Pet.i. 23; Heb. iv.
12; Aoya sc. rod Geod, Acts vii. 38, cf. Deut. xxxii. 47;
60s aaa, Heb. x. 20 (this phrase-describing that char-
acteristic of divine grace, in granting the pardon of sin
and fellowship with God, which likens it to a way lead-
ing to the heavenly sanctuary). In the same manner the
predicate 6 (oy is applied to those things to which
persons are compared who possess real life (see I. 2
above), in the expressions AiAo. Caves, 1 Pet. ii. 45 6
dpros 6 fav (see apros, fin.), Jn. vi. 51; @voia (doa
(tacitly opp. to slain victims), Ro. xii.1. [Comp.: ava-,
av-Caw. |
{Bévvupr, see oBevvupe and s. v. 3, a, s.
ZePeSaios, -ov, 6, Zebedee, (331 for I3t [i. e. my gift],
a form of the prop. name which occurs a few times in
the O. T., as 1 Chr. xxvii. 27 (Sept. Za88i), munificent,
[others for M37 gift of Jehovah]; fr. 127 to give), a
Jew, by occupation a fisherman, husband of Salome, fa-
ther of the apostles James and John: Mt. iv. 21; x. 2
(3) 3 xx. 90s xxvi.'37> xxvil. 56; MK-1. 19/aq.y aed fie
352 uke ve LOken scx ee
teords, -7, -dv, (Céw), boiling hot, hot, [Strab., App.,
Diog. Laért., al.]; metaph. of fervor of mind and zeal:
Rey. iii. 15 sq.*
Letyos, -eos (-ous), 7d, (Cevyvupse to join, yoke), two
draught-catile (horses or oxen or mules) yoked together,
a pair or yoke of beasts: Lk. xiv. 19 (WX, 1 Kings xix.
19, ete.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Tl. 18, 543 down).
2. univ. a pair: Lk. ii. 24 (Hat. 3, 130; Aeschyl. Ag.
44; Xen. oec. 7, 18, and often in Grk. writ.).*
eUKTN PIA
SeveTnp
tevxtnpla, -as, 4, (fr. the adj. Cevxrnpuos, fit for joining
or binding together), a band, fastening: Acts xxvii. 40.
Found nowhere else.*
Zets, [but gen. Avs, (dat. Au’), ace. Ala (or Atav), (fr.
old nom. Ais), Zeus, corresponding to Lat. Jupiter (A.
V.): Acts xiv. 12 (see Ais); 6 iepeds tod Avds rod dvros
mpo tis Toews, the priest of Zeus whose temple was be-
fore the city, ibid. 13 (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. See Ais.*
téw; to boil with heat, be hot; often in Grk. writ.; thus
of water, Hom. Il. 18, 349; 21, 362 (365); metaph.
used of ‘boiling’ anger, love, zeal for what is good or
bad, ete. (Tragg., Plat., Plut., al.) ; ¢év (on this uncon-
tracted form cf. Biim. Ausf. Spr. for his School Gram.
(Robinson’s trans.)] § 105 N. 2,1. p. 481; Matthiae i.
p- 151; [Hadley § 371 b.]) ro mvevpare, fervent in spirit,
said of zeal for what is good, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 11;
ef. esp. Riickert and Fritzsche on Ro. 1. ¢.*
{ndcbw; i. g. Cyrda, q. V- 5 1. to envy, be jealous:
Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [c. 19, 2 p.
56, 34 Didot] ovdets trav 7 dyaddv 76 avOpa@rwov (yrovrvt ay
pbovet i) Cnrever Tore. 2. in a good sense, to imitate
emulously, strive afier: Epya apetns, od Néyous, Democr.
ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf.; intrans. to
be full of zeal for good, be zealous: Rev. iii.19 LT Tr
txt. WH, for Rec. (jAwoor [cf. WH. App. p. 171].*
Lidos, -ov, 6, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L T Tr WH; [2 Co.
ix. 2 T Tr WH) 76 Gyros (Ignat. ad Trall.4; dca Gros,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [‘‘in Clem. Rom. §§ 3, 4, 5, 6 the
mase. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any
law” (Lehtft.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2
Hilgenfeld (1876) p. 7; cf. WH. App. p. 158; W.§9, N.
2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. ¢ém [Curtius § 567; Vanicek p.
757]); Sept. for 7829 ; excitement of mind, ardor, fervor
of spirit; 1. zeal, ardor in embracing, pursuing, de-
fending anything: 2 Co. vii. 11; ix.25 kara (dos, as re-
spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6; with
gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of, for a pers. or thing,
Ju. i. 17, fr. Ps.jlxviiit,(lxtx.) 10); Ro. x. 2, (4 Mace.. ii.
58; Soph. O. C. 943); tmep tevos, gen. of pers., 2 Co.
vii. 7; Col. iv. 13 Rec. with subject. gen. (jr Geod,
with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and
solicitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2; the jfierceness
of indignation, punitive zeal, mupds (of penal fire, which
is personified [see mip, fin.]), Heb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11;
Sap. v. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry,
jealousy : Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Co. iii. 3; Jas. iii. 14, 16; emdn-
cOnoav (ndov, Acts v. 17; xiii. 45; plur. (dot, now the
stirrings or motions of ¢jAos, now its outbursts and man-
ifestations: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; but in both pass.
L T Tr (WH, yet in Gal. l.c. WH only in txt.] have
adopted (jXos (cproé te kai POdvor, Plat. lege. 3p. 679 e.).
[On the distinction between ¢jAos (which may be used
in a good sense) and @Oédvos (used only in a bad sense)
ef. Trench, Syn. § xxvi.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 11,
1 (81d kat emuetkes cori 6 Cydos kal emeckav, TO Se POoveiv
bavdov Kal davdrer). | *
{nAdw, -6; 1 aor. e(nyAwoa; pres. pass. inf. (prove ba;
(aos, q. v-); Sept. for NIP; to burn with zeal; il
271
Cnpia
absol. to be heated or to boil [A.V. to be moved] with envy,
hatred, anger : Acts vii. 9; xvii. 5 (where Grsb. om
(nrdo.); 1 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv. 2; in a good sense, to be
zealous in the pursuit of good, Rev. iii. 19 RG Trmrg.
(the aor. (jAwoov marks the entrance into the mental
state, see Baowweva, fin.; e(j7rkwoe, he was seized with
indignation, 1 Mace. ii. 24). 2. trans.; ti, to desire
earnestly, pursue: 1 Co. xii. 31; xiv. 1, 39, (Sir. li. 18;
Thue. 2, 37; Eur. Hec. 255; Dem. 500, 2; al.) ; paddov
dé, sc. (node, foll. by wa, 1 Co. xiv. 1 [B. 287 (205); ef.
W.. 577 (537) ]. twa, a. to desire one earnestly, to strive
after, busy one’s self about him : to exert one’s self for one
(that he may not be torn from me), 2Co. xi. 2; to seek
to draw over to one’s side, Gal. iv. 17 [ef. wa, I. 1 d.J;
to court one’s good will and favor, Prov. xxiii. 17; xxiv.
1; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1; so in the pass. to be the object
of the zeal of others, to be zealously sought after: Gal. iv.
18 [here Tr mrg. (nAovoée, but ef. WH. Intr. § 404].
b. to envy one: Gen. xxvi. 14; xxx.1; xxxvii.11; Hes.
opp- 310; Hom. Cer. 168, 223; and in the same sense,
ace. to some interpp., in Acts vil. 9; but there is no
objection to considering (jAwoavres here as used absol.
(see 1 above [so A.V. (not R.V.)]) and rév loond as
depending on the verb azedorvro alone. [Comp.: mapa-
(nd\ow. |*
{nAwrIs, -ov, 6, (CnAdw), one burning with zeal; a zealot;
1. absol., for the Hebr. Sp, used of God as jealous of
any rival and sternly vindicating his control: Ex. xx.
5; Deut. iv. 24, ete. From the time of the Maccabees
there existed among the Jews a class of men, called
Zealots, who rigorously adhered to the Mosaic law and
endeavored even by a resort to violence, after the ex.
ample of Phinehas (Num. xxv. 11, (yAwrhs biveds 4 Mace.
xviii. 12), to prevent religion from being violated by
others; but in the latter days of the Jewish common-
wealth they used their holy zeal as a pretext for the basest
crimes, Joseph. b. j. 4,3, 9; 4,5,1; 4,6,3; 7,8,1. To
this class perhaps Simon the apostle had belonged, and
hence got the surname 6 (nA@rns: Lk. vi. 15; Actsi. 13;
[cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch., Index s. v. Zeloten ;
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 237 sqq. ]. 2. with
gen. of the obj.: w. gen. of the thing, most eagerly desirous
of, zealous for,athing; a. to acquire a thing, [zealous
of | (see (yAda@, 2): 1 Co. xiv. 12; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iii.
13 L T Tr WH, (dperns, Philo, praem. et poen. § 2; tas
evoeBeias, de monarch. |. i. § 3; edoeBelas x. Sixacoovvns,
de poenit. §15; rév rodeuixav epywv, Diod. 1, 73; mepi
TeV aynkdvTev eis gwotnpiav, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45,1). b.
to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend-
ing for a thing, [zealous for]: vopov, Acts xxi. 20 (2
Mace. iv. 2); rév matpixov tapaddacov, Gal. i. 14 (rév
aiyuntiak@v mAacpatev, Philo, vit. Moys. ili. § 19; ris
apxatas k. cappovos aywyns, Diod. excerpt. p. 611 [fr. 1.
37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers.: @eov, intent on
protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend-
ing for the Mosaic law, Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth.
also an emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)*
{nyla, -as, 7, damage, loss, [Soph., Hdt. down]: Acta
>
Enpvow
xxvii. 10, 21; ryeioOat (nuiay (Xen. mem. 2, 4, 3; rea,
ace. of pers., 2, 3, 2), ri, to regard a thing as a loss: Phil.
ili. 7 (opp. to xépdos), 8.*
{ypida, -@: ((nuia), to affect with damage, do damage
to: twa ({Thue.], Xen., Plat.) ; in the N. T. only in
Pass., fut. (yutoOnooua ([ Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12, al. ; but “as
often”’] in prof. auth. [fut. mid.] ¢yysmcopar in pass.
sense; cf. Kriiger § 39, 11 Anm.; Kiihner on Xen.
mem. u.s.; [L. and 8. s.v.; Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. e¢npia-
Ov; absol. to sustain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss :
1 Co. iii. 15; & reve &k revos, in a thing from one, 2 Co.
vii. 9; with acc. of the thing: (one from whom another
is taken away [as a penalty] by death, is said ray puynv
rivos (nurovoba, Hat. 7, 39), ryv Wuxnv avrod, to forfeit
his life, i.e. ace. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 26 ;
Mk. viii. 36, for which Luke, in ix. 25, éavrov i. e. him-
self, by being shut out from the everlasting kingdom of
God. mdvra é(nuidny, reflexive [yet see Meyer], I for-
feited, gave up all things, I decided to suffer the loss of
all these [(?)] things, Phil. iii. 8.*
Znvas [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. iv.15; W.§ 16 N. 1], -av,
[B. 20 (18)], 6, Zenas, at first a teacher of the Jewish
law, afterwards a Christian: Tit. iii. 13. (B.D. s. v.]*
{nréw, -; impf. 3 pers. sing. é¢nret, plur. e¢nrovy; fut.
(ntnow; 1 aor. e(ytnoa; Pass., pres. (yrodpar; impf. 3
pers. sing. é(nreiro (Heb. viii. 7); 1 fut. ¢grnOnoopa
(Lk. xii. 48); [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for w73, and much
oftener for Wp3; to seek, i. e. 1. to seek in order to
find ; a. univ. and absol. : Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq.
(see etpicka, 1 a.); red, Mk. i. 37; Lk. ii. [45 R Lmrg.], 48;
[iv. 42 Rec.]; Jn. vi. 24; xviii. 4,7; Acts x. 19, and
often; foll. by ev w. dat. of place, Acts ix. 11; w. acc. of
the thing (yapyapiras), of buyers, Mt. xiii. 45; something
lost, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. xix. 10; ri év run, as fruit on a
tree, Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; avdmavow, a place of rest, Mt. xii.
43; Lk. xi. 24; after the Hebr. (75 wd)-nx wpa [cf
W. 33 (32); 18]) Wuxnv twos, to seek, plot against, the
life of one, Mt. ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3, (Ex. iv. 19, ete.) ; univ.
ti (nets; what dost thou seek? what dost thou wish?
Jn. i. 38 (39); [iv. 27]. b. to seek [i. e. in order to find
out] by thinking, meditating, reasoning; to inquire into:
sept Tivos (nreire per’ adAnAwv; Jn. xvi. 19; foll. by indi-
rect disc., m@s, ri, tiva: Mk. xi. 18; xiv. 1, 11; Lk. xii.
29; xxii. 2; 1 Pet. v.85; rdv Gedy, to follow up the traces
of divine majesty and power, Acts xvii. 27 (univ. to seek
the knowledge of God, Sap. i. 1; xiii. 6; [Philo,monarch.
i. §5]). c. to seek after, seek for, aim at, strive after:
evxarpiav, Mt. xxvi. 16; Lk. xxii. 6; yrevdouaprupiav, Mt.
xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv. 55; rév Oavarov, an opportunity to die,
Rev. ix. 6; Avow, 1 Co. vii. 27; tv Baord. rov Geod, Mt.
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; ra dv, Col. iii. 1; eipnyny, 1 Pet. iii.
11; apOapciav ete. Ro. ii. 7; do€av ék twos, 1 Th. ii. 6; rHv
86£av rHv mapa Twos, Jn. v. 44: ta tewos, the property of
one, 2 Co. xii. 14; rhv d0éav Geod, to seek to promote the
glory of God, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; 7d O€Anpd Twos, to at-
tempt to establish, Jn. v. 30; 1d ovpqopov tivos, to seek
to further the profit or advantage of one, 1 Co. x. 33, i. q.
(nreiv ra Twos, ib. x. 24; xiii.5; Phil. ii. 21; tyuas, to seek
272
furyos
to win your souls, 2 Co. xii. 14; rév Oedv, to seek the favor
of God (see ex(nréa, a.), Ro. x. 20; [iii 11 Trmrg. WH
mrg.]. foll. by inf. [B. 258 (222); W. § 44, 3] to seeki.e.
desire, endeavor: Mt. xii. 46, [47 (WH in mrg. only) ];
xxi. 46; Mk. [vi. 19 L Trmrg.]; xii. 12; Lk. v.18; vi.19;
ix.9; Jn. v.18; vii. 4B. § 142, 4], 19 sq.; Acts xiii. 8:
xvi. 10; Ro. x. 3; Gal.i.10; ii. 17; foll. by iva [B. 237
(205)], 1 Co.xiv.12. 2. to seek i. e. require, demand:
[onueiov, Mk. viii. 12 LT Tr WH; Lk. xi. 29 T Tr WH];
codpiay, 1 Co. i. 22; Soxyunv, 2 Co. xiii. 3; ri wapd twos,
to crave, demand something from some one, Mk. viii.
11; Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; & run, dat. of pers., to seek in
one i. e. to require of him, foll. by ta, 1 Co. iv. 2.
[Comp.: dva-, ék-, émt-, ov-(nréw.]
{ATHpO, -Tos, TO, (CyT€w), a question, debate: Acts xv. 2;
XXVi. 3; vopov, about the law, Acts xxiii. 29; mepi twos,
Acts xviii. 15; xxv. 19. [From Soph. down.]*
{aryots, -ews, 7, ((yréw); a. a seeking: [Hadt.], Thue.
8,57; al. b. inquiry (Germ. die Frage): mepi rwos, Acts
xxv. 20. ¢. a questioning, debate: Acts xv. 2 (for Ree.
ovgntnots); 7T Trtxt. WH; zepi tivos, Jn. iii. 25.
a subject of questioning or debate, matter of controversy:
1 Tim.i..4 RG ivi. 4572 Vim! a. 2350 Titan
{favov, -ov, 7d, (doubtless a word of Semitic origin;
Arab. wy! >> Syr. Laps) [see Schaaf, Lex. s. v. p. 148],
Talmud rm or 1331; Suid. {e{anov- 9 ev 7H oir aipa),
zizanium, [ A. V. tares],a kind of darnel, bastard wheat
[but see reff. below], resembling wheat except that the
grains are black: Mt. xiii. 25-27, 29 sq. 36, 38, 40.
(Geop. [for reff. see B. D. Am. ed. p. 3177 note]). Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Lolch; Furrer in Schenkel B. L. iv. 57;
[B.D., and Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Tares].*
Zpuwpva, so Tdf. in Rev. i. 11, etc., for Syvpva, q. v.
ZopoBaPed, in Joseph. ZopoBaBnros, -ov, 6, (993%, i.e
either for 532391 dispersed in Babylonia, or for 533 pin
begotten in Babylonia), Zerubbabel, Vulg. Z orobabel, a
descendant of David, the leader of the first colony of the
Jews on their return from the Babylonian exile: Mt. i.
12. sq.; Lk. iii. 27.*
Lédos, -ov, 6, (akin to yvodos, dvddos, vedos, xvédas, see
Bttm. Lexil. ii. p. 266 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 378]; cf. Cur-
tius p. 706), darkness, blackness: Heb. xii. 18 L T Tr
WH; as in Hom. II. 15,191; 21, 56, ete., used of the dark-
ness of the nether world (cf. Grimm on Sap. xvii. 14),
2 Pet. ii. 4; Jude 6; (dos rod oxorous (cf. NIDX-WWN,
Ex. x. 22), the blackness of (i. e. the densest) darkness,
2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Cf. Trench § c.]*
{vyés, -od, 6, for which in Grk. writ. before Polyb. ré
¢vyov was more com., (fr. Cevyvupt); 1. a yoke; a.
prop. such as is put on draught-eattle. b. metaph.
used of any burden or bondage: as that of slavery, 1
Tim. vi. 1 (Lev. xxvi. 18), dovdetas, Gal. v. 1 (Soph. Aj.
944; Sovrocvvns, Dem. 322, 12); of troublesome laws
imposed on one, esp. of the Mosaic law, Acts xv. 10;
Gal. v. 1; hence the name is so transferred to the cor
mands of Christ as to contrast them with the commands
of the Pharisees which were a veritable ‘yoke’; yet
fuun
even Christ’s commands must be submitted to, though
easier to be kept: Mt. xi. 29 sq. (less aptly in Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 16, 17 Christians are called of ind tov (vydv tis
xaptros ehOovres [cf. Harnack ad loc.]). 2. a balance,
pair of scales: Rev. vi. 5 (as in Is. xl. 12; Lev. xix. 36;
Plat. rep. 8, 550 e.; Ael. v. h. 10, 6; al.).*
{oun, -ns, 7, (Céw [but cf. Curtius p. 626 sq.; Vanicek,
p- 760]), leaven: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21, (Ex. xii. 15;
Lev. ii. 11; Deut. xvi. 3, ete.; Aristot. gen. an. 3, 4; Jo-
seph. antt. 3, 10, 6; Plut. mor. p. 289 sq. [quaest. Rom.
109]); rov adprov, Mt. xvi. 12; metaph. of inveterate
mental and moral corruption, 1 Co. v. [7], 8, (Ignat. ad
Magnes. 10); viewed in its tendency to infect others,
(ipn dv Sapicaiov: Mt. xvi. 6,11; Mk. viii. 15; Lk. xii.
1, which fig. Mt. xvi. 12 explains of the teaching
of the Phar., Lk. l.c. more correctly [definitely ?] of their
hypocrisy. It is applied to that which, though small
in quantity, yet by its influence thoroughly pervades a
thing: either in a good sense, as in the parable Mt. xiii.
33; Lk. xiii. 21, (see (yzdw); or in a bad sense, of a per-
nicious influence, as in the proverb pixpa (vpn ddov 76
gpupapa (upot a little leaven leaveneth the whole lump,
which is used variously, acc. to the various things to which
it is applied, viz. a single sin corrupts a whole church,
1 Co. v. 6; a slight inclination to error (respecting the
necessity of circumcision) easily perverts the whole con-
ception of faith, Gal. v. 9; but many interpp. explain
the passage ‘even a few false teachers lead the whole
church into error.’ *
Lupdw, -d; 1 aor. pass. eCupwOnv; (Coun) ; to leaven (to
mix leaven with dough so as to make it ferment) : 1 Co.
v. 6; Gal. v. 9, (on which pass. see (dun) ; €ws eCvpobn
GXov, sc. TO GAevpov, words which refer to the saving
power of the gospel, which from a small beginning will
gradually pervade and transform the whole human race:
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. (Sept., Hipp., Athen., Plut.) *
{wypéw, -@; pf. pass. ptep. eCwypnpevos; (Cds alive,
and dypew [poet. form of dypeva, q. v.]); 1. to take
alive (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.; Sept.). 2. univ.
to take, catch, capture: é€Cwypnpévor tr avirod (i.e. rod dta-
Bodov) eis rd exeivov OeAnua, if they are held captive to
do his will, 2 Tim. ii. 26 [al. make é¢. tm air. paren-
thetic and refer éxeivov to God; see éxetvos, 1 c.; ef. Ellic.
in loc.]; avOpamous €on Cwypav, thou shalt catch men,
i. e. by teaching thou shalt win their souls for the king-
dom of God, Lk. v. 10.*
ton, -7s, 7, (fr. (aw, (@), Sept. chiefly for o-n; life;
1. univ. life, i. e. the state of one who is possessed of vital-
ity or is animate: 1 Pet. iii. 10 (on which see dyamd) ;
Heb. vii. 3,16; adrés (6 eds) did0ds macw Cony kK. mvony,
Acts xvil. 25; mvedya (wns ex tov Geod, the vital spirit,
the breath of (i. e. imparting) life, Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek.
XXXvVil. 5); maca Wux7 Cons, gen. of possess., every living
soul, Rev. xvi. 3 GLT Tr txt. WH; spoken of earthly
life: 9 ¢@n twos, Lk. xii. 15; Acts viii. 33 (see atpa, 3 h.);
Jas. iv. 14; ev tr (w7 cov, whilst thou wast living on
earth, Lk. xvi. 25 (€v rH (wp abrod, Sir. xxx. 5; 1.1); é&
7H (an tavty, 1 Co. xv. i9; macai ai nucpat ras Cwas Twos,
273
Sw)
Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. exxvii. (cxxviii.) 5; Sir.
xxii.12(10)). émayyedia Cons THs viv K. THS peAAOvONS, a
promise looking to the present and the future life, 1 Tim.
iv.8; ¢wn and Odvaros are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38;
1 Co. iii. 22; Phil. i. 20; of a life preserved in the midst
of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the
life of Paul is meant here, which exerts a saving power
on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic
duties) ; of the life of persons raised from the dead: év
kawvdrnte (wns, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life,
dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4; of the life of Jesus after his
resurrection, Acts ii. 28; Ro. v.10; of the same, with
the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used
emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both
essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through
him both to the hypostatic \é6yos and to Christ in whom the
Adyos put on human nature: dozep 6 marnp exer (anv ev
€avT@, oUTws edwxev Kal TO vid Conv exew ev éavTa, Jn. v.
26; év ato (sc. Td Ady) Con jv kal 7 Cw jy TO pas Tov
avOpamev, in him life was (comprehended), and the life
(transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the
light (i. e. the intelligence) of men (because the life of
men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence
springs up), Jn.i.4; 6 Adyos THs Cans, the Logos having
life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 Jn.i.1; 7
Cor €pavepoOn, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh,
ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth
that life which is next to be defined: viz. b. life real
and genuine, “ vita quae sola vita nominanda” (Cic. de
sen. 21, 77), a life active and vigorous, devoted to God,
blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their
trust in Christ, but after the resurrection to be consummated
by new accessions (among them amore perfect body), and
to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated
the conception, in their way, by employing 0°°N to de-
note a happy life and every kind of blessing: Deut. xxx.
15,19; Mal. ii.5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35;
xii. 28, etc.): Jn. vi. 51,63; xiv. 6; Ro. vii. 10; vili. 6,
10; 2 Co. ii. 16; Phil. ii. 16; [Col. iii. 4]; 2 Pet. i. 3;
1 Jn. v. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of rod @eod, sup-
plied by God [W. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; 9 év Xpicra,
to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1;
peraBeBnxéva éx tod Oavdrov eis Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii.
14; deca tiv Cwnv, In. iil. 36; yew Conv, In. v. 40;
x.10; 1 Jn. v.12; with éy éavré (or -rois) added, Jn. v.
26; [vi. 53]; Sddvar, In. vi. 33; ydpes Cw7s, the grace of
God evident in the life obtained, 1 Pet. iii. 7; 7d mvedpua
tis Cans €v Xptot@ "Inaod, the Spirit, the repository and
imparter of life, and which is received by those unite:!
to Christ, Ro. viii. 2; 6 dpros ths Cans (see apros, fin.),
Jn. vi. 35,48; 7d pas ris ¢. the light illumined by which
one arrives at life, Jn. viii. 12. more fully (@7 alamos
and 4 Car) 7) aiwmos [ (cf. B. 90 (79)); see below]: Jn. iv.
36; [xii. 50]; xvii. 3; 1 Jn. i. 25 ti. 255 [para Cans
aiwv. Jn. vi. 68]; eis Cony ai. unto the attainment of eter-
nal life [cf. eis, B. II. 3 c. 8. p. 185], In. iv. 14; vi. 27;
didd6vae Cony ai., Jn. x. 28; xvii. 2; 1Jn.v.11; eyew Conv
ai., Jn. iii. 15, [and 16], (opp. to dwdAAveOatr), 36; v. 24.
Ser
39; vi. 40,47,54; xx.31Lbr.; 1Jn.v.13; ov« éyew
Cony ai. év éavto, 1 Jn. iii. 15; (in Enoch xv. 4, 6 the
wicked angels are said before their fall to have been
spiritual and partakers of eternal and immortal life). (an
and 4 (a7, without epithet, are used of the blessing of
real life after the resurrection, in Mt. vii. 14; Jn.
xi 25): V Acts: in 15 ¢sve 2050 xi. 183" Ro: v. 17,18: (on
which see Scxaiwors, fin.); 2 Co. v.4; Col. iii.3; 2 Tim.
i. 10; Tit. i. 2; ili. 7; C7 xk vexpay, life breaking forth
from the abode of the dead, Ro. xi. 15; eiaedeiv eis
t. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43,45; ava-
aracts Cans i. q. eis Conv (2 Mace. vii. 14), Jn. v. 29 (on
the gen. cf. W. 188 (177)); orépavos tis Cans i. q. 4 Cw)
as orépavos, Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; EvAov rHs (ws, the
tree whose fruit gives and maintains eternal life, Rev.
nego 2) 14) 19NiG i> Te Wil) (ei Genrai.n95
Prov. iii. 18; d€vdpov Cwns, Prov. xi. 30; xiii. 12); cf.
Bleek, Vorless. iib. d. Apokalypse, p. 174 sq.; vdap Cars,
water the use of which serves to maintain eternal life,
Rey. xxi. 6; xxii. 1,17; in the same sense (wns mnyal
bdarwv, Rev. vii. 17 GLT Tr WH; » BiBdos and 76 Bi-
BXiov tis CwAs, the book in which the names of those are
recorded to whom eternal life has been decreed: Phil.
iveo 3) Revue xis Se" xvii: xx. 12515 -vexxai7e
(xxii. 19 Ree.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1.¢.]. more fully
7 ovrws [ Ree. aiav.] Con, 1 Tim. vi. 19; (1 atamos [cf.
above] (Justin. de resurr. 1 p. 588 ¢. 6 Adyos . . . didovs
jmiv ev €avT@ THY ek VEeKpOY avadoTacW kal THY peTa TATA
Cav aidvov), Mt. xxv. 46 (opp. to KéAaous aiwv.); Acts
xiii. 46, 48; Ro. ii. 7; vi. 22 sq.; Gal. vi. 8; 1 Tim. vi.
12; after €v r@ aidm TO epxopevg, Mk. x. 30; Lk. xviii.
30; exew Conv al. Mt. xix. 16; kAnpovopety, Mt. xix. 29;
Mk. x.17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; eis Conv alouoy, unto the
attainment of life eternal, Jn. xii. 25; Ro. v.21; 1 Tim.
i. 16; Jude 21, (Dan. xii. 2; 4 Mace. xv. 2; dévvaos (wn,
2 Mace. vii. 36; didios Con, Ignat.ad Eph.19). Cf. Kést-
lin, Lehrbegriff des Kv. Johann. ete. pp. 234 sqq. 338
sqq-; Reuss, Johann. Theologie (in Beitriage zu d. theol.
Wissenschaften, vol. i.) p. 76 sqq. [ef. his Hist. de la
Théol. Chrét. bk. vii. ch. xiv.]; Lipsius, Paulin. Recht-
fertigungslehre, pp. 152 sqq. 185 sq.; Gitider in Herzog
vili. 254 (ed. 2, 509) sqq.; B. B. Briickner, De notione
vocis ton in N. T. Lips. 1858; Huther, d. Bedeut. d. Be-
griffe (on u. mexrevew im N. T., in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. 1872, p.1sqq. [For the relations of the term to
heathen conceptions cf. G. Teichmiiller, Aristot. Forsch.
iii. p. 127 sqq.] Some, as Bretschneider, Wahl, Wilke,
esp. Kiiuffer (in his book De biblica {7s aiwviov notione.
Dresd. 1838), maintain that ¢w1 aiovios everywhere even
in John’s writings refers to life after the resurrection; but
in this way they are compelled not only to assume a
prophetic use of the perf. in the saying é« tod Aavarov
petaSeBnkevae eis tr. Cwnv (Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14), but
_ also to interpret the common phrase éyet (w7y ai. as
meaning he has eternal life as his certain portion though
274
Swotrovew
as yet onlyin hope, as well as to explain Cony ai. od
exew ev €avt@ pevovoay (1 Jn. iii. 15) of the hope of
eternal life. [SyYN. see Bios, fin.]*
tavy, -ns, 7, (Covvupe), (fr. Hom. down], a girdle, belt,
serving not only to gird on flowing garments, Mt. iii. 4;
Mk. i. 6; Acts xxi. 11; Rev.i.13; xv. 6; but also, since
it was hollow, to carry money in [A. V. purse]: Mt. x.
9; Mk. vi. 8; Plut. mor. p. 665 b. quaest. conviv. iv. 2,
3, 2; “argentum in zonis habentes,” Liv. 33, 29. [B. D.
s. v. Girdle. ]*
tovvupe and ¢@vviw: impf. 2 pers. sing. e¢ovwves; fut.
(ow; 1 aor. mid. impv. (ava; to gird: twd, Jn. xxi.
18; Mid. to gird one’s self: Acts xii. 8 LT Tr WH.
(Ex. xxix. 9; Hom. et al.) [Comp.: dva-, &:a-, repi-,
Urro-Cavvupn. | *
{woyovew, -@; fut. woyovnow; pres. inf. pass. Cwoyovel-
cba; (fr. (woydvos viviparous, and this fr. ¢@ds and
TENQ) ; 1. prop. to bring forth alive (Theophr.,
Diod., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to give life (Theophr. de
caus. pl. 4, 15,4; Ath. 7 p. 298 ¢.): ra mdvra, of God, 1
Tim. vi. 13 LT Tr WH, [(15S.ii.6)]. 3. in the Bible
to preserve alive: thv Wuyxnv, Lk. xvii. 33; pass. Acts vii.
19, (For mn, Ex.i.17; Judg. viii. 19; [1 S. xxvii. 9,
Lara TK. Sat (sexs) Sy
taov [or (ov (so L WH uniformly, Treg. in Heb. and
Rev.; see Etym. Magn. 413, 24, and reff. s. v. I, ¢)], -ov,
70, (Cwéds alive) ; 1. a living being. 2. an animal,
brute, beast: Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10; Rev.
iv. 6-9 [on vs. 8 cf. B. 130 (114) ], ete.
[Syn.: (Gov differs from @npioy (at least ety mologi-
cally; but cf. Schmidt as below) in giving prominence to
the vital element, while 6pfov emphasizes the bestial
element. Hence in Rev. as above ¢ is fitly rendered living
creature in contradistinction to the @npiov beast, cf. xi. 7; xiii.
1, etc. See Trench § lxxxi.; Schmidt ii. ch. 70.]
two-rovew, -@; fut. Cworoujow; 1 aor. inf. Cwomojoar;
Pass., pres. Cwomootpar; 1 fut. C@womomOnoopa; 1 aor.
ptep. Cworombets; (Cwomois making alive) ; 1. to
produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot.,
Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give life:
ra mavra, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 RG [ef. Neh. ix. 6; 2 K.
v.7; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.]; by spiritual power to arouse and
invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6; Gal. iii. 21; to give (wn ai@nos
(in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63; of the dead, to re-
animate, restore to life: 1 Co. xv. 45; twa, Jn. v.21; Ro.
iv. 173 viii. 11; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22; i. q. to give increase
of life: thus of physical life, rpa@rov 76 madiov peédire,
eira yaAaktu Cwororeirat, Barn. ep. c. 6,17; of the spirit,
Cooronbeis mvevpart, quickened as respects the spirit,
endued with new and greater powers of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18,
on which ef. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitalter,
p. 182 ed. 2; [Zezschwitz, De Christi ad inferos de-
scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 20]. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7)
of seeds quickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing
up, growing: 1 Co. xv. 36. [Comp.: ov-¢wororew. | *
275
H
4
y, a disjunctive conjunction [cf. W. § 53,6]. Used
1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu-
tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the
place of the other: or (Lat. aut, vel); a. to distin-
cuish one thing from another in words of the same con-
struction: Mt. v. 17 (roy vopov i) ros mpodpytas), 36
(Acukny 7) péAawav); vi. 381; vil. 16; Mk. vi. 56; vii. 11
Sq se Lkigit. 24 51k. Qe Js Vile AS }xtiie/29 5) Actes 2);
Ll U2. IMs tes dtOnls 21s iia sol Coniv. Sv. elOisgasex.
19; Gal. i. 10, ete. b. after an interrogative or a de-
clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove
the same thing in another way: Mt. vii. 4, 9; xii. 29;
KV 26 eV OOM ke Ville Odes, Wukeexiiis Ass oxtverolsmexve
8; Ro. ix. 21; xiv. 10; 1 Co. vi. 16. cc. before a sen-
tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate
that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand:
Mt. xx. 15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye
ete.)i5) Moniti.2901 Cosixn6 x. 22 5, xial4, [Recti|maiv-
86; 2 Co. xi. 7; 4 dyvoeire etc., Ro. vi. 3; vii. 1 (ef. vi.
14) ; # ovk otdare etc., Ro. xi. 23 1 Co. vi.9,16,19. =
i)». 7, either... or, Mt. vi. 245 xii. 33; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts
xxiv. 20.isq. 5.1! Cotsxiv: 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques-
tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrum; a. pre-
ceded by rérepov, Jn. vii. 17; ef. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 574
sq.; preceded by the interrog. py, 1 Co. ix. 8; preceded
by pyri, 2 Co. i. 17. —-b. without an interrog. particle
in the first member of the interrogation: ri éore edxotra-
TEpoy, eimeiv . . . 7) eine, Mt. ix. 5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23;
aad, Mt. xxi. 25.5 xxiiiA7, 19; xxvii. 07 ; Mk. in 45 Lk.
MILD LOP AGES: Vi AG4 ey Cuntieda a djiieiset}y) MiG XI 9 35.
3. as a comparative conj., than; a. after compara-
Hives a Miteexalip yx 22 eV Koil Olyexcva., diesels dite altOhs
iv. 1 [Trmrg.om. WH br. 7]; Acts iv. 19; Ro. xiii. 11,
and often. 7 is wanting after mAeiovs foll. by a noun of
number: Mt. xxvi.53 T Tr WH; Actsiv. 22; xxiii. 13,
21; xxiv. 11 (where Rec. adds 7); cf. Matthiae § 455
nove 4; Kihner ii. p. 847; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1]; W.595
(554) ; [B. 168 (146)]; Lod. ad Phryn. p. 410 sq. b.
after €repov: Acts xvii. 21. c. mpiv 4, before that, before,
foll. by ace. with inf. [ef. B. § 139, 385; W. § 44, 6, also p.
297 (279)]: Mt.i.18; Mk. xiv. 30; Actsii.20 RGWH
mrg.; vii. 2; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Lk. ii. 26 Tr txt.
om. WH br. #; xxii. 34 RG [al. éws]; foll. by pres. optat.
Acts xxv. 16. 4. after 6€Xo i. q. to prefer: 1 Co. xiv.
19 (foll. by #rep, 2 Mace. xiv. 42); exx. fr. Grk. auth. are
given in Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq.; W. § 35, 2¢.;
[B. § 149, 7]; Kiihner ii. p. 841; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 3].
e. after ov: Jn. xili. 10 RG, where after od ypeiav eyes
the sentence goes on as thouch the writer had said ovk
@\Xov tds xpelav exer, [cf. W. 508 (473)]. f. after
7 ELOv
positive notions, to which in this way a comparative
force is given: after xadov éote [it is good... rather
than] i. q. it ts better, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 43, 45,47;
cf. Menander’s saying xadov 70 py Cav, }) Civ dOXiws, and
Plaut. rud. 4, 4, 70 tacita mulier est bona semper, quam
loquens; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. xlix.12; Ps.
CXVily (CXVill.) 8; Jom: iv: 3,83 Lob.vi. 138; xi. 8) Siz.
xx. 25; xxil. 15; 4 Mace. ix. 1; also after Avairedei [it
is gain... rather than] i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. 6), Lk.
xvii. 23 after xapa gorat | there will be joy... more than},
Lk. xv. 7; seeexx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bitm. Gram. § 149, 7;
[B. p. 360 (309)]; Winer, Kiihner, al., as above. 4,
with other particles; a. add’ 7, see adda, I. 10 p. 28°.
b. 7) yap, see yap, I. fin. c. # Kai [ef. W. § 53, 6 note],
a. or even, or also, (Lat. aut etiam, vel etiam): [Mt. vii.
LO. Tr WEL seks, xi tt Goi ie WE sb? races.
11; Ro. u. 15; 1 Co. xvi. 6; 2Co.i.13. 8B. or also (Lat.
an etiam), (in a disjunctive question): Lk. xii. 41; Ro.
iv. 9. d. Amep, than at all (Lat. quam forie; Germ.
als etwa), after a compar. [ef. Jelf § 779 Obs. 5]: Jn. xii.
43 [L 7 wep, WH mre. irép], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Hom.,
Hes.). e. #rov... , either indeed [cf. Kiihner § 540,
5]...or: Ro. vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19; Hdt. and sqq.).
i eAV, assuredly, most certainly, full surely, (a particle
used in asseverations, promises, oaths [cf. W. § 53, 7b.;
Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 38 sq.]): Heb. vi.14 RG; see ei,
III. 9. (Sept.; very often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down.) *
nyepovedw; (nyenov); [fr. Hom. down]; a. fo be
leader, to lead the way. b. to rule, command: with gen.
of a province [cf. B. 169 (147)], to be governor of a prov-
ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2; of a procurator, Lk.
itl
yyepovia, -as, 7, (nyepov), [Hadt., Thuc., Plat., al.],
chief command, rule, sovereignty: of the reign of a Ro-
man emperor, Lk. iii. 1; Joseph. antt. 18, 4, 2.*
aYeRov, -ovos, 6, (Hyéopar), in class. Grk. a word of
very various signification: a leader of any kind, a guide,
ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover-
eign; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ‘legatus Caesaris,’ an
officer administering a province in the name and with the
authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov-
ince: Mt. x. 18; Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 14.
2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an
officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor
and had charge of the imperial revenues; in causes re-
lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called
éniztporos, Stokntns, in prof. auth.). In the smaller
provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of
the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of
the province; and such was the relation of the procu-
(e 5 ”)
nyeopar ye
rator of Judea to the governor of Syria (cf. Krebs,
Observwv. p. 61 sqq.; Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 432
sqq-; Win. RWB. s. v. Procuratoren; Sieffert in Herzog
2s. v. Landpfleger; Arenkel in Schenkel iv. 7; [BB.
DD. s. v. Procurator]); so of Pilate, Felix, Festus: Mt.
Xxvil. 2, 11, 14 sq. 21, 23 [R GL Tramrg.], 27; xxviii.
14; Lk. xx. 20; Acts xxiii. 24, 26, 33; xxiv. 1, 10; xxvi.
30; TAaros 6 ris “lovdaias nyepor, Joseph. antt. 18, 3, 1;
(Tacit. ann. 15, 44 Christus Tiberio imperitante per
procuratorem Pontium Pilatum supplicio adfectus
erat). 3. first, leading, chief: so of a principal town
as the capital of the region, Mt. ii. 6, where the meaning
is, ‘Thou art by no means least among the chief cities
of Judah;’ others less aptly (Bleek also [(where?);
in his (posthumous) Synopt. Erklirung ete. i. 119
he repudiates this interp. (ascribed by him to Hof
mann, Weiss. u. Erfiill. ii. 56)]), ‘Thou shalt by no
means be regarded as least among i. e. by the princes,
the nobles, of the state.’ The saying is taken fr. Mic. v.
2 (1), where the Hebr. ‘DON (which the Sept. give cor-
rectly, év ydudor) seems to have been read ‘DONS by the
Evangelist [ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 206 ].*
TYeopan, -odpar; pf. Fynuat; 1 aor. yynodunv; (fr. &yw
[ef. Curtius p. 688]); dep. mid.; fr. Hom. down; ule
to lead,i.e. a. to go before; b. to be a leader; to
rule, command; to have authority over: in the N. T.
so only in the pres. ptep. jyovpevos, a prince, of regal
power (Ezek. xliii. 7 for 720; Sir. xvii. 17), Mt. ii. 6; a
(royal) governor, viceroy, Acts vii. 10; chief, Lk. xxii.
26 (opp. to 6 diaxovadv) ; leading as respects influence,
controlling in counsel, év tw0t, among any, Acts xv. 22;
with gen. of the pers. over whom one rules, so of the
overseers or leaders of Christian churches: Heb. xiii.
7, 17, 24, (otkov, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; rav matpiav, 1 Esdr.
v. 65 (66), 67 (68); ris médews, Judg. ix. 51 Alex.; a
military leader, 1 Mace. ix. 30; 2 Mace. xiv. 16; used
also in Grk. writ. of any kind of a leader, chief, com-
mander, Soph. Phil. 386; often in Polyb.; Diod. 1, 4 and
72; Leian. Alex. 44; al.); with gen. of the thing, rod Adyou,
the leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman: Acts
xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also rod Adyou Tyepov
in Jamblich. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. duco)
i. q. to consider, deem, account, think: with two ace., one
of the obj., the other of the pred., Acts xxvi. 2; Phil. ii.
3, 6 (on which see dpraypds, 2[W. § 44, 3 Co ]) 5" ui. [cr
B. 59 (51); W. 274 (258)]; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1; Heb.
x. 29; xi. 11, 26; 2 Pet. i. 13; ii. 13; iii. 9,15. twa
és twa, 2 Th. iii. 15 [ef. W. § 65, 1a.]; revd brrepextrepic-
gas, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. v.13 (arept mrodXov,
Hdt. 2,115; wept tretorov, Thue. 2,89); w. ace. of the
thing foll. by drav, Jas. i. 2; avayxaioy, foll. by an inf.,
2 Co. ix.5; Phil. ii. 25; 3ixacov, foll. by an inf., 2 Pet. i.
13; foll. by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii. 8. [Comp.: d:-, éx-
&:-. €&-, mpo-nyeopat.*
Syn.: doxéw 1, Fydouar 2, voulCw 2, ofouar: Hy.
and vou. denote a belief resting not on one’s inner feeling or
sentiment, but on the due consideration of external grounds,
the weighing and comparing of facts; 80x. and ot., on the
76
ia
KW
other hand, describe a subjective judgment growing out of
inclination or a view of facts in their relation to us. ny:
denotes a more deliberate and careful judgment than vou. ;
ot. a subjective judgment which has feeling rather than
thought (Sox.) for its ground. Cf. Schmidt ch. 17.|
75€ws, adv., (fr. 7dvs sweet, vleasant), with pleasure,
gladly: Mk. vi. 20; xii. 37; 2 Co. xi. 19. [From Soph.,
Plat. down. ]*
75m, adv., [fr. Hom. down; on deriv. see Vanitek p-
745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. everywh. of time, now, al-
ready, (Lat. jam): Mt. iii. 10; v. 28; xiv.15; Mk. iv. 37;
xi. 11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 T WH Tr txt., L Tr
mrg. br.]; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51; xix. 28 (that all things
were now finished and that nothing further remained
for him to do or to suffer); Acts xxvii. 9; Ro. xiii. 11
(that it is already time to wake up and indulge no
longer in sleep); 1 Co. iv. 8, and often; viv... 76n, now
already (Lat. jam nunc): 1 Jn. iv. 3; Hn wore, now at
last, at length now: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. Phil.
iv. 10. Syn. see dpri, fin.]
Siero (neut. plur. of the superl. #Sieros fr. #8ds), adv.,
most gladly (cf. 78éws): 2 Co. xii. 9,15. (Soph., Xen.,
Plat., al.) *
nSovq, -7s, 7, (FSopat), [Simon. 117, Hdt. down], pleas-
ure: 2 Pet. ii. 13; plur., Lk. viii. 14 (ai A8ovai r. Biov) ;
Tit. iii. 3; Jas. iv. 3; by meton. desires for pleasuré
(Grotius, cupiditates rerum voluptariarum), Jas. iv. 1.*
958-ocpos, -ov, (nds and dopn), sweet-smelling (Plin.
jucunde olens); neut. rd 93. as subst. garden-mint (i. q-
pivOn, Strab. 8, 3,14 p. 344; Theophr. hist. plant. 7, 7:
cf. caus. plant. 6, 22 (20)), a kind of small odoriferous
herb, with which the Jews used to strew the floors of
their houses and synagogues; (it was called by them
RAID, see Burtorf, Lex. talm. s. v. p. 1228 [p. 623 ed.
Fischer]) : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi.42, [BB.DD.]*
790s, -eos (-ovs), 7d, (akin to 60s, prob. fr. EQ, whence
jpa, eCw, [cf. Vanitek p. 379]); 1. a customary
abode, dwelling-place, haunt, customary state, (Hom.,
Hes., Hat., al.). 2. custom, usage, (cf. Germ. Sitzen,
Sitte) ; plur. ra 74n morals, character, (Lat. mores): 1 Co.
xv. 33 fr. Menander; cf. Menand. fragm. ed. Meineke
p: 75." (Sir. xx. 260(25):5) 4 Mace ar 291) Wi7eo12) =
ako; impf. feov (Acts xxviii. 23, where LT Tr WH
Ar\Oov); fut. 7; 1 aor. Héa (Lk. xiii. 35 RG; Rev. ii.
25; iii. 9 Rec.) ; pf. fa (often in Sept., as Gen. xlii. 7,
9; xlv.16; [xlvii. 4]; Josh. ix. 12 (7); Job xvi. 22,
etc.; in the N. T. once, Mk. viii. 3 R* LT Tr txt., see
WH. App. p. 169; the older and more elegant writ.
[ Aeschyl., Hdt., Thue., al.] use only the pres. impf. and
fut.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 743 sq.; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii.
205; [Veitch s. v.]; W. 87 (83); [B. 59 (51)]); Sept.
for §)3; to have come, have arrived, be present, [W. 274
(258); B. 203 (176)]; hence impf. with force of plupf.
(cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1136; Kriiger § 53, 1, 4): absol. of
persons, Mt. xxiv. 50; Mk. viii.3; Lk. xii. 46; xv. 27;
Jn. viile42 > Hebiexes 9: Ove. led neve 20 Ieevellicecol
iii. 9; xv. 4; foll. by azo with gen. of place, Mt. viii. 11;
Lk. xiii. 29; by ex with gen. of place, Ro. xi. 26; with
addition of eis w. ace. of place, Jn. iv. 47; paxpdbev, Mk.
viii. 3; mpds twa, Acts xxviii. 23 Rec.; metaph. to come
to one i. e. seek an intimacy with one, become his fol-
lower: Jn. vi. 37; émi twa, to come upon one (unexpect-
edly), Rev. iii. 3. of time and events: absol., Mt. xxiv.
14; Jn. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xviii. 8; fws av 7& [L
T WHTr in br. #&er; see above and B. 231 (199) | (se.
& xatpds), Ste etmnre, Lk. xiii. 35; ewi twa, metaph. to
come upon one, of things to be endured (as evils, calami-
tous times): Mt. xxiii. 36; Lk. xix.43. [Comp.: dv,
xaO-nKxw. | * :
mrt (L nad, T pret [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. et,
«; on the breathing cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr.
§ 408; WH édoi]), a Hebr. word, ‘98, my God: Mt.
xxvii. 46. [Cf. éAwi, and the ref. there.] *
‘HAt (R* HA [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 107], T Tr WH “Haei [see WH. App. p. 155,
and s. v. e, ¢]), indecl., Heli, the father of Joseph, the
busband of Mary: Lk. iii. 23.*
’"HAlas ([so R**2G; WH ’Hacias cf. WH. App. p.
155; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 and see eu, 1, but] L Tr ‘HAlas,
Tdf. ‘HXeias, [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg.
p- 107; WH. Intr. § 408; current edd. are not uni-
form]), -ov [B. 17 (16), 8; but once (viz. Lk. i. 17 T Tr
mrg. WH) -a], 6, (TON or WON i. e. either ‘strength of
Jehovah’ or ‘my God is Jehovah’), Elijah, a prophet
born at Thisbe [but see B. D. s. v., alsos. v. Tishbite ], the
unflinching champion of the theocracy in the reigns of
the idolatrous kings Ahab and Ahaziah. He was taken
up to heaven without dying, whence the Jews expected
he would return just before the advent of the Messiah,
whom he would prepare the minds of the Israelites to
receive (1 K. xvii—xix.; 2 K. ii. 6 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 12;
Mal. iv. 4 (iii. 22); Sir. xlviii. 1, 4, 12 [cf. Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, App. viii.]): Mt. xi. 14; xvi. 14;
xvii. 3 sq. 10-12; xxvii. 47, 49; Mk. vi. 15; viii. 28; ix.
4 sq. 11-13; xv. 35 sq.; Lk. i. 17; iv. 25 sq.; ix. 8, 19, 30,
33, 54[RGL]; Jn.i. 21, 25; Jas. v.17; ev ‘HAda, in the
narrative concerning Elijah, Ro. xi. 2 [see év, I. 1 d.].*
WAtkla, -as, 7, (AcE mature, of full age, Hom. Od. 18,
373 [al. of the same age; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.;
Pape, Lex. s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; 1. age, time of
life; a. univ.: Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [in these pass.
‘term or length of life’; but others refer them to 2
below; see Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. p. 4; Jas. Mori-
son, Com. on Mt. 1. c.] cf. m7xvs, and De Wette, Meyer,
Bleek on Mt. 1.c.; mapa xacpov 7Ackias, beyond the proper
stage of life [A. V. past age], Heb. xi. 11 (2 Mace. iv.
40; 4 Mace. v. 4). b. adult age, maturity: €yew nr
xiav[ A. V. to be of age], Jnvix. 21,23. e. suitable age
for anything; with gen. of the thing for which it is fit:
tov ydpov, Dem.; rov 75 ppoveiv, Plat. Eryx. p. 396 b.:
metaph. of an attained state of mind fit for a thing:
Tov mAnp@patos tov Xpiorod, the age in which we are
fitted to receive the fulness (see mAnpwpa, 1) of Christ,
Eph. iv. 13 [al. refer this to 2; cf. Ellic. in loc.]. 2:
stature (Dem., Plut., al.): ry Aria pixpds, Lk. xix. 3;
tpoxomrev mAckia, i. e. in height and comeliness of stature
277
nMépa
(Bengel, justam proceritatem nactus est et decoram), Lk.
ii. 52; cf. Meyer, Bleek, ad loc.*
tAlkos, -y, -ov, (HALE, see HAtkia), prop. as old as, as tall
as; univ. (Lat. quantus): how great, Col. ii. 1; Jas. iii.
5 cf. B. 253 (217) ]; how small (Leian. Hermot. 5), 4Aicow
nop, Jas. iii. 5 LT Tr WH [B. 1. c.].*
wAtos, -ov, 6 [often anarthrous, W. 120 (114); B. 89
(78)], (€An [root us to burn, cf. Curtius § 612]); Sept. for
wow; the sun: Mt.v.45; xiii.43; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. iv.
40; xxi. 25; Acts xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. i. 16, ete.
i. q. the rays of the sun, Rev. vii. 16; i. q. the light of
day: pn Brێrev rov AALov, of a blind man, Acts xiii. 11.
HAos, -ov, 6, a nail: Jn. xx. 25. [(From Hom. on.)]*
TpEis, see eye.
mbEépa, -as, 7, (fr. juepos, -ov, prop. juepa Spa the mild
time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.;
Vanitek p. 943]); Hebr. py; day; used 1. of the
natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sun-
set, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a.
prop. jjepas, by day, in the daytime, [cf. colloq. Eng.
of a day; W.§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 25; nye-
pas x. vuxros, day and night [cf. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob.
Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v.5; Lk.
xviii. 7; Actsix. 24; 1 Th.ii.9; iii.10; [2 Th. iii. 8 L
txt. Te WE et Tim.-vi'55) 2 Tim. s'S's; Reveive 83cvil.
15; xil.10; xiv.11; xx.10; nuépas péons, at midday,
Acts xxvi. 13; vixra cal nuepav [ W. 230 (216); B.§ 131,
11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx.31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyper-
bolically i. q. without intermission, Xatpevewv, Lk. ii. 37 ;
Acts xxvi. 7; nuépas 080s, a day’s journey, Lk. ii. 44
(Gen. xxxi. 23 [sds nuepas ddov, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 2, 9;
ef. W. 188 (177); B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Day’s Journey ]) ;
Tas nuepas, ace. of time [W. and B. as above], during the
days, Lk. xxi. 37; éxetvny tr. nuepay, Jn. i. 89 (40); macav
nuepay, daily, Acts v.42; é« Syvapiou tiv nuépav, so some-
times we say, for a shilling the day, Mt. xx. 2; Sadexa
elow Spat THs juepas, Jn. xi. 9; to the number of days
are added as many nights, Mt. iv. 2;
nwepa, day dawns, it grows light, Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii.
GSS JAG se Ie sou eoe sodie WS Seaaiy PEL Get BY)
(Xen. an. 2, 2,13; 7, 2, 34); meperaretv ev r. npepa, Jn.
xi. 95 1 nuépa paiver, Rev. viii. 12; 7 nyepa xAive, the day
declines, it is towards evening, Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29. b.
metaph. the ‘day’ is regarded as the time for abstaining
from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are
perpetrated at night and in darkness: 1 Th. v. 5, 8;
hence 6 aid obros (see aly, 3) is likened to the night,
ai@y péh\Awy to day, and Christians are admonished to
live decorously as though it were light, i. e. as if 6 alay
6 peAdAov were already come, Ro. xiii. 12 sq. €ws nyépa
eoriv while it is day, i. e. while life gives one an oppor-
tunity to work, Jn. ix. 4. of the light of knowledge,
2h Pet is 1:92 2. of the civil day, or the space of
twenty-four hours (thus including the night): Mt. vi. 34;
Mk. vi. 21; Lk. xiii. 14, etc.; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv.
13; to hours, months, years, Rev. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10;
1 ev nuépa tpupn, the revelling of a day, i. e. ephemeral,
very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above];
xli. 40; yivera
Huepa
énrdkis THs nu. seven times in the (space of a) day, Lk.
xvii. 4; the dat. nucpa of the day on (in) which [cf. W.
§ 31,9; B. § 133 (26)]: as rpirn nyépa, Mt. xvi. 21; Mk.
ix. 31 [Ree.]; Lk. xvii. 29 sq.; Acts ii. 41, etc.; nyeépa x.
nuepa, day by day, every day, 2 Co. iv. 16 (after the
Hebr. oy) oY Esth. iii. 4, where Sept. ka@ éxaoryny npe-
pay, and Dj’ Oj’ Ps. xvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. jyepav
xa?’ ryuepav; [cf. W. 463 (432) ]); nuépav e& ruepas (see
ex, IV. 2), 2 Pet. ii. 8; as an ace. of time [W. 230 (215
sq-); B. § 131, 11]: 6dnv rt. qyépav, Ro. vill. 36; x. 21;
piav nuepav, Acts xxi. 7; and in the plur., Jn. ii. 12; iv.
AQ} xi 16s eACtSixe LO) yex. 4.8)5 xvi. lhc 6 sfx, 4oollOs
xxv. 6, 14;| xxvii. 7,12 [L dat.], 14; Gal.1.18;. Rev: xi.
3,9. joined with Prepositions: dazé with gen. from
2/1 «forth, from... on, Mt..xxil. 46; Jn. x1..53 j.Acts x.
30; xx.18; Phil. i.5; dype w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv.
S8 seb 1. 20yexvileds ; ) Actsaie2® [22 Mdial| suai 2or
XXxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; dype wevre nuepor, until five days had
passed, i. e. after five days, Acts xx. 6; péype w. gen. until,
Mt. xxviii. 15 [L Tr, WH in br.]; ews w. gen. until, Mt.
xxvii. 64; Acts i. 22 [T dypr]; Ro. xi. 8; dua w. gen., see
6ua, A. IL; mpd w. gen. before, Jn. xii. 1 (on which see mpd,
b.); ev w. dat. sing., Mt. xxiv.50; Lk.i.59; Jn. v.9; 1 Co.
x.8[LT Tr WH txt. om. ev]; Heb. iv. 4, ete.; ev w. dat.
plur., Mt. xxvii.40; Mk. xv. 29 [LT Trom. WH br. ev];
Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WI br. ev], 20, ete. ; ets, unto, (against), Jn.
xii. 7; Rev. ix.15; émi w. ace. for, (Germ. auf... hin),
Acts xiii. 31 (for many days successively) ; xvi. 18; xxvii.
20; Heb. xi. 30; ka® nuépar, daily [W. 401 (374 sq.) ],
Met. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xvi. 19; xxii.53; Acts
it. 26 GqQusnills 25 esas, OG exino ol Co. xv. 3 lee? (Coupe.
28; Heb. vii. 27; x. 11; also 76 xa& npepav, Lk. xi. 3;
xix.47; Acts xvii. 11 [LT Tr txt.om.WH br. 7], (Polyb.
4,18, 2; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 734; [Jelf § 456]; Bnhdy. p.
329; B. 96 (84)); xa® éxaorny nuepav, every day, Heb.
iii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2,12); also card macav nu. Acts
Xvil. 17; perd, after, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi. 2; xxvii.63; Mk.
With BIS Iie VEbS dinemeZ ie soe WS Iori, DF sage G9,
etc. ov mdelovs eioly enol nuepat ad’ fs, Sc. nuepas, Acts
xxiv. 1l. <A specification of the number of days is
thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were
adverbially and without any grammatical connection,
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 310 sq.; W. 516 (481) and § 62,
2; [B. 139 (122)]): On nuepa (Ree. nuépas, by correc-
tion) tpeis, Mt.xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2;
ix.,28:
aoe nuepar xt, Lk.
nuepov Ovayevopevov tiver, certain days having
intervened, Acts xxv. 13. nyepa and jpepae are used w.
the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity
usually celebrated on a fixed day: rév d¢iper, Acts xii.
33 THs mevrexootns, Acts il. 1; xx. 163; tov caSParov,
Lk. xiii. 14, 16; Jn. xix. 313 1 Kupiakry nuépa, the Lord’s
day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, Sun-
day therefore, Rev. i. 10; the foll. phrases also have
reference to sacred or festival days: xpivew nuépay rap’
nuepav, to exalt one day above another, and kpivew macav
nuepav, to esteem every day sacred, Ro. xiv. 5; poveiv
tiv nuepay, to regard a particular day that is selected for
religious services, Ro. xiv. 6; nuépas maparnpeiaba, to
278
7pepa
observe days, Gal. iv. 10. After the Hebr. usage, which
in reference to a definite period of time now elapsed
speaks of a certain number of days as fulfilled or
completed (see Gesenius s. v. x51), we have the
phrases erAno@noav ai juepar Tis ecroupyias, the days
spent in priestly service, Lk. i. 23 (when he had been
employed in sacred duties for the appointed time); rod
mepitepery avtov, for him to be circumcised, Lk. ii. 21;
Tov kadapicpov aditay, ib. 22; cuvtedeobercav nuepav, Lk.
iv. 2; tTeNewwodvrwy tas jwepas, when they had spent
there the time appointed, Lk. ii. 43; év r@ cupmdnpod-
wat Tas Hu. THS avadynWews avrov, when the number of
days was now being completed which the reception of
Jesus into heaven required, i. e. before which that re-
ception could not occur, Lk. ix. 51; 7 éexkmAnpwots Tav
npepa@v Tou dywopod, the fulfilment of the days required
for the purification, Acts xxi. 26; ovvtehouvtat ai nuepat,
ib. 27; €v t@ coupmAnpodtoba Tt. nuepav ths TevTeKoaTHs,
when the measure of time needed for the day of Pente-
cost was being completed, i. e. on the very day of Pen-
tecost, Acts ii. 1. As in some of the exx. just adduced
nuepa is joined to the gen. of a thing to be done or to
happen on a certain day, so also in nu. tod évtadiacpod,
Jn. xii. 7; dvadeiEews, Lk. i. 80. with gen. of pers., ev
TH Nuepa oov [but LT Tr WH om. oov] in the day favor-
able for thee, the day on which salvation is offered thee
and can be obtained, Lk. xix. 42 (Polyb. 18, 5, 8 pa
mapns Tov Kaipov ... Of vov eat Nuepa, ads 6 KaLpds;
“meus dies est, tempore accepto utimur” Sen. Med.
1017). 3. of the last day of the present age (see
aiwv, 3), the day in which Christ will return from heaven,
raise the dead, hold the final judgment, and perfect his
kingdom, the foll. expressions are used: 7) #uepa, simply,
Ro. xiii, 12 +, Heb. x.125, ef. Wh. v.43 9) ypepanxav
xuplov, Xprotov, Inaov Xpiorov, Tov viov tov avOparov,
Lk. xvii.'24 RiGT Tr Wiimre:; 1. Co.a28shy..5 92)\Ca:
1145) Phil. 196,105. Ch. w.i25)2 Th. 11..2552 betel Oras
nepa Kupiov n peyadn, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31 (ili. 4)) 5
nueva 7) 0 vios TOV avOpwrov amoxadimrera, Lk. xvii. 30; 7
nuepa T. Oeod, 2 Pet. iii. 12; 1 nuepa exeivyn 1 peyadn Tov
mavtokpatopos, Rev. xvi. 14, (even in the prophecies of
the O.T. the day of Jehovah is spoken of, in which Jehovah
will execute terrible judgment upon his adversaries, as
Aerie Ways tS eS Ae, Shs WAS Sab Ge OS Aer se eS, BOs
Jer. xxvi. 10 (xlvi. 10); Ezek. xiii.5; xxx. 2 sqq.; Ob.
15; Zeph. i. 7 sqq.; Mal. iii. 17); 9 np. exetvn and éexeivyn
7 Hey Mt. vil. 22; LK. vi. 23; x. 12; xxi. 34; 2 Thi. 10;
2 Tim. i. 12,183 iv. 83; 9 éeoyarn ny., Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54;
xi. 24; xii. 48; nyu. arodutpooews, Eph. iv. 30; emurxomis
(see émuxorn, b.), 1 Pet. ii. 12; xpicews, Mt. x. 15; xi.
POVNET Satie stare Niles hae WIL ny iors 2 Veta mie OE Tame 775 ak
Acts xvii. 313; tis kpicews, 1 Jn. iv. 17; dpyns k. aroka-
AUWews Sixaroxpicias 7. Oeov, Ro. ii. 5 (Dyt-DY, Ezek.
xxii. 24; TYAN OW, Zeph. ii. 3 sq.; [AVI-o, Prov.
xi.4; Zeph. i. 15, 18, ete.]); 7) mu. 9) weyddn THs dpyns
avtov, Rev. vi. 17; nu. ohayns, of slaughter (of the
wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(Jer. xii. 3, ete.) ]. Paul, in allusion
to the phrase nuépa kupiov, uses the expression avOparivy
LETEPOS
nueépa for a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of
trial [A. V. man’s judgment} (cf. the Germ. Landtag,
Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 3. 4. By a Hebraistic usage
(though one not entirely unknown to Grk. writ.; cf. |
Soph. Aj. 131, 623; Eur. Ion 720) it is used of time in
general, (as the Lat. dies is sometimes): Jn. xiv. 20;
Mul o Moo b evil. oer. B. 316\(271)ee Wiel oT!
(531) ]; tiv evry juepav, the time when I should appear
amony men as Messiah, Jn. vili. 565 ev 7) Nu TH mwovnpa,
in the time of troubles and assaults with which demons
try Christians, Eph. vi. 13; nu. owrnpias, the time when
any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2; els nuépay aiavos,
for all time, forever (see aiwy, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 18; much
oftener in the plur.: nuépat rovnpai, Eph. v. 16° ad’ mye-
pv dpxaiay, Acts xv. 7; ai mpdrepov nu. Heb. x. 32;
maocas Tas jpepas, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20
(ann-9 3, Deut. iv. 40; v. 26 (29), and very often; ara
mavra, Hom. Il. 8, 539; 12,133; 13, 826, etc.) ; ai érya-
Tat nu. (see €xyaros, 1 sub fin.), Acts ii.17; 2 Tim. iii. 1;
Jas. v.33 ai 74. atta, the present time, Acts iii. 24; the
time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, ete.;
év Tais nu. exeivars (see exeivos, 2 b. p. 195"); mpd rovTwy
Tay nuepov, Acts v. 36; Xxi. 38; mpds dAlyas qu. for a
short time, Heb. xii. 10; eAXedoovra ny. orav etec., Mt. ix.
15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk. v. 35; dre etc. Lk. xvii. 22; Féovow
ne. em o¢, kai foll. by a fut. Lk. xix. 43; €pyovrat ju., Kai
foll. by fut. Heb. viii. 8; €Xevoovra: or epyovrat nu., ev ais
etc., Lk. xxi. 6; xxiii. 29. witha gen. of the thing done
or to happen: rns anroypadns, Acts v. 37; Hs davis,
Rev. x. 7; rs capkos avrov, of his earthly life, Heb. v.
7. ai nu. with the gen. of a pers., one’s time, one’s days,
i. e. in which he lived, or held office: Mt. ii. 1; xi. 12;
MEX TIES OXI Ve Rois Kenton live 2o eexVileZOm2 6 mActs
Vii. 45; xiii. 41; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xxvi. 1; 1 S. xvii.
HORM 2iSaexcxsles le Keexe 21 Esthet Sire xlnivedmaclvae
7; Tob. i. 2; 1 Mace xiv. 36, ete.) ; ai muépae tod viod
tou avOp. the time immediately preceding the return of
Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. xvii. 26; pilav rov jy. rod
vi. tr. avOp a single day of that most blessed future time
when, all hostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign,
Lk. xvii. 22. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists
who imitate them measure the duration and length also
of human life by the number of days: macas ras juépas
[Lmrg. Trmrg. WH dat.] ris (ons [GL T Tr WH om. ]
npov, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq.;
Judith-x. 3): ) Lob: i. 2'(3); Sir. xxii. 12) xxx.32 (24);
1 Mace. ix. 71); mpoBeBnkas ev rats nuepais avrov, far
advanced in age, Lk. i. 7,18; ii. 36 (O°N°3 N3, [Sept.
mpoB. nuepev or nuepas |, Gen. xviii. 11; xxiv. 1; Josh.
xill. 1; [xxili. 1; 1 K.i.1; see mpoBaiva, fin.]); apx7
npepa@v, beginning of life, Heb. vii. 3 (ai éryarar nuepa
tuwvds, one’s last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. c. 1);
npepat ayabai, 1 Pet. iii. 10.
METEpOS, -epa, -epov, (Nets), possess. pron. of the 1
pers. plur., [fr. Hom. down], our: with a subst., Acts ii.
11; xxiv..6 [Ree:]; xxvi.5; Ro.xv. 4; [1 Co. xv. 31
Rec. ]; 2 Tim. iv. 15; 1 Jn. i. 3; ii. 2; of jpérepor,
substantively, ‘our people,’ (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14.
9
aod
79
7)PELOS
[Neut. 76 qyer. substantively: Lk. xvi. 12 WII txt. Cf.
W. § 22, 7sqq.; B. § 127, 19 sqq.]*
i BAY, see 7.
jpbavis, -és, (fr. Fue half, and Oynokw, 2 aor. €bavov),
half dead: Lk. x. 30. ([Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62;
Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. 11];
alae
‘pious, -era, -v; gen. nu'couvs (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex.
xxv. 9; etc.], for the uncontr. form juiceos which is more
com. in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Hdt.
down ]); neut. plur. nuion, Lk. xix. 8 R G,a form in use
from Theophr. down, for the earlier jpicea adopted by
Lehm. (cf. Passow [also L. and S.] s. v.; W. § 9, 2d.;
npioecain T Tr [juiova WI] seems due to a corruption of
the copyists, see Steph. Thes.iv. p. 170; Bttm. Ausf. Spr.
i. p. 248; Alex. Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 194
sq.; [N. T. Gram. 14 (18); Tdf. Proleg. p. 118; but esp.
WH. App. p. 158]); Sept. for msn, much oftener
xn; half; it takes the gender and number of the
annexed substantive (where 16 jyucv might have been
expected): ta nulon tov vrapydvtov, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk.
writ. say 6 mous Tov Biov, of nuioes TOY inmméwy, see
Passow s. v.; [L. and 8S. s. v. I. 2; Kiihner § 405, 5c.];
Tas juices Tav Suvayewv, 1 Mace. iii. 34,37); neut. ro
Hucov, substantively, the half; without the art. a half:
€ws nuloous THs BaowwWeias pou (Esth. v. 3; vii. 2), Mk. vi.
233 mpecv Kaipov, Rev. xii. 14; as in class. Grk., cai
jpeov is added to cardinal numbers even where they are
connected with masc. and fem. substantives, as tpeis
nuepas Kat jusov, three days and a half, Rev. xi. 9, 11,
(6Weveiv Svoiv Spaxpav kat nuicovs, Ath. 6 p. 274 ¢.; dv0
or €vos mxewv kal jpicouvs, Ex. xxv. 16; xxvi. 16;
xxxviii. 1 [Alex.]); with «ai omitted: Rev. xi. 9 Tdf.
ed. 7 (yuptddev érra npicovs, Plut. Mar. 34).*
yproprov and (LT Tr WH) nyiwpor (cf. Kiihner § 185,
6,2; [Jelf § 165, 6, 1 a.]), -ov, 7d, (fr. Hye and wpa, cf. rd
MLKOTUALOY, 1 LLLOLPLOV, N)LLKOO LLOV, T)JLLXOLVLKLOV, T)L4L@/30ALOV,
ete.), half an hour. Rev. vill. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133; Geop.;
aliiict. (Soph luex.s. v.']-)*
yvika, arel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom. down], at which
time; when: foll. by the indic. pres., of a thing that
actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 RG; foll. by a with
subj. pres., whensoever: ibid. L T Tr WH; foll. by av
and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., at
length when (whensoever it shall have etc.) : 2 Co. iii. 16;
Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr.
see W. 296 (278) sq.; 308 (289); B.§ 139, 33.]*
qmep, see 7, 4 d.
qos, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently
derived fr. ézos, eizeiv, so that it prop. means affable [so
Etym. Magn. 434, 20; but cf. Vaniéek p. 32]); fr. Hom.
down; mild, gentle: 1 Th. ii. 7 (where L WH vnmuwos, q. v.
fin.) ; mpds twa, 2 Tim. ii. 24.*
"Hp, Lehm. “Hp [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 107], (73) watchful, fr. 13) to be awake), E7,
one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*
Wpepos, -ov, quiet, tranquil: jpepov x. navxov Biov, 1
Tim. ii. 2. (Leian. trag. 207; Eustath., Hesych.; com-
‘Hpwdns
parat. npeueorepos, fr. an unused npeuns, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5,
63; more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. is the adv.
npepa. [Cf. W.§11 fin.; B. 28 (24).])*
“Hpdbns, -ov, 6, (equiv. to “Hpwidns, sprung from a hero:
hence the Etym. Magn. pp. 165, 43; 437, 56 directs it to
be written ‘Hpoéns [so WH], as it is found also in certain
inscriptions [cf. Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 9; WH. Intr.
§ 410; Tdf. Proleg. 109; Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]),
Herod, the name of a royal family that flourished among
the Jews in the time of Jesus and the apostles. In the
N. T. are mentioned, 1. the one who gave the family
its name, Herod surnamed the Great, a son of Antipater
of Idumza. Appointed king of Judza B.c. 40 by the
Roman senate at the suggestion of Antony and with the
consent of Octavian, he at length overcame the great
opposition which the country made to him and took
possession of the kingdom B. c. 37; and, after the battle
of Actium, he was confirmed in it by Octavian, whose
favor he ever after enjoyed. He was brave and skilled
in war, learned and sagacious; but also extremely sus-
picious and cruel. Hence he destroyed the entire royal
family of the Hasmonzans, put to death many of the
Jews that opposed his government, and proceeded to
kill even his dearly beloved wife Mariamne of the Has-
monzan line and the two sons she had borne him. By
these acts of bloodshed, and especially by his love and
imitation of Roman customs and institutions and by the
burdensome taxes imposed upon his subjects, he so
alienated the Jews that he was unable to regain their favor
by his splendid restoration of the temple and other acts
of munificence. He died in the 70th year of his age, the
37th of his reign, the 4th before the Dionysian era. Cf.
Joseph. antt. 14, 14,4; 15,6, 7; 7,4; 8,1; 16, 5,4;
11,6, etc. In his closing years John the Baptist and
Christ were born, Mt. ii.1; Lk. i. 5; Matthew narrates
in ch. ii. (cf. Macrob. sat. 2, 4) that he commanded the
male children in Bethlehem from two years old and under
to be slain. Cf. especially Keim in Schenkel iii. 27
sqq-; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 15, and the books
there mentioned. 2. Herod surnamed Antipas, son
of Herod the Great and Malthace, a Samaritan woman.
After the death of his father he was appointed by the
Romans tetrach of Galilee and Perea. His first wife
was a daughter of Aretas, king of Arabia; but he sub-
sequently repudiated her and took to himself Herodias,
the wife of his brother Herod (see ®iAurmos, 1) ; and in
consequence Aretas, his father-in-law, made war against
him and conquered him. He cast John the Baptist into
prison because John had rebuked him for this unlaw-
ful connection ; and afterwards, at the instigation of
Herodias, he ordered him to be beheaded. Induced by
her, too, he went to Rome to obtain from the emperor
the title of king. But in consequence of accusations
brought against him by Herod Agrippa I., Caligula
banished him (4.p. 39) to Lugdunum in Gaul, where he
seems to have died. [On the statement of Joseph. (b.
j- 2, 9, 6) that he died in Spain see the conjecture in
B. D. s. v. Herodias.] He was light-minded, sensual,
280
‘Hpwétas
vicious, (Joseph. antt. 17, 1,3; 8,1; 11,4; 18, 5,1; 7,
1 sq.; b.j. 2,9, 6). In the N. T. he is mentioned by
the simple name of Herod in Mt. xiv. 1, 3, 6; Mk. vi.
16-18, 20-22; vii. 15; Lk. iii. 1, 19; viii. 3; ix. 7, 9;
xiii. 31; xxiii. 7 sq. 11 sq. 15; Acts iv. 27; xiii. 1; once,
Mk. vi. 14, he is called Bactdeds, either improperly, or
in the sense of royal lineage (see Baawrevs). Cf.
Keim I. c. p. 42 sqq.; Schiirer 1. c. p. 232 sqq. 3.
Herod Agrippa I. (who is called by Luke simply Herod,
by Josephus everywhere Agrippa), son of Aristobulus
and Berenice, and grandson of Herod the Great. After
various changes of fortune, he gained the favor of the
emperors Caligula and Claudius to such a degree that
he gradually obtained the government of all Palestine,
with the title of king. He died at Caesarea, a.p. 44,
at the age of 54, in the seventh [or 4th, reckoning from
the extension of his dominions by Claudius] year of his
reign (Joseph. antt. 17, 1,2; 18, 6; 19, 4,5; 6,1; 7,
3; b.j. 2, 11, 6), just after having ordered James the
apostle, son of Zebedee, to be slain, and Peter to be cast
into prison: Acts xii. 1, 6,11, 19-21. Cf. Keim 1. c. p.
49 syq.; Schiirer 1. c. p. 290 sqq.; [Farrar, St. Paul,
vol. ii. Excurs. vi. ]. 4. (Herod) Agrippa II., son of
the preceding. When his father died he was a youth of
seventeen. In a.b. 48 he received from Claudius Cesar
the government of Chalcis, with the right of appointing
the Jewish high-priests, together with the care and over-
sight of the temple at Jerusalem. Four years later
Claudius took from him Chalcis and gave him instead a
larger dominion, viz. Batanwa, Trachonitis, and Gaul-
anitis, with the title of king. To these regions Nero, in
A.D. 53, added Tiberias and Tarichaeae and the Perzan
Julias, with fourteen neighboring villages. Cf. Joseph.
antt./ 19; '9, 1 sq-59'20; 1, 3:3°15,/2 5 75915) 8) Asi begiges dies
land 8. Inthe N.T. he is mentioned in Acts xxv. 13,
22-26; xxvi. 1 sq. (7), 19, 27 sq. 32. In the Jewish
war, although he strove in vain to restrain the fury of
the seditious and bellicose populace, he did not desert
the Roman side. After the fall of Jerusalem, he was
vested with praetorian rank and kept the kingdom en-
tire until his death, which took place in the third year
of the emperor Trajan, [the 73d of his life, and 52nd of
his reign]. He was the last representative of the He-
rodian dynasty. Cf. Keim l. c. p. 56 sqq.; Schiirer 1. c.
p- 315 sqq. [Less complete accounts of the family may
be found in BB.DD.; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 s. v.;
an extended narrative in Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch.
vol. i. Abschn. v. Cf. also Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, bk. ii. ch. ii. and App. iv.]
“HpwSiavot [WH “Hpw6., see “Hpwdns and I, +; cf. W.
§ 16, 2 y.], -dv, of, Herodians, i. e. Herod’s partisans (ot
7a ‘Hpwdov dpovodvres, Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 10): Mé.
xxii. 16; Mk. iii. 6; xii. 13. Cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz.
iii. 130 sqq. [Eng. trans. v. p. 156 sq.], and in Schenkel
iii. 65 sqq.; [cf. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim, Index s. v.].*
“Hpwitds [WH “Hpwdids, see “Hpwdns and I, c], -ados, n,
Herodias, daughter of Aristobulus and granddaughter
of Herod the Great. She was first married to Herod
‘“HpwSiwv
[Philip (see 42rros, 1)], son of Herod the Great, a
man in private life; but she afterwards formed an un-
lawful union with Herod Antipas, whom she induced
not only to slay John the Baptist but also to make the
journey to Rome which ruined him; at last she followed
him into exile in Gaul (see ‘Hpwéns, 2): Mt. xiv. 3, 6;
Mk. vi. 17, 19, 22 [here WH R mrg. avrov]; Lk. iii. 19.*
‘“HpwStov [WH “Hpod., see “Hpwédns and I, ¢], -wvos, 6,
Herodion, a certain Christian, [Paul’s “ kinsman” (see
avyyevns) |: Ro. xvi. 11.*
‘Hoatas (Lchm. *Ho. [ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH
’*Hoaias, see I, «]), -ov [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (so Sept. for
wiyw, Jehovah's help, fr. pw. and A), Zsatah (Vulg.
Tsaias, in the Fathers also Esaias), a celebrated Hebrew
prophet, who prophesied in the reigns of Uzziah, Jo-
tham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah: Mt. iii. 3; iv. 14; viii. 17;
xii. 17; xiii. 14; (xiii. 35 acc. to the reading of cod.
Sin. and other authorities, rightly approved of by Bleek
[Hort (as below), al.], and received into the text by Tdf.
[noted in mrg. by WH, see their App. ad loc.; per con-
tra cf. Meyer or Ellicott (i. e. Plumptre in N. T. Com.) ad
loc.}); xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. iii. 4; iv. 17; Jn. i. 23;
xii. 38 sq. 41; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. ix. 27, 29; x. 16, 20;
xv. 12; i. q. the book of the prophecies of Isaiah, Acts
viii. 28, 30; év (7) ‘Hoaia, Mk. i. 2G Ltxt. T Tr WH*
*Hoai [“Ho. Ro. ix. 13 R* Tr; Heb. xii. 16 R*; Heb.
xi. 20 Re], 6, (wy i.e. hairy [Gen. xxv. 25; Joseph.
antt. 1, 18, 1]), indecl., Esau, the firstborn son of Isaac:
Ro. ix. 13; Heb. xi. 20; xi. 16.*
Woodonat, see 7rraw and s. Vv. 3, g, s.
[yoowv, see 7rrav. |
yovxatw; 1 aor. yovyaca; (Hovxos [i. q. novxeos]) ;
as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, to keep quiet,i.e. a.
to rest, to cease from labor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead
a quiet life, said of those who are not running hither
and thither, but stay at home and mind their business :
Pee iv. if: c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold
one’s peace: Lk. xiv. 4 (3); Acts xi. 18; xxi. 14, (Job
xxxli. 7; novyacav kal ovx evpoaav Adyov, Neh. v. 8).*
[Syn. Houxd ery, oryav, o1w7 Gv: qo. describes a quiet
condition in the general, inclusive of silence; ovy. de-
scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially
in speechlessness (silence from fear, grief, awe, etc.) ; oiw7.,
the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence
from speech. esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i.
ch. 9; iv. ch. 175.]
yovxla, -as, 7, (fr the adj. yovxwos, q. v.; the fem. ex-
presses the general notion [ W. 95 (90)], cf. airia, apern,
281 mY0s
€x9pa, etc.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. quietness: descrip-
tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own
work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of
others, 2 Th. iii. 12. 2. silence: Acts xxii. 2; 1 Tim.
i. 1ieq.*
WrvXLos, -a, -ov, [ (perh. akin to jar to sit, Lat. sedatus;
cf. Curtius § 568; Vanitéek p. 77)]; fr. Hom. down;
quiet, tranquil: 1 Pet. iii. 4; Bios, 1 Tim. ii. 2; Joseph.
aAnttreloslos le .
qWToL, see 7, 4 e.
ytrdaw: (7Trwv); to make less, inferior, to overcome
(the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1
[other exx. in Veitch s. v.]); Pass. yrrdoua, fr. [Soph.
and] Hdt. down; pf. #rrnuar; 1 aor. nrrnOnv (jnoowOny,
2 Co. xii. 13 LT Tr WH; in opp. to which form ef.
‘ritzsche, De conform. N. T. crit. quam Lcehm. ed. p. 32
[yet see Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ad fid. cod. Vat. p. xe.;
WH. App. p. 166; B. 59 (52); Veitch s. v.]); to be made
inferior; to be overcome, worsted: in war, tnd twos,
2 Mace. x. 24; univ., revi [cf. B. 168 (147); W. 219
(206) ], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one,
2 Pet. ii. 19; absol. ib. 20. ri tmép twa, i. q. Arrov Exo
tt, to hold a thing inferior, set below, [on the ace. (6) ef.
B. § 131, 10; and on the compar. use of imép see trép,
Ti 2"b:}, 2 CoPxii. 13%
yrrypa (cf. B. 7; WH. App. p. 166], -ros, 76, (qrrdo-
pac) ; 1. a diminution, decrease: i. e. defeat, Is. xxxi.
8; avroy, brought upon the Jewish people in that so few
of them had turned to Christ, Ro. xi. 12 [R. V. loss].
2. loss, sc. as respects salvation, 1 Co. vi. 7 [R. V. txt.
defect]. Cf. Meyer [but cf. his 6te Aufl.] on each pass.
(Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) *
ytrev or [so L TTr WH, see 5, o, s] joowr, -ov, infe-
rior; neut. adverbially [fr. Hom. down] Jess, 2 Co. xii.
15; eis ro Racor, for the worse (that ye may be made
worse; opp. to eis Td kpeirrov), 1 Co. xi. 17.*
7x€ (-@); (jxos, q. v-); [fr. Hesiod down]; to sound:
1 Co. xiii. 1; used of the roaring of the sea, Lk. xxi. 25
Ree. [Comp.: e&, xat-nxéo. | *
nxos [cf. Lat. echo, vox, Germ. sprechen, etc.; Vaniéek
p- 858], -ov, 6, and (Lk. xxi. 25 GL T Tr WH) 10 jos,
-ous (cf. W. 65 (64); [B. 23 (20)]; Delitzsch on Heb. xii.
19 p. 638; [or nyous may come fr. ny@, -ovs, see esp. WH.
App. p. 158°; Mey. on Lk. as below]) ; 1. a sound,
noise: Acts ii. 2; Heb. xii. 19; spoken of the roar of
the sea’s waves, Lk. xxi. 25 GLT Tr WH. 2. rumor,
report: mepi twos, Lk. iv. 37.*
282
0
Oadédaios
@aSSaios, -ov, 6, (IN, perh. large-hearted or coura-
geous, although it has not been shown that 14 equiv. to
the Hebr. ww can mean pectus as well as mamma: [some
would connect the terms by the fact that the ‘child of
one’s heart’ may be also described as a ‘ bosom-child’; but
see B.D. s. v. Jude]), Thaddeus, a surname of the
apostle Jude; he was also called Lebbwus and was the
brother of James the less: Mt.x.3 RGLTrWH; Mk.
iii. 18. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Keil on Mt.1.c.; WH. App.
p- 11%. The latter hold the name A¢Saios to be due to
an early attempt to bring Levi (Aeveis) the publican
(Lk. v. 27) within the Twelve. ]*
Oadracoa [cf. B. 7], -ys, 7, (akin to dds [better, allied
to tapdoow etc., from its tossing; cf. Vanitek, p. 803];
Sept. for 0°), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinc-
tion from wéAayos see the latter word]; a. univ.:
Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2, 6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix.
27: 2Co. xi. 26: Heb. xi. 12; Jas.1.6; Jude 13; Rev.
vii. 1-3, etc.; epyaterOar thv Oar. (see epyaopat, 2 a.),
Rey. xviii. 17; 1d weAayos tHs Gad. (see méAayos, a-), Mt.
xviii. 6; joined with yj and ovpavds it forms a periph-
rasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v.
13;3oxsnGu(1a, WEL br-i);> xiv. 47, «(ace (735 sr exly.
(exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2, 10,1]); among
the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass
is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this
is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used
[even without the art., cf. W.121 (115); B. § 124, 8b.]
of the Mediterranean Sea: Acts x. 6,32; xvii.14; of
the Red Sea (see épuOpds), 7 epvOpa Oad., Acts vil. 36;
1 Co. x. 1 sq.; Heb. xi. 29. By a usage foreign to native
Grk. writ. [ef. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351%, 8 9 imo
tov Kavxacov ivy nv Kadovow ot exet Oadartay, and
Hesych. defines Aiuyvn: 7 Oddagoa Kat 6 wkeavds| em-
ployed like the Hebr. 0° [e. g. Num. xxxiv. 11], by Mt.
Mk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the Lake of Tevynaa-
pet (q. V-): 4 OaX. THs T'adtAaias, Mt. iv. 18; xv. 29; Mk.
i.16; vii. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is
called mare Suebicum, the Suabian Sea); tis TyBepiddos,
Jn. xxi. 1; tas Taded. trys TeBepeados (on which twofold
gen. cf. W. § 30,3 N. 3; [B.400 (343) ]), Jn. vi.1; more
frequently simply 7 Oadaoca: Mt. iv. 15,18; viii. 24, 26
Bq. 32); sill. 1, ete.;. Mikal ise iit Fjciv-1, 395 Vv. 13,
etc.; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25; xxi. 7. Cf. Furrer in Schen-
kel ii. 322 sqq.; [see Tevynoaper ].
Badrro ; 1. prop. to warm, keep warm, (Lat. foveo) :
Hom. et sqq. 2. like the Lat. foveo, i. q. to cherish
with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29;
1 Th. ii. 7; ({‘Theoer. 14, 38]; Alciphr. 2, 4; Antonin.
10s 1D) Ge
Oavaros
Odpap [Treg. Gaudp), 4, (WN [i. e. palm-tree]), Ta-
mar, prop. name of a woman, the daughter-in-law of
Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. xxxviii. 6): Mt.
i. 3
BapPew, -O; Pass., impf. €dapBovpnv; 1 aor. CapBnOnv;
(OapuBos, q- v-) 5 1. to be astonished: Acts ix. 6 Ree.
(Hom., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify: 2S. xxii.
5; pass. to be amazed: Mk. i. 27; x. 32; foll. by emi w.
dat. of the thing, Mk. x. 24; to be frightened, 1 Mace.
vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Plut. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp.:
ex-Oap Sew. | *
OapBos [allied with tapos amazement, fr. a Sanskrit
root signifying to render immovable; Curtius § 233;
Vaniéek p. 1180], -ouvs, 76; fr. Hom. down; amazement:
Lk. iv. 365) ve 9s Acts iin. 10
Oavacoipos, -ov, (Gaveiv, Oavaros), deadly: Mk. xvi. 18.
({Aeschyl].], Soph., Eur., Plat., sqq.) *
Bavarn-dédpos, -ov, (avaros and déepw), death-bringing,
deadly: Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22; Job xxxiii. 23;
4 Mace. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl., Plat., Arist.,
Diod., Xen., Plut., al.) *
Odvaros, -ov, 6, (Gaveiv); Sept. for ny and nn, also
for 135 pestilence [ W. 29 note]; (one of the nouns often
anarthrous, ef. W. § 19, 1s. v.; [B. § 124, 8¢.]; Grimm,
Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop. the death of
the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent)
of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is
ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. adov] (on
this see ddiv); Phil. ii. 27,30; Heb. vii. 23; ix. 15 sq.;
Rev. ix.6; xviii. 8; opp. to fon, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii.
22; 2Co.i. 9; Phil. i. 20; with the implied idea of future
misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21; 2 Tim. i. 10;
Heb. ii. 14 sq.; i. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12.
Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was con-
ceived of as being very dark, yopa kai oxida Gavdrov
(098) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e.
figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of igno-
rance and sin: Mt. iv. 16; Lk.i. 79, (fr. Is. ix. 2); @ava-
ros is used of the punishment of Christ, Ro. v. 10; vi.
3-5; 1 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii..10; Col. 1.22; Heb. 11. [9];
14; oa Cew twa €k Oavdrou, to free from the fear of death,
| to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Heb. v. 7 [but
al. al.]; pvecOae ex Oavdrov, to deliver from the danger
of death, 2 Co. i. 10; plur. @avaror, deaths (i. e. morte!
perils) of various kinds, 2 Co. xi. 23; mepiduros ews
Gavdrov, even unto death, i. e. so that am almost dying of
sorrow, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34, (AeAdmnpat €ws Oava-
rov, Jonah iv. 9; Avr €ws Oavarov, Sir. xxxvii. 2, cf.
Jude. xvi. 16); wéype Oavdrov, so as not to refuse to un-
dergo even death, Phil. ii. 8; also aypt Oavdrov, Rev. ii-
2
e.
Odvatos
10; xii. 11; éeoaypevos eis Oavatov, that has received
a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 83; aAnyi Oavdarov, a deadly
wound [death-stroke, cf. W. § 34, 3 b.], Rev. xiii. 3, 12;
ideiv Oavarov, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26; Heb. xi.
5; also yeveoOat Oavdrov [see yevo, 2], Mt. xvi. 28; Mk.
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; dvwxew Twa adypt Oavarov, even to de-
struction, Acts xxii. 4; katakpive twa Oavar@, to con-
demn one to death (ad mortem damnare, Tacit.), Mt. xx.
18 [here Tdf. eis Oav.]; Mk. x. 33, (see karaxpiva, a.) ;
mopeveo Oat eis Gav. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 33; mapa-
diOdvae tid eis Gav. that he may be put to death, Mt.
x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; pass. to be given over to the peril
of death, 2 Co. iv. 11; mapaé. eis kpiva Oavarov, Lk. xxiv.
20; dmoxreivai twa ev Oavatm (a Hebraism [cf. B. 184
(159 sq.)]), Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, [cf. W. 29 note]; airia
@avdrov (see airia, 2), Acts xiii. 28; xxvill. 18; adv re
@avdérov, some crime worthy of the penalty of death,
Acts xxiii. 29; xxv. 11,25; [xxvi. 31]; Lk. xxiii. 15, 22
[here airov (q. v. 2b.) Oav.]; evoxos Bavdrov, worthy of
punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. 66; Mk. xiv. 64; @avaro
re\evtdtw, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xv. 4;
Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 17 Sept. (Hebr. nov n¥3); cf.
W. § 44 fin. N. 3; [B. u.s.]; Oav. otavpod, Phil. i. 8;
mow Oavato, by what kind of death, Jn. xii. 33; xviii.
32; xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared
alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination
the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to
his power and confining them in his dark dominions:
Ro. vi. 9; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54, 56; Rev. xxi. 4; Hades
is associated with him as his partner: 1 Co. xv. 55 RG;
Rey. i. 18 (on which see kAeis); vi. 8; xx. 13, [14*], (Ps.
xvii. (xviii.) 5; exiv. (exvi.) 3; Hos. xiii. 14; Sir. xiv.
12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone ts
worthy of the name, i. e. the misery of soul arising from
sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the
death of the body: 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom.
2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, 6 Bios
fhuav dros GANo ovdev Hv et py Oavaros [cf. Philo, praem.
et poenis § 12, and reff. in 4 below]); opp. to 7 ¢o7, Ro.
vii. 10, 13; 2 Co. ii. 16; opp. to cawrnpia, 2 Co. vil. 10;
i. gq. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; cafew wuyny ex
Oavarov, Jas. v. 20; petaBeBnxevar ex Tov Oavarov eis T.
Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 145 pevew ev To Oavarw, 1 Jn.
iii. 14; Oewpeiy Odvarov, In. viii. 51; yeveo@ar Bavarov, 52
(see 1 above); duapria and duaprave mpds Oavarov (see
duapria, 2b.), 1 Jn. v. 16 sq. (in the rabbin. writers
nw sun —after Num. xviii. 22, Sept. duapria @avary-
dpos — is a crimen capitale). 3. the miserable state
of the wicked dead in hell is called —now simply @avaros,
Ro. i. 32 (Sap. i. 12 sq.; ii. 24; Tatian or. ad Graec. c.
13; the author of the ep. ad Diognet. c. 10, 7 distin-
guishes between 6 doxav evade Oavaros, the death of the
body, and 6 évtws Odvatos, ds puAdooetat Tois KataKpLOn-
gopevois eis TO TIP TO alwyoy); NOW 0 Sevtepos Oavaros
and 6 Ody. 6 devr. (as opp. to the former death, 1. e. to
that by which life on earth is ended), Rev. ii. 11; xx. 6,
14°; xxi. 8, (as in the Targums on Deut. xxxiil. 6; Ps.
xlviii. (xlix.) 11; Is. xxii. 14; Ixvi. 15; [for the Grk.
283
Gatpa
use of the phrase cf. Plut. de facie in orbe lunae 27, 6
p- 942 f.]; @avaros aims, Barn. ep. 20, 1 and in eccl.
writ. [6 aidtos Pavaros, Philo, post. Cain. § 11 fin.; see
also Wetstein on Rev. ii. 11]). 4. In the widest
sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin,
as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to
God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. lege. i. § 33
0 Wuxns Oavaros aperns pev POopa eort, kakias b€ dvadnYis,
[de profug. § 21 @avatos Wuxis 6 peta kakias éoti Bios,
esp. §§ 10, 11; quod det. pot. insid. §§ 14, 15; de poster.
Cain. § 21, and de praem. et poen. as in 2 above]), fo
be followed by wretchedness in the lower world (opp. to
(@1) aiwvios): POavatos seems to be so used in Ro. v. 12;
vi. 16,21, [23; yet al. refer these last three exx. to 3
above]; vii. 24; viii. 2,6; death, in this sense, is per-
sonified in Ro. v. 14, 17, 21; vii.5. Others, in all these
pass. as well as those cited under 2, understand physical
death; but see Philippi on Ro. v. 12; Messner, Lehre
der Apostel, p. 210 sqq.*
Oavaréw, -@; fut. Gavaroow; 1 aor. inf. davardoa, [3
pers. plur. subjunc. @avaracwor, Mt. xxvi. 59 RG];
Pass., [pres. @avatovpar]; 1 aor. eOavat@Ony; (fr. Gava-
tos); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for N95, 199,
ete. 1. prop. to put to death: twa, Mt. x. 21; xxvi.
SO scxvite lee Mikewxdits 1 2e xiveroo re lkwexod Lor 2iOos
vi. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 18; pass., by rhetorical hyperbole, to
be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro.
viii. 36. 2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy,
render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifico [ A.
V. mortify]: ti, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass. with dat. of the
thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything
[lit. to be made dead in relation to; cf. W. 210 (197); B.
178 (155) ]: Ro. vii. 4.*
Oarrw: 1 aor. Gaya; 2 aor. pass. éeradnv; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. for 73); to bury, inter, [BB.DD.s. v. Bur-
ial; ef. Becker, Charicles, se. ix. Exeurs. p. 390 sq.]:
twa, Mt. viii. 21 sq.; xiv. 12; Lk. ix. 59sq.; xvi. 22; Acts
ii. 29; v. 6, 9sq.; 1 Co. xv.4. [Comp.: ovy-Oarra. | *
dpa [WH Gapd], 6, (MA a journey, or a halt on a
journey [al. ‘loiterer’]), indecl. prop. name, Terah, the
father of Abraham: Lk. ili. 34.*
Sappew (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and
earlier Attic Oapoéw),-6; 1 aor. inf. Oapppoa ; [fr. Hom.
on]; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, confident: 2 Co.
v. 6, 8; Heb. xiii. 6; to be bold: rH memovOnoe, with the
confidence, 2 Co. x. 2; ets twa, towards (against) one,
2 Co.x.1; év ren, the grouna of my confidence is in one,
I am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii.16. [Syn.
see roApae. | *
Bapaéw, -3; (see Oappéw) ; to be of good courage, be of
good cheer; in the N. T. only in the impv.: @dpoe, Lk.
vill. 48 R G; Mt. ix. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49; Acts xxiii. 11,
(Sept. for NTA-ON, Gen. xxxv. 17, ete.) ; Oapoetre, Mt.
xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for 18VA-78,
Ex. xiv. 13; Joel ii. 22, etc.). [SYN. see rodpda. | *
Odpoos, -ovs, TO, courage, confidence: Acts xxviii. 15.*
Qadpa, -ros, rd, (@AOMAI [to wonder at], to gaze at,
cf. Bitm. Gram. § 114 s.v.; Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 196 ; Curtius
davpalo
§ 308); 1. a wonderful thing. a marvel: 2 Co. xi. 14
LTTrWH. — 2. wonder: @avydgev Oadpa peéya (cf. W.
§ 32, 2; [B. § 131, 5]), to wonder [with great wonder
i. e.] exceedingly, Rev. xvii. 6. (In both senses in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. Job xvii. 8; xviii. 20.) *
Oavpatw; impf. eOavpagov; fut. Aavpdcoua (Rev. xvii.
8 RGT Tr, a form far more com. in the best Grk. writ.
also than Oavpaow; cf. Kriiger § 40 s.v.; Kiihner § 343
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. e@avpaca;1 aor. pass. €Oav-
paoOnv in a mid. sense (Rey. xiii. 3 R* L Tr txt.) ; also
1 fut. pass., in the sense of the mid., davpacOnoopa (Rev.
xvii. 8 L WH; but the very few exx. of the mid. use in
prof. auth. are doubtful; cf. Stephanus, Thesaur. iv. p.
259 sq.; [yet see Veitch s.v.]); to wonder, wonder at,
marvel: absol., Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec., 33; xv. 31;
Kx. 205 Kail. 225 xxvii. 14; Mk.-v. 20; -vi..51,[Ree.4.L
br. Trmrg. br.]; xv. 5; Lk. i. 21 [see below], 63; viii. 25;
Sindds xxiv 4s Ja.v. 205, vil. 155! Acteuil. 7 5-ive dss
xiii. 41; Rev. xvii. 7 sq.; with ace. of the pers. Lk. vii.
9; with acc. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br.
WH reject the vs. (see mpés, I. 1 a. init.and 2b.)]; Jn. v.
28; Acts vii. 31; Oatpa péeya (see Oaipa, 2), Rev. xvii.
6; mpocwmov, to admire, pay regard to, one’s external
appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16
(Sept. for 099 NYI, Deut. x. 17; Job xiii. 10; Prov.
xviii. 5; Is. ix. 14, ete.); foll. by &sa 71, Mk. vi. 6; Jn. vii.
21 where 8:4 todo (omitted by Tdf.) is to be joined to vs.
21 [so G L Tr mrg.; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.; W.
§ 7, 3], (Isocr. p. 52 d.; Ael. v. h. 12, 6; 14, 36); [foll.
by ev w. dat. of object, ace. to the constr. adopted by
some in Lk. i. 21 eOavp. €v r@ xpoviterv adrdy, at his tarry-
ing; cf. W. § 33, b.; B. 264 (227); 185 (160 sq.); Sir.
xi. 19 (21); evang. Thom. 15, 2; but see above]; foll.
by emi w. dat. of pers. Mk. xii. 17 [RG LTr]; by emi w.
dat. of the thing, Lk. ii. 33; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26; [Acts
iii. 12], (Xen., Plat., Thuc., al. ; Sept.) ; mepi twos, Lk.
ii. 18; by a pregnant constr. [cf. B. 185 (161) ] e@avipacev
7) yi) Oriaw Tov Onpiov, followed the beast in wonder, Rev.
xiii. 3 [ef. B. 59 (52)]; foll. by dr, to marvel that, ete.,
Lk. xi. 38 ; Jn. iii. 7; iv. 27; Gal. i.6; by ed (see ei, I. 4),
Mk. xv. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 13. Pass. to be wondered at, to be
had in admiration, (Sir. xxxviii. 3; Sap. viii. 11; 4 Mace.
xviii. 3), foll. by ev w. dat. of the pers. whose lot and
condition gives matter for wondering at another, 2 Th.
i. 10; ev with dat. of the thing, Is. lxi. 6. [Comp.: ék-
Gavpato. | *
Savpdoios, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (Aavpa),
(fr. Hes., Hom. (h. Merc. 443) down], wonderful, mar-
vellous; neut. plur. @avydora (Sept. often for nix D3,
also for x55), wonderful deeds, wonders: Mt. xxi. 15.
(Cf. Trench § xci.; better, Schmidt ch. 168, 6.] *
Savpactds, -7, -dv, (Oavydtw), in Grk. writ. fr. [Hom.
(h. Cer. ete.)], Hdt., Pind. down; [interchanged in Grk.
writ. with @avydoros, cf. Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 341]; won-
derful, marvellous; i.e. a. worthy of pious admiration,
admirable, excellent: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36,
2; for Ws, Ps. viii. 2; xcii. (xciii.) 4, (5)). bb. passing
human comprehension: Mt. xxi. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, (fr.
284
Oetov
Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 22 sq., where for x59), as Job xlii. 3;
Mic. vii. 15, ete.). ¢. causing amazement joined with
terror: Rey. xv. 1, 3, (so for NW), Ex. xv. 11,ete.). d.
marvellous i. e. extraordinary, striking, surprising: 2 Co.
xi. 14 RG (see data, 1); Jn. ix. 30.*
Ged, -as, 7, (fem. of eds), [fr. Hom. down], a goddess:
Acts xix. 27, and Ree. also in 35, 37.*
Pedopar, -duar: 1 aor. eOcacduny; pf. teOéapa; 1 aor.
pass. €OeaOnv in pass. sense (Mt. vi.1; xxiii. 5; Mk
xvi. 11; Thue. 3, 38, 3; cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v.; [but
Kruger himself now reads dSpac6év in Thue. l.c.; see
Veitch s. v.; W. § 38,7 ¢.; B. 52 (46)]); depon. verb;
(fr. @éa, EAOMAT, with which adpa is connected, q. v-) ;
to behold, look upon, view attentively, contemplate, (in Grk.
writ. often used of public shows; ef. 6éa, béapa, béa-
tpov, Oearpi¢w, etc. [see below ]) : ri, Mt. xi. 7; Lk. vii. 24;
Jn. iv. 853; xi. 45; of august things and persons that are
looked on with admiration: ri, Jn. i. 14, 32; 1 Jn. i. 1;
Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36); twa, with a ptcp., Mk.
xvi. 14; Acts i. 11; foll. by 671, 1 Jn. iv. 14; OeaOjva id
twos, Mk. xvi. 11; mpos 76 beabqvar adrois, in order to
make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1; xxiii. 5; to view, take a
view of: ti, Lk. xxiii. 55; ruvd, Mt. xxii. 11; in the sense
of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr.
xxii. 6; Joseph. antt. 16, 1,2); to learn by looking: foll.
by 67, Acts viii. 18 Rec.; to see with the eyes, 1 Jn. iv.
12; i,q. (Lat. conspicio) to perceive: twa, Jn. viii. 10
RG; Acts xxi. 27; foll. by ace. with ptcp., Lk. v. 27
[not Lmrg.]; Jn. i. 38; foll. by dr, Jn. vi. 5.*
Cf. O. F’. Fritzsche, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 295 sqq.
[Ace. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, @eao@at in its earlier classic
use denotes often a wondering regard, (cf. even in Strabo
14, 5, ra éwrd Oeduara i.g. @aduara). This specific shade of
meaning, however, gradually faded out, and left the more
general signification of such a looking as seeks merely the
satisfaction of the sense of sight. Cf. dewpéw.|
Bearpitw: (Aarpov, q.v.) ; prop. to bring upon the stage ;
hence to set forth as a spectacle, expose to contempt; Pass.,
pres. ptep. Oearpifduevos [A. V. being made a gazing-
stock], Heb. x. 33. (Several times also in eccl. and
Byzant. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]; but in the same sense
éxOeatpi¢w in Polyb. 3, 91,10; al.; [ef. W. 25 (24) note;
also Tdf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. lix. sq.].) *
Ogarpov, -ov, Td, (Oedopat) ; 1. a theatre, a place in
which games and dramatic spectacles are exhibited, and
public assemblies held (for the Greeks used the theatre
also as a forum): Acts xix. 29, 31. 2. i. q. O€a and
Oéapa, a public show (Aeschin. dial. socr. 3, 20; Achil.
Tat. 1, 16 p. 55), and hence, metaph., a man who is ex-
hibited to be gazed at and made sport of: 1 Co. iv. 9 [A.
V. a spectacle ].*
Qciov, -ov, rd, (apparently the neut. of the adj. Geios i. q.
divine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded
as having power to purify, and to ward off contagion
[but Curtius § 320 allies it w. @i@; cf. Lat. fumus,
Eng. dust]), brimstone: Lk. xvii. 29; Rev. ix. 17 sq.; xiv.
10; xix. 20; [xx.10]; xxi08.. (Gen: xix: 24; Psi (Gan)
6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Hom. Il. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481,
Oetos
493; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 c.; Ael. v. h. 13, 15 [16];
Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) *
Oetos, -ela, -eiov, (Oeds), [fr. Hom. down], divine: n deta
Svvapts, 2 Pet. i. 3; Pvars (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4; neut. rd
Geiov, divinity, deity (Lat. numen divinum), not only
used by the Greeks to denote the divine nature, power,
providence, in the general, without reference to any
individual deity (as Hdt. 3,108; Thue. 5, 70; Xen. Cyr.
4, 2,15; Hell. 7, 5,13; mem. 1,4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p.
242.c.; Polyb: 32, 25, 7; Diod.. 1, 6; 13, 3; 12; 16, 60;
Leian. de sacrif. 1; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by
Philo (as in mundi opif. § 61; de agric. 17; leg. ad Gai.
1), and by Josephus (antt. 1,3,4; 11,1; 2,12, 4; 5, 2,
iO ibe lo nOnane lad sls, Oo, 25 LOS ¢ Lea OR ocala.
wee 220,11) 2; bj. 8, 8, 3;.4, 3,10), of the one, true
God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of
regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.*
Oerotys, -nTos, 7, divinity, divine nature: Ro. i. 20.
(Sap. xviii. 9; Philo in opif. § 61 fin.; Plut. symp. 665 a. ;
Leian. calumn. c. 17.) [Sywn. see edrns.]*
OermSns, -es, (fr. Petov brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone,
sulphurous: Rev. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 228; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
O€Anpa, -ros, rd, (OéAw), a word purely bibl. and eccl.
{yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815%, 21];
Sept. for yan and 178; will,i.e. a. what one wishes
or has determined shall be done, [i. e. objectively, thing
willed]: Lk. xii.47; Jn. v.30; 1 Co. vii.37; 1 Th.v.
18; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb. x.10; Rev.iv.11; OéAnpa tov
Geod is used —of the purpose of God to bless mankind
through Christ, Acts xxii. 14; Eph.i.9; Col.i.9; of what
God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2; Col. iv. 12 [W.
111 (105) ]; 1 Pet. iv. 2; and simply ré 6eAnua, Ro. ii. 18
[W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17) [but here the better
txt. now adds avrod, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how-
ever, Oé\nua is so used even without the art.; cf. Ignat.
ad Rom. 1,1; ad Eph. 20,1, ete.]); rod xupiov, Eph. v.
17; plur. commands, precepts: [Mk. iii. 35 WH. mrg.];
Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7;.2 Mace. i. 3); éori ro 6€-
Anya twos, foll. by iva, Jn. vi. 39 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 12, cf.
Mt. xviii. 14; foll. by inf., 1 Pet. ii. 15; by ace. with inf.,
1 Th.iv.3. [Cf B. 237 (204); 240 (207); W.§ 44, 8.]
b. i. gq. 7d Oédew, [i. e. the abstract act of willing, the
subjective] will, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [ef. W. 604 (562) ];
2 Pet. i. 21; sovetv r. O€d. twos (esp. of God), Mt. vii.
21; xii. 50; xxi. 31; Mk. iii. 35 [here WH mrg. the plur.,
see above]; Jn. iv. 34; vi. 38; vii. 17; ix. 31; Eph. vi.
Gs Mebrx. 79,66; xm. 21> 1 Jn. ii. 17: rodex. CT Tr
WH BovAnpa) twos xarepyaterOat, 1 Pet. iv. 3; yiverat ro
Ged. twos. Mt. vi. 10; xxvi. 42; Lk. xi. 2 LR; xxii. 42;
Acts xxi. 14; 7 BovAy Tov OeAnpatos, Eph. i. 11; 7 evdo-
kia Tov OeX. ib. 5; ev r@ Ged. Tov Geov, if God will, Ro. i.
10; da OeAnparos Oeov, Ro. xv. 32; 1 Co.i.1; 2Co.i.1;
viii. 5; Eph.i.1; Col.i.1; 2 Tim.i.1; «ara ro 6enX.
tov Geod, Gal. i.4; [1 Pet.iv.19]; 1Jn.v.14. i.gq.
pleasure: Lk. xxiii. 25; i. q. inclination, desire : capxés,
avépos, Jn. i. 13; plur. Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. see O€do,
fin.}”
285
berw
GAnors, -ews, 7, (OéAw), i. q. Td OeAew, a willing, will:
Heb. ii. 4. (Ezek. xviii. 23; 2 Chr. xv. 15; Prov. viii. 35;
Sap. xvi. 25; [Tob. xii. 18]; 2 Macc. xii. 16; 3 Macc. ii.
26 ; [plur. in] Melissa epist. ad Char. p. 62 Orell.; acc. to
Pollux [l. 5 c. 47] a vulgarism (idwwtixdv); [ef. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 353].) *
@édw (only in this form in the N. T.; in Grk. auth. also
eOéhw [Veitch s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]);
impf. #Oedov; [fut. 3 pers. sing. OeAnoes, Rev. xi. 5 WH
mrg.]; 1 aor. 76eAnoa; (derived apparently fr. édeiv
with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop. to seize
with the mind; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its
root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of
Pott, Fick, Vaniéek and others, which connects it with
a root meaning fo hold to]); Sept. for 728 and yan; To
WILL, (have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved
or determined, to purpose: absol., 6 Oedwv, Ro. ix. 16;
Tov Oeov GéXovros if God will, Acts xviii. 21; éav 6 Kiptos
Oednon (in Attic éav Oeds OéAn, fv of Beot O€Awow [cf. Lob.
u. s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. iv. 15; xaOws nO€Anoe, 1 Co. xii.
18; xv. 38; ri, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal.
v.17; with the aorist inf., Mt. xx. 14; xxvi.15; Jn. vi.
21 (where the meaning is, they were willing to receive
him into the ship, but that was unnecessary, because
unexpectedly the ship was nearing the land; ef. Liicke,
B-Crusius, Ewald, [Godet], al. ad loc.; W.§ 54,4; [B.
375 (321)]); Jn. vii. 44; Acts xxv.9; Col. i.27; 1 Th.
ii. 18; Rev. xi. 5, ete.; with the present inf., Lk. x. 29
RG; Jn. vi. 67; vii. 17; viii. 44; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rec.];
Ro. vii. 21; Gal. iv. 9 [here T Trtxt. WH txt. 1 aor. inf.];
with an inf. suggested by the context, Jn. v. 21 (ots Oedet,
sc. Cwonoujoat); Mt. viii. 2; Mk. iii. 18; vi. 22; Ro. ix.
18; Rev. xi. 6, ete. ov O€do to be unwilling: with the
aorist. inf., Mé. it. 185. xv. 323, xxii. 3; Mk. vi. 26; Lk.
xv. 28; Jn. v.40; Acts vii. 39; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Rev. ii. 21
[not Rec.], etc.; with the present inf., Jn. vii.1; Acts
xiv. 13; xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc.; with the inf. om.
and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30; xxi.
29; Lk. xviii. 4, ete.; O€Aw and ov Odo foll. by the ace.
with inf., Lk. i. 62; 1 Co.x.20; on the Pauline phrase od
Gédw ipas dyvoeiv, see dyvoéw, a.; corresponding to dédo
tpas eidevar, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii. 1. Oédew, used of a
purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry-
ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to moetv, mpao-
cew, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter
pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. § 61, 7b.); to évep-
yeiv, Phil. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19; Jn. vii. 44. One is said
also @éAew that which he is on the point of doing: Mk.
vi. 48; Jn.i.43 (44); and it is used thus also of things
that tend or point to some conclusion [cf. W. § 42, 1 b.;
B. 254 (219)]: Acts ii. 12; xvii. 20. AavOdver avrovs
rovto GéAovras this (viz. what follows, ér: etc.) escapes
them of their own will, i. e. they are purposely, wilfully,
ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows:
this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. e.
holding as their opinion [for exx. of this sense see Soph.
Lex. s. v. 4]), they are ignorant etc.; but cf. De Wette
ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. § 150, 8 Rem.]. ras
0éio
emOupias Tov matpos tov Oédere moretv it is your purpose
to fulfil the lusts of your father, i. e. ye are actuated by
him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44
[W. u. s.; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to desire, to wish:
rt, Mt. xx. 21; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.];
Jn. xv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 21; 2 Co. xi.12; foll. by the aorist
inf., Mt. v. 40; xii. 38; xvi. 25; xix. 17; Mk. x. 43 sq.;
Lk. viii. 20; xxiii. 8; Jn. v. 6,35 (ye were desirous of
rejoicing) ; xii. 21; Gal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20; 1 Pet. iii. 10;
foll. by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27; Gal. iv. 20 (#@edov I
could wish, on which impf. see evxyouat, 2); the inf. is
wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb,
Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk.ix.13; Jn. xxi. 18; foll. by
the acc. and inf., Mk. vii. 24; Lk. i. 62; Jn. xxi. 22 sq.;
Ro. xvi. 19; 1 Co. vii. 7,32; xiv.5; Gal. vi. 13; ov déAw
to be unwilling, (desire not): foll. by the aor. inf., Mt.
xxiii. 4; Lk. xix. 14,27; 1 Co. x. 20; foll. by tva, Mt. vii.
QE nvais 2oeeIxe GOP xergo eluKenviao lente neville 4
cf. W. § 44,8 b.; [B. § 139, 46]; foll. by the delib. subj.
(aor.): OéXers gvAACEwpED adra (cf. the Germ. willst du,
sollen wir zusammenlesen? [Goodwin § 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ;
add, Mt. xx. 32 [where L br. adds iva]; xxvi.17; xxvii.
et, Mk. x. ol xiv. 125 xv. 0) 22 br.den|s KIX.
of. xvii. 413 xxii.'9, (cf. W.§ 41 a. 4b.; Brg 139, 2);
foll. by e?, Lk. xii. 49 (see e?, I. 4); foll. by 7, to prefer,
1 Co. xiv. 19 (see #, 3 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foll. by an
inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing: Mk. xii. 38;
Lk. xx. 46; cf. W. § 54, 4; [B. § 150, 8]. 4. in imi-
tation of the Hebr. yn, to take delight, have pleasure
[opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem.; cf. W. § 33, a.; but see exx.
below]: €y ru, in a thing, Col. ii. 18 (ev cada, to delight
in goodness, Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1; (cf. eis
Conv, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3); Ps. cxi. (cxii.) 1; exlvi.
(exlvii.) 10]; & rem, dat. of the pers., 1S. xvili. 22; 25.
xv. 26; [1 K. x:°9)); 2 Chr. ix. 8; for 2 7¥4,' 1 Chr.
xxviii. 4). wd, to love one: Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi.
(xxii.) 9; [xvil. (xviii.) 20; xl. (xli.) 12]; Ezek. xviii.
32, cf. 23; Tob. xiii. 6; opp. to pucetv, Ignat. ad Rom.
8, 3; OedAnOnvar is used of those who find favor, ibid. 8,
DE ri, Mite i ts and sal 7; CirHos. vit 6) 5 Hebiac 5,
8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7). As respects the distinction
between SovAopa and edo, the former seems to desig-
nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter
the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap-
pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that
the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the
verb OéXev (see just above). The reverse of this dis-
tinction is laid down by Bittm. Lexil. i. p. 26 [Eng. trans.
p- 194]; Delitzsch on Heb. vi. 17. Acc. to Tittmann
(Syn. i. p. 124) OéXecv denotes mere volition, BotAer@av
inclination; [ef. Whiston on Dem. 9,5; 124, 13].
[Philip Buttmann’s statement of the distinction between
the two words is quoted with approval by Schmidt (Syn. iii.
ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (besides many exx.)
the assumed relationship between f. and FeAmis, éAmis; the
use of @. in the sense of ‘resolve’ in such passages as Thuc.
5,9; of 0€Awy i. q. Hdéws in the poets; of B. as parallel to
émiOuuery in Dem. 29, 45, etc.; and pass. in which the two
words occur together and £. is apparently equiv. to ‘ wish’
286
BewérLos
while 6. stands for ‘ will,’ as Xen. an. 4, 4,5; Eur. Alc. 281,
etc.,etc. At the same time it must be confessed that scholars
are far from harmonious on the subject. Many agree with
Prof. Grimm that @. gives prominence to the emotive ele-
ment, 8. to the rational and volitive; that @. signifies the
choice, while B. marks the choice as deliberate and intelligent ;
yet they acknowledge that the words are sometimes used
indiscriminately, and esp. that @. as the less sharply defined
term is put where 8. would be proper; see Filendt, Lex.
Soph.; Pape, Handworterb.; Seiler, Worterb. d. Hom.,s. v.
Botaopa; Suhle und Schneidewin, Handworterb.; Crosby,
Lex. to Xen. an., s. v. €0€Aw; (Arnold’s) Pillon, Grk. Syn.
§ 129; Webster, Synt. and Syn. of the Grk. Test. p. 197;
Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii. 603; Schleusner, N. T. Lex.
s. v. Bova.; Munthe, Observy. phil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. ete.
p- 3; Valckenaer, Scholia ete. ii. 23; Westermann on Dem.
20,111; the commentators generally on Mt. as above; Bp.
Lghtft. on Philem. 13,14; Fiddle in Schaff’s Lange on Eph.
p- 42; this seems to be roughly intended by Ammonius
also: BovAccOar wey em) udvou AcKTéov TOD AoyiKod* Td SE
déAew Kal em) addyou (wov; (and Eustath. on Miad 1, 112, p.
61, 2, says odx’ aTA@s OEAw, GAAG BovAouat, bwep ewitacis TOD
6éAew éeoriv). On the other hand, L. and S. (s. v. €6€Aw) ;
Passow ed. 5; Rost, Worterb. ed. 4° Schenkl, Schulworterb. ;
Donaldson, Crat. § 463 sq.; Wahl, Clav. Apocr., s. v. Bova. ;
Cremer 8. Vv. BovAowat and @éAw; esp. Stallb. on Plato’s de
repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (cf. too Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 19,
19); Franke on Dem. 1, 1, substantially reverse the distinc-
tion, as does Hilicott on 1 Tim. v. 14; Wordsworth on 1 Th.
ii. 18. Although the latter opinion may seem to be favored
by that view of the derivation of the words which allies Bova.
with voluptas (Curtius § 659, cf. p. 726), and makes @éA. sig-
nify ‘to hold to something,’ ‘form a fixed resolve’ (see
above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T.
will be evident to one who looks out the pass. referred to
above (Fritzsche’s explanation of Mt. i. 19 is hardly natu-
ral) ; to which may be added such as Mt. ii. 18; ix. 13; xii.
38) xve 285) xvil. 4 (x 2132) eva 3 ON (eh mlb keexexane
42); Mk. vi. 19; vii. 24; ix.30; x. 35; xii. 38; xv. 9 (cf. Jn.
xviii. 39), 15 (where R. V. wishing is questionable; cf. Lk.
Sx. 20); Lk x. 245 xv. 28); xvi 265 Ins iv. 6) var. Le ee
21; Acts x. 10; xviii. 15; Ro. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to pice,
and indeed tne use of @éAw throughout this chapter) ; 1 Co. vii.
36, 39; xiv.35; Eph.i.11; 2 Th. iii. 10,ete. Such passages
as 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one side,
now on the other; ef. 1 Co. xii. 11,18. @€Aw occurs in the
N. T. about five times as often as BovAouwa fon the relative
use of the words in classic writers see Tycho Mommsen in
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept.
(beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to
afford little light; see e. g. Gen. xxiv. 5,8; Deut. xxv. 7;
Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7, 9, etc. In modern Greek @éAw seems
to have nearly driven BovAoua out of use; on O€Aw as an
auxiliary ef. Jeb) in Vincent and Dickson’s Handbook, App.
8§ 60, 64. For exx. of the associated use of the words in
classic Grk., see Steph. Thesaur. s. v. BobAoua: p. 366 d.; Bp.
Lghtft., Cremer, and esp. Schmidt, as above. ]
Oepedtos, -ov, (Oua [i. e. thing laid down]), laid down
as a foundation, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 66;
Oepédtot Aidor, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst.,
6 Oepedtos [se. Nios] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq.; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev.
xxi. 19), and rd epédAcov (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [Ar
istot. phys. auscult. 2, 9 p. 200*,4]; Paus. 8, 32,2; fal.]),
the foundation (of a building, wall, city): prop., Lk. vi.
Oewedtow
49 ; riOevar Oepedtov, Lk. vi. 48; xiv. 29; plur. of OepeAcor
(chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14, 19;
neut. ro dew. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.) ;
metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of
an institution or system of truth: 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; the
rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl-
edge, Heb. vi. 1 (weravoias gen. of apposition [W. 531
(494) ]); a course of instruction begun by a teacher,
Ro. xv. 20; Christ is called deueéX. i. e. faith in him,
which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is
built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth,
1 Co. iii. 11; rev drootodwy (gen. of appos., on account
of what follows: évros . . . Xpucrod, [al. say gen. of origin,
see emoikodopew; cf. W. § 30,1; Meyer or Ellicott ad
loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon
which foundation the Christian church has been built,
Fph. ii. 20; a solid and stable spiritual possession, on
which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay
hold on eternal life, 1 Tim. vi.19; the church is appar-
ently called deu. as the foundation of the ‘city of God,’
2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several
times also for 7, a palace, Is. xxv. 2; Jer. vi. 5;
Amos i. 4, ete.) *
Oepedrdw: fut. OeweAimow ; 1 aor. €Oepediwooa: Pass., pf.
ptep. re@epedt@pevos; plupf. 3 pers. sing. reepediwto
(Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48 RG; without augm. cf. W.§ 12,
9; [B. 33 (29); Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]); Sept. for 30°; [fr.
Xen. down]; to lay the foundation, to found: prop., rHv
ynv, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26; Prov. iii. 19; Is. xlviii. 13,
al.); ri émi mt, Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48. metaph. (Diod.
11, 68; 15,1) to make stable, establish, [A. V. ground]:
of the soul, [1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing.] 1 Pet. v.10 [Ree.;
but T, Tr mrg. in br., the fut.]; pass., Eph. iii. 17 (18);
Col. i. 23.*
Geo-Bidaxros, -ov, (Aeos and didakros), taught of God: 1
Th. iv. 9. ([Barn. ep. 21, 6 (cf. Harnack’s note)];
eccles. writ.)*
Beo-Adyos, -ov, 6, (Peds and Aéyw), in Grk. writ. [fr. Aris-
tot. on] one who speaks (treats) of the gods and divine
things, versed in sacred science ; (Grossmann, Quaestiones
Philoneae,i.p. 8, shows that the word is used also by Philo,
esp. of Moses [cf. de praem. et poen. §9]). This title is
given to John in the inscription of the Apocalypse, acc.
to the Ree. text, apparently as the publisher and interpre-
ter of divine oracles, just as Lucian styles the same per-
son Geodoyos in Alex. 19 that he calls rpodyrns in e. 22.
The common opinion is that John was called 6eodAdyos in
the same sense in which the term was used of Gregory
of Nazianzus, viz. because he taught the Oedérns of the
Acyos. But then the wonder is, why the copyists did
not prefer to apply the epithet to him in the title of the
Gospel*
Beopaxew, -@; (eopdyos); to fight against God: Acts
xxill. 9 Ree. (Eur., Xen., Diod., al.; 2 Mace. vii. 19.) *
Beopdxos, -ov, 6, (Geds and payonat), fighting against
God, resisting God: Acts v. 39. (Symm.,Job xxvi. 5;
Prov. ix. 18; xxi. 16; Heracl. Pont. alleg. Homer. 1;
Ceian. Jup. tr. 45.) *
287
Beds
Oedtrveverros, -ov, (Aeds anu mvéw), inspired by God:
ypapn, i. e. the contents of Scripture, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [see
mas, 1.1¢.]; coin, [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; dvecpor, Plut.
de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f.; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (ef.
308); Nonn. paraphr. ev. Ioan. 1, 99]. (umvevoros also
is used passively, but aavevoros, eUmvevortos, rupimvevatos,
[Svodiamvevoros |, actively, [and dveavamvevaros appar.
either act. or pass.; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)*
Qeds, -ov, 6 and 7, voc. Oe€, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii.
46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judge. [revi 255) xx ai [2
S. vil. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3
Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi.27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus.
h. e. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; cf. W.
§ 8, 2c.; [B. 12 (11)]; ([on the eight or more proposed
derivations see Vanicek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after
Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean-
ing to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per con-
tra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and S. s. v.
fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 5x, DTiTN and 717;
a god, a goddess ; 1. a general appellation of deities
or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4;
once 7) Geds, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; 6c0t havi cai
ovk avOpamov, Acts xil. 22; dvOpwmos ay moteis ceavrov
deov, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles: Acts
xiv. 113; xix. 26; Neydpevor Oeoi, 1 Co. viii. 58; of Gdoer p27)
ovres Oeoi, Gal. iv. 8; rod Oeov ‘Pedav [q. v.], Acts vii. 43 ;
of angels: etal Oeot rodXoi, 1 Co. viii. 5° (on which cf.
Philo de somn. i. § 39 6 peév adndeia Beds cis ear, of 8 ev
karaypnoet Neyduevor mAeiovs). [On the use of the sing.
Geds (and Lat. deus) as a generic term by (later) heathen
writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit.
note D; cf. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam. for Nov.
1848, p. 389 sqq.; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i.
§ii.; see Bib. Sacr. for July 1856, p.666 sq., and for addit.
exx. Négelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 129; also his Nachho-
merische Theol. p. 139 sq.; Stephanus, Thes. s. v.; and
reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and
Exeg. i. p. 120 note. | 2. Whether Christ is called
God must be determined from Jn. i.1; xx. 28; 1Jn.v.
20; Ro. ix. 5; Tit.ii. 13; Heb. i. 8 sq., ete.; the matter
is still in dispute among theologians; ef. Grimm, Inésti-
tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq. [and the
discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab-
bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. etc. u.s., esp. pp. 42 sqq.
113 sqq. ]. 3. spoken of the only and true Gop: with
the article, Mt. iii. 9; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts
ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: é« rov @. Jn.
viii. 42, 47 and often in John’s writ.; t7é rov 6. Lk. i.
26 [T Tr WH dad]; Acts xxvi. 6; mapa rod 6. Jn. viii.
40; ix. 16 [LT Tr WH here om. art.]; mapa 76 8. Ro.
ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mrg. br. the art.]; ix.
14; ev r@ 0. Col. iii. 3; ent 7e 0. Lk. 1.47; eis rov 8. Acts
xxiv. 15 [Tdf. mpds]; emi rov 6. Acts xv. 19; xxvi. 18,
20; mpos tov 6. Jn. i. 2; Acts xxiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and
many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24; Lk.
Hien xx. S8> Ros vi. 8)°33'72) Come 2.01 9) va. 7%
1 Th. ii. 5, ete.; with prepositions: dd deod, Jn. ill. 2;
| xvi. 80; Ro. xiii. 1 [LT Tr WH tre]; rapa Geod, Jn. i. 6;
Geos
éx beov, Acts v. 39; 2 Co. v. 1; Phil. iii. 9; mapa Oea, 2
Th. i. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4; «ara Oecv, Ro. viii. 27; 2 Co. vii.
9sq.; cf. W. § 19s. v. 6 Oeds twos (gen. of pers.), the
(guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him:
Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 26 sq. [29 WH mrg. (see below) ];
Lk. xx, 875 Jn: =xoi7; Acts i413 exis) 2 Co: vi.
16; Heb. xi. 16; Rev. xxi. 3 [without 6; but GT Tr WH
txt. om. the phrase]; 6 Oeds pov, i. q. ot eli, @ kal Natpevwo
(Acts xxvii. 23): Ro. i. 8; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr mrg. br. the
gen.]; 2 Co. xii. 21; Phil. i. 3; iv. 19; Philem. 4; «upsos 6
deds cov, nav, buoy, avrav (in imit. of Hebr. PON m7,
av TION Lk DITIN eee DVN 7): Mt. iv..7; xxii. 37;
MK. xii. 29 [see above]; Lk. iv. 8, 12; x. 27; Acts ii.
39; ef. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. p. 169; [and Bp.
Lehtft. as quoted s. v. xiptos, c. a. init.]; 6 beds x. maTnp
Tov Kupiov nav Inood Xporov: Ro. xv. 6; 2 Co.i. 3; xi.
31 [LT Tr WH om. ny. and Xp.]; Eph. i. 3; Coli. 3 [L
W Hom. kai]; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words
the gen. depends on 6 Oeds as well as on rrarnp, cf. Fritz-
sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq.; [Oltramare on Ro. l.c.;
Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. i. 4; but some would restrict it to
the latter; cf. e. g. Meyer on Ro. lL. c., Eph. l.c.; Ellic.
on Gal. l.c., Eph. l.c.]; 6 Oeds tod kup. nu. ’Ino. Xp. Eph.
i. 17; 6 Oeds x. matnp nuov, Gal. i. 4; Phil. iv. 20; 1 Th.
i. 3; iii. 11, 13; eds 6 warnp, 1 Co. viii. 6 ; 6 beds x. marTnp,
1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. v. 20; Jas. i. 27; iii. 9 [Rec. ; al. cupuos
x. 7-]3 amd Oeod marpos nuav, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co.i.3; 2 Co.i.
2: Bipha: 23 eb. 2eeOpl a 2ee2 eh. 1.2 cet Pam
2 [Ree., al. om. jy.]; Philem.3; [6 Oeds marnp, Col. iii.
17 LT Tr WH (cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; elsewhere with-
out the art. as] Oeod marpés (in which phrase the two
words have blended as it were into one, equiv. to a prop.
name, Germ. Gottvater [A. V. God the Father]): Phil. ii.
11; 1 Pet. i. 2; dmé Oeovd warpos, Gal. i. 3; Eph. vi. 23;
2 Tim. i. 2; Tit. i. 4; mapa deod marpés, 2 Pet. i. 17; 2
Jn. 3; ef. Wieseler, Com. ub. d. Brief a. d. Galat. p. 10
sqq. 6 beds w. gen. of the thing of which God is the au-
thor [ef. W. § 30, 1]: rHs bropovns «. THs mapaxAnoews, Ro.
xv. 5; ts edmidos, ib. 13; trys expyvas, 33; 1 Th. v. 23;
tis TapaxAnoews, 2 Co. i. 3. ta tod Beod, the things of
God,i.e. a. hiscounsels, 1 Co.ii.11. B. his interests,
Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. sy. things due to God, Mt.
sek. 21> Mik. eek x25; Ta mpos Tov Gedy,
things respecting, pertaining to, God, — contextually i. q.
the sacrificial business of the priest, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii.
17; v. 1; ef. Xen. rep. Lac. 13, 11; Fritzsche on Rom.
iii. p. 262 sq. Nom. 6 Oeds for the voc.: Mk. xv. 34;
Lk. xviii. 11,13; Jn. xx. 28; Actsiv.24[RG; Heb.i.8?];
x. 7; ef. W.§ 29, 2; [B. 140 (123)]. 1@ O00, God being
judge (cf. W. § 31,4 a.; 248 (232 sq.); B. § 133, 14]:
after duvards, 2 Co. x. 4; after doretos, Acts vii. 20, (after
dyeurros, Sap. x. 5; after peyas, Jon. iii. 3; see actetos, 2).
For the expressions avOpwros Oeov, Suvapis Geov, vlds Jeov,
etc., beds THs €Amidos etc., 6 Cav Oeds etc., see under dvOpa-
mos 6, Svvaputs a., vids Tov Oeod, eAmis 2, (aw I. ., ete.
4. Oeds is used of whatever can in any respect be likened
to God, or resembles him in any way: Hebraistically i. q.
God’s representative or vicegerent, of magistrates and
288
Jeparrevo
judges, Jn. x. 34 sq. after Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6, (of the
wise man, Philo de mut. nom. § 22; quod omn. prob. lib.
§ 7; [6 cods A€yerat Geds Tov apovos . . . beds mpos av
taciav x. Sdxnow, quod det. pot. insid. § 44]; marqp x.
pnp epaveis ict Geol, pipovpevor tov ayéevyntov ev TO
(wordacreiv, de decal. § 23; avoudabn (i. e. Moses) 6Aov
rov €Ovous Oeds x. Bactdevs, de vita Moys. i. § 28; [de migr.
Abr. § 15; de alleg. leg. i. §13]); of the devil, 6 6eds
TOU ai@vos Tovrou (see aiwy, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4; the pers. or
thing to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone
he lives, e. g. 7 KowAia, Phil. iii. 19.
BeoréBera, -as, 7, (OcooeBns), reverence towards God,
godliness: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin.
p- 985 d.; Sept. Gen. xx. 11; Job xxviii. 28; Bar. v. 4;
Sir. i. 25 (22); 4 Mace. i. 9 (Fritz.); vii. 6, 22 (var.).) *
BeoreBis, -€s, (Aeds and o¢Boua), worshipping God,
pious: Jn. ix. 31. (Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen.,
Plat., al.; [ef. Trench § xlviii.].) *
Beorrvyijs, -€s, (Beds and orvyéw ; cf. Oeopions, Oeopvons,
and the subst. @eoorvyia, omitted in the lexx., Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5), hateful to God, exceptionally impious
and wicked; (Vulg. deo odibilis) : Ro. i. 30 (Eur. Troad.
1213 and Cyclop. 396, 602; joined with adi«o. in Clem.
hom. 1, 12, where just before occurs oi Oedv pucodvres).
Cf. the full discussion of the word by Fritzsche, Com. on
Rom. i. p. 84 sqq.; [and see W. 53 sq. (53) ].*
Gers, -nros, 4, (deitas, Tertull., Augustine [de civ.
Dei 7, 1]), deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead:
Col. ii. 9. (Leian. Icar.9; Plut. de defect. orac. 10 p.
415¢c.)*
[Syn. Oed77s, Oerdrys: Oedr. deity differs from Ge:dr.
divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf.
Trench § ii.; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. on Col. 1.c.; Fritzsche on
Ro. i. 20.]
Ocddrros, -ov, (eds and Piros), Theophilus, a Christian
to whom Luke inscribed his Gospel and Acts of the
Apostles: Lk. i.3; Acts i.1. The conjectures concern-
ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among
others) Win. RWB. s. v.; Bleek on Lk. i. 3; [B. D. s.v.];
see also under xpdricros.*
Oeparreta, -as, 7, (Gepareva) ; 1. service, rendered by
any one to another. 2. spec. medical service, curing,
healing: Lk. ix. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ((Hippocr.], Plat.,
Isocr., Polyb.). 3. by meton. household, i.e. body of
attendants, servants, domestics: Mt. xxiv. 45 RG; Lk.
xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
469; for o-y2y, Gen. xlv. 16).*
Ocparevw ; impf. eOeparevov; fut. Oepamevow ; 1 aor. de-
parevoa; Pass., pres. Oeparevouar; impf. eOeparevounv;
pf. ptep. reOeparevpevos ; 1 aor. eOeparrevOnv ; (Bepayy, i. q.
Oeparwv) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to serve, do service:
twa, to one; pass. Oepar. iad twos, Acts xvii. 25. 23
to heal, cure, restore to health: Mt. xii.10; Mk. vi.5; Lk.
vi. 73 ix. 6; xill.14; xiv. $5 twa, Mt.iv. 24; viii. 7, 16;
etc.; Mk. i. 34; iii. 10; Lk. iv. 23; x. 9; pass., Jn. v. 10;
Acts iv. 14; v.16, etc.; Tuva amd Twos, to cure one of any
disease, Lk. vii. 21; pass., Lk. v.15; viii. 2; Oepumevew
vocous, padaxiav: Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; Mk. iii. 15
Ocpatrwv
[R GL, Tr mrg. in br.]; Lk. ix. 1; a wound, pass., Rev.
xiii. 3, 12.
Ocpdrrwy, -ovros, 6, [perh. fr. a root to hold, have about
one; ef. Eng. retainer; Vaniéek p. 396; fr. Hom. down],
Sept. for 12), an attendant, servant: of God, spoken of
Moses discharging the duties committed to him by God,
Heb. iii. 5 as in Num. xii. 7sq.; Josh. i. 2; viii. 31, 33
(ix. 4,6); Sap. x. 16. [Sy¥N. see dudkovos. | *
Ocpitw; fut. depicw [B. 37 (32), cf. WH. App. p. 163
sq-]; 1 aor. e6epica; 1 aor. pass. eOepicOnv; (O€pos) ;
Sept. for WP; [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt. down]; to reap, har-
vest; a. prop.: Mt.vi. 26; Lk. xii. 24; Jas.v.4; [fig.
Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. _b. in proverbial expressions about
sowing and reaping: dAdos...6 Oepi¢wr, one does the
work, another gets the reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the
meaning is ‘ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater
number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will
enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now com-
menced among them’ [al. do not restrict the reference
to converted Samaritans]); Oepitwy dmov ovk éomet-
pas, unjustly appropriating to thyself the fruits of oth-
ers’ labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; 6éav...
Oepioet, as aman has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by
God) will he be requited, either with reward or pen-
alty, (his deeds will determine his doom), Gal. vi. 7
(a proverb: ut sementem feceris, ita metes, Cic. de orat.
2, 65; [ov 8€ ravra aicypas pev Eoretpas kaxas dé €Oe-
pias, Aristot. rhet. 3, 3,4; cf. Plato, Phaedr. 260 d.; see
Meyer on Gal. 1.¢.]); ri, to receive a thing by way of
reward or punishment: ra capxixd, 1 Co. ix. 11; @Oopav,
(anv aimnov, Gal. vi. 8, (omeipewv rupous, Oepifew axavOas,
Jer. xii. 13; 6 omeipwv adda Oepicet kaka, Prov. xxii. 8;
€ay omeipnte Kaka, Tacav Tapaxnv Kai Odi Gepicere,
Test. xii. Patr. p. 576 [i.e. test. Levi §13]); absol.: of
the reward of well-doing, Gal. vi. 9; 2Co.ix.6. c. As
the crops are cut down with the sickle, Oepi¢ew is fig.
used for to destroy, cut off: Rev. xiv. 15; with the addi-
tion of rv yqv, to remove the wicked inhabitants of the
earth and deliver them up to destruction, ib. 16 [rv
*Agiay, Plut. reg. et. imper. apophthegm. (Antig. 1), p.
182'a.].*
Ocpiopds, -ov, 6, (Aepifw), harvest: i.q. the act of reap-
ing, Jn. iv. 35; fig. of the gathering of men into the
kingdom of God, ibid. i.q. the time of reaping, i. e.
fic. the time of final judgment, when the righteous are
gathered into the kingdom of God and the wicked are
delivered up to destruction, Mt. xiii. 30, 39; Mk. iv. 29.
1. q. the crop to be reaped, i. e. fig. a multitude of men to
be taught how to obtain salvation, Mt. ix. 37 sq.; Lk. x. 2;
e£npavbn 6 Oepiopds, the crops are ripe for the harvest,
i. e. the time is come to destroy the wicked, Rev. xiv.
15. (Sept. for 1¥); rare in Grk. writ., as Xen. oec.
18, 3; Polyb. 5, 95, 5.) *
Ocpiotis, -o0, 6, (Gepi{w), a reaper: Mt. xiii. 30, 39.
(Bel and the Dragon 33; Xen., Dem., Aristot., Plut.,
al.)*
Geppatvw: Mid., pres. Oeppaivonat; impf. ebeppacvouny;
(Geppos): fr. Hom. down; to make warm, to heat; mid.
289
Oewptw
to warm one’s self: Mk. xiv. 54, 67; Jn. xviii. 18, 25;
Jas. ii. 16.*
O€ppy (and Oépya; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 331, [Ruther
ford, New Phryn. p. 414]), -ys, 7, heat: Acts xxviii. 3.
(Ecel. iv. 11; Job vi. 17; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 7; Thuc., Plat.,
Menand., al.) *
O€pos, -ous, To, (O¢pw to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 32;
Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30. (From Hom. down; Hebr.
Vp Prov. vi. 8; Gen. viii. 22.) *
Ocooadovixets, -€ws, 6, @ Thessalonian: Acts xx. 4;
ee Vale Wen ti 8 eT)
Ococadovlkn, -ns, 7, Thessalonica (now Saloniki), a
celebrated and populous city, situated on the Thermaic
Gulf, the capital of the second [(there were four; ef. Liv.
xlv. 29)] division of Macedoaia and the residence of a
Roman governor and quaestor. It was anciently called
Therme, but was rebuilt by Cassander, the son of Anti-
pater, and called by its new name [which first appears
in Polyb. 23, 11, 2] in honor of his wife Thessalonica,
the sister of Alexander the Great; cf. Strabo 7, 330.
Here Paul the apostle founded a Christian church: Acts
RV wil, 135; Phil. iv. 16; 2" Tim. iv.-10..[ BBsDD.
s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 225 sqq. ]*
@evSas [prob. contr. fr. Aeddwpos, W. 103 (97); esp.
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15; on its inflection ef. B. 20 (18)],
6, Theudas, an impostor who instigated a rebellion which
came to a wretched end in the time of Augustus: Acts
v. 36. Josephus (antt. 20, 5, 1) makes mention of one
Theudas, a magician, who came into notice by pretend-
ing that he was a prophet and was destroyed when
Cuspius Fadus governed Judza in the time of Claudius.
Accordingly many interpreters hold that there were two
insurgents by the name of Theudas; while others, with
far greater probability, suppose that the mention of
Theudas is ascribed to Gamaliel by an anachronism on
the part of Luke. On the different opinions of others
cf. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim in
Schenkel v. 510 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D.s. v.].*
Oewpew, -@; impf. COempovy; [fut. bewpnow, Jn. vii. 3 T
Tr WH]; 1 aor. e6eapnoa; (Gewpds a spectator, and this
fr. Ocdopa, q. v. [cf. Vanitek p. 407; L. and S. 8. v.;
Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.]); [fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. for 787 and Chald. m:n;
1. to be a spectator, look at, behold, Germ. schauen, (the
Gewpot were men who attended the games or the sacri-
fices as public deputies; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 19);
absol.: Mt. xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. xxiii. 35; foll.
by indir. dise., Mk. xii. 41; xv. 47; used esp. of persons
and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy :
rwd, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10,16 sq.19; Acts iii. 16; xxv. 24;
Rev. xi. 11 sq.; 6 Oewpav rov vidvy Oewpet tov rarépa,
the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn.
xii. 45; twa with ptep. [B. 301 (258): Mk. v. 15]; Lk.
x. 18; Jn. vi. 19; [x. 12]; xx. 12, 14; [1 Jn. ii. 17];
ri, Lk. xiv. 29; xxi. 6; xxiii. 48; Acts iv. 13; ra onpeta,
Jn. ii. 23; vi. 2. LL Tr WH; Acts viii. 13, (@avpacra répara,
Sap. xix. 8); 7a épya rod Xpiotod, In. vii. 3; ri with
ptep., Jn. xx. 6; Acts vii. 56; x. 11; foll. by dr, Acts
Sewpiu
xix. 26; to view attentively, take a view of, survey: ti,
Mt. xxviii. 1; to view mentally, consider: foll. by orat.
obliq., Heb. vii. 4. 2. to see; i.e. a. lo perceive
with the eyes: mvedpa, Lk. xxiv. 37; twa with a ptep., ibid.
39; tw, Ort, Jn. ix.8; 7d mpdowmdr twos (after the Hebr.;
see mpdcwzopr, | a.), i. q. to enjoy the presence of one,
have intercourse with him, Acts xx. 383; overt Oewpetv
riva, used of one from whose sight a person has been
withdrawn, Jn. xiv. 19; ov Oewpet 6 Koapos Td mvedpa, i. e.
so to speak, has no eyes with which it can see the Spirit;
he cannot render himself visible to it, cannot give it his
presence and power, Jn. xiv. 17. —b. fo discern, descry:
ri, Mk. v. 38; twa, Mk. iii. 11; Acts ix.7. cc. to ascer-
tain, find out, by seeing : twa with a pred. ace., Acts xvii.
22; ri with ptep., Acts xvii. 16; xxviii. 6; drt, Mk. xvi.
Ain ivea9eedit93 Acts xix: 265) -xxvii0105 foll-by
indir. dise., Acts xxi. 20; Hebraistically (see etdo, I. 5)
i. q. to get knowledge of: In. vi. 62 (+. vidv 7. dvOpemov
avaBuivovra the Son of Man by death ascending; cf. Liicke,
Meyer [yet cf. Weiss in the 6te Aufl.], Baumg.-Crusius,
in loc.) ; rév Odvaroy i.e. to die, Jn. viii. 51; and on the oth-
er hand, riv d6€av trod Xpicrod, to be a partaker of the
glory, i.e. the blessed condition in heaven, which Christ
enjoys, Jn. xvii. 24, cf. 22. [Comp.: dva-, rapa-Gewpew. |*
[Syvn. Oewpetv, OeacAat, dpav, ckowetv: Oewp. is
used primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one
who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose; Oewp.
would be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting
an army, 6ea00. of a lay spectator looking at the parade.
Oewp. as denoting the careful observation of details can even
be contrasted with dpay in so far as the latter denotes only
perception in the general; so used @ewpety quite coincides
with cxor. Schmidt i.ch. 11; see also Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on
Mt. vii. 3. Cf. s. vv. épdw, cxomréw.|
Oewpla, -as, 7, (Gewpds, on which see dewpew init.) ; fr.
[Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. aviewing,beholding. 2.
that which is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. xxiii. 48 (8
Mace. v. 24).*
04Kn, -ns, 9, (riOnuc); fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; that
in which a thing is put or laid away, a receptacle, reposi-
tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. xviii.
11; Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144.*
@mAdlw; 1 aor. edntaca; (Endy a breast, [ef. Peile,
Etym. p. 124 sq.]); 1. trans. to give the breast, give
suck, to suckle: Mt. xxiv.19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23,
(Lys., Aristot., al.; Sept. for pr); parol €Ondacav,
Lk. xxiii. 29 RG. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. xxi. 16
(Aristot., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. for pa) ; pacrovs, Lk.
xi. 27; Job iii. 12; Cant. viii. 1; Joel ii. 16; Theocr.
aviby IS}
94Aus, -eva, -v, [cf. And, init.], of the female sex; 4
Onrera, subst. a woman, a female: Ro. i. 26 sq-; also rd
Orv, Mt. xix. 4; Mk. x. 6; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27;
vii. 2; Ex. i. 16, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
®4pa [Lat. fera; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey,
‘Vaniéek p. 415; cf. Curtius § 314], -as, 4; fr. Hom.
down; a hunting of wild beasts to destroy them; hence,
figuratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V. a
trip |, Ro. xi. 9, on which ef. Fritzsche.*
290
Oncavpos
Gnpetw: 1 aor. inf. Onpedoa; (fr. Onpa, as dypevo fr.
dypa [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]); fr. Hom. down; to go a
hunting, to hunt, to catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wait
for, strive to ensnare; to catch artfully: ti ék ordparos
twos, Lk. xi. 54.*
Onpropaxéew, -G: 1 aor. €Onproudynoa; (Onpiouayos); to
Sight with wild beasts (Diod. 3,43, 7; Artem. oneir. 2, 54;
5, 49); ef €Onptoudynoa ev “Edéog, 1 Co. xv. 32 — these
words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con-
demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain them
tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious
men (so Onptopaxetvy in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [ete.]; oto
Onpiots paxdpeOa says Pompey, in App. bell. civ. 2, 61;
see @npiov). The former opinion encounters the objec-
tion that Paul would not have omitted this most terrible
of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. xi. 23 sqq.*
Onplov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of Ap; hence a little beast, little
animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171e.; of bees, Theocr. 19, 6;
but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi-
tive; the later dimin. is 6npidiov [cf. Epictet. diss. 2, 9,
6]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 7° and 173, an ani-
mal; a wild animal, wild beast, beast: prop., Mk. i. 13;
Acts x. 12 Rec.; xi. 6; xxviii. 4sq.; Heb. xii. 20; [Jas.
iii. 7]; Rev. vi. 8; in Rev. xi. 7 and chh. xiii—xx., under
the fig. of a ‘beast’ is depicted Antichrist, both his
person and his kingdom and power, (see davtixpiotos) ;
metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious, Tit. i.
12 [collog. ‘ugly dogs’], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273; Plut.
439; nub. 184; [ef. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never
with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other
exx. are given by Kypke, Observv. li. p. 379; O@npia
avOpamopuophpa, Ignat. Smyrn. 4, cf.ad Ephes. 7). [Syn.
see (Gov. |*
Oycavpitw; 1 aor. €6noavpica; pf. pass. ptep. reAnoar-
ptopevos; (Onaavpds); fr. Hdt. down; to gather and lay
up, to heap up, store up: to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3;
tivi, Lk. xii. 21; 2 Co. xii. 14; ri, 1 Co. xvi. 25 A@noavpots
éavt@, Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; i. q. to keep in store, store up, reserve:
pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7; metaph. so to live from day to day as
to increase either the bitterness or the happiness of one’s
consequent lot: dpynv éaur@, Ro. ii. 5; kaxd, Prov. i. 18;
Conv, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, (edrvxiay, App. Samn. 4, 8 [i. e.
vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.]; te@noavpicpevos kara Tivos
Odvos, Diod. 20, 36). [Comp.: dmo- 6ncavpifa.]*
Oncavpds, -od, 6, (fr. OEQ [ri@nue] with the paragog.
term. -aupos); Sept. often for Wis; Lat. thesaurus; i. e.
1. the place in which goods and precious things are col-
lected and laid up; a. a casket, coffer, or other recep-
tacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt.ii.11. b.a
treasury (Hat., Eur., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ;
1 Mace. iii. 29). @. storehouse, repository, magazine,
(Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, ete.; App. Pun. 88, 95):
Mt. xiii. 52 [ef. radaids, 1]; metaph. of the soul, as the
repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, ete. : [Mt. xii.
35*GLT Tr WH, 35°]; with epex. gen. rijs xap8ias, ibid.
xii. 35° Rec.; Lk. vi. 45. 2. the things laid up ina
treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. x3
| 83sq.; Heb. xi. 26. Onoavpoy exew ev ovpare, to have
Oiyyavo
treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those
to whom God has appointed eternal salvation: Mt. xix.
21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xviii. 22; something precious, Mt.
xiii. 44; used thus of the light of the gospel, 2 Co. iv. 7;
with an epex. gen. rjs codias (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 9; Plat.
Phil. p. 15 e.) k. yrooews, i. g. maca 7 copia k. yraous ws
O@ncavpoi, Col. ii. 3.*
®tyydéve [ prob. akin to reixos, fingo, fiction, ete.; Cur-
tius § 145]: 2 aor. @tyov; to touch, handle: pnd€é Olyns
touch not sc. impure things, Col. ii. 21 [ef. dara, 2 c.];
twos, Heb. xii. 20 ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Tragg., al.) ;
like the Hebr. 733, to do violence to, injure: tuvds, Heb.
xi. 28 (Eur. Iph. Aul. 1851; @v ai BrAadBae abrar Ovyya-
vovot, Act. Thom. § 12). [SYN. see dara, 2 c. | *
®A\(Bw; Pass., pres. OAiBouar; pf. ptcep. reOAuupevos ;
[allied with flagrum, affliction; fr. Wom. down]; (to press
(as grapes), press hard upon: prop. twa [A. V. throng],
Mk. iii. 9; 650s TeOAupevn a compressed way, i. e. nar-
row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. to trouble,
afflict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo): twa, 2 Th. i. 6; pass.
(Vulg. tribulor, [also angustior]; tribulationem patior) :
PICO orbive S, Vileoge (ik Wb iid 702 (0he a. Zi) Dim:
v. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (of @diBovres for O'¥ in Sept.)
[Comp. : azo-, cvv-0\iBo. | *
Pris, or Airs [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e.; Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -ews, 7, (OAi8@), prop. a
pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga-
len); in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afjlic-
tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also
pressura (2 Co. i. 4°; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17);
and in Col. i. 24 passio]) ; (Sept. for my, also for ae
y-, etc.): Mt. xxiv. 9; Acts vii. 11; xi. 19; Ro. xii. 12;
DU Cia Sa anly,. eteseeva. Arvin as vill. 2 20h, ae
Rev. i. 9; ii. 9, 22; vii. 14; joined with atevoxwpia [ cf.
Trench § lv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 Sq: ;
Is. [viii. 22]; xxx. 6); with dvdyen, 1 Th. iii. 7; with
diwypos, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Th.i.4; of the afflic-
tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities
of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24; of the straits
of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the
word a wider reference]; Jas. i. 27; of the distress of
a woman in child-birth. Jn. xvi. 21. Orin eye (i. q.
OriBouar), Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28; Rev. ii. 10; OdiWpis
eri twa épxera, Acts vil. 11; év Oriwer, 1 Th. i. 6. plur. :
Acts vil. 105) xiv. 22;.xx. 23; Ro. v. 3; Eph. iii. 13; 1
Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 33; rod Xpuorod, the afflictions which
Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, his fol-
lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see avtavar\n-
pow); OdtiWus ris Kapdias (x. gvvoyn), anviety, burden of
heart, 2Co. ii. 4; Orie emupepew (LL. T Tr WH eyetpetv,
see eyeipw, 4 C.) Trois deapois Tivos, to increase the misery
of my imprisonment by causing me anxiety, Phil. i. 16
(17).
Ovackw: pf. réOvnxa, inf. reAvdvae and L.TTr WH
teOynxevat (in Acts xiv. 19), ptep. reOvnxos; plupf. 3
pers. sing. ereOyjxer (Jn. xi. 21 Rec.); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. for nim; to die; pf. to be dead: Mt. ii. 20; Mk. xv.
44; Lk. vii. 12 [L br.]; viii. 49; Jn. xi. 21, Kee. in 39
291
Opivos
and 41, 44; xii.1[T WH om. LTr br.]; xix. 33; Acts
xiv. 19; xxv.19; metaph., of the loss of spiritual life:
(aoa TeOunke, i. e. kav Sox Cv ta’tyny ri aicOnriv Conv,
réOmxe kata mvedpa (Theoph.): 1 Tim. y.6 (Philo de
prof. § 10 (dvres evoe teOvnkace Kat reOvnkdres (act).
[ComP. : dzo-, ovy-arro-Ovicke. | *
@vyntds, -7, -dv, (verbal adj. fr. @vjoxw), [fr. Hom.
down ], liable to death, mortal: Ro. vi. 12; viii. 11; 1 Co.
xv. 53 sq.; 2Co.iv.11; v.4. [Ovnrds subject to death,
and so still living; vexpdés actually dead.] *
BopvBatw: (AdpuBos, q. v.); to trouble, disturb, (i. e.
tupBagw, q. v.); Pass. pres. 2 pers. sing. OopyBat in Lk.
x.41 . T Tr WH after codd. » BC L ete. (Not found
elsewh. [Soph. Lex. s. v. quotes Euseb. of Alex. (Migne,
Patr. Graec. vol. Ixxxvi. 1) p. 444 ¢.].)*
SopuBew, -o: impf. edoptBovv; pres. pass. bopvBodpar;
(6dpuBos) ; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to make a noise or up-
roar, be turbulent. 2. trans. to disturb, throw into con-
fusion: Hv rédw, to “set the city on an uproar,” Acts
xvii. 5; pass. to be troubled in mind, Acts xx. 10 [al. here
adhere to the outward sense]; to wail twmultuously,
Mioix123i Mik. 39.*
OdpuBos, -ov, 6, (akin to Apdos, tUpBn, tupBdtw, [but
TupBy etc. seem to come from another root; cf. Curtius
§ 250]), a noise, tumult, uproar: of persons wailing, Mk.
v. 38; of a clamorous and excited multitude, Mt. xxvii.
24; of riotous persons, Acts xx. 1; xxi. 34; a tumult,
as a breach of public order, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2;
Acts xxiv. 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down;
several times in Sept.) *
Opatw: pf. pass. ptep. reApavopevos; fr. [Hdt.], Aes-
chyl. down, to break, break in pieces, shatter, smite through,
(Ex. xv. 6; Num. xxiv. 17, ete.; 2 Macc. xv. 16): re-
Opavopevot, broken by calamity [A. V. bruised], Lk. iv.
18 (19) fr. Is. lviii. 6 for D¥Is. [Sy¥N. see pyyvupe.] *
Opeppa, -ros, 7d, (rTpehw), whatever is fed or nursed;
hence 1. a ward, nursling, child, (Soph., Eur., Plat.,
al.). 2. a flock, cattle, esp. sheep and goats: Jn. iv.
12. (Xen. oec. 20, 23; Plat., Diod., Joseph., Plut.,
Leian., Aelian, al.) *
Opynvew, -&: impf. eOpnvovy; fut. 6pnyjow; 1 aor. eOpy-
vnoa; (Opnvos, q. v-); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Pearl
pp ete. ; 1. to lament, to mourn: Jn. xvi. 20; of the
singers of dirges, [to wail], Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32. 2.
to bewail, deplore: twa, Lk. xxiii. 27.*
[On Opnvéw to lament, rémrouat to smite the breast in grief,
Avréouat to be pained, saddened, mevOéw to mourn, cf. Trench
§ Ixv. and see xAalw fin.; yet note that in classic Grk. Aum.
is the most comprehensive word, designating every species
of pain of body or soul; and that wev@ém expresses a self-
contained grief, never violent in its manifestations ; like our
Eng. word “mourn ” it is associated by usage with the death
of kindred, and like it used pregnantly to suggest that event.
See Schmidt vol. ii. ch 83.]
Optivos, -ov, 6. (Opeouar to cry aloud, to lament; cf.
Germ. Thréne [(?), rather drénen; Curtius § 317]), a
lamentation: Mt. ii. 18 Ree. (Sept. for MTP, also 12;
O. T. Apocr.; Hom., Pind., Tragg., Xen. Ages. 10, 3:
Plate, al:)*
Opnoxeia
Opnoxela Taf. -ia [see I, ¢], (a later word; Ion. O6pnoxin
in Hdt. [2, 18. 37]), -as, n, (fr. Opnoxedo, and this fr.
Opjoxos, q. v-; hence apparently primarily fear of the
gods); religious worship, esp. external, that which consists
in ceremonies: hence in plur. Opnoxias émiredciv pupias,
Hdt. 2, 37; xaOtoras dyveias te Kai Opnoxeias kai xabap-
povs, Dion. Hal. 2, 63; univ. religious worship, Jas. i.
26 sq.; with gen. of the obj. [W. 187 (176)] ray ayye-
Aov, Col. ii. 18 (rav eiSdAwv, Sap. xiv. 27; rev Sapdver,
Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 2; trav Gedy, ib. 9, 9,14; Tov Geod,
Hdian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.]; often in Josephus [cf.
Krebs, Observy. ete. p. 339 sq.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45,
7); religious discipline, religion: nuerépa Opnoxeia, of
Judaism, Acts xxvi. 5 (rv eunv Opnoxeiav katadur@r, put
into the mouth of God by Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 1; with
gen. of the subj. ra@v "Iovdaiwrv, 4 Mace. v. 6, 13 (12);
Joseph. antt. 12, 5,4; Op. xoopixn, i. e. worthy to be
embraced by all nations, a world-religion, b. j. 4, 5,
2; piety, mept tr. Oedv, antt. 1, 13,1; xara thv Eudurov
Opnokeiay trav BapBaperv mpos Td BacidtKdv dvopa, Charit.
7, 6 p. 165, 18 ed. Reiske; of the reverence of An-
tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Joseph. antt.
13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. 6; [esp. Trench
§ xviii. ].*
OpacKxos (T WH Opnoxés, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 101];
W.§6,1e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 28), -ou, 6,
fearing or worshipping God; religious, (apparently fr.
tpew to tremble; hence prop. trembling, fearful; cf. J. G.
Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121; on the
different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur-
tius § 316 connects with 6pa; hence ‘ to adhere to,’ ‘ be
a votary of’; cf. Vanicek p. 395]): Jas. i. 26. (Cf.
Trench § xlviii. ]*
OprapBedw; 1 aor. ptep. OprayBevoas; (ApiayBos, a hymn
sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus; among
the Romans, a triumphal procession [ Lat. triumphus, with
which word it is thought to be allied; cf. Vaniéek p.
317)) ; 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion.
Hal., App., Plut., Hdian., al.) ; rua, over one (as Plut.
Thes. and Rom. comp. 4): Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies
the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers
through Christ’s death). 2. by a usage unknown to
prof. auth., with a Hiphil or causative force (cf. W. p. 23
and § 38,1 [ef. B. 147 (129)]), with the ace. of a pers., to
cause one to triumph, i. e. metaph. to grant one complete
success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative
sense; see Mey. ad loc.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.].*
OplE, rpixds, dat. plur. OpEi, 7, [fr. Hom. down], the
hair ; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44;
xx. 18; Jn. xi.2; xu.5s Acts xxval. 345.1 Pet. 1. 3
[Lchm.om.]; Rev. i. 14; with rijs cepadns added (Hom.
Od. 13, 399. 431), Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 38; xii. 7. b.
the hair of animals: Rev. ix. 8; évdedup. rpixas xapnadov,
with a garment made of camel’s hair, Mk. i. 6, cf. Mt.
ili. 4; €v... Tpty@v xapndelov mréypaow meptenatnaar,
Clem. Alex. strom. 4 p. 221 ed. Sylb.*
Opo€w, -@: (Apods clamor, tumult); in Grk. writ. to cry
aloud, make a noise by outcry; in the N. T. to trouble,
292
Ouyatnp
frighten; Pass. pres. 6poodpat; to be troubled in mind, to
be frightened, alarmed: Mt. xxiv. 6 [B. 243 (209)]; Mk.
xili. 7; 2 Th.ii.2; [1 aor. ptep. OponOévres, Lk. xxiv. 37
Trmrg. WH mrg.]. (Cant. v. 4.) *
OpdpuBos, -ov, 6, [allied with rpépw in the sense to
thicken; Vanitek p. 307], a large thick drop, esp. of
clotted blood (Aeschyl. Eum. 184); with atuaros added
(Aeschyl. choeph. 533, 546; Plat. Critias p. 120 a.),
Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass. (see WH. App.
ad loc.) ].*
Opdvos, -ov, 6, (OPAQ to sit; cf. Curtius § 316), [fr.
Hom. down], Sept. for 83, a throne, seat, i.e. a chair of
state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to kings,
hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52;
Actsii.30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world:
Mt. v. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts vii.49 (Is. lxvi.1); Rev.i.4;
iil. 21; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, etc.; Heb. iv. 16; viii. 1; xii. 2. to
the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine
administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21; xx.
11; xxii. 3; hence the divine power belonging to Christ,
Heb. i. 8. to judges, i.q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor.
p- 807 b.): Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to
elders: Rev.iv.4; xi. 16. to Satan: Rev. ii. 13; ef.
Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see
Onpiov) : Rev. xvi. 10. O@povos is used by meton. of one
who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in plur.
of angels: Col. i. 16 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].
Ovareipa, -wv, rd, (and once -as, 7, Rev. i. 11 Lehm.
Ovaretpay [cf. Tdf. ad loc.; WH.App. p. 156; B.18 (16) ]),
Thyatira, a city of Lydia, formerly Pelopia and Euhippia
(Plin. h. n. 5, 31), now Akhissar, a colony of Macedonian
Greeks, situated between Sardis and Pergamum on the
river Lycus; its inhabitants gained their living by
traffic and the art of dyeing in purple: Acts xvi. 14;
Rey. 4.1251. 18, 24. ([(B: Die.y1%
Ovyarnp, gen. Ovyarpos, dat. Ovyarpi, ace. Ouyarépa, voc.
Ovyarep, plur. Ovyarépes, acc. -epas, n, (of the same root
as Gothic dauhtar, Eng. daughter, Germ. Tochter [Curtius
§ 318; Vaniéek p. 415]); Hebr. n3; [fr. Hom. down];
a daughter: prop., Mt. ix. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts
vii. 21,etc. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc.
cf. W. § 29,2; B.§129a.5; WH. App. p. 158] in kindly
address: Mt. ix. 22; Mk. v. 34 [L Tr WH @vyarnp]; Lk.
viii. 48 [Tr WH 6vyarnp], (see vids 1a. fin., réxvoy b. a).
b. in phrases modelled after the Hebr.: a. a daughter
of God i. e. acceptable to God, rejoicing in God’s pecu-
liar care and protection: 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap.
ix. 7; see vios r. Oeov 4, réxvov b. y.). B. withthe name
of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its
inhabitants and citizens (very often so in the O. T., as
Is. xxxvii. 22; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 19; Zeph. iii. 14, etc.);
in the N. T. twice 4 Ovy. Sav, i. e. inhabitants of Jeru-
salem: Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15, (Is.i.8; x. 32; Zech. ix.
9, etc.; see Sumy, 2). sy. Ouyarépes ‘IepovoadAnp, women
of Jerusalem: Lk. xxiii. 28. 8. female descendant: ai
Ovyarépes *Aapw@v, women of Aaron’s posterity, Lk. i. 5;
6vyarnp ’ABpadap daughter of Abraham, i. e. a woman
tracing her descent from Abraham, Lk. xiii. 16, (4 Mare.
Ouyatp.ov
xv. 28 (25); Gen. xxviii. 8; xxxvi.2; Judg. xi. 40; Is.
XVi. 2, etc.).
@vyarpiov, -ov, 70, a little daughter: Mk. v. 23; vii. 25.
[Strattis Incert.5; Menand., Athen., Plut. reg. et imper.
Apophtheg. p. 179 e. (Alex. 6); al.]*
OveAAa, -ns, 7, (Ave to boil, foam, rage, as deAXa fr. dw,
anu), a sudden storm, tempest, whirlwind: Heb. xii. 18.
(Deut. iv. 11; v. 22; Hom., Hes., Tragg., al.) [Cf.
Schmidt ch. 55, 11; Trench § Ixxiii. fin. ]*
Ovivos [WH om. the dier. (cf. I, ¢, fin.) ], -n, -ov, (fr. Avia
or 6va, the citrus, an odoriferous North-African tree
used as incense [and for inlaying; B.D. s.v. Thyine
wood; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 401 sq.]),
thyine (Lat. citrinus): §ddov, Rev. xviii. 12 as in Diose.
a2; ct. Elin. hen: 13, 30 (16).*
Ovpiapa, -ros, To, (Oupidw), Sept. mostly for nyop, an
aromatic substance burnt, incense: generally in plur.,
Rev. v. 8; viii. 3 sq.; xviii. 13; 7 dpa rod 6., when the
incense is burned, Lk.i. 10; @vavaarnpiov Tov Gup. ib. 11.
(Soph., Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Joseph. ; Sept.) *
Ovprarhprov, -ov, Td, (Aupidw), prop. a utensil for fumi-
gating or burning incense [cf. W. 96 (91)]; hence a
a censer; 2 Chr. xxvi. 19; Ezek. viii. 11; Hdt. 4, 162;
Thue. 6,46; Diod. 13,3; Joseph. antt. 4, 2,4; 8,3,8; Ael.
vy. hs 12, 51. 2. the altar of incense: Philo, rer. div.
haer. § 46; vit. Moys. iii. § 7; Joseph. antt. 3, 6,8; 3,8,
3; b. j.5,5,5; Clem. Alex.; Orig.; and so in Heb. ix.
4[{(where Tr mrg. br.), also 2 Tr mrg. in br.], where see
Bleek, Liinemann, Delitzsch, Kurtz, in opp. to those
[(A. V. included)] who think it means censer; [yet cf.
Harnack in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 572 sq. ].*
Oupidw, -@: 1 aor. inf. Gupidoae [RG -doar]; (fr. Odpa,
and this fr. dw, q. v.); in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Hdt.,
Plat. down; Sept. for VP and VOPA: to burn incense :
LK. i. 9.*
Oupopaxew, -@; (Guuds and paxopuar); fo carry on war
with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.); to
be very angry, be exasperated [A.V. nighly displeased]:
tii, with one, Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observv. ii.
p- 62 sq.*
Oupds, -ov, 6, (fr. 6dw to rush along or on, be in a heat,
breathe violently; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl.
p- 419 e., @upds dd THs Oicews k. Céoews THS Woxijs; ac-
cordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were
in the body, and the rage with which the man pants and
swells), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. often for 8 anger, and
mm excandescentia ; also for nn aestus. Inthe N.T.
1. passion, angry heat, (excandescentia, Cic. Tuse. 4, 9,
21), anger forthwith boiling up and soon subsiding again,
(épyn, on the other hand, denotes indignation which has
arisen gradually and become more settled; [ef. (Plato)
deff. 415 e. @upds: dpyy Biawos dvev Noywrpod> vdcos raEews
Wuxis adoyicrov. py: mapdkAnots Tov OupiKod els Td
TipwpetoOa, Greg. Naz. carm. 34 Oupdos pev €ativ adpdos
ears ppevos, dpyn S€ Ovpos eupevor, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4
ex O€ tis muxpias Oupds, ex Sé Tov Ovpod dpyn; cf. Aristot.
rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope’s note]; hence we read in Sir.
xlviii. 10 xomdcat dpyiv mpd Ovpod, before it glows and
293
Ovpa
bursts forth; [see further, on the distinction betw. the
two words, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. iii.
ch. 142]): Lk. iv. 28; Acts xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col.
iii. 8; Heb. xi. 27; 6 6. rov Geov, Rev. xiv. 13; xv.1, 7;
xvi. 1; €xeww Gupdy, to be in a passion, Rev. xii. 12 (Ael.
v. h. 1, 14); dpyy cat Ovpds (as Sept. Mic. v. 15; Isoer.
p- 249 c.; Hdian. 8, 4,1; al.): Ro. ii. 8 (Ree. in the in-
verse order; so Deut. ix. 19; xxix. 23, 28, [ef. Trench
u. s.]); plur. @vyoi impulses and outbursts of anger [W.
176 (166); B. 77 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20, (2
Mace. iv. 25, 38; ix. 7; x. 35; xiv. 45; 4 Mace. xviii.
20; Sap. x. 3; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.]; Plat. Pro-
tag. p. 323 e.; [Phileb. p. 40 e.; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13];
Polyb. 3, 10,5; Diod. 13, 28; Joseph. b. j. 4, 5,2; Plut.
Cor. 1; al.). 2. glow, ardor: 6 oivos rod Ovpod [see
oivos, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine, Germ.
Glutwein (which either drives the drinker mad or kills
him with its deadly heat; cf. Is. li. 17, 22; Jer. xxxii. 1
(xxv. 15) sqq.): Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3; with rod Oeod
added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10; with
THs opyns Tov Geod added [A. V. fierceness], Rev. xvi. 19 ;
xix. 15; ef. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269
note.*
Oupdw, -@: 1 aor. pass. €Ovuwbnv; (Oupds); to cause
one to become incensed, to provoke to anger; pass. (Sept.
often for 77M) to be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ.
fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down.) *
ipa, -as, 7, (fr. Ov to rush in, prop. that through
which a rush is made; hence Germ. Thiir [Eng. door ;
Curtius § 319]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for nO3 and
Md, sometimes also for \j»w; a (house) door; [in plur.
iq. Lat. fores, folding doors; cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24
(21); cf. riAn]; a. prop.: kAelew etc. rv 6., Mt. vi.
6; Lk. xiii. 25; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19,
26; Acts xxi. 30; dvoiyew, Acts v.19; pass. Acts xvi.
26 sq.; kpovew, Acts xii. 13; dca rps 6. Jn. x. 1 sq.; mpos
ty 6., Mk. i. 33; xi.4 [Tr WHom. rnv; cf. W. 123
(116)]; Acts iii. 2; ra mpds rv 0. the vestibule [so B.
§ 125, 9; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Mk.
li. 2; mpos ry 6. Jn. xviii. 16; emi ry 6. Acts v. 9; mpa
ths 6. Acts xii. 6; émt trav bvpav, Acts v. 23 [RG mpd].
b. Oupa is used of any opening like a door, an entrance,
way or passage into: 9 0. rod prnpetov, of the tomb, Mt.
XXVii. 60; xxvili. 2 RG; Mk. xv. 46; xvi. 3, (Hom. Od.
9, 243; 12, 256; al.). c. in parable and metaph. we
find a. 7 dupa tév mpoBarav, the door through which
the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings
salvation to those who follow his guidance, Jn. x. 7, 9;
ef. Christ. Fr. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 20
sqq-; (in Ignat. ad Philad. 9 Christ is called 4 6vpa rod
marpés, Ou’ hs etoépyovra ABpadp ... kai ot mpopyrat; cf.
Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,3sq.). 8. ‘anopen
door’ is used of the opportunity of doing something: ris
miotews, of getting faith, Acts xiv. 27; open to a
teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co.
ii. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and
literal language, the phrase 6ipa peydAn x. evepyns [A. V-
a great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity
@upeos
of teaching a great multitude the way of salvation, and
one encouraging the hope of the most successful results :
1 Co. xvi. 9. sy. the door of the kingdom of heaven
(likened to a palace) denotes the conditions which
must be complied with in order to be received into the
kingdom of God: Lk. xiii. 24 (for Rec. mvAns); power
of entering, access into, God’s eternal kingdom, Rev. iil.
8 cf. 7, [but al. al.; add here Rev.iv.1]. 8. he whose
advent is just at hand is said emi @ipas etvar, Mt. xxiv.
33; Mk. xiii. 29, and apo dupav éotnxevat, Jas. v. 9. €.
éotnkas emi tiv Ovpav x. Kpovov is said of Christ seeking
entrance into souls, and they who comply with his en-
treaty are said dvotyew rt. Ovpav, Rev. iii. 20."
Oupeds, -ov, 6, (fr. Oipa, because shaped like a door [cf.
W. 23]), a shield (Lat. scutum); it was large, oblong,
and four-cornered : rov 6. tis miotews, i. q. THY TioTW ws
Ovpedv, Eph. vi. 16. It differs from domis (Lat. clipeus),
which was smaller and circular. [Polyb., Dion. Hal.,
EPlat..cal.))*
Oupis, -(Sos, 4, (dimin. of Ovpa, prop. a litile door; Plat.,
Dio Cass.), a window: Acts xx. 9; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph.,
Theophr., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
Oupwpés, -ov, 6, 7), (fr. Ovpa, and wpa care; cf. apxvapés,
mudwpds, tywwpds; cf. Curtius § 501, cf. p. 101; [ Vanicek
p- 900; Allen in Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 129]), a door-
keeper, porter; male or female janitor: masc., Mk. xiii.
34; Jn. x.33; fem. Jn. xviii. 16 sq. ([Sappho], Aeschyl.,
Hat., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Joseph., al.; Sept.) *
Ouoia, -as, 7, (@vw), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for
7m)? an offering, and 23; @ sacrifice, victim ; a.
prop.: Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, fr. Hos. vi. 6; Mk. ix. 49
({R GL Tr txt. br.], see digo); Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5,
26; plur., Mk. xii. 33; Lk. xiii.1; Heb. ix. 23; [x.1,8
(here Ree. sing.) ]; avdyew Ovoiay trwi, Acts vil. 41; ava- |
pepe, Heb. vii. 27, (see dvayw, and avapepw 2); [dovvac
6. Lk. ii. 24]; mpoodéepev, Acts vii. 42; Heb. v. 15 viii.
3; x. [11], 12; [xi 4]; pass. Heb. ix. 9; dia ris Bvoias
avrov, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he
offered (not, by offering up himself; that would have
been expressed by 61a ths Ovoias THs EavTod, or dia THS
éavrod Ovaias), Heb. ix. 26; éoOiew ras Ovcias, to eat the
flesh left over from the victims sacrificed (viz. at the
sacrificial feasts; ef. [Lev. vii. 15 sqq.; Deut. xii. 7 sq.
17 sq., ete.| Win. RWB. s. v. Opfermahlzeiten), 1 Co. x.
18. b. in expressions involving a comparison: @vatat
mvevpatikat (see mvevpartikds, 8 a.), 1 Pet. ii. 5; Ovola, a
free gift, which is likened to an offered sacrifice, Phil.
iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 16 (rocavrais Ovoias, 1. e. with such
things as substitutes for sacrifices God is well pleased) ;
Oucia (aoa (see Caw, I. b. fin.), Ro. xii. 1; avapépew
@vaiav aivécews, Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can
mean, aiveow os Ovoiavy, the author would not have
294
Oapakt
added, as he has, the explanation of the words; he
must therefore be supposed to have reproduced the
Hebr. phrase 71)A~1N3;, and then defined this more
exactly; Lev. vii. 3 (13) [ef. 2 (12)]; Ps. evi. (evii.) 22;
see alveois); emt TH Ovoia . . . THs TloTews wor (epexX.
gen.), in the work of exciting, nourishing, increasing,
your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to
God [ef. émi, p. 233° bot.], Phil. ii. 17.*
Oucvactiptov, -ov, rd, (neut. of the adj. @vovacrnpios
[ef. W. 96 (91) ], and this fr. @vovag@ to sacrifice), a word
found only in Philo [e. g. vita Moys. iii. § 10, ef. § 7;
Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 1] and the bibl. and eccl. writ.; Sept.
times without number for M31; prop. an altar for the
slaying and burning of victims; used of 1. the altar
of whole burnt-offerings which stood in the court of the
priests in the temple at Jerusalem [B. D. s. v. Altar]:
Mt. v. 23 sq.; xxiii. 18-20, 35; Lk. xi.51; 1 Co. ix. 13;
XS ellebsavilids ewe vexdeels 2. the altar of incense,
which stood in the sanctuary or Holy place [B. D. u. s.]:
TO Ovavaot. Tov Oupidparos, Lk. i. 11 (Ex. xxx. 1); [sym-
bolically] in Heaven: Rev. vi. 9; viii. 3, 5; ix. 13; xiv.
1S SGV dc 3. any other altar, Jas. ii. 21; plur. Ro.
xi. 3; metaph., the cross on which Christ suffered an
expiatory death: to eat of this altar 1. e. to appropriate
to one’s self the fruits of Christ’s expiatory death, Heb.
mails 1'0.*
Ovw; impf. 6vov; 1 aor. €6vca; Pass., pres. inf. Qve-
cba; pf. ptep. redvpevos; 1 aor. ervnv (1 Co. v. 7, where
Rec." é606nv, cf. W. § 5, 1d.12); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. mostly for 31, also for UMW, to slay ; 1. to sac-
rifice, immolate: absol. Acts xiv. 13; rwi, dat. of pers.
(in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18; revi t1, 1 Co. x. 20. 2:
to slay, kill: absol., Acts x. 13; xi. 7; ri, Lk. xv. 23, 27,
30; pass. Mt. xxii. 4; 7o macya, the paschal lamb, Mk.
xiv. 12; pass., Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, 6).
3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x. 10; twa, Sir. Xxxi. (XxXxiv.)
24: 1 Mace. vil. 19.*
Owpas, -4, 6, (DNF [i. e. twin], see didupos), Thomas,
one of Christ’s apostles : Mt. x. 3; Mk. iti. 18; Lk. vi.
15; Jn. xi.16; xiv.5; xx. 24-29 [in 29 Rec. only]; xxi.
25 Acts 1. 13.065. Desi vele
Odpaé, -akos, 6; 1. the breast, the part of the body
from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot.
hist. an. 1, 7 [cf. 8, p. 491°, 28]; Eur., Plat., al.): Rev.
ix. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast-
plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting
the body on both sides from the neck to the middle,
(Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.): Rev. ix. 9,17; €vdvecOa
r. Oxpaka THs Stkaocvwns, i. e. Sckavocvvny ws Owpaka,
Eph. vi. 14; @dpaxa rioteas, i. e. riot os Odpaxa, 1 Th.
v. 8, (evdverOar Stkatoaivny ws Oapakxa, Is. lix. 17; vd.
Oapaxa Stxatoovyny, Sap. v. 19 (48)).*
295
Te
[I, «: on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 3 sqq.; Scrivener, Introd. ete.
p. 42, and Index II. s.v.; Auwenen and Colet, N.'T. Vat.,
praef. p. xi. sq ; Zdf. Proleg. p. 109; WH. Intr. §410; W.
§ 5,4; B. pp. 11, 44sq., 69; and s. vv. aégos, (gov, ‘Hpgins
etc., mpopa, Tpwds, ody. 4 is often substituted for e, esp. in
nouns ending in ea (ia; on their accent see Chandler § 95
sqq.), in proper names, etc.; cf. WH. App. p. 153; Intr.
§ 399; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 83, 86 sq.; Scrivener, Introd. ete. p.
10 sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. EL; Meisterhans p. 23 sq.; (on the
usage of the Mss. ef. Tdf. Conlatio critica cod. Sin. c. text.
Elz. ete. p. xvili.; Scrivener, Full Collation of the cod. Sin.
ete. 2d ed. p. lii.). Examples of this spelling in recent edi-
tions are the following: ayvia WH, aAagovla TWH, avadia T
WH, arerdfa WH (exc. Heb. iv. 6,11), apecxia T WH, Sovala
T, €0eAo8pnoxia T WH, cidwAodarpia WH, cidrcpuia T WH,
émencta WH, épidia WH, épunvia WH, Opnokia T, feparia
WH, karondia WH, kakomabla WH, koAakia T WH, xvBia T
WH, payia T WH, uedodia T WH, 6f0adru050vAla T WH,
mavoia 'T (everywhere; see his note on Heb. xii. 5), mpayuaria
TWH, zpairabia T WH, pappakia T WH (now in Gal. v. 20),
aperAta WH, Attadia T WH, Kaioapia 1 WH, Aaodixia T
WH, Sayapia T WH (Sauapirns, Samapiris,T) SeAcvxla TW H,
PirAadedpia TWH; occasionally the same substitution occurs
in other words: e.g. aty:os WH, “Apios (rdyos) T, davi(w T
WH, daviov W H,danorgjs T WH, eiddéaAcov T WH, cEarrpojva
W HL, ’Emxovpios T WH, juiorag WH (see fuious), kaTareAtu-
pwevos WH, Aiuua WH, NepOadAtu WE in Rev. vii. 6, dpives
WH, 100s WH, crotids WH, brédAmpa WH, pwrivds WH,
xpeopirerns (T?) WH; also in augm., as iorhrew WH, YSov
(see e%dw I. init.); cf. WH. App. p. 162. On { as a dem-
onst. addition to adverbs etc., see vuvi ad init. On the use
and the omission of the mark of dizresis with « in certain
words, see Td/. Proleg. p. 108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch.
p- 136 sq. |
*Iderpos, -ov [cf. B. 18 (16) ], 6, (1s) LA. e. whom Jeho-
vah enlightens], Num. xxxii. 41), Jairus [pron. Ja-i-rus ],
a ruler of the synagogue, whose daughter Jesus restored
to life: Mk. vy. 22; Lk. viii. 41. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed.s. v.]*
"Iax4B, 6, (3p) [i. e. heel-catcher, supplanter]), Ja-
cob; 1. the second of Isaac’s sons: Mt.i. 2; viii. 11;
Jn. iv. 5 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. ix. 13, ete. Hebraistically
i. q. the descendants of Jacob: Ro. xi. 26, (Num. xxiii. 7;
Fsxd8* iden Hebr. txt.|cxxii, 26> Sir. xxi. 12: 1
Mace. iii. 7, and often). 2. the father of Joseph,
the husband of Mary the mother of the Saviour: Mt. i.
15 sq.
‘IaxwBos, -ov, 6, (see the preceding word [and cf. B. 6,
18 (15) ]), James; 1. son of Zebedee, an apostle, and
brother of the apostle John, (commonly called James the
greater or elder). He was slain with the sword by the
command of king Herod Agrippa I. (c. A. p. 44): Mt. iv.
Ze ee (os evi 1s MK. 1. 19, 295 at. Lee ve STs. ix.
‘Tau pi
De Se; a}, CHS sie BS SNS GoM be v. 10; vi. 14; viii. 51:
EXE OMOA) ACES. Lo) oxiT. 2. 2. James (commonly
called the less), an apostle, son of Alpheus: Mt. x. 3;
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Actsi.13; apparently identical
with "IdkwBos 6 puxpds James the little [ A. V. the less], the
son of Mary, Mk. xv. 40 (Mt. xxvii. 56); xvi. 1, wife of
Cleophas [i. e. Clopas q. v.] or Alphzeus, Jn. xix. 25; see
in ’AAdatos, and in Mapia, 3. 3. James, the brother
of our Lord (see ddeAdos, 1): Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3; Gal.
i. 19 (where «i yy is employed ace. to a usage illustrated
under cil. 3 ¢.@.) >11.9, 12: Acts xin. 173 xv.13' xx
18; 1 Co. xv. 7 (?); Jas. i. 1, the leader of the Jewish
Christians, and by them surnamed 6 Si«atos the Just, the
overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to
the year 62 or 63 (or ace. to Hegesippus in Euseb. h. e. 2,
23 [trans. in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly
probable [see Heinichen’s note ad loc.]), in which year
he suffered martyrdom, Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1. In opposi-
tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in B. D.s. v.
James], which identifies this James with James the son
of Alphzeus, and understands 6 ddeA@os rod Kupiov to mean
his cousin, cf. esp. Clemen in Winer’s Zeitschr. f. wis-
sensch. Theol. for 1829, p. 351 sqq.; Blom, Diss. de trois
adeA@ois ... rod kupiov. Lugd. 1839; Wilib. Grimm in
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encycl., Sect. 2, vol. 23 p. 80 sqq.;
Schaff, Das Verhiiltniss des Jacobus, Bruders des Herrn,
zu Jacobus Alphii. Berl. 1842 [also his Church Hist.
(1882) i. 272sq.]; Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief ete. p. 138
sqq-; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq.; [Sieffert in
Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq.; and reff. s. v. ddeAdds, 1 (esp.
Bp. Lghtft.) ]. 4. Anunknown James, father of the
apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to
the opinion of those interpreters who think that not
ddekgdv but vicv must be supplied in the phrase *Iovday
*Iax@Bov; see Iovdas, 8.
tana, -ros, Td, ((douat) 5 1. a means of healing, rem-
edy, medicine; (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hdt. 3, 130; Thue.
2,51; Polyb. 7,14, 2; Plut., Leian., al.). 2. a heal-
ing: plur., 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; (Jer. xl. (xxxiil.) 6, etc. ;
Plat. lerg. 7 p. 790 d.).*
"TapBpfis, 6, and 6 ‘Iawvis [cf. B. 20 (18)], Jambres
(for which the Vulg. seems to have read Mapfpis, as in
the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menach. c. 9 in the Ge-
mara; cf. Buatorf, Lex. Talm. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed.
Fischer]), and Jannes, two Egyptian magicians who in
the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron
in order to destroy his influence with the king: 2 Tim.
iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de
rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists
and the Rabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and Jambres].
*Tavva
These Magi are mentioned not only in the tract of the
Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ.
of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 11; the book Sohar on Num. xxii.
22; Numenius epi raya@oi in Orig. c. Cels. 4, 51; Euseb.
praep. evang. 9, 8; Evang. Nicod. c. 5, and other writ.
enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. apocr. p. 552 sq.; [and
Wetstein on 2 Tim. 1.c.; Holtzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].*
Tava, (L T Tr WH "lawai); Jannai, Vulg. Janne
[Tdf. txt. (cod. Amiat.) Jannae], indecl. prop. name of
one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 24.*
*Iavvijs, 6, see "IauBpis.
ldopat, -@yar: [perh. fr. ios, Lob. Technol. p. 157 sq. ;
ef. Vanicek p. 87]; a depon. verb, whose pres., impf.
iopny, fut. iarouar, and 1 aor. mid. tacaunv have an act.
signif., but whose pf. pass. tayat, 1 aor. pass. iaénv, and
1 fut. pass. ‘aOnoopuat have a pass. signif. (cf. Kriiger § 40
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.; B.52 (46); W. § 38, 7c.]); [fr. Hom.
down]; Sept. for 851; to heal, cure: twa, Lk. iv. 18 R
L br.; v.17; vi. 19; ix. 2 [here T WH om. Tr br. the
acc. ], 11, 42; xiv. 4; xxii. 51; Jn. iv. 47; Acts ix. 34;
x. 38; xxviii. 8; pass., Mt. viii. 8,13; xv. 28; Lk. vii. 7;
vill. 47; xvii. 15; Jn. v.13 [Tdf. doOevav]; and Acts iii.
11 Rec.; teva azo tivos. to cure (i. e. by curing to free)
one of [lit. from; cf. B. 322 (277)] a disease: pass., Mk.
v. 29; Lk. vi. 18 (17). trop. to make whole i. e. to free
from errors and sins, to bring about (one’s) salvation:
Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) $
pass., 1 Pet. ii. 24; Jas. v.16; in fig. discourse, in pass. :
Heb. xii. 13.*
"Taped (T WH "Idper, Lehm. "Iape6; [on the accent in
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), 6, (Heb. 177 descent),
Jared, indecl. prop. name (Iapddys ['Iapédes, ed. Bexk.]
in Joseph. antt. 1, 2, 2), the father of Enoch (Gen. v.
15, 18; 1 Chr.i. 2 [here A. V. Jered]): LK. iii. 37.*
tacts, -ews, 7, a healing, cure: Lk. xiii.32; Acts iv. 22,
30. (Prov. iii. 8; iv. 22; [Archil.], Hippocr., Soph.,
Plat., Leian., al.) *
taoms, -dos, 7, [fr. Plato down], jasper; a precious
stone of divers colors (for some are purple, others blue,
others green, and others of the color of brass; Plin. h. n.
37,37 (8)): Rev. iv. 3; xxi.11,18sq. [But many think
(questionably) the diamond to be meant here; others the
precious opal; see Riehm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 8 and
10; B. D.s. v. Jasper; cf. ‘Bible Educator’ ii. 352.] *
"Idc-wv, -ovos, 6, Jason, a Thessalonian, Paul’s host :
Acts xvii. 5-7, 9; whether he is the same who is men-
tioned in Ro. xvi. 21 as a kinsman of Paul is uncertain.*
larpds, -ov, 6, (tdouac), [fr. Hom. down], a physician:
Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17; v. 26; Lk. v. 31; viii. 43 [here
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Col. iv. 14; iarpé, Oeparev-
gov geautov, a proverb, applied to Christ in this sense:
‘come forth from your lowly and mean condition and
create for yourself authority and influence by perform-
ing miracles among us also, that we may see that you
are what you profess to be,’ Lk. iv. 23.*
i8€ [so occasionally Grsb. and Rec." **; e. g. Gal. v.
2; Ro. xi. 22] and (later) te (28€ drrixds as rd eine,
AaBe, etpé+ ie EAAnu«de, Moeris (p. 193 ed. Pierson):
296
16105
cf. W. § 6,1a.; [B. 62 (54)]), impv. fr. ef8ov, q. v.; [fr.
Hom. down]. In so far as it retains the force of an
imperative it is illustrated under eid, I. 1 e. and 3.
But in most places in the N. T. it stands out of con-
struction like an interjection, even when many are ad-
dressed, [cf. B. 70 (61); and esp. 139 (121 sq.)]; Lat.
en, ecce; see! behold! lo! a. at the beginning of
sentences: as the utterance of one who wishes that
something should not be neglected by another, Mt. xxvi.
65; MK. il 24; xi. 21% xin. 1; dn. v. 14> xvi 2) oe
ii. 17 Rec.; equiv. to Germ. sieh’ doch [see, pray; yet
see], Jn. xi. 36; xvi. 29; xix.4; Gal. v. 2; or of one
who brings forward something new and unexpected, Jn.
Vil. 26; xi.3; xii. 19; or of one pointing out or show-
ing, Germ. hier ist, da ist, dieses ist: te 6 rémos (French,
voici le lieu), Mk. xvi. 6; add, Mk. iii. 34 (L Trmrg.
idov); Jn. i. 29, 36,47 (48); xix.5[T Tr WH idov], 14,
26 sq. (where some (Sov) ; where we [might] use simply
here, Mt. xxv. 25; with adverbs of place: i8e [RGL
idovd] Sd 6 Xprorés, tde [RG idod] éexet, Mk. xiii. 21. bz.
inserted into the midst of a sentence, in such a way that
the words which precede it serve to render the more evi-
dent the strangeness of what follows: Mt. xxv. 20, 22;
Jn. iii. 26.
i8€a,, -as, 7), (fr. eiSov, ideiv), form, external appearance;
aspect, look: Mt. xxviii. 3 (T Tr WH ciééa, gq. v.), ef.
Alberti, Observv. ad loc.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81]. (Grk.
writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 2 Mace. iii. 16; for N39
Gen. vy. 3.) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 3.]* ;
(tos, -a, -ov, (in prof. auth. [esp. Attic] also of two
term.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. pertaining to one’s self,
one’s own; used a. univ. of what is one’s own as opp.
to belonging to another: ra i8ta mpdBara, Jn. x. 3 sq. 12;
Ta ivatia ta tdca, Mk. xv. 20 RG Tr (for which T ra 16.
ip. avtov, L WH ra in. adrod); 76 tdtov (for his own use)
ktivos, Lk. x. 34; 8a Tov idiov aiparos, Heb. ix. 12; xiii.
12, (ttm aipart, 4 Mace. vii. 8); 76 idtov picOwpa, which
he had hired for himself (opp. to 7 £evia [q. v.], 23), Acts
Xxvill. 30; add, Jn. v.43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiii. 36;
Ro. xi. 24; xiv. 4 sq.3 1 Co. iii. 8 (Gcov xdrov) ; vi. 18;
vil. 4, 37; ix. 72°x1, 21% ‘Gal. wiro. ft Dunn a ao ee
4; 2 Tim.i.9; iv.3; mpdocew ra ida, to do one’s own
business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others),
1 Th. iv. 11; i8fa émiAvors, an interpretation which one
thinks out for himself, opp. to that which the Holy Spirit
teaches, 2 Pet. i. 20 [see yivoua, 5 e.a.]; rv idiav dtxato-
avvnv, which one imagines is his due, opp. to dixacocvvn
Geov, awarded by God, Ro. x. 3; idia émOupia, opp. to di-
vine prompting, Jas. i. 14; xara ras (dias émOupias, Opp.
to God’s requirements, 2 Tim. iv. 3; with the possess.
pron. airay added [B. 118 (108); ef. W. 154 (146)], 2
Pet. iii. 3; isos adrav ampodnyrns, Tit. i. 12; with adrod
added, Mk. xv. 20 Tdf. (see above) ; ra té:a [cf. B. § 127,
24], those things in which one differs from others, his nat-
ure and personal character,— in the phrase éx rév idiev
Aareiv, Jn. viii. 44; [cf. the fig. ra id:a rod cwparos, 2 Co.
v.10 Lmrg. (ef. Trmrg.); see dia, A. I. 2]; idtos, my
own: rais idiais vepoi (unassisted by others), 1 Co. iv.
£6L@TNS
12; thine own: év rd idio dpOadpa, Lk. vi. 41. b. of
what pertains to one’s property, family, dwelling, country,
etc.; of property, ovde els te Trav Umapxdvrwv adT@ Edeyev
idtov etvat, Acts iv. 32; ra tdra, res nostrae, our own things,
i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 LT Tr WH (ef.
B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; rH idia yeved, in his own
generation, i. e. in the age in which he lived, Acts xiii. 36 ;
7 (dia 7OXs, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi-
tant, Lk. ii. 3[RGTrmrg.]; Mt. ix.1; rf idia duadéxro,
in their native tongue, Acts i. 19 [WH om. Tr br. dia];
ii. 6,83 1 Ota Secovdarpovia, their own (national) religion,
Acts xxv. 19; of tS:0t, one’s own people (Germ. die An-
gehérigen), one’s fellow-countrymen, associates, Jn. i. 11,
ef. 2 Mace. xii. 22; one’s household, persons belonging to
the house, family,’ or company, Jn. xiii. 1; Acts iv. 23;
xxiv. 23; 1 Tim. v. 8; eds ra tdca (Germ. in die Heimat),
to one’s native land, home, Jn. i. 11 (meaning here, the
land of Israel) ; xvi. 32; xix. 27, (3 Mace. vi. 27; 1 Esdr.
v. 46 (47); for jm3a-ox, Esth. v.10; vi. 12); 6 tScos dvmp,
a husband, 1 Co. vii. 2 [B. 117 (102) note; ef. W. 154
(146)]; plur., Eph. v. 22; Tit. ii.5; 1 Pet. iii. 1,5; Eph.
v. 24 RG; Col. iii. 18 R; of t8t0c Seamdrat (of slaves), Tit.
ii. 9. of a person who may be said to belong to one,
above all others: vids, Ro. viii. 32; marnp, Jn. v. 18; pa-
Onrai, Mk. iv. 34 T WH Tr mrg. c. harmonizing with,
or suitable or assigned to, one’s nature, character, aims,
acts; appropriate: rm idia e€ovoia, Acts i. 7; Tov tdtov
pio Odv, due reward, 1 Co. iii. 8; rd iStov o@pa, 1 Co. xv.
38; Kata thy idiay Svvapw, Mt. xxv. 15; ev ro dio
tdypatt, 1 Co. xv. 23; 7d idtov oixnrnptov, Jude 6; eis rdv
térov Tov touov, to the abode after death assigned by God
to one ace. to his deeds, Acts i. 25 (Ignat. ad Magnes. 5;
Baal Turim on Num. xxiv. 25 Balaam ivit in locum suum,
i.e. in Gehennam; see rézos, 1 a. fin.) ; capo idio, at a
time suitable to the matter in hand [A. V. in due season],
Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit. i. 3. d. By
a usage foreign to the earlier Greeks, but found in the
church Fathers and the Byzant. writ. (see W. § 22, 7;
ef. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 208 sq.; [B. 117 sq. (103)]),
it takes the place of the poss. pron. avrov: Mt. xxii. 5;
xxv. 14; Jn. i. 41 (42), (Sap. x. 1). 2. private (in
class. Grk. opp. to Snudotos, xowds): idia [ef. W. 591
(549) note] adv. severally, separately, 1 Co. xii. 11 (often
in Grk. writ.). ar’ iSiay (sc. yopav), a. apart: Mt.
ive 13% xvi. 1900 xx. 175 cxxiv. 33) Mk. vi. 31sq. 5 vii.
Sain 2eoSis xis ds Wk. 1m 10's. x: 235 | Acts xaxti.19,
(Polyb. 4, 84,8); with pdvos added, Mk. ix.2; 8B. in
private, privately: Mk. iv. 34; Gal. ii. 2, (Diod. 1, 21,
opp. to cow, 2 Mace. iv. 5; Ignat. ad Smyrn. 7, 2).
The word is not found in Rev.
iStarys, -ov, 6, (tdios), very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down; prop. a private person, opp. to a magistrate, ruler,
king; but the noun has many other meanings also, each
one of which is understood from its antithesis, as e. ¢.
@ common soldier, as opp. to a military officer; a@ writer
of prose, as opp. to a poet. In the N. T. an unlearned,
illiterate, man, opp. to the learned, the educated: Acts
iv. 13; as often in class. Grk., unskilled in any art: in
297
"Téoupaia
eloquence (Isocr. p. 43 a.), with dat. of respect, rd Adyo,
2 Co. xi. 6 [A. V. rude in speech]; a Christian who is
not a prophet, 1 Co. xiv. 24; destitute of the ‘gift of
tongues,’ ibid. 16, 23. [Cf. Trench § lxxix.]*
i$0%, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph.
down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew
and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Hebr.
man, and giving a peculiar vivacity to the style by bid-
ding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said: be-
hold! see! lo! It is inserted in the discourse after a
gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1,13; ix. 18; xii. 46; xvii. 5;
xxvi.47; xxviii.11. «ai idov is used, when at the close
of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9;
iii. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29,32, 34; ix. 2sq. 20; xii. 10;
Oy PS Spl Be, cab, IH soon lhs.S-4 Alb oils, >.o.qA0ib, 2
7; Lk. i. 20, 31,36; ii.9[RGL Tr br.], 25; ix. 30, 38 sq.;
x. 25; xiv. 2; xxiv.13; Acts xii.7; xvi.1; when a thing
is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9
(ai iSod CGpev, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4;
when a thing is specified which seems impossible and
yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41; Acts xxvii. 24. The simple idov
is the exclamation of one pointing out something,
Mt. xii. 2, 47[ WH here in mrg. only]; xiii. 3; xxiv. 26 ;
Mk. iii. 32; Lk. ii.34; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35
[T Tr WH te]; Lk. xxii. 10; Jn. iv. 35; 1 Co. xv. 51;
2\'Conve Lisdasiv9s ‘Jude sl4e Revi odjlixed 2s
xi. 14; xvi. 15; xxii. 7 [Rec.]; in other places it is i. q.
observe or consider: Mt. x. 16; xi. 8; xix. 27; xx. 18;
xxii. 4; Mk. x. 28, 33; xiv.41; Lk. ii. 48; vii. 25; xviii.
28, 31, etc.; also cat iSov, Mt. xxviii. 20; Lk. xiii. 30;
idod yap, Lk. i. 44, 48; ii. 10; vi. 23; xvil. 21; Acts ix.
11; 2 Co. vii. 11; i800 where examples are adduced:
Jas. iii. 4sq.; v. 4, 7,11; for the Hebr. 1337, so that it
includes the copula: Lk. i. 38; i. q. here I am: Acts
ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. i8o0v is inserted in the midst of a
speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. "Idovd (see the
Comm.)]; Lk. xiii.16; Acts ii. 7; xiii.11; xx. 22, 25.
The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which
are quoted in the New are these: Mt. i. 23; xi. 10; xii.
18; xxi.5; Mk.i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; Jn. xii.15; Ro. ix. 33;
Heb. ii. 13; viii. 8; x. 7,9; 1 Pet.ii.6. Like the Hebr.
Mn, Sov and cat iSov stand before a nominative which
is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in-
clude the copula or predicate [cf. B. 139 (121 sq.)]: e. g.
was heard, Mt. iii. 17; is, is or was here, exists, etc., Mt.
xii. 10 LT Tr WH, 41; Mk. xiii. 21 RGL; Lk. v.12,
18; vii. 37; xi.31; xiii. 11 (RG add qv); xvii. 21; xix.
2, 20; xxii. 38, 47; xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec., 27 RG];
Acts viii. 27, 36; 2 Co. vi. 2; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8; vii. 9 [not
L]; xii. 3; xiv. 14; xix. 11; xxi. 3; ts approaching, Mt.
xxv. 6 GLT Tr WH (Ree. adds ¢pyeraz); but also in
such a way as to have simply a demonstrative force:
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.
"TSovpata, -as, 7, Jdumea, the name of a region be-
tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petra, inhabited
by Esau or Edom (Gen. xxxvi. 30) and his posterity
(the Edomites), (Josh. xv. 1, 21; xi. 17; xii. 7). The
Edomites were first subjugated by David; but after
(Spws
his death they disputed Solomon’s authority and in the
reign of Joram recovered their liberty, which they main-
tained, transmitting from generation to generation their
hatred of Israel, until they were conquered again by
Hyrcanus and subjected to the government of the Jews :
Mk. iii. 8. [For details of boundary and history, see
Bertheau in Schenkel and Porter in B. D.s. v. Edom;
also the latter in Kitto’s Cycl. s. v. Idumea. ] *
iSpas, -@Tos, 6, [allied w. Lat. sudor, Eng. sweat ; Cur-
tius § 283; fr. Hom. down], sweat: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br.
WH reject the pass.; (Tr accents idpas, yet cf. Chandler
§ 667)].*
‘TelGed ({soG TWH, L ‘te¢.; Tr -Be& ]; Rec. "Iefa-
Bnd), 7) (Oars [‘perh. intact, chaste; cf. Agnes’ (Ge-
senius) ]), Jezebel [mod. Isabel], wife of Ahab ((c.] B. c.
917-897; 1 K. xvi. 29), an impious and cruel queen,
who protected idolatry and persecuted the prophets (1
K. xvi. 31-2 K. ix. 30); in Rev. ii. 20 i. q. a second Jez-
ebel, the symbolic name of a woman who pretended to
be a prophetess, and who, addicted to antinomianism,
claimed for Christians the liberty of eating things sacri-
ficed to idols, Rev. i. 20.*
‘Tepdrodts [ WH ‘Iepa ods ; cf. B. 74; Lob. ad Phryn.
604 sq.], -ews, 7, Hierapolis, a city of Greater Phrygia,
near the river Maeander[or rather, near the Lycus a few
miles above its junction with the Maeander], not far
from Colossee and Laodicea, now Pambuck Kulasi, [for
reff. see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p.1sq.; B.D. Am. ed. s. v.]:
Col. iv. 13.*
iepareta [WII -ria; cf.1,c],-as, 7, (fepatevw), the priest-
hood, the office of priest: Lk. i. 9; Heb. vii. 5. (Sept. for
7373; Aristot. pol. 7,8; Dion. Hal.; Boeckh, Inserr. ii.
pp: 127, 23; (368, 27.)*
iepdrevpa, -ros, 76, (iepare’w), [priesthood i. e.] ae
the office of priest. b. the order or body of priests (see
adedpdrns, aiyxpadwoia, d:acropd, Oeparreia) ; so Christians
are called, because they have access to God and offer
not external but ‘spiritual’ (avevparixd) sacrifices: 1
Pet. ii. 5; also tepdt. Bacidevov, ib. 9 (after Ex. xix. 6
Sept.), priests of kingly rank, i. e. exalted to a moral
rank and freedom which exempts them from the control
of every one but God and Christ. (Ix. xxiii. 22, ete.;
2 Mace. ii. 17]; not found in prof. auth.) *
iepatrevw; (fr. tepdouac and the verbal adj. ieparéds,
though this adj. does not occur); to be priest, discharge
the priest’s office, be busied in sacred duties: Lk. 1. 8
(Joseph. antt. 3, 8,1; Hdian. 5, 6, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; Pau-
san., Heliod., Inserr. [see L. and S.]; Sept. for }73.)*
‘Teperxd, see ‘Tepixya.
‘Tepeplas [WH “lep. (see their Intr. § 408); so Rec.*
in Mt. xxvii. 9], -ov [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (WT or wy;
iq. 7) ANY ‘Jehovah casts forth’ (his ‘enemies ?), or
‘Jehovah hurls’ (his thunderbolts?); ef. Bleek, Einl. in
das A. T. § 206 p. 469, [ef. B. D. s. v. Jeremiah]), Jere-
miah [A. V. also Jeremias, Jeremy], a famous Hebrew
prophet, who prophesied from [c] B. c. 627 until the de-
struction of Jerusalem [B.c. 586]. He afterwards de-
parted into Egypt,where he appears to have died; (cf.
298
e ’
lepov
B. D.s. v. Jeremiah, I. 6]: Mt. ii.17; xvi. 14; xxvii. 9 (in
the last pass. his name is given by mistake, for the words
quoted are found in Zech. xi. 12 sq.; [ef. Prof. Brown in
Journ. of Soc. for Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. for Dec. 1882, p.
101 sqq.; Toy, Quot. in N. T. p. 68 sqq.; for a history
of attempted explanations, see Dr. Jas. Morison, Com.
on Mt. 1. c:]).*
tepevs, -€ws, 6, (iepds), [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 173, a
priest; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied
with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the priests of the
Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13 ; in the priests of the Jews, Mt.
Vill. 4:5) xii. 8q55) Mik. 45445 90[a 26i/5 ks bis vida
Jn. i. 19; Heb. vii. [14 L Dt WHI, 20:(21) vis
ete.; of the high-priest, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxv. 18;
1 K.i. 83/1 Macc. xv. 1,3) Joseph. ‘antt. 6,12,)1) 5 and
in the same sense Christ is called fepeds in Heb. v. 6 (fr.
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also iepeds péyas, Heb.
x. 21 (see dpxuepevs, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as
blending with iep. into a technical or official appellation,
but as descriptive, great; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of
Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and
brought into close intercourse with God, they devote
their life to him alone (and to Christ): Rev. i. 6; v.10;
Oa) (Gig Ik, DR Wo Gy.
‘Teptx (Tdf. ‘Iepecym [see his Proleg. p. 85; WH.
App. p. 155, ands. v. e+; WH ’Iep. see their Intr.
§408; on its accent in codd. cf. Td. Proleg. p. 103]),
7, indecl. (on its declens. in other writ. ef. W. § 10, 2; in
Strabo ‘Iepuxovs -ovvros ; ‘Ieptxods, -odvtos in Joseph., cf.
W.1.¢.; Hebr. inv, fr. m°> to smell, so called from its
fertility in aromatics), Jericho, a noted city, abounding
in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum; cf. Tristram,
Nat. Hist. ete. p. 337; B.D. s. v. Balm], honey, cyprus
[prob. Arab. “el-henna”; ef. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam-
phire], myrobalanus [ Arab. “zukkum”’], roses, and other
fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the
northern shore of the Dead Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin,
between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150
stadia from the former and 60 from the latter. Joseph.
b. j. 4, 8, 3 calls its territory Aetov xwpiov. It is mentioned
in the N. T. in Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46; Lk. x. 30; xviii.
35; xix. 1; Heb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence
to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that teA@vau were
stationed there, with an dpy:red@vns, for the purpose of
collecting the revenues. Fora fuller account of the city
see Win. RWB. s. v.; Arnold in Herzog vi. p. 494 sq.};
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 209 sq.; Keim iii. 17 sq. [Eng.
trans. v. 21 sq.; BB.DD.s. v.; cf. also Robinson, Re-
searches ete. i. 547 sqq.].*
iepdOurtos, -ov, (fr. iepds and Ava, cf. eiSwAoburos), sac-
rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods; as in Plut. symp.
8, 8, 3 init., used of the flesh of animals offered in sac-
rifice: 1 Co. x. 28 Ltxt.T Tr WH. On the use of the
word in Grk. writ. ef. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 159.*
iepdv, -o0, ro, (neut. of the adj. iepds, -a, -dv; cf. ré
dyov), [fr. Hdt. on], a sacred place, temple: of the tem-
ple of Artemis at Ephesus, Acts xix. 27; of the temple
at Jerusalem twice in the Sept., Ezek. xlv. 19; 1 Chr.
iepomrpeT™s
xxix. 4; more freq. in the O. T. Apocr.; in the N. T.
often in the Gospels and Acts; once elsewhere, viz. 1 Co.
ix.13. 1d iepdv and 6 vaos differ, in that the former
designates the whole compass of the sacred enclosure,
embracing the entire aggregate of buildings, balconies,
porticos, courts (viz. that of the men or Israelites,
that of the women, that of the priests), belonging to
the temple; the latter designates the sacred edifice prop-
erly so called, consisting of two parts, the ‘sanctuary’
or‘Holy place’ (which no one except the priests was
allowed to enter), and the‘ Holy of holies’ or ‘most
holy place’ (see dys, 1 a.) (which was entered only
on the great day of atonement by the high-priest alone) ;
[ef. Trench, Syn. § iii]. iepdv is employed in the N.
T. either explicitly of the whole temple, Mt. xii. 6;
mev th ee Mkoxin die Uk) xxi. 53) xxl. 52; Actsave 15
xxiv.6; xxv.8; 1 Co. ix. 13, ete.; or so that certain
definite parts of it must be thought of, as the courts,
esp. where Jesus or the apostles are said to have gone up,
or entered, ‘into the temple,’ to have taught or encoun-
tered adversaries, and the like, ‘in the temple,’ Mt. xxi.
ea sexviroos) Mkaxiv. 49; Lk. xix. 47g) cx. /37;
xxii. 53; xxiv. 53; Jn.v. 14; vii. 14,28; vill. 20; xviii.
20; Acts ili. 2; v.20; xxi. 26, etc.; of the courts and
sanctuary, Mt. xii.5; of the court of the Gentiles,
out of which Jesus drove the buyers and sellers and
money-changers, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45;
Jn. ii. 14 sq.; of the court of the women, LK. ii. 37;
of any portico or apartment, Lk. ii. 46, cf. Jn. x. 23.
On the phrase 16 arepvytov Tov iepod see mrepvyiov, 2.
iepomperts, -és, (fr. iepds, and mpemec it is becoming),
befitting men, places, actions or things sacred to God; rev-
erent: Tit. ii.3. (4 Macc. ix. 25; xi.19; Plat., Philo,
Joseph., Leian.,al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii. sub fin.]*
iepds, -d, -dv, [its primary sense is thought to be mighty;
cf. Curtius § 614; Vanitek p. 88 ; yet see Schmidt u. i. ; fr.
Hom. down], sacred, consecrated to the deity, pertaining to
God : iepa ypdppara, sacred Scriptures, because inspired
by God, treating of divine things and therefore to be de-
voutly revered, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Joseph. antt. prooem. 3;
[10, 10, 4 fin.]; b.j. 6,5,4; c. Ap.1,[10,3; 18,6]; 26,
1; iepat BiBdou, antt. 2, 16, 5; [c. Ap. 1,1; 23, 4], etc.;
ovk évetpadns ovde evnaKnOns Tots iepots ypdppact, Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 29, ed. Mang. il. p. 574); [xnpvypa, Mk.
xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’; neut. plur.
as subst. ra fepa, the holy things, those which pertain to
the worship of God in the temple, 1 Co. ix. 13, ef. épyato-
pat, 2a. [See reff. s. v. dysos, fin.; esp. Schmidt ch. 181.] *
‘TepoodAupa [ WH ’lep., see their Intr. § 408], -ov, ra,
(the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere
in Mt. and Joseph. [c. Ap. 1, 22, 13, ete.; Philo, leg. ad
Gaium § 36; (cf. Polyb. 16, 39, 4); al.]), and ‘lepovoadnp
[WH lep. (see ref. u. s.)], 7, indecl., (the invariable form
in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, ete.; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ;
so Aristot. in Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miller) };
in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to speak,
resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp.
Lehtft. ad loc.]; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10;
299
lepoovrA€w
thus in direct address: Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; both
forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked pref-
erence for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apoer.,
and in the writ. of Luke and of Paul; [cf. Tdf. Proleg.
p- 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a
third and unusual form ‘IepoodAuya, -ns, 9, in Mt. ii. 3;
ili. 5, is extremely doubtful; for in the phrase ééero-
pevero... IepoodAupa, iii. 5, the noun can be taken as
a neut. plur. with a sing. verb, cf. W. § 58, 3a.; and in
the former passage, ii. 3, the unusual coupling of the
fem. waoa with the neut. plur. ‘IepoodAupa is easily ex-
plained by the supposition that the appellative idea, 9
moAus, Was in the writer’s mind; see Fritzsche and Bleek
ad loc.; cf. B. 18 (16); [yet see Pape, Eigennamen, s.
v.]. Hebr. o2¥37 and ow, Chald. pow, Syr.
~ =>
SoSva50}. Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com-
posed of w7" possession, and pow, so that it signifies tran-
quil possession, habitation of peace; but the matter is very
uncertain and conjectures vary; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii.
p- 628 sq.; [B. D.s. v.]; on the earlier name of the city
see below in Sadnp; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [ Vulg.
e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. xxiii. 37; but esp.] in
the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma,
-ae, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1,
3]),—Jerusalem [A.V. Hierusalem and Ierusalem],
the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of
the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin
and Judah, in a region so elevated that dvaBaivew,
my, to go up, fitly describes the approach to it from any
quarter. The name is used in the N. T. 1. to de-
note, either the city itself, Mt. ii.1; Mk. iii. 8; Jn. i. 19,
etc.; or its inhabitants, Mt. ii.3; iii. 5; xxiii.37; Lk.
xiii. 34. 2. 7) viv ‘Tepove. [the Jerusalem that now
is], with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic
system, so designated from its primary external location,
Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted 7) ave ‘Iep. (after the
rabbin. phrase Moyn Ow Dow, Jerusalem that is above,
i.e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which
the earthly Jerusalem WUD Sw D‘4w Was supposed to
be built [ef. Schéttgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), 1. e.
metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing
the form of the church, but after Christ’s return to put on
the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom, Gal. iv. 26;
‘Tepovo. éroupanos, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heavy-
enly abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as
well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens
of which true Christians are to be regarded while still liv-
ing on earth, Heb. xii. 22; 7) kaw ‘Tep. in the visions of
John ‘the Revelator,’ the new Jerusalem, a splendid visi-
ble city to be let down from heaven after the renovation
of the world, the future abode of the blessed: Rey. ili.
UD exexrenos 0:
‘IepocoAvpirns [Tdf. -ueirns, see et, 0; WH "Iepocodv-
peirns, see their Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, a citizen or inhabitant
of Jerusalem: Mk.i.5; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph. antt. 5, 1,
17, ete: *
tepo-cvAew, -@; (iepdavdos, q. V.); to commit sacrilege,
éepoouAos
co rob a temple: Ro. ii. 22, where the meaning is, ‘thou
who abhorrest idols and their contamination, dost yet
not hesitate to plunder their shrines’; cf. Fritzsche [and
Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) *
tepdo-vdos, -ov, (fr. iepov and cvAdw), guilty of sacrilege:
Acts xix. 37 [A. V. robbers of temples; cf. Bp. Lghtft. in
The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.]. (2 Mace. iv.
42; Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
tepoupyéw, -&; (fr. iepouvpyos, and this fr. iepds and
EPTQ); to be busied with sacred things; to perform sacred
rites, (Philo, Hdian.); used esp. of persons sacrificing
(Joseph. antt. 7, 13,4, ete.); trans. to minister in the man-
ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: tov vopov, of
those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing
a violent death, 4 Mace. vii. 8; 76 evayyeAtov, of the
preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. 16 (where Fritzsche
treats of the word fully; [ef. W. 222 sq. (209) ]).*
‘Tepoveadnp, see ‘Teporodupa.
iepwotvy [on the w see dyabwovrn, init. ], -ns, 1) (iepos),
priesthood, the priestly office: Heb. vii. 11 sq. 14 RG, 24.
(Sir. xlv. 24; 1 Esdr. v. 38; 1 Mace. ii. 54; iii. 49; 4
Mace. v. 34; Hdt., Plat., Dem., Diod., Joseph., Plut.,
Hdian., al.) *
Terral (Iecoaios in Joseph.), 6, (vw [cf. B. D. Am.
ed. s. v.]), Jesse, the father of David the king (1 S. xvi.
1, 10; xvii. 12 Alex.; xx. 27): Mt.i.5sq.; Lk. iii. 32;
Acts xiii. 22; Ro. xv. 12.*
"TepOde (IepOis,-ov, in Joseph.), 6, ( MAD" [fut. 3 sing.
masc.], fr. MND to open), Jephthah, the son of Gilead
[ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gilead, 4], and a judge of Israel
(Judg. xi. sq.): Heb. xi. 32.*
"Texovias, -ov, 6, (}2°7 Jehoiakin, i.e. whom Jehovah
appointed; Sept. Iwayiv [(?) see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Jehoiachin ]), Jechoniah, king of Judah, carried off into
exile by Nebuchadnezzar [c.] B. c. 600 after a reign of
three months, 2 K. xxiv. 8-17; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 9 sq.; Jer.
lii. 31. He is mentioned Mt. i. 11 sq. But he was not,
as is there stated, the son of Josiah, but of Jehoiakim;
nor had he ‘brethren,’ but his father had. Accordingly
in the Evangelist’s genealogy the names d°p\im and
;21m have been confounded; [cf. B. D. u. s., and reff.
there ].*
*Incots, -ov, dat. -ov, acc. -vtv, voc. -ov, [W. § 10, 1],
6, Jesus (wim: and acc. to a later form piwz, Syr.
> mn
Name, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf;
but later writ. gave the name the force of Ayiw, see
Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 "Inaots és éyévero kata Td
dvopa avrovd peyas emt owtnpia éexdext@v avrod, of
Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21
"Incovs épunveverac owtn pia Kupiov), a very com. prop.
name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname,
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or
Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully
Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’
successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son
of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr
WH.
300
3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of |
€ '
txkavo@
mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; Lk. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often;
see kupios and Xpiorés. 4. Jesus Barabbas; see
BapafBas. 5. Jesus, surnamed Justus, a Jewish
-| Christian, an associate with Paul in preaching the gos-
pel: Col. iv. 11.
ixavés, -7, -ov, (fr. ikw, ikdvw ; prop. ‘reaching to’, ‘at-
taining to’; hence ‘adequate’); as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
and Thue. down, sufficient; a. of number and
quantity; with nouns, many enough, or enough with a
gen. : dxAos ixavos, a great multitude [A. V. often much
people], Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix.
26; Aads, Acts v. 37 RG; xAavdpos, Acts xx. 37; dpyv-
pia ixavd, [A. V. large money, cf. the collog. ‘money
enough ’], Mt. xxviii. 12; Aapumades, Acts xx. 8; doyor,
Lk. xxiii. 9; @@s ixavdv, a considerable light [A. V. a
great light], Acts xxii. 6. of time: ixaro xpdve [cf.
W. § 31, 9; B. § 133, 26] for a long time, [Lk. viii. 27
T Trtxt. WH]; Acts viii. 11; also ixavév ypdvov, Acts
xiv. 3; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; é& ixavovd, of a long time,
now for a long time, Lk. xxiii. 8 RG; also ék ypdvev
ixavov, Lk. viii. 27 RG L Trmrg.; xxiii. 8 LT Tr WH;
[ad ixavav erav, these many years, Ro. xv. 23 WH Tr
txt.]; ixavod ypdv. diayey. much time having elapsed,
Acts xxvii. 9; ed’ ixavov, for a long while, Acts xx. 11
(2 Mace. viii. 25; Diod. 13, 100; Palaeph. 28); jpepac
[cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 89 n.], Acts ix. 23,43; xviii.
18; xxvii. 7. absol. ikavoi, many, a considerable num-
ber: Lk. vii. 11 [RG Lbr. T Trmrg. br.]; Acts xii. 12;
xiv, 21; xix. 19; 1 Co. xi. 30) Macc. xii?49, ete,):
ixavdv éaotwy, it is enough, i. q. enough has been said on
this subject, Lk. xxii. 38 (for Jesus, saddened at the
paltry ideas of the disciples, breaks off in this way the
conversation; the Jews, when a companion uttered any
thing absurd, were wont to use the phrase 039 37 [A. V.
let it suffice thee, etc.], as in Deut. iii. 26, where Sept. ixa-
vovoOw) ; ixavov T@ TowoiTw 7 émeTipia avTn, sc. eori, suffi-
cient ... is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6; after the Lat.
idiom satisfacere alicui, rd ix. movetv Tin, to take away
from one every ground of complaint [A. V. to content],
Mk. xv. 15 (Polyb. 32, 7,13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. Toll.
[§ 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.]; Diog. Laért. 4, 50); 16
ix. AapBavw (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either
by accepting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until
the case had been decided), Acts xvii. 9. b. sufli-
cient in ability, i. e. meet, fit, (Germ. tiichtig [A. V.
worthy, able, etc.]): mpos tt, for something, 2 Co. ii. 16;
foll. by an inf. [B. 260 (223 sq.)], Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7;
LK. iii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 9; 2 Co. iii. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 2; foll.
by tva with subjune. [B. 240 (207); ef. W. 335 (314)]:
Mt. viii. 8; Lk, vii. 6.*
ixavérns, -nTos, 4, Sufficiency, ability or competency to
do a thing: 2 Co. iii. 5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll.;
[al.].) *
ixavow, -@: 1 aor. ixdvwoa; (ixavds); to make suffi-
cient, render fit; with two acc., one of the obj. the other
of the predicate: to equip one with adequate power to
perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. 6; rua ets re, Col. i
12. [Sept.; Dion. Hal. al.]*
ixeT7pLos
ikerfiptos, -a, -ov, (ikérns a suppliant), pertaining to a
suppliant, fit for a suppliant; 7 ixernpia, as subst., sc.
éXaia or pados ; 1. an olive-branch; for suppliants
approached the one whose aid they would implore hold-
ing an olive-branch entwined with white wool and fillets,
to signify that they came as suppliants [ef. Trench § li.
sub fin.]: AauBavew ixernpiav, Hdt. 5, 51; ikernpiav riOe-
vat Or mpoBaddecOa tapi tin, etc. 2. i. q. ikecia,
supplication (Isocr. p. 186 d. var.; Polyb.; 2 Mace. ix.
18): plur. joined with denaes (Polyb. 3, 112, 8; sing. Job
xl. 22'Sept.),' Heb: v. 7.*
ixuds, -ddos, 7, moisture: Lk. viii. 6. (Sept. Jer. xvii.
8; Hom. Il. 17, 392; Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 3, and often in
other auth.) *
"Ikéviov, -ov, 7d, Iconium, a celebrated city of Asia
Minor, which in the time of Xen. (an. 1, 2, 19) was ‘the
last city of Phrygia,’ afterwards the capital of Lycaonia
(Strab. 12 p. 568; Cic. ad divers. 15,4); now Konia
for Konieh|: Acts xiii. 51; xiv.1, 19, 21; xvi. 2; 2 Tim:
iii. 11. Cf. Overbeck in Schenkel iii. 303 sq.; [B. D.
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 144 sqq. ].*
tAapés, -d, -dv, (iAaos propitious), cheerful, joyous,
prompt to do anything: 2 Co. ix. 7; Prov. xix. 12; xxii.
8; Sir. xii. 26 (25); xxvi. 4; 3 Macc. vi. 35; Arstph.,
Xen., al.*
tAapérns, -nTos, 7, cheerfulness, readiness of mind: Ro.
xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noé
§ 40), Plut., al.]; Acta Thom. § 14.) *
iAdokopat; (see below); in class. Grk. the mid. of an
act. ikdoxw (to render propitious, appease) never met
with ; 1. to render propitious to one’s self, to ap-
pease, conciliate to one’s self (fr. thaos gracious, gentle) ;
fr. Hom. down; mostly w. ace. of a pers., as Oedv, ’A6n-
nv, etc. (rov Gedy iAdoacOa, Joseph. antt. 6, 6,5); very
rarely w. acc. of the thing, as rv dpynv, Plut. Cat. min.
61 (with which cf. efAdoxeoOar Ovudv, Prov. xvi. 14
Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to become propitious,
be placated or appeased; in 1 aor. impv. thdoOnrt, be pro-
pitious, be gracious, be merciful, (in prof. auth. iAn6c and
Dor. tta&t, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an
unused verb iAnu, to be propitious; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sp.
ii, p. 206; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 839; Passow for L. and
S., or Veitch] s. v. (Anue), with dat. of the thing or the
pers.: Lk. xviii. 13 (rais dwaprias, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.)
9; [Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 38]; 1H dwapria, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.)
11; ihdoOn 6 Kipwos wept THs Kaxias, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex.;
iAacOnoerar Kvp. T@ dovA@ gov, 2 K. v. 18). 2. by
an Alexandrian usage, to erpiate, make propitiation for,
(as e€tAdoxeoOa in the O. T.): ras duaprias, Heb. ii. 17
(jpa@v tas Wuxds, Philo, alleg. leg. 3,61). [CE Kurtz,
Com. on Heb.1.c.; W.227 (213); Westcott, Epp. of S. Jn.
p- 83 sq.]*
iAacpds, -ov, 6, (ikdoKopat) ; 1. an appeasing,
propitiating, Vulg. propitiatio, (Plut. de sera num. vind.
ce. 17; plur. joined with xa@appoi, Plut. Sol. 12; with
gen. of the obj. tav beav, Orph. Are. 39; Plut. Fab. 18;
Ge@v unr ihacpov Kai xaptornpiov Seopévny, vit. Camill.
7 fin. ; movetoOar itaopor, of a priest offering an expia-
301
"Drvpixov
tory sacrifice, 2 Mace. iii. 33). 2. in Alex. usage the
means of appeasing, a propitiation: Philo, alleg. leg. iii.
§ 61; mpocoicovow idacpor, tor NROM, Ezek. xliv. 27;
mept tov duapriov, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10, (kpids
tov iAkacpod, Num. v. 8; [cf. jyépa r. Dacpod, Lev. xxv.
9]; also for mmo, forgiveness, Ps. cxxix. (cxxx.) 4;
Dan. ix. 9 Theodot.). [Cf. Trench § lxxvii.]*
tAagriptos, -a, -ov, (iAdoKopa, q. v.), relating to ap-
peasing or expiating, having placating or expiating force,
expiatory: pynwa ikaornp.oy, a monument built to propi-
tiate God, Joseph. antt. 16, 7, 1; itaarnpwos Odvaros,
4 Mace. xvii. 22; yetpas ixernpious, ef Bovder b€ ihacrn-
plovs, exreivas Oe@, Niceph. in act. SS. ed. Mai, vol. v.
p- 835,17. Neut. 1rd ihaarnpuov, as subst., a means af
appeasing or expiating, a propiliation, (Germ. Verséh-
nungs- oder Stihnmittel); ef. W. 96 (91); [592 (551)].
So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of
the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled
with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual
day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of
the people, the loss of which they had merited by their
sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the
victim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased
and their sins were expiated); hence the lid of expia-
tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propitiatorium; Luth. Gna-
denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seat]: Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv.
18 sqq.; Lev. xvi. 2, etc.; more fully iNaornptov érideva.
Ex, xxve 17; xxxvilien(xxxvii.))7 (6); forthe) Hebr:
n15b3, fr. 15D to cover, sc. sins, i.e. to pardon). ‘Theod-
oret, Theophyl., Oecum., Luther, Grotius, Tholuck,
Wilke, Philippi, Umbreit, [Cremer (4te Aufl.)] and others
give this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz.
that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly
that which the cover or ‘mercy-seat’ had been ty pi-
cally, i. e. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in
opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, Van
Hengel, [Godet, Oltramare] and others ad loc. 2.
an expiatory sacrifice; a piacular victim (Vulg. propitia-
tio): Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words yapi-
ornpta sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-offerings,
cwtnpia sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other
hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 355 ed. Reiske, the
reference is not to a sacrifice but toa monument,
as the preceding words show: xaradelyew yap aitovs
dvdOnpa Kdd\Xorov Kat peyotov TH 'AOnva Kai emvypa-
ew, aorhpiov Axauoi TH Tedde). [See the full discus-
sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. Exposition of
the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]*
‘ews, -ov, (Attic for Taos [ef. W. 22), fr. Hom.
down), propitious, merciful: éropar tA. Tats adckiats, i. e
I will pardon, Heb. viii. 12; Jer. xxxviil. (xxxi.) 34;
xliii. (xxxvi.) 3; also rats duaprias, 1 K. vill. 34; 2 Chr.
vi. 25, 27, etc.; Tews cor, sc. €or@ [or ein, B. § 129, 22]
6 beds, i. e. God avert this from thee, Mt. xvi. 22; Sept.
for nyon foll. by Gi be it far from one, 2 8. xx. 20;
xxi
Trrvprxdv, -ov, 76, I/lyricum, a region lying between
Italy, Germany, Macedonia and Thrace. having on oné
twas
side the Adriatic Sea, and on the other the Danube: Ro.
xv. 19°[ci.9B: D; Am.‘ed3]*
ipds, -dvros, 6, (fr. ine to send; sc. a vessel, which was
tied to thongs of leather and let down into a well for the
purpose of drawing water; hence ind also, to draw
something made fast to a thong or rope [recent etymol.
connect it w. Skt. s¢ to bind; ef. Curtius § 602; Vanicéek
p- 1041]); fr. Hom. down; a thong of leather, a strap;
in the N. T. of the thongs with which captives or crimi-
nals were either bound or beaten (see mporeivw), Acts
xxii. 25 (4 Mace. ix. 11; Sir. xxx. 35); of the thongs
or ties by which sandals were fastened to the feet, Mk.
i. 7; Lk. i. 16; Jn. i. 27, (so also in Is. v.27; Xen.
anab. 4, 5,14; Plut. symp. 4, 2, 3; Suid. iuas- opatpw-
tp cavdaXiov, Cavixtov, oiov TO AwpLoyv TOU UmLdnpuTOS ).*
ipariftw: pf. pass. ptep. ivatiopevos; (iparioy); to
clothe: Mk. v. 15; Lk. viii. 35. (Found neither in Sept.
nor in prof. auth. [cf. W. 26 (25) ].) *
ipariov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of tua i. q. efua, an article of
clothing, garment; and this fr. éyyvpe to clothe, cf. Germ.
Hemd); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for 733, also
for 770¥, mv, ete.; 1. a garment (of any sort):
Mt. ix. 16; xi. 8 [RGLbr.,, al. om.; ef. W. 591 (550);
B. 82 (72)]; Mk. ii. 21; xv. 20; Lk. v.36; vii. 25; Heb.
i. 11; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the
tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv.
18 [Rec.]; xxvii. 31,35; Jn. xix. 23; Acts vii. 58; Jas.
v. 2, etc.; to rend ra ip. (see Seappyyvupe), Mt. xxvi. 65;
Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the
cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, 6
xttav) [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 22]: Mt. ix. 20;
[xxiv. 18 L T Tr WH]; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii.44; Jn. xix.
2; Rev. xix. 16; it is distinguished from the yirov in
Mt. v.40; Lk. vi. 29; [cf. Jn. xix. 23]; Actsix.39. [Cf.
Trench §1.; BB. DD.s. v. Dress; Edersheim, Jewish So-
cial Life, ch. xiii.; esp. ‘Jesus the Messiah,’ i. 620 sqy: |
ipatirpds, -ov, 6, (iuaritw), clothing, apparel: univ.,
LK. vii. 25; Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 9; of the tunic, Mt.
xxvii. 35 Rec.; Jn. xix. 24; of the cloak or mantle, Lk.
ix. 29. (Sept.; -Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Athen.)
[Cf. Trench § 1.]*
ipelpw : mid. iwecpouar; (iuepos desire, longing, [allied w.
idews ; Vanicek p. 88]; cf. oixreipw) ; to desire, long for,
esp. of the longing of love: dua@v [W. § 30, 10 b.] i. e. your
souls, to win them to Christ, 1 Th. ii. 8 Ree. ; see épefpo-
pa. (Sept. Job iii. 21; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
iva, I. an adv. of Place, fr. Hom. down, esp. in
the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what
place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A.
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum
Opusce. p. 186 sqq.) thought he had found two examples
in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him.
The first viz. iva yx pvowdce, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain
thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have
learned from my example to think humbly of yourselves)
the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the
second, iva airods (yAodre, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye
zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below.
302
vA
La
I. a final Conjunction (for from local direc-
tion, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy to
mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and
end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; tva
py, that not, lest; it is used
1. prop. of the purpose or end; a. foll. by the
Optative; only twice, and then preceded by the pres.
of a verb of praying or beseeching, where the wish
(optatio) expressed by the prayer gave occasion for the
use of the optat.: Eph. i. 17 but WH mrg. subj.; iii. 16
RG; cf. W. 290 (273); B. 233 (201); and yet in both
instances the telic force of the particle is so weakened
that it denotes the substance rather than the end of
the prayer; see 2 below. b. foll. by the Subjunce-
tive, not only (according to the rule observed by the
best Grk. writ.) after the primary tenses (pres., pf., fut.)
or the imperative, but (in accordance with that well-
known negligence with which in later times and esp. by
Hellenistic writers the distinction between the subjunc.
and the optat. was disregarded) after preterites even
where the more elegant Grk. writ. were wont to use the
optat.; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 847 sqq.; Klotz ad Dev.
ii. 2 p. 616 sqq.; W. 287 (270) sqq.; B. 233 (201). a.
after a Present: Mk. iv. 21; vii. 9; Lk. vi. 34; viii. 12;
Xvi. 28; Jn. iii. 15; v. 34; vi.30; Acts ii. 25; xvi. 30; Ro.
4 1 5 005195, x1. 2501 Co.vi.29 se 1 2 Co, et ae
vi. 13 3; ‘Phil. dil. 85; Heb. v.13, viv i2® ax. 25: dna
Rey. iii. 18; xi. 6, and often. B. after a Perfect:
Mt... 22; xxi. 49. Im. v.i235 [S620 ro Wel ot eal een
88>. xii.40, 465 xiv..29%s xwi.1, 4° xil,.4 = axe er
ix. 22; 1Jn.v.20 [here T Tr WH pres. indic.; see d.].
y. after an Imperative (either pres. or aor.) : Mt. vii.
Ls ix. 6 xiv. 153 xvii. 27 ; xxi, 265 Mike x0, 25 xr
Jn.iv..155 v.45 vai.8 DRAG Lis” x33: Co, ware
34; 1 Tim. iv. 15; Tit. iii. 13, etc.; alsu after a horta-
tive or deliberative subjune.: Mk. i. 388; Lk. xx.
14; Jn. vi. 5,[ be" TPr WH; x. Geb: aves
ete. 8. aftera Future: Lk. xvi. 4; xviii. 5; Jn. v. 20
[here Tdf. indic. pres.; see d.]; xiv. 3, 18,16; 1 Co. xv.
28; bil 26: e. after Historic tenses: after the
impf., Mk. iii. 2 [here L Tr fut. indic.; see ¢.]; vi. 41;
viii. 6; Lk. vi. 7; xviii. 15, etc.; after the plupf., Jn. iv.
8; after the aor., Mt. xix. 13; Mk. iii. 14; xi. 28; xiv.
10 [B. § 189, 37]; Lk. xix. 4, 15; Jn. v. 36 [RGL; ef.
B.]; vii. 82; xii. 9; Acts xix.4[?]; Ro. vi.4; 2 Co. viii.
9: Heb. ii. 14; xi. 85; 1 Tim.i.16; 1Jn. iii. 5, 8,ete. .
As prof. auth. join the final particles é¢pa, pn, and esp.
éres, also with the future Indicative (cf. Matthiae
§ 519, 8 ii. p. 1186 sqq.), as being in nature akin to the
subjunc., so the N. T. writ., ace. to a usage extremely
doubtful among the better Grk. writ. (cf. Klotz 1. ¢. p.
629 sq.), also join ta with the same [cf. WH. App. p.
171° sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. va, 17]: tva Ono, 1 Co. ix. 18;
LT Tr WH in the foll. instances: oravpocovow, Mk.
xv. 20 [not WH (see u. s.)], d@covow, Lk. xx. 103 Keva-
get, 1 Co. ix. 15 [not Lehm.], [karadovAdcovaew, Gal. ii.
4 (but ef. Hort in WH u. s. p- 167*) ]; xepOnOnoovrat,
1 Pet. iii. 1; opdovow, Rev. vi. 4; doo, Rev. viii. 3;
~
wa
wpockuvnoovory, [ Rev. ix. 20]; xiii. 12 [(cf. 2 a. fin. be-
low) ]; [avarancovra, Rev. xiv. 13 (see dvaravo)cf.4 b.]; L
Tr in the foll. : catyyopnoovow, Mk. iii. 2, (cf. b. e. above) ;
mpooxuynoovow, Jn. xii. 20; T Tr WH in [@ewpiaovor,
Jn. vii. 3]; Evpnoovra, Acts xxi. 24; LT WH Tr mrg.
in ddunoovow, Rev. ix. 4 [(cf. 2 b. below)]; [add, épei,
Lk. xiv.10 TWH Tr txt.; efopodoynoerat, Phil. ii. 11 T
L org. Tr mrg.; xavéjoopat, 1 Co. xiii. 3 T; dace, Jn.
Mii. 2 WH Tr mreg.; dvaratcovra, Rev. vi. 11 WH;
dooce, Rev. xiii. 16 WH mrg.], (iva carapynoet tov Oava-
Tov kat THY ek vekpov avdoraow Sei€et, Barn. ep. 5, 6 [so cod.
8, but Hilgenf., Miller, Gebh., al., adopt the subjunc. ;
yet see Cunningham’s note ad loc.]); so that the fut. al-
ternates with the subjunc.: ta géora.. . kai ciaéAOwour,
Rev. xxii. 14; yevnrat kal €on (Vulg. sis), Eph. vi. 3; in
other pass. LT Tr WH have restored the indic., as iva
jEovet K. mpooKuyncovow ...K. yoow, Rev. iii. 9; wa
...mlnte-.. kal kabicecde or xadyoeobe [but WH txt.
caOnobe| (Vule. et sedeatis), Lk. xxii. 30; xdpan x. e&o-
poroyhoerat, Phil. ii. 11 [T Lmrg. Tr mrg.]; ef. B. § 139,
38: W.§ 41b. 1b. d. By a solecism freq. in the
eccles. and Byzant. writ. iva is joined with the indie.
Present: 1 Co. iv. 6 (@vawicbe); Gal. iv. 17 (G7
Aodre) ; [cf. Test. xii. Patr., test. Gad § 7; Barn. ep. 6,
5; 7,11; Ignat. ad Eph. 4, 2; ad Trall. 8, 2, and other
exx. in Win. and Bttm. as below; but see Hort in WH.
App. p. 167°, cf. pp. 169°, 171 sq.]; but the indie. is very
doubtful in the foll. passages: [Jn. iv. 15 Tr txt.]; v.
20 (Tdf. Oavydgere); xvii. 3 T Trtxt.; Gal. vi. 12 TL
mrg.; [1 Th.iv. 13 Lmrg.]; Tit. ii. 4 T Tr Lmrg.; 2 Pet.
1.101; [1 Jn. v. 20 T Tr WH (cf. b. 8. above)]; Rev.
xii. 6 (T Tr rpepovow) ; [xiii. 17 WH mrg.]; cf. W. § 41
b. 1 e.; B.§ 139,39; Meyer on 1 Co. iv. 6; Wieseler on
Gal. iv. 17; [Soph. u.s.]. (In the earlier Grk. writ. wa
is joined with the indic. of the past tenses alone, ‘to
denote something which would have been, if something
else had been done, but now has not come to pass’ Her-
mann ad Vig. p. 847, ef. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 630 sq.;
Kiihner § 558, 7 ii. 903; [Jelf § 813; cf. Jebb in App. to
Vincent and Dickson’s Modern Greek, § 79].) e.
the final sentence is preceded by preparatory demon-
strative expressions [W. § 23, 5]: els rodro, to this end,
Jn xXvilieo? ; 1.n./111185 dro. xiv./9s 2 Coz 189% 1) Pet:
ii. 21; iii. 9; iv.6, (Barn.ep.5,1,11; [14,5]); es avré
touto, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8: da rovro, Jn. i. 31; 2 Co.
xiii. 10; Philem. 15; 1 Tim. i. 16; rovrov xapu, Tit. i. 5.
2. In later Grk., and esp. in Hellenistic writers, the
final force of the particle iva is more or less weakened,
so that it is frequently used where the earlier Greeks
employed the Infinitive, yet so that the leading and
the dependent sentence have each its own subject. The
first extant instance of this use occurs in the Amphic-
tyonic decree in [pseudo-] Dem. p. 279, 8 [i.e. de coron.
§ 155]: mpeoBedoa mpos Pidkurmov kai a&vodiv iva BonOnon,
[ef. Odyss. 8, 827 AiccecOa . . . iva vnpeptes eviorry (cf.
3, 19)], but it increased greatly in subsequent times; cf.
W.S§ 44,8; B. 237 (204) ; [Green 171 sq.; Goodwin § 45
N.5b.; Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson’s Modern
303
”
tva
Greek, §55]. Accordingly iva stands with the subjunc.
in such a way that it denotes the purport (or object)
rather than the purpose of the action expressed by
the preceding verb. This occurs a. after verbs of
caring for, deciding, desiring, striving: Bre
mew, 1 Co. xvi. 10; Col. iv. 17; 2 Jn. 8; (yra, 1 Co. iv.
2; xiv. 12; @vddocoopat, iva py, 2 Pet. iii. 17; pepuuvae,
1 Co. vii. 34; (yAdw, 1 Co. xiv. 1; Bovrevopa, Jn. xi. 53
[RG Tr mrg. ovpBov.]; xii. 10; adinus, Mk. xi. 16; Jn.
xii. 7 LT Tr WH; 6eAnua eore, Mt. xviii. 14; Jn. vi. 39
sq.; Gedo, Mt. vii. 12; Mk. vi. 25; ix.30; x. 35; Lk. vi.
31; so that it alternates with the inf., 1 Co. xiv. 5; didape,
to grant, that, Mk. x. 37; Rev. ix. 5, etc.; mow, Rev. xiii.
12 [here L T Tr WH indice. fut. (cf. 1 c. above) ]. b.
after verbs of saying (commanding, asking, exhorting ;
but by no means after xeAevew [cf. B. 275 (236)]):
eizeiv, in the sense of to bid, Mt. iv. 3; Mk. iii. 9; Lk. iv.
3; also Aeyew, Acts xix. 4; 1 Jn. v. 16; éppn6y, Rev. vi. 11
[ WH indice. fut.]; ix. 4 [LT Trmrg. WH indie. fut. (see
1c. above) ]; dvapaprvpopa, 1 Tim. v. 21 (otherwise [viz.
telic] in Lk. xvi. 28); épawra, to ask, beseech, Mk. vii. 26;
Wis yates S95 Sanh Ate Ahae thie A/S soi, Nip Wile sab Bl
2 Jn. 5; mapaxada, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. v. 10, 18; vii. 32;
vill. 22; LK. viii. 32; 1Co.i.10; xvi.12,15sq.; 2Co.
viii. 6; ix.5; xii.8; 1 Th.iv.1; 2 Th. iii. 12, (Joseph.
antt. 12, 3, 2); mpooevyopae [q. v.], Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk.
[xiii. 18]; xiv. 35; Séouar, Lk. ix. 40; xxii. 82, (Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 83); émiryo, Mt. xii. 16; [xvi. 20 L WH
txtaijpxx. di) Mk: m1: 12} win: 805° xe48Sok xvi: 9%
evreddope:, Mk. xiii. 34; Jn. xv. 17; evrodnv didS@pe or
AapBave, Jn. xi. 57; xiii. 34; xv.12; ypddo, with the
involved idea of prescribing, Mk. ix. 12 [ef. W. 462
(4380) and the txt. of LT]; xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28; da-
orehAopa, Mt. xvi. 20 [L. WH txt. erityse (see above) ];
Mk. v. 43; vii. 36; ix.9; mapayyéAAo, Mk. vi. 8 [ef. W.
578 (538)]; ovvridepat, Jn. ix. 22; ayyapetdo, Mt. xxvii.
32; Mk. xv. 21; xnpioow, Mk. vi. 12; amayyeAdo, Mt.
XXVill. 10; é£opxi¢w, Mt. xxvi. 63. [For exx. (of its use
with the above verbs and others) drawn from the later
Grk. writ. see Sophocles, Glossary ete. § 88, 1.] ci
after words by which judgment is pronounced con-
cerning that which some one is about to do (or which is
going to happen), as to whether it is ex pedient, be-
fitting, proper, or not; as cupdepe, Mt. xviii. 6; v.
29 sq.; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7; Avowredct, Lk. xvii. 2; dpxerdy
eomt, Mt. x. 25; also after d&wos, Jn. i. 27; ixavds, Mt.
vill. 8; Lk. vil. 6; eAdyrordv poi eorwv, iva. 1 Co. iv. 3;
nyaAXdeato, wa is), Jn. viii. 56; ypetav yo, Jn. ii. 25;
xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 27; eet, va emi Eidov maby, Barn.
ep. 5, 13. [For other exx. see Soph. as above § 88,
3, 4.] d. after substantives, to which it adds a
more exact definition of the thing; after subst. of
time: yxpédvoy, va peravonon, Rev. ii. 21; after dpa, In.
xii. 23; xiii. 1; xvi. 2, 32, (elsewhere dre, Jn. iv. 23; v.
25); in these exx. the final force ot the particle is still
apparent; we also can say “time that she should re-
pent ” [ef. W. 339 (318); B. 240 (207)]; but in other
expressions this force has almost disappeared, as in
iva
éorw ouvnbea jpiv, wa... adrodvow, JN. xviii. 39; after
puoOds, 1 Co. ix. 18. e. it looks back to a de
monstrative pronoun; ef. W. 338 (317); [B.§ 139,
45]: wé0ev pot Trodro, iva €hOn xd. for 7d €AGeiv TH etc.
LK. i. 43; esp. in John, cf. vi. 29, 50; xv. 13; xvii. 8
[here T Tr txt. indic.; see 1d. above]; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23;
v.3; 2Jn.6; Phil. i. 9; &» rotvrm, Jn. xv. 8; 1 Jn. iv.
17, (Acod S€ 1d Suvardy ev rovr@ Seixvurat, iva... €& ovK
6vtwv moun Ta ywvopeva, Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 13; after
réde, Epict. diss. 2, 1, 1; [other exx. in Soph. Lex.
8. v. 6]).
3. According to a very ancient tenet of the gramma-
rians, accepted by Kiihner, § 553. 2 Anm. 3; [7. S.
Green, N. T, Gram. p. 172 sq.], and not utterly rejected
by Alex. Btim. N. T. Gr. p. 238 sq. (206), iva is alleged to
be used not only reduxds, i.e. of design and end, but also
frequently éxBartxds, i. e. of the result, signifying with
the issue, that; with the result, that; so tha: (equiv. to
a@ore). But C. F. A. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 836 sqq. and
Win. 338 (317) and 457 (426) sqq. have clearly shown,
that in all the passages adduced from the N. T. to prove
this usage the telice (or final) force prevails: thus in
iva p11) AvOA 6 vdpos Maioéas, that the law of Moses may
not be broken (which directs a man to be circumcised
on the eighth and on noother day), Jn. vii. 23; ovk
éoré ev oxéret, iva 7 npepa Upas .. . katadaBn, that the day
should overtake you (cf. the final force as brought out by
turning the sentence into the pass. form in Germ. wm
vom Tage erfasst zu werden), 1 Th. v. 4; mpocevxéoba,
iva Steppnvedy, let him pray (intent on this, or with this
aim), that (subsequently) he may interpret, 1 Co. xiv.
13; likewise émevOnoare, iva ete. 1 Co. v. 2, and perevdn-
aay, iva py, Rev. ix. 20; perdbeow, ... wa etc. that the
change may be to this end, that ete. Heb. xii. 27; iva py
. +. mounre, that ye may not do, Gal. v.17 (where 9 odp£
and rd mvevpa are personified antagenistic forces con-
tending for dominion over the will of the Christian; cf,
Wieseler ad loc.) ; the words iva... pay «rd. in Ro.
iii. 19 describe the end aimed at by the law. In many
passages where iva has seemed to interpreters to be used
éxBarixds, the sacred writers follow the dictate of piety,
which bids us trace all events back to God as their au-
thor and to refer them to God’s pur poses (Jo. Dama-
scen. orthod. fid. 4, 19 00s 7H ypady, tid &xBartikds
opeidovra héyeoOat, airtodoyiKa@s Aéyewv) ; so that, if we
are ever in doubt whether iva is used of design or of
result, we can easily settle the question when we can
interpret the passage ‘that, by God’s decree,’ or ‘that,
according to divine purpose’ ete.; passages of this
sort are the following: Mk. iv. 12; Lk. ix. 45; xi. 50;
xiv. 10; Jn.iv. 36; ix. 2; xii. 40; xix. 28; Ro. v. 20; vii.
13; vili.17; xi. 31sq.; 1 Co. vii. 29; 2 Co. iv. 7; vii. 9;
also the phrase tva mAnpw67, wont to be used in refer-
ence to the O. T. prophecies: Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; iv. 14;
xii. 17 LT Tr WH; xxi. 4; xxvi. 56; xxvii. 35 Rec.; Jn.
xiii. 18; xvii. 12; xix. 24, 36; iva rAnpwby 6 Aéyos, Jn.
xii. 38; xv. 25, ef. xviii. 9,32. [Cf. Win. 461 (429).
Prof. Sophocles although giving (Lex. s. v. iva, 19) a co-
304
wa
pious collection of exx. of the ecbatic use of the word,
defends its telic sense in the phrase iva mAnp., by calling
attention not merely to the substitution of 6m@s mAnp.
in Mt. viii. 17; xiii. 35, (cf. ii. 23), but esp. to 1 Esdr. i.
54 (eis dvamAnpwow pyyatos Tod Kupiov ev orduate “lepe-
pov) ; ii. 1 (ets ouvrédevay pyuaros kup. kTA.) ; 2 Esdr. i. 1
(rot reheoOjvar Adyov kupiov amd ordparos ‘Iepepiov) ; Jo-
seph. antt. 8, 8, 2 fin. radra 8 emparrero xara tiv Tov Geov
BovAnow tva AdBy rédos a mpoepyrevoev Axias; cf. Bib.
Sacr. 61 p. 729 sqq. ; Luthardt’s Zeitschr.’83 p. 632 sqq.]
4. The elliptical use of the particle; a. the
telic iva often depends on a verb not expressed, but to
be repeated or educed from the context (cf. Fritzsche
on Mt. p. 840sqy.; W. 316 (297); [B. § 139, 47]): adAv
(sc. 7AOev, cf. vs. 7) iva paptupnon, Jn. i. 8; ddAN (se.
eyéeveto amdkpuov) iva eis pavepov €dOn, Mk. iv. 22; aN
(sc. kpatetré pe) va etc. Mk. xiv. 49; add, Jn. xv. 25;
t Jnl it. 19: b. the weakened ia (see 2 above)
with the subjune. (or indice. fut. [cf. 1 ¢.], Rev. xiv.
13 L T Tr WH) denotes something which one
wishes to be done by another, so that before the wa
a verb of commanding (exhorting, wishing) must
be mentally supplied, (or, as is commonly said, 1t
forms a periphrasis for the imperative): wa
.. . ents Tas xetpas aitH, Mk. v. 23; 4 yur) va PdoByrae
rov civdpa, Eph. v. 33; Gal. ii. 10; add 2 Co. viii. 7 ; va ava-
navowvrat [LT Tr WH -ranoovra (see dvarave init.) ],
Germ. sie sollen ruhen [A. V. that they may rest etc.],
Rev. xiv. 13; [perh. also Col. iv. 16, cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.], (2 Mace. i. 9; Epict. ench. 23 (17); diss. 4,1, 41;
among the earlier Greeks once so, Soph. O. C. 155; in
Latin, Cic. ad divers. 14, 20 ‘ibi ut sint omnia parata’;
in Germ. stern commands: ‘dass du gehest!’ ‘dass du
nicht séumest !’ cf. W. § 43,5 a.; [B. 241 (208)]). Cc.
iva without a verb following, — which the reader is left
to gather from the context; thus we must mentally sup-
ply evayyedifopeba, evayyedi{ovrar in Gal. ii. 9, ef. W.
587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; wa cata xdpwv, sc. 7, that
the promise may ke a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [W. 598
(556); B. 892 (336) ]; wa adddots aveots se. yevnrat, 2 Co.
viii. 13 [W. 586 (545); B. § 129, 22]; wa se. yernra, 1
Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco-
luthon [W. 599 (557); B. 234 (201)]: twa... xavyacOo
for kavxara. (iva as avOpwmos, sc. épyatn, Epict. diss. 3,
23, 4.)
5. Generally iva stands first in the final sentence;
sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in
which the main force of the sentence lies [W.550 (511);
B. §151, 18]: Acts xix. 4; Ro. xi. 31 (join r@ tperep@
éhéet iva); 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [RG]; 2 Co. ii. 4; xii. 7; Gal.
ii. 10; 7d Nourdy iva xrA. 1 Co. Vii. 29 Rec.exe el L T.
Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke
more rarely, than the rest; [on Jn.’s use see W. 338
(317) sq.; 461 (430); B. 236 (203); 244 (210) note;
§ 140, 10 and 12; on Luke’s cf. B. 235 sq. (203)]. It
is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Schaeffer’s
reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy’s)
ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488.]
va Ti
tva rt [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exe. (by mistake?)
in Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly ivari [so Rec.**>e2
G T uniformly; see W. §5, 2]; Lat. ut quid ? i. e. for what
purpose? wherefore? why? an elliptical formula, due to
the fact that a questioner begins an answer to his own
question with the word iva, but not knowing how to com-
plete it reverts again to the question, as if to ask what
will complete the answer: that (what?) may or might
happen, (ut (quid ?) fiat or fieret); see Herm. ad Vig. p.
847; Kiihner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25, 1 fin.; [B.
§ 149, 2]: Mt. ix.4; xxvii. 46; Lk. xiii. 7; Acts iv. 25;
vii. 26; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6;
xxv. 82; xxvii.46; Num. xiv. 3; xxii. 32 [Ald.]; Judg.
vi. 13 [Alex.,Ald.,Compl.]; 18.1.8; 2S. iii. 24; xv.19;
Wop im, 12; x. 18+ der, 1, 29° xiv.'195 xv. 185) Dane x.
20 [Theodot.]; Ps. ii. 1; x. 1 (ix. 22); xxi. (xxii) 2,
ete.; Sir. xiv. 3; 1 Macc. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192;
Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 c.; al.) *
*Iéary (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra-
phers prefer “Idmn, cf. Movers, Phonizier, ii. 2 p. 176
Anm.),-ns, 7, (Hebr. 15° i. e. beauty, fr. 75° to shine, be
beautiful; [al. make the name mean ‘an eminence’; al.
al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean,
lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim.
It was subject to the Jews from the time of the Macca-
bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car-
ried on a flourishing trade; now Ydfa (not Jaffa): Acts
ix. 36, 38, 42 sq.; x. 5, 8, 28, 32; xi.5,13. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Joppe; Riietschi in Herzog vii. p. 4 sq.; Fritzsche
in Schenkel iii. 376 sq.; [BB.DD.].*
*TopSdvqs, -ov [B. 17], 6 [cf. W. § 18, 5a.], (797, fr. 117
to descend; for other opinions about the origin of the
name see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.’s Kitto s. v.
Jordan]), the Jordan, the largest and most celebrated
river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor-
rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon,
flows at first into Lake Samochonitis (Merom so-called ;
[mod. el-Hileh; see BB.DD. s. v. Merom (Waters of)]),
and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the
Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented
during its course by many smaller streams, and finally
empties into the Dead Sea: Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13; iv. 15, 25;
Riche MK io, 05m. 83 x. 1s EK ii. 8s ived > ond 2S)
iii. 26; x. 40; ef. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.]s. v. Jordan;
Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iii.
p- 378 sqq.; [Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land,
pp. 144-186 ].*
lés, -ov, 6, (on its very uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in
Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591; [Vaniéek p. 969]) ; 1.
poison (of animals): tds domidev tr Ta xeiAn avray, the
poison of asps is under their lips, spoken of men given to
reviling and calumniating and thereby injuring others,
Ro. iii. 13 (fr. Ps. exxxix. (exl.) 3 (4)); by the same fig.
(yAéaca) peor lod Oavatnpdpou, Jas. iii. 8 ; (in Grk. writ.
fr. Pind. down). 2. rust: Jas. v. 3; (Ezek. xxiv.
6.11 sq.; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24); Theogn.,
Theocr., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Leian., al.).*
*TovSa, (see "Iovdas, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop.
305
’Tovdaios
name; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch
Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang from him. 3.
the region which this tribe occupied (cf.W. 114 (108)); so
in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice); ddus "IovdSa (Judg. xvii.
8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a
matter of dispute what city is meant; the most probable
conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, —a
city assigned to the priests, situated ‘in the hill country’
(XeBpav ev 7G dper “Iovda, Josh. xxi. 11), the native place
of John the Baptist acc. to Jewish tradition. [Cf. B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Juda, a City of.]*
*Tovdala, -as, 7 [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (se. yj, which is added
Jn. iii. 22, or xopa, Mk.i.5; fr. the adj. Iovdaios, q. v-),
Judea (Hebr. 73377") ; in the O. T. a region of Palestine,
named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it:
Judg. xvii. 7-9; Ruthi. 1sq.; 28. ii. 1, ete. Its bound-
aries are laid down in Josh. xv. 1 sqq. After the time
of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the
name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were
reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer-
tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with
the metropolis of Jerusalem: 1 K. xiv. 21, 29; xv. 7, ete.
In the N.T. the name is given 1. in a narrower
sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side
of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from
Samaria, Galilee, Perea, Idumea (Mk. iii. 8): Mt. ii. 1,
5,227 lie Oo; Iv. 20s xxtve do: Mom (sexi ta fuk. a
4; Jn. iv. 8,47, 54; Acts i. 8; viii. 1, etc.; it stands for
its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33;
XXxv. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to all Palestine :
Lk. i. 5; [iv.44 WH Trmrg.]; vii. 17; xxiii.5; Acts ii.
9; x. 37; xi. 1, 29, (and perh. 2. Co.i. 16; Gal. i. 22);
naca 7) xopa THs “lovdaias, Acts xxvi. 20; es ra dpia THs
"Iovdaias mépav Tov "lopSavou, into the borders of Judea (in
the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Perea,
Mt. xix. 1; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x.
1 RG, es ra Gp. ris *Iovd. dia Tod mépav Tov "Iopd., Jesus is
said to have come into the borders of Judea (in the nar-
rower sense) through Perwa; but acc. to the reading of
LT Tr WH, viz. cat répay tod "JopS. and (in particular
that part of Judxa which lay) beyond the Jordan, Mark
agrees with Matthew; [others regard mépav tod "Iopd.
here as parall. with ris Iovd. and like it dependent upon
épta |.
Tov8attw; (fr. Iovdaios, cf. ‘EAAnuotns [W. 92 (87)]),
to adopt Jewish customs and rites, imitate the Jews, Juda-
ize: of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal.
ii.14. (Esth. viii. 17; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10,3; Evang.
Nicod. c. 2; Plut. Cie. 7; to favor the Jews, Joseph. b. j.
2, 18, 2.)*
*TovSaixds, -f, -dv, Jewish: Tit.i.14. (2 Mace. viii. 11;
xiii. 21; Joseph. antt. 20,11, 1; Philo [in Flac. § 8].) *
*Tovdaixas, adv., Jewishly, after the manner of the Jews:
Gal. ii. 14. [(Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 3.)]*
"TouSatos, -a/a, -aiov, (‘Iovda),[ Aristot. (in Joseph. c. Ap.
1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.,
al.; Sept.; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jewish ; a. joined to
nouns, belonging to the Jewish race : avnp, Acts x. 28; xxii
"Ioviaiopos
3, (1 Mace. ii. 23); avOpwmos, Acis xxi. 39; yevdorpo-
gyrns, Acts xiii. 6; dpxeepeds, Acts xix. 14; yun, Acts
xvi. 1; xxiv. 24; yi, Jn. iii. 22; y@pa, Mk.i. 5. b.
without a noun, substantively, Jewish as respects birth,
race, religion; aJew: Jn.iv.9; Acts xviii. 2, 24; Ro. ii.
28 sq.; plur., Rev. ii. 9; iii 9; of Iovdaioe (0°73, be-
fore the exile citizens of the kingdom of Judah; after the
exile ail the Israelites [cf. Wright in B.D. s. v. Jew]), the
Jews, the Jewish race: Mt. ii. 2; xxvii. 11, 29; Mk. vii.
3; xv.2; Jn. ii. 63 iv.22; v.13; xviii. 33, etc.; "Iovdaioi
re kat "EAnves, Acts xiv. 1; xviii. 4; xix.10; 1 Co. i. 24;
"IovOatol Te Kal MpoonArvTot, Acts ii. 11 (10); evn TE Kal
"Tovdaior, Acts xiv. 5; sing., Ro. i. 16; ii. 9; of xara ra
vn "IovSaior, who live in foreign lands, among the Gen-
tiles, Acts xxi. 21; Iovdator is used of converts from
Judaism, Jewish Christians (see €6vos, 5) in Gal. ii. 13.
[Syn. ‘EBpaios, lovdaios, Iopanadirns: “restricting our-
selves to the employment of these three words in the N.'T. we
may say that in the first is predominantly noted language;
in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title
of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation”
(Trench § xxxix.); ef. B.D. s. vv. Hebrew, Israelite, Jew.]
The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state
of things in his day he looked upon the Jews as a body
of men hostile to Christianity, with whom he had come
to see that both he and all true Christians had nothing
in common as respects religious matters, even in his
record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis-
tinction between the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to
Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin-
guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter
sprang from an alien race: Jn. xi. 8; xiii. 33. And
those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, ef.
vi. 41, 52) opposed his divine Master and his Master’s
cause, — esp. the rulers, priests, members of the Sanhe-
drin, Pharisees,—he does not hesitate to style of Iov-
daior, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the
hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus: i. 19; ii. 18,
20; vo1l0, 15 ag.18; vi. 40, 522 vil. 1,111; 1x. 18, 22-2,
24, 31, 33; xviii 14. [Cf. B.D. s. v. Jew; Franke, Stel-
lung d. Johannes z. Volke d. alt. Bundes. (Halle, 1882).]
*TovSaicyds, -o0, 6, (dovdaitw), the Jewish faith and wor-
ship, the religion of the Jews, Judaism: Gal. i. 13 sq.
(2 Mace. ii. 21, ete.; cf. Grimm, Com. on 2 Mace. p. 61.
[B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Judaism].) *
*IovSas, -a, dat. -a, ace. -av, [ B. 20 (18)], 6, (Am, fr.
the Hoph. of 7%, praised, celebrated; see Gen. Xxix.
35), Judah or Judas (see below) ; 1. the fourth son
of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. i. 2 sq.; Lk. iii. 33; Rev. v.
5; vil. 5; by meton., the tribe of Judah, the descendants
of Judah: Heb. vii. 14; 6 otkos "Iovda, citizens of the
kingdom of Judah, Heb. viii. 8. 2. Judah (or Judas)
an unknown ancestor of Christ: Lk. iii. 26 RG L. 3.
another of Christ’s ancestors, equally unknown: Lk. iii.
30. 4. Judas surnamed the Galilean, a man who
at the time of the census under Quirinus [better Quiri-
nius], excited a revolt in Galilee: Acts v. 37 (Joseph.
antt. 18, 1,1, where he is called 6 TavAavirns because he
306
*‘loaak
came from the city Gamala, near the Lake of Galilee in
lower Gaulanitis; but he is called also 6 TadsAatos by
Joseph. antt. 18, 1,6; 20, 5, 2; b. j. 2, 8, 1). 5. [Ju-
das| a certain Jew of Damascus: Acts ix. 11. 6.
Judas surnamed "Ioxapiwrns (q- v-), ef Carioth (from the
city of Kerioth, Josh. xv. 25; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 41; Amos
ii. 2; [but see BB.DD.s. v. Kerioth]; some codd. in Jn.
vi. 71 [cf. Tdf.’s note in loc.]; xii. 4, read dé Kaptorov
instead of "Ioxapimrns), the son of one Simon (who in
Jn. vi. 71 LT Tr WH; xiii. 26 T Tr WH, is himself sur-
named "IoxapiwTns), one of the apostles of Jesus, who
betrayed him: Mt. x.43; xxvi. 14, 25,47; xxvii.3; Mk.
iii. 19; xiv. 10,48; Lk. vi. 16; xxii. 3,47 sq.; Jn. vi. 71;
xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26,29; xviii. 2sq.5; Actsi. 16,25. Mat-
thew (xxvii. 5), Luke (Acts i. 18), and Papias [cf. Wendt
in Meyer’s Apostelgesch. 5te Aufl. p. 23 note] in a frag.
quoted by Oecum. on Acts i. 18 differ in the account of
his death, [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]; on his avarice cf.
Jn. xii. 6. 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas [or Bare
sabbas, see the word], a prophet of the church at Jeru-
salem: Acts xv. 22, 27, 32. 8. Judas, an apostle,
Jn. xiv. 22, who is called "IovSas "laxkwBov in Lk. vi. 16;
Acts i. 13 (see IdkwBos, 4), and, as it should seem, was
surnamed Lebbeus or Thaddeus (see Gaddaios). Ac-
cording to the opinion of the church he wrote the Epistle
of Jude. 9. Judas, the brother of our Lord: Mt.
xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 8,and very probably Jude 1; see ‘Idk:
Bos, 3.*
*Tovdia, -as, 9, Julia, a Christian woman [cf. Bp. Lghtft.
on Philip. p. 177]: Ro. xvi. 15 [Lmrg. “Iovviay].*
*Tovdvos, -ov, 6, Julius, a Roman centurion: Acts xxvii.
1, 3.*
*Touvias [al. -mds, as contr. fr. Junianus ; cf. W. 102 sq.
(97) ], -a [but cf. B. 17 sq. (16) ], 6, Junias, a convert from
Judaism, Paul’s kinsman and fellow-prisoner: Ro. xvi. 7
[(here A. V. Junia (a woman’s name) which is possi-
ble). The name occurs again as the name of a Christian
at Rome in Ro. xvi. 15 Lchm. mrg. (where al. IovA‘av). ]*
‘Totcros, -ov, 6, Justus [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 11],
the surname 1. of Joseph, a convert from Judaism,
who was also surnamed Barsabas [better Barsabbas q.
v.]: Acts i. 23. 2. of Titus, a Corinthian [a Jew-
ish proselyte]: Acts xviil. 7. 3. of acertain Jesus,
[a Jewish Christian]: Col. iv. 11.*
iarmrevs, -Cws, 6, (immos), a horseman: Acts xxiil. 23, 32.
[From Hom. down. ]*
tarmukds, -7, -v, equestrian ; 7d immexdy, the horse (-men),
cavalry: Rev. ix. 16 (as Hat. 7, 87; Xen., Plat., Polyb.,
al.; more fully 7é immuxdv otparevpa, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26;
so 7 meCixdv, the foot (-forces), infantry, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3,
38).*
tartros, -ov, 6, [Curtius § 624; Peile, Grk. and Lat:
Etymol., Index s. v.], @ horse : Jas. iii. 3; Rev. vi. 2, 4 sq.
8; ix. 7, 9,17, [19 GLT Tr WH]; xiv. 20; xviii. 13; xix.
11-21. [From Hom. down.]*
Ipts, -idos, 9, (Iris), a rainbow: Rev. iv.3; x.1. (Hom.,
Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
*"Ioadx. 6. indecl. (pny, fr. pm¥ to laugh: Gen. xxi. $;
ioayyerXos
xvii. 17; in Joseph. "Iaakos, -ov), Jsaac, the son of Abra-
ham by Sarah: Mt. i. 2; viii. 11; xxii. 32; Ro. ix. 7, 10;
Gal. iv. 28; Heb. xi. 9, 17 sq. 20; Jas. ii. 21, ete.
lodyyedos, -ov, (isos and dyyedos, formed like icdOeos
[ef. iradeAdos (Eur. Or. 1015), todorepos (4 Mace. xvii.
5), and other compounds in Koumanoudes, Suvaywyn «rh.
p- 166 sq.]), like the angels: Lk. xx. 36. (Keel. writ. ;
[ef. toos dyyédots yeyoves, Philo de sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 2;
W. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100 (95)].) *
*Ioacxap [Rec.*!4] and “Ioaxdp [R* GL] Clocayap
Tdf., Iooayap Tr WH), 6, (aww, fr. w there is, and
12 a reward [(cf. Jer. xxxi. 16) yet cf. Muhlau u. Volck
s. v.]; Joseph. Iodayxapis [’lodxapes ]), /ssachar, the son
of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18): Rev.
villentee
tonpt, found only in the Doric form toays, to know;
from which some derive the forms tore and icpev, con-
tracted from tvare and ioauev; but these forms are more
correctly derived from eid, toper i. q. ipev, etc., (cf.
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 548); on the phrase tore [R éore]
yveookortes, Eph. v. 5, see yuwooke, I. 2 b.
*Ioxapiotys, and (Lehm. in Mt. x.4; TWH in Mk.
xiv. 10; LT Tr WH in Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 16) Ioxapiod,
i.e nyyp WN; see Iovdas, 6 and Sipvay, 5.
twos (not icos [yet often so RG Tr], which is Epic ;
ef. Bornemann, Scholia in Lue. p. 4; Géttling, Lehre
vom Accent p. 305; [Chandler § 406]; Lipsius, Gram-
mat. Untersuch. p. 24; [L. and S.s. v. fin.; W.52]), -n,
-ov, equal, in quality or in quantity: 7 (on dwped, the same
gift, Acts xi. 17; toa: paprupia, agreeing testimonies,
Mk. xiv. 56, 59; tcov wovetv teva Tun, to make one equal
to another, in the payment of wages, Mt. xx. 12; é€avrov
T@ Oe@, to claim for one’s self the nature, rank, author-
ity, which belong to God, Jn. v. 18; ra ica drodaPeiv, Lk.
vi. 34. The neuters icov and toa are often used adver-
bially fr. Hom. down (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1505*; [L. and
S.s. v.I1V.1]; W.§ 27, 3 fin.): toa etvac (B. § 129, 11),
of measurement, Rey. xxi. 16; of state and condition, ro
Geo, Phil. ii. 6 (on which see in popdn).*
iadtys, -7Tos, 7, (toos) 5 1. equality: é& iodrntos
[ef. ek, V. 3] by equality, 2 Co. viii. 13 (14), i. q. émas
yevnrat iadtns, 14. 2. equity, fairness, what is equi-
table, joined with rd Sicacov: Col. iv. 1. (Kur., Plat.,
Aristot., Polyb., al.; [cf Bp. Lghtft. on Col. Ll. ¢., yet per
contra Meyer].) *
ladtipos, -ov, (tcos and rin), equally precious; equally
honored: wi, to be esteemed equal to, iodripoy nytv
niotw [a like precious faith with us], concisely for riorw
TH Nav micre iodriypov [W. § 66, 2f.; B. § 133, 10]: 2
Pet. i. 1. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) *
ledipuxos, -ov, (tcos and Wyn), equal in soul [A. V.
like-minded], (Vulg. unanimus): Phil. ii. 20. (Ps. liv.
(lv.) 14; Aeschyl. Ag. 1470.) *
*Iepaqd (Joseph. "Iapandos, -ov), 6, indecl., Osi, fr
by and m1, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28; Hos. xii.
4, cf. Gen. xxxv. 10), /srael, a name given to the pa-
triarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former
name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on): 6 oixos Iapana, the family
307
torn
or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [A. V. the
house of Israel], Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; Acts vii. 42, (Ex. xvi.
31; 15. vii. 2, and often) ; of viol Iop. the [sons i. e. the
children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk.i.16; Acts v. 21;
vii. 23,37; Ro. ix. 27; ai pudai rod "Iap., Mt. xix. 28;
Lk. xxii. 30; Rey. vii.4. | By meton. for the posterity of
Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because
it made reference to the promises of salvation through
the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference
to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see Iovdaios,
b.]): Mt. ii. 6; viii. 10; ix. 33; Lk. i. 54, 68, 80; Acts
iv. 8 [RK G];> Eph. ii. 12; Ro. xi. 2, 7, 26, ete. (Ex. v. 2;
xi. 7, and often); 6 Aads “Iap., Acts iv. 10,27; yy “Iap.
i.e. Palestine [(1 S. xiii. 19, etc.) ], Mt. ii. 20 sq.; Bae
Aevs “Iop., Mt. xxvii. 42; Jn.i. 49 (50); 9 eAmis rod lap.
Acts xxviii. 20; 6 Iap. rod Ocod (gen. of possession), i. e.
Christians, Gal. vi. 16; 6 Iop. kata odpkxa, Israelites by
birth, i. e. Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; in an emphat. sense, od yap
mavtes oi €& “lop. xrX. for not all those that draw their
bodily descent from Israel are true Israelites, i. e. are
those whom God pronounces to be Israelites and has
chosen to salvation, Ro. ix. 6.
*Iopanditys (T WH ’Iopandeirns, Tr only in Jn. i. 47
(48); [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 86, and cf. s. v. et, ¢]), -ov, 6,
CIopany, q. v.), an Israelite (Hebr. 287; Sept. Ie¢pan-
Nirns, 2S. xvii. 25), one of the race of Israel, a name
held in honor (see Iopand): Jn. i. 47 (48); Ro. ix. 4;
xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; avdpes "Iopandira [W. § 65,5d.; B.
82 (72)], Acts ii. 22; ili. 12; v. 35; xiii. 16; [xxi. 28],
(4 Mace. xviii. 1; Joseph. antt.2,9,1). [Cf. B. D. (Am.
ed.) s. v. Syn. see "Iovdaios, b.] *
(Iocdxap, Iocayap, see loacxap. |
tornpt, more rarely iorde ([ (fr. Hdt. down; ef. Veitch
s. v.) | iota@pev, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and ioravw ([ (late; cf.
Veitch s. v.) | iaravopev, Ro. iii. 31 LT Tr WH), [ef. B.
44 (38) sq.; W. § 14, 1f.; 87 (83); WH. App. p. 168;
Veitch p. 337 sq. |; fut. orga; 1 aor. €urnoa; 2 aor. gary,
impv. orn, inf. orjva, ptep. ards; pf. €ornka [with pres.
force; W. 274 (257)], inf. éordvar [Re ste? G Tr -avae
in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere éarnxévat), ptep. masc. €oTnKas
with neut. éoryxos, and in the shorter form éoras, éot@ca
(Jn. viii. 9), with neut. éoras and (LT Tr WH in Mt.
xxiv. 15 [here R* also]; Rev. xiv. 1) éords, (cf. Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 208; [Rutherford, Babrius p. 39 sq.; W.
§ 14,1i.; B.48 (41)]); plupf. eiorjxew [(but WH uni-
formly iar.; see I, 4) with force of impf. W. 274 (257)],
3 pers. plur. eioryxecoay (Mt. xii. 46 ; Jn. xviii. 18; Acts
ix. 7 and L T Tr WH in Rev. vii. 11) and éorjKeoav
(Rev. vii. 11 R G [cf. W. § 14, 1 a.; yet B. 43 (88)]);
Pass., 1 aor. éordOnv; 1 fut. crabjoopar; 1 fut. mid. orpao-
pat (Rev. xviii. 15);
I. TRANSITIVELY in the Pres., Impf., Fut., and 1
Aor. act.; likewise in the tenses of the Pass. [cf. B.
47 (41) contra W. 252 (237)], (Sept. for Tyn, Opa,
3x7); [fr. Hom. down]; to cause or make to stand; to
place, put, set; 1. univ. a. prop. tia, to bid to
stand by, [set up]: Acts i. 23; vi. 13; in the presence of
others: év weog, in the midst, Jn. viii. 3, and ev 76 péve,
lornpe
Acts iv. 7; évamov twos, Acts vi. 6; before judges: «is
avtovs, before the members of the Sanhedrin, Acts xxii.
30; €v r@ avvedpio, Acts v. 27; émi with gen. of the judge,
pass. orabijceoGe, Mk. xill. 9; Tid dpopov Karevomdy
rivos, to [set one i. e.] cause one to make his appearance
faultless before etc. Jude 24; to place (i. e. designate
the place for one to occupy): ev peo tivadv, Mt. xviii. 2;
Mk. ix. 36; map’ €avr@, Lk. ix. 47; é« deEav, Mt. xxv. 33;
eri rt (ace. of place), Mt. iv.5; Lk.iv.9. Mid. to place
one’s self, to stand (Germ. sich hinstellen, hintreten) : am
paxpodev, Rev. xviii. 15; likewise in the passive: oradeis,
Lk. xviii. 11,40; xix. 3 [éora@qoav oxvOpwroi they stood
still, looking sad, Lk. xxiv. 17'T WH Tr txt. (cf. IL. 1b.
B.)]; Actsiil4; xi. 13; with ev péoe twos, twa, added,
Acts xvii. 22; xxvii. 21; oraGévres, when they had ap-
peared (before the judge), Acts xxv. 18. B. trop. fo
make firm, fix, establish: ti, twa, to cause a pers. or thing
to keep his or its place; pass. to stand, be kept intact (of
a family, a kingdom): Mt. xii. 25 sq.; Lk. xi. 18; i. q. to
escape in safety, Rev. vi. 17; with €umpooGev rod viod tov
av@p. added, Lk. xxi. 36; ornoai teva, to cause one to pre-
serve a right state of mind, Ro. xiv. 4 [see Meyer];
pass. oradnoera, shall be made to stand, i. e. shall be
kept from falling, ibid. ri, to establish a thing, cause it
to stand, i. e. to uphold or sustain the authority or force of
any thing: Heb. x. 9 (opp. to avaipeiv) ; thy mapddoow,
Mk. vii. 9; riv idiav Sixavoc. Ro. x. 3; tov voyov (opp. to
xatapy®), Ro. iii. 31, (rév épxov, Gen. xxvi. 3; ray diady-
knv, Ex. vi. 4; 1 Mace. ii. 27). 1. q. to ratify, confirm:
orabj, orabnoera wav pyya, Mt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1.
to appoint, [cf. colloq. Eng. set]: nuépav, Acts xvii. 31;
ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 59. 2. to set or place in
a balance; to weigh: money to one (because in very early
times, before the introduction of coinage, the metals used
to be weighed) i. e. to pay, Mt. xxvi. 15 (so in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1508"; [L. and S. s. v.
A. IV.]; Sept. for “pw, Is. xlvi. 6; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.)
9 sq.; Zech. xi. 12; 2 Esdr. viii. 25 sq.; etc.); this fur-
nishes the explanation of the phrase py otnons adrois Tiyy
dpaptiav tavrnv, do not reckon to them, call them to ac-
count for, this sin [A. V. lay not this sin to their charge],
Acts vii. 60 [(cf. Meyer ad loc.) ]}.
II. INTRANSITIVELY in the Perf. and Plupf. (hav-
ing the sense of a pres. and an impf. [see above]), also
in 2 Aor. act., to stand; Sept. for 1¥3, Wy, DIP; 1.
prop. a. foll. by prepositions or adverbs of place:
foll. by év w. dat. of place [ef. B. 329 (283)], Mt. vi. 5;
xx. 3; xxiv. 15; Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. vil..9; xi.56; Acts
v. 25; vii. 33[LT Tr WH emi w. dat.]; Rev.v.6; xix.
17; évamiov twos, Acts x. 30; Rev. vii. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4;
xii. 4; mpds w. dat. of place, Jn. xviii. 16; emi w. gen.
of place (Germ. auf, upon), Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 40;
Rev. x. 5, 8; w. gen. of the judge or tribunal, before [cf.
eri, A. I. 2 b.J, Acts xxiv. 20; xxv. 10; wépav with gen.
of place, Jn. vi. 22; mpo, Acts v. 23[RG; but LT Tr WH
emi tov Oupav (at, Germ. an; cf. above and see emi, A. I.
2a.)]; xii. 14; €umpoobev rivos, before one as judge, Mt.
XXVii. 11; KvKAw (Tide), around, Rev. vii. 11; pécos ipar,
508
€
loTopéw
in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 26; &« deka»
twos, Lk.i. 11; Acts vii. 55 sq.; év peo, Jn. viii. 9; mpds
w.ace. (G LT Tr WH w. dat. [see mpés, I.]) of place, Jn.
xx.11; émi w. ace. of place (see emi, C. 1), Mt. xiii. 2;
Rev. iii. 20; vii. 1; xiv.1; xv. 23; émt rods méddas, to stand
upright, Acts xxvi.16; Rev. xi.11; mapd w. acc., Lk. v.
2; vil. 38; eis, Jn. xxi. 4 (LT Trmrg. WH mre. emi [see
emi, C.I.1d.]) 5; éxet, Mt. xxvii. 47; Mk. xi. 5; Jas. ii. 3;
ade, Mt. xvi. 28; xx.6; Mk.ix.1; Lk. ix. 27[here T Tr
WH aitrod, q. v.]; dérov, Mk. xiii. 14; &€@, Mt. xii. 46, 47
[here WH in mrg. only]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 203 xiii.
25; paxpdéev, Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Trtxt.]; dnd
paxpobev, Rev. xviii. 10, 17; [Lk. xxiii. 49 L T WH Tr
mrg. (but azé in br.) |; wéppodev, Lk. xvii. 12. b. ab-
solutely ; a. to stand by, stand near, (in a place al-
ready mentioned, so that the reader readily understands
where): Mt. xxvi. 73; Jn.i. 35; iii. 29; vii. 37; xii. 29;
Xviil. 18, 25; xx.14; Acts xvi. 9; xxii. 25; with a ptep.
or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of
the one standing): Mt. xx. 6; Lk. xxiii.10; Actsi. 11;
ix. 7; xxvi. 6; opp. to cadi¢ew, Heb. x.11sq. 8. if what
is said to stand had been in motion (walking, flowing,
etc.), to stop, stand still: Mt. ii. 9 (Ree. éorn, L T Tr WH
éordbn (cf. I.1a.]); Mt.xx.32; Mk. x. 49; Lk. viii. 44;
Acts viii. 38. sy. contextually, to stand immovable, stand
Jirm, of the foundation of a building: 2 Tim. ii. 19. 2.
metaph. a. to stand, i. e. continue safe and sound,
stand unharmed: Acts xxvi. 22. b. to stand ready or
prepared: with a ptcp., Eph. vi. 14. c. to be of a
steadfast mind; so in the maxim in 1 Co. x. 12. d.
foll. by a ptep. of quality, Col. iv.12; 6s éornkev éSpaios,
who does not hesitate, does not waver, 1 Co. vii. 37; in
a fig., of one who vanquishes his adversaries and holds
the ground, Eph. vi. 13; also of one who in the midst of
the fight holds his position mpés twa, against the foe,
Eph. vi. 11, (cf. Ex. xiv.13; Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 13). to
persist, continue, persevere: th miorer, dat. commodi (so
as not to fall from thy faith [al. take the dat. instru-
mentally, by thy faith; cf. W. § 31, 6¢.; B. § 133, 24]),
Ro. xi. 20; év rH aAnOeia, Jn. viii. 44 (where the meaning
is, his nature abhors, is utterly estranged from, the truth;
Vulg. incorrectly, in veritate non stetit; Luther, ist nicht
bestanden [A. V. abode not ete.]; but the Ziirich version
correctly, besteht nicht [WH read gorpkev, impf. of ornxe,
q: V-])3 €v tH xapitt, Ro. v. 2; év To evayyedio, 1 Co. xv.
1; eis nv (se. ydpiv) €ornxare, into which ye have entered,
that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v. 12 [but L 7’ Tr WH
read orjre (2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur.) enter and
stand fast; B. § 147, 16, ef. p. 329 (283)]. N. B. From
éornxa is formed the verb oro, which see in its place.
[Comp.: av-, ém-av-, €€-arv-, avO-, ad-, d:-, €v-, €&-, ém- (-pat),
ed-, xar-ep-, avv-ep-, KaO-, avti-xaO-, dmo-Ka6-, peO-, rap-,
Tept-, Tpo-, cvv-ioTnpL. |
ioropéw: 1 aor. inf. isropjoa; (torwp [allied with oiSa
(torw), videre (visus), ete.; Curtius § 282], -opos, one
that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in); fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down; 1. to inquire into, examine, inves-
tigate. 2. to find out, learn, by inquiry. suk
ioxupées
gain knowledge of by visiting: something (worthy of
being seen), rv yapav, Plut. Thes. 30; Pomp. 40; reva,
some distinguished person, to become personally ac-
quainted with, know face to face: Gal. i. 18; so too in
Joseph. antt. 1, 11,4; b. j. 6,1, 8 and often in the Clem.
homilies; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 122 note; [El-
licott on Gal. 1. ¢.].*
loxupds, -d, -dv, (ioxvw), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept.
mostly for 7, 7133, Pin, DIS}, and Chald. spn; strong,
mighty; a. of living beings: strong either in body or in
mind, Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xi. 21 sqy.; Rev. v.25 x.
1; xviii. 21; ev roA€u@, mighty i.e. valiant, Heb. xi. 34, ef.
Rev. xix. 18; of one who has strength of soul to sustain
the assaults of Satan, 1 Jn. ii. 14; univ. strong, and
therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp.
to daGevns); compar., Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Lk. iii. 16;
mighty, —of God, 1 Co. i. 25; Rev. xviii. 8, (Deut. x. 17;
2 Mace. i. 24, ete.) ; of Christ raised to the right hand of
Ged, 1 Co. x. 22; of those who wield great influence
among men by their rank, authority, riches, ete., ra io yupa
i.q. rods icxvpovs (on the neut. cf. W. § 27,5), 1 Co. i. 27
(oi ixyupot THs yns, 2 K. xxiv. 15); joined with rAovotor,
Rev. vi. 15 (Ree. of dvvaroi). b. of inanimate things:
strong i. q. violent, avepos, Mt. xiv. 30 [T WH om. icy.];
forcibly uttered, porn, Rev. xviii. 2 [Rec. peyadn] (Ex.
xix. 19); xpavyn, Heb. v. 7; Bpovrai, Rev. xix. 6; Ads,
great, Lk. xv. 143; émtorodai (stern, [forcible]), 2 Co. x.
10; strong i. q. firm, sure, mapdkdnots, Heb. vi. 18; fitted
to withstand a forcible assault, wdAcs, well fortified, Rev.
XViii. 10 (reiyos, 1 Macc. i.33; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 7; mdpyos,
Judg. ix. 51). [Cf. ddvaycs, fin.] *
loxis, -vos, 9, (try [allied w. érxov; to hold in check]),
[fr. Hes. down], Sept. esp. for M3, TN, 1), 77323; adil-
ity, force, strength, might: 2 Pet. ii. 11 (joined w. dvvamis) ;
Rev. v. 12; vii. 12; 1d xpdros ths ivyvos, power (over ex-
ternal things) afforded by strength, Eph. i. 19; vi. 10,
(Is. xl. 26); 7 dda ris tox. (see doéa, ITI. 3 b. a. fin.),
2 Th.i. 9; xpaew év icyver, with strength, mightily, Rev.
xviii. 2 Rec.; €& icyvos, of one’s strength, to the extent
of one’s ability, 1 Pet. iv. 11; with dAns added, Mk. xii.
30, 33; Lk. x. 27 [here L txt. T Tr WH read éy ody 777
ioxvi]. [Syn. see dvvapts, fin.]*
loxto; impf. ioyvoy; fut. icyvow; 1 aor. icyvoa;
(ioyvs); Sept. for PIN, YES, OSD, ete. 5 to be strong, i.e.
1. to be strong in body, to be robust, to be in sound health:
ot (oxvovres, as subst., Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17, (Soph. Tr.
234; Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 24; joined with tyaivew, id. mem.
2,°7, 7). 2. to have power, [fr. Aeschyl. down], i. e.
a. to have a power evinced in extraordinary deeds, i. e.
to exert, wield, power: so of the gospel, Acts xix. 20;
Hebraistically, to have strength to overcome: ov icxvcar,
[A. V prevailed not i. e.] succumbed, were conquered,
(so 5a: #5, Gen. xxxii. 26 (25)), Rev. xii. 8; ard twos,
against one, i.e. to use one’s strength against one, to
treat him with violence, Acts xix. 16. b. i. q. to be
of force, avail (Germ. gelten) : Heb. ix. 17; ri, Gal. v. 6,
and Rec. in vi. 15. —c.. to be serviceable: eis re [A. V.
good for], Mt. v.13. d. foll. by inf. to be able, can:
309
"Iwavyns
Mt. viii. 28; xxvi.40; Mk. v. 4; [ix. 18 (inf. to be sup-
plied)]; xiv. 37; Lk. vi. 48; viii. 43; [xiii. 24]; xiv. 6,29
8q-; XVi.3; xx. 26; Jn. xxi.6; Acts vi. 10; xv.10; xxv.
7; xxvii. 16, (Plut. Pomp.58). with acc., ravra, Phil. iv.
13; modv, Jas. v.16. [Comp.: év-, €&, én-, xar-oyvw.|*
lows, (cos, q. v.), adv., [fr. Soph. down]; al
equally, in like manner. 2. agreeably to expecta-
tion, i. e. tt may be, probably; freq. an urbane expression
of one’s reasonable hope (Germ. wohl, hoffentlich) : Lk.
xx. 13, and often in Attic writ.*
‘TraXia, -as, 7, Jtaly: Acts xviii. 2; xxvii. 1, 6; Heb.
xiii. 24.*
‘Tradukés, -7, -6v, (radia), [fr. Plat. down], Jtalian:
oretpa “Iradixn, the Italian cohort (composed of Italian,
not provincial, soldiers), Acts x. 1; cf. Schiirer, in the
Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Theol. for 1875, p. 422 sqq.;
(Hackett, in B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Italian Band].*
*Irovpaia, -as, 7, /turea, a mountainous region, lying
northeast of Palestine and west of Damascus (Strabo
16 p. 756 $18; Plin.h.n. 5, (23) 19). Ace. to Luke (iii.
1) at the time when John the Baptist made his public
appearance it was subject to Philip the tetrarch, son of
Herod the Great, although it is not mentioned by Joseph.
(antt. 17, 8,1; 11,4, 18; 4,6 and b.j. 2, 6,3) among the
regions assigned to this prince after his father’s death ;
(on this point cf. Schiirer in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch.
Theol. for 1877, p.577 sq.). It was brought under Jew-
ish control by king Aristobulus e. B.c. 100 (Joseph. antt.
13, 11,3). Its inhabitants had been noted for robbery
and the skilful use of the bow (Verg. geor. 2, 448; Cic.
Phil. 13, 8, 18; Strabo 16 p. 755 sq.; Lucan, Phar. 7, 230,
514). Cf. Miinter, Progr. de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafn.
1824; Win. RWB.s. v. Ituraea; Aneucker in Schenkel
iii. p. 406 sq.; [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.].*
tx Ovbvov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. fr. iyAvs), a little fish: Mt. xv.
34; Mk. viii. 7. [From Arstph. on.]*
ix Bus, -vos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a fish: Mt. vii. 10; Mk.
Win Soe e ka velonmed ne pxxteldeetees) le Converse
txvos, -eos (-ovs), Td, (fr. kw i. q. ixvéopat, to go), [fr.
Hom. down], a footprint, track, footstep: in the N. T.
metaph., of imitating the example of any one, we find
oToLXELy Tois Txveot TLVOS, Ro. iv. 12; mepurareiv rois ixy.
tr. 2 Co. xii. 18; émaxodovdeiv r. tyv. tw. 1 Pet. ii. 21, (ev
ixveoi twos ov moda venew, Pind. Nem. 6, 27); cf. Lat.
insistere vestigiis alicuius.*
*Twd8ap, [-Oagn WH], 6, (ony i. e. Jehovah is perfect),
indecl., Jotham [A. V. (1611) Joatham], king of Judah,
son of Uzziah, B.c. 758-7 to 741, or 759 to 743: Mt. i. 9.*
"Twdvva [Tr WII "Iwdva; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 79; WH.
App. p. 159; s.v. N,v], -ns, 9, (see ’Iwavyns), Joanna, the
wife of Chuzas, Herod’s steward, and a follower of Jesus:
EEAviiis! 33) xxiv. 10.*
*Iwavvds, -a, and (ace. to L T Tr WH) “Iwavay, indecl.,
(see "Iwdvyns), 6, Joannas [or Joanan], one of the ances-
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 27.*
*Iwdvvns and ([so WH uniformly, exe. in Acts iv. 6;
xiii. 5; Rev. xxii. 8] Trin the Gospels of Lk. and Jn., [in
the Acts, exe. iv. 6] and the Rev. [exc. xxii. 8]) "Iwavn,
*"Twavyns
[ef. Tdf. Proleg. p.79; WH. App. p. 159; Scrivener, Intr.
p- 562 (cf. s. v. N,v) ], gen. -ov, dat. -7 and (in [Mt. xi.
4.WH; Rev. 1) WH]; Lkoviits Te Wi 220 Tr
WH] -ee [cf. WH. App. p. 158; B.17 (16), 7]), ace. -n»,
6, (any and jaMT, to whom schopala is gracious, [al.
w ae Jehovah has graciously given], Germ. Gotthold;
Sept. "Iwavvay ['Tdf. Iwavdy], 1 Chr. iii. 24; "Iavd, 2 K.
xxv. 23; "Iwavns, 2 Chr. xxviii. 12, [ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. Vv.
Johanan]), John; in the N. T. the men of this name are,
1. John the Baptist, the son of Zacharias the priest and
Elisabeth, the forerunner of Christ. By order of Her-
od Antipas he was cast into prison and afterwards be-
headed: Mt. iii. 1; xiv. 3, and often in the histor. bks.
of the N. T.; Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2, [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Macheerus ]. 2. John the apostle, the writer of the
Fourth Gospel, son of Zebedee and Salome, brother of
James the elder: Mt. iv. 21; x. 2 (3); Mk.i. 19; ix. 2,
38: Lk. v. 10; vi. 14; Acts i. 13, and often; Gal. ii. 9.
He is that disciple who (without mention by name) is
spoken of in the Fourth Gospel as esp. dear to Jesus (Jn.
xiii. 23; xix. 26; xxi. 7, 20), and acc. to the traditional
opinion is the author of the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 1, 4, 9;
xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii.8. In the latter part of his life he had
charge of the churches in Asia Minor, and died there at a
very advanced age. That he never came into Asia Minor,
but died in Palestine somewhat in years, the following
writers among others have attempted to prove, though by
considerations far from satisfactory: Liitzelberger, Die
kirchl. Tradition tib. d. Ap. Johannes u. s. Schriften.
Lpz. 1840; Keim, i. p. 161 sqq. [ Eng. trans. i. 218 sqq.];
Holtzmann in Schenkel iii. p. 332 sqq.; Scholten, Der
Ap. Johannes in Kleinasien. Aus. d. Holliind. deutsch v.
Spiegel. Berl. 1872. On the other side ef., besides oth-
ers, Grimm in Erschu. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol.
xxii. p. 6 sqq.; Stedtz, Die Tradition iib. die Wirksam-
keit des Joh. in Ephesus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit.
for 1868, 3d Heft; Krenkel, Der Apost. Johannes. Berl.
1868; Hilgenfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1872, p. 372 sqq., and for 1877, p. 508 sqq.; [also Einl. in
d. N. T. p. 394 sqq.]; Luthardt, Der johann. Ursprung
des 4ten Evang. (Lpz. 1874) p. 93 sqq. [ Eng. trans. p. 115
sqq-; Godet, Commentaire ete. 3d ed. vol. i. Intr. 1. i. § iv.
p- 57 sqq.; Bleek, Einl. ind. N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 167
sqq-; Fisher, The Beginnings of Christianity, p. 327
sqq:]- 3. the father of the apostle Peter: Tdf. in
Jn. i. 42 (43) and xxi. 15 sqq. (in both pass. R G’Iwva, L
Tr WH "Iwavov) [see Iwvas, 2]. 4. a certain man
€k yevous apxvepatixod, a member of the Sanhedrin [cef.
apxtepevs, 2]: Acts iv. 6. 5. John surnamed Mark,
the companion of Barnabas and Paul: Acts xii. 12, 25;
xiii. 5,13; xv. 37, [Tr everywh. with one vy; so WH exe.
in xiii. 5]; see Mdpkos. 6. John, ace. to the testi-
mony of Papias in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39 [ef. Westcott, Canon,
5th ed. p. 79], a disciple of Christ and afterwards a Chris-
tian presbyter in Asia Minor, whom not a few at the
present day, following the opinion of Dionysius of Alex-
andria [in Euseb. h.e. 7, 25] regard as the author of the
Apocalypse, and accordingly esteem him as an eminent
310
‘Iwons
prophet of the primitive Christians and as the person
referred to in Rey. i. 1,4, 9; xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii. 8. Full
articles respecting him may be found—by Grimm in
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. xxiv. p. 217
sq.; Gass in Herzog vi. p. 763 sqq.; Holtzmann in Schen-
kel iii. p. 352 sq.; [Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog. iii
398 sqq.; ef. C. L. Leimbach, Das Papiasfragment (Gotha,
1875), esp. p. 114 sqq. ].
"148, 6, indecl., (3/8 i.e. harassed, afflicted [but ques-
tioned ; see Gesenius, Lex. (8th ed., by Miihlau and Volck)
s. v.]), Job, the man commended in the didactic poem
which bears his name in the canon of the O. T. (cf. Ezek.
xiv. 14, 20) for his piety, and his constancy and fortitude
in the endurance of trials: Jas. v. 11.*
*TwBnS, 6, indecl., Jobed: Mt. i. 5 and Lk. iii. 32 in L
T Tr (WH; (yet WH in Lk. Lc. -87A)] for R G 978,
Quiver
(’IwBHA, see the preceding word. ]
*IwSé, 6, indecl., Joda: Lk. iii. 26 T Tr WH, for RG L
*Jovda, see "Iovdas, 2.*
"IAA, 6, indecl., (ON whose God is Jehovah, i. q- a
worshipper of God, [al. ‘Jehovah is God’]), Joel, the
eminent prophet who acc. to the opinion of very many
recent writers prophesied in the reign of Uzziah [ef.
B.D. s. v. Joel, 3]: Acts ii. 16.*
sivau and (sq T Tr WH) Iwvdy, 6. indecl., (see "lwdv-
yns), Jonan ean one of the ancestors of Christ:
Lk. iii. 30.*
"Iwvds, -a [B. 20 (17 sq.)], 6, (FV a dove), Jonah (or
Jonas) ; 1. Jonah, the O. T. prophet, a native of
Gath-hepher in the tribe of Zebulun. He lived during
the reign of Jeroboam II., king of Israel (2 K. xiv. 25).
The narrative of his miraculous experiences, constructed
for a didactic purpose, is given in the book which bears
his name [on the historic character of which cf. B.D.
(esp. Am. ed.) or McC. and S. s. v.; also Ladd, Doctr. of
Sacr. Script. i. 65 sqq.]: Mt. xii. 39-41; xvi. 4; Lk. xi.
29 sq. 32. 2. Jonah (or Jonas), a fisherman, father
of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17 [LT WH here Bapiwva,
see Bapwvas|; Jn. i. 42 (43) [RGLmreg. Tr mrg., and
RG in] xxi. 15, [16, 17], (see "Iwdvyns, 3).*
"Twpap, 6, indecl., (OVM i. e. whom Jehovah exalted),
Joram, the son and successor of Jehoshaphat on the
throne of Judah, fr. [c.] B. Cc. 891 to 884 (2 K. viii. 16
sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 2sqq.): Mt. i. 8.*
*Twpeip, 6, indecl., Jorim, one of the ancestors of Christ:
Lk. iii. 29.*
*Iwoapar, 6, indecl., (WDwWIT, i. e. Jehovah judges),
Jehoshaphat, king of Tada fr. [c.] B.c. 914 to 889 (1 K.
Xxll. 41 sqq.; 2 Chr. xvii—xx.): Mt. i. 8.*
[Iwo (A. V. Jose, incorrectly), see "Iwojs, init. |
"Iwo fs, gen. loon [RG in Lk. iii. 29 "Iwan (which A.
V. incorrectly takes as nom. Jose) ] and (L T Tr WH in
Mk. vi. 3; xv. 40,47) “Iwoqros (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p.
199; B.19 (17) sq.; W. § 10,1; [WH. App. p. 159*)),
6, Joses; 1. one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii.
29 ([see above]; L T Tr WH. Inaoi, q. v. 2). 2. the
own brother of Jesus: Mk. vi. 3, and RG in Mt. xiii.
*Ioond
55 (where L T Tr WH "Iwon®, q. v. 6); see "IdxwBos,
B: 3. the son of Mary, the sister of the mother of
Jesus [see Mapiap, 3]: Mt. xxvii. 56 (where T Tr mrg.
WH txt. "Ioond Ploojs and Iwonp seem to have been
diff. forms of one and the same name; cf. Renan in
the Journ. Asiat., 1864, ser. vi. T. iv. p. 536; Frankel,
Hodeget in Misch. p. 31 note; Béhl, Volksbibel u. s. w.
p- 15]); Mk. xv. 40, 47. 4. a Levite, surnamed
BapvaBas (q. v.): Acts iv. 36 (where LT Tr WH Io-
vi).*
*Iword, indecl., (in Joseph. [e. g.c. Ap. 1, 14, 16; 32,
3; 33, 5] “ldonmos), 6, (QI, fr. 0" to add, Gen. xxx.
23 sq. [ef. B. D. 8. v. Joseph]), Joseph ; 1. the pa-
triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob: Jn. iv. 5; Acts vii.
9,13 sq. 18; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; vd7 "Iwond, i. e. the tribe
of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or
Jonam], one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 30. 3.
the son of Judah [or Judas; better Joda] another an-
cestor of Jesus: Lk. iii. 26 (where Lmrg. T Tr WH Io-
onX, q: V-)- 4. the son of Mattathias, another of the
same: Lk. iii. 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the
811
Kabatpéw
mother of Jesus: Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 243; ii. 13,19; Lk. i,
27; ii. 4,16,33 RL, 43 RGLmrg.; iii. 23; iv. 22; Jn.
i.45 (46); vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord:
Mt. xiii. 55 LT Tr WH (for R G’Iwoas [q. v. 2]). a
Joseph of Arimathea, a member of the Sanhedrin, who
favored Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 57, 59; Mk. xv. 43, 45; Lk.
xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 38. 8. Joseph, surnamed Bapva-
Bas (q. v.): Acts iv. 36 LT Tr WH (for RG "Iwojjs [q.
v. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsabas [better Barsab-
bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23.
[See "Iwo7s, 3.]
*Iwonx, Josech, see Iwang, 3.
*Iwoctas (LT Tr WH "Iwoeias [see WH. App. p. 155;
S. V. et, 1]), -ov, 6, (WW i. e. whom ‘Jehovah heals’),
Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the
worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one
years was slain in battle c. B. c. 611 (2 K. xxii. sq.; 2
Chr. xxxiv. sq.): Mt. i. 10 sq.*
idra, 7d, iota [A. V. jot], the Hebr. letter °, the small-
est of them all; hence equiv. to the minutest part: Mt.
WbSiPCE Te]*
K
Kayo [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the kéye
ate. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Vig. p. 526; W. § 5,4a.;
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4; cf. 1, ¢)], (by crasis fr.
xa éy [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi.15 T; Lk. ii. 48 WH;
xvi. 9 TTr WH; Acts x. 26TTr WH; xxvi. 29 WH,
ete.; cf. B.10; W.§ 5,3; WH. App. p. 145; esp. Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for the first time in Hom. Il. 21, 108
[var., cf. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Mere. 17, 3); cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. p. 619]), dat. xdyot [kai éuoi Acts x. 28 RG],
ace. Kaye 5 1. and I, the cai simply connecting: Jn.
x. 27, ete.; and I (together), Lk. ii. 48; distributively,
and I (in like manner): Jn. vi. 56; xv. 43 xvil. 26; and
I (on the other hand), Jas. ii. 18 (kayo epya éyo); Lk.
xxii. 29; Acts xxii. 19; and I (indeed), Jn. vi. 57; Ro.
xi. 3. at the beginning of a period, Lat. et equidem, and
I (to speak of myself): Jn. i. 31, 33 sq.; xii. 32; 1 Co. ii.
1; with the «ai used consecutively (see under kat, I. 2 d.),
ef. our and so: Mt. xi. 28; Jn. xx.15; Acts xxii. 13; 2
Co. vi. 17; kdyo... Kal, both...and: kaye oidare, cal
oldare 7Oev eii, both me (my person) and my origin,
Jn. vii. 28. 2. Talso; I as well; I likewise; in like
manner I: so that one puts himself on a level with
others. Mt. ii. 8; x.32; Lk. xi.9; xvi.9; Jn. xv. 9, [10
Tdf.]; xvii.18; Acts x. 26; 1Co.vii.40; 2Co. xi. 16,
18, 21 sq.; in the second member of a comparison, after
Srotos, ws, Kabw@s, Acts xxvi. 29; 1 Co. vii. 8; xi.1; Rev.
ii. 28 (27); see under «ai, II.1.a. with a suppression of
the mention of those with whom the writer compares
himself: Eph. i. 15 (as well as others); 1 Th. iii. 5 (as
well as my comparions at Athens; ef. Liinemann ad
loc.). «apot: Lk.i.3; Acts viii.19; 1 Co. xv. 8; kdpe:
1 Co. xvi.4. i.g. J in turn: Mt. xvi. 18; xxi. 24; Lk.
xx. 3; Gal. vi. 14. 3. even I, this selfsame I, the kat
pointing the statement: Ro. iii. 7; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p.
835.
Ka0d, adv. for xa® a, according as, just as: Mt. xxvii.
10. (Xen., Polyb., Diod., al.; O. T. Apocr.; Sept. for
wd, Gen. vii. 9, 16, etc., and for 5, Gen. xix. 8; Ex.
xii. 35, etc.) *
Ka0-alpecis, -ews, 7, (kabaipew, q. V.), a pulling down,
destruction, demolition: éxvpwpdrov, [A. V. of strong-
holds], 2 Co. x. 4 (rév retyav, Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 15; 5, 1,
35; Polyb. 23, 7,6; Diod. excerpt. leg. 13; destructio
murorum, Suet. Galba 12); eis oixod.... kadaipeow tpar,
for building up (increasing) not for casting down (the
extinction of) the godly, upright, blessed life you lead in
fellowship with Christ (see oikodoun, 1): 2 Co. x. 8; xiii.
10. [From Thue. down. ] *
Ka0-arpéw, -@; fut. cadehd (Lk. xii. 18 [see adaipéa,
init.]); 2 aor. xaOeihov, (fr. obsol. €Aw); pres. pass. Ka-
Oapoipar; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for in, to cause ta
go down; O17, D2, 7195 1. to take down: with-
Kkabaipw
out the notion of violence, twvd, to detach from the cross
one crucified, Mk. xv. 36, 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (Polyb. 1, 86,
6; Philo in Flace. § 10); twa dard tov EvAov, Acts xiii.
29 (Sept. Josh. viii. 29; x. 27); with the use of force, to
throw down, cast down: twa amd Opovov, Lk. i. 52. 2.
to pull down, demolish: ras amoOnkas, opp. to oixodopeiv,
Lk. xii. 18; Aoysopovs, the (subtle) reasonings (of op-
ponents) likened to fortresses, i. q. to refute, 2 Co. x. 4
(5); to destroy, €6vn, Acts xiii. 19 (Jer. xxiv. 6; Thue. 1,
4; Ael. v. h. 2, 25); ryv peyadevdrnta twos, Acts xix. 27,
where if preference is given (with L T Tr WH) to the
reading ts peyadevdtnTos avrijs, it must be taken as a
partitive gen. somewhat of her magnificence; cf. B. 158
(138) note [so Meyer; cf. Xen. Hell. 4, 4,13. Al. trans-
late that she should even be deposed from her magnifi-
cence; cf. W. § 30, 6; B. § 132, 5].*
kaQalpw; pf. pass. ptcp. xexadappyevos; (xaGapéds); to
cleanse, prop. from filth, impurity, etc.; trees and vines
(from useless shoots), fo prune, Jn. xv. 2 (S€vSpa . . « brr0-
reuvdueva xabaipera, Philo de agric. § 2 [cf. de somniis
ii. § 9 mid.]); metaph. from guilt, to expiate: pass. Heb.
x. 2 RG [see xaOapifa, init.], (Jer. xiii. 27; and so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down). [Comp.: 81a-, ék-kadaipa. |*
KaOdtep, (kad amep), according as, just as, even as, [ (“ka-
6a marking the comparison, wép (akin to the prep. zrepi)
the latitude of the application”): Ro. ix. 13 WH txt.; x.
15 WH txt.; also] xi. 8 and 1 Co. x.10in T Tr WH; 2 Co.
iii. 13, 18 [here WH mre. cadoonep]; 1'Th.ii.11; xada-
mep kai, Ro. iv. 6; 2 Co.i. 14; 1 Th. iii. 6,12; iv.5; Heb.
iv. 2,and RG in Heb. v.43; xaOamep foll. by ovrw (or
ovtws), Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11. ({From
Arstph. down]; Sept. for Ww, Ex. vii. 6, 10.)*
kaQ-derrw: 1 aor. Kabaya; 1. to fit or fasten to,
bind on. 2. to lay hold of, fasten on (hostilely) :
Tis Xetpos avtod, Acts xxviii. 3 [ef. W. 257 (241)]; roo
tpaxndov, Epict. diss. 3, 20,10. [In Mid. fr. Hom. down,
(w. gen. fr. Hdt. on).]*
kaSapltw (Hellenistic for cafaipw, which classic writ.
use); Attic fut. (ef. B. 37 (32); W.§ 13, 1¢.; WH. App.
p- 163] xaOaprd (Heb. ix. 14); 1 aor. éxaOdpica [see be-
low]; pres. pass. ka@apifowat; 1 aor. pass. éxabapicOnv;
pf. pass. ptep. xexa@apiopevos (Heb. x. 2 TTrWH; on
the forms éxaOe pion, 'T WH in Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42,
[exoOé poev, Tr in Acts x.15; xi. 9] and Kxexae puopevos
Lchm. in Heb. x. 2, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 82; WH. App.
p- 150]; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 118; Delitzsch on
Heb. x. 2; Kriiger Pt. ii. § 2, 2,6 p.4; [B. 29 (25sq.); W.
43]); (kadapés); Sept. mostly for 170 ; 1. to make
clean, to cleanse; a. from physical stains and dirt:
e.g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 26]; Lk. xi. 39; food,
Mk. vii. 19; tuvd, a leper, to cleanse by curing, Mt. viii. 2
sq.; x.8; xi.5; Mk.i. 40-42; Lk. iv. 27; v. 12sq.; vii. 22;
xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv. 8) ; to remove by cleansing : 4. Aémpa
exabapioOn, Mt. viii. 3 (kaOapteis rd aia Td dvairiov &&
"Iopand, Deut. xix.13; éxabapice riv rept raira ovvnOecav,
the custom of marrying heathen women, Joseph. antt. 11,
5,4; xaOaipew aiva, Hom. I]. 16, 667; cf. exxaOaipw). b.
in amoral sense; a. to free from the defilement of sin
312
Kalapos
and from faults; to purify from wickedness: éavrév amd
podvepov capkds, 2 Co. vii. 1; 7H miorer tas Kapdias, Acts
Xv. 9 (kapdiav amd dpaprias, Sir. xxviii. 10); ras xetpas,
to abstain in future from wrong-doing, Jas. iv.8. B. to
Sree from the guilt of sin, to purify: twa amd maons dpap-
tias, 1 Jn.i. 7; [r. d. a. ddcxias, ibid. 9]; ry cvveidSnow ard
vexpav épywv, Heb. ix. 14; ryv éxxAnoiay tO Aovtp@ rod
vdaros (instrumental dat.), Eph. v. 26; Aadv éaura, Tit.
ii. 14. -y. to consecrate by cleansing or purifying: ri &
mu, dat. of instr. [W. 388 (363)], Heb. ix. 22; i.q. to
consecrate, dedicate, ri tu (dat. of instr.), ibid. 23. 2.
to pronounce clean in a levitical sense: Acts x.15; xi. 9,
(Lev. xiii. 13, 17, 23, 28). [Comp.: dca-caOapitw. | *
KaSapirpds, -ov, 6, (kabapiCw), acleansing, purification ;
aritual purgation or washing, (Vulg. purgatio, purificatio,
emundatio): used with a gen. of the subj., rdv Iovdaiav,
of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals,
Jn. ii. 6; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of
moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25; with a gen. of the obj., and
that a person, — of the levitical purification of women
after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22; and of lepers, Mk. i. 44; Lk.
v.14; with a gen. of the thing, duapriéy or duaprnud-
tov, a cleansing from the quilt of sins (see cabapite, 1 b.
B.): wrought now by baptism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex-
piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on which cf. Kurtz,
Com. p. 70; (Ex. xxx. 10; tis duaprias pov, Job vii. 21;
of an atonement, Leian. asin. 22).*
KaSapés, -d, -dv; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng.
chaste, chasten; Curtius § 26; Vaniéek p. 177]; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. mostly for Wn ; clean, pure, (free from the
admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter-
ates, corrupts) ; a. physically: Mt. xxiii. 26; xxvii.
59; Heb. x. 22 (23); Rev. xv. 6; xix. 8, 14, and Ree. in
xxii. 1; ypuvotov, purified by fire, Rev. xxi. 18, 21; ina
similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted
to bear fruit, Jn. xv.3; 6 NeAoup. . . . KaOapds dAos (where
the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows:
‘he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not
need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from
every several fault into which he may fall through inter-
course with the unrenewed world’), Jn. xiii. 10. b.
in a levitical sense; clean, i. e. the use of which is not for-
bidden, imparts no uncleanness: mdvra xaOapd, Ro. xiv.
20% Dit. 1.15. ce. ethically; free from corrupt desire,
JSrom sin and guilt: Tit.i.15; tpets xadapoi, Jn. xiii. 10,
[11]; of x. rH Kapdia (as respects heart [W. § 31, 6 a.]),
Mt. v. 8 (xadapds xeipas, Hat. 1, 35; card 75 oGpa kK. Kata
THY Woxnv, Plat. Crat. p.405 b.);.free from every admiz-
ture of what is false, sincere, éx xabapas xapdias, 1 Tim. i.
5; 2 Tim. ii. 22, and R Gin 1 Pet. i. 225 év xaOapa ovver-
dnoe, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3; genuine (joined with dui-
avtos) Opynokeia, Jas. i. 27; blameless, innocent, Acts xviii.
6. Hebraistically with the addition of dé twos, pure
from, i. e. unstained with the guilt of, any thing [W. § 30,
6a.; B.157 (137) sq.]: amo r. aiparos, Acts xx. 26; Sus.
46 Alex., cf. Gen. xxiv. 8; Tob. iii. 14; xaOapas éyew tas
x€ipas amd Tov pdvov, Joseph. antt. 4, 8,16; in class. Grk.
with a simple gen., as dédvov, Plat. legg. 9 p. 864 e.; ef.
xabaporns
Passow s. v. p. 1528"; [L.andS. s. v.3]; Kiihner § 421,
4 ii. p. 344. da. in a levitical and ethical sense: mavra
xabapa piv, Lk. xi. 41, on which see éveyu. [SYN. see
ciAcxpwns; cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]*
KaSapotys, -nTos, 7, (ka@apds), cleanness, purity; in a
jevitical sense, reds, Heb. ix. 13. (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 22;
Plato, al.) *
xa0-€5pa, -as, 7, (kara and édpa), a chair, seat: Mt. xxi.
12; Mk. xi. 15, (Sir. xii. 12; Hdian. 2, 3, 17 [7 ed.
Bekk.]); of the exalted seat occupied by men of eminent
rank or influence, as teachers and judges: émi ris Mav-
céws xabedpas exabicay, sit on the seat which Moses for-
merly occupied, i. e. bear themselves as Moses’ succes- |
sors in explaining and defending his law, Mt. xxiii. 2.
(Sept. for wr and naw. [Xen., Aristot., al.]) *
xa0-éfopar; impf. éxadeCsunv; [fr. Hom. down]; to sit
down, seat one’s self, sit: Jn. xx. 12; foll. by év with dat.
of place, Mt. xxvi. 55; Lk. ii. 46; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15;
foll. by emi with gen., Acts xx. 9 L T Tr WH; by ei with
dat., Jn. iv. 6; éxet, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf.; [od where, Acts ii. 2
Lehm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56
(49); 60 (52). Comp.: mapa-cabéfopat. |*
xaQ-cis, more correctly xa6’ eis, see eis, 4 c. p. 187%.
xa0-cEfjs, (kara and €&7s, q. v.), adv., one afier another,
successively, in order: Lk. i. 3; Acts xi. 4; xviil. 23; of
xae&. those that follow after, Acts iii. 24 [cf. W. 633
(588) ]; évr@ xaé. sc. xpdv@ [R. V. soon afterwards], Lk.
viii. 1. (Ael. v. h. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier
Grk. €&js and épeEns are more usual.) *
xa0-<vS ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ékabevdor ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. mostly for 13w ; 1. to fall asieep, to drop off
to sleep: Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop.: Mt.
viii. 24 ; ix. 24 [on this and its paral. cf. B. D. Am. ed. p.
1198°]; xiii. 25; xxvi. 40, 43,45; Mk. iv. 27, 38; v.39;
xiii. 36; xiv. 37, 40sq.; Lk. viii. 52; xxii. 46; 1 Th. v.
a b. euphemistically, to be dead: 1 Th. v.10; (Ps.
Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 6; Dan. xii. 2). ¢. metaph. fo
yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one’s salvation :
Boke vy. t2 5° 8 Thove6s*
Kabyynris, -ov, 6, (xaOnyeouat to go before, lead); — a.
prop. a guide: Numen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a
master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8 RG,10. (Dion. H. jud. de
Thue. 3,4; several times in Plut. [cef. Wetst. on Mt. Lc.])*
xaQ-fkw; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph. down]; 1. to come
down. 2. to come to, reach to; impers. kaOnxet, it is
becoming, it is fit (cf. Germ. zukommen), Ezek. xxi. 27;
ov kaOnKev (Rec. xabjxov), foll. by the ace. with inf., Acts
xxii. 22 [W. 282 (265); B. 217 (187)]; ra pi KaOjKovra,
things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, shameful, Ro. i. 28; 2
Mace. vi. 4. Cf. dvixw.*
Kd0-npar, 2 pers. sing. cady a later form for ka@yoa
(Acts xxiii. 3), impv. xdOov for xdOnao [yet cf. Kiihner
as below] (cf. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 359; Kriiger § 38, 6 sq.
i. p. 147; Kiihner § 301 i. p. 671; W.§ 14,4; [B. 49
(42)]), [subjune. 2 pers. plur. ea@no6e, Lk. xxii. 30 Tr
mrg.; but WH txt. cadjode; see Veitch s. v.3 Kriiger
$38, 6, 1 (cf. naditw), inf. cabjcba, ptcp. kaOnuevos]; impf
exaOnuny; and once the rare [cf. Veitch p. 347] fut. xa67-
313
Kabila
copa, Lk. xxii. 30 T Tr txt. WH mre. [so WH in Mt. xix.
28 also; cf. xaOi¢w, fin.]; (jpar); a verb of which only
the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [ef. B. 60
(52) ]; Sept. for aw; 1. to sit down, seat one’s self:
foll. by év w. dat. of place [ef. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1;
Lk. xxii. 55 [here T Tr WH peoos]; «cis, Mk. xiii. 3 [B.
§ 147,16]; werd w. gen. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 583 xdOov ex
deEtav pov, i. e. be a partner of my power, Mt. xxii. 44;
Mk. xii. 36 [Tr txt. WH mrg. ca@tcov]; Lk. xx. 42; Acts
ii. 34; Heb. i. 13 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); «aOov Sd trd with
acc., Jas. ii. 3. mapa w. ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 1; émdvo
w. gen. of place, Mt. xxviii. 2; with éxet, Mt. xv. 29; Jn.
vi. 3 [Tdf. éxabe{ero]; the place to be supplied fr. the
context, Mt. xiii. 2. 2. to sit, be seated, of a place
occupied : foll. by év with dat. of place [W. as under 1],
Mt. xi. 16; xxvi.69; év 77 Se&a +. Oeod, Col. iii. 1; ev
trois de&ois, Mk. xvi. 5; emt rwos, Mt. xxiv. 33 xxvii. 19;
[Acts xx.9 RG]; émi rod Apovov [but also, esp. in the
crit. edd., with the dat. and the ace. (see below); cf.
Alford on the foll. pass.], Rev. iv. 2 ete.; ris vepéAns [or
w. the acc.], Rev. xiv. 15, and in other exx.; émi rut,
Acts iii. 10; émi re [cf. B. 338 (291) ], Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii.
14; Lk. v. 27; Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2[R dat. (as
in foll.)] 4 sq.; xi. 16; xvil. 3; xix.11; mapa rv ddov,
Mt. xx. 30; Mk. x.46; Lk. xviii. 35; mpds 16 das, Lk.
xxii. 56; émavw twos, Mt. xxiii. 22; Rev. vi. 8, epi twa,
Mk. iii. 32, 34; amévavri tivos, Mt. xxvii. 61; é&x deécav
twos, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; Lk. xxii. 69; éxe?, Mk.
ii. 6; ov, where, Acts ii. 2 [Li cadeCopevor]; Rev. xvii. 15;
without specification of place, Mk. v.15; Lk. v.17; viii.
35; Jn. ii. 14; ix.8; 1 Co. xiv. 30. «anwar as descrip-
tive of a certain state or condition is used of those who
sit in discharging their office, as judges, na6n kpiver, Acts
xxiii. 3; of a queen, i. q. to occupy the throne, to reign
[A. V. I sit a queen], Rev. xviii. 7; of money-changers,
Jn.ii.14; of mourners and penitents: év odxxe, clothed
in sackcloth, ¢v omodo, covered with ashes, Lk. x. 13;
of those who, enveloped in darkness, cannot walk about,
Mt. iv. 16; Lk.i. 79 (Is. xlii. 7); of a lame man, Acts xiv.
8. i.q.to have a fixed abode, to dwell: emi mpocwmov ths
ys, Lk. xxi. 35; Rev. xiv. 6 (where Rec. xarocxotvras) ;
éxi O@povov, Rey. xx.11 GT {[WHmrg.; but see above];
ev ‘Iepovoadnp, Neh. xi. 6; [év dper Sapapeias, Sir. |. 26,
Comp. : ovy-«dOnpat]}.
Ka0npepay, i. q. Ka” nuépar, see jnuepa, 2 p. 278°.
KaOnpepivds, -7, -ov, (fr. ca’ quepav), daily: Acts vi. 1.
(Judith xii. 15; Theophr., Athen., Plut., Alciphr. epp.
i. 5; Joseph. antt. 3, 10, 1; [11, 7,1]; Polyaen. 4, 2,
10.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53 [(yet see L. and S.); W.
25 (25 sq.)]*
Ka0-itw; fut. cabiow [B. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. exaéioa (impv.
2 sing. xdOicov once, Mk. xii. 36 Tr txt. WH mrg.); pf.
cexaécxa (Mk. xi. 2 [not WH Trmrg.; Heb. xii. 2 LT
Tr WH; a late form, see Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. mid.
subjune. 2 pers. plur. ca@ionade (Lk. xxii. 30 Rec.) ; fut.
mid. xadicouat; fr. Hom. down; [cf. B. 60 (52)]; 1.
trans. to make to sit down (kata; q. Vv. III. 1), to set, ap
point; Sept. for DWAIN: twa ewi Opdvov [L T Tr WH ros
cabinut
Opévov], to confer the kingdom upon one, Acts ii. 30; ria
ev de&a avtod, Eph. i. 20; twa, to appoint one to act as
judge, 1 Co. vi. 4 (8:xaorqv, Plat. legg. 9 p. 873 e.; Polyb.
40, 5,3; ovvedpov kptra@v, Joseph. antt. 20, 9, 1). 2:
intrans. ; Sept. for 20; a. tosit down: univ., Mt.v. 1;
xiii. 48; Mk. ix. 35; Lk. iv. 20; v. 3; xiv. 28, 31; xvi. 6;
Jn. viii. 2; Acts xiii. 14; xvi. 13; witha telic inf. 1 Co. x.
7; with specification of the place or seat: ev de&a rivos,
Heb. i. 3; viii. 1; x. 12; xii. 2; emi run, Mk. xi. 7 [Rec.];
eis Tov vady, 2 Th. ii. 4 [B. § 147,16; W.415 (386) ]; emi
with ace. [ef. B. 338 (290) ], Rev. xx. 4; Jn. xii. 14; Mk.
xi. 2,(7 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xix. 30; [add Acts ii. 3, see
B. § 129,17; W.516 (481) ]; émi rod Bnyaros, of a judge,
Jn. xix. 13; Acts xii. 21; xxv. 6,17; xarévavri [or ame-
vavti Tr ete.] ruvos, Mk. xii. 41; with adverbs of place,
Mk. xiv. 32; Mt. xxvi. 36. b. to sit: [absol. (of a
dead man restored to life) éka@icev sat, sat up, Lk. vii. 15
Lmrg. Wii mrg.]; év r@ Opdve, Rev. iii. 21; emi w. gen.
of the seat, Mt. xxiii. 2; xxv. 31; é« defo x. €& evov.,
Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x.37,40. i. q. to have fixed one’s
abode, i. e. to sojourn [ef. our settle, settle down], Acts
xviii. 11; foll. by év with dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 49 [here
xi. 25]). Mid. [Pass.? ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
336 sq.] to sit: émi Apdvev, Lk. xxii. 30 [RGL: see xa-
Onpar|; éxt Opdvovs, Mt. xix. 23 [WH xaOjoecbe; see
KuOnua. COMP.: ava-, émt-, mapa-, Tept-, cvy-Kabi¢oa. |
ka0-inpt: 1 aor. kaOjxa; [fr. Hom. on]; to send down,
let down: eis, Lk. v. 19; dca w. gen. of place, ibid. and
Acts ix. 25; pres. pass. ptcp. kaOvenevos let down, ent ts
yns, Acts x. 115; &« rov ovpavov, Acts xi. 5.*
kab-iornpe (also cadioraw, whence the ptcp. cabiorav-
tes Acts xvii. 15 RG; and kaéicravw, whence katora-
vovtes ibid. LT Tr WH; see torn, init.) ; fut. catarrynoe ;
1 aor. xatéatnoa; Pass., pres. kadiorapat; 1 aor. kateord-
Onv; 1 fut. karacrabjcopa; Sept. for Dwi, Opn, TP,
ISIN, VY, [N33 (prop. to set down, put down), to set,
place, put: a. Tiva emi Twos, to set one over a thing
(in charge of it), Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42;
Acts vi. 3; also émi rum, Mt. xxiv. 47; Lk. xii. 44; ési 71,
Heb. ii. 7 Rec. fr. Ps. viii. 7. b. rivd, to appoint one
to administer an office (cf. Germ. bestellen): mpeaBure-
pous, Tit. i.5; twa eis 76 with inf., to appoint to do
something, Heb. viii. 3; ra mpés r. Oedv to conduct the
worship of God, Heb. v. 1; foll. by wa, ibid.; red with
a pred. acc. indicating the office to be administered [to
make one so and so; cf. W. § 32, 4b.; B.§ 131, 7], (so
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), Lk. xii. 14; Acts
vii. 10, 27, 35; Heb. vii. 28. c. to set down as, con-
stitute (Lat. sisto), i. q. to declare, show to be: pass. with
dpaptodds, dixacos, Ro. v. 19 [ef. Prof. T. Dwight in New
Englander for 1867, p. 590 sqq-; Dietzsch, Adam u.
Christus (Bonn, 1871) p. 188]. d. to constitute (Lat.
sisto) 1. q. to render, make, cause to be: twa otk apyér,
ovd€ dkaprov, i.e. (by litotes) laborious and fruitful, 2
Pet. i. 8. e. to conduct or bring to a certain place:
rivd, Acts xvii. 15 (2 Chr. xxviii. 15 for 8°27; Josh. vi.
23; 18. v.3; Hom. Od. 13, 274; Xen. an. 4, 8, 8 and in
314
Kalas
other prof. auth.). f. Mid. to show or exhibit one’s
self; come forward as: with a pred. nom., Jas. iv. 4; 9
. 1) omdovoa, Jas. iii. 6. [COMP.: dytt-, dmo-
kadiatn. | *
kao (i. e. ad’ 6), adv., [fr. Lys. and Plat. down], ac
cording to what, i. e. 1. as: Ro. viii. 26. 2.
according as; in so far as, so far forth as: 1 Pet. iv. 18
(Rec.*4 kaOws) ; 2 Co. viii. 12 [W. 307 (288); cf. B.§ 139,
30].*
KaboduKés, -7, -dv, (kaddAou, q. V.), general, universal (oc-
casionally in prof. auth. fr. [Aristot. and] Polyb. down,
as xa. kal xown ioropia, Polyb. 8, 4, 11; often in eccl.
writ.; the title 4 kaodcky éxxAnoia first in Ignat. ad
Smyrn. c. 8 and often in Polyc. martyr. [see ed. (Gebh.
Harn.) Zahn, p. 133 note]; cf. ca@odky avacraors, [Justin
e. Tryph. 81 sub fin.]; Theoph. ad Autol. []. i. § 13]
p- 40 ed. Otto) ; emarodai KaOoXtKai, or simply KaOoAtkat,
in the title of the Epp. of James, Peter, John, and Jude
(RGL; cf. trav érra Aeyopevav kabodikar SC. émirToAay,
Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most prob. because they seemed to
be written not to any one church alone, but to all the
churches. [Cf. Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Catholic. ] *
KaQddov (i. e. ka@ ddov [ “as it is written in auth. before
Aristot.” (L. and §.)]), adv., wholly, entirely, at all:
Acts iv. 18. ([Ex. xxii. 11]; Ezek. xiii. 3, 22; Am. iii.
3,4; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot. and sqq.) *
ka0-orA(tw: pf. pass. ptep. cabwmAropevos ; to arm [ fully
(cf. «ard, III. 1 fin.)], furnish with arms: Lk. xi. 21.
(Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
Kal-opde, -a: 1. to look down, see from above,
view from on high, (Hom., Hat., Xen., Plat., al.). 2:
to see thoroughly [cf. xara, III. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un-
derstand (Germ. erschauen): pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. xa-
Oopara, Ro. i. 20 (3 Mace. iii. 11, and often in class.
Grk.). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61.*
Kaori (i. e. ka@ 6 1), according to what, i. e. as
so far as, according as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18,
19 (36), 5; for \ws2, Ex. i. 12, 17). 2. because
that, because, [ cf. W.§ 58, 8): Lkat..7 5) xian9s Acts a:
24, and LT Tr WH (for Ree. d:drt) in Acts xvii. 31,
(Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4; Polyb. 18, 21 (88), 6). 3. as,
just as: Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1; Judith ii. 13,15; x. 9, and
often in Thue. et al.*
Ka0ds (i. e. kad’ Ss), a particle found occasionally in
prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic xa@a and cad,
but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ;
cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 74 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 425 sq.; [W. 26 (25)]; 1. according as, just as,
even as: in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31;
1 Jn. ii. 27; foll. by o¥rws in the second member [ef. W.
§ 53, 5], Lk. xi. 30; xvii. 26; Jn. ili. 14; DiC on Drax
Col. iii. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 6; foll. by cai also, Jn. xv.9; xvii. 18;
xx. 21; 1Jn. ii. 18; iv.17; 1Co.xv.49; itis annexed to
preceding words after the demonstrative obras, Lk. xxiv.
24; with ovras unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6; xxviii.6; Mk.
xvi. 7; Lk. i. 2, 55, 70; xi-1; Jn. i. 23; v. 28; Acts x.
47 [here LT Tr WH oss]; xv. 8; Ro.i.13; xv. 7; 1 Co.
viii. 2; x. 6; 2Co. i. 14; ix. 3; xi. 12; Eph. iv. 17, and
yAoooa..
KadworTrep
often; xadae diSdoxw, agreeably to my method of teach-
ing, 1 Co. iv. 17; xabas yéypamra, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix.
13; Acts vii 42; xv. 15; Ro. i. 17, and often in Paul ;
the apodosis wanting, and to be gathered fr. the con-
text: xaos mapexddeod oe... €v TigTeL, SC. OUT@ Kal VOY
mapakahe, 1 Tim. i. 3, ef. W.570 (530); [B. 386 (331) ];
ipéaro aireiobat (SC. oUTw movety avrois), KaOws KrA. Mk.
xv. 8 [B. § 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 sq.)]; in com-
parison by contrary we find the negligent use: dyan@pev
adAndous, ov Kabas Kdiy krd. 1 In. iii. 11 sq., cf. De
Wette ad loc. and W. 6283 (579); obrdés earw 6 aptos
.. ov kaOas etc., not such as they ate etc., Jn. vi. 58.
with the verb eiui, equiv. to Lat. qualis, such as, 1 Jn.
iii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth).
2. according as i.e. in proportion as, in the degree that:
Mk. iv. 33; Acts vii. 17 (cf. Meyer ad loc.); xi. 29; 1
Capa 115 185) 1 Bet:iv. 10. 3. since, seeing that,
agreeably to the fact that, (ef. W. § 53, 8; 448 (417)]:
Jn. xvii. 2; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al. regard «a0. as cor-
responsive rather than causal or explanatory]; 1 Co.
6m veg pk: 1.45 Philhi..7. 4. it is put for the
simple as, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. dise.,
Acts xv. 14; it serves to add an epexegesis, 3 Jn. 3
(to gov 77 adnOeia). b. of time, when, after that, (cf.
Lat. ut): 2 Mace.i. 31; [Neh. v.6]; here many bring in
Acts vii. 17; but see 2 above.
Kabao-rep, [Tr xabas rep], just as, exactly as: Heb. v.
4 T Tr WH [also 2Co. iii. 18 WH mrg.]. (Himer., Psell.,
Tzetz.) *
kat, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the par-
ticles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B.
361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the
difference between it and ré see s. v. ré ad init. ]
I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. e/,
atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words
or terms: a. univ., as of Papicaiot kal Saddovkaior,
Mt. xvi. 1; 6 Beds cat marnp, he who is God and Father
(see beds, 3); €v kapdia kady kat ayaOy, Lk. viii. 15; modv-
fep@s kat moAutpéras, Heb. i. 1; it is repeated before
single terms, to each of which its own force and weight
is thus given: 7 vioecia kali 7 dé£a Kal ai SiabjKat Kab 7
vouobecia Kat 7) Aarpeia kai ai emayyeAia, Ro. ix. 4; dyia
kai dckaia kai ayadn, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk.
xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10;
Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it
connects numerals; and so that (contrary to the more
com. usage) the greater number precedes: Séxa k. dxTa,
Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WH om.
kai; Tdf. dexcaoxra], 16; teccapdkovra x. &&, Jn. ii. 20;
add, Jn. v.5 GT; Acts xiii. 20; cf. W. § 37, 4; [Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal.i.18; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co.
xiii. 1 (cf. Deut. xix. 15 Sept.) éi orduaros S00 papriper
kat Tpr@v (in Mt. xviii. 16 rp. cf. W. 440 (410) note) at
the mouth of two witnesses and (should there be so many)
of three; a similar use of kat, to lend a certain indefinite-
ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with other
than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 onepov Kat
(R*G; but L TTr WH 4) avpiov; cf. Kiihner § 521, 2;
315
Kat
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 614%]. c. it joins to par-
titive words the general notion; so that it is equiv.
to and in general, and in a word, in short: 6 UWeérpos k. ot
dréatokan, Acts v. 29; of dpxvepeis [kal of mperBirepor
nec. | kal TO ovvedpiov Odor, Mt. xxvi. p)e Kal dikat@pace
capkés, Heb. ix. 10 Rec. Tr br. WH mrg.; kai emi rév
*IopaiA rod Gov, Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ.; cf.
W. 437 sq. (407); 520 sq. (485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400
(343)]; with ré preceding, 7 re... avrod dvvayis kal
Gevdtns, Ro. i. 20 [see ré, 2 a.]; and, on the other hand,
it joins to a general idea something particular, which is
already comprised indeed in that general notion but by
this form of expression is brought out more emphatically
(which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls ouvkaradéyew 7 pépos
TO OAM); SOthat itis equiv. to and especially [cf.W. u. s.]:
Ta mavra kal Ta Ta Saiporfonevar, Mt. viii. 33; tots pa-
Onrais avtovd x. TO Tetpw, Mk. xvi. 7; ai powvai aitar x.
Trav apxiepewy, Lk. xxiii. 23 [RG]; ctv yuvacéi kai Mapiap,
Acts i. 14; év “Iovda x. “Iepovoadnp, 1 Mace. ii. 6; mas
*Tovda x. ‘Iepovoadnp, 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, cf. xxxii. 33; often
so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and
sentences; a. univ., as dvaxaaptet Thy GAova adtod
k. ouvaéet Tov oitov KTA. Mt. ili. 12; eiondOov... Kai edi-
dackov, Acts v. 21; and in innumerable other exx. b.
In accordance with the simplicity of the ancient popular
speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement
to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul-
tivated language expresses either by more exact parti-
cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con-
struction (cf. W. § 60,3; B. 288 (248) sqq.; 361 (310)
sq-): e. g. that very freq. formula éyévero ... kai (see
yivopat, 2b.) ; Kai eidov kai (equiv. to Gre) cevopos eyevero,
Rev. vi. 12; ré&erau vidv k. kahéoets TO dvoma avTod (equiv.
to of dvopa kadéces), Mt. i. 21; Kaddv ear pas Ode civat,
kat (equiv. to dev) mono@pev oxnvds, Mk. ix.5; clauses
are thus connected together in clusters; as, Mt. vii. 25,
27 (an example of six clauses linked together by xa‘) ;
Mt. xiv. 9 sqq.; Mk. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ib.
13-16; x.3; 1Co.xii. 5-6; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16; ix. 1-4
(where nine sentences are strung together by xa‘), ete.
after a designation of time xaé annexes what will be
or was done at that time: #yycKcev 7 Spa kai mapadidorat
xtv. Mt. xxvi. 45; Av d€ Spa tpitn Kal €otavpwcay avrdv,
Mk. xv. 25; éyyis fv ro macya... x. aveBy eis ‘lepoo. 6
"Inoois, Jn. ii. 13; mpepae epyovrat kat cvvteheow, Heb.
viii. 8; add, Lk. xxiii. 44; Jn. iv. 35; v.1; xi. 55; Acts
y. 7; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as 5n d€ qv dWe Kal
of Kopivéros eEarivns mpvpvav expovorto, Thue. 1, 50; cf.
Matthiae § 620, 1 a. p.1481; W. 436 (405 sq.); [B. 361
(310)]. c. it joins affirmative to negative sentences,
as pi cveopavtnaare kal apxetade, Lk. iii. 14; ote dvtAnpa
éxeis kai TO ppeap €or Babu, Jn. iv. 11; ovre.- . emoeXeT aL
kai... K@Avet, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ.,as Eur.
Iph. Taur. 578; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much
oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding
negative: prmoré oe mapad@... Kai 6 Kpirys oe mapada
.. kal els hudaxyy BAnOnon, Mt. v. 25; add, Mt. vii. 6;
x. 88; xiii. 15; xxvii. 64; LK. xii. 58; xxi. 34; Jn. vi.
Kat
53; xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27; 1 Th. iii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 1;
Heb. xii. 15; Rev. xvi.15; [see B. 368 (315) d.; cf. W.
§56,2a.]. d. it annexes what follows from something
said before (kai consecutive), so as to be equiv. to and
so: Mt. v. 15 («kat Aauet) ; Mt. xxiii. 32 (kal mAnpocare) ;
2 Co. xi. 9 (kal €v mavri); Heb. iii. 19; 1 Jn. iii. 19 (kai
€umpoobev); 2 Pet. i. 19 (kat Exouev); so in statements
after imperatives and words having the force of an im-
perative: dedre dmiow pov, kal moujow tpas etc. Mt. iv.
193 eimé Abye, Kal iaOnoera 6 Tais pov, Mt. viii. 8; Lk.
vii. 7; dvriotnte 7 StaBdrw Kai PevEera af’ tpar, Jas.
iv. 7; add, Mt. vii. 7; Mk. vi. 22; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xiv. 16;
Rev. iv. 1; ef. Fritzsche on Mt. pp. 187 (and 416), [cf.
Sir. ii. 6; iii. 17]. e. with a certain rhetorical em-
phasis, it annexes something apparently at variance with
what has been previously said; so that it is equiv. to
and yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.); so the
Lat. atque (cf. Beier on Cie. de off. 3, 11,48): Mt. iii. 14
(kat ov Epyn mpos pe); Mt. vi. 26; x. 29; Mk. xii. 12;
Jn.i. 5 (kat ovoria krh.), 10 (kal 6 kéopos); Jn. iii. 11,
32; v.40 (kai ov Oédere); Jn. vi. 70; vii. 28; vill. 49, 55
(cai ovx éyvoxate); In. ix. 30; 1 Co.v.2; 2 Co. vi. 9;
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. iii. 1 (. .. Gis, kal vexpos ef), ete. when
a vain attempt is spoken of: Mt. xii. 43 (¢yret kat ovdx et-
pioxer); Xili. 17; xxvi. 60; Lk. xiii. 7; 1 Th. ii. 18. fs
like the Hebr. ) (see Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 396*), it begins
an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis,
ef. the Germ. da [or Eng. then], (in class. Grk. some-
times 8¢; see d¢, 8) [ef. B. 362 (311) d.; W. § 53, 3 f.;
Ellice. on Phil. i. 22]: with ére or a temporal as preced-
ing in the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g.
Thue. 2, 98, where see Kriiger)], Lk. ii. 21; Acts xiii.
18 sq. [here WH txt. om. rai; see as, I. 7]; as... Kal
i8ov, Lk. vii.12; Actsi.10; x.17[RGTrmrg. br.]; éav
20 T WH mrg., although here
cai may be rendered also (I also will come in, etc.), de-
claring that, if the first thing (expressed in the protasis)
be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be
done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question
thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and
containing an urgent rejoinder to another’s speech (cf.
W. § 53,3a.; Matthiae $620, 1d.; Kiihner § 521, 8 ii.
p- 791 sq.): kat ris Sdivarar awOqvar; Mk. x. 26; nal ris
...kat eioedevo. Rev. iii.
éort pou mAnoiov; Lk. x. 293; Kat rls éorw xrrd. Jn. ix. 36
(GT Tr WH); add, Jn. xiv.22[GT]. Peculiar is 2 Co.
ii. 2: €f yap eyo AuTa bpas, kal tis. . . euod (a swarm of
exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem. homil. 2, 43,
e.g. ef 6 Oeds Wevderat, Kai ris dAnOever;), where the
writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him-
self as it were, utters the substance of the necative
apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is
he that ete., for then there is no one who ete. eit
introduces parentheses [ef. W. § 62, 1]: Kat éeodvOny
dixpt tov 8edpo, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the
Lat. ef, e. g. praeda — et aliquantum ejus fuit — militi
concessa, Liv. 27, 1); cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p.
35 sq. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words
and sentences (cai epexegetical or ‘explicative’), so
316
(3a
that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [W. § 58, 3 ¢.; cf.
§ 66, 7 fin.]: xdpw Kai aroorodnv, Ro. i. 5, where ct.
Fritzsche ; mepi éAridos kai dvacrdcews vexpav, Acts xxiii.
6; modAa...«. €repa, Lk. iii. 18; moda... Kat GAdAa
onpeta, Jn. Xx. 30; moda kat Bapéa airipara, Acts xxv.
7; moAXol k. dvumorakrat, Tit. i.10 [R G; on the preceding
use of cai cf. wodvs, d. a. fin.]; cai [L br. «.] drav drap6n,
and indeed [i. e. viz. ] when he shall be taken away ete. Lk.
v. 35 [others find here an aposiopesis; cf. Meyer ad loc.
(ed. Weiss) ]; kai xdpuv dvri yapetos, In. i. 16; Kab mepio-
oov €xoow, Jn. x. 10, add 33 (where the words kat ére
ktd. show what kind of blasphemy is meant); Acts v.
21 (on which see yepovoia) ; Ro. ii. 15 (where kat peraév
krA. adds an explanation respecting the testimony of
conscience); 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 38, ete.; ef. Bornemann,
Scholia, p. 38; Fritzsche, Quaest. Leian. p. 9 sqq.; so the
Lat. et in Cic. Tusc. 3, 20, 48 laudat, et saepe, virtutem;
pro Mil. 25 te enim jam appello et ea voce ut me exau-
dire possis; cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. ii. p. 809; [Har-
pers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. et, II. A.]; i. q. and indeed, to
make a climax, for and besides: kat dxardxptrov, Acts
XXxll. 255 Kal tovtov eotavpapevoy, 1 Co. ii. 2; Kat rovdro,
Lat. idque (Cie. off. 1, 1,1 te... audientem Cratippum
idque Athenis), our and this, and that, and that too, i. q.
especially: Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, and LT Tr WH in
8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9); also cai radra (com. in Grk. writ.).
1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; cf. Klotz, Devar. i. p. 108;
ii. 2 p. 652 sq.; [ef. W. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects
whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran-
sition to new matters: Mt. iv. 23; viii. 14, 23, 28; ix. 1,
95:27, 853) x01 Mk.wolyor vis SG» Mic vine 20. ott
19 (cf. 15); 1Jn.i. 4, ete.; esp. in the very com. kai éyé-
vero, Mt. vii. 28; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 1, ete. (see yivouat,
2 b.). 5. kai... «ai, a repetition which indicates
that of two things one takes place no less than the other:
both ... and, as well ... as, not only ... but also, [W.§ 53,
4]: it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as kat
[L br. «.] yuyny cat cpa, Mt. x. 28; add, Mk. iv. 41; Jn.
iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first x.]; Ro. xi. 33; Phil. ii. 13 ;
iv. 12, etc.; Kat év dAty@ kal €v roAA@ [LT Tr WH peyadro ]
both with little effort and with great [but see peyas, 1 a.
y: fin.], Acts xxvi. 29; but also clauses and sentences, as
Mk. ix. 13; Jn. vii. 28; ix.37; xii. 28; 1 Co. i. 22; and
even things that are contrasted [cf. W.u.s.; B. § 149,
Sb.J: Jn. xv. 24; Acts xxiii. 3; Kai... Kat od, Lk. v.
36; Jn. vi. 36; now... now, Mk. ix. 22; cat ov... Kai,
Jn. xvii. 25. 6. re... Kal, see Té, 2.
II. Tt marks something added to what has already
been said, or that of which something already said holds
good ; accordingly it takes on the nature of an adverb,
also (Lat. etiam, quoque, Germ. auch [ef. W. and B. as
ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis
upon the word which immediately follows it; ef. Klotz,
Devar. ii. 2 p. 638.]) ; 1. used simply, a. also,
likewise: Mt. v. 39 sq.3 xii. 45; Mk. ii. 28; LK. iii. 145
Jn. vili. 19; Ko. viii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 29; xi. 6, ete.; very
freq. with pronouns: kat tpeis, Mt. xx. 4,7; Lk. xxi.
cal
31; Jn. vii. 47, etc.; Kayo, Kal éey@, see Kayo, 2;
fi
KaL
avrds, see ards, I. 1a. preceded by an adverb of com-
parison in the former part of the sentence: kudos...
«ai, Lk. vi. 81 [WH txt.om., L Trmrg. br., cai ipeis];
Ine vVIsOaR Lovo diel dinl S sive lu Comxyer4 os
dorep ... ovrw kai, Ro. xi. 30 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 22; Gal. iv.
29; xaOdnep ... ovTw kai, 2 Co. viii. 11; os... wai, Mt.
vi.10; Lk. xi.2 RLbr.; Acts vii. 51 [L xados; 2 Co.
xiii. 2 see os, I. 1 fin.]; Gal.i. 9; Phil. i. 20, (Thue. 8, 1;
éonep... kat, Xen. mem. [ 2, 2, 2 (and Kihner ad loc.) ];
3,1, 4; [4, 4, 7; ef. B. 362 (311) c.]); with e? preceding,
Gal. iv. 7. sometimes cai stands in each member of the
comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace.
ii. 10; vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p.
635; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1, 1, 6 [also in his Gr«. Gram.
§ 524, 2 vol. ii. 799; cf. Ellic. on Eph. v. 23; W. § 53,
5]). b. i. q. even [A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel,
adeo; Germ. sogar, selbst): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 30; Mk.
Bone ikea dl Con 0s) Gal. ni17; Ephnvi2;
ete. c. before a comparative it augments the gra-
dation, even, still, (Germ. noch): Mt. xi. 9; [Jn. xiv. 12];
Heb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g.; al. regard the xai in this
pass. as corresponsive (also) rather than ascensive,
and connect it with dc@]. d. with a ptep. i. q. al-
though (ef. Kriiger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see
traxpoOupew, 2]. 2. joined with pronouns and par-
ticles, also ; a. with compensate adverbs: ws kai,
Acts xi. 17; 1 Co. vii. 7; ix. 5, ete.; xaOas cat, Ro. xv. 7;
1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co. i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, etc.; ovre
«ai, Ro. v.15 [WH br. kai], 18 sq.; vi. 1; 1 Conxin12;
etc.; dpolws kai, Jn. vi. 11; @oaditws kai, Lk. xxii. 20[R
GLTrmrg., T Trtxt. WH x. ao. (but WH reject the
pass.) ]; 1 Co. xi. 25; xaOdzep kai (see xaOarep). b.
added to words designating the cause, it marks some-
thing which follows of necessity from what has been
previously said: 816 cai, Lk. i. 35; Acts x. 29; Ro. i. 24
Rec.; Heb. xiii. 12; [1 Pet. ii. 6 R]; d:a rodro wai, Lk. xi.
49; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. xa‘]. Ge
after the interrog. ri, cai (which belongs not to ri, but
to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather;
ef. Bdéumlein, Partikeln, p. 152]) points the significance
of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover,
(Germ. noch) [ef. W. § 53, 3 a. fin.; esp. Kriiger § 69,
32, 16]: ri xai Barrigovra; [A. V. why then ete.], 1 Co,
xv. 29; ri kal eAmi¢er; (prop. why doth he also or yet
hope for, and not rest in the sight ?), Ro. viii. 24[RGT];
wa ri kai, Lk. xiii. 7. d. adda kai, but also: Lk.
EXivi22 INLY. LOS RO. oes Vv. 3, 01s: Vitis Qos ax LO
2 Co.evite 75) vat. 10519) 21's) 4x. 12's 1 Ine iis 2hete, iq:
Lat. at etiam (in an apodosis after e?): Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442
(412)]. e. d€ xai, and d¢... kai, but also, and also:
Mt. iii. 10 [RG]; xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [WH
br. 8€]; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61; xiv. 12, 26 [L txt. Tr WH én
Te kal, see ért, 2 fin.]; xviii. 1 [RG], 9[Lbr.xai]; Jn. ii.
DZS eXVilie 2 Dp Acts ve 163) 1) Cori. 1165) ime tse xave
15; xv.15; 2Co.iv.3,ete. Kai... yap, av kal, ei Kat,
. dé, see ydp II. 10, éav I. 3, ef LI. 6 sq.,
The examples of crasis with «ai in
a ’ , ‘
7) kal, Katye, kal. .
7 4c¢., ye 3e., de 9.
the N. T., viz. kayo (xapot, cape), Kael, kaxeiOev, Kdxeivos,
317
KaLWos
cay, are noticed each in its place; for references see
especially kayo, init.
Kaiddas [ WH Karadas (cf. 1,¢ fin.) ; Lchm. in Lk. iii. 2
Kaidas |, -a [B. 20 (18); W.§ 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many
to be the same as 83"3, a stone, a rock; others more cor-
rectly i. q. 8D°3, depression, Targ. on Prov. xvi. 26 [ace.
to Delitzsch (Brief and. Rom. ins Hebr. ete. P: 28) 8D? PI),
Caiaphas; ace. to Joseph. (any 18, 2,2) Vee 6
kat Kaiapas (l@onroy, tov Kat Katadav emxadovpevor,
antt. 18, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap-
pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of
Judea, after the removal of Simon, son of Camith, a.p.
18 [cf. Schiirer, N. 'T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and was re-
moved A.D. 36 by ajelins. governor of Syria, who ap-
pointed Jonathan, son of the high-priest Ananus [i. e.
Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc-
cessor (Joseph. antt. 18, 4,3): Mt. xxvi. 3,57; Lk. iii. 2;
Jn. xi. 49; xviii. 13 sq. 24, 28; Actsiv.6. Cf. Hausrath
in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.*
katye, see ye, 3 e.
Kéiv [WH Kai (cf.1, « fin.) ],-6, indecl., (in Joseph. with
a Grk. ending, Kdis, -tos ; Hebr. PP. i.e. a spear, although
the author of Genesis, iv. 1, derives it fr. 73p to produce,
beget, acquire, so that it isi. q. 1p» Ps. civ. 24 [ef. B.D.
je ed. s. v.]), Cain, the fratricide, the first-born son of
Adam: Heb. xi. 4; 1 Jn. ili. 12; Jude 11.*
Kaivav [so RG L both 1 and 2; Tr Kaivdy in 1 and
Tr txt. in 2, but Tr mre. Kawap in 2, WH Kawap 1 and
2; T Kaivap both 1 and 2], 6, (Hebr. Dp 2 lance-maker
[al. ‘ possessor ’ or ‘ possession ’]), Cainan ; 1. son
of Enos (Gen. v. 9 sq.): Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar-
phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24; xi. 12; [1 Chr.
i. 18 Alex.j, which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. D.
Siva
katvos, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept.
for WIM; new, 1. e. a. as respects form; recently
made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to radars old,
antiquated) : as doxdés, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 [Tom. Tr
WH br. the cl.];_ Lk. v. 38; iudriov, Lk. v. 36; mAnpopa,
Mk. ii. 21; ponpetov, Mt. xxvii. 60; with ev 6 ovdére ovdeis
erébn added, Jn. xix. 41; kava x. madad, Mt. xiii. 52;
new, which as recently made is superior to what it suc-
ceeds: 8taOjxn, Mt. xxvi. 28 (T WH om. kaw.) ; Mk. xiv.
24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25;
2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8,13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxvili. (xxxi.)
31); Katvot ovpavol, Katy yn, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 2)
(Is. Ixv. 17 ; Ixvi. 22) ; ‘Iepovoadnp (see “Iepoodduua, fin.),
Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2; dvOpwmos (see the word, 1 f.), Eph.
ii.153; iv. 24, (kapdla, mvedpa, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ;
Kawa Tavra moe, | bring all things into a new and better
condition, Rev. xxi. 5; yevynua tips autre Nov, Mt. xxvi. 29 ;
Mk. xiv. 25. b. as respects substance ; of anew kind ;
unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unheard of, (érepa kat
kava Sarudva, Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1): d:day7n, Mk.i. 27; Acts
xvii. 19; évroAy, given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34;
1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; 2 Jn. 5; dvoua, with the added explana-
tion 8 oddels oidev (€yvw Rec.), Rev. ii. 17 (Is. Ixii. 2; lxv.
15); 2&8, Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3, (Ps. exliii. (exliv.) 9; duvos,
KALVOTNS
Is. xlii. 10; dopa, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (xl.) 4,
ete.) ; Aéyerw te kal [ LT Tr WH] axovew xawwérepor,
Acts xvii. 21 (newer sc. than that which is already; [cf.
W.. 244 (228 sq.) ]); «rious, Gal. vi. 15; xawa ra marta,
all things are new, previously non-existent, begin to be
far different from what they were before, 2 Co. v.17 [L
T Tr WH om. ra ravra] ; pnxere ovons THs avopias, Kawav
d€ yeyovdrwy ravtwv vrd kupiov, Barn. ep. 15, 7. yA@ooa
(see yAéooa, 2): Mk. xvi. 17 [Tr txt. WH txt. om. Tr
mrg. br. cay. |*
[Syn. katvds,yvéos: v. denotes the new primarily in refer-
ence to time, the young, recent ; «. denotes the new prima-
rily in reference to quality, the fresh, unworn; ‘véos ad
tempus refertur, katvds ad rem;’ see Trench § lx.; Tittmann
i. p. 59 sq.; Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt. ix. 17 (where the
words occur together). The same distinction, in the main,
holds in classic usage; cf. Schmidt ii. ch. 47.]
KaLvorTns, -nTOs, 7, (Kawds), newness: év KawdrnTe TvEv-
patos, in the new state (of life) in which the Holy Spirit
places us, Ro. vii. 6; ev kawvdrnre Cons in a new condition
or state of (moral) life, Ro. vi. 4 (eis kawdryta aidiov Cans,
so as to produce a new state which is eternal life,
Ignat. ad Eph. 19; among prof. writ. it is used by Thue.
3, 38; Isocr., Athen., al.; often by Plut., [applied to the
‘novelties’ of fashion (French nouveauté) |).*
kalrep [Treg. xai wep in Heb.; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 224
down ], conjunc., [originally even very much, ef. Donald-
son § 621; Biumlein p. 200 sq.; Kriiger § 56, 13, 2; B.
§ 144, 23; W. § 45, 2 fin.], although; it is joined to a ptep.
(in Grk. writ. sometimes also to an adj., so that dv must
be supplied) : Phil. iii. 4; Heb. v. 8; vii.5; xii. 17; 2 Pet.
i. 12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in
Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, caimep éaoriv, Rev. xvii. 8
Rec.; but since Grsb. kat mdapeora [correctly mapéora
(see in zdpeuut) | has been restored after the best codd.*
katpds, -ov, 6, (derived by some fr. xapa or xapn, rd, the
head, summit, [al. al.; cf. Vanitek p. 118]); Sept. for ny
and yD; in Grk. writ. [fr. Hes. down] 1. due
measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure
of time; a larger or smaller portion of time; hence a.
univ. a fired and definite time: Ro. xiii. 11; 2 Co. vi. 2;
votepot katpoi, 1 Tim. iv. 1; axpt Katpov, up to a certain
time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in dypi, 1 b. referred
apparently to b. below; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 309 sq. ];
Acts xiii. 11; mpds xatpdv, for a certain time only, for a
season, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; mpos caipov Spas, for the
season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 17;
kata katpoy, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v.
4(RGL]; at the (divinely ) appointed time, Ro. v. 6 [al.
bring this under b.|; before the time appointed, Mt. viii.
29; 1Co. iv. 5; ara katpos, dre ete. 2 Tim. iv. 3; 6\tyov
kaipov €xet, a Short time (in which to exercise his power)
has been granted him, Rev. xii. 12;
Mt. xi. 25; xii. 1; xiv. 1; Eph. ii. 12; nar’ éxeivov Tr. x.,
Acts xii. 15 xix. 23; karat. x. rodrov, Ro. ix. 9; €v aire ra
x. Lk. xiii. 1; €v 6 x. Acts vii. 20; év r@ viv x., Ro. iii. 26 ;
xi. 5; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); ev mavti «. always, at every
season, [ Aristot. top. 3, 2,4 p. 117%, 35], Lk. xxi. 36; Eph.
Vi. 18; els tiva xaypov, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a
> > , ~ ~
€V EKELVG) TM KALNG),
c c ‘
518
Kalpos
thing, the time of ete. i. e. at which it will occur: ris
euns avadvoews, 2 Tim. iv. 6; ris emurxomqs, 1 Pet. v. 6
Lehm.; Lk. xix. 44; metpacpod, Lk. viii. 13 ; tod dpéarOat
To kpiza, for judgment to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17; xacpot rav
Aoyey, of the time when they shall be proved by the event,
Lk. i. 20; — or when a thing usually comes to pass: too
Oepiopov, Mt. xiii. 30; t&v kaprav, when the fruits ripen,
Mt. xxi. 34, 41; over, Mk. xi. 13. with the gen. of a
pers.: katpot €6vov, the time granted to the Gentiles,
until God shall take vengeance on them, Lk. xxi. 24;
6 é€avtod (T Tr WH atrod) x. the time when antichrist
shall show himself openly, 2 Th. ii. 6; 6 xaipds pou, the
time appointed for my death, Mt. xxvi. 18; av vexpav
kptOnva, the time appointed for the dead to be recalled
to life and judged, Rev. xi. 18 [B. 260 (224) ]; 6 éuos, 6
duerepos, the time for appearing in public, appointed
(by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6,8; Kaup@ idiw, the
time suited to the thing under consideration, at its
proper time, Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit.
i.3. 6 Karpos alone, the time when things are brought to a
crisis, the decisive epoch waited for: so of the time when
the Messiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii.
333 6 Kaipos iyyixev, Lk. xxi. 8; eyyus éotw, Rev. i. 3;
xxii. 10. b. opportune or seasonable time: with verbs
suggestive of the idea of advantage, xaupov peradap-
Bavew, Acts xxiv. 253; éyew, Gal. vi. 10 (Plut. Luce. 16) ;
eEayopatecba, Eph. v. 16; Col. iv. 5, see eEayopdte, 2;
foll. by an inf., opportunity to do something, Heb. xi. 15;
Tapa Katpov nAckias, past the opportunity of life [A. V.
past age], Heb. xi. 11 (simply mapa xaspor, Pind. Ol. 8, 32;
several times in Plato, cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p.126). ¢.
the right time: év carpe (often in class. Grk.), in due sea-
son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster-
eotyp. only)]; 1 Pet. v.65; also capo, Lk. xx. 10 L T
Tr WH; 76 xapo, Mk. xii. 2. d. a (limited) period
of time: [1 Co. vii. 29]; plur. the periods prescribed by
God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall,
Acts xvii. 26; xatpot kapropopot, the seasons of the year
in which the fruits grow and ripen, Acts xiv. 17 [cf.
Gen. i. 14 Sept.]; xawpov kai Kaupovs Kal mutov Katpov, a
year and two years and six months [A. V. a time, and
times, and half a time; cf. W. § 27, 4], Rev. xii. 14 (cf. 6;
fr. Dan. vii. 25; xii. 7); stated seasons of the year sol-
emnly kept by the Jews, and comprising several days, as
the passover, pentecost, feast of tabernacles, Gal. iv. 10
[2 Chr. viii. 13; cf. Bar. i. 14]. in the divine arrange-
ment of time adjusted to the economy of salvation: 6
katpos (mewAnporat), the preappointed period which ace.
to the purpose of God must elapse before the divine
kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur.,
the several parts of this period, Eph. i. 10; 6 xaipds 6
evearas, the present period, i. q. 6 ai@y ovros (see aiar,
3), Heb. ix. 9, opp. to xarpos diopAacews, the time when
the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. ai@v ped-
Awv), ib. 10; 6 Katpos ovTos, i. q. 6 aidy ovros (see air,
3), Mk. x. 80; Lk. xviii. 30; 6 viv kaup. Ro. viii. 18; ev
Kaip@ éoxar@, the last period of the present age, the time
just before the return of Christ from heaven (see éxyaros,
Kotcao
1 sub fin., etc.), 1 Pet. i.5; wacpot avapiEews ard mpocw-
mov 100 Kupiov, denotes the time from the return of Christ
on, the times of the consummated divine kingdom, Acts
iii. 20 (19). —e.. as often in Grk. writ., and like the
Lat. tempus, xatpos is equiv. to what time brings, the state
oy the times, the things and events of time: Lk. xii. 56; Sov-
Aeveww 7 xatp@, Lat. tempori servire (see SovAeva, 2 a.),
Ro. xii. 11 Ree.“ ra onpeta trav Karpdy, i. g. a of Katpot
onpaivovor, Mt. xvi. 3 [here Tbr. WH reject the pass. ];
katpot xaderol, 2 Tim. iii. 1; ypovor Katpoi (times or
seasons, Germ. Zeitumstdnde), Acts i. 7; of xpév. kat of
cap. 1 Th. v.13; and in the opp. order, Dan. ii. 21 Sept.;
Sap. viii. 8.*
[Syn. katpds, xpdévos: xp. time, in general; xaip. a defi-
nitely limited portion of time, with the added notion of suit-
ableness. Yet while, on the one hand, its meaning may be
so sharply marked as to permit such a combination as ypédvov
kaipds ‘the nick of time,’ on the other, its distinctive sense
may so far recede as to allow it to be used as nearly equiv.
to xpdévos; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritsch! p. 206, 15 sqq. (after
Ammonius s. v.); p. 215, 10 sqq. Katpds od udvov em xpdvov
Gmr@s TiWeTat, GAAG Kal em) TOD apuodiov Kal mpémovToOS, KTA.;
Schmidt ch. 44; Trench § lvii.; Tittmann i. 41 sqq.; Cope
on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 32. “In modern Grk. kaipés means
weather, xpdvos year. In both words the kernel of meaning
has remained unaltered ; this in the case of «ap. is change-
ableness, of xp. duration.” Curtius, Etym. p. 110sq.]
Kaicap, -apos [ Bttm. 16 (15) ], 6, Cesar (prop. the sur-
name of Julius Caesar, which being adopted by Octavia-
nus Augustus and his successors afterwards became an
appellative, and was appropriated by the Roman empe-
rors as a part of their title [cf. Dict. of Biogr. and
Mythol. s. v. Caesar]): Mt. xxii. 17, 21; Mk. xii. 14,
Rorsqe; Lisa. V5 ies xx. 225 xxaiie'2; In.ixix.12s Acts
Mie, 28) (NCC) y RViles v5, ebe.3, Phil.,iv./29.*
Katodpera [-ia Tdf. (cf. his note on Acts ix. 30), WH;
see I, c], -as, 7, Caesarea; there were two cities of this
name in Palestine: 1. Casarea Philippi (Kawa-
peta 7) Bidimrov), situated at the foot of Lebanon near
the sources of the Jordan in Gaulanitis, and formerly
called Paneas (jv Mavedda Soinkes mpocayopevovow, Eus.
h.e. 7,17); but after being rebuilt by Philip the te-
trarch, it was called by him Ce@sarea in honor of Tibe-
rius Caesar (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.) ; subsequently it
was called Neronias by Agrippa II., in honor of Nero
(Joseph. antt. 20, 9,4); now Banids, a village of about
150 [(?) “about 50” (Bédeker), “some forty” (Mur-
ray) ] houses: Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27. 2. Cesa-
rea (more fully Cesarea of Palestine [mod. Kaisartyeh}),
built near the Mediterranean by Herod the Great on
the site of Strato’s Tower, between Joppa and Dora.
It was provided with a magnificent harbor and had con-
ferred upon it the name of Caesarea, in honor of Augus-
tus. It was the residence of the Roman procurators,
and the majority of its inhabitants were Greeks (Joseph.
antt. 13, 11,2; 15, 9,6; 19,8, 2; b.j. 2, 9,1): Acts viii.
40; ix. 30; x. 1, 24; xi. 11; xii. 19; xviii. 22; xxi. 8,16;
xxili_ 23,33; xxv. 1,4,6,13. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.
DD s. v. Cesarea; Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 486 sqq.;
319 ;
KGKELVOS
Overbeck in Schenkel i. p. 499 sq. ; [Schitirer § 23, i. 9;
and for other reff. cf. Me. and S. s. v.].*
katrot, (fr. kai and roi), conjunction, with a ptep. [bul
in class. Grk. with a finite verb also (as in Acts below) ;
Kriiger § 56, 13, 2; cf. reff. s. v. kaimep], and yet, al-
though: Heb. iv. 3 (although the work of creation had
been finished long ago, so that the rest spoken of cannot
be understood to be that of God himself resting from
that work [ef. Kurtz in loc.]); [Acts xiv. 17 LT Tr WH
(but Tr kai rot) |.*
katrovye, see ye, 3 f.
[Katdhas, see Kaiagdas. |
kaiw [ Vanicek p. 98]; Pass., pres. kaiouar; pf. ptep. xe
kavpevos; 1 fut. cavOnoopa (1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf., where R
GLTr give the solecistic fut. subjunc. cavOjcopa, on
which cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; W. § 18, 1e.; B.
35 sq. (31)); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p.40; WH. App. p. 172;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122. WHI txt. Lchm. ed. ster. read xav-
xnoopa (with A B ete.) ; on this reading see WH. App.
ad loc.; A. W. Tyler in Bib. Sacr. for July 1873, p. 502
sq.; ef. Scrivener, Introd. ete. p. 629 sq.; Tregelles,
Printed Text ete. p. 191 sq.; Tdf. ad loc.]; Sept. for
Iya, yw ete.; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to set fire to,
light: dvxvov, Mt. v.15; pass. ptep. Katdpevos, burning,
Lk. xii. 35; Rev. iv. 5; viii. 10; xix. 20; with mupi added,
Heb. xii. 18; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; in fig. dise. Avyvos Kawd-
pevos, a light showing the right way, Jn. v. 35 (a com-
parison pointed at the Jews, to whom John the Bap-
tist had been as a torch lighted for a merry-making) ;
metaph. 7 kapdia jv Katonevy was glowing, burning, i. e.
was greatly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32 [W. § 45, 5; B. § 144,
28]. 2. to burn, consume with fire: pass., Jn. xv. 6;
1 Co. xiii. 3 [see above]; with mupi added (ef. igni cre-
mare, Caes. b. g. 1, 4), Mt. xiii. 40 G Tr for RL TWH
karakaterat. [COMP.: ék-, Kuta-Kala. | *
kaxet [Grsb. kaxet; cf. kay and reff.], (by erasis fr. cai
and éxet [cf. W. § 5,3; B. p. 10; esp. Tdf Proleg. p.
96]); 1. and there: Mt. v. 23 [Trmrg. kai eet];
x. 11; xxviii. 10 [Tdf. cai éxet]; Mk. i. 35 (Lehm. kat
exei); Jn. xi. 54; Acts xiv. 7; xxii. 10; xxv. 20; xxvii.
6. 2. there also: Mk. i. 88 (G WH xai éexet) ; Acts
xvii. 13.*
kdxeidev [Grsb. xdx-; see kaye and reff.], (by crasis fr.
kai and éxeidev [cf. W. § 5, 3; B.10; esp. Tdf Proleg.
96 sq.]); Lat. e¢ inde ; a. of place, and from thence,
and thence: Mk. ix. 30 (RG kai éxeiOev); x.1 [LT Tr
WH eal éx.; Lk. xi. 53 T Trtxt. WH]; Acts vii.4; xiv.
26; xvi. 12 [éxetOév rx RG]; xx.15; xxi. 1; xxvii. 4, 12
[LT Tr WH éxeiOev]; xxviii. 15. b. of time, and
thereafter, and afterward [cf. Bornem. Scholia in Lue. p.
90 sq.]: Acts xiii. 21.*
Kaxetvos [Grsb. kdk-; see kayo and reff. ], -eivn, -eivo,
(by crasis fr. kai and éxeivos [cf. W. § 5,3; esp. Tdf
Proleg. p. 97]); 1. éxeivos referring to the more
remote subject; a. and he (Lat. et idle): Lk. xi. 7;
xxii. 12; Acts xviii. 19; raira.. . xaxetva [A. V. the
other], Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. b. he also: Acts xv.
11; Ro. xi. 23 [Rec.* kal €x.]; 1 Co. x. 6. 2. exeivos
KAKIA
referring to the nearer subject [cf. éxeivos, 1 c.]; a.
and he (Lat. et is, Germ. und selbiger): Mt. xv. 18; Jn.
vii. 29; xix. 35 [L Tr WH kai ex. ]. b. he also (Germ.
auch selbiger): Mt. xx. 4 [T WH kai éx.]; Mk. xii. 4 sq.;
Xvi. 11, 13); (Lk, xxit. 125, Jn. xivel2ecxwn. 24.
xakla, -as, 7, (kaxds), [fr. Theognis down], Sept. chiefly
for yr, and My; 1. malignity, malice, ill-will, de-
sire to injure: Ro.i. 29; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Tit. iii.
35 das.Li2l; tt Pet. aa. 2. wickedness, depravity:
1 Co. v. 8 [ef. W. 120 (114)]; xiv. 20; Acts viii. 22 (cf.
21); wickedness that is not ashamed to break the laws,
1 Pet. ii. 16. 3. Hellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt.
vi. 34 (as Amos iii. 6; [1 S. vi. 9]; Eccl. vii. 15 (14); xii.
1; Sir. xix.6; 1 Macc. vii. 23, etc.).*
[Syn. kaxla, tovnpia: associated Ro. i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8.
Acc. to Trench, Syn. § xi., endorsed by Ellic. (on Eph. iv. 31)
and Bp. Lghtft. (on Col. iii. 8), caxia denotes rather the vi-
cious disposition, rovnpla the active exercise of the same; cf.
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 28 ei wev airds (i.e. Swxparns) emote: Te pavAoyv,
eixdtws by eddnet movnpds elvar> «iD avtds cwppovav diereAct,
was dy Sixatws THs ovK evovons ad’T@ Kkaklas aitiay €xo.; But
Fritzsche, Meyer (on Ro. 1. c.; yet cf. Weiss in ed. 6), al. dis-
sent, —seeming nearly to reverse this distinction; cf. Suidas
8. V. kakla* €or % TOU KaK@oa Thy TWéAaS OTOVdH, Tapa TO
anoatdAw; see wovnpds, 2 b.]
kaxonOea [-Oia WH; see I, ¢],-as, 9, (fr. xaxonOns, and
this fr. caxds and 460s), bad character, depravity of heart
and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al.; 4 Mace. i. 4, where cf.
Grimm p. 299; spec. used of malignant subtlety, malicious
craftiness: Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22; Add. to Esth. viii.
1. 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35,5; Joseph. antt.1,1,4; 16,
3,1; [e. Ap. 1, 24, 4]; Polyb. 5, 50, 5, etc.). On the
other hand, Aristot. rhet. 2,13, [3 p. 81] defines it 76 émt
TO xeipov UroAapBavew mavra, [taking all things in the evil
part, Genevan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].*
Kaxodoyéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. Kaxodoynoar; (kaxoddyos) ;
i. q. kaxs Neyo (which the old grammarians prefer, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200) ; 1. to speak iil of, revile,
abuse, one; to calumniate, traduce: twa, Mk. ix. 39; ri,
Acts xix. 9; (2 Mace. iv. 1; Lys., Plut., al.). 2
Hellenistically, to imprecate evil on, curse: twa, Mt. xv.
4; Mk. vii. 10, (so for 72s Prov. xx. 20; Ezek. xxii. 7;
Bx: xi) 28):
kaxorradeva [-Oia WH; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (kaxoraéns suffer-
ing evil, afflicted), prop. the suffering of evil, i. e. trouble,
distress, affliction: Jas. v.10 (Mal.i.13; 2 Mace. ii. 26
sq-; [Antipho]; Thue. 7, 77; Isocr., Polyb., Diod., al.).*
kaxovadw, -@; 1 aor. impv. 2 sing. caxomabnoov; (xa-
xorraOns); to suffer (endure) evils (hardship, troubles); to
be afflicted: 2 Tim. ii. 9; Jas. v. 13 [W. § 41 a. 3 fin.; ef.
§ 60,4¢.; B. § 139, 28], (Sept. Jon. iv.10; Xen., Plut.,
al.); used freq. of the hardships of military service
(Thue. 4,9; Polyb. 3, 72,5; Joseph. antt. 10, 11,1; b. j.
1, 7,4); hence elegantly caxora@noov (LT Tr WH ovy-
[TWH ovp- (q. v. fin.) ] kaxoraOnaov) as kaos orpariarns,
2 Tim. ii. 3; ib. iv.5. [Comp.: ovy-caxorabéw. |*
Kaxo-rotéw, -@ ; 1 aor. inf. kaxoroinoat; (kaxorowds); — 1.
to ao harm: Mk. iii. 4; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do
320
KaKO@
wrong: 1 Pet. iii.17; 3Jn.11. ([Aeschyl., Arstph. 1,
Xen., Polyb., Antonin., Plut.; Sept.) *
kakoTroids, -dv, (kaxov and moéw), doing evil; subst. an
evil-doer, malefactor: Jn. xviii. 30 [but Lmrg. T Tr WH
kaxov wov@v |; 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14 ; iii. 16 [T Tr mrg. WH om.
the cl.]; iv. 15. (Prov. xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb.,
Plut.) *
kaxés, -7, -dv, Sept. for y4, [fr. Hom. down], bad, [A.V.
(almost uniformly) evil] ; 1. univ. of a bad nature;
not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a
mode of thinking, feeling, acting; base, wrong, wicked:
of persons, Mt. xxi. 41 [cf. W. 637 (592); also B. 143
(126)]; xxiv. 48; Phil. iii. 2; Rev.ii. 2. 8cadoysopoi, Mk.
vii. 213 dpsria, 1 Co. xv. 33; emiOupia, Col. iii. 5 (Prov.
xii. 12); epya [better épyov], Ro. xiii. 3. neut. caxov, ro
kaxov, evil i. e. what is contrary to law, either divine or
human, wrong, crime: [Jn. xviii. 23]; Acts xxiii. 9; Ro.
Vil. 215 xiv. 20° xvi. 1934 Co, xiii. 5; Heb. v.14. iPen
iii. 10sq.; 3 Jn. 11; plur. [evil things]: Ro.i. 30; 1 Co.
x. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 10 [mavra ra xaxa all kinds of evil]; Jas.
i. 13 [W. § 30, 4; B. § 132, 24]; xaxov mocetv, to do, com-
mit evil: Mt. xxvii. 23; Mk. xv. 14; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co.
xiii. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 12; 76 xaxov, Ro. xiii. 4; 7a Kaka, iii. 8;
kakov, TO kaxov mpdoceww, Ro. vii. 19; ix. 11. [Ree.]; xiii.
4; [2Co.v.10 RGLTrmrg.]; 1d xaxdv xatepyaver Out,
Ro. ii. 9. spec. of wrongs inflicted: Ro. xii. 213; kaxov
epyaCopai tv [fo work ill to one], Ro. xiii. 10; évdetxvupe,
2 Tim. iv. 14; mod, Acts ix. 13; dmodidmpt xaxdv avti Ka-
kov, Ro.xils 175:4.0h. v; 1531 Petsi.9- 3. trouble«
some, injurious, pernicious, destructive, baneful: neut.
kaxoy, an evil, that which injures, Jas. 1ii. 8 [W. § 59, 8b.;
B. 79 (69) ]; with the suggestion of wildness and ferocity,
Onpia, Tit. i. 12; substantially i. q. bad, i. e. distressing,
whether to mind or to body : @\xos kaxdv x. movnpov [A.V.
a noisome and grievous sore], Rev. xvi. 2; xaxov mpaco@
€uaut@, Lat. vim mihi infero, to do harm to one’s self, Acts
xvi. 28; kaxov Tt macy, to suffer some harm, Acts xxviii.
5; Ta xaxd, evil things, the discomforts which plague one,
Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to ra dyada, the good things, from which
pleasure is derived). [Syn. cf. xaxia.]*
kakotpyos, -ov, (contr. from xaxdepyos, fr. kaxov and
EPTQ; cf. mavodpyos, and on the accent of both see
Gottling, Lehre vy. Accent, p. 321; [Chandler § 445]), as
subst. a malefactor: 2 Tim. ii. 9; of a robber, Lk. xxiii.
32 sq. [ef. W. 530 (493); B.§ 150, 3], 39. (Prov. xxi. 15;
in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down.) *
kakovxéw, -@: (fr. obsol. Kaxovxos, fr. kaxov and €xyw) ;
to treat ill, oppress, plague: twa; pres. pass. ptcp. Kaxov-
xovpevor, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii. 3. (1
K. ii. 26; xi. 39 Alex.; Diod. 3, 23; 19,11; Dio C. 35
(36), 9 (11); Plut. mor. p. 114e.) [Comp.: ovy-caxov-
xeo.]*
Kakdw, -@: fut. kakdow; 1 aor. éxaxwoa; (Kakés) ; ale
to oppress, afflict, harm, maltreat: revd, Acts vii. 6, 19; xii.
1; xviii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 18, (Ex. v. 22; xxiii. 9 Alex.; in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. by a usage foreign
to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concuo);
render evil affected, (Ps. ev. (cvi.) 32; Joseph. antt. 16,
KAKWS
1, 2; 7,3; 8, 6): rhv Wuxny Tivos kara Tivos, against one,
Acts xiv. 2.*
kaxés, (xaxds), adv., [fr. Hom. down], badly, ill,i.e. a.
[in a physical sense] miserably: €yewv, to be ill, sick [see
éxo, II. a.], Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 12; xiv. 35; [xvii. 15
L Trtxt. WH txt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 17; [vi. 55);
Lk. v. 31; vii. 2, ete.; maocyew, Mt. xvii. 15 [RGT Tr
mrg. WH mrg.]; dapoviferOa, Mt. xv. 22; xaxods kakds
dmodéoet, Mt. xxi. 41, on this combination of words with
verbs of destroying, perishing, ete., which is freq. in Grk.
writ. also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; W. § 68, 1. b. [mor-
ally] improperly, wrongly: Jn. xviii. 23 ; Kax@s etmreiv Twva,
to speak ill of, revile, one, Acts xxiii. 5; with bad in-
tent, aireto@a, Jas. iv. 3.*
Kadkwots, -ews, 7, (kaxdw), ill-treatment, ill-usage, (Vulg.
afflictio): Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19; Ex. iii. 7,
17; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.]; Thuc., Xen., Plut., al.) *
Kahapn, -ns, 7, a stalk of grain or of a reed, the stalk
(left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12.
(Bxvvet2; xv. 73 Is.xvii..6; Hom: et’sqq:)*
KdAas.os, -ov, 6, fr. Pind. down, Lat. calamusi. e. a.a
reed: Mt. xi. 7; xii. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b.
a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21):
Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48; Mk. xv. 19, 36. Cc. a measuring
reed or rod: Rev. xi. 1; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii.
16-19). d. a writer’s reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see
Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq. ].*
Kaew, -@; impf. exddouv; fut. kakeow (W. § 13, 3c.);
1 aor. éekddeoa; pf. kexAnxa; Pass., pres. cadovpar; pf.
3 pers. sing. xexAnrat (1 Co. vii. 18 LT Tr WH; [Rev.
xix. 13 LT Tr WH)), ptep. cexAnuevos; 1 aor. éxAnOnv;
1 fut. kAnOjnoopac; [fr. Hom. down]; Hebr. x1); Lat.
voco; i. e. 1. to call (Germ. rufen ref Boa,
fin.]) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice: aypis ob
TO onepov Kaeirat, as long as the word ‘to-day’ is called
out or proclaimed, Heb. iii. 13; twa, to call one to ap-
proach or stand before one, Mt. xx. 8; xxii. 3 (where
eis ToUs yapous seems to belong to rods KexAnuevous); Mt.
xxv. 14; [Mk. iii. 31 LT TrWH]; Lk. xix.13; ra i&a
mpoBata Kar’ dvoyza, his own sheep each by its name, Jn.
x. 3 (where LT Tr WH g¢ovet); used of Christ, calling
certain persons to be his disciples and constant compan-
ions, Mt. iv. 21 (note what precedes in 19: 8eire dricw
pov); Mk.i. 20; to order one to be summoned, Mt. ii. 15
[see just below]; before the judges, Acts iv.18; xxiv.
2; foll. by ek with gen. of place, i. q. to call out, call forth
from: Mt. ii. 15, ef. Heb. xi. 8. metaph. to cause to pass
from one state into another: twa éx oxdrous eis TO pas,
1 Pet. ii. 9. b. like the Lat. voco i. q. to invite; a.
prop.: eis rods yauous, Mt. xxii. 3,9; Lk. xiv. 8 sq.; Jn.
ii. 2; to a feast, Lk. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 27 [cf. W. 593
(552)]; Rev. xix. 9; 6 kadéoas, Lk. vii. 39; xiv. 9; 6
kekAnkos twa, ibid. 10,12; of kexAnuéevor, Mt. xxii. 8; Lk.
xiv. 7,17, 24; (2 Sam. xiii. 23; Esth. v.12; and often
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 532; 11,187down). 8.
metaph.: to invite one, ets rt, to something i. e. to par-
ticipate in it, enjoy it; used thus in the Epp. of Paul
and Peter of God as inviting men by the preaching of
321
KANE®
the gospel (8:a tov evayyeAiov, 2 Th. ii. 14) to the bless-
ings of the heavenly kingdom: eis rnv facWeiav Tov Oeod,
1 Th. ii. 12; eds Cwnv aimmov, 1 Tim. vi. 12; eis dd€av
aimvov, 1 Pet. v.10; eis tiv Kotvwviay Tov viod avrov, 1 Co.
1.9; so xadeiv twa used alone: Ro. viii. 30; ix. 24 sq.;
1 Co. vii. 17 sq. 20-22, 24; ruvd cadeiv kAnoe, 2 Tim. i. 9;
év @ €xdnOnpuev, in whom lies the reason why we were
called, who is the ground of our having been invited,
Eph. i. 11 Lehm.; aéwos ris KAnoews, fs (by attraction
for 7 [or perh. qv; cf. W. § 24,1; B. 287 (247); Elli-
cott in loc.]) ékAj@nre, Eph. iv. 1; God is styled 6 kadév
twa (he that calleth one, the caller, cf. W. § 45, 7), Gal.
v.8; 1 Th. v. 24; and 6 cadéoas twa, Gal.i.6, Col. i. 12
Lehm.; 1 Pet.i.15; 2 Pet.i.3. of kekAnpevur, Heb. ix.
15; kadety and cadeioGa are used with a specification of
the mediate end (for the highest or final end of the call-
ing is eternal salvation): ém eAevdepia, Gal. v.13; ovd«
én axaOapoia adn’ ev dyracpe, 1 Th.iv.7; év eipnyy, 1 Co.
vii. 15; ev evi eAmids, that ye might come into one hope,
Eph. iv. 4 (see év, I. 7 [yet cf. W. 417 (389); B. 329
(283); esp. Ellicott in loc.], and émi, B. 2a. ¢.); ets eipy-
mv tov Xptorod ev évi copati, that ye may be in one
body i. e. be members of one and the same body, Col. iii.
15; eis rovro (which refers to what precedes) foll. by
iva, 1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 9; (but everywhere in the N. T.
Epp. only those are spoken of as called by God who have
listened to his voice addressed to them in the gospel,
hence those who have enlisted in the service of Christ —
see Ro. viii. 30 and Riickert’s Com. in loc. p. 464. cf. 1
Co. i. 24; those who have slighted the invitation are not
reckoned among the called); Christ also is said cade
twva, sc. to embrace the offer of salvation by the Messiah,
in Mt. ix.13 and Mk. ii. 17 (in both which pass. Rec.
adds eis perdvotav). God is said to call those who are
not yet born, viz. by promises of salvation which have
respect to them, so that xadeiy is for substance equiv. to
to appoint one to salvation, Ro. ix. 12 (11); Kadovvros ta
pi) bvta ds bvra, Ro. iv. 17, where cf. Fritzsche, [al. al.,
cf. Meyer (esp. ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. to call (i. q. to select)
to assume some office, twa, of God appointing or commit-
ting an office to one, (Germ. berufen): Gal. i. 15; Heb.
v. 4, (Is. xlii. 6; xlix.1; li.2). to invite i. q. to rouse,
summon: to do something, eis peravoray, Lk. v. 32, added
in Ree. also in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17. 2. to call
i. e. fo name, call by name; a. to give a name to; with
two acc., one of the object the other of the name as a
predicate [to call one (by) a name: Mt. x. 25 Rec.; ef.
W. § 32, 4b.; B. 151 (132) note]; pass. w. the nom. of
the name, to receive the name of, receive as a name: Mt.
ii. 23; xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 32, 60, 62; ii. 4, ete.; Kadovpevos,
called, whose name or surname is, Lk. vii. 11; ix. 10; x.
39; Acts vii. 58; xxvii. 8,16; 6 xadovpevos [on its posi-
tion cf. B. § 144, 19]: Lk. vi. 15; viii. 2; [xxii.3 T Tr
WH]; xxiii. 33; Actsi. 23; x.1; xi. 1; [xv.22 LT
Tr WH]; xxvii. 14; Rev. xii. 9; xvi. 16; with dvdpuare
added, Lk. xix. 2; xadetcOar dvduati tun, to be called
by a name, Lk. i. 61; xadeiy rwa emt TO évdpati Tivos,
Lk. i. 59 (see éxi, B. 2 a. n. p. 233°); after the Hebr. 8yp
aAX 1éXaLos
822
KAAU [Mo
JDW-NN, kadeiv rd Svopd Tivos, with the name in the acc., | xaddv 74 GAas (is an excellent thing), Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv.
to give sume name to one, call his name: Mt. i. 21, 23, 25;
Lk. i. 13, 31;° pass., Lk. 1. 21; Rev.2dx. 13; Gen. xvii:
19; 1S. i. 20, ete. (similarly sometimes in Grk. writ., cf.
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 45 [B. 151 (182)]). b. Pass.
ka\ovpat with predicate nom. to be called i. e. to bear a
name or title (among men) [ef. W. § 65, 8]: Lk. i. 35;
xxii. 25; Acts viii. 10 [Rec. om. cad.]; 1 Co. xv. 9; to be
said to be (i. q. to be acknowledged, pass as, the nomina-
tive expressing the judgment passed on one): Mt. v. 9,
19)°9LK.1 32000, 765 11233 xve 1956 ko.ix. 265) Jassi
23; opp. to eiva, 1 Jn. iii. 1 LT TrWH; Hebraistically
(Gen. xxi. 12) ev Ioadx KAnOnoerai cor oréppa, through
[better in, ef. ev, I. 6 c. and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad Ro. 1.
c.] Isaac shall a seed be called for thee, i. e. Isaac (not
Ishmael) is the one whose posterity shall obtain the name
and honor of thy descendants, Ro. ix. 7 and Heb. xi.
18. Cc. xad@ Twa; with an ace. of the predicate or a
title of honor, to salute one by a name: Mt. xxiii. 9;
Pass., ib. 7 sq. 10; Rev. xix. 11 [but Trmrg. WH br. x. ];
to give a name to one and mention him at the same time,
Mt. xxii. 43, 45; Lk. xx. 44. [Comp.: dyri-, ev, eio-
(-pat), ém-, peTa-, Tapa-, cUY—Trapa-, TpO-, TpoG-, Tvy-Kaew. |
KaAAt-€Xatos, -ov, 7, (fr. kadAos and éAaia), the garden
olive, [A. V. good olive tree], (opp. to dypteAawos the wild
olive): Ro. xi. 24. Aristot. de plant. 1, 6 p. 820°, 40.*
KaAAlwv, see kadds, fin.
Kado-SiSacKados, -ov, 6, 7, (duddoxados and xaddr, cf.
iepodsddoKaXos, voyodiOdoKados, xopodiackados), teaching
that which is good, a teacher of goodness: Tit. ii. 3. No-
where else.*
Kadol Awéves (kadds and Aumujv), Fair Havens (Germ.
Schinhafen; Luth. Gutfurt), a bay of Crete, near the
city Lasza; so called because offering good anchorage ;
now Limenes kali [BB.DD.]: Acts xxvii. 8.*
Kaho-rrovew, -d; (i. q. Kad@s 701@, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
199 sq. [W. 25]); to do well, act uprightly: 2 'Th. iii. 13.
(Etym. Magn. 189, 24; [Lev. v. 4 Ald. (as quoted in)
Philo de somn. |. ii. § 44].) *
kaNés, -7, -dv, [ prob. primarily ‘sound,’ ¢ hale,’ ‘ whole ; ’
ef. Vaniéek p. 140 sq. ; Curtius § 31], Sept. for 79° beau-
tiful, but much oftener for 3)0 good; beautiful, applied ,
by the Greeks to everything so distinguished in form, ex-
cellence, goodness, usefulness, as to be pleasing; hence
(ace. to the context) i. q. beautiful, handsome, excellent,
eminent, choice, surpassing, precious, useful, suitable, com-
mendable, admirable ; a. beautiful to look at, shapely,
magnificent: Ai@ots Kadois Kexdopnrat [ A. V. goodly], Lk.
toni BE b. good, excellent in its nature and character-
istics, and therefore well-adapted to its ends: joined to the
names of material objects, univ. 1 Tim. iv. 4 (i. q. pure) ;
esp. of things so constituted as to answer the purpose for
which that class of things was created; good of its kind:
ta xaQa, of fish, opp. to such as are thrown away (ra
garpa), Mt. xiii. 48; omépya, Mt. xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq.;
xaprds, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 17-19; xii.33; Lk. iii. 9 [L WH
br. kad.]; vi. 43; S€vdpov, opp. to campdy, Mt. xii. 33;
LK. vi. 43; yy, Mt. xiii. 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20; Lk. viii. 15;
34; so too 6 véuos, good in its substance and nature, and
fitted to beget good, Ro. vii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 8; d:dacKcadla,
true and approved teaching, 1 ‘Tim. iv. 6; xapOia Kaj) k.
aya6n, Lk. viii. 15; mapa@yxn [q. v-] (containing [rather,
consisting of] kadd), 2 ‘Tim. i. 14; pérpov, ample meas-
ure (rabbin. 7210 N79N; Eng. good measure), Lk. vi. 38;
Babpos (firm [but see Babyds]), 1 Tim. iii. 13; also depé-
Nios, 1 Tim. vi. 19; 1. q. genuine, approved, mavra Soxipd-
(ere, TO kadov Karexere, 1 Th. v. 21; i. q. precious [A.V.
goodly |, papyapira, Mt. xiii. 45; i. q. superior to other
kinds, oives, Jn. ii. 10; joined to names of men desig-
nated by their oflice, competent, able, such as one ought to
be: rounv, In. x.11, 145; dtaxovos, 1 Tim. iv. 6; oikovdpos,
1 Pet. iv. 10; orpatiwrns, 2'Tim. ii. 3; joined to nouns
denoting an effect estimated by the power it involves,
or by its constancy, or by the end aimed at by its author,
i. q. praiseworthy, noble: orpareia, 1 Tim. i. 18; dyov, 1
Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7; éodoyia, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq.;
épyov, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Jn. x. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1;
plur. Jn. x. 32. «addy eotev, it is expedient, profitable,
wholesome: foll. by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1; w. revi
added [so in 1 Co. 1]. ¢. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [ef. W. 241
(226); B. § 149, 7]; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, RG [also L Tr
mrg.in 47]; 1 Co. vii. 26; ix.15; x. éorw foll. by the ace.
and inf., Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, L (but see above) T Tr (but
not mrg., see above) WH; Heb. xiii. 9; foll. by ec [ef.
B. 217 (187 sq.);_ W. 282 (265) ], Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix.
42; xiv. 21; foll. by édy [B. and W. u. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8;
it is pleasant, delightful, foll. by acc. with inf.: Mt.
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea-
son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy ;
morally good, noble, (Lat. honestus; [cf. Aristot. 76 ka&”
auto Kadov]): Suaxptots Kadod Te Kat Kaxov, Heb. v. 14;
épya, Mt. v.16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25; vi.18; Tit. ii. 7,14; iii.
8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. ii. 12, and Lchm. in 2 Pet. i. 10;
avaotpopn, Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 12; Kady ovveidnots, con-
sciousness of good deeds, [ A.V. a good conscience], Heb.
xiii. 18; kaAd, kaddOv évoridy Tivos, in one’s judgment, Ro.
xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Tim. ii. 3 and Ree. in v. 4; ¢mAov-
aba év xad@, Gal. iv. 18; rd Kahov Karepyafeo@at, Ro. vii.
18 ; movety, ib. 21; 2 Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 17; caddy
eat, it is right, proper, becoming, foll. by an inf.: Mt. xv.
26 (LT déeorw) ; [Mk. vii. 27]; Gal. iv. 18 [here Tr mrg.
impv.]; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor:
paprupia, 1 Tim. iii. 7; dvoua, Jas. ii. 7; od kaddv 7d Kav-
xnpa tparv, 1 Co. v. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably,
comforting and confirming : Oeov pjya (Sept. for 330 435,
which is spoken of the divine promises, Josh. xxi. 45;
Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its promises full of consola-
tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. xadAlor, -ov, better: neut.
adverbially, od kaddoy emvywockets, i. e. better than by
thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242
(227)]. The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf.
Trench § evi. fin.; Zezschwitz, Profangricitiit u. s. w. p.
60 sq. (cf. dyabes, fin.) ; Westcott on Jn. x. 11.]*
KdAvppa, -Tos, TO, (kaAUTT@), a veil, a covering: 2 Co. iii.
13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33); [xdAvppa, or its equiv., is suggested
¢
KaAUTTT®
to the reader by the context in 1 Co. xi. 4 xara xepadijs
éywv; see €xo, I. 1 b.]; metaph., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that
which prevents a thing from being understood. (Hom.,
Trage., Arstph., al. ; Sept. ye
kahve ; fut. fee 1 aor. éxddva; Pass., pres. inf.
cahimrecOa; pf. ptep. kexaduppevos ; [allied with kpimre ;
Vanitek p. 1091; Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept.
for ND2; often in Hom., Tragg. and other poets, more
rarely in prose; fo cover, cover up; prop.: turd, Lk. xxiii.
30; ré re, a thing with anything, Lk. viii. 16; pass. Mt.
viii. 24; trop. to hide, veil, i. e. to hinder the knowledge
of a thing: pf. pass., Mt. x. 26; 2Co.iv.3; mdnOos duap-
tiv, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them,
1 Pet. iv. 8; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas.
¥: 20 tcf Ps. Igxxiv.(lxoexv.)'3.(2) 3)xxxt. (axxii.) Isq:
[Comp.: dva-, azo-, ém-, kaTa-, Tapa-, TEpt-, Tvy-KahUTT@. | *
Kadds, (kadds), adv., [fr. Hom. down ], beautifully, jfine-
ly, excellently, well: [univ. da 7d Kadds oixodopjoba
(Tr -petoOa, q. v.), Lk. vi. 48 T Tr WH]; spec. a.
rightly, so that there shall be no room for blame: joined to
verbs of speaking (dmoxpivecOat, Nadeiv, eye, mpodn-
revew, etc.), well, truly, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. xx. 39;
Jn.iv.17; villi. 48; xiii. 13; [xviii. 23]; Acts xxviii. 25;
filly, 1. e. agreeably to the facts and words of the case,
Mk. xii. 28; xados right! well! an expression of approv-
al: Mk. xii. 32; Ro. xi. 20; of deeds: k. moveiv, to do
well, act uprightly, Jas. ii. 19; 1 Co. vii. 37 sq. (where the
teaching is, that one can do kados, but another kpeioaor) ;
Kad@s rrovety with ptep. to do well that, ete. [B. § 144, 15 a.;
Wers491(323)i),Actsia. 33 5° Phildiv.145\/2 Bet. aji9is 3
Jn. 6, (1 Mace. xii. 18, 22; 2 Macc. ii. 16, etc.); with
verbs denoting a duty or office which one fulfils weil:
1 Tim. ili. 4, 12 sq.; v. 17; spec. honestly, uprightly:
Gal. iv. 17; dvaotpepeoOa, Heb. xiii. 18; srovety, Jas. ii.
8. b. excellently, nobly, commendably: 1 Co. xiv. 17;
Gal. v. 7; Ka\@s mavta weroinke, Mk. vii. 37; with bitter
irony, Mk. vii. 9 (where cf. Fritzsche p. 271 sq.); 2 Co.
x1. 4. ce. honorably, in honor: Jas. ii. 3 [al. give it
here an outward reference, i. q. in a good place, comfort-
ably]. d. Kkad@s eimeiy twa, to speak well of one, Lk.
vi. 263; x. movetv tiva, to do good to, benefit one, Mt. v. 44
Rec.; rewi [W. § 32,1 8.; B. 146 (128) ], Lk. vi. 27; xadas
movi, simply, to do good: Mt. xii. 12. e. Kada@s €xety,
to be well (of those recovering health): Mk. xvi. 18.*
[kapeé, see Kdyo. Fi
KayNAos, -ov, 6, 7, Hebr. pa, (fr. Hdt. down], a camel
{BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, ‘Nat. Hist. ete. p- 58 sqq.]:
Mt. iii. 4; ME i. 6; in proverbs, Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25;
Lk. xviii. 25, (meaning, ‘something almost or altogether
impossible’ [ef. Farrar in The Expositor for 1876 i. p.
369 sqq.; esp. Wetzstein in the Sitzungsberichte d. Akad.
d. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, 1873, pp. 581-596]); Mt.
xxiii. 24 (of one who is careful not to sin in trivial mat-
ters, but pays no heed to the more important matters).*
Kapudos, -ov, 6, a cable; the reading of certain Mss. in
Mt. xix. 24 and Lk. xviii. 25, [see Tdf.’s notes]. The
word is found only in Suidas [1967 c.] and the Schol. on
Arstph. vesp. [10380]: “
, A ‘ t A Aa
KdptAos TO TaXv oxoWioy dia Tod
323
”
Kav
i.” Cf. Passow [or L. and S.]s. v.; [WH. App. p.
151°].*
kdptvos, -ov, 6, 9, [Hom. ep. 14, 2 ete., Hdt. on], a furnace
(either for smelting, Xen. vectig. 4, 49, or for burning
earthen ware, or baking bread, Gen. xix. 28; Ex. xix.
18; Jer. xi.4; Dan. iii. 6): Mt. xiii. 42,50; Rev.i. 15:
Le ae
koppvw, a form which passed over from the Epie (cf.
Hom. ea 191) and com. language [Apoll. Dyse.
synt. 323, 22; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying
Greek ; condemned by Phryn. [as below]; derived by
syncope and assimilation from carapt@ (which the earlier
and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. kaypeév, kappovi, kdp-
popos, fr. kata ev, Katapovn, Katapopos, cf. Bitm. Gram.
§ 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De
vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete.
p- 173 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq.; Schdfer ad Lamb.
Bos p. 368; (cf. B. 62 (55); W.24,46]): 1 aor. éxdp-
puoa; to shut the eyes, close the eyes: often w. ros dpOar-
povs added; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept.
Is. vi. 10, for pwn, i. e. to besmear), in both which pass.
the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob-
stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel.
(Is. xxix. 10; Lam. iii. 43; kappiew 7d tis Woyis supa,
Philo de somn. i. § 26.) *
Kapvo; 2 aor. exayov; pf. Kekunka;
weary, be weary, (so fr. Hom. down): Rev. ii. 3 Ree.;
Heb. xii. 3. 2. to be sick: Jas. v.15 (Soph., [Hdt.],
Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Leian. al.).*
[Kapol, see Kiyo. |
kapmrrw; fut. kduyyo; 1 aor. éxappa: a. to bend,
bow: ro yovu (and ra yowvara), the knee (the knees), used
by Hom. of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest
(Il. 7, 118; 19, 72); in bibl. Grk. with dat. of pers. to
one i.e. in honor of one, in religious veneration; used
of worshippers: Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 18 (where for
ya foll. by aie mpos twa, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii.
14. b. reflexively, to bow one’s self: xdpyper mav
yovv epoi, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall
worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr. [s. xlv. 23); é€v r@ dvdpare
‘Incov, in devout recognition of the name (of kvpsos)
which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [ef. W. 390
(365); Bp. Lghtft., Meyer, in lov.; also évoua, esp. sub
fin. Comp.: dva-, cvy-Kdurrto |.*
kav [Grsb. xav; see kaya, init.], by crasis for kai éav
ic: Was 5, 350B..p. 10: 707; Prolec. p.. 975) Wii. App:
p- 145°]; hence joined with the subjunctive ar.
and if: Mt. x. 23 GL; Mk. xvi. 18; [LKk. xii. 38 (bis)
Ge ritscts WE eine avillie Ooi ler WH; 1 Co. xiii. 2°
WH, Oo oir txt. WH, 's* bir WH, 3° ih WH]; Jas.
v.15; by aposiopesis with the suppression of the apodo-
sis, kav peév rowan Kapmov, Sc. ed €xet it is well (or some
such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9; cf. W. 600 (558); [B. § 151,
26]. 2. also or even if; a. tf only, at least, in
abridged discourse: kav tév ipatiwy avrod, sc. dopa,
Mk. v. 28; also iva (sc. dyavrat airov) kav Tov kpaamédou
. dWovra, Mk. vi. 56;
avTov émioKidon a’tav) Kav 7 oKia etc. Acts v. 15;
1. to grow
o > ’ , ‘
wa epxopevov Ilerpov (sc. tt
Kav ws
Kava
adpova sc. déEnoGé pe, 2 Co. xi. 16; (Sap. xiv. 4; xv. 2).
Cf. B. § 149, 6; [W. 584 (543): Green, Gram. of the
N. T. p. 230; Alotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 139 sq.; L. and S.
s.v.; Soph. Lex. s. v.]- b. even if: Mt. xxi. 21; xxvi.
35: Jn. vill. 14; x. 38; [xi. 25]; Heb. xii. 20.*
Kava [-va WH; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; W.§ 6,1 m.],
7 [B. 21 (19)], Cana, indecl. [W. 61 (60); but dat. -va
Rec." in Jn. ii. 1, 11], prop. name of a village of Galilee
about three hours distant from Nazareth towards the
northwest, surviving at present in a place (partly unin-
habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-Jelil; cf.
Robinson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 346 sq.; also his Later
Bibl. Researches, p. 108; ef. Ewald, Gesch. Christus
u.s. w. p. 147 (ed. 1); Riietschi in Herzog vii. 234; [Por-
ter in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in-
clined to reopen the question of the identification of
Cana; see e.g. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.; Zeller, in Quart.
Statem. of PALE Expl. Fund, No. iii. p. 71 sq.; Arnaud,
Palestine p. 412 sq.; Conder, Tent Work ete. i. 150 sq. J:
A fine tig a Tihs iver Mee ora Ui
Kavavaios 1, [Tr WH in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18 (for
RG Kavavirns, q. v-); ace. to the interp. of Bleek (Erklar.
d. drei ersten Evv. i. p. 417) et al. a native of Cana (see
Kava); but then it ought to be written Kavaios. The
reading Kavavaios seems to be a clerical error occasioned
by the preceding Gaddaios [or AeBBatos]; cf. Fritzsche
on Mt. x. 4. [But -aios is a common ending of the Gre-
cized form of names of sects (cf. "Acoiaios, bapicaios,
Saddovkaios, Eooaios). Hence the word is prob. derived
fr. the Aramaic jp (see next word) and corresponds
to ¢yAwrns, q. v. (cf. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp.
Lahtft. Fresh Revision ete. p. 138 sq.]*
Kavavirns, -ov, 6, (fr. Chald. TSP, Hebr. 89), i. q. 6
(nwrns (ace. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acts i.
13), q. v., the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon :
RG (the latter with small «) in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18.*
Kav5axn, -ns, 7, Candace, a name common to the queens
of a region of Ethiopia whose capital was Napata; just
as the proper name Ptolemy was common to the Egyp-
tian kings, and Henry to the Reuss princes (Strabo 17,
1, 54 p. 820; Plin. h. n. 6, 35; Dio Cass. 54,5): Acts viii.
27; ef. Laurent, Die Konigin Kandake, in the Zeitschr.
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1862, p. 632 sqq. [reprinted in his
N. T. Studien p. 140 sq.; cf. esp. B. I. Am. ed. s. v.].*
Kavav, -dvos, 6, (kavva, [lebr. mp a cane, reed; Arab.
sLis a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff
[ef. Vanicek, Fremdworter ete. p. 21]), prop. a rod or
straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is
fastened to keep it straight; used for various purposes
(see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.); a measuring rod, rule;
a carpenter’s line or measuring tape, Schol. on Eur.
Hippol. 468; hence i. q. ro pérpov rod mndjparos (Pol-
lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the
Olympic games; accordingly in the N. T. l. a
definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which
one’s power or influence is confined ; the province assigned
one; one’s sphere of activity: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2.
324
KaTNNEVED
Metaph. any rule or standard, a principle or law of in-
vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class.
Grk., as rod cadov, Eur. ile 602; Gpo. tav dyabay x.
cuter Dem. pro cor. p. 324, 27): Gal. vi. 16; Phil. iii.
16 Ree. Cf. Credner, Zur Gesch. des Kanons (Hal.
1847), p. 6 sqq.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T.,
App. A; briefly in B.D. s. v. Canon of Scripture; for
exx. of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
Karepvaotp or more correctly (with L'T Tr WH [cef.
WH. App. p. 160; Scrivener, Introd. p. 561]) Kadap-
vaovp, (1593 a village, and DIM) consolation; hence ‘the
village of consolation,’ [al. ‘village of Nachum’ (a
prop. name)]; Kamapvaovp, Ptol. 5, 16,4), 4, Capernaum
or Capharnaum, a flourishing city of Galilee (Mt. xi. 23;
Lk. x. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of
Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24; hence 7
mapaOadaccia, Mt. iv. 13), near the place where the Jor-
dan flows into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in
the O. T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf.
also B. D.s. v. Caphar]}. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10,
8) a fountain in Galilee called by the neighboring
residents Kaapvaovp, and (vita 72) ‘kapnv Kepapyopny’,
and it is quite probable that he meant the town we are
speaking of. It is mentioned in the N. T. (besides the
ne already cited) i in Mt. viii. 5; xvii. 24; Mk.i. 21; ii.
1 xc oS eu lakealvaeosmalosevits ‘et ne ii. 12: iv. 46; vi. 59.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Waianae in Herzog vii. 369;
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 493 sq.; [the last named writ.
gives at length (see also Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Palaest.-
Vereins for 1879, p. 63 sqq.) his reasons for preferring
(contra Robinson, Sepp, ete.) to identify C. with Tell
Hum; so (after earlier writ.; cf. Arnaud p. 414), Winer
, Dr. Wilson, Lynch, Ritter, Delitzsch, Tristram
(Land of Israel, ed. 3, p. 428 sqq.) and more recently
Capt. Wilson (‘Our Work in Palestine’ p. 186 sq. and
‘Recovery of Jerusalem’ p. 266 sq. (292 sqq.)). But Con-
der (Tent Work in Palestine ii. 182 sqq.) argues fr.
Jewish author. in favor of Khan Minyeh; see Lb. D. Am.
Cd 385 Valje
kamndevw ; (Kkamndos, i.e.
ner ;
a. an inn-keeper, esp. a vint-
b. a petty retailer, a huckster, pedler; cf. Sir.
XXVi. 29 ov StxarwOnoerar Karndos ard duaprias) ; a.
to be a retailer, to peddle ; b. with ace. of the thing,
to make money by selling anything; to get sordid gain by
dealing in anything, to do a thing for base gain (oi ta pa-
Onpata meputyovres Kata méAeLs Kal Tw@AodvTES K. KaTNAEL-
ovtes, Plat. Prot. p. 313d.; paynv, Aeschyl. Sept. 551
(545); Lat. cauponari bellum, i. e. to fight for gain, trade
in war, Enn. ap. Cie. offic. 1, 12, 38; éraipav rb tis Spas
avO0s karn\evovoav, Philo de caritat. § 14, cf. leg. ad
Gaium § 50, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence
some suppose that camnAevew Tt. Adyov Tov Oeod in 2 Co. ii.
17 is equiv. to to trade in the word of God, i. e. to try to
get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as ped-
lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities
for the sake of gain (of xamndoi gov picyovat tov oivor
vdart, Is. i. 22 Sept.; kamndot, of Tov olvov Kepavvirres,
Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; of @urdcodor amodi8ovra Ta wr
KQTTVOS
Onpara, Somep of kamndor, Kepagdpuevoi ye of moAdoi Kat
SoAdcavres kai Kakoperpovrtes, Lucian. Hermot. 59), xamn-
Neve Te was also used as synonymous with fo corrupt, to
adulterate (Themist. or. 21 p. 247 ed. Hard. says that
the false philosophers 76 Gedtarov rav avOpwrivev ayabav
KiBdnrevew Te Kai aicyuvew kK. karnAevev); and most in-
terp. rightly decide in favor of this meaning (on account
of the context) in 2 Co. ii. 17, cf. doAodv tov Adyov Tov
cod, ib. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § ]xii.]*
Katvés, -od, 6, [fr Hom. down], smoke: Rev. viii. 4; ix.
2sq. 17,18; xiv. 11; xv.8; xviii. 9,18; xix. 3; atpis
xamvou, A. V. vapor of smoke, Acts ii. 19 after Joel ii. 30
(ai 3)*
Karrafoxia, -as, 7, Cappadocia, a region of Asia Minor,
bounded under the Roman empire on the N. by Pontus,
on the E. by Armenia Minor, on the 8. by Cilicia and
Commagene, on the W. by Lycaonia and Galatia [BB.
DDFs vei) Acts i179; (1, Pet. i./1.*
Kapdia, -as, 7, poetic xkpadia and kapdin (in the latter
form almost always in Hom. [only at the beginning of a
line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis xpa-
din; Ebeling, Lex. Hem. s. v.]), [fr. a root signifying
to quiver or palpitate; cf. Curtius § 39; Vaniéek p.
1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 mapa rd kpadaivw, 76 ceiw:
detkivntos yap 7 Kapdia); allied with Lat. cor; Eng.
heart|; Sept. for 39 and SEP the heart ; 1. prop.
that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the
circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the
seat of physical life: 2S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tob.
vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq.,17(16). Hence 2. univ. xapdia
denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual
life; and a. the vigor and sense of physical life (Ps.
ci. (cii.) 5; ornpioov thy Kapdiavy cov rou@ aprov, Judg.
xix. 5; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 15): rpépew ras Kap-
dias, Jas. v.53 é€umimda@v ras xapdias tpodns, Acts xiv. 17;
Bapeiv r. kapdias KpauaAy kai peOn, Lk. xxi. 34; [but see
b. 6. below] ; b. the centre and seat of spiritual life,
the soul or mind, as it is the fountain and seat of the
thoughts, passions, desires, appetites, affections, purposes,
endeavors [so in Eng. heart, inner man, etc.]; a.
unive 2 Mt,v. 83 vi. 215 Mk. vil. 19; Lkvi.513 G50;
will. 12,15; Acts‘v.3; Ro. x. 9'sq.; 1 Co. xiv: 25; 2'Co.
vio 11; Eph. vi. 5; Coli. 22591 Pet. iii. 4, ete:3 Plur::
Minx. 47 Mik. 17. °6,°8.;) ive 15 [RL txt: Trmrg.]) Gk:
ives itso: v.22; [xxiv/38 WG Lmre.; Acts vii shoe
Tr WHtxt.]; Ro. ii. 15; xvi.18; 2 Co. iii. 2; Gal. iv. 6;
Phil. iv. 7; Eph. v.19 Lchm.; Heb. viii. 10 [T WH mrg.
sing.]; x. 16, ete. # xap8éa is distinguished fr. 7d oréua or
fr. ra xeiea: Mt. xv. 8,18 sq.; Mk. vii. 6; 2 Co. vi. 11;
Ro. x. 8 sq.; fr. 76 mpdowmov: 2 Co. v. 12; 1 Th. ii. 17;
meptropy Kapdias, Ro. ii. 29; amepitunroe tH Kapdia, Acts
vii. 51[L T Tr WH txt. -diars, WH mrg. gen. -dias, cf. B.
170 (148) ]. of things done from the hearti.e. cordially or
sincerely, truly (without simulation or pretence) the foll.
phrases are used : éx kapdias (Arstph. nub. 86), Ro. vi. 17;
and L T Tr WH in 1 Pet. i. 22, where RG ek xaOapas xap-
Sias,asin 1 Tim.i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22° dé rév capdiav, Mt.
Xvill. 35 (dd Kapdias edvyapiotos Tois Oeots, Antonin. 2,
325
Kapola
3); év dAn tr. x. and é& OAns tr. x, Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii.
30, 33; Lk. x. 27, and Ree. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5;
xxvi. 16; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 34); per dAnOwis xapdias,
Heb. x. 22. épevvav ras xapdias, Ro. viii. 27; Rev. ii. 23;
Soxipagew, 1 Th. ii. 4; ywoorew, Lk. xvi. 15, (erage, Jer.
xvii. 10; Ps. vii. 10); Scavoiyew thv x. (see diavoiya, 2),
Acts xvi. 14; jv 7 kapdia k. 7 ux pia, there was perfect
unanimity, agreement of heart and soul, Acts iv. 32;
riBévar Tt ev TH K. (173 and 35 Sy pi, 1S. xxi. 12; Mal.
ii. 2; Dan.i.8; ridévar ev ornbecow, ev ppecir, etc., in
Hom.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered
more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66; to fix in the heart
i. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V.
conceived in thy heart]; also eis t. xapdtav [LT Tr WH
ev t. k.] foll. by the inf., Lk. xxi. 14; Badrdeuw eis rHv x.
tivés, foll. by iva, to put into one’s mind the design of
doing a thing, Jn. xiii. 2; also dddvae foll. by an inf,,
Rev. xvii. 17; dvaBaiver éni tiv x. twos, foll. by an inf,
the purpose to do a thing comes into the mind, Acts vii.
23; év rh kapOla joined to verbs of thinking, reflect-
ing upon, doubting, ete.: évOvpetrOa, diadoyiferOa,
Mt. ix.4; Mk. ii. 6,8; Lk. iii. 15; v. 22; eye, etrety
(i373 7s), to think, consider with one’s self, Mt. xxiv.
48; Lk. xii.45; Ro.x.6; Rev. xviii. 7, (Deut. viii. 17;
ix. 4); oupBdddXrev, to revolve in mind, Lk. ii.19; dea-
kpiverOa, to doubt, Mk. xi. 23; Svadoyirpol dvaBaivovor,
of persons in doubt, Lk. xxiv. 38 [RG Lmrg. plur.];
dvaBaiver te emt Kapdiav, the thought of a thing enters the
mind, 1 Co. ii. 9. B. spec. of the understanding, the
faculty and seat of intelligence (often so in Hom. also [cf.
Néigelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 319 sq.; Zezschwitz, Pro-
fangriicitiit u.s.w. pp. 25 sq. 50]; “cor domicilium sapi-
eniiae,” Lact. de opif. dei c. 10, ef. Cic. Tuse. 1, 9; 55),
1 K. x. 2; Job xii. 3; xvii. 4, etc.; [cf. Meyer on Eph.
i. 18 and reff.]): Ro. i. 21; 2Co.iv.6; Eph. i. 18 [Ree.
Stavoias}; 2 Pet. i. 19; cumévar tH Kapdia, Mt. xiii. 15;
Acts xxviii. 27; voeiv 77 x. Jn. xii. 40. of the dulness
of a mind incapable of perceiving and understanding
divine things the foll. expressions occur: éraxivOn 7 k-
Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10); mapovv rnp
xapdiav, Jn. xii. 40; mer@popern xapdia, Mk. vi. 52; viii.
17; 9 m@pwors THs x. Mk. iii. 5; Eph. iv. 18; Bpadvs t7 x.
slow of heart, Lk. xxiv. 25; kdAvppa emt thy K. KeiTat, 2
Co. iii. 15. sy. of the will and character: dyvigew xap-
Siac, Jas. iv. 8; xaOapitew ras x. Acts xv. 9 peppavtt-
opevot tas k- Heb. x. 22; xapdia evbeia [cf. W. 32], Acts
viii. 21; woynpd, Heb. iii. 12 [ef. B. § 132, 24; W. 194
(183)]; dueravénros, Ro. ii. 5; yeyvpvacpevn meovegias,
2 Pet. ii. 14; ornpi¢ew tas x. 1 Th. iii. 13; BeBacody, in
pass., Heb. xiii. 9;
x. Acts viii. 22; ai BovAai rave. 1 Co. iv. 5; mpoatpeioOat
7H x. 2 Co. ix. 7; xpivew (to determine) and €dpatos ev rh
n.1Co. vii.37. 8. of the soul so far forth as it is affected
and stirred in a bad way or good, or of the soul as the seat
of the sensibilities, affections, emotions, desires, appetites,
passions: 4 kapdia Katopervn jv, of the soul as greatly and
peculiarly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32; ai ériOupiae rdv capdiar,
Ro. i. 24 ; ornpifew ras x. of the cultivation of constancy
oxAnpuvev, Heb. iii. 8; 9 emivora tis
KApPOLOYVOOTNS
and endurance, Jas. v. 8. in ref. to good-will and love:
yew Tuva ev TH k. Lo have one in one’s heart, of constant re-
membrance and steadfast affection, Phil. i. 7 (‘te tamen
in toto pectore semper habet ’ Ovid. trist. 5, 4, 24); eivau
év TH K- twos, to be cherished in one’s heart, to be loved
by one perpetually and unalterably, 2 Co. vii. 3; evdoxia
tis x. Ro. x. 1. in ref. to joy and pleasure: nippavOy 7
x. Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); yapnoera 7 x. Jn. Xvi.
22; dynp kata TH kK. TOD Geod, i. e. in whom God delights,
Acts xiii. 22 ; of the pleasure given by food, Acts xiv. 17
({W. 156 (148) note] see 2 a. above). in ref. to grief,
pain, anguish, ete.: Avan memAnpwxe THY K. JN. Xvi. 6;
6dvvn Th kapdia pov, Ro. ix. 2; 4 «. rapaooera, Jn. xiv. 1,
27; ouvoyy xapdias, 2 Co. ii.4; Bapetv r. kapdias pepipvais
Biworckats, Lk. xxi. 34 [ef. 2 a. above]; Suampiopa 77 x. Acts
vii. 545; ouvrerptppevos tiv x. Lk. iv. 18 RL br.; kareviyn-
oavrTn x. Acts ii. 37 [LT Tr WH rip x.) ; cvvOpiarecy ry
«x. Acts xxi. 13. €. of a soul conscious of good or bad deeds
(our conscience): 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq. (Keel. vii. 22; so BEV
Job xxvii. 6; 4 kapdia matdocet twd, 1S. xxiv. 6; 25.
xxiv. 10). 3. used of the middle or central or inmost
part of any thing, even though inanimate: rhs yas (which
some understand of Hades, others of the sepulchre), Mt.
ri. 40 (79s Oadacons, Jon. ii. 4 for 19; and for the same
ev 2.60 @ Oadacons, Ex. xv. 8,19; add Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.]
19; ths kre Wvdpas, Aristot. probl. 16, 8 [al. cwdia]). Cf.
Beck, Bibl. Seelenlehre, ch. iii. § 20 sqq. p. 64 sqq.; De-
litzsch, Bibl. Psychologie (Leipz. 1861) iv. § 12 p. 248 sqq.
[also in Herzog 2, vi. 57 sqq.|; Oehler in Herzog vi. p.
15 sqq. [also in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) § 71]; Wit
tichen in Schenkel iii. 71 sq.
KapSio-yvaotys, -ov, 6, (Kapdia, yywotns), knower of
hearts: Acts i. 24; xv. 8. (Eccl. writ. [W. 100 (94) ].)*
Kapmos [cf. W. p. 51], -ov, 6, Carpus, the name of an
unknown man: 2 Tim. iv. 13.*
Kaptds, -ov, 6, (cf. Lat. carpo; A-S. hearf-est (harvest
i.e. the ingathering of crops); Curtius § 42]; Hebr.
5; fr. Hom. down; fruit; 1. prop.: the fruit of
trees, Mt. xii. 33; xxi. 19; Mk. xi. 14; Lk. vi. 445 xiii.
6sq.; of vines, Mt. xxi. 34; Mk. xii. 2; Lk.xx.10; 1 Co.
ix. 7 >of, the melds,c1uk. xal. die: Mk ive 29): 92m. a1-36
[Jas.v. 7]; Pdaoravev, Jas. v. 18; movetv, to bear fruit
(after the Hebr. 95 mvy [see moréw, I. 1 e.]), Mt. iii.
10; vii. 17-19 ; xiii. 26; Lk. iii. 9; vi. 43; viii. 8; xiii. 9;
Rev. xxii. 2; dsddvar, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7 sq.; épew,
Misviie 8 Wal 3 Jin, x08 24 «| seve 2,4. 8q-5 (trop. cv, 8,
16); dmodiddva, to yield fruit, Rev. xxii. 2; to render |
(pay) the fruit, Mt. xxi.41; by a Hebraism, 6 xapzos rijs
cotXias, i. e. the unborn child, Lk. i. 42 (;432 195, Deut.
xxviii. 4, where Sept. ra exyova rhs Kowdias); THs dagvos
the fruit of one’s loins, i. e. his progeny, his posterity,
Acts ii. 30 (Gen. xxx. 2; Ps. exxvi. (cxxvii.) 3; cxxxi.
(exxxii.) 11; Mic. vi. 7); cf. W. 33 (382). 2. Me-
taph. that which originates or comes from something; an
effect, result ; a. i. q. €pyov, work, act, deed: with gen.
of the author, tod mvevparos, Gal. v.22; rod dords, Eph.
v.9 (Ree. r. rvevparos) ; THs dikacoovvns, Phil. i. 11 [ef.
b. below]; of Christian charity, i. e. benefit, Ro. xv. 28;
326
Sruitful, productive: Acts xiv. 17,
Kata
kaprrov troAvv pepe, to accomplish much (for the propa-
gation of Christianity and its furtherance in the souls of
men), Jn. xv. 8, 16; used of men’s deeds as exponents
of their hearts [cf. W. 372 (348) ], Mt. vii. 16, 20; dya-
Goi, Jas. lil. 17; kaprot rns Bac. rod Geov, deeds required
for the attainment of salvation in the kingdom of God,
Mt. xxi. 43 ; srovety kapmovs a€ious Ths petavoias, to exhibit
deeds agreeing with a change of heart, Mt. iii. 8; Lk. iii.
8, (cf. d&va ths petavoias epya mpaooew, Acts xxvi. 20).
b. advantage, profit, utility: Phil. i. 22; iv. b7; éyew Kap-
mov, to get fruit, Ro. i. 13; vi. 21 sq.; tas Suxacocvys,
benefit arising from righteousness [al. make it gen. of
apposition, W. § 59, 8 a.], Heb. xii. 11; which consists in
righteousness (gen. of appos.), Jas. iii. 18 [ef. Phil. i. 11
in a. above, and Meyer ad loc.; Prov. xi. 830; Amos vi.
12]. c. by a Hebraism of xaprot rév xeu€wr, praises,
which are presented to God as a thank-offering: Heb.
Xili: 15 (Hos: xiv. 25, Prov. xilj 14.5 xxie 49 (oux1. 31);
Cf. W. 33 (32) note 1. a. cuvayew kaprov eis Cony
ai@moy, to gather fruit (i. e. a reaped harvest) into life
eternal (as into a granary), is used in fig. discourse of
those who by their labors have fitted souls to obtain eter-
nal life, Jn. iv. 36.*
kaprro-opéw, -@; 1 aor. exapropdpnoa; pres. pass. ptep.
kaptropopovpevos ; (kaprodépos, q.V-); tobear fruit; (Vulg.
fructifico; Colum., Tertull.) ; a. prop. ({-Xen., Aris-
tot.], Theophr. de hist. plant. 3, 3, 7; Diod. 2,49): y6ép-
tov, Mk. iv. 28 (dura, Sap. x. 7). b. metaph. to bear,
bring forth, deeds: thus of men who show their knowl-
edge of religion by their conduct, Mt. xiii. 23; Mk. iv.
20; Lk. viii. 15; ev (for RG LTrmrg. WH mreg. éy [cf.
B. 103 (90), see eis, 4 a.]) rptdkovra etc. sc. kaprois, Mk.
iv. 20 T Tr txt. WH txt. [see ev, I. 5 f.]; ev mavri épyw
aya0o, Col. i. 10; rwi (dat. commodi) to one who reaps
the fruit, i.e. fruit acceptable to him, 7@ 6e@, Ro. vii. 4 ;
T@ Oavare, i.e. (without the fig.) to produce works re-
warded with death, Ro. vii. 5; in mid. to bear fruit of
one’s self, Col. i. 6 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
Kaptro-pdpos, -ov, (kapmrés and depw), fruil-bearing,
(Pind., Xen., Theo-
phr., Diod., Sept.) *
kaptepéw, -@: 1 aor. exaptepnoa; (Kaptepds [fr. Kdptos
i.e. kpdros, ‘strong ’]); to be steadfast: Heb. xi. 27 [A.V.
endured]. (Job ii. 9; Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in Grk.
writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. down.) [Comp.: mpoo-kap-
Tepew. | *
Kapdos, -eos (-ovs), 7d, (fr. kappw to contract, dry up,
wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff; (A.V. mote]:
Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq., where it figuratively denotes
asmaller fault. (Gen. viii. 11; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down.) *
kara, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Td
Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 146*],
a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direetion
from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined
with the gen. and the ace.
I. With the GenitIve (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B.
§ 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: kara
KATA
tov kpnuvov, Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; naréyeev
kata THs Kesadjs (so that it flowed down from his head
[ef. W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to
omit card with LTTr WH; see xcatayéw), Mk. xiv. 3;
hence xara xepadjjs (a veil hanging down from his head)
éxav, 1 Co. xi. 4 (LA. V. having his head covered] cf. xa-
ranéracpa [or rather kdAvppa (q. v.), but see éy I.1b.]).
b. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W.
381 (357) note!; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Crete]; trop. 4
kata Bdbous mrwyeia reaching down into the depth, i.e.
deep or extreme poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 (ef. Strabo 9, 5
p- 419 eari rd pavtetoyv avtpov Kothov Kata Badovs). Cc.
used of motion or extension through a space from top to
bottom; hence through, throughout: in the N. T. [and in
Luke’s writ.; B. § 147, 20] everywh. with the adj. dos,
as xa@’ Ans Tis meptxopov THs lovdaias, THs “Idmmns, Lk.
iv. 14; xxiii. 5; Actsix. 31; x. 37, (Oteomdpnoav xara tips
voou, Polyb. 3,19, 7; eoxedacpeévor kata THs ywpas, 1, 17,
10; 3, 76,10; yy wapaBaivery tas dpparorpoyias, ada
kar avtov ievat, Ael. v. h. 2, 27). 2. metaph. a.
after verbs of swearing, adjuring, (the hand being,
as it were, placed down upon the thing sworn by [ef.
Bnhdy. p. 238; Kiihner § 433 fin.]), by: Mt. xxvi. 63;
Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Is. xlv. 23; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 13; Judith i.
12; Dem. 553,17; 554, 23). b. against (prop. down
upon [W. 382 (358)]; Hebr.5y): opp. to tmép, Mk. ix.
40; 2Co. xiii. 8; Ro. viii. 31; opp. to pera, Mt. xii. 30;
Lk. xi. 23; after emOupetv, Gal. v.17; eieiv movnpov
(pyya), Mt.v. 11; dadeiv, Acts vi. 13; Jude 15; paprupia,
Mk. xiv. 55; Mt. xxvi. 59; paprupeiv, 1 Co. xv. 15 [here
many take x. i. q. with regard to, of ; cf. De Wette ad loc. ;
Lob.ad Phryn. p. 272]; Wevdouaprupeiv, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. ;
yoyyutew, Mt. xx.11 (Ex. xv. 24 Alex.) ; d:dacxewv, Acts
Xxi. 28; Wevdeo Oar, Jas. iii. 14 (Xen. apol. 13); cupBovArov
AaBetv or roretv, Mt. xxvii. 1; Mk. iii. 6; aliretoOai 71, Acts
xxv. 3,15; after verbs of accusing, etc. : éyew 7, Mt.
v. 23; Mk. xi. 25; Rev. ii. 4, 14, 20; xarnyopeiv, Lk. xxiii.
14; xarnyopia, Jn. xviii. 29 [Tdf. om. xara]; eyxadeiv, Ro.
Vili. 33; évruyydvew tii, Ro. xi. 2; add, Acts xxiv. 1;
xxv. 2; Jas. v.93 70 yeupdypaop, Col. ii. 14; xpicw zroeiv,
Jude 15; after verbs of rebelling, fighting, pre-
vailing: Mt. x. 35; xii. 25; Acts xiv. 2; 1 Co. iv. 6;
2Co. x. 5; 1 Pet. ii. 11; [Rev. xii. 7 Rec.]; ioyvew, Acts
xix. 16; e€ovciay éxew, Jn. xix. 11.
II. With the Accusative; cf. W. § 49d.; Buhdy. p.
239 sqq.- 1. of Place; <a. of the place through
which anything is done or is extended (prop. down
through; opp. to ava, up through): Ka@ odnv thy wodw
xjputoew, Lk. viii. 39; expepew kata tas mAareias, Acts
v. i5[RG]; add, Lk. ix. 6; xiii. 22; xv.14; Acts viii.
Aexi les exy, 2a eexie alls xxyelo, 12) exile 2 irovcrKane
ra €6rm (throughout Gentile lands) ravras "Iovdaious, Acts
xxi. 21, cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. i. 1; xara tyv 6d0v, along
the way i. e. on the journey [W. 400 (374) note 1], Lk.
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi.13; along (Lat. secun-
dum or praeter [R. V. off ]), méXayos 76 Kata THY Kidtkiav,
Acts xxvii. 5. b. of the place to which one is brought
(down): yevopevos [Tr WH om. y.] xara tov romov [ed-
327
KaTa
Oey etc.], Lk. x. 32 [ef. Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad
loc.]; ¢AOovres kata THY Muoiav, Acts xvi. 7; Kata tiv
Kvidov, Acts xxvii. 7; kar’ avrov, (came) to him, i. e. to
the place where he was lying, Lk. x. 33. ce. of direc-
tion; towards: AtBvn 7 Kata Kupnyny, that Libya which
lay towards Cyrene, i. e. Libya of Cyrene (i. e. the chief
city of which was Cyrene), Acts ii. 10; Bdézetv, to look, lie
towards (see Prérw, 3), Acts xxvii. 12; mopeverOat kara
peonpBpiav, Acts vill. 26; xara oxorov, towards the goal,
my eye on the goal, Phil. iii. 14. against (Lat. adversus
w. the ace.) ; over against, opposite: kata mpoawror, to
the face, Gal. ii. 11 (see mpocwmov, 1 a.); i. q. present,
Acts xxv. 16 [A. V. face to face]; 2Co.x.1; w. gen. of
pers. added, before the face of, in the presence of, one:
Lk. ii. 31; Acts ili. 13; ra xara mpoowrov, the things
that are open to view, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7; kar
opbadpovs, before the eyes, Gal. iii. 1; here, too. ace. to
some [cf. W. 400 (374) note *] belongs xara Oedv, Ro.
viii. 27, but it is more correctly referred te 3 ¢. a. be-
low. d. of the place where: kaz’ oixov (upp. to
ev T@ iep@), at home, privately [W. 400 (374) note 1],
Acts li. 46; v. 42. e. of that which so joins itself
to one thing as to separate itself from another; our for,
by: «ar idiav, apart, see tdtos, 2; Ka éavtov, alone (by
himself), Acts xxviii. 16; Jas. ii. 17 [R. V. in itself], (2
Mace. xiii. 13; of ka@’ avrovs “EAAnves, Thue. 1, 138; of
Botwrot Kad abrov's, Diod. 13, 72; other exx. are given
by Alberti, Observv. etc. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e
Philone p. 460 sq.); €xew te kad’ éavrdv, to have a thing
by and to one’s self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one’s mind,
Ro. xiv. 22 (Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 1; Heliod. 7, 16; [cf. W.
401 (375) note!]); hence, of that which belongs to
some pers. or thing: xara tiv odaav exxAnoiav, belonging
to [A. V. in] the church that was there, Acts xiii. 1; 9
€xkAnoia kat oikdv twos, belonging to one’s household
(see éxxAnoia, 4 b.aa.); hence it forms a periphrasis —
now for the gen., as ra Kata “Iovdaious €@n (i. Gq. TOY ‘Lov-
daiwy), Acts xxvi. 3; now for the possessive pron., oi
ka@ twas momnrai, your own poets, Acts xvii. 28 [here
WH ure. xaé’ nyas, see their Intr. § 404]; vdépou rod
ka@’ ipas, [a law of your own], Acts xviii. 15; 76 kar’ ewe
mpdOvpov, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see mpdOvuos |; 4 Kal?
ipas miorts, Eph. i. 15, (7) kata tov TUpavvoy @pétns TE Kat
dvvapes, Diod. 14, 123 péype tev ka’ nuas ypsvev, Dion.
Hal. antt. 2,1; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 21 p. 88; a
throng of exx. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schweighaeuser,
Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [ef. W. 154 (146); 400 (374)
note ?; esp. B. § 132, 2]). 2. of Time [cf. W. 401
(374) ]; during, about; Lat. tempore :
rov Tov kaipdv, Acts xii. 1; xix. 23; No. ix.9; Heb. ix. 9
[RG]; xara rd adrd, at the same time, together, Acts
xiv. 1 (see airés, III. 1); xara rd pecovixriov, Acts xvi.
25; kara peoov tis vuxtds, Acts xxvil. 27; [possibly also
kata peonpBpiar, al noon, Acts viii. 26 (see peonu pia, b.) };
Kard katpdv, see Kaipds, 2 a.; Kar’ apxas (Hat. 3, 153), in
the beginning (of things), Heb. i.10; xara thy npeépar Tou
metpacpov, Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this pass. have ren-
dered the prep. 5 in the context by as (€v r@ mapamixpa
a> Sika as =
KaT €Kketvoyv OY TOL-
caTa
op, Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8), some would take it and xara here
i. q. like asin the day etc.; Vulg. secundum]; xara wav oaB-
Barov, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21; xviii. 4; xa? Exaoryy nuepar,
Heb. iii. 13; xara prva (€va) exaorov, Rev. xxii. 2; car’
évap, during a dream, see dvap. 3. it denotes re f-
erence,relation, proportion, of various sorts; a.
distributively, indicating a succession of things fol-
lowing one another [W. 401 (374); B.§ 147,20]; a.
in ref. to place: cata modu, in every city, (city by city,
from city to city), Lk. viii. 1,4; Acts xv. 21; xx. 23; Tit.
i. 5, (Thue. 1,122); «ar? éxcAnoiay, in every church, Acts
xiv. 23; w. the plur., cara modes, Lk. xiii. 22; kara ras
kopas, Lk. ix. 6 (Hdt. 1, 96); xara rémovs, Mt. xxiv. 7;
Mk. xiii.8; Lk. xxi. 11; xara ras ovvaywyds, in every
synagogue, Acts xxii. 19; [cf. cata r. otxous eiomopevope-
vos, Acts viii. 3 ]. B. in ref. totime: kar éros, yearly,
year by year, Lk. ii. 41; also car’ évavrdy (see émaurés) ;
ka@ juepay ete., see nucpa, 2 p. 278‘; Kata play caBBarov
[RK G -rv], on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2;
kata €optnv, at any and every feast, Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk.
xv. 6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Rec.; cf. B. § 133, 26. Others un-
derstand the phrase in these pass. (contextually) at or
during (see 2 above) the feast, viz. the Passover; cf. W.
401 (374)]. sy. univ.: ca@’ éva rravres, all one by one,
successively, 1 Co. xiv. 31, see more fully in eis, 4 ¢.;
xara 800, by two, 1 Co. xiv. 27; xara éxarov kK. Kata TeEVTH-
xovra, by hundreds and by fifties, Mk. vi. 40 LT Tr WH;
kata pépos, severally, singly, part by part, Heb. ix. 5
(IIdt. 9, 25; Xen. anab. 3,4, 22); «ar dvoya, by name
i. e. each by its own name (Vulg. nominatim [or per
nomen}): Jn.x.3; 3Jn.15 (14); ef. Herm. ad Vig. p.
858 sq. b. equiv. to the Lat. ratione habita alicuius
rei vel personae; as respects; with regard to; in reference
to; so far as relates to; as concerning; [W. 401 (375)]:
kaTa gapka OY kata Thy a., as to the flesh (see capé [esp.
2ba); Rot. 3 591n23;'5 7) bOent. 265 x.18* 9'Goxi ts):
oi kup xara o. (Luther well, die leiblichen Herren), in
earthly relations, acc. to the arrangements of society,
Eph. vi. 5; xara rd evayy., kara TH exdoynv, Ro. xi. 28;
add Ro.i.4; vii. 22; Phil. iii. 5 sq.; Heb. ix.9; ra card
Twa, one’s affairs, one’s case, Acts xxiv. 22; xxv. 14;
Eph. vi. 21; Phil. i. 12; Col. iv. 7, (and very often in
class. Grk.) ; xara mdvra tpdrop, in every way, in every re-
spect, Ro. iii. 2; the opp. cara pndéva rpdrov, in no wise,
2 Th. ii. 3; kara wayra, in all respects, in all things, Acts
xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20,22; Heb. ii.17; iv. 15, (Thue. 4,
81). c. according to, agreeably to; in reference to
agreement or conformity to a standard, in various ways
[ W. 401 (375) ]; a. according to anything as a stand-
ard, agreeably to: mepurareiv xara tt, Mk. vii. 5; Ro. viii. 1
[Ree.], 4; xiv. 15; 2 Th. iii. 6; Eph. ii. 2; (qv card, Acts
xxvi. 53 Ro. viii. 12 sq.; mopeveoOa, 2 Pet. iii. 3; dmodi-
ovat tei, Mt. xvi. 27, ete. (see drodidwp, [esp. 4]) ;
AapBavery, 1 Co. iii. 8; so with many other verbs a thing
is said to be done or to occur xard, as in Lk. ii. 27, 29;
Jn. vii. 24; Col. ii. 8; iii. 10; 1 Tim.i. 18; Heb. vii. 15;
vii. 5,9; 1 Jn. v. 14, ete.; (on the phrase kar’ avOpwrov,
see dvOpwros, esp. 1 c.; [ef. «. below; W. 402 (376)]);
328
KaTa
cara thy ypapny, tas ypadas, Jas. ii. 8; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq.;
kata TO yeypappevorv, 2 Co. iv. 13; Kara Td eipnuevov, Ro.
iv. 18; «ara tov vopov, Lk. ii. 39; Jn. xviii. 31; xix. 7;
Heb. ix. 22; xara 7d evayy. pov, Ro. ii. 16; xvi. 25; 2 Tim.
ii. 8, cf. 1 Tim. i. 11; xara rd @piopevov, Lk. xxii. 22;
xaO’ Gpoiwow Oeod, Jas. iii. 9; Kara doyov rightly, justly,
[A. V. reason would ete.], Acts xviii. 14; xard twa, agree-
ably to the will of any one, as pleases him, [W. 401 sq.
(375)]: so xara Oeov, Ro. viii. 27 [ef. 1 e. above]; 2 Co.
vii. 9,11; xara Xptordv "Inoodv, Ro. xv. 5; kara kKUptov,
2 Co. xi. 17; xara tov xabapicpor, after the manner of
purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii.
6; of kata odpka dvtes, who bear, reflect, the nature of
the flesh, i. q. of wapxtxoi, and of xara mvedpua Gvtes i. q. of
mvevparikol, Ro. viii. 5; xara ri yyoooua; in accordance
with what criterion i. e. by what sign shall I know? Lk.
i. 18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the
titles of the records of the life of Christ: evayy. (which
word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) xara Maréaiov, Mdpxov,
etc., as Matthew ete. composed or wrote (it). This use
of the prep. was not primarily a mere periphrasis for
the gen. (Mar@aiov, etc., see II. 1 e. above), but indicated
that the same subject had been otherwise handled by
others, cf. 4 madara Siabnxn kata tovs €BdopnKovra
(in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also
to the Greek translations made by others); oi tmopvn-
paticpot of Kata Neepiav, 2 Mace. ii. 13 [see Grimm ad
loc.].. Subsequently card with an ace. of the writer came
to take the place of the gen., as 7 kata Mwioéa mevrarev-
xos in Epiphanius [haer. 8, 4. Cf. W. 402 (375); B.
3; 157 (137); and see, further, Soph. Lex. s. v. evayyeAoy,
Jas. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4]. B. in proportion
to, according to the measure of: xapiopata Kata Thy xapw
tyv Sobcicav juiv Siadpopa, Ro. xii. 6; Kara 76 peérpov, 2
Co. x. 13; Eph. iv. 7; «ara tiv oxAnpdrnrd cov, Ro. ii. 5;
kata Tov xpovov, Mt. ii. 16; éxaor@ kara thy idiav Svvapmiy,
Mt. xxv.15; without the art. cara ddvayu, 2 Co. viii. 3
(opp. to trép Svvayy, as Hom. Il. 3, 59 Kar’ aicay, ovd
imép aicav); xa6’ dcov, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb.
iii. 3; vii. 20; ix. 27; xara roaovro, by so much, Heb. vii.
22. y. used of the cause} through, on account of,
Jrom, owing to, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence
of, by virtue of) [W. 402 (376) ]: xara macav airiay, [ for
every cause], Mt. xix. 3; kara ryv xdpw Tov Geod, 1 Co.
iii. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, (kata rv Tov Oeod mpo-
vorav, Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6); kata ydpuv, Ro. iv. 16; also
opp. to cara ddeiAnua [R. V. as of... as of], Ro. iv. 4;
of kara pio «Addo, the natural branches, Ro. xi. 21 [cf.
B. 162 (141)]; 9 xara vow ayptédavos, the natural wild
olive tree, ib. 24; 9 xara miotw dixatocvwn, righteousness
proceeding from faith, Heb. xi. 7; add, Ro. viii. 28; ix.
11; xi. 5; xvi. 25 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 8; 2 Co. xiii. 10; Gal. ii
2; iii. 29; Eph. i. 5, 7, 9,11, 19; iii. 7,11, 16, 20; Col. i.
11,29; Phil. i. 20; iii. 21; iv. 11,19; 2Th.i.12; ii. 9;
2 Tim. i. 8 sq.; Heb. ii. 4; vii. 16; Tit.i.3; 1 Pet. 1: 342
Pet. iii. 15. adverbial phrases [W. § 51, 2¢.]: xar’ e€ou-
giay [with authority ], Mk. i. 27; kar’ avayxny, KaTa €KOU-
ov (q. v), [of necessity, of free will], Philem. 14; xara
KATA
yvaorr, 1 Pet. iii. 7; kar’ émiyvoow, Ro. x. 2 [ef. W. 403
(376)]; xara &yvoay, [in ignorance], Acts iii. 17. 8.
of likeness; as, like as: ouvreéow.. . diabjknv Kawny,
od Kara THY ScaOnkny ktr. Heb. viii. 8 sq. (1 K. xi. 10); so
with the acc. of a pers. [ef. under a. above], Gal. iv. 28;
1 Pet. i. 15; «card Geov, after the image of God, Eph. iv.
24; xpiverOa kata avOp@rous, (nv Kara Gedv, to be judged
as it is fit men should be judged, to live as God lives, 1
Pet. iv. 6. Hence it is used e. of the mode in
which a thing is done; of the quality: dvdpes ot car
<£0x7v THs mwodews, the principal men of the city, Acts
XXv. 23; xa@ bropevnv epyou ayabod, i. q. dropevovres ev
épy ayade, [by constancy in well-doing], Ro. ii. 7; esp.
in adverbial phrases: xara tadra in [or after] the same
[or this] manner, Lk. vi. 23 (Ltxt.T Tr WH k. ra atta,
L.mrg. x. ravra), [26 (edd. as before)]; Lk. xvii. 30 (T
Tr WH k. ra atta, GL. radta); Kal trepBodny, Ro. vii.
13; 1 Co. xii. 31, ete., [ef. W. 466 (434); B. 96 (84)];
cata tiotey i. q. muotevovtes [A. V. in faith; cf. W. 403
(376) ], Heb. xi. 13; xara cvyyvopny, od kar’ éxirayny, by
way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co.
vii. 6, ef. 2 Co. viii. 8; kara xparos, Acts xix. 20; ka
époornra, Heb. iv. 15; on the phrase xara avOpwrov see
avOpwros, 1 ¢. [cf. a. above]. d. of the end aimed
at; the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad
[W. 402 sq. (376)]): kar’ émayyeXiay (ors, to proclaim
life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see érayyehia, 1]; Kar’ evo€Berar,
tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. 1] (see eice-
Bea; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to
the use set forth above, in c.]); xara riorw, to awaken,
produce faith, Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of xara fr. Hom.,
Hdt., Thuc., Xen., may be seen in Passow s. v. II. 3 p.
1598"; [L. and S. s. v. B. III. 1]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p.
632; Kihner ii. p. 412); many refer to this head also
car’ atipiavy (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (376)]) A€ya,
2 Co. xi. 21 (kata tHv Tiny rod Oeod TodTo moar, to the
honor of God, Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 4); but see dripia.
III. In Composition xara denotes, 1. from,
down from, from a higher to a lower place: with special
ref. to the terminus from which, as xaraBaive, caraBiBato,
ete. [cf. W. 431 (401 sq.)]; with more prominent ref. to
the lower terminus (down), as cataBa\\o, cataratéw, etc.
[ef. W.u.s.]; also of the situation or local position,
as kardxeipat, kabevdw, katatiOnut, Kabil@, ete. from top
to bottom, metaph. of things done with care, thoroughly,
as xatauavOava, Kabopda, etc. 2. in succession, in
course: xabeEns; one part after another, catuptitw, katev-
dive, ete. 3. under, underneath: katrayOonos; the
idea of putting under resides in verbs denoting victory,
rule, ete., over others, as caradvvagtev@, kaTakuptev@, Ka-
tefovowi(@, katadovAdw ; likewise in verbs naming that
with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed,
etc., aS Katakadimro, katadiGifw, Katacppayitw, Kara-
oxid(@, kataicyvve, (where the Germ. uses the prefix tiber
[Eng. over], as tiberschatten, tiberdecken, or the syllable
be, as beschatten, besiegeln); also in adjj. denoting an
abundance of that with which a thing is filled up or as
it were covered up; see below in xareidXos. 4.
329
kaTtaBarr\w
like the Germ. ver-, zer-, it denotes separation, dissolu-
tion, in verbs of wasting, dissolving, etc., as xara-
KONT®@, KaTayvUpt, KaTakaiw, KaTakAdw, kKaTadvo, xataxdila,
catavadiokw, katapbeipa, etc. 5. i. q. after, behind:
KaTaOL@kKw, KaTAaXEITwW, KaTaKOAOVOEw, etc. 6. used
of proportion and distribution, as cataxAnpodoréw,
katakAnpovopew, etc. 7. of hostility, against ete.:
katabixala, Karakpiva, kata\ahéw, kataywaoka, ete. Cf.
Herm. ad Vig. p. 637 sqq. [On the constr. of verbs com-
pounded w. card, see W.u.s.; cf. B. 165 (148 sq.).]
kata-Baivw; impf. 3 pers. plur. careBawov; fut. caraBn-
copa; 2 aor. kateBny, impv. karaBnOe (Mt. xxvii. 40; Lk.
xix. 5; Jn.iv.49; Acts x. 20) and xaraBa (Mk. xv. 30
[RG (where L T Tr WH ptep. xaraBas) }, see avaBaivw) ;
pf. xaraBéBnxa; [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for 11; to go down,
come down, descend ; 1. of persons; a. prop.:
absol., the place from which one has come down being
evident from the context, ckaraBas éorn, Lk. vi. 17 (cf.
12) ; xvii. 31 [foll. here by inf., so Mt. xxiv. 17]; Lk. xix.
5 sq.; Jn. v. 7; Acts xx.10; Eph. iv. 10; foll. by dmé w.
gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1; xiv. 29; xvii. 9 Rec. ; xxvii.
40,42; Mk. ix. 9[LTrmrg. WH txt. ék]; xv. 30, 32; by
éx w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 GL T Tr WH [see ex, I.
3]; by eis w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [RG Lbr. Tr;
al. om. eis ete.]; Acts viii. 38; [Ro.x.7]; Eph.iv.9. — b.
to come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city
of Jerusalem; also of celestial beings coming down to
earth: absol., Mt. iii.16; Lk. ii.51; x. 31; Jn. iv. 47,
49,51; Acts [vii. 34]; viii. 15; x. 20; [xxiii 10]; xxiv.
1, 22; foll. by ad w. gen. of the place, Mk. iii. 22; Lk.
x. 80; Acts xxv. 7; 1 Th. iv. 16; é« tov ovpavov, Mt.
XXVill. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33, 38[RG; al. dd], 41
sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. cf. B. 297 (255)]; Rev. x.
1; xviii. 1; xx. 1. foll. by efs w. ace. of place, Lk. x. 30;
xvili. 14; Jn. ii. 12; Acts vii. 15; xiv. 25; xvi.8; xviii.
22; xxv.6; by emi w. ace. of place, Jn. vi. 16; w. acc.
of the pers., Mk. i. 10 [RGLmrg.]; Lk. ili. 22; Jn. i.
33, 51 (52); by ev w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [RL] (see
ev, I. 7); by mpos w. ace. of pers., Acts x. 21; xiv. 11;
contextually i. q. to be cast down, of the devil, Rev. xii.
2s 2. of things, fo come (i. e. be sent) down: Acts
x. 11 (Ree. adds én’ atrév); xi. 5; foll. by amé w. a gen.
of pers., Jas. i. 17; é« Tov odpavod amd Tov Beov, Rev. iii.
12; xxi. 2,10; to come (i.e. fall) down: fr. the upper
regions of the air; as Bpoxy, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Aathay, Lk.
viii. 23; mip ano [Lchm. ex] rod ovp. Lk. ix. 54; é« tov
ovp. els r. yqv, Rev. xiii. 13; ék rod odp. amd r. Oeov, Rev.
xx. 9[RGTr]; xdAaga ex tov oup. emi twa, Rev. xvi. 21;
OpspBou eri rhv viv, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the
pass. ]; of a way leading downwards, Acts viii. 26. 3.
figuratively, caraB. gas ddov, to (go i. e.) be cast down
to the lowest state of wretchedness and shame: Mt. xi.
23 L.Tr WH; [Lk. x.15 WHtxt.Trmrg. Comp.: ovp
cataBaive. | *
kata-Bad\\w: Pass. and Mid. pres. ptep. xaraBaddd-
pevos; 1 aor. pass. xateBdnOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept.
for Van; 1. to cast down: twa, pass., Rev. xii. 10
Ree. ; to throw to the ground, prostrate: pass., 2 Co. iv. 9
KaTaBapew
(where the metaph. is taken from an athlete or combat-
ant). 2. to put in a lower place: in the phrase 6e-
wéAtov karaBaAAopat, to lay (down) a foundation (Joseph.
antt. 11, 4, 4; 15, 11,3; Dion. H. antt. 3,69; al.), Heb.
Wilewlict
kata-Bapéw, -@: 1 aor. kareBapnoa; prop. to press down
by an imposed weight; to weigh down; metaph. to bur-
den: twd, any one, 2 Co. xii. 16. (Polyb., Diod.,-App.,
Leian.) *
kata-Bapive : i. q. kataBapew (q. V.); pres. pass. ptep.
karaBapuvopevos, Mk. xiv. 40 L'TTrWH; see Bapéw.
(Sept.; Theophr. et al.) *
kaTd-Bacts, -ews, 7, (kataBaivw), [fr. dt. down], de-
scent; a. the act of descending. b. the place
of descent: tod dpovs, i. e. that part of the mountain
where the descent is made, Lk. xix. 87; so Josh. x. 11
Sept.; Diod. 4, 21; opp. to avdBaors, the place of ascent,
way up, 1 Mace. iii. 16, 24; Xen. Cyr. 7, 2,3. So Lat.
descensus; cf. Herzog on Sall. Cat. 57, 3.*
Kata-PiBatw: 1 fut. pass. cataBiBacOnoopar; to cause
to go down (Hat. 1,87; Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 18; Sept. several
times for WN; to bring down, Bar. iii. 29); to cast
down, thrust down: pass., €ws ddov (see adys, 2), Mt. xi.
23 RGT; Lk. x. 15 [Trmrg. WH txt. caraBnon (q. v.
3)]; ets ddov, Ezek. xxxi. 16.*
Kata-BoAn, -7s, 7, (kaTaBadro, q. V-) 5 1. a throw-
ing or laying down: tov oméppatos (sc. els THY pyTpav),
the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the
womb, Leian. amor. 19; Galen, aphorism. iv. $1; of the
seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. §§ 22,
45; oméppata ta eis yqv 7) pnTpav KataBadddpueva, Anto-
nin. 4, 836; accordingly many interpret the words Sdappa
Svvapwv eis kataBodrv oreppatos €daBe in Heb. xi. 11, she
received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs
to the male kxaraBdddew 75 oreépya, not to the female,
this interpretation cannot stand [ (acc. to the reading of
WH ure. airy Sappa, Abr. remains the subj. of eAaBev;
but see 2 below)]; cf. Bleek [and, on the other side,
Kurtz | ad loc. 2. a founding (laying down a foun-
dation): eis kataB. orépparos, to found a posterity, Heb.
xi. 11 [but cf. above] (rupavvidos, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; dua tn
mpoty KataBodj Tov avOpwrar, Plat. aquae et ignis comp.
c. 2). amd cataBoAns Koopov, from the foundation of the
world: Mt. xiii. 35 [L T Tr WH om. xoopov]; xxv. 34;
Lk. xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8; po
xataBodjjs koopou, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i.4; 1 Pet. i. 20.*
Kata-BpaPevw, impv. 3 pers. sing. kataBpaBeverw; (prop.
BpaBevw to be an umpire in a contest, card sc. Twés,
against one); fo decide as umpire against one, to declare
him unworthy of the prize: to defraud of the prize of vic-
tory: twa, metaph., to deprive of salvation, Col. ii. 18,
where cf. Meyer, [Bp. Lghtft.. esp. Field, Otium Norv.
Pars iii.]. (Eustath. ad DP. 1, 93, 33 (vss. 402 sq.) xara-
BpaBever aitov, Ss haow of madaoi; but in the earlier
Grk. writ. that have come down to us, it is found only
in [ pseudo-] Dem. adv. Mid. p. 544 end, where it is used
of one who by bribing the judges causes another to be
condemned.) *
330
Kkatayov omar
Karayyedets, -€ws, 6, (katayyeAdw, q. V.), announcer
(Vulg. annuntiator), proclaimer: with gen. of the obj.,
Acts xvii. 18. (Eccles. writ.) *
kat-ayyéhAw; impf. xaryyyeAdov; 1 aor. katiyyeta;
Pass., pres. katayyeAXowar; 2 aor. katnyyeAnv; to an-
nounce, declare, promulgate, make known; to proclaim
publicly, publish: tov Xéyov Tod Geod, Acts xiii. 5; xv. 36;
pass. Acts xvii. 13; €6n, Acts xvi. 21; 16 evayyéAuor, 1 Co.
ix. 14; rHv avaoraow Tip ek vexpov, Acts iv. 2; Tas hpepas
ravtas, Acts iii. 24 G LT Tr WH; 6eov [al. 6], Acts xvii.
233; "Inoovy, ib. 3; Christ, Phil. i. 16 (17), 18; Col. i. 28;
mui tt, Acts xiii. 88; xvi. 17; 1 Co. ii. 1; with the in-
cluded idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising
(Lat. praedicare) : ri, Ro. i. 8 [A.V. is spoken of}; 1 Co.
xi. 26. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 5, 38
where it means to denounce, report, betray; twice in the
O. T. viz. 2 Mace. viii. 36; ix. 17. [Cf. Westcott on
1Jn.i.5.]) [Comp.: mpo-carayyé dia. |*
KaTa-yehaw, -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. careyéA@v; to de-
ride, [A. V. laugh to scorn]: twos, any one [cf. B. § 132,
15], Mt. ix. 24; Mk. v. 40; Lk. viii.53. (From [Aeschyl.
and] Hdt. down; Sept.) *
kaTa-yiwookw; pf. pass. ptep. kareyvaopevos; to find
fault with, blame: kateyvwopévos jv, he had incurred the
censure of the Gentile Christians; Luther rightly, es war
Klage iiber ihn kommen [i.e. a charge had been laid against
him; but al. he stood condemned, see Meyer or Ellie.
in loc.; ef. Bttm. § 134, 4. 8], Gal. ii. 11; to accuse, con-
demn: twos, any one, 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq., with which ef. Sir.
Xiv. 2 prakdptos, ob ov KaTéyyw 7 Wuxi) avrov. (In these
and other signif. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down; [see Ellicott u. s.].) *
kat-cyvupe: fut. cated&o; 1 aor. kareaéa (impv. karagov,
Deut. xxxiii. 11); Pass., 2 aor. kareaynv, whence subjune.
3 pers. plur. kareayoow; 1 aor. xateaxOny in Sept. Jer.
xxxi. (xlviii.) 25; (on the syllabic augment of these forms
ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., ef. i. p. 323 sq.; Matthiae
i. p. 520 sq.; W.§ 12, 2; [Curtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118;
Veitch s. v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. Ixxix.]) ;
fr. Hom. down; to break: ri, Mt. xii. 20; Jn. xix. 31-33.
[Syn. see Schmidt ch. 115, 5 and ef. pryvupe. | *
kara-ypddw: impf. 3 pers. sing. karéypapev; to draw
(forms or figures), to delineate: Jn. viii. 6 cod. D ete.
which T Tr WH (txt.) would substitute for R G éypagev.
(Pausan. 1, 28, 2. Differently in other Grk. writ.)
[Perh. it may be taken in Jn. 1. c. in a more general sense:
to mark (cf. Pollux 9, 7, 104, ete.).]*
kat-dyw : 2 aor. karnyayov; 1 aor. pass. katnxOnv ; Sept.
for Tn, to make to descend; to lead down, bring down:
rwa, Acts xxii. 30; Ro. x.6 3 teva foll. by eds w. ace. of
place, Acts ix. 80; xxiii. [15 L T Tr WH], 20, 28; Twa
foll. by mpés w. ace. of pers., Acts xxiii. 15 [It G]; 76 mAotoy
emt tiv yay to bring the vessel (down from deep water) to
the land, Lk. v.11}; xatdyerOa, to be brought (down) in
a ship, to land, touch at: foll. by ets w. ace. of place, Acts
xxi. 3 [LT Tr WH xarndOopev]; xxvii. 35° xxviii. 12;
often so in Grk. writ.*
kat-aywvifopar: deponent mid.; 1 aor. karnyoucd
KATAOEW
BN; 1. to struggle against (Polyb. 2, 42, 3, ete.). 2.
to overcome (cf. Germ. niederkdmpfen): Heb. xi. 33.
(Polyb., Joseph., Leian., Plut., Aelian.) *
kara-S€w, -@: 1 aor. katednoa; fr. Hom. down; to bind
up: ta tpavpata, Lk. x. 34. (Sir. xxvii. 21 acc. to the true
reading tpavpa. ) *
kata-5ydos,-ov, (O7Aos), thoroughly clear, plain, evident:
Heb. vii. 15. ({Soph.], Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf£. dpdos,
fin. |*
kata-Sikdfw ; 1 aor. Karedikaoa; 1 aor. pass. Katedukd-
cOnv; 1 fut. pass. catadicuc@noopa; to give judgment
against (one), to pronounce guilty; to condemn; in class.
Grk. [where it differs fr. kpivew in giving prominence
to the formal and official as distinguished from the
inward and logical judging (cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 18,
6) | it is foll. by the gen. of the pers., in the N. 'T. by the
ace. [B. § 132, 16]: Mt. xii. 7; Lk. vi. 37 [here Tr mre.
the simple verb]; Jas.v.6; pass., Mt. xii. 37; [Lk.vi.37°
(not Trmrg.)]. (Sept. Lam. iii. 35; Joseph. antt. 7, 11,
3.)*
Kata-Sicn, -ns, 7); 1. damnatory sentence, condem-
nalion: Acts xxv.15 LT Tr WH; ([Epicharm. in Ath.
2, 8p. 36 d.], Polyb., Plut., Iren. 1, 16, 3). 2. pen-
alty, esp. a fine; (Thuc., Dem., Leian.).*
Kata-Sidkw: 1 aor. karediofa; Sept. often for \37; to
follow afier, follow up, (esp. of enemies [ Thue. et al.]) ;
in a good sense, of those in search of any one: twa, Mk.
1. 36.
ov katediw€av ped nya, 1S. xxx. 223 dmiaw twos, to fol-
low after one in order to gain his favor, Sir. xxvii. 17.) *
kata-SovAdw, -@; fut. karadovAwow; 1 aor. mid. kare-
Sovlwodynv; (kata under [see xara, III. 3]); [fr. Hdt.
down]; to bring into bondage, enslave : twa, Gal. ii. 4 LT
Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 20 [of. W. 255 sq. (240)]; mid. to en-
slave to one’s self, bring into bondage to one’s self: Gal.
iva hiG,*
kata-Suvacretw; pres. pass. ptep. karaduvacrevopevos ;
Sept. for 310, pwy, ete.; with gen. of pers. [W. 206
(193); B. 169 (147)], to exercise harsh control over one,
to use one’s power against one: Jas. ii. 6 [not Tdf. (see
below)] (Diod. 13, 73); tua, to oppress one (Xen. conv.
5, 8; often in Sept.): Jas. ii. 6 Tdf.; pass. Acts x. 38.*
KaTa-Qepa, -ros, 70, 1. q. katavabeua (q. v.), of which it
seems to be a vulgar corruption by syncope [ef. Kou-
(ro €Xeds Gov Katabim€etai pe, Ps. xxii. (Xxiil.) 6;
manoudes, Suvaywyn heEewv abnoavp. ktr. S. V. Karas]; a
curse; by meton. worthy of execration, an accursed thing:
Rev. xxii. 3 [Rec. catavabeua ; cf. Just. M. quaest. et resp.
121 fin. ; ‘Teaching’ 16, 5]. Not found in prof. auth.*
karaOcpariza; (karadepua, q.v.); to call down direst evils
on, to curse vehemenily: Mt. xxvi. 74 (Ree. catavabepari-
¢ew). (Iren. adv. haer. 1, 13, 4 and 16, 3.)*
kat-aicxtve; Pass., impf. caryoxyuvvouny; 1 aor. xarp-
axvvOnv; fut. katacyvvOrjcopa; Sept. chiefly for wan
and wn; asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. to dis-
honor, disgrace: rhv xeadny, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (odd TH
kehadnv, Joseph. antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame,
make ashamed : twa, 1 Co.i.27; xi. 22; pass. to beashamed,
blush with shame: Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vii. 14; ix. 43 1 Pet.
Bal
KaTaKAnpovotéw
iii. 16; by a Hebr. usage one is said to be put to shame
who suffers a repulse, or whom some hope has deceived ;
hence eAmis od karacytver, does not disappoint: Ro. v. 5
(cf. Ps. xxi. (xxil.) 6; xxiv. (xxv.) 2sq.; cxviii. (cxix.)
116); pass., Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 6, (Is. xxviii.
165 Sir-iil..10).*
Kata-Kaiw: impf. 3 pers. plur. caréxatov; fut. karaxaiow;
1 aor. inf. kataxatoa; Pass., pres. kataxaiopar; 2 aor.
katexany; 2 fut. karaxajoopa [cf. Tf. Proleg. p. 123;
WH. App.p.170"]; 1 fut. karaxavOnoopae (Kihner i. 841;
[Veitch s.v. kaiw; B. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept.
chiefly for \7; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see xara,
III. 4], consume by fire: ri, Mt. xiii. 830; Acts xix. 19;
pass., 1 Co. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH
evpeOnaera, see evpicka, 1 a. fin.]; Rev. viii. 7; with aupi
added, Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 40 RL T WH, but G Tr kaiw; Lk.
iii. 17, (x. xxix. 14; xxxii. 20 Alex., etc.; see xaiw)
ev wupt (often so in Sept.), Rev. xvii. 16 ; xviii. 8.
and xarakaiw are distinguished in Ex. iii. 2.) *
kata-Kahitrw : Sept. for 703; fr. Hom. down; to cover
up [see xara, III. 3]; Mid. pres. cataxad’rropat, to veil
or cover one’s self: 1 Co. xi. 6; thy Keadny, one’s head,
ibaw*
KATO-KaVvX doar, -ajal, 2 pers. sing. katakavyaoa: (contr.
fr. karaxavyaeoat) for the Attic caraxavya (No. xi. 18; cf.
W.§13, 2b.; [B. 42 (87); Soph. Lex., Introd. p. 40 sq.;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 sq.]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360), impv. 2
pers. sing. karakavy@ (Ro. xi. 18); (kara against [cf. cara,
III. 7]); prop. to glory against, to exult over, to boast one’s
self to the injury of (a person or a thing): tvs, Ro. xi.
18; Tdf. in Jas. iii. 14; xara tivos, ibid. RG L Tr WH
[B. 185 (160); W. § 30, 9 b. (ef. 432 (402))]; @Xeus (Ga. qe
6 €he@v) KaTakavyarat Kpisews, mercy boasts itself supe-
rior to judgment, i. e. full of glad confidence has no fear
of judgment, Jas. ii. 13. (Zech. x. 12; Jer. xxvii. (1.)
10, 38; not found in prof. auth.) *
kaTd-Kapat; impf. 3 pers. sing. Karéxetro; (keipat, to
lie [see xara, III. 1]); to have lain down i. e. to lie pros-
trate; a. of the sick [ef. colloq. ‘down sick’ ] (Hat. 7,
229; Leian. Icarom. 31; [Plut. vit. Cic. 43, 3]): Mk. i.
30; Jn.v.6; Acts xxviii. 8; foll. by emi w. dat. of the
couch or pallet, Mk. ii. 4 RG Lmrg.; [Acts ix. 33 RG];
Lk. v. 25 RL; emi twos, Acts ix. 33 [LT Tr WH]; éxi
mt, Lk. v. 25 T Tr WH [B. § 147, 24 note; W. 408 (381)
note]; ev w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 3. b. of those at
meals, to recline (Athen. 1, 42 p. 23 c.; Xen. an. 6, 1, 4;
conv. 1, 14; Plat. conv. p. 177d.; rep. ii. p. 372 d., etc. ;
Diog. Laért. 7, 1, 19; see dvdxetpar): absol., Mk. xiv. 3;
Lk. v. 29; foll. by év w. dat. of place, Mk. ii. 15; 1 Co.
vit, 10 uk. var 80h, 0 Tr, WEL
KaTa-kKAdw, -@: 1 aor. karex\aca; fr. Ilom. down; to
break in pieces (cf. Germ. zerbrechen [see card, II. 4]) :
rovs dprous, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16.*
kata-Kdelw: 1 aor. karéexdecoa; fr. [TIdt.], Thue. and
Xen. down; to shut up, confine: twa év ry pudaxy, Lk.
iii. 20; év (which Rec. om.) @uAaxais, Acts xxvi. 10 (Jer.
SOEKIK. (Gexxii.)) 3):*
kara-KAnpodotéw, -@ (see card, IIT. 6): 1 aor. carexAnpo-
(kala
KATAKANPOVOMEW
Sdryca; to distribute by lot; to distribute as an inheritance :
rwi tt, Acts xiii. 19 Rec.; see the foll. word. (Deut. i.
38; xxi. 16; Josh. xix. 51 Ald.,Compl.; 1 Mace. iii. 36,
—in all with the var. caraxAnpovouetv. Not found in
prof. auth.) *
kata-KA\npovopéew, -@ [see xara, III. 6]: 1 aor. karexAnpo-
vounoa; to distribute by lot, to distribute as an inheritance:
mi tt, Acts xiii. 19 GL TTrWH. (Num. xxxiv. 18;
Deut. iii. 28; Josh. xiv. 1; Judg. xi. 24 Alex.; 15S. ii. 8;
1 Esr. viii. 82. Also often intrans. fo receive, obtain, ac-
quire as an inheritance; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21.
Not found in prof. auth.) * ‘
Kata-KAivw: 1 aor. karek\wa; 1 aor. pass. katexAiOnv;
fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. in ref. to eating, to make
to recline: twa, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 T Tr WH], (emi 7d
Seimvov, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 21); mid., with 1 aor. pass., to
recline (at table): Lk. vii. 36 LT Tr WH; xxiv. 30; es
THY mpwrok\.ciav, Lk. xiv. 8, (eis 7d €oOiewv, Judith xii. 15;
eis TO Setxvov, Joseph. antt. 6, 8, 1 [var.]).*
kata-kAv{w: 1 aor. pass. ptep. carax\voGeis; fr. [Pind.,
Hdt.], Aeschyl. down; to overwhelm with water, to sub-
merge, deluge, (cf. xara, III. 4]: 2 Pet. iii.6. (Sept. sev-
eral times for Ow.) *
kata-KAvo 6s, -ov, 6, (kataxdvfw), inundation, deluge: of
Noah’s deluge, Mt. xxiv. 38 sq.; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii.
5. (Sept. for 7339; Plato, Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.) *
Kat-akodov0ew, -@; 1 aor. ptcp. kataxodovbnaas ; to fol-
low after [see «ard, III. 5]: Lk. xxiii. 553; ri, Acts xvi.
17. [Sept., Polyb., Plut., Joseph., al.]*
KaTa-KOTTY ; 1. to cut up, cut to pieces, [see xara,
IIL. 4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, ete.; Hat.
et sqq- 2. to beat, bruise: é€avrov AiBows, Mk. v.
5; [al. retain here the primary meaning, to cut, gash,
mangle ].*
kata-kpnyvitw: 1 aor. inf. karaxpnuvioac; to cast down
a precipice; to throw down headlong: Lk. iv. 29. (2 Chr.
xxv. 12; 2 Mace. xiv. 43; 4 Macc. iv. 25; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,
7; 8, 3,41; Dem. 446,11; Diod. 4, 31; [Philo de agric.
Noé § 15]; Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 2; 9, 9, 1.)*
KaTd-Kpina, -ros, To, (xataxpivw), damnalory sentence,
condemnation: Ro. v. 16 (on which see xpiya, 2), ib. 18;
vili. 1. (xataxpipdatav adecets, Dion. Hal. 6, 61.) *
kata-kpivw; fut. xaraxpiuv@; 1 aor. karéxpwa; Pass., pf.
«atakekpiar; 1 aor. karexpiOnv; 1 fut. caraxpiOnooua; to
give judgment against (one [see «ara, III. 7]), to judge
worthy of punishment, to condemn; a. prop.: Ro.
Vili. 34; rua, Jn. viii. 10 sq.; Ro. ii. 1, where it is dis-
ting. fr. xpivew, as in 1 Co. xi. 32; pass., Mt. xxvii. 3;
Ro. xiv. 23; rua Gavarw, to adjudge one to death, con-
demn to death, Mt. xx. 18 [Tdf. ets Oavarov]; Mk. x. 33,
(kexptupévor Oavarw, to eternal death, Barn. ep. 10, 5) ;
tT Kataotpopy, 2 Pet. ii. 6 [WHom. Tr mrg. br. xara-
arpopy |, (the Greeks say xataxp. twa Oavarov or Odva-
tov; cf. W. 210 (197 sq.); B. § 132,16; Grimm on Sap.
ii. 20); w. the acc. and inf., teva €voxov eivat Gavdrov, Mk.
xiv. 64; simply, of God condemning one to eternal mis-
ery: pass., Mk. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xi. 32; Jas. v. 9 Rec. b.
improp. i. e. by one’s good example to render another’s
332
KaTadapBave
wickedness the more evident and censurable: Mt. xii. 41
sq.; Lk. xi. 31 sq.; Heb. xi. 7. In a peculiar use of the
word, occasioned by the employment of the term xard-
kpiua (in vs. 1), Paul says, Ro. viii. 3, 6 Oeds karéxpive Thy
dpapriav ev rT) oapxi, i. e. through his Son, who partook
of human nature but was without sin, God deprived sin
(which is the ground of the xaraxpia) of its power in
human nature (looked at in the general), broke its
deadly sway, (just as the condemnation and punishment
of wicked men puts an end to their power to injure or
do harm). [(From Pind. and Hdt. down.) ] *
kaTd-Kpiots, -ews, 7, (KkaTaxpivw), condemnation: 2 Co.
ili. 9 (see Staxovia, 2 a.); mpds karaxpiow, in order to con-
demn, 2 Co. vii. 3. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
Kara-Kupietw; 1 aor. ptcp. katraxuptevoas; (xara [q. V.
ITI. 3] under) ; a. to bring under one’s power, to sub-
ject to one’s self, to subdue, master: twds, Acts xix. 16
(Diod. 14, 64; for Wad Gen. i. 28; Sir. xvii. 4). b.
to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over :
twos, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign
government of God, Jer. iii. 14). *
kata-Aah€w, -@; to speak against one, to criminate, tra-
duce: twos (in class. Grk. mostly w. the acc.; in the
Sept. chiefly foll. by kara tuvos), Jas. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 12;
iii. 16 [here T Trmrg. WH ev @ xatadarciobe, wherein ye
are spoken against ].*
KaTa-Aaia, -as, 7, (karddados, q. V.), defamation, evil-
speaking: 2 Co. xii. 20; 1 Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. cf. W.
176 (166); B. 77 (67)]}. (Sap.i.11; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
30,1; 35, 5, and eccl. writ.; not found in class. Grk.) *
Katd-andos, -ov, 6, a defamer, evil speaker, [A. V. back-
biters}: Ro. i. 30. (Found nowhere else [Herm. sim. 6,
5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7,2; 9, 26, 7].)*
kata-AapPdve: 2 aor. karedaBov; pf. inf. carednpevac;
Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. xareiAnmrat (Jn. vill. 4 as given
in LT Tr WH txt.), pf. ptep. carecAnupevos; 1 aor. Ka-
rednpony (Jn. viii. 4 R*'*** G) [on the augm. ef. W.
§ 12, 6], and xateAnpOny (Phil. iii. 12 RG), and kare-
Anupony (ibid. LT Tr WH; on the p see s. v. M, p);
Mid., pres. xkatadapBavopar; 2 aor. katedhaBdpnv; cf.
Kiihner i. p. 856; [Veitch, s. v. XapBavw]; Sept. for
wi, 53 also for N¥1, etc.; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay
hold of; i. e. 1. to lay hold of so as to make one’s
own, to obtain, attain to: w. the ace. of the thing; the
prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; Phil. ili. 12 sq.; rv dicaco-
aivnv, Ro. ix. 30; i.g. to make one’s own, to take into
one’s self, appropriate: 7 oxotia avté (i. e. rd Pas) ov Ka-
reAaBev, Jn. i. 5. 2. to seize upon, take possession of,
(Lat. occupare); a. of evils overtaking one (so in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down): twa, oxoria, Jn. xii. 35; [so physi-
cally, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the
wicked with destruction, 1 Th. v. 4; of a demon about
to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of
Christ by his holy power and influence laying hold of
the human mind and will, in order to prompt and govern
ty dean Gril WP) 3. to detect, catch: twa €v tim, in
pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH emi r.]; with a ptep. indicating
the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the mind;
KaTAardeyo
to understand, perceive, learn, comprehend, (Plat. Phaedr.
p- 250d.; Axioch. p. 370a.; Polyb. 8, 4, 6; Philo, vita
contempl. § 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46); Mid. (Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 66; [cf. W. 253 (238)]), foll. by 6m, Acts
iv. 13; x. 34; foll. by the acc. w. inf., Acts xxv. 25; foll.
by indir. dise., Eph. iii. 18.*
kata-Aéyw : pres. pass. impv. caraheyéa Oa ; 1. prop.
to lay down; mid. to lie down (Hom.). 2. to narrate
at length, recount, set forth, [fr. Hom. on]. 3. to set
down in a list or register, to enroll, (esp. soldiers; see
Passow s. v. 5; [L. and S.s. v. II. 2 (yet the latter connect
this use with the signif. fo choose)]): of those widows
who held a prominent place in the church and exercised
a certain superintendence over the rest of the women,
and had charge of the widows and orphans supported at
public expense, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 590 (549) ]; cf. De Wette
Lor Ellicott] ad loc.*
kaTd-Aetppa, -Tos, TO, (KaTaXeimw), a remnant, remains :
Ro. ix. 27 RG, where it is equiv. to a few, a small part ;
see UmoAepa. (Sept., Galen.) *
Kata-Aelrw ; fut. caradeiyo; 1 aor. karéAeea (in later
auth.; ef. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 713 sqq.; [Veitch s. v. Aetro;
WH. App. p. 169 sq.]); 2 aor. karéAurov; Pass., pres. xa-
taXelropat; pf. ptep. karadeAecupevos [WH -Acppevos, see
(their App. p. 154°, and) s. v.I, ¢]; 1 aor. careheiPOnv; (see
cara, III. 5); Sept. for wnin, Vw, ay; [fr. Hom.
down J; fo leave behind; with ace. of place or pers. ; a.
i q. to depart from, leave, a pers. or thing: Mt. iv. 13;
kvi. 4; xxi. 17; Heb. xi. 27; metaph. edeiay ddov, to for-
sake true religion, 2 Pet. ii. 15. pass. to be left: Jn. viii.
9; i.q. to remain, foll. by ev with dat. of place, 1 Th. iii.
il b. i. q. to bid (one) to remain: twain a place, Acts
xviii. 19; Tit. i. 5 [R G; al. dtodeizoa]. c. to forsake,
leave to one’s self a pers. or thing, by ceasing to care for
it, to abandon, leave in the lurch: tov rarépa k. THY pnTéepa,
Mt. xix.5; Mk.x.7; Eph. v. 31, fr. Gen. ii. 24; pass. to
be abandoned, forsaken: eis adov [or adnv (q. v. 2) ], Acts
ii. 31 Rec. (see éyxaradeiza, 1); w.ace. of the thing, Mk.
xiv. 52; Lk. [v. 28]; xv. 4; rdov Adyov, to neglect the
office of instruction, Acts vi. 2. d. to cause to be left
over, to reserve, to leave remaining: éuavt@, Ro. xi. 4 (1
K. xix. 18); xatadeimerat, there still remains, émayyeNia, a
promise (to be made good by the event), Heb. iv. 1 (yaxn,
Xen. Cyr. 2, 3,11; owrnpias Amis, Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 4);
twa with inf. (to leave any business to be done by one
alone), Lk. x. 40. e. like our leave behind, it is used
of one who on being called away cannot take another
with him: Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 14; spec. of the dying (to
leave behind), Mk. xii. 19, [21 Lmrg.T Tr WH]; Lk.
xx. 31, (Deut. xxviii. 54; Prov. xx. 7; and often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. Il. 24, 726; Od. 21,330n). _ f. like our
leave i. q. leave alone, disregard: of those who sail past a
place without stopping, Acts xxi. 3. [Comp.: éy-cara-
Aelrra. |*
kara-Abdtw: fut. caradiGacw; (see xara, II. 3 [ef. W.
102 (97)]); to overwhelm with stones, to stone: Lk. xx. 6.
(Eccles. writ.) *
Kat-chdayh, -7s, 7, (karadddooa, q- V-) ; 1. ex-
333
KaTaddupa
change; of the business of money-changers, exchang:
ing equiv. values [(Aristot., al.)]. Hence 2. ad-
justment of a difference, reconciliation, restoration to favor,
[fr. Aeschyl. on]; in the N. T., of the restoration of the
favor of God to sinners that repent and put their trust
in the expiatory death of Christ : 2Co. v.18 sq.; w. the
gen. of the one received into favor, rod koopov (opp. to
dmoBoAn), Ko. xi. 15; kara\dXayry €aBopev, we received
the blessing of the recovered favor of God, Ro. v.11; w.
the gen. of him whose favor is recovered, 2 Mace. v. 20.
[Cf. Trench § Ixxvii.] *
kat-ahkdoow; 1 aor. ptep. caradAagas; 2 aor. pass.
katnAXayny; prop. to change, exchange, as coins for others
of equal value; hence to reconcile (those who are at vari-
ance): Twds, aS Tovs OnBaiovs kat Tovs TAaracéas, Hat. 6,
108; xarnddagav odeas oi Laptot, 5, 29; Aristot. oecon.
2, 15, 9 [p. 13848", 9] xarnd\dakev adrovds mpos aAdrAous ;
pass. ti, to return into favor with, be reconciled to, one,
Eur. Iph. Aul. 1157; Plat. rep. 8 p. 566 e.; mpos adAndovs,
Thue. 4, 59; but the Pass. is used also where only one
ceases to be angry with another and receives him into
favor; thus caradAayeis, received by Cyrus into favor,
Xen. an. 1, 6, 1; xaradAdrrerat pos aityy, regained her
favor, Joseph. antt. 5, 2, 8; and, on the other hand, God
is said caraAXaynvai tu, with whom he ceases to be of-
fended, to whom he grants his favor anew, whose sins he
pardons, 2 Mace. i. 5; vii. 33; viii. 29; Joseph. antt. 6,
7, 4 cf. 7, 8, 4, (so émuxaradAatrecbai tum, Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 48, 1). In the N. T. God is said xara\Adooew
éauT@ Tuva, to receive one into his favor, [A. V. reconcile
one to himself |, 2 Co. v. 18 sq. (where in the added pteps.
two arguments are adduced which prove that God has
done this: first, that he does not impute to men their
trespasses; second, that he has deposited the doctrine
of reconciliation in the souls of the preachers of the
gospel) ; xara\Aaynvat TO Ged, to be restored to the favor
of God, to recover God’s favor, Ro. v.10 [but see expos,
2]; karadAaynte TH Oe, allow yourselves to be recon-
ciled to God; do not oppose your return into his favor,
but lay hold of that favor now offered you, 2 Co. v. 20.
of a woman: xata\\ayntw To avdpi, let her return into
harmony with [ A. V. be reconciled to] her husband, 1 Co.
vii. 11. Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [who
shows (in opp. to Tittmann, N. T. Syn. i. 102, et al.) that
kara\Adoow and diadddoow are used promiscuously ; the
prepp. merely intensify (in slightly different modes) the
meaning of the simple verb, and there is no evidence
that one compound is stronger than the other; dcaAd.
and its derivatives are more common in Attic, caraAX.
and its derivatives in later writers. COMP.: dmo-cataA-
Aaoow. | *
KaTd-Aoutros, -op, (Aouros), left remaining: [oi Katadot-
mot T. avOphrav A. V. the residue of men], Acts xv. 17.
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb. ; Sept.) *
katd-Aupa, -ros, 70, (fr. KaTaAvw, € 5 q.V.), an inn, lodg-
ing-place: Lk. ii. 7 (for i972, Ex. iv. 24); an eating-room,
dining-room, [A.V. quest-chamber]: Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii.
11; in the same sense for 73¥/7, 1S. ix. 22. (Polyb. 2
KaTAAVw 334
36, 1 [plur.]; 32,19, 2; Diod. 14, 93,5; [al.; ef. W. 25,
93 (89)].)*
kata-Avw; fut.xaradkvow; 1 aor. karéAvoa; 1 aor. pass.
kareAvOnv ; 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. karadvOnoerat ; to dis-
solve, disunite, [see xara, III. 4]; a. (what has been
joined together) i. q. to destroy, demolish: NiBovs [A. V.
throw down], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi. 6; rov
vaov, Mt. xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58; xv. 29; Acts
vi. 14; oikiav, 2 Co. v.15 univ. opp. to oikodopeiv, Gal. ii.
18 (2 Esdr. v.12; Hom. II. 9, 24sq.; 2,117; revyn, Eur.
Tro. 819; yepupav, Hdian. 8, 4,4 [2 ed. Bekk.]). b.
metaph. (o overthrow i. e. render vain, deprive of success,
bring to naught: tiv Bovdry i To épyov, Acts v. 38 (ras
dmewas, 4 Mace. iv. 16); twa, to render fruitless one’s
desires, endeavors, ete. ibid. 89 GL T Tr WH (Plat.
lege. 4 p. 714 c.); to subvert, overthrow: ro Epyov Tov Oeod
(see dyafos, 2), Ro. xiv. 20. As in class. Grk. fr. Hdt.
down, of institutions, forms of government, laws, etc., to
deprive of force, annul, abrogate, discard: rov vopov, Mt.
v. 17 (2 Mace. ii. 22; Xen. mem. 4, 4, 14; Isocr. paneg.
§55; Philost. v. Apoll. 4, 40). c. of travellers, to halt
on a journey, to put up, lodge, (the fig. expression origi-
nating in the circumstance that, to put up for the night,
the straps and packs of the beasts of burden are unbound
and taken off; or, perh. more correctly, fr. the fact that
the traveller’s garments, tied up when he is on the jour-
ney, are unloosed at its end; cf. avadva, 2): Lk. ix. 12;
xix. 7; so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc., Xen., Plat. down;
Sept. for fea Gen. xix. 2; xxiv. 23, 25, etc.; Sir. xiv. 25,
275 XXxVI. 315 [ef B: 145 (127)].*
ry os: 2 aor. xatéwabov; met with fr. Hdt.
down; esp. freq. in Xen. and Plat.; to learn thoroughly
[see xara, III. 1], examine carefully; to consider well: ri
foll. by mas, Mt. vi. 28. (Gen. xxiv. 21; Job xxxv. 5,
etc.; mapGevor, Sir. ix. 5; KaddXos ddAdrpiov, ibid. 8.) *
Kata-paptupew, -@; to bear witness against: ri twos,
testify a thing against one [B. 165 (144), ef. 178 (154)],
Mt. xxvi. 62; xxvii.13; Mk. xiv. 60, and RG in xv. 4.
(1 K. xx. (xxi.) 10,13; Job xv.6; among Grk. writ. esp.
by the Attic orators.) *
Kata-peve; fo remain permanently, to abide: Acts i. 13.
(Num. xxii. 8; Judith xvi. 20; Arstph., Xen., Philo de
gigant. § 5.) *
katapdvas, and (as it is now usually written [so L T
Tr WI1)) separately, cara pdvas (sc. yopas), apart, alone:
Mk. iv. 10; Lk.ix.18. (Thue. 1, 32.37; Xen. mem. 3,
7,4; Joseph. antt. 18, 3,4; Sept. for 773 and Tas Ps.
iv. 9; Jer. xv. 17, etc.) *
kar-avd-Qeua, -ros, 7d, once in Rey. xxii. 3 Rec.; see
avaGeya and xatddeya. Not found in prof. auth.*
Kat-avo-Beparitw ; (xaravabewa, q. V-); 1. q. Katabepa-
tifw (q.v-): Mt. xxvi. 74 Rec. (Just. M. dial. c. Tr. c.
47, and other eccl. writ.) *
Kat-av-ahickw; (see dvndiccw, and kara, III. 4); to
consume: of fire, Heb. xii. 29 after Deut. iv. 24; ix. 3.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down; Sept. several
times for 5>x.)*
KaTa-vapkdo,-@: fut. karavapxnow; 1 aor. KarevdpKnoa;
KaTavvocw
(vapxaw to become numb, torpid ; in Sept. trans. te
affect with numbness, make torpid, Gen. xxxii. 25, 32;
Job xxxili. 19; fr. vapkn torpor); prop. to cause to grow
numb or torpid; intrans. to be torpid, inactive, to the det-
riment of one; to weigh heavily upon, be burdensome to:
tivés (gen. of pers.), 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); xii. 13 sq. (Hesych.
katevapknoa~ kareBapyoa [al. €Bdpvva]); Jerome, ad Al-
gas. 10 [ (iv. 204 ed. Benedict.) ], discovers a Cilicism in
this use of the word [cf. W. 27]. Among prof. auth.
used by Hippocr. alone, and in a pass. sense, to be quite
numb or stiff*
Kara-vetw: 1 aor. karévevoa; fr. Hom. down; to nod
to, make a sign to: tui, foll. by rod w. aor. inf., to indi-
cate to another by a nod or sign what one wishes him to
do [A. V. beckoned to... that they should come, etc.], Lk.
Veneer
kata-voew, -6; impf. karevdouv; 1 aor. xatevdnoa; fr.
Hdt. down; Sept. here and there for }3/3nn, 0°37,
TN; 1. to perceive, remark, observe, understand : ti,
Mt. vii. 3; Lk. vi. 41; xx. 23; Acts xxvii. 39. 2. to
consider attentively, fix one’s eyes or mind upon: ri, Lk.
xii. 24,27; Acts xi.6; Ro.iv.19; w. the acc. of the thing
omitted, as being understood fr. the context, Acts vii. 31
sq.; tuvd, Heb. iii. 1; x. 24; Jas. i. 23 sq.*
kat-avTde, -@: 1 aor. katnvtnoa; pf. KatnvTnKa (1 Co.
x.11 LT Tr WH); to come to, arrive at; a. prop.:
foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts xvi. 1; xviii. 19, 24;
xxi. 7; xxv.13; xxvii. 12; xxviii. 13, (2 Mace. iv. 44) ;
dvtixpv Twos, to a place over against, opposite another,
Acts xx. 15; els rwa Ta TéAn TOY aiwvey KaTHYTHKEY, i. e.
whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Co. x.
ike b. metaph. ets 71, like the Lat. ad aliquid per-
venio, i. e. to attain to a thing: Acts xxvi. 7; Eph. iv. 13;
Phil. iii. 11; caravra tu ets twva, to one, that he may be-
come partaker of it, 1 Co. xiv. 36. (Polyb., Diod.;
eccl. writ.) *
Katd-vukts, -ews, 7, (KaTaviooe, q. V.); 1. a prick-
ing, piercing, (Vulg. compunctio). 2. severe sorrow,
extreme grief. 3. insensibility or torpor of mind,
such as extreme grief easily produces; hence mvedpa
catavvgews, a spirit of stupor, which renders their souls
torpid, i. e. so insensible that they are not affected at
all by the offer made them of salvation through the Mes-
siah, Ro. xi. 8 fr. Is. xxix. 10 Sept. (where the Hebr.
MOTI MI, a spirit of deep sleep, is somewhat loosely so
rendered ; otvos katavigews for MOA jv) wine which
produces dizziness, reeling, Germ. Taumelwein, Ps. lix.
(Ix.) 5). Notfound in prof. auth. Cf. Fritzsche’s full
discussion of the word in his Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 558
sqq:3 [ef. W. 94 (90); Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ etc.
p- 139 note].*
Kata-vioow: 2 aor. pass. karevuyny [B. 63 (55)]; 40
prick, pierce; metaph. to pain the mind sharply, agitate it
vehemently: used esp. of the emotion of sorrow; kateviyy
cav Th Kapdia (rHv kapdiav LT Tr WH), they were smit-
ten in heart with poignant sorrow [A. V. lit. pricked],
Acts ii. 37 (katavevvypévoy TH xapdia, Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16;
| add, Gen. xxxiv. 7; Sir. xii. 12; xiv. 1, etc.; of lust, Sus.
Kxatatiw
10; of violent pity, Joann. Malal. chronogr. 1, 18, ed.
Bonn. p. 460). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 558 sqq.*
Kart-afidw, -@: 1 aor. pass. katrnéw@Onv; lo account worthy,
judye worthy : twa twos, one of a thing, 2 Th. i. 5 (Polyb.
1, 23, 3, ete.; Diod. 2, 60; Joseph. antt. 15, 3, 8); foll.
by an inf., Lk. xx. 35; xxi. 36 [T Tr txt. WH xarioxv-
ante]; Acts v. 41, (Dem. 1383, 11 [cf. Plat. Tim. 30 c.]).*
karo-ratéw, -@; fut. xarazatnow (Mt. vii. 6 LT Tr
WH); 1 aor. xarerdrnoa; Pass., pres. xatararovpat ;
1 aor. xateratnOnv ; to tread down [see xara, III. 1], tram-
ple under foot: ri and twa, Mt. v.13; vii. 6; Lk. vill. 5;
xii. 1, (Hdt. et sqq.; Sept.); metaph., like the Lat. con-
culco, to trample on i. q. to treat with rudeness and insult,
2 Mace. viii. 2, ete.; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 61 [where
its use to denote desecration is illustrated]; to spurn,
treat with insulting neglect: ov vidv tov beod, Heb. x. 29;
opxia, Hom. Il. 4,157; rods vdpous, Plat. lege. 4, 714a.; ra
ypapuara, Gorg. p. 484 a.; rods Adyous, Epict. 1, 8, 10;
Ta prada pov, Job vi. 8 Aq.*
kaTd-ravots, -ews, 7, (KaTaTrava, q. V-); 1. actively,
a putting to rest: trav mvevpater, a calming of the winds,
Theophr. de ventis 18; rvpavywy, removal from office,
Hat. 5, 38. 2. In the Grk. Scriptures (Sept. sev-
eral times for 713?) intrans. a resting, rest: jpépa ths
xarar. the day of rest, the sabbath, 2 Mace. xv. 1; rézros
Tis Kata. ov, where I may rest, Acts vii.49. Metaph.
9) Kata. Tou Oeov, the heavenly blessedness in which God
dwells, and of which he has promised to make persever-
ing believers in Christ partakers after the toils and trials
of life on earth are ended: Heb. iii. 11, 18; iv. 1, 3, 5,
10 sq., (after Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11, where the expression
denotes the fixed and tranquil abode promised to the
Israelites in the land of Palestine).*
kata-ravw: 1 aor. katémavoa; (xara, like the Germ.
nieder, down) ; 1. trans. (Sept. for 137, awit)
to make quiet, to cause to be at rest, to aie Test WAnes a.
to lead to a quiet abode: twa, Heb. iv. 8 (Ex. XXXlii. 14;
Deut. m1 20ssv. 33; xi 10); . Josh. 1713) 1552) Chra-xaiv.
iG Se 22% Sire xxiv. 11). b. to still, restrain, to
cause (one striving to do something) to desist: foll. by
Tov py and an inf., Acts xiv. 18 [ef. B. § 140, 16 B.;
W. 325 (305) ]. 2. intrans. to rest, take rest (Hebr.
M3, NAW): awd twos, Heb. iv. 4, 10, (Gen. ii. 2). In the
same and other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.*
KaTa-réTacpa, -ros, Td, (katameTtavyype to spread out
over, to cover), an Alex. Grk. word for mapaméracpa,
which the other Greeks use fr. Hdt. down; a veil spread
out, a curtain, —the name given in the Grk. Scriptures,
as well as in the writings of Philo and Josephus, to the
two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem (ra xaramera-
opata, 1 Mace. iv. 51; [yet cf. Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, ii. 611]): one of them (Hebr. 90:3) at the
entrance of the temple separated the Holy place from
the outer court (Ex. xxvi. 37; xxxviii. 18; Num. iii. 26;
Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 4; it is called also ro kaduppa by the
Sept. and Philo, Ex. xxvii. 16; Num. iii. 25; Philo, vit.
Moys. iii. §§ 5 and 9), the other veiled the Holy of holies
srom the Holy place (in Hebr. the 1355; éevddrepov xa-
.
335
KaTapa
ranéraopa, Joseph. antt. 8, 3,3; 7é éow@raroy kataréracpa
Philo de gig. § 12; by the Sept. and Philo this is called
pre-eminently 16 xatanéracpa, Ex. xxvi. 31 sqq.; Lev.
xxi. 23; xxiv. 3; Philo, vit. Moys. u.s.). This latter
kataréracya is the only one mentioned in the N. T.: 76
Mk. xv. 38; Lk.
xxiii. 45; 1d devrepov kataréracpa, Heb. ix. 3; 76 eoawre-
pov tov xatameraoyaros (cf. Lev. xvi. 2, 12,15; Ex. xxvi.
33) the space more inward than the veil, equiv. to ‘the
space within the veil,’ i. e. the Holy of holies, figura-
tively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Heb. vi.
19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is
called xataméracpa, in (Heb.) x. 20, because, as the veil
had to be removed in order that the high-priest might
enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the
body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the
cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellow-
ship of God in heaven.*
kata-mive ; 2 aor. xatémioy; 1 aor. pass. katerdOnv; [fr.
Hes. and Hdt. down]; prop. to drink down, swallow
down: Mt. xxiii. 24; Rev. xii. 16; to devour, 1 Pet. v. 8
[here Tr -ziew by mistake; (see miva, init.)]; to swallow
up, destroy, pass., 1 Co. xv. 54; 2 Co.v.4; Heb. xi. 29;
trop. Avy katarobjva, to be consumed with grief, 2 Co.
i 7.*
kata-mimrrw; 2 aor. carérecor; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall
down: Acts xxviii. 6; eis rnv ynv, Acts xxvi. 14; emt ryv
aérpay, Lk. viii. 6 T Tr WH.*
karo-mhéw: 1 aor. karémAevoa ; [fr. Hom. on]; to sail
down from the deep sea to land; to put in:
Lk. viii. 26.*
Kata-rovew, -@: pres. pass. ptcp. karamrovovpevos; prop.
to tire down with toil, exhaust with labor; hence to afflict
or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly:
twa, in pass., Acts vii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis-
tressed]. (8 Macc. ii. 2,13; Hippoer., Theophr., Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., Aelian., al.) *
kara-rovritw: Pass., pres. katamovri¢ouar; 1 aor. kare-
movricOnv; to plunge or sink in the sea; Pass. in the in-
trans. sense, to sink, to go down: Mt. xiv. 30; a grievous
offender for the purpose of killing him, fo drown: pass.
Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph.
antt. 10, 7,5; 14,15, 10: ¢c. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al.; Sept.;
[ef. W. 24; Lob. Phryn. p. 361 note].) *
kat-dpa, -as, 7, (kara and dpa, cf. Germ. Ver fluchung,
Verwiinschung, [ef. xara, III. 4]); Sept. chiefly for
mp; an execration, ce ecation, curse: opp. to evAoyia
(q. v.), Jas. iii. 10; yij xardpas eyyvs, near to being cursed
by God i. e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu-
sion is to Gen. iii. 17 sq.), Heb. vi. 8; tméd xardpav ecvat,
to be under a curse i.e. liable to the appointed penalty
of being cursed, Gal. iii. 10; eEayopafew twa €k Tips K. $0
redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse,
ib. 13; réxva xatdpas, men worthy of execration, 2 Pet.
ii. 14; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse
is exhibited, i. e. undergoing the appointed penalty of
cursing, Gal. iii. 13; éyd xarapa éyern@nv, Protev. Jac.
|e. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) *
Katameragpa tov vaov, Mt. xxvii. 51;
fe , ;
eis THY X@par,
KaTapaowat
kat-apdopat, -@uar; (dep. mid. fr. kardpa); 1 aor. 2 pers.
sing. karnpdow; [pf. pass. ptcp. carnpapeévos (see below) ];
fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for 79) and 47s; to curse,
doom, imprecate evil on: (opp. to eddAoyetv) absol. Ro. xii.
14; w. dat. of the obj. (as in the earlier Grk. writ.), Lk.
vi. 28 Rec. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. 65] 66; [Joseph. c. Ap.
1, 22,16]); w. ace. of the obj. (as often in the later Grk.
writ., as Plut. Cat. min. 32, 1 var. [B. § 133, 9; W. 222
(208)]), Mt. v. 44 Rec.; Lk. vi. 28 G Ltxt. T Tr WH;
Jas. ili. 9; a tree, i.e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. xi. 21
(see Heb. vi. 8 in xcardpa). pf. pass. ptcep. xarnpapevos
in a pass. sense, accursed (Sap. xii. 11; [2 K. ix. 34];
Plut. Lue. 18; and xexarnpap. Deut. xxi. 23; [Sir. iii.
16]): Mt. xxv. 41 (also occasionally xexardpavra, Num.
xxii. 6; xxiv. 9; [but Tdf. etc. rmp-; see Veitch s. v.
dpdopa |).*
kat-apyéw, -@; fut. katapynow; 1 aor. karnpynoa; pf. ka-
Thpynka; Pass., pres. karapyovpac; pf. katnpynar; 1 aor.
katnpynOnv; 1 fut. karapyn@nooua; causative of the verb
dpyew, equiv. to apydr (i. e. depyov [on the accent cf.
Chandler § 444]) mo; freq. with Paul, who uses it 25
times [elsewhere in N. T. only twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept.
4 times (2 Esdr., see below) ]; 1. to render idle, un-
employed, inactive, inoperative: thy ynv, to deprive of its
strength, make barren [A. V. cumber], Lk. xiii. 7; to
cause a pers. or a thing to have no further efficiency ; to
deprive of force, influence, power, [ A. V. bring to nought,
make of none effect]: rt, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; rua, 1 Co.
ii. 6 [but in pass.]; diabolic powers, 1 Co. xv. 24 (Justin,
apol. 2, 6); Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8; rév @avarov, 2 Tim. i.
10 (Barnab. ep. 5, 6); Tov diaBodov, Heb. ii. 14; pass. 1
Co. xv. 26; to make void, ryyv emayyediay, Gal. iii. 17;
pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to,
do away with, annul, abolish: ri, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11;
tov vopov, Ro. iii. 31; Eph. ii. 15; rov xacpov rod dvdpov,
Barnab. ep. 15, 5; pass. méXeuos katapyeirat emoupavioy
Kal ETTLYELWY, Ignat. ad Eph. 13,2; ta katapynOn TO Copa
ths duaprias, that the body of sin might be done away,
i.e. not the material of the body, but the body so far
forth as it is an instrument of sin; accordingly, that the
body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6.
Pass. to cease, pass away, be done away: of things, Gal.
v.11; 1 Co. xiii. 8,10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 13 sq.; of persons, -
foll. by azé tuvos, to be severed from, separated from, dis-
charged from, loosed from, any one; to terminate all in-
tercourse with one [a pregn. constr., cf. W. 621 (577);
B. 322 (277)]: ard tov Xpiorod, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. ef.
W.§ 40,5 b.]; am rod vépou, Ro. vii. [2 (R™ om. r. v.)], 6.
The word is rarely met with in prof. auth., as Eur. Phoen.
753 xatapy. xepa, to make idle, i. e. to leave the hand
unemployed; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. karnpynkévae] rods
xatpovs, in the sense of to let slip, leave unused ; in Sept.
four times for Chald. Sus, to make to cease, i. e. restrain,
check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 5; vi. 8.*
Kat-apiOuew, -@: fo number with: pf. pass. ptep. catn-
ptOunpevos ev (for Rec. odv) nuiv, was numbered among
us, Actsi.17; ef. 2 Chr. xxxi.19; [Plat. politicus 266 a.
ete: |:*
336
KataoKevala
kat-aptitw; fut. katuptriow (1 Pet. v. 10 LT Tr WH
[B. 37 (32); but Ree. carapriom, 1 aor. op tat. 3 pers.
sing.]); 1 aor. inf. kataprica; Pass., pres. Katapti¢opat ;
pf. karnptiopa; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. karnprio@; prop.
to render dpruos i. e. fit, sound, complete, [see xara, III. 2];
hence a. o mend (what has been broken or rent),
to repair: ra Sikrva, Mt. iv. 21; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these
exx. to next head]; i. q. to complete, ra Sorepnuara, 1 Th.
lii. 10. b. to fit out, equip, put in order, arrange, ad-
just: rods aidvas, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, for
P37, WAcov, Ps. Lxxiii. (Ixxiv.) 16; cediyny, 1xxxviil.
(Ixxxix.) 38); oxety xarnpricpém eis dmodevav, of men
whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es-
cape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loe.], Ro.
ix. 22 (mdvta, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the
mind: xarnpricpévos ws etc. so instructed, equipped, as
ete. [ef. B. 311 (267); but al. take xarnpr. as a circum-
stantial ptep. when perfected shall be as (not ‘ above’)
his master (see Mey. in loc.) ; on this view the passage
may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40; mid. to
Jit or frame for one’s self, prepare: aivoy, Mt. xxi. 16 (fr.
Ps. viii. 3; Sept. for 10°); cdpa, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi-
cally, to strengthen, perfect, complete, make one what he
ought to be: twa, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above) ]; Gal. vi. 1
(of one who by correction may be brought back into the
right way); pass., 2 Co. xiii. 11; twa ev ravi épyw [(T
WH om.) ] dyao, Heb. xiii. 21; xatnpriopévor ev T@ avT@
vot xt. of those who have been restored to harmony
(so mavra eis twvro, Hdt. 5,106; ta katapriaOn 1) oTactd-
(ovea rods, Dion. Hal. antt. 3,10), 1 Co.i.10. [Comp.:
mpo-kataptiCw. | *
KaT-dpticts, -ews, 7, (katapriCw, q. v.), a strengthening,
perfecting, of the soul, (Vulg. consummatio): 2 Co. xiii.
9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2,
i [var.]|;Alexs%, J) =
KaTapticpos, -ov, 6, 1. q. KaTdpticts, G. V.: Tuvds Eis TL,
Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)]*
kata-celw: 1 aor. Katéceica; 1. to shake down,
throw down, [cf. card, III. 1; (fr. Thue. on)]. 2:
to shake: thy xeipa, to make a sign by shaking (i. e. rap-
idly waving) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 28; ras
xetpas, ib. de Josepho § 36); of one about to speak who
signals for silence, Acts xix. 33; hence simply caracetew
rwi, to make a sign, to signal with the hand to one, Xen.
Cyr. 5, 4,4; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a disre-
gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument. dat. 77
xeupi was added, Polyb. 1, 78, 3; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 48;
so of one about to make an address: Acts xii. 17; xiii.
16; xxi. 40; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2.*
katc-oKamrw: 1 aor. katéoxawa; pf. pass. ptep. kare-
oKxappevos; to dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy: ti,
to. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. xix. 10; pass. Acts xv. 16 [RG L], fr.
Amos ix. 11 [(but see xataotpepo)]. (Tragg., Thuc.,
Xen., sqq.).*
kara-ocKevatw: fut. karacxevdow; 1 aor. kareoKevaca;
Pass., pres. xarackevagouar; pf. ptep. xarerxevacpevos ;
1 aor. kareoxevacOny; to furnish, equip, prepare, make
ready ; a. of one who makes any thing ready for
/
KaTacKnvow
pers. or thing: ry ddov, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii.
27; pf. pass. ptep. prepared in spirit, Lk. i. 17 (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 5, 10). b. of builders, to construc’, erect,
with the included idea of adorning and equipping with
all things necessary, (often so in Grk. auth.; cf. Bleek,
Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 398 sq.): otkov, Heb. iii. 3 sq. ;
xiBordv, Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 20; oxnvnv, Heb. ix. 2, 6;
Sept. for 873, Is. xl. 28; xliii. 7.*
Kara-cknvde, -6, inf. -oxnvoiv (Mt. xiii. 32 LT Tr WH,
Mk. iv. 32 WH, see drodexatow; [but also -oxnvodv, Mt.
le. RG; Mk.l.c. RGLTTr; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]);
fut. xaracknvocw; 1 aor. Katerxnveca; prop. to pitch
one’s tent, to fix one’s abode, to dwell: ep’ édmids, Acts ii.
26 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9; foll. by év w. dat. of place, Mt.
xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; tad w. acc. of place, Mk. iv. 32.
(Xen., Polyb., Diod., al.; xareoxnywcev 6 Beds TO vag
rovrw, Joseph. antt. 3, 8,5; add, Sir. xxiv. 4, 8; Sept.
mostly for 3.) *
KaTa-ckhvecis, -ews, 7), (KaTacKnvd@, q. V.), prop. the
pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp-
ment, abode: of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix.
58; (for }2v9, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; ef. Sap. ix. 8; Tob. i.
4; Polyb. 11, 26, 5; Diod. 17, 95).*
kara-cKidtw; 10 overshadow, cover with shade, [see xara,
ITI. 3]: ri, Heb. ix.5. (Hes., Eur., Plato, al.; carackdo,
Hom. Od. 12, 436.)*
Kata-ckoTéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. karacxomnoa; to inspect,
view closely, in order to spy out and plot against: ri, Gal.
ii. 4; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2 S.
x. 3; Josh. ii. 2 sq.; 1 Chr. xix.3; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623);
so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen.
down).*
KaTd-okoT0S, -ov, 6, (kaTacKkenTopat [i. . KatacKoTew |),
an inspector, a spy: Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xlii. 9,11; 1S.
xxvi. 4; 1 Mace. xii. 26; in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down.) *
kata-codifopar: 1 aor. ptcp. xaracodiodpuevos; (co-
gifw); dep. mid., in prof. auth. sometimes also pass.; to
circumvent by artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices;
to outwit, overreach ; to deal craftily with: twa, Acts vii.
19 Bx.7.10- y(Judith v.11; *x. 195 Died,’ Philo;
Joseph., Leian.. al.) *
Kata-cTéAAw: 1 aor. ptcp. xaraoreidas; pf. pass. ptep.
KATETTAALEVOS 5 a. prop. to send or put down, to
lower. b. to put or keep down one who is roused or
incensed, to repress, restrain, appease, quiet: twa, Acts
xix. 85 sq.; 3 Macc. vi. 1; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 7; b. j.
4, 4,4; Plut. mor. p. 207 e.*
KaTd-cTnp.a, -Tos, TO, (kabiornpr), (Lat. status, habitus),
[demeanor, deportment, bearing]: Tit. ii. 3. (3 Mace. v.
45; Joseph. b. j. 1,1, 4 [of a city; cf. adrpepaiw ro Kara-
ornare mpos tT. Oavarov ane, Joseph. antt. 15, 7,5; Plut.
Marcell. 23, 6; cf. Tib. Gracch. 2,2. See Wetst. on
Tit. 1. c.; ef. Ignat. ad Trall. 3, 2 (and Jacobson or
Zahn in loc.) ].) *
Kara-oToAn, -7s, 7), (KaTacTEAA, q. V-) 3 1. prop.
a lowering, letting down; hence 2. in bibl. Grk.
twice, a garment let down, dress, attire: 1 Tim. ii. 9,
Vulg. habitus, which the translator, acc. to later Lat.
337
KaTat One
usage, seems to understand of clothing (cf. the French
Vhabit); (ef. Joseph. b. j. 2, 8,4]; for NVyn, Is. lxi. 3,
with which in mind Hesych. says ckatacroAjy: mepiBodny
[ef. W. 23, but esp. Ellicott on i Tim. 1. ¢.].*
katra-crpépw : 1 aor. karéorpeia; pf. pass. ptcp. Kare-
orpaupeévos (Acts xv. 16 TL WH, but Tr -orpeppeévos; cf.
WH. App. p. 170 sq.]) ; 1. to turn over, turn un-
der: the soil with a plow, Xen. oec. 17, 10. 2. to
overturn, overthrow, throw down: ri, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi.
15; [ra xateotp. ruins], Acts xv. 16 T Tr WH [(cf. xara-
oxantw) |; so Hag. ii. 22; Job ix. 5; Joseph. antt. 8, 7,
6; Anthol. 11, 163,6; Diog. L. 5, 82.*
kata-crpyvidw: 1 aor. subjunc. karaorpnuace [ (fut. 1
Tim. v. 11 Lehm. mrg.)]; (see orpynuidw) ; ‘o feel the im-
pulses of sexual desire, [A. V. to grow wanton]; (Vulg.
luxurior) : twés, to one’s loss [A. V. against], 1 Tim. v.
11; Ignat. ad Antioch. c. 11.*
Kara-crTpobh, -js, 7, (Kkatraotpépw), (Vulg. subversio,
[eversio]), overthrow, destruction: of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6
[WH om. Tr mrg. br. karaorp.] (Gen. xix. 29); metaph.
of the extinction of a spirit of consecration to Christ,
[A. V. the subverting]: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Aeschyl. Eum.
490.)*
Kata-cTpdvyupe: 1 aor. pass. kateaTp@Ony; to strew over
(the ground) ; to prostrate, slay, (ef. our to lay low]: 1 Co.
x. 5[A. V. overthrown]. (Num. xiv. 16; Judith vii. 14;
xiv. 4; 2 Mace. v. 26, etc.; Hdt. 8,53; 9,76; Xen. Cyr.
3, 3, 64.)*
kara-ctpo; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. prop. to draw
down, pull down, [see xara, IIT. 1]. 2. to draw along,
drag forcibly, (twa dua pons ayopas, Philo in Flace. § 20;
leg. ad Gaium § 19): riva mpds tov Kpirqy, Lk. xii. 58.
(Cic. pro Mil. c. 14, 38 quom in judicium detrahi non
posset.) *
kara-cbdtw [or -cpdrra]: 1 aor. caréeopaga; to kill off
[ef. card, III. 1], to slaughter: Lk. xix. 27. (Sept.;
Hat., Tragg., Xen., Joseph. antt. 6, 6,4; Ael. v. h. 13,
2; Hdian. 5, 5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) *
kata-cpayitw: pf. pass. ptep. careapayiopévos ; 10
cover with a seal [see xara, III. 3], to seal up, close with
a seal: BiBrtov ofpayiaw, Rev. v.1. (Job ix. 7; Sap.
ii. 5; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., al.) *
KaTd-oXerts, -ews, 7, (katexo), Sept. often for TINS,
possession ; 1. a holding back, hindering: anonym.
in Walz, Rhetor. i. p. 616, 20. 2. a holding fast,
possession: ynv Soiva eis katacx. to give in possession
the land, Acts vii. 5, as in Gen. xvii. 8; Deut. xxxii. 49
Alex.; Ezek. xxxiii. 24; xxxvi. 2 sq. 5; Joseph. antt.
9, 1,2; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Benj. § 10]; w. gen. of the
subj. rav éOvav, of the territory possessed by [the pos-
session of] the nations, Acts vii. 45; (a portion given to
keep, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 40 [ef. Ps. ii. 8]).*
kata-riOnpi: 1 aor. xatéOnka; 2 aor. mid. inf. carade-
cou; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay.down [see xard, III. 1],
deposit, lay up: act. prop. twa év pynpeio, Mk. xv. 46
(L Tr WH 26nxev]; mid. to lay by or lay up for one’s
self, for future use: rwi, with any one; xapu [better -ra;
see xdprs, init.] and ydpiras carat. tin, to lay up favor
KATATOLN
for one’s self with any one, to gain favor with (to do sume-
thing for one which may win favor), Acts xxiv. 27; xxv.
9; so Hdt. 6,41; Thuc. 1, 33; Xen. Cyr. 8, 3,26; Dem.
193, 22 (20); gtAiav tei, 1 Mace. x. 23; evepyeciay rwi,
Joseph. antt. 11, 6,5; [cef. Dem.u.s.]. [Comp.: ovy-
xatatiOnu. | *
Kata-Topn, -7s, 7, (fr. kararéuvw [cf. xara, III. 4] to cut
up, mutilate), mutilation (Lat. concisio): Phil. iii. 2,
where Paul sarcastically alludes to the word mepuroun
which follows in vs. 3; as though he would say, Keep
your eye on that boasted circumcision, or to call it by its
true name ‘concision ’ or ‘mutilation.’ Cf. the similar
passage, Gal. v. 12; see dmoxdérTw.*
kata-rofeva: 1 fut. pass. cararofevOjaopar; to shoot
down or thrust through with an arrow: twa Bodib., Heb.
xii. 20 Ree, trilixe xix. 23. (Num, xxiv. $4-<h's: x Gai:)
2; Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.) *
kato-rpexw: 2 aor. xarédpapov; to run down, hasten
down : emi twas, to quell a tumult, Acts xxi. 32. [Hdt. on.]*
[kat-avyatw: 1 aor. inf. karavydcar; to beam down
upon; to shine forth, shine brightly: 2 Co. iv. 4 Lmrg.
Trmrg., where al. avyaca q. v.; cf. poriopds, b.; (trans.
Sap. xvii. 5, ete.; intrans. 1 Mace. vi. 39; Heliod. 5, 31).*]
Katadayw, see katecbio.
Kata-épw; 1 aor. karyveyxa; Pass., pres. carapepopat ;
1 aor. katnvexOnv; (fr. Hom. down]; to bear down, bring
down, cast down: wipov, prop. to cast a pebble or caleu-
lus se. into the urn, i. e. to give one’s vote, /o approve,
Acts xxvi. 10; aittwpata xara twos (see xara, I. 2 b. [ but
the crit. edd. reject xara xrd.]), Acts xxv. 7 LT Tr WH.
Pass. to be borne down, to sink, (from the window to the
pavement), dd tov Umvov, from sleep (from the effect of
his deep sleep [cf. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348)]), Acts
xx. 9°; metaph. fo be weighed down by, overcome, carried
away, katapepspevos Urve@ BaGei, sunk in a deep sleep,
Acts xx. 9°; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401) ] is
the expression in prof. auth. catrapépopai eis Umvoy, to
sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph. antt. 2, 5,5; Hdian.
2,1,3 [2]; 9,6 [5]; rotow vmvoow, Hipp. p. 1137 ¢.
[(Kiihn iii. p. 539)], and in the same sense simply xata-
pepopa; cf. [Land S. s.v. I. 2d.]; Steph. Thes. iv. col.
1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed ].*
kata-pevyo: 2 aor. kareduyov; [fr. Hdt. down]; to
flee away, flee for refuge: foll. by eis w. ace. of place,
Acts xiv. 6; of karadpuydvres, we who [cf. B. § 144, 9 ¢.]
have fled from sc. the irreligious mass of mankind, foll.
by an infin. of purpose, Heb. vi. 18; ef. Delitzsch ad loc.*
kata-pOelpw: pf. pass. ptep. carebOappevos; 2 fut. pass.
xarapOapraopa ; [see xara, III. 4]; 1. fo corrupt,
deprave; katepOappevor Tov vodv, corrupted in mind, 2
Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy; pass. to be destroyed, to
perish: foll. by év w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii.
12 RG. [From Aeschyl. down.]*
kata-pirew, -@; impf. carepidovv; 1 aor. karepinoa; to
kiss much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e-
osculor, ete.) : rua, Mt. xxvi. 49; Mk. xiv. 45; Lk. vii.
38,45; xv. 20; Acts xx.37. (Tob. vii.6; 3 Macc. v. 49;
338
KaTévavTe
7,11, 7; Ael. v.h. 13,4; Plut. Brut. 16; Leian. dial.
deor. 4,5; 5,3; idcivand xaragudciv are distinguished
in Xen. mem. 2, 6,33; Plut. Alex.c.67. Sept. for pw,
prop. to join mouth to mouth.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p.
780; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 18, note 24.*
kata-ppovew, -@; fut. xarahpovyow; 1 aor. kateppdvnca;
[fr. Hdt. down]; to contemn, despise, disdain, think little
or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. § 132, 15], Mt. vi.
24; xviii. 10; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ii. 4; 1 Co. xi. 22; 1 Tim.
LV esl Zi} aviewees: Zeta. LO) sele bauer”
katadpovnris, -ov, 6, (katappovew), adespiser: Acts. xiii.
41. (Hab.i.5; ii.5; Zeph. iii.4; Philo, leg. ad Gaium
§ 41; Joseph. antt. 6,14, 4; b. j. 2, 8,3; Plut. Brut. 12,
and in eccl. writ.) *
kata-xéw: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. Katéxeev (see exyéa); fo
pour down upon; pour over, pour upon: éni tiv kepadny
(LT Tr WH emiris cepadys), Mt. xxvi. 7; xara tis kesba-
Ajs (Plat. rep. 3 p. 398 a.; Epict. diss. 2, 20, 29), Mk.
xiv. 3 (where LT Tr WH om. xara [cf. W. 381 (3857) sq.;
Hat. 4, 62; Plat. lege. 7 p. 814 b.; Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 36,
2. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 66 sq.]).*
Kata-x@dvios, -ov, (kara [see xara, III. 3], yAav [the
earth]), subterranean, Vulg. infernus: plur., of those who
dwell in the world below, i. e. departed souls [ef. W. § 34,
2; but al. make the adj. a neut. used indefinitely; see
Bp. Lehtft. in loc.], Phil. ii. 10. (Hom., Dion. H., An-
thol., etc., Inserr.) *
KaTa-Xpdopat, -@uar; 1 aor. mid. inf. ckataypyoacba;
in class. Grk. 1. to use much or excessively or ill. a
to use up, consume by use, (Germ. v erbrauchen). 3.
to use fully, the cara intensifying the force of the simple
verb (Germ. g ¢ brauchen), (Plato, Dem., Diod., Joseph.,
al.): 1 Co. vii. 31 [ef. B. § 133, 18; W. 209 sq. (197)];
twit, ib. ix. 18.*
kata-pixw: 1 aor. kareyyvéa; to cool off, (make) cool:
Lk. xvi. 24. (Gen. xviii. 4; Hippocr., Aristot., Theophr.,
Plut., al.) *
kate(SwXos, -ov, (kara and eidwAov; after the analogy of
kaTapmeXos, KaTdyopuos, KaTadypucos, Katadevopos, etc., [see
cara, III. 3, and cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 638]), full of idols:
Acts xvii. 16. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. § 34,
3].)*
kat-¢vavtt, adv.; not found in prof. auth. [W. 102
(97)]; in Sept. mostly for 733, 3229, »0, (see évavrs and
dmévavtt) ; prop. over against, opposite, before : foll. by the
gen. [B. 319 (273); cf. W. § 54, 6], Mk. xi. 2; xii. 41
[Tr txt. WH mrg. drévavre];_ xiii. 3, and L T Tr WH in
Mt. xxi. 2; L Tr WH txt. also in xxvii. 243 7 karevayte
kopn, the village opposite, Lk. xix. 30. Metaph., w. gen.
of pers., before one i. e. he being judge (see évamoy [esp.
2e.and 1 c.]): rod de0d, Ro. iv. 17 (which, by a kind of
attraction somewhat rare, is to be resolved xarévavtu Geod,
@ éniatevoe, who is the father of us all ace. to the judg-
ment and appointment of God, whom he believed, —
the words xaOos ... réOecka forming a parenthesis; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.; [B. 287 (247); but al. resolve it,
katévarte T. Oeod Karév. ov enior., cf. Meyer (per contra
Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 10; 7,5,32; Polyb. 15,1, 7; Joseph. antt. | ed.-Weiss) ad loc.; W. 164 (155)]); or, he being witness
KATEV@TLOV
{in the sight of }: tov Oeov, L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ii. 17 and
Ks Use
kat-evémov, adv., not met with in prof. auth. ([W. 102
(97) ] see évamov), over against, opposite, before the face of,
before the presence of, in the sight of, before: foll. by the gen.
[B. 319 (273 sq.); cf. W. § 54, 6]; a. prop. of place,
Jude 24 (Lev. iv. 17; Josh. i. 5; iii. 7; xxiii. 9). b.
metaph. having one as it were before the eyes, before one
as witness: tov Oeov, Rec. in 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19, (see
carévavtt) ; before God as judge, Eph. i. 4; Col. i. 22 [ef.
Bp. Lghtft. in loe.; also B. 173, 180, 188 ].*
kat-efovoid{w; not found in prof. auth.; fo exercise au-
thority, wield power, [see cara, III. 3]: twds, over one,
Mitvexex< i: 25) Mikejox 4.2%
kat-epydtopar; pf. inf. xareypydoda (1 Pet. iv. 3 LT
Tr WH); 1 aor. mid. xareipyacduny, and Katnpyacdpny
(Ro. vii. 8 T Tr.; [2 Co. vii. 11 T]); 1 aor. pass. carecp-
yaoOnv, and KarnpydcOny (2 Co. xii. 12 Tdf.); see épya-
Copat, init.; adepon. mid. verb; [acc. to Fritzsche, Rom.
i. p. 107 the «ara is either intensive (Lat. per jficere) or
descensive (Lat. per petrare) |; a. to perform, ac-
complish, achieve, [R. V. often work]: Ro. vii. 15, 17 sq-
20; ti dia twos (gen. of pers.), Ro. xv. 18; dmavta ka-
tepyacdpevot having gone through every struggle of the
fight, Eph. vi. 13 [ef. Meyer in loc.]; onueia, pass. 2 Co.
xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. to perpetrate, Ro. i.
Aiea leony. 33) le Petaivade b. to work out
(Lat. efficere), i. e. to do that from which something results ;
of man: tv cwtnpiay, make every effort to obtain salva-
tion, Phil. ii. 12; of things: bring about, result in, Ro. iv.
155 vie$5) Viiw 83) 2.Co: vii. 10) (where L. T Tr WH
épya¢.); Jas. i. 3, and RG in 20; ri tum, Ro. vii. 13; 2
Conaiatley sinwitey lds isc. 1 he CG. Karepy. Tuva ets TL, to
fashion, i. e. render one fit for a thing: 2 Co. v.5. (Often
in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; several times in
Sept.)*
kat-<pxopar; 2 aor. catiAGov, 1 pers. plur. carnAdapev
(Acts xxvii.5 T Tr WH; on which form see dmrépyouaz,
init.) ; ,fr. Hom. down]; to come down, go down; prop. of
one who goes from a higher to a lower locality: foll. by
eis w. ace. of place, Lk. iv. 31; Acts viii. 5; xiii. 4; [xix.
1 T Tr mrg.]; and LT Tr WH in xv. 30; foll. by azé
w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 37; Acts xv. 13; xviii. 5; xxi.
10; foll. by do and eis, Acts xi. 27; xii. 19; of those
who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Hom.) 1408,
29 (Od. 1, 183) xareAOeiv, od pdvov Td dmA@s KaTw Tov
€Oeiv, GAAG Kal TO es Aypeva EAOE, Sorep Kat kataByvat k.
KataTAevoat k. katay Onvat k. KaTapat, TO eAAypevioat Aeyerar;
also 1956, 35 (Od. 24, 115) carqAOov 7) avti Tod évedupevi-
aénv, as moddaxod eppéOn, i) avTi Tod amas 7FAOov; cf.
Ebeling, Lex. Homer. s. v.]: foll. by ets, Acts xviii. 22 ;
xxi. 3 LT TrWH; xxvii. 5; mpds twa, Acts ix. 32.
Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God: Jas.
Mie 1 5.*
Kkat-eoOlw, ptep. plur. caréaOovres (Mk. xii. 40 Tr WH;
see éoOiw and éo6w; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. d. Apokry-
phen, i. p. 150 [who says, ‘The shorter form occurs freq.
in the Sept.. Lev. xix. 26: Sir. xx. 15, (16), elsewh. almost
339
KaTéxo
exclusively poetic; see Bitm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p. 185’
(cf. Veitch s. v. €o6iw) |); fut. carapdyoua (Jn. ii. 17 GL
T Tr WH; see é€o6iw); 2 aor. xarépayov; Sept. for
528; , 1. prop. to consume by eating, to eat up, de-
vour: ri, of birds, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4; Lk. viii. 5; of
a dragon, Rev. xii. 4; of a man, eating up the little book,
i.e. eagerly taking its entire contents into his inmost soul,
and, as we say, digesting it (borrowed fr. the fig. in Ezek.
li. 10; iii. 1-3, cf. Jer. xv. 16): Rev. x. 9 sq. 2.
Metaph. in various uses; a. to devour i. e. squander,
waste, substance: Lk. xv. 30 (often so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Od. 3, 315; 15, 12 down; devorare patrimonium,
Catull. 29, 23). b. to devour i. e. forcibly appro-
priate: tas oixias Tév ynpav, widows’ property, Mt. xxiii.
14 (18) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. B. 79 (69); W. § 29,
rl an Bl >. . ear c. with an ace. of the pers. a.
to strip one of his goods: 2 Co. xi. 20. B. to ruin (by
the infliction of injuries): Gal. v. 15. d. of fire, to
devour i. e. utterly consume, destroy : twa, Rev. xi. 5; xx.
a e. of the consumption of the strength of body
and mind by strong emotions: riva, Jn. ii. 17 (Ps. xviii.
(Ixix.) 10; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1).*
kat-evdtvw: 1 aor. inf. carevOdvar; 3 pers. sing. opt.
katrevOvvar; (see xara, III. 2); Sept. mostly for Ww and
}13, 7.25 to make straight, guide, direct: rods modas eis
ddov eip. Lk. i. 79; rh 6d6v mpds Twa, of the removal of
the hindrances to coming to one, 1 Th. iii. 11; tas xap-
dias (1 Chr. xxix. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 3) els tHv dyamny tod
Geov, 2 Th. iii. 5. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.) *
kat-evdoyéw: impf. 3 pers. sing. KarevAdyer (T WH)
and karnudoyet (Tr), [ef. edvdoxew, init.]; to call down
blessings on: twa, Mk.x.16TTrWH. (Tob. [x. 13];
xi. 16; Plut. amator. 4.) *
Kat-ed-lornp: fo set up against; [2 aor. act. 3 pers.
plur.] careréatnoav 76 Mavdq, they rose up against Paul,
i. e. with hostile intent, Acts xviii. 12. Found nowhere
else.*
kat-xo; impf. caretyov; 2 aor. subjunc. xcaracy@;
impf. pass. careydpny ; 1. to hold back, detain, re-
tain; a. twa, from going away, foll. by rod py w. inf.,
Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 B.; cf. W. 604 (561)]; rua mpds
euavtov, Philem. 13. Pass. (as often in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1677"; [L. and S. s. v.
II. 6]), of some troublesome condition or circumstance
by which one is held as it were bound: voonpati, Jn. v.
4[GT Tr WHom. the passage]; run, Ro. vii. 6. b.
to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of): t. adn-
Gevav ev adixia, Ro. i. 18; absol. 76 xaréxov, that which
hinders, se. Antichrist from making his appearance (see
avriypioros) ; the power of the Roman empire is meant ;
6 xatéxyov he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Anti-
christ, denotes the one in whom that power is lodged, the
Roman emperor: 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (cf., besides De Wette
and Liinemann ad loc., [Bp. Lghtft. in B.D. s. v. Thess.
Second Ep. to the], esp. Schneckenburger in the Jahr-
biicher f. deutsche Theol. for 1859 p. 421 sq.). k«atéxo
(se. tv vavv) eis THyv aiycaddv, to check the ship’s head-
way [better (cf. the preceding context) to hold or head
KaTHYyopew
the ship, cf. Hdt. 7,59. 188 ete.; Bos, Ellips. (ed. Schaefer)
p- 318; see, too, Od. 11, 455 sq. (cf. Eustath. 1629, 18;
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 310, 7 sqq.) ; but Passow (as
below) et al. take the verb as intrans. in such a connec-
tion, viz. to make for; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. 144] in
order to land, Acts xxvii. 40 (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 29 xara-
oxov én thy “ABepvida; many other exx. are given in
Passow s. v. II. 3; [L. and S. s.v. B. 2]). c. to hold
fast, keep secure, keep firm possession of: with acc. of the
thing, rov Adyov, Lk. viii. 15; foll. by the orat. obliq., 1 Co.
xv. 2B. §§ 139, 58; 150, 20; W.561 (522)]; ras mapa-
ddceis, 1 Co. xi. 2; 1d kaddv, 1 Th. v. 21; rv mappnoiav
[r. dpxynv ete.] pexpe réAous BeBaiav xaracxeiv, Heb. iii. 6,
143; rv dpodoyiay ths €Amidos axdwy, Heb. x. 23. 2.
equiv. to Lat. obtinere, i. e. a. to get possession of,
take: Mt. xxi. 38 RG; LK. xiv. 9. b. to possess: 1
Co. vii. 30; 2 Co. vi. 10.*
katnyopéw, -@; impf. carnydpouy ; fut. xarnyopnow; 1
aor. kaTnydpnoa; pres. pass. katyyopodpat ; (kara and dyo-
pevo, prop. to speak against [cf. xara, III. 7] in court, in
the assembly of the people), to accuse ; a. before a
judge: absol. [fo make accusation], Acts xxiv. 2, 19;
Tivos, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2; Lk. vi. 7 T
Tr txtow Hl 3054 Rear br. &) xxii2600)* tnevasioy
Acts xxv. 5; xxviii. 19; with the addition of a gen. of
the thing of which 9ne is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.):
Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. 11, (unless it be thought preferable
to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen.
by attraction [so B. § 132, 16 fin.], since the com. constr.
in Grk. authors is katny. ti twos, cf. Matthiae § 370
Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 378 p. 859; cf. W. § 30, 9 a.);
Twos Tmepi twos, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thue. 8,85; Xen. Hell. 1,
7, 2); w. gen. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3
(unless zoAda should be taken adverbially : much, vehe-
mently); méoa, ib. 4 LT Tr WH (Eur. Or. 28); foll.
by xara w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7,
9 [cf. W. § 28,1; p. 431 (402); B. § 132, 16]); pass.
to be accused (as 2 Mace. x.13; Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 25; cf.
B. § 134, 4): tod trios, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 L T
Tr WH for Ree. mapa (76 ri kd. why [A. V. wherefore]
he was accused; unless it is to be explained, what accu-
sation was brought forward etc.) ; 6 Katnyopovpevos, Acts
xxv. 16. b. of an extra-judicial accusation (Xen.
mem. 1, 3,4): absol. Ro. ii. 15; twds, Jn. v. 45 [cf. B.
295 (254) ]; Rev. xii. 10 RGTr; solecistically rwd, Rev.
xii. 10 L T WH (cf. B. § 132, 16].*
[SYN. airiGoOat, diaBdarrdecy, eyKarerty, emixadrecy,
kaTnyopetv. aitiacba to accuse with primary reference to
the ground of accusation (airfa), the crime; karnyopeiy to
accuse formally and before a tribunal, bring a charge against
(kard suggestive of animosity) publicly; éyxaAciv to accuse
with publicity (katy), but not necessarily formally or before
a tribunal; éemadeiy ‘to ery out upon’, suggestive of public-
ity and hostility; d:a8dAAew prop. to make a verbal assault
which reaches its goal (did); in distinction from the words
which allude to authorship (aitidoua), to judicial procedure
(karnyopéw), or to open averment (éyxaréw, emixadéw), dia-
BdAAw expresses the giving currency to a damaging insinua-
tion. d:dBoAos a secret and calumnious, in distinction from
karjyopos an open and formal, accuser. Schmidt ch. 5.]
340
KATLOVU®
katnyopia, -as, , (katiyopos), [fr. Hdt. down], aceusa-
tion, charge: w. gen. of the pers. accused, Lk. vi. 7 RG
LTrmrg.; (Jn. xviii. 29 T WH]; card reos, Jn. xviii.
29 [(RGLtTr]; 1 Tim. v.19; w. gen. of the crime, Tit.
ic 6s
KaTHyopos, -ov, 6, (karnyopew [q. v. ad fin.]), an ac«
cuser: Jn. villi. 10; Acts xxiii. 30, 35; xxiv. 8 [R]; xxv.
16, 18; Rev. xii. 1OR Tr. ((Fr. Soph. and Hdt. down.) ]*
katHywp, 6, an accuser: Rev. xii. 10 GLTWH. It
is a form unknown to Grk. writ., a literal transcription
of the Hebr. 1j70p, a name given to the devil by the
Rabbins; cf. Buxtor/, Lex. Chald. talm. et rabb. p. 2009
(p- 997 ed. Fischer); [Schéttgen, Horae Hebr. i. p. 1121
sq:; ef; B. 25)(22))*
kathdeta, -as, 7, (fr. karndns, of a downcast look; and
this fr. card, and ra han the eyes; Etym. Magn. [496, 53]
KaTypeva* ard Tov Kdtw Ta Pan BadrAew Tors dvewiCopevous
7) Aurovpevous; because, as Plut. de dysopia [al. de vitioso
pudore (528 e.)] c. 1 says, it is Avan Kato BrErew Trot-
ovaa), prop. a downcast look expressive of sorrow; hence
shame, dejection, gloom, [A. V. heaviness]: Jas. iv. 9.
(Hom. Il. 3, 51; 16, 498 ete.; Thuc. 7, 75; Joseph.
antt. 13,16, 1; Plut. Cor. 20; [Pelop. 33, 3, and often;
Dion. Hal., Char., etc.]; often in Philo.) *
kat-nx€w, -@: 1 aor. karnynoa; Pass., pres. karnxovpat;
pf.carnxnuar; 1 aor. katnynOnv; nowhere met with in the
O. T.; very rare in prof. auth. ; 1. prop. to sound
towards, sound down upon, resound: dppovia Katnxet THs
Oadarrns, Philostr. p. 791 [icon. 1,19]; to charm with re-
sounding sound, to fascinate, twa pido, Leian. Jup.
trag. 39. 2. to teach orally, to instruct: Leian. asin.
§ 48; Philopatr.17. In the N. T. only used by Luke
and Paul: twa, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pass. ék tod vduov, by
hearing the law, wont to be publicly read in the syna-
gogues, Ro. ii. 18; w. ace. of the thing, adrés we moAXG Ka-
TXNTw Tav wyvooupevar, Joseph. de vita sua § 65 fin.; w.
acc. of a thing and of a pers., rod dAnOovs Aéyou Bpayéa
kaTnxnoas pe, Clem. hom. 1, 13; pass. w. ace. of the
thing: tiv 6ddv Tod Kupiov, Acts xviii. 25; tov Adyov, Gal.
vi. 6; hence some [(see Meyer in loc.) ] resolve Lk. i. 4
thus: zepi rev Adywr, ods katnx7Ons (see below). 3.
to inform by word of mouth; pass. to be orally informed :
foll. by drt, Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 30; zepi tevos (en.
of pers.), foll. by ér, Acts xxi. 21; w. acc. of the thing, év
KaTnynvrat Tepi cov i. e. roUTwy, a krX. ibid. 24 (xarnynbeis
mept Tav cupBeBnkoreav, [pseudo-] Plut. de fluviis [7, 2];
8,1; 7,1). Tothis construction the majority refer Lk.
i. 4, construing it thus: ryy dodpdd. trav Adyar, wept ay
catnxnOns [W. 165 (156); B.§ 143, 7; (see above) ]. Cf.
Gilbert, Dissertatio de christianae catecheseos historia
(Lips. 1836) Pt. i. p. 1 sqq.; Zezschwitz, System der christl.
Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for eccl.
usage, Suicer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
kat’ Slav, see tdios, 2.
kat-t6w,-@: pf. pass. katiapar; (see ids, 2); to rust over
[ef. card, III. 3], cover with rust: Jas. v. 3. (Epictet.
diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11].) *
| Karaoxvo: impf. caticyvoy; fut. caticyiow; 1 aor
KQATOLKEW
subjune. 2 pers. plur. xarurxdonre (Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt.
WH); Sept. mostly for pin; among Grk. writ. esp. by
Polyb., Diod., Dion. H.; prop. to be strong to another's
detriment, to prevail against; to be superior in strength;
to overpower: foll. by an inf., Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt. WH
[ prevail (i. e. have full strength) to escape ete.]; to over-
come, tis (Jer. xv. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (meaning, ‘not even
the gates of Hades —than which nothing was supposed
to be stronger— shall surpass the church in strength’) ;
absol. to prevail (i. e. succeed, acqomplish one’s desire) :
LK. xxiii.\23.*
kat-o1Kéw,-@; 1 aor. kar@xnoa; [fr. Soph. and Hdt.
down]; Sept. times uncounted for 3v, more rarely for
129; 1. intrans. to dwell, settle ; a. prop.: foll. by
ev w. dat. of place, Lk. xiii. 4 [Tr WHom. ev]; Acts i. 20;
5 [T WHureg. eis (see below) ]; vii. 2,4, 48; ix. 22; xi.
29; xiii. 27; xvii. 24; Heb. xi. 9; Rev. xiii. 12; foll. by
eis (a pregnant construction; see efs, C. 2 p.186*), Mt. ii.
23; iv.13; Acts vii. 4; émli ras yijs, Rev. iii. 10; vi. 10;
Vili. 13; xi. 10; xiii. 8, 14; xiv.6 Rec.; xvii. 8, (Num.
xiii. 33; xiv. 14; xxxv. 32, 34); émi wav TO mpdc@mov
[mavros mpocorov LT Tr WH (ef. emi, C. 1. 1a.) ] rips yas,
Acts xvii. 26; dzov, Rev. ii. 13; so that éxet must be added
mentally, Acts xxii. 12; demons taking possession of the
bodies of men are said xarouxeiv éxet, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi.
26. b. metaph., divine powers, influences, etc., are
said xarotkeiv év rue (dat. of pers.), or év TH kapdia Twos,
to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it: 6
Geds ev jyiv, Barn. ep. 16,8; 6 Xpuords, Eph. iii. 17; the
Iloly Spirit, Jas. iv. 5 RG (Herm. past., mand. 5, 2; [sim.
5, 5ete.; ef. Harnack’s reff. on mand. 3,1]); Td mAnpe@pa
ths Gedrntos in Christ, Col. ii. 9, ef. 1.19; 7 copia ev oo-
pati, Sap. i. 4; Sexacoovvy is said to dwell where right-
eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. iii. 13. 2:
trans. to dwell in, inhabit: with ace. of place, Acts i. 19;
He 9.14 vivetG 1x, 92.355 xix. 10)17;; Rev. xii.112 Rees;
xvii. 2; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always
present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Comp.: éy-
KaToukéw. | *
[SyN. «arorxezy, in the Sept. the ordinary rendering of 1U”
to settle, dwell, differs from 7apotk ety, the common represen-
tative of V4 to sojourn, as the permanent differs from the
transitory; e.g. Gen. xxxvii. 1 kar@Ke: 5€ lakdB ev tH yt
00 mapdxnoev 6 TaThp avTod, ev yi Xavady; Philo de sacrif. Ab.
et Cain. § 10 6 yap Tots éyxuKAtos wdvors emavéxwy TapoiKet
copia, ob katoe?. Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col.i.19 and on Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1.|
Kat-olkyots, -ews, 7, (karouew), dwelling, abode: Mk. v.
3. (Gen. x. 30; Num. xv. 2, etc.; Thuc., Plat., Plut.) *
KaT-ouKnTHptov, -ov, Td, (KaToikew), an abode, a habita-
tion: Eph. ii. 22; Rev. xviii. 2. (Sept.; Barn. ep. [6,
15]; 16, 7. 8, and other eccl. writ.) *
kat-ouKia, -as, 7, (KaTorxew), dwelling, habitation: Acts
xvii. 26. (Sept.; Polyb. 2, 32, 4; Strab., Plotsial)*
kat-ouxltw; 1 aor. car@xioa; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for
Ywin; to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode ;
to give a dwelling to: metaph. 76 mvetya, 6 kaT@Kurev ev
jpiv, i.e. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade
and prompt us (see carotxéw, 1 .), Jas.iv. 5 LT Tr WH*
341
Kavols
katottpitw: (katorrpoy a mirror), to show in a mirror,
to make to reflect, to mirror: karomrpicev 6 HAvos TH tpw.
Plut. mor. p. 894 f. [i. e. de plac. philos. 8, 5,11]. Mid.
pres. katomrpi€opar; to look at one’s selfin a mirror (Ar-
tem. oneir. 2,7; Athen. 15 p.687¢.; Diog. Laért. 2, 33;
[7,17]); to behold for one’s self as in a mirror [W. 254
(238); B. 193 sq. (167)]: riy dd€av rod Kvpiov, the glory
of Christ (which we behold in the gospel as in a mirror
from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainly so in
Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 33 nde Karomrpucaipny ev Gr@ Twi
Thy any d€av 7 ev col T@ Oew.*
katop0wpa,, -ros, Td, (katopOdw to make upright, erect),
aright action, a successful achievement: plur. of whole-
some public measures or institutions, Acts xxiv. 2 (3)
[RG; see dpOopa]; (3 Mace. iii. 23; Polyb., Diod.,
Strab., Joseph., Plut., Leian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
251; [ Wim:.25)]*
Karw (fr. xara), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. xaro-
tepw; [cf. W. 472 (440) ]; 1. down, downwards :
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; Jn. viii. 6, 8; Acts xx. 9. 2:
below, beneath, [ cf. W. u.s.]; a. of place: Mk. xiv.
66; Acts ii.19; €ws katw [ A. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii.
51; Mk. xv. 38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2); ra caro, the parts
or regions that lie beneath (opp. to ra dvw, heaven), i. e.
the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: a6
Suerovs kat katwrépe, from a child of two years and those
that were of a lower age [cf. W. 370 (347) ], Mt. ii. 16;
amo eikowaeTovs Kat kat@, 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.*
KaterTepos, -épa, -epuv, (compar. of kat, see avatepos),
[Hippocr., Theophr., Athen., al.], ower: (6 Xpiorés) xa-
TéBn eis TA KaT@TEpa pEpy THS yns, Eph. iv. 9, which many
understand of Christ’s descent into Hades (rév romov tov
Kat@ kadovpevov, Plat. Phaedop.112 ¢.), taking rns yjs asa
partit. gen. (see aéns, 2). But the mention of this fact
is at variance with the connection. Paul is endeavoring
to show that the passage he has just before quoted, Ps.
Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, must be understood of Christ, not of
God, because ‘ an ascent into heaven’ necessarily presup-
poses a descent to earth (which was made by Christ in
the incarnation), whereas God does not leave his abode
in heaven. Accordingly ra xatrwr. rns yns denotes the
lower parts of the universe, which the earth constitutes, —
ths yas being a gen. of apposition; cf. W. § 59, 8a.;
Grimm, Institutio theol. dogmat. ed. 2, p. 355 sqq.*
kaTwrépw, see Kara, esp. 2 b.
Katéa, see KAavdn.
Katpa, -ros, 7d, (kaiw), heat: of painful and burning
heat, Rev. vii. 16; xvi.9. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
kavparitw: 1 aor. inf. cavpatioat; 1 aor. pass. exavpa-
ricOnv; (xadpa); to burn with heat, to scorch: twa, with
év nupi added, Rev. xvi. 8; pass., Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. iv. 6;
w. addition of xatdpa péya (see dyaraw sub fin. for exx.
and reff.), to be tortured with intense heat, Rev. xvi. 9.
(Antonin. 7, 64; Epict. diss. 1, 6, 26; 3, 22, 52; of the
heat of fever, Plut. mor. p. 100 d. [de virt. et vit. 1],
691 e. [quaest. conviv. vi. 2, Gs)
Katots, -ews, 7, (Kkaiw), burning, burning up: hs To Tedos
KaVo OW 342
Kedpav
els kavow, the fate of which land (appointed it by God) | B. § 133, 23], Ro. v. 2 (Prov. xxv. 14; Sir. xxx. 2:
is, to be burned up (by fire and brimstone from heaven ;
cf. Deut. xxix. 23), Heb. vi. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. (Hadt.,
Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
Kavo6w, -@: (kavoos); to burn up, set fire to; pres. ptcp.
pass. cavoovpevos, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12, [A. V. with fervent
heat]. (Elsewhere only [chiefly ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.] in
Diose. and Galen: to suffer from feverish burning, be
parched with fever.) *
KavoTnpidiw: pf. pass. ptep. cexavornpracpevos, to burn
in with a branding tron (ras trmovs vor, a figure of a wolf,
Strab. 5, 1, 9 p. 215): 1 Tim. iv. 2 Led. ster. TTr WH,
on which pass. see kavrnptdg¢w. (Not found elsewhere.) *
KavCwV, -wvos, 0; 1. burning heat of the sun: Mt.
xx. 12; Lk. xii.55; Jas.i. 11, [al. refer all these pass. to
the next head]; (Is. xlix. 10; [Gen. xxxi. 40 Alex.; cf.
Judith viii. 3]; Sir. xviii. 16; Athen. 3 p. 73 b.). 2.
Eurus, a very dry, hot, east wind, scorching and drying
up everything; for op, Job xxvii. 21; Hos. xii. 1;
avepos kavoor, Jer. xviii. 17; Ezek. xvii. 10; Hos. xiii.
15; mvedpa xavoor, Jon. iv. 8, [cf. Hos. xii. 1]; (on this
wind cf. Schleusner, Thes. ad Sept. ili. p. 297; Win.
RWB. [also BB. DD.] s. v. Wind). Many suppose it
to be referred to in Jas. i. 11; yet the evils there men-
tioned are ascribed not to the cavo@v, but to the 7Auos.*
KautTnpidtw: (kavtypsov [(cf. caiw) | a branding-iron) ;
to mark by branding, to brand: [pf. pass. ptep.] Kkexavrn-
plac pevor THY diay cuveidnow, 1. &. KekavTNpLagpeErny ExXovTES
thy id. avy. [ef. W. 230 (216) ] (cf. karapOcipw), [branded
in their own conscience i. e.] whose souls are branded with
the marks of sin, i. e. who carry about with them the per-
petual consciousness of sin, 1 Tim. iv. 2 R G Led. maj.,
see kavotnpidfo; [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would give it
here the sense of seared, cf. Eph. iv. 19]. (In Hippoer.
in a medical sense, to cauterize, remove by cautery.) *
KavXdopnat, -uat, 2 pers. sing. kavyaoa (Ro. ii. 17, 23;
1 Co. iv. 7; see xataxavxydopa) ; fut. kavyjoopar; 1 aor.
éxavynoapny; pt. cexavynuat; (kavyn a boast); [fr. Pind.
and Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for Yann; in the N. T.
often used by Paul [some 35 times; by Jas. twice]; ¢o
glory (whether with reason or without): absol., 1 Co. i.
31°; iv. 7; xiii. 3 L [ed. ster. WH (see xaiw)]; 2 Co.
Kelp LSAT 5s Ki tol; ASiepoti-14), By al Rec. oo Ephogi.9i5
Jas. iv. 16; ri (ace. of the thing [cf. W. 222 (209) ]), to
glory (on account) of a thing: 2 Co. ix. 2 (Hv Kkavxydpae
tmép tuov Maxeddow, which I boast of on your behalf
unto the Macedonians [B. § 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see
below ]); 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii. 1; Leian. ocyp. 120);
foll. by év w. dat. of the obj. [W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23],
to glory ina thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk.; but
the Lat. says glorior in aliquo): Ro. ii. 23; v. 3; 1 Co.
iii. 21 5,\2/Co.ry. 125). 15g yxi, 12) fick. 932105092) ]\;, xii:
5,9; Gal. vi. 13 sq.; 2 Th.i. 4 RG; Jas.i. 9, (Jer. ix.
23 sq.; 1 Chr. xvi. 35); ev Oe, €v ro Oew, in God, i. e.
the knowledge of God, intimacy with him, his favors, ete.
Ro. ii. 17; v.11, (€v rots Oeots, Theoph. ad Autol. 1,1, 1) ;
év kupia, 1 Co. i. 31; 2 Co. x. 17°; ev Xpior@ “Inood,
Phil. iii. 3; foll. by emi w. dat. of the obj. [cf. W. § 33 d.;
Diod. xvi. 70); mepi twos, 2 Co. x. 8; ets ru, in regard
of, in reference to, 2 Co. x. 16 (Aristot. pol. 5,10 p. 1311,
4). utmép w. gen. of pers., to one’s advantage, to the praise
of one, [on one’s behalf|: 2 Co. vii. 14; xii. 5. evemuov
tov Geov, as though standing in his presence, 1 Co. i. 29
[cef. B. 173 (150). Comp.: ev, kata-Kavydopat. | *
KavX NG, -Tos, Td, (kavxdowat), Very rare in prof. auth.;
Sept. for nova praise, and DINaA ornament, beauty ;
several times in Sir. , 1. that of which one glories or
can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co.
ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. ii. 16; 7d xavynua eyew eis
é€avtov povov, his glorying confined to himself [R. V. in
regard of himself alone], Gal. vi. 4; 10 x. THs eAmidos, the
matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, of
which we glory, Heb. iii. 6. 2. As yevvnpa, Siwypa,
OeAnpua, taya, knpvypa (2 Tim. iv. 17), kdadpa, mAnpepa,
ppsvnpa, etc., are used for yewnars, diwéts, OeAnais, KX.
(ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 6],so also (which H. A. W. Meyer
persists in denying [as respects the New Testament
(see his note on Ro. iv. 2); so Ellicott and Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. vi. 4; Liinem. on Heb. u. s.]) is cavxnua used
for kavynovs (Pind. Isthm. 5, 65 [ef. Meyer on Phil. i. 26
note; on the apparent use of nouns in pa in an active
sense see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 257 sq.]), a glorying,
boasting: 1 Co.v.6; Phil. i. 26; tmép rwos (see kavxdopat,
sub fin.), 2 Co. v. 12; ix. 3.*
KavX NTIS, -ews, 7, (Kavxdopar), the act of glorying: Ro.
11552;7 5 | 2) Coax. 4 avecss, (2 Cosa Osi) Jassie lor
arépavos kavxnoews, crown of which we can boast, 1 Th.
ii. 19; Ezek. xvi. 12; Prov. xvi. 31; tmép twos, (on be-
half) of one [ef. cavydopat, sub fin.], 2 Co. vii. 4; viii. 24;
ent Tivos, before one, 2 Co. vil. 14; eyw [rH crit. edd.]
Kavynow ev Xptor@ “Inaov, the glorying which I have I
ascribe to Christ, or I owe it to Christ that I am per-
mitted to glory (see év, I. 6 b. p. 211"), Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co.
xv. 31; that of which one glories, cause of glorying, 2 Co.
i.12. (Sept. several times for N1N89N; [Diog. Laért. 10,
7 fin.]; Philod. in Vol. Hercul. Oxfort. i. p. 16.) *
Kagapvaotp, see Kamepvaovp.
Keyxpeat [TWH Kevyp. (cf. WH. App. p. 150)], -a»,
ai, Cenchree or Kenchrew, a port of Corinth, about 60
[70; Strabo (as below)] stadia from the city, on the
eastern side of the isthmus, the emporium of its trade
with Asia (Strabo 8 p. 380): Acts xviii. 18; Ro. xvi. 1.
[It still retains the ancient name; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.;
Lewin, St. Paul, i. 299 sq.]*
KéSpos, -ov, 7, [fr. Hom. down], a cedar, a well-known
tree, the wood of which is fragrant: yelpappos tov Ke-
dpor, Jn. xviii. 1 R Tr txt. WH (so also 28. xv. 23; 1K.
xv. 13, [ef. ii. 37]); rod (sic!) cedpov, ibid. Tdf.; but see
the foll. word.*
KeSpav, 6 [B. 21 (19)], indecl. (in Joseph. Kedpav,
-évos [see below]), Cedron [or Kidron], (Hebr. yp
i. e. dark, turbid), the name of a [winter-] torrent, rising
near Jerusalem and flowing down through a valley of
the same name (having the Mt. of Olives on the E.) into
the Dead Sea: yeiyappos rod Kedpav, Jn. xviii. 1 GL Tr
5a SRT Se
KELWLaL
mrg., ace. to the more correct reading [but see WH.
App. ad loc.]; (xeimappos Kedpavos, Joseph. antt. 8, 1,
5; gdpay€ Kedpavos, ib. 9, 7,3; b. j. 5, 6,1; papayye
Babeia ... 7) Kedpov avdpacra, ib. 5, 2,3). [B. Ds. v.
Kidron, ef. Cedron, 2; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the
Holy Land, p. 96 sq.]*
ketpat; impf. 3 pers. sing. exeto; to lie; 1. prop.:
of an infant, foll. by ev w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 [Tdf.
om. xeip.], 16; of one buried: ézov or od, Mt. xxviii. 6;
Lk. xxiii. 53; Jn. xi. 41 Rec.; xx. 12; of things that
quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [RGLbr.]; Jn.
xx. 5-7; xxi. 9; with emi re added, 2 Co. iii. 153; emava
twos (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14; also of
things put or set in any place, in ref. to which we often
use to stand: thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6; xix. 29, (yurpas
xeysevas, Xen. oec. 8, 19); of a throne, Rev. iv. 2 (Jer.
xxiv. 1; Hom. Il. 2,777; Od. 17, 331); ketoOat mpds tt,
to be brought near to a thing [see zpos, I. 2 a.], Mt. iii.
10; Lk. iii. 9; absol., of the site of a city, rerpdywvos
xetrat, Rev. xxi. 16; of grain and other things laid up,
gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co.
m1 1. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God’s intent)
set, i. e. destined, appointed: foll. by eis w. ace. indicating
the purpose, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. i. 17 (16); 1 Th.iii.3. b.
as very often in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1694";
[L. and S. s. v. [V. 2]), of laws, to be made, laid down:
tw, 1 Tim.i. 9. C. 6 Kdopos dos Ev TO TONPS@ keirat,
lies in the power of the evil one, i. e. is held in subjec-
tion by the devil, 1 Jn. v. 19.
avti-, am-, emi-, kaTd-, Tapd-, Trepi-, mpd-Keypat. | *
keipta, -as, 7, a band, either for a bed-girth (Schol. ad
Arstph. av. 817 xetpia: eidos favns ek cyowiwr, mapeot-
kos iuavtt, 7 Seopodor tas kdivas, cf. Prov. vii. 16; [Plut.
Alcib. 16, 1]), or for tying up a corpse after it has been
swathed in linen: in the latter sense in Jn. xi. 44; [al.
take it here of the swathings themselves ].*
Ketpw ; [1 aor. éxepa (Acts viii. 32 T WH mrg.)]; 1 aor.
mid. exeypaunv; fr. Hom. down; to shear: a sheep, Acts
viii. 32 ({ef. above] fr. Is. lili. 7). Mid. to get or let be shorn
[W. § 38, 2b.; B.§ 135, 4]: rv cehadny, Acts xviii. 18;
absol. of shearing or cutting short the hair of the head,
1Co, xi. 6 fief: W.§ 43, 1].*
Kets, see Kis.
KéAevopa,, -ros, TO, (keAevw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down, an order, command, spec. a stimulating cry, either
that by which animals are roused and urged on by man,
as horses by charioteers, hounds by hunters, ete., or that
by which a signal is given to men, e. g. to rowers by the
master of a ship (Leian. tyr. or catapl. ec. 19), to sol-
diers by a commander (Thuc. 2, 92; Prov. xxiv. 62
(xxx. 27)): ev keXevopart, with a loud summons, a trum-
pet-call, 1 Th. iv. 16.*
kedevw; impf. exéAevov; 1 aor. ékéAevoa; to command,
order: twva, foll. by an aor. inf., Mt. xiv. 19, 28; Acts iv.
15; by the acc. with aor. inf., Mt. xviii. 25; xxvii. 58
[R GL], 64; Lk. xviii. 40; Acts v. 34; viii. 38; xxii. 30;
xxiil. 10; xxv. 6,17; the acc. is wanting because evident
fr. the context, Mt. viii. 18; xiv. 9; [xxvii. 58 TWH
[CompP.: ava-, ovv-ava-,
043
Kevopovia
(Trin br.)]; Acts xii. 19; xxi. 33; foll. by acc. with
pres. inf., Acts xxi. 34; xxii. 24; xxiii. 3, 35; xxiv. 8
RG; xxv. 21; xxvii. 43; the acc. is wanting because
easily discernible fr. the context, Acts xvi. 22 [ef. B. 201
(174); W.§ 40,3 d.]; by a use not infreq. in Hom., but
somewhat rare in prose writ., with the dat. of a pers.
(Plat. rep. 3 p. 396 a.; Thuc. 1, 44; Diod. 19,17; Jo-
seph. antt. 20, 6, 2; Tob. viii. 18; cf. Poppo on Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3, 9 var.), foll. by an inf., Mt. xv. 35 RG; cf. B.
275 (236). Kedevoartds Twos, at one’s command, Acts
xxv. 23. [On the constr. of xeX., esp. with the pass. inf.
and ace., see B. § 141, 5 cf. p. 237 (204) note; also W.
336 (315), 332 (311).]*
[Syn.: keActvery, TapayyéAAeLy, Ev TéEAAETOal, Tdo-
oety (and its comp.): «ed. to command, designates verbal
orders, emanating (usually) from a superior; mapayyéAAw
to charge, ete., is used esp. of the order of a military com-
mander which is passed along the line by his subordinates,
(Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 2); évréAdAecOar to enjoin, is employed
esp. of those whose office or position invests them with
claims, and points rather to the contents of the command,
ef. our “instructions”; taco lit. assign a post to, with a
suggestion of duties as connected therewith ; often used of a
military appointment (cf. rags) ; its compounds éemrdocew
and mpooraocey differ from evr. in denoting fixed and abid-
ing obligations rather than specific or occasional instruc-
tions, duties arising from the office rather than emanating
from the personal will of a superior. Schmidt ch. 8.]
Kevodokla, -as, 7), (Kevddo£os, q. v.), vain-glory, groundless
self-esteem, empty pride: Phil. ii. 3. (4 Macc. ii. 153 viii.
18; Polyb., Plut., Leian.; [Philo de mut. nom. § 15; leg.
ad Gaium § 16; ete.]; eccl. writ.; univ. a vain opinion,
error, Sap. xiv. 14.) *
Kevddokos, -ov, (kevds, 5d£a), glorying without reason, con-
ceited, vain-glorious, eager for empty glory: Gal. v. 26.
(Polyb., Diod.; Antonin. 5,1; [cf. Philo de trib. virt.
§ 2 fin.]; eccl. writ.) *
kevés, -7, -dv, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for Dp", pr, Pr,
ete., empty ; 1. prop. of places, vessels, etc., which
contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii.24); met-
aph. empty, vain; devoid of truth: Néyou, Eph. v. 6 (Ex. v.
9); darn, Col. ii. 8; xnpuypa, miotes, 1 Co. xv. 14. 2:
of men, empty-handed; without a gift: dmoorehXew and
e€amooreAAew tia Kevov (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13;
xvi. 16), Mk. xii.3; Lk.i.53; xx.10sq.; metaph. desti-
tute of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as
a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of
faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors,
acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without effect:
7 xapts, 1 Co. xv. 10; xdzos, ib. 58; 7 etcobos, 1 Th. ii. 1;
neut. plur. xevd, things that will not succeed, Acts iv. 25
(fr. Ps. ii. 1); es Kevdv, in vain, to no purpose, [ef. W.
592, (5a)ii22 Conve tl 9 Gals tind; Phils tie t6, ol Eh,
iii. 5, (Is. Ixv. 23; Jer. vi. 29, etc.; Diod. 19, 9; Heliod.
10, 30). [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.]*
Kevodavia, -as, 7, (kevipwvos uttering emptiness), (va-
niloquium, Vulg. fed. Clem. (in 2 Tim. ii. 16)]), empty
discussion, discussion of vain and useless matters, [A. V.
babbling]: 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. ii. 16. ([Dioscor. 1
prooem. p. 3, 1]; eccles. writ.) *
KEVO@
Kevow, -@: [fut. cevdow, 1 Co. ix. 15 L txt. T Tr WI];
1 aor. éxévwoa; Pass., pf. xexévopar; 1 aor. exevaOny ;
(kevos) 5 1. to empty, make empty: éavrov é€xévawce,
Sc. rov eivat toa Ge or tHS pops Tov Geod, i. e. he laid
aside equality with or the form of God (said of Christ),
Phil. ii. 7 (see a fuller exposition of this passage in
popdn)- 2. to make void i. e. deprive of force, ren-
der vain, useless, of no effect: pass., Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. i.
Ag: 3. to make void i. e. cause a thing to be seen to
be empty, hollow, false: +6 katxnpa, 1 Co. ix. 15; pass.
2 Co. ix. 3. (Twice in Sept. viz. Jer. xiv. 2; xv. 9;
often in Attic writ.) *
KéVTpoV, -ov, TO, (KevTew to prick) ; 1. « sting, as
that of bees (4 Mace. xiv. 19), scorpions, locusts, Rev. ix.
10. Since animals wound by their sting and even cause
death, Paul in 1 Co. xv. 55 (after Hos. xiii. 14 Sept.)
attributes to death, personified, a xévrpor, i. e. a deadly
weapon, and that xévrpor is said to be 7 duapria [56], be-
cause sin is death’s cause and punishment [?] (Ro. v.
12). 2. as in the Grk. writ. an iron goad, for urg-
ing on oxen, horses and other beasts of burden; hence
the proverb mpds kévtpa Aakrifew, to kick against the
goad, i. e. to offer vain and perilous or ruinous resist-
ance: Acts ix.5 Rec.; xxvi. 14; cf. Pind. Pyth. 2,173;
Aeschyl. [Ag. 1624, ef.] Prom. 323; Eurip. Bacch. 795 ;
Terent. Phorm. 1, 2, 28; Ammian. 18, 5.*
kevtuplwv, -wvos, 6, a Lat. word, a centurion: Mk. xv.
39, 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 5.]*
[Kevyxpeat, see Keyxpeai. |
kevas, adv., vainly, in vain, [W. 463 (431); Aristot.
on]: Jas. iv. 5.*
kepaia [WH xepea (see their App. p. 151)], -as, 7,
(xépas), a little horn; extremity, apex, point; used by the
Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacritical points.
In Mt. v. 18 [(where see Wetstein; cf. also Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 sq.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little
lines, or projections, by which the Hebr. letters in other
respects similar differ from each other, as hand 7, Jand4,
3. and 3,[A.V. tittle]; the meaning is, ‘not even the mi-
nutest part of the law shall perish.’ [( Aeschyl.,Thuc.,al.) ]*
Kepapevs, -€ws, 6, (kepavvupt), a potter: Mt. xxvii. 7,10;
Ro. ix. 21. (Hom., Hes., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.
several times for 7¥j.) *
Kepapikds, -7, -dv, (Kepapos) 1. in class. Grk. of
or belonging toa potter: hence x. yj, such as a potter
uses, Hippoer.; réxvn, Plat. polit. p. 288 a. 2. in
the Bible made of clay, earthen: Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41),
for which the Greeks use xepapeods, -a, -otv, and Kepdynos
[al. -pesos], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94) ].*
Kepdpiov, -ov, 7d, (neut. of the adj. xepayuos, see the
preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. xépayos]), an
earthen vessel, a pot, jar; a jug or pitcher: with vdaros
added, a water-pitcher, Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. (The-
ophr. caus. plant. 3, 4, 3; otvov, Jer. xlii. (xxxv.) 5;
Xen. anab. 6, 1, 15; Dem. p. 934, 26; Polyb. 4, 56, 3;
éAaiov, Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2.) *
KEpapos, -ov, 6, (Kepavyupt) ;
2. anything made of clay, earthen ware.
1. clay, potter’s earth.
3. spec. a
344
KepaTLop
(roofing) tile (Thuc., Athen., Hdian., al.) ; the roof itself
(Arstph. fr. 129 d.): so 61a rév kepapor, through the roef,
i. e. through the door in the roof to which a ladder or
stairway led up from the street (accordingly the Rabbins
distinguish two ways of entering a house, ‘the way
through the door’ and ‘the way through the roof’ [ Lghtft.
Horae Hebr. p. 601]; cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Dach; Keim
ii. p. 176 sq. [Eng. trans. iii. 215; Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, i. 501 sq.; Jewish Social Life, p. 93 sqq.]), Lk.
v.19. Mark (ii. 4) describes the occurrence differently
(see drooteya{w), evidently led into error by misappre-
hending the words of Luke. [But, to say nothing of the
improbability of assuming Mark’s narrative to be de-
pendent on Luke’s, the alleged discrepance disappears
if Luke’s language is taken literally, “through the
tiles” (see dua, A. I. 1); he says nothing of “the door
in the roof.’ On the various views that have been taken
of the details of the occurrence, see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)
s. v. House; Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. I. c.] *
kepavvupe (kepavydw): 1 aor. éxepaca; pf. pass. kexépa~
opat (for the more com. kéxpayat, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
582; Bttm. Ausf. Sprehl. ii. p. 214; Kriiger § 40s. v.
i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to
mix, mingle. 2. to mix wine and water. 3. to
pour out for drinking: twit, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle];
pass., Rev. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11; Anthol.
11, 137,12). [Comp.: ovy-kepavvupe. }*
[SYN. kepdvvumt, ulyvuuc: in strict usage Kep. denotes sucha
mixing as combines the ingredients into a new compound,
chemical mixture; ply. such a mixing as merely blends
or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture. ]
képas, -aros, plur. xépara, gen. -atrav (W. 65 (63); B.
15 (13)), 76, [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. Typ» @ horn; ae
prop.: of animals, Rev. v.63 xii. 8; xiii. 1,11; xvii. 3,7,
12, 16. b. Since animals (esp. bulls) defend them-
selves with their horns, the horn with the Hebrews (and
other nations) is a symbol of strength and courage, and
is used as such ina variety of phrases (Ps. ]xxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 18; cxxxi. (cxxxil.) 17; cxlviii. 14; 1 S. ii.
10; Sir. xlvii. 5, 7, 11; 1 Macc. ii. 48, ete.; cf. Gesenius,
Thes. iii. p. 1238; [B. D. s. v. Horn]); hence xépas
awrtnpias (of God, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3; 2S. xxii. 3), i. q.
a mighty and valiant helper, the author of deliverance, of
the Messiah, Lk. i. 69. c. trop. a projecting extremity
in shape like a horn, a point, apex: as, of an altar, Rev.
ix. 13; (Ex. xxix. 12; Lev. iv.7, 18; xvi. 18; Am. iii.
14; Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 27).*
Kepatiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of Képas) ; 1. a little
horn. 2. the name of the fruit of the xeparea or
kepareia [or -ria], the Ceratonia siliqua (Linn.) or carob-
tree (called also St. John’s Bread, [from the notion that
its pods, which resemble those of the ‘locust’, constituted
the food of the Baptist]). This fruit is shaped like a
horn and has a sweet taste; it was [and is] used not
only in fattening swine, but as an article of food by the
lower classes: Lk. xv.16 [A. V. husks]; cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Johannisbrodbaum; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.
Husks ].*
Kepdalva
kepdaivw: [fut. cepdjow, Jas. iv. 13 Rec. LT Tr
WH; see also below]; 1 aor. éxépSyoa (an Ionic form fr.
kepddo, which later writ. use for the earlier éxépdSava, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 740; Bitm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 215;
W. 87 (83); [Veitch s. v.]), once 1 aor. subj. kepdave (1
Co. ix. 21 L T Tr [but WH (cf. also Grsb. note) read the
fut. kepdavo, cf. B. 60 (53); § 139, 38]); 1 fut. pass.
kepdnOnooua (the subjunc. xcepdnOjowvra, 1 Pet. iii. 1
R G is aclerical error [cf. reff. s. v. cate, init. ], for which
LT Tr WH have restored kxepdnOncorra [cf. B. § 139,
38]); [fr. Hes. down]; (fr. xépdos); to gain, acquire;
(Vulg. passim lucrifacio [also lucro, ete. ]) ; a. prop.:
Tov kdopor, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; money,
Mt. xxv. 16 [LT WH], 17, 20, 22; absol. to get gain,
Jas. iv. 13. b. metaph. a. with nouns signify-
ing loss, damage, injury, it is used of the gain arising
from shunning or escaping from the evil (where
we say to spare one’s self, be spared): tiv UBpw taditny
x. (yuiav, Acts xxvii. 21; 76 ye pravOnvai ras xeipas KepOat-
vew, to avoid the crime of fratricide, Joseph. antt. 2, 3,
2; ¢npiay, to escape a loss, Eur. Cycl. 312; other exx. in
Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 139 sq. B. Twa, to gain any one
i. e. to win him over to the kingdom of God, which none
but the placable enter, Mt. xviii. 15; to gain one to faith
in Christ, 1 Pet. iii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 19-22; Xpuorey, to gain
Christ’s favor and fellowship, Phil. iii. 8. Not found in
the O. T.*
képd0s, -eos (-ous), To, gain, advantage: Phil. i. 21 (with
which cf. Ael. v. h. 4, 7 rots kaxots ovd€ 76 dmobaveiv Kép-
dos); Tit.i.11; plur. Phil. iii. 7. [From Hom. down. ] *
[kKepéa, see Kepaia. |
Kép.a,, -Tos, TO, (Kelpw to cut into bits), small pieces of
money, small coin, change; generally and collectively, 76
keppa money: Jn. ii. 15, where Lmrg. Tr WH ra képyara;
(Arstph., Dem., Joseph., al.). Cf. the full exhibition of
the use of the word given by Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum
N. T. etc. p. 264 sqq.*
Keppatirris, -od, 6, (keppati¢w [to cut into small pieces,
to make small change ]), a money-changer, money-broker :
Jn. ii. 14. In the court of the Gentiles [(see iepdv, and
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 244 sq.)] in the temple
at Jerusalem were the seats of those who sold such ani-
mals for sacrifice as had been selected, examined, and
approved, together with incense, oil, and other things
needed in making offerings and in worship; and the
magnitude of this traffic had introduced the banker’s or
broker’s business; [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Money-changers ;
esp. Edersheim u. s. p. 367 sqq.]. (Nicet. annal. 7, 2 p.
266 ed. Bekk.; Max. Tyr. diss. 2 p. 15 ed. Markland.) *
Keadanoy, -ov, rd, (neut. of the adj. cedadatos, belong-
ing to the head) ; 1. the chief or main point, the
principal thing, (Vulg. capitulum): Heb. viii. 1 [ef. B.
154 (134)]; (freq. so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Thue. and
Plat. down). 2. the pecuniary sum total of a reck-
oning, amount, (Plut. Fab. 4); the principal, capital, as
distinguished fr. the interest (Plat. lege. 5, 742¢.); univ.
a sum of money, sum, (Vulg. summa): Acts xxii. 28; so
Lev. vi. 5; Num. v. 7; xxxi. 26; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3;
345
Kvoos
Artem. oneir. 1, 17; see other exx. in Kypke, Observv.
li. p. 116; [L. and S. s. v. 5 b.].*
kepahaida, -@: 1 aor. exepadaiwoa [TWH exeparioca
(see below) |; (xepddacor) ; 1. to bring under heads,
to sum up, to summarize, (Thue., Aristot., al.). 2. in
an unusual sense, to smite or wound in the head: Mk. xii.
4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb
yvabé, which means els yrdbous timrw to smite on the
cheek, since xedddavov is nowhere used of the head of the
body. Tdf. [WH] (after codd. » BL) have adopted
exeadiwoar (fr. kepaduor, i. q. keadis, q. V-). But nei-
ther xepadidw nor kehadifo has yet been noted in any
Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [Comp.:
dva-kepadatda. | *
kepady, -7s, 7, Sept. for wx; the head, both of men:
Mt. v. 36; Mk. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Rec.], 46; Jn. xiii.
9; Acts xvili. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4; Rev. i. 14; iv. 4, and often;
and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, ete.; on the phrases
kAivew THY K., eTaipew THY k., See KNiva, 1 and émaipw; on
the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under a@vOpaé. Since the
loss of the head destroys the life, cepady is used in
phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments:
So in 76 aia tpav emi rHy kK. tuav (see aiva, 2 a. p. 15°),
Acts xviii. 6, and similar phrases in class. Grk.; see
Passow s. v. p. 1717°; Pape s.v. 3; [L. and S.s. v. L.
3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent;
of persons, master, lord: tuvds, of a husband in relation
to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3; Eph. v. 23; of Christ, the lord
of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [ef. B. 124 sq. (109)]; of the
church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [ef. B. § 143, 4 ¢.];
Tov gapartos THs exkA. Col. i. 18; mdons apyxijs Kat €Eovcias,
Col. ii. 10; so Judg. xi. 11; 2S. xxii. 44, and in Byzant.
writ. of things: xed. yevias, the corner-stone, see yo-
via, a. [(From Hom. down.) ]*
kepadtgo: Mk. xii. 4 T WH (approved also by Weiss,
Volkmar, al.), for cepadaida, q. v-
Kearis, -iSos, 7, (dimin. of xedadn, formed after the
analogy of dpakis, muvakis, etc.; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii.
p- 443; Kiihner § 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708); 1. alittle
head (Lat. capitellum, capitulum). 2. the highest part,
extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column,
1 K. vii. 9, 31 etc.; Geop. 14, 6, 6; hence the tips or
knobs (the wmbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua;
see Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52 sq.; Rich, Dict.
s. v. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod around which parch-
ments were rolled seem to have been called xcepadides, be-
cause they resembled little heads; so that 3. the
Alexand. writ. transferred the name xedadis to the roll
or volume itself: év cepadids BiBdiov, Heb. x. 7 (fr. Sept.
Of Psi xxxix,) (al!) 8) for 990-9203, as in Ezek. ii. 9,
and without Bi8diov, iii. 1-3; 2 Esdr. vi. 2 [ef. Birt, An-
tikes Buchwesen, (Berl. 1882), p. 116]), Itala: in volu-
mine libri, in the roll of the book [cf. W. 23 (22)]. The
different opinions are noticed by Bleek ad loc.*
Knpow, -@: fut. kpuoow; (Kknuos a muzzle); to stop the
mouth by a muzzle, to muzzle: Bovv, 1 Co. ix. 9 T Tr
WHmre. (Xen. r. eq. 5, 3); see hipda.*
Kijvoos, -ov, 6, the Lat. word census (among the Ro-
KNTOS 346
mans, denoting a register and valuation of property in
accordance with which taxes were paid), in the N. T. (as
in Cod. Just. 4, 47) the taz or tribute levied on individuals
and to be paid yearly (Hesych. xpvoos- eidos vopicpatos,
émuxepddavov, our capitation or poll iar): Mt. xvii. 25;
xxii. 17; Mk. xii. 14; 1d vdpsopa tod Knvoov, the coin
with which the tax is paid, tribute money, Mt. xxii. 19.*
K{Tr0s, -ov, 6, [thought to be allied with oxamra, Lat.
campus, ete.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 733, 73a, ji; @
garden: Lk. xiii.19; Jn. xviii. 1, 26; xix. 41. [BB. DD.
s. v. Garden. ] *
KnT-oupds, -od, 6, (Ky7os and ovpos), a keeper of a gar-
den, a gardener: Jn. xx. 15 [BB. DD. s. v. Garden].
(Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Epictet., al.) *
Kyplov, -ov, Td, (Knpds Wax), fr. Hes. and Hdt. down,
honeycomb : knpiov peXiocrov, a honeycomb (still contain-
ing the honey), Lk. xxiv. 42 RG Trbr. (1 S. xiv. 27;
Provetxvi./24 5, xxiv: 13).*
Ki pvypa, -ros, 7d, (knpvoow), in Grk. writ. esp. Attic, that
which is promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla-
mation by herald; in the N. T. the message or proclama-
tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc-
lamation of the necessity of repentance and reformation
made by the prophet Jonah [A.V. preaching], 76 knpvypa
"lova, Mt. xii.41; Lk. xi. 32, (Jon. ili. 4); the announce-
ment of salvation procured by Christ and to be had
through him: absol., 1 Co. i. 21; Tit. i. 3; w. gen. of
the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4; xv. 14; w. gen. of the
obj. "Incod Xpiorod, concerning Jesus Christ, Ro. xvi. 25,
cf. Philippi ad loc.; [17s atwviov cwrnpias, Mk. xvi. WH
in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion ’]; the act of publish-
ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 17 [but R. V. that the message might
be fully proclaimed ; see m\npodopéa, a. |.*
khpvé, less correctly [yet so L WH] xnpvé (on the ac-
cent see W. § 6,1 c¢.; [B. 13 (12)]; Lipsius, Gramm.
Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler § 622; Gottling p. 254 sq.;
Lob. Paralip. p. 411; W. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. s. v.;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -vkos, 6, (akin to yppus a voice, a
sound, yypve to utter a sound, tospeak; [yet cf. Vaniéek
p- 140]); com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a herald, a
messenger vested with public authority, who conveyed the
official messages of kings, magistrates, princes, military
commanders, or who gave a public summons or demand,
and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen.
xli. 43; Dan. iii.4; Sir. xx.15. Inthe N. T. God’s am-
bassador, and the herald or proclaimer of the divine word :
duxacocvvns, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah,
2 Pet. ii. 5; used of the apostles, as the divine messen-
gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em-
braced through him, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11.*
Knpicow; impf. exnpvocov; fut. knpi&o; 1 aor. éx7-
pvéa, [inf. enpvEac RG Tr WH, knpdEa LT; cf. Lipsius,
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101; W.
§ 6, 1 f. (see reff. s. v. kjpv&)]; Pass., pres. knpvocopar ;
1 aor. éxnpvxOnv; 1 fut. knpvyOfoopar; (xypv&, q.v.); fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for NWP; fo be a herald ; to officiate as
herald ; to proclaim after the manner of a herald; always
with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority
KLUB wos
which must be listened to and obeyed; a. univ.
to publish, proclaim openly: something which has been
done, Mk. vii. 36; rév Adyov, Mk. i. 45 (here joined with
diadnpicew) ; foll. by indir. dise., Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39;
something which ought to be done, foll. by the inf. (cf.
W. 322 (302); [B. § 141, 2]), Ro. ii. 21; Motor, the
authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21; mepirouny,
the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec.
used of the public proclamation of the gospel and mat-
ters pertaining to it, made by John the Baptist, by Jesus,
by the apostles and other Christian teachers: absol., Mt.
xi. 1; Mk. i. 38; iii. 14; xvi. 20; Ro. x. 15; w. dat. of
the pers. to whom the proclamation is made, 1 Co. ix. 27;
1 Pet. iii. 19; eis [R ev w. dat.] ras cuvaywyas (see eis,
A.I.5b.; cf. W. 213 (200)), Mk. i. 39; [Lk. iv. 44 T Tr
txt. WH]; (6) enpioowr, Ro. x. 14; knptooew w. acc. of
the thing, Mt. x. 27; Lk. [iv. 19]; xii.3; revé re, Lk. iv.
18 (19); 16 evayyéAvor THs Buowd., Mt. iv. 23; ix.35; Mk.
i. 14 (where GLbr. TTr WH 16 ev. rod Ocov) ; 7d edayy.
simply, Mk. xvi. 15; Gal. ii. 2; 10 edayy. rod Geod els
tuvas (see above), 1 Th. ii. 9; pass., Mt. xxiv. 14; xxvi.
13; Col. i. 23; with e’s mdvra ra €Oyy or eis OAov T. KOT POV
added, Mk. xiii. 10; xiv. 9; rév Aoyov, 2 Tim. iv. 2; 76
pha ths miorews, Ro. x. 8; thv Baoid. tov Oeod, Lk. viii.
1; ix.2; Acts xx. 25 [here GLT Tr WH om. rod 6eo0];
xxvill. 31; Bamriopa, the necessity of baptism, Mk. i. 4;
Lk. ii. 3; Acts x. 37; perdvovay kai apeow dyaptiar, by
public proclamation to exhort to repentance and promise
the pardon of sins, Lk. xxiv. 47; ta peravooow [RG
peravonowor|] (see iva, II. 2b.; [B. 237 (204) ]), Mk. vi. 12.
twa tiot, to proclaim to persons one whom they are to
become acquainted with in order to learn what they ought
to do: Xproroy, or tov ’Inoovy, Acts viii. 5; xix. 13; Phil.
i. 15; 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. iv. 5 (where it is opp. to éavrév
knp- to proclaim one’s own excellence and authority); 2
Co. xi. 43 pass., 6 knpvxOeis, 1 Tim. iii. 16; with dca and
gen. of pers. added, 2 Co. i.19; with the epexegetic addi-
tion, 6rz obs €oTw 6 vids T. Geod, Acts ix. 20; drt ék vexpav
eynyeptat, 1 Co. xv. 12; revi foll. by dru, Acts x. 42; xnp.
foll. by X¢yev with direct disc., Mt. [iii.1 L TWH]; x. 7;
Mk. i. 7; xnpvooew x. déyew foll. by direct disc., Mt. iii.
1[RGTrbr.]; iv. 17; «np. ev (omitted in Rec.) dav
peyaAy, foll. by direct disc. (of an angel as God’s herald),
Rev. v. 2; xnp. with ovrws added, 1 Co. xv. 11. On this
word see Zezschwitz, Petri apost. de Christi ad inferos
descensu sententia. (Lips. 1857) p. 31 sqq.; [ Campbell,
Dissert. on the Gospels, diss. vi. pt. v. COomp.: mpo-
knpvaow. |*
KijTos, -eos (-ovs), Td, a sea-monster, whale, huge fish,
(Hom., Aristot., al.): Mt. xii. 40, fr. Jon. ii. 1 where Sept.
Kner peyad@ for oa i71.*
Knés, -a [B. 20 (18) ], 6, (Chald. x5°3 a rock), Cephas
(i. q. Térpos [cfs B.D. (Am. ed.) p. 2459]), the surname
of Simon the apostle: Jn. i.42 (43); 1 Co.i.1235 iii. 225
ix. 5; xv. 5; Gal. ii. 9; and LT Tr WH also in Gal. i.
18; ii. 11, 14.*
KiBwrés, -od, 7, (xiBos [ef. Suidas 2094 c.]), a wooden
chest, box, ((Hecatae. 368 (Miiller’s Frag. i. p. 30), Si-
"Sa aee
«<Odpa
mon.], Arstph., Lysias, Athen., Ael., al.): in the N. T.,
the ark of the covenant, in the temple at Jerusalem,
Heb. ix. 4 (Philo, Joseph.; Sept. very often for }j78); in
the heavenly temple, Rev. xi. 19; of Noah’s vessel, built
in the form of an ark, Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. xvii. 27; Heb. xi.
7; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (4 Mace. xv. 31; Sept. for 73n).*
KOdpa, -as, 7, a harp [cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch.
ive; BDis vo Harp): (Co. xiv. 7; Rev. v. 8;)xivs 25
tov Oeod, to which the praises of God are sung in heaven,
Rev. xv. 2; cf. W. § 36,3 b. [From Hom. h. Merc.,
Hdt. on.]*
KOapifw; pres. pass. ptcp. KOapitduevos; to play upon
the harp [(see the preceding word) |: with év rats xOdpais
added, [A.V. harping with their harps], Rev. xiv. 2; 16
xOaptCopevov, what is harped, 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Is. xxiii. 16;
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 18, 570 down.) *
KiBap-wSds, -o0, 6, (KeOdpa [q. v.], and @dds, contr. fr.
aodds, a singer), a harper, one who plays on the harp and
accompanies it with his voice: Rev. xiv. 2; xviii. 22.
({Hadt., Plat., al.], Diphil. in Athen. 6 p. 247d.; Plut.
mor. 166 a.; Ael. v. h. 4,2; superl. (extended form)
xOapaodéraros, Arstph. vesp. 1278. Varro der. r. 2, 1,
3 “non omnes, qui habent citharam, sunt citharoedi.”’) *
Kuduia, -as, 7, Cilicia, a province of Asia Minor, bound-
ed on the N. by Cappadocia, Lycaonia and Isauria, on
the S. by the Mediterranean, on the E. by Syria, and on
the W. by Pamphylia. Its capital, Tarsus, was the birth-
place of Paul; Alets vi. 95. xv. 23, 415 xxi. 89\¢oxxli¥3%
xxiii. 34; xxvii. 5; Gal.i. 21. [Cf. Conybeare and How-
son, St. Paul, i. 19 sqq.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq.]*
Kivapopov, more correctly [so LT Tr WH] cuvapopor,
-ov, 70, Hebr. N24p, [(see L. and S. s. v.)], cinnamon:
Rev. xviii. 13. (ildt., Theophr., Strab., Diod., Joseph.,
al.; Sept.) Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Zimmt; [B.D. s. v. Cin-
namon; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Kinnamon].*
kivdvuvevo ; imp. exwduvevov; (kivduvos) ; to be in jeop-
ardy, to be in danger, to be put in peril: Lk. viii. 23; 1
Co. xv. 30; rodro rd peépos Kuwduvever eis dmedeypov eOeiv,
this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute, Acts xix.
27; Kxwd. éykadeioOa, we are in danger of being accused,
ib. 40. (From [Pind.] and Hdt. down; Sept.) *
kivSuvos, -ov, 6, danger, peril: Ro. viii. 35; &« twos,
prepared by one, [ from one], 2 Co. xi. 26; ibid. with a
gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [of, cf.
W. § 30, 2.a.]; so rHs Badacons, Plat. Euthyd. p. 279 e. ;
de rep. i. p. 332 e.; @adaccar, Heliod. 2, 4, 65.*
Kivew, -@; fut. know; 1 aor. inf. kvpoar; Pass., pres.
Kivodpat; 1 aor. exwnOnv; (fr. kiw, poetic for 10, ecu,
Curtius § 57; hence) 1. prop. to cause to go, i. e.
to move, set in motion, [fr. Hom. down]; a. prop. in
pass. [ cf. W. 252 (237)] to be moved, move: of that motion
whichis evidence of life, Acts xvii. 28 (Gen. vii. 21); kiveiv
daxrvAw opria, to move burdens with a finger, Mt. xxiii.
4; rHv Kearny, to move to and fro[ A.V. wag], (expres-
sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xv. 29, (Sept. for
WN pun, Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 8; Job xvi. 4; Sir. xii. 18,
ete:); b. to move from a place, to remove: ti ék Tod
torov, Rey. ii. 5; éx ray roma, pass., Rev. vi. 14. 2.
347
Kravdy
Metaph. to move i. e. excite: ordow, a riot, disturbance,
Acts xxiv. 5 ([see ordows, 2]; tapaynv, Joseph. b. j. 2, 9,
4); tyv mdAwy, to throw into commotion, pass., Acts xxi. 30.
[Comp.: pera-, ovy-xiwéw.] *
klvyots, -ews, 7, (Kivew), [fr. Plato on], a moving, agiia-
tion: rod vdaros, Jn. v. 3 [RL].*
Kls (LT Tr WH Keis [cf. WH. App. p. 1553 Tdf.
Proleg. p. 84; B.6 note, and see eu, ¢]), 6, indecl., (wp
[perh. ‘a bow’ (Gesen.) ] fr. wip to lay snares), Kish, the
father of Saul, the first king of Israel: Acts xiii. 21.*
kixpnpe: 1 aor. act. impv. xppaov; to lend: twh 7, LK.
xi. 5. (From [Idt. down.) [Syn. see daveiga, fin.] *
KAdbos, -ov, 6, (KAdw) ; a. prop. a young, tender
shoot, broken off for grafting. b. univ. @ branch:
Mt. xiii. 32; xxi.8; xxiv.82; Mk. iv. 32; xiii. 28; Lk.
xiii. 19; as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root,
so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19,
21; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25; xl.15; Menand. frag. ed. Meineke
p- 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg.,
Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) *
KAalw; impf.ékdaov; fut. cAavow (LK. vi. 25; Jn. xvi.
20; and Tr WHtxt. in Rev. xviii. 9, for kAavoopat, more
com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and found in Lev. x.
6; Joel ii. 17, and acc. to most edd. in Rev. xviii. 9; cf.
Kriiger § 40s. v., i. p. 175 sq.; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. p.
847; [Veitch s. v.]; B. 60 (53); [W. 87 (83)]); 1 aor.
éxkavoa; Sept. freq. for 133; [from Hom. down]; to
mourn, weep, lament ; a. intrans.: Mk. xiv. 72; xvi.
10% LK. vii: 13,383 In. xi, 31, 33; xx. 11, 18, 15+ Acts
ix. 89; xxi. 13; Rev. [v. 5]; xviii. 15, 19; aoAAd, for
which L T Tr WH moa, Rev. v. 4; mixpds, Mt. xxvi. 75;
Lk. xxii. 62; weeping as the sign of pain and grief for
the thing signified (i. e. for pain and grief), Lk. vi. 21,
25, (opp. to yedav); Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. xii. 15, (opp. to
xaipe); Phil. iii. 18; 1 Co. vii. 30; Jas.iv.9; v.13 of
those who mourn the dead: Mk. v. 38 sq.; Lk. vii. 32:
Vili. 52; émt rum, over any one, Lk. xix. 41 RG (Sir. xxii.
11); also joined with wevOciv, Rev. xviii.11 RGL; ka.
émi twa, Lk. xix.41 LT Tr WH; xxiii. 28; joined with
kérrec Oat foll. by émt twa, Rev. xviii. 9 T Tr WH. b.
trans. twa, lo weep for, mourn for, bewail, one (cf. B. § 131,
4; W. 32, ly.]: Mt. ii. 18, and Rec. in Rev. xviii. 9.*
[Syn. Saxpto, kralw, ddvpomat, Opnvéw, AAGAA Cw
(dAoAv@w), cr evddw: strictly, 5. denotes to shed tears,
weep silently ; KA. to weep audibly, to cry as a child; 08. to give
verbal expression to grief, to lament; @p. to give formal
expression to grief, to sing a dirge; &A. to wail in oriental
style, to how! in a consecrated, semi-liturgical fashion; orev.
to express grief by inarticulate or semi-articulate sounds, to
groan. Cf. Schmidt chh. 26, 126.]
KAdorts, -ews, 7}, (KAdw, q. V.), a breaking: rod aprov, Lk.
xxiv. 35; Acts ii. 42. (Plat., Theophr., al.) *
KAdopa, -ros, Td, (KAdw), a fragment, broken piece:
plur., of remnants of food, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi.
43; viii. 8,19 sq.; Lk.ix.17; Jn. vi.12sq. (Xen.cyn.
10,5; Diod.17,13; Plut. Tib.Gr.19; Anthol.; Sept.) *
Kat (L Tr WH Kaida [see WH. App. p. 160],
T K\adda), -ns, j, Clauda or Cauda the name of a small
island lying near Crete on the south, called by Ptolem.
Knavila
3, 17, 11 KAaddos, by Pomp. Mela 2, 7 and Plin. h. n. 4,
20 (12), 61 Gaudos, [(now Gaudo-nesi or Clauda-nesa) }:
Acts xxvii. 16.*
Knav8la, -as, 7, Claudia, a Christian woman: 2 Tim.
iv.21. [Cf B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v., also reff. s. v.
Tlovdns. | *
Knratétos, -ov, 6, Claudius. 1. Tiberius Claudius
Drusus Nero Germanicus, the Roman emperor, who
came into power A.D. 41, and was poisoned by his wife
Agrippina in the year 54: Acts xi. 28; xviii. 2. 2.
Claudius Lysias, a Roman military tribune: Acts xxiii.
26 [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lysias].*
KAav0p6s, -0v, 6, (kAaiw); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for °33;
weeping, lamentation: Mt. ii. 18; [viii. 12]; xiii. 42, 50;
TR Sh sogvesl soxxva30;sbk.cdiin283. Acts sx3%
Kido; 1 aor. €kAaca; Pass., [ pres. ptep. kAapevos, 1 Co.
xi. 24 RG (see below)]; 1 aor. ékAaoOnv (Ro. xi. 20 L
Tr); [fr. Hom. down]; to break: used in the N.T.of the
breaking of bread (see doros, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36;
“xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 6; xiv: 22; Lk. xxii.(195) [xxiv.30];
Acts i466" xx, 11g) xxvii. B55 CG. xelG pextf24;
with es twas added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ‘to
break and distribute among’ etc. (see eis, C. 1), Mk. viii.
19; metaph. rd o@pua, shattered, as it were, by a violent
death, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG. [Comp.: ék-, kata-KXdo. | *
KAels, -Sos, acc. kAeida and kdeiv (Lk. xi. 52; Rev. iii.
7), ace. plur. «kdetSas and kdeis (Mt. xvi. 19; Rev. i.
18; ef. Kihner § 130, i. p. 357; W. 65 (63), cf. B. 24
(22); [WH. App. p. 157]), 9, [fr. Hom. down]; a key.
Since the keeper of the keys has the power to open and
to shut, the word kveis is fig. used in the N. T. to denote
power and authority of various kinds [cf. B. D.s. v. Key],
viz. Tov dpéaros, to open or unlock the pit, Rev. ix. 1,
cf. 2; ts aBvaocov, to shut, Rev. xx. 1, ef. 3; rod @ava-
Tov kal Tov addov, the power to bring back into life from
Hades and to leave there, Rev. i. 18; ris yraoews, the
ability and opportunity to obtain knowledge, Lk. xi. 52;
ths Baoielas TOY ovpavay (see Bagtrela, 3 e. p. 97° sub
fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; rod Aavid, the power of David (who
is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re-
ceiving into the Messiah’s kingdom and of excluding
from it, Rev. iii. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where
#) KA. oixov Aavid is given to the steward of the royal
palace).*
kkelw; fut. krelow, Rev. iii. 7 L T Tr WH; 1 aor.
éxiecoa ; Pass., pf. céxNecopar, ptcp. Kexrecopevos; 1 aor.
exreicOnv; Hebr. 130; [fr. Hom. down]; to shut, shut
up; prop.: tHv Ovpay, Mt. vi. 6; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk.
xi. 7; plur., Jn. xx. 19, 26; Acts xxi. 30; a prison, pass.
Acts v. 23; mudavas, pass. Rev. xxi. 25; tiv a48vacor,
Rey. xx.3 GLTTrWH. metaph.: rév odpavdy, i.e. to
cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi.
6; ta omAdyxva aitov amé Twos, to shut up compassion
so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid
of pity towards one [W. § 66, 2 d., ef. B. 322 (277) ], 1 Jn.
ill. 17; rv Bao. Tov ovpavay, to obstruct the entrance
into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14); so used
that tiv Bac. rod Geod must be understood, Rev. iii. 7; r.
348
KAnpovopéew
Gipay, sc. THs Bao. tr. Oeod, ibid. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc.
[Comp.: dro-, ék-, kata-, ovy-khela. |*
KA€p pa, -ros, Td, (KAETTTO) ; a. thing stolen [ Aris-
tot. ]. b. i. q. korn theft, i.e. the act committed [ Eur.,
Arstph., al.]: plur. Rev. ix. 21.*
Knyeérras [on the decl. cf. B. 20 (18) ], (apparently contr.
fr. KXedmarpos, see "Avrimas [cf. Letronne in the Revue
Archéologique, 1844-45, i. p. 485 sqq.]), 6, Cleopas, one
of Christ’s disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft.
Com. on Gal. p. 267; B. D.s. v.]*
Kéos, -ous, TO. (kAéw Equiv. to Kadéw) 3 1. rumor,
report. 2. glory, praise: 1 Pet. ii. 20. (In both
senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; for pow, Job
RVI. | 225)
kAémrrys, -ov, 6, (kAémra), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 333,
a thief: Mt. vi.19 sq.; xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 33, 39; Jn. x.
1,10; 1Co.vi.10; 1 Pet. iv.15; an embezzler, pilferer,
Jn. xil. 6; epyerOat or Frew ws KA. €v vuKTi, 1. q. to come
unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2,4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3;
xvi. 15; the name is transferred to false teachers, who do
not. care to instruct men, but abuse their confidence for
their own gain, Jn. x. 8. [SyN. see Anovns, fin.]*
KAértw; fut. eyo (Sept. also in Ex. xx.14; Lev. xix.
11; Deut. v. 19, for cAéyouat more com. [(?) ef. Veitch
s. v.; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. 848] in prof. auth.) ; 1 aor.
éxdewa; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 333; a. to
steal; absol. to commit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq.5 xix. 18;
Mk. x. 193), Lk. xviii: 205 Jn..x. 10> Ro. i221; x
Eph. iv. 28. b. trans. to steal i. e. take away by
stealth: twvd, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64; xxviii.
13%
kAfjpa, -aros, 7d, (fr. KAda@, q. V.), 1. q. KAddos, a tender
and flexible branch; spec. the shoot or branch of a vine, a
vine-sprout: Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031; <Aes-
chin. in Ctes. p. 77, 27; Theophr. h. pl. 4, 13,53 dysrédovu
kAjpa, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept., Ezek. xv. 25 xvii.
6 sq.; Joel i. 7).*
KaAnpas [cf. B. 16 sq. (15)], -evros, 6, Clement, a com-
panion of Paul and apparently a member of the church
at Philippi: Phil. iv. 3. Ace. to the rather improbable
tradition of the catholic church, he is identical with that
Clement who was bishop of Rome towards the close of the
first century; [but see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. 1. ec.
‘Detached Note’; Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biogr. i.
555 sq. ].*
kAnpovopew, -@; fut. Anpovopnow; 1 aor. éxAnpovdunoa;
pf. kexAnpovdunka; (KAnpovdpos, q. V.; Cf. oikovduos) ; Sept.
for ona and much oftener for Ww; 1. to receive a
lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive a part of an inheritance,
receive as an inheritance, obtain by right of inheritance; so,
particularly in the Attic orators, w. a gen. of the thing;
in later writ. not infreq. w. an acc. of the thing (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 129; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p.140; W
200 (188); [B. § 132,8]); absol. to be an heir, to inherit
Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ. to receive the
portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive
as one’s own or as a possession; to become partaker of, to
obtain [cf. Eng. “ inherit”], (as @nynv, Polyb. 18, 38
KAnpovowia
(55), 8; rhv ém edoeBeia ddéay, 15, 22, 3); in bibl. Grk.
everywh. w. the acc. of the thing; so very freq. in the
O. T. in the phrase «kAnp. yjv and tiv yy, of the occupa-
tion of the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as Lev. xx.
24; Deut. iv. 22, 26; vi. 1, etc. But as the Israelites
after taking possession of the land were harassed almost
perpetually by their hostile neighbors, and even driven
out of the country for a considerable period, it came to
pass that the phrase was transferred to denote the tran-
quil and stable possession of the holy land crowned with
all divine blessings, an experience which pious Israel-
ites were to expect under the Messiah: Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 13); xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 9, 11, 22; 29, 34 Alex.5 Is.
Ix. 21; Tob. iv. 12; &k devrépas kAnpovopyncovoe THY yqVY,
Is. Ixi. 7; hence it became a formula denoting to partake
of eternal salvation in the Messiah’s kingdom: Mt. v. 5
(4) (fr. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 11), where see Bleek. any
aiomov, Mt. xix. 29; Mk. x.17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; ray
BaotAetav, Mt. xxv. 34; Bacurelav Oeod, 1 Co. vi. 9 sq.3 Xv.
50; Gal. v.21; owrnpiav, Heb. i. 14; ras émayyedias,
Heb. vi. 12; apOapciay, 1 Co. xv. 50; radra [ Rec. ravra],
Rev. xxi. 7; dvopa, Heb. i. 4; riyv evdAoyiav, Heb. xii. 17;
1 Pet. i. 9. [Comp.: xara-KAnpovopew. | *
kAnpovopia, -as, 7, (KAnpovdpos), Sept. time and again
for 1713, several times for AW, NWN, ete. ; us
an inheritance, property received (or to be received) by
inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.): Mt. xxi. 38; Mk.
Ril plaka iT SG xx. 1A. 2. what is given to
one as a possession ([ef. Eng. “inheritance ”]; see KAn-
povopew, 2): Siddvae ri tee KAnpovopiay, Acts vil. 5; Aap-
Bavew te eis kAnp- Heb. xi. 8 [ (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14
p- 1153°, 33)]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em-
ploys mn now of the portion of the holy land allotted
to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, etc.), now
of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession
(Deut. iv. 38; xv.4, etc. — and nothing appeared to the
Israelites more desirable than the quiet, prosperous, per-
manent possession of this land, see kAnpovoyew, 2), the
noun kAnpovoyia, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is
used to denote a. the eternal blessedness in the con-
summated kingdom of God which 1s to be expected after the
visible return of Christ: Gal.iii. 18; Col. iii. 24 (ris KAnp.
gen. of appos. [W. § 59, 8 a.]); Heb. ix. 15; 1 Pet. i. 4;
npov, destined for us, Eph. i. 14; rod eov, given by God,
18. b. the share which an individual will have in that
eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 32; Eph. v. 5.*
kAnpo-vdpos, -ov, 6, (KAjpos, and vepopat to possess), prop.
one who receives by lot; hence 1. an heir (in Grk.
writ. fr. Plat. down) ; a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk.
Mile, 7) wk. ocx. 14:5). Gal.dv.1. b. in Messianic usage,
one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship :
so of Christ, as kAnpovdyuos mavtwyv, all things being sub-
jected to his sway, Heb. i. 2; of Christians, as exalted
by faith to the dignity of sons of Abraham and so of
sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of God’s
kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii.17; Gal.
iii. 29; with rod Geov added, i. e. of God’s possessions,
equiv. to rns Soéns (see dd€a, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 17; Oeod
349
KAR IS
81a Xpiorov, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through
him we have obtained 7 vioeaia), Gal. iv. 7 Rec., for which
LT Tr WH read 8:4 Geo0 [see dua, A. IT. 1] (ef. C. FA.
Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 148 [who advocates
the Rec. as that reading in which the others prob. origi-
nated (but cf. Meyer in loc.; WH in loc.)]); rod xé-
opov, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq.; tas
aiwviov, Tit. iii. 7; THs Baotdelas, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the
idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac-
quired or obtained the portion allotted him: w. gen. of the
thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7; rov oxdrovs, used of the devil,
Kv. Nicod.c. 20 [or Descens. Chr. ad Inferos 4,1]. (Sept.
four times for wy: Judg. xviii. 7; 28. xiv. 7; Jer. viii.
10; Mie. 3.,15.);*
KA fjpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for ial)
and mn); a lot; i.e. 1. an object used in casting
or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd,
or a bit of wood, (hence kAjpos is to be derived fr. krdw
icf. Ellicott on Col. i. 12]): Acts i. 26 (see below); Bar-
New KAnp., Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. xxiii. 34; Jn.
xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; Jon.i. 7, ete.); the lots of the
several persons concerned, inscribed with their names,
were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken,
and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the
one chosen (Hom. Il. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, ete.; Liv. 23,
3 [but ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lot]); hence 6 kAjpos mimre
emi twa, Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6; Jon. i. 7). 2.
what is obtained by lot, allotted portion: Nayxavew and
AapBavew Tov KARpov THs Scakovias, a portion in the min-
istry common to the apostles, Acts i. 17, 25 RG; éore
por KAjpos ev tu, dat. of the thing, Acts viii. 21; like
kAnpovouia (q. v.) it is used of the part which one will
have in eternal salvation, AaBetv rov KX. ev Tots nyracpevots,
among the sanctified, Acts xxvi. 18 (Sap. v. 5); of eter-
nal salvation itself, cAjpos Tay dyir, i. e. the eternal sal-
vation which God has assigned to the saints, Col. i. 12
[where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, of kAjpo, those
whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al-
lotted charge], used of Christian churches, the adminis-
tration of which falls to the lot of the presbyters: 1 Pet.
v. 8, cf. Acts xvii. 4; [for patristic usage see Soph. Lex.
s. v., ef. Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. p. 246 sq.].*
KAnpdw, -@: 1 aor. pass. ékAnpo@Ony ; (KAjpos) ; in class.
Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to
choose by lot: twa [Hdt.1, 94; al.]. 3. to allot, as-
sign by lot: twa tut, one to another as a possession, Pind.
Ole 8ic19. 4. once in the N. T., to make a kdjpos i.
e. a heritage, private possession: Twd, pass. év @ ékdnpa-
Onpev [but Lehm. éxAn@npev] in whom lies the reason why
we were made the xAjpos tov Oeov (a designation trans-
ferred from the Jews in the O. T. to Christians, cf. Add.
to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. line 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in
loc.; [ef. Deut. iv. 20; ix. 29]), the heritage of God
Eph. i. 11 [see Ellicott in loc.]. (In eccles. writ. it sig-
nifies to become a clergyman [see reff. s. v. kAjpos, fin. ].)
[Comp. : mpoo-xAnpow. | *
KAfjcts, -ews, 7, (Kaew) 5 1. a calling, calling to,
[(Xen., Plat., al.) ]. 2. a call, invitation: to a feast
KANTOS 350
(3 Mace. v. 14; Xen. symp. 1, 7); in the N. T. every-
where in a technical sense, the divine invitation to embrace
salvation in the kingdom of God, which is made esp. through
the preaching of the gospel: with gen. of the author, rod
Geov, Eph. i. 18; dueraped.. . . 7 KA. Tov Geov, God does
not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de-
cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which
he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Ro. xi.
29; 7 dv [q. v. (a.)] KAnows Tod Geod ev Xpiot@, which
was made in heaven by God on the ground of Christ,
Phil. iii. 14; also 9 émovpdmos Kdjots, Heb. iii. 1; Kadety
twa kAjoe, 2 Tim. i. 9; pass. Eph. iv. 1; d&otv twa
“\noews is used of one whom God declares worthy of the
ealling which he has commanded to be given him, and
therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call,
2 Th. i. 11; w. gen. of the obj., juav, which ye have
shared in, Eph. iv. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10; what its character-
istics have been in your case, as having no regard to
learning, riches, station, ete. 1 Co. i. 26; used somewhat
peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds
one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or
freeman, 1 Co. vii. 20.*
KAnTés, -1), -dv, (kadéw), [fr. Hom. down], called, invited,
(to a banquet, [1 K. i.41,49]; 3 Mace. v.14; Aeschin.
50,1); inthe N. T. a. invited (by God in the proc-
lamation of the gospel) to obtain eternal salvation in the
kingdom of God through Christ (see xadéw, 1 b. B. [ef.
W. 35 (34)]): Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. i. 24; Jude 1; «Anrot
x. €kNextol K. mortoi, Rev. xvii. 14; «Anrot and ékdexroi
are distinguished (see ékexrés, 1 a.) in Mt. xx. 16 ['T
W Hom. Tr br. the cl.]; xxii. 14, a distinction which does
not agree with Paul’s view (see xadéw, u. s.; [ Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. § 88; Bp. Lght/t. Com. on Col. iii. 12]) ; Anrot Inco
Xp.orov, gen. of possessor [W. 195 (183); B. § 132, 23],
devoted to Christ and united to him, Ro.i. 6; «Anrot don,
holy (or ‘ saints”) by the calling of God, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co.
ine2! b. called to (the discharge of) some office:
kAnros améatonos, i. e. divinely selected and appointed
(see kadéw, u. s.), Ro. i. 15 1 Co. i. 1 [L br. «d.]; ef.
Gal.i. 15.*
KA(Bavos, -ov, 6, (for xpiBavos, more com. in earlier [yet
cdi3. in Hat. 2, 92 (ef. Athen. 3 p. 110 ¢.)] and Attic
Grk.; see Lob.ad Phryn. p. 179; Passow s. v. kpiBavos ;
("Wie 22)])'s 1. a clibanus, an earthen vessel for
baking bread (Hebr. 133, Ex. viii. 3 (vii. 29 Hebr.) ;
Lev. ii.4; xxvi. 26; Hos. vii. 4). It was broader at the
bottom than above at the orifice, and when sufficiently
heated bya fire kindled within, the dough was baked by
being spread upon the outside [but ace. to others, the
dough was placed inside and the fire or coals outside, the
vessel being often perforated with small holes that the
heat might the better penetrate; cf. Rich, Dict. of Grk.
and Rom. Antiq. s. v. clibanus; see Schol. on Arstph.
Acharn. 86 (iv. 2 p. 339, 20 sq. Dind.)]. a. Ltd.
inves, a furnace, an oven: so Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28.*
kA(ua or xAipza (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. cpipa), -ros,
TO, (KAiv@) ; 1. an inclination, slope, declivity: tév
épav, Polyb. 2,16, 3; [al.]. spec. 2. the [supposed ]
KrAvd@vifouas
sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards the poles, a
zone: Aristot., Dion. H., Plut., al.; Joseph. b. j. 5, 12,
2s 3. a tract of land, a region: Ro. xv. 23; 2 Co.
xi. 10; Gal. i. 21; (Polyb. 5, 44,6; 7, 6,1; Hdian. 2,
11, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.]; al.).*
kAtvaptov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of «ivy ; see yuvatkdptov), a
small bed, a couch: Acts v.15 LT Tr WH. (Arstph.
frag. 33.d.; Epict. diss. 3, 5,13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57;
[ef. xAwvidvov, and Pollux as there referred to].)*
Khivn, -ns, 7), (kA\ww); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for nu,
also for wip; a bed: univ., Mk. vii. 30; Lk. xvii. 34;
a couch to recline on at meals, Mk. iv. 215 ‘vil. /4' 7
WH om.]; Lk. viii. 16; a couch on which a sick man
is carried, Mt. ix. 2,6; Lk.v.18; plur. Acts v.15 RG;
BadXeLv eis KAivny, to cast into a bed, i. e. to afflict with
disease, Rev. ii. 22.*
KAwwidvov, -ov, Td, (kin), a small bed, a couch: Lk. v.
19, 24. (Dion. H. antt. 7, 68; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An-
tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut.; [ef. Pollux 10, 7].) *
kAtvw; 1 aor. éxAuva; pf. KéxAtka; 1. trans. a.
to incline, bow: tiv kepadny, of one dying, Jn. xix. 30;
76 mpdoa@roy cis T. yiv, of the terrified, Lk. xxiv.5. —_b.
i. q. to cause to fall back: mapepBodas, Lat. inclinare acies,
i.e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (udynv, Hom. Il. 14,
510; Tpaas, 5, 37; "Axatovs, Od. 9, 59). c. to recline:
THv kepadny, in a place for repose [A. V. lay one’s head],
Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. 2. intrans. to incline one’s
self [cf. B. 145 (127); W. § 38, 1]: of the declining day
[A. V. wear away, be far spent], Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29;
Jer. vi. 4; Gua 7 kXivat 76 tpitov pépos Ths vuxros, Polyb.
3, 93, 7; éykAlvavros tod AAlov és éorepav, Arr. anab. 3,
4,2. [Comp.: ava-, ék-, kata-, mpoo-kXiva. | *
kAuia, -as, 7, (kAivw); fr. Hom. down; prop. a place
for lying down or reclining; hence 1. a hut, erect-
ed to pass the night in. 2. a tent. 3. any
thing to recline on; a chair in which to lean back the
head, reclining-chair. 4. a company reclining; a
row or party of persons reclining at meal: so in plur., Lk.
ix. 14, on which cf. W. 229 (214) ; likewise in Joseph.
antt. 12, 2, 12; Plut. Sert. 26.*
KdoTrh, -As, 9, (kAemt@), theft: plur. [ef. B. 77 (67);
W.. 176 (166) ], Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21 (22). [From Aes-
chyl. down. ]*
KAVSav, -wvos, 6, (kAvCw, to wash against); fr. Hom.
down; a dashing or surging wave, a surge, a violent ayi-
tation of the sea: tov vdaros, Lk. viii. 24; rhs Cadazons,
Jas. i. 6 (Jon. i. 4, 12; Sap. xiv. 5).*
[Syn. KkAddwv, Koma: Kua a wave, suggesting uninter-
rupted succession; KAvdwr a billow, surge, suggesting size
andextension. So too in the fig. application of the words.
Schmidt ch. 56.]
KAvdevifopar, ptep. cAvdwmCopevos ; (kAVSav); lo be tossed
by the waves; metaph. to be agitated (like the waves)
mentally [A. V. tossed to and fro]: with dat. of instrum.
mavti avépw tis Sudackadias, Eph. iv. 14 (ef. Jas. i. 63 of
ddixor KAvdSorcOnoovra Kat avaravcacba ov Suvncovrat,
Is. Ivii. 20; 6 Snpos trapacoomevos Kal KrAvdwrCopevos
oiynoerat pevyov, Joseph. antt. 9,11, 3; KrvdeareCdpevos
Oe Mg aoe eal
_— — =P —_S
KA was
éx tov 1dOov, Aristaenet. epp. 1, 26, p. 121 ed. Boisson-
ade [ep. 27, 14 ed. Abresch]j).*
Kntords, -a [B 20 (18); W.§ 8, 1], 6, (adn; appar.
identical with Alphzus, see ’A\daivs, 2 [cf. Heinichen’s
note on Euseb. h. e. 3, 11, 2]), Clopas (Vulg. [Cleopas
and] Cleophas), the father of the apostle James the less,
and husband of Mary the sister of the mother of Jesus:
Jn. xix. 25 (7 rod KA@ma se. yun [cf. W. 131 (125) note])*
kvj9: pres. pass. kvnOouat; (fr. kvdw, inf. kay and
Attic xvqv); to scratch, tickle, make to itch; pass. to itch:
kvnOopuevor TH axonv (on the ace. cf. W. § 32,5), i. e. de-
sirous of hearing something pleasant (Hesych. xv7é. r.
axonv: Cytovvrés te axovoa: xa’ Hdovnv), 2 Tim. iv. 3.
(Mid. rév dvov kvnbeoOat eis Tas axdvOas Ta €Akn, its sores,
Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 p. 609%, 32; kyqv Arrekol, kvnOecv “EAAN-
ves, Moeris p. 234; [ef. Veitch s. v. cvdw].)*
Kvi80s, -ov, 7, Cnidus or Ginidus, a peninsula [now Cape
Crio]|and a city of the same name, on the coast of Caria:
Acts xxvii. 7 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B.D. s. v. Cnidus;
Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 190.] *
KoSpayrns, -ov [B. 17 (16)], 6; a Lat. word, guadrans
(i. e. the fourth part of an as); in the N. T.a coin equal
to one half the Attic chalcus or to two \emrd (see Nerdy):
Mk. xii. 42; Mt. v.26. The word is fully discussed by
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 447 sqq. [A. V. far-
thing; see BB. DD. s. v.] *
kowAla, -as, 7), (koiAos hollow); Sept. for }u3 the belly,
oy the bowels, 35) the interior, the midst of a thing,
on the womb; the belly: and 1. the whole belly,
the entire cavity; hence 4 dvw and # kdér@ KovNla, the upper
[i. e. the stomach] and the lower belly are distinguished ;
very often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the
lower belly, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex-
crement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. etrep eis KovAcav
éx@pet d1a cToudxou wav TO mivomevov): Mt. xv. 17; Mk.
Vii. 19. 3. the gullet (Lat. stomachus) : Mt. xii. 40;
Lk. xv. 16 [WH Tr mre. yopracOjvai éx ete.]; 1 Co. vi.
13; Rev. x. 9 sq.; dovAevew TH Kowdia, to be given up to
the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see SovAeva, 2
b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also dv 6 Oeds H Kovdia, Phil. iii. 19;
koudias dpegis, Sir. xxiii. 6. 4. the womb, the place
where the feetus is conceived and nourished till birth:
koi dy sq 44 silt. 21) 3) xi 27 59 xxii) 29.6 In alig 4,
(very often so in Sept.; very rarely in prof. auth.;
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2,
16,43); éx (beginning from [see éx, IV. 1]) xovAias pnrpds,
Mii, O2redLke 1153: Acts iii. 2+ xive 8s) Galois:
(for O8 j031, Ps. xxi. (xxii) 11; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 6; Jobi.
21); Maxlix.1.5 Judo, xvi. 7 | Vat. aroKijp.3nek, Wiad
(32) ]). 5. in imitation of the Hebr. 143, tropi-
tally, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the
seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35; xxxii. 18
[Sept. yaornp]; Prov. xviii. 8 (Sept. wuyn]; xx. 27, 30;
xxvi. 22 [Sept. omAdyxva]; Hab. iii. 16; Sir. xix. 12; li.
21): Jn. vii. 38.*
Kourdw, -@: Pass., pres. Koumdopat, Kouw@par; pt. Ke-
koiunpat [ef. W. 274 (257)]; 1 aor. exouunénv; 1 fut.
kowun@noovar; (akin to cetwac; Curtius § 45); to cause
351
KOW@V eu
to sleep, put to sleep, (Hom. et al.) ; metaph. to still, calm,
quiet, (Hom., Aeschyl., Plat.) ; Pass. to sleep, fall asleep .
prop., Mt. xxviii. 13; Lk. xxii. 45; Jn. xi. 12; Acts
xil. 6; Sept. for I3¥. metaph. and euphemistically i. q.
to die [ef. Eng. to fall asleep]: Jn. xi. 11; Acts vii. 60;
xili. 36; 1 Co. vii. 39; xi. 30; xv. 6, 51 [ef. W. 555
(517); B. 121 (106) note]; 2 Pet. iii. 4; of comdpeves;
Kexolunpevot, KowunOertes, i. q. the dead: Mt. xxvii. 52; 2
Co. xv. 20; 1 Th. iv. 13-15 ; with év XpuorG added (see
ev, I. 6 b. p. 211»), 1 Co. xv. 18; in the same sense Is.
xiv. 8; xliii.17; 1 K. xi. 43; 2 Macc. xii. 45; Hom. Hi.
11, 241; Soph. Electr. 509.*
kolunorts, -ews, 7, a reposing, taking rest: Jn. xi. 13 [ef.
W. § 59,8 a.]; of death, Sir. xlvi. 19; xlviii. 13; @
lying, reclining, Plat. conv. p. 183 a.*
Kowvés, -7, -ov, (fr. Evv, civ, with; hence esp. in Epic
Evvds for kowds, whence the Lat. cena [(?); see Vanitek
p- 1065]); 1. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod. (opp. 721)
down (opp. to técos) common (i. e. belonging to several,
Lat. communis): Acts ii. 44; iv. 32; kown mires, Tit. i.
4; cartnpia, Jude 3. 2. by a usage foreign to class.
Grk., common i. e. ordinary, belonging to the generality
(Lat. vulgaris); by the Jews opp. to dyios, nyacpevos,
kadapés; hence unhallowed, Lat. profanus, levitically
unclean, (in class. Grk. BéBndos, q. v- 2): Mk. vii. 2, 5
(where RLmreg. dvimros); Ro. xiv. 14; Heb. x. 29;
Rey. xxi. 27 [Ree. xowvovv], (1 Mace. i. 47; dayet xowa,
ib. 62; kowvol dvOpeor, common people, profanum vulgus,
Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 14; of rév Kowvdy Biov mponpnpevor, i.
e. a life repugnant to the holy law, ibid. 13, 1,1; od yap
@s Kowdv aptov ovd€ ws Kowdy Toma TadTa (i. e. the bread
and wine of the sacred supper) A\apBavopev, Justin Mart.
apol. 1, 66; (of Xpuoriavol) tpamefav kowny maparierrat,
GAN ov kowny, a table communis but not profanus, Ep. ad
Diogn. 5, on which ef. Otto’s note); Kowdv cai [RG 4]
axa@aprov, Acts x. 143 Kou. i) dxaé., ib. x. 28; xi. 8, (Kowa
i) dxdOapra ov é€oOiopev, Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 20).
[Cf. Trench § ci.]*
kowdw, -@; 1 aor. inf. kowaoa [ef. W. 91 (86)]; pf.
kexolvoxa; pf. pass. ptcp. cexowwpevos; (kowvds) ; a,
in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see
kowvos, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un-
hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by BeBn-
how, cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33
[where he calls attention to Luke’s accuracy in putting
kowovv into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts
xxi. 28) and BeBndodv when they address Felix (xxiv.
6)]): Rev. xxi. 27 Rec.; Mt. xv. 11,18, 20; Mk. vii. 15,
18, 20, 23; pass. Heb. ix. 13; ri, Acts xxi. 28; yaorépa
puapodpayia, 4 Macc. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un-
clean: Acts x. 15 (cf. 28); xi. 9; see dixatdw, 3.*
KoLvwvew, -@; 1 aor. ekowwrnoa; pf.xexowv@rvnka; (Kowvo-
vos) 3 a. to come into communion or fellowship, to
become a sharer, be made a partner: as in Grk. writ. w.
gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. i. 11; 2 Mace.
xiv. 25)]; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.).
Ro: xv. 27; [1\Pet.iv. 13]; b. to enter into feliow-
ship, join one’s self as an associate, make one’s self a sharer
AOLWWMVLA
or partner: as in Grk. writ., w. dat. of the thing, 1 Tim.
v. 22; 2Jn.11; rais ypetas twos, so to make another’s
necessities one’s own as to relieve them [A. V. communi-
cating to the necessities ete.], Ro. xii. 13; w. dat. of pers.
foll. by eis re (as in Plat. rep. 5 p. 453a.), Phil. iv. 15;
foll. by ¢v w. dat. of the thing which one shares with
another, Gal. vi. 6 (kowavnoes év mace TH TANTIov cov
kal ovk épeis tdva eivat, Barnab. ep. 19, 8); cf. W. § 30,
8a.; [B. § 132, 8; Bp. Lghtft. or Ellicott on Gal. 1. ¢.
CompP.: ovy-kowewvew. | *
Kowwvla, -as, 7, (kowavos), fellowship, association, com-
munity, communion, joint participation, intercourse; in
the N. T. as in class. Grk. 1. the share which one
has in anything, participation; w. gen. of the thing in
which he shares: avevpartos, Phil. ii. 1; tod dyiou mvevpa-
tos, 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) ; r@v wabnudtwy tov Xpiorod, Phil.
iii. 10; ras miorews, Philem. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.]; rod
aiparos Tov Xp.oroi, i. e. in the benefits of Christ’s death,
1 Co. x. 16 [ef. Meyer ad loc.]; tod odparos rod Xp. in the
(mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; ras dta-
kovias, 2 Co. viii. 4; tod puvarnpiov, Eph. iii. 9 Ree. els
Ko.vwviay Tov viov Tov Oeov, to obtain fellowship in the
dignity and blessings of the Son of God, 1 Co. i. 9, where
ef. Meyer. 2. intercourse, fellowship, intimacy:
deta kovwvias, the right hand as the sign and pledge
of fellowship (in fulfilling the apostolic office), Gal. ii. 9
[where see Bp. Lehtft.]; tis cow. pwri pds oxdros; what
in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (ris odv
kowavia mpos “Ard\Awva TO pnd€ev oiketov emeretndevkort,
Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 14 fin.; ef d€ tus ore Kowwwvia mpos
Geovs jpiv, Stob. serm. 28 [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]); used of
the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians :
absol. Acts ii. 42; with eis rd edvayyedcov added, Phil. i.
53 Kowoviay éxew pe yuar, per adAnrov, 1 In. i. 3, 7;
of the fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, pera
TOU TaTpos K- META TOV viov aiTov, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6, (which fel-
lowship, ace. to John’s teaching, consists in the fact that
Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as
God and Christ, and of the blessings arising therefrom).
By a use unknown to prof. auth. xowevia in the N. T.
denotes 3. a benefaction jointly contributed, a col-
lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and
proof of fellowship (cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wisd.
viii. 18, p. 176): 2 Co. viii. 4; els twa, for the benefit of
one, 2 Co. ix. 13; movetoOar cow. (to make a contribu-
tion) ets twa, Ro. xv. 26; joined with edmoia, Heb. xiii.
16. [Cf. B. § 132, 8.]*
KoLvwvikds, -1), -dv, (KoLv@via) ; 1. social, sociable,
ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel-
lowship: Plat. deff. p.411 e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 1283,
38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242*, 26 xowawrixiy avOpwros
(dov]; Polyb. 2,44,1; Antonin. 7,52. 55; often in Plut.;
mpagets kow. actions having reference to human society,
Antonin. 4,33; 5, 1. 2. inclined to make others
sharers in one’s possessions, inclined to impart, free in giv-
ing, liberal, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [where, however, see
Cope}; Leian. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.*
$52
Kkolalas
commonly as subst. {; a. a partner, associate, come
rade, companion: 2 Co. viii. 23; yew twa kowwvdy,
Philem. 17; eiui cowwwvds tem, to be one’s partner, Lk. v.
10; twos (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing
something, Heb. x. 33; twos ev ro aipatt, to be one’s
partner ia shedding the blood ete. Mt. xxiii. 30. b.
a partaker, sharer, in any thing; w. gen. of the thing:
tev rabypatov, 2 Co. i. 7; rhs d0éns, 1 Pet. v.15 Jdeias
picews, 2 Pet. i. 45 Tod dvovacrnpiov, of the altar (at
Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing
in the worship of the Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; rav Samovior,
partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fellow.
ship with them, because they are the authors of the
heathen worship, ibid. 20; (ev r@ ap@dpt@ Kowwvol...
év tois POaprois, joint partakers in that which is imper-
ishable ...in the blessings which perish, Barnab. ep.
19, 8; see kotvwvéa, fin.).*
koitn, -ns, 7, (KEQ, KEIO, xetpar, akin to xousde) ; fr.
Hom. Od. 19, 341 down; Sept. chiefly for Jw, also
for 73DW ete. ; a. a place for lying down, resting,
sleeping in; a bed, couch: ets tiv Koirny (see eipi, V. 2a.)
eioiv, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec. the marriage-bed, as in the
Trage.: r. xoirny puaivey, of adultery (Joseph. antt. 2,
4,5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), Heb. xiii. 4. c. cohabita-
tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4sq. 21-25,
ete.; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur.
sexual intercourse (see mepuraréa, b. a.), Ro. xiii. 13 [A.V.
chambering]; by meton. of the cause for the effect we
have the peculiar expression xoitny €xew €k twos, to have
conceived by a man, Ro. ix. 10; xoirn oréppatos, Lev. xv.
16; xxii. 4; xviii. 20, 23 [here «. els omeppatiopov]; on
these phrases cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.*
ko.Tav, -Gvos, 6, (fr. xoirn ; cf. vuppav ete.), a slecping-
room, bed-chamber: 6 émt Tov Kowr. the officer who is over
the bed-chamber, the chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7;
Ex. viii. 3; 1 Esdr. iii. 3; the Atticists censure the word,
for which Attic writ. generally used Swpudriov; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).*
Kékkwvos, -7, -ov, (fr. céxxos a kernel, the grain or berry
of the ilex coccifera; these berries are the clusters of
egos of a female insect, the kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine,
crimson) |, and when collected and pulverized produce a
red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9, 41, 65; 16,
8, 12; 24, 4), crimson, scarlet-colored: Mt. xxvii. 28;
Heb. ix. 19; Rev. xvii. 3. neut. as a subst. i. q. scarlet
cloth or clothing: Rev. xvii.4; xviii. 12,16, (Gen. xxxviii.
28; Ex. xxv.4; Lev. xiv. 4,6; Josh. ii. 18; 2S. i. 24;
2 Chr. ii. 7,14; Plut. Fab. 15; qopeiv xéxxwa, scarlet
robes, Epict. diss. 4, 11,345; év xoxkivos mepurareiv, 3, 22,
10). Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.Carmesin; Roskoffin Schenkel
i. p. 501 sq.; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [B.D. s. v.
Colors, II. 3].*
Kékkos, -ov, 6, [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter ete. p. 26],
a grain: Mt. xiii. 31; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii.
19; xvii. 6; Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 37. [Hom. h. Cer.,
Hdt., down. | *
koAd{w: pres. pass. ptcp. codatopevos; 1 aor. mid. sub
kowvwvds, -7, -dv, (kowwds), [as adj. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1173; | june. 3 pers. plur. kohdowytat; (xkddos lopped); in Grk
KUALKELa
writ. 1. prop. to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2.
to check, curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun-
ish: so in the N. T.; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lehm. in 4;
mid. to cause to be punished (3 Mace. vii. 3): Acts iv, 21.*
kodaxela (T WH -xia [see I, ¢]), -as, 4, (kodaxevo),
flattery : Aébyos KoXakeias, flattering discourse, 1 Th. ii. 5.
(Plat., Dem., Theophr., Joseph., Hdian., al.) *
KéAacts, -ews, 7, (koAdlw), correction, punishment, pen-
alty: Mt. xxv. 46; xéAaow €xet, brings with it or has con-
nected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18.
(Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., ete.; 2 Mace. iv. 38; 4 Mace. viii. 8;
Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, etc.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77,
(9); 4, 44, (3); Ael. v. h. 7, 153; al.) *
[Syn. «déAacts, Tiwwpta: the noted definition of Aristotle
which distinguishes «éAacts from tizwpla as that which (is
disciplinary and) lias reference to him who suffers, while the
latter (is penal and) has reference to the satisfaction of him
who inflicts, may be found in his rhet. 1, 10,17; ef. Cope,
Intr. to Arist. Rhet. p.232. To much the same effect, Plato,
Protag. 324 a. sq., also deff. 416. But, as in other cases,
usage (esp. the later) does not always recognize the distinc-
tion; see e. g. Philo de legat. ad Gaium § 1 fin.; frag. ex
Euseb. prep. evang. 8,13 (Mang. ii. 641); de vita Moys. i. 16
fin.; Plut. de sera num. vind. §§ 9, 11, ete. Plutarch (ibid.
§ 25 sub fin.) uses coAd(ouat of those undergoing the penalties
of the other world (cf. Just. Mart. 1 apol. 8; Clem. Rom.
2 Cor. 6,7; Just. Mart. 1 apol. 43; 2 apol. 8; Test. xii. Patr.,
test. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polyc. 2,3; 11, 2;
Ign. ad Rom. 5,3; Mart. Ign. vat.5 etc.). See Trench, Syn.
§ vii.; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s.;
Bartlett, Life and Death Eternal. Note G.; C.F’. Hudson,
Debt and Grace, p. 188sqq.; Schmidt ch. 167, 2 sq.]
Kodaccacts, see KoNoooaevs.
Kodaocai, see KoAoowat.
Kodadif; 1 aor. exokadica: pres. pass. koAaPifopat ;
(kodagos a fist, and this fr. kohdwrw to peck, strike); to
strike with the fist, give one a blow with the fist (Terence,
colaphum infringo, Quintil. col. duco), [A. V. to buffet]:
twa, Mt. xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65; as a specific term for
a general, i. q. fo maltreat, treat with violence and con-
tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii.
20. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) The word is fully
discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 67
sqq-; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175 sq.*
Ko\Adw, -@: Pass., pres. koAkduat; 1 aor. éxoddnOnv ;
1 fut. KoAAnOnooua (Mt. xix. 5 LT TrWH); (xodAa
gluten, glue); prop. to glue, glue to, glue together, cement,
fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to-
gether; in the N. T. only the pass. is found, with reflex-
ive force, to join one’s self to, cleave to; Sept. for p34;
6 komopros 6 KoAAnOels Huiv, Lk. x. 11; exoAAnOnoav adrijs
ai dpapriat dypt Tov ovpavod, her sins were sucha heap as
to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl-
edge of heaven), Rev. xviii. 5 GLT Tr WH (éxoAX. 7
uxn pov dmiow cov, Ps. Ixii. (Ixili.) 9, ai Gyvora judy
UmepnveyKav €ws Tov ovpavod, 1 Hsdr. viii. 72 (74); vBpus
te Bin te ovpavoy iket, Hom. Od. 15, 329; 17, 565). of
persons, w. dat. of the thing, coAAnOnre tS Gpyare join
thyself to etc. Acts viii. 29; w. dat. of pers., to form an
intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations
303
KOTOR
with, unite one’s self to, (so Barn. ep. ec. 10, 3 sq. 5. 8;
also with pera and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11; 19, 2. 6;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15,1; 30,3; 46, 2 [ef. Bp. Lghtft.’s
note], 4): 77 yuvaci, Mt. xix. 5 LT TrWH; 14 ropvn,
1 Co. vi. 16 (Sir. xix. 2); r@ xupip, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K.
xviii. 6; Sir. ii. 3); to join one’s self to one as an asso-
ciate, keep company with, Acts v.13; ix. 26; x. 28; to
follow one, be on his side, Acts xvii. 34 (2 S. xx. 2; 1
Mace. iii. 2; vi. 21); to join or attach one’s self to a
master or patron, Lk. xv. 15; w. dat. of the thing, to
give one’s self steadfastly to, labor for, [A.V. cleave to]:
T@ ayaa, Ro. xii. 9, dyaO@, kpioes Sixaig, Barn. ep. 20, 2;
TH evAoyia,so cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
81, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat., Diod., Plut., al.)
[Comp.: mpoo-KoAddo. | *
KodAovpiov (T Tr xoAdtvpiov, the more common form
in prof. auth. [cf. Lob. Pathol. proleg. p.461; WH. App.
p- 152]), -ov, 6, (dimin. of xodAvpa, coarse bread of a
cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as
Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium [A.V. eye-salve], a prepa-
ration shaped like a xodAvpa, composed of various mate-
rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor.
sat. 1,5, 30; Epict. diss. 2,21, 20; 3, 21, 21; Cels. 6, 6,
7): Rev. iii. 18.*
KodAuBio-r Hs, -ov, 6, (fr. KoAAUBos i.q. a a small coin,
cf. kodoBes clipped; b. rate of exchange, premium), a
money-changer, banker: Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii.
15. Menand., Lys. in Poll. 7, 33, 170; 6 pev xodduBos
Soxysov, TO Sé KoAAVSioTIs adoxuyzov, Phryn. ed. Lob. p.
440. Cf. what was said under xeppatiorns.*
KoAAUpLov, see KoANoUpLOP.
Kodofdw, -@: 1 aor. exoAdBwaa; Pass., 1 aor. éxodo-
Bobnv; 1 fut. codoBwOjcoua; (fr. kodoBés lopped, mu-
tilated); to cut off (ras xeipas, 2S. iv. 12; rods modas,
Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24]; rv piva, Diod. 1, 78) ;
to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80,13); hence in the N. T. of time,
(Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail: Mt. xxiv. 22;
Mk. xiii. 20.* j
Kodoooaets, and (so L Tr WH) Kodaacaevs (see the
foll. word; in Strabo and in Inserr. KoAocanves), ~€ws, 6,
Vulg. Colossensis, Pliny Colossinus; Colossian, a Colos-
sian; in the heading [and the subscription (R Tr)] of
the Ep. to the Col.*
Kodoooai (RT WH, the classical form), and KoAacoai
(R* L Tr, apparently the later popular form; [see WH.
Intr. § 423, and esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. p.16 sq.]; ef.
W. p.44; and on the plur. W. § 27, 3), -éy, ai, Colosse,
anciently alarge and flourishing city, but in Strabo’s time
a mo\opa [i. e. “ small town” (Bp. Lghtft.)] of Phrygia
Major situated on the Lycus, not far from its junction
with the Meander, and in the neighborhood of Laodicea
and Hierapolis (Hat. 7, 30; Xen. an. 1, 2,6; Strab. 12,
8,13 p.576; Plin. h. n. 5,41), together with which cities
it was destroyed by an earthquake [about] a. p. 66
({Euseb. chron. Ol. 210]; Oros. 7, 7 [see esp. Bp. Lghtft.
u. s. p. 38]): Col. i. 2. [See the full description, with
copious reff., by Bp. Lghtft. u. s. pp. 1-72.]*
KOAtros, -ov, 6, (apparently akin to kxoidos hollow, [yet
KoAvpL Baw 354
ef. Vanitek p. 179; L. and S.s. v.]), Hebr. pn; the
bosom (Lat. sinus), i.e. as in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down 1. the front of the body between the arms:
hence dvaxeioOat év TS KOAT@ Twos, Of the one who so re-
clines at table that his head covers the bosom as it were,
che chest, of the one next him [cf. B. D. s. v. Meals], Jn.
xiii. 23. Hence the figurative expressions, ev rots KoAots
(on the plur., which occurs as early as Hom. Il. 9, 570,
ef. W.§ 27, 3; [B. 24 (21)]) rod ’ABpadp eivat, to obtain
the seat next to Abraham, i. e. to be partaker of the same
blessedness as Abraham in paradise, Lk. xvi. 23 ; dmoge-
peoOat cis Tov x. ABp. to be borne away to the enjoyment
of the same felicity with Abraham, ibid. 22 (ovrw yap
maOévtras — ace. to another reading Oavovras —’ABpadp
Kat “Ioadk kat laxkaB trodéEovra eis Tovs KOATOUs avTor, 4
Mace. xiii. 16; [see B. D. s. v. Abraham’s bosom, and]
on the rabbin. phrase ona Ow pn, in Abraham’s
bosom, to designate bliss in paradise, cf. Lightfoot, Hor.
Hebr. et Talmud. p. 851 sqq-.); 6 dv eis Tov k. TOU maTpos,
lying (turned) unto the bosom of his father (God), i. e.
in the closest and most intimate relation to the Father,
Jn. i. 18 [W. 415 (387) ]; cf. Cic. ad div. 14, 4 iste vero
sit in sinu semper et complexu meo. 2. the hosom
of a garment, i. e. the hollow formed by the upper fore-
part of a rather loose garment bound by a girdle, used
for keeping and carrying things [the fold or pocket ; cf.
B. D. s. v. Dress], (Ex. iv. 6 sq.; Prov. vi. 27); so, figu-
ratively, perpov Kaddv diddvat eis Tr. K. Twos, to repay one
liberally, Lk. vi. 38 (dmoddévat eis 7. x. Is. lxv. 6; Jer.
XXXix. (xxxii.) 18). 3. a bay of the sea (cf. Ital.
golfo [Eng. gulf, — which may be only the mod. repre-
sentatives of the Grk. word]): Acts xxvii. 39.*
KodupBdw, -d; todive, to swim: Actsxxvii.43. (Plat.
Prot. p. 350 a.; Lach. p. 193 ¢., and in later writ.)
{Comp. : ék-KodupBdo. | *
kohup Br pa, -as, 7, (kohuuBdw), a place for diving, a swim-
. ming-pool [A. V. simply pool]: Jn. ix. 7,and Ree. in 11;
a reservoir or pool used for bathing, Jn. v. 2, 4 [(ace. to
txt.of RL), 7]. (Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 d.; Diod., Joseph.,
al.; Sept., 2 K. xviii. 17; Neh. ii. 14; Nah. ii. 8.)*
koléovia (RG Tr), cokovia (L TWH KC [cf. Chandler
§ 95]), [Tdf. edd. 2, 7 -vera; see his note on Acts as be-
low, and cf. e, ¢], -as, 7, (a Lat. word), a colony: in Acts
xvi. 12 the city of Philippi is so called, where Octavianus
had planted a Roman colony (cf. Dio Cass. 51,4; Digest.
50, tit. 15, 8). The exegetical difficulties of this pass.
are best removed, as Meyer shows, by connecting coAwvia
<losely with mparn ronts, the chief city, a [Roman] colony
{a colonial city); [but cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip.
p- 50 sq. ].*
Kopdw, -@; (kdun) ; to let the hair grow, have long hair,
(ef. xopn fin.]: 1-Co. xi.14sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) * :
«oun, -ns, 9, [fr. Hom. down], hair, head of hair: 1 Co.
x1. 15. [Ace. to Schmidt (21, 2) it differs fr. Opié (the
anatomical or physical term) by designating the hair as
an ornament (the notion of length being only sec-
ondary and suggested). Cf. B.D. s. v. Hair.] *
KOVLAGr
kop({w: 1 aor. ptep. fem. xopicaca; Mid., pres. ptep.
kopiCopevos; 1 fut. couicowa (Eph. vi. 8 LT Tr WH;
Col. iii. 25 Ltxt. WH) and Attic xopiodpat (Col. ii. 25 R
GLumrg.T Tr; [Eph. vi.8 RG]; 1 Pet.v.4; ef. [ WH.
App. p. 163 sq.];_ B. 37 (83); [W. § 13, 1 e.; Veitch
s. v.]), ptep. Kojtodpevos (2 Pet. ii. 13 [here WH Trmrg.
adikovpevor; see ddikew, 2 b.J); 1 aor. exopioduny [B.
§ 135,1]; rare in Sept., but in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down
freq. in various senses ; 1. to care for, take care of,
provide for. 2. to take up or carry away in order
to care for and preserve. 3. univ. fo carry away,
bear off: 4. to carry, bear, bring to: once so in the
N. T., viz. dddBaorpov, Lk. vii. 37. Mid. (as often in
prof. auth.) to carry away for one’s self; to carry off what
is one’s own, to bring back; i. e. a. to receive, obtain:
Thy érayyediav, the promised blessing, Heb. x. 36; xi. 39
[ras erayy. L; so T Tr WH in xi.13]; carnpiav Wuyxar,
1 Pet.i. 9; ris SoEns arepavoy, 1 Pet. v.4; proOdv ddixias,
2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], (rov a&tov rns dvcceBeias po Gov,
2 Mace. viii. 33; dd£av eo Any [al. kapri¢erar], Eur. Hipp.
432; rv agéiav rapa bear, Plat.legg. 4 p. 718 a., and other
exx. elsewh.). b. to receive what was previously one’s
own, to get back, receive back, recover: rd €udv abv ToKe,
Mt. xxv. 27; his son (of Abraham after he had con-
sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29;
rov adeAhov aviBpicrov, Philo de Josepho § 35; of d€ map’
édmidas éavtods Kexopicpevor, having received each other
back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expectas
tions, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the
latter had been prevenied by God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13,
4; riv adeApny, Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery
of hostages, captives, etc., Thue. 1, 113; Polyb. 1, 83, 8;
3, 51, 12; 3,40, 10; the city and temple, 2 Mace. x. 1;
a citadel, a city, often in Polyb.; tiv Bactdeiav, Arstph.
av. 5493 rv marpdav apxiy, Joseph. antt. 13, 4, 1).
Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the
deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given
back to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one
is said kopiterOat that which he has done, i. e. either the
reward or the punishment of the deed [W. 620 sq.
(576)]: 2Co. v.10; Col. iii. 25; with mapa kvpiov added,
Eph. vi. 8; ([dépapriav, Lev. xx. 17]; €xagros, kados
éroince, kouteirat, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [Comp.: ék-, cvy-
Konica. | *
kopbérepov, neut. compar. of the adj. kouyds (fr. kopew
to take care of, tend) neat, elegant, nice, fine; used ad-
verbially, more finely, better: koprpdr. €x@ to be better, of
a convalescent, Jn. iv. 52 (drav 6 larpos ein: Képas
éyeus, Epict. diss. 3, 10,13; so in Latin belle habere, Cic.
epp. ad div. 16, 15; [cf. Eng. ‘he’s doing nicely,’ ‘he ’s
getting on finely’; and] Germ. er befindet sich httbsch;
es geht htibsch mit ihm). The gloss. of Hesych. refers
to this pass.: xopyorepov+ BeAtiwrepov, EAadpporepov.*
Kovidw, -&: pf. pass. ptcp. Kexovapevos; (fr. Kovia,
which signifies not only ‘dust’ but also ‘lime ’); to cover
with lime, plaster over, whitewash: rapot xexoviauéves (the
Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to
their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement by
KOVLOpTOS
touching them [B. D. s.v. Burial, 1 fin.; ef. Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sqq.]), Mt. xxiii. 27; TOLXos
«exov. is applied to a hypocrite who conceals his malice
under an outward assumption of piety, Acts xxiii. 3.
(Dem., Aristot., Plut., al.; for tiv, Deut. xxvii. 25 4a)i™
kowoprds, -ov, 6, (fr. covia, and dpyupe to stir up); 1.
prop. raised dust, flying dust, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb.,
al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x. 14; Lk. ix. 5; x. 11;
Acts xiii. 51; xxii.23. (For pas, Bx.:ix.: 9 5° Nahi ines
for \5y, Deut. ix. 21.)*
kowdfo: 1 aor. ékdmaca; (Kdmos); prop. lo grow weary
or tired; hence to cease from violence, cease raging: 6
dvewos (Hdt. 7, 191), Mt. xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 89; vi. 51.
(Gen. viii. 1; Jon.i. 11 sq.; [ef. esp. Philo, somn. ii. 35 ].)*
komerés, -ov, 6, (fr. Komropar, see Kdmra), Sept. for
1207; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation with beating of the
breast as a sign of grief: Komerov moveioOa emi tim, Acts
vill. 2; emt twa, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker’s an-
nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31;
Plut. Fab. 17.) *
Kot}, -7s, 7, (KdmT@) 5 1. prop. several times in
Grk. writ. the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk.
a cutting in pieces, slaughter: Heb. vii. 1; Gen. xiv. 17;
Deut. xxviii. 25; Josh. x. 20; Judith xv. 7.*
koma, -@, [3 pers. plur. komtodow (for -dorv), Mt. vi.
28 Tr; cf. épwrda, init.]; 1 aor. ékoriaca; pf. kexomriaxa
(2 pers. sing. «exomiaxes, Rev. ii. 3 L T Tr WH, ef. [W.
§ 13, 2¢.]; B. 43 (38) [and his trans. of Apollon. Dysk. p.
54n.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex.
p- 39]); (kémos,q.v-); - 1. as in Arstph., Joseph.,
Plut., al., to grow weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or
burdens or grief): Mt. xi. 28; Rev. ii. 3; xexomaxds ék
ris dOouropias, Jn. iv. 6 (ims rhs ddouropias, Joseph. antt.
2,15, 3; Spapyovvrat kai ov komacovar, Is. xl. 31). eo)
in bibl. Grk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil
(Sept. for p31); of bodily labor: absol., Mt. vi. 28;
Lk. v.5; xii. 27 [mot Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38; Acts xx. 35;
1 Co. iv.12; Eph. iv. 28; 2 Tim. ii. 6 [cf. W. 556 (517);
B. 390 (334)]; ri, upon a thing, Jn.iv. 38. of the toil-
some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot-
ing the kingdom of God and Christ: 1 Co. xv. 10; xvi.
16, (cf. Jn. iv. 38); foll. by ev w. dat. of the thing in
which one labors, év Noy x. SidacKadia, 1 Tim. v.17; év
ipiv, among you, 1 Th. v.12; év xupiw (see ev, I. 6 b. p.
211» mid. [I br. the cl.]), Ro. xvi. 12; e%s rua, for one,
for his benefit, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11 [ef. B. 242 (209);
W. 503 (469)]; eis rodro, looking to this (viz. that piety
has the promise of life), 1 Tim. iv. 10; eis 6, to which end,
Col. i. 29; ets xevov, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 (xevds éxomiaca,
of the frustrated labor of the prophets, Is. xlix. 4).*
K67r0s, -ov, 6, (kd7T@) ; 1. i. q. Td Kdmrewv, a beat-
ing. 2. i. q. komerdés, a beating of the breast in grief,
sorrow, (Jer. li. 33 (xlv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often
for 512), i. e. a. trouble (Aeschyl., Soph.) : «dzous
mapexew tii, to cause one trouble, make work for him,
Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; Gal. vi. 17; «ésov
mapéx. tivi, Lk. xviii. 5. b. intense labor united with
trouble. toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5;
305
kopBav
xi. 23; of manual labor, joined with pdy6os [(see below) ],
1 Th. ii. 9; ev kém@ k. 10x 9, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi.
27 (where L T Tr WH om. ev); 2 Th. iii. 8; of the la-
borious exurts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58; Rev. ii.
2; plur. Rev. xiv. 13; 6 «émos rijs dyanns, the labor to
which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and
endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1
Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Rec.; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv.
38 (on which see eis, B. I. 3) ; 1 Th. iii. 5; of that which
such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8; plur. 2
Co. x. 15 (ef. Sir. xiv. 15).*
[Syn. «émos, wdéxO0s, tTévos: primarily and in general
classic usage, révos gives prominence to the effort (work as
requiring force), «dzos to the fatigue, udx0os (chiefly poetic)
to the hardship. But in the N. T. wdvos has passed over
(in three instances out of four) to the meaning pain (hence
it has no place in the ‘new Jerusalem’, Rev. xxi. 4); cf. the
deterioration in the case of the allied movnpds, méevns. Schmidt,
ch. 85; ef. Trench § cii. (who would trans. =. ‘toil’, «. ‘wea-
riness ’, uw. ‘labor’).|
kompia [ Chandler § 96], -as, 9, i. q. Kkémpos, dung: Lk.
xill. 8 Rec.*; xiv. 35 (34). (Jobii.8; 1S.ii.8; Neh.
ii. 13; 1 Mace. ii. 62; [Strab., Poll., al.].) *
K6tpLov, -ov, Td, i. q. 9 Kémpos, dung, manure: plur. Lk.
xiii. 8 [Rec.* korpiav]. (Heraclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669
[quaest. conviv. lib. iv. quaest. iv. § 3,6]; Strab. 16,
§ 26 p. 784; Epict. diss. 2,4,5; Plut. Pomp. c. 48; [Is.
v. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other
later writ.) *
kérrw: impf. 3 pers. plur. gkorrov; 1 aor. ptep. kas
(MK. xi. 8 T Tr txt. WH); Mid., impf. exomTounv; fut.
KéYrouat; 1 aor. exowdunyv; [fr. Hom. down]; fo cut,
strike, smite, (Sept. for 73, N13, ete.): ri dad or &k
tivos, to cut from, cut off, Mt. xxi. 8; Mk. xi. 8. Mid.
to beat one’s breast for grief, Lat. plango [R. V. mourn]:
Mt. xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al.;
Sept. often so for 39D); 7wa, to mourn or bewail one
[ef. W. § 32,1 y.]: Lk. viii. 52; xxiii. 27, (Gen. xxiii. 2;
18. xxv. 1, ete.; Arstph. Lys. 396; Anthol. 11, 135, 1);
ent twa, Rev.i. 7; [xviii.9 T Tr WH], (2S. xi. 26); emi
mun, Rev. xviii. 9[ R GL], cf. Zech. xii. 10. [Comp.: dva-,
dmro-, €k-, €, KaTa-, mpo-, mpookdnT@. SYN. cf. Opnvéw. | *
képaé, -axos, 6,a raven: Lk. xii. 24. [ Fr. Hom. down. ] *
Kopdctov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of kdpn), prop. a collog. word
used disparagingly (like the Germ. Méidel), a little girl
(in the epigr. attributed to Plato in Diog. Laert. 3, 33;
Leian. as. 6); used by later writ. without disparagement
LW. 24 (23)], @ girl, damsel, maiden: Mt. ix. 24 sq.; xiv.
11 ; Mk. v. 41 sq.; vi. 22, 28; (occasionally, as in Epic-
tet. diss. 2,1, 28; 3, 2,8; 4, 10, 33; Sept. for My);
twice also for 7119", Joel iii. 3 (iv. 3); Zech. vil. 5; ['Tob.
vi. 12; Judith xvi. 12; Esth. ii. 2]). The form and use
of the word are fully discussed in Lobeck ad Phryn. p.
73 sq., ef. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 42 sq.*
xopBav [-Bdv WH; but see Tdf Proleg. p. 102], in-
decl., and xopBavas, acc. -av [B. 20 (18) ], 6, (Hebr. 1271p
i. e. an offering, Sept. everywh. dépor, a term which com-
prehends all kinds of sacrifices, the bloody as well as the
bloodless) ; 1. xopBay, a gift offered (or to be ofs
Kope
fered) to God: Mk. vii. 11 (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 4, of the
Nazirites, oi kopBav avrovs dvopdcavres TH ew, S@pov SE
TovTo onpaiver kata ‘EAAjnvev yho@rrayv; cf. contr. Apion.
1, 22,4; [BB.DD. s. v. Corban; Ginsburg in the Bible
Edueator, i. 155]). 2. xopBavas, -a [see B. u. s.],
the sacred treasury: Mt. xxvii. 6 [L mrg. Tr mrg. xopBav]
(rov iepov Onoavpdv, kadetras S€ KopBavas, Joseph. b. j. 2,
9, 4).*
Kopé (in Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 2 sqq. with the Grk. ter-
minations -éov, 7-, -jv), 6, (Hebr. M7) i.e. ice, hail), Ko-
rah(Vulg. Core), a man who, with others, rebelled against
Moses (Num. xvi.) : Jude 11.*
kopevvupt; (Kdpos satiety); to satiate, sate, satisfy: 1
aor. pass. ptep. kopeoOevres, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down, w. gen. of the thing with which one is filled [B.
§ 132, 19], rpopys, Acts xxvii. 38; trop. (pf.) kexoperpe-
vot eote, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the
consummate Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.*
Kopiv@.os, -ov, 6, a@ Corinthian, an inhabitant of Corinth:
Acts xvii..8; 2 Co. vi. 11. [(Hidt:, Xen., al] *
Keépw6os, -ov, 7, Corinth, the metropolis of Achaia
proper, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be-
tween the zean and Ionian Seas (hence called bimaris,
Ilor. car. 1,7, 2; Ovid. metam. 5, 407), and having two
harbors, one of which called Cenchrew (see Keyypeai)
was the roadstead for ships from Asia, the other, called
Lechzon or Lechzum, for ships from Italy. It was utterly
destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the
Achezan war, B. Cc. 146; but after the lapse of a century
it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [B. c. 44]. It was emi-
nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts,
especially the study of rhetoric and philosophy; but it
was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption,
particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came to
the city in his second missionary journey, [¢.] A. D. 53
or 54, and founded there a Christian church: Acts xvuii.
1 Co. i. 2; 2Co.i. 1, 23; 2'Tim.iv. 20. [BB.
Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 269
Abs oxalixeules
DDN saves
sqq- | *
KopvyAtos, -ov, 6, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman
centurion living at Caesarea, converted to Christianity
by Eeter; Acts x. 1 sqq.*
K6pos, -ov, 6, (Hebr. 95), a corus or cor [ef. Ezek. xlv.
14], the largest Hebrew dry measure (i. e. for wheat,
meal, etc.); ace. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to
ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. s. v. Weights and Meas-
ures sub fin.; F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii.
10 sq.]: Lk. xvi. 7[A. V. measure ]. (Sept. [Lev. xxvii.
16; aNum. xi. 325 1 Kv. 226) y..10') 2) Chri, 10%
[ xxvii. 5].) *
Koopéw, -©; 3 pers. plur. impf. exocpouv; 1 aor. éekd-
opynoa; pf. pass. kexoopnuar; (Kocpos) ; 1. to put
in order, arrange, make ready, prepare: tas \apmddas, put
in order [A. V. trim], Mt. xxv. 7 (Soprov, Hom. Od. 7,
13; rpame{av, Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,6; 6,11; Sept. Ezek. xxiii.
41 for 1p, Sir. xxix. 26; mpoodopay, Sir. 1. 14, and
other exx. elsewhere). 2. to ornament, adorn, (so
in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down; Sept. several times for
356
KOO LOS
71:1); prop.: otkoy, in pass., Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25; ra
prnpeta, to decorate [A.V. garnish], Mt. xxiii. 29 (rdgous,
Xen. mem. 2, 2,13); rd tepdv Aids Kal avabeuacn, in
pass. Lk. xxi. 5; tovds Ocuedious tod teixous Nido tipi,
Rev. xxi. 19; revd (with garments), vipdny, pass. Rev.
xxi. 2; éavras év rom, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this pass. see xara-
oroAn, 2). metaph. i. q. to embellish with honor, gain honor,
(Pind. nem. 6, 78; Thue. 2, 42; xexoop. 7 dperf, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 1, 21): éavuras, foll. by a ptep. designating the act
by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iil, 5; ry dida-
okaNiav év maow, in all ss Mat ania) Os
koopiKds, -7, -ov, (Kkoopos), of or belonging to the world
(Vulg. saecularis) ; i. e. 1. relating to the universe :
Tovpavod TovdE Kal TOY KoouLKoY Tavre@y, Aristot. phys. 2,
4.196%, 25; opp. to avOpamwos, Leian. paras. 11; Koopexy
duaraéis, Plut. consol. ad Apoll. c. 34 p. 119 e. 2.
earthly: +O &yvov koopuxor, [its] earthly sanctuary [R.V.
of this world], Heb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. e. having
the character of this (present) corrupt age: ai Koopikat
emOupia, Tit. ii. 12; (so also in eccles. writ.).*
Kéoptos, -ov, of three term. in class. Grk., ef. WH.
App. p. 157; W.§ 11, 1; [B. 25 (22 sq.)], (koopos),
well-arranged, seemly, modest: 1 ‘Tim. ii. 9[WH mrg.
-ulws|; of a man living with decorum, a well-ordered
life, 1 Tim. iii. 2. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Lys.,
al.) [Cé. Trench § xcii.]*
[koopiws, adv. (decently), fr. koopeos, q. v-: 1 Tim. ii.
9 WiUimrg. (Arstph., Isocr., al.)*]
kor LoKpaTwp, -opos, 6, (Kdapos and xparew), lord of the
world, prince of this age: the devil and demons are called
in plur. of koopoxpatopes Tod GKoTOUs Tov ai@vos [but crit.
edd. om. r. aia@v.| tovrov [R. V. the world-rulers of this
darkness |, Eph. vi. 12; cf. 11; Jn. xii. 31; 2 Co. iv. 4;
see dpyav. (The word occurs in Orph. 8,11; 11, 11;
in eccl. writ. of Satan; in rabbin. writ. WW IpPINIp is ‘wed
both of human rulers and of the angel of death; cf. Bux-
torf, Lex. talm. et rabb. p. 2006 [p: 996 ed. Fischer ].)*
KOoH0S, -ov, 6} 1. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
an apt and harmonious arrangement or constitution, or-
der. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, ornament,
decoration, adornment: évdvcews iparioy, 1. Pet. iii. 3
(Sir. vi. 30; xxi. 21; 2 Mace. ii. 2; Sept. for say of
the arrangement of the stars, ‘the heavenly hosts,’ as
the ornament of the heavens, Gen. ii. 1; Deut. iv. 19;
xvii. 3; Is. xxiv.) 213/xl, 265 (besides occasionally for
TW 5 pice for NSD, Prov. xx. 29; Is. iii. 19). 3.
the world, i. e. the universe (quem kécpov Graeci nom-
ine ornamenti appellarunt, eum nos a perfecta absolu-
taque elegantia mundum, Plin. h. n. 2, 3; in which
sense Pythagoras is said to have been the first to use the
word, Plut. de plac. philos. 2, 1, 1 p. 886 ¢.; but ace. to
other accounts he used it of the heavens, Diog. L. 8, 48,
of which it is used several times also by other Grk. writ.
[see Menag. on Diog. Laért.1.c.; Bentley, Epp. of Phalar.
vol. i. 391 (Lond. 1836); M. Anton. 4, 27 and Gataker’s
notes; cf. L. and S.s.v.1V.]): Acts xvii. 24; Ro. iv. 13
(where cf. Meyer, Tholuck, Philippi); 1 Co. iii. 22; viii.
4; Phil. ii. 15; with a predominant notion of space, in
KOO LOS
hyperbole, Jn. xxi. 25 (Sap. vii. 17; ix. 3; 2 Mace. viii.
18; xri¢ew Tr. koopov, Sap. xi. 18; 6 rod Kdopou kriotns,
2 Mace. vii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 25 (24) ;—asense in which
it does not occur in the other O. T. books, although there
is something akin to it in Prov. xvii. 6, on which see 8
below); in the phrases mpé rod Tév Kécpov eivat, Jn. xvii.
53 dd karaBodjs kdopov [Mt. xiii. 35 RG; xxv. 34; Lk.
xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8] and apo
kat. koopou [Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i.4; 1 Pet. i. 20], (on
which see xcaraBoAy, 2); amd kticews Koopov, Ro. i. 20 ;
dn’ dpxjs x. Mt. xxiv. 21; (on the om. of the art. cf. W.
p- 123 (117); B. § 124, 8 b.; [ef. Ellicott on Gal. vi.
14]). 4. the circle of the earth, the earth, (very rarely
so in Grk. writ. until after the age of the Ptolemies; so
in Boeckh, Corp. inserr. i. pp. 413 and 643, nos. 334 and
1306): Mk. xvi.15; [Jn. xii. 25]; 1 Tim. vi. 7; Baovdeta
tov Kkoopov, Rev. xi. 15; Baoweta (plur.) r. coopov, Mt. iv.
8 (for which Lk. iv. 5 rijs oikoupevns); Td Pas Tod Kdopov
tovrov, of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; év 6\@ To k., properly, Mt.
xxvi. 13; hyperbolically, i. q. far and wide, in widely sep-
arated places, Ro. i. 8; [so év mavti r@ Koopa, Col. i. 6];
6 Tore Koopos, 2 Pet. iii. 6; the earth with its inhabitants:
Civ ev Kowpo, opp. to the dead, Col. ii. 20 (Agoris Av Kal
kikentns €v T@ Koop, i. e. among those living on earth,
Ev. Nicod. 26). By a usage foreign to prof. auth. 5.
the inhabitants of the world: Oé€arpov éyevnOnpev TO KOT HO
kai dyyédas Kk. avOpwrots, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121) ]; par-
ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race
(first so in Sap. [e.g. x.1]): Mt. xiii. 38; xviii. 7; Mk.
xiv. 9; Jn. i. 10, 29, [36 Lin br.]; iii. 16 sq.; vi. 33, 51;
Ville On exIee ie xilte exI Ve Ol st XVAl 2OC XVII OMe eZor
Ro. miie'6; 19/1 Co. i. 27'sq. [ef. W- 189 (178)); iv. 133 Vv.
10s exiv.10;:2' Cosy. 19%) Jas. 1.5) [ef W% u: s.]g lini 2
[ef. W. 577 (536) ]; dpxaios kdopos, of the antediluvians,
2 Pet.ii. 55; yervaoOa eis tr. x. Jn. xvi. 21; €pxeoOar eis rov
koopov (Jn. ix. 39) and eis r. x. rovTov, to make its appear-
ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the
light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn.i. 9; iii. 19, ef.
xii. 46 3 of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; of Jesus as the
Messiah, Jn. ix. 39; xvi. 28; xviii. 37; 1 Tim.i.15; also
eioepxeoOat eis t. x. Heb. x. 5; of false teachers, 2 Jn.
7 (yet here LT Tr WH e&épy. eis r. x.; [so all texts in
1 Jn. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence
among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin
and death, Ro. v. 12 (of death, Sap. ii. 24; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 3,4; of idolatry, Sap. xiv. 14). dmoorédAew twa
eis tr. x., Jn. iii. 175 x. 36; xvii. 18; 1Jn.iv.9; pasr.e.,
Mt. v. 14; Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5; cornp 7. x, Jn. iv. 42; 1
Jn. iv. 14, (cwrnpia tov x. Sap. vi. 26 (25); éAmis Tr. K.
Sap. xiv. 6; mpwromdactos natyp tov x., of Adam, Sap.
X. 1); orotyxeia Tod k. (see oTotyeiov, 3 and 4); évT@ kdope,
among men, Jn. xvi. 33; xvii. 13; Eph. ii.12; év kdopo
(see W. 123 (117)), 1 Tim. iii. 16; efva ev ro k., to dwell
among men, Jn. i. 10; ix. 5; xvii. 11,12 RG; 1 Jn.
iv. 3; evar €v koopm, to be present, Ro. v. 13; &&eOeiv
€x Tov Kécpov, to withdraw from human society and seek
an abode outside of it, 1 Co. v. 10; dvacrpéper Oat év TO
«., to behave one’s self, 2 Co. i. 12; likewise etvac ev r@
307
KOC {0S
k. Toure, i Jn. iv. 17. used spec. of the Gentiles collec-
tively, Ro. xi. 12 (where it alternates with ra €6vn), 15;
[the two in combination: ra €6vn rod Koopov, Lk. xii.
30]. hyperbolically or loosely i. q. the majority of men
in a place, the multitude or mass (as we say the public) :
Jn. vii. 4; xii. 19 [here Tr mrg. adds dos in br.]; xiv.
19, 22; xviii. 20. i. q. the entire number, doeBar, 2 Pet.
ii. 5. 6. the ungodly multitude; the whole mass of
men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause
of Christ [cf. W. 26]: Jn. vii. 7; xiv. [17], 27; xv. 18
sq-; xvi. 8, 20, 33; xvii. 9,14 sq. 25; 1 Co.i. 21; vi. 2;
xi. 32; 2 Co: vii. 10; Jas.i.27; 1 Pet. v. 9; 2 Pet. i. 4;
ii. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 1, 13; iv. 5; v.19; of the aggregate of
ungodly and wicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 38; in
Noah’s time, ibid. 7; with otros added, Eph. ii. 2 (on
which see aiwv, 3); evar €k rod x. and ék Tod K. TovTOU
(see eiui, V. 3d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16;
1 Jn. iv.5; Aadeiv ex rod Kdvpov, to speak in accordance
with the world’s character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn.
iv. 5; 6 a&pxwv Tov k. Tovrov, i. e. the devil, Jn. xii. 31;
xiv. 30; xvi. 11; 6 ev to x. he that is operative in the
world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 45; 76 avedpa rod x.
1 Co. ii. 12; 9 codia tod x. Trovrov, ibid. i. 20 [here
GLTTr WH om. rotr.J; iii. 19. [ra orotxeia Tod Kd-
opov, Gal. iv. 3; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and gra-
xetov, 3 and 4). ] 7. worldly affairs ; the aggregate
of things earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow-
ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, etc., which, although
hollow and frail and fleeting, stir desire, seduce from God
and are obstacles to the cause of Christ: Gal. vi. 14; 1
Jn. ii. 16 sq.; iii. 17; etvae ex tov x., to be of earthly
origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36; somewhat differently
in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on which see epi, V.3 d.); xepdaive rov
x. OAov, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; of ypopevoe
TO k. ToUT@ [crit. txt. roy Kédopor; see xpdopat, 2], 1 Co.
vii. 319; pepysvay Ta TOU k. 33 sq.; Pidos and dudia Tod k.
Jas. iv. 4; dyamay tov x. 1 Jn. ii. 15; way roy k., the in-
centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 Jn. v. 4 sq. ;
the obstacles to God’s cause, Jn. xvi. 33; [ef. Aér@ xapis
k. mapedOéer@ 6 Kdcpos oitos, Teaching of the Twelve
Apostles, ¢. 10]. 8. any aggregate or general col-
lection of particulars of any sort [cf. Eng. “a world of
curses ” (Shakspere), ete.]: 6 kédapos trys adcxias, the sum
of all iniquities, Jas. iii. 6; tod mectod ddus 6 Kdopos Tov
xpnudrwr, tov Sé dmiarov ovdé dBodds (a statement due
to the Alex. translator), Prov. xvii. 6. Among the N. T.
writers no one uses kdcpos oftener than John; it occurs
in Mark three times, in Luke’s writings four times, and
in the Apocalypse three times. Cf. Kreiss, Sur le sens
du mot kocpos dans le N. T. (Strasb. 1837); Diisterdieck
on 1 Jn. ii. 15, pp. 247-259; Zezschwitz, Profangricitit
u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 21 sqq.; Diestel in Herzog xvii.
p: 676 sqq.; [Trench, Syn. § lix.]; on John’s use of the
word cf. Reuss, Histoire de la théologie chrétienne au
siécle apostolique, ii. p. 463 sqq. [i.e. livre vii. ch. viii. ];
cf. his Johanneische Theologie, in the Beitrige zu den
theol. Wissenschaften, Fasc. i. p. 29 sqq.; [Westcott on
Jn. i. 10,‘ Additional Note’].*
Kovaprtos 308
Kotapros, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Quartus, an unknown
Christian: Ro. xvi. 23.*
kodpt, Tr txt. cotu, T WH xovp, (the Hebr. 3p [impv.
fem.; the other (masc.) form must be regarded as hav-
ing become an interjection ]), arise: Mk. v. 41.*
KovetwSia, -as [B. 17 (16) ], 7, (a Lat. word), guard:
used of the Roman soldiers guarding the sepulchre of
Christ, Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; xxviii. 11. (Ev. Nic. c. 13.) *
Kovdit{w: impf.3 pers. plur. exovdifoy ; (Kodgos light) ;
1. intrans. to be light (Hes., Eur., Dio C.). 2. fr.
Hippocr. down generally trans. to lighten: a ship, by
throwing the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 38. (Sept.
Jonah i. 5, and often in Polyb.) *
Kédwvos, -ov, 6, @ basket, wicker basket, (cf. B. D. s. v.
Basket]: Mt. xiv. 20; [xvi. 9]; Mk. vi. 43; [viii. 19];
Lksixsl 7s. Jn. vi. 13. (dude, vi.19 >, Ps. xxx. (ecxa.)
7; Arstph. av. 1310; Xen. mem. 3, 8, 6; al.) *
xpaBBaros (LT Tr WH «xpd8arros; cod. Sin. kpaBaxros
[exe. in Acts v.15; cf. KC. Nov. Test. ad fid. cod. Vat.
praef. p. Ixxxi.sq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80]), -ov, 6, (Lat.
grabatus), a pallet, camp bed, (a rather mean bed, hold-
ing only one person, called by the Greeks cxiyuzouvs,
oxiurddvov): Mk. ii. 4, 9, 11 sq.; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-12 [in
12 T WH om.. Tr br. the-cl:];.. Acts.v..155; ix..335 Cf
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 175 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 62; Volkmar, Marcus u. d. Synopse u.s.w. p. 131;
[McClellan, New Testament etc. p. 106; W. 25].*
Kpatw (with a long; hence ptcp. xpagov, Gal. iv. 6 L T
Tr WH [(where RG kpagov); cf. B.61(53)]); impf. éxpa-
Cov; fut. kexpafoua (Lk. xix. 40 RGLTr mrg.), and
cpaéo (ibid. T WH Trtxt.), the former being more com.
in Grk. writ. and used by the Sept. (cf. Mie. iii. 4; Job
xxxv, 12, ete. [but dva-cpa£ouat, Joel iii. 16 Alex.; cf. W.
279 (262); esp. B. as below]); 1 aor. éxpa&a (once viz.
Acts xxiv. 21 T Tr WH éxéxpa&a, a reduplicated form
freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxil.) 6; Judg. iii. 15, 1
Mace. xi. 49, ete.; see Veitch s. v.]; more com. in native
Grk. writ. is 2 aor. &kpayov[‘ the sim ple éxpayov seems
not to occur in good Attic” (Veitch s. v.)]); pf. xéxpaya,
with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); ef. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 223; B.61 (53); Kiithner i. p. 851; [esp.
Veitch s. v.]; Sept. for pst, pS, Sp, piw; [fr. Aes-
chyl. down]; 1. prop. [onomatopoetic] to croak
(Germ. kréchzen), of the ery of the raven (Theophr.) ;
hence univ. fo ery out, cry aloud, vociferate: particularly
of inarticulate cries, Mk. v. 5; ix. 26; xv. 39 [here T
WH om. Tr br. xp.]; Lk. ix. 39; Rev. xii. 2; dad rod
poBov, Mt. xiv. 26; with @ova peydAn added, Mt. xxvii.
50; Mk. i. 26 [here T Tr WH qdovicav]; Acts vii. 57;
Rev. x. 3; dmv twos, to cry after one, follow him up
with outcries, Mt. xv. 23; like Dyt and pyy (Gen. iv.
10; xviii. 20), i. g. to cry or pray for vengeance, Jas. v.
4, 2. tocry i.e. call out aloud, speak with a loud voice,
[Germ. laut rufen]: ri, Acts xix. 32; xxiv. 21; foll. by
direct discourse, Mk. x. 48; xv.14; Lk. xviii. 39; dit
xii. 13 RG; Acts xix. 34; xxi. 28, 36; xxiii. 6; with
the addition @wv7 peydAy foll. by direct dise., Mk. v. 7;
Acts vii. 60; é€v pavy pey. Rev. xiv. 15; kpdtw héyar, to
KpaTalow
cry out saying, etc., Mt. viii. 29; xiv.30; [xv. 22 (where
RG éxpavyacev) ]; xx. 30 sq.; xxl. 9; xxvii. 23; Mk. iii.
11; xi. 9 [T Tr WHom. Lbr. Aéy.]; Jn. xix. 12 [here
LT Tr WH ékpavy.]; Acts xvi. 17; xix. 28; Rev. xviii.
18; kpalw pov peyddn Aceyor, Rev. vi. 10; vii. 10; xix.
17 [here T WH br. add ev]; xpdfas edeye, Mk. ix. 24;
kpacew x. Aeyew, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x.47; Lk. iv.
41 RGTrtxt. WH; Acts xiv. 14; of those who utter or
teach a thing publicly and solemnly, Ro. ix. 27; xéxpaye
and éxpa&e Aéyar, foll. by direct dise., Jn. i. 153 vii. 37;
éxpaée SiSdoxwv x. Aéywv, Jn. vii. 28; Expake x. eimev, In.
xii. 44; of those who offer earnest, importunate, prayers
to God, foll. by direct dise., Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6, (often
so in QO. T., as Job xxxv. 12; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 7;
commonly with mpés kiptov, mpos tov Oedv added, Judg.
x. 12 [Alex.]; Ps. iii. 5; evi. (evii.) 13, ete.). revi, to
cry or call to: Rev. vii. 2; xiv. 15, (cf. Ps. exviii. (exix.)
145; €repos mpos érepov, Is. vi. 3). [Comp.: dva-cpdgo.
Syn. see Boda, fin. | *
kparmdAn [ WH xpemadn, see their App. p. 151], -ns, 7,
(fr. KPAS the head, and ma\do@ to toss about; so ex-
plained by Galen and Clem. Alex. Paedag. 2, 2, 26 and
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. p. 45, 13 (cf. Vaniéek p. 148]),
Lat. crapula (i. e. the giddiness and headache caused by
drinking wine to excess): Lk. xxi. 34 [A. V. surfeiting;
cf. Trench § lxi.]. (Arstph. Acharn. 277; Alciphr. 3,
24; Plut. mor. p. 127 f. [de sanitate 11]; Leian., Hdian.
2, 5, 1.)*
Kpaviov, -ov, 70, (dimin. of the noun xpavor [i. e. kdpa;
Curtius § 38]), @ skull (Vulg. calvaria): Mt. xxvii. 33;
Mk. xv. 22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 17; see Tod-yoda.
(Jude. ix. 53; 2 K. ix. 35; Hom. Il. 8, 84; Pind., Eur.,
Plat., Leian., Hdian.) *
KpdoeSov, -ov, 7d, in class. Grk. the extremity or promi-
nent part of a thing, edge, skirt, margin; the fringe of a
garment; in the N. T. for Hebr. mys, i. e. @ little ap-
pendage hanging down from the edge of the manile or
cloak, made of twisted wool; a tassel, tuft: Mt. ix. 20;
xiv. 36; xxiii. 5; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. viii. 44. The Jews
had such appendages attached to their mantles to remind
them of the law, acc. to Num. xv. 37sq. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Saum; [B.D.s. v. Hem of Garment; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 624; esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto
s. v. Fringes ].*
Kkpatauds, -d, -dv, (kparos), Sept. mostly for pin, mighty:
) Kp. xelp Tod Oeod, i. e. the power of God, 1 Pet. v. 6;
rov kupiov, Bar. ii. 11; 1 Esdr. viii. 46 (47), 60 (61), and
often in Sept. (In earlier Grk. only poetic [Hom., al.]
for the more com. kparepés; but later, used in prose also
[ Plut., al.].)*
kpatatéw, -@: Pass., pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. kparatotabe
impf. 3 pers. sing. éxparatodro; 1 aor. inf. KpatarwOjvat ;
(xpdros); only bibl. and eccles., for the classic kparive ;
Sept. mostly for pim; in pass. several times for 728} ¢o
strengthen, make strong, (Vulg. conforto [and in Eph.
iii. 16 conroboro]); Pass. to be made strong, to increase
in strength, to grow strong: pass. with dat. of respect,
mvevpatt, Lk. i. 80: ii. 40 [here GL T Tr WH om. avew-
q
KpaTew
part]; Suvdywer, Eph. iii. 16, (cf. icyvew rots ompaot, Xen.
mem. 2, 7, 7); avdpiterOe, kparaovode, i. e. show your-
selves brave [A. V. be strong], 1 Co. xvi. 13 (avdpiterde
«. Kpataovabw 7) Kapdia twa, Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 25; Kpa-
raovobe k. yiverOe eis dvdpas, 1 S. iv. 9; avdpigov k. kpa-
ratwOdpev, 2S. x. 12).*
kparéw; impf. 2 pers. plur. éxpareire, Mk. xiv. 49 Tr
mrg. WH mrg.; fut. cparjow; 1 aor. ékpatnoa; pf. inf.
kexparynxevat; Pass., pres. «parotvpar; impf. éxparodpny ;
pf. 3 pers. plur. kexpatnvrar; (kpdros [q. v.]); Sept.
chiefly for pin, also for ims (to seize), etc.; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. to have power, be powerful; to be chief,
be master of, to rule: absol. for 322, Ksth. i. 1; 1 Esdr.
iv. 38; 6 kparav, Sap. xiv.19; of xparovvres, 2 Mace. iv.
50; tuvds, to be ruler of one, Prov. xvi. 32; xvii. 2, (for
wid) 5 Sap. iii. 8; never so in the N. T. 2. to get
possession of; i. e. a. to become master of, to obtain:
ths mpobeaews, Acts xxvii. 13 [(Diod. Sic. 16, 20; al.) ef.
B. 161 (140); on the tense, W. 334 (313)]. —-b. to take
hold of: tHs xeupds twos [cf. W. § 30,8d.; B.u.s.], Mt.
ame Doe Mike ish ively ix. 27 LD Tr WH Lis viii.
54; twa ths xepds, to take one by the hand, Mk. ix. 27
RG, ef. Matthiae § 331; twa, to hold one fast in order
not to be sent away, Acts iii. 11, cf. Meyer ad loc.; rovs
7roOus Twos, to embrace one’s knees, Mt. xxviii. 9; trop.
tov Adyov, to lay hold of mentally [cf. our ‘catch at’; but
al. refer this ex. to 3 b. below], Mk. ix. 10 (join apés
éavtovs with ou¢nrovvtes). c. to lay hold of, take,
seize: twa, to lay hands on one in order to get him into
one’s power, Mt. xiv. 3; xviii. 28; xxi. 46; xxii. 6; xxvi.
ARMAS OOaon ad > Vike Ait. 20s vali 5 xats dQ) extvewl 44s
46,49,.515)\ Acts:xxiv.' 65) Rev. .xx: 2, (2.S. vii. 63: Ps.
CXXXVi./(Cxxxvils), 9)i5. ri, Mt..xii. 11. 3. to hold;
i.e. a. to hold in the hand: ri év ty Se&a, Rev. ii. 1
(tH aptotepa tov aprov, Plut. mor. p. 99 d.). b. to
hold fast, i. e. trop» not to discard or let go; to keep care-
fully and faithfully: 6 éxere, éxers, Rev. ii. 25; iii. 115; 7d
dvoua pov, Rev. ii. 13; one’s authority, ryy xepadny, i. e.
exeivov os eotw 4 Kepadn, Christ, Col. ii. 19; rv mapd-
doow, Mk. vii. 3 sq. 8; ras mapaddcers, 2 Th. ii. 15; rip
didaynv, Rev. ii. 14 sq.; also with a gen. of the thing, of
blessings in which different individuals are participants:
THs époroyias, Heb. iv. 14; trys eAmidos, Heb. vi. 18 [al.
refer this ex. to 2 above], (cf. 2S. iii. 6). c. to con-
tinue to hold, to retain: of death continuing to hold one,
pass. Acts ii. 24; ras dwaptias (opp. to adinpe), to re-
tain sins, i. e. not to remit, Jn. xx. 23; to hold in check,
restrain: foll. by iva pn, Rev. vii. 1; by rod pn [W. 325
(305); B. § 140, 16 8.], Lk. xxiv. 16. On the constr.
of this verb with gen. and ace. cf. Matthiae § 359 sq.;
W. § 30, 8 d.; B. 161 (140).*
Kpatirrtos, -7, -ov, superl. of the adj. kpatvs, (kpdros),
[fr. (Hom.) Pind. down], mightiest, strongest, noblest, most
illustrious, best, most excellent: voc. kpatiore used in ad-
dressing men of conspicuous rank or office, Acts xxiii.
265 xxiv.33; xxvi. 25, (Otto, De ep. ad Diognetum etc.
Jena 1845, p. 79 sqq., and in his Epist. ad Diognet.
Leips. ed. p. 53 sq., has brought together exx. fr. later
309
Kpewavvupe
writ.). Perhaps also it served simply to express friend-
ship in Lk. i. 3 (as in Theophr. char. 5; Dion. Hal. de
oratt. 1; Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8), because in Acts i. 1 it is
omitted in addressing the same person. Cf. Grimm in
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 50 sq.*
Kpdros, -eos (-ovs), [fr. a root meaning ‘to perfect,
complete’ (Curtius § 72); fr. Hom. down], 76, Hebr.
Ts 1. force, strength. 2. power, might: rod
Kpatos ths loxvos adrod, the might of his strength, Eph.
i. 19; vi. 10; rhs dd€ys avdrod, Col. i. 11; Kara kparos,
mightily, with great power, nvéave, Acts xix. 20; meton.
a mighty deed, a work of power: movetv kp. (cf. roteiv duvd-
pews), Lk. i. 51. 3. dominion: in the doxologies,
1 Tim. vi. 16; 1 Pet.iv.11; v.11; Jude 25; Rev.i.6:
v.13; revds (gen. of obj.), Heb. ii. 14 (7d Hepoéwy xparos
exovra, Hdt. 3, 69). [SyN. see duvapts, fin. | *
kpavya{w; impf. 3 pers. plur. expavyagov; fut. xkpav-
yaow; 1 aor. expavyaca; (kpavyn); to cry out, cry aloud,
(i. q. kpago [see Bodw, fin., and below]): Mt. xii. 19;
Acts xxii. 235 to shout, foll. by direct disc., Jn. xix. 15
and LT Tr WH in xii. 13; with Xéywr added, to ery out
in these words, foll. by direct disc. : Jn. xviii. 40; xix. 6
(where Tom. déyovres), and LT Tr WH also in 12;
kpavyagew x. déyew, Lk. iv. 41 LT Trmrg.; kpavyae.
pwvn peyddn, foll. by direct disc., Jn. xi. 43. revi, to cry
out to, call to, one (see kpa¢w, 2 and fin.), foll. by direct dise.
Mt. xv. 22 RG. The word is rare in Grk. writ.: Dem.
p- 1258, 26; of the shouts in the theatres, Epict. diss. 3,
4,4; of araven, ib. 3, 1,37; Galen, al.; first in a poetic
fragm. in Plat. rep. 10 p. 607 b.; once in the O. T. viz.
2 Esdr. iii. 138. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 337.*
Kpavyy, -7s, 7, [cf. epa¢w; on its class. use see Schmidt,
Syn. i. ch. 3§ 4; fr. Eur. down], Sept. for Mpyt, MPLS,
MNW, MPIIN, ete.; a crying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv.
6; Lk.i.42 TWH Trtxt.; Acts xxiii. 9; Eph. iv. 31,
and RG in Rey. xiv. 18; of the wailing of those in dis-
tress, Heb. v. 7; Rev. xxi. 4.*
peas, 7d, [cf. Lat. caro, eruor; Curtius § 74], plur. cpéa
(cf. W. 65 (63); [B. 15 (13)]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept.
very often for 13; (the) flesh (of a sacrificed animal) :
Rowxiv. 21:3 1 Cox viii..18.*
kpeirrov and (1 Co. vii. 38; Phil. i. 23; in other places
the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co.
vii. 9 [here T Tr WH Ltxt. -r7-]; xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9
[here and in the preced. pass. LT 'Tr WH -oo-; see
WH. App. p. 148 sq.; cf. 3, 0, s]) Kpetooer, -ovos, neut.
-ov, (compar. of kparvs, see kparvaros, cf. Kiihner i. p. 436 ;
[B. 27 (24) ]), [fr. Hom. down], better; i. e. a. more
useful, more serviceable: 1 Co. xi. 17; xii. 31 RG; Heb.
xi. 40; xii. 24; with woAX@ paddov added, Phil. i. 23 [cf.
padXov, 1 b.]; Kpetooov (adv.) moreiv, 1 Co. vil. 38; Kpetr-
rov €atty, it is more advantageous, foll. by an inf., 1 Co. vii.
9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [ef. B. 217 (188); W.§41a.2a]. bz
more excellent: Heb. i. 4; vi. 9; vii. 7, 19, 225 viii. 6;
ix. 23; x.34; xi. 16,35; «kp. éore, foll. by an inf., 1 Pet.
ribs aie
Kpépapat, see the foll. word.
Kpepavvupt, also kpeuavvde [scarcely classic” (Veitch
KpeTuArn 360
8. v.)], kpepdw -@ [“still later” (ibid.)], and (Sept. Job
xxvi. 7 and Byzant. writ.) kpeud¢o, (in the N. T. the
pres. does not occur): 1 aor. éxpeyaca; 1 aor. pass. éxpe-
pacOnv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for mon; to hang up,
suspend: ti émt te (Rec.), repi re (LT Tr WH), [eis re,
Tdf. edd. 2, 7], Mt. xviii. 6; tua emi EvAov, Acts v. 30;
x. 39, (Gen. xl. 19, 22; Deut. xxi. 22; Esth. vi. 4, etc.) ;
simply xpeuacGeis, of one crucified, Lk. xxiii. 39. Mid.
xpépvapat (for kpepavyvpat, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 224);
intrans. to be suspended, to hang: foll. by é« with gen. of
the thing, Acts xxviii. 4 (see éx, I. 3); emi EvAov, of one
hanging on a cross, Gal. iii. 13; trop. év tu, Mt. xxii.
40, where the meaning is, all tue Law and the Prophets
(i. e. the teaching of the O. T. on morality) is summed
up in these two precepts. [Comp.: ék-«péuapat. ]*
[kpewddn, see xpata\n. |
Kpnpvds, -ov, 6, (fr. kpewdvvupe), a steep (place), a preci-
pice: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v.13; Lk. viii. 33. (2 Chr. xxv.
12; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Kpjs, 6, plur. Kpyres, a Cretan, an inhabitant of the
island of Crete: Acts ii. 11; Tit. i. 12 [ef. Farrar, St.
Paul, ii. 534].*
Kpjo«ys [cf. B. 17 (15)], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un-
known man: 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Kpyrn, -ns, 7, Crete, the largest and most fertile island
of the Mediterranean archipelago or Augean Sea, now
called Candia: Acts xxvii. 7,12 sq. 21; Tit.i.5. [Dict.
of Geog. or McC. and S. s. v.]*
Kp0y, -7s, 7, (in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] only in
plur. ai kp8ai), Sept. for MY, barley: Rev. vi. 6 «pibqs
RG, x«pidoav LT Tr WH*
kpl8.vos, -n, -ov, (KpiO7)), of barley, made of barley: dprot
(2K. iv. 42, cf. Judg. vii. 13), Jn. vi. 9,13. [(Hippon., al.)]*
kpiua [GT WH] or «piva [L Tr (more commonly)]
(on the accent cf. W. p. 50; Lipsius, Grammat. Unter-
such. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to «pia, as do
Bttm. 73 (64); Cobet (N. T. ad fid. ete. p. 49 sq.);
Fritzsche (Rom. vol. i. 96,107); al.; “ videtur ¢ antiquitati
Graecae, ¢ Alexandrinae aetati placuisse,” Tf. Proleg.
to Sept. ed. 4 p. xxx.; on the accent in extant codd. see
Tdf. Proleg. p.101; cf. esp. Lobeck, Paralip. p. 418]]),-ros,
70, (fr. kpiva, q. V.; as kAiua fr. kAivw), [ Aeschyl. down],
Sept. very often for vawD; 1. adecree: plur., rod
Geov, Ro. xi. 33 [al. here (with A. V.) judgments; cf.
Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 75). 2.
judgment; i. e. condemnation of wrong, the decision
(whether severe or mild) which one passes on the faults
of others: kpipart run kpivev, Mt. vii. 2. In a forensic
sense, the sentence of a judge: with a gen. of the pun-
ishment to which one is sentenced, Oavdrov, Lk. xxiv.
20; esp. the sentence of God as judge: 76 kpiva... eds
kardxpiya, the judgment (in which God declared sin to
be punishable with death) issued in condemnation, i. e.
was condemnation to all who sinned and therefore paid
the penalty of death Ro. v. 16; esp. where the justice
of God in punishing is to be shown, xpiya denotes
condemnatory sentence, penal judgment, sentence, 2 Pet.
ii. 3; Jude 4; with gen. of the one who pronounces
Kpive
judgment, rod Oeov, Ro. ii. 2 sq.; AapwBaveoOat xpiva, Mt.
xxiii. 13 (14) Ree.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Ro. xiii.
2; Jas. iii. 1; the one on whom God passes judgment is
said €yew xpiva, 1 Tim. v.12; Baordfew 76 «pia, to bear
the force of the condemnatory judgment in suffering
punishment (see Baord{w, 2), Gal. v. 103; kpiva éobiew
€avT@, So to eat as to incur the judgement or punishment
of God, 1 Co. xi. 29; els kpiwa ovvépyecba, to incur the
condemnation of God, 34; etva: év r@ ait@ kpivart, to lie
under the same condemnation, pay the same penalty,
Lk. xxiii. 40; with gen. of the one on whom condemna-
tion is passed, Ro. iii. 8; 1 Tim. iii. 6; Rev. xvii.1. the
judgment which is formed or passed: by God, through
what Christ accomplished on earth, eis xpiwa eyo eis tT.
kdo pov TovTov HAOov, where by way of explanation is added
iva xt. to this end, that ete. Jn. ix. 39; 1d xpia apyerat,
the execution of judgment as displayed in the infliction
of punishment, 1 Pet. iv. 17; the last or final judgment
is called 76 xp. rd weAXov, Acts xxiv. 25; kp. aianov, eter-
nally in force, Heb. vi. 2; the vindication of one’s right,
kpivey TO Kpiva Twos ek Tivos, to vindicate one’s right by
taking vengeance or inflicting punishment on another,
Rev. xviii. 20 ((R. V. God hath judged your judgment on
her], see &k, I. 7); i. q. the power and business of judging:
kp. Sidovat Twi, Rev. xx. 4. 3. a matter to be judi-
cially decided, a lawsuit, @ case in court: xpivata éyew
pera twos, 1 Co. vi. 7.*
kpivov, -ov, 7d, @ lily: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. [From
Hdt. down. |*
kptvw; fut. expo; 1 aor. éxpwa; pf. xéxpixa; 3 pers.
sing. plupf., without augm. (W. § 12, 9; [B. 33 (29) ]), Ke-
kpikee (Acts xx. 16GLTTrWH); Pass., pres. xpivoyar;
impf. éxpedunv; pf. Kéxpywar; 1 aor. éxpiOny [cf. B. 52
(45)]; 1 fut. xpOjoouar; Sept. for vdv, and also for
4 and 3°9; Lat. cerno, i. e. 1. to separate, put
asunder; to pick out, select, choose, (Hom., Hdt., Aeschyl.,
Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; pera veavioxwy dpiorav Kexpievov
[chosen, picked], 2 Mace. xiii. 15; kexpusevor Gpxovres,
Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 10); hence 2. to approve, ese
teem: fuépav map’ npépav, one day above another, i. e.
to prefer [see mapd, III. 2 b.], Ro. xiv. 5 (so ti mpé revos,
Plat. Phil. p. 57 e.3 rév’AmwdAX@ mpd Mapovov, rep. 3 p.
399 e.)3 macav nu. to esteem every day, i. e. hold it
sacred, ibid. 3. to be of opinion, deem, think: épbas
expwas, thou hast decided (judged) correctly, Lk. vii. 43 ;
foll. by an inf. Acts xv. 19; foll. by a direct quest. 1
Co. xi. 13; rodro, dre etc. to be of opinion ete. 2 Co. v.
14; foll. by the ace. with inf. Acts xvi. 153; ria or ti
foll. by a predicate acc., kpivew twa aEdy tevos, to judge
one (to be) worthy of a thing, Acts xiii. 463 dmorov
kpiverat, Acts xxvi. 8. 4. to determine, resolve, de-
cree: ti, 1 Co. vii. 37 (kpivai te Kat mpobécba, Polyb. 3,
6, 7; 7d xpiOév, which one has determined on, one’s re-
solve, 5, 52, 6; 9, 13,75 rots kpiOetoe éupevew Sei, Epict.
diss. 2, 15, 7 sqq.); Sdéyuara, pass. [the decrees that had
been ordained (cf. A. V.)], Acts xvi. 4; rovdro xpivare,
foll. by an inf. preceded by the art. 76, Ro. xiv. 13; also
with éuauré added, for myself i. e. for my own benefit
SAS EE
Kplv@
(lest I should prepare grief for myself by being com-
pelled to grieve you), 2 Co. ii. 1; foll. by an inf., Acts xx.
16; xxv. 25; 1 Co. ii. 2 GLTTr WH [(see below) ];
Wow dite, d2, (1 Macc. xi: 33:3) 3° Maceni. 6) viis05
Judith xi. 13; Sap. viii. 9; Diod. 17, 95; Joseph. antt.
7, 1,5; 12, 10, 4; 18,6, 1); with rod prefixed, 1 Co. ii.
2 Rec. [(see above) ]; foll. by the acc. with inf. Acts xxi.
25 (2 Mace. xi. 36); with rod prefixed, Acts xxvii. 1 [ef.
B. § 140, 16 8.]; (kpiverai ri, it is one’s pleasure, it seems
good to one, 1 Esdr. vi. 20 (21) sq.; vill. 90 (92)). 5.
to judge ; a. to pronounce an opinion concerning right
and wrong; a. in a forensic sense [ (differing from
duxa¢ew, the official term, in giving prominence to the
intellectual process, the sifting and weighing of evi-
dence) ], of a human judge: tuva, to give a decision re-
specting one, Jn. vii. 51; kara rov vopov, Jn. xvill. 31;
Acts xxiii. 3; xxiv. 6 Rec.; the substance of the de-
cision is added in an inf., Acts iii. 13; pass. to be judged,
i. e. summoned to trial that one’s case may be examined
and judgment passed upon it, Acts xxv. 10; xxvi. 6;
Ro. iii. 4 (fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6 (4))5; mepéi w. gen. of the thing,
Acts xxiii. 6; xxiv. 21; [xxv. 20]; with addition of éni
and the gen. of the judge, before one, Actsxxv.9. Where
the context requires, used of a condemnatory judgment,
i.q.to condemn: simply, Acts xiii. 27. B. of the judg-
ment of God or of Jesus the Messiah, deciding between the
righteousness and the unrighteousness of men: absol., Jn.
v. 30; vill. 50; Sukaiws, 1 Pet. ii. 23; ev Scxacoovy, Rev.
xix. 11; twa, 1Co.v.13; pass. Jas. ii. 12; Cavras kK. vexpovs,
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv.5; vexpovs, pass., Rev. xi. 18 [B.
260 (224)]; thy olkovpevny, the inhabitants of the world,
Acts xvii. 31 [ef. W. 389 (364)]; rdv kéopor, Ro. iii. 6 ;
Ta KpuTTa TOY avOparay, Ko. ii. 16; Kpivew 7d Kpipa twos
éx Twos (see xpiva, 2 sub fin.), Rev. xviii. 20, ef. vi. 10;
Kpivewy kata TO éxdoTou epyov, 1 Pet. i. 17; rods vexpods
€k TOV yeypappever ev Tois BiBdious KaTa Ta Epya avTar,
pass., Rev. xx. 12 sq.; with acc. of the substance of the
judgment, thou didst pronounce this judgment, radra
éxpwas, Rev. xvi. 5; contextually, used specifically of
the act of condemning and decreeing (or inflicting) pen-
alty on one: twa, Jn. iii. 18; v. 22; xii. 47 sq.; Acts
Maley NO, dicel 258 WiCowxi4 31 sq. 5/\2) Phe 1e2; Heb:
x. 30; xiii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 6 [cf. W. 630 (585)]; Jas. v.
9 (where Rec. xataxp.) ; Rev. xviii. 8; xix. 2, (Sap. xii.
10, 22); Tov kdopov, opp. to ca tew, Jn. iil. 173 xii. 47;
of the devil it is said 6 dpywy rov Kécpov TovTou KéKpiTat,
because the victorious cause of Christ has rendered the
supreme wickedness of Satan evident to all, and put
an end to his power to dominate and destroy, Jn. xvi.
PL: y. of Christians as hereafter to sit with Christ
at the judgment: rdv kdopov, 1 Co. vi. 2; dyyédous, ib.
3 [ef. dyyedos, 2 sub fin.; yet see Meyer ed. Heinrici ad
evees]; b. to pronounce judgment; to subject to cen-
sure; of those who act the part of judges or arbiters in
the matters of common life, or pass judgment on the
deeds and words of others: univ. and without case, Jn.
viii. 16, 26; xard re, Jn. viii. 15; Kar’ do, In. vii. 24;
év xpiwari rim xpivev, Mt. vii. 2; twd, pass. [with nom.
361
Kplous
of pers.], Rom. iii. 7; ek rod orduarés cov Kpw@ ce, out
of thine own mouth (i. e. from what thou hast just said)
will I take the judgment that must be passed on thee,
Lk. xix. 22; ri, 1 Co.x.15; pass. ib. 29; 76 Sikacov, Lk.
xii. 57; foll. by et, whether, Acts iv. 19; with acc. of the
substance of the judgment: ri i. e. kpiow twa, 1 Co. iv.
53 Kplow xkpivey (Plat. rep. 2 p. 360 d.) duxaiay [ef. B.
§ 131, 5], Jn. vii. 24 (adAnOuny x. dixaiav, Tob. iii. 2;
kpicets adixous, Sus. 53); of the disciplinary judgment
to which Christians subject the conduct of their fellows,
passing censure upon them as the facts require, 1 Co. v.
12; of those who judge severely (unfairly), finding fault
with this or that in others, Mt. vii. 1; Lk. vi. 37; Ro.
ii. 1; twa, Ro. ii. 1, 3; xiv. 3 sq. 10,13; foll. by év with
dat. of the thing, Col. ii. 16; Ro. xiv. 22; hence i. q. to
condemn: Ro. ii. 27; Jas. iv. 11 sq. 6. Hebraisti-
cally i. q. to rule, govern; to preside over with the power of
giving judicial decisions, because it was the prerogative
of kings and rulers to pass judgment: Mt. xix. 28; Lk.
xxii. 30, (ov Aadv, 2 K. xv. 5; 1 Macc. ix. 73; Joseph.
antt. 5, 3,33 of kpivovtes tT. ynv, Ps. ii. 105 Sap. i. 1;
cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1463 sq.). 7. Pass. and
mid. to contend together, of warriors and combatants
(Hom., Diod., al.); to dispute (Hdt. 3,120; Arstph. nub.
66); in a forensic sense, to go to law, have a suit at law:
with dat. of the pers. with whom [W. § 31,1 g.], Mt. v.
40 (Job ix. 3; xiii. 19; Eur. Med. 609); foll. by pera
with gen. of the pers. with whom one goes to law, and
emt with gen. of the judge, 1 Co. vi. (1), 6. [Comp.:
ava-, amo-, avt-arro- (-at), Sia-, €v-, €mt-, KaTa-, GuUV-, UTO-
(-ae), ovy- vrro-(-pat). | *
Kpicts, -ews, 7, Sept. for 7, I (a suit), but chiefly
for Daw); in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down) ] 1. @ separating, sundering, separation; a
trial, contest. 2. selection. 3. judgment; i. e.
opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. con-
cerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a.
univ.: Jn. viii. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see éaxohov-
Géw); Jude 9; 2 Pet. ii. 11; kpiow Kpivey (see kpiva, 5 b.),
Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment
of God or of Jesus the Messiah: univ., Jas. ii. 13;
Ouineis Se Vibleb. x27 plur:; Rev.xvi.' 0 exis 25 Ob
the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; 7 jpepa kpicews [ Mt. x.
5 sects 22604 exit 96s) Miki viel) Ri injbr.y #2 beri:
9; iii. 7] or ris Kpicews [1 Jn. iv. 17], the day appointed
for the judgment, see juépa, 3; eis kpiow peydadns nepas,
Jude 6; 7 Spa ths Kpicews avrod, i.e. Tov Geod, Rev. xiv.
7; €v TH Kpicet, at the time of the judgment, when the
judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq.; Wkeexeular
xi. 31 sq.; xpiow roveiv kata TavTe@y, to execute judgment
against (i. e. to the destruction of) all, Jude 15. spec.
sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem-
nation and punishment: Heb. x. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 4; with
gen. of the pers. condemned and punished, Rev. xviii.
10; 4 Kpiows ad’tov 7pOn, the punishment appointed him
was taken away, i. e. was ended, Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. liii.
8 Sept.; mimrew eis kpiow [R* eis trdxpiow], to become
liable to condemaation, Jas. v. 12; ai@mos xpiots, eternal
Kpiozros
damnation, Mk. iii. 29 [Rec.]; 9 xpiows ths yeévyns, the
judgment condemning one to Gehenna, the penalty of
Gehenna, i. e. to be suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 33. In
John’s usage xkpiows denotes a. that judgment
which Christ occasioned, in that wicked men rejected
the salvation he offered, and so of their own accord
brought upon themselves misery and punishment: avtn
eotlv 7 Kpiows, dre etc. judgment takes place by the en-
trance of the light into the world and the hatred which
men have for this light, iii. 19; xplow moveiv, to execute
judgment, v. 27; €pxecOa cis xp. to come into the state
of one condemned, ib. 24; xp. tov xédapou rovrov, the
condemnatory sentence’ passed upon this world, in that
it is convicted of wickedness and its power broken, xii.
31; mepi kpicews, of judgment passed (see kpiva, 5 a. B.
fins )sravalis, “1. 8. the last judgment, the damna-
tion of the wicked: dvdorauis kpicews, followed by con-
demnation, v. 29 [cf. W. § 30, 2 £.]. y: both the
preceding notions are combined in v. 30; 7 kpiots aca,
the whole business of judging [cf. W. 548 (510) ], ib. 22.
Cf. Groos, Der Begriff der xpiots bei Johannes (in the
Stud. u. Krit. for 1868, pp. 244-273). 4. Like the
Chald. x33 (Dan. vii. 10, 26; cf. Germ. Gericht) i. q.
the college of judges (a tribunal of seven men in the sev-
eral cities of Palestine; as distinguished from the San-
hedrin, which had its seat at Jerusalem [cf. Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23, ii.; Hdersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, ii. 287]): Mt. v. 21 sq. (cf. Deut. xvi. 18; 2 Chr.
xix. 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,14; b. j. 2, 20, 5). 5.
Like the Hebr. vawn (cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1464°
[also Sept. in Gen. xviii. 19, 25; Is. v. 7; lvi. 1; lix. 8;
Jer. xvii. 11; 1 Mace. vii. 18: and other pass. referred
to in Gesenius l. c.]), right, justice: Mt. xxiii. 28; Lk. xi.
42; what shall have the force of right, dmayyé\X\ew Twi,
Mt. xii. 18; a@ just cause, Mt. xii. 20 (on which see ék-
BadXo, 1 g.).*
Kptoros, -ov, 6, Crispus, the ruler of a synagogue at
Corinth, Acts xviii. 8; baptized by Paul, 1 Co. i. 14.*
KpiTHpiov, -ov, To, (fr. xpitnp, i. q. KpeTys) 5 a
prop. the instrument or means of trying or judging
anything; the rule by which one judges, (Plat., Plut.,
al.). 2. the place where judgment is given; the tri-
bunal of a judge; a bench of judges: plur., 1 Co. vi. 2;
Jas. ii. 6, (Sept.; Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.). 3. in
an exceptional usage, the matter judged, thing to be de-
cided, suit, case: plur. 1 Co. vi. 4 [this sense is denied by
many; cf. e. g. Meyer on vs. 2].*
KptTas, -ov, 6, (kpivw), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down],
Sept. chiefly for paw; a judge; 1. univ. one who
passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything:
w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11; w. gen. of quality (see
dtadoytopos, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensic sense, of the one
who tries and decides a case [cf. dixaorns, fin.]}: Mt. v.
25; Lk. xii. 14 LT Tr WH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of
quality [ef. B. § 132,10; W. § 34, 3b.], rijs dduxias, Lk.
xviii. 6; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter, Acts
xvili. 15; of a Roman procurator administering justice,
Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the charac-
362
KpuTT@
ter ana deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb.
xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; also of Christ returning to sit injudg-
ment, Acts x. 42; 2 Tim. iv. 8; Jas. v. 9; in a peculiar
sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard
for judging another and convicting him of wrong: w.
gen. of the object (a pers.), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 19. 2.
like the Hebr. 0dwW, of the leaders or rulers of the Israel-
ites: Acts xiii. 20 (Judg. ii. 16,18 sq.; Ruthi.1; Sir.
x. 1 sq. 24, etc.).*
KpLTiKds, -7), -ov, (kpivw), relating to judging, fit for judg-
ing, skilled in judging, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.): with
gen. of the obj., evOvpnoewy x. evvoiey xapdias, tracing
out and passing judgment on the thoughts of the mind,
Heb. iv. 12.*
kpovw; 1 aor. ptep. kpovoas; to knock: tiv Oipav, to
knock at the door, Lk. xiii. 25; Acts xii. 13, (Arstph.
eccles. 317, 990; Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Prot. p. 310a.;
314 d.; symp. 212¢.; but ckémretv rHv Ovpar is better,
ace. to Phryn. with whom Lobeck agrees, p. 177 [ef.
Schmidt (ch. 113, 9), who makes xomrew to knock with
a heavy blow, xpovew to knock with the knuckles]) ;
without ryy Ovpay [cf. W. 593 (552)], Mt. vii. 7 sq.;
Lk. xi. 9,10; xii. 36; Acts xii. 16; Rev. iii. 20 (on which
see Oupa, C. €.).*
kputry [so RG L T Tr KC], (but some prefer to write
it kpumtn [so WH, Meyer, Bleek, etc., Chandler § 183; cf.
Tdf. on Lk. as below)), -7s, 7, a crypt, covered way, vault,
cellar: eis kpuntnv, Lk. xi. 33 (Athen. 5 (4), 205 a. equiv.
to kpuntos mepimatos p. 206; [Joseph. b. j. 5, 7, 4 fin. ;
Strab. 17, 1, 37]; Sueton. Calig. 58; Juvenal 5, 106;
Vitruv. 6,8 (5); al.). Cf. Meyer adl.c.; W. 238 (223).*
KpuTrés, -7, -ov, (kpumTw), [fr. Hom. down], hidden, con-
cealed, secret: Mt. x. 26; Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2
[ef. W. 441 (410)]; 6 Kpumros trys Kapdias GvOpwros, the
inner part of man, the soul, 1 Pet. ill. 4; neut., €v r@
kpumr@, in secret, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 Ree.; év kpumr@, pri-
vately, in secret, Jn. vii. 4, 10; xviii. 20; 6 ev xpumT@
*Iovdaios, he who is a Jew inwardly, in soul and not in
circumcision alone, Ro. ii. 29; ta xpumra tou oxédrovus,
[the hidden things of darkness i. e.j things covered by
darkness, 1 Co. iv. 5; ra xp. trav avOp. the things which
men conceal, Ro. ii. 16; ra xp. ths Kkapdias, his secret
thoughts, feelings, desires, 1 Co. xiv. 25; ra xp. ris
aigxvvns (see aiaxvvn, 1), 2 Co. iv. 2; eis xpumréy into
a secret place, Lk. xi. 33 in some edd. of Rec., but see
kpumTn.*
Kptwrw: 1 aor. éxpuiya; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. cexpumrat,
ptep. kexpuppevos; 2 aor. éxpvBnv (soalso in Sept., for the
earlier éxpudny, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p.377; Fritzsche
on Mt. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [cf. kadvrrw; fr. Hom.
down]; Sept. for 83m, WMO, {D¥, 72, WI, 103;
to hide, conceal; a. prop.: ri, Mt. xiii. 44 and LT Tr
WH in xxv.18; pass., Heb. xi. 23; Rev. 1.17; «puByjvae
i. q. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v.14; 1 Tim. v. 25;
éxpvBn (quietly withdrew [ecf. W. § 38, 2a.]) x. e&nAder,
i. e. departed secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [ef. W. 469 (437)];
Kpinr@ te év with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 25; pass. xiii.
44; Kexp. ev T@ Ged, is kept laid up with God in heaven,
apvaTarnrivo
Col. iii. 3; riets rt, Lk. xiii. 21 [RG Leéevéxpupev]; éavrov
ets with acc. of place, Rev. vi. 15; twa ard mpoowmov
ruvos to cover (and remove [cf. W. § 30, 6 b.; 66, 2 d.])
from the view of any one, i. e. to take away, rescue, from
the sight, Rev. vi. 16; éxpv8y am’ airav, withdrew from
them, Jn. xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally xp. rwa ru; cf.
droxpumra, b.). b. metaph. to conceal (that it may
not become known): xexpuppevos, clandestine, Jn. xix.
38; tl dwdé twos (gen. of pers.), Mt. xi. 25 L TTr WH;
[Lk. xviii. 34]; xexpupyeva things hidden i. e. unknown,
used of God’s saving counsels, Mt. xiii. 35; dw dOadpav
rivos, Lk. xix. 42 [ef. B. § 146, 1 fin. Comp.: dro-, ér,
mept-KpuTrT@. | *
kpurrodAiftw; (kpvotaddos, q. v.); to be of crystalline
brightness and transparency; to shine like crystal: Rev.
xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.) *
xptoraddos, -ov, 6, (fr. kpvos ice; hence prop. anything
eongealed (cf. Lat. crusta) and transparent), [fr. Hom.
down], erysial: a kind of precious stone, Rev. iv. 6 ; xxii. 1 ;
(cf. B. D.s.v. Crystal. On its gend.cf. L. and§.s. v. II.]*
Kpudatos, -aia, -aiov, (kpupa), -hidden, secret: twice in
Mt. vi. 18 LT Tr WH. (Jer. xxiii. 24; Sap. xvii. 35 in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) *
kpudq [L WH -77; cf. ecx7, init. ], adv., (kpvmra), secret-
ly, in secret: Eph. v.12. (Pind., Soph., Xen.; Sept.) *
Krdéopat, -@uar; fut. ernooua (Lk. xxi. 19 L Tr WH);
1 aor. éxrycdpny; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for Mp; to
ccquire, get or procure a thing for one’s self [ef. W. 260
(244)]; (pf. cexrnpat, to possess [cf. W. 274 (257) note];
not found in the N.T.): ri, Mt.x. 9; Acts viii. 20; dca
xr@pat, all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price
added [W. 206 (194)], moAAodv, Acts xxii. 28; with ée
- and gen. of price (see ex, II. 4), Acts i. 18; 76 éavrod
oKevos ev dytacpe@ kK. TYuH, to procure for himself his own
vessel (i. e. for the satisfaction or the sexual passion;
see oxevos, 1) in sanctification and honor, i. e. to marry a
wife (opp. to the use of a harlot; the words év dy. x. ryaj
are added to express completely the idea of marrying
in contrast with the baseness of procuring a harlot as
his ‘vessel’; cf. xrac6at yuvaixa, of marrying a wife,
Ruth iv. 10; Sir. xxxvi. 29 (xxxiii. 26); Xen. symp. 2,
19),1 Th.iv.4; ras uyas tpyor, the true life of your souls,
your true lives, i. e. eternal life (cf. the opp. ¢nurote bar
riv W. avrov under ¢yyidw), Lk. xxi. 19; cf. Meyer ad
ioc. and W. p. 274 (257).*
KTfjpa, -ros, 76, (fr. xrdopar, as xpnua fr. xpdopac), a
possession : as in Grk. writers, of property, lands, estates,
bie.. Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; Acts il. 45; v. 1.*
KTfjVvos, -ous, Td, (fr. krdowar; hence prop. a possession,
property, esp. in cattle); a beast, esp. a beast of burden:
Lk. x. 34; plur., Acts xxiii. 24; Rev. xviii. 13; it seems
to be used for quadrupeds as opp. to fishes and birds in
1 Co. xv. 39; so for 773, Gen. i. 25 sq.; ii. 20. [CE.
Hom. hymn. 30,10; of swine in Polyb. 12, 4, 14.]*
KTYTwpP, -opos, 6, (Krdouat), a possessor: Acts iv. 34.
(Diod. execpt. p. 599, 17; Clem. Alex.; Byzant. writ.) *
krifw: 1 aor. ékruca; pf. pass. éxriopar; 1 aor. pass.
extiaOnv; Sept. chiefly for 812; prop. to make habitable,
363
KTIC HO
to people, a place, region, island, (Hom., Hdt., Thuc.,
Diod., al.); hence to found, a city, colony, state, ete.
(Pind. et sqq.; 1 Esdr. iv. 53). In the Bible, to create:
of God creating the world, man, ete., Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co.
xi. 9; Col. i. 16 [cf. W. 272 (255)]; iii. 10; Eph. iii. 9;
1 Tim. iv. 3; Rev. iv. 11; x. 6, (Deut. iv. 32; Eccl. xii.
1; often in O. T. Apoer., as Judith xiii. 18; Sap. ii. 23;
xi. 18 (17); 3 Mace. ii. 9; [Joseph. antt.1, 1, 1; Philo
de decal. § 20]); absol. 6 xricas, the creator, Ro. i. 25;
[Mt. xix. 4 Tr WH]; i. q. fo form, shape, i. e. (for sub-
stance) completely to change, to transform (of the moral
or new creation of the soul, as it is called), criaOévres
ev XptoT@ “Inoovd ent Epyous ayadois, in intimate fellow-
ship with Christ constituted to do good works [see ézi,
B. 2a. ¢.], Eph. ii. 10; rots duo ets Eva xawdv dvOpwror,
ibid. 15; rév xcricOevra kara Gedy, formed after God’s like-
ness [see xard, II. 3 c. 6.], Eph. iv. 24, (kap8iav xadapav
ktiaov ev epol, Ps. 1. (li.) 12).*
Kticts, -ews, 4, (kTi¢w), in Grk. writ. the act of founding,
establishing, building, ete.; in the N. T. (Vulg. everywhere
creatura [yet Heb. ix. 11 ereatio]) 1. the act of cre-
ating, creation: tov kécpou, Ko. i. 20. 2. i. q. xriopa,
creation i. e. thing created, [cf. W. 32]; used a. of in-
dividual things and beings, a creature, a creation: Ro. i.
25; Heb. iv.13; any created thing, Ro. viii. 39; after a
rabbin. usage (by which a man converted from idolatry
to Judaism was called WIN 173 [ef. Schéttgen, Horae
Hebr.i.328, 704 sq. ]), caw kriovs is used of a man regen-
erated through Christ, Gal. vi. 15; 2 Co. v.17. b. col-
lectively, the sum or aggregate of created things: Rev. iii.
14 (on which see dpxn, 35 [9 riots tr. avOparwv, Teach-
ing of the Twelve etc. c. 16]); 6An 9 Kricts, Sap. xix. 6;
raca 7 Ktiows, Judith xvi. 14; and without the art. (cf.
Grimm on 3 Mace. [ii. 2] p. 235; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as
below]), maoa xrious, Col. i.15; 3 Mace. ii. 2; Judith ix.
12; crip maons xticews, Acta Thomae p. 19 ed. Thilo
[$10 p. 198 ed. Tdf.], (see mas, I. 1 ¢.); am adpyijs krigews,
Mk. x. 6; xiii. 19; 2 Pet. iii. 4; od ravrns Tis Kricews, not
of this order of created things, Heb. ix. 11; acc. to the
demands of the context, of some particular kind or class
of created things or beings: thus of the human race, macy
ry xt. Mk. xvi. 15; ev wdon (Rec. adds 77) xrice tH ind
rov ovp., among men of every race, Col. i. 23; the aggre-
gate of irrational creatures, both animate and inanimate,
(what we call nature), Ro. viii. 19-21 (Sap. v. 17 (18) 5
xvi. 24); maca 7 xt. ibid. 22; where ef. Reiche, Philippi,
Meyer, Riickert, al., [Arnold in Bapt. Quart. for Apr.
1867, pp. 143-153]. 3. an institution, ordinance :
1 Pet. ii. 13; cf. Huther ad loc. [(Pind., al.)]*
xriopa, -ros, 70, (kri¢@); thing founded; created thing;
(Vulg. creatura) [A. V. creature]: 1 Tim. iv. 4; Rev.
v.13; viii. 9, (Sap. ix. 2; xiii. 5); contextually and met-
aph. xr. 6eod, transformed by divine power to a moral
newness of soul, spoken of true Christians as created
anew by regeneration [al. take it here unrestrictedly],
Jas. i. 18 (see dmapxn, metaph. a.; also xri¢o sub fin.,
kriots, 2 a.) 3 Ta ev apy Ktiopata Oeod, of the Israelites,
Sir. xxxvi. 20 (15). [(Strab., Dion. H.)]*
KTLOTNS
krtorys (on the accent cf. W. § 6, 1h. [ef. 94 (89); esp.
Chandler §§ 35, 36 ]), -ov, 6, (kti¢w), a founder; a creator
fAristot., Plut., al.]: of God, 1 Pet. iv. 19 [ef. W. 122
(116)]; (Judith ix. 12; Sir. xxiv. 8; 2 Mace. i. 24, etc.).*
«vPela [-Bia T WH; see I, c], -as, 9, (fr. kuBevo, and this
fr. cUBos a cube, adie), dice-playing (Xen., Plat., Aristot.,
al.,; trop. 7 «. rav avOp. the deception [A. V. sleight] of
men, Eph. iv. 14, because dice-players sometimes cheated
and defrauded their fellow-players.*
KuBepvycts, -ews, 7), (KkuSepvaw [ Lat. gubernare, to gov-
ern]), @ governing, government: 1 Co. xii. 28 [al. would
take it tropically here, and render it wise counsels (Kt.
V. mrg.); so Hesych.: kuBepynoets+ mpovontixal emoty-
pat kai ppovnces; cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. in Sept. s. v.,
and to the reff. below add Prov. xi. 14; Job xxxvii. 12
Symm.]; (Prov. i. 5; xxiv. 6; Pind., Plat., Plut., al.).*
KuBepvqrns, -ov, 6, (kuSepvaw [‘to steer’; see the pre-
ceding word]); fr. Hom. down; steersman, helmsman,
sailing-master; [A. V. master, ship-master]: Acts xxvii.
11; Rev. xviii.17. (Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27 sq.) *
Kukdevw: 1 aor. exvxAevoa; to go round (Strabo and
other later writ.) ; to encircle, encompass, surround : rnv
mapepBodnv, Rev. xx. 9 (where R G Tr exvkdwaar); [riwa,
Jn. x. 24 Trmre. WH mrg.; (see WH. App. p. 171) ].*
Kukhdev, (KvKAos [see Kikd@]), adv. round about, from
all sides, all round: Rev. iv. 8; xukX. tivds, Rev. iv. 3 sq.,
and Rec. in v. 11. (Lys. p. 110, 40 [olea sacr. 28];
Qu. Smyrn. 5,16; Nonn. Dion. 36, 325; Sept. often for
1399, 23D 23D, and simply 730; many exx. fr. the
Apocr. are given in Wahi, Clavis Apocryphorum etc.
serv)
KuKN6@, -G: 1 aor. ékikdkooa; Pass., pres. ptep. kuxdov-
uevos; 1 aor. ptep. Kukd@Oeis; (Kixdos); Sept. chiefly
fors!339)5 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur.,
Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass: of
persons standing round, rua, Jn. x. 24 [Trmrg.WH mrg.
exvkdrevoav (q.v.)]; Acts xiv. 20; of besiegers (often so
in prof. auth. and in Sept.), Lk. xxi. 20; Heb. xi. 30,
and RG Trin Rev. xx. 9. [Comp.: zepi-cuxdow. | *
KiKAdw (dat. of the subst. ci«cdXos, a ring, circle [cf. Eng.
cycle]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. times without number
for 3°30, also for 2.301 and 23D 3°30; in acircle, around,
round about, on all sides: Mk. iii. 34; vi. 6; of kUKA@aypol,
the circumjacent country [see aypés, c.], Mk. vi. 36 [here
WII (rejected) mrg. gives éyywora]; Lk. ix. 12; dz
‘lepouc. kai kvxA@, and in the region around, Ro. xv. 19;
twos, around anything (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,5; Polyb. 4, 21,
9, al.; Gen. xxxv. 5; Ex. vii. 24, etc.) : Rev. iv. 63 v.
11 [here Rudder]; vii. 11.*
KtAurpa, -ros, Td, (KvAi@, q. v-), thing rolled: with
epexeget. gen. BopBdpov, rolled (wallowed) mud or mire,
2 Pet. ii. 22[(RGLTrmrg.]. The great majority take
the word to mean ‘wallowing-place’, as if it were the
same as kuAlorpa, (Vulg. in volutabro luti). But just as
ro e&€papa signifies the vomit, thing vomited, and not the
place of vomiting; so 7d cvAvcpa denotes nothing else
than the thing rolled or wallowed. But see [the foll.
word, and] BdépBopos.*
364
Kupyjvy
KvALo HO, -00, 6, i. q. KvALots, a rolling, wallowing, (Hip-
piatr. p. 204, 4; [cf. Prov. ii. 18 Theod.]): efs kvdiop.
BopBépou, to a rolling of itself in mud, [to wallowing in
the mire], 2 Pet. ii. 22 T Trtxt. WH. See the preceding
word.*
kvAlw: (for kvAivS@ more com. in earlier writ.), to roll ;
Pass. impf. 3 pers. sing. ékuAiero; to be rolled, to wallow:
Mk. ix. 20. ((Aristot. h. a. 5,19, 18, ete.; Dion. Hal. ;
Sept.]; Polyb. 26, 10, 16; Ael. n. a. 7, 33; Epict. diss.
4,11, 29.) [Comp.: dva-, dro-, mpooku\ia. |*
KUANGs, -7, -dv, [akin to kdKAos, kvAiw, Lat. circus, cur-
vus, ete.; Curtius § 81]; 1. crooked; of the mem-
bers of the body (Hippocr., Arstph. av. 1379): as dis-
tinguished fr. ywAds, it seems to be injured or disabled
in the hands [but doubted by many], Mt. xv. 30, 31
[but here Tr mrg. br. cvA. and WH read it in mrg.
only ]. 2. maimed, mutilated, (ods, Hippocr. p. 805
[iii. p. 186 ed. Kiihn]): Mt. xviii. 8; Mk. ix. 43.*
kipa, -ros, 7d, [ fr. cvew toswell; Curtius § 79; fr. Hom.
down J, a wave [cf. Eng. swell], esp. of the sea or of a lake:
Mt. viii. 24; xiv. 24; Mk. iv. 37; Acts xxvii. 41 [RG
Tr txt.br.]; xtdpara dypra, prop., Sap. xiv. 1; with @addo-
ons added, of impulsive and restless men, tossed to and
fro by their raging passions, Jude 13. [Syn. cf. ckvdav. ]*
ktpBadoy, -ov, 7d, (fr KvpBos, 6, a hollow [ef. cup, cupola,
etc.; Vaniéek p. 164]), a cymbal, i. e. a hollow basin of
brass, producing (when two are struck together) a musi-
cal sound [see B. D.s. v. Cymbal; Stainer, Music of the
Bible, ch. ix.]: 1 Co. xiii.1. (1 Chr. xiii. 8; xv. 16,19,
28; Ps. cl. 5. Pind., Xen., Diod., Joseph., al.) *
Kbpivov, -ov, Td, cumin (or cummin), Germ. Kiimmel,
(for 12, Is. xxviii. 25, 27): Mt. xxiii. 23. (Theophr.,
Diose., Plut., al.) [ Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 443.]*
Kuvdpiov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of kv, i. q. kuvidvov, which
Phryn. prefers; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; cf. yuvatkd-
pty), a little dog: Mt. xv. 26 sq.; Mk. vii. 27sq. (Xen.,
Plat., Theophr., Plut., al.) *
Kumpwos, -ov, 6, @ Cyprian or Cypriote, i.e. a native or
an inhabitant of Cyprus: Acts iv. 36; xi. 20; xxi. 16,
(2 Mace. iv. 29). [(Hdt., al.)]*
Kinpos, -ov, 7, Cyprus, a very fertile and delightful
island of the Mediterranean, lying between Cilicia and
Syria: Acts xi. 19; xiii. 4; xv. 39; xxi. 3; xxvil. 4,
(1 Mace. xv. 23; 2 Mace. x.13). [BB.DD.s.v.; Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]*
kirrw: 1 aor. ptep. kvyas; (fr. xvBn the head [cef.
Vaniéek p. 164; esp. Curtius, index s. v.]); fr. Hom.
down; Sept. chiefly for TIP; to bow the head, bend for:
ward, stoop down: Mk. i. 7; with karo added (Arstph.
vesp. 279), Jn. viii. 6, 8. [Comp.: dva-, mapa-, ovy:
KuTrro. | *
Kupnvatos, -ov, 6, (Kupnyn, q. v-), a Cyrenean [A. V.
(R. V. Acts vi. 9) Cyrenian], a native of Cyrene: Mt.
xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts vi. 9; xi. 20;
xiii. 1. [(Hdt., al.)]*
Kuphyvn, -ns, 9, Cyrene, a large and very flourishing city
of Libya Cyrenaica or Pentapolitana, about 11 Roman
miles from the sea. Among its inhabitants were great
Kupnvios
aumbers of Jews, whom Ptolemy I. had brought thither,
and invested with the rights of citizens: Acts ii. 10.
bE BD 8. Nel
Kupjvios (Lcehm. Kupivos [-peivos Tr mrg. WH mrg.
(see et, )]), -ov, 6, Quirin[-i-]us (in full, Publius Sulpicius
Quirinus [correctly Quirinius ; see Woolsey in Bib. Sacr.
for 1878, pp. 499-513]), a Roman consul A. U. Cc. 742;
afterwards (not before the year 759) governor of Syria
(where perhaps he may previously have been in com-
mand, 751-752). While filling that office after Arche-
laus had been banished and Judea had been reduced to
a province of Syria, he made the enrolment mentioned
in Acts v. 37 (ef. Joseph. antt. 18, 1,1). Therefore Luke
in his Gospel ii. 2 has made a mistake [yet see added
reff. below] in defining the time of this enrolment. For
in the last years of Herod the Great, not Quirinius but
Sentius Saturninus was governor of Syria. His suc-
cessor, A. U. Cc. 750, was Quintilius Varus; and Quiri-
nius (who died in the year 774) succeeded Varus. Cf.
Win. RW B. s. vv. Quirinius and Schatzung; Strauss,
Die Halben u. die Ganzen (Berl. 1865) p. 70 sqq.; Hil-
genfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie for 1865,
vp. 480 sqq.; Keim i. 399 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 115]; Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgeschichte, p. 161 sq.; Weizsiicker in Schen-
kel v. p. 23 sqq.; [Kei/, Com. iib. Mark. u. Luk. p. 213
sqq-; McCiellan, New Testament etc., i. p. 392 sqq.; and
Woolsey in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Cyrenius, and at length
in Bib. Sacr. for Apr. 1870, p. 291 sqq. ].*
Kupia, -as, 7, Cyria, a Christian woman to whom the
second Ep. of John is addressed: 2 Jn. 1,5, [GL TKC
(and WH mrg. in vs. 1)]. This prop. name is not un-
common in other writers also; cf. Liicke, Comm. iib. die
Brr. des Joh. 3d ed. p. 444. [But R Tr al. xupia, regard-
ing the word as an appellative, Jady; (ai yuvaixes edvdds
amo Teaoapeckaidexa eT@v UTd TOV avdp@v Kup lat Kaovr-
rat, Epictet. enchir. 40). Cf. Westcott on 2 Jn. u. s.]*
Kuptakds, -7, -dv, a bibl. and eccles. word [cf. W. § 34,
3 and Soph. Lex. s. v.], of or belonging to the Lord; 1.
i.q. the gen. of the author rod cupiov, thus kuptaxdv detrvor,
the supper instituted by the Lord, 1 Co. xi. 20; Adyta
kuptaka, the Lord’s sayings, Papias ap. Eus. h. e. 3, 39,
13 2. relating to the Lord, 7 kuptakr nuepa, the day
devoted to the Lord, sacred to the memory of Christ’s
resurrection, Rev. i. 10 [cf. ‘ xupsaky Kupiov’, Teaching
14, 1 (where see Harnack) ; ef. B. D.s.v. Lord’s Day ;
Bp. Lghift. Ign. ad Magn. p. 129; Miiller on Barn. ep. 15,
9]; ypadat xvp. the writings concerning the Lord, i.e.
the Gospels, Clem. Alex., al. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
kupievw ; fut. kyprevow; 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing.
kupievon; (kuptos); to be lord of, to rule over, have do-
minion over: with gen. of the obj. [cf. B. 169 (147) ], Lk.
xxii. 25; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. i. 24; absol. of kupievovres,
supreme rulers, kings, 1 Tim. vi. 15; of things and forces
i. q. to exercise influence upon, to have power over: with
zen. of the obj., 6 Oavaros, Ro. vi. 9; 7 duapria, 14; 6 vdpos,
Ro. vii. 1. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb., sqq.; Sept. for wid
‘ete.].) [Comp.: kata-kuptevo. | *
KUptos, -ov, 6, (prop. aD adj. xvpwos, -a, - 1, also of two
365
KUPLOS
term.; prop. i. q. 6 €x@v kdpos, having power or author-
ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing be-
longs, about which he has the power of deciding; master,
lord; used a. univ. of the possessor and disposer of
a thing, the owner, (Sept. for })78, Sy3): with gen. of
the thing, as rod dumeAdvos, Mt. xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii.
9; Lk. xx. 15; rod Oepurpod, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; ris
oixias, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12); rod modo,
Lk. xix. 33; rov caBBarov, possessed of the power to
determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releas-
ing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8;
Mk. ii. 28; Lk. vi.5. with gen. of a pers., one who has
control of the person, the master [A. V. lord]; in the
household: SovAov, mardioxns, oikovowov, Mt. x. 24; Lk.
xii. 46 sq.; xiv. 21; xvi. 3,5; Acts xvi. 16, 19, etc.; ab-
sol., opp. to of dodAa, Eph. vi. 5,9; Col. iv. 1, ete.; in
the state, the sovereign, prince, chief: the Roman em-
peror [(on this use of xvptos see at length Woolsey in
Bib. Sacr. for July 1861, pp. 595-608) ], Acts xxv. 26;
once angels are called xupiot, as those to whom, in the
administration of the universe, departments are in-
trusted by God (see ayyedos, 2): 1 Co. viii. 5. b.
kxvptos is a title of honor, expressive of respect and rev-
erence, with which servants salute their master, Mt. xiii.
27; xxv. 20, 22; Lk. xiii. 8; xiv. 22, etc.; the disciples
salute Jesus their teacher and master, Mt. viii. 25; xvi.
92. Lk. ix.545°x. 17, 40; xi. 1; xxii.33,/38; Jn.xi/12;
xiii. 6, 9, 13; xxi. 15-17, 20 sq., ete., ef. xx. 13; Lk. xxiv.
34; his followers salute Jesus as the Messiah, whose
authority they acknowledge (by its repetition showing
their earnestness [ef. W. § 65, 5 a.]), kupte, kvpre, Mt. vii.
21; and RG in LK. xiii. 25; employed, too, by a son in
addressing his father, Mt. xxi. 30; by citizens towards
magistrates, Mt. xxvii. 63; by any one who wishes to
honor a man of distinction, Mt. viii. 2, 6,8; xv. 27; Mk.
Wil 26swlikeve 126) xanI255. Insiv. 11,15; 195) v.75 Sa
Fi) xx) Acts ix.d'3 xvi. 305) xxi. (8: c. this
title is given a. to Gop, the ruler of the universe
(so the Sept. for *358, Ti78, ois, mim and a; [the
term xvptos is used of the gods from Pind. and Soph.
down, but “the address k«vpse, used in prayer to God,
though freq. in Epict. does not occur (so far as I am
aware) in any heathen writing before the apostolic
times; sometimes we find kup 6 Beds, and once (2, 7, 12)
he writes xkipie eAénoov” (Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 314
note 8) ]),—both with the art., 6 kipios: Mt. i. 22 [RG];
v.33; Mk.v.19; Lk.i. 6,9, 28,46; Acts vil. 33; viii:
24; xi. 21; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18, [but see €Xeos, 3]; Heb. viii.
2; Jas.iv.15; v.15; Jude 5[RG], etc.; and without
the art. (cf. W. 124 (118); B. 88 (77) sq.): Mt. xxi. 9:
Xxvii. 10; Mk. xiii. 20; Lk. i. 17, 38, 58, 66; ii. 9, 23, 26,
39; Acts vii. 49; Heb. vii. 21; xii. 6; 1 Pet.i. 25; 2 Pet.
ii.9; Jude [5 T Tr txt. WH txt.], 9; xvpios rod ovpavod
kK. ths yns, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x.21; Acts xvii. 24; kvptos
T&v Kuptevovtav, 1 Tim. vi. 15; kdptos 6 Beds, see beds, 3
p- 288° [and below]; kvpios 6 eds 6 mavtoxparwp, Rev.
iv. 8; kipos caBawd, Ro. ix. 29; ayyedos and 6 dyyedos
kuptov, Mt. i. 20; ii. 13,19; xxviii. 2; Lk.i.11; ii. 9;
KUPLOS
Acts v.19; viii. 26; xii. 7; mvedpa kupiov, Lk. iv. 18;
Acts viii. 39; with prepositions: t7é (RG add the art.)
xuptov, Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; mapa xupiov, Mt. xxi. 42 and
Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 23 ; mapa xvpio, 2 Pet.
iii. 8. B. to the Mressrau; and that aa. to
the Messiah regarded univ.: Lk. i. 43; ii. 11; Mt. xxi.
8; xxii. 45; Mk. xi. 8; xii. 36; Lk. xix.34; xx.44. BB.
to Jesus as the Messiah, since by his death he acquired
a special ownership in mankind, and after his resurrec-
tion was exalted to a partnership in the divine adminis-
tration (this force of the word when applied to Jesus
appears esp. in Acts x. 36; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. vii. 22; viii.
6; Phil. ii. 9-11): Eph. iv. 5; with the art. 6 xkdp., Mk.
xvi. 19sq.; Actsix.1; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. iv. 5; vi.13 sq. ;
Vii. 10, 12, 34. sq.; ix. 5,14; x. 22; xi. 26; [xvi. 22GL
Dir WH]; Phuliav. 5; [2 Lim. iv. 22.0 ir Wg Heb:
ii. 3 (ef. 7 sqq.); Jas. v. 7, etc. after his resurrection
Jesus is addressed by the title 6 KUpids pov kai 6 eds pov,
Jn. xx. 28. dé row kup., 1 Co. xi. 23; 2 Co. v.65; mpos
rov x. 2 Co. v. 8; 6 Kupios "Ingots, Acts i. 21; iv. 33; xvi.
Sil; gexs 85 5/<1/Co.x1./ 235 evi. 23° 8 Tr WH; P2iCort.
14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.]; Rev. xxii. 20; 6 kup. “Inc.
Xptoros, 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 23 RGL]; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14)
[WH br. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 22 [RG], etc.; 6
kvptos nuav, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 14; 2 Pet.
iii. 15; Rev. xi. 15, etce.; with "Incovs added, [L T Tr
WH in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13]; Heb. xiii. 20; Rev. xxii. 21
[LT Tr (yet without jy.)]; so with Xpioros, Ro. xvi. 18
[GLT Tr WH]; and ’Incots Xpiotos, 1 Th.i. 3 [ef. B.
155 (136) ];. iii. 11 [RG], 13 [Ree.]3. v. 23; 2 Th. ii. 1,
14, 16; iii. 6 [(jpav)}; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 3; Gal. vi. 18
[WH br. jyov]; Eph. i. 3; vi. 24; Ro. xvi. 24 [RG];
1 Tim. vi. 3,14; Philem. 25 [T WHom. query]; Phil. iv.
23 [GLT Tr WH om. ny. ], ete.; "Incovs Xpiords 6 xvptos
npav, Ro.i.4; and Xp. Ina. 6 kup. (nev), Col. ii. 6; Eph.
iii. 11; 1 Tim.i. 2; 2 Tim.i. 2; 6 «vp. cai 6 owrnp, 2 Pet.
iii. 2 [ef. B. 155 (136)]; with "Incovs Xpioros added, 2 Pet.
iii. 18; without the art., simply xvpsos: 1 Co. vii. 22, 25;
xe Ds) xvi. 10 5 2) Cosiey 5 acid 3-2" Timri 24> Jas.w:
11; 2 Pet. iii. 10; xvpios kupiwy i.e. Supreme Lord (cf. W.
§ 36, 2; [B. § 123, 12]): Rev. xix. 16 (cf. in a. above;
of God, Deut. x.17); with prepositions: dé kupiov, Col.
iii. 24; xara xvptov, 2 Co. xi. 17; mpds kvprov, 2 Co. iii. 16;
ovv kup. 1 Th. iv. 17; bd kup. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase
ev xupio, freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found
only in Rey. xiv. 13, see év, I. 6 b. p. 211% The appel-
lation 6 kupios, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke
and John even into historic narrative, where the words
and works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related:
Lk. vii. 13; x.1; xi.39; xii.42; xiii.15; xvii. 5 sq.;
xxii. 31 [RGLTrbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here T Trmre. In-
gous]; vi. 23; xi. 2. There is nothing strange in the
appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences
after his resurrection: Lk. xxiv. 34; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20,
IO S-0.0 (Pe d. There are some who hold that
Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro.
iv. 8; ix. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16; iii. 20; x. 26;
2 Co. vi. 17 8q.; x.17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title kupsos
366
KWAU®
everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit
instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co.
vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Th. iv.6; 2 Th. iii. 16 (6 dpsos
ths eipnyns, Cf. 6 Oeds ris eipnyns, 1 Th. v. 23; but most
of the blessings of Christianity are derived alike from
God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words
ExdoT@ ws 6 kUptos eSwxev, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God
as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac-
count of the words xara thy xapw tod Beod thy Sobeiaas
pot in vs. 10. On the other hand, xpuvopevor trd Tod Kup.
in 1 Co. xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of
Christ, on account of x. 22, ef. 21. Cf. Gabler, Klei
nere theol. Schriften, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq.; Winer, De sensu
vocum kvptos et 6 kvpuos in actis et epistolis apostolorum.
Erlang. 1828; Wesselus Scheffer, diss. theol. exhibens
disquisitionem de vocis kvpuos absolute positae in N. T.
usu. Lugd. 1846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [Stuart
in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss,
Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 76; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v.;
Abbot in the Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for June
and Dec. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dec. 1883 p. 101 sq
On the use of a capital initial, see WH. Intr. § 414}
The word does not occur in the [Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.),
the] 1 Ep. of John, [nor in the Second or the Third; for
in 2 Jn. 3 xupiov is dropped by the critical editors. Syn.
see Seomérns, fin. ].
Kuptorys, -7Tos, 7, (6 KUptos), dominion, power, lordship ;
in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see e€ovaia, 4 c-
B.; cf. Germ. Herrschaft, [or Milton’s “ dominations”];
in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dominantes),
so used of angels («vptor, 1 Co. viii. 5; see xvptos, a. fin.) :
Eph. i. 21; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Jude 8; plur. Col. i.16. (Eccles.
[e. g. ‘ Teaching’ c. 4] and Byzant. writ.) *
kupdw, -@: 1 aor. inf. cupdoa; pf. pass. ptcp. Kexupo-
pevos; (xipos the head, that which is supreme, power,
influence, authority); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to
make valid; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify:
diaOynv, pass. Gal. iii. 15; ayamnv eis twa, to make a
public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by
granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : mpo-kupdo. |*
kvwv, kuvds; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the
N. T. mase.; Hebr. 393; a dog; prop.: Lk. xvi. 21;
2 Pet. ii. 22; metaph. (in various [but always reproach-
ful] senses; often so even in Hom.) a man of impure
mind, an impudent man, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. s.]:
Mt. vii. 6; Phil. iii. 2; Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass.
others less probably understand sodomites (like D393 in
Deut. xxiii. 18 (19)) [ef. B. D. s. v. Dog].*
K@Xov, -ov, 76; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; a mem-
ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi-
nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30;
Num. xiv. 29, 32 sq.; 1S. xvii. 46; Is. xvi. 24) for 139
and 0°99, a dead body, carcase, inasmuch as the mem-
bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart: so the plur. in
Heb. iii. 17 fr. Num. xiv. 29, 32, [A. V. carcases].*
kwdtdw; impf. 1 pers. plur. écaAvopev (MK. ix. 38 T Tr
txt. WH); 1 aor. éxaAvoa; Pass., pres. cwAvopat; 1 aor.
exwAvbnv; (fr. xddos, lopped, clipped; prop. to cut off, cut
Kopn
short, hence) to hinaer, prevent, forbid ; [fr. Pind. down];
Sept. for 73, twice (viz. 1S. xxv. 26; 2S. xiii. 13) for
yi: ruvd foll. by an inf. [W. § 65, 28.; cf. B. § 148, 13],
Mt. xix. 14; Lk. xxiii.2; Acts xvi. 6; xxiv. 23; 1 Th.
ii. 16; Heb. vii. 23; ri kwAver pe BarricOqva ; what doth
hinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36 ;
the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone
before, Mk. ix. 38 sq.; x. 14; Lk. ix.49; xi. 52; xviii.
16; Acts xi. 17; Ro. i. 13; 3 Jn, 10; adrdy is wanting,
because it has preceded, Lk. ix. 50; the acc. is wanting,
because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3;
as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. tia twos, to keep one
from a thing, Acts xxvii. 43; with acc. of the thing, rv
mapadpoviar, to restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii. 16; 1d Aadew
yAoooas, 1 Co. xiv. 39; ré, foil. by rod pn, can any one
hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should
not be baptized? Acts x.47; in imitation of the Hebr.
xD foll. by 11 of the pers. and the ace. of the thing, to
withhold a thing from any one, i. e. to deny or refuse one
a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (7d prnpetov amo god,
Gen. xxiii. 6). [Comp.: dcaxwdvo. |*
KOun, -7s, 7, (akin to ketpat, Kowudw, prop. the common
sleeping-place to which laborers in the fields return;
Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. home]), [fr. Hes., Hat.
down], a village: Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. v.
17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. médw], and often in the Synopt.
Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near
which the villages lie and to whose municipality they
belong: Kaioapeias, Mk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for
nia with the name of a city; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p.
220° [B. D.s. v. Daughter, 7]; also for *\¥n and Ninn
with the name of a city); by meton. the inhabitants of
villages, Acts viii. 25; used also of a small town, as Beth-
saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22; Jn.i.45; of Bethlehem,
Jn. vii. 42; for Vy, Josh. x. 39; xv. 9[Compl.]; Is. xlii.
11. [B. D.s. v. Villages. }
Kop6-ToXs, -ews, 7, a village approximating in size and
number of inhabitants to a city, a village-city, a town
(Germ. Marktflecken): Mk. i. 38. (Strabo; [Josh.
xviii. 28 Aq., Theod. (Field) ]; often in the Byzant. writ.
of the middle ages.) *
367
Ad pa
KGpos, -ov, 6, (fr. xeiwar; accordingly i. q. Germ. Ge-
lag; cf. Curtius § 45); fr. [Hom. h. Merc., Theogn.]
Hdt. down; a revel, carousal, i. e. in the Grk. writ. prop.
a nocturnal and riotous procession of half-drunken and
frolicsome fellows who after supper parade through the
streets with torches and music in honor of Bacchus or
some other deity, and sing and play before the houses
of their male and female friends; hence used generally,
of feasts and drinking-parties that are protracted till late
at night and indulge in revelry; plur. [revellings]: Ro.
xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21; 1 Pet.iv.3. (Sap. xiv. 23; 2 Macc.
vi. 4.) [Trench § lxi.]*
Kove, -w7ros, 6, a gnat ([Aeschyl.], Hdt., Hippoer.,
al.) ; of the wine-gnat or midge that is bred in (ferment-
ing and) evaporating wine (Aristot. h. an. 5, 19 [p. 552»,
5; ef. Bochart, Hierozoicon, iii. 444; Buztorf, Lex. talm.
etc. 927 (474* ed. Fischer) ]): Mt. xxiii. 24.*
Kas, gen. Ka, 7, Cos [A. V. Coos] (now Stanco or
Stanchio [which has arisen from a slurred pronuncia-
tion of és rav K@ (mod. Grk.) like Stambul fr. és ray
mwodw. (Hackett)]), a small island of the Mgean Sea,
over against the cities of Cnidus and Halicarnassus,
celebrated for its fertility and esp. for its abundance of
wine and corn: Acts xxi. 1, where for the Rec. Kav
Grsb. [foll. by subsequent editors] has restored Ka, as
in 1 Mace. xv. 23; see Matthiae § 70 note 3; W. § 8,
2a.; [B. 21 (19); WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester,
De Co insula, Hal. 1833; [but the best description is
in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u.s.w. (Halle 1852)” (How-
son); cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 96].*
Koodp, 6, (fr. DOP to divine, [but cf. B. D.]), Cosam,
one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 28.*
Kwods, -7, -dv, (kérrw to beat, pound), blunted, dull;
prop. BeAos, Hom. Il. 11, 390; hence a. blunted
(or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq.; xii. 225
xv. 30sq.; Lk. i. 22; xi. 14, (Hdt. et sqq.; Sept. for pbx
Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull,in hearing; deaf:
Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Hom.
h. Mere. 92; Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for
win, Ex. iv. 11; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviil.) 14,
etc.).*
A
Aayxavw: 2 aor. EAaxov; 1. to obtain by lot (fr.
Hom. down): with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [ef. B. 269
(231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment,
obtain: ri, Acts i. 17; 2 Pet. i.1; on the constr. of this
verb w. gen. and acc. of the thing, see Matthiae § 328;
W. 200 (188); [cf. B. § 132, 8). 2. to cast lots,
determine by lot, (Isocr. p. 144 b.; Diod. 4, 63, [cf. ps.-
Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]): wept riwos, Jn. xix. 24.*
Adtapos, -ov, 5, (rabb. 139, apparently the same as
“1px, whom God helps [cf. Philo, quis haeres § 12];
acc. to others, i. q. 11y’ 8 without help), Lazarus; a
an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised
from the dead by him: Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 43; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq
ee 2. an imaginary person, extremely poor and
wretched: Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.*
AdOpa [so RGT Tr] (in Hom. AdOpy, fr. AavOave,
Aaihay
dadeiv), and L [WH KC (see the latter’s Praef. p. xii. and
s. v. eixj) | AdOpa (fr. AdOpos, -a, -ov, cf. Passow [esp. L.
and S.]s.v.; W. 47; B. 69 (61)), adv. secretly: Mt.
i 19; ii. 7; Jn. xi. 28; Acts xvi. 37. (From Hom.
down; Sept.) *
Aathap ((L. T Tr WH] not AaiAay [Grsb.], cf. W. § 6,
1e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 sq.; [Chandler
§ 620; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -aos, 4 [masc. in x* Mk. iv.
37; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 226, 4], a whirlwind,
tempestuous wind: 2 Pet.ii.17; Aaiday avepov (cf. Germ.
Sturmwind ; Gvenos abv Aaidkam woAAH, Hom. Il. 17, 57),
a violent attack of wind [A. V. a storm of wind], a squall
[ (see below) ], Mk. iv.37; Lk. viii. 23. (Sept. Job xxi.
18; xxxviii. 1; Sap. v. 15, 24; Sir. xlviii. 9.) [Ace. to
Schmidt (ch. 55 § 13), A. is never a single gust, nor a
steadily blowing wind, however violent; but a storm
breaking forth from black thunder-clouds in furious gusts,
with floods of rain, and throwing everything topsy-turvy ;
ace. to Aristot. de mund. 4 p. 3954, 7 it is ‘a whirlwind
revolving from below upwards.’ ] *
AAKO and Xakew, see AadoKo.
Aaxritw, (fr. adv. Ad&, with the heel); [fr. Hom. down];
to kick, strike with the heel: Acts xxvi. 14, and Ree. in |
ix. 5; see xevrpov, 2.”
Aahew, -©; impf. 3 pers. sing. éAddet, plur. eAddovv;
fut. Aaknow; 1 aor. ekadnoa; pf. AeAdAnKa; Pass., pres.
Aadovpar; pf. AeAdAnwar; 1 aor. eAaAnOnv; 1 fut. AadnOn-
gona; [fr. Soph. down]; found in bibl. Grk. much more
freq. than in prof. auth., in Sept. times without number for
35 or 135, more rarely for V8; prop. fo utter a sound
(cf. [onomatop. la-la, etc.] Germ. lallen), to emit a voice,
make one’s self heard ; hence to utter or form words with
the mouth, to speak, having reference to the sound
and pronunciation of the words and in general the
form of what is uttered, while Aé€yw refers to the
meaning and substance of what is spoken; hence
Aadeivy is employed not only of men, esp. when chatting
and prattling, but also of animals (of birds, Mosch. 3, 47;
of locusts, Theocr. 5, 34; Aadodar pev, ob Ppdovar Oé€, of
dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani-
mate things (as trees, Theocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo,
Dio C. 74, 21,14). Accordingly, everything Aeyopuevor
is also Aadovpevor, but not everything Aadovpevor is also
\eyopevoy (Eupolis in Plut. Ale. 13 Nadeiv dpuoros, ddvva-
twtatos deyewv); [the difference between the words is
evident where they occur in proximity, e. g. Ro. iii. 19
00a 6 vopos AEyet, Tois Ev TS vOuw Aadei, and the very com.
ehdAnoev ... Aeyov, Mt. xiii. 3, etc.]. Moreover, the
primary meaning of adeiv, to utter one’s self, enables us
easily to understand its very frequent use in the sacred
writers to denote the utterances by which God indicates
or gives proof of his mind and will, whether immediately
or through the instrumentality of his messengers and
heralds. [Perhaps this use may account in part for the
fact that, though in classic Grk. Aad. is the term for
light and familiar speech, and so assumes readily a dis-
paraging notion, in bibl. Grk. it is nearly if not quite free
from any such suggestion.}] Cf. Dav. Schulz die Geis-
368
aréw
tesgaben der ersten Christen, p. 94 sqq.; Tittmann de
Synonymis N. T. p. 79 sq.; Trench, Syn. § Ixxvi.; [and
on class. usage Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1]. But let us look
at the N. T. usage in detail:
1. to uller a voice, emit a sound: of things inanimate,
as Bpovrai, Rev. x. 4; with ras éavraév @wvds added, each
thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean-
ing of which the prophet understood, cf. Jn. xii. 28 sq.),
ib. 3; oddAmuyyos Nadovons per’ euod, Aéyor (Rec. Aéyoura)
foll. by direct disc. Rev. iv.1; of the expiatory blood of
Christ, metaph. to crave the pardon of sins, Heb. xii. 243
of the murdered Abel, long since dead, i. q. to call for
vengeance (see Gen. iv. 10, and cf. xkpd¢o, 1 fin.), Heb.
x1. 4 acc. to the true reading Aaket [G LT Tr WH; the
Rec. Aadetra must be taken as pass., in the exceptional
sense to be talked of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (mpaypa
kar’ dyopav Aadovpevov, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. mavres
aitiy Aadovow, Alciphro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. Wag-
ner) |. 2. to speak, i. e. to use the tongue or the faculty
of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absol. 1 Co. xiv. 113
of the dumb, receiving the power of speech, Mt. ix. 33;
xii. 22; xv. 31; Lk. xi. 14; Rev. xiii. 15; (rods [T Tr WH
om. }) dAdAovs Aadeiv, Mk. vii. 37; hades dpOas, ib. 35; of a
dumb man, py) duvapevos Aadnoa, Lk. i. 20 (of idols, oroua
éxovat k. ov AaAnoovat, Ps. exiii. 13 (exv. 5); cxxxiv. 16;
cf. 3 Macc. iv. 16); to speak, i. e. not to be silent, opp. to
holding one’s peace, Adder k. xy ctw@mons, Acts xviii.
9; opp. to hearing, Jas. i. 19; opp. to the soul’s inner
experiences, 2 Co. iv. 13 fr. Ps. exv. 1 (exvi. 10); opp. to
movev (a8 Aoyos to epyov q. Vv. 3), Jas. ii. 12. 3. to
talk; of the sound and outward form of speech: 77 idia
diadéxr@, Acts ii. 6; érépats kawvais yAoooas, ib. 4; Mk.
xvi. 17 [here Tr txt. WH txt. om. xaw.], from which the
simple yAwooas dAadeiv, and the like, are to be distin-
guished, see yAéaca, 2. 4. to utter, tell: with ace.
of the thing, 2 Co. xii. 4. 5. to use words in order
to declare one’s mind and disclose one’s thoughts; to speak:
absol., ért avrov Aadovrros, Mt. xii. 46; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47;
Mk. v. 35; xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47, 60; with the
advs. kaxds, kaAGs, JN. XViii. 23; &$ vymos €AdAov», 1 Co.
xiii. 11; &s Spdkwv, Rev. xiii. 11; ordua mpos oropa, face
to face (Germ. miindlich), 2 Jn. 12 (after the Hebr. of
Num. xii. 8); eis dépa Nadeiv, 1 Co. xiv. 9; &k rod mepic-
cevpartos THs Kapdias TO oTCpa Aadel, out of the abundance
of the heart the mouth speaketh, sc. so that it expresses
the soul’s thoughts, Mt. xii. 34; Lk. vi. 45; &« trav idiov
Aadeiv, to utter words in accordance with one’s inner
character, Jn. viii. 44. with ace. of thething: ri AaAnoo,
Aadnonre, etc., what I shall utter in speech, etc., Jn. xii.
50; Mt. x. 19; Mk. ix. 6 [here T Tr WH droxp.69 ];
xiii. 11; ri, anything, Mk. xi. 23 LT Trtxt. WH; Ro.
xv. 18; 1 Th. i. 8; ov otSapev ti Aadet, what he says,
i.e. what the words uttered by him mean [WH br. ri
Aad.], Jn. xvi. 18; ravra, these words, Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn.
viii. 30; xvii. 1, 13; 1 Co. ix. 8; 7d Aadovpevoy, 1 Co.
xiv. 9; plur. Acts xvi. 14 (of the words of a teacher) ;
rov Aoyov Nadovpevor, Mk. v. 36 [see B. 302 (259) note];
Adyous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pnyara, Jn. viii. 20; Acts x. 44;
Aaréw
rapaBoAny, Mt. xiii. 33; BrAaodynuias, Mk. ii. 7 [LT Tr
WH Praodnpet]; Lk. v. 21; pryyara BAaodpyua eis twa,
Acts vi. 11; pnuata (Rec. adds BAdodnpa) cata twos,
Acts vi. 13; oxAnpa xara Tivos, Jude 153; dbmépoyka, ib. 16
(Dan. [Theodot.] xi. 36) ; ra yx Séovra, 1 ‘Tim. v. 13 (4
py Oeuis, 2 Mace. xii. 143 eis twa ra py KaOjKovra, 3
Mace. iv. 16; [ef. W. 480 (448) ]); dcerrpappeva, Acts
xx. 30; 7d Weddos, Jn. vili. 44; Sodov, 1 Pet. iii. 10 fr.
Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; dyad, Mt. xii. 34; codiay, 1 Co.
ii. 6 sq.; pvornpia, ib. xiv. 2; foll. by dre (equiv. to wept
Toutov, ote ete. to speak of this, viz. that they knew him
[see dru, I. 2 sub fin.]), Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 41; contrary
to classic usage, foll. by direct disc., Mk. xiv. 31 Ltxt.
T Tr WH; Heb.v.5; xi. 18, (but in these last two pass.
of the utterances of God); more correctly elsewhere
\dAnoe Aéywv (in imitation of Hebr. Hx) 73T [ef.
above (init.)]), foll. by direct disc.: Mt. xiv. 27; xxiii.
1; xxviii. 18; Jn. viii. 12; Acts viii. 26; xxvi. 31;
xxviii. 25; Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; Aadovoa xk. A€yovea,
Rev. x. 8. Aad@ with dat. of pers. to speak to one, ad-
dress him (esp. of teachers): Mt. xii. 46; xxiii. 1; Lk.
xxtve Gt IN Ixe29) v.22) Acts vil. 38) 44: tix. 27’
RVI Os POAT KRIS OOD vith 165). 1 (Cosa 1s) xive
21,28; 1 Th.ii.16; Heb. i. 2 (1); of one commanding,
Mt. xxviii. 18; Mk. xvi. 19; fo speak to, i. e. converse
with, one [ cf. B. § 133, 1]: Mt. xii. 46, [47 but WH mrg.
only]; Lk. i. 22; xxiv. 32; Jn. iv. 26; xii. 29; éavrois
(dat. of pers.) Wadpois x. Uuvos (dat. of instrument),
Eph. v. 19; od Aadei ru is used of one who does not
answer, Jn. xix. 10; to accost one, Mt. xiv. 27; Aad@ Ti
tin, to speak anything to any one, to speak to one about
a thing (of teaching): Mt. ix.18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which
see dpyn, 1 b.); x.6; xiv. 25; xv.11; xviii. 20 sq.; 2
Co. vii. 14; pnyara, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; Acts xiii. 42;
oikodopny x. mapakAnow, things which tend to edify and
comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promulgating a
thing to one, rov voyor, pass. Heb. ix. 19; Nad& mpds iva,
to speak unto one: Lk. i. 19; [ii 15 Lmre. TWH];
Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi. 14 [RG],
26, 31; Heb. v.5, (O8 737, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11,
17, 22); Adyous mpos Twa, Lk. xxiv. 44; é€\aAnoav pds
aitovs evayyeACouevor... Incovv, Acts xi. 20; dca ay
Aadnon mpos vpas, Acts ili. 22; codiay ev tio, wisdom
among etc. 1 Co. ii. 6; Aad. perd rivos, to speak, converse,
with one [cf. B. § 133, 3]: Mk. vi. 50; Jn. iv. 27; ix.37;
Kives0s hiRev. 1: 12's x. .Sis\scvil. We xxi. 9515 > | NaNew
aAnOecay pera etc. to show one’s self a lover of truth in
conversation with others, Eph. iv. 25 [ef. Ellicott];
AaXetv wepi Tivos, concerning a person or thing: Lk. ii. 33;
ix. 11; Jn. vii. 13; viii. 26; xii. 41; Acts ii. 31; Heb.
ii. 5; iv. 8; with tui, dat. of pers., added, Lk. ii. 38;
Acts xxii. 10; ri mepi tivos, Acts xxviii. 21; Lk. ii. 17;
eis Twa mrepi Tivos (gen. of the thing), to speak something
as respects a person concerning a thing, Heb. vii. 14
RG; els twa epi w. gen. of pers., ibid. L T Tr WH.
Many of the exx. already cited show that \adeiy is freq.
used in the N. T. of teachers, — of Jesus, the apostles,
and others. To those pass. may be added, Lk. v. 4; Jn.
569
AaAta
i. 37; vii. 46; viii. 30,385; xii. 50; Acts vi. 10; xi. 15;
xiv. 1,9; xvi. 14; 1 Co. xiv. 34 sq.; 2Co. ii. 17; Col.
iv. 3; 1 Th.ii.4; 1 Pet. iv. 11; with wappyoia added,
Jn. vii. 26; xvi. 29; emt dvopare Inood, Acts v. 40, cf.
iv. 17, see eri, B. 2 a. B.; 7 dvopart kvpiov [where LT
Tr WH prefix év], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see dvopa,
2f.); revi (to one) év mapaBorais, Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34;
év mrapowpias, Jn. xvi. 25; €& euavrov, to speak from my-
self (i. e. utter what I myself have thought out), Jn. xii.
49; dm’ éeuavrov (see amo, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59°), Jn. vii. 17
sq-; Xiv.10; xvi.13; é&« rns yas (see éx, II. 2 sub fin.),
Jn. iii. 31; &€k rod Kécpov, 1 Jn. iv. 5 (see kdapos, 6); €x
6eov, prompted by divine influence, 2 Co. ii. 17; Aadeiv
Tov Adyor, to announce or preach the word of God or the
doctrine of salvation: Mk. viii. 32; Acts xiv. 25 [here
in TWH mrg. foll. by eis riv Tépynv; see eis, A. I. 5 b.];
xvi. 6; Phil. i. 14, ete.; rév Ady. rod Oeov, Acts iv. 29,
31; Twit. Aoyor, Mk. ii. 2; Acts xi.19; with mapaBodais
added, Mk. iv. 33; ruwi rov Ady. rod xvpiov [WH txt.
Oeov], Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9); tui r. Aoy. rod
Geod, Acts xiii. 46; Heb. xiii. 7; ra pnyara tov Geo, Jn.
iii. 34; ra pnp. THs Cans, Acts v. 20; mpds twa Td evayy.
tov Oeov, 1 Th. ii. 2; Aadeiv x. Siddoxewv ra mept Tod “Incod
[RG kvpiov], Acts xviii. 25; 1d puornpioy rod Xptorod,
Col. iv. 3. adeiv is used of the O. T. prophets utter-
ing their predictions: Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24;
xxvi. 22 [ef. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)]; 2 Pet. i.
21; Jas. v.10; of the declarations and prophetic an-
nouncements of God: Lk.i. 45,55; Jn.ix. 29; Acts vii.
6; esp.in the Ep. to the Heb.: i. 1, 2 (1); iii. 5; iv. 8;
xi. 18; xii. 25; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are
said Aadeiv év ru : Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co.
xiii. 3; 81a arduatds twos, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; dea
‘Hoaiov, Acts xxviii. 25; of the sayings of angels: Lk.
if. vl #9 20h nae px 29 sw Acts) Xe: 1 hocxd) 99 KXViijE 25)
the Holy Spirit is said AaAnoev what it will teach the
apostles, Jn. xvi. 13; 6 véuos as a manifestation of
God is said \adeiv ree What it commands, Ro. iii. 19;
finally, even voices are said Aadety, Acts xxvi. 14
[RG]; Rev.i.12; x. 8. i. q. to make known by speak-
ing, to speak of, relate, with the implied idea of extolling:
Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 36; Acts iv. 20;
[ef. Heb. xi. 4 Ree. (see 1 fin. above) ]. 6. Since
Aadeiv strictly denotes the act of one who utters words
with the living voice, when writers speak of them-
selves or are spoken of by others as Aadovrres, they are
conceived of as present and addressing their readers
with the living voice, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 8; 2 Co. xi.
17, 23; xii. 19; Heb. ii.5; vi.9; 2 Pet. iii. 16, or AaXew
is used in the sense of commanding, Heb. vii. i4. The
verb aXe is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess.
[Comp.: dta-, éx-, KaTa-, Tpoo-, avA-Aakew; cf. the cat-
alogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.]
Aadid, -s, 7, (Addos, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119
Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity,
talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see Aadéw, init.]; in
a good sense conversation ; in the N. T. 1. speech,
i.g.story: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro-
Naud
munciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec.; Mt. xxvi. 73;
speech which discloses the speaker’s native country: hence
of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hav-
ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer].*
apd [RG (on the accent see Tdf. Proleg. 102)] in
Mt. xxvii. 46 and Aauwpa [RG] Mk. xv. 34, (the Hebr.
word m9 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 1), why; in the former
pass. Lchm. reads Anya, in the latter Aeud, Tdf. Aeud in
both, Tr WH Aeua in Mt. but Aaud in Mk.; the form in
n or € reproduces the Chald. x9 or 09; on the re-
markable diversity of spelling in the codd. ef. Taf. on
each pass., [WH on Mt. 1. c.], and Fritzsche on Mk. p.
693.*
AapPavw; impf. eAdpBavor; fut. Anvoua, (LTTrWH
AnpYoua, an Alexandrian form; sees. v. M, #); 2 aor.
€daBov (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B*] eAdBare,
1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. amépxopat, init.), impv. AdBe
(Rev. x. 8 sq.), not AaBe (W. § 6,1 a.; B. 62 (54));
pf. eiAnda, 2 pers. etAnpas [and ciAndes (Rev. xi. 17
WH; see xomdw); on the use of the pf. interchangeably
with an aor. (Rev. v. 7; viii. 5, etc.) ef. B. 197 (170) ;
W. 272 (255); Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Mod.
Grk. 2d ed. App. §§ 67, 68], ptep. eiAndas; [Pass., pres.
ptcp. AapBavopevos; pf. 3 pers. sing. etAnmrat, Jn. viil. 4
WH«arg. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times
for np, very often for XW}, also for 137 and several
times for 1n8; [fr. Hom. down];
I. to take, i.e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold
of, any pers. or thing in order to use it: absol., where
the context shows what is taken, Mt. xxvi. 26; Mk. xiv.
22; (rov) dprov, Mt. xxvi. 26; Acts xxvii. 35; ro BiBXiop,
Rev. vy. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. s.]; pdyatpay (grasp,
lay hand to), Mt. xxvi. 52, and in many other exx.
After a circumstantial style of description (see a»
éornut, II. 1 c.) in use from Hom. down (cf. Passow s. v.
C.; [L. and S.s. v. I. 11]; Matthiae § 558, Anm. 2; [W.
§ 65,4 ¢.]), the ptep. AaBwrv with acc. of the object is
placed before an act. verb where it does not always seem
to us necessary to mention the act of taking (as \aBav
kice xeipa [cf. our ‘he took and kissed ’], Hom. Od. 24,
398): Mt. xiii. 31,33; xvii. 27; Mk. ix. 36; Lk. xiii. 19,
21; Jn. xii. 3; Acts ii. 23 Rec.; ix. 25; xvi. 3; AaBav ro
aiza... Tov Aady éppdvtice (equiv. to TO aipate... TOY
X. épp-), Heb. ix.19; or the verb Aafeiy in a finite form
foll. by caf precedes, as €\aBe tov Incovv kal euaotiywcer,
Jn. xix.1; add, ib.40; xxi.13; Rev. viii. 5; also AaPeiv
tov Gptov... kat Bare etc., Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii. 27;
€dAaBov .. metaph., apopuny
(see the word, 2), Ro. vii. 8,115 troderypd twos (gen.
of the thing) tiva, to take one as an example of a thing,
for imitation, Jas. v. 10; to take in order to wear, ra
ivdria, i. e. to put on: In. xiii. 12 (€oOqra, brodjpara,
Hadt. 2, 37; 4, 78); popdyy SovAov, Phil. ii. 7. to take
in the mouth: something to eat, Jn. xiii. 30; Acts ix. 19;
1 Tim. iv. 4, (cf. Lat. cibum capio, to take food); to take
anything to drink, i. e. drink, swallow, ddwp, Rev. xxii.
17; to drink, ro df£0s, Jn. xix. 30; ov« €XaBe, he did not
take it, i. e. refused to drink it, Mk. xv. 23. to take
- kal €roinoay, Jn. xix. 23.
370
AapBave
up a thing to be carried; to take upon one’s self: row
aravpoy avrov, Mt. x. 38 [Lmrg. apn]; to take with one for
future use: dprovs, Mt. xvi. 5,7; Xapmrddas, Mt. xxv. 1;
€Aaoy pe’ Eavtar, ibid. 3. 2. to take in order to carry
away: without the notion of violence, ras doGeveias, i. e.
to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 17; with the notion of
violence, to seize, take away forcibly: Mt. v.40; Rev. iii.
11; ryv eipymy éx (Rec. ar, (WH br. éx)] ris yas, Rev.
vi. 4. 3. to take what is one’s own, to take to one’s
self, to make one’s own ; a. to claim, procure, for one’s
self: ri, Jn. iii. 27 (opp. to what is given); éavré Baar
Aeiav, Lk. xix.12; with acc. of the pers. to associate with
one’s self as companion, attendant, etc.: AaBoy tr. omeipav
épxera, taking with him the band of soldiers (whose aid
he might use) he comes, Jn. xviii. 3 (orparov \aBov
épxeta, Soph. Trach. 259); AayB. yuvaixa, to take i.e.
marry a wife, Mk. xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, (Gen. iv.
19, etc.; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16; Eur. Ale. 324; with éauro
added, Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that
which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q.
to seize, lay hold of, apprehend: twa, Mt. xxi. 35, 39;
Mk. xii. 3, 8, and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; trop. ri, i. e. to get possession of, obtain, a thing,
Phil. iii. 12 [ef. W. 276 (259)]; metaph., of affections
or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, occupo): twa éda-
Bev éxoraots, Lk. v. 26; pdBos, LK. vii. 16 (very often so
even in Hom., as rpduos €\daBe yia, Il. 3, 34; pe tuepos
aipet, 3, 446; xddos, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sap. xi.
13 (12)); mvevpa (i. e. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; metpacpds,
1 Co. x. 13. c. to take by craft (our catch, used of
hunters, fishermen, etc.) : ovdév, Lk. v. 5; trop. revd, to
circumvent one by fraud, 2 Co. xi. 20; with 8éd@ added,
ib. xii. 16. d. to take to one’s self, lay hold upon, take
possession of, i. e. to appropriate to one’s self: éaut@ thy
tynv, Heb. v. 4. e. Lat. capto, catch at, reach after,
strive to obtain: ti mapa twos (gen. of pers.), Jn. v. 34,
41; alternating with ¢nreiv, ib. 44. f. to take a thing
due acc. to agreement or law, to collect, gather (tribute) :
ra Sidpaypa, Mt. xvii. 24; réAn dro twos, ib. 25; dexdras,
Heb. vii. 8 sq.; xapmrovs, Mt. xxi. 34; mapa trav yewpyav
amo Tov Kaprrov, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i. e. to admit,
receive: twa pariopaow, Mk. xiv. 65 LT Tr WH (ef.
Lat. verberibus aliquem accipere}, but see Badd, 13 Twa
eis Ta tOua, unto his own home [see i&tos, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27;
els oikiav, 2 on. 10; eis rd mAoiov, Jn. vi. 21. to receive
what is offered; not to refuse or reject: twa, one, in
order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20; ri, prop.,
to receive, Mt. xxvii. 6; trop. : tov Adyov, to admit or re-
ceive into the mind, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16, (for which
in Lk. viii. 13 8éyovrat) ; tiv paprupiay, to believe the testi-
mony, Jn. iii. 11,32 sq.; ra pyyard Twos, Jn. xii. 48; xvii. 8.
In imitation of the Hebr. 0°39 Nw (on the various senses
of which in the O. T. cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 915 sq.),
mpdcwmov AauBdave, to receive a person, give him access
to one’s self, i. e. to regard any one’s power, rank, external
circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice
or neglect something: used of partiality [A. V. to ac
cept the person], Lk. xx. 21; with avOpamov added, Gal.
aapBave
ii. 6, (Lev. xix. 15; Mal. ii. 9, etc.; @avpafew 75 mpdcor.,
Deut. x. 17; Job xxxii. 22); [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1.
Gals 5. to take, i. q. to choose, select: twa €k Tier,
pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification to take may
be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow
s. v. B. d. fin.; [L. and S. II. 3]), by which AapBavew
joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose
idea is expressed by the subst.: AawB. dpynv to take be-
ginning, i. q. dpxopat to begin, Heb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9,
and often; Ael. v. h. 2, 28; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ;
AnOnv tivds, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph. antt. 2, 6, 10;
9,1; 4, 8,44; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 sub fin.; h. anim. 4, 35) ;
irdpynotv twos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5;
meipav twos, to prove anything, i. e. either to make trial of:
fis sc. Oaddoons, which they attempted to pass through,
Heb. xi. 29; or fo have trial of, to experience: also with
gen. of the thing, ib. 36, (in both senses often also in
class. Grk.; see mweipa, and Bleek, Br. a. d. Heb. ii. 2 p.
811); oupBovdArov AapB. to take counsel, i. q. cupBovdev-
ecOa, to deliberate (a combination in imitation apparently
of the Lat. phrase consilium capere, although that sig-
nifies to form a plan, to resolve): Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15;
xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; Aapoos, to take, receive, courage,
Acts xxviii. 15; 1d ydpaypa twvos, i. q. xapdooopat tt, to
receive the mark of, i. e. let one’s self be marked or
stamped with: Rev. xiv. 9,11; xix. 20; xx. 4.
II. to receive (what is given) ; to gain, get, obtain:
absol., opp. to aireiv, Mt. vii. 8; Lk. xi. 10; Jn. xvi. 24;
opp. to duddva, Acts xx. 35; Mt. x. 8; with acc. of the
thing, Mt. xx. 9sq.; Mk. x. 30; [Lk. xviii. 30 L txt.
WHtxt. Trmrg.]; Jn. vii. 39; Acts ii. 38; x. 43; Ro.
105 save Led Cosi. 126. ix..24.sq. 32) Cosxints Gal:
iii. 14; Heb. ix. 15; [xi. 13 RG, see éemayyeNia, 2 b.;
ef, W237) (222) 4s Jas. i. 125 -v..7 341 Pet. iv210;) Rev.
iv. 11; v.12, and many other exx.; proddv, Mt. x. 41;
Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 8,14; eAenuoavwny, Acts iii. 3; EAeos,
Heb. iv. 16; rémov drodoyias, Acts xxv. 16; Thy emoxo-
mv, Acts i. 20; diadoyov, Acts xxiv. 27 (successorem ac-
cipio, Plin. ep. 9, 13); 7d ixavov mapa twos (gen. of pers.),
Acts xvii. 9 (see ixavds, a. fin.) ; of punishments: «pia,
Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 (cf. W. 183 (172)];
Lk. xx. 47; Jas. iii. 1; with dat. incommodi added, éaura,
Ro. xiii. 2 (Sik«ny, Hdt.1,115; Eur. Bacch. 1312; mowwds,
Eur. Tro. 360). otxodopuny, to receive edifying, i. q. ofko-
Sopovpar, 1 Co. xiv. 5; mepiropyy, i. q. meptrépvomat, Jn. vii.
23; ri & rivoc [2], Jn. i. 16; & avaoracewe robe vexporve,
substantially i. q. to receive, get back, Heb. xi. 35 [see ek,
II. 6]; ék,a part of a thing [see ek, II. 9], Rev. xviii. 4;
ti mapa twos (gen. of pers.), [Lk. vi. 34 T Tr txt. WH];
Jneexal SiomACiSmils Sor Dee xk 24 ex xvi Oli eassers
7; 1Jn. iii. 22 RG; 2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); amo twos
gen. of pers.), 1 Jn. ii. 27; [iii 22 LT Tr WH]; on
the difference betw. rapa and admé tivos AayB. cf. W.
370 (347) note; [B. § 147, 5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on
Gal. i.12]; iad tivos, 2 Co. xi. 243; mas eiAnhas, how thou
hast received by instruction in the gospel, i. e. hast learned,
Rey. iii. 3. The verb AauBavw does not occur in the
Epp. to the Thess., Philem., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude.
371
Aaodixeia
[Come.: dvay dvri-, cuv-avri- (-pat), dmro-, émt-, kaTa-, peTOr,
qapa-, ovy-rapa-, Tp0-, TpOG-, Tuy, Tuy-TEpt-, ViTo-AapBava.
Syn. see d€youat, fin. ]
Adpex, 6, (Hebr. 322), Lamech, the father of Noah
(Gen. v. 25 sqq.): Lk. iii. 36.*
Aappa, see Aaa.
Aapmrds, -ddos, 7, (Aduro, cf. our lamp), [fr. Aeschyl.
and Thue. down], Sept. for 795; 1. atorch: Rev.
iv. 5 [where A. V. lamps]; viii. 10. 2. a lamp, the
flame of which is fed with oil: Mt. xxv. 1, 3 sq. 7sq.; Jn.
xviil. 3; Actsxx.8. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlvi.; Eders-
heim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 455 sqq.; Becker, Charicles,
Se. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 153).]*
Aaptrpos, -d, -dv, (Adum@) ; a. shining; brilliant:
dornp, Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. Il. 4, 77, etc.) ; clear, transpar-
ent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V.
gorgeous, bright (see below)]: éoOns, Lk. xxiii. 11; Acts
x. 30; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; Awov [L Tr WH AiGov], Rev. xv.
6; Bicowvos, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumpt-
uous) ] things, i. e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and
style, Rev. xviii. 14. The word is sometimes used of
brilliant and glistening whiteness (hence Aaympa tHBevva,
toga candida, Polyb. 10, 4,8; 10,5, 1); accordingly the
Vulg. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by
candidus; and some interpreters, following the Vulg.
(“indutum veste alba’’), understand ‘white apparel’ to
be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see
above) ]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans. vi. 104].*
Aapmpdrns, -nros, 7, brightness, brilliancy: tov HAtov,
Acts xxvi. 13. [From Hdt. (metaph.) down. ]*
Aapmpas, adv., splendidly, magnificently: of sumptuous
living, Lk. xvi. 19. [From Aeschyl. down.]*
Adprw; fut. Adu (2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt.T Tr WH); 1
aor. €Aapwa; [fr. Hom. down]; to shine: Mt. v. 15 sq.5
xvii. 2; Lk. xvii. 24; Acts xii. 7; 2 Co.iv.6. [Comp.:
€x-, Tept-Adptra. | *
AavOdvw (lengthened form of AjOw); 2 aor. €AaGov,
(whence Lat. latere); Sept. several times for p33, ete.;
[fr. Hom. down]; to be hidden: Mk. vii. 24; LK. viii. 47;
rwd, to be hidden from one, Acts xxvi. 26; 2 Pet. ili. 5
(on which see 6Aw, 1 sub fin.), 8; acc. to the well-
known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptep.
i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. Matthiae
§ 552 B.; Passow s. v. ii. p. 18°; [L. and S.s. v. A. 2];
W. § 54,4; [B. § 144, 14]): €Aabov Eevioavres, have un-
awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [COMP.: ék-, émt-
(wat).]*
Aateutds, -7, -dv, (fr. Aafevw, and this fr. Aas a stone,
and &éw to polish, hew), cut out of stone: pvjpa, Lk. xxiii.
53, and thence in Evang. Nicod. ¢. 11 fin.; (once in
Sept., Deut. iv. 49; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14;
Deut. xxxiv. 1; [Josh. xiii. 20]; nowhere in Grk. auth.).*
Aaocfikela [-cia TWH (see I, 0); RGLTr accent
-Sixeca, cf. Chandler § 104], -as. 9, Laodicea, a city of
Phrygia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co-
losse. After having been successively called Diospolis
and Rhoas, it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice,
the wife of Antiochus II. [B. c. 261-246]. It was de
Aaodixet's
stroyed by an earthquake, A. D. 66 [or earlier, see Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 38 sq.], together
with Colossz and Hierapolis (see KoAogoai); and after-
wards rebuilt by Marcus Aurelius. It was the seat of a
Christian church: Col. ii. 1; iv. 13, 15 sq. [(on the ‘ Ep.
to (or ‘from’) the Laodiceans’ see Bp. Lghtft. Com.
u. s. pp. 274-300) ]; Rev. i. 11; iii. 14, and in the [ Ree. ]
subscription of the 1 Ep. to Tim. [See Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on Col. and Philem. Intr. § 1; Forbiger, Hndbch. d.
alten Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 347 sq.]*
Aaodtkeds, -€ws, 6, a Laodicean, inhabitant of Laodicea:
Col. iv. 16, and Ree. in Rev. iii. 14.*
Aads, -ov, 6, [(cf. Curtius § 535)]; Sept. more than
fifteen hundred times for Dy’; rarely for %}] and Ds);
{fr. Hom. down]; people; 1. a people, tribe, nation,
all those who are of the same stock and language: univ.
of any people; joined with yAéooa, dvAn, eOvos, Rev. v.
95) vi 9; xs11; xi. 95 xiii. 7 [Ree. om.]; xiv. 65 xvii. 15,
(see yhéooa, 2); mavtes of daoi, Lk. ii. 31; Ro. xv.11;
esp. of the people of Israel: Mt. iv. 23; xiii. 15; Mk. vii.
6; Lk. ii. 10; Jn. xi. 50 (where it alternates with €6vos) ;
xvill. 14; Acts i1::23 ; “Heb. 11.°17 5 “vil. 11, ete: + with
Iopand added, Acts iv. 10; distinguished fr. rots €@veovr,
Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. Aaoli Iopayr
[R. V. the peoples of Is.] seems to be used of the tribes
of the people (like o°py, Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8;
Is. iii. 13, ete.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap-
parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ,
cf. 25); of mpeoBitepor rod Aaov, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3,
47; xxvii. 1; of ypappareis Tov Xaov, Mt. ii. 4; of mparor
tov Aaov, Lk. xix. 47; 1d mpeoBurépiov Tov daod, Lk. xxii.
66; dpxovres tov daov, Acts iv. 8. with a gen. of the
possessor, Tov Oeov, avtov, pov (i. e. Tod Oeov, Hebr.
mm dy, DONT Dj’), the people whom God has chosen
for himself, selected as peculiarly his own: Heb. xi. 25;
Mt. ii.6; Lk.i.68; vii. 16; without the art. Jude 5 (Sir.
xlvi. 7; Sap. xviii. 13); ef. W.§ 19,1; the name is trans-
ferred to the community of Christians, as that which
by the blessing of Christ has come to take the place of
the theocratic people of Israel, Heb. iv. 9; Rev. xviii. 4;
particularly to a church of Christians gathered from
among the Gentiles, Acts xv. 14; Ro. ix. 25 sq.; 1 Pet.
ii. 10; with eis wepuroinow added, 1 Pet. ii. 9; mepsov-
ovos, Tit. ii. 14, cf. Acts xviii. 10; Lk.i.17. 6 dads the
people (of Israel) is distinguished from its princes and
rulers [(1 Esdr. i. 10; v.45; Judith viii. 9,11; etc.)],
Mt. xxvi.5; Mk. xi. 32 [here WH Tr mrg. read 6yXos] ;
xiv. 2; Lk. xx. 19; xxii. 2; xxiii.5; Acts v. 26, etc.; from
the priests, Heb. v. 3; vii. 5, 27. 2. indefinitely,
of a great part of the population gathered together any-
where: Mt. xxvii. 253 Lk\i.21; 11.153 vii. 1,295 viii.
47; ix.133 xviii. 43, ete.; 7d mA7nOos Tod aod, Lk. i. 10.
[The Gospels of Mk. and Jn. use the word but three
times each. Syn. see dyjpos, fin. |
Adpuyt, -~yyos, 6, the throat (Etym. Magn. [557, 16]:
Adpvy& pev dC of Aadotpev... papuy& Se dv ob eoOiopev
x. mivopev): of the instrument or organ of speech (as
Ps. v.10; Prov. viii. 7; Sir. vi. 5 (4)), Ro. iii. 13, where
872
Nat pevo
the meaning is, their speech threatens and imprecates
destruction to others. (Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Galen.
al.; Sept. several times for j02; oftener for 37, the
palate.) *
Aacata, -as, 7, (Lehm. ”“A\acoa, Tr WH Aacéa [see
WH. App. p. 160], Vulg. Thalassa), Laseea, Acts xxvii.
8, acity of Crete not mentioned by any ancient geograph-
ical or other writer. But this need not excite surprise,
since probably it was one of the smaller and less impor-
tant among the ninety or a hundred cities of the island;
cf. Kuinoel ad loc. [Its site was discovered in 1856,
some five miles to the E. of Fair Havens and close to
Cape Leonda; see Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul,
(3d ed. p. 259 sq.) 4th ed. p. 262 sq.; Alford, Grk. Test.
vol. ii. Proleg. p. 27 sq.]*
Adokw: 1 aor. eAdxnoa; (cf. Bim. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p.
233; Kriiger ii. 1, p. 134; Kiihner § 348, i. p. 858;
[Veitch s. v.]; W. 88 (84)); 1. to crack, crackle,
crash: Hom., Hes., Tragg., Arstph. 2. to burst
asunder with a crack, crack open: Acts i. 18; 6 dpaxov
pvonbeis (after having sucked up the poison) éAdkyoe
kat améOave kai €€exvOn 6 ids avrov kal 4 xoAn, Act.
Thomae § 33, p. 219 ed. Tdf.*
Aaropéw, -@: 1 aor. Ehatdunoa; pf. pass. ptep. AeAaTo-
pnuevos; (fr. Aarduos a stone-cutter, and this fr. Ads a
stone, and réuvw) ; to cut stones, to hew out stones: Mt.
xxvii. 60; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for I¥n;
once for 773, Ex. xxi. 33 sqq.; Diod., [Dion. H., Strab.,
al. (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Justin Mart.) *
Aarpela, -as, 7, (AaTpeva, q. V-) ; 1. in Grk. auth. .
service rendered for hire; then any service or ministra-
tion (Tragg., Plut., Leian.); the service of God: rod
Geov, Plat. apol. 23 b.; xarapuyetv mpos Gedy edyds Te Kal
Narpeias, ibid. Phaedr. p. 244 e.; servitus religionis, quam
Aatpelav Graeci vocant, August. civ. dei 5, 15. a
in the Grk. Bible, the service or worship of God acc. to
the requirements of the levitical law (Hebr. 1732p, Ex. xii.
25 sq., ete.): Ro. ix. 4; Heb. ix. 1, (1 Mace. ii. 19, 22);
Aatpelav mpoopepew To Gee [to offer service to God] i. q.
Ouciav mpoodépew eis datpeiav [to offer a sacrifice in
service ], Jn. xvi. 2; émuredety ras Natpeias, to perform the
sacred services (see émttedéw, 1), spoken of the priests,
Heb. ix. 6; univ. of any worship of God, 7 Aoyixy r. Ro.
xii. 1 [ef. W. § 59, 9.a.]; (of the worship of idols, 1 Mace.
i. 43).
Aarpedw; fut. AXarpevow; 1 aor. eAdrpevoa; (Adrpis a
hireling, Lat. /atro in Enn. and Plaut.; Adrpov hire) ;
in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. to
serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of
slaves and of freemen; in the N. T. to render religious
service or homage, to worship,(Hebr. 31}, Deut. vi. 13;
x. 12; Josh. xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, Aatp. Oe: Mt.
iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7;
xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix.14; Rev. vii.15; xxii. 3;
of the worship of idols, Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx.
5; xxiii. 24; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the
manner of worshipping are these: 6e@ [so R G] \arpeveus
mvevpart (dat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3,
Aayavov
but LT Tr WH have correctly restored rvevpari Oe 0d,
i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that
the dat. of the pers. (76 6c@) is suppressed ; ev r@ mvev-
pari pou €v T@ evayy., in my spirit in delivering the glad
tidings, Ro. i. 9; 7@ Oe@ ev xaOapa cuvverdjoes, 2 Tim. i. 3;
pera aidods kal evAaBeias or [so LT Tr WH] per’ evra.
x. dcous, Heb. xii. 28; €v davdrnte x. Suxatoovyy, Lk. i. 74;
(without the dat. Oe@) vnoreias x. Senoeot, Lk. ii. 37;
Aarpevery, absol., to worship God [cf. W. 593 (552)], Acts
xxvi. 7. in the strict sense; to perform sacred services,
to offer gifts, to worship God in the observance of the rites
instituted for his worship: absol., Heb. ix. 9; x. 25 spec.
of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office:
with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is
rendered, Heb. viii. 5; xiii. 10. [(Eur., al.)]*
AdXavoy, -ov, 7d, (fr. Aayaivw to dig; hence herbs grown
on land cultivated by digging; garden-herbs, as opp. to
wild plants); any potherb, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk.
: gv. 825) Lk xi423. Ro: xiv. 2. o@ Kixx: xi.) 25; Gen:
ix.3; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2, ete.; Arstph., Plat., Plut.,
al)?
AcBBaios, see Gaddaios.
Aeyedv and (so T, Tr [but not in Mt. xxvi. 53], WH
[see fin. ], also Lchm. in Mk. v. 9, 15) Aeyov (cf. Tdf ed.
7 Proleg. p. 1.3 [esp. ed. 8 p. 83; B. 16 (15)]; so, too,
in inscrr. in Boeckh; [Diod., Plut., al.]), -dvos, 7, (a Lat.
word), a legion (a body of soldiers whose number differed
at different times, and in the time of Augustus seems to
have consisted of 6826 men [i. e. 6100 foot, and 726
horse]): Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. v. 9, 15; Lk. viii. 30 [here
WH! (ex errore) \eyiwy (cf. Chandler § 593)].*
Aéyw (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and
pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. éAXeyay, Jn. xi.
56 Tdf. [ef. €y, init. ]): I. in its earliest use in
Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; cf. J. G. Miil-
ler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius
§ 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect,
gather; to pick out. 2. to lay with, count with; to enu-
merate, recount, narrate, describe; [cf. Eng. tale, Germ.
zdhlen}. II. to put word to word in speaking, join
words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. Nadeiv, see
under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in II. 2, 222
[yet cf. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, $$ 20; 48,2; L. and 8.
s. v. B. I. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com.
use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for
a8; often also for D8) (saying, dictum); very rarely for
353; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to speak:
Acts xiii. 15; xxiv. 10; to say, foll. by direct disc., Mt. ix.
34; xii. 44; xvi. 2 [here T br. WH reject the pass.]; Mk.
iii. 30; Lk. v. 39 [WH br. the cl.]; Jn. i. 29, 38; [1 Co.
xii. 3 LT Tr WH]; Jas. iv. 13, and very often; the di-
rect discourse is preceded by ort recitative, Mt. ix. 18 [T
om. 67v]; Mk. i. 15 [Tom. WH br. Aéy.]; ii. 12 [L and
WH br. Aéy.]; iii. 21 sq.; v. 28; vi. 14 sq. 35; vii. 20; Lk.
T2Ay ave 4 le) xval- 10 sens vi. 14): vil. 2)s) vite Saisie 9)
41; xvi. 17; Acts ii. 13; xi. 3; Heb. x. 8; Rev. iii. 17,
ete.; foll. by ace. with inf., Lk. xi. 18; xxiv. 23; Jn. xii.
29; Actsiv. 82; xxviii. 6, ete.; foll. by dre, Lk. xxii. 70;
373
Myo
Jn. viii. 48; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. iv. 1, (for other exx. see
2 a. below); foll. by an indir. question, Mt. xxi. 27;
Mk. xi. 88; Lk. xx. 8. b. The N. T. writers, par-
ticularly the historical, are accustomed to add the verb
Aeyewv foll. by direct disc. to another verb which already
contains the idea of speaking, or which states an opin-
ion concerning some person or thing; as rd pyOev...
mpoprrov Aéyovros, Mt. ii. 17; viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35;
knpooowv x. [LT WHom. Tr br. kat] déyov, Mt. iii. 2;
kpa¢ew Kat Aéeyew, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk.
iv. 41 [here L T Trmrg. kpavydg{ew]; Acts xiv. 15; mpoo-
haveiv x. héyew, Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32; daexpiOn kat
Neyer, Mk. vii. 285 alveiv r. Oedv x. Aéyerv, Lk. ii. 13;
yoyyitew x. Aéyew, Jn. vi. 42. to verbs of speaking,
judging, etc., and those which denote in general the
nature or the substance of the discourse reported,
the ptep. Aéyov is added (often so in Sept. for Wx
[W. 535 sq. (499), ef. 602 (560) ]) foll. by direct disc. :
dmexpiOn héyov, Mt. xxv. 9, 44 sq.; Mk. ix. 38 [T WH
om. Aéywv]; Acts xv. 13; Rev. vii. 13, etc. (see droxpi-
voua, 1 ¢.); etme X., Mk. [viii. 28 TWH Trmrg.]; xii.
26; Lk. xx. 2, (in Grk. writ. épy Aeyov) ; eAdAnoe Aéeyor
(see Aad, 5); euapripyoe, Jn. i. 325 Kéxpaye X. ib. 15;
edidacke A. Mt. v.23; [€Bdnoe or] aveBonoe d., Mt. xxvii.
46; Lk. ix. 383 dvéxpage X., Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34 [T
WH om. Tr br. Aéy.]; also after ddev, Rev. v.9; xv. 3;
atpew [or énaip.] pavnv, Lk. xvii.13; Acts xiv.11; @av-
patew, Mt. viii. 27; ix. 33; xxi. 20; after mpopnrevery,
Mt. xv. 7; yoyyu¢ew, Mt. xx. 12; eimev ev trapaBoXais,
Mt. xxii. 1; wapéOnxe mapaBodny, Mt. xiii. 24; dicepaprv-
pato, Heb. ii. 6; émnyyeAra, Heb. xii. 26, and a great
many other exx. It is likewise added to verbs of every
kind which denote an act conjoined with speech; as
eparn, paivera Aeyavr, Mt. i. 20; 11-13; mpocexiver Aeyov,
Mt. viii. 2; ix.18; xiv. 33; xv. 25; add, Mt. viii. 3; ix.
29; xiv.15; Mk.v. 35; Lk.i. 66; v. 8; vill. 38; x.17;
KV. Oy xvii SSRI! 185 Acts vills-10,+18esqe; x5
XXVii. 23 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 25, ete. On the other hand, the
verb Aéyw in its finite forms is added to the participles
of other verbs: Mt. xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 12; xiv. 45, 63,
672) xv. 35 DK. ‘vi: 203° In.'1. 365 ix. 83’ Acts ii. 133
Heb. viii. 8; dmoxpiOeis Neyer, Mk. viii. 29; ix. 5,19; x
24,51; xi. 22, 33[L Trmrg. br. T Tr WH om. dz.]; Lk.
iii. 11; xi. 45; xiii. 8, (nowhere so in Acts. nor in Mt.
nor in Jn.); «pd&as Neyer, Mk. v. 7 [Ree. etre]; ix. 24,
eypawpe Aéeyor (TONY IND, 2 K. x. 6; 2S. xi. 15, ete.),
he wrote in these words, or he wrote these words [A. V.
retains the idiom, he wrote saying (cf. e. below) |]: Lk.
i. 63; 1 Mace. viii. 31; xi. 57; Joseph. antt. 11, 2,
2; 13,4,1; exx. fr. the Syriac are given by Gesenius in
Rosenmiiller’s Repertor. i. p. 135. &mepye or ameorethe
Aéyav, i. e. he ordered it to be said by a messenger: Mt.
xxii. 16; xxvii. 19; Lk. vii. 19sq.; xix. 145 Jn. xi. 3;
Acts xiii. 15; xvi. 35, (see in etzov, 3 b.); otherwise in
Mt. xxi. 37; Mk. xii. 6. c. 7 porn A€yovca: Mt. iii.
17; xvii. 5; Lk. iii. 22 [GLT Tr WH om. déy.]; Rev.
vi. 6; x. 4,8; xii. 10; xiv.13,etce. Aéeyew povy weyadn,
Rev. v. 12; viii. 13; ev povy p., ib. xiv. 7, 9. d. In
eyo
accordance with the Hebr. conception which regards
thought as internal speech (see eiov, 5), we find déyew
év aura, to say within one’s self, i. e. to think with one’s
self: Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; Lk. iii. 8; €v t7 Kapdia avrov,
Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said to speak, déyewv, not only
when he uses language orally, but also when he ex-
presses himself in writing [(cf. b. sub fin.)]: 2 Co. vii.
3; viii. 8; ix. 3,4; xi. 16, 21; Phil. iv.11, and often in
Paul; so of the writers of the O. T.: Ro. x. 16, 20; xi. 9;
xv.12; A€yer 7 ypapy, Ro. iv. 3; x.11; xi. 2; Jas. ii. 23,
etc.; and simply Aeyet, sc. 7 A€youea, i. e. n ypapn (our tis
said): Ro. xv. 10, [11 L Trmrg.]; Gal. iii. 16; Eph. iv.
8; v. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and.588 (547); B. § 129,
16; Aéyet, sc. 6 Geds, 2 Co. vi. 2; Aeyer Aavid év apo,
Acts xiii. 35; Aéyer 6 eds, Heb. v. 6; €v r@ ‘one, Ro.
ix. 25; év “HXia, Ro. xi. 2; &v Aavid, Heb. iv. 7; déyee
TO mvevpa TO dytov, Heb. iii. 7; 6 vopos Aeyet, 1 Co. xiv.
$4; si, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 19. f. Neyew is used of
every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix.
14; xv.1; xvii. 25; xviii. 1; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq.; Lk.
iva 22evin 20" In. vile 11> 1x. 10; xix 10> Ro; x18
sq.; xi. 1, 11, ete.; foll. by ef interrog. [see ei, II. 2], Acts
xxi. 37; Aéyer tus, i. q. one bids the question be asked,
Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11; of reply, Mt. xvii. 25; xx.
7; Mk. viii. 24 [Lmrg. eizev]; Jn. i. 21; xviii. 17; of
acclaim, Rev.iv. 8, 10; of exclamation, Rev. xviii.
10,16, of entreaty, Mt. xxv. 11; Lk. xiii. 25; i. q.
to set forth in language, make plain, Heb. v. 11. A
Neyo w. ace. of the thing. to say a thing: 6, Lk. ix. 33 (i.
e. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate
or not); Lk. xxii. 60 ; to express in words, Philem. 21 ;
rouTo, JN. Vili. 6; xii. 33; rocavra, Heb. xi. 14; radra,
Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27, 45; xiii. 17; Jn. v. 34; Acts xiv.
18; 1 Co. ix. 8; rade (.eferring to what follows), Acts
xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 18, iii. 1, 7,145; ri, what? Ro.
x. 8; xi. 4; Gal. iv. 30; 1 Co. xiv. 16; aoAda, Jn. xvi.
12; ra deydpueva, Lk. xviii. 34; Acts xxviii. 24; Heb. viii.
1; wd twos, Acts viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LT Tr WH dadov-
pevois]; xxvii. 11; A€yw dAnOeray, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; Ro.
ix. 1; 1 Tim. ii. 7; adnOq, Jn. xix. 35; dvOpamwov, Ro.
vi. 19; ov Aé€yets, sc. adrd, prop. thou sayest, i. e. thou
grantest what thou askest, equiv. to it is justas thou sayest ;
to be sure, certainly, [see etrov, 1 c.]: Mt. xxvii. 11; Mk.
xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3, ef. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 37, [(all these
pass. WH mrg. punctuate interrogatively)]; mapaBoAnp,
to put forth, Lk. xiv. 7; 7é adréd, to profess one and the
same thing, 1 Co. i. 10 cf. 12. h. with dat. of the
pers. to whom anything is said: foll. by direct discourse,
Mt. vill. 20; xiv..4;, xviii. $2 xix.j110; sMk. il 17527
vii. 95 vill. 1; Jn. i. 43 (44); li. 10, and scores of other
exx.; A€yew twi+ Kvpte, kvpte, to salute any one as lord,
Mt. vii. 21; impv. A€ye por, Acts xxii. 27 (generally
eivre pot, nuiv); plur. Lk. x.9; auny eyo vpiv, I solemnly
declare to you, (in the Gospels of Mt. Mk. and Lk.); for
which the Greek said én’ ddnOeias Aeyw ipiv, Lk. iv. 25,
and Adyw tpiv ddndas, ib. ix. 27; in Jn. everywhere
[twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] dujpy
ayy A€yo gor (ipiv), I most solemnly declare to thee
374
Aéyo
(you), i. 51 (52); iii. 11, etc.; with the force of an
asseveration déyw tivi, without aunv: Mt. xi. 22;
xii. 36; xxiii. 39; Lk. vii. 9, 28; x. 12; xii.8; xvii. 84;
xviii. 8,145 vai A€yw vpiv, Mt. xi.9; Lk. vii. 26; xi. 51;
xii. 55 Aé€yw oot, Lk. xii. 59. with a dat. of the thing,
in the sense of commanding (see 2 ec. below), Mt.
xxi. 19; Lk. xvii. 6; inthe sense of asking, implor-
ing, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi.16. Aéye rivi 71, to tell a thing
toone: Mt. x. 27; 2 Th. ii. 5; ryv adnOeav, Jn. xvi. 73
pvotnptov, 1 Co. xv. 51; mapaBodny, Lk. xviii. 1; of a
promise, Rey. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6; i. q. lo unfold, ez-
plain, Mk. x. 32; foll. by indirect dise., Mt. xxi. 27; Mk.
xi. 33; Lk. xx. 8; rwi reva, to speak to one about one,
Jn. viii. 27; Phil. iii. 18. i. Aێyo foll. by preposi-
tions: mpés twa, which denotes — either to one (equiv. to
the dat.): foll. by direct disc., Mk. iv. 41; x. 26; Lk.
Vilis} 25 voix. QS xvas 1s in. eee; ell a4 Bey eo enwarens
viii. 31; Acts ii. 7 [RG], 12; xxviii. 4, 17; foll. by Gre
recitative, Lk. iv. 21; mpds twa tt, Lk. xi. 53 RG LTr
mrg.; xxiv 10;—oras respects one, in reference to one (cf.
B. § 133,3; W. § 31,5; 405 (378); Kriiger § 48, 7, 13;
Bleek on Heb. i. 7: Meyer on Ro. x. 21]: Lk. xii. 41;
Heb. i. 7, [al. add 8, 13; vii. 21]; pera twos, to speak
with one, Jn. xi. 56, mepi tivos, of, concerning, one [ef.
W. § 47, 4], Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. i.47 (48); ii. 21; xi. 13;
xiii. 18, 22; Heb. ix. 5; epi twos, drt, Lk. xxi. 55 th
mept Twos, Jn. i. 22; ix.17; Acts viii. 34; Tit. ii. 85 revi
mepi twos, Mt. xi. 7, Mk. i. 80; viii. 30 [Lchm. etrwouw) ;
mpos Twa trepi twos, Lk. vii. 24; tmép twos, to speak for,
on behalf of, one, to defend one, Acts xxvi. 1 [L717 Tr
WHnreg. repi]; emi twa, to speak in reference to, of
[see eri, C. 1. 2 g. yy.; B. § 147, 23], one, Heb. vii. 13;
eis tiva (ri BAaodnuay), against one, Lk. xxii. 65; in
speaking to have reference to one, speak with respect to
one, Acts ii. 25 [ef. W. 397 (371)]; in speaking to refer
(athing) to one, with regard to, Eph. v. 32; eis rév kéopov,
to the world (see eis, A. I. 5 b.), Jn. viii. 26 [L T Tr WH
haha]. k. with adverbs, or with phrases having ad-
verbial force: cadds, rightly, Jn. viii.48; xiii. 13; a@oav-
ros, Mk. xiv. 31; ti kara cvyyv@pny, ercraynv, by way of
advice [concession (see ovyyvapn) |, by way of command,
1 Co. vii. 6; 2 Co. viii. 8; xara avOpwrov [see avOperos,
1c.], Ro. iii. 5; Gal. iii. 15; 1 Co.ix. 8; Aveaomori, Acts
xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where
it is used, A€eyo, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi-
cally a. i. q. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain:
foll. by an acc. with inf., Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. xii. 18; Lk.
xx. 41; xxiii. 2; xxiv. 23; Acts v. 36; viii. 9; xvii. 7;
xxviii. 6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ti. 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 95
with the included idea of insisting on, mepiréuveo Oat (that
you must be [ef. W. § 44,3 b.; B. § 141, 2]), Acts xv.
24 Rec. ; with the simple inf. without a subject-acc., Lk.
xxiv. 23; Jas. ii. 14; 1 Jn.ii. 6,9; foll. by ore (where
the ace. with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10;
Mk. ix. 11; xii,35; Lk. ix. 7; Jn. iv. 20; xii. 84; 1 Co.
xv. 12; Aéyo rwi dr etc. to declare to one that etc. [cf. B.
§ 141,1]: Mt. iii.9; v. 20,22; xii. 365 xiii. 17; xvii. 12;
xxi. 43 [WH mrg. om. dre]; xxvi. 21; Mk. ix.13; xiv. 18
AclULpLa
25, 30; Lk. iii. 8; x.12; xiii. 35 [Tr WH om. Lbr. dn];
xiv. 24; xviii. 8; xix. 26, 40 [WH txt. om. Tr br. dre];
xxi. 3; xxii. 16, 37, etc.; Jn. iii. 11; v.24sq.; viii. 34;
x. 7 [Tr WHom. Lbr. 6m]; xvi. 20; Gal. v. 2; dAéyo
twa, ort, by familiar attraction [cf. W. § 66, 5a.; B.
§ 151, 1] for Aéyo, dre rus: Jn. viii. 54; ix.19; x. 36
(where for ipeis A€yere, Ott OUTOS, Ov. . . améearethe, BXa-
odnpuet; the indirect discourse passes into the direct, and
Braodnpeis is put for BAacdnnuet [ B. § 141, 1]). b.
i. q. to teach: with dat. of pers. foll. by direct dise., 1 Co.
vii. 8,12; ri run, Jn. xvi. 12; Acts i. 3; rodro foll. by
ort, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to command,
direct: with an ace. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46; Aéyovar (se.
aitd) x. ov motovow, Mt. xxii. 35 ri tum, Mk. xiii. 37;
Jn. ii. 5; revi foll. by an imperative, Mt. v. 44; Mk. ii.
Dt vile 14sp xi. Oe) M14 S) Xvi. 95. Jn. iit 8); Deities) 99)
1 Co. vii. 12; Aeyw with an inf. of the thing to be done
or to be avoided [cf. W. § 44,3 b.; B. § 141, 2]: Mt.
v. 34, 89; Acts xxi. 4, 21; Ro. ii. 22; xii. 3; foll. by
iva, Acts xix. 4; mepi tivos (gen. of the thing) foll. by
iva, 1 Jn. v. 16, (see iva, II. 2 b.); foll. by uy with subjunce.
2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of asking, seeking, entreating :
with dat. of pers. foll. by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15; 2 Co.
vi. 13; foll. by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.); B.u.s.], Rev.
x. 9 [Rec. impv.]. xaipetv tivi Aéya, to give one a greet-
ing, bid him welcome, salute him, 2 Jn. 10 sq. (see xaipa,
fin.). d. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean
to say, (often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 303;
[L. and S.s. v. C. 10]): twa, Mk. xiv. 71; Jn. vi. 71;
ti, 1 Co. x. 29; rovro foll. by direct disc., Gal. iii. 17;
rovto foll. by ort, 1 Co. i. 12. e. to call by a name, to
call, name; i. q. kad@ twa with ace. of pred.: ri pe Aeyes
dya6dv; Mk. x.18; Lk. xviii. 19; add, Mk. xii. 37; Jn.v.
18; xv.15; Acts x. 28; [1 Co. xii. 3 RG]; Rev. ii. 20;
pass. with predicate nom.: Mt. xiii. 55; 1 Co. viii. 5;
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 4; Heb. xi. 24; 6 Aeydpevos, with
pred. nom. he that is surnamed, Mt. i. 16 (so xxvii. 17) ;
x. 2; Jn. xx. 24; Col. iv. 11; he that is named: Mt. ix.
9; xxvi. 3, 14; xxvii. 16; Mk.xv. 7; Lk. xxii. 47; Jn.
ix. 11; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 31 sq.; of things, places,
cities, etc.: rd dvoua Aéeyera, Rev. viii. 11; ptep. called,
Mt. ii. 23; xxvi. 36; xxvii. 33; Jn. iv. 5; xi. 54; xix.
13; Acts iii. 2; vi.9; Heb. ix.3; with €8paicri added,
Jn. xix. 13,17; [ef. v. 2 Tdf.]; applied to foreign words
translated into Greek, in the sense that is: Mt. xxvii.
33; Jn.iv. 25; xi. 16; xxi. 2; also d Aéeyera, Jn. xx. 16;
& A€yerat Eppnvevopevoy [L TrWH pebepy.], Jn. i. 38 (39);
Scepunv. Aéyerar, Acts ix. 36. f. to speak out, speak
of, mention: ti, Eph. v.12 (with which cf. dxv@ cai Aéyew,
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 c.); [Mk. vii. 36 T Trtxt. WH. On
the apparent ellipsis of Aéyw in 2 Co. ix. 6, ef. W. 596
sq. (555) ; B. 394 (338). Comp.: avri-, dia- (-par), ék-,
€mt-, kata-, tapa- (-yat), mpo-, cvA-Aeyw; cf. the catalogue
of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1, 60.]
Actppa [WH Aiuua, see their App. p. 154 and cf. I, ¢],
-tos, Td, (Aeim@), a remnant: Ro. xi. 5. (Hdt. 1, 119;
Plut. de profect. in virtut. c.5; for M Nw, 2 K. xix. 4.)*
Xetos, -e/a, -etov, [(cf. Lat. levis)], smooth, level: opp.
375
etToupyla
to tpayvs, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. xl. 4 Alex.; Prov. ii.
20; 158. xvii. 40; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Aelrw; [2 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. Airy, Tit. iii. 18 TWH
mrg.; pres. pass. Aeiroua; fr. Hom. down]; 1.
trans. to leave, leave behind, forsake; pass. to be left be-
hind (prop. by one’s rival in a race, hence), a. to
lag, be inferior: ev pndevi, Jas. i. 4 (Hdt. 7, 8,1); [al.
associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be
destitute of, to lack: with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5; ii.
15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be wanting o1
absent, to fail: deimer ri ton, Lk. xviii. 22; Tit. iii. 13,
(Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al.); ra Aetrovra, the things that re-
main [so Justin Mart. apol. 1, 52, cf. 32; but al. are
wanting], Tit. i.5. [Comp.: dzo-, dia-, éx-, émt-, xata-,
€v-Kata-, Tept-, UTo-AEltra. | *
Aeroupyew, ptcp. Aecroupy@v; 1 aor. inf. Aecroupynoat;
(fr. Necroupyés, q- V-) ; 1. in Attic, esp. the orators,
to serve the state at one’s own cost; to assume an office
which must be administered at one’s own expense; to dis-
charge a public office at one’s own cost; to render public
service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes.
August. p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat. ed. Bindseil (post
Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and F. Francke, Conf. Luth.,
Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1846)]; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p.
Ixxxv. sqq.; Béckh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 sqq.;
Liibker, Reallex. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Dict. of
Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] s. v. Netroupyia). 2. univ.
to do a service, perform a work; Vulg. ministro, [A. V.
to minister | ; a. of the priests and Levites who were
busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the
temple (so Sept. often for NWwW; as Num. xviii. 2; Ex.
XXViii. 31, 39; xxix. 30; Joeli. 9, etc.; several times for
72y, Num. iv. 37, 39; xvi. 9; xviii. 6 sq.; add, Sir. iv. 14
[xlv. 15; 1.14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 Mace. x. 42; [Philo,
vit. Moys. iii. 18; cf. tuiv Aecroupyovar x. adrot tTHv et
Toupylay tav mpopytay x. didacxddwy (of bishops and
deacons), Teaching of the Twelve A post. c. 15 (cf. Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 ete.) ]): Heb. x. 11. b. A. ro kupia,
of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by
instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in
some other way: Acts xiii. 2; cf. De Wette adloc. c.
of those who aid others with their resources, and re-
lieve their poverty: twi év ru, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25.*
Aevroupyla, -as, 7, (fr. Necroupyea, q. V-) 3 1. prop.
a public office which a citizen undertakes to administer at
his own expense: Plat. legg.12 p. 949 ¢.; Lys. p. 163, 22;
Isocr. p. 391 d.; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5; 23 (29), 4,
and others. 2. univ. any service: of military ser-
vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1, 63.73; of the service of work-
men, c. 21; of that done to nature in the cohabitation
of man and wife, Aristot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343", 20. 3. in
biblical Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests
relative to the prayers and sacrifices offered to God: Lk. i.
23; Heb. viii. 6; ix. 21, (for WNay, Num. viii. 22; xvi. 9;
xviii. 4; 2 Chr. xxxi. 2; Diod. 1, 21; Joseph.; [Philo de
caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al.; see Soph. Lex. s. v.]); hence
the phrase in Phil. ii. 17, explained s. v. @voia, b. fin.
[(cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44)]. b. a
NeLTOUpYLKOS
gift or benefaction, for the relief of the needy (see Ae-
roupyéw, 2c.): 2 Co. ix. 12; Phil. ii. 30.*
Aevroupytkds, -7, -dv, (Aetroupyia), relating to the perform-
ance of service, employed in ministering: oxevn, Num. iv.
[12], 26, ete.; orodai, Ex. xxxi. 10, etc.; mvedpara, of
angels executing God’s behests, Heb. i. 143; also ai deer.
tov Geov Svvdpers, Ionat. ad Philad. 9 (longer recension) ;
TO mav TANOos TaV ayyéhav adTod, Tas TO OeAnpare avTov
Aetroupyovat mapeorates, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 5, cf.
Dan. (Theodot.) vii. 10. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
Aeroupyés, -ov, 6, (fr. EPTQ i. e. épyagouat, and unused
Aeiros i. q. Anitos equiv. to Sypdcvos public, belonging to
the state (Hesych.), and this from Aews Attic for Aads),
Sept. for nw (Piel ptcp. of Nw) ; 1. a public
minister; a servant of the state: tis wédews, Inscrr.; of
the lictors, Plut. Rom. 26; (it has not yet been found in
its primary and proper sense, of one who at Athens as-
sumes a public office to be administered at his own ex-
pense [cf. L. and S. s. v. I.]; see Aevroupyéw). 2:
univ. a minister, servant: so of military laborers, often
in Polyb.; of the servants of a king, 1 K.x.5; Sir. x. 2;
[of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2S. xiii. 18 (ef. 17)];
of the servants of the priests, joined with tmypérat, Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 73; rav dyiev, of the temple, i. e. one busied
with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, cf. [ Philo, alleg.
leg. ili. § 46]; Neh. x. 39; Sir. vii. 30; trav Oeay, of
heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.417 .;
"Incov Xpiorod, of Paul likening himself to a priest, Ro.
xv. 16; plur. rod deov, those by whom God administers
his affairs and executes his decrees: so of magistrates,
Ro. xiii. 6; of angels, Heb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [ef.
Philo de caritat. § 3]; tis ydpitos tod Geod, those whose
ministry the grace of God made use of for proclaiming
to men the necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah:
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. ¢. 7; tév dméaroAov kai det-
roupyov tpav tis xpelas pov, by whom ye have sent to
me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil.
1M 25e
[Aepa, see Aaua. |
Aevriov, -ov, rd, (a Lat. word, lintewm), a linen cloth,
towel (Arr. peripl. mar. rubr. 4): of the towel or apron,
which servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig.
26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq.; with which it was supposed the
nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was coy-
ered, Ev. Nicod. c. 10; ef. Thilo, Cod. Apoer. p. 582 sq.*
Aerts, -idos, 7, (Aéw@ to strip off the rind or husk, to
peel, to scale), a scale: Acts ix. 18. (Sept.; Aristot. al.
fef: Hdts:7/'61).)*
Aémpa, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. Aempds, q- v-), Hebr. ny ry,
leprosy {lit. morbid scaliness}|, a most offensive, annoy-
ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which
generally pervades the whole body; common in Egypt
and the East (Lev. xiii. sq.): Mt. viii. 3; Mk.i.42; Lk.
vy. 12 sq. (Hdt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf. Orelli
in Herzog 2s. v. Aussatz; Greenhill in Bible Educator
iv. 76 sq. 174 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kittos.v.; Eders-
heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 sqq.; McCl. and S. s. v.]*
Aerrpés, -ov, 6, (as if for Aemepds, fr. emis, A€mos -eos,
876
XevKos
rd, a scale, husk, bark); 1. in Grk. writ. scaly,
rough. 2. specifically, leprous, affected with leprosy,
(Sept. several times for pry and y30¥; [Theophr.
c. p. 2, 6, 4] see Aémpa): Mt. viii. 2; x. 8; xi. 5; Mk. i.
40; Lk. iv. 27; vii. 22; xvii. 12; of one [(Simon)] who
had formerly been a leper, Mt. xxvi. 6; Mk. xiv. 3.*
Aerrés, -7, -dv, (Aemw to strip off the bark, to peel),
thin; small; rd Xerrév, a very small brass coin, equiv. to
the eighth part of an as, [A. V.a mite; ef. Alex.’s Kitto
and B.D.s.v.; cf. #. R. Conder in the Bible Educator,
iii. 179]: Mk. xii. 42; Lk. xii. 59; xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp.
1, 9 adds xéppa; Pollux, onom. 9, 6, sect. 92, supplies
vopicpa).*
Aevi and Aevis (T Tr (yet see below) WH Aeveis [but
Lchm. -is; see et, e]), gen. Aevt (T Tr WH Aevei), ace.
Aeviv (T WH Aeveiv, so Tr exc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21
(19); W. § 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. 9 a joining, fr. m9, cf.
Gen. xxix. 34), Levi; 1. the third son of the patri-
arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of
Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5,9; [Rev. vii.
7]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ’s ancestors:
LK. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor
of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alpheus, a col-
lector of customs [(A. V. publican)]: Mk. ii. 14 [here
WH (rejected) mrg. IdxwBov (see their note ad loc., ef.
Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)]; Lk. v. 27, 29;
acc. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the
apostle (Mt. ix. 9); but ef. Grimm in the Theol. Stud.
u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq.; [their identity is denied
also by Nicholson on Matt. ix.9; yet see Patritius, De
Evangeliis, l. i.e. i. quaest.1; Venables in Alex.’s Kitto,
s. v. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. § 1].*
Acvirns (T WH Aecveirns [so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36; see
et,t]),-ov,6,a Levite; a. oneof Levi’s posterity. _b.
in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr.
5°23, 0°19) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for
whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as-
sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the
sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the
sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temple,
to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other
things; so Lk. x. 32; Jn.i.19; Acts iv. 36; [(Plut. quaest.
conv. l. iv. quaest. 6,5; Philo de vit. Moys. i. § 58). See
BB.DD. s. v. Levites; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed.
p- 63 sqq.]*
Aeviruxéds [T WH Aeverr.; see et, ¢], -7, -dv, Levitical,
pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit.
Moys. iii. § 20.]*
AevKalvw: 1 aor. édevkava [cf. W. § 13, 1 d.; B. 41
(35)]; (Aeuxds); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Pays to
whiten, make white: ri, Mk. ix. 3; Rev. vii. 14.*
[AevKoBicowov: Rev. xix. 14 WH mrg., al. Biaorvor
Aevk. see in Buaovvos. |
Aeukéds, -, -dv, (Aevoow to see, behold, look at; akin to
Lat. Juceo, Germ. leuchten; ef. Curtius p. 113 and § 87;
[Vaniéek p. 817]), Sept. for 1293 1. light, bright,
brilliant: ra iudria . . . AevKa os 7d Pas, Mt. xvii. 2; esp.
bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white:
A€wv
spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted
to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi. 5; Lk.
ix. 29; Actsi.10; Rev. iii.5; iv.4; vi.11; vii. 9,13;
xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive
and state occasions, Eccles. ix. 8; cf. Heindorf on Hor.
sat. 2, 2,61); with @cei or as 6 xewyv added: Mk. ix. 3
RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, (doe Nevkdrepor xedvos, Hom. Il. 10,
437); év Nevkots sc. iuarious (added in Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4),
Jn. xx. 12; Rev. iii. 4; cf. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)];
used of white garments as the sign of innocence and purity
of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx.
bls 2. (dead) white: Mt. v. 36 (opp. to peAas) ;
Rev. i. 14; ii. 17; iv.4; vi. 2; xiv.14; xix.11; spoken
of the whitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.*
wv, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for °98, 778,
1°95 (ayoung lion), ete.; alion; a. prop.: Heb. xi.
33; 1 Pet. v.8; Rev. iv. 7; ix. 8,17; x. 3; xiii. 2. b.
metaph. éppvoOnv ek ordpatos déovros, I was rescued out
of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 17 (the
fiz. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole
phrase); equiv. to a brave and mighty hero: Rev. v. 5,
where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9; cf. Nah. ii. 13.*
AO, -ns, 7, (AnOw to escape notice, Ajoua to forget),
[fr. Hom. down], forgetfulness: An@nv twos AaBeiv (see
AapBave, I. 6), 2 Pet. i. 9.*
[Anpa, see Aaud. |
Anvés, -od, 7, (also 6, Gen. xxx. 38, 41 [cf. below]),
[Theoer., Diod., al.]; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped
receptacle, vat, in which grapes are trodden [A. V. wine-
press| (Hebr. 3): Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15; ri Anvov...
tov peyay (for R Tr mrg. tiv peyddnv), Rev. xiv. 19—a
variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew,
see Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in
Grk. writ.; cf. W. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p.
153 sq.; B. 81 (71). 2. i. q. broAnnov (Is. xvi. 10;
Mk. xii. 1) or mpoAnnov (Is. v. 2), Hebr. Ap}, the lower
vat, dug in the ground, into which the must or new wine
flowed from the press: Mt. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Kelter; Poskoff in Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. s. v.
Wine-press ].*
Affpos, -ov, 6, idle talk, nonsense: Lk. xxiv.11. (4 Mace.
v.10; Xen. an. 7, 7,41; Arstph., al.; plur. joined with
mavo.ai, Plat. Protag. p. 347 d.; with @dvapiat, ib. Hipp.
maj. p. 304 b.) *
Ayers, -00, 6, (for Aniorns fr. AniCouas, to plunder, and
this fr. Ion. and Epic Anis, for which the Attics use deéa,
booty), [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down], a robber; a plun-
derer, freebooter, brigand: Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48;
Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. xxi. 13; xxvii.
38,44; Mk.xi. 17; xv.27; Lk. x. 80, 36; xix. 46; Jn.
x.8; 2Co. xi. 26. [Not to be confounded with krénrns
thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the
distinction is obscured in A. V.); ef. Trench § xliv.]*
aus (LT Tr WH Ajps, see M, 1), -ews, 7), (AauBava,
AnWopuac), [fr. Soph. and Thue. down], a receiving: Phil.
iv. 15, on which pass. see ddacs, 1.*
Alav (in Hom. and Ion. Ainv), [for Au-Aav, Ad@ to desire;
ef. Curtius § 532], adv., greaily, exceedingly: Mt. ii. 16;
377
MOalw
iv. 8; viii. 28; xxvii.14; Mk.i.35; ix.3; xvi.2; Lk.
xxiii. 8; 2 Tim.iv.15; 2Jn.4; 3Jn.3; (2 Macc. xi.1;
4 Mace. viii. 16; Tob. ix. 4, ete.; for IK, Gen. i. 31; iv.
5; 18. xi. 15); Alav é€x mepioood, exceedingly beyond
measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr br. éxepio.]. See imep-
Aiav.*
AiBavos, -ov, 6, (more rarely # [ef. Lob. u. i-]); |
the frankincense-tree (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Theophr.,
al.). 2. frankincense (Hebr. 739; Lev. ii. 1 sq;
16; Is. lx. 6, etc.): Mt. ii. 11; Rev. xviii. 13; (Soph.,
Theophr., al.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 187; [ Vaniéek,
Fremdworter, s. v. On frankincense see esp. Birdwood
in the Bible Educator, i. 328 sqq. 374 sqq.]*
AtBavwrds, -ov, 6, (AiBavos) 5 1. in prof. auth.
Jrankincense, the gum exuding ék tov AiBavov, (1 Chr. ix.
29; Hdt., Menand., Eur., Plat., Diod., Hdian., al.). 2.
a censer (which in prof. auth. is 7 AvBaveris [or rather
-tpis, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 255]): Rev. viii. 3, 5.*
AuBeptivos, -ov, 6, a Lat. word, libertinus, i.e. either one
who has been liberated from slavery, a freedman, or the son
of a freedman (as distinguished fr. ingenwus, i. e. the son
of a free man): 7 ovvayaryy 4 Aeyouevn (or Tay Acyopevav
Tdf.) ABeprivwv, Acts vi. 9. Some suppose these liber-
tini [A.V. Libertines] to have been manumitted Roman
slaves, who having embraced Judaism had their syna-
gogue at Jerusalem ; and they gather as much from Tac.
Ann. 2, 85, where it is related that four thousand libertini,
infected with the Jewish superstition, were sent into Sar-
dinia. Others, owing to the names Kupnvaiwy kai ’Ade-
£avdpéov that follow, think that a geographical mean-
ing is demanded for \uBepr., and suppose that Jews are
spoken of, the dwellers in Libertum, a city or region
of proconsular Africa. But the existence of a city or
region called Libertum is a conjecture which has
nothing to rest on but the mention of a bishop with the
prefix “libertinensis” at the synod of Carthage A. p.
411. Others with far greater probability appeal to Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 23, and understand the word as denot-
ing Jews who had been made captives by the Romans
under Pompey but were afterwards set free; and who,
although they had fixed their abode at Rome, had built
at their own expense a synagogue at Jerusalem which
they frequented when in that city. The name Libertines
adhered to them to distinguish them from the free-born
Jews who had subsequently taken up their residence at
Rome. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Libertiner; Hausrath in
Schenkel iv. 38 sq.; [B. D. s. v. Libertines. Evidence
seems to have been discovered of the existence of a
“synagogue of the libertines” at Pompeii; cf. De Rossi,
Bullet. di Arch. Christ. for 1864, pp. 70, 92 sq.]*
A.Bin, -ns, 7, Libya, a large region of northern Africa,
bordering on Egypt. In that portion of it which had
Cyrene for its capital and was thence called Libya Cy-
renaica (9 mpos Kupnyny AcBvn, Joseph. antt. 16, 6,1; 9
A. 9 kata Kupnyny [q. v.], Acts ii. 10) dwelt many Jews
(Joseph. antt. 14, 7,2; 16,6,1; b.j. 7,11; ¢. Apion.
2, 4 [where cf. Miiller’s notes]): Acts ii. 10.*
AWd{w; 1 aor. Aidaca; 1 aor. pass. €AcGaaOnv; (AiBos) ;
ALOwwos
to stone; i.e. a. to overwhelm or bury with stones,
(lapidibus cooperio, Cic.): twa, of stoning, which was a
Jewish mode of punishment, (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Steini-
gung; [B. D.s. v. Punishment, III. a.1]): Jn. x. 31-
33 (where Avdafere and AcOaCouev are used of the act of
beginning ; [cf. W. § 40,2 a.; B. 205 (178)]); Jn. xi. 8;
Heb. xi. 37. b. to pelt one with stones, in order either
to wound or to kill him: Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v.26
[ef. W.505 (471); B.242(208)]; 2Co.xi.25. (Aristot.,
Polyb., Strab.; Aalew év Aids, 2S. xvi. 6.) [Comp.:
cata-AOaCw. | *
AlO.vos, -7, -ov, (AiGos); fr. Pind. down; of stone: Jn.
li. 657 2 Co. aioe Revaix. 20."
A80-Bor€w, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. é\udoBdAovv; 1 aor.
edtOoBdrAnoa; Pass., pres. ABoBoAovpuar; 1 fut. AcdoBodrn-
O@ncopat; (AtOoBdXos, and this fr. Aidos and Bardo [ cf. W.
102 (96); 25, 26]); Sept. for 2p9 and D3; i. gq. Abdgo
(q. v.), to stone; i.e. a. to kill by stoning, to stone
(of a species of punishment, see Avdatw): twa, Mt. xxi.
355 xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Acts vii. 58 sq.; pass., Jn.
vili. 5; Heb. xii. 20. b. to pelt with stones: twa,
Mk. xii. 4 [Rec.]; Acts xiv. 5. ([Diod. 17, 41, 8]; Plut.
mor. p. 1011 e.)*
AiBos, -ov, 6, Sept. for 138, [fr. Hom. down]; a stone:
of small stones, Mt. iv. 6; vii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; iv. [3], 11;
xi. 11; xxii.41; Jn. viii. 7; plur., Mt. iii. 9; iv.$; Mk.
v.53 Lk. iii. 8; xix. 40; Jn. viii. 59; x. 31; of a large
stone, Mt. xxvii. 60,66; xxviii.2; Mk.xv.46; xvi. 3 sq.;
Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41; xx.1; of building stones,
Mt. xxi. 42,44 [T om. L WH Tr mrs. br. the vs.]; xxiv.
2; Mk. xii.10; xiii. 1 sq.; Lk. xix. 44; xx. 17sq.3 xxi.
5sq.; Acts iv.11; 1 Pet.ii.7; metaph. of Christ: AéOos
axpoyaviatos (q. V.), exdexrds (cf. 2 Esdr. v. 8), évripos, 1
Pet. il. 6 (Is. xxviii. 16); (av (see (aw, II. b.), 1 Pet. ii. 4;
Aidos mrpookduparos, one whose words, acts, end, men (so
stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him
and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7); Ro.
ix. 33; of Christians: \idou (aves, living stones (see
(dw, u. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii.
5; of the truths with which, as with building materials,
a teacher builds Christians up in wisdom, AiOou riptor,
costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 12. AlOos pwvdckds, Mk. ix.42 RG;
Lk. xvii. 2 L T Tr WH, cf. Rev. xviii. 21. of precious
stones, gems: AiO. rimios, Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. 12,16; xxi.
11, 19, (2 S. xii. 30; 1 K. x. 2,11); taoms, Rev. iv. 3;
evdedupevoe Aiov (for RG TdAwov) cabapdv, Rev. xv. 6
LTrtxt.WH (Ezek. xxviii. 13 mavra [or nav] AiOov
xpnorov evdedeca; [see WH. Intr. ad 1. ¢.]) ; but (against
the reading Aidov) (cf. Scrivener, Plain Introduction ete.
p- 658]. spec. stones cut in a certain form: stone tab-
lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7; statues of idols,
Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Ezek. xx. 32).*
\.06-o-rpwros, -ov, (fr. Aides and the verbal adj. orpwrds
fr. orpdvvupe), spread (paved) with stones (vupdeiov, Soph.
Antig. 1204-5); 1é Av6., substantively, a mosaic or tes-
sellated pavement: so of a place near the praetorium or
palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 13 (see 'aBBaba); of places
in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3; Joseph.
878
rip
b. j. 6, 1, 8 and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement
consists of tessellated work, Epict. diss. 4, 7, 37, ef. Esth.
i. 6; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46; Plin. h. n. 36, 60 ef. 64.*
Atkpdw, -@: fut. AcKcunow; (Aucuds a winnowing-van) ;
1. to winnow, cleanse away the chaff from grain by win-
nowing, (Hom., Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.). 2. in a
sense unknown to prof. auth., to scatter (opp. to ovvdye,
Jer. xxxi. (or xxxvili.) 10; add, Is. xvii. 13; Am. ix.
Oye 3. to crush to pieces, grind to powder: twa, Mt.
xxi. 44 [RG Lbr. WHbr.]; Lk. xx. 18; ef. Dan. ii. 44
[Theodot.]; Sap. xi.19(18). [But in Dan. 1.c. it repre-
sents the Aphel of 410 finem facere, and on Sap. 1. c. see
Grimm. Many decline to follow the rendering of the
Vulg. (conterere, comminuere), but refer the exx. under
this head to the preceding. ] *
Aud, so Tdf. ed. 7, for Aaya, q. v.
Aiphy, -€vos, 6, [allied with Aiuwm, q. v.; fr. Hom. down],
a harbor, haven: Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see xadot Aueéves, p.
g22h
Aiuvn, -ns, 7, (fr. Aei8w to pour, pour out [cf. Curtius
§ 541]), [fr. Hom. down], a lake: A. Tevvncaper [q. v.],
Lk. v. 1; absol., of the same, Lk. v. 2; viii. 22 sq. 83;
tov mupds, Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14 sq.; kavopeévn supi,
Rev. xxi. 8.*
Aupds, -od, 6, (and H in Doric and later writ.; so L T
Tr WH in Lk. xv. 14; Acts xi. 285 so, too, in Is. viii.
21; 1 K. xviii. 2; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188; [L. and S.
s. v. init.; WH. App. p. 157*}]; B.12 (11); W. 63 (62)
[cf. 36], and 526 (490)); Sept. very often for 199; hun-
ger: Lk. xv. 17; Ro. viii. 35; év Ai@ x. diver, 2 Co. xi.
27; Xen. mem. 1, 4,13; i. q. scarcity of harvest, famine:
Lk. iv. 25; xv.14; Acts vii. 115; xi. 28 [cf. B. 81 (71)];
Rev. vi. 8; xviii. 8; Aco, famines in divers lands, Mk.
xiii. 8; Aquot x. Aowpol, Mt. xxiv. 7 [LT Tr txt. WH om.
k. Aous.]; Lk. xxi. 11; Theoph. ad Autol. 2,9; the two
are joined in the sing. in Hes. opp. 226; Hdt. 7, 171;
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; Plut. de Is. et Osir. 47.*
Atvov (Treg. Aivoy [so R Gin Mt. as below], incorrect-
ly, for ¢ is short; [cf. Lipseus, Gramm. Untersuch. p.
42]),-ov, 76, Sept. several times for NAW, in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down, flax: Ex. ix. 31; linen, as clothing, Rev.
xv.6 RG T Trwmrg.; the wick of alamp, Mt. xii. 20, after
Is: xiti..3:*
Alvos (not Aivos [with RGTr]; see Passow [or L.
and S.]s.v.; ef. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 42), -ov,
6, Linus, one of Paul’s Christian associates ; ace. to eccl.
tradition bishop of the church at Rome (cf. Hase, Po-
lemik, ed. 3 p. 131 ; Lipsius, Chronologie d. rom. Bischofe,
p- 146; [Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. v.]): 2 Tim. iv. 21.*
Aurapds, -d, -dv, (Aira [or rather, Aimos grease, akin to
ddeipo}); fr. Hom. down; fat: ra Aurapa (joined with
ra Napmpa, q- V-) things which pertain to a sumptuous
and delicate style of living [A. V. dainty], Rev. xviii.
14.*
Alrpa, -as, }, a pound, a weight of twelve ounces: Jn.
xii. 3; xix. 39. [Polyb. 22, 26,19; Diod. 14, 116, 7; Plut.
Tib. et G. Grac. 2, 3; Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 1; al.]*
AW, AuBds, 6, (fr. AeiBw [to pour forth], because it
Noyla 3
brings moisture) ; 1. the SW. wind: Hadt. 2, 25;
Polyb. 10, 10, 3; al. 2. the quarter of the heavens
whence the SW. wind blows: Acts xxvii. 12 [on which
see Bdéro, 3 and kara, II. 1 ¢.] (Gen. xiii. 14; xx. 1;
Num. ii. 10; Deut. xxxiii. 23).*
Aoyla, -as, 7, (fr. Aéyw to collect), (Vulg. collecta), a col-
lection: of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1
Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Not found in prof. auth. [ef. W. 25].)*
Aoylfopar; impf. AoysCouny; 1 aor. eAoyecaunv; adepon.
yerb with 1 aor. pass. ékoyiaOnv and 1 fut. pass. A\oyeo On-
gouat; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in
prof. auth. the pres. ptep. is once used so, in Hdt. 3, 95;
[cf. Veitch s. v.; W. 259 (243); B.52 (46)]); (Adyos) ;
Sept. for 1¥n; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul,
being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his
Epp., and only four times in the rest of the N. T.]; 1.
(rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate,
count over ; hence a. to take into account, to make ac-
count of: ri run, Ro. iv. 3, [4]; metaph. to pass to one’s
account, to impute, [A. V. reckon]: ri, 1 Co. xiii. 5; ruvi
rt, 2 Tim. iv. 16 [A. V. lay to one’s charge]; Twi Sixaco-
avvny, duaptiav, Ro. iv. 6, [8 (yet here L mrg. 'T Tr WH
txt. read od) |; 7a mapamrapara 2 Co. v.19; in imitation
of the Hebr. 9 AWM), Aoyiferai re (or tes) els Te (Equiv.
to eis 76 or Sore etvai tt), a thing is reckoned as or to be
something, i. e. as availing for or equivalent to something,
as having the like force and weight, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. i. p. 1375; [cf. W. § 29, 3 Note a.; 228 (214); B.
§ 131, 7 Rem.]): Ro. ii. 26; ix. 8; els oddev, Acts xix.
27; Is.xl.17; Dan. [(Theodot. os) ] iv. 32; Sap. iii. 17;
ix. 6; 9 miotis eis Stxacocvyny, Ro. iv. 3, 5, 9-11, 22 sq.
24; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 23; Gen. xv.6; Ps. cv. (evi.) 31;
1 Mace. ii. 52. b. i. q. to number among, reckon with:
twa pera twov, Mk. xv. 28 [yet GT WH om. Tr br. the
vs.] and Lk. xxii. 37, after Is. liii. 12, where Sept. ev
Tois avouots. c. toreckon or account, and treat accord-
ingly : twa ds tt, Ro. viii. 36 fr. Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23; ef.
B. 151 (1382); [W. 602 (560)]; [Ro. vi. 11 foll. by
ace. w. inf., but GLom. Trbr. the inf.; cf. W. 321
(302) ]. 2. (in animo rationes conferre) to reckon
inwardly, count up or weigh the reasons, to deliberate, [A.
V. reason]: mpos éavtovs, one addressing himself to an-
other, Mk. xi. 31 R G (pos euavrov, with myself, in my
mind, Plat. apol. p. 21 d.). 3. by reckoning up all the
reasons to gather or infer; i.e. a. to consider, take ac-
count, weigh, meditate on: ri, a thing, with a view to obtain-
ing it, Phil. iv. 8; foll. by 67, Heb. xi. 19; [Jn. xi. 50
(Rec. 8adoy.)]; Todro foll. by dru, 2 Co. x. 11. b. to
suppose, deem, judge: absol. 1 Co. xiii. 11; as AoyiCoua,
1 Pet. v.12; ri, anything relative to the promotion of the
gospel, 2 Co. iii. 5; ri eis twa (as respects one) trép
(rovro) 6 etc. to think better of one than agrees with
what etc. [‘ account of one above that which’ ete. ], 2 Co.
xii. 6; foll. by dre, Ro. viii. 18; rodro foll. by dm, Ro. ii.
3; 2 Co. x. 7; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject,
2 Co. xi. 5; fofl. by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 28; xiv.
14; Phil. iii. 13 [cf. W. 321 (302)]; riva ds Twa, to hold
[A. V. ‘count’] one as, 2 Co. x. 2 [cf. W. 602 (560)];
9 oylos
with a preparatory ovrws preceding, 1 Co. iv. 1. c.
to determine, purpose, decide, [cf. American ‘ calculate’],
foll. by an inf. (Eur. Or. 555): 2 Co. x. 2. [Comp.:
dva-, 5a-, mapa-, avd-hoyiCopat. | *
Aoytkés, -7, -dv, (fr. Adyos reason), [Tim. Locr., Dem.,
al.], rational (Vulg. rationabilis); agreeable to reason,
following reason, reasonable: Xatpeia Aoyexn, the worship
which is rendered by the reason or soul, [‘ spiritual ’],
Ro. xii. 1 (Aoyexy Kai dvaipaxros mpoodopa, of the offer-
ing which angels present to God, Test. xii. Patr. [test.
Levi § 3] p. 547 ed. Fabric.; [cf. Athenag. suppl. pro
Christ. § 13 fin.]); 7d Avy:Kdv yadda, the milk which nour-
ishes the soul (see ydAa), 1 Pet. ii. 2 (Aoyexn tpopy, Eus.
h. e. 4, 23 fin.).*
Adyvov, -ov, To, (dimin. of Adyos [so Bleek (on Heb. v.
12) et al.; al. neut. of Adyios (Mey. on Ro. iii. 2)]), prop.
a little word (so Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 969 (973)), a brief
utterance, in prof. auth. a divine oracle (doubtless because
oracles were generally brief); Hdt., Thuc., Arstph.,
Eur.; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; 8, 30,6; Diod. 2,14; Ael. v.h.
2,41; of the Sibylline oracles, Diod. p. 602 [fr. 1. 34];
Plut. Fab. 4; in Sept. for }wn the breast-plate ot the high
priest, which he wore when he consulted Jehovah, Ex.
XXVili. 15; xxix. 5, ete.; [once for 1k, of the words of
a man, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 15]; but chiefly for 779% of
any utterance of God, whether precept or promise; [cf.
Philo de congr. erud. grat. § 24; de profug. § 11 sub
fin.]; of the prophecies of God in the O. T., Joseph.
b. j. 6, 5, 45 vdpous cal Aoyta Oeomabevra Sia rpopyrav
kai vpvous, Philo vit. contempl. § 3; 7d Aoyvov Tov mpo-
gnrov (Moses), vit. Moys. iii. 35, cf. [23, and] de praem.
et poen. § 1 init.; ra deka Acya, the ten commandments
of God or the decalogue, in Philo, who wrote a special
treatise concerning them (Opp. ed. Mang. ii. p. 180
sqq- [ed. Richter iv. p. 246 sqq.]); [Constit. Apost. 2,
36 (p. 63, 7 ed. Lagarde)]; Euseb. h. e. 2,18. In the
N. T. spoken of the words or utterances of God: of the
contents of the Mosaic law, Acts vii. 38; with rod Geou
or 6eov added, of his commands in the Mosaic law and
his Messianic promises, Ro. iii. 2, cf. Philippi and Um-
breit ad loc.; of the substance of the Christian religion,
Heb. v. 12; of the utterances of God through Christian
teachers, 1 Pet. iv. 11. (In eccl. writ. Ady.a tod Kupiov
is used ot Christ’s precepts, by Polyc. ad Philipp. 7, 1;
kupiaka Adyta of the sayings and discourses of Christ
which are recorded in the Gospels, by Papias in Euseb.
h. e. 3, 39; Phot. c. 228 p. 248 [18 ed. Bekk.]; [ra Acta
t. Oeov] of the words and admonitions of God in the
sacred Scriptures, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 1 [where par-
allel with ai tepat ypadat], cf. 62,3; [and ra Ady. simply,
like ai ypadai, of the New T. in the interpol. ep. of Ign.
ad Smyrn. 3]. Cf. Schwegler [(also Heinichen) ], Index
iv. ad Euseb. h. e. s. v. Aoyrov; [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. and
Lghtft. in the Contemp. Rev. for Aug. 1875, p. 399 sqq.
On the general use of the word cf. Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebr.
iii. pp. 114-117].) *
Adytos, -ov, (Aoyos), in class. Grk. 1. learned, a man
of letters, skilled in literature and the arts; esp. versed
Noryto wos
in history and antiquities. 2. skilled in speech, elo-
quent: so Acts xviii. 24 [which, however, al. refer to 1
(finding its explanation in the foll. duvards xr.) ]. The
use of the word is fully exhibited by Lobeck ad Phryn.
p- 198. [(Hdt., Eur., al.)]*
Aoyto-pds, -ov, 6, (AoyiCoyar) ; 1. a reckoning, com-
putation. 2. a reasoning: such as is hostile to the
Christian faith, 2 Co. x. 4 (5) [A. V. imaginations}. 3.
a judgment, decision: such as conscience passes, Ro. ii.
15 [A. V. thoughts]. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.;
Sept. for Taw, as Prov. vi. 18; Jer. xi. 19; Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 10.)*
hoyopaxéw, -@; (fr. Aoyoudyos, and this fr. Adyos and
pdyopat); to contend about words; contextually, to wrangle
about empty and trifling matters: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Not
found in prof. auth.) *
Aoyopax ia, -as, 7, (Aoyopayéw), dispute about words, war
of words, or about trivial and empty things: plur. 1 Tim.
vi. 4. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
Adyos, -ov, 6, (A€yw), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for
935, also for 1728 and 199; prop. a collecting, collection,
(see Aeyw),— and that, as well of those things which
are put together in thought, as of those which, having
been thought i. e. gathered together in the mind, are
expressed in words. Accordingly, a twofold use of
the term is to be distinguished: one which relates to
speaking, and one which relates to thinking.
I. As respects SPEECH: 1. a word, yet not in
the grammatical sense (i. q. vocabulum, the mere name
of an object), but language, voz, i. e. a word which, ut-
tered by the living voice, embodies a conception or
idea; (hence it differs from pnya and éros [q. v.; ef.
also Aadéw, ad init.]): Heb. xii. 19; dmoxpiOjvar Aoyor,
Mt. xxii. 46; etwety Ady, Mt. viii. 8 [Rec. Adyor (cf.
eirov, 3 a. fin.)]; Lk. vii. 7; AaAnoae wevTe, puptovs, do-
yous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; d:ddvar Noyov evonpuov, to utter a dis-
tinct word, intelligible speech, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eimeiv Noyov
kara Twos, to speak a word against, to the injury of, one,
Mt. xii. 32; also ets twa, Lk. xii. 10; to drive out de-
mons Ady@, Mt. viii. 16; emepwrav twa ev Adyors ikavois.
Lk. xxiii. 9; of the words of a conversation, dvtiBd\Xew
Adyous, Lk. xxiv. 17. 2. what some one has said;
a saying ; a. univ.: Mt. xix. 22 [Tom.]; Mk. v. 36
[cf. B. 302 (259) note]; vii. 29; Lk.i. 29; xx. 20; xxii.
61 [Trmrg. WH pnyaros]; In. ii. 22; iv. 39,50; vi. 60;
vil. 36; xv. 20; xviii. 9; xix.8; Acts vii. 29; 6 Aoyos
ovros, this (twofold) saying (of the people), Lk. vii. 17,
ef. 16; Tov adrov Aoyov eirav, Mt. xxvi. 44; [Mk. xiv.
39]; maydevew twa ev Xoyw, in a word or saying which
they might elicit from him and turn into an accusation,
Mt. xxii. 15; dypevew twa oyo, i. e. by propounding a
question, Mk. xii. 13; plur., Lk. i. 20; Acts v. 5, 24;
with gen. of the contents: 6 X. émayyeNias, Ro. ix. 9;
6 X. THs 6pkopwcias, Heb. vii. 28; X. mapakAnoews, Acts
Ki 15 3 Gh Ne Ts paptupias, Rev. xii. 11 ; of A. ™s T po-
gnreias, Rev. i. 3 [Tdf. rév X.];_ xxii. 6 sq. 10, 18; 6 mpo-
gntixos Adyos, the prophetic promise, collectively of the
sum of the O. T. prophecies, particularly the Messianic,
380
AOryos
2 Pet.i.19; of the sayings and statements of teachers:
oi Adyot ovror, the sayings previously related, Mt. vii. 24
[here L Tr WH br. rodr.], 26; Lk. ix. 28; of Ndyor revds,
the words, commands, counsels, promises, etc., of any
teacher, Mt. x. 14; xxiv. 35; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 44;
Jn. xiv. 24; Acts xx. 35; Adyor dAnOivoi, Rev. xix. 9; xxi.
5; moto, Rev. xxii. 6; xevoi, Eph. v. 6: mdacroi, 2 Pet.
ii. 3 [ef. W. 217 (204)]; b. of the sayings of
God; a. i. q. decree, mandate, order: Ro. ix. 28;
with rod Oeod added, 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7 [R* G Tr txt.]; 6X.
Tov Oeod eyevero mpos twa (a phrase freq. in the O. T.),
Jn. x. 35. B. of the moral precepts given by God in
the O. T.: Mk. vii. 13; [Mt. xv.6 L Tr WH txt:]; Ro.
xiii. 9; Gal. v. 14, (cf. of déka Adyou, [Ex. xxxiv. 28; Deut.
x. 4 (cf. pyuara, iv. 13); Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 35;
de decalog. § 9]; Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 5 [cf.5,5]).
i. q. promise: 6 X. THs axons (equiv. to 6 dxovaGbeis), Heb.
iv. 2; 6 A. Tod Geod, Ro. ix. 6; plur. Ro. iii. 4; univ. a
divine declaration recorded in the O. T., Jn. xii. 885 xv.
2535) 1 Co. xw.J54: 8. dia Adyouv Oeod etc. through
prayer in which the language of the O. T. is employed:
1 Tim. iv. 5; ef. De Wette and Huther ad loc. é.
6 Novos Tov Geod, as 7)? 135 often in the O. T. prophets,
an oracle or utterance by which God discloses, to the proph-
ets or through the prophets, future events: used collec-
tively of the sum of such utterances, Rev. i. 2, 9; cf.
Diisterdieck and Bleek ad Il. ce. c. what is de-
clared, a thought, declaration, aphorism, (Lat. sententia) :
tov oyov Tovroy (reference is made to what follows, so
that ydap in vs. 12 is explicative), Mt. xix. 11; a dictum,
maxim or weighty saying: 1 Tim. i. 15; iii. 1; 2 Tim. ii.
11; Tit. iii. 8; i. q. proverb, Jn. iv. 37 (as sometimes in
class. Grk., e. g. [Aeschyl]. Sept. adv. Theb. 218]; 6 ma-
Aatds Aodyos, Plat. Phaedr. p. 240¢.; conviv. p. 195 b.;
lege. 6 p. 757 a.; Gorg. p. 499 ¢.; verum est verbum
quod memoratur, ubi amici, ibi opes, Plaut. True. 4, 4, 32;
add, Ter. Andr. 2, 5, 15; al.). 3. discourse (Lat. ora-
tio); a. the act of speaking, speech: Acts xiv.12; 2
Co. x. 10; Jas. iii. 2; dia Adyou, by word of mouth, Acts
xv. 27; opp. to dv émoroday, 2 Th. ii. 15; 51a Adyou rod-
Aov, Acts xv. 32; Adyw modAA@, Acts xx. 2; mepi ob modds
quiv 6 Adyos, of whom we have many things to say, Heb.
v.11; 6 Adyos tpav, Mt. v. 37; Col. iv. 6; A. xodakelas, 1
Th. ii. 5. Adyos is distinguished from codia in 1 Co. ii.
1; fr. avaorpopn, 1 Tim. iv. 12; fr. Svvapus, 1 Co. iv. 19
sq.; 1 Th. i. 5; fr. yor, Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. x. 11; Col.
iii. 17; fr. épyov x. dAnOea, 1 Jn. iii. 18 (see Epyov, 3
p- 248" bot.) ; odSevds Adyou riwsoy, not worth mentioning
(Adyou aéov, Hat. 4, 28; cf. Germ. der Rede werth), i. e.
a thing of no value, Acts xx. 24 T Tr WH (see II. 2
below). b. i. q. the faculty of speech: Eph. vi. 19;
skill and practice in speaking: iStatns tO Ady@ adW ov
Th yvaoer, 2 Co. xi. 6; Suvards ev py x. Ady, Lk. xxiv.
19 (dvdpas Ady Suvarods, Diod. 13, 101); Adyos codias
or yvooews, the art of speaking to the purpose about
things pertaining to wisdom or knowledge, 1 Co. xii.
8. c. a kind (or style) of speaking: év marti Adye,
1 Co.i. 5 [A. V. utterance]. d. continuous speak
Noyos
ing, discourse, such as in the N. T. is characteristic of
teachers: Lk. iv. 32, 36; Jn. iv. 41; Acts iv. 4 (cf.
iii, 12-26); xx. 7; 1Co.i. 17; ii.1; plur., Mt. vii. 28; xix.
1; xxvi. 1; Lk. ix. 26; Acts ii.40; duvards ev Adyots k.
Epyos avtov, Acts vii. 22. Hence, the thought of the
subject being uppermost, e. instruction: Col. iv.
3; Tit. ii. 8; 1 Pet. iii. 1; joined with d:dacxadia, 1 Tim.
v.17; with a gen. of the teacher, Jn. v. 243; viii. 52; xv.
20; xvii. 20; Actsii.41; 1Co.ii.4; 2Co.i.18 (cf. 19);
6 Adyos 6 ends, In. viii. 31, 37, 43, 51; xiv. 23; rim Adya,
with what instruction, 1 Co. xv. 2 (where construe, ei
katéxeTe, Tim, Ady etc.; cf. B. §§ 139, 58; 151, 20);
i. q. xnpvypa, preaching, with gen. of the obj.: X. dAy-
Oeias, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 18; 6 A. THs aAnOelas, Col. i. 5;
Eph. i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; ras KaradAayjs, 2 Co. v.19; 6
X. tis C@Tnplas TavTns, concerning this salvation (i. e. the
saivation obtained through Christ) [ef. W. 237 (223); B.
162 (141) ], Acts xiii. 26; 6 Adyos tis Bactdelas (Tod Oeod),
Mt. xiii. 19; tod oravpov, 1 Co. i. 18; 6 THs apyns Tov
Xptcrod Adyos, the first instruction concerning Christ [cf.
B. 155 (136); W.188 (177) ], Heb. vi.1. Hence 4.
in an objective sense, what is communicated by instruc-
tion, doctrine: univ. Acts xviii. 15; 6 Xéy. ad’rav, 2 Tim.
ii. 17; plur. nwerepoe Adyor, 2 Tim. iv. 15; vy.aivovtes
Adyot, 2 Tim. i. 13; with a gen. of obj. added, rod xupiov,
1 Tim. vi. 3; ths miotews, the doctrines of faith [see
miotis, 1c. 8.],1 Tim. iv. 6. specifically, the doctrine con-
cerning the attainment through Christ of salvation in the
kingdom of God: simply, Mt. xiii. 20-23; Mk. iv. 14-20;
Vili. 32; xvi. 20; Lk.i.2; viii. 12; Acts viii.4; x.44;
Me ext velo exvileelel 8 Gal) vies) bila rad 41 he
6; 2 Tim. iv. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 8; rdv Adyov, dv ameoretde Tots
ete. the doctrine which he commanded to be delivered
to ete. Acts x. 36 [but L WH txt. om. Tr br. 6v; cf. W.
§ 62, 3fin.; B. § 131,13]; rév Aoyov dxovew, Lk. viii. 15;
Jn. xiv. 24; Actsiv.4; 1 Jn. ii. 7; Nadeiv, Jn. xv. 3 (see
other exx. s. v. Nadéw, 5 sub fin.) ; dareeiv ro X., 1 Pet.
ii. 8; iii. 1; d:dayy meorod Adyov, Tit. i. 9; with gen. of
the teacher: 6 X. avray, Acts ii. 41; with gen. of the
author: tov Geov, Lk. v.13 viii. 11, 21; xi. 28; Jn. xvii.
Gute ed) CopxivesGs: 2) Co.tivit2s) Col. i. 255. 2 Tim: iis 9;
Ditties. dee Mebane? s Invi 10s 41: 5)14 Rev:
vi. 9; xx. 4; very often in the Acts: iv. 29, 31; vi. 2, 7;
Vili. 145 xi. 1,195 xii. 24; xili. 5, 7,44, 46; xvii. 13; xviii.
11; opp. to X. dvOparev [B. § 151, 14], 1 Th. ii. 13; Adyos
(av Oeov, 1 Pet. i. 23; 6 X. rod Kupiov, Acts viii. 25; xiii.
48 [((WH txt. Tr mrg. @eod) | sq.; xv. 35 sq.; xix. 10, 20;
1 Th.i. 8; 2 Th. iii. 1; rod Xpucrod, Col. iii. 16; Rev. iii.
8; with gen. of apposition, rod evayyeAiov, Acts xv. 7;
with gen. of the obj., rs ydpiros-tod Oeod, Acts xiv. 3;
xx. 32; Stxacocvyyns (see Sixaroovvyn, 1 a.), Heb. v. 13;
with gen. of quality, rms ¢w7s, containing in itself the
true life and imparting it to men, Phil. ii. 16. 5.
anything reported in speech; a narration, narrative: of
a written narrative, a continuous account of things
done, Acts i. 1 (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down [cf.
L. and S.s. vy. A. IV.]); @ fictitious narrative, a story,
Mt. xxviii. 15, cf. 13. report (in a good sense): 6 Ady.
381
oyos
the news concerning the success of the Christian cause,
Acts xi. 22; mepi twos, Lk. v.15; rumor, i. e. current
story, Jn. xxi. 23; Adyov Exew tids, to have the (unmer-
ited) reputation of any excellence, Col. ii. 23 (so Adyor
éxet tes foll. by an inf., Hdt. 5,66; Plat. epin. p. 987b.;
[see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. (cf. L. and S. s. v. A.
III. 3)]). 6. matter under discussion, thing spoken
of, affair: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. xi. 29; Lk. xx. 3; Acts viii.
21; xv.6,and often in Grk. writ. [L. and S.s. v. A.
VIII.J; @ matter in dispute, case, suit at law, (as 137 in
Exod. xviii. 16; xxii. 8): €yew Adyov mpds Twa, to have
a ground of action against any one, Acts xix. 38, cf.
Kypke ad loc.; mapexros Adyou rropveias ((cf. I. 6 below]
Maat VF [-dy 173 or] 1390, Delitzsch), Mt. v. 32; [xix.
9LWHurg.]. 7. thing spoken of or talked about;
event; deed, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): 8a-
gnpitew Tov Adyov, to blaze abroad the occurrence, Mk.
i. 45; plur. Lk.i.4 (as often in the O. T.; pera rods
Adyous Tovrous, 1 Mace. vii. 33).
II. Its use as respects the MIND alone, Lat. ratio; i.
e. 1. reason, the mental faculty of thinking, medi-
tating, reasoning, calculating, etc.: once so in the phrase
6 Aoyos Tov Geod, of the divine mind, pervading and not-
ing all things by its proper force, Heb. iv. 12. 2.
account, i. e. regard, consideration : Ad-yov moteta Gai Twos,
to have regard for, make account of a thing, care for
a thing, Acts xx. 24 RG (Job xxii. 4; Hdt. 1, 4. 13
etc.; Aeschyl. Prom. 231; Theocr. 3, 33; Dem., Joseph.,
Dion. H., Plut., al. [cf. L. and S. s. v. B. I. 1]); also Ao-
yov éxew twos, Acts 1. c. Lehm. (Tob. vi. 16 (15)) [ef. 1. 3
a. above |. 3. account, i.e. reckoning, score: Sdcews
x. Anyveas (see Sédars, 1), Phil. iv. 15 [where ef. Bp. Lghtft.];
eis Néyov tay, to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan-
tage, ib. 17; ouvaipecv Aoyoy (an expression not found in
Grk. auth.), to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt.
Opie PEA S646 Sh 4. account, i. e. answer or ex-
planation in reference to judgment: Adyoy diddvar (as
often in Grk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro.
xiv.12RGT WHI mrg. Tr mrg.; also drod:déva, Heb.
xiii. 17; 1 Pet.iv.5; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2;
Acts xix. 40 [RG]; mepi ruvos, Mt. xii. 36; [Acts xix. 40
LT Tr WH]; tui epi éavrod, Ro. xiv. 12 Ltxt. br. Tr
txt.; alreiv teva Adyov mepi Twos, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (Plat. polit.
p- 285 e.). 5. relation: mpos dv nutv 6 Adyos, with
whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do],
Heb. iv. 13; xara Adyov, as is right, justly, Acts xviii.
14 [A. V. reason would (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4.53; 5, 110,
10)], (mapa Adyov, unjustly, 2 Mace. iv. 36; 3 Mace. vii.
8). 6. reason, cause, ground: rin d6ya, for what
reason? why? Acts x. 29 (é« rivos Aéyov; Aeschyl.
Choeph. 515; e& odSevds Adyov, Soph. Phil. 730; rin
Sixaie Aéyw «rr. ; Plat. Gorg. p. 512 e.); mapexTos Ad-you
ropveias (Vulg. exceptd fornicationis causa) is generally
referred to this head, Mt. v. 32; [xix. 9 L WHmrg.];
but since where Adyos is used in this sense the gen. is not
added, itghas seemed best to include this passage among
those mentioned in I. 6 above.
III. In several passages in the writings of John 6 Aoyos
AOYXN
denotes the essential’ WorpD of God, i. e. the personal
(hypostatic) wisdom and power in union with God, his
minister in the creation and government of the universe,
the cause of all the world’s life both physical and ethical,
which for the procurement of man’s salvation put on hu-
man nature in the person of Jesus the Messiah and shone
forth conspicuously from his words and deeds: Jn. i. 1,
14; (1 Jn. v. 7 Rec.) ; with rjs Cons added (see wn, 2
a.), 1 Jn.i. 1; tod Oeod, Rev. xix. 13 (although the in-
terpretation which refers this passage to the hypostatic
Adyos is disputed by some, as by Baur, Neutest. Theolo-
gie p. 216 sq.). Respecting the combined Hebrew and
Greek elements out of which this conception originated
among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. Liicke, Com. tb.
d. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 249-294; [cf. esp. B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Word (and for works which have appeared
subsequently, see Weiss in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6; Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 34 II.) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 15 p.
143 sq. ; and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen,
Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 10].
ASOYXN, -1S; 773 1. the iron point or head of a
spear: Hdt.1, 52; Xen. an.4, 7,16, etc. 2. alance,
spear, (shaft armed with iron): Jn. xix. 34. (Sept.;
Pind., Tragg., sqq.) *
AorSopew, -d; 1 aor. €Ao.ddpynoa; pres. pass. ptcp. Aordo-
povpevos; (Aoidopos); to reproach, rail at, revile, heap
abuse upon: tia, Jn. ix. 28; Acts xxiii. 4; pass., 1 Co.
iv. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Pind. and Aeschyl]. down ;
Sept. several times for 3°9.) [Comp.: dvrti-Aodopew. | *
AoSopla, -as, 7, (AowWopew), railing, reviling: 1 Tim. v.
14; 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept.; Arstph., Thuc., Xen., sqq.) *
holSopos, -ov, 6, a railer, reviler: 1 Co. v.11; vi. 10.
(Prov. xxv. 24; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj.], Plut., al.) *
Aowpds, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], pestilence; plur. a
pestilence in divers regions (see Auuds), Mt. xxiv. 7 [RG
Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. xxi. 11; metaph., like the Lat. pestis
(Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 35; Cic. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow,
pest, plague: Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5; Ael. v. h.
14, .91.5) Prov. se. 24; eplors Es:4, 15 1) Mace> xv..21;
avdpes Aowzoi, 1 Mace. x. 61, cf. 1S. x.27; xxv. 17, etc.).*
Aourds, -7, -dv, (Aeim@, AeAourra), [fr. Pind. and Hadt.
down], Sept. for mM, 113, Nw, left; plur. the remain-
ing, the rest: with ‘substantives, as of Aourol dmdaroAot,
NCtS ios) Conrmprmadds Misscxvealil ss Rost els ce 2
Cor xi. 43) Gala 18¢yPhilsiv. as aeietsii. 16s Rey;
viii. 13; absol. the rest of any number or class under con-
sideration: simply, Mt. xxii. 6; xxvii.49; Mk. xvi. 13;
Lk. xxiv. 10; Acts xvii. 9; xxvii. 44; with a descrip-
tion added: of Aourot of ete., Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Th. iv.
13; Rev. ii. 24; of Nowrot mdavres, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Phil. i.
13; mace trois X. Lk. xxiv. 9; with a gen.: of Aourol Tov
avOporev, Rev. ix. 20; rod oméppatos, ib. xii. 17; Tap
vexpor, ib. xx. 5; with a certain distinction and contrast,
the rest, who are not of the specified class or number: Lk.
Vill: 10 ; xviii. 9; -Acts'v. 133 Ro.:xi., 73) 1,Co. vii. 12;
1 Th.v.6; 1 Tim. v. 20; Rev. xi. 13; xix. 21; za Aoura,
the rest, the things that remain: Mk. iv. 19; Lk. xii. 26;
1 Co. xi. 34; Rev. iii. 2. Neut. sing. adverbially, rd
38
2 Aovw
Aourdv what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. e. a.
hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Pind. down): Mk. xiv. 41 RT WH (but 76 in br.);
Mt. xxvi. 45 [WH om. Tr br. 70]; 1 Co. vii. 29; Heb. x.
13; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 GLTr [WH
(but see above)]; 2 Tim. iv. 8; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
706. rod Aowrovd, henceforth, in the future, Eph. vi. 10
LT Tr WH; Gal. vi. 17; Hdt. 2, 109; Arstph. pax
1084; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10; oec. 10, 9; al; ef. Herm. ad
Vig. p. 706; often also in full rod A. xpdvov. [Strictly, rd
A. is ‘for the fut.’ rod X. ‘in (the) fut.’; 7d A. may be used
for rod X., but not rod A. for 76.3; cf. Meyer and Ellicott
on Gal. u. s.; B. §§ 128, 2; 132, 26; W. 463 (482).] b.
at last; already: Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see
Passow or L. and. s. v.). c. TO Aourov, dropping the
notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover,
[A. V. often finally], forming a transition to other things,
to which the attention of the hearer or reader is directed:
Eph. vi.10 RG; Phil. iii. 1; iv. 8; 1 Th. iv. 1 Ree.;
2 Th. iii. 1; 6 d€ Aoerdy has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2
RG; Aoeroy in 1 Co. i. 16; iv. 2LTTr WH; 1 Th. iv.
LGA: Tr WH:
Aovxas, -a, 6, (contr. fr. Aovkavés; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Col. iv. 14], W. 103 (97) [ef. B. 20 (18); on the diverse
origin of contr. or abbrev. prop. names in ds cf. Lobeck,
Patholog. Proleg. p. 506; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]),
Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the
apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his
journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17; xx. 5-15; xxi.1-18}; xxviii.
10-16) ; he was a physician, and acc. to the tradition of
the church from Irenzus [3, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has
been recently assailed with little success, the author of the
third canonical Gospel and of the Acts of the Apostles:
Col. iv. 14; 2 Tim. iv. 11; Philem. 24.*
Aovkwos, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of Cyrene, a
prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch: Acts
xiii. 1; perhaps the same Lucius that is mentioned in
Io. axya. (215*
Aovtpév, -ov, Td, (Aovw), fr. Hom. down (who uses
Aoerpov fr. the uncontr. form Ao€w), a bathing, bath, i. e.
as well the act of bathing [a sense disputed by some
(cf. Ellicott on Eph. v. 26)], as the place; used in the
N. T. and in eccles. writ. of baptism [for exx. see Soph.
Lex. s.v.]: with rod vdaros added, Eph. v. 26; rijs madty-
yeveoias, Tit. iii. 5.*
Aovw: 1 aor. €Aovea; pf. pass. ptcp. AeAoupevos and (in
Heb. x. 23 T WH) Aedovopevos, a later Greek form (cf.
Lobeck on Soph. Aj. p. 324; Steph. Thesaur. v. 397 ¢.;
cf. Kiihner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v., who cites Cant. v.
12 Vat.]); 1 aor. mid. ptep. Aovedpevos; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 71; to bathe, wash: prop. twd, a dead person,
Acts ix. 37; rwa dmb rév mAnyav, by washing to cleanse
from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [ W.372 (348),
cf. § 30,6 a.; B. 322 (277)]; 6 AeAoupevos, absol., he that
has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage
see xaOapds, a. [and cf. Syn. below]); AeA. 7rd capa,
with dat. of the instr., ddarr, Heb. x. 22 (23); mid. to
wash one’s self (cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]: 2 Pet. ii. 22; trop.
Avdda 383
Uhrist is described as 6 Novas Hnuas and Tov dpaprioy
jpav, i. e. who by suffering the bloody death of a vicari-
vus sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev.
i. 5 RG [al. Avoas (q. v. 2 fin.). Comp. : dro-Aova. ]*
[Syn. Aodbo, vimrw, tAvvw: mA. is used of things,
esp. garments; A. and v. of persons,—v. of a part of the
body (hands, feet, face, eyes), A. of the whole. All three
words occur in Lev. xv. 11. Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlv.]
AdS8a, -ns [Acts ix. 38 RG L, but -as T Tr WH; see
WH. App. p.156], 4, and Avdda, -ov, ra ((LT Tr WH
in] Acts ix. 32,35; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.116; B. 18 (16) sq:
[cf. W. 61 (60)}); Hebr. 45 (1 Chr. Vili. 12; Ezra ii. 33;
Neh. xi. 35); Lydda, a large Benjamite fick: 1 Chr.l 3
town (Avdda Kaun, méAews Tod peyebous ovK dmod€eovca,
Joseph. antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the
Roman empire, about nine [‘ eleven’ (Ordnance Survey p.
21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd:
Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp.
244-248; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 627 sq.; [BB. DD.
8. v.|.*
Av8la, -as, 7, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of
purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith: Acts
xvi. 14,40. The name was borne by other women also,
Horat. carm. 1, 8; 3, 9.*
Avxaovla, -as, 7, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Minor,
situated between Pisidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia
and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and
Iconium [ef. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in-
habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char-
acter of which cannot be determined: Acts xiv. 6. Cf.
Win. RWB.s.v.; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl.
Gesellsch. x. (’56) p. 378; [ Wright, Hittites (’84) p. 56].*
Avraovrri, (Aucaovitw, to use the language of Lyca-
onia), adv., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts xiv. 11 (see
Avxaovia).*
Avxta, -as, 7, Lycia, a mountainous region of Asia
Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the
Mediterranean: Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D.
s. v-; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
p: Aba *
AvKos, -ov, 6, Hebr. 3x1, a wolf: Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3;
Jn. x. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa-
cious, destructive men: Mt. vii. 15; Acts xx. 29; (used
trop. even in Hom. Il. 4,471; 16, 156; in the O. T.,
Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).*
Avpalvopar : one eAvpawopnv; dep.mid.; (Avpyinjury,
ruin, contumely); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down: 1.
to affix a stigma to, to dishonor, spot, defile, (Ezek. xvi. 25 ;
Prov. xxiii. 8; 4 Mace. xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame-
fully or with injury, to ravage, devastate, ruin: €dupaiveto
ry exkAnaiay, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per-
secutor, [A. V. made havock of}, Acts viii. 3.*
Autéw, -@; 1 aor. €A’mnoa; pf. AeAvmnKa; Pass., pres.
Avrovpat; 1 aor. eAvTN|Onv; fut. Av@nOnoopat; (Avmn);
[fr. Hes. down]; to make sorrowful; to affect with sad-
ness, cause grief; to throw into sorrow: twa, 2 Co. ii. 2,
6; vii. 8; pass. Mt. xiv. 9; xvii. 23; xviii. 31; xix. 22;
Nvajee se Mk. x. 22): xive19s. dn. xvi. 205 xxi-17%: 2'Co.
Avoavias
ii. 4; 1 Th. iv. 13; 1 Pet. i. 6; joined with adnpovei»,
Mt. xxvi. 37; opp. to yalpew, 2 Co. vi. 10; xara Oedv, in
a manner acceptable to God [cf. W. 402 (375)], 2 Co.
vii. 9, 11; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend: td mvevpa
7d dytov, Eph. iv. 30 (see mvetpa, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one
uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv.15. [Comp.: ovA-
Auréw. Syn. see Opnvéa, fin.]*
Avan, -ns, 9, [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], sorrow, pain,
grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi.6; 2Co. ii.7; opp.
to xapd, Jn. xvi. 20; Heb. xii. 11; Avany exw (see exo,
I. 2¢. p. 267"), Jn. xvi. 21 sq.; Phil. ii. 27; with addition
of awd and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3; A. pol €or, Ro. ix.
2; ev Avan EpxerOa, of one who on coming both saddens
and is made sad, 2 Co. ii. 1 (cf. Aura ipas, vs. 2; and
AUmnv Ex@, VS. 3); amd THs Avmns, for sorrow, Lk. xxii.
45; ex Avmns, with a sour, reluctant mind [ A. V. grudg-
ingly], (opp. to idapds), 2 Co. ix. 7; 4 kata Oedv Avm,
sorrow acceptable to God, 2 Co. vii. 10 (see Auméw), and
#) To Kéopov AUmn, the usual sorrow of men at the loss of
their earthly possessions, ibid.; objectively, annoyance,
affliction, (Hdt. 7, 152): Avmas imopépew [R. V. griefs ],
1 Pet. ii. 19.*
Avoavias, -ov, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy,
who from B.c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot
of Mount Lebanon, and was put to death B.c. 34 at the
instance of Cleopatra: Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3;
1545 lis bajol, 13,0) cfd. j215°9,02- 2. a tetrarch
of Abilene (see ’ABiAnvn), in the days of John the Bap-
tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned
by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa
I. and Herod Agrippa II., Josephus mentions 7 Avaaviov
retpapxia (antt. 18, 6, 10, cf. 20, 7,1), BaowWeia 4 rod
Avoaviov xadovpevn (bd. j. 2, 11, 5), ABiAa 9 Avoaviov
(antt. 19, 5, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that
in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be
meant, and that the region which he governed continued
to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred-
ner, Strauss, Gfrorer, Weisse), denying that there ever
was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into
error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly-
sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that
he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of
Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by
the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8,
expressly distinguishes Chalcis from the tetrarchy of
Lysanias; nor is it probable that the region which Ly-
sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only six years
took its name from him ever after. Therefore it is more
correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where
the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly-
sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be
meant; and that he is identical with the one spoken of
by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Abilene; Wieseler in
Herzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitriige zur richtig. Wiirdi-
gung d. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204]; Bleek, Synopt. Er
klir. u.s. w.i. p. 154 sq.; Aneucker in Schenkel i. p. 26 sy.5
Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in
Riehm s. v.; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 79 saq.$
Avoiae
Renan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d’ Abilene (in the Mé-
moires de l Acad. des inscrip. et belles-lettres for 1870,
Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 49-84); BB.DD. s. v.].*
Avoias, -ov, 6, (Claudius) Lysias, a Roman chiliarch
[A. V. ‘chief captain?]: Acts xxiii. 26; xxiv. 7 [Rec.],
22. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]*
Avots, -ews, 7, (Avo), [fr. Hom. down], a loosing of any
bond, as that of marriage; hence once in the N. T. of
divorce, 1 Co. vii. 27.*
Avoitedéw, -G; (fr. AvowreAns, and this fr. Avw to pay,
and 7a réAn [ef. réeXos, 2]); [fr. Hdt. down]; prop. to
pay the taxes; to return expenses, hence to be useful, ad-
vantageous ; impers. AvotreAei, it profits; foll. by 7 (see
7}, 3 £.), it is better: tui foll. by ei, Lk. xvii. 2.*
Avcrpa, -as, 7, and [in Acts xiv. 8; xvi.2; 2 Tim. iii.
11] -v, rd, (see AvSda), Lystra, a city of Lycaonia: Acts
xiv. 6, 8, 21; xvi. 1 sq.; 2 Tim. iii. 11. (Cf. reff. in
Bp. Lahtft. on Col. p. 1.]*
Nirpoyv, -ov, 7d, (AUw), Sept. passim for 795, mde, rs,
ete.; the price for redeeming, ransom (paid for ‘slaves,
Lev. xix. 20; for captives, Is. xlv. 13; for the ransom
of a life, Ex. xxi. 30; Num. xxxv. 31 ae avtt ToAAG»y,
to liberate many from the misery and penalty of their
sins, Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45. (Pind., Aeschyl., Xen.,
Plat., al.) *
Autpéw, -@: Pass., 1 aor. edutpadny ; Mid., pres. inf.
Aurpovcba; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. Aurpwanrar; (AUTpor,
q: v-); Sept. often for Osa and 713 ; 1. to release
on receipt of ransom : Plat. Theaet. p- 165 e.; Diod. 19,
73; Sept., Num. xviii. 15, 17. 2. to redeem, liberate
by payment of ransom, [(Dem., al.)], generally expressed
by the mid.; univ. to liberate: twa dpyvpie, and likewise
ex with the gen. of the thing; pass. éx r7s paraias ava-
otpopis, 1 Pet.i.18; Mid. to cause to be released to one’s
self (ef. W. 254 (238) ] by payment of the ransom, i. e. to
redeem; univ. to deliver: in the Jewish theocratic sense,
tov “Iopan\, viz. from evils of every kind, external and
internal, Lk. xxiv. 21; amd mdaons avopias, Tit. ii. 14 [ef.
W. § 30, 6 a.J]; twa ex, spoken of God, Deut. xiii. 5;
2S. vil. 234 Hos. xins 143*
Adtpwors, -ews, 7, (AuTpdw), a ransoming, redemption:
prop. aixypak@rov, Plut. Arat. 11; for mx, Lev. xxv.
[29],48; univ. deliverance, paiehapiont in the theocratic
sense (see Autpdw, 2 [cf. Graec. Ven. Lev. xxv. 10, etc. ;
Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9]): Lk. i. 68; ii. 38; specifically, re-
demption from the penalty of sin: Heb. ix. 12. [(Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 12, 7; ‘Teaching’ 4, 6; etc.)]*
Autpwrys, -0v, 6, (AuTpdw), redeemer; deliverer, liber-
ator: Acts vii. 35; [Sept. Lev. xxv. 31, 32; Philo de
sacrif. Ab. et Cain. § 37 sub fin.]; for 5x3, of God, Ps.
XViii. (xix.) 15; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 35. Not found in prof.
auth.*
Avuxvla, -as, 7, a later Grk. word for the earlier Avxviov,
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313 sq.; [Wetst.on Mt.v.15; W.
24]; Sept. for 730; a@ (candlestick) lampstand, cathe
labrum: Mt.v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33]; Heb.
ix. 2; the two eminent prophets who will precede Christ’s
return from heaven in glory are likened to ‘ candlesticks,’
384
Aa
Rev. xi. 4 [B. 81 (70); W. 536 (499)]; to the seven
‘candlesticks’ (Ex. xxv. 37 [A. V. lamps ; ef. B. D. (esp.
Am. ed.) s. v. Candlestick]) also the seven more con
spicuous churches of Asia are compared in Rev. i. 12 sq.
20; li. 1; xwety tHv Avxviav Tuwds (exKAnoias) €k TOD TdmoU
airns, to move a church out of the place which it has
hitherto held among the churches; to take it out of the
number of churches, remove it altogether, Rev. ii. 5.*
AdxXVos, -ov, 6, Sept. for 43, [fr. Hom. down]; a lamp,
candle [?], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat.
candelabrum), [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlvi.; Becker,
Charicles, Sc. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 156 n.5)]: Mt. v. 153
Mk. iv. 21; [Lk. xi. 36]; xii. 35; Rev. xxii. 5; gas
Avxvov, Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to pas HAiov, xxii. 5 LT Tr
WH; drew ddxvov ([LK. viii. 16; xi. 33; xv. 8], see
dxtw, 1). Toa“lamp” are likened — the eye, 6 Avxvos
Tov g@paros, i. e. which shows the body which way to
move and turn, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34; the prophecies of
the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowl-
edge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven
down even to the time when by the Holy Spirit that same
light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts
of men, the light by which the prophets themselves had
been enlightened and which was necessary to the full per-
ception of the true meaning of their prophecies, 2 Pet.
i. 19; to the brightness of a lamp that cheers the be-
holders a teacher is compared, whom even those rejoiced
in who were unwilling to comply with his demands, Jn.
v. 835; Christ, who will hereafter illumine his follow-
ers, the citizens of the heavenly kingdom, with his own
glory, Rev. xxi. 23.*
Avw; impf. €Avov; 1 aor. €Avoa; Pass., pres. Avopat;
impf. éAvdpunv ; pf. 2 pers. sing. AcAvoat, ptep. AeAupevos; 1
aor. €AvOnv; 1 fut. AvOnconat; fr. Hom. down; Sept. sev-
eral times for Md to open, A and Chald. xyw (Dan.
ii, 2557 Vv. 12). 10 Upose, Te. 1. to loose any person
(or thing) tied or fastened: prop. the bandages of the
feet, the shoes, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27; Acts
[ xiii. 25]; vii. 33, (so for ow to take off, Ex. iii. 5; Josh.
v.15); m@dov (dedenévov), Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2, [3 L
mrg.], 4 sq.; Lk. xix. 30 sq. 33; bad angels, Rev. ix.
14 sq.; tov Boov dxd ths parvns, Lk. xiii. 15; trop. of
husband and wife joined together by the bond of matri-
mony, A€Avoat awd yuvakds (opp. to dedeaat yuvarki),
spoken of a single man, whether he has already had a
wife or has not yet married, 1 Co. vii. 27. 2. to loose
one bound, i. e. to unbind, release from bonds, set free:
one bound up (swathed in bandages), Jn. xi. 44; bound
with chains (a prisoner), Acts xxii. 30 (where Rec. adds
amd trav Secpav); hence i. q. to discharge from prison,
let go, Acts xxiv. 26 Rec. (so as far back as Hom.); in
Apocalyptic vision of the devil (kexdecopévov), Rev. xx.
3; éx rhs puAakis av7ov, 7; metaph. to free (azo deopov)
from the bondage of disease (one held by Satan) by
restoration to health, Lk. xiii. 16 ; to release one bound
by the chains of sin, ée rév duapriav, Rev. i. 5 L T Tr
WH (see Aova fin. [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.]). 3. to loosen,
undo, dissolve, anything bound, tied, or compacted to-
Avo 3885
gether: the seal of a book, Rev. v. 2, [5 Rec.]; trop.,
rov Seopov Tis yAwoons Twés, to remove an impediment
of speech, restore speech to a dumb man, Mk. vii. 35
(Justin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nomen Battos propter linguae
obligationem fuit; 6 linguae nodis solutis loqui primum
coepit); an assembly, i. e. fo dismiss, break up: rhv
suvaywynv, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (dyopny, Hom. Il. 1, 305;
Od. 2, 257, etc.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; tiv orpariav, Xen.
Cyr. 6,1, 2); of the bonds of death, Avew tas ddivas Tod
Oavdrov, Acts ii. 24 (see ddiv). Laws, as having bind-
ing force, are likened to bonds; hence dvetv is i. q. to
annul, subvert; to do away with; to deprive of authority,
whether by precept or by act: évroAnv, Mt. v. 19; ropv
vouov, Jn. Vii. 23; 17d odBBarov, the commandment con-
cerning the sabbath, Jn. v.18; ryv ypapny, Jn. x. 35; cf.
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 17; [on the singular reading Aver rév
"Inoodv, 1 Jn. iv. 3 WH mrg. see Westcott, Com. ad loc.];
by a Chald. and Talmud. usage (equiv. to 1x, NW [cf
Maryos
W. 32]), opp. to dé (q. v. 2 ¢.), to declare lawful: Mt.
Xvi. 19; xviii. 18, [but cf. Weiss in Meyer 7te Aufl. ad
Il. ee.]. to loose what is compacted or built together,
to break up, demolish, destroy: prop. in pass. éAveto %
mpupva, was breaking to pieces, Acts xxvii. 41; tov vadv,
Jn.ii. 19; 7d weadrorxor rov ppaypov, Eph. ii. 14 (7a reiyn,
1 Esdr.i. 52; yépupay, Xen. an. 2, 4, 17 sq.); to dissolve
something coherent into parts, to destroy: pass., [rovrer
mavrav Avopevar, 2 Pet. iii. 11]; ra orotyeia (kavoovpeva),
2 Pet. iii. 10; odpavoi (mupovpevor), ib. 12; metaph. to
overthrow, do away with: ta Epya rod diaBcrov, 1 In. iii.
8. [Comp.: dva-, drro-, d1a-, éx-, émt-, kaTa-, Tapa-Ava. | *
Aats [WH Aais], -idos, 7, Lois, a Christian matron, the
grandmother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.*
Adr, 6, (0i9 a covering, veil), [indecl.; cf. B.D.], Lot,
the son of Haran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27,
313 xii. 4 sqq.; xiil. 1 sqq.; xiv. 12 sqq.; xix. 1 sqq.):
LK. xvii. 28 sq. 32; 2 Pet. ii. 7.*
M
[M, p: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et
Alex. p. 130 sq.) retention in such forms as Afmpouat, ave-
Ahugen, TpocwmoAhuTTns, avddnuyis, and the like, see (the
several words in their places, and) W. 48; B. 62 (54); esp.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 72; Kuenen and Cobet, Praef. p. lxx., Scriv-
ener, Collation ete. p. lv. sq., and Introd. p. 14; Fritzsche, Rom.
vol. i. p. 110; on -u- or -uu- in pf. pass. pteps. (e. g. dreorpap-
pévos, Teptpepaumevos, etc., see each word in its place, and)
ef. WH. App. p. 170 sq., on the dropping of uw in éumlrAnm,
_ éumimpaw, see the words. |
Madé, 6, (YD to be small), Maath, one of Christ’s
ancestors: Lk. iii. 26.*
Mayasdv, see the foll. word.
May$aA4, a place on the western shore of the Lake of
Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards
the north; according to the not improbable conjecture
of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 267) identical with bx-4 30
(i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of
Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38); in the Jerus. Talmud 5130
(Magdal or Migdal); now Medschel or Medjdel, a
wretched Mohammedan village with the ruins of an an-
cient tower (see Win. RWB. s. v.; Robinson, Palest. ii.
p- 396 sq.; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 661; Aneucker in
Schenkel iv. p. 84; [Hackett in B.D. s. v.;| Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]): Mt. xv. 39 RG, with
the var. reading (adopted by LT Tr WH [cf. WH. App.
p- 160]), Mayadavy, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. Ps sk Digs ae
either of these forms was the one used by the Evangelist
it could very easily have been changed by the copyists
inte the more familiar name Mayéada.*
MaySarnvh, -7s, 7, (Maydadd, q. v.), Magdalene, a
woman of Magdala: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61; xxviii. 1; Mk.
xv. 40, 475" xvi. 1,9; LK. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25;
Rexel Gee
[Mayedav (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see ‘Appayedav. |
payela (T WH ayia, see I, «), -as, 7, (payos, q- V-),
magic; plur. magic arts, sorceries: Acts viii.11. (The-
ophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
payetw; (pudyos); to be a magician; to practise magical
arts: Acts viii. 9. (Hur. Iph. 1338; Plut. Artax. 3, 6,
and in other auth.) *
payla, see payeta.
payos, -ov, 6, (Hebr. 39, plur. 0°32; a word of Indo-
Germanic origin; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 766; J. G.
Miller in Herzog viii. p. 678; [ Vaniéek, Fremdworter,
s.v.; but the word is now regarded by many as of Baby-
lonian origin; see Schrader, Keilinschriften u.s.w. 2te
Aufl. p. 417 sqq.]); fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; Sept.
Dan. ii. 2 and several times in Theodot. ad Dan. for
WN; a magus; the name given by the Babylonians
(Chaldwans), Medes, Persians, and others, to the wise
men, teachers, priests, physicians, astrologers, seers, in-
terpreters of dreams, augurs, soothsayers, sorcerers etc. ;
cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; J. G. Miiller in Herzog 1. ec. pp.
675-685; Holtzmann in Schenkel iv. p. 84 sq.; [BB.DD.
s. v. Magi]. In the N. T. the name is given L.
to the oriental wise men (astrologers) who, having dis-
covered by the rising of a remarkable star [see aornp,
and ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 209 sqq.] that
the Messiah had iust been born, came to Jerusalem to’
Mayoy
worship him: Mt. ii. 1, 7, 16. 2. to false prophets
and sorcerers: Acts xiii. 6, 8, cf. viii. 9, 11.*
Mayy, 6, see Tay.
Madiép, 7, (Hebr. pq [i. e. ‘strife’]), Midian [in
A. V. (ed. 1611) N. T. Madian], prop. name of the ter-
ritory of the Midianites in Arabia; it took its name
from Midian, son of Abraham and Keturah (Gen. xxv.
1.sq.): Acts vii. 29.*
patds, -ov, 6, the breast: of a man, Rev. i. 13 Lchm.
[(see paords). From Hom. down.]*
pabyrevw: 1 aor. euabnrevoa; 1 aor. pass. euabnrevOnv ;
(panrns) ; 1. intrans. tivi, to be the disciple of
one; to follow his precepts and instruction: Mt. xxvii. 57
RG WH nrg,, cf. Jn. xix. 38 (so Plut. mor. pp. 832 b.
(vit. Antiph. 1), 837 ¢e. (vit. Isocr. 10); Jamblichus, vit.
Pythag. c. 23). 2. trans. (cf. W. p. 23 and § 38,
1; [B. § 131, 4]) to make a disciple; to teach, instruct:
ria, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21; pass. with a dat. of
the pers. whose disciple one is made, Mt. xxvii. 57 LT
Tr WH txt. ; pabrrevdeis eis THY Bactrelay TeV oup. (see
ypapuparevs, 3), Mt. xiii. 52 Rec., where long since the
more correct reading t7 Bac. ray ovp. was adopted, but
without changing the sense; [yet Lchm. inserts év].*
pabnrys, -ov, 6, (uavOavw), a learner, pupil, disciple:
univ., opp. to dudacxados, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 40; revds,
one who follows one’s teaching: "Iwdvvov, Mt. ix. 14;
Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; tov Bapic., Mt. xxii. 16 ;
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v.33; Matoéos, Jn. ix. 28; of Jesus,—
in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews
who favored him, joined his party, became his adher-
ents: Jn. vi. 66; vil.3; xix. 38; 6ydos pabntav adrod,
Lk. vi. 17; of ps. avtov ixavoi, Lk. vii. 11; dmav rd rAnOos
tov pad. Lk. xix. 37; but especially the twelve apostles :
Mite xo Us) i pt. Wes Mik en 27 + kswill9 3 ni.
2; iii. 22, and very often; also simply of paOnrai, Mt.
xiii. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [Rec.],
etc.; in the Acts of pa@nrai are all those who confess
Jesus as the Messiah, Christians: Acts vi.1 sq. 7; ix. 19;
xi. 26, and often; with rovd cupiov added, Actsix.1. The
word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the
N. T., nor in the Apocalypse; in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt.],
Arstph., Xen., Plato, down.
palyrpta, -as, 7, (a fem. form of pabyrys; cf. Wadrrns,
WaArpua, etc.,in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 425), a female dis-
ciple; i. q. a Christian woman: Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2,
52; Diog. Laért. 4, 2; 8, 42.)*
[Ma0@a8las, see Marradias. |
Mal@aios, Maf@dv, see MarOatos, Maréav.
Maé@ar, see Mar@ar.
Mofovedda, TWH Madoucada [cf. Tdf. Proleg.
103], 6, (nowann man of a dart, fr. 1n, construct aa
of the unused nn a man, and nov a dart (ef. B. D. s.
v.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of
Noah (Gen. v. 21): Lk. iii. 37.*
Maivéay (TTr WH Mevva), indecl., (Lchm. Meévvas,
gen. Mevva), 6, Menna or Menan, [A. V. (1611) Menam],
the name of one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm.
br. rov M.]}.*
386
paxpav
patvonat; [fr. Hom. down]; to be mad, to rave: said of
one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right
mind, Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to
cwoppocivns pnpara dropbeyyerOa, Acts xxvi. 25; joined
with daipdmov éxey, Jn. x. 20. [Come.: éu-paivopa. | *
pakapitw; Attic fut. waxapid [cf. B. 37 (32)]; (paxd-
pwos); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for wwis; to pronounce
blessed : twd, Lk. i. 48; Jas. v. 11 (here Vulg. beatifico).*
HaKkdptos, -a, -ov, (poetic wdkap), [fr. Pind., Plat. down],
blessed, happy: joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 11;
vi. 15 (cf. pdkapes Oeoi in Hom. and Hes.); édmis, Tit.
ii. 13; as a predicate, Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 14; iv.
14; jyovpai Twa pax. Acts xxvi. 2; pakap. év Tim, Jas. i.
25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be
pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptcp.
taking the place of the subject, fakaptos 6 etc. (Hebr.
79 VWs, Ps. i.1; Deut. xxxiii. 29, ete.) blessed the man,
oe etc. [W. 551 (512 sq.)]: Mt. v. 3-11; Lk. vi. 20-
; dn. xx. 29: Rev. 1.3: xvi. 15¢ xix. 9 xx65 =xu.
ne by the addition to the noun of a ae. which takes
the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq.;
Rev. xiv. 13; foll. by és with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6;
Lk. vii. 23; xiv. 15; Ro. iv. 7 sq. 5 the subject noun in-
tervening, Lk. xli. 37,43; xxiii. 29; Jas.i.12; pax....
ért, Mt. xiii. 16; xvi. 17; Lk. xiv. 14; foll. by éay, Jn.
xiii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 40. [See Schmidt oy 18% Jai]
paKapirpds, -0v, 6, (uaxapitw), declaration of blessed-
ness: Ro. iv.9; Gal. iv. 15; Aéyew Tov pak. Twos, to utter
a declaration of blessedness upon. one, a fuller way of say-
ing paxapifew tud, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6.
(Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d.; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34]; Plut.
mor. p. 471 c.; eccles. writ.) *
MaxéSovia, -as, 7 [on use of art. with cf. W. § 18, 5 a.
c.], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly
and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the Aigean Sea,
on the W. by Illyria, and on the N. by Dardania and
Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)]: Acts xvi. 9 sq. 12;
KVL; xix. 21 sq.: ox. 1,5. Ro. xv. 265.1 Cosmvino:
2) Cons al Geyai. WS) vile ole) Wills dosed. 09) coals ntlent veined
Th. d..7 SG.) 15-g10; ols Linge
MaxkeSav, -dvos, 6, a Macedonian: Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B.
§ 123, 8 Rem.]; xix. 29; xxvii. 2; 2 Co. ix. 2, 4*
pakeddoyv, -ov, 7d, a Lat. word, macellum [ prob. akin to
pax-n; Vanicek p. 687 (cf. Plut. as below) ], a place where
meat and other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro-
vision-market, [A. V. shambles]: 1Co. x. 25. (Dio Cass.
61, 18 rHv adyopay rev dev, Td paxedAov; [Plut. ii. p. 277 d.
(quaest. Rom. 54) ].) *
paxpdv (prop. fem. acc. of the adj. paxpds, sc. d8dv, a
long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept.
for pir, [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a great way: absol.,
aréxew, Lk. xv. 20; of the terminus to which, far hence,
e€aroorede oe, Acts xxii. 21; with dé twos added, Mt.
viii. 30; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. dé]; Jn. xxi. 8; rov Ocdv...
ov paxpav amd évds éxdoTov nua wmdpyxorra, i. e. who is
near every one of us by his power and influence (so that
we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from with-
out), Acts xvii. 27; of eis paxpday [cf. W. 415 (387)]
paxpobev
those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions,
j. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, cf. Is. ii. 2 sqq.; Zech. vi.
15. metaph. od paxpdy ef dro ths Bac. Tov Oeod, but little
is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God,
or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine king-
dom, Mk. xii. 343 of moré évres paxpav (opp. to ot éyyis),
of heathen (on the sense, see éyyis, 1 b.), Eph. ii. 13;
also of paxpay, ib. 17.*
paxpdbev, (yaxpos), adv., esp. of later Grk. [Polyb.,
al.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93]; Sept. for pynyn, pin,
ete.; from afar, afar: Mk. viii. 3; xi. 13; Lk. xviii. 13;
xxii. 54; xxiii. 49; with the prep. dré prefixed (cf. W.
422 (393); § 65, 2; B. 70 (62)): Mt. xxvi. 58 [here
Tom. WH br. dro]; xxvii. 55; Mk. v. 65 xiv. 54; xv.
40; Lk. xvi. 23; Rev. xviii. 10, 15,17; also LT Tr WH
in Mk. xi. 18; LT Trmrg. WH in Lk. xxiii. 49; T Tr
WH in Mk. viii. 3, (Ps. cxxxvii. (cxxxviii.) 6; 2 K. xix.
25 cod. Alex.; 2 Esdr. iii. 13).*
paxpobupéw, -@; 1 aor., impv. paxpobvunoor, ptcp. waxpo-
Oupnoas; (fr. paxpddupos, and this fr. paxpds and @upos) ;
to be of a long spirit, not to lose heart; hence 1. to
persevere patiently and bravely (i. q. kaprep@, so Plut. de
gen. Socr. c. 24 p. 593 f.; Artem. oneir. 4, 11) in endur-
ing misfortunes and troubles: absol., Heb. vi. 15; Jas.
v. 8; with the addition of éws and a gen. of the desired
event, ib. 7; with ei and a dat. of the thing hoped for,
ibid.; add, Sir. ii. 4. 2. to be patient in bearing the
offences and injuries of others; to be mild and slow in
avenging; to be long-suffering, slow to anger, slow to pun-
ish, (for ¥ 77, to defer anger, Prov. xix. 11): absol.
1 Co. xiii. 4; mpds twa, 1 Th. v.14; emt with dat. of pers.
(see émi, B. 2 a. 8.), Mt. xviii. 26, 29 [here L Tr with the
acc., so Tr in 26; see emi, C. I. 2g. B.]; Sir. xviii. 11;
xxix. 8; hence spoken of God deferring the punishment
of sin: els teva, towards one, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [here L T Tr
mrg. dud (q. v. B. II. 2 b. sub fin.)]; emi with dat. of
pers., Lk. xviii. 7; in this difficult passage we shall nei-
ther preserve the constant usage of paxpoOupeiv (see just
before) nor get a reasonable sense, unless we regard the
words én’ avrois as negligently (see adros, II. 6) referring
to the enemies of the éxAexr@v, and translate cal paxpobv-
pav em avrois even though he is long-suffering, indulgent,
to them; —this negligence being occasioned by the cir-
cumstance that Luke seems to represent Jesus as speak-
ing with Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22 (18) in mind, where é7’
avrois must be referred to dvedenuovev. The reading [of
LT Tr WH] kai paxpobupet én abrois; by which 76 paxpo-
Oupeiv is denied to God [cf. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac-
cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands
the notion of slowness on God’s part in avenging the right;
cf. De Wette ad loc.; [but to this it is replied, that the
denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as-
sumption of apparent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss)
ad loc. ].*
paxpoOupta, -as, 7, (uaxpodupos [cf. paxpobvpéw]), (Vulg.
longanimitas, etc.), i. e. 1. patience, endurance, con-
stancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear-
ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq.; avOpwmos dv
387
padXov
pndێmore THv Gdumiav airod mapa Oedv, dAXa pakpobvpiay,
Menand. frag. 19, p. 203 ed. Meineke [Wvol. iv. p. 238
Frag. comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]): Col. i. 11; 2 Tim.
iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64;
Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. lvii. 15; Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 5; cf. 1
Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer-
ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for DDR FS, Jer. xv.
15): Ro. ii. 4; ix. 22; 2Co. vi.6; Gal. v. 22; Eph. iv.
2; Col. iii. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [ef. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim.
iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
13, 1; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).*
[Syn. pakpodvula, brouorh (occur together or in the
same context in Col.i.11; 2 Cor. vi. 4,6; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jas. v.
10,11; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1): Bp.
Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. c.), “ The difference of meaning
is best seen in their opposites. While io. is the temper
which does not easily succumb under suffering, wax. is the
self-restraint which does not hastily retaliatea wrong. The
one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to
wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18; xvi. 32)... This distine-
tion, though it applies generally, is not true without excep-
tion”. ..; cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at
length) Trench, N. T. Syn. § liii.]
paxpoOdpws, adv., with longanimity (Vulg. longanimiter,
Heb. vi. 15), i. e. patiently: Acts xxvi. 3.*
paxpés, -d, -dv, [fr. Hom. down],long; of place, remote,
distant, far off: xapa, Lk. xv. 13; xix.12. of time, long,
lasting long: paxpa mpocevxopna, to pray long, make long
prayers, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx.
47.*
paKpo-x pdvios, -ov, (uaxpds and ypdvos), lit. ‘long-timed’”
(Lat. longaevus), long-lived: Eph. vi. 3. (Ex. xx. 12;
Deut. v. 16; very rare in prof. auth.) *
padakla, -as, 7, (wadakds) ; 1. prop. softness [fr.
Hdt. down]. 2. in the N. T. (like doOévera, dppw-
atia) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept.
for “FLA disease, Deut. vii. 15; xxviii. 61; Is. xxxviii. 9,
etc.); joined with vdaos, Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1.*
padakds, -7, -dv, soft; soft to the touch: tparia, Mt. xi.
8 RGLbr.; Lk. vii. 25, (ipariwy modureda@v xk. padakav,
Artem. oneir. 1,78; éo6s, Hom. Od. 23, 290; Artem.
oneir. 2,33; xtrov, Hom. Il. 2,42); and simply ra padaka,
soft raiment (see Aevkds, 1): Mt. xi. 8 TTrWH. Like
the Lat. mollis, metaph. and in a bad sense: effeminate, of
a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural
lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.;
[Diog. Laért. 7, 173 fin.]).*
Madedefd (Mededena, Tdf.), 6, (O87 praising God,
fr. Soa and 5x), Mahalaleel [A. V. Maleleel], son of
Cainan: Lk. iii. 37.*
pddto-ra, (superlative of the adv. zada), [fr. Hom. down],
adv., especially, chiefly, most of all, above all: Acts xx.
38; xxv. 26; Gal. vi. 10; Phil. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 10;
vy. 8, 17; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. 1.10; Philem. 16; 2 Pet.
ii. 10; pddcora yvoorns, especially expert, thoroughly
well-informed, Acts xxvi. 3.*
paddov (compar. of pada, very, very much), [fr. Hom.
down], adv., more, to a greater degree; rather; aI
added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a
pardov 388
greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree,
more, more fully, (Germ. in héherem Grade, Maasse); a.
words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the
ablative (dat.): moAA@ much, by far, Mk. x. 48; Lk.
xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the under-
lying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we
are indebted to Christ is far greater than that of the
ruin which came from Adam; for the difference between
the consequences traceable to Adam and to Christ is not
only one of quality, but of quantity also; cf. Riickert, Com.
on Rom. vol. i. 281 sq. [al. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Godet)
content themselves here with a logical increase, far
more certainly]); 2 Co. iii. 9,11; Phil. ii. 12; moo how
much, Lk. xii. 24; Ro. xi. 12; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14;
rocouTe by so much, dom by as much, (sc. paddov), Heb.
Ks 125: b. in comparison it often so stands that than
before must be mentally added, [A. V. the more, so much
the more}, as Mt. xxvii. 24 (uadAov OopuBos yiverat [but al.
refer this to 2 b. a. below]); Lk. v. 15 (Sujpxero padXov) ;
Jn. v. 18 (waddov e{nrovv); xix. 8; Acts v. 14; ix. 22;
Exai 2s 2.00. vii 73? 1 Dh:dvsit,: 105. 2) Pets.1. 10st
#adXov Kai paddor, Phil. i. 9; or the person or thing with
which the comparison is made is evident from what pre-
cedes, as Phil. iii. 4; it is added to comparatives, Mk.
Wilsd0's 2.0; Vil-loi TOAA® padrov xpetooor, Phil. i. 23 ;
see [ Wetstein on Phil. 1. c.]; W. § 35, 1 cf. 603 (561);
[B. § 123, 11]; to verbs that have a comparative force,
paddov &:adpépecv trios, to be of much more value than one,
Mt. vi. 26. paddov 7, more than, Mt. xviii. 13; paddov
with gen., rdvrwy ipa, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Xen. mem. 3, 12,
1). joined to positive terms it forms a periphrasis for a
comparative [cf. W. § 35, 2 a.], foll. by 7, as waxdprop p.
for paxaptwtepov, Acts xx. 35; add, 1 Co. ix.15; Gal. iv.
27; moAAG padXov avayxaia, 1 Co. xii. 22; sometimes paa-
Aov seems to be omitted before 7; see under 7, 3 f. Cc.
paddor 8€, what moreover is of greater moment, [ A. V. yea
rather]: Ro. viii. 34 (2 Mace. vi. 23). 2. it marks
the preference of one thing above another, and is to be
rendered rather, sooner, (Germ. eher, vielmehr, lieber); a.
it denotes that which occurs more easily than something
else, and may be rendered sooner, (Germ. eher): thus
TOAA® paddor in arguing from the less to the greater, Mt.
vi. 30; Ro.v.9sq.; Heb. xii. 9[here LT Tr WH wont p.];
also rokd [RG odd@] paddXov se. otk expevédpucéa, i. e.
much more shall we not escape (cf. W. p. 633 (588) note
CB. § 148, 3 b.]), or even évdixov pur barodociav An\ropeba
(Heb. ii. 2), or something similar (cf. Matthiae § 634, 3),
Heb. xii. 25. méa@ paddov, Mt. vii. 11; x. 25; Lk. xii.
28; Ro. xi. 12,24; Philem.16. ina question, od paddov;
(Lat. nonne potius?) [do not... more],1 Co. ix. 12. b.
it is opposed to something else and does away with
it; accordingly it may be rendered the rather (Germ.
vielmehr); a. after a preceding negative or prohibi-
tive sentence: Mt. x.6, 28; xxv.9; Mk. v. 26; Ro. xiv.
13; 1 Tim. vi. 2; Heb. xii. 13; paddov 8¢, Eph. iv. 28; v.
11. ovxi padAov; (nonne potius ?) not rather ete.? 1 Co.
Ww 2: vi.:% B. so that padXov belongs to the thing
which is preferred, consequently to a noun, not toa
pavOava
verb: Jn. iii. 19 (fyamnoay paddov Td oxédros H Td Pas,
i. e. when they ought to have loved the light they (hated
it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20); xii. 43; Acts iv.
19; v.29; 2 Tim. iii.4. that which it opposes and sets
aside must be learned from the context [cf. W. § 35, 4]:
Mk. xv. 11 (se. } rév’Inoodv) ; Phil. i. 12 (where the mean-
ing is, ‘so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis-
advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of
disciples is increased in consequence of it’), y. by
way of correction, waddov b€, nay rather; to speak more
correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (Joseph. antt. 15, 11, 3; Ael. v. h.
2, 13 and often in prof. auth.; cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch.
on Sap. p.176 sq.) e. _it does not do away with that
with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the
preference: more willingly, more readily, sooner
(Germ. Lieber), 0€\@ paddov and €dSoxd pao, to prefer,
1 Co. xiv. 5; 2 Co. v. 8, (BotAopat paddov, Xen. Cyr. 1
1,1); ¢pdovy, 1 Co. xiv. 1 (uadAov se. (nrodre) ; xpGpat,
1 Co. vii. 21.
Madxos (22 Grecized ; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr.
f. Luth. Theol., 1876, p. 605), -ov, 6, Malchus, a servant
of the high-priest: Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf. Hackett in B. D.
save =
poupn, -ns, 7 1. in the earlier Grk. writ. mother
(the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2.
in the later writ. ([Philo], Joseph., Plut., App., Hdian.,
Artem.) i. q. 174, grandmother (see Lob. ad Phryn. pp.
133-135 [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5; 4 Mace. xvi. 9.*
papovas (GL T Tr WH), incorrectly papnpovas (Rec.
[in Mt.]),-a [B. 20 (18); W. § 8, 1],6, mammon (Chald.
2/81, to be derived, apparently, fr. JDNS5 hence what is
trusted in [ef. Buxtorf, Lex. chald. talmud. et rabbin. col.
1217 sq. (esp. ed. Fischer p. 613 sq.); ace. to Gesenius
(Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. }j701 treasure (Gen. xliii. 23);
cf. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 269]),
riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi-
fied and opposed to God; cf. Phil. iii. 19); Lk. xvi. 9,
11. (“lucrum punice mammon dicitur,” Augustine [de
serm. Dom. in monte, I. ii. c. xiv. (§ 47)]; the Sept.
trans. the Hebr. 7198 in Is. xxxiii. 6 @yoavpol, and in
Paiccxxvis (xxxvii.) 3 mdoiros.) *
Mavany, 6, (D139 consoler), J/anaen, a certain prophet
in the church at Antioch: Acts xiii1. [See Hackett
in B. D. s. v.]*
Mavaccfis [Treg. Mavy. in Rev.], gen. and acc. -7
[B. 19 (17); W.§ 10,1; but see WH. App. p. 159°],
6, (MWD causing to forget, fr. Nv) to forget), Manas.
seh; _—si. the firstborn son of Joseph (Gen. xli. 51):
Rey. vii. 6. 2. the son of Hezekiah, king of Judah
(2 K. xxi. 1~18): Mt. i. 10.*
pav0dve; 2 aor. éuabov; pf. ptep. pepabnxas; Sept.
for Beye), [fr. Hom. down]; to learn, be apprised; a.
univ. : * abeal: to increase one’s knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 11;
2 Tim. iii. 7; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv.
31; ri, Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 85; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim.
iii. 14; Rev. xiv. 3; in Jn. vii. 15 supply aird; foll. by
an indir. quest., Mt. ix. 13; Xpordy, to be imbued with
the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20; ri foll. by amé w.
pavia
gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Mt. xxiv. 32;
Mk. xiii. 28; dé w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Mt. xi.
29; Col. i. 7; as in class. Grk. (cf. Kriiger § 68, 34, 1;
B. § 147, 5 [ef. 167 (146) and azo, II. 1 d.]); foll. by
mapa w. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 ef. Jn. vi. 45;
foll. by év w. dat. of pers., in one i. e. by his example [see
év, I. 3 b.], 1 Co. iv. 6 [ef. W. 590 (548 sq.); B. 394 sq.
(338) ]. b. i. q. to hear, be informed: foll. by ért, Acts
xxiii. 27; rt dwé twos (gen. of pers.), Gal. iii. 2 [see azo,
Tse Js ec. to learn by use and practice; [in the Pret. ]
to be in the habit of, accustomed to: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim.
v. 4; Tit. iii. 14; Phil. iv. 11, (Aeschyl. Prom. 1068; Xen.
an. 3, 2, 25); €uabev ad’ Sv énabe tiv imaxony, Heb. v. 8
[ef. W. § 68, 1 and dd, u. s.]. In the difficult passage
1 Tim. v. 13, neither apyai depends upon the verb pav6a-
vovot (which would mean “they learn to be idle”, or
“learn idleness”; so Bretschneider [ Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and
W. 347 (325 sq.); [ef. Stallbaum’s note and reff. on
Plato’s Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor meprepydpevor (“ they
learn to go about from house to house,” —so the majority
of interpreters; for, acc. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptep.
joined to the verb pavédvew and belonging to the subject
denotes what sort of a person one learns or perceives him-
self to be, as €uabev &yxvos ovca, “she perceived herself
to be with child,” Hdt. 1,5); but pavOavew must be taken
absolutely (see a. above) and emphatically, of what they
learn by going about from house to house and what it is
unseemly for them to know; cf. Bengel ad loc., and B.
§ 144, 17; [so Wordsworth in loc.]. [Comp.: xara-
pavOava. | *
pavia, -as, 7, (uatvoua), madness, frenzy: Acts xxvi.
24. [From Theognis, Hdt., down. ] *
pavva, rd, indecl.; [also] 7» pavva in Joseph. (antt. 3,
13,1 [ete.; wavvn, Orac. Sibyll. 7, 149]); Sept. 76 wav [also
76 pavva, Num. xi. 7] for Hebr. }1) (fr. the unused 139,
GB e-
Arab. Son to be kind, beneficent, to bestow liberally ;
whence the subst. up Prop. a gift [al. prefer the deriv.
given Ex. xvi. 15,31; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,6. The word
mannu is said to be found also in the old Egyptian; Ebers,
Durch Gosen u.s.w. p. 226; cf. “Speaker’s Commentary”
Exod. xvi. note]); manna (Vulg. in N. T. manna indecl. ;
in O. T. man; yet manna, gen. -ac,is used by Pliny [12,
14, 32, ete.] and Vegetius [Vet. 2, 39] of the grains of
certain plants); according to the accounts of travellers
a very sweet dew-like juice, which in Arabia and other
oriental countries exudes from the leaves [acc. to others
only from the twigs and branches; cf. Robinson, Pal.
i. 115] of certain trees and shrubs, particularly in the
summer of rainy years. It hardens into little white
pellucid grains, and is collected before sunrise by the in-
habitants of those countries and used as an article of food,
very sweet like honey. The Israelites in their journey
through the wilderness met with a great quantity of food
of this kind; and tradition, which the biblical writers
follow, regarded it as bread sent down in profusion from
heaven, and in various ways gave the occurrence the dig-
389
Mapiap
nity of an illustrious miracle (Ex. xvi. 12 sqq.; Ps.
Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 24; civ. (cv.) 40; Sap. xvi. 20); cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Manna; Knobel on Exod. p. 171 sqq.;
Furrer in Schenkel iv. 109 sq.; [Robinson as above,
and p. 590; Tischendorf, Aus dem heil. Lande, p. 54 sqq.
(where on p. vi. an analysis of diff. species of natural
manna is given after Berthelot (Comptes rendus heb-
dom. d. séances de l’acad. des sciences. Paris 1861, 2de
sémestre (30 Sept.) p. 583 sqq.); esp. Ritter, Erdkunde
Pt. xiv. pp. 665-695 (Gage’s trans. vol. i. pp. 271-292,
where a full list of reff. is given); esp. H. Renaud and
E. Lacour, De la manne du désert ete. (1881). Against
the identification of the natural manna with the miracu-
lous, see BB.DD. s. v.; esp. Riehm in his HWB.; Car-
ruthers in the Bible Educator ii. 174 sqq.]. In the N. T.
mention is made of a. that manna with which the
Israelites of old were nourished: Jn. vi. 31, 49, and R
L in 58; b. that which was kept in the ark of the
covenant: Heb. ix. 4 (Ex. xvi. 33) ; ce. that which
in the symbolic language of Rev. ii. 17 is spoken of as
kept in the heavenly temple for the food of angels and
the blessed; [see Sida, B. I’. p. 146°].*
pavrevonat; (wavris [a seer; allied to pavia, paivopat ;
ef. Curtius § 429]); fr. Hom. down; to act as seer; de-
liver an oracle, prophesy, divine: Acts xvi. 16 wavrevopeévn,
of a false prophetess [A. V. by soothsaying]. Sept. for
DDp, to practise divination; said of false prophets. [On
the heathen character of the suggestions and associa-
tions of the word, as distinguished fr. mpodyreva, see
Trench, N. T. Syn. § vi.] *
papaivw: 1 fut. pass. papavOncoua; fr. Hom. Il. 9,
212; 23, 228 on; to extinguish (a flame, fire, light, ete.) ;
to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass.
to wither, wilt, dry up (Sap. ii. 8 of roses; Job xv. 30).
Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, (véo@, Eur.
Ale. 203; 1@ Atwo, Joseph. b. j. 6, 5,1); 1. q. to have a
miserable end: Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig.
suggested by what he had just said (10) ; [B. 52 (46)].*
papavadd [so Lehm., but papay ada RG T Tr WH], the
Chald. words TAS NID, i.e. our Lord cometh or will
come: 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB.DD.; cf. Klostermann, Pro-
bleme ete. (1883) p. 220 sqq.; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 174;
Nestle in Theol. Stud. aus Wiirtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]*
papyapirns, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt. xiii. 45 sq.; 1 Tim. ii.
9; Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereL TWH
accent -pira, RG Tr -pira (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 101)];
Tovs papyapiras BahAew éurpocbev xolpwr, a proverb, i. e.
to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the
gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in-
competent as they are, through their hostility to the
gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt.
vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq.; Job xxviii. 18 sq.).*
Mapa, -as (Jn. xi. 1 [ef. B.17(15); WH. App. p. 156]),
9, (Chald. x07 mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis-
ter of Lazarus of Bethany: Lk. x. 38, 40 sq.; Jn. xi. 1,
5, 19-39; xii. 2. [On the accent cf. Kautzsch p. 8.]*
Maptdp indecl., and Mapia, -as, 9, (0°) ‘obstinacy,’
‘rebelliousness ’; the well-known prop. name of the sister
Maoxos
of Moses; in the Targums 0°99; cf. Delitzsch, Zeitschr.
f. luth. Theol. for 1877 p. 2 [Maria is a good Latin name
also]), Mary. The women of this name mentioned in
the N. T. are the foll. 1. the mother of Jesus Christ,
the wife of Joseph; her name is written Mapia [in an
oblique case] in Mt.i. 16,18; ii.11; Mk. vi. 3; Lk.i.
41; Actsi.14[RGL]; Mapidp in Mt. xiii. 55; Lk. i. 27,
30-56 [(in 88 Lmrg. Mapia)]; ii. 5, 16,34; [Acts i. 14
T Tr WH]; the reading varies between the two forms
in Mt. i. 20 [WH txt. -piav}; Lk. ii. 19 [L T Tr WH txt.
-pia}; so where the other women of this name are men-
tioned, [see Tf. Proleg. p. 116, where it appears that
in his text the gen. is always (seven times) -pias; the
nom. in Mk. always (seven times) -pia; that in Jn. -pidu
occurs eleven times, -pia (or -av) only three times, ete. ;
for the facts respecting the Mss., see (Tdf. u. s. and)
WH. App. p. 156]; cf. B. 17 (15). 2. Mary Mag-
dalene (a native of Magdala): Mt. xxvii. 56,61; xxviii.
iy Mikey. 20, 4575 xy. 1; 96 CLK: vill 2s) xxiv. ADs ein:
ob VEG SS SIN. ay ansy 3. the mother of James
the less and Joses, the wife of Clopas (or Alpheus) and
sister of the mother of Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 56, 613; xxviii.
ie Mk. xvi.40, 473 avi. the Lki xxiv.40sndmni xix25
(see "IdkwBos, 2). There are some, indeed, who, think-
ing it improbable that there were two living sisters of
the name of Mary (the common opinion), suppose that
not three but four women are enumerated in Jn. xix. 25,
and that these are distributed into two pairs so that 7
adedpr) THs pntpos Incod designates Salome, the wife of
Zebedee; so esp. Wieseler inthe Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1840, p. 648 sqq., [ef. Bp. Lghtft. com. on Gal., Dissert.
ii. esp. pp. 255 sq. 264] with whom Liicke, Meyer, Ewald
and others agree; in opp. to them cf. Grimm in Ersch
and Gruber’s Encykl. sect. 2 vol. xxii. p.1 sq. In fact,
instances are not wanting among the Jews of two living
brothers of the same name, e. g. Onias, in Joseph. antt.
12, 5,1; Herod, sons of Herod the Great, one by Mari-
amne, the other by Cleopatra of Jerusalem, Joseph. antt.
17,1, 3; b. j. 1, 28, 4; [cf. B. D.s. v. Mary of Cleophas ;
Bp. Lghtft. u. s. p. 264]. 4. the sister of Lazarus
and Martha: Lk. x. 39,42; Jn. xi. 1-45; xii. 3. 5:
the mother of John Mark: Acts xii. 12. 6. a cer-
tain Christian woman mentioned in Ro. xvi. 6.*
Mapxos, -ov, 6, Mark; acc. to the tradition of the church
the author of the second canonical Gospel and identical
with the John Mark mentioned in the Acts (see Iwavvns,
5). He was the son of acertain Mary who dwelt at Je-
rusalem, was perhaps converted to Christianity by Peter
(Acts xii. 11 sq.), and for this reason called (1 Pet. v. 13)
Peter’s son. He was the cousin of Barnabas and the
companion of Paul in some of his apostolic travels; and
lastly was the associate of Peter also: Acts xii. 12, 25;
xv. 37, 39; Col. iv.10; 2Tim.iv.11; Philem. 24 (23);
1 Pet v. 13, cf. Euseb. h. e. 2, 15 sq.; 3,39. Some, as
Grotius, [ Tillemont, Hist. Eccl. ii. 89 sq. 503 sq.; Patri-
tius, De Evangeliis 1. 1, c. 2, quaest. 1 (ef. Cotelerius, Patr.
Apost. i. 262 sq.)], Kienlen (in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843,
p. 423), contend that there were two Marks, one the
390
paprupes
disciple and companion of Paul mentioned in the Acts
and Pauline Epp., the other the associate of Peter and
mentioned in 1 Pet. v. 13; [ef. Jas. Morison, Com. on
Mk. Introd. § 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 10].*
p-Appapos, -ov, 6, 7, (uappaipw to sparkle, glisten); 1.
a stone, rock, (Hom., Eur.). 2. marble ({cf. Ep. Jer.
71], Theophr., Strabo, al.): Rev. xviii. 12.*
paptup, -upos, 6, See paprus.
paptupew, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. éuapripouy; fut. pap-
Tupnow; 1 aor. éuaptipyoa; pf. wepaptipynka; Pass., pres.
paptupovpat; impf. euaprupotuny; pf. wewaprvpnpat; 1 aor.
enaptupnOnyv; fr. [Simon., Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down;
to be a witness, to bear witness, testify, 1. e. to affirm that
one has seen or heard or experienced something, or that
(so in the N. T.) he knows it because taught by divine
revelation or inspiration, (sometimes in the N. T. the
apostles are said paprupeiv, as those who had been eye-
and ear- witnesses of the extraordinary sayings, deeds
and sufferings of Jesus, which proved his Messiahship ;
so too Paul, as one to whom the risen Christ had visibly
appeared; cf. Jn. xv. 27; xix. 35; xxi. 24; Acts xxiii.
11; 1 Co.xv. 15; 1Jn.i. 2, cf. Actsi. 22sq.; ii. 325 ii
V5.5. Ave 335. v. 82% ex. 39; 415) ai SS xxvii 16. ce
Westcott, (“Speaker’s”) Com. on Jn., Introd. p. xlv.
sq-]) 5 a. in general; absol. to give (not to keep
back) testimony: Jn. xv. 27; Acts xxvi. 5; foll. by 6re
recitative and the orat. direct., Jn. iv. 39; also preceded
by Aéyor, Jn. i. 32; paprupeiv eis with an acc. of the place
into (unto) which the testimony (concerning Christ) is
borne, Acts xxiii. 11 [see eis, A. I. 5 b.]; paprupa, in-
serted parenthetically (W. § 62, 2), 2 Co. viii. 3; i. q.
to prove or confirm by testimony, 1 Jn. y. 6 sq.; used of
Jesus, predicting what actually befell him, Jn. xiii. 21;
of God, who himself testifies in the Scriptures that a
thing is so (viz. as the author declares), foll. by the reci-
tative dr, Heb. vii. 17 R. apr. foll. by wepi w. gen. of
a pers., to bear witness concerning one: Jn.i. 7 sq.; mept
tov avOparov, concerning man, i. e. to tell what one has
himself learned about the nature, character, conduct, of
men, Jn. ii. 25 [see avOpwros, 1 a.]; mepi tevos, foll. by
direct disc., Jn. i. 15; the Scriptures are said to testify
mept Inood, i. e. to declare things which make it evi-
dent that he was truly sent by God, Jn. v. 39; God is said
to do the same, — through the Scriptures, ib. 37 cf. viii.
18; through the expiation wrought by the baptism and
death of Christ, and the Holy Spirit giving souls assur-
ance of this expiation, 1 Jn. v. 6-9; so John the Baptist,
as being a ‘ prophet’, Jn. v. 32; so the works which he
himself did, ib. 36 (there foll. by ér); x. 25; so the
Holy Spirit, Jn. xv. 26; the apostles, 27; so Christ him-
self mepi éavrod, Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. 18. epi w. gen.
of the thing, Jn. xxi. 24; mepi rod xaxov, to bring for-
ward evidence to prove 76 xakov, Jn, xviii. 23. with the
acc. of a cognate noun, paprupiay paprupety mepi W. a gen.
of the pers., Jn. v. 32; 1 Jn. v. 9 Rec.; 10, (ryv airny
paptupiav paptupeiv, Plat. Eryx. p. 399 b.; rv paprupiay
aitod fv TH apern paprupe, Epict. diss. 4, 8, 32 [cf. W.
225 (211); B. 148 (129)]); w. an ace. of the thing, #
paptupéw
testify a thing, bear witness to (of) anything: Jn. iii. 11,
32; supply adré in Jn. xix. 35; rwi m1, 1 In. i. 25 os
éuaptupyce . . . Xptorov, who has borne witness of (viz.
in this book, i. e. the Apocalypse) what God has spoken
and Jesus Christ testified (sc. concerning future events;
see Adyos, I. 2b. e.), Rev. i. 2; 6 paprupav radra he that
testifieth these things i. e. has caused them to be testified
by the prophet, his messenger, Rev. xxii. 20; parvpjoa
ipiv radra émi [L Trmrg. WH mrg. ev] rais éxxdnoias, to
cause these things to be testified to you in the churches
or for, on account of, the churches, Rev. xxii. 16,—
unless éxi be dropped from the text and the passage
translated, fo you, viz. the (seven) churches (of Asia
Minor), the prophet reverting again to i. 4; cf. De
Wette, Bleek, Diisterdieck, ad loc.; [al., retaining ézi,
render it over, concerning, cf. x. 11; W. 393 (368) c.; see
eri, B. 2 f. 8. fin.]. of testimony borne not in word but
by deed, in the phrase used of Christ paprupety rhv kadnv
dpodoyiav, to witness the good confession, to attest the
truth of the (Christian) profession by his sufferings and
death, 1 Tim. vi. 13, where cf. Hofmann. Pass.: Ro.
iii. 21 (a righteousness such as the Scriptures testify
that God ascribes to believers, cf. iv. 3). apr. foll. by
ére that, Jn. i. 34 [cf. W. 273 (256)]; [iv. 44]; xii. 17
[here R* Tr txt. WH dre]; 1 Jn. iv.14; wepi w. gen. of
a pers. foll. by dre, Jn. v. 36; vii. 7; ard twos, against
[so W. 382 (357), Mey., al.; yet see xara, I. 2 b.] one,
foll. by 6m, 1 Co. xv. 15. w. a dat. of the thing i.e.
for the benefit of, in the interests of, a thing [cf. B.
§ 133, 11]: rH adnOeia, In. v. 33; xviil. 37; cov tH GAn-
Geia (see dAnOeva, I.), to bear witness unto thy truth,
how great it is, 3 Jn. 3, 6; used of the testimony which
is given in deeds to promote some object: t@ Ady,
Acts xiv. 3 [T prefixes émi]; with a dat. (of a thing)
incommodi: paprupeire (T Tr WH paprupés ore) rois
épyos tav matepwv, by what ye are doing ye add to the
deeds of your fathers a testimony which proves that
those things were done by them, Lk. xi. 48. w. a dat.
of the person: to declare to one by testimony (by sug-
gestion, instruction), Heb. x. 15; foll. by direct dis-
course, Rev. xxii. 18 GLTTr WH; ‘10 testify to one
what he wishes one to testify concerning him: Acts xxii. 5;
foll. by ort, Mt. xxiii. 315 Jn. iii. 28; Ro. x. 2; Gal. iv.
15; Col. iv. 13; foll. by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 43; to
give testimony in one’s favor, to commend [W. § 31, 4b.;
B. as above]: Jn. iii. 26; Acts xiii. 22; xv. 83 pass.
paptupoupar witness is borne to me, it is witnessed of me
(W. § 39, 1; B. § 134, 4): foll. by dr, Heb. vii. 8; foll.
by ére recitative and direct disc., Heb. vii. 17 LT Tr
WH; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject, Heb. xi.
4 sq. b. emphatically; to utter honorable testimony,
give a good report: w.a dat. of the pers., Lk. iv. 22; éi
tut, on account of, for a thing, Heb. xi. 4 [here L Tr read
pap. emi kth. T@ Oe@ (but see the Comm.)]; pepaprvpyrai
tut id twos, 3 Jn. 12; pass. paptupovpae to be borne
(good) witness to, to be well reported of, to have (good)
testimony borne to one, accredited, attested, of good report,
approved: Acts vi. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1 sq.; 18,
391
bapTuplop
1; 19,1; 47,4); foll. by év w. a dat. of the thing in
which the commended excellence appears, 1 Tim. v. 10;
Heb. xi. 2, (émi run, for a thing, Athen. 1 p. 25 f.; [yet
cf. W. 387 (362) note]); dua twos, to have (honorable)
testimony borne to one through (by) a thing, Heb. xi.
39; umd w. gen. of the pers. giving honorable testimony,
Acts x. 22; xvi. 2; xxii. 12, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 38, 2;
44, 3; Ignat. ad Philad. c. 5, 2 cf. 11,1 and ad Eph. 12,
2; Antonin. 7, 62); w. dat. of the pers. testifying (i. q.
tnd twos), Acts xxvi. 22 RG. c. Mid., acc. to a
false reading, to conjure, implore: 1 Th. ii. 12 (11), where
T Tr WH have rightly restored paprupd evo. [Comp.:
€mt-, Ouv-ETrt-, KATA-, TUp-LapTuped. | *
paprupia, -as, 7, (uaprupea, q. V.), [fr. Hom.down]; 1.
a testifying: the office committed to the prophets of tes-
tifying concerning future events, Rev. xi. 7. 2.
what one testifies, testimony: univ. Jn. v. 34; in a legal
sense, of testimony before a judge: Lk. xxii. 71; Mk.
xiv. 56; w. gen. of the subj., Mk. xiv. 59; Jn. viii. 17;
1 Jn. v. 9; xara twos, against one, Mk. xiv. 55; in an
historical sense, of the testimony of an historian: Jn.
xix. 35; xxi. 24; in an ethical sense, of testimony con-
cerning one’s character: 3 Jn. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Tit. i.
13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting mat-
ters relating to the truth of Christianity: of the testi-
mony establishing the Messiahship and the divinity of
Jesus (see paprupéw, a.), given by —John the Bap
tist: Jn. i. 7; v.32; 9 papr. Tod Iwavvov, i.19; Jesus
himself, w. a gen. of the subj., Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. ;
God, in the prophecies of Scripture concerning Jesus
the Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him,
in the works done by him, Jn. v. 36; through the Holy
Spirit, in the Christian’s blessed consciousness of eternal
life and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism
[(cf. reff. s. v. Barricpa, 3)] and the expiatory death
of Christ, w. a subject. gen. rod Oeov, 1 Jn. v. 9-11, cf. 6-8 ;
the apostles, oov tiv papt. rept euod, Acts xxii. 18
[W. 137 (130)]; the other followers of Christ: Rev.
vi. 9; w.a gen. of the subj. adray, Rev. xii. 11; w.a
gen. of the obj. "Ijgov, ib. 17; xix. 10; xx. 4 (€yev this
papt. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in
bearing it, Rev. vi. 9; xii. 17; xix. 10, [see gyo, I. 1 d.J;
others, however, explain it to have the duty of testifying
laid upon one’s self); elsewhere the “testimony” of
Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things,
of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11,
32 sq.; 9 papt. "Incov, that testimony which he gave
concerning future events relating to the consummation
of the kingdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20); dia
THY p. Intov Xptcrod, to receive this testimony, ib. 9.*
Hapriptov, -ov, 7d, (udprup [cf pdprus]), [fr. Pind.,
Hat. down], Sept. for 1y,, 773!, oftener for n37y. (an or-
dinance, precept); most freq. for 1)19 (an assembly),
as though that came fr. 11y to testify, whereas it is fr.
1!) to appoint; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the
subj.: tis cuverdnoews, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj.: amo-
diSdvar ro pp THs avactacews “Incov, Acts iv. 33. b.
tov Xptorod, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30,
wapTvpoyat
1 a.]: the proclamation of salvation by the apostles
is so called (for reasons given under paprupéa, init.),
1 Co. i. 6; also rod Kupiov nuav, 2 Tim. i. 8; tod deod,
concerning God [W. u.s.], i. e. concerning what God
has done through Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co.
ii. 1 [here WH txt. pvornpiov]; w. the subject. gen. juar,
given by us, 2 Th.i. 10. eis papr. trav AaAnOnoopévor,
to give testimony concerning those things which were
to be spoken (in the Messiah’s time) i. e. concerning the
Christian revelation, Heb. iii. 5; ef. Delitzsch ad loc.
[al. refer it to the Mosaic law (Num. xii. 7, esp. 8) ;
cf. Richm, Lehrbegriff d. Heb. i. 312]. Cc. eis pup-
TUpiov avtois for a testimony unto them, that they may
have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or that:
e. g. that a leper has been cured, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44;
Lk. v. 14; that persons may get knowledge of something
the knowledge of which will be for their benefit, Mt. x.
18; xxiv. 14; Mk. xiii. 9; that they may have evidence
of their impurity, Mk. vi. 11; in the same case we find
eis papt.em aitovs, for a testimony against them [cf. emi,
C. I. 2¢. y. BB.], Lk. ix. 5; dmoBnoerat bpiv eis papr. it
will turn out to you as an opportunity of bearing testi-
mony concerning me and my cause, Lk. xxi. 13; eis p.
tpiv éorat, it will serve as a proof of your wickedness,
Jas. v. 3; by apposition to the whole preceding clause
(W. § 59, 9 a.), 7d papr. Katpots idiots, that which (to wit,
that Christ gave himself as a ransom) would be (the sub-
stance of) the testimony i. q. was to be testified (by the
apostles and theypreachers of the gospel) in the times
fitted for it, 1 Tim. ii. 6 [where Lchm. om. 76 papr.]; cf.
the full exposition of this pass. in Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom.
iii. p. 12 sqq. 1) oxyvy Tod paprupiov, Acts vii. 44; Rev.
xv. 5; in Sept. very often for 3yin-bms (see above),
and occasionally for niqyn brs, as Ex. xxxviii. 26;
Lev. xxiv. 3, etc.* :
paptipopar (fr. zdptup [cf. paprus]); 1. to cite a
witness, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Tragg.,
Thuc., Plato, sqq.); to affirm by appeal to God, to declare
solemnly, protest: radra, Plat. Phil. p. 47 ¢.; érv, Acts xx.
26; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God’s
name, exhort solemnly: twi, Acts xxvi. 22 LT Tr WH;
foll. by the ace. w. inf., Eph. iv. 17; eis 76 foll. by ace.
w. inf. [cf. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) T Tr WH.
[Comp.: d:a-, mpo-paprvpopat. | *
paptus (Aeolic pdprup, a form not found in the N. T.;
[etymologically one who is mindful, heeds; prob. allied
with Lat. memor, cf. Vaniéek p. 1201; Curtius § 466]),
~upos, acc. -upa, 6; plur. paprupes, dat. plur. paprvor; Sept.
for 1}3{; [Hes., Simon., Theogn., al.]; @ witness (one who
avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or
knows by any other means) ; a. ina legal sense:
Mt. xviii. 16; xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii.
58; 2 Co. xiii. 1; 1 Tim. v. 19; Heb. x. 28. b. in
an historical sense: Acts x. 41; 1 Tim. vi. 12; [2 Tim.
ii. 2]; one who is a spectator of anything, e. g. of a con-
test, Heb. xii. 1; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48;
Acts 1. 22% 114825) aii. 15)sfvai82\Gie Dr Wells: x2139)s
xxvi. 16; 1 Pet. v.1; w.a gen. of the possessor ‘one
392
aTatos
who testifies for one’, Actsi.8 LT Tr WH; xiii. 31; w
a gen. of the possessor and of the obj., Acts v. 32 Ree. ;
uadprupa eivai ti, to be a witness for one, serve him by
testimony, Acts i. 8 RG; xxii. 15; [Lk. xi. 48 T Tr
WH]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation
appeal is made; hence the formulas paprus pov éorw 6
Geds, Ro. i. 9; Phil. i. 8; eds paprvs, 1 Th. ii. 5; paprupa
Tov Oedv emtkadovpat, 2 Co. i. 23; byeis pdprupes K. 6 eds,
1 Th. ii. 10; the faithful interpreters of God’s counsels
are called God’s witnesses: Rev. xi. 3; Christ is reck-
oned among them, Rev.i. 5; iii. 14. ce. in an ethi-
cal sense those are called paprupes Incod, who after his
example have proved the strength and genuineness of
their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [cf
B. D. Am. ed. and Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Martyr]:
Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13; xvii. 6.*
pads, Doric for pagrés (q.v.): Rev. i. 13 Taf. [“ this
form seems to be Western” (Hort, App. p. 149)].
parocdopat (RG) more correctly paodopar (LT Tr
WH): impf. 3 pers. plur. éuacavro; (MAQ, paooa, to
knead) ; to chew, consume, eat, devour, (kpéas, Arstph.
Plut. 321; ra d€ppara rdv Ovpeav, Joseph. b. j. 6, 3, 3;
pi¢as €vA@v, Sept. Job xxx. 4, and other exx. in other
auth.) : éuacavro tas yAwooas aitav, they gnawed their
tongues (for pain), Rev. xvi. 10.*
paoriydw, -@, 3 pers. sing. paoriyot; fut. parrryace ;
1 aor. €uaotiywoa; (udoré); fr. Hdt.down; Sept. chiefly
for 13; to scourge; prop.: twa, Mt.x.17; xx.19; xxiii.
34; Mk. x. 34; Lk. xviii. 33; Jn. xix.1; [cf. B. D. s. v.
Scourging; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. excurs. xi.]. metaph.
of God as a father chastising and training men as chil-
dren by afflictions: Heb. xii. 6; cf. Jer. v. 3; Prov. iii.
12 ;- Judith viii. 27.*
parritw; i. q. paorryd@, q. v.; ted, Acts xxii. 25.
(Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. 11, and often in Hom.) *
paorié, -vyos, 7, a whip, scourge, (for viv, 1 K. xii. 11,
14; Prov. xxvi. 3): Acts xxii. 24; Heb. xi.36; metaph.
a scourge, plague, i.e. a calamity, misfortune, esp. as sent
by God to discipline or punish (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.)
33; with Ards added, Hom. Il. 12, 37; 13, 812; @eoo,
Aeschyl. sept. 607): of distressing bodily diseases, Mk.
iii. 10; v. 29, 84; Lk. vii. 21; 2 Macc. ix. 11.*
pacrdés, -ov, 6, (wacom to knead [more prob. akin to
paddw, Lat. madidus, ete.; ef. Vaniéek p. 693; Curtius
§ 456]), fr. Soph., Hdt. down; the breast (for tw, Job iii.
12; Cant. i. 13, etc.); plur., the breasts (nipples) of a man,
Rev. i. 13 RG Tr WH [here Tdf. pacOois (cf. WH. App.
p- 149°), Lehm. pagois]; breasts of a woman, Lk. xi. 27;
Xxi. 29"
[MaraGlas, see Marrafias. |
para.odoyla, -as, 7), (uaTaoddyos), vain talking, empty
talk, (Vulg. vaniloquium) : 1 Tim.i.6. (Plut. mor. p. 6 f.;
Porphyr. de abstin. 4, 16.) *
paratoddyos, -ov, 6, (udratos and Aéyw), an idle talker,
one who utters empty, senseless things: Tit. i. 10.*
pa&ravos, -aia (1 Co. xv. 17; [1 Pet. i. 18]), -atov, alsa
-os, -ov, (Jas. i. 26; Tit. iii. 9), [ef. WH. App. p.157; W.
§ 11, 1], (fr. pdrnv), Sept. for 9277, Nw, 31D (a lie), ete.;
“aTaLoTns
as in prof. auth. (Lat. vanus) devoid of force, truth, suc-
cess, result, [A.V. uniformly vain]: univ.: 7 Opnoketa, Jas.
i. 26; useless, to no purpose, n miotts, 1 Co. xv. 17; fool-
ish, Siadoyopoil, 1 Co. iii. 20; Cyrnoes, Tit. iii. 9; given
to vain things and leading away from salvation, dva-
orpogpn, 1 Pet. i. 18. ra paraa, vain things, vanities, of
heathen deities and their wor ship (939), Jer. ii. 5; x.3;
Saan al als 12> mopever Oat oriow tev par. 2 K. xvii.
be naa; paraa, Jer. vill. 19; eiSoAa, Deut. xxxii. 21 ;
Jer. xiv. 22): Acts xiv. 15. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix. °
para.orns, -7Tos, 1), (uatatos, q. v.), a purely bibl. and
eccles. word [(Pollux l. 6 c. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for ban
(often in Eccles.), also for SW, ete.; vanity; a. what
is devoid of truth and appropriateness: imépoyxa pata.o-
amros (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18. b. perverse-
ness, depravation: tov vods, Eph. iv. 17. c. frailty,
want of vigor: Ro. viii. 20.*
parade: (udraos); 1 aor. pass. euatamOnv; to make
empty, vain, foolish: €patawwOnoav ev trois diadoyiopois
aivtrav, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell
into error, Ro. i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 15; Jer. ii. 5; 1 Chr.
xxi. 8; [ete.]; nowhere in Grk. auth.) *
parny (accus. [ef. W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12] of parn,
i. q. paria, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Pind.,
Aeschyl. down, in vain, fruitlessly: Mt. xv. 9 and Mk.
vii. 7, after Isa. xxix. 13 Sept.*
Mar@aios (LT Tr WH Madéaios, cf. B. 8 (7); [WH.
App. 159°; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5 p. 562]), -ov
[B. 18 (16)], 6, (commonly regarded as Hebr. 71719 gift
of God, fr. }mr and A); but mrs is in Greek Marias,
and the analogy of the names »3n (fr. 1n a festival) in
Greek ’Ayyaios, 13} Zaxyxatos, and others, as well as the
FAS,
Syriac form of the name before us wdSo, [and its form
in the Talmud, viz. ‘sn or (NNN; Sanhedrin 43°; MWeu-
schen, N. T. ex Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to
adopt the Aramaic form ‘;7, and to derive that from
the unused sing. nD, a man, plur. on); hence i. q.
manly, ef. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723
‘sqq-), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards
an apostle of Jesus: Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. Mk. ii. 14; Lk. v.
27 sqq.; see Aevi, 4); Mt.x.3; Mk.iii.18; Lk. vi.15; Acts
i.13. Acc. to Papias (in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39) he wrote down
€Bpaidr: Siadextrw ra (kupiaxa) Adysa, i. e. the sayings of our
Lord; this collection of discourses, perhaps already re-
touched by some one else and translated into Greek, the
author of our first canonical Gospel combined with ac-
counts of the acts and sufferings of Christ, and so it came
to pass that this Gospel was ascribed by the church to
Matthew asits author. [But this theory seems to be ren-
dered unnecessary by the fact that Ady had already
come to denote “sacred oracles” i. q. iepa ypdappara,
Joseph. b. j. 6, 5, 4, or fepat ypadai, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
53,1; see the added reff. s. v. Adytov. Cf. Fisher, Super-
nat. Origin of Christianity, pp. 160-167; and reff. in
Schaff, Hist. of the Christ. Church, i. 622 sq.; Bleek,
Einl. ins N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 115 sq.]*
Marédv (LT Tr WH Madé6av [see reff. s. v. Mar6aios]),
393
paxyalpa
6, (}AD a gift), Matthan, one of Christ’s ancestors: Mt.
Blot
Maréar (Tdf. Ma06aé, [see reff. s. v. Mar6aios]), 6.
(ani, fr. 12), Matthat ; 1. one of Christ’s ances-
tors, the son of Levi: Lk. iii. 24. 2. one of the
ancestors of the man just spoken of: Lk. iii. 29 [here
Tr WII Maar (see as above) |.*
Mar@ias (T Tr WH Maé6ias [see reff. s. v. Mat@atos]),
-a [yet cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (see Maréaios), Matthias, the
apostle who took the place of Judas Iscariot: Acts i.
23, 26.*
Marrada, 6, (see the preceding names), Mattatha, the
son of Nathan and grandson of David: Lk. iii. 31.*
MarraOlas, -ov [ B. 18 (16) ], 6, Mattathias ; 1. one of
Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. Ma6a6iov (cf.
reff. s. v. Mar6aios, init.) ]. 2. one of the ancestors
of the man just mentioned : Lk. iii. 26 [Trmrg. Mara@iov].*
paxapa, gen. -as [so (with RG) Lehm. in Lk. xxi. 24]
and -ns, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lehm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts
xii. 2] and - (betw. which forms the codd. vary, ef. [ Seriv-
ener, Collation, ete. p. lvi.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH.
App. p. 156°]; W. 62 (61); B.11; Delitzsch on Heb. xi.
34 p. 584 note), 7, (akin to payn and Lat. mactare); a
a large knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh:
Hom., Pind., Hdt., al.; hence Gen. xxii. 6,10; Judg. xix.
29 Alex.,for NODND. 2. asmall sword, distinguished
fr. the large sword, the Soxdaia (Joseph. antt. 6, 9, 5 dzo-
réuver THY Kearny TH pouaia tH exeivov (Goliath’s), pa-
xatpav ovk éxwv avtés), and curved, for a cutting stroke;
distinct also fr. Eigos, a straight sword, for thrusting, Xen.
r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq.
used interchangeably. Inthe N. T. univ. a sword (Sept.
often for 39%) : as a weapon for making or repelling an
attack, Mt. xxvi. 47, 51,52, [55]; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq.;
Lk. xxii. 36, 38, 49,52; Jn. xviii.-10sq.; Acts xvi. 27;
Heb. xi. 37; Rev. vi. 4; xiii. 10, [14]; by a Hebraism,
oTopa paxaipas, the edge op the sword (171) *3, Gen. xxxiv.
26; Josh. viii. 24; 18. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, ete. [but in
the Sept. the leanne ar. Eihous or or. poucpaias is more
com.]): Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34; payatpa dicropos (see
Sicropos), Heb. iv. 12. of the sword as the instrument
of a magistrate or judge: death by the sword, Ro. viii.
353 dvaipeiv twa paxaipa, Acts xii. 2; rpv p. oper, to
bear the sword, is used of him to whom the sword has been
committed, viz. to use when a malefactor is to be pun-
ished; hence i. q. to have the power of life and death, Ro.
xiii. 4 (so Eidos, ibn Exew, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 7, 16;
vit. sophist. 1, 25, 2 (3), ef. Dion Cass. 42, 27; and in
the Talmud the king who bears the sword, of the Hebrew
king). Metaph. pdy., a weapon of war, is used for war,
or for quarrels and dissensions that destroy peace; so in
the phrase Badeivy payatpay ent thy yay, to send war on
earth, Mt. x. 34 (for which Lk. xii. 51 says S:apepeopdy) 5
i} pay. Too mvevparos, the sword with which the Spirit
subdues the impulses to sin and proves its own powe1 and
efficacy (which sword is said to be pjya Geod [cf. B. 128
(112)]), Eph. vi. 17 [on the gen. in this pass. cf. Ellicott
or Meyer ].*
pax
paxn, -ns, 9, [uaxyouat; fr. Hom. down], Sept. several
times for 1°), ]11D, ete.; a Sight, combat ; 1. of
those in arms, a batile. 2. of persons at variance,
disputants, etc., strife, contention; a quarrel: 2 Co. vii.
5; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Jas. iv.1; pyar voptxai, contentions
about the law, Tit. iii. 9.*
paxopar; impf. 3 pers. plur. €uaxovro ; [allied with pa-
xatpa; Curtius § 459; Vanicek p.687; fr. Hom. down];
to fight: prop. of armed combatants, or those who engage
in a hand-to-hand struggle, Acts vii. 26; trop. of those
who engage in a war of words, fo quarrel, wrangle, dis-
pute: 2 Tim. ii. 24; mpos addndovs, Jn. vi. 52 [ef. W.
§ 31,5; B.§ 133, 8]; of those who contend at law
for property and privileges, Jas. iv. 2. [Comp.: éa-
pdaxoua. SYN. see roAepos, b.] *
peyad-auxéw, -@; (eydAavxos, and this fr. peydda and
avyew); to be grandiloquent; to boast great things, to bear
one’s self loftily in speech or action: n yAwooa peyadavyet
(LT Tr WH peyada adxet), Jas. iii. 5, where it seems
to denote any kind of haughty language which wounds
and provokes others, and stirs up strife. (Aeschyl. Ag.
1528; Polyb. 12, 13, 10; 8, 23,11; Diod. 15, 16, al.;
mid. yuvatxa mpds Oeods €pi{oveay kai peyadavxoupernp,
Plat. rep. 3 p. 395 d.; for 723, to exalt one’s self, carry
one’s self haughtily, Ezek. xvi. 50; Zeph. iii. 11; add, 2
Mace. xv. 32; Sir. xlviii. 18.) *
peyadetos, -eia, -etov, (uéyas), magnificent, excellent, splen-
did, wonderful, (Xen., Joseph., Artem., al.); absol. pe-
yaXeia (rotetv Tur) to do great things for one (show him
conspicuous favors), Lk. i.49 RG; ra peyadeia rod Oeod
(Vulg. magnalia dei [A. V. the mighty works of God]),
i. e. the glorious perfections of God and his marvellous
doings (ni, Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 19; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.)
10; xh. 21), Acts ii. 11.*
peyadedrns, -nros, 7, (fr. the preceding word), great-
ness, magnificence, (Athen. 4, 6 p. 130 fin.; for NIDA,
Jer. xl. (xxxili.) 9); the majesty of God, Lk. ix. 43; rijs
"Apréudos, Acts xix. 27; of the visible splendor of the
divine majesty as it appeared in the transfiguration of
Christ, 2 Pet. i. 16.*
peyadomperts, -€s, gen. -ovs, (ueyas, and mpemer it is be-
coming [see mperw]), befitting a great man, magnificent,
splendid ; full of majesty, majestic: 2 Pet.i.17. (2 Mace.
vill. 15; xv. 13; 3 Mace. 11.9; Hdt:, Xen., Plat., al.)*
peyadivo; impf.é€ueyaduvov; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing.
€peyadvvero]; 1 aor. inf. peyadvyOjvac; 1 fut. peyadvvOn-
gouat; (peyas); fr. [Aeschyl. and] Thuc. down; Sept.
mostly for 973377; 1. tomake great, magnify, (Vulg.
magnifico): twd or ti, prop. of dimension, Mt. xxiii. 5
[here A.V. enlarge]; pass. to increase: of bodily stature,
epeyaduvOn Td madapiov, 1 S. ii. 21; so in a figure, 2 Co.
x. 15, of Paul, that his apostolic efficiency among the
Corinthians may increase more and more and have more
abundant results [al. refer this to 2; see Meyer (ed.
Heinrici) in loc.]. metaph. to make conspicuous: Lk. i.
58 (on which see €Aeos, 2 a.). 2. to deem or declare
great, i. e. to esteem highly, to extol, laud, celebrate: Lk. i.
46; Acts v. 13; x.46; xix. 17, (often so in class. Grk.
3594
péyas
also); pass. i. q. to get glory and praise: @ rum, ina
thing, Phil. i. 20.*
peydAws, adv., greatly: Phil. iv. 10. [Fr. Hom. down.]*
Heyakwovwn, -ns, 7, only in bibl. and eccl. writ. [ef
W. 26,95 (90); B. 73, and see dyadwotvy], (uéyas), Sept.
for 933 and 14:73; majesty: of the majesty of God, Heb.
i. 3; vill. 1; Jude 25, (so 2 S. vii. 23; Ps. exliv. (exlv.)
3,6; Sap. xviii. 24; Sir. ii. 18, and often).*
peyas, peyddn, péya, [ (related to Lat. magnus, magister,
Goth. maist (cf. 6 meiorov), etc.; Vanitek p. 682; Cur
tius § 462) ], acc. peyav, peydAny, péya; plur. peydAou, -at,
-a; comp. peifwr, -ov, (acc. mase. and fem. pei¢tova, once
contr. pei(o, Jn. v. 36 [RG T WH, but LTr peifop (cf.
Tdf. Proleg. p.119)]; neut. plur. peifova, once contr.
peiCo, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pecCorepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the com-
par. pei(wv), a poet. compar., on which see the remark
quoted under éAaytororepos, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl.
peycoros (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. for 5y12; also for 37; great; 1. predi-
cated a. of the external form or sensible appearance
of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its
dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight:
Aidos, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; dpos,
Rev. viii. 8; dornp, ibid. 10; Spaxwy Rev. xii. 3,9; deros,
ibid. 14; dévdpov, Lk. xiii. 19 [T WH om. L Tr br. peéy.];
xradot, Mk. iv. 32; ixdves, Jn. xxi. 11; B. compass
and extent; large, spacious: oxnvyn (petCwv), Heb. ix.
11; dvayaoy [R dvawyeor, q. v.], Mk. xiv. 15; droOqxn, Lk.
xii. 18; «duos, Rev. ix. 2; modus, Rev. xi. 8; xvi. 19;
Xvii. 18; xviii. 2, 16,18, 19; morapos, Rev. ix. 14; xvi. 12;
Gvpa, 1 Co. xvi. 9; Anvos, Rev. xiv. 19; dovn, Acts x. 11;
xi. 5; ydopa, Lk. xvi. 26 (2 S. xviii. 17). y- meas-
ure and height: ofkodopai, Mk. xiii. 2; A@povos, Rev. xx.
11; long, paxatpa, Rev. vi.4; as respects stature and age,
puxpot kat peydAo., small and great, young and old, Acts
viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Heb. viii. 11; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix.
5,18; xx. 12, (Gen. xix113.2 Ki. xxin2>)2\Chr xxxiv:
30). [meut. sing. used adverbially : ev peyddw, Acts xxvi.
29 LT Tr WH (for R G év odd, q. v. in rods, d.) in
great sc.degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa’s words
ev oALye (q. v.) in a little (time) thou wouldst fain ete. ... I
would to God that both in little and in great i.e. in all re-
spects ete.; cf. the use of dAlyov k. péya or opiKpdr kK. peya
(yet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g.
Plat. Phileb. 21 e.; Apol. 19¢.; 21 b.; 26 b.; but seed.
below. ] b. of number and quantity, i. q. nw
merous, large: ayédn, Mk. v. 11; abundant, ropicpés, 1
Tim. vi. 6; pusOarodocia, Heb. x. 35. c. of age: 6
petCwv, the elder, Ro. ix. 12 after Gen. xxv. 23, (Skuriwv 6
peéyas, Polyb. 18, 18 (35), 9; 32, 12,1). d. used of in-
tensity and its degrees: dvvays, Acts iv. 33; viii. 10;
neut. év peydAw, with great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 LT Tr
WH [but see y. above]; of the affections and emotions of
the mind: yapa, Mt. ii. 10; xxviii. 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxiv. 52;
Acts xv. 3; pdBos, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; viii. 37; Acts v.
5,11; Rev. xi. 11; Ovpds, Rev. xii. 12; Avan, Ro. ix. 2;
éxotaots, Mk. v. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); miorts, Mt. xv. 28;
xapis, Acts iv. 33; dyamn, Jn. xv. 13. of natural events
weyas
powerfully affecting the senses, i. q. violent, mighty, strong :
dvepos, Jn. vi. 18; Rev. vi. 13; Bpovrn, Rev. xiv. 2; yaaa,
Rev. xi. 19; xvi. 21; cetopuds, Mt. viii. 24; xxviii. 2; Lk.
xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi.12; xi.13; xvi.18; AaiAay,
Mk. iv. 37; mra@ors, Mt. vii. 27. of other external things,
such as are perceived by hearing: xpavyn, Acts xxiii. 9;
Rev. xiv. 18 [RG]; pei{ov xpdgew, to cry out the louder,
Mt. xx. 31; dev, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH only in
mrg.]; xxvii. 46,50; Lk. xxiii. 23; Jn. xi. 43; Acts vill.
7: Rev: 1.10; vy. 2) 125 vi. 10; vii. 2,10; vill. 135.x-3;
xi. 12,15; [xiv.18 LT Tr WH; xviii. 2 Rec.], and else-
where ; yaAnvn, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39. of objects of
sight which excite admiration and wonder: das, Mt.
iv. 16; onpetov, Mt. xxiv. 24; Lk. xxi. 11; Acts vi. 8;
viii. 13; Rev. xiii. 13; épya, Rev. xv. 3; peifw, pei{ova
rovrwy, greater things than these, i.e. more extraordinary,
more wonderful, Jn. i.50 (51); v.20; xiv.12. of things
that are felt: xadpa, Rev. xvi. 9; muperds, Lk. iv. 38;
of other things that distress: avayxn, Lk. xxi. 23; Odes,
Mt. xxiv. 21; Acts vii. 11; Rev. ii. 22; vii. 14; Ssoypds,
Acts viii. 1; Aguds, Lk. iv. 25; Acts xi. 28; Any, Rev.
xvi. 21. 2. predicated of rank, as belonging to a.
persons, eminent for ability, virtue, authority, power ;
as God, and sacred personages: eds, Tit. ii. 13 [(on which
see Prof. Abbot, Note C. in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete.
i. p. 19, and cf. émipavera)]; “Apres, Acts xix. 27 sq.
34 sq.; dpytepevs, Heb. iv. 14; mony, Heb. xiii. 20;
mpopntns, Lk. vii. 16; absol. of peyadou, great men, lead-
ers, rulers, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; univ. eminent, dis-
tinguished: Mt. v. 19; xx. 26; Lk. i. 15, 32; Acts viii.
9. pei¢wv is used of those who surpass others — either
in nature and power, as God: Jn. x. 29 [here T Tr
WH txt. give the neut. (see below)]; xiv. 28; Heb. vi.
13; 1 Jn. iv. 4; add, Jn. iv. 12; viii. 53; or in excel-
lence, worth, authority, etc.: Mt. xi. 11; xviii. 1;
xxiii. 11; Mk. ix. 34; LK. vii. 28; ix. 46; xxii. 26 sq.;
Jn. xiii. 16; xv. 20; 1 Co. xiv.5; duvaper peitoves, 2 Pet.
ii. 11; neut. peifov, something higher, more exalted, more
majestic than the temple, to wit the august person of
Jesus the Messiah and his preéminent influence, Mt. xii.
6 LT Tr WH; [cf. Jn. x. 29 above]; contextually i. q.
strict in condemning, of God, 1 Jn. iii. 20. b. things
to be esteemed highly for their importance, i. q. Lat.
gravis; of great moment, of great weight, important : émay-
yeAuara, 2 Peta 4 = €vToAn, Mt. xxii. 36, 38; pLvoTnptor,
Eph. v. 32; 1 Tim. iii. 16; dyapria, Jn. xix. 11; peitov
paprupia, of greater proving power, Jn. v. 36 [see above
ad init.]; 1 Jn. v. 9, (uaprupiay peifw x. capeorepay, Isocr.
Archid. § 32). péyas i. q. solemn, sacred, of festival days
(ef. Is. i. 13 Sept.]: nuepa, Jn. vii. 37; xix. 31; notable,
august, nuepa, of the day of the final judgment, Acts ii.
20; Jude 6; Rev. vi. 17; xvi. 14. neut. péya, a great
matter, thing of great moment: 1 Co. ix. 11 (Gen. xlv.
28; Is. xlix. 6); ov péya, 2 Co. xi. 15. c. athing
to be highly esteemed for its excellence, i. q. excel-
lent. 1 Co. xiii. 13 [ef. W. § 35,1; B. § 123, 13]; ra
Xapiopara ta peitova (RG xpeirrova), 1 Co. xii. 31 L T
few: 3. splendid, prepared on a grand scale,
395
peOodcia
stately: doxn, Lk. v. 29 (Gen. xxi. 8); detmvoy, Lk. xiv. 16;
Rey. xix. 17 [G LT Tr WH], (Dan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ;
oixia, 2 Tim. ii. 20 (Jer. lii. 13; [otkos], 2 Chr. ii. 5,
9). 4. neut. plur. peydda, great things: of God’s
preéminent blessings, Lk. i. 49 LT Tr WH (see peya-
Aeios); of things which overstep the province of a
created being, proud (presumptuous) things, full of
arrogance, derogatory to the majesty of God: Aadeiv pey.
joined with Bracdnpias, Rev. xiii. 5; Dan. vii. 8, 11, 20;
like péya etreiv, Hom. Od. 3, 227; 16, 243; 22, 288.
péyeQos, -ovs, 70, (ueyas), [fr. Hom. down], greatness:
ph. i. 19.*
peytorav, -avos, 6, (fr. péytoros, as veav fr. véos, Evvdy
fr. évvos), a later Grk. word (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 196),
once in sing. Sir. iv. 7; commonly in plur. oi peyworaves,
the grandees, magnates, nobles, chief men of a city or a
people, the associates or courtiers of a king, (Vulg.
principes) : Rev. vi. 153 ras yis, xviii. 23; tov “Hpadov,
Mk. vi. 21. (Sept. for oy, Jer. xiv. 3; Nah. ii. 6;
Zech. xi. 2; Doin, Jon. iii. 7; Nah. iii. 10; 7272), Dan.
Theodot. iv. 33, etc.; OD’, Is. xxxiv. 12; Jer. xxiv. 8,
etc.; 1 Macc. ix. 37; often in Sir. Manetho 4, 41; Jo-
seph., Artem. In Lat. megistanes, Tac. ann. 15, 27; Suet.
Calig. 5.)* »
péyiorros, see péyas, init.
pe0-epprnvedwo: Pass., 3 pers. sing. weOepunvevera, ptcp.
peOeppnvevopevoy ; to translate into the language of one with
whom I wish to communicate, to interpret: Mt.i. 23; Mk.
v. 41; xv. 22, 34; Jn. i. 38 (89) LTr WH, 41 (42);
Acts iv. 36; xiii. 8. (Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Sir. prol. l.
19: Falel|))
pen, -ns, 7, (akin to pé6u, wine; perh. any intoxicating
drink, Lat. temetum; cf. Germ. Meth [mead ]}), intoxication ;
drunkenness: Lk. xxi. 34; plur., Ro. xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21.
(Hebr. \3¥@jntoxicating drink, Prov. xx. 1; Is. xxviii,
7; and }173¥, intoxication, Ezek. xxiii. 32; xxxix. 19;
[Antipho], Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf. Trench § 1xi.] *
ped-icrnpe and (in 1 Co. xiii. 2 RG WH (ef. forppe])
peOcotavw; 1 aor. peteotnoa; 1 aor. pass. subj. pera-
ora6o; fr. Hom. down; prop. to transpose, transfer,
remove from one place to another: prop. of change of
situation or place, dpn, 1 Co. xiii. 2 (Isa. liv. 10); twa
ets rt, Col. i. 13; twa [T Tr WH add ex, so L in br.] ras
oixovouias, to remove from the office of steward, pass. Lk.
xvi. 4 (rs xpeias, 1 Macc. xi. 63); rua éx Tov (Hy, to re-
move from life, Diod. 2, 57, 5; 4, 55, 13; with é« rov ¢nv
omitted, Acts xiii. 22 (in Grk. writ. also in the mid. and
in the intrans. tenses of the act. to depart from life, to
die, Eur. Alc. 21; Polyb. 32, 21,3; Heliod. 4,14). met-
aph. riva, without adjunct (cf. Germ. verriicken, [Eng.
pervert]), 1. e. to lead aside [ A. V.turn away] to other ten-
ets: Acts xix. 26 (ry xapSiay Tov Aaod, Josh. xiv. 8).*
pe0-o5ela (T WH pcodia, see I, t,), -as, 9, (fr. peBodeva,
i.e. 1. to follow up or investigate by method and set-
tled plan; 2. to follow craftily, frame devices, deceive :
Diod. 7,16; 2S. xix. 27; [Ex. xxi. 13 Aq.; (mid.) Charit.
7, 6 p. 166, 21 ed. Reiske (1783); Polyb. 38, 4, 10]), a
noun occurring neither in the O. T. nor in prof. auth,
peOopiov
cunning arts, deceit, craft, trickery: 4 pe9. 7Hs mavns,
which 4 wAdvy uses, Eph. iv. 14; tod d:aBddov, plur. ib. vi.
11 [A.V. wiles. Cf. Bp. Lghtft. Polye. ad Phil. 7 p. 918.]*
peO-dprov, -ov, 70, (neut. of adj. weOopios, -a, -ov; fr.
peta with, and épos a boundary), a border, frontier: ra
peOopia Tivos, the confines (of any land or city), i. e. the
places adjacent to any region, the vicinity, Mk. vii. 24
RG. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.) *
peOtcxw: Pass., pres. wedvoxopar; 1 aor. euebiaOnv ;
(fr. weOv, see wéOn); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 739, 7170,
(Kal 719), and 3¥, to intoxicate, make drunk; pass.
[ef. W. 252 (237)] to get drunk, become intoxicated: Lk.
xii. 45; Jn. ii. 10; 1 Th. v. 7 [B. 62 (54)]; oive [W.
217 (203)], Eph. v. 18; ék rod oivov, Rev. xvii. 2 (see é,
Il. 5); rod véxrapos, Plat. symp. p. 203 b.; Leian. dial.
deor. 6, 3; azo twos, Sir. i. 16; xxxv. 13.*
peOucos, -von, -vcov, in later Grk. also of two termi-
nations, (uedv, see peOn), drunken, intoxicated: 1 Co.
v.11; vi. 10. (Phryn.: pe@vcos avnp, ov« épeis, dAAd pe-
Ovatixos* yuvaixa dé epeis weOvoov kai peOvaonv [ Arstph. ] ;
but Menand., Plut., Leian., Sext. Empir., al., [Sept. Prov.
xxiii. 21, etc.; Sir. xix. 1, etc.] use it also of men; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151.) *
peOvw (fr. webu, see peOn) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
m7 and DW; to be drunken: Mt. xxiv. 49; Actsii. 15;
1 Co. xi. 21; 1 Th. v. 7 [ef. B. 62 (54)]; é&e rod atparos
[see éx, Il. 5; Trmrg. 76 atparr], of one who has shed
blood profusely, Rev. xvii. 6 (Plin. h. n. 14, 28 (22)
ebrius jam sanguine civium et tanto magis eum sitiens).*
perlorepos, -a, -ov, See peyas, init.
pelLwv, see péyas, init.
péAay, -avos, ro, see the foll. word.
péAas, -auva, -av, gen. -avos, -aivns, -avos, (fr. Hom. down],
Sept. several times for Nw, black: Rev. vi. 5, 12; opp.
to Aeukds, Mt. v.36. Neut. 7d pedav, subst. black ink (Plat.
Phaedr. p. 276 c.; Dem. p. 313,11; Plut. mor. p. 841 e.;
al.): 2 Co. iii. 3; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13; [cf. Gardthausen,
Palaeographie, Buch i. Kap. 4; Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, ii. 270 sq.; B. D. s. v. Writing, sub fin.]*
Mededs, gen. -a [B. 20 (17) sq.], ([ Tr WH Menea,
indecl., [on the accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]),
6, (AND abundance), Melea, one of king David’s descend-
ants: Lk. iii. 31.*
pede, 3 pers. sing. pres. of wéAw used impers.; impf.
éuedev; itis acare: Twi, to one; as in Grk. writ. with
nom. of the thing, ovdév rovr@v, Acts xviii. 17; with gen.
of the thing (as often in Attic), yy rév Body pede Ta
eG; 1 Co. ix. 9 [B. § 132, 15; cf. W. 595 (554)]; the
thing which is a care to one, or about which he is solicit-
ous, is evident from the context, 1 Co. vii. 21; mepi rivos,
gen. of obj., to care about, have regard for, a pers. or a
thing: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. x.13; xii. 6; 1
Pet. v. 7, (Hdt. 6, 101; Xen. mem. 3, 6, 10; Cyr. 4, 5,
17; Hier. 9,10; 1 Mace. xiv. 43; Sap. xii. 13; Barnab.
ep. 1,5; cf. W. § 30,10d.); foll. by or, Mk. iv. 38;
Lk. x. 40.*
[Medcdehad: Lk. iii. 37 Tdf., see Mad. ]
pederdw, -G; 1 aor. euedéernoa; (fr. pwedéry care, prac-
396
péeARr®
tice) ; esp. freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. down;
Sept. chiefly for 71; to care for, attend to carefully,
practise: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 15 [R. V. be diligent in]; to medi-
tate 1. q. to devise, contrive: Acts iv. 25 fr. Ps. ii. 1; used
by the Greeks of the meditative pondering and the prac-
tice of orators and rhetoricians, as p. tiv amoAoyiav imép
éavtav, Dem. p. 1129, 9 (ef. Passow s. v. d. [L. and S.
s. v. II. 2 and III. 4 b.]), which usage seems to have
been in the writer’s mind in Mk. xiii.11[RLbr. Comp.:
mpo-peAeTaw |.*
HEAL, -ros, 76, Sept. for wa4, [fr. Hom. down], honey:
Rev. x. 9 sq.; @yptoy (q. v.), Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6.*
pedtooros, -a, -ov, (fr. wéAucoa a bee, as Gaddoouos fr.
Oddacoa; peduoaa is fr. pede), of bees, made by bees: Lk.
xxiv. 42 [RG Trin br.]. (Not found elsewh. [cf. W.
24]; peAcooatos, -a, -ov is found in Nic. th. 611, in Eust.
peAlooesos.) *
MeXiry, -ns, 7, Melita, the name of an island in the
Mediterranean, lying between Africa and Sicily, now
called Malta; (this Sicula Melita must not be confounded
with Melita Illyrica in the Adriatic, now called Meleda
[see B. D. s. v. Melita; Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of
St. Paul, Diss. ii.]): Acts xxviii. 1 [where WH Medern;
see their App. p. 160].*
[Medtrqvn, see the preceding word. ]
pedo; fut. weAAjow (Mt. xxiv. 6; and LT Tr WH
in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. ¢weAdoyp [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31
(exc. T WH); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG) ; vii. 39 (exe. T);
xi. 51 (exc. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R
pres.); x. 4 (exe. L Tr)] and #peddov [so all edd. in Lk.
vii. 2; x.1 (exc. RG); xix. 4; Jn. iv. 47; xii. 33; xviii.
32; Acts xii. 6 (exc. RGL); xvi. 27 (exc. RG); xxvii.
33 (exc. RGT); Heb. xi. 8 (exe. L); ef. reff. s. v.
BovdAouat, init. and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15],
to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptep., 6 ped-
Nev, absol.: ra péAXovra and ra éveor@ra are contrasted,
Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; eis rd pédXov, for the future,
hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see eis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm
supplies @ros)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; ra wéAXovra, things future,
things to come, i.e., acc. to the context, the more perfect
state of things which will exist in the aféy péAdov, Col.
ii. 17; with nouns, 6 aidy 6 peAdoy, Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i.
213 4 péAd. Con, 1 Tim. iv. 8; 7 ofkoupévn 4 pedd. Heb.
ii. 55; fp. dpyn, Mt. iii. 7; 7d kpiva 7d peAXov, Acts xxiv.
253 qodus, Heb. xiii. 14; ra peAdovra ayaa, Heb. ix. 11
[but L Tr mrg. WH txt. yevouévav]; x. 1; Tod peAdovtos
sc. ‘Addp, i. e. the Messiah, Ro. v. 14. 2. joined to an
infin. [ef. W. 333 sq. (313): B.§140,2], a. to be onthe
point of doing or suffering something: w. inf. present,
fweAXev Eavrov dvatpeiv, Acts xvi. 27; TeAevrav, Lk. vii. 2;
drobvnoxey, Jn. iv.47; add, Lk.xxi.7; Actsiii. 3; xviii.
14; xx. 3; xxii. 26; xxiii. 27; w. inf. passive, Acts xxi.
27; xxvii. 33, ete. b. to intend, have in mind, think
to: w.inf. present, Mt. ii. 13; Lk.x.1; xix.4; Jn. vi. 6,
15; vii. 35; xii. 4; xiv. 22; Acts v. 85; xvii. 31; xx.
7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 30; Heb. viii.5; [2 Pet.
i.12LT Tr WH]; Rev. x.4; w. inf. aorist (a constr. cen-
sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently
péAos
by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. W.
333 (313) sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 745 sqq.; [but see
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 420 sqq.]): Acts xii. 6 LT
WH; Rev. ii. 10 (Bade RG); iii. 16; xii. 4; w. fut.
inf. ZreoOa, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. c. as in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down, of those things which will come to pass
(or which one will do or suffer) by fixed necessity or
divine appointment (Germ. sollen [are to be, des-
tined to be, etc.]); w. pres. inf. active: Mt. xvi. 27; xvii.
12; xx. 22; Lk. ix. 31; Jn. vi. 71; vii. 39; xi.51; xii. 33;
xviii. 32; Acts xx. 38; xxvi. 22, 23; Heb.i. 14; xi. 8;
Rev. ii. 10°; iii. 10; viii. 13, etc. ; "HAlas 6 pedAdov Epyxe-
oda, Mt. xi. 14; 6 peAAov AuTpovaOa, Lk. xxiv. 21; Kpi-
ve, 2 Tim. iv. 1 [WH mrg. xpivac]; w. pres. inf. passive:
Mt. xvii. 22; Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. ix. 44; xix.11; xxi. 36;
Acts xxvi. 22; Ro. iv. 24; 1 Th. iii.4; Jas. ii. 12; Rev.
i. 19 [Tdf. yeveoOa]; vi. 11; rHs peAdovons droxadirre-
oOa dSdéns, 1 Pet.v. 1; w. aor. inf.: ri pedAdoveay bofav
droxaduPOnvat, Ro. vill. 18; tiv péAdovoay riotw aro-
katupOjvat, Gal. iii. 23; used also of those things which
we infer from certain preceding events will of necessity
follow: w. inf. pres., Acts xxviii. 6; Ro. viii. 13; w. inf.
fut., Acts xxvii. 10. d. in general, of whatis sure to
happen: w. inf. pres., Mt. xxiv. 6; Jn. vi. 71; 1 Tim.i.
16; Rev. xii.5; xvii. 8; w. inf. fut. érecOa, Acts xi. 28 ;
xxiv. 15. e. to be always on the point of doing with-
out ever doing, i. e. to delay: ri peddXers; Acts xxii. 16
(Aeschyl]. Prom. 36; ri wédAere; Eur. Hec. 1094; Leian.
dial. mort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth.; 4 Mace. vi.
23; ix. 1).
péXos, -ous, Td, [fr. Hom. down], a member, limb: prop.
a member of the human body, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12,
14, 18-20, 25 sq.; Jas. iii. 5; ra p. rod oaparos, 1 Co.
xii. 12, 22; pod, cov, nua, tpav, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Ro. vi.
13,19; vii. 5, 23; Col. iii. 5; Jas. iii. 6; iv. 1; adpyns
péAn is said of bodies given up to criminal intercourse,
because they are as it were members belonging to the
harlot’s body, 1 Co. vi. 15. Since Christians are closely
united by the bond of one and the same spirit both among
themselves and with Christ as the head, their fellowship
is likened to the body, and individual Christians are
metaph. styled »é4n—now one of another, adAnA@v:
Ro. xii. 5; Eph. iv. 25; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 7, (ef.
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. iii. p. 45), — now of the mys-
tical body, i.e. the church: 1 Co. xii. 27; Eph. v. 30, [ef.
iv. 16 WH mrg.]; ra copara of Christians are called
pen of Christ, because the body is the abode of the spirit
of Christ and is consecrated to Christ’s service, 1 Co.
vi. 15.*
Medxt (T Tr WH Medxet ; see et, ), 6, (1399 my king),
Melchi; 1. oneof Christ’s ancestors: Lk.iii. 24. 2.
another of the same: ib. iii. 28.*
Madxioedex (in Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 MeAxuredéxns,
-0v), 0; (ps7 272 king of righteousness), Melchizedek,
king of Salem (see under Sadnp) and priest of the most
high God, who lived in the days of Abraham: Heb. v. 6,
10; vi. 20; vii. 1, 10 sq. 15, 17, 21 [RGL];' cf. Gen.
Rivtssgg.: Es.cix: (ex.) 4. [CE Bs Do's. v.J*
397
pep
pepBpava [Soph. Lex. -ava; cf. Chandler § 136], -as
[B. 17 (15) ], ), Lat. membrana, i. e. parchment, first made
of dressed skins at Pergamum, whence its name: 2 Tim.
iv. 13 [Act. Barn. 6 fin. Cf. Birt, Antikes Buchwesen,
ch. ii.; Gardthausen, Palaeographie, p. 39 sq.].*
peppopor; 1 aor. euenyaunv; in class. Grk. fr. Hesiod
(opp. 184) down; to blame, find fault: absol. Ro. ix. 19;
the thing found fault with being evident from what pre-
cedes, Mk. vii. 2 Rec. ; avrovs, Heb. viii. 8 LT Trmrg.
WHtxt., where RG Tr txt. WH mrg. avrois, which many
join with pepdopevos (for the person or thing blamed is
added by Grk. writ. now in the dat., now in the acc.;
see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v., ef. Kriiger § 46, 7, 3);
but it is more correct to supply airjy, i. e. Siabjxny,
which the writer wishes to prove was not “faultless”
(cf. 7), and to join adrois with Aéyer; [B. § 133, 9].*
peprplpoupos, -ov, (ueupoua, and poipa fate, lot), com-
plaining of one’s lot, querulous, discontented: Jude 16.
(Isocr. p. 234. [p. 387 ed. Lange]; Aristot. h. a. 9, 1
[p. 608", 10]; Theophr. char. 17, 1; Leian. dial. deor.
20, 4; Plut. de ira cohib. c. 13.) *
pév, a weakened form of pry, and hence properly a
particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, in-
deed, —its affirmative force being weakened, yet re-
tained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not
wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (uév ‘con-
firmative’; cf. 4 Mace. xviii. 18). Owing to this its
original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms
and phrases with which it is connected, and thus con-
trasts them with or distinguishes them from others.
Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive
and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which
stands related to a following 6¢ or other adversative con-
junction, either expressed or understood, and in a sen-
tence composed of several members is so placed as to
point out the first member, to which a second, marked by
an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corre-
sponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed, Germ. zwar (i. e. prop.
zu Wahre, i.e. in Wahrheit [in truth]) ; but often its force
cannot be reproduced. Its use in classic Greek is exhib-
ited by Devarius i. p. 122 sqq., and Klotz on the same ii.
2 p. 656 sqq.; Viger i. p. 531 sqq., and Hermann on the
same p. 824 sq.; al.; Matthiae § 622; Kihner ii, p. 806
sqq. §§ 527 sqq.; p. 691 sqq.; § 503; [Jelf § 729, 1, 2;
§§ 764 sqq.]; Passow, and Pape, [and L. and S.] s. v.
I. Examples in which the particle pév is followed in
another member by an adversative particle expressed.
Of these examples there are two kinds: 1. those
in which pév has a concessive force, and d€ (or dAAd) in-
troduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of
what has been said in the former member, indeed...
but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predi-
cations about either, are thus correlated: Mt. iii. 11, cf.
Mk. i. 8 (where T Tr WHom.Lbr. pev); Lk. iii. 16
(where the meaning is, ‘I indeed baptize as well as he
who is to come after me, but his baptism is of greater
efficacy’; cf. Acts i.5); Mt. ix. 37 and Lk. x. 2 (al
though the harvest is great, yet the laborers are few);
(sev
Mt. xvii. 11 sq. (rightly indeed is it said that Elijah will
come and work the dmoxaraoraots, but he has already
come to bring about this very thing); Mt. xx. 23; xxii.
8; xxiii. 28; Jn. xvi. 22; xix. 32sq.; Acts xxi. 39 (al-
though I am a Jew, and not that Egyptian, yet etc.) ;
Acts xxii. 3 [R]; Ro. ii. 25; vi.11; 1 Co.i.18; ix. 24;
xi. 14 sq.; xii. 20[RGLbr. Trbr. WH mrg.]; xv. 51 [R
GLbr.]; 2 Co.x.10; Heb. iii. 5 sq.; 1 Pet. i. 20, and
often. ev and 8€¢ are added to articles and pronouns :
of pev...oi d€, the one indeed ... but the other (al-
though the latter, yet the former), Phil. i. 16 sq. [ace. to
crit. txt.]; Os pev... ds dé, the one indeed, but (yet)
the other etc. Jude 22 sq.; tues pev... tives de kai, Phil.
“i. 15; with conjunctions: e? pev ovv, if indeed then, if
therefore... ei? d¢, but if, Acts xviii. 14 sq. RG; xix.
38 sq.3 xxv. 11 LT Tr WH [e? pev ody. . . yuri dé, Heb.
viii. 4 sq. (here RG ef pev yap)]; €¢ pev... vov Se, if
indeed (conceding or supposing this or that to be the
case) ... but now, Heb. xi. 15; kav pev.. ef S€ punye,
Lk. xiii. 9; pev yap... dé, 1 Co. xi. 7; Ro. ii. 25; pev
obv ... 8€, Lk. iii. 18; eis pev... eis dé, Heb. 1x. 6 sq.;
pev «Gadd, indeed ... but, although... yet, Ro. xiv.
20; 1Co. xiv.17; pev... mdnv, Lk. xxii. 22. [Cf. W.
443 (413); B. § 149, 12a.] 2. those in which pev
loses its concessive force and serves only to distin-
guish, but 8€ retains its adversative power: Lk. xi. 48;
Acts xiii. 36 sq.5 xxiii. 8 [here WH txt. om. Tr br. pev];
1 Co. i. 12, 23, Phil. iii. 1; Heb. vii. 8; dd pev... éni
dé, 2 Tim. iv. 43 6 pev ovv (Germ. er nun [he, then, ])
of dé, Acts xxviii. 5 sq.; Os pev... ds dé, and one... and
another, 1 Co. xi. 21; of pev...6 d€ (he, on the con-
trary), Heb. vii. 20 sq. 23 sq.3 éxetvor pev ody... queis
dé, 1 Co. ix. 25; ef pev odv... ei Se, Acts xviii. 14 sq.
[RG]; xix. 38; xxv.11 [LT Tr WH]; and this hap-
pens chiefly when what has already been included in the
words immediately preceding is separated into parts, so
that the adversative particle contrasts that which the
writer especially desires to contrast: éxdoT@... Tots pév
(nrovow... tots dé €& epiOeias etc. Ro. ii. 6-8; mas...
exeivor pev..- myers dé etc. 1 Co. ix. 25; add, Mt. xxv.
14 sq. 33; Ro. v. 16; xi. 22. 3. pev... de serve only
to distribute a sentence into clauses: both... and; not
only « «+ but also; as well. ..as: Jn. xvi. 9-11; Ro. viii.
17; Jude 8; mparov pev... émecta dé, Heb. vii. 2; 6 pev
...6 d€...6 de, some... some...some, Mt. xiii. 8;
[€xaoros...6 pev...6 de, each... one... another,
1 Co. vii. 7 LT Tr WH]; os pev... ds dé, one... an-
other, Mt. xxi. 35; Acts xvii. 32; 1 Co. vii. 7[RG]; of
pev ee. Gddot [L of] b€... erepoe dé, Mt. xvi. 14; 6 pev
yap... add@ de... Erépw de [here T Tr WH om. Lbr. 8€],
1 Co. xii. 8-10; @ pew... foll. by adAda Se three times,
Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7sq.3 GAAos pév, GdrAos dé, 1 Co. xv. 39;
ToUTO pev ... TouTo dé, on the one hand... on the other;
partly ... partly, Heb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth.
cf. W. 142 (135). éw is followed by another particle :
érevra, Jn. xi. 6; 1 Co. xii. 28; Jas. iii. 173 Kai viv, Acts
xxvi. 4, 6; ra vov, Acts xvii. 30; moAd [RG moddo]
uaddrov, Heb. xii. 9.
398
Mev
II. Examples in which péy is followed neither by 3¢
nor by any other adversative particle (ev ‘ solitarium’) ;
ef. W. 575 (534) sq.; B. 365 (313) sq. These exx. are
of various kinds; either 1. the antithesis is evi-
dent from the context; as, Col. ii. 23 (‘have indeed a
show of wisdom’, but are folly [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc.]) ;
7) bev . .. owtnpiay, sc. but they themselves prevent their
own salvation, Ro. x. 13 ra pev.. . duvduecu, sc. but ye
do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 12;
avOporo pev [LT Tr WH om. perv] . . . duviovew, se. 6 dé
Oeos Ka@ éavtod opvier, Heb. vi. 16. Or 2. the
antithetic idea is brought out by a different turn of the
sentence: Acts xix. 4 [ Rec.], where the expected second
member, “Inoovs d¢ €orw 6 épxouevos, is wrapped up in
Tour éotw eis Tov “Incoiv; Ro. xi. 13 é)’ doov peév Krd.»
where the antithesis mapa¢nAo dé xrA. is contained in
eirws trapatnioow; Ro. vii. 12 6 pev vowos xrA., where
the thought of the second member, ‘ but sin misuses the
law,’ is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an
anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive
to a conjunctive construction (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 839),
we find pev...7é, Acts xxvii. 213 pév... «at, 1 Th. ii.
18; in distributions or partitions, Mk. iv. 4-8 [here RG@
pev... d€..-kat...kai]; Lk. viii. 5-8; or, finally, that
member in which d¢ would regularly follow immediately
precedes (Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet
see Meyer ad loc.; ef. B.§ 149,12d.]. Or - 3. the
writer, in using pev, perhaps had in mind a second mem-
ber to be introduced by 6¢, but was drawn away from
his intention by explanatory additions relating to the
first member: thus Acts iii. 13 (dv tpets pev — Rec. om.
this pev —ete., where 6 Oeds 8€ ifyetpev ek vexpar, cf. 15,
should have followed); esp. (as occasionally in class.
Grk. also) after mpdrov pev: Ro. i. 8; iii. 25 1 Co. xi.
18; rov pev mparov oyoy «rd. where the antithesis rov
d€ Sedrepov Adyov «TA. ought to have followed, Acts i.
3 4. pev odv [in Lk. xi. 28 T Tr WH pevodr], Lat.
quidem igitur, [Eng. so then, now therefore, verily, etc. ],
(where pév is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and
otv marks an inference or transition, cf. Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 2 p. 662 sq.; [Herm. Vig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. § 149,
16]): Acts i. 18; v. 41; xiii. 4; xvil. 30; xxili. 22; xxvi.
9; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here T om. Tr br. ody]; adAa per odv,
Phil. iii. 8 GL Tr; ei peév ov», Heb. vii. 11. 5. pep
solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed,
verily, (Germ. freilich), [ef. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p.522; Har-
tung, Partikeln, ii. 404]: ef pev, 2 Co. xi. 4; pev ody now
then, (Germ. nun freilich), Heb. ix. 1 [ef. B.u.s. On the
use of pév ody in the classics cf. Cope’s note on Aristot.
rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. pevodvye, q. V- in its place.
III. As respects the Position of the particle: it
never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as
near the beginning as possible; generally in the second
or third place, by preference between the article and
noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are
Acts iii. 21; 2 Co. x.13 Col. ii. 23; Acts xiv. 12 Ree. :
the fifth place, Eph. iv. 11; Ro. xvi. 19 RWH br.; 1 Co.
ii.15 RG; (Jn. xvi. 22, see below)]; moreover, in the
Mevva
midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the
torce of which is to be strengthened, as cai ipeis odv AVY
pev vov €xere [but LT Tr WH... ody viv pev Ava. ], Jn.
xvi. 22; cf. W. § 61, 6. The word is not found in the
Kev. or in the Epp. of John.
Mevwvé or Mévvas, see Maivay.
pev-odv i. q. pev ody, see per, II. 4 sq.
pev-oov-ye [pevooy ye LT], (nev, ody, yé), nay surely,
nay rather; three times in answers by which what was
previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin-
ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where pev
ovr is never so placed; cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. et Alex.
p- 203 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342; [B. 370 sq. (818); W.
§ 61, 6]): Lk. xi. 28 [where T Tr WH pevotv]; Ro. ix.
20; x.18; also Phil. iii. 8 [where LG Tr peév ody, WH
pev ovv ye], and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed.
Bekk. ].*
pév-rot, (wer, roi), [Tr pev rou in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par-
ticle of affirmation, and hence also often of opposition
(on its various use in class. Grk. ef. Devar. p. 124 sq. and
Klotz’s comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq.; Herm.
ad Vig. p. 840 sq.), but yet, nevertheless, howbgit: In. iv.
27; vil. 13; xx.5; xxi. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Jude 8 (the
connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows:
‘although these examples were set forth as warnings,
nevertheless’ etc.) ; duws pevtor, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii.
42; wevros, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. 8 (if ye do not have re-
spect ot persons, but rather observe the law of love,
with which rpoowmoAnwia is incompatible; [if however,
howbeit if }).*
pévo; impf. euevov; fut. wero; 1 aor. Zuewa; plupf.
Pepernxew without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19; cf. ékBddXo, [and
see Tdf. Proleg. p. 120 sq.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept.
chiefly for Wy and D3), also for 3M, Ww, ete.; to re-
main, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference 1.
to PLACE; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn,
tarry: ev w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27; x. 7; Jn. vii. 9;
xi. 6; Acts xx. 15; xxvii. 31; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2
Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: éxet, Mt. x.11; Jn.
li, 12; x.40; [xi 54 WHTrtxt.]; d&de, Mt. xxvi. 38;
Mk. xiv. 34; mapd tux, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40); xiv. 25;
Acts xviii. 20 [RG]; xxi. 7; ody rum, Lk. i. 56; Kad?
éavtov, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30.
1. q. tarry as a guest, lodge: mov, Jn. i. 38 (39); ev w. dat.
of place, Lk. xix.5; Acts ix.43; mapd ri, in one’s house,
Acts ix. 43; xviii. 3; xxi. 8; of tarrying for a night,
pera Twos, cv Tun, Lk. xxiv. 29. i. q. to be kept, to remain:
dead bodies emi rod oravpov, Jn. xix. 31; 7d KAjpa ev rH
durého, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. g. not to
depart, not to leave, to continue to be present: jerd tivos
(gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with
one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. ii. 19; to be constantly
present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv.16 RG;
also mapa w. dat. of pers., Jn. xiv. 17; émi twa, to put
forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit,
Jn. i. 32 sq.; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 86; 76
kdduppa emi rH avayveces, of that which continually pre-
vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii.
399
pepifo
14. Inthe mystic phraseology of John, God is said peéveuw
in Christ, i. e. to dwell as it were within him, to be con-
tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en-
ergy, Jn. xiv. 10; Christians are said pévew ev 76 bed, to
be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they
have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27; iii.6; hence
one is said pévew in Christ or in God, and conversely
Christ or God is said pévew in one: Jn. vi. 56; xv. 4 sq. ;
1 Jn. ili. 24; iv. 13, 16; 6 Beds pever ev ait@ x. aitos ev
T@ Oep, 1 Jn. iv. 15; ef. Rickert, Abendmahl, p. 268 sq.
uevet TL ev Evol, Something has established itself perma-
nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in
me: 7a pyyatd pov, Jn. xv. 7; 6 Adyos Tov Geod, 1 In. ii.
14; 7 xapa 7 enn (not joy in me i. e. of which I am the
object, but the joy with which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11
Ree. ; 6 nxovaare, 1 Jn. ii. 24; the Holy Spirit, Jn. ii. 17;
iii. 9; 7 dAnOea, 2 Jn. 2; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 17;
in the same sense one is said €yew Tu pévov ev €avT@, as
Tov Aoyov Tod Oeov, Jn. v. 38; Cwnv aidmov, 1 Jn. iii. 15.
i. q. fo persevere; €v tur, of him who cleaves, holds fast,
toa thing: €v r@ Aye, Jn. vill. 31; €v rH ayarn, 1 In. iv.
16; €v miores, 1 Tim. ii. 15; &v ois (€v rovrous, &) euabes,
2 Tim. iii. 14; &v 7 dvdax7, 2 Jn. 9, (ev 7H “lovdaiopa, 2
Mace. viii. 1); differently ev r7 dydmn twds, i. e. to keep
one’s self always worthy of his love, Jn. xv. 9 sq. B.
to be held, or kept, continually: ev r@ Oavare@, in the state
of death, 1 Jn. ili. 14; é€v 77 oxoria, Jn. xii. 463; év TO
peri, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to TIME; to continue to be, i.e.
not to perish, to last, to endure: of persons, to survive, live,
(exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 415
sq-): Phil. i. 25 [so eupeveww, Sir. xxxix. 11]; with eis rév
ai@va added, Jn. xii. 34; Heb. vii. 24; also of him who
becomes partaker of the true and everlasting life, opp.
to mapdyeo Oat, 1 Jn. ii. 17; ews apru, opp. to of kouunOevtes,
1 Co. xv. 6; dAlyor, Rev. xvii. 10; ews épyouat, Jn. xxi.
22 sq.; of things, not to perish, to last, stand: of cities,
Mt. xi. 23; Heb. xiii. 14; of works, opp. to caraxaiecOat,
1 Co. iii. 14; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 11 ;
1 Co. xiii. 13; Heb. xiii. 1; Adyos Aeov, 1 Pet. i. 23;
(where Ree. adds e’s r. aléva) ; of institutions, Heb. xii.
27. 6 Kapmds, Jn. xv. 16; vrapEs, Heb. x. 34; dyapria,
Jn.ix.41; Bpaots, opp. to 7 drodAvpevn, Jn. vi. 27; one’s
Sixatoovvyn with eis tov ai@va added, 2 Co. ix. 9; 76 phya
kupiov, 1 Pet.i.25. things which one does not part with
are said peévew to him, i. e. fo remain to him, be still in
(his) possession: Acts v. 4 (1 Mace. xv. 7). 3. to
STATE Or CONDITION; to remain as one is, not to become
another or different: with a predicate nom. povos, Jn.
xii. 24; doadevros, Acts xxvii. 41; dyapos, 1 Co. vii. 11;
motos, 2 Tim. ii. 13; tepevs, Heb. vil. 3; with adverbs,
ovtws, 1 Co. vii.40; ws kaya, ibid. 8; év w. dat. of the
state, ibid. 20, 24. II. transitively ; teva, to wait
for, await one [cf. B. § 131, 4]: Acts xx. 23; with ev and
dat. of place added, ibid. 5.
kKaTa-, Tapa-, Cvv-Trapa-, TEpt-, TpoG-, Umr0-pEVva. |
pepitw: 1 aor. euepica; pf. pepepixa (1 Co. vii. 17 T
Tr txt. WH txt.); Pass., pf. peuepeopat; 1 aor. dueps
aOnv; Mid., 1 aor. inf. pepicacOac; (fr. pépos, as periva
[Comp.: dva-, d1a-, év-, erty
pepluva
fr. peAos); fr. Xen. down; Sept. for poms to divide;
i. e. a. to separate into parts, cut into pieces: pass.
peyépiorat 6 Xpiords; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye
claim as yours, been like yourselves divided into parts,
so that one has one part and another another part? 1
Co. i. 138 [L WH txt. punctuate so as to take it as an ex-
clamatory declaration; see Meyer in loc.}; trop. wepe-
ptorat » yur) kal 7 mapGevos, differ in their aims, follow
different interests, [A. V. there is a difference between;
but L Tr WH connect pep. with what precedes], 1 Co.
vii. 33 (34); to divide into parties, i. e. be split into fac-
tions (Polyb. 8, 23,9): xa6’ éuavrod to be at variance with
one’s self, to rebel [ A. V. divided] against one’s self, Mt.
xii. 25; also em euaurov, ib. 26; Mk. iii. 24-26. b.
to distribute : ri twat, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 41;
to bestow, impart: riwi, 1 Co. vii. 17; ri tun, Ro. xii. 3; 2
Co. x. 13; Heb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9) ;
mid. wepifouai 7s pera twos, to divide (for one’s self) a
thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Dem. p. 913, 1). [Comp.:
dia-, cup-pepicw. | *
péepipva, -as, 7, (fr. wepitw, pepifouat, to be drawn in
different directions, cf. [Eng. ‘ distraction’ and ‘ curae
quae meum animum divorse trahunt’] Ter. Andr. 1,5, 25;
Verg. Aen. 4, 285 sq.; [but acc. to al. derived fr. a root
meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to paprvs, memor,
etc.; cf. Vaniéek p.1201; Curtius § 466; Fick iv. 283;
see pdprus]), care, anxiety: 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. liv. (Iv.)
23); Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34; w. gen. of the obj., care to
be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28; tov aidvos
(rovrov), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly
life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Hom.h. Mere.), Hes.,
Pind., al.] *
peptpvaw, -@; fut. pepisynow; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur.
pepimynonte ; (mepyva) ; a. to be anxious; to be
troubled with cares: absol., Mt. vi. 27, 31; Lk. xii. 25;
pndev pep. be anxious about nothing, Phil. iv. 6; with
dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit-
ous [cf. W. § 31, 1 b.]: 77 Wux7, about sustaining life,
Tt ocopati, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; mepi twos, about a
thing, Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 26; eis tv avprov, for the
morrow, i.e. about what may be on the morrow. Mt. vi.
34; foll. by an indir. quest. r@s 7 ri, Mt. x.19; Lk. xii.
11 {here Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. WH br. 4 ri]; joined with
rupBdaterba (GopuBat.) foll. by rept woddd, Lk. x. 41 [WH
mrg. om. | b. tocare for, look out for, (a thing) ; to
seek to promote one’s interests: ra éavtns, Mt. vi. 34 Ree. 5
ra Tov kupiov, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; Ta Tod Kécpov, 1 Co. vii. 34;
éauris, Mt. vi. 34 LT Tr WH (a usage unknown to Grk.
writ.. although they put a gen. after other verbs of caring
or providing for, as émipedeioOa, ppovriterv, mpovoeir, cf.
Kriiger § 47,11; W. 205 (193); B. § 133, 25); ra mepi
twos, Phil. ii. 20; tva ro ard brép GAANAY pepysvaot Ta
péAn, that the members may have the same care one for
another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for 384, to be anxious, Ps,
XXXVii. (xxxviii.) 19; 11. to be disturbed, annoyed in
spirit, 2 S. vii. 10; 1 Chr. xvii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen.
and Soph. down.) [Comp.: mpo-pepipvdo.] *
peols, -i80s, 7, (see wépos), Sept. chiefly for pz, API,
400
w<pos
739; [fr. Antipho and Thue. down]; a part, i. q. i.
a part as distinct from the whole: (rjs) Maxedovias, Acts
xvi. 12 [on which see Hort in WH. App. ad loc. ]. 2.
an assigned part, a portion, share: Lk. x. 42 (see ayaOés,
2); €ore pou pepis pera twvos, I have a portion, i. e. fellow-
ship, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. otk gore por pepis } KARNpos
év tu, I have neither part nor lot, take no share, ina
thing, Acts viii. 21; ixavody twa eis THv pepida tids, to
make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen.;
al. gen. of apposition], Col. i. 12.*
pepirpds, -ov, 6, (uepitw), a division, partition, (Plat.,
Polyb., Strab., [al.]) ; 1. a distribution; plur. dis
tributions of various kinds: mvedparos dyiov, gen. of the
obj., Heb. ii. 4. 2. a separation: aypte peptapod
Wuxis k. wvevparos, which many take actively: ‘up to the
dividing’ i. e. so far as to cleave asunder or separate;
but it is not easy to understand what the dividing of the
‘soul’ is. Hence it is more correct, I think, and more
in accordance with the context, to take the word pas-
sively (just as other verbal subst. ending in pés are used,
e. g. dyraopds, Tetpacpos), and translate even to the divi-
sion, etc., i.e. to that most hidden spot, the dividing line
between soul and spirit, where the one passes into the
other, Heb. iv. 12; [ef. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w.
p- 325 sq. ].*
pEpirtis, -0v, 6, (wepitw), a divider: of an inheritance,
Lk. xii. 14. (Pollux [4, 176].) *
p€pos, -ous, 7d, (wetpouat to share, receive one’s due por-
tion), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down], a part; i.e. 1.
a part due or assigned to one, (Germ. Antheil): apatpeiv
TO pépos Tivos (gen. of pers.) dé or &« twos (gen. of the
thing), Rev. xxii.19; yew pépos ev with dat. of the thing,
Rev. xx. 6; peépos €xew pera Twos, (participation in the
same thing, i. e.) to have part (fellowship) with one, Jn.
xiii. 8; hence, as sometimes in class. Grk. (Eur. Ale. 477
[474]), lot, destiny, assigned to one, Rev. xxi. 8; reéevar
To pépos Twos peta Tey, to appoint one his lot with cer-
tain persons, Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 2. one of
the constituent parts of a whole; a. univ.: ina con-
text where the whole and its parts are distinguished, Lk.
xi. 36; Jn. xix. 23; Rev. xvi. 19; w.agen. of the whole,
Lk. xv. 12; xxiv. 42; where it is evident from the con-
text of what whole it is a part, Acts v. 2; Eph. iv. 16;
7 év pépos, SC. Tod cuvedpiov, Acts xxiii. 6; Tod pépous
tay Papicaiwy, of that part of the Sanhedrin which con-
sisted of Pharisees, Acts xxiii. 9 [not Lehm.]; ra peépn,
w. gen. of a province or country, the divisions or regions
which make up the land or province, Mt. ii. 22; Acts ii.
10; w. gen. of a city, the region belonging to a city,
country around it, Mt. xv. 21; xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 103
ra dvwrepixa pépn, the upper districts (in tacit contrast
with ra xar@repa, and with them forming one whole),
Acts xix. 1; 7a pépn ékeiva, those regions (which are
parts of the country just mentioned, i. e. Macedonia), Acts
Xx. 23 7a kaTorepa pepn W. gen. of apposition, THs ys,
Eph. iv. 9 (on which see xar@repos); es ra Seta pepy Tov
mXoiou, i. e. into the parts (i. e. spots sc. of the lake) ou
the right side of the ship, Jn. xxi. 6. Adverbial phrases
peonuBpla
dvd pépos (see avd, 1), 1 Co. xiv. 27; Kara pépos, sever-
aily, part by part, in detail, Heb. ix. 5 [see «ard, II. 3
a. y-]3 mépos te (ace. absol.) in part, partly, 1 Co. xi. 18
(Thue. 2, 64; 4, 30; Isocr. p. 426 d.); amd peépous, in
part, i. e. somewhat, 2 Co. i. 14; in a measure, to some de-
gree, ib. ii. 5; [Ro. xv. 24]; as respects a part, Ro. xi. 25 ;
here and there, Ro. xv. 153 ék pépous as respects indi-
vidual persons and things, severally, individually, 1 Co.
xii. 27; in part, partially, i. e. imperfectly, 1 Co. xiii. 9,
12; 7rd ék pepous (opp. to rd rédetov) [A. V. that which
is in part] imperfect (Luth. well, das Stiickwerk), ibid. 10.
[Green (Crit. Note on 2 Co. i. 14) says “dé p. differs in
Paul’s usage from éx p. in that the latter is a contrasted
term in express opposition to the idea of a complete whole,
the other being used simply without such aim”; cf.
Bnhdy. Syntax, p. 230; Meyer on 1 Co. xii. 27.] b.
any particular, Germ. Stiick, (where the writer means to
intimate that there are other matters, to be separated
from that which he has specified): ev r@ péper Tovrea,
in this’ particular i.e. in regard to this, in this respect,
1 Pet. iv. 16 R; 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 3; w. a gen. of the thing,
Col. ii. 16 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; rodro rd pépos, se.
ris épyacias npey (branch of business), Acts xix. 27,
cf. 25.*
peonpBpia, -as, 7, (uecos and jpepa), fr. Hdt. down, mid-
day [on the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (115) ]; a.
(as respects time) noon: Acts xxii. 6. b. (as re-
spects locality) the south: Acts viii 26 [al. refer this also
to a.; see xara, II. 2].*
peoitedw: 1 aor. euecitrevoa; (peoirys [cf. W. p. 25
e:]); 1. to act as mediator, between litigating or
covenanting parties; trans. to accomplish something by
interposing between two parties, to mediate, (with acc. of
the result) : rv Suddvow, Polyb. 11, 34,35; tas cvvOnxas,
Diod. 19, 71; Dion. Hal. 9,59; [cf. Philo de plant. Noé,
ii. 2 fin. ]. 2. as a peairns is a sponsor or surety (Jo-
seph. antt. 4, 6, 7 radra dpvivres €Xeyor Kai Tov Oedv peci-
tv dv imurxvoovro motovjevor (cf. Philo de spec. legg. iii.
7 dopdrw S€ mpdypatt mavrws ddpatos peowtever Beds etc. }),
SO peoirevw comes to signify to pledge one’s self, give
surely: Opkxe, Heb. vi. 17.*
pecitns, -ov, 0, (uécos), one who intervenes between
two, either in order to make or restore peace and friend-
ship, or to form a compact, or for ratifying a covenant ;
a medium of communication, arbitrator, (Vulg. [and A. V.]
mediator): 6 peoirns [generic art. cf. W. § 18, 1 sub fin.],
i.e. every mediator, whoever acts as mediator, évds ov
éort, does not belong to one party but to two or more,
Gal. iii. 20. Used of Moses, as one who brought the
commands of God to the people of Israel and acted as
mediator with God on behalf of the people, ib. 19 (cf.
Deut. v. 5; hence he is called peaitns cai SuadXaxrhs by
Philo also, vit. Moys. iii. § 19). Christ is called peo.
Geod x. avOparav, since he interposed by his death and
restored the harmony between God and man which
human sin had broken, 1 Tim. ii. 5; also peo. d:aOnens,
Heb. viii. 6; ix.15; xii. 24. (Polyb. 28, 15, 8; Diod. 4,
54; Philo de somn. i. § 22; Joseph. antt. 16, 2,2; Plut.
401
péaos
de Is. et Os. 46; once in Sept., Job ix. 33.) Cf. Fischer,
De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 351 sqq.*
pero-viKtiov, -ov, Td, (neut. of the adj. pecovverios in
Pind. et al., fr. weoos and wis, vueros), midnight: peco-
vuxriov, at midnight [W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Mk.
xiii. 35 [here T Tr WH ace.; cf. W. 230 (215 sq.); B.
§ 131, 11]; Lk. xi. 5; card 7d p. about midnight, Acts
xvi. 25; pexpe p. until midnight, Acts xx. 7. (Sept.;
Hippocr., Aristot., Diod., Strabo, Leian., Plut.; ef. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 53, [W. p. 23 c.].) *
Mecororapta, -as, 7, (fem. of pecororduios, -a, -ov, SC.
x@pa; fr. pesos and rorapds), Mesopotamia, the name,
not so much political as geographical (scarcely in use
before the time of Alexander the Great), of a region in
Asia, lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris
(whence it took its name; cf. Arrian. anab. Alex. 7, 7;
Tac. ann. 6, 37; 0°93 DS, Aram of the two rivers, Gen.
xxiv. 10), bounded on the N. by the range of Taurus
and on the S. by the Persian Gulf; many Jews had
settled in it (Joseph. antt. 12,3, 4): Acts ii. 9; vii. 2.
[Cf. Socin in Encycl. Brit. ed. 9 s. v.; Rawlinson, He-
rodotus, vol. i. Essay ix.]*
péoos, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius,
=a, -umM) 5 1. as an adjective: péons vuxros, at mid-
night, Mt. xxv. 6; peons nuéepas, Acts xxvi. 13 (acc. to
Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ. said pe-
Gov pepas, pevovoa ipéepa, peonuBpia); w- gen.: [exd-
Onto 6 Teérpos péoos aitay, Lk. xxii. 55 (RG Lev péow) ];
péoos tyav éornke [al. ornxer], stands in the midst of
you, Jn. i. 26, (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 330b.3; polit. p. 303 a.) ;
€axiaOn pécor, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii.
45 [W. 131 (124) note]; éAdkyoe pecos, Acts i. 18;
(éoravpwoav) pécoy Tov Incovy, Jn. xix. 18. 2. the
neut. 7d pécov or (without the art. in adverb. phrases,
as did pecou, ev peow, cf. W. 123 (117); [cf. B. § 125, 6])
pécov is used as a substantive; Sept. for 7)A (constr.
state 1M), and 39); the midst: dvd peoov (see ava, 1
[and added note below]); da pécov (rivds), through the
midst (Am. v.17; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii-) 4): adréy, through
the midst of them, Lk. iv. 30; Jn. viii. 59 [Rec.]; Sapa-
petas, Lk. xvii. 11 [RG, but LT Tr WH 6&1 péoor (see
did, B. I.); others take the phrase here in the sense of
between (Xen. an. 1, 4,4; Aristot. de anim. 2, 11 vol.
i. p. 423%, 12; see L. and S.s. v. III.1d.); cf. Meyer
ed. Weiss in loc. and added note below]; eis 7d pécov,
into the midst, i. e., ace. to the context, either the mid-
dle of a room or the midst of those assembled in it:
Mk. iii. 3; xiv. 60 Rec!; Lk. iv. 35; v.19; vi. 8; Jn.
xx. 19, 26; eis péoor (cf. Germ. mittenhin), Mk. xiv. 60
GLT Tr WH; év re péoe, in the middle of the apart-
ment or before the guests, Mt. xiv. 6; év péo, in the
midst of the place spoken of, -Jn. viii. 3,9; in the middte
of the room, before all, Acts iv. 7; w. gen. of place,
Rev. ii. 7 Rec.; Lk. xxi. 21; (i. q. Germ. mittenauf) ths
mAarevas, Rev. xxii. 2 [but see below]; add, Lk. xxii. 55°;
Acts xvii. 22; tis Oadaoons, in the midst (of the surface
of) the sea, Mk. vi. 47; w. gen. plur. in the midst of,
amongst: w. gen. of things, Mt. x.16; Lk. viii. 7; x. 33
foeo OTOLYOV
Rev. i. 13; ii.1; w. gen. of pers., Mt. xviii. 2; Mk. ix.
36; Lk. ii. 46; xxii. 55> [here T Tr WH péoos; see 1
above]; xxiv. 36; Acts 1.15; ii. 22; xxvii. 21; Rev. v.
6 [°? (see below); vi. 6]; trop. ev péeo@ avray eit, I am
present with them by my divine power, Mt. xviii. 20;
w. gen. of a collective noun, Phil. ii. 15 R [see 3 below];
Heb. ii. 12; where association or intercourse is the topic,
equiv. to among, in intercourse with: Lk. xxii. 27; 1 Th.
ii. 7. in the midst of, i.e. in the space within, rod Opovov
(which must be conceived of as having a semicircular
shape): Rey. iv. 6; v. 6 [*?] where cf. De Wette and
Bleek ; [but De Wette’s note on v. 6 runs “ And I saw
between the throne and the four living creatures and the
elders (i. e. in the vacant space between the throne and
the living creatures [on one side] and elders [on the
other side], accordingly nearest the throne” etc.) ; ava
uécov in vii. 17 also he interprets in the same way; fur-
ther see xxii. 2; cf. Kliefoth, Com. vol. ii. p.40. For év
peow in this sense see Xen. an. 2, 2,3; 2, 4, 17. 21;
5, 2, 27, etc.; Hab. iii. 2; dva pécov Polyb. 5, 55, 7; often
in Aristot. (see Bonitz’s index s. v. peoos); Num. xvi.
48; Deut. v. 5; Josh. xxii. 25; Judg. xv.4; 1 K. v.12;
Ezek. xlvii. 18; xlviii. 22; cf. Gen. i. 4; see Meyer on
1 Co. vi. 5; cf. dva, 1]. xara pécov tis vutos, about
midnight, Acts xxvii. 27 [see card, II. 2]. &k row pécov,
like the Lat. e medio, i.e. out of the way, out of sight:
aipw mt, to.take out of the way, to abolish, Col. ii. 14
[ Plut. de curiositate 9; Is. lvii. 2]; yivowar ek pécov, to
be taken out of the way, to disappear, 2 Th. ii. 7; w.
gen. of pers., éx peaou tivav, from the society or company
of, out from among: Mt. xiii. 49; Acts xvil. 33; xxiii. 10;
LiGo.w. 2) 2 Co. wi. 07). (ix, xxxi. 145 Num. xavs 44
Alex.). 3. the neut. pewoyr is used adverbially with
a gen., in the midst of anything: jv péecov tis Oadacons,
Mt. xiv. 24 [otherwise Tr txt. WH txt.; yet cf. W. § 54,
6] ({so Exod. xiv. 27]; Téwv yap pecor eiva tis Iwvins,
Hdt. 7,170) ; yeveds oxo\as, Phil. ii. 15 LT Tr WH (rhs
nuepas, the middle of the day, Sus. 7 Theodot.); ef. B.
123 (107 sq.), [cf. 319 (274); W. as above]. *
perdTorxov, -ov, TO, (wecos, and roixyos the wall of a
house), a partition-wall: +6 p. rov ppaypoi (i. e. rov ppay-
pov Tov peadrorxyoy ovra [A. V. the middle wall of parti-
tion; W. § 59, 8a.]), Eph. ii. 14. (Only once besides,
and that too in the masc.: rév ris ndovns K. dperns peod-
totxov, Eratosth. ap. Athen. 7 p. 281 d.) *
peroupavnpa, -ros, Td, (fr. weoovpavéw; the sun is said
pecoupavetv lo be in mid-heaven, when it has reached the
meridian), mid-heaven, the highest point in the heavens,
which the sun occupies at noon, where what is done can be
seen and heard by all: Rev. viii. 13 (cf. Diisterdieck ad
loc.) ; xiv. 6; xix.17. (Manetho, Plut., Sext. Emp.) *
eperdw; (uecos); to be in the middle, be midway: ris
€optns peoovons [where a few codd. pecafovons (vuxrés
peoat. Sap. xvill. 14)], when it was the midst of the
feast, the feast half-spent, Jn. vii. 14 (pecovons ris
vuxtos, Ex. xii. 29; Judith xii. 5; ris nuépas, Neh. viii. 3
[Ald., Compl.]; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down; @€pous pecoivros, Thue. 6, 30).*
402
peTa
Meocias. -ov [cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, Messiah; Chald.
xmwn, Hebr. mn, i. q. Grk. yptords, q. v.: In. i. 41
(42); iv. 25. Cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth.
Theol., 1876, p. 603; [Lagarde, Psalt. vers. Memphit.,
1875, p. vii. On the general subject see esp. Abbot’s
supplement to art. Messiah in B. D. Am. ed. and reff.
added by Orelli (cf. Schaff-Herzog) in Herzog 2 s. v. to
Oehler’s art. ]*
perros, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. [i. e. Epigr.] down, Sept. for
xD, full; w. gen. of the thing: prop., Jn. xix. 29; xxi.
11; Jas. iii. 8; trop. in reference to persons, whose,
minds are as it were filled with thoughts and emotions,
either good or bad, Mt. xxiii. 28; Ro. i. 29; xv. 14;
2 Pet. ii. 14; Jas. iii. 17, (Prov. vi. 34).*
pertow, -@; (uweotds); to fill, fill full: yAevKous peperta-
pevos, Acts ii. 13. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., al.; 3 Mace.
Vip lO))=
pera, [on its neglect of elision before proper names be-
ginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at
least in Tdf.’s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. WH. Intr.
p- 146°; W.§ 5,1 a.; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to
pecos (as Germ. mit to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop. in
the midst of, amid, denoting association, union, accom-
paniment; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship
to pecos ; some connect it rather with dua, Germ. sammt,
cf. Curtius § 212; Vaniéek p. 972]. It takes the gen. and
acc. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distine-
tion between pera and cur, see ovr, init. ]
I. with the GENITIVE (Sept. for D8, DY, IM, etc.),
among, with, [ef. W. 376 (352) sq.]; 1. amid,
among ; a. prop.: pera Tov vexpov, among the dead,
Lk. xxiv. 5 (werd vexpov keiooua, Eur. Hee. 209; Odawereé
pe pera TOV TaTepwv pov, Gen. xlix. 29 Sept.; peta Covray
eivat, to be among the living, Soph. Phil. 1312); Aoyi-
(ecOar pera avopwy, to be reckoned, numbered, among
transcressors, Mk. xv. 28 [G'T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]
and Lk. xxii. 37, fr. Is. liii. 12 (where Sept. év avdpors) ;
pera Tov Onpiov etvar, Mk. i. 13; yoyyv¢ew per adAnrov,
Jn. vi. 435; oxnvy tod Oeod peta Tt. avOparav, Rev. xxi. 3;
add, Mt. xxiv. 51; xxvi.58; Mk. xiv.54; Lk. xii.46; Jn.
xviii. 5, 18; Acts i. 26, ete. b. trop.: pera Suwypar,
amid persecutions, Mk. x. 30 (wera kevdvvwvr, amid perils,
Thue. 1, 18); 4 dydrn pe? npor, love among us, mutual
love, 1 Jn. iv. 17 [al. understand pe nudv here of the
sphere or abode, and connect it with the verb; cf. De
Wette, or Huther, or Westcott,inloc.]. Henceused 2.
of association and companionship, with (Lat.
cum; Germ. mit, often also bet) ; a. after verbs of
going, coming, departing, remaining, etc., w.
the gen. of the associate or companion: Mt. xx. 20;
xxVi.36 3 Mik. i.:29\5) 211.07 3) xi. 113 oxiv. 175) Lkweis
xiv. 31; Jn. iii. 22; xi. 543 Gal. ii. 1; Jesus the Mes-
siah it is said will come hereafter pera rév dyyédor, Mt.
xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Th. i. 7; on the
other hand, w. the gen. of the pers. to whom one joins
himself as a companion: Mt. v.41; Mk. v. 24; Lk. ii.
51; Rev. xxii. 12; a&yyeAor per’ airov, Mt. xxv. 31; pera
tivos, contextually i. q. with one as leader, Mt. xxv. 10;
pETA 403
xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Acts vii. 45. mepumareiv perd
rivos, to associate with one as his follower and adherent,
Jn. vi. 66; yivopa p. tevos, to come into fellowship and
intercourse with, become associated with, one: Mk. xvi.
10; Acts vii. 838; ix. 19; xx. 18. mapadapBavew twa
pe éavrov, to take with or to one’s self as an attend-
ant or companion: Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33;
dyew, 2 Tim. iv. 11; éyew peO éavrov, to have with one’s
self> iva, Mts xv- 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii: 193 .xiv.. 7;
Jn. xii. 8; ri, Mk. viii. 14; AapBavew, Mt. xxv. 33; dko-
NovOeiv pera Tivos, see akodovbéw, 1 and 2, [cf. W. 233
sq. (219)]. b. eivac pera tivos is used in various
senses, a. prop. of those who associate with one and
accompany him wherever he goes: in which sense the
disciples of Jesus are said to be (or to have been) with
him, Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxvi.69, 71; Lk. xxii. 59, cf. Mk.
v.18; with am’ dpyjs added, Jn. xv. 27; of those who at
a particular time associate with one or accompany him
anywhere, Mt. v. 25; Jn. iii. 26; ix. 40; xii. 17; xx.
24,26; 2 Tim.iv.11; sometimes the ptcp. dy», dvra, ete.,
must be added mentally: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. ix. 8; Jn.
XVili. 265 of (Gvres) pera Tivos, his attendants or com-
panions, Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 25; Lk. vi. 3; Acts xx. 34;
sc. Ovres, Tit. iii. 15. Jesus says that he is or has been
with his disciples, Jn. xiii. 33; xiv. 9; and that, to ad-
vise and help them, Jn. xvi. 4; Mt. xvii. 17, (MK. ix.
19 and Lk. ix. 41 mpés dpas), even as one whom they could
be said to have with them, Mt. ix. 15; Lk. v. 34; just
as he in turn desires that his disciples may hereafter be
with himself, Jn. xvii. 24. ships also are said to be with
one who is travelling by vessel, i. e. to attend him, Mk.
iv. 36. B. trop. the phrase [to be with, see b.] is used
of God, if heis present to guide and help one: Jn. iii. 2;
vill. 29; xvi.382; Acts vii.9; x.38; 2Co.xili.11; Phil.
iv. 9; with efvae omitted, Mt. i. 23; Lk. i. 28; Ro. xv.
33; here belongs dea éroincer 6 Oeds pet adtar sc. dv, by
being present with them by his divine assistance [cf. W.
376 (353); Green p. 218], Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [cf. h.
below]; and conversely, mAnpoocers pe evppoovyns pera
Tov mMpocwrov cov Sc. dvra, i. e. being in thy presence [yet
cf. W. 376 (352) note], Acts ii. 28 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 115
7) Xetp Kupiov is used as a substitute for God himself (by
a Hebraism [see yeép, sub fin.]) in Lk. i. 66; Acts xi. 21;
of Christ, who is to be present with his followers by his
divine power and aid: Mt. xxviii. 20; Acts xviii. 10, (yé-
vewv era is used of the Holy Spirit as a perpetual helper,
Jn. xiv.16 RG); at the close of the Epistles, the writers
pray that there may be with the readers (i. e. always
present to help them) — 6 Oeds, 2 Co. xiii. 11; —6 kvptos,
2 Th. iii. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 22;— 1% ydpus tov x. Invov Xp.
(where éorw must be supplied [cf. W. § 64, 2b.; B.§129,
22]), Ro. xvi. 20, 24 [RG]; 1Co. xvi. 23; 2 Co. xiii. 13
(14); Gal. vi.18; Phil. iv. 23; 1 Th. v.28; 2 Th. iii. 18;
Philem. 25; Rev. xxii. 21;—1 yapes simply, Eph. vi. 24;
Col. iv. 18; 1 Tim. vi. 21 (22); Tit. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25;
2 Jn. 3; — 4 aydrn pov, 1 Co. xvi. 24; the same phrase
is used also of truth, compared to a guide, 2 Jn. 2. y:
Opp. to evar kat d Twos, to be with one i.e. on one’s side:
peTa
Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (and often in class. Grk.); simi-
larly pévew pera twos, to side with one steadfastly, 1 Jn.
Liewli9. c. with the gen. of the person who is another’s
associate either in acting or in his experiences; so after
verbs of eating, drinking, supping, etc.: Mt. viii. 11; ix.
11; xxiv. 49; xxvi. 18, 23, 29; Mk. xiv. 18, 20; Lk. v.
30; vil. 36; xxii. 11, 15; xxiv. 30; Jn. xiii. 18; Gal. ii.
12; Rev. iii. 20, etc. ; ypnyopetv, Mt. xxvi. 38, 40; xaipew,
kAaiew, Ro. xii. 15; evppaiverOa, Ro. xv. 10; maporxeiv,
Heb. xi. 9; Sovdevew, Gal. iv. 25; Baodevev, Rev. xx. 4,
6; Cv, LK. ii. 365 amoOvnckew, Jn. xi. 16; Badrreoba eig
Thy ynv, Rev. xii. 9; kAnpovopeiv, Gal. iv. 30; ouvaye.v, Mt.
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23,andotherexx. 4. with a gen. of the
pers. with whom one (of two) does anything mutually
or by turns: so after ouvaipew doyov, to make a reckon-
ing, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23; xxv. 19; ovvdyeoOat,
Mt. xxviii. 12; Jn. xviii. 2; ouvpPovAcov moeiv, Mk. iii. 6 ;
Nadeiv (see Aadéw, 5); ovdAdareiv, Mt. xvii. 3; Acts xxv.
12; potyevew, Rev. ii. 22; podiverOa, Rev. xiv. 4; Top-
veve, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 3,9; pepi¢oua, Lk. xii. 13;
after verbs of disputing, waging war, contend-
ing at law: zodepeiv, Rev. ii. 16; xii. 7 (where Ree.
card); xili.4; xvii. 14, (so for/”9 Dy 0m), 1S. xvii. 33;
1 K. xii. 24, a usage foreign to the native Greeks, who
say moepetv tim, also mpds twa, emi twa, to wage war
against one; but modepetv pera twos, to wage war with one
as an ally, in conjunction with, Thue. 1,18; Xen. Hell.
7,1, 27; (ef. B. § 133, 8; W. § 28,1; 214 (201); 406
(379) note]); addepov moreiv, Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii.
7; xix. 19, (soin Lat. bellare cum ete. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33;
bellum gerere, Cic. de divinat. 1,46); ¢nrnows éyévero, Jn.
ili. 25; (nreiv, Jn. xvi.19; kpiveoOar, kpivara éyeww, 1 Co.
vi. 6 sq.; after verbs and phrases which indicate mutual
inclinations and pursuits, the entering into agreement
or relations with, etc.; as eipnveveww, eipnrnv didkev, Ro.
xii. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 22; Heb. xii. 14; gidos, Lk. xxxiii.
12; cupdoveiv, Mt. xx. 2; pepis pera tivos, 2 Co. vi. 15;
eéxew pépos, Jn. xill. 8; ouykaraGeots, 2 Co. vi. 16; Kower
viav €xew, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6 sq.; airia (see the word, 3), Mt.
xixe 10! e. of divers other associations of persons
or things;— where the action or condition expressed
by the verb refers to persons or things besides those
specified by the dat. or ace. (somewhat rare in Grk. auth.,
as loyvv Te Kal KaAXos peta vyteias AapBavew, Plat. rep. 9,
p- 591 b. [cf. W. § 47, h.]): Sov (Ree. edpov) 16 maidiov
peta Mapias, Mt. ii. 11; avramodovvac... tpiv... pe
qpav, 2 Th.i.6 sq.; after ékdéyecOa, 1 Co. xvi. 11; after
verbs of sending, Mt. xxii. 16; 2 Co. viii. 18. dyamy pera
miatews, Eph. vi. 23; év miorer... peta swppoovrns, 1
Tim. ii. 15; 4 evo€Beca pera adrapxeias, 1 Tim. vi. 6; in
this way the term which follows is associated as sec-
ondary with its predecessor as primary; but when kat
stands between them they are co-ordinated. Col. i.
11; 1 Tim. i. 14. of mingling one thing with another,
plyvupl te pera rwvos (in class. auth. ri run [cf. B. § 133,
8]): Lk. xiii. 1; pass. Mt. xxvii. 34. f. with the gen.
of mental feelings desires and emotions, of bodily move-
ments, and of other acts which are so to speak the at-
peTa
tendants of what is done or occurs; so that in this way
the characteristic of the action or occurrence is de-
scribed,— which in most cases can be expressed by a
cognate adverb or participle [cf. W. u.s.]: pera aidois,
1 Tim. ii. 9; Heb. xii. 28 [Rece.]; aioyvrns, Lk. xiv. 9 ;
novxias, 2 Th. iii. 12; yapas, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16;
WUkaivill. 13 sxe Wig) XXIV 2 esate ph 16
Heb. x. 34; mpoOupias, Acts xvii. 11; PdBov k. rpdpov, 2
Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12; @dBov x. xapas, Mt.
XXViii. 8; mpavtyros x. PdBou, 1 Pet. iii. 16 (15); mappyotas,
Acts ii. 29; iv. 29, 31; xxviii. 31; Heb. iv. 16; evxapr
orias, Acts xxiv. 3; Phil. iv. 6; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq.; aAy-
Owns kapdias, Heb. x. 22; ramewodpoovryns xrr., Eph. iv.
2; Acts xx.19; dpyjs, Mk. iii. 5; edvoias, Eph. vi. 7;
Bias, Acts v.26; xxiv. 7 Rec.; pera daxpvar, with tears,
Mk. ix. 24[RG WH (rejected) mrg.]; Heb.v. 7; xii. 17,
(Plat. apol. p. 34 c.); eipnyns, Acts xv. 33; Heb. xi. 31;
emOecews Tav xetpav, 1 Tim. iv. 14 [W.u.s.]; povis peyd-
Ans, Lk. xvii. 15; vnorecov, Acts xiv. 23; dpxov or dpxwpo-
oias, Mt. xiv. 7; xxvi. 72; Heb. vii. 21; @opiBou, Acts
xxiv. 18; mapaxdnoews, 2 Co. viii. 4; maparnpnoews, Lk.
xvii. 20; omovdys, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39; vBpews x. Cyutas,
Acts xxvii. 10; davracias, xxv. 23; adpov, Lk. ix. 39; to
this head may be referred pera xovorwdias, posting the
guard, Mt. xxvii. 66 [so W. (1. c.) et al. (cf. Meyer ad loc.);
others ‘in company with the guard’; cf. Jas. Morison ad
loc.; Green p. 218]. g. after verbs of coming, depart-
ing, sending, with gen. of the thing with which one is fur-
nished or equipped: pera ddEns x. Suvdpews, Mt. xxiv. 30;
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; é£ovoias x. emitpom7js, Acts
Xxvi. 12; payatpav x. Eidov, Mt. xxvi. 47,55; Mk. xiv.
43,48; Lk. xxii. 52; pavdv x. drdav, Jn. xviii. 3; pera
oddreyyos, Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. § 132,10]. where an in-
strumental dat. might have been used [cf. W. § 31, 8 d.],
pera Bpaxtovos vYyndov eEdyew tivd, Acts xiii. 17. h.
in imitation of the Hebr.: ¢Xeos wouety pera tivos, to show
mercy toward one, and peyadvvew €d. p. 7. to magnify,
show great, mercy toward one; see 7d éAeos, 1. To this
head many refer dca éroincey 6 Oeds per avtav, Acts xiv.
27; xv. 4, but see above, 2 b. B.
II. with the AccusaTIvE [W. § 49, f.]; 1. prop.
into the middle of, into the midst of, among, after verbs of
coming, bringing, moving; so esp. in Hom. 2. it
denotes (following accompaniment), sequence, i. e. the
order in which one thing follows another ; a. in order
of Place; after, behind, (so fr. Hom. down); once in
the N. T. [W. u. s.]: Heb. ix. 3 (Judith ii. 4). b. in
order of Time; after (Sept. for 78, “NS, YP> ete.):
peO npuépas €&, after six days (had passed), Mt. xvii. 1;
Mk. ix. 2; add, Mt. xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1; Lk. i. 24; ii.
46, etc., cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Mt. p. 22 sq.3 per’ ov 7roA-
Aas jpépas, Lk. xv..13; perd revas hp., Acts xv. 36; xxiv.
24; ov pera moddds TavTas nuépas, not long after these
days [A. V. not many days hence], Acts i. 5, ef. De Wette
ad loc. and W. 161 (152); [B. § 127, 4]; py. rpeis pavas,
Acts xxviii. 11; jp. &rn rpia, Gal. i. 18, ete.; pe. xpdvov
modvy, Mt. xxv. 19; p. rocodrov xp: Heb. iv. 7. added to
the names of events or achievements, and of festivals: p.
404
peTadioops
Thy petotxeciay BaB. Mt. i. 12; p. rv Ort, Mt. xxiv.
29; Mk. xiii. 24; add, Mt. xxvii. 53; Acts x. 37; xx. 29;
2 Pet. i. 15; p. thy dvayrwow, Acts xiii. 15; po. play ke
Sevrépav vovbeciar, Tit. iii. 10; p. 7d mdoyxa, Acts xii. 4
cf. xx. 6; with the names of persons or things having the
notion of time associated with them: perd rodrov, addy,
ete., Acts v. 37; vii. 5; xiii. 25; xix.4; p. rdv VOLOVy
Heb. vii. 28; pera 7d Yopiov, after the morsel was taken,
Jn. xiii. 27 [cf. B. § 147, 26]; foll. by the neut. demonstr.
pron. [cf. W. 540 (508)]: pera rodro, Jn. ii. 12; xi. 7, 11;
xix. 28; Heb. ix. 27; [Rev. vii. 1 LT Tr WH]; pera
ravra [cf. W.162 (153) ], Mk. xvi.12; Lk.v.27; x.1; xii.
4 [W.u.s.]; xvii. 8; xvili.4; Acts vii. 7; xiii. 20; xv.
163 xviii. 1; Jn. ill. 225 v. 1, 143 vi. 15: vil. 15 -xiik. 7;
xix. 38; xxi. 1; Heb. iv.8; 1 Pet. i.11; Rev. i. 19; iv.
bs) vill ‘Ree. }, 9 ;°ixs 12s xv. Ss evil} ey eee
3, and very often in Grk. writ. it stands before the neut.
of adjectives of quantity, measure, and time: per od mond,
not long after [R. V. after no long time], Acts xxvii. 14;
pera puxpdr, shortly after [A. V. after a little while], Mt.
xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 70; pera Bpaxd, Lk. xxii. 58; also be-
fore infinitives with the neut. art. (Lat. postquam with a
finite verb, [cf. B. § 140,11; W. § 44, 6]) ;—the aorist
inf.: Mt. xxvi. 32; Mk.i.14; xiv. 28; xvi.19; Lk. xii.
5; xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; Acts i.3; vii.4; x.
40s av. 0S 5 excel Co) i725), Bebe
III. In composirion, pera denotes 1. associa-
tion, fellowship, participation, with: as in peradiddvat,
peradauBavery, peTexetv, METOX|- 2. exchange, trans-
fer, transmutation; (Lat. trans, Germ. um): peradddooa,
perapzéAopat[ Prof. Grimm prob. means here petavoéw; see
3 and in perapueAopar |, perotxitw, perapoppda, etc. 3.
after: perawédopa. Cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 639.
peta-Baive; fut. peraBnooua; 2 aor. pereBnv, impv.
peraBn& and (in Mt. xvii. 20 L T Tr WH) peraBa (see
avaBaiva, init.); pf. weraBéBynxa; fr. Hom. down; to pass
over from one place to another, to remove, depart: foll. by
and w. agen. of the place, Mt. viii. 34; é& oikias es oikiay
[ef. W.§ 52, 4. 10], Lk. x. 7; ék rod Kéopou mpos Tov ma-
répa, Jn. xiii. 1; évrevev, Jn. vii. 3; exetOev, Mt. xi. 1;
xii. 9; xv. 29; Acts xviii. 7; évredOev[L T Tr WH évéev]
éxet (for exeioe [cf. W. § 54, 7; B. 71 (62))]), of a thing,
i. q. to be removed, Mt. xvii. 20; metaph. é« tov Gavarou
eis tv Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 In. iii. 14.*
peta-BaAAw: prop. fo turn round; to turn about; pass.
and mid. to turn one’s self about, change or transform one’s
self; trop. to change one’s opinion; [Mid., pres. ptep.]
peraBaddopevor [ (2 aor. ptep. Badrdpevo. Tr WH)] Aeyor,
they changed their minds and said, Acts xxvili. 6 (wera-
Badépevos Aéyets, having changed your mind you say, Plat.
Gorg. 481 e.; in the same sense, Thuc., Xen., Dem.).*
pet-ayw; pres. pass. perdyouat; to transfer, lead over,
(Polyb., Diod., al.) ; hence univ. to direct [A. V. to turn
about]: Jas. iii. 3 sq.*
pera-S(Swpt; 2 aor. subj. peradd, impv. 3 pers. sing.
peraddro, inf. peradodva; [fr. Theogn., Hdt. down]; to
share a thing with any one [see pera, III. 1], to impart:
absol. 6 peradidovs, he that imparteth of his substance, Ro.
weTabeous
xii. 8, cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; revi, Eph. iv. 285 revi re (a
constr. somewhat rare in Grk. auth. [Hdt. 9, 34 etc.],
with whom perad. twi twos is more common; cf. Mat-
thiae ii. p. 798; [W. § 30,7 b.; B. § 132, 8]), Ro.i. 11;
1 Th. ii. 8; the acc. evident from the preceding context,
Lk. iii. 11.*
pera-Oeots, -ews, 4, (uerariOnpt) ; 1. a transfer: from
one place to another (Diod. 1, 23); revds (gen. of obj.),
the translation of a person to heaven, Heb. xi. 5. 2:
change (of things instituted or established, as icpwovvns,
vépov): Heb. vii. 12; trav cadevopevwr, Heb. xii. 27.
(Thue. 5, 29; Aristot., Plut.) *
pet-alpw: 1 aor. peripa ; 1. trans. to lift up and
remove from one place to another, to transfer, (Kur.,
Theophr., al.). 2. in the N. T. intrans. (cf. W. § 38,
1; [B.§ 130, 4]) to go away, depart, (Germ. aufbrechen) :
exeibev, Mt. xiii. 53 (Gen. xii. 9 Aq.); foll. by dé w. gen.
of place, Mt. xix. 1.*
pera-Kadew, -@: Mid., 1 aor. perexadeodyny; 1 fut. pera-
kadécopa; to call from one place to another, to summon,
(Hos. xi. 1 sq.; Plat. Ax. fin.) ; mid. tocall to one’s self,
tosend for: tua, Acts vii. 14; x. 32; xx.17; xxiv. 25.*
pera-Kivew, -@: to move from a place, to move away:
Deut. xxxii. 30; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Pass. pres.
ptep. peraxwovpevos; trop. dé ths eAridos, from the hope
which one holds, on which one rests, Col. i. 23.*
peta-hapBave; impf. wereAduBavov; 2 aor. inf. pera-
NaBeiv, ptcp. peradaBov; [see perd, III. 1; fr. Pind. and
Hat. down]; ¢o be or to be made a partaker: gen. of the
thing, 2 Tim. ii. 6; Heb. vi. 7; xii. 10; rpodjs, to par-
take of, take [some] food, Acts ii. 46; xxvii. 33 sq. [in
34 Rec. mpoodaBeiv] ; w. ace. of the thing, to get, find (a
whole) : xapév, Acts xxiv. 25; on the constr. w. gen. and
ace. see Kriiger § 47, 15; ef. W. § 30, 8.*
pera-Anus (LT Tr WH -Anpuys [see M, p]), -ews, 7,
(uerarapBdve), a taking, participation, (Plat., Plut., al.) :
of the use of food, eis perdd. to be taken or received, 1
Tim. iv. 3.*
pet-adAddoow: 1 aor. perndAdaka; fr. Hdt. down; [not
in Sept., yet nine times in 2 Macc.; also 1 Esdr. i. 31];
to exchange, change, [cf. pera, III. 2]: ri év run, one thing
with (for) another (on this constr. see d\Adoo), Ro. i.
25; ri ets rt, one thing into another, Ro. i. 26.*
pera-pedopat; impf. pereweAdunv; Pass., 1 aor. perepe-
AnOnv; 1 fut. perapeAnOnoopar; (fr. weAopar, mid. of pede);
fr. Thuc. down; Sept. for 003; a depon. pass.; prop. 7
is a care to one afterwards [see pera, III. 2], i. e. it repents
one; to repent one’s self [in R. V. uniformly with this
reflexive rendering (exe. 2 Co. vii. 8, where regret) |:
Mt. xxi. 29, 32; xxvii. 3; 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. vii. 21 fr.
Ps. ex: (cex.) 4
[Syn. perauéAopar, petavoéw: The distinctions so
often laid down between these words, to the effect that the
former expresses a merely emotional change the latter a
change of choice, the former has reference to particu-
lars the latter to the entire life, the former signifies
nothing but regret even though amounting to remorse,
the latter that reversal of moral purpose known as repent-
ance—seem hardly to be sustained by usage. But that
405
peTavol.a
meravoew is the fuller and nobler term, expressive of moral
action and issues, is indicated not only by its derivation, but
by the greater frequency of its use, by the fact that it is often
employed in the impv. (werauéAoua: never), and by its con-
struction with amd, éx, (cf. 4 eis Gedy werdvoa, Acts xx. 21).
Cf. Trench, N.T. Syn. § lxix.; esp. Gataker, Adv. Post. xxix.]
pera-poppdw, -@: Pass., pres. petapoppovpat; 1 aor.
perepoppadn ; to change into another form (cf. perd, III.
2], to transfigure, transform: perepoppwbn, of Christ, his
appearance was changed [A. V. he was transfigured], i. e.
was resplendent with a divine brightness, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk.
ix. 2 (for which Lk. ix. 29 gives éyévero rd eiSos Tod mpoo-
émov adrov €repov); of Christians: tiv adriy eikéva pera-
poppovpeba, we are transformed into the same image (of
consummate excellence that shines in Christ), reproduce
the same image, 2 Co. iii. 18; on the simple ace. after
verbs of motion, change, division, ef. Bos, Ellips. (ed.
Schaefer), p. 679 sqq.; Matthiae § 409; [Jelf § 636 obs.
2; cf. B. 190 (164); 396 (339); W. § 32, 5]; used of
the change of moral character for the better, Ro. xii. 2;
with which compare Sen. epp. 6 init., intelligo non emen-
dari me tantum, sed transfigurari. ([Diod.4, 81; Plut.
de adulat. et amic. 7; al.]; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 10 sub
fin.; leg. ad Gaium § 13; Athen. 8 p. 334c¢.; Ael. v. h.
1,1; Leian. as. 11.) [Syn. cf. perarynpari¢o. | *
pera-voew, -@; fut. peravonow; 1 aor. perevdnoa; fr.
[Antipho], Xen. down; Sept. several times for DN); to
change one’s mind, i. e. to repent (to feel sorry that one
has done this or that, Jon. iii. 9), of having offended
sone one, Lk. xvii. 3 sq.; with emi rue added (dat. of
the wrong, Hebr. Sy, Am. vii. 3; Joel ii. 13; Jon. iii.
10; iv. 2), of (on account of ) something (so Lat. me
paenitet alicuius rei), 2 Co. xii. 21; used esp. of those
who, conscious of their sins and with manifest tokens
of sorrow, are intent on obtaining God’s pardon; to
repent (Lat. paenitentiam agere): petavo® €v odkk@
kai ood6, clothed in sackcloth and besprinkled with
ashes, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13. to change one’s mind for
the better, heartily to amend with abhorrence of one’s past
sins: Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15, (cf. Mt. iii. 6 eEopo-
Aoyovpevor Tas dpaprias avrav; ib. 8 and Lk. iii. 8 kapmovs
a&ious tis peravoias, i. e. conduct worthy of a heart
changed and abhorring sin); [Mt. xi. 20; Mk. vi. 12];
Lk. xiii. 8, 5; xv. 7,10; xvi. 30; Acts ii. 38; iii. 19;
xvii. 30; Rev. ii. 5, 16; iii. 3,19; on the phrase peravoeiy
els rd KNpvyud twos, Mt. xii. 41 and Lk. xi. 32, see eis, B.
II. 2 d.; [W. 397 (371)]. Since r6 peravoely expresses
mental direction, the ter mini from which and to which
may be specified: dmé tis xaxias, to withdraw or turn
one’s soul from, etc. [ef. W. 622 (577); esp. B. 322
(277)], Acts viii. 22; é twos, Rev. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 20 sq.;
xvi. 11 (see éx, I. 6; [ef. B. 327 (281), and NV tt: 2 ])'s
peravoety x. emcaTtpeper én rov Oedv, Acts xxvi. 20; foll.
by an inf. indicating purpose [W. 318 (298)], Rev. xvi.
9. [SyN. see perapeAopat.] *
perdvoua, -olas, i, (ueravoew), a change of mind: as it
appears in one who repents of a purpose he has formed
or of something he has done, Heb. xii. 17 on which see
etpicxe, 3 ([Thue. 3, 36, 3]; Polyb. 4, 66, 7; Plut. Peric.
petaky
c. 10; mor. p. 26a.3 ris ddeAdoxrovias perivoa, Joseph.
antt. 13, 11, 3); esp. the change of mind of those who
have begun to abhor their errors and misdeeds, and
have determined to enter upon a better course of life,
so that it embraces both a recognition of sin and sorrow
for it and hearty amendment, the tokens and effects of
which are good deeds (Lact. 6, 24, 6 would have it ren-
dered in Lat. by resipiscentia), [A. V. repentance]: Mt.
iii, 8, 11; Lk. iii. 8, [16 Lehm.]; xv. 7; xxiv. 47; Acts
xxvi. 20; Bamticpa peravoias, a baptism binding its sub-
jects to repentance [W. § 30, 28.], Mk.i. 4; Lk. iii.
3; Acts xiii. 24; xix.4; [% eis (rov) Oedv per. Acts xx.
21, see peravoew, fin.]; duddvae revi peravorav, to give one
the ability to repent, or to cause him to repent, Acts v.
31; xi. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 25; ruva els peravorav Kadety, Lk. v.
32, and Ree. in Mt. ix. 13; Mk. ii. 17; dye, Ro. ii. 4
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 10 fin.); dvaxawvifew, Heb. vi. 65 xo-
pijoat eis perav. to come to the point of repenting, or be
brought to repentance, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [but see ywpéw, 1 fin.];
per. amd vexpav épywv, that change of mind by which we
turn from, desist from, etc. Heb. vi. 1 [B. 322 (277)];
used merely of the im proved spiritual state re-
sulting from deep sorrow for sin, 2 Co. vii. 9 sq. (Sir.
xliv. 16; Sap. xi. 24 (23); xii. 10,19; Or. Man. 7 sq. [(cf.
Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. p. lxii. sq.)]; Philo, quod det. pot.
insid. § 26 init.; Antonin. 8,10; [Cebes, tab. 10 fin. ].) *
peratd, (fr. wera and Evy, i. q. ovv), adv. ; 1. be-
tween (in the midst, Hom. Il. 1,156; Sap. xviii. 23), a.
adverbially of time, év r@ pera€v, meanwhile, in the mean
time, cf. év t@ kabeEns (see xabeEns): Jn. iv. 31 (Xen.
symp. 1,14; with ypdéym added, Plat. rep. 5 p. 450 ¢.;
Joseph. antt. 2, 7,1; 6 pera&d xpdvos, Hdian. 3, 8, 20
[10 ed. Bekk.; cf. W.592 sq. (551)]). —_—ib. like a prep.
w. a gen. [cf. W. 54, 6]: of place [fr. Hdt. 1, 6 down],
Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; xvi. 26; Acts xii. 6; of par-
ties, Mt. xviii. 15; Acts xv. 9; Ro. ii. 15. 2. acc.
to a somewhat rare usage of later Grk. (Joseph. ce. Ap.
1, 21, 2 [(yet see Miiller ad loc.)]; b. j. 5, 4, 2; Plut.
inst. Lac. 42; de discr. amici et adul. c. 22; Theoph.
ad Autol. 1,8 and Otto in loc.; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2.
3; Barn. ep. 13, 5]), after, afterwards: 1d pera€d caBB.
the next (following) sabbath, Acts xiii. 42 [(where see
Meyer) J.”
weta-tréprwo: 1 aor. pass. ptep. perareudbeis; Mid.,
pres. ptep. peramepmdpevos; 1 aor. peterenapny ; a
to send one after another [see pera, III.3; cf. Herm.
ad Vig. p. 639]. 2. like our to send after i. q. to
send for: petarenpbeis, sent for, Acts x. 29%. Mid. to
send after for one’s self, cause to be sent for: Acts x. 5,
29°; xi. 13; [xx.1TTrWH]; xxiv. 24, 26; foll. by eis,
w. an ace. of place, Acts x. 22; xxv.3. (Gen. xxvii. 45;
Num. xxiii. 7; 2 Mace. xv. 31; 4 Mace. xii. 3, 6; in prof.
auth. fr. Hdt. down.) *
peta-orpéhw: 1 aor. inf. peraorpeyrat; Pass., 2 aor.
impv. 3 pers. sing. peracrpapyto; 2 fut. peraorpapnoo-
pa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 35; fo turn about, turn
around, (cf. werd, III. 2]: ri ets re [to turn one thing
into another], pass., Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31); Jas.
406
peTEXO@
iv. 9 [ef. B. 52 (46); (WH txt. perarpéra, q. v-)]; ig
to pervert, corrupt, ri (Sir. xi. 31; Aristot. rhet. 1, 15,
24 [cf. 30 and 3, 11, 6]): Gal. i. 7.*
peta-oxnparitw: fut. peracyruariow [cf. B. 37 (32)];
1 aor. perecxnudrica; Mid. pres. peracynparitopat; to
change the figure of, to transform, [see perd, IIL. 2]: ri,
Phil. iii. 21 [see below]; mid. foll. by eis ruva, to transe
form one’s self into some one, to assume one’s appearance,
2 Co. xi. 13 sq.; foll. by &s tus, so as to have the appear-
ance of some one, 2 Co. xi. 15; peracynpuarico ri eis Teva,
to shape one’s discourse so as to transfer to one’s self
what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs,
i. e. so as to illustrate by what one says of himself what
holds true of all: 1 Co. iv. 6, where the meaning is, ‘by
what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown
what holds true of all Christian teachers.’ (4 Mace.
ix. 22; Plat. lege. 10 p. 903 e.; [Aristot. de caelo 3, 1
p- 298°, 31, etc.]; Joseph. antt. 7, 10, 5; 8,11,1; Plut.
Ages. 14; def. orac. c. 30; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11];
Sext. Empir. 10, p. 688 ed. Fabric. [p. 542, 23 ed.
Bekk.].)*
[S¥YN. peTanophoe, perarxnpmari¢w: (cf. Phil. iii. 21)
“uerarxnu. would here refer to the transient condition from
which, netanop¢. to the permanent state to which, the change
takes place. Abp. Trench [N. T. Syn. § lxx.], however, sup-
poses that peracxnu. is here preferred to petapopo. as ex-
pressing ‘transition but no absolute solution of continuity’,
the spiritual body being developed from the natural, as the
butterfly from the caterpillar” (Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ‘ De-
tached Note’ p. 131). See nopof, fin.]
pera-riOnpr; 1 aor. pereOnxa; pres. mid. peratidepa ; 1
aor. pass. petereOnv ; to transpose (two things, one of which
is put in place of the other, [see pera, III. 2]);i.e. 1.
to transfer: twa foll. by eis w. ace. of place, pass., Acts
vii. 16; without mention of the place, it being well
known to the readers, Heb. xi. 5 (Gen. v. 24; Sir.
xliv. 16, ef. Sap. iv. 10). 2. to change (Hat. 5, 68);
pass. of an office the mode of conferring which is
changed, Heb. vii. 12; ri ets 7, to turn one thing into
another (ria eis atnvipv iow, Anth. 11, 367, 2); figura-
tively, riy ... xapuw eis doeAyerav, to pervert the grace
of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of God
an argument in defence of licentiousness, Jude 4 [cf.
Huther in loc. ]. 3. pass. or [more commonly] mid.,
to transfer one’s self or suffer one’s self to be transferred,
i. €. to go or pass over: amd twos ets tt, to fall away or
desert from one person or thing to another, Gal. i. 6 (cf.
2 Mace. vii. 24; Polyb. 5, 111, 8; 26, 2,6; Diod. 11,
4; [6 perabépevos, turncoat, Diog. Laért. 7, 166 cf. 37;
Athen. 7, 281 d.]).*
[pera-rpérw: 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. perarpa-
mnte; to turn about, fig. to transmute: Jas. iv. 9 WH txt.
From Hom. down; but “seems not to have been used
in Attic” (L. and S.).*]
per-erretra, adv., fr. Hom. down, afterwards, after that:
Heb. xii. 17. (Judith ix. 5; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) *
pet-€xw; 2 aor. peréoyov; pf. peréoxnxa; to be or
become partaker; to partake: tis édmidos avrov, of the
thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Rec., but GL. T Tr WH
peTewpilo
have rightly restored én’ Amid: rod peréyew, in hope of
partaking (of the harvest); with a gen. of the thing
added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21; Heb. ii. 14; udjjs érépas, to
belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii.
13; sc. ths tpopys, to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; ya-
Aakros, to partake of, feed on, milk, Heb. v. 13; é« tov
évds Gptov se. ti or tivds (see éx, I. 2b.), 1 Co. x. 173 ef.
B. § 132, 8; [W. §§ 28, 1; 30, 8a.].*
pet-ewpitw: [pres. impv. pass. 2 pers. plur. perewpt-
¢ecbe; (see below)]; (fr. peréwpos in mid-air, high;
raised on high; metaph. a. elated with hope, Diod. 13,
46; lofty, proud, Polyb. 3, 82, 2; 16, 21, 2; Sept. Is. v.
15. b. wavering in mind, unsteady, doubtful, in sus-
pense: Polyb. 24,10,11; Joseph. antt. 8, 8, 2; b. j. 4, 2,
5; Cic. ad Att. 5, 11,5; 15, 14; hence perewpitw) ; uF
prop. to raise on high (as vavv eis rd réAayos, to put a
ship [out to sea] up upon the deep, Lat. propellere in
altum, Philostr. v. Ap. 6, 12, 3 [cf. Thue. 8, 16, 2]; 76
épuya, to raise fortifications, Thuc. 4, 90): é€aurdv, of
birds, Ael. h. a. 11, 33; pass. werewpitecOar } xamvov 7}
kovoptov, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3,5; of the wind, aveyos Enpos
petewpiobeis, Arstph. nub. 404; and many other exx.
also in prof. auth.; in Sept. cf. Mic. iv. 1; Ezek. x. 16;
Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one’s soul,
raise his spirits; to buoy up with hope; to inflate with
pride: Polyb. 26, 5, 4; 24, 3,6 etc.; joined with ducar,
Dem. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [quis rer. div.
her. §§ 14,54; cong. erud. grat. § 23]; pass. to be elated ;
to take on airs, be puffed up with pride: Arstph. av. 1447;
often in Polyb.; Diod. 11, 32,41; 16,18 ete.; Ps. exxx.
(cxxxi.) 1; 2 Mace. vii. 34; with the addition of rj
duavorav, v.17. Hence pr perewpicerbe, Lk. xii. 29, some
(following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should
be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek great
things, (Luth. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation
does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta-
phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep
by winds and waves, to cause one to waver or fluctuate
in mind, Polyb. 5, 70,10; to agitate or harass with cares;
to render anxious: Philo de monarch. § 6; Schol. ad
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914; ad Eur. Or. 1537; hence Lk. xii.
29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither
be ye anxious, or and waver not between hope and fear
[A. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live
not in careful suspense) ]. Kuinoel on Lk. 1. ec. discusses
the word at length; and numerous exx. from Philo are
given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.*
petotxer(a, -as, 7, (for the better form peroixnars, fr.
petotxew [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to
another, esp. a forced removal: with the addition Ba-
Budavos (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby-
lonian exile, Mt. i. 11 sq.17. (Sept. for m3 i. e. mi-
gration, esp. into captivity; of the Babylonian exile, 2
K. xxiv. 16; 1 Chr. v. 22; Ezek. xii.11; for ns, Obad.
20; Nah. iii. 10. Elsewh. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.) *
pet-orxltw: fut. (Attic) perourd [cf. B. 37 (32); W.
§ 13, 1¢.]; 1 aor. peraxioa ; to transfer settlers; to cause
to remove into another land [see pera, III. 2]: twa foll. by
407
LETpLOs
eis w. ace. of place, Acts vii. 4; éméxeva w. gen. of place
(Amos v. 27), Acts vii.43. (Thue. 1,12; Arstph., Aris-
tot., Philo, [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 19, 3], Plut., Ael.; Sept.
several times for 1737.) *
PETOXN, -7)S, 1), (weTexw), (Vulg. participatio) ; a sharing,
communion, fellowship: 2Co. vi. 14. (Ps. exxi. (exxii.)
3; Hdt., Anthol., Plut., al.) *
PETOXOS, -ov, (pETEYw) 5 1. sharing in, partaking
of, w. gen. of the thing [ W. § 30, 8 a.]: Heb. iii. 1; vi. 4;
xii. 8; tod Xpiorod, of his mind, and of the salvation pro-
cured by him, Heb. iii. 14; cf. Bleek ad loc. 2. a
partner (in a work, office, dignity): Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps.
xliv. (xlv.) 8); Lk.v. 7. (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) *
petpéw, -@; 1 aor.euerpnoa; 1 fut. pass. petpnOncopar;
(wéerpov) ; fr. Hom. Od. 3,179 down; Sept. several times
for TWD; to measure ; i. e. 1. to measure out or
off; a. prop. any space or distance with a measurer’s
reed orrule: rév vady, Tv avAny, etc., Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15,
17; with r@ caddy added, Rev. xxi. 16; ev air, i. e.
T@ kadduo, Rev. xi. 1, b. metaph. to judge according
to any rule or standard, to estimate: év @ pérpw perpeire,
by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru-
mental év seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf.
W. 388 (363); B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur-
ther below], Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24; pass. to be judged,
estimated, ibid.; perpety éavrov ev éavt@, to measure one’s
self by one’s self, to derive from one’s self the standard
by which one estimates one’s self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cef. W. § 31,
8 fin.]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. e. to give
by measure: in the proverb 7@ aiT@ pérpw © perpeire
[or (so LT Tr WH) @ perp perp.], i. e., dropping the
fi., ‘in proportion to your own beneficence,’ Lk. vi. 38.
[Compe.: dyti-petpew. | *
petpytys [on the accent see Chandler § 51 sq.], -ov, 6,
(uetpew), prop. a measurer, the name of a utensil known
as an amphora, which is a species of measure used for
liquids and containing 72 sextarii or oro [i. e. some-
what less than nine Eng. gallons; see B. D.s. v. Weights
and Measures, sub fin. (p. 3507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. n3, 2
Chr. iv. 5): Jn. ii. 6. (Polyb. 2, 15,1; Dem. p. 1045,
7; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.) *
petproTrabéw, -@; ([ef. W. 101 (95)]; fr. perpromadys,
adhering to the true measure in one’s passions or emo-
tions; én (viz. Aristotle) rév copdv pup eivac pév aah,
perpiorraby dé, Diog. Laért. 5, 31; petptomadeca, modera-
tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp.
to the dmaOea of the Stoics; fr. pérpeos and wa6os) ; i. q.
peTpiws Or Kata TO peTpov macy, to be affected moderately
or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions,
esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44; de Josepho
§ 5; [Joseph. antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]); hence of one who is
not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others,
but bears with them gently; like other verbs of emotion
(cf. Kriiger § 48, 8), with a dat. of the pers. toward whom
the feeling is exercised: Heb. v. 2; cf. the full discus-
sion by Bleek ad loc.*
petpiws, (uéerpios), adv., [fr. Hdt. down]; a. in
due measure. b. moderately: od perpiws, [A. V.
per pov
vot « little], exceedingly, (Plut. Flam. 9, et al.), Acts
xx. 12.”
pétpov, -ov, 76, Sept. chiefly for 719, [ef. znrnp], meas-
ure; L. an instrument for measuring; a. a vessel for
receiving and determining the quantity of things, whether
dry or liquid: in proverb. disc., perpeiv perp, of the
measure of the benefits which one confers on others, Lk. vi.
38; wérpov memecpevov kat ceoadevpevor, fig. equiv. to most
abundant requital, ibid. ; mAnpovy 76 pérpov Trav marépav,
to add what is wanting in order to fill up their ancestors’
prescribed number of crimes, Mt. xxiii. 32 [see mAnpda,
2a.]; 逫 péerpov [A. V. by measure; see éx, V. 3] i.e.
sparingly, Jn. iii. 34 (also év péerpw, Ezek. iv. 11). b.
a graduated staff for measuring, measuring-rod: Rev. xxi.
15; with dvOpemov added [man’s measure], such as men
use, Rev. xxi. 17; hence in proverb. dise. the rule or stand-
ard of judgment: Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24. 2. deter-
mined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit: with
a gen. of the thing received, Ro. xii. 3; 2 Co. x. 13;
[Eph. iv. 7]; év pérpw, in proportion to the measure [cf.
W. § 48, a. 3 b. and see évépyea; al. on due measure],
Eph. iv. 16; the required measure, the due, fit, measure :
tis Ackias, the proper i.e. ripe, full age [see #AcKla, 1 c.]
(of a man), Eph. iv. 13 (78ns, Hom. Il. 11, 225; Od. 11,
317; Solon 5, 52 [Poet. Min. Gr. (ed. Gaisford) iii. 135]).*
pétwtov, -ov, Td, (wera, oY ‘eye’), fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for My, [lit. the space between the eyes] the fore-
head: Rev. vii. 3; ix.4; xiii. 16; xiv.1,9; xvii.5; xx.
4; xxii. 4.*
péxpt and péxpes (the latter never stands in the N. T.
before a consonant, but péype stands also before a vowel
in Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr WH; see dyu, init.; and on the dis-
tinction betw. dype and peéxpe see dypr, fin.), a particle
indicating the terminus ad quem: as far as, unto,
until ; 1. it has the force of a preposition with
the gen. [(soeven in Hom.) W.§ 54,6],andis used a.
of time: Mt. xiii. 30 RG TWHnoreg.; Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr
WH; Acts xx. 7; 1 Tim. vi. 14; Heb. ix. 10; p. Oavd-
tov, Phil. ii. 30; péxpe THs onpepov sc. huepas, Mt. xi. 23;
Xxvill. 155 péype téAous, Heb. iii. 6 [here WH Trmrg.
br. the clause], 143 awd... pexpt, Acts x. 30; Ro. v.14;
pexpts ob (see dypt, 1 d.; [B. 230 (198) sq.; W. 296
(278 sq.) ]) foll. by an aor. subjune. having the force of a
fut. pf. in Lat.; Mk. xiii.30; Gal.iv.19TTrWH. b.
of place: do... péxpt, Ro. xv. 19. c. of measure
and degree: péypt Oavarov, so that he did not shrink even
from death, Phil. ii. 8 (2 Mace. xiii. 14; Plat. de rep. p.
361 ¢. fin.; p. pdvov, Clem. hom. 1, 11); «akomabeiv p.
decuar, 2 Tim. ii. 9; péypis atuaros avrixaréornre, Heb.
xii. 4. 2. with the force of aconjunction: till,
foll. by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.*
pH, Sept. for 53, [8, PN, a particle of negation, which
differs from od (which is always an adverb) in that od
denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies
simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively),
but py denies the thought of the thing, or the thing
according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref-
erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in-
408
7)
directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction
holds also of the compounds ovdeis, pndeis, ovkert, pnkére,
etc. But wis either an adver b of negation, not (Lat.
non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat.
ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e.
(generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether
not (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267
p- 802 sqq.; Matthiae § 608; Bttm. Gram. § 148 (ef.
Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii.
§§ 512 sq. p. 739 sqq.; [Jelf §§ 738 sqq.]; Rost § 135;
Win. §§ 55, 56; I. Franke, De particulis negantibus.
(two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq.; G. F. Gayler, Particu-
larum Graeci sermonis negativarum accurata disputatio,
ete. Tub. 1836; E. Priifer, De pn et od particulis epi-
tome. Vratisl. 1836; [Gildersleeve in Am. Jour. of Philol.
vol. i. no. i. p. 45 sqq.; Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s
Hdbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. §§ 82 sqq.].
I. As a negative ADVERB; 1. univ.: 6 pi ma-
peort Tava, where py is used because reference is made
merely to the thought that there are those who lack these
things, 2 Pet. 1.9; & uy émpaxev, which (in my opinion)
he hath not seen (because they are not visible), Col. ii. 18
[but here GT Tr WH om. Lbr. pn; ef. Bp. Lehtft. ad
loc.; W.480sq. (448) ]; 78n Kéxpirat, Ore pn wemioreuker, be-
cause he hath not believed, represented by the writer as the
thought rod xpivartos, Jn. iii. 18 (differently in 1 Jn. v. 10,
where the faith denied is considered as something positive
and actual); & pa det, in the judgment of the writer, Tit.
Ett. 2. in deliberative questions with the
subjunctive: ddpev i py Sayer, Mk. xii. 14 (adrepov
Biav dapev } pi Paopev eva, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 45); pi
Toiowpev Ta kaka (for so it would have run had there
been no anacoluthon; but Paul by the statement which
he interposes is drawn away from the construction with
which he began, and proceeds 6rt rroujowper xrX., so that
these words depend on Aéyew in the intervening statement
[ W. 628 (583); B.§ 141, 3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con-
ditional and final sentences (cf. W. § 55, 2; [B. 344
(296) sqq.]): éav py, unless, if not, see exx. in éay, I. 3 ¢.
éav ete. kat wn, Mk. xii. 19; éay ete. d€ yn, Jas. ii. 14; éav
tis On... wy mpos Oavarov, 1 Jn. v. 163 ef py, ef dé pn,
ei Sé pnye, etc., see ei, III. p. 171 sq. To this head be-
long the formulae that have dy or éay as a modifier (W.
§ 55, 3e.; [B. § 148, 4]), ds, darts, doo dy or cay pn: Mt.
X. 14'y x1 6's) Mike vals 16 SLi 23s ie be et
17; Rev. xiii. 153; 6s dv ete. cat wn, Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. x. 10;
ds dv... py emt wopveia, Mt. xix. 9 GT Tr WH txt.; of
the same sort is wav mvedpa, 6 py Spodoyei, 1 Jn. iv.3. ta
pn, Mt. vii.15 xvii. 27; Mk. iii. 9; Ro. xi. 25; Gal. v.17;
vi. 12, etc.; Wa... Kat py, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Mk. iv.12; Jn.
vi. 50; xi. 50; 2Co. iv. 7, ete.; Wa... py, 2 Co. xiii. 10;
vad... py, In. xii. 46; ta (weakened ; see iva, II. 2)
pn: after duaoréAXopa [here L WH txt. émtiyaw], Mt.
xvi. 20; 76 O&Anud eoriv, va py, Jn. vi. 39; ovras etc. ta
6...u7y, Jn. iii. 16; mapaxada, iva... kat py, 1 Co. i. 10;
ors py, Mt. vi. 18; Actsxx.16; 1Co.i.29; drasoi...
pn, Lk. xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infinitive (W.
§55,4f.; [B.§§ 140,16; 148,6; cf. Prof. Gildersleeve
wa
u.8.p-48sq.]); a. after verbs of saying, declaring,
denying, commanding, etc.: dmoxpiOjva, Lk. xx. 7;
hv adTe Kexpnuatiopevor pn etry, that he should not see, Lk.
ii. 26; ypnpariodevres wn avaxduyat, Mt. ii.12; dpoce (av-
rois) un eiaedevoer Oar, Heb. iii. 18; after ey, Mt. v. 34,
39; xxii. 23; Mk xii.18; Acts xxi.4; xxiii. 8; Ro. ii. 22;
xii. 33 xnpvooa, Ro. ii. 21; ypapw, 1 Co. v.9,115; mapay-
yédro, Actsi.4; iv.18; v. 28,40; 1 Co. vii. 10 sq.; 1 Tim.
i.33 vi. 17; mapaxadd, Actsix.38 RG; xix. 31; 2Co.vi.
1; airodpat, Eph. iii. 13; Scapaprvpopar, 2'Tim. ii. 14 ; evxo-
pa, 2 Co. xiii. 7; mapacrovpat, Heb. xii. 19[here WH txt.
om. pn; cf. W.and B.as below]; dé, Acts xv. 38; em-
Boo[L. T Tr WH Boa], Acts xxv. 24; avridéyo (cf. W.§65,
28.; [B.§ 148, 13]), Lk. xx. 27 (Tr WH Lore. heéeyo];
drapvodpat (q. v.), Lk. xxii. 34; also after verbs of decid-
ing: Lk. xxi. 14; xpivo, Acts xv. 19; xpivw rodro, rd PN
Ro. xiv. 13; 2 Co. ii. 1; O€do, Ro. xiii. 3; after verbs of
‘hindering, avoiding, etc.: éyxdmrw (Rec. avaxérrw)
rwa pn, Gal. v. 7 (cf. W. [and B. u.s.; also § 140, 16]);
rod pn, that... not, (Lat. ne), after karéyw, Lk. iv. 42;
kparoopar, Lk. xxiv. 16; kwAvo, Acts x. 47; KaTatrava,
Acts xiv. 18; mavo, 1 Pet. iii. 10; dmooreANopat, Acts xx.
20, 27; mpooéyo py, Mt. vi. 1; but rod py is added also
to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ut ne, that... not:
Ro. vii. 3; dpOadpot rod py BA€rewv, Sta Tov pn dxovew,
Ro. xi. 8,10. After clauses denoting necessity,.ad-
vantage, power, fitness, wy is used with an inf.
specifying the thing [B. § 148, 6], caddy éore py, 1 Co. vii.
1; Gal.iv.18; foll. by ro py, Ro. xiv. 21; adoyor pn, Acts
xxv. 273 kpeirrov fy, 2 Pet. ii. 21; e€ovoia rov [LT Tr
WH om. rod] py epyater Oa, a right to forbear working,
1 Co. ix. 6; det, Acts xxvii. 21; od dvvauae pn, IT cannot
but, Acts iv. 20; avévdexrdv eott tov py, Lk. xvii. 1 [ef.
avevOextos |. b. py with an inf. which has the article
follows a preposition, to indicate the purpose or end : as,
mpos 76 pn, that... not, 2 Co. iii. 13; 1 Th.ii.9; 2'Th. iii.
8; eis TO pun (Lat. in id . . ne), to the end (or intent) that
.. not, Acts vii. 19; 1 Co. x.6; 2 Co.iv. 4; foll. by an
ace. and inf., 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 7; dua rd py, because
.. not, Mt. xiii. 5 sq.; Mk. iv. 5 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jas.
iv. 2[cf. W. 482 (449)], (2 Macc. iv. 19). c. in other
expressions where an infin. with the art. is used substan-
tively : r@ pn (dat. of the cause or reason [cf. W. § 44,
5; B. 264 (227)]), 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); in the accus., 76 py:
Ro: xiv, 133 1 -Co.iv.6 [RG]; 2Co.ns1; x25. 0 Th: ive
6, cf. 3. d. in sentences expressing consequence
or result: dare py, so that... not, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. iii.
Derk Coa ied 2) 2°Co. Ti 7 ys Thesis. 5. pn is
joined with a Participle (W. § 55, 5g.; [B. § 148, 7;
see C. J. Vaughan’s Com. on Ro. ii. 14]), a. in sen-
tences expressing a command, exhortation, purpose, etc. :
LK. iii. 11; Jn. ix. 39; Acts xv. 38; xx. 29; Ro. viii. 4; xiv.
34 2'Co. xii. 21; Eph. v. 27; Phil./i. 28); i. 4\[here Ree:
impv.]; 1 Th.iv.5; 2 Th.i. 8; 1 Pet. ii.16; Heb. vi. 1;
xiii. 17, ete. b. in general sentences, in which no defi-
nite person is meant but it is merely assumed that there
is some one of the character denoted by the participle: as
6 un dv per’ €or, he that is not on my side, whoever he is,
409
pe
or if there is any such person, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23;
6 b€ un muorevov, whoever believeth not, Jn. iii. 18; of wy
dpodoyovrres "Ingodv Xp. if any do not confess, or belong
to the class that do not confess, 2 Jn. 7; add, Mt. x. 28;
LK. vi. 49 ; xii. 21, 47sq.; xxii. 36; Jn. v.23; x.13 xii.
48; xiv.24; Ro.iv.5; v.14; x.20; 1Co. vii.38; xi. 22;
2 Th. i. 8; Jas. ii.13; 1 Jn. ii. 4, ete.; mas 6 wn, Mt. vii.
26; (mav Sevdpov py, Mt. iii. 10; vii.19); 1 Jn. iii. 10; 2
Jn. 9; 2 Th. ii. 12 [here Lmrg. T Tr WH mre. dravres
oi pn etc.]; paxdptos 6 py, Jn. xx. 29; Ro. xiv. 22. Cc.
where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but
in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by
the participle) is denied in the thought or judgment either
of the writer or of some other person [ef. esp. W. 484
(451) ]: ra py ovra, that are deemed as nothing, 1 Co. i. 28 ;
as pt) NaBov, as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv.7; os
py) epxouevov pov, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv.
18; as pr epixvovpevor eis tuas, 2 Co. x. 14; add, 1 Co.
Vii. 29. der... Tives eioiv of pur murTevovTes (ace. to the
opinion of 6 eidas), Jn. vi. 64; the same holds true of
Acts xx. 29; ra py BAerdpeva (in the opinion of of py
akorovvres), 2 Co. iv. 18 (on the other hand, in Heb. xi.
1, ov Bred. actually invisible) ; roy py yvdvra dpapriay
ireép juav duaprtiay eroincey (yn yvdvra is said agreeably
to the judgment of 6 woujoas), 2 Co. v. 21 (ror od yvdvra
would be equiv. to ayvoodvra). in predictions, where it
expresses the opinion of those who predict: éon o1wmav
Kal pur) Suvapevos Aadjoat, Lk. i. 20; eon rupdds py BrErav,
Acts xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does not re-
gard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing,
which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader
or hearer (Alotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered
without etc. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [ef. B. § 148, 7 b.]:
ene put) emiordpevos, mov epxerat, Heb. xi. 8; add, Mt.
xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but ef. B. § 148, 7¢.)]; Acts v.
7; xx.22; Heb.ix.9. where the participles have a con-
ditional, causal, or concessive force, and may be
resolved into clauses introduced by 7, on condition that,
etc. : Oepicopev pi) exvdpevor, Gal. vi. 9; ut) GvTos vdpou,
Ro. v. 13; although: vépov ph éxovres, Ro. ii. 14; py dv
adros ind vdpov, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Rec.om.]; we have both
the negative particles in dy ov« eiddéres [or (with LT Tr
WH) i8dvres].. . py dpavres, whom being ignorant of
(in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen]...
although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8; also with the article:
ra py vopov €xovra (Germ. die doch nicht haben, they that
have not, etc.), Ro. ii. 14; 6 d€ py yeveadoyovpevos, but he,
although not ete. Heb. vii. 6 ;—or since, because, inasmuch
as: pi adobevnoas tH miore: ov [but GLT Tr WH om. ov;
cf. B. § 148, 14] karevdnoe 7d éavtod oGpa vevexpop. (ovK
dabevnoas would be equiv. to duvards, strong), Ro. iv. 19;
mas otros ypdppata olde pr penadnkas since he has not
learned [W. 483 (450)], Jn. vii. 15; add, Mt. xviii. 25;
xxii. 25, 29; Lk. ii. 45; vii. 30; xi. 24; xii. 473 xxiv.
23; Actsix.26; xvii.6; xxi. 34; xxvil.7; 2 Co. ili. 14;
y.19; also with the article: 6 9 ywaoker dv vdpor, since
it knoweth not the law, Jn. vii. 49; add, Jude 5. d.
where (with the ptep.) it can be resolved by (being) such
eo)
(a person) as not, of such a sort as not: pH (yra@v Td euavtov
avpdoporv, 1 Co. x. 33; add, Actsix.9; Gal. iv.8. neut.
plur. as subst.: ra yp dvra, Ro.iv.17; ra pi cadevdpeva,
Heb. xii. 27; ta py S€ovra, 1 Tim. v. 13; 7a py KaOynKovta,
Ro. i. 28; 2 Mace. vi. 4, (on the other hand, in ra ovx
avjxovra, Eph. v. 4 [where L T Tr WH 4 ovk dvijcev], the
ovk coalesces with dyjxovra and forms a single idea, un-
seemly, unlawful). 6. in independent sentences of
forbidding, dehorting, admonishing, desiring, etc., un is
Prohibitive (cf. W. § 56, 1), Lat. ne, not ; a. with
the 1 pers. plur. of the subjunc. present: p7 ywopeba
cevodo€or, Gal. v. 26; add, Gal. vi. 9; 1 Th. v.6; 1 Jn.
iii. 18; aorist: Jn. xix. 24; before the word depending
on the exhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. with a present im-
perative, generally where one is bidden to cease from
something already begun, or repeated, or continued: Mt.
wis 16,80 -Syiids xix.'6; MkKi 1x0S95 “xd ke yig0s
Vile Gal See vill 49.052) *) X40 5920)" del G Veo, 4am
Vie oe VEIN 24 NEXT VEGI T ee xaX. alle ACES Tar ExT es) Ke
10; Ro. vi. 12; xi. 18, 20; xii. 2 [here L Trmrg. WH
mrg. give the inf.],14; 1 Co. vi.9; vii.5; 2Co. vi.14,17;
Gal. v.1; vi. 7; Eph. iv. 30; Col. iii. 9,19, 21; 1 Th. v.
19 e2uebeaittose Telimeanivedts -avelGnl Or El ebpaexaielp)
xiii. 2; Jas.i.7,16; 1 Pet. iv. 12, 15 sq.; 1Jn. ii. 15; iii.
13; Rev. v. 5, and very often. c. with the third per-
son (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist
impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to
be begun, and where things about to be done are forbid-
den: py éemorpeydro, Mt. xxiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 313 py) Ka-
raBarw, Mk. xiii. 15, and LT Tr WH in Mt. xxiv. 17
(where RG badly cataBawéro); py yroto, Mt. vi. 3;
yevérbo [but T Tr WH ywéoo], Lk. xxii. 42; cf. Xen.
Cyr. 7,5, 73; Aeschyl. Sept. c. Theb. 1036. d. as in
the more elegant Grk. writ. where future things are for-
bidden (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the
aorist subjunctive: py do&qre, Mt. iii. 9; v. 175 py do-
BnOns, Mt.i. 20; x. 26, 31 [here L T Tr WH pres. impv.
oBeiobe |, (alternating with the impv. pres. poBeiade in
Mt. x. 28 [GL TTr]); py awn, Col. ii. 215; py aroorpa-
gis, Mt. v. 42; pa xrnonobe, Mt. x. 9; add, Mt. vi. 2, 7,
18)'51°%' Mik. -v. 7 ¢ox. 199 Ak, vi.29:5) Vill. 28) xiveS stent
iii. 7; Acts vii.60; Ro. x.6; 1Co.xvi.11; 2 Co. xi. 16;
2 Th. ii. 3, —[in the last three exx. with the third pers.,
contrary to W. 502 (467)]; 1 Tim.v.1; 2 Tim. i. 8; Rev.
vi. 6; x. 4(je1 ypayns, for Euehrov ypadpewy precedes ; but
in Jn. xix. 21 py ypade is used, because Pilate had already
written); Rev. xi. 2; xxii. 10,and very often. We have
the impv. pres. and the aor. subj. together in Lk.x.4; Acts
xviii. 9. e. with the 2 pers. of the present subjunc. :
pt) oxAnpvynte, Heb. iii. 8, 15, (a rare constr. though not
wholly unknown to Grk. writ. [“‘ more than doubtful” (L.
and S. s. v. A. 1.2)]; see Delitzsch on the latter passage,
and Schaefer ad Greg. Corinth. p. 1005 sq.; [Soph. Lex.
s.v.p7. Others regard the above exx.as subjunc. aorist;
ef. 2 K. ii. 10; Is. lxiii.17; Jer. xvii. 23; xix.15,etc.]). f.
with the optative, in wishes: in that freq. formula py
yevorro, far be it! see yivoua,2a.; pn adrois ANoyoGein, 2
Tim. iv. 16 (Job xxvii. 5).
‘GLT Tr WH have adopted).
410 ”
II. As a ConsuncTion, Lat. ne with the subjunc-
tive ; 1. our that, that not or lest, (cf. W. § 56, 2;
[B. § 139, 48 sq.; Goodwin § 46]); after verbs of fear-
ing, caution, etc. a. with the subjunc. present,
where one fears lest something now exists and at the
same time indicates that he is ignorant whether it is so
or not (Hermann on Soph. Aj. 272): émurkxomodvres, wy
- «. evoxAn, Heb. xii. 15. b. with the subjune. aorist,
of things which may occur immediately or very soon: pre-
ceded by an aor., evAaBndeis (LT Tr WH goBnéeis) uy dta-
ora 67, Acts xxiii. 10; by a pres.: poBotpa, Acts xxvii.
17; Brew, Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts
xiii. 40; 1 Co. x. 12; Gal. v.15; Heb. xii. 25; oxomreo
éepaurov, Gal. vi. 1 [B. 243 (209) would refer this to 2 b.
below; cf. Goodwin p. 66]; dpa, Mt. xviii.10; 1 Th. v.
15; elliptically, dpa pn (sc. rovro mounons [ ef. W. § 64, 7 a.;
B. 395 (338)]): Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. c. with the
indicative fut. (as being akin to the subjune. [cf. gram.
reff. at the beginning }): @oBodpat, py rarewacer pe 6 Oeds
pov, 2 Co. xii. 20 sq. [L txt. T Tr]; add, Col. ii. 8. 2
in order that not (Lat. eo consilio ne) ; a. with the op-
tative: tav orpatiwtav BovAn éyévero, iva trols Secpwras
arokteivaot, pn tis... Seapvyor, Acts xxvii. 42 Ree. (the
more elegant Greek to express the thought and purpose
of the soldiers; but the best codd. read diapvyn, which
b. with the subjunc-
tive aor.: preceded by the pres., Mk. xiii. 36 ; 2 Co. viii.
20 [cf. Goodwin § 43 Rem.]; xii. 6; Col. ii. 4 (where
LT Tr WH a pndeis for RG pn tes [— an oversight ;
in R Gas well as in the recent crit. edd. the purpose is
expressed by an inserted iva]).
III. As an INTERROGATIVE particle it is used when
a negative answer is expected, Lat.num; (W. § 57, 3b.;
[B. 248 (213)]); 1. ina direct question: Mt. vii.
9sq-; ix.153 Mk. ii. 195° Lk. xvii. 95 Jn. ii. 45 iv. 12,
33; vi. 67; vii. 35, 51 sq.; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 33 ix.
20; 1Co.i.18; ix. 8sq.; x. 22; Jas. ii.[1 WH], 14; iii. 12,
ete. ; i ydp (see yap, I.), Jn. vii. 41; pr od« (where ovk be-
longs to the verb, and py is interrogative), Ro. x. 18 sq.;
1 Co. ix. 4 sq.3 pi) yap . - - ov, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. in an
indirect question with the indicative (Germ. ob etwa,
ob wohl, whether possibly, whether perchance), where in ad-
monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is
as we fear [cf. B. § 139,57; W.§ 41 b.4a.]: Lk. xi.
35, ef. B. 243 (209); Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334 sq.; [Rid-
dell, Plato’s Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138].
IV. The particles 0d 7 in combination augment the
force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise,
by no means; (this formula arose from the fuller ex-
pressions ov dewdv or Séos or PoBos, wn, which are still
found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kiihner ii. § 516, 9
p- 773 sq.; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost
sight of that od pn is used even of things not at all to be
feared, but rather to be desired; so in the N. T. in Mt.
v. 18, 26; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 17; xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 48; xx.
25; 1Th.v.3); cf. Matthiae § 517; Kihner ii. p. 775;
Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq.; [Gildersleeve in the Amer. Jour. of
Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq.; Goodwin § 89]; W. § 56, 3;
unye
[B. 211 (183) sq.]. 1. with the fut. indicative: od
(27) €orat oot TovTo, this shall never be unto thee, Mt. xvi.
22; add, Mt. xxvi. 35; Lk. xxii. 34 RGL; x. 19 (where
R*G WH aorrg. ddienon); In. vi. 35 [here L Tr mrg. ree
vaoe, and L T Tr WH dinoer); xiii. 38 RG; Mk. xiii.
31 TTr WH; Heb. x.17 LT Tr WH; in many pas-
sages enumerated by W. 506 (472); [cf. B. 212 (183) ],
the manuscripts vary between the indic. fut. and the
subjune. aor. Ina question, od pu) mounoes Thy exdixnow ;
LK. xviii. 7 RG. 2. with the aor. subjunctive (the
use of which in the N. T. scarcely differs from that of
the fut.; cf. W. § 56, 3; [B. § 139, 7]), in confident as-
sertions: — subjunc. of the 1 aor., Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk.
MMs) Lakes vi oven exile Si eb. vill. 12 Ai Pete 6)
Rey. ii. 11; vii. 16; xviii. 21, 22, 23; xxi. 27,ete.; 1 aor.
mid. subj., Jn. viii. 52 (where Rec. yedoerar); thus these
N. T. exx. prove that Dawes made a great mistake in
denying (in his Miscellanea Critica, p. 221 sqq. [ed. (Th.
Kidd) 2, p. 408 sq.]) that the first aor. subjune. is used
after ov un; [cf. Goodwin in Transactions of Am. Philol.
Assoc. for 1869-70, pp. 46-55; L. and S. s. v. od py, IL.
1b.; B. § 139, 8]; subjunc. of 2 aor., Mt. v. 18, 20,
26; Mk. x. 15; Lk.1. 15; xii. 59; Jn. x. 28; xi. 26; 1 Co.
vill. 13; Heb. xiii. 5; Rev. iii. 3[ RG L Trmrg. WH txt. ],
and often. in questions: with 1 aor., Lk. xviii. 7 LT
Tr WH; Rev. xv. 4 (in LT Tr WH with the subj. aor.
and the fut.) ; with 2 aor., Jn. xviii. 11. in declarations
introduced by ére: with 1 aor., 1 Th. iv. 15; with 2 aor.,
Mt. xxiv. 34 [here RG T om. 61]; xxvi. 29 [LT Tr WH
om. 6m]; Lk. xiii. 35 [T WHom. Lbr. 6ru]; xxii. 16;
Jn. xi. 56; in relative clauses: with 1 aor., Mt. xvi. 28;
Mk. ix.1; Acts xili.41; Ro.iv.8; with 2 aor., Lk. xviii.
30. 3. with the present subjunc. (as sometimes in
Grk. auth., cf. W. 507 (473)): ot8€ od pn oe éyxatadeira,
Heb. xiii. 5 Tdf. (for éyxatadiz Rec. et al.), [ef. B. 213
(184) }.
prye, «i O€ purye, see yé, 3 d.
pndapdas, (adv. fr. undapuds, and this fr. wndé, and duds
some one [perh. allied w. dua, q. v.]), [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt.
down], by no means, not at all: sc. rodro yévouro, in re-
plies after an impv. [A. V. Wot so], Acts x. 143 xi. 8.
(Sept. for mon.) :
pndé, (un, q. v-, and 62), [fr. Hom. down], a negative
disjunctive conjunction; [cf. W. § 55, 6; B. § 149,
13]; 1. used in continuing a negation or prohibi-
tion, but not, and not, neither; preceded by pn, — either
so that the two negatives have one verb in common:
preceded by py with a participle, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii.
24; by py w. apres. subjunc., 1 Co. v. 8 [here Lmrg.
pres. indic.]; 1 Jn. iii. 18; by py w. impv., Mt. vi. 25;
Lk. x. 4; xii. 22; xiv.12; 1Jn.ii.15; by pa w. an aor.
subj. 2 pers. plur., Mt. x. 9 sq.; by eis ro an, 2 Th. ii. 2
LT Tr WH; —or so that pydé has its own verb: pre-
ceded by és éav (dy) pn, Mt. x. 14; Mk. vi. 11; by ta
pn, Jn.iv.15; by émas py, Lk. xvi. 26; w. a ptep. after
un w.a ptep., Lk. xii. 47; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after
pn w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq.; Heb. xii. 5;
pndert émrider, foll. by pndé w. impv. 1 Tim. v. 22; w.
411
pnoeis
2 pers. of the aor. subj. after yn w. 2 pers. of the aor.
subj., Mt. vii. 6; xxiii. 9sq.; Lk. xvii. 23; Col. ii. 21;
1 Pet. iii. 14; after yndé w. an aor. subj. Mk. viii. 26 [T
reads py for the first yndé, T WH Tr mrg. om. the sec-
ond clause]; after pydéva w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14
[Tdf. repeats pndéva]; pndé... unde w. 1 pers. plur. pres.
subj. 1 Co. x. 8 sq. [see below]; mapayyeAXo foll. by pz
w. inf... . ynde w. inf., Actsiv.18; 1 Tim.i. 4; vi. 17;
kadov 76 py... undé with inf. Ro. xiv. 21; w. gen. absol.
after pnm@ w. gen. absol. Ro. ix. 11; w. impv. after es
76 py, 1 Co. x.7; unde is repeated several times in a neg-
ative exhortation after eis ro wn in 1 Co. x. 7-10. 2.
not even (Lat. ne... quidem): w. an inf. after @ypawa,
1 Co. v. 11; after dare, Mk. ii. 2; iii. 20 (where RG T
badly pyre [ef. W. 489 sq. (456); B. pp. 367, 369]); w.
a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3; 2 Th. iii. 10.
pnfdels, undepia, pndev (and pydev, Acts xxvii. 33 LT
Tr WH, —a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as
early as B. Cc. 378, cf. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p.
73]; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. § 5, 1d. 11; [B. 28
(25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. undé and efs),
[fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a
noun, 70, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man,
neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as yn; ac-
cordingly a. with an imperative: pydeis being
the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii.
18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi.17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim.
iv.12; Tit. ii.15; Jas.i.13; 1 Jn.iii.7; neut. pundev,
se. €or@ [A. V. have thou nothing to do with ete.], Mt.
xxvii. 19; pdets in the dat. or the acc. depending on
the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; pndev (accusative),
Lk. iii. 13; ix.3; p. Pood, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH
txt. pn]. b. pndeis with the optative: once in
the N. T., Mk. xi. 14 (where Rec. ovdeis) [ef. W. 476
(443) ]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc.,
the pndeis depending on the verb; as, undevi etrns, Mt.
viii.4; xvii. 9; accus., Lk. iii. 14; x. 4; pndev (acc.), Acts
Xvi. 28; Kara pndeva tpdrov, 2 Th. ii. 3. d. with the
particles iva and dmas (see wn, I. 3): with ta, Mt. xvi.
203) Mkiwe43e)vinSs vilvoG. 1x..9s Dit: i 135 Reveille
11; with dros, Acts vili. 24. e. with an infini
tive ; a. with one that depends on another verb: —
as on mapayyeAdo, Lk. viii. 56; ix. 21; Acts xxiii. 22,
detkvuse, Acts x. 28; Scatdooowa, Acts xxiv. 23; ava-
Oewatifw épavtdv, Acts xxiii. 14; xpivw (acc. w. inf.),
Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; evyouat, 2 Co. xiii. 7; Botddouae (ace.
w. inf.), 1 Tim. v. 14; tmopipynok twa, Tit. iii. 2, ete.;
mapaxaNe twa foll. by 76 wn w. ace. and inf., 1 Th. iii.
3 L (ed. ster.) T Tr WH. B. with an inf. depend-
ing on dia rd: Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with
a participle (see pn, I. 5); in dat., Acts xi. 19; Ro. xii.
17; accus. pndeva, Jn. vill. 10; Acts ix. 7; pndev, Acts iv.
Di excvii. 395 1 Co.x. 25). 275) 2 Cos va: 10320 he tas 104
1 Tim. vi. 4; Tit. ii. 8; Jas.1.6; 33n.7; pndeuiav mpo-
oxonny, 2 Co. vi. 3; pndeuiav mronow, 1 Pet. iii. 6; pnde-
piav airiay, Acts xxviii. 18; dvaBoAnv pnd. xxv. 17. g.
noteworthy are — pydeis with a gen., Acts iv. 17; xxiv.
23; pndev sc. rovtwr, Rev. ii. 10 [RGTWHarg.]; e»
unodétroTe
pndevi, in nothing, 1 Co. i. 7 [but yapiopar: is expressed
here]; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)]; vii. 9; Phil. i. 28;
Jas. i. 4. pnd€ev etvas, to be nothing i. e. of no account,
opp. to eivai rt, Gal. vi. 3 (Soph. Aj. 754; other exx. fr.
Grk. auth. see in Passow ii. p. 231"; [L. and Sis. v. IL;
cf. B. § 129, 5]); pndev (ace.), nothing i.e. not at all, in
no respect: Acts x. 20; xi. 12, (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 4;
Tim. 43); as accus. of the obj. after verbs of harm, loss,
damage, advantage, care, [cf. W. 227 (213); B. § 131,
10]: as, BAdmrew, Lk. iv. 35 [ef. W. 483 (450)]; age
AeicOar, Mk. v. 26; borepeiv, 2 Co. xi. 5; pepysvar, Phil.
iv. 6. h. examples of adouble negation, by which
the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. quisquam fol-
lows a negation (cf. W. § 55, 9 b.): pnxére pndeis, Mk.
xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; pndevi pndev, Mk. i. 44 [Lom. Tr
br. pndev]; Ro. xiii. 8; pydepiay ev pndevi, 2 Co. vi. 3;
py... ev pndevi, Phil. i. 28; px... pndev, 2 Co. xiii. 7;
py. - pndepiav, 1 Pet. ili. 6; un tus. . . Kata pndeva Tpd-
mov, 2 Th. ii. 3.
pndémore, (unde and zoré), adv., never: 2 Tim. iii. 7.*
pndémre, (undé and mo), adv., not yet: Heb. xi. 7.*
Miajdos, -ov, 6, a Mede, a native or an inhabitant of
Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief city was
Ecbatana [see B. D. s.v.]: Acts ii. 9. [Cf. B. D. and
Schaff-Herzog s. v. Media. ]*
pnev, see pndeis.
pyketi, (fr. uy and er), adv., employed in the same
constructions as pn; no longer; no more; not here-
after: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19
RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with
1 pers. plur. pres. subj. Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres.
imperative: [Lk. viii. 49 LT Trtxt. WH]; Jn. v. 14;
viii. 11; Eph. iv. 28; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta-
tive: Mk. xi. 14. e. iva unkéert: 2 Co. v.15; Eph. iv.
14. f. with an infin. depending—on another verb:
on Boe (émBo0e@), Acts xxv. 24; on ameida, Acts iv. 17;
on Aێyw xk. paptrvpowat, Eph. iv. 17; on eis 7d, 1 Pet. iv.
2; on déore, Mk. i. 45; ii. 2; rod pnkére SovdAeverv, Ro. vi.
6. g. with a ptep.: Acts xiii. 34 [ef. W. § 65, 10];
Ro. xv3(239 (1 | Th. nit. h. ov pnxere (see pn, LV.
2): with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 L T Trmrg. WH.*
HAKos, -eos (-ovs), 7d, fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often
for JI8; length: Rev. xxi.16; 76 mAdros kal pijKos Kal
Babos kai dos, language used in shadowing forth the
greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received
from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.*
pykive: (unos); fr. Hdt. and Pind. down; to make
long, to lengthen; in the Bible twice of plants, i. q. to cause
to grow, increase: 6 épvtevae Kiptos Kal veTos eunkuver
(932°), Is. xliv. 14; hence Pass. [al. Mid.] pres. pnxivo-
pa; to grow up: Mk. iv. 27 [unkivnra (Tr mrg. -erac) |.”
pnrorh, -7s, 7, (fr. pnAov a sheep, also a goat; as Kapn-
Awrn [‘camlet’] fr. kaundos [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 332]),
a sheepskin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 17,1. For n758 an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in
1K. xix.18,.19; 2 K. ii.8, 18 sq., doubtless because
these mantles were made of skins; hence more closely
\yw nya, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept.
412
PNTOTE
déppis rptxivn). In the Byzant. writ. | Apoll. Dysk. 191,
9] pnA@rn denotes a monk’s garment.*
piv, [(fr. Hom. down)], a particle of affirmation,
verily, certainly, truly, (Sap. vi. 25); 4 pny, see under
7 fin.
BHv, gen. pnvds, 6, (w. Alex. acc. pivav, Rev. xxii. 2
Lehm.; on which form see reff. under dpony, fin.); [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. a month: Lk. i. 24, 26, 36,56; iv. 25;
Acts vii. 20; xviii. 11; xix. 8; xx. 3; xxviii. 11; Jas. v.
175) Reveixs Dy) LOS 15i\xi. Oh oxi xc. 2. the
time of new moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium;
after the use of the Hebr. wn, which denotes both a
‘month’ and a ‘new moon, asin Num. xxviii. 11; xxix
1): Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. Ixvi. 23] (the
first day of each month, when the new moon appeared
was a festival among the Hebrews; cf. Lev. xxiii. 24
Num. xxviii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 4); [al. refer the
passage to 1 (see Mey. ad loc.) ].*
pyviw (cf. Curtius § 429]: 1 aor. éunvuca; 1 aor. pass.
ptep. fem. pyvvOeioa: as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Pind.
down ; 1. to disclose or make known something
secret; in a forensic sense, to inform, report: foll. by moo
éoriv, Jn. xi. 57; Twi tT, pass., Acts xxiii. 30. 2.
univ. to declare, tell, make known: 1 Co. x. 28. 3.
to indicate, intimate: of a teacher; foll. by ért, Lk. xx.
37. [A. V. uniformly show.]*
pr ovK, see yy, III. 1.
pirore, (fr. un and more), [un more (separately) LWH
(exc. Mt. xxv. 9, see below) Tr (exc. 2 Tim. ii. 25)], dif-
fering from ovzrore as pn does from ov; [fr. Hom. down].
Accordingly it is 1. a particle of Negation; not
ever, never: émet pnmore icxvet, since it is never of force,
because the writer thinks that the very idea of its hav-
ing force is to be denied, Heb. ix. 17 [where WH txt. py
rére], on which see W. 480 (447), cf. B. 353 (304); but
others refer this passage to 3 a. below. 2. a pro-
hibitory Conjunction; lest ever, lest at any time, lest
haply, (also written separately yn ore [(see init.), esp.
when the component parts retain each its distinctive
force; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 129 sq.; Ellendt,
Lex. Soph. ii.107. Inthe N. T. use of this particle the no-
tion of time usual to moré seems to recede before that of
contingency, /est perchance]), so that it refers to the pre-
ceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated
action [W. § 56, 2]: w. a subj. pres. Lk. xii. 58; w.a
subj. aor., Mt. iv. 6 and Lk. iv. 11, fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 12
(where Sept. for }9); Mt. v. 25 [(cf. below)]; vii. 6 [R
G]; xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27 (both from Is. vi. 10,
where Sept. for |5); Mt. xiii. 29 (ov se. Oehw); xv. 32;
xxvii.64; Mk.iv.12; Lk. xiv.12; withiva prefixed, ibid.
29; w.afut. indic. [see B. § 139, 7, cf. also p. 368 (315)
d.]: [Mt. vii. 6 LT Tr WH;; (cf. v. 25)]; Mk. xiv. 2;
[Lk. xii. 58 LT Tr WH]. after verbs of fearing,
taking care, [W.u.s.; B.§ 139, 48]: w. subj. aor., —
so after mpocéxw, to take heed, lest etc., Lk. xxi. 34; Heb.
ii. 1, (Sir. xi. 33); so that an antecedent PoBovdpevor or
mpooéxovres must be mentally supplied, Acts v.39; pnrore
ovK apkéon, lest perchance there be not enough (so that ovr
nT OU
dpxéon forms one idea, and oBovpeba must be supplied
before pnmore), Mt. xxv.9 RT WH mrg.; but L Tr WH
txt., together with Meyer et al., have correctly restored
pnmore (sc. TodTo yeverOw [W. § 64, 7 a.])+ o& px apKéon,
j.e. not so! there will in no wise be enough (see pn, LV. 2);
cf. Bornemann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 143 sq. ;
[but all the editors above named remove the punctua-
tion mark after pjmore ; in which case it may be connect-
ed directly with the words which follow it and translated
(with R. V.) ‘peradventure there will not be enough’;
ct. B. § 148, 10, esp. p. 354 (304) note. For additional
exx. of pymore in this sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 10,
10 p. 1179°, 24; with indic., ibid. pp. 1172%, 33; 1173
22, ete.), see Soph. Lex. s. v.; Bitm. in his trans. of Apoll.
Dysk., index s.v.; (cf. L. and S.s. v. wn, B.9)]. after
oBodpa, w. pres. subjunc. Heb. iv. 1; so that oBov-
pevos must be supplied before it, Lk. xiv. 8. after BAemew
w. a fut. indic. [cf. W. § 56, 2 b.a.; B. 243 (209) ], Heb.
iii. 12. 3. a particle of Interrogation accom-
panied with doubt (see yn, III.), whether ever, whether at
any time; whether perchance, whether haply, (Germ. doch
nicht etwa; ob nicht etwa) ; a. in a direct question in-
troduced by eet, for, else, (see eet, 2 sub fin.): so ace. to
the not improbable interpretation of some [e. g. L WH
mrg., Delitzsch] in Heb. ix. 17, see in1labove. In the re-
maining N. T. passages so used that the inquirer, though
he doubts and expects a negative answer, yet is inclined
to believe what he doubtfully asks about; thus, in a direct
question, in Jn. vii. 26. b. inindirect questions; a.
w. the optative (where the words are regarded as the
thought of some one [W. § 41 b.4¢.; B. § 139, 60]): Lk.
iti. 15.. [See 8-4 B. w. the subjunctive: 2 Tim. ii. 25
[RGL (cf. B. 46 (40)); but T Tr WH txt. give the
optative], where pnrore «rd. depend on the suppressed
idea Stadoyfopevos [cf. B. § 139, 62 fin.; W. u. s.].*
pamov [T Tr] or py mov [WH], that nowhere, lest any-
where, [lest haply|: Acts xxvii. 29T Tr WH. (Hom. et
al.) *
payro [or py wo, L Tr in Ro. ix. 11], (uy and wa), [fr.
Hom. down], adv. ; 1. not yet: in construction
with the ace. and inf., Heb. ix. 8; w. a ptep., uname yap
yevrnbevrar, though they were not yet born, Ro. ix. 11,
where cf. Fritzsche. 2. lest in any way [?]: Acts
xxvii. 29 Lchm.*
paras [G T, or py ros L Tr WH], (un and mas), [fr.
Hom. down}; 1. a conjunction, lest in any way, lest
perchance ; a. in final sentences, w. an aor. subj., pre-
ceded by a pres. 1 Co. ix. 27; preceded by an aor., 2
Co. ii. 7; ix. 4. b. after verbs of fearing, taking
heed: w.an aor. subj.,—after @rérew, 1 Co. viii. 9;
after @oBeioda, Acts xxvii. 29 R; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20;
w. a perf. indic., to indicate that what is feared has actu-
ally taken place [W. § 56, 2b. a.; B. 242 (209)], Gal.
iv. 11; w. an aor. subj., the idea of fearing being sup-
pressed, Ro. xi. 21 Rec. [B. § 148, 10; cf. W. 474
_(442)}. 2. an interrogative particle, whether in
any way, whether by any means: in an indirect question,
with an indic. present (of a thing still continuing) and
413
wire
aorist (of a thing already done), Gal. ii. 2 (I laid before
them the gospel etc., sc. inquiring, whether haply ete.; Paul
expects a negative answer, by which he wished his teach-
ing concerning Christ to be approved by the apostles at
Jerusalem, yet by no means because he himself had any
doubt about its soundness, but that his adversaries might
not misuse the authority of those apostles in assailing this
teaching, and thereby frustrate his past and present en-
deavors ; cf. Hofmann ad loc. [B. 353 (303). Others,
however, take rpéyw as a subjunctive, and render lest
haply I should be running etc. ; see W. 504 sq. (470), cf.
Ellicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps
already done, but which the writer wishes had not been
done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and
uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the
same sentence, 1 Th. iii. 5 (where unas depends on yavat;
cf. Schott, Linemann, [Ellicott],ad loc. ; [B. 353 (304) ;
W. 505 (470)]).*
pnpds, -0v, 6, the thigh: Rev. xix. 16. (From Hom. down;
Sept. for }7:.)*
pare, (uy and the enclitic ré), [fr. Hom. down], a cop-
ulative conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing
fr. ovre as wn does fr. od. It differs fr. wndé in that pndé
separates different things, but pre those which are of the
same kind or which are parts of one whole; cf. W. § 55,
6; [B.§ 149,13 b.]): pyre... pyre, neither... nor, Lk.
vii. 33 [T pr... pndé]; ix. 3 (five times); Acts xxiii
12, 21; xxvii. 20; Heb. vii. 3 ; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for
py... pyre we must with L T Tr WH substitute pp...
pndé). pyy---pnte... pyre, Mt. v. 34-36 (four times);
1 Tim.i. 7; Jas. v.12; Rev. vii.3; wa py... pyre...
pyre, Rev. vii. 1; pnde... pyre... pyre, 2 Th. ii. 2 LT
Tr WH; pi etva dvactacw, pndé dyyeAov (for that is
something other than dvacracis), pyre mvedpa (because
angels belong to the genus mvevpara), Acts xxiii. 8 RG;
cf. W. 493 (459) ; [B. 367 (314) sq.]-*
pATyp, gen. pntpds, dat. pyrpi, ace. pnrépa, 7, [fr. Hom.
down; fr. Skr. ma ‘to measure’; but whether denoting
the ‘ moulder,’ or the ‘ manager’ is debated; ef. Vaniéek
p- 657; Curtius § 472; (cf. pérpov)], Hebr. Ds, a mother;
prop.: Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often; trop. of that which
is like a mother: Mt. xii. 49 sq.; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. xix.
27; Ro. xvi. 13, ef. 1 Tim. v. 2; a city is called ) wnrnp
t&v mopar, that produces and harbors the harlots, Rev.
xvii. 5; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians]
originated, Gal. iv. 26 [here G T Tr WH om. L br. mavrop
(on the origin of which cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.)}.
pate [so GT WH R (commonly), but yy te L (exe. 1
Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25; Mk. iv. 21)], (uy
and ri), whether at all, whether perchance, an interroga-
tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question
(Germ. doch nicht etwa? [in Eng. generally untranslated;
cf. W. § 57,3b.; B. 248 (213)]): Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22,
25; Mk. iv. 21; xiv. 19; Lk. vi. 39; Jn. vii. 831[RGJ;
viii. 22; xviii. 35; xxi. 5 [here all texts yn re (properly)];
Acts x. 47; 2 Co. xii. 18; Jas. iii. 115 pare dpa, 2 Co.i
17; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe
what he asks about (see unmore, 3 a.): Mt. xii. 23: Jn
pHTUYE 414
plipeomas
iv. 29. ef pyri, see ei, IIT. 10. pareye (or pyre ye) see in | p. 393 c.; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. 17; test. Benj. 8;
its place.*
parcye [so GT WH; but pare ye RL, py re ye Tr],
(fr. pn, Ti, yé), to say nothing of, not to mention, which
acc. to the context is either a. much less; or b.
much more, much rather; so once in the N. T., 1 Co. vi.
3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 801 sq.*
pris [so R G Jn. iv. 33], more correctly un tis ; a.
prohibitive, let no one [cf. B. 31 (28)]: [w. 1 aor. subj.
1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter-
rogative, (Lat. num quis ?) hath any one ete.: Jn. vii. 48;
2 Co. xii. 17, ef. B. § 151,7; W.574 (534)]; where one
would gladly believe what he asks about doubtfully (see
pyre, sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33.*
piTpa, -as, 7, (untnp), the womb: Lk. ii. 23 (on which
see diavoiyw, 1); Ro. iv.19. (Hadt., Plat., al.; Sept. for
pm.) *
pytpadwas (also patpadoias), LT Tr WH [see WH;
App. p. 152] pnrpod@as, -ov, 6, (untnp, and ddodw to
thresh, smite), a matricide: 1 Tim.i. 9. (Aeschyl., Plat.,
Leian., al.) *
pyTpo-roAts, -ews, 7, (untnp and méXs), a metropolis,
chief city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22)
fin.; [in this sense fr. Xen. down ].*
pla, see under eis.
pratvw; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. pravOdow; pf. 3
pers. sing. peuiavra (unless it be better to take this form
asa plur.; cf. Kriiger § 33,3 Anm.9; Bttm. Gram. § 101
Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. § 101 Anm. 13; B. 41 (86); [W.
§ 58, 6 b. B.]), ptep. peptacpevos (Tit. i. 15 RG) and
peprappevos (ibid. L T Tr WH; also Sap. vii. 25; Tob.
ii. 9; Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk.; cf. Matthiae i. p.
415; Kriiger § 40s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on
Theophil. ad Autol.1,1p. 2sq.; [Veitchs.v.]); fr. Hom.
down ; 1. to dye with another color, to stain: édé-
gavra doimx:, Hom. Il. 4, 141. 2. to defile, pollute,
sully, contaminate, soil, (Sept. often for 83): in a physi-
cal and a moral sense, oapxa (of licentiousness), Jude 8;
in a moral sense, rv cuveidnaw, Tov vovv, pass. Tit. i. 15;
absol. to defile with sin, pass. ibid. and in Heb. xii. 15; for
worn, Deut. xxiv. 6 (4); in aritual sense, of men, pass.
Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5, 8; Num. xix. 13, 20; Tob.
Weg)
[Syn. wealvw, woradbyw: acc. to Trench (N. T. Syn.
§ xxxi.) uialyw to stain differs from woAdvw to smear not only
in its primary and outward sense, but in the circumstance
that (like Eng. stain) it may be used in good part, while oa.
admits of no worthy reference.]
ploopa, -ros, TO, (ptaivw), that which defiles [cf. nav-
xnpa, 2]; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio): trop. pudopata
Tov Koopov, vices the foulness of which contaminates one
in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind,
2 Pet. ii. 20. (Tragg. ., Antiph., Dem., Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut.; Sept., Lev. vii. 8 (18); Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 34;
Judith ix. 2; 1 Mace. xiii. 50.) *
pracpds, -0v, 6, (ytaivw), the act of defiling, defilement,
pollution: émOvpia psacpod, defiling lust [W. § 34, 3 b.],
2 Pet. ii. 10. (Sap. xiv. 26; 1 Macc. iv 43; Plut. mor. |
Graec. Ven. (passim); Herm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].)*
plypa or (so LT) piypa, (on the accent ef. Lipsius,
Gramm. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [cf. W. § 6,1.e.;
kpipa, init.]), ros, 70, (uiyvupe), that which has been pro-
duced by mixing,a mixture: Jn. xix. 39 [WH txt. éAvypa,
q. v-]. (Sir. xxxviii. 8; Aristot., Plut., al.) *
plyvupt and plo-yw: 1 aor. eucéa; pf. pass. ptep. wepey-
pevos’ fr. Hom. down; to mix, mingle: ri run, one thing
with another, Rev. viii. 7 Rec.; xv. 2; also ri & rum [ef.
B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 GLT Tr WH; peta Twos, with
a thing, Mt. xxvii. 34; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see ata,
2a.). [SYN. see kepdvvupt, fin. COMP.: cuv-ava-piyvupt. |*
Hikpds, -d, -ov, Compar. puKpdrepos, -€pa, -epov, [fr.
Hom. down], Sept. for 1OP, JOP, Vy, small, little;
used a. of size: Mt. xiii. 30 Mk. iv. 81; hence
of stature, 77 nAckia, Lk. xix. 3; of Teeth Jassiis548 bs
of space: neut. mpoehOav [mpooed\d. T Tr WH mrg. in
Mt., Tr WH mrg. in Mk. (see mpocépxopuat, a.) ] puxpor,
having gone forward a little, Mt. xxvi. 39; Mk. xiv. 35,
[ef. W. § 32,6; B. § 131, 11 sq.]. c. of age: less
by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat-
ure]; of uexpol, the little ones, young children, Mt. xviii.
6,10,14; Mk.ix.425; dz pixpod éws peyddov [ A. V. from
the least to the greatest], Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11, (Jer.
vi. 13; Xxxvili. (xxxi.) 34); puxpos te kal péyas, [both
small and great] i. e. all, Acts xxvi. 22; plur., Rev. xi.
SONS ITE Ka Sab. Gi WS Se, 1 d. of time, short,
brief: neuter — nom., ére [or ére om.] puxpdv (sc. éorar)
kai, (yet) a little while and ete. i. e. shortly (this shall come
to pass), Jn. xiv. 19; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)];
ért puxpov doov door (see daos, a); without cal, Heb. x.
37 (Is. xxvi. 20); 16 puxpov [Tr WHom. 70], Jn. xvi. 18;
— pixpdv ace. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2);
puxpov xpovoy, Jn. vil. 33; xii. 35; Rev. vi. 11; xx. 3;
pera pexpov, after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv.
70, (mpd pexpod, Sap. xv. 8). e. of quantity, i. e.
number or amount: puxpa Cin, 1 Co. v. 6; Gal. v. 9;
of number, pexpdv moipmoy, Lk. xii. 32; of quantity,
puxpa Svvayus, Rev. iii. 8; neut. puxpdv (re), @ Little, 2 Co.
Kise, 1G: f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42; Lk.
ix. 48; xvil. 23 6 puxpdrepos ev tH Baoideia Tay ovp. he
that is inferior to the other citizens of the kingdom of
heaven in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. but little in
etes; ef. W.244 (229) 7B. 18 123,.43)), Mt.) xis A dseaiokc
vii. 28.*
MAanros, -ov, 7, Miletus, a maritime city [now nearly
ten miles fr. the coast (cf. Acts xx. 38)] of Caria or
Ionia, near the mouths of the Meander and not far [e.
35 m.8.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many
[some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales
Anaximander, and other celebrated men: Acts xx. 15,
17; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [ZLewin, St. Paul, ii. 90 sq.]*
plArov, -ov, 7d, (a word of Lat. origin [ef. B. 18 (16)]),
a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand
paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile]:
Mt. v. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) *
pApeopat, -odpar; (uipos [an actor, mimic]); to imitate:
a ae
pLLNTS
twa, any one, 2 Th. iii. 7,9; ri, Heb. xiii. 7, 8 Jn. 11.
[Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., al.]*
pupntts, -ov, 6, an imitator: yivopai twos (gen. of pers.),
1 Co. iv. 16; xi.1; Eph.v.1; 1 Th.i. 6; ii. 14; Heb. vi.
12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where LT
Tr WH (ndorai). [Plat., Isoer., al.]*
pipviokw: (MNAQ [allied w. pévea, pavOavw; cf. Lat.
maneo, moneo, mentio, etc.; cf. Curtius § 429]); to remind:
Hom., Pind., Theogn., Eur., al.; Pass. and Mid., pres.
puprynoxopa (Heb. ii. 6; xiii. 3; rare in Attic); 1 aor.
epvnoOnv; pf. wewynuar; 1 fut. pass. in a mid. sense,
prycOnoopa (Heb. x. 17 LT Tr WH); Sept. for 731;
to be recalled or to return to one’s mind, to remind one’s
self of, to remember; éuvnoOnv, with a pass. signif. [cf.
B. 52 (46) ], to be recalled to mind, to be remembered, had
in remembrance: evwmudv twos, before i. e. in the mind of
one (see évwmoy, 1 c.), Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19, (pas-
sively also in Ezek. xviii. 22; [Sir. xvi. 17 Rec.]; and
avaprynobnva, Num. x. 9; Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16) ;— with a
mid. signif., foll. by a gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 10 c.],
to remember a thing: Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxiv. 8; Acts
xi. 16; 2 Pet. iii. 2; Jude17; pynoOjva €Aéovs, to call
to remembrance former love, Lk. i. 54 (ef. Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 6); tis dtabqxns, Lk. i. 72 (Gen. ix. 15; Ex. ii. 24;
1 Mace. iv. 10; 2 Mace. i. 2); px) pynoOqva tov duapriay
twos, [A. V. to remember no more] i. e. to forgive, Heb.
Vill. 12; x. 17, (after the Hebr.; see Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 73
Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; Is. xliii. 25; and on the other hand,
to remember the sins of any one is said of one about to
punish them, Jer. xiv. 10; 1 Macc. v.4; vi. 12); w. gen.
of a pers., to remember for good, remember and care
for: Lk. xxiii. 42; foll. by dr, Mt. v. 23; xxvii. 63; Lk.
xvi. 25; Jn. ii. 17, 22; xii. 16; by ws, Lk. xxiv. 6. pf.
peprvnpa, in the sense of a present [cf. W. 274 (257)],
to be mindful of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4; mavra
pov pepynode, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co.
xi. 25 pres. pupynoxopat, w. gen. of the pers., to remem-
ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii.
5); xiii. 3. [Comp.: dva-, én-ava-, iro-pipynoke. | *
proéw, -@; impf. euicovv; fut. peonow; 1 aor. euionoa;
pf. pepionxa; Pass., pres. ptep. puoovpevos; pf. ptep.
pepsonuevos (Rev. xviii. 2); Sept. for xjw; [fr. Hom.
down]; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest; pass. to be
hated, detested: twa, Mt. v.43 and Ree. in 44; xxiv. 10;
Lk. i. 71; vi. 22,27; xix.14; Jn. vii. 7; xv. 18 sq. 23—
255 xvii. 14; Tit. ili. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [11]; iii. 18,15; iv.
20; Rev. xvii. 16; pass., Mt. x. 22; xxiv.9; [Mk. xiii.
13]; Lk. xxi. 17; ri: Jn. iii. 20; Ro. vii. 15; Eph. v. 29;
Heb. i.9; Jude 23; Rev. ii. 6 and Rec. in 15; pass. ib.
~vili. 2. Not a few interpreters have attributed to
pucev in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30); Deut. xxi. 15 sq.; Mt.
Wi. 24 Ik. xiv. 26; xvi. 135 [Jn. xil..25]; Rosix 13
the signification to love less, to postpone in love or esteem,
to slight, through oversight of the circumstance that ‘the
Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability,
are wont both to feel and to profess love and hate where
we Occidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and
express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and
415
Muixyanr
indifference to a thing’; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p.
304; cf. Riickert, Magazin f. Exegese u. Theologie des
Neve. 20 sqg.*
prrParodocla, -as, 7, (wucOds and drodidapu; cf. the
pucOodocia of the Grk. writ. [W. 24]), payment of wages
due, recompense: of reward, Heb. x. 35; xi. 26; of pun-
ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in eccles. writ.) *
pic8-a1r0-56T4s, -ov, 6, (picOds and drodidap; cf. the
pucbodérns of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator); one
who pays wages, a rewarder: Heb. xi. 6. (Several times
in eccles. writ.) *
plo ®os, -a, -ov, also of two terminations [cf. W. § 11,
1], (usoO6s), employed for hire, hired: as subst. [A. V.
hired servant], Lk. xv. 17, 19, [21 WH in br.], (Sept.
for 3, Lev. xxv. 50; Job vii. 1. Tob. v. 12; Sir.
vii. 20; xxxi. 27; xxxvii.11. Anth. 6, 283,3; Plut.).*
p10 06s, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 13¥, also for
Naw, ete. ; 1. dues paid for work; wages, hire:
Ro. iv. 4 (kara dpbeiAnua); in a prov., Lk. x. 7 and 1 Tim.
v. 18; Mt. xx. 8; Jas. v. 45 Jude 11 (on which see
exxéa, fin.) ; purOds adtxias, wages obtained by iniquity,
Acts i. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [cf. W. § 30, 1 a.]. 2. re
ward: used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils
and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18;—of divine
recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun-
ishments: Rev. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which
God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en
deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss,
Die Lehre Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr.
fiir christ]. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mehlhorn,
d. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol.
1876, p. 721 sqq.; [ef. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-14]):
Mt. v.12; vi. 2,5, 16; x.41sq.; Mk. ix. 41; Lk. vi. 23,
35; 1 Co. iii. 8,14; 2Jn.8; Rev. xi. 18; eyew puody, to
have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is
reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mt. v.
46; 1 Co. ix.17; with mapa ro rarpi ipar ev tr. ovp.
added, Mt. vi. 1. ce. of punishments: puaOds ddcxias,
2 Pet. ii. 13; ris dvoceBeias, 2 Mace. viii. 33.*
picbdw: (uicdds); 1 aor. mid. éuccOwoduny; to let out
for hire; to hire (ef. W. § 38, 3]: twa, Mt. xx. 1, 7.
(Hdt., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for 13, Deut.
xxiii. 4; 2 Chr. xxiv. 12.) *
picOwpa, -ros, TO, (uscOow) ; 1. the price for which any
thing is either let or hired (Hat., Isoer., Dem., Ael., al.;
of a harlot’s hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mic. i. 7;
Prov. xix. 13; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [ef.
Philo in Flac. § 16 fin.]). 2. that which is either let
or hired for a price, as a house, dwelling, lodging [(cf.
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip. p. 9 note *)]: Acts xxviii.
30.*
picbwrds, -od, 6, (pitOdw), one hired, a hireling: Mk. i.
20; Jn. x.12sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. for
Vw.) *
Murvatvn, -ns, 9, Mitylene, the chief maritime town
of the island of Lesbos in the Aigean: Acts xx. 14.
[Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.]*
Mixer, 6, CxD?, i e. “who like God?’), Michaeb
uva 416
the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the
guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1; x. 13, 21):
Jude 9; Rev. xii. 7. [BB.DD. s. v.]*
pva, -as, 7, a word of Eastern origin (ef. Schrader, Keil-
( WAb
inschriften u. s. w. p- 143], Arab. ee Syr. badd,
Hebr. 73 (fr. 43 to appoint, mark out, count, etc.),
Lat. mina; 1. in the O. T. a weight, and an imaginary
coin or money of account, equal to one hundred shekels:
1 K. x. 17, ef. 2 Chr. ix. 16; 2 Esdr. ii. 69, (otherwise in
Ezek. xlv. 12 [ef. Bible Educator, index s. v. Maneh;
Schrader in Riehm s. v. Mine p. 1000 sq.]). 2. In
Attic a weight and a sum of money equal to one hun-
dred drachmae (see dpaxpy [and B. D.s. v. Pound; esp.
Schrader in Riehm u. s.]) : Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.*
Pvdopat, see puuynoKo.
Mvacwv, -wvos, 6, (MNAQ), Mnason, a Christian of
Cyprus: Acts xxi. 16. (The name was com. also among
the Grks.; [cf. Benseler’s Pape’s Eigennamen, s. v. ].) *
pveta, -as, 7, (uyurnokw), remembrance, memory, mention:
éxi mdon 77 pveia boy, as often as I remember you [lit.
‘on all my remembrance’ etc. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3;
motecc Oar pveiav tevds, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9;
Eph.i.16; 1 Th.i.2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 254a.;
Diog. Laért. 8, 2, 66; Sept. Ps. ex. (exi.) 4); py. éyew
twos, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph.,
Eur., al.) ; aduaheurrov €xew thy mept tevos pveiav, 2 Tim.
Gig
pvipa, -ros, 7d, (uvaopat, pf. pass. wéenvypat) 5 ay
a monument or memorial to perpetuate the memory of any
person or thing (Hom., Pind., Soph., al.). 2. a se-
pulchral monument (Hom., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.). 3.
a sepulchre or tomb (receptacle where a dead body is de-
posited [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sq.]) :
Mk.v.3GLTTr WH; v.5; [xv.46 T WH]; Lk. viii.
243) Xxilio8s xxiv. 1 Acts 1.29)" vil. 16)! ev. xis 9s
(Joseph. antt. 7, 1, 3; Sept. for 12p).*
PvnPELov, -ov, Td; 1. any visible object for preserv-
ing or recalling the memory of any person or thing; a me-
morial, monument, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., sqq.) ; in bibl.
Grk. so in Sap. x. 7; specifically, a sepulchral monument :
oikodopetv pynpeta, Lk. xi. 47; Joseph. antt. 13, 6, 5. a
in the Scriptures a sepulchre, tomb: Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvii.
52,60; xxviii. 8; Mk. v.2; vi. 29; Lk. xi. 44; Jn. v. 28;
xi. 17, 31, and often in the Gospels; Acts xiii. 29; Sept.
for 3p, Gen. xxiii. 6, 9; 1. 5; Is. xxii. 16, ete.
PVqEN, -78,7,(uvaoua); a. memory,remembrance; b.
mention: pynuny trovetaOai rivos, to remember a thing, call
it to remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 15; the same expression oc-
curs in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, but in the sense of Lat.
mentionem facere, to make mention of a thing.*
Pynpovedw; impf. 3 pers. plur. éuvynudvevoy; 1 aor. euvn-
povevoa; (yvnuwv mindful); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for
IDI; 1. to be mindful of, to remember, to call to
‘nind: absol. Mk. viii. 18; tevds, Lk. xvii. 32; Jn. xv. 20;
xvi. 4,21; Actsxx. 35; 1Th.i.3; [Heb. xiii. 7]; con-
textually i. q. to think of and feel for a person or thing:
w. gen. of the thing, Col. iv. 18; rév rrwyav, Gal ii. 10
povyanis
(see piurnoke, fin.) ; w. an acc. of the obj. to hold in mem-
ory, keepin mind: twa, 2 Tim. ii. 8; ri, Mt. xvi. 93 1
Th. ii. 9; ra ddcxnyara, of God as punishing them, Rev.
xviii. 5 (see pupynocw). Cf. Matthiae § 347 Anm.2; W.
p- 205 (193) ; [B. § 132, 14]. foll. by 6m, Acts xx. 31;
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th.ii. 5; foll. by an indir. question, Rev.
ii. 5; iii. 3. 2. to make mention of : twds, Heb. xi.
15 [but al. refer this to 1 above] (Plut. Them. 32; zi,
Plat. de rep. 4 p. 441 d.; lege. 4 p. 723 ¢.); Tepi Twos
(as pvdo@au in classic Grk., see Matthiae § 347 Anm. 1),
Heb. xi. 22; so in Lat. memini de aliquo; cf. Ramshorn,
Lat. Gr. §111 note 1; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. memini,
I. 3; ef. Eng. remember about, ete.]. *
Pvnpdovvoy, -ov, 7d, (uvpuwy), a memorial (that by which
the memory of any person or thing is preserved), a remem-
brance : eis pnpoovvdy Tivos, to perpetuate one’s memory,
Mt. xxvi.13; Mk. xiv.9; ai mpocevyai cov . . . avéBnoav
eis puny. evortov T. Oeov, (without the fig.) have become
known to God, so that he heeds and is about to help thee,
Acts x. 4. (Hdt., Arstph., Thue., Plut., al.; Sept. for
V3t, j3T; also for 773%8, i. e. that part of a sacrifice
which was burned on the altar together with the frank-
incense, that its fragrance might ascend to heaven and
commend the offerer to God’s remembrance, Lev. ii. 9,
16; v.12; Num. v. 26; hence evadia eis pynudovvor, Sir.
xlv. 16; and often in Siracid., 1 Macc., ete.) *
pynctevo: Pass., pf. ptep. peuvnorevpevos (RG) and
épynorevpevos (L.T Tr WH) [cf. W. § 12, 10; Veitch s.
v.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; 1 aor. ptep. prynorevdeis; (uvp-
orés betrothed, espoused); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
WN; Tuvd (yuvaixa), 10 woo her and ask her in marriage;
pass. to be promised in marriage, be betrothed: rwi, Mt. i.
18; Lk5 27 hu. oe
poyyt-Addos, (fr. udyyos[al. poyyds, cf. Chandler § 366}
one who has a hoarse, hollow voice, and AdXos), speaking
with a harsh or thick voice: Mk. vii. 32 Tdf. ed. 2, Tr txt. 3
but the common reading poy:Addos deserves the prefer-
ence; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 302 sq. (Etym. Magn. [s.
v. Barrapi¢ew}.) *
poyt-Addos [on its accent cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -ov,
(udyes and Addos), speaking with difficulty, [A. V. having
an impediment in his speech]: Mk. vii. 32 [not Tr txt.].
(Aét. 8, 38; Schol. ad Leian. Jov. trag. ec. 27; Bekker,
Anecd. p. 100, 22; Sept. for bos, dumb, Is. xxxv. 6))*
poyis, (~dyos toil), fr. Hom. down, hardly, with diffi-
culty: Lk. ix. 39 [yet WH Tr mrg. pods, q. v.]. (3 Mace.
vil. 6.) *
p08t0s, -ov, 6, the Lat. modius, a dry measure holding
16 sextarii (or one sixth of the Attic medimnus; Corn.
Nep. Att. 2 [i.e. about a peck, A. V. bushel; cf. BB. DD.
s.v. Weights and Measures]): Mt. v.15; Mk.iv. 21; Lk.
xi. 33.*
porxadls, -idos, 7, (froryds), a word unknown to the
earlier writ. but found in Plut., Heliod., al.; see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 452; [W. 24]; Sept. for nds) (Ezek. xvi. 38;
xxiii. 45) and NdxID (Hos. iii. 1; Prov. xxiv. 55 (xxx.
20)); an adulteress ; a. prop.: Ro. vii. 3; dépOadpot
peorot poryadidos, eyes always on the watch for an adul-
poLyaw
teress, or from which adulterous desire beams forth, 2
Pet. ii. 14. b. As the intimate alliance of God with
the people of Israel was likened to a marriage, those who
relapse into idolatry are said to commit adultery or play
the harlot (Ezek. xvi. 15 sqq.; xxiii. 43 sqq., etc.) ; hence
potyanis is fig. equiv. to faithless to God, unclean, apostate :
Jas. iv.4 [where cf. Alford]; as an adj. (cf. Matthiae
§ 429, 4), yeved pory.: Mt. xii. 39; xvi.4; Mk. viii. 38.
[Cf. Clem. Alex. strom. vi. c. 16 § 146 p. 292, 5 ed. Sylb.]*
poxdw, -@: to have unlawful intercourse with another’s
wife, to commit adultery with: twd. in bibl. Grk. mid.
porxGpa, to commit adultery: of the man, Mt. v. 32° [yet
WH br.]; xix. 9° [yet not WH mrg.], 9» [RGLTr
br. WH mrg.]; én’ adrnv, commits the sin of adultery
against her (i. e. that has been put away), Mk. x. 11; of
the woman, Mt. v. 32° (where LT Tr WH. powyevOjvae
for poxacGar) ; Mk.x.12. (Sept. for 93, Jer. iil. 8; v.
7; ix. 2, ete.; in Grk. writ. fig. in the active, with rv
@aXaccay, to usurp unlawful control over the sea, Xen.
Hell. 1, 6, 15; 7d AexGev, to falsify, corrupt, Ael. n. a.
7, 39.) *
powxela, -as, 7, (uorxyev), adultery: Jn. viii. 3; Gal. v.
19 Rec.; plur. [W. § 27,3; B. § 123, 2]: Mt. xv. 19;
Mk. vii. 21. (Jer. xiii. 27; Hos. ii. 2; iv. 2; [Andoc.,
Lys.], Plat., Aeschin., Leian., al.) *
poxedw; fut. poryevow; 1 aor. euoiyevoa; Pass., pres.
ptep. poryevopevn; 1 aor. inf. porxevOnvar; (potxds) ; fr.
Arstph. and Xen. down; Sept. for 582; 10 commit adul-
tery; a. absol. (to.be an adulterer): Mt. v. 27; xix.
185 Mike x19 sk. xvis 18; xviii: 20; Ro. ii./22)5) xiii.
9; Jas. ii. 11. b. tuvd (yuvatka), to commit adultery
with, have unlawful intercourse with another’s wife: Mt.
v. 28 (Deut. v. 18; Lev. xx. 10; Arstph. av.558; Plat.
rep. 2 p. 360 b.; Leian. dial. deor. 6, 3; Aristaenet. epp.
1, 20; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 2, 14); pass. of the wife, to
suffer adultery, be debauched: Mt. v. 32* LT Tr WH;
[xix. 9 WH mrg.]; Jn. vill. 4. By a Hebraism (see
potxadis, b.) trop. pera ruvos (yuvaikds) porxevew is used
of those who at a woman’s solicitation are drawn away
to idolatry, i. e. to the eating of things sacrificed to idols,
Rev. ii. 22; cf. Jer. iii. 9, ete.*
poxds, -ov, 6, an adulterer: Lk. xviii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 9;
Heb. xiii. 4. Hebraistically (see potyadis, b.) and fig.
faithless toward God, ungodly: Jas. iv. 4 RG. (Soph.,
Arstph., Xen., Plut., sqq.; Sept.) *
pots, (4dAos toil); an adv. used by post-Hom. writ. in-
discriminately with poycs ; a. with difficulty, hardly,
(cf. Sap. ix. 16, where pera mévov corresponds to it in the
parallel member): [Lk. ix. 39 Tr mrg. WH (al. péyis, q.
v.)]; Acts xiv. 18; xxvii. 7sq. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 18. b.
not easily, i. e. scarcely, very rarely: Ro. v. 7
Mods, 6, (Hebr. 72, p59n, also D391; cf. Gesenius,
Thes. ii. p. 794 sq.), indecl., Moloch, name of the idol-
god of the Ammonites, to which human victims, particu-
larly young children, were offered in sacrifice. <Ac-
cording to the description in the Jalkut ([Rashi (vulg.
Jarchi) ] on Jer. vii. [31]), its image was a hollow brazen
figure, with the head of an ox, and outstretched human
417
jovoyevns
arms. It was heated red-hot by fire from within, and the
little ones placed in its arms to be slowly burned, while
to prevent their parents from hearing their dying cries
the sacrificing-priests beat drums (see yéewva): Acts vii.
43 fr. Am. v. 26 Sept., where Hebr. 0337, which ought
to have been translated Baowéws ipav, i. e. of your idol.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Moloch; J. G. Miiller in Herzog
ix. 714 sq.; Merz in Schenkel v. 194 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.
Molech, Moloch; W. Robertson Smith in Encye. Brit. ed.
9, s. v.; Baudissin, Jahve et Moloch etc. and esp. in
Herzog 2 vol. x. 168-178].*
podtve : 1 aor. act. gudduva; Pass. pres. podvvopar; 1
aor. evodvvOnv; fr. Arstph. down; fo pollute, stain, con-
taminate, defile; in the N. T. used only in symbolic and
fig. discourse : ov« éudAvvay 7a india abray, of those who
have kept themselves pure from the defilement of sin,
Rey. iii. 4 (cf. Zech. iii. 3 sq.); pera yuvarkdv odk éuo-
AvvOnoav, who have not soiled themselves by fornication
and adultery, Rev. xiv. 4; 9 ouveiSnows podvverat, of a
conscience reproached (defiled) by sin, 1 Co. viii. 7 (in-
explebili quodam laedendi proposito conscientiam pol-
luebat, Amm. Marcell. 15, 2; opp. to xaOapa cuveidnats,
1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3; poddvew rhv Woxny, Sir. xxi.
28; but see puaive, 2). [SYN. see puaive, fin.]*
porvopds, -0d, 6, (uodvvw), defilement (Vulg. inquina-
mentum); an action by which anything is defiled: with
gen. of the thing defiled, aapxos kai rvedparos, 2 Co. vii.
1. (Jer. xxiii. 15; 1 Esdr. viii. 80; 2 Mace. v. 27; Plut.
mor. p. 779 c.; [Joseph.c. Ap. 1,32, 2; 2, 24, 5; ete.];
often in eccl. writ.) *
Houdy, -js, 7, (uenpopar), blame: exew poupyy mpds
twa, to have matter of complaint against any one, Col.
ii.) 3))4 (Pind., ‘Trage.,al.)*
povn, -7s, 7, (uevo), [fr. Hdt. down], a staying, abiding,
dwelling, abode: Jn. xiv. 2; povnv moeiv (L T Tr WH
movetoOa, as in Thue. 1, 131; Joseph. antt. 8,13, 7; 13,
2,1), to make an (one’s) abode, mapa tux metaph. of God
and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most
blessed influence on the souls of believers, Jn. xiv. 23;
see mata, 1 ¢.*
povoyevijs, -€s, (udvos and yévos), (Cic. wnigena; Vule.
[in Lk. unicus, elsewh.] and in ecel. writ. unigenitus),
single of its kind, only, (A.V. only-begotten] ; used of only
sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents),
Hes. theog. 426, 448; Hdt. 7,221; Plat. Critias 113 d.;
Joseph. antt. 1,13, 1; 2, 7,45; povoyevés texvov marpi,
Aeschyl. Ag. 898. Soin the Scriptures: Heb. xi. 17;
povoyern eivai Tun (to be one’s only son or daughter), Judg.
xi. 34; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42; ix. 38; [cef.
Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex-
pression 6 povoy. vids Tov Geod and vids tod Geov 6 povoy.,
Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below]; 1 Jn. iv. 9; povoyeras
mapa tratpés, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owing to
the omission of the art. (cf. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of
Christ, denotes the only son of God or one who in the sense
in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren.
He is so spoken of by John not because 6 Adyos which
was evcapxebeis in him was eternally generated by God
povos 418
the Father (the orthodox interpretation), or came forth
from the being of God just before the beginning of the
world (Subordinationism), but because by the incarna-
tion (éveapxwots) of the Adyos in him he is of nature
or essentially Son of God, and so in a very different
sense from that in which men are made by him réxva rov
6eov (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the
title 6 vids rov Oeod is given only tothe historic Christ
so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone,
but 6 Adyos 6 €voapKw Geis or Jesus through the Adyos
united with God, is 6 povoy. vids rod Geod. ‘The reading
povoyevns eds (without the article before povoy.) in Jn.
i. 18, — which is supported by no inconsiderable weight
of ancient testimony, received into the text by Tregelles,
and Westcott and Hort, defended with much learning
by Dr. Hort (“On povoyevns Oeds in Scripture and Tra-
dition” in his “Two Dissertations”? Camb. and Lond.
1876), and seems not improbable to Harnack (in the
Theol. Lit.-Zeit. for 1876, p. 541 sqq.) [and Weiss (in
Meyer 6te Aufl. ad loc.) ], but is foreign to John’s mode
of thought and speech (iii. 16, 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9), dissonant
and harsh, — appears to owe its origin to a dogmatic zeal
which broke out soon after the early days of the church ;
[see articles on the reading by Prof. Abbot in the Bib.
Sacr. for Oct. 1861 and in the Unitarian Rev. for Jane
1875, (in the latter copious reff. to other discussions of
the same passage are given); see also Prof. Drummond
in the Theol. Rev. for Oct. 1871]. Further, see Grimm,
Exet. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 152 sq.; [Westcott u. s.].*
dvs, -n,-ov, Sept. chiefly for 139, [fr. Hom.down]; 1.
an adjective, alone (without a companion) ; a. with
verbs: etvat, evpicxeo Oat, katadeireo Out, etc., Mt. xiv. 23 ;
Mk. vi. 47; Lk. ix. 36; Jn. viii. 9; 1 Th. iii. 1; added to
the pronouns ¢ya, avros, ov, etc.: Mt. xviii. 15; Mk. ix.
2; LK. xxiv. 18; Ro. xi. 3; xvi. 4, etc. b. it is joined
with its noun to other verbs also, so that what is predi-
cated may be declared to apply to some one person alone
(cf. W. 131 (124) note]: Mt. iv. 10; Lk. iv. 8; xxiv.
12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Jn. vi. 22; Heb.
ix. 7; 2 Tim. iv. 11; with a neg. foll. by adda, Mt. iv. 4.
6 povos Geos, he who alone is God: Jn. v.44; xvii.3; Ro.
Xvi. 27; 6 povos Seomorns, Jude 4. ox... ef wn povos:
Mt. xii. 4; xvii. 8; xxiv. 36; Lk. vi. 4; ovdeis.. . ef py
povos, Phil. iv. 15. i. q. forsaken, destitute of help, Lk.
x. 40; Jn. viii. 16; xvi. 32, (Sap. x. 1). 2. Neut.
uovoy as adv., alone, only, merely: added to the obj., Mt.
v.47; x.42; Acts xviii. 25; Gal. ili. 2; to the gen. Ro.
iii. 29 [here WH mrg. povwr] ; referring to an action ex-
pressed by a verb, Mt. ix. 21; xiv. 36; Mk. v. 36; Lk.
vili. 50; Acts viii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 19; Gal. 1. 23; ii. 10.
povoy pn, Gal. v.13; od (p17) pdvov, Gal. iv. 18; Jas. i. 22;
ii. 24; foll. by adda, Acts xix. 26 [L adda cat; cf. W. 498
(464); Lb. 370 (317)]; by dda woAA@ paddor, Phil. ii.
12; by agAAd xai, Mt. xxi. 21°; Jn. -v. 18 9x 525 xii. 9;
xiii. 9; xvii. 20; Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. (see as above, esp.
B-))}s xxi. 18; xxvi. 29% xxvii/10; ‘Rers2* iv.12; 16,
23; 2 Co. vii. 7, ete.; od pdvov dé, dAAa Kai: Acts xix. 27;
woppow
23; ix. 10; 2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 19; Phil. ii. 27 [here od d€
povoy etce.]; 1 Tim. v.13; [2 Tim. iv. 8. xara pdvas (sc.
x@pas), see karapovas |.
pov-dpbadpos, -ov, (udvos, épGadpos), (Vulg. luscus, Mk.
ix. 47), deprived of one eye, having one eye: Mt. xviii. 9;
Mk. ix. 47. (Hdt., Apollod., Strab., Diog. Laért., al. ;
[Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136: Bekk. Anecd. i. 280; Ruther-
ford, New Phryn. p. 209; W. 24].) *
povdw, -@: (udvos); fr. Hom. down; to make single or
solitary; to leave alone, forsake: pf. pass. ptep. xnpa
pepovwpern, i. e. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, ef. 4.*
popdy, -ns, 7, [fr. root signifying ‘to lay hold of ’, ‘seize’
(cf. Germ. Fassung); Fick, Pt.i.p.174; Vaniéek p. 719],
fr. Hom. down, the form by which a person or thing strikes
the vision ; the exiernal appearance: children are said to
reflect Wux7s Te kal pops 6uoidtnra (of their parents),
4 Mace. xv. 3 (4); ehavepwOn ev érépa poppy, Mk. xvi. 12;
ev poppy Gov wrapxwv, Phil. ii. 6 ; poppy SovAov AaBav,
ibid. 7; this whole passage (as I have shown more
fully in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33
sqq., with which compare the different view given by
Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449
sqq-) is to be explained as follows: who, although (for-
merly when he was Adyos aoapxos) he bore the form (in
which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God
(the sovereign, opp. to popd. SovAov), yet did not think
that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re-
tained (see dpmaypés, 2), but emptied himself of it (see
kevow, 1) so as to assume the form of a servant, in that he
became like unto men (for angels also are SodAce rov
Geov, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion
asa man. (God péve dei dtA@s ev TH avrod poph7, Plat.
de rep. 2 p. 881 c., and it is denied that God davraferOat
Gddore ev GAXats id€ats . . . Kat GAAdTTovTa TO adTod cidos
eis moAAas popdas ... Kal ths éavtovd ideas éxBaiver, p.
380 d.; ixeor dv woAdads pophas toyxor 6 Geds, p. 351 b.;
évos G@paros ovoiay peracxnuarticew Kal peTayaparrecy eis
moAvtpdrous wopdas, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 11; ov yap
Gorep TO voutopa Tapdkoupa Kal Geod poppy yiverat, ibid.
§ 14 fin.; God épyots pév cal yaprow evapyns Kat ravtos
ovTiwocoiv pavepwrepos, poppyy b€ Kal peyeOos nuiy apave
oraros, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 22, 2.) *
[Syn. popoh, cxjua: ace. to Bp. Lghtft. (see the
thorough discussion in his ‘ Detached Note’ on Phil. ii.) and
Trench (N. T. Syn. § Ixx.), wopon form differs from oxjma
Figure, shape, fashion, as that which is intrinsic and essential,
from that which is outward and accidental. So inthe main
Bengel, Philippi, al., on Ro. xii. 2; but the distinction is re-
jected by many; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsche in loc. Yet
the last-named commentator makes poppy SovAov in Phil. |. c.
relate to the complete form, or nature, of a servant; and
oxima to the external form, or human body.]
pophdw, -@: 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. poppah ;
[cf. pop@n, init.]; to form: in fig. discourse dypis [T Tr
WH péxpis, q. V- 1 a.] ob poppwOy Xprords ev vpiv, i. e.
literally, until a mind and life in complete harmony with
the mind and life of Christ shall have been formed in
you, Gal. iv.19. (Arat. phaen. 375; Anth. 1, 33,1; Sept.
and often by Paul [ef. W. 583 (543) ], Ro. v. 8,11; viii. i Is. xliv. 13.) [Comp.: pera-, cvp-poppéda. | *
soppwoas
pophwcts, -ews, 7, (uoppdw) ;
wig: tev Sevdpwv, Theophr. c. pl 3, 7, 4.
i.e. a. the mere form, semblance: evtceBeias, 2 Tim.
i. 5. b. the form befitting the thing or truly express-
ing the fact, the very form:
Ro. ii. 20.*
pooxo-trovew, -@: 1 aor. euoayoroinca; (puooxos and
motew, [cf. W. 26]) ; to make (an image of) a calf: Acts
vii. 41, for which Ex. xxxii. 4 emoince pooyov. (Eccles.
writ.) *
pooxos, -ov, 6, [cf. Schmidt ch. 76, 12; Curtius p.
593]; 1. atender, juicy, shoot; a sprout, of a plant
or tree. 2. 6,79, m- offspring; a. of men([(ef. fig.
Eng. scion) }, a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. _b.
of animals, a young one. 3. acalf, a bullock, a heifer;
so everywhere in the Bible, and always masc.: Lk. xv.
23, 27, 30; Heb. ix. 12,19; Rev. iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly
for 1D a bull, esp. a young bull; then cor 1pa cattle; for
iv an ox or a cow; also for Sap a calf). [(Eur. on.) |*
poucikés, -7, -dv, (uovaa [music, eloquence, ete.]); freq.
in Grk. writ.; prop. devoted to and skilled in the arts
sacred to the muses; accomplished in the liberal arts;
specifically, skilled in music ; playing on musical instru-
ments; so Rev. xviii. 22 [R. V. minstrels ].*
p6x80s, -ov, 6, hard and difficult labor, toil, travail;
hardship, distress: 2 Co. xi. 27; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8;
see kérros, 3b. (Hes. scut. 306; Pind., Trage., Xen., al.;
Sept. chiefly for 52y.) [SyN. see xéros, fin.] *
pvedds, -ov, 6, Guclotedi within, fr. pve to close, shut),
marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Hom. down; Sept. Job
%xi, 24.)'*
préw, -@: pf. pass. weutnuar, (fr. uv@ to close, shut
((cf. Lat. mutus); Curtius § 478]}) ; a. to initiate
into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; 3 Mace.
ii. 30). b. univ. to teach fully, instruct; to accustom
one to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with
1. a forming, shap-
2. form;
zs ‘ a > ,
TIS yoorews K. THS adneias,
a thing: év ravi x. év Tact pepvnuat, to every condition
and to all the several circumstances of life have I be-
come wonted; I have been so disciplined by experience
that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12;
[but others, instead of connecting év mavri etc. here (as
object) with peu. (a constr. apparently without prece-
dent; yet cf. Liinemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the
infinitives that follow as explanatory of the ey mavri
ete., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere
(see mas, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epexegetic (W.
§ 44, 1): in everything and in all things have I learned
the secret both to be filled ete. ].*
p-080s, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; 1. a speech, word,
saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. a true narra-
tive. b. a fiction, a fable; univ. an invention, false-
hood: 2 Pet. i. 16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso-
phists and Gnostics, esp. concerning the emanations and
orders of the zons, are cailed pido [A. V. fables] in
1 Tim.i.4; iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv.4; Tit.i.14. [Cf Trench
§ xc., and reff. s. v. yeveadoyia. | *
pukdopat, -auar; (fr. wv or pd, the sound which a cow
{Lat. mugio]), to low, bellow, prop. of horned
419
pvpov
cattle (Hom., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.); to roar, of a
lion, Rev. x. 3.*
puxtnpitw: (wuxrnp the nose); pres. pass. 3 pers. sing.
puktnpiterat; prop. to turn up the nose or sneer at; to
mock, deride: twa, pass. od puxtnpi¢erar, does not suffer
himself to be mocked, Gal. vi. 7. (For ip9, Job xxii.
19; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 7; Jer. xx. 7; yx), Prov.i.30; m3
Prov. xv. 20; [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Gar 39, 1(and Harnack’s
note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp.
adv. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.].) [Comp.
poxrnpitw.]*
pudikds, -7, -dv, (uvAn a mill), belonging to a mill: Mk.
ix..42 RG; Lk. xvii. 2 LT Tr WH.*
pvALWoS, -7, -ov; 1. made of mill-stones: Boeckh,
Inserr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. pudckds (see
the preceding word): Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.*
pXos, -ov, 6, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; a
a mill-stone [(Anthol. ete.)]: Rev. xviii. 21 [L WH wo-
Awos, q- V-]; pvAos duxds, Mt. xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 LT
Tr WH; Lk. xvii. 2 Ree.; a large mill consisted of two
stones, an upper and an under one; the “nether” stone
was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass,
whence the name yp. dvds. 2. equiv. to wvAn, a mill
[(Diod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt. xxiv.41 LT Tr WH: dawg
pudov, the noise made by a mill, Rev. xviii. 22.*
pudey [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. § 584],
-dvos, 6, place where a mill runs; mill-house: Mt. xxiv.
41 RG. (Eur., Thuc., Dem., Aristot., al.) *
Mipa (LT Tr WH Muppa (Tr -pp- see P, p) {ef. Taf.
on Acts as below and WH. App. p. 160]), -ov, ra, Myra,
a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half
(20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region
of Asia Minor between Caria and Pamphylia [B. D.s. v.
Myra; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.]: Acts xxvii. 5.°
pupids, -ados, 7, (uupios), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept. for
7239 and §39; a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on
which pass. see apyvptoy, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen.
i. q. an innumerable multitude, an unlimited number, ({like
our myriads], the Lat. sexcenti, Germ. Tausend): Lk.
xii. 1; Acts xxi. 20; Rev. v.11 [not Rect ]; ix. 16 [here
L T dicpupiades, q. v.], used simply, of innumerable hosts
of angels: Heb. xii. 22 [here GL Tr put a comma after
puptagiv]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxili. 2; Dan, vii. 10.*
° ’
+ €K-
pupitw: 1 aor. inf. pupicat; (nvpov); fr. Hdt. down;
to anoint: Mk. xiv. 8.*
puplos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down]; 1. innumer-
able, countless, [A. V. ten thousand]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv.
19. 2. with the accent drawn back (cf. Brim. Ausf.
Sprchl. § 70 Anm. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L.
and S. s. v. III.]), wupror, -cat, -ca, ten (housand: Mt. xviii.
24.*
LUpov, -ov, Td, (the grammarians derive it fr. pipe to
flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap; but prob.
more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to
pvppa, Hebr. 13, 79; [Fick (i. 836) connects it with r.
smar ‘to smear’, with which Vaniéek 1198 sq. associates
cpupva, pptos, ete.; cf. Curtius p. 714]), ointment: Mt.
xxvi. 7, 9 Rec., 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq.; xxiii.
Mucia 420
56; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3,5; Rev. xviii. 13; distinguished fr.
Zdaov [q. v- and see Trench, Syn. § xxxviii.], Lk. vii. 46.
({From Aeschyl., Hdt. down]; Sept. for j2 fat, oil,
Prov. xxvii. 9; for 30 ]72W, Ps. cxxxii. (cxxxiii.) 2.) *
Mvota, -as, 7, ysia, a province of Asia Minor on the
shore of the /Egean Sea, between Lydia and the Pro-
pontis; it had among its cities Pergamum, ‘Troas, and
Assos: Acts xvi. 7 sq.*
pvorhpiov, -ov, 7d, (uvorns [one initiated; fr. pvée,
q- v-]), in class. Grk. a hidden thing, secret, mystery:
puaornpidy cov p21) Kateinns TO Pid@, Menand.; plur. gen-
erally mysteries, religious secrets, confided only to the
initiated and not to be communicated by them to ordi-
nary mortals; [cf. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter-
thiimer der Griechen, § 32]. In the Scriptures a.
a hidden or secret thing, not obvious to the understanding:
1 Co. xiii. 2; xiv. 2; (of the secret rites of the Gentiles,
Sap. xiv. 15, 23). 2. a hidden purpose or counsel ;
secret will: of men, tod Baowdéws, Tob. xii. 7,115; Ths
BovAjs avtov, Judith ii. 2; of God: puvornpia Geod, the
secret counsels which govern God in dealing with the
righteous, which are hidden from ungodly and wicked
men but plain to the godly, Sap. ii. 22. In the N. T.,
God’s plan of providing salvation for men through
Christ, which was once hidden but now is revealed:
Ro. xvi. 25; 1 Co. ii. 7 (on this see év, I. 5 f.); Eph. iii.
9; Col. i. 26 sq.; with rod OeAnwaros adrov added, Eph.
i. 9; rod Geov, which God formed, Col. ii. 2; [1 Co. ii. 1
WH txt.]; rod Xpuorod, respecting Christ, Col. iv. 3; rod
evayyediov, which is contained and announced in the
gospel, Eph. vi. 19; éredéoOn 7 pvot. Tov Geod, said of
the consummation of this purpose, to be looked for when
Christ returns, Rev. x. 7; ra p. tis Baoweias rev ovp. or
tov Geov, the secret purposes relative to the kingdom of
God, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; Lk. viii. 10; used of cer-
tain single events decreed by God having reference to
his kingdom or the salvation of men, Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co.
xv. 51; of God’s purpose to bless the Gentiles also with
salvation through Christ [ef. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 26],
Eph. iii. 3 cf. 5; with rod Xpeorod added, ibid. vs. 4; oiko-
vopor pvotnpiov Oeov, the stewards of God’s mysteries,
i.e. those intrusted with the announcement of God’s
secret purposes to men, 1 Co. iv. 1; used generally, of
Christian truth as hidden from ungodly men: with the
addition of ris micrews, tis evoeBeias, which faith and
godliness embrace and keep, 1 Tim. iii. 9, 16; 75 por.
THs dvopias the mystery of lawlessness, the secret pur-
pose formed by lawlessness, seems to be a tacit antithesis
to God’s saving purpose, 2 Th. ii. 7. 3. Like Nr)
and 4jD in rabbinie writers, it denotes the mystic or
hidden sense: of an O. T. saying, Eph. v. 32; of a
name, Rey. xvii. 5; of an image or form seen in a vision,
Rey. i. 20; xvii. 5; of adream, Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 18 sq.
27-30, where the Sept. so render 1}. (The Vulg. trans-
lates the word sacramentum in Dan. ii. 18; iv. 6; Tob.
xii. 7; Sap. ii. 22; Eph. i. 9; iii. 3,9; v.32; 1 Tim. iii.
16; Rev.i. 20.) [On the distinctive N. T. use of the
word cf. Campbell, Dissertations on the Gospels. diss. ix.
Moons
pt. i.; Kendrick in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mystery; Bp.
Lghtft. on Col. i. 26.]*
pr-oTrdto; (uvwy, and this fr. pvew rods Sas to shut
the eyes); to see dimly, see only what is near: 2 Pet. i. 9
[some (cf. R. V.mrg.) would make it mean here closing
the eyes; cf. our Eng. blink]. (Aristot. problem. 31,
16, 25.) *
porwp, -wzos, 6, (Hesych. rpaipa kai 6 éx mAnyis
aivaTadys témos fj Kai Ta eLepxdueva TOY mAnyav Vdara),
a bruise, wale, wound that trickles with blood: 1 Pet. ii.
24 fr. Is. liii. 5 [where A. V. stripes]. (Gen. iv. 23; Ex.
xxi, 25; Is.i.6. Aristot., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
Popdopat, -Guar: 1 aor. mid. éuwpnodunv; 1 aor. pass.
enapnOnv; (~apos, q.v-); fr. Hom. down; to blame, find
fault with, mock at: 2 Co. vi. 3; viii. 20. (Prov. ix. 7;
Sap. x. 14.) *
pOpos, -ov, 6, [perh. akin to pio, Curtius § 478; cf.
Vanicek p. 732], blemish, blot, disgrace; 1. cen-
sure. 2. insult: of men who are a disgrace to a
society, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [A. V. blemishes]. (From Hom.
down; Sept. for 03, of bodily defects and blemishes,
Lev. xxi. 16 sqq.; Deut. xv. 21; Cant. iv. 7; Dan. i. 4;
of a mental defect, fault, Sir. xx. 24 (23).) *
popatve: 1 aor. euwpava; 1 aor. pass. éeuwpavOnv;
(pepés) ; 1. in class. Grk. to be foolish, to act fool-
ishly. 2. in bibl. Grk. a. to make foolish: pass.
Ro. i. 22 (Is. xix.11; Jer. x.14; 2S. xxiv. 10); i. q. to
prove a person or thing to be foolish: rv copiav rod
Kéopou, 1 Co. i. 20 (tiv Bovdny adrar, Is. xliv. 25). b.
to make flat and tasteless: pass. of salt that has lost its
strength and flavor, Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34.*
pwpla, -as, 7, (wwpes), first in Hdt. 1, 146 [Soph., al.],
foolishness: 1 Co. i. 18, 21, 23; ii. 14; iii. 19, (Sir. xx.
31).*
pwpodoyla, -as, 7, (uwpoddyos), (stultiloquium, Plaut.,
Vulg.), foolish talking: Eph.v.4. (Aristot. h. a. 1, 11;
Plut. mor. p.504b.) [Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxxiv.]*
pwpds, -a, -dv, [on the accent cf. W. 52 (51); Chandler
§§ 404, 405], foolish: with rupdds, Mt. xxiii. 17, 19 [here
T Tr WH txt. om. Lbr. pop.]; 1d popdv rod eod, an act
or appointment of God deemed foolish by men, 1 Co. i.
25; i. q. without learning or erudition, 1 Co. i. 27; iii.
18; iv. 10; imprudent, without forethought or wisdom,
Mt. vii. 26; xxiii. 17,19 [see above]; xxv. 2 sq. 8; i. q.
empty, useless, (yrncets, 2 Tim. ii. 23; Tit. iii. 9; in
imitation of the Hebr. 523 (cf. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1; Job
ii. 10) i. q. impious, godless, (because such a man neglects
and despises what relates to salvation), Mt. v. 22; [some
take the word here as a Hebr. term (71}) rebel) ex-
pressive of condemnation; cf. Num. xx. 10; Ps. Ixviii.
8; but see the Syriac; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad
loc.; Levy, Neuhebriisch. u. Chald. Worterbuch s. v.
pin]. (Sept. for 53), Deut. xxxii. 6; Is. xxxii. 5 sq.;
for 9°D3, Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 8. [Aeschyl., Soph., al.])*
Moc fis (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo
(16, 2, 85 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in
Philo [ef. his “ Buch v. d. Weltschopf.” ed. Miiller p. 117
(but Richter in his ed. has adopted Mais) ], after the
Moors
Hebr. form nv, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. Nw to
draw out), and Moto fs (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s
4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [in Josephus the
readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the
classic form (Maojs), which moreover is the common
form in his writings,” Miiller’s note on Joseph. c. Ap. 1,
31,4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt
Moiojs uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. ef. Otto’s
note on Justin Mart. apol. i. § 32 init.], and in the N. T.
ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian water-
saved, i. e. ‘saved from water’; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. vol.
ii. p. 313; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 824; Knobel
on Ex. ii. 10; [but its etymol. is still in dispute; many
recent Egyptologists connect it with mesu i. e. ‘child’;
on the various interpretations of the name cf. Miiller on
Joseph. c. Ap.1.c.; Stanley in B. D.s.v. Moses; Schenkel
in his BL. iv. 240 sq.]. From the remarks of Fritzsche,
Gesenius, etc., it is evident also that the word is a trisy]-
lable, and hence should not be written Mwvojs as it is
by L Tr WH, for wv is a diphthong, as is plain from
éwutov, twvTd, Tonic for éavrod, raird; [cf. Lipsius,
[N, v: v (epeanvorindy), cf. W. §5,1b.; B.9 (8); Tdf
Proleg. p. 97 sq.; WH. App. p. 146 sq.; Thiersch, De Pentat.
vers. Alex. p. 84 sq.; Scrivener, Plain Introd. ete. ch. viii.
§ 4; Collation of Cod. Sin. p. liv.; see s. vv. dto, efxoot, mas.
Its omission by the recent editors in the case of verbs (esp.
in 3 pers. sing.) is rare. In WH, for instance, (where “the
omissions are all deliberate and founded on evidence ”) it is
wanting in the case of éor: five times only (Mt. vi. 25; Jn.
vi. 55 bis; Acts xviii. 10; Gal. iv. 2,— apparently without
principle) ; in Tdf. never; see esp. Tdf. u.s. In the dat. plur.
of the 3d decl. the Mss. vary; see esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 98 and
WH. App. p.146sq. On v appended to accus. sing. in a or 7
(4) see &ponv. On the neglect of assimilation, particularly in
compounds with ody and éy, see those prepp. and T'd/. Pro-
leg. p. 73 sq.; WH. App. p. 149; cf. B. 8; W.48. On the
interchange of v and vv in such words as adworrévyw (dmo-
Krévw), exxbvvw (exxbvw), varos (2vvaros), evevhkovra, (évve-
vikovra), éveds (evveds), "Iwdvyns (Iwdyns), and the like, see
the several words. |
Naacody, (jiWr3 [i. e. ‘diviner ’, ‘ enchanter’]), 6, in-
decl., Naasson [or Naashon, or (best) Nahshon], a man
mentioned in (Ex. vi. 23; Num.i. 7; Ruth iv. 20) Mt.
i. 4 and Lk. iii. 32.*
Nayyal, (fr. 73) to shine), 6, indecl., (Vulg. [Naggae,
and (so A. V.)] Nagge), Naggai, one of Christ’s ances-
tors: Lk. iii. 25.*
Natapér [(so Rec. everywhere; Lchm. also in Mk.
1.9; Lk. ii. 39,51; iv.16; Jn.i.45 (46) sq.; Tdf. in Mk.
421
Nalapér
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 140]; add, W. p. 44; [B. 19
(17)]; Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel ed. 3 p. 119
note), -ews, 6, Moses, (Itala and Vulg. Moyses), the
famous leader and legislator of the Israelites in their
migration from Egypt to Palestine. As respects its de-
clension, everywhere in the N. T. the gen. ends in -éws
(as if from the nominative Maiceds), in Sept. -7, as Num.
iv. 41, 45, 49, etc. dat. -7 (as in Sept., cf. Ex. v. 20;
xii. 28; xxiv. 1; Lev. viii. 21, etc.) and -et (for the
Mss. and accordingly the editors vary between the
two [but TWH -7 only in Acts vii. 44 (influenced by
the Sept. ?), Tr in Acts 1. c. and Mk. ix. 4, 5,; L in Acts
]. c. and Ro. ix. 15 txt.; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 119; WH.
App. p. 158]), Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 4; Jn. v. 46; ix.
29; Acts vii. 44; Ro. ix. 15; 2 Tim. iii. 8. ace. -qy (as
in Sept.), Acts vi. 11; vii. 35; 1 Co. x. 2; Heb. iii. 3;
once -¢a, Lk. xvi. 29; ef. [Tdf. and WH. u.s.]; W.§ 10,
1; B.u.s.; [Etym. Magn. 597, 8]. By meton. i. q. the
books of Moses: Lk. xvi. 29; xxiv. 27; Acts xv. 2135
2 Co. iii. 15.
N
i.9; Jn.i. 45 (46) sq.; Trtxt.in Lk. i. 26; ii. 4; iv. 16,
Jn. i. 45 (46) sq.; Trmrg.in Mk. i. 9; Lk. ii. 39, 51,
and WH everywhere except in four pass. soon to be
mentioned), Nafapé@ (so Rec." ten times, Rec.>* six
times, T and Tr except in the pass. already given or about
to be given; Lin Mt. ii. 23; xxi.11(so WH here); Lk.i.
26; Acts x. 38 (so WH here)), Nafapa6 (L in Mt. iv.
13 and Lk. ii. 4, after cod. A but with “little other at-
testation” (Hort)), Nafapé (Mt. iv.13 T Tr WH; Lk.
iv. 16 T WH)], 9, indecl., (and ra Nagapa, Orig. and Jul.
African. in Euseb. h. e. 1, 7,143 ef. Keim, Jesu von Naz.
i. p. 819 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 16] and ii. p. 421 sq. [Eng.
trans. iv. p. 108], who thinks Nazara preferable to the
other forms [but see WH. App. p. 160"; Tdf. Proleg. p.
120; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5; Alford, Greek Test.
vol. i. Proleg. p. 97]), Nazareth, a town of lower Galilee,
mentioned neither in the O. T., nor by Josephus, nor in
the Talmud (unlessit is to be recognized in the appellation
1¥) 13, given there to Jesus Christ). It was built upon
a hill, in a very lovely region (cf. Renan, Vie de Jésus,
14° éd. p. 27 sq. [Wilbour’s trans. (N. Y. 1865) p. 69
sq.; see also Robinson, Researches, ete. ii. 336 sq-]), and
was distant from Jerusalem a three days’ journey, from
Tiberias eight hours [or less]; it was the home of Jesus
(Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 1); its present name is en Naze
rah, a town of from five to six thousand inhabitants (cf.
Nafapnvos
Baedeker, Palestine and Syria, p. 359): Mt. ii. 23; iv.
13 >.xxi. 12; MK-1.09% Lk, 9) 26771 4, 89; 51; 1v. 16;
Jn. i. 45 (46) sq.; Acts x. 39. As respects the He-
brew form of the name, it is disputed whether it was
7¥) ‘a sprout’, ‘shoot’, (so, besides others, Hengstenberg,
Christol. des A. T. ii. 124 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 106 sq.]; but
cf. Gieseler in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1831, p. 588 sq.), or
77¥) ‘protectress’, ‘guard ’, (cf. 2 K. xvii. 9; so Keim
u. s.) or NI¥) ‘sentinel’ (so Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f.
Luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 401), or M7 ¥) ‘ watch-tower’
(so Ewald in the Gotting. gelehrt. Anzeigen for 1867,
p- 1602 sq.). Fora further account of the town cf. Rob-
inson, as above, pp. 333-343; Tobler, Nazareth in Palis-
tina. Berl. 1868; [Hackett in B. D. s. v. Nazareth].*
Natapnvos, -od, 6, a Nazarene, of Nazareth, sprung from
Nazareth, a patrial name applied by the Jews to Jesus,
because he had lived at Nazareth with his parents from
his birth until he made his public appearance: Mk. i. 24;
xiv. 67; xvi. 6; Lk. iv. 34; [xxiv. 19 L mrg. T Tr txt.
WH]; and L T Tr WH in MK. x. 47.*
Natwpaios, -ov, 6, i. gq. Naapyvds, q. v.; Jesus is so
called in Mt. ii. 23 [cf. B. D. s. v. Nazarene; Bleek,
Synopt. Evang. ad loc.]; xxvi. 71; Mk. x. 47 RG; Lk.
xviii. 37 ; xxiv.19 RG Ltxt. Trmrg.; Jn. xviii. 5, 7; xix.
19; Actsii. 22; iii. 6; iv.10; vi. 14; [ix. 5. L br.]; xxii.
8; xxvi.9. of Na¢wpaio [ A. V. the Nazarenes], followers
of Inaois 6 Nafwpaios, was a name given to the Christians
by the Jews, Acts xxiv. 5.*
Nady or (so L mrg. T WH) Na@au, 6, (101 [‘ given’ se.
of God]}), Nathan: a son of David the king (2 S. v. 14),
Lk. iii. 31.*
NaGavarr, 6, (08103 gift of God), Nathanael, an inti-
mate disciple of Jesus: Jn. i. 45-49 (46-50); xxi. 2.
He is commonly thought to be identical with Bartholo-
mew, because as in Jn. i. 45 (46) he is associated with
Philip, soin Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14 Bartholo-
mew is ; Nathanael, on this supposition, was his personal
name, and Bartholomew a title derived from his father
(see BapOoXopaios). But in Actsi. 13 Thomas is placed
between Philip and Bartholomew; [see B D. s. v. Na-
thaniel]. Spdth in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie,
1868, pp. 168 sqq. 309 sqq. [again 1880, p. 78 sqq.]
acutely but vainly tries to prove that the name was formed
by the Fourth Evangelist symbolically to designate ‘ the
disciple whom Jesus loved’ (see "Iwavyns, 2).*
vat, a particle of assertion or confirmation [akin to
vn; ef. Donaldson, Cratylus § 189], fr. Hom. down, yea,
verily, truly, assuredly, even so: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21;
Philem. 20; Rev. i. 7; xvi. 7; xxii. 203 vai, Aéyw dyiv
xth., Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 265 xi. 515 xii. 5; vai. Néyer rd
mvevpa, Rev. xiv. 13; it is responsive and confirmatory
of the substance of some question or statement: Mt. ix.
28 3 )Xiile oll; XVe 27s vile OD xx OeMVL Ker Vil. 29 +e.
xi. 27; xxi. 15 sq.; Acts v. 8 (9); xxii. 27; Ro. iii. 29;
a repeated vai, most assuredly, [ A.V. yea, yea], expresses
emphatic assertion, Mt. v. 37; rw dyav 76 vai vai, let your
vai be vai, i. e. let your allegation be true, Jas. v. 12 [B.
163 (142); W. 59 (58)]; etva: or yiveoOat vai kai ov, to
422
Naodp
be or show one’s self double-tongued, i. e. faithless, waver
ing, false, 2 Co. i. 18 sq.; iva map’ euot Td vai val Kat Td od
ov, that with me should be found both a solemn affirma-
tion and a most emphatic denial, i. e. that I so form my re-
solves as, at the dictate of pleasure or profit, not to carry
them out, ibid. 17[cf. W.460 (429) ]; vat év aira yéyover,
in him what was promised has come to pass, ibid. 19;
emayyeNiat €v avt@ TO vai SC. yeyovaory, have been fulfilled,
have been confirmed by the event, ibid. 20 [cf. Meyer
ad loc.]. It is a particle of appeal or entreaty, like the
[Eng. yea] (Germ. ja): with an imperative, vai... wvA-
AapBavov adrais, Phil. iv. 3 (where Ree. has xai for vai);
val €pxov, Rev. xxii. 20 Ree.; so vai vai, Judith ix. 12.
[A classification of the uses of vai in the N. T. is given
by Ellicott on Phil. iv. 3; cf. Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt.
1265] e
Nadav, see Neeuav.
Naty [WH Naw, (cf. I, «)], (18) a pasture; cf. Simonis,
Onomast. N. T. p. 115), 7, Nain, a town of Galilee, situ-
ated at the northern base of Little Hermon; modern
Nein, a petty village inhabited by a very few families,
and not to be confounded with a village of the same name
beyond the Jordan (Joseph. b. j. 4, 9,4): Lk. vii. 11.
[Cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 552 sq.]*
vads, -ov, 6, (vaiw to dwell), Sept. for Paid, used of the
temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice
(or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and
the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or
cell of a temple, where the image of the go | was placed,
called also Sduos, anxds, which is to be distinguished from
70 iepov, the whole temple, the entire consecrated en-
closure; this distinction is observed also in the Bible;
see iepov, p. 299°): Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; xxvii.40; Mk.
xiv. 58; xv. 29; Jn.ii. 19sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt.
xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we sup-
pose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place,
which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [ (note
the eis (al. ev) of TTrWH)]. with Geov, rod Geov,
added: Mt. ixxvi..61.,1; Co.a1.,1 7%, 2.Co..wis 16572, ih:
ii. 4; Rev. xi. 1; used specifically of the Holy place,
where the priests officiated: Lk. i. 9, 21 sq.; of the Holy
of holies (see caraméracpa), Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38;
Lk. xxiii. 45. in the visions of the Revelation used of
the temple of the ‘New Jerusalem’: Rev. iii. 12; vil. 15;
xi. 19; xiv. 15,17; xv. 5 sq. 8; xvi. 1,17; of any temple
whatever prepared for the true God, Acts vii. 48 Rec. ;
xvii. 24. of miniature silver temples modelled after the
temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis (q. v.)] of Ephesus, Acts
xix. 24. 6 eds vads aitis éarw, takes the place of a tem-
ple in it, Rev. xxi. 22." metaph. of a company of Chris-
tians, a Christian church, es dwelt in by the Spirit of
God: 1 Co. iii. 16; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21; for the same
reason, of the bodies of Christians, 1 Co. vi. 19. of the
body of Christ, 6 vads tov aaparos avrov (epexeget. gen.
[W. 531 (494) }), Jn. ii. 21, and ace. to the Evangelist’s
interpretation in 19 also. [(From Hom. on.) ]*
Noovp, (D3) consolation), 6, Nahum, a certain Is
raelite, one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 25.*
vapoos
vapbos, -ov, 7, (a Sanskrit word [cf. Fick as in Low
below]; Hebr. 35), Cant. i. 12; iv. 13 sq.); a.
nard, the head or spike of a fragrant East Indian plant
belonging to the genus Valeriana, which yields a juice
of delicious odor which the ancients used (either pure
or mixed) in the preparation of a most precious oint-
ment; hence b. nard oil or ointment; so Mk. xiv.
3; Jn. xii. 3. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Narde; Riietschi
in Herzog x. p. 203; Furrer in Schenkel p. 286 sq. ;
[Léw, Aramiische Pflanzennamen (Leip. 1881), § 316
p- 368 sq.; Royle in Alex.’s Nitto s. v. Nerd; Birdwood
in the ‘Bible Educator’ ii. 152].*
Napxiooos, -ov, 6, Narcissus [i. e. ‘daffodil ’], a Roman
mentioned in Ro. xvi. 11, whom many interpreters with-
out good reason suppose to be the noted freedman of the
emperor Claudius (Suet. Claud. 28; Tac. ann. 11, 29 sq. ;
12, 57 etc.) (ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 175]; in op-
position to this opinion cf. Win. RWB. 8. v.; Riietschi
in Herzog x. 202 sq.; [B. D.s. v.].*
vavayéw, -@: 1 aor. evavdynoa; (fr. vavayds ship-
wrecked ; and this fr. vais, and dyvuu to break); freq.
in Grk. writ. from Aeschyl. and Hat. down, to suffer ship-
wreck: prop. 2 Co. xi. 25; metaph. epi tiv miotw (as
respects [A. V. concerning, see tepi, II. b.] the faith),
Eepims 1919:*
vav-KAnpos, -ov, 6, (vais and kAjpos), fr. Hdt. [and Soph.]
down, a ship-owner, ship-master, i. e. one who hires out his
vessel, or a portion of it, for purposes of transportation :
Acts xxvii. 11.*
vats, acc. vady, 7, (fr. vdw or véw, to flow, float, swim),
@ ship, vessel of considerable size: Acts xxvii.41. (From
Hom. down; Sept. several times for 1}8 and 71738.) *
vavrns, -ov, 6, @ sailor, seaman, mariner: Acts xxvii.
27, 30; Rev. xviii. 17. (From Hom. down.) *
Naxdp, 6,(11N) fr. 19M to burn; [Philo de cong. erud.
grat. § 9 N. épunveverat howtos avaravors; al.al.; see B. D.
Am. ed. s. v.]), the indecl. prop. name, Nachor [or (more
com. but less accurately) Nahor] (Gen. xi. 22), of one of
the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 34.*
veavias, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, and this fr. véos; cf. peyeoray
[q. v.], uvav), fr. Hom. down; Hebr. 437) and 1n3; a
young man: Acts xx. 9; xxiii. 17, and RG in 18 [so here
WH txt. ], 22; it is used asin Grk. writ., like the Lat. adu-
lescens and the Hebr. y) (Gen. xli. 12), of men between
twenty-four and forty years of age [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
213; Diog. Laért. 8, 10; other reff. in Steph. Thesaur.
S. VV. vedus, veavioxos]: Acts vii. 58.*
veavickos, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, see veavias; on the ending
-icxos, -ioxn, which has dimin. force, as dvOpwrickos,
BaciXioxos, madioxn, etc., cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443),
fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. chiefly for 13m3 and 73; @ young
man, youth: Mt. xix. 20, 22; Mk. xiv. 51*; xvi. 5; Lk.
vii. 14; Acts ii. 17; [and LT Tr WH in xxiii. 18 (here
WH mrg. only), 22]; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; like yy) (2S. ii.
4; Gen. xiv. 24, ete.; cf. Germ. Bursche, Knappe i. q:
Knabe, (cf. our colloquial “boys”, “lads ”]) used of a
young attendant or servant: so the plur. in MK. xiv. 51
Rec.; Acts v. 10.*
428
veKpos
NedoXts, -ews, 7, Neapolis, a maritime city of Mace.
donia, on the gulf of Strymon, having a port [cf. Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 203 n.] and colonized by Chalcidians [see B. D.
s. v. Neapolis ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip., Introd. § iii.]
Acts xvi. 11 [here Tdf. Neav rédkw, WH Néav ddw, Tr
Neav rodw ; cf. B. 74; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 604 sq.]. (Strab.
7 p. 330; Plin. 4, a 1)
Neepov and (so L T Tr WH after the Sept. [see WH.
App. p. 159 sq.]) Nauay, 6 ({2¥2 pleasantness), Naaman
(so Vulg. [also Neman]), a commander of the Syrian
armies (2 K. v. 1): Lk. iv. 27*
vekpos, -d, -ov, (akin to the Lat. neco, nex {fr. ar. sige
nifying ‘to disappear’ ete.; cf. Curtius § 93; Fick i. p.
123; Vanicek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for nn; dead,
i.e. 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last,
lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v.
10; xx. 9; xxviii. 6; Heb. xi. 35; Rev.i. 17; émi vexpois,
if men are dead (where death has occurred [see ézi, B.
2 a.€. p. 233° fin.]), Heb. ix. 17 ; éyeipew vexpovs, Mt. x. 8;
xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; hyperbolically and proleptically i. q. as
if already dead, sure to die, destined inevitably to die: ro
odua, Ro. viii. 10 (76 oda and 76 c@pdriov pier vexpov,
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 15 and 3, 22, 41; in which sense Luther
called the human body, although alive, einen alten Maden-
sack [cf. Shakspere’s thou worms-meat !]); said of the
body of a dead man (so in Hom. often; for 71933, a corpse,
Deut. xxviii. 26; Is. xxvi. 19; Jer. vii. 33; ix. 22; xix.
7): peta Tov vexpov, among the dead, i.e. the buried, Lk.
xxiv. 5; @ayau tovs vexpovs, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60;
daTea pepe, Mt. xxiii. 27 ; of the corpse of a murdered
man, aipza as vexpod, Rev. xvi. 3 (for 99, Ezek. xxxvii.
9; for on, thrust through, slain, Ezek. ix. 7;xi.6). —_b.
deceased, departed, one whose soul is in Bates: Rev. i. 18;
ii. 8; vexpds jv, was like one dead, as good as dead, Lk.
xv. 24, 32; plur.,1 Co. xv. 29; Rev. xiv. 13; év Xpiora,
dead Christians (see év, I. 6 b. p. 211), 1 Th. iv. 16; very
often of vexpoi and vexpoi (without the art. ; see W. p. 123
(117) and cf. B. 89 (78) pits) are used of the assembly
of the dead (see dvagraois, 2 and éyeipw, 2): 1 Pet. iv. 6;
Rev. xx. 5, 12 sq.3 ris amd tay vexodv, one (returning)
from the dead, the world of spirits, Lk. xvi. 30; é« vexpav,
from the dead, occurs times too many to count (see ava-
oraois, avioTnut, éyeipw) : avayeu tid ex v., Ro. x. 7; Heb.
xiii. 20; Cwm ék vexpay, life springing forth from death,
i. e. the return of the dead to life [see éx, I. 5], Ro. xi.
15; mpwrorokos éx Tov vexp. who was the first that returned
to life from among the dead, Col. i. 18; also mpwror. tov
vexp. Rev.i. 5; Cwomoueiv rods v. Ro. iv 17; éyeipew ria
ano Tav v. to rouse one to quit (the assembly of) the dead,
Mt. xiv. 2; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 7; kpivew CGvtas x. vexpovs,
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; xperns Cavrav x. vexpav, Acts
x. 423 vexpov x. Cavrav kuprever, Ro, xiv. 9. c. desti-=
tute of life, without life, inanimate (i. q. ayruxos) : 7d copa
xwpis mvevpatos vexpdv ear, Jas. ii. 26; ovK Zari (6) Oeds
vexpov adda Cavrev, God is the guardian God not of the
dead but of the living, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx.
38. 2. trop. _a. [spiritually dead i. e. | destitute of
a life that recognizes and is devoted to God, because given
vexpow 424
up to trespasses and sins; inactive as respects doing right:
Jn. v. 25; Ro. vi. 13; Eph. v. 14; Rev. iii. 1; with rots
raparrepaow (dat. of cause [cf. W. 412 (384 sq.)]) added,
Eph. ii. 1, 5; év [but T Tr WH om. éy] rots raparr. Col.
ii.13; in the pointed saying apes rovs vexpovs Odyau Tovs
éavtév vexpovs, leave those who are indifferent to the sal-
vation offered them in the gospel, to bury the bodies of
their own dead, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60. b. univ. desti-
tute of force or power, inactive, inoperative: th dpapria,
unaffected by the desire to sin [cf. W. 210 (199); B.
§ 133, 12], Ro. vi. 11; of things: dapria, Ro. vii. 8;
riots, Jas. ii. 17,20[R G], 26; épya, powerless and fruit-
less (see €pyov, 3 p. 248° bot.), Heb. vi. 1; ix. 14. [Cf.
Ovntés, fin. |
vexpdw, -@: 1 aor. impv. vexpooate; pf. pass. ptep.
vevexpw@pévos; to make dead (Vulgate and Lat. Fathers
mortifico), to put to death, slay: twa, prop., Anthol. app.
313,55 pass. vevexpwpévos, hyperbolically, worn out, of an
impotent old man, Heb. xi. 12; also capa vevexp. Ro. iv.
19; equiv. to to deprive of power, destroy the strength of:
ra péAn, i. e. the evil desire lurking in the members (of
the body), Col. iii. 5. (ra Sdypara, Antonin. 7, 2; rv
ééw, Plut. de primo frig. 21; [dv@pemos, of obduracy,
Epictet. diss. 1, 5, 7].) *
véKpwots, -ews, ij, (veKpda) ; 1. prop. a putting to
death (Vulg. mortificatio in 2 Co. iv. 10), killing. 2.
i. q. Td vexpodoba, [the being put to death], with rod
‘Inood added, i. e. the (protracted) death [A. V. the
dying] which Jesus underwent in God’s service [on the
gen. cf, W. 189 (178) note], Paul so styles the marks of
perpetual trials, misfortunes, hardships attended with
peril of death, evident in his body [ef. Meyer], 2 Co.
iv. 10. 3. i. q. 7b vevexpwpévoy eivat, the dead state
[A. V. deadness], utter sluggishness, (of bodily members
and organs, Galen): Ro. iv. 19.*
veo-pnvia, see voupnvia.
véos, -a,-ov, [allied with Lat. novus, Germ. neu, Eng. new;
Curtius § 483], as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down, a.
recently born, young, youthful: Tit. ii. 4 (for 1), Gen.
XXxVii. 2; Ex. xxxiii. 11); oivos véos, recently made, Mt.
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37-39 [but 39 WH in br.],
(Sir. ix. 10). 2. new: 1Co.v. 7; Heb. xii. 24;
i. q- born again, dvOpwzos (q. v. 1 f.), Col. iii. 10, [SyN.
see xatvés, fin. | *
veooods and (so TWH, see vogad) vooads, -ov, 6,
(véos), a young (creature), young bird: Lk. ii. 24. The
form vooods appears in the Vat. txt. of the Sept.; but
in cod. Alex. everywhere veooods; cf. Sturz, De dial.
Maced. p. 185 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq.; [cef. W.
24}. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often for 13,
of the young of animals, as Lev. xii. 6, 8; Job xxxviii.
41.)*
veétns, -nros, 9, (véos), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly
for D3; youth, youthful age: 1 Tim. iv. 125 ék vedry-
rés pov, from my boyhood, from my youth, Mt. xix. 20
[RG]; Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4; Gen. viii.
21; Job xxxi. 18, etc.”
ved-utos, -ov, (véos and iw), newly-planted (Job xiv.
vewKOpoSs
9; Is. v. 7, ete.); trop. a new convert, neophyte, [A. V.
novice, i. e.] (one who has recently become a Christian):
1 Tim. iii.6. (Eccles. writ.) *
Népwv [by etymol. ‘brave’, ‘bold ’], -wvos, 6, Nero, the
well-known Roman emperor: 2 Tim. iv. 23 Rec. [i. e. in
the subscription ].*
vevw; 1 aor. ptep. vevoas; to give a nod; to signify bya
nod, [A. V. to beckon]: rwi, foll. by an inf. of what one
wishes to be done, Jn. xiii. 24; Acts xxiv. 10. (From
Hom. down; Sept. Prov. iv. 25.) [Comp.: d:a-, éx-, é~,
emt-, KatTa-vevo. | *
vehedn, -ns, 4, (vehos), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for
}2y!, but also for 2 and pnw; a cloud: [». porewn, Mt.
xvii. 5]; Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi.64; Mk.ix.7; xiii. 26; xiv.
62; Lk. ix. 34.sq.; xii. 54; xxi. 27; Actsi.9; 1 Th. iv.
17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev. i. 7; x. 13 xi.
12; xiv. 14 sqq.3 of that cloud in which Jehovah is said
(Ex. xiii. 21 sq., ete.) to have gone before the Israelites
on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul
represents as spread over them (im6 tiv vepéAnv jaar,
cf. Ps. civ. (ev.) 39; Sap. x. 17): 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [SyN.
see védos. | *
NehOare(y [and (so T edd. 2, 7, WH in Rev. vii. 6)
NepOarip; see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. 1, ¢], 6, (9993,
i.e. ‘my wrestling’ [cf. Gen. xxx. 8], or acc. to what
seems to be a more correct interpretation ‘my crafti-
ness’ [cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8; Test. xii. Patr. test.
Neph. § 1], fr. 5n5 unused in Kal; ef. Riietschi in Herzog
x. p. 200 sq.), Naphtali, the sixth son of the patriarch
Jacob, by Bilhah, Rachel’s maid: Rev. vii. 6; by meton.
his posterity, the tribe of Naphtali, Mt. iv. 13, 15.*
védos, -ous, [allied with Lat. nubes, nebula, etc.], ré,
Sept. for ay and 13, a cloud; in the N. T. once trop.
a large, dense multitude, a throng: paptipev, Heb. xii. 1,
often so in prof. auth., as vép. Tpaev, mefav, Yapav, Ko-
Aowv, Hom. Il. 4, 274; 16, 663 17, 755; 23,133; dvdpa-
mov, Hdt. 8,109; orpovdav, Arstph. av. 578; dxpidar,
Diod. 8, 29; peditum equitumque nubes, Liv. 35, 49.*
[Syn. végos, vepéarn: vedos is general, vepéAn specific ;
the former denotes the great, shapeless collection of vapor
obscuring the heavens; the latter designates particular and
definite masses of the same, suggesting form and limit. Cf.
Schmidt vol. i. ch. 36.]
vebpés, -ov, 6, a kidney (Plat., Arstph.); plur. the kid-
neys, the loins, as Sept. for nivoa, used of the inmost
thoughts, feelings, purposes, of the soul: with the addi-
tion of xapdias, Rev. ii. 23, with which cf. Ps. vii. 10;
Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; Sap. i. 6.*
vew-Kdpos, -ov, 6, 9, (vews or vads, and Kopew to sweep;
[questioned by some; a hint of this deriv. is found in
Philo de sacerd. honor. § 6 (cf. vewxopia, de somniis 2,
42), and Hesych. s. v. defines the word 6 rév vady koopav~
kopeiv yap Td caipew edeyor (cf. 8. V. onKoKdpos ; SO Etym.
Magn. 407, 27, cf. s. v. veoxdpos); yet Suidas s. v. xdpq
p- 2157 ¢. says v. odx 5 capadv Tr. v. GAN’ & émipeovpevos
abrod (cf. s. vv. vewxdpos, onkoxdpos) ; hence some connect
the last half with root cop, KoA, cf. Lat. curo,colo]); 1
prop. on’ who sweeps and cleans a temple. 2. oni
VEWTEPLKOS
who has charge of a temple, to keep and adorn it, a sac-
ristan: Xen. an. 5, 3, 6; Plat. lege. 6 p. 759 a. 3.
the worshipper of a deity (ods i. e. the Israelites 6 Oeds
€aut@ vewxdpous jyev through the wilderness, Joseph. b. j.
5, 9,4); as appears from coins still extant, it was an
honorary title [cemple-keeper or temple-warden (cf. 2
above) ] of certain cities, esp. of Asia Minor, in which
the special worship of some deity or even of some deified
human ruler had been established (cf. Stephanus, Thes. v.
p- 1472 sq.; [ef. B. D. s. v. worshipper]); so v. ths "Apré-
pudos, of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35; [see Bp. Lghtft. in Con-
temp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.; Wood, Discoveries at
Ephesus (Lond. 1877), App. passim ].*
vewTepikds, -7, -0v, (veaTepos, q- V-), peculiar to the age
of youth, youthful : émOvpia, 2 Tim. ii. 22. (3 Mace. iv.
8; Polyb. 10, 24, 7; Joseph. antt. 16, 11, 8.) *
vebtepos, -a, -ov, (compar. of véos, q. v-), [fr. Hom.
down], younger; i. e. a. younger (than now), Jn.
xxi. 18. b. young, youthful, [A. V. younger (rela-
tively)]: 1 Tim. v. 11, 14; Tit. ii. 6; opp. to mpeoBure-
pot, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq.; 1 Pet.v. 5. ce. [strictly] younger
by birth: Lk. xv. 12 sq. (4 Mace. xii. 1). d. an
attendant, servant, (see veavicokos, fin.): Acts v. 6; infe-
rior in rank, opp. to 6 peifov, Lk. xxii. 26.*
vj, a particle employed: in affirmations and oaths,
(common in Attic), and joined to an acc. of the pers.
(for the most part, a divinity) or of the thing affirmed
or sworn by [B. § 149, 17]; by (Lat. per, Germ. bet):
1 Co. xv. 31 (Gen. xlii. 15 sq.).*
v0; to spin: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. (Plat. polit.
p: 289 ¢.; Anthol.; for 71, Ex. xxxv. 25 sq.) *
wymate [cf. W. 92 (87)]; (vnmuos, q. v-); to be a babe
(infant): 1 Co. xiv. 20. (Hippoer.; eccles. writ.) *
vitios, -a, -ov, (fr. vn, an insep. neg. prefix [Lat. ne-
fas, ne-quam, ni-si, etc. ef. Curtius § 437], and éos); as
in Grk. writers fr. Hom. down, a. an infant, litile
child: Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3); 1-Co. xiii. 11; Sept.
esp. for 5>jy and Sip. b. a minor, not of age: Gal.
iv. 1 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. c. metaph. childish,
untaught, unskilled, (Sept. for nd, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8;
exviii. (cxix.) 130; Prov. i. 32): Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21;
Ro. ii. 20; Gal. iv. 3; Eph. iv. 14; opp. to reAevou, Te
more bdraweed in iudbnistem ding ped knowledge, Heb.
v. 13 sq. (Philo de agric. § 2); vim. év Xpiord, in things
pertaining to Christ, 1 Co. iii. 1. In 1 Th. ii. 7 L WH
[ef. the latter’s note ad loc.] have hastily received vameor
for the common reading 7zo.*
Nypets [(cf. Vaniéek p. 1158)], -éws, 6, Nereus, a
Christian who lived at Rome: Ro. xvi. 15 [where Lmrg.
Nnpeay |.*
Nypt and (so T Tr WH) Nope [see et, ¢], 6, (fr. 3 a
lamp), Neri, the grandfather of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.*
vyoiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of vjaos), a small island: Acts
XXvli. 16 [(Strabo) |]. :
Vijros, -ov, 7, (veo to swim, prop: ‘floating land’), an
island: Acts xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9,11; Rev.
i.9; vi. 14; xvi. 20. (Sept. for °8; [fr. Hom. down].)*
wnorela, -as, 7, (vnoTevo, q. V-), a fasting, fast, i. e. ab-
425
ViKawO
stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a religious
exercise: of private fasting, Mt. xvii. 21 [TWH om. Tr
br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29 [T WHom. Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. ii.
37; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast
prescribed by the Mosaic Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq.; xxiii.
27 sqq. [BB.DD. s. v. Fasts, and for reff. to Strab., Philo,
Joseph., Plut., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 1]) and kept yearly
on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month
Tisri: Acts xxvii. 9 (the month Tisri comprises a part
of our September and October [cf. B.D. s. v. month (at
end)]; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, 4
xeuepios Spa, when navigation was usually dangerous
on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage
referred to). b. a fasting to which one is driven by
want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 27; (Hippocr., Aristot., Philos ’
Joseph., Plut., Ael., Athen., al.; Sept. for oj¥).*
vyoretw; fut. vyorevow; 1 aor. [inf. yoredoa (LE. v.
34 T WH Tr txt.)], ptep. vgoretaas ; (fr. vnotes, q- V-)$
to fast (Vulg. and eccles. writ. jejuno), i. e. to abstain as
a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely,
if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-183 ix.
14sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. v. 33, [34, 35]; xviii. 12; Acts
x. 30 RG; xiii. 2,[3]; or from customary and choice
nourishment, if it continued several days, Mt. iv. 2, cf.
xi. 18; vnorever cuvexas Kal aprov éoOiet povoy peta Gda-
Tos Kal TO mrorév avtov Vowp, Acta Thom. § 20. (Arstph.,
Plut. mor. p. 626 sq.; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph. e. Ap.
1, 34, 5 (where see Miiller)]; Sept. for psy.) *
virtis, ace. plur. yyorers and (so Tdf. [cf. Proleg. p.
118]) vyores (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326; Fritzsche, Com.
on Mk. p. 796 sq.; ef. [WH. App. p. 157°]; B. 26 (23)),
6, 9, (fr. mm and écbiw, see vimos), fasting, not having
eaten: Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3. (Hom., Aeschyl., Hip-
pocr., Arstph., al.) *
vydddcos (so Rec. in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11, [where Rec.
aos], after a later form) and ynpddwos [“ alone well
attested” (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three
term.; fr. ma), sober, temperate; abstaining from wine,
either entirely (Joseph. antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least from its
immoderate use: 1 Tim. iii. 2,11; Tit.ii. 2. (In prof.
auth., esp. Aeschyl. and Plut., of things free from all
infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.) *
vw; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. yypare; fr. Theogn.,
Soph., Xen. down; to be sober; in the N. T. everywh.
trop. to be calm and collected in spirit; to be temperate,
dispassionate, circumspect: 1 Th. v. 6,8; 2 Tim. iv. 55
1 Pet. i. 13; v. 8; eds ras mpocevxds, unto (the offermg
of) prayer, 1 Pet. iv. 7. [SyN. see dypurvéw; and onthe
word see Ellic. on Tim. 1.c. Comp.: dva-, éx-vnpe.]*
Ntyep, 6, (a Lat. name [‘ black ’]), Niger, oe
the prophet Symeon: Acts xiii. 1.*
Nuxdvap, [ (i. e. ‘conqueror ’) ], -opos, 6, Nicanor, of An-
tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je-
rusalem: Acts vi. 5.*
vikdw, -; pres. ptcp. dat. wxodvtt, Rev. ii. 7 Lehm. 17
LT Tr, [yet all wx @vras in xv. 2] (cf. épwrda, init.) ;
fut. vkyow; 1 aor. eviknoa; pf. vevixnea; (vien); [fr. Hom.
down]; to conquer [A. V. overcome]; a. absol. ta
vikn
carry off the victory, come off victorious: of Christ, vic-
torious over all his foes, Rev. iii. 21; vi. 2; évixnoev...
dvoiéa xrd. hath so conquered that he now has the right
and power to open ete. Rev. v.5; of Christians, that hold
fast their faith even unto death against the power of their
foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rev. ii. 7,
11, 17, 26; iii. 5, 12, 21; xxi. 7; w. ék rov Onpiov added,
to conquer and thereby free themselves from the power
of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from; cf. W. 367
(344 sq.); B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when one is ar-
raigned or goes to law, to win the case, maintain one’s
cause, (so in the Attic orators; also wxav diknv, Eur. El.
955): Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li) 6). b. with
ace. of the obj.: twa, by force, Lk. xi. 22; Rev. xi. 7;
xiii. 7 [Lom. WH Trmrg. br. the cl.]; of Christ the
conqueror of his foes, Rev. xvii.14; tov koopoy, to deprive
it of power to harm, to subvert its influence, Jn. xvi. 33 ;
vixav teva or Tu is used of one who by Christian constancy
and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from
his adversary’s devices, solicitations, assaults: the devil,
1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; Rev. xii. 11; false teachers, 1 Jn. iv. 4; roy
koopor, ibid. v.4 sq. Kay Td movnpor ev To ayaa, by the
force which resides in goodness, i. e. in kindness, to cause
an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro.
xii. 21; vxaoOat v0 Tov Kaxov, to be disturbed by an in-
jury and driven to avengeit, ibid. [COMP.: tmep-yixdo. | *
vikn, -ns, 9, (fr. Hom. down], victory: 1 Jn. v. 4 (ef.
vikos |. *
NuxdSnpos, (vikn and dzjpos [i. e. ‘conqueror of the
people ’]), -ov, 6, Nicodemus, (rabbin. j772"7p3), a member
of the Sanhedrin who took the part of Jesus: Jn. iii. 1,
Ars Ol-eavilleo Osa SKeus Oat
NuxodAatrns, -ov, 6, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola/itan:
plur., Rev. ii. 6, 15, —a name which, it can scarcely be
doubted, refers symbolically to the same persons who in
vs. 14 are charged with holding ryv d:daynv Badady, i. e.
after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block
before the church of God (Num. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding
the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well
as of committing fornication; for the Grk. name Nixo-
Aaos coincides with the Hebr. oy3 ace. to the interpre-
tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc-
tion of the people. See in Badadu; [cf. BB. DD. s. vv.
Nicolaitans, Nicolas; also Comm. on Rey. Il. ec.].*
NuxddAaos, -ov, 6, (vikn and Aads), Nicolaus [A. V. Nico-
las}, a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons
of the church at Jerusalem: Acts vi. 5.*
NukétroAts, -ews, 7, (city of victory), Nicopolis: Tit. iii.
12. There were many cities of this name —in Armenia,
Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace — which were generally
built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to
commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems
to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory
of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory
he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the
spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had
in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?)
cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.] on the river Nestus (or
426
voew@
Nessus), since he calls it a city ‘of Macedonia.’
s.ty.|\*
vikos, -ous, To, a later form i. q. vikn (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 647; [B. 23 (20); W. 24)), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57,
(2 Mace. x. 38; [1 Esdr. iii. 9]); eis vixos, until he have
gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20; xaremd6n 6 Oavaros eis
vikos, [A. V. death is swallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly
vanquished, 1 Co. xv. 54. (The Sept. sometimes trans-
late the Hebr. nyi9 i.e. to everlasting, forever, by eis
vikos, 28.11. 26; Jobxxxvi. 7; Lam. v.20; Am.i.11; viii.
7, because M¥j denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and
in Syriac victory.) *
Nwvevi, 7, Hebr. 7)3°) (supposed to be compounded of
J) and 71)3, the abode of Ninus; [cf. Fried. Delitzsch as
below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the Grk.
and Rom. writ. 7 Nivos [on the accent cf. Pape, Eigen-
namen, s. v.], Vineveh (Vulg. Ninive [so A. V. in Lk. as
below ]), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar-
ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris
opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed
[about] B.c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable
monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca-
vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the
labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay-
ard; cf. Layard, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849,
2 vols.; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh
and Babylon, Lond. 1853; [also his art. in Smith’s Dict.
of the Bible]; H. J. C. Weissenborn, Ninive u. s. Gebiet
ete. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe, Lips.
1844; Spiegel in Herzog x. pp. 361-381; [esp. Fried.
Delitzsch in Herzog 2 (cf. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587-603 ;
Schrader, Keilinschriften u. s. w. index s. v.; and in Riehm
s. v.; W. Robertson Smith in Encye. Brit. s. v.]; Hitzig
in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq.; [Rawlinson, Five Great Mon-
archies etc.; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond-
1875)]. In the N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 RG."
[Nuvevirns RG (so Tr in Lk. xi. 32), or] Nwevirns [L
(so Tr in Lk. xi. 30)] or Nweveirns T WH (so Tr in Mt.
xii. 41) [see es, and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WH. App. p.
154°], -ov, 6, (Nevevi, q. V-), i. q. Ninos in Hat. and Strabo;
a Ninevite, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41; Lk.
xi. 30, and L T Tr WH in 32.*
vurrtp, -jpos, 6, (virrw), a vessel for washing the hands
and feet, a basin: Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) *
virrw; (a later form for vi¢w; ef. Lob.ad Phryn. p. 241
[Veitch s.v. vito; B. 63 (55); W. 88 (84)]); 1 aor. eva;
Mid., pres. virropat; 1 aor. evpduny; Sept. for ~1; to
wash: twd, Jn. xiii. 8; rods mddas Twos, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 12,
14; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. fo wash one’s self (cf. B. § 135,
5; W. § 38, 2b.]: Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15; ras xeipas, to wash
one’s (own) hands, Mk. vii. 3; rovs médas, Jn. xiii. 10
[T om. WH br. rods 7.]; vixpar 7d mpdcwndy cov, Mt. vi.
[Comp.: dmo-
[B.D.
17; vimrovra tas xetpas av’rar, Mt. xv. 2.
vinrw. SYN. see dove, fin. ]*
voéw, -@; 1 aor. événoa; [pres. pass. ptep. (neut. plur.)
voovpeva]; (vos); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 377 and
jan, and for Sawn; 1. to perceive with the mind,
to understand : absol., with the addition r7 xapdia, Jn. xii
vonua
40 (Is. xliv. 18); w.an ace. of the thing, Eph. iii. 4, 20;
1 Tim. i. 7; pass.: Ro. i. 20; foll. by dr, Mt. xv. 17;
xvi. 11; Mk. vii. 18; foll. by acc. w. inf., Heb. xi. 3;
absol. i. q. to have understanding: Mt. xvi. 9; Mk. viii.
1% 2. to think upon, heed, ponder, consider: voeirw,
se. let him attend to the events that occur, which will show
the time to flee, Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; [similarly
voee & (RG 4) Aéyo, 2 Tim. ii. 7]. [Comp.: ev-, xara-,
peta-, ™po-, Umro-voew. | *
vonpa, -ros, To, fr. Hom. down ; 1. a mental per-
ception, thought. 2. spec. (an evil) purpose: atypa-
AoriCew may vonua eis THY UmaKonY Tov Xpiorod, to cause
whoever is devising evil against Christ to desist from his
purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him
forth), 2Co.x.5; plur.: 2 Co.ii. 11 (rod d:aBorAov, Ignat.
ad Eph. [interpol.] 14; tas xapdias avray movnpas, Bar.
ii. 8). 3. that which thinks, the mind: plur. (where
the minds of many are referred to), 2 Co. iii. 14; iv. 4,
and perh. [xi. 3]; Phil. iv. 7, for here the word may mean
thoughts and purposes; [others would so take it also in
all the exx. cited under this head (cf. xavynya, 2) }.*
vo8os, -7. -ov, illegitimate, bastard, i. e. born, not in law-
ful wedlock, but of a concubine or female slave: Heb.
xii. 8; ef. Bleek ad loc. (Sap. iv. 3; from Hom. down.) *
vopy, -7S, 1), (veww to pasture), fr. Hom. [i. e. batrach. ]
down ; 1. pasturage, fodder, food: in fig. discourse
eupnoer vounv, i. e. he shall not want the needful sup-
plies for the true life, Jn. x. 9; (Sept. for AYI9, Myr,
™)- 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen,
Umsichgreifen): of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2
Tim. ii. 17 (of ulcers, vouny rovetrae €AKos, Polyb. 1, 81, 6;
of a conflagration, 76 wip AauBaver vouny, 11, 4 (5), 4 cf.
1, 48, 5; Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 9).*
vonitw; impf. evourov; 1 aor. évopica; impf. pass. évo-
piCounv ; (vouos); asin Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down ; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus-
tom or usage; to follow custom or usage; pass. vopiterat
it is the custom, it is the received usage: ob évouitero mpoo-
zux7 ivat, where acc. to custom was a place of prayer,
Acts xvi. 13 [but L T Tr WH read o& éevouigopev mpocev-
yyy elv. where we supposed there was, etc.; cf. 2 below],
(2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose: foll.
by an inf., Acts viii. 20; 1 Co. vii. 36; foll. by an ace. w.
inf., Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv.19; xvi. [13 (see 1
above) |], 27; xvii. 29; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Tim. vi. 5; foll.
by ére, Mt. v.17; x.34[W. § 56,1b.]; xx.10; Acts xxi.
295; ws evopitero, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23.
[Sy¥N. see 7yéouat, fin.] *
vouiKds, -7, -ov, (vouos), pertaining to (the) law (Plat.,
Aristot., al.): payat, Tit. iii. 9; 6 voutxds, one learned in
the law, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the
Mosaic law [A. V. a lawyer; cf. ypappareds, 2]: Mt.
xxii. 35; Lk. x. 25; Tit. iii. 13; plur., Lk. vii. 30; xi.
45 sq. 52; xiv. 3.*
vopipws, adv., (vduimos), lawfully, agreeably to the law,
properly: 1 Tim.i. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 5. (Thue., Xen., Plat.,
al.) *
VOpLop.A,, -ros, Td, (vouiCa, q. V-); 1. anything received
427
VOMLOS
and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg., Arstph.). 2.
money, (current) coin, [cf. our lawful money]: Mt. xxii.
19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).*
vopo-Si8dckados, -ov, 6, (vopos and diddcxanos, cf. érepo-
didackados, iepodiddoKados, yopodidacKados ), a teacher and
interpreter of the law: among the Jews [cf. ypaupareds,
2], Lk. v.17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris-
tians also went about as champions and interpreters of
the Mosaic law, 1 Tim.i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exe.
in eccl. writ. ]) *
vopolerta, -as, 7, (vopos, TiOnut), law-giving, legislation :
Ro. ix. 4. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, al.) *
vopoberew, -@: Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. vevopobérnrar;
plupf. 3 pers. sing. vevowodernro (on the om. of the augm.
see W.72 (70); B.33(29)); (vouobérns); fr. [Lys.], Xen.
and Plat. down; Sept. several times for 7717; al.
to enact laws; pass. laws are enacted or prescribed for one,
to be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato;
cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for exx.]); 6 Aads em’ adris
(R G ém airy) vevopobernra (RG vevopobérnto) the people
received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation
of the priesthood, Heb. vii. 11 [W. § 39,1 b.; ef. B. 337
(290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V.
under it); see émi, A. IL, cf. B. 2a. y.]. 2. to sanc-
tion by law, enact: ri, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [cf. W. and B.
Rab
vopo-Qérns, -ov, 6, (vouos and ri6nur), a lawgiver: Jas. iv.
12. ([Antipho, Thuc.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al.;
Sept.t bs. ix.121.)/*
v6p0S, -ov, 6, (veuw to divide, distribute, apportion), in
prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything
recewed by usage, a custom, usage, law; in Sept. very often
for 77)A, also for Mpn, 1, ete. In the N. T. a command,
law; and 1. of any law whatsoever: da toiov
vopov; Ro. ili. 27; vduos Sixacocvvys, a law or rule pro-
ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance
of which we are approved of God, Ro. ix. 31, ef. Meyer
[see ed. Weiss], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loc.; a precept or
injunction: Kata& vouov evrodns capk. Heb. vii. 16; plur. of
the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x.
16; vouos Tov voos, the rule of action prescribed by reason,
Ro. vii. 23; the mention of the divine law causes those
things even which in opposition to this law impel to
action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law,
to be designated by the term voyos, as €repos vopos ev Tots
peXeoi pou, a different law from that which God has given,
i. e. the impulse to sin inherent in human nature, or 6
vowos THS duaprias (gen. of author), Ro. vii. 23, 25; viii. 2,
also 6 v. rod Oavarov, emanating from the power of death,
Ro. viii. 2; with which is contrasted 6 vowos rov mvevparos,
the impulse to (right) action emanating from the Spirit,
ibid. 2. of the Mosaic law, and referring, ace. to
the context, either to the volume of the law or to its
contents: w.thearticle, Mt.v.18; xii.5; xxii.36; Lk.
Hes x. 262 Xvi..173, In. i.17,45 (46),% vi ods vill. 17;
x. 34; xv. 25; Acts vi. 13; vil. 533 xviii. 13, 15; xxi.
20; xxiii. 3; Ro. ii. 13 [(bis) here L T Tr WH om. art.
(also G in 18°)], 15, 18, 20, 23>, 26; iv. 15; vii. 1°, 5, 14,
VOMOS
21 (on the right interpretation of this difficult passage
ef. Knapp, Scripta varii Argumenti, ii. p. 385 sqq. and
Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. ii. p. 57; [others take du. here
generally, i. q. controlling principle; see 1 above sub
fin. and cf. W. 557 (578); B. § 151, 15]); Ro. viii. 3 sq.;
1 Co. ix. 8; xv. 56; Gal. iii. 13, 24; Eph. ii. 15 (on
which pass. see Sédyua, 2); 1 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 19,
23; x. 1, ete.; with the addition of Motcéws, Lk. ii. 22;
Jn. vii. 23; viii.5; Acts xiii. 38 (39) [here L T Tr WH
om. art.]; xv.5; xxviii. 23; 1Co.ix.9; of xupiov, Lk. ii.
39; of rod Geod, [Mt.xv.6T WH mrg.]; Ro. vii. 22; viii.
7. Kata Tov vopor, acc. to the (standard or requirement
of the) law, Acts xxii. 12; Heb. vii. 5; ix. 22. vopos
without the art. Gin the Epp. of Paul and James and
the Ep. to the Heb.; cf. W. p. 123 (117); B. 89 (78);
[some interpreters contend that voues without the art.
denotes not the law of Moses but law viewed as ‘a prin-
ciple’, ‘abstract and universal’; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.
ii. 19; also “ Fresh Revision,” ete. p. 99; Vaughan on
Ro. ii. 23; esp. Van Hengel on Ro. ii. 12; Gifford in
the Speaker’s Com. on Rom. p. 41 sqq. (cf. Cremer s. v.).
This distinction is contrary to usage (as exhibited e. g.
i sap. XVil. 4; ire-KIk. 1s ext be xex Se exe ts
XXXV. (xxxli.) 15, 245° xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2; 3; 1 Mace. ii.
21; 4 Mace. vii. 7, and many other exx. in the Apocr.;
see Wahl, Clavis Apocrr. s. v. p. 343), and to the con-
text in such Pauline pass. as the foll.: Ro. ii. 17, 25, 27;
ViieL (7) 5 xi- 8; 103 "Gali. 17,18; 23,'24) (ef Ro. in.
12 and iii. 19; v. 13 and 14); ete. It should be added,
perhaps, that neither the list of pass. with the art. nor
of those without it, as given by Prof. Grimm, claims to be
complete]): Ro. ii. 23°, 25; iii. 31; iv. 15°, v. 133 vii. 1,
2Pevas as x: 10s Gali 21": vy. 23%) 1) Tim. 1.9. Heb:
vil. 12, etc.; with the addition of xupiov, Lk. ii. 23 [here
L has the art. ], 24 [LT Tr WH add the art.]; of 6e0d, Ro.
vii. 25; of Mwicéws, Heb. x. 28; esp. after prepositions,
as 61a vopou, Ko. ii. 12; iii. 20; Gal. ii. 21; ywpis vdpov,
without the co-operation of the law, Ro. iii. 21; destitute
or ignorant of the law, Ro. vii. 9; where no law has been
promulged, Ro. vii. 8; of ék vduov, those who rule their
life by the law, Jews, Ro. iv. 14, 16 [here all edd. have
the art.]; of év vou, who are in the power of the law, i. e.
bound to it, Ro. iii. 19 [but all texts here ev 76 v.]; ind
vopov, under dominion of the law, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; Gal. iii.
23; iv. 4, 21; v.18; of dd vopov, 1 Co. ix. 20; dixarov-
ga ev vou, Gal. v.4; epya vdpov (see épyor, sub fin.) ;
ev vou duaptavew, under law i. e. with knowledge of the
law, Ro. ii. 12 (equiv. to €yovres vépov, cf. vs. 14); they
to whom the Mosaic law has not been made known are
said vopov pr exewy, ibid. 14; éavrois efor vdpos, their natu-
ral knowledge of right takes the place of the Mosaic law,
ibid. ; vdépos épywv, the law demanding works, Ro. iii. 27;
dia vépou vou dzébavoy, by the law itself (when I became
convinced that by keeping it I could not attain to salva-
tion, cf. Ro. vii. 9-24) I became utterly estranged from
the law, Gal. ii. 19 [ef. W. 210 (197); B.§ 133,12]. xara
vouov, as respects the interpretation and observance of
the law. Phil. iii. 5. The observance of the law is
428
vd0s5
designated by the foll. phrases: mAnpodv vdépor, Ro. xiii.
8; rovv. Gal. v.14; mdnpodv 76 dtxaiwpa tod vdpov, Ro.
vill. 4; puAdooew (rov) v., Acts xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13; ra
Sixat@p. Tov v. Ro. ii. 26; mpdooev vopov, Ro. ii. 25; moveiv
rov v., Jn. vii. 19; Gal. v.33; rypeiv, Acts xv. 5, 24 [Rec.];
Jas. ii. 10; redeiv, Ro. ii. 27 (cf. Jas. ii. 8); [on the other
hand, dxvpody rov von. Mt.xv.6 T WH mrg.]. 6 vdpos is
used of some particular ordinance of the Mosaic law in
Jn. xix. 7; Jas. ii. 8; with a gen. of the obj. added, roo
av6pés, the law enacted respecting the husband, i. e. bind-
ing the wife to her husband, Ro. vii. 2 where Rec.” om.
TOU vou. (SO 6 vépos Tod maoxa, Num. ix. 12; rod Aempod,
Lev. xiv. 2; other exx. are given in Fritzsche, Ep.ad Rom.
ii. p. 9; cf. W. § 30,2 8.). Although the Jews did not
make a distinction as we do between the moral, the
ceremonial, the civil, precepts of the law, but thought
that all should be honored and kept with the same con-
scientious and pious regard, yet in the N. T. not infre-
quently the law is so referred to as to show that the
speaker or writer has his eye on the ethical part of it
alone, as of primary importance and among Christians
also of perpetual validity, but does not care for the cere-
monial and civil portions, as being written for Jews
alone: thus in Gal. v. 14; Ro. xiii. 8,10; ii. 26 sq.3 vii.
21, 25; Mt. v. 18, and often; ra rod vduov, the precepts,
moral requirements, of the law, Ro. ii.14. In the Ep. of
James vdpuos (without the article) designates only the
ethical portion of the Mosaic law, confirmed by the au-
thority of the Christian religion: ii. 9-11; iv. 11; in the
Ep. to the Heb., on the other hand, the ceremonial
part of the law is the prominent idea. 3. of the
Christian religion: vépos mictews, the law demanding
faith, Ro. iii. 27; rod Xpuarov, the moral instruction given
by Christ, esp. the precept concerning love, Gal. vi.2; ris
eXevbepias (see éAevbepia, a.), Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; ef. 6 kaos
vopos Tod Kupiov nav Incod Xpicrov, avev Cvyod avdykns
ov, Barn. ep. 2, 6 [see Harnack’s note in loc.]. 4.
by metonymy 6 voyos, the name of the more important
part (i. e. the Pentateuch), is put for the entire collection of
the sacred books of the O. T.: Jn. vii. 49; x. 34 (Ps. Ixxxi.
(Ixxxii.) 6); Jn. xii. 34 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 4; Dan. (Theodot.)
ii. 44; vii.14); Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 15); Ro. iii.19; 1 Co. xiv. 21 (Is. xxviii. 11 sq.; so
2 Mace. ii. 18, where cf. Grimm); 6 voyos Kai of mpopjrat,
Mt. xi. 13; Jn.i.46; Acts xiii.15; xxiv.14; xxviii. 23;
Ro. iii. 21, (2 Mace. xv. 9); i. q. the system of morals
taught in the O. T., Mt. v.17; vii. 12; xxii. 403; 6 vop. (of)
mpop. kai Wadpol, the religious dispensation contained
in the O. T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (6 vopos, of mpod. x. ra GAda
marpta BBrza, prol. to Sir.). Paul’s doctrine concerning
6 vépos is exhibited by (besides others) Weiss, Bibl. Theol.
§§ 71, 72; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 69 sq. [Eng. trans. i
p- 68 sq.; A. Zahn, Das Gesetz Gottes nach d. Lehre u.
Erfahrung d. Apostel Paulus, Halle 1876; R. Tiling, Die
Paulinische Lehre vom véyos nach d. vier Hauptbriefen,
u.s.w. Dorpat, 1878]. vopos does not occur in the foll. N.
T. bks.: Mk.,2 Co., Col.,Thess., 2 Tim., Pet.,Jude,Jn., Rev
vd05, See vous.
VOGEW
voréw, -; (vdcos); fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; to be
sick; metaph. of any ailment of the mind (dynkéeor@
monpia vooeiv "AOnvaiovs, Xen. mem. 3, 5, 18 and many
other exx. in Grk. auth.): mepi ru, to be taken with such
an interest in a thing as amounts to a disease, to have
a morbid fondness for, 1 Tim. vi. 4 (epi day, Plat. mor.
p- 546 d.).*
voonpa, -ros, 70, disease, sickness: Jn. v.4 Rec. Lchm.
(Tragg., Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., sqq.) *
vécos, -ov, 9, disease, sickness: Mt. iv. 23 sq.; viii. 17;
ix. 35; x.1; Mk. i. 34; iii.15 [RGL]; Lk. iv. 40; vi.
18 (17); vii. 21; ix.1; Acts xix.12. (Deut. vii. 15;
xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, etc. [Hom., Hadt., al.])*
vooo1d, -as, 7, (for veooord, the earlier and more com-
mon form [cf. WH. App. p. 145], fr. veorads, q. v-), Sept.
for 1); 1. a nest of birds. 2. a brood of birds:
LK. xiii. 34 [but L txt. voocia, see the foll. word]. (Deut.
xxxii. 11 [Gen. vi. 14; Num. xxiv. 22; Prov. xvi. 16,
etc.].) *
vorclov, -ov, Td, (see voooid), a brood of birds: Mt.
xxiii. 37 and Lchm. txt. in Lk. xiii. 34 [where al. voooud,
see the preced. word]. (Arstph., Aristot., Ael.; for D M558
Ps. Ixxxiii. (Ixxxiv.) 4.) * 2h
vooads, See veooaos.
vorditw: Mid., pres. ptcp. vorditouevos; 1 aor. évo-
odicdpnv; (voods afar, apart); to set apart, separate,
divide; mid. to set apart or separate for one’s self, i. e. to
purloin, embezzle, withdraw covertly and appropriate to
one’s own use: xpnuara, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2 42; Plut. Lucull.
37; Aristid. 4; pndev trav ex rhs Staprayns, Polyb. 10,
16, 6; xpvompara, 2 Mace. iv. 32; adddrpia, Joseph.
antt. 4, 8, 29; absol. Tit. ii. 10; (ri) dao twos, Acts v.
2, 3 [here A. V. keep back]; Sept. Josh. vii. 1; && rwvos,
Athen. 6 p. 234 a.*
voros, -ov, 6, the south wind;
55; Acts xxvii. 13; xxviii. 13. b. the South (cf.
Boppas): Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 315 xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13.
(From Hom. down; ‘Sept. er, for 233, the southern
quarter, the South: and for pj15, the southern (both)
wind and quarter; }2°h, the same; 0° Tp the eastern
(both) quarter and wind.) *
vovder (a, -as, 7, (vovderéw, q. V-); admonition, exhorta-
tion: Sap. xvi. 6; 1 Co. x. 113 Tit. iii. 10; «upiov, such
as belongs to the Lord (Christ) or proceeds from him,
Eph. vi. 4 [cf. W. 189 (178)]. (Arstph. ran. 1009;
Diod. 15, 7; besides in Philo, Joseph. and other recent
writ. for voudernots and vovOeria, forms more com. in the
earlier writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 512; [W. 24].) [Cf.
Trench § xxxii.]*
vovleréw, -@; (vovderns, and this fr. vods and ridnue;
hence prop. i. q. €v 76 vd TiOnyu, lit. ‘put in mind’, Germ.
‘an das Herz legen’); to admonish, warn, exhort :
Acts xx. 31; Ro. xv. 14; 1 Co. iv. 14; Col. i. 28; iii. 16;
Pe Weta toe 2 Th. i 15. .((i Salk 13], Joni 3)
Sap. xi.11; xii.2; Trage., Arstph., Xen., Plat., aJ.)*
raennvta., and acc. to a rarer uncontr. form (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 148 [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; WH.
App. p. 145]) veounvia (so L txt. Tr WH), -as, 9, (veos,
a. prop.: Lk. xii.
TUWd,
429
vuppios
pynv a month), new-moon (Vulg. neomenia; barbarous
Lat. novilunium): of the Jewish festival of the new
moon [BB.DD. s. v. New Moon], Col. ii. 16. (Sept.
chiefly for wn; also for wn Ws, Ex. xl. 2; and wx
win, Num. x. 10; xxviii. 11; see pny, 2. Pind., Arstph.,
Thuce., Xen., al.) *
vouvex as, (wots and éyw [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599]),
adv. wisely, prudently, discreetly: Mk. xii. 34. ({ Aristot.
rhet. Alex. 30 p. 1436", 33 vouveyas x. Sixaiws|; Polyb.
1, 83, 3 vouvey@s x. Ppovipes; [2,13,1]; 5, 88, 2 vovvexae
kK. mpaypatixas ; [al.].) *
vods (contr. fr. vdos), 6, gen. voos, dat. voi, (so in later
Grk. for the earlier forms vod, v@, contr. fr. véov, vd@; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 453; W. § 8, 2 b.; [B. 12 sq. (12)]),
ace. voov (contr. fr. ydov), Sept. for 32 and 339, [fr.
Hom. down]; mind (Germ. Sinn), i.e. 1. the mind,
comprising alike the faculties of perceiving and under-
standing and those of feeling, judging, determining;
hence spec. a. the intellective faculty, the under-
standing: Lk. xxiv. 45 (on which see d:avoiyo, 2); Phil.
iv. 7; Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; opp. to rd mvedpa, the spirit
intensely roused and completely absorbed with divine
things, but destitute of clear ideas of them, 1 Co. xiv.
14 sq. 19; yew Tov vodv kupiov [L txt., al. Xpurrov]}, to be
furnished with the understanding of Christ, 1 Co. ii.
16°. b. reason (Germ. die Vernunft) in the nar-
rower sense, as the capacity for spiritual truth, the
higher powers of the soul, the faculty of perceiving divine
things, of recognizing goodness and of hating evil: Ro. i.
28; vii. 23; Eph. iv.17; 1 Tim. vi.5; 2 Tim. iii. 8 (cf.
W. 229 (215); B. § 134, 7]; Tit. i. 15; opp. to 7 odpé,
Ro. vii. 25; dvaveotaba TO mvevpate Tov vods, to be so
changed that the spirit which governs the mind is re-
newed, Eph. iv. 23; [ef. ) dvaxaivwats tod vods, Ro. xii.
2]. c. the power of considering and judging soberly,
calmly and impartially: 2 'Th. ii. 2. 2. a particular
mode of thinking and judging: Ro. xiv. 5; 1 Co.i. 10;
i. q. thoughts, feelings, purposes: rod xupiov (fr. Is. xl.
13), Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16°; i. q. desires, rs oapkds,
Col. ii. 18 [cf Meyer ad loc. ].*
Nupdds, -d, 6, [perh. contr. fr. Nuupddapos; cf. W.
102 sq. (97); on accent cf. Chandler § 32], Nymphas, a
Christian inhabitant of Laodicea: Col. iv.15 [L WH Tr
mrg. read Néyday i. e. Nympha, the name of a woman;
see esp. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc., and p. 256].*
vipdn, -1s, 9, (appar. allied w. Lat. nubo; Vaniéek p.
429 sq.), Sept. for 143; 1. a betrothed woman, a
bride: Jn. iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23; xxi. 2,9; xxii.17. = 2.
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a recently married
woman, young wife; a young woman; hence in bibl. and
eccl. Grk., like the Hebr. moa (which signifies both a
bride and a daughter-in-law [ef. W. 32]), a daughter-in-
law: Mt.x.35; Lk. xii. 53. (Mic. vii.6; Gen. xi. 31;
[xxxviii. 11]; Ruth i. 6, [ete.]; also Joseph. antt. 5,
9, 1.)*
vuudtlos, -ov, 6, (vip); a bridegroom: Mt. ix. 15; XXv.
1,5 sq. 10; Mk. ii. 19sq.; Lk. v. 34 sq.; Jn. il. 9; iii. 29;
Rev. xviii. 23. (From Hom. down; Sept for inn) ®
vuppov
vupddv, -dvos, 6, (vipn), the chamber containing the
bridal bed, the bride-chamber: oi viol rod vupdavos (see
vids, 2), of the friends of the bridegroom whose duty it
was to provide and care for whatever pertained to the
bridal chamber, i. e. whatever was needed for the due
celebration of the nuptials: Mt.ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk.
v. 34, ((W. 33 (32)]; Tob. vi. 13 (14), 16 (17); eccles.
writ.; Heliod. 7,8); the room in which the marriage cere-
monies are held: Mt. xxii. 10 T WH Tr mrg.*
viv, and vuvi (which see in its place), adv. now, Lat.
nunc, (Sept. for Wy ; [fr. Hom. down)) ; 1. adv. of
Time, now, i.e. at the present time ; a. so used that
by the thing which is now said to be or to be done the
present time is opposed to past time: Jn.iv.18; ix. 21;
Acts xvi, Sipe 5 Ro: xiii...) 5.2 Th;.it.6s 2 Co;
Vile Opexate2=) Phil iS Ojsseie 125 ni 8 = \Coliin24, eters
freq. it denotes a somewhat extended portion of present
time as opp. to a former state of things: Lk. xvi. 25;
Acts vii.4; Gal. i. 23; iii. 3; spec. the time since certain
persons received the Christian religion, Ro. v. 9, 113 vi.
POND varios Gale 115-20)s1veoe fl Peto 10,425.57 or
the time since man has had the blessing of the gospel,
as opp. to past times, i.q. in our times, our age: Acts vii.
52) Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Co: vi. 2;, Eph. iii. 5,10; 2 Tim. i.
10; 1 Pet.i.12; iii. 21, [cf. ep. ad Diogn. 1]. b. opp.
to future time: Jn. xii. 27; xiii. 36 (opp. to verepor) ;
xvi. 22; Ro. xi. 31; 1 Co. xvi. 12; viv x. eis mdvras rods
aidévas, Jude 25; used to distinguish this present age,
preceding Christ’s return, from the age which follows
that return: Lk. vi. 21,25; Eph.ii.2; Heb.ii.8; 2 Pet.
iii. 18; 1Jn. ii. 28; with év rd Kaip@ trovrm added, Mk.
x. 30. c. Sometimes viv with the present is used of
what will oceur forthwith or soon, Lk. ii. 29; Jn. xii. 31;
xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Acts xxvi. 17. with a preterite, of
what has just been done, Mt. xxvi. 65; Jn. xxi. 10; or
very lately (but now, just now, hyperbolically i. q. a short
time ago), vov e(nrovy oe LOacat oi “Iovdaio1, Jn. xi. 8; cf.
Kypke ad loc.; Vig. ed. Herm. p. 425 sq. with a future,
of those future things which are thought of as already
begun to be done, Jn. xii. 31; or of those which will be
done instantly, Acts xiii. 11 [here al. supply éori; W.§ 64,
2a.]; or soon, Acts xx. 22 [here wop. merely has inherent
fut. force; cf. B. § 137, 10a. ]. d. with the imperative
it often marks the proper or fit time for doing a thing:
Mt. xxvii. 42 sq.; Mk. xv. 32; Jn. ii. 8. Hence it serves
to point an exhortation in dye viv, come now: Jas. iv. 13;
v. 1, (where it is more correctly written dye vuv, cf. Pas-
sow li. p. 372). e. with other particles, by which the
contrast in time is marked more precisely: xai viv, even
now (now also), Jn. xi. 22; Phil. i. 20; and now, Jn. xvii.
5; Acts vii. 34 [cf. 2 below]; x. 5 [W. § 43,3 a.]; xx.
25; xxil. 16; adda vov, Lk. xxii. 836; adda Kai vov, but
even now, Jn. xi. 22 [T Trtxt. WH om. L Trmrg. br.
GAAd}; ére viv, 1 Co. iii. 2 (3) [L WH br. ér]; viv 8€
(see vuvi below) but now, Jn. xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Heb. ii. 8;
tore... vov d¢, Gal. iv. 9; Ro. vi. 21 sq. [here vuvi 8€];
Heb. xii. 26; more... viv dé, Ro. xi. 30[ WH mre. wuvi];
Eph. v.8; 1 Pet. ii. 10; viv #3, now already, 1 Jn. iv. 3.
430
yuvt
viv ovv, now therefore, Acts x. 33; xv.10; xvi. 36; xxiii.
15, (Gen. xxvii. 8,43; xxxi. 13,30; xlv. 8; 1 Mace. x. 71).
TO vov €xov, see €xa, II. b. f. with the article; a.
w. neut. acc. absol. of the article, ra viv, as respects the
present; at present, now (in which sense it is written also
tavuv [so Grsb. always, Rec. twice; classic edd. often
raviv; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.111; Chandler, Accent, § 826]):
Acts iv. 29; xvii. 30; xx.32; xxvii. 22,(2 Macc. xv. 8;
often in class. Grk.; also rd viv, 1 Mace. vii. 35; ix. 9;
ef. Kriiger § 50, 5, 13; Bnhdy. p. 328; Bttm. Gram.
§ 125, 8 Anm. 8 (5)); the things that now are, the present
things, Judith ix. 5; ace. absol. as respects the things now
taking place, equiv. to as respects the case in hand, Acts v.
38. B. 6,7, TO vov, the present, joined to substantives :
as 6 vuv aiov, 1 Tim. vi. 17; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. ii. 12;
xaipos, Ro. iii. 26; viii. 18; xi.5; [2 Co. viii. 14 (13)]; 9
viv lepovoaAnp, Gal.iv. 25; of vdv odpavoi, 2 Pet. ili. 7; pod
THs mpos Upas vov (Or vuvi) amodoyias, Acts xxii. 1. y:
76 viv with prepositions: amd rov viv (Sept. for AAP),
from this time onward, [A. V. from henceforth], Lk. i. 48:
v.10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts xviii.6; 2Co.v.16; dype
rov viv, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i.5; &ws rov viv (Sept. for
mAy ty), Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our
now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or
sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ;
under these circumstances ; in the present state of affairs ;
since these things are so; asitis: Lk. xi. 39 (vivi.e. since
ye are intent on observing the requirements of tradition ;
[but al. take viv here of time —a covert allusion to a
former and better state of things]); Col. i. 24 [al. of
time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. ad loc.]; «ai viv, 1 Jn.
ii. 28; 2 Jn. 5; xai viv dedpo, Acts vii. 34. viv dé (and
vuvi dé see vuvi), but now; now however ; but asit is; (often
in class. Grk.; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426; Matthiae ii. p.
1434 sq.; Kiihner § 498, 2 [or Jelf § 719, 2]): 1 Co.
vii. 14; Jas.iv. 16,and RG in Heb. ix. 26; esp. after a
conditional statement with ei and the indic. preterite,
Lk. xix. 42; Jn. viii. 40; ix. 41; xv. 22, 24; xviii. 36;
1 Co. xii. 20; [cf. B. § 151, 26]. In Rev. voy does not
occur. [Syn. see apre. | ay
vuvi (vov with iota demonstr. [Kriiger § 25, 6, 4 sq.;
Kiihner § 180, e. (Jelf § 160, e.); Bitm. Gram. § 80, 2]),
in Attic now, at this very moment (precisely now, neither
before nor after; Lat. nunc ipsum), and only of Time,
almost always with the pres., very rarely with the fut.
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 19). Not found in the N. T.
exc. in the writ. of Paul and in a few places in Acts and
the Ep. to the Heb.; and it differs here in no respect
from the simple viv; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 182; [W.
23]; 1. of Time: witha pres. (Job xxx. 9), Acts
xxiv.13 LT Tr WH; Ro. xv. 23, 25; 1 Co. xiii. 13 (don
.. rore O€... vurt 8€); 2 Co. viii. 11, 22; Philem. 9, 11
(se. évra); with a perf. indicating continuance, Ro. iii.
21 [al. refer this to 2]; with a preterite (Ps. xvi. (xvii.)
11), Ro. vi. 22 (opp. to rére); vii. 6. Eph. ii. 13 (opp.
to év T@ KaLp@ Ekeiva) ; Col. i. 22 (21) [andiii. 8; also Ro.
xi. 30 WH mrg.], (opp. to tore); Col. i. 26(RGLmrg.;
cf. W. § 63 1.2 b.: B,. 382 (328)] (opp. to dé ray aidver) ;
vue 431
~
with a fut., Job vii. 21; Bar. vi. 4 (Ep. Jer. 3); 2 Mace.
x. 10; ris mpos bas vuvi drodoyias, Acts xxii. 1. 2
contrary to Grk. usage, in stating a conclusion (see
vov, 2), but since the case stands thus, [as it is}: 1 Co. [v.11
RGTLmrg.]; xiv. 6 RG (i. e. since 6 yAdoon Aadaov
without an interpretation cannot edify the church) ; bud
now (Germ. so aber), Heb. ix. 26 LT Tr WH; after a
conditional statement with e¢ (see viv, fin.), Ro. vii. 17;
1 Co. xii. 18 [RGT WHmrg.]; xv. 20; Heb. viii. 6
[here L Tr mrg. WH txt. viv], cf. 4; xi. 16 Rec., cf. 15;
[B. § 151, 26].*
vvé, gen. vukros, 7, [fr. a root meaning ‘to disappear’;
cf. Lat. nox, Germ. nacht, Eng. night; Curtius § 94], (Sept.
for 9°59 and 779), [fr. Hom. down], night: Mk. vi. 48;
Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 23; Jn. xiii. 80; Rev. xxi. 25; xxii.
5; iva H vvE py paivy 7d Tpirov adrijs, i. e. that the night
should want a third part of the light which the moon and
the stars give it, Rev. viii. 12 [al. understand this of the
want of the light ete. for a third part of the night’s du-
ration]; gen. vukros, by night [W. § 30,11; B. § 132,
26], Mt. ii. 14; xxviii. 13; Lk. ii. 8 [but note here the
article; some make rs vuxros depend on dvaAakas];
Jn. iii. 2; Actsix. 25; 1Th.v. 7; vuxrds cai nuépas, Mk.
v.53; 1Th.ii.9; iii.10; 1 Tim. v. 5, [where see Ellicott
on the order]; mpepas x. vuxros, Lk. xviii. 7; Acts ix.
24; Rev.iv.8; vii. 15; xii. 10, ete.; peéans vuxros, at mid-
night, Mt. xxv. 6; in answer to the question when:
tavtn TH vuKri, this night, Lk. xii. 20; xvii.34; Acts xxvii.
23; 7h vuxri éxeivn, Acts xii. 6; 77 emiovon v. Acts xxiii.
11; in answer to the question how long: vv«ra kat
jepav, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xx. 381; xxvi. 7; differently in
Mk. iv. 27 (night and day, sc. applying himself to what
he is here said tobe doing) ; tas vixras, during the nights,
every night, Lk. xxi. 37; vieras teooapak. Mt. iv. 2;
tpets, ib. xii. 40; dia THs vuKrds, see bia, A. IT. 1 b.; 80 Gdns
(rs) vuxros, the whole night through, all night, Lk. v. 5;
ev vuxti, when he was asleep, Acts xviii. 9; (kAemrns) ev
vuxti, 1 Th. v. 2, and Ree. in 2 Pet. iii. 10; év rH vuri,
in (the course of) the night, Jn. xi. 10; év rH vuxti ravry,
Mt. xxvi. 31, 34; Mk. xiv. 30; év 77 vuxti 7 KrA. 1 Co. xi.
23; Kata peor THs vuKtos, about midnight, Acts xxvii. 27.
Metaph. the time when work ceases, i.e. the time of death,
Jn. ix. 4; the time for deeds of sin and shame, the time
of moral stupidity and darkness, Ro. xiii. 12; the time
4
fé, on its occasional substitution for o see 5, a, s.]
tevia, -as, #, (Eévtos, -a, -ov, and this fr. févos), fr. Hom.
down, hospitality, hospitable reception; i.q. alodging-place,
lodgings: Acts xxviii. 23 (i. q-7d pic@wua in vs. 30 [but
this is doubtful; the more prob. opinion receives the
preference s. v. iSios, 1 a-]); Philem. 22. [See esp. Bp.
vghtft. on Phil. p. 9, and on Philem. 1. c.]*
Eevifa
when the weary and also the drunken give themselves up
to slumber, put for torpor and sluggishness, 1 Th. v. 5.
vioow (-rrw): 1 aor. évvEa; to strike [2], pierce; to
pierce through, transfix; often in Hom. of severe or even
deadly wounds given one; as, rév pev €yxei WE .. . oTU-
yepos 8 dpa pw oxoros cide, Il. 5, 45.47; pOdoas adrov
ekeivos vuTret kaTwOer Ud Tov BovBava Sopart kai Tapaxphpa
duepyaerat, Joseph. b. j. 3, 7, 35; so rh mAeupav hoyxn,
Jn. xix. 34, cf. xx. 25, 27. On the further use of the word
ef. Fritzsche, Rom. ii. p. 559. [Comp.: xata-vicow. | *
vuoratw; 1 aor. evvoraga; (NYQ, cf. vedo, vevorata) ;
Sept. for 032; 1. prop. to nod in sleep, to sleep,
(Hippocr., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.); to be overcome or
oppressed with sleep; to fall asleep, drop off to sleep, [ (cf.
Wiclif) to nap it]: Mt.xxv.5; Sept. for 0793, Ps. Ixxv.
(Ixxvi.) 7. 2. like the Lat. dormito [ef. our to be
napping |, trop. i. q. to be negligent, careless, (Plat., Plut.,
al.): of a thing i. q. to linger, delay, 2 Pet. ii. 3.*
vuxOnpepov, -ov, To, (vvé and muepa), a night and a day,
the space of twenty-four hours: 2 Co. xi. 25. (Alex.
Aphr.; Geopon.) Cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. ete. p. 186;
[Soph. Lex. s. v.; cf. W. 25].*
Née (Noeos, -ov, in Joseph. [antt. 1, 3, 1 sqq.]), 6, (M3
rest), Noah, the second father of the human race: Mt.
xxiv. 37 sq.; Lk. iii. 36; xvii. 26 sq.; Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet.
Mis 20);} (2) Bets ii. 5.*
valpds, -d, -ov, (i. q. vwOns, fr. vn [cf. vnmos] and abéo
[to push; al. @oua to care about (cf. Vanicek p. 879) ],
cf. voduvos, vdvupos, fr. mm and ddvvn, dvoua), slow, slug-
gish, indolent, dull, languid: Heb. vi. 12; with a dat. of
reference [W. § 31,6 a.; B. § 133, 21], rats dxoais, of one
who apprehends with difficulty, Heb. v.11; ve@pos kai
mapeipevos ev tois epyots, Sir. iv. 29; vwOpds x. mapetpevos
épyarns, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 1. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.,
Dion. Hal., Anthol., al.) [Syn. see dpyos, fin.]*
varos, -ov, 6, [fr. root ‘to bend,’ ‘curve,’ akin to Lat.
natis; Ficki. 128; Vaniéek p. 420], the back: Ro. xi. 10
fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. (In Hom. 6 varos [“ the gend.
of the sing. is undetermined in Hom. and Hes.” (L. and
S.)], plur. ra vara; in Attic generally 70 v@rov, very
rarely 6 yatos; plur. always ra vara; Sept. 6 varos, plur.
of vata; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 290; [Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 351]; Passow [L. and 8.] s. v.)*
hil
tevitw; 1 aor. é€éuca; Pass., pres. evigouar; 1 aor.
efevicOnv; fr. Hom. down; 1. to receive as a guest,
to entertain hospiiably: twa, Acts x. 23; xxviii. 7; Heb.
xiii. 2; pass. to be received hospitably; to stay as a guest,
to lodge (be lodged): evade, Acts x. 18; e&v oikia twos,
Acts x. 32; mapa tun, Acts x. 6; xxi. 16 [cf. B. 284 (244);
W. 214 (201) ], and sundry codd. in 1 Co. xvi. 19; (Diod.
Eevodoyéw
14, 390). 2. to surprise or astonish by the strangeness
and novelty of a thing (cf. Germ. befremden): Eevitovra
twa, Acts xvii. 20 (£evifovea mpdoowis kat karamAnKTiKn,
Polyb. 3, 114,43; rov Oedv eEeri¢e TO mpatropevoy, Joseph.
antt. 1, 1,4; &evigovea: cuvpdopai, 2 Mace. ix. 6); pass.
to be surprised, astonished at the novelty or strangeness of
a thing; to think strange, be shocked: w. dat. of the thing
[W. § 31,.1,£.], 1 Pet. iv12 (Polyb. 1, 23, 5 5) 3, 68,9)
ev w. dat. of the thing [cf. B. § 133, 23], 1 Pet. iv. 4.*
tevoSoxéw (for the earlier form £evodoxém in use fr. Hdt.
down; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307),-6: 1 aor. e&evodoxnea;
(Eevodoxos, i. e. E€vous Sexouevos) ; to receive and entertain
hospitably, to be hospitable: 1 Tim.v.10. (Dio Cass. 78,
3; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xxvi. 17; eccl. writ.].) *
tévos, -n, -ov, fr. Hom. down, mase. a guest-friend (Lat.
hospes, [of parties bound by ties of hospitality]),i.e. 1.
a foreigner, stranger, (opp. to émy@ptos, Plat. Phaedoc. 2
p- 59 b.; Joseph. b. j. 5, 1, 3); a. prop.: Mt. xxv.
35, 38,43 sq.; xxvli.7; 3Jn.53; E€vouk. maperidnpot éni
ths yns, Heb. xi. 13; of émidnpodvres E€vor, Acts xvii. 21 ;
opp. to oupmoditns, Eph. ii. 19; (Sept. for M8 a travel-
ler, 2 S. xii. 4 cod. Alex.; for 13, Job xxxi. 32; sev-
eral times for *33). [as adj. with] daoma, Acts xvii.
18. b. trop. a. alien (from a person or thing) ;
without knowledge of, without a share in: with a gen. of
the thing, ray Stabnxav ris emayyeXias, Eph. ii. 12[cf. W.
§ 30, 4, 6] (rod Adyou, Soph. O. T. 219). B. new, un-
heard of: &8axai, Heb. xiii. 9; Edvov m1, a strange, won-
derful thing, 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Aeschyl. Prom. 688; Diod.
3, 15 and 52; al.). 2. one who receives and enter-
tains another hospitably; with whom he stays or lodges, a
host: 6 &€évos pov, Ro. xvi. 28, where kat ths éxkAnoias
dAns is added, i. e. either ‘who receives hospitably all
the members of the church who cross his threshold,’ or
‘who kindly permits the church to worship in his house’
(Fritzsche).*
tons, -ov, 6, (a corruption of the Lat. sextarius) ; a
a sexiarius, i. e. a vessel for measuring liquids, holding
about a pint (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,9— see Baros; Epict.
diss. 1, 9, 33; 2, 16, 22; [Dioscor.], Galen and med.
writ.). 2. a wooden pitcher or ewer (Vulg. urceus
[A. V. pot]) from which water or wine is poured, whether
holding a sextarius or not: Mk. vii. 4, 8 [here TWH
om. Tr br. the cl.].*
Enpatvw: 1 aor. e€npava (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. Enpat-
vopat; pf. 3 pers. sing. €Enpavrac (MK. xi. 21), ptep. é&n-
paupevos; 1 aor. eEnpavOnv ; cf. B. 41 (36); (fr. Enpos, q.
v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for wa. and win; to
make dry, dry up, wither: act., rov xoprov, Jas. i. 11; pass.
to become dry, to be dry, be withered [cf. B. 52 (45)] (Sept.
for w2:): of plants, Mt. xiii. 6; xxi. 19 sq.; Mk. iv. 6;
xi. 20 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jn. xv. 6; [1 Pet. i. 24]; of the
ripening of crops, Rev. xiv. 15; of fluids: 4 mnyn, Mk.
v. 29; rd Udwp, Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. viii. 7; Is. xix. 5); of
432
Evpaw
members of the body, to waste away, pine away: Mk. ix.
18; e&npappevy xeip, a withered hand, Mk. iii. 1, and RG
in 3.*
Enpés, -d, -ov, fr. Hdt. down, dry: 16 évdov, Lk. xxiii.
31 (in a proverb. saying, ‘if a good man is treated so,
what will be done to the wicked ?’ cf. Ps.i. 3; Ezek. xx.
47. Is. lvi. 3; Ezek. xvii. 24) ; of members of the body
deprived of their natural juices, shrunk, wasted, withered :
as xe(p, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 3 L T Tr WH; Lk. vi. 6,8;
men are spoken of as €npot, withered, Jn. v. 3. of the
land in distinction from water, 7 Epa sc. yn (Sept. for
mv, Gen. i. 9 sq.; Jon.i. 9; ii. 11, and often [W. 18:
592 (550)]): Mt. xxiii. 15; Heb. xi. 29 where L T Tr
WH add yis.*
EdAwwos, -ivn, -wov, (EvAov), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down,
wooden, made of wood: oxevn, 2 Tim. ii. 20; neut. plur.
eidwda, Rev. ix. 20 (coi, Bar. vi. 30 [Ep. Jer. 29]).*
EvAov, -ov, Td, (fr. Evw to scrape, plane), fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 315 1. wood: univ. 1 Co. iii. 12; &. Ovivoy,
Rev. xviii. 12; that which is made of wood, as a beam from
which any one is suspended, a gibbet, a cross, [A. V. tree,
q- v. in B.D. Am. ed.], Acts v. 30; x. 39; xiii. 29; Gal.
iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 24, (yy, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 23;
Josh. x. 26; Esth. v. 14), —a use not found in the classics
[ef. L. and S. s. v. II. 4]. A log or timber with holes in
which the feet, hands, neck, of prisoners were inserted
and fastened with thongs (Gr. cadov, EvAomedn, modoKakn,
modootpaBn, Lat. nervus, by which the Lat. renders the
Hebr. 10, a fetter, or shackle for the feet, Job [xiii. 27];
xxxill. 11; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 458 sqq.;
[B. D. s. v. Stocks]): Acts xvi. 24 (Hdt. 6, 75; 9, 37;
Arstph. eq. 367, 394, 705); a cudgel, stick, staff: plur.,
Mt. xxvi. 47, 55; Mk. xiv. 43, 48; Lk. xxii. 52, (Hdt.
2,63; 4,180; Dem. p. 645,15; Polyb. 6, 37,3; Joseph.
b. j- 2, 9,4; Hdian. 7, 7, 4). 2. a tree: Lk. xxiii.
31 (Gen. i. 29; ii. 9; iii. 1; Is. xiv. 8,ete.); & rs Cons,
see (wn, 2 b. p. 274%
[€sv, older form of civ, retained occasionally in com-
pounds, as éupBuive, 1 Pet. iv. 12 ed. Bezae ; see Meister-
hans § 49, 11; L. and S. @ v. owy, init.; and cf. 3, o, s.j
tvpdw (a later form, fr. Diod. [1, 84] down, for Eupéa,
which the earlier writ. used fr. Hdt. down; [W. 24; B.
63 (55); esp. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 53]),-6: pf. pass.
ptep. ééupnuevos; Mid., pres. inf. Evpacda [for which
some would read (1 Co. xi. 6) €¥pao6a (1 aor. mid. inf.
fr. ipo) ; see WH. App. p. 166]; 1 aor. subjune. 3 pers.
plur. upno@vra [but T Tr WH read the fut. -covrat] ;
(fr. Eupov a razor, and this fr. vw); Sept. for m3; to
shear, shave: pass. 1 Co. xi. 5; mid. to get one’s self shaved,
ibid. vs. 6; 1 Co. xi. 6; with an acc. specifying the obj.
more precisely [cf. B. § 134, 7; W. § 32,5]: ri cepadny,
Acts xxi. 24 (Sept. Num. vi. 9, 19; Lev. xxi. 5; ras
oppvas, Hdt. 2, 66; 7d capa, 2, 37).*
488
O
0
. 6, r, 76, originally rés, rn, 76, (as is evident from the
forms toi, rai for of, ai in Hom. and the Ionic writ.), cor-
responds to our definite article the (Germ. der, die, das),
which is properly a demonstrative pronoun, which we
see in its full force in Homer, and of which we find cer-
tain indubitable traces also in all kinds of Greek prose,
and hence also in the N. T.
I. As a DEMONSTRATIVE Pronoun; Lat. hic, haec,
hoc; Germ. der, die, das, emphatic; cf. W. § 17,1; B.
101 (89) sq. ; 1. in the words of the poet Aratus, rod
yap kal yevos éopev, quoted by Paul in Acts xvii. 28. 2
in prose, where it makes a partition or distributes into
parts: 6 pev... 6 d¢, that... this, the one... the other:
Mt. xiii. 23 R G Tr [here the division is threefold] ; Gal.
iv. 23 [here L WH Tr mrg. br. pev]; of pev . . . of dé, Acts
Kxviii. 24; Phil. i. 16 sq.; of pev... 6 dé, Heb. vii. 5 sq.
20 (21), 23 sq.; rovs pev... rovs dé, Mk. xii. 5 RG;
Eph. iv. 11; of pev... adroe d€ (Lchm. of de) . . . erepoe
6é, Mt. xvi. 14 cf. Jn. vii. 12; tives foll. by of dé, Acts
xvii. 18; ds (see ds I.) ev foll. by 6 dé, Ro. xiv. 2; of d€
stands as though of pev had preceded, Mt. xxvi. 67; xxviii.
Lie 3. in narration, when either two persons or
two parties are alternately placed in opposition to each
other and the discourse turns from one to the other; 6
€, but he, and he, (Germ. er aber): Mt. ii. 14; iv.43; xxi.
29 sq.; Mk. i. 45; xii. 15; Lk. viii. 21, 30,48; xxii. 10,
34; Jn. ix. 38, and very often; plur., Mt. ii. 5,9; iv. 20;
Mk. xii. 14 [RGLUmrg.], 16 [Lbr. of d€]; Lk. vii. 4;
MX le eK I, oS, Gls NCU iv. Zl; Xi. lo, andorens
oi pev ovv, in the Acts alone: i. 6; v.41; xv. 3, 30; 6
pev ovv, XXili. 18; xxviii. 5.
II. As the DEFINITE or PREPOSITIVE ARTICLE (to
be distinguished from the post positive article, —as
it is called when it has the force of a relative pro-
noun, like the Germ. der, die, das, exx. of which use are
not found in the N. T.), whose use in the N. T. is ex-
plained at length by W. §§ 18-20; B. 85 (74) sqq.;
[Green p. 5 sqq.]. As in all languages the article serves
to distinguish things, persons, notions, more exactly, it
is prefixed 1. to substantives that have no mod-
ifier; and a. those that designate a person or a
thing that is the only one of its kind; the art. thus dis-
tinguishes the same from all other persons or things, as
6 7Atos, 6 ovpaves, 7 yn, 7 Oddacca, 6 Oeds, 6 Adyos (Jn. i.
1 sq.), 6 SudBoros, 76 Has, 7 okoria, 7 Con, 6 Odvaros,
etc. b. appellative names of persons and things defi-
nite enough in themselves, or made so by the context,
or sufficiently well-known from history; thus, to the
names of virtues and vices, as 7 Sixcacoavvn, ) copia, 4
Sivapis, 7) ddnOea, etc. 6 €oyouevos, the well-known per-
€
oO
sonage who is to come, i. e. the Messiah, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii.
19; 6 mpopnyrns, the (promised and expected) prophet,
Jn. i. 21; vii. 40; 9 owrnpia, the salvation which all
good men hope for, i. e. the Messianic salvation; 7
ypapn, ete.; 7 vedéAn, the cloud (well known from the
O. T.), 1 Co. x. 1 sq.; tods dyyédous, Jas. ii. 25; To
extpopuarti, 1 Co. xv. 8. to designations of eminent per-
sonages: 6 vids Tov Ged, 6 vids Tod avOpamou, (see vids) ;
6 dwdackados Tov IopanA, Jn. iii. 10; ef. Fritzsche on Mk.
p- 613. The article is applied to the repeated name of
a person or thing already mentioned or indicated, and
to which the reader is referred, as rods pdyous, Mt. ii. 7
cf. 1; of doxoi, Mt. ix.17; of Saipoves, Mt. viii. 31 cf. 28;
Thy Ovov Kat Tov m@dov, Mt. xxi. 7 cf. 2, and countless
other exx. The article is used with names of things
not yet spoken of, in order to show that definite things
are referred to, to be distinguished from others of the
same kind and easily to be known from the context; as
ta Bpedn, the babes belonging to the people of that
place, Lk. xviii. 15; amd trav dévdpav, sc. which were
there, Mt. xxi. 8; r@ iepei, to the priest whose duty it
will be to examine thee, when thou comest, Mt. viii. 4 ;
Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; 76 mdoiov, the ship which stood
ready to carry them over, Mt. viii. 23 [RGT, cf. 18];
ix. 1 [RG]; xiii. 2 [RG]; 76 dpos, the mountain near
the place in question (der an Ort u. Stelle befindliche
Berg) (but some commentators still regard 76 dpos as
used here generically or Hebraistically like 7 dpewn, the
mountain region or the highlands, in contrast with the
low country, (cf. Sept. Josh. xvii. 16; xx. 7; Gen.
xix. 17, 19, etc.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete.
p- 111 sq.; Weiss, Matthaiusevangelium, p. 129 note; and
in Meyer’s Mt. 7te Aufl.], Mt. v.1; Mk. iii. 13; Lk.
ix. 28; Jn. vi. 3, 15, (1 Macc. ix. 38, 40); 9 otkia, the
house in which (Jesus) was wont to lodge, Mt. ix. 10,
28; xiii. 36; xvii. 25; tmd Tov podsoy, sc. that is in the
house, Mt. v.15; also emt thy Avyviar, ibid.; ev rH parvn,
in the manger of the stable of the house where they
were lodging, Lk. ii. 7 RG; 6 émauwos, the praise of
which he is worthy, 1 Co. iv. 5; so everywhere in the
doxologies: 7 Sd£a, rd kpdros, 1 Pet. iv. 11; Rev. v. 13,
ete. ce. The article prefixed to the Plural often
either includes all and every one of those who by the
given name are distinguished from other things having
a different name, —as oi aorepes, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii.
25; ai ad@mexes, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58, ete.;—or de-
fines the class alone, and thus indicates that the whole
class is represented by the individuals mentioned, how-
ever many and whosoever they may be; as in of api-
@aiot, of ypappareis, of TeA@vat, ol avOpwror, people, the
o 434 6
multitude, (Germ. die Leute); oi deroi, Mt. xxiv. 28;
tds kuoiv, Mt. vii. 6. d. The article prefixed to the
Singular sometimes so defines only the class, that all and
every one of those who bear the name are brought to
mind; thus, 6 avOpwmos, Mt. xv.11; 6 eOvixds kx. TeAwuns,
Mt. xviii. 17; 6 épyarns, Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v.18; 6 pecirns,
Gal. iii. 20; 6 KAnpovopos, Gal. iv. 15; 6 Sikaos, Ro. i. 17;
Heb. x. 38; ra onpeta tod droordXov, the signs required
of any one who claims to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12,
and other exx. e. The article is prefixed to the
nominative often put for the vocative in addresses [cf.
W. § 29, 2; B. § 129.5]: yatpe 6 Baoideds ray "Iovd.
(prop. ov 6 Bac., thou who art the king), Jn. xix. 3; vai, 6
marnp, Mt. xi. 26; aye viv of movorot, kavoare, Jas. v. 1;
ovpave Kat of &ytor, Rev. xviii. 20; add, Mk. v.41; x. 47;
kaso 2 exw S sae Me cvilt ll Onmxxte Sr AC hSexaits
41; Ro. viii. 15; Eph. v. 14, 22, 25; vi.1,4sq.; Rev. xii.
12. f. The Greeks employ the article, where we
abstain from its use, before nouns denoting things that
pertain to him who is the subject of discourse: ede or
hyot peyadn TH Pavn, Acts xiv. 10 [RG]; xxvi. 24, (Prov.
XXVi. 25); yur mpooevxopuevn ... dkataxad\’mTw TH Ke-
gary, 1 Co. xi. 5; esp. in the expression éyew tt, when
the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an
adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else
which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, il a
les épaules larges); so, éxew thy xeipa Enpav, Mt. xii. 10
RG; Mk. iii. 1; 1d mpdowrov ws avOparov [ (Rec. avOpa-
mos)], Rev. iv. 7; ra aic@nrnpia yeyvpvacpeva, Heb. v.
14; dmapaBarov thy iepwovvnv, Heb. vii. 24; thy Katoiknow
kth. Mk. v. 3; tv eis Eavtovs dydamny éxrevn, 1 Pet. iv. 8.
Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron.
avtov, tipo, is added to the substantive: Mt. iii.4; Mk.
Viil.ie Rev.0. 18341 tet. i. 12, .cf. Eph. 118is0ct., Wie
§ 18, 2; [B. § 125, 5]. g. Proper Names some-
times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous; cf.
W. § 18, 5 and 6; B. § 124, 3 and 4; [Green p. 28
sq: ]; a. as respects names of Persons, the person
without the article is simply named, but with the article
is marked as either well known or as already mentioned;
thus we find "Ingots and o "Ins., TavAos and 6 Tadx., ete.
Il:Aaros has the article everywhere in John’s Gospel and
also in Mark’s, if xv. 43 (in RG L) be excepted (but T
Tr WH insert the article there also); Tiros is every-
where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons
in the oblique cases almost always have the article,
unless the case is made evident by a preposition: ro
‘Iwonp, Mk. xv. 45; rov laxaB cai rov’Hoad, Heb. xi. 20,
and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1
sqq-; Lk. iii. 23; but where perspicuity does not require
the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as rév
viav “lwondp, Heb. xi. 21; trav vidv Eupop, Acts vii. 16;
6 Geos "Ioadk, Mt. xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; drav dynode
"ABpadp x. loadk ... Kat mavtas tovs mpopnras, Lk. xiii.
28. The article is commonly omitted with personal
proper names to which is added an apposition indicating
the race, country, office, rank, surname, or something
else, (cf. Matthiae § 274); let the foll. suffice as exx.:
*"ABpadp 6 watnp Hyar, Jn. viii. 56; Ro. iv. 1; ‘IdkaBov
tov Tov ZeBedaiov Kai Iwavynv rov adeddov avrod, Mt. iv.
21; Mapia 7 Maydadnrn, Mt. xxvii. 56, etc.; "lwdvns 6
Banriorns, Mt. iii. 1; ‘Hpwdns 6 retpapxns, Lk. ix. 7;
"Invovs 6 heyopevos Xpiotos, Mt. i. 16; Saddos S€ 6 Kar
IlavAos sc. kadovpevos, Acts xiii. 9; Zipwvos Tov empov,
Mk. xiv. 3; Bapripaos 6 tupdds, Mk. x. 46 [RG]; Zaya-
piov 700 amodopevov, Lk. xi.51. But there are excepe
tions also to this usage: 6 d€ ‘Hpodns 6 terpapxns, Lk. ii,
19; rov SaovdA, vidv Kis, Acts xiii. 21; in the opening
of the Epistles: IatAes amoarodos, Ro. i. 1; 1 Co. i.
ete; B. Proper names of countries and re-
gions have the article far more frequently than those
of cities and towns, for the reason that most names of
countries, being derived from adjectives, get the force of
substantives only by the addition of the article, as 4
*Axaia (but ef. 2 Co. ix. 2), 9 Tadaria, » TadiAaia, 4 Ira-
Ala, 7 Iovdaia, 7 Maxedovia (but cf. Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi.
5), ete. Only Atyumros, if Acts vii. 11 LT Tr WH be
excepted, is everywhere anarthrous. The names of
cities, esp. when joined to prepositions, particularly ey,
eis and ex, are without the article; but we find axé (RG
éx) THs ‘Popns in Acts xviii. 2. y- Names of rivers
and streams have the article in Mt. iii. 13; Mk. i. 5;
Lk. iv.1; xiii. 4; Jn. i. 28; rod Kedpwv, Jn. xviii. 1 GL
Tr mrg. 2. The article is prefixed to substan-
tives expanded and more precisely defined by modi-
fiers. a. to nouns accompanied by a gen. of the
pronouns pov, cov, nuav, tuav, avTov, €avray, a’rav: Mt. }
1 21, 2515) var. b.>) vile O12). exan eed Oise Mille ren legeemele kaevae
27; x. 7p xvi.6;, Acts xix, 25) Tr WE nei)s Ro,
iv. 19; vi. 6, and in numberless other places; it is rarely
omitted, as in Mt. xix. 28; Lk. i. 72; ii. 32; 2 Co. viii.
23; Jas. ¥. 20, lete.3 sch. B.S 12 Tete b. The pos-
sessive pronouns épuds, os, nuerepos, tperepos, joined to
substantives (if Jn. iv. 34 be excepted) always take the
article, and J ohn generally puts them after the substan-
tive (4 kpiows 4 eun, In. v. 30; 0 Aoyos 6 ads, xvii. 17; 9
Koweovia 7 nuerepa, 1 Jn. i. 3; 0 Katpos oO vpérepos, JN. Vii.
6), very rarely between the article and the substantive
(rois euots pnuaoww, Jn. v. 47; 9 eu ddayy, vii. 16; thy
anv Aadidy, iv. 42), yet this is always done by the other
N. T. writ., Mt. xviii. 20; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; Acts
xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. iii. 7, ete. c. When
adjectives are added to substantives, either the ad-
jective is placed between the article and the substantive,
— as 70 tdtov dopriov, Gal. vi. 5; 6 dyais avOpwros, Mt.
xii. 35; rv Scxaiay kpiow, In. vii. 24; 9 ayaOy pepes, Lk.
x.42; ro dytov mvedua, Lk. xii. 10; Acts i. 8; 4 ai@nos
Con, Jn. xvii. 3, and many other exx.;—or the adjective
preceded by an article is placed after the substantive
with its article, as rd mvedpa TO dytov, Mk. ili. 29; Jn.
xiv. 26; Actsi.16; Heb.iii. 7; ix.8; x.15; 9 (oy 9
ai@mos, 1 Jn. i. 2; ii. 25; 6 moupny 6 Kados, Jn. x. 115; rH
mvAnv thy odnpav, Acts xii. 10, and other exx.;— very
rarely the adjective stands before a substantive which
has the article, as in Acts [xiv. 10 RG]; xxvi. 24; 1Co.
xi. 5, [cf. B. § 125,5; W. § 20,1c.]. As to the adjeo
é 435 é
tives of quantity, dos, mas, modvs, see each in its own
place. da. What has been said concerning adjec-
tives holds true also of all other limitations added to
substantives, as 7
map’ €nov SiaOnky, Ro. xi. 27; 6 Adyos 6 rod aravpod, 1 Co.
i. 185; 4 eis Xpuorov riotes, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand,
miotis Yuav | mpos Tov Gedy, 1 Th. i. 8; THs Staxovias THs
eis Tovs dylous, 2 Co. vill. 4; see many other exx. of each
usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e.
The noun has the article before it when a demonstra-
tive pronoun (otros, exeivos) belonging to it either pre-
cedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, o
avOpwros ovros, Jn. ix. 24 [obros 6 avOp. L Tr mrg. WH];
Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; 6 Aads obros, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids cov
otros, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless
other exx.; otros 6 avOpeamos, Lk. xiv. 30; obros 6 Aaos,
Mk. vii. 6 [6 A. odt. L WH mrg.]; otros 6 vids pov, Lk.
xv. 24; obdros 6 reAovns, Lk. xviii. 11 [6 red. od. L mrg. |;
obros 0 Aoyos, Jn. vii. 36 [6 doy. ovr. LT Tr WH], and
many other exx. on €ketvos, see é€ketvos, 2; On adtds 6
ete., see avros (I. 1 b. etc.); on 6 avrds etc., see adros,
EE 3. The neuter article prefixed to adjec-
tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. § 34, 2; B.
§ 128, 1]; as, rd dyadov, 70 kadov (which see each in its
place); rd €Aarrov, Heb. vii. 7; with a gen. added, 70
Kar ekAoyiy mpobects, Ro. ix. 11; 9
yvootor tod Oeod, Ro. i. 19; 7d addvarov trod vopov, Ro.
Vill. 3; Td doOeves Tov Beov, 1 Co. i. 25; adtns, Heb. vii.
18; Ta ddpara Tr. Oeod, Ro. i. 20; ra xpumta ths aicxvvns,
2 Co. iv. 2, ete. 4. The article with cardinal nu-
merals: eis one; 6 eis the one (of two), see eis, 4 a.;
but differently 6 eis in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So
also of dvo (our the twain), Mt. xix. 5; of déxa the (those)
ten, and oi evvéa, Lk. xvii. 17; eketvoe of Séxa (Kal) oxTa,
Lk. xiii. 4. 5. The article prefixed to partici-
ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W.
§§ 18,3; 45,7; B.§§ 129,1b.; 144, 9]; as, 6 mespaCav,
Mt. iv. 3; 1 Th. iii. 5; 6 Bamwri¢wv, Mk. vi. 14 (for which
Mt. xiv. 2 6 Bamriorns); 6 oreipwv, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii.
5; 0 ddoOpevav, Heb. xi. 28; of Baoragtovres, Lk. vii. 14;
of Bookovres, Mt. viii. 33; Mk. v. 14; of é€cOlovres, the
eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21; ro dpeAopevov, Mt. xviii.
30, 343; Ta Umapxovta (see Urdpyxa, 2). b. the ptcp.
with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin.
verb; cf Bi§ 144,:9]: Mt..x. 40; “LK. vi. 29; xi: 235) Jn;
xv. 23; 2 Co. i. 21; Phil. ii. 13, and very often. mas 6
foll. by a ptep. [W. 111 (106)], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26; Lk. vi.
30 [T WHom.L Trmrg. br. art.]; xi. 10; Ro. ii. 1; 1 Co.
xvi. 16; Gal. iii. 13, etc.; paxdpios 6 w. a ptep., Mt. v. 4
(5), 6, 10, etc.; oval tpiv oi w. a ptep., Lk. vi. 25; the
neut. rd with a ptcp. must be resolved into that which
[with a fin. verb], ro yevvopevov, Lk. i. 35; 1d yeyevunue-
vov, JN. ili. 6. ce. the article with ptep. is placed in
apposition: Mk. iii. 22; Acts xvii. 24; Eph. iii. 20; iv.
22N24- smear 14:1 Peta. 21,.ete. 6. The neut.
ré before infinitives a. gives them the force of
substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [ef. W. § 44, 2a.; 3¢.]);
as, ro kabioa, Mt. xx. 23; Mk. x. 40; ro 6éXew, Ro. vii.
18; 2 Co. viii. 10; 1d motnoa, TO émtreAcoa, 2 Co. viii. 11,
and other exx.; tovro kpivate* To px TWOevat KTd. Ro. xiv.
13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi-
tion (avi Tov, év Ta, eis Td, etc.), see under each prep. in
its place. b. Much more frequent in the N. T. than
in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., esp. in the
writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John’s Gospel
and Epistles), is the use of the gen. rod w. an inf. (and
in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N. T.), which is
treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the
end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq.; W.§ 44,4; B. 266
(228) sqq. The examples fall under the foll. classes:
tov with an inf. is put a. after words which natu-
rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them;
thus after d&ov, 1 Co. xvi. 4; @Aaye, Lk. i. 9 (1 S. xiv. 47);
eEarropudpat, 2 Co. i. 8. B. for the simple expletive
[i. e. ‘complementary ’] or (as it is commonly called)
epexegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom-
plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase,
(where in Germ. zu is commonly used) ; thus after mpo-
Oupia, 2 Co. viii. 11; Bpadeis, Lk. xxiv. 25; Amis, Acts
xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [mot Rec.]; e(nret evxatpiav, Lk.
xxii. 6 [not Lmrg.]; 6 kaipds (sc. eati) tod ap£acOat, to
begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17 (kaupov yew w. the simple inf. Heb.
xi. 15); didovar tiv eEovoiav, Lk. x. 19 (e€ovciay éyew
with simple inf., Jn. xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); dgewderae
eopev (equiv. to dpeiAoper), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone,
Gal. v. 3); €rouov etvar, Acts xxiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58;
v. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 33); ypetav
éxew, Heb. v. 12; ed@xev dpOadrpodrs tod pn Bree Kat
@ra Tov pu) axovewv, that they should not see . . . that they
should not hear [ef. B. 267 (230) ], Ro. xi. 8 (€yew dra
elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see ods, 2); emdijoOn
6 xpovos Tov Tekely avTny, at which she should be deliv-
ered [cf. B. ]. c.], Lk.i.57; éAno6. nuépa .. . rod mept-
Tepe avtov, that they should circumcise him [cf. B. 1. e.],
Lk. ii. 21; after avévdexrov éotiv, Lk. xvii. 1 [so B. § 140,
15; (W. 328 (308) otherwise) ]; quite unusually after
eyevero [cf. B. § 140, 16 6.; W.1.c.], Acts x. 25 [Ree.
om. art. ]. y. after verbs of deciding, entreat-
ing, exhorting, commanding, etc.: after xpivew
(see kpiva, 4); eyévero youn [-uns I Tr WH (see yivopat,
5e.a.)], Acts xx. 3; 16 mpoowmov éeornpi&ev, Lk. ix. 51;
ovvridec Oa, Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5);
mpocevxecOa, Jas. v.17; mapaxadeiv, Acts xxi. 12; €
ré\AecOa, Lk. iv. 10; emurréAXew, Acts xv. 20 (with inf.
alone, xxi. 25[RGT, but L Tr txt. WH here drooren.; B.
270 (232)]) 3 waravevew, Lk. v. 7. 8. after verbs of
hindering, restraining, removing, (which natu-
rally require the genitive), and according to the well-
known pleonasm with 7 before the inf. [see pn, I. 4 a.;
B. § 148,13; W. 325 (305) ]; thus, after caréyw twa, Lk.
iv.42; xparovpa, Lk. xxiv. 16; cwAvo, Acts x. 47; tmo-
oreAAopa, Acts xx. 20, 27; mavw, 1 Pet. iii. 10; xara-
mave, Acts xiv. 18; without yy before the inf. after
eyxorropat, Ro. xv. 22. €. Tov with an inf. is added
as a somewhat loose epexegesis: Lk. xxi. 22; Acts ix.
15; xiii. 47; Phil. iii. 21; es dxaOapoiay tov ariydterOa
Ta owpara avtay, to the uncleanness of their bodies’ be-
0 436 6
ing dishonored, Ro. i. 24 (cf. B. § 140, 14]; W. 325
(305) sq. t. it takes the place of an entire final
clause, in order that [W.§ 44,4 b.; B.§ 140,17]; esp.
after verbs implying motion: Mt. ii. 13; iii. 13; xiii. 3;
xxiv. 45; Mk. iv. 3 (where LT WHom. Trbr. rod); Lk.
17%. T9S0 Hs 245127 nares i tat ie mre]; vill. bs
xii. 42 (here Lom. Tr br. rod); xxii. 31; xxiv. 29; Acts
iii. 2s) xx. 505) xmas 18 phon wit wot 110) Galo aio:
Pin 11210); leb:issenvsn9) eter. yn. used of result,
so that: Acts vii. 19; Ro. vii. 3; after mow, to cause that,
make to, Acts iii. 12; [ef. W. 326 (306); B. § 140,
16 6.]. 7. The article with adverbs [B. § 125,
10 sq. 5. W5§/18).38 a. gives them the force of sub-
stantives; as, ro mépay, the region beyond; ta ava, ra
KdT@, TO viv, Ta Eumpoober, Ta drigw, etc.; see these
words in their proper places. b. is used when they
stand adjectively, as 7 avw ‘Iepoveadnp, 6 TéTe Koopos, 6
€ow dvOperos, 6 viv air, etc., on which see these several
words. c. the neut. ro is used in the ace. absol., esp.
in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, 76
mdAdw, 2 Co. xiii. 2; ra vov or raviyv, and with neuter ad-
jectives used adverbially, as rd Nowrdv, rd mporepov (Jn.
vi. 62; Gal. iv. 13); 7d mporov (Jn. x. 40; xii. 16; xix.
39); TO mAeiorov (1 Co. xiv. 27); see these words them-
selves. 8. The article before prepositions with
their cases is very often so used that dy, dvres, dvra,
must be supplied in thought [ef. B. § 125, 9; W.§ 18, 3];
thus, of dao “IraXias, awd Gecoadovixns, Acts xvil. 13;
Heb. xiii. 24 [ef. W. § 66, 6]; 6 & tun, Mt. vi. 9; Ro.
Vili. 1; neut. ra mpos, Mk. ii. 2; of &k twos, Ro. ii. 8; iv.
14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 etc.; of mapa twos, Mk. iii. 21 (see
mapa, l.e.). ta wept twos, Lk. xxiv. 19; Acts xxiv. 10;
Phil. i. 27; [add, ra (TI Tr WH 10) wepi euod, Lk. xxii.
37], ete. (see wepi, I. b. B.) 5 ra mepi twa, Phil. ii. 23 [see
mepi, II. b.]; of pera tivos, those with one, his compan-
ions, Mt. xii. 3; of mwepi twa, and many other exx. which
are given under the several prepositions. the neut. rd
in the ace. absol. in adverbial expressions [cf. W. 230
(216); B. §§ 125,12; 131, 9]: 70 ca nuepav, daily, day
by day, Lk. xi. 3; xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [RG WH br.];
7d kaOonou, at all, Acts iv. 18 [LT WH om. 70]; _ besides,
in TO Kata odpka, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on
the force of the art. here see Abbot in Journ. Soe. Bibl.
Lit. etc. for 1883, p. 108]; ra kar’ eué, as respects what
relates to me, my state, my affairs, Col. iv. 7; Eph. vi.
21; ro e& ipav, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18;
TO ep vpiv, as far as respects you, if I regard you, Ro.
xvi. 19 RG; ra mpds (Tov) Beov, ace. absol., as respects
the things pertaining to God, i. e. in things pertaining
to God, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii. 17; v. 1, (iepet ra mpds tods
Geovs, atpatny@ 5€ Ta mpds tovs avOpmmovs, Xen. resp.
Laced. 13,11; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 262 sq.) ;
TO €k pepous sc. dv, that which has been granted us in
part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. xiii. 10. 9.
The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni-
tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some
kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen-
eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing
[ef. W. § 30, 3; B. § 125, 7]; a. the masc. and the
fem. article: “IdkwBos 6 rod ZeBedaiov, 6 Tod ’AAdaiov,
the son, Mt. x. 2 (3), 3; Mapia 9 Tod "IaxwBov, the
mother, Mk. xvi. 1 [Tom. Tr br. rod]; Lk. xxiv. 10 [L
TTr WH]; ’Eppép rod Svxéu, of Hamor, the father of
Shechem, Acts vii. 16 RG; 4 rod Ovpiov, the wife, Mt.
i. 6; of XAdns, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes-
tics, or work-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co. i. 11; also
oi *AptoroBovdov, of Napxiocov, Ro. xvi. 10 sq.3 of rod
Xpicrov, the followers of Christ [A. V. they that are
Christ’s], 1 Co. xv. 23 GLT Tr WH; Gal. v. 24; of rav
apicaiwy, the disciples of the Pharisees, Mk. ii. 18° Rec.,
18° RGL; Kaoapeia 7 PiXirrov, the city of Philip, Mk.
Vill. 27. b. 76 and ta Tivos: as Ta Tov Geov, the cause
or interests, the purposes, of God, opp. to ra rév avOpa-
mov, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; in the same sense ra row
kupiov, Opp. to ra Tod Kéopov, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; ra THs
capkés, Ta TOU mvevparos, Ro. viii. 5; ra buoy, your pos-
sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14; (nreiv 76 or ra twos, 1 Co. x. 243
xiii. 5; Phil. ii. 21; ra rs eipnyns, tis oikoSouns, which
make for, Ro. xiv. 19; ra trys aoOeveias pov, which per-
tain to my weakness, 2 Co. xi. 30; ra Kaioapos, ré
tov Geov, due to Cesar, due to God, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk.
xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25; ra rod yvynmiov, the things wont
to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 11; ra
twos, the house of one (ra Avcwvos, Theocr. 2, 76; [eis
Ta tov ddeAdod, Lysias c. Eratosth. § 12 p. 195]; ef. év
rois marptxots, in her father’s house, Sir. xlii. 10; [Chry-
sost. hom. lii. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. col.
458 ed. Migne; Gen. xli.51; Esth. vii. 9, (Hebr. 173) ;
Job xviii. 19 (Hebr. 1339) ]); with the name of a deity,
the temple (ra tov Ads, Joseph. ce. Ap. 1, 18, 2; also rd
tov Ads, Lycurg. adv. Leoer. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167,
15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 100).
Ta Tov vdpov, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii.
14; rd THs mapoumias, the (saying) of (that which is said
in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22; ra rev damon foueror,
what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viii.
33; 7d Ths ovens, What has been done to the fig-tree, Mt.
KAM. 2s 10. The neuter 76 is put a. before
entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception
[B. § 125, 13; W. 109 (108 sq.)]: etrev adr 16 Ei duva-
cai muorevoa, said to him this: ‘If thou canst believe’,
Mk. ix. 23 [but L T Tr WH ro Ei? dvvy ‘If thou canst!’];
ef. Bleek ad loc.; [Riddell, The Apology etc. Digest of
Idioms § 19 y.]. before the sayings and precepts of the
O. T. quoted in the New: 176 0d dovedoers, the precept,
‘Thou shalt not kill’, Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37
(where Lehm. ér for 16); Ro. xiii. 9; [1 Co. iv. 6 LT
Tr WH]; Gal.v.14. before indir. questions: 76 ris etc.,
rd Ti etc., To mas etc., Lk. i. 62; ix. 46; xix. 48; xxii. 2,
4, 23 sq.; Actsiv. 21; xxii. 30; Ro. vill. 26; 1 Th eavandus
cf. Matthiae § 280; Kriiger § 50, 6, 10; Passow ii.
p. 395°; [L. and S.s. v. B. I. 3 sq.]- b. before single
words which are explained as parts of some discourse
or statement [reff. as above]: 7o”Ayap, the name ”Ayap,
Gal. iv. 25 [T Ltxt. WH mrg. om. Tr br. ”Ayap]; 1d
‘ dvéBn’, this word dvéBy, Eph. iv. 9, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on
] ,
oySonKovta
Gal. L c.]; 176 ‘@rt daaé’, Heb. xii. 27; cf. Matthiae ii.
p- 731 sq. 11. We find the unusual expression 4
ovai (apparently because the interjection was to the
writer a substitute for the term 4 wAnyn or 9 OAius [W.
179 (169)]), misery, calamity, [A. V. the Woe], in Rev.
ix. 125 xi. 14.
III. Since it is the business, not of the lexicographer,
but of the grammarian, to exhibit the instances in which
the article is omitted in the N. T. where according to the
laws of our language it would have been expected, we
refer those interested in this matter to the Grammars of
Winer (§ 19) and Alex. Buttmann (§ 124, 8) [ef. also
Green ch. ii. § iii. ; Middleton, The Doctrine of the Greek
Article (ed. Rose) pp. 41 sqq., 94 sq.; and, particularly
with reference to Granville Sharp’s doctrine (Remarks
on the uses of the Def. Art. in the Grk. Text of the N. T.,
3d ed. 1803), a tract by C. Winstanley (A Vindication
etc.) republished at Cambr. 1819], and only add the foll.
remarks : 1. More or less frequently the art. is
wanting before appellatives of persons or things of which
only one of the kind exists, so that the art. is not needed
to distinguish the individual from others of the same
kind, as #ALos, yy, Geos, Xpords, mvedpa ayrov, Cor ai@vios,
Oavaros, vexpoi (of the whole assembly of the dead [see
vexpds, 1 b. p. 423°]); and also of those persons and
things which the connection of discourse clearly shows
to be well-defined, as vouos (the Mosaic law [see vouos,
2 p. 428°]), Kuptos, marnp, vids, dynp (husband), yury
(wife), ete. 2. Prepositions which with their cases
designate a state and condition, or a place, or a mode
of acting, usually have an anarthrous noun after them;
as, els hudakny, év vdakh, eis dépa, ek miotews, Kara
odpxa, én éAmidi, tap’ Amida, aw ayopas, aw dypod, év
dyp@, eis dddv, év jyepars “Hpwdov, eis jepay drodvtpa-
oews, and numberless other examples.
éySoqKovra, eighty: Lk. ii. 37; xvi. 7. [(Thue., al.)]*
Oy5o0s, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], the eighth: Lk. i. 59;
Acts vii. 8; Rev. xvii. 11; xxi. 20; one who has seven
other companions, who with others is the eighth, 2 Pet. ii.
5; so déxaros, with nine others, 2 Mace. v. 27; ef. Matthiae
§ 469,9; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 72 sq. and 720 sq.; W. § 37,
2; [B. 30 (26)].*
Sykos, -ov, 6, (apparently fr. ETKQ, éveykeiy, i. gq. pdpros,
see Buttmann, Lexil. i. 288 sqq. [Fishlake’s trans. p.
151 sq.], whatever is prominent, protuberance, buik, mass,
hence), a burden, weight, encumbrance: Heb. xii.1. (In
many other uses in Grk. writ. of all ages.) *
[Syn. Sykos,Bdpos, doprilov: B. refers to weight, o. to
bulk, and either may be oppressive (contra Tittmann); B. a
load in so far as it is heavy, poprfov a burden in so far as it
is borne; hence the ¢opr. may be either ‘ heavy’ (Mt. xxiii.
4; Sir. xxi. 16), or ‘light’ (Mt. xi. 30).]
d5e, 45e, rdSe, (fr. the old demonstr. pron. 6, 7, ro, and
the enclit. d¢), [fr. Hom. down], this one here, Lat. hicce,
haecce, hocce ; a. it refers to what precedes: Lk. x.
39 and Rec. in xvi. 25; rdde mavra, 2 Co. xii. 19 Grsb.;
to what follows: neut. plur. rade, these (viz. the following)
things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken, Acts
437
060s
xv. 23 RG; rdde A€yer etc., Acts xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12,
18; iii. 1,7,14. — b. ets ryvde tiv modu, [where we say
into this or that city] (the writer not knowing what par-
ticular city the speakers he introduces would name), Jas.
iv. 13 (cf. W. 162 (153), who adduces as similar ryvde
Thy npepav, Plut. symp. 1,6, 1; [but see Liinemann’s ade
dition to Win. and esp. B. § 127, 2]).*
ddetw; (600s) ; to travel, journey: Lk. x. 83. (Hom
Il. 11, 569; Xen. an. 7, 8,8; Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 2; b.j
8, 6,3; Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]; Plut., al.; Tob. vi
6.) [Comp.: d:-, cvv-odeto. ]*
dSnyéw, -d; fut. ddnyno@; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing
odnynon; (6dnyos, q.v-); Sept. chiefly for 73, also for
Elune yn, etc. ; a. prop. to be a quide, lead on
one’s way, to guide: twa, Mt.xv. 14; Lk. vi. 393; teva emi
mt, Rev. vii. 17; (Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Aleiphr., Babr.,
al.). b. trop. to be a guide or teacher; to give guid-
ance to: twa, Acts viii. 31 (Plut. mor. 954 b.); eds rnp
a\ndecav, Jn. xvi. 13 [RG L Tr WH txt. (see below) ]
(ddnynoov pe emt riv adjnOecdv cov kai didakov pe, Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 5 [foll. by eis and mpos in “Teaching of the
Apostles” ch. 3]) ; foll. by ev w. dat. of the thing in which
one gives guidance, instruction or assistance to another,
év tH adnbeia, Jn. xvi. 13 T WH mrg. [see above] (667-
ynoov pe ev TH 656 cov k. Topevoopat €v TH GAnGeia cov, Ps.
Ixxxv. (Ixxxvi.) 11; cf. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 35; Sap. ix. 11;
xy
ddny6s, -ov, 6, (680s and Hyéouar; cf. yopyyds), a leader
of the way, a guide; a. prop.: Acts i. 16 (Polyb. 5,
5,15; Plut. Alex. 27; 1 Mace. iv. 2; 2 Mace.v.15). b.
in fig. and sententious discourse 68. rupAdr, i. e. like one
who is literally so called, namely a teacher of the ignorant
and inexperienced, Ro. ii. 19 ; plur. 68. rupAol rupday, i. e.
like blind guides in the literal sense, in that, while them-
selves destitute of a knowledge of the truth, they offer
themselves to others as teachers, Mt. xv. 143; xxiii. 16, 24.*
ddouropéw, -@; (ddourdpos a wayfarer, traveller); to
travel, journey: Acts x. 9. (Hdt., Soph., Xen., Ael. v.
h. 10, 4; Hdian. 7, 9, 1, al.) *
dSorTopia, -as, 7, (ddourdpos), a journey, journeying: Jn.
iv.63 2Co. xi. 26. (Sap. xiii. 18; xviii.3; 1 Mace. vi. 41;
Hdt., Xen., Diod. 5, 29; Hdian. al.) *
6$0-1e€w, -@; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down, to make a
road ; to level, make passable, smooth, open, a way; and
so also in the Sept.: @domoince tpiBov tH dpyn adrod, for
pda, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; for 590, to construct a level
way by casting up an embankment, Job xxx. 12; Ps. xvii.
(Ixviii.) 5; for 79, Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 10; for 777 739,
Is. lxii. 10;—and so, at least apparently, in Mk. ii. 23
L Trmrg. WH mrg. [see rovéo, I. 1 a. and c.] (with odd»
added, Xen. anab. 4, 8, 8).*
686s, -ov, 4, [appar. fr. r. EA to go (Lat. adire, accedere),
allied w. Lat. solum; Curtius § 281]; Sept. numberless
times for 73, less frequently for N78; (fr. Hom. down];
away; 1. prop. a. a@ travelled way, road;
Mt. ii. 123 vii. 13 sq.; xiii. 4,19; Mk. iv. 4, 15; x. 46;
Lk. viii. 5, 12; x. 313 xviii. 35; xix. 36; Acts viii. 26;
ix. 17; Jas. ii. 25, etc.; xara Thy dddy (as ye pass along
000s
the way [see xara, II. 1 a.]) by the way, on the way, Lk.
x. 4; Acts vill. 36; xxv. 38; xxvi. 13; caBBdrov odds,
[A. V. a sabbath-day’s journey] the distance that one is
allowed to travel on the sabbath, Acts i. 12 (see caSBarov,
la.). # odds with a gen. of the object, the way leading
to a place (the Hebr. 374 also is construed with a gen.,
ef. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 676 [Gr. §112, 2; cf. W.§ 30,
2]): €Ovév, Mt. x.5; trav dyiwy into the holy place, Heb.
ix. 8, ef. x. 20, where the grace of God is symbolized by
a way, cf. (ao, II. b., (rod EvAov, Gen. iil. 24; Alyurrou
...’Agoupiov, Jer. ii. 185 yas Pusoreeip, Lex. xiii. 17;
Tov Suwa, Judith v.14; Lat. via mortis, Tibull. 1,10, 4; ef.
Kiihner ii. p. 286, 4). in imitation of the Hebr. 797, the
ace. of which takes on almost the nature of a preposition,
in the way to, towards, (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 352"), we
find 68dv Gaddoons in Mt. iv. 15 fr. Is. vill. 23 (ix. 1), (so
6dov [ris Gaddoons, 1 K. xviii. 43]; yjs adrév, 1 K. viii.
48; 2 Chr. vi. 38; 68dv dvapev nriov, Deut. xi. 30; more-
over, once with the acc., 6ddv @ddaccav epvOpav, Num.
xiv. 25; [Deut. ii. 1]; cf. Thiersch, De Alex. Pentateuchi
versione, p. 145 sq.; [B. § 131,12]). with a gen. of the
subject, the way in which one walks: ev rats ddots airor,
Ro. iii. 16 ; érowaew tv 6ddv trav Baoidéwv, Rev. xvi.
12; in metaph. phrases, catevOivew tyv 6dov twos, to re-
move the hindrances to the journey, 1 Th. iii. 11; €ro-
patew (and evdvvew, Jn. i. 23; karacxevagew, Mt. xi. 10;
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27) rav dd0v Tov kupiov, see érouuato.
b. atraveller’s way, journey, travelling : €v ry 6d@, on the
journey, on the road, Mt. v. 25; xv.32; xx.17; Mk. viii.
OT © 18.993.3 x S2/bO swe x18 s KKIVU32, oon Actshix.
27; é& dd00, from a journey, Lk. xi. 6; aipew or kracOai
ru eis 0Odv, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8, and eis tiv oddv, Lk. ix.
3; mopevouat THY 6ddv, to make a journey (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,
22), w. avrov added [A. V. to go on one’s way], to con-
tinue the journey undertaken, Acts viii. 39; 680s nuepas,
a journey requiring a (single) day for its completion,
used also, like our a day’s journey, as a measure of dis-
tance, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxx. 36; xxxi. 23; Ex. iii. 18;
Judith ii. 21; 1 Mace. v. 24; vil. 45; améyew mapmd\dov
juepav dddv, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3, ef. Hdt. 4, 101 [W. 188
(177)]); on the phrase 6ddy rotetv, MK. ii. 23 see roréa,
I. 1 a. and ec. 2. Metaph. a. according to the
familiar fig. of speech, esp. freq. in Hebr. [cf. W. 32] and
not unknown to the Greeks, by which an action is
spoken of as a proceeding (cf. the Germ. Wandel), 686s
denotes a course of conduct, a way (i. e. manner) of think-
ing, feeling, deciding: a person is said 68dv Secxvivat rivi,
who shows him how to obtain a thing, what helps he
must use, 1 Co. xii. 31; with a gen. of the obj., i. e. of
the thing to be obtained, eipyyns, Ro. iii. 17; Cais. Acts
li. 28; owrnpias, Acts xvi. 17; with a gen. of the subj., ris
Stxaoovvns, the way which 7 dixaoc. points out and which
is wont to characterize 7 dcx., so in Mt. xxi. 32 (on which
see dixatoovwm, 1 b. p. 149" bot.); used of the Christian
religion, 2 Pet. ii. 21; likewise ras dAnOetas, ibid. 2; with
gen. of the person deciding and acting, Jas. v. 20; rod
Kaiv, Jude 11; rod Badady, 2 Pet. ii. 15; év mdcats rats
68ois avrov, in all his purposes and actions, Jas. i.8; ras
438 tq)
ddovs pou €v Xptor@, the methods which I as Christ’s min-
ister and apostle follow in the discharge of my office, 1 Co.
iv. 17; those are said ropeverOat tais dois avtéy [to walk
in their own ways | who take the course which pleases them,
even though it be a perverse one, Acts xiv. 16 [on the dat,
see mopeva, sub fin. ]; ai 680i rod Oeod or kupiou, the purposes
and ordinances of God, his ways of dealing with men,
Acts xiii. 10; Ro. xi. 33; Rev. xv. 3, (Hos. xiv. 9; Ps.
xciv. (xev.) 10; cxliv. (cxlv.) 17; Sir. xxxix. 24; Tob.
iil. 2, etc.). 4 660s Tod Oeod, the course of thought, feel-
ing, action, prescribed and approved by God: Mt. xxii.
16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21; used of the Christian re-
ligion, Acts xviii. 26; also 4 6. rod kupiov, ibid. 25; 68ds
used generally of a method of knowing and worshipping
God, Acts xxii. 45 xxiv. 14; 9 6dds simply, of the Chris-
tian religion [cf. B. 163 (142)], Acts ix. 2; xix. 9, 23;
xxiv. 22. _-b. in the saying of Christ, éyo eiys 9 686s 1
am the way by which one passes, i. e. with whom all wha
seek approach to God must enter into closest fellowship,
Jn. xiv. 6. [On the omission of 68ds in certain formulas
and phrases (Lk. v. 19; xix. 4), see W. 590 (549) sq.; B.
§ 123, 8; Bos, Ellipses etc. (ed. Schaefer) p. 331 sq.]
odovs, [acc. to Etym. Magn. 615, 21 (Pollux 6, 38) fr.
édw, Lat. edere, etc., cf. Curtius § 289; al. fr. root da to
divide, cf. daiwa, Sdkvw; (Lat. dens); Fick i. p. 100],
-dvtos, 6, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for ]W5 @ tooth: Mt. v.
38; Mk. ix. 18; Acts vii. 54; plur. Rev. ix. 8° 6 Bpvypos
Tav dddvrwy, see Bovypds.*
ddvvaiw, -d: pres. indic. pass. ddSvvduar; pres. ind. mid.
2 pers. sing. dduvacat (see karakavxydopat), ptcp. ddvvape
vos; (ddvvn) ; to cause intense pain; pass. to be in anguish,
be tormented: Lk. xvi. 24 sq.; mid. ¢o torment or distress
one’s self, [A. V. to sorrow], Lk. ii. 48; émt run, Acts xx.
38. (Arstph., Soph., Eur., Plat., al.; Sept.) *
odivy, [perh. allied w. éw; consuming grief; cf. Lat.
curae edaces ], -ns, 9, pain, sorrow: Ro. ix. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 10.
(From Hom. down; Sept.) *
d5uppds, -od, 0, (ddvpouac to wail, lament, [see kAala,
fin.]), @ wailing, lamentation, mourning: Mt. ii. 18 (fr.
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15 for o'37.A); 2 Co. vii. 7 (2
Mace. xi. 6; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Ael.
v.h. 14, 22.)*
*Otias (L T Tr WH ’O€eias [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84;
WH. App. p. 155, and see et, ¢]), -ov [but cf. B. 18 (16) ],
6, (M1) and 341 strength of Jehovah, or my strength
is Jehovah), Ozias or Uzziah, son of Amaziah, king of
Judah, [c.] B. c. 811-759 (2 K. xv. 30 sqq.): Mt. i. 8 sq.,
where the Evangelist ought to have preserved this order:
"Iopdu, "Oxo ias, "Iwds, "Auatias, Ofias. He seems
therefore to have confounded ’Oyotias and “O¢ias; see
another example of [apparent] confusion under ‘Iexovias.
[But Matthew has simply omitted three links; such
omissions were not uncommon, cf. e.g. 1 Chr. vi. 3 sqq.
and Ezra vii. 1 sqq. See the commentators.]*
étw; [fr. root 68, cf. Lat. and Eng. odor etc.; Curtius
§ 288]; fr. Hom. down; ¢o give out an odor (either good
or bad), fo smell, emit a smell: of a decaying corpse, Jn.
xi. 39; cf. Ex. viii. 14.*
60ep
ev, (fr. the rel. pron. 6 and the enclitic @ev which de-
notes motion from a place), [fr. Hom. down], adv., from
which; whence; it is used a. of the place from which:
Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; Acts xiv. 26; xxviii. 13; by at-
traction for éxetOev drrov etc., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; cf. B. § 143,
12; [W. 159 (150)]. b. of the source from which a
thing is known, from which, whereby: 1 Jn. ii. 18. Cc.
of the cause from which, for which reason, wherefore, on
which account, [A.V. whereupon (in the first two in-
stances)]: Mt. xiv. 7; Acts xxvi. 19; Heb. ii. 17; iii.
1; vii. 25; viii. 3; ix. 18; xi. 19; often in the last three
books of Macc.*
o06vn, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down]; a. linen [i. e. fine
white linen for women’s clothing; ef. Vanitek, Fremd-
worter, s. v.]. b. linen cloth (sheet or sail); so Acts
x. 11; xi. 5*
60dvov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of d0dvn, q. v.), a piece of linen,
small linen cloth: plur. strips of linen cloth for swathing
the dead, Lk. xxiv. 12 [Tom.L Tr br. WH reject the
vs.]; Jn. xix. 40; xx. 5-7. (In Grk. writ. of ships’ sails
made of linen, bandages for wounds, and other articles;
Sept. for 10, Judg. xiv. 13; for MAW or nwa, Hos. ii.
5 (7), 9 (11).)*
oifa, see eidw, I. p. 174.
oiketakéds, -7, -dv, SCe olKkLakds.
olkeios, -a, -ov, (oikos), fr. Hes. down, belonging to a
house or family, domestic, intimate: belonging to one’s
household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8; oiketou
tov Oeod, belonging to God’s household, i. e. to the theoc-
racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the
thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, oi oixetot
ts miotews, professors of the (Christian) faith, Gal. vi.
10 [but al. associate this pass. with that fr. Eph. as above;
see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; so otk. pidocodias, Strab. 1 p.
13 b. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.]; yewypadias, p. 25 a. [1, 34 ed.
Sieben.]; dAryapxias, Diod. 13, 91; rupavvidos, 19, 70.
(Sept. for xw related by blood; 1/7, 1S. x. 14 sqq.;
MINW, consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 17; otk. rod omépparos
for wa, Is. lviii. 7.) *
oixéreva [al. -eia, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq.], -as, 9, (oixérns,
q: v-), household i. e. body of servants (Macrob., Appul.
famulitium, Germ. Dienerschaft): Mt. xxiv. 45 L T Tr
WH. (Strab., Leian., Inserr.; plur. Joseph. antt. 12, 2,
3.) *
olxérns, -ov, 6, (oikéw), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down,
Lat. domesticus, i. e. one who lives in the same house with
another, spoken of all who are under the authority of
one and the same householder, Sir. iv. 30; vi. 11, esp.
a servant, domestic; so in Lk. xvi. 13; Acts x. 7; Ro. xiv.
4; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Sept. for 323. See more fully on the
word, Meyer on Rom. I. ec. [where he remarks that oie.
is a more restricted term than dodAos, designating a
house-servant, one holding closer relations to the family
than other slaves ; cf. dudxovos fin., Schmidt ch. 162.]*
olkéw, -@; (oikos) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1¥, afew
times for }2W; Lat. habito, [trans.] to dwell in: ri (Hat.
and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 16; [intrans. to dwell],
pera Twos, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii.
439
? ,
olKobopew
12 sq.; trop. €v rum, to be fixed and operative in one’s
soul: of sin, Ro. vii. 17 sq. 20; of the Holy Spirit, Ro.
yi. f9],) 115 °1 Co: iii.,16.
Tap-, Tept-, Tuv-oLKEw. | *
olknpa, -ros, 7, fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down, a dwelling-
place, habitation; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. cell],
Acts xii. 7, as in Thue. 4, 47 sq.; Dem., Leian. Tox. 29;
Plut. Agis 19; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.*
olkynTHptov, -ov, Td, (oikntnp), a dwelling-place, habita-
tion: Jude 6; of the body as the dwelling-place of the
spirit, 2 Co. v. 2 (2 Mace. xi. 2; 3 Mace. ii. 15; [Joseph.
ce. Ap. 1, 20, 7]; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).*
oixia, -as, 7, (oikos), Sept. for m3, [fr. Hdt. down], @
house ; a. prop. an inhabited edifice, a dwelling: Mt.
ii. 11; vii. 24-27; Mk.i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3; Acts
iv. 34; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often; oi ev r7 oikia
sc. dvres, Mt. v. 15; of ek rhs oikias with gen. of pers.,
Phil. iv. 22; 7 oikia rod (matpés pov) Geod, i. e. heaven,
Jn. xiv. 2; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2
Co. v. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii.
25; 7 otkia twos, the household, the family of any one,
Jn. iv. 53; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [ef. W. § 58, 4; B. § 129, 8a.];
univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. ee
property, wealth, goods, [cf. Lat. res familiaris]: twos, Mt.
xxiii. 14 (13) Ree. [cf. Wetst. ad loc.]; Mk. xii. 40; Lk.
xx. 47; so oixos in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 karéSovot Biaiws
oikov ‘Odvaojos, cf. 4, 318), in Hdt. 3, 53 and in Attic;
Hebr. 73, Gen. xlv. 18 (Sept. ra imdpyorra) ; Esth. viii.
1 (Sept. dca imnpxev). Not found in Rev. [Syn. see
otkos, fin. |
oixvakds (in prof. auth. and in some N. T. codd. also
oixevaxés [cf. et, | fr. oikos), -ov, 6, (oikia), one belonging to
the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the
master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x.
36; opp. to 6 oikodeordrns, ib. 25. (Plut. Cic. 20.) *
oiko-Seomortéw, -@; (oixodeandrns) ; tobe master (or head)
of a house; ta rule a household, manage family affairs: 1
Tim. v.14. (A later Grk. word; see Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 373.) *
olko-Seardrns, -ov, 6, (otkos, Seardrns), master of a house,
householder: Mt. x. 25; xiii. 27; xx. 11; xxiv. 43; Mk.
xiv. 14; Lk. xii. 39; xiii. 25; xiv. 21; avOperos oikod. (see
avOporos, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 1; xxi. 33; oixodeon. ris
oixias, Lk. xxii. 11, on this pleonasm cf. Bornemann, Schol.
ad loc.; W. § 65, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent.
B. C. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21; Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 11,3; Plut.
quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. 6. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
373 shows that the earlier Greeks said otkov or oikias
Seomdrns.) *
oikoSopew, -; impf. dkoddpouv; fut. oixodounow; 1 aor.
@xodépnoa [oik. Tr WH in Acts vii. 47; see Tdf. ad loc. ;
Proleg. p.120; WH. App. p. 161; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153;
W. § 12, 4; B. 34 (30)]; Pass., [pres. ofxodopoduae (inf.
-petoOa, Lk. vi. 48 Treg.); pf. inf. otxodouqcda (LE. vi.
48 T WH)]; plupf. 3 pers. sing. @xoddéunro; 1 aor. @xodo-
pnOnv [oix. T WH in Jn. ii. 20]; 1 fut. ofxo8opunOycopa ;
(oixodédpos, q. v-) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 733; to build
a house, erect a building; a. prop. a to build (up
[Comp.: é», xar-, €vKar-,
olKodouy 440
from the foundation): absol., Lk. xi.48 GT WH Tr txt. ;
xiv. 30; xvii. 28; of oixoSopodrtes, subst., the builders [cf.
W. § 45, 7; B. § 144, 11], Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk.
xx. 17; Actsiv. 11 Rec.; 1 Pet. ii. 7, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.)
22; é@ addAdrpiov Oepedtov, to build upon a foundation
laid by others, i. e. (without a fig.) to carry on instruction
begun by others, Ro. xv. 20; otkodopetv rm, Gal. ii. 18;
mupyov, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 28; daoOjkas,
LK. xii. 18; vadv, Mk. xiv. 58; pass. Jn. ii. 20 [on the aor.
ef. 2 Esdr. v. 16]; otkov, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 ([here T ézox. ],
ef. W. 603 (561), and add oikoupyeiv ra Kata Tov oikor,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3); [otkiav, Lk. vi. 48 (ef. W.1.¢.)];
cuvaywyny or oikdy ru, for the use of or in honor of one,
Lk. vii. 5; Acts vii. 47, 49, (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ;
oikiay éri tt, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi. 495; modu én’ dpovs,
Lk. iv. 29. 8. contextually i. q. to restore by building, to
rebuild, repair: ri, Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk.
xv. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [Lbr. Trmrg.] in 48. b.
metaph. a. i.q.to found: én ravtn Th méerpa oiKkodopnoe
pou TH exkAnoiary, i. e. by reason of the strength of thy
faith thou shalt be my principal support in the establish-
ment of my church, Mt. xvi. 18. — 8. Since both a Chris-
tian church and individual Christians are likened
to a building or temple in which God or the Holy Spirit
dwells (1 Co. iii. 9, 16 sqq.; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21), the
erection of which temple will not be completely finished till
the return of Christ from heaven, those who, by action,
instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian
wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent
life are regarded as taking part in the erection of that
building, and hence are said otxodoper, i. e. (dropping the
fiz.) to promote growth in Christian wisdom, affection, grace,
virtue, holiness, blessedness: absol., Acts xx. 32 LTTr
WH; 1 Co. viii. 1; x. 23; revd, xiv.4; 1 Th. v.11; pass.
to grow in wisdom, piety, ete., Acts ix. 31; 1 Co. xiv. 17;
univ. fo give one strength and courage, dispose to: ets rhv
miativ, Polye. ad. Philip. 3, 2 [yet here to be built up into
(in) ete.]; even to do what is wrong [A. V. embolden],
eis TO Ta ELOWACOUTA eo Oiev, 1 Co. viii. 10 [cf. W. § 39, 3
N. 3]. This metaphorical use of the verb Paul, in the
opinion of Fritzsche (Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 205 sq.), did not
derive from the fig. of building a temple, but from the
O. T., where “i433 and 097 with an acc. of the pers. (to
build one up and to pull one down) denote to bless and to
ruin, to prosper and to injure, any one”; cf. Ps. xxvii.
(xxviii.) 5; Jer. xxiv. 6; xl. (xxxiii.) 7. [Comp.: ap,
€m-, cvv-o1kodopew. | *
olko-Sop4}, -is, 7), (ockos, and dézo to build), a later Grk.
word, condemned by Phryn., yet used by Aristot.,
Theophr., [(but both these thought to be doubtful)],
Diod. (1, 46), Philo (vit. Moys. i. § 40; de monarch.
ii. § 2), Joseph., Plut., Sept., and many others, for oiko-
Sounua and otkoddunots; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 sqq.
ef. p.421; [W. 24]; 1. (the act of) building, build-
ing up, i. q. Td oikodopeiv; as, Tov Tetyéwv, 1 Macc. xvi.
235; Tov otkov tov Oeov, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the N. T.
metaph., edifying, edification, i.e. the act of one who
promotes another's growth in Christian wisdom, piety,
Oi KovoLos
holiness, happiness, (see oixodopéa, b. B. [ct. W. 35 (34)'}):
Ro. xiv. 19; xv. 2; [1 Co. xiv. 26]; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be-
low]; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29; with a gen. of the person
whose growth is furthered, tyav, 2 Co. xii. 19, [ef. x. 8];
éavrov ['Tdf. adrov], Eph. iv. 16; rod cdparos rod Xpiorod.
ibid. 12; ras éxxAnoias, 1 Co. xiv. 12; i. q. 7d olkodopody,
what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, ete.
Aaketv, AaBety, oikodSounv, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 5. Beane
otkoddunua, a building (i. e. thing built, edifice): Mk. xiii.
1 sq.; Tod iepod, Mt. xxiv. 1; used of the heavenly body,
the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1; trop. of
a body of Christians, a Christian church, (see oixodopew,
b. B.), Eph. ii. 21 [ef. mas, I. 1¢.]; with a gen. of the
owner or occupant, deod, 1 Co. iii. 9.*
olkodopla, -as, 7, (olkodopew), (the act of) building,
erection, (Thuce., Plat., Polyb., Plut., Leian., etce.; but
never in the Sept.); metaph. oixodouiay Oeod tiv eév
mioret, the increase which God desires in faith (see
oikodoun), 1 Tim. i. 4 Rec. * *"; but see oikovopia. Not
infreq. oixoy. and oixod. are confounded in the Mss. ; see
Grimm on 4 Mace. p. 365, ef. Hilgenfeld, Barn. epist.
p- 28; [D’Orville, Chariton 8, 1 p. 599].*
oiko-Sdpos, -ov, 6, (olkos, Séuw to build; cf. oixovdpos),
a builder, an architect: Acts iv.11 LT Tr WH. (Hadt.,
Xen., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
olkovopéw, -@; (oikovduos); to be a steward; to manage
the affairs of a household: absol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to
manage, dispense, order, requlate: Soph., Xen., Plat.,
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. iii. 14.) *
olkovopia, -as, 7, (olkovouew), fr. Xen. and Plat. down,
the management of a household or of household affairs ;
specifically, the management, oversight, administration, of
others’ property; the office of a manager or overseer, stew-
ardship: Lk. xvi. 2-4; hence the word is transferred
by Paul in a theocratic sense to the office (duty) in-
trusted to him by God (the lord and master) of proclaim-
ing to men the blessings of the gospel, 1 Co. ix. 17; 7
oikovopia Tov Oeod, the office of administrator (stewardship)
intrusted by God, Col. i. 25. univ. administration, dis-
pensation, which in a theocratic sense is ascribed to
God himself as providing for man’s salvation: aires
. + 4 oikovopiay Oeod thy ev miore, which furnish matter
for disputes rather than the (knowledge of the) dispen-
sation of the things by which God has provided for and
prepared salvation, which salvation must be embraced
by faith, 1 Tim.i.4 LT Tr WH; iv mpodbero . . . karpar,
which good-will he purposed to show with a view to
(that) dispensation (of his) by which the times (sc. of
infancy and immaturity cf. Gal. iv. 1-4) were to be ful-
filled, Eph. i. 9 sq.; % otk. ris xdpiros Tod Oeod rips dobei-
ons pot, that dispensation (or arrangement) by which
the grace of God was granted me, Eph. iii. 2; 7 oi. rod
pvornpiov, the dispensation by which he carried out his
secret purpose, Eph. iii. 9 GL T Tr WH.*
olkovepos, -ov, 6, (oikos, vépo [‘to dispense, manage ”];
Hesych. 6 rév oixov veudspevos), the manager of a house-
hold or of household affairs; esp. a steward, manager,
superintendent, (whether free-born, or, as was usually
ocKos
the case, a freed-man or slave) to whom the head of
the house or proprietor has intrusted the management
of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and
the duty of dealing out the proper portion to every ser-
vant and even to the children not yet of age: Lk. xii.
42; 1 Co. iv. 2; Gal. iv. 2; the manager of a farm or
landed estate, an overseer, [A. V. steward]: Lk. xvi. 1,
3, 8; 6 olk. THs moAews, the superintendent of the city’s
finances, the treasurer of the city (Vulg. arcarius civitatis) :
Ro. xvi. 23 (of the treasurers or quaestors of kings,
Esth. viii. 9; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7; 11,
6,12, 8,6,4). Metaph. the apostles and other Chris-
tian teachers (see oikovopia) are called oik. pvotnpiav Tod
Ocot, as those to whom the counsels of God have been
committed to be made known to men:
bishop (or overseer) is called oikovépos Ged, of God as
the head and master of the Christian theocracy [see
oixos, 2], Tit. i. 7; and any and every Christian who
rightly uses the gifts intrusted to him by God for the
good of his brethren, belongs to the class called xadot
oikovdpot trockiAns xapitos Geov, 1 Pet. iv. 10. (Aeschyl.,
_ Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; for n3- by Sept. 1 K. iv. 6; xvi.
9,,etc.).*
olkos, -ov, 6, [ef. Lat. vicus, Eng. ending -wich; Cur-
tius § 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless places
for ™3, also for 53°7 a palace, 97k a tent, etc. ; as
a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus
fr. Sduos the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix. 16; ruvds, Mt. ix.
6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 563 vill. 39, 41,
ete.; &pxerOar eis oikovy, to come into a house (domum
venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19); eis rov otkov, into the (i. e. his
or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; €v r@ oikg, in
the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ev oike, at home, 1 Co. xi.
34; xiv. 35; of els rév otkoy (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61;
kar’ oikov, opp. to €v 7 iep, in a household assembly,
in private, [R. V. at home; see card, II. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46;
v. 42; kar’ oikouvs, opp. to dypooia, in private houses,
[A. V. from house to house; see card, II. 3 a.], Acts xx.
20; xara Tovs oikous elamropevdpevos, entering house after
house, Acts vill. 3; 4 Kat’ oikdy Twos exkAnoia, See exkAn-
ala,4b.aa. _b. any building whatever: épropiov, Jn.
ii. 16; mpooevyns, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46;
Tov Baciiéws, Tod apxtepéws, the palace of etc., Mt. xi. 8 ;
Lk. xxii. 54 [here T Tr WH oixia]; tod Geod, the house
where God was regarded as present, —of the tabernacle,
Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; of the temple at Jerusa-
lem, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn. ii. 16 sq.,
(Is. lvi. 5, 7); cf. Lk. xi. 51; Acts vii. 47, 49; of the heay-
enly sanctuary, Heb. x. 21 (otkos Gyos Oeot, of heaven,
Deut. xxvi. 15; Bar. ii. 16); a body of Christians (a
church), as pervaded by the Spirit and power of God, is
called otkos mvevpatikéds, 1 Pet. ii. 5. c. any dwelling-
place: of the human body as the abode of demons that
possess it, Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; (used in Grk. auth. also
of tents and huts, and later, of the nests, stalls, lairs, of
animals). univ. the place where ane has fixed his resi-
dence, one’s setiled abode, domicile: oikos jpav, of the city
of Jerusalem, Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35. 2. by me-
441
1 Co. iv.1; a
olKoupevn
ton. the inmates of a house, all the persons forming one
family, a household: Lk. x. 5; xi. 17 [al. refer this to 1,
and take emi either locally (see émi, C. I. 1), or of succes-
sion (see emi, C. I. 2c.)]; xix.9; Acts vii. 10; x. 2; xi.
14; xvi. 31; xviii. 8; 1 Co.i.16; 1 Tim. iii. 4 sq.; v.4
2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19; Heb. xi. 7; plur., 1 Tim: iii. 12;
Tit. i. 11, (so also Gen. vii. 1; xlvii. 12, and often in
Grk. auth.); metaph. and in a theocratic sense 6 oikos
tov Oeov, the family of God, of the Christian church,
1 Tim. iii. 15; 1 Pet.iv.17; of the church of the Old and
New Testament, Heb. iii. 2, 5 sq. (Num. xii. 7). 3.
stock, race, descendants of one, [A. V. house]: 6 otkos
Aavid, Lk. i. 27, 69; ii. 4, (1 K. xii. 16); otk. "Iopana,
Mt. x.6; xv. 24; Lk.i.33; Acts ii. 36; vii.42; [(6 otk.
"JaxoB), 46 LT Trmrg.]; Heb. viii. 8,10, (Jer. xxxviii.
(xxxi.) 31; Ex. vi. 14; xii. 3; xix.3; 1S. ii. 30; [ef. 6
o¢Bacros otkos, Philo in Flac. § 4]). The word is not
found in the Apocalypse.
[Syn. ofkos, oixta: in Attic (and esp. legal) usage,
vikos denotes one’s household establishment, one’s entire prop-
erty, oikla, the dwelling itself; and in prose ofkos is not used
in the sense of oixta. In the sense of family oixos and oikia
are alike employed; Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 80. In relation to
distinctions (real or supposed) betw. ofxos and oixia the foll.
pass. are of interest (cf. Walckenaer on Hadt. 7, 224): Xen.
oecon. 1,5 ofkos 5€ 5h Ti Soe? juty clvar; dpa dwep oi kia,
® Kal boa tis ew Tis oiklas KéxTnTAL, WavTa TOD ofKOV
TavTé eoTw... wayTa Tov ofkov elvat boa Tis KEKTHTAL.
Aristot. polit. 1, 2 p. 1252", 9 sqq. ek wey ody TobTwy Tay dv0
Kowwviay (viz. of aman with wife and servant) oikia mpérn,
kat op0as ‘Hoiodos eime morhoas “olkov wey mpotioTa yuvaika
Te Boy 7’ aporipa:” 7) Mev ovy eis Tacay juepay cuveoTn-
Kuta Kowwvia kata pvow oixds eorw. ibid. 3 p. 1253°, 2 sqq.
mace Torts €& oiKki@y ovyKErTaL- oiklas dé puépn, cE GY avOs oikia
cuvioratat* oikia d€ TéAcLos ek SovAwy k. cAcvOepwr.... TPaTa
d& Kal eAdxioTa mépy oikias Seomdrys kK. SovAos Kk. Téots K.
éAoxos kK. Tarhp Kk. Téexva etc. Plut. de audiend. poetis § 6 ral
yap Oikdy more mév Thy oiklay Kadovouy, “ olkov és b~dpopov”*
mote St Thy ovotay, “ éoOierat por oikos”: (see oikla, ¢.)
Hesych. Lex. 8. v. oikia: olko:. s.v.olkos: oAlyn oikla
. kat wépos Tt THs oiklas... Kal Ta ev TH oikig. In the
N. T., although the words appear at times to be used with
some discrimination (e. g. Lk. x. 5, 6,7; Acts xvi. 31, 32, 34;
cf. Jn. xiv. 2), yet other pass. seem to show that no distinc-
tion can be insisted upon: e. g. Mt. ix.23; Mk.v.38; Lk. vil.
36) Sis Acts rx 17 (22532) rexvile 5's xix l6s xxi 6 5 me;
125 13s xvinl5); (1'Co.i. 16; xvi.15).]
olkovpéevn, -7s, 7, (fem. of the pres. pass. ptep. fr. olkéw,
[se. yj; cf. W. § 64,5; B. § 123, 8]); 1. the inhab-
ited earth; a. in Grk. writ. often the portion of the
earth inhabited by the Greeks, in distinction from the lands
of the barbarians, cf. Passow ii. p. 415*; [L. and S.s. v.
Te}; b. in the Grk. auth. who wrote about Roman
affairs, (like the Lat. orbis terrarum) i. q. the Roman em-
pire: so maoa 7 otk. contextually i. q. all the subjects of
this empire, Lk. ii. 1. c. the whole inhabited earth,
the world, (so in [Hyperid. Eux. 42 (“ probably ”L. and
S.)] Sept. for ban and ry): LK. iv. 5; xxi. 26; Acts
xxiv.5; Ro. x. 18; Rev. xvi. 14; Heb. 1.6, Greats 7) otk.
Sacephe b. j. 7, 3, 3); 6An 7 ofk., Mt. xxiv. 14; Acts xi.
28, (in the same sense Joseph. antt. 8, 13,4 aca 7 oi«.;
oikoupyos
ef. Bleek, Erklar. d. drei ersten Evv. i. p.68); by meton.
the inhabitants of the earth, men: Acts xvii. 6, 31 (Ps. ix.
9); xix. 27; 7 ofx. 6An, all mankind, Rev. iii. 10; xii.
9: 2. the universe, the world: Sap.i. 7 (alternating
there with ra mavra); 7 otk. 7 péAXovoa, that consum-
mate state of all things which will exist after Christ’s
return from heaven, Heb. ii. 5 (where the word alter-
nates with mdvra and ra ravta, vs. 8, which there is taken
in an absolute sense):*
olkoupyds, -dv, (oikos, EPI'Q [cf. épyov], cf. aumedoupyds,
yewpyos, etc.), caring for the house, working at home: Abs
ii. 5 LT Tr WH;; see the foll. word. Not found else-
where.*
olk-oupds, -ov, 6, 7), (oikos, and ovpos a keeper; see
Gvpwpes and xknroupos) ; a. prop. the (watch or)
keeper of a house (Soph., Eur., Arstph., Paus., Plut.,
al.). b. trop. keeping at home and taking care of
household affairs, domestic: Tit. ii. 5 RG; ef. Fritzsche,
De conformatione N. T. critica ete. p. 29; [W. 100 sq.
(95)]; (Aeschyl. Ag. 1626; Eur. Hec. 1277; capovas,
oikoupovs Kai Puddvdpous, Philo de exsecr. § 4).*
oixre(pw; fut. (as if fr. oikrepéw, a form which does
not exist) as in the Sept. ofkrespynow, for the earlier
oixreipo, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 741; [Veitch s. v.; W.
88 (84); B. 64 (56)]; (fr. otkros pity, and this fr. the
interjection ot, oh /); to pity, have compassion on: twa,
Ro. ix. 15 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Hom., Tragg., Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., Dem., Leian., Plut., Ael.; Sept. for yan and
Dm). [Syn. see édeéa, fin. ]*
olxtippés, -ov, 6, (oikreipw), Sept. for om) (the vis-
cera, which were thought to be the seat of compassion
[see omdayxvov, b.]), compassion, pity, mercy: omdayxva
oixrippov (Rec. oixrippev), bowels in which compassion
resides, a heart of compassion, Col. iii. 12; in the Seript-
ures mostly plural (conformably to the Hebr. oO’),
emotions, longings, manifestations of pity, [ Eng. compas-
sions] (cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq.; [W. 176
(166); B. 77 (67)]), rod cov, Ro. xii. 1; Heb. x. 28;
6 matnp Tay oikr. (gen. of quality [ef. B. § 132,10; W.
237 (222)]), the father of mercies i. e. most merciful,
2 Co. i. 3; joined with omdayyxva, Phil. ii. 1. (Pind.
Pyth. 1, 164.) [Sywn. see édeco, fin. ]*
oixtippwv, -ov, gen. -ovos, (oikreipw), merciful: Lk. vi.
86; Jas. v.11. (Theocr. 15, 75; Anth. 7, 359, 1 [Epigr.
Anth. Pal. Append. 223, 5]; Sept. for o3m>.) = [In
classic Grk. only a poetic term for the more common
Schmidt iii. p. 580.]*
oipar, see olopat.
olvo-rrétNs, -ov, 6, (otvos, and morns a drinker), a wine-
bibber, given to wine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. (Prov.
xxiii. 20; Polyb. 20, 8,2; Anacr. frag. 98; Anthol. 7,
28, 2.)*
olvos, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for j1, also for
wir (must, new wine), WM, ete.; wine; a. prop.:
Mt. ix. 17; [xxvii. 34 Ltxt. T Tr WH]; Mk. xv. 23;
Lk.i.15; Jn. ii. 33, Ro. xiv. 21; Eph.'v.18; 1 Tim. v.
23; Rev. xvii. 2, ete.; otvw mpocexev, 1 Tim. iii. 8; dov-
Aevew, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph.: otvos row Auuov (see
€enpav.”
442
OKTANWEpOS
Ovpés, 2), fiery wine, which God in his wrath is repre-
sented as mixing and giving to those whom he is about
to punish by their own folly and madness, Rev. xiv. 10;
xvi. 19; xix. 15; with rys mopveias added [cf. W. § 30,
3 N.1; B. 155 (136) ], a love-potion as it were, wine excit-
ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices
others to idolatry, Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3 [here Lom. Tr
WH br. oiv.], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers
himself to be enticed, Rev. xvii. 2. c. by meton.
i. q. a vine: Rev. vi. 6.
olvopdvyla, -as, 7, (oivopAvyéw, and this fr. oivopduvé,
which is compounded of ofvos and Ava, to bubble up,
overflow), drunkenness, [A. V. wine-bibbing]: 1 Pet. iv.
3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3,5,15; Polyb.
2,19,4; Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 22 [for other exx. see
Siegfried, Philo ete. p. 102]; Ael. v.h. 3, 14.) [Cf.
Trench § 1xi.]*
olopat, contr. oiua; [fr. Hom. down]; fo suppose,
think: foll. by an ace. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [Tom. vs.];
by the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the
same, Phil. i. 16 (17); by én, Jas. i. 7. [Syn. see
nyeopat, fin. |*
olos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], relat. pron. (correlative
to the demonstr. totos and rotodros), what sort of, what
manner of, such as (Lat. qualis): otos . . . trotovros, 1 Co.
xv. 48; 2Co.x.113 rov avrov... otov, Phil. i. 30; with
the pron. rocodros suppressed, Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. ix. 3;
xiii. 19 [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely
attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for
rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. § 143, 8; W. 148 (140); see
rotovtos, b.]; 2 Co. xii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Rev. xvi. 183
oi@dnmorovy voonpart, of what kind of disease soever, Jn.
v. 4 Lehm. [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.]; in indir.
quest., Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.]; 1 Th. i. 5. ody oiov 8€ dre éx-
némroxev, concisely for od rotov eotiy otov Ort ex. but the
thing (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word
of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God
hath by no means come to nought [A. V. but not as though
the word of God hath ete.], Ro. ix. 6; cf. W. § 64 I. 6;
B. § 150, 1 Rem.*
oiocSyrotoiv, Jn. v. 4 Lehm., see oios.
olcw, see Pepa.
éxvéw, -@: 1 aor. Okvnoa; (Oxvos [perh. allied w. the
frequent. cunc-tari (cf. Curtius p. 708) ] delay); fr. Hom.
down; to feel loath, to be slow; to delay, hesitate: foll. by
an inf. Acts ix. 38. (Num. xxii. 16; Judg. xviii. 9, etc.) *
éxvnpés, -d, -dv, (dxvew), sluggish, slothful, backward :
Mt. xxv. 26; with a dat. of respect [cf. W. § 31, 6 a.;
B. § 133, 21], Ro. xii. 11; ov« dxvnpov poi éort, foll. by
an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1
(ef. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]. (Pind., Soph., Thuc., Dem.,
Theocr., ete.; Sept. for OND.) -
éxratpepos, -ov, (dxT@, Hepa), eight days old; passing
the eighth day: mweptroun [ef. W. § 31,6 a.; B. § 1338, 21;
but Rec. -u7] é«ranpepos, circumcised on the eighth day,
Phil. iii. 5; see terapraios; [‘the word denotes prop.
not interval but duration’ (see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil
l.c.). Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.].*
2 ,
OKT@
oxro, eight: Lk. ii. 21; Jn. xx. 26; Acts ix. 33, etc.
[(From Hom. on.) ]
odcOpevw (Lehm. in Heb. xi. 28), see dA0bpeva.
6d€8ptos, -ov, (in prof. auth. also of three term., as in
Sap. xviii. 15), (GAeOpos), fr. [Hom.], Hdt. down, de-
structive, deadly: Sixnv, 2 Th. i. 9 Lchm. txt.*
dAcOpos, -ov, (GAAvpt to destroy [perh. (Avupr) allied
to Lat. vulnus]), fr. Hom. down, ruin, destruction, death:
1 Th. v. 3; 1 Tim. vi. 9; eis OdeOpov ths capkos, for the
destruction of the flesh, said of the external ills and
troubles by which the lusts of the flesh are subdued and
destroyed, 1 Co. v. 5 [see mapadidw, 2]; i. q. the loss
of a life of blessedness after death, future misery, aiomos
(as 4 Mace. x. 15): 2 Th. i. 9 [where Ltxt. ddr€Opior,
qvy.j-yvel. Sapai.12*
ddAtyomucria, -as, 7, littleness of faith, little faith: Mt.
xvii. 20 LT Tr WH, for RG amoria. (Several times
in eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
dALy6-mirTos, -ov, 6, 7, (6ALyos and riotis), of little faith,
trusting too little: Mt. vi. 30; viii. 26; xiv. 31; xvi. 8;
Lk. xii. 28. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
éAtyos, -7, -ov, [on its occasional aspiration (oA.) see
WH. App. p. 143; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 91, 106; Scrivener,
Introd. p. 565, and reff. s.v. od init.], Sept. for uyn, [fr.
Hom. down], little, small, few, of number, multitude,
quantity, or size: joined to nouns [cf. W. § 20, 1 b. note;
BS. 125, 6); Mt. ix.373)xv..34;, Mk. vi. 53 vili..7 ;, Lk.
x. 25; xii. 48 (dAlyas sc. mAnyas [cf. B. § 134,6; W. § 32,
5, esp. § 64, 4], opp. to woAAai, 47); Acts xix. 24; 1 Tim.
Vas seleb. x10 «Jas: 11. 5 Geel!) Pet. iil. 200RG s
Rev. iii. 4; of time, short: ypovos, Acts xiv. 283; Kawpds,
Rev. xii. 12; of degree or intensity, light, slight: trapayos,
Acts xii. 18; xix. 23; ordows, xv.2; yetwov, XXvil. 20.
plur. w. a partitive gen.: yuvacav, Acts xvii. 4; avdpav,
ib. 12. oAcyou, absol.: Mt. vii. 14; xx.16; [TWH om.
Drbr. the el.};\ xxii. 145) Lk. xiii. 23; 1 Pet. iii. 20 L, T
Tr WH; neut. sing.: Lk. vii. 47; 1d ddlyov, 2 Co. viii.
15; mpos ddLyov @péAtpos, profitable for little (Lat. parum
utilis); [cf. W. 213 (200); some, for a little (sc. time) ;
see below], 1 Tim. iv. 8; ev ddlya, in few words [cf.
Shakspere’s in a few], i. e. in brief, briefly (ypapew),
Eph. iii. 3; easily, without much effort, Acts xxvi. 28 sq.
on other but incorrect interpretations of this phrase cf.
Meyer ad loc. [see péyas, 1 a. y.]; mpds odrcyor, for a little
time, Jas. iv. 14; simply oddéyov, adverbially : of time, a
short time, a (little) while, Mk. vi. 81; 1 Pet. i. 6; v. 10;
Rev. xvii. 10; of space, a little (further), Mk.i.19; Lk.
v. 3. plur. dA/ya, a few things: [Lk. x.41 WH]; Rev.
ii. 14, 20 [Rec.]; em’ odcya ([see init. and] emi, C. I. 2 e.),
Mt. xxv. 21, 23; 8 ddtyor, briefly, in few words, ypa-
dew, 1 Pet. v.12 [see dia, A. III. 3] (pn Ova, Plat. Phil.
p- 31d.; legg. 6 p. 778 ¢.).*
ddryspuxos, -ov, (dAlyos, uyn), faint-hearted: 1 Th.v.
14. (Prov. xiv. 29; xviii. 14; Is. lvii. 15, etc.; Artem.
oneir. 3, 5.)*
oAtywpew, -G; (dAtywpos, and this fr. ddtyos and @pa
care); to care little for, regard lightly, make small account
of: rivos (see Matthiae § 348; [W. § 30, 10d.]), Heb.
443
OXos
xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris-
tot., Philo, Joseph., al.) *
oAlyws, (dA‘yos). adv., a little, scarcely, [R. V. just (es
caping)]: 2 Pet. ii. 18 GLT Tr WH [for Rec. dvras].
(Anthol. 12, 205, 1; [Is. x. 7 Aq.].) *
odoPpeuts [ ec. oA.], -od, 6, (dAobpevw, q. v.), a de-
stroyer; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.*
“dd08pedw and, acc. to a preferable form, édebpevo
(Lchm.; see Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p. 809; cf. Delitzsch,
Com. on Heb. as below; [Td/. Proleg. p. 81; WH. App.
p- 152]); (éde@pos); an Alex. word [W. 92 (88)]; to
destroy: twa, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23; Josh. iii. 10;
vii. 25; Jer. ii. 30; Hag. ii. 22, etc.; [Philo, alleg. ii.
9].) [Comp.: €&ododpeva. | *
oAoKavTwpa, -Tos, TO, (d6AoKavTow to burn whole, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 3, 24; Joseph. antt. 1, 13,1; and this fr. dros
and xavros, for kavoros, verbal adj. fr. caiw, cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 524; [W.33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat.
holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other
victims only a part) of which is burned: Mk. xii. 33;
Heb. x. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for MD; also for NW, Ex.
xxx. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Mace. i. 45;
2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [exc. Philo de
sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 33]; Joseph. antt. 3, 9,1 and 9, 7,
4 says 6\oKavTwots.)*
dAoKAnpia, -as, 7, (dAoKAnpos, q. V.), Lat. integritas;
used of an unimpaired condition of body, in which all
its members are healthy and fit for use; Vulg. integra
sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness]: Acts ili. 16 (joined
with tyieca, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f.; with rov caparos
added, ibid. p. 1047 e.; cf. Diog. Laért. 7,107; corporis
integritas, i. q. health, in Cie. de fin. 5, 14,40; Sept. for
phn, Is. i. 6).*
SA6-KAnpos, -ov, (dos and xAnpos, prop. all that has
fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting
or unsound, complete, entire, whole: ido, untouched by
a tool, Deut. xxvii. 6; Josh. ix. 4 (viii. 31); 1 Mace. iv.
47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of
a priest or of a victim, Philo de vict. § 12; Joseph. antt.
3, 12, 2 [(ef. Havercamp’s Joseph. ii. p. 321)]. Ethi-
cally, free from sin, faultless, [R. V. entire]: 1 Th. v. 23;
plur., connected with réAewe and with the addition of
év pndevi Aecrropevot, Jas. 1.4; complete in all respects, con-
summate, Sukacocvvn, Sap. xv. 3; evoeBera, 4 Mace. xv.
17. (Plat., Polyb., Leian., Epict., al.; Sept. for DIw,
Deut. xxvii. 6; ODA, Lev. xxiii. 15; Ezek. xv. 5.) *
[Syn. dAdKAnpos, TéAecos (cf. Trench § xxii.): ‘in
the 6Aé«Anpos no grace which ought to be in a Christian
man is deficient; in the réAesos no grace is merely in its
weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain
ripeness and maturity.’]
ddoAv{w; an onomatopoetic verb (cf. the similar oipe-
ew, aidCev, ddadd ew, Tuiferv, KoxkvCew, Tite. Com-
pare the Germ. term. -zen, as in grunzen, krdéchzen, dch-
zen), to howl, wail, lament: Jas. v.1. (In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down of a loud ery, whether of joy or of grief;
Sept. tor 5m.) [Syn. ef. «Aate, fin.] *
dos, -7, -ov, Sept. for 03; [fr. Pind. (Hom.) down],
ONOTEANS
whole, (all): with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times
in the N. T., viz. ddAov avOpwmov, In. vii. 23; evavrov
ddov, Acts xi. 26; 6An ‘IepovoaAnp, Xxi. 31; Sceriay dAny,
XXviil. 30; 6dous otkouvs, Tit. i. 11; [to which add, &v
Ans vuktos, Lk. v.5 LT TrWH]. usually placed before
a substantive which has the article: 6n 97 Tadc\aia, Mt.
iv. 23; 6An 7 Supa, 24; xa’ OdAnv tiv modu, Lk. viii.
39; ddov ro capa, Mt. v. 29 sq.; vi. 22. sq.; Lk. xi. 34;
1 Co. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 2, ete.; [6An 9 exxAnola, Ro. xvi.
23 LT Tr WH]; oAny rt. qpépav, Mt. xx. 6; Ro. viii. 36;
dos 6 vduos, Mt. xxii. 40; Gal. v. 3; Jas. ii. 10; €v An
TH xapdia cov, Mt. xxii. 37; €& Ans tr. Kapdias gov, Mk.
xii. 30, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub-
stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B.
§ 125, 6]: 9 wédus Ody, Mk. i. 33; Acts xix. 29 [Rec.];
xxi. 30 —(the distinction which Kriiger § 50, 11, 7 makes,
viz. that 7 6An mods denotes the whole city as opp. to
its parts, but that ody 9 modus and 7 modus 7 GAn denotes
the whole city in opp. to other ideas, as the country, the
fields, etc., does not hold good at least for the N. T.,
where even in 7 70Ats dAy the city is opposed only to its
parts); add the foll. exx.: Mt. xvi. 26; xxvi. 59; Lk.
ix. 25; xi. 364; Jn. iv. 53; Ro. xvi. 23 [RG]; 1 Jn. v.
19 3 "Rev. 11.10% vi. 12°Gai Pe We xs 9 ve
It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that
the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the
whole person or thing under consideration: Mt. xiii. 33;
Lk. xi. 36°; xiii. 21; Jn. ix. 34; xiii. 10, (Xen. mem. 2,
6, 28). Neut. rotdro dé ddov, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4 (where
GLTTrWHom. édov); xxvi. 56; d¢ ddov, through-
out, Jn. xix. 23.
dAorTeAts, -€s, (Gos, TEAos), perfect, complete in all re-
spects: 1 Th. v. 23. (Plut. plac. philos. 5, 21; [Field,
Hexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. 1. 21]; eccles. writ.) *
*Odvprrds [perh. contr. fr. ?OAvpmiddwpos, W. 103 (97) ;
ef. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. 63 sq. 201], -a, [B. 20
(18) ], 6, Olympas, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15.*
ddvvBos, -ov, 6, an unripe fig (Lat. grossus), which grows
during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls
off in the spring [cf. B. D. s.v. Fig]: Rev. vi.13. (Hes.
fr. 14; Hdt. 1, 193; Dioseorid. 1, 185; Theophr. caus.
plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) *
Sdws, (dros), adv., wholly, altogether, (Lat. omnino),
[with a neg. at all]: Mt. v.34 (with which compare Xen.
mem. 1, 2, 35); 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually]; vi. 7; xv.
29. ((Plat., Isocr., al.)]*
opBpos, -ov, 6, (Lat. imber) a shower, i. e. a violent rain,
accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning:
Lk. xii. 54. (Deut. xxxii. 2; Sap. xvi. 16; in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down.) *
Opelpopat [or du., see below] i. q. iuefpouar; to desire,
long for, yearn after, [A. V. to be affectionately desirous | :
twos, 1 Th. ii. 8 GL T Tr WH [but the last read dy., cf.
their App. p. 144 and Lob. Pathol. Element. i. 72], on
the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for
Rec. ivecpdpevor. The word is unknown to the Grk. writ.,
but the commentators ad loc. recognize it, as do Hesychius,
Phavorinus, and Photius, and interpret it by émOupewv. It
444
> ,
Opvuw
is found in Ps. lxii. 2 Symm., and acc. to some Mss. in Job
iii. 21. Acc. to the conjecture of Fritzsche, Com. on Mk.
p- 792, it is composed of 6uod and etpeuw, just as Photius
[p- 831, 8 ed. Porson] explains it ouod jpydoda [so Theo-
phylact (cf. Tdf.’s note)]. But there is this objection,
that all the verbs compounded with duod govern the da-
tive, not the genitive. Since Nicander, ther. vs. 402,
uses peipouat for iveipouat, some suppose that the original
form is pecpopat, to which, after the analogy of céAAw and
xéAX@, either { or 6 is for euphony prefixed in iveip. and
épeip. But as iveipopar is derived from iuepos, we must
suppose that Nicander dropped the syllable i to suit the
metre. Accordingly dueipecOar seems not to differ at all
from iveiper@a, and its form must be attributed to a vul-
gar pronunciation. Cf. [WH. App. p. 152]; W. 101
(95); [B. 64 (56); Ellic. on 1 Th. 1. c.; (Kuenen and
Cobet, N. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].*
6pitێw, -@; impf. apidrouy ; 1 aor. ptep. dudnoas 3 (Spu-
Aos, q-. v-); freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to be in
company with; to asssociate with; to stay with; hence to
converse with, talk with : twi, with one (Dan. i. 19), Acts
xxiv. 26; sc. adrois, Acts xx. 11 [so A. V. talked], unless
one prefer to render it when he had stayed in their com-
pany; mpds twa, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3, 2; Joseph.
antt. 11,6, 11; [ef. W. 212 sq. (200); B.§ 133, 8]); ev 7a
pudetv avrovs Sc. ddAnAots, ibid. 15. [Comp.: cvv-opsréw. |*
Opirla, -as, 7, (G4tA0s), companionship, intercourse, com-
munion: 1 Co. xv. 33, on which see 740s. (Tragg., Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) *
Spiros, -ov, 6, (duds, 6uod, and tAy a crowd, band, [Cur-
tius § 660; Vanicek p. 897; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root mil
‘to be associated,’ ‘ to love’ ]), fr. Hom. down, a multitude
of men gathered together, a crowd, throng: Rev. xviii. 17
Rec.*
optxAn, -ns, 7, (in Hom. duiyAn, fr. duscxyéo to make
water). a mist, fog: 2 Pet. ii. 17G@ LT Tr WH. (Am.
iv. 13; Joel ii. 2; Sir. xxiv. 3; Sap. ii. 4.)*
Sppa, -ros, 7d, (fr. érropat [see dpae ], pf. dupar), fr. Hom.
down, an eye: plur., Mt. xx. 34 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii.
23. (Sept. for ys Prov.-viz 47) vil. Derx. 26.)
épviw (Mt. xxiii. 20sq.; xxvi.74; Heb. vi. 16; Jas. v.
12; [W. 24]) and dpvupe (dpvvva, Mk. xiv.71 GLT Tr
WH (ef. B. 45 (39) ]) form their tenses fr. OMOQ; hence
1 aor. duooa; Sept. for paw}; to swear; to affirm, prom-
ise, threaten, with an oath: absol., foll. by direct discourse,
Mt. xxvi. 74; Mk. xiv. 71; Heb. vii. 21; foll. by ei, Heb.
iii. 11; iv.3; see ed, I.5. dv. épxov (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down [W. 226 (212)]) mpés riva, to one (Hom.
Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk. i. 73; dpuvvecv with dat. of the
person to whom one promises or threatens something
with an oath: foll. by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23; by an inf.
[W. 331 (311)], Heb. iii. 18; with épxw added, Acts ii. 30
[W. 603 (561)]; rwi 71, Acts vii. 17 [Ree. i. e. gen. by at-
traction; cf. B.§ 143, 8; W.§ 24,1]. that by which one
swears is indicated by an acc., rwa or ri (so in class. Grk.
fr. Hom. down [ef. W. § 32, 1 b. y.; B. 147 (128)]), in
swearing to call a person or thing as witness, to invoke,
swear by, (Is. lxv. 16; Joseph. antt. 5, 1,2; 7, 14,5); row
owodupasdov
ovpavor, Thy ynv, Jas. v.12; with prepositions [cf. B.u.s.]:
kata Tivos (see xard, I. 2 a.), Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii.
16; xxxi. 54; 1S. xxviii. 10[Comp.]; Is. xlv. 28; lxii. 8;
Am. iv. 2; Dem. p. 553, 17; 553, 26 [al. dmop.], etc.;
kata Tavtwv @pvve Oeov, Long. past. 4, 16); in imitation
of the Hebr. paw foll. by 3, & run is used [W. 389
(364); B.l.c.; seeév,I.8b.]: Mt. v. 34, 36; xxiii. 16, 18,
20-22; Rev. x. 6; els 714, with the mind directed unto
[W. 397 (371); B. as above; see eis, B. II. 2 a.], Mt. v. 35.*
opobvpasoy (fr. 6uddupos, and this fr. duds and Oupds ;
on advs. in -ddy [chiefly derived fr. nouns, and designating
form or structure] as yrounddy, poutnddy, etc., cf. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one mind, of one accord, (Vulg.
unanimiter [ete.]): Ro. xv. 6; Acts i. 14; ii.463 iv. 24;
vii. 57; viii. 6; xii. 20; xv. 253 xviii. 12; xix. 29, and RG
in ii. 1, (Arstph., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian.,
Sept. Lam. ii.8; Job xvii. 16; Num. xxiv. 24, ete.); with
dmavres [LT WH warres] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in
class. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [ef. ii. 1 above].*
Spoudtw; (duoros, [cf. W. 25]); to be like: Mt. xxiii.
27 LTr txt. WH mrg.; Mk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz-
sche p. 658 sq. ; [on the dat. cf. W.§31,1h.]. Not found
elsewhere. [Comp.: map-opotatw. |*
OporoTrabis, -€s, (duo.os, macxyw), suffering the like with
another, of like feelings or affections: twi, Acts xiv. 15;
Jas. v.17. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 c.; Theophr.
h. pl. 5, 8 (7, 2); Philo, conf. ling. §3; 4 Mace. xii. 13;
yi, i.e. trodden alike by all, Sap. vii. 3; see exx. fr. eccles.
writ. [viz. Ignat. (interpol.) ad Trall. 10; Euseb. h. e. 1,
2,1, (both of the incarnate Logos) |] in Grimm on 4 Mace.
p. 344.) *
Gporos (on the accent cf. [Chandler $$ 384, 385]; W.
52 (51); Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -ota, -ovov, also
of two term. (once in the N. T., Rev. iv.3 R*G LT Tr
WH; cf. W.§ 11,1; [B. 26 (23)]), (fr. duds [akin to Gua
(q- v.), Lat. similis, Eng. same, ete.]), [fr. Hom. down],
like, similar, resembling: a. like i. e. resembling: revi,
in form or look, Jn. ix. 9; Rev. i. 13, 153; ii. 18; iv.
6 sq.; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. WH mrg. dpoiois], 19;
xi. 1; xiii. 2,11; xiv. 14 [but here T WH w. the accus.
(for dat.)]; xvi. 13 Ree.; dpdoe:, in appearance, Rev.
iv. 3; in nature, Acts xvii. 29; Gal. v.21; Rev. xxi. 11, 18;
in nature and condition, 1 Jn. iii. 2; in mode of thinking,
feeling, acting, Mt. xi. 16; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii.
31 sq.; xii. 36, and L WH Tr txt. (see below) in Jn. viii.
553 1.q. may be compared to a thing, so in parables: Mt.
xiii. 31, 33, 44sq. 47; xx. 1; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b.
like i.e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as: dpovov
Tovrots tpdrov, Jude 7; equal in strength, Rev. xiii. 4; in
power and attractions, Rev. xviii. 18; in authority, Mt.
xxil. 39; Mk. xii. 31 [here TWH om. Tr mre. br. 6p.];
in mind and character, tives (cf. W. 195 (183), [ef. § 28,
2}; B.§ 132, 24), Jn. viii.55 R GT Trmrg. (see above).*
Opoorys, -nros, 7, (Guowos), likeness: ka® Gpoudryra, in
ike manner, Heb. iv. 15 [cf. W. 1483 (136)]; xara rv
Ouodtnta (MeAxioedex), after the likeness, Heb. vii. 15.
(Gen. i. 11; 4 Macc. xv. 4 (3); Plat., Aristot., Isoer.,
Polyb., Philo, Plut.) *
445
Ouolwats
Spode, -: fut. ouowow; Pass., 1 aor. dpowwbnv, and
without augm. duorwOny (once Ro. ix. 29 Lmrg. T edd.
2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161]; cf. B. 34 (30); Sturz,
De dial. Maced. ete. p. 124; [ef.] Lob. ad Phryn. p.153);
1 fut. dporwOncopar; (dpo.s); fr. [Hom. and] Hdt. down;
Sept. esp. for 1197; a. to make like: twa tet; pass. to
be or to become like to one: Mt. vi. 8; Acts xiv. 11; Heb.
li. 173; @powwOn 4 Bacid. rdv ovp., was made like, took the
likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Messiah appeared),
Mt. xiii. 24; xviii. 23; xxii.2; opowwOncera (fut. of the
time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1; és 71, to be made
like and thus to become as a thing [i. e. a blending of
two thoughts; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31; B. § 133, 10;
W. § 65, 1 a.], Ro. ix. 29 (3 7093 Ezek. xxxii. 2). b.
to liken, compare: twa tim, or ri tur, Mt. vii. 24 [RG
(see below)]; xi. 16; Mk. iv. 30 R Ltxt.Trmrg.; Lk.
vil. 31; xiii. 18, 20; pass. Mt. vii. [24 LT WH Tr txt.],
26 ; to illustrate by comparison, mas 6pomowpev tiv Bac.
tov Geod, Mk. iv. 30 T WH Tr txt. LLmrg. [Comp.: ag-
Opotdw.]*
Spotwpa, -ros, 7d, (duoidw), Sept. for TIA, 1395, DoY,
V3); prop. that which has been made after the likeness
of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness,
representation: Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; 1 Mace. iii. 48; of the
image or shape of things seen in a vision, Rev. ix. 7 [cf.
W. 604 (562) ] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28, ete. Plato, in Parmen.
p- 132 d., calls finite things opormpara, likenesses as it
were, in which ra mapadelypara, i.e. ai idéat or ra €tdn,
are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas-
much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such
as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: twds, Ro. vi.
53 vill. 3 (on which see odp&, 3 fin. [cf. Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. etc. §§ 69 ¢. note, 78 c.'note]); Phil. ii. 7 (see
popdn); eixdvos, a likeness expressed by an image, i. e.
an image like, Ro. i. 23; émt r@ dpowmpare Tis mapaBacews
*Adau, in the same manner in which Adam transgressed
a command of God [see emi, B. 2 a. n.J, Ro. v. 14. Cf.
the different views of this word set forth by Holsten,
Zum Evangel. des Paulus u. Petrus, p. 437 sqq. and [esp.
for exx.] in the Jahrbiich. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p.
451 sqq., and by Zeller, Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1870, p. 301 sqq. [Syn. cf. eixa@y, fin. ; Schmidt ch. 191.]*
spolws, (dpnoos), adv., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise,
equally, in the same way: Mk.iv. 16 (Tr mrg. br. op.) ; Lk.
HEL sa0373i xis LE Tr Wigs RG LPs
MVINDS KVL: Ins Ve 19s xxi.13\s 1) Peto. 137s vos
Heb. ix. 21; Rev. ii. 15 (for Rec. 6 prod); viii. 12;
potas kai, Mt. xxii. 26; xxvi. 35; Mk. xv. 31 [here Ree.
op. dé kai]; Lk. v. 33; xvii. 23 RGL; xxii. 36; In. vi.
11; 1 Co. vii. 22 RG}; Gpoiws pévros cai, Jude 8; dpotws
dé kai, Mt. xxvii. 41 RG (where T om. L br. 8€ «ai, Tr
br. dé, WH om. 8¢ and br. cai); Lk. v.10; x. 32; 1 Co.
vii. 8 (where Lbr. 8€), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly
restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R T Tr txt. WH
Opotws re kai; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77; [W. 571 (531);
B. § 149, 8]; dpotws preceded by xaOos, Lk. vi. 31.*
Opolwots, -ews, 7, (ouotde ) ; 1. a making like:
opp. to adddoiwars, Plat. rep. 5, 454 ¢. 2. likeness,
OmoAoyéew
(Plat., Aristot., Theophr.) : xa spoiwow Geod, after the
likeness of God, Jas. iii. 9 fr. Gen. i. 26. [Cf. Trench
S-xv.]*
Spodoyéw, -@; impf. apoAdyour; fut. opodoynce ; 1 aor.
copoAdynoa; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ovodoyetrat; (fr. dpo-
Adyos, and this fr. 6udy and Aeyw) ; fr. [Soph. and] Hat.
down ; 1. prop. to say the same thing as another,
i.e. to agree with, assent, both absol. and w. a dat. of the
pers. ; often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; hence 2.
univ. to concede; i. e. a. not to refuse, i. e. to promise:
twit tiv émayyeAiav, Acts vii. 17 LT Tr WH [here R. V.
vouchsafe]; foll. by an object. inf., Mt. xiv. 7 (Plat., Dem.,
Plut., al.). b. not to deny, i. e. to confess; declare:
joined w. ovk dpveicOat, foll. by direct disc. with recitative
ért, Jn. i. 20; foll. by dm, Heb. xi. 13; revi te, drt, Acts
xxiv. 143 to confess, i. e. to admit or declare one’s self
guilty of what one is accused of: ras duaprias, 1 Jn. i. 9
(Sir. iv. 26). 3. to profess (the diff. betw. the Lat.
profiteor [‘to declare openly and voluntarily’] and
confiteor [‘to declare fully,’ implying the yielding or
change of one’s conviction; cf. pro fessio fidei, con fes-'
sio peccatorum] is exhibited in Cic. pro Sest. 51, 109),
i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely, [A. V. generally
confess; on its constr. see B. § 133, 7]: [foll. by an
inf., eidevar Oedv, Tit. i. 16]; revi [ef. B. u.s.; W. § 31, 1£.]
foll. by direct disc. with dre recitative, Mt. vii. 23; one
is said opodoyetv that of which he is convinced and which
he holds to be true (hence 6x. is disting. fr. morevew in
Jn. xii. 42; Ro. x. 9sq.): pass. absol., with ordpare (dat.
of instrum.) added, Ro. x. 10; ri, Acts xxiii. 8; teva with
a predicate ace. [B. u. s.], avrov Xpiordv, Jn. ix. 22; Kd-
prov (pred. acc.) "Incovv, Ro. x. 9 [here WH ro papa...
ore xupeos etc., L mrg. Tr mrg. simply 67 ete. ; again with
dre in 1 Jn. iv. 15]; “Incodv Xp. ev capki eAndvOdta [Tr
mrg. WH mrg. éAnAvOeva], 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Ree. also in
3 [see below]; épydpuevoy ev capxi, 2 Jn. 7, [cf. B. u. s.;
W. 346 (324) ]; rua, to profess one’s self the worshipper
of one, 1 Jn. iv. 3 [here WH mrg. Aver, cf. Westcott, Epp.
of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and GL T Tr WH in ii. 23; év with
a dat. of the pers. (see év, I. 8c.), Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8;
with cognate acc. giving the substance of the profession
[ef. B.§ 131,5; W. § 32, 2], éuodoyiay, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also
foll. by mepi revos, Philo de mut. nom. § 8) ; 76 dvoid Tivos,
to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be
the name of a follower of me, Rey. iii. 5G@LT Tr
lg 4. Acc. toa usage unknown to Grk. writ. to
praise, celebrate, (see eEopodroyéw, 2; [B. § 133, 7]): rivi,
Heb. xiii. 15. [Comp.: av6-(-yar), é&opodoyéw. | *
Gpodroyla, -as, 7, (Guoroyéw, q. v- [cef. W. 85 (34)]), in
the N. T. profession [R. V. uniformly con fession]; a.
subjectively: apyteoéa tHe Spor. 7uwr, i. e. Whom we pro-
fess (to be ours), Heb. iii. 1 [but al. refer this to b.]. b.
objectively, profession [confession ] i.e. what one professes
{confesses!: Heb. iv. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 12 (see duodoyéa, 3) ;
13 (see paprupéw, a. p. 391°); rs éAmidos, the substance
of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Heb. x.
23; eis rd evayyéAtoy Tov Xpicrod, relative to the gospel,
2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, for the obedience ye render to what
446
’ /
overdic wos
ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. 9 eis rov rev Beod
Xpworov dpodoyia, Justin M. dial. c. Tryph. c.47,— a con-
str. occasioned perhaps by 9 efs rov Xptorov wiotes, Col. ii.
5; [cf. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hdt., Plat., al.)]*
Gporoyoupévws, (dpodoyew), adv., by consent of all, con-
Sessedly, without controversy: 1 Tim. iii. 16. (4 Mace.
vi. 31; vii. 16; xvi. 1; in prof. auth. fr. Thuc., Xen., Plat.
down; with imé ravrwv added, Isocr. paneg. § 33, where
see Baiter’s note.)*
Opdtexvos, -ov, (duds and réyyn), practising the same
trade or craft, of the same trade: Acts xviii. 3. (Hdt. 2,
89; Plat., Dem., Joseph., Leian., al.) *
spot, (duds), [fr. Hom. down], adv., together: Jn. iv.
36; xx. 4; eivat dod, of persons assembled together,
Acts ii. 1 L T Tr WH; xx. 18 Lehm.; Jn. xxi. 2. [Syn.
see dya, fin. ]*
Gpow, see duvio.
Opoppwv, -ov, (duds, ppyv), of one mind, [A. V. like
minded], concordant: 1 Pet. iii. 8. (Hom., Hes., Pind.,
Arstph., Anthol., Plut., al.) *
Opes, (duds), fr. Hom. down, yet; it occurs twice in
the N. T. out of its usual position [ef. W. § 61, 5f.; B.
§ 144, 23], viz. in 1 Co. xiv. 7, where resolve thus: ra
ayuxa, xairep hovnv diddrra, dpws, éav SiacroAny.. . mas
kt. instruments without life, although giving forth a
sound, yet, unless they give a distinction in the sounds,
how shall it be known etc., Fritzsche, Conject. spec. i.
p- 52; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W. 344 (323)]; again, dps
avOparov ... ovdeis aberet for dvOpamov xexvp. d:abnKnr,
kainep avOpamov ovcav, duws ovdeis xr. a man’s estab-
lished covenant, though it be but a man’s, yet no one
etc. Gal. iii. 15; dpws pevrot, but yet, nevertheless, [cf.
W. 444 (413)], Jn. xii. 42.*
ovap, rd, (an indecl. noun, used only in the nom. and
acc. sing.; the other cases are taken from oveipés), [fr.
Hom. down], a dream: xar’ évap, in a dream, Mt. i. 20;
ii. 12 sq. 19, 22; xxvii. 19,—a later Greek phrase, for
which Attic writ. used évap without xara [q. v. II. 2];
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 422 sqq.; [Photius, Lex. p. 149,
25 sq. ].*
dvaptov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of dvos; cf. [W. 24 and] y-
vatkapiov), a little ass: Jn. xii. 14. (Machon ap. Athen.
13 p. 582¢.; [Epictet. diss. 2, 24, 18].) *
oveSitw ; impf. aveidiCov; 1 aor. dveidioa; pres. pass.
ovetdiCopar; (dvedos, q. v-); fr. Hom. down; Sept. esp.
for 1 ; to reproach, upbraid, revile; [on its constr. cf.
W. § 32,1b.8.; B.§ 133, 9]: of deserved reproach, tiva,
foll. by dru, Mt. xi. 20; ri (the fault) rivos, foll. by dre,
Mk. xvi. 14. of unjust reproach, to revile: revd, Mt. v. 11;
Mk. xv. 32; Lk. vi. 22; Ro. xv. 3 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10;
pass. 1 Pet. iv. 14; foll. by 6r, 1 Tim. iv. 10 RG Tr mrg.
WH mrg.; 76 airo dveidiCov adtév (Rec. aire), Mt. xxvii.
44 (see avrds, III.1). to upbraid, cast (favors received)
in one’s teeth: absol. Jas. i. 5; pera ro Sovvae pup oveidiCe,
Sir. xli. 22, ef. xx. 14; tii cwrnpiay, deliverance obtained
by us for one, Polyb. 9, 31, 4.*
oveBtopds, -ov, 6, (dvetdi¢w), [cf. W. 24], a reproach.
Ro. xv. 3; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Heb. x. 33; 6 dvecdtopos rod Xpr
éveldos
grou i.e. such as Christ suffered (for the cause of God,
from its enemies), Heb. xi. 26; xiii. 13; cf. W. 189 (178).
(Plut. Artax. 22; [Dion. Hal.]; Sept. chiefly for 7991.) *
dveibos, -ous, Td, (fr. dvopat to blame, to revile), fr. Hom.
down, reproach ; i. q. shame: Lk. i. 25. (Sept. chiefly for
737M; three times for m92 disgrace, Is. xxx. 3; Mich.
ii. 6; Prov. xviii. 6) laa
"Ovycipos, -ov, 6, (i. e. profitable, helpful; fr. dvnats
profit), Onesimus, a Christian, the slave of Philemon:
Philem. 10; Col. iv. 9. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. Intr. § 4;
Hackett in B. D.]*
"Ovneipopos, -ov, 6, [i. e. ‘ profit-bringer’], Onesiphorus,
the name of a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19.*
dvikés, -7, -dv, (dvos), of or for an ass: pvAos dvikés i. e.
turned by an ass (see pvAos, 1), Mk. ix. 42 LT Tr WH;
Lk. xvii. 2 Rece.; Mt. xviii. 6. Not found elsewhere.*
ovivype: fr. Hom. down; to be useful, to profit, help,
(Lat. juvo); Mid., pres. dvivauar; 2 aor. dyyuny (and later
avapny, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12 sq.; Kiihner § 343s. v.,
i. p. 880; [Veitch s. v.]), optat. dvaiuzny; to receive profit
or advantage, be helped [or have joy, (Lat. juvor )]: twos,
of one, Philem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh.
in the Scriptures only in Sir. xxx. 2.) *
Svopa, -ros, td, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p.
1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but
see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the
name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis-
tinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names,
Mk. iii. 16; vi.14; Acts xiii. 8, etc.; ray dmooréAwy Ta
évépara, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; dvOpwros or avipp @ dvopa,
mos 7 Ov. , sc. Hv, named, foll. by the name in the nom.
[ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26 sq.; ii. 25; viii. 41; xxiv.
13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11,1); 05 [Lo] ro
dvopa, Mk. xiv. 32; cai rd dv. avrov, avtis, etc., Lk. i. 5, 27;
dvopa avT@ sc. Hv or eoriv [B.u.s.], Jn. i.6; iii. 1; xviii. 10;
Rev. vi. 8; ovopuart, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a.
3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x.
38; xvi. 20; xxiii. 50; Acts v. 1, 34; viii. 9; ix. 10-12, 33,
BIOS 35 UG se, PASS aah, ISIS orqials I aIChS oat, GY: B aahn, BY,
DAs XK 2A EKKO eK LO) eXVIL. 1 KX VAIN) Never Ix
11, (Xen. anab. 1, 4, 11); rovvopua (i. e. Td dvopa), acc.
absol. [B. § 131,12; cf. W. 230 (216)], i.e. by name, Mt.
xxvii. 57; dvoua pou sc. éoriv, my name is, Mk. v. 9; Lk.
Vili. 30, (Odres enol y Svoua, Hom. Od. 9, 366); éxew dvopa,
foll. by the name in the nom., Rev. ix. 11; caXeiv 7d 6voua
tivos, foll. by the acc. of the name, see cadێw, 2.a.; Kadeiv
twa ovopati tim, Lk. i. 61; dvopart kadovpevos, Lk. xix. 2;
kadev tiva enit@ ov. Lk. i. 59 (see emi, B. 2 a. n. p. 233") ;
kar’ dvoua (see card, II. 3 a.y. p. 328°); ra dvopara tpav
eypahn [evyéyparrae T WH Tr] ev rots ovpavois, your
names have been enrolled by God in the register of the
citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20; 16 ¢vopa
twos (eypapn) €v BiBAw (rH BiBAiw) Cons, Phil. iv. 3;
Rev. xiii. 8; emt rd BiBAlov ris ¢. Rev. xvii. 8; ékBaddew
(q. v. 1 h.) 16 dvoua Tivos @s rovnpor, since the wicked-
ness of the man is called to mind by his name, Lk. vi.
225 émixadetoat TO dvoua Tod Kupiov, See émixadew, 5; emt
KEKANTaL TO Ovopd TWos Eri Tia, See émtk. 2; dvopara (dvopza)
447
Vv
ovopa
Braodnpias i.q. Braodnpa (-pov) (ef. W. § 34, 3 b.; B.
§ 132, 10], names by which God is blasphemed, his maj-
esty assailed, Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see yéuo]. so
used that the name is opp. to the reality: dvopa éxets,
Gre Cis, Kat vexpos ei, thou art said [A. V. hast a name] to
live, Rev. iii. 1 (dvoua efyev, as em AOnvas éhavver, Hdt.
7,138). i.q. title: mept dvopatrav, about titles (as of the
Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; xAnpovopeiv dvopa, Heb. i. 4;
xapicerOai Tit Svopa tt, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title 6 xvpios
is meant [but erit. txts. read rd dvoza etc., which many
take either strictly or absolutely; cf. Meyer and Bp.
Lghtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]); spec. a title
of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer]; ép
T® ovopatt Ingov, in devout recognition of the title con-
ferred on him by God (i.e. the title 6 xvpios), Phil. ii. 10
[but the interp. of évoua here follows that of évoya in
vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Lghtft., and cf. W. 390
(365) ]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistic the name
is used for everything which the name covers, everything
the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by
mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for
one’s rank, authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel=
lences, deeds, etc.; thus, eis dvopa mpopytov, out of regard
for [see eis, B. II. 2 d.] the name of prophet which he
bears, i. q. because he is a prophet, Mt. x. 41; Bamrifew
Twa €is dvopa Twos, by baptism to bind any one to recog-
nize and publicly acknowledge the dignity and authority
of one [cf. Bamri¢w, II. b. (aa.)], Mt. xxviii.19; Acts viii.
16; xix.5; 1Co.i. 13,15. to doa thing év ovopari twos,
i. e. by one’s command and authority, acting on his behalf,
promoting his cause, [cf. W. 390 (365); B. § 147, 10]; as,
6 €pxopevos ev ovopate Kupiov (fr. Ps. exvil. (exviii.) 26),
of the Messiah, Mt. xxi. 9 ; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii.
35; xix. 38; Jn. xii. 13; év 7@ dvopate Tov matpos pou, Jn.
v.43; x. 25; év To dvopatt To Idi, of his own free-will
and authority, Jn. v.43; todoa thing ev r@ dv. of Jesus,
Acts x. 48; 1Co. v. 4; 2 Th. iii. 6; and LT Tr WHin
Jas. v. 10 [but surely «. here denotes God ; cf. 2 f. below].
Acc. to a very freq. usage in the O. T. (ef. 717M dw), the
name of God in the N.'T. is used for all those qualities
which to his worshippers are summed up in that name,
and by which God makes himself known to men; it is
therefore equiv. to his divinity, Lat. numen, (not his na-
ture or essence as it is in itself), the divine majesty and
perfections, so far forth as these are apprehended, named,
magnified, (cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 993; Oeh-
ler in Herzog x. p. 196 sqq.; Wittichen in Schenkel iv.
p- 282 sqq.); so in the phrases Gyov rd Gvopa adrod sc.
éoriv, Lk. 1.49; dyudew 7d dv. rod Oeod, Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xi.
2; dpodoyetv T@ dv. avtov, Heb. xiii. 15; Waddew, Ro. xv.
9; do0€dew, Jn. xii. 28; [Rev. xv. 4]; havepody, yuwpi-
Ce, Jn. xvii. 6, 26; hoBetcOat 76 dv. Tov Geod, Rev. xi. 18;
xv.4[GLT Tr WH]; dcayyedrew, Ro. ix. 17 ; amayyéa-
Aew, Heb. ii. 12; BAaogdnpeiv, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 1; Rev.
xiii. 6; xvi. 9; dyamny evdeixvvcba Eis TO dv. Tod Beod, Heb.
vi. 10; rnpnoov aitovs €v T@ dvdparti gov, @ (by attraction
for 6 [cf. B. § 143, 8 p. 286; W. § 24, 1; Ree. incorrectly
ods ]) d€daxds uot, keep them consecrated and united te
Ovopa
thy name (character), which thou didst commit to me to
declare and manifest (cf. vs. 6), Jn. xvii. 11; [ef. dmép rod
dyiou dvopatos Gov, ov KaTerKnvwcas ev Tais Kapdias Huar,
‘Teaching’ ete. ch. 10,2]. After the analogy of the pre-
ceding expression, the name of Christ (Incod, Invov Xpic-
Tov, Tod KUpiov "Ino., Tov Kupiov Nuay, etc.) is used in the
N.T. of all those things which, in hearing or recalling that
name, we are bidden to recognize in Jesus and to profess,
accordingly, of his Messianic dignity, divine authority,
memorable sufferings, in a word the peculiar services and
blessings conferred by him on men, so far forth as these
are believed, confessed, commemorated, [cf. Westcott on
the Epp. of Jn. p. 232]: hence the phrases evayyedi¢e-
oOa Ta wept Tov dv.’I. Xp. Acts viii. 12; peyadvvew 76 dv.
Acts xix. 17; r@ dvop. [Ree. év r. dv.] abrod eAri¢ew, Mt.
xii. 21 [B. 176 (153)]; meorevew, 1 Jn. iii. 235 mor. eis
To ov., Jn. i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1 Jn. v. 13" [Ree., 13°];
miotts Tov dv. Actsiii. 16; 6 dvopatwv Td dvoua Kupiov, who-
ever nameth the name of the Lord sc. as his Lord (see
dvopdato, a.), 2 Tim. ii. 19; kpareiv, to hold fast i. e. per-
severe in professing, Rev. ii. 13; ov« dpvetaOa, Rev. iii.
8: 7d dv. "Incod évdokalera ev tpiv, 2 Th.i. 12; Bacratew
TO dv. evarov evar (see Bactafw, 3), Acts ix.15; to do
or to suffer anything emi r@ dvopare Xp. see eri, B. 2 a. B.
p- 232. The phrase év 7g dvéuare Xp. is used in various
senses : a. by the command and authority of Christ:
see exx. just above. b. in the use of the name of Christ
i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance,
Mk. ix. 38 Re L T Tr WH (see f. below); Lk. x. 17;
Acts iii. 6; iv. 10; xvi. 18; Jas. v.14; univ. ev rol@ dvdpa-
Tu émouoate tovto; Acts iv. 7. c. through the power
of Christ’s name, pervading and governing their souls,
Mk. xvi. 17. d. in acknowledging, embracing, prafess-
ing, the name of Christ: c@Onvat, Acts iv. 12; ScxarwOqvae,
1 Co. vi. 11; Conv éyewv, Jn. xx. 31; in professing and pro-
claiming the name of Christ, mappnovagerOa, Acts ix. 27,
28 (29). e. relying or resting on the name of Christ,
rooted (so to speak) in his name, i. e. mindful of Christ:
movetv tt, Col. iii. 17 ; evxapioretv, Eph. v. 20; aireiy t1, i.e.
(for substance) to ask a thing, as prompted by the mind of
Christ and in reliance on the bond which unites us to him,
Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; xv. 16; xvi. 24, [26], and RG Lin 23;
cf. Ebrard, Gebet im Namen Jesu, in Herzog iv. 692 sqq.
G od is said to do a thing év dv. Xp. regardful of the name
of Christ, i. e. moved by the name of Christ, for Christ’s
sake, d:ddva: the thing asked, Jn. xvi. 23 T Tr WH; zep-
Tew TO TvEvpa TO Gy. JN. Xiv. 26. f. év dvduare Xpiorod,
[A. V. for the name of Christ] (Germ. auf Grund Namens
Christi), i. e. because one calls himself or is called by the
name of Christ: dvedi¢erOat, 1 Pet. iv. 14 (equiv. to as
Xpioriavds, 16). The simple dat. r@ dv. Xp. signifies by
the power of Christ’s name, pervading and prompting
souls, Mt. vii. 22; so also r@ dvduare rod Kupiov (i. e. of
God) dadeiv, of the prophets, Jas. v.10 RG; ré dv. cov,
by uttering thy name as a spell, Mk. ix. 38 R*tbe G (see
b. above). eis 7d dvopa Tod Xpiorod cvvayeoOat is used of
those who come together to deliberate concerning any
matter relating to Christ’s cause, (Germ. auf den Na-
448
OVTaS
men), with the mind directed unto, having regard unto,
his name, Mt. xviii. 20. évexev roo dv. [A. V. for my
name’s sake], i.e. on account of professing my name, Mt.
xix. 29; also 61a 7d dv. wou, adrod, etce.: Mt. x. 22; xxiv.
9; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. xxi. 17; Jn. xv. 21; 1Jn. ii. 12; Rev.
ii. 3. 81a rod dv. Tod Kup. mapaxadeiv twa, to beseech one
by employing Christ’s name as a motive or incentive [ef.
W. 381 (357)], 1 Co. i. 10; by embracing and avowing
his name, apeow duapriay NaBeiv, Acts x.43. tmép rod ov.
avtou, i.q. for defending, spreading, strengthening, the au-
thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. 16; xv. 26;
xxi. 13; Ro.i.5; 3 Jn. 7; — [but ace. to the better txts.
in Acts v. 41; 3 Jn. 7, 76 dvoua is used absolutely, the
Name, se. kupiov, of the Lord Jesus; so cod. Vat. Jas. v.
14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad
Eph. 3,1; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (553). So Bp.
Lghtft. in Phil. ii. 9; (see 1 above)]. pds 76 dvona Inood
tov Naf. evavria mpaéa, Acts xxvi. 9. 3. In imita-
tion of the Hebr. nyaw (Num. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43;
xxvi. 53), the plur. dvduara is used i.q. persons reckoned
up by name: Actsi. 15; Rev. iii.4; xi. 13. 4. Like
the Lat. nomen, i.q. the cause or reason named : év to dvd
pate TovT@, in this cause. i. e. on this account, sc. because
he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L T Tr WH [al.
more simply take ov. here as referring to Xpuoriavds pre-
v
ceding]; év évdpart, ore (as in Syriac 9 [soas) Xpirrov
éore, in this name, i. e. for this reason, because ye are
Christ’s (disciples), Mk. ix. 41.
ovopatw; 1 aor. avduaca; Pass., pres. dvouagowar; 1
aor. avouacOnv; (dvoua); fr. Hom. down; to name [cf.
W. 615 (572) ]; a. TO Ovowa, to name i. e. to utter:
pass. Eph. i. 21; rov kupiov [Rec. Xpiorod], the name of
the Lord (Christ) sc. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (Sept.
for iM DW Vin, to make mention of the name of Jeho-
vah in praise, said of his worshippers, Is. xxvi. 13; Am.
vi. 10); 76 dvoua “Inood emi twa, Acts xix. 13, see ézi,
C.I.1c¢. p. 234° mid. b. rua, with a proper or an
appellative name as pred. acc., fo name, i. e. give name
to, one: Lk. vi. 13 sq.; pass. to be named, 1. e. bear the
name of, 1 Co. v.11; é« w. gen. of the one from whom
the received name is derived, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. Il. 10,
68; Xen. mem. 4, 5, 12). Cc. twa or ri, to utter the
name of a person or thing: dmov avonacbn Xpiords, of
the lands into which the knowledge of Christ has been
carried, Ro. xv. 20 (1 Mace. iii. 9); dvouagerOa of things
which are called by their own name because they are
present or exist (as opp. to those which are unheard
of), 1 Co. v. 1 Rec.; Eph. v.3. [Comp.: é-ovoyd¢a. ] *
dvos, -ov, 0, 7, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for Winn and
pms, an ass: Lk. xiv. 5 Rec.; Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15;—
6) Lake X11 15 39, Mt eed 25, Tt
évrws (fr. dv; on advs. formed fr. pteps. cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. § 115 a. Anm. 3; Kiihner § 335 Anm. 2), adv.,
truly, in reality, in point of fact, as opp. to what is pre-
tended, fictitious, false, conjectural: Mk. xi. 32 [see
éyo, I. 1 £.]; Lk. xxiii. 47; xxiv. 34; Jn. viii. 36; 1 Co.
xiv. 25; Gal. iii. 21 and Ree. in 2 Pet. ii. 18; 6, 9, ro
dos
bvras foll. by a noun, that which és truly ete., that which
is indeed, (ra dvrws dyada 7 Kkada, Plat. Phaedr. p.
260 a.; rHv dvTws Kal adnOas dir{ay, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e.;
vi dvras Bacweis, Joseph. antt. 15, 3,5): as 7 dvrws (Ree.
aiavos) Con, 1 Tim. vi. 19; 9 évrws xnpa, a widow that
is a widow indeed, not improperly called a widow (as
mapOévos ) Ae yowery xnpa, i.e. a virgin that has taken
a vow of celibacy, in Ign. ad Smyrn. 13 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. in
loc.]; cf. Baur, Die sogen. Pastoralbriefe, p. 46 sqq-),
1 Tim. v. 3, 5,16. (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq. ;
Sept. for 0398, Num. xxii. 37; for j3s, Jer. iii. 23; for
qx, Jer. x. 19.)*
0s, -eos (-ovs), Td, (d&ts), vinegar (Aeschyl., Hip-
pocr., Arstph., Xen., sqq.; for yon, Ruth ii. 14; Num.
vi. 3, ete.); used in the N. T. for Lat. posca, i. e. the
mixture of sour wine or vinegar and water which the
Roman soldiers were accustomed to drink: Mt. xxvii.
34 RLumrg., 48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix.
29 sq.*
dfts, -eia, -v, [allied w. Lat. acer, acus, ete.; cf. Curtius
§ 2]; 1. sharp (fr. Hom. down) : foydaia, dpema-
vov, Rev. i. 16; ii. 12; xiv. 14, 17 sq.; xix. 15, (Is. v.
28; Ps. lvi. (Ivii.) 5). 2. swift, quick, (so fr. Hdt.
5,9 down; cf. dkvs fleet): Ro. iii. 15 (Am. ii. 15; Prov.
xii. 29).*
63h, -7s, 9, (perh. fr. éy [root dm (see dpaw); ef. Cur-
tius § 627]), prop. through which one can see (Pollux { 2,
53 p. 179] om, de fs eotw ideiv, cf. Germ. Luke, Loch
[?]), an opening, aperture, (used of a window, Cant. v.
4): of fissures in the earth, Jas. iii. 11 (Ex. xxxiii. 22);
of caves in rocks or mountains, Heb. xi. 38 [here R. V.
holes]; Obad. 8. (Of various other kinds of holes and
openings, in Arstph., Aristot., al.) *
dmv, (see dricw), adv. of place, from behind, on the
back, behind, after: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v.27; Lk. viii. 44;
Rev. iv. 6; v. 1 (on which see ypdado, 3). As a prepo-
sition it is joined with the gen. (like eumpoober, eEwOer,
etc. [W. § 54, 6; B. § 146, 1]):, Mt. xv. 23; Lk. xxiii.
26; [Rev.i.10 WH mrg.]. (From Hom. down; Sept.
for "Ns, sometimes for 7\m8.) *
éricw, ([perh.] fr. 9 éms; and this fr. érw, éropat, to
follow [but cf. Vaniéek p. 530]), adv. of place and time,
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 78, Wns and esp. for ns;
(at the) back, behind, after; 1. adverbially of
place: éorava, Lk. vii. 38; émorpéya dricw, back,
Mt. xxiv. 18 (imoorpédew dmicw, Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 3);
ta omiaw, the things that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 (14);
eis Ta Oniaw amépyecOat, to go backward, Vulg. abire re-
trorsum, Jn. xviii. 6 ; to return home, of those who grow
recreant to Christ’s teaching and cease to follow him,
Jn. vi. 66; orpeperOa, to turn one’s self back, Jn. xx.
14; emorpepew, to return back to places left, Mk. xiii.
16; Lk. xvii. 31; imoorpéwat eis Ta dricw, trop., of those
who return to the manner of thinking and living already
abandoned, 2 Pet. ii. 21 Lchm.; Brémew (Vulg. [aspicere
or] respicere retro [A. V. to look back]}), Lk. ix. 62. Z:
By a usage unknown to Grk. auth., as a prep. with the
gen. [W. § 54,6; B.§ 146,1]; a. of place: Rev.
449
o7TTOU
i. 10 [WH mrg. émodev]; xii. 15, (Num. xxv. 8; Cant.
ii. 9); in phrases resembling the Hebr. [cf. W. 30; B.
u. s. and 172 (150)]: dmiow twds epxeoOar to follow any
one as a guide, to be his disciple or follower, Mt. xvi-
24; Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34 RL Trmrg. WH; [cf. Lk
xiv. 27]; also dxodovbeiv, Mk. viii. 34 GT Tr txt.; Mt.
x. 38, (see axodovOew, 2 fin.) ; mropeverOar, to join one’s
self to one as an attendant and follower, Lk. xxi. 8 (Sir.
xlvi. 10); to seek something one lusts after, 2 Pet. ii.
10 [cf. W. 594 (553); B. 184 (160)]; dmépyoua orice
twés, to go off in order to follow one, to join one’s party,
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; to run after a thing which one
lusts for [ef. B. u. s.], érépas wapxds, Jude 7; Seite driow
pov (see dedre, 1), Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17; daooréANew
twa oniow twos, Lk. xix. 14; adiotavat, dnoonav twa
ériow avtov, to draw one away to (join) his party, Acts
v.37; xx. 30; éxrpemeoOa, to turn out of the right path,
turn aside from rectitude, 1 Tim. v. 15; by a pregnant
construction, after @avpdgew, to wonder after i. e. to be
drawn away by admiration to follow one [B. 185 (160
sq-)], Rev. xiii. 3 (a@s 6 ads eLearn dmiow adtov, 1S.
xiii. 7); Umaye driow pov, [A. V. get thee behind me], out
of my sight: Lk. iv.8 RLbr.; Mt. iv. 10 [GLbr.];
xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. b. of time, after: ¢pyecOa
ériow tivds, to make his public appearance after (sub-
sequently to) one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27,
30, (dmicw tov caBBarov, Neh. xiii. 19).*
omAitw: [1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. érAlicacGe] ;
(6mdov); fr. Hom. down; to arm, furnish with arms;
univ. fo provide; mid. ti, to furnish one’s self with a thing
(as with arms); metaph. rv aityy evvoiay érAicacde,
[A. V. arm yourselves with i. e.| take on the same mind,
1 Pet. iv. 1 (@pdaos, Soph. Electr. 995). [Comp.: xad-
oie. | *
étAov [allied to érw, Lat. sequor, socius, ete.; Curtius
§ 621], -ov, 7d, as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, any tool
or implement for preparing a thing, (like the Lat. arma) ;
hence 1. plur. arms used in warfare, weapons:
Jn. xviii. 3; 2 Co. x.4; metaph. ris Sccacoovrns, which
74 Sux. furnishes, 2 Co. vi. 7; tov dards, adapted to the
light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 12 [here L mrg.
épya]. 2. an instrument: dma adixias, for commit-
ting unrighteousness, opp. to éAa dixacoovrns, for prac-
tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.*
dtrotos, -ola, -oiov, (zoios w- the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down],
of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13;
Gal. ii. 6; 1 Th. i. 9; Jas. i. 24; preceded by rotodros,
[such as], Acts xxvi. 29.*
ométe, (dre w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down], when [ef.
B. § 139, 84; W. § 41 b. 3]: Lk. vi. 3 RGT (where L
Tr WH ére).*
érov, (from aod and the rel. 6), [from Hom. down],
where ; 1. adv. of place, a. in which place,
where ; a. in relative sentences with the Indica-
tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place;
as, emi THs yqs, drov etc. Mt. vi. 19; add, ib. 20; xiii. 5;
xxviii. 6; Mk. vi. 55; ix. 44, 46, [which verses T WII
om. Tr br.], 48; Lk. xii. 33; Jn. i. 28; iv. 20, 46; vi. 23;
OnTdVYH
wii. 42; x. 40; xi.30; xii.1; xviii. 1,20; xix. 18, 20, 41;
xx. 12; Acts xviil.1; Rev. xi.8; xx.10. it refers to
€xeé or exeioe to be mentally supplied in what precedes
or follows: Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Mk. ii. 4; iv. 15; v. 40;
xili. 14; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 62; vil. 345 xi.32> xiv.3; xvii.
24° xx119 Ro. xv. 20s; Heb. a6 sox. 185 cRev. 1.13.
it refers to éxet expressed in what follows: Mt. vi. 21;
Lk. xii. 34; xvii. 37; Jn. xii. 26; Jas. iii.16. in imita-
tion of the Hebr. Dw-IwWN (Gen. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10,
etc.) : Srov ékei, Rev. xii. 6 [GT Tr WH], 14, (see éxei,
a.); Grou... em aitav, Rey. xvii. 9. dzov also refers
to men, so that it is equiv. to with (among) whom, in
whose house: Mt. xxvi. 57; [add, Rev. ii. 13; ef. W. § 54,
7 fin.]; in which state (viz. of the renewed man), Col. iii.
11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which
it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. whereas],
2 Pet. ii. 11 (in the same sense in indir. quest., Xen.
mem. 3, 5, 1). dmou av, wherever, —with impf. indic.
(see ay, IT. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [Tdf. eav]; with aor. sub-
junc. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mk. ix. 18 (where L T Tr WH ézrov
eav); Mk. xiv. 9 [here too T WH 6r. éav]; also dmov éav
(see éeav, II.), Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14*, (in
both which last pass. L Tr érov dv); with subj. pres.
Mt. xxiv. 28. B. in indir. questions [yet cf. W. § 57,
2 fin.], with subjunc. aor.: Mk. xiv. 14”; Lk. xxii.
iat b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a
place instead of dma, into which place, whither, (see
exei, b.): foll. by the indic., Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36;
xiv.4; xxi. 18; [Jas. iii. 4 T Tr WH (see below) ]; dzrov
av, where(whither)soever, w. indic. pres., Rev. xiv. 4 L
Tr WH (ef. below], cf. B. § 139, 30; with subjune. pres.,
Lk. ix.57 RG T WH [al. és. eav, see below]; Jas. iii. 4
{[RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RGT (see above); dzov édy, w.
subjunc. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 24,
It gets the force of a conditional particle if (in case
that, in so far as, [A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 11 above) ]) :
1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 43, 1, and often in Grk.
writ.; cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. ii. 14; Meyer on 1 Co. iii.
3; [Miiller on Barn. ep. 16, 6]).*
émravw (OIITQ): to look at, behold; mid. pres. ptep.
omravopuevos; to allow one’s self to be seen, to appear: tui,
Actsi. 3. (1 K. viii. 8; Tob. xii. 19; [Graec. Ven. Ex.
xxxiv. 24].)~
érracia, -as, 7, (omratw) ; 1. the act of exhibiting
one’s self to view: omtaciat kupiov, 2 Co. xii. 1 [A. V.
visions; cf. Meyer ad loc.] (€v nuepats orracias pov, Add.
to Esth. iv. l. 44 (13); [ef. Mal. iii. 2]; qAcos ev orracia,
coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sight, a vision,
an appearance presented to one whether asleep or
awake: ovjpamos ont. Acts xxvi. 19; €wpaxévat ontaciay,
Lk. i. 22; w. gen. of appos. dyyeAwy, Lk. xxiv. 23. A
later form for oes [cf. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for
ax, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23; x. 1, 7 sq.*
omrés, -7, -6v, (onrdw [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled:
Lk. xxiv. 42. (Ex. xii. 8,9; in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down.) *
éwrw, see opdw.
Omwpa, -as, 7, (derived by some fr. éms [cf. driow],
450
oe
OTTWS
€rouat, and &pa; hence, the time that follows the dpa
[Curtius § 522]; by others fr. dds [ef. our sap] juice,
and Spa, i.e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when
fruits become ripe), fr. Hom. down; 1. the season
which succeeds Oépos, from the rising of Sirius to that of
Arcturus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days
(the year being divided into seven seasons as follows:
€ap, O€pos, drapa, pPOwérapov, aomopntds, xemav, pura-
Aud). 2. ripe fruits (of trees): ood ris émOupias
ths Wuxns for dv n uxn cov émiOupet, Rev. xviii. 14.
(Jer. xlvii. (xl.) 10, and often in Grk. writ.) *
étws, (fr. mas and the relat. 6), with the indicative, a
relat. adverb but, like the Lat. ut, assuming also the
nature of a conjunction [cf. W. 449 (418 sq.) ]. i
As an Adverb; as, in what manner, how; once so in
the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indic.: ov«
éyvas, Omws xtd. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann,
Scholia ete. II. A Conjunction, Lat. ut, an-
swering to the Germ. dass, that; in class. Grk. with the
optat., and subjunc., and fut. indic.; cf. esp. Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 sqq. But the distinction observed
between these constructions by the more elegant Grk.
writ. is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except
Mt. xxvi. 59 LT Tr (drs Oavaracovew), [1 Co. i. 29
Rec.*!], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for
in Mk. v. 23, for éras... (noerar, L txt. T Tr WH have
correctly restored iva... (non); cf. W. 289 (271); B.
233 (201) sq.; [214 (185) ]. 1. It denotes the pur-
pose or end, in order that; with the design or to the
end that; that; a. without av,—after the present,
Mt. vi. 2, 16; Philem. 6; Heb. ix. 15; after éoré to be
supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts ix. 17;
Heb. ii. 9; émws pn, Lk. xvi. 26; after the imper-
fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [RG (see above)]; Acts ix. 24;
after the aorist, Acts ix. 2912) xxva26; Rosi 47;
Gal. i. 4; dmas pn, Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29; after the
pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57; after the future, Mt. xxiii.
35; and Rec. in Acts xxiv. 26; after an aor. sub-
junc. by which something is asked for, Mk. v. 23 Rec.;
after imperatives, Mt. ii. 8; v. 16, 45; vi. 4; Acts
xxiii. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 113 62@s pn, Mt. vi. 18; after
clauses with iva and the aor. subjunc., Lk. xvi. 28; 2 Co.
viii. 14; 2 Th. i. 12. Noteworthy is the phrase déras
mAnpoby, i. e. that acc. to God’s purpose it might be
brought to pass or might be proved by the event, of O. T.
prophecies and types (see iva, II. 3 fin.): Mt. ii. 23;
viii. 17; xii. 17 (where L T Tr WH fa); xiii. 35. b.
bras ay, that, if it be possible, Mt. vi. 5 RG; that, if what
I have just said shall come to pass, Lk. ii. 35; Acts iii.
20 (19) [R. V. that so]; xv.17; Ro. iti. 4 [B. 234 (201)];
exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. § 42, 6. 2. As
in the Grk. writ. also (cf. W. 338 (317); [B. § 139, 41]),
énras with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray-
ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote
what one wishes to be done: Mt. viii. 34 [here L iva] ;
ix. 38; Lk. vii. 3; x. 2; xi. 37; Acts viii. 15, 24; ix. 2;
xxiii. 20; xxv. 3; Jas. v.16; after a verb of deliber
ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Mk. ili. 6, (fr. which exx.
opapa
it is easy to see how tne use noted in II. arises from
the original adverbial force of the particle; for cupBovaA.
€AaBov, dmws dmokeawow adrov, they took counsel to de-
stroy him is equiv. to how they might destroy him, and
also to to this end that they might destroy him; cf. Kiihner
§ 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. 892).*
Spapa, -ros, Td, (opdw), that which is seen, a sight, spec-
tacle: Acts vil. 31; Mt. xvii. 9; @ sight divinely granted
in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision, Acts x. 17,19; dv dpa-
patos, Acts xviii. 9; é€v dpduart, Acts ix. 10, 12 [RG];
x. 3; dpapa Brerew, Acts xii. 9; ideiv, Acts xi. 53 xvi.
10. (Xen., Aristot., Plut., Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. etxav];
Sept. several times for NN), {iT}, Chald. x17 ete.; see
émragcia.)*
Spacts, -ews, 7, (paw) ; 1. the act of seeing: dp-
pdtwyv xpjows eis dpaow, Sap. xv. 15; the sense of sight,
Aristot. de anima 3, 2; Diod. 1,59; Plut. mor. p. 440 sq.;
plur. the eyes, éxxémtew tas opdcets, Diod. 2, 6. 2:
appearance, visible form: Rev. iv. 3 (Num. xxiv. 4; Ezek.
i. 5, 26, 28 5 Sir. xli..20, ete.). 3. a vision, i. e. an
appearance divinely granted in an ecstasy: Rev. ix. 17;
opdces OYvovrat, Acts ii. 17 fr. Joel ii. 28. (Sept. chiefly
for AN and j7in.) *
Spars, -7, -dv, (dpaw), visible, open to view: neut. plur.
substantively, Col. i. 16. (Xen., Plat., Theocr., Philo;
Sept.) *
opdw, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. éopwv (Jn. vi. 2, where
L Tr WH éeOeapouv) ; pf. éopaxa and (T WH in Col. ii. 1,
18; [1 Co.ix.1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in Jn. ix. 37; xv. 24; xx.
25; 1Jn. iii. 6; iv. 20; 3Jn. 11) édpaxa (on which form
cf. [WH. App. p. 161; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The-
saur. s. v. 2139 d.]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325; [B. 64
(56); Veitch s.v.]), [2 pers. sing. -kes (Jn. viii. 57 Tr
mrg.) see xortdw, init.], 3 pers. plur. éwpdxaow (and -xav
in Col. ii. 1 L Tr WH; Lk. ix. 36 T Tr WH; see yivo-
pat, init.) ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. éwpaxec (Acts vii. 44) ; fut.
dWouat (fr. OIITQ), 2 pers. sing. dee (cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. i. p. 347sq.; Kiihner § 211, 3, i. p.536), Mt. xxvii.
4; Jn.i.50 (51); xi. 40; but L T Tr WH [G also in Jn.
i. 50 (51) ] have restored op (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq.
(37)), 2 pers. plur. decode, Jn. i. 39 (40) T Tr WH, etc. ;
Pass., 1 aor. dpOnv; fut. opOycopwa; 1 aor. mid. subjunc.
2 pers. plur. épno6e (Lk. xiii. 28 [R G L WH txt. Tr
mrg.]) fr. a Byzant. form @yaunv (see Lob. ad Phryn. p.
734, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 258 sq. ; [Veitch s. v.]) ; Sept.
for 78) and Tin; [fr. Hom. down]; To SEE, i.e. 1.
to see with the eyes: twa dpav, éwpaxevar, Lk. xvi. 23; Jn.
WANED 1 SKI ends Os, KS 12599.: i Conix lls eben: fut.
dWoua, Mt. xxviii. 7,10; Mk. xvi. 7; Rev. i. 7, etc.; rov
Oedv, 1 Jn. iv. 20; ddpatov ws dpav, Heb. xi. 27; with a
ptep. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258); W. § 45, 4],
Mt. xxiv. 30; Mk. xiii. 26; xiv.62; Lk. xxi. 27; Jn. i.
51 (52) ; éwpaxévat or dyrecOa Td mpdowmrey twos, Col. ii.
1; Acts xx. 25; 3 (which divine majesty, i.e. rod Oeiov
Adyov) Ewpaxaper Tots opbadpois jay (on this addition cf.
W. 607 (564) ; [B. 398 (341)]),1Jn. i. 1; dpec6ai twa
i. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23; éwpaxévae Christ,
ie. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity
451
opaw
and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36; ix. 37; xv. 24; dpav and
dWeoOa with an ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiii. 49; Jn.i. 50
(51); iv. 45; vi. 2(L Tr WH e6edpour] ; xix. 35; Acts
ii. 17; vil. 44 ; Rev. xviii. 18 [Ree.], ete.; [epx. k. Oweobe
(sc. mov peva), Jn. i. 40 (39) T TrWH;; cf. B. 290 (250)];
éWn thy dd€av rod Oeod, the glory of God displayed in a
miracle, Jn. xi.40. metaph. dpeoOat tov Gedy, rdv Kiproy,
to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with
God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14; also
TO mpdcwrov Tov Oeod, Rev. xxii. 4—(a fig. borrowed
from those privileged to see and associate with kings;
see Brera, 1b. B.); otk eidos beod éwpdxare, trop. i. q. his
divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye
have not recognized, Jn. v. 37; cf. Meyer ad loc. 2.
to see with the mind, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. xv. 21;
twa foll. by a ptep. in the ace. [B.§ 144, 15b.; W.§ 45, 4],
Acts viii. 23; ri, Col. ii. 18; with a ptep. added, Heb. ii.
8; foll. by or, Jas. ii. 24; to look at or upon, observe, give
attention to: ets twa, Jn. xix. 37 (Soph. El. 925; Xen. Cyr.
4, 1, 20; ets m1, Solon in Diog. Laért. 1, 52); éwpaxévat
mapa T@ trarpi, to have learned from [see mapa, II. b.] the
father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who
learn what they see their fathers doing), Jn. viii. 38
(twice in Rec.; once in LT Tr WH); Christ is said to
deliver to men a éwpaxev, the things which he has seen,
i. e. which he learned in his heavenly state with God be-
fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of
God, Jn. iii. 11, 32; éwpaxevae Oedv, to know God’s will,
3 Jn. 11; from the intercourse and influence of Christ
to have come to see (know) God’s majesty, saving pur-
poses, and will [cf. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7,9; in an
emphatic sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and
perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an-
other, Jn. i. 18; vi. 46; dyrecOat Oedv xabas éeorw, of the
knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future
kingdom, 1 Jn. iii. 2; dyerOa Christ, is used in refer-
ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres-
ence among them by his influence upon their souls
through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is
said dWeoGa the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of
them, ibid. 22. 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted
with by experience, to experience: (wnv, i. q. to become a
partaker of, Jn. iii. 36; nuepav, (cf. Germ. erleben; see
eidw, I. 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see
to, look to; i.@. a. i. q. to take heed, beware, [see esp.
B. § 139, 49; cf. W. 503 (469)]: dpa wn, with aor. sub-
junc., see that... not, take heed lest, Mt. viii. 4 ; xviii. 10;
Mk.i.44; 1 Th. v.15; supply rodro mounons in Rev. xix.
10 ; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338)], (Xen. Cyr. 3,
1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; EL.
1003) ; foll. by an impv., Mt. ix. 30; xxiv. 65 épare xat
mpocexere amd, Mt. xvi. 6; opare, BAemere amd, Mk. viii.
15; dpare, kai pudacoecde amd, Lk. xii. 15; dpa, ri ped-
ees rroveiv, i. gq. weigh well, Acts xxii. 26 Rec. (Gpa ri rroseis,
Soph. Philoct. 589). b. i.q. to care for, pay heed to:
av dyn [RG dpe (see above)], see thou to it, that will
be thy concern, [cf. W. § 40, 6], Mt. xxvii. 4; plur., 24 ;
Acts xviii. 15, (Epict. diss. 2, 5, 30; 4, 6, 11sq.; [Am
b0y7 452
tonin. 5, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. 1
aor. BPOnv, I was seen, showed myself, appeared (cf. B. 52
(45)]: Lk. ix. 31; with dat. of pers. (cf. B. u. s., [also
§ 134, 2; cf. W. § 31, 10]): of angels, Lk.i.11; xxii. 43
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii.
2); of God, Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the
dead, Mt. xvii. 3; Mk. ix. 4, ef. Lk. ix. 31; of Jesus after
his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 84; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31; xxvi.
16; 1 Co. xv. 5-8; 1 Tim. iii. 16; of Jesus hereafter to
return, Heb. ix. 28; of visions during sleep or ecstasy,
Acts xvi. 9; Rev. xi. 19; xii. 1, 3; in the sense of com-
ing upon unexpectedly, Acts ii. 3; vil. 26. fut. pass. dv
6POnoopai oor, on account of which I will appear unto
thee, Acts xxvi. 16; on this pass. see W. § 39, 3 N.1;
cf. B. 287 (247). [Comp.: dad-, xa6-, mpo-opda. |
[Syn. 6pav, BA€mwexv, both denote the physical act: dp.
in general, BA. the single look; ép. gives prominence tq the
discerning mind, BA. to the particular mood or point. When
the physical side recedes, 6p. denotes perception in general
(as resulting principally from vision), the prominence in the
word of the mental element being indicated by the constr. of
the ace. w. inf. (in contrast with that of the ptep. required
w. BAérev), and by the absol. épas; BAém. on the other hand,
when its physical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense,
look (i. e. open, incline) towards, Lat. spectare, vergere.
Schmidt ch. xi. Cf. @ewpéw, cxoméw, etdw, I. fin.]
spy, -js, 7, (fr. opydw to teem, denoting an internal
motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice
(Curtius § 152]; cf. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicut
in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5,17; Most. 3, 2,10; cf. Germ. arg,
Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural dis-
position, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul,
impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly
in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna-
tion, (on the distinction between it and Oupds, see buys,
1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas.i.19sq.; per dpyis, in-
dignant, [A. V- with anger], Mk. iii. 5; xapis dpyjs, 1:
Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for
the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. § 43): of the
punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii.4; dia ryv
dpyny, i. e. because disobedience is visited with punish-
ment, ib. 5. The dpyn attributed to God in the N. T. is
that in God which stands opposed to man’s disobedience,
obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, and man-
ifests itself in punishing the same: Jn. iii. 36; Ro. i. 18;
iv. 15; ix. 22*; Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3; Rev. xiv.10; xvi. 19;
xix. 15; absol. 4 dpyn, Ro. xii. 19 [ef. W. 594 (553)];
oxen opyns, vessels into which wrath will be poured (at
the last day), explained by the addition katnpriopeéva eis
aradevav, Ro. ix. 22°; 9 péAAovoa opyn, which at the
last day will be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7; Lk.
iii. 7, [al. understand in these two pass. the (national)
judgments immediately impending to be referred
to—at least primarily]; also » dpyy 4 épxowern, 1 Th.
i. 10; muépa opyns, the day on which the wrath of God
will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked
fef. W. § 30, 2a.], Ro. ii. 5; and 4 nuépa f peyadn tis
opyns avrov (Rev. vi. 17; see npépa, 3 ad fin.) ; €pyera
9 Opyy TOD Oeod eri Twa, the wrath of God cometh upon
opGotrodéw
one in the infliction of penalty [ef. W. § 40, 2 a.], Eph.
v. 6; Col. iii. 6 [T Tr WH om. L br. émi etc.]; épOace
[-kev L txt. WH mrg.] én” adrods 9 dpyn, 1 Th. ii. 16;
SO 9 dpyn passes over into the notion of retribution and
punishment, Lk. xxi. 23; Ro. [ii. 8]; iii. 5; v. 9; Rev.
xi. 18; réxva opyjs, men exposed to divine punishment,
Eph. ii. 3; eis dpyny, unto wrath, i. e. to undergo pun-
ishment in misery, 1 Th. v. 9. dpyq is attributed te
Christ also when he comes as Messianic judge, Rev. vi.
16. (Sept. for 772, wrath, outburst of anger, oyi, 79n,
wn, 8p, ete. ; but chiefly for 4.) Cf. Ferd. Weber,
Vom Zorne Gottes. Erlang. 1862; Ritschl, Die christ.
Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Verséhnung, ii. p. 118 sqq.*
opyitw: Pass., pres. dpyi{ouat; 1 aor. dapyicOyv; (dpyn) 3
fr. Soph., Eur., and Thuc. down; to provoke, arouse to
anger; pass. to be provoked to anger, be angry, be wroth,
(Sept. for 75n, ae also for 7% 77N ete.) : absol., Mt.
Xvill. 34; xxii. 7; Lk. xiv. 21; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 26 [B.
290 (250); ef. W. §§ 43, 2; 55, 7]; Rev. xi. 18; revi,
Mt. v. 22; émi ru, Rev. xii. 17 [Lom. ézi] as in 1 K. xi.
9; [Andoc. 5, 10]; Isocr. p. 230c.; [cf. W. 232 (218)].
(Comp. : map-opyi¢a.]*
opyiXos, -7, -ov, (cpyn), prone to anger, irascible, [A. V.
soon angry]: ‘Tit. i. 7. (Prov. xxii. 24; xxix. 22; Xen.
de re equ. 9,7; Plat. [e. g. de rep. 411 b.]; Aristot. [e.g.
eth. Nic. 2, 7, 10]; al.) *
dpyuid, -as, 7, (dpeyw to stretch out), the distance
across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to |
the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched;
five or six feet, a fathom: Acts xxvii. 28. (Hom., Hdt.,
Xen., al.) *
dpéyo: (cf. Lat. rego, Germ. recken, strecken, reichen,
[Eng. reach; Curtius § 153]); fr. Hom. down; fo stretch
forth, as xeipa, Hom. Il. 15, 371, ete.; pres. mid. [ef. W.
p- 252 (237) note], to stretch one’s self out in order to
touch or to grasp something, to reach after or desire some-
thing: with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1; Heb. xi.
16; dtAapyupias, to give one’s self up to the love of
money (not quite accurately since du\apy. is itself the
épe&is; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.]), 1 Tim. vi. 10.*
Spewvds, -7, -dv, (dpos), mountainous, hilly; 4 opewn [WH
dpwn, see I, «] sc. ywpa [ef. W. 591 (550)] (which is
added in Hdt. 1, 110; Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 3), the mountain-
district, hill-country: Lk. i. 39, 65, (Aristot. h. a. 5, 28,
4; Sept. for 1, Gen. xiv. 10; Deut. xi. 11; Josh. ii.
16, ete.).*
Spekts, -ews, 7, (dpe youat, q. V-), desire, longing, craving,
for; eager desire, lust, appetite: of lust, Ro. i. 27. It is
used both in a good and a bad sense, as well of natural
and lawful and even of proper cravings (of the appetite
for food, Sap. xvi. 2 sq.; Plut. mor. p. 635 ¢c.; al.; éaete
oTnpns, Plat. de fin. p. 414b.), as also of corrupt and
unlawful desires, Sir. xviii. 30; xxiii. 6; Goyor and Ao-
yeortxal opeers are contrasted in Aristot. rhet. 1, 10, 7.
(Cf. Trench § Ixxxvii.]*
dp0o-roSdw, -2; (opOdmovs with straight feet, going
straight; and this fr. dp@és and movs); to walk in a
straight course; metaph. to act uprightly, Gal. ii. 14 [ef.
a |
6p00s
pos, I. 8 f.].
(96) ].*
6pQ6s, -7, -dv, (OPQ, spvupe [to stir up, set in motion;
ace. to al. fr. r. to lift up; ef. Fick iii. p. 775; Vanicek
p- 928; Curtius p. 348]), straight, erect; i.e. a.
upright: dvactn&, Acts xiv. 10; so with orjva in 1 Esdr.
ix. 46, and in Grk. writ., esp. Hom. b. opp. to
oxortwds, straight i. e. not crooked: rpoyxiai, Heb. xii. 13
(for Ww, Prov. xii. 15 ete.; [Pind., Theogn., al.]).*
Sp0otopew, -; (dpPordpuos cutting straight, and this fr.
opOcs and téprw) ; 1. to cut straight: tas d8ovs, to
cut straight ways, i.e. to proceed by straight paths,
hold a straight course, equiv. to to do right (for ww),
Prov. iii. 6; xi. 5, (viam secare, Verg. Aen. 6, 899). 2
dropping the idea of cutting, fo make straight and smooth;
Vulg. recte tracto, to handle aright: tov Aéyov rijs adn-
Ocias, i.e. to teach the truth correctly and directly,
2 Tim. ii. 15; rov addnOn Aédyov, Eustath. opusce. p. 115,
41. (Not found elsewhere [exc. in eccles. writ. (W. 26) ;
e. g. constt. apost. 7, 31 ev r. rod Kupiov ddéypacw; cf.
Suicer ii. 508 sq.]. Cf. kaworopew, to cut new veins in
mining; dropping the notion of cutting, to make some-
thing new, introduce new things, make innovations or
changes, etc.) *
6pOpitw: 3 pers. sing. impf. dpOpiev; (BpOpos); not
found in prof. auth. ([cf. W. 26; 33; 91 (87)]; Moeris
[p- 272 ed. Pierson] dp6pever drrixas, dpOpi¢er EAAnuiKds) ;
Sept. often for nDwin; (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 52
and on Sap. vi. 14); to rise early in the morning: mpéds
twa, to rise early in the morning in order to betake one’s
self to one, to resort to one early in the morning, (Vulg.
manico ad aliquem), Lk. xxi. 38, where see Meyer.*
Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 26; 102
6p0pivés, -7, -dv, (fr. dpApos; cf. tpepiwds, éEomeptvds,
émapwvds, mpwivds), a poetic [Anth.] and later form for
dpOpros (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51; Sturz, De dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 186; [W. 25]), early: Rev. xxii. 16
Rec.; Lk. xxiv. 22 LT TrWH. (Hos. vi. 4; Sap. xi.
23 (22).) *
pOptos, -a, -ov, (fr. épOpos, q. v.; cf. dYvos, rpwios), early;
rising at the first dawn or very early in the morning: Lk.
xxiv. 22 RG (Job xxix. 7; 3 Mace. v. 10, 23). Cf. the
preced. word. [Hom. (h. Mere. 143), Theogn., al.] *
SpOpos, -ov, 6, (fr. OPQ, dpyups to stir up, rouse; cf.
Lat. orior, ortus), fr. Hes. down; Sept. for \nw dawn,
and several times for \p3; daybreak, dawn: épOpov Ba-
G€os or Babews (see Babews and Babis [on the gen. cf. W.
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1;
épOpov, at daybreak, at dawn, early in the morning, Jn.
vill. 2 (Hes. opp.575; Sept. Jer. xxv. 43 xxxiii. (xxvi.)
5, etc.) ; umd Tov dpOpov, Acts v. 21 (Dio Cass. 76, 17).*
6p0as, (dpOds), adv., rightly: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 43;
x. 28; xx. 21. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.]*
spit; 1 aor. dpica; Pass., pf. ptep. dpuopevos; 1 aor.
ptep. épioGeis; (fr. dpos a boundary, limit) ; fr. [Aeschyl.
and] Hdt. down; to define; i e. 1. to mark out the
boundaries or limits (of any place or thing): Hdt., Xen.,
Thuc., al.; Num. xxxiv. 6; Josh. xiii. 27. 2. to de-
iermine, appoint: with an ace. of the thing, yuépay, Heb.
458
oppnya
iv. 7; xatpovs, Acts xvii. 26, (numerous exx. fr. Grk.
auth. are given in Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 1 p. 538 sq.);
pass. wptopevos, ‘determinate,’ settled, Acts ii. 23; ré
wpiop. that which hath been determined, ace. to appointment,
decree, Lk. xxii. 22; with an ace. of pers. Acts xvii. 31
(@ by attraction for év [W. § 24,1; B. § 143, 8]); pass.
with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the
Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly
appointed [A.V. declared] such among men by this tran-
scendent and crowning event) ; dpi¢w, to ordain, determine,
appoint, Acts x. 42; foll. by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr.
19d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. 8 ed. Brunck]). [Comp.:
ag-, ao-d:-, po-opi¢a. ]*
[opwvds, see dpecvos. |
Sptov, -ov, 7d, (fr. dpos [boundary ]), [fr. Soph. down],
a bound, limit, in the N. T. always in plur. (like Lat.
Jines) boundaries, [R. V. borders], i.q. region, district, land,
territory: Mt. ii. 16; iv.13; viii. 34; xv. 22,39; xix.1;
Mkiv. 17); -wii./245L, T Tr WH, 31; x. 1; Acts xiii. 50.
(Sept. very often for 5333; several times for 19933.) .
opkifa; (dpkos) ; 1. to force to take an oath, to
administer an oath to: Xen. conviv. 4, 10; Dem., Polyb.;
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 361. 2. to adjure, (solemnly
implore), with two ace. of pers., viz. of the one who is
adjured and of the one by whom he is adjured (cf. Mat-
thiae § 413, 10; [B. 147 (128)]): 1 Th. v. 27 RG (see
evopkitw); Mk. v. 7; Acts xix. 13. (Sept. for yawn,
tua foll. by cara w. gen., 1 K. ii. (iii.) 42; 2 Chr. xxxvi.
13; év, Neh. xiii. 25.) [Comp.: év-, €&opxifa.] *
Spkos, -ov, 6, (fr. épyw, eipyw; i. q. Epxos an enclosure,
confinement; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
for Hyiaw, an oath: Mt. xiv. 7,9; xxvi. 72; Mk. vi. 26;
Lk. i. 73 [W. 628 (583); B. §.144, 13]; Acts ii. 30 [W.
226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16 sq.; Jas. v. 12; by
meton. that which has been pledged or promised with an
oath; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(ef. Wiinsche ad loc.) ].*
Spkwpocta, -as, 7, (dpxwporéw [dpxos and ouvupe]; cf.
drwpocia, avrapocia), affirmation made on oath, the take
ing of an oath, an oath: Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek.
xvii. 18; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92); Joseph. antt. 16,6, 2. Cf.
Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. 1. c.) *
Sppdw, -@: 1 aor. Spynoa; (fr. dpyn); 1. trans.
to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Hom.
down. 2. intrans. to start forward impetuously, to
rush, (so fr. Hom. down): ets te, Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13;
Lk. viii. 33; Acts xix. 29; émi twa, Acts vii. 57.*
Spy, -78, 4, (fr. r. sar to go, flow; Fick i. p. 227; Cur-
tius § 502], fr. Hom. down, a violent motion, impulse: Jas.
iii. 4; a hostile movement, onset, assault, Acts xiv. 5 [ef.
Trench § lxxxvii.].*
Spynpa, -ros, rd, (Spd), a rush, impulse: Rev. xviii.
21 [here A.V. violence]. (For 713), outburst of wrath,
Am. i. 113; Hab. iii. 8, cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. iv. p. 123 ;
an enterprise, venture, Hom. Il. 2, 356, 590, although in-
terpreters differ about its meaning there [cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.]; that to which one is impelled
or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus],
Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. § 12] p. 452c.) *
La
Opveov
Spveov, -ov, 70, abird: Rev. xviii. 2; xix. 17,21. (Sept.;
Hom., Thue., Xen., Plat., Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 5.) *
dpvé [so codd. 8 D], i.q. dps (q. v.): Lk. xiii. 34 Tdf.
The nom. is not found in prof. writ., but the trisyllabic
forms dpxos, dpux. for dprOos, etc., are used in Doric ;
[Photius (ed. Porson, p. 348, 22) "Ives dpmé... kat
Awpreis opué. Cf. Curtius p. 495 ].*
dpvis, -.Gos, 6,7, (OPQ, dpvupe [see opOpos]) ; l.a
bird; so fr. Hom. down. 2. spec. a cock, a hen: Mt.
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 [Tdf. dpwé, q. v.]; (so Aeschyl.
Eum. 866; Xen. an. 4,5, 25; Theocr., Polyb. 12, 26,1;
False"
dpobec(a, -as, 7, (fr. 6pobérns ; and this fr. dpos [a boun-
lary; see dpiov], and Tidy) ; a. prop. a setting of
boundaries, laying down limits. b. a definite limit;
plur. bounds, Acts xvii. 26. (Eccl. writ.; [W. 25].) *
Spos, -ous, 76, (OPQ, dpyvpu [i. e. a rising; see dpOpos]),
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 17, @ mountain: Mt. v. 14;
Lk. iii. 5; Rev. vi. 14, and often; rd dpos, the moun-
tain nearest the place spoken of, the mountain near by
[but see 6, II. 1 b.], Mt. v.1; Mk. iii. 13; Lk. ix. 28; Jn.
vi. 3,15; plur. épy, Mt. xviii. 12; xxiv. 16; Mk. v.5; Rev.
vi. 16, ete.; gen. plur. dpéwy (on this uncontracted form,
used also in Attic, cf. Bitm. Gram. § 49 note 3; W. § 9,
2c.; [B. 14 (18); Dindorf in Fleckeisen’s Jahrb. for
1869 p. 83]), Rev. vi. 15; 6pn weOcoraveww a proverb. phrase,
used also by rabbin. writ., to remove mountains, 1. e. to
accomplish most difficult, stupendous, incredible things: 1
Covad 2508 Mtsoewii. 206 sox) 215 Mike xa423.
spicow: 1 aor. dpvéa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 15n,
773, etc. ; to dig: to make ri by digging, Mk. xii. 1; ri
év rem, Mt. xxi. 33; i.g. to make a nit, ev 77 yn, Mt. xxv.
18 [here T Tr WH op. yqv]. [Comp.: &:-, e&-optace. | *
éphaves, -7, -dv, (OPSOS, Lat. orbus; [Curtius § 404]),
fr. Hom. Od. 20, 68 down, Sept. for Din; bereft (of a
father, of parents), Jas. i. 27 [A. V. fatherless]; of those
bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. xiv. 18 (Lam.
Wars)
opxéopat, -ovpar: 1 aor. apxnoduny; (fr. xopds, by trans-
position opxés; cf. dpm, apratw, and Lat. rapio, popdn
and Lat. forma; [but these supposed transpositions are
extremely doubtful, cf. Curtius § 189; Fick iv. 207, 167.
Some connect dpyéoua with r. argh ‘to put in rapid mo-
tion’; cf. Vanitek p. 59]); todance: Mt. xi. 17; xiv. 6;
Mk. vi. 22; Lk. vii. 32. (From Hom. down; Sept. for
Py 1 Chr. xv. 29; Ecclus. iii. 4; 2S. vi. 21.)*
és, 7, 6, the postpositive article, which has the force of
I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that, (Lat. hic,
haec, hoc; Germ. emphat. der, die, das) ; in the N. T. only
in the foll. instances: Os S€, but he (Germ. er aber), Jn. v.
11 L Tr WH; [Mk. xv. 23 T Trtxt. WH; cf. B.§ 126, 2];
in distributions and distinctions: 6s peév... ds dé, this
... that, one... another, the one... the other, Mt. xxi. 35;
xxii.5 LT Tr WH; xxv. 15; Lk. xxiii. 33; Acts xxvii.
44; Ro. xiv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 7 RG; xi. 21; 2Co. ii. 16; Jude
22; Opev... 6 d€, the one... the other, Ro. ix. 21; [6 pev
...66€...6 dé, some... some... some, Mt. xiii. 23 L
TWH]; 6 d8€...6 d€...6 d€, some... some... some,
454 és
Mt. xiii. 8; @ (masc.) pev . . . Aw (Se) . . . Erépw 8¢ [but
LT Tr WH om. this 6€] «rd. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; 6 pev... dARo
dé [Ltxt. T Tr WH xai ado], Mk. iv. 4; with a variation
of the construction also in the foll. pass.: 6 pev... Kat
érepov, Lk. viii. 5; ots ev with the omission of obs dé by
anacoluthon, 1 Co. xii. 28; Os pev...6 S€ dodevar ete.
one man... but he that is weak etc. Ro. xiv. 2. On this
use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from De-
mosth. down, cf. Matthiae § 289 Anm. 7; Kiihner § 518,
4 b. ii. p. 780; [Jelf § 816, 3 b.]; Bitm. Gram. § 126, 3;
B. 101 (89); W. 105 (100); Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507.
II. arelative pronoun who, which, what; 1.
in the common constr., acc. to which the relative
agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pron.
which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed
by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition:
6 aornp ov eidov, Mt. ii. 9; 6. . lovdatos, ob 6 émawos KrA.
Ro. ii. 29; otros rept ob éya@ axovw toradra, Lk. ix. 9 ; dd
THs nuepas, ap js, Acts xx. 18; Beds dv od, €£ 08, 1 Co. viii.
6, and numberless other exx. it refers to a more remote
noun in 1 Co. i. 8, where the antecedent of és is not the
nearest noun "Incov Xpicrod, but ré Gea in 4; yet cf. W.
157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere
the relative is the subject of its own clause: dvjp ds ete.
Jas. i. 12; mas 6s, Lk. xiv. 33; ovdels 6s, Mk. x. 29; Lk.
xviii. 29, and many other exx. 2. in constructions
peculiar in some respect ; a. the gender of the rel-
ative is sometimes made to conform to that of the follow-
ing noun: rhs avAns, 6 €ore mpatt@piov, Mk. xv. 16; ape
mades, d eiot (L €or) ta mvevpara, Rev. iv. 5 [LT WH];
oméppati, 6s eott Xpiords, Gal. iii. 16; add, Eph.i. 14 [L
WH txt. Tr mrg. 6]; vi. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. v. 8 [T
WH mrg. a]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 708; Matthiae § 440
p- 989 sq.; W. § 24, 3; B. § 143, 3. b. in construc-
tions ad sensum [cf. B. § 143, 4]; a. the plural of
the relative is used after collective nouns in the sing. [cf.
W. § 21, 3; B. u.s.]: mAnOos odd, ot 7AOov, Lk. vi. 17;
may TO mpeaBurepiov, map @v, Acts xxii. 53 -yeveds, ev ois,
Leow 1; 15 B. cata wacav rodwW, ev ais, Acts xv. 36;
rautnv Seutépav vyiv ypapw emoroAny, ev ais (because the
preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles),
2 Pet.iii.1. sy. the gender of the relative is conformed
not to the grammatical but to the natural gender of
its antecedent [cf. W. § 21,2; B.u.s.]: wadapcov ds, Jn.
vi. 9 LT Tr WH; @npiov ds, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev.
xiii. 14 LT Tr WH; xedady ds, of Christ, Col. ii. 19; [add
pvotnpioy os etc. 1 Tim. iii. 16 GL T Tr WH; cf. B.u.s.;
W. 588 sq. (547)]; oxevn (of men) ods, Ro. ix. 24; €Ovy
ot, Acts xv.17; xxvi. 17; réxva, rexvia ot, Jn. i. 13; Gal. iv.
19; 2Jn.1, (Eur. suppl. 12); réxvoy ds, Philem.10. —e.
In attractions [B. § 143, 8; W. §§ 24,1; 66, 4 sqq.];
a. the accusative of the rel. pron. depending on a trans.
verb is changed by attraction into the oblique case of its
antecedent: krigews js exricev 6 beds, Mk. xiii. 19 [RG];
Tov pnuaros ov etrev, Mk. xiv. 72 [Rec.]; add, Jn. iv. 14;
vii. 31, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. 6]; xv. 20; xxi. 10;
Acts iii. 21, 25; vii. 17,45; ix. 36; x. 39; xxii. 10; Ro.
xv. 18; 1 Co. vi. 19; 2Co.i. 6; x.8,13; Eph.i. 8; Tit.
os 455 és
iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 Jn. iii.
24; Jude 15; forother exx. see below; év dpa 7 ov ywo-
oxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; r9 wapaddoet 9 mapedaxare, Mk. vii. 13 ;
add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 43; xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5;
Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2 Th.i. 4; Rev.
xviii. 6; cf. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attrac-
tion occurs where the verb governs the dative [but see
below]: thus, carévavtt ob emiotevoe Oeov for Karévavte
cod, @ emiorevoe (See Karevavte), Ro. iv. 17; pwvris, js
éxpa€a (for 7 [al. qv, cf. W. 164 (154 sq.) B. 287 (247) ]),
Acts xxiv. 21, cf. Is. vi. 4; (yero S€ kal rev éavrod Te
MLoTOvV, ois HOETO Kal Sv nmioret mwodAovs, for Kai moAAovs
TovTay, ois nriare, Nen. Cyr. 5,4, 39; dv eye evrervxnka
ovdeis, for ovdels TovTwy, ois évrer. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 a.;
Protag. p. 361 e.; de rep. 7 p.531e.; map’ Sv Bonbeis, ov-
Sepiav Aner xdpw, for mapa rovTwr, ois xrA. Aeschin. f.
lee. p. 43 (117); ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237;
[B. § 143, 11; W. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to
recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. T.; cf.
Meyer on Eph. i. 8]). The foll. expressions, however,
ean hardly be brought under this construction: ths yaps-
Tos fis exapitwcey (as if for 7), Eph. i. 6 LT Tr WH; rijs
kKAnoews, As ekAnOnre, Eph. iv. 1; dia trys mapaxAnoeas iis
mapakadovpeba, 2 Co. i. 4, but must be explained agree-
ably to such phrases as yap xaptrovy, kAnow Kadeir, etc.,
[(i. e. accus. of kindred abstract subst.; cf. W. §32, 2; B.
§ 131, 5)]; ef. W.[and B.u.s.]. 8B. The noun to which
the relative refers is so conformed to the case of the rela-
tive clause that either aa. it is itself incorporated
into the relative construction, but without the article [B.
§143,7; W.§ 24, 2b.]: ov eye dmexepadioa "Iwdvyny, ovtos
nyepOn, for lwavyns, ov ktr. Mk. vi. 16; add, Lk. xxiv. 1;
Philem. 10; Ro. vi. 17; ets fy otkiay, éxet, i.q. év 7 otkia, eis
qv, Lk. ix. 45 or BB. it is placed before the rela-
tive clause, either with or without the article [W. § 24,
2a.; B.§ 144, 13]: rov dprov dy khOpev, odxt Kowwvia TOU
oaparos, 1 Co. x. 16; AiOov dv dmedoxipacay oi oikodopovy-
res, odros eyevnOn (for 6 AiOos, os erA.), Mt. xxi. 42; Mk.
Ki. 0% Muk. xx lit; 1h Petai.7. y. Attraction in the
phrases dype fs juepas for dxpe ths Huepas, 7 [W. § 24, 1
fin.]: Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; ag
fis huépas for awd THs jpépas, 9, Col. i. 6, 9; ov tpdzoy, as,
just as, for rovrov roy rporov ov or &, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii.
34; Acts vii. 28; [preceded or] foll. by otras, Acts i. 11;
2 Tim. iii. 8. §. A noun common to both the principal
clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause
after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: ev @ xpipare
kpivere, kpiOnoebe, for Kpid. ev TS Kpipart, ev @ xKpivere,
Mt. vii. 2; xxiv. 44; Mk. iv. 24; Lk. xii. 40, ete. 3:
The Neuter 6 a. refers to nouns of the masculine
and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which
is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing [ef.
B. § 129, 6]: Aemra Svo, 6 éate Kodpavtns, Mk. xii. 42;
dydnny, 6 éore civSeopos, Col. iii. 14 L T Tr WH; dprovs,
é etc. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. T Tr WH. b. is used in the
phrases [B. u.s.]— 6 éorw, which (term) signifies: Boa-
vepyés & €or viot Bp. Mk. iii. 17; add, v. 41; vii. 11, 34;
i. 23; Mk. xv. 34; Jn. i. 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; ix. 7; xx.
16. c. refers to a whole sentence [B. u.s.]: rodrop
avéatnoev 6 Oeds, ob... oper paprupes, Acts ii. 32; iii.
15; mepi ov ... 6 Adyos, Heb. v. 113 6 Kat émoinoay (and
the like), Acts xi. 30; Gal. ii. 10; Col. i. 29; 6 (which
thing viz. that I write a new commandment [cf. B. § 143,
3]) eorw adnOés, 1 Jn. ii. 8; 6 (sc. to have one’s lot as-
signed in the lake of fire) éorw 6 Oavaros 6 devrepos, Rev.
Ext. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Hom.
down, in the second of two codrdinate clauses a pro-
noun of the third person takes the place of the relative
(cf. Passow ii. p. 552°; [L. and S. s. v. B. [V.1]; B.§ 143,
6; [W. 149 (141)]): os eorae emi rod Saparos Kai Ta oKEvN
avrov év Th oikia pi) KataBarw, Lk. xvii. 31; €& ob ra navra
kal mets eis avrov, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a
usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun
avrés is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ;
as, Ns TO Ovyarptov adtas, Mk. vii. 25; see adrés, II. 5. 6.
The relative pron. very often so includes the demonstra-
tive ovros or éxeivos that for the sake of perspicuity a
demons. pron. must be in thought supplied, either in
the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which
follows it [W. § 23, 2; B. §127, 5]. The foll. examples
may suffice: a. a demons. pron. must be added in
thought in the preceding clause: ois jrotpacrat, for
rovtos doOncerat, ois AT. Mt. xx. 23; deiEae (sc. radra),
& dei yevéoOa, Rev. i.1; xxii. 6; 6 for éxeivos @, Lk. vii.
43,47; ov for rovre ov, Ro. x. 14; with the attraction of
év for rovrey a, Lk. ix. 36; Ro. xv.183; dv for ravra dv,
Mt. vi. 8; with a prep. intervening, Guadev ad’ dv (for
amd rovtwy a) érabev, Heb. v. 8. —_b. a demons. pron.
must be supplied in the subsequent clause: Mt. x. 38;
Mk. ix. 40; Lk. iv.6; ix. 50; Jn. xix. 22; Ro. ii. 1, and
often. 7. Sometimes the pur pose and end is ex-
pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. qui
for ut is): dmooreAw Gyyedor, ds (for which Lehm. in Mt.
has cal) karacxevacet, who shall ete. i. q. that he may etc.,
Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; [1 Co. ii. 16]; so also in
Grk. auth., cf. Passow s. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553; [L. and
S.s. v. B. IV. 4]; Matthiae § 481, d.; [Kihner § 563, 3 b.;
Jelf § 836, 4; B. §139, 32];—or the cause: 6p mapa-
dێxera, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb.
xii. 6 ; — or the relative stands where écre might be used
(cf. Matthiae § 479 a.; Kriiger § 51, 13, 10; [Kiihner
§ 563, 3 e.]; Passow s. v. VIII. 2, ii. p. 553°; [L. and S.
u.s.]): Lk. v. 21; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. ris,
ri, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372;
[ef. B. § 189, 58]): od« éyw 0 mapabnow, Lk. xi. 6; by a
later Grk. usage, in a direct quest. (cf. W. § 24, 4; B.
§ 139, 59): éf’ & (or Rec. ef’) mape, Mt. xxvi. 50 (on
which [and the more than doubtful use of 6s in direct
quest.] see emi, B. 2 a. ¢. p. 233° and C. I. 2 g. y. aa. p.
235°). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a
periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)]: av& dy», for
avtl rovrwy ort, — because, Lk. i. 20; xix. 44; Acts xii. 23;
2 Th. ii. 10; for which reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see
dvri,2d.); ed’ @, for that, since (see emi, B. 2 a. 8. p. 233");
Heb. vii. 2; & dort peOepynvevduevov, and the like: Mt. ! dq’ ob, (from the time that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25
e+
OOakKls
xxiv. 21, [see dmé, I. 4 b. p. 58°]; aypts od, see dypu, 1d. ;
é£ ob, whence, Phil. iii. 20 ef. W. § 21,3; [B.§ 143, 4 a.];
ws od, until (see éws, IL. 1 b. a. p. 268°); also péxpus ov,
MK. xiii. 30; ev 6, while, Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v. 34; Jn. v.7;
év ois, meanwhile, Lk. xii. 1; [ef. év, I. 8 e.]. 10.
With particles: 6s ad and os éay, whosoever, if any one
ever, see av, II. 2 and éav, II. p. 163°; ob éav, whereso-
ever (whithersoever) with subjunc., 1 Co. xvi. 6 [ef. B. 105
(92)]. ds ye, see ye, 2. ds Kai, who also, he who, (cf.
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 636): Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 13 sq. ;
x. 89 [here WH br. #]; Jn. xxi. 20; Acts i. 11; vii. 45;
x. 39 [Rec. om. caf]; xii. 4; xiii. 22; xxiv. 6; Ro. v. 2; 1
Co. xi. 23 ; 2Co. iii. 6; Gal. ii. 10; Heb. i. 2, etc.; ds cat
airés, who also himself, who as well as others: Mt. xxvii.
57. 6s Snore, whosoever, Jn. v. 4 Rec.; damep [or 6s wep
LTr txt.], who especially, the very one who (cf. Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 724): Mk. xv. 6 [but here T WH Tr mrg.
now read 6v wapyTovrTo, q. V. |. 11. The genitive o6,
used absolutely [ef. W. 590 (549) note; Jelf § 522, Obs. 1],
becomes an adverb (first so in Attic writ., cf. Passow II.
p. 546°; [Meisterhans § 50, 1); a. where (Lat.
ubi): Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 20; Lk. iv. 16sq.; xxiii. 53; Acts
i. 133 xii. 12; xvi. 13; xx.6[T Trmrg. drov]; xxv. 10;
exvin 14°" Rooiv: 15 5"tx) 2632) Co) Hr 1759Cali 11. 5s
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. xvii. 15; after verbs denoting motion
(see éxet, b.3 dxov, 1b.) it ean be rendered whither [cf.
W. §54, 7; B. 71 (62)], Mt. xxviii. 16; Lk. x.15 xxiv.
28; 1 Co. xvi. 6. b. when (like Lat. ubi i.q. eo
tempore quo, quom): Ro. v. 20 (Eur. Iph. Taur. 320),
[but al. take od in Ro. l.c. locally].
dds, (cos), relative adv., as often as; with the ad-
dition of dv, as often soever as, 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. [RG; ef.
W. § 42, 5a.; B. § 139, 34]; also of éav, [LT Tr WH
in 1 Co. le.]; Rev. xi. 6. [(Lys., Plat., al.)]*
ooye, for ds ye, see ye, 2.
doves, -a, -ov, and once (1 Tim. ii. 8) of two termina-
tions (as in Plato, legg. 8 p. 831 d.; Dion. Hal. antt. 5,
71 fin.; cf. W. § 11, 1; B. 26 (23); the fem. occurs in
the N. T. only in the passage cited); fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for Ton (cf. Grimm, Exgt.
Hdbch. on Sap. p. 81 [and reff. s. v. dysos, fin.]) ; un-
defiled by sin, free from wickedness, religiously observing
every moral obligation, pure, holy, pious, (Plato, Gorg.
p- 507 b. wept péev dvO@parovs Ta TpornKovta mpdtTer
Sika’ dv mpatro, wepi b¢ Oeovs Gata. The distinction
between Sikacos and dovos is given in the same way by
Polyb. 23, 10, 8; Schol. ad Eurip. Hec. 788; Charit. 1,
10; [for other exx. see Trench § lxxxviii.; Wetstein on
Eph. iv. 24; but on its applicability to N. T. usage see
Trench u. s.; indeed Plato elsewh. (Euthyphro p. 12 e.)
makes dikaos the generic and dows the specific
term]); of men: Tit. i. 8; Heb. vii. 26; of dovot Tov Beod,
the pious towards God, God’s pious worshippers, (Sap.
iv. 15 and often in the Psalms); so in a peculiar and
pre-eminent sense of the Messiah [A. V. thy Holy One]:
Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35, after Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10; yeipes (Aes-
chyl. cho. 378; Soph. O. C. 470), 1 Tim. ii. 8. of God,
holy: Rev. xv. 4; xvi. 5, (also in prof. auth. occasion-
456
bo0s
ally of the gods; Orph. Arg. 27; hymn. 77, 2; of God
in Deut. xxxii. 4 for yw; Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 17 for yon,
cf. Sap. v. 19); ta dova Aavid, the holy things (of God)
promised to David, i. e. the Messianic blessings, Acts
xiii. 34 fr. Is. lv. 3.*
dovétys, -nTos, 7, (Gatos), piety towards God, fidelity in
observing the obligations of piety, holiness: joined with
dixatooivn (see Govos [and dixaociv, 1 b.]): Lk. i. 75;
Eph. iv. 24; Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,4. (Xen.,
Plat., Isocr., al.; Sept. for \w, Deut. ix. 5; for ofA, 1 K. ix.
4.) [Meinke in St. u. Krit. 84 p. 743; Schmidt ch. 181.] *
dolws, (dovos), [fr. Eur. down], adv., piously, holily:
joined with d:caiws, 1 Th. ii. 10 (dyv@s Kat dciws x. de
kaias, Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7).*
oopn, -7s, 7, (dC [q. v.]), a smell, odor: In. xii. 3;
2 Co. ii. 14; @avarov (LT Tr WH éx @av.), such an odor
as is emitted by death (i. e. by a deadly, pestiferous
thing, a dead body), and itself causes death, 2 Co. ii.
16; ¢wis (or ek fw7s) such as is diffused (or emitted) by
life, and itself imparts life, ibid. [A. V. both times
savor]; dopy evodias, Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18; see edow-
dia, b. (Tragg., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; in Hom. 6873
Sept. for m1.) *
Seos, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], a relative adj. corre-
sponding to the demon. togovros either expressed or un-
derstood, Lat. quantus, -a,-um; used a. of space
[as great as]: 76 pnKos adtns (Rec. adds rocovrév éorw)
doov kai [GT Tr WH om. kai] 76 mAaros, Rev. xxi. 16;
of time [as long as]: éf’ dcov xpévov, for so long time
as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 89; Gal. iv. 1; also
without a prep., dcov ypdvov, Mk. ii. 19; neut. éf’ daor,
as long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet.i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 25);
ere puxpov Ocov daor, yet a little how very, how very, (Vulg.
modicum [ali |quantulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Heb.
x. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp.
213; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; W. 247 (231)
note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul-
titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as:
neut. dgov, Jn. vi. 11; plur. dao1, as many (men) as, all
who, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. iii.10; Acts iv. 6, 34; xiii. 48;
Ro, ii. 123: 'vi./33 \ Gal. ail: 10; 27 5) Phill i155: 1 Tim. yi.
1; Rev. ii. 24; doae émayyeAiar, 2 Co. i. 20; doa ipnaria,
Acts ix. 39; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often whatsoever],
M¢. xvii. 12; Mk. x. 215 Lk. xi. 8; xii. 3; Ro. iii, 19; xv.
4; Jude 10; Rev.i.2. mavres dcot, [all as many as],
Mt. xxii. 10 [here T WH 7. ots]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8;
Acts v. 36 sq.; neut. mavra dca [all things whatsoever, all
that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Lk.
xviii. 22; Jn. iv. 29 [T WH Trirg. a. 4], 39 [T WH Tr
txt. w.@]; moda oa, Jn. xxi. 25 RG, (Hom. II. 22, 380;
Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 3). door... odrot, Ro. viii. 14; dca
.. tadra, Phil. iv. 8; dca... év rovros, Jude 10; daa
.. avtoi, Jn. i. 12; Gal. vi. 16. doo ay or eav, how many
soever, as many soever as [cf. W. § 42, 3]; foll. by an
indic. pret. (see av, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56; by an indic. pres.
Rev. iii. 19; by a subjune. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28;
vi. 11; Lk. ix. 5 [Ree.]; Acts ii. 39 [here Lehm. obs ay];
Rey. xiii. 154 dé¢a dv, Mt. xviii. 18; Jn. xi. 22; xvi. 13
v4
ooTrEp
[RG]; mavra 60a ay, all things whatsoever : foll. by sub-
junc. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjune. aor., Mt. xxi. 22;
xxiii. 3; Acts iii. 22. dca in indirect disc.; how many
things: Lk. ix.10; Acts ix. 16; xv.12; 2 Tim.i.18. c.
of importance: 6éca, how great things, i.e. how ex-
traordinary, in indir. disc., Mk. iii. 8 [Lmrg. a]; v.
19 sq.; Lk. viii. 39; Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [al. take it of
num ber in these last two exx. how many; cf. b. above];
how great (i. e. bitter), xaxd, Acts ix. 13. d. of
measure and degree, in comparative sentences, acc.
neut. dgov... waddov trepiaasrepor, the more... so much
the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 36; xaé’ écov
with a compar., by so much as with the compar. Heb. iii.
3; xa@ écov ... kata Ttocodvrov [rocovro L.T Tr WH],
Heb. vii. 20, 22; na® dcov (inasmuch) as foll. by ovrws,
Heb. ix. 27; tooovr@ with a compar. foll. by éo@ with
a compar., by so much...as, Heb. i. 4 (Xen. mem. 1,
4,40; Cyr. 7, 5,5 sq.); without rocovro, Heb. viii. 6
[A. V. by how much|; tocott@ paddov, dom (without
paddov), Heb. x. 25; daa... tocodrov, how much... so
much, Rev. xviii. 7; ef édcov, for as much as, in so far
as, without éxt rocovro, Mt. xxv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13.
Oomep, 77Ep, OmeEp, See Gs, 7, 6, 10.
eoréov, contr. daroiv, gen. -ov, 7d, [akin to Lat. os,
ossis; Curtius § 213, cf. p. 41], a bone: Jn. xix. 36; plur.
dorea, Lk. xxiv. 39; gen. doréwv, (on these uncontr.
forms cf. [WH. App. p. 157]; W.§ 8, 2d.; [B. p. 13
(12)]), Mt. xxiii. 27; Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mrg. br.]; Heb.
xi. 22. (From Hom. down; Sept. very often for oxy.) *
doris, jjrts, 6,7e (separated by a hypodiastole [comma],
to distinguish it from 671; but L T Tr write 6 7, without
a hypodiastole [ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 111], leaving a little
space between 6 and m1; [WH dri]; cf. W. 46 (45 sq.);
[Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr.
§ 411]), gen. ovrwos (but of the oblique cases only the
ace. neut. 6,7. and the gen. drov, in the phrase €ws érov,
are found in the N. T.), [fr. Hom. down], comp. of és
and tis, hence prop. any one who; i.e. 1. whoever,
every one who: doris simply, in the sing. chiefly at the
beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in
Matt.; w. an indic. pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice); Mk. viii.
34 (where L Tr WH et rs); Lk. xiv. 27; neut. Mt. xviii.
28 Rec.; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RG Trmrg.], 41; xxiii.
12, etc.; Jas. ii. 10 RG; plur. otriwes, whosoever (all those
who): w. indic. pres., Mk. iv. 20; Lk. viii. 15; Gal. v. 4;
w. indic. aor., Rev. i. 7; ii. 24; xx. 4; mas doris, w. indic.
pres. Mt. vii. 24; w. fut. Mt. x. 32; doris w. subjune.
(where a is wanting very rarely [cf. W. § 42, 3 (esp.
fin.); B. § 139, 31]) aor. (having the force of the fut.
pf. in Lat.), Mt. xviii. 4 Ree.; Jas. ii. 10 LT Tr WH.
doris dv w. subjune. aor. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mt. x. 33 [RG
T]; xii. 50; w. subjune. pres. Gal. v. 10 [é4v T Tr WH];
neut. w. subjunc. aor., Lk. x. 35; Jn. xiv. 13 [Trmrg.
WH mrg. pres. subjunc.]; xv. 16 [Trmrg. WH mrg.
pres. subjunc.]; with subjunce. pres., Jn. ii. 5; 1 Co. xvi.
2(Tr WH édv; WH mre. aor. subjunc.]; 6 édv re for 6,70
dy w. subjunc. aor. Eph. vi. 8 [RG]; way 6,rc dv or édv
w. subjune. pres., Col. iii. 17, 23 [Rec.; cf. B. § 139, 19;
457
oo pus
W. § 42, 3]. 2. it refers to a single person or thing,
but so that regard is had to a general notion or
class to which this individual person or thing belongs,
and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as,
of such a nature that, (cf. Kiihner § 554 Anm. 1, ii. p.
905; [Jelf § 816, 5]; Liicke on 1 Jn. i. 2, p. 210 sq.):
nyovpevos, oars mommavet, Mt. ii. 6; add, Mt. vii. 26; xiii.
O23 XV. 283 xx. 1; xxv. 1; Mk. xv. 7;: Lkoii. 103 viii
37; villi. 3; Jn. viii. 25; xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.]; Acts
xi. 28; xvi. 12; xxiv. 1; Ro. xi. 4; 1Co.v. 1; vii. 18
[Tdf. et rus]; Gal. iv. 24, 26; v.19; Phil. ii. 20; Col. ii.
23; 2 Tim.i.5; Heb. ii. 3; viii. 5; x. 11; xii. 5; Jas. iv.
14; 1Jn.i. 2; Rev. i. 12; ix.4; xvii. 12; 6 vads tov beod
dyids €ortwy, oirives €ote bweis (where oirwes makes refer-
ence to dyos) and such are ye, 1 Co. iii. 17 [some refer it
to vads |. 3. Akin to the last usage is that whereby
it serves to give a reason, such as equiv. to seeing
that he, inasmuch as he: Ro. xvi. 12 [here Lchm. br. the
el.]; Eph. iii. 13; [Col. iii. 5]; Heb. viii. 6; plur., Mt. vii.
LS? Acts xi4vs vil. 11 5) Ro. 1425, 32:0 115 3 -vi..25 bx
4; xvi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 10; [Phil. iv. 3 (where see Bp.
Lghtéft.)]; 1. Tim. i..4; Tit: 1.11; 1 Pet. ii. 11. 4.
Ace. to a later Greek usage it is put for the interroga-
tive ris in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57;
Lachmann, larger ed., vol. i. p. xliii; B. 253 (218); cf.
W. 167 (158)); thus in the N.T. the neut. 6, rz stands
for ri i. gq. dca ri in Mk. ii. 16 T Tr WH [cf. 7 WH mrg.];
ix. 11, 28, (Jer. ii. 36; 1 Chr. xvii. 6—for which in the
parallel, 2S. vii. 7, wa ri appears; Barnab. ep. 7, 9
[Qwhere see Miiller); cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 125; Evang.
Nicod. pars i. A. xiv. 3 p. 245 and note; ef. also Soph.
Lex. s. v. 4]); many interpreters bring in Jn. viii. 25
here; but respecting it see dpyq, 1 b. 5. It differs
scarcely at all from the simple relative és (cf. Matthiae
p- 1073; B. § 127,18; [Kriiger § 51, 8; Ellicott on Gal.
iv. 24; ef. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to
Modern Greek, App. § 24]; but cf. C.F. A. Fritzsche
in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 182 sq., who stoutly denies
it): Lk. ii..4; ix. 30; Acts xvii. 10; xxiii. 14; xxviii.
18; Eph. i. 23. 6. ws drov, on which see éws, II.
1 b. 8. p. 268° mid.
dotpaKivos, -n, -ov, (dotpaxov baked clay), made of
clay, earthen: oKein dotpdaxwa, 2 Tim. ii. 20; with the
added suggestion of frailty, 2Co.iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1, 11;
Xxxix. (xxxii.) 14; Is. xxx. 14, ete.; Hippocr., Anthol.,
[al.].) *
dodpnors, -ews, 7, (doppaivoua [to smell]), the sense of
smell, smelling: 1 Co. xii. 17. (Plat. Phaedo p. 111 b.
[(yet ef. Stallbaum ad loc.)]; Aristot., Theophr.)*
dois [or -pis, so R Tr in Eph. vi. 14; Gin Mt. iii. 4;
ef. Chandler §§ 658, 659; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -vos, 9, fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. the hip (loin), as that
part of the body where the ¢avy was worn (Sept. for
pnd): Mt. iii,4; Mk.i.6; hence mepifavyvada ras
éoptvas, to gird, gird about, the loins, Lk. xii. 35; Eph.
vi. 14; and dva{avv. ras do. [to gird up the loins], 1 Pet.
i. 13; on the meaning of these metaph. phrases see dva-
Covvupe. 2. a loin, Sept. several times for oon,
6Tav 458 OTL
the (two) loins, where the Hebrews thought the genera-
tive power (semen) resided [?]; hence xaprés ris dapios,
fruit of the loins, offspring, Acts ii. 30 (see xapmés,
1 fin.); &&€pxeoOa ex THis daguos tivds, to come forth out
of one’s loins i. e. derive one’s origin or descent from
one, Heb. vii. 5 (see é&€pyopar, 2 b.); ere ev rH doprt
twoés, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor),
Heb. vii. 10.*
érayv, a particle of time, comp. of dre and dy, at the time
that, whenever, (Germ. dann wann; wann irgend) ; used
of things which one assumes will really occur, but
the time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fix
(in prof. auth. often also of things which one assumes
can occur, but whether they really will or not he does
not know; hence like our in case that, as in Plato, Prot.
p- 360 b.; Phaedr. p. 256 e.; Phaedo p. 68 d.); [ef. W.
§ 42,5; B. § 139, 33]; a. with the subjunctive
present: Mt. vi. 2,5; x. 23; Mk. xiii. 11 [here Ree.
aor.]; xiv. 7; Lk. xi. 36; xii. 11; xiv. 12 sq.; xxi. 7;
Jn. vii. 27; xvi. 21; Acts xxiii. 35; 1 Co. iii. 4; 2 Co.
xiii. 9; 1 Jn. v. 2; Rev. x. 7; xviii. 9; preceded by a
specification of time: és ths nuépas ekeivns, drav etc.,
Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; foll. by rére, 1 Th. v. 3; 1 Co.
xv. 28; i. q. as often as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2;
Jn. viii. 44; Ro. ii. 145 at the time when i. q. as long as,
De Sa BEES dhs be Se b. with the subjunctive
aorist: i.q. the Lat. quando acciderit, ut w. subjunc.
pres., Mt. v. 115 xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32;
MK. iv. 15 sq. 29 [RG], 31 sq.; xiii. 28; Lk. vi. 22, 26;
Vili. 13; xi. 24; xii. 54 sq.; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 45 xvi.
21; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Liumrg. fut.]; Rev. ix. 5. 1. q.
quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Mk. viii. 38;
ix. 9; xii. 23 [G Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 25; Lk. ix.
26; xvi. 4,9; xvii. 10; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 31; xiii. 19; xiv.
29 exve 26s avis 4alon ol -exxt 16> Acts xxiily 35)s) exlv.
22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv. 24 [here LT Tr WH pres. ], 27
(where the meaning is, ‘when he shall have said that
the imdrafis predicted in the Psalm is now accom-
plished’; cf. Meyer ad loc.); xvi. 2 sq. 5,12; 2 Co.x.
6; Col. iv.16; 1 Jn. ii. 28(LTTr WH éav]; 2 Th.i. 10;
Heb. i. 6 (on which see eicdyw, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4;
xvii. 10; xx. 7. foll. by rove, Mt. ix. 15; xxiv.15; xxv.
31; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v.35; xxi. 20; Jn. viii. 28;
1 Co. xiii. 10 [G LT Tr WH om. tore]; xv. 28, 54; Col.
iii. 4. c. Acc. to the usage of later authors, a
usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more
elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.); B. 222 (192) sq.;
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq.; WH. App. p.171; for exx.
additional to these given by W. and B. u. s. see Soph.
Lex. s. v.; ef. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to
Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; a.
future: when,[Mt. v.11 Tdf.]; Lk. xiii. 28 T Tr txt. WH
mrg.; [1 Tim. v. 11 L mrg.]; as often as, Rev. iv. 9 (cf.
Bleek ad loc.). B. present: Mk. xi. 25 LT Tr
WH; xii. 7 Trtxt.5°(Lk x<2!femrsi): y- very
rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as often as, [when-
soever], Grav eOewpovv, Mk. iii. 11 (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex.
xvii. 11; 1S. xvii. 34; see ay, II. 1). 8. As in Byz-
antine auth. i. q. dre, when, with the indic. aorist: drapy
jvogev, Rev. viii. 1 L T Tr WH; [add drap dpe éyévero,
Mk. xi. 19 T Tr txt. WH, cf. B. 223 (193); but al. take
this of customary action, whenever evening came (i. e.
every evening, R. V.)]. dérav does not occur in the Epp.
of Peter and Jude.
éte, a particle of time, [fr. Hom. down], when; ale
with the Indicative [W. 296 (278) sq.]; indic. pres-
ent (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad
Vig. p. 913 sq.), while: Jn. ix. 4; Heb. ix.17; w. an his-
torical pres. Mk. xi.1. w. the imperfect (of a thing
done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41;
Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xii. 6; xxii. 20; Ro. vi.
205' vil..55° Co, xiii. 11; Galas $5. Col. i750) abe
4; 2 Th. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii.20. w. an indic. aorist, Lat.
quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25;
xiii. 26,48; xvii. 25 [RG]; xxi. 34; Mk. 1. 32; iv. 10;
viii. 19; xv. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [8 LT WH],
13; xxil. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where
Tadf..as], etc.; Acts 1.135 vil. 12, 39% xi. 25 xxi 5,85;
XXVil. 39; xxviii. 16; Ro. xiii. 11 (“than when we gave
in our allegiance to Christ;” Lat. guom Christo nomen
dedissemus, [R. V. than when we first believed]); Gal. i.
153 111,12; 14:5 iv.4) Philsiv. 15s Heb:vily 10 skev.
IL svi 3515, 7.9, 122) wills Ietes-ssovalsomMteextieor
Mk. ii. 25; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mrg. dre eiSev, when it had
presented itself to his sight [but best texts dru: because
he saw ete.]). éyévero, ore érédegev, A common phrase
in Mt., viz. vii. 28; xi. 1; xiii. 53; xix.1; xxvi. 1. dre
... Tore, Mt. xxi.1; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indic. perfect,
since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11; w.
the indic. future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25;
xvi. 25; Ro. ii. 16 [RG T Tr txt. WH mrg.] (where
Lehm. 7 [al. al.]); 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor.
Subjunctive: ws dv #&, dre eimnte (where drav
might have been expected), until the time have come,
when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 35 [RG (cf. Tr br.)]; ef.
Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae
evang. p. 92; W.298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400; cf. B. 231
sq. (199)].
6, Te, 7) TE, TO, Te, See TE 2 a.
ért [properly neut. of doris], a conjunction [fr. Hom.
down ], (Lat. quod [cf. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149,
3]), marking
I. the substance or contents (of a statement),
that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring
(where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.): avayyéAAew,
Acts xiv. 27; dinyeioOar, Acts ix. 27; edetv, Mt. xvi. 20;
xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; Aéyew, Mt.
iii. 9; viii. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv. 7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv.
9 [T Tr WH om. L br. érc]; ix. 2, and very often; mpo-
etpynxevat, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the 67: in Acts xiv. 22 sup-
ply Aéyovres, contained in the preceding mapaxadodvres
[ef. B. $151, 11]; dre after ypapew, 1 Co.ix.10; 1Jn. ii.
12-14; paprupeiv, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; ili. 28; iv. 44;
dporoyeiv, Heb. xi. 13; Sexview, Mt. xvi. 21; dydody, 1
Co.i. 11; diSacxerv, 1 Co. xi. 14. after eudbavigew, Heb.
xi. 14; d9Aov (€oriv), 1 Co. xv.27; Gal. iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi.
OTe 459
7 (where LT TrWH om. 8ydov [and then ére simply
introduces the reason, because (B. 358 (308) to the con-
trary) ]); pavepotpar (for havepdr yiverat mepi euod), 2 Co.
iii. 3; 1Jn.ii.19. It is added—to verbs of swearing,
and to forms of oath and affirmation: duryu, Rev.
X.6; (@ eyw (see (dw, I. 1 p. 270*), Ro. xiv. 11; pdprupa
tov Oedv émixadovdpat, 2 Co. i. 23; muoros 6 Oeds, 2 Co. i. 18;
€or adndeva Xpiorov ev euoi, 2 Co. xi. 10; i80d éevamov
tov Geod, Gal. i. 20; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 242
sq-; [W. § 53, 9; B. 394 (338) ];— to verbs of perceiv-
ing, knowing, remembering, etc.: dxovew, Jn. xiv.
28; Brérew, 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22; AeaoOa,
Jn. vi.5; ywookew, Mt. xxi. 45; Lk.x.11; Jn.iv.53; 2
Co. xiii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 5, ete.; after rodro, Ro. vi. 6; eidévat,
Mt. vi. 82; xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 10; Lk. ii. 49; Jn. iv. 42; ix.
20, 24:sq.; Ro. ii. 2; vi. 9; Phil. iv. 15 sq., and very often;
yroortdy éotiv, Acts xxviii. 28; émvywookew, Mk. ii. 8;
Lk. i. 22; Actsiv.13; ériorac@a, Acts xv. 73 voetv, Mt.
xv. 17; dpav, Jas. ii. 24; xatadapBavew, Acts iv. 13; x.
34; ouméva, Mt. xvi. 12; ayvoeiv, Ro. i133 ii. 43 vi. 3,
ete.; dvaywaokew, Mt. xii. 5; xix. 4; pynpovevew, Jn. xvi.
4; prnoOnva, Mt. v. 23; Jn. ii. 22; tmopipynoxew, Jude
5;—to verbs of thinking, believing, judging,
hoping: AoyiferOa, Jn. xi.50 LT Tr WH; after rodro,
Ro. ii. 3; 2 Co. x. 115 vopicew, Mt. v. 17; ota, Jas. i. 7;
meémecopat, Ro. viii. 38; xiv. 14; xv. 14; 2 Tim. i.5, 12;
nerrovbeva, Lk. xviii. 9; 2 Co. ii. 3; Phil. ii. 24; Gal. v.10;
2 Th. iii. 4; Heb. xiii. 18; meorevew, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi.
23; Ro. x. 9; taodauBavew, Lk. vii. 43; Soxeiv, Mt. vi. 7;
xxvi. 53; Jn. xx. 15; éAmitew, Lk. xxiv. 21; 2 Co. xiii.6;
<pivew Toto Ott, 2 Co. v. 14 (15) ; — to verbs of emotion
(where in Lat. now the acc. and inf. is used, now quod):
Oavpatew, Lk. xi. 38; yaipew, Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16;
Phil. iv. 10; 2Jn.4; ev rovr@, drt, Lk. x. 20; cvyyaipey,
Lk. xv. 6,9; perder pot (oo, adr@), Mk. iv. 38; Lk. x. 40;
—to verbs of praising, thanking, blaming, (where
the Lat. uses quod): éemaweiv, Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2,17;
e€opodoyeraOa, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 215 edxapioreiv, Lk.
xviil. 11; xapis To Oe@, Ro. vi. 17; yxdpuv €x@ revi, 1 Tim.
i. 12; €yw xard twos, dru etc. Rev. ii. 4; €yw@ rodro drt, I
have this (which is praiseworthy) that, Rev. ii. 6; add,
Jn. vii. 23 [but here érz is causal; cf. W. § 53, 8b.];
1 Co. vi. 7;— to the verb eiva, when that precedes with
a demons. pron., in order to define more exactly what a
thing is or wherein it may be seen: airy éoriv Ste (Lat.
quod), Jn. iii. 19; év rovt@ drt, 1 Jn. iii. 16; iv. 9 sq. 13,
etc. ; mepi rovrov drt, Jn. xvi. 19; ovx otov Sé dre (see oios),
Ro. ix. 6;—to the verbs yiveoOat and eivac with an in-
terrog. pron., as ti yéyovey Ort etc., what has come to pass
that? our how comes it that? Jn. xiv. 22; ri [L mre. ris]
éotw avOpwros, ott, Heb. ii. 6 fr. Ps. viii. 5.
ovTos (sc. eotiv), ort, Lk. iv. 36; moramds earw ovros, drt,
Mt. viii. 27; ris 7 Sway} arn, ort, Mk. i. 27 Rec.; add
Mk. iv. 41. 2. in elliptical formulas (B. 358
(307); [W. 585 (544) note]): ri dre ete., i.g. ri eoru Ort,
[A. V. how is it that], wherefore? Mk. ii. 16 RG L [al. om.
ti; cf. 5 below, and see datis, 4]; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v. 4,
9. ov drt for od A€yw drt, our not that, not as though, cf.
, c ¢
Tis 6 Noyos
ty
OTt
B. § 150, 1; [W.597 (555)]; thus, Jn. vi.46; vii. 22; 2
Co. i. 24; iii. 5; Phil. iii, 12; iv. 11. 6re is used for els
exewo Ore (in reference to the fact that [Eng. seeing that, in
that]): thus in Jn. ii. 18; [Meyer (see his note on 1 Co.
i. 26) would add many other exx., among them Jn. ix. 17
(see below)]; for ev rott@ dri, Ro. v. 8; for wept rovrov
dre, concerning this, that: so after Nadeiv, Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv.
41 [al. take 67 in these exx. and those after dsahoy. which
follow in a causal sense; cf. W. as below (Ellicott on
2 Thess. iii. 7)]; after Aéyew, Jn. ix. 17 [see above] ; after
SiaroyiferOa, Mt. xvi. 8; Mk. viii. 17, (after drooréA\New
emtato\as, 1 Mace. xii. 7). See exx. fr. classic authors in
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 248 sq.; [Meyer, u.s.; cf. W. § 53,
8b. ]. 3. Noteworthy is the attraction, not un-
common, by which the noun that would naturally be the
subject of the subjoined clause, is attracted by the verb
of the principal clause and becomes its object [cf. W.
§ 66,5; B§ 151, 1 a.]; as, otdare ri oixiay Sreava, dre
éoriv amapyn, for otdare, te 7 oikia Er. kTA., 1 Co. xvi. 15;
also after eidévac and ideiv, Mk. xii. 34; 1 Th. ii. 1; so
after other verbs of knowing, declaring, etc.: Mt.
EXVa24 se 1x91 Acts Ii. LO ix 205) 1kC oni 202 he
ii. 4; Rev. xvii. 8, etc.; dv tpets Aéyere Ott Beds tpav
éott, for mepi ob (cf. Lk. xxi. 5) ipets N€yere Ort, In. viii.
54. 4. As respects construction, drt is joined
in the N. T. a. to the indicative even where the
opinion of another is introduced, and therefore accord-
ing to class. usage the optative should have been used;
as, SueoreiAato... iva pndevi cimwow, ott altos eotw 6
Xptords, Mt. xvi. 20; add, 21; iv. 12; xx. 30, ete. b.
to that subjunctive after od py which differs scarcely
at all from the future (see pn, IV. 2 p. 411*; [ef. W. 508
(473)]): Mt. v. 20; xxvi. 29 [RG; al. om. dre]; Mk. xiv.
25; Lk. xxi. 32; Jn. xi. 56 (where before dr supply d0-
cette, borrowed from the preceding doxet); but in Ro. iii.
8 ore before roinowpey (hortatory subjune. [cf. W. § 41 a.
4a.; B. 245 (211)]) is recitative [see 5 below], depend-
ing on Aéyovor [W. 628 (583); B. § 141, 3]. c. to
the infinitive, by a mingling of two constructions,
common even in classic Grk., according to which the
writer beginning the construction with ére falls into the
construction of the ace. with inf.: Acts xxvii. 10; cf.
W. 339 (318) N.2; [§ 63, 2c.; B. 383 (328)]. On the
anacoluthon found in 1 Co. xii. 2, ace. to the reading 6ére
dre (which appears in cod. Sin. also [and is adopted by
Lbr. T Tr WH (yet cf. their note)]), cf. B. 383 (328)
sq: 5. dre is placed before direct discourse (‘re-
citative’ dr) [B.$ 139,51; W.§65,3c.; § 60,9 (and
Moulton’s note) ]: Mt. ii. 23 [?]; vii. 23; xvi. 7; xxi. 16;
XXVi. 72, 74; xxvii. 48; Mk. [ii. 16 T Tr WH (see 2
above); but see doris, 4]; vi. 23; xii. 19 [cf. B. 237
(204)]; Lk. i. 61; ii. 23; iv.43; xv. 27; Jn.i. 20; iv,
17; xy. 25; xvi. 17; Acts xv. 1; Heb. xi. 18; 1 Jn. iv.
20; Rev. iii. 17, ete.; most frequently after Aéya, q. v.
II. 1 a., p. 373" bot. [Noteworthy is 2 Thess. iii. 10, cf.
B. § 139, 53.]
II. the reason why anything is said to be or to be
done, because, since, for that, for, (a causal conjunc. ; Lat.
ov 460 ou
quod, quia, quom, nam) ; [on the diff. betw. it and yap
ef. Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 70]; a. it is added to
a speaker’s words to show what ground he gives for his
opinion; as, paxdptos ete. dr, Mt. v. 4-12; xiii. 16;
Lk. vi. 20 sq.; xiv. 14; after ovat, Mt. xi. 21; xxiii. 13—-
15, 23, 25, 27, 29; Lk. vi. 24sq.; x.18; xi. 42-44, 46,
52; Jude 11; cf. further, Mt. vii. 18; xvii. 15; xxv. 8;
Mk. v. 9; ix. 38 [G Trmrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; Lk.
vil. 47; xxiii. 40; Jn.i. 80; v. 27; ix. 16; xvi. 9-11, 14,
16 [T Tr WH om. L br. el.]; Actsi.5, and often ;—or is
added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own
opinion: Mt. ii. 18; ix.36; Mk. iii. 30; vi.34; Jn. ii.
25; Acts i.17;—or, in general, by a teacher, and often
in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or
views: Mt. v.45; 1Jn.iv.18; 2Jn.7; Rev. iii. 10. b.
ért makes reference to some word or words that precede
or immediately follow it [ef. W. § 23, 5; § 53, 8 b.; B.
§ 127, 6]; as, iia rodro, Jn. vili.47; x.17; xii. 39; 1Jn.
iii. 1,ete. dia ri; Ro. ix. 32; 2Co.xi.11. yapw Tivos ;
1 Jn. iii. 12. ovrws, Rev. iii. 16. ev rovr@, 1 Jn. iii. 20.
ére in the protasis, Jn. i. 50 (51); xx. 29. It is followed
by dua toto, Jn. xv. 19. odx dre... GAX Sri, not be-
. . but because, Jn. vi. 263 xii. 6.
III. On the combination ws dru see as, I. 3.
[dre interrog., i. e. 6, Te or 6 Tt, See dotis, 4 (and ad
init.).]
éTov, see doris ad init.
ov, see ds, 7, 6, II. 11.
ov before a consonant, ovxk before a vowel with a
smooth breathing, and ovx before an aspirated vowel ;
but sometimes in the best codd. ody occurs even before
a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mre. have
adopted ody idov, Acts ii. 7; LT oty "Iovdaixas, Gal. ii.
14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L ody éddiyos, Acts xix. 23;
ovx jyannoay, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise ovx« before
an aspirate, as ovk €ornkev, Jn. vill. 44 T; [odx Cvexev,
2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (ov« edpov, Lk. xxiv. 3; [otk imapyet,
Acts iii. 6] in cod. 8 [also C*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 Esdr.
iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviii. 11, 26]); ef. W.§ 5, 1d.
14; B.7; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875,
pp- 54-58; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848,
p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Td/ Sept., ed. 4, Proleg.
pp- Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv.
no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii. no. 5);
Kuenen and Cobet, N. 'T. ete. p. Ixxxvii. sq.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 20 sq.; WH. Intr. §§ 405 sqq., and App. p. 143 sq.];
Sept. for x9, pS, [85 a particle of negation, not (how
it differs fr. yn has been explained in yy, ad init.) ; it is
used 1. absol. and accented, ov, nay, no, [W. 476
(444)]: in answers, 6 6€ dnow: ov, Mt. xiii. 29; dre-
xpibn: ov, Jn. i. 21; [xxi. 5], cf. vii. 12; repeated, od ov,
it strengthens the negation, nay, nay, by no means, Mt.
v.37; rw ier 76 od ov, let your denial be truthful, Jas.
v. 12; on 2 Co. i. 17-19, see vat. 2. It is joined to
other words, —to a finite verb, simply to deny that
what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of
the sentence: Mt. i. 25 (od« éeyivwoxev adrnv); Mk. iii.
25; Lk. vi. 43; Jn. x. 28; Acts vii. 5; Ro. i. 16, and
cause .
times without number. It has the same force when
conjoined to participles: as ov« dépa dépwv, 1 Co. ix.
26; ovK dvros aiT@ rékvov, at the time when he had no
child, Acts vii. 5 (4 évros would be, although he had no
child); add, Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 14; 2 Co. iv. 8; Gal.
iv. 8,27; Col. ii. 19; Phil. iii. 3; Heb. xi. 35; 1 Pet.i. 8;
6... ob« dy roumuny, Jn. x. 12 (where ace. to class. usage
py must have been employed, because such a person is
imagined as is not a shepherd; [cf. B. 351 (301) and
pn, I. 5b.]). in relative sentences: eioly... ruvés of od
muotevovow, Jn. vi. 64; add, Mt. x. 88; xii. 2; Lk. vi. 2;
Ro. xv. 21; Gal. iii. 10, etc.; od« gor bs and oddév eorw
6 foll. by a fut.: Mt. x. 26; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2; ris éore,
ds ov foll. by a pres. indic.: Acts xix. 35; Heb. xii. 7; ef.
W. 481 (448); B. 355 (305); in statements introduced
by dre after verbs of understanding, perceiving, saying,
etc.: Jn. v.42; viii. 55, etc.; dre od (where ov« is pleo-
nastic) after dpvetoOa, 1 Jn. ii. 22; cf. B. § 148,13; [W.
§ 65, 2 8.];—to an infin., where py might have been ex
pected: ris &rt xpeia xara thv tagw MeAywo. erepov dv
ioracOa iepéa Kai ov Kara Thy Ta€w Aapov héyerOa, Heb.
vii. 11 (where the difficulty is hardly removed by saying
[e. g. with W. 482 (449) ] that od belongs only to cara rip
ragw *Aap., not to the infin.). it serves to deny other
parts of statements: ovx év copia Adyov, 1 Co. i. 17; od
peAan, ovk ev TAaEt ALOivats, 2 Co. iii. 3, and many other
exx.;—to deny the object, €deos (RG €deov) béda@, od
Ouciav, Mt. ix.13; xii. 7; ovd« eve Séyerar, Mk. ix. 37. It
blends with the term to which it is prefixed into a single
and that an aflirmative idea [W. 476 (444); cf. B. 347
(298) ]; as, ov« aw, to prevent, hinder, Acts xvi. 7; xix.
30, (cf., on this phrase, Herm. ad Vig. p. 887 sq.); ovdx
éxa, to be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 25, (see ya, I. 2a.
p: 266") ; ra ovK avyxovra [or & ov« avijxev, LT Tr WH],
unseemly, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (see yn, I. 5 d. fin. p.
410°; [cf. B. § 148, 7a.; W. 486 (452)]); often so as to
form 2 litotes; as, ovK dyvoéw, to know well, 2 Co. ii. 11
(Sap. xii. 10) ; od« ddcyot, not a few, i. e. very many, Acts
xvil. 4, 12°; xix!'23%sq.;° xv./23 xiv. 28; xxv. 20’; ‘ov
moAat Hepat, a few days, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. ii. 12; Actsi.
5; ov moAdv, Acts xxvii. 14; ov perpiws, Acts xx. 12; ovk
donpos, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean ete.], Acts
Xxi. 395; ov« ék pérpou, In. iii. 34. it serves to limit the
term to which it is joined: od mavras, not altogether, not
entirely (see mavtas, c. B.); ov mas, not any and every one,
Mt. vii. 21; plur. od mavres, not all, Mt. xix. 11; Ro. ix.
6; x. 16; ov maca odpé, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. xv.
39; ov mavtl td ad, not to all the people, Acts x. 41;
on the other hand, when od is joined to the verb, was
... ov must be rendered no one, no, (as in Hebrew, now
bet Se RE ma a7" 6 3; cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et
Chald. p. 513 sq.): Lk. i.37; Eph. v. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 21;
Rev. xxii. 3; maca odp&...ov w. a verb, no flesh, no
mortal, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro. iii. 20; Gal. if.
16; cf. W. § 26,1; [B.121(106)]. Joined to a noun
it denies and annuls the idea of the noun; as, rév ov
Aady, a people that is not a people (Germ. ein Nichtvolk,
a no-people), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; én” ove ever,
2
ov
[R. V. with that which is no nation], Ro. x. 19 (so py 85;
5s x5, a no-god, Deut. xxxii. 21; yy x5, a not-wood, Is.
x. 15; ovK dpxvepevs, 2 Mace. iv. 13; 9 od diddvors, Thue.
1, 137, 4; 7 ov mepireixiors 3, 95, 2; 4 ovk eEovaia 5, 50,
3; d¢ dmetpoovvay ... kovk amddecEv, Eur. Hippol. 196,
and other exx. in Grk. writ.; non sutor, Hor. sat. 2, 3,
106; non corpus, Cic. acad. 1, 39 fin.); cf. W. 476 (444);
[B. § 148, 9]; 4 od« myamnuen, Ro. ix. 25; of ov« Aren-
pevor, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega-
tive, a. it strengthens the negation: ov kpiva ovdeva,
Jn. viii. 15; add, Mk. v. 87; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); 08 ov« fv
ovdera ovdeis keipevos, Lk. xxiii. 53 [see ovdérw]; ovK.- -
ovdev, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2; Jn. vi. 63; xi. 49; xii. 19;
xv. 5; ov weAer oor wept ovdervds, Mt. xxii. 16 ; odK... ovKETL,
Acts viii. 39; cf. Matthiae § 609, 3; Kiihner ii. § 516; W.
§ 55, 9b.; [B. § 148, 11]. b. as in Latin, it changes
a negation into an affirmation (cf. Matthiae § 609, 2;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 sq.; W.§55,9a.; B.§ 148,
12); ov mapa TovTo ovK Eat ek TOV GwpaTos, not on this
account is it not of the body, i. e. it belongs to the body,
does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15; od duva-
peda & ciSopev kal nkovoapev pu adeiv, we are unable not
to speak [ A.V. we cannot but speak], Acts iv. 20. 4.
It is used in disjunctive statements where one
thing is denied that another may be established [W.
§ 55, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)]: ox... ddda, Lk. viii. 52;
xxiv. 6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. i. 33; vii. 10, 12, 16;
viii. 49; Acts x. 41; Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii.
3; vili.5; Heb. ii. 16, ete.; see adda, II. 1; ovy wa...
av iva, Jn. iii. 17; ody va... add, Jn. Vi. 38; od pdvov
. . GANG Kal, see adda, II. 1 and povos, 2; otc... ef py,
see ei, III. 8c. p. 171°; od py w. subjune. aor. foll. by
ei py, Rev. xxi. 27 [see ef as above, 8. ]. Srelteas
joined to other particles: od py, not at all, by no means,
surely not, in no wise, see yn, IV.; od pnkére w. aor. sub-
june. Mt. xxi. 19 LT Trmrg. WH. py od, where pi is
interroge. (Lat. num) and ov negative [cf. B. 248 (214),
854 (304); W.511 (476)]: Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.;
xi. 22. ef ov, see e?, III. 11 p. 172%. ov yap (see yap, I.
p- 109°), Acts xvi. 37. 6. Asin Hebr. x5 w. impf.,
so in bibl. Grk. od w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatic
prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; cf. W. § 43,
5 c.; also 501 sq. (467); [B. § 139, 64]; Fritzsche on Mt.
p- 259 sq. [ef- p. 252 sq.] thinks otherwise, but not cor-
rectly): Mt. vi. 5; and besides in the moral precepts
of the O. T., Mt. iv. 7; xix. 18; Lk. iv. 12; Acts xxiii.
He Ro} vil.7: 3) xii, 9. 7. ov is used interroga-
tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat.
nonne; [W. § 57, 3a.; B. 247 (213)]): Mt. vi. 26, 30;
xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii.
Qn; Actsax.21; Ro. ix. 21; 1Co.ix.1, 6 sq. 12; Jasin
4, and often; ov« oiSate «rA.; and the like, see eiSa, IT.
1 p. 1748; GAN’ ov, Heb. iii. 16 (see dAdAa, [. 10 p. 28");
ovK droxpivy ovdev; answerest thou nothing at all? Mk.
xiv. 60; xv. 4;— where an exclamation of reproach or
wonder, which denies directly, may take the place of a
negative question: Mk. iv. 13, 38; Lk. xvii. 18; Acts
xiii. 10 [cf. B. § 139, 65]; xxi. 38 (on which see dpa, 1);
461 oveé
ef. W. u.s.; od pi) mim adrd; shall I not drink it? Jn.
xviii. 11; cf. W. p. 512 (477); [ef. B. § 189, 2].
ovd, Tdf. ova [see Proleg. p. 101; cf. Chandler § 892],
ah! ha! an interjection of wonder and amazement:
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 34; 3, 23,24; Dio Cass. 63, 20; called
out by the overthrow of a boastful adversary, Mk. xv. 29.*
ovat, an interjection of grief or of denunciation ; Sept.
chiefly for ‘jm and ‘js; alas! woe! with a dat of pers.
added, Mt. xi. 21; xviii. 7; xxiii. 13-16, 23, 25, 27, 29;
xxiv. 19; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiii. 17; xiv. 21; Lk. vi. 24-26 ;
x. 13; xi. 42-44, 46 sq. 52; xxi. 23; xxii. 22; Jude 11;
Rev. xii. 12 R G Led. min. [see below], (Num. xxi. 29;
Is. iii. 9, and often in Sept.) ; thrice repeated, and foll.
by a dat., Rev. viii. 13 RG LWHurg. [see below]; the
dat. is omitted in Lk. xvii. 1; twice repeated and foll.
by a nom. in place of a voc., Rev. xviii. 10, 16, 19, (Is. i.
24; v. 8-22; Hab. ii. 6, 12, etc.) ; exceptionally, with an
ace. of the pers., in Rev. viii. 13 T Tr WH txt., and xii.
12 LT Tr WH;; this accus., I think, must be regarded
either as an acc. of exclamation (cf. Matthiae § 410), or
as an imitation of the constr. of the acc. after verbs of
injuring, (B. § 131, 14 judges otherwise); with the ad-
dition of awd and a gen. of the evil the infliction of which
is deplored [cf. B. 822 (277); W. 371 (348)], Mt. xviii. 7;
also of éx, Rev. viii.13. Asa substantive, 7 ovai (the
writer seems to have been led to use the fem. by the
similarity of 7 OAies or 7 Tadaurapia; cf. W.179 (169))
woe, calamity: Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14; 8vo ovat, Rev. ix. 12,
(ovat emi oval €orat, Ezek. vii. 26; oval nuas Anerat,
Evang. Nicod. c. 21 [Pars ii. v. 1 (ed. Tdf.)]); so also
in the phrase ovai pot ear woe is unto me, i.e. divine
penalty threatens me, 1 Co. ix. 16, cf. Hos. ix. 12; [Jer. vi.
4]; Epict. diss. 3, 19, 1, (frequent in eccles. writ.).*
ovSapas (fr. ovdapuds, not even one; and this fr. ovdé and
dpos [allied perh. w. dua; cf. Vanicek p. 972; Curtius
§ 600]), adv., fr. Hdt. [and Aeschyl.] down, by no means,
in no wise: Mt. ii. 6.*
ovsé, [fr. Hom. down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction,
compounded of ov and é¢, and therefore prop. i. q. but
not; generally, however, its oppositive force being lost,
it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of e
when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by
Tdf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96; cf. WH. App. p. 146; W.§5,1a.; B.p.
10 sq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a nega-
tion, yet differently from ovre; for the latter connects
parts or members of the same thing, since ré is adjunc-
tive like the Lat. que; but ovd¢ places side by side things
that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?).
There appears to be some mistake here in what is said
about ‘mutual exclusion’ (cf. W. § 55, 6): ovdé, like 8¢,
always makes reference to something preceding; ovre
to what follows also; the connection of clauses nega-
tived by ove is close and internal, so that they are mu-
tually complementary and combine into a unity, whereas
clauses negatived by ovd¢ follow one another much more
loosely, often almost by accident as it were; see W. 1. ¢.,
and esp. the quotations there given from Benfey and
ovoels
Klotz.] It differs from pdé as od does from pn [q. v. ad
jnit.]; after ov, where each has its own verb: Mt. v. 15;
vi. 28; Mk. iv. 22; Lk.vi.44; Actsii. 27; ix. 9; xvii. 24
sq.; Gal. i. 17; iv. 14; ovK oda ovd€ eriorapat, Mk. xiv. 68
RG Lug. [al. odre . . . odre] (Cic. pro Rose. Am. 43
“non novi neque scio”); cf. W. 490 (456) c.; [B. 367
(315) note]; od... ode... ovd€, not... nor... nor, Mt.
Vi. 26; ovdcis... o0de... OSE... OSE, Rev. v. 3 [RG;
ef. B. 367 (315); W. 491 (457)]; od... ovde foll. by a
fut... . od8€ py foll. by subjune. aor. . . . odd, Rev. vil.
16. ov... ov6é¢, the same verb being common to both:
Mt. x. 24; xxv.13; Lk. vi. 43; viii. 17 [cf. W.300 (281) ;
B. 355 (305) cf. § 139, 7]; In. vi. 24; xiii. 16; Acts viii.
21; xvi. 21; xxiv. 18; Ro. ii. 28; ix. 16; Gal. i. 1; iii. 28;
1 Th. v. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 12; Rev. xxi. 23. preceded by
ovr, Mk. viii. 17; — by ovdeis, Mt. ix. 17; — by ia pn,
which is foll. by ovSé... ovdé, where pndé . . . pndé might
have been expected (cf. B. § 148, 8; [W. 474 (442)]):
Rev. ix. 4. ovdé yap, for neither, Jn. viii. 42; Ro. viii.
le 2. also not [A. V. generally neither]: Mt. vi. 15;
xxi. 27; xxv. 45; Mk. xi. 26 [RL]; Lk. xvi. 31; Jn. xv.
4; Ro.iv. 15; xi. 21; 1 Co. xv. 13, 16; Gal. i. 12 (ovde
yap éyw [cf. B. 367 (315) note; 492 (458) ]) ; Heb. viii. 4,
etc.; GaN’ ovdé, Lk. xxiii. 15; # ovdé, in a question, or
doth not even etc.? 1 Co. xi. 14 Rec.; the simple ovde,
num ne quidem (have ye not even etc.) in a question
where a negative answer is assumed (see ov, 7): Mk. xii.
10; Lk. vi.3; xxiii. 40; and GL T Tr WH in 1 Co. xi.
14. 3. not even [B. 369 (316)]: Mt. vi. 29; viii.
10; Mk. vi. 31; LK. vii. 9; xii. 27; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om.
the vs.]; 1 Co. v. 1; xiv. 21; ovdé eis [W. 173 (168) ; B.
§ 127,32], Actsiv..32; Ro, in. 105 1 Co. vi.o iL Dar
WH ovdeis]; ovdé ev, Jn. i. 3; GAN ovdé, Acts xix. 2; 1
Co. iii. 2 (Rec. dA ovre) ; iv. 3; Gal. ii. 3. in a double
negative for the sake of emphasis, ovk .. . ovdé [B. 369
(316); W.500 (465) ]: Mt. xxvii. 14; Lk. xviii. 13; Acts
vii. 5.
ovdels, ov Sepia (the fem. only in these pass. : Mk. vi.
5; Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 29; xviii. 38; xix.4; Acts xxv.
18; xxvii. 22; Phil. iv. 15; 1 Jn.i. 5, and Rec. in Jas. iii.
12), ob dy (and, ace. to a pronunciation not infreq. fr.
Aristot. and Theophr. down, oveis, ovfév: 1 Co. xiii. 2
RA era Wir SAcisiexixene (aly eels Weel 2) Co: x18
(QUAM AN SU8 IU soci, Bly IE Ube WWielow ois Tel Ie bre
WH; Acts xv. 9 T Tr WHtxt.; Acts xxvi. 26 TWH
Tr br.; 1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf.; see pydeis init. and Gottling
on Aristot. pol. p. 278; [Meisterhans, Grammatik d. Ate
tisch. Inschriften, § 20,5; see L. and S. s. v. ovdeis; ef.
Lob. Pathol. Elem. ii. 344]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 70 Anm.
7), (fr. ovdé and eis), [fr. Hom. down], and not one, no
one, none, no; it differs from pndeis as od does from py
[q. v. ad init. ]; 1. with nouns: masc., Lk. iv. 24;
xvi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 43 odSeis GAXos, Jn. xv. 24; ovdepia
in the passages given above; neut., Lk. xxiii. 4; Jn. x.
41; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii. 9; xxviii. 5; Ro. viii. 1; xiv. 14;
Gal. v. 10, ete. 2. absolutely: ovdets, Mt. vi. 24;
ix. 16; Mk. iii. 27; v. 4; vii. 24; Lk.i.61; v. 39 [WH
in br.]; vii. 28; Jn. i. 18; iv. 27; Acts xviii. 10; xxv. 11;
462
ane
OUKETE
Ro. xiv. 7, and very often. with a partitive gen.: Lk.
iv. 26; xiv. 24; Jn. xili. 28; Actsv.13; 1Co.i.14; ii.
8; 1Tim.vi.16. ovdeis ef wn, Mt. xix. 17 Rec.; xvii. 8;
Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19; Jn. iii. 13; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev.
xix. 12, etc.; eav pn, Jn. iil. 2; vi. 44,65. ove... oddels
(see ov, 3 a.), Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. v.37; vi. 5; xii. 14; Lk.
viii. 43; Jn. vill. 15; xviii. 9, 31; Acts iv.12; 2 Co. xi.
9 (8); ovxere. . . ovdeis, Mk. ix. 8; oddéra... ovdeis, Lk.
xxiii. 53 [Tdf. oddeis. . . odérw; L Tr WH odes otra];
Jn. xix. 41; Acts viii. 16 [L T Tr WH]; oddeis.. . odxért,
Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11. neut. ovd€v, nothing, Mt. x.
26 [cf. W. 300 (281); B. 355 (305)]; xvii. 20; xxvi. 62;
xxvii. 12, and very often; with a partitive gen., Lk. ix.
36; xviii. 34; Acts xviii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 15; xiv. 10 [RG];
ovdevy ef pn, Mt. v.13; xxi. 19; Mk. ix. 29; xi. 135; py
twos; with the answer ovdevds, Lk. xxii. 35; oddév exrds
w. gen., Acts xxvi. 22; ovdev pot Siapeper, Gal. ii. 6; it
follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne-
gation (see ov, 3 a.): Mk. xv. 4sq.; xvi. 8; Lk. iv. 2; ix.
36 5uxx. 403 Jnsilly 273) vi WO SOG lx: She Ei erye
30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.]; 1 Co. viii. 2[R G]; ix.
15 [GLT Tr WH]; ovdev od py w. aor. subjunc. Lk. x.
19 [R*G WH mrg.; see wn, IV. 2]. ovdev, absol., noth-
ing whatever, not at all, in no wise, [cf. B. §131, 10]: ad-
ket (see aducéw, 2 b.), Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; oddev
duadhepew tivds, Gal. iv. 1; dorepetv, 2 Co. xii. 11; dpereiv,
Jn. vi. 63; 1 Co. xiii. 3. ovdev earw, it is nothing, of no
importance, ete. [cf. B. § 129, 5]: Mt. xxiii. 16,18; Jn.
viii. 54; 1 Co. vii. 19; with a gen., none of these things
is true, Acts xxi. 24; xxv. 11; ovddev eis, I am nothing,
of noaccount: 1 Co. xiii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 11, (see exx. fr. Grk.
auth. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S.s.v. II. 2; Meyer on 1
Co. 1. c.]); ets odd€ev AoyioOnvat (see Aoyifopuat, 1 a.), Acts
xix. 273 els ovdev yiver@a, to come to nought, Acts v. 36
[W. § 29, 3a.; ev ovddevi, in no respect, in nothing, Phil.
i. 20 (cf. pndeis, g.) ]-
ovSérore, adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr.
ovde and oré, prop. not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never
Mt. vii. 23; ix. 33; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv. 29
(bis)]; Jn. vii. 46; Acts x. 14; xi. 8; xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii.
8; Heb. x. 1,11. interrogatively, did ye never, etc.:
Mitexcxa. 16s 42) Vike 2 Dee
ov8érw, adv., simply negative, (fr. ovdé and the enclitic
na), [fr. Aeschyl. down], not yet, not as yet: Jn. vii. 39
(where L Tr WH ovmw); xx. 9. ovdérw ovdeis, never
any one [A. V. never man yet], Jn. xix. 41; [ovder@...
ér ovdevi, as yet... upon none, Acts viii. 16 LT Tr
WH]; otk... ovdere ovdets (see ov, 3 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L
Tr WH otk... . ovdeis ovr@; Tdf. otk. . . ovdeis ovderra |;
ovdéerw ovdev (L T Tr WH simply ovmw) not yet (any-
thing), 1 Co. viii. 2.*
ov0els, ovbev, see ovdeis, init.
ovxert [also written separately by Rec* (generally),
Tr (nine times in Jn.), Tdf. (in Philem. 16)], (ovx, ére),
an adv. which denies simply, and thus differs from pnxére
(q. v-), no longer, no more, no further: Mt. xix. 6; Mk.
x. 8: Lk. xv. 19,21; Jn. iv. 42; vi.66; Acts xx. 25, 38;
Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2Co. v. 16; Gal. iii. 25; iv. 7; Eph.
OvKOUV
ii. 19; Philem. 16; Heb. x. 18, 26, etc.; ovxére #AOov, I
came not again [R.V. J forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23.
with another neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne-
gation: ode. . . odxert, Mt. xxii. 46 ; odk . . . odKeérs, Acts
Vili. 39; ovdets .. . ovxert, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11;
ovkert . . . ovdev, Mk. vii. 12; xv. 5; Lk. xx. 405; ovxere
.. . ovdéeva, Mk. ix. 8; odxére ov wn, Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii.
16 [WH om. L Tr br. ovkeéri]; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr om.];
ovde... ovxere ovdeis, Mk. v.38 LT WH Trtxt. ovxére
is used logically [ef. W. §65, 10]; as, overs éya for it
cannot now be said dri éya etc., Ro. vii. 17, 20; Gal. ii.
20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Hom., Hes., Hadt., al.)]
ovkodv, (fr. ovx and ody), adv., not therefore; and since
a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion
[see Kriiger as below], the particle is used affirmatively,
therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing.
Hence the saying of Pilate ovcody Bacireds ef ov must
be taken affirmatively: then (since thou speakest of thy
Baowdeia) thou arta king! (Germ. also bist du doch ein
Konig !), Jn. xviii. 37 [ef. B. 249 (214) ]; but it is better
to write ovxouv, so that Pilate, arguing from the words
of Christ, asks, not without irony, art thou not a king
then ? or in any case, thou art a king, art thou not? ef. W.
512 (477). The difference between ovxovv and ovkovy is
differently stated by different writers; cf. Herm. ad Vig.
p- 792sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 51, 1 and 2; Kiihner § 508, 5
ii. p. 715 sqq., also the 3d excurs. appended to his ed. of
Xen. memor.; [Bdumlein, Partikeln, pp. 191-198 ].*
od py, see py, IV.
ovv a conj. indicating that something follows from an-
other necessarily ; [al. regard the primary force of the
particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than
illative ; cf. Passow, or L. and 5S. s. v.; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii.
p: 707 sqq.; Biumlein p. 173 sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 52; Don-
aldson p. 571; Rost in a program “ Ueber Ableitung ”
u.s. w. p. 2; Klotz p. 717; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is
used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sen-
tences together logically, then, therefore, accordingly,
consequently, these things being so, [ (Klotz, Rost, al., have
wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptep. dy (cf.
évrws); but see Baumlein or Kuhner u. s.); ef. W. § 53,
8]: Mt. iii. 10; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be
dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denying
me [cf. W. 455 (424)]); Mt. xviii. 4; Lk.iii.9; xvi. 27;
Jn. viii. 38 (kat tpets odv, and ye accordingly, i. e. since,
as is plain from my case, sons follow the example of their
fathers’; Jesus says this in sorrowful irony [W. 455
(424) ]); Acts i. 21 (since the office of the traitor Judas
must be conferred on another) ; Ro. v. 9; vi. 4; xiii. 10;
1 Co. iv. 16 (since I hold a father’s place among you) ; 2
Co. v. 20; Jas. iv. 17, and many other exx. As respects
details, notice that it stands a. inexhortations
(to show what ought now to be done by reason of what
has been said), i. q. wherefore, [our transitional there-
fore]: Mt. iii. 8; v. 48; ix. 38; Lk. xi. 35; xxi. 14, 36
[RG Lumrg. Trmrg.]; Acts iii. 19; xiii.40; Ro. vi. 12;
xiv. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 11; 2 Co. viii. 24; Eph. v. 1; vi. 14;
Phil. ii. 29; Col. ii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. iv. 1, 11; x.
463
ouv
35; Jas. iv. 7; v. 7; 1 Pet.iv.7; v.63; Rev. i. 19 [GL
T Tr WH]; iii. 3, 19, and often; viv ody, now therefore,
Acts xvi. 36. b. in questions, then, therefore,
(Lat. igitur) ; a. when the question is, what follows
or seems to follow from what has been said: Mt. xxii.
28; xxvii. 22 [W. 455 (424)]; Mk. xv. 12; Lk. iii. 10;
xx. 15, 33; Jn. viii. 5; ri ody épodpev; Ro. vi. 1; vii. 7;
ix. 14; ri odv hnpi; 1 Co. x. 19; ri odv; what then? i. e.
how then does the matter stand? [cf. W. § 64, 2a.], Jn.
i. 21 [here WH mrg. punct. ri odv ov ;] Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15;
xi. 7; also ti ody éoriv; [what is it then?] Acts xxi. 22;
19 Corxive 115, 26: B. when it is asked, whether
this or that follows from what has just been said: Mt.
xiii. 28; Lk. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 39; Ro. iii. 31; Gal. iii.
ais y- when it is asked, how something which is true
or regarded as true, or what some one does, can be rec-
onciled with what has been previously said or done: Mt.
xii. 26; xiii. 27; xvii. 10 (where the thought is, ‘thou
commandest us to tell no one about this vision we have
had of Elijah; what relation then to this vision has the
doctrine of the scribes concerning the coming of Elijah?
Is not this doctrine confirmed by the vision ?’) ; Mt. xix.
7; xxvi. 54; Lk. xx. 17; Jn. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. ody]; Acts
xv. 10 (viv ody, now therefore, i.e. at this time, therefore,
when God makes known his will so plainly); Acts xix.
3; Ro. iv. 1 (where the meaning is, ‘If everything de-
pends on faith, what shall we say that Abraham gained
by outward things, i.e. by works?’ [but note the crit.
texts]); 1 Co. vi. 15; Gal. iii. 5. 8. in general, it
serves simply to subjoin questions suggested by what
has just been said: Ro. iii. 27; iv. 9sq.; vi. 21; xi. 11;
1 Co. iii. 5, ete. c. in epanalepsis, i. e. it serves
to resume a thought or narrative interrupted by inter-
vening matter (Matthiae ii. p. 1497; [W. 444 (414)]),
like Lat. cgitur, inquam, our as was said, say I, to pro-
ceed, etc.: Mk. iii. 31 [RG] (cf. 21); Lk. iii. 7 (ef. 3) ;
Jn. iv. 45 (cf. 48) ; vi. 24 (ef. 22); 1 Co. viii. 45 xi. 20
(cf. 18); add, Mk. xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. ody]; Acts viii.
PS Sob, BS sabi 248 sey ch GR so-aig Gils 26.96 ILS sS-qaiil Hy
It is used also when one passes at length to a subject
about which he had previously intimated an intention to
speak: Acts xxvi. 4, 9. d. it serves to gather up
summarily what has already been said, or even what
cannot be narrated at length: Mt. i.17; vii. 24 (where
no reference is made to what has just before been said
[?], but all the moral precepts of the Serm. on the Mount
are summed up in a single rule common to all); Lk. iii.
18; Jn. xx. 30; Acts xxvi. 22. e. it serves to adapt
examples and comparisons to the case in hand: Jn. iii.
29; xvi. 22;—or to add examples to illustrate the sub-
ject under consideration: Ro. xii. 20 Ree. f. In
historical discourse it serves to make the transition
from one thing to another, and to connect the several
parts and portions of the narrative, since the new vuccur-
rences spring from or are occasioned by what precedes
[ef. W. § 60, 3]: Lk. vi. 9 RG; numberless times so in
John, as i. 22 [Lchm. om.]; ii. 18; iv. 9 [Tdf. om.]; vi. 60,
67; vii.6 [G T om.], 25, 28, 33, 35, 40; viii. 13, 19, 22, 25,
ay,
OUTTW
31,57; ix. 7sq. 10,16; xi. 12, 16, 21, 32,36; xii. 1-4; xiii.
12; xvi. 17, 22; xviii. 7,11sq. 16, 27-29; xix. 20-24, 32, 38,
40; xxi. 5-7, ete. g. with other conjunctions: dpa
ob, so then, Lat. hinc igitur,in Paul; see dpa, 5. «i odv, if
then (where what has just been said and proved is carried
over to prove something else), see ei, III. 12; [et weév ody,
see pév, Il. 4 p. 398°]. eire ody... etre, whether then...
or: 1 Co. x. 31; xv. 11. émet odv, since then: Heb. ii.
14; iv. 6; for which also a participle is put with ody, as
Acts ii. 30; xv. 2[T Tr WH 8€]; xvii. 29; xix. 36; xxv.
17s xxvii 22 owvel sexvosis 2Oomiidl2: Ww. dls yi. es
Heb. iv. 14; x. 195 1: Pet. iv. 1; 2 Pet. iii.11 [WH Tr
mrg. ovras|. av ovv, if then ever, in case then, or rather,
therefore if, therefore in case, (for in this formula, ody, al-
though placed in the protasis, yet belongs more to the
apodosis, since it shows what will necessarily follow from
what precedes if the condition introduced by éay shall
ever take place): Mt. v. 23 [cf. W. 455 (424)]; vi. 22
[here Tdf. om. ody] ; xxiv. 26; Lk. iv. 7; Jn. vi. 62; viii.
36; Ro. ii. 26; 1 Co. xiv. 11, 23; 2 Tim. ii. 21; éav odv
pn, Rev. iii. 3; so also érav ody, when therefore: Mt. vi. 2;
xxi. 40; xxiv. 15, and RGin Lk. xi. 34. dre ov, when
(or after) therefore, so when: Jn. xiii. 12, 31 [(80)
Rec.bez ez L) T Tr WH]; xix. 30; xxi. 15; i. gq. hence it
came to pass that, when etc., Jn. ii. 22; xix.6,8. as od»,
when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. 6; xviii. 6;
xx. 11; xxi. 93 ws ody, as therefore, Col. ii. 6. dazep ody,
Mt. xiii. 40. prev ody, foll. by d¢ [ef. B. § 149, 16], Mk.
xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. ody]; Jn. xix. 25; Actsi. 6; viii. 4,
25; 1 Co. ix. 25, etc.; without an adversative conjunc.
following, see peév, II. 4. viv ody, see above under a., and
b. y. h. As to position, it is never the first word
in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the
third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. § 61, 6]; as,
[rept THs Bpocews ovv etc. 1 Co. viii. 4]; of pév odv, Acts
ii. 41, and often; woAAa pev ody, Jn. xx. 30. i. John
uses this particle in his Gospel far more frequently
[(more than two hundred times in all)] than the other
N.T. writers; in his Epistles only in the foll. passages :
1 Jn. ii. 24 (where GL T Tr WH have expunged it) ; iv.
19 Lehm.; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Hom. down.)]
ovrw, (fr. od and the enclitic mo), adv., [fr. Hom.
down], (differing fr. nme, as od does fr. pn [q. v. ad
init. ]), not yet; a. in a negation: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk.
xiii. 7; Jn. ii. 45 iii. 24; vi. 17 Ltxt. T Tr WH;; vii. 6, 8
RL WH txt., 8; 30,39; viii: 20,/575xi.\303 xx.17;°1
Co. iii. 2; Heb. ii. 8; xii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 2; Rev. xvii. 10,
12 (where Lehm. ovk) ; odd€is otrw, no one ever yet (see
ovdeis, 2, and cf. ov, 3 a.), Mk. xi. 2 L T Tr WH; Lk.
xxiii. 53 L Tr WH; Acts viii. 16 Ree. b. in ques-
tions, nondumne? do ye not yet ete.: Mt.xv.17 RG;
xvi. 9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WH; viii. 17, [21 L txt. T Tr
WH]).*
ovpa, -as, 7, a tail: Rev. ix. 10,19; xii. 4.
down; Sept. several times for 331.) *
ovpdvios, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term.
[W. §11, 1; B. 25 (23)], (odpavés), heavenly, i. e. a.
dwelling in heaven: 6 rarnp 6 otp., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32; xv.
(From Hom.
464
lg
oupavos
13; besides L T Tr WH in v. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9;
orparia ovp. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WH mrg. ovpa-
vou). b. coming from heaven: dérracia ovp. Acts
xxvi. 19. (Hom. in Cer. 55; Pind., Tragg., Arstph.,
al.) *
ovpavdbev, (ovpavds), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17;
xxvi.13. (Hom., Hes., Orph., 4 Mace. iv.10.) Cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.*
ovpavés, -od, 6, [fr.a root meaning ‘ to cover,’ ‘ encom-
pass’; cf. Vanicek p. 895; Curtius § 509], heaven; and,
in imitation of the Hebr. nw (i. e. prop. the heights
above, the upper regions), obpavoi,-dy, oi, the heavens [W.
§ 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the
art. cf. W. 121 (115)), ie. 1. the vaulted expanse
of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. gener-
ally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10,
12; 6 ovp. x. yn, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the
world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking,
inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the
name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv.19; Tob. vii. 17 (18);
1 Mace. ii. 37, etc.) : Mt. v.18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii.
31; Lk. x. 21; xvi.17; xxi. 38; Actsiv. 24; xiv. 155 xvii.
24; Rev. x. 6; xiv.7; xx.11. The ancients conceived of
the expanded sky as an arch or vault the outmost edge of
which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D.
s. v. Firmament, cf. Heaven]; hence such expressions as
am dkpwv ovpavav éws akpav avtav, Mt. xxiv. 31; an
akpov ys €ws akpov ovpavod, Mk. xiii. 27; bid Tov ovpavdv
(Daw nA, Eccl. i. 18; ii. 3, etc.), under heaven, i. e.
on earth, Acts ii. 5; iv.12; Col.i. 23; é« ris (sc. yopas,
ef. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.) ]) tm’ [here LT Tr WH
bmd Tov ovp. | ovpavdr eis THY U7” ovpavdr, Out of the one part
under the heaven unto the other part under heaven i.e. from
one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24 ; as by
this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance
is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven
stands as the extreme measure of altitude; hence, coA-
Adoba dxpt Tod ovpavod, Rev. xviii. 5 [LT Tr WH] (on
which see KoAAdw) ; tr@Ojva Ews Tod ovpavod, metaph. of
a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and
prosperity, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15, (kNéos odpavor iket, Hom.
Il. 8, 192; Od. 19, 108; mpos otpavdy BiBale twa, Soph.
O. C. 382 (381); exx. of similar expressions fr. other
writ. are given in Kypke, Observwv. i. p. 62); Kawvol ovpavoi
(kai yi kawn), better heavens which will take the place of
the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii.
13; Rev. xxi. 1; of voy odpavoi, the heavens which now
are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7; also
6 mparos ovpavds, Rev. xxi. 1, ef. Heb. xii. 26. But the
heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded
curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2; Is. xl. 22), and to
an unrolled seroll; hence, éAicoew [T Tr mrg. ddAdooeww ]
rods ovp. &s meptBdraov, Heb. i. 12 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci.
(cii.) 26 cod. Alex.) ; Kai 6 odp. dmexapiaOn as BiBdtov
coodpevor [or eihuoo. ], Rev. vi. 14. b. the aerial
heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests
gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced:
6 ovp. muppager, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.]¥
> f
ovpavos
arvyvagev, ib. 3 [see last ref.]; derdv Cdwxe, Jas. v. 18;
add Lk. ix. 54; xvii. 29; Actsix. 3 -xxii. 6; Rev. xiii. 13;
xvi. 21; xx. 9; onpetov ex Or amd Tod ovp., Mt. xvi. 1; Mk.
viii. 11; Lk. xi. 16; xxi. 11; répara év r@ odp. Acts ii.
19; KAelew Tov ovpardy, to keep the rain in the sky, hin-
der it from falling on the earth, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi. 6,
(cuvéxew tov ovp. for DWT Wy, Deut. xi. 17; 2 Chr.
Vi. 26; vii. 13; dvéyeww Tov ovp. Sir. xlviii. 3); ai vesbéAa
tov ovp., Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; 76 mpdco-
mov Tov ovp., Mt. xvi. 3['T br. WH reject the pass.]; Lk.
xii. 565 ra merewd Tr. ovp. (gen. of place), that fly in the
air (Gen. i. 26; Ps. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7),
Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix.
58; xiii. 19; Acts x.12. These heavens are opened by
being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or
abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth —n
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Mk.i.10; Lk. iii. 21 sq.; Jn.
i. 32; now angels, Jn. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap-
pear to human sight some of the things within the high-
est heaven, Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16; through the aerial
heavens sound voices, which are uttered in the heavenly
abode: Mt. iii. 17; Mk.i.11; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. xii. 28; 2
Pet. i. 18. c. the sidereal or starry heavens:
Ta dotpa tod ovp. Heb. xi. 12 (Deut. i. 10; x. 22; Eur.
Phoen. 1) ; of dorépes r. ovp., Mk. xiii. 25; Rev. vi. 13;
xii. 4, (Is. xiii. 10; xiv. 13); ai Suvayers rev ovp. the
heavenly forces (hosts), i. e. the stars [al. take Suv. in this
phrase in a general sense (see dvvayus, f.) of the powers
which uphold and regulate the heavens]: Mt. xxiv. 29;
Lk. xxi. 26; ai ev rois ovp. Mk. xiii. 25, (Hebr. 8I¥
DiDWN, Deut. xvii. 3; Jer. xxxiii. 22; Zeph. i. 5)5 3 SO 7
oTpatia Tov ovpavod, Acts Vii. 42. 2. the region above
the sidereal heavens, the seat of an order of things eternal
and consummately perfect, where God dwells and the other
heavenly beings : this heaven Paul, in 2 Co. xii. 2, seems
to designate by the name of 6 rpiros ovp., but certainly
not the third of the seven distinct heavens described by
the author of the Test. xii. Patr., Levi § 3, and by the
Rabbins [(cf. Wetstein ad loc.; Hahn, Theol. d. N. T. i.
247 sq.; Drummond, Jewish Messiah, ch. xv.)]; cf. De
Wette ad loc. Several distinct heavens are spoken of
also in Eph. iv. 10 (imepdve ravtwr trav op.) ; cf. Heb.
vii. 26, if it be not preferable here to understand the nu-
merous regions or parts of the one and the same heaven
where God dwells as referred to. The highest heaven
is the dwelling-place of God: Mt. v. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts
vii. 49; Rev. iv. 1 sqq., (Ps. x. (xi.) 4; exiii. 24 (exv. 16
sq-)); hence Geds Tov ovp., Rev. xi. 13; xvi. 11, (Gen.
xxiv. 3); 6 év (rois) odp., Mt. v.16, 45; vi. 1,95; vii. 21;
x. 33; xii. 50; xvi. 17; xviii. 10 [here L WH mrg. ev 76
ovpav@ in br.], 14,19; Mk. xi. 25 sq., ete. From this
heaven the mvedua dy. is sent down, 1 Pet. i. 12 and the
pass. already cited [cf. 1 b. sub fin.]; and Christ is said
to have come, Jn. iii. 13, 31; vi. 38,41 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 47;
it is the abode of the angels, Mt. Xxiv. 363; xxii. 30; xviii,
1OSexxvintye ss Mik xii 255 xiii. 82): Jukes 1b xxi. 43
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Gal. i. 8; 1 Co. viii. 5; Eph.
HS; Mebixii. 22s. Revix. 1p xii. 7p xviii. 1s xix 4,
465
9
ous
(Gen. xxi. 17; xxii. 11); ra ev trois ovpavois Kal ra emt Tijs
ys, the things and beings in the heavens (i. e. angels)
and on the earth, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 16, 20; yivera TO
OeAnpa tov Oeod &v ovpave, i.e. by the inhabitants of
heaven, Mt. vi. 10; xapa éora év 76 ovp., God and the
angels will rejoice, Lk. xv. 7. this heaven is the abode
to which Christ ascended after his resurrection, Mk.
xvi. 19; Lk. xxiv. 51 [T om. WH reject the cl.]; Acts i.
10sq.; ii. 34; ili. 21; Ro. x. 6; [Eph.i. 20 Lehm. txt.]; 1
Pet. ili. 22; Heb. i. 4 (ev dWdois); viii. 1; ix.24; Rev.
iv. 2, and from which he will hereafter return, 1 Th. i.
10; iv. 16; 2 Th. i. 7; into heaven have already been
received the souls (avevpata) both of the O. T. saints
and of departed Christians, Heb. xii. 23 (see dmoypdda,
b. fin.), and heaven is appointed as the future abode of
those who, raised from the dead and clothed with supe-
rior bodies, shall become partakers of the heavenly king-
dom, 2 Co. v. 1, and enjoy the reward of proved virtue,
Mt. v.12; Lk. vi. 23; hence eternal blessings are called
O@ncavpds ev ovpav@, Mt. vi. 20; Lk. xii. 33, and those on
whom God has conferred eternal salvation are said éyew
O@noavpov év odpave (-vois), Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; Lk.
xviii. 22, ef. Heb. x. 34 [RG]; or the salvation awaiting
them is said to be laid up for them in heaven, Col. i. 5;
1 Pet. i.4; or their names are said to have been written
in heaven, Lk. x. 20; moreover, Christ, appointed by.
God the leader and lord of the citizens of the divine
kingdom, is said to have all power in heaven and on
earth, Mt. xxviii. 18; finally, the seer of the Apocalypse
expects a new Jerusalem to come down out of heaven as
the metropolis of the perfectly established Messianic
kingdom, Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2,10. By meton. 6 ovpavds is
put for the sahainitansd of heaven : evppaivov ovpave, Rev.
xvili. 20, cf. xii. 12, (Ps: xev. (xevi.) 11; Is. xliv. 23; Job
xv. 15); in particular for God (Dan. iv. 23, and often by
the Rabbins, influenced by an over-scrupulous reverence
for the names of God himself; cf. Schiirer in the Jahrbb.
f. protest. Theol., 1876, p. 178 sq.; [Keil, as below]):
dpaprdvew eis tov ovp., Lk. xv. 18, 21; ék rod ovp., i. q. by
God, Jn. iii. 27; €& ovp., of divine authority, Mt. xxi. 25;
Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4; éravriov rod ovpavod, 1 Mace. iii.
18 (where the rod Oeov before tov ovp. seems question-
able) ; ék Tov ovp. 7 ioxvs, ib. 19; 9 €& ovp. BonOera, xii.
15)3) xvi. 3, cf. ii. 50-53, 595 iv..10, 24, 30, 40,55; v. 31;
vii. 37, 41; ix. 46; ef. Kez, Comm. iib. d. Biich. d. Mace.
p- 20. On the phrase 7 Bacudela ray odp. and its meaning,
see BaarXela, 3; [Cremer s. v. Bac.; Edersheim i. 265].
OipBavds, -ov, 6, [a Lat. name; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Philip. p. 174], Urbanus, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 9.*
Oipias, -ov [B. 17 sq. (16) no. 8], 6, (IN light of Je-
hovah [or, my light is Jehovah]), Uriah, the husband of
Bathsheba the mother of Solomon by David: Mt. i. 6.*
ovs, gen. ards, plur. dra, dat. daciv, 7d, [ef. Lat. auris,
ausculto, audio, ete.; akin to dio, aic@avopac; ef. Curtius
§ 619; Vaniéek p. 67]; fr. Hom. down; Hebr. TIS; the
ear; 1. prop.: Mt. xiii. 16; Mk. vii. 33; Lk. xxii.
50; 1Co.ii. 9; xii. 16; @ra twos eis Senow, to hear sup-
plication, 1 Pet. iii. 12; 4 ypady mAnpodra: ev trois aot
ovoia
twos, while present and hearing, Lk. iv. 21 (Bar. i. 3
sq.); those unwilling to hear a thing are said cuvéxyew
[q. v. 2a.] 7a éra, to stop their ears, Acts vii. 57 ; nxovoOn
Tt eis Ta Ta Twos, something was heard by, came to the
knowledge of [ A. V. came to the ears of] one, Acts xi. 22;
likewise eicépyerOat, Jas. v.4; yiveoOa, to come unto the
ears of one, Lk. i. 44; dkovewy eis rd ots, to hear [A. V.
in the ear i. e.] in familiar converse, privately, Mt. x. 27
(eis obs often so in class. Grk.; cf. Passow [L. and S.]
s. v. 1); also mpds 76 ods Aadeiy, LK. xii. 3. 2. met-
aph. i. q. the faculty of perceiving with the mind, the fac-
ulty of understanding and knowing: Mt. xiii. 16; 6 €xov
(or ei tus €xe) Sra (or ods, in Rev.) [sometimes (esp. in
Mk. and Lk.) with dxovew added ; cf. B. § 140, 3] dxovera,
whoever has the faculty of attending and understanding,
let him use it, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, 43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vii.
16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Lk. viii. 8; xiv. 35 (34);
Rey. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22; xiii. 9; rots aot Ba-
pews dxovewv, to be slow to understand or obey [A. V.
their ears are dull of hearing], Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii.
27, (fr. Is. vi. 10); dra éyovres ovK dxovere, Mk. viii. 18;
dra tov pr axovev, [ears that they should not hear; cf. B.
267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8; O00 r. Adyous TovTovus eis Ta Ota,
[A. V. let these words sink into your ears i.e.] take them
into your memory and hold them there, Lk. ix. 44; dme-
pitpytos Tots @aiv (see dmepitunros), Acts vii. 51.*
otcla, -as, 9, (fr. dy, ovaa, ov, the ptep. of eiui), what
one hus, i.e. property, possessions, estate, [A.V. substance]:
Lk. xv. 12sq. (Tob. xiv. 13; Hdt. 1, 92; Xen., Plat.,
Attic oratt., al.) *
ovre, (ov and ré), an adjunctive negative conj., [fr.
Hom. down], (differing fr. unre as ov does fr. un [q. v- ad
init.], and fr. odé as pyre does fr. pndé; see pyre and
ovde), neither; and not. 1. Examples in which otre
stands singly : a. ov...ovre, Rev. xii. 8 Rec. (where
GL T Tr WH ovde);_ xx. 4 RG (where L T Tr WH
ovdé) ; ovdels Gktos etpeOn avoiEat TO BiBAlov ovre BErey
auré, Rev. v. 4; cf. W.491 (457); B. 367 (815); ov...
ovde .. . ovre, 1 Th. ii. 3 RG (where L T Tr WH more
correctly ovdé) [W. 493 (459); B. 368 (315)]; ovdé...
ovre (so that ore answers only to the ov in ovdé), Gal. i.
12RGT WH txt. [W. 492 (458) ; B. 366 (314)]. b.
ore... kal, like Lat. neque ... et, neither... and: Jn. iv.
11; 3 Jn. 10, (Eur. Iph. T. 591; but the more common
Grk. usage was ov... ré, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.
714; Passow s.v.B. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II. 4]; W. § 55,
7; [B. § 149, 13 ¢.]). c. By a solecism odre is put
for ovd€, not... even: 1 Co. iii. 2 Rec. (where G L T Tr
WH ov8é) [W. 493 (459); B. 367 (315); § 149, 13 £.];
Mk. v.3 RG (where L T Tr WH have restored otdé
[W. 490 (456); B. u.s.]); Lk. xii. 26 RG (where L T
Tr WH ovdé [W. u. s. and 478 (445); B. 347 (298)]);
ovre perevonaay, Rev. ix. 20 RL Tr (where G WH txt.
ov, T ovdé not .. . even; WH mrg. ove or ovd€ [cf. B. 367
(315) ]); after the question pi Svvara ... cixa; follows
ovre ddukov yAvKd roujoat Vdep, Jas. iii. 12 GL T Tr WH
(as though ovre dvvara . .. cixa had previously been in
the writer’s mind [cf. W. 493 (459); B.u.s.]). 2:
466
2
OUTNS
used twice or more, neither... nor, (Lat. nec... nec;
neque... neque) : Mt. vi. 20; xxii. 30; Mk. xii. 25; [xiv.
68 L txt. T Tr WH]; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); Jn. iv. 21; v.
37; viii. 19; ix.3; Acts xv. 10; xix. 37; xxv. 8; xxviii.
21; Ro. viii. 38 sq. (where ovre occurs ten times); 1 Co.
lil. 7; vi. 9sq. (odre eight times [yet T WH Tr mrg. the
eighth time ov]); xi. 11; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15; 1 Th. ii. 6;
Rev. iii. 15 sq.; ix. 20; xxi. 4; otre...odre... ovdé
(Germ. auch nicht, also not), L Tr WH in Lk. xx. 35 sq.,
and L T Tr mrg. WH in Acts xxiv. 12 sq.; ef. W. 491
(457 sq.) ; B. 368 (815) note.
ovTos, ait, Touro, demonstrative pron. [cf. Curtius p.
543], Hebr. i, ON, this; used
I. absolutely. a: a. this one, visibly present
here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix.
35 ;°2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 38; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk.
li. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn.i. 15,30; vii. 25; ix. 8sq. 193; xviii.
21,30; xxi. 21; Acts ii. 15; iv.10; ix.21; according to
the nature and character of the person or thing men-
tioned, it is used with a suggestion —either of con-
tempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.; Lk. v. 21; vii.
39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt.
xxl.11; Acts ix. 21; cf. Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T.
p- 370%. b. it refers to a subject immediately pre-
ceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 837 [RG L];
Jn. i. 2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6,8, ete.; at the beginning of
a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk.
EVI; Jn. i411 (42) 5 ii. Qi) xii. DI; | xx)» Acts vil.
19; xxi. 24. this one just mentioned and no other: Jn.
ix.9; Acts iv. 10 (ev rovr@) ; ix. 20; 1Jn.v.6; such as
I have just described, 2 Tim. iii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 17. kat
ovros, this one just mentioned also, i. e. as well as the
rest, Lk. xx.30 R GL; Heb. viii. 8. xat rovrov, and
him too, and him indeed, 1 Co. ii. 2. c. it refers to
the leading subject of a sentence although in position
more remote (W. § 23,1; [B. § 127, 3]): Actsiv. 11;
vii. 19; viii. 26 (on which see aga sub fin.); 1 Jn. v. 20
(where odtos is referred by [many] orthodox interpre-
ters incorrectly [(see Alford ad loc.; W. and B. Il. cc.) ]
to the immediately preceding subject, Christ); 2 Jn.
Mis d. it refers to what follows; otros, avtn éori, in
this appears ... that ete.; on this depends ... that ete.:
foll. by dru, as adtn éotiv H éemayyeXia, ort, 1 Jn.i.5; add,
v. 11, 14;—by wa, Jn. xv. 12; 1 Jn-iii. 11, 23; v.3; 2 Jn.
6; rodré ore rd Epyov, Td OéAnua TOU Geod, iva, Jn. vi. 29,
39 sq. e. it serves to repeat the subject with em-
phasis: od mdvres of €& "Iopand, obrot “Iopanh, Ro. ix. 6;
add, ib. 8; ii. 14 [Lmrg. of rovodrot]; vii. 10; Gal. iii. 7;
it refers, not without special force, to a description given
by a participle or by the relative 6s, dats; which de-
scription either follows, as Mk. iv. 16, 18; Lk. viii. 15,
21; ix.9; Jn. xi. 37; foll. by a relative sentence, Jn. i.
15; 1 Pet. v.12;—or precedes: in the form of a parti-
ciple, Mt. x. 22; xiii. 20, 22 sq.; xxiv. 13; xxvi. 23; Mk.
xii. 40; Lk. ix. 48 (6... tmdpywv, otros); Jn. vi. 46;
vii. 18; xv.5; 2Jn.9; Actsxvii.7; (and RG in Rev.
iii. 5); or of the relative ds, Mt. v.19; Mk. iii. 35; Lk.
ix. 24,26; Jn. i. 33 [here Lmrg. airds]; iii. 26; v. 38
ovTOS
Ro. viii. 30; 1 Co. vii. 20; Heb. xiii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 5; 2 Pet.
ii. 19; in the neut., Jn. viii. 26; Ro. vii. 16 1 Co. vii. 24;
Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 2; or of a preceding sorts, Mt.
xviii. 4; in the neut. Phil. iii. 7. dco. . . odrox, Ro. viii.
14; Gal. vi. 12; also preceded by et tis, 1 Co. iii. 17
[here Lehm. atrds]; vill. 3; Jas. i. 23; ili. 2; by éav tus,
Jt ixnBl; cf) Wi § 28,.4. f. with avrés annexed,
this man himself, Acts xxv. 25; plur. these themselves,
Acts xxiv. 15, 20; on the neut. see below, 2a.b.ete. — g.
As the relat. and interrog. pron. so also the demonstra-
tive, when it is the subject, conforms in gender and
number to the noun in the predicate: odroi elaw of viol
ms Bac. Mt. xiii. 38; add, Mk. iv. 15 sq. 18; atrn early
1) peyaAn evroAn, Mt. xxii. 38; odrds eorw 6 mAavos (Germ.
diese sind), 2 Jn. 7. 2. The neuter rovro a.
refers to what precedes: Lk. v.6; Jn. vi. 61; Acts xix.
17; rovro eirayv and the like, Lk. xxiv. 40 [T om. Tr br.
WH reject the vs.]; Jn. iv. 18; viii. 6; xii. 335; xviii.
38; dua rovro, see did, B. II. 2.a.; eis rodro, see eis, B. II.
3c. B.; avo rovro, for this very cause, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm.
avtoi|; cf. Matthiae § 470, 7; Passow s. v. C. 1 a. fin. ;
[L. and S. s. v. C. [X. 1 fin.; W. § 21, 3 note 2; Kiihner
§ 410 Anm. 6]; pera rovro, see pera, II. 2b. ex rovrov,
for this reason [see ék, II. 8], Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; from
this, i. e. hereby, by this note, 1 Jn. iv. 6 [ef. Westcott ad
loc.]. €v rovr@, for this cause, Jn. xvi. 30; Acts xxiv.
16; hereby, by this token, 1 Jn. iii. 19. emt rovr@, in the
meanwhile, while this was going on [but see emi, B. 2 e.
fin. p. 234°], Jn. iv. 27. rovrov yap, Eph. iii. 14. plur.
tavta, Jn. vii. 4 (these so great, so wonderful, things);
pera tavra, see pera, I]. 2b. xara ravra, in this same
manner, Rec. in Lk. vi. 23, and xvii. 30, [al. ra avra or
tavta]. it refers to the substance of the preceding dis-
course: Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27; xxiv. 26; Jn. v.34; xv. 11; xxi.
24, and very often. xaOas... tadra, Jn. viii. 28. ib:
it prepares the reader or hearer and renders him atten-
tive to what follows, which thus gets special weight (W.
§ 23,5): 1 Jn. iv. 2; avré rodro dru, Phil. i. 6; rovro Neyo
foll. by direct discourse, Gal. iii. 17 [see Aéyw, II. 2 d.].
it is prefixed to sentences introduced by the particles
ott, wa, etc.: Tovto Aéyw or dnyi foll. by dru, 1 Co. i. 12
[(see A€yw u.s.); 1 Co. vii. 29]; xv. 50; yuwooKers rovro
follsby ori, Ro: vi. 63 2) Tim. iii. 1; «2 Pet: 1.203 ni. 3;
Aoyiter Gat TovTo Gre, Ro. ii. 3; after duodoyetv, Acts xxiv.
14; after edas, 1 Tim. i. 9; ev rovrw drt, 1 Jn. iii. 16, 24;
iv. 9 sq.; Tovro, iva, Lk. i. 43; es rodro, iva, Acts ix. 21;
Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 9; iv.6;1Jn. iii. 8; dca
tovTo, wa, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15; rovrey
(on this neut. plur. referring to a single object see W.
162 (153); [cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41]), ta, 3
Jn. 4; ev rovt@, eav, 1 Jn. ii. 3; drav, 1 Jn. v. 2; rodro
avo, iva, on this very account, that (see a. above [but oth-
ers take it here as acc. of obj.; see Meyer ad loc. (for
instances of avro rovdro see B. § 127, 12)]), 2 Co. ii. 3;
eis até TovTo, iva, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; émws, Ro. ix.
17. In the same manner rovro is put before an infin.
with ré for the sake of emphasis [W. § 23, 5; B. § 140,
7,9, ete.]: 2Co. ii. 1; before a simple infin. 1 Co. vii. 37
467
2
OUTOS
[here RG prefix rod to the inf.]; before an acc. and inf.
Eph. iv. 17; before nouns, as rodro evyoua, thy bpav
karaptiow, 2 Co. xiii. 9, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 24; v. 4. Cc. Kat
rovto, and this, and that too, and indeed, especially: Ro.
xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, L T Tr WH also in 8; Eph. ii. 8;
kal tava, and that too, 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; (so
kat tavra also in class. Grk.; cf. Devar. ed. Klotz i. p- 108;
Viger. ed. Herm. p. 176 sq.; Matthiae § 470, 6). d.
tavta, of this sort, such, spoken contemptuously of men,
1 Co. vi. 11 (cf. Soph. O. R. 1329; Thue. 6, 77; Liv. 30,
30; cf. Bnhdy. p. 281; [W. 162 (153)]). €. TovTo
pev...tovto d¢, partly... partly, Heb. x. 33 (for exx.
fr. Grk. auth. see W. 142 (135); Matthiae ii. § 288
Anm. 2; [Kiihner § 527 Anm. 2]).
see eizi, II. 3 p. 176°.
II. Joined to nouns it is used like an adjective ; a.
so that the article stands between the demonstrative and
the noun, ovros 6, adtn 7, Tovro 7d, [cf. W. § 23 fin.; B.
§ 127, 29]: Mt. xii. 32; xvi. 18; xvii. 21[T WHom. Tr
br. the vs. ]; xx. 12; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. vii. 44; x.
36; xiv. 30; xv. 24; Jn. iv. 15; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr
br. the cl]; viii. 20; x.6; xi. 47; xii. 5; Actsi. 11; Ro.
xi. 24; 1 Tim.i.18; Heb. vii. 15 viii. 10; [1 Jn. iv. 21];
Rev. xix. 9; xx. 14; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, etc. ; rodro 76 matdiov,
such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48; ef. Borne-
mann ad loc. [who takes rovro thus as representing the
class, ‘this and the like;’ but cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad
loc. ]. b. so that the noun stands between the arti-
cle and the demonstrative [cf. W. 548 (510) ]; as, of AcOou
ovrot, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9; iv.
3; add, Mt. v.19; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. rovrous ], 26, 28;
ix. 26 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. avris]; x. 23, etc.; Mk. xii. 16;
MAIO Wikcextyole KKM AM seid TVerlias 21 svi 4 Ose)
xviii. 29; Acts vi. 13; xix. 26; Ro. xv. 28; 1Co.i. 20;
livG 3. xt. 2G5uo Cosiv. 1730 vil. 63° xIn10s xa ES jE phe
iii. 8; v. 32; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev. ii. 24, and very often —
(which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other
[see W. u.s.]); it is added to a noun which has another
adjective, 7 xNpa 1 mwreyy avtn, Lk. xxi. 3; mavra ta
pnuara tavra, Lk. ii. 19, 51 [(T WH Lmrg. om. Ltxt. Tr
mrg. br. rata) ; amd THs yeveas THs oKoALas TavTNs, Acts
ii. 40]. c. Passages in which the reading varies
between otros 6 and 6... ovros: viz. ovtos 6, Mk. xiv.
30 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn.iv.20R Lmrg.; Jn. vi. 60RG;
Jn. vii. 36 RG; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg.; Jn. xxi. 23
LT Tr WH. 6... ovros, Mk. xiv. 30 RGLmrg.; Jn.
iv. 20 G Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn. vi.60 L TTr WH; Jn. vii.
36LT Tr WH; Jn. ix. 24 GT Tr txt.; Jn. xxi. 23 RG;
ete. d. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical
specifications [W. § 37, 5 N. 1]: rpirov rovro, this third
time, 2 Co. xiii. 13 rodro tpirov, Jn. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi.
15; Sevtepov rovro, Gen. xxvii. 36; rovro dexatov, Num.
Xiv. 22 ; réraprov rovro, Hdt. 5,76). [The passages which
follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are
(with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the
predicative use of ovres; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B.
§ 127, 31; Rost § 98, 3 A.c.a.sq.]: tovro madw Sevrepov
onpetov emoinoev, Jn. iv. 54; rpitny ravtnyv ipepay ayey
sis Wy
f. trovr éatw,
¢
OovUT@
this is the third day that Israel is passing [but see ayo,
3], Lk. xxiv. 21 (ketpae tpraxooriy tavtny nyépar, this is
now the thirtieth day that I lie (unburied), Leian. dial.
mort. 13, 3); ov pera modAas TavTas juepas (see pera, LI.
2b. [W. 161 (152); B. § 127, 4]), Acts i. 5; obros pay
éxtos €otw avr7, this is the sixth month with her etc. Lk.
i. 36; avrn dmoypady mpatn éyévero, Lk. ii. 2 L (T) Tr
WH; ravrnvy éxoingev dpxnv tov onpeiov, Jn. ii. 11 L T
Tr WH.
otrw and otras (formerly in printed editions otra
appeared before a consonant, odrws before a vowel; but
[recent critical editors, following the best Mss. (“cod.
Sin. has -rw but fourteen times in the N. T.” Scrivener,
Collation etc. p. liv.; ef. his Introduction ete. p. 561),
have restored ovras; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times;
Tdf. 203 times, 4 times -rw ; Lchm. 196 times, 7 times -ro
(all before a consonant); WH 196 times, 10 times -r
(all before a consonant); cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 97; WH.
App. p. 146 sq.]; ef. W. § 5,1b.; B. 9; [Zob. Pathol.
Elementa ii. 213 sqq.]; ef. Kriiger § 11, 12, 1; Kiihner
§ 72, 3 a.), adv., (fr. obros), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for
12, in this manner, thus, so ; 1. by virtue of its na-
tive demonstrative force it refers to what precedes; in
the manner spoken of; in the way described; in the way
it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so:
Mt. vi. 30; xi. 26; xvii. 12; xix. 8; Mk. xiv. 59; Lk. i.
253 11.48; xii 28); Ro. xi. 5; 1 Co. viii.123 xv.11; Heb.
vi. 9; [2 Pet. iii. 11 WH Tr mrg.]; odx otras gora [L
Tr WH éoriv (so also T in Mk.) ] ev ipiv, it will not be
so among you (I hope), Mt. xx. 26; Mk. x. 43; tpets odx
ottws sc. €oeabe, Lk. xxii. 263; édv apopev adrov ovtas sc.
rovoovta, thus as he has done hitherto [see dpinus, 2 b.],
Jn. xi. 48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and
serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Mt. v. 16 (even
so, i. e. as the lamp on the lamp-stand) ; Mt. xii. 45; xiii.
49; xviii. 14; xx. 16; Lk. xii. 21 [WH br. the vs.]; xv.
7,10; Jn. iii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 24; likewise otras kai, Mt. xvii.
12; xviii. 35; xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. xvii. 10. otras
€xewv, to be so (Lat. sie or ita se habere): Acts vii. 1; xii.
15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9. it serves to resume participles
(Joseph. antt. 8, 11,1; b.j. 2, 8,5; see exx. fr. Grk. auth.
in Passow s.v.1h.; [L. and S.s.v.I.7]): Acts xx. 11;
xxvii. 17; but Jn. iv. 6 must not [with W. § 65, 9 fin.; B.
§ 144, 21] be referred to this head, see Meyer [and 5 d.
below]; on Rev. iii. 5, see 5c. below. it takes the place
of an explanatory participial clause, i. q. matters being
thus arranged, under these circumstances, in such a con-
dition of things, [B. § 149,1; ef. W. § 60, 5]: Ro. v. 12
(this connection between sin and death being established
{but this explanation of the ovrws appears to be too gen-
eral (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]); Heb. vi. 15 (i.e. since God
had pledged the promise by an oath) ; i. q. things having
been thus settled, this having been done, then: Mt. xi. 26;
Acts vii. 8; xxviii. 14; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 1 Th.iv.17; 2 Pet.
i. 11; ef. Fritzsche,Com. ad Rom. i. p. 298. Closely
related to this use is that of odras (like Lat. ita for itaque,
igitur) in the sense of consequently [ef. Eng. so at the
beginning of a sentence]: Mt. vii.17; Ro. i. 15; vi. 11;
468
oe
OUT®@
Rey. iii. 16, ({ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 220]; Passow s. v.
2; [L. and S.-s. v. IT.]). 2. it prepares the way
for what follows : Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xix. 31; Jn. xxi. 1; odras
jv, was arranged thus, was on this wise, [W. 465 (434);
B. § 129, 11], Mt. i. 18; odrws €ori rd OéXnua Tod Geod foll.
by an infin., so is the will of God, that, 1 Pet.ii.15. be-
fore language quoted from the O. T.: Mt. ii. 5; Acts vii.
6; xiii. 34, 47; 1 Co. xv. 45; Heb. iv. 4. 3. with
adjectives, so [Lat. tam, marking degree of intensity]:
Heb. xii. 21; Rev. xvi. 18; postpositive, ri Seidoi éore
ovras; Mk. iv. 40 [L Tr WH om.]; in the same sense
with adverbs, Gal. i. 6; or with verbs, so greatly, 1 Jn.
iv. 11; ovrws... Sore, Jn. iii. 16. oddérore épdvn otras,
it was never seen in such fashion, i. e. such an extraor-
dinary sight, Mt. ix. 33 (é€@dvn must be taken imperson-
ally; cf. Bleek, Synopt. Erklir. i. p. 406 [or Meyer ad
loc.]); ovSemore odrws ciSouev, we never saw it so, i. e.
with such astonishment, Mk. ii. 12. 4. ovrws or
oUT@s kai in comparison stands antithetic to an adverb
or a relative pron. [W. § 53,5; cf. B. 362 (311) ¢.]: xa-
Oarep . . .ovTws, Ro. xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii.
11; xaOws... ovtws, Lk. xi. 30; xvii. 26; Jn. iii. 14;
Klin 5O3 tiv. Sly XV. 45,.2/Co. jabs on dg) Th aie: eb,
v. 3; oUras ... kaOws, Lk. xxiv. 24; Ro. xi. 26; Phil. iii.
17; as... ovrws, Acts viii. 32; xxiii. 11; Ro.v. 15, 18;
1 Co. vii. 17; 2Co. vii. 14; 1 Th. ii. 8; v. 2; ovras... os,
Mk. iv. 26; Jn. vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; 1 Co.
iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26; Eph. v. 28; Jas. ii. 12; otras as...
py os, 2 Co. ix.5 [GL T Tr WH]; domep... otras, Mt.
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27, 37,39; Lk. xvii. 24; Jn. v.
21,26 ;, Rosv: 12, 19,213 visas) xi. Sii5011Co. xa 12 seve
22; xvi. 1; 2Co.i. 7 RG; Gal. iv. 29; Eph.v. 24 RG;
after xa@ dcov, Heb. ix. 27 sq.; ovras . . . dv rpdrov, Acts
i. 11; xxvii. 25; dv tpdmov .. . ovras, 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Is. lii.
14); kara thy 6ddv Hv A€eyovaw aiperw ovTw KT. after the
Way (i. e. as it requires [cf. 6dds, 2 a. fin.]) so ete. Acts
xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foll. special uses deserve
notice : a. (€yer) os [better 6] pev otras os [better
6] d€ ovrws, one after this manner, another after that, i.e.
different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (moré pev
ovTws Kal Tore ovTas Pdyerat 7 payxatpa, 2 S. xi. 25). b.
ovtas, in the manner known to all, i.e. ace. to the context,
so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 3. c. in that state in which
one finds one’s self, such as one is, [ef. W. 465 (434) ]: ré
pe €rroinaas ovtas, Ro. ix. 20; otras eivat, peverv, of those
who remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40; 6 wav ovTas
mepiBadeirat viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor [al. in the
manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii. 5 L T Tr WH. d.
thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [cef. Eng. off-hand,
without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just]: Jn. iv.
6; cf. Passow s. v.4; [L.and S. s. v. IV.; see 1 above;
add Jn. xiii. 25 T WH Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes
ad loc.) ] e. in questions (Lat. sicine?) [Eng. ex-
clamatory so then, what]: Mk. vii. 18 (Germ. sonach) [al.
take ovrws here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi.
40, however, many give it the sense spoken of; cf. too 1
Co. vi. 5]; ott@s aroxpivn; i. e. so impudently, Jn. xviii.
22; with an adjective, so (very), Gal. iii. 3. [But these
ovy
exx., although classed together by Fritzsche also (Com.
on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination.
The passage from Gal., for instance, does not seem to
differ essentially from examples under 3 above. ] f.
In class. Grk. odrws often, after a conditional, concessive,
or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow
s.v.1h.; [L.and S.s.v. I. 7]). 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev.
xi. 5 have been referred to this head; B. 357 (307); [cf.
W. § 60, 5 (esp. a.)]. But questionably; for in the first
passage ovrws may also be taken as equiv. to under these
circumstances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better
cf. W.u.s.]; in the second passage otrws denotes in the
manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their
mouth.
ovx, see ov.
odxi, i. q. ov, not, but stronger [cf. vuvi ad init.] ; a.
in simple negative sentences, by no means, not at all,
[A. V. not]: Jn. xiii. 10 sq.; xiv. 22; 1 Co. v. 2; vi. 1;
foll. by dAAd, 1 Co. x. 29; 2 Co. x. 13 (L T Tr WH otk);
in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not so], Lk. i.
GOseRi. 515) Xi11. 375 5 xvi. 30); Rov iii. 2%. b. ina
question, Lat. nonne ? (asking what no one denies to be
true): Mt. v.46 sq.; x. 295 xiii. 275)xx201359 Lksvi. 397%
xvii. 17[L Tr WH ovx]; xxiv. 26; Jn. xi. 9; Acts ii. 7
Tr WH txt.; Ro. ii. 26 (LT Tr WH ody); 1 Co. i. 20;
Heb. i. 14, etc.; (Sept. for xOn, Gen. xl. 8; Judg. iv.
6); aAN ovxi, will he not rather, Lk. xvii. 8.
Opererns, -ov, 6, (deikw), one who owes another, a
debtor: prop. of one who owes another money (Plat.
lege. 5,736 d.; Plut.; al.); with a gen. of the sum due,
Mt. xviii. 24. Metaph. a. one held by some obliga-
tion, bound to some duty: dqeidérns eipi, i. q. dpeira, foll.
by an inf., Gal. v. 3 (Soph. Aj. 590); ded. eiui twos,
to be one’s debtor i.e. under obligations of gratitude to
him for favors received, Ro. xv. 27; tui (dat. commodi),
to be under obligation to do something for some one,
Rosi 114s" viii 12. b. one who has not yet made
amends to one whom he has injured: Mt. vi. 12; in imi-
tation of the Chald. 21, one who owes God penalty or
of whom God can demand punishment as something due,
i. e. a sinner, Lk. xiii. 4.*
seh, -75, 7, (dpeidw), that which is owed; prop. a
debt: Mt. xviii. 32; metaph. plur. dues: Ro. xiii. 7;
spec. of conjugal duty [R. V. her due], 1 Co. vii. 3 GL
TTrWH. Found neither in the Grk. O. T. nor in
prof. auth.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90.*
odeiAnpa, -ros, Td, (dpeihw), that which is owed ; a.
prop. that which is justly or legally due, a debt; so for
mANwD, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10); dqrévat, 1 Mace. xv. 8; drro-
rive, Plat. lege. 4 p. 717b.; amodiddva, Aristot. eth.
Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p. 1165*, 3]. xara odeidnpa, as of debt, Ro.
iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 3)n or sin
(which denotes both debt and sin), metaph. offence, sin,
(see dpedérns, b.); hence, aduéevar rwi Ta detdr. avrov, te
remit the penalty of one’s sins, to forgive them, (Chald.
Prin. paw), Mt. vi. 12. [Cf W. 30, 82, 33.]*
opetho; impf. aPevdov; pres. pass. ptep. dpewddpevos ;
fr. Hom. down ; to owe ; a. prop. to owe money, be
469
opOarpobovrcia
in debt for: tii r1, Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. xvi. 5; without a
dat., Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 7; Philem. 18; ro
opethopuevov, that which is due, the debt, Mt. xviii. 30;
avr@ (which L Tr WHom.), that due to him, ib. 34. b.
metaph.: ri, pass. rhv evvoray ddetAopevny, the good-will
due [A. (not R.) V. due benevolence], 1 Co. vii. 3 Ree. ;
pndevi pndev odeidrere (here ddeidere, on account of what
precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest
sense, both literal and tropical), ei ym 7d GAAnAous aya-
may, owe no one anything except to love one another, be-
cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love
can never be paid, Ro. xiii. 8. absol. to be a debtor, be
bound: Mt. xxiii. 16, 18; foll. by an inf. to be under obli-
gation, bound by duty or necessity, to do something; it be-
hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed
either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or
by the nature of the matter under consideration [acc. to
Westcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli-
gation in its special and personal aspects]: Lk. xvii. 10;
Jn. xiii. 14; xix. 7 (opeiher droOaveiv, he ought to die) ;
Acts xvii. 29; Ro. xv. 1, 27; 1 Co.v. 10; [vii. 36 (A. V.
need so requireth)]; ix.10; xi. 7,10; 2 Co. xii. 14; Eph.
V8 </ PPh iS dis08 5) Heb. ih? siv.Syl 2s Tne.
iii. 16; iv. 11; 3Jn. 8; aetrov cvvicracba, I ought to
have been commended, i. e. I can demand commenda-
tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. c. after the Chaldee (see opesde-
ts, b., detdnua, b.), opeiAw tui, to have wronged one
and not yet made amends to him [A. V. indebted], Lk.
xi.4. [Comp.: mpoo-odeira. |*
Sedov (for Sedov, without the augm., 2 aor. of dfeirw;
in earlier Grk. with an inf., as @pedov Oaveiv, I ought to
have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. would that I were
dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter-
jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes
that a thing had happened which has not happened, or
that a thing be done which probably will not be done
[ef. W. 301 sq. (283); B. §150, 5]: with an optative
pres. Rev. iii. 15 Ree.; with an indicative impf., Rev.
ibid. GLT Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15;
Tonat. ad Smyrn. ¢. 12); with an indic. aorist, 1 Co. iv.
8 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 5; dpedov dmeOdvopev, Ex. xvi. 3;
Num. xiv. 2; xx. 3); with the future, Gal. v. 12 (Leian.
soloec. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is
classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 603"; [L. and
S. s. v. oeida, IT. 3].*
OdeXos, -ovs, 7d, (OeAAw to increase), advantage, profit:
1 Co. xv. 32; Jas. ii. 14,16. (From Hom. down; Sept.
Job xv. 3.) *
dpOarpo-Sovreta [T WH -Aia; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (6pOad-
podovdos, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i.
p-.299*; and this fr. 6@Oadpds and Sdoddos), [A. V. eye-
service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master’s
eye (yu Kar’ odOadpod., rouréote py pdvov mapdvrav rev
Seomorav Kai dpovtwv, GAda kal amévrwv, Theophyl. on
Eph. vi 6; “for the master’s eye usually stimulates to
greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren-
ders sluggish.” H. Stephanus): Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22.
Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 106 (9¢9/*
opOarpos
dpOadpés, -ov, 6, [fr. r. 6m to see; allied to dys, dyo-
pat, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for py, [fr. Hom. down],
the eye: Mt. v. 38; vi. 22; Mk.ix.47; Lk. xi. 34; Jn.
ix. 6; 1 Co. xii. 16; Rev. vii.17; xxi. 4, and often; pum
bpOarpod, 1 Co. xv. 52; of dpOadpoi pov eidoy (see the
remark in yAéaoa, 1), Lk. ii. 30; ef. iv. 20; x. 23; Mt.
xiii. 16; 1Co.ii.9; Rev.i.7; [dveBreWav of dpOadrpoi
Mt. xx. 34 RG]; idety rois op., Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40;
Acts xxviii. 27; dpav rots of6. (see épaw, 1), 1 Jn. i. 1;
4» €mOupia rav oO. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16.
Since the eye is the index of the mind, the foll. phrases
have arisen: of. cov rovnpds éotuy, i. e. thou art envious,
Mt. xx.15; op. rovnpds, envy, Mk. vii. 22 (py yr, an
envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 22; ef. Sir. xxxiv.
13; PM3 JY Ty, thine eye is evil toward thy
brother, i. e. thou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut.
Xv. 9; oO. movnpds POovepds en’ Gpro, Sir. xiv. 10; py
pOoverdrw cov 6 ohd. Tob. iv. 7; the opposite, dyads
opOarpés, is used of a willing mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.)
10, 12); on the other hand, o@Oadpos rovnpés in Mt. vi.
23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye,
a bad finger [see movnpds, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. kpa-
relv Tovs opO. Tov py xtr. [A. V. to hold the eyes i. e.]
to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. 16;
UroAapBave Tia ard Tov op. rivos, by receiving one to
withdraw him from another’s sight [A. V. received him
out of their sight], Acts i. 9. Metaph. of the eyes of the
mind, the faculty of knowing: éxpv8n ard tav od. cov,
hid from thine eyes, i.e. concealed from thee [ef. B. 320
(274) ], Lk. xix. 42; dcddvar revi oOadpods rod pr Brera,
to cause one to be slow to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [ef. B.
267 (230)]; rupdrodv rods oO. twos, Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn.
ii. 11; oxori€ovra oi oO. Ro. xi. 10; mewricpevor opOar-
pot THs Scavoias [cf. B. § 145, 6], Eph. i. 18 Rec.; ris
xapdias (as in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2), ibid. GL TTr
WH; ev opOadpois twos (5D *3' 3 [ef. B. § 146, 1 fin.]),
in the judgment (ef. our view] of one, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk.
xii. 11; ovx €ore Te amevavte Tov OPO. Twos, to neglect a
thing (cf. our leave, put, out of sight), Ro. iii. 18; yupvdy
€oTi Te Tots OPO. Tivos (see yupvds, 2a.), Heb. iv. 133 of
OPO. rod Kupiov eri Sixaiovs (sc. ém- [or azo-] BA€rovewy,
which is added in Ps. x. (xi.) 4), are (fixed) upon the
righteous, i. e. the Lord looks after, provides for them,
1 Pet. iii. 12. Other phrases in which 6f6adpds occurs
may be found under avoiyw p. 48°, dmdois, diavolyw 1,
e£opvoow 1, éraipw p. 228°, kaupva, porxadis a., mpoypa-
po 2.
opis, -ews, 6, [perh. named fr. its sight; cf. dpaxwr,
init., and see Curtius as s. v. 6pOadpds]; fr. Hom. Il. 12,
208 down; Sept. mostly for wm3; @ snake, serpent: Mt.
vii. 10; Mk. xvici8s Eki x. 195x101) ohne iti. 14,; 1 Co:
x. 9; Rey. ix. 19; with the ancients the serpent was an
emblem of cunning and wisdom, 2 Co. xi. 3, cf. Gen. iii.
1; hence, dpovpor ws oi ders, Mt. x. 16 [here WH mrg.
6 égis]; hence, crafty hypocrites are called des, Mt.
xxiii. 33. The serpent narrated to have deceived Eve
(see Gen. u. s.) was regarded by the later Jews as the
devil (Sap. ii. 23 sq. cf. 4 Mace. xviii. 8); hence he is
470
oxAoS
called 6 dqus 6 adpxatos, 6 dgus: Rev. xii. 9, 14 sq.; xx.
2; see [Grimm on Sap. u.s.; Hr. Lenormant, Beginnings
of History ete. ch. ii. p. 109 sq., and] dpdxwv.*
odpis, -vos, 7), 1. the eyebrow, so fr. Hom. down.
2. any prominence or projection; as [Eng. the brow] of
a mountain (so the Lat. supercilium, Verg. georg. 1,
108; Hirt. bell. afr.58; Liv. 27,18; 34,29): Lk. iv. 29
(Hom. Il. 20, 151; often in Polyb., Plut., al.).*
[SXeETOs, -ov, 6, 1. a water-pipe, duct. 2. the
intestinal canal: Mk. vii. 19 WH (rejected) mrg. (al.
apedpov).*]
oxA€w, -@ : pres. pass. ptcp. 6xAovpevos; (6xAos) ; prop.
to excite a mob against one; [in Hom. (Il. 21, 261) to dis-
turb, roll away]; univ. to trouble, molest, (rwa, Hdt. 5, 41;
Aeschyl., al.); absol. to be in confusion, in an uproar, (3
Mace. v. 41); pass. to be vexed, molested, troubled: by
demons, Lk. vi. 18 R G L (where T Tr WH evoxd., —the
like variation of text in Hdian. 6, 3,4); Acts v. 16;
Tob. vi. 8 (7); Acta Thomae §12. [Comp.: év-, map-
ev-oxdew. |*
oxAo-rrovéw, -@ : 1 aor. ptcp. dyAomoinoas ; (6xAos, rovew) ;
to collect a crowd, gather the people together : Acts xvii. 5.
Not found elsewkere.*
éxAos, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks.
and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and
Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collec-
tion of people; a multitude of men who have flocked to-
gether in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, etc. ;
Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1, 19; vii. 9, etc.; Jn.
v. 18; vi. 22, 243 vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Acts xiv. 14; xvii.
8; xxi. 343 ris ek Tod dxAov, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or awd
Tov dxAov, Xix. 39; ix. 38; amd (for i.e. on account of
(ef. dd, II. 2b.]) +. dxdov, Lk. xix. 3; 97 Bia r. dxdov,
Acts xxi. 353; modvds dyAos and much oftener 6yAos modus,
Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v.21, 24; vi. 34; ix. 14;
xiv. 43 [here T Tr WHom. L Tr mrg. br. wod.]; LK. vii.
11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg.
br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with
the art. 6 modvs 6xX., the great multitude present, Mk. xii.
37; [6 dyAos modvs (the noun forming with the adj. a sin-
gle composite term, like our) the common people, Jn. xii. 9
T WH Trmrg.; cf. B. u.s.; some would give the phrase
the same sense in Mk. l.c.]; mapzrodvs, Mk. viii. 1 [Rec.];
ixavds, Mk. x. 46 ; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix. 263; 6
mdeioros xX. [the most part of the multitude], Mt. xxi. 8;
mas 6 6xn., Mt. xiii. 2; Mk. ii. 13; iv. 1; vii. 14 [Rec.]; ix.
15; xi. 18; Lk. xiii. 17; Acts xxi. 27; dyA. rocodros, Mt.
xv. 33; ai pupiddes Tod dyd. Lk. xii. 1; od pera OxAov, not
having a crowd with me, Acts xxiv. 18; drep dyAou, in the
absence of the multitude [(see drep) ], Lk. xxii.6. plur.
oi dxAo, very often in Mt. and Lk., as Mt. v. 1; vii. 28;
ix. 8, 33,36; xi. 7; xii. 46; xiii. 34, 36, etc.; Lk. iii. 7,
10; iv. 42; v. 3; viii. 42, 45; ix. 11; xi. 14, ete.; Acts
viii. 6; xiii. 45; xiv. 11,13, 18 sq.; xvii. 13; once in Jn.
vii. 12 [where Tdf. the sing.]; in Mk. only vi. 33 Rec.;
and without the art. Mk. x. 1; dyAoe woAdol, Mt. iv. 25;
viii. 1; xii. 15 [RG]; xiii. 2; xv.30; xix. 2; Lk. v. 15;
xiv. 25; mdvres of dyAot, Mt. xii. 23. 2. the multi-
oyvpopa
tude i. e. the common people, opp. to the rulers and lead-
ing men: Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26; Mk. xii.12; [Jn. vii. 12°
(provided the plur. is retained in the first part of the
vs.) ]; with contempt, the ignorant multitude, the populace,
Jn. vii. 49; émervaracts dyov, a riot, amob, Acts xxiv.
12 [L T Tr WH émioraois (q. V.) dy. ]. 3. univ. a
multitude: with a gen. of the class, as reAwvay, Lk. v. 29 ;
pabntrav, Lk. vi. 17; dvoudrwv (see dvopa, 3), Acts i. 15;
trav iepewy, Acts vi. 7; the plur. dyAo, joined with Aaoi
and €6vn, in Rev. xvii. 15 seems to designate troops of
men assembled together without order. (Sept. chiefly
for }\1iJ-)
6xXUpwpa, -ros, Td, (d6xupd@ [to make strong, to fortify ]) ;
1. prop. a castle, stronghold, fortress, fastness, Sept. for
¥D, etc.; very often in 1 and 2 Macc.; Xen. Hellen.
3, 2, 3. 2. trop. anything on which one relies: ka-
Ocire rd dxvpapa, ef’ S emeroibercav, Prov. xxi. 22; dyv-
pwpa daiov pdBos xupiov, Prov. x. 29; in 2 Co. x. 4 of
the arguments and reasonings by which a disputant en-
deavors to fortify his opinion and defend it against his
opponent.*
odpiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. fr. dyov [cf. Curtius § 630]
i. e. whatever is eaten with bread, esp. food boiled or
roasted ; hence specifically), fish: Jn. vi. 9,11; xxi. 9 sq.
13. (Comic. ap. Athen. 9,c. 35 p. 385 e.; Leian.,Geop.
[ef. Wetstein on Jn. vi. 9]; see yuvacxdproy, fin. [W. 23
(22)}-)*
ope, (apparently fr. dms ; see diow, init.), adv. of time,
after a long time, long after, late ; a. esp. late in the
day (sc. ths nuepas, which is often added, as Thue. 4, 93;
Xen. Hellen. 2, 1, 23), i. e. at evening (Hom., Thuc.,
Plat., al.; for 3337 ny, Gen. xxiv. 11): Mk. xi. [11 T
Tr mrg.WH txt. (cf. Plut. Alex. 16,1)], 19; xiii.35. __b.
with a gen. [W. § 54, 6], dé caBBdrar, the sabbath having
just passed, after the sabbath, i.e. at the early dawn of the
first day of the week — (an interpretation absolutely
demanded by the added specification 77 émipoor. xrh.),
Mt. xxviii. 1 cf. Mk. xvi. 1 (dé rar Bacréws xpdvar,
long after the times of the king, Plut. Num. 1; dpe
pvotnpiov, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll.
4,18); [but an examination of the instances just cited
(and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren-
dering after (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape,
Schenkl, and other lexicographers) ; dye foll. by a gen.
seems always to be partitive,denoting Jate in the peri-
od specified by the gen. (and consequently still belong-
ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kiihner § 414, 5¢. p.
ence in Mt. 1. c. ‘late on the sabbath’]. Keim iii.
p- 552 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve
the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vespere
471
ovra@veop
sabbati, on the evening of the sabbath], but without sue
cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. iiber Matth. ad loc.) ]*
dipos, -ov, (We), late, latter, (Hom. Il. 2, 325; dyupd
tatos omépos, Xen. oec. 17, 4 sq.; év Tots dW ivos Tov Ode
tov, of the time of subsidence of the waters of the Nile,
Diod. 1, 10; (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]): dp. berds, the
latter or vernal rain, which falls chiefly in the months of
March and April just before the harvest (opp. to the
autumnal or mpwipos [cf. B. D.s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but
LT Tr WH om. terév, cod. Sin. and a few other authoris
ties substitute xaprév]; Sept. for wip?, Deut. xi. 14;
Jer. v. 24; Hos. vi. 3; Joel ii. 23; Zech. x. 1.*
Opos, -a, -ov, (oe), late; 1. as an adjective
({Pind.,] Thuc., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.; [Zob. ad
Phryn. p. 51 sq.]): 7 @pa, Mk. xi.11 [but T Tr mrg. WH
txt. dwe, q. v-] (oyia ev vuxri, Pind. Isthm. 4, 59). 2.
contrary to the usage of prof. auth. 7 dyia as a subst.
(se. Spa [ef. W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), evening;
i. e. either from our three to six o’clock p.M., Mt. viii.
16; xiv. 15; xxvii.57; Mk. iv. 35; or from our six o’clock
p. M. to the beginning of night, Mt. xiv. 23; xvi. 2
{here T br. WH reject the pass.]; xx. 8; xxvi. 20; Mk.
1.32; vi.47; xiv.17; xv.42; Jn. vi. 16; xx. 19, (hence
D'27yn 3, between the two evenings, Ex. xii. 6; xvi
12; xxix. 39 [cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1064 sq. (and
addit. et emend. p. 106); B. D.s.v. Day]). Besides
only in Judith xiii. 1.*
ois, -ews, 7, (ONTO, dyopar (cf. dfOarpés]), fr. Hom.
down; Sept. chiefly for AX 5 1. seeing, sight 2.
face, countenance: Jn. xi. 44; Rev. i. 16. 3. the
outward appearance, look, [many lexicographers give
this neuter and objective sense precedence]: xpivetw car’
dye, Jn. vil. 24.*
éaviov, -ov, 7d, (fr. dyrov — on which see dyaproy, init.
—and dvéopa to buy), a later Grk. word (cf. Sturz, De
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187; Phryn. ed. Lod. p. 418),
prop. whatever is bought to be eaten with bread, as fish,
flesh, and the like (see dyadpov). And as corn, meat,
fruits, salt, were given to soldiers instead of pay (Caes,
b. g. 1, 23, 1; Polyb. 1, 66 sq.; 3, 13, 8), dyromov began
to signify 1. univ. a soldier’s pay, allowance,
(Polyb. 6, 39,12; Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 36), more com-
monly in the plur. [W.176 (166); B. 24 (21)] é wana,
prop. that part of a soldier’s support given in place of
pay [i. e. rations] and the money in which he is paid
(Polyb. 1, 67, 1; 6, 39, 15; 1 Mace. ili. 28; xiv. 32; 1
Esdr. iv. 56; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3): Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co.
ix. 7 [cef. W. § 31, 7 d.]. 2. metaph. wages: sing.
2 Co. xi. 8; tis dpaprias, the hire that sin pays, Ro. vi.
23.*
472
II
maryeocv@
maySevo: 1 aor. subj. 3d pers. plur. raydeiowow;
(mayis, q- V-) ; a word unknown to the Greeks; to en-
snare, entrap : birds, Eccl. ix. 12; metaph., ra év oye,
of the attempt to elicit from one some remark which can
be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15.
([rois Adyous, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet.; cf. also Deut.
vii. 25; xii. 30 in the same]; 1S. xxviii. 9.) *
mayls, -idos, 9, (fr. myyvupt to make fast, 2 aor. érayov;
prop. that which holds fast [cf. Anth. Pal. 6, 5]), Sept.
for nd, nw), wpin, ete.; @ snare, trap, noose ; a.
prop. of snares in which birds are entangled and
caught, Prov. vi. 5; vii. 23; Ps. xe. (xci.) 3; exxiii.
(exxiv.) 7; mayidas iorava, Arstph. av. 527; hence as
mayis, aS a snare, i.e. unexpectedly, suddenly, because
birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b.
trop. @ snare, i. e. whatever brings peril, loss, destruction:
of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr.
Ps. lxviii. (Ixix.) 23; of the allurements and seductions
of sin, éumimrewv eis metpacpor k. mayida, 1 Tim. vi. 9 (euri-
mre eis mayioa dpaptedds, Prov. xii. 13, cf. xxix. 6; joined
with oxavdadov, Sap. xiv. 11); rod daBdAov, the allure-
ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim.
ii. 26; 1 Tim. iii. 7 (In Grk. writ. also of the snares
of love.) *
wdOnpa, -ros, Td, (fr. mabciv, macy, as paOnua fr. pa-
civ), fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down ; 1. that which one
suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering,
misfortune, calamity, evil, affliction: plur., Ro. viii. 18;
2 Co. i. 6 sq.; Col. i. 24; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Heb.ii.10; x.
32; 1 Pet.v. 9; ra ets Xprordv, that should subsequently
come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 11; rod
Xptcrod, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1; also the
afflictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of
the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are
called maOjpara tov Xpirtov [ W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co.
iv5 SOPH i105 Me Petaiv: 13. b. of an inward
state, an affection, passion: Gal. v. 24; Trav duapriay,
that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. i. g. TO macxew (see
cavxnua, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suffering, (so the
plur. in Arstph. thesm. 199) : Oavdrov, gen. of the obj.,
Heb. ii. 9. [Syn. cf. ma6os, init.]*
mabntés, -7, -dv, (rac xo, rabeiv) ; 1. passible (Lat.
patibilis, Cic. de nat. deor. 3, 12, 29), endued with the
capacity of suffering, capable of feeling; often in Plut., as
maOnrov capa. 2. subject to the necessity of suffer-
ing, destined to suffer, (Vulg. passibilis): Acts xxvi. 23
(with the thought here respecting Christ as ma@nrés
compare the similar language of Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr.
ec. 86, 39, 52, 68, 76, 89); cf. W. 97 (92); [B. 42 (37)];
(so in eccl. writ. also, ef. Otto’s Justin, Grk. index s. v.;
MavoapLov
Christ is said to be ra6yrés and draOys in Ignat. ad Eph.
7, 2; ad Polyc. 3, 2).*
mGQos, -ous, 76, (mabciv, macy), fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt.
down; i.q. maOnua (q. v.; [the latter differs fr. maéos (if
at all) only in being the more individualizing and con-
crete term; cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 24 § 11]); uf
whatever befalls one, whether it be sad or joyous; spec.
a calamity, mishap, evil, affliction. 2. a feeling which
the mind suffers, an affection of the mind, emotion, pas-
sion; passionate desire; used by the Greeks in either a
good or a bad sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 4 [ef. Cope,
Introd. to Aristotle’s Rhet. p. 183 sqq.; and his note on
rhet. 2,22,16]). In the N. T. in a bad sense, depraved
passion: Col. iii. 5; wa6n dripias, vile passions, Ro. i. 26
(see drupia); év mdber émiOupias, [in the passion of lust],
gen. of apposit. [W. § 59, 8 a.], 1 Th. iv. 5.*
[Syn. rd 00s, éwrOvula: 7m. presents the passive, éz. the
active side of a vice; éw. is more comprehensive in meaning
than 7.; ém. is (evil) desire, 7. ungovernable desire. Cf.
Trench § lxxxvii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 5.]
maSaywyds, -od, 6, (fr. mais, and dywyds a leader, es-
cort), fr. Hdt. 8, 75 down; a tutor (Lat. paedagogus)
i. e. a guide and guardian of boys. Among the Greeks
and Romans the name was applied to trustworthy slaves
who were charged with the duty of supervising the life
and morals of boys belonging to the better class. The
boys were not allowed so much as to step out of the
house without them before arriving at the age of man-
hood; ef. Fischer s. v. in index i. to Aeschin. dial. Socr.;
Hermann, Griech. Privatalterthiimer, § 34, 15 sqq.;
[Smith, Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Antiq. s. v.; Becker,
Charicles (Eng. trans. 4th ed.), p. 226 sq.]. They are
distinguished from of dudacxador: Xen. de rep. Lac. 3, 2;
Plat. Lys. p. 208 ¢.; Diog. Laért. 3,92. The name car-
ries with it an idea of severity (as of a stern censor
and enforcer of morals) in 1 Co. iv. 15, where the
father is distinguished from the tutor as one whose
discipline is usually milder, and in Gal. iii. 24 sq. where
the Mosaic law is likened to a tutor because it arouses
the consciousness of sin, and is called maidaywyos eis
Xpuordy, i. e. preparing the soul for Christ, because those
who have learned by experience with the law that they
are not and cannot be commended to God by their
works, welcome the more eagerly the hope of salvation
offered them through the death and resurrection of
Christ, the Son of God.*
maSdprov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of mais, see yuvatkdpioy), a
little boy, a lad: Mt. xi.16 Rec.; Jn. vi. 9. (Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., sqa.; Sept. very often for 113, also for 9):
qTa.dela
{maddprov of an adult youth, Tob. vi. 2, ete. (cf. 11 sq.) ]-)
[SYN. see mais, fin. ]*
mavseia (Tdf. -ia; [see I, +]), -as, 9, (maidevw), Sept.
for 7099; 1. the whole training and education of
children (which relates to the cultivation of mind and
morals, and employs for this purpose now commands
and admonitions, now reproof and punishment): Eph.
vi. 4 [ef. W. 388 (363) note]; (in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
on, it includes also the care and training of the body.)
[See esp. Trench, Syn. § xxxii.; cf. Jowett’s Plato, in-
dex s. v. Education]. 2. whatever in adults also
cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mistakes and curbing
the passions ; hence a. instruction which aims at the
increase of virtue: 2 Tim. iii. 16. b. ace. to bibl.
usage chastisement, chastening, (of the evils with which
God visits men for their amendment): Heb. xii. 5 (Prov.
iii. 11), 7 sq. [see tropéva, 2 b.], 11; (Prov. xv. 5, and
often in the O. T.; ef. Grimm, Exet. Hdbch. on Sap.
p- 51; [ef. (Plat.) defin. madeia+ Svvapis Oeparrevtixy
uxis]).*
mrauSeuTHs, -0v, 6, (radeva) 5 1. an instructor, pre-
ceptor, teacher: Ro. ii. 20 (Sir. xxxvii. 19; 4 Mace. v. 34;
Plat. legg. 7 p. 811 d., ete.; Plut. Lycurg. ¢. 12, ete.; Diog.
Laért. 7, 7). 2. a chastiser: Heb. xii. 9 (Hos. v. 2;
Psalt. Sal. 8, 35).*
ma.sevw ; impf. éraidevov; 1 aor. ptep. maidevoas; Pass.,
pres. madevouar; 1 aor. emadevOnv; pf. ptep. memaidev-
pevos; (mais); Sept for 7D"; 1. as in class. Grk.
prop. to train children: twa with a dat. of the thing in
which one is instructed, in pass., copia [W. 227 (213) n.],
Acts vii. 22 RGL WH (cf. B. § 134, 6] (ypdppacw,
Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 4 fin.) ; ev copia, ibid. T Tr; tid xara
axpiBevay, in pass., Acts xxii. 3. Pass. to be instructed or
taught, to learn: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. i. 20; to cause
one to learn: foll. by iva, Tit. ii. 12. 2. to chas-
tise ; a. to chastise or castigate with words, to cor-
rect: of those who are moulding the character of others
by reproof and admonition, 2 Tim. ii. 25 (ria madevew
kai pudpiCew Ady, Ael. v. h. 1, 34). b. in bibl. and
eccl. use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of
evils and calamities [cf. W. § 2,1 b.]: 1 Co. xi. 32; 2 Co.
vi. 9; Heb. xii. 6; Rev. iii. 19, (Prov. xix. 18; xxix. 17;
Sap. iii. 5; xi. 10 (9); 2 Mace. vi. 16; x. 4). c. to
chastise with blows, to scourge: of a father punishing a
son, Heb. xii. 7, [10]; of a judge ordering one to be
scourged, Lk. xxiii. 16, 22, [(Deut. xxii. 18)].*
matdidbev, (zrardiov), adv., from childhood, from a child,
(a later word, for which the earlier writ. used ék maidés,
Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 2; or é« madSiov, mem. 2, 2,°8; or é« mat-
Siwy, oec. 3, 10; [cf. W. 26 (25); 463 (431)]): Mk. ix.
21, where LT Tr WH ék rawdiddev [cf. Win. § 65,2].
(Synes. de provid. p. 91 b.; Joann. Zonar. 4, 184 a.).*
matdiov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of mais), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept.
for \0, 12, 3, ete.; a young child, a little boy, a little
gil; plur. ra radia, infants; children; little ones. In
sing.: univ., of an infant just born, Jn. xvi. 21; of a
(male) chi/d recently born, Mt. ii. 8 sq. 11, 13, 14, 20 sq.;
Lk. i. 59, 66, 76, 80; ii. 17, 21 [Rec.], 27, 40; Heb. xi. 23;
473
Tats
of a more advanced child, Mt. xviii. 2, 4.sq.; Mk. ix. 36
sq.; [x. 15]; Lk. ix. 47 sq.; [Lk. xviii. 17]; of a mature
child, Mk. ix. 24; rivds, the son of some one, Jn. iv. 49; of
a girl, Mk. v. 39-41; [vii.30 Ltxt. TTr WH]. In plur.
of (partly grown) children: Mt. xi.16GLT Tr WH;
xiv. 21; xv. 38; xviii. 3; xix. 13 sq.; Mk. vii. 28; x. 13
sqq-; Lk. vii. 32; xviii. 16; [Heb. ii. 14]; twds, of some
one, Lk. xi. 7, cf. Heb. ii. 13. Metaph. radia rais ppeci,
children (i. e. like children) where the use of the mind is
required, 1 Co. xiv. 20; in affectionate address, i. q. Lat.
carissimi [A. V. children], Jn. xxi. 5; 1Jn.ii. 14 (13), 18;
iii. 7 WH mrg. Syn. see mais, fin.] *
moausicKkn, -ns, 7, (fem. of madiocxos, a young boy or
slave ; a dimin. of mais, see veaviokos) ; 1. a young
girl, damsel, (Xen., Menand., Polyb., Plut., Leian.; Sept.
Ruth iv. 12). 2. a maid-servant, a young female
slave; cf. Germ. Madchen [our maid] for a young fe-
male-servant (Hdt. 1, 93; Lys., Dem., al.) : Lk. xii. 45;
Acts xvi. 16; opp. to 9 éAevOepa, Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30
sq-; spec. of the maid-servant who had charge of the
door: Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 66, 69; Lk. xxii. 56; Acts
xii. 13; 9 3. 7 @vpwpés, Jn. xviii. 17; (also in the Sept.
of a female slave, often for 7K, NMDW). Cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 239. [SyYn. see mais, fin.] *
mwaitw; fr. Hom. down; prop. to play like a child;
then univ. to play, sport, jest; to give way to hilarity, esp.
by joking, singing, dancing; so in 1 Co. x. 7, after Ex.
xxxii. 6 where it stands for Dmy, as in Gen. xxi. 9; xxvi.
8; Judg. xvi. 25; also in the Sept. for pn. [Comp. :
€pu-traiCa. | *
mais, gen. matdds, 5, 7, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only
in the Gospels and Acts; 1. a child, boy or girl;
Sept. for Vy} and 7 y3 (Gen. xxiv. 28; Deut. xxii. 15,
etc.) : é mais, Mt. xvii. 18; Lk. ii. 43; ix. 42; Acts xx.
12; mais, Lk. viii. 51, 54; plur. infants, children, Mt. ii.
16 ; xxi. 15; 6 wats Twos, the son of one, Jn. iv. 51. 2:
(Like the Lat. puer, i. q.) servant, slave, (Aeschyl. cho-
éph. 652; Arstph. nub. 18, 132; Xen. mem. 3, 13, 6;
symp. 1,11; 2, 23; Plat. Charm. p. 155a.; Protag. p.
310¢. and often; Diod. 17, 76; al.; so Sept. times with-
out number for 32) [ef. W. p. 30, no. 3]; ef. the similar
use of Germ. Bursch, [French gargon, Eng. boy]): Mt.
viii. 6, 8,13; Lk. vii. 7 cf. 10; xii.45; xv. 26. an attend-
ant, servant, spec. a king’s attendant, minister: Mt. xiv.
2 (Diod. xvii. 36; hardly so in the earlier Grk. writ. ;
Gen. xli. 37sq.; 1S. xvi. 15-17; xviii. 22, 26; Dan. ii.
7; 1 Mace. i. 6, 8; 1 Esdr. ii. 16; v. 33, 35); hence, in
imitation of the Hebr. 77, 333!, wais rod Geod is used of
a devout worshipper of God, one who fulfils God’s will,
(Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 18; exii. (exiii.) 1; Sap. ii. 13, ete.) ;
thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xli. 8; xlii. 19;
xliv. 1 sq. 21, ete.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps.
xvii. (xviii.) 1; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [Ald., Compl.], etc.) ;
likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God
employs in executing his purposes; thus in the N. T. Jesus
the Messiah: Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1); Acts iii. 13, 26;
iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6,1 and Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2]; inthe O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7sq.;
Taiw
the prophets, 1 Esdr. viii. 79 (81); Bar. ii. 20, 24; and
others.*
[Syn. wats, rarddptoy, watdtov, Tardionn, TEKVOV:
The grammarian Aristophanes is quoted by Ammonius (s. v.
yépwy) as defining thus: tardlov, 7d tpepduevoy bmd 716n-
yoo: tma:ddpiov dé, Td Hon wepimarviv Kal THs A€kews avTe-
xéuevov: mardlaonkos 3,6 evth exouevn HAuias mats 8 6
dia TOY eyKuKAlwy pabnudtwy Suvdpevos iévar. Philo (de mund.
opif. § 36) quotes the physician Hippocrates as follows: ev
avOpdrov pice: Ewrd eiow Gpak.7.A.* mardloy pev eotiv &xpis
éwras érav, dddvTwy exBoATs* mats dt &xpi yovas expioews, eis
wa dls Ewrd eipdxiov 5& Uxpt yevelov Aaxveoews, es Ta Tpls
érrd. etc. According to Schmidt, ra:dfov denotes exclusive-
ly a little child ; wa:ddpioy a child up to its first school years ;
mais achild of any age; (a:dioxos and) madioxn, in which
reference to descent quite disappears, cover the years of late
childhood and early youth. But usage is untrammelled :
froma child isexpressed either by é« maidés (most frequently),
or ék maidlov, or ék (amd) madapiov. mais and réxvoy denote a
child alike as respects descent and age, reference to the latter
being more prominent in the former word, to descent in
réxvov; but the period mats covers is not sharply defined ;
and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations
cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See
Schmidt ch. 69; Héhne in Luthardt’s Zeitschrift u. s. w. for
1882, p. 57sqq.]
maiw: 1 aor. émaoa; from Aeschyl. and Hdt. down;
Sept. mostly for N37; to strike, smite: with the fists,
Mt. xxvi. 68 [ef. parifw, 2]; Lk. xxii. 64; with a sword,
Mk. xiv. 47: Jn. xviii. 10; to sting (to strike or wound
with a sting), Rev. ix. 5.*
Tlaxartavi, -7s, 9, Pacatiana (Phrygia). Inthe fourth
century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia
Salutaris and Phrygia Pacatiana [later, Capatiana]; Lao-
dicea was the metropolis of the latter: 1 Tim. vi. 22 (in
the spurious subscription). [Cf. Forbiger, Hndbch. d.
alt. Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 338, 347 sq.; Bp. Lghtft. on
Col., Introd. (esp. pp. 19, 69 sq.).]*
mada, ady. of time, fr. Hom. down; 1. of old:
Heb. i. 1; (as adj.) former, 2 Pet.i.9. [mdAat properly
designates the past not like mpiv and mpdrepov rela-
tively, i.e. with a reference, more or less explicit, to
some other time (whether past, pres., or fut.), but sim-
ply and absolutely.] 2. long ago: Mt. xi. 21;
Lk. x. 13; Jude 4; soalso of time just past, Mk. xv. 44
[ A. V. any while] (where L Tr txt. WH txt. 757); 2 Co.
xii. 19 LT Tr WH [R. V. all this time], (so in Hom. Od.
20, 293; Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 4).*
madatds, -d, -dv, (mada, q. v-), fr. Hom. down ; 1.
old, ancient, (Sept. several times for wr and p’ny’):
oivos tadatds (opp. to veos), Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.]
(Hom. Od. 2, 340; Sir. ix. 10); daqnn, 2 Co. iii. 14;
evroAn (opp. to cawn), given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7; Coun
(opp. to véov dip.), 1 Co. v. 7 sq.; neut. plur. madara (opp.
to xawa), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to
such articles of food as are fit for use only after having
been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc.,
as referred to; cf. 6naavpds, 1 ¢.]; dropping the fig., old
and new commandments; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23; Heb. v. 12
8qq:); 6 madaids judy avOpwros (opp. to 6 véos), our old
474
TAaNLYyEver ia
man, i. e. we, as we were before our mode of thought,
feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22;
[Col. iii. 9]. 2. no longer new, worn by use, the
worse for wear, old, (for 723, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq.):
iparvov, aokds, Mt. ix. 16 sq. ; “Mk. ii. 21 sq-; Lk. v. 39
sq. [SYN. see dpyxaios, fin. ]*
Tada.oTys, -nTos, 7, (madatds), oldness: ypdpparos, the
old state of life controlled by ‘the letter’ of the law, Ro.
vii. 6; see xatvdrys, and ypdppa, 2c. ([Eur.], Plat., Aes-
chin., Dio Cass. 72, 8.) *
trada.dw, -@: pf. meradaiwxa; Pass., pres. ptep. madat-
ovpevos ; fut. madavwOnoopat; (madatds) ; a. to make
ancient or old, Sept. for m3; pass. to become old, to be
worn out, Sept. for 723, poy: of things worn out by
time and use, as Badavrioy, Lk. xii. 33 ; iuarvov, Heb. i. 11
(Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxix. 5; Josh. ix. 19 (13); Neh.
ix. 21; Is. 1.9; li. 6; Sir. xiv. 17). pass. rd madatovpe-
vov, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp.
p- 208 b.; Tim. p. 59c.). b. to declare a thing to be
old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see yp
packe, fin. ].*
waAn, -ns, 4, (fr. mdAAw to vibrate, shake), fr. Hom.
down, wrestling (a contest between two in which each
endeavors to throw the other, and which is decided when
the victor is able 6\iBew cai xaréxew his prostrate antag-
onist, i. e. hold him down with his hand upon his neck ;
ef. Plat. lege. 7 p. 796; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361",
24; Heliod. aethiop. 10, 31; [ef. Krause, Gymn. u. Agon.
d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq.; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq.;
Dict. of Antiq. s. v. lucta]); the term is transferred to
the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil: Eph.
Wind 2s
mahuyyeverta (T WH raduyev. [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 77
bot.]), -as, 7, (wadw and yéveors), prop. new birth, repro-
duction, renewal, re-creation, (see Halm on Cic. pro Sest.
§ 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio; hence, moral
renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con-
secrated to God, a radical change of mind for the better,
(effected in baptism [cf. reff. s.v. Barricpa, 3]): Tit.
iii. 5 [ef. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see
p- 172 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. §§ 84, 108;
cf. Suicer, Thes. s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word
denotes the restoration of a thing to its pristine state, its
renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after
death, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 41; de cherub. § 32; [de
poster. Cain. § 36]; Long. past. 3, 4 (2) (madcyy. €x Bavd-
tov); Leian. encom. muscae 7; Schol. ad Soph. Elec. 62
(MIvOaydpas wept madvyyevecias éereparevero); Plut. mor.
p- 998 c. [i. & de esu carn. ii. 4,4] (6re yp@vrat Kotvois ai
Wuyai copaow ev rais maduyyeveoias [cf. ibid. i. 7, 5;
also de Is. et Osir. 72; de Ei ap. Delph. 9; etce.]); the
renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de vita
Moys. ii. § 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4; the renewal of
the world to take place after its destruction by fire, as
the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt. mundi §§ 3, 14,
17]; de mund. §15; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Gataker ad
loc.) ; Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 138]; that signal
and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth)
TaN
for the better, that restoration of the primal and perfect
condition of things which existed before the fall of our
first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection
with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi-
tive Christians expected in connection with the visible
return of Jesus from heaven: Mt. xix. 28 (where the
oO ie ° oO
Syriac correctly 12s [eSss, in the new age or
world) ; ef. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 sq. ;
Gfrorer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p. 272 sqq.; [Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29, 9; Weber, Altsynagog. Palist.
Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero’s
restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile,
Cic. ad Att. 6,6; of the restoration of the Jewish nation
after the exile, wad. rarpidos, Joseph. antt. 11, 3,9; of the
recovery of knowledge by recollection, madtyy. THs yvo-
cews eat 7 avduvnots, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in
the Journal des Savans for 1834, p. 488.) [Cf. Trench
§ xviii.; Cremer 3te Aufl. s. v.]*
awaduy, adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. anew, again, [but
the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among oth-
ers) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. ii. p. 485]; a. joined
to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition
of the action: Mt. iv. 8; xx.5; xxi. 36; xxii.1,4; Mk.
11. 13; iii. 20; Lk. xxiii. 20; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; vill. 2, 8, 12,
Diwan oy legexed 9 ACts XvAl 82) exval 28): TOexd 235
Hor var. 5 302 Co: xi. 16 Gal. 2:9 511.118 3 iv.195°2,Pet.
ii. 20; Phil. ii. 28; iv.4; Heb.i. 6 (where maduy is tacitly
opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into
the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus’ former life on earth) ;
Heb. v.12; vi. 1,6; Jas. v.18; Rev. x. 8, 11; madw puxpov
se. €ora, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; eis 7d waduv, again (cf. Germ.
zum wiederholten Male; [see eis, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii.
2; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning,
where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with
dywpev, Jn. xi. 7; dvaywpetv, Jn. vi. 15 [where Tdf. petyet
and Grsb. om. waduv], (cf. ib. 3) ; dmepxeaOar, Jn. iv. 3; x.
40; xx. 10; eioepyeoOa, Mk. ii. 1; iii.1; Jn. xviii. 33;
xix. 9; é£épyerOa, Mk. vii. 31; pyerOa, Jn. iv. 46; xiv.
3; 2Co.i. 16; xii. 21 [cf. W. 554 (515) n.; B.§ 145, 2a.];
tmayew, Jn. xi. 8; avakapnrev, Acts xviii. 21; dcarepay,
Mk. v. 21; troorpepev, Gal. i. 17; 9 eu mapovoia madw
mpos upas, my presence with you again, i. e. my return to
you, Phil. i. 26 [ef. B. § 125, 2]; also with verbs of tak-
ing, Jn. x. 17sq.; Acts x. 16 Rec.; xi. 10. b. with
other parts of the sentence: madw eis pdBov, Ro. viii. 15;
maAw ev Av, 2 Co. ii. 1. c. radu is explained by
the addition of more precise specifications of time [cef.
W. 604 (562) ]: mdduv ex rpirov, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mre.
br. éx tp.]; ék Sevtépov, Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15; mdduw
devrepor, Jn. iv. 54; xxi. 16; mdadw avodev, again, anew,
[R. V. back again (yet cf. Mey. ad loc.) ], Gal. iv. 9 (Sap.
xix. 6; madw é& dpyns, Arstph. Plut. 866; Plat. Eut. p.
11 b.and 15c.; Isoc. areiop. 6 p. 338 [p. 220 ed. Lange];
cf. W. u.s.). 2. again, i.e. further, moreover, (where
the subject remains the same and a repetition of the action
or condition is indicated): Mt. v. 33 (addw jKovcate) ;
xiii. 44 (where T Tr WH om. L br. maduv), 45, 47; xix.
475
TAVOLKL
24; Lk. xiii. 20; Jn. x. 7 [not Tdf.]; esp. where to O. T.
passages already quoted others are added: Mt. iv. 7;
Jn. xii. 39; xix. 37; Ro. xv. 10-12; 1 Co. iii. 20; Heb.
i. 5; ii. 13; iv. 5; x. 30; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 3 sq. and
often in Philo; cf. Bleek, Br. a.d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 108. 3.
in turn, on the other hand: Lk. vi.43 T WH L br. Tr br.;
1 Co. xii. 21; 2 Co. x.7; 1 Jn. ii. 8, (Sap. xiii. 8; xvi. 23;
2 Mace. xv. 39; see exx. fr. prof. auth. in Papes. v. 2;
Passow s.v. 3; [Ellendt u. s. (ad init.) ; L. and S.s. v.
II. ; but many (e. g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Mt. iv. 7)
refuse to recognize this sense in the N. T.]). John uses
maw in his Gospel far more freq. than the other N. T.
writ., in his Epp. but once; Luke two or three times;
the author of the Rev. twice.
mahivyeveria, see madtyyevecia.
mwapmdndel (T WH mavna. [cf. WH. App. p. 150)),
adv., (fr. the adj. raymAnOns, which is fr. ras and mAn6os),
with the whole multitude, all together, one and all: Lk.
xxiii. 18 (Dio Cass. 75, 9,1). (Cf. W. § 16, 4 B. a.]*
mwaptrodus, mapmrdAAn, mapymoAv, (was and modus), very
great: Mk. viii. 1 Rec. [where L T Tr WH madw oddod J.
(Arstph., Plat., Plut., [al.].) *
Tlappvata, -as, 7, Pamphylia, a province of Asia Minor,
bounded on the E. by Cilicia, on the W. by Lycia and
Phrygia Minor, on the N. by Galatia and Cappadocia,
and on the S. by the Mediterranean Sea (there called
the Sea [or Gulf] of Pamphylia [now of Adalia]): Acts
ii. 10; xiii. 13; xiv. 24; xv. 38; xxvil. 5. [Conybeare
and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii.; Lewin, St. Paul, index
s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.]*
mavdoxevs, see avdoyxevs.
arav-SoKiov, see TavOoxeELov.
mrav-Soxetov (-Soxiov, Tdf. [cf. his note on Lk. x. 34, and
Hesych. s. v.]), -ov, 7, (fr. mavOoxevs, q- V-), an inn, a
public house for the reception of strangers (modern
caravansary, khan, manzil): Lk. x. 34. (Polyb. 2, 15,
5; Plut. de sanit. tuenda c. 14; Epict. enchirid. ec. 11 ;
but the Attic form mavdoxeiov is used by Arstph. ran.
550; Theophr. char. 11 (20), 2; Plut. Crass. 22; Pa-
laeph. fab. 46; Ael. v.h. 14,14; Polyaen. 4, 2, 3; Epict.
diss. 2, 23, 36 sqq.; 4, 5,15; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307.)*
mav-5oxX evs, -ews, 6, (ras and déyouat [hence lit. ‘one who
receives all comers ’]), for the earlier and more elegant
mavdoxevs (so Tdf.; [cf. W. 25 note]), an inn-keeper, host:
Lk. x. 35. (Polyb. 2, 15,6; Plut. de sanit. tuenda
Cutan)
maviyupis, -ews, 7, (fr. mas and dyupts fr. dyeipw), fr.
Hat. and Pind. down ; a. a festal gathering of the
whole people to celebrate public games or other solemnt-
ties. b. univ. a public festal assembly; so in Heb.
xii. 22 (23) where the word is to be connected with
dyyAAwv [so GL Tr (Tdf.); yet see the Comm.]. (Sept.
for 3yin, Ezek. xlvi. 11; Hos. ii. 11 (13); ix.55 Mm xy,
Am. v. 21.) [Cf. Trench §i.]*
mavorxt [so RGL Tr] and ravorxei (T[WH; see WH.
App. p. 154 and cf. et, ¢]), on this difference in writing cf.
W. 43 sq.; B. 73 (64), (mas and otkos; a form rejected
by the Atticists for mavotxia, mavorxecia, mavorxnoia, [cf. W.
qwavoTrAla
26 (25); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 514 sq.]), with all (his) house,
with (his) whole family: Acts xvi. 34. (Plat. Eryx. p.
392¢.; Aeschin. dial. 2,1; Philo de Joseph. § 42; de
vita Moys. i. 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 42; 5,1,2; 3 Mace.
iii. 27 where Fritzsche -xia.) *
mavotAta, -as, 7, (fr. mavordos wholly armed, in full
armor; and this fr. mas and émdov), full armor, complete
armor, (i. e. a shield, sword, lance, helmet, aa and
breastplate, [cf. Polyb. 6, 23, 2 sqq.]): Lk. xi. 22; @eov,
which God supplies [W. 189 (178)], Eph. vi. 11, 13,
where the spiritual helps needed for overcoming the
temptations of the devil are so called. (Hdt., Plat.,
Isocr., Polyb., Joseph., Sept. ; trop. of the various appli-
ances at God’s command for punishing, Sap. v. 18.) *
mavoupyia, -as, 7, (avovpyos, 4. V-), crafliness, cunning :
Lk. xx. 23; 2Co. iv. 2; xi. 3; Eph. iv. 14; contextually
i.g. @ specious or false wisdom, 1 Co. iii. 19. (Aeschyl.,
Soph., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Leian., Ael., al.; maod re ém-
ornun xoptCouern Suxaroovwys Kal THs GAAns aperhs mavoup-
yia od copia paivera, Plat. Menex. p. 247 a. for MDI
in a good sense, prudence, skill, in undertaking and carry-
ing on affairs, Prov. i. 4; viii. 5; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv. 11)
10.) *
mavotpyos, -ov, (ras and EPTQ i. q. epyd¢ouar; on the
accent, see xaxovpyos), Sept. for DIY; skilful, clever,
i. e. 1. in a good sense, fit to undertake and accom-
plish anything, dexterous; wise, sagacious, skilful, (Aris-
tot., Polyb., Plut., al.; Sept. Prov. xiii. 1; xxviii. 2).
But far more freq. 2. in a bad sense, crafty, cun-
ning, knavish, treacherous, deceitful, (Tragg., Arstph.,
Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 32 (31) [but here in a good
sense]; xxi. 12, ete.) : 2 Co. xii. 16.*
mavTAnbet, see maymAnbel.
mavraxf or ravrax7 (L Tr WH; see eikn), adv., every-
where: Acts xxi. 28 L T Tr WH, for ravrayod, — a varia-
tion often met with also in the Mss. of prof. auth. [From
Hat. down; ef. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 64.]*
mavraxdbev, adv., from all sides, from every quarter :
Mk. i. 45 Rec. [Hdt., Thuc., Plat., al.]*
mavTaxod, adv., everywhere: Mk. i. 28 T WH Tr br. ;
xvi. 20; Lk. ix. 6; Acts xvii. 30; xxi. 28 Rec.; xxiv.
3; xxviii. 22; 1Co.iv.17. [Soph:, Thuc., Plat., al.]*
mavreAts, -es, (mas and rédos), all-complete, perfect,
( as Soph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace. vii. 16) ;
eis TO Tavredes (prop. unto bovinictenkss [W. § 51, 1 c¢.])
completely, perfectly, utterly: Lk. xiii. 11; Heb. vii. 25,
(Philo leg. ad Gaium 21; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 5; 3, 11,
Sand wariyn6, Qos" %, dS, secAeliyeih.!7,)25) nasi
27).*
mwéavrn (RG L Tr WH zaprn, see reff. s. v. efx), (ras),
adv., fr. Hom. down, everywhere; wholly, in all respects,
in every way: Acts xxiv. 3.*
mavrobev, (ras), adv., fr. Hom. down, from all sides,
from every quarter: Mk. i. 45 L T WH Tr [but the last
named here mavrdéev; cf. Chandler § 842]; Lk. xix.
43; Jn. xviii. 20 Rec.bezelz; Heb. ix. 4.*
TavToKpaTwp, -opos, 6, (is and xparéw), he who holds
sway over all things; the ruler of all; almighty: of God,
476
Tapa
2Co. vi. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 35); Rev.i. 8; iv.
8; xi. 17; xv. 3; xvi. 7,14; xix. 6,15; xxi. 22. (Sept.
for ninay in the splines mindy MM or INI “7d Je-
hovah or God of hosts; also for *1w; Sap. vii. 25; Sir.
xlii. 17; 1. 14; often in Judith and 2 and 3 Macc. ; An-
thol. Gr. iv. p. 151 ed. Jacobs; Inserr.; eccles. writ.
[e. g. Teaching etc. 10,3; cf. Harnack’s notes on Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. init. and the Symb. Rom. (Patr. apost. opp.
i. 2 p. 134)].)*
mavrote, (as), adv., (for which the Atticists tell us
that the better Grk. writ. used éxdorore; cf. Sturz, De
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 sq.; [W. 26 (25)]), at all
times, always, ever: Mt. xxvi. 11; Mk. xiv. 7; Lk. xv.
315; xviii. 1; Jn. vi. 34; vii. 6; viii. 29; xi. 42; xii. 8;
xviii. 20+ [20° Ree.*]; Ro. i. 10:(9); 1Co. 1.45 xv. 58;
2 Co. ii. 145 iv. 10; v. 6; [vii. 14 Lmrg.]; ix. 8; Gal.
iv. 18; Eph. v. 20; Phil. i. 4, 20; [iv. 4]; Col. i. 3; iv.
6) (12); PTR. 2; ides PRG] savor? piv. 15,16] 2
Th. i..3, 11; ii. 18; 2 Tim. i1.'7; Philem:) 4; Hebi «vii
25. (Sap. xi. 22(21); xix. 17 (18); Joseph., Dion. Hal.,
Plut., Hdian. 3, 9, 13 [(7 ed. Bekk.)]; Artem. oneir. 4,
20; Athen., Diog. Laért.)*
mayvres, (from mas), adv., altogether (Latin omnino),
i.e. a. in any and every way, by all means: 1 Co.
ix. 22 (so fr. Hdt. down). b. doubtless, surely, cer-
tainly: Lk. iv. 23; Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xxi. 22; xxviii.
4; 1 Co. ix. 10, (Tob. xiv. 8; Ael.v. h. 1, 32; by Plato
in answers [cf. our colloquial by all means]). Gi
with the negative ov, a. where ov is postpositive, in
no wise, not at all: 1 Co. xvi. 12 (often so as far back as
Hom.). B. when the negative precedes, the force of
the adverb is restricted : od mavrws, not entirely, not al-
together, 1 Co. v. 10; not in all things, not in all respects,
Ro. iii. 9; (rarely i. q. mdvtws od, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9
‘God od ravras én ddpevos Trois duaprnpaow nav.’ Like-
wise ovdev mavrws in Hdt. 5,34. Butin Theogn. 305 ed.
Bekk. oi kaxoi od mavrws Kakol ex yaotpos yeysvact KTX. is
best translated not wholly, not entirely. Cf. W. 554
(515) sq.; B. 389 (334) sq. [on whose interpretation of
Ro. |. c., although it is that now generally adopted, see
Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.]).*
mapa, [it neglects elision before prop. names begin.
ning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before
some other words; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, ef. W. § 5,1 a.;
B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity,
with various modifications corresponding to the various
cases with which it is joined; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p.
643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Kiihner
§ 440; Kriiger § 68, 34-36. It is joined
I. with the GenrTIVE; and as in Grk. prose writ.
always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a
thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or
from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or
store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von... her, von neben; French
de chez; [Eng. Srom beside, rom; Sept. for “940, He
Syxn (1 S. xvii. 30); ef. W. 364 (342) sq. a. prop-
erly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence,
after verbs of coming, departing, setting out,
Tapa
ete. (cf. French venir, partir de chez quelqu’un) : Mk. xiv.
43; Lk. viii. 49 [here Lehm. a6]; Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 27;
xvii. 8; [map fs exBeBAnkes Emra Sapdma, Mk. xvi. 9 L. Tr
txt. WH]; eivac mapa Oeov, of Christ, to be sent from God,
Jn. ix. 16, 33; to be sprung from God (by the nature of
the Nodyos), vi. 46 ; vii. 29 (where for the sake of the con-
text Kaxeivds pe ameoreidev ['Tdf. dméoradkev] is added) ;
povoyevovs mapa marpds Sc. Gyros, Jn. i. 143 €or te mapa
twos, is given by one, Jn. xvii. 7 [ef. d. below]. b.
joined to passive verbs, wapa makes one the author, the
giver, etc. [W. 365 (343); B. § 134, 1]; so after dzo-
oréA\NeoOa, Jn. i. 6 (the expression originates in the
fact that one who is sent is conceived of as having been
at the time with the sender, so that he could be selected
or commissioned from among a number and then sent
off) ; yiveoOar, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 11 (aapa kupiov,
from the Lord, by divine agency or by the power at
God’s command) ; akin to which is ov« advvarnoe: mapa
rov Oeod wav pnya, Lk.i. 37 Lmrg. T Tr WH [see aduva-
rew, b.]; NadetoOa, Lk. i. 45 (not tad, because God had
not spoken in person, but by an angel) ; xarnyopeiaOat,
Acts xxii. 30 Rec. (not m6 [yet so L T Tr WH] because
Paul had not yet been formally accused by the Jews, but
the tribune inferred from the tumult that the Jews ac-
cused him of some crime). c. after verbs of seek-
ing, asking, taking, receiving, buying, [cf. W.
370 (347) n.; B. § 147,53; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i.
12]; as, aira@, airodpa, Mt. xx. 20 (where L Tr txt. WH
txt. dw adrov) ; Jn. iv. 9; Acts iii.2; ix. 2; Jas.i.5; 1Jn.
v. 15 (where L T Tr WH am avrod); yr, Mk. viii. 11;
Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; AauBdve, Mk. xii. 2; Jn. v. 34, 41,
AA x18 MACS) 1193 3) ils Ose XVils 9x14 3) xxvi. 10)
Jas. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; 1 Jn. iii. 22 (L T Tr WH am avrod);
2Jn.4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); mapadapBava, Gal. i.12; 1 Th.
ii. 13; iv. 1; dmoAapBdvo, Lk. vi. 34 RGLTrmrg.;
kouicouar, Eph. vi. 8; yiverai poi tt, Mt. xviii. 19; dexo-
pa, Acts xxii. 5; Phil. iv. 18; ¢yw, Actsix.14; dvéopa,
Acts vii. 16; dyopagoua, Rev. iii. 18; also after aprov
dayeiv (sc. Sobevra), 2 Th. iii. 8; etpetv Edeos, 2 Tim. i.
18; éora yapis, 2 Jn. 3. after verbs of hearing, as-
certaining, learning, making inquiry; as, dxovw
rt, Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 45 sq.; vii. 51; viii. 26,40; xv. 15;
Acts x. 22; xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. i. 13; ii. 2; muvOavopat,
Mt. ii. 4; Jn. iv. 52; dxpiBd, Mt. ii. 16; emvywaokw, Acts
xxiv. 8; pavOave, 2 Tim. ili. 14. d. in phrases in
which things are said eiyae or é&épyecOa from one:
Lk. ii. 1; vi. 19; Jn. xvii. 7 [see a. above]. ena;
}, TO mapa Tivos [see 6, I. 8; cf. B. § 125, 9; W. § 18,
3]; a. absol.: of map adtov, those of one’s family,
i. e. his kinsmen, relations, Mk. iii. 21 (Sus. 33; one’s de-
scendants [yet here Vulg. gui cum eo erant], 1 Mace. xiii.
52; [Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 5]); cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p.
101; [ Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.];_ ra mapa twos,
what one has beside him, and so at his service, i. e. one’s
means, resources, Mk. v. 26; ra mapa Tier, sc. dvra, i. e.
Sodévra, Lk. x. 7; Phil. iv. 18; [ef. W. 366 (348) ; Joseph.
antt. 8, 6,6; b. j.:2, 8,43; ete.]. 8. where it refers
toa preceding noun: 7 efovaia 7 mapa Twos, sc. received,
ATT
Tapa
Acts xxvi. 12 [RG]; émxoupias rijs rapa (LT Tr WH
amd) Tov Oeod, Acts xxvi. 22 (% mapa tivos etvora, Xen.
mem. 2, 2,12); 9 map’ enov SiaOqKn, of which I am the
author, Ro. xi. 27 [cf. W. 193 (182)].
II. with the Dative, zapa indicates that something is
or is done either in the immediate vicinity of some one,
or (metaph.) in his mind, near by, beside, in the power of,
in the presence of, with, Sept. for bys (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 1;
Prov. viii. 30), 13 (Gen. xliv. 16 sq.; Num. xxxi. 49),
‘7 pa (see b. below) ; cf. W. § 48, d. p. 394 sq. (369); [B.
339 (291 sq.)]. a. near, by: eiornkeccay rapa TO
otavp@, Jn. xix. 25 (this is the only pass. in the N. T.
where zrapa is joined with a dat. of the thing, in all
others with a dat. of the person). aftera verb of mo-
tion, to indicate the rest which follows the motion [ef. B.
339 (292)], €ornoev adro trap’ éavt@, Lk. ix. 47. b.
with, i.e. in one’s house; in one’s town; in one’s society:
EeviCecOa [q. v.], Acts x. 6; xxi. 16; peve, of guests
or lodgers, Jn. i. 39 (40); iv. 40; xiv. 17, 25; Acts ix.
43; xvili.3,20 [RG]; xxi. 7sq.; émpevew, Acts xxviii.
14 LT Tr WH; xaradvew, Lk. xix. 7 (Dem. de corona
§ 82 [cf. B. 339 (292)]); dpiorav, Lk. xi. 37; amodeinew
rt, 2 Tim. iv. 13; mapa ro Gep, dwelling with God, Jn.
viii. 38; i.q.in heaven, Jn. xvii. 5; prov Exew, to have
a reward laid up with God in heaven, Mt. vi. 1; etpeiv
xapw (there where God is, i. e. God’s favor [ef. W. 365
(343) ]), Lk.i. 30; a pers. is also said to have yapis mapa
one with whom he is acceptable, Lk. ii. 52; rodro ydpis
rapa Oe@, this is acceptable with God, pleasing to him,
1 Pet. ii. 20 Gor *yy3, Ex. xxxiii. 12,16; Num. xi. 15);
mapa 6, in fellowship with God (of those who have
embraced the Christian religion and turned to God from
whom they had before been estranged), 1 Co. vii. 24;
mapa kvpio (in heaven), before the Lord as judge, 2 Pet.
ii. 11 [@ Lom. and Tr WH br. the phrase]; zap” tpiv,
in your city, in your church, Col. iv. 16; w. a dat. plur.
i. q. among, Mt. xxii. 25; xxviii. 15; Rev. ii. 18; zap’
éauT@, at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2. ce. nap’ (L Tr WH
txt. ev) éavr@, with one’s self i. e. in one’s own mind, d:a-
Aoyi¢erOa, Mt. xxi. 25. d. a thing is said to be or
not to be mapa tim, with one, a. which belongs to his
nature and character, or is in accordance with his prac-
tice or the reverse; as, yz) adixia mapa T@ Oe@ ; Ro. ix. 14;
add, Ro. ii. 11; 2Co.i.17; Eph. vi. 9; Jas. i. 17. B.
which is or is not within one’s power: Mt. xix. 26; Mk.
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27, cf. i. 37 RG L txt. €. mapa Tit,
with one i. e. in his judgment, he being judge, (so in Hat.
and the Attic writ.; cf. Passow s. v. II. 2, vol. ii. p. 667;
[L. and S.s. v. B. II. 3]): mapa r@ Ged, Ro. ii. 13 ; 1 Co.
Ge tO NGal 115 11; 2 Th. 65 Jas. 19275) Pete 14:72
Pet. iii. 8 [. kupio]; ppdvipoy eivar map’ €auvr@, [A. V. in
one’s own conceit}, Ro. xi. 25 (where Tr txt. WH txt. ev) ;
xii. 16.
III. with an Accusative; Sept. for Sxx, 3 5y,
aya (Josh. vii. 7; xxii. 7); cf. W. §49¢. p. 403 (377)
sq.; [B. 339 (292)]; 1. prop. of place, at, by, near,
by the side of, beside, along; so with verbs of motion:
mepurarety mapa THY Oadaccay (Plat. Gorg. p. 511 e.), Mt.
Tapa
iv. 18; Mk.i. 16 [here LT Tr WH mapayo]; mimrew,
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4; Lk. viii. 5,41; xvii.163; Acts v.
10 (where L T Tr WH mpés); omapjva, Mt. xiii. 19;
pirrev, Mt. xv. 30; riBevar, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf.
mpos]; V- 2; admorieva, Acts vii. 58; épyecOa, e&épyer Oat,
Mt. xv. 29; Mk. ii. 13 [here Tdf. eis]; Acts xvi. 13; of
mapa Thy ddr, sc. meadvtes, Mk. iv. 15, cf. 4; Lk. viii. 12,
cf. 5. with verbs of rest: xaOjo0@a, Mt. xiii. 1; xx. 30;
Lk. viii. 35; with efva, Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. with verbs
denoting the business in which one is engaged, as maidev-
ew in pass., Acts xxii. 3 [so G LT Tr WH punctuate];
d:daoxew, Mk. iv. 1. without a verb, in specifications of
place, Acts x. 32; Heb. xi. 12. 2. beside, beyond,
i. e. metaph. a. i.q. contrary to: mapa thy didaxnv, Ro.
xvi. 17; map’ éAmida, lit. beyond hope, i.e where the laws
and course of nature left no room for hope, hence i. q.
withoul [A. V. against] hope, Ro. iv. 18 (in prof. auth.,
of things which happen against hope, beyond one’s ex-
pectation, cf. Passow s. v. III. 3, vol. ii. p. 669°; Dion.
Hal. antt. 6, 25); mapa rév vopov, contrary to the law,
Acts xviii. 13 (apa rods vopous, opp. to kata Tovs vdpous,
Xen. mem. 1, 1,18); map’ 6, contrary to that which, i. e.
at variance with that which, Gal. i. 8sq.; mapa vow,
Ro. i. 26; xi. 24, (Thuc. 6,17; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 d.);
after dAXos, other than, different from, 1 Co. iii. 11 (see
exx. fr. prof. auth. in Passow s. v. III. 3 fin. vol. ii. p.
670*); mapa tov xticavta, omitting or passing by the
Creator, Ro. i. 25, where others explain it before (above)
the Creator, rather than the Creator, agreeably indeed to
the use of the prep. in Grk. writ. (cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii.
p- 28 (cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 165 8.; L. and S.
s. v. C. I. 5d.]), but not to the thought of the passage.
except, save, i. q. if you subtract from a given sum, less:
Teooapdkovra Tapa piay, one (stripe) excepted, 2 Co. xi.
24 (reaoapaxovra érav mapa Tptdkovta nuepas, Joseph.
antt. 4, 8, 1 ; mapa mevre vais, five ships being deducted,
Thue. 8, 29; [map’ dAtyas Whpous, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 37,
3]; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258; [W.
u. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond:
mapa katpov nAckias, Heb. xi. 11; map’ 6 det (Plut. mor.
p- 83 f. [de profect. in virt. §13]), Ro. xii. 3; i. q. more
than: duapr@dot rapa mavtas, Lk. xiii. 2; éypuré oe €auov
mapa tovs per. more copiously than [A. V. above] thy
fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; tyoodv twa mapa
tia, Sir. xv. 5); xpivewv nuepav rap’ népav, to prefer one
day to another (see kpiva, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is
joined to comparatives: mhéov mapa tr. LK. iii. 13; d1a-
opwtepov rap avrovs dvoua, Heb.i. 4; add, ili. 3; ix. 23;
xi. 4; xii. 24; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in W. § 35, 2 b. [and
as above]. éAarrovv twa rapa t-, to make one inferior
to another, Heb. ii. 7, 9. 3. on account of (cf. Lat.
propter i. q. ob): mapa rovro, for this reason, therefore,
1 Co. xii. 15 sq.; cf. W. § 49 g. c.
IV. In Composition rapa denotes 1. situation
or motion either from the side of, or to the side of ; near,
beside, by, to: mapabaddoowos, mapadtos, TaporKe@, Tapako-
Aovbéw, mapadapBdavw, tmapadéyouat, TapaTtA€ew, Tapaye ;
of what is done secretly or by stealth, as mapeurepyopat,
478
TapaBacls
mapecayo, maperdvw; cf. [the several words and] Fritz-
sche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 346. by the side of i.e.
ready, present, at hand, (mapa tw): mapeit, mapovota,
Tapex@, etc. 2. violation, neglect, aberration, [cf.
our beyond or aside i. q. amiss]: mapaBaive, mapaBarns,
Tapavopew, Tapakovw, Tapinut, mapeots, mapadoyiComat,
mapadogos, tmapadpovia, etc. 3. like the Germ. an
(in anreizen, antreiben, etc.) : mapatndow, mapamixpaive,
napogive, mapopyite. ([Cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 650 sq. |
mapa-Balvw ; 2 aor. mapéBnv; prop. to go by the side of
(in Hom. twice mapBeBaws of one who stands by anoth-
er’s side in a war-chariot, I]. 11, 522; 13, 708 [but here
of men on foot ]); to go past or to pass over without touch-
ing a thing; trop. to overstep, neglect, violate, transgress,
w. an ace. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes-
chyl. down [ef. mapa, [V. 1 and 2]): ryv mapadoouw, Mt.
Xv. 23 THv evtoAny Tov Oeod, ibid. 3; 6 mapaBaivey, he that
transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to
the true doctrine, opp. to pevew ev r7 didax7, 2 In. 9 RG
[where L T Tr WH 6 zpodyav (q. Vv.) ] (so of mapaBaivor-
res, transgressors of the law, Sir. xl. 14 [cf. Joseph. c.
Ap. 2, 18, 2; 29,4; 30,1])3 (rv dcaOneny, Josh. vii. 11,
15; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often; rd pjua xvpiov, Num. xiv.
41; 1S. xv. 24, ete.; ras cvvOnxas, Polyb. 7,5, 1; Joseph.
antt. 4, 6,5; Ael. v. h. 10, 2; besides, rapaB. dixny, rov
vépov, Tos Opkous, niotwy, etc., in Grk. writ.). in imita-
tion of the Hebr. 930 foll. by 1, we find mapa. é« twos
and azo twos, so to go past as to turn aside from, i. e. to
depart, leave, be turned from: ék ths 6800, Ex. xxxii. 8;
Deut. ix. 12; dé trav évrodav, Deut. xvii. 20; amd ray
Adywv, Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once so in the INGAans:
ex (LT Tr WH az) rijs arroorodns, of one who abandons
his trust, [R. V. fell away], Acts i. 25. (In the Sept.
also for 12), V5 to break, MMW to deviate, turn aside.)
[SyN.: mapaBaivew to overstep, mapamopever ba to proceed
by the side of, mapépxerOat to go past. |*
mapa-BadAw: 2 aor. mapéeBadov; 1. to throw be-
fore, cast to, [cf. mapa, IV. 1], (Hom., Plat., Polyb., Dio
Cass., al. ; as fodder to horses, Hom. Il. 8, 504). 2:
to put one thing by the side of another for the sake of
comparison, to compare, liken, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Polyb.,
Joseph., Hdian.): rjv Baotdeiav tov Oeod ev mapaBorp,
to portray the kingdom of God (in), by the use of, a
similitude, Mk. iv. 30 RG Lmrg. Tr mrg. [ef. B. § 133,
22]. 3. reflexively, to put one’s self, betake one’s
self, into a place or to a person (Plat., Polyb., Plut.,
Diog. Laért.); of seamen (Hdt. 7,179; Dem. p. 163, 4;
eis TlorudAovs, Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 4), ets Sayov, Acts xx.
15 [put in at (R. V. touched at)]. For another use of
this verb in Grk. writ. see mapaBodevopat.*
mapd-Bacis, -ews, 7, (rapaBaive, q. V-), prop. @ going
over; metaph. a disregarding, violating ; Vulg. praevarica-
tio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) transgressio ; [A. V. transgres-
sion]: w.a gen. of the object, rév dpxav, 2 Macc. xv. 10;
tov dixaiov, Plut. compar. Ages. and Pomp. 1; Tov vdpov,
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph. antt. 18, 8,2); ab-
solutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified
law: Ro. v. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but dpapria is wrong-do-
napaBatns
ing which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty
of [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § Ixvi.]) ; ra@v mapa. yapw, to
create transgressions, i.e. that sins might take on the
character of transgressions, and thereby the conscious-
ness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption
be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the
Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15; Heb. ii. 2; ix. 15; Ps. e. (ci.)
3; w. a gen. of the subj., ray ddikwv, Sap. xiv. 31.*
mapa-Barns, -ov, 6, (mapaBaivw [cf. W. 26]), a trans-
gressor (Vulg. praevaricator, transgressor) : vépov, a law-
breaker (Plaut. legirupa), Ro. ii. 25, 27; Jas. ii. 11;
absol., Gal. ii. 18; Jas. ii. 9. [Aeschyl. (aapBdrys) ;
Graec. Ven. Deut. xxi. 18, 20.]*
mapa-Bidfopar: 1 aor. mapeBiacduny; depon. verb, to
employ force contrary to nature and right [cf. mapa, IV. 2],
to compel by employing force (Polyb. 26,1, 3): twa, to
constrain one by entreaties, Lk. xxiv. 29; Acts xvi. 15;
so Sept. in Gen. xix. 9; 1 S. xxviii. 23, ete.*
mapaBodevopar: 1 aor. mid. ptep. mapaBodevadpevos ;
to be mapaBodos i. e. one who rashly exposes himself to dan-
gers, to be venturesome, reckless, (cf. W. 93 (88); Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 67); recklessly to expose one’s self to dan-
ger: with a dat. of respect, 77 Wuyj, as respects life;
hence, to expose one’s life boldly, jeopard life, hazard life,
Phil. ii. 30 GL T Tr WH for the wapaBovdevodp. of Rec.;
on the difference between these readings cf. Gabler,
Kleinere theol. Schriften, i. p. 176sqq. This verb is
not found in the Grk. writ., who say mapaBd\Xeo Oat, now
absol. to expose one’s self to danger (see Passow s. v.
mapaBdddw, 2; L.and S. ib. II.), now with an acc. of the
thing [to risk, stake], as yuynv, Hom. Il. 9, 322; copa
kat Wuxnv, 2 Mace. xiv. 38 (see other exx. in Passow
[and L. and S.] l. c.); now w. a dat. of reference, rats
Wuxais, Diod. 3, 35; 77 euavrod Kepadjy, apyvpio, Phryn.
ed. Lob. p. 238; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. 1. ¢.].*
mapaBohh, -js, 7, (mapaBddAw, q- v-), Sept. for bwin;
1. a placing of one thing by the side of another, juxta-
position, as of ships in battle, Polyb. 15, 2, 13; Diod. 14,
60. 2. metaph. @ comparing, comparison of one
thing with another, likeness, similitude, (Plat., Isocr.,
Polyb., Plut.): univ., Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; an
example by which a doctrine or precept is illustrated,
Mk. iii. 23; Lk. xiv. 7; a thing serving as a figure of
something else, Heb. ix.9; this meaning also very many
interpreters give the word in Heb. xi. 19, but see 5 be-
low; spec. a narrative, fictitious but agreeable to the
laws and usages of human life, by which either the duties
of men or the things of God, particularly the nature and
history of God’s kingdom, are figuratively portrayed [cf.
B. D. s. vv. Fable, Parable, (and reff. there ; add Aristot.
rhet. 2, 20, 2 sqq. and Cope’s notes)]: Mt. xiii. 3,10, 13,
24, 31, 33-35, 53; xxi. 33, 45; [xxii.1]; Mk. iv. 2, 10,
[11], 13, 30, 33 sq.; [vii. 17]; xii. 1, [12]; Lk. viii. 4,
Otome WG, Ad xi..6 5 xiv. 77) Xv. Ss exvill 1, 9s ore
11; xx. 9,19; xxi.29; witha gen. of the pers. or thing
to which the contents of the parable refer [W. § 30,
La.]: tov ometpovros, Mt. xiii. 18; rdv Ci¢aviav, ib. 36;
tv Baoweiav Tov Oeov ev mapaBoAy ribevat (lit. to set forth
479
Tapayivouwat
the kingdom of God in a parable), to illustrate (the na-
ture and history of) the kingdom of God by the use of a
parable, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Trtxt. WH. 3. a pithy
and instructive saying, involving some likeness or compar
ison and having preceptive or admonitory force; an
aphorism, a maxim: Lk. v.36 ; vi. 39; Mt. xv. 15, (Prov.
i.6; Keel. i. 17; Sir. iii, 29 (27); xiii. 26 (25), etc.).
Since sayings of this kind often pass into proverbs,
mapaBodn is 4. a proverb: Lk. iv. 23 (1 S. x. 12;
Ezek. xii. 22 sq.; xviii. 2 sq.). 5. an act by which
one exposes himself or his possessions to danger, a ven-
ture, risk, (in which sense the plur. seems to be used by
Plut. Arat. 22: dua wodA@v éArypav kai mapaBodav srepai-
vovtes mpos TO Teixos [cf. Diod. Sic. frag. lib. xxx. 9, 2;
also var. in Thue. 1, 131, 2 (and Poppo ad loc.)]); &
mapaBoA7y, in risking him, i.e. at the very moment when
he exposed his son to mortal peril (see mapaBonXevopat),
Heb. xi. 19 (Hesych. &€k mapaBodjs+ éx mapaxwdvvevpa-
tos); others with less probability explain it, in a figure,
i.e. as a figure, either of the future general resurrection
of all men, or of Christ offered up to God and raised
again from the dead; others otherwise.*
mapa-BovAevopar: 1 aor. ptcp. mapaBovAevoauevos ; to
consult amiss [see mapa, IV. 2]: w. a dat. of the thing,
Phil. ii. 30 Rec. Not found in prof. auth. See zapa-
BoAevopa.*
map-ayyeAla, -as, 7, (mapayyeAAw), prop. announcement,
a proclaiming or giving a message to; hence a charge,
command: Acts xvi. 24; a prohibition, Acts v. 28; used
of the Christian doctrine relative to right living, 1 Tim.
i. 5; of particular directions relative to the same, 18;
plur.in 1 Th.iv.2. (Ofamilitary order in Xen., Polyb.;
of instruction, Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 2 p. 11049, 7; Diod.
exc. p. 512, 19 [i. e. frag. lib. xxvi. 1, 1].)*
map-ayyéddw ; impf. mapyyyeAAov; 1 aor. mapnyyetda;
(mapa and ayyéAd@) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; LL.
prop. to trunsmit a message along from one to another
[(cf. apa, IV. 1)], to declare, announce. 2. to com
mand, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [cf.
Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; foll. by
Aéywy and direct disc. Mt. x. 5; foll. by an inf. aor.,
Mt. xv.35 L T Tr WH; Mk. viii. 6; Lk. viii. 29; Acts
x.42; xvi. 18; with py inserted, Lk. v. 14; viii.56; Acts
xxiii. 22; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lchm. inf. pres.]; foll. by an
inf. pres., Acts xvi. 23; xvii. 30 [here T Tr mrg. WH have
drayy.]; 2 Th. iii. 6; with py inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [GL
T Tr WH]; Acts i. 4; iv. 18; v.28 (aapayyedia mapay-
yeAAew, to charge strictly, W. §54,3; B.184 (159 sq.)),
40; 1 Tim.i. 3; vi. 17; revi re, 2 Th. iii. 4 [but T Tr WH
om. L br. the dat.]; rovro foll. by érz, 2 Th. iii. 10; revi
foll. by ace. and inf., [Acts xxiii. 30 L T Trmrg.]; 2
Th. iii. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [here Tdf. om. dat.]; foll. by an
inf. alone, Acts xv. 5; by iva (see iva, II. 2 b.), Mk. vi.
8; 2 Th. iii. 12; with an ace. of the thing alone, 1 Co. xi.
17; 1 Tim. iv. 11; v. 7. [SyYN. see xeAevo, fin. ] *
twapa-yivopat; impf. 3 pers. plur. rapeyivovro (Jn. iii.
23); 2 aor. mapeyevdouny ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 813;
(prop. to become near, to place one’s self by the side of,
Tapayo
hence) to be present, to come near, approach: absol., Mt.
iii. 1 [but in ed. 1 Prof. Grimm (more appropriately) asso-
ciates this with Heb. ix. 11; Lk. xii. 51 below]: Lk. [xiv.
21]; xix.16; Jn. iii. 23; Acts v.21 sq. 25; ix. 89; x. 32
(RG Tr mrg. br.], 33; xi. 23; xiv. 27; xvii. 10; xviii. 27;
xxi. 18; xxili. 16, 355 xxiv. 17, 24; xxv. 7; xxviii. 21; 1
Co. xvi.3; foll. by dé w. gen. of place and eis w. ace. of
place, Mt. ii. 1; Acts xiii. 14; by awd with gen. of place
and émi w. acc. of place and pds w. acc. of pers. Mt. iii.
13; by mapa w. gen. of pers. (i. e. sent by one [cf. W. 365
(342)]), Mk. xiv. 43; by mpds twa, Lk. vii. 4, 203 vill. 19;
Acts xx. 18; mpds twa ék w. gen. of place, Lk. xi. 6; by
eis w. ace. of place, Jn. viii. 2; Acts ix. 26 (here Lehm.
év); xv.4; by émi twa (against, see eri, C. I. 2 g. y. BB),
Lk. xxii. 52 [Tdf. zpds]. i. q. to come forth, make one’s
public appearance, of teachers: of the Messiah, absol.
Heb. ix. 11; foll. by an inf. denoting the purpose, LK. xii.
[of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 1 (see above)]. i. q.
to be present with help [R. V. to take one’s part], w. a
dat. of the pers. 2 Tim. iv. 16 LT Tr WH. [Come.:
oup-rapayivopat. L\¢
mwap-aywo ; impf. rapryov pe viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass.
3 pers. sing. wapayerat; fr. [Archil., Theogn.], Pind. and
Hdt. down; Sept. several times for 72 in Kal and
Hiphil ; 1. trans. [ (cf. mapa, IV.)]; a. to lead
past, lead by. b. to lead aside, mislead; to lead
away. c. to‘lead -to; to lead forth, bring forward.
2. intrans. (see aya, '4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt.
xx. 30; Mk. ii) 14; xv. 21; [LKk. xviii. 39 L mrg.]; foll.
by mapd w. an ace. of place, Mk. i. 16 LT Tr WH (by
xara w. acc. of ‘place, 3 Mace. vi. 16; Oewpodvtes mapa-
yougay tiv Suva, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. to depart,
go away: Jn. viii. 59 Rec.; ix. 15 exetOev, Mt. ix. 9, 27.
[Al. adhere to the meaning pass by in all these pass. ]
Metaph. to pass away, disappear: 1 Co. vii. 31 (Ps. exliii.
(exliv.) 5); in the passive in the same sense, 1 Jn. ii.
8, 17.4
mapa-Seryparitw; 1 aor. inf. mapadevypatioat; (mapa-
devypa [(fr. Setkvype)] an example; also an example in
the sense of a warning [cf. Schmidt ch. 128]); to set
forth as an example, make an example of; in abad sense,
to hold up to infamy; to expose to public disgrace : twa,
Mt.i.19 RG; Heb. vi.6 [A. V. put to open shame].
(Num. xxv. 4; Jer. xiii. 22; Ezek. xxviii. 17; [Dan. ii. 5
Sept.]; Add. to Esth. iv. 8 [36]; Evang. Jac. c. 20; often
in Polyb.; Plut. de curios. 10; Euseb. quaest. ad Steph,
1, 3 (iv. 884 d. ed. Migne).) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 128.] *
mapaderos, -ov, 6, (thought by most to be of Persian
origin, by others of Armenian, cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii.
p- 1124; [B. D.s.v.; esp. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag das
Paradies? Leipzig 1881, pp. 95-97; cf. Maz Miiller,
Selected Essays, i. 129 sq. ]), 1. among the Persians
a grand enclosure or preserve, hunting-ground, park,
shady and well-watered, in which wild animals were
kept for the hunt; it was enclosed by walls and furnished
with towers for the hunters: Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14; [1, 4,
5]; 8, 1, 38; oec. 4, 13 and 14; anab. 1, 2, 7.9; Theo-
phr. h. pl. 5, 8,1; Diod. 16, 41; 14, 80; Plut. Artax.
480
Tapaoioaps
25, cf. Curt. 8, 1, 11. 2. univ. a garden, pleasure-
ground; grove, park: Leian. v.h. 2, 23; Ael. v.h. 1, 335
Joseph. antt. 7, 14,4; 8,7,3; 9,10, 4; 10, 3,2 and 11,
1; b. j. 6, 1, 1; [e. Apion. 1,19, 9 (where cf. Miiller)];
Sus. 4, 7, 15, etc.; Sir. xxiv. 30; and so it passed into
the Hebr. language, 0375, Neh. ii.8; Eccl. ii.5; Cant.
iv. 13; besides in Sept. ‘mostly for 1; thus for that de-
lightful region, ‘the garden of Eden,’ in which our first
parents dwelt before the fall: Gen. ii. 8 sqq.; iii. 1
sqq- 3. that part of Hades which was thought by
the later Jews to be the abode of the souls of the pious
until the resurrection: Lk. xxiii. 43, cf. xvi. 23 sqq. But
some [e. g. Dillmann (as below p. 379)] understand that
passage of the heavenly paradise. 4. an upper
region in the heavens: 2 Co. xii. 4 (where some maintain,
others deny, that the term is equiv. to 6 rpiros ovpavds
in vs. 2); with the addition of rod Geo, gen. of possessor,
the abode of God and heavenly beings, to which true
Christians will be taken after death, Rev. ii. 7 (cf. Gen.
xiii. 10; Ezek. xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8). According to the
opinion of many of the church Fathers, the paradise in
which our first parents dwelt before the fall still exists,
neither on earth nor in the heavens, but above and be-
yond the world; ef. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test., on
Evang. Nicod. ec. xxv. p. 748 sqq.; and Bleek thinks that
the word ought to be taken in this sense in Rev. ii. 7.
Cf. Dillmann s. v. Paradies in Schenkel iv. 377 sqq.;
also Hilgenfeld, Die Clement. Recogn. und Hom. p. 87
sq.; Klépper on 2 Co. xii. 2-4, p. 507 sqq. [(GOttingen,
1869). See also B.D.s.v.; McC. and S.s.v.; Hamburg-
er, Real-Encyclopiidie, Abtheil. ii. s. v.]*
mapa-Séxopar; fut. 3 pers. plur. wapadé~ovra:; depon.
mid., but in bibl. and eccles. Grk. w. 1 aor. pass. mape-
Séx6nv (Acts xv. 4 LT Tr WH; 2 Mace. iv. 22; [ef. B.
51 (44)]); 1. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, prop.
to receive, take up, take upon one’s self. Hence 2.
to admit i. e. not to reject, to accept, receive: Tov Aéyon,
Mk. iv. 20; &n, Acts xvi. 21; tiv paprupiay, Acts xxii.
18; xarnyopiay, 1 Tim. v. 19, (ras Soxipous Spaxpas, Epict.
diss. 1, 7, 6); ruvd, of a son, to acknowledge as one’s own
[A. V. receiveth], Heb. xii. 6 (after Prov. iii. 12, where
for 7¥1); of a delegate or messenger, to give due re-
ception to, Acts xv.4LT Tr WH. (Cf. d€xopar, fin.]*
mapa-Sia-TpiBh, -7s, 7, useless occupation, empty business,
misemployment (see mapd, IV. 2): 1 Tim. vi. 5 Ree. [cf.
W. 102 (96)], see SuaraparpiBy. Not found elsewhere ;
[ef. mapadiarurdw in Justinian (in Koumanoudes, Aéfes
adOnaaup. s. v.) |."
mapa-SiSwpt, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. mapadid (1 Co. xv.
24 [Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH, cod. Sin., ete.]) and rapadidot
(ibid. L txt. T Trtxt.; cf. B.46 (40) [and diSepx, init.]) ;
impf. 3 pers. sing. rapedidov (Acts viii. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 23),
plur. mapedidovy (Acts xvi. 4 RG; xxvii. 1) and mape-
diSocav (Acts xvi. 4 L T Tr WH; cf. W. § 14,1 ¢.; B. 45
(39)); fut. rapadmow; 1 aor. rapéd@xa; 2 aor. rapédar,
subjunc. 3 pers. sing. rapad@ and several times mapadot
(so LT Tr WH in MK. iv. 29; xiv. 10,11; Jn. xiii. 2;
see 8i3e@ut, init.); pf. ptep. tapadedwxas (Acts xv. 26):
Tapadiowpe
plupf. 3 pers. plur. without augm. rapadedaxerray (Mk.
xv. 10; W. §12, 9; [B. 33 (29); Tdf. Proleg. p. 120
sq-]); Pass., pres. mapadidoua; impf. 3 pers. sing. mape-
didero (1 Co. xi. 23 LT 'Tr WH for R G rapedidoro, see
drodidwp); pf. 3 pers. sing. mapadédorae (Lk. iv. 6),
ptep. mapadedopevos, Acts xiv. 26; 1 aor. mapeddOnv;
1 fut. rapadoOnoopa; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept.
mostly for }3; ¢o give over; 1. prop. to give
into the hands (of another). 2. to give over into
(one’s) power or use: Twi te, to deliver to one something
to keep, use, take care of, manage, Mt. xi. 27; Lk. iv. 6
[ef. W. 271 (254)]; x. 22;
xxv. 14, 20, 22; ryv Baoirelav, 1 Co. xv. 24; 7d mvevpa
sc. 76 Ged, Jn. xix. 30; 7d capa, iva etc., to be burned,
1 Co. xiii. 3; ruva, to deliver one up to custody, to be judged,
condemned, punished, scourged, tormented, put todeath,
(often thus in prof. auth.): teva, absol., so that to be put
in prison must be supplied, Mt. iv.12; Mk. i. 14; typov-
pévovs, who are kept, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [GT Tr WH; but R
teTnpynuevous, L kodaouevous tnpetv]; to be put to death
(cf. Germ. dahingeben), Ro. iv. 25 ; with the addition of
bmp twos, for one’s salvation, Ro. viii. 32; teva tun, Mt.
W255 xviino4 sex, 1S axvil. 25 Miki xv. 13LkY xi 58s
xx. 20; Jn. xviii. 30, 35.sq.; xix. 11 etc. ; Acts xxvii. 1;
xxviii. 16 Rec.; 7 OeAjuare adray, to do their pleasure
with, Lk. xxiii. 25; rwa tum, foll. by wa, Jn. xix. 16;
with an inf. of purpose, @vAacoew adrov, to guard him,
Acts xii. 4; without the dat., Mt. x. 19; xxiv. 10; xxvii.
18; Mk. xiii. 11; xv. 10; Acts iii. 13; foll. by ®a, Mt.
xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15; twa eis 76 cravpwOjvat, Mt. xxvi. 2
Ta Umdpxovta, tadavra, Mt.
(cravpod bavarw, Ev. Nicod. c. 26) ; eis xeipas twos, i.e.
into one’s power, Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi. 45; Mk. ix. 31;
mivedshdch x..44 5 xxive 73 Acts xxi 11} xxvini17,
(Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 24; xxxix. (xxxil.) 4); es cvvedpra,
to councils [see ouvedprov, 2 b.] (wapadiddvar involving
also the idea of conducting), Mt. x.17; Mk. xiii. 9; els
ouvaywyas, Lk. xxi. 12; eis Okipu, Mt. xxiv. 9; els puda-
knv, Acts viii. 3; efs pudakds, Acts xxii. 4; ets Oavaror,
Mt. x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; 2 Co. iv. 11; ets xpipa Oavarov,
Lk. xxiv. 20; tiv oapka eis katapOopay, of Christ under-
going death, Barn. ep. 5, 1; mapadiddévar Eavrdv trép Twos,
to give one’s self up for, give one’s self to death for, to
undergo death for (the salvation of) one, Gal. ii. 20;
Eph. v. 25; with the addition of ré Oe6 and a pred. acc.,
Eph. v. 2; tyv Wuxny é€avrov imép tod dvdpatos “Incod
Xpworov, to jeopard life to magnify and make known the
name of Jesus Christ, Acts xv. 26. Metaph. expres-
sions: twa T@ Zarava, to deliver one into the power of
Satan to be harassed and tormented with evils, 1 Tim.
i. 20; with the addition of eis 6\eOpov capkds (see dre-
Opos), 1 Co. v. 5 (the phrase seems to have originated
from the Jewish formulas of excommunication [yet see
Meyer (ed. Heinrici) ad loc. (ef. B. D. s. vv. Hymenzus
II., Excommunication IT.)], because a person banished
from the theocratic assembly was regarded as deprived
of the protection of God and delivered up to the power
of the devil). tia eis dxa@apciay, to cause one to be-
come unclean, Ro. i. 24; cf. Fritzsche, Riickert, and
481
/
Tapaoocts
others ad loc. [in this ex. and several that follow A. V.
renders to give up]; els wa6n atupias, to make one a slave
of vile passions, ib. 26; eis d8dx:pov vodv, to cause one to
follow his own corrupt mind, —foll. by an inf. of purpose
[or epexegetic inf. (Meyer)], ib. 28; éaurdv 7 doedyeia,
to make one’s self the slave of lasciviousness, Eph. iv.
19; twa Aarpevery, to cause one to worship, Acts vii. 42.
to deliver up treacherously, i.e. by betrayal to cause
one to be taken : twa tum, of Judas betraying Jesus, Mt.
xxvi. 15; Mk. xiv. 10; Lk. xxii. 4,6; without the dat.,
Mt. xxvi. 16, 21, 23, 25; Mk. xiv. 11, 18; Lk. xxii. 21,
48; Jn. vi. 64,71; xii.4; in the pass., Mk. xiv. 21; Lk.
xxii. 22; 1 Co. xi. 23; pres. ptep. 6 mapadidovs airév, of
him as plotting the betrayal (cf. B. § 144, 11, 3): Mt.
xxvi. 25, 46, 48; Mk. xiv. 42, 44; Jn. xiii. 11; xviii. 2,
5. to deliver one to be taught, moulded, ete.: eis tT, in
pass., Ro. vi. 17 (to be resolved thus, iapx. ré rime ete:
eis Ov mapeddbnre [W. § 24, 2 b.]). 3. iq. to com-
mit, to commend : twa th xapiteT. Oeod, in pass., Acts xiv.
26; xv. 40; mapedidov 7@ xpivovte dixaias, sc. Ta éavrod,
his cause (B. 145 (127) note? [ef. W. 590 (549)]), 1 Pet.
li. 23. 4. to deliver verbally: commands, rites, Mk.
vii. 18; Acts vi. 14; 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 21 (here in
pass.) ; miorw, the tenets [see miotis, 1 c. B.], in pass.,
Jude 3; d@vdacoew ra Séypara, the decrees to keep, Acts
xvi. 4; to deliver by narrating, to report, i. e. to perpetu-
ate the knowledge of events by narrating them, Lk. i. 2;
1 Co. xi. 23; xv. 3, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow
for L. and S.] s. v.' 4). 5. to permit, allow: absol.
érav mapade or mrapadoi 6 kaprés, when the fruit will allow,
i.e. when its ripeness permits, Mk. iv. 29 (so tis apas
mapadidovens, Polyb. 22, 24, 9; for other exx. see Passow
s. v.3[L. andS. s. v. II.; others take the word in Mk. 1.c.
intransitively, in a quasi-reflexive sense, gives itself up,
presents itself, cf. W. 251 (236); B. 145 (127))]).
arapadotos, -ov, (rapa contrary to [see mapa, IV. 2], and
dd€a opinion ; hence i. q. 6 mapa thy ddgav ov), unex-
pected, uncommon, incredible, wonderful : neut. plur. Lk.
v. 26[A. V. strange things, cf. Trench § xci. fin.]. (Ju-
dith xiii. 13; Sap. v. 2, etc.; Sir. xliii. 25; 2 Mace. ix. 24;
4 Mace. ii. 14; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Ael. v. h. 4, 25; Leian.
dial. deor. 20,7; 9,2; Joseph.c. Ap. 1, 10,2; Hdian. 1,
1, 5 [(4 Bekk.)].) *
mapa-Socts, -ews, 7, (mapadidwp), a giving over, giving
up; i. e. 1. the act of giving up, the surrender: of
cities, Polyb. 9, 25,5; Joseph. b. j. 1, 8, 6; xpnuarav, Ar-
istot. pol. 5, 7,11 p. 1309%, 10. 2. a giving over
which is done by word of mouth or in writing, i. e. tradi-
tion by instruction, narrative, precept, etc. (see mapa-
Sida@pt, 4); hence i. q. instruction, Epict. diss. 2, 23, 40;
joined with d:dacxadia, Plat. legg. 7 p. 803 a. objec-
tively, what is delivered, the substance of the teaching: so
of Paul’s teaching, 2 Th. iii. 6 ; in plur. of the particular
injunctions of Paul’s instruction, 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Th. ii.
15. used in the sing. of a written narrative, Joseph.
c. Ap. 1, 9,2; 10,2; again, of the body of precepts, esp.
ritual, which in the opinion of the later Jews were orally
delivered by Moses and orally transmitted in unbroken
Tapatnrow
succession to subsequent generations, which precepts,
both illustrating and expanding the written law, as they
did, were to be obeyed with equal reverence (Joseph.
antt. 13, 10, 6 distinguishes between ra ék mapaddcews
Tay Twarepoy and ra yeypappeva, i. e. Ta ev Tois Mwioews
vouots yeypappeva vopipa): Mt. xv. 2 sq. 6; Mk. vii. 3,
5, 9, 13; with trav dvOpamey added, as opp. to the
divine teachings, Mk. vii. 8; Col. ii. 8 [where see Bp.
Lehtft.]; marpixat mapaddces, precepts received from
the fathers, whether handed down in the O. T. books
or orally, Gal. i. 14 [(al. restrict the word here to the
extra-biblical traditions; cf. Meyer or Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.). Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Tradition. ] *
mapa-{nrdw, -; fut. mapatyAwow ; 1 aor. mape{noca ;
to provoke to ¢ydos [see mapa, IV. 3]; a. lo pro-
voke to jealousy or rivalry: twa, Ro. xi. 11, 14, (1 K. xiv.
22; Sir. xxx. 3); emi run (see emi, B. 2 a. 8. fin.), Ro. x.
19 (Deut. xxxii. 21). b. to provoke to anger: 1 Co.
x. 22 [on this see Prof. Hort in WH. App. p. 167] (Ps.
XXXVi. (XxXVil.) 1, 7 sq.).*
mapa-Sahdcotos, -a, -ov, (mapa and Oddaoca), beside
the sea, by the sea: Mt.iv. 13. (Sept.; Hdt., Xen.,
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
mapa-Sewpéw, -®: impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. mapebew-
porto; 1. (mapa i. q. by the side of [see mapa, IV.
1]) to examine things placed beside each other, to com-
pare, (Xen., Plut., Leian.). 2. (mapai. q. over, be-
yond, [Lat. praeter ; see rapa, IV. 2]) to overlook, neglect :
Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22; Diod., Dion. Hal., al.).*
tapa-07Kn, -ns, 7, (mapariOnpt, q. V.), a deposit, a trust
or thing consigned to one’s faithful keeping, (Vulg. de-
positum) : used of the correct knowledge and pure doc-
trine of the gospel, to be held firmly and faithfully, and
to be conscientiously delivered unto others: 2 Tim. i. 12
(nov possess. gen. [the trust committed unto me; Rec.“ 1688
reads here mapaxara6nxn, q.v-]); G@LT Tr WH in1 Tim.
vi. 20 and 2 Tim. i. 14, (Lev. vi. 2,4; 2 Mace. iii. 10, 15;
Hat. 9, 45; [al.]).. Inthe Grk. writ. rapaxaraénxn (q.- V-)
is more common; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312; W. 102
(Sc).
map-atvew, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mapnver; to exhort,
admonish: with the addition of Aéywr foll. by direct dis-
course, Acts xxvii. 9; twa (in class. Grk. more com-
monly ruvi [W. 223 (209) ; B. § 133, 9]), foll. by an inf.
Acts xxvii. 22 [B. §§ 140, 1; 141,2]. (From Hdt. and
Pind. down; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq.; 3 Mace. v. 17.) *
Tap-o.Téopat, -ovua, impv. pres. mapacrod; [impf. 3
pers. plur. rapytotvro, Mk. xv. 6 TWH Tr mrg., where
al. 6vrep nrovvro (q. v.)]; 1 aor. mapytnoduny; pf. pass.
ptep. mapyntnpevos with a pass. signif.; fr. Aeschyl. and
Pind. down ; 1. prop. to ask alongside (mapa[IV.1]),
beg to have near one; to obtain by entreaty; to beg from, to
ask for, supplicate: [Mk. xv. 6 (see above) ]. 2. to
avert (mapa aside [see mapa, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek
to avert, to deprecate ; a. prop. foll. by py and ace.
w. inf. [to intreat that... not], Heb. xii. 19 (Thue. 5,
63) ; cf. W. 604 (561); [B. § 148, 13]. b. i.q. to re-
fuse, decline: 16 arofaveiv, Acts xxv. 11 (Oavety ov mapat-
w TApakKanew
48
rovpat, Joseph. de vita sua 29). c. i.g. to shun,
avoid: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 23; twa, 1 Tim. v. 11;
Tit. iii. 10; i.q. to refuse, reject, Heb. xii. 25. d. to
avert displeasure by entreaty, i.e. to beg pardon, crave in-
dulgence, to excuse: Exe we mapytnpevoy (see éxa, I. 1 £.),
Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept-
ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 2).*
tapa-Kabefopar: fo sit down beside [mapa, IV. 1], seat
one’s self, (Xen., Plat., al.); 1 aor. pass. ptep. mapaxade-
a6eis (Joseph. antt. 6, 11,9); mpds m1, Lk. x. 39 T Tr WH
[ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 269].*
twapa-Ka8ifw: 1 aor. ptep. fem. mapaxabicaca, to make
to sit down beside [(mapa, IV. 1)]; to set beside, place
near; intrans. to sit down beside: mapa mt, Lk. x.39 RG
L [but L mrg. rpés] (Sept. Job ii. 13; Plut. Marius 17;
Cleom. 37; in this sense the mid. is more com. in the
Grk. writ.).*
Tapa-Kahéw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mapexdAet, 1 and 3
pers. plur. mapexdAouy; 1 aor. mapexadeoa; Pass., pres.
mapakaAovpat ; pf. rapakéxAnuat; 1 aor. rapexAnOny ; 1 fut.
mapakAnOnoopa; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Z:
as in Grk. writ. to call to one’s side, call for, summon : twa,
w. an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xxviii. 20 [al.
(less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the acc. the
subj. of the inf. ]. II. to address, speak to, (call to,
call on), which may be done in the way of exhortation,
entreaty, comfort, instruction, ete.; hence result a varie-
ty of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2
p- 117 sqq.; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 32 sq. le
as in Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort: absol., Lk. iii. 18;
[Acts xx. 1 (RGom.)]; Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb.
x. 25; 1 Pet. v.12; foll. by direct disc. 2 Co. v. 20; foll.
by Aéeyev w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40; foll. by an inf. where
in Lat. ut, 1 Tim. ii. 1; tea, Acts xv. 32; xvi. 40; 2 Co.
x.-13h Th. dt 42 (11); v.13) 1 Dims: as HebsaitSs
Twa Adyw TOAAG, Acts xx. 2; teva foll. by direct disc., 1
Co. iv. 16; 1 Th.v. 14; Heb. xiii. 22 [here L WH mrg.
inf.]; 1 Pet. v.1sq.; rua foll. by an inf. where in Lat.
ut [cf. B. §§ 140, 1; 141, 2; W. 332 (311) ; 335 (315) n.]:
inf. pres., Acts:xl: .23\5, xiv. 22::\Phil viv 2p ip haa,
10; Tit. ii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 11 (here Lehm. adds dpas to the
inf., and WH mrg. with codd. A C Lete. read améyeoe) ;
Jude 3; inf. aor., Acts xxvii. 33 sq.; Ro. xii. 1; xv.
80; 2Co.ii.8; vi.1; Eph. iv. 1; 1'Tim. i. 3; Heb. xiii.
19 ; teva foll. by tva w. subjune. [cf. B. § 139, 42; W.335
u:s. |, 1.Co. i) 105: xyi.15,sq.5 2/C6..viliGs oie Dhoav.is
2 Th. iii. 12; to enjoin a thing by exhortation [cf. B.
§ 141, 2], 1 Tim. vi. 2; Tit. ii. 15. 2. to beg, entreat,
beseech, (Joseph. antt. 6, 7,4; [11, 8,5]; often in Epict.
cf. Schweighduser, Index graecit. Epict. p. 411; Plut.
apophth. regum, Mor. ii. p. 30 ed. Tauchn. [vi. 695 ed.
Reiske ; exx. fr. Polyb., Diod., Philo, al., in Soph. Lex.
s. v.]; not thus in the earlier Grk. auth. exc. where the
gods are called on for aid, in the expressions, mapaxadeiy
Geovs, so Oedv in Joseph. antt. 6, 2,2 and 7,4; [cf. W.
22]): [absol., Philem. 9 (yet see the Comm. ad loc.)];
tia, Mt. viii. 5 ; xvili. 32 ; xxvi. 53; Mk.i.40; Acts xvi.
9; 2Co. xii. 18; modAa, much, Mk. v. 23; revd mepi tuos,
/
TAPAKAAUT TW
Philem. 10; foll. by direct dise. Acts ix. 38 LT Tr WH;
with Aéyor added and direct disc., Mt. xviii. 29; Mk. v.
12; (Lk. vii. 4 (Tdf. nporewr) |]; without the ace. Acts xvi.
15; teva foll. by an inf. [W. and B.u. s.], Mk. v. 17; Lk.
viii. 41; Acts viii. 31; xix. 31; xxviii. 14, (1 Mace. ix.
35) ; twa foll. by émws, Mt. viii. 34 [here Lcehm. iva (see
above) ]; Acts xxv. 2, (4 Macc. iv. 11; Plut. Demetr. ec.
38); rwafoll. by wa [W.§ 44, 8a.; B.§ 139,42], Mt. xiv.
36; Mk. v. 18; vi. 56; vii. 32; viii. 22; Lk. viii. 31 sq. ;
[2 Co. ix. 5]; rwa trép twos, iva, 2 Co. xii. 8; modAa
(much) twa, va, Mk. v.10; 1 Co. xvi. 12; foll. by rod pn
w. inf. [B. § 140, 16 6.; W. 325 (305)], Acts xxi. 12; by
an inf. Acts ix. 38 RG; by an ace. w. inf., Acts xiii. 42;
xxiv. 4; [Ro. xvi. 17]. to strive to appease by entreaty:
absol. 1 Co. iv. 13; rid, Lk. xv. 28; Acts xvi. 39, (2
Mace. xiii. 23). 3. to console, to encourage and
strengthen by consolation, to comfort, (Sept. for On}; very
rarely so in Grk. auth., as Plut. Oth. 16): absol. 2 Co. ii.
7; tTuvd, 2 Co. i. 6; vii. 6 sq.; ev w. a dat. of the thing with
which one comforts another, 1 Th.iv. 18; twa dca mapa-
kAngews, 2 Co. i. 4; w. an ace. of the contents, da rAs
mapakX. fs (for qv, see ds, 7, 6, II. 2c. a.) mapaxadovpea,
ibid.; in pass. to receive consolation, be comforted, Mt. ii.
18; 2 Co. xiii. 11; emi ren over (in) a thing [see éni, B.
2 a. 8.], 2Co.i.4; of the consolation (comfort) given not
in words but by the experience of a happier lot or by a
happy issue, i. q. to refresh, cheer: pass., Mt. v. 4 (5);
LK. xvi. 25; Acts xx.12; 2Co. vii. 13 (where a full stop
must be put after mapaxexAnp.) ; €v tun, by the help of a
thing, 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; émi re, 1 Th. ili. 7; with (év) mapa-
xAnoes added, 2 Co. vii. 7. 4. to encourage, strength-
en, [i. e.in the language of A. V. comfort (see Wright,
Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v.)], (in faith, piety, hope):
tas xapdias, your hearts, Eph. vi. 22; Col. ii. 2; iv.
8; 2 Th. ii. 17, (also xetpas doOeveis, Job iv. 3 for Din;
yovata mapadeAvpeva, Is. xxxv. 3 sq. [see the Hebr.] for
YON): 5. it combines the ideas of exhorting and
comforting and encouraging in Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 31; 1
vii 2: 6. to instruct, teach: év rH ddackaXia,
Tit. i. 9. [Comp.: ovp-rapaxadéw. | *
mapa-KadvTrw : £0 cover over, cover up, hide, conceal:
trop. jv mapaxexaduppevoy an’ advtav ([it was concealed
from them], a Hebraism, on which see in droxpimra, b.),
Lk. ix. 45 (Ezek. xxii. 26; Plat., Plut., al.).*
mwapa-KaTa-O74kn, -7s, 7, (mapaxaratiOnur), a deposit, a
trust: so Rec. in 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; [Rec.*! 1633 in
2 Tim.i.12also]. (Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Aristot. eth. Nic.
5, 8, 5 p. 1135," 4; Polyb., Diod. 15, 76; Joseph. antt.
4, 8, 38; Ael. v. h. 4, 1); see mapaOnxn above.*
mopa-Ketpat; (mapa and xeipar); to lie beside [mapa, IV.
1], to be near (fr. Hom. down); to be present, at hand :
Ro. vii. 18 (where see Meyer), 21.*
Tapd-KANots, -ews, 7, (Tapaxadew, q. V-) ; 1. prop.
a calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thuc. 4, 61;
Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, en-
treaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581; Joseph. antt. 3,
1,5; [ec. Ap. 2, 23, 3 m. mpos Tov Oedv Eotw] ; Adyou mapa-
xAnoews, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Macc.
483
TAapaKon
x. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement :
Acts xv. 31 [al. refer this to 4]; 1 Co. xiv. 3; 2 Co.
viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 1 Tim. iv. 13; Heb. xii. 5; Adyos
THs mapakAnoews, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Mace. vii. 24; xv. 9
(11); Plat. def. 415e.; Thuc. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb.,
al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Co. i. 4-7;
Heb. vi. 18; [add,- Acts ix. 31; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer.
xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nah. iii. 7]; Phalar.
ep. 97 init.) ; rav ypaar, afforded by the contents of the
Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [W. 189 (178) ]; Oeds tis mapakX.,
God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5; 2
Co. i. 3; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot
or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24; 2 Co. vii. 4,
7, 13 [ef. W. 393 (368)]; Philem. 7; by meton. that
which affords comfort or refreshment; thus of the Messi-
anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes-
siah the consoler, the comforter, kar’ e€oxnv, DM30 (cf.
Wiinsche, Neue Beitriige u. s. w. ad loc.; Schéttgen,
Horae Hebr. ete. ii. 18]). 5. univ. persuasive dis-
course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, consol-
atory; powerful hortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; Adyos
mapakAnoews [A. V. word of exhortation], Acts xiii. 15;
vios map. [a son of exhortation], aman gifted in teaching,
admonishing, consoling, Acts iv. 36; used of the apostles’
instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.*
Tapa-KA7TOS, -ov, 6, (mapakahéw), prop. summoned, called
to one’s side, esp. called to one’s aid; hence 1. one
who pleads another’s cause before a judge, a pleader,
counsel for defence, legal assistant; an advocate: Dem. p.
341, 11; Diog. Laért. 4, 50, ef. Dio Cass. 46, 20. 2:
univ. one who pleads another’s cause with one, an inter-
cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. § 59; de Josepho § 40; in
Flaccum §§ 3 and 4; so of Christ, in his exaltation at God’s
right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon
of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine
Logos in Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 14). 3. in the widest
sense, a helper, succorer, aider, assistant; so of the Holy
Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos-
tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to
a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the
divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials
and persecutions on behalf of the divine kingdom: Jn.
xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19sq.; Mk. xiii.
11; Lk. xii. 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says
that God in creating the world had no need of a mapa-
kAnros, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The ‘T'argumsand
Talmud borrow the Greek words wropra and ROP ID
and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate;
ef. Buxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916)];
so Targ. on Job xxxiii. 23 for p90 ax 20, i. e. an angel
that pleads man’s cause with God; [ef. rAovgiwy rapa-
kAnrot in ‘Teaching’ etc. 5 sub fin.; Barn. ep. 20, 2;
Constitt. apost. 7,18]). Cf. Knapp, Scripta varii Argu-
menti, p. 124 sqq.; Diisterdieck on 1 Jn. ii. 1, p. 147 sqq. ;
[ Watkins, Excursus G, in Ellicott’s N. T. Com. for Eng.
Readers; Westcott in the “Speaker’s Com.” Additional
Note on Jn. xiv. 16; Schaff in Lange ibid. ].*
map-aKot, -7s, 7, (mapa Lat. praeter [see mapa, IV.
Trapakodouvlew
21); 1. prop. a hearing amiss (Plat. epp. 7 p. 341
b.). 2. [unwillingness to hear i. e.] disobedience :
Ro. v. 19; 2Co.x.6; Heb. ii.2. [Cf. Trench § lxvi.]*
map-aKodovdew, -@ : fut. mapaxodovbjow; 1 aor. mapnKo-
Aovénaa (1 Tim. iv. 6 Lmrg. WH mrg.; 2 Tim. iii. 10 L
T Tr WH txt.); pf. mapnxodovOnka ; 1. to follow
after; so to follow one as to be always at his side [see
mapa, 1V. 1]; to follow close, accompany, (so fr. Arstph.
and Xen. down). 2. metaph. a. to be always
present, to attend one wherever he goes: twi, Mk. xvi.
17 [where Tr WH txt. dkodov6., q. v.]. b. to follow
up a thing in mind so as to attain to the knowledge of it, i.e.
to understand, [ef. our follow a matter up, trace its course,
ete.]; to examine thoroughly, investigate : macw (i. e. mpdy-
paowv), all things that have taken place, Lk. i. 3 (very
often so in Grk. auth., as Dem. pro cor. ¢. 53 [p. 285,
23]). c. to follow faithfully sc. a standard or rule, to
conform one’s self to: with a dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. iv.
6; 2'Tim. iii. 10, (2 Mace. ix.-27). Cf. the full discus-
sion of this word by Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. for-1871, p. 46 sq.*
tmap-akovw: 1 aor. mapyKovea; 1. to hear aside
i. e. casually or carelessly or amiss [see mapa, IV. 2]
(often so in class. Grk.; on the freq. use of this verb by
Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. (1875) p.
106). 2. to be unwilling to hear, i. e. on hearing to
neglect, to pay no heed to, (w. a gen. of the pers., Polyb.
2, 8,3; 3, 15, 2); contrary to Grk. usage [but cf. Plut.
Philop. § 16, 1 kai mapiSeiv te x. mapaxodoa tev dpapra-
vopéevev, de curios. § 14 reipO kal Tov idiwv éma mapaxovaat
moTe kK. Taptoey |, W. an accus., Tov Adyov, Mk. v.36 T WH
Tr txt. [al. ‘overhearing the word as it was being
spoken’; cf. B. 302 (259)]; to refuse to hear, pay no re-
gard to, disobey: twés, what one says, Mt. xviii. 17 (Tob.
ill. 4; ra rd Tod Baowhéws Aeydpueva, Esth. iii. 3).*
Tapa-KiTTw: 1 aor. rapexva; to stoop to (cf. mapa, IV.
1] a thing in order to look at it; to look at with head
bowed forwards ; to look into with the body bent; to stoop
and look into: Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject
the vs.]; Jn. xx. 53 els rd pynpeiov, Jn. xx. 11; metaph.
to look carefully into, inspect curiously, ets 71, of one who
would become acquainted with something, Jas. i. 25; 1
Pet. i.12. (Arstph., Theocr., Philo, Dio Cass., Plut.,
al. ; Sept.) *
rapo-apBdve ; fut.rapadnyouat, in LT Tr WH -Ajpyo-
pat (Jn. xiv. 3; see M, pn); 2 aor. rapéAaBor, 3 pers. plur.
mapeddBocay (2 Th. iii.6 GT Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH mrg.;
cf. doAvéw [yet see WH. App. p. 165]); Pass., pres. rapa-
AapBadvopar; 1 fut. rapadnPOnoopat, in L'T Tr WH -Anp-
pénooua (see M,p; Lk. xvii. 34-36) fr. Hdt.down; Sept.
for np?: 1. to take to [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to take with
one’s self, to join to one’s self: twa, an associate, a com-
panion, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi. 37; Mk. iv. 36; v.40; ix.2;
x. 32; Lk. ix. 10, 28; xi. 26; xviii. 31; Acts xv. 39; in
pass., Mt. xxiv. 40, 41; Lk. xvii. 34-36; one to be led
off as a prisoner, Jn. xix. 16; Acts xxiii. 18; to take
with one in order to carry away, Mt. ii. 13 sq. 20 sq.;
twa pe é€avrov, Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv, 33;
484
Tapahvw
mapahapBavew yuvaixa, to take one’s betrothed to his
home, Mt. i. 20, 24; twa foll. by eis w. an ace. of place,
to take [and bring, cf. W. §66, 2 d.] one with one into
a place, Mt. iv. 5,8; xxvii. 27; rid kar’ idiav, Mt. xx.
17; mid. with mpds eyavrdéy, to my companionship,
where I myself dwell, Jn. xiv. 3. The ptep. is prefixed
to other act. verbs to describe the action more in detail,
Acts xvi. 33; xxi. 24, 26, 32 [here L WH mre. AaBor].
Metaph. i. q. to accept or acknowledge one to be such
as he professes to be; not to reject, not to withhold obedi-
ence: twa, Jn. i. 11. 2. to receive something trans-
mitted ; a. prop.: mapak. dtaxoviay, an office to be dis-
charged, Col. iv. 17; Baoweiav, Heb. xii. 28, (so for the
Chald. 73 in Dan. v. 31; vii. 18, Theodot.; Hdt. 2,
120; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20, 5 (where see Miiller)]; ri
dpynv, Plat., Polyb., Plut.). b. to receive with the
mind ; by oral transmission: zi foll. by dwé w. a gen.
of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Co.
xi. 23 (on which ef. Paret in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii. p. 48 sqq.; [see reff. in dnd, II. 2
d. aa.]); by the narration of others, by the instruction
of teachers (used of disciples) : [roy Xp. "I. Tov Kuvpioy,
Col. ii. 6]; ri, 1 Co. xv. 1, 3; Gal.i.9; Phil.iv. 9; [ré
foll. by an infin., Mk. vii. 4]; ri wapa revos [see reff. s. v.
napa, I. c.], Gal. i. 12; 1 Th. ii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 6; mapa
twos, kabas ... TO was Set etc. 1 Th. iv. 1, (copiav mapa
twos, Plat. Lach. p.197d.; Euthyd. p. 304c.). [Compe.:
oup-mapadapBave. | *
mapa-Acyouat; [mapedeydunv]; (mapa beside, and déeya
to lay); Vulg.in Acts xxvii. 8 lego, i.e. to sail past, coast
along: tv Kpntny, Acts xxvii. 8 [here some, referring
aitnv to Sadpovny, render work past, weather], 13, (rnp
"Iradiav, Diod. 13, 3; yqv, 14, 55; [Strabo]; Lat. legere
oram).*
map-Gdtos, -ov, also of three term. [cf. W. § 11, 1],
(mapd and dds), by the sea, maritime: 4 mapddws, se.
xpa, the sea-coast, Lk. vi. 17 (Polyb. 3, 39,3; Diod. 3,
15, 41; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 12; Sept. Deut. xxxiii. 19;
and the fem. form 7 mapaXia in Deut. i. 7; Josh. ix. 1;
Judith i. 7; iii. 6; v. 2, 23; vii. 8; 1, Macc. xi. 8; xv. 38;
Hat. 7, 185; often in Polyb.; Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1).*
map-addayh, -s, 7, (mapaddAaoow), variation, change:
Jas. i. 17. (Aeschyl., Plat., Polyb., al.)*
mapa-Aoyltopat; (see mapa, IV. 2) ; a. to reckon
wrong, miscount: Dem. p. 822, 25; 1037, 15. b. to
cheat by false reckoning (Aeschin., Aristot.) ; to deceive
by false reasoning (joined to éararav, Epict. diss. 2, 20,
7); hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent :
riva, Col. ii. 4; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for 719>).*
mapa-Autikés, -7, -dv, (fr. mapadva, q. V-), paralytic, i. e.
suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side;
univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the
palsy]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 6; ix. 2,6; Mk. ii. 3-5, 9; and
L WH mrg. in Lk. v. 24. [Cf. Riehm, HWB.s. v.
Krankheiten,.5; B.D. Am. ed. p. 1866°.] *
mapo-Avw: [pf. pass. ptep. mapadeAuuévos]; prop. to
loose on one side or from the side [cf. mapa, IV. 1]; te
loose or part things placed side by side ; to loosen, dissolve,
Tapapevo
hence, to weaken, enfeeble : mapadedupevos, suffering from
the relaxing of the nerves, unstrung, weak of limb, [ palsied ],
Lk. v. 18, 24 ([not L WH mrg.] see mapadurixds) ; Acts
Vill. 7; ix.33; mapadeX. yovara, i.e. tottering, weakened,
feeble knees, Heb. xii. 12; Is. xxxv. 3; Sir. xxv. 23;
xéipes mapadeX. Ezek. vii. 27 ; Jer. vi. 24; [xxvii. (1.) 15,
43]; mapedvovro ai deéai, of combatants, Joseph. b. j. 3,
8, 6; mapedvOn k. ov« eduvaro ere AaAjoat Adyov, 1 Mace.
ix. 55, where cf. Grimm; gaparixy Suvdper mapaded.
Polyb. 32, 23, 1; rots capace kat tats Wuyais, id. 20, 10,
3
mapa-peve ; fut. rapauev@; 1 aor. ptcp. mapapeivas; fr.
Hom. down; to remain beside, continue always near, (cf.
mapa, LV. 1]: Heb. vii. 23; opp. to dreAndvdeva, Jas. i.
25 (and continues to do so, not departing till all stains
are washed away, cf. vs. 24); with one, mpds twa, 1 Co.
xvi. 6; tuwi (as often in Grk. auth.), to survive, remain
alive (Hdt. 1, 30), Phil. i. 25 L T Tr WH[where Bp.
Lehtft. : “mapapev@ is relative, while pevd is absolute.”
Comp. : cup-rapapeva. | *
mapa-pv0dopa1, -odpar; 1 aor. rapepvOnodpny ; fr. Hom.
down; to speak to, address one, whether by way of ad-
monition and incentive, or to calm and console; hence i. q.
to encourage, console: twa, Jn. xi. 31; 1'Th. ii. 12 (11);
v. 14; tuva mrepi tevos, Jn. xi. 19.*
Tmapayvdia, -as, 7, (mapayvOcoua), in class. Grk. any
address, whether made for the purpose of persuading,
or of arousing and stimulating, or of calming and consol-
ing; once in the N. T., like the Lat. allocutio (Sen. ad
Mare. 1; ad Helv. 1), i. q. consolation, comfort: 1 Co. xiv.
3. (So Plat. Ax. p. 365 a.; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3;
Joseph. b. j. 3, 7,15; Lcian. dial. mort.15, 3; Ael. v. h.
12, 1 fin.) *
TapapvO.ov, -ov, T6, (mapapvGeopar), persuasive address :
Phil. ii. 1. (consolation, Sap. iii. 18 and often in Grk.
writ. [fr. Soph., Thuc., Plat. on].)*
Trapavopew, -@ ; to be a mapdvopmos, to act contrary to law,
to break the law: Acts xxiii. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen.,
Plat., sqq.) *
mapavopia, -as, 7, (mapavomos [fr. mapa (q. v- LV. 2) and
vopos]), breach of law, transgression, wickedness: 2 Pet.
ii. 16. (Thuc., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept.) *
mapa-mikpaivw: 1 aor. mapemixpava; (see mapa, IV. 3) ;
Sept. chiefly for 7719, 777, to be rebellious, contuma-
cious, refractory; also for 170, 0°}!377, etc.; to provoke,
exasperate; to rouse to indignation: absol. (yet so that
God is thought of as the one provoked), Heb. iii. 16,
as in Ps. ev. (cvi.) 7; lxv. (ixvi.) 7; lxvii. (xviii.) 7;
Ezek. ii. 5-8 ; with rov deov added, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 29;
li. (xliv.) 3,8; Ps. v.11; Ezek. xx. 21, and often; in pass.,
Lam. i. 20; joined with dpyi¢eoOa, Philo de alleg. legg.
iii. § 38; w. wAnpodada dpyijs Sixaias, vita Moys. i. § 55
[al. wavy mxp.]; mapamixpaivew x. mapopyitew, de somn.
ii. § 26.*
Tapa-TuKpar pss, -o0, 6, (mapamiKpaivw), provocation: év
T@ mapamtxpacpe@, when they provoked (angered) me by
rebelliousness, Heb. iii. 8, 15, fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 8 (where
Sept. for 72°19); cf. Num. xvi.*
485
Tapappew
mapa-rirrw: 2 aor. ptep. mapameowy; prop. to fall be-
side a pers. or thing; to slip aside ; hence to deviate from
the right path, turn aside, wander: ris 6d00, Polyb. 3, 54,
5; metaph. rjs ddndeias, Polyb. 12, 12 (7), 2 [(here ed.
Didot dyréxnrat) ; tov Kanxovros, 8, 13, 8]; i. q. to err,
Polyb. 18, 19,6; év ru, Xen. Hell. 1, 6,4. In the Scrip-
tures, to fall away (from the true faith) : from the wor-
ship of Jehovah, Ezek. xiv. 13; xv. 8 (for 9yp); from
Christianity, Heb. vi. 6.*
mapa-héw : 1 aor. inf. raparhedoar; to sail by, sail past,
[mapd, 1V.1]: w. an ace. of place, Acts xx.16. (Thue.
2, 25; Xen. anab. 6, 2,1; Hell. 1,3,3; Plat. Phaedr. p.
259 a.) *
mapa-rAyoov, (neut. of the adj. maparAnjouos), adv.
near to, almost to: naOevnoe mapamd. Oavare [cf. W. § 54,
6], Phil. ii. 27. (Thue. 7, 19; im like manner, Polyb.) *
mwapa-mrAnoiws, adv., (maparAnowos, see mapamAnauov),
similarly, in like manner, in the same way: Heb. ii. 14
(where it is equiv. to kara mavra vs. 17, and hence is used
of a similarity which amounts to equality, as in the
phrase dywvifecOac mapamd. to fight with equal advan-
tage, aequo Marte, Hdt. 1, 77; so too the adj., od dé dvOpa-
tros Sv maparAnatos Tois dAdots, An ye dy te ToAUTpaypov
kat atdo@ados xr. the words in which an oriental sage
endeavors to tame the pride of Alexander the Great,
Arr: exp. Alex.,7,,1,.9 (€)).*
Tapa-tropevouat; impf. raperopevduny ; fr. Aristot. and
Polyb. down; Sept. for 12; ¢o proceed at the side, go
past, pass by: Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xi. 20; xv. 29; dca trav
oropipav, to go along through the grain-fields so that he
had the grain on either side of him as he walked [see
moew, I. 1 a. and c.], Mk. ii. 283 RGTWHaore.; da
ths TadwAaias, Vulg. praetergredi Galilaeam, i.e.“ obiter
proficisct per Galilaeam,” i. e. ‘they passed right along
through, intent on finishing the journey, and not stopping
to receive hospitality or to instruct the people’ (Fritz-
sche), Mk. ix. 30 [but L txt. Trtxt. WH txt. éropevovro];
dia tay épiwv, Deut. ii. 4. [Syn. ef. mapaBaiva, fin. ]*
Tapd-TTwpa, -Tos, Td, (mapatinta, q-V.) ; 1. prop.
a fall beside or near something ; but nowhere found in
this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth
and uprightness; a sin, misdeed, [R. V. trespass, ‘ differ-
ing from duaprnya (q. v-) in figure not in force’
(Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench § lxvi.]: Mt. vi. 14,[15*G T om.
WH br.], 15"; xviii. 35 Rec.; Mk. xi. 25,26 RGL; Ro.
iv. 25; v. 15-18, 20; xi. 11sq.; 2Co.v.19; Gal. vi. 13
Eph. i. 7; ii. 1,5; Col. ii. 13; Jas. v. 16 (where LT Tr
WH dyaprias). (Polyb. 9,10,6; Sap. iii. 13; x.1;
Sept. several times for Syn, oy, pw, ete.; of liter-
ary faults, Longin. 36, 2.) *
mapa-ppew; (apd and pew); fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat.
down ; to flow past (mapappeov vdap, Is. xliv. 4), to glide
by : pnmore mapappvapey (2 aor. pass. subjunc.; ef. Btim.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 287; [Veitch s. v. péo; WH. App. p. 170];
but LT Tr WH mapapuapev; see P, p), lest we be carried
past, pass by, [R. V. drift away from them] (missing the
thing), i. e. lest the salvation which the things heard
show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii.1. In
TApacnMos
Grk. auth. mappapet poi tt, a thing escapes me, Soph.
Philoct. 653; trop. slips from my mind, Plat. legg. 6 p.
781 a.; in the sense of neglect, yn mappapuns, tThpyoov be
euny Bovhny, Prov. iii. 21.*
mrapdo-npos, -ov, (rapa [q. v- IV. 2], and ojala eed :
1. marked falsely, spurious, counterfeit ; as coin.
marked beside or on the margin; so of noteworthy be
which the reader of a book marks on the margin;
hence 3. univ. noted, marked, conspicuous, remark-
able, (of persons, in a bad sense, notorious); marked with
a sign: év mdoiw mapacnpe Avocxovpos, in a ship marked
with the image or figure of the Dioscuri, Acts xxviii. 11
[cf. B. D. s. v. Castor and Pollux].*
mapa-ckevatw; pf. pass. raperxevacpat ; fut. mid. mapa-
oxevacona ; fr. Hdt. down; to make ready, prepare: sc.
ro Seimvov (added in Hdt. 9, 82; Athen. 4, 15 p. 138),
Acts x. 10 (cupmdctov, Hdt. 9,15; 2 Mace. ii. 27). Mid.
to make one’s self ready, to prepare one’s self, [cf. W. § 38,
2a.]: eis méAepuov, 1 Co. xiv. 8 (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 42; es
paxnv, eis vavpaxiay, etc., in Xen.). Pf. pass. in mid.
sense, to have prepared one’s self, to be prepared or ready,
2 Co. ix. 2sq. (see Matthiae § 493).*
mapa-ckevn, -7s, 7, fr. Hdt. down;
ready, preparation, equipping. 2. that which is pre-
pared, equipment. 3. in the N. T. in a Jewish sense,
the day of preparation, i.e. the day on which the Jews
made the necessary preparation to celebrate a sabbath
or afeast: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk.xv.42; Lk. xxiii. 54; Jn.
xix. 31, (Joseph. antt. 16,6, 2); with a gen. of the obj.,
tov macxa [acc. to W.189 (177sq.) a possess. gen. ], Jn.
xix. 14 (ef. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 31 sq.); w. a gen.
of the subj., rav “Iov8aiwy, ibid. 42. Cf. Bleek, Beitrage
zur Evangelienkritik, p. 114 sqq.; [on later usage cf.
‘Teaching’ 8, 1 (and Harnack’s note); Mart. Polye. 7,
1 (and Zahn’s note); Soph. Lex. s. v. 3].*
mapa-re(vw: 1 aor. maperewva; fr. Hdt. down; to extend
beside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong: rov
Adyov, his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (Adyous, Aristot. poet. 17,
5 p. 1455°, 2; pidov, 9,4 p. 1451, 38).*
mapa-typew, -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. rapernpovy; 1 aor.
mapetnpnoa; Mid., pres. rapatnpodpat; impf. 3 pers. plur.
mapetnpovrto ; prop. to stand beside and watch (cf. mapa,
IV. 1]; to watch assiduously, observe carefully ; a.
to watch, attend to, with the eyes: ra ék Tov ovpavod y-
yvopeva, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13; twa, one, to see
what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4); contextu-
ally in a bad sense, to watch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr
mrg. droxwpyaavres] (joined with évedpevecv, Polyb. 17,
3, 2); rwa (Polyb. 11, 9, 9; Sept. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12;
Sus. 16) foll. by the interrog. e/, Mk. iii. 2R GT WH Tr
txt.; Lk. vi. 7 Ree.; mid. to watch for one’s self: Mk. iii.
2 LTr mrg.; Lk. vi. 7 LT Tr WH, [(in both pass. foll.
by interrog. e?)]; Lk. xiv.1; active w. an ace. of place
(Polyb. 1, 29,4): tds mvdas [foll. by draws, cf. B. 237
(205)], Acts ix. 24 RG, where L T Tr WH give mid.
mapetnpovrro. b. to observe i.q. to keep scrupulously ;
to neglect nothing requisite to the religious observance of:
<88ouadas, Joseph. antt. 3, 5,5; [rav rav caBB. nuepar,
1. a making
486
Tapadpovia
id. 14, 10, 25]; mid. (for one’s self, i. e. for one’s salva-
tion), nuépas, pnvas, katpovs, Gal. iv. 10 (60a mpootarrov-
aw oi vdpot, Dio Cass. 53,10; [ra eis Bp@ow ov vevope-
opeva, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).*
Tapa-thpycts, -ews, 7, (maparnpéw), observation ([Polyb.
16, 22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.): pera Tapa-.
Tnpjoews, in such a manner that it can be watched with’
the eyes, i. e. in a visible manner, Lk. xvii. 20.*
mapa-riOnpr; fut. mapadnow; 1 aor. rapéOnxa; 2 aor.
subjunc. 3 pers. plur. mapadaour, infin. mapubeivaa (Mk.
vil. 7 RG); Pass., pres. ptep. mapariO€uevos ; 1 aor. infin.
mapareOjva (Mk. viii. 7 Lchm.) ; Mid., pres. raparidepat;
fut. mapa@nooua; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. rapédevro, impv.
mapadov (2 Tim. ii. 2); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
Dw ; 1. to place beside, place near (cf. mapa, IV. 1]
or set before: rwi tt, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii.
6 sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xi.6; rpame{av a table, i.e. food placed
on a table, Acts xvi. 34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7); ra mapa-
TiOéueva wpiv, [A. V. such things as are set before you], of
food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2,1, 30); sing.1Co.x.27. —_b.
to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,14; Sept.
Ex. xix. 7): twit mapaBodny, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set
forth (from one’s self), to explain: foll. by ért, Acts xvii.
3. 2. Mid. to place down (from one’s self or for
one’s self) with any one, to deposit; to intrust, commit to
one’s charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2,16; Polyb. 33, 12,
3; Plut. Num. 9; Tob. iv. 1): ri rem, a thing to one to
be cared for, Lk. xii. 48; a thing to be religiously kept
and taught to others, 1 Tim. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 2; twa
tiv, to commend one to another for protection, safety,
etc., Acts xiv. 23; xx. 32, (Diod. 17, 23); ras yuyds to
God, 1 Pet. iv. 19; rd mvedpa pov els xeipas Beov, Lk.
xxiii. 46; Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 6.*
mapa-ruyxave; fr. Hom. (Il. 11, 74) down; to chance
to be by [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to happen to be present, to meet
by chance: Acts xvii. 17.*
map-autika [cf. B. § 146, 4], adv., for the moment: 2
Co. iv.17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.) *
mapa-hépw: [1 aor. inf. mapevéeyxac (Lk. xxii. 42 Tdf.,
cf. Veitch p. 669)]; 2 aor. inf. mapeveyxety (Lk. xxii. 42
RG), impv. mapéveyxe [(ibid. L Tr WH); pres. pass.
mapapépona; see reff. s. v. hepa]; 1. to bear to
[ef. mapa, IV. 1], bring to, put before: of food (Hadt.,
Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [cf. mapa, IV. 2] from
the right course or path, to carry away: Jude 12 [R. V.
carried along] (where Rec. repedép.) ; from the truth,
Heb. xiii. 9 where Rec. repigep., (Plat. Phaedr. p.
265 b.; Plut. Timol. 6; Antonin. 4, 43; Hdian. 8, 4, 7
[4 ed. Bekk.]). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to
cause to pass by, to remove: ti and twos, Mk. xiv. 36 ;
Lk. xxii. 42.*
mapa-ppovew, -@; (mapappev (fr. mapa (q. v. IV. 2) and
pny, ‘beside one’s wits’]); to be beside one’s self, out of
one’s senses, void of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23.
(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; once in Sept., Zech.
Wal. 10.)
mapa-ppovia, -as, 7, (mapadpev [see the preceding
word ]), madness, insanity: 2 Pet. ii. 16. The Grk. writ.
Trapaxerpateo
use not this word but mapadpooivy [cf. W. 24; 95
(90)]-*
mapa-xepdtw: fut. mapayetudow; 1 aor. inf. mapayet
paca; pf. ptep. mapakeyeipaxas ; to winter, pass the win-
ter, with one or ata place: Acts xxvii. 12; 1 Co. xvi. 6;
ev 77 mow, Acts xxviii. 11; éxei, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p.
909, 15; Polyb. 2, 64,1; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. 3;
Dio Cass. 40, 4.) *
Tapa-xepacia, -as, 7, (mapayematw), a passing the
winter, wintering: Acts xxvii. 12. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6; [3,
35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.) *
Twapa-xXpipa, (prop. i. q. mapa ro xpnpa; cf. our on the
spot), fr. Hdt. down; immediately, forthwith, instantly:
Mt. xxi. 19sq.; Lk.i. 64; iv. 39; v. 25; viii. 44, 47, 55;
xiii. 13; xviii. 43; xix. 11; xxii.60; Acts iii. 7; v.10;
ix. 18 Rec.; xii. 23; xiii. 11; xvi. 26 [WH br. mapaxp.],
33. (Sap. xviii. 17; 2 Mace. iv. 34, 38, ete.; Sept. for
oXND, Num. vi. 9; xii. 4; Is. xxix. 5; xxx. 13.)*
mapdants, -ews, 7, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 193; @
pard, panther, leopard ; avery fierce Asiatic and African
animal, having a tawny skin marked with large black
spots [cf. Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 111 sqq.; BB. DD.
8. v.]: Rev. xiii. 2.*
map-eSpevw ; (fr. map-edpos, sitting beside [ef. apa,
IV. 1]); tosit beside, attend constantly, (Lat. assidere),
(Eur., Polyb., Diod., al.) : r@ Ovovactnpia, to perform
the duties pertaining to the offering of sacrifices and in-
cense, [to wait upon], 1 Co. ix. 13 LT Tr WH (for Rec.
7 poo edp.).*
wap-eyt; impf. 3 pers. pl. mapjoay; fut. 3 pers. sing.
mapeota (Rev. xvii. 8 L T[not (as G Tr WH Alf., al.)
mapeora; see Bttm. Ausf. Spr. §108, Anm. 20; Chandler
§803]); (mapa near, by, [see mapa, IV. 1 fin.] and eipi) ;
Sept. chiefly for 813; as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down
a. to be by, be at hand, to have arrived, to be present: of
persons, Lk. xiii. 1; Jn. xi. 28; Acts x. 21; Rev. xvii. 8;
mapov, present (opp. to drwy), 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 2, 11;
xiii. 2,10; émi tevos, before one (a judge), Acts xxiv. 19;
emi tut, for (to do) something, Mt. xxvi. 50 Rec. ; émi te,
ibid. GL TTr WH (on which see emi, B. 2 a. ¢.); éva-
mov Geod, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Trmrg.];
evade, ib. xvii. 6; mpés twa, with one, Acts xii. 20; 2 Co.
xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: 6 Kxatpos mdpeotiy,
Jn. vii. 6; rd mapdv, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v.
17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2b.; [L. and
S.s. v. II.; Soph. Lex.s.v.b.]). of other things: rod evay-
yeXiou Tov mapévros eis duas, which is come unto (and so
is present among) you, Col. i. 6 (foll. by eis w. an ace. of
place, 1 Mace. xi. 63, and often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt.
down ; see eis, C. 2). b. to be ready, in store, at com-
mand: 9 mapovoa aAnOe.a, the truth which ye now hold,
so that there is no need of words to call it to your re-
membrance, 2 Pet. i. 12; (u7) mapeoriv revi tt, ibid. 9
[A. V. lacketh], and Lchm. in 8 also [where al. dap-
xovra], (Sap. xi. 22 (21), and often in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down; cf. Passow u. s.; [L. and S. u. s.]); 7a mapdvra,
possessions, property, [A. V. such things as ye have (cf.
our ‘ what one has by him’)], Heb. xiii. 5 (ois ra rapévra
487
Tape“Born
apkel, ikoTa Tév dddorpiwy dpéyovra, Ken. symp. 4, 42).
[ComP. : cup-maperu. |*
map-eo-dyw : fut. mapecdéw; (see mapa, [V.1); to ine
troduce or bring in secretly or craftily: aipécets dmwdeias,
2 Pet. ii.1. In the same sense of heretics: éxaoros idiws
kal érépas idiav défav rapevonyayooay, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb.
h.e. 4, 22,5; Soxodor mapecayew ra appynta avrav...
puornpia, Orig. philos. [i. q. Hippol. refut. omn. haeres.]
5, 17 fin.; of Marcion, vopigev xawdv re mapewrdyety, ibid.
7, 29 init. ; — passages noted by Hilgenfeld, Zeitschr. f.
wissensch. Theol. 1860, p. 125 sq. (of mpoddrat rods orpa-
Ti@ras Trapeoayaydrres evTOs THY TELyGv Kupious THS TéAEwS
eroinaay, Diod. 12, 41 [ef. Polyb. 1, 18, 3; 2, 7, 8]. In
other senses in other prof. auth.) *
tap-elo-aKros, -ov, (Taperoayw), secretly or surreptitiously’
brought in; [A. V. privily brought in]; one who has stolen
in (Vulg. subintroductus): Gal. ii.4; cf. C.F. A. Fritz-
sche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 181 sq.*
map-e.o-S0w or mapetodivw : 1 aor. mapetcéduca [acc. to
class. usage trans., cf. divw; (see below) ]; to enter se-
cretly, slip in stealthily; to steal in; [A. V. creep in un-
awares]: Jude 4 [here WH mape:cedinoay, 3 pers. plur.
2 aor. pass. (with mid. or intrans. force) ; see their App.
p- 170, and cf. B. 56 (49); Veitch s. v. dv, fin.]; cf. the
expressions mapeiodvow mAavns rovetvy, Barn. ep. 2, 10;
éxewv, ibid. 4,9. (Hippocr., Hdian. 1, 6,2; 7,9, 18 [8 ed.
Bekk.; Philo de spec. legg. §15]; Plut., Galen, al.) *
Tap-ec-epxopar: 2 aor. mapeconAOov ; 1. to come
in secretly or by stealth (cf. mapa, IV. 1], to creep or steal
in, (Vulg. subintroeo): Gal. ii. 4 (Polyb. 1, 7,33 1, 8, 4;
[esp.] 2, 55,3; Philo de opif. mund. § 52; de Abrah.
§ 19, ete.; Plut. Poplic. 17; Clem. homil. 2, 23). 2.
to enter in addition, come in besides, (Vulg. subintro): Ro.
Ve PAWS, is TPG:
map-ec-pépw: 1 aor. mapevonveyxa ; a. to bring in
besides (Dem.., al.). b. to contribute besides to some-
thing: omovdny, 2 Pet. i. 5 [R. V. adding on your part].*
map-extés (for which the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down use
mapek, tmape&) 5 1. prep. w. gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6], ex-
cept; with the exception of (a thing, expressed by the
gen.): Mt. v. 32; xix.9 LWH mrg.; Acts xxvi. 29,
(Deut. i. 36 Aq.; Test. xii. Patr. p. 631; [*Teaching’ 6,
§ 1]; Geop. 13, 15, 7). 2. adv. besides: ra mapexros
sc. ywvdpeva, the things that occur besides or in addition,
2Co. xi. 28 [cf. our ‘extra matters’; al. the things that
I omit; but see Meyer ].*
map-ep-BoddAw : fut. rapenBadr@; fr. Arstph. and Dem.
down ; 1. to cast in by the side of or besides (ef. mapa,
IV. 1], to insert, interpose; to bring back into line. ee
from Polyb. on, in military usage, to assign to soldiers a
place, whether in camp or in line of battle, to draw up in
line, to encamp (often in 1 Macc., and in Sept. where for
TIM) : tet xdpaka, to cast up a bank about a city, Lk. xix.
43 Lmrg. T WH txt.*
map-ep-Bodh, -7s, 7, (fr. mapeuBadrAa, q. V-) ; 1. in-
terpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign
to the subject in hand, Aeschin.). 2. In the Maced.
dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 30; Lob.
TapEevoxyrew 488
ad Phryn. p. 377; [W. 22]) an encampment (Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., Plut.) ; a. the camp of the Israel-
ites in the desert (an enclosure within which their tents
were pitched), Ex. xxix. 14; xix. 17; xxxii. 17; hence
in Heb. xiii. 11 used for the city of Jerusalem, inasmuch
as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encamp-
ment had been in the desert ; of the sacred congregation
or assembly of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly
in camps in the wilderness, ib. 13. b. the bar-
racks of the Roman soldiers, which at Jerusalem were in
the castle Antonia: Acts xxi. 34, 37; xxii. 24; xxiii. 10,
16, 32. 3. an army in line of battle: Heb. xi. 34;
Rey. xx. 9 [here A. V. camp], (Ex. xiv. 19, 20; Judg. iv.
16; viii. 11; 1S. xiv.16; very often in Polyb.; Ael. v.h.
14,46). Often in Sept. for 73m, which signifies both
camp and army; freq. in both senses in 1 Mace.; ef.
Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 3.*
map-ev-oxéw, -G; (see evoxyhéw); to cause trouble ina
matter (rapa equiv. to mapa tue mpaypart), to trouble,
annoy: twi, Acts xv. 19. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Epict., Leian., al.) *
mrap-eri-Syos, -ov, (see emidnuew), prop. one who comes
from a foreign country into a city or land to reside there
by the side of the natives; hence stranger ; sojourning ina
strange place, a foreigner, (Polyb. 32, 22,4; Athen. 5
p-196a.); inthe N. T. metaph. in ref. to heaven as the
native country, one who sojourns on earth: so of Chris-
tians, 1 Pet.i.1; joined with maporxor, 1 Pet. ii. 11, cf.
i. 17, (Christians zatpidas oixodow idias, GAN’ ws TapotKot*
petexovor TdavT@y ws ToNirat, Kal wav Unopevovaw ws
&évor- waca E€vyn matpis €oTw avitay, Kai Taca Tratpis E€vn,
Ep. ad Diogn.c.5); of the patriarchs, Evo x. raperiSypot
ext THs yns, Heb. xi. 13 (Gen. xxiii. 4; Ps. xxxviil. (xxxix.)
13; mapemtdnpia tis eat 6 Bios, Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3,
where see Fischer).*
map-<pxopnat; fut. rapedevoouar; pf. rapeAnAvda; 2 aor.
map7jAOov, 3 pers. impv. mapeAOarw (Mt. xxvi. 39 L T Tr
WH; see arépyouar, init.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly
for V3) ; 1. (mapa past [cf. mapa, [V.1]) to go past,
pass by ; a. prop. a. of persons moving forward:
to pass by, absol. Lk. xviii. 37; twa, to go past one, Mk.
vi. 48; w.an acc. of place, Acts xvi. 8 (Hom. Il. 8, 239;
Xen. an. 4, 2,12; Plat. Alc. 1 p. 123 b.); dca ris 6d00
exeivns, Mt. viii. 28. B. of time: Mt. xiv. 15; 6 mape-
AnrvOas xpdvos [ A. V. the time past], 1 Pet. iv. 3, (Soph.,
Isocr., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.); of an act continuing for
a time [viz. the Fast], Acts xxvii. 9. (rad maped@dvta
and ra éemdvra are distinguished in Ael. v.h.14,6.) _ b.
metaph. a. lo pass away, verish: as avOos, Jas. i. 10;
6 ovpavds, Mt. v. 18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xvi. 17;
xxi. 33; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xxi. 1 Rec.; 7 yeved adrn,
Mt. xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30 sq.; Lk. xxi. 32; of Adyot pov,
Mt. xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xxi. 33; ra dpyata ma-
pn rev, 2 Co. v.17, (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 36; Dan. vii. 14
Theodot.; Sap. ii.4; v.9; Dem. p. 291,12; Theocr. 27,
8). Here belongs also Mt. v. 18 (‘not even the small-
est part shall pass away from the law,’ i.e. soas no longer
to belong to it). B. to pass by ( pass over), i. e. to neg-
mapnyopla
lect, omit, (transgress): w. an acc. of the thing, Lk. xi.
42; xv. 29, (Deut. xvii. 2; Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 18; Judith
xi. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 22; Avds vdov, Hes. theog. 613; vdpov,
Lys. p. 107, 52; Dem. p. 977, 14). y- to be led by, to
be carried past, be averted: amd twos, from one i. e. so
as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2); mapeAOarw
dm’ €nov To mornpiov, Mt. xxvi. 39; mapedOeiv, 42 [here G
T Tr WH om. Lbr. am’ éuod]; aw airod 7 dpa, Mk. xiv.
35. 2. (mapa to [cf. mapa, IV. 1]) to come near,
come forward, arrive: Lk. xii. 837; xvii. 7; Acts xxiv.
7 Rec. (and in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down).
[Syn. see mapaBaive, fin. Comp. avti-mapépyxopat. | *
Tapers, -ews, 7), (mapinut, q. V-), pretermission, passing
over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : da thy mapeow
. » dvox Tov Geov, because God had patiently let pass
the sins committed previously (to the expiatory death of
Christ), i.e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so
man’s conception of his holiness was in danger of be-
coming dim, if not extinct), Ro. iii. 25, where cf. Fritz-
sche ; [Trench § xxxiii. (Hippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].*
map-exw; impf. mapetxov, 3 pers. plur. rapetyay (Acts
xxviii. 2L T Tr WH;; see yo, init., and amépxopat, init.) ;
fut. 3 pers. sing. mapééer (Lk. vii. 4 RG; see below); 2
aor. 3 pers. plur. rapécyor, ptcp. mapacxev ; Mid., [pres.
mapéxouat]; impf. mapecydunv; fut. 2 pers. sing. mapéEy
(Lk. vii. 4 LT Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Plautus’s prae-
hibeo i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the Grk. rapai [but see
Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. mapa, IV. 1 fin.)]); i.e. a.
to reach forth, offer: ti run, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show,
afford, supply: twi novxiay, Acts xxii. 2; diavOperiar,
Acts xxviii. 2; mavra, 1 Tim. vi. 17. c. to be the
author of, or to cause one to have; to give, bring, cause,
one something — either unfavorable: xdézous, Mt. xxvi.
10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi. 17 (aap.
movoy, Sir. Xxix.4; dyava, Is. vii. 13; mpdypara, very often
fr. Hdt. down; also dyAov, see Passow s. v. dyAos, 3; [L.
and S. s. v. Il.]) ;— or favorable : épyaciav, Acts xvi. 16,
and Lehm. in xix. 24; wiorw, [A. V. to give assurance],
Acts xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexic.
N. T. pp. 37-39 ; i. q. to occasion ({yrnveis, see oixovopia),
1'Tim. i. 4. Mid. 1. to offer, show, or present one’s
self: with éavrdv added (W. § 38, 6; [B. § 135, 6]), w.
an ace. of the predicate, rimoy, a pattern, Tit. ii. 7; mapa-
Sevypa.. . Todvde Eavrov mapeixero, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39;
[Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 15,4]; in the act., Plut. puer. educ. ec.
20 init. 2. to exhibit or offer on one’s own part: ro
Sixavoy Tots SovAas, Col. iv. 1; to render or afford from
one’s own resources or by one’s own power: twi tt, Lk.
vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec., mape€et, it must be
taken as the 3d pers. sing. of the fut. act. [in opp. to W.
§ 13, 2a.], the elders being introduced as talking among
themselves; but undoubtedly the reading rapé& should
be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad-
dressing Jesus; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [and on the construc-
tion, cf. B. § 139, 32]). On the mid. of this verb, cf.
Kriiger §52, 8,2; W.§38, 5 end; [Ellic. and Lghtft. on
Col. u. s.].*
mapnyopla, -as, 7), (mapnyopew (to address]), prop. an
—
maplevia
addressing, address ; i. e. a. exhortation (4 Mace.
v.11; vi. 1; Apoll. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace,
relief, alleviation, consolation: Col. iv.11 [where see Bp.
Lehtft.]. (Aeschyl. Ag. 95; Philo, q. deus immort. § 14;
de somn. i. § 18; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 3; often in Plut. ;
Hierocl.) *
mrapQevla, -as, 7, (mapOevos), virginity: Lk. ii. 36. (Jer.
iii. 4; Pind., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Plut., Hdian., al. [cf.
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc. ].) *
arapQévos, -ov, 1; 1. a virgin: Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is.
‘vil. 14); xxv. 1, 7,11; Lk.i.27; Acts xxi.9; 1 Co. vii.
25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for mana,
several times for 1p}; twice for 023° i. e. either a
marriageable maiden, or a young (married) woman, Gen.
xxiv. 43; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word ef., besides
Gesenius, Thes. p. 1037, Credner, Beitrage u.s.w. ii. p.
197 sqq.; mapOevos of a young bride, newly married wo-
man, Hom. Il. 2, 514); 9 wapé. ruvos, one’s marriageable
daughter, 1 Co. vii. 36 sqq.; map0. dyvn, a pure virgin,
2'Co. xi. 2. 2. a man who has abstained from all
uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so
has kept his chastity: Rev. xiv. 4, where see De Wette.
In ecel. writ. one who has never had commerce with women ;
so of Joseph, in Fabricius, Cod. pseudepigr. Vet. Test. ii.
pp- 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a.
and 2450 b.]; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus,
metaph. ev. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xix. 26), nvide mapOévov
via.*
* TIdp0os, -ov, 6, a Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a
district of Asia, bounded on the N. by Hyrcania, on the
' E.by Ariana, on the S. by Carmania Deserta, on the W.
by Media; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of
Parthia. [B.D.s. v. Parthians; Geo. Rawlinson, Sixth
Great Oriental Monarchy, ete. (Lond. 1873).]*
map-inpi: 2 aor. inf. rapeiva (Lk. xi. 42 L T Tr WH);
pf. pass. ptep. mapewyevos; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to let
pass; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ. fr.
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit: ri, Lk.
xi. 42 [RG dqguévac] (duaprnpara, to pass over, let go un-
punished, Sir. xxiii. 2; [rywe@piav, Lycurg.148,41]). 2.
to relax, loosen, let go, [see mapa, IV. 2], (e. g. a bow);
pf. pass. ptep. mapeuevos, relaxed, unstrung, weakened,
exhausted, (Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : yetpes, Heb. xii.
12; Sir, ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31;
dpyol kat rapeipevor emi épyov ayabdv, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
34,4 cf.1. Cf. rapadio.*
TAp-loTdve, See mapioTnut.
wap-icrnpe and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro.
Vi. 13, 16) mapiorava; fut. rapactnoe; 1 aor. rapéornaa;
.2 aor. mapéorny; pf. mapéornka, ptcp. mapeotynxaos and
mapeotas; plupf. 3 pers. plur. rapecornxecoav (Acts i. 10
[WH sapior.; see tornw, init.]); 1 fut. mid. rapaorn-
gona; fr. Hom. down. 1. The pres., impf., fut.
and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for
TRY), a. to place beside or near [mapa, IV. 1];
to set at hand; to present ; to proffer; to provide: xrnyn,
Acts xxiii. 24 (oxady, 2 Mace. xii. 3); twd or ri tin,
to place a person or thing at one’s disposal, Mt. xxvi.
489
TapoiKew
53; to present a person for another to see and question,
Acts xxiii. 33; to present or show, rwdor ti with an ace.
of the quality which the person or thing exhibits: ofs
mapéotnoev éavtov (dvra, Acts i. 3; add, Ro. vi. 13, 16,
19; 2 Co.xi.2; Eph. v.27; 2 Tim. ii. 15, (“te vegetum
nobis in Graecia siste,” Cic. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) ; rwd with
a pred. ace. foll. by karevamidy twos, Col. i. 22; éavrov ds
[ooei] twa rin, Ro. vi. 13; to bring, lead to, in the sense
of presenting, without a dat.: Acts ix. 41; Col. i. 28,
of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God: ra capara
tpav Ovoiav ...7@ Ge@, Ro. xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. :
Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Joseph. antt. 4, 6,4; Leian. deor. concil.
13; Lat. admoveo, Verg. Aen. 12,171; sisto, Stat. Theb.
4, 445); twa (a first-born) r@ kupia, Lk. ii. 22; to bring
to, bring near, metaphorically, i.e. to bring into one’s fel-
lowship or intimacy: twa t@ Oe@, 1 Co. viii. 8; se. TO Oea,
2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present (show) by argument, to
prove: ti, Acts xxiv. 13 (Epict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foll. by
m@s, id. 2, 26,4; rwi tr, Xen. oec. 13, 13 revi, dri, Jo-
seph. antt. 4, 3, 2; de vita sua § 6). 2. Mid. and
pf., plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (Sept.
chiefly for Wy, also for 1¥}), to stand beside, stand by
or near, to be at hand, be present; a. univ. to stand
by: rwwi, to stand beside one, Acts i. 10; ix. 39; xxiii. 2;
XXVii. 23; 6 mapeotnkws, a by-stander, Mk. xiv. 47, 69
[here TTr WH srapeoréow]; xv. 35 [here Tdf. rape-
oratov, WH mrg. é€ornxdrwr|; 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg.
Tr mrg. napectotay|; 6 mapectas, Mk. xiv. 70; Jn. xix.
26 [here anarthrous ]. b. to appear: w. a pred.
nom. foll. by évamidy twos, Acts iv. 10 [A. V. stand here];
before a judge, Kaioaps, Acts xxvii. 24; mid. r@ Bnyare
tov Oeov [RG Xpiorov], Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at
hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [A. V.
stood up] (fr. Ps. ii. 2); to be at. hand for service, of ser-
vants in attendance on their master (Lat. appareo), rwi,
Esth. iv. 5; éva@midv twos, 1 K. x. 8; evw@mov tov Geod, of
a presence-angel [A. V. that stand in the presence of
God], Lk. i. 19, cf. Rev. viii. 2; absol. of rapeorares,
them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24; with air@ added (viz.
the high-priest), Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to
help, to succor, (Germ. beistehen) : rwi, Ro. xvi. 2; 2 Tim.
iv. 17, (Hom. II. 10, 290; Hes. th. 439; Arstph. vesp.
1388; Xen.; Dem. p. 366, 20; 1120, 26, and in other au-
thors). e. to be present; to have come: of time, Mk.
ivi 29"
Tlappevas [prob. contr. fr. Happevidns ‘steadfast’; cf. W.
103 (97)], acc. -Gv [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Parmenas, one of
the seven “deacons” of the primitive church at Jerusa-
lem: Acts vi. 5.*
adp-ob0s, -ov, 7, (mapd, near by; 6dds), a passing by or
passage: év mapddw, in passing, [A. V. by the way], 1 Co.
xvi. 7. (Thue. 1, 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad
Att. 5, 20, 2; Leian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) *
qmap-o1Kkew, -@; 1 aor. rapgKnea ; 1. prop. to dwell
beside (one) or in one’s neighborhood (mapa, IV. 1]; to live
near; (Xen., Thuc., Isocr., al.). 2. in the Scrip-
tures to be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn,
(Sept. for 731, several times also for 1¥ and {3w) : foll.
TapouKia
by év w. a dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 R L (Gen. xx. 1;
xxi. 34; xxvi. 3; Ex. xii. 40 cod. Alex.; Lev. xviii.
3 [Ald.], etc.); w. an acc. of place, ibid. GT TrWH
(Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi. 4); es w. acc. of place (in pregn.
constr.; see eis, C. 2), Heb. xi. 9. (Metaph. and absol.
to dwell on the earth, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lghtft. and Harnack ad loc. ; Holtz
mann, Ein]. ins N. T. p. 484sq. Syn. see xarorxéa. ].) *
map-orKia, -as, 7, (mapotkew, q. V.), a bibl. and eccl. word,
a dwelling near or with one; hence a sojourning, dwelling
in a strange land: prop. Acts xiii. 17 (2 Esdr. viii. 35;
Ps. exix. (exx.) 5; Sap. xix. 10; Prol. of Sir. 21; ef. Fritz-
sche on Judith y. 9). Metaph. the life of man here on
earth, likened to a sojourning: 1 Pet. i. 17 (Gen. xlvii.
9); see mapemidnpos [and reff. under rapotkew |.*
™dp-oLkos, -ov, (apa and oikos) ; 1. in class. Grk.
dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a
stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place without the
right of citizenship ; [R. V. sojourner]; Sept. for 33 and
AWIA (see TapotKew 2, and mapotkia, [and cf. Schmidt, Syn.
43, 5; L.and 8.s. v.]): foll. by ev w. dat. of place, Acts
Vii. 6, 29; metaph. without citizenship in God’s kingdom:
joined with févos and opp. to oupmodirns, Eph. ii. 19
(povos Kvptos 6 Oeds moXitns eoti, mapotkoy S€ Kal émnAvrov
7d yevntov dav, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Mangey i. 161
note]); one who lives on earth as a stranger, a sojourner
on the earth: joined with mapemidnpos (q. v.), of Chris-
tians, whose fatherland is heaven, 1 Pet.ii.11. [Cf. Ep.
ad Diognet. § 5, 5.]*
mapowpia, -as, 7, (mapa by, aside from [cf. rapa, IV. 2],
and oiuos way), prop. a saying out of the usual course or
deviating from the usual manner of speaking [cf. Suidas
654, 15; but Hesych. s. v. et al. ‘a saying heard by the
wayside’ (mapa, IV.1), i. e. a current or trite saying, prov-
erb; cf. Curtius §611; Steph. Thes. s. v.], hence 1.
a clever and sententious saying, a proverb, (Aeschyl. Ag.
264; Soph., Plat., Aristot., Plut., al. ; exx. fr. Philo are
given by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien, p. 292 sq. [as de
ebriet. § 20; de Abr. § 40; de vit. Moys. i. § 28; ii. § 5;
de exsecrat. § 6]; for Sw in Prov. i. 1; xxv. 1 cod.
Alex.; Sir. vi. 35, etc.) : 1d rHs mapotmias, what is in the
proverb (Leian. dial. mort. 6, 2; 8,1), 2 Pet.ii. 22. 2
any dark saying which shadows forth some didactic truth,
esp. a symbolic or figurative saying: mapotpiay déyew, Jn.
Xvi. 29; é€v mapotpiats Aadetv, ibid. 25; speech or discourse
in which a thing is illustrated by the use of similes and
comparisons ; an allegory, i.e. extended and elaborate
metaphor : Jn. x. 6.*
map-owvos, -ov, a later Grk. word for the earlier zap-
einos, (rapa [q. v. IV.1] and otvos, one who sits long at
his wine), given to wine, drunken: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i.
7; [al. give it the secondary sense, ‘quarrelsome over
wine’; hence, brawling, abusive].*
map-olyonar: pf. ptep. mapwxnuevos; to go by, pass by:
as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 10, 252 down, of time, Acts
xiv. 16.*
map-opoidtw; (fr. rapdpuo.os, and this fr. mapa [q. v. IV.
1 (?)] and époos); to be like; to be not unlike: Mt. xxiii.
490 Tapouac ta
27 RGTTrmrg. WH txt. (Several times also in eccl.
writ.) *
map-dpotos, -ov, (also of three term. [see dpotos, init.]),
like: Mk. vii. 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the cl.J, 13. (Hadt.,
Thuc., Xen., Dem., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
Bess: prop. to make sharp, to sharpen, [mapa, IV.
3]: THY paxatpar, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always
in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thuc., Xen., down), a. to
stimulate, spur on, urge, (mpos tt, emi Lae b. to irri-
tate, provoke, rouse to anger; Pass., pres. rapoéivopa;
impf. mapw§vrduny: Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. 5. Sept.
chiefly for y8 to scorn, despise ; bende for Don to
provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18; Ps. ev. (evi.) 29; Is.
Ixv. 3; for ")¥ pi to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, etc.; pass.
for NN to ha with anger, Hos. viii. 5; Zech. x. 3, and
for other verbs.*
mapotvo pds, -ov, 6, (mapokvva, q. Vv.) ; 1. an incit-
ing, incitement: eis map. ayanns [A. V. to provoke unto
love], Heb. x. 24. 2. irritation, [R. V. contention] :
Acts xv. 39; Sept. twice for SP, violent anger, passion,
Deut. xxix. 28; Jer. xxxix. plas 37; Dem. p. 1105,
24%
map-opy(tw; Attic fut. [cf. B.37 (32); WH. App. 163]
Tapopyt@ ; to rouse to wrath, to provoke, exasperate, anger,
[cf. mapa, IV. 3]: Ro. x. 19; Eph. vi.4; and Lchm. in
Col. iii. 21. (Dem. p. 805, 19; Philo de somn. ii. § 26;
Sept. chiefly for D°})373.) *
Tap-opyio pds, -ov, 6, (mapopyifw), indignation, exasper-
ation, wrath: Eph. iv. 26. (1 K. xv. 30; 2K. xxiii. 26;
Neh. ix. 18; [Jer. xxi.5 Alex.]; not found in prof. auth.)
[Syn. cf. Trench § xxxvii.]*
Tap-oTptvw: 1 aor. mapwtpuva; [dtpuvw to stir up (cf.
mapa, LV. 3) ]; to incite, stir up : rwa, Acts xiii. 50. (Pind.
Ol. 3, 68; Joseph. antt. 7,6, 1; Leian. deor. concil. 4.) *
map-ovela, -as, 7, (mapwv, -ovea, -dv, fr. mapeye q- V-),
in Grk. auth. fr. the Tragg., Thuc., Plat., down; not
found in Sept. ; 1. presence: 1 Co. xvi. 17; 2 Co.
x. 10; opp. to dmovaia, Phil. ii. 12 (2 Mace. xv. 21; [Ar-
istot. phys. 2, 3 p. 195°, 14; metaphys. 4, 2 p. 1013°, 14;
meteor. 4, 5 p. 382", 33 etc. ]). 2. the presence of
one coming, hence the coming, arrival, advent, ([Polyb.
3, 41,1. 8]; Judith x.18; 2 Macc. viii. 12; [Herm. sim.
5,5,3]): 2Co. vii. 6 sq.; 2 Th. ii. 9 (cf. 8 droxakupOnae-
Tat); +. maAw mpos Twa, of areturn, Phil. i. 26. In
the N. T. esp. of the advent, i. e. the future, visible, return
from heaven of Jesus, the Messiah, to raise the dead,
hold the last judgment, and set up formally and glorious-
ly the kingdom of God: Mt. xxiv. 3; 9 map. Tov viovd rod
avOpamov, [27], 37, 39; rod Kupiov, 1 Th. iii. 13; iv. 15; v.
2 Th. ii. 1; Jas. v. 7sq.; 2 Pet. iii.4; Xpicrov, 2 Pet.
i. 16; avrov, 1 Co. xv. 23; [1 Th. ii. 19]; 2 Th. ii. 8; 2
Pet. iii. 4; [1 In. ii. 28]; ris rod Ocod nywepas, 2 Pet. iii. 12.
It is called in eccles. writ. 97 Sevrépa mapovoia, Ev. Nicod.
22 fin.; Justin. apol. 1, 52 [where see Otto’s note];
dial. ec. Tr. ec. 40, 110, 121; and is opp. to 7 mparn map.
which took place in the incarnation, birth, and earthly
career of Christ, Justin. dial. c. Ty. ec. 52, 121, cf. 14, 32,
49, ete.; [ef.Ignat.ad Phil. 9 (and Lghtft.)]; see Aevors*
mapoyris
map-opis, -idos, 7, (mapa [q. v- IV. 1], and dior, on
which see oyapvov) ; 1. a side-dish, a dish of dain-
ties or choice food suited not so much to satisfy as to gratify
the appetite; a side-accompaniment of the more solid food ;
hence i. q. mapéynpa; so in Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4 and many
Attic writ. in Athen. 9 p. 367 d. sq. 2. the dish itself
in which the delicacies are served up: Mt. xxiii. 25, 26 [here
T om. WH br. rapow.]; Artem. oneir.1, 74; Alciphr. 3,
20; Plut. de vitand. aere alien. §2. This latter use of
the word is condemned by the Atticists ; cf. Sturz, Lex.
Xen. iii. 463 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 176; [Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 265 sq.]; Poppo on Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.*
mappyola,'-as, 7, (mav and pois; cf. adppyoia silence,
kaTappnots accusation, mpoppnots prediction) ; 1.
freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Kur.,
Plat., Dem., al.): 4 a. reds, Acts iv. 13; ypyoOat map-
pnoia, 2 Co. iii. 12; mappnota adverbially,— freely: Nadeiv,
Jn. vii. 13, 26; xviii. 20 ;— openly, frankly, i. e. without
concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14;— without ambi-
guity or circumlocution: eimé nuiv mappyoia (Philem. ed.
Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24;— without the use of figures
and comparisons, opp. to ev mapoiias: Jn. xvi. 25, and
RG in 29 (where L TTr WH ev rappnoia); év mappnuia,
Sreely, Eph. vi. 19; pera mappnoias, Acts xxviii. 31; eimei,
Acts ii. 29; Aadeiv, Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and
JSearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance,
(1 Mace. iv. 18; Sap. v.1; Joseph. antt. 9, 10,4; 15, 2,
7; [ef. W. 23]): Phil. i. 20 (opp. to aioyvverOat, cf. Wie-
singer ad loc.) ; ¢v mioret, resting on, 1 Tim. iii. 18, cf.
Huther ad loc.; ¢yecv mappyoiav ets 71, Heb. x. 19 ; moAAN
pot (earl) mapp. mpos vpas, 2 Co. vii. 4; of the confidence
impelling one to do something, éyewv app. with an infin.
of the thing to be done, Philem. 8 ['Test. xii. Patr., test.
Rub. 4]; of the undoubting confidence of Christians rela-
tive to their fellowship with God, Eph. iii. 12; Heb. iii.
6; x. 35; wera mappyoias, Heb. iv. 16; éyew mappyoiay,
opp. to aicyvvecOar to be covered with shame, 1 Jn. ii.
28; before the judge, 1 Jn. iv. 17; with mpos rév Oedv
added; 1) Jn: iii. 213 v.. 14. 3. the deportment by
which one becomes conspicuous or secures publicity (Philo
de victim. offer. § 12) : év mappnaia, before the public, in
view of all, Jn. vii. 4 (opp. to év r@ kpumT@) ;_ xi. 54 [with-
out év]; Col. ii. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.].*
mappyoidfopar; impf. émappnova¢dunv; 1 aor. émappn-
otacdpny ; (mappycta, q- v.) ; adepon. verb; Vulg. chiefly
Jiducialiter ago; to bear one’s self boldly or confident-
ly ; 1. touse freedom in speaking, be free-spoken3 to
speak freely ((A. V. boldly]): Acts xviii. 26; xix. 8; épv
T® dvdpate Tod "Incov, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts
ix. 27, 28 (29) ; also emt r@ kupio, Acts xiv. 3. 2. to
grow confident, have boldness, show assurance, assume a
bold bearing: eimeiv, Acts xiii. 46 [R. V. spake out boldly];
Aakeiv, Acts xxvi. 26; mappyo. év ru, in reliance on one
to take courage, foll. by an inf. of the thing to be done:
Aadnjoa, Eph. vi. 20; 1 Th.ii. 2. (Xen., Dem., Aeschin.,
Polyb., Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 11.)*
Tos, Taoa, Tay, Fen. mavrds, maons, mavros, [dat. plur.
Lchm. ao ten times, -ow seventy-two times; Tdf. -ct
491
Tas
five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times;
Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -cx fourteen times, -ow
sixty-eight times; see N, v (€peAxvorexdv) ], Hebr. 73, [fr.
Hom. down], all, every; it is used
I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous
nouns ; a. any, every one (sc. of the class denoted
by the noun annexed to was); with the Singular: as
nav Sevdpor, Mt. iii. 10; maca Ovoia, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH
Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13;
Lk. iv. 37; Jn. ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv.
11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; maoa
Wux7 avOpamov, Ro. ii.9 (raca avOp. vyxn, Plat. Phaedr.
p- 249e.); maca avvetdnots avOparwv, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas
Aeyopevos Oeds, 2 Th. ii. 4; mas dysos év Xpiore, Phil. iv.
21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class
indicated by the noun: as mavres avOpwmo, Acts xxii. 15;
Ro. v. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 19; mavres
dyot, Ro. xvi. 15; mavres adyyedot Gov, Heb. i. 6; mavra
[LT Tr WH ra] €6vn, Rev. xiv. 8; on the phrase raca
aap&, see oapé, 3. b. any and every, of every kind,
[A. V. often all manner of]: aca vécos kat padaxia, Mt.
iv. 23; ix. 35; x.1} edAoyia, blessings of every kind, Eph.
i.3; so esp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo-
tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in
which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or
any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the
noun belongs: —thus, raca éAmis, Acts xxvii. 20; copia,
Acts vii. 22; Col. i. 28 ; yraaus, Ro. xv. 14; ddixia, doéBeta,
etc., Ro. i. 18, 29; 2Co.x.6; Eph. iv.19, 31; v.3; omovdn,
2 Co. viii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 5; émOvpia, Ro. vii. 8; yapda, Ro.
XV. 13; avrdpketa, 2 Co. ix. 8; év marti Ady x. yoooet,
1 Co. i. 5; copia x. ppovnoe etc. Eph. i. 8; év x. dyabw-
avvn x. Sixatoovvy, k. ddnOeia, Eph. v. 9; aicOnoet, Phil. i.
9; tmopovn, Oris, etc., 2 Co. i. 4; xii. 12; add, Col. i.
OT sa AG 2 Eb 11s, ii..99, 1. Vimsi, 15: ve 2s wand
2 Tim. iv. 2; Tit. ii. 15 (on which see émrayn); iii. 2;
Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. ii. 1; v.10; maca dicatoodvn, i.e. & avy
Sixacov, Mt. iii. 15; mav OeAnpa tov beov, everything God
wills, Col. iv. 12; aca imorayn, obedience in all things,
1 Tim. ii. 11; maon ovverdnoet adyabp, consciousness of
rectitude in all things, Acts xxiii. 1;—-or it signifies the
highest degree, the maximum, of the thing which the noun
denotes [cf. W. 110 (105 sq.); Ellicott on Eph. i. 8;
Meyer on Phil. i. 20; Kriiger § 50, 11, 9 and 10]: as
pera mdons mappyoias, Acts iv. 29; xxviil. 31; pera mac.
tarrewodppoavvns, Acts xx. 19; mpoOupias, Acts xvii. 11;
xapas, Phil. ii. 29, cf. Jas. i. 2; é€v maon aodadeia, Acts
v.23; év mavti PdBw, 1 Pet. ii. 18; maoa e€ovcia, Mt.
XXvili. 18, (wav kpatos, Soph. Phil. 142). c. the
whole (all, Lat. totus): so before proper names of coun-
tries, cities, nations; as, waca ‘IepoodAvpa, Mt. ii. 3; mas
"Iapan\, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as mas oikos
*IopanX, Acts ii. 36; maca xriow (see xtiow, 2 b.); aca
ypapn (nearly equiv. to the éca mpoeypadn in Ro. xv. 4),
2 Tim. iii. 16 (cf. Rothe, Zur Dogmatik, p. 181); maca
yepovoia viav Iopand, Ex. xii. 21; mas tmmos bapad, Ex.
Xiv. 23; may Sixatov €Ovos, Add. to Esth. i. 9; by a some-
what rare usage before other substantives also, as [map
Tas
mpdcwnov tis yns, Acts xvii. 26LTTr WH]; zaca
oixodoun, Eph. ii. 21 G LT Tr WH, cf. Harless ad loc.
p- 262 [al. find no necessity here for resorting to this ex-
ceptional use, but render (with R. V.) each several build-
ing (cf. Meyer)]; av résevos, 3 Mace. i. 13 (where see
Grimm) ; IavAov... 6s év radon emioToAR pynpovever Lpar,
Ignat. ad Eph. 12 [(yet cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]; cf. Passow
s.v. was, 2; [L.and S.s. v. A. II.]; W.§ 18,4; [B.§ 127,
29]; Kriiger § 50, 11,8 to 11; Kiihner ii. 545 sq. 2
with nouns which have the article, all the, the whole, (see
c. just above) :— with the Singular; as, raoa n ayeédn,
the whole herd, Mt. viii. 32; mas 6 dyXos, Mt. xiii. 2; was
6 kdopos, Ro. iii. 19; Col. i. 6; maca 7 mors (i.e. all its
inhabitants), Mt. viii. 34; xxi. 10, etc.; aca 7 "Iovdaia,
Mt. iii. 5; add, Mt. xxvii. 25; Mk. v.33; Lk.i. 10; Acts
VATA tex? OLR O eX KILOS NO. Ve Morn Kenl ie OO:
xiii. 2 (ior Kai yyow in their whole compass and ex-
tent); Eph. iv. 16; Col.i.19; ii. 9,19; Phil.i.3; Heb.
ii. 15; Rev.v.6, etc.; the difference between aca 7 Odits
[all] and maca Oris [any] appears in 2 Co. i. 4. was
6 Aads od ros, Lk. ix.13; racav thy dperdny éxeivyny, Mt.
XViii. 32; mwas placed after the noun has the force of a
predicate: tiv xpiow wacav dédaxe, the judgment he hath
given wholly [ef. W. 548 (510)], Jn. v. 22; rhv e€ovaiav
... magay rovet, Rev. xiii. 12; it is placed between the
article and noun [B. §127, 29; W. 549 (510)], as rov
mavra xpovoy, i. e. always, Acts xx. 18; add, Gal. v. 14;
1 Tim. i. 16 [here L T Tr WH Gras]; — with a Plural,
all (the totality of the persons or things designated by the
noun): mavras Tovs apyxtepets, Mt. ii. 4; add, Mt. iv. 8;
xis MrNiv: 139) vil 33; LK. i) 6, 48 Acts x.,.12) 435
Ro. i. 5; xv.11; 1 Co. xii. 26; xv. 25; 2 Co. viii. 18, and
very often; with a demonstr. pron. added, Mt. xxv. 7;
Lk. ii. 19, 51 [here T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the pron.] ;
mavres is placed after the noun: ras roXets macas, the cities
all (of them) [cf. W. u. s.], Mt. ix. 35; Acts viii. 40; add,
Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 35 [here L Tr WH txt. ravrov rav
etc.]; xii.7; Acts viii. 40; xvi.26; Ro. xii.4; 1 Co. vii.
173" x.) 1 xii 2 eve 7); acvis 20); 92 Co. xiii. *2,-12 (a8)
Phil. i. 13; 1Th.v. 26; 2 Tim. iv. 21 [WH br. #.]; Rev.
viii. 3; of wavres foll. by a noun, Acts xix. 7; xxvii. 37;
Tous kata Ta €Oyn mavras Iovdaiovs, Acts xxi. 21 [here L
om. Tr br. z.].
II. without a substantive; 1. mase. and fem.
every one, any one: in the singular, without any addition,
Mk. ix. 49; Lk. xvi. 16; Heb. ii. 9; foll. by a rel. pron.,
nas dotis, Mt. vii. 24; x. 32; mas ds, Mt. xix. 29 [LT Tr
WH Goris}; Gal. iii. 10; mas ds av (€av Tr WH), whoso-
ever, Acts ii. 21; mas é& tov os, Lk. xiv. 33; witha
ptep. which has not the article [W. 111 (106)]: mavrés
axovovtos (if any one heareth, whoever he is), Mt. xiii. 19;
mavtt opeidovrt jutv, every one owing (if he owe) us any-
thing, unless odet\orre is to be taken substantively, every
debtor of ours, Lk. xi. 4; with a ptep. which has the ar-
ticle and takes the place of a relative clause [W. u.s.]:
was 6 dpytCouevos, every one that is angry, Mt. v. 22; add,
Mt. vii.8; Lk. vi.47; Jn. iii. 8, 20; vi.45; Acts x. 43 sq.;
xiii. 39; Ro. i. 16; ii. 10; xii. $8; 1Co. ix. 25; xvi. 163
492
Tas
Gal. iii. 13; 1Jn. ii. 23; iii. 8sq. 6, ete. Plural mdvres,
without any addition, all men: Mt. x. 22; Mk. xiii. 133
Lk. xx. 38; xxi.17; Jn.i. 7; iii. 31* [in 31°G T WH mrg.
om. the cl.]; v.23; vi.453 xii.32; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. x.
12; 1 Co. ix. 19; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); Eph. iii. 9 [here T
WH txt.om. Lbr..]; of a certain definite whole: all
(the people), Mt. xxi. 26; all (we who hold more liberal
views), 1 Co. viii. 1; all (the members of the church),
ibid. 7; by hyperbole i.q. the great majority, the mul-
titude, Jn. iii. 26; all (just before mentioned), Mt. xiv.
20; xxil. 27 sq.; xxvii. 22; Mk. i. 27 [here TTrWH
Gravres], 37; vi. 39,42; [xi. 32 Lchm.]; Lk. i. 63; iv.15;
Jn. ii. 15, 24, and very often; [all (about to be men-
tioned), da mavrwy sc. rav dyiwy (as is shown by the foll.
kat xrd.), Acts ix. 32]. of wavres, all taken together, all
collectively, [cf. W. 116 (110)]: of all men, Ro. xi. 82;
of a certain definite whole, Phil. ii. 21; with the 1 pers.
plur. of the verb, 1 Co. x.17; Eph. iv. 13; with a definite
number, in all [cf. B. § 127, 29]: joav dé of mavres dvdpes
w@oet Sexadvo (or daHdexa), Acts xix. 7; jueba ai raca
uxai dcaxdorat €Bdounkovra €€, Acts xxvii. 37, (éw av8pas
tovs mavtas dvo, Judith iv. 7; éyevovro of mavres ws TeTpa-
kdovol, Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 3; rods mavras eis duryedéous,
id. 4, 7,13 as etvat ras maoas Seka, Ael. v. h. 12,35; see
other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. was, 5 b.; [L. and
S.s.v. C.J]; “relinquitur ergo, ut omnia tria genera sint
causarum,” Cic. de invent. 1,9); of mavres, all those I
have spoken of, 1 Co. ix. 22; 2 Co. v. 14 (15). amavres
dot, all as many as, Mt. xxii. 10; Lk. iv. 40 [here Tr mre.
WH txt. dr.]; Jn. x.8; Acts v.36 sq.; mavres of w. a ptcp.,
all (they) that: Mt. iv. 24; Mk.i.32; Lk. ii. 18, 38; Acts
ii. 44; iv.16; Ro.i. 7; x.12; 1Co.i.2; 2Co.i.1; Eph.
vi. 24; 1 Th.i. 7; 2 Th.i. 10; Heb. iii. 16; 2Jn.1; Rev.
xill. 8; xviii. 19, 24, and often. savres of sc. évres: Mt.
v.15; Lk.v.9; Jn. v.28; Actsii. 39;'v. 17; xvi. 32; Ro.
ix. 6; 2 Tim. i. 15; 1 Pet. v. 14, etc. amavres with per-
sonal and demonst. pronouns [compare W. 548 (510) ]:
nets mavres, Jn. i. 16; Ro. viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 18; Eph. ii.
3; wavres jets, Acts il. 32; x. 33; xxvi. 14; xxviii. 2; Ro.
iv. 16; of wavres pets, 2 Co. v. 10; dpeis mavres, Acts xx.
25; mavres tueis, Mt. xxiii. 8; xxvi. 31; Lk. ix. 48; Acts
xxii. 3; Ro. xv. 33; 2 Co. vii. 15; [Gal. iii. 28 RG L
WH]; Phil. i. 4, 7sq.; 1 Th.i.2; 2 Th. iii. 16,18; Tit.
iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25, etc.; avrot ravres, 1 Co. xv. 10; mavres
avtot, Acts iv. 33; xix.17; xx. 363 odroe wavres, Acts i.
14; xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 13, 39; mavres [L T Gz. ] obra, Acts
ii. 7; of S€ wavres, and they all, Mk. xiv. 64. 2,
Neuter wav, everything, (anything) whatsoever ; a.
in the Sing.: wav 70, foll. by a ptep. [on the neut. in a con-
crete and collective sense cf. B. § 128, 1], 1 Co. x. 25, 27;
Eph. v. 13; 1 Jn. v.43 ray rd se. dv, 1 Jn. ii. 163 wap 6,
Ro. xiv. 23; Jn. vi. 37, 39, [R. V. all that]; Jn. xvii. 2;
may 0, Tt av or eav, whatsoever, Col. iii. 17, and Ree. in 23.
Joined to prepositions it forms adverbial phrases: du
mavrés or Starravrés, always, perpetually, see 8a, A. II. 1
a.; €v mavri, either in every condition, or in every matter,
Phil. iv. 6; 1 Th. v. 18; in everything, in every way, on
every side, in every particular or relation, 2 Co. iv. 8; vii
a
Tas
5, 11, 16; xi. 6,9; Eph. v. 24; mdourigerOa, 1 Co. i. 5;
[mepuocevew], 2 Co. viii. 7; €v mavti cal ev raow (see
pew. b.), Phil. iv. 12. b. Plural raya (without the
article [cf.W. 116 (110); Matthiae § 438 ]) all things; a.
of acertain definite totality or sum of things, the con-
text shewing what things are meant: Mk. iv. 34; vi. 30;
Lk.i. 3; [v.28 T Tr WH); Jn. iv. 25 [here T Tr WH
Gr.]; Ro. viii. 28; 2 Co. vi. 10; Gal. iv. 1; Phil. ii. 14;
1 Th. v. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Tit.i.15; 1Jn.ii. 27; mavra
ipar, all ye do with one another, 1 Co. xvi. 14; mdvra
yivecOa maow, [A. V. to become all things to all men], i.e.
to adapt one’s self in all ways to the needs of all, 1 Co.
ix. 22 L T Tr WH (Ree. ra wavra i. e. in all the ways pos-
sible or necessary); cf. Kypke, Obs. ii. p. 215 sq. B.
accusative mavra [adverbially ], wholly, altogether, in all
ways, in all things, in all respects: Acts xx. 35; 1 Co. ix.
25; x. 333 xi. 2; cf. Matthiae § 425,5; Passow ii. p. 764°;
[L. and S. s. v. D. II. 4]. Y- mavra, in an absolute
sense, all things that exist, all created things: Jn. i. 3;
1 Co. ii. 10; xv. 27; Heb. ii. 8 (and L T Tr WH in iii.
4); Eph. i. 22; Col. i.17; 1 Pet.iv.7; Rev. xxi. 5; (in
Ro. ix. 5 mavrwy is more fitly taken as gen. masce. [but
see the Comm. ad loc.]). mola éoriv évrokn mpotn mavtav
(gen. neut.; Rec. racav), what commandment is first of
all (things), Mk. xii. 28 (€packe Néyor kopvddv mavtav
mpatny dprvida yever Oa, mporepav ths yns, Arstph. av. 472;
Tas Toes . . . EXevOepovv kal Wav TwY padiora” AvTavdpov,
Thue. 4,52; cf. W. § 27,6; [B.§150,6; Green p. 109];
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 538). §. with the article [cf. reff.
in b. above], ra mavra; aa. in an absolute sense, all
things collectively, the totality of created things, the uni-
verse of things: Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6; Eph. iii. 9; iv.
10; Phil. iii. 21; Col. i. 16 sq.; Heb.i. 33 ii.10; Rev. iv.
1; Ta mavta €v maot mAnpovaba, to fill the universe of
things in all places, Eph. i. 23 [Rec. om. ra; but al. take
év mw. here modally (see 6. below), al. instrumen-
tally (see Meyer ad loc.)]. BB. in a relative sense:
Mk. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. ra] (the whole substance of saving
teaching); Acts xvii. 25 [not Rec.*] (all the necessities
of life) ; Ro. viii. 32 (all the things that he can give for
our benefit) ; all intelligent beings [al. include things ma-
terial also], Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 20; it serves by its univer-
sality to designate every class of men, all mankind, [ef. W.
§ 27,5; B. § 128, 1], Gal. iii. 22 (cf. Ro. xi. 32); 1 Tim.
vi. 133; etvae ra [T WH om. ra] ravra, to avail for, be a
substitute for, to possess supreme authority, cal év raow
(i. e. either with all men or in the minds of all [al. take
maow as neut., cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]), Col. iii. 11; ta
7 6 Geds ra [L. Tr WH om. ra] ravra év raow [neut. ace.
to Grimm (as below) ], i. e. that God may rule supreme by
his spiritual power working within all, ‘may be the im-
manent and controlling principle of life,’ 1 Co. xv. 28,
(so in prof. auth. wavra or dravta without the article:
Tavta jv ev Tolar BaBvAwviorst Zomupos, Hdt. 3, 157; ef.
Herm. ad Vig. p. 727; other exx. fr. prof. auth. are given
in Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 230 sq.; Palairet, Observv. p.
407; cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1873, p. 394 sqq.); accns. [adverbially, ef. 8. above] ra
493
TaoXa
wavra, in all the parts [in which we grow (Meyer)], in all
respects, Eph. iv. 15. The Article in ra wavra refers—~
in 1 Co. xi. 12 to the things before mentioned (husband
and wife, and their mutual dependence) ; in 2 Co. iv. 15
to ‘all the things that befall me’; in 1 Co. xv. 27sq.;
Phil. iii. 8, to the preceding mdvra; in Col. iii. 8 ra mdvra
serves to sum up what follows [W. 107 (102)]. é.
nayra 7a foll. by a ptcp. (see mas, mavres, II. 1 above) :
Mt. xviii. 31; Lk. xii. 44; xvii. 10; xviii. 31; xxi. 22;
xxiv. 44; Jn. xvili.4; Acts x. 33; xxiv. 14; Gal. iii. 10;
Ta mavra Ww. ptep., Lk. ix. 7; Eph. v.13; mavra ra sc. dvta
(see was, [wav], mavres, II. 1 and 2 above), Mt. xxiii. 20;
Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; mavra ra &de, sc. dvra, Col.
iv. 9; ra kar’ eye, ibid. 7 [see xara, II. 3 b.]. {. mavta
and ra mayra with pronouns: rd éua mdyra, Jn. xvii. 10;
mavra ra end, Lk. xv. 31; ravra mavta, these things all taken
together [W.548 (510); Fritzsche on Mt. xxiv. 33,34; cf.
Bornemann on Lk. xxi. 36; Lobeck, Paralip. p. 65]: Mt.
iv. 9; vi.33; xiii. 34,51; Lk. xii. 30; xvi. 14; xxi. 36 [m.r.
Lumrg.]; xxiv. 9 [Tdf. m. r.]; Acts vii. 50; Ro. viii. 37;
2 Pet. iii. 11; mavra radra, all these things [reff. as above]:
Mt. vi. 32; xxiv. 8,33 [T Tr txt. r.7.], 34 [Trmrg. r. 7.];
Lk. vii. 18; Acts xxiv. 8; 1 Co. xii. 11; Col. iii. 14; 1 Th.
iv.6; the reading varies also between a. r. and r. 7.in Mt.
xix. 20; xxili. 36; xxiv. 2; mavra Ta cupBeBnkdra Tadra,
Lk. xxiv. 14; ravra a, Jn.iv. [29 T WH Trimrg. (see next
head) ]; iv. 45 [here L Tr WH éca (see next head) ]; v.
20 Acts x. 39's) xiit39: y. mavta daa: Mt. vii. 12;
xili. 46 ; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Jn. iv. 29 [see &
above],45LTrWH; x.41; xvi.15; xvii. 7; Acts iii. 22;
a. doa ay (or eav), Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3; Mk. xi. 24[GL
T Tr WH om. a]; Acts iii. 22. 8. mdvra with prepo-
sitions forms adverbial phrases: mpd mavrav, before or
above all things [see mpé, c.], Jas. v.12; 1 Pet.iv.8. (But
mept tavrov, 3 Jn. 2, must not be referred to this head,
as though it signified above all things; it is rather as
respects all things, and depends on evyoua [apparently a
mistake for evodovcda; yet see repi, I. c. a.], cf. Liicke
ad loc., 2d ed. p. 370 [8d ed. p. 462 sq.; Westcott ad
loc.]; W. 373 (350)). [on da rdvrwv, Acts ix. 32, see
1 above.| év raow, in all things, in all ways, altogether :
1 Dim-fiti.dd; iv. 15! fRec.]; 2 Tim. i. 75, ived 3) Tite
9; Heb. xiii. 4,18; 1 Pet. iv. 11, [see also 2 a. fin. above];
emt maou, sée eri, B. 2 d. p. 233°. xara mavra, in all re-
spects: Acts xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20,22; Heb. ii.17; iv. 15.
III. with negatives; l. od mas, not every
one. 2. mas ov (where ov belongs to the verb), no
one, none, see ov, 2 p. 460°; mas pn (so that uy must be
joined to the verb), no one, none, in final sentences, Jn.
iii. 15 sq.; vi. 39; xii. 46; 1Co.i. 29; w.animpv. Eph.
iv. 29 (1 Mace. v. 42); was... ov py w. the aor. subjunc.
(see pn, IV. 2), Rev. xviii. 22.
mécxa, 73, (Chald. xm05, Heb. nd3, fr. MDD to pass
over, to pass over by sparing; the Sept. also constant-
ly use the Chald. form wacxa, except in 2 Chron. [and
Jer. xxxviili. (xxxi.) 8] where it is aoéx; Josephus has
gdoxa, antt. 5,1,4; 14, 2,1; 17,9, 3; b.j. 2, 1,3), aninde-
clinable noun [W. § 10, 2]; prop. @ passing over ; L
Taoyo
the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered
for the people’s deliverance of oldfrom Egypt),or 2.
the paschal lamb, i.e. the lamb which the Israelites were
accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the
month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory
of that day on which their fathers; preparing to depart
from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb,
and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the
destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their
dwellings (Ex. xii. sq.; Num. ix.; Deut. xvi.) : Ovew 76 7.
(noan onw), Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7, (Ex. xii. 21);
Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Co.
v.73 hayetv 70 m., Mt. xxvi. 17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14; Lk.
xxii. 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; moa IDK, 2 Chr. xxx. 17
sq- 3. the paschal supper: érowadtew to w., Mt.
xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; aoceiy ro x. to cel-
ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pas-
chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the
fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan: Mt.
xxvi. 2; Mk.-xiv. 1; .Lk. ii. 413. xxii. 1; Jn. ii; 13,23;
vi. 4; xi. 55; xii. 15 xiii.1; xviii. 39; xix. 14; Acts xii.
4; memoinke 70 7. he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Heb.
xi. 28 [ef. W. 272 (256); B. 197 (170)]; yiverar 76 ze.
the Passover is celebrated [R. V. cometh], Mt. xxvi. 2.
[See BB.DD. s. v. Passover; Dillmann in Schenkel iv.
p- 392sqq.; and on the question of the relation of the
“Last Supper” to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition
to reff. in BB.DD. u.s.) Kirchner, die Jiidische Passah-
feier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870; Kezl, Com. iiber
Matth. pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. ete. i.
pp. 473-494 ; but esp. Schiirer, Ueber gayeiv rd acya,
akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883).]*
maoxw; 2 aor. émabov; pf. wémovOa (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb.
ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been af-
fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it
is a vox media — used in either a good or a bad sense;
as, 60a memdvOact kal Goa aitois éeyévero, of perils and de-
liverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for AN); hence
kaxas macxew, to suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick
person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WH txt. x. yew (on
the other hand, ed macyew, to be well off, in good case,
often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad
sense, of misfortunes, fo suffer, to undergo evils, to be
afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes.; also in the
other Grk. writ. where it is used absol.): absol., Lk.
xxii. 15; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 3; iii.18; xvii. 3; 1 Co. xii.
26; Heb. ii. 18; ix. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23; iii. 17; iv.
15,19; Heb. xiii. 12; odtyov, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10;
macxew Tt, Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. ix. 12; Lk. xiii. 2; [xxiv.
26]; Acts xxviii. 5; 2 Tim.i.12; [Heb. v. 8 cf. W. 166
(156) a.; B. § 143, 10]; Rev. ii. 10; wa@qpatra macyxew,
2 Co. i. 6; ri amd w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21; Lk. ix. 22;
xvii. 25; macy. ind w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; ri
id twos, Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14; macy. iwép twos, in
behalf of a pers. or thing, Actsix. 16; Phil.i. 29; 2 Th.
i. 5; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect
Tef. W. § 31, 6], capxi, 1 Pet. iv. 1*; év oapxi, ibid.” [yet
GL T Tr WH om. ev; cf. W. 412 (384)]; macy. repi w.
494
TAaTNP
gen. of the thing and imép w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18,
[RGWHnorg.; cf. W.373 (349) ; 383 (358) note]; macy.
51a Sixacoovvyy, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of
pleasant experiences; but nowhere so unless either the
adv. ev or an ace. of the thing be added (izropvqcat, doa
mabdvres €€ avtod (i. €. Oeod) Kal mydixwv evepyeciay pera-
AaBdvres axapiorot mpds avrov yevowro, Joseph. antt. 3, 15,
1; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. II. 5; ~
[L. and S.s.v. II. 2]): Gal. iii. 4, on which see yé, 3 c.
[Comp. : mpo-, cup-racye. | *
Tlarapa, -apwv, ra, [cf. W.176 (166) ], Patara, a mar
time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo:
Acts xxi. 1.[B. D.s. v. Patara; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 99 sq.]*
mwataccw: fut. marafw; 1 aor. émaruéa; Sept. times
without number for 437 (Hiphil of 733, unused in Kal),
also for 3, etc.; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart;
fr. Arstph., Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; al
to strike gently: ri (as a part or a member of the body),
Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol., év payxaipa,
with the sword, Lk. xxii. 49 ; rwa, Mt. xxvi.51; Lk. xxii.
50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils,
etc.: as with a deadly disease, ria, Acts xii. 23; rua ev
w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 GL T TrWH; xix. 15,
(Gen. viii. 21; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. xii. 23, etc.). 3.
by a use solely biblical, to smite down, cut down, to kill,
slay : rwa, Mt. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (after Zech. xiii.
7); Acts vii. 24.*
matéw, -@; fut. ratnow; Pass., pres. ptep. marovpevos;
1 aor. éxarnOnv; fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down;
Sept. for 74, ete. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush
with the feet: thv Anvov, Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15, (Judg. ix.
27; Neh. xiii. 15; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 33; Lam.i.15). b.
to advance by setting foot upon, tread upon: éerave bpewv
kai oxopriov Kat ext macav tiv Siva Tod €xOpod, to en-
counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina-
tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart
the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. xe. (xci.)
13). c. to tread under foot, trample on, i. e. treat with
insult and contempt: to desecrate the holy city by devas-
tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan.
viii. 13); see xatamaréw. [COMP.: KaTa-, mept-, €u-Tept-
matéw. | *
warhp [fr. r. pa; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder;
(Curtius § 348) ], rarpds, -rpl, -répa, voc. marep [for which
the nom. 6 marnp is five times used, and (anarthrous)
narnp in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25 LT Tr WH;
ef. B. § 129,5; W. § 29,2; WH. App. p. 158], plur.
marépes, Tatépav, matpdat (Heb. i.1), marépas, 6,[fr. Hom.
down], Sept. for ax, a father ; 1. prop., i. q. gener-
ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest
ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq.; viii. 21; Lk.i.17; Jn.
iv.53; Acts vii. 143; 1 Co. v. 1, ete. ; of marépes THs capkds,
fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. te
6 marip Tay mvevpdtrwv), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both par
ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof. auth., cf. Delitzsch
ad loc.); or —_b. a more remote ancestor, the founder
of a race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather: so
Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. i. 73; xvi. 24; Jn. viii
TaTyHp
89, 53; Acts vii. 2; Ro. iv. 1 Rec., 17 sq.,etc.; Isaac, Ro.
ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, Mk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32;
plur. fathers i.e. ancestors, forefathers, Mt. xxiii. 30, 32;
Lk. vi. 23, 26; xi. 47sq.; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 31; Acts iii. 13,
25; 1 Co. x. 1, etc., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; so too Ny38, 1 K. viii. 21; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 ete.; in
the stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22;
Ro. ix. 5; xi. 28. c. i. q. one advanced in years, a
senior: 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph.; _—_a.._ the origi-
nator and transmitter of anything: marnp mepirouns, Ro.
iv. 12; the author of a family or society of persons ani-
mated by the same spirit as himself: so 7. mavtav tay
motevovtwy, Ro. iv. 11, cf. 12, 16, (1 Mace. ii. 54); one
who has infused his own spirit into others, who actuates
and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44; the phrase
€x matpds Twos eivat is used of one who shows himself as
like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in-
herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who
stands in a father’s place, and looks after another in a
paternal way: 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf.
Sophocles, Lex. s. v.], applied to a. teachers, as those
to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training
they have received: Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K.
MMe 12/5) Vie 20): B. the members of the Sanhedrin,
whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and
experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the
interests of others: Acts vii. 2; xxii. 1; cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. i. p. 7*. 3. God is called the Father, a.
tav porar, [A. V. of lights i. e.] of the stars, the heaven-
ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler,
Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings,
whether angels or men, because he is their creator, pre-
server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GL T
Tr WH; rov mrvevpdror, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9;
and, for the same reason, of all men (matjp tov mavrés
avOparav yevous, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 24): so in the Syn-
optic Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36;
Lk. vi. 36; xi. 2; xii. 30, 32; Jn. iv. 21, 23; Jas. iii. 9;
6 matnp 6 ev (Tots) ovpavois, the Father in heaven, Mt. v.
16, 45, 48, vi. 1,93; vii. 11, 21; xviii. 14; Mk. xi. 25, 26
RGL,; Lk. xi. 13 [e& otpavod; cf. B. § 151, 2 a.; W. § 66,
6]; 6 mar. 6 ovpanos, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26,
32; xv. 13. c. of Christians, as those who through
Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti-
mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread
him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their
reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com-
mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial
brightness in Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6; in John’s use of the
term it seems to include the additional idea of one who
by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be-
gotten them anew to a life of holiness (see yevvaw, 2 d.):
absol., 2 Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1,14 (13), 16;
iii. 1; Ocds x. matip mavrav, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6;
with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. § 34, 3b.; B.
§ 132, 10], 6 mar. ray oixtippar, 2 Co. i. 3; trys 86éns, Eph.
1. 17; on the phrases 6 Geds x. matnp nav, beds matnp,
etc., see Oeds, 3 p. 288%. d. the Father of Jesus Christ,
49
5 TATpLa
as one whom God has united to himself in the closest
bond of love and intimacy, made acquainted with his
purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men
the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching
of John) made to share also in his own divine nature ;
he is so called, a. by Jesus himself: simply 6 warjp
(opp. to 6 vids), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21sq.; Jn. v. 20-
23, 26, 36 sq.; x. 15, 30, ete.; 6 marnp pov, Mt. xi. 27;
Olio CLF 8.0-985 WIR ID):ao-< VIB Abia ve 1g abi IEE ZC)E oe
18, 32, and often in John’s Gospel; Rev. ii. 28 (27); iii.
5, 21; with 6 ev rois ovpavots added, Mt. vii. 11, 21; x.
32sq.; xii. 50; xvi.17; xviii. 10,195; 6 otpduos, Mt. xv-
13; 6 émovpauos, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. _B. by the apostles:
Ro. xv. 6; 2Co.i.3; xi. 31; Eph.i. 3; iii. 14 Rec.; Col.
i. 3; Heb. i. 5; 1 Pet. i.3; Rev. 1.6. See [Tholuek
(Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d.
N. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes
als d. Vaters, (Gottingen, 1865); Westcott, Epp. of St.
John, pp. 27-34, and] below in vids and réxvov.
Tldrpos, -ov, 7, Patmos, a small and rocky island in the
/Hgean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thue. 3,
33; Strab. 10 p. 488; Plin. h. n. 4, 23); now called Patmv
or [chiefly “in the middle ages” (Howson) ] Palmosa and
having from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants
(cf. Schubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425—
443; Bleck, Vorless. iib. die Apokalypse, p. 157; Kneucker
in Schenkel iv. p. 403sq.; [BB. DD.s.v.]). Init John,
the author of the Apocalypse, says the revelations were
made to him of the approaching consummation of God’s
kingdom: Rev. i. 9. It has been held by the church,
ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. c. Tryph. § 81
p- 308 a. ef. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon-
icity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv. haer. 5, 30, that
this John is the Apostle; see Iwavyys, 2 and 6.*
matpadwas (Attic marpadoias, Arstph., Plat., Dem. p.
732, 14; Aristot., Leian.), LT Tr WH sarpod@as (see
Pntpad@as), -ov, 6, a parricide: 1 ‘Tim. i. 9.*
marpwd, -as, 7), (fr. marnp) 1. lineage running back
to some progenitor, ancestry: Hdt. 2,143; 3,75. 2.
a race or tribe, i.e. a group of families, all those who in @
given people lay claim to a cémmon origin: eiot aitéwv
(BaBvAwviev) marptai tpeis, Hdt. 1, 200. The Israelites
were distributed into (twelve) nivn, PvaAai, tribes, de-
scended from the twelve sons of Jacob; these were
divided into njmawn, marprai, deriving their descent
from the several sons of Jacob’s sons; and these in turn
were divided into NjANT M3, otkot, houses (or families) 5
cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 193; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWB.
s. v. Stimme; [Ke7l, Archaeol. § 140]; hence e& oixov
kat matpias Aavid, i. e. belonging not only to the same
‘house’ (marpia) as David, but to the very ‘family’ of
David, descended from David himself, Lk. ii. 4 (aira: aé
marptat Tov viev Dupedv, Ex. vi. 15 3 6 avyp adtns Mavacons
ths puAjs avris Kal Tis matpias adtys, Judith viii. 2; rar
uAGy xara rarpias avrav, Num. i. 16; otkoe marpioy, Ex.
xii. 3; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 1;
teel4so0: 11,.8,.10); 3. family in a wider sense,
i. q. nation, people: Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28; Ps. xxi
TAaTplapyns
(xxii.) 28) ; waca rarpia ev ovpavois (i. e. every order of
angels) kai ért ys, Eph. iii. 15.*
TaTpidpx ys, -ov, 6, (warpid and dpy@ ; see éxatovrdpxns),
a Hellenistic word [W. 26], a patriarch, founder of a
tribe, progenitor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the
twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of
Israel, Acts vii. 8sq.; of Abraham, Heb. vii. 4; of the
same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25;
used for NJANH WR, 1 Chr. xxiv. 31 [but the text here
is uncertain]; for DAW WW, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22; for
nixon Ww, 2 Chr. xxiii. 20.*
TaTpLK6s, -7), -dv, (matnp), paternal, ancestral, i.q. handed
down by or received from one’s fathers: Gal. i. 14.
(Thue., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept.) [S¥N. see marp@os,
fin.'|*
martpis, -iSos, 7, (marnp), one’s native country; a.
as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, one’s father-land, one’s
(own) country: Jn. iv. 44 [cf. yap, Il. 1]; i. q. a fixed
abode (home [R. V. a country of their own], opp. to the
land where one wapemdnyet), Heb. xi. 14. b. one’s
native (own) place i.e. city: Mt. xiii. 54,57; Mk. vi. 1,
4; Lk. iv. 23, [24]; so Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 (€or dé
pot ‘IepoodAvpa tratpis) ; Joseph. antt.10, 7,3; 6,4,6; 6
marpis 9 AxvAnia nv, Hdian. 8, 3, 2 (1 ed. Bekk.).*
IlarpéBas [al. -Bas, as contr. fr. marpoBios; cf. B. D.
s.v.; Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 176 sq.; Chandler § 32],
ace. -av [ef. B. 19 (17) sq.; W. § 8, 1], Patrobas, a cer-
tain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.*
Tatpodwas, See maTpadg@as.
jTartpo-Trapa-Soros, -ov, (maTnp and mapadidwp), handed
down from one’s fathers or ancestors: 1 Pet.i. 18 [B. 91
(79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17,4; Dion. Hal. antt. 5,
48; Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 34; Euseb. h. e. 4, 23, 10;
10, 4, 16.) *
matpwos (poetic and Ionic rarpaios), -a, -ov, (marnp),
fr. Hom. down, descending from father to son or from
ancestors to their posterity as it were by right of inherit-
ance; received from the fathers: vopos, Acts xxii. 3 (2
Mace. vi. 1; Ael. v.h. 6,10); Oeos, Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace.
xii. 19; and often in Grk. writ. Oeot rarp., Zeds rarp.
ete.); 7a 2n ra w. Acts ‘xxviii. 17 (Justin dial. c. Tr.
c.63; marp. os, Ael. v.h. 7,19 var.).*
[Syn. tratp@os, warpikds: on the distinction of the
grammarians (see Photius, Suidas, Ammonius, etc. s. vv.)
ace. to which warpgos is used of property descending from
father to son, marpixés of persons in friendship or feud,
etc., see Lilendt, Lex. Soph. ii. p. 530 sq.; L. and S.s. v.
matpoos; Schmidt ch. 154.]
Tlatdos, -ov, 6, (a Lat. prop. name, Paulus), Paul.
Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T.,
viz. 1. Sergius Paulus, a Roman propraetor [pro-
consul; cf. Sépyios, and B. D. s. v. Sergius Paulus], con-
verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul:
Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew
name was Saul (see SaovA, Saddos). He was born at
Tarsus in Cilicia (Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39; xxii. 3) of Jew-
ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee
(Acts xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen; hence he himself
496
Tave
was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28; xvi. 37).
He was endowed with remarkable gifts, both moral and
intellectual. He learned the trade of a oxnvomows (q. V-)-
Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was thoroughly
indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by the Pharisee
Gamaliel (Acts xxii. 3; v. 34). At first he attacked
and persecuted the Christians most fiercely; at length,
on his way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to
Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and
undaunted preacher of Christ and the founder of many
Christian churches. And not only by his unwearied la-
bors did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of
the friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which
appears from his immortal Epistles, that he caught per-
fectly the mind of his heavenly Master and taught most
unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all
men who repose a living faith in Jesus Christ, and
that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly incompatible
with the spiritual liberty of which Christ is the author.
By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon himself the
deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year
57 [or 58 acc. to the more common opinion ; yet see the
chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts; Farrar,
St. Paul, ii. excurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment;
and as a captive he was carried first to Cesarea in Pal-
estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered
martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of those
daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi-
astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e
2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem,
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7; can. Murator. (cf. Westcott, Canon,
5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paul, released
from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in
Spain and Asia Minor; and subsequently, imprisoned a
second time, to have been at length put to death at Rome
in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On
this point cf. Meyer on Ro., Introd. §1; Harnack on
Clem. Rom. 1. c.; Lghtft. ibid. p. 49 sq.; Holtzmann, Die
Pastoralbriefe, Einl. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; reff. in Heini-
chen’s note on Euseb. h. e. as above; v. Hofmann, Die
heilige Schrift Neuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sqq. ;
Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. excurs. viii.; Schaff; Hist. of
Apostolic Christ. (1882) p. 331sq.] Paul is mentioned
in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his
pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. respect-
ing his life and its debatable points see the art. Paulus by
Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356-
389.]
mwavw: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. mavodr@ (1 Pet. iii.
10); Mid., pres. ravoua; impf. emavopunv; fut. mavcopat
(see dvaravw and éravaravw [and on the forms raja ete.
ef. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p.
xviii. note, also his ed. of the ‘Teaching’ 4, 2 note (p. 97)]);
pf. rémavpa; 1 aor. émavodunv; fr. Hom. down; to make
to cease or desist: ti or tua amé twos, to restrain [A. V.
refrain] a thing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10,
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; ef. W. § 30,6; [(cf. 326
(305)) ; B. § 132, 5]. Mid. Sept. for ban, nba, naw,
ITddos
zte. to cease, leave off, [ef. W. 253 (238)]: Lk. viii. 24;
Acts xx. 1; 1 Co. xiii. 8; the action or state desisted
from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptep. (cf.
Matthiae § 551 d.; Passows. v. II. 3; [L. and S. I. 4];
W. § 45,4; [B.§ 144, 15]): émavoaro AadGy, Lk. v. 4 (Gen.
xviii. 33; Num. xvi.31; Deut. xx.9); add, Acts v. 42;
vi. 18; xiii. 10; xx. 31; xxi. 82; Eph. i.16; Col. 1.9;
Heb. x. 2; the ptep. is wanting, as being evident fr. the
context, Lk. xi.1. Pass. [ef. W. § 39, 3 and N. 3] wémav-
rat duaprtias, hath got release [A. V. hath ceased] from sin,
i. e. is no longer stirred by its incitements and seduc-
tions, 1 Pet. iv. 1; ef. Kypke, Observv. ad loc., and W.
u.s.; [B. § 132,5; but WH txt. duaprias, dat., unto sins.
Comp. : dva-, éx-ava-, cvv-ava- (-yar), kata- rave ].*
Tlaos [perh. fr. r. meaning ‘to cozen’; ef. Pape, Ei-
gennamen, s. v. |, -ov, 7, Paphos [now Baffa], a maritime
city on the island of Cyprus, with a harbor. It was the
residence of the Roman proconsul. “Old Paphos” [now
Kuklia], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of
Venus [ Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S, E. of it
(Mela 2, 7; Plin. h. n. 5, 31.35; Tac. hist. 2, 2): Acts
xiii. 6, 13. [ Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]*
maxtvw: 1 aor. pass. emayivOnv; (fr. maxvs [thick,
stout]; cf. Bpadive; raxvvw); to make thick; to make fat,
fatten: ra oopara, Plat. Gorg. p. 518 ¢.; Body, de rep. p.
343 b.; tov, Xen. oec. 12, 20. Metaph. to make stupid
(to render the soul dull or callous): ras uxas, Plut. mor. p.
995 d. [i. e. de esu carn. 1, 6,3]; vodv, Philostr. vit. Apoll.
1,8; mayeis ras diavoias, Hdian. 2, 9, 15 [11 ed. Bekk.];
tyyv Scavoray, Ael. v. h. 13, 15 (Lat. pingue ingenium) [ef.
W. 18]; emayivOn 9 Kapdia (Vulg. incrassatum est cor
[A. V. their heart is waxed gross}): Mt. xiii. 15; Acts
Xxviii. 27, after Is. vi. 10 (for 25 DWN). *
wédn, -ns, 7, (fr. ré€a the foot, instep), a fetter, shackle
for the feet: Mk. v. 4; Lk. viii. 29. (From Hom. down;
Sept.) *
amedivos, -7), -dv, (ediov [a plain], méSov [the ground ]),
level, plain: Lk. vi. 17. (Xen., Polyb., Plut., Dio Cass.,
al.; Sept.) *
melevw; (meds, gq. v-); to travel on foot (not on horse-
back or in a carriage), or (if opp. to going by sea) by
land: Acts xx. 13. (Xen., Isocr., Polyb., Strab., al.) *
me{y (dat. fem. fr. me(ds, q. v-; cf. Matthiae § 400), on
foot or (if opp. to going by sea) by land: Mt. xiv. 13
RGTr Ltxt. WH txt.; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thuc., Xen.,
Dem., al.) *
melds, -7) -dv, [méCa; see rédn], fr. Hom. down; 1.
on foot (as opp. to riding). 2. by land (as opp. to
going by sea): nKodovdnoav mefoi, Mt. xiv. 13 T Lmrg.
WH nrg. (so cod. Sin. also) for R G egy, [cf. W. § 54,
2; B. § 123, 9]. (Sept. for or) a and myaa.)*
meBapxéw, -@; 1 aor. ptep. metOapynoas ; (melOapxos;
and this fr. mei@ouar and dpyn); to obey (a ruler or a
superior): Oea, Acts v. 29, 32; magistrates, Tit. iii. 1
[al. take it here absol. to be obedient]; 1rd Ady@ Tis
Sixavoovvns, Polye. ad Philipp. 9,1; [A. V. to hearken to]
one advising something, Acts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen.,
Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al.; on the very freq. use
497
qel0w
of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s.
w. p. 43 [esp. p. 108].)*
meBos [WH mds; see I, e], -7, -dv, (fr. reid, like
etdds fr. HeiSouat (cf. W. 96 (91)]), persuasive : év mevOois
Adyors, 1 Co. ii. 4 [ef. B. 73]. Not found elsewhere [W.
24). The Grks. say mavds; as mOavot ASyot, Joseph.
antt. 8, 9, and often in Grk. auth. See Passow s. v.
mOavos, le.; [L. and S. ibid. 1.2; WH. App. p. 153].*
Tle00, -ovs, 7, 1. Peitho, prop. name of a goddess,
lit. Persuasion; Lat. Swada or Suadela. 2. per-
suasive power, persuasion: 1 Co. ii. 4 év metBot— acc. to
certain inferior authorities. [On the word, see Miiller’s
note on Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 21, 3. (Hes., Hdt., al.)]*
me(Ow [ (fr. r. meaning ‘to bind’; allied w. ziotts, fides,
foedus, ete.; Curtius §327; Vanitek p. 592)]; impf. ére-
Gov; fut. reiow; 1 aor. érevoa; 2 pf. érora; plupf. éme-
moidew (Lk. xi. 22); Pass. [or Mid., pres. mei@ouat; impf.
érecOounv |; pf. mémevopat; 1 aor. éreioOnv; 1 fut. mec Oy-
copat (Lk. xvi. 31); fr. Hom. down; 1. Active; a.
to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe:
absol. reioas peréotnoev ixaviv dydov, Acts xix. 26; ri, to
cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth), Acts xix.
8 RGT [ef. B. 150 (131) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); mepé
w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH; rua, one, Acts
XViii. 4; rivd tt, one of a thing, Acts xxviii. 23 Ree.
(Hat. 1, 163; Plat. apol. p. 37 a., and elsewhere; [ef. B.
u.s.]); Tuva mepi tivos, concerning a thing, ibid. GLT
Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, w. an
ace. of a pers., to make friends of, win one’s favor, gain
one’s good-will, Acts xii. 20; or to seek to win one, strive
to please one, 2 Co. v.11; Gal. i. 10; to conciliate by per-
suasion, Mt. xxviii. 14 [here T WH om. Tr br. airév];
Acts xiv. 19; i.q. to tranquillize [A. V. assure], tas xap-
Sias pov, 1 Jn. iii.19. c. to persuade unto i. e. move
or induce one by persuasion to do something : twa foll. by
an inf. [B. § 139, 46], Acts xiii. 43; xxvi. 28, (Xen. an.
1,3, 19; Polyb. 4, 64,2; Diod. 11, 15; 12, 39; Joseph.
antt. 8, 10, 3); twa foll. by ta [ef. W. 338 (317); B.
§ 139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. 2.
Passive and Middle [ef. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be
persuaded, to suffer one’s self to be persuaded; to be in-
duced to believe: absol., Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii. 4; to
have faith, Heb. xi. 13 Rec.; revi, ina thing, Acts xxviii.
24; to believe, sc. rt, Heb. xiii. 18 LT Tr WH. réree-
cpai te [on the neut. ace. cf. B. § 131, 10] mepi revos
(gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a
person, Heb. vi. 9 [A. V. we are persuaded better things
of you, ete.]; memecopévos eipi, to have persuaded one’s
self, and eiOonat, to believe, [cf. Eng. to be persuaded],
foll. by ace. w. inf., Lk. xx. 6; Acts xxvi. 26; mémewopat
rt, Ro. viii. 38; 2 Tim. i. 5, 12; with év cupim added (see
év, I.6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14; mepi tuvos drt, Ro. xv. 14. b.
to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with: twi, one, Acts v.
36 sq. 39 (40); xxiii. 21; xxvii. 11; Ro. ii. 8; Gal. iii. 1
Rec.; v. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. iii. 3. 3. 2 pf. wé-
moda (Sept. mostly for NVA, also for FON, {yw Niphal
of the unused yw), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be
confident : foll. by acc. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19; by 6m, Heb.
TI etXatos 498
xiii. 18 Rec.; by dre with a preparatory adré rodro [W.
§ 23, 5], Phil. i. 6; rodro memodas oida Gru, ibid. 25; mé-
o.da w. a dat. of the pers. or the thing in which the confi-
dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. T.
see B. § 133, 5; W. 214 (201); § 33, d.]): Phil. i. 14;
Philem. 21, (2 K. xviii. 20; Prov. xiv. 16; xxviii. 26; Is.
xxviii. 17; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24; Sap. xiv. 29); éavr@
foll. by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7; & ru, to trust in, put confi-
dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u.s.], Phil. iii. 3,4;
«upio foll. by dre, Phil. ii. 24; emi run, Mt. xxvii. 43 L
txt. WH mrg.; Mk. x. 24 [where T WH om. Tr mrg. br.
the cl.]; Lk. xi. 22; xviii. 9; 2 Co.i. 9; Heb. ii. 13, (and
very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52; 2 Chr. xiv. 11;
Ps. ii. 13; Prov. iii.5; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); émi twa, Mt.
xxvii. 43 where L txt. WH mrg. emi w. dat. (Is. xxxvi.
5; Hab. ii. 18; 2 Chr. xvi. 7sq., etc.); émi teva foll. by
6rt, 2 Co. ii. 3; 2 Th. iii. 4; els twa foll. by dre, Gal. v.
10. [Comp.: dva-meidw. |*
TleAaros, see [vAaros [and cf. et, e].
mevaw, -@, inf. rewav (Phil. iv. 12); fut. meadow (Lk.
vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16); 1 aor. éreivaoa, — for the earlier
forms rewhv, rewnow, ereivnoa; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61
and 204; W.§13, 3b.; [B. 37 (32) ; 44 (88) ]; see also
dipdaw; (fr. wetva hunger; [see révns]) ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 17; to hunger, be hungry; a. prop. :
Mi sive Qrexagle oe xxi Oi exxytOo ue 4d MKT
25; xi. 12; Lk. iv. 2; vi. 3, 25; i.q. to suffer want, Ro.
xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34; to be needy, Lk. i. 53; vi. 21;
Phil. iv. 12; in this same sense it is joined with dupav,
1 Co. iv. 11; in figurative disc. ob meway k. ov dupar is
used to describe the condition of one who is in need of
nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva-
tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crave
ardently, to seek with eager desire: w. acc. of the thing,
thy Sikacocvyny, Mt. v. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a
gen., as ypnudrav, Xea. Cyr. 8, 3,39; cuppayoyr, 7, 5, 50;
€raivou, oec. 13,9; ct. W. § 30, 10, b. fin.; [B. § 131, 4];
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 6, and see duyrdo, 2).*
teipa, -as, 7, (meupaw), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi-
ment, attempt: met,av AapBavew twWds, i. q. to attempt a
thing, to make trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com-
mon in prof. auth. ; ef. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18; Cyr. 3, 3, 38;
see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488; Plat.
Protag. p. 342a.; Gorg. p. 448 a.; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5;
Ael. y. h. 12, 22; often in Polyb., ef. Schweighduser, Lex.
Polyb. p. 460; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56; [other exx. in
Bleek on Heb. 1. e.; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p- 146]),
Gahacons, to try whether the sea can be crossed dry-shod
like the land, Heb. xi. 29; to have trial of a thing, i. e.
to experience, learn to know by experience, paoriywv, Heb.
xi. 36 (often in Polyb.; rAs mpovoias, Joseph. antt. 2,
5, 1).*
metpatw (a form found several times in Hom. and Apoll.
Rhod. and later prose, for wetpdw [which see in Veitch]
more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. ézeipatov ; 1
aor. emeipaga; Pass., pres. wetpdfouar; 1 aor. éreipdcOnv;
pf. ptep. memeipacuevos (Heb. iv. 15; see metpdw,1); 1
gor. mid. 2 pers. sing. éretpdow (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.); Sept.
TELPAT {LOS
for 1D}; to try, i. e. 1. to try whether a thing can
be done; to attempt, endeavor: with an inf., Acts ix. 26
LT Tr WHi3:xvi-}2; xxiv.6. 2. to try, make trial
of, test: twd, for the purpose of ascertaining his quality,
or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a.
in a good sense: Mt. xxii. 35'[al. refer this to b.J; Jn.
vi. 6; [2Co. xiii. 5]; Rev. ii. 2. b. ina bad sense:
to test one maliciously, craftily to put to the proof his
feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1; xix. 3; xxii. 18,35; Mk.
Vili. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 23 (where G T WH
Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words ri pe mewpacere) ; Jn.
viii. 6. c. to try or test one’s faith, virtue, charac-
ter, by enticement to sin; hence ace. to the context i. q.
to solicit to sin, to tempt: Jas. i. 13 sq.; Gal. vi. 1; Rev.
ii. 10; of the temptations of the devil, Mt.iv. 1,3; Mk.
i. 13; Lk. iv. 2; 1 Oo. vii.5; 1 Th. iii5; hence, 6 mespd-
¢wv, subst., Vulg. tentator, etc., the tempter: Mt.iv.3; 1Th.
ii. De d. After the O. T. usage a. of God;
to inflict evils upon one in order to prove his character
and the steadfastness of his faith: 1 Co. x. 13; Heb. ii. 18;
iv. 15 [see metpaw]; xi. 17, 37 [where see WH. App.];
Rev. iii. 10, (Gen. xxii. 1; Ex. xx. 20; Deut. viii. 2; Sap.
iii. 5; xi. 10(9); Judith viii. 25 sq.). B. Men are
said mretpd¢ew tov bedv,— by exhibitions of distrust, as
though they wished to try whether he is not justly dis-
trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God’s
justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were,
to give proof of his perfections: Acts xv. 10; Heb. iii. 9
RG, (Ex. xvii. 2,7; Num. xiv. 22; Ps. xxvii. (Ixxviii.)
41, 56; ev. (evi.) 14, etc.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on Sap.
p- 49); se. rov Xprordy [LT Tr txt. WH r. xipror], 1 Co.
x. 9 [but Lmrg. TWH mrg. efereipacay]; 1d mvedpa
kupiov, Acts v. 9; absol. metpagerv ev Soxiacia (see Soxipa-
cia), Heb. iii. 9 LT Tr WH. [On meipagfo (as compared
with Soxuatw), see Trench § lxxiv.; cf. Cremer s. v.
Comp. : éx-rretpa Co. | *
Teipar pds, -od, d, (meipatw, q. V-), Sept. for 700, an ex-
periment, attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tentatio) ; a.
univ. trial, proving: Sir. xxvii. 5, 7; Tov metpaopoy bpav
év tH capxi pov, the trial made of you by my bodily con-
dition, since this condition served to test the love of the
Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 LT Tr WH (cf. b.
below, and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. b. spec. the trial
of man’s fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc.: 1 Pet.
iv. 12; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris-
ing from the desires or from outward circumstances,
Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. x. 13; tropeévewy metpacpdr, Jas. i. 12;
an internal temptation to sin, 1 Tim. vi.9; of the temp-
tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the
Messiah from his divine errand, Lk.iv.13; of a condi-
tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed
to sin, or to a lapse from faith and holiness: in the
phrases eiogepew tiva eis metp., Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4; eio-
épyecOa cis m., Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38 [here TWH
épy-]; Lk. xxii. 40,46; adversity, affliction, trouble, [cf.
our trial], sent by God and serving to test or prove one’s
faith, holiness, character: plur., Lk. xxii. 28; Acts xx.
19; Jas. i.2; 1 Pet. i.6; rov metp. pou Tov €v TH wapKi pov,
qTelpaw
my temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv.
14 Ree. [but see a. above]; Spa rov metpacpod, Rev. iii.
10; ek m. preva, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3;
Sir. ii. 15 vi. 7; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1; 1 Macc. ii. 52). Cc.
‘temptation’ (i.e. trial) of God by men, i.e. rebellion
against God, by which his power and justice are, as it
were, put to the proof and challenged to show them-
selves: Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi. 16; ix. 22; Ps. xciv. (xcv.)
8). Cf. F-ied. B. Koester, Vie bibl. Lehre von der Ver-
suchung. Gotha, 1859. (The word has not yet been
found in prof. auth. exc. Diosc. praef. 1:
gw. experiments made on diseases.) *
mepdw: impf. mid. 3 pers. (sing. and plur), éme:paro,
énetpavto ; pf. pass. ptcp. memerpapevos (see below) ; com.
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; fo try; i.e. 1. to make
a trial, to attempt, [A. V. to assay], foll. by an infin. ;
often so fr. Hom. down; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26
RG; xxvi. 21, (Xen. symp. 4, 7; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, etc.; often
in Polyb.; Ael. v. h. 1,34; 2 Mace. ii. 23; 3 Macc.i. 25;
4 Mace. xii. 2, ete.); hence remetpapeévos taught by trial, ex-
perienced, Heb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([Rec."],
Tdf. formerly) [see below, and cf. wetpaga, d. a. ]. 2:
In post- Hom. usage with the acc. of a pers. to test, make
trial of one, put him to the proof: his mind, sentiments,
temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in-
duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf.
Passow s. v.3a.; [L. and 8. s.v. A. IV. 2]. Hence
merecpapevos in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained
by some [cf. W. § 15 Note ad fin.], tempted to sin; but
the Pass. in this sense is not found in Grk. writ.; see
Delitzsch ad loc.*
Tecpovy, -7s, 7, (weiOw, q.v.; like mAnopovn), persua-
sion: in an active sense [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as
below] and contextually, treacherous or deceptive persua-
sion, Gal. v. 8 [ef. W. § 68, 1 fin.]. (Found besides in
Ignat. ad Rom. 3, 3 longer recens.; Justin apol. 1, 53
init.; [Irenzus 4, 33, 7]; Epiph. 30, 21; Chrysost. on
1 Th. i. 3; Apollon. Dys. syntax p. 195, 10 [299, 17];
Eustath. on Hom. Il. a’. p. 21, 46 vs. 22; 99, 45 vs. 442;
e. p. 637, 5 vs. 131; and Od. x’. p. 785, 22 vs. 285.) *
méAayos, -ous, Td, [by some (e. g. Lob. Pathol. Proleg.
p- 305) connected with mAaé, i. e. the ‘flat’ expanse (cf.
Lat. aequor); but by Curtius § 367 et al. (cf. Vaniéek
p- 515) with mijooo, i. e. the ‘ beating’ waves (cf. our
‘plash’)], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. the sea i.e. the
high sea, the deep, (where ships sail; accordingly but a
part of the sea, @adaoca, Aristot. Probl. sect. 23 quaest.
3 [p. 931°, 14 sq.] €v TH Atpem odAlyn eotiv 7 Oadracaa, ev
8€ TO meAayet Babeia. Hence) rd méAayos ths Oadacons,
aequor maris, [A. V. the depth of the sea; cf. Trench
§ xiil.], Mt. xviii. 6 (so too Apollon. Rhod. 2, 608; zé-
Aayos aiyaias ddds, Eur. Tro. 88; Hesych. wédayos:.. .
BvOés, wAdros Oadacons. Cf. W. 611 (568); [Trench
u. s.]). b. univ. the sea: ro méX. 76 Kata THY KiAkiav,
Acts xxvii. 5 (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. wé-
Aayos, 1; [L. and S. s. v. I.]).*
meAek({w: pf. pass. ptep. memeAextopevos; (meAexus, an
axe or two-edged hatchet); to cu’ oi with an aze, to
‘ > A ~
Tovs emt trabav
499
WEVNS
behead: twd, Rev. xx.4. (Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph.
antt. 20,5,4; Plut. Ant. 36; [cf. W. 26 (25) ].)*
méparros, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], fifth: Rev. vi. 9; ix.
Tevleel Os xxls 20s"
mepro; fut. méuyw; 1 aor. érena [on its epistolary
use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198
(172): Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11];
Pass., pres. wéymopuar; 1 aor. éméupOnv (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for nw; to send: twa, absol., one
to do something, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. vii. 19; xvi. 24; Jn.i.
22; vii. 18; xiii. 16,20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. dmoaréAX.];
2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, ete.; riva or tivas is omitted
where the ptep. is joined to another finite verb, as méuas
amexepadice Tov "lwdavynv, he sent (a deputy) and be-
headed John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31; xxiii. 30,
(for other exx. see droa7eAXo, 1 d.); in imitation of the
Hebr. “5 V3 NI (1S. xvi. 20; 2S. xi. 14; xii. 25; 1K.
ii. 25) we find mépvas d:a tev pabnray avtov, he eu by
his disciples (unless with Fritzsche, and Bornemann,
Schol. in Lue. p. lxv., one prefer to take mépyas absol.
and to connect 6:4 7. pad. with the foll. etrev [so Mey.,
but see (7te Aufl. ed. Weiss), Keil, De Wette, al.]), Mt.
xi. 2 LT Tr WH, (so dmooreitas 81a rod ayyé dou, Rev.
i. 1). Teachers who come forward by God’s command
and with his authority are said to be (or to have been)
sent by God: as, John the Baptist, Jn. i. 33; Jesus, Jn.
iv. 34; v. 23 sq. 30, 37; vi. 38-40, 44; vii. 16, 28, etc.;
Ro. viii. 8; the Holy Spirit, rhetorically personified, Jn.
xiv. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7. uvd, w. dat. of the pers. to whom
one is sent: 1 Co. iv. 17; Phil. ii.195 teva tem mapa tivos
(prop. to send one to one from one’s abode [see zrapa, I.
a.]), Jn. xv. 26; pds twa, Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 7; Acts x.
33; xv. 25; xxiii. 80; [xxv. 21 RG]; Eph. vi. 22; Phil.
ii. 25 ; Col. iv. 8; Tit. iii. 12; with the ptep. Aéywy added
(Hebr. 35x now, Gen. xxxviii. 25; 2 S. xiv. 32, etc.),
said by messenger (Germ. liess sagen), Lk. vii. 6, 19;
twa eis w. an ace. of place, Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xv. 15; xvi. 27;
Acts x. 5; the end, for which one is sent is indicated —
by the prep. e’s, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 14;
by an infin., Jn. i. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 3; Rev. xxii. 16. Of
things, ri run, a. to bid a thing to be carried to
one: Rev. xi. 10; with eis and an ace. of place added,
Rev. i. 11; e’s w.an ace. indicating the purpose, Acts xi.
29; Phil. iv.16 [here Lchm. br. e?s; cf. B.329 (283)]. —b.
to send (thrust or insert) a thing into another: Rev. xiv.
15, 18, (Ael. hist. an. 12,5); rwi 71 ets ro w. an inf., 2 Th.
ii. 11. [Comp.: dva-, éx-, pera-, mpo-, cup- TépTra. |
[Syn.: wéumrw, dmooréAAw: 7éuTw is the general term
(differing from tu: in directing attention not to the exit
but to the advent); it may even imply accompaniment
(as when the sender is God). dmooréAAw includes a refer
ence to equipment, and suggests official or authoritative send-
ing. Cf. Schmidt ch. 104; Westcott on Jn. xx. 21, ‘ Addi-
tional Note’; also ‘ Additional Note’ on 1 Jn. iii. 5.}
arévys, -nros, 6, (révopat to work for one’s living; the
Lat. penuria and Grk. mewde are akin to it [ef. Vanicek
p- 1164]; hence zévns i. q. €k mévov Kai evepyeias Td Cap
éyov, Etym. Magn.), poor: 2 Co. ix.9. (From Soph. and
Hat. down; Sept. for 1/38, °3)7, om wy, ete.) *
mevOepa
[Syn.révns, tr wx 6s: “wévns occurs but once inthe N.T.,
and then in a quotation fr. the Old, while mrwxds occurs
between thirty and forty times. . . . The révns may be so poor
that he earns his bread by daily labor; the mrwxés that he
only obtains his living by begging.” Trench § xxxvi.; cf.
Schmidt ch. 85, 4; ch. 186.]
mevOepa., -as, 7, (fem. of mevbepds, q. v-), a mother-in-law,
a wife’s mother: Mt. viii. 14; x. 35; Mk. i. 30; Lk. iv.
38; xii. 53. (Dem., Plut., Leian., al. ; Sept. for Ninn.) *
amrev0epds, -od, 6, a father-in-law, a wife’s father: Jn. xviii.
13. (Hom., Soph., Eurip., Plut., al.; Sept. [for on,
yon].)*
mev0ew, -@ ; fut. revOnow; 1 aor. érévOnoa; (mévOos) ;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 728; to mourn ; a.
intrans.: Mt. v. 4 (5); ix. 15; 1 Co. v.2; mevOeiv x. kAaiewv,
Mk. xvi. 10; Lk. vi. 25; Jas. iv.9; Rev. xviii. 15,19; és
Tum, over one, Rey. xviii. 11 R GL (Is. Ixvi. 10), emt
viva, ibid. T Tr WH (2 S. xiii. 87; 2 Chr. xxxy. 24,
etc.). b. trans. to mourn for, lament, one: 2 Co. xii.
21 [ef. W. 635 sq. (590); B. §131,4. Syn. see Opnvea,
fin. | *
arévOos, -ous, T0, (7évOw [(?); akin, rather, to aados, révo-
pat (cf. revs); see Curtius p. 53; Vaniéek p. 1165]), fr.
Hom. down, Sept. for 52x, mourning: Jas. iv. 9; Rev.
Vill. 7 '8q.\; “xxi '4.*
mevix pds, -d, -dv, (fr. mévopat, see mévns), needy, poor:
Lk. xxi. 2. (Occasionally in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Od. 3,
348 down; for >} in Ex. xxii. 25; for 51 in Prov. xxix.
Ch) Yas
tha adv., five times: 2 Co. xi. 24.
Aeschyl., down. ] *
mevTakio-x (Avot, -at, -a, five times a thousand, five thou-
sand: Mt. xiv. 21; xvi. 9; Mk. vi. 44; viii. 19; Lk. ix.
14; Jn. vi. 10. [Hdt., Plat., al.]*
mevTaKdctot, -ai, -a, five hundred: Lk. vii. 41; 1 Co. xv.
6. [From Hom. (-ryx-) down. ]*
mévte, ol, al, ta, five: Mt. xiv. 17, and often.
Hom. down. ]
mevTe-Kat-d€KaTos, -7, -ov, the fifteenth: Lk. iii.1. [Diod.,
Plut., al.]*
mevTHKovTa, of, ai, ta, fifty: Lk. vii. 41; xvi.6; Jn. viii.
57; xxi. 11 [RG aevrnkovrarpi@v (as one word)]; Acts
xlill. 20; ava mevrnk. by fifties [see dvd, 2], Mk. vi. 40
[here L T Tr WH. xara w.; see xara, II. 3 a. y.]; Lk. ix.
14. [From Hom. down. ]*
TevTnKoTTH, -7°, 7, (sc. nuepa; fem. of revrnkoords fifti-
eth), [fr. Plat. down.], Pentecost (prop. the fiftieth day
after the Passover, Tob. ii.1; 2 Mace. xii. 32; [Philo de
septen. § 21; de decal. § 30; cf. W. 26]), the second of
the three great Jewish festivals; celebrated at Jerusa-
lem yearly, the seventh week after the Passover, in
grateful recognition of the completed harvest (Ex.
xxiii. 16; Lev. xxiii. 15 sq.; Deut. xvi. 9): Acts ii. 1;
xx. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 8, (Joseph. antt. 3, 10,6; [14, 18,
4; etc.]). [BB. DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto)
s. v. Pentecost; Hamburger, Real-Encycl. i.s. v. Wochen-
fest ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiii.] *
metrolOnois, -ews, 7, (meio, 2 pf. méroiOa), trust, confi-
[From Pind.,
[From
500
IT épyapos
dence [R. V.], reliance: 2 Co. i. 15; iii. 4; x. 2; Eph. iii.
125 ets twa, 2 Co. viii. 22; év rem, Phil. iii. 4. (Philode
nobilit. § 7; Joseph. antt.1, 3,1; 3, 2,2; 10,1,43; [11,
7,1; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 3]; Zosim., Sext. Emp., al.;
Sept. once for }{MW3, 2 K. xviii.19.) The word is con-
demned by the Atticists; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 295.*
mép, an enclitic particle, akin to the prep. wepi [ Herm.
de part. av, p.6; Curtius §359; cf. Lob. Pathol. Elemen-
ta, i, 290; al. (connect it directly with épay, etc., and)
give ‘throughly’ as its fundamental meaning; cf.
Béumlein, Partikeln, p. 198], showing that the idea of
the word to which it is annexed must be taken in its
fullest extent ; it corresponds to the Lat. circiter, cunque,
Germ. noch so sehr, immerhin, wenigstens, ja; [Eng. how-
ever much, very much, altogether, indeed]; cf. Hermann
ad Vig. p. 791 ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 722 sqq.; [Donald-
son, New Crat. §178 fin.]. In the N. T. it is affixed to
the pron. és and to sundry particles, see d:d7ep, éavrep,
elmep, emeimep, emednmep, imep, KaOamep, Kaimep, Somep,
éonep. [(From Hom. down.)]
mepaitépw, (fr. repairepos, compar. of mépa), adv., fr.
Aeschyl. down, further, beyond, besides: Acts xix. 39 L
Tr WH, for RG wepi érépov. With this compare ovdeév
(ntnoere mepaitepw, Plat. Phaedo c. 56 fin. p. 107 b.*
mépav, Ionic and Epic wépny, adv., fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 13°; beyond, on the other side ; a. 7d
répay, the region beyond, the opposite shore: Mt. viii.
18, 28; xiv. 22; xvi.5; Mk. iv. 353 v. 21; ‘vi. 453 ‘vill.
13. b. joined (like a prep.) with a gen. [W. § 54,
6]: mepav tis Gad. Jn. vi. 22, 25; mépav rod "lopdavov, Mt.
iv. 15; xix.1; [Mk. x. 1b T TrWH]; Jn265) ibe
with verbs of going it marks direction towards a place
[over, beyond], Jn. vi.1,17; x.40; xvili.1; of the place
whence, [Mt. iv. 25]; Mk. iii.8. 1d mépav tis Oadaoons,
Mk. v.1; [rod "Iopdavov, Mk. x. 1 RG]; ris Aiuvys, Lk.
Vili. 22, (rod morapov, Xen. an. 3,5, 2). [See Sophocles,
Textigev.|*
aépas, -aros, Td, (wepa beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ez-
tremity, bound, end, [see réXos, 1 a. init.]; a. ofa
portion of space (boundary, frontier): mépata tis yis,
[the ends of the earth], i. q. the remotest lands, Mt. xii.
42; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. Il. 8, 478 [setpap]; Thue. 1, 69;
Xen. Ages. 9,4; Sept. for pqX *DD8 [W- 30]); also rijs
oikouperns, Ro. x. 18 (Ps. lxxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a
thing extending through a period of time (termination) :
avriAoyias, Heb. vi. 16 (rév caxav, Aeschyl. Pers. 632;
Joseph. b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).*
Tlépyapos [perh. -pov, 7d, (the gend. in the N. T. is in-
determinate ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq.; Pape, Eigen-
namen, 8. vv. )], -ov, 7, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf.
Curtius §413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor,
the seat of the dynasties of Attalus and Eumenes, cele-
brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention
[(?) ef. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39 sq.; Birt,
Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch-
ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the
Cetius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623; Plin. 5, 30 (33); 13,
11 (21); Tac. ann. 3,63). It was the birthplace of the
ITepryn
physician Galen, and had a great royal library. Mod-
ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there:
Rev. i. 113; ii. 12.*
Tlépyn, -ns, 7, [cf. the preceding word], Perge or Perga,
a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven
miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. Ona hill near the
town was the temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis] (Strab. 14
p. 667; Mel. 1, 14; Liv. 38, 37): Acts xiii. 13sq.; xiv.
25. [BB. DD.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] *
mepl, (akin to mépa, mépav; [Curtius § 359]), prep.,
joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class.
Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person
or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated
is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. cir-
cum, circa; around, about.
I. with the GENITIVE it denotes that around which
an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching,
ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter)
[ef. W. 372 sq. (349) ]. a. about, concerning, (Lat.
de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking,
_ teac hing, writing, etc., see under dvayyeAXo, amay-
yéAXo, arodoyovpat, yoyyvlo, ypadw, Snddw, SiaB_eBaov-
pat, Stayvwpifw, diaréyopnat, didackea, dinyodpat (Heb. xi.
32), Supynots, etrov and mpoeiror, érepwrdw and épwrtda,
KaTnX€w, AaEw, A€yw, Adyov airéw, Adyov amodidapu, Aé-yor
Oid@pt, paprupew, pveia, pynwovevw, mpoxatayyé Aw, Tpo-
ntevo, tropyuvyokw, xpnuaticouar, fyos, pyun, ete. ;
after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining,
inquiring, see under dkxovo, ywooKe, ériorapat, eidor,
eLeralw, Cnréw, ex(ntea, emi(nréw, Cntnwa, muvOavopat, ete. ;
after verbs of thinking, deciding, supposing,
doubting, etc.; see under dcadoyiCopat, évOupéopat, me-
Telopat, moTeEva, SiatropEew, eAeyxe, etc. b. as re-
spects [A. V.often (as) touching]; a. with verbs,
to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal
noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con-
cerned ; with regard to, in reference to: Acts xxviii. 21;
Heb. xi. 20; 4 rept cod pveia, 2 Tim. i. 3; efovciav éyew,
1 Co. vii. 37; émurayny éyew, ibid. 25; see éevrédAXopat,
evroAn, Tapakadéw, mapapvOéopat, mpddacis, ekdiKos, Nay-
xavo to cast lots. 8. with the neut. plur. [and sing. ]
of the article, ra mepi twos the things concerning a person
or thing, i. e. what relates to, can be said about, ete.: ta
mept ths Baoweias Tod Oeod, Acts i. 3; viii. 12 [Rec.];
xix. 8 [here L Tr WH om. ra]; 7a rept ris 6800, Acts
xxiv. 22; with the gen. of a pers. one’s affairs, his con-
dition or state: Acts xxviii. 15; Eph. vi. 22; Phil. i. 27;
ii. 19 sq.; Col. iv. 8; in a forensic sense, one’s cause or
case, Acts xxiv. 10; ra wept "Incod (or rov xupiov), [the
(rumors) about Jesus (as a worker of miracles), Mk. v.
27T Trmrg. br. WH]; the things (necessary to be known
and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25; xxili.11;
xxviii. 23 Ree., 31; the things that befell Jesus, his death,
Lk. xxiv. 19; the things in the O. T. relative to him, the
prophecies concerning him, ibid. 27; the career, death,
appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here T Tr WH 16
etc. ]. Y- mepi tivos, absol., at the beginning of sen-
tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1; viii.1; xvi. 1, 12;
501
Trept
but in other places it is more properly taken with the
foll. verb, Mt. xxii. 31; xxiv. 36; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co.
Vil. QDisevilis 1,45 xii. 15 1 Th. iv. 9; v. 1; ef. W. 373
(350). c. on account of; a. of the subject-
matter, which at the same time occasions the action
expressed by the verb: so after verbs of accusing, see
eykad€w, kaTnyopéw, Kpivw Twa mepi Tivos, etc. ; after verbs
expressing emotion, see Oavydla, dyavaxréw, kavxdopat,
onmhayxvifopa, evxapioTew, evyapioTia, aivéw, péeAEt pol,
pepysvaw; also after evyoua, 3 Jn. 2, see was, II. 2 b.
6. B. of the cause for (on account of) which a
thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the
action or occurrence: Mk. i. 44; Lk. v.14; Jn. x. 33,
(wept tis Bkaodnulas AaBere airdv, Kv. Nic. c. 4, p. 546
ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]); Acts xv. 2; xix. 23; xxv.
155) 18, 24:5, Coline wi RG]. y- on account of, i. e.
for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk.
xiv. 24 RG; LK. iv. 38; Jn. xvi. 26; xvii. 9, 20; Heb.
v.33; xi. 40; wepi and trep alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf.
W. 383 (358) n. also § 50,3; B.§ 147, 21. 22; Wieseler,
Meyer, Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. on Gal. i. 4]. 8. wept is
used of the design or purpose for removing something
or taking it away: meplt duaprias, to destroy sin, Ro. viii.
3; diddvar €avTdov mepit Tov duapria@v, to expiate, atone
for, sins, Gal. i. 4 (where R WH txt. isép [see as in y.
above, and cf. imép, I. 6]); also to offer sacrifices, and
simply sacrifices, mepi duapriay, Heb. v. 3 [RG imép; see
u. s.]3 X.18, 265 mepi duapri@y émabe [arébaver], 1 Pet. iii.
183; mepi duaprias sc. Ovoia, sacrifices for sin, expia-
tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7; ef. Num.
viii. 8; see dwapria, 3; ra mept ths dp. Lev. vi. 25; rd
mept t. G. Lev. xiv. 19); ihaopos wept r. duapti@v, 1 Jn.
rs AS rhe, IN);
II. with the AccuSATIVE (W. 406 (379)); a.
of Place; about, around: as, about parts of the body,
Mt. iii. 4; [xviii. 6 LT Tr WH]; Mk.i.6; ix. 42; Lk.
xvii. 2; Rev. xv. 6. about places: Lk. xiii. 8; Acts xxii.
6; Jude 7; ra mepi Tov térov exeivov, the neighborhood of
that place, Acts xxviii. 7; of wept w. an ace. of place,
those dwelling about a place or in its vicinity, Mk. iii.
8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. of]. of repi teva, those about one
i. e. with him, his companions, associates, friends, ete.,
Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xxii. 49; [add, Mk. xvi. WH (rejected)
“ Shorter Conclusion ”]; acc. to Grk. idiom of mept rév
TlavAov, Paul and his companions (Germ. die Paulusge-
sellschaft) [ef. W. 406 (379); B.§ 125, 8], Acts xiii. 135
ace. to a later Grk. usage ai mept MdpGav denotes Martha
herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer, Weiss,
Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at-
tendants or domestics; but L Tr WH read mpés r7v (for
ras mept) MdpOav) ; cf. Matthiae § 583, 2; Bnhdy. p. 263;
Kiihner ii. p. 230 sq.; [W. and B.u.s.]. in phrases the
underlying notion of which is that of revolving
about something: of persons engaged in any occupa-
tion, of mepi Ta rovatra epyarat [A. V. the workmen of like
occupation], Acts xix. 25; mepionaoOa, TupBalerOar rept
rt, Lk. x. 40,41 [but here L T Tr WH txt. AopuBagy q- v-
(and WH umrg. om. wept roAAd)], (rept tiv yeopyiav yive
TEeplayw
aba, 2 Mace. xii. 1). b. as to, in reference to, con-
cerning: so after dddéxtpos, 2 Tim. iii. 8; doroxeiv, 1 Tim.
vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 18; vavayetv, 1 Tim. i. 19; vooeiv, 1 Tim.
vi. 4; wept mavra é€avtov maupéxeoOat tirov, Tit. ii. 7; ra
rept eye, the state of my affairs, Phil. ii. 23; ai wept ra
Nowra émOvpiat, Mk. iv. 19 (ai rept 6 oGpa emOvpia, Ar-
istot. rhet. 2, 12, 3; ra wepi Wuyi x. copa ayaa, eth.
Nic..1, 8) 3 cf. W.:§ 30, 3,.N..5%9)B.§ 125, 91]. c. of
Time; in a somewhat indefinite specification of time,
about, near: mepi tpitnv Spav, Mt. xx. 8; add, 5sq. 9;
xxvii.46; Mk. vi.48; Actsx.{8LT Tr WH], 9; xxii. 6.
III. in Composition epi in the N. T. signifies a3
in a circuit, round about, all around, as repidye, wept
Baddo, Teptagtparra, Tepiketpat, TEpLorKew, etC., etc. 2:
beyond (because that which surrounds a thing does not
belong to the thing itself but is beyond it): meplepyos,
Tepiepydfopat, Tepieim@, TepiLev@, TEpLovTLos, TEpLTTds,
TEpLOTEvo. 3. through [(?) —intensive, rather
(cf. repiarrw, 2) |: mepireipo.
mept-dyw; impf. mepijyov; fr. Hdt. down; als
trans. a. to lead around (cf. qepi, III. 1]. b.
iq. to lead about with one’s self: twa (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,
28; tpeis maidas dxodovdovs, Dem. p. 958, 16), 1 Co. ix.
5: 2. intrans. to go about, walk about, (Ceb. tab. c.
6): absol. Acts xiii. 11; with an acc. of place (depend-
ing on the prep. in compos., cf. Matthiae § 426; [B. 144,
(126); W. § 52, 2¢.; 432 (402)]), Mt. iv. 23 [R G; (al.
read the dat. with or without év)]; ix. 35; xxiii. 15;
Mk. vi. 6.*
mept-arpew, -@: 2 aor. inf. wepreAeiv, [ptep. plur. repr
eddvres; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. meptarpetrar]; impf. 3
pers. sing. mepinpeiro; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
aka a. to take away that which surrounds or en-
velops a thing [cf. wept, III. 1]: 7d xadvppa, pass., 2 Co.
iii. 16 (opdvpav, 2 Macc. iv. 38; rov SaxrvdAcov, Gen. xli.
42; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 3); dyxvpas, the anchors from
both sides of the ship, [R. V. casting off], Acts xxvii.
40 ; [2 aor. ptep., absol., in a nautical sense, fo cast loose,
Acts xxviii. 13 WH (al. wepeeAOortes) }. b. metaph.
to take away altogether or entirely: tas dpaprias (with
which one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e.
to expiate perfectly, Heb. x. 11; ty eAmida, pass., Acts
Xxvii. 20.*
mept-antw: 1 aor. ptcp. mepiayas; [fr. Pind. down];
1. to bind or tie around, to put around, [mepi, III. 1];
to hang upon, attach to. 2. to kindle a fire around
[or thoroughly ; see mepixpUnt@, meptkadimra, meptkparns,
mepidumos, etc.] (Phalar. ep. 5, p. 28): Lk. xxii. 55 TWH
or txt"
Tepi-artpamrw: 1 aor. repinotpaya [R* L repiéotp.
(see B. 34 sq. (30) and Tdf.’s note)], to flash around,
shine about, (epi, III. 1]: twa, Acts ix. 3; mepi rea, Acts
xxii. 6. ([4 Mace. iv. 10]; eccl. and Byzant. writ.) *
mept-Baddw : fut. repiBaro; 2 aor. meptéBadrov; pf. pass.
ptep. mepiBeBrAnpevos ; 2 aor. mid. mepreSardunv; 2 fut.
mid. mepiBadoipa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
71D to cover, cover up; also for way to clothe, and Mvy |
to veil; to throw around, to put round;
502
TeplLey@
xdpaka, to surround a city with a bank (palisade), Lk.
xix. 43 ((RGTr L txt. WH mrg.]; see mapeyBddro,
2). b. of garments, twva, to clothe one: Mt. xxv. 36,
38,43; teva Tt, fo put a thing on one, to clothe one with a
thing [B. 149 (130); W.§ 32,4 a.]: Lk. xxiii. 11 [here
TWH om. LTr br. ace. of pers.]; Jn. xix. 2; pass., Mk.
xiv. 51; xvi. 5; Rev. vil. 9,13; x. U5 xi.83 xii. 1; xvil.
4 (where Ree. has dat. of the thing; [so iv. 4 L WH
txt., but al. év w. dat. of thing]); xviii. 16; xix. 13;
Mid. to put on or clothe one’s self: absol. Rev. iii. 18; w.
ace. of the thing [cf. B. § 135, 2], Mt. vi. 31; Acts xii.
8; passively, — in 2 aor., Mt. vi. 29; Lk. xii. 27; in 2
aor. w. ace. of the thing, Rev. iii. 18; xix. 8; in 2 fut.
with ev ru [B. u. s.; see év, I. 5b. p. 210*], Rev. iii. 5.*
mept-Brérw: impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. mepieBdErero; 1
aor. ptcp. mepiBreyrauevos; tolookaround. In the N. T.
only in the mid. (to look round about one’s self): absol.,
Mk. ix. 8; x. 23; foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mk. v. 32;
tiva, to look round on one (i. e. to look for one’s self at
one near by), Mk. iii. 5, 34; Lk. vi. 103; ets rwas, Ev.
Nic. c. 43 advra, Mk.xi.11. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.;
Sept.) *
mept-Bodatov, -ov, 7d, (mepiB8a\dw), prop. a covering
thrown around, a wrapper; in the N. T. 1. a man-
tle: Heb. i. 12 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Ezek. xvi. 13; xxvii. 7;
Is. lix. 17; mepi8. Baordixdv and rrepiB. €x moppupas, Pa-
laeph. 52, 4). 2. aveil [A.V.a covering]: 1 Co. xi.
15. [(From Eur. down.) ]*
mept-S€w : plupf. pass. 3 pers. sing. meprede8ero; (fr. Hdt.
down]; éo bind around, tie over, [ef. wepi, IIL. 1]: twa
tut, Jn. xi. 44. (Sept. Job xii. 18; Plut. mor. p. 825 e.
[i. e. praecepta ger. reipub. 32, 21; Aristot. h. a. 9, 39
p- 623%, 14}.)°
mept-Spepw, See mepiTpexa. ‘
mept-epydtopat; (see mepi, III. 2); to bustle about use-
lessly, to busy one’s self about trifling, needless, useless mat-
ters, (Sir. iii. 23; Hdt. 3, 46; Plat. apol. p. 19 b.; al.):
used apparently of a person officiously inquisitive about
others’ affairs [ A. V. to be a busybody], 2 Th. iii. 11, as in
Dem. p. 150, 24 [cf. p. 805, 4 etc. ].*
ameplepyos, -ov, (mepi and épyov; see epi, III. 2), busy
about trifles and neglectful of important matters, esp. busy
about other folks’ affairs, a busybody: 1 Tim. v.13 (often
so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. mem. 1, 3,1; wep. kal mohumpay-
pov, Epict. diss. 3,1, 21); of things: ra mepiepya, imper-
tinent and superfluous, of magic [A. V. curious] arts,
Acts xix. 19 (so mepiepyos practising magic, Aristaen.
epp. 2, 18,2 [ef. Plut. Alex. 2, 5]); ef. Kypke, Observv.
and Kuinoel, Com. ad loc.*
mept-€pxopar; 2 aor. mepipdOov; fr. Hdt. down; to go
about: of strollers, Acts xix. 13; of wanderers, Heb. xi.
37; of navigators (making a circuit), Acts xxviii. 13
[here WH srepreddvres, see meptatpéa, a.]; Tas oikias, to
go about from house to house, 1 Tim. v. 13.*
arept-€xw@; 2 aor. mepecxov; fr. Hom. down; in the
N. T. to surround, encompass ; i. e. a. to contain:
of the subject-matter, contents, of a writing (7 BiBAos
a. mode | mepeyer Tas makers, Diod. 2,1; [Joseph. c. Ap. (1, 1) 5
tf
TepLowvvuw
1, 8,2; 2,4,15; 2,38, 1]), emeorodny mepiexovaay Tov TUTOV
rovrov, a letter of which this is a sample, or a letter
written after this form [cf. réos, 3], Acts xxiii. 25 [LT Tr
WH éxovcar (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. as below) | (roy tpd-
arov tovrov, 1 Macc. xv. 2; 2 Mace. xi. 16); intrans. [B.
§129,17n.; 144 (126) n.]: meprexer ev (7H) ypahy, it is
contained in (holy) scripture, 1 Pet. ii.6 RGT Tr WH;
absol., mepuexer 4» ypapn (our runs), foll. by direct disc.,
ibid. Lehm.; likewise 6 vdéuos tuav mepiexet, Ev. Nicod.
ce. 4; with adverbs: mepiéyerv ovrws, 2 Mace. ix. 18; xi.
22; xaOas mepiexet BiBAos "Evwx, Test. xii. Patr., test.
Levi 10; os 9 mapadoors mepiexer, Euseb. h.e. 3, 1; see
Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 29. b. i. q. to take possession
of, to seize: twa, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16; Joseph. b. j. 4,
10, 1).*
mepi-Lovvde, or -Cavvust: Mid., 1 fut. mepifaoopar; 1
aor. impv. mepit{woa, ptep. mepi(woauevos ; pf. pass. ptcp.
mepte(wopevos; to gird around [mepi, III. 1]; to fasten
garments with a girdle: thv oapvv, to fasten one’s cloth-
ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk.
xii. 35. Mid. to gird one’s self: absol., Lk. xii. 37; xvii.
8; Acts xii. 8 Rec. ; ryv dopdv ev adndeia, with truth as
a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one’s self with knowl-
edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14; with an acc. of the thing
with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as oak-
xov, Jer. iv. 8; vi. 26; Lam. ii. 10; orodny ddéns, Sir. xlv.
7; and in trop. expressions, dvvayiv, evppoovvny, 1 S.
ii. 4; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 33; [B. § 135, 2]): mpds rots pa-
atois Cwvnv, Rev. i. 13; C@vas mept ra orn On, Rev. xv. 6.
(Arstph., Polyb., Paus., Plut., al.; Sept. for 73m and
Vik.) Cf. dvafovvyps.* —
amrept-Oeots, -ews, 7), (mepitiOnuc), the act of putting around
[wepi, III. 1], (Vulg. circumdatio, [A.V. wearing]) : meptbe-
cews xpuolov kdopos, the adornment consisting of the gold-
en ornaments wont to be placed around the head or the
body, 1 Pet.iii.3. ([Arr. 7, 22], Galen, Sext. Empir., al.) *
wept-iorypt: 2 aor. repteatny; pf. ptcp. meprectas; pres.
mid. impv. 2 pers. sing. reptiataco (on which form see
W.§ 14, 1e.; [B.47 (40), who both callit passive (but
see Veitch p. 340) ]) ; 1. in the pres., impf., fut.,
1 aor., active, fo place around (one). 2. in the perf.,
plupf., 2 aor. act., and the tenses of the mid., to stand
around: Jn. xi. 42; Acts xxv. 7 [in LT Tr WH w. an
ace.; cf. W. § 52, 4,12]. Mid. to turn one’s self about se.
for the purpose of avoiding something, hence to avoid, shun,
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 12; 10,10, 4; b.j. 2,8, 6; Antonin.
8,4; Artem. oneir. 4, 59; Athen. 15 p. 675e.; Diog.
Laért. 9, 14; Jambl. vit. Pyth. 31 [p. 392 ed. Kiessl.] ;
Sext. Empir.; joined with devyew, Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 4;
with ékrpémecda, Leian. Hermot. § 86; Hesych. mepi-
iotaco + andevye, avatpere; [cf. further, D’Orville’s
Chariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282]; this use of the verb is
censured by Lcian. soloec. 5): in the N. T. so with an
ace. of the thing [cf. W. l.c.], 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit. iii. 9.*
qmept-KaGappa, -ros, 7d, (mepikabaipw, to cleanse on all
sides [mepi, III. 1]), off-scouring, refuse: plur. ra epi.
tov kdcpou [A. V. the filth of the world], metaph. the most
abject and despicable men, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 3,
503
EPL LEV
22, 78; purgamenta urbis, Curt. 8, 5, 8; 10, 2, 7; [see
Wetstein on 1 Co. |. c.]; Sept. once for 195, the price
of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the
Grks. used to apply the term xa@dppyara to victims sacri-
ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to crim-
inals who were maintained at the public expense, that
on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they
might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the
state.) *
mepi-Ka0-ifw : 1 aor. ptcp. mepixabicas ; 1. in class.
Grk. trans. to bid or make to sit around, to invest, besiege,
a city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be seated
around; so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lchm. txt.*
mepi-KadvTrw ; 1 aor. ptcp. repixadvpas ; pf. pass. ptep.
mepixexaduppevos; fr. Hom. down; to cover all around
[mepi, III. 1], to cover up, cover over: td mpdawrov, Mk.
xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold]; ri xpucig, Heb.
ix. 4 (Ex. xxviii. 20).*
aept-Keipar; (epi and xetpar) ;, fr. Hom. down; a
to lie around [cef. wepi, III. 1]: mepi [cf. W. § 52, 4, 12]
rt, [A. V. were hanged, Mk. ix. 42]; Lk. xvii. 2; Exovres
meptkeipevov nyiv vepos, [A.V. are compassed about with
a cloud ete.], Heb. xii. 1. 2. passively [cf. B. 50
(44)], to be compassed with, have round one, [with ace. ;
ef. W. § 32, 5; B. §134, 7]: Gdvow, Acts xxviii. 20 (de-
opd, 4 Mace. xii. 3); aoOévecay, infirmity cleaves to me,
Heb. v. 2 (vBpw, Theocr. 23,14; duavpoow, védos, Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6).*
aepi-Kepadaia, -as, 7, (rept and xepadn), a helmet: 1'Th.
v. 8; tov owrnpiov (fr. Is. lix. 17), i.e. dropping the fig.,
the protection of soul which consists in (the hope of)
salvation, Eph. vi.17. (Polyb.; Sept. for yai3.) *
aepi-Kparis, -€s, (Kpatos), Twds, having full power over a
thing: [mepux. yeverOat ths axadys, to secure], Acts xxvii.
16. (Sus. 39 cod. Alex.; eccl. writ.) *
arept-Kpvrrw : 2 aor. meptexpuBov (on this form cf. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. i. p. 400 sq. ; ii. p. 226; [WH. App. p. 170;
al. make it (in Lk. as below) a late im perfect; cf. B.
40 (35); Soph. Lex. s. v. kptBo; Veitch s. v. kpUrrw]) ;
to conceal on all sides or entirely, to hide: éavrdv, to keep
one’s self at home, Lk. i. 24. (Leian., Diog. Laért.,
aloe
mept-KuKN6w, -@: fut. mepixuKA@ow; to encircle, compass
about: of a city (besieged), Lk. xix. 43. (Arstph. av.
346; Xen. an. 6,1(3), 11; Aristot. h. a. 4, 8 [p. 533°, 11];
Leian., al. ; Sept. for 330.) *
arepi-Adprrw: 1 aor. weptéAaua; to shine around: twa,
Lk. ii. 9; Acts xxvi. 13. (Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
mept-Aelrw: pres. pass. ptcp. meptermdpevos (cf. mepi,
III. 2); to leave over; pass. to remain over, to survive:
1 Th. iv.15, 17. (Arstph., Plat., Eur., Polyb., Hdian. ;
2 Macc. 1. 31.) *
aept-Auros, -ov, (rept and Avy, and so prop. ‘encom-
passed with grief’ [cf. wepi, III. 3]), very sad, exceedingly
sorrowful: Mt. xxvi. 88: Mk. vi. 26; xiv. 84; Lk. xviii.
23, 24 [where T WH om. Tr br. the cl.]._ (Ps. xi. (xlii.)
6,12; 1 Esdr. viii. 69; Isocr., Aristot., al.) *
amept-pevw ; (zrepi further [cf. wepé, II. 2]); to wait for:
mé ple
ri, Actsi.4. (Gen. xlix. 18; Sap. viii. 12; Arstph., Thuc.,
Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
wépté [on the formative or strengthening & cf. Lob.
Paralip. p. 131], adv., fr. Aeschyl. down, round about:
ai mépi& modes, the cities round about, the cireumjacent
cities, Acts v. 16.*
mept-oukéw, -@; to dwell round about: ria [cf. W. § 52,
4, 12], to be one’s neighbor, Lk. i. 65. (Hdt., Arstph.,
Xen., Lys., Plut.) *
aepi-orxos, -ov, (mepi and oikos), dwelling around, a
neighbor: Lk.i.58. (Gen. xix. 29; Deut.i. 7; Jer. xxx.
(xlix.) 5; Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Isocr., al.) *
meprovartos, -ov, (fr. repi@v, mepiovaa, ptcp. of the verb
mepieyut, to be over and above — see emtovotos; hence
meptovcia, abundance, plenty ; riches, wealth, property),
that which is one’s own, belongs to one’s possessions: ads
treptovatos, a people selected by God from the other nations
for his own possession, Tit. ii. 14; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64;
in Sept. for m0 Dy’, (Ex. xix. 5) ; Deut. vii. 6; xiv. 2;
xxvi. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lghift. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete. App.
ii.]*
AEPLOX A], -7)S; 7], (TFEPLEX®, q- V-) 1. an encompass-
ing, compass, circuit, (Theophr., Diod., Plut., al.). 2.
that which is contained ; spec. the contents of any writing,
Acts viii. 32 (Cic. ad Attic. 13, 25; Stob. eclog. ethic. p.
164 [ii. p. 541 ed. Gaisford]) [but A. V. place i. e. pas-
sage; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
mept-Tratéw, -@; impf. 2 pers. sing. meprerarers, 3 pers.
mepterraret, plur. meptenarour; fut. repematnow ; 1 aor. rept-
exatnoa; plupf. 3 pers. sing. mepreremarnxer (Acts xiv. 8
Ree.“*), and without the augm. (cf. W. § 12,9; [B. 33
(29)]) mwepuremarnke (ibid. Rec. Grsb.) ; Sept. for y;
to walk; [walk about A. V.1 Pet. v. 8]; a. prop.
(as in Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Joseph., Ael., al.) : ab-
sol., Mt. ix. 5; xi. 5; xv. 31; Mk. ii. 9 [Tdf. dmaye]; v.42;
Villo 24): xvi 12) uk. -ys233 vil 225) xxiv. 17/;Jn-1. 86% ve
8sq. 11 sq.; xi. 9sq.; Acts ili. 6, 8sq.12; xiv. 8,10; 1
Pet. v.'8;' Rev. ix. 205 i.q, to make one’s way, make prog-
ress, in ce disc. equiv. to to make a due use of opportu-
nities, Jn. xii. 35°. with additions: wepur. yuuvds, Rev.
Xvi. 15; émavw (twvds), Lk. xi. 44; dia w. gen. of the thing,
Rey. xxi. 24 [G LT Tr WH]; ev w. dat. of place, i.q.
to frequent, stay in, a place, Mk. xi. 27; Jn. vii. 1; x. 23;
Rev. ii. 1; €y tuot, among persons, Jn. xi. 543 [a. dou
70ehes, of personal liberty, Jn. xxi. 18]; metaph. év 77
oxoria, to be subject to error and sin, Jn. viii. 12; xii.
35°; 1Jn.i. 6 sq.; ii11; é&v with dat. of the garment
one is clothed in, Mk. xii. 38; Lk. xx. 46; Rev. ili. 4, (ev
koxkivots, EXpict. diss. 3, 22,10); émi ras Gadacons, [ Mt.
xiv. 25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, 49], see ézi,
A.I.1a.and 2a.; éni tiv 6anX., emt ra ddara, [ Mt. xiv. 25
LT Tr WH, 26 RG, 29], see emi, C. I. 1 a.3 [mapa rhv
Gadaccav, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 Rece., see rapa, III. 1];
pera Tivos, to associate with one, to be one’s companion,
used of one’s followers and votaries, Jn. vi. 66; Rev. iii.
4, b. Hebraistically, to live [ef. W.32; com. in Paul
and John, but not found in James or in Peter (cf. dva-
otpepw 3 b., avaotpodn) |, i. e. a. to regulate one’s
504
TeplTroina ts
life, to conduct one’s self (ef. dd0s, 2 a., mopeda, b. y.) :
afiws rivds, Mph.iv.1; Col.i.10; 1 Th. ii. 12; evoynudves,
Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th. iv. 12; dxpiBas, Eph. v. 15; dardkras,
2 Th. iii. 6, 115 és or kadas tis, Eph. iv. 17; v. 8,15; otra
m. kaOs, Phil. iii. 17; [kaOas wr. ovr@ w. 1 In. ii. 6 (L Tr
txt. WH om. ovrw)]; mas, kaos, 1 Th. iv. 1; odras, as,
1 Co. vii. 17; so that a nom. of quality must be sought
from what follows, €y6poi rod oravpod rod Xpicrod, Phil.
iii. 18. witha dat. of the thing to which the life is given
or consecrated : kapos, pears, ete., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz-
sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140 sq.; w.a dat. of the standard
ace. to which one governs his life [ef. Fritzsche u. s. p.
142; also B. § 133, 22 b.; W. 219 (205)]: Acts xxi. 21;
Gal. v. 16; 2 Co. xii. 18; foll. by év w. a dat. denoting
either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or
vice to which he is given [cf. év, I. 5 e. p. 210» bot.]: Ro.
vi.4; 2 Co.iv.2; Eph. ii. 2,10; iv.17; v. 2; Col. iii. 7;
iv.5; 2Jn. 4,6; 3 Jn. 3sq.3 év Bpwpact, of those who
have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, Heb. xiii. 9; év
Xpior@ [see ev, I. 6 b.], to live a life conformed to the
union entered into with Christ, Col. ii. 6; xard w. an ace.
of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living,
— vil. 5]; 2Jn.63 xara dvOparor, 1 Co. iii. 3; xara
odpka, Ro. viii. 1 Rede Aeobxiveiaen? Core B.
i. q. to pass (one’s) ie ev capxi, in the body, 2 Co. x.
3; d1a riorews (see did, A. I. 2),2Co.v. 7. [Comp.: éep-
meputratew. | *
mept-treipw: 1 aor. mepiereipa; to pierce through [see
mepi, III. 3]: rwa Eipeor, Sdpart, ete., Diod., Joseph.,
Plut., Leian., al.; metaph. éavrov . . . ddvvais, to torture
one’s soul with sorrows, 1 Tim. vi. 10 (dvnkéoros Kaxois,
Philo in Flace. § 1).*
mepi-tintw: 2 aor. mepiéemecov; fr. Hdt. down; so to
fall into as to be encompassed by [ef. aepi, III. 1]: Ay-
orais, among robbers, Lk. x. 30; tots meypacpois, Jas. i. 2,
(aixias, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 2; @avat@, Dan. ii. 9;
Diod. 1, 77; véc@, Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 7; cvpdopa, ibid.
1, 1,4; rots Sewots, Aesop 79 (110 ed. Halm); Wevdéor
k. aveBeot Séypaow, Orig. in Joann. t. ii. § 2; numerous
other exx. in Passows. v. 1. e. [L. and S. s. v. IT. 3]; to
which add, 2 Mace. vi.13; x.4; Polyb. 1, 37,1 and 9);
eis Térrov Tid, upon a certain place, Acts xxvii. 41.*
mepi-rrovew, -@: Mid., pres. meperovovpar; 1 aor. srept-
erouodunv; (see mepi, III. 2); fr. Hdt. down; to make
to remain over; to reserve, to leave or keep safe, lay by;
mid. to make to remain for one’s self, i.e. a ‘to
preserve for one’s self (Sept. for 77): thy Puxny, life,
Lk. xvii. 33 T Tr WH (ras poyds, Xen. Cyr. 4, 4, 10).
2. to get for one’s self, purchase: ri, Acts xx. 28 (Is.
xlili. 21; Sdvayew, Thue. 1, 9; Xen. mem. 2, 7, 3); ri
éuauré, gain for myself (W. § 38, 6), 1 Tim. iii. 13 (1
Mace. vi. 44; Xen. an. 5, 6, 17).*
mepi-trolyo is, -ews, 7, (mepiTroLew) ; 1. a preserving,
preservation: ets mepiroinow woxis, to the preserving of
the soul, sc. that it may be made partaker of eternal sal-
vation [A. V. unto the saving of the soul], Heb. x. 39
(Plat. deff. p. 415 c.). 2. possession, one’s own prop-
erty: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Is. xliii. 20 sq.); Eph. i. 14 (on this
qepippaiva
pass. see dmodvtpwors, 2). 3. an obtaining: with a
gen. of the thing to be obtained, 1 Th. v. 9; 2 Th. ii. 14.*
wept-ppaivw (Tdf. repip., with one p; see P, p) : pf. pass.
ptep. meptpepappevos (cf. M, w) ; (wepi and paivw to sprin-
kle) ; to sprinkle around, besprinkle: iparcov, pass., Rev.
xix. 13 Tdf. [al. BeBappevov (exc. WH pepavricpevor, see
pavri¢w, and their App. ad loc.)]. (Arstph., Menand.,
Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.)*
awept-pphyvupe (LT Tr WH zepip., with one p; see the
preceding word) : 1 aor. ptep. plur. mepippygavres; (wept
and pyyvupe); to break off on all sides, break off all
round, (cf. wept, III. 1]: 16 iudreoy, to rend or tear off all
around, Acts xvi. 22. So of garments also in 2 Mace.
iv. 38 and often in prof. auth. ; Aeschyl. sept. 329; Dem.
p- 403, 3; Polyb. 15, 33, 4; Diod. 17, 35.*
wept-omdw, -@: impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. wepteomwaro ; fr.
Xen. down; to draw around [mepi, III. 1], to draw away,
distract; pass. metaph., to be driven about mentally, to be
distracted: mepi tt, i.e. to be over-occupied, too busy,
about a thing, Lk. x. 40 [A. V. cumbered]; in the same
sense with 77 diavoia added, Polyb. 3, 105, 1; 4, 10,
3; Diod. 1, 74; mepromay tov dpyov Shpov mepi ras e&w
otpareias, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 43; pass. to be distracted
with cares, to be troubled, distressed, (ef. W. 23], for ny,
Eccl. i. 13; iii. 10.*
mepiooeia, -as, 4, (meptoaeva, q- V-) 5 1. abun-
dance: rns xaptros, Ro. v.17; ris xapas, 2 Co. viii. 2; eis
mepiooeiav, adverbially, superabundantly, superfluously,
[A. V. out of measure], 2 Co. x. 15, (Boeckh, Corp. in-
scrr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. writ.). 2. su-
periority ; preference, pre-eminence : 1¥, Eccl. vi. 8; for
nN, Ces vis Sis xe 10: 3. gain, profit: for
jim, Eccl. i. 3; ii. 11; ili. 9, ete. 4. residue, re-
mains: xaxias, the wickedness remaining over in the
Christian from his state prior to conversion, Jas. i. 21,
see mepiooevpa, 2; [al. adhere in this pass. to the mean-
ing which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz.
‘excess’, ‘superabundance,’ (A. V. superfluity) ].*
meplooevp.a,, -Tos, TO, (mEpiaoeva) ; 1. abundance,
in which one delights; opp. to torépnya, 2 Co. viii. 14
(13),14; trop. of that which fills the heart, Mt. xii. 34;
Lk. vi. 45, (Eratosth., Plut.). 2. what is left over,
residue, remains: plur. Mk. viii. 8.*
mepircedw; impf. érepiacevov (Acts xvi. 5); fut. inf.
neptocevoew (Phil. iv. 12 Rec.Pe); 1 aor. émepiocevaa ;
Pass., pres. meptooevopnat (Lk. xv. 17, see below); 1 fut.
3 pers. sing. meptacevOnoerat; (mepioads, q- V-) 5 al
intrans. and prop. to exceed a fixed number or measure ;
Jo be over and above a certain number or measure: puptot
ciow adpiOuov... eis dé meptooever, Hes. fr. 14, 4 [elxix.
(187), ed. Gottling]; hence a. to be over, to remain:
Jn. vi. 12; 7d wepicoevdov Tov KAagpaTor, i. q. Ta TEpLC-
gevovta kAdopara, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; mepiooever pot Te,
Jn. vi. 13 (Tob. iv. 16) ; 76 meptooedvoay rim, what remained
over to one, Lk. ix. 17. b. to exist or be at hand
in abundance: rwi, Lk. xii. 15; 16 meptocevor tum, one’s
abundance, wealth, [(R. V. superfluity) ; opp. to toré-
onows |, Mk. xii. 44; opp. to torépnua, Lk. xxi. 4; to be
505
TEplaaos
great (abundant), 2 Co. i.5°; ix.12; Phil i. 26; mepio-
aever Tt eis Twa, a thing comes in abundance, or overflows,
unto one; something falls to the lot of one in large meas-
ure: Ro. v.15; 2 Co.i. 5°; meprooevw ets tt, to redound
unto, turn out abundantly for, a thing, 2 Co. viii. 2; 4
GdnOea tov Geod év TO Ene Wedopare emepioaevoer eis Tijv
dofav avrov, i. e. by my lie it came to pass that God’s
veracity became the more conspicuous, and becoming
thus more thoroughly known increased his glory, Ro.
ili. 7; to be increased, rt apiOue, Acts xvi. 5. c. to*
abound, overflow, i.e. a. to be abundantly furnished
with, to have in abundance, abound in (a thing): absol.
[A. V. to abound], to be in affluence, Phil. iv. 18; opp.
to torepeioOa, ib. 12; in spiritual gifts, 1 Co. xiv. 12;
with a gen. of the thing in which one abounds (W. § 30,
8b.; [ef. B. § 132, 12]): aprov, Lk. xv. 17 RGL T Tr
mrg. B. to be pre-eminent, to excel, [cf. B. § 132, 22]:
absol. 1 Co. viii. 8; foll. by év w. a dat. of the virtues or
the actions in which one excels [B. § 132, 12], Ro.
xv. 13; 1 Co. xv. 58; 2 Co. iii. 9 [here L T Tr WH om.
év]; viii. 7; Col. ii. 7; mepuoo. padAov, to excel still more,
to increase in excellence, 1 Th. iv. 1, 10; waAXov x. waddov
meptoo. Phil. 1.9; mepuoo. mXetov, to excel more than [A. V.
exceed; cf. B. § 132, 20 and 22], Mt. v. 20, (mepioc. imép
twa, 1 Mace. ill. 30; ti éemepioaevoer 6 GvOpwros mapa Td
xtnvos; Eccl. iii. 19). 2. by later Greek usage
transitively [cf. W. p. 23; § 38,1], to make to abound,
ie. a. to furnish one richly so that he has abun-
dance: pass., Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; w. gen. of the thing
with which one is furnished, pass. Lk. xv. 17 WH Trtxt.;
Ti ets Twa, to make a thing to abound unto one, to confer a
thing abundantly upon one, 2 Co. ix. 8; Eph. i. 8. b.
to make abundant or excellent: ri, 2 Co. iv. 15; to cause
one to excel: twa, w. a dat. of the thing, 1 Th. iii.12. (ras
apas, to extend the hours beyond the prescribed time,
Athen. 2 p.42b.) [Comp.: imep-reptoceva. | *
meptoads, -7, -dv, (fr. mepi, q. v- III. 2), fr. Hes. down,
Sept. for 11, VN}, etc.; exceeding some number or meas-
ure or rank or need; 1. over and above, more than
is necessary, superadded: 16 7. rovrwy, what is added to
[A. V. more than; cf. B. § 132, 21 Rem.] these, Mt. v. 37;
ex meptocod, exceedingly, beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51
[WH om. Tr br. ex w. ]; xiv. 31 Rec.; imép éx mepioood
(written as one word wmepexmepiocon [q. v.]), exceeding
abundantly, supremely, Eph. iii. 20 [ef. B. u.s.]; 1 Th.
iii. 10; v.13 [RG WH txt.]; mepeoody poi eorw, it is
superfluous for me, 2 Co. ix. 1; mepioadr eye, to have
abundance, Jn. x. 10 (of pev... weptooa exovow, oi Se
ovdé ra avayxaia Sivavrat mopiterOat, Xen. oec. 20, 1);
neut. compar. mepiaodrepdv te, something further, mere,
Lk. xii. 4 (L Tr mrg. reptoody); mepioadr. the more, ibid.
48; [mepwcodrepoy mavrwy etc. much more than ail ete.
Mk. xii. 33 T Tr txt. WH]; adverbially, somewhat more
[R. V. somewhat abundantly], 2 Co. x. 8; (Vulg. abun-
dantius [A.V. more abundanitly]) i. e. more plainly, Heb.
vi. 17; paddAov meptocdrepov, much more, Mk. vii. 36;
meptoadtrepov mavrwv, more [abundantly] than all, 1 Co.
xv. 10; with an adj. it forms a periphrasis for the com-
TEPLaTOTEPWS 506
par. mepioodrepov xaradnAov, more [abundantly] evident,
Heb. vii. 15 [ef. W. § 35, 1]. 2. superior, extraor-
dinary, surpassing, uncommon: Mt. v. 47 [A. V. more
than others]; 1d mepioady, as subst., pre-eminence, supe-
riority, advantage, Ro. ili. 1; compar. mepraadrepos, more
eminent, more remarkable, (ovx éoy mepioodrepos, Gen.
xlix. 3 Symm.; mepirrorepos dpovncer, Plut. mor. p. 57 f.
de adulatore ete. 14): Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 26, although
in each pass. mepioodtepov can also be taken as neut.
(something) more excellent (Vulg. plus [R. V. much more
than ete.]); with substantives : mepioodrepov Kpiua, 1. e.
a severer, heavier judgment, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. ;
Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; ry, greater honor, more [abun-
dant] honor, 1 Co. xii. 23°, [24 ; evoyxnpoovrn, ibid. 23°];
Avan, 2 Co. ii. 7.*
mepircotépws, adv., (fr. mepiooas, q. v.), [ef W. $11,
Zieu 1B: 69.(61) 5 1. prop. more abundantly (so in
Diod. 13, 108; Athen. 5 p. 192f.); in the N. T. more,
in a greater degree; more earnestly, more exceedingly, (cf.
W. 243 (228)]: Mk. xv. 14 Rec.; 2 Co. vii. 15; xi. 23;
Gal. 1.414,; Phil. 1: 145 4 Phi. l7is) Hebrit- i xii-319)
opp. to #rrov, 2 Co. xii. 15; meptogorépws paddov, much
more, [R.V. the more exceedingly], 2 Co. vii. 13. 2.
especially, above others, [A. V. more abundantly]: 2 Co.
12 4
mepiocoas, (mepioads, q- V-), adv., beyond measure, ex-
traordinarily (Eur. ; i.q. magnificently, Polyb., Athen.) ;
_ iq. greatly, exceedingly: exmncoecOa, Mk. x. 26; kpagery,
Mt. xxvii. 23 and GL T Tr WH in Mk. xv. 14; eppaive-
o$a, Acts xxvi. 11.*
mepiorrept, -Gs, 1), Hebr. 737, a dove: Mt. iii. 16; x. 16;
ext 12s eM 0 xi oe eked 242 T2277). asi
ii. 14,16. [From Hdt. down. ]*
mept-tépvw (lon. wepirdpvw); 2 aor. mepierepov; Pass.,
pres. wepirépvopar; pf. ptep. mepirerunpevos; 1 aor. mept-
erynOnv; [fr. Hes. down]; Sept. chiefly for 539; to cut
around [cf. mepi, III. 1]: ruvd, to circumcise, cut off one’s
prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only
the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day
after birth, but subsequently also ‘proselytes of right-
eousness’ were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced
into the number of his people; [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Cir-
cumcision; Oehler’s O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 87, 88;
Miiller, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21; Jn.
vil. 22; Actsvii. 8; xv.5; xvi. 3; xxi. 21; of the same
rite, Diod. 1,28; pass. and mid. to get one’s self circum-
cised, present one’s self to be circumeised, receive circum-
cision [cf. W. § 38, 3]: Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec.; 1 Co. vii. 18;
Gal. ii. 3; v.2sq.; vi. 12sq.3 with ra atdota added, Hat.
2, 36 and 104; Joseph. antt. 1, 10,5; ¢c. Ap. 1, 22. Since
by the rite of circumcision a man was separated from
the unclean world and dedicated to God, the verb is
transferred to denote the extinguishing of lusts and the
removal of sins, Col. ii. 11, cf. Jer.iv.4; Deut. x. 16, and
eccl. writ. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 3].*
wept-rlOnyt, 3 pers. plur. meperiO€aow (Mk. xv. 17; see
reff. in émeri@npc) ; 1 aor. weptebnxa; 2 aor. ptep. mepiOeis,
mepOevres; fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. to place
TEepipéepw
around, set about, [cf. mepi, III. 1]: revi rt, as ppaypov To
dumedkou, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; to put a garment on
one, Mt. xxvii. 28; oréavov, put on (encircle one’s head
with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31; Plat. Alcib. 2
p- 151 a.) 3 ri tun, to put or bind one thing around anoth-
er, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; Mk. xv. 36; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop.
twi Tt, to present, bestow, confer, a thing upon one (so in
class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down, as eAevOepiav, Hdt. 3, 142;
8d£av, Dem. p. 1417, 3; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq.; [L. and
S. s. v. IL]; 16 évoua, Sap. xiv. 21; Thue. 4, 87): reuqy,
WConxin23is) Esthyin20:*
Tepl-TOWN, -7)s, 7, (mepiTepvw), circumcision (on which
S€e TEPLTELV@) 5 a. prop. a. the act or rite of
circumcision : Jn. vii. 22 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. iv. 11; Gal.
v.11; Phil. iii. 5; of éx tps meper. (see ex, II. 7), the cir-
cumceised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ro.
iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the Jews,
Acts xi. 2; Gal. ii.12; Tit. i. 10; of dvres ex aepur. Col.
ives! i. B. the state of circumcision, the being cir=
cumcised: Ro. ii. 25-28; iii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. 63
vi. 15; Col. iii. 11; év wepirouy dv, circumcised, Ro. iv.
10. y:. by meton. ‘the circumcision’ for of mepitpy-
Gévres the circumcised, i.e. Jews: Ro. iii. 303; iv. 9, 12;
xv. 8; Gal. ii. 7-9; Eph. ii. 11; of ex mepiropns moroi,
Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris-
tians, Acts x. 45. b. metaph. a. of Chris-
tians: (jpeis éopev) 4 meptroun, separated from the un-
clear. multitude and truly consecrated to God, Phil. iii.
3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.)]. B. 7) meptropy axerpo-
moinros, the extinction of the passions and the removal
of spiritual impurity (see mepiréuve, fin.), Col. ii. 11°; 9
meptroui kapdias in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing ;
mepir. Xpuorod, of which Christ is the author, Col. ii. 11%.
(The noun zepirouy occurs three times in the O. T., viz.
Gen. xvii. 13; Jer. xi.16; for 990, Ex. iv. 26 ; besides
in Philo, whose tract wept mepitopis is found in Mangey’s
ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter’s ed. iv. pp. 282-284]; Jo
seph. antt. 1, 10,5; [13, 11 fin.; c. Ap. 2, 18, 1. 6]; plur.,
antt. 1, 12, 2.) *
mept-tperw ; to turn about [mepi, III. 1], to turn; to
transfer or change by turning : tt or Twa ets TL, a pers. OF
thing into some state; once so in the N. T. viz. o€ eis
paviay mepirperes, is turning thee mad, Acts xxvi. 24;
rods trapdvtas eis xapav mepieatpewe, Joseph. antt. 9,4. 45
To Oeiov eis dpyny mepitpamev, 2, 14,1. In various other
uses in Grk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat. on].*
mept-rpéxw : 2 aor. [epredpapov T Tr WH], ptep. repe-
Spaudvres [RGL]; fr. [Hom.], Theogn., Xen., Plat.
down ; to run around, run round about: with an acc. of
place, Mk. vi. 55. (Sept. twice for iw, Jer. v. 1; Am.
viii. 12.) *
aept-épw ; pres. pass. repupepopat; fr. Hdt. down; to
carry round: to bear about everywhere with one, ri,
2 Co. iv. 10; to carry hither and thither, robs xakos
éxyovras, Mk. vi. 55 (where the Evangelist wishes us to
conceive of the sick as brought to Jesus while he is
travelling about and visiting different places); pass. to
be driven [A. V. carried] about: mavti avép@ r7s didacxa-
sTepuppovew 507
Nas, i.e. in doubt and hesitation to be led away now to
this opinion, now to that, Eph. iv. 14. In Heb. xiii. 9
and Jude 12 for repipep. editors from Griesbach on have
restored mapadép.*
ATEpt-Ppovew, -@ ; 1. to consider or examine on all
sides [mepi, III. 1], i. e. carefully, thoroughly, (Arstph.
nub. 741). 2. (fr. epi, beyond, III. 2), to set one’s
self in thought beyond (exalt one’s self in thought above) a
pers. or thing; fo contemn, despise: twos (cf. Kiihner
§ 419, 1 b. vol. ii. p. 325), Tit. ii. 15 (4 Mace. vi. 9; vii.
16; xiv. 1; Plut., al. ; rod ¢jv, Plat. Ax. p.372; Aeschin.
dial. Socr. 3, 22).*
amepl-xwpos, -ov, (wept and yapos), lying round about,
neighboring, (Plut., Aelian., Dio Cass.); in the Scrip-
tures 7) mepixewpos, Sc. yn, the region round about [q. v- in
B. D.]: Mt. xiv. 35; Mk.i. 28; vi.55[(RGLtxt.]; Lk.
iii. 3; iv. 14,37; vii. 17; viii.37; Acts xiv. 6, (Gen. xix.
17; Deut. iii. 13, ete.; tHs yns THs meptyopov, Gen. xix.
28 cod. Alex.) ; 9 mepix. rod lopdavov, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii.
10 sq.; for 392 133, the region of the Jordan [ef. B. D.
u. s.]); by meton. for its inhabitants: Mt. iii.5. (7d
mepixwpov and ra mepixwpa, Deut. iii. 4; 1 Chr. v. 16; 2
Chr. iv. 17, etc.) *
amrept-pnpa, -ros, 70, (fr. repuaw ‘to wipe off all round’;
and this fr. wepi [q. v. III. 1], and Wade ‘to wipe,’ ‘rub’),
prop. what is wiped off; dirt rubbed off; offscouring,
scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as mepu-
xdOappa, q.v.- Suidas and other Greek lexicographers
s.v. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert public
calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an
offering to Poseidon; hence dpyipiov . . . repiyynua tov
matSiov nav yevoiro, (as if to say) let it become an expi-
atory offering, a ransom, for our child, i. e. in comparison
with the saving of our son’s life let it be to us a despi-
cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz-
sche; [cf. also Miller on Barn. ep. 4,9]). It is used
of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire
trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1;
18,1; [see Bp. Lghtft.’s note on the former passage ].*
aeptrepevopat; (to be épzepos, i. e. vain-glorious, brag-
gart, Polyb. 32, 6,5; 40, 6, 2; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14); to
boast one’s self [A. V. vaunt one’s self]: 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An-
tonin. 5,5; the compound éureprepeverGa is used of
self-display, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex-
tolling one’s self excessively. in Cic. ad Attic. 1, 14.
Hesych. mepmepeverat: xaterwaipera); cf. Osiander [or
Wetstein] on 1 Co. |. c. [Gataker on Mare. Antonin. 5,
5 p. 143].*
Tlepois [lit. ‘a Persian woman’], 7, ace.-ida, Persis, a
Christian woman: Ro. xvi. 12.*
mépuot, (fr. mepas), adv., last year; the year just past:
aro mwépvot, for a year past, a year ago, [W. 422 (393) ],
2 Co. viii. 19; ix. 2. ({Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Plut.,
Leian.) *
meTdopat, -@uat; a doubtful later Grk. form for the
earlier mérovat (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 581; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. p. 271 sq.; ef. W. 88 (84); [B. 65 (58); Veitch
s.v.]): to fly: in the N. T. found only in pres. ptcp. me-
ITétpos
topevos, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xiv. 6; xix. 17,
where since Griesbach zrerépevos has been restored.*
merewvos, -7), -dv, (Attic for mernvds, fr. méropat), flying,
winged; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. merewa
and ra merewvd, as subst., flying or winged animals, birds :
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4 [GL T Tr WH]; Lk. xii. 24; Ro. i.
23; Jas. ill. 7; ra mer. ov ovpavod (Sept. for own Ay ;
see ovpavds, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i.e. flying in the
heavens (air), Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 4
[Rec.], 82; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 58; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12 [here
LT Tr WH om. ra]; xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]*
méropat; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ys to fly: Rev.
iv. 7; vill. 13; xii. 14; xiv. 6; xix. 17; see merdouac.*
métpa, -as, 7, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for yd and 734;
a rock, ledge, cliff; a. prop.: Mt. vii. 24 sq. ; XXVil.
51,60; Mk. xv. 46; Lk. vi. 48; 1 Co. x.4 (on which see
mvevparikds, 3 a.); a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.;
rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6, 13. b. arock, large stone:
Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like
a rock, by reason of his firmness and strength of soul :
Mt. xvi. 18 [some interpp. regard the distinction (gen-
erally observed in classic Greek ; see the Comm. and cf.
Schmidt, Syn. ch. 51, §§ 4-6) between zérpa, the massive
living rock, and mérpos, a detached but large fragment,
as important for the correct understanding of this pas-
sage; others explain the different genders here as due
first to the personal then to the material reference.
Cf. Meyer, Keil, al.; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].*
Tlétpos, -ov, 6, (an appellative prop. name, signifying
‘a stone,’ ‘arock,’ ‘a ledge’ or ‘cliff’; used metaph. of a
soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock,
Soph. O. R. 334; Eur. Med. 28; Here. fur. 1397; answer-
ing to the Chald. Kndas, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter, the
surname of the apostle Simon. He was a native of
Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see
"Iwdvvns, 8, and "Iwvas, 2), and dwelt with his wife at
Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14; Mk.i. 30; Lk. iv. 38, cf. 1 Co.
ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol-
lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i.
16; Lk. v. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com-
panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17; Lk. v.10; Jn. i. 40-42
(41-43); and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and
firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu-
ture establishment of the kingdom of God, he honored
with the name of Peter, Jn. i. 42 (43); Mt. xvi. 18; Mk.
iii. 16. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn,
and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and
John the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima-
cy of his divine Master. After having for some time
presided, in connection with John and James the brother
of our Lord [see ‘laxwBos, 3], over the affairs of the
Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad
to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii.9; 1 Co.
ix.5; 1 Pet. v.13; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; for Papias
states that Peter employed Mark as ‘interpreter’ (€pun-
veutns), an aid of which he had no need except beyond
the borders of Palestine, especially among those wha
spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word
TET PwONS
‘interpreter’ here, see Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In-
trod. p. xxix. sqq.]). But just as, on the night of the
betrayal, Peter proved so far faithless to himself as thrice
to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some
time afterwards at Antioch he made greater conces-
sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than Christian
liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul
for his weakness and ‘dissimulation’ (ddéxpiots), Gal.
ii. 11 sqq. Nevertheless, in the patristic age Jewish
Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of
Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence
of their narrow views and practices. ‘This is not the
place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions
concerning Peter’s being the founder of the church at
Rome and bishop of it for twenty-five years and more;
the discussion of them may be found in Hase, Protes-
tant. Polemik gegen die rom.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p.
123 sqq.; [ef. Schaff, Church History, 1882, vol. i. §§ 25,
26; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2, vol. xi. p. 524 sqq., and (for
reff.) p. 537 sq.]. This one thing seems to be evident
from Jn. xxi. 18 sqq., that Peter suffered death by cru-
cifixion [cf. Keiladloc.; others doubt whether Christ’s
words contain anything more than a general prediction
of martyrdom]. If he was crucified at Rome, it must
have been several years after the death of Paul. [Cf.
BB. DD. and reff. u.s.] He is called in the N. T., at
one time, simply Siuwv (once Supeoy, Acts xv. 14), and
(and that, too, most frequently [see B.D. s. v. Peter, sub
fin. (p. 2459 Am. ed.)]), Iérpos and Kndas (q. v.), then
again Sipe Ierpos, Mt. xvi.16; Lk.v.8; Jn.[i. 42 (43) ];
vi. [8], 68; xiii. 6, 9,24, [36]; xviii. 10, 15, 25; xx. 2, 65
xxi. 2 sq. 7, 11,15; once Supedv Herpos (2 Pet. i. 1 where
L WH txt. Sipov) ; Siuwv 6 Neydpevos Terpos, Mt. iv. 18;
X. 23; Sivov 6 émixadovpevos Herpos, Acts x. 18; xi. 13;
Sipev os émtxadetrat Ierpos, Acts x. 5, 32.
meTpwdns, -es, (fr. wérpa and eidos; hence prop. ‘ rock-
like,’ ‘having the appearance of rock’), rocky, stony: rd
metpa@des and ra metp@odn, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii.
5, 20; Mk. iv. 5,16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45
(44), Plut., al.) *
mnhyavov, -ov, 7d, [thought to be fr. ayyvuse to make
solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; cf. Vaniéek
p- 457], rue: Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist. plant. 1, 3, 4;
Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52); Plut., al.) [B. D.s.v.; Tristram,
Nat. Hist. ete. p.478; Carruthers in the “ Bible Educa-
tor,” iii. 216 sq. ]*
my, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for pyn, py,
pn; @ fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Ree. in 12;
2 Pet. ii. 17; vdaros dAXopevov, In. iv. 14; trav tddrowv,
Rey. viii. 10; xiv. 7; xvi. 4; of a well fed by a spring,
Jn. iv. 6. Cwys myai bdarwv, Rev. vii. 17; 9 7. r. USaros
ths Cans, Rev. xxi. 6, (on both pass. see in (wn, p. 274°) ;
1) 7 Tov aiparos, a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29.*
ahyvupt: 1 aor. émnéa; fr. Hom. down; to make fast,
to fix; to fasten together, to build by fastening together :
oxnynv, Heb. viii. 2 [A. V. pitched. Comp.: mpoo-mn-
yrupe. | *
mySdadtov, -ov, 7d, (fr. m8dv the blade of an oar, an
508
TiKpaives
oar), fr. Hom. down, aship’s rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on
the plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th
ed., p. 183 sqq.; B.D.s.v. Ship (2); cf. Graser, Das
Seewesen des Alterthums, in the Philologus for 1865,
p- 266 sq.]; Jas. iii. 4.*
anAlkos, -n, -ov, (fr. HALE [?]), interrog., how great, how
large: in a material reference (denoting geometrical
magnitude as disting. fr. arithmetical, méaos) (Plat. Meno
p- 82d.; p.83e.; Ptol. 1, 3,3; Zech. ii. 2, [6]), Gal. vi.
11, where cf. Winer, Riickert, Hilgenfeld, [Hackett in
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epistle; but see Bp. Lghtft. or Meyer].
in an ethical reference, i. q. how distinguished, Heb. vii.
4.™
am)éds, -ov, 6, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a.
clay, which the potter uses (Is. xxix. 16; xli. 25; Nah.
iii. 14): Ro. ix. 21. b. i. q. mud [wet ‘clay’]: Jn.
ix.6, 11, 14.sq-*
apa. -as, 7, a wallet (a leathern sack, in which travel-
lers and shepherds carried their provisions) [A. V. scrip
(q. v- in B.D.)]: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix.3; x. 4;
xxii. 35 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian.,
Leian., al.; with rév Bpwpdrev added, Judith xiii. 10.) *
wiXUs. gen. myyews (not found in the N. T.), gen. plur.
mnxav contr. fr. Ionic mnxéov (Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17;
1 K. vii. 3 (15), 39 (2); Esth. vii.9; Ezek. xl. 5) acc. to
later usage, for the earlier and Attic myer, which is
common in the Sept. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 245sq.; [ WH.
App. p. 157]; W. §9, 2e.), 6, the fore-arm i.e. that part
of the arm between the hand and the elbow-joint (Hom.
Od. 17,38; Il. 21,166, ete.) ; hence a cubit, (ell, Lat. ulna),
a measure of length equal to the distance from the joint
of the elbow to the tip of the middle finger [i.e. about
one foot and a half, but its precise length varied and is
disputed; see B. D. s. v. Weights and Measures, II. 1]:
Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [on these pass. cf. ndcxia, 1 a.] 5
Jn. xxi.8; Rev. xxi. 17. (Sept. very often for 78.) *
mato (Doric for mefw, cf. B. 66 (58)): 1 aor. ériaca;
1 aor. pass. émuda ny ; 1. to lay hold of: twa rs
xetpds, Acts iii. 7 [Theoer. 4, 35]. 2. to take, cap-
ture: fishes, Jn. xxi. 3, 10; Onpiov, pass., Rev. xix. 20,
(Cant. ii. 15). to take i.e. apprehend: a man, in order
to imprison him, Jn. vii. 30, 32, 44; vill. 20; x. 39; xi.
57; Acts xii. 4; 2 Co. xi. 32. [Comp.: tmo-mafo.]*
métw: pf. pass. ptep. memeopevos; fr. Hom. down; to
press, press together: Lk. vi. 38. Sept. once for 7711, Mic.
Vi. 15.7
mBavoroyla, -as, 4, (fr. meOavoddyos; and this fr. mOavés,
on which see zecOds, and Adyos), speech adapted to per-
suade, discourse in which probable arguments are ad-
duced ; once so in class. Grk., viz. Plat. Theaet. p. 162 e.;
in a bad sense, persuasiveness of speech, specious dis-
course leading others into error: Col. ii. 4, and several
times in eccl. writers.*
[miOds, see etOds and cf. I, «.]
mpatve: fut. mexpava; Pass., pres. mexpaivopat; 1 aor.
emtxpavOnv; (ameKxpés, q- V-) 5 1. prop. to make bitter:
ra Udara, pass., Rev. viii. 11; Hv xotdiav, to produce
a bitter taste in the stomach (Vulg. amarico), Rev. x
miKpia
9 sq. 2. trop. to embitter, exasperate, i.e. render
angry, indignant ; pass. to be embittered, irritated, (Plat.,
Dem., al.) : mpds teva, Col. iii. 19 (Athen. 6 p. 242.¢.; émi
twa, Ex. xvi. 20; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 15; 1 Esdr. iv. 31;
[év ru, Ruth i. 20]); contextually i. q. to visit with bitter-
ness, to grieve, (deal bitterly with), Job xxvii. 2; 1 Mace.
iii. 7. [Comp.: mapa-mxpaive. |*
mukpla, -as, 7, (mixpds), bitterness: yon mexpias, i. q-
XoAW mxpa [W. 34,3 b.; B. § 132, 10], bitter gall, i. q.
extreme wickedness, Acts viii. 23; pita muxpias [reff. as
above], a bitter root, and so producing bitter fruit, Heb.
xii. 15 (fr. Deut. xxix. 18 cod. Alex.), cf. Bleek ad loc. ;
metaph. bitterness, i.e. bitter hatred, Eph. iv. 31; of
speech, Ro. iii. 14 after Ps. ix. 28 (x.7). (In various
uses in Sept., [Dem., Aristot.], Theophr., Polyb., Plut.,
al"
muKkpés, -a, -dv, [fr.r. meaning ‘to cut,’ ‘prick’; Vaniéek
534; Curtius §100; Fick i. 145], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for 1); bitter: prop. Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to 7d yAukv);
metaph. harsh, virulent, Jas. iii. 14.*
mupas, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], bitterly: metaph.
éxXavee, i.e. with poignant grief, Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxii.
62 [here WH br. the el.]; cf. aixpov Saxpvov, Hom. Od.
4, 153.*
TIwaros, [L] Tr better TWaros ([on the accent in
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; cf. Chandler § 326; B.
p- 6n.]; W. §6,1 m.), T WH incorrectly Me:dGros [but
see Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 sq.; WH. App. p. 155; and cf. e,
t], (a Lat. name, i.q. ‘armed with a pilum or javelin,’ like
Torquatus i. q. ‘adorned with the collar or neck-chain’;
[so generally ; but some would contract it from pileatus
i. e. ‘ wearing the felt cap’ (pileus), the badge of a manu-
mitted slave; cf. Leyrer in Herzog as below; Plumptre
in B. D. s. v. Pilate (note) ]), -ov, 6 [on the use of the art.
with the name cf. W. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the
fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judea and
Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus
Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some
writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s. v.) call Pilate the sixth procura-
tor, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had
charge for a time, during the absence of Archelaus at
Rome, shortly after the death of Herod; cf. Joseph.
antt. 17, 9, 3.] He was sent into Judea in the year
26 A.D., and remained in office ten years; (cf. Keim,
Jesus von Naz. iii. p. 485 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 226 sq.]).
Although he saw that Jesus was innocent, yet, fearing
that the Jews would bring an accusation against him be-
fore Caesar for the wrongs he had done them, and dread-
ing the emperor’s displeasure, he delivered up Jesus to
their blood-thirsty demands and ordered him to be cru-
cified. At length, in consequence of his having ordered
the slaughter of the Samaritans assembled at Mt. Geri-
zim, Vitellius, the governor of Syria and father of the Vi-
tellius who was afterwards emperor, removed him from
office and ordered him to go to Rome and answer their
accusations; but before his arrival Tiberius died. Cf.
Joseph. antt. 18, 2-4 and ch. 6,5; b.j. 2, 9,2 and 4; Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 38; Tac. ann. 15,44. Eusebius (h.e. 2,
509
Tivaé
7, and Chron. ad ann. I. Gaii) reports that he died by his
own hand. Various stories about his death are related
in the Evangelia apocr. ed. Tischendorf p. 426 sqq.
[Eng. trans. p. 231 sqq.]. He is mentioned in the N.T.
in Mt. xxvii. 2 sqq.; Mk. xv. 1 sqq.; Lk. iii. 1; xiii. 15
xxiii. 1 sqq.; Jn. xviii. 29 sqq.; xix. 1sqq.; Acts iii. 13;
iv. 27; xiii. 28; 1 Tim. vi. 13. <A full account of him is
given in Win. RWB.s. v. Pilatus; [BB. DD. ibid.];
Ewald, Geschichte Christus’ u. seiner Zeit, ed. 3 p. 82
sqq.; Leyrer in Herzog xi. p. 663 sqq. [ed. 2 p. 685 sqq.]}
Renan, Vie de Jésus, 14me éd. p. 413 sqq. [Eng. trans.
(N. Y. 1865) p. 333 sqq.]; Alépper in Schenkel iv. p.
581 sq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. §17¢. p. 252 sqq.;
[ Warneck, Pont. Pilatus u.s.w. (pp. 210. Gotha, 1867) ].”
wiprdynpe (a lengthened form of the theme IAEQ,
whence méos, mAnpns [cf. Curtius § 366 ]): 1 aor. émAnoa;
Pass., 1 fut. mAjoOjcopat; 1 aor. emAnoOnv; fr. Hom. on;
Sept. for x20, also for awit (to AY) and pass. piv
(to be full) ; to fill: ti, Lk. v.75; ri twos [W. § 30, 8 b. 1
a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48; [Jn. xix. 29
RG]; in pass., Mt. oe 10; Acts xix. 29; [ex ris dopijs,
Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg.; cf. W.u.s. note; B.§132,12]. what
wholly takes possession of the mind is said to fill it:
pass. @dBov, Lk. v. 26; AdpBovs, Acts iii. 10; dvoias, Lk.
vi. 11; ¢ndov, Acts v.17; xiii. 45; Aupod, Lk. iv. 28; Acts
iii. 10; mvevparos dyiov, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67; Acts ii. 43 iv.
8,31; ix.17; xiii.9. prophecies are said rAnoOqva,
i. e. fo come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. xxi.
22G LT Tr WH (for Rec. wAnpoOjvac). time is said
mAnabnva, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. Jinished,
elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304); B. 267 (230)]; ii.
6, 21 sq.5 80 x03, Job xv. 32; and xbo to (ful-) fill the
time, i. e. to complete, fill up, Gen xxix. 27; Job xxxix. 2.
[Comp. : éu-mimAnpe. | *
awimpaw (for the more common mipmpyue [ef. Curtius
§ 378, Vaniéek p. 510 sq.]): [pres. inf. pass. myypmpao Gar;
but RG-L Tr WH aiumpacba fr. the form mipmpnue (Tdé.
éumirpac Gat, q. Vv.) ]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [(yet only the
aor. fr. rpjw) | down; to blow, to burn, [onthe connection
betw. these meanings cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. mpnde] ;
in the Scriptures four times to cause to swell, to render
tumid, [cf. Soph. Lex. 8. v.]: yaorépa, Num. v. 22; pass. to
swell, become swollen, of parts of the body, Num. v. 21, 27:
Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in éummpdw). [COMP. ép-
qi-mpdaw. |*
mwaklStov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of mevaxis, -idos), [Aristot.,
al.]; a. a small tablet. b. spec. a writing-tab-
let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. mwvaxida; see the foll. word];
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74.*
[mvaxts, -i8os, 4, i.q. mevaxidcov (q. v-): Lk. i. 63 Trmrg.
(Epict., Plut., Artem., al.) *]
atvat, -axos, 6, (com. thought to be fr. HINOS a pine,
and so prop. ‘a pine-board’; ace. to the conjecture of
Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. mvaé for wAd€ [i.e
anything broad and flat (cf. Eng. plank)] with « in-
serted, as in muwurds for mvvrés [ace. to Fick i. 146 fr.
Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff]), fr. Hom. down; l. a
board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter: Mt. xiv. 8,
Tivo 510
11; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lchm. br.], 28; Lk. xi. 39; Hom. Od.
144: 16, 495 als
mivw; impf. émvov; fut. mionae [cf. W. 90 sq. (86) ], 2
pers. sing. mieoat (Lk. xvii. 8 [(see reff. in xataxavydo-
pa) }); pf. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) mémoxe RG, but
LT WH mrg. plur. -cay, for which L ed. ster. Tr txt.
WH txt. read rémrexay (see yivouat); 2 aor. émov, impv.
mie (Lk. xii. 19), inf. meety ([ Mt. xx. 22; xxvii. 34 (not
Tdf.); Mk. x. 38]; Acts xxiii. 12 [not WH], 21; Ro.
xiv. 21 [not WH], etc.), and in colloquial form wiv (Lehm.
in Jn. iv. 9; Rev. xvi. 6), and wetv (T Tr WH in Jn. iv.
7,9sq.; T WH in 1 Co. ix. 4; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6; Tin Mt.
xxvii. 34 (bis); WH in Acts xxiii. 12, 21; Ro. xiv. 21,
and often among the var. of the codd.) —on these forms
see [esp. WH. App. p. 170]; Fritzsche, De conformatione
N. T. critica etc. p. 27 sq.; B. 66 (58) sq.; [Curtius, Das
Verbum, ii. 103]; Sept. for 7nw; [fr. Hom. down]; to
drinksabsols, Gk. xo 19603n. civ. 7% 10; A’ Cox. 255
figuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re-
fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, Jn. vii. 37 ;
on the various uses of the phrase éo@iewv x. wivew see in
écbiw, a.; Tpwyew x. wive, of those living in fancied
security, Mt. xxiv. 38; mivw with an acc. of the thing, to
drink a thing (cf. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [G Tom.
WH br. the cl. ], 31; xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; xvi. 18; Rev.
xvi. 6; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15; xii. 29; Ro.
xiv. 21; 1Co. x. 4 [ef. W. § 40, 3b.]; 76 aiva of Christ,
see aia, fin.; ro rornpiov i. e. what is in the cup, 1 Co. x.
21; xi. 27, etc. (see wornptoy, a.). yn is said mivew roy
terdv, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Heb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 11;
Hdt. 3,117; 4, 198; Verg. ecl. 3, 111 sat prata bibe-
runt). mive ek w. a gen. of the vessel out of which
one drinks, 逫 rod motnpiov, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23;
1 Co. x. 4 [cf. above]; xi. 28, (Arstph. eqq. 1289); é« w.
a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one
drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; é« rod Udaros, Jn. iv.
13 sq.; ék Tov olvov (or Oupov), Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3 [L
om. Tr WH br. rod otvov]; amd w. a gen. of the drink,
Lk. xxii. 18. (Cf. B. §132, 7; W. 199 (187). Comp.:
kata-, cup-tive. |
mdrns, -nTos, 7, (miwv fat), fairness: Ro. xi.17. (Aris-
tot., Theophr., al.; Sept. for 1w1-) ~
mrpacke : impf. érimpackoy; pf. mémpaxa; Pass., pres.
ptep. murpackdopevos; pf. ptcp. mempapevos ; 1 aor. émpa-
Onv ; (fr. mepdw to cross, to transport to a distant land) ;
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for 13; to sell: ri,
Mt. xiii. 46 [on the use of the pf., cf. Soph. Glossary ete.
Introd. § 82,4]; Acts ii. 45; iv. 34; v.4; w. gen. of price,
Mt. xxvi. 9; Mk. xiv. 5; Jn. xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14); rua,
one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25; hence metaph. werpape-
vos umd Thy duapriay, [A. V. sold under sin] i. e. entirely
under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14
(€mpaOnoay rod roijoat 76 rovnpor, 2 K. xvii. 17; 1 Mace.
i. 15, cf. 1 K. xx. (xxi.) 25; w.a dat. of the master to
whom one is sold as a slave, Lev. xxv. 39; Deut. xv. 12;
XXxvill. 68; Bar. iv. 6; Soph. Trach. 252; éaurév rum, of
one bribed to give himself up wholly to another’s will,
T® Dirirrw, Dem. p. 148, 8).*
TinttTe
wlrrw; [impf. émimrov (Mk. xiv. 35 T Trmrg. WH)];
fut. mecodpat; 2 aor. éwecov and acc. to the Alex. form
(received everywhere by Lchm. [exe. Lk. xxiii. 30],
Tdf. [exc. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exe. ibid.], WH; and also
used by R Gin Rev.i.17; v.14; vi.13; xi. 16; xvii. 10)
éreoa (cf. [WH. App. p.164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 724 sq.; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and
see dmépxopat init.) ; pf. rémrwa, 2 pers. sing. -xes (Rev.
ii. 5 T WH; see xomidw), 3 pers. plur. -cav (Rev. xviit
3, Led. ster. Tr txt. WH txt.; see yivoua); (fr. ETO,
as rikrw fr. TEKQ [cf. Curtius, Etymol. § 214; Ver-
bum, ii. p. 398]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 53);
to fall ; used 1. of descent from a higher place
to a lower; a. prop. to fall (either from or upon,
i.q. Lat. incido, decido): éni w. acc. of place, Mt. x. 29;
xiii. 5, [7], 8; xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.];
Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. 6 [here T Tr WH kxaraz.], 8 Rec.;
Rev. viii. 10; ets re (of the thing that is entered; into),
Mt. xv.14; xvii. 15; Mk. iv. 7 [Lmrg. émi] sq.; Lk. vi.
39 RG Lurg. (but Ltxt. T Tr WH euzinr.); viii. 8 GL
T Tre WH, [143 xiv. 5 PT ie Wil) 5) dn xi eee eis
(upon) tiv yar, Rev. vi. 13; ix.1; év péoe, w. gen. of the
thing, Lk. viii. 7; mapa ryv 6ddv, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4;
Lk. viii.5; to fall from or down: foll. by azo w. gen. of
place, Mt. xv. 27; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. é«; Lk. xvi. 21];
Acts xx. 9; foll. by é« w. gen. of place, [Mk. xiii. 25 L T
Tr WH]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1; i. q. to be thrust down, Lk.
285 RSE b. metaph.: od mimret emi tiva 6 HALos, i. e.
the heat of the sun dees not strike upon them or in-
commode them, Rev. vii. 16; [dyAvs x. oxoros, Acts xiii.
11 LT Tr WH]; 6 wdnpos minre: emi twa, the lot falls
upon one, Acts i. 26; hoBos mime: emi twa, falls upon or
seizes one, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; [76
mvevpa TO dyov, Acts x. 44 Lehm.]; mint bo xpicw, to
fall under judgment, come under condemnation, James v.
12 [where Rec." eis imoxprow]. 2. of descent from
an erect to a prostrate position (Lat. labor, ruo; prolabor,
procido ; collabor, ete.) ; a. properly; a. to fall
down: émt Aidov, Lk. xx. 18; AlOos mimret ext twa, Mt.
xxi. 44 [Tom. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18;
70 Spos emi twa, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi. 16. B. to be
prostrated, fall prostrate; of those overcome by terror
or astonishment or grief: yauai, Jn. xviii. 6; eis rd Edados,
Acts xxii. 7; émi thy yay, Acts ix. 4; [em mpdocwmor,
Mt. xvii. 6]; or under the attack of an evil spirit: émt
rns yas, Mk. ix. 20; or falling dead suddenly : mpos rods
modas Tivos @s vexpos, Rev. i. 17; meoav e&éyrv&e, Acts v.
53 mint. rapa (LT Tr WH pos) rovs 1odas reves, ibid. 10;
absol. 1 Co. x. 8; orduare payaipas, Lk. xxi. 24; absol. of
the dismemberment of corpses by decay, Heb. iii. 17 (Num.
Kivs29, 32); y. to prostrate one’s self; used now of
suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship
to one: émi ris ys, Mk. xiv. 35; ptep. with rpockuveiv, as
finite verb, Mt. ii. 113; iv. 9; xviii. 26; mimrew x. mpoo-
xuveiv, Rev. v. 14; xix. 4; émeoa mpooxuyjoat, Rev. xxii. 8;
nint. els rovs modus (avtov), Mt. xviii. 29 Rec.; ets [T Tr
WH xpos] r. rodas rivds, Jn. Xi. 32; mpods Tr. wodas Tivos,
Mk. v. 22; [mapa rovs 7odas tivds, Lk. viii. 41] ; eumpooder
Wicidsia
tv moday Tivos, Rev. xix. 10; €va@miov tivos, Rev. iv. 10;
v. 8; emi mpdcwrov, Mt. xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; émt mpdo-
Tov mapa Tovs mddas Twos, Lk. xvii. 163 weowy emi rods
mddas rpogexurnoe, Acts x. 25; meoav ext mpdowmoy mpoo-
cuvnoet, 1 Co. xiv. 253 é€xi ta mpdcwma Kat mpockvveir,
Rev. vii. 11 [émt mpédcwmov Rec.]; xi. 16. 8. to fall
out, fall from: OpiE ée ths xepadys meceirat, i. q. shall
perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Rec. €. to fall down,
fall in ruin: of buildings, walls, etc., Mt. vii. 25, [27];
Lk. vi. 49 (where T Tr WH ovverece); Heb. xi. 30;
Oikos én oikov winter, Lk. xi. 17 [see emi, C. I. 2.¢.]; aup-
yos emi teva, Lk. xiii. 43; oxnvy y memroxvia, the tabernacle
that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of
David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay
[ef. oxnyn, fin.], Acts xv. 16. of acity: émece, i. e. has
been overthrown, destroyed, Rev. xi. 13; xiv. 8; xvi. 19;
xviii. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (li.) 8). b. metaph. a.
to be cast down from a state of prosperity : médev wénraxas,
from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain-
ment thou hast declined, Rev. ii. 5 G LT Tr WH (see
above ad init.). B. to fall from a state of upright-
uess, i.e. fo sin: opp. to éorava, 1 Co. x. 12; opp. to
ornxew, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by
the sinning [cf. W. § 31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4; to fall into a
state of wickedness, Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt.
[see rive]. y- to perish, i.e. to come to an end, dis-
appear, cease: of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L T Tr WH [R. V.
fail]; to lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings,
precepts, etc., Lk. xvi. 17 (Gare od yapai meceirat 6 Te dv
eixns, Plat. Euthyphr. § 17; irrita cadunt promissa, Liv.
2,31). i.g.to be removed from power by death, Rev. xvii.
10; to fail of participating in, miss a share in, the Mes-
sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22]; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see
év, I. 5 f.).
Mapa-, Tept-, mpoo-, Tup- TimTe. | *
Tlior8la, -as, 7, Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded
by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and
Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; xiv. 24. [B.D. s.v. Pisi-
dia. | *
Tluo (10s, -a, -ov, i. gq. TMsordexds, belonging to Pisidia:
’Avtioxera 7) Tuovdia, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia
(see “Avridxeca, 2): Acts xiii. 14 L T Tr WH*
morevw ; impf. émicrevov; fut. muorevow; 1 aor. ént-
orevoa; pf. meriorevxa; plupf. (without augm., cf. W.
§ 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]) memorevneww (Acts xiv. 23);
Pass., pf. remiorevpar; 1 aor. émicredOnv; (murrds); Sept.
for }*87; in class. Grk. fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Thue.
down; to believe, i.e. 1. intrans. to think to be
true; to be persuaded of; to credit, place confidence
in; a. univ.: the thing believed being evident
from the preceding context, Mt. xxiv. 23, [26]; Mk. xiii.
21; 1 Co. xi. 18; w. an ace. of the thing, Acts xiii. 41
(LT Tr WH 6 for Ree. 6); to credit, have confidence,
foll. by dre, Acts ix. 26; ruvi, to believe one’s words, Mk.
Xvi. 13sq.; 1Jn.iv. 1; revi dre, Jn. iv. 21 ; T@ Weve, 2 Th.
ti. 115 wept twos, ore, Jn. ix. 18. b. spec., in a moral
and religious reference, miorevew is used in the N. T. of
tke conviction and trust to which a man is impelled by a
ComP.: dva-, avrt-, dro-, €k-, év-, €mt-, KaTa-,
oll
Tio TEVM
certain inner and higher prerogative and law of his soul;
thus it stands a. absol. to trust in Jesus or in God
as able to aid either in obtaining or in doing something:
Mt. viii. 13; xxi. 22; Mk. v. 36; ix. 238q.; Lk. viii. 50;
Jn. xi. 40; foll. by 6rc, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi. 23; [Heb. xi.
6]; T@ Ady@, @ (6v) eirev 6 "Inaods, Jn. iv. 50. B.
of the credence given to God’s messengers and their words,
w. a dat. of the person or thing: Moioei, Jn. v. 46. to
the prophets, Jn. xii. 38; Acts xxiv. 14; xxvi. 27; Ro.
x. 16; éxi maow ois €dddnoav oi mpoPpyrat, to place reli-
ance on etc. Lk. xxiv. 25. to an angel, Lk.i. 20; foll.
by or, ibid. 45. to John the Baptist, Mt. xxi. 25
(26), 32; Mk. xi. 31; Lk. xx.5. to Christ’s words,
Jn. iii. 12; v. 38, 46 sq.; vi. 30; villi. 45 sq.; x. [37], 38°;
trois €pyos of Christ, ibid. 38°. to the teachings of evan-
gelists and apostles, Acts viii. 12; 77 dAnOeia, 2 Th.
ii. 12; émecrevOn 76 papruptor, the testimony was believed,
2Th.i. 10 [ef. W. § 39,1a.; B. 175 (152) ]; r9 -ypagj, In.
ii. 22. é€v r@ evayyeAig, to put faith in the gospel, Mx.
i. 15 [B. 174 (151 sq.); ef. W. 213 (200 sq.)] (Ignat. ad
Philad. 8, 2 [(but see Zahn’s note) ; cf. Jn. iii. 15 in y. be-
low]). y. used especially of the faith by which a
man embraces Jesus, i.e. a conviction, full of joyful
trust, that Jesus is the Messiah—the divinely appointed
author of eternal salvation in the kingdom of God, con-
joined with obedience to Christ: mor. tov vidv rod beov
eivat "Incovv Xpiorov, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; émorevOn (was
believed on [ef. W. § 39, 1 a.; B. 175 (152) ]) év xdope,
1 Tim. iii. 16. the phrase morevewy es tov Incovr, eis T-
viov Tov Oeov, etc., is very common; prop. to have a faith
directed unto, believing or in faith to give one’s self up to,
Jesus, etc. (cf. W. 213 (200 sq.); [B. 174 (151)]): Mt.
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 [RGL Tr txt.]; Jn. ii. 11; iii. 15
RG, 16, 18, 36; vi. 29, 35, 40, 47 [RGL]; vii. 5, [38],
39, 48; viii. 30; ix. 35 sq.; x. 42; xi. 25sq. 45,48; xii.
11, 37, 42, 44, [46]; xiv. 1,12; xvi. 9; xvii. 20; Acts x.
43; xix.4; Ro. x. 14; Gal. ii. 16; Phil. i. 29; 1 Jn. v. 10;
1 Pet. i. 8; eis rd has, In. xii. 36; eis TO Gvopa avrov, Jn.
i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1Jn. v.13; 7@ dvdp. adrov, to com-
mit one’s self trustfully to the name (see évoya, 2 p. 448°),
1 Jn. iii. 23; é@ adrov, emt Tov Kvptov, to have a faith di-
rected towards, ete. (see emi, C. I. 2g.a. p. 235° [ef. W.
and B. u.s., also B. § 147, 25]): Mt. xxvii. 42 T Tr txt.
WH dns ni 15°L txt: 5 Acts ix. 425 x1.17; xvii 31x
19, [(ef. Sap. xii. 2)]; és’ air@, to build one’s faith on,
to place one’s faith upon, [see emi, B. 2 a. y. p. 233°; B.
aes. | 2 ko. ix. 33's: x. 125° 2 Timi 16) 1 Pet nig pies
avr@, to put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [L mrg.; ef. T Tr
WH also (who prob. connect €v airé with the foll. éyy ;
ef. Westcott, Com. ad loc., Meyer, al.)] (cf. Jer. xii. 6;
Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where mor. €v tux means to put
confidence in one, to trust one; [ef. Mk. i. 15 above,
B. fin.]); €v rovT@ morevouer, on this rests our faith
[A. V. by this we believe}, Jn. xvi. 30; with the simple
dative, 7 xupi@, to (yield faith to) believe [ef. B. 173
(151)]: Mt. xxvii.42 RGLTrmrg.; Acts v.14; xviii.
8; supply rovrw before of in Ro. x. 14; ¢o trust in Christ
[God], 2 Tim. i. 12; da twos, through one’s agency to
7LO TEU®
be brought to faith, Jn. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; 8:4 Inaov eis
§edv, 1 Pet. i.21 RGTrmrg.; da trys yxdpiros, Acts xviii.
27; dua rou Adyou avdray eis eve, Jn. xvii. 20; dia te, In.
iv. 39, [41], 42; xiv.11. morevq foll. by 67: with a sen-
tence in which either the nature and dignity of Christ
or his blessings are set forth: Jn. vi. 69; viii. 24; x. 38°
RG; xi. 27, [42]; xiii.19; [xiv.10]; xvi. 27, 30; xvii.
8, 21; 1 Jn.v.1, 5; Ro. vi. 8; 1 Th. iv.143; pot or, Jn.
xiv. 11; ri, Jn. xi. 26; mucrevo ocobqva, Acts xv. 11;
the simple morevew is used emphatically, of those who
acknowledge Jesus as the saviour and devote themselves
to him: Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds atr3]; Lk. viii. 12 sq.;
xxii. 67; Jn.i.50 (51); iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44; vi.
86, 64; ix. 38; x. 25sq.; xii. 39, 47 Rec.; xvi. 30; xx.
31; Acts v. 14; [xiii. 39]; xv. 5; xviii. 8; [xxi 25]; Ro.
Li16* ii. 22); iv. 11; x4; xv. 135 2 Co.ivii3;, Ephsi.
13, [19]; 2 Th.i. 10; Heb. iv. 3; with && drys capdias
added, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; w.a dat. of instr. ckapdia, Ro.
x. 10; ptep. pres. of muorevovres, as subst.: Acts il. 44;
Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal. iii. 22; [Eph. i.19]; 1 Th.
LZ; i.'10, 13; 2 Th. i. 10 Ree.;. 1.Pet. ii. 73:4. gq. who
are on the point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 24sq.; aor.
ériotevoa (marking entrance into a state; see Baouevo,
fin.), J became a believer, a Christian, [A. V. believed]:
Acts iv. 4; viii. 13; xiii. 12,48; xiv.1; xv. 7; xvii. 12,
34; Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 2,115; with the addi-
tion of émt tov kvpiov (see above), Acts ix.42; ptep. m-
otevoas, Acts xi. 21; xix. 2; 6 mucretoas, Mk. xvi. 16;
plur., ibid. 17; Actsiv.32; of memrrevkdres, they that have
believed (have become believers): Acts xix. 18; xxi. 20;
[on (John’s use of) the tenses of muzrevw see Westcott on
1 Jn. iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul’s
conception of 76 muorevew eis Xpiordy, the prominent ele-
ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested
and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus,
particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap-
pears esp. in Ro. iii. 25; iv. 24; x. 9; 1Th. iv. 14; but
in John’s conception, it is the metaphysical relationship
of Christ with God and close ethical intimacy with him,
as well as the true ‘life’ to be derived from Christ as
its source; cf. Riickert, Das Abendmahl, p. 251. More-
over, meorevew is used by John of various degrees of
faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with-
in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, Jn. ii. 23 (ef. 24) ;
viii. 31; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus
as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah,
Jn. vii. 31; and to signify that one’s faith is preserved,
strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it
ought to reach, xi. 15; xiii. 19; xiv. 29; xix.35; xx. 31;
1 Jn. v. 13° Rec.; [cf. reff. s.v. iors, fin.]. muorrevew
is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded
that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by
that fact God declared him to be his Son and the Mes-
siah: Jn. xx. 8, 25,29; évrq xapdia mor. ott 6 Oeds adrov
Hyetpev ex vexpav, Ro. x.9 [ef. B. § 133,19]. Since ace.
to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the
author of salvation, 6 mucrevwv repudiates all the various
hings which aside from Christ are commended as means
512
TWiT ts
of salvation (such e. g. as abstinence from flesh ané
wine), and understands that all things are lawful to him
which do not lead him away from Christ ; hence moreves
(ris) ayetv ravra, hath faith to eat all things or so that
he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2; ef. Riickert ad loc.; [W.
§ 44,3 b.; per contra B. 273 sq. (235) ]. 8. morevew
used in ref. to God has various senses : aa. it de-
notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence: dre é
Oeds eis eoriv, Jas. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ap-
propriate trust, absol. Jude 5; eis Oedv, Jn. xii. 44; xiv. 13
i.q. to believe and embrace what God has made known
either through Christ or concerning Christ: ro
Ged, Jn. v. 24; Acts xvi. 34; Tit. iii.8; 1Jn.v. 10; ém
tov Gedy, Ro. iv. 5; rhv dyamny, hv €xet 6 Oeds, 1 In. iv. 16;
eis THY aptupiav, Hv KTA.,1Jn. Vv. 10. BB. to trust:
7@ Oe@, God promising a thing, Ro. iv. 3, 17 (on which
see xarévavte); Gal. iii. 6; [Jas. ii. 23]; absol. Ro. iv.
18; foll. by érz, Acts xxvii. 25. €. mor. is used in
an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men:
) ayann morever mavra, 1 Co. xiii. 7. = rd. morrevewv is
opp. to ideiv, Jn. xx. 29; to dpay, ibid. and 1 Pet. i. 8,
(Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), ef. 2 Co.v. 7; to 8:axpive-
Oa, Ro. iv. 19 sq.; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas.i.6; to duodoyeiy,
Ro. x. 9. 2. transitively, rwi te, to intrust a thing
to one, i.e. to his fidelity: Lk. xvi. 11; éavrév runt, Jn. ii
24; pass. muarevouai tt, to be intrusted with a thing: Ro.
ik, 2's) 1pCo.ixsl WgvGal. 1) 7 ¢ te Dai
Tit. i. 3, (Ignat. ad Philad. 9; exx. fr. prof. auth. are
given in W.§39,1a.). | Onthe grammat. constr. of the
word cf. B. § 133, 4 [and the summaries in Ellicott on
1 Tim. i.16; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer s.v.]. It
does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and
3 Jn. (Cf. the reff. s.v. miotts, fin.]*
TLTLKOS, -1), -ov, (miaTOS), pertaining to belief; a.
having the power of persuading, skilful in producing be-
lief: Plat. Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that
can be relied on: yuvy mor. Kai oikoupds kai mreOopevn TO
av8pi, Artem. oneir. 2, 32; often so in Cedrenus [also (of
persons) in Epiph., Jn. Mosch., Sophron.; cf. Soph. Lex.
s. v.]; of commodities i. q. ddxuyuos, genuine, pure, un-
adulterated: so vdapSos mortixn [but A.V. spike- (i. e.
spiked) nard, after the nardi spicati of the Vulg. (in
Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul-
terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26; Diosc. de mater. med. 1, 6
and 7); hence metaph. 76 motixov ths Kays SiaOnxns
xpapa, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9,8 [p.439d.]. Cf. the
full discussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596
sqq:; Liicke on Jn. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq.; W. 97 (92) sq.;
[esp. Dr. Jas. Morison on Mk. 1. ¢.].*
arlo-ris, -ews, 1), (eid [q.v.]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind.],
Aeschyl., Hdt. down; Sept. for 7}:08, several times for
NX and INN; faith; i.e. 1. conviction of the
truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.;
Oavpdowa kai pei(o miorews, Diod. 1, 86); in the N. T. of
a conviction or belief respecting man’s relationship to God
and divine things, generally with the included idea of
trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with u3
Heb. xi. 1 (where ziatis is called ¢AmCopever trocragesy
mioTts
mpaypdtwv Edeyxos ov Brerouevwr) ; opp. to eidos, 2 Co.
v. 7; joined with dydmy and édmis, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a.
when it relates to God, miatis is the conviction that God
exists and is the creator and ruler of all things, the pro-
vider and bestower of eternal salvation through Christ:
Heb. xi. 6; xii. 2; xiii. 7; miortis emi Oeov, Heb. vi. 1; 7
miotts tpav 4 mpos Tov Oeov, by which ye turned to God,
1 Th. i. 8; thy ow. byork. edmida eis Gedy, directed unto
God, 1 Pet. i. 21; with agen. of the object [faith in]
(rav GeGv, Eur. Med. 414; rov Oeov, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16,
5; ef. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch.on Sap. vi. 17 sq. p. 132; [ef.
Meyer on Ro. iii. 22; also Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
as below; W. 186 (175)]): 4 a. THs evepyeias Tov Beod
Tov éyeipavros aitoy (Christ) ek rev vexpav, Col. ii. 12;
dua tiotews, by the help of faith, Heb. xi. 33, 39; xara
miorw, i.q. muorevovtes, Heb. xi. 13; micres, dat. of means
or of mode by faith or by believing, prompted, actuated, by
faith, Heb. xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of
cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in
reference to Christ, it denotes a strong and welcome
conviction or belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom
we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of Ged (on this
see more at length in moreva, | b. y.): a. univ.:
w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), Ijcod Xpucrod,
Ro. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 16; ili. 22; Eph. iii. 12; "Ijcov, Rev.
xiv. 12; Xpuorov, Phil. iii. 9; tod viod tov Oeod, Gal. ii.
20; rod kupiov nuav "Inoov Xpiotod, Jas. li. 1; pod (i. e.
in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in-
terpretation, faith in God of which Jesus Christ is the
author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314
sqq., and H. P. Berlage, Disquisitio de formulae Paulinae
mioris "Incovd Xpiorov significatione. Lugd. Bat. 1856) ;
Tov evayyeXiou, Phil. i. 27; aAnOeias, 2 Th. ii. 13. with
Prepositions: eis (toward [cf. eis, B. II. 2 a.]) tov xdprov
npav “Inoovv, Acts xx. 21; eis Xpiorov, Acts xxiv. 245
XXVi. 18; 4 eis Xpiorov miotis tpov, Col. ii. 5; [wiorw
éxew eis eve, Mk. ix. 42 Tr mrg.]; mpos rév kup. Philem.
5 [L Tr WH eis] ([see mpos, I. 1c.; ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.]; unless here we prefer to render riotw fidelity [see
2, below]; cf. Meyer ad loc. and W. § 50, 2); a. 7 év Xp.
"Ingov, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13; 2 Tim. iii.
15; 9 mW. bpav ev Xp. “Ina. Col. i. 4; 7 Kara Twa (see Kara,
II. 1 e.) miotis évt@ kupio, Eph.i. 15; é€v rd atwate avtod,
Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. Meyer]. miotis [cf. W. 120 (114) ]
and 9 rior simply: Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8; xiv. 22,
27; xv. 9; xvii. 31; Ro. [iii. 27 (on which see vépos,
8)], 31; iv. 14; v.2[L Tr WH br. r9 wioree]; ix. 32; x.
8, 17; xii. 3, 6; 1 Co. [xii. 9 (here of a charism)];
xvi. 18; 2 Co. iv. 13; [vili. 7]; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25
sq:; v-5; vi.10; Eph. ii. 8; iii.17; iv.5; vi.16; 2 Th.
i.4; 1 Tim. i. 2,4 (on the latter pass. see ofkovopia),
19; ii. 7 (on which see dAnOea, I. 2 c.); iii. 9; iv. 1, 6;
WeES va O22! = NOP ae Okt p LOG) 111s.Gaa Osi nvents
Mate 4a ot reat. 1d)s) Sassatyos ol eta oenebbets
i. 1,5. with agen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32; Ro. i.
Sy 2) Comin) xv. 4, 171s 2)Cos 124 we hil, 1) 2 5ie) ai
Dyk) Why nt 295-7, 10 +12 Th: 1/3 25) Philemt’ €*<
Jas. i. 3; 1 Pet.i. 7, 9 [here WH om. gen.]; 1 Jn. v. 4;
513
TlaoTls
Rev. xiii. 10; mAnpns miotews x. mvevparos, Acts vi. 5;
mvevparos kK. miotews, Acts xi. 24; miotews x. Suvdpews,
Acts vi. 8 Rec.; 17 miores éotnxévat, Ro. xi. 20; 2 Co. i.
24; év rH wire: ornkew, 1 Co. xvi. 13; etvat, 2 Co. xiii. 5;
peverv, 1 Tim. ii. 15; eupevew rH mw. Acts xiv. 22; émmpeé
vew, Col. i. 23; orepeds tH 7. 1 Pet. v. 9; orepeodpat rH 7
Acts xvi. 5; BeBaotpa ev [LT Tr WH om. ev] 79 7. Col.
ii. 7. Since faith is a power that seizes upon the soul,
one who yields himself to it is said iraxovew rH wicTet,
Acts vi. 7; hence taxon tis miotews, obedience ren-
dered to faith [W. 186 (175)], Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; 6 ek
miotews sc. dv, depending on faith, i. q. 6 musrevwr [see
ex, I. 7], Ro. iii. 26; plur., Gal. iii..7, 9; 6 &« micrews
*ABpaap, he who has the same faith as Abraham, Ro. iv.
16; ék miotews etvat, to be related, akin to, faith [cf. éx,
u. s.], Gal. iii. 12. 6txatos ex miotrews, Ro. i. 17; Gal.
iii. 11; Sicacoovyn 9 ex mor. Ro. ix. 30; 4 &k mio. dix.
Ro. x. 6; diuxavoo. €k mistews eis miotw, springing from
faith (and availing) to (arouse) faith (in those who as
yet have it not), Ro. i. 17; dicacoodvn 9 dita wiotews
Xpiorov, ... 9 ek Geod Six. ent tH miorer, Phil. iii. 9; pass.
Stxavodvacbat miotet, Ro. ili. 28; Stxacodv twa dia tictews
Xpiorov, Gal. ii. 16; 81a tr. wiorews, Ro. ili. 30; dcx. twa
ex miotews, ibid.; Gal. iii. 8; pass., Ro. v.1; Gal. iii. 24;
evayyeAiCopar tv miotw, to proclaim the glad tidings
of faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23; dxom miorews, instruction
concerning the necessity of faith [see dxon, 3 a.], Gal. iii.
2,5; 9 mots is joined with 7 dydm: 1 Th. iii. 6; v.
Sig him. 1304 518. 15 sctv.,12 swied des (2 Tims 92 path
a subj. gen. Rev. ii. 19; miotis 80 ayarns évepyoupern,
Gal. v. 6; ayamn pera mictews, Eph. vi. 23; dyarn ék mi-
orews avuokpirov, 1 Tim. i. 5; mioris kai ayamn 7 ev Xpe-
oT® ‘Inood, 2 Tim. i. 13; gureiv twa ev rioters, Tit. iii. 15
(where see De Wette); épyov wicrews (cf. Epyov, 3 p.
248> near bot.), 1 Th. i. 3; 2 Th. i. 11. 8. in an
ethical sense, persuasion or conviction (which springs
from faith in Christ as the sole author of salvation cf.
matev@, 1 b. y. fin.) concerning things lawful for a Chris-
tian: Ro. xiv. 1, 23; miotw éyew, ibid. 22. c. univ.
the religious belief of Christians ; a. subjectively ;
Eph. iv. 13, where cf. Meyer; in the sense of a mere
acknowledgment of divine things and of the claims of
Christianity, Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20, 22, 24, 26. B. ob-
jectively, the substance of Christian faith or what is be-
lieved by Christians: 4 mapadoGeica 7. Jude 3 ; 7 dywwratn
ipav riots, ib. 20. There are some who think this
meaning of the word is to be recognized also in 1 Tim.
iA 19TH. 7 ii. 93 iv..1, 63, v8 5,.vi. 40, 215 (Cie iler
derer, Paulinismus p. 468 [Eng. trans. ii. p. 200]); but
Weiss (Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 107 a. note) correctly ob-
jects, “ miors is rather the form in which the truth (as
the substance of right doctrine) is subjectively appro-
priated”; [cf. Meyer on Ro. i. 5 (and Prof. Dwight’s
additional note); Ellicott on Gal. i. 23; Bp. Lghtft. on
Gal. p. 157]. d. with the predominant idea of
trust (or confidence) whether in God orin Christ, spring-
ing from faith in the same: Mt. viii. 10; xv. 28; Lk. vii
9, 50; xvii. 5; Heb. ix. 28 Lchm. ed. ster.; x. 22; Jas
WisTOS
i.€; with a gen. of the subject: Mt. ix. 2, 22, 29; xv.
28; MK. ii. 5; v.34; x.52; [Lk. v. 20]; viii. 25,48; xvii.
19; xvili 42; w. agen. of the object in which trust is
placed: rod dvéuaros avrov, Acts iii. 16; miotw Exe,
[Mt. xvii. 20]; xxi. 21; Mk. iv. 40; Lk. xvii. 6; macav
thy tiotey, (‘all the faith’ that can be thought of), 1 Co.
Xill. 2; Eee miotev Geod, to trust in God, Mk. xi. 22; éyew
miotw Tov owOnvat, to be healed (see Fritzsche on Mt. p.
843 sq.; [cf. W.§ 44, 4a.; B. 268 (230)]), Acts xiv. 9;
7 O¢€ ado 7., awakened through him, Acts iii. 16; edy7
THs miotews, that proceeds from faith, Jas. v.15; of trust
in the promises of God, Ro. iv. 9, 16, 19sq.; Heb. iv. 2;
vi. 12; x. 38sq.; \ w. agen. of the subject, Ro. iv. 5, 12;
miotis emt Oedv, faith which relies on God who grants the
forgiveness of sins to the penitent [see émi, C. I. 2 g. a.],
Heb. vi. 1; 8natoovvn tas miotews [cf. W. 186 (175)],
Ro. iv. 11,13; 9 cara miorw Stxatoovyn, Heb. xi. 7. 2:
fidelity, faithfulness, i. e. the character of one who can be
relied on: Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal. v. 22; Philem. 5 (? see above
in b. a.); Tit. ii. 10. of one whokeeps his promises: 7
miatts Tov Oeou, subj. gen., Ro. iii. 3. objectively, plighted
faith (often so in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl. down) : dOereiv
(see dberéw, a.) THY mio, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially
Koolhaas, Diss. philol. I. et II. de vario usu et construc-
tione vocum riotis, mords et morevew in N. T. (Traj. ad
Rhen. 1733, 4to.); Dav. Schulz, Was heisst Glauben,
ete. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq.; Riickert, Com. iib. d. Rom.,
2d ed., i. p. 51 sqq.; Lutz, Bibl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqq. ;
Huther, Ueber (on u. meoreverv im N. T., in the Jahrbb.
f. deutsch. Theol. for 1872, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on Gal. p. 154 sqq.]. On Paul’s conception of zicatts,
ef. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 sqq.;
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., § 82. d. (cf. the index s. v.
Glaube); Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [ Eng. trans.
i. p. 161sqq.; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau-
lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to
the Hebrews see Riehm, Lehrbegr. des Hebr.-Br. p.
700 sqq.; Weiss, as above §125b.c. On John’s con-
ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei-
trige zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [ef. his Histoire
de la Théol. Chrétienne, etc., 3me éd., ii. p.508 sqq. (Eng.
trans. i. 455 sqq.)]; Weiss, as above § 149, and the
same author’s Johann. Lehrbegriff, p. 18 sqq.*
muorés, -7, -dv, (meiOw [q. v.]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
mostly for }281; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons
who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi-
ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of
official duties: d5odA0s, Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 233 otkovd-
pos, Lk. xii. 42; 1 Co. iv. 2; dSidxovos, Eph. vi. 21; Col.
i. 7; iv. 7; dpxtepevs, Heb. ii. 17; iii. 2; of God, abid-
ing by his promises, 1 Co.i.9; x.13; 2Co.i. 18; 1 Th.
wo 245° '2 "TH. i. 3; Heb: 123 2 am. i. 13;
1 Jn.i. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 19; add, 1 Co.iv. 17; Col. iv. 9;
1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; muords €v ren,
in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11; emi
vt, Mt. xxv. 23; dypu Oavarov, Rev. ii. 10. one who kept
his plighted faith, Rev. ii. 13; worthy of trust; that can
ée relied on: 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Tim. ii.2; Christ is called
ol4
TaN
paptus 6 mords, Rev. i. 5; with kat ddnOvds added,
Rev. iii. 14; [ef. xix.11]. of things, that can be relied
on: 6 Adyos, 1 Tim. iii. 15 2 Tim. ii. 11; Tit.i. 9; [iii
8; oboe of Adyo, Rev. xxi.5; xxii.6]; with asaons amo-
doxyns a&ios added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; ra dota Aavid
Ta muota (see dovos, fin.), Acts xiii. 34. 2. easily
persuaded ; believing, confiding, trusting, (Theogn., Ae-
schyl., Soph., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. one who trusts in
God’s promises, Gal. iii. 9; is convinced that Jesus has
been raised from the dead, opp. to G@moros, Jn. xx. 27;
one who has become convinced that Jesus is the Messiah
and the author of salvation (opp. to amuotos, see mioTEVa,
1 b. y. and miotis, 1 b.), [a believer]: Acts xvi.1; 2 Co.
vi. 15; 1 Tim. v.16; with the addition of r@ xupia, dat.
of the pers. in whom faith or trust is reposed, Acts xvi.
15; plur. in Col. i. 2 [where ef. Bp. Lghtft.]; 1 Tim. iv.
10; vi. 2; Tit.i.6; Rev. xvii. 143 of muvroi, substantively
[see Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x. 45; 1 Tim. iv.
3,12; with év Xpior@ "Inood added [cf. B. 174 (152)],
Eph. i.1; eis Oedv xrA. 1 Pet. i. 21 LT Tr txt.WH; m-
arov rovetv Tt, to do something harmonizing with (Chris-
tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work], 3 Jn. 5.*
morTdw, -@: 1 aor. pass. emiaTr@Onv; (mords); ah
to make faithful, render trustworthy: 76 pnpa, 1 K. i. 36;
twa dpkots, Thue. 4, 88; univ. to make firm, establish, 1
Chr. xvii. 14. 2. Pass. (Sept. in various senses for
JONI) and mid. to be firmly persuaded of; to be assured
of: té (Opp. eyn. 3, 355. 417; Leian. philops. 5), 2 Tim.
iii. 14; Hesych. emiot@én- éreio6n, emrAnpohopnén. (In
various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) *
twAavaw, -@; fut. rAavnow; 1 aor. émAdvnoa; Pass., pres.
mravapat; pf. renAdvnuar; 1 aor. émavnOnv; (wAdvn); fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for Nynit; to cause to
stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a.
prop.; in pass., Sept. chiefly for NA, to go astray, wan-
der, roam about, (first so in Hom. I. 23, 321): Mt. xviii.
12sq.; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. liii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps.
exviii. (exix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead
away from the truth, fo lead into error, to deceive: twa,
Mt. xxiv. 4, 5, 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 5,6; Jn. vii. 12; 1Jn.
ii. 263 ii, 7; 2 Tim. 11. 13*; Rev. i. 20G Lf Tr Wis
xii. 9; xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 3, 8,10; éaurév, 1 Jn. i. 8;
pass. to be led into error, [R.V. be led astray]: Lk: xxi. 85
Jn. vii. 47; Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; to err, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii.
24, 27; pr wAavacbe, 1 Co. vi. 9; xv. 33; Gal. vi. 7; Jas.
i. 16; esp. through ignorance to be led aside from the
path of virtue, to go astray, sin: Tit. iil. 3; Heb. v.25 77
xapdia, Heb. iii. 10; amd ris dAnOeias, Jas. v.19; to wan-
der or fall away from the true faith, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii.
13°; 2 Pet. ii. 15; to be led away into error and sin, Rev.
xviii. 23. [Comp.: dzo-r\avdo. | *
ahdvn, -ns, 7, @ wandering, a straying about, whereby
one, led astray from the right way, roams hither and
thither (Aeschyl., [Hdt.], Eur., Plat., Dem.,al.). Inthe
N. T. metaph. mental straying, i.e. error, wrong opinion
relative to morals or religion: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3;
2 Th. ii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11
(on which [ef. W. 189 (177) and] see éxyéa, b. fin.) ; er
TwaYNS
ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting:
Ro. i. 27; mAdvn 6800 twos, [R. V. error of one’s way
i. e.] the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v.
20 (aAavn Cwqs, Sap. i. 12); as sometimes the Lat. error,
i. q. that which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. xxvii.
64.*
[wAavys, -nTos, 6, see mAavntns. |
wAaviTHS, -ov, 6, (TAavdw), @ wanderer: aorépes mdavn-
rat, wandering stars (Aristot., Plut., al.), Jude 13 [where
WH mrs. dor. m\dvnres (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)]; see dornp,
fin.*
aavos, -ov, wandering, roving; trans. and trop. mis-
leading, leading into error: mvevpara mAava, 1 Tim. iv. 1
(mAdvo. GvOpwran, Joseph. b. j. 2, 13, 4). 6 mAdvos
substantively (Cic. al. planus), as we say, a vagabond,
‘tramp,’ impostor, (Diod., Athen., al.); hence univ. a
corrupter, deceiver, (Vulg. seductor) : Mt. xxvii. 63 ; 2 Co.
vi. 8; 2Jn.7. [Cf. 6 koouorAdvos, ‘Teaching’ ete. 16,
4.]*
wAGE, -axos, 7, [ (akin to mAdros, etc. ; Fick iv. 161)], a
fiat thing, broad tablet, plane, level surface (as of the sea),
(cf. our plate), (Pind., Tragg., al.; Sept. for m4): af
mAdkes tHS SvaOnKns (see diaOnKy, 2 p. 136°), Heb. ix. 4;
ov ev mrAaki AOivas (tables of stone, such as those on
which the law of Moses was written), dA’ év maki xap-
dias capxivats, 2 Co. iii. 3.*
TAGO pA, -Tos, TO, (tAdoow), what has been moulded or
formed, as from wax (Plat. Theaet. p. 197d. and p. 200b.);
the thing formed by a potter, earthen vessel, (Vulg. figmen-
tum): Ro. ix. 20 (with mnAov added, Arstph. av. 686).*
wAacow: 1 aor. ptcp. mddcas; 1 aor. pass. emda Onv ;
[(perh. akin to rAards; Curtius § 367 b)]; fr. Hes. down;
Sept. chiefly for 1¥°; to form, mould, (prop. something
from clay, wax, etc.): used of a potter, Ro. ix. 20; of
God as Creator (Gen. ii. 7 sq. 19 ete.), pass. 1 Tim. ii. 13.*
twAacrés, -1, -ov, (TAdoOw) ; 1. prop. moulded,
formed, as from clay, wax, stone, (Hes., Plat., Aristot.,
Plut., al.). 2. trop. feigned: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ([Hdt. 1,
68], Eur., Xen., Lcian., al.).*
mhareia, -as, 7, (fem. of the adj. mars, sc. dd0s [cf.
W. 590 (549) ]), a broad way, a street: Mt. vi. 5; xii.
19; Lk. x. 105 xiii. 26; xiv. 21; Acts v. 15; Rev. xi.
8; xxi. 21; xxil.2. (Eur., Plut., al.; in Sept. chiefly for
ayn) *
tharos, -ovs, Td, [(cf. mAdé), fr. Hdt. down], breadth:
Eph. iii. 18 (on which see pyxos); Rev. xxi. 16; carry-
ing with it the suggestion of great extent, ris ype, Opp.
to the ends or corners of the earth, Rev. xx. 9; (for
3179, Hab. i. 6).*
mdarive; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. remAdruvrat (see pe-
aivw); 1 aor. émAarvvOnv; (mAatvs); to make broad, to
enlarge: ri, Mt. xxiii. 5; 4 xapdia nudy memAdruvrat, our
heart expands itself sc. to receive you into it, i.e. to
welcome and embrace you in love, 2 Co. vi. 11 (mAardveww
tiv xapdiavy for 32 31771, to open the heart sec. to in-
struction, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 32 [cf. W.30]); mAarvvOnre
ral tpets, be ye also enlarged in heart, viz. to receive me
therein, ibid. 13. (Xen., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
515
TAELW
mAarus, -eia, -v, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 367 b;
Vaniéek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for
am, broad: Mt. vii. 13.*
mE YH.0., -Tos, TS, (TAEKw), what is woven, plaited, or twisted
together; a web, plait, braid: used thus of a net, Xen.
Cyr. 1, 6, 28; of a basket, Eur., Plat.; wAéypa BuBAwor,
in which the infant Moses was laid, Joseph. antt. 2, 9,45
by other writ. in other senses. braided hair (Vulg. crines
torti, ringlets, curls): 1 Tim. ii. 9 (ef. 1 Pet. iii. 3).*
mActoros, -7, -ov, (Superl. of modus), most: plur. Mt. xi.
20; [dyAos mAcioros, a very great multitude, Mk. iv. 1 T
Tr WH]; 6 mdeioros dxAos, the most part of the multi-
tude, Mt. xxi. 8 (Thue. 7, 78; Plat. rep. 3 p. 397 d.3
Aads, Hom. Il. 16, 377); 16 mdeiorov, adverbially, at the
most, 1 Co. xiv. 27.*
tAclwv, -ovos, 6, 7, neut. wAetov [eighteen times] and (in
Lk. iii.13; [Jn. xxi.15 LT Tr WH]; Acts xv. 28) mAéop
(cf. [ WH. App. p. 151]; Matthiaei. p. 333 ; Kriiger § 23,
7,4; Kiihner § 156, 3; Passows.v. modus, B.1; [L. and
S. s. v. B.]), plur. wAeioves and contr. mAeious, acc. mei-
ovas and contr. mAetovs (which forms are used indiscrim-
inately in the N. T.), neut. wAefova and (L T Tr WH in
Mt. xxvi. 53; LT in Lk. xxi. 3) contr. mAeiw; (compar.
of modvs) 5 more, i.e. 1. greater in quantity: the
object with which the comparison is made being added
in the genitive, as mAelovas Tay mpaTwy, More in number
than the first, Mt. xxi. 36; mAeiov (or mAciw) mavtor,
more than all, Mk. xii.43; Lk. xxi. 3; mAelova. . . rovrar,
more than these, Jn. vii. 31 [here L T Tr WH om. the
gen. (see below) ]; mAetova tay mporwy, more than the
first, Rev. ii. 19 ; wAetov rovr@y, more than these, Jn. xxi.
15; [melova tiujy exe Tod otxov, Heb. iii. 3° (cf. W. 190
(178), 240 (225))]; mepracevewv meio, more than, foll. by
agen. [A. V. exceed], Mt. v. 20. meloves (mr elous) 7,
Mt. xxvi. 53 R G[L melo (br. #)]; Jn. iv.1 [Trmrg. om.
WH br. 7] aAeiov 7, more than, Lk. ix. 18; mdéov mAnv
w. agen. Acts xv. 28; m\éov mapa [tt or twa (see rapa,
III. 2 b.)], Lk. iii. 13; [Heb. iii. 3°]; 7 is omitted before
numerals without change of construction: éra@v jv mred-
vov tecoapdkovtu 6 avOpwros, Acts iv. 22; ov mAeious eiolv
poe mpepat Sexadvo, Acts xxiv. 11 (here Rec. inserts 7) ;
pas ov mAelous OKT@ 7) Seca (Rec. mrelous 7 Sexa), Acts
xxv. 6; add, Acts xxiii. 13, 21; as in Grk. writ. after
a neuter: mAetw[Lehm. 7 in br. ] dadexa Aeyedvas, Mt. xxvi.
53[(T Tr WH (but T Aeytwvar) |, (mAetv — Attic for rreiov
—€£axociovs, Arstph. av. 1251 ; €rm yeyovas meiw €BSoun-
xovra, Plat. apol. Socr. p. 17 d.; see 7, 3a.; on the omis-
sion of quam in Latin after plus and amplius, cf. Rams-
horn, Lat. Gram. p. 491; [Roby, Lat. Gram. § 1273]).
the objects with which the comparison is made are not
added because easily supplied from the context: Jn.
iv. 413; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; rd
mXetov, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk.
vii. 43; mdeiov, adverbially, more, i. e. more earnestly,
Lk. vii. 42; éxi meciov, more widely, further, davénerba,
Acts iv. 17; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below) ]; mpoxémrev,
2 Tim. iii. 9; émt mAetov aceBeias, 2 Tim. ii. 16; émi wXeiov,
longer (than proper), Acts xx. 9 [not WH mrg. (see
TAEK@
above)]; xxiv. 4; plural m\eiova, more, i.e. a larger re-
ward, Mt. xx. 10 [but L Tr WH mieiov];_ without com-
parison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst.: Acts
ii. 40; xiii. 31; xviii. 20; xxi. 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14;
XXVii. 20; xxviii. 23; neut. epi mAetdvov [A. V. of many
things], Lk. xi.53; with the article of mAetoves (mXeious),
the more part, very many: Acts xix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1 Co.
ix. 19; x. 53 xv. 63; 2 Co. ii. 6; iv. 15; ix. 2; Phil. i.
14. 2. greater in quality, superior, more excellent:
foll. by the gen. of comparison, Mt. vi. 25; xii. 41, 42;
Mk. xii. 33 [here T WH Tr txt. mepioodrepov]; Lk. xi.
31,32; xii. 23; [wAeiova Ouciay . . . mapa Kai, Heb. xi.
4 (see rapa, u.s.). From Hom. down.]*
mhéxkw: 1 aor. ptep. mrefavres; [(cf. Curtius § 103;
Vaniéek p. 519)]; fr. Hom. down; fo plait, braid, weave
together: mééavres atépavov, Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17;
Jn. xix.2. [Comp.: ép-rdéxa. ] *
ahéov, See mAElwv.
awreovatw; 1 aor. émdedvaca; (mAéov); Sept. for ab
and 737; 1. intrans.: used of one possessing, to
superabound [A. V. to have over], 2 Co. viii. 15. of things,
to exist in abundance [R. V. be multiplied], 2 Co. iv. 15;
to increase, be augmented, Ro. v. 20; vi.1; 2 Th.i. 3;
Bhilsiy.7, 3.2 Pets. 2. trans. to make to increase :
twa tw, one ina thing, 1 Th. iii. 12; for 7377, Num.
xxvi. 54; Ps. xx. (Ixxi.) 21; add 1 Mace. iv. 35. By
prof. writ. [(fr. Hippocr. on)] in various other senses.
[Come.: tmep meovaga. | *
weoventéw, -@; 1 aor. émAeovextnoa; 1 aor. pass. subj.
1 pers. plur. mAcovextnO@puev; (aAeovextns) 1. in-
trans. to have more, or a greater part or share: Thuc.,
Xen., Plut., al.; to be superior, excel, surpass, have an
advantage over, twds (gen. of pers.) tru (dat. of thing) :
Xen., Plat., Isocr., Dem., al. 2. trans. to gain or
take advantage of another, to overreach: [Hadt. 8, 112],
Plat., Diod., Dion. Hal., Dio Cass., al.; and soin the N. T.
in 2 Co. vii. 2; xii. 17, 18; 1 Th.iv.6 (see mpayya, b.) ;
pass. [ef. B. § 132, 22] id revos, 2 Co. ii. 11 (10).*
TAEOVEKTNS, -ov, 6, (TAcovand yx) ; 1. one eager
to have more, esp. what belongs to others ({'Thue. 1, 40,
1 (cf. Hdt. 7, 158)]; Xen. mem. 1, 5, 3) ; 2. greedy
of gain, covetous: 1 Co. v.10, 11; vi. 10; Eph. v. 5; Sir.
Miva -d>
tAcovetla, -as, }, (mAeovextns, q. V-), greedy desire to have
more, covetousness, avarice: Lk. xii. 15; Ro. i. 29; Eph.
iv. 19; v. 8; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. ii.5; 2 Pet. ii. 3, [on the
om. of the art. in the last two pass. cf. W. 120 (114) ], 14;
ws [Rec. darep | wAcoveEiav, [as a matter of covetousness],
i.e. a gift which betrays the giver’s covetousness, 2 Co.
ix. 5 [here R. V. txt. extortion]; plur. various modes in
which covetousness shows itself, covetings [cf. W. § 27,
3; B. 77 (67)], Mk. vii. 22. (In the same and various
other senses by pref. writ. fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down.)
[ Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxiv., and (in partial correction)
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. iii. 5.]*
tAevpa, -as, 7, fr. Hom. (who always uses the plur.)
down; the side of the body: Jn. xix. 34; xx. 20, 25, 27;
Acts xii. 7.*
516
TAHKTNS
IIAEQ, see miuwAnu.
mwAéw; impf. 1 pers. plur. émAéoper; [allied w. diva,
Lat. pluo, fluo, our float, flow, etc.; Curtius § 369]; fr.
Hom. down; {0 sail, navigate, travel by ship: Lk. viii. 23;
Acts xxvii. 24; foll. by e’s with an ace. of place, Acts
xxi.33 xxvii.63 émt rdézov, Rev. xviii. 17G LT Tr WH;
by a use common only to the poets (cf. Matthiae § 409,
4a.; Kiihner ii. $409, 6; [Jelf § 559; W. 224 (210)]), with
a simple ace. indicating the direction: Acts xxvii. 2 (Eur.
Med. vs. 7), where L T Tr WH addeis. [Comp.: dzo-,
d.a-, ék-, KaTa-, mapa-, UTro-mhéw. | *
TAY); -Hs, 9, (TAnoow), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
73, also for 727 ; 1. a blow, stripe: plur., Lk. x.
30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2 Co. vi.5; xi. 23; a wound:
9) TAny) Tod Oavarov, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke],
Rev. xiii. 3, 12; tis payaipas, wound made by a sword
[sword-stroke], Rev. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omis-
sion (Lk. xii. 47, etc.) ef. B. 82(72) ; W. § 64, 4.] 2.
a public calamity, heavy affliction, [cf. Eng. plague], (now
tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent
by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Rec. om.], 20; xi.
6; xv. 1, 6,8; xvi. 9,[21]}; «vill. 4,8; xxi.9; xxii. 18.
[Cf. mr. Auds, Soph. Aj. 137 (cf. 279); al.]*
TAA00s, -ovs, 76, (IIAEQ), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly
for 35, often for jing; @ multitude, i. e. a. a great
number, se. of men or things: Acts xxi. 22 [not Tr WH];
Heb. xi. 12 [cf. W.120 (114) n.J;_ with woAv added, Mk.
iii. 7,8; aAjOos with a gen., Lk. ii. 13; Jn. xxi. 6; Acts
v.14; xxviii. 3 [A. V. bundle (L T Tr WH add ri) ]; Jas.
v. 20; 1 Pet.iv.8; odd wAjOo0s and mARO0s rodd [cf.W.
§ 59, 2] with a gen., Lk. v. 6; vi. 17; xxiii. 27; Jn.v. 3
[here L br. G T Tr WH om. modu]; Acts xiv. 1; xvii.
4. b. with the article, the whole number, the whole
multitude; the assemblage: Acts xv. 30; xxiii. 7; rod Aaod,
Acts xxi. 36; aay 7d wARO0s, Acts xv. 12; with a gen.,
Lk. i. 10; [viil. 37 (ras weptydpov) ; xix. 37]; xxili. 1;
Acts [iv. 82]; v. 16; [vi. 2,5]; xxv. 24; the multitude
of people, Acts ii. 6; xix. 9; with rjs modews added,
Acts xiv. 4.*
wAnPive ; fut. rAnOvvad; 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. mdnOu-
va (2 Co. ix. 10 Rec.); Pass., impf. émAn@uvopnv; 1 aor.
énAnOvvonv; (fr. mAnOvs fulness); Aeschyl., Aristot.,
Hdian., Geop.; Sept. very often for 729, 735, 7397,
sometimes for 337; 1. trans. to increase, to multi
ply: 2 Co.ix. 10; Heb. vi. 14 (fr. Gen. xxii. 17); pass.
to be increased, (be multiplied) multiply: Mt. xxiv. 12;
Acts vi. 7; vii. 17; ix. 313 xii. 24; ri, [A. V.be multi
plied to one i. e.] be richly allotted to, 1 Pet.i. 2; 2 Pet.
i. 2; Jude 2, (Dan. iii. 31 (98); Dan. vi. 25 Theodot. ;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1 inscr. [also Mart. Polye. inser.
Constt. Apost. inscr.]). 2. intrans. to be increased,
to multiply: Acts vi. 1.*
twANIw, see mipmAn.
mAAKTHS, -ov, 6, (TAnTow), (Vulgate percussor), [A. V.
striker], bruiser, ready with a blow; a pugnacious, con
tentious, quarrelsome person: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i 7%.
(Plut. Marcell. 1; Pyrrh. 30; Crass.9; Fab. 19; Diog,
Laért. 6, 38; al.) *
TANLUpA
wAnppvpa [so all edd.] (or mAnpdpa [cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. § 7 Anm.17note; Lob. Khemat. p. 264]) [better ac-
cented as proparoxytone; Chandler $160], -as and (so
GT Tr WH) -ns (see paxapa), n, (fr. wAjppn or mAnpn
i. e. rAnopy [fr. rAnGe, wipmAnp, q. V.]), a flood, whether
of the sea or of a river: Lk. vi. 48. (Job xl. 18; [Dion.
Hal. antt.1, 71]; Joseph. antt. 2, 10,2; Plut., Sext. Emp. ;
with worapoy added, Philo de opif. mund. § 19; [ef. de
vita Moys. i. § 36 ; iii. § 24; de Abrah. § 19; de leg. alleg.
i. §13].)*
wAhy, adv., (fr. rA€ov ‘more’ [Curtius §375; Lob. Path.
Element. i. 143 ; ii. 93 (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 16)];
hence prop. beyond, besides, further) ; it stands ee
adverbially, at the beginning of a sentence, serving
either to restrict, or to unfold and expand what has pre-
ceded: moreover, besides, so that, according to the re-
quirements of the context, it may also be rendered but,
nevertheless ; [howbeit; cf. B. § 146, 2]: Mt. xi. 22, 24; xviii.
feiexavi 3964 sulukeivie24,conxell, 14, 20) x14 dix:
Bile Semis oat IL Ie imae Nels sath oy poke Hm >.6-<
21, 22,42; xxiii. 28; 1 Co. xi. 11; Eph. v. 33; Phil.i. 18
[R G (see Ellicott) ]; iii. 16 ; iv. 14; Rev. ii. 25; wAqv orn,
except that, save that, (exx. fr. class. Grk. are given by
Passow s. v. II.1e.; [L. and S.s. v. B. II. 4]): Acts xx.
23 [(W. 508 (473); Phil.i.18 LT Tr WH (R. V. only
that) |. 2. as a preposition, with the gen. (first so
by Hom. Od. 8, 207; [cf. W. § 54, 6]), besides, except, but:
Mk. xii. 32; Jn. viii. 10; Acts viii. 1; xv. 28; xxvii. 22.
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 724 sq.*
aAnpys, -es, (IIAEQ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept.
chiefly for 827 ; a. full, i. e. filled up (as opp. to
empty): of hollow vessels, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi.
43 [R GL]; with a gen. of the thing, Mk. viii. 19; of
a surface, covered in every part: Némpas, Lk. v.12; of
the soul, thoroughly permeated with: mvevpatos ayiov, Lk.
iv. 1; Acts vi. 3; vil. 55; xi. 24; miorews, Acts vi.5 3 yapt-
tos, Acts vi. 8 [Rec. miotews]; xapitos kal adnOeias, Jn.
i. 14; Sodov, Acts xiii. 10 (Jer. v. 27); A@vpod, Acts xix.
28; abounding in, épyv ayabay, Acts ix. 36. b.
full i. e. complete ; lacking nothing, perfect, (so the Sept.
sometimes for DW; oeAjvn mAnpns, Sir. 1. 6, cf. Hat. 6,
106): pucOos, 2 Jn. 8 (Ruth ii. 12); ciros, a full grain of
corn (one completely filling the follicle or hull contain-
ing it), Mk. iv. 28.*
awAnpo-~popéw, -@: [1 aor. impv. rAnpodpdpyaor, inf. rAnpo-
gopjoa (Ro. xv. 13 Lmrg.); Pass., pres. impv. mAnpodo-
peicOw ; pf. ptcp. memAnpodopnpevos; 1 aor. ptep. mAnpo-
gopnbcis]; (fr. the unused adj. wAnpodopos, and this fr.
mAnpns and dépw) ; to bear or bring full, to make full; a.
to cause a thing to be shown to the full: ryv diaxoviay, i.e. to
fulfil the ministry in every respect, 2 Tim. iv. 5 (cf. aAn-
powv tHv Svaxoviay, Acts xii. 25); also rd knpvypa, ibid.
17. b. to carry through to the end, accomplish: mpay-
pata memAnpodopypeva, things that have been accomplished,
(Itala and Vulg. completae), Lk.i.1 (cf. as éAnpwOn radra,
Acts xix. 21) [cf. Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc.]. C. Tid,
to fill one with any thought, conviction, or inclination: [Ro.
xv. 13 L mrg. (foll. by év w. dat. of thing); al. mAnpoe,
517
T™ANpow
q: V-1]; hence to make one certain, to persuade, convince,
one (moAXois odv Adyous Kal SpKors TAnpopopnaavtes Meya-
Bugor, extr. fr. Ctes. in Phot. p. 41, 29 [(ed. Bekk.) ; but
on this pass. see Bp. Lghtft. as below]) ; pass. to be per-
suaded, Ro. xiv. 5; mAnpodopnbeis, persuaded, fully con-
vinced or assured, Ro. iv. 21; also memAnpodopnpevot, Col.
iv.12 LT Tr WH; oidmécroda . . . rAnpodopyberres bua
Ths avagTacews Tov Kupiou "I. Xp. kat muotwOertes ev TO
Noy tov Geov, Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 42, 3; freq. so in ecel.
writ.; to render inclined or bent on, émnpopopnOn kapdia
- +. Tov moijoat TO Tomnpor, Eccl. viii. 11, [ef. Test. xii.
Patr., test. Gad 2]. The word is treated of fully by
Bleek, Brief an d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 233 sqq.; Grimm in the
Jahrbb. f. Deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 38 sqq.; [Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Col. iv. 12. Cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
twAnpodopla, -as, 7, (sAnpodopew, q. v.), fulness, abun-
dance: miorews, Heb. x. 22; rs €Amidos, Heb. vi. 11; THs
ovvecews, Col. ii. 2; full assurance, most certain confi-
dence, (see mAnpodopew, c. [al. give it the same meaning
in one or other of the preceding pass. also; cf. Bp. Lghtft.
on Col.].¢.]),1 Th.i.5. (Not found elsewh. exc. in eccl.
writ. [ef. W. 25].) *
TAnpow -a, (inf. -potv Lk. ix. 31, see WH. App. p. 166);
impf. 3 pers. sing. emAnpov; fut. rAnpwow; 1 aor. émAr-
peca; pf. memAnpwoxa; Pass., pres. mAnpovpar; impf.
emAnpovpny ; pf. memAnpwpat; 1 aor. emAnpwOny; 1 fut. rAn-
pobnoopa; fut. mid. rAnpecopar (once, Rev. vi. 11 Rec.) ;
(fr. IAHPOS equiv. to wAnpns); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down ; Sept. for 89D ; 1. to make full, to fill, to fill
up: thy caynyny, pass. Mt. xiii. 48; i. q. to jill to the full,
macav xpeiav, Phil. iv. 19; to cause to abound, to furnish
or supply liberally: memAnpopa, I abound, I am liberally
supplied, sc. with what is necessary for subsistence, Phil.
iv. 18; Hebraistically, with the accus. of the thing in
which one abounds [cf. B. § 184, 7; W. § 32, 5]: of spir-
itual possessions, Phil. i. 11 (where Rec. has xaprév) ;
Col. i. 9, (€vérAnoa aitov mvedpa codpias, Ex. xxxi. 3;
Xxxv. 31); i. gq. to flood, 9 oixia émAnpwbn [Tr mrg.
érvnoOn] ek THs dopis, Jn. xii. 3 (see ex, I. 5); jxos
éxAnpace tov oixov, Acts ii. 2; with a gen. of the thing,
Thy ‘IepovoaAnp ths Sudaxns, Acts v. 28 (Liban. epp. 721
mdaoas — i. e. wéNets— everrAnoas Tov tTép Hudv Adyar;
Justin. hist. 11, 7 Phrygiamreligionibus implevit); wa,
i. q. to fill, diffuse throughout one’s soul: with a gen. of the
thing, Lk. ii.40 RG L txt. T Tr mrg. (see below); Acts
ii. 28; pass., Acts xiii. 52; Ro. xv. 13 [where L mrg. mAr-
popopéw, q. V-inc.], 14; 2 Tim.i. 4; w. adat. of the thing
(cf. W. § 31, 7). pass., [Lk. ii. 40 L mrg. Tr txt. WH];
Ro. i. 29; 2Co. vii.4; foll. by év w. a dat. of the instru-
ment: év mvevpart, Eph. v. 18; é€v mavri Oednpate Geod,
with everything which God wills (used of those who
will nothing but what God wills), Col. iv. 12 RG [but
see mAnpopopew, c.]; mAnpodiy tiv Kapdiay Twos, to per-
vade, take possession of, one’s heart, Jn. xvi. 6; Acts v.
3; Christians are said mAnpodo@at, simply, as those who
are pervaded (i.e. richly furnished) with the power and
gifts of the Holy Spirit: év air@, rooted as it were in
Christ, i. e. by virtue of the intimate relationship ev
TAnpow 518
tered into with him, Col. ii. 10 [ef. év, I. 6b.]; es may 16
mAnpwpa Tov Geod (see mAnpe@pa, 1), Eph. iii. 19 [not WH
mrg.]; Christ, exalted to share in the divine adminis-
tration, is said mAnpovy ta mavra, to fill (pervade) the
universe with his presence, power, activity, Eph. iv. 10;
also mAnpovoOa (mid. for himself, i. e. to execute his
counsels [cf. W. 258 (242); B. § 134, 7]) ra mavra ev ra-
ow, all things in all places, Eph. i. 23 (yx odxt rév ovpa-
vov Kai THY yy eyo mAnpO@, hEyet KUptos, Jer. Xxili. 24;
Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. i. 7 p. 55, cites exx. fr.
Philo and others; [(but év waow here is variously under-
stood ; see was, II. 2 b. 8. aa. and the Comm.) }). 2
to render full, i. e. to complete ; a. prop. to jill up
to the top: macav dapayya, Lk. iii. 5; so that nothing
shall be wanting to full measure, fill to the brim, 16
petpov (q. v.1a.), Mt. xxiii. 32. b. to perfect, con-
summate ; a. a number: éws mAnpwdaat kai of ovr
SovAoz, until the number of their comrades also shall have
been made complete, Rev. vi. 11 L WH txt., ef. Diister-
dieck ad loc. [see y. below]. by a Hebraism (see mip-
mAn, fin.) time is said mAnpova Gat, remAnpawpevos, either
when a period of time that was to elapse has passed, or
when a definite time is at hand: Mk.i.15; Lk. xxi. 24;
Jn. vii. 8; Acts vii. 23, 30; ix. 23; xxiv. 27, (Gen. xxv.
JAERI Ke 1 eV. Ville Oly exile) 4 eexxovee O se N(UI val os
Joseph. antt. 4,4, 6; 6, 4,13 mAnpovv rov redeov evravror,
Plat. Tim. p. 39d.; rods xpovous, legg. 9 p. 866 a.). B.
to make complete in every particular; to render perfect:
macav evookiav kTA. 2 Th. i. 11; tiv xapav, Phil. ii. 2; pass.,
Jn: 111,29; xv. 11's xvic045 xvii. 13; 1 Ind 45)2In. 125
ra épya, pass. Rev. iii. 2; tiv tmaxony, to cause all to obey,
pass. 2 Co. x. 6; 7d macxa, Lk. xxii. 16 (Jesus speaks
here allegorically: until perfect deliverance and blessed-
ness be celebrated in the heavenly state). y- to
carry through to the end, to accomplish, carry out, (some
undertaking): mavra ta pnpyara, Lk. vii. 1; tHv diaxoviar,
Acts xii. 25; Col. iv. 17; 16 €pyov, Acts xiv. 263; rov
Spopov, Acts xiii. 25; sc. rov dpduov, Rev. vi. 11 acc. to
the reading mAnpoacaor (GT Tr WH mrg.) or mAnpo-
covrat (Rec.) [see a. above]; as émAnpwOn raita, when
these things were ended, Acts xix. 21. Here belongs
also mAnpodv 7d evayyedtov, to cause to be everywhere
known, acknowledged, embraced, [A. V. J have fully
preached], Ro. xv. 19; in the same sense tov Adyov Tov
Geov, Col. i. 25. c. to carry into effect, bring to reali-
zation, realize ; a. of matters of duty, to perform,
execute: tov vomov, Ro. xiii. 8; Gal. v. 14; 16 dcxalopa
TOU vd“ou, pass., ev nuty, among us, Ro. viii. 4; macay
Sixacoovyny, Mt. iii. 15 (evoeBevav, 4 Mace. xii. 15); rv
e£odov (as something appointed and prescribed by God),
Eke ix: Sie B. of sayings, promises, prophecies, to
bring to pass, ratify, accomplish; so in the phrases tva or
Sras mAnpwb7 7 ypadn, 76 pyOev, etc. (cf. Knapp, Scripta
var. Arg. p. 533 sq.): Mt. i. 22; ii. 15,17, 23; iv. 14;
Vill. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 835; xxi. 4; xxvi. 54, 56; xxvii. 9, 35
Rec.; Mk. xiv. 49; xv. 28 (which vs.G T WH om. Trbr.);
LK. i. 20; iv. 21; xxi. 22 Rec.; xxiv. 44; Jn. xii. 38; xiii.
18; xv. 25; xvii. 12; xviii. 9, 32; xix. 24,36; Actsi. 16;
TANo lov
iii. 18; xiii. 27; Jas. ii. 23, (1 K. ii. 27; 2 Chr. xxxvi.
22). y. universally and absolutely, to fulfil, i.e. to
cause God’s will (as made known in the law) to be obeyed
as it should be, and God’s promises (given through the
prophets) to receive fulfilment: Mt. v. 17; cf. Weiss,
Das Matthiusevang. u.s.w. p. 146 sq. [Comp.: dva-,
dyt-ava-, Tpoo-ava-, €k-, Tup-TAnpodw. | *
TAHpepa, -ros, Td, (wAnpdw), Sept. for Xn; i.
etymologically it has a passive sense, that which is (or
has been) filled; very rarely so in class. Grk.: a@ ship, in-
asmuch as it is filled (i. e. manned) with sailors, rowers,
and soldiers ; dé d00 mAnpopdtey €udyorro, Leian. ver.
hist. 2, 37; mévre efyov mAnpwpara, ibid. 38. Inthe N. T.
the body of believers, as that which is filled with the
presence, power, agency, riches of God and of Christ:
Tov Xpiorov, Eph. iv. 13 (see pAckia, 1 c. [ef. W. § 30, 3
N.1; B. 155 (136)]); i. 23; eis wav rd rANpwpa Tod Geos,
that ye may become a body wholly filled and flooded by
God, Eph. iii. 19 [but WH mrg. reads mAnpw6q wav rd
mA. |. 2. that which fills or with which a thing is
jilled: so very frequently in class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down;
esp. of those things with which ships are filled, freight
and merchandise, sailors, oarsmen, soldiers, [cf. our
‘complement’ (yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 258 sq.)],
(of the animals filling Noah’s ark, Philo de vit. Moys. ii.
§12) ; wAnpwpa 7édews, the inhabitants or population fill-
ing a city, Plat. de rep. 2 p. 371 e.; Aristot. polit. 3, 13
p- 1284*, 5; 4,4 p.1291%,17; al. So inthe N. T. 9 yi cat
TO wAnp@pa avtns, whatever fills the earth or is contained
in it, 1 Co. x. 26, 28 Rec. (Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1; xlix. (1.)
12; Jer. viii. 16; Ezek. xii. 19, etc.; rd mAnpwpa tis Oaddao-
ons, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 11; 1 Chr. xvi. 32); xopivwv mAnpo-
para, those things with which the baskets were filled,
[basketfuls], Mk. vi. 43 T Tr WH [on this pass. ef. Bp.
Lghtft. as below p. 260]; also orupidwr mAnpopara, Mk.
Vili. 20; the filling (Lat. complementum) by which a gap
is filled up, Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; that by which a loss is
repaired, spoken of the reception of all the Jews into
the kingdom of God (see ;jrrnpa, 1), Ro. xi. 12. Of
time (see rAnpda, 2 b. a.), that portion of time by which
a longer antecedent period is completed; hence complete-
ness, fulness, of time: tod xpédvov, Gal. iv. 4; ray xaipar,
Eph. i. 10 (on which see oixovopia). 3. fulness,
abundance: Jn. i. 163; Col. i.19; ii. 93; full number, Ro.
xi. 25. 4. i. g. mAnpwots (see xavxnua, 2), i. e. a
fulfilling, keeping: rov vépov (see mAnpoa, 2c. a.), Ro. xiii.
10. For a full discussion of this word see Fritzsche, Ep.
ad Rom. ii. p. 469 sqq-; [esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col.
p- 257 sqq. ].*
wAnolov, (neut. of the adj. mAnaios, -a, -ov), adv., fr.
Hom. down, near: with a gen. of place [ef. W. § 54, 6],
Jn. iv. 5; with the article, 6 rAngiov sc. dv [cf. B. § 125,
10; W. 24] (Sept. very often for »1; sometimes for
Mmny), prop. Lat. proximus (so Vulg. in the N.T.), a
neighbor ; i. e. a. friend: Mt. v. 43. b. any
other person, and where two are concerned the other (thy
fellow-man, thy neighbor) i.e., acc. to the O. T. and
Jewish conception, a member of the Hebrew race and
TANG Lov?
commonwealth: Acts vii. 27; and Ree. in Heb. viii. 11;
acc. to the teaching of Christ, any other man irrespec-
tive of race or religion with whom we live or whom we
chance to meet (which idea is clearly brought out in the
parable Lk. x. 25-37): Mt. xix. 19; xxii. 39; Mk. xii.
Sieger Lis xats Ko. xiii./9), 105) [/xv.'2]';) Galevaul4s
Eph. iv. 25; Jas. ii. 8 and L T Tr WH in iv. 12 ; wAnoiov
eivat Twos, to be near one [one’s neighbor], i.e. in a pass.
sense, worthy to be regarded as a friend and companion,
Lk. x. 29; actively, to perform the offices of a friend
and companion, ibid. 36; [on the om. of the art. in the
last two exx. see B. § 129, 11; W.§19 fin.].*
TANTPOVH, -7s, 7, (miwaAnue [ef. W. 94 (89)]), reple-
tion, satiety, (Vulg. saturitas) : mpos mAnopovny capkds, for
the satisfying of the flesh, to satiate the desires of the
flesh (see capé, 4), Col. ii. 23, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [others
(including R. V.) render the phrase against (i. e. for the
remedy of) the indulgence of the flesh; see Bp. Lehtft.
ad loc., and mpds, I. 1 ¢.]. (Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plato,
Plut., al.; Sept.) *
TArARTow [ cf. rAnyn, (weAayos), Lat. plango, plaga; Cur-
tius § 367]: 2 aor. pass. ésAnynv; fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for 37) (see matdcow, init.) ; to strike, to smite: pass.
(of the heavenly bodies smitten by God that they may
be deprived of light and shrouded in darkness), Rev.
viii. 12. [Comp.: ék-, emt mAnooo. | *
tToidpiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of mAotov; see -yuvarkdpiov,
fin.), a small vessel, a boat: Mk. iii. 9; iv. 36 Rec.; Lk.
v. 2 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH mrg.; Jn. vi. [22*], 22” ae 5
23 Tita. L Tr mrg. WH Aaa) 241 TD Tr WED; xxi.
[Cf. B. D.s. v. Ship (13).] (Arstph., Xen., Diode fee
t)otov, -ov, Td, (mAew), fr. Hdt. down, Send chiefly for
TIN, a ship: Mt. iv. 21, 22; Mk.i.19; Lk.v.2(>RGL
txt. Tr txt. WH txt.]; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx. 13, and often
in the historical bks. of the N. T.; Jas. iii.4; Rev. viii.
9; xviii. 19. [BB. DD. s. v. Ship.]
™A6os -ovs, gen. -dov -ov, and in later writ. mAods (Acts
xxvii. 9; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 § 61; see vovs [and
cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (wAew), fr. Hom. Od. 3,
169 down; voyage: Acts xxi. 7; xxvii. 9,10, (Sap. xiv.
1).*
TAoveLos, -a, -ov, (7AodvTos), fr. Hes. opp. 22 down, Sept.
for VWy, rich; a. prop. wealthy, abounding in ma-
terial resources: Mt. xxvii. 57; Lk. xii. 16; xiv. 123 xvi.
1,19; xviii. 23; xix. 2; 6 mAovovwos, substantively, Lk.
Xvi. 21, 22; Jas.i.10,115 of wAovoror, Lk. vi. 24; xxi. 1;
1 Tim. vi. 17; Jas. ii.6; v.1; Rev. vi. 15; xiii.16; mdov-
gvos, without the art., @ rich man, Mt. xix. 23, 24; Mk. x.
25; xii. 41; Lk. xviii. 25. b. metaph. and univ.
abounding, abundantly supplied : foll. by év w. a dat. of
the thing in which one abounds (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note),
ev éedeet, Eph. ii. 4; ev miores, Jas. ii.5; absol. abounding
(rich) in Christian virtues and eternal possessions, Rev.
ii. 9; iii. 17,on which see Diisterdieck. émrayevoe mAov-
ovos av, of Christ, ‘although as the daapxos Adyos he for-
merly abounded in the riches of a heavenly condition, by
assuming human nature he entered into a state of (earth-
ly) poverty,’ 2 Co. viii. 9.*
519
TwrUVw
mAovolws, adv., [fr. Hdt. down], abundantly, richly:
Coliiete 3.1 Tim. vi. 17 3. Vit. i..6'). 2 Petsu 11*
tAovTew, -@; 1 aor.emAovtnaa; pf. memdovTynKa; (mAod-
tos) ; fr. Hes. down; Sept. sometimes for wy; a.
to be rich, to have abundance: prop. of outward possessions,
absol., Lk. i. 53; 1 Tim. vi.9; 1 aor. J have been made
rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of
the aorist see BaciAeva, fin.), dé twos, Rev. xviii. 15
(Sir. xi. 18; (cf. amd, I. 2 a.]) ; also &k twos (see éx, II. 5),
Rev. xviii. 3,19; év run (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note; the Greeks
say mAouretv Twos, or Tun, Or tt), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b.
metaph. to be richly supplied : mdovreiv eis mavras, is afflu-
ent in resources so that he can give the blessings of sal-
vation unto all, Ro. x. 12; mAoureiv eis Oedv (see eis, B.
Il. 2 b. a.), Lk. xii. 215 aor. éemAovrnoa, absolutely, I
became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual posses-
sions: 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; memdov-
tka, I have gotten riches, Rev. iii. 17.*
twroutitw; Pass., pres. ptep. mAouri(dpevos ; 1 aor. émov-
tiaOnv; (wAovtos); to make rich, to enrich: twd, pass.
2 Co. ix. 11; used of spiritual riches: teva, 2 Co. vi. 10;
ev with a dat. of the thing (see mAouréw,a.), pass., to be
richly furnished, 1Co.i.5. (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plut. ;
Sept. for vwy7.)*
arhodros, -ov, 6, and (acc. to L T Tr WH in 2 Co. viii. 2;
Eph. i. 7%; ii. 7; ii. 8, 16; Phil. iv. 195 Col. i. 275 ii. 2,
but only in the nom. and ace.; cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 118;
WH. App. p. 158]; W. 65 (64); B. 22 sq. (20)) rd mdodros,
(apparently i. q. mAéoros, fr. wAéos full [ef. rirAnpc]),
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for wy, and also for 1) a mul-
titude, °n, 1); riches, wealth ; a. prop. and absol.
abundance of external possessions: Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv.
19; Lk. viii. 14; 1 Tim. vi.17; Jas. v. 2; Rev. xviii. 17
(16). b. univ. fulness, abundance, plenitude: with
a gen. of the excellence in which one abounds, as rijs
xpnorornros, Ro. ii.45 ix. 23; 2 Co. vili. 2; Eph. i. 7, 18;
ii. 7; iii. 16; Col. i. 27; ii. 2. the mdodvros of God is
extolled, i. e. the fulness of his perfections, — of which
two are mentioned, viz. godia and yvaurs, Ro. xi. 33 (for
codias kat yywoews here depend on Baéos, not on mAovrov
[cf. B. 155 (135); W. § 30,3 N.1]); the fulness of all
things in store for God’s uses, Phil. iv.19; in the same
sense 7Aodvros is attributed to Christ, exalted at the
right hand of God, Rev. v. 12; in amore restricted sense,
mAodTos Tov Xpicrod is used of the fulness of the things
pertaining to salvation with which Christ is able to en-
rich others, Eph. iii. 8. c. univ. i. q. a good [(to
point an antithesis)]: Heb. xi. 26; i. q. that with which
one is enriched, with a gen. of the person enriched, used
of Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 12.*
mdive; impf. érAvvov; 1 aor. érdvva; [ (cf. rhéw)]; fr.
Hom. down ; Sept. for 033 and 71; to wash: ta dixrva,
Lk. v. 2 LT Tr WH[(T WH mrg.-av; see dromAvvw) |;
used fr. Hom. down esp. in ref. to clothing (Gen. xlix.
1; Ex. xix.10, 14; Lev. xiii. 6, 34, ete.) ; hence figura-
tively wAvvew Tas oroAds aitay €v TS aipart Tov apviov is
used of those who by faith so appropriate the results of
Christ’s expiation as to be regarded by God as pure and
TVEU La
sinless, Rev. vii. 14, and LT Tr WH in xxii. 14; ef.
Ps. 1. (li.) 4, 9. [Comp.: dmomAvvw. SYN. see dova,
fin. ]*
arvedpa, -Tos, TO, (mvew), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; Hebr. m5, Lat. spiritus; i. e.
1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the
wind: dvépov rvevpara, Hat. 7,16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence
the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45;
xix. 11; Jobi. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, ete.; often in Grk.
writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: mvedpa Tov oréparos, 2 Th.
ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4); av. Cas, the
breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. rvon fans, ii.
7). [mvedpa and avon seem to have been in the main
coincident terms; but avon became the more poetical.
Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology.
Even in class. Grk. mvedpa became as freq. and as wide
in its application as dvepos. (Schmidt ch. 55,7; Trench
§ lxxiii.) ]
2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body is
animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.; see below)]: Lk.
vill. 55; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30; Acts vii.59; Rev. xiii. 15
[here R.V. breath}; dqrévar rd mvedpa, to breathe out the
spirit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 cf. Sir. xxxviii. 23; Sap.
xvi. 14 (Grk. writ. said aguévae rnv uyny, as Gen. xxxv.
18, see ainut, 1 b. and Kypke, Observv. i. p. 140; but we
also find dguévar tvedpa Oavacipo opayn, Eur. Hee. 571);
capa Xwpis mvevparos vexpov eat, Jas. li. 263 To mvedud
€oTt TO (worro.ovy, 9 GapE ovk were ovdev, the spirit is
that which animates and gives life, the body is of no
profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in
turn to the spirit; ef. Chr. Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opusce.
p- 239), Jn. vi. 63. the rational spirit, the power by
which a human being feels, thinks, wills, decides; the soul:
TO mvebpa TOU avOpwrov TO ev aite, 1 Co. ii. 11; opp. to
odp& (q. v. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 1 Co.
v.5; 2 Co. vii.1; Col. ii.5; opp. to 76 odpa, Ro. viii. 10;
1 Co. vi. 17, 20 Ree. ; vii. 34; 1 Pet.iv.6. Although for
the most part the words rvedpa and yvuy7 are used indis-
criminately and so c@pa and Wx put in contrast (but
never by Paul; see :uyn, esp. 2), there is also recognized
a threefold distinction, 76 mvedpa Kat 4} Wuxi Kal TO TOpma,
1 Th. v. 23, ace. to which 76 mvedpa is the rational part
of man, the power of perceiving and grasping divine
and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of God
exerts its influence; (avedua, says Luther, “is the high-
est and noblest part of man, which qualifies him to
lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things;
in short, it is the house where Faith and God’s word are
at home” [see reff. at end]): ypu pepiopod Wuyijs cai
mvevpatos (see peptopds, 2), Heb. iv. 12; ev évi mvevpart,
pea Wox7, Phil. i. 27 (where instead of pa Woy7 Paul
acc. to his mode of speaking elsewhere would have said
more appropriately ya capdia). 1d mvedua twos, Mk. ii.
8; viii. 12; Lk. i. 47; Acts xvii. 16; Ro. i. 9; viii. 16;
1Co.v.4; xvi.18; 2Co.ii. 13; vii. 13; Gal. vi. 18; [Phil.
iv. 23 LT Tr WH]; Philem. 25; 2 Tim. iv. 22; 6 Oeds
Tey tvevpatev (for which Rec. has dyiwv) rav mpopnrar.
520
TVEVLE
who incites and directs the souls of the prophets, Rev.
xxii. 6, where cf. Diisterdieck. the dative ro mvetpars
is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or
suffers something, like our in spirit: émvywaokew, Mk. ii.
8; davaorevdgew, Mk. viii. 12; éuBpipaoba, Jn. xi. 33;
tapaooeo Oa, Jn. xiii. 21; Céeuv, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii.
11; dyadd\cacda, Lk. x. 21 (but L T Tr WH here add
dyi@); dat. of respect: 1 Co. v.83; Col. ii.5; 1 Pet. iv.
6; xkparaovoba, Lk. i. 80; ii. 40 Ree.; dyov etvar, 1 Co.
Vil. 34; Cwomoimbeis, 1 Pet. iii. 18; Gjv,1 Pet. iv.6; mro-
xoi, Mt.v.3; dat. of instrument: dedenévos, Acts xx. 22;
auvexerOat, xvili. 5 Rec.; bed Aarpevew, Phil. iii. 3 RG;
dat. of advantage: dveow TO mvedpati pov, 2 Co. ii. 13
(12); ev r@ mvevpars, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vi.
20 Ree. [it is surely better to take ev r. w. here locally,
of the ‘sphere’ (W. 386 (362), ef. vs.19)]; also év avevpa-
tT, nearly i. q. mvevparixas [but see W. § 51, 1 e. note], Jn.
iv. 23; of the seat of an action, év r@ mvevpari pov, Ro. i.
9; rWeva év tH Trv., to propose to one’s self, purpose in
spirit, foll. by the infin. Acts xix. 21. mvevpata mpodn-
ror, ace. to the context the souls (spirits) of the prophets
moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32; in a pecu-
liar sense mvedpua is used of a soul thoroughly roused by
the Holy Spirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet
destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under-
standing; thus in the phrases 7d mvetdud pov mpooedxerat,
opp. to 6 vovs pov, 1 Co. xiv. 14; mvevmare Aadeiv pvorn-
pta, ibid. 2; mporevxerOar, adrew, evdoyetv, TO Tv. as
opp. to r@ voi, ibid. 15, 16.
3. a spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least
all grosser matter, and possessed of the power of knowing,
desiring, deciding, and acting ; a. generically: Lk.
xxiv. 37; Acts xxiii. 8 (on which see pyre, fin.) ; ibid. 9;
mvevpa oapKa Kal darea ov exet, Lk. xxiv. 39; mvedpa
Cworovovr, [a life-giving spirit], spoken of Christ as raised
from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 45; mvedua 6 Beds (God is spirit
essentially), Jn. iv. 24; marijp rev mvevpatev, of God,
Heb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of
men and of angels. b. a human soul that has left the
body [(Babr. 122, 8)]: plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23 ;
1 Pet. iii.19. c. a spirit higher than man but lower
than God, i.e. an angel: plur. Heb. i. 14; used of demons,
or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the
bodies of men: [Mk. ix. 20]; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18;
plur., Mt. viii. 16; xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; mvedpa
mvOwvos or mvOwva, Acts xvi. 16; mvetpara Satpoviwr,
Rey. xvi. 14; avedpa Sapoviov adxabaprov, Lk. iv. 33 (see
Satpdnmov, 2) ; rvedpa ao beveias, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii.
11; mvedpa dxaOaprov, Mt. x. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26,
27 + iii, 11,/803 v. 2,8, 185 wis 73 veo ERezos Lav. 365
vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 26; Acts v.16; viii. 7; Rev.
xvi. 13; xviii. 2; @adov, kopdv (for the Jews held that
the same evils with which the men were afflicted affected
the demons also that had taken possession of them [cf.
Wetstein, N. T. i. 279 sqq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, App. xvi.; see dapoviCoua etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix.
17, 25; movnpdv, Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; Acts xix. 12, 13, 15,
16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23; 18. xvi.14; xix. 9, etc.)]. d.
TVEvpa
the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an-
gels, close to God and most intimately united to him (in
doctrinal phraseology the divine nature of Christ): 1'Tim.
iii. 16; with the addition of dy:wovvns (on which see
dywovrn, 1 [yet cf. 4 a. below]), Ro. i. 4 [but see Meyer
ad loc., Ellicott on 1 Tim. 1. ¢.]; it is called mvedpa aia-
wov, in tacit contrast with the perishable Wuxai of sacri-
ficial animals, in Heb. ix. 14, where cf. Delitzsch [and
esp. Kurtz].
4. The Scriptures also ascribe a mvedua to GOD, i. e.
God’s power and agency, — distinguishable in thought (or
modalistice, as they say in technical speech) from God’s
essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of
affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the
theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts
and blessings; [cf. the resemblances and differences in
Philo’s use of 76 Ociov mvedpa, e. g. de gigant. §12 (cf. § 5
8q-); quis rer. div. § 53; de mund. opif. § 46, ete. ]. a.
This mvedua is called in the O. T. FOX M9, TIT 9;
in the N. T. mvedpa dyiov, rd Gytov mvedpa, TO Tvevpa Td
dytov (first so in Sap. i. 5; ix.17; for wap mM, in Ps. 1.
(li.) 13, Is. Lxiii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by mvetpa dytw-
ovvns),i.e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora-
ble, utterly opposed to all impurity): Mt. i. 18, 203 iii.
Hira is 2's xvas L9is) MK: 1.935. 29); xt: 36% Mii 1 ts
Manwlssoon Miso: 26s hi 6. 22)tve Ls xd Sexi. 10}
12; Jn.i. 33; vii. 39 [LT WH om. Tr br. dy.]; xiv. 26;
ux. 22% “Alcts'l. 2,5;/8, 16 > 11.33, 38); iv. 25 LT Tr WH;
v. 3, 32; viii. 18 [LT WH om. Tr br. 16 dy. ], 19; ix. 31; x.
BONAaT AD Ae Xd On Gi 24s sxli. 24s Ovo Din xve OS. 206
PVG MaxeGi axe 28} Roy ix 1s, xxive 175) xve 2316909
{L Tr WH in br.]; 1 Co. vi. 19; xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 65 xiii.
£3114) 3) Bph.i 133 1-Th)1/5,.6;. 2: Timsi. 145) Dita
5; Heb. ii. 4; vi.4; ix.8;1Jn.v. 7 Rec.; Jude 20; oth-
er exx. will be given below in the phrases; (on the use
and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom.
ii. p. 105 [in opposition to Harless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al. ;
ef. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v.5; W.
122 (116); B. 89 (78)]); 16 mv. rd Gytov Tod Geod, Eph.
iv. 30; 1 Th. iv.8; mvedya Geod, Ro. viii. 9, 14; 1d Tod
Geod mvedpa, 1 Pet. iv. 14; (7d) mvedpa (Tov) Oeov, Mt. iii.
165) xii. 18, 285) 2 Co. ii. 14 5 1. 16; Eph. iii. 16);/ 1 Jn:
iv. 2; ro mv. rod Geod nuay, 1 Co. vi. 11; 1o mv. rod marpés,
Mt. x. 20; mv. Oeod (dvtos, 2 Co. iii. 3; To mv. Tod éyeipay-
tos “Incovv, Ro. viii. 11; ro mv. ro ex Oeod (emanating
from God and imparted unto men), 1 Co. ii. 12; mvedpa
and 106 mv. Tov kupiov, i.e. of God, Lk. iv. 18; Acts v. 9
(cf. vs. 4); viii. 39; xupiov, i.e. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17,
18 [cf. B. 343 (295)]; 1rd mvedpa "Inood, since the same
Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi.
7 (where Rec. om. ’Inoov); Xpiorod, Ro. viii. 9; "Inaod
Xptorov, Phil. i. 19; rd €v tux (in one’s soul [not WH
mrg.]) mvedpa Xptorov, 1 Pet. i. 11; rd av. rod viod rod
Geov, Gal. iv. 6; simply rd mvedua or mvedpa: Mt. iv. 1;
xan ots oo.) xxi 433° Mki010,12 5 bkoived) 145 dune
$2, 33ei1n: 6) 8,°94';''vil.' S95) Acts il. 4:5) vill.129)5x/' 195
xi. 12, 28; xxi. 4; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27; xv.30; 1 Co.
ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Ree. adds dyiov) ; xii. 4, 7, 8; 2 Co.
521
veda
i, 225 111.6, 8; v.5; Gal. iii. 3,5, 14; iv. 295 v. 5, 17, 22,
25; Eph. iv. 3; v. 9 Rec.; vi. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 2 Th. ii.
13; 1 Tim. iv. 1; Jas. iv. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec.; 1 Jn. iii.
24; v. 6,8; Rev. xxii. 17. Among the beneficent and
very varied operations and effects ascribed to this
Spirit in the N. T., the foll. are prominent: by it the
man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Mary
(Mt. i. 18, 20; Lk. i. 35), and at his baptism by John it
is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16; Mk. i.
10; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually (pévov er
avrov) filled with it (Jn. i. 32, 33, cf. iii. 34; Mt. xii. 28;
Acts x.38); hence to its prompting and aid the acts and
words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1; xii. 28; Mk. i. 12;
Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ’s resurrection it was im-
parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22; Acts ii. Sub-
sequently other followers of Christ are related to have
received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instra-
mentality of baptism (Acts ii. 38; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the
laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep-
tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag-
ical bond, Acts viii. 12, 15; x. 44 sqq. To its agency
are referred all the blessings of the Christian religion,
such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8;
Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and
reff. s.v. Bamticpa, 3]); all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11;
hence dy:aopos mvevparos, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet.i. 2); the
power of suppressing evil desires and practising holi-
ness (Ro. viii. 2sqq.; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22[Ree.],
etc.) ; fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu-
tions, losses, trials, for Christ’s sake (Mt. x. 20; Lk. xii.
11,12; Ro. viii. 26); the knowledge of evangelical truth
(Jn. xiv. 17, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 12,13; 1 Co.ii. 6-16; Eph.
iii. 5), — hence it is called rvedpa ths addnOeias (In. ll. ec. ;
1 Jn. iv. 6), mvedpa codias kai aroxadvwews (Eph. i. 17) ;
the sure and joyful hope of a future resurrection, and
of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5; viii. 11; 2 Co. i. 22; v.
5; Eph. i. 13 sq.); for the Holy Spirit is the seal and
pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22;
Eph.i.13. He is present toteach, guide, prompt, restrain,
those Christians whose agency God employs in carrying
out his counsels: Acts viii. 29,39; x. 19; xi. 12; xiii. 2,
4; xv. 28; xvi. 6, 7; xx. 28. He is the author of char-
isms or special “gifts” (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see xdpicpa),
prominent among which is the power of prophesy-
ing: ra épyopeva avayyedet, Jn. xvi. 13; hence ro rvedpa
ris mpopnreias (Rev. xix. 10) ; and his efficiency in the
prophets is called 7d wvedpa simply (1 Th. v. 19), and
their utterances are introduced with these formulas:
rade Aéyer TO Tvedpa TO Gyov, Acts xxi. 11; TO mvedpa
héyet, 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with rats éxxAnoias
added, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii.6,13, 22. Since the Holy
Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O. T.
Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances
are cited in the foll. terms: Aéyet or paprupet TO mvedpa
7d dyov, Heb. iii. 7; x. 15; 7d mv. ro ay. eddAnoe did
‘Hoaiov, Acts xxviii. 25, cf. i. 16. From among the
great number of other phrases referring to the Holy
Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here: God
TVED MLA 522
is said d:d0vae twit ro mv. 76 dy., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xv. 8;
pass. Ro. v. 5; more precisely, éx tov mvevpatos avroi, i.e.
a portion from his Spirit’s fulness [B. § 132, 7; W. 366
(343) ], 1 Jn. iv. 13; or éxxety dd Tov mvevparos avoid,
Acts ii. 17, 18, (for its entire fulness Christ alone re-
ceives, Jn. iii. 34); men are said, AapBavew mv. ay., Jn.
xx. 22; Acts viii. 15, 17, 19; xix. 2; or ré mv. rd dy. Acts
x. 47; or ro mv. Td €k Oeov, 1 Co. ii. 12; or 76 mvedpa, Gal.
iii. 2, cf. Ro. viii. 15 ; mv. Oeod Exewv, 1 Co. vii. 40; mvedpa
ny exer, Jude 19; mAnpovoOat mvevparos ayiov, Acts Xiil.
52; év mvevpart, Eph. v.18; mAnoOjva, mrAnoOncecOat,
mvevparos ayiov, Lk.i.15,41,67; Actsiil.4; iv. 8, 31; ix.
17; xiii. 9; mvedvparos dylov mAnpns, Acts vi. 5; vil. 55;
xi. 24; mAnpecs mvevparos (Rec. adds dyiov) cat copias,
Acts vi. 3; mvedpare and mvevpatt Oeod ayeobat, to be led
by the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v.18; péperOat iro
mv. dy. 2 Pet. i. 21; the Spirit is said to dwell in the
minds of Christians, Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co. iii. 16; vi. 19;
2 Tim. i. 14; Jas. iv. 5, (other expressions may be found
under Barri¢a, II. b. bb.; yevvda, 1 fin. and 2 d.; éxyéw b. ;
Xpiw, a.) ; yiverOat ev mvevpart, to come to be in the Spirit,
under the power of the Spirit, i.e. in a state of inspira-
tion or ecstasy, Rev. i. 10; iv. 2. Dative mvevpar, by the
power and aid of the Spirit, the Spirit prompting, Ro.
vill. 13; Gal. v.53 1@ mv. to ayia, Lk. x. 21 L Tr WH;
mvevpate dyiw, 1 Pet. i. 12 (where RG T have év mp. dy.) ;
mvevparte Geod, Phil. iii. 3 L T Tr WH; also év mvevpart,
Eph. ii. 22; iii. 5 (where ev mvevpare must be joined to
arexahvp6n) ; €v mvevparr, in the power of the Spirit,
possessed and moved by the Spirit, Mt. xxii. 43; Rev.
xvii. 3; xxi. 10; also ev r@ mvevpars, Lk. ii. 27; iv. 1;
evt@ mv. TO ay. Lk. x. 21 Tdf.; ev rn duvapec tod mv. Lk. iv.
14; €v TO mvevpatt To ay. eiweiv, Mk. xii. 36; év rvevpare
(dy.) mpooevxecOa, Eph. vi. 18; Jude 20; ev mv. bed
Aadetv, 1 Co. xii. 33 aydrn ev mvevpatt, love which the
Spirit begets, Col. i. 8; meprroun év mv., effected by the
Holy Spirit, opp. to ypdppyart, the prescription of the
written law, Ro. ii. 29; rumos yivov Trav moray év tv., in
the way in which you are governed by the Spirit, 1 Tim.
iv. 12 Rec.; [ev évi mvedpart, Eph. ii. 18]; 4 évdrns rod
mvevparos, effected by the Spirit, Eph. iv. 3; xawvdrns tov
mv. Ro. vii. 6. 76 mvedpa is opp. to 7 odpé i. e. human
nature left to itself and without the controlling influence
of God’s Spirit, subject to error and sin, Gal. v. 17, 19,
22; [vi. 8]; Ro. viii. 6; soin the phrases zepinareiv xara
mvevpa (opp. to Kata odpka), Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 4; of xara
mvevpa SC. vtes (Opp. to of kara odpKa dvtes), those who
bear the nature of the Spirit (i. e. of mvevyatixol), ib.
5; év mvevpate eivae (opp. to év capki), to be under the
power of the Spirit, to be guided by the Spirit, ib. 9;
mvevpate (dat. of ‘norm’; [ef. B. § 1383, 22 b.; W. 219
(205) ]) mepirareiy (opp. to émOupiav capkos redeiv), Gal.
v.16. The Holy Spirit is a ddvapes, and is expressly
so called in Lk. xxiv. 49, and ddvayuis iyiorov, Lk. i. 35 ;
but we find also mvedpa (or mv. dy.) kal duvayuis, Acts x.
38; 1 Co. ii. 45 and 4 duvapis rod mvevparos, Lk. iv. 14,
where mvedpa is regarded as the essence, and dvvayts its
efficacy ; but in 1 Th. i. 5 ev mvevpare dyio is epexegetical
TVEULA
of év Suvdper. In some pass. the Holy Spirit is rhetori-
cally represented as a Person [(cf. reff. below)]: Mt.
XXvili.19; Jn. xiv. 16 sq. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 13-15 (in which
pass. fr. Jn. the personification was suggested by the fact
that the Holy Spirit was about to assume with the apos-
tles the place of a person, namely of Christ) ; ré mv., cabs
BovdAera, 1 Co. xii. 11; what any one through the help
of the Holy Spirit has come to understand or decide upon
is said to have been s poken to him by the Holy Spirit:
eime TO TED Aa Tim, Acts Vill. 29; x. 19; xi. 12; xiii. 4; rd
mv. 70 Gy. Svapaprvperai pot, Acts xx. 23. 1d mv. Td dy.
€Oero entokdnous, i. e. not only rendered them fit to dis-
charge the office of bishop, but also exercised such an in-
fluence in their election (xiv. 23) that none except fit per-
sons were chosen to the office, Acts xx. 28; rd mvevpa
Umepevtvyxaver orevaypois dAaAnros in Ro. viii. 26 means,
as the whole context shows, nothing other than this: <al-
though we have no very definite conception of what we
desire (ri mpocevémpeOa), and cannot state it in fit lan-
guage (xa6o dec) in our prayer but only disclose it by in-
articulate groanings, yet God receives these groanings
as acceptable prayers inasmuch as they come from a soul
full of the Holy Spirit.” Those who strive against the
sanctifying impulses of the Holy Spirit are said dvret-
mre TO Tv. TH ay. Acts vil. 51; evuBpicew ro mv. THs xapt-
tos, Heb. x. 29. metpdgerv To mv. Tov kupiov is applied to
those who by falsehood would discover whether men full
of the Holy Spirit can be deceived, Acts v. 9; by anthro-
popathism those who disregard decency in their speech
are said Aumety 70 mv. 76 dy., since by that they are taught
how they ought to talk, Eph. iv. 30 (wapofvvew ro mv. Is.
Ixiii. 10; mapamxpaivery, Ps. ev. (evi.) 33). Cf. Grimm,
Institutio theologiae dogmaticae, § 131; [ Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. § 155 (and Index s. v. ‘ Geist Gottes,’ ‘Spirit of
God’); Kahnis, Lehre vom Heil. Geiste; Fritzsche, Nova
opusce. acad. p. 278 sqq.; B. D. s. v. Spirit the Holy;
Swete in Dict. of Christ. Biog. s.v. Holy Ghost]. b.
Ta énra mvevpata Tov Geov, Rev. [iii. 1 (where Rec.* om.
émrd) |; iv. 5; v.6 [here Lom. WH br. érra], which are
said to be évwmov Tov Opdvov Tod Geod (i. 4) are not seven
angels, but one and the same divine Spirit manifesting
itself in seven energies or operations (which are rhetori-
cally personified, Zech. iii. 9; iv. 6,10); ef. Diisterdieck
on Rev. i.4; [ Trench, Epp. to the Seven Churches, ed. 3
p- 7 sq. ]. c. by meton. mvedua is used of a. one
in whom a spirit (arvedpa) is manifest or embodied ; hence
i. q. actuated by a spirit, whether divine or demoniacal ; one
who either is truly moved by God’s Spirit or falsely boasts
that he is: 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3; hence dsaxpioes
mvevpdtav, 1 Co. xii. 10; py wavri mvedpare morevere, 1 Jn.
iv. 1; Soxuydtere ra mvevpara, ei ex Tov Oeov eoriv, ibid. ;
mvevpara mAdva joined with ddacxad lar Sapovioy, 1 Tim.
iv. 1. But in the truest and highest sense it is said 6
KUptos TO mvedud eo, he in whom the entire fulness of
the Spirit dwells, and from whom that fulness is diffused
through the body of Christian believers, 2 Co. iii. 17. B.
the plur. rvedzara denotes the various modes and gifts
by which the Holy Spirit shows itself operative in those
TVEU LA
in whom it awells (such as 16 mvedpa rhs mpodnreias, Tis
codias, etc.), 1 Co. xiv. 12.
5. univ. the disposition or influence which fills and gov-
erns the soul of any one; the efficient source of any power,
affection, emotion, desire, etc.: r@ ait@ mvevpart mepiera-
tioapev, 2 Co. xii. 18; ev mvevpart "HXiov, in the same
spirit with which Elijah was filled of old, Lk. i. 17;
Ta pnpata... mvedua eotiy, exhale a spirit (and fill be-
lievers with it), Jn. vi. 63; ofov mvevpards éeote typeis,
[what manner of spirit ye are of] viz. a divine spirit,
that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.; (cf.
B. § 132,11 I.; W. § 30, 5)]; r@ mvedpart, 6 eAddet,
Acts vi. 10, where see Meyer; mpav kat novx.ov mvedpa,
1 Pet. iii. 4; mvedpa mpadryros, such as belongs to the
meek, 1 Co. iv. 21; Gal. vi.1; 7d av. ris mpopnretas, such
as characterizes prophecy and by which the prophets
are governed, Rey. xix. 10; ris adndeias, codias Kat aro-
kadvews, see above p. 521° mid. (Is. xi. 2; Deut. xxxiv. 9;
Sap. vii. 7); ts micrews, 2 Co. iv. 13; THs viobecias, such
as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; ths fans ev Xpiota, of
the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2;
Suvdpews kal ayarns Kal cwoppoucpod, 2 Tim.i. 7; év rvetpa
eivat with Christ, i.q. to be filled with the same spirit as
Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately
united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17; év évi mvevpari, by the re-
ception of one Spirit’s efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; eis &
mvevpa, so as to be united into one body filled with one
Spirit, ibid. RG; & mvetpa roriterOa, [made to drink
of i.e.] imbued with one Spirit, ibid. L T Tr WH [see
moti(w|; év o@pa Kal év mvedpa, one (social) body filled
and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4;—~in all these
pass. although the language is general, yet it is clear
from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten
of the Holy Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [(cf.
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad
Magn. 7)]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand,
TO Mvevpa TO evepyour €v Tos Viots THs ameOeias (a Spirit
that comes from the devil), Eph. ii. 2; also 76 mvedua Tod
xoopov, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude,
1 Co. ii. 12; Sdovdeias, such as characterizes and governs
slaves, Ro. viii. 15; xataviEews, Ro. xi. 8; detdias, 2 Tim.
i. 7; rhs mAavns, 1 Jn. iv. 6 (mAavjceas, Is. xix. 14; mop-
veias, Hos. iv. 12; v.4); Td Tod avriypiorou SC. mvedpa,
1 Jn. iv. 3; érepov mvedvpa AapBavew, i. e. different from
the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. xi.4; 1d mv. rod voos, the govern-
ing spirit of the mind, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Ackermann,
Beitrige zur theol. Wiirdigung u. Abwiigung der Begriffe
mvevpa, vous, u. Geist, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1839, p. 873 sqq.; Biichsenschiitz, La doctrine de l’ Esprit
de Dieu selon l’ancien et nouveau testament. Strasb.
1840; Chr. Fr. Fritzsche, De Spiritu Sancto commenta-
tio exegetica et dogmatica, 4 Pts. Hal. 1840 sq., included
in his Nova opuscula academica (Turici, 1846) p. 233 sqq.;
Kahnis, Die Lehre v. heil. Geist. Pt. i. (Halle, 1847); an
anonymous publication [by Prince Ludwig Solms Lich,
entitled] Die biblische Bedeutung des Wortes Geist.
(Giessen, 1862); H. H. Wendt, Die Begriffe Fleisch u.
Geist im bibl. Sprachgebrauch. (Gotha, 1878); [Cremer
523
TVEULATLKOS
in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Geist des Menschen; G. L. Hahn,
Theol. d. N. Test. i. § 149 sqq.; J. Laidlaw, The Bible
Doctrine of Man. (Cunningham Lects., 7th Series, 1880);
Dickson, St. Paul’s use of the terms Flesh and Spirit.
(Glasgow, 1883); and reff. in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) and
Dict. of Christ. Biog., as above, 4 a. fin.]*
TVEVLATLKGS, -1, -dv, (wvEedpa), spiritual (Vulg. spiritalis);
in the N. T. 1. relating to the human spirit, or
rational soul, as the part of man which is akin to God
and serves as his instrument or organ, opp. to 7 uyn
(see mvetdua, 2): hence 7d mvevpatixdv, that which pos-
sesses the nature of the rational soul, opp. to 7d Wuxexdy,
1 Co. xv. 46 [cf. W. 592 (551)]; capa mvevpartixdy, the
body which is animated and controlled only by the ra-
tional soul and by means of which the rational life, or
life of the mvedpa, is lived; opp. to cGua Wuxexdy, verse
44, 2. belonging to a spirit, or a being higher
than man but inferior to God (see mvedpa, 3c.) : Ta mvev-
parixa (i. e. spiritual beings or powers, [R. V. spiritual
hosts], cf. W. 239 (224)) ras movnpias (gen. of quality),
i.e. wicked spirits, Eph. vi. 12. 3. belonging to the
Divine Spirit; a. in reference to things;
emanating from the Divine Spirit, or exhibiting its effects
and so its character: xaptopa, Ro. i. 11; evAoyia, Eph. i.
3; copia kat ovveois mvevpatixn (opp. to copia capxixn, 2
Co. i. 12; puyexn, Jas. iii. 15), Col. i. 9; ddai, divinely
inspired, and so redolent of the Holy Spirit, Col. iii. 16;
[Eph. v.19 Lcehm. br.]; 6 vopos (opp. to a odpxivos man),
Ro. vii. 14; @voiat, tropically, the acts of a life dedicated
to God and approved by him, due to the influence of the
Holy Spirit (tacitly opp. to the sacrifices of an external
worship), 1 Pet. ii. 5; i. q. produced by the sole power of
God himself without natural instrumentality, supernatural,
Bpapa, ropa, mérpa, 1 Co. x. 3, 4, [(cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 10,
3)]; mvevpatixa, thoughts, opinions, precepts, maxims,
ascribable to the Holy Spirit working in the soul, 1 Co.
ii. 13 (on which see ovyxpiva, 1) ; Ta mvevparixa, spiritual
gifts,—of the endowments called yapicpara (see xapt-
opa), 1 Co. xii. 1; xiv. 1; univ. the spiritual or heavenly
blessings of the gospel, opp. to ra wapxixd, Ro. xv. 27; [1
Co. ix. 11]. b. in reference to persons; one who
is filled with and governed by the Spirit of God: 1 Co. ii.
15 (cf. 10-13, 16); [iii. 1]; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 15 oixos
mvevparixés, of a body of Christians (see otkos, 1 b. fin.),
1 Pet. ii. 5. (The word is not found in the O. T. [ef.
W. § 34, 3]. In prof. writ. fr. Aristot. down it means
pertaining to the wind or breath; windy, exposed to the
wind; blowing; [but Soph. Lex. s. v. cites rv. ovaia, Cleo-
med. 1,8 p. 46; 16 mv. Td TavT@Y TOUT@Y atrtov, Strab. 1,
3, 5 p. 78, 10ed. Kramer; and we find it opp. to coparixdy
in Plut. mor. p. 129 c. (de-sanitate praecepta 14) ; cf. An-
thol:) Pal. 8, 76. 175 ].)*
arvevpatikas, adv., spiritually, (Vulg. spiritaliter) : i. e.
by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. [13 WH mrg.], 14;
in a sense apprehended only by the aid of the Divine
Spirit, i.e. in a hidden or mystical sense, Rev. xi. 8. Its
opposite capkixés in the sense of literally is used by Jus-
tin Mart. dial. c. Tryph. c. 14 p. 231 d.*
WVEw
avéw; 1 aor. éxvevoa; fr. Hom. down; to breathe, to
blow: of the wind, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Lk. xii. 55; Jn. iii.
8; vi. 18; Rev. vii. 15 ry mveovog sc. atpa (cf. W. 591
(550); [B. 82 (72)]), Acts xxvii.40. [Comp.: ék-, €v-,
Uro- mvEw. | *
mviyw: impf. érveyov; 1 aor. émuga; impf. pass. 3 pers.
plur. émviyovro; a. to choke, strangle : used of thorns
crowding down the seed sown in a field and hindering
its growth, Mt. xiii. 7 T WH mrg.; in the pass. of per-
ishing by drowning (Xen. anab. 5, 7, 25; cf. Joseph. antt.
10, 7,5), Mk. v. 13. b. to wring one’s neck, throttle,
iA. V. to take one by the throat]: Mt. xviii. 28. [Comp.:
Gro-, émt-, Tup- rriye. |*
TVUKTOS, -1, -Ov, (rviyw), suffocated, strangled: To mu
xrév, [what is strangled, i. e.] an animal deprived of life
without shedding its blood, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25.
[(Several times in Athen. and other later writ., chiefly
of cookery ; cf. our “smothered” as a culinary term.) ]*
mvon, -7s, 7, (mvéw), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 7);
1. breath, the breath of life: Acts xvii. 25 (Gen. ii. 7;
Prov. xxiv. 12; Sir. xxx. 29 (21); 2 Mace. iii. 313 vii.
9). 2. wind: Acts ii. 2 (Job xxxvii. 9). [Cf.
mvedpa, 1 b.]*
mrodipns, -es, acc. -pyv, Lchm. ed. ster. Tdf. ed. 7 in Rev.
i. 13; see apony, (movs, and dpe ‘to join together,” ‘fas-
ten’), reaching to the feet (Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plut.,
al.): 6 wodnpns (se. xetov, Ex. xxv. 6; xxviii. 4; xxxv.
8; Ezek. ix.3) or 9 wodnpns (se. eo Ons), a garment reaching
to the ankles, coming down to the feet, Rev.i. 13 (Sir. xxvii.
8; xlv. 8; xurav modnpys, Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 2; Paus. 5, 19,
6; vmodvrns mod. Ex. xxviii. 27; vSupa aod. Sap. xviii.
24; [Joseph. b. j. 5,5, 7]). [Cf. Trench §1. sub fin.]*
wo0ev, adv., [fr. Hom. down], whence ; a. of
place, from what place: Mt. xv. 33; Lk. xiii. 25,27; Jn.
hii. 8; vi. 5; viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xix. 9; Rev. vii. 13;
from what condition, Rev. ii. 5. b. of origin or
source, i.q. from what author or giver: Mt. xiii. [27], 54,
565 xxi. 25; Mk. vi. 23 Lk. xx. 75 Jn. ii. 95 Jas: iv. Ps
from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sq. (cf. vi. 42), see Meyer
ad loc. c. of cause, how is it that? how can it be that 2
Mk. viii. 4; xii. 37; Lk. i. 43; Jn. i. 48 (49); iv. 11.*
mota, -as, 7, [cf. Curtius § 387], herbage, grass: ace. to
some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14; but zoia there is
more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. zotos (q. v.),
of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mal. iii. 2; in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down.) *
movew, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. émotet, plur. 2 pers. érot-
eire, 3 pers. eroiouv; fut. motmow; 1 aor. émoinea, 3 pers.
plur. optat. qwoumoecay (Lk. vi. 11 RG; ef. W. § 13, 2d.;
[B. 42 (37)]}) and zoujoaey (ibid. LT Tr WH [see WH.
App. p. 167]); pf. memoinxa; plpf. wemoujxew without
augm. (Mk. xv. 7; see W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid.,
pres. wotodpat; impf. érovovunv; fut. mornoopat; 1 aor. érrot-
nodpnv; pf. pass. ptcp. memounpevos (Heb. xii. 27); fr.
Hom. down; Hebr. nwy; Lat. facio, i.e.
I. to make (Lat. efficio), Lieb a. with the
names of the things made, to produce, construct, form,
fashion, etc.: avOpaxiav, Jn. xviii. 18; eixdva, Rev. xiii.
524
TTOLES
14; ipdria, Acts ix. 39; vaovs, Acts xix. 24; oxnvds, Mt
xvii. 4; Mk. ix.5; Lk. ix.33; rémous, Acts vii. 43; addy,
Jn. ix. 11, 145; mAdopa, Ro. ix. 20; acc. to some inter.
preters (also W. 256 n.! (240 n.2)) éd6v woteiv, to make a
path, Mk. ii. 23 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. (so that the mean-
ing is, that the disciples of Christ made a path for theme
selves through the standing grain by plucking the heads;
see ddomoéw, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we
must take the ground that Mark does not give us the
true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the
narrative received from others; [those who do accept
it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying
lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other
interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex-
pressed in the participle—an idiom apparently foreign
to the N. T. (see W. 353 (331)), and to the additional
circumstance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav-
ing already expressed the idea of ‘going’, and ex-
pressed it by substantially the same word (mapamopeve-
o6a) which Matthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) employ
and regard as of itself sufficient. On the interpretation
of the pass., the alleged ‘sad corruption,’ etc., see Jas.
Morison, Com. on Mk. 2d ed. p. 57 sq.; on the other side,
Weiss, Marcusevangelium, p. 100]. But see just below,
under c.). to create, to produce: of God, as the author
of all things, ri or rua, Mt. xix.4; Mk. x. 6; Lk. xi. 40;
Heb. i. 2; Acts iv. 24; vii.50; xvii. 24; Rev. xiv. 7; pass.
Heb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13; ix. 9; 2 Mace. vii. 28, and often
in the O.T. Apocrypha; for Ny in Gen. i. 7, 16, 25, ete. ;
for 813 in Gen. i. 21, 27; v. 1, etc.; also in Grk. writ. :
yéevos avOporear, Hes. op.109, etc.; absol. 6 moray, the crea-
tor, Plat. Tim. p. 76 c.); here belongs also Heb. iii. 2, on
which see Bleek and Liinemann [(cf. below, 2 ce. B.)].
In imitation of the Hebr. nwy (cf. Winer [’s Simonis (4th
ed. 1828)], Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 754; Gesenius, Thes.
ii. p. 1074 sq.) absol. of men, to labor, to do work, Mt. xx.
12 (Ruth ii. 19); i. q. to be operative, exercise activity,
Rev. xiii. 5 Rete L, T Tr WH [cf. Dan. xi. 28; but al.
render zrovetv in both these exx. spend, continue, in ref.
to time; see II. d. below]. b. joined to nouns de-
noting a state or condition, it signifies to be the au-
thor of, to cause: oxavdada, Ro. xvi. 17; eipnynv (to be the
author of harmony), Eph. ii. 15; Jas. iii. 18; émeovoraoww
[L T Tr WH énicracw], Acts xxiv.12; svorpodpny, Acts
xxiii. 12; move revi re, to bring, afford, a thing to one, Lk.
i. 68; Acts xv. 3, (so also Grk. writ., as Xen. mem. 3,
10, 8 [ef. L. and S. s.v. A. II. 1a.]). c. joined to
nouns involving the idea of action (or of something
which is accomplished by action), so as to form a peri-
phrasis for the verb cognate to the substantive, and thus
to express the idea of the verb more forcibly, —in which
species of periphrasis the Grks. more commonly use the
middle (see 3 below, and W. 256 (240); [B. § 135, 5]):
poviy mow mapa Tun, Jn. xiv. 23 (where LT Tr WH sou
adpeba; cf. Thue. 1,131); 68dv, to make one’s way, go,
Mk. ii. 23 (where render as follows: they began, as they
went, to pluck the ears; cf. roujoat 686v avrod, Judg. xvil.
8; the Greeks say 68év moeioOar, Hat. 7, 42; see above,
TOLEW
under a.); méAepuov, Rey. xiii. 5 Rec.*"; with the addi-
tion of pera Tivos (i. q. woAepeiv), Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii.
7 [here Lem. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, (see pera,
i. 2d. p. 403); éxdiknow, Lk. xviii. 7, 8; revi, Acts vii.
24, (Mie. v. 15) ; evedpay, i. q. evedpevw, to make an am-
bush, lay wait, Acts xxv. 3; oupBovaAcop, i. q. cupBovdevo-
pa, to hold a consultation, deliberate, Mk. iii. 6 [RG
T Trmrg. WH mrg.]; xv. 1 [here TWH mrg. ovpB.
éroimacavtes |]; Tuvapociay, i. q. cvvdpvups, Acts xxiii. 13
(where LT Tr WH rromodpevor for Rec. merrounkdtes ; see
in 3 below) ; «pict, to execute judgment, Jn. v. 27; Jude
15. To this head may be referred nouns by which the
mode or kind of action is more precisely defined; as
Suvdpecs, Suvapev, moreiv, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 5;
Acts xix. 11; ryyv égovciav twés, Rev. xiii. 12; gpyov (a
notable work), ¢pya, of Jesus, Jn. v. 36, vii. 3, 21; x. 25;
xiv. 10, 12; xv. 24; xpdros, Lk. i. 51; onweta, répara Kai
onueia, [Mk. xiii. 22 Tdf.]; Jn. ii. 23; iii. 2; iv. 54; vi.
DalAsreoO avalon sax UG x Adil txd a 7S X11 Shock R
30; Acts ii. 22; vi. 8; vii. 36; viii.6; xv.12; Rev. xiii.
13, 14; xvi. 14; xix. 20; @avyaoua, Mt. xxi. 15; dca érotet,
eroinaay, etc., Mk. iii. 8; vi. 30; Lk. ix. 10; in other
phrases it is used of marvellous works, Mt. ix. 28; Lk.
iv. 23; Jn. iv. 45; vii.4; xi. 45,46; xxi. 25 [not Tdf.];
Acts x. 39; xiv. 11; xxi. 19; ete. ‘d. i.q. to make
ready, to prepare: aptorov, Lk. xiv. 12; detmvov, Mk. vi.
21; Lk. xiv. 16; Jn. xii. 2, (Seimvov moveio Oa, Xen. Cyr.
3, 3, 25) ; doynv, Lk. v. 29; xiv. 13, (Gen. xxi. 8) ; ydyous,
Mt. xxii. 2 (yapov, Tob. viii. 19). e. of things ef-
fected by generative force, to produce, bear, shoot forth :
of trees, vines, grass, etc., kAadSous, Mk. iv. 32; kapzovs,
Mt. iii. 8, etc., see kapmés, 1 and 2 a. (Gen. i. 11, 12; Aris-
tot. de plant. [1, 4 p.819°, 31]; 2, 10[829°, 41]; Theophr.
de caus. plant. 4, 11 [(?)]); €Aadas, Jas. iii. 12 (ror otvor,
of the vine, Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 5); of a fountain yield-
ing water, ibid. f. ow® €wavT@ tt, to acquire, to
provide a thing for one’s self (i. e. for one’s use) : Badayrta,
Lk. xii. 33; idovus, Lk. xvi. 9; without a dative, to gain:
of tradesmen (like our collog. to make something), Mt.
xxv. 16 [L Tr WH éképdnoev] ; Lk. xix. 18, (Polyb. 2, 62,
12; pecuniam maximam facere, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 6). 2.
With additions to the accusative which define or limit
the idea of making: a. tl €k twos (gen. of mate-
rial), to make a thing out of something, Jn. ii. 15; ix.
6; Ro. ix. 21; xara rt, according to the pattern of a
thing [see xara, II. 3 ¢.a.], Acts vii.44. with the addi-
tion, to the acc. of the thing, of an adjective with which
the verb so blends that, taken with the adj., it may be
changed into the verb cognate to the adj.: eddetas mou
ety (ras TtpiBous), i. q. evOvverv, Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk.
ill. 45 rpixya AevKyy 7) peAawvay, i. q. AevKaivew, pedaivery,
Mt. v. 36; add, Acts vil. 19; Heb. xii. 18; Rev. xxi.
is! b. 7d ixavov tut; see ikavds, a. Cc. moveiv
ria with an accus. of the predicate, a. to (make i.e.)
render one anything: twa ioov twi, Mt. xx. 12; twa
dnAov, Mt. xxvi. 73; add, Mt. xii. 16; xxviii. 14; Mk. iii.
12; Jn. v.11, 15: vii. 23; xvi. 2; Ro. ix. 28[RG, Trmrg.
in br.]; Heb. i. 7; Rev. xii. 15; revas dAceis, to make
525
Trolew
them fit (qualify them) for fishing, Mt. iv. 19; [mod»
Tavta yvwora an’ ai@vos, Acts xv. 17 sq. GT Tr WH (see
yvoords, and cf. II. a. below)]; ra duddrepa ev, to make
the two different things one, Eph. ii. 14; to change one
thing into another, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46;
Jn. ii. 16; iv. 46; 1 Co. vi. 15. B. to (make i.e.) consti-
tute or appoint one anything: twa kvprov, Acts ii. 36; Rev.
v.10; to this sense some interpreters would refer Heb. iii.
2 also, where after 76 roujoavrt adrov they supply from the
preceding context rov dméaroXov kai apxvepea xTr.; but it
is more correct to take zrovety here in the sense of create
(see 1 a. above) ; twa, iva with the subjune. to appoint or
ordain one that etc. Mk. iii. 14. y- to (make i. e.)
declare one anything: Jn. v. 18; viii. 53; x. 33; xix. 7,
12; 1 Jn. i. 10; v.10; ri with an ace. of the pred. Mt.
xii. 33 (on which see Meyer). d. with adverbs:
kadas moe tt, Mk. vii. 37 [A. V.do]; tiva €€w, to put one
forth, to lead him out (Germ. hinausthun), Acts v. 34 (Xen.
Cyr. 4, 1, 3). €. mow twa with an infin. to make one
do a thing, Mk. viii. 25[RGL Tr mrg.]; Lk. v.34; Jn.
vi. 10; Acts xvii. 26; or become something, Mk. i. 17;
twa foll. by rod with an infin. fo cause one to etc. Acts
iii. 12 [W. 326 (306); B. § 140, 16 6.]; also foll. by tva
[B. § 139,43; W.§ 44, 8 b. fin.], Jn. xi. 37; Col. iv. 16;
Rev. xiii. 15 (here T om. WH br. iva) ; iii. 9; xiii. 12, 16;
[other exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 8]. 3. As the active
movetv (see 1 c. above), so also the middle roveto Oat, joined
to accusatives of abstract nouns forms a periphrasis for
the verb cognate to the substantive; and then, while
move signifies to be the author of a thing (to cause, bring
about, aS mroveivy méXepov, eipnynv), movetoOa denotes an
action which pertains in some way to the actor (for
one’s self, among themselves, etc., as omovdds, eipnyny trot
eicar), or which is done by one with his own resources
([the ‘dynamic’ or ‘subjective’ mid.], as méAeuov rrotet-
aba [to make, carry on, war]; cf. Passow s. v. I. 2 a. ii.
p. 974 sq.; [L. and S.s.v. A. II. 4]; Kriiger § 52, 8, 1;
Blume ad Lycurg. p. 55; [W. § 38, 5n.; B. § 135, 5];
although this distinction is not always observed even by
the Greeks) : rovetoOar povnv, [make our abode], Jn. xiv.
23 LT Tr WH, (see 1 c. above) ; cuvwpociay (Hdian. 7,
4,7 [8 ed. Bekk.]; Polyb. 1, 70,6; 6, 13, 4; in the second
instance Polyb. might more fitly have said motety), Acts
xxiii. 13 L T Tr WH, see 1 c. above; Adyov, to compose
a narrative, Acts i. 1; to make account of, regard, (see
Adyos, ITI. 2 [and ef. I. 3 a.]), Acts xx. 24 [T Tr WH,
Adyou]; avaBorny (see avaBodn), Acts xxv. 17; éxBoAny
(see éxBodn, b.), Acts xxvii. 18; xomerdv (i.q. KérTopuat), Acts
viii. 2 [here L T Tr WH give the active, cf. B. §135,
5n.]; mopeiay (i. q. mopevouar), Lk. xiii. 22 (Xen. Cyr. 5,
2,31; anab. 5, 6, 11; Joseph. vit. §§ 11 and 52; Plut.
de solert. anim. p. 971 e.; 2 Mace. ili. 8; xii. 10); xowo-
viay, to make a contribution among themselves and from
their own means, Ro. xv. 26; omovdnv, Jude 3 (Hat. 1,
4; 9,8; Plat. lege. 1 p.628e.; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 and often;
Diod. 1, 75; Plut. puer. educ. 7,13; al.); avénouy (i. q.
avédvopuac), to make increase, Eph. iv. 16 ; 8énouv, denoes,
i. q. déouar, to make supplication, Lk. v. 33; Phil. i. 4;
TOLEW
1 Tim. ii. 1; pvedav (q. Vv.) ; pynuny (q.v. inb.), 2 Pet.i. 15;
mpovo.ay (i. q. mpovooduat), to have regard for, care for,
make provision for, rwds, Ro. xiii. 14 (Isocr. paneg. §§ 2
and 136 [pp. 52 and 93 ed. Lange]; Dem. p. 1163, 19;
1429, 8; Polyb. 4, 6,11; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46; Joseph.
b. j.4, 5, 25 antt. 5, 7,9; c. Ap. 1, 2,3; Ael.v. h. 12, 56;
al.; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 187) ; xaBapiopdv, Heb. i. 3
(Job vii. 21); BéBaov rroveio bai tt, i. q. BeBarody, 2 Pet.
1 tO:
II. to do (Lat. ago), i. e. to follow some method in
expressing by deeds the feelings and thoughts of the
mind; a. univ., with adverbs describing the mode
of action: xadés, to act rightly, do well, Mt. xii. 12; 1 Co.
vii. 37, 38; Jas. ii. 19; xadds roveiy foll. by a participle
[ef. B. § 144, 15 a.; W.§ 45,4 a.], Acts x. 33; Phil. iv.
14; 2 Pet. i. 19; 3 Jn. 6, (exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given
by Passow s. v. II. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 977*; [L. and S.s. v. B.
I. 3]) ; xpetocor, 1 Co. vii. 38; ppovipas, Lk. xvi. 8; ovrw
(ovrws), Mt. v.47 [RG]; xxiv.46; Lk.ix.15; xii. 43;
Jn. xiv. 31; Acts xii. 8; 1 Co. xvi. 1; Jas. ii. 12; as,
xabas, Mt. i. 24; xxi. 6; xxvi.19; xxviii. 15; Lk. ix. 54
[T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; 1 Th. v. 11;
éorep, Mt. vi. 2; dpotws, Lk. iii. 11; x. 37; @oavras, Mt.
xx.5. xara tt, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. ii. 27; mpds te, to do ac-
cording to a thing [see mpds. I. 3 f.], Lk. xii. 47. with
a ptcp. indicating the mode of acting, dyvody éroinaa, I
acted [A. V. did it] ignorantly, 1 Tim. i. 13. with the
accus. of a thing, and that the accus. of a pronoun:
with ri indef. 1 Co. x. 31; with ri interrog., Mt. xii. 3;
Mk. ii. 25; xi. 3 [not Lchm. mrg.]; Lk. iii. 12, 14; vi. 2;
x. 25; xvi. 3,4; xviii. 18; Jn. vii. 51; xi. 47, etce.; with
a ptep. added, ri movetre Avovtes ; i. q. Sta ri AVeTe; Mk.
xi. 53 ri movetre kAaiovres; Acts xxi. 13; but differently
ri momoouct KTA.; i.e. what must be thought of the con-
duct of those who receive baptism? Will they not seem
to act foolishly? 1 Co. xv. 29. ri mepioody, Mt. v. 47;
with the relative 6, Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. vi. 3;
Jn. xiii. 7; 2 Co. xi. 12, etc.; todro, i.e. what has just
been said, Mt. xiii. 28; Mk. v. 32; Lk. v.63; xxii. 19
[(WH reject the pass.) ]; Ro. vii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim.
iv. 16; Heb. vi. 3; vii. 27, etc.; rovro to be supplied, Lk.
vi. 10; avro rovro, Gal. ii. 10; ratra, Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal.
v.17; 2 Pet. i. 10; [radra foll. by a pred. adj. Acts xv.
17sq. GT Tr WH (ace. to one construction; cf. R. V.
mrg., see I. 2 c.a. above, and cf. yywards) |; add, Ro. ii. 3;
Gal. iii. 10. With nouns which denote a command,
or some rule of action, mo signifies fo carry out, to
execute; as, Tov vépoy, in class. Grk. to make a law, Lat.
legem ferre, of legislators; but in bibl. Grk. to do the
law, meet its demands, legi satisfacere, Jn. vii. 19; Gal.
v. 8, (Josh. xxii. 5; 1 Chron. xxii. 12; NAN ny, 2
Chron. xiv. 3 (4)); 7a Tod vdpov, the things which the law
commands, Ro. ii. 14; ras évroAds, Mt. v.19; 1 Jn. v. 2 L
T Tr WH; Rev. xxii. 14 RG; 16 O€Anua Tov Geod, Mt. vii.
21; xii. 50; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. iv. 34; vi. 38; vii. 17; ix. 31;
Eph. vi. 6; Heb. xiii. 21; ra OeAnpara tis capkds, Eph. ii.
3; ras émOupias twés, Jn. viii. 44; THY yrounv tivds, Rev.
XVii. 17; piav yvopuny, to follow one and the same mind
526
TTOLEW@
(purpose) in acting, ibid. RG T Tr WH; rév Adyov roo
Geod, Lk. viii. 21; rovs Adyous twds, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi.
47,49; a or 6 or 4, vu etc. eyes Tis, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. vi.
46; Jn.ii.5; Acts xxi. 23; & mapayyéAXer tts, 2 Th. iii. 45
thy mpoeow, Eph. iii.11; ra dvarayévra, Lk. xvii. 10 (rd
mpoorax ev, Soph. Phil. 1010) ; 6 aire? tis, Jn. xiv. 13 Be.
Eph. iii. 20; 6 evréAXerai tus, Jn. xv. 14; 7a 2On, Acts
xvi. 21. With nouns describing a plan or course of
action, to perform, accomplish : épya, Tit. iii. 5; movew
Ta €pya rivds, to do the same works as another, Jn. viii.
39,41; ra mpora Epya, Rev. ii. 5; ra épya rov Oeov, de-
livered by God to be performed, Jn. x. 37sq.; rd épyov,
work committed to me by God, Jn. xvii. 4; 16 épyov
evayyetorov, to perform what the relations and duties
of an evangelist demand, 2 Tim. iv. 5; épyov m1, to com-
mit an evil deed, 1 Co. v. 2[(T WH Trmrg. mpdéas];
plur. 3 Jn. 10; ayadov, to do good, Mt. xix. 16; [Mk. iii.
4 Tdf.]; 1 Pet. iii. 11; 1d dyaOov, Ro. xiii. 3; 6 éeay ma
dyaOov, Eph. vi. 8; ta dyaOd, Jn. v. 29; 16 xadov, Ro. vii.
21; 2Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 17; ra dpeora To Oe0,
Jn. viii. 29; 1d apeorov evamov tov Oeov, Heb. xiii. 21;
1 Jn. iii. 22; ri meorov, to perform something worthy of
a Christian [see morés, fin.], 3 Jn. 53; ryv Sixacocvrny,
Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. eAenwoodwnv) ; 1 In. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10
[not Lchm.; Rev. xxii. 11 GLT Tr WH]; rip adndecay
(to act uprightly ; see dAnOea, I. 2 c.), Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn.
i. 6; xpnordrnra, Ro. iii. 12; €Aeos, to show one’s self
merciful, Jas. ii. 13; with pera tewos added (see €Xeos,
-ovs, 1 and 2 b.), Lk. i. 72; x. 37; eXenuoovuny, Mt. vi. 2
sq-; plur., Acts ix. 36; x. 2 (see éAenuoovvn, 1 and 2). to
commit: rhv dpapriav, Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 4, 8; duap-
tiav, 2Co. xi. 7; Jas. v.15; 1 Pet. ii. 22; 1 Jn. iii. 9; ry
avopuiav, Mt. xiii. 41; duaprnua, 1 Co. vi. 18 ; Ta pr KaOn-
covra, Ro. i. 28 ; 6 ovx eEeorw, Mt. xii. 2; Mk. ii. 24; d&a
mAnyav, Lk. xii. 48; BdeAvypa, Rev. xxi. 27; ddvov, Mk.
Xv. 7; Wevddos, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15; xaxdv, Mt. xxvii.
23; Mk. xv. 14; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co. xiii. 7; 76 xaxdv, Ro.
xiii. 4 ; plur. kaka, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; ra Kaka, Ro. iii. 8. b.
movetv tt With the case of a person added ; a. w. an
accus. of the person: ti roujow "Incody; what shall I
do unto Jesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12; ef. W. 222
(208); [B.§131,6; Kithner § 411, 5]; Matthiae § 415,
la. f.; also with an adverb, ed zro@ tiva, to do well i. e.
show one’s self good (kind) to one [see ed, sub fin. ], Mk.
xiv. 7RG; also cadés row, Mt. v. 44 Rec. By iw:
a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unto one (to his
advantage or disadvantage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [cf.
W. and B u.s.; Kiihner u.s. Anm. 6]: Mt. vii. 12; xviii.
85 xx. 82: xx 402 xxvii40545 7 MK. wel eOr expe
Lk. i. 49; vi. 113 viii. 39; xviii.41; xx.15; Jn. ix. 26;
xii. 163 xiii. 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb:
xabos, Mk. xv. 8; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xiii. 155; dpoiws, Lk. vi.
31; ovrws, Lk. i. 253 ii. 48; dScavras, Mt. xxi. 36; Kad@s
moet tun, Lk. vi. 27; €3, Mk. xiv. 7 L Tr WH; kaka rem,
to do evil to one, Acts ix. 13; ri, what (sc. caxdv), Heb. xiii.
6 [ace. to punctuation of GL T Tr WH); raira ravra, all
these evils, Jn. xv. 21 RG Lmrg.; moceiy rm Kata Ta ai-
ra [L T Tr WH (Ree. radra)], in the same manner, Lk.
TOlnLa
vi. 23, 26. y- moceiv te with the more remote object
added by means of a preposition: éy tux (Germ. an
einem), to do to one, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31 [here A. V.
‘in the green tree,’ etc.]; also ets twa, unto one, Jn. xv.
21 Ltxt. T Tr WH. c. God is said moujoai te peta
twos, when present with and aiding [see pera, I. 2 b. B.],
Acts, Kv. 27.3 xv. 4. d. with designations of time
[B. § 131, 1], to pass, spend: xpdvov, Acts xv. 33; xviii.
23; pnvas rpets, Acts xx. 3; vuxOnpepov, 2 Co. xi. 25; emav-
Tov or évavrov eva, Jas. iv. 13, (Tob. x. 7; Joseph. antt. 6,
1, 4 fin.; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 ¢., gives exx.
fr. Grk. writ. [and reff. ; ef. also Soph. Lex. s. v. 9]; in the
same sense Wy in Kecl. vi. 12 (vii. 1); and the Lat.
facere: Cic. ad Att. 5, 20 Apameae quinque dies morati,
..-Iconii decem fecimus; Seneca, epp. 66 [1]. 7, ep. 4, ed.
Haase], quamvis autem paucissimos una fecerimus dies) ;
some interpreters bring in here also Mt. xx. 12 and Rev.
xiii. 5 Rec.stel. L.T Tr WH; but on these pass. see
I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. ago i. q. to celebrate,
keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast: ro
macxa, Mt. xxvi. 18 (Josh. v.10; but in Heb. xi. 28 the
language denotes to make ready, and so at the same time
io institute, the celebration of the passover; Germ. ver-
anstalten) ; rv éoptnv, Acts xviii. 21 Rec. f. ti. q:
(Lat. perficio) to perform: as opposed to eye, Mt. xxiii.
3; to Oerew, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq.; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24.
[Comp.: mept-, mpoo- trorew. |
[Syn. toretv, tpdacecyv: roughly speaking, 7. may be
said to answer to the Lat. facere or the English do, mp. to
agere or Eng. practise ; m. to designate performance, 7p. in-
tended, earnest, habitual, performance; 7. to denote merely
productive action, mp. definitely directed action; 7. to point
to an actual result, mp. to the scope and character of the result.
“In Attic in certain connections the difference between them
is great, in others hardly perceptible” (Schmidt) ; see his
Syn. ch. 23, esp. § 11; .cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xevi.; Green,
‘Crit. Note’ on Jn. v. 29; (cf. mpacow, init. and 2). The
words are associated in Jn. iii. 20, 21; v. 29; Acts xxvi. 9,
10; Bo. i. 32; ii. 3; vii. 15 sqq.; xiii. 4, etc.]
trolnpa, -ros, Td, (motew), that which has been made;
a work: of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20; those
xticOevres by God emi epyous ayabois are spoken of as
moinna tod beod [A.V. his workmanship], Eph. ii. 10.
(Hadt., Plat., al.; Sept. chiefly for nwyn.)*
motnots, -ews, 7, (movew) ; 1. a making (Hat. 3,
22; Thuc. 3,2; Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. several times for
nwyn). 2. a doing or performing: év rh momoet
avtov [in his doing, i. e.] in the obedience he renders to
the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).*
TOUNTHS, -0v, 0, (TroLew) 5 1. amaker, producer, au-
thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulg.
factor): tov vdpov, one who obeys or fulfils the law,
Ro. ii. 13; Jas. iv. 11; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see motéw, II. a.);
epyou, Jas. i. 25; Ddyov, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet:
Acts xvii. 28 ([Hadt. 2, 53, etc.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat.,
Elut.;al:).*
mouxtdos, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, various i. e. a.
of divers colors, variegated : Sept. b. i.q. of divers
sorts: Mt. iv. 24; Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 40; 2 Tim. iii. 6; Tit.
527
TONE LEW
i. $$, Heb. ti. 43) xilin9s Jas. i 2%.) Pet. is 6s iv..10,
[(A. V. in the last two exx. manifold) ].*
towpatve ; fut. wousavo; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. mo-
pavare (1 Pet. v.2); (aroupny, q. v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for Ty; lo feed, to tend a flock, keep sheep; a. prop.:
Lk. xvii. 7; woiuynv, 1 Co. ix. 7. b. trop. a.
to rule, govern: of rulers, tua, Mt. ii. 6; Rev. ii. 27; xii.
5; xix. 15,(2S.v.2; Mic. v. 6 (5); vii‘14, ete.; [ef. W.
17]}), (see rouzny, b. fin.); of the overseers (pastors) of
the church, Jn. xxi. 16; Acts xx. 28; 1 Pet. v. 2. B.
to furnish pasturage or food ; to nourish: éavrdv, to cher-
ish one’s body, to serve the body, Jude 12; to supply
the requisites for the soul’s needs [R. V. shall be their
shepherd], Rev. vii. 17. [SYN. see Booka, fin.] *
Toupyv, -evos, 6, (akin to the noun zoia, q. v.; [or fr. r.
meaning ‘to protect’; cf. Curtius §372; Fick i. 132]),
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 4, a herdsman, esp. a shep-
herd; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 836; xxv. 32; xxvi. 31;
Mk. vi. 34; xiv. 27; Lk. ii. 8, 15, 18, 20; Jn. x. 2,12; in
the parable, he to whose care and control others have
committed themselves, and whose precepts they follow,
Ine xl, 14: b. metaph. the presiding officer, mana-
ger, director, of any assembly: so of Christ the Head of
the church, Jn. x. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 25; Heb. xiii. 20, (of the
Jewish Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23); of the overseers of
the Christian assemblies [A. V. pastors], Eph.iv.11; cf.
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 350
sq-; [ Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, p.123 sq.]. (Of
kings and princes we find zomeves Aa@v in Hom. and
Hes.) *
totuvn, -ns, 7, (contr. fr. mommevy ; see rouuny), [fr. Hom.
(Od. 9, 122) on], a flock (esp.) of sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31;
Lk. ii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 7; trop. [of Christ’s flock i.e.] the body
of those who follow Jesus as their guide and keeper, Jn.
Ran lO
totuviov, -ov, To, (contr. fr. mopemoy, i. q. moiuyn, see
mony; [on the accent ef. W. 52; Chandler § 343 b.]),
a flock (esp.) of sheep: so of a group of Christ’s disci-
ples, Lk. xii. 32; of bodies of Christians (churches) pre-
sided over by elders [ef. reff. s. v. mounv, b.], Acts xx.
28, 29; 1 Pet. v. 3; with a possessive gen. added, tod
Geod, 1 Pet. v. 2, as in Jer. xiii. 17; rod Xpiorod, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 16,1; 44,3; 54,2; 57,2. (Hdt., Soph.,
Eur., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. chiefly for 17), and }X¥.)*
motos, -a, -ov, (interrog. pron., corresponding to the rel.
oios and the demonstr. rotos), [fr. Hom. down], of what
sort or nature (Lat. qualis): absol. neutr. plur. in a di-
rect question, Lk. xxiv.19; with substantives, in direct
questions: Mt. xix. 18; xxi. 23; xxii. 36; Mk. xi. 28;
Lk. vi.'32-34; Jn. x. 32; Acts iv. 7; vii. 49; Ro. iii. 27;
1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. iv. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 20; in indirect dis-
course: Mt. xxi. 24,27; xxiv. 43; Mk. xi. 29, 33; Lk. xii.
39; Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; Acts xxiii. 34; Rev.
iii. 3; eis riva 4 motoy Kaipdv, 1 Pet.i.11; moias (Rec. da
motas) sc. 6000, Lk. v.19; cf. W. § 30, 11; [(also § 64, 5);
Ba$s 123,.8 3:182,,26:;,¢f., Tobrxp7di-
moAewew, -@; fut. roAepnow; 1 aor. émoAcunoa; (mdAe-
pos); [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly for 0n933
TTONELOS 528
to war, carry on war; to fight: Rev. xix. 11; pera rivos
(on which constr. see perd, I. 2 d. p. 403°), Rev. ii. 16;
xii. 7 (where Ree. cara; [cf. on this vs. B. § 140, 14 and
Ss. V. pera as above]); xiii. 4; xvii. 14; iq. to wrangle,
quarrel, Jas. iv. 2.*
modepnos, -ov, 6, (fr. IEAQ, modew, to turn, to range
about, whence Lat. pello, bellum; [but cf. Fick i. 671;
Vaniéek 513]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for ApN79; = 1.
prop. a. war: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 7; Lk. xiv.
31; xxi.9; Heb. xi. 34; in imitation of the Hebr. nvy
mon70 foll. by M8 or DY (Gen. xiv. 2; Deut. xx. 12, 20),
mon. Troveiv pera twos, Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 7 [here Lom.
WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [cf. werd, I. 2d.]. b.
a fight, a battle, [more precisely payn; “in Hom. (where
Il. 7, 174 it is used even of single combat) and Hes. the
sense of battle prevails; in Attic that of war” (L. and S.
s.v.); ef. Trench $1xxxvi. and (in partial modification)
Schmidt ch. 138, 5 and 6]: 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xi. 34; Rev.
sc 7h RM S-0b (ep. a a om URES Oe 2. a dispute, strife,
quarrel: mé\epou Kai paxya, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219;
Plat. Phaedo p. 66 c.).*
mOAts, -ews, 7, (wéAopat, to dwell [or rather denoting
originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs,
etc.; cf. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vaniéek p. 499; (oth-
erwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for
~y’, besides for Mp, yw (gate), etce., a city; a.
univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts
v. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T.;
kata Tv méoAuv, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, II.
i a.], Acts xxiv. 123; cara modu, kata woXets, See xara, II.
3 a.a.p.328*; opp. to coua, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii.
1; xiii. 22; to c@pat kat aypot, Mk. vi. 563; 7 tOia mrss,
see tdios, 1 b. p. 297°; addts with the gen. of a pers.
one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in
which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi.
20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of
the temple erected there, médts rod peyadou Baoidéas,
i. e. in which the great King of Israel, Jehovah, has his
abode, Mt. v. 35; Ps. xlvii. (xlviii.) 2, cf. Tob. xiii. 15;
also dyia wodts (see Gytos, 1 a. p. 7°) and 4 nyamnpern, the
beloved of God, Rev. xx. 9. with the gen. of a gentile
noun: Aapacknvav, 2 Co. xi. 32; ’Edeciav, Acts xix.
35; tév "lovdaiwv, Lk. xxiii. 51; tod Iopand, Mt. x. 23;
Sapaperrov, Mt. x. 5; with the gen. of a region: tis
TadwAaias, Lk.i. 26; iv. 31; "Iovda, of the tribe of Judah,
Lk. i. 39; Avxaovias, Acts xiv. 63 Kudcxias, Acts xxi. 39;
tis Sapapeias, Jn. iv. 5; Acts viii. 5. As in class. Grk.
the proper name of the city is added,—either in the
nom. case, as modus "Iommn, Acts xi. 5; or in the gen., as
Todts Sodouwv, Topxoppas, 2 Pet. ii. 6; Ovareipav, Acts
xvi. 14. b. used of the heavenly Jerusalem (see
lepovoAupa, 2), i. e. a. the abode of the blessed, in
heaven: Heb. xi. 10,16; with Oeod (avros added, Heb.
xil. 22; 4 wéeAXovoa wort, Heb. xiii. 14. B. in the
visions of the Apocalypse it is used of the visible capital
of the heavenly kingdom, to come down to earth after
the renovation of the world: Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 14 sqq.;
xxii. 14; 9 méds 7 ayia, Rev. xxii. 19; with ‘IepovcaAnp
TOALTNS
kawvy added, Rev. xxi. 2. c. méAts by meton. for
the inhabitants: Mt. viii. 34; Acts xiv. 21; naca 9 mods,
Mt. xxi. 10; Acts xiii.44; 9 dds 6An, Mk. i. 33; Acts
xxi. 30; mddts peptadeioa Kad’ éavris, Mt. xii. 25.
ToAtTapXys, -ov, 6, (i.e. 6 dpyav Tav modirav; see éxa-
tovrapxns), a ruler of a city or citizens: Acts xvii. 6, 8.
(Boeckh, Corp. inserr. Graee. ii. p. 52 sq. no. 1967 [cf.
Boeckh’s note, and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86 note?]; in Grk.
writ. roAfapyos was more common.) *
moAutela, -as, 7, (rodiTev@) ; 1. the administration
of civil affairs (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 15; Arstph., Aeschin.,
Dem., [al.]). 2. asiate, commonwealth, (2 Mace. iv.
11; vili. 17; xiii. 14; Xen., Plat., Thuc., [al.]): with
a gen. of the possessor, rod "IopanA, spoken of the theo-
cratic or divine commonwealth, Eph. ii. 12. 3.
citizenship, the rights of a citizen, [some make this sense
the primary one]: Acts xxii. 28 (3 Macc. iii. 21, 23; Hat.
9,34; Xen. Hell. 1,1, 26; 1, 2,10; [4, 4,6, ete.]; Dem.,
Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.).*
woX(revpa, ~ros, To, (wodcrevw), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat.
down; 1. the administration of civil affairs or of a
commonwealth [R. V. txt. (Phil. as below) citizenship].
2. the constitution of a commonwealth, form of govern-
ment and the laws by which it is administered. 3. a
state, commonwealth [so R. V. mrg.]: juav, the common-
wealth whose citizens we are (see wdXs, b.), Phil. iii. 20,
cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc. ; of Christians it is said
emt yis SiatpiBovow, add’ ev ovpav@ trodurevovrat, Epist.
ad Diogn. ¢.5; (rav copay Wuyxat) warpida pev Tov ovpa-
mov x@pov, ev @ Todtrevovrat, évov Sé Tov mepiyesov ev @
mapoknoav vopiCoveat, Philo de confus. ling. § 17; [yuvaikes
+. 7@ THs aperns eyyeypaupevat Todirevpart, de agricult.
§17fin. Cf. esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. e.].*
modttevw : Mid. [cf. W. 260 (244) ], pres. impv. 2 pers.
plur. modireverOe; pf. memodirevpat; (modirns) 5 2;
to be a citizen (Thuce., Xen., Lys., Polyb., al.). 2.
to administer civil affairs, manage the state, (Thuc.,
Xen.). 3. to make or create a citizen (Diod. 11.72) ;
Middle a. to be a citizen; so in the passages fr.
Philo and the Ep. ad Diogn. cited in roXirevya, 3. b.
to behave as a citizen; to avail one’s self of or recognize
the laws; so fr. Thue. down; in Hellenist. writ. to con-
duct one’s self as pledged to some law of life: agiws rot
evayyeAiov, Phil. i. 27 [R. V. txt. let your manner of life
be worthy of etc.]; a&. rod Xptorod, Polyc. ad Philip. 5, 2;
a&. tov beov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 1; éciws, ibid. 6, 1;
kara TO KkabjKov TS Xpiora, ibid. 3,4; pera PdBov x. aya-
ms, ibid. 51, 2; évvduas, Justin. dial. c. Tr. c. 67; npEapnv
modtreverOa TH Papicaiwv aipecer kataxodovar, Joseph.
vit. 2; other phrases are cited by Grimm on 2 Mace. vi.
1; 1@ Oe8, to live in accordance with the laws of God,
Acts xxiii. 1 [A. V. I have lived ete.].*
moXlrns, -ov, 6, (rds), fr. Hom. down, @ citizen;
i.e. a. the inhabitant of any city or country: wédews.-
Acts xxi. 393; ris yopas exeivns, Lk. xv. 15. b. the
associate of another in citizenship, i. e. a fellow-citizen,
fellow-countryman, (Plat. apol. p. 37 ¢.; al.): with the
gen. of a person, Lk. xix. 14; Heb. viii. 11 (where Rec.
TOAAQAKLS
has rov wAnoiov) fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34, where it is
used for p>, as in Prov. xi. 9, 12; xxiv. 43 (28).*
modAdkts, (fr. modvs, modAd), adv., [fr. Hom. down],
often, frequently: Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. v. 4; ix. 22; Jn. xviii.
2; Acts xxvi. 11; Ro.i.13; xv.22L Trmrg.; 2 Co. viii.
22; xi. 23,26 sq.; Phil. iii. 18; 2 Tim. i.16; Heb. vi. 7;
ie. 20 equ; x 112?
mwohAathaclwy, -ov, gen. -ovos, (moAvs), manifold, much
more: Mt. xix. 29 LT Tr WH; Lk. xviii. 30. (Polyb.,
Plut., al.; [cf. B. 30 (27)].)*
modv-eVomAayX Vos, -ov, (oA and evomAayxvos), very
tender-hearted, extremely full of pity: so a few minusc.
Mss. in Jas. v. 11, where al. roAvomAayxvos, q. v. (Eccles.
and Byzant. writ.) *
modvdoyla, -as, 7, (oAvAdyos), much speaking, (Plaut.,
Vulg., multiloquium): Mt. vi.7. (Prov. x. 19; Xen. Cyr.
1, 4,3; Plat. lege. 1 p. 641 e.; Aristot. polit. 4, 10 [p.
1295*, 2]; Plut. educ. puer. 8, 10.) *
Todupeps, (roAupepys), by many portions : joined with
mohutpéres, at many times (Vulg. multifariam [or -rie]),
and in many ways, Heb. i. 1. (Joseph. antt. 8, 3, 9 [var. ;
Plut. mor. p. 537 d., i. e. de invid. et od. 5]; ovdev Sei ris
moAvpepovs TavTns Kal ToAuTpdmov povons TE Kal dppovias,
Max. Tyr. diss. 37 p. 363; [cf. W. 463 (431) ].) *
todv-trolktdos, -ov, (7oAvVs and mrotkidos) ; 1. much-
variegated ; marked with a great variety of colors : of cloth
or a painting ; @dpea, Eur. Iph. T. 1149; oré@avov rodv-
moikidov avOewy, Eubul. ap Athen. 15 p. 679 d. 2.
much varied, manifold: copia tov Geov, manifesting itself
in a great variety of forms, Eph. iii. 10; Theophil. ad
Autol. 1, 6; épyn, Orac. Sibyll. 8, 120; Adéyos, Orph. hymn.
61, 4, and by other writ. with other nouns.*
moXvs, roAAn (fr. an older form zodos, found in Hom.,
Hes., Pind.), roAv; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for
39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc.,
many, numerous, great: aptOuos, Acts xi. 21; Aaos, Acts
xviii. 10; dyAos, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii 1 LT Tr WH];
Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.;
wA7nOos, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; i. q.
abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], xapros, In. xii.
24; xv. 5, 8; Oepiopes, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt.
ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; yy, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; yopros, Jn.
vi. 10; oivos, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. woAAot reAGvat, Mt. ix.
10; Mk. ii. 15; modXot mpopyrat, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24;
cooi, 1 Co. i. 26; marépes, 1 Co. iv. 15; Suvdpers, Mt. vii.
22; xiii. 58, ete.; 6xAor, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but
here L TWH om. Tr br. dy.]; Lk. v. 15, ete.; dacpona,
Mk.i. 34; and in many other exx.; with participles used
substantively, Mt. viii. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 9, etc.; with the
article prefixed: ai duapriat avtns ai moAXai, her sins
which are many, Lk. vii. 47; ra wodAa ypdppara, the great
learning with which I see that you are furnished, Acts
xxvi. 24; 6 modvs dyAos, the great multitude of common
people present, Mk. xii. 37 [cf. 6 dyA. modus, Jn. xii. 9 T
Tr mrg. WH; see dyXos, 1]. Plur. mase. roAXol, absol.
and without the art., many, a large part of mankind:
moAAoi simply, Mt. vii. 13, 22; xx. 28; xxvi. 28; Mk. ii. 2;
iii. 10; x. 45; xiv. 24; Lk.i. 1,14; Heb. ix. 28, and very
529
ToNws
often; opp. to ddtyor, Mt. xx. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the
cl.]; €repot rodAoi, Acts xv. 35; GAAa woAAai, Mk. xv. 41;
érepat mrodAai, Lk. viii. 3; moAdoi foll. by a partit. gen.,
as tov Papicaiov, Mt. iii. 7; add, Lk. i. 16; Jn. xii. 11;
Acts iv. 4; xiii. 43; 2 Co. xii. 21; Rev. viii. 11, ete.; foll.
by ek with a gen. of class, as moAXol ex rév paOntaev avrod,
Jn. vi. 60; add, vii. 31,40; x. 20; xi.19, 45; Acts xvii
12; moAAol ex THs Toews, Jn. iv. 39. with the article
prefixed, of moAAoi, the many [ef. W. 110 (105)]: those
contrasted with 6 eis (i. e. both with Adam and with
Christ), acc. to the context equiv. to the rest of man-
kind, Ro. v. 15,19, cf. 12, 18; we the (i.e. who are) many,
Ro. xii. 5; 1 Co. x.17; the many whom ye know, 2 Co.
ii. 17; the many i. e. the most part, the majority, Mt. xxiv.
12; 1Co. x. 33. b. with nouns denoting an action, an
emotion, a state, which can be said to have as it were
measure, weight, force, intensity, size, continuance, or
repetition, much i. q. great, strong, intense, large: ayamn,
Eph. ii.4; ddvvn,1 Tim. vi. 10; Opnvos, cAavOpos, dduppos,
Mt. ii. 18; yapa[ Rec." yapis], Philem. 7; ém@upia, 1 Th. ii.
17 ; paxpobvpia, Ro. ix. 22; €deos, 1 Pet. i. 3; yoyyuopos,
Jn. vii. 12; tpdpos, 1 Co. ii. 3; mévos [ Rec. (7Aos}, Col. iv.
13; ayov, 1 Th. ii. 2; aOAnows, Heb. x. 32 ; Odiyes, 2 Co. ii.
4; 1 Th.i. 6; xavynots, 2 Co. vii. 4; memot@nats, 2 Co. viii.
22; mAnpodpopia, 1 Th. i. 5; mappyoia, 2 Co. iii. 125; vii.
4; 1 Tim. iii. 13; Philem. 8; wapaxAnots, 2 Co. viii. 4 ;
ovtnrnots [T WH Tr txt. (nrnois], Acts xv. 7; xxviii. 29,
[Ree.]; ordois, Acts xxiii. 10; dowria, Acts xxvii. 21;
Bia, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; Scaxovia, Lk. x. 40; ovyn, deep
silence, Acts xxi. 40 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 25); @avracia, Acts
xxv. 23; Sdvayis cai Sofa, Mt. xxiv. 30; Lk. xxi. 27; pe
aos, Mt. v.12; Lk. vi. 23, 35; eipnyn, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ;
Tept ov moAvs Hui 6 Aoyos, about which [but see Aoyos, I. 3,
a.] we have much (in readiness) to say, Heb. v. 11 (woAtv
Adyov troveto Oat Trepi Tivos, Plat. Phaedo p.115d.; cf. Ast,
Lex. Plat. iii. p. 148). c. of time, much, long: moddv
xpovoy, Jn. v. 6; pera xpovov modvv, Mt. xxv. 19; dpa
moAAn, much time (i. e.a large part of the day) is spent
[see dpa, 2], Mk. vi. 35; Spas modAns yevouems [Tdf.
yevou. |, of a late hour of the day, ibid. (so woAAjs &pas,
Polyb. 5, 8,33; émt moAAnv Spay, Joseph. antt. 8,4, 4; éud-
xovro...aypt moAAjs Spas, Dion. Hal. 2, 54); moddois
xpovors, for a long time, Lk. viii. 29 (od modA@ xpdva,
Hdian. 1, 6, 24 [8 ed. Bekk.]; xpdvors moAXois vorepor,
Plut. Thes. 6; [see ypdvos, sub fin.]) ; efs érm modAd, Lk.
xii. 19; (é« or) dwd moAdGv erav, Acts xxiv. 10; Ro. xv.
23 [here WH Tr txt. dao ixavav ér.]; éxt modv, (for) a
long time, Acts xxviii. 6; per’ od modv, not long after
[see pera, IT. 2 b.], Acts xxvii. 14. d. Neut. sing.
modv, much, substantively, i. q. many things: Lk. xii. 48;
much, adverbially, of the mode and degree of an action;
nydmnoe, Lk. vii. 47; mravacbe, Mk. xii. 27; sc. dpere!,
Ro. iii. 2. woAdXod as a gen. of price (fr. Hom. down ; cf.
Passow s. v. IV. b. vol. ii. p. 1018°; [ef. W. 206 (194)]):
mpadnvat, for much, Mt. xxvi. 9. €v moAA@, in (adminis-
tering) much (i. e. many things), Lk. xvi. 10; with great
labor, great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 (where LT TrWH ev
peydde [see peyas, 1 a. y.]). with a compar. [cf. W.
ToNVvaTAayXVOS
§ 35, 1]: mohkd orovdatdrepov, 2 Co. viii. 22 (in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down) ; woAA@ mAeiovs, many more, Jn. iv. 41;
modk@ [or todd] paddov, see paddov, 1a.sq. with the
article, ré moAv, Germ. das Viele (opp. to rd dAtyov), 2
Co. viii. 15 [cf. B. 395 (338); W. 589 (548)]. Plural
mo\Aa a. many things; as, didacKcew, Aadeiv, Mt.
xiii. 3; Mk. iv. 2; vi. 34; Jn. viii. 26; xiv. 30; madeiv, Mt.
xvi. 21; Mk. v. 26; ix. 12; Lk. ix. 22, etc., and often in
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Ol. 13, 90 down; zroteiv, Mk. vi. 20
[T Tr mrg. WH dmopeiv] ; mpafa, Acts xxvi. 9; add as
other exx., Mt. xxv. 21, 23; Mk. xii. 41; xv. 3; Jn. xvi.
12; 2Co. viii. 22; 2Jn.12; 3 Jn.13 3 woAAa kat dAXa, Jn.
xx. 30. [On the Grk. (and Lat.) usage which treats the
notion of multitude not as something external to a thing
and consisting merely in a comparison of it with other
things, but as an attribute inhering in the thing itself,
and hence capable of being co-ordinated with another
attributive word by means of xai (q. v. I. 3), see Kiihner
§ 523, 1 (or on Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24) ; Bdéumlein, Partikeln,
p- 146; Kriiger §69, 32,3; Lob. Paral. p.60; Herm. ad
Vig. p. 835; W.§ 59, 3 fin.; B. 362 sq. (311). Cf. Passow
B2viL. 3 a.5 Laand Sas.v. TE! 23) B. adverbially
[cf. W. 463 (432); B.§ 128, 2], much: Mk. [vi. 20 T Tr
mrg. (?) WH (see dmopéw) ]; ix. 26; Ro. xvi. 6, 12 [L br.
the cl.]; in many ways, Jas. iii. 2; with many words,
[R. V. much], with verbs of saying; as, knpvooew, mapa-
cade, etc., Mk. i. 45; iii. 12; v. 10, 23, 43; 1 Co. xvi.
12; many times, often, repeatedly: Mt. ix. 14 [RG Tr
WH mrg.] (and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; cf.
Passow s. v. V. 1 a. vol. ii. p. 1013°; [L. and S. III. a.];
Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 61 ¢.); with the art. ra
mova, for the most part, [R.V. these many times] (Vulg.
plurimum), Ro. xv. 22 [L. Tr mrg. woAdadkis] (exx. fr. Grk.
writ. are given by Passow l. c., [L. and S. 1. ¢.], and by
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 281).
moAvomay x vos, -ov, (rroAvs, and onAdyxvov q. v.), full of
pity, very kind: Jas. v.11; Hebr. 79m 35, in the Sept.
modvereos. (Theod. Stud. p. 615.)* |
moAvTeAns, -€s, (modvs, and reAos cost), [from Hadt.
down], precious ; a. requiring great outlay, very
costly: Mk. xiv. 3; 1 Tim. ii. 9. (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.)
b. excellent, of surpassing value, [A. V. of great price]:
1 Pet. iii. 4. [(Plat., al.)]*
TOAUTIWOS, -ov, (ros, TYLN ), very valuable, of great price:
Mt. xiii. 46; xxvi.7 LT Trmrg.; Jn. xii. 3; compar.
moAuTiorepov, 1 Pet. i. 7, where Rec. modd rtptwrepov.
(Plut. Pomp. 5; Hdian. 1, 17,5 [3 ed. Bekk.]; Anthol.,
al.)*
moAdutpétras, (fr. roAvTporos, in use in various senses fr.
Hom. down), adv., in many manners: Heb. i. 1 [(Philo
de incor. mund. § 24)]; see rodupepas.*
ropa (Attic moua; [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 425]), -res, ro,
(rivw, mémopa), drink: 1 Co. x. 4; Heb. ix. 10.*
movnpta, -as, 7, (rovnpos), [fr. Soph. down], Sept. for
yo and Ay, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V.
almost uniformly) ], malice: Mt. xxii. 18; Lk. xi. 39; Ro.
i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8; Eph. vi. 12; plur. ai zovnpia [cf. W.
§ 27,3; B. § 123, 2; R. V. wickednesses], evil purposes
530
Tovnpos
and desires, Mk. vii. 22; wicked ways [A. V. iniquities},
Acts iii. 26. [SYN. see xaxia, fin.]*
movnpés (on the accent cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 389;
Géttling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq.; [Chandler §§ 404,
405]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 26), -d, -6v; com-
par. movnporepos (Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26); (arovéw, rovos) ;
fr. Hes., [Hom. (ep. 15, 20), Theog.] down ; Sept. often
for 1; 1. full of labors, annoyances, hardships ;
a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Hercules is called
movnpotatos Kai Gpioros, Hes. frag. 43, 5. b. bring-
ing toils, annoyances, perils: (katpds, Sir. li. 12); nuépa
movnpa, of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead-
fastness, Eph. v. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. quépat qrov.
Barn. ep. 2, 1); causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev-
ous], €Akos, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. bad, of a bad nature or
condition ; a. ina physical sense: ddOadpos, dis-
eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, (wovnpia opOadpar,
Plat. Hipp. min. p. 374 d.; the Greeks use rovnpas éyew
or d:axetoOat of the sick; éx« yeverns movnpovs vyteis mre-
mownkevat, Justin apol. 1, 22 [ (cf. Otto's note) ; al. take mov.
in Mt. and Lk.u.s. ethically; cf.b.and Meyer on Mt.});
xapros, Mt. vii. 17 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil,
wicked, bad, ete. [‘‘this use of the word is due to its as-
sociation with the working (largely the servile) class;
not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for
such words as épyarns, Spaornp, and the like, do not take
on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a
word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no
suggestion of results” (cf. Schmidt ch. 85,§1); see
kaxia, fin.]; of persons: Mt. vii. 11; xii. 34 sq.; xviii. 32;
xxv. 26; Lk. vi. 45; xi. 13; xix. 22; Acts xvii. 5; 2 Th. ii.
2; 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; yevea wov., Mt. xii. 39, 45; xvi. 4; Lk. xi.
293; mvedpa rovnpor, an evil spirit (see mvevpa, 3 c.), Mt.
xii. 45; Lk. vii. 215 viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12'sq. 15
sq.; substantively oi movnpoi, the wicked, bad men,
opp. to of Sixator, Mt. xiii. 49; movnpoi kai dyaboi, Mt. v.
45; xxii. 10; dydpiorot x. movnpol, Lk. vi. 35; rov movnpdy,
the wicked man, i. e. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13;
T@ Tovnpa, the evil man, who injures you, Mt. v.39. 6
movnpos is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one:
Mt. v. 37; vi. 133. xiii. 19, 88; Lk. xi. 4 RL; Jn. xvii.,
15; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see xetpat,
2¢c.); Eph.vi.16. of things: aioy, Gal.i.4; dvopa (q. v.
1 p. 447* bot.), Lk. vi. 22; padvovpynua, Acts xviii. 14;
the heart as a storehouse out of which a man brings forth
movnpa words is called 6ncavpés rovnpos, Mt. xii. 35; Lk.
vi. 45; ouvetSnovs rovnpa, a soul conscious of wickedness,
[conscious wickedness ; see ovveidyots, b. sub fin. ], Heb. x.
22; xapdia movnpa amortias, an evil heart such as is re-
vealed in distrusting [cf. B. § 132, 24; W. § 30, 4], Heb.
iii. 12; dpOadpods (q. v-), Mt. xx. 15; Mk. vii. 22; dta-
Aoytopol, Mt. xv. 19; Jas. ii. 4; trovorat, 1 Tim. vi. 4;
kavynots, Jas. iv. 16; pjpa, a reproach, Mt. v. 11 LRGs
al. om. £.]; Adyou, 3 Jn. 10; épya, In. ili. 19; vii. 7; 1 Jn.
iii. 12; 2 Jn. 11; Col. i. 21; épyov, (ace. to the context)
wrong committed against me, 2 Tim. iv. 18; airia, charge
of crime, Acts xxv.18 LT Trmrg. WH mrg. ‘The neuter
movnpov, and 74 movnpor, substantively, evil, that which ws
TWovos
wicked : eiSos movnpod (see eidos, 2; [al. take mov. here as
an adj., and bring the ex. under eédos, 1 (R. V. mrg. ap-
pearance of evil)}|), 1 Th. v. 22; 2 Th. iii. 3 (where rod
aovnpov is held by many to be the gen. of the mase. 6 mo-
vnpés, but ef. Liinemann ad loc.) ; [ri wovnpdv, Acts xxviii.
21]; opp. to rd dya@dv, Lk. vi.45; Ro. xii. 9; plur. [W.
§ 34, 2], Mt. ix. 4; Lk. iii. 19; wicked deeds, Acts xxv.
18 Tr txt. WH txt.; radra ra movnpa, these evil things i. e.
the vices just enumerated, Mk. vii. 23.*
ar6vos, -ov, 0, (mévopat [ see revns |), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for oDy, pyr, ete., labor, toil; 1. i.q. great trouble,
intense desire: imép twos (gen. of pers.), Col. iv. 13
(where Ree. has (dow [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ]). 2
pain: Rev. xvi. 10sq.; xxi.4. [SYN. see xédzros, fin.]*
Tlovrixés, -7, -dv, (IIdvros, q. v-), belonging to Pontus,
born in Pontus: Acts xviii. 2. [(Hdt., al.)]*
TI6vrvos, -ov, 6, Pontius (a Roman name), the prae-
nomen of Pilate, procurator of Judea (see HtAaros) :
Mt. xxvii. 2[RGL]; Lk. iii.1; Acts iv. 27; 1 Tim. vi.
13.* |
TIévros, -ov, 6, Pontus, a region of eastern Asia Minor,
bounded by the Euxine Sea [fr. which circumstance it
took its name], Armenia, Cappadocia, Galatia, Paphla-
gonia, [BB. DD.s.v.; Ed. Meyer, Gesch. d. Konigreiches
Pontos (Leip. 1879)]: Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.*
TIé2Auos, -ov, 6, Publius (a Roman name), the name of
a chief magistrate [(Grk. 6 spéros) but see Dr. Woolsey’s
addition to the art. ‘ Publius’ in B. D. (Am. ed.) ] of the
island of Melita; nothing more is known of him: Acts
XXvlii. 7, 8.*
mopeia, -as, 7, (mopevw), fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for
TU see a journey: Lk. xiii. 22 (see moéw, I. 3); Hebra-
istically (see 68ds, 2 a.), @ going i.e. purpose, pursuit, un-
dertaking : Jas. i. 11.*
mopevw : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph.,
Thuce., Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Hdt. down), pres. ropevopar ;
impf. éropevdunv ; fut. ropevoouat; pf. ptcp. meropevpevos ;
1 aor. subjune. 1 pers. plur. mopevoapeba (Jas. iv. 13
Ree. Grsb.); 1 aor. pass. emopevOnv;. (adpos a ford, [ef.
Eng. pore i. e. passage through ; Curtius § 356; Vanicek
p- 479]); Sept. often for 727, 727000, 425 prop. to lead
one’s self across; i. e. to take one’s way, betake one’s self,
set out, depart ; a. prop.: tiv 6ddv pov, to pursue
the journey on which one has entered, continue one’s
journey, [A. V. go on one’s way], Acts viii. 39; op. foll.
by awé w. agen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1
[RG]; dé w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41; Lk. iv.
42; éxeiOev, Mt. xix. 15; évredOev, Lk. xiii. 31; foll. by
eis w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place: Mt.
WO ixvits 205 Mk. avis 2s Lk i393 i: 4lgexxisos
meiosis Ine vil. 35 3: vill ls [Acts1..11; 25 50xx..1 5) Ro:
xv. 24sq.; Jas. iv. 13, etc.; w. an acc. denoting the
state : eis eipnynv, Lk. vii. 50; viii. 48, (also év etpnyn,
Acts xvi. 36; see eipnyn, 3); eis Odvarov, Lk. xxii. 33 ;
foll. by émi w. an ace. of place, Mt. xxii. 9; Acts viii. 26;
ix. 11; émi w. the acc. of a pers. Acts xxv.12; és with
a gen. of place, Acts xxiii. 23; mod [q. v.] for roi, Jn.
vii. 35 ; od [see és, II. 11 a.] for dao, Lk. xxiv. 28; 1 Co.
531
Topvela
xvi. 6; mpds w. the ace. of a pers., Mt. xxv. 9; xxvi. 14;
Lk. xi. 5; xv. 18; xvi. 30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. 28; xx.
17; Acts xxvii. 3; xxviii. 26; «ara ryv 686v, Acts viii.
36; dia w.a gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1; [Mk. ix. 30 L txt
Tr txt. WH txt.]; the purpose of the journey is indi-
cated by an infinitive: Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec.; Lk. ii. 3;
xiv. 19, 31; Jn. xiv. 2; by the prep. ei with an ace. [cf.
emi, C. I. 1 f.], Lk. xv. 4; foll. by wa, Jn. xi. 11; by ov
w. a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii.6; Acts x. 20; xxvi.
13; 1Co. xvi. 4; &umpoaGev twos, to go before one, Jn.
x. 4. absol. i. q. to depart, go one’s way: Mt. ii. 93; viii.
9; xi. 7; xxviii. 11; Lk. vii. 8; xvii.19; Jn. iv. 50; viii.
11; xiv. 3; Acts v. 20; viii. 27; xxi. 5; xxii. 21, ete.
i. q. to be on one’s way, to journey: (Lk. viii. 42 L Trmrg. ];
ix. 57; x. 38; xiii. 33; Actsix.3; xxii.6. to enter upon
a journey; to goto do something: 1 Co. x. 27; Lk. x. 37.
In accordance with the oriental fashion of describing
an action circumstantially, the ptcp. mopevdpevos or mo-
pevOeis is placed before a finite verb which designates
some other action (cf. aviornut, II. 1 c. and épyoua,
I. 1 a.a. p. 250° bot.) : Mt. ii. 8; ix. 13 (on which cf. the
rabbin. phrase 793 x¥ [cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein ad
loc: ]):jxig4:5 xxviil 66, xxviii? ;, bk. vig 223.1%. 1355/52
Saiiy CVS Dahe NOP Sam sya saath 18S Seaby Gyo a) Veer che
19: b. By a Hebraism, metaphorically, a. to
depart from life: Lk. xxii. 22; so J0m, Gen. xv. 2; Ps.
XXxXix. 14. B. dmicw twds, to follow one, i.e. become
his adherent [ef. B. 184 (160)]: Lk. xxi. 8 (Judg. ii. 12;
1 K. xi. 10; Sir. xlvi. 10); to seek (cf. Eng. run after]
any thing, 2 Pet. ii. 10. y- to lead or order one’s life
(see mepuraréa, b. a. and 680s, 2 a.); foll. by ev with a dat.
of the thing to which one’s life is given up : ev aaeAyeias,
1 Pet. iv. 3; év rats évroXais rod Kupiov, Lk. i. 6 ; Kara tas
énOupias, 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 16, 18 ; rats ddois pov, dat. of
place, [to walk in one’s own ways], to follow one’s moral
preferences, Acts xiv. 16; 17 656 twos, to imitate one,
to follow his ways, Jude 11; r@ Pd8@ rod xupiov, Acts
ix. 31; see W. § 31,9; B. § 133, 22 b.; td pepipvar, to
lead a life subject to cares, Lk. viii. 14, cf. Bornemann
ad loc.; [Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc.; yet see tro, I. 2a.; W.
369 (346) note; B. § 147, 29; R. V.as they go on their way
they are choked with cares, etc. Comp.: d:a-, elo- (-pat),
éx- (-pat), év- (-yat), emt- (-war), mapa- (-pat), mpo-, mpoo-
(-par), ovr (-par). SYN. see épxopat, fin. ]
arop0éw : impf. émdpOovv; 1 aor. ptep. ropOjcas ; (répba,
mémopOa, to lay waste); fr. Hom. down; to destroy,
to overthrow, [R. V. uniformly to make havock]: twa,
Acts ix. 21; rv éxxAnoiay, Gal. i. 13; ryv mite, ibid.
23.*
Toptop.6s, -ov, 6, (7opitw to cause a thing to get on well,
to carry forward, to convey, to acquire; mid. to bring
about or procure for one’s self, to gain; fr. mopos [ef.
Tmropeva |) 5; a. acquisition, gain, (Sap. xiii. 19; xiv.
2; Polyb., Joseph., Plut.). b. a source of gain: 1
Tim. vi. 5sq. (Plut. Cat. Maj. 25; [Test. xii. Patr., test.
Is. §4]).*
TIépxtos, see bycros.
mopvela, -as, 7, (mopvevw), Sept. for NIA, Nat, 0233},
Topvevw
fornication (Vulg. fornicatio [and (Rev. xix. 2) prostitu-
tio]); used a. prop. of illicit sexual intercourse in
general (Dem. 403, 27; 433, 25): Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi.
25, (that this meaning must be adopted in these passages
will surprise no one who has learned from 1 Co. vi. 12
sqq- how leniently converts from among the heathen re-
garded this vice and how lightly they indulged in it; ac-
cordingly, all other interpretations of the term, such as
of marriages within the prohibited degrees and the like,
are to be rejected); Ro.i. 29 Rec.; 1 Co. v. 1; vi. 13, 18;
vii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 21; Eph. v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 3;
Rey. ix. 21; it is distinguished from potyeia in Mt. xv.
19; Mk. vii. 21; and Gal. v. 19 Rec.; used of adultery
[(cf. Hos. ii. 2 (4), ete.)], Mt. v.32; xix. 9. b. In
accordance with a form of speech common in the O. T.
and among the Jews which represents the close rela-
tionship existing between Jehovah and his people under
the figure of a marriage (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 422%
Sq-), mopveia is used metaphorically of the worship of
idols: Rev. xiv. 8; xvii. 2,4; xvill. 3; xix. 2; nets ék
Topveias ov yeyevyrneba (we are not of a people given to
idolatry), €va marépa €yopev rov Gedy, Jn. viii. 41 (dOeos pev
6 ayovos, modvGeos 5€ 6 ex mopyns, tupA@Trwv epi Tov
adnO7n marepa Kal b1a ToUTo ToANOVS avd Evds yoveis aivt-
rouevos, Philo de mig. Abr. § 12; réxva mopveias, of idol-
aters, Hos. i. 2; [but in Jn.1.c. others understand phy-
sical descent to be spoken of (cf. Meyer)]); of the de-
filement of idolatry, as incurred by eating the sacrifices
offered to idols, Rev. ii. 21.*
mopvevw ; 1 aor. eropvevoa; (rdpvos, ropyn q- V-) ; Sept.
for 731; in Grk. writ. ([Hdt.], Dem., Aeschin., Dio Cass.,
Lcian., al.) 1. to prostitute one’s body to the lust of
another. In the Scriptures 2. to give one’s self to
unlawful sexual intercourse; to commit fornication (Vulg.
fornicor): 1 Co. vi. 18; x. 8; Rev. ii. 14, 20; [Mk. x. 19
WH (rejected) mrg. }. 3. bya Hebraism (see ropveia,
b.) metaph. to be given to idolatry, to worship idols : 1 Chr.
v. 25; Ps. Ixxii. (1xxiii.) 27; Jer. iii. 6; Ezek. xxiii. 19;
Hos. ix. 1, etc.; pera twos, to permit one’s self to be
drawn away by another into idolatry, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii.
3,9. [Comp.: éx-ropvedvo. | *
wépvn, -7s, 7, (fr. repaw, répynun, to sell; Curtius § 358),
properly a woman who sells her body for sexual uses [cf.
Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13], Sept. for May; 1. prop. a pros-
titute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for
the sake of gain, (Arstph., Dem., al.); in the N. T.
univ. any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse,
whether for gain or for lust: Mt. xxi. 31 sq.; Lk. xv. 30;
1 Co. vi. 15sq.; Heb. xi. 81; Jas. ii. 25. 2. Heb-
raistically (see mopveia, b. and mopvevo, 3), metaph. an
idolatress; so of ‘Babylon’ i. e. Rome, the chief seat
of idolatry: Rev. xvii. 1, 5, 15 sq.; xix. 2.*
mépvos, -ov, 6, (for the etym. see mépyn), a man who
prostitutes his body to another’s lust for hire, a male pros-
titute, ([Arstph.], Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Leian.); univ.
aman who indulges in unlawful sexual intercourse, a for-
nicator, (Vulg. fornicator, fornicarius, [Rev. xxii. 15 im-
pudicus]): 1 Co. v. 9-11; vi.9; Eph.v.53; 1 Tim.i. 10;
532
Heb. xii. 16; xiii.4; Rev. xxi.8; xxii. 15.
16 sq.) *
méppw, [ (allied w. mpo, Curtius § 380)], adv., [fr. Plat.,
Xen. down], far, at a distance, a great way off: Mt. xv.
8; Mk. vii.6; Lk. xiv. 32 [cf. W. § 54, 2a.; B. §129, 11];
compar. moppwrepw, in L. Tr WH mopparepov [(Polyb.,
al.)], further: Lk. xxiv. 28.*
moppwlev, (rdppw), adv., [fr. Plat. on], from afar, afar
off: Lk. xvii.12; Heb. xi. 13; Sept. chiefly for pinze.*
tmopdipa, -as, 7, Sept. for DI; 1. the purple-
Jish, a species of shell-fish or mussel: [Aeschyl., Soph.],
Isocr., Aristot., al.; add 1 Mace. iv. 23, on which see
ein; [ef. B. D. s. v. Colors 1}. 2. a fabric col-
ored with the purple dye, a garment made from purple
cloth, (so fr. Aeschyl. down): Mk. xv. 17, 20; Lk. xvi.
19; Rev. xvii. 4 Rec.; xviii. 12.*
mroppvpeos, -a, -ov, in Attic and in the N. T. contr. -ods,
-a, -ovv, (moppipa), fr. Hom. down, purple, dyed in pur-
ple, made of a purple fabric: Jn. xix. 2,5; mopdupodyr se.
édupa ({B. 82 (72)]; cf. W. p. 591 (550)), Rev. xvii. 4
[GLT Tr WH]; xviii. 16.*
TmoppupérrwAts, -dos, 7, (oppupa and mwdew), a female
seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur-
puraria): Acts xvi. 14. (Phot., Suid., al.) *
mooaKts, (7oc0s), adv., how often: Mt. xviii. 213; xxiii.
7; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat. ep., Aristot., al.)]*
méats, -ews, 7), (wivw), fr. Hom. down, a drinking, drink:
Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. 16, (see Bpdots).*
wéc0s, -7, -ov, [(cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down,
Lat. quantus ], how great: Mt. vi. 23; 2 Co. vii. 11; moaos
xpdvos, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. ix.
21; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; réo@, (by) how much,
Mt. xii. 12; méoa@ paddop, Mt. vii.11; x. 25; Lk. xi. 13;
xii. 24, 28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; réc@
xelpovos tinwpias, Heb. x. 29; plur. how many: with
nouns, Mt. xv. 384; xvi. 9sq.; Mk. vi. 38; viii. 4, 19 sq. ;
Lk. xv.17; Acts xxi. 20; mdéca, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 13 ;
Mk. xv. 4.*
motapes, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 17) and 8,
a stream, a river: Mt. iii. 6 LT Tr WH; Mk. i. 5; Acts
xvi. 13; 2 Co. xi. 26 [W. § 30, 2a.]; Rev viii. 10; ix. 14;
xii. 153 xvi.4,12; xxii. 1 sq.; i.q. @ torrent, Mt. vii. 25,
27; Lk. vi. 48 sq.; Rev. xii. 15sq.;__ plur. figuratively
iq. the greatest abundance [ef. colloq. Eng. “streams,”
“floods ”], Jn. vii. 38.*
wrorapo-bdpyros, -ov, 6, (orapyds and gopew; like ave-
popdpnros [cf. W. 100 (94)]), carried away by a stream
(i. e. whelmed, drowned in the waters): Rev. xii. 15.
Besides only in Hesych. s. v. dméepoe.*
moramés ({in Dion. Hal., Joseph., Philo, al.] for the
older rodamés [cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq.; Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 129; W. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.];
ace. to the Grk. grammarians i. q. ék roiov Samedov, from
what region; acc. to the conjecture of others i. q. mov amé
[(Buttmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ. wovon)],
the 8 being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the
Lat. prodire, prodesse; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 554
sq. [still others regard -darés merely as an ending; cf.
(Sir. xxiii.
TOTATOS
~
TOTE
Apollon. Dysk., ed. Buttmann, index s. v.]), -7, -6v a
from what country, race, or tribe? so fr. Aeschyl. down.
2. from Demosth. down also i. q. motos, of what sort or
quality ? [what manner of ?]: absol. of persons, Mt. viii.
27; 2 Pet. iii. 11; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39; w. names
of things, Mk. xiii. 1; Lk. i. 29; 1 Jn. iii. 1.*
wore, [Curtius § 631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Hom.
dowr, when 2? at what time ? Mt. xxv. 87-39, 44; Lk. xxi.
7; Jn. vi. 25; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic
writ.) for the relative é7dre in indirect questions (W.
510 (475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33, 35; Lk. xii. 36;
Kvii. 20. ws wére, how long ? in direct questions [cf. W.
§ 54, 6 fin.; B.§ 146, 4]: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix.
41; Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10.*
mworé, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; 1.
once, i. e. at some time or other, formerly, aforetime ; a.
of the Past: Jn.ix.13; Ro. vii. 9; xi. 30; Gal. i. 13, 23
(cf. W. § 45, 7]; Eph. ii. 2sq. 11,13; v.83; Col. i. 21; iii.
751 Th.ii. 5; Tit. iii. 3; Philem. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 10; iii.
5, 20; 8n wore, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the
Future: Lk. xxii. 32; 78n more, now at length, Ro. i.
10. 2. ever: after a negative, ovdeis more, Eph. v.
29 [B. 202 (175)]; ov... oré, 2 Pet. i. 21; pq more
(see pnmore); after ov zy with the aor. subjunce. 2 Pet.
i. 10; ina question, ris more, 1 Co. ix. 7; Heb.i. 5, 13;
dotol more, whatsoever, Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render
more here formerly, once; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
mérepos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], which of two; mére-
pov... ulrum...an, whether... or, [W. § 57, 1 b.;
B. 250 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.*
moThptov, -ov, To, (dimin. of mornp), a cup, a drinking
vessel ; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk.
vi. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39;
xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; aivew éx rov
motnpiov, 1 Co. xi. 28; To mornptov ths edAoyias (see e€v-
Aoyla, 4), 1 Co. x. 16; with a gen. of the thing with
which the cup is filled : yuypov, Mt. x. 42; ddaros, Mk.
ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained,
the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk,
Lk. xxii. 20° [(WH reject the pass.) cf. Win. 635 (589)
sq-]; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq.; 1d mornpiov twos, gen. of the pers.
giving the entertainment (cf. Riickert, Abendmahl, p.
217 sq.) : mivew, 1 Co. x. 21 [ef. W. 189 (178)]; xi. 27
[ef. W. 441 (410) ]. b. By a figure common to
Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, and not unknown to Latin
writers, one’s lot or experience, whether joyous or
adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable
or unfavorable, are likened to a cup which God presents
one to drink [cf. W. 32]: so of prosperity, Ps. xv. (xvi.)
53 xxii. (xxiii.) 5; exv. (exvi.) 13; of adversity, Ps. x.
(xi.) 6; lxxiv. (xxv.) 9; Is. li. 17,22. In the N. T. of
the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ: Mt. xxvi. 39,
42 Rec.; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. xxii. 42; Jn. xviii. 11; mivew
TO ror. pov Or & éy® wiv, to undergo the same calamities
which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plaut.
Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego
bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as
I was); used of the divine penalties: Rev. xiv. 10; xvi.
539
ITovsdns
19; xviii. 6. ([Alcaeus, Sappho], Ildt., Ctes., Arstph.,
Leian., al. ; Sept. for Di3.) *
mworitw; impf. éroritov; 1 aor. exotica; pf. memorixa
(Rev. xiv. 8); 1 aor. pass. emoriaOnv ; (dros) ; fr. [Hip-
pocr.], Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for MW; to give to
drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 18 and Rev.
xiv. 8 poto [but in Rev. 1. c. Tdf. gives potiono; A. V. to
make to drink ]): rwa, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42; xxvii. 48; Mk.
xv. 36; Lk. xiii. 15; Ro. xii. 20; tuvd rt, to offer one
anything to drink (W. § 32,4 a.; [B. § 131, 6]): Mt. x.
42; Mk. ix. 41, and often in the Sept.; in fig. discourse
1. Twa yada, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended,
1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma ov Bpapa is added ; [cf.
W. § 66, 2e.; B. § 151, 30; A. V. I have fed you with
milk, ete.]); twa €k Tov oivov, Rev. xiv. 8 (see oivos, b.
and Oupos, 2); i.q.to water, irrigate, (plants, fields, etc.) :
1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25; Leian., Athen., Geop.,
[Strab., Philo]; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7);
metaph. to imbue, saturate, twd, one’s mind, w. the addi-
tion of an accus. of the thing, év mvedua, in pass., 1 Co.
xli.13 LT Tr WH[W. § 32,5; B. § 134, 5]; els €v rvedpua,
that we might be united into one body which is imbued
with one spirit, ibid. RG, (rwa mvevpart xataviéews, Is.
xxix. 10 [ef. Sir. xv. 3]).*
TIortodot, -wv, of, Puteoli, a city of Campania in Italy,
situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli:
Acts xxviii. 13. [Cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218sqq.; Smith,
Dict. of Geog. s. v.]*
aéros, -ov, 6, (II0Q [cf. rivw]), a drinking, carousing :
1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.;
Sept. for TAwWN.) *
mod, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for 778, 738, °8, where? in what place? a.
in direct questions: Mt. ii. 2; xxvi.17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14;
Lk. xvii. 17, 37; xxii. 9, 11; Jn. i. 38 (39) 5 vii. 115 viii.
10, 19; ix.12; xi.34; mov éorw [ (€or. sometimes unex-
pressed) ], in questions indicating that a person or thing
is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to 2 is nowhere,
does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 20; xii.
17,19; xv. 55; Gal. iv. 15 L T Tr WH; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; wot
gpaveirar, [ A. V. where shall . . . appear] i. q. there will be
no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques-
tions, for the relative dou [cf. W. §57, 2 fin.]: foll. by
the indic., Mt. ii. 4; Mk. xv. 47; Jn. i. 39 (40); xi. 57;
xx, 2,18, 15; Rev. ii. 13 [cf. W. 612 (569)]; foll. by the
subjunc., Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58 ; xii. 17. c. joined
to verbs of going or coming, for 7oZ in direct quest. [cf.
our collog. where for whither; see W. § 54, 7; B. 71
(62)]: In. vii. 35 [ef. W. 300 (281); B. 858 (307)] ; xiii.
36 ; xvi. 5; in indir. question, foll. by the indic.: Jn, iii.
8s vili, 14; xii. 35; xiv. 5; Heb. xi. 8;-1. Jn. ii. 11:*
mov, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; 1,
somewhere: Heb. ii. 6; iv. 4. 2. it has a limiting
force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about,
(Hat. 1,119; 7,22; Paus.8, 11,2; Hdian. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed.
Bekk.]; Ael. v. h. 13, 4; al.): Ro. iv. 19.*
Tlov&ms, [B. 17 (15) ], Pudens, proper name of a Chris:
tian mentioned in 2 Tim. iv. 21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo-
Tous
gie d. romisch. Bischofe (1869) p. 146; [B. D. s. v., also
(Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia; Bib. Sacer. for 1875, p. 174 sqq.;
Plumpire in the ‘ Bible Educator’ iii. 245 and in EIli-
cott’s ‘ New Test. Com.’ ii. p. 186 sq. ].*
movs (not mods, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 765; Gétiling,
Accentl. p. 244; [Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 566];
W. §6,1d.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.48), wodds, 6,
[allied w. meSov, réfa, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius § 291; Van-
itek p. 473], dat. plur. root, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 5x;
a foot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6; vii. 6; xxii.
13; Mk.ix.45; Lk.1. 79; Jn. xi.44; Acts vi. 5; 1 Co.
xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental prac-
tice of placing the foot upon the vanquished (Josh. x.
24), come the foll. expressions: td rods modas ouvrpiBew
(q. v.) reva, Ro. xvi. 20; tmoracoew tivd, 1 Co. xv. 27;
Eph. i. 22; Heb. ii. 8; reOévar, 1 Co. xv. 25; riOévat twa
Umoxdtw tav today, Mt. xxii. 44 L T Tr WH; tzomcddiov
tav today, Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH izo-
katw Tt. 7.]; Lk. xx. 43; Actsii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 13; dis-
ciples listening to their teacher’s instruction are said mapa
(or mpos) tovs modas Tivds kaOnoOa or mapaxabioa, Lk. x.
39; Acts xxii. 3, cf. Lk. viii.35; to lay a thing mapa (or
mpos) Tovs 700as Tevos is used of those who consign it to his
power and care, Mt. xv. 30; Acts iv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58.
In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, ete., persons
are said mpos rovs 1odas Tivos Trintewy OY mpoonintew: Mk.
v. 22; vii. 25; Lk. viii.41; xvii.16 mapa]; Rev. i. 17;
eis Tous 7. Tivos, Mt. xviii. 29 [Rec.]; Jn. xi. 32 [here al
Tr WH pos]; wirrew €urpoober r. rodév twos, Rev. xix.
10; mpockuvety eumpoobev (or evamiov) Tay modav Twos,
Rev. iii. 9; xxii. 8; aimr. emt tovs m. Acts x. 25. By a
poetic usage that member of the body which is the chief
organ or instrument in any given action is put for the
man himself (see yAoooa, 1) ; thus of odes tuvds is used
for the man in motion: Lk. i. 79 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 101) ;
Active) 95 RON ll.glbs Xe OM bLebs xi1-013:
Tpayya, -Tos, To, (mpdcow), fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hat.
down, Sept. chiefly for 9371; a. that which has been
done, a deed, an accomplished fact: Lk. i.1; Acts v. 4;
2 Co. vii. 11; Heb. vi. 18. b. what is doing or being
accomplished: Jas. iii. 16; spec. business (commercial
transaction), 1 Th. iv. 6 [so W.115 (109); al. refer this
example to c. and render in the matter (spoken of, or con-
ventionally understood; cf. Green, Gram. p. 26 sq.)]. ¢.
a matter (in question), affair: Mt. xviii. 19; Ro. xvi. 2;
spec. in a forensic sense, a matter at law, case, suit, (Xen.
mem. 2, 9,1; Dem. 1120, 26; Joseph. antt. 14,10, 17):
mpaypa éxew mpos twa, [A. V. having a matter against,
eed, luo, yi. d. that which is or exists, a
thing: Heb. x. 1; mpaypara od BXeropeva, Heb. xi. 1 [see
eAtrila |.*,
mpayparela [T WH -ria; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (mpayparevo-
pat), prosecution of any affair; business, occupation:
plur. with the addition of rod Biov, pursuits and occupa-
tions pertaining to civil life, opp. to warfare [A. V. the
affairs of this life], 2 Tim. ii.4. (In the same and other
senses in Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.], Xen., Plato down.) *
Tpayparevonat: 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. mpay-
534
Tp dos
parevoacGe; (mpaypa) ; in Grk. prose writ. fr. Hdt. down;
to be occupied in anything; to carry on a business; spec.
to carry on the business of a banker or trader (Plut. Sull.
17; Cat. min. 59): Lk. xix. 13 [here WH txt. reads the
infinitive (see their Intr. § 404) ; R. V. trade. Comp.:
dta- mpayparevopat. |*
TpaitHpioy, -ov, To, a Lat. word, praelorium (neut. of
the adj. praetorius used substantively); the word de-
notes 1. ‘head-quarters’ in a Roman camp, the
tent of the commander-in-chief. 2. the palace in
which the governor or procurator of a province resided,
to which use the Romans were accustomed to appropri-
ate the palaces already existing, and formerly dwelt in
by the kings or princes (at Syracuse “ illa domus prae-
toria, quae regis Hieronis fuit,” Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 12, 30);
at Jerusalem it was that magnificent palace which Her-
od the Great had built for himself, and which the Ro-
man procurators seem to have occupied whenever they
came from Cesarea to Jerusalem to transact public
business: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Jn. xviii. 28, 33;
xix. 9; cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium, § 38; Joseph. b. j. 2, 14,
8; also the one at Cesarea, Acts xxiii. 35. Cf. Keim
iii. p. 359 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. p. 79; B.D. s. v. Praeto-
rium ]. 3. the camp of praetorian soldiers estab-
lished by Tiberius (Suet. 37): Phil.i.13. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Richthaus; [Bp. Lghtft. (Com. on Philip.
p- 99 sqq-) rejects, as destitute of evidence, the various
attempts to give a local sense to the word in Phil. 1.c.,
and vindicates the meaning praetorian guard (so R.V.) ].*
TPAKTwpP, -opos, 6, (mpacc@) ; 1. one who does
anything, a doer, (Soph.). 2. one who does the work
of inflicting punishment or taking vengeance; esp. the
avenger of a murder (Aeschyl., Soph.) ; the exactor of a
pecuniary fine ([Antipho], Dem., al.) ; an officer of jus-
tice of the lower order whose business it is to inflict punish-
ment: Lk. xii. 58.*
mpatis, -ews, 7), (mpacow), fr. Hom. down; a. a
doing, a mode of acting; a deed, act, transaction: univ.
mpagées Tov droaréd@y (Grsb.; Ree. inserts éyiov, L Tr
WH om. rév, Tdf. has simply mpa€es), the doings of (i.e.
things done by) the apostles, in the inscription of the Acts;
sing. in an ethical sense: both good and bad, Mt. xvi.
27; ina bad sense, i.q. wicked deed, crime, Lk. xxiii.
51; plur. wicked doings (cf. our practices i. e. trickery;
often so by Polyb.): Acts xix. 18; Ro. viii. 13; Col. iii.
9; (with xaxy added, as Ev. Nicod. 1 ’Incovs ebepanevoe
SaovrCopevous amd mpd&ewy Kaxor). b. a thing to
be done, business, [ A. V. office], (Xen. mem. 2,1, 6): Ro.
xil. 4.*
apdos (so R G in Mt. xi. 29; on the iota subser. cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 403 sq.; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 64, 2 i. p. 255;
[Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 7 sq.; ef. W. § 5, 4d. and
p- 45 (44)]) or mpdos, -a, -ov, and mpads (LT Tr WH, so
RG in Mt. xxi. 5 (4); [ef. 7df. Proleg. p. 82]), -<ia, -¥, gen.
mpaéws T Tr WH for the common form mpaéos (so Lehm. ;
mpacos RG), see Babéws [cf. B. 26 (23)], plur. mpacis L
T Tr WH, mpaeis R G; fr. Hom. down; gentle, mild, meek:
Mt. v. 5 (4); xi. 29; xxi. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 4: Sept. several
TT PQoTns
times for 1) and ‘jy. [Cf. Schmidt ch. 98, 2; Trench
§ xlii.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 6, 36.]*
ampaorys (Rec. and Grsb. [exc. in Jas. i. 21; iii. 13; 1
Pet. iii. 15]; see the preceding word), rpadrys (so Lchm.),
and ace. to a later form mpavrys (so R and G, but with «
subser. under the a, in Jas. i. 21; iii. 13; 1 Pet. iii. 15;
Lehm. everywhere exc. in Gal. vi.1; Eph.iv.2; Treg.
everywhere [exc. in 2 Co. x. 1; Gal. v. 23 (22); vi.1; Eph.
iv. 2], TWH everywhere; cf. B. 26 (23) sq.), -nros, 9, gen-
tleness, mildness, meekness : 1 Co. iv. 21; 2 Co. x. 1; Gal.
v. 23 (22); vi.1; Col. iii. 12; Eph. iv. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 11 RB;
Pim: i 255 Vit. aii; 2; Jas. 1.21 > iwi.13; 1 Pet. 1,16
(15). (Xen., Plato, Isoer., Aristot., Diod., Joseph., al. ;
for My, Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [SyN. see émeixeta, fin. ;
Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) § xlii.; Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. iii. 13.]*
Tpacid, -as, 7, a plot of ground, a garden-bed, Hom. Od.
7,127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist. plant. 4,4, 3; Nicand.,
Diose., al.; Sir. xxiv. 31; dvémecov mpaotait mpacrai (a
Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so
that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate
plots, Mk. vi. 40; ef. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 669; [Hebr.
Gram. § 106, 4; B. 30(27); W. 464 (482) also] § 37, 3;
(where add fr. the O. T. curqyayov aitods Onuwvias Onpo-
vias, Ex. viii. 14).*
mpacow and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RG) mparro; fut.
mpagéw ; 1 aor. émpagéa; pf. mémpaxa; pf. pass. ptep. mempay-
pevos; fr. Hom. down; Sept. several times for NwWy and
5y9 ; to do, practise, effect, Lat. agere, (but moteiv to make,
Lat. facere ; [see motew, fin.]); i.e. 1. to exercise,
practise, be busy with, carry on: ta mepiepya, Acts xix. 19;
ra tva, to mind one’s own affairs, 1 Th. iv. 11 (ra éavrod,
[Soph. Electr. 678]; Xen. mem. 2, 9,1; Plat. Phaedr. p.
247a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al.); used of performing the
duties of an office, 1 Co. ix.17. to undertake to do, pndév
mporeres, Acts xix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform:
mempaypevoy eotiv, has been accomplished, has taken
place, Acts xxvi. 26; etre ayady, etre xaxdv, 2 Co. v. 10;
dyaOov 7) paddor (kaxdv), Ro. ix. 11 (8ixara 7 adiKa, Plat.
apol. p. 28b.); a&va ths peravolas épya, Acts xxvi. 20;
add, Ro. vii. 15,19; Phil. iv. 9; vopov, to doi. e. keep the
law, Ro. ii. 25; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpetrate,
(less freq. so in Grk. writ., as woAAa Kai dvdoia, Xen.
symp. 8, 22; with them moueiv [ (see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23,
11, 3; L. and S. s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to
bad conduct; hence rovs émorapeévous pév a Set mparrew,
mowtouvtas d5€ tavavria, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 4), Acts xxvi. 9;
2 Co. xii. 21; rd Epyov.rovro, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co.
v.2 TWH Trmrg.; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts ili. 173 v.
35; Ro. vii. 19; ra rovadra, such nameless iniquities, Ro.
i. 32 (where zovety and mpdaocew are used indiscriminately
[but cf. Meyer]); ii. 1-3; Gal. v. 21; qadaAa, Jn. iii. 20;
v. 293 ri a&ov Oavarov, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts xxv. 11, 25;
XxvVi. 31; 76 xaxdv, Ro. vii. 19; xiii. 4; a@romov, Lk. xxiii. 41;
rt tit Kaxdv, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 3.
to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen.,
Dem., Plut.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr.
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue,
535
pea BUTEpOS
debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extort]; 1d dpydpiov, Lk.
xix. 23, (so agere in Lat., ef. the commentators on Suet.
Vesp. 1; [ef. W. § 42, 1 a.]). 4. intrans. to act (see
ev p. 256*) : dmevarri twos, contrary to a thing, Acts xvii.
(ls 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me
habere: ti mpacow, how I do, the state of my affairs,
Eph. vi. 21; ed mpagere (see ed), Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300
(258) ].
mpavmabea (-Oia TWH; see I, ce), -as, 9, (mpatimabns
[(macxw)]), mildness of disposition, gentleness of spirit,
meekness, (i. q. mpatrns): 1 Tim. vi.11 LT Tr WH. (Philo
de Abrah. §37; Ignat. ad Trall. 8, 1.) *
mMpavs, See mpaos.
MpavTys, See mpaorns.
apérw ; impf. 3 pers. sing. €mpere ; 1. to stand out,
to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. Il. 12, 104
down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, fit, (fr. Pind.,
Aeschyl., Hdt. down): mpeémet revi with a subject nom.
Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 1); 6 or dmpéeme, which
becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1; impers. xa-
Gas mpérer twi, Eph. v. 3; mpérov eoriv foll. by the inf.,
Mt. iii. 15; Heb. ii. 10; foll. by an acc. with the inf. 1 Co.
xi. 13. On its constr. cf. Bttm. § 142, 2.*
mpeo Pela, -as, 7, (mperBeva) ; 1. age, dignity, right
of the first born: Aeschyl. Pers. 4; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 509
bs; Baus: 35 1) 45) S5.05.9: 2. the business wont to
be intrusted to elders, spec. the office of an ambassador,
an embassy, (Arstph., Xen., Plat.) ; abstr. for the con-
crete, an ambassage i. e. ambassadors, Lk. xiv. 323; xix.
14.*
mpecPevw; (mpeoBus an old man, an elder, [Curtius p.
479; Vanicek p. 186]); 1. to be older, prior by
birth or in age, ({Soph.], Hdt. and sqq.). 2. to be
an ambassador, act as an ambassador: 2 Co. v. 20; Eph.
vi. 20, ([Hdt. 5, 93 init.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.).*
apex Buteptov, -ov, Td, (1pecBurepos, q. v.), body of elders,
presbytery, senate, council: of the Jewish elders (see cu»
édSpiov, 2), Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xxii.5; [ef. Dan. Theod.
init. 50]; of the elders of any body (church) of Chris-
tians, 1 Tim. iv. 14 (eccl. writ. [cf. reff. s. v. mpeaBurepos,
2 bil
mpeaPvirepos, -a, -ov, (compar. of mpeoBus), [fr. Hom.
down ], elder ; used L. of ages a. where two
persons are spoken of, the elder: 6 vids 6 mpeoB. (Ael.
v. h. 9,42), Lk. xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in life,
an elder, a senior: opp. to veavioxor, Acts iil. 17; opp. to
vedtepos, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq.; Sap. viii. 10;
Sir. vi. 34 (33); vii. 14; 2 Mace. viii. 30). of mpeoBv-
repo, [ A.V. the elders], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; mapadoats
(q. Vv.) trav mpeoB., received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2;
Mk. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such
borne by, a. among the Jews, a. members of
the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times
the rulers of the people, judges, ete., were selected from
the elderly men): Mt. xvi. 21; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Rec.;
XXvii. 3, 12, 20,41; xxviii.12; Mk. viii. 31; xi. 27; xiv.
43,53; xv. 1; Lk. ix..22; xx. 1; xxii. 52; Jn. viii. 9; Acts
iv. 5,23; vi. 12; xxiii. 14; xxiv.1; with the addition of
mpea Buns
tov ‘Iopand, Acts iv. 8 RG; of ray “Iovdaiwy, Acts xxv.
15; of rov Aaov, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3; xxvii. 1. B.
those who in the separate cities managed public affairs
and administered justice: Lk. vii.3. [Cf. BB. DD.s. v.
Elder. ] b. among Christians, those who presided
over the assemblies (or churches): Acts xi. 30; xiv. 23; xv.
2, 4, 6, 22)sq. 5 xvi. 4 5 xxi.185)1) Tim. v.17, 195 Tit. i. 5;
2Jn.1; 3Jn.1; 1 Pet.v.1,5; with rs éxxAnoias added,
Acts xx. 17; Jas. v.14. That they did not differ at all
from the (érioxora.) bishops or overseers (as is
acknowledged also by Jerome on Tit. i. 5 [ef. Bp. Lghtft.
Com. on Phil. pp. 98 sq. 229 sq.]) is evident from the
fact that the two words are used indiscriminately, Acts
xx. 17, 28; Tit. i. 5, 7, and that the duty of presbyters
.is deseribed by the terms émicxoreiv, 1 Pet. v. 1 sq., and
emucxomn, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44,1; accordingly only
two ecclesiastical officers, of émickomot and ot d.akovot,
are distinguished in Phil. i.1; 1 Tim. iii. 1,8. The title
erioxoros denotes the function, mpexBurepos the dig-
nity; the former was borrowed from Greek institutions,
the latter from the Jewish; cf. [Bp. Lghtft., as above,
pp- 95 sqq. 191 sqq.]; Ritschl, Die Entstehung der altka-
thol. Kirche, ed. 2 p. 350 sqq.; Hase, Protest. Polemik,
ed. 4 p. 98 sqq.; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, Lect.
iii. and Harnack’s Analecten appended to the Germ.
trans. of the same (p. 229 sqq.); also Harnack’s note on
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3 (ef. reff. at 44 init.), and Hatch in
Dict. of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Priest. Cf. émioxozros. ]. Cc:
the twenty-four members of the heavenly Sanhedrin or
court, seated on thrones around the throne of God: Rev.
iv. 451 05\vo0,6,0, 11, 14aevas 1103s x16: xivsskixied.*
mper Burns, -ov, 6, (mpeaBus [see mpeaBevw ]), an old man,
anaged man: Lk.i. 18; Tit. ii. 2; Philem. 9 [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) regard the word as a substitute for
mpeoBeutns, ambassador; see Bp. Lghtft. Com. ad loc. ;
WH. App. ad loc.; and add to the exx. of the inter-
change mpeoBevu repos in Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
App., Inser. fr. the Great Theatre p. 24 (col. 5, 1. 72)].
(Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for 1pt.) *
arpeo Boris, -cdos, 7, (fem. of mpeaBurns), an aged woman :
Tit. ii. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., Hdian. 5,
3, 6 (3 ed. Bekk.).) *
ampnvijs, -és, [allied w. mpd; Vanitek p. 484], Lat. pro-
nus, headlong: Acts i. 18. (Sap. iv.19; 3 Mace. v.43;
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, but in Attic more com.
mpayns, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 431; [W. 22].) *
mp({w (or mpiw, q.v.): 1 aor. pass. émpicOnv; to saw, to
cut intwo witha saw: Heb. xi.37. Tobe ‘sawn asunder’
was a kind of punishment among the Hebrews (2 S. xii.
31; 1 Chr. xx. 3), which according to ancient tradition
was inflicted on the prophet Isaiah; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Sage; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 135; [B. D. s. v. Saw].
(Am. i. 3; Sus. 59; Plat. Theag. p. 124 b. and freq. in
later writ.) *
mplv, [(ace. to Curtius § 380 compar. mpo- tov, mpo -tv,
mpw) |, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 1. an adv.
previously, formerly, [cf. mada, 1]: 3 Mace. v. 28; vi. 4, 31;
but never so in the N. T. 2. with the force of a
536
Tpo
conjunction, before, before that: with an acc. and aor.
infin. of things past [cf. W. § 44, 6 fin.; B. § 142, 3]; mpix
"ABpadp yevéoOa, before Abraham existed, came into be-
ing, Jn. viii. 58; also mpiv 7 (cf. Meyer on Mt. i. 18), Mt.
i. 18; [Acts vii. 2]; with an aor. inf. having the force of
the Lat. fut. perf., of things future [ef. W. 332 (311)]:
mpw adextopa pavncat, before the cock shall have crowed,
Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv. 72; Lk. xxii.61; add, Jn. iv.
49; xiv. 29; also pw 7, Mk. xiv. 30; Acts ii. 20 (where
LT Tr WH txt.om.7); piv 7, preceded by a negative
sentence [B. § 139, 35], with the aor. subjunc. having
the force of a fut. pf. in Lat. [B. 231 (199)], Lk. ii. 26
[RGLT Tr mrg., but WH br. #], and R Gin Lk. xxii.
34; mpiv 7, foll. by the optat. of a thing as entertained
in thought, Acts xxv. 16 [W. 297 (279) ; B. 230 (198) ].
Cf. Matthiae § 522, 2 p.1201sq.; Bitm. Gram. § 139, 41;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.726 sqq.; W. [and B.] as above.*
TIploxa, 7, [ace. -av], Prisca (a Lat. name [lit. ‘an-
cient’]), a Christian woman, wife of Aquila (concern-
ing whom see ’AkvAas): Ro. xvi. 3 GLTTrWH; 1 Co.
xvi. 19 Led. ster. TTrWH; 2 Tim. iv.19. She is also
called by the dimin. name TpioxiAda [better (with all
edd.) Ilpiox:Ada, see Chandler § 122; Etymol. Magn.
19, 50 sq.] (cf. Livia, Livilla; Drusa, Drusilla; Quinta,
Quintilla; Secunda, Secundilla): Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26;
besides, Ro. xvi. 3 Rec.; 1 Co. xvi. 19 RGL.*
TIptoxdAa, see the preceding word.
mplw, see mpifw. [COMP.: d:a- mpi. |
mp6, a prep. foll. by the Genitive, (Lat. pro), [fr. Hom.
down], Sept. chiefly for 359, before; used a. of
Place: mpo rev Oupar, rhs Oupas, etc., Acts v. 23 RG;
xii. 6, 14; xiv. 13; Jas. v.9; by a Hebraism, mpd mpoca-
mov with the gen. of a pers. before (the face of) one (who
is following) [B. 319 (274)]: Mt. xi. 10; Mk.i. 2; Lk.i-
76; vil. 27; ix.52; x.1, (Mal. iii. 1; Zech. xiv. 20; Deut.
iii. 18). b. of Time: mpd rovrwr ray nuepar, Acts
v. 36; xxi. 38; [mpd rod macyxa, Jn. xi.55]; acc.toalater
Greek idiom, mpé €€ jyepav tov macya, prop. before six
days reckoning from the Passover, which is equiv. to é&
7uEépas mpo Tov macxa, on the sixth day before the Pas-
sover, Jn. xii. 1 (apo Sto éréy rod cecopov, Am.i.13; mpo
pas eépas THs Mapdoyaixns nuepas, 2 Macc. xv. 36; exx.
fr. prof. writ. are cited by W. 557 (518); [cf. B. § 131,
11]; fr. eccles. writ. by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien etc.
pp- 298, 302; also his Paschastreit der alten Kirche, p. 221
sq-; [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v. mpd, 1 and 2}) ; {po rips Eopris,
Jn. xiii. 1]; mpd xatpov, Mt. viii. 29; 1 Co. iv. 5; ray aia-
vov, 1 Co. ii. 7; mavros Tov aidvos, Jude 25 L'T Tr WH;
érav Sexareco. [ fourteen years ago], 2 Co. xii. 2; add, 2
Tim. i. 9; iv. 21; Tit. i. 25 rod dpiorov, Lk. xi. 38; xara-
kdvopod, Mt. xxiv. 38; mpd ris perabéoews, Heb. xi. 5;
mpd KkataBodjs Kdéopou, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i. 4; 1 Pet. i.
20; mpd mavrov, prior to all created things, Col. i. 17;
[mpo rovtwy mavrav (Rec. dmdvt.), Lk. xxi. 12]; bya
Hebraism, apo rpoo@mov with the gen. of a thing is used
of time for the simple pd (W. § 65, 4b.; [B.319 (274)]),
Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)].
apo with the gen. of a pers.: Jn. v. 7; x. 8 [not Tdf.];
T poayw
Ro. xvi. 7; of mpd tivos, those that existed before one,
Mt. v.12; with a pred. nom. added, Gal.i.17. mpd with
the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quam
(before, before that) foll. by a fin. verb [B. §140,11; W.
329 (309)]: Mt. vi.8; Lk. ii. 21; xxii.15; Jn.i. 48 (49) ;
xiii. 19; xvii. 5; Acts xxiii. 15; Gal. ii. 12; iii. 23. Cc.
of superiority or pre-eminence [W. 372 (349)]:
mpo ravtwy, above all things, Jas. v. 12; 1 Pet.iv.8. d.
In Composition, apé marks a. place: mpoav-
Axwov; motion forward (Lat. porro), mpoBaive, mpoBadrro,
ete.; before another who follows, in advance, mpodyw, mpé-
Spopos, mporeurw, mpotpexa, etc.; in public view, openly,
mpodnros, mpoxetpat. B. time: before this, previously,
mpoaunapravw; in reference to the time of an occurrence,
beforehand, in advance, mpoB\éna, mpoywacka, mpobe-
ap.0s, mpoopi¢a, etc. y- superiority or preference:
mpoapéoua. [Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 658.]*
mpo-ayw ; impf. mporyov; fut. mpod&w ; 2 aor. mponyayov;
fr. Hdt. down; 1. trans. to lead forward, lead
forth: tid, one from a place in which he has lain hidden
from view, —as from prison, é£w, Acts xvi. 30; [from
Jason’s house, Acts xvii.5 L T Tr WH]; _ in a forensic
sense, to bring one forth to trial, Acts xii. 6 [WH txt.
mpooayayeiv]; with addition of én and the gen. of the
pers. about to examine into the case, before whom the
hearing is to be had, Acts xxv. 26 (els ry Sixny, Joseph.
b. j. 1, 27, 2; eds exxdnoiav tovs ev airia yevouévous, antt.
IGS UL, 2). 2. intrans. (see dyw, 4 [and cf. mpd, d.
a.|), a. to go before: Lk. xviii. 39 [L mrg. wapay. ] ;
opp. to dkoAovdéw, Mt. xxi. 9 RG; Mk. xi. 9; foll. by eis
with an ace. of place, Mt. xiv. 22; Mk. vi. 45; eis xpicuwy,
1 Tim. v. 24 (on which pass. see émaxoAovdéw) ; ptcp.
mpoaywy, preceding i. e. prior in point of time, previous,
1 Tim. i. 18 [see rponreéa fin., and s. v. emi, C. I. 2 g. y.
yy: (but R. V. mrg. led the way to, etc.)]; Heb. vii. 18.
twa, to precede one, Mt. ii. 9; Mk. x. 32; and LT Tr
WH in Mt. xxi. 9, [cf. Joseph. b. j. 6,1, 6; B. § 130, 4];
foll. by eis with an acc. of place, Mt. xxvi.32; xxviii. 7;
Mk. xiv. 28; xvi. 7; teva els tHv Bacwdelav Tod Geov, to
take precedence of one in entering into the kingdom of
God, Mt. xxi. 31 [ef. B. 204 (177)]. b. to proceed,
go forward: in a bad sense, to go further than is right or
proper, i.q. wy weve ev TH Siday7, to transgress the limits
of true doctrine [cf. our colloq. ‘ advanced’ (views, etc.)
in a disparaging sense], 2 Jn. 9 L T Tr WH [but R. V.
mrg. taketh the lead].*
apo-aipew, -@ : by prose writ. fr. Hdt. [rather, fr. Thuc.
8, 90 fin. (in poetry, fr. Arstph. Thesm. 419) ] down, to
bring forward, bring forth from one’s stores; Mid. to bring
forth for one’s self, to choose for one’s self before another
i. e. to prefer ; to purpose : kabes mpoarpetrar (1, T Tr WH
the pf. mponpytat) ti Kapdia, 2 Co. ix. 7.*
mpo-aiTidopat, -@pat: 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. mponttacapeda ;
to bring a charge against previously (i. e.in what has pre-
viously been said): riva foll. by an infin. indicating the
charge, Ro. iii. 9; where the prefix mpo- makes refer-
ence to i. 18-31; ii. 1-5, 17-29. Not found elsewhere.*
wpo-axovw: 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. mponxovcare; to hear
537
mpoBatov
before: tyv édmida, the hoped for salvation, before its
realization, Col. i. 5 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. (Hdt., Xen.,
Plat., Dem., al.) *
mpo-apaptave: pf. ptcp. mponuaptnkas ; to sin before:
of mponpaprnkéres, of those who before receiving baptism
had been guilty of the vices especially common among
the Gentiles, 2 Co. xii. 21; xiii. 2; in this same sense also
in Justin Martyr, apol. i. c. 61; Clem. Al. strom. 4, 12;
ef. Liicke, Conjectanea Exeget. I. (Gotting. 1837) p. 14
sqq- [but on the ref. of the mpo- see Meyer on 2 Co. ll. ce.
(R. V. heretofore)]. (Hdian. 3, 14, 18 [14 ed. Bekk.];
eccl. writ.) *
mpo-avdtov, -ov, Td, (mpd and avdAn), fore-court, porch:
Mk. xiv. 68 [(cf. Pollux 1, 8, 77 and see avAn, 2) ].*
tpo-Baivw: pf. ptcp. mpoBeBnkas; 2 aor. ptep. mpofas ;
fr. Hom. down; to go forwards, go on, [cf. mpd, d. a.]}:
prop. on foot, Mt. iv. 21; Mk.i.19; trop. év rais nuepats
mpoBeBnxos, advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 183; ii. 36, (see
npepa, fin.; tHv nAcxiav, 2 Mace. iv. 40; vi. 18; Hdian. 2,
7, 7 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 77 nAcia, Lys. p. 169, 37; [Diod. 12,
18]; rats nAtkias, Diod. 13, 89; [cf. L.andS.s. v. I. 2]).*
mpo-BaAdw ; 2 aor. mpoeBadov; fr. Hom. down; to throw
forward (cf. mpé, d. a.]; of trees, to shoot forth, put out,
se. leaves; to germinate, [cf. B. § 130, 4; W. 593 (552)]
(with xaprov added, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 19; Epict. 1, 15,
7): Lk. xxi. 830; to push forward, thrust forward, put
forward: twa, Acts xix. 33.*
mpoPatiKds, -7, -0v, (mpdBatov), pertaining to sheep:
mpoBartkn, Sc. rvAn (which is added in Neh. iii. 1,325 xii.
39, for [N¥T IW), the sheep-gate, Jn. v. 2 [(W. 592
(551); B. $123, 8); but some (as Meyer, Weiss, Milligan
and Moulton, cf. Treg. mrg. and see Tdf.’s note ad loc.)
would connect apo. with the immediately following
coup Bn Opa (pointed as a dat.) ; see Tdf.u. s.; WH. App.
ad loc. On the supposed locality see B. D.s. v. Sheep
Gate (Sheep-Market) ].*
mpoParvoy, -ov, rd, (dimin. of the foll. word), a little
sheep: Jn. xxi. [16 T Tr mrg. WH txt.], 17 T Tr WH
txt. (Hippocr., Arstph., Plat.) *
atp6-Baroy, -ov, 6, (fr. mpoBaive, prop. ‘that which walks
forward’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for jS3, then for
nv, sometimes for #23 and Id (a lamb), prop. any
four-footed, tame animal accustomed to graze, small cattle
(opp. to large cattle, horses, etc.), most com. a sheep or
a goat; but esp. a sheep, and so always in the N. T.: Mt.
vii. 15; x. 16; xii. 11sq.; Mk. vi. 34; Lk. xv. 4, 6; Jn. ii.
14 sq.3 x. 1-4, 11 sq.; Acts viii. 32 (fr. Is. liii. 7); 1 Pet.
ii. 25; Rev. xviii. 13; mpdéBara odayns, sheep destined
for the slaughter, Ro. viii. 36. metaph. rpd8ara, sheep,
is used of the followers of any master: Mt. xxvi. 31 and
MK. xiv. 27, (fr. Zech. xiii. 7); of mankind, who as need-
ing salvation obey the injunctions of him who provides
it and leads them to it; so of the followers of Christ:
Jn. x. 7sq. 15 sq. 26 sq.; xxi. 16 [RGLTrtxt. WH mrg.],
17 ([RGL WH mrg.]; Heb. xiii. 20; 1a mpéBara dmo-
AwAdra (see amwdAAvpt, fin.), Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; ra mpoB.
in distinction from ra épidua, are good men as distin-
guished fr. bad, Mt. xxv. 33.
TpeBiBatw
arpo-BiBafw: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. mpoeBiBacay; 1 aor.
pass. ptep. fem. mpoBiBaGeiaa ; 1. prop. to cause to
go forward, to lead forward, to bring forward, drag for-
ward: Acts xix. 33 RG([(fr. Soph. down)]. 2.
metaph. i. q. mporpema, to incite, instigate, urge forward,
set on; to induce by persuasion: Mt. xiv. 8 (eis rs, Xen.
mem. 1, 5,1; Plat. Prot. p. 328 b.; [in Deut. vi. 7 Sept.
with an accus. of the thing (and of the pers.) i. q. to
teach }).*
arpo-Brérw : to foresee (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 13; Dion.
Hal. antt. 11, 20); 1 aor. mid. ptep. mpoBreyapuevos; to
provide: tt mepi twos, Heb. xi. 40 [W. § 38, 6; B. 194
(167)]*
mpo-ylvonar: pf. ptep. mpoyeyovas ; to become or arise
before, happen before, (so fr. Hdt. down [in Hom. (Il. 18,
525) to come forward into view]): mpoyeyovdra déuapry-
para, sins previously committed, Ro. iii. 25.*
mpo-yiwookw; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. mpoeyyw; pf. pass.
ptep. mpoeyvacpevos; to have knowledge of beforehand ;
«o foreknow: sc. ravra, 2 Pet. iii. 17, cf. 14,16; revd, Acts
xxvi. 53 ods mpoeéyyw, whom he (God) foreknew, se. that
they would love him, or (with reference to what follows)
whom he foreknew to be fit to be conformed to the like-
ness of his Son, Ro. viii. 29 (rav eis airév [Xpiorov]
muotevey mpoeyvoopevorv, Justin M. dial. c. Tr. c. 42;
mpoywwoket [6 Beds] tTivas ek petavoias cwOnoer Oat peédr-
Aovras, id. apol. i. 28); Ov mpoeyyw, whose character he
clearly saw beforehand, Ro. xi. [1 Lchm. in br.], 2,
(against those who in the preceding passages fr. Ro.
explain mpoyivaoxew as meaning to predestinate, cf.
Meyer, Philippi, Van Hengel); mpoeyvaopevov, sc. ind
tov Geov (foreknown by God, although not yet ‘made
manifest’ to men), 1 Pet. i. 20. (Sap. vi. 14; viii. 8;
xviii. 6; Eur., Xen., Plat., Hdian., Philostr., al.) *
Tpd-yvwos, -ews, 7, (Tpoyvacka) ; 1. foreknowl-
edge: Judith ix. 6; xi. 19, (Plut., Leian., Hdian.). 2
forethought, pre-arrangement, (see mpoBdérw): 1 Pet. i. 2;
Acts ii. 23, [but cf. tpoywaoxw, and see Mey. on Acts 1.c.].*
™pd-yovos, -ov, 6, (mpoyivouat), born before, older: Hom.
Od. 9, 221; plur. ancestors, Lat. majores, (often so by
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down) : dad mpoydvev, in the spirit
and after the manner received from (my) forefathers
[ef. dd, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59° bot.], 2 Tim. i.3; used of a
mother, grandparents, and (if such survive) great-crand-
parents, 1 Tim. v. 4 [ A. V. parents] (of surviving ances-
tors also in Plato, lege. 11 p. 932 init.).*
™po-ypadw : 1 aor. mpoeypawa; 2 aor. pass. mpoeypadny ;
pf. pass. ptep. mpoyeypappevos ; 1. to write before
(of time): Ro. xv. 4* R G Ltxt. T Tr WH, 4” Ree. ; Eph.
iii. 3; of madat mpoyeypapp. eis TodTO TO Kpipa, of old set
forth or designated beforehand (in the Scriptures of the
QO. T. and the prophecies of Enoch) unto this condemna-
tion, Jude 4. 2. to depict or portray openly [cf. mpd,
d. a.]: ois car’ dOarpods "Inacois Xpioris mpoeypadn év
bpiv [but év dp. is dropped by GL T Tr WH] éeoravpape-
vos, before whose eyes was portrayed the picture of Jesus
Christ crucified (the attentive contemplation of which
picture ought to have been a preventive against that
538
|
TpoevapyYopude
bewitchment), i.e. who were taught most definitely and
plainly concerning the meritorious efficacy of the death
of Christ, Gal. iii. 1. Since the simple ypadew is often
used of painters, and mpoypadpey certainly signifies
also to write before the eyes of all who can read (Plut.
Demetr. 46 fin. mpoypape: tis ad’tod mpd ras oKnvas THY
Tov Oidimodos apxnv), I see no reason why mpoypdpew
may not mean to depict (paint, portray) before the eyes;
[R. V. openly set forth]. Cf. Hofmann ad loe. [ Farrar,
St. Paul, ch. xxiv., vol. i. 470 note; al. adhere to the
meaning to placard, write up publicly, see Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc. ; al. al.; see Meyer].*
mpo-5nydos, -ov, (mpd [d. a. and] d7Aos), openly evident,
known to all, manifest: 1 Tim. v. 24 sq.; neut. foll. by ér,
Heb. vii. 14. [(From Soph. and Hdt. down.) ]*
wpo-SiSwut: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. mpocdwxev; ato
give before, give first: Ro. xi. 35 (Xen., Polyb., Aris-
tot.). 2. to betray: Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Plat., al. ;
thy marpioa, 4 Mace. iv. 1.*
arpo-S6TMs, -ov, 6, (mpodidap, 2), a betrayer, traitor: Lk.
vi. 16; Acts vii.52; 2 Tim. iii.4. (From[Aeschyl.], Hdt.
down; 2 Macc. v. 15; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) *
arp6-5poj.os, -ov, 6, 1), (mpoTpexa, mpodpapeiv), a forerun-
ner (esp. one who is sent before to take observations or
act as spy, a scout, a light-armed soldier; Aeschyl., Hadt.,
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; cf. Sap. xii. 8); one who
comes in advance to a place whither the rest are to follow:
Heb. vi. 20.*
apo-cidov, [fr. Hom. down], 2 aor. of the verb mpoopda,
to foresee: Acts ii. 31 [(here WH zpodey without diaer-
esis; cf. I, c fin.)]; Gal. iii. 8.*
arpo-etrov [2 aor. act. fr. an unused pres. (see elmov,
init.)], 1 pers. plur. mpoetzoper (1 Th. iv. 6 Grsb.), mpo-
elrapev (ibid. RL T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 164]);
pf. mpoeipnxa; pf. pass. mpoeipnuat (see etrov, p. 181* top) ;
fr. Hom. [(by tmesis) ; Hdt. and Plat.] down; to say be-
fore; i.e. a. to say in what precedes, to say above:
foll. by &rz, 2 Co. vii. 3; foll. by direct dise., [Heb. iv. 7
LT TrWH txt.]; x. 15 [Rec.]. b. to say before
i.e. heretofore, formerly: foll. by dre, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal.
v. 21; foll. by direct dise., Gal. i. 9; [Heb. iv. 7 WH
mrg.]; Kaas mpoeinapev tpiv, 1 Th. iv.6; [in the pas-
sages under this head (exc. Gal. i. 9) some would give
mpo- the sense of openly, plainly, (cf. R. V. mrg.)]- G:
to say beforehand i.e. before the event; so used in ref. to
prophecies: ri, Acts i. 16; 7a pyuara ra mpoetpnpeéva tno
ros, Jude 17; 2 Pet. iii. 2; mpoeipnxa tpiv mavta, Mk.
xiii. 23; sc. adré, Mt. xxiv. 25; foll. by direct discourse,
ig. 2a."
apo-elpyka, SCC mpoetron.
apo-eAmitw: pf. ptep. ace. plur. mponAmixoras ; to hope
before: &v rw, to repose hope in a person or thing before
the event confirms it, Eph.i.12. (Posidipp. ap. Athen.
9 p. 877¢., Dexipp., Greg. Nyss.) *
apo-ev-Gpxopar: 1 aor. mpoevnpEdunv; to make a begin-
ning before: 2Co. viii. 6; ri, ib. 10 [here al. render ‘to
make a beginning before others,’ ‘to be the first to make a
beginnina, (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.*
T PoeTrAyYEAAw
ampo-er-ayyeAdw: 1 aor. mid. mpoennyyetAauny ; pf. ptep.
mpvernyyeAwevos ; to announce before (Dio Cass.); mid.
to promise before : ri, Ro. i. 2,and L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ix.
5, ((Arr. 6, 27, 1]; Dio Cass. 42, 32; 46, 40).*
apo-€pxopat: impf. mponpxopunv; fut. mpoedevoopat; 2
aor. mpondOov; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to go forward, go
on: puxpov, a little, Mt. xxvi. 39 [here T Tr WH mrg.
mpooe Ov (q. v.ina.)]; Mk. xiv. 35 [Tr WH mrg. mpoo-
€\6.]; w.an ace. of the way, Acts xii. 10 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4,
18; Plato, rep. 1 p. 328 e.; 10 p. 616 b.). 2. to go
before; i.e. a. to go before, precede, (locally; Germ.
vorangehen): évwmov tivos, Lk. i. 17 [(€umpoobev twos,
Gen. xxxiii. 3), WH mrg. mpoceépy. q. v. in a.]; tevds, to
precede one, Lk. xxii. 47 Rec. [(Judith ii. 19)]; teva,
ibid. G LT Tr WH (not soconstrued in prof. writ.; cf. B.
144 (126); Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 70; [W. § 52,
4, 13]; but in Lat. we find antecedere, anteire, praeire,
aliquem, and in Grk. writ. mpoOeiv twa; see mponyéopat) ;
to outgo, outstrip, (Lat. praecurrere, antevertere aliquem ;
for which the Greeks say @Odvew twa), Mk. vi. 33. —b.
to go before, i.e. (set out) in advance of another (Germ.
vorausgehen): Acts xx.5 [Tr WH txt. mpoced8.]; eis
[L Tr mpés] tpas, unto (as far as to) you, 2 Co. ix. 5; émt
To mAotov, to the ship, Acts xx. 13 [Tr WH mrg. zpoo-
e\Oortes |.*
mpo-eToundtw: 1 aor. mpontoizaca ; to prepare before, to
make ready beforehand: & mponroipacev eis Sokar, i.e. for
whom he appointed glory beforehand (i.e. from eter-
nity), and accordingly rendered them fit to receive it,
Ro. ix. 23; to prepare beforehand in mind and purpose,
i. e. to decree, Eph. ii. 10, where ois stands by attraction
for a [cf. W. 149 (141); B.§ 143, 8]. (Is. xxviii. 24;
Sap. ix. 8; Hdt., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Geop., al.) *
mpo-evayyeA(Lopan: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. mpoeunyyeAlcaro;
to announce or promise glad tidings beforehand (viz. be-
fore the event by which the promise is made good) : Gal.
iii. 8. (Philo de opif. mund. § 9; mutat. nom. § 29; By-
zant. writ.) *
apo-éxw [(fr. Hom. down)]: pres. mid. 1 pers. plur. mpo-
exoue0a; to have before or in advance of another, to have
pre-eminence over another, to excel, to surpass; often so
in prof. auth. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down; mid. to excel to
one’s advantage (cf. Kiihner § 375, 1); to surpass in ex-
cellences which can be passed to one’s credit: Ro. iii. 9;
it does not make against this force of the middle in the
present passage that the use is nowhere else met with,
nor is there any objection to an interpretation which has
commended itself to a great many and which the con-
text plainly demands. [But on this difficult word see
esp. Jas. Morison, Crit. Expos. of the Third Chap. of
Rom. p. 93 sqq.; Gifford in the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ p. 96;
W.§ 38, 6; § 39 fin., cf. p. 554 (516). ]*
mpo-nyeopat, -oduar; to go before and show the way, to
go before and lead, to go before as leader, (Hat. 2, 48;
often in Xen.; besides in Arstph., Polyb., Plut., Sept.,
al.): 1H Tym aGAANAOUS mporyovpevor, one going before
another as an example of deference [ A. V. in honor pre-
ferring one another (on the dat. cf. W. § 31, 6 a.)], Ro.
539
TpolgTHpt
xii. 10. The Grk. writ. connect this verb now with the
dat. (Arstph. Plut. 1195; Polyb. 6, 53, 8; ete.), now with
the gen. (Diod. 1, 87); see mpoépxopua. 2 a.*
mpo-Yeris, -ews, 7, (mporiOnpe) 5 1. the settng forth
of a thing, placing of it in view, (Plat., Dem., Plut.); of
aprot ths mpobécews (Vulg. panes propositionis), the show-
bread, Sept. for 0°39 ON? (Ex. xxxv. 13; xxxix. 18
(xxxviii. 36); 1 K. vii. 48 (34)), and naiyon ond (1
Chr. ix. 32; xxiii. 29); twelve loaves of wheaten bread,
corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel,
which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and,
separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a
table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of
the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple (cf. Winer,
RWB. s. v. Schaubrode; Roskoff in Schenkel v. p. 213
sq.; [Edersheim, The Temple, ch. ix. p. 152 sqq.; BB.
DD.]): Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4, (of dprot rod mpoc-
wou, sc. Geov, Neh. x. 33; dprot évwmot, Ex. xxv. 29) ;
7) mpobects Tav aptav, (the rite of) the setting forth of
the loaves, Heb. ix. 2. 2. a purpose (2 Mace. iii. 8;
[Aristot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut.): Acts xxvii. 13; Ro. viii.
255 5x11 s Eph. sai bh) 2° Timi Sete 10s) +7
mpobéaes THs Kapdias, with purpose of heart, Acts xi.
23.™
mpo-Oéop10s, -a, -ov, (mpo[q.v.in d. B.] and decpos fixed,
appointed), set beforehand, appointed or determined be-
forehand, pre-arranged, (Leian. Nigr. 27); 9 mpoecpia,
sc. nuepa, the day previously appointed; univ. the pre-ap-
pointed time: Gal. iv. 2. (Lys., Plat., Dem., Aeschin.,
Diod., Philo—cf. Siegfried, Philo p. 113, Joseph., Plut.,
al.; eccles. writ.; cf. Kypke and Hilgenfeld on Gal.
Jlarshy i
mpobupia, -as, 7, (mpodupuos), fr. Hom. down; a IF
zeal, spirit, eagerness ; 2. inclination; readiness of
mind’: "so Acts xvil- 11; 2 Co. vill. 11/sq: 195 ix/2*
apd0upos, -ov, (mpo and Ouyds), fr. [Soph. and] Hdt.
down, ready, willing: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; neut. ra
mpoOupor, i. q. 9 mpobuuia: Ro. i. 15, as in Thue. 3, 82;
Plat. lege. 9 p. 859b.; Eur. Med. vs. 178; Joseph. antt.
4, 8,13; Hdian. 8, 3,15 [6 ed. Bekk.] (on which cf.
Irmisch) ; 3 Mace. v. 26.*
mpo0vpws, adv., fr. Hdt. and Aeschyl. down, willingly,
with alacrity: 1 Pet. v. 2.*
tTpdipos, SCe mpwipos.
mpo-tornpt: 2 aor. inf. mpoornvat; pf. ptep. mpoeoras ;
pres. mid. rpoiorauat; fr. Hom. Il. 4, 156 down; al
in the trans. tenses to set or place before; to set over. a
in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act. and in the pres. and impf.
mid. a. to be over, to superintend, preside over, [ A.V.
rule], (so fr. Hdt. down): 1 Tim. v. 17; with a gen. ot
the pers. or thing over which one presides, 1 Th. v. 12;
1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. 12. b. to be a protector or guar-
dian; to give aid, (Eur., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb.) : Ro.
xii. 8 [(al. with A.V. to rule; cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; Stuart,
Com. excurs. xii.) ]. c. to care for, give attention to.
w. a gen. of the thing, cad@v épyov, Tit. iii. 8, 14; for
exx. fr. prof. writ. see Kypke and Losner; [some (cf. R.V-
mrg.) would render these two exx. profess honest occu
mMpokaréw
pations (see épyov, 1); but cf. épyov, 3 p. 248° mid. and
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad 1. ¢.J.*
ampo-Kadew, -&: pres. mid. ptep. mpoxadovpevos; to call
forth [ef. mpd, d. a.]; Mid. to call forth to one’s self, esp.
to challenge to a combat or contest with one; often so fr.
Hom. down; hence to provoke, to irritate: Gal. v. 26 [ (eis
®uornta x. opynv, Hdian. 7, 1, 11, 4 ed. Bekk.)].*
mpo-kaT-ayyeAAw: 1 aor. mpoxatnyye:Aa; pf. pass. ptep.
mpoxatnyyeApevos ; to announce beforehand (that a thing
will be): of prophecies, — foll. by an ace. with inf. Acts
ili. 18; ri, Acts iii. 24 Rec.; mepi tevos, Acts vii. 52. To
pre-announce in the sense of to promise : ri, pass. 2 Co. ix.
5 Rec. (Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 3; 2, 9,4; eccles. writ.) *
mpo-Kat-apritw: 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. plur. mpoxarap-
ticwot; to prepare [A. V. make up] beforehand: ti, 2 Co.
ix. 5. (Hippocr.; eccles. writ.) *
mpo-Ketpat; (apo [q. v-d.a.] and xeijpa); fr. Hom.
down; 1. prop. to lie or be placed before (a person
or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2
to be set before, i. e. a. to be placed before the eyes,
to lie in sight; to stand forth: with a pred. nom., detypa,
as an example, Jude 7 (xaddv trddetryyd cot mpoxerrat, JO-
seph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). b. i. q. to be appointed, destined :
mpoxetern e\mis, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb.
vi. 18; used of those things which by any appointment
are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one;
SO mpoxeipevos aywv, Heb. xii. 1; mpoxeiu. yapa, the des-
tined joy (see ayri, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase ra da mpo-
xetaOac occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. down; cf.
Bleek, Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be
there, be present, be at hand, (so that it can become actual
or available) : 2 Co. viii. 12.*
mpo-Knptcow: 1 aor. ptep. mpoxnpvéas ; pf. pass. ptep.
TPOKEKNPVYLEVOS 3 1. to announce or proclaim by
herald beforehand (Xen. resp. Lac. 11, 2; Isae. p. 60, 2;
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.). 2. univ. to announce
beforehand (of the herald himself, Soph. El. 684): "In-
covv Xptoror, i. e. his advent, works, and sufferings, pass.
Acts iii. 20 Ree.; ri, Acts xili. 24 (‘Iepepias ta peAXovra
TH mode Seva mpoexnpugev, Joseph. antt. 10, 5, 1).*
mpo-KoTrh, -7S, 7, (mpoxdmT@, q. V-), progress, advance-
ment: Phil. i. 12, 25; 1 Tim.iv.15. (Polyb., Diod., Jo-
seph., Philo, al.; rejected by the Atticists, cf. Phrynich.
ed. Lob. p. 85; [Sir. li. 17; 2 Mace. viii. 8].) *
mpo-KorTw : impf. mpoexontov; fut. mpoxoyrw; 1 aor.
mpoexoa; to beat forward ; 1. to lengthen out by
hammering (as asmith forges metals) ; metaph. to promote,
forward, further: Hdt., Eur., Thuc., Xen., al. 2.
fr. Polyb. on intransitively [cef. B. 145 (127); W. 251
(236) ], to go forward, advance, proceed; of time: 4 wé
mpoexower, the night is advanced [A. V. is far spent], (day
is at hand), Ro. xiii. 12 (Joseph. b.j. 4, 4, 6; [spoxo-
mrovans THs Spas} Charit. 2, 3,3 [p. 38, 1 ed. Reiske; ra
THs vuxrds, ib. 2,3, 4]; 9 nuepa mpoxomre, Just. Mart.
dial. c. Tryph. p. 277 d.; Lat. procedere is used in the
same way, Livy 28,15; Sallust. Jug. 21, 52,109). met-
aph. to increase, make progress: with a dat. of the thing
in which one grows, Lk. ii. 52 [not Tdf.] (Diod. 11, 87) ;
540
T™poopaw
ev with a dat. of the thing, ibid. Tdf.; Gal. i. 14, (Diod.
Lexcerpt. de virt. et vitiis] p. 554, 69; Antonin. 1, 17);
emt meiov, further, 2 Tim. iii. 9 (Diod. 14, 98) ; émt wdeiov
doeBeias, 2 Tim. ii. 16; ei 1d yeipov, will grow worse,
i. e. will make progress in wickedness, 2 Tim. iii. 13
(trav ‘Iepotodtipav man mpovkonte Kab” Hpépav emt rd
xetpov, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 1).*
Tpd-Kpipa, -ros, Td, (mpd and kpipa), an opinion formed
before the facts are known, a pre-judgment, a prejudice,
(Vulg. praejudicium): 1 Tim. v. 21 (anonym. in Suidas
s.v.; [Athan. apol. c. Arian. 25 (i. 288 a. ed. Migne);
Justinian cod. 10, 11, 8, § €]).*
mpo-Kupdw, -@: pf. pass. ptep. mpoxexupapevos; to sanc-
tion, ratify, or establish beforehand: Gal. iii. 17. ({Euseb.
praep. evang. 10, 4 (ii. p. 70, 3 ed. Heinichen)]; Byzant.
writ.) *
tpo-AapBdvw; 2 aor. mpoeAaBov; 1 aor. pass. subjunc.
3 pers. sing. mpoAnpén [-Anupén LT Tr WH; sees. v.
M, »]; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to take before: ri, 1 Co.
xi. 21. 2. to anticipate, to forestall: mpoédaBe pupi-
oa, she has anticipated the anointing, [hath anointed
beforehand], Mk. xiv. 8; ef. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 54,
4, 3. to take one by forestalling (him i.e. before he
can flee or conceal his crime), i. e. surprise, detect, (Sap.
XVii. 16) : tea ev maparr@patt, pass. Gal. vi. 1; cf. Winer,
Ep. ad Gal. 1. c.*
mpo-A€yw ; impf. mpoedeyor; to say beforehand, to pre-
dict, (so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down): 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal.
v. 21; 1 Th. iii. 4; [some (see R. V. mrg.) would give
mpo- the sense of plainly in all these exx.; cf. L. and S.
s.v. II. 2, and see mpo, d. a. fin.].*
TPO-PapTUpopar ; 1. antetestor (in the old lexi-
cons). 2. to testify beforehand, i.e. to make known
by prediction: 1 Pet. i. 11; so also [ Basil. Seleuc. 32 a.
(Migne vol. Ixxxv.) and] by Theodorus Metochita (ce. 75,
mise. p. 504) —a writ. of the fourteenth century.*
mpo-pedeTaw, -@; to meditate beforehand: Lk. xxi. 14
(Arstph., Xen., Plato).*
arpo-pepipvaw ; to be anxious beforehand: Mk. xiii. 11
(Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 9, 72; [Hippol. ref. haer. 6, 52
p. 380, 69; 8, 15 p. 432, 3]]).*
mpo-voew, -@; pres. mid. mpovoodua; fr. Hom. down;
1. to perceive before, foresee. 2. to provide, think
of beforehand: twés (see Matthiae § 348, vol. ii. p. 821
[but cf. §379 p. 862]; Kiihner § 419, 1 b. ii. p. 325; [Jelf
§ 496]; W. § 30, 10c.), to provide for one, 1 Tim. v. 8
(where T Tr txt. WH mrg. mpovoetra) ; mepi twos, Sap.
vi. 8. Mid. with an acc. of the thing, i. a. to take thought
for, care for a thing: Ro. xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21 (where
LT Tr WH have adopted mpovootper).*
apévo.a, -as, 4, (mpdvoos), fr. [Aeschyl., Soph.], Hat.
down, forethought, provident care: Acts xxiv. 2(3) [A.V.
providence] ; motodpat mpdvordy twos, to make provision for
a thing (see rotéw, I. 3 p. 526" top), Ro. xiii. 14.*
apo-opdw, -; pf. ptep. mpoewpaxos; impf. mid. (Acts
ii. 25) mpowpdpny, and without augm. (see dpoide, init.)
mpoopouny L.T Tr WH; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to see
before (whether as respects place or time): ted, Acts
a poopitw
xxi. 29. 2. Mid. (rare use) to keep before one’s eyes:
metaph. ria, with ¢vamdv pov added, to be mindful of
one always, Acts ii. 25 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8."
ampo-op{{w: 1 aor. mpowpica; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. mpoopt-
wbévres; to predetermine, decide beforehand, Vulg. [exc.
in Acts] praedestino, [R. V. to foreordain]: in the N. T.
of God decreeing from eternity, foll. by an acc. with the
inf. Acts iv. 28; ri, with the addition of mpo rav aidrvwr,
1 Co. ii. 7; twa, with a pred. acc., to foreordain, appvint
beforehand, Ro. viii. 29 sq.; Twa ets rt, one to obtain a
thing, Eph. i. 5; mpoopioOerres sc. kAnpwOjvat, Eph. i. 11.
(Heliod. and eccl. writ. [Ignat. ad Eph. tit.]) *
mpo-rdcxw: 2 aor. ptcp. mpomabdrres ; to suffer before :
1 Th. ii. 2. (Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plat., al.) *
ampo-ratwp, -opos, 6, (rarnp), a forefather, founder of a
family or nation: Ro. iv.1LTTr WH. (Pind., Hdt.,
Soph., Eur., Plat., Dio Cass. 44, 37; Lcian., al.; Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. c. 10; Joseph. antt. 4, 2,4; b.j. 5, 9,4,
Ev. Nicod. 21. 24. 25 sq.; eccl. writ.) *
tpo-1réptrw ; impf. mpoemeumov; 1 aor. act. mpoemepa ;
1 aor. pass. mpoereppOnv; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to send
before. 2. to send forward, bring on the way, ac-
company or escort: twa, 1 Co. xvi. 6, 11, [al. associate
these exx. with the group at the close]; with éxet (for
exeioe) added, Ro. xv. 24; eis with an ace. of place, Acts
xx. 38; 2Co.i. 16 [here R. V. set forward (see below) ];
€ws €€w THs mOAews, Acts xxi. 5. to set one forward, fit
him out with the requisites for his journey: Acts xv. 3
[al. associate this ex. with the preceding]; Tit. iii. 13;
3 Jn. 6; 1 Mace. xii. 4, cf. 1 Esdr. iv. 47.*
mpotrerhs, -€s, (mpo and rer i. e. mitt) ; 1. fall-
ing forwards, headlong, sloping, precipitous: Pind. Nem.
6,107; Xen. r. eq. 1, 8; al. 2. precipitate, rash,
reckless: Acts xix. 36; .2 Tim. iii. 4, (Prov. x. 14; xiii.
3; Sir. ix. 18; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.1, 1; and often in Grk.
writ.).*
mpo-mropevw: 1 fut. mid. mpomopedcoua; to send before,
to make to precede, (Ael. nat. an. 10, 22 [var.]); mid. to
go before, to precede, [see mpd, d. a.]: twds (on which gen.
see W. § 52, 2c.), to go before one, of a leader, Acts vii.
40; mpd mpoowov tivds (after the Hebr., Ex. xxxii. 34;
Deut. iii. 18; ix. 3), of a messenger or a herald, Lk. i. 76 ;
(of the van of an army, 1 Mace. ix. 11; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,
23; Polyb.). [Cf. épyouas, fin.]*
mpés, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from mpd and the
adverbial suffix r, (cf. the German vor .. . hin [Curtius
§ 381]); it is joined
I. with the AccusATIVE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denot-
ing direction towards a thing, or position and state
looking towards a thing (W. § 49 h. p. 404 (378)); it is
used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a
movement is directed: mpés twa or m1, a. prop.
after verbs of going, departing, running, com-
ing, etc.: dyw, Jn. xi. 15; dvaBaivw, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx.
17; Acts xv. 2; dvaxdunta, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xviii. 21;
dvépxopar, Gal. i. 17 [L. Tr mrg. drépy.]; drépxopas, Mt.
xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc. ; mpos éavrdy, to his house,
Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the vs.; Tr reads
541
pos
mp. aurév; some connect the phrase w. Oavpatar (see 2 b.
below)]; Jn. xx. 10 ['T Tr airovs, WH air. (cf. s. v. abrot
sub fin.)]; yiveoOat mpds tia, to come to one, 1 Co. ii. 3;
xvi. 10; dcamepaw, Lk. xvi. 26 ; eyyitw, Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xix.
29; eloépxoua, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 28; Acts x. 3; [mpds r.
Avéiay, into the house of L. Acts xvi. 40 (Ree. eis)];
etc.; Rev. iii. 20; elamopevopa, Acts xxviii. 30; éxmoped-
ona, Mt. iii.5; Mk. i. 5; eLépyouat, Jn. xviii. 29, 38; 2 Co.
viii. 17; Heb. xiii. 13; émorpepo, to turn (one’s self),
Acts ix. 40; 2 Co. iii. 16; 1 Th.i. 9; emovvayerOa, Mk.
i. 33; €pxouat, Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15, and often; Fw, Jn. vi.
37; Acts xxviii. 23 [Rec.]; xaraBaivw, Acts x. 21; xiv.
11; Rev. xii. 12; peraBaiva, Jn. xiii. 1; dp6pitw, Lk. xxi.
38; mapayivopa, Mt. iii. 13; Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; xi.
6; [xxii. 52 Tdf.]; mopevoua, Mt. x. 6; Lk. xi. 5; Jn. xiv.
12, etc.; cuvayerOa, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi.
30; vil. 1; ourtpexew, Acts iii. 11; imdyw, Mt. xxvi. 18;
Mk. v.19; Jn. vii. 33; xiii. 3; xvi. 5,10,16 [T Tr WH
om. L br. the cl.], 17; xarevOvvew tyv 6d6v, 1 Th. iii. 11;
also after [kindred] nouns: eigodos, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1; mpoo-
aywyn, Eph. ii. 18. after verbs of moving, lead-
ing, sending, drawing, bringing, directing:
ayo, Mk. xi. 7[ RL]; Lk. xviii.40; Jn. i. 42 (43) ; [xviii
13LT Tr WH]; Acts ix. 27, etce.; amayo, Mt. xxvi. 57
[R. V. to the house of C. (cf. Acts xvi. 40 above)]; Mk.
xiv. 53; Jn. xviii. 13 [RG]; Acts xxiii. 17; 1 Co. xii.
2; [eéayw €ws mpds (see éws, II. 2c.), Lk. xxiv. 50 L txt.
T Tr WH]; xaracipw, Lk. xii. 58; dpmatw, Rev. xii. 5;
Axvo, Jn. xii. 32; mapadapBave, Jn. xiv.3; depw, Mk. i.
32; ix. 17,19, 20; [xi.7TTrWH]; séumoa, Lk. vii. 6
[not T WH], 19; Acts xxv. 21[L T Tr WH avar-], ete.
(see réur@) ; avaréure, Lk. xxiii. 7,15 ; arooréAdw, Mt.
xxili. 34, ete. (see aroareAXa, 1 b. and d.); otpedouat,
Lk. vii. 44; xxiii. 28. after verbs of falling: mimrew
mpos Tovs médas twos, Mk. v. 22; vii. 25; [Actsv.10 LT
Tr WH]; Rev. i. 17. after other verbs and substan-
tives with which the idea of direction is connected: as
émurtod mpds tiva, Acts ix. 2; xxii. 5; 2Co. ili. 1; évrodn,
Acts xvii. 15 ; dvadeséts, Lk. i. 80; xaumtw 7a ydvata, Eph.
iii. 14; exmerdvvvpe tas xeipas, Ro. x. 21 (fr. Is. lxv. 2);
mpécamov mpos mpdcwrov, face (turned) to face, i. e. in
immediate presence, 1 Co. xiii. 12 (after the Hebr., Gen.
xxxii. 80; Judges vi. 22); ordpa mpds ordpa, mouth
(turned) to mouth, i. e. in each other’s presence, 2 Jn.
12; 3 Jn. 14, (see ordua, 1) ; Aadeiv rpos 76 ods, the mouth
being put to the ear, Lk. xii. 3. after verbs of adding,
joining to: mpooriOévat twa mpos Tods marépas, to lay
one unto, i.e. bury him by the side of, his fathers, Acts
xiii. 36 (after the Hebr., 2 K. xxii. 20; Judg. ii. 10);
Odrrewy twa mpds twa, Acts v.10. after verbs of saying
(because speech is directed towards some one), invok-
ing, swearing, testifying, making known: w.
an ace. of the pers., dvolyw rd ordua, 2 Co. vi. 11; edov,
Lk.i. 13, and very often by Luke; Jn. iv. 48; vii. 3, etc. ;
Heb. i. 13; Aadéw, LK. i. 19, 55; ii. 18, ete.; 1 Th. ii. 2;
Heb. v. 5; xi. 18; Aeyo, Lk. v. 36, etc.; Jn. ii. 3; iv. 15,
etc.; Heb. vii. 21; @nyi, Lk. xxii. 70; Acts ii. 38 [RG];
x. 28, etc.; Scadeyopar, Acts xxiv. 12; amoxpivopa, Lk
™ pos
iv. 4; Acts iii. 12; déouar, Acts viii. 24; Bodw, Lk. xviii.
7[RGL]; aipew pavny, Acts iv. 24; evxoua, 2 Co. xiii.
7; duvut, Lk. i. 73; paprvs eijyt, Acts xiii. 31; xxii. 15;
dnenyopew, Acts xii. 21; katnyopew, to accuse to, bring, as
it were, to the judge by accusation, Jn. v. 45; eupavifa,
Acts xxiii. 22; yrwpiterar, be made known unto, Phil. iv.
6. also after [kindred] substantives [and phrases]:
drodoyia, addressed unto one, Acts xxii. 1; Adyos, 2 Co.
i. 18; Adyos mapaxAngews, Acts xiii. 15; 6 Adyos yiverat
mpos twa, Jn. x. 35 (Gen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 115 xiii. 8;
Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1); yiverat povn, Acts vii. 31 Rec.; x.
13, 15; yiverar emayyeXia, Acts xiii. 32 and Ree. in xxvi.
6 [where L T Tr WH eis]; mpocevyn, Ro. xv. 30; denots,
Ro. x. 1; mpoogepew Senoes, Heb. v. 7. mpdos adddAndovs
after avtiBadXew Adyous, Lk. xxiv. 17; Stadadeiv, Lk. vi.
11; dtadéyeoOa, Mk. ix. 34; dcadoyiferOa, Mk. viii. 16 ;
eiweiv, Lk. ii. 15 [(L mrg. T WH dadeiv)]; xxiv. 32; Jn.
xvi. 17; xix. 24; Aéyew, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. viii. 25; Jn. iv.
33; Acts xxviii. 4; duedeiv, Lk. xxiv. 14; cvdAadeiv, Lk.
iv. 36. mpds éavtovs i. q. mpos adAnAovs: after cu¢nreiv,
Mk. i. 27[(T WH txt. read simply avdrovs (as subj.) ]; ix.
16; Lk. xxii. 23; etwetv, Mk. xii. 7; Jn. xii. 19; Aeyerv, Mk.
xvi. 3; dyavaxreiv, [R. V. had indignation among them-
selves, saying], Mk. xiv. 4 T WH (cf. Tr) ; see 2 b. be-
low. b. of a time drawing fowards a given time
[ef. f. below]: mpos éomépay éoriv, towards evening, Lk.
xxiv. 29 (Gen. viii.11; Zech. xiv. 7; Plato de rep. 1 p.
328 a.; Joseph. antt.5, 4, 3; mpds muepav, Xen. anab. 4,
5, 21; Plato, conviv. p. 223 ¢c.); [mpos caBBarov, Mk. xv.
42 L Tr txt.]. c. metaph. of mental direction, with
words denoting desires and emotions of the mind, to,
towards: évderxview mpadryta, Tit. iii. 2; paxpoOvpeiv, 1
Th. v. 14; Amos, 2 Tim. ii. 24; €yOpa, Lk. xxiii. 125; rrezroi-
Onow éxewv, 2 Co. iii. 45 [Amida ey. Acts xxiv. 15 Tdf.];
miotts, 1 Th.i. 8; mappyoia, 2 Co. vii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 21; v.
14; with verbs signifying the mode of bearing one’s self
towards a pers., epyaferOa 76 ayaddv, Gal. vi. 10; mroveiv
ra aura, Eph. vi. 9 (Xen. mem. 1,1,6). of a hostile
direction, against; so after avrayavitecOa, Heb. xii. 4;
orjvat, Eph. vi. 11; Aaxri¢ev, Acts ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14,
(see xévrpov, 2) ; maAn, Eph. vi. 12; payeoOa, Jn. vi. 52;
Staxpivopa, Acts xi. 2; yoyyvopds, Acts vi. 1; BAaogdnyia,
Rey. xiii. 6 5 mexpaiveoOat, Col. ili. 19; exew m1, Acts xxiv.
19; €yew Cyrnua, xxv. 19; poudny, Col. iii. 13; mpaypa,
1 Co. vi. 1; Adyov (see Adyos, I. 6), Acts xix. 38; ¢yew
mpos twa, to have something to bring against one [R. V.
wherewith to answer], 2 Co. v.12; ra [which Tr txt. WH
om.] mpds twa, the things to be said against one, Acts
xxiii. 30 [RG Tr WH; here may be added zpos mr-
cporny capkés, against (i.e. to check) the indulgence of the
Jlesh, Col. ii. 23 (see rAnopovn) }. d. of the issue
or end to which anything tends or leads: 4 daOéveta ov
€ort pos Oavarov, Jn. xi. 4; dyapravev, duaptia mpos Odva-
tov, 1 Jn. vy. 16 sq.; & orpeBdovar mpos thy idiav airav
ar@Aeav, 2 Pet. iii. 16; 7a pos rHv eipnyny sc. dvra, —
now, the things which tend to the restoration of peace
[A. V. conditions of peace], Lk. xiv. 32; now, which tend
to the attainment of safety [A.V. which belong unto
542
l4
T pos
peace], Lk. xix. 42; ra mpos (anv kai evoeBeay, [A. V.
that pertain unto], 2 Pet. i. 3; mpas dd€av rO Ged, 2 Co. i.
20; rod xupiov, 2 Co. viii. 19. e. of an intended
end or purpose: mpds vovdeiay tivds, 1 Co. x. 11;
as other exx. add, Mt. xxvi. 12; Ro. iii. 26; xv. 2; 1Co.
vi. 5; vii. 35; xii. 7; xiv. 12, 26; xv. 34; 2Co.iv. 6; vii.
33; *xi. 83. Eph. iv: 125: 1 Timi a6s) pMlebayil, 11 six:
13; mpos ri, to what end, for what intent, Jn. xiii. 28;
mpos thy €Xenuoovynv, for the purpose of asking alms,
Acts ili. 10; mpos 76 with an inf. in order to, etc.: Mt.
Vi 28 soVL. Lec xin 805 snl Oka Mk ios
2 Co. iii. 13; Eph. vi. 11; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8, also
RG in Jas. iii. 3. f. of the time for whicha
thing has been, as it were, appointed, i.e. during
which it will last; where we use our for (Germ. fiir or
auf) [cf. b. above]: mpéos carpdv (Lat. ad tempus, Cic. de
off. 1,8, 27; de amicitia 15, 53; Liv. 21, 25, 14), i.e. for
a season, for a while, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; mpos
katpov @pas, [R. V. for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17; mpos
épay, for a short time, for an hour, Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8;
Gal. ii. 5; Philem. 15; mpos ddiyas qyépas, Heb. xii. 10;
mpos to mapov, for the present, ibid. 11 (Thue. 2, 22;
Plato legg. 5 p. 736 a.; Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 1; Hdian. 1,
3, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; Dio Cass. 41, 15); mpos ddtyov, for
a little time, Jas.iv 14 (Leian. dial. deor.18,1; Aelian
v. h. 12, 63). 2. it is used of close proximity
—the idea of direction, though not entirely lost, being
more or less weakened ; a. answering to our at or by
(Germ. an); after verbs of fastening, adhering,
moving (to): dedéc@ar mpos tHv Ovpav, Mk. xi. 4; mpoo-
codr\acba, Mk. x. 7 RG Tr (inmrg. br.); Eph. v.31 RG
WH txt. ; mpooxérrew, Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11; xeioOat, i. q.
to be brought near to, Mt. iii. 10; Lk. iii. 9, [(ef. 2 Mace.
iv. 33)]; reOevas, Acts iii. 2; [iv. 37 Tdf. (al. rapa) ]; add,
BeBAnoda, Lk. xvi. 20; ra mpds thy Ovpay, the fore-court
[see Avpa, a.], Mk. ii. 2; efvae mpos tv Oadaccav (prop.
towards the sea [A. V. by the sea]), Mk. iv. 1; Oeppai-
verOat mpos TO Has, turned to the light [R. V. in the light],
Mk. xiv. 54; xaOjoda mpds ro has, Lk. xxii. 56 ; eiornxet
mpos TO pynpetov, Jn. xx. 11 Rec.; ef. Fritzsche on Mk.
p- 201 sq. b. i. q. (Lat. apud) with, with the ace. of a
person, after verbs of remaining, dwelling, tarry-
ing, ete. (which require one to be conceived of as always
turned towards one), cf. Fritzsche u.s.: after eivar, Mt.
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19; xiv.49; Lk. ix.41; Jn.i.1sq.;
tne. 2." Th. 4 eh Sis a 10%
xii. 20; 2Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20;
1.26; Scapeverv, Gal. ii.5; mapapévew, 1 Co. xvi.6; ere
pevery, ibid. 7; Gal.i.18; KxadeCecOa, Mt. xxvi.55 [RG
L Tr br.]; évdnpeiv, 2 Co. v.8; Kkaréxew twa mpos éavtor,
Philem. 13. mpos epavrov, etc., (apud animum meum),
with myself, ete., (2 Mace. xi. 13; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are
given in Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1157; [L. and S. s. v. C. I. 5)),
ovddoyiCouat, Lk. xx. 5; mpooevxouat. Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf.
om. pds é., Grsb. connects it with orabeis]; adyavakreiy,
Mk. xiv. 4 [(cf. 1a. fin.) ; Aavpacer, Lk. xxiv. 12 (ace. to
some; see above, 1 a. ad init.) ]. Further, roveiy te mpds
twa, Mt. xxvi. 18; €xw xapw mpds twa, Acts ii. 47; Kave
mapeivat, Acts
mapovoia, Phil.
7 POs
xnHa éy. mp. t. to have whereof to glory with one (prop.
turned ‘toward’ one), Ro. iv. 2; mapaxAnrov mpés tiva, 1
Jn. ii. 1. 3. of relation or reference to any
person or thing; thus a. of fitness: joined to
adjectives, dyaOdés, Eph.iv. 29; €rowos, Tit. iii. 1; 1 Pet.
ii. 153 txavds,2Co.ii.16; Suvards,2Co.x. 4; e&npti-
opevos, 2 Tim. iii. 17; @eAmos, 1 ‘Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim.
ili. 16; aOdxepos, Tit. i. 16; avevOeros, Acts xxvii. 12;
Xeuxds, white and so ready for, Jn. iv. 353 ra mpds TH
xpetay sc. avdyxara, [R. V. such things as we needed], Acts
Xxviii. 10. b. of the relation or close connec-
tion entered (or to be entered) into by one person
with another: mepiurareiv mpds (Germ. im Verkehr mit,
[in intercourse with (A. V. toward)]; ef. Bnhdy. p. 265;
Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1157°; [L. and S. s. v. C. I.5]) twa,
Col. iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; dvaorpeperOa, 2 Co. i. 12; of
ethical relationship (where we use with), dovppewvos mpods
aAAnAovs, Acts xxviii. 25; kowwvia, cupparnorts mpds Twa
or rt, 2 Co. vi. 15 sq.; elpnunv €xew [see eipnyn, 5], Ro. v.
1; cuveidnow éxew mpos tov Oedv, Acts xxiv. 16 ; diaOnKny
évréANomat pds twa, Heb. ix. 20 [see évréAAa, fin.]; dca-
Onxnv ScatiOnus, Acts iii. 25, (in Grk. writ. cuvOnxas, omov-
das, cuppaxiav rovetcOat mpds twa, and similar expres-
sions; cf. Passow [or L. and S.] u.s.); py ramewaon...
mpos jpas, in my relation to you [R. V. before], 2 Co. xii.
21; mpos dv npiv 6 Adyos (see Adyos, II. 5), Heb. iv. 13.
Here belongs also 2 Co. iv. 2 [A. V. to every man’s con-
science |. c. with regard to (any person or thing),
with respect to, as to; after verbs of saying: mpds twa,
Nikescns 12k. xii) > xviil. 95 xix.'9s xx: 19; Ro:x. 20;
Heb. i. 7 sq.; mpos 16 div mpooevyeoOa, Lk. xviii. 1; em
Tperew, ypapew te mpds Tt, Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; dmoxpi-
Ojvai te mpds tt, Mt. xxvii. 14; dvtamoxptOnva, Lk. xiv. 6;
ti €podpev mpos tavra, Ro. viii. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12;
anab. 2, 1, 20). d. pertaining to: ra mpos tov Oedv
(see beds, 3 y.), Ro. xv.17; Heb. ii. 17; v.15 ri mpos yas;
sc. eoriv, what is that to us? i. e. it is none of our busi-
ness to care for that, Mt. xxvii. 4; also ri rpés oé; Jn.
xxi. 22, 23 [here Tdf. om.]. e. in comparison (like
Lat. ad) i. q. in comparison with: so after d&tos (q. v.
in a.), Ro. viii. 18 (ov AoywoOjoerat Erepos mpos avTov,
Bar. iii. 36 (35); cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666; [B. § 147,
28)). f. agreeably to, according to: mpos a (i. e. mpos
ravra &) émpae, 2 Co. v. 10; moveiv mpds To OeAnpa Twos,
Lk. xii. 47; dpOomwodeiv mpos tHv ddnOeav, Gal. ii. 14.
Here belong Eph. iii. 4; iv. 14. g. akin to this is
the use of mpés joined to nouns denoting desires, emo-
tions, virtues, etc., to form a periphrasis of the adverbs
[ef. W. § 51, 2h.]: pds POdvov, enviously, Jas. iv. 5 ([on
this pass. see POdvos]; mpds dpynv i. q. épyidos, Soph. El.
369; mpos Biav i.q. Braiws, Aeschyl. [ Prom. 208, 353, ete. ]
Eum. 5; al.; mpos 7dovqv cal mpds xapu, pleasantly and
graciously, Joseph. antt. 12, 10, 3; [other exx.in L. and
SaisaveCs BIL. 7))).
II. with the Dative, at, near, hard by, denoting close
local proximity (W. 395 (369 sq.)); so six times in the
N.T. (much more freq. in the Sept. and in the U.'L.
Apocr.): Mk. v.11G LT Tr WH [R.V. on the moun-
543
Tpotayw
tain side]; Lk. xix. 37; Jn. xviii. 16; xx. 11 (where Rec.
has mpos 76 py.), 12; Rev. i. 13.
III. with the GENITIVE, a. prop. used of that
from which something proceeds; b. (Lat. a parte
i.e.) on the side of; hence tropically mpés rwos eivat or
bmapyewv, to pertain to one, lie in one’s interests, be to one’s
advantage: so once in the N. T. rodro mpés ris iperépas
garnpias Umapxet, conduces to [A. V. is for] your safety,
Acts xxvil. 34. (Kpoigos eAmioas mpos €wutov rév ypr-
opov eivat, Udt. 1,75; od mpos ris iperépas ddéns, it will
noteredound to your credit, Thue. 3, 59; add, Plat. Gorg.
p-459¢.; Leian. dial. deor. 20, 3; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 30;
Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 19,6; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 659 8q- 5
Matthiae p. 1385 sq.; [L. and S.s.v. A. IV.]; W. 374
(350).)
IV. in CoMPoSITION rps signifies 1. direction
or motion to a goal: mpocdyw, mpoceyyitw, mpooépxopat,
mpooTpex@. 2. addition, accession, besides: mpog-
avariOnut, mpocareAéw, mpocodpeiAw. 3. vicinity:
Mpocedpevo, mpooperw. 4. our on, at, as in mpoo-
xémrw; and then of things which adhere to or are fas-
tened to others, as mpoondw, mpoomnyvupt. 5. to or
for, of a thing adjusted to some standard: mpdcxatpos.
Cf. Zeune ad Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666.
mpo-c&BBarov, -ov, 7d, the day befure the sabbath: Mk.
xv.42R GT WH([LTr txt. rpés caf. (cf. rps, I. 1b.)].
(Judith viii. 6 ; [Ps. xcii. (xciii.) heading; Nonn. paraph.
Toan. 19, 66; Euseb. de mart. Pal. 6, 1].)*
™pooc-ayopevw: 1 aor. pass. ptcp. mpooayopevbeis ; to
speak to, to address, accost, salute, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Aris-
tph., Xen., Plat., al.); esp. to address or accost by some
name, call by name: twva with a pred. acc., and in the pass.
with a pred. nom. (1 Mace. xiv. 40; 2 Mace. xiv. 37), Heb.
v.10. (to give a name to publicly, to style, twa or ri with
a pred. acc., Xen. mem. 3, 2, 1 ; dios IovAvos Kaioap 6 dia
Tas mpagets mpocayopevbeis eds, Diod. 1,4; add [Sap.
xiv. 22]; 2 Macc. iv.7; x.9; xiv.37; gpovpiov.. . Kat-
capevav i” avrov mpocayopevder, Joseph. antt. 15, 8, 5.)
Cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 97 sq.*
mpoc-dye; 2 aor. mpoonyayov; 1 aor. pass. mpoonyOnv
(Mt. xviii. 24 L Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
IPA, Wan, sometimes for 8°27; 1. transitively,
to lead to, bring, [see mpds, IV. 1]: tua &bde, Lk. ix. 41,
tia Tum, one to one [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], Mt. xviii. 24
LTr WH; Acts xvi. 20; to open a way of access, twa
7@ Oeo, for [A. V. to bring] one to God, i. e. to render
one acceptable to God and assured of his grace (a fig.
borrowed from those who secure for one the privilege of
an interview with the sovereign), 1 Pet. iii. 18 [note-
worthy is the use, without specification of the goal, in a
forensic sense, to summon (to trial or punishment), Acts
xii. 6 WH txt. (where al. mpoayw, q. v. 1) ]. 2. in-
transitively (see dyw, 4), to draw near to, approach, (Josh.
iii. 9; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 3, ete.) : rwi, Acts xxvii. 27 [(not
WH mrg.)], where Luke speaks in nautical style phe-
nomenally, the land which the sailor is approaching
seeming to approach him; cf. Kuinoel [or Wetstein] ad
loc.; [see mpocavéxw 2, and mpocayée |.*
Tpocaywyn
mpoo-aywyt, -s, 73 1. the act of bringing to, a
moving to, (Thuc., Aristot., Polyb., al.). 2. access,
approach, (Hdt. 2,58; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 45) [al., as Meyer
on Ro. as below (yet see Weiss in the 6th ed.), Ellic. on
Eph., insist on the transitive sense, introduction]: eis
hv xapw, Ro. v.2; to God, i.e. (dropping the figure) that
friendly relation with God whereby we are acceptable to
him and have assurance that he is favorably disposed
towards us, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12.*
TPOT-ALTEW, -@ ; 1. toask for in addition [ (see mpés,
IV. 2); Pind., Aeschyl., al.]. 2. to approach one
with supplications, (Germ. anbetteln [to importune ; cf.
mpés, IV. 4]), to ask alms, ((Hdt.], Xen., Arstph., Eur.,
Plut., al.): Mk. x. 46 RGL; LK. xviii. 35 (where LT
Tr WH have éera:rav) ; Jn. ix. 8.*
mpocairns, -ov, 6, a beggar: Mk. x. 46 T Tr WH; Jn.
ix. 8 (where for the Rec. rupAds). (Plut., Leian., Diog.
Laért. 6, 56.) *
mpoo-ava-Balvw: 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. sing. mpooavaBnA ;
to go up farther: with avwrepoy added, Lk. xiv. 10 [A. V.
go up higher; al. regard the mpoo- as adding the sugges-
tion of ‘motion to’ the place where the host stands:
“come up higher’ (cf. Prov. xxv. 7). Xen., Aristot., al.]*
mpooc-avakickw: 1 aor. ptep. fem. tpocavaracaga;
to expend besides [mpos, IV. 2]: iarpois (i. e. upon physi-
cians, B. § 133, 1; Ree. ets tarpovs [cf. W. 213 (200)])
rov Biov, Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]. (Xen.,
Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) *
mpoo-ava-rAnpow, -@; 1 aor. mpooaverAnpwaa; to fill up
by adding to [cf. mpds, lV. 2]; to supply: ri, 2 Co. ix. 12;
xi. 9. (Sap. xix. 4; Aristot., Diod., Philo, al.) *
mooc-ava-rlOnut: 2 aor. mid. mpocavebeunv; 1.
to lay upon in addition (cf. mpés, IV. 2). 2. Mid-
dle, a. to lay upon one’s self in addition: péproyv,
Poll. 1, 9, 99; to undertake besides: ri, Xen. mem. 2, 1,
8. b. with a dat. of the pers. fo put one’s self upon
another by going to him (mpés), i. e. to commit or betake
one’s self to another sc. for the purpose of consulting him,
hence to consult, to take one into counsel, [A. V. confer
with], (Diod. 17,116 rots wavreot mpocavabepevos rept Tov
onpeiov; Leian. Jup. trag. §1 euot mpooavadov, AaBe pe
ovpBovrov mover), Gal.i.16. ¢. to add from one’s store
(this is the force of the middle), to communicate, impart:
ri tut, Gal. ii. 6.*
TPOT-Av-EX w ; 1. to hold up besides. 2. in-
trans. to rise up so as to approach, rise up towards: Acts
xxvii. 27 Lchm. ed. ster. (see mpoodyw 2, and mpocayéw),
—a sense found nowhere else.*
Tpoc-arethéw, -@: 1 aor. mid. ptep. mpooametAnodpevos ;
to add threats, threaten further, [cf. mpés, IV. 2]: Acts
iv. 21. (Dem. p. 544, 26.) *
[mpoc-axéw, -@, Doric for mpoonyéw, to resound: Acts
xxvii. 27 WH mrg. (see their App. p. 151; al. mpoo-
ayewv, q. V.), of the roar of the surf as indicating nearness
to land to sailors at night.*]
Tpoc-Satravaw, -@: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. sing. mpoc-
Saravnsys, lo spend besides [ef. mpds, IV. 2], Vulg. super-
erogo: m1, Lk. x. 35. (Leian., Themist.) *
544
Tpocepyalouar
mpoo-Séonar; depon. pass. to want besides, need in addi-
tion, (cf. mpds, [V. 2]: mpoodedpevds tivos, “quom nullius
boni desideret accessionem” (Erasmus), [A. V. as though
he needed anything], Acts xvii. 25. (Xen., Plat., sqq.;
Sept.; [in the sense ¢o ask of, several times in Hdt.].) *
mpoo-S€xonat; depon. mid. ; impf. mpooedexdunv; 1 aor.
mpocedeEapnp ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down, to receive to one’s self, to admit, to give access
to one’s self: tid, to admit one, receive into intercourse
and companionship, tovs dwaprwdovs, Lk. xv. 2; to re-
ceive one (coming from some place), Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. ii.
29, (1 Chr. xii. 18); ri, to accept (not to reject) a thing
offered: od mpood. to reject, Heb. xi. 35; mpoodéxovra
eArida, to admit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but
to entertain, embrace, its substance, Acts xxiv. 15 [al.
refer this to the next head (R. V. txt. look for)]; not to
shun, to bear, an impending evil [A. V. took the spoiling
etc.], Heb. x. 34. 2. as fr. Hom. down, to expect
[A. V. look for, wait for]: rwd, Lk. xii. 36; ri, Mk. xv.
43; Lk. ii. 25, 38; xxiii.51; [Acts xxiii. 21]; Tit. ii. 13;
Jude 21; ras emayyeXias, the fulfilment of the promises,
Heb. xi. 13 Lehm. [(Cf. d€xouat, fin. | *
mporSoxdw, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. mpooedéxav (Acts
xxviii. 6); (the simple verb is found only in the form
doxevw; mpds [q. v. [V. 1] denotes mental direction) ; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to expect (whether in thought,
in hope, or in fear); to look for, wait for: when the
preceding context shews who or what is expected, Mt.
xxiv. 50; Lk. iii.15; xii.46; Acts xxvii. 33; xxviii. 6;
Tiva, one’s coming or return, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. i. 21; vii. 19
sq-; viii. 40; Acts x. 24; ri, 2 Pet. iii. 12-14; foll. by
an acc. with infin. Acts xxviii. 6; foll. by an infin. be-
longing to the subject, Acts iii. 5.*
mpooSokla, -as, 7, (mpoodoxaw), fr. Thuc. and Xen.
down, expectation (whether of good or of evil): joined
to pdéBos (Plut. Ant. 75; Demetr. 15) with a gen. of the
object added [W. § 50, 7 b.], Lk. xxi. 26; rod Aaod (gen.
of subject), the expectation of the people respecting
Peter’s execution, Acts xii. 11.*
TpocSpépw, See mpooTpexa.
mpoo-edw, -@; to permit one to approach or arrive: Acts
xxvii. 7 [R. V. txt. to suffer further; (cf. mpds, IV. 2;
Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed., p. 78;
Hackett ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.*
mpoo-eyyitw: 1 aor. inf. rpoceyyica; to approach unto
[xpéds, IV. 1]: with the dat. of a pers. [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14],
Mk. ii. 4 [where T Tr mrg. WH mpocevéyxat]. (Sept. ;
Polyb., Diod., Leian.) *
mpoceSpevw; (mpdcedpos sitting near, [cf. mpds, IV.
3]); 1. prop. to sit near [(Eur., al.)]. 2. to
attend assiduously : r@ Ovotagrnpio (see mapedpeva), 1 Co.
ix. 13 Rec.; Protev. Jac. 23, 1 (where we also find the var.
mapedpeva) ; TH Oepameia Tov Oeod, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 7,1;
rais piorovias, Aristot. pol. 8,4, 4 p. 1338", 25; rots mpay-
pact, Dem. p. 14, 15 [i. e. Olynth. 1, 18]; with dat. of
pers. to be in attendance upon, not to quit one’s side, Jo-
seph. c. Ap. 1, 9, 1; [ef. Dem. 914, 28].*
mwpoc-epyatouar: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. moovetpvacaro
wpooépyouat
(RG Tr), spoon pydc. (LT WH; see epydtopat, init.) ;
1. to work besides (Eur., Plut.). 2. by working or
wading to make or gair besides: Lk. xix. 16 (Xen. Hell.
3, 1, 28).*
mpoo-epxounar; impf. 3 pers. plur. mpoonpyovro (Acts
XXviii. 9) ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. mpooeXevoera, Lk. i. 17 WH
mrg.]; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. mpoonddov and [so L Tr WH
in Mt. ix. 28; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; T Tr WH in Mt. v. 1;
Lk. xiii. 31; WH in Mt. xix. 3; xxi. 23; Jn. xii. 21] in
the Alex. form mpoondOav (see amépxouna, and épxopat) ;
pf. mpoceAndvéa (Heb. xii. 18, 22); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; Sept. for 3p and Wj; fo come to, to approach,
[mpcs, IV. 1]; a. prop. absol., Mt. iv. 11; Lk.
[i.17 WH mrg.]; ix.42; xxiii.36; Acts viii. 29; xxviii.
9; mpoondOov déyorres, Lk. xiii. 31; with rhetorical ful-
ness of description (see aviornu, II. 1 ¢. [also épyouas, p.
250° bot.]) the ptep. mpoceh dav is joined to a finite verb
which denotes a different action: Mt. viii. 2 LT Tr WH,
LON 2G Mix 20k xa OP Oia xivedl D2) ixyved 2oeexvicnl:
xvil-) ¢ RiG]soeix. 165 xxv. 20,22, 245 xxv. 89 TD Tr
WH mrg. (ace. to a reading no doubt corrupt [cf. Scri-
vener, Introd. p. 16]), 50, 60, 73; xxviii. 2, 9,18; Mk. i.
31; x. 2; xii. 28; [xiv. 35 Tr WH mrg.]; Lk. vii. 14; viii.
DAS AAs xs 12, 42-0x. 845 xx. 27; xxii. 36; Acts xxi. 26
sq-; mpooépxoua foll. by an infin. indicating the reason
why one has drawn near, Mt. xxiv. 1; Acts vii. 31; xii.
13 [here WH ‘nrg. wpondGe]; with a dat. of the place
(exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passows. v. 1 a. p. 1190°*;
[L. and S.s.v. I. 1]), Heb. xii. 18,22; with the dat. of
a pers. (see Lexx. u.s.), Mt. v.1; viii. 5; ix. 14, 28; xiii.
SOE MVeNl OX Ve OOS) XVile 149245) vail. dle xis Sie Ks
ZO XKA A 2S EXT 2 Os) XXIVe Os) XXVI My lide G9s) ens
xii. 21; Acts x. 28; xviii. 2; xxiv. 23 Rec.; [with emi and
the acc. Acts xx.13TrWHmrg.]. The ptep. mpoo-
e\@ov aire with a finite verb (see above) occurs in Mt.
iv. 35 xvili. 21; xxi. 28,30; xxvi.49; xxvii.58; Mk. vi.
SB sy eive sto gk xx, 275) xxii. 52; Acts ix See
14. b. trop. a. mporepy. TO Ge@, to draw near to
God in order to seek his grace and favor, Heb. vii. 25;
xi. 6; 1@ Opdvm ths xapiros, Heb. iv. 16; without ro
6G, Heb. x. 1, 22, (in the O. T. mpocepx., simply, is used
of the priests about to offer sacrifices, Lev. xxi. 17, 21;
Deut. xxi.5; with the addition of mpés ded, of one about
to ask counsel of God, 1 S. xiv. 36; with rots Oeois, of
suppliants about to implore the gods, Dio Cass. 56, 9);
mpos Xpiordy, to attach one’s self to Christ, to come to a
participation in the benefits procured by him, 1 Pet. ii.
4 [cf. W. § 52, 3]. B. i. q. to assent to (cf. Germ.
beitreten [Lat. accedere; Eng. come (over) to, used fig.]) :
iytaivovort Aéyos, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [Tdf. rpowéyeras, q. v. 3].
Tpoo-evX 7}, -7S, 7, (mpowevyouar), Sept. for ndon, 1g:
evx7 mpos tov Oedv [cf. apds, IV. 1]; 1. prayer ad-
dressed to God: Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.];
xxi. 223; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. xxii. 45; Acts iii.13 vi. 4; x.
31; Ro. xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 5; Col. iv. 2; plur., Acts ii.
42; x.4; Ro.i.10(9); Eph.i.16; Col. iv. 12; 1 Th. i.
2; Philem. 4, 22; 1 Pet. iii. 7; iv. 7; Rev.v.8; viii. 3, 4
(where rais mpocevyais is a dat. commodi, for, in aid of
545
Tpocevyouat
the prayers [W. § 31, 6 c.; ef. Green p. 101 sq.]}) 5; otkos
mpooevxns, a house devoted to the offering of prayer to
God, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46, (Is. lvi. 7; 1
Mace. vii. 37); mpooevyn Kai denors, Acts i. 14 Ree.;
Eph. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 6, (1 K. viii. 38; 2 Chr. vi. 29; 1
Mace. vii. 37; on the distinction between the two words
see denors); plur., 1 Tim. ii. 1; v.5; 9 mp. rov Oeov,
prayer to God, Lk. vi. 12 (edyaptotia beov, Sap. xvi. 285
ef. reff. in miotis, 1 a.); mpds rv Oedvimep [L T Tr WH |
mept] twos, Acts xii. 5; plur. Ro. xv.30; mpocevyi mpoo-
evxeoOat, a Hebraistic expression (cf. W. § 54, 3; [B.
§ 133, 22 a.]), to pray fervently, Jas. v. 17. 2. a
place set apart or suited for the offering of prayer;i.e. a.
a synagogue (see auvvaywyn, 2b.) : 3 Mace. vii. 20 [ace. to
the reading mpooevxny; see Grimm, Com. in loc.]; Philo
in Flaccum § 6 [also§ 14]; leg. ad Gaium §§ 20, 43, 46; Ju-
venal, sat. 1, 3, 296; cuvayovrat ravres eis tiv mporevyyy,
péyrorov otknua moAvy dyAov enideEacba Suvapyevov, Jo-
seph. vita § 54. b. a place in the open air where the
Jews were wont to pray, outside of those cities where they
had no synagogue; such places were situated upon the
bank of a stream or the shore of the sea, where there
was a supply of water for washing the hands before
prayer: Acts xvi. 13, 16; Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 23, cf.
Epiph. haer. 80, 1. Tertullian in his ad nationes 1, 13
makes mention of the “orationes litorales” of the Jews,
and in his de jejuniis c. 16 says “ Judaicum certe jeju-
nium ubique celebratur, cum omissis templis per omne
litus quocunque in aperto aliquando jam preces ad caelum
mittunt.” [Josephus (e. Apion. 2, 2,2) quotes Apion as
representing Moses as offering atOpio. mpocevxai.] Cf.
De Wette, Archiiologie, § 242; [Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 27
vol. ii. p. 869 sqq.]. Not used by prof. auth. except in
the passages cited above from Philo, Josephus, and Jus
venal [to which add Cleomedes 71, 16; ef. Boeckh, Corp.
inscrr. ii. 1004 no. 2114 b. and 1005 no. 2114 bb. (a. D.
81), see Index s. v.].*
ampoo-evxonar; depon. mid.; impf. mpoonuvyduny; fut.
mpocevéopat; 1 aor. rpoonvédunv; [on the augm.see WH.
App. p. 162; ef. Td. Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hat. down ; Sept. for Sbann; to offer prayers, to pray,
(everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [cf. dénars,
fin.]): absol., Mt. vi. 5-7, 9; xiv. 23; xxvi. 36,39, 44; Mk.
i. 35; vi.46; xi. 24 sq.; xiii. 33 [LT WH om. Tr br. the
el.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk. i. 10; iii. 215 v. 16; Vie D2) ix Se
28 sq.; xi. 1sq.; xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject
the pass.]; Acts i. 24; vi. 6; ix.11, 40; x.9, 30; xaos
xii. 12; xiii. 3; xiv. 23; xvi. 25; xx. 365 xxi. 55 xxii. 17;
xxviii. 8; 1 Co. xi. 4 sq.3 xiv.14; 1 Th.v.17; 1 Tim. ii.
8; Jas. v. 13,18; foll. by Aéywy and direct disc. con-
taining the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk.
xxii.41; mpocedy. with a dat. indicating the manner or
instrument, 1 Co. xi.5 [W. § 31, 7d.]; xiv. 14 sq. [ef. W.
279 (262) sq.]; paxpd, to make long prayers, Mt. xxiii.
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii.40; Lk.xx.47; év mvedpare (see
mvedpa, 4 a. p. 522" mid.), Eph. vi. 18; ev rv. dyio, Jude
20; mpocevyy (see mpocevyn, 1 fin.), Jas. v.17; mpocevy.
with the ace. of a thing, Lk. xviii. 11; Ro. viii. 26 [ef. W.
T™pocey@
§41b.4b.; B.§139,61c¢.]; émi twa, over one, i.e. with
hands extended over him, Jas. v. 14 [cf. W. 408 (381)
n.]; sc. emt teva, Mt. xix. 13. as commonly in Grk. writ.
with the dat. of the pers. to whom the prayers are offered
ch. W2652,/4) 147]: Mit yi Ge eons. 13,\(is, xliv.
17); epi with the gen. of a pers., Col. i. 3 [RG TWH
txt.]; 1 Th. v. 25; Heb. xiii. 18; umép with the gen. of
‘a pers., Mt. v. 44; Lk. vi. 28 [where T WH Tr mre. Tept
(see epi, I.c. y., also imép, I. 6) ; Col. i. 3 LL Tr WH mrg.
(see reff. as above), 9]; mpocevy. foll. by iva, with the
design of, 1 Co. xiv. 13, cf. Meyer in loc. [ W. 460 (428) ];
the thing prayed for is indicated by a following iva (see
iva, II. 2b.) : Mt. xxiv. 20; xxvi. 41; Mk. xiii. 18; xiv.
35, 38; Lk. xxii. 46, [but in Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38;
(Lk. xxii. 46 ?), fa is more com. regarded as giving the
aim of the twofold command preceding]; todo iva, Phil.
i. 9; mepi rivos iva, Col. iv. 3; 2 Th.i. 11; iii, 1; imép
twos iva, Col. i. 9; imép twos Gras, Jas. v. 16 L WH txt.
Tr mrg.; epi twos draws, Acts viii. 15, (das [q. v. II. 2]
seems to indicate not so much the contents of the pray-
er as its end and aim); _foll. by aninf. belonging to the
subject, Lk. xxii. 40; foll. by tod with the inf., Jas. v. 17.*
mpoo-€xw; impf. rpocetxor; pf. mpoceaynxa; [pres. mid.
3 pers. sing. mpocexerat (1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf.)]; ¢o turn to
[ef. mpds, IV. 1], i. e. 1. to bring to, bring near; thus
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down with vady (quite
as often omitting the vavdv) and a dat. of place, or foll. by
mpos with an ace. of place, to bring a ship to land, and
simply to touch at, put in. 2 a. Tov vour, to turn
the mind to, attend to, be attentive: Twi, to a person or
thing, Arstph. eqq- 503; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph.,
Leian., Plut., al.; once so in the Bible, viz. Job vii. 17.
The simple mpocexew rivi (Sept. for wD, also for 1177),
with rév vodv omitted, is often used in the same sense
from Xen. down; so in the N. T. [ef. W.593 (552); B.
144 (126)]: Acts viii. 6 ; xvi. 14; Heb. ii. 1; 2 Pet. i. 19,
(i Mace. vii. 11; 4 Mace. i.1; Sap. viii.12); in the sense
of caring for, providing for, Acts xx. 28. b. mpoo-
€x@ euauta, to attend to one’s self, i. e. to give heed to one’s
self (Sept. for 1W}, to guard one’s self, i.e. to beware,
Gen. xxiv. 6; Ex. x. 28; Deut. iv. 9; vi. 12, etc.) : Lk.
xvii. 3; Acts v. 35 [cf. B. 337 (290); W.557 (518); yet
see eri, B. 2 f.a.]; with the addition of dzé twos, to be
on one’s guard against, beware of, a thing [cf. B. § 147,
'3 (avo, I.3 b.)]: Lk. xii. 1 (Tob. iv. 12; [ Test. xii. Patr.,
test. Dan 6]); also without the dat. mpocéy. and twos:
Mt. vii. 15; x.17; xvi. 6,11 sq.; Lk. xx. 46, (Sir. vi. 13;
xl. 33; xvii. 14; xvili. 27; [‘ Teaching’ etc. 6,3; 12,5]);
foll. by yn with an inf., to take heed lest one do a thing,
Mt. vi. 1; euavr@, pnmore with the subjunc. Lk. xxi. 34;
absol. to give attention, take heed: Sir. xiii. 13; Barn.
ep.4, 9; 7,4.6.[9]; foll. by was, Barn. ep. 7, 7; by the
interrog. ri, ib. 15, 4; tva, ib. 16,8; wa pnore, Barn. ep.
4,13 [var.; ta pn, 2 Chr. xxv. 16]; [ymore, Barn. ep. 4,
14}. 3. sc. euaurdv, to apply one’s self to, attach one’s
self to, hold or cleave to a person or a thing, [R.V. mostly
give heed]: with the dat. of a pers. to one, Acts viii. 10 sq. ;
1 Tim. iv. 1; 1@ émicxdér@ mp. kai TH mperBurepig Kai dia
546
,
Tpoc Kaew
xévo.s, lenat. ad Philad. 7,1; ad Polyc. 6,1; with the dat.
of a thing, pidus, 1 Tim. 1.4; Tit. i. 14; [mid. tyaivovas
Adyors, 1 ‘Tim. vi. 3 Tdf. (al. rpooepxera, q. v. b. B.)]; to
be given or addicted to: oive, 1 Tim. iii. 8 (rpud7, Julian.
Caes. 22 [p. 326 ed. Spanh.]; rpupj cai péOn, Polyaen.
strateg. 8,56); to devote thought and effort to: ra dvayva-
oe xrA. 1 Tim. iv. 13; r6 Ovovagrnpia, [A.V. give attend-
ance}, Heb. vii. 18, (vaurexois, Thuc. 1,15; for other
exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 3 c.; [L. and S.s. v.
4 b.]).*
Tpoo-nrow, -@: 1 aor. ptcp. mpoondwoas; to fasten with
nails to, nail to, [cf. mpds, [V. 4]: ti r@ oravpa, Col. ii.
14. (3 Mace. iv. 9; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) *
TpooHAvtos, -ov, 6, (fr. mpocepxopa, pf. mpoceAndvéa,
cf. B. 74 (64); [W. 24. 26. 97 (92)]); 1. a new-
comer [Lat. advena; cf. mpés, IV. 1]; a stranger, alien,
(Schol. ad Apoll. Rhod. 1, 834; Sept. often for 73 [cf.
Philo de monarch. 1, 7 ad init.]). 2. a proselyte,
i.e. one who has come over from a Gentile religion to
Judaism (Luther, Judengenosse): Mt. xxiii. 15; Acts
ii. 11 (10); vi.5; xini.43. The Rabbins distinguish two
classes of proselytes, viz. prs proselytes of right-
eousness, who received circumcision and bound them-
selves to keep the whole Mosaic law and to comply with
all the requirements of Judaism, and 1ywm ‘4 prose-
lytes of the gate (a name derived apparently from Ex.
xx. 10; Deut.v. 14; [xiv. 21]; xxiv. 16 (14), 21 (19)),
who dwelt among the Jews, and although uncircumcised
observed certain specified laws, esp. the seven precepts
of Noah (as the Rabbins called them), i. e. against the
seven chief sins, idolatry, blasphemy against God, homi-
cide, unchastity, theft or plundering, rebellion against
rulers, and the use of “flesh with the blood thereof.”
[Many hold that this distinction of proselytes into classes
is purely theoretical, and was of no practical moment in
Christ’s day; cf. Lardner, Works, xi. 306-324; cf. vi.
522-533; Schiirer in Riehm as below.] Cf. Leyrer in
Herzog xii. p. 237 sqq. [rewritten in ed. 2 by Delitzsch
(xii. 293 sqq.)], Steiner in Schenkel iv. 629 sq.; [BB.
DD.]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 644 [(whose views
are somewhat modified, esp. as respects classes of pros-
elytes, in his 2te Aufl. § 31 V. p. 567, and his art. ¢ Pros-
elyten’ in Riehm p. 1240 sq.)] and the bks. he refers to.*
arpdc-Ka.pos, -ov, (i. q. 6 mpos katpov wy), for a season
[cf. pds, IV. 5], enduring only for a while, temporary:
Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 25. (4
Mace. xv. 2; Joseph. antt. 2, 4,4; Dio Cass., Dion. Hal.,
[Strabo 7, 3, 11], Plut., Hdian.; 6 mapav kai mpdoxarpos
xécpos, Clem. homil. 20, 2.) *
tmpoo-kadéw,-@: Mid., pres. mpooxadovpar; 1 aor. mpoc-
exaheoapnv; pf. mpooxexAnua; from [Antipho, Arstph.,
Thue.], Xen., Plat. down; to call to; in the N.T. found
only in the mid. [cf. B. § 135, 4], to call to one’s self; to
bid to come to one’s self: tua, a. prop.: Mt. x.1;
xy. 10,32; xvill 2,82: xx.i256) Mik a3) 25) -viliwis wie
14; viii. 1,34; x.42; xii.43; xv.44; Lk. vii. 18 (19); xv.
26; xvi.5; xviii. 16; Acts v.40; vi. 2; xiii. 7; xx. 1 [RG
T™ poo KapTepew
Ei] }xxi. 17, 185/233 Jas. 'v. 14, b. metaph. God
is said mpockadeicOa the Gentiles, aliens as they are from
him, by inviting and drawing them, through the preach-
ing of the gospel, unto fellowship with himself in the
Messiah’s kingdom, Acts ii. 39; the Holy Spirit and
Christ are said to call unto themselves [cf. W. § 39, 3]
those preachers of the gospel to whom they have decided
to intrust a service having reference to the extension of
the gospel: foll. by an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts
xvi. 10; foll. by ets 71, Acts xiii. 2 (where 6 is for eis 6,
ace. to that familiar Grk. usage by which a prep. pre-
fixed to the antecedent is not repeated before the rela-
tive; cf. W. 421 sq. (393); [B. 342 (294)]).*
mpoo-Kaptepew, -@; fut. mpooxaprepnow ; (kaprepew, fr.
xaprepos [‘strong,’ ‘steadfast ’], of which the root is (76)
kaptos for kpartos [‘ strength’; cf. Curtius § 72]) ; to per-
severe [‘ continue steadfastly’] in any thing [cf. mpos, IV.
4]: of persons, with the dat. of a thing, to give constant
attention to a thing, Acts ii. 42 [here Lchm. adds éy (once)
inbr.]; 19 mpocevyn, Acts i. 14; vi.4; Ro. xii. 12; Col.
iv. 2, (rats @npas, Diod. 3, 17; 1H moAcopkia, Polyb. 1,
55, 4; Diod. 14, 87; 17 xaedpa, persist in the siege,
Joseph. antt. 5, 2,6); with the dat. of a person, to ad-
here to one, be his adherent; to be devoted or constant to
one: Acts viii. 13; x. 7, (Dem. p. 1386, 6; Polyb. 24, 5,
3; Diog. Laért. 8, 1,14); ets tT, to be steadfastly atten-
tive unto, to give unremitting care to a thing, Ro. xiii. 6 [ef.
Meyer ad loc.]; ¢» with a dat. of place, to continue all
the time in a place, Acts ii. 46 (Sus. 6); absol. to per-
severe, not to faint (in a thing), Xen. Hell. 7, 5,14; to
show one’s self courageous, for pinning, Num. xiii. 21 (20).
of a thing, with the dat. of a pers., to be in constant read-
iness for one, wait on continually: Mk. iii. 9.*
Tpoo-KapTEepycis, -ews, 7, (mpooKaprepew), perseverance :
Eph. vi. 18. Nowhere else; [Koumanoudes, Aé&. dno.
Se Vall."
mpoo-Keaatoy, -ov, 76, (fr. mpds [q. v- IV. 3] and the
adj. xepadaios [cf. xepadraov]), a pillow, a cushion: Mk.
iv. 38. (Ezek. xiii. 18, 20; Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.) *
mpoo-KAnpow, -@: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. mpocexAnpa-
@ncav; to add or assign to by lot, to allot: mpooexAnpo-
O@ncav TO Iavdw, were allotted by God to Paul, viz. as
disciples, followers, Acts xvii. 4 [W. § 39, 2 fin.; al. give
it a middle force, joined their lot to, attached them-
selves to, (A. V. consorted with); cf. leg. ad Gaium § 10
and other exx. fr. Philo as below]. (Plut. mor. p. 738 d. ;
Leian. am. 3; freq. in Philo, cf. Loesner, Observv. p. 209
sqq-) *
mpoo-KANoIs, -Ews, 7), 1. a judicial summons:
Arstph., Plat., Dem. 2. an invitation: pndév rowdy
kata mpookAnow, 1 Tim. v. 21 L Trmrg.; this reading,
_ unless (as can hardly be doubted) it be due to itacism,
must be translated by invitation, i. e. the invitation or
summons of those who seek to draw you over to their
side [see quotations in Tdf. ad loc. Cf. mpooxAcors.] *
tmpoo-KXlvw : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. mpoweKAin ; a
trans. (to cause) to lean against [cf. mpds, IV, 4] (Hom.,
Pind.). 2. intrans. tiv, to incline towards one, lean
547
TPOTKOTTTW
to his side or party: Polyb. 4, 51, 5, ete.; 1 aor. pass.
mpocexAiOny with a mid. signif. to join one’s self to one:
Acts v. 36 LT Tr WH [(cf. W. § 52, 4, 14)]; 2 Mace.
xiv. 24; rots dixaiors mpooexAiOn, Schol. ad Arstph. Plut.
1027; mpooekAiOnre Tots amogrodas, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
47, 4 and in other later writ.*
mpoo-Khucts, -ews, 1), an inclination or proclivity of mind,
a joining the party of one, (Polyb., [Diod.]) ; partiality:
kara mpookduowv, led by partiality (Vulg. in [aliam or]
alteram partem declinando), 1 Tim. v. 21 [RGTWH Tr
txt.]; xara mpookdices, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 7; diya
mpookXicews avOpwrivns, ib. 50, 2, cf.47,3 sq. (Cf. mpoa-
kAnots.) *
Tpoo-KoAAdw, -@: 1 aor. pass. mpoowexoAAnOnv; 1 fut.
pass. mpookoAAnOnoopa; Sept. for p27; to glue upon,
glue to, (cf. mpos, [V. 4]; prop. Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 4;
trop. in the pass. with a reflexive force, to join one’s sely
to closely, cleave to, stick to, (Plato): w. dat. of a pers.
(Sir. vi. 34; xiii. 16), Acts v. 36 Rec. (see mpockdive,
2); rH yuvacci, Mt. xix. 5 Rec. [al. codkAn@noera, q. v.] ;
Mk. x. 7 Lehm.; Eph. v. 31 L T Tr WH mrg.; mpés ry
yuv. (fr. Gen. ii. 24), Mk. x. 7 RGTrtxt.; Eph. v. 31
RGWHtxt. (Cf. W. § 52, 4, 14.]*
™poo-Koppa, -atos, Td, (mpooKontw), a stumbling-block,
i.e. an obstacle in the way which if one strike his foot
against he necessarily stumbles or falls; trop. that over
which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to
sin: 1 Co. viii. 9 (Sir. xvii. 25 (20); xxxi. (xxxiv.) 19
(16) ; xxxix. 24) ; reOevae mpdok. Tun, to put a stumbling-
block in one’s way, i. e. trop. to furnish one an occasion
for sinning, Ro. xiv. 13 [WH mrg. om.]; 6 dca mpookop-
patos eobiav, [A.V.] who eateth with offence (see da, A. I.
2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats oc-
casions another to act against his conscience, ibid. 20;
Aidos mpookdpparos (fr. Is. viii. 14 for 1) 28), prop. a
stone against which the foot strikes [A. V. stone a
stumbling ], used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard
to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews
that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his igno-
minious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to
their preconceptions respecting the Messiah ; hence they
despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought
upon themselves woe and punishment: Ro. ix. 32, 33;
1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). (In the Sept. for wpin, Ex. xxiii. 33 ;
xxxiv. 12; [ef. Judith viii. 22]. a sore or bruise caused
by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3 p. 97f.;
a hindrance [?], Plut. mor. p. 1048 e. [i. e. de Stoic. re-
pugn. 30, 8 fin. ].) *
mpoc-koTh, -7s, 7, (mpooxdmtw), an occasion of stum-
bling [so R.V. (but A.V. offence) ]: S:dévat mpookomny (sc.
@AXors), to do something which causes others to stumble,
i. e. leads them into error or sin, 2 Co. vi. 3 [cf. W. 484
(451)]. (Polyb.; [for Towa fall, Prov. xvi. 18 Graecus
Ven. ].)*
mpoo-KérTw; 1 aor. mpocexova; to strike against [cf.
mpds, IV. 4]: absol. of those who strike against a stone
or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, Jn. xi. 9, 10;
mpos Aiov tov 7d8a, to strike the foot against a stone, i. e.
TT pooKvAlw
(dropping the fig.) to meet with some harm, Mt. iv.6; Lk.
iv. 11, (fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 12) ; to rush upon, beat against, oi
dvepot TH oikia, Mt. vii. 27 [L mrg. mpooéppngar, see mpoo-
pyyvupt]. év ru, to be made to stumble by a thing, i. e.
metaph. to be induced to sin, Ro. xiv. 21 [cf. W. 583
(542); B.§ 151, 23 d.]. Since we are angry with an
obstacle in our path which we have struck and hurt our
foot against, one is trop. said mpookémrew, to stumble at,
a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the
Jews are said mpooxdwat TO AiO Tod mpoox. i. e. to have
recoiled from Jesus as one who failed to meet their ideas
of the Messiah (see mpéoxoupa), Ro. ix. 32; the enemies
of Christianity are said mp. ro Ady@, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [some (cf.
R. V. mrg.) take wp. here absolutely, and make ro vA.
depend on dmeiOéw, q. v. in a.]. (Exx. of this and other
fig. uses of the word by Polyb., Diod., M. Antonin. are
cited by Passow [L. and S.] s. v. and Fritzsche, Ep. ad
Rom. ii. p. 362 sq.) *
ampoo-kuAlw: 1 aor. mpocexvAtoa; to roll to: ri tun, Mt.
xxvii. 60 [where Lcehm. inserts émi]; ti emi 7s, Mk. xv.
46. (Arstph. vesp. 202.) *
mpoo-Kuvew, -@; impf. mpocexivouv ; fut. mpookuyjce ;
1 aor. mpooexivnoa; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept.
very often for TIMAW7 (to prostrate one’s self) ; prop.
to kiss the hand to (towards) one, in token of reverence:
Hat. 1, 134; [ef. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter-
thiimer d. Griech. § 21; esp. Hoelemann, Die bibl. Ge-
stalt. d. Anbetung in his ‘ Bibelstudien’ i. 106 sqq.]; hence
among the Orientals, esp. the Persians, to fall upon the
knees and touch the ground with the forehead as an expres-
sion of profound reverence, [/o make a ‘salam’]; Lat.
veneror (Nep. Conon. 3, 3), adoro (Plin. h. n. 28, 5, 25;
Suet. Vitell. 2); hence in the N. T. by kneeling or pros-
tration to do homage (to one) or make obeisance, whether
in order to express respect or to make supplication. It
is used a. of homage shown to men of superior
rank: absol., Mt. xx. 20 (the Jewish high-priests are
spoken of in Joseph. b. j. 4,5, 2 as rpookuvotpevot) ; meaov
€mt tovs médas mpocexvynoev, Acts x. 25; twi (ace. to
the usage of later writ.; cf. W. 36, 210 (197) ; [B. §131,
4]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 463), Mt. ii. 2,8; viii. 2; ix. 18;
xiv. 33; xv. 25; [xviii. 26]; xxviii. 9,17 [RG]; Mk. v.6
[here WH Tr mrg. have the ace.]; xv. 19; Jn. ix. 38;
with wecwv preceding, Mt. ii. 11; iv.9; év@mov trav
modav twos, Rev. iii. 9; [it may perh. be mentioned that
some would bring in here Heb. xi. 21 mpocextynoev emi To
dxpov tis paBdou avrod, explaining it by the (Egyptian)
custom of bowing upon the magistrate’s staff of office in
taking an oath; ef. Chabas, Mélanges Egypt. III. i. p. 80
cf. p. 91 sq. ; but see below]. b. of homage rendered
to God and the ascended Christ, to heavenly beings, and
to demons: absol. (our to worship) (cf. W. 593 (552)],
Jn. iv. 20; xii. 20; Acts viii. 27; xxiv. 11; Heb. xi. 21
[cf. above]; Rev. xi. 1; mimrew kai mpockuveiy, Kev. v.
14; rei, Jn. iv. 21,23; Acts vii.43; Heb.i.6; Rev. iv.
10; vii. 11; xi. 163 xiv. 7; xvi. 2; xix. 4, 20; xxii. 8 sq.;
Rev. xiii. 4 G L T Tr WH (twice [the 2d time WH txt.
only]); xiii. 15 GT Tr WHtxt.; xx. 4 Rec.; meowv emi
548
mpocoppive
mpdcwnov mpooxvynce: TO Ged, 1 Co. xiv. 25; minrew emt
Ta mpdcwra Kal mpookuvely TO Ge@, Rev. xi. 16; preceded
by winrew éumpoobev tav rodav Twos, Rev. xix.10. in
accordance with the usage of the older and better writ.
with twa or ri (cf. Matthiae § 412): Mt.iv. 10; Lk. iv.
8; Rev. ix. 20; xiii. 12; xiv. 9,11; also xiii. 4 (Rec.
twice; [WH mrg. once]), 8 [where Ree. dat.], 15 R L
WH mrg.; xx. 4* (where Rec. dat.), 4” (where R™ dat.) ;
Lk. xxiv. 52 RG LTr br. WH reject; (the Sept. also
connects the word far more freq. with the dat. than with
the acc. [ef. Hoelemann u. s. p. 116 sqq.]); évamedv twos,
Lukstivei7 so Reve awa
Tpoo-KVVHTHS, -ov, 6, (mpooKuvew), a worshipper: Jn. iv.
23. (Inserr.; [eccl. and] Byzant. writ.) *
mpoo-Aahéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. mpoohadjoa; w. Twi, to
speak to: Acts xiii. 43; sc. dyiv [some say poi (see mapa-
kadéw, I.)], Acts xxviii. 20. (Sap. xiii. 17; Theophr.,
Plut., Leian.) *
mpoo-AapBdvw: 2 aor. inf. mpocdaBeivy (Acts xxvii. 34
Ree. see below); Mid., pres. mpoodapBavopat; 2 aor.
mpooeAaBopuny ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; to take to,
take in addition, [cf. mpés, IV. 2]; in the N. T. found
only in the Middle, to take to one’s self (cf. B. § 135,
4]: twa [cf. B. 160sq. (140)]; a. to take as one’s
companion [A. V. take one unto one]: Acts xvii. 5; xviil.
26. b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside
[A. V. (simply) take]: Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 32. cS
to take or [so A. V.] receive into one’s home, with the
collateral idea of kindness: Philem. 12 RG, 17; into
shelter, Acts xxviii. 2. d. to receive, i.e. grant one
access to one’s heart; to take into friendship and inter-
course: Ro. xiv. 1; xv. 7; God and Christ are said
mpoodaBeobat (to have received) those whom, formerly es-
tranged from them, they have reunited to themselves by
the blessings of the gospel, Ro. xiv. 3; xv. 7; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 49, 6, (ef. Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 10; lxiv. (Ixv.) 5;
Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 24). e. to take to one’s self, to take:
pydév, [A.V. having taken nothing] i.e. no food, Acts
Xxvii. 33; rpodjjs, (a portion of [A.V. (not R.V.) ‘some’ ]})
food, cf. B. 160 sq. (140), ibid. 36 (in vs. 34 GLTTr
WH have restored peradaBew [so R. V. (‘to take some
food’) ] for mpooAaBetv).*
mpéc-Aniis [LT Tr WH -Anpyis, see M, p], -eos, 7)
(mpocdapBdvw), Vulg. assumptio, a receiving: twds, into
the kingdom of God, Ro. xi. 15. [(Plat., al.)]*
mpoo-pévw; 1 aor. ptcp. mpocpeivas, inf. mpoopeivar; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; a. to remain with [see
mpés, IV. 3]: with a dat. of the pers. fo continue with
one, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2 [here L WH mrg. om. Tr br.
the dat.]; 7d kupio, to be steadfastly devoted to [A. V.
cleave unto] the Lord, Acts xi. 23 (Sap. iii. 9; Joseph.
antt. 14, 2,1); ry xdpere Tod Geod, to hold fast to [A. V.
continue in] the grace of God received in the gospel,
Acts xiii.43G LT Tr WH; Senoecr x. rpocevxais, [A.V.
to continue in supplications and prayers],1 Tim.v.5. _ b.
to remain still [cf. mpés, IV. 2], stay, tarry: Acts xviii. 18 ;
foll. by év with a dat. of place, 1 Tim. i. 3."
amrpoo-oppltw: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. mpoowppic Oncav;
ea Sr,
mpooopet ho
(Gpyos a roadstead, anchorage) ; to bring a ship to moor-
ings (Leian. am. 11); esp. so in the mid., prop. to take
one’s station near the shore; to moor, come to anchor,
(Hat., Dem., Plut., al.) ; the 1 aor. pass. is used in the
same sense (Arr. exp. Alex. 6,4 and 20; Ael. v. h. 8,5;
Dio Cass. 41, 48; 64, 1), Mk. vi. 53.*
tmpoc-odelrAw ; tv owe besides [see mpds, IV. 2]: ceaurdv,
i.e. besides what I have just asked of thee thou owest to
me. even thine own self, since it was by my agency that
thou wast brought to faith in Christ, Philem.19. (Thuc.,
Xen., Dem., Polyb., Plut.) *
mpoo-ox8itw: 1 aor. mpoowybica; to be wroth or dis-
pleased with : rwi, Heb. iii. 10, 17, (fr. Ps. xeiv. (xev.) 10) ;
not found besides exc. in the Sept. for 7y3, to loathe;
Rip, to spue out; V}p, to be disgusted with, ete.; add, Sir.
vi. 25; xxv. 2; xxxviii. 4; [l. 25; Test. xii Patr., test. Jud.
§ 18; Orac. Sibyll.3, 272]. Profane writ. use éyéw, more
rarely 6yOi{w. mpds denotes direction towards that with
which we are displeased [mpdés, IV. 1]. Cf. Bleek, Br.
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 441 sq.*
mpoo-ratw (for the more com. rpoomraia) : 1 aor. mpoc-
émaca; to beat against, strike upon : intrans. mpooémaccav
tH oixia, Mt. vii. 25 Lchm.; but ef. B. 40 (34) n. (Schol.
ad Aeschyl. Prom. 885 ; [Soph. frag. 310 var.]; Byzant.
writ.) *
mpdamewvos, -ov, (reiva hunger [cf. rewdw]), very (lit.
besides, in accession, [cf. mpds, IV. 2; al. (cf. R. V.) do
not recognize any intensive force in mpds here]) hun-
gry: Acts x. 10. Not found elsewhere.*
Tpor-rhyvupt: 1 aor. ptcp. mpoomnéas ; to fasten to [see
mpds, IV. 4]: Acts ii. 23 [here absol., of crucifixion].
(Dio Cass., al.) *
mpoo-rinrw: impf. mpooemimrov; 2 aor., 3 pers. sing.
mpooéerece, 3 pers. plur. (Mt. vii. 25) mpocérecor RG,
-oav T Tr WH [see wizra, init.], ptep. fem. rpoomecod-
oa; fr. Hom. down; prop. to fall towards, fall upon,
[mpos, IV. 1]i.e. 1. to fall forward, to fall down,
prostrate one’s self before, in homage or supplication:
with the dat. of a pers., at one’s feet, Mk. iii. 11; v. 33;
Lk. viii. 28, 47; Acts xvi. 2s Pas (2%) 6; Polyb.,
Plut., al.) ; rots yovaoi twos, Lk. v- Eur. Or. 1332;
Plut.) ; mpos rots wddas twds, Mk. vii. 25. Bato
rush upon, beat against : ty oixia (of winds beating against
a house), Mt. vii. 25 [not Lehm.; cf. rpoomaio].*
mpoo-troew: Mid., pres. ptep. mpoomototpevos (see be-
low); impf. 3 pers. sing. mpooemoeiro (Lk. xxiv. 28, for
which L txt. T Tr WH give the 1 aor. rpoceroujearo) ;
in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; to add to [ef. Germ. hinzu-
machen]; mid. 1. to take or claim (a thing) to
one’s self. 2. to conform one’s self to a thing, or rather
to affect to one’s self; therefore to pretend, foll. by an inf.
[A. V. made as though he would ete.], Lk. xxiv. 28; xa-
téypadeyv eis Thy yi 41) TpooToLovpevos, JN. viii. 6 acc. to
codd. E G H K ete. [ef. Matthaei (ed. 1803) ad loe.]. (So
in Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.; Diod. 15, 46; Philo in
Flace. § 6; [in § 12 foll. by ptep.; Joseph. ce. Ap. 1, 1];
Ael.v. h. 8,5; Plut. Timol. 5; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos.
§ 3].)*
549
mpooTiOnus
mpoo-ropevopat; fo draw near, approach: with a dat. of
the person approached, Mk. x. 35. (Sept.; Aristot.,
Polyb.) * .
mpoo-phyvupt, and in later writ. [W. 22] mpocpjace;
1 aor. rpooeppnga KG L, rpooépnga T Tr WH (see P, p);
to break against, break by dashing against: maidia aro\eis
mpoopnyvis mérpas, Joseph. antt. 9,4, 6; A€ovra mpoo-
pnéas th yp, 6, 9,3; intrans. (cf. W. § 38, 1; [B. § 130,
4]): 6 morapos rp oikia, Lk. vi. 48, [49; Mt. vii. 27 Lmrg.];
in pass. th dkpa 7) Ta KYata Mpoopnacerat, Antonin. 4, 49.*
mpoo-raccw: 1 aor. mpocéragéa; pf. pass. ptep. mpoore-
taypevos ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; 1. to as-
sign or ascribe to, join to. 2. to enjoin, order, pre-
scribe, command : Sept. for 73¥ ; absol. xabas mpoceérake,
Lk. v. 14; with the dat. of a pers., Mt. i. 24; xxi.6 RG
T; ri, Mt. viii. 4; Mk.i. 44; ruiz, pass. Acts x. 33; foll.
by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48; to appoint, to define, pass.
mpooreraypevot katpol, Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger
ed. mpos reray.]) T Tr WH, for the Rec. rporeraypeévor.
[SyYN.: see xeheva, fin. ] *
mporratis, -.os, 7, (fem. of the noun zpoorarns, fr.
Tpolornpt) 5 a. prop. a woman set over others. b.
a female guardian, protectress, patroness, caring for the
affairs of others and aiding them with her resources
[A. V. succourer]: Ro. xvi. 2; cf. Passow on the word
and under mpoorarns fin.; [Schiirer, Die Gemeindever-
fassung der Juden in Rom, u.s.w. (Leip. 1879) p. 31; Hein-
rici, Die Christengemeinde Korinths, in Hilgenfeld’s
Zeitschr. for 1876, p. 517 sq. }.*
mpoo-riOnpe: impf. 3 pers. sing. mpomeriGer (Acts ii. 47) ;
1 aor. mpooéOnxa ; 2 aor. mpoaéebnv, impy. mpdaGes (Lk.
xvii. 5), inf. rpooGeivar, ptcp. mpooGeis; Pass., impf.3 pers.
plur. mpoceridevro; 1 aor. mpooereOnv; 1 fut. mpooredn-
copa; 2 aor. mid. rpooebeunv; fr. Hom. Od. 9, 305 down;
Sept. very often for *)D°, also for 40x, ete. ; Ts
prop. to put to. 2. to add, i.e. join to, gather with
any company, the number of one’s followers or compan-
ions: twa TH exkAnoia, Acts li. 47 [RG]; 76 xupio, Acts
v. 14; xi. 245 sc. r@ Kupi@, or Tois mortevovowy, Acts ii.
41; Hebraistically, tpocereOn mpds trols marépas avrod
(Judg. ii. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 69), he was gathered to his fa-
thers assembled in Sheol (which is n-599 tyr m3, the
house of assembly for all the living, Job xxx. 23), Acts
xiii. 36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies of
his ancestors, buried with them in a common tomb; but cf.
Knobel on Gen. xxv. 8; [Béttcher, De inferis, p. 54 sqq.]);
i. q. to add viz. to what one already possesses: i, Lk. xvii.
5 [A.V. here increase] ; pass., Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; Mk.
iv. 24; Heb. xii. 19 [() mpooreOjvat avtois Adyov, R. V.
that no word more should be spoken to them) ];— to what
already exists: (6 vduos) mpocereOn, was added to (su-
pervened upon) sc. the émayyeXia, Gal. iii. 19 RLTTr
WH; ri emi tun, some thing to (upon) a thing (which
has preceded [cf. emi, B. 2 d.]), Lk. iii. 20; ri émi rt, to
a thing that it may thereby be increased, Mt. vi. 27; Lk.
xil. 25. In imitation of the Hebr. (*)0:) the mid. (in
the Sept. the active also) foll. bj an inf. signifies (to add
i.e.) to goon to do a thing, for to do further, do again, (as
T POTTDEXW
Gen. iv. 2; vili. 12; xviil. 29): mpovedero mépyat (*\D")
now), +e continued to send (as he had already sent),
Ik. xx. 11, 12, (i. q. maduv ameorethev, Mk. xii. 4) ; rpoo-
€Oero Ne kai Ilérpor, he besides apprehended Peter
also [A.¥V. he proceeded ete.], Acts xii. 3; in the same
way also the ptcp. is used with a finite verb: mpoodeis
einer, i.e. he further spake [A. V. he added and spake],
Lk. xix. 11 (mpooOecioa érexev, Gen. xXxxvili.5; mpoobépevos
€AaBe yevaixa, Gen. xxv. 1); cf. W. § 54,5; B. § 144, 14.*
mpoo-tpexw ; 2 aor. act. ptcp. mpoadpapev; to run to:
Mk. ix. 15; x. 17; Acts viii. 30. (From Arstph. and
Xen. down; for 715 in Gen. xviii. 2, ete.) *
Tporpaytov, -ov, Td, (mpoapayeiv [cf. mpds, IV. 2]), i. q.
dor (on which see dyapiov), any thing eaten with bread
(Moeris [ed. Piers. p. 274,1]: dor drricas, rpoapayov
é\Anukas) : spoken of fish boiled or broiled, Jn. xxi. 5
(Schol., Lexx., [Moschion 55 p. 26; Roehl, Inscrr. graec.
395 a.12]). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 697 sq.;
Sturz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 191.*
mpdadaros, -ov, (fr. rps and oddw or oddgw; cf. De-
litzsch, Com. on Hebr. [as below] p. 478; [cf. Lob. Tech-
nol. p. 106]) ; 1. prop. lately slaughtered, freshly
killed: Hom. Il. 24, 757. 2. univ. recently or very
lately made, new: 686s, Heb. x. 20 (so fr. Aeschy]. down ;
piros mpcogaros, Sir. ix. 10; ov« €or wav mpdadarov ind
tov jAtov, Kecl. i. 9). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 374 sq.*
Tporparws, adv., (see the preceding word), lately: Acts
xviii. 2. (Deut. xxiv. 7 (5); Ezek. xi. 3; Judith iv. 3,
5; 2 Mace. xiv. 36; Polyb., Alciphr., al.) *
tpoo-pépw; impf.rpocedepor; 1 aor. mpoonveyka; 2 aor.
mpoonveykov ; pf. mpocevnvoya (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres.
mpoopepopat; 1 aor. mpoonvexOnv ; [see reff. s. v. pépw | ;
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for
2°9p77, also for 81377, W'37}, etc., sometimes also for my
where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 K. xviii. 36
Compl.; 2 Chr. KMIKG ds Or k1Ve 1 2)\s 1. to bring
to, lead to: twa Twn, one to a person who can heal him
or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24;
Vili. 16; ix. 2,325 xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (sc. rua)
T WHTrmrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii.15; pass. in Mt. xii.
22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xvili.24R GT; xix. 13; —
one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14;
Twa emt Tas Tvvaywyas Kai Tas dpxas, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52,
3] (where T Tr txt. WH eicGépwow). mpocdépe tt, to
bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; ri re, to reach or
hand a thing to one, Mt. xxii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 36 [here A.V.
offering]; ti t@ ordpati twos, to put to, Jn. xix. 29; a
thing to one that he may accept it, to offer: ypnyuara,
Acts vill. 18; Sapa, Mt. ii. 11; used, as often in the
Sept., of persons offering sacrifices, gifts, prayers to God
(cf. Kurtz, Brief a. d. Hebr. p. 154 sqq.): 76 066 opdyra
kai 6vaias, Acts vii. 42; @voiav, Heb. xi. 4; Aarpeiav, Jn.
xvi. 2; mpoodépev Sdpov or Sapa sc. rH Oe@, Mt. v. 23,
24; vili.4; Heb. viii. 3, 4; ix. 9; @voiavy, Heb. x.12; plur.,
Heb. x. 1,11; [pass. ibid. 2; @vcias (RG -av) kat mpoo-
opas (RG -pav) cat 6AoKavta@para Kat mept dpaprias, ibid.
8]; 8apc re kai Ovcias imép dpapridy, to expiate [see
treép, I. 4] sins. Heb. v. 1; aiva imép éavrov Kat Trav rod
550
T POT WTOANTTNS
Aaod dyvonudrwv, Heb. ix. 7; riv mpoodopay imép évds
exdoTou, pass. Acts xxi. 26; mpooépew used absol. [ef.
W. 593 (552)]: mepi twos, on account of [see zepi, I. ec.
B.], Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; mepi rod Aaod mepi [RG brép
(see repi, I. c. 8.) ] duapriay, to offer expiatory sacrifices
for the people, Heb. v. 3; rua, se. T@ Oca, to offer up, i.e.
immolate, one, Heb. xi. 17; éaurdv, of Christ, Heb. vii. 27
T Trmrg. WH mrg.; ix. [14], 25; mpooevex eis (the pas-
sive pointing to the fact that what he suffered was due to
God’s will) ibid. 28, (it is hardly to be found in native
Grk. writ. used of offering sacrifices ; but in Joseph. antt.
3, 9, 3, we have dpva kat €pupov) ;_ mpds twa (God) denoes
Te kat ixernpias, Heb. v. 7 (mpoopépew dénoww, Achill. Tat.
7,1; 7 Geo evxnv, Joseph. b. j. 3,8, 3). 2. The
pass. with the dat. signifies to be borne towards one, to
attack, assail; then figuratively, to behave one’s self to-
wards one, deal with one: as viois ipiv mpoodépera 6
Geds, Heb. xii. 7 (very often so in Attic writ. fr. Thuc.
and Xen. down; Philo de Josepho § 10; de ebrietate
§ 16; Joseph. b. j. 7, 8,1; Ael.v.h. 12,27; Hdian. 1, 13,
14 [7 ed. Bekk.]).*
Tpoopirys, -és, (mpds and gudréw), acceptable, pleasing,
[A. V. lovely]: Phil. iv. 8. (From [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down; Sir. iv. 7; xx. 13.) *
t™poc-popa, -as, 7), (mpordepa), offering; i. e. 1.
the act of offeri ing, bringing to, (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.).
2. that which is offered, a gift, a present, (Soph. O.C.
1270; Theophr. char. 30 sub fin.). In the N. T. a@ sac-
rifice [A.V. offering], whether bloody or not: Acts xxi.
265 xxiv..17; Eph. v.23 Heb. x..5, 8, 14,(Sir. xiv. 11;
xxxi. (xxxiv.) 21 (19); xxxii. (xxxv.) 1, 6 (8); once for
mm3n, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7); mept duaprias, offering for sin,
expiatory sacrifice, Heb. x. 18; with the gen. of the ob-
ject, rod oa@partos “Inco Xp. Heb. x. 10; rav ebvar, the
sacrifice which I offer in turning the Gentiles to God,
Ro. xv. 16.*
mpoo-pwvew, -&; impf. 3 pers. sing. mpooepaver; 1 aor.
Tpooepavyaa ; 1. to call to; to address by calling:
absol., Lk. xiii. 12; xxiii. 20 (where L WH add airois) ;
Acts xxi. 40, (Hom. Od. 5, 159 ete.) ; with the dat. of
a pers. [ef. W.36], Mt. xi. 16; Lk. vii. 32; Acts xxii. 2,
(Diog. Laért. 7, 7). 2. to call to one’s self, summon:
twa (so the better Grk. writ.; see Matthiae § 402 b.; [W.
§ 52, 4, 14]), Lk. vi. 13.*
ampbo-Xvos, -ews, 4, (mpooxew to pour on), a pouring
or sprinkling upon, affusion: rod atparos, Heb. xi. 28.
(Eccles. writ. [e. g. Just. M. apol. 2, 12 p. 50 d.].) *
mpoo-pavw, to touch: rwi [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], a thing,
Lk. xi. 46. (Pind., Soph., Byzant. writ.)*
mporwmodnrréw (LT Tr WH -Anurrew [see M, p]), -0;
a Hellenistic verb (derived fr. the foll. word (cf. Win. 33,
101 (96)]), to respect the person (i. e. the external condi-
tion of a man), to have respect of persons: Jas. ii. 9.*
arpocwro-Anmrrns (LT Tr WH -Anumrns [see M, p]), -ov,
6, (a Hellenistic formation fr. mpécwmov and AapBava;
see AapBdvw, I. 4 p. 370° bot.), an accepter [A. V. re-
specter] of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptor): Acts Xe
34. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Chrvsost. ].*
mT poowmodknyia 5
mporwrodnbia (LT Tr WH -Anuwia [see M, p]), -as,
9, (a Hellenistic formation; [see mpoowmoAnmrs]), re-
spect of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptio), partiality,
the fault of one who when called on to requite or to give
judgment has respect to the outward circumstances of
men and not to their intrinsic merits, and so prefers, as
the more worthy, one who is rich, high-born, or power-
ful, to another who is destitute of such gifts: Ro. ii. 11;
Eph. vi. 9; Col. iii. 25; plur. (which relates to the vari-
ous occasions and instances in which this fault shows
itself [cf. W. 176 (166); B. § 123, 2, 2]), Jas. ii. 1. (Ec-
cles. writ.)*
mpdcwrov, -ov, Td, (fr. mpds and oy, cf. wérwmor), fr.
Hom. down; Sept. hundreds of times for 0°39, also for
DDN, etc. ; a a. the face, i.e. the anterior part
of the human head: Mt. vi. 16,17; xvii. 2; xxvi. 67;
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. [ix. 29]; xxii. 64 [T Tr WH om. Lchm.
br. the cl.]; Acts vi. 15; 2 Co. iii. 7,13, 18; [xi. 20]; Rev.
iv. 7; ix. 7; x.13 1d mpdowrov THs yevecews, the face with
which one is born [A. V. his natural face], Jas. i. 23;
mine emt moda. [cf. W. § 27, 1n.; 122 (116) ]and emi rd
npoo., Mt. xvii. 6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; 1 Co.
xiv. 25; [Rev. vil. 11 Rec.; mint. emt ra mpda., Rev. xi.
16; vii.11GLTTr WH]; dyvoovperds trun 76 tpocate,
unknown to one by face, i.e. personally unknown, Gal. i.
22; bereaved of one mpocare, od xapdia [ A. V. in pres-
ence, not in heart], 1 Th. ii. 17; kata mpdowropr, in or
towards (i. e. so as to look into) the face, i. e. before, in
the presence of, [see xard, II.1 ¢.]: opp. to dmav, 2 Co. x.
1; with twos added, before (the face of) one, Lk. ii. 31;
Acts iii. 13; €y@ twa cata mpdcwmor, i. e. to have one
present in person [A. V. face to face], Acts xxv. 16;
avréotny Kata mpocwror, I resisted him to the face (with
a suggestion of fearlessness), Gal. ii. 11, (kara mpdowroy
Reyew Tovs oyous, Polyb. 25, 5, 2; add Job xvi. 8; but
in Deut. vii. 24; ix. 2; Judg. ii. 14; 2 Chr. xiii. 7, avi
oTjvat Kata mpoo. twos simply denotes to stand against,
resist, withstand); ta kata mpoo. the things before the
face, i. e. open, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7. Expressions
modelled after the Hebrew: dpav rd mpécwméy tivos, to
see one’s face, see him personally, Acts xx. 25; Col. ii. 1;
feiv, 1 Th. ii. 17; iii. 10; Oewpeiv, Acts xx. 38 [cf. Oewpéa,
2a.]; particularly, Bdémewv 7d mpdo. Tov Oeod (see Brérra,
1 b. B.), Mt. xviii. 10; épay r. mp.r. Oeod (see dpaa, 1),
Rey. xxii. 4; éupanoOjvat t@ mpoo. tov Oeod, to appear
before the face of God, spoken of Christ, the eternal
priest, who has entered into the heavenly sanctuary,
Heb. ix. 24; in imitation of the Hebr. 0799-58 0°19
we have the phrase rpécwmov mpés mpdowror, face (turned
[see mpés, I. 1 a. p. 541°]) to face (eiddv twa, Gen. xxxii.
30; Judg. vi. 22): trop. Bde se. Tov Beov, see God face
to face, i.e. discern perfectly his nature, will, purposes,
1 Co. xiii. 12; a person is said to be sent or to go mpo
mpoowmov twos (7D °397) [cf. W. § 65, 4 b. fin.; B. 319
(274)], i.e. before one, to announce his coming and re-
move the obstacles from his way, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2;
Lk. i. 76; vii. 27, (Mal. iii. 1); ix. 52; x. 15 apo mpoo.
twos, (of time) before a thing, Acts xiii. 24 (so 1399 in
51
1 pOawTroy
Am. i. 1; Zech. viii. 10; where the Sept. simply mpé [ef.
mp0, b. p. 536" bot.]). mpos poriopov tis yuooeus Tis do-
Ens tov Oeod ev mpocdr@ “Inood Xpiorov, that we may
bring forth into the light the knowledge of the glory of
God as it shines in the face of Jesus Christ, 2 Co. iv. 6
(Paul really means, the majesty of God manifest in the
person of Christ; but the signification of mpoawrrov
is ‘face,’ and Paul is led to use the word by what he had
said in iii. 13 of the brightness visible in the face of
Moses). b. countenance, look (Lat. vultus), i. e. the
face so far forth as it is the organ of sight, and (by its
various movements and changes) the index of the inward
thoughts and feelings: «Aivew 7d mpoc. eis THv yqv, to bow
the face to the earth (a characteristic of fear and anx-
iety), Lk. xxiv.5; Hebraistic phrases relating to the
direction of the countenance, the look: 16 rpéc@mov rod
kuplov emi twa, sc. éotiv, the face of the Lord is (turned)
upon one, i.e. he looks upon and watches him, 1 Pet. iii. 12
(fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 17); ornpitew 16 mpoo. (Hebr. niv
or 0°39 {H3; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1109 on the same
form of expression in Syriac, Arabic, Persian, Turkish)
Tov mopeverOa eis with an ace. of the place [A.V. stead-
Jastly to set one’s face to go etc. (see ornpita, a.)], Lk. ix.
515 moreover, even Td mpoc. Twos eat. Topevopevov eis
with ace. of place, ib. 53 (76 mpdcwmdv cov mopevdpevov
év péom avtav, 2S. xvii. 11); amd mpoowrov twos pev-
ye, to flee in terror from the face (Germ. Anblick) of
one enraged, Rev. xx. 11; xpvmreww twa etc. (see xpurra,
a.), Rev. vi. 16; dvayvéis amd mpocwmov Geov, the re-
freshing which comes from the bright and smiling coun-
tenance of God to one seeking comfort, Acts iii. 20 (19);
on 2 Th. i. 9 see amd, p. 59* mid.; pera tod mpocwrov cov,
sc. ovra, in the presence of thy joyous countenance [see
pera, I. 2b. B.], Acts ii. 28 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11); eis
mpoowmov Tay exkAnovay, turned unto [i. e. in (R.V.)] the
face of the churches as the witnesses of your zeal, 2 Co.
Vili. 24; iva €k moANov mpocwrav . .. dia ToAAOY Evyupt-
o7767, that from many faces (turned toward God and ex-
pressing the devout and grateful feelings of the soul)
thanks may be rendered by many (accordingly, both ék«
moAX. mpoo. and dia wodd@v belong to evxapiatnOy [cf.
Meyer ad loc.; see below]), 2 Co. i. 11. amd mpooarov
tivds (//D >391), from the sight or presence of one, Acts v.
41; vii. 45 [here A.V. before the face; Rev. xii. 14]; ev
mpoooma Xpiorod, in the presence of Christ, i. e. Christ
looking on (and approving), 2 Co. ii. 10 (Prov. viii. 30) ;
[some would render zpecwmor here and in i. 11 above
person (cf. R.V.):— here nearly i. q. on the part of (Vulg.
in persona Christi); there i. q. ‘an individual’ (Plut. de
garrul. 13 p. 509 b.; Epict. diss. 1, 2,7; Polyb. 8, 13, 5;
12, 27,10; 27,6,4; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1; 47,6; Phryn.
p- 379, and Lobeck’s note p. 380)]. ec. Hebrais-
tically, the appearance one presents by his wealth or pov-
erty, his rank or low condition; outward circumstances,
external condition; so used in expressions which denote
to regard the person in one’s judgment and treatment ot
men: BXérew eis mpdowmov avOporav, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk.
xii. 14; davydtew mpdoona, Jude 16 ; AapBavew mpdowros
TpoTaccw 552
(ruvds), Lk. xx. 21; Gal. ii. 6, (on which see Bréra, 2 c.,
Oavpatw, AapBave, I. 4). KavyadoOa év mpooame® kai ov
xapdia, to glory in those things which they simulate
in look, viz. piety, love, righteousness, although their
heart is devoid of these virtues, 2 Co. v. 12, cf. 1 S. xvi.
ue 2. the outward appearance of inanimate things
[A. V. face (exc. in Jas. as below)]: rod avOous, Jas. i.
11; tov ovpavor, rhs yns, Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. WH reject
the pass.]; Lk. xii. 56 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 30); (so in Lat.,
naturae vultus, Ovid. metam. 1, 6; maris facies, Verg.
Aen. 5, 768; on this use of the noun facies see Gell. noc-
tes atticae 13, 29); surface: ris yns, Lk. xxi. 35; Acts
xvii. 26 [on the omitted art. here cf. was, I. 1 ¢.], (Gen.
116 5 xd. Ole
mpo-tTacow: pf. pass. ptep. mporeraypevos ; 1.0
place before. 2. to appoint before, define beforehand :
xpovov, Soph. Trach. 164; xacpovs, pass. Acts xvii. 26
Ree. (see mpooracow. 2); vdpous, pass. 2 Mace. viii. 36.*
mpo-telvw : 1 aor. rpo¢rewa; [fr. Hdt. down]; ¢o stretch
Sorth, stretch out: as mpoereway [ Rec. -vev] adrov trois ipa-
ow, when they had stretched him out for the thongs i.e.
to receive the blows of the thongs, (by tying him up to
a beam or a pillar; for it appears from vs. 29 that Paul
had already been bound), Acts xxii. 25 [W. § 31 init.;
al. (cf. R. V. txt.) ‘with the thongs’ (cf. iuds) ].*
™pOrepos, -a, -ov, (compar. of mpd), [fr. Hom. down], be-
fore, prior; of time, former: n mpotépa avactpodpn, Eph.
iv. 22. Neut. adverbially, before (something else is or
was done): Jn. vii. 51 RG; 2 Co. i. 15; opp. to éecra,
Heb. vii. 27; before i.e. aforetime, in time past: Jn. vii.
50[L Tr WH]; Heb. iv. 6; and RG in 1 Tim. i. 13; also
TO mpdrepov (contrasting the past with the present [cf.
maXat, | fin.]), Jn. vi.62; ix. 8, and L TTr WH in 1 Tim.
i. 13, (1 Mace. iii. 46; v.13; xi. 34, 39; Deut. ii. 12; Josh.
xi. 10; Hdt. 7, 75; Xen., Plat.) ; i.q. our the first time,
Gal. iv. 13 (on which cf. Meyer); it is placed between
the art. and the noun, as ai mpérepov nuépa, the former
days, Heb. x. 32; ai mpér. éemOvpia, the lusts which you
formerly indulged, 1 Pet. i. 14.*
mpo-riOnpr: 2 aor. mid. mpoeGéunv; [fr. Hom. down];
1. to place before, to set forth, (cf. mpd, d. a.]; spec. to
set forth to be looked at, expose to view: Ex. xl.4; 4 Mace.
viii. 11; Ael. v.h. 14, 8; and often in the mid. in this
sense: motnpia apyvped Te Kal xpvoea, his own cups, Hat.
3, 148; to expose to public view, in which sense it is the
technical term with profane authors in speaking of the
bodies of the dead, [‘o et lie in state], (cf. Passow s. v. I. 2;
[L. and S$. s. v. II. 1]; Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 115 e.;
[Kriiger on Thue. 2, 34, 1]); the mid. points to the own-
er of the thing exposed: so with twa and a pred. acc.
Xo. iii. 25 (the mid. seems to denote that it was his
own Son whom he thus “set forth”; cf. viii. 32). 2.
Mid. to set before one’s self, propose to one’s self; to
purpose, determine, (Plato, Polyb., al.) : foll. by the inf.
Ro. i. 13; with an ace. of the thing and év aire [(sic) ;
see avrov| added, in himself (W. § 38, 6; [cf. p. 152
(144)]), Eph. i. 9; [al. (reading év air with L T Tr
WH) render ‘in him,’ i. e. (probably) Christ].*
Tpopnteva
mpo-rpérw: 1 aor. mid. ptep. mporpeydpevos; fo urge
forwards, exhort, encourage, (often so by Attic writ.,
both in the act. and the mid.): Acts xviii. 27. (Sap.
xiv. 18; 2 Mace. xi. 7. [From Hom. down.]) *
mpo-Tpexw: 2 aor. mpoedpayov; to run before, to outrun:
Jn. xx. 4; with éumpoodev added, i. e. ahead, in advance,
[R. V.‘to run on before’], cf. W. 603 (561); [B. § 151,
27], Lk. xix. 4; €ump. with the gen. of a pers. Tob. xi. 2.
(1 S. viii. 11; Xen., Isocr., Theophr., al.) *
™po-Um-dpxw: impf. mpovmnpyov; fr. Thuc. and Plato
down; to be before, exist previously: with a ptep. Acts
Vill. 9; mpovmnpxov ovres, Lk. xxiii. 12; ef. Bornemann,
Schol. ad h. 1.; W. 350 (328); [B. § 144, 14].*
mpd-pacis, -ews, 7, (mpodaiva, i.e. prop. ‘to cause to
shine before’ [or ‘ forth’; but many derive mpodaots di-
rectly fr. mpo-pnuc]), fr. Hom. down; a. a pretext
(alleged reason, pretended cause) : rq mAeovefias, such as
covetousness is wont to use, 1 Th. ii. 5 ([A. V. cloak of
covetousness] the meaning being, that he had never mis-
used his apostolic office in order to disguise or to hide ava-
ricious designs) ; mpdpaow éxew (a phrase freq. in Grk.
auth., cf. Passow s. v. mp. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 1251°; [L. and S.
s.v. 1.3 e.]) mepi ras duaprias, Jn. xv. 22 [A. V. mrg. R.V.
excuse |. b. show: mpopacer ws xtrd. [A. V.] under
color as though they would etc. Acts xxvii. 30; mpopacet,
[A. V. for a pretence], in pretence, ostensibly: Mt. xxiii.
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Phil. i. 18.*
mpo-hépw ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bring forth : ti x Twos,
Lk. vi. 45.*
mpopnteia, -as, 7, (mpopytevo, q. v.), Hebr. 4813),
prophecy, i. e. discourse emanating from divine inspira-
tion and declaring the purposes of God, whether by re-
proving and admonishing the wicked, or comforting the
afflicted, or revealing things hidden; esp. by foretell-
ing future events. Used in the N.T.—of the utter-
ances of the O. T. propkets: Mt. xiii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 20, 21
(on this pass. see yivoua, 5 e. a.) ;— of the prediction of
events relating to Christ’s kingdom and its speedy tri-
umph, together with the consolations and admonitions
pertaining thereto: Rev. xi. 6; xxii.19; 16 mvedpa THs
mpopnreias, the spirit of prophecy, the divine mind, to
which the prophetic faculty is due, Rev. xix. 10; of Aoyou
ths mpodnretas, Rev. i.3; xxii. 7, 10, 18;— of the endow-
ment and speech of the Christian teachers called mpo-
gira (see mpodnrns, II. 1 f.): Ro. xii. 6; 1 Co. xii. 10;
xiii. 2; xiv. 6, 22; plur. the gifts and utterances of
these prophets, 1 Co. xiii.8; 1 Th. v. 20;—spec. of the
prognostication of those achievements which one set
apart to teach the gospel will accomplish for the king-
dom of Christ, 1 Tim. iv. 14; plur. i. 18 [see mpodyo, 2 a.
and cf. the Comm.]. ([Sept., Joseph.]; among native
Grk. writ. used only by Leian. Alex. 40, 60; [to which
add inserr. (see L. and §. s. v. I.)].)*
mpopyredw ; fut. rpopytevow; impf. mpoedyrevor (Acts
xix. 6 RG) and éenpodnrevoy (ibid. LT Tr WH; [1 K.
xxii. 12]; Jer. [ii. 8]; xxiii. 21; xxv. 13); 1 aor. mpoedry-
revoa (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi. 13; xv.7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. i.
67; [Jn. xi. 51; Jude 14]) and éempopyrevoa (which form
ee oe
TpOPHTns
cod. Sin. gives everywh., and T Tr WH have everywh.
restored, and Lchm. also with the single exception of
Jude 14; add, Sir. xlviii. 18; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii.
(xxvi.) 9, 11, 20; xxxv. (xxviii.) 8; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31;
the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms
mpoepnrevov, mpoepyrevaa, pf. ptcp. mpomedyntevxas, Eus.
h.e. 5, 17; pf. pass. inf. mporednretoOa, Clem. Alex.
strom. p. 603; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto’s
prolegg. to his works, I. i. p. Ixxy.ed. 3; cf. [WH. App.
p- 162; Veitch s. v.]; W. § 12, 5; [B. 35 (30sq.)]; cf.
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 268; [Soph. Lex. s.v.]); (apopyrns,
q: v-); Sept. for 83) and x31n7; Vulg. propheto [three
times prophetizo]; to prophesy, i.e. to be a prophet,
speak forth by divine inspiration; to predict (Hdt., Pind.,
Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; a. univ.: Mt. vii. 22. b.
with the idea of foretelling future events pertaining esp. to
the kingdom of God: Mt. xi. 13; Acts ii. 17, 18; xxi. 9;
trepi twos, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 10; emt tu, over
i. e. concerning one (see émi, B. 2 f. 8. p. 234"), Rev. x. 11;
eis twa (i. e. Christ), Barn. ep. 5,6; apo¢. foll. by Aéyov
with the words uttered by the prophet, Jude 14; foll. by
ort, Jn. xi. 51. c. to utter forth, declare, a thing
which can only be known by divine revelation: Mt. xxvi. 68;
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64, cf. vii. 39; Jn. iv. 19. d.
to break forth under sudden impulse in lofty discourse or
in praise of the divine counsels: Lk. i. 67; Acts xix. 6, (1
S. x. 10,11; xix. 20, 21, etc.) ;— or, under the like prompt-
ing, to teach, refute, reprove, admonish, comfort others (see
apopnrms, 11. 1 f.),1'Co. xi. 4, 5; xill. 9; xiv. 1, 3, 4, 5,
24, 31, 39. e. to act as a prophet, discharge the
prophetic office: Rev. xi. 3. [On the word see Trench,
N. T. Syn. § vi.]*
Tpopytns, -ov, 6, (mpdpnut, to speak forth, speak out;
hence prop. ‘one who speaks forth’; see mpd, d. a.), Sept.
: E__ :
for $°3) (which comes fr. the same root as (3, ‘to di-
vulge,’? ‘make known,’ ‘announce’ [cf. Fleischer in De-
litesch, Com. u. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore
prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, cf. iv. 16; hence an in-
terpreter or spokesman for God; one through whom God
speaks; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in d. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309
[B. D. s. v. Prophet and reff. there; esp. also Day’s
note on Oehler’s O. T. Theol. § 161, and W. Robertson
Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]),
one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; I. In
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an
interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or
the pavres), or of other hidden things. 2. a fore-
teller, soothsayer, seer. . II. In the N. T. a
one who, moved by the Spirit of God and hence his organ
or spokesman, solemnly declares to men what he has re-
ceived by inspiration, esp. future events, and in particular
such as relate to the cause and kingdom of God and to hu-
man salvation. The title is applied to a. the O. T.
prophets, —and with allusion to their age, life, death,
deeds: Mt. v.12; xii. 39; xiii. 17; xxiii. 29-31; Mk. vi.
15; LK. iv. 27; x. 24; xi.47; xiii. 28; Jn. viii. 52, 53;
Acts iii. 25; vii. 52; xiii. 20; Ro. xi.3; 1 Th. ii. 15; Heb.
553
Tpopnyrns
xi. 32; Jas.v.10; appeal is made to their utteranes as
having foretold the kingdom, deeds, death, of Jesus the
Messiah: Mt. i. 22; ii. 5, 15,17, 28; iii. 35 iv. 14; viii:
175° xi,13; xii. 17; xili.35; xxi. 4; xxiv. 15; xxvii 56
xxvii. 9; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec.; Lk. i. 70; iii. 43 iv. 17; xviii.
31; xxiv. 25; Jn. i. 23,45 (46) ; xii. 38; Acts ii. 16; iii.
18, 21, 24; vil. 37,48; x.43; xili. 27; xv. 15; xxvi. 22 8q.;
Ro. i. 2; Heb. i. 1; 1 Pet. i. 10; 2 Pet. ili. 2; Rev. x. 7;
in the number of prophets David also is reckoned, as one
who predicted the resurrection of Christ, Acts ii. 30 sq.;
so too is Balaam, 2 Pet. ii. 16 (see BaNadu). by meton.
mpopyra. is put for the books of the prophets: Lk. xxiv.
27,44; Acts viii. 28; xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; ép
Tois mpopytats, i. q. ev BiBA® tev mpod. (Acts Vii. 42), in
the volume of the prophets (which in Hebr. has the title
D'N’2)), Jn. vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40;—or for the teaching
set forth in their books: Mt. v.17; vii. 12; xxii. 40;
Lk. xvi. 29, 31; Acts xxvi. 27. See vdpos, 4. b.
John the Baptist, the herald of Jesus the Messiah:
Mt. xxiv 26>°Mk: vi. 15°; xi0'325 ik 176 xx.'6, whom
Jesus declares to be greater than the O. T. prophets, be-
cause in him the hope of the Jews respecting Elijah as
the forerunner of the Messiah was fulfilled: Mt. xi. 9-
11, 14, (cf. xvii. 11,12; Mk. ix. 12 sq.) ; Lk. vii. 28[RG
T Tr br-]- c. That illustrious prophet whom the
Jews (apparently on the ground of Deut. xviii. 15) ex-
pected to arise just before the Messiah’s advent: Jn. i.
21, 25; vii. 40. those two illustrious prophets, the one
Elijah, the other Enoch or Moses [but cf. the Comm. ;
e. g. Stuart, Com. vol. ii. p. 219 sq.], who according to
the writer of the Apocalypse will publicly appear shortly
before the visible return of Christ from heaven: Rev. xi.
10 (cf. 3). d. the Messiah: Acts iii. 22, 23; vii. 37,
after Deut. xviii. 15; Jesus the Messiah, inasmuch as he
is about to fulfil the expectation respecting this Messiah,
Mt. xxi. 11; Jn. vi. 14. e. univ. a man filled with
the Spirit of God, who by God’s authority and command in
words of weight pleads the cause of God and urges the sal-
vation of men: Mt. xxi. 46; Lk. xiii. 33; xxiv. 19; Jn.
vii. 52; in the proverb that a prophet is without honor in
his own country, Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi.4; Lk. iv. 24; Jn.
iv. 44. he may be known —now by his supernatural
knowledge of hidden things (even though past), Lk. vii.
39; Jn. iv. 19, (rpopnrns dAnOeias eotiv 6 mavrote mavra
eldws, TA pev yeyovdra ws eyevero, TA Sé yivdpeva ws yiverat,
ta d€ é€odpeva ws €orat, Clem. hom. 2, 6),— now by his
power of working miracles, Lk. vii. 16; xxiv.19; Jn. ix.
17; such a prophet Jesus is shown to have been by the
passages cited, nor is it denied except by his enemies, Lk.
vii. 39; Jn. vii. 52. f. The prophets that appeared
in the apostolic age among the Christians: Mt. x. 41;
xxiii. 34; Acts xv. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 29,37; Rev. xxii. 6, 9;
they are associated with apostles in LE. xi. 49; 1 Co.
xii. 28, 29; Eph. ii. 20; iii.5; iv. 11; Rev. xviii. 20; they
discerned and did what was best for the Christian cause,
Acts xiii. 1 sq.; foretold certain future events, Acts xi.
27 sq.; xxi. 10sqq.; and in the religious assemblies of
the Christians, being suddenly seized by the Spirit (whose
mpopntiKos
promptings, however, do not impair their self-govern-
ment, 1 Co. xiv. 32), give utterance in glowing and ex-
alted but intelligible language to those things which the
Holy Spirit teaches them, and which have power to in-
struct, comfort, encourage, rebuke, convict, stimulate,
their hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 3,24. [Cf. Harnack, Lehre der
Zwolf Apostel, Proleg. § 5 i. 2 p. 93 sqq. 119 sqq.; Bon-
wetsch in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissen. u. s. w.
1884, pp. 408 sqq. 460 sqq.] — g. Prophets both of the
Old Test. and of the New are grouped together under
the name zpogp7rat in Rev. xi. 18; xvi. 6; xviii. 24. 2:
a poet (because poets were believed to sing under divine
inspiration) : so of Epimenides, Tit. i. 12.
mpodytikds, -7, -ov, (mpopyrns), proceeding from a
prophet; prophetic: Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Pet.i.19. [Philo de
migr. Abr. § 15, ete.; Leian. Alex. 60; eccles. writ.]*
mpopitis, -dos, 7, (mpopyrns), Sept. for M82), a proph-
etess (Vulg., Tertull. prophetissa, prophetis), a woman to
whom future events or things hidden from others are at
times revealed, either by inspiration or by dreams and
visions: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. ii. 20. In Grk. usage, a female
who declares or interprets oracles (Eur., Plat., Plut.): 7
mpopitis tS aAnOeias iotopia, Diod. 1, 2.*
mpo-0avw : 1 aor. mpoepOaca; to come before, to antici-
pate: avtov mpoepbace éeyar, he spoke before him [R.V.
spake first to him], or anticipated his remark, Mt. xvii.
25. (Aeschyl., Eur., Arstph., Plut.; Sept.) *
mpo-xetpltw (mpdxecpus at hand (cf. mpo, d. a.] or ready):
1 aor. mid. mpoexetproauny; pf. pass. ptcp. mpoxexetpiope-
vos; to put into the hand, to deliver into the hands; far
more freq. in the mid. to take into one’s hands; trop. to
set before one’s self, to propose, to determine; with an acc.
of the pers. to choose, to appoint, (Isocr., Polyb., Dion.
Hal., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. iii. 7; vili.9; Ex. iv. 13): foll.
by an inf. of purpose, Acts xxii. 14; teva with a pred.
ace. Acts xxvi. 16; twa with a dat. of the pers. for one’s
use, Josh. iii. 12; for one’s salvation, pass. Acts iii. 20 for
Rec. mpoxexnpuvypévov (cf. mpoxnptioow, 2).*
mpo-xeLpo-Tovew, -@: pf. pass. ptep. mpoxexecporovnpevos ;
(see xe:potovéw) ; to choose or designate beforehand: Acts
x. 41. (Plat. lege. 6 p. 765 b.c., [Aeschin., Dem.], Dio
Cass. 50, 4.) *
T1p6xopos, [-ov, 6, (lit. ‘leader of the dance’)], Proch’-
orus, one of the seven ‘deacons’ of the church at Jeru-
salem: Acts vi. 5.*
mpipva, -ns, 7, (fem. of the adj. mpupvds, -7, -ov, last,
hindmost; used substantively with recessive accent; [cf.
W. 22])), fr. Hom. down, the stern or hinder part of a
ship: Mk. iv. 38; Acts xxvii. 29; opp. to mpa@pa, ib. 41.*
apwt [WH mpai (cf. I, ¢, fin.)] (Attic mpo [cf. W. § 5,
4d.]), adv., (fr. mpd), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for 1p3,
in the morning, early, (opp. to dé): Jn. xviii. 28 GL T
Tr WH; Mt. xvi. 3 (opp. here to dias yevouerns [but
T br. WH reject the pass.]); [xxi. 18 T Tr txt. WH];
Mk. i. 35; xi. 20; xvi. 9; [mpwi, cxorias ért ovons, Jn. xx.
1]; Atay poi, foll. [in RG] by a gen. of the day (cf.
Kiihner § 414, 5c. 8. ii. p. 292), Mk. xvi. 2; dua mpi,
Mt. xx. 13; émt rd wowi, Mk. xv. 1 [RG]; awd mpwit cos
504
TP@TOS
éorépas, Acts xxviii. 23. Used spec. of the fourth watch
of the night, i.e. the time fr. 3 o’clock in the morning
till 6, ace. to our reckoning [(cf. B. D. s. v. Watches of
the Night) ], Mk. xiii. 35.*
tmpwta, See mpwios.
mpaipos (for the more com. mpaios; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 52), T Tr WH mpdipos (so also cod. Sin.; [see WH.
App. p- 152]), -n, -ov, (mpai), early: terds, the early rain
(Hebr. M71, Deut. xi. 14; Jer. v. 24), which fell fr.
October on [(cf. B.D. s. v. Rain)], Jas. v. 7 [LT Tr WH
om. ver.; cf. W. 592 (550); B. 82 (72)]. (Xen. oec.
17, 4; Geop., al.) *
mpwivds [WH mpaios (see their App. p. 152), Tdf.
ed. 7 mpoivds (cf. I, ¢) ], (for the older mpoios, see dpOpwvos ;
the same term. in the Lat. serotinus, diutinus), -n, -dv,
(mpwt), pertaining to the morning: 6 dornp 6 mp. Rev.
ii. 28 (on which see dornp); xxii. 16 (where Rec. dp-
Opwos). [Sept.; Babr., Plut., Ath., al.]*
apatos [WH mpauos], -a, -ov, (mpwi), early, pertaining
to the morning, (fr. Hom. down); asa subst. 7 mpwia
(in full » épa 7 mpwia, 3 Mace. v. 24; [Diod., Joseph.,
al.]; see dyuos, 2), Sept. several times for 1p)5, morning:
Mt. xxvii. 1; Jn. xviii. 28 Rec.; xxi. 4 [mpwias 78n yevo-
pevns (T WH Tr txt.), when day was now breaking (R.V.)];
mpwtas, in the morning, Mt. xxi. 18 [RG L Trmrg. ].*
papa [so RG, mpdpa Tr], more correctly mpgpa (see
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 142sq.; [Chandler §164;
Etym. Magn. p. 692, 34 sq.; cf. 318, 57 sq.; cf.I, ¢]),
-as (L T WH -ns, cf. payaupa, init.), 7, [contr. fr. mpdetpa
fr. mpd; Lob. Pathol. Element. ii. 136, cf. Paralip. p. 215],
fr. Hom. down; the prow or forward part of a ship [R.V.
foreship|: Acts xxvii. 30; in vs. 41 distinguished fr. 7
mpupva.*
ampwrevw; (mpatos); to be first, hold the first place,
[A. V. have the pre-eminence]: Col. i. 18. (From Xen.
and Plat. down.) *
mpwrokabeSpla, -as, 7, (mparos and xabédpa q. V.), a sit-
ting in the first seat, the first or chief seat: Mt. xxiii. 6;
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 43; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.) *
ampwro-Kdiola, -as, 7, (mp@atos and xducia), the first re-
clining-place, the chief place, at table [ef. Rich, Dict. of
Rom. and Grk. Antiq. s. v. lectus tricliniaris; the rela-
tive rank of the several places at table varied among
Persians, Greeks, and Romans; and what arrangement
was currently followed by the Jews in Christ’s day can
hardly, perhaps, be determined; (yet see Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, ii. pp. 207 sq. 494)]: Mt. xxiii. 6;
Mike xi. 893 Wk. x1.43 ehmain brs ecvaieouesx. 40.
(Eccles. writ.).*
arp&Tos, -7, -ov, (superl. of apd, contr. fr. mpdaros, whence
the Doric rparos; the compar. mpdrepos see in its place),
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for }/w7 and often for 1M¥ and
UN, first; 1. either in time or place, in any
succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely
(i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the
article: 6 mparos Kai 6 éaxaros, i. e. the eternal One, Rev.
i. 17; ii. 8; xxii. 13; 6 mparos, sc. Trav KexAnuevor, Lk.
xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4.N.1; [B. 32
TP@TOS 5
(28) ]), Jn. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30; plur. opp. to of écya-
rot, Mt. xx. 16, on which see €oyaros, 2 a. Neut. 70
mp@rov, opp. to rd devrepov, Heb. x. 9; ra para, opp. to
ta éoyara, one’s first state, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet.
ii. 20; the first order of things, Rev. xxi. 4. B.
without the article: Mt. x. 2 (apéros, sc. of the apostles
to be mentioned); plur., Mt. xix. 30; Mk. x. 31; Lk.
xiii. 30, (on the meaning of which three pass. see ¢aya-
Tos, 2a.); neut. €v mpwrois, [A. V. first of all], among
the first things delivered to you by me, 1 Co. xv. 3. b.
where it agrees with some substantive; a. anar-
throus, and in place of an adjective: mp@rn (sc. nuepa)
gaBBarov, on the first day of the week, Mk. xvi. 9;
gvAakn, Opp. to devrépa, Acts xii. 10; as a pred. LK. 1i. 2
(on which cf. W. § 35, 4 N. 1; [B. §127, 31]). where
it is added to the subject or the object of the verb (and
we often use an adv.; W. § 54, 2; [B. § 123, 9]): etpioxe
ovtos mpartos, Jn. i. 41 (42) (where L Tr WH aparoyv) ;
add, Jn. viii. 7; xx. 4,8; Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. x. 19; 1
Tim. i. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 19; opp. to etra, 1 Tim. ii. 13; 6
mparos éuBas, Jn. v. 4 (the art. belongs to éuBas [G T Tr
WH om. the pass.]); but Acts xxvi. 23 mpdros é& ava-
oracews vexpav is to be translated as the first. By a
later Grk. usage it is put where mpdrepos might have
been expected with the gen. (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 717;
Passow s. v. mparepos, B. I. 2 ¢. ii. p. 1243"; [L. and S.
ibid. B. I. 4e.]; Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. 420 sq.; W.
§ 35, 4 N.1; B. § 123, 14): mpards pov jv, In. i. 15, 30,
(oi mpa@roi pov tatta auyvevoavres, Ael. nat. anim. 8,
12); B. with the article: 6 (7, 76,) mpa@ros (-n, -ov,),
in a series which is so complete, either in fact or in
thought, that other members are conceived of as fol-
lowing the first in regular order; as, roy mparov Adyov,
Actsu. 41; add) Mk..xiv. 125 2°Tim: iv./16; Revi iv;
7; xii. 12, etc.; (opp. to 6 €cxaros), 7 mp. mAdvy, Mt.
xxvii. 64; add, Mt. xx. 8, 10,16; 1 Co. xv. 45, etc.; also
‘the first’ of two, where Lat. usage requires and the
Vulg. ordinarily employs prior (cf. W. [and B.] u. s.):
Mt. xxi. 28, 31 [L. Tr WH dvorepos]; aAXovs Sovdous mA€io-
vas Tav mpatov, Mt. xxi. 36; 7 mpwrn SiabjKn, Heb. viii.
7, 13; ix. 15, 18; 7 mparn, sc. dabnen, Heb. ix. 1 GLT
Tr WH; oxnyn, Heb. ix. 1 Rec., 2, 6,85; 4% mp. ya, 6 mp.
ovpavés, Rev. xxi. 1; dvacraois, Rev. xx.5,6; avOpwros,
1 Co. xv. 47; foll. by 6 Sevrepos, rpiros, etc.: Mt. xxii.
25; Mk. xii. 20; Lk. xix. 16; xx. 29; Rev. viii. 7; xvi.
2; xxi. 19; foll. by érepos, Lk. xvi. 5; 6 mparos, i. q. the
former, previous, pristine: thv mpotny miotw, the faith
which they formerly plighted, 1 Tim. v.12; 9 mpatn
ayarn, Rev. ii. 4; ra mp. épya, ibid. 5. 2. first in
rank, influence, honor; chief; principal: without the art.,
and absol., mpa@ros chief, (opp. to SoddAos), Mt. xx. 27;
Mk. x. 44; opp. to €xyaros and d:axovos, Mk. ix. 35;
added to a noun, principal, évrodn, Mt. xxii. 38; Mk.
xii. 30 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Eph. vi. 2; with
a partitive gen., Mk. xii. 28, 29, [see was, II. 2 b. y.]3
1 Tim. i. 15; with the art., Lk. xv. 22; Acts xvii. 4; of
mpatot THs TadtAdalas, the chief men of Galilee, Mk. vi.
21; tov Aaov, Lk. xix. 47; THs modews, Acts xii. 50;
50
,
TTP@TOTOKOS
tav “lovdaiwy, Acts xxv. 2; xxviii. 17; tis yyoov, Acts
xxviii. 7 [ef. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. p. 208 sq., but see Id-
mtos |. 3. neut. mp@rov as adv., first, at the first; a.
in order of time: Lk. x. 5; Jn. xviii. 13; Acts xi. 26
[here T Tr WH paras, q. v-]; foll. by etra, érecra, or
devrepov, Mk. iv. 28; 1 Co. xv.46; 1 Th.iv.16; 1 Tim.
iii. 10; foll. by pera radra, Mk. xvi. 9 cf. 12; the first
time, opp. to ev ro devrepw (the second time), Acts vii.
12,13; té mp@rov kai, first and also (or afterwards),
i.e. as well as, Ro. i. 16 [but here L Tr mrg. WH br.
ap-|; ii. 9,10; without ré, 2 Co. viii. 5; 2 Tim. 1. 5.
Jirst i.e. before anything else is done; first of all: Mt.
Vir coy kn ye onevaL. 5. by T Tr WE Romarssot
Tim. v. 4; 2 Pet. i. 20; iii. 3; mparov mavrwy, 1 Tim. ii.
1. firsti.e. before something else: Mt. viii. 21; Mk.
VAL AYE vex, MI NS Ie Sok SIGE Sah tse livey sag, yo OI bt
ii. 3; 1 Pet. iv. 17, etc.; before other nations, Acts iii.
26; xiii. 46; before others [R. V. the first to partake
etc.], 2 Tim. ii.6; foll. by rére or kai tore, Mt. v. 24;
vii. 5; xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. vi. 42; Jn. ii. 10 [TWH
om. L Trbr. rore]; eue mparov tuov [Tdf. om. ip.] me
before it hated you, Jn. xv. 18 (see 1 b. a.). TO Tp@Tov,
at the first i.e. at the time when one did a thing for the
first time: Jn. x. 40; xii. 163 xix. 39. b. in enumer-
ating several particulars; first, then, etc.: Ro. iii. 2; 1
Co. xi. 18; xii. 28; Heb. vii. 2; Jas. iii. 17.
TpwTorTarys, -ov, 6, (mparos and iornu), prop. one
who stands in the front rank, a front-rank man, (Thuc.,
Xen., Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.; aorep orparnyos
mpwtoaratns, Job xv. 24); hence, a leader, chief, cham-
pion: trop. [A. V. a ringleader] ris aipécews, Acts xxiv.
5.*
mpwroTokia, -wy, Td, (mpwrdroxos), in the Sept. also
mpwroroxeia [ al. -xeta (cf. Chandler § 99), -xia, cod. Venet.,
Aq. ], for 11133, primogeniture, the right of the first-born,
(in class. Grk. 7 mpeoBela, and rd mpeoBeiov): Heb. xii.
16. (Philorepeats the word after the Sept. in his alleg.
lege. 3, 69; sacrif. Abel. §5. Occasionally also in By-
zant. writ.) *
m™pwtsToKos, -ov, (mparos, tixrw), Sept. for 3133, jirst-
born; a. prop.: Tov viov adrns tov mpwr. Mt. i. 25
(where rév mpardr. is omitted by L T Tr WH but found
in cod. Sin. [see Tdf., WH., ad loc.]); Lk. ii. 7; ra
mpordroxa avtav (gen. of the possessor [(?); adray is
more naturally taken w. Oiyn (W. § 30, 8 c.), as by Prof.
Grimm himself s. v. @ryyavw]), the first-born whether of
man or of beast, Heb. xi. 28 (av mpwrdroxov ... amd
avOperov Ews xtnvous, Ex. xii. 29; Ps. civ. (ev.) 36; [Philo
de cherub. § 16; Poll. 4, 208]). b. trop. Christ is
called mpwréroxos maons kticews (partit. gen. [see below],
as in ra mpwroroxa Tov mpoBarav, Gen. iv. 4; trav Boor,
Deut. xii. 17; trav vidv cov, Ex. xxii. 29), who came into
being through God prior to the entire universe of created
things [R. V. the firstborn of all creation] (see xriots, ?
b.), Col. i. 15; this passage does not with certainty
prove that Paul reckoned the Adyos in the number of
created beings (as, among others, U/steri, Paulin. Lehr-
begriff, p. 315, and Baur, Das Christenthum der drei
T POTS
ersten Jahrhh. 1st ed. p. 295, hold); since even Origen,
who is acknowledged to have maintained the eternal
generation of the Son by the Father, did not hesitate
to call him (cf. Gieseler, Kirch.- Gesch. i. p. 261 sq. ed.
3; [i. 216 Eng. trans. of ed. 4, edited by Smith }) rov ayévn-
Tov xal mdons yevetiis PYcews mpwrdroxoy (c. Cels. 6, 17),
and even xricua (a term which Clement of Alexandria
also uses of the Adyos); ef. Joan. Damascen. orthod. fid.
4, 8 xal airs ex Tod Geod Kat 4 Kriots ex Tod Geod; [al. would
make the gen. in Col. l.c. depend upon the compar. force
in (the first half of) rp@rér. (cf. rpwrdroxos ey 7 av, 2S.
xix.43); but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (esp. for the patris-
tic interpretation)]. In the same sense, apparently, he
is called simply 6 rpwrdroxos, Heb. i. 6 ; mp. €x Tay vexpor,
the first of the dead who was raised to life, Col. i. 18;
also raév vexpav (partit. gen.), Rev. i. 5 [Ree. inserts ex];
mpwréroxos €v ToAXois adeApois, who was the Son of God
long before those who by his agency and merits are ex-
alted to the nature and dignity of sons of God, with the
added suggestion of the supreme rank by which he ex-
cels these other sons (cf. Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28; Ex.
iv. 22; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 9), Ro. viii. 29; éx«Anoia
mpwrordxwy, the congregation of the pious Christian dead
already exalted to the enjoyment of the blessedness of
heaven (tacitly opp. to those subsequently to follow them
thither), Heb. xii. 23; ef. De Wette ad loc. (Anthol. 8,
34; 9, 213.) *
mpotas, adv., first: Actsxi.26TTrWH. Cf. Passow
s. V. mpérepos fin.; [L. and S. ib. B. [V.; Phryn. ed. Lob.
p- 311sq.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 366].*
wraiw; fut. rraicw; 1 aor. émraica; (akin to TETQ
and wimre [cf. Vaniéek p. 466]); fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl.,
and Hat. down; 1. trans. riva, to cause one to stum-
ble or fall. 2. intrans. to stumble: dis mpos tov adrov
AiGov, Polyb. 31, 19,5. trop. [cf. Eng. trip, stumble] ae
to err, to make a mistake, (Plat. Theaet. c. 15 p. 160d.) ;
to sin: absol. Ro. xi. 11 (Woy avOpamov direiv kal tovs
mraiovras, Antonin. 7,22); moAAad, in many ways, Jas. iil.
2; év évi (sc. vdu@), to stumble in, i. e. sin against, one law,
Jas. ii. 10 [but see eis, 2 a. fin.]; ¢v Ady@ (for the [more
com.] simple dat.), to sin in word or speech, Jas. iii.
2 b. to fall into misery, become wretched, (often
so in Grk. writ.) : of the loss of salvation, 2 Pet. i. 10.
[C£. mpoo-maiw. }*
arépva, -ns, 7, the heel (of the foot) : émaipew ryv mrépvav
éri twa, to lift up the heel against one, i. e. dropping the
fig. (which is borrowed either from kicking, or from a
wrestler tripping up his antagonist), to injure one by
trickery, Jn. xiii. 18 after Ps. xl. (xli.) 10. (Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3py-)*
mrepty.ov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of mrépvé, q. v-), Sept. for
12; 1. a wing, little wing. 2. any pointed
extremity (of the fins of fishes, 53D, Lev. xi. 9-12;
Deut. xiv. 9, 10; Aristot., Theophr. ; of a part of the
dress hanging down in the form of a wing, Ruth iii. 9;
1S. xxiv. 5; [Num. xv. 38]; Poll. 7, 14, 62): 16 mrepv-
yrov Tov vaov and roi iepod, the top of the temple at Jeru-
salem, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. h.e. 2, 23, 11; rov iepov, Mt.
506 7
TTVU@
iv. 5; Lk. iv. 9; some understand this of the top or
apex of the sanctuary (rod vaod), others of the top of
Solomon’s porch, and others of the top of the Royal
Portico; this last Josephus (antt. 15, 11, 5) says was of
such great height as ef tes dm axpou tov tavrns réyous
Gude ovrtieis ra Baby Stomrevor cxotodiunay, ov« e&ixvov-
pevns THs GWews eis Guetpntov Tov Buddy; [ecf. “ Recovery
of Jerusalem,” esp. ch. v.].*
awrépvt, -vyos, 7, (mrepdv a wing), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
often for 33; @ wing: of birds, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii.
34; Rev. xii. 14; of imaginary creatures, Rev. iv. 8; ix.
Ee
amrHvos, -7, -v, (reropat, mrqvat), furnished with wings ;
winged, flying: ta mrnva, birds (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Co. xv. 39.*
wroew, -@: 1 aor. pass. émronOnv; (mroa terror); from
Hom. down; ¢o terrify; pass. to be terrified (Sept. chiefly
for NN): Lk. xxi. 9; xxiv. 37 [Trmrg. WH mrg. é@por-
dévres. SYN. see HoSew, fin.]*
TrdyCIs, -ews, 7), (wroew), terror: PoBeicOat rronow, i. q.
poBov oBeicba, to be afraid with terror [al. take mr.
objectively: R. V. txt. to be put in fear by any terror],
1 Pet. iii. 6 (Prov. iii. 25); see poBéw, 2; [W. § 32, 2;
B. $131, 5. (1 Mace. iii. 25; Philo, quis rer. div. her.
§ 51)]
TIroAepats, -idos, 9, Ptolemais, a maritime city of Phoe-
nicia, which got its name, apparently, from Ptolemy
Lathyrus (who captured it B. c. 103, and rebuilt it more
beautifully [ef. Joseph. antt. 13, 12, 2 sq.]); it is called
in Judg. i. 31 and in the Talmud 43}, in the Sept.
"Axxo, by the Greeks ”Axy [on the varying accent cf.
Pape, Eigennam. s. v. Hrodepuais], and Romans Ace, and
by modern Europeans [Acre or] St. Jean d’Acre (from a
church erected there in the middle ages to St. John) ; it
is now under Turkish rule and contains about 8000 in-
habitants (cf. Baedeker, Pal. and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 356) :
Acts xxi. 7. (Often mentioned in the books of the Mac-
cabees and by Josephus under the name of Irodeyais,
ef. esp. b. j. 2, 10, 2sq.; [see Reland, Palaest. p. 534 sqq.;
Ritter, Palestine, Eng. trans. iv. p. 361 sqq. ].) *
arvov, -ov, Td, freq. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, Attic
mreov W. 24, [(perh. fr. r. pu ‘to cleanse’; cf. Curtius p.
498 sq.)], @ winnowing-shovel [A. V. fan; cf. B.D. s. v.
Agriculture, sub fin.; Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. vv. ventila-
brum, pala 2, vannus]: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17.*
awtipw: [(ef. Curtius p. 706)]; to frighten, affright:
pres. pass. ptcp. wrupopevos, Phil. i. 28. (Hippocr.,
Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) *
wrvopa, -ros, TO, (rTV@, q. V-), spittle: Jn. ix. 6 ((Hip-
pocr.], Polyb. 8, 14, 5; Or. Sibyll. 1, 365).*
mricow: 1 aor. ptep. mrvéas; in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down; to fold together, roll up: ré BiBXtov, Lk. iv. 20
[A. V. closed]; see avarricca, [and cf. Schlottmann in
Riehm s. v. Schrift ; Strack in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Schreib-
kunst, ete. Comp.: dva-rricca. |*
awrvw: [(Lat. spuo, our spue; Curtius § 382)]; 1 aor.
érruca; fr. Hom. down; to spit: Mk. vii. 83; viii. 28;
Jn. ix. 6. [Comp.: ék-, éu-rrie.]*
TT Ope.
wraua, ros, 70, (rimrw, pt. memrwxa) ; 1. in Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, a fall, downfall; metaph. a fail-
ure, defeat, calamity; an error, lapse, sin. 2. that
which is fallen; hence with the gen. of a pers. or with
vexpov added, the (fallen) body of one dead or slain, a
corpse, carcase; later also with vexpod omitted (Polyb.,
Sept., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Hdian.), cf. Thom. Mag. p.
765 [ed. Ritschl p. 290,14]; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 375;
[W. 23], and so in the N. T.: Mt. xiv. 12 LT TrWH;
Mk. xv.45 LT Tr WH; Mt. xxiv. 28; revéds, Mk. vi.
29; Rev. xi. 8, 9.
mTdots, -ews, , (rintw, pf. mémrwxa), a falling, down-
fall: prop. rijs oikias, Mt. vii. 27 (rracets otkov, Maneth.
4, 617); trop. els mr@ow modd@v (opp. to eis avdaracw),
that many may fall and bring upon tuemselves ruin, i. e.
the loss of salvation, utter misery, Lk. ii. 34, cf. Ro. xi.
11. (Sept. chiefly for 752°, plague, defeat.) *
mrwxela, -as, ), (TTwXEVw) 5 1. beggary (Idt. 3,
14; Arstph. Plut. 549; Plat. legg. 11 p. 936 b.; Lysias
p- 898, 9; Aristot. poet. c. 23 p. 1459”, 6). 2. in the
N. T. poverty, the condition of one destitute of riches
and abundance: opp. to mAoureiv, 2 Co. viii. 9; opp. to
mAovovos, Rev. ii. 9; 9 kara Babous mrwxeia (opp. to mAov-
tos), deep i. e. extreme poverty [see curd, 1. 1 b.], 2 Co.
viii. 2. (Sept. chiefly for *3y, affliction, misery.) *
mrwoxedw: 1 aor. emraxevoa; (mTwxXOs, q. V.); prop. to
be a beggar, to beg; so in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down;
in the N. T. once, to be poor: 2 Co. viii. 9, on which see
mAovows, b. fin. (Tob. iv. 21; Sept. for 553 to be weak,
afflicted, Judg. vi. 6; Ps. xxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; for wi to
be reduced to want, Prov. xxiii. 21; wi to be needy,
Per xxxiil, (xxxiv:) 11.)*
mTwXOs, -7, -ov, (7THGTw, to be thoroughly frightened,
to cower down or hide one’s self for fear; hence mrwxés
prop. one who slinks and crouches), often involving the
idea of roving about in wretchedness [see aévns, fin.;
“but it always had a bad sense till it was ennobled
in the Gospels; see Mt. v. 3; Lk. vi. 20, cf. 2 Co. viii.
9” (L. and S.s. v. I.)]; hence 1. in class. Grk.
from Hom. down, reduced to beggary, begging, mendi-
cant, asking alms: Lk. xiv. 13, 21; xvi. 20, 22. =
poor, needy, (opp. to mdovovos): Mt. xix. 21; xxvi. 9,11;
Mk, x. 21; xii. 42, 48; xiv. 5,7; Lk. xviii. 22; xix. 8;
xxi. 3; Jn. xii. 5, 6, 8; xiii. 29; Ro. xv. 26; 2 Co. vi. 10;
Gal. ii. 10; Jas. ii. 2, 3,6; Rev. xiii.16; in a broader
sense, destitute of wealth, influence, position, honors; lowly,
afflicted: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. iv. 18, (fr. Is. lxi. 1); vi. 20; vii.
22; of mrwxol Tov Koopov (partit. gen.), the poor of the
human race, Jas. ii. 5; but the more correct reading is
that of LT Tr WH viz. 76 kécpe [unto the world], i. e.
the ungodly world being judge, cf. W. § 31, 44.; B.
§ 133,14; [R. V. as to the world (see next head, and ef.
xoopos, 7)]}. trop. destitute of the Christian virtues and
the eternal riches, Rev. iii. 17; like the Lat. inops, i. q.
helpless, powerless to accomplish an end: orotxeia, Gal. iv.
9 [‘ bringing no rich endowment of spiritual treasure’
(Bp. Lghtft.)]. 3. univ. lacking in anything, with
a dat. of the respect: r@ mvevpart, as respects their
557
mUdH
spirit, i. e. destitute of the wealth of learning and intel
lectual culture which the schools afford (men of this
class most readily gave theinselves up to Christ’s teach-
ing and proved themselves fitted to lay hold of the heav-
enly treasure, Mt. xi. 25; Jn. ix. 39; 1 Co.i. 26, 27; [ab
make the idea more inward and ethical: ‘conscious
of their spiritual need’]), Mt. v. 3; compare with this
the Ep. of Barn. 19,2: €oy dmhois ri xavtia kai rrovows
T@ mvevpart, abounding in Christian graces and the riches
of the divine kingdom. (Sept. for *yy, 99, wr, (3K,
etc.) *
muyph, -js, 9, (wv, fr. TIYKQ, Lat. pungo, pupugi,
| [pugnus; O. H. G. ‘fast’, Eng. ‘fist’; cf. Curtius § 384]),
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for i739 (Ex. xxi. 18; Is. lviii. 4),
the fist: muypq vinrecOu tas xeipas, to wash the hands
with the fist, i. e. so that one hand is rubbed with the
clenched fist of the other [R. V.mrg. (after Theoph.,
al.) up to the elbow; but cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Mes
siah, ii. 11], Mk. vii. 3 (where Tdf. muxva, see muxvos).
(Cf. Jas. Morison, Com. ad loc.]*
TlvOwv, -wvos, 6, Python; 1. in Grk. mythology
the name of the Pythian serpent or dragon that dwelt in
the region of Pytho at the foot of Parnassus in Phocis,
and was said to have guarded the oracle of Delphi and
been slain by Apollo. 2. i. gq. Barpdviov pavrixds
(Hesych. s. v.), a spirit of divination: mveipa ridwvos or
more correctly (with LT Tr WH) zveipa ridwva (ont
the union of two substantives one of which has the force
of an adj. see Matthiae p. 962, 4; [Kiihner § 405, 1;
Lob. Paralip. 344 sq.]), Acts xvi. 16; some interpreters
think that the young woman here mentioned was a ven-
triloquist, appealing to Plutarch, who tells us (mor. p.
414 e. de def. orac. 9) that in his time éyyaorpipvOo were
called riéwves; [cf. Meyer].*
mukvés, -7, -ov, (IIYKQ, see muvypy), fr. Hom. down,
thick, dense, compact; in ref. to time, frequent, often re-
curring, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Tim. v.
23; neut. plur. rukvd, as adv. [W. 463 (432); B. § 128,
2], vigorously, diligently, (? (ef. Morison as in rvypn]),
Mk. vii. 3 Tdf.; often, Lk. v. 33; muxvérepov, more fre-
quently, the oftener, Acts xxiv. 26.*
muKtedw ; (ruKrys a pugilist [see rvypq, init.]); to be a
boxer, to box, [A. V. fight]: 1 Co. ix. 26. (Eur., Xen.,
Plat., Plut., al.) *
avdn, -ns, 7, [perh. fem. of dros (cf. Eng. pole i. e.
axis) fr. r. méA-w to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Hom.
down; Sept. very often for 1ywW, occasionally for ny,
sometimes for MND; a gate (of the larger sort, in the
wall either of a city or a palace; Thom. Mag. [p. 292, 4]
mvAat émi teiyouss Ovpat émi oikias): of a town, Lk. vi
12; Acts ix. 24; xvi. 13 LT Tr WH; Heb. xiii. 12; of
the temple, Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison, Acts
xii. 10; mvAa adov, the gates of Hades (likened to a
vast prison; hence the ‘keys’ of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt.
xvi. 18 (on which see xaricyvw) ; Sap. xvi. 13; 3 Mace
v. 51, and often by prof. writ.; see Grimm on 3 Mace.
v. 51. in fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any
state: Mt. vii. 13°, 13° RG Tbr. Tr WH org., 14 RG
TUN@Y 558
Lbr. Tbr. Tr WH; LEK. xiii. 24 R Lmrg.
omission see mpoBartkds. | *
muAbv, -@vos, 6, (wvAn), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept.
often for N23, sometimes for Tw ; 1. alarge gate:
of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur.
(of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13,
15,21, 25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house,
into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi.
71 (ef. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence 4 6vpa rod m-
Aavos, ib. 13.*
muvOdvopat; impf. éruvOavdunv; 2 aor. émvOduny; [cf.
Curtius § 328]; a depon. verb; as in class. Grk. fr.
Hom. down 1. to inquire, ask: foll. by an indir.
quest. — w. the indic. Acts x. 18; with the opt., Jn. xiii.
24 RG; Lk. xv. 26; xviii. 36; Acts xxi. 33; foll. by
a dir. quest., Acts iv. 7; x. 29; xxill. 19; mapd tevds Te
[B. 167 (146)], Jn.iv.52; mapa twos foll. by an indir.
quest. w. the indice. Mt. ii. 4; ri mepi twos, Acts xxiil.
20. 2. to ascertain by inquiry: foll. by dm, Acts
xxiii. 34 [A. V. understood ].*
wip, gen. mupos, To, [prob. fr. Skr. pu ‘to purify’ (cf.
Germ. feuer); Vaniéek p. 541; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom.
down; Hebr. ws; jire: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii.19; xvii. 15;
Mk, ix. 22; Lk. iii. 9, 175 ix.545 Jn: xv. 6 ;) Actsii: 193
XXViii. 5; 1 Co. iii. 13; Heb. xi. 34; Jas. ili. 5; v. 3; Rev.
Aes fae te thee eG ula = anh, Bye Soha Is Bde 27e oan
8; xx. 9; dmrew wip, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr
txt. WH aepiaar.]; e8peEe mip kal Oeiov, Lk. xvii. 29;
karaxaiew te ev ['Tom. WH br. ev] mupi, Rev. xvii. 16;
xviii. 8; xaiouae wupi, Mt. xiii. 40 [R LT WH xarak.] ;
Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; xxi.8; proé
mupos, a fiery flame or flame of fire, Acts vii. 30; 2 Th.
Ip Se extaelurtxt.5) Leb: Moet smweVerl. 4c a1. MSis exaxe 112%
(Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex.; Is. xxix. 6); mip doyés, a flam-
ing fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i.8 RGLmre. T Trmre.
WH (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat.; Sir. xlv. 19); Aaumades rupos,
lamps of fire, Rev. iv. 5; orvAor mupds, Rev. x..1; dvOpa-
kes 7. coals of fire, Ro. xii. 20 (see avOpaé); yAoooa
@oet mupos, which had the shape of little flames, Acts ii.
3; Soxiudew dia mupos, 1 Pet. i. 7; mupotaba (see mv-
pow, b.) éx m. Rev. iii. 18; as d1a mupds, as one who in
a conflagration has escaped through the fire not unin-
jured, i. e. dropping the fig. not without damage, 1 Co.
iii. 15; WND OxD, Zech. iii. 2, cf. Am. iv. 11. of the
fire of hell we find the foll. expressions, — which are
to be taken either tropically (of the extreme penal tor-
ments which the wicked are to undergo after their life
on earth; so in the discourses of Jesus), or literally (so
apparently in the Apocalypse): 7é aip, Mk. ix. 44, 46,
[T WH om. Tr br. both verses], 48; 7d rip 7d aimnor,
Mt. xviii. 8; xxv. 41, cf. 4 Mace. xii. 12; aoBeorov, Mk. ix.
43,45[GT Tr WHom. Lbr. the cl.]; rupds atwviou Sikny
trexew, Jude 7; yeevva tod mupds, Mt. v. 22; xviii. 9;
Mk. ix. 47 [RG Tr br.]; xdapivos r. mupos, Mt. xiii. 42,
50, (Dan. iii. 6); 7 Aiuvn Tod trupos, Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10,
14,15; wupi rnpeicOa, 2 Pet. ili. 7; BacanoOqvar ev rupi,
Rev. xiv. 10 (cf. Lk. xvi. 24); Bamri¢ew tid mpi (see Ba-
nri¢w, II. b. bb.), Mt. iii. 11; Lk.iii.16. The tongue
[On its
muppatw
is called wip, as though both itself on fire and setting
other things on fire, partly by reason of the fiery spirit
which governs it, partly by reason of the destructive
power it exercises, Jas. iii. 6; since fire disorganizes
and sunders things joined together and compact, it is
used to symbolize dissension, Lk. xii. 49. Metaphorical
expressions: é€k mupds dpratev, to snatch from danger
of destruction, Jude 23; mupi ddiCerOa (see ddi¢w), Mk.
ix. 49; ¢jAos rupos, fiery, burning anger [see (jos, 1],
Heb. x. 27 (wip (ndov, Zeph. i. 18; iii. 8); God is called
mip katavaXickoy, as one who when angry visits the ob-
durate with penal destruction, Heb. xii. 29.*
tupt, -as, 7, (wip), fr. Hom. down, a fire, a pile of
burning fuel: Acts xxviii. 2 sq.*
mupyos, -ov, 6, (akin to Germ. Burg, anciently Purg;
[yet cf. Curtius § 413]), as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, @
tower; a fortified structure rising to a considerable height,
to repel a hostile attack or to enable a watchman to see
in every direction. The ruipyos év TO Srwdp [(q.- Vv.) ]
seems to designate a tower in the walls of Jerusalem
near the fountain of Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; the tower occu-
pied by the keepers of a vineyard is spoken of in Mt.
xxi. 83; Mk. xii. 1, (after Is. v. 2); a tower-shaped
building as a safe and convenient dwelling, Lk. xiv. 28.*
mupéoow; (wip); (Vulg., Cels., Senec., al. febricito) ;
to be sick with a fever: Mt. viii.14; Mk. i. 30. (Eur.,
Arstph., Plut., Leian., Galen, al.) *
TupeTés, -ov, 6, (wip); 1. fiery heat (Hom. Il. 22,
31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of ‘fever’ in
this pass.; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; Schmidt, Syn.
ch. 60 § 14]). 2. fever: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31;
Lk. iv. 39; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippocr., Arstph.,
Plat., sqq.; Deut. xxviii. 22); mup. peyas, Lk. iv. 38 (as
Galen de different. feb. 1, 1 says avvnes Tots latpots dvo-
pate... Tov peyay Te Kal puxpoyv muperov; [cf. Wetstein
on Lk. 1. ¢.]).*
mupwos, -n, -ov, (mip), fiery: Oapaxes mvp. i. e. Shining
like fire, Rev. ix. 17. (Ezek. xxviii. 14, 16; Aristot.,
Polyb., Plut., al.) *
mupdw: Pass., pres. mupodpar; pf. ptep. memupapevos +
(mip); fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; to burn with fire,
to set on fire, to kindle; in the N. T. it is used only in
the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn: prop. 2 Pet. iil.
12; trop. of the heat of the passions: of grief, 2 Co. xi.
29 [Eng. Versions burn (often understood of indig-
nation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger,
with rots @upois added, i. q. to be incensed, indignant,
2 Made. iv. 38; x. 35; xiv. 45; to be inflamed with se x-
ual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptep. merupwpe-
vos, made to glow [R. V. refined]: Rev. i. 15 [(cf. B. 80
(69) n.)]; full of fire; fiery, ignited: ra Bédn ta mem.
darts filled with inflammable substances and set en fire,
Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bibl. 2, 5, 2 § 3); melted by fire
and purged of dross: xpvciov memup. ex tupos, [refined
by fire], Rev. iii. 18 (so mupé in the Sept. for \7¥; as
7 dpyopov, Job xxii. 25; Zech. xiii. 9; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7;
Ixv. (Ixvi.) 10).*
muppatw; i. q. muppds yivopat, to become glowing, grow
oe ty
muppos
red, be red: Mt. xvi. 2 sq. [but Tbr. WH reject the pass. ]
(Byzant. writ.; mvppi¢ in Sept. and Philo.) *
aruppés, -d, -dv, (fr. wip), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
having the color of fire, red: Rev. vi. 4; xii. 3. Sept.
several times for D18.*
Ilippos [(‘fiery-red’; Fick, Griech. Personennamen,
p. 75)], -ov, 6, Pyrrhus, the proper name of a man:
Acts xx. 4 GLT Tr WH.*
Tipwsts, -ews, 7}, (Tupdw), a burning: Rev. xviii. 9, 18;
the burning by which metals are roasted or reduced;
by a fig. drawn fr. the refiner’s fire (on which cf. Prov.
XXxvii. 21), calamities or trials that test character: 1 Pet.
iv. 12 (Tertullian adv. Gnost. 12 ne expavescatis ustio-
nem, quae agitur in vobis in tentationem), cf. i. 7 [(y
mupaos THs Soxiwacias, ‘Teaching’ etc. 16,5)]. (In the
same and other senses by Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) *
[aré, an enclitic particle, see nme ete. |
mwdréw, -@; impf. émmdouv; 1 aor. é€m@Anoa; pres. pass.
mo ovpat; (méAw, weAopat, to turn, turn about, [Curtius
§ 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun w@A7n; Lob.
in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] moAodpa, Lat. versor,
foll. by eis with acc. of place, to frequent a place; cf.
the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for
13D; prop. to barter, i. e. to sell: absol. (opp. to dyopd-
(ew), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of mwdodvres (opp. to
oi dyopd¢ovres, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv.9; Mk.
xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44;
Mieceepext t2; VK x. 215) x0 15°) 1K. [xi 33]; svi.
22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14,16; Acts v.1; supply adro»,
Acts iv. 37; adrd, ib. 34; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen.
of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.*
am@Xos, -ov, 6 (in class. Grk. 7 also), [Lat. pullus,
O. H. G. folo, Eng. foal; perh. allied with mais; cf. Cur-
tius § 387]; 1. a colt, the young of the horse: so
very often fr. Hom. down. 2. univ. a young crea-
ture: Ael. v. h. 4, 9; spec. of the young of various ani-
mals; in the N. T. of a young ass, an ass’s colt: Mt. xxi.
2,5,7; Mk. xi. 2, [3 Lmrg.], 4, 5, 7; Lk. xix. 30, 33, 35;
Jn. xii. 15, (also in Geopon.); Sept. several times for
‘vy; for ny jy a female ibex, Prov. v. 19.*
aré—rore, adv., ever, at any time: Lk. xix. 30; Jn.i. 18;
v.37; vi. 35; viii. 33; 1 Jn. iv.12. [(From Hom. down.)]*
mopdw, -@: 1 aor. émapwoa (Jn. xii. 40 T Tr WH);
pf. rerm@paxa; pf. pass. ptcp. memwpapuevos; 1 aor. pass.
éx@pwbnv ; (wepos, hard skin, a hardening, induration) ;
io cover with a thick skin, to harden by covering with a
callus, [R. V. everywhere simply to harden]: metaph.,
kapdiav, to make the heart dull, Jn. xii. 40; Pass. to
grow hard or callous, become dull, lose the power of under-
standing: Ro. xi. 7; ra vonpara, 2 Co. iii. 14; 9 Kapdia,
Mk. vi. 52; vili.17. Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on MK. p. 78 sq.;
on Rom. ii. p. 451 sq. [(Hippoer., Aristot., al.)]*
mTopwcts, -ews, 7, (Topda, q. V.), prop. the covering with
a callus; trop. obtuseness of mental discernment, dulled
perception: yéyove tim, the mind of one has been blunted
[R. V. a hardening hath befallen], Ro. xi. 25; ris kapdias
[hardening of heart], of stubbornness, obduracy, Mk. iii.
5; Eph. iv 18. ‘(Hipvocr.) |*
559
TOS
mas, (fr. obsol. IOS, whence zroi, mot, ete. [ef. Curtius
§ 631]), adv., [fr. Hom. down] ; I. in interroga
tion; how? in what way ?— in a direct question, foll.
by a. the indicative, it is the expression a. of
one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Lk.
i. 34; x. 26; Jn. iii.9; ix. 26; 1 Co. xv. 35 [ef. W. 266
(250)]; més ody, Jn. ix. 10 Tdf. (but L WH br. ody), 19;
Ro. iv. 10. B. of one about to controvert another,
and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has
happened or been done: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 23; Lk
Rij los IN 4, 12 vids AT sevinb2s ios Ilona.
17; 1v. 20; Ro. 111. 6;°v1. 25 1 Co. xiv. 7, 9; 16% 1 Tim di.
5; Heb. ii. 3; cat més, Mk. iv. 13; Jn. xiv. 5 [here L txt.
Tr WHom. kai]; mas odv, Mt. xii. 26; Ro. x. 14 RG;
mas 5€, Ro. x. 14* RGLmrg., 14> RGT, 15 RG, (on
this see in b. below). where something is asserted and
an affirmative answer is expected, mas ovxi is used: Ro.
viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 8. y-. of surprise, intimating that
what has been done or is said could not have been done
or said, or not rightly done or said, — being equiv. to how
is it, or how has it come to pass, that ete.: Gal. ii. 14 GL T
TrWH; Mt. xxii. 12; Jn. iv. 9; vi. 52; vii. 15; adas
Aéyets, Neyovat, krA., Mk. xii. 35; Lk. xx. 41; Jn. viii. 33;
kat was, Lk. xx. 44; Acts ii. 8; xal ras od Néyes, In. xii-
34; xiv. 9 [here L T WHom. Tr br. xai]; més ody, Jn. vi.
42 [here T WH Tr txt. mas viv]; Mt. xxii.43; was ov,
how is it that... not, why not? Mt. xvi.11; Mk. viii. 21
RGLumrg.; iv. 40 [RGT]; Lk. xii. 56. b. the
delib. subjunctive (where the question is, how that
can be done which ought to be done): mas tAnpwbacuy
ai ypadai, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be ful-
filled) to be fulfilled? Mt. xxvi.54; ms puynrte, how shall
ye (who wish to escape) escape ete. Mt. xxiii. 83; add,
mas ovv, Ro. x. 14 LT Tr WH; zas dé, x. 14° Ltxt. T
TrWweEH: 14 bir WH 315 LL Le WH, (Sirs xi)
cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 405 sq. c. foll. by dp
with the optative: més yap dy duvaipny; Acts viii. 31
(on which see ay, III. p. 34°). II. By a somewhat
negligent use, occasionally met with even in Attic writ.
but more freq. in later authors, r@s is found in indi-
rect discourse, where regularly éras ought to have
stood; cf. W. § 57, 2 fin.; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]. a.
with the indicative —pres.: Mt. vi. 28; Mk. xii. 413.
Lk. xii. 27; Acts xv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 10; Eph. v.15; Col.
iv. 6; 1 Tim. iii. 15; 76 més (on the art. see 6, II. 10 a.)3
with the impf. Lk. xiv. 7; with the perf. Rev. iii. 3;
with the aor., Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26 [here Tr WH br.
mas]; Lk. viii. 36; Acts ix. 27, etc.; after dvaywackew,
Mk. xii. 26 TTrWH; how it came to pass that, ete. Jn.
ix.15; with the fut.: pepmva, was apeoe: (because the-
direct quest. would be més dpéow;), 1 Co. vii. 32-34 [but
L TTr WH -on]; e(nrovy mas airov amod€covew, how
they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncer-
tainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliber-
ating about the way in which they will accomplish it),
Mk. xi. 18 RG (but the more correct reading here, acc.
to the best Mss., including cod. Sin., is awo\éawow ‘how
they should destroy him’ [ef. W. § 41b. 4b.; B. § 139,
P,p
61; see next head]). b. with the subjunctive,
of the aor. and in deliberation: Mk. xi. 18 LT Tr WH;
xive.1, 10 [Gy Mit xs 19s ken ere wos, uk
xxit; 2, 4 = Actsiive 21: III. in exclamation, how:
mas dvoKoddy eat, Mk. x. 24; m@s mapayphya, Mt. xxi.
[P, p: the practice of doubling p (after a prep. or an augm.)
is sometimes disregarded by the Mss., and accordingly by the
critical editors ; so, too, in the middle of a word ; see avavtipn-
Tos, a@opimTw, apaBev, &papbos, Siaphyvumt, emipawtw, emipl-
T™Tw, Tapapew, paBdiCw, pavTi(w, pamilw, pimtw, proua, etc.;
ef. W. § 13, 1b.; B. 32 (28 sq.); WH. App. p. 163; Tdf,
Proleg. p. 80. Recent editors, L T (cf. the Proleg. to his 7th
ed. p. cclxxvi.), Kuenen and Cobet (cf. their Praef. p. xcvi.),
WH (but not Treg.), also follow the older Mss. in omitting
the breathings from pp in the middle of a word; cf. Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p.18 sq.; Greg. Corinth. ed. Bast p.
732 sq.; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram. p. 16;
W. 48 (47). On the smooth breathing over the initial p
when p begins two successive syllables, see Lipsius u. s. ;
WH. u. s. pp. 163, 170; Kiihner §67 Anm. 4; Goetiling, Ac-
cent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breath-
ings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8 p. 105 sq. and reff. there.
On the usage of modern edd. of the classics cf. Veitch s. vv.
parrw, pécw, etc. |
‘PadB (and ‘PayaB, Mt. i. 5; ‘PayaB8n, -ns, in Joseph.
[antt. 5, 1, 2 ete.]), 9, (AM ‘broad’, ‘ample’), Rahab,
a harlot of Jericho: Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. [Cf. B.D.
s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. Clement of Rome, App. (Lond. 1877)
p- 413.]*
paBBt, T WH paBBei [cf. B. p.6; WH. App. p. 155;
see ev, e], (Hebr. "35, fr. 39 much, great), prop. my
great one, my honorable sir; (others incorrectly regard
the ‘+ as the yodh paragogic); Rabbi, a title with which
the Jews were wont to address their teachers (and also
to honor them when not addressing them; ef. the French
monsicur, monseigneur): Mt. xxiii. 7; translated into
Greek by 6udaoxados, Mt. xxiii. 8 GL TTrWH; John
the Baptist is addressed by this title, Jn. iii. 26; Jesus:
both by his disciples, Mt. xxvi. 25,49; Mk.ix.5; xi.
21; Jn. i. 38 (39), 49 (50); iv. 31; ix. 2; xi.8; and by
others, Jn. iii. 2; vi. 25; repeated to indicate earnest-
ness [cf. W. § 65, 5a.] paBBi, paBBi, RG in Mt. xxiii. 7
and Mk. xiv. 45; (so °2> 13> for ‘38 °38 in the Targ. on
2K. ii. 12). Cf. Lghtft. Horae Hebr. et Talmud. on Mt.
xxlil. 7; Pressel in Herzog ed. 1 xii. p. 471 sq.; [Gins-
burg in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Rabbi; Hamburger, Real-En-
cyclopidie, s. v. Rabban, vol. ii. p. 943 sq. ].*
paBBovl (so Rec. in Mk. x. 51) and paBBoum [WH
wei, see reff. under Jaffi, init.], (Chald. ji3% lord; j37
560
‘“Payao
20; was ducKodws, Mk, x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; with a verb,
how (greatly): mas ovvéyoua, Lk. xii. 50; was epida
avtov, Jn. xi. 36.
ms, an enclitic particle, on which see under eis [i.e
ei, III. 14] and pnras.
P
master, chief, prince; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. iib. d. Tar-
gumim, ii. p. 401), Rabboni, Rabbuni (apparently [yet
cf. reff. below] the Galilean pronunciation of *3)37), a
title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is ad-
dressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to diddeKados:
Jn. xx.16; Mk. x. 51, (see paS@i). Cf. Keim iii. p- 560
[Eng. trans. vi. p. 311 sq.]; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr.
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, pp. 409 and 606; also for
1878,p.7; [Ginsburg and Hamburger, as in the preced-
ing word; Aautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10].*
papditw; 1 aor. pass. éppaBdioOny and (so L T Tr WH)
epaBdicOny (see P, p); (paBdos); to beat with rods: Acts
xvi. 22; 2 Co. xi. 25. (Judg. vi.11; Ruth ii. 17; Arstph.,
Diod., al.) *
P4BSes, -ov, 7, [prob. akin to famis, Lat. verber; cf.
Curtius § 513], in various senses fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for 700, VAY, pr njpwn, ete. a staff, waliing-stick:
i. q- @ twig, rod, branch, Heb. ix. 4 (Num. xvii. 2 sqq-
Hebr. text xvii. 16 sqq.); Rev. xi. 1; @ rod, with which
one is beaten, 1 Co. iv. 21 (Plato, legg. 3 p. 700 c.; Plut.,
al.; mardooew tia ev paBdo, Ex. xxi. 20; Is. x. 24); a
staff: as used on a journey, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix.
3; or to lean upon, Heb. xi. 21 (after the Sept. of Gen.
xlvii. 31, where the translators read Nn, for NUD a bed;
(cf. mpookuvéw, a.]); or by shepherds, Rev. ii. 27; xii.
5; xix. 15, in which passages as év pa88@ mowpaivery is
fig. applied to a king, so paB8do odnpa, with a rod of iron,
indicates the severest, most rigorous, rule, hence paS8dos
is equiv. to a royal sceptre (like o1v, Ps. ii. 9; xlv. 8;
for wav, Esth. iv. 11; v. 2): Heb. i. 8 (fr. Ps. xlv.
8).*
paPSotxos, -ov, 6, (paBdos and éya; cf. edvodyxos), one
who carries the rods i. e. the fasces, a lictor (a public offi-
cer who bore the fasces or staff and other insignia of
office before the magistrates), [A.V. serjeants]: Acts
xvi. 35, 38. (Polyb.; Diod. 5,40; Dion. Hal.; Hdian.
7,8, 10 [5 ed. Bekk.]; dca ri Acer@pets rods HaBdovxovs
dvopatover; Plut. quaest. Rom. ec. 67.) *
“Payot [so WH] or “Payad [RGLT Tr], (39 [i e.
‘friend"], Gen. xi. 18), 6, Ragau [A.V. Reu; (once
Rehu)], one of the ancestors of Abraham: Lk, iii, 35.
[B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Reu.1*
padsvovpynua
padiodpynua, -ros, 7d, (fr. padiovpyew, and this fr. padi-
ovoyds, compounded of padios and EPFQ. A padioupyds
is one who does a thing with little effort and adroitly ;
then, in a bad sense, a man who is facile and forward
in the perpetration of crime, a knave, a rogue), a piece
of knavery, rascality, villany: movnpdv, Acts xviii. 14.
(Dion. ‘Hal., Plut., Leian. ; eccles. writ.) *
padiovpyia, -as, 7, (see padiovpynua, cf. ravovpyia); 1.
prop. ease in doing, facility. 2. levity or easiness
in thinking and acting; love of a lazy and effeminate
life (Xen.). 3. unscrupulousness, cunning, mischief,
[A. V. villany]: Acts xiii. 10. (Polyb. 12, 10, 5; often
in Plut.)*
[patvw; see pavrica. |
poxa (Tdf. paya; [the better accentuation seems to
be -@; cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 8]), a
Chald. word “p> [but acc. to Kautzsch (u.s. p. 10) not
the stat. emph. ‘of prs but shortened fr. ip” >] (Hebr.
Py), empty, i.e. a senseless, empty-headed mene a term of
pecoaah used by the Jews in the time of Christ [B. D.
s.v. Raca; Wiinsche, Erlauterung u.s. w. p.47]: Mt. v.22.*
pdKos, -ous, 7d, (pyyrupt), a piece torn off; spec. a bit
of cloth; cloth: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21 [here L Tr mrg.
pdkkos]. (Hom., Hdt., Arstph., Soph., Eur., Joseph.,
Sept., al.) *
‘Papa [T WH ‘Papa; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s.v. Ramah, 1
init.], (799 i.e. a high place, height), 7, [indecl. Win.
61 (60)], Ramah, a town of the tribe of Benjamin, sit-
uated six Roman miles north of Jerusalem on the road
leading to Bethel; now the village of er Ram: Mt. ii.
18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15). Cf. Win RWB. s. v.;
Graf in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 851 sqq. ;
Pressel in Herzog xii. p. 515 sq.; Furrer in Schenkel
BL. v. p. 37; [BB. DD.].*
pavritw ; (fr. pavrds besprinkled, and this fr. paivw) ;
1 aor. éppavrica and (so L T Tr WH) épdvrica (see P, p) ;
[1 aor. mid. subjunc. pavticwvra: (sprinkle themselves),
Mk. vii. 4 WH txt. (so Volkmar, Weiss, al.) after codd.
8B]; pf. pass. ptep. éppavriopevos (Td. pepayr., L Tr
WH fepavr. with smooth breathing; see P, p) ; for paiva,
more com. in class. Grk.; to sprinkle: prop. twa, Heb.
ix. 13 (on the rite here referred to cf. Num. xix. 2-10;
Win. RWB. s. v. Sprengwasser; [B. D. s. v. Purifica-
tion]); ib. 19; ri atari, ib. 21; [Rev. xix. 13 WH (see
mepippaivw)}. to cleanse by sprinkling, hence trop. to
purify, cleanse: €ppavttopévot ras kapdias (on this acc. see
B. § 134, 7) dd xrA. Heb. x. 22. (Athen. 12 p.521 a.;
for Hebr. nun, Ps. 1. (li.) 9; for 713, Lev. vi. 27; 2 K.
ix/3a:)*
pavricpds, -ov, 6, (pavritw, q. v.), used only by bibl. and
eccl. writ., a sprinkling (purification): aipa pavricpod,
blood of sprinkling, i. e. appointed for sprinkling (serving
to purify), Heb. xii. 24 (USap fpavricpod for 1727 “1D,
Num. xix. 9, 13, 20 sq.) 5 eis pavticpov aiparos “Inaod Xp.
1. @. els 7d pavriterOar (or iva parti{wrra) aipare "Ino.
Xp., that they may be purified (or cleansed from the
guilt of their sins) by the blood of Christ, 1 Pet. i. 2 [W.
§ 30, 2 a.].*
561
ee
pew
pan(tw; fut. pariow (cf. B. 37 (32 sq.)]; 1 aor. éppdmioa
and (so LT Tr WH) é¢pamoa (see P, p); (fr. paris a
rod) ; 1. to smite with a rod or staff (Xenophanes
in Diog. Laért. 8, 36; Hdt., Dem., Polyb., Plut.,al.). 2.
to smite in the face with the palm of the hand, to box the
ear: twd, Mt. xxvi. 67 (where it is distinguished fr.
cotagifw[A.V.buffel]; for Suidas says pamicav rardocew
Thy yvadov amdn TH xetpi not with the fist; hence the
Vulg. renders it palmas in faciem ei dederunt; [A. V.
mrg. (R. V. mrg.) adopt sense 1 above]); twa ém [LT
Tr txt. WH eis] rijv cvaydva, Mt. v.39 (Hos. xi. 4). Cf.
Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. ete. p. 61 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 175; [Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113,10; Field, Otium Norv.
pars iii. p. 71].*
pariopa, -ros, 76, (pami¢a, q. V.); 1. a blow with
a rod or a staff or a scourge, (Antiph. in Athen. 14 p.
623 b.; Anthol., Leian.). 2. a blow with the flat of
the hand, a slap in the face, box on the ear: Badd\ew twa
paricpacw (see Badd, 1), Mk. xiv. 65; d8dvae tui pare
opa, Jn. xviii. 22; pariopara, Jn. xix. 3, [but in all three
exx. R. V.mrg. recognizes sense 1 (see reff. s. v. pa-
mi¢w) |.*
pais, -iSos, 7, (partw to sew), a needle: Mt. xix. 24;
Mk. x. 25; Lk. xviii. 25 Rece., [(cf. xaundos)]. Class.
Grk. more com. uses BeAdvn (q. v-) ; see Lob. ad Phryn.
p: 903" [W. 25]*
[paxa, see pakd. |
‘Pax dB, see ‘PaaB.
‘Paxqa, (911 a ewe or sheep), 9, Rachel [cf. B. D.
s. v.], the wife of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. ii. 18 (fr.
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15).*
“PeBéxxa (APIs fr. D2. unused in Hebrew but in
Arabic ‘to bind,’ ‘fasten’; hence the subst. i. q. ‘ en-
snarer,’ fascinating the men by her beauty), 4, Rebecca,
the wife of Isaac: Ro. ix. 10.*
pedy [al. féda; on the first vowel ef. Tdf.’s note on
Rev. as below; WH. App. p. 151%], (ace. to Quintil. 1,
5, 57 [cf. 68] a Gallic word [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter,
s. v. reda]), -ns, 7, @ chariot, “a species of vehicle having
four wheels” (Isidor. Hispal. orig. 20, 12 (§ 511), [ef.
Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s.v. Rheda]): Rev. xviii. 13.*
‘Peuddv (RG), or ‘Pepav (L.Tr), or ‘Poupav (T), Lor
‘Poupa WH, see their App. on Acts as below], Remphan
[so A.V.], or Rephan [so R.V.], Romphan, [or Rompha],
a Coptic pr. name of Saturn: Acts vii. 43, fr. Amos
v. 26 where the Sept. render by ‘Pa:pav [or ‘Pedav] the
Hebr. 113, thought by many to be equiv. to the Syriac
ols, and the Arabic le ae
i by others regarded as an appellative, signifying
‘stand,’ ‘ pedestal’ (Germ. Geriist; so Hitzig), or ‘statue’
(so Gesemius), formed from 733 after the analogy of
such forms as pian, bya, ete. Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.
Saturn; Gesenius, Thes. p. 669°; J. G. Miiller in Her-
zog xii. 736; Merz in Schenkel i. p. 516 sq.; Schrader
in Riehm p- 234 ; [Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sat-
urn, and reff. there given; B. D. s. v. Remphan]. .
pew: fut. pevow (in Grk. writ. more com. pevdoopat, see
; designations of Saturn;
péw
W. 89 (85); [B.67 (59)]; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 739);
[(Skr. sru; cf. Lat. fluo; Eng. stream; Curtius § 517)];
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 133; to flow: Jn. vii- 38.
[Comp.: mapappéw. ]*
‘PEQ, see eimor.
‘Phytov, -ov, 7d, Rhegium (now Reggio), a town and
promontory at the extremity of the Bruttian peninsula,
opposite Messana [Messina] in Sicily ; (it seems to have
got its name from the Greek verb pryvupt, because at that
point Sicily was believed to have been ‘rent away’ from
Italy; so Pliny observes, hist. nat. 3, 8, (14); [Diod. Sic.
4,85; Strabo 6, 258; Philo de incorrupt. mund. § 26; al.
See Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]): Acts xxviii. 13.*
PAYES, -Tos, Td, (pyyvupe), what has been broken or rent
asunder ; a. a fracture, breach, cleft: Hippocr., Dem.,
[Aristot.], Polyb., al.; for yp5, Am. vi. 11 Alex. b.
plur. for Dy 1p, rent clothes: 1 K. xi. 30 sq.; 2 K. ii.
12. Cc. fall, ruin: Lk. vi. 49.*
pyyvupe (Mt. ix. 17) and pyoow (Hom. Il. 18, 571;
1 K. xi. 31; Mk. ii. 22 RG Lmrg.; ix. 18; [Lk. v. 37
Lmrg.; (see below)]); fut. pn&@; 1 aor. éppnéa; pres.
pass. 3 pers. plur. pyyvuvrat; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
pp2 and YIP; to rend, burst or break asunder, break up,
break through; a. univ.: tovs daoxovs, Mk. ii. 223
Lk. v. 37; pass. Mt. ix. 17; i. q. to tear in pieces [A.V.
rend |: twa, Mt. vii. 6. b. sc. edppootvny (previously
chained up, as it were), to break forth into joy: Gal. iv.
27, after Is. liv. 1 (the full phrase is found in Is. xlix.
13; lii. 9; [ef. B. § 130, 5]; in class. Grk. pyyvivat krav6-
pov, oiuwyny, Saxpva, esp. Pevny is used of infants or dumb
persons beginning to speak; cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p.
1332°; [L. and S.s. v. I. 4 and 5]). c. i. q. oma-
paooe, to distort, convulse: of a demon causing convul-
sions in a man possessed, Mk. ix. 18; Lk. ix. 42; in both
pass. many [so R. V. txt.] explain it to dash down, hurl to
the ground, (a common occurrence in cases of epilepsy) ;
in this sense in Artem. oneir. 1, 60 a wrestler is said
pngat tov dvytimadov. Hesych. gives pn€ar- xaraBadeiv.
Also pnée+ xaréBare. Cf. Kuinoel or Fritzsche on Mk.
ix. 18. [Many hold that pyoow in this sense is quite a
different word from pyyvupe (and its collat. or poet.
poo), and akin rather to (the onomatopoetic) dpdoca,
paoow, to throw or dash down; ef. Lobeck in Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. § 114, s. v. pryvups; Curtius, Das Verbum,
pp- 162, 315; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113, 7. See as exx.
Sap. iv. 19; Herm. mand. 11,3; Const. apost. 6, 9 p.
165, 14. Cf. mpoophyvypt.] (Comp.: d:a-, ept-, mpoo-
Siren.) *
[Syn.: phyvupt, kardyvupt, Opatw: fp. to rend, rend
asunder, makes pointed reference to the separation of the
parts; x. to break, denotes the destruction of a thing’s unity
or completeness ; @. to shatter, is suggestive of many fragments
and minute dispersion. Cf. Schmidt ch. 115.]
Pipa, -ros, rd, (fr. ‘PEQ, pf. pass. etpnuac), fr. Theogn.,
Hat., Pind. down; Sept. chiefly for 134; also for 1k,
7919, 19, TION, ete.; 1. prop. that which is or has
been uttered by the living voice, thing spoken, word, (cf.
Eros, also Aoyos, I. 1]; i.e.
562
prima
by the voice and having a definite meaning: Mt. xxvii.
14; p. yAosons, Sir. iv. 24; devi pnudrov, a sound of
words, Heb. xii. 19; pywara dppnra, [unspeakable words],
2 Co. xii. 4. b. Plur. ra frara, speech, discourse,
(because it consists of words either few or many [cf.
Philo, leg. alleg. 3, 61 7d 8€ frja pépos Aoyov]) : Lk. vii.
1; Acts ii. 14; words, sayings, Jn. viii. 20; x. 21; Acts
[x. 44]; xvi. 38; 76 p. tTuvos, what one has said, Lk.
xxiv. 8, 11, or ‘aught, Ro. x. 18; ra p. pov, my teaching,
Jn. v. 47; xii. 47sq.; xv. 7; ra 6. ad ey@ Aad, In. vi.
63; xiv. 10; [adndcias x. cappocivns p. aropbéyyouat,
Acts xxvi. 25]; pnyata Cas aiwviov exes, thy teaching
begets eternal life, Jn. vi. 68; ra p. rov Geovd, utterances
in which God through some one declares his mind, Jn.
Vili. 47; Aadei tus Ta p. Tod 6. speaks what God bids him,
Jn. iii. 34; AaXeiv wavra Ta pyuata ths Cans TavTns, to de-
liver the whole doctrine concerning this life, i.e. the
life eternal, Acts v. 20; ra p. d dedaxds por, what thou
hast bidden me to speak, Jn. xvii. 8; prpara Aadeiv mpos
Twa, ev ois etc. to teach one the things by which ete.
Acts xi. 14; ra pyuwata Ta mpoeipnucva Ure Tivos, what one
has foretold, 2 Pet. ili. 2; Jude 17; Aadeiy pnuara Bda-
odnpa ets twa, to speak abusively in reference to one
[see eds, B. II. 2 c. B.], Acts vi. 11; xara twos, against
a thing, ib. 13 [GL T Tr WH om. Bdao?d.]. c. a
series of words joined together into a sentence (a declara-
tion of one’s mind made in words) ; a. univ. an utter-
ance, declaration, (Germ. eine Aeusserung): Mt. xxvi.
753 Mk. ix 82; sxivael2s, Eki b0 sax 45 Sy evio4
xx. 26; Acts xi. 16; xxviii. 25; with adjectives, pia
dpyov, Mt. xii. 36; eimeiv rovnpdy phya kara Twos, to assail
one with abuse, Mt. v. 11 [Rh G; al. om. £.]. B. a
saying of any sort, as a message, a narrative: concerning
some occurrence, Aadeiv 76 p- mept twos, Lk. ii. 17; pyya
tis mictews, the word of faith, i. e. concerning the neces-
sity of putting faith in Christ, Ro. x. 8; a promise, Lk.
i. 38; ii. 29; kaddv Oeod pnua, God’s gracious, comforting
promise (of salvation), Heb. vi. 5 (see xados, €.); kada-
pioas ... €v pnwart, acc. to promise (prop. on the ground
of his word of promise, viz. the promise of the pardon
of sins; cf. Mk. xvi. 16), Eph. v. 26 [al. take p. here as
i. q. ‘the gospel,’ cf. vi. 17, Ro. x. 8; (see Meyer ad
loc.)];_ the word by which some thing is commanded, di-
rected, enjoined: Mt. iv. 4 [ef. W. 389 (364) n.]; Lk. iv.
4 RGLTr in br.; Heb. xi. 3; @ command, Lk. v. 5;
eyévero pia Oeov emi twa, Lk. iii. 2 (Jer. i.1; mpds twa,
Gen. xv. 1; 1 K. xviii. 1); plur. pnwata mapa ood, words
from thee, i. e. to be spoken by thee, Acts x. 22; pjya
ris Suvdpews aidrov, his omnipotent command, Heb. i.
S. doctrine, instruction, [cf. W. 123 (117)]: (rd) pnywa
(rod) od, divine instruction by the preachers of the
gospel, Ro. x. 17 [RG; but LTTrWH p- Xpicrod ;
others give 6. here the sense of command, commission ;
(cf. Meyer) ]; saving truth which has God for its au-
thor, Eph. vi. 17; also rod xupiov, 1 Pet. i. 25; words
of prophecy, prophetic announcement, ra p. tov Geod,
Rev. xvii. 17 Ree. [al. of Adyou tr. 0.]. 2. In imi-
a. any sound produced ! tection of the Hebr. 135, the subject-matter of speech, thing
Poa
spoken of, thing; and that a. so far forth as it is
a matter of narration: Lk. ii. 15; Acts x. 37; plur.,
Lk. i. 65; 11.19, 51; Acts v. 82; xiii. 42. b. in so
far as it is matter of command: Lk.i. 37 [see dduvaréw,
b.] (Gen. xviii. 14; Deut. xvii. 8). c, a matter of
dispute, case at law: Mt. xviii. 16; 2Co. xiii. 17 A. V.
retains ‘word’ here and in the preceding pass.], (Deut.
xix. 15).*
‘Pyod [Lehm. -ca (so Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], 6,
Fhesa, the son of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.*
Phorow, see pryvupe.
OfTwp, -opos, 6, ((PEQ), a speaker, an orator, (Soph.,
Kur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.): of a forensic orator or
advocate, Acts xxiv.1. [Cf. Thom. Mag. s.v. (p. 324,
15 ed. Ritschl); B. D. s. v. Orator, 2.]*
pyTas, (pnrds), adv., expressly, in express words: pytds
Aeyec, 1 Tim. iv. 1. (Bolyb. 3, 23,5; Strabo 9 p. 426;
Plut. Brut. 29; [de Stoic. repugn. 15, 10]; Diog. Laért. 8,
71; [al.; cf. Wetstein on 1 Tim. 1.c.; W. 463 *(431)]). *
pla, -ns, 7, (akin to Germ. Reis ref. Lat. radix; Eng.
root; see Curtius § 515; Fick, Pt. iii. 775]), fr. Hom.
down ; Sept. for Wir ; 1. aroot: prop., Mt. iii.
10; Ek. iii. 9; ee puCav, from the roots (ef. W. § 51, 1
d. 1, Mk. xi. 20; pifay eye, to strike deep root, Mt. xiii.
6; Mk.iv.6; trop. od pigav éyew év Eau, spoken of one
who has but a superficial experience of divine truth,
has not permitted it to make its way into the inmost
recesses of his soul, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 17; Lk. viii.
13; in fig. disc. piga mxpias (see mxpia) of a person dis-
posed to apostatize and induce others to commit the
same offence, Heb. xii. 15; the progenitors of a race
are called fifa, their descendants KAddot (see KAddos, b.),
Ro. xi. 16-18. - Metaph. cause, origin, source: mdvrev
ray kaxav, 1 Tim. vi. 10; Tis copias, Sir. i. 6 (5), 20 (18);
tis aavacias, Sap. xv. 3; ths duaprias, of the devil, Ev.
Nicod. 23; dpy1 cat pi{a marrés dyabod, Epicur. ap. Athen.
12, 67 p. 546 sq.; many) Kat pita Kadoxayadias rd ae
ruxev madeias, Plut. de puer. educ. c. 7b. 2. after
the use of the Hebr. wy, that which like a root springs
from a root, a sprout, shoot; metaph. offs Spring, progeny :
Ro. xv. 12; Rev. v. 5; xxii. 16, (Is. xi. 10).*
pitdw, -@: pf. pass. ptep. épprfapevos [see P, p]; (pita);
fr. Hom. down; to cause to strike root, to strengthen with
roots; as often in class. writ. (see Passow s. v. 3; [L. and
S. s. v. I.]), trop. to render jirm, to fiz, establish, cause a
person or a thing to be thoroughly grounded: pass. éppito-
peévos (Vulg. radicatus) év dyamn, Eph. iii. 17 (18) [not
WH]; ¢v Xpiord, in communion with Christ, Col. ii. 7
[Comp. ékx-pr¢dw. ]*
pir, -ijs, 7, (pimr@), used by the Grk. poets fr. Hom.
down; a throw, stroke, beat: ép@adpod (Vulg. ictus oculi
[A. V. the twinkling of an eyc]), 2 moment of time, 1 Co.
xv. 52 [Lmrg. porn, q. v-].*
éum({o: pres. pass. ptcp. pumeCdpevos ; (fr. punis a bel-
lows or fan) ; hence 1. prop. to raise a breeze, put
air in motion, whether for the sake of kindling a fire or
of cooling one’s self; hence a. to blow up a fire:
rdya, wip, Anthol. 5,122, 6; Plut. Flam. 21. b. to
563
_but that he peat heal them, Mt. xv. 30.
powtndov
fan i.e. cool with a fan (Tertull. flabello): Plut. Anton.
26. 2. to toss to and fro, to agitate: of the wind,
mpos dvépov puriferar ro Ddwp, Philo de incorrupt. mundi
§ 24; pumiCopern ayvn, Dio Cass. 70,4; djpos doraror,
kakoy kat Oaddoon dv Spyo.ov, tm’ dvépou puri¢erat, Dio
Chr. 32 p. 368 b.; hence joined w. dvepiter@at it is used
of a person whose mind wavers in uncertainty between
hope and fear, between doing and not doing a thing,
Jas. i. 6.*
piTTew, see pinta.
plrre and pirréw (pirtovytwv, Acts xxii. 23; on the
diff. views with regard to the difference in meaning
betw. these two forms see Passow s. v. pirra, fin.; [Veitch
8. V. pire, fin. Hermann held that furreiv differed fr.
pinrew as Lat. jactare fr. jacere, hence the former had a
frequent. force (cf. Lob. Soph. Aj. p.177; Cope, Aristot.
rhet. vol. i. p. 91 sq-); some of the old grammarians
associate with purreiy a suggestion of earnestness or
effort, others of contempt]); 1 aor. éppupa G Tr, epp.
RL, gpa TWH, [ptep. (Lk. iv. 35) pipay RG Tr
WH, better (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Veitch p. 512)
piyay LT]; pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. épp:mrac [G Tr; al.
épp-] (Lk. xvii. 2), ptep. épptppevos G, éptppévos T Tr WH,
pep. (with smooth breathing) Lchm. (Mt. ix. 36); on the
doubling of p and the use of the breathing see P, p; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 7 iia ; to cast, throw;
i. q. to throw down: ti, Acts xxvii. 195; ti &« revos, ibid.
29; twa eis THY Oadacoay, Lk. xvii. 2. i. q. fo throw
off: Ta indria (Plat. rep. 5 p. 474 a.), Acts xxii. 23 (they
cast off their garments that they might be the better
prepared to throw stones [but cf. Wendt in Mey. 5dte
Aufl.]) 3 ra dada, 1 Mace. v.43; vii. 44; xi. 51; Xen.
Cyr. 4, 2, 33, and often in other Grk. writ. i. q. to
cast forward or before; twa [or ri] ets tr, [Mt. xxvii. 5
(but here RGL év7@ vad) ]; Lk. iv.35; twas rapa rods
mddas "Ingov, to set down (with the suggestion of haste
and want of care), of those who laid their sick at the feet
of Jesus, leaving them at his disposal without a doubt
i. q. to throw
to the ground, prostrate : éppizpévot, prostrated by fatigue,
hanger, Lte., pe V. scattered], Mt. ix. 36 (xatakaBav
éppypevous kat peOvorras, the enemy prostrate on the
ground, Polyb. 5,48, 2; of the slain, Jer. xiv. 16; éppip-
_péva odpara, 1 Mace. xi. 4; for other exx. see Wahl,
Clavis Apocr. V.T. s.v.; r&v vexpdv épotppevav emi rhs
dyopas, Plut. Galb. 28,1). [Comp.: dzo-, ém- pintw.]*
“PoBodp, (oyanyi i. e. ‘enlarging the people’, equiv. to
Evpvdnpos in Grk., fr. 19 and Dy); 6 6, Roboam, Reho-
boam, the son and successor of king Solomon: Mt. i. 7.*
*Pé8n, -7s, 9, Rhoda [i. e. ‘rose’ ], the name of a certain
maidservant: Acts xii. 13.*
. ‘PéSos, -ov, 9, I2hodes, [(cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)],
a well-known island of the Cyclades opposite Caria and
Lycia, with a capital of the same name: Acts xxi. 1.
([From Hom. down]; 1 Macc. xv. 23.) *
potnSdv, (for¢é@ to make a confused noise), adv., ‘with
aloud noise’: 2 Pet.iii.10. (Nicand. ther. 556; Geop.,
aly"
“Pouda
[‘Poppa, ‘Poudadr, see ‘Peudar. ]
poppata, -as, 7, a large sword; prop. a long Thracian
javelin [cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Rhompza]; also a
kind of long sword wont to be worn on the right shoul-
der, (Hesych. poudaia: Opaxiov duvvrnpioy, uayaipa, Eidos
i) axdvriov paxpév ; [Suidas 3223 ¢. (cf. péuBo to revolve,
vibrate)]; cf. Plut. Aemil. 18); [A. V. sword]: Rev. i.
163 li. 12,163 vi. 8; xix. 15, 21; cod dé adrys thy ruxnv
dteAevoerat poudaia, a fig. for ‘extreme anguish shall fill
(pierce, as it were) thy soul’, Lk. ii. 35, where cf. Kuinoel.
(Joseph. antt. 6, 12,4; 7,12,1; in Ev. Nicod. 26 the
archangel Michael, keeper of Paradise, is called 7 pXo-
yin poupaia. Very often in Sept. for 191); often also
in the O. T. Apoer.) *
[porn, 7s, 7, (peww), fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down, inclina-
tion downwards, as of the turning of the scale: év pomq
épOadpod, 1 Co. xv. 52 L mrg. (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) ;
see purn.*]
‘PovBqy (in Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8 ‘PovBndros), 6, ({389,
i.e. behold ye a son! Gent xxix. 32 [cf. B.D. s. v.]),
Reuben, Jacob’s firstborn son by Leah: Rev. vii. 5.*
“Pow8 (in Joseph. antt. 5, 9, 2 “Powdn, -ns), 9, (97 for
mapr, a female friend), Ruth, a Moabitish woman, one of
the ancestors of king David, whose history is related in
the canonical book bearing her name: Mt.i. 5. [B.D.
s. v. Ruth.]*
“‘Potdos, -ov, 6, Rufus [i. e. ‘red’, ‘reddish’], a Lat.
proper name of a certain Christian: ‘Mk. xv. 21; Ro.
xvi. 13. oe D. s. v. reel
popn, -ns, 7, (fr. PY i. q. épvw ‘to draw’ [but Curtius
§ 517; Vaniéek p. 1210, al., connect it with péw ‘to
flow ”]) ; 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force,
trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract
of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides; a
street, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21; Acts ix. 11; xii. 10;
ef. Is. xv. 3; Sir. ix. 7; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 404; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 488; Wetstein on
Mtr swe 22,25 |0
piopar; fut. pycopat; 1 aor. eppvodunv G (eppvo. R,
so T in 2Co.i.10; 2 Pet. ii. 7; L everywh. exe. in 2
Tim. iii. 11 txt.) and épvodunv (so Tr WH everywh., T
in Coli. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Ltxt. in 2 Tim. iii. 11);
a depon. mid. verb, in later Grk. w. the 1 aor. pass.
eppucOnv G (-pp- R), and (so LT Tr WH in 2 Tim. iv. 17)
epvcOnv; (on the doubling of p, and the breathing, see in
P, p); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 9x7; also for
ON, wba (to cause to escape, to deliver), } ‘On (to draw
out), nbn, 3 BZ win, ete.; fr. PYO to draw, ae prop. to
draw to one’s self, to rescue, to deliver: twa, Mt. xxvii.
43; 2 Pet.ii.7; tua dad twos [cf. W. § 30, 6a.], Mt. vi.
13; Lk. xi.4 RL; 1 Th.i. 10 [here TTr WH ek; 2 Tim.
iv. 18]; 1 aor. pass., Ro. xv. 31; 2 Th. iii. 2; teva &« tivos
[W.u.s.]: Ro. vii. 24 [cf. W. § 41a.5]; 2 Co.i. 10; Col.
1.13; 2 Tim. iii.11; 2 Pet.ii.9; 1 aor. pass., Lk. i. 74;
2Tim.iv.17; 6 pudpevos, the deliverer, Ro. xi. 26 (after
Is. lix. 20).*
putralyw: (pvos,q. v.-); to make filthy, befoul; to defile,
dishonor, (Xen., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.); 1 aor.
564
‘Papn
pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. puravOnra, let him be made filthy,
i.e. trop. let him continue to defile himself with sins, Rev.
xxi 11ST Or W txt
puTapevopar: 1 aor. (pass.) impv. 3 pers. sing. puma-
pevOnrw; (pumapds, gq. v.); to be dirty, grow filthy;
metaph. to be defiled with iniquity: Rev. xxii. 11 GL ed.
ster. WHmrg. Found nowhere else; see pumaivw and
puTdéw.*
putapla, -as, 4, (pumapds), jilthiness (Plut. praecept.
conjug. c. 28); metaph. of wickedness as moral defile-
ment: Jas.i. 21. [Of sordidness, in Critias ap. Poll. 3,
116; Plut. de adulat. et amic. § 19; al.]*
putapds, -d, -dy, (pvmos, q. V.), filthy, dirty: prop. of
clothing [A. V. vile], Jas. ii. 2 (Sept. Zech. iii. 3 sq.;
Joseph. antt. 7,11,3; Plut. Phoc. 18; Dio Cass. 65, 20;
purapa Kat dmAvra, Artem. oneir. 2, 3 fin.; yAapvs, Ael.
v. h. 14, 10); metaph. defiled with iniquity, base, [A. V.
filthy]: Rev. xxii. 11 GLTTr WH. [(In the sense
of sordid, mean, Dion. Hal., al.)]*
pirros, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, filth: 1 Pet. iii. 21 [B.
§ 151, 14; W. § 30, 3 N. 3].*
pumdw, -@; 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. putwcdrw; 1.
to make filthy, defile, soil: Hom. Od. 6, 59. 2. in-
trans. for pumda, to be filthy: morally, Rev. xxii. 11 Rec.*
piots, -ews, 7, (fr. an unused pres. py, from which
several of the tenses of péw are borrowed), a flowing,
issue: tov aipatos, Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, [on the two
preced. pass. cf. B. § 147, 11; W. § 29, 3b.], 44, (Hip-
pocr., Aristot.).*
putis, -idos, 7, (PYQ, to draw together, contract), a
wrinkle: Eph. v.27. (Arstph., Plat., Diod. 4,51; Plut.,
Leian., Anthol., al.) *
‘Papaikds, -7, -dv, Roman, Latin: Lk. xxiii. 38 RG L
br. Trmrg. br. [(Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.)]*
‘Pwpaios, -ov, 6, a Roman: Jn. xi.48; Actsii.10[R. V.
here from Rome]; xvi. 21, 37 sq.; xxii. 25-27, 29; xxiii.
27; xxv.16; xxviii. 17. ([Polyb., Joseph., al.]; often
in 1 and 2 Macc.) *
‘Pwpaiort, adv., in the Roman fashion or language,
in Latin: Jn. xix. 20. [Epictet. diss. 1,17, 16; Plut.,
App., al.]*
‘Péun, -ns, 7 [on the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 b.;
(on its derivation cf. Curtius §517; Vanitek p. 1212
Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], Rome, the renowned capital
of Italy and ancient head of the world: Acts xviii. 2;
xix. 21; xxiii. 11; xxviii. 14,16; Ro. i. 7,15; 2 Tim. i.
17. (1 Mace. i. 10; vii. 1; [Aristot., Polyb., al.].) [On
Rome in St. Paul’s time ef. BB.DD. s. v.; Conybeare and
Howson, Life and Epp. ete. ch. xxiv.; Farrar, Life and
Work ete. chh. xxxvii., xliv., xlv.; Lewin St. Paul, vol.
ii. ch. vi.; Hausrath, entests eigenen iii. 65 sqq.; on
the Jews and Christians there, see particularly Schiirer,
Die Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d.
Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargest. (Leipz. 1879) ,
Seyerlen, Enstehung u.s.w. der Christengemeinde in
Rom (Tiibingen, 1874) ; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome,
2d ed., N. Y. 1877; Schaff, Hist. of the Chris. Church
(1882) vol. i. § 36.]*
Ppwvvupe
565
odBBatov
pdvvupe: to make strong, to strengthen; pf. pass. éppo- | letter, ppwoo, farewell: Acts xxiii. 30 [RG]; éppwobe,
pat [see P, p], to be strong, to thrive, prosper; hence the
Acts xv. 29 (2 Mace. xi. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,33; Artem
2 pers. (sing.) impv. is the usual formula in closing a | oneir. 3, 44, al.; ¢ppwoo kai byiawe, Dio Cass. 61, 13).*
[=, o, s: the practice (adopted by Griesbach, Knapp, al.,
after H. Stephanus et al.) of employing the character s in
the mid. of a comp. word has been abandoned by the recent
crit. editors; cf. W. §5,1 ¢.; Lipstus, Gram. Untersuch. p.
122; Matthiae§ 1 Anm.5; Sttm. Ausf. Sprchl. §2 Anm. 3;
Kiihner §1 Anm.1. Tdf. ed. 8 writes o also even at the end
of a word, after the older Mss. On movable final s see
&xpi(s), uexpe(s), o8rw(s). The (Ionic) combinations po for
pp, and oo for tr (cf. Fischer, Animadvers. ad Veller. ete.
i. pp. 193 sq. 203; Kihner § 31 pp. 124, 127), have become
predominant (cf. pony, Oapréw, Odpoos, amahAdoow etc.,
yAGooa, joowy (q.Vv.), OdAacoa, Knptoow, TEepicods, Tpacow
(q. v.), Tdécow, Técoapes, puddcow, etc.), except in a few
words, as xpeitTwy (q. v.), the derivatives of eAdrtwy (of which
word both forms are used indiscriminately), #rTnua, TTAw
(yet see 2 Co. xii. 13), etc.; cf. B. 7. Some prop. names are
spelled indifferently with one o or with two; as, EAro(o)azos.
Cis occasionally substituted for o, esp. before u, see cBevvumn,
Suvpva (outpva, cf. Soph. Gloss. § 58, 3, and Lex.s. v.; Td.
Proleg. p. 80; WH. App. p. 148; B.5; Sttm. Ausf. Sprchl.
§3 Anm. 6; Bezae cod., ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.; L. and S.
s.v. Z, I. 3, and 3, II. 14¢.); soalso ¢,as fuuBalrw 1 Pet. iv.
12 Rvez; cf. Kiihner § 325, 5; Béttm. Ausf. Spr. u.s. ; see fdv.]
caBayPavi, -vei T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and
s. v. et, ¢], -xOavi Lehm. [in Mt. only], Cimpaw, fr. the
Chald. paw), thou hast forsaken me: Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk.
xv. 34 (fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2, for the Hebr. \3nary, which
is so rendered also by the Chaldee paraphrast). [See
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. (Leipzig 1884) p.11.]*
oaBa8 (Hebr. nisay, plur. of 82s an army): kvptos
caBawd (MNI¥ TY), [A. V. Lord of Sabaoth], i.e. lord
of the armies se. of Israel, as those who under the lead-
ership and protection of Jehovah maintain his cause in
war (cf. Schrader, Ueber d. urspriingl. Sinn des Got-
tesnamens Jahve Zebaoth, in the Jahrbb. f. protest.
Theol. for 1875, p. 316 sqq., and in Schenkel v. 702 sq. ;
ef. Herm. Schultz, Alttest. Theol. ii. p. 96 sqq.; [B.D.
s.v. Sabaoth, the Lord of. But for the other view, ace.
to which the heavenly “hosts” are referred to, see
Hackett in B. D., Am. ed., s.v. Tsebaoth Lord of, and
Delitzsch in the Luth. Zeitschr. for 1874, p. 217 sqq.3 so
Riehm (HWB s. v. Zebaoth) as respects the use of the
phrase by the prophets]. On the diverse interpreta-
tions of the word cf. Oehler in Herzog xviii. p. 400 sqq.
[and in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 195 sq.; cf. T. K.
Cheyne, Isa., ed. 3, vol. i. 11 sq.]): Ro. ix. 29; Jas. v. 4.*
caPBariopés, -od, 6, (ca8Baritw to keep the sabbath) ;
1. a keeping sabbath. 2. the blessed rest from toils
and troubles looked for in the age to come by the true
worshippers of God and true Christians [R. V. sabbath
rest]: Heb. iv. 9. (Plut. de superstit.c. 3; eccl. writ.) *
caBBarov, -ov, 7d, (Hebr. naw), found in the N.T.
only in the historical bks. exe. twice in Paul’s Epp.;
sabbath; i. e. 1. the seventh day of each week,
which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were
required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10; xxxi. 13
sqq.; Deut. v.14); a. sing. ca8Barov and 76 oaf-
Barov: Mk. vi. 2; [xv. 42 L Tr]; xvi. 1; Jn. v.9 sq., ete. ;
i. q. the institution of the sabbath, the law for keeping holy
every seventh day of the week: Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 27 sq.;
Lk. vi. 5; Avew, Jn. v. 18; rypeiv, Jn. ix. 16; 4 nyepa
of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; 680s
caBBarov, a sabbath-day’s journey, the distance it is law-
ful to travel on the sabbath-day, i.e. acc. to the Talmud
two thousand cubits or paces, acc. to Epiphanius (haer.
66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, cf. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the
regulation was derived fr. Ex. xvi. 29); ef. Win. RWB.
s.v. Sabbathsweg; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 203 sq. [ef.
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. ix. 379]; Mangold in Schen-
kel v. 127 sq.; [Ginsburg in Alexander’s Kitto s. v. Sab-
bath Day’s Journey; Lumby on Acts i. 12 (in Cambr.
Bible for Schools) ]. as dat. of time [W. § 31, 9 b.;
B. § 133, 26]: caBBaro, Mt. xxiv. 20 [GLT Tr WH];
Lk: xiv. 1; r@ caBS8aro, Lk. vi. 9 Ltxt. T Tr WH;
xiii. 14 sq.; xiv. 3; Acts xiii. 44; év ca8Baro, Mt. xii.
2; Jn. v.16; vii. 22 [here L WH br. ev], 23; é€v ré oaf-
Baro, Lk. vi. 7; Jn. xix. 31. accus. 7d od88. during
(on) the sabbath [ef. B. §131, 11; W. §32,6]: Lk. xxiii.
56; xara nav o. every sabbath, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21;
xviii. 4. plur. ra od8Bara, of several sabbaths, Acts
xvii. 2 [some refer this to 2]. b. plur. ra cap.
(for the singular) of a single sabbath, sabbath-day, (the
use of the plur. being occasioned either by the plur.
names of festivals, as Ta éykaima, Gtvpa, yevéora, or by ©
the Chaldaic form xnav [W. 177 (167); B. 23 (21)]):
Mt. xxviii. 1; Col. ii. 16, (Ex. xx. 10; Lev. xxiii. 32 ete. ;
thy €Bdsunv ca8Bara kadovper, Joseph. antt. 3, 6,6; add,
1,1,1; [14,10, 25; Philo de Abrah. §5; de cherub.
§ 26; Plut. de superstitione 8]; tiv rév caB3arewv éoprny,
oaynyn
Plut. symp. 4, 6, 2; hodie tricesima sabbata, Hor. sat.
1. 9, 69; nowhere so used by John exc. in the phrase
pia Tv caBBdrwr, on which see 2 below); 7 jpéepa troy
o., L&. iv. 16; Acts xii. 14; xvi. 13 (Hx. xx. 8; xxxv.
3; Deut. v.12; Jer. xvii. 21sq.); rots ca8Baow and ev
tois ga8B8aouv (so constantly [exc. Lehm. in Mt. xii. 1,
12] by metaplasm for caBBaras, cf. W.63 (62); [B. 28
(21)]) on the sabbath-day: Mt. xii. 1 [see above], 5,
10-12 [see above]; Mk. i. 21; ii. 23; iii. 2,4; Lk. iv. 31;
vi. 9 [RG Lmrg.], (1 Mace. ii. 38; the Sept. uses the
form caSSaros, and Josephus both forms). On the
precepts of the Jews with regard to the observance of
the sabbath, which were for the most part extremely
punctilious and minute, cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sabbath ;
Ochler in Herzog xiii. 192 sqq. [revised by Orel/i in ed.
2 vol. xiii. 156 sqq.]; Schiirer, Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 28
Il.; Mangold in Schenkel v. p. 123 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.3
Geikie, Life and Words of Christ, ch. xxxviii. vol. ii.
p- 95 sqq.; Farrar, Life of Christ, ch. xxxi. vol. i. p.
432 sq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, vol. ii. p. 56 sqq.
and App. xvii. ]. 2. seven days, a week: mpatn oaf-
Barov, Mk. xvi. 9; dis tov oaB. twice in the week, Lk. xviii.
12. The plur. is used in the same sense in the phrase
}) pla tov oaBBaror, the first day of the week (see eis, 5)
[ Prof. Sophocles regards the gen. (dependent on jyépa)
in such exx. as those that follow (cf. Mk. xvi. 9 above)
as equiv. to pera w. an ace., the first day after the sabbath;
see his Lex. p. 43 par. 6]: Mt. xxviii. 1; Mk. xvi. 2;
Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx.1,19; Acts xx. 7; xara piav caBBatov
(LT Tr WH -rov), on the first day of every week, 1 Co.
V1. 2.
cayqyn, -7s, 7, (cdooe to load, fill), a large fishing-net,
a drag-net (Vulg. sagena [ef. Eng. seine]), used in catch-
ing fish that swim in shoals [cf. B. D.s. v. Net ; Trench,
Syn. §lxiv.]: Mt. xiii.47. (Sept.; Plut. solert. anim. p.
977 f.; Leian. pisc. 51; Tim. 22; Artem. oneir. 2, 14;
Ael. h. a. 11, 12; [Baddew cay. Babr. fab. 4, 1; 9, 6].) *
LaSSovkaios, -ov, 6, a Sadducee, a member of the party
of the Sadducces, who, distinguished for birth, wealth,
and official position, and not averse to the favor of the
Herod family and of the Romans, hated the common
people, were the opponents of the Pharisees, and reject-
ing tradition (see mapddoots, 2) acknowledged the au-
thority of the O.'T. alone in matters pertaining to faith
and morals (Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); they denied not
only the resurrection of the body (Mt. xxii. 23; Mk.
xii. 18; Lk. xx. 27; Acts xxiii. 8), but also the immor-
tality of the soul and future retribution (Wuyjs te rh
Siapovnvy Kat tas Kal’ adov Tyswpias Kat Timas avatpodor,
Joseph. b. j. 2, 8, 14, cf. antt. 18, 1, 4), as well as the
existence of angels and spirits (Acts xxiii. 8). They
maintained man’s freedom in opposition to the doc-
trine of divine predestination (ace. to Joseph. b. j. 2,
8, 14). They are mentioned in the N. T. (in addition
to the pass. already referred to) in Mt. iii. 7; xvi. 1, 6, 11
sq-, (in which passages they are associated apparently
with the Pharisees contrary to the truth of history [ (?)
ef. the Comm. ad Il. cc.]); Mt. xxii. 34; Actsiv.1; v.17;
566
Sarabinr
xxiii.6sq. The Sadducees derived their name appar-
ently not from the Hebr. pty, as though they boasted
of being pre-eminently ‘righteous’ or ‘ upright’ (since it
cannot be shown that the vowel i ever passed over into
u), but, acc. to a more probable conjecture now ap-
proved by many, from the Zadok (pis, Sept. Saddovx),
who was high-priest in the time of David and exhibited
special fidelity to the king and his house (2S. xv. 24sqq.;
1K.i.32sqq.); hence the posterity of this priest (DiT¥ 733,
Kizek. xl. 46; xliii. 19; xliv.15; xlviii.11) and all ‘their
adherents seem to fae been called Saddovkaion (D°PNT¥).
Cf., besides others, Win. RWB. s.v. Sadduciier ; Reuss
in Herzog xiii. p. 289 sqq. ; [Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 xiii.
pp. 210-244]; Geiger, Saddue. u. Pharisier (Brsl. 1863) ;
Keim i. p. 273 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. (2d ed.) p. 353 sq.];
Hausrath in Schenkel iv. p. 518 sqq.; Schiirer, Ntl. Zeit-
gesch. 2te Aufl. § 26; Wellhausen, Pharis. u. Sadduciier
(Greifsw. 1874); Oort, De oorsprong van den naam Sad-
ducéen, in the Theolog. Tijdschrift for 1876, p. 605 sqq.;
[ Ginsburg, in Alexander’s Kitto s. v.; Hdersheim, Jesus
the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. ii.; Geikie, Life of Christ, ch. xlv.
(cf. ch. v.); and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. for additional refer-
ences ].*
Dasdx«, (pi7y, a pr. name occurring often in the O.T.),
6, Sadoc: Mt. Ae
calivw: pres. inf. pass. calveoOar; (SAQ, ceiw) ; a
prop. to wag the tail: of dogs, Hom. Od. 16,6; Ael. v. h.
13,41; Aesop. fab. 229 ed. Halm [354 ed. Coray]; with
ovpy added, Od. 17, 302; Hes. theog. 771; odpay, Aesop
l.c.; al.; see Passow [or L. and S.]s.v. I. 2. metaph.
a. to flatter, fawn upon, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., al.). _b.
to move (the mind of one), a. agreeably: pass. tr
edmidos, Aeschyl., Oppian ; adnO7 caiver ty oyny, Aris-
tot. metaph. 13, 3 p.1090*, 37. B. to agitate, disturb,
trouble : pass. 1 Th. iii. 3 [here A.V. move (B. 263 (226))]
(here Lehm. doaivw, q.v.); of S€ catvdpevor tots eyo-
pevors eOakpvov, Diog. Laért. 8, 41.*
cakxos (Attic odkos), -ov, 6, Hebr. py [ef. Vanitek,
Fremdworter, s.v.], a@ sack (Lat. saccus) i. e. a. a
receptacle made for holding or carrying various things,
as money, food, ete. (Gen. xlii. 25, 35 ; Lev. xi. 32). b.
a coarse cloth (Lat. cilictum), a dark coarse stuff made
especially of the hair of animals [A. V. sackcloth]: Rev.
vi. 12; a garment of the like material, and clinging to
the person like a sack, which was wont to be worn (or
drawn on over the tunic instead of the cloak or mantle)
by mourners, penitents, suppliants, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x.
13, and also by those who, like the Hebrew prophets,
led an austere life, Rev. xi. 3 (cf. what is said of the
dress of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 4; of Elijah, 2 K. i.
8). More fully in Win. RWB. s.v. Sack; Roskoff in
Schenkel v. 134; [s.v. Sackcloth in B. D.; also in Me-
Clintock and Strong. (From Hat. down.) ]*
Zara, (now a missile), 6, Sala [so A. V. (but in Gen.
Salah); properly Shelah (so R. V.)], prop. name of a
man mentioned in Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24); [T Tr mrg.
WH read Sada also in Lk. iii. 32, for Sadpor, q. v.].*
Dadrabuyr, (OMAN whom I asked of God), 5, Sala
Jarapis
thiel [Grk. for Shealtiel (so R.V.)], the father of Zerub-
babel: Mt. i. 12; [Lk. iii. 27].*
Zadapls, [on its deriv. see Pape, EKigennamen, s. v. |,
-ivos, », Salamis, the principal city of the island Cyprus:
Acts xiii. 5. [BB.DD.; Dict. of Geog. s. v.; Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 120 sq.]*
Zoreip, ro, Salim, a town which ace. to Eusebius and
Jerome [Onomast. (ed. Larsow and Parthey) pp. 28, 11;
29, 14] was eight miles S. of Scythopolis: Jn. iii. 23; cf.
Pressel in Herzog xiii. 326; [ef. Aivav]. See Sadnp.*
cadetw ; 1 aor. ecddevoa; Pass., pres. ptep. wadevdpe-
vos; pf. ptep. weradevpevos; 1 aor. éoadevOnv; 1 fut.
cahevOncopa; (cados, q. v.); fr. Aeschyl. and Arstph.
down; in Sept. pass. oadevowat for DID and 373}; a.
prop. of the motion produced by winds, storms, waves,
etc. ; to agitate or shake: xaXapov, pass., Mt. xi. 7; Lk.
vii. 243 to cause to totter, ras Suvapets Tov ovp., pass., Mt.
xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; Lk. xxi. 26; rav yqv, Heb. xii.
26 (Is. xxiv. 20; Am. ix.5); an edifice, Lk. vi. 48; Acts
iv. 31; xvi. 26; ra& pr cadevdpeva, the things which are
not shaken, i. e. the perfect state of things which will
exist after the return of Christ from heaven and will
undergo no change, opp. to ra cadevdueva, the present
order of things subject to vicissitude and decay, Heb.
xii. 27. to shake thoroughly, of a measure filled by shak-
ing its contents together, Lk. vi. 38. b. to shake
deen overthrow, i. e. trop. to cast down from one’s (secure
and happy) state, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); by a
trop. use foreign to prof. auth. to move or agitate the
mind, to disturb one: twa dm Tov vods, so as to throw
him out of his sober and natural mental state [B. 322
(277)], 2 Th. ii. 2; rods dxAous, to stir up, Acts xvii.
Lae
Zadjp, 7, (Heb. pow), Salem: Heb. vii. 1 sq.; cf. Gen.
xiv. 18, which some (as Gesenius, Winer, Hitzig, Knobel,
Delitzsch) think is the ancient name of the city of Jer-
usalem, appealing to the words of Ps. Ixxvi. 3 7)
130 powa, and Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 tiv pévroe Sédupa
Borepov éxddecav ‘IepoodAvpa; a b. j. 6, 10. But more
correctly [yet cf. B. D. s. v. Salem, and s. v. Melchizedek
sub fin.] others (as Rosenmiiller, Bleek, Tuch, Roediger
in Gesen. Thesaur. s. v. p. 1422, Dillmann), relying on
the testimony of Jerome ([Ep. ad Evangelum §7i.e.]
Ep. 73 in Vallarsi’s ed. of his Opp. i. p. 446), hold that
it is the same as Sadeiw (q.v.). For the ancient name
of Jerusalem was 013} (Judg. xix. 10; 1 Chr. xi. 4; [ef.
B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Jebus]), and the form of the name in
Ps. Ixxvi. 3 [where Sept. eipyvn] is to be regarded as
poetical, signifying ‘safe.’ *
Yarpdy, (1i9w, Ruth iv. 21), 6, indecl., Salmon, the
name of a man: Mt. i. 4sq.; Lk. iii. 32 [here TWH
Tr mrg. SaAd].*
Zarpovy, -ns, 7, Salmone, Salmonium, [also Sammo-
nium], an eastern and partly northern promontory of
Crete opposite Cnidus and Rhodes [the identification of
which is somewhat uncertain; see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Salmone, and Dict. of Geogr. s. v. Samonium]: Acts
xxvii. 7.*
567
Zapapera
wddos, -ov, 6, the tossing or swell of the sea [R. V. bil-
lows]: Lk. xxi. 25. (Soph., Eur., al.)*
oddmyé, -vyyos, 7, a trumpet: Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. 161
(141) ; 343 (295)]; 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xii. 19; Rev. i.
10; iv. 13 vill. 2,6, 13; ix. 14; ev oddmeyy: Oeod, a trum-
pet which sounds at God’s command (W. § 36, 3 b.), 1
Th. iv. 16; ev tH €oxary oddmeyy, the trumpet which
will sound at the last day, 1 Co. xv. 52, [4 (2) Esdr. vi.
23; see Comm. on 1 Th.u.s.]. (From Hom. down; Sept.
for 1Di¥ and 77337.) *
carrito ; fut. cadrice (for the earlier caltiyé@, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191; Sept. also cadmo, as Num. x. [3],
5, 8, 10); 1 aor. Seenatiira (also in Sept.; Ael. v. h. 1,
26 and other later writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.], for the earlier
éoaAmyéa, Xen. anab. 1, 2,17) [ef. W. 89 (85); B. 37
(32); WH. App. p.170]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly
for ypA, also for W811; to sound a trumpet, [A.V. (most-
ly) sound]: Rev. viii. 6-10, 12 sq.; ix. 1,13; x. 7; xi. 15;
cadrioe (strictly sc. 6 cadmiorns or 7 cadmcyé), like our
the trumpet will sound (cf. W. § 58, 9b. B.; [B. § 129,
16]), 1 Co. xv. 52; ocadmiCew eumpoobev Eéavrod, i.e. to
take care that what we do comes to everybody’s ears,
make a great noise about it, [ef. our do a thing ‘with a
flourish of trumpets’], Mt. vi. 2 (Cic. ad div. 16, 21
quod polliceris, te buccinatorem fore nostrae existima-
tionis; Achill. Tat. 8, 10 airy otx tnd cddreyye pévor,
GN Kal KNpuKt porxyeverat).*
cadmorys (a later form, used by Theophr. char. 25;
Polyb. 1, 45, 18; Dion. Hal. 4, 18, [al.], for the earlier
and better cadmyxrys, Thuc. 6, 69; Xen. an. 4, 3, 295
Joseph. b. j. 8, 6, 2; and oadmexrys, Dem. p. 284, 26; App.
hisp. 6, 93; and in the best codd. of Xen., Diod., Plut.,
l.; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 279]; fr. cadmifo
[q.v.]), -ov, 6, a trumpeter: Rev. xviii. 22.*
Dadrdpun, [Hebr. ‘peaceful ’], -ns, 7, Salome, the wife of
Zebedee, and the mother of the apostles James the
elder and John: Mk. xv. 40; xvi. 1.*
Darwopadv, see Sodouar.
Dapdpeva [on the accent cf. Chandler § 104; B.17 (15);
-ia T WH (see Tf. Proleg. p. Re cf. I,c); on the forms
see Abbot in B.D. Am. ed. s. v.], -as [ef. B. u. s.], 9 [ef.
W. § 18, 5a.], (Hebr. pnw, Chald. }7y2w pron. Scha-
me-ra-in, Assyr. Samirina), [on the dlecty, see B. D. s. v.],
Samaria ; 1. the name of a city built by Omri
king of Israel (1 K. xvi. 24), on a mountain of the same
name (}/WY 7, Am. vi. 1), situated in the tribe of
Ephraim; it was the capital of the whole region and
the residence of the kings of Israel. After having been
besieged three years by Shalmaneser [IV.], king ‘of As-
syria, it was taken and doubtless devastated by Sargon,
his son and successor, B.C. 722, who deported the ten
tribes of Israel and supplied their place with other
settlers; 2 K. xvii. 5 sq. 24 sq.; xviii. 9 sqq. After its
restoration, it was utterly destroyed by John Hyrcanus
the Jewish prince and high-priest (see next word). Long
afterwards rebuilt once more, it was given by Augus-
tus to Herod [the Great], by whom it was named in
honor of Augustus Sebasie, i.e. Augusta, (Strab. lib. 16,
YapapeiTns
p- 760; Joseph. antt. 15, 7,3; 8,5). It is now an ob-
scure village bearing the name of Sebustieh or Sebastiyeh
(cf. Bddeker, Palistina, p. 354 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 340
sqq-; Murray, Undbk. Pt. ii. p. 329 sqq.]). It is men-
tioned, Acts viii. 5 LT WH, ets ryv modu ths Sapapeias
(gen. of apposition, cf. W. § 59, 8 a.; [B. § 123, 4]), but
ace. to the better reading eis méAw rhs Sap. the gen. is
partitive, and does not denote the city but the Samar-
itan territory; cf. vs. 9. 2. the Samaritan terri-
tory, the region of Samaria, of which the city Samaria
was the capital: Lk. xvii. 11; Jn. iv. 4 sq. 7; Actsi. 8;
Vili. 1, 5 (see above), 9; ix. 31; xv. 3; by meton. for the
inhabitants of the region, Acts viii. 14. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Samaria; Robinson, Palestine ii. 288 sqq.; Peter-
mann in Herzog xiii. 359 sqq.; [esp. Kautzsch in (Riehm
s. v. Samaritaner, and) Herzog ed. 2, xiii. 340 sqq., and
reff. there and in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Samaria ].*
Lapapelrys (-irns Tdf.; [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 87; WH.
App. p. 154; cf. I, «]), (Sapapeca), -ov, 6, a Samaritan
(Samarites, Curt. 4,8, 9; Tac. ann. 12,54; Samaritanus,
Vulg. [(2 K. xvii. 29 ‘Samaritae’)] and eccl. writ.), i.e.
an inhabitant either of the city or of the province of Sa-
maria. The origin of the Samaritans was as follows:
After Shalmaneser [al. say Esarhaddon, cf. Ezr. iv. 2, 10;
but see Kautzsch in Herzog ed. 2, as referred to under the
preceding word ], king of Assyria, had sent colonists from
Babylon, Cuthah, Ava, Hamath, and Sepharvaim into
the land of Samaria which he had devastated and de-
populated [see Saydpeva, 1], those Israelites who had
remained in their desolated country [cf. 2 Ch. xxx. 6,
10; xxxiv. 9] associated and intermarried with these
heathen colonists and thus produced a mixed race.
When the Jews on their return from exile were pre-
paring to rebuild the temple of Jerusalem, the Samari-
tans asked to be allowed to bear their part in the com-
mon work. On being refused by the Jews, who were
unwilling to recognize them as brethren, they not only
sent letters to the king of Persia and caused the Jews
to be compelled to desist from their undertaking down
to the second year of Darius [Hystaspis] (B. c. 520),
but also built a temple for themselves on Mount Gerizim,
a place held sacred even from the days of Moses [cf.
Deut. xxvii. 12, etc.], and worshipped Jehovah there
according to the law of Moses, recognizing only the
Pentateuch as sacred. This temple was destroyed B. c.
129 by John Hyrcanus. Deprived of their temple, the
Samaritans have nevertheless continued to worship on
their sacred mountain quite down to the present time,
although their numbers are reduced to some forty or
fifty families. Hence it came to pass that the Samari-
tans and the Jews entertained inveterate and unap-
peasable enmity towards each other. Samaritans are
mentioned in the foll. N. T. pass.: Mt. x.5; Lk. ix. 52;
x. 33; xvii. 16; Jn. iv. 9 [here T om. WH br. the cl.], 39
sq-; villi. 48; Acts viii. 25. In Hebr. the Samaritans are
called nv3\10, 2 K. xvii. 29. Cf. Juynboll, Commentarii
in historiam gentis Samaritanae (Lugd. Bat. 1846); Win.
RWB. s. v. Samaritaner; Petermann in Herzog xiii. p.
568
campos
363 sqq.; Schrader in Schenkel v. p. 150 sqq.; [esp.
Kautzsch in Herzog and Riehm u. s.].*
Dapapetris (-iris Tdé.; [see the preced. word ]), -dos,
7, (fem. of Sapuapeirns), a Samaritan woman: Jn. iv. 9.
(The Samaritan territory, Joseph. b. j. [1, 21, 2, ete.];
3, 7, 32; Sapuapeiris x@pa, ib. 3, 3, 4.) *
Zapolpaky [-Gpa- Kh <* G (as here and there in prof.
auth.; see Pape, Kigennamen, s.v.); ace. to some ‘height
of ‘Thrace’, acc. to others ‘Thracian Samos’ (cf. Sdyos) ;
other opinions see in Pape l. c.], -ys, 4, Samothrace, an
island of the 7AWgean Sea, about 38 m. distant from the
coast of Thrace where the river Hebrus empties into
the sea (Plin. h. n. 4, 12, (23)), [now Samothraki]: Acts
58 (ioe bs He
Zapos, [(prob. ‘height’; ef. Pape, Eigennamen)], -ov,
7), Samos, an island in that part of the Augean which is
called the Icarian Sea, opposite Ionia and not far from
Ephesus; it was the birthplace of Pythagoras; [now
Grk. Samo, Turkish Susam Adassi]: Acts xx. 15.*
DapovrA, Onin, for ONyanw i i.e. ‘heard of God’, fr.
pow and 5s; ef. 1S. i. 20, 27 [see B. D. s. v. Samuel]),
6, [indeel. ; Joseph. (antt. 5, 10, 3) Sapovndos, -ov],
Samuel, the son of Elkanah by his wife Anna [or Han-
nah], the last of the nus’ or judges, a distinguished
prophet, and the founder of the prophetic order. He
gave the Jews their first kings, Saul and David: Acts
iii. 245 xiii. 20; Heb. sa. 32. \@S: i—xxy.) ci. xxviiln;
Sir. xlvi. 13 sqq.) *
Zappov, (wow fr. wow, ‘sun-like’, cf. Hebr. ive
fr. ws), [B. 15 (14)], 6, Samson (Vulg. Samson), one
of the Israelite judges (OMY), famous for his strength
and courage, the Hebrew Hercules [cf. BB.DD.; McC.
and S. s. v. 2,4; esp. Orelli in Herzog ed. 2s. v. Sim-
son] (Judg. xiii. sqq.): Heb. xi. 32.*
cavSaXov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of cavdadov [which is prob.
a Persian word; cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.]), a
sandal, a sole made of wood or leather, covering the bottom
of the foot and bound on with thongs: Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii.
8. (Hdt., Joseph., Diod., Ael., Hdian., al.; for Sy) in
Is.xx.2; Judith x.4; xvi. 9. [Inthe Sept. and Joseph.
cavd. and trddnua are used indiscriminately ; cf. Is. xx.
2; Josh. v. 15; Joseph. b. j. 6,1, 8.]) Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Schuhe; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 255; [Kamphausen
in Riehm p. 1435 sqq.; B.D. s.v. Sandal; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 621].*
cavis, -idos, 7, a board, a plank: Acts xxvii. 44.
Hom. down; Sept., Cant. viii. 9; Ezek. xxvii. 5.) *
Zaovd, (WNW ‘asked for’), 6, indecl. (in Joseph. Saov-
Nos), Saul; 1. the name of the first king of Israel:
Acts xiii. 21. 2. the Jewish name of the apostle
Paul, but occurring only in address [ef. B. 6]: Acts ix.
4,17; xxii. 7,13; xxvi. 14; in the other pass. of the
Acts the form SadXos (q. v-) with the Grk. term. is used.*
campds, -, -dv, (anew, 2 aor. pass. camnvat) ; ak
rotten, putrid, ([Hipponax], Hipper., Arstph., al.). 2.
corrupted by age and no longer fit for use, worn out,
(Arstph., Dio Chr., al.); hence in general, of poor qual-
ity, bad, unfit for use, worthless, [A. V. corrupt], (way, é
(Fr.
Sarhpeipn 5
py tH iiav xpeiav mAnpot, campdy Aéyouev, Chrys. hom.
4 on 1 Ep. to Tim.) : dévdpov, kapmds, opp. to kadds, Mt.
vii. 17 sq.; xii. 33; Lk. vi. 43; fishes, Mt. xiii. 48 [here
A.V. bad]; trop. Adyos, Eph. iv. 29 (cf. Harless ad loc.) ;
Sdypa, Epict. 3, 22, 61. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 377 sq.*
Lardeipn, dat. -» (RGTWH),-a (L Tr; ef. [ WH.
App. p. 156]; B.11; [W. 62 (61)]), 4, (either Aram.
°
NV i. e. ‘beautiful’; Peshitto [pence ; or fr. camet-
pos, q. v-), Sapphira, the name of a woman: Acts v. 1.*
oamdetpos, -ov, 7, Hebr. WDD, sapphire, a precious
stone [perh. our lapis lazuli, cf. B.D. s. v. Sapphire ;
Riehm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 14]: Rev. xxi.19. (The-
ophr., Diosc., al.; Sept.) *
capyavy [ (prop. ‘ braided-work’, fr. r. tark; Fick, Pt.
iii. p. 598; Vanitek p. 297) ], -ys, 73 1. a braided
rope, a band, (Aeschyl. suppl. 788). 2. a basket, a
basket made of ropes, a hamper (cf. B.D. s. v. Basket] :
2 Co. xi. 33; (Timocl. in Athen. 8 p. 339 e.; 9 p.407e.;
[al.]).*
Zapbes, dat. -eow, ai, [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., down], Sar-
dis [or Sardes], the capital of Lydia, a luxurious city ;
now an obscure village, Sart, with extensive ruins: Rev.
i211; iii. 1,4. [Cf. McC. and S. s. v.]*
oapSivos, -ov, 6, Rev. iv. 3 Rec., i. q. adpdior, q. v.*
cadpdiov, -ov, Td, [neut. of wapdi0s, see below], sard, sar-
dius, a precious stone, of which there are two kinds,
concerning which Theophr. de lapid. 16, 5, § 30 ed.
Schneid. says, rod yap capSiov 76 péev Suadaves épvdpdrepov
S€ xadeirar OnAv, To dé Scaaves prev pedavrepov Sé Kat
apoev, the former of which is called carnelian (because
flesh-colored; Hebr. 078, Sept. capdcov, Ex. xxviii. 17;
XXXVi. 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13; aipatdevra oapéia,
Orph. de lapid. 16, 5), the latter sard: Rev. iv. 3 (Rec.
capdivo); xxi. 20GLTTrWH. Hence the adj. cap-
Stos, -a, -ov, [fr. Sapders, cf. Plin. h. n. 37, 7] sardine se.
Aidos (the full phrase occurs Ex. xxxv. 8 [var.]): Rev.
xxi. 20 Rec. [B. D.s. vv. Sardine, Sardius.]*
capbdidvue, i. gq. capddvuE (q. v.): Rev. xxi. 20 Lehm.*
capdévué [ Leh. capdidvv€ |, -vxos, 6, (capdiov and dvvé),
sardonyx, a precious stone marked by the red colors of
the carnelian (sard) and the white of the onyx [B. D.
s.v.; Riehm, HWB. s.v. Edelsteine 12]: Rev. xxi. 20.
(Joseph., Plut., Ptol., al.; [Gen. ii. 12 Aq. (Montf.)].)*
Zdperra [Trmrg. SdpepOa; Tdf. in O. T. Saperrd],
(nas fr. 41¥ to smelt; hence perh. ‘smelting-house’),
-ov [yet cf. B. 15 (14); but declined in Obad.], ra; Sarep-
ta [so A. V.; better with O. T. Zarephath] a Pheenician
town between Tyre and Sidon, but nearer Sidon, [now
Surafend; cf. B. D.s. v. Zarephath], (1 K. xvii. 9; Obad.
20; in Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2 SapeiOa): rhs SSwvias, in
the land of Sidon, Lk. iv. 26. Cf. Robinson, Palestine
ii. 474 sqq.; [B. D. us.].*
wapkiKds, -7, -dv, (cap), fleshly, carnal (Vulg. carnalis) ;
1. having the nature of flesh, i. e. under the control of the
animal appetites (see cap€, 3), Ro. vii. 14 Ree. (see odp-
«ivos, 3); governed by mere human nature (see odpé, 4)
not by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. iii. 1, 3, also 4 RG; havy-
69
capt
ing its seat in the animal nature or roused by the animal
nature, ai capktkai emOupia, 1 Pet. ii. 113; i. gq. human:
with the included idea of weakness, érAa, 2 Co. x. 4; with
the included idea of depravity, capk. codia (i. e. ravoup-
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2), 2 Co.i.12. [(Anthol. Pal. 1, 107; cf.
améxov TOV CapKik@v k. TapaTiKav emiOupiav, ‘Teaching’
ete.1,4). Cf. Trench, Syn. § Ixxi.] 2. pertaining
to the flesh, i.e. to the body (see cap, 2): relating to
birth, lineage, ete., évrodn, Heb. vii. 16 Ree.; ra wapxixa,
things needed for the sustenance of the body, Ro. xv.
27; 1 Co.ix. 11, (Aristot. h. anim. 10, 2 p. 635%, 11; Plut.
de placit. philos. 5, 3, 7; once in Sept., 2 Chr. xxxii. 8
Compl.).*
capkwos, -7, -ov, (oapé), [Arstph., Plat., Aristot., al.],
fleshy, Lat. carneus, i. e. 1. consisting of flesh, com-
posed of flesh, (for proparoxytones ending in -wos gen-
erally denote the material of which a thing is made,
ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 46 sq.; [Donaldson, New
Crat. § 258]); Vule. carnalis: opp. to Ai@iwos, 2 Co. iii.
3 (cdpk. ix6vs, opp. to a fish of gold which has been
dreamed of, Theocr. id. 21, 66; the word is also found
in Plato, Aristot., Theophr., Plut.; Sept., al-). 2:
pertaining to the body (as earthly and perishable material,
opp. to (wi dkatadutos): Heb. vii. 16 G LT Tr WH (see
capkikds, 2). 3. it is used where capxixds might
have been expected: viz. by G LT Tr WH in Ro. vii. 14
and 1 Co. iii. 1; in these pass., unless we decide that Paul
used oapkexds and oadpxivos indiscriminately, we must
suppose that odpxiwos expresses the idea of capxuxds with
an emphasis: wholly given up to the flesh, rooted in the
flesh as it were. Cf. W.§16,3 y.; Fritzsche u. s.; Reiche,
Comment. crit. in N. T. i. p. 138 sqq.; Holsten, Zum
Evang. des Paulus u. Petrus p. 397 sqq. (Rostock, 1867) ;
[ Trench, Syn. § lxxii.].*
capt, capkés, 9, (Aeol. cipé; hence it seems to be de-
rived fr. cvp, akin to caipe, ‘to draw,’ ‘to draw off,’
and to signify what can be stripped off fr. the bones [Etym.
Magn. 708, 34; “sed quis subsignabit” (Lob. Paralip.
p- 111)]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Ww;
1. prop. flesh (the soft substance of the living body,
which covers the bones and is permeated with blood) of
both men and beasts: 1 Co. xv. 39; plur.— of the flesh
of many beings, Rev. xix. 18, 21; of the parts of the
flesh of one, Lk. xxiv. 39 Tdf.; Rev. xvii. 16; accord-
ingly it is distinguished both from blood, cap kai aipa
(on which expression see below, 2 a.; 3 bis; 4 fin. [ef.
W.19]), and from bones, mvedpa odpka Kat doTea ovK EXEL,
Lk. xxiv. 39 (ov yap ére odpkas Te Kal doréa ives Exovouw,
Hom. Od. 11, 219). bayeiv Tas Gapkas Tivds: prop.,
Rev. xvii. 16; xix. 18, (Lev. xxvi. 29; kareo@iew, 2 K.
ix. 36, and often in Sept.; in class. Grk. freq. Bi8packew
adpkas; capkav édad7, Plut. septem sap. conviv. c. 16) ;
trop. to torture one with eternal penal torments, Jas. v. 3,
ef. Mie. iii. 3; Ps. xxvi. (xxvil.) 2; @ayetv and tpwyev
ri odpka Tod viod Tod avOpdmov, in fig. disc. to appropri-
ate to one’s self the saving results of the violent death en-
dured by Christ, In. vi.52-56; dmépyeoOat or mopeveo Oat
émiaw capkds, to follow after the flesh, is used of those
odpé
who are on the search for persons with whom they can
gratify their lust [see diow, 2 a.], Jude 7; 2 Pet. ii.
10; 1d oadpa ths capkos, the body compacted of flesh
[ef. W. 188 (177)], Col. i. 22. Since the flesh is the vis-
ible part of the body, capé is
2. i. q. the body, not designating it, however, as a
skilful combination of related parts (‘an organism,’
which is denoted by the word oépa), but signifying the
material or substance of the living body [cf. Ae-
schyl. Sept. 622 yépovra rov vodv capxa & 7Badcav peper];
a. univ.: Jn. vi. 63 (see mvedua, 2 p. 520° mid.); Acts
ii. 26, 30 Rec.; 2 Co. xii. 7; Gal. iv. 14; Eph. v. 29; Heb.
ix. 10,13; [1 Pet. iii. 21]; Jude 8; pia odpé&, one body,
of husband and wife, Mk. x. 8; so eis odpxa piav (fr. Gen.
li. 24), Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x. 8; 1 Co. vi. 16; Eph. v. 31;
opp. to wuxn, Actsii. 31 (exer... Ino. Xp....Tv oapka
brep THs capkos Nav Kal THY WuxnY Urép TOV WuxXeV Nuar,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 49, 6 [ef. Iren. 5, 1,1; but GLTTr
WH drop 7 Wuy7 adrod in Actsl.c.]); opp. to mvedpa (the
human), 1 Co. v.5; 2Co. vii.1; Col. ii.5; 1 Pet. iii. 18;
iv.6; odp& k. atya, i. q. Wuxixdy odpa, 1 Co. xv. 50, cf.
44; » weptrouyn ev capki, Ro. ii. 28; Eph. ii. 11; rd apd-
owrdy pov ev capki,[ A.V. my face in the flesh], my bodily
countenance, Col. ii. 1; aoOévera capkés, of disease, Gal.
iv. 13; €v rh OvntH capki nyay, 2 Co. iv. 11 (cf. &v ra
TopaTt nuady, VS. 10); ev 77 Tapki av’tov, by giving up his
body to death, Eph. ii. 14 (15) ; also 8a tas capkés airod,
Heb. x. 20, ef. Jn. vi. 51, (mpoopéepew thy odpka pov, to
offer in sacrifice my flesh — Christ is speaking, Barn. ep.
7,53 thy odpxa rapadodvvat eis katapOopar, ibid. 5,1). life
on earth, which is passed in the body (flesh), is desig-
nated by the foll. phrases: év capki eivat, Ro. vii. 5 (where
Paul uses this expression with designed ambiguity in or-
der to involve also the ethical sense, ‘to be in the power
of the flesh,’ to be prompted and governed by the flesh;
see 4 below) ; (qv év capki, Gal. ii. 20; Phil. i. 22; ém-
uevew ev oapxi, Phil. i. 24; 6 €v capki xpdvos, 1 Pet. iv. 2;
ai uépat THS Gapkos avtod, of Christ’s life on earth, Heb.
v.7. év oapki or év ry capxi, in things pertaining to the
flesh (body), such as circumcision, descent, ete.: Gal. vi.
12 sq.; memovdeva, Phil. iii. 3 sq.3 eyew memoibnow, Phil.
iii. 4. b. used of natural or physical origin,
generation, relationship: oi ovyyevets kara odpxa,
Ro. ix. 3 [ef. W. § 20, 2 a.]; réxva tis capkds, children
by birth, natural posterity, ibid. 8; ddeAav ev capi kai
ev kupie, a natural brother (as it were) and a Christian
brother, Philem. 16; of tas capkds quay marépes, our nat-
ural fathers (opp. to God 6 warhp rév mvevpdtar, see
matyp, 1 a. and 3 b.), Heb. xii. 9; ra @Ovn év capxi, Gen-
tiles by birth, Eph. ii. 11; "IopayA «ard odpxa, 1 Co. x.
18 (the opposite term IopayA tod Geod, of Christians, is
found in Gal. vi. 16); 7d xara odpka, as respects the flesh
i.e. human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [(Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 32, 2;
Tren. haer. 4, 4, 1 and frag. 17 ed. Stieren p- 836) ]; yevd-
pHevos €k oméppatos Aaveid xara a. Ro. i. 3; 6 Kata odpka
yevvnOeis, born by natural generation (opp. to 6 kar
Tvevpa yevy. i. e. by the supernatural power of God, oper-
ating in the promise), Gal. iv. 29, 23; rd yeyevynuevov éx
570
oapé
Ths gapkds adp& ear, that which has been born of the
natural man is a natural man (opp. to one who has been
born again by the power of the Holy Spirit), Jn. iii. 6 ;
7) gdp pov, those with whom I share my natural origin,
my fellow-countrymen, Ro. xi. 14 (i800 é07@ cov Kat
cdpkes cov, 2S. v.1; add, xix. 13; Gen. xxxvii. 27; Judg.
ix. 2); etvat ek ths oapkos kK. €k Tav doTéwv Twos, Which
in its proper use signifies to be ‘formed out of one’s flesh
and bones’ (Gen. ii. 23; to be related to one by birth,
Gen. xxix. 14), is transferred metaph. to the church,
which spiritually derives its origin from Christ and
is united to him, just as Eve drew her origin from her
husband Adam, Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mrg. br.]. a
the sensuous nature of man, ‘the animal nature’:
without any suggestion of depravity, rd 6¢Anua tis cap-
Kos, of sexual desire, Jn. i. 13; the animal nature with
cravings which incite to sin: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38;
Ro. vii. 18 (for which ra péAn is used in 22 sq.); xiii.
14; Jade 23; opp. to 6 vois, Ro. vii. 25; 9 émOupia ris
capxkés, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (with its manifestation, 7 émOupia rav
é6parper; [al. regard this last as a new specification;
cf. Westcott ad loc.]); plur. 2 Pet. ii. 18, (ra ris capkis
man, 4 Mace. vii. 18; 76 py SedovAGobat GapkKt Kai Tos
mabeot tavtns Sudyewv, bp’ dv karacrapevos 6 vods Tis Ovn=
THs avaripmrara pdvapias, e’Satudv Te kai paxdptov, Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. c. 13; rs capxds 7Sovn, opp. to Wuxn,
Plut. de virt. et vit.c.3; add, Philo de gigant. $7; Diog.
Laért. 10, 145; animo cum hac carne grave certamen est,
Sen. consol. ad Mare. 24; animus liber habitat; nunquam
me caro ista compellet ad metum, Sen. epp. 65 [7, 3, 22];
non est summa felicitatis nostrae in carne ponenda, ibid.
74 [9, 3, 16]). the physical nature of man as subject to
suffering: maGew oapxi, 1 Pet. iv. 1; év rH cwapki pov,
in that my flesh suffers afflictions, Col. i. 24 (where cf.
Meyer and De Wette [and Bp. Lghtft.]); Oripw éyew
Ty wapki, 1 Co. vii. 28.
3. a living creature (because possessed of a body of
flesh), whether man or beast: maoa capé (in imitation
of the Hebr. swa-53 [W. 33]), every living creature, 1
Pet. i. 24; with ov preceding (qualifying the verb [W.
§ 26,1; B. 121 (106)]), no living creature, Mt. xxiv. 22;
Mk. xiii. 20; spec. a man (avOpemos for Ww3, Gen. vi.
13), generally with a suggestion of weakness, frailty,
mortality: Sir. xxviii. 5; év r@ Oe@ Amica, od PoBnG7-
copa ri romoes pot oap&, Ps. lv. (Ivi.) 5; ef. Jer. xvii. 5;
énvnoOn, Ste oap& eiow, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviil.) 39; odpé x.
aia, Eph. vi. 12; yeved oapkds x. aiparos, 1) wév TeeuTa,
érépa Sé yevvara, Sir. xiv. 18; 6 Adyos aap eyevero, en-
tered into participation in human nature, Jn. i. 14 (the
apostle used cdpé, not dvOpa7os, apparently in order to
indicate that he who possessed supreme majesty did not
shrink from union with extreme weakness) ; evpioxew Te
kara odpxa, to attain to anything after the manner of a
(weak) man, i. e. by the use of merely human powers,
Ro. iv. 1 (for snbstance equiv. to e& pywr in vs. 2);
Hebraistically (see above), maoa odpé, all men, Lk. iii.
6; Jn. xvii. 2 [W. § 30, 1a.]; Acts ii. 17; Sir. xlv. 45
with od or un preceding (qualifying the verb [W. and
odpé
B. as referred to above]), no man, no mortal, Ro. iii. 20;
1 Co. i. 29; Gal. ii. 16. man as he appears, such as he
presents himself to view, man’s external appearance and
condition: kata odpxka xpivew, Jn. viii. 15 [ef. W. 583
(542)] (i. q. kpivew Kar’ dye, vii. 24); ywookew or eide-
vat Twa Kata oapka, 2 Co. v.16; of Kara odpKa KUpiot (see
xara, II. 3b.), Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22. univ. human
nature, the soul included: év é6potmpare oapxds dpyaprias, in
a visible form, like human nature which is subject to sin,
Ro. viii. 3 [ef. duolwpa, b.]; €v capki épyerOa, to appear
clothed in human nature, 1 Jn. iv. 2and Rec. in 3; 2 Jn.
7, (Barn. ep. 5, 10); gavepododa, 1 Tim. iii. 16 (Barn.
ep. 5, 6; 6, 7; 12,10); Kexowvwvyxevat aiparos K. oapkds,
Heb. ii. 14.
4. ocap&, when either expressly or tacitly opp. to rd
mvevpa (Tov Geod), has an ethical sense and denotes
mere human nature, the earthly nature of man apart
from divine influence, and therefore prone to sin and op-
posed to God; accordingly it includes whatever in t he
soul is weak, low, debased, tending to ungodliness and
vice (“ Thou must not understand ‘flesh’, therefore, as
though that only were ‘flesh’ which is connected with un-
chastity, but St. Paul uses ‘flesh’ of the whole man, body
and soul, reason and all his faculties included, because all
that is in him longs and strives after the flesh” (Luther,
Pref. to the Ep. to the Rom.) ; “note that ‘flesh’ signifies
the entire nature of man, sense and reason, without the
Holy Spirit” (Aelanchthon, Loci, ed. of 1535, in Corpus
Reform. xxi. p. 277). This definition is strikingly sup-
ported by these two utterances of Paul: ovdepiav éoynkev
aveow 7 oapé jar, 2 Co. vii. 5; ov« eoxnxa averw TO
mvevpari pov, 2 Co. ii. 13): Ro. viii. 3; Gal. v. 13, 19;
opp: to 76 mvedpa (Tov Geov), Ro. viii. 6 sq. 12 sq.; Gal.
v. 16 sq.; vi. 8; Col. ii. 13 (on which see axpoBvoria, c.) ;
23 (see mAnoporn); emOupia capkds, Gal. v. 163; ai émOv-
piace and ra OeAjpata tis capkés, Eph. ii. 3; 6 vovs ths
oapkés, Col. ii. 18; capa THs capKds, a body given up to
the control of the flesh, i. e. a body whose members our
nature, estranged from God, used as its instruments (cf.
Ro. vi. 19), Col. ii. 11 GL T Tr WH; ra ris capkés (opp.
to ta Tov mvevparos), the things which please the flesh,
which the flesh craves, Ro. viii. 5; capi émurehovpar, to
make for one’s self an end [see émrehéw, 1 fin.] by de-
voting one’s self to the flesh, i. e. by gradually losing the
Holy Spirit and giving one’s self up to the control of
the flesh, Gal. iii. 3; oravpotv tiv cdpxa avtov (see orav-
pd, 3b.), Gal. v. 24; ev capi eivar (opp. to év mvevuart,
sc. Tov Geod), to be in the power of the flesh, under the
control of the flesh, Ro. viii. 8 sq., cf. vii. 5 (see 2 a.
above); of kata cdpxa dvres, who exhibit the nature of
the flesh, i. q. of capktxot (opp. to of kara mvetpa bvtes),
Ro. viii. 5; kata odpxa mepurareiv, to live ace. to the
standard of the flesh, to comply in conduct with the im-
pulse of the flesh, Ro. viii. 1 Rec.; 2 Co. x. 2; opp. to
Kata mvevpa, Ro. viii. 4; BovdeverOatr, 2 Co. i.17; Kkav-
yaoOa, 2 Co. xi. 18 where cf. Meyer; (opp. to xara
mvevpa) (qv, Ro. viii. 12 sq. (€v capxt rvyxavovaty, ad od
kata capka (ow, of Christians, Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 8); év
571
caTap
capkt mepurrarovrtes ov KaTa oapKa oTparevopucba, although
the nature in which we live is earthly and therefore
weak, yet we do not carry on our warfare according to
its law, 2 Co. x. 3, (od kara odpxa ypadeww, adda Kara
yvopnv Geov, Ignat. ad Rom. 8,3); with the suggestion
of weakness as respects knowledge: capé x.
aiza, a man liable to err, fallible man: Mt. xvi. 17; Gal.
i. 16; 7 doOeveca THs capkés, Ro. vi. 19; codot kata odpka,
1 Co. i. 26. Cf. Tholuck, Ueber capé als Quelle der
Siinde, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1855, p. 477 sqq. ;
C. Holsten, Die Bedeut. des Wortes capé im Lelrbe-
griffe des Paulus, 4to, Rostock 1855 [reprinted in his
Zam Evang. des Paul. u. Petr. p. 365 sqq. (Rostock,
1867); see also (with esp. ref. to Holsten) Liidemann,
Die Anthropologie des Apost. Paul. (Kiel, 1872)];
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 66
sqq-; Baur in the Theol. Jahrbb. for 1857, p. 96 sqq.,
and in his Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 142 sqq., ete.;
Wieseler, Br. an die Galater, pp. 443 sqq. 448 sqq. [cf.
Riddle in Schaff’s Lange’s Com. on Rom. p. 235 sq.];
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. (ed. 3) § 68 p. 243 sqq.,
§ 100 p. 414 sq.; Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christologie, p.
8 sqq.; Eklund, cap& vocabulum quid ap. Paulum apost.
significet (Lund, 1872); P/flecderer, Paulinismus, p. 47
sqq- [Eng. trans. vol. i. p. 47 sqq.]; Wendt, Die Begriffe
Fleisch u. Geist im bibl. Sprachgebr. (Gotha, 1878) ;
[Cremer in Herzog ed. 2s. v. Fleisch, but esp. in his
Bibl.-theol. Worterbuch, 3te (or 4te) Aufl. s. v.; Laid-
law, The Bible Doctr. of Man (Edinb. 1879), pp. 74 sqq.
873 sq.; Philippi, Glaubensl. ed. 2, vol. iii. pp. 231-250;
esp. Dickson, St. Paul’s use of the terms Flesh and
Spirit (Glasgow, 1883)]; and the reff. in Meyer on Ro.
iv. 1 (6te Aufl.).*
Zapovx (Rec.), more correctly « x LT Tr WH) Sepovy,
es i. gq. 11, ‘vine-shoot”), 6, Serug [so R. V.; but
A. V. in the N. T. Saruch|, the name of a man (Con
xi. 20 sq. ete.): Lk. iii. 35.*
capéw (for the earlier caipa, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 83
[W. 24, 91 (87)]),-6; pf. pass. ptep. cecapwpévos ; (sdpov
a broom); to sweep, clean by sweeping: ri, Lk. xv. 8;
pass. Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25. (Artem. oneir. 2, 33;
[Apoll. Dysk. p. 253, 7]; Geop.) *
Ldppa, -as, 7, (MW ‘princess’, Gen. xvii. 15), Sarah,
wife of Abraham: Ro. iv. 19; ix.9; Heb. xi. 11; 1 Pet.
iii. 6.*
Xdpwv, -wvos [so Tdf.; but L WH ace. -éva, Tr -wva:
cf. B. 16 (14)], 6, fEcee jw for pw fr. rw ‘to be
straight’; [in Hebr. always with the art. win ‘the
level’ ’]), Sharon [so R. V.; but A. V. Saron], a level re-
gion extending from Chperat of Palestine (Strato’s
Tower) as far as Joppa [about 30 miles]; it abounded
in pasturage and was famous for its fertility (Is. xxxiii.
9; Ixv. 10; 1 Chr. xxvii. 29): Acts ix. 35. [Cf. B.D.
s. v. Sharon; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. ete. p. 126.]*
cwarday indecl. (2 Co. xii. 7 RG [Tdf. in 1 K. xi. 14
accents -rdv (Lagarde leaves it unaccented)]), 6, and
6 caravas [i. e. with the art. (exc. in MK. iii. 23; Lk.
xxii. 3)], -a [cf. B. 20 (18); W. § 8, 1], ([Aram. 8200,
oaTov
stat. emph. of }09] Hebr. jy), adversary (one who op-
poses another in purpose or act); the appellation is
given to 1. the prince of evil spirits, the inveter-
ate adversary of God and of Christ (see dsa8oXos, and
in movnpos, 2b.): Mk. iii. [23], 26; iv. 15; Lk. x. 18;
sae 1s 1 Coy a BS, 2 Olos sei, Tbe 1 Wane ie Nee Th ese
20; Rey. ii. 9,13, 24; iii. 9; he incites to apostasy from
God and to sin, Mt. iv. 10; Mk.i. 13; Lk. iv.8 RL
m br.; xxii..31; Acts v.35 .1'Co. vi. 5;'2 Co. i. 11 (10);
1 Tim. v. 15; circumventing men by stratagems, 2 Co.
xi. 14; 2 Th.ii.9; the worshippers of idols are said to
be under his control, Acts xxvi. 18; Rev. xii. 9; he is
said both himself efrépyeoOat ets twa, in order to act
through him, Lk. xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27; and by his de-
mons to take possession of the bodies of men and to
afflict them with diseases, Lk. xiii. 16, cf. Mt. xii. 26;
2 Co. xii. 7; by God’s assistance he is overcome, Ro.
xvi. 20; on Christ’s return from heaven he will be
bound with chains for a thousand years, but when the
thousand years are finished he will walk the earth in
yet greater power, Rev. xx. 2, 7, but shortly after will
be given over to eternal punishment, ibid. 10. 2:
a Satan-like man: Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. De-
litzsch in Riehm s.v.; Schenkel in his BL. s. v.; Ham-
burger, Real-Encycl. i. 897 sq.; Hdersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, App. xiii. § ii.; and BB.DD. s. v.]*
One
cérov, (Hebr. M89, Chald. xnN2, Syr. |Zb99), -ov, 76,
a kind of dry measure, a modius and a half [equiv. to
about a peck and a half (cf. pdd.os)}, (Joseph. antt. 9, 4,
5 ioxver 5€ 7d cdrov pddiov Kai fysov iradudy; cf. Gen.
xviii. 6 [see Aq. and Symm.]; Judg. vi. 19): Mt. xiii. 33;
Lk. xiii. 21, [in both exx. A.V. ‘three measures of meal’
i.e. the common quantity for ‘a baking’ (cf. Gen. xviii.
6; Judg. vi. 19; 1 See 24).
Laidos, -ov, 6, (see SaovA, 2), Saul, the Jewish name
of the apostle Paul [ef. Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed.
2 xi. p. 357 sq.; Conybeare and Howson, St. Paul, i. 150
sqq- (Am.ed.); Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xix. fin.; B.D. Am.
ed. s.v. Names]: Acts vii. 585 viii. 1, 3; ix. 1, 8,11, 19
Rec., 22, 24, 26 Rec.; xi. 25, 305; xii. 25; xiii. 1 sq. 7, 9.*
oBévvup. (CBevrvyn, 1 Th. v.19 Tdf. [cf. 5, 6, ¢]) and
[in classics] oBervia; fut. cBéow; 1 aor. éoBeca; Pass.,
pres. oBevvypa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 733 and
v4, to extinguish, quench ; a. prop.: ti, fire or
things on fire, Mt. xii. 20; Eph. vi. 16; Heb. xi. 34;
pass. (Sept. for 735) to be quenched, to go out: Mt.
xxv. 8; Mk. ix. 44, 46, [both which vss. T WH om. Tr
br.], 48. b. metaph. to quench i.e. to suppress,
stifle: td mvedpa, divine influence, 1 Th. v. 19 (dydzny,
Cant. viii. 7; ta man, 4 Mace. xvi. 4; x6Aov, Hom.
I]. 9, 678; vBpw, Plat. legg. 8, 835 d.; rév Ovpdy, ibid.
10, 888 a.).*
ceaurod, -is, -ov, reflex. pron. of the 2d pers., used only
in the gen., dat., and acc.; in the N. T. only in the
mase.; gen. (of) thyself, (of) thee: In. viii. 13; xviii.
34.L Tr WH; Acts xxvi.1; 2 Tim.iv.11; dat. ceavra,
(to) thyself, (to) thee: Jn. xvii. 5; Acts xvi. 28; Ro. ii.
‘
572
TELT LOS
5; 1 Tim. iv. 16; acc. ceavrdv, thyself, thee: Mt. iv. 6;
MK. xii. 31; Lk. iv. 23; Jn. viii. 53; Ro. xiv. 22; Gal.
vi. 15 0 Timay. 75" 2) am, 11.15) Jas, i. 8 ete: (CE.
B. § 127, 13.]
ocBatonar: (c¢8as reverence, awe) ; 1. to fear,
be afraid: Hom. Il. 6, 167. 417. 2. in later auth.
i. q. c€Bowar [W. § 2, 1b.], to honor religiously, to wor-
ship: with 1 aor. pass. éo¢8ac6nv in an act. sense, Ro. i.
25 (Orph. Argon. 554; eccl. writ.).*
oéBarpa, -ros, Td, (ceBatouar), whatever is religiously
honored, an object of worship: 2 Th. ii. 4 (Sap. xiv. 20) ;
used of temples, altars, statues, etc., Acts xvii. 23; of
idolatrous images, Bel and the Dragon 27; Sap. xv. 17,
(Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 30).*
ocBacrés, -7, -dv, (oeBatopac) ; 1. reverend, vener-
able. 2. 6 aceBaords, Lat. augustus, the title of the
Roman emperors: Acts xxv. 21, 25, (Strabo, Lcian.,
Hdian., Dio Cass., al.) ; adj. -ds, -7, -dv, Augustan i. e.
taking its name fr. the emperor; a title of honor which
used to be given to gertain legions, or cohorts, or battal-
ions, “for valor” (ala augusta ob virtutem appellata,
Corpus inserr. Lat. vii. n. 340, 341, 344): omeipa oe.
the Augustan cohort, Acts xxvii. 1 (Aeye@v oeBaorn, Ptol.
2, 3,30; 2,9,18; 4,3,30). The subject is fully treated
by Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fiir wissensch. Theol. for 1875,
p- 413 sqq.*
o€Bw, and (so everywh. in the Scriptures) o¢Bopar; fr.
Hom. down; fo revere, to worship: twa (a deity), Mt. xv.
9; Mk. vii. 7; Acts xviii. 13; xix. 27, (Sap. xv. 18 ete.;
for NY, Josh. iv. 24; xxii. 25; Jon. i. 9). In the Acts,
“proselytes of the gate ” (see mpoonduros, 2) are called
oeBopuevor Tov Gedv, (‘men that worship God’], Acts xvi.
14; xviii. 7, (Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 2); and simply of
oeBdopevor, [ A. V. the devout persons], Acts xvii. 17; oe-
Bopevor mpoondurot, [R. V. devout proselytes], Acts xiii.
43; oeBduevar yuvaikes, ib. 50; of oeB.”ENAnves, [A. V.
the devout Greeks], Acts xvii. 4; in the Latin church,
metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. [exe. Acts
xiii. 50] colentes ; ef. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test.
p: 521.*
cepa, -as, 7, (etpw, to fasten, bind together, [akin to
Lat. sero, series, servus, ete.]; ef. Curtius § 518), fr.
Hom. down; a. a line, a rope. b. a chain:
ceipais Cépov, [A.V. to chains of darkness, i. e.] to dark-
ness as if to chains, 2 Pet. ii. 4 RG [but Tr WH have
aeipois, L T oupois, which see in their place]; pia ddvoee
oxdtous mavres ed€Onoav, Sap. xvii. 17 (18).*
weipds, -0v, 6, iq. cetpd, q. V.: 2 Pet.ii.4 TrWH. But
cecpds, Lat. sirus, in prof. writ. is a pit, an underground
granary, [e. g. Dem. p. 100 fin. (where the Schol. r. 6y-
gaupovs k. T. dpvyuatra ev ois Kateribevro Ta omépyara
atpovs €kddovv of Opakes k- of AiBves); Diod. Sic. 19, 44;
ef. Suidas s. v. wecpoi; Valesius on Harpocr. Lex. s. v.
MeAivn. See Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc. Ac-
cordingly R. V. txt. follows the crit. edd. (cf. owpds) and
renders “ pits of darkness’ ].*
cerpds, -00, 6, (celw), a shaking, a commotion: év rH
Oardcon, a tempest, Mt. viii. 24; as often in Grk. writ.
TELw
fr. [Hdt. 4, 28], Soph., Arstph. down, pre-eminently an
earthquake: Mt. xxiv. 7; xxvii. 54; xxviii. 2; Mk. xiii.
Sal kgext ls Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi.l2: vi.5;) x1.13,
19; xvi. 18; Sept. for wy.*
oelw; fut. ceiow (Heb. xii. 26 LT Tr WH); Pass.,
pres. ptcp. cesdpevos; 1 aor. eoeic@nv; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. chiefly for wy; to shake, agitate, cause to tremble:
Rev. vi. 13; ryv yqv, Heb. xii. 26 after Hag. ii. 6; eveioOn
7 yn, Mt. xxvii. 51 (Judg. v.4; 2S. xxii. 8); cevrOjvac
amd po8ov, of men, to be thrown into a tremor, to quake
for fear, Mt. xxviii. 4; metaph. to agitate the mind:
eceicOn 4 modus, [R. V. was stirred] i. e. its inhabitants,
Mt. xxi. 10. [Comp.: ava-, dta-, kara- oeiw. | *
Zexotvbos, T WH Sékovvdos [| Chandler $$ 233, 235], -ov,
6, (a Lat. word), Secundus, a certain man of Thessalo-
nica: Acts xx. 4.*
Dedreduera [T WH -xia (see I, ¢)], -as, 7, Seleucia, a city
of Syria on the Mediterranean, about 5 m. (40 stadia,
Strabo 16 p. 750) N. of the mouth of the river Orontes,
about 15 m. (120 stadia) distant fr. Antioch, and oppo-
site Cyprus: Acts xiii. 4 (1 Mace. xi. 8). [Lewin, St.
Paul, i. 116 sqq.; Conyb. and Howson, ditto, i. 136 sq.]*
oeAHvy, -ns, 7, (fr. ceAas brightness), fr. Hom. down,
Hebr. 3, the moon: Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk.
Smigeo > Acts Ma20 1 Co. xv. 415. Rey. vi. 12> vin. 22's
Sug Wo Soa VERS
ceAnvidtopat; (ceAnvn); [lit. to be moon-struck (cf.
lunatic); see Wetstein on Mt. iv. 24; Suicer, Thesaur.
ii. 945 sq.; BB. DD. s. v. Lunatic]; to be epileptic (epi-
lepsy being supposed to return and increase with the
increase of the moon): Mt. iv. 24; xvii. 15. (Manetho
carm. 4, 81 and 217; [Lcian., al.]; eccles. writ.) *
epet, L mre. Senerv, T Tr WH Sepeciv [see WH. App.
p- 155; cf. e, c], (yow i.e. famous), Semein [so R. V.
but A. V. Semei], the name of a man: Lk. iii. 26.*
oepidarts, acc. -vv, 7, the finest wheaten flour: Rev. xviii.
13. (Hippocr., Arstph., Joseph., al.; Sept. often for
M93.) *
‘wepvds, -7,-dv, (cé8a), fr. [Hom. h. Cer., al.], Aeschyl.,
Pind. down, august, venerable, reverend; to be venerated
for character, honorable: of persons [A.V. grave], 1 Tim.
iii. 8, 11; Tit. ii: 2; of deeds, Phil. iv. 8. [Cf. Trench
§ xcii.; Schmidt ch. 173, 5.] *
cepvoTns, -7Tos, 7, (cewvos), that characteristic of a
pers. or a thing which entitles to reverence or respect,
dignity, gravity, majesty, sanctity: Tod tepod oepvorns,
2 Mace. iii. 12; in an ethical sense, gravity [so R. V. uni-
formly (cf. Trench p. 347) ], honor, probity, purity: 1 Tim.
ii..2;, iii. 43 Tit. ii. 7. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) *
Lépyvos, -ov, 6, Sergius, surnamed Paulus, proconsul of
Cyprus, converted to Christianity by the apostle Paul;
otherwise unknown [cf. Lghtft. in Contemp. Rev. for
1878, p. 290; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. Excurs. xvi.; Ree
nan, Saint Paul, p. 14 sq.]: Acts xiii. 7.*
Depody, see Sapovy.
=H8, 6, (NW ‘put’ [A. V. ‘appointed ”], fr. nw to put
|i. e. in place of the murdered Abel; ef. B. D.s. v. Seth],
Gen. iv. 25), Seth, the third son of Adam: Lk. iii. 38.*
573
onMeELov
=hp (in Joseph. Syyas), 6, (OW [‘ name,’ ‘sign,’ ‘celeb-
rity’; but variously explained]), Shem, the eldest son
of Noah: Lk. iii. 36.*
onpaive; impf. éonwawov (Acts xi. 28 L WH txt.); 1
aor. éonpava, for éonunva which is the more com. form in
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. (see Matthiae
§ 185; Kiihner § 343 s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 24sq.; W.§15s.v.; B.41 (35)); (fr. ojpa a sign);
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to give a sign, to sig-
nify, indicate: ri, Acts xxv. 27; foll. by indir. dise., Jn.
xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; i.g. to make known: absol.
Rev. i..1; foll. by acc. w. inf. Acts xi. 28.*
onpetov, -ov, Td, (onpaivw [or ojua]), fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down, Hebr. ns, @ sign, mark, token; a le
univ. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished
from others and known: Mt. xxvi. 48; Lk. ii.12; 2 Th.
iii. 17; onpetov mepttouyns (explanatory gen. [cf. B. § 123,
4]), equiv. to onpetoy, 6 eore weptrouy, Circumcision which
should be a sign of the covenant formed with God, Ro,
iv.11; ra& onpeia Tov azocrdXov, the tokens by which one
is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12; a sign by which
anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. xxi.
73 TO on. THS Ons Tapovaias, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv.
33 Tov viov Tod avOpwmov, the sign which indicates that
the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven
in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the
subj. 7a onyeia TOy Katpor, i.e. the indications of future
events which of xa:pot furnish, what of xatpoi portend,
Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; a sign by which
one is warned, an admonition, 1 Co. xiv. 22. used of
noteworthy personages, by whom God forcibly
admonishes men and indicates to them what he would
have them do: thus onpeiov avriAeyouevov is said of Jesus
Christ, Lk. ii. 34; "lavas éeyévero onpeiov tois Nuveviras
(Jon. iii. 4), Lk. xi. 30; hence, 70 onpetov "Iwva, ib. 29,
is i.q. Td onpetov like to that 6s Av Iwvas, i.e. to the sign
which was given by the mission and preaching of Jonah,
to prompt men to seek salvation [W. 189 (177)]; in the
same sense, 6 vids tod avOpwmov says that he will be a
onueiov to the men of his generation, ib. 30; but in Mt.
xii. 39; xvi. 4 7d onpetov Iwva is the miraculous experi-
ence which befell Jonah himself, cf. xii. 40; that Luke
reproduces Christ’s words more correctly than Matthew
is shown by De Wette and Bleek on Mt. xii. 40, by
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 265 sq. ed. 1 [Eng. trans. (3d
ed. N.Y. 1851) § 165 p. 245 sq.], and others; [but that
Luke’s report is less full than Matthew’s, rather than
at variance with it, is shown by Meyer, Weiss, Keil, and
others (on Mt. I. c.)]. 2. a sign, prodigy, portent,
i.e. an unusual occurrence, transcending the common
course of nature ; a. of signs portending remark-
able events soon to happen: Lk. xxi. 11, 25; Acts ii.
EOE ye exil ool Oise xevien Ll - b. of miracles and wonders
by which God authenticates the men sent by him, or
by which men prove that the cause they are pleading is
God’s: Mt. xii. 38 sq.; xvi. 1,4; Mk. viii. 11 sq.; xvi.
17220> Lk. xi. 16, 29;:xxilt. §; Ini 2S 2s a. 25
lv. D4 vi. 2. 14, 26. 30% vil. Sil sax. MGs) Kod ia, 475) at
onpElow 574
18, 37; xx. 30; Acts ii. 22,43; viii.6; 1Co.i.22; but
the power d:ddvat oneia, by which men are deceived, is
ascribed also to false teachers, false prophets, and to
demons: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Rev. xiii. 13 sq.; xvi.
145 See. OOS RR ae. onpeia K. Tépata (INS
‘on|aD3) or (yet less freq.) répara x. onpeia (terms which
differ not in substantial meaning but only in origin; cf.
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. iii. p. 270 sq.; [Trench § xci.]) are
found conjoined: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Jn. iv. 48;
Acts ii. 19, 43; iv.80; v.12; vi.8; vii. 36; xiv. 3; xv.
12; Ro. xv. 19; 2 Th. ii. 9, (Deut. xxviii. 46; xxxiv. 11;
Neh. ix. 10; Is. viii. 18; xx.3; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 20;
Sap. viii. 8; x. 16; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; Philo, vit. Moys. i.
16; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6; b. j. prooem. 11; Plut. Alex.
75; Ael. v.h. 12,57); with x. dSuvdpers added, 2 Co. xii.
12; Heb. ii. 4; onpeta x. Suvdapers, Acts vill. 13; duvdpets x.
répara x. onueta, Acts ii. 22; diddvar onueta (see didapt,
B. II. 1 a.): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 (here Tdf. rotciv
onp-, see movew, 1.1 ¢.); onpeta are said yiverOat dia twos
in Acts li. 43; iv. [16], 30; v. 12; xiv. 3; xv. 12 [here
roe onu., see above]; Td onpuetov Tis idoews, the mira-
cle, which was the healing, Acts iv. 22.*
onpedw, -@: (onpetov), to mark, note, distinguish by
marking; Mid. pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. onuetotobe ; to
mark or note for one’s self [W. § 38, 2b.; B. § 135, 4]:
riva, 2 Th. iii. 14 [cf. B. 92 (80); W.119(113)]. (The-
ophr., Polyb., Philo, Dion. Hal., al.; [Ps. iv. 7 Sept.].)*
otpepov [ Attic tyepor, i.e. yuepa with pronom. prefix
(Skr. sa); ef. Vaniéek p. 971], adv., fr. Hom. down,
Sept. for ov, to-day, this day: Mt. vi. 11; xvi. 3 ['T br.
WH reject the pass.]; Lk. iv. 21; xix.5; Actsiv. 9; xiii.
33, etc.; also where the speaker refers to the night just
passed, Mt. xxvii.19; equiv. to this night (now current),
Lk. ii. 11; ojpepov ravtn TH vukti, Mk. xiv. 30; ews onpe-
pov, 2 Co. iii. 15; opp. to adptov, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28;
xiii. 32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13; yes Kal onpepov kai eis Tovs
ai@vas, a rhet. periphrasis for dei, Heb. xiii. 8; 4 onpepov
nuepa, this (very) day, Acts xx. 26; ws tis o. 7Epas,
Ro. xi. 8; expe THs onpepov sc. nuepas, Mt. xi. 23; xxviii.
15; €ws ris o. Mt. xxvii. 8; dype tas o. (where LT Tr
WH add epas), 2 Co. iii. 14; 9 onpepor, ig. what has
happened to-day [al. render concerning this day’s riot;
B.§ 133, 9; but see Meyer ad loc.; W. § 30, 9a.], Acts
xix. 40; 7d onpepov, the word to-day, Heb. iii. 13; asa
subst.: dpifer nuépav, onpepov, “a to-day ” (meaning, ‘a
time for embracing the salvation graciously offered’ [cf.
R. V.mrg.]), Heb. iv. 7%.
ofro: fr. Hom. down; to make corrupt; in the Bible
also to destroy, Job xl. 7 (12); pass. to become corrupt
or rotten; 2 pf. act. wéonma, to (have become i. e. to) be
corrupted (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 82): 6 mdodros cé-
anmev, has perished, Jas. v. 2.*
onptxds (Lchm. ed. maj. T WH oupixds [ef. WH. App.
p- 151)]), -n, -dv, (Sip, SApes, the Seres, a people of India
[prob. mod. China; yet on the name cf. Pape, Eigen-
namen, s.v.; Dict. of Geog. s. v. Serica]) ; 1. prop.
pertaining to the Seres. 2. silken: +d onptxdy, silk,
i. e. the fabric, silken garments, Rev. xviii. 12. ({Strabo,
olKAPLOS
Plut., Arr., Leian.]; eoOnceot onpixais, Joseph. b. j. 7, 5,
4,)*
ois, onrds, 6, (Hebr. 00, Is. li. 8; wy, Job iv. 19; xiii.
28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D.s.v. Moth; Alex.’s
Kitto s.v. Ash]: Mt. vi. 19 sq.; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Ar-
stph., Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
onts-Bpwros, -ov, (fr. ons a moth, and Bpards fr. Bi-
Bpackw), moth-eaten: ipatiov, Jas. v. 2 (iparia, Job xiii.
28 ; of idol-images, Sibyll. orac. in Theoph. ad Autol. 2,
36).*
obevdw, -: (cOevos [allied w. orjvat, hence prop. stead-
fastness ; Curtius p. 503 sq.] strength), to make strong,
to strengthen: twa, one’s soul, 1 Pet. v. 10, where for 1
aor. opt. act. 3 pers. sing. cAevaoa, we must read the
fut. cdevace, with GLTTrWH. (Pass. in Rhet. Gr.
eds Walz, volmi. 2:05;)*
ciayav, -dvos, 7, the jaw, the jaw-bone, [A. V. cheek]:
Mt. v. 39; Lk. vi. 29. (Soph., Xen., Plat., Aristot., al. ;
Sept. for *1m.) *
otyde, -; 1 aor. éolynoa; pf. pass. ptep. cecrynpévos ;
(ovyn) ; fr. Hom. down; to keep silence, hold one’s peace :
Lk. ix: 365, xvi. 39) LT Dr WH; [xxs 26]; Acts xi:
17; xv. 12sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 28, 30, 34; pass. to be kept in
silence, be concealed, Ro. xvi. 25. [Syn. see novyalw.]*
ovyn, -7s, 7, (fr. ci¢@ [onomatopoetic, Etym. Magn. 712,
29] i.e. to command silence by making the sound st or
sch; [yet ovyn prob. has no connection with ci¢w, but is
of European origin (ef. Germ. schweigen) ; cf. Fick, Pt.
ili. 843; Curtius §572]), fr. Hom. down, silence: Acts
xxi. 40; Rev. viii. 1.*
oiSipeos, -ea, -eov, contr. -ovs, -G, -ovv, (oidypos), fr.
Hom. down, made of iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev. ii. 27; ix.
Be oath GYR Saber ily
ciSnpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, tron: Rev. xviii. 12.*
2dr, -dvos [B. 16 (14) ], 7, ({iV¥ and | Wy, fr. Ta¥ ‘to
hunt’, in Aram. also ‘to fish’; hence prop. taking its
name from its abundance of fish; cf. Justin 18, 3), Sidon,
a very ancient Pheenician city, formerly distinguished
for wealth and traffic, situated near the Mediterranean
on the borders of Juda; it had been assigned to the
tribe of Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but the Jews vainly en-
deavored to capture it [Judg. i. 31; iii. 3; x. 12]; now
Saida, containing about 10,000 [or 9,000, ace. to Porter
in Murray’s Handbook p. 376] inhabitants [ Baedeker,
Palestine p. 433]: Mt. xi. 21 sq.; xv. 21; Mk. iii. 8; vii.
24 (where Tom. WH Tr mrg. br. the words kai S:ddvos),
31; Lk. iv. 26 (where LT Tr WH Sidovias) ; vi. 17; x. 13
sq-; Acts xxvii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s.v.; Schultz in Herzog
ed. 2 vol. xiv. 192sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm s. v.] *
LibavW00s, -a, -ov, (Sudav), belonging to Sidon, of Sidon:
THs Zwvias sc. ywpas, [R.V. in the land of Sidon], Lk.
iv. 26 LT Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -Sor]); Se
Savor, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.*
oiKkdptos, -ov, 6, (a Latin word), an assassin, i. e. one
who carries a dagger or short sword [Lat. sica (cf. Jo-
seph. as below) ] under his clothing, that he may kill
secretly and treacherously any one he wishes to (a cut-
throat): Acts xxi. 38. (Joseph. b. j. 2, 17, 6 otxapiovs
gixepa
exddouy Tovs AnuTas Exovtas md Tois KOATAsS Ta Ein [cf.
2, 13,3]; also antt. 20, 8, 10 oxdpror Anorai eiou ypmpevor
Ecpidiows mapurrAnaios pev Td péyeOos Trois Tov Mepoay axi-
vdkats, émikapmeot dé kal dpolots Tais bd “Pwpaiwy oikars
kadoupéevats, ap’ Sv kal thy mpoonyopiay oi Anarevovtes € a-
Bov mrodXovs dvarpoivres.) [SYN. see dovevs. |*
olxepa, 7d, (Hebr. 13¥ [rather, ace. to Kautzsch (Gram.
p- 11) for s93w (prop. cixpa) the stat. emphat. of ee
(lit. ‘intoxicating’ drink)]), indecl. [W. 68 (66); B
24 (21)], (yet Euseb. praep. evang. 6, 10, 8 has a gen.
aixepos [and Soph. in his Lex. quotes fr. Cyrill. Alex. 1,
1041 d. (ed. Migne) a gen. otxéparos]), strong drink, an
intoxicating beverage, different from wine [exe. in Num.
xxviii. 7 (cf. Is. xxviii. 7)]; it was a factitious product,
made of a mixture of sweet ingredients, whether derived
from grain and vegetables, or from the juice of fruits
(dates), or a decoction of honey: Lk. i. 15 (Lev. x. 9;
Num. vi. 3; Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxix. 6, etc.; the same
Hebr. word is rendered also by péOvopa, Judg. xiii. 4, 7,
14; Mic. ii. 11). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wein, kiinst-
licher; [B. D. s.v. Drink, Strong].*
Ztras, [gen. not found (exc. Joseph. vita 17 -a)], dat.
-a, ace. -av, [B. 20 (18)], 6, Silas (contr. fr. Sidovavds,
q. v-; W.103 (97)), a Roman citizen (Acts xvi. 37 sq.),
the companion of the apostle Paul in several of his jour-
neys, and his associate in preaching the gospel: Acts
XV. 22,27, 32, 34 Rec., 40; xvi. 19, 25, 29; xvii. 4, 10,
14 sq.; xviii. 5. [B. D.s. v. Silas.] *
ZtAovavés, -ov, 6, Silvanus, the same man who in Acts
is;ealled. SiAas, (q. v.) > 2 Co. i..19; 1.Th. i. bs 2°Th, i. 1;
1 Pet. v.12. [Not infreq. written in the Mss. S:ABavés,
Silbanus; cf. Tdf. on ll. ee.) *
Drodp, (Hebr. 7 vi, Is. viii. 6, which in Jn. ix. 7 is
translated dreoradpévos, but more correctly [see below]
‘a sending out,’ ‘gushing forth’ (of water); it is formed
after the analogy of 338 ‘had in hatred’, ‘ persecuted ’,
fr. ON; a> ‘born’, fr. 39: ‘to bring forth’; [“ the pure-
ly passive explanation, drearadpévos, Jn. ix. 7, is not so
incorrect.” Ewald, Ausfiihrl. Lehrbuch d. Hebr. Spr.
§ 150, 2 a.; cf. Meyer on Jn.1.c.]), 6 Ga Joseph. 7 5., se.
myn, b. j. 5, 12, 2; 6, 8, 5; but also peyp: rod 5. b. j. 2,
16, 23.6; 7,25 (Bog (19))), [indecl. ; but in Joseph. b. j.
By (as 1 dro THs SiAwas], Siloam, a fountain of sweet and
abundant water (Joseph. b. j. 5, 4, 1), flowing into a basin
or pool of the same name (Neh. iii. 15), both of which
seem to have been situated in the southern part of Jer-
usalem, although opinions vary on this point: Lk. xiii.
4; Jn. ix. 11, (Is. viii.6). Cf. [B.D.s. v. Siloam]; Win.
RWB. s. v. Siloah ; Rédiger in Gesen. Thesaur. p. 1416 ;
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xiv. p. 371 sqq.; Robinson, Pal-
estine, 1. 333 sqq.; Tobler, Die Siloaquelle u. der Oelberg
(St. Gallen, 1852); Aneucker, Siloah, Quelle Teich u.
Thal in Jerus. (Heidelb. 1873); Furrer in Schenkel v.
295 sq.; [itter, Palestine, etc., Eng. trans. i. 148 sq. ;
Wilson, Ordnance Survey, etc., 1865; esp. Guthe in the
Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.-Vereins for 1882, pp. 205 sqq.
229 sqq.; Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Morgenl.-Gesellsch. for
1882 p. 725 sqq. ].*
575
civart
oipixlvOcov (or onpixivOcov), -ov, rd, (Lat. semicinctium
[ef. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s.v.], fr. semi and cingo), a
narrow apron, or linen covering, which workmen and
servants were accustomed to wear: Acts xix. 12 [A. V.
aprons |.*
Zlpov, -wvos [B. 16 (14)], 6, (jiynw, ‘a hearing’, fr.
pnw ‘to hear’; [there was also a Grk. name Sipey (allied
Ww. ods, i.e. ‘flat-nosed’; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p.
210), but cf. B. D.s. v. Simon init.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.
p- 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt.
xvii. 25; Mk. i. 29sq. 36; Lk. iv. 38; v. 4sq. 10, etc.;
see Ilérpos. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbzus [cf.
s.V. Iovdas, 8], an apostle, who is called Kavavirns [so RG,
but L T Tr WH -vaios, q.v.], Mt. x. 4; Mk. iii. 18, and
(rors, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of
Jesus [cf. s. v. adeAdds, 1]: Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3. 4.
a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus:
Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the
father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed "Icxape-
atns (see Iovdas, 6) ]: Jn. vi. 71; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6.
a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 43sq., who appears to
[some, e. g. Grotius, Schleiermacher, Holtzmann, Schen-
kel, Ewald, Keim, Hug, Bleek (see his Synopt. Erklar. on
Lk. l.c.) to] be the same as Simon the leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ;
Mk. xiv. 3; [but the occurrence recorded by Lk. 1. c. is
now commonly thought to be distinct fr. that narrated
by Mt. and Mk. Il. ee. ; cf. Godet or Keil on LK.]. re
a certain tanner, living at Joppa: Acts ix. 43; x. 6,17,
32. 8. Simon (‘ Magus’), the Samaritan sorcerer :
Acts viii. 9, 13, 18, 24. The various eccles. stories about
him, as well as the opinions and conjectures of modern
theologians, are reviewed at length by Lipsius in Schen-
kel v. pp. 801-321; [ef. W. Mller in Herzog ed. 2, vol.
xiv. p. 246 sqq.; Schaff, Hist. of the Chris. Church, vol.
ii. (1883) § 121].
wa [-vd WH; cf. Chandler §§ 135, 138], rd (se. dpos,
ef. B. 21 sq. (19)), indecl., Joseph. 76 Suwatov, antt. 3, 5,
1, and ré Suvatov dpos, antt. 2, 12,1; Hebr. *1°D [perh.
‘jagged’; al. make it an adj. ‘belonging to (the desert
of) Sin], (Sina or) Sinai, a mountain or, rather, a moun-
tainous region in the peninsula of Arabia Petraea, made
famous by the giving of the Mosaic law. There are three
summits: one towards the west, which is called 3>in, a
second towards the east, Sinai prop. so called, the third
towards the south, now Mt. St. Catharine. But the dis-
tinction between Horeb and Sinai is given differently
by different writers; and some think that they were two
different names of one and the same mountain (ef. Sir.
xlviii. 7); ef. [McC.and S.Cycl.s.v. Sinai]; Win. RWB.
s.v. Sinai; Arnold in Herzog ed. 1 vol. xiv. p. 420 sq.;
[Schultz in ed. 2 vol. xiv. p. 282 sqq.]; Furrer in Schen-
kel v. p. 326 sqq.; [Eng. Ordnance Survey, 1869; Palmer,
Desert of the Exodus, 1872; also his Sinai from the
Monuments, 1878; /'urrer commends Holland’s “ Sketch
Map” ete. in the Journ. of the Royal Geog. Soe. vol.
xxxix. (Lond. 1869)]. The name occurs in Acts vii. 30,
8; Gal. iv. 24 sq.*
otvame (also civnm [but not in the N. T.], both later
owdwv
for the Attic vdmv [so accented in late auth., better varv],
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 288), [thought to be of Egypt. ori-
gin; cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v. vamv], -ews [B. 14
(13)], 76, mustard, the name of a plant which in oriental
countries grows from a very small seed and attains to
the height of ‘a tree’— ten feet and more; hence a very
small quantity of a thing is likened to a kéxkos owdrews
[A. V. a grain of mustard seed], Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. XVii.
6; and also a thing which grows to a remarkable size,
Mt. xiii. 31 sq.; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii.19. (Cf. B. D.s. v.
Mustard; Léw, Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 134; Carru-
thers in the‘ Bible Educator’ vol. i. p.119sq.; Tristram,
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 472 sq.; Thomson, The Land
and the Book, ii. 100 sq. | *
owSdav, -dvos, 7, (of uncertain origin; Skr. sindhu
[Egypt. ‘schenti’ or ‘sent’; ef. Vanitek, Fremdworter,
s.v.]; Sept. for }"0, Judg. xiv. 12 sq.; Prov. xxix. 42
(xxxi. 24)), fine cloth (Lat. sindon), i.e. 1. linen
cloth, esp. that which was fine and costly, in which the
bodies of the dead were wrapped: Mt. xxvii. 59; Mk.
xv. 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (cf. Hdt. 2, 86 who says of the
Egyptians, catewWiocovot rav To cGpa owwddvos Buooivns
[see Wilkinson’s note in Rawlinson’s Herod. 3d ed.
l.c.]). 2. thing made of fine cloth: so of a light and
loose garment worn at night over the naked body, Mk.
xiv. 51 sq. [others suppose a sheet rather than a shirt to
be referred to; A. V. linen cloth; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Sheets]. (Besides Hat., the writers Soph., Thuc., Stra-
bo, Leian., al., use the word.) *
owidtw: 1 aor. infin. cevidoat; (owiov ‘a sieve,’ ‘win-
nowing-van’; an eccles. and Byzant. word [ef. Macar.
homil. 5 p. 73 sq. (496 a. ed. Migne)]) ; to sift, shake in
a@ sieve: twa &s Tov Giror, i. e., dropping the fig., by in-
ward agitation to try one’s faith to the verge of over-
throw, Lk. xxii. 31. (Eccles. writ. [cf. W. 92 (87), 26
(25), and see above ].) *
oipikds, See onpikds.
cipds, -0v, 6, i.q. werpds, q. V-: 2 Pet. ii. 4 L T*
oitevtés, -7, -dv, (curevo, to feed with wheat, to fatten),
fattened, fatted: Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30. (Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.)
21; 1K. iv. 23, [ete.]; Xen., Polyb., Athen., [al.].) *
crtov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of otros) ; 1. corn, grain:
Acts vii. 12 LT Tr WH. In prof. writ. also 2.
food made from grain (Hat. 2, 36). 3. eatables,
victuals, provisions, ((Hdt.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem.,
al.).*
oitictés, -7, -dv, (ciTi¢@, to feed with grain, to fatten),
fattened, [plur. ra or. as subst., A. V. fatlings], Mt. xxii.
4. (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,4; Athen. 14 p. 656 e.) *
oiTopetptoy, -ov, Td, (Attic writ. said roy oirov perpety;
out of which later writ. formed the compound aurope-
tpew, Gen. xlvii. 12, [14]; Polyb. 4, 63, 10; Diod. 19,
50; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14, 7; ovroperpia, Diod. 2, 41; [cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p.383; W. 25]), a measured ‘ portion of”
grain or ‘ food’: Lk. xii. 42. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
gitos, -ov, 6, [of uncertain origin; cf. Vanicek, Fremd-
worter, s. v.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for $15, wheat,
corn: Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 25, 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 28; LK. iii. 17:
576
oKavoanica
[xii. 18 WH Tr txt.]; xvi. 7; xxii. 31; Jn. xii. 24; Acts
xxvii. 38; 1Co.xv.37; Rev. vi.6; xviii.13; plur. ra
otra (cf. W. 63 (62)), Acts vii. 12 Ree., and often in Sept.*
Lixap, see Suvxdp.
Ziv, indecl., (its grammat. gend. in the N. T. does
not appear from the pass. in which it is mentioned; cf.
B. 21 sq. (19); in the Sept. when it denotes the city of
Jerusalem 7 Siwy occurs, as Ps. ci. (cii.) 14,17; exxxi.
(cxxxil.) 13; exxxvi. (exxxvii-) 1), Hebr. }7*y [i. e.
ace. to some, ‘ protected ’ or ‘ protecting’; acc. to others,
‘sunny’; al. al.]; Sion [so A. V., but properly (with
R. V.)] Zion; 1. the hill on which the higher and
more ancient part of Jerusalem was built (WW Vy city
of David, because David captured it) ; it was the south-
westernmost and highest of the hills on which the city
stood; [many now would identify it with the eastern
hill, some with the northern; ef. Furrer in Schenkel
iii. 216 sqq.; Mihlau in Riehm s. v.; per contra Wolcott
in B. D. Am. ed.s. v.; Schultz in Herzog ed. 2 vi. p. 5438
sq: ]- 2. used very often for the entire city of Jeru-
salem itself: Ro. ix. 83 and 1 Pet. ii. 6, (after Is. xxviii.
16); Ro. xi. 26 (fr. Is. lix. 20); 7 @vydrnp Siwy (see bvyarnp,
bu B.); Mt. xxi. os sdn. sam 15: 3. Since Jerusalem,
because the temple stood there, was called the dwelling-
place of God (cf. Mt. v. 353; kxvptos tiv Siwy npericato eis
karoukiay éavt@, Ps. exxxi. (cxxxii.) 13), the expression
TO Siwy dpos is transferred to heaven, as the true dwell-
ing-place of God and heavenly beings, the antitype of
the earthly Zion: Heb. xii. 22; Rev. xiv. 1.*
cwrdw,-6; impf., 3 pers. sing. éovmra, 3 pers. plur.
éotorav; fut. ceomnoe (Lk. xix.40 L T Tr WH); 1 aor.
é€otwmnoa; (story silence); fr. Hom. down; to be silent,
hold one’s peace: prop., Mt. xx. 31; xxvi. 63; Mk. iii. 4;
ix. 84; x.48; xiv.61; Lk. xviii. 39 RG; xix.40; Acts
Xvili. 9; used of one silent because dumb, Lk. i. 20;
4 Mace. x.18; like si/eoin the Lat. poets, used metaph.
of a calm, quiet sea [(in rhetorical command)]: Mk.
iv. 39. [Sywn. see jovxaca. | *
oxavSarife; 1 aor. éoxavdddica; Pass., pres. cxavdaXdiCo-
pac; impf. éoxavdarcCounv; 1 aor. eoxavdariobny (cf. B. 52
(45) ]; 1 fut. cxavdadicOnoopa; (oxavdadov); Vulg. scan-
4
dalizo; Peshitto ore ; prop. to put a stumbling-block
or impediment in the way, upon which another may trip
and fall; to be a stumbling-block; in the N. T. always
metaph. [R. V. to cause or make to stumble; A.V. to
offend (cause to offend) J; a. to entice to sin (Luth.
drgern, i. e. arg, bds machen): twa, Mt. v. 29, [30]; xviii.
6, 8sq.; Mk. ix. 42 sq. 45,47; Lk. xvii. 2; 1 Co. viii. 13;
pass. Lat. offendor, [A. V. to be offended], Vulg. scanda-
vy,
lizor, Peshitto #2: Ro. xiv. 21[RGLTrtxt.]; 2 Co.
xi. 29 [R. V. is made to stumble; ef. W. 153 (145)]. b.
to cause a person to begin to distrust and desert one whom
he ought to trust and obey; to cause to fall away, and
in pass. to fall away [R. V. to stumble (cf. ‘Teaching’
ete. 16,5; Herm. vis. 4, 1, 3; mand. 8, 10)]: twa, Jn.
vi. 61: nass.. Mt. xiii. 21: xxiv.10: xxvi. 38; Mk. iv.
a KavoaXov
17; xiv. 29; [Jn. xvi. 1]; €» run [A. V.] to be offended
in. one, [find occasion of stumbling in], i. e. to see in
another what I disapprove of and what hinders me from
acknowledging his authority: Mt. xi.6; xiii. 57; xxvi.
31; Mk. vi. 3; xiv. 27; Lk. vii. 23; to cause one to judge
unfavorably or unjustly of another, Mt. xvii. 27. Since
the man who stumbles or whose foot gets entangled
feels annoyed, oxavdadif{@ means c. to cause one
to feel displeasure at a thing; to make indignant: twa,
pass. to be displeased, indignant, [ A. V. offended], Mt.
xv.12. The verb oxavdadif@ is found neither in prof.
auth. nor in the Sept., but only in the relics of Aquila’s
version of the O. T., Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 9; Is. viii. 15; [xl.
30]; Prov. iv. 12 for IwD; besides in Sir. ix. 5; xxiii.
85 XXXv. (xxxii.) 15; [Psalt. Sal. 16,7. Cf. W.33.]*
oxdvSadov, -ov, Td, a purely bibl. [(occurring some
twenty-five times in the Grk. O. T., and fifteen, quotations
included, in the New) ] and eccles. word for oxavdadnOpor,
which occurs occasionally in native Grk. writ.; Sept. for
wpyn (a noose, a snare) and 51/91; a. prop. the
movable stick or tricker (‘trigger’) of a trap, trap-stick ;
a trap, snare; any impediment placed in the way and caus-
ing one to stumble or fall, [a stumbling-block, occasion of
stumbling]: Lev. xix. 14; mérpa oxavdddov [ A. V. a rock
of offence], i. e. a rock which is a cause of stumbling
(Lat. offendiculum),— fig. applied to Jesus Christ, whose
person and career were so contrary to the expectations
of the Jews concerning the Messiah, that they rejected
him and by their obstinacy made shipwreck of salvation
(see mpéoxkoppa), Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7), (fr. Is. viii.
14). b. metaph. any person or thing by which one is
(‘entrapped’) drawn into error or sin [cf. W. 32]; a.
of persons [(Josh. xxiii. 13; 1S. xviii. 21)]: Mt. xiii.
41; xvi. 23 (where ocxavdadov “ non ex effectu, sed ex
natura et condicione propria dicitur,” Calov.);
so Xpiords eotavpwpevos is called (because his ignomin-
ious death on the cross roused the opposition of the
Jews), 1 Co. i. 23. B. of things: riOévae tii oKdy-
Sadop (literally, in Judith v. 1), to put a stumbling-block
in one’s way, i. e. to do that by which another is led to
sin, Ro. xiv. 13; the same idea is expressed by BadXeww
oxavdarov éevaridy twos [to cast a stumbling-block before
one], Rev. ii. 145 ov« €ort oxavdadov év tiv (see eiui, V.
4e.), 1 Jn. ii. 10; plur. cxavdada, words or deeds which
entice to sin (Sap. xiv. 11), Mt. xviii. 7 [cf. B. 322 (277) n.;
W. 371 (348)]; Lk. xvii.1; oxdvdada roveiy rapa tiv
didaynv, to cause persons to be drawn away from the
true doctrine into error and sin [cf. wapa, III. 2 a.], Ro.
xvi. 17; 1d oxavd. tod cravpov, the offence which the
cross, i. e. Christ’s death on the cross, gives (cf. a. fin.
above), [R. V. the stumbling-block of the cross], Gal. v.
11; i.q. a cause of destruction, Ro. xi. 9, fr. Ps. xviii.
(ixix:)/23.*
oKarrw; 1 aor. éoxawa; [allied w. it are Eng. ‘ship’,
‘skiff’, etc.; Curtius § 109; Fick iv. 267; vii. 336]; to
dig: Lk. vi. 48 (on which see BaOive); xiii. 8 [B. § 130,
5]; xvi. 3. ({Hom. h. Mere.]; Arstph., Eurip., Xen.,
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., al.) [Comp.: xata-oxdmro. |*
5TT
oKNYT
akan, -7s, 7, (oxamrw [q. v.]), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hat.
down, anything dug out, hollow vessel, trough, tray, tub;
spec. a boat: Acts xxvii. 16, 30, 32.*
oKédos, -ovs, 7d, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. e. from the
hip to the toes inclusive: Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.*
okéTarpa, -Tos, TO, (oKera{w to cover), a covering,
spec. clothing (Aristot. pol. 7,17 p. 1336%,17; Joseph.
be yr 298505) 2) 1 imyiy 8*
Zkevds, -a [ W. § 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, Sceva, a certain
chief priest [cf. dpyvepevs, 2 fin.]: Acts xix. 14.*
oKevn, -7s, 7), [cf. cxevos |, fr. [ Pind., Soph. ], Hdt. down,
any apparatus, equipment, or furniture; used of the uten-
sils [outfit, i.e. furniture (?— so R. V. mrg.), or tackling
(?—so A. V., R. V. txt.)] of a ship (Diod. 14, 79): Acts
xxvii. 19 (Sept. Jon. i. 5).*
oKevos, -ous, 76, [prob. fr. r. sku ‘to cover’; cf. Lat.
scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius § 113; Vaniéek p. 1115],
fr. [Arstph.], Thuc. down; Sept. for *53; 1. aves-
sel: Mk. xi. 16; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. xix. 29; Acts x. 11, 16;
xi.5; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12; ra ox. rs Aew-
toupyias, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb.
ix. 21; oxevos eis tysnv, unto honor, i. e. for honorable
use, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (kaOapav epywv Sotda oxein,
Sap. xv. 7); eis dreiav, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use
(as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21; oxevn dpyqs, into which wrath
is emptied, i. e. men appointed by God unto woe, hence
the addition karnpricpeva cis am@evav, Ro. ix. 22; axed
eheovs, fitted to receive mercy, —explained by the words
a mpontoipacey eis Sd€av, ib. 23; 7d ocKevos is used of a
woman, as the vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see
xtdouat; [al. take it here (as in 2 Co. iv. 7 below) of the
body]); the female sex, as being weaker than the male,
is likened to a oxevos aoeveorepov, in order to com-
mend to husbands the obligations of kindness towards
their wives (for the weaker the vessels, the greater must
be the care lest they be broken), 1 Pet. iii. 7; éorpdxuwva
oxevn is applied to human bodies, as frail, 2 Co. iv.
ie 2. an implement; plur. household utensils, do-
mestic gear: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xvii. 31, [in
these pass. R. V. goods]; as the plur. often in Grk.
writ. denotes the tackle and armament of vessels (Xen.
oec. 8,12; Plat. Critias p. 117 d.; Lach. p. 183 e.; Polyb.
22, 26, 13), so the sing. rd oxedos seems to be used spec.
and collectively of the sails and ropes (R. V. gear) im
Acts xxvii. 17. metaph. of a man: oxedos éxAoy7s (gen.
of quality), a chosen instrument [or (so A. V.) ‘vessel ’],
Acts ix. 15; in a base sense, an assistant in accomplishing
evil deeds [cf. Eng. ‘tool’], oxetos imnperixdv, Polyb. 13,
5, 73 15, 25, 1*
oKyvn, -7s, 7, [fr. r. ska ‘to cover’ ete.; cf. oxid, oxd-
tos, ete.; Lat. casa, cassis, castrum; Eng. shade, ete.;.
Curtius §112; Vanitek p. 1054 sq. ], fr. [Aeschyl.], Soph.
and Thue. down; Sept. chiefly for Sak, often also for
jaw, also for 730; a tent, tabernacle, (made of green
boughs, or skins, or other materials): Mt. xvii. 4; Mk.
ix.5; Lk. ix. 33; Heb. xi.9; ai aldo oxnvai (see aicr
vos, 3), Lk. xvi. 9 (et dabo iis tabernacula aeterna quae
praeparaveram illis, 4 (5) Esdr. ii. 11); of that well
oKnvoTny ta 578
known movable temple of God after the pattern of
which the temple at Jerusalem was subsequently built
[cf. B. D. s. v. Temple]: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 1 Rec.", 21;
with rod paprupiov added (see paprupuoy, c. fin.), Acts vil.
44; the temple is called oxnvq in Heb. xiii. 10; oxnvy 4
porn, the front part of the tabernacle (and afterwards
of the temple), the Holy place, Heb. ix. 2, 6, 8; of the
Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3; the name is transferred to
heaven, as the true dwelling-place of God and the pro-
totype of the earthly ‘tabernacle’ or sanctuary, Heb. ix.
11; Rey. xiii. 6; hence 4 o«nvy 7) adnOwn, heaven, Heb.
viii. 2; with a reference to this use of the word, it is
declared that when the kingdom of God is perfectly es-
tablished 4 oknvy tov Beod will be pera trav avOpaTov
(after the analogy of oxnvodv pera twos), Rev. xxi. 3; 6
vads THs oKNVAS TOU wapTupiov (See papruptor, c. fin.), the
heavenly temple, in which was the tabernacle of the
covenant, i. e. the inmost sanctuary or adytum, Rev. xv.
5. 1 ox. Tov Modoy, the tabernacle i.e. portable shrine
of Moloch, Acts vii. 43 (for the Orientals on their jour-
neys and military expeditions used to carry with them
their deities, together with shrines for them ; hence 7 iepa
oxnyn of the Carthaginians in Diod. 20, 65, where see
Wesseling [but cf. 0330 in Mihlau and Volck’s Gesen-
ius, or the recent Comm. on Am. v. 26]). 4 oxnv7y Aavid
(fr. Am. ix.'11 for 73D), the hut (tabernacle) of David,
seems to be employed, in contempt, of his house, i. e.
family reduced to decay and obscurity, Acts xv. 16 (other-
wise 9)7 Omit in Is. xvi. 5).*
oKyvormyta, -as, 4%, (oxnvy and myyvujs, cf. Heb. viii.
2); 1. the construction of a tabernacle or taberna-
cles: 4 THs xedtOdvos oxnvornyia, the skill of the swallow
in building its nest, Aristot. h. a. 9, 7 [p. 612°, 22]. 2
the feast of tabernacles: Jn. vii. 2. This festival was
observed by the Jews yearly for seven days, beginning
with the 15th of the month Tisri [i. e. approximately,
Oct.; cf. BB.DD.s. v. Month], partly to perpetuate the
memory of the time when their ancestors after leaving
Egypt dwelt in tents on their way through the Arabian
desert (Lev. xxiii. 43), partly as a season of festivity and
joy on the completion of the harvest and the vintage
(Deut. xvi. 13) [‘the feast of ingathe.ing’ (see below) ].
In celebrating the festival the Jews were accustomed to
construct booths of the leafy branches of trees, — either
on the roofs or in the courts of their dwellings, or in the
streets and squares (Neh. viii. 15, 16), and to adorn them
with flowers and fruits of all kinds (Lev. xxiii. 40), —
under which, throughout the period of the festival, they
feasted and gave themselves up to rejoicing. This feast
is called NIDBN IM (7) Eopry (rHs) oxnvomnyias, Deut. xvi.
16; xxxi. 10; Zech. xiv. 16, 18 sq.; 1 Esdr. v. 50 (51);
1 Mace. x. 21; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,12; (9) é€opry (7dr)
oxnvov, Lev. xxiii. 34; Deut. xvi. 18; [2 Chr. viii. 13;
Ezra iii. 4]; 2 Mace. x. 6; oxnvai, Philo de septenar. § 24;
n axnvornyia, 2 Mace. i. 9,18; once [twice] (Ex. xxiii.
16; [xxxiv. 22]) ONT IM, ie. ‘the feast of ingathering’
se. of fruits. (Cf. BB.DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s
Kitto); Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiv.]*
oKIpTaw
oKyvorroids, -ov, 6, (oxnvy and mroew), a tent-maker, i. q.
axnvoppagos (Ael. v. h. 2,1); one that made smail port-
able tents, of leather or cloth of goats’ hair (Lat. cili-
cium) or linen, for the use of travellers: Acts xviii. 3
[ef. Meyer ad loc.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2
vol. xi. p. 359 sq. ].*
okfjvos, -ovs, Td, [Hippocr., Plat., al.], a tabernacle, a
tent, everywhere [exc. Boeckh, Corp. inserr. vol. ii. no.
3071] used metaph. of the human body, in which the soul
dwells as in a tent, and which is taken down at death:
2 Co. v.45; 4 emiyetos nav oikia Tod oxnvous, i. e. 6 eore
TO oxnvos [W. § 59, 7d., 8 a.], which is the well-known
tent, ibid. 1 [R. V. the earthly house of our tabernacle].
Cf. Sap. ix. 15 and Grimm ad loc.; in the same sense
in (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 100 sqq. and often in other
philosophic writ.; ef. Fischer, Index to Aeschin. dial.
Socr.; Passow s. v.; [Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 113
(on 2 Co. v. 1)].*
oKyVvow, -2; fut. cxnvoow; 1 aor. éoxnveca; to fix one’s
tabernacle, have one’s tabernacle, abide (or live) in a tab-
ernacle (or tent), tabernacle, (often in Xen.; Dem. p. 1257,
6); God oxnvace ér adrovs, will spread his tabernacle
over them, so that they may dwell in safety and security
under its cover and protection, Rev. vii. 15; univ. i. q.
to dwell (Judg. v.17): foll. by év with a dat. of place,
Rey. xii. 12; xiii. 6, (év rats oikiais, Xen. an. 5, 5,11); ev
nei, among us, Jn. i. 14; pera twos, with one, Rev. xxi.
3; ovv tun, to be one’s tent-mate, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 49.
[Comp. : ézt-, kara- oxnvdo. | *
TKHVOPG, -Tos, TO, (oKnVOw), a tent, tabernacle: of the
temple as God’s habitation, Acts vii. 46 (Ps. xiv. (xv.)
1; xxv. (xxvi.) 8; xlii. (xliii.) 3; xlv. (lvi.) 5; Pausan.
3, 17, 6; of the tabernacle of the covenant, 1 K. ii. 28);
metaph. of the human body as the dwelling of the soul
(see oxyvos): é€v TO oxnvepate eivat, of life on earth,
2 Pet. 1.13; awdOeo.s (the author blending the concep-
tions of a tent and of a covering or garment, as Paul
does in 2 Co. v. 2), ibid. 14. (Eur., Xen., Plut., al.;
Sept. for 5nis and j2¥71D.) *
oKid, -Gs, , [(see oxnvy, init.)], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for 5x ; a. prop. shadow, i. e. shade caused by the
interception of the light: Mk. iv. 32 (ef. Ezek. xvii. 23);
Acts v.15; oxta Oavarov, shadow of death (like umbra
mortis, Ovid. metam. 5, 191, and umbra Erebi, Verg. Aen.
4, 26; 6, 404), ‘the densest darkness’ (because from of
old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick
darkness), trop. the thick darkness of error [i. e. spirit-
ual death; see Odvaros,1]: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is.
ix. 1, where yy). b. a shadow, i. e. an image
cast by an object and representing the form of that ob-
ject : opp. to capa, the thing itself, Col. ii. 17 ; hence i. q.
a sketch, outline, adumbration, Heb. viii. 5; opp. to eixar,
the ‘express’ likeness, the very image, Heb. x. 1 (as in
Cie. de off. 3, 17, 69 nos veri juris solidam et expresssam
effigiem nullam tenemus, wmbra et imaginibus utimur).*
oKiptaw, -@: 1 aor. éoxiptnaa; to leap: Lk. i. 41, 44;
vi. 23. (Gen. xxv. 22; Ps. exiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6; Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down.) *
;
:
:
——
atl cee
TKANpoKapdia
oKAnpo-Kapdla, -as, 7, (oKAnpds and Kapdia), a bibl. word,
the characteristic of one who is oxdnpds thy Kapdiav (Prov.
XXvill. 14), or oxAnpoxapdios (Prov. xvii. 20; Ezek. iii.
7); hardness of heart: Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; xvi. 14;
for 339 now, Deut. x. 16; Jer.iv.4; Sir. xvi. 10; k«ap-
dia oxAnpa, Sir. iii. 26,27. [Cf. W. 26, 99 (94).]*
oKAnpés, -d, -dv, (7KEANw, oKAFvat, [to dry up, be dry]),
fr. [Hes., Theogn.], Pind., Aeschyl. down; Sept. for TWP,
hard, harsh, rough, stiff, (ra oxAnpa xk. Ta padaka, Xen.
mem. 3,10, 1); of men, metaph., harsh, stern, hard:
‘Mt. xxv. 24 (1S. xxv. 3; Is. xix. 4; xlviii. 4; many exx.
fr. prof. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2b.; [L. and S.
s. v. Il. 2; esp. Trench §xiv.]); of things: dvepos, vio-
lent, rough, Jas. iii. 4; 6 Adyos, offensive and intolerable,
Jn. vi. 60, equiv. to ds cxavdadicer, 61; oxAnpa dadeiv Kara
twos, to speak hard and bitter things against one, Jude
15 (oxAnpa Aadeivy tin is also used of one who speaks
roughly, Gen. xlii. 7, 30; dmoxpiver@ar oxdnpa, to reply
with threats, 1 K. xii. 13); oxAnpdv éore foll. by an inf.,
it is dangerous, turns out badly, [ A. V. it ts hard], Acts
ix.5 Ret.: xxviz 14.*
oKAnpétys, -7Tos, 7, (oKAnpds), hardness; trop. obsti-
nacy, stubbornness: Ro. ii. 5. (Deut. ix. 27; [Antipho],
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) *
oKAnpo-Tpdxydos, -ov, (oKAnpds and tpdyndos), prop.
stiff-necked; trop. stubborn, headstrong, obstinate: Acts vii.
51; Sept. for \ py wp, Ex. xxxiii. 3,5; xxxiv. 9; [ete.];
Bar. ii. 30; Sir. xvi. 11; [cef. oxAnpotpayndia, Test. xii.
Patr., test. Sym. § 6]. Not found in prof. auth.; [ef. W.
26, 99 (94) ].*
okAnpive [cf. W. 92 (88)]; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur.
okAnpvynte ; Pass., impf. eoxAnpuvdunv; 1 aor. éoxdnpvr-
Onv; (oKAnpds, q. V.); Sept. for WPI and pin, to make
hard, to harden; prop. in Hippocr. and Galen; metaph.
to render obstinate, stubborn, [A.V. to harden]: twa, Ro.
ix. 18 (in opp. to those who interpret it to treat harshly,
ef. Fritzsche vol. ii. p. 323 sq.; [cef., too, Meyer ad
loc.]); | tHv xapdiay twos, Heb. iii. 8, 15 and iv. 7, (fr. Ps.
xciv. (xev.) 8; cf. Ex. vii. 3, 22; viii. 19; ix.12); pass.
(Sept. for Nw and pin) to be hardened, i. e. become obsti-
nate or stubborn: Acts xix. 9; Heb. iii. 13.*
oKolt6s, -d, -dv, (opp. to dpOds, dpOtos, evOvs [cf. cxw@Ané}),
fr. Hom. down, crooked, curved: prop. of a way (Prov.
XXVili. 18), ra oxoded, Lk. iii. 5 (opp. to 9 edOeia sc. 680s,
fr. Is. xl.4); metaph. perverse, wicked : ) yeved 7 oKoAtd,
Acts ii. 40; with dSseorpappevn added, Phil. ii. 15 (clearly
so Deut. xxxii. 5); unfair, surly, froward, (opp. to dya-
Obs x. émvetkns), 1 Pet. ii. 18.*
oKddo, -o7os, 6, fr. Hom. down, a pointed piece of
wood, a pale, a stake: €&60n pot oxddo tH capri, a sharp
stake [al. say splinter, A.V. thorn; cf. Num. xxxiii. 55;
Ezek. xxviii. 24; Hos. ii. 6 (8); Babr. fab. 122, 1. 10;
al. (Sir. xliii. 19)] to pierce my flesh, appears to indicate
some constant bodily ailment or infirmity, which, even
when Paul had been caught up in a trance to the third
heaven, sternly admonished him that he still dwelt in a
frail and mortal body, 2 Co. xii. 7 (ef. 1-4); [ef. W. § 31,
10 N.3; B. § 133, 27. On Paul’s “thorn in the flesh ”
579
OKOTELWOS
see Farrar, St. Paul, i. 652 sqq. (Excursus x.); Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. p. 186 sqq.; Schaff in his * Popuiar
Commentary’ on Gal. p. 331 sq. ] *
wKOTEW, -@; (oKords, q.V-); fr. Hom. down; fo look at,
observe, contemplate. to mark: absol., foll. by py with
the indic. (see py, III. 2), Lk. xi. 35; ria, to fix one’s
eyes upon, direct one’s attention to, any one: Ro. xvi.
17; Phil. iii. 17; ceavrdv, foll. by py with the subjunc.
to look to, take heed to thyself, lest etc. Gal. vi. 1 [see pn,
II. 1b.]; i, to look at, i.e. care for, have regard to, a
thing : 2 Co. iv. 18; Phil. ii.4, (2 Mace. iv. 5). [Comp.:
emt-, KaTa-oKoTrew. | *
[SyNn.: oxomeiy is more pointed than BAdmrew; often i. q. to
scrutinize, observe. When the physical sense recedes, i. q. to fix
one’s (mind’s) eye on, direct one’s attention to,a thing in order to
get it, or owing to interest in it, ora duty towards it. Hence
often equiv. to aim at, care for, etc. Schmidt, Syn. ch. xi.
Cf. Oewpew, dpdw.|
oKords, -ov, 6, [ (fr. a r. denoting ‘to spy,’ ‘ peer,’ ‘look
into the distance’; cf. also Lat. specio, speculum, species,
etc. ; Fick i. 251 sq.; iv. 279 ; Curtius §111)]; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. an observer, a watchman. 2. the
distant mark looked at, the goal or end one has in view:
kata oxomov (on this phrase see xara, II. 1 ¢.), Phil.
dit, 14.*
cKoptritw; 1 aor. éoxdpmica; 1 aor. pass. éoxopria On ;
[(prob. fr. r. skarp ‘to cut asunder,’ ‘cut to pieces’;
akin is oxopmios; cf. Lat. scalpere, scrobs, ete.; Fick
i. 240; iii. 811, ete.)]; to scatter: 6 AvKos cropmite Ta
mpoBara, Jn. X.12; 6 py ovvdyov per €nov oxopricer, Mt.
xii. 80; Lk. xi. 23, (this proverb is taken from a flock,
—to which the body of Christ’s followers is likened [al.
regard the proverb as borrowed fr. agriculture]; cuvdyet
Tovs éoKopmiopevous TO Spyavoy [i. e. a trumpet], Artem.
oneir. 1, 56 init.); wad, in pass., of those who, routed
or terror-stricken or driven by some other impulse,
fly in every direction : foll. by ets W, ace. of place, Jn.
xvi. 32 [cf. W. 516 (481)], (1 Mace. vi. 54; hoBnOevres
eoxopricOncay, Plut. Timol. 4; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 6,
3). i. q. to scatter abroad (what others may collect for
themselves), of one dispensing blessings liberally : 2 Co.
ix. 9 fr. Ps. exi. (exii.) 9, [ef. W. 469 (437)]. (Ace. to
Phrynichus the word was used by Hecataeus; it was
also used —in addition to the writ. already cited — by
Strabo 4 p. 198; Leian. asin. 32; Ael. v. h. 13, 45 [here
Sueox. (ed. Hercher); Adyous (cf. Lat. spargere rumores),
Joseph. antt. 16, 1, 2]; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W.
22; 92 (87)]; Sept. for pron, 2 So kon. 15's ess exvit.
(xviii.) 15. Attic writers say oxedavyyu.) [COMP.: dta-
oxopriopat. | *
okoptrlos, -ov, 6, [(for deriv. see the preceding word) ;
from Aeschyl. down; on its accent, cf. Chandler § 246],
a scorpion, Sept. for 29py, the name of a little animal,
somewhat resembling a lobster, which in warm regions
lurks esp. in stone walls; it has a poisonous sting in its
tail [McC. and S. and BB. DD.s. v.}: Lk. x.19; xi. 12;
Revetx. 3, 0, 10%
okotewds [WH oxorivos; see I,¢], -9, -d», (oxdros), full
oKoTla 580
of darkness, covered with darkness, [fr. Aeschyl. down]:
opp. to pwrewds, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (ra oxorewa
xk. Ta Porewa, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1; [ef. 4, 3, 4]).*
oxorta, -as, 7, [on its deriv. cf. oxnyn], (Thom. Mag. 6
oKOTos K. TO OKOTOS* TO S€ TKOTia Ok Ev xpHoeL SC. in Attic
[ef. Moeris s. v.; L. and S.s. v. oxédros, fin.]), darkness :
prop. the darkness due to want of daylight, Jn. vi.
17; xx. 1; é€v t7 oxotia (AaXew Te), Unseen, in secret,
(i. q. €v kpun7@. Jn. xviii. 20), privily, in private, opp. to
dv T@ peti, Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; metaph. used of igno-
rance of divine things, and its associated wickedness, and
the resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 LTr WH; Jn. i. 5;
vill. 12: xii.°85, 46-°1 Jn. i. 5; ii. 8 sq. Tle > (Ap: Rh.
4, 1698; Anth. 8, 187. 190; for M2um Mic. iii. 6; for
bpkx Job xxviii. 3.)*
‘ekoritw: Pass., pf. ptep. éoxorerpévos (Eph. iv. 18 RG);
1 aor. €oxoricOnv; 1 fut. cxotecPjoopar; (oKdros); to cov-
er with darkness, to darken; pass. to be covered with dark-
ness, be darkened: prop. of the heavenly bodies, as de-
prived of light [(Eccl. xii. 2)], Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24;
Lk. xxiii. 45[T WH éxdeimw(q.v. 2)]; Rev. viii. 12; ix. 2[(L
T WH oxoz6a, q.v.]; metaph. of the eyes, viz. of the un-
derstanding, Ro. xi. 10; 9 kapdia, the mind [see xapdia, 2
b. B.], Ro. i. 21; men 77 dcavoia, Eph. iv. 18 RG. (Plut.
[adv. Col. 24, 4; Cleomed. 81, 28]; Tzetz. hist. 8, 929;
Sept. several times for ]wm; [Polyb. 12, 15,10; 3 Mace.
iv.10; Test. xii. Patr., test. Rub. § 3; test. Levi §14].)*
ok6Tos, -ov, 6, (cf. cxoria, init.), fr. Hom. down, dark-
ness: Heb, xii. 18 Ree. [ef. WH. App. p. 158; W. 66
(64); B. 22 (20)]-*
okéTos, -ovs, 7d, fr. Pind. down, (see the preceding
word, and oxoria, init.), Sept. chiefly for jwn, dark-
Ness ; a. prop.: Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk.
xxiii. 44; Acts ii. 20; 2 Co. iv. 63 atrn éorw 7 e€ovoia
Tov oxérous, this is the power of (night’s) darkness, i. e.
it has the power of rendering men bold to commit crimes,
Lk. xxii. 53; ra gpumra Tov oxdrous (see kpumtds), 1 Co.
iv. 5; of darkened eyesight or blindness: oxéros eme-
minrec emt tTivai.e. on one deprived of sight, Acts xiii. 11;
in fig. disc. ei ody . . -, TO oxdtos méaov ; if the light that is
in thee is darkness, darkened (i. e. if the soul has lost its
perceptive power), how great is the darkness (how much
more deplorable than bodily blindness), Mt. vi. 23, cf.
Lk. xi. 35. by meton. put for a dark place: Mt. viii.
12; xxii.13; xxv. 30, (see eE@repos) ; Céqhos tov axdrous
(see Coos), 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. b. metaph. of
ignorance respecting divine things and human duties,
and the accompanying ungodliness and immorality, to-
gether with their consequent misery (see oxoria): Jn.
iii. 19; Acts xxvi. 18; 2 Co. vi.14; Eph. vi. 12; Col. i.
13; 1 Pet.ii.9; (abstract for the concrete) persons in
whom darkness becomes visible and holds sway, Eph. v.
8; ra €pya Tov oxdrovs, deeds done in darkness, harmo-
nizirg with it, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 113 oxérovus eivac, to
be given up to the power of darkness [cf. W. § 30, 5 a.],
1 Th. v. 5; év ox«drer civa, ib. 4; of év oxdres, Lk. i. 79;
Ro. ii. 19; 6 Aads 6 KaOnpevos ev oxdre, Mt. iv. 16 RGT;
€v okoret Tepiratetv, 1 Jn. i. 6.*
er ————
oKwrn€&
oKotée, -@: Pass., pf. ptep. éoxormpevos; 1 aor. éoxo-
twOnv; (ef. WH. App. p. 171]; (oxdros); to darken,
cover with darkness: Rev. ix. 2 LT WH; xvi.10; met-
aph. to darken or blind the mind: écxotwpevor rn Savoia,
Eph. iv.18 LT TrWH. (({Soph.], Plat., Polyb., Plut.,
al.; Sept.) *
okvBadoy, -ov, Td, (kuoiBadopr Te Gv, TO Tos KUTL BadAOpeE-
vov, Suid. [p. 3347¢.; to the same effect Etym. Magn.
p- 719, 53 ef. 125,44; al. connect it with oxap (cf. scoria,
Lat. stercus), al. with a r. meaning ‘to shiver’, ‘shred’;
Fick, Pt. i. p. 244]), any refuse, as the excrement of
animals, offscouring, rubbish, dregs, ete.: [A. V. dung]
i.e. worthless and detestable, Phil. iii. 8. (Sir. xxvii.
4, Philo; Joseph. b. j. 5,13, 7; Plut.; Strabo; often in
the Anthol.) [See on the word, Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
l.c.; Gataker, Advers. Miscell. Posth., c. xliii. p. 868
sqq-]*
TKUOys, -ov, 6, a Scythian, an inhabitant of Scythia i.e.
modern Russia: Col. iii. 11. By the more civilized na-
tions of antiquity the Scythians were regarded as the
wildest of all barbarians; cf. Cic. in Verr. 2,5, 58 § 150;
in Pison. 8, 18; Joseph. ec. Apion. 2, 37, 6; [Philo, leg.
ad Gaium § 2]; Leian. Tox. 5sq.; 2 Mace. iv. 47; 3
Mace. vii. 5. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l.c.; Hackelt in
B.D. s. v. Seythians; Rawlinson’s Herod., App. to bk. iv.,
Essays ii. and iii.; Vaniéek, Fremdworter, s. v.]*
okv0pwrrds, -ov, also of three term.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 105 [W. § 11, 1], (oxvOpds and dy), of a sad and
gloomy countenance (opp. to dadpés, Xen. mem. 3, 10,
4): Lk. xxiv. 17; of one who feigns or affects a sad
countenance, Mt. vi. 16. (Gen. xl. 7; Sir. xxv. 23; Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
ckid\dw; pf. pass. ptep. éoxuAuevos; pres. mid. impv.
2 pers. sing. oxvAAov; (oKdAor, q. V-) a. to skin,
flay, (Anthol.). b. to rend, mangle, (Aeschyl. Pers.
577); to vex, trouble, annoy, (Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4]): ruvd,
Mk. v.35; Lk. viii. 49; pass. éoxvApévor, (Vulg. verati)
[R. V. distressed], Mt. ix. 36 GLTTr WH; mid. to give
one’s self trouble, trouble one’s self: ut) oxvdAXov, Lk. vii.
6*
okddov [Ree GL T WH] also cxidor ([so R*°" Tr] cf.
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 44), -ov, 76, (fr. the obsol.
okvw, ‘to pull off’, allied to Eva, EvAov [but cf. Curtius
§ 113; Vanitek p. 1115]); a. a (beast’s) skin
stripped off, a pelt. b. the arms stripped off from an
enemy, spoils: plur. Lk. xi. 22. (Soph., Thue., sqq. ;
Sept.) *
oKwdnKs-Bpwros, -ov, (cKdANE and BiBpaaKw), eaten of
worms: Acts xii. 23, ef. 2 Mace. ix. 9. (of a tree, Theo-
phr. c. pl. 5, 9, 1.)*
oKodné, -nKos, 6, [perh. akin to cxodids], a worm (Hom.
Il. 13, 654); spec. that kind which preys upon dead
bodies (Sir. x. 11; xix. 3; 2 Mace. ix. 9; Anthol. 7, 480,
3; 10, 78, 3): 6 cxodnێ abrav ob TedeuTa, by a fig. bor-
rowed fr. Is. Ixvi. 24 (cf. Sir. vii. 17; Judith xvi. 17),
‘their punishment after death will never cease’ [ox.
symbolizing perh. the loathsomeness of the penalty},
Mk. ix. 44, 46, [T WH om. Tr br. these two verses], 48."
ocpmapayowos
opapaybivos, -n, -ov, (cudpaydos, cf. dueOvorwvos, vakiv-
Owos, etc.), of emerald, made of emerald, [see the foll.
word]: sc. Aidos, Rev. iv. 3. [(Leian.) |*
opdpaydos, -ov, 6 [but apparently fem. in the earlier
writ., cf. Theophrast. lap. 4, 23; in Hdt. its gend. cannot
be determined; cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v.], Lat. smarag-
dus, [A. V. emerald], a transparent precious stone noted
esp. for its light green color: Rev. xxi. 19. [From Hdt.
down; Sept. On the deriv. of the word see Vaniéek,
Fremdworter, s. v. On its relation to our ‘emerald’
(disputed by King, Antique Gems, p. 27 sqq.), see Riehm
HWB. s. v. ‘ Edelsteine’, 17; Deane in the ‘ Bible Edu-
cator’, vol. ii. p. 350 sq.]*
ocpipva, -ns, 7, Hebr. 1, WW, myrrh, a bitter gum and
costly perfume which exudes from a certain tree or
shrub in Arabia and Ethiopia, or is obtained by incis-
ions made in the bark: Mt. ii. 11; as an antiseptic it
was used in embalming, Jn. xix. 39. Cf. Hdt. 2, 40, 86;
3, 107; Theophr. hist. pl. 9, 3 sq.; Diod. 5,41; Plin. h.
n. 12, 33 sq.; [BB.DD.; Birdwood in the ‘ Bible Edu-
cator’, vol. ii. p. 151; Léw, Aram. Pflanzennam. § 185 ].*
Zpipva, -ns, 7, Smyrna, an Ionian city, on the Hgean
Sea, about 40 miles N. of Ephesus; it had a harbor, and
flourished in trade, commerce, and the arts; now Jsmir
[BB.DD.]: Rev.i.11; ii.8. Tdf. after cod. 8 [(cf. cod.
Bezae, ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.) |] has adopted the form
Zpvpv., found also occasionally on coins and in inserr. ;
ef, Kiihner i. p. 200 e.; [Tdf.’s note on Rev. i. 11; and see
3, 0, s, sub fin.; Bp. Lghtft. Ignat. ii. 331 note].*
Zpupvatos, -ov, 6, 7, of or belonging to Smyrna, an in-
habitant of Smyrna: Rev. ii. 8 Ree. [(Pind., Hdt.)] *
opupvite: (omipva, q. V.) 5 1. intrans. to be like
myrrh (Diose. 1, 79). 2. to mix and so flavor with
myrrh: oivos éopupyopevos (pf. pass. ptep.) wine [A. V.
mingled | with myrrh (Vulg. murratum vinum), i. e. flavored
or (Plin. h. n. 14, 15) made fragrant with myrrh: Mk. xv.
23. But since the ancients used to infuse myrrh into
wine in order to give it a more agreeable fragrance and
flavor, we must in this matter accept Matthew’s account
(xxvii. 34, viz. ‘mingled with gall’) as by far the more
probable; [but see yoAn, 2].*
Zdbopna, -wv, rd, (DID), Sodom, a city respecting tne
location and the destruction of which see Téuoppa [and
(in addition to reff. there given) McC. and S. s. v. Sodom;
Schaff-Herzog ib.]: Mt. x. 15; xi. 23 sq.; Mk. vi. 11 (R
Tum br); Lk. 12soxvar. 29 No; ix..29); 2 Pet.1. (6)
Jude 7; Rev. xi. 8.*
Dodropav (so [Ret bez elz G Lin Lk. xii. 27; RL Tr WH
in Acts vii. 47 (cf. Tdf. on Mt. vi. 29)]) and SoXopev [so
BiG LP Tr WH in Mt. 1.7; vi 295° Re’ TD Tr WE in
Lk. xii.27; Gin Acts vii.47; (Sadopov Td. in Acts vii.
47)], -vros (so Rec. uniformly; [LT WH in Acts iii. 11;
v.12, Lin Mt.i. 6 also]), and -évos (so [G LT Tr WH
in Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Jn. x. 23; GT Tr WH in Mt.
i.6; G Trin Acis iii. 11; v.12]; the forms «dy, -dvos,
ure undoubtedly to be preferred, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. pp.
104,110; WH. App. p. 158]; W. 67 (65); B. 16 (14
q-)), 6, Gid0, i.e. ‘pacific’, Irenaeus, Germ. Fried-
581
cohia
rich, Eng. Frederick), Solomon, the son of David by
Bathsheba the wife of Uriah; he succeeded his father,
becoming the third king of Israel (8. c. 1015-975 [ace.
to the commonly accepted chronology; but ef. the art.
‘Zeitrechnung’ in Riehm’s HWB. (esp. p. 18238 sq.) ]),
built the temple at Jerusalem, and was distinguished for
his magnificence, splendor, and wisdom: Mt. i. 6 sq.; vi.
OO xiao ek SIS Ls | xi. 295 In, x1234) Acts i. 11%
ave le2asy Ava 40/3
copés, -ov, 7, an urn or receptacle for keeping the bones
of the dead (Hom. Il. 23, 91); a coffin (Gen.1. 26; Hat.
1, 68; 2,78; Arstph., Aeschin., Plut., al.) ; the funeral-
couch or bier on which the Jews carried their dead forth to
burial [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Coffin; Eder iss Jesus
the Messiah, i i. 555 sq.]: Lk. vii. 14.*
«6s, -7, -dv, possess. pron. of the 2d pers.; fr. Hom.
down; thy, thine: Mt. vii. 3,22; xiii. 27; xxiv. 3; Mk.
ii. 18; Lk. xv. 31; xxii. 42; Jn. iv. 42 [here Tr mrg. WH
mrg. read the personal gov]; Xvii. 6,9, 10,17; xviii. 35;
Acts v.4; xxiv. 2 (3), 4; 1 Co. viii. 11; xiv. 16; Philem.
14; of cot sc. paOnrai, Lk. v.33; absol. of coi, thy kins-
folk, thy friends, Mk. v.19; 7d odv, what is thine, Mt.
xx. 14; xxv. 25; plur. ra oa [A. V. thy goods; cf. W.
592 (551)], Lk. vi. 30. [Cf. W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. 115
(101) sqq.]*
covdaptov, -ov, Td, (a Lat. word, sudarium, fr. sudor,
sweat; cf. B. 18 (16)), @ handkerchief, i.e. a cloth for
wiping the perspiration from the face and for cleaning
the nose: Lk. xix. 20; Acts xix. 12; also used in swath:
ing the head of a corpse [A. V. napkin], Jn. xi. 44; xx.
7. [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Handkerchief. ] *
Lovedvva, -ns [cf. B. 17 (15)], 7, (TIWIW a lily), Su-
sanna, one of the women that attended Jesus on his
journeys: Lk. viii. 3.*
copia, -as, 1}, (copds), Hebr. WDM, wisdom, broad and
full intelligence, [fr. Hom. down]; used of the knowl-
edge of very diverse matters, so that the shade of mean-
ing in which the word is taken must be discovered from
the context in every particular case. a. the wis-
dom which belongs tomen: univ., Lk. ii. 40,52; spec.
the varied knowledge of things human and divine, ac-
quired by acuteness and experience, and summed up in
maxims and proverbs, as was 7 codia rod Sodouavos, Mt.
xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; the science and learning tév Aiyu-
nriov, Acts vii. 22 [ef. W. 227 (213) n.; B. § 134,6]; the
art of interpreting dreams and always giving the sagest
advice, Acts vii. 10; the intelligence evinced in discoy-
ering the meaning of some mysterious number or vision,
Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; skill in the management of af-
fairs, Acts vi. 3; a devout and proper prudence in in-
tercourse with men not disciples of Christ, Col. iv. 5;
skill and discretion in imparting Christian truth, Col. i.
28; iii. 16; [2 Pet. iii. 15]; the knowledge and prac-
tice of ihe requisites for godly and aprishe living, Jas.
i. 55 iii. 13, 17; with which codia avabev xarepxyopeérn is
put in contrast the copia eniyetos, Puxexn, Sayorwdns,
such as is the craftiness of envious and quarrelsome
men, Jas. iii. 15, or capxixy copia (see capkixds, 1):
copia
craftiness, 2 Co. i. 12 (for the context shows that it does
not differ essentially from the ravoupyia of iv. 2; in
Grk. writ. also godia is not infreq. used of shrewdness
and cunning; cf. Passow [or L. and §.]s. v. 2); the
knowledge and skill in affairs requisite for the successful
defence of the Christian cause against hostile accusa-
tions, Lk. xxi. 15; an acquaintance with divine things
and human duties, joined to a power of discoursing con-
cerning them and of interpreting and applying sacred
Scripture, Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 2; Acts vi.10; the wis-
dom or instruction with which John the Baptist and
Jesus taught men the way to obtain salvation, Mt. xi.
19; Lk. vii. 35, (on these pass. see dcxatd@, 2). In Paul’s
Epp.: aknowledge of the divine plan, previously hidden,
of providing salvation for men by the expiatory death
of Christ, 1 Co. i. 30; ii. 6; Eph. i. 8 [W. 111 (105 sq.) ];
hence all the treasures of wisdom are said to be hidden
in Christ, Col. ii. 3; w. the addition of 6eod (gen. of the
author), 1 Co. i. 24; ii. 7; mvevparixy, Col. i. 9; mvetpa
copias x. aroxadiews, Eph. i. 17; Adyos codias, the
ability to discourse eloquently of this wisdom, 1 Co. xii.
8; opposed to this wisdom is—the empty conceit of
wisdom which men make a parade of, a knowledge more
specious than real of lofty and hidden subjects: such as
the theosophy of certain Jewish Christians, Col. ii. 23;
the philosophy of the Greeks, 1 Co. i. 21 sq-; li. 1; with
Tov Kéopov added, 1 Co. i. 20; iii. 19; rod aidvos rodtrov,
4 Co. ii. 6; rév copay, 1 Co. i. 19; avOparwv, 1 Co. ii. 5,
(in each of these last pass. the word includes also the
vthetorical art, such as is taught in the schools), cf.
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. i. p. 67 sq.; copia rod Adyov, the
wisdom which shows itself in speaking [R. V. wisdom of
words}, the art of the rhetorician, 1 Co. i. 17; Adyoe
(avO8pwrims [so RB in vs. 4 (all txts. in 13)]) codias, dis-
course conformed to philosophy and the art of rhetoric,
Conia s is: b. supreme intelligence, such as be-
longs to God: Rev. vii. 12, also to Christ, exalted to
God’s right hand, Rev. v.12; the wisdom of God as
evinced in forming and executing his counsels, Ro. xi.
33; with the addition of rod deov, as manifested in the
formation and government of the world, and to the Jews,
moreover, in the Scriptures, 1 Co. i. 21; it is called
modvroikidos from the great variety of ways and methods
by which he devised and achieved salvation through
Christ, Eph. iii. 10. In the noteworthy pass. Lk. xi. 49
(where Christ ascribes to ‘the wisdom of God’ what in
the parallel, Mt. xxiii. 34, he utters himself), the words
7 copia Tov Geod eirev seem to denote the wisdom of God
which is operative and embodied as it were in Jesus, so
that the primitive Christians, when to comfort them-
selves under persecution they recalled the saying of
Christ, employed that formula of quotation [ef. 1 Co. i.
24, 30, ete.]; but Luke, in ignorance of this fact, took
the phrase for a part of Christ’s saying. So Eusebius
(h. e. 3, 32,8), perhaps in the words of Hegesippus, calls
those who had personally heard Christ of airais dxoats
THs evOéov cedias enaxovoa katnéwmpevor; cf. Grimm
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 332 sqa- [For other
582
oTapyavow
explanations of the phenomenon see the Comm. on Lk.
le. Cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 33, V.1 and reff.]*
[Syn.: on the relation of copla to yvaors see yvaots, fin.
“While go. is ‘mental excellence in its highest and fullest
sense’ (Aristot. eth. Nic. 6,7), cdveors and ppévnors are both
derivative and special, — applications of codia to details: ovv.
critical, apprehending the bearing of things, opdév. prac-
tical, suggesting lines of action” (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 9);
but cf. Meyer on Col. lL. c.; Schmidt, ch. 13 § 10; ch. 147 §8.
See aodds, fin.]
coditw : 1 aor. inf. copica; (codds) ; 1. to make
wise, teach: twa, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; evogu-
gas je THY evToAnY Gov, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 983 odre Te vav-
Tins cecodiopevos, ovre Tt vnav, Les. opp. 647). 2.
Mid. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, mostly as depon. to
become wise, to have understanding, (€sopicaro imép mav-
tas avOpmmovs, 1 K. iv. 27 (31); add, Eccl. ii. 15, ete.;
freq. in Sir.); to invent, play the sophist; to devise cleverly
or cunningly: pf. pass. ptep. cecodicpeévor piOor, 2 Pet.
i. 16. [Comp.: xara-copiopat. | *
copes, -7, -dv, (akin to cadys and to the Lat. sapio,
sapiens, sapor, ‘to have a taste’, ete.; Curtius § 628;
[Vanitek p. 991]), Sept. for 03n; [fr. Theogn., Pind.,
Aeschyl. down]; wise, i. e. a. skilled, expert: ets tt,
Ro. xvi. 19; of artificers (cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on
Sap. [vii. 21] p. 151): dpyeréxrwyv, 1 Co. iii. 10; Is. iii.
3, (Onpeoupyds, of God, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 7). b. wise,
i.e. skilled in letters, cultivated, learned: Ro. i. 14, 22;
of the Greek philosophers (and orators, see codia, a.),
1 Co. i. 19 sq. 26 sq.; ili. 18 sq. [20]; of the Jewish
theologians, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; of Christian teach-
ers, Mt. xxiii. 34. c. wise in a practical sense, i. e.
one who in action is governed by piety and integrity: Eph.
v.15; Jas. iii.13; and accordingly is a suitable per
son to settle private quarrels,1Co.vi.5. d.
wise in a philosophic sense, forming the best plans and uss
ing the best means for their execution: so of God, Ro. xvi.
27, and Ree. in 1 Tim. i. 17; Jude 25; copwrepor, con-
tains more wisdom, is more sagaciously thought out,
L Conds 25,7
[Syn.: copds, cuvetds, dpdvimos: copds wise, see
above ; ouverds intelligent, denotes one who can ‘ put things
together’ (cuvévat), who has insight and comprehension ;
bpdévimos prudent (A. V. uniformly, wise), denotes primarily
one who has quick and correct perceptions, hence ‘discreet,”
‘circumspect,’ etc. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 147. See cogda, fin.
Srravla, -as, #, Spain, in the apostolic age the whole
peninsula S. of the Pyrenees: Ro. xv. 24, 28. ({W. 25];
the more com. Grk. form is ‘Iozavia, 1 Mace. viii. 3, [ap-
parently the Phoenician or Lat. name for ‘IRypia; cf.
Pape, Eigennamen, s. vv.].) *
omapdcow; 1 aor. eondpaéa; to convulse [al. tear]:
rwd, Mk. i. 26; ix. 20RG'[rtxt., 26; Lk. ix. 39; see
pnyvup, c. (ras yvabovs, Arstph. ran. 424; ras tpixas,
Diod. 19, 34; in various other senses in Grk. writ.)
[Comp.: ovy- orapacoa. | *
orapyavow, -@: 1 aor. éomapyaveca; pf. pass. ptep.
eorrapyavwpevos ; (omapyavov a swathing band) ; to wrap
&
oTaTaXaw
in swaadling-clothes: an infant just born, Lk. ii. 7, 12.
(Ezek. xvi. 4; [Eur., Aristot.], Hippocr., Plut., al.) *
oratrakaw, -@; 1 aor. éomaradnoa; (onardAn, riotous
living, luxury); io live luxuriously, lead a voluptuous life,
[give one’s self to pleasure]: 1 Tim. v.6; Jas.v.5. (Prov.
xxix. 21; Am. vi. 4 [in both these pass. karaua.; Ezek.
xvi. 49]; Sir. xxi. 15; Barnab. ep. 10,3; Polyb. exerpt.
Vat. p. 451 [1.e. 37, 4, 6 (ed. Didot)], and occasionally
in later and inferior writ.)*
ondw, -@: 1 aor. mid. éomacdunv; [cogn. w. domd{ouat
(to draw to one’s self, embrace, etc.), Eng. spasm, ete. ];
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for IW; to draw: mid.
with payxatpay (cf. B. § 135, 4], to draw one’s sword, Mk.
xiv. 47; Acts xvi. 27, (Num. xxii. 31; rv poudaiay, 23;
Judg. ix. 54, ete.). [Comp.: dva-, dao-, dua-, émi-, mept-
onda. | *
oreipa {on the accent cf. B. 11; Chandler § 161; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 102], %, gen. -ys (Acts x. 1; xxi. 31; xxvii. 1;
see [Tdf. Proleg. p.117; WH. App. p. 156; and] pa-
xarpa, init.), [cogn. w. oupis (q. v-) ]3 a. Lat. spira;
anything rolled into a circle or ball, anything wound,
rolled up, folded together. b. a military cohort
(Polyb. 11, 23, 1 rpets omeipas: tovro dé xaXeirat td ovr-
Taypa Tov meC@v mapa ‘Pwpaiots Kodptis), i. e. the tenth
part of a legion [i. e. about 600 men (i. e. legionaries), or
if auxiliaries either 500 or 1000; ef. Marquardt, Rémisch.
Alterth. III. ii. p. 371. But surely rodro 76 cuvraypa in
the quotation comprehends the rpeis om.; hence Polyb.
here makes a oz. equal to a maniple, cf. 2, 3,2; 6, 24,5;
ef. Zonaras, Lex. p. 1664, om.+ ovvtaypa Staxogiwy avdpav.
On the other hand, “the later Grk. writ. almost uniform-
ly employ oz. as the representative of cohors” (Smith,
Dict. of Antiq., ed. 2, s. v. exercitus, p. 500); and the
use of ytAlapyos (which was the equiv. of tribunus, the
commander of a cohort) in connection with it (Jn. xviii.
12; Acts xxi. 31), together with the uniform rendering
of the word by cohors in the Lat. versions, warrants the
marg. “cohort ” uniformly added in R.V. to the render-
ing band]: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Acts x. 15 xxi.
31; xxvii. 1, and often in Josephus; @ maniple, or the
thirtieth part of a legion, often so in Polyb. [(see above) ]};
any band, company, or detachment, of soldiers (2 Mace.
viii. 23; Jud. xiv. 11): Jn. xviii. 3, 12.*
onelpw; [impf. 2 pers. sing. éorerpes, Mt. xiii. 27 Tr];
1 aor. éometpa; Pass., pres. omeipopat; pf. pass. ptep.
éorappevos; 2 aor. €omapny; [derived fr. the quick, jerky,
motion of the hand; cf. our spurn (of the foot); Cur-
tius $389]; fr. Hesiod down; Sept. for p11; to sow,
scatter seed; a. prop.: absol., Mt. vi. 26; xiii. 3 sq.
18sq.; Mk. iv. 3 sq. 14; Lk. viii. 5; xii. 24; [Jn. v.
36 sq. (see in b.)]; 2Co.ix.10; with an acc. of the thing,
as oméppa, CiCava, koxxov, [cf. B. § 131, 5]: Mt. xiii. 24
sq. [but in 25 L T Tr WH have émoz.], 27, 37, 39; Mk.
iv. 32; Lk. vili.5; 1Co.xv. 36sq.; with specifications
of place: eis ras axavOas, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 18; ere
dype, Mt. xiii. 24, [31]; emt ras yjs, MK. iv. 31; emt w.
an ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 20, 23; Mk. iv. 16, 20; mapa
thy dddv, Mt. xiii. 19. b. in proverbial sayings:
583
omépya
absol., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; Jn. iv. 37; 2Co.
ix. 6; ri, Gal. vi. 7, (on these sayings see Oepifw, b.). in
comparisons: ozeipew eis thy odpxa, eis To mveipa, (adpé
and mvevya are likened to fields to be sown), to do those
things which satisfy the nature and promptings of the
adpé or of the mvedya, Gal. vi. 8; rov Adyor, to scatter the
seeds of instruction, i. e. to impart instruction, Mk. iv.
14sq.; 6 Adyos 6 eomappévos ev tais Kapdias aitoy, the
ideas and precepts that have been implanted like seed
in their hearts, i. e. received in their hearts, ibid. 15
(where Tr txt. WH eis adrovs into their hearts, T Lmrg.
€v avtois) ; obTés e€otw 6 mapa THy 6ddv orapeis, this one
experiences the fate of the seed sown by the wayside,
Mt. xiii. 19; add, 20-23; Mk. iv. 16, 18, 20. TO T@pa,
the body, which after death is committed like seed to the
earth, 1 Co. xv. 42-44; kapmév Stxatoodrns, i. e. that seed
which produces kapzév dixaocivns [see kaprds, 2 b. |, Jas.
ill. 18; omeipew twi te, to give, manifest, something to
one, from whom we may subsequently receive something
else akin to a harvest (Gepi{ouer), 1 Co. ix.11. [Comp.:
Sca-, ét- orreipa. | *
omekovAatwp, -opos (RG -wpos [cf. Tdf. on Mk. as be-
low]), 6, (the Lat. word speculator), a looker-out, spy,
scout; under the emperors an attendant and member of
the body-guard, employed as messengers, watchers, and
executioners (Sen. de ira 1, 16 centurio supplicio prae-
positus condere gladium speculatorem jubet; also de
benef. 3,25); the name is transferred to an attendant of
Herod Antipas that acted as executioner: Mk. vi. 27.
Cf. Keim ii. 512 [Eng. trans. iv. 219; J. W. Golling in
Thes. Nov. ete. ii. p. 405 sq.] *
onévSm: pres. pass. omévdouar; (cf. Germ. spenden
[perh. of the ‘ tossing away ’ of a liquid, Curtius § 296;
but cf. Vaniéek p. 1245 sq.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
22; to pour out as a drink-offering, make a libation; in
the N. T. omevdea6at, to be offered as a libation, is figura-
tively used of one whose blood is poured out in a violent
death for the cause of God: Phil. ii. 17 (see @vaia, b.
fin); (2 Tims iv.6.*
oméppa, -ros, TO, (oreipa, q. V.), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
yu, the seed (fr. which anything springs) ; a.
from which a plant germinates; a. prop. the seed
i.e. the grain or kernel which contains within itself the
germ of the future plant: plur., Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.
31; 1 Co. xv. 38, (Ex. xvi. 31; 1S. viii.15); the sing.
is used collectively of the grains or kernels sown: Mt.
xiii. 24, 27, 37sq.; 2 Co. ix. 10 [here L Tr odpos]. B-
metaph. a seed i.e. a residue, or a few survivors reserved
as the germ of a new race (just as seed is kept from the
harvest for the sowing), Ro. ix. 29 after Is. i. 9, where
Sept. for Tw, (so also Sap. xiv. 6; 1 Esdr. viii. 85 (87) ;
Joseph. antt. 11, 5,3; 12, 7,3; Plat. Tim. p. 23¢.). b.
the semen virile; a. prop.: Lev. xv. 16-183 xviii.
20 sq., ete.; [prob. also Heb. xi. 11, cf. karaBodn 1, and
see below]; often in prof. writ. By meton. the pro-
duct of this semen, seed, children, offspring, progeny;
family, race, posterity, (so in Grk. chiefly in the tragic
poets, cf. Passow s. v. 2 b. ii. p. 1498 [L. and S. s.v. IL
oTEPLOAOYOS 584
3]; and yy very often in the O. T. [cf. W. 17, 30]); so
in the sing., either of one, or collectively of many: Ro.
ix. 7 sq.3 els kata3oAnv orépparos (see [above, and ] xara-
Body, 2), Heb. xi. 11; auordva and e£amordvat onéppa
revi, Mt. xxii. 24; Mk. xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28, (Gen. xxxviii.
8); éxew omeppa, Mt. xxii. 25; aquevar oméppa tei, Mk.
xii. 20-22; +d om. twos, Lk. i. 55; Jn. vii. 423 viii. 33,
87; Acts iil. 25); wil.15\squ; al. 2a Re. 1.-3 5 [itve'1'3 5
1X60) ska. Lg 2iCo.xi. 22a ima. Ss ableb. i. N6sixt
18; in plur.: mats éx Baowikav omeppdror, of royal de-
scent, Joseph. antt. 8, 7,6; rav “ABpaytaioy omeppdarav
dzéyovot, 4 Mace. xviii. 1; i. q. tribes, races, GOpwroi Te
kal avOpworav oréppact vomobeTovpev Ta viv, Plat. lege. 9
p: 853¢. By a rabbinical method of interpreting, op-
posed to the usage of the Hebr. y1, which signifies the
offspring whether consisting of one person or many,
Paul lays such stress on the singular number in Gen. xiii.
15; xvii. 8 as to make it denote but one of Abraham’s
posterity, and that the Messiah: Gal. iii. 16, also 19;
and yet, that the way in which Paul presses the singu-
lar here is not utterly at variance with the genius of the
Jewish-Greek lanouage is evident from ’ABpaptaiwy orep-
pdrev amdyovot, 4 Mace. xviii. 1, where the plural is used
of many descendants [(ef. Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16
note 2; Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.)]. 76 om. CABpadp) 7d
€k Tov vopov, the seed which is such according to the de-
cision of the law, physical offspring [see véuos, 2
p- 428°], ro ex miarews "ABp. those who are called Abra-
ham’s posterity on account of the faith by which they
are akin to him [see wiotts, 1 b. a. p. 513” and ék, II. 7],
Ro. iv. 16; add, 18; ix. 8; Gal. iii. 29; similarly Chris-
tians are called, in Rev. xii. 17, the omépua of the church
(which is likened to a mother, Gal. iv. 26). 8. whatever
possesses vital force or life-giving power: 76 oméppa Tov
Geod [(but anarthrous) ], the Holy Spirit, the divine en-
ergy operating within the soul by which we are regener-
ated or made the réxva rod Geod, 1 Jn. iii. 9.*
omeppoddyos, -ov, (o7éepya, and A€yw to collect) ; 1.
picking up seeds: used of birds, Plut. Demet. 28; Athen.
9 p. 387 f.; esp. of the crow or daw that picks up grain in
the fields (Germ. Saatkrdhe), Arstph. av. 232, 579; Aris-
tot. h. a. 8, 3 p. 592°, 28, and other writ. 2. of men:
lounging about the market-place and picking up a subsis-
tence by whatever may chance to fall from the loads of mer-
chandise (Eustath. on Hom. Od. 5, 490 omeppoddyot* of
mept ta éumdpta k. ayopas SiarpiBovtes dua Td dvadéyecOar
Ta €k Tov Poptiwy aroppéovra Kai Sia Chv ex TovT@y) ; hence,
beggarly, abject, vile, (a parasite); getting a living by
flattery and buffoonery, Athen. 3 p. 85 f.; Plut. mor. p.
456 d.; subst. 6 om. an empty talker, babbler, (Dem. p. 269,
19; Athen. 8 p. 344 ¢.): Acts xvii. 18.*
omevsw; impf. gamevdov; 1 aor. €omevoa; (cogn. w.
Germ. sich sputen [cf. Eng. speed, Lat. studeo; Vaniéek
p- 1163; Fick iv. 279]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
370, also for 5773, etc. ; 1. intrans. [ef. W. § 38,
1; B. 130, 4], to hasten: as often in the Grk. writ., foll.
by an inf. Acts xx. 16; 7\@ov oretoartes, they came with
haste, Lk. ii. 16; omevoas xaraBndr [A. V. make haste
omdayxvov
and come down], xaréBn, Lk. xix. 5, 6; omedcov x. €€edbe,
[A. V. make haste and get thee quickly out], Acts xxii.
18. 2. to desire earnestly: ri, 2 Pet. iii. 12; (Is.
xvi. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2
vol. ii. p. 1501; [L. and S. s. v. IL]).*
onmdatov, -ov, Td, (oméos [cavern; cf. Curtius §111}]),
a cave, [den]: Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi.17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn.
xi. 38; Heb. xi. 38; Rev. vi. 15. (Plat., Plut., Leian.,
Ael., al.; Sept. for 717.) *
omdds, -ados, 7, a rock in the sea, ledge or reef, (Hom.
Od. 3, 298; 5, 401, and in other poets; Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph. b. j. 3, 9, 3); plur. trop. of men who by their
conduct damage others morally, wreck them as it were,
i. q. oxavdada, [R. V. txt. hidden rocks}, Jude 12 [here
LT Tr WH read oi (sc. évres) ow. Some (so R.V. mrg.)
make the word equiv. to the following; see Rutherford
as there referred to. ]*
omidtos [WH ominos (so Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 87;
L. and 8. s. v.); but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Lipsius,
Gram. Untersuch. p. 42], -ov, 6, (Phryn. rejects this word
in favor of the Attic knAdis; but oidos is used by Joseph.,
Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian., Liban., Artemidor.; see Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 28 [ef. W. 25]), a spot: trop. a fault, moral
blemish, Eph. v. 27; plur. of base and gluttonous men,
2 Pet. ii. 13.*
omddw, -@; pf. pass. ptep. €omAwpevos; (omidos); to
defile, spot: ti, Jas. ii.6; Jude 23. (Dion. Hal., Leian.,
Heliod.; Sept.) *
omdayxvitopar; 1 aor. éomdayyvicOny [cf. B. 52 (45)];
(onAdyxvov, q.V.); prop. to be moved as to one’s bowels,
hence to be moved with compassion, have compassion, (for
the bowels were thought to be the seat of love and pity):
absol., Lk. x. 833; xv. 20; omdayxyodeis with a finite
verb, Mt. xx. 84; Mk. i. 41; tuvds, to pity one (cf. W.
§30,10a.; [B.§ 132,15; but al. regard om. in the foll.
example as used absol. and the gen. as depending on
kvptos |), Mt. xviii. 27; emi with dat. of the pers., Mt.
xiv. 14GLTTrWH; Mk. vi. 34 [RG]; Lk. vii. 13
(where Tdf. émi w. acc.) ; émi twa, Mt. xiv. 14 Rec.; xv.
32; Mk. [vi. 34 L T Tr WH]; viii. 2; ix. 22; cf. W. § 33,
c.; [B.u.s.]; mept twos drt, Mt. ix. 36. Besides, several
times in Test. xii. Patr. [e. g. test. Zab. §§ 4, 6, 7, etc. ];
and in the N. T. Apoer.; in Deut. xiii. 8 Symm.; [Ex.
ii. 6 cod. Venet.]; and in 1 S. xxiii. 21 incert.; [Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 7; Herm. mand. 4, 3, 5]; émeomdAayxvi-
Couat, Prov. xvii. 5; the act. omdayxvige is once used for
the Attic omayxvevw, 2 Mace. vi.8. Cf. Bleek, Einl. ins
N. T. ed. 1, p. 75 [Eng. trans. ibid. ; ed.3 (by Mangold)
p. 90; W. 30, 33, 92 (87)].*
omAdyxvov, -ov, 76, and (only so in the N. T.) plur.
omhayxva, -wv, ta, Hebr. oe) alah bowels, intestines (the
heart, lungs, liver, etc.) ; a. prop.: Acts i. 18 (2
Mace. ix. 5 sq.; 4 Mace. v. 29, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down). b. in the Grk. poets fr. Aeschyl. down the
bowels were regarded as the seat of the more violent pas-
sions, such as anger and love; but by the Hebrews as the
seat of the tenderer affections, esp. kindness, benevo-
lence, compassion, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 8; W. 18];
oTroyyos
hence i. q. our heart, [tender mercies, affections, etc. (cf.
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Bowels)]: 1 Jn. iii. 17 (on which see
kAei@); 2 Co. vi. 12; Phil. ii. 1 [here GLT Tr WH ei res
ondayxva; B. 81 (71), cf. Green 109; Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. |;
omddyxva ehéovs (gen. of quality [ef. W. 611 (568); so
Test. xii. Patr., test. Zab. §§ 7, 8]), a heart in which
mercy resides, [heart of mercy], Lk. i. 78; also oA. oik-
rippood [ Rec. -yer], Col. iii. 12; ra om\ayxva avtov Trepio-
corepws eis bpas eoriv, his heart is the more abundantly
devoted to you, 2 Co. vii. 15; émumode tpas ev omddyxvors
Xptorov "Inoov, in the heart [R. V. tender mercies] of
Christ, i. e. prompted by the same love as Christ Jesus,
Phil. i. 8; dvaravew ta om. revds, to refresh one’s soul or
heart, Philem. 7, 20; ra owAdyxva nav, my very heart,
i. e. whom I dearly love, Philem. 12 (so Darius calls his
mother and children his own bowels in Curt. 4, 14, 22.
meum corculum, Plaut. Cas. 4, 4,14; meum cor, id. Poen.
1, 2,154; [ef. Bp. Lghtft.on Philem.1.c.]). The Hebr.
DMN is translated by the Sept. now oixrippoi, Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 6; xxxix. (xl.) 12, now @Xeos, Is. xlvii. 6; once
omAdyxva, Prov. xii. 10.*
ondyyos, -ov, 6, [perh. akin is fungus; Curtius § 575],
fr. Hom. down, sponge: Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn.
See, 200%
omodds, -ov, 7, fr. Hom. down, ashes: Heb. ix. 13; év
cadkk@ k. o70d@ KdOnpat, to sit clothed in sackcloth and
covered with ashes (exhibiting the tokens of grief, cf.
Jon. iii. 6; Is. lvili. 5; Ixi. 3; Jer. vi. 26; Esth. iv. 1,3;
1 Mace. iii. 47; cf. odxxos, b.): Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13.*
oropd, -as, 7, (ameipw, 2 pf. géamupa), seed: 1 Pet. i. 23
[(i. q. asowing, fig. origin, ete., fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down) ].*
omdpipos, -ov, (oneipw, 2 pf. goropa), fit for sowing,
sown, (Xen., Diod., al.) ; ta omdpipa, sown fields, growing
crops, [ A.V. (exe. in Mt.) corn-fields], (Geop. 1, 12, 37):
Wiis ssi, 1g IYO my PBIB IOS yay tee
odpos, -ov, 6, (oreipw, 2 pf. gamopa) ; 1. a sow-
ing (Hdt., Xen., Theophr., al.). 2. seed (used in
sowing): Mk. iv. 26sq.; Lk. viii. 5,11; 2 Co. ix. 10° [L
‘Tr, 10°], (Deut: xi. 10; “Theoer-, Plut., al.).*
orovddlw; fut. crovddow (a later form for the early
-doowa, cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v., vol. i. p. 190; B. 53 (46);
[W. 89 (85); Veitch s.v.]); 1 aor. €omovSaca; (omovdn,
q-v-); fr. Soph. and Arstph. down ; a. to hasten,
make haste: foll. by an inf. (cf. owevSo, 1), 2 Tim. iv. 9,
21; Tit. iii. 12, [al. refer these exx. to b.; but cf. Holtz-
mann, Com. on 2 Tim. ii. 15]. b. to exert one’s self,
endeavor, give diligence: foll. by an inf., Gal. ii. 10; Eph.
vero: eles tied ds? abi wteelor yl ebuivent lecmetine tars
10; iii. 14; foll. by acc. with inf. 2 Pet. i. 15.*
orovdaios, -a, -ov, (o7ovd7), fr. Hdt. down, active, dili-
gent, zealous, earnest: év tun, 2 Co. viii. 22; compar.
orovdatorepos, ibid. 17 [W. 242 sq. (227) ], 22 [W. § 35,
1]; neut. as adv. (Lat. studiosius), very diligently [cf. B.
§ 123, 10], 2 Tim. i. 17 RG.*
orovdatws, adv. of the preceding; a. hastily, with
haste: compar. orovdaorépws [cf. B. 69 (61); W. § 11,
2c.], Phil. ii. 28 [W. 243 (228)]. b. diligently: 2
Tim. i.17 L T Tr WH;; Tit. iii. 13 ; earnestly, Lk. vii. 4.*
585
on Tao us
orovdi, -7s, 7, (amevda, [q. v-]), fr. Hom. down; af
haste: peta omovdys, with haste, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39, (Sap.
xix. 2; Joseph. antt. 7,9, 7; Hdian. 3, 4,1; 6,4,3). Ds
earnestness, diligence: univ. earnestness in accomplish-
ing, promoting, or striving after anything, Ro. xii. 11;
2 Co. vii. 11, 12; viii. 7sq.; év omovdy, with diligence,
Ro. xii. 8 ; omovdjv éevdeixvucOa, Heb. vi. 11; macav orov-
dnv mroveta Oar (see rrovew, I. 3 p. 525° bot.), to give all dili-
gence, interest one’s self most earnestly, Jude 3; omovdyv
napecodepev, 2 Pet. i. 5; 9 om. brép twos, earnest care
for one, 2 Co. viii. 16 (epi twos, [Dem. 90, 10]; Diod.
1, 75).*
onvupis [L WH oupis, q. v-], -i80s, 9, (allied to ozeipa,
q-v-; hence, something wound, twisted, or folded togeth-
er), a reed basket, [i.e. a plaited basket, a lunch basket,
hamper; ef. B.D. s.v. Basket]: Mt. xv. 37; xvi.10; Mk.
vill. 8, 20; Acts ix. 25. (Hdt., Theophr., Apollod., Al-
ciphr. 3, ep. 56; al.). See odupis.*
otddiov, -ov, plur. ra orddva [Jn. vi. 19 Tdf.], and oi
arddvoe (so [ Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13;
Jn. vi.19 [not Tdf.]; Rev. xxi. 16 [R°* GL WH mrg.];
2 Mace. xi.5; xii. 10, 29; in the other pass. the gend. is
not apparent [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p.
157]; Kriiger §19, 2, 1), (STAQ, tornyr; hence prop.,
‘established,’ that which stands fast, a ‘ stated’ distance,
a ‘fixed standard’ of length), a stadium, i. e. lia
measure of length comprising 600 Grk. feet, or 625 Ro-
man feet, or 125 Roman paces (Plin. h. n. 2, 23 (21), 85),
hence one eighth of a Roman mile [i. e. 6063 Eng. feet
(about 15 m. less than one fifth of a kilom.)]; the space
or distance of that length [A.V.a furlong]: [Mt. xiv.
24 Tr txt. WE txt.) Uk. xxiv. 135. Ju: vi. 19);) sa. as:
Rey. xiv. 20; xxi. 16. 2. a race-course, i.e. place
in which contests in running were held; the one who
outstripped the rest, and reached the goal first, receiv-
ing the prize: 1 Co. ix. 24 [here A.V. race]. Courses
of this description were to be found in most of the larger
Grk. cities, and were, like that at Olympia, 600 Greek
feet in length. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Stadium; Grundt
in Schenkel s. v., vol. v. 375 sq.; [BB. DD.s.v. Games ].*
oTd4.V0s, -ov(6), 7), (fr. torn [cf. Curtius § 216]), among
the Greeks an earthen jar, into which wine was drawn off
for keeping (a process called xaracrayvitew), but also
used for other purposes. The Sept. employ it in Ex.
xvi. 33 as the rendering of the Hebr. n)¥3¥, that little
jar [or “pot”] in which the manna was kept, laid up in
the ark of the covenant; hence in Heb. ix. 4, and Philo
de congr. erud. grat. §18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 400;
[W. 23].*
otTaciactys, -ov, 6, (cracidtw), the author of or a
participant in an insurrection: Mk. xv. 7 LT TrWH
({Diod. fr. 10, 11, 1 p.171, 6 Dind.; Dion. Hal. ii. 1199];
Joseph. antt. 14, 1, 3; Ptolem.). The earlier Greeks
used oraowtns [Moeris s. v. ].*
oTdots, -ews, 7, (torn) 5 1. a standing, station,
state: €xew oraary, to stand, exist, have stability, Lat. locum
habere, [R. V. is yet standing], Heb. ix. 8 (Polyb. 5, 5,
3). 2 fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, an insurrection
ry
586
ocTAaTHp
(cf. Germ. Aufstand): Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts
xix. 40 [see o7jpepov, sub fin.]; xweiv ordow [LT Tr
WH aracets}| revi, [a mover of insurrections among i. e.]
against [cf. W. 208 (196)] one, Acts xxiv. 5. 3.
strife, dissension, (Aeschyl. Pers. 738; Diog. Laért. 3,
51) :vActs: xv. 25). @, 110."
orTatip, -jpos, 6, (fr. ixrnut, to place in the scales, weigh
out [i. e. ‘the weigher’ (Vanicek p. 1126)]), a stater, a
coin; in the N. T. a silver stater equiv. to four Attic
or two Alexandrian drachmas, a Jewish shekel (see
didpaxpov): Mt. xvii. 27.*
otavpés, -ov, 6, [fr. iornus (root sta); cf. Lat. stauro,
Eng. staff (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.); Curtius § 216;
Vanicek p. 1126]; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed
one, (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., Xen.). 2. across; a.
the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignomin-
ious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans
from the Phenicians; to it were affixed among the
Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the
guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, rob-
bers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and oc-
casionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of
the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even
Roman citizens themselves; cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Kreuzi-
gung; Merz in Herzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also
Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], s. v. Kreuz; Keim iii. p. 409
sqq- [Eng. trans. vi. 138; BB.DD. s. vv. Cross, Cru-
cifixion; O. Zéckler, Das Kreuz Christi (Giitersloh,
1875); Eng. trans. Lond. 1878 ; Fulda, Das Kreuz u. d.
Kreuzigung (Bresl. 1878); Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah,
ii. 582 sqq.]. This horrible punishment the innocent
Jesus also suffered : Mt. xxvii. 32, 40, 42; Mk. xv. 21, 30,
52 luks Sx oleae Osco othe olyn pa Eel.
xii. 2; @dvaros cravpod, Phil. ii. 8; 7d aia rod oravpod,
blood shed on the cross, Col. i. 20. b. i. q. the cruci-
fixion which Christ underwent: Gal. v. 11 (on which see
oxavdador, sub fin.) ; Eph. ii. 16 ; with the addition of rood
Xpuotov, 1 Co. i. 17; the saving power of his crucifixion,
Phil. iii. 18 (on which see éy6pos, fin.) ; Gal. vi. 14; ro
oTavp®@ Tov Xpiorov dtaxeoOar, to encounter persecution
on account of one’s avowed belief in the saving efficacy
of Christ’s crucifixion, Gal. vi. 12; 6 Adyos 6 tov oravpod,
the doctrine concerning the saving power of the death
on the cross endured by Christ, 1 Co. i. 18. The judi-
cial usage which compelled those condemned to cruci-
fixion themselves to carry the cross to the place of
punishment (Plut. de sera numinis vindict. ¢. 9; Artem.
oneir. 2, 56, cf. Jn. xix. 17), gave rise to the proverbial
expression aipew or AapBavew or Baordgew Tov cravpov
avrov, which was wont to be used of those who on behalf
of God’s cause do not hesitate cheerfully and manfully
to bear persecutions, troubles, distresses, — thus recall-
ing the fate of Christ and the spirit in which he encoun-
tered it (cf. Bleck, Synop. Erk. der drei ersten Evange.
i. p. 439 sq.): Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24; Mk. vill. 34; x. 21
TR Lin br.]; xv. 21; Lk. ix. 23; xiv. 27.*
oravpsw, -@; fut. cravpwow; 1 aor. €oravpwoa; Pass.,
pres. oravpoua; perfect éoravpwpac; 1 aor. eotavpw-
oTEAAw
Onv; (aravpés, q. V-) 5 1. to stake, drive down stakes:
Thue. 7, 25, 6 [here of Supaxootot ¢oravpwoayv, which the
Scholiast renders cravpovs xarénnéav]. 2. to for-
tify with driven stakes, to palisade: a place, Thue. 6,
100; Diod. 3. to crucify (Vulg. crucifigo): rwa, a.
prop.: Mt. xx.19; xxiii. 34; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 22, [23], 26,
31, 35,38; xxvili.5; Mk. xv. 13-15, 20, 24 sq. 27; xvi.
6; Lk. xxiii. 21, 23,33; xxiv. 7,20; Jn. xix. 6,10, 15 sq.
18, 20, 23,41; Acts ii. 36; iv.10; 1 Co.i.13, 23; ii. 2,
[8]; 2Co. xiii.4; Gal. iii. 1; Rev. xi. 8, (Add. to Esth.
viii. 13 [34]; for TDA, to hang, Esth. vii. 9. Polyb. 1, 86,
4; Joseph. antt. 2, 5,4; 17,10,10; Artem. oneir. 2, 53
and 56; in native Grk. writ. dvacravpoty is more com-
mon). b. metaph.: tiv cdpxa, to crucify the flesh,
destroy its power utterly (the nature of the fig. implying
that the destruction is attended with intense pain [but
note the aor.]), Gal. v. 24; éoravpapai tux, and éorav-
pewrai poi 1, I have been crucified to something and it has
been crucified to me, so that we are dead to each other,
all fellowship and intercourse between us has ceased,
Gal. vi. 14. [Comp.: dva-, ov(v)- cravpda. | *
orapvdh, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 33), grapes,
a bunch of grapes: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Rev. xiv. 18
[cf. Sept. as referred to s. v. Bétpus ].*
ordxus, -vos [cf. B. 14], 6, [connected w. the r. sia,
torn; Curtius p. 721], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for naw,
an ear of corn (or growing grain): Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii.
23.) live ZO Kemal pliee
Zraxvs, -vos, 6, [ef. the preceding word], Stachys, the
name of a man [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 174]: Ro.
KV I9%
oréyn, -ns, 1), (ateyw to cover), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt
down, a roof: of a house, Mk. ii. 4; eioepyeoOar rd thy
areyny tivos [see eioepxopuat, 1 p. 187” bot.], Mt. viii. 8;
Lk. vii. 6.*
oréyw; [allied w. Lat. tego, toga, Eng. deck, thatch,
etc.; Curtius’§ 155; Fick Pt. iii. 590]; to cover; ae
to protect or keep by covering, to preserve: Soph., Plat.,
Plut., al. 2. to cover over with silence; to keep se-
cret; to hide, conceal: rapa €mn, Eur. Electr. 273; rov
Adyov, Polyb. 8, 14, 5; for other exx. see Passow s. v. 1 b.
B.; [L. and S. s. v. IL. 2]; propos od Surnoerar Adyov oré-
£a, Sir. viii. 17; hence 9 aydwn mdavra oréyet, 1 Co. xiii.
7, is explained by some, love covereth [so R. V. mrg.], i. e.
hides and excuses, the errors and faults of others; but it
is more appropriately rendered (with ether interpreters)
beareth. For oréyo means 3. by covering to keep
off something which threatens, to bear up against, hold
out against, and so to endure, bear, forbear, (ras évéeias,
Philo in Flace. § 9; many exx. fr. Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl.
down are given by Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S.s.v. A.
esp. 3]): 1 Co. ix. 12; xiii. 7; 1 Th. iii. 1, 5.*
oreipos, -a, -ov, (i. q. oTeppos, orepeds q. V-; whence
Germ. starr, Lat. sterilis), hard, stiff; of men and ani
mals, barren: of a woman who does not conceive, Lk.
i. 7,36; xxiii. 29; Gal.iv.27. (Hom., Theocr., Orph.,
Anthol.; Sept. for \py 771pr-)*
oré\kw: (Germ. stellen; [ef. Grk. ornAn, orads, etc.;
OTE
Lat. stlocus (locus) ; Eng. stall, ete.; Curtius § 218; Fick
Pt. i. 246; Pt. iv. 274]); fr. Hom. down; 1. to set,
place, set in order, arrange; to fit out, to prepare, equip ;
Mid. pres. oréAAopat, to prepare one’s self, to fit out for
one’s self; to fit out for one’s own use: orehAdpevor TodTO
pn tus etc. arranging, providing for, this ete. i. e. taking
care [A. V. avoiding], that no one etc. 2 Co. viii. 20 [ef.
W.§ 45,6a.; B. 292 (252)]. 2. to bring together,
contract, shorien: ra ioria, Hom. Od. 3,11; 16, 353; also
in mid. Il. 1, 433; to diminish, check, cause to cease; pass.
to cease to exist: Bovdopéevn tiv AUTNY Tod avdpos aradjvat,
Joseph. antt. 5, 8,3; 6 yeyudv eoradn, ibid. 9,10, 2; mid.
to remove one’s self, withdraw one’s self, to depart, foll. by
aré with gen. of the pers., to abstain from familiar inter-
course with one, 2 Th.iii. 6. [Comp.: dmo-; ¢&-an'o-, ovv-
_arro-, Sia-, emt-, KaTa-, ou(v)-, Umo-oTe Ado. | *
oréppa, -ros, Td, (atépo, pf. pass. eoreppat, to crown,
to bind round), a jillet, a garland, put upon victims:
Acts xiv. 13 [ef. W. 630 (585); B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gar-
lands]. (From Hom. down.) *
orevayp.os, -0v, 6, (arevatw), a groaning, a sigh: Acts
vii. 34; Ro. viii. 26; see addAnros. ([Pind.], Tragg.,
Plat., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept. for MI8, TPIS, TPS3.) *
otevatw; 1 aor. eorevaéa; (orévo, akin is Germ. stdhnen
[ef. sten-torian; Vaniéek p. 1141; Fick Pt. i. 249]); to
sigh, to groan: 2 Co. v. 2, 4, [ef. W. 353 (331)]; Heb. xiii.
17; év éavrots, within ourselves, i. e. in our souls, in-
wardly, Ro. viii. 23; to pray sighing, Mk. vii. 34; xara
twos, Jas. v. 9 [here R. V. murmur]. (Sept.; Trage.,
Dem., Plut., al.) [Comp.: dva-, cu(v)- orevagw. Syn.
cf. kNaio, fin. | *
orevds, -7, -dv, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for
8, narrow, strait: wviAn, Mt. vii. 13, [14 (here L Tr br.
wvdn) |; Lk. xiii. 24.*
orevo-xwpew, -@: (arevdxwpos; and this fr. orevds, and
X@pos a space) ; 1. intrans. to be in a strait place
(Machon in Athen. 13 p. 582 b.); fo be narrow (Is. xlix.
19). 2. trans. to straiten, compress, cramp, reduce
to straits, (Vulg. angustio), (Diod., Leian., Hdian., al. ;
[Sept. Josh. xvii. 15; Judg. xvi. 16; Is. xxviii. 20; 4
Mace. xi. 11]): pass. trop. of one sorely ‘straitened’ in
spirit, 2 Co. iv. 8; ov orevoyapeiobe ev nyiv, ye are not
straitened in us, ample space is granted you in our souls,
i. e. we enfold you with large affection, 2 Co. vi. 12; ore-
voxwpeiabe ev Tois omAdyxvors bpav, ye are straitened in
your own affections, so that there is no room there for
us, i. e. you do not grant a place in your heart for love
toward me, ibid.*
orevoxwpia, -as, 7, (oTevdxwpos), narrownes.: of place,
a narrow space, (Is. viii. 22 [al. take this as metaph.];
Thue., Plat., al.); metaph. dire calamity, extreme afflic-
tion, [A. V. distress, anguish]: Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35; 2 Co.
vi. 4; xii.10. (Deut. xxviii. 53, 55,57; Sir. x. 26; [Sap.
v.3]; 1 Macc. ii. 53; xiii.3; Polyb. 1,67,1; [Artemid.
oneir. 3,14]; Ael. v. h. 2, 41; [al.].) [Cf Trench § lv.]*
orepeds, -d, -dv, [Vaniéek p. 1131; Curtius § 222], fr.
Hom. down, jirm, solid, compact, hard, rigid: diéos, Hom.
Od. 19, 494; strong, firm, immovable, Gepedsos, 2 Tim. ii.
587
orTepavow
19; Tpopn, solid food, Heb. v. 12,14; orepewrépa tpopn,
Diod. 2,4; Epictet. diss. 2, 16, 39; trop., in a bad
sense, cruel, stiff, stubborn, hard; often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down: kpadin orepewrépn AiBo10, Od. 23,103; in
a good sense, firm, steadfast: ri miore, as respects faith,
firm of faith [cf. W. § 31, 6 a.], 1 Pet. v. 9 (see orepeda,
fin.).*
orepedw, -@: 1 aor. €orepéwoa; impf. 3 pers. plur. éore-
peovvro; 1 aor. pass. €orepewOnv; (arepeds); to make
solid, make firm, strengthen, make strong: twd, the body
of any one, Acts iii. 16; ras Bdoes, pass. Acts iii. 7;
pass. 79 miores, as respects faith (see orepeds, fin.), Acts
xvi. 5. (Sept.; Xen., Diod.) *
oTEPewpa, -Tos, TO, (aTEpedw), that which has been made
jirm; a. (Vulg. jfirmamentum) the firmament; so
Sept. for ypr the arch of the sky, which in early times
was thought to be solid, Gen. i. 6-8; Ezek. i, 22-26;
Sir. xliii. 1, [ef. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Firmament];
a fortified place, 1 Esdr. viii. 78 (80). b. that which
Surnishes a foundation; on which a thing rests firmly, sup-
port: Aristot. partt. an. 2, 9, 12 p. 655%, 22; kvpios arepe-
pd pov, Ps. xvii. (xvili.) 3. c. firmness, stead faste
ness: THs miotews, Col. ii. 5 [some take it here metaph.
in a military sense, solid front; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.
(per contra Meyer) ].*
Xrehavas, -a[cf. B. 20 (18) ], 6, Stephanas, a Christian
of Corinth: 1 Co. i. 16; xvi. 15, 17.*
otépavos, -ov, 6, (atepo [to put round; ef. Curtius
§ 224]), Sept. for Wiwy, [fr. Hom. down], a crown (with
which the head is encircled) ; a. prop. as a mark
of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass. in the
Sept. as 2S. xii. 30; 1 Chr. xx. 2; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4; Ezek.
xxi. 26; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet cf. 2 S.i. 10 Compl, Lag.),
perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw.
aredavos and diddnua (q. Vv.) was strictly observed in
Hellenistic Grk.]: Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 2,
5; Rev. iv. 4,10; vi. 2; ix. 7; xiv. 14; with a gen. of the
material, dorépov dadexa, Rev. xii.1; the wreath or gar-
land which was given as a prize to victors in the public
games [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Games]: 1 Co. ix. 25, ef. 2 Tim.
ii. 5. b. metaph. a. the eternal blessedness which
will be given asa prize to the genuine servants of God and
Christ: 6 tis Sukatooivns orépavos, the crown (wreath)
which is the reward of righteousness, 2 Tim. iv. 8; with
an epexeget. gen. in the phrases AauwBdveo Gat, duddvar Tov
atepavoy tis Cans, equiv. to tHv Cary as tov orepavoy,
Jas. i.12; Rev. ii. 10; xopifer@ae tov rns SdEns oreavor,
1 Pet. v. 4; AaBeiv r. oréavér tivos, to cause one to fail
of the promised and hoped for prize, Rev. iii. 11. B.
that which is an ornament and honor to one: so of per-
sons, Phil. iv. 1; ore. xavynoews (see Kavxnots), 1 Th.
ii. 19, (Prov. xii. 4; xvi. 31; xvii. 6, etc.).*
Zrédhavos, -ov, 6, Stephen, one of the seven ‘ deacons’
of the church at Jerusalem who was stoned to death by
the Jews: Acts vi. 5,8 sq.; vii. 59; viii. 2; xi.19; xxii.
20%
orepavew, -@ :
pavepévos; (otépavos) ; fr. Hom. down ;
1 aor. éorepavwoa; pf. pass. ptep. éore
a. to en-
ati4os
circle with a crewn, to crown: the victor in a contest, 2
Tim. ii. 5. b. univ. to adorn, to honor: twa dd&y x.
rip, Heb. ii. 7, 9, fr. Ps. viii. 6.*
ot790s, -ous, 7d, (fr. tornut; that which stands out,
is prominent [Etym. Magn. 727, 19 didru €orneev adoddev-
rov]), fr. Hom. down, the breast: Jn. xiii. 25; xxi. 20,
(cf. kéAmos, 1); Rev. xv.6. rimrew eis rd orn Oos Or TUnT.
To otOos, of mourners (see kémrw), Lk. xviii. 13 5 xxiii.
48.*
orykw; (an inferior Grk. word, derived fr. éornxa, pf.
of iornus; see B. 48 (41) ; [W. 24, 26 (25); WH. App.
p- 169; Veitch s.v. éornxw; Mullach s. v. orékw (p.
299)]); to stand: Mk. [iii. 31 T Tr WH]; xi. 25 [(cf.
Gray c. B.)]; Jn. i. 26 Lmrg. T Trtxt. WH; [Rev. xii.
4 WH (but see below)]; with an emphasis, to stand
Jirm; trop. to persist, persevere, [A.V. stand fast]: absol.
to persevere in godliness and rectitude, 2 Th. ii. 15; é
kupio, in one’s fellowship with the Lord, Phil. iv. 1; 1
Th. iii. 8 [(cf. eav, I. 2 b.)]; &v 17 wioret, 1 Co. xvi. 18 ;
ev évi mvevpart, Phil. i. 27; to keep one’s standing (opp.
to (vyé évéxouat), 7H eAevOepia, maintain your allegiance
to freedom [cf. W. § 31,1k.; B. § 133,12; but L T Tr
WH « take or. here absol.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.], Gal.
v.13 to stand erect, trop. not to sin (opp. to wire i. q.
to sin), 7@ kupie, dat. commodi [W. u. s.], Ro. xiv. 4.
[In Jn. viii. 44 (év 7H adnOeia ovk(x) eotnkev) WH read
the impf. éornxev (where others adopt €ornkey fr. tornpe),
owing to the preceding ovk (T WH after codd. § B* D
L ete.) ; see Westcott, Com. on Jn. le. ‘ Additional Note’;
WH. Introd. § 407. But such an impf. is nowhere else
found (yet ef. Rev. xii. 4 WH), and respecting confu-
sion in the ancient use of the breathings, and the inter-
change of ov« and ov x, see od ad init. and reff. there, esp.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 90; moreover, the familiar pf. (pres.) of
torn thoroughly suits the context; see tornus, II. 2 d.]
([Sept., Ex. xiv. 13 Alex., Compl.; 1 K. viii. 11]; Alex.
Aphr. probl. 1, 49 var.; eccles. writ.) *
ornptypos, -ov, 6, (aTnpitw), firm condition, stead fast-
ness: of mind, 2 Pet. iii. 17. (of a standing still, Diod.
1, 81; Plut. mor. p. 76 d.) *
ornpitw; fut. ornpié (as in the best Grk. writ.), and
otmpice (in 2 Th. iii. 3 cod. Vat., as in Jer. xvii. 5; ornpwa,
Jer. iii. 12; xxiv. 6; Ezek. xiv. 8; Sir. vi. 37 [see reff.
below]); 1 aor. eornpiéa, and éornpica (ornpicov, Lk.
xxii. 32 LT Tr WH; Rev. iii. 2G LT Tr WH, as in Judg.
xix. 5, 8; Ezek. vi. 2; Prov. xv. 25, ete.; ef. [ WH. App.
p- 170]; Bitm. Ausf. Sprehl.i. p.372; B. 36 (32); Kiihner
§ 343, i. p. 910; [Veitch s. v.]); Pass., pf. eornprypac; 1
aor.éotnpixOnv ; (ornpeyé a support ; akin to orepeds, q. V.,
oreppds, and Germ. stdrken; cf. Curtius § 222); fr. Hom.
down; a. fo make stable, place firmly, set fast, fix:
éornpixtat (ydopa), is fixed, Lk. xvi. 26; ornpitw ro mpd-
cwrov, to set one’s face steadfastly, keep the face turned
(Ezek. vi. 2; xiii. 17; xv. 7; ete.) rov ropeverOa cis with
an ace. of place, a Hebr. expression (see mpédawmoy, 1 b.
[and cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W. 33]), Lk. ix. 51. b. to
strengthen, make firm; trop. (not so in prof. auth.) to
render constant, confirm, one’s mind [A. V. establish]:
588
oTOLVElop
twa, Lk. xxii. 32; [Acts xviii. 23 where RG émornp.];
BRo.ie1 13. xvie25-ae Rhea. 2662.0 iii sl Pete ae
[here Rec. has 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. ornpiéac|; Rev.
ili. 2; tHv xapdiav twos, 1 Th. iii. 13; Jas. v. 8; teva &
tu, 2 Th. ii. 17; 2 Pet.i. 12. [Comp.: em-ornpito.]*
ottBds, -ados, 7, (fr. ore(8@ ‘to tread on,’ 2 aor. gore
Bor) ; a. a spread or layer of leaves, reeds, rushes,
soft leafy twigs, straw, etc., serving for a bed (Hesych.
atiBas* amd paSdav } xwpev xdptav oTpaots k. PUA@Y) ;
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. b. that which is
used in making a bed of this sort. a branch full of leaves,
soft foliage: so Mk. xi. 8 LT Tr WH for oroiBddas, an
orthographical error [see Tdf.’s note ad loc.].*
ottypa, -ros, 7d, (fr. orifw to prick; [ef. Lat. stimulus,
ete. ; Gérm. sfechen, Eng. stick, sting, ete.; Curtius § 226)),
a mark pricked in or branded upon the body. Acc. to
ancient oriental usage, slaves and soldiers bore the name
or stamp of their master or commander branded or
pricked (cut) into their bodies to indicate what master
or general they belonged to, and there were even some
devotees who stamped themselves in this way with the
token of their gods (ef. Deyling, Obserwv. iii. p. 423 sqq.) 5
hence ra oriypata tod (Kupiov so Rec.) "Incod, the marks
of (the Lord) Jesus, which Paul in Gal. vi. 17 says he
bears branded on his body, are the traces left there by
the perils, hardships, imprisonments, scourgings, endured
by him for the cause of Christ, and which mark him
as Christ’s faithful and approved votary, servant, soldier,
[see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. c.].. (Hdt. 7, 233; Ar-
istot., Ael., Plut., Lceian., al.) *
oTLYBH, -7S, 7, (oTiCw; see oriypa, init.), a point: orrypHy
xpovov, a point (i. e. @ moment) of time (Cie. pro Flacco
c. 25; pro Sest.| 24; Caes.\b. c. 2,14; -al.),, Uk iv. 5;
(Antonin. 2,17; Plut. puer. educ. 17; Is. xxix. 5; 2
Macesix11.)F
otikBw ; to shine, glisten: of garments (as in Hom. Il.
8, 392; 18, 596; cf. Plat. Phaedo 59 p. 110 d.), Mk. ix.
3.*
ood, -as, 7, a portico, a covered colonnade where peo-
ple can stand or walk protected from the weather and
the heat of the sun: Jn. v. 2; crod SoAopavos, a “ porch”
cr portico built by Solomon in the eastern part of the
temple (which in the temple’s destruction by the Baby-
lonians was left uninjured, and remained down to the
times of king Agrippa, to whom the care of the temple
was intrusted by the emperor Claudius, and who on
account of its antiquity did not dare to demolish and
build it anew; so Josephus relates, antt. 20, 9, 7; [but
on ‘Solomon’s Porch’ cf. B.D. s. v. Temple (Solomon’s
Temple, fin.)]): Jn. x. 23; Acts iii. 11; v. 12.*
oroBds, -ddos, 7, see oruSas, b.
[Zroixds, so Lchm. Tdf. for Srwikds, q. v-]
oroxetov, -ov, 7d, (fr. aroiyos a row, rank, series;
hence prop. that which belongs to any grotyos, that of
which a orotyos is composed; hence), any jirst thing,
JSrom which the others belonging to some series or composite
whole take their rise; an element, first principle. The
word denotes spec. 1. the letters of the alphabet as
TTOLYEW
the elements of speech, not however the written
characters (which are called ypaypara), but the
spoken sounds: orotxetov porns pwvi aovvberos, Plat.
defin. p. 414e€.; 7d f@ Td orovyeiov, id. Crat. p. 426 d.;
oTotxetdv eott avi) adiaiperos, ov maga Sé, GAN &€& fs we-
uke ovveti yiyverCa dowry, Aristot. poet. 20, p. 1456,
22. 2. the elements from which all things have come,
the material causes of the universe (€ote d€ orotyetov, &&
ov mMpaTov yivetat TA yivdpeva Kal eis 6 €axaTov avadverat
..70 TUp, TO VOwp, 6 anp, 7 yn, Diog. Laért. Zeno 69,
137); so very often fr. Rlat. down, as in Tim. p. 48 b.;
in the Scriptures: Sap. vii. 17; xix. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 10,
112% 3. the heavenly bodies, either as parts of the
heavens, or (as others think) because in them the ele-
ments of man’s life and destiny were supposed to reside;
so in the earlier eccles. writ.: Ep. ad Diogn. 7, 2; Justin.
M. dial. ec. Tryph. 23; ra ovpdma ororyeia, id. apol. 2, 5;
arotxeia Oeov, created by God, Theoph. Ant. ad Autol.
1,4; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, pp. 66-77. Hence
some interpreters infelicitously understand Paul’s phrase
Ta oToLxXela TOD Kdopou, Gal. iv. 3, 9; Col. ii. 8, 20, of the
heavenly bodies, because times and seasons, and so sa-
cred seasons, were regulated by the course of the sun
and moon; yet in unfolding the meaning of the passage
on the basis of this sense they differ widely. 4.
the elements, rudiments, primary and fundamental princi-
ples (cf. our ‘alphabet’ or ‘ab ce’) of any art, science, or
discipline; e. g. of mathematics, as in the title of Euclid’s
well-known work; orovxeia mp@ra Kal péysota xpynotis
moduretas, Isocr. p. 18 a.; THs dperns, Plut.de puer. educ.
16,2; many exx. are given in Passow s. v. 4, ii. p. 1550? ;
[ef. L. and S. s. v. I. 3 and 4]. In the N. T. we have
Ta OT. THS apxns TOV oyiwv Tov Geod (see apxn, 1 b. p. 76°
bot.), Heb. v. 12, such as are taught to ynmot, ib. 13; Ta
oTotxeta Tov Koopov, the rudiments with which mankind
like yyweoe were indoctrinated before the time of Christ,
i.e. the elements of religious training, or the ceremonial
precepts common alike to the worship of Jews and of
Gentiles, Gal. iv. 3, 9, (and since these requirements on
account of the difficulty of observing them are to be
regarded as a yoke —cf. Acts xv. 10; Gal. v. 1 —those
who rely upon them are said to be dedovA@pevor bd Ta
ot-); spec. the ceremonial requirements esp. of Jewish
tradition, minutely set forth by theosophists and false
teachers, and fortified by specious arguments, Col. ii. 8,
20. The phrase ra crovyeia rod xdcpov is fully dis-
cussed by Schneckenburger in the Theolog. Jahrbiicher
for 1848, Pt. iv. p. 445 sqq.; Meander in the Deutsche
Zeitschrift f. Christl. Wissenschaft for 1850, p. 205
sqq.; AKienlen in Reuss u. Cunitz’s Beitriige zu d. theolog.
Wissenschaften, vol. ii. p. 133 sqq.; EH. Schaubach, Com-
ment. qua exponitur quid orotyeta tov koopov in N. T.
sibi velint. (Meining. 1862).*
oroxéw, -@; fut. crorxynow; (cToixos A Tow, series); a.
to proceed in a row, go in order: Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 34;
metaph. to go on prosperously, to turn out well: of things,
Keel. xi. 6 for WwW. b. to walk: with a local dat.
(W. § 31,1 a. cf. p. 219 (205); yet cf. B. § 133, 22 b.],
589
OTOMLAa
Tois ixveoi Twos, in the steps or one, i. e. follow his ex-
ample, Ro. iv. 12; to direct one’s life, to live, with a dat.
of the rule [B. u.s.], ef mvedpart ..- crotydpev, if the
Holy Spirit animates us [see do, I. 3 sub fin.], let us
exhibit that control of the Spirit in our life, Gal. v. 25;
T@ kavou, acc. to the rule, Gal. vi. 16; 7@ aira (where
Ree. adds xavdve), Phil. iii. 16 [ W. § 48, 5 d.; cf. B. § 140,
18 fin. ], (76 mapadelypari twos, Clem. hom. 10,15); with
a ptep. denoting the manner of acting, OTOLXELS T. VOMOY
pvddoowr, so walkest as to keep the law [A. V. walkest
orderly, keeping ete.], Acts xxi. 24. [On the word and
its constr. see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 142. Comp.:
au(v)- ororxew. | *
oToA%, -7s, 7, (oTéAAw [q- V.] to prepare, equip, 2 pf.
€oToda) ; 1. an equipment (Aeschyl.). 2. an
equipment in clothes, clothing; spec. a loose outer garment
Jor men which extended to the feet [cf. Eng. stole (Dict. of
Chris. Antiq. s. v.)], worn by kings (Jon. iii. 6), priests,
and persons of rank: Mk. xii. 38; xvi.5; Lk. xv. 22;
xx. 46; Rev. vi. 11; vii. 9, 13, [14*, 14° Rec.; xxii. 14
LTTr WH]. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. chiefly
for 313.) [Cf. Trench § 1.]*
ordpa, -ros, T6, (apparently i. q. réua, with o prefixed,
fr. réuvo, Téeropa, therefore prop. ‘cutting’ [or ‘cut’; so
Etym. Magn. 728, 18; al. ‘ calling’, ete.; but doubtful,
ef. Curtius § 226 b.; Vani¢ek p. 1141 and reff.]); fr.
Hom. down; Hebr. 15; the mouth; 1. prop. the
mouth as a part of the body: of man, Jn. xix. 29; Acts
xi. 8; Rey. i. 16; iii. 16, and often; of animals, —as of
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27; of a horse, Jas. ili. 3; Rev. ix. 17;
of a serpent, Rev. xii. 15 sq.; xiii.5; the jaws of a lion,
Qe Timiniveatiis) Hebsxah 336 Rev. xi 2s5" Sinces the
thoughts of man’s soul find verbal utterance by his
mouth, xapdia (‘the heart’ or soul) and groya ‘the
mouth’ are distinguished: Mt. xii. 34; xv. 8 Ree. fr. Is.
xxix. 13; Ro. x.8,10; in phrases chiefly of a Hebra-
istic character, the mouth (as the organ of speech) is
mentioned in connection with words and speech, Mt. xxi.
16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3), and words are said to proceed ex tov
oTOpaTOS, Mt. iv. 4 (fr. Deut. viii. 3)3 kare 22: Eph. iv.
29; Col. iii. 8; Jas. iii. 10; 7d oropa Aadrei tt, Jude 16;
on the Hebr. phrase dvoiyew To ordua, see avotyw, p. 48%
bot. 9 dvoéus tov or. Eph. vi. 19; oroua mpos oropa
Aadjoa (TD-ONX 19 733, Num. xii. 8) lit. mouth (turned)
to mouth, fA. V. face to face], 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 14, (ro
aTdpa mpos To oropa, of a kiss, Xen. mem. 2, 6, 32);
God or the Holy Spirit is said to speak 8:4 tod oropards
twos [cf. B. 183 (159) ], Lk. i. 70; Actsi.16; iii. 18, 21;
iv. 25; or a person is said to heara thing dia oroparés r.
Acts xv. 7; or dé rod aor. t. from his own mouth i. e. what
he has just said, Lk. xxii. 71; or é« r. or. Acts xxii. 14;
Onpedoai te ek tT. ot. T. LK. xi. 545 7d mvedpa Tov ot. [the
breath of his mouth, see mvedpa, 1 b.], 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4); 1) poupaia rod or. a fig. por-
traying the destructive power of the words of Christ
the judge, Rev. ii. 16; Sddo0s or Weddos ev 76 or., 1 Pet.
ii. 22 and Rev. xiv. 5, (fr. Is. lili. 9); | o@roua is put for
‘statements’, declarations, in Mt. xviii. 16 and 2 Co. xiii,
TTOMAXOS
1, (Deut. xix. 15); Lk. xix. 22 (Eccl. viii. 2). du8dvae
rivi oropa, apt forms of speech (as distinguished from
the substance of speech, 4 copia), Lk. xxi. 15; oroua
for one who has begun (or is about) to speak, Ro. ili. 19
(Ps. evi. (evii-) 42; ef. wav yévu and raca yAéooa, Phil.
ii. 10 sq. fr. Is. xlv. 23); metaph. the earth is said to
open its mouth and xarazivew tt, Rey. xii. 16. 2:
Like Lat. acies, orépa paxaipas, the edge of the sword
(29n-"5, Gen. xxxiv. 26; [Josh. xix. 48; Jer. xxi. 7,
ete.]; Judg. xviii. 27, ete.; 2S. xv. 14 [but in the last
two pass. the Sept. render the Hebr. phrase by or.
poupaias, which (together with or. ious) is the more
common translation; ef. W. 18, 30; B. 320 (274) n.]):
Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34, (hence dSicropos, q. V-; D8 of
a sword, 2 S. ii. 26; xi. 25).
oTdn.aX0s, -ov, 6, (oTOpa, q. V-); 1. the throat:
Hom., al. 2. an opening, orifice, esp. of the stomach,
Aristot. 3. in later writ. (as Plut., al.) the stomach:
1 Tim. v. 23.* ;
otparela, -as, i, (orparevw), an expedition, campaign ;
military service, warfare: Paul likens his contest with the
difficulties that oppose him in the discharge of his apo-
stolic duties to a warfare, 2 Co. x. 4 (where Tdf. orpartas,
see his note); 1 Tim. i. 18. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)] *
otpdrevpa, -ros, TO, (otrparevw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; a. an army: Mt. xxii. 7; Rev. ix. 16; xix.
14 [ef. W. § 59, 4a.], 19. b. a band of soldiers [R.V.
soldiers]: Acts xxiii. 10, 27. ce. body-quard, guards-
men: plur. Lk. xxiii. 11 [R. V- soldiers].*
otpatrevw: Mid., pres. orparevopar; 1 aor. subjunc. 2
pers. sing. otparevon (1 Tim. i. 18 T Tr txt. WH mrg.);
(orparos [related to orpavvva, q. v-], an encampment, an
army); fr. Hdt. down; to make a military expedition, to
lead soldiers to war or to battle, (spoken of a commander);
to do military duty, be on active service, be a soldier; in
the N. T. only in the mid. (Grk. writ. use the act. and
the depon. mid. indiscriminately; cf. Passow s. v. 1 fin. ;
[L. and S. s.v. I. 2]): prop. of soldiers, Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co.
ix. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 45) to jight, [A. V. war]: ‘trop. of the
conflicts of the apostolic office, 2 Co. x. 3; with a kin-
dred ace. [W. § 32, 2; B.§ 131, 5], rv xadjv orpareiay,
1 Tim. i. 18 (fepav x. evyevn orpareiay orpatrevoacba
mepi ths evoeBelas, 4 Mace. ix. 23); of passions that dis-
quiet the soul, Jas. iv. 1; 1 Pet. ii. 11. [Comp.: avm-
oTparevopat. | *
otpatnyés, -ov, 6, (orparés and dyw), fr. Hdt. down,
Sept. chiefly for 13) [only plur. 0°310]; 1. the
commander of an army. 2. in the N. T. a civic
commander, a governor, (the name of the duumviri or
highest magistrates in the municipia and colonies; they
had the power of administering justice in the less im-
portant cases; of rns moAews otpatnyoi, Artem. oneir. 4,
49; of civil magistrates as early as Hdt. 5, 38; [see reff.
in Meyer on Acts xvi. 20; L. and S.s. v. II. 2sq.; ef.
Farrar, St. Paul, i. excurs. xvi.]): plur. [R. V. magis-
trates (after A.V.), with mrg. Gr. pretors], Acts xvi. 20,
22, 35 sq. [38]. 3. orpar. Tov iepov, ‘captain of the
temple’ [A.V.], i. e. the commander of the Levites who
590
atTpepa
kept guard in and around the temple (Joseph. antt. 20,
6, 2; [B. D.s. v. Captain, 3; Edersheim, The Temple ete.
ch. vii., 2ed. p. 119 sq.]) : Acts iv. 1; v. 24; plur. Lk. xxii.
52; simply [A. V. captain], Acts v. 26; Lk. xxii. 4.*
otparid, -as, 7, (otpatos [cf. orparevw]), fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down, Sept. for 2¥ ; 1. an army, band
of soldiers. 2. sometimes in the poets i. q. orparteia,
as Arstph. eqq. 587 (ev orpartais re Kal payats), 2 Co. x.
4 Tdf. after the best codd. ({see his note; cf. L. and S.
s. v. II.j|; Passow s. v. orpareia, fin.). 3. in the
N. T. 4 ovpdmos orparid, or 9 otpar. Tod ovpavod (Hebr.
DWI N2¥), the host of heaven (see ddvaucs, f.), i. e. a.
troops of angels (1 K. xxii. 19; Neh. ix. 6): Lk.ii.13. — b.
the heavenly bodies, stars of heaven, (so called on account
of their number and their order): Acts vii. 42 (2 Chr.
xxxili. 3,5; Jer. vill. 2, etc.).*
oTpatidtys, -ov, 6, (fr. orparios [(cf. otparedo) |, like
NAtwTns, KAowTNs, Nreipwrns), fr. Hdt. down, a (common)
soldier: Mt. viii. 9; Mk. xv. 16; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix.
2; Acts x. 7; xii. 4, ete.; with the addition of Inaor
Xptorov, metaph., a champion of the cause of Christ.
2 Tim. ii. 3.
otpatodoyéw, -@: to be a orparodoyos (and this fr.
otpatos and Aeyw), to gather (collect) an army, to enlist
soldiers: 6 otparodoynaas, [he that enrolled (him) as a
soldier}, of the commander, 2 Tim. ii. 4. (Diod., Dion.
Hal., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
otpatoT<dapxys, -ov, 6, (otpatdmedov and apxe), [cef.
B. 73 (64) ]; a. the commander of a camp and army,
a military tribune: Dion. Hal. 10, 36 ; Leian. hist. conser.
22; [Joseph. b. j. 2, 19, 4]. b. Praetorian prefect,
commander of the praetorian cohorts, i. e. captain of the
Roman emperor’s body-guard: Acts xxviii. 16 [LT
Tr WH om. the el., see Abbot in B. D., Am. ed., s. v.
Captain of the Guard]. ‘There were two praetorian pre-
fects, to whose custody prisoners sent bound to the em-
peror were consigned: Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; Plin. epp.
10, 65 (57). [See B. D. Am. ed. u.s.; Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil;p.7 sq
[orparomés-apxos, -ov,d; see the preceding word. The
dat. -y@ is the reading of some codd. (cf. WH rejected
mrg.) in Acts xxviii. 16; cf. Exarovrdpyns, init.” ]
otparé-meSov, -ov, 70, (arparos, and wédov a plain), fr.
Hdt. down ; a. a military camp. b. soldiers
in camp, an army: Lk. xxi. 20.*
otpeBAéw, -; (otpeBdds [fr. orpedw | twisted, Lat. tor-
tuosus; hence orpéBAn, fem., an instrument of torture) ;
to twist, turn awry, (Hadt.); to torture, put to the rack,
(Arstph., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 3 Mace. iv. 14);
metaph. to pervert, of one who wrests or tortures lan-
guage to a false sense, 2 Pet. iii. 16.*
otpépw: 1 aor. gorpeia; Pass., prec. orpépopar 2
aor. éorpdapny; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 357, also for
230, ete. ; to turn, turn round: ri ru, to turn a thing te
one, Mt. v. 39,and T Tr WH in xxvii. 3 [for aroorpeha,
to bring back; see dmoorpepw, 2]; reflexively (W. § 38,
1; B. § 130, 4), to turn one’s self (i.e. to turn the back
to one: used of one who no longer cares for another),
oTpHViaw
Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 469 (437) ]; rleis m1, ig. peraorpedo,
to turn one thing into another, Rey. xi.6. Pass. reflex-
ively, to turn one’s self: orpadeis foll. by a finite verb,
having turned etc., Mt. vii.6; [ix. 22 LT TrWH]; xvi.
Po ek Wie os 1k. 003 Xiv. 255 xxil. 61s dn, 1. 58 5)ae
16; orpadels pds twa, foil. by a fin. verb, [turning unto
etc., or turned unio and ete. ], Lk. vii. 44; x. 21 (22) [R* L
T], 23; xxiii. 28; orpepeoOa eis ra dricw, to turn one’s
self back, Jn. xx. 14; eis ra €Ovn, Acts xiii. 46; eorpadn-
cav (ev LT TrWII1) rais kapdias aira@v eis Atyumror,
[R.V. they turned back in their hearts unto Egypt] i.e. to
their condition there, Acts vii. 39; absol. and trop. to
turn one’s self sc. from one’s course of conduct, i. e. to
change one’s mind [cf. W.u.s.]: Mt. xviii. 3 and LT
Tr WH in Jn. xii. 40.
kata-, peTa-, ov(v)-, Uro- otpeda. | *
oTpyvidw, -@: 1 aor €oTpnviaca ; (fr. oTpHvos, q. VO) ey
word used in middle and later Comedy for rpudav
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 381; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
475 sq.; W.25]); to be wanton, to live luxuriously: Rev.
xviii. 7,9. [Comp.: xara-orpnudo. | *
atpivos, -ous, Td, [allied w. orepeds, q. v.], excessive
strength which longs to break forth, over-strength ; luxury,
[R.V. wantonness (mrg. luxury)]: Rev. xviii. 3 (see
Svvauis, d.); for aNw, arrogance, 2 K. xix. 28 5 eager de-
sire, Lycophr. 438.*
otpovOlov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of orpovds), a little bird, esp.
of the sparrow sort, a sparrow: Mt. x. 29, 31; Lk. xii.
6.sq. (Aristot.h. a, 5, 2 p..539>,.33.;, 9; 7 p..613%, 33);
Sept. for Way.) [Cf. Tristram in B.D. s. v. Sparrow;
Survey of West. Palest., ‘Fauna and Flora’, p. 67 sq.]*
oTpwvvie, or oTpavyupe: impf. 3 pers. plur. éarpavvvor
[ef. B. 45 (39)]; l aor. éotpaca; pf. pass. ptep. éorpe-
pevos ; (by metathesis fr. ordpyupt, oropevyyps, and this
fr. STOPEQ; [ef. Lat. sterno, struo, ete.; Eng. strew,
straw, ete.]; see Curtius § 227); lo spread: ivdria év tn
606, Mt. xxi. 8; eis 7. 60v, Mk. xi. 8, (redov meddopact,
Aeschyl. Ag. 909; eipaor mépov, ib. 921). se. tv «Alyy
(which Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down often add, and also
Aéxos, A€xrpor, ete. [ef. W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5]) revi,
Acts ix. 34 [A.V. make thy bed]; to spread with couches
or divans 76 dvayatov, pass. [A. V. furnished], Mk. xiv.
15; Lk. xxii. 12. [Comp.: kata-, iro- orpavvups. | *
oTvynrés, -dv, (otvyéw to hate), hated, Aeschyl. Prom.
592; detestable [A. V. hateful]: Tit. iii. 3; orvyntov k.
Ocopionrov mpaypa, of adultery, Philo de decal. § 24 fin. ;
épws, Heliod. 5, 29.*
orvyvatw; 1 aor. ptep. orvyvacas; (otuyvds sombre,
gloomy); to be sad, to be sorrowful: prop. émi tur [R.V.
his countenance fell at ete.], Mk. x. 22; metaph. of the
sky covered with clouds [A. V. to be iowering], Mt. xvi.
3[T br. WH reject the pass.]. (Schol. on Aeschyl.
Pers. 470; Sept. thrice for anv, to be amazed, aston-
ished, émi rwa, Ezek. xxvii. 85; xxxii. 10; oruyvorns, of
the gloominess of the sky, Polyb. 4, 21, 1.) *
orvdos [RG WH (Trin 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. x. 1)],
more correctly ctiAos [so LT (Tr in Gal. ii. 9; Rev. iii.
12)]; see Passow [or L. and §.] s. v. fin. [cf. Chandler
[ComP.: ava-, azo-, d:a-, ex-, €mt-,
591
|
ot
§$ 274, 275; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 43], -ov, 6, [fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down}, Sept. often for 13 y, a piliar,
column: oridot mupds, pillars of fire, i.e. flames rising
like columns, Rey. x. 1; moujow airiv oridov ev TO vad
Tov Geov pov, i. e. (dropping the fig.) I will assign him a
firm and abiding place in the everlasting kingdom of
God, Rev. iii. 12; used of persons to whose eminence
and strength the stability and authority of any institu-
tion or organization are due, Gal. ii. 9 [where cf. Bp.
Lghtft.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 2 and the note in Geb-
hardt and Harnack, (oriAo oikwy eiot aides dpoeves,
Eur. Iph. T. 57; exx. fr. [Jewish writ. are given by
Schoettgen (on Gal. l. c.) and fr.] eccles. writ. by Suicer,
Thes. ii. p. 1045 sq.; columen reipublicae, Cic. pro Sest.
8, 19, and often elsewh. in Lat. auth.); a@ prop or sup-
port: rns adnOeias, 1 Tim. iii. 15.*
Zrwikds [( WH Srackds), L T Sroixds, see Tdf.’s note
on Acts as below; WH. App. p. 152], -n, -dv, Stoic, per-
taining to the Stoic philosophy, the author of which,
Zeno of Citium, taught at Athens in the portico called
7) TotKiAn oToad: of Srwixkol Pirtdcopa, Acts xvii. 18.
[(Diog. Laért. 7, 5; al.) ]*
ov, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. rv, Boeot.
Tov), gen. gov, dat. voi, ace. a (which oblique cases are
enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet mpds ce is
written [uniformly in Rec. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb.
(exc. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts
xxiii. 30), in Lehm. (exc. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13;
xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18;
LES Insxvil Li, 133 Jn: xxi. 22) Acts me do.
30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv.
39], see eyo, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq.
[W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. dpeis, etc.; Lat. tu, etc.,
vos, ete.; thou, etc., ye, ete. The nominatives ov and wpeis
are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as od
BnOdeep, Mt. ii. 6; ob madiov (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1),
Lk. 1s 763 add,$n, xvii. 55. Acta. 245 1 Tim, widte
etc.; tpeis of bapecaio, Lk. xi. 39; —or when the pron.
has a noun ora ptcp. added to it in apposition in order to
define it more sharply, as ov ‘lovdatos ay (thou, being a
Jew), Jn. iv. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 14; tdpets wovnpot dvres, Mt. vii.
11;—or when several are addressed who are at the
same time particularized, od... ov, Jas. ii. 3; also in
antithesis, Mt. iii. 14; vi. 17; xi. 3; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk.
xvi. 7; Jn. ii. 10; iii. 2; Acts x. 15; 1 Co. iii. 23; Jas.
ii. 18, and very often; sometimes the antithetic term is
suppressed, but is easily understood from the context:
ei ov ef, if it be thou, and not an apparition, Mt. xiv. 28 ;
add, Lk. xv. 31; xvii. 8, ete.; or when a particle is
added, as od ovv (at the close of an argument, when the
discourse reverts to the person to be directly addressed),
Lk. iv. 7; Jn. viii: 5; Acts xxiii. 21; 2 Tim.it. 1,3; cp
dé (in contrasts), Lk. ix. 60; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Tit. ii. 1;
Heb. i. 11, etc.; dpets dé, Mt. xxi. 13; Jas. ii. 6; kal ov,
and thou, thou also, thou too, Mt. xi. 23; xxvi. 69, 73;
Lk. x.15; xix. 19, 42; xxii. 58; plur., Mt. xv. 3,16; Lk.
xvii. 10; before the 2d pers. of the verb where the per-
son is to be emphasized (like the Germ. du, thr eben, du
ouyyevera
da, ‘it is thou,’ ‘thou art the very man,’ ete.), od ef, Mt.
xxvil. 11; Mk. xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3; Jn. 1.19; ii. 10; iv.
12; viii. 53; Acts xxiii. 3, ete.; plur. Lk. ix. 55 Rec. ;
ov héyes, eiras, Mt. xxvi. 25; xxvii. 11; Mk. xv. 2; it
is used also without special emphasis ({cf. B. § 129, 12,
and] see éyw, 1), Mk. xiv.68; Jn. viii. 13; Acts vii. 28, etc.
The genitives god and tpav, joined to substantives,
have the force of a possessive, and are placed—some-
times after the noun, as rov 7dda cov, Mt. iv. 6; rods
ddeAgorvs tpav, Mt. v. 47, and very often ;—sometimes
before the noun (see éy@, 3 b.), as vod ai duapriat, Lk. vii.
48; cov ths vedtntos, 1 Tim. iv. 12; tpav Se Kai tpixes,
Mt. x. 30; add, Mk. x. 43 [here Rec. after]; Lk. xii.
30; Jn. xvi. 6; Ro. xiv. 16; 2 Co. i. 24 [here now be-
fore, now after] ;— sometimes between the article and
noun, as rHv bya emurdOnow, 2 Co. vil. 7; add, 2 Co. viii.
14 (18), 14; xiii.9; Phil. i. 19, 25; 11.30; Col.i.8. ora
gov madvra (aoa), Lk. iv. 7 [ef. B. § 132, 11, La.J. It
is added to the pronoun adrés: ood adtns, Lk. ii. 35.
On the phrase ri €uol Kai coi, see eyo,4.[(Fr. Hom.on.)]
ovyyévera, -as, 7, (ovyyevns), fr. Eur.and Thuc. down;
[Sept. ] ; a. kinship, relationship. b. kindred,
relations collectively, family: Lk. i. 61; Acts vii. 3, 14.*
ovyyevis, -és, Lace. sing. cvyyevn, and in Rom. xvi. 11
Treg. ovyyevqy; see apony], dat. plur. cuyyevéow and
(in Mk. vi. 4 T Tr [WH, also in Lk. ii. 44 WH] ace. to
a barbarous declens., cf. [1 Mace. x. 89] B. 25 (22))
cvyyevedow, (ody and yévos), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl. down;
Sept.], of the same kin, akin to, related by blood, (Plin.
congener): Mk. vi. 4; Lk. 11.44; xxi. 165 revds, Lk. [i.
58]; xiv. 12; Jn. xviii. 26; Acts x. 24; Ro. xvi. 7, 11,21,
[see below]; 7 ovyy- Lk. i. 36 RG Tr (Lev. xviii. 14) ;
in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman :
Ro. ix. 3 [(so some take the word in xvi. 7,11, 21, above;
ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Philippians p. 175) ].*
ovyyevis, -iSos, 7, (see the preceding word), a later Grk.
word ([Plut. quaest. Rom. 6]; like edyevis, cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 451 sq.; ef. W. 69 (67) ; Kihner i. p. 419 Anm.
8), a kinswoman: tids, Lk. i. 86 LT WH.*
ovy-yvoun [T WH ovry., cf. civ, I. fin.], -ys, 7, (ovy-
yyvooka, to agree with, to pardon; see yrapun), fr. [Soph.
and] Hdt. down, pardon, indulgence: kata cvyyvapny, ov
cat énitaynv, by way of concession or permission, not by
way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6.*
ovy-KdOnpar [T WH ovv- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]; fr. Hdt.
down; [Sept.]; ¢o st together, to sit with another: pera
twos, Mk. xiv. 54; ruvi, with one, Acts xxvi. 30.*
ovy-Kabite [T WH ovr- (cf. ov, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. cur
exabioa; (see kabilw) ; a. trans. to cause to sit down
together, place together: rwvd, foll. by év with a dat. of the
place, Eph. ii. 6. b. intrans. fo sit down together:
Lk. xxii. 55 [where Lchm. txt. wepixaO.]. (Xen., Aris-
tot., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
ovy-Kaxorrabéw [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)],-6: 1 aor.
impv. cvyxaxomabnaov ; (see xaxorrabew) ; to suffer hard-
ships together with one: 2 Tim. ii. 3 LT Tr WH; with a
dat. com. added, r@ evayyedia, for the benefit of the gos-
pel, to further it, 2 Tim. i. 8. (Eccles. writ.) *
592
OUVYKEPavvumLeE
ovy-KaKxovxéw [TWH ovr (ef. cv, II. fin.) ], -6: pres.
pass. inf. -yeto@ar; to treat ill with another; pass. to be
ill-treated in company with, share persecutions or come
into a fellowship of ills: revi, with one, Heb. xi. 25. Not
found elsewhere.*
ovy-Kahéw [T WH ovr- (ef. ody, I. fin.) ], -@; 1 aor. cum
exddeoa; Mid., pres. cvykadodpat; 1 aor. cvvexadeoayny ;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for NIP; to call together, assemble:
twas, Lk. xv. 6 [here Tr mrg. has pres. mid.]; tiv omet-
pav, Mk. xv. 16; 76 ovvedpiov, Acts v. 21; mid. to call to-
gether to one’s self (cf. B. § 135, 5]: reas, Lk. ix. 13 xv.
[6 Trmrg.],9 [RGLTr txt.]; xxiii. 13; Acts x. 24;
KAVA ML Te
ovy-Kkadtrrw [ (cf. ody, I. fin.)]: pf. pass. ptep. ovykexa-
Avuppevos; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 7D; fo cover on all
sides, to conceal entirely, to cover up completely: ti, pass.,
Ek xii2*
ovy-Kapmrre [TWH ovr (cf. civ, I. fin.)]: 1 aor. impv.
ovyKkaprpov ; to bend together, to bend completely : tov varév
twos, [ A. V. to bow down one’s back] i. e. metaph. to sub-
ject one to error and hardness of heart, a fig. taken from
the bowing of the back by captives compelled to pass
under the yoke, Ro. xi. 10, fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24.
(Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) *
ovy-Kata-Batve [TWH ovr (cf. adv, II. fin.)]: 2 aor.
ptep. plur. cvyxataBdvtes ; to go down with: of those who
descend together from a higher place to a lower, as from
Jerusalem to Cesarea, Acts xxv. 5. (Ps. xlviii. (xlix.)
18; Sap. x. 14; Aeschyl., Eur., Thuce., Polyb., Plut., al. ;
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 398; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
485].)*
ovy-Katra-Beots [T WH ovr (cf. civ, II. fin.)], -ews, 7,
(avyxatariOnut, q.v.), prop. a putting together or joint
deposit (of votes) ; hence approval, assent, agreement, [ Cic.
acad. 2, 12, 37 adsensio atque adprobatio}: 2 Co. vi. 16.
(Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
ovy-Kkata-ridnp. [T WH ovr- (ef. ody, II. fin.)]: Mid.,
pres. ptcp. cvyxaratieuevos or pf. ptep. cvyxarareetpevos
(see below) ; to deposit together with another ; Mid. prop.
to deposit one’s vote in the urn with another (nov rOevac),
hence to consent to, agree with, vote for: ty BovAn kK. TH
mpagéec twos, Lk. xxiii. 51 [here Lmrg.T Trmrg. WH
mrg. pres. ptep., al. pf. ptep.]. (Ex. xxiii. 1, 32; Plat.
Gorg. p. 501 ¢., Isae., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
ovy-Kkara-Wndito [T WH ovv- (cf. vv, II. fin.)]: laor.
pass. cuyxareyynpicOny ; 1. by depositing (xara)
a ballot in the urn (i. e. by voting for) to assign one
a place among (atv), to vote one a place among: twa
2. mid. to vote against with
Not
peta twov, Acts i. 26.
others, i.e. to condemn with others: Plut. Them. 21.
found elsewhere.*
ovy-Kepavvupe [T WH ovr (cf. vv, II. fin.)j: 1 aor.
cuvexépaca; pf. pass. ptep. cvyxexpapevos and in LT Tr
WH ovykexepacpévos [see kepavvypu, init.]; fr. [AeschyL,
Soph.], Hdt. down; to mix together, commingle; to unite:
ovvex. TO cGpa, caused the several parts to combine into
an organic structure, which is the body, [A.V. tempered
the body together], 1 Co. xii. 24; ri tem, to unite ona
CUYKLVEW
thing to another: otc opAnoev... py ovykexpapevos
fso RG T WH org., but L Tr WH txt. -vous] . . . dxov-
caow, ‘the word heard did not profit them, because it
had not united itself by faith to [ef. W. $31, 10; B.
§ 133, 13] them that heard,’ i. e. because the hearers had
not by their faith let it find its way into their minds
and made it their own; [or, ace. to the text of L Tr WH
(R. V.), ‘because they had not been united by faith with
them that heard ’], Heb. iv. 2.*
ovy-Kivéw, -@: 1 aor.3 pers. plur. cuvexivnoay ; to move
together with others [Aristot.]; to throw into commotion,
excite, stir up: tov Nady, Acts vi. 12. (Polyb., Plut.,
Longin., al.) *
ovy-krelo [TWH ovr- (cf. ctv, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. ovv-
éxdevoa; Pass., pres. ptep. avy-(ouv-)kdevdpevos, Gal. iii. 23
LT Tr WH; but RGibid. pf. ptep. -cexreurpévos; fr. Hdt.
down; Sept. chiefly for 39 and 77397, fo shut up, (Lat.
concludo), i. e. a. to shut up together, enclose, [so
s.v. ovv, II. 2; but others (e. g. Fritzsche as below;
Meyer on Gal. iii. 22) would make the ov» always
intensive, as in b.]: a shoal of fishes in a net, Lk. v.
6. b. to shut up on all sides, shut up completely ;
Twa eis Twa or tt, so to deliver one up to the power
of a person or thing that he is completely shut in, as it
were, without means of escape: tiva eis dmeiOevav, Ro.
xl. 32 (eis dydva, Polyb. 3, 63, 3; eis rovatrny dunyaviav
ovyk\evobels Avtiyovos perepedeto, Diod. 19,19; ov cuve-
kAewods pe eis xetpas €xOpod, Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 9; ra xrnvy
eis Gavatov, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; cf. Fritzsche, Ep.
ad Rom. ii. p. 545 sq.); also twa dad rt, under the power
of anything, i. e. so that he is held completely subject
to it: tmd duapriay, Gal. iii. 22 (the Scripture has shut
up or subjected, i.e. declared them to be subject) ; sc.
id vopov, with the addition of eis tiv pédAoveay riorw
aroxadvpOjvat, ib. 23 (see above ad init.) ; on these
words see eis, B. II. 3 ¢. y. p. 185° bot.*
ovy-kAnpo-vewos [TWH ovr- (cf. ovv, I. fin.) ], -ov, 6, 7,
a fellow-heir, a joint-heir, (avewt0s Kai cvyxAnpovepos, Philo,
lee. ad Gaium § 10), (see cAnpovdpos 1 b.) : Ro. viii. 17;
Eph. iii. 6; one who obtains something assigned to him-
self with others, a joint participant (see kAnpovduos, 2) :
with the gen. of the thing, Heb. xi.9; 1 Pet. iii. 7. Not
found elsewhere.*
ovy-Kowevew [T WH ovr- (cf. cdr, I. fin.) ],-@; 1 aor.
subj. 2 pers. plur. cvyxowarnonre, ptcp. nom. plur. masc.
ovykowearnaartes ; to become a partaker together with oth-
ers, or lohave fellowship with a thing: with a dat. of the
thing, Eph. v.11; Phil. iv. 14; Rev. xviii. 4. (witha
gen. of the thing, Dem. p. 1299, 20; tui twos, Dio Cass.
37,41; 77, 16.)*
ovy-Kowvovds [T WH ovr- (cf. avy, II. fin.)], -d», partici-
pant with others in (anything), joint partner: with a gen.
of the thing [cf. W. § 30, 8 a.], Ro. xi. 17; 1 Co. ix. 23;
with the addition of the gen. of the pers. with whom one
is partaker of a thing, Phil.i.7; foll. by év with a dat.
of the thing, Rev. i. 9.*
ovy-kopifw: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. cuvexdpioay: as
te carry or bring together, to collect [see cup, 14. 2]; to
593
ovyxXew
house crops, gather into granaries: Hdt., Xen., Diod.,
Plut., al.; Job v. 26. 2. to carry with others, help in
carrying out, the dead to be burned or buried (Soph.
Aj. 1048; Plut. Sull. 38); to bury: Acts viii. 2.*
ovy-Kplve ['T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.) ]; 1 aor. inf. cvy-
Kpivat ; 1. to join together fitly, compound, combine,
(Epicharm. in Plut. mor. p.110a.; Plat., Aristot., al.):
mvevpatikots mvevparixa, 1 Co. ii. 13 (for Paul, in deliver-
ing the things disclosed to him by the Holy Spirit in
speech derived not from rhetorical instruction but re-
ceived from the same divine Spirit, ‘combines spiritual
things with spiritual’, adapts the discourse to the
subject; other interpretations are refuted by Meyer
ad loc.; mvevparcxois is neut.; [but others would take it
as masc. and give ovyk. the meaning to interpret (R. V.
marg. interpreting spiritual things to spiritual men) ; cf.
Sept. Gen. xl. 8, 16, 22; xli.12,15; Judg. vii. 15; Dan.
v. 12, ete.; see Heinrici in Meyer Gte Aufl.]). 2. ace.
to a use foreign to the earlier Greeks (who used zapa-
BddAw), but freq. fr. the time of Aristotle on (cf. Passow
s.v.2; [L. and S.s.v.II.]; Zod. ad Phryn. p. 278 sq.;
[W. 23 (22)]), to compare: éavrods éavrois, 2 Co. x. 12
(Sap. vii. 29; xv.18).*
ovy-Kirro [TWH ovr- (cf. odv, II. fin.)]; [fr. Hdt.
down]; to bend completely forwards, to be bowed together,
[ef. cv, II. 3]: by disease, Lk. xiii. 11. ([Job ix. 27];
Sik. geliy Mp exix.426!)i7
ovykupia, -as, 7, (cvyxepetv, to happen, turn out), acci-
dent, chance: kata ovykvupiay, by chance, accidentally,
Lk. x. 31. (Hippoer.; eccles. and Byzant. writ.; Grk.
writ. fr. Polyb. down more com. use ovykipyots and ovy-
xupynua [ W. 24].)*
ovy-xalpo [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]; impf. cvwvéyar-
pov; 2 aor. cvvexapny [ pass. as act., so Veitch (s. v. yaipw)
ete.; al. act., after the analogy of verbs in -y]; to rejoice
with, take part in another’s joy, (Aeschyl., Arstph., Xen.,
al.): with a dat. of the pers. with whom one rejoices,
Lk. i. 58 (ef. 14); xv. 6,9; with a dat. of the thing, 1 Co.
xlii. 6; do rejoice together, of many, 1 Co. xii. 26; to con-
gratulate (Aeschin., Polyb., [Plut.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil. as below; 3 Mace. i. 8; Barn. ep. 1, 3 (and Muller
ad loc.) ]): with the dat. of the pers. Phil. ii. 17 sq.*
ovy-Xéo, ovy-xivw, and ovy-xivve, [TWH ov»- (cf.
ovr, II. fin.) ] (see exyéw, init.): impf., 3 pers. sing. cuve-
xuve (Acts ix. 22 RG L Tr, -yuvvev T WH), 3 pers. plur.
auvéxeov (Acts xxi. 27 RGT Tr WH [but some would
make this a 2 aor., see reff. s. v. éxyéw, init.]); 1 aor.
3 pers. plur. cuvéxeav (Acts xxi. 27 L [see exxée, init.]);
Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. cvy(T WH ovr-)xivvera (Acts
xxi. 31 LT Tr WH); pf. 3 pers. sing. cvyxéxurae (Acts
xxi. 31 RG), ptep. fem. cvy(T WH ovr~)xexupevn (Acts
xix. 32 RGLTTr WH); 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. cuveyvOn
(Acts ii. 6 RGLT Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; to pour
together, commingle: nv 1 €kk\noia ovyKexupevn, Was irreg-
ularly assembled [al. ‘in confusion’], Acts xix. 32; to
disturb, twa, the mind of one, fo stir up to tumult or out-
break, Acts xxi. 27, 31; to confound or bewilder, Acts it
Grin 22
gVvyKpaopuat
ovy-xpdopar [T WH ovr-], -@uar; fo use with any one,
use jointly, (Polyb., Diod., [Philo]); with the dat. of a
pers., to associate with, to have dealings with: Jn. iv. 9
[ Tdf. om. WH br. the cl. od yap . . . Zapap.].*
ovy-xive and cvyyvvvw, see auyx€w.
oty-xvois, -ews, 7, (ovyxew), [fr. Eur., Thuc., Plat.
down], confusion, disturbance: of riotous persons, Acts
xixee9 (1 Soy. 119
ovtaw [LT Tr WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)]; fut. ov-
(now; to live together with one [cf. ody, I. 1]: of physical
life on earth, opp. to cvvaroOaveiv, 2 Co. vii. 3; To Xprore,
to live a new life in union with the risen Christ, i. e. a
life dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 8, cf. De Wette [or Meyer
ad loc.]; to live a blessed life with him after death,
2 Tim. ii. 11. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) *
ov-levyvupt: 1 aor. cuvéCevéa; fr. Eur. and Xen. down;
prop. to fasten to one yoke, yoke together: tmmovs, Xen.
Cyr. 2, 2, 26; trop. to join together, unite : ri or twa, of the
marriage tie, Mt. xix.6; Mk. x. 9, (vdpos ov€evyvis avdpa
«ai yuvaixa, Xen. oec. 7, 30, and often so in Grk. writ.).*
ov-{yréw [LT Tr WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)],-@; impf.
3 pers. sing. cuve(nret; a. to seek or examine together
(Plat.). b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute, [ques-
tion (A. V. often)]: absol., [Mk. xii. 28]; Lk. xxiv. 15;
rivi, with one, Mk. viii. 11; ix. 14 [RGL]; Acts vi. 9;
in the same sense mpdés tua, Mk. ix. [14 T Tr WH], 16
(where read pds airovs, not with Rec.>°" G mpas at-
rovs [see avrov, p. 87]); Acts ix. 29; mpds éavrovs [L Tr
WH mre. or zp. avrovs Re * G] equiv. to mpds addn-
Aous, Mk. i. 27 [where T WH txt. simply adrovs as subj. ];
mpos éavrous with the addition of an indirect quest. 76 ris
etc. with the optat. [cf. B. § 139,60; W. § 41b.4c.],
Lk. xxii. 23; ri, with the indic., Mk. ix. 10.*
ov-{arnots [our L Trmrg. (cf. ody, II. fin.) ], -ews, 7,
(cv{ntéw), mutual questioning, disputation, discussion :
Acts xv. 2 Rec.. 7 RGLTrmrg.; xxviii. 29 yet GLT
Tr WH om. the vs. (Cic.ad fam. 16, 21,4; Philo, opif.
mund. § 17 fin. [(var. lect.) ; quod det. pot. § 1]; legg.
alleg. 3, 45.) *
ov-tyrarhs [LT Tr WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -od, 6,
(cu{nréw), a disputer, i.e. a learned disputant, sophist :
1 Co. i. 20. (Ignat. ad Eph. 18 [quotation ].) *
ot-tuyos [LT Tr WH ow- (cf. ody, II. fin.) ], -ov, (ruted-
yvum), yoked together; used by Grk. writ. [fr. Aeschyl.
down] of those united by the bond of marriage, rela-
tionship, office, labor, study, business, or the like; hence,
a yoke-fellow, consort, comrade, colleague, partner. Ac-
cordingly, in Phil. iv. 3 most interpreters hold that by
the words yvjore cvfvye Paul addresses some particular
associate in labor for the gospel. But as the word is
found in the midst of (three) proper names, other
expositors more correctly take it also as a proper name
([WH mre. Sivtvye]; see Laurent, Ueber Synzygos in
the Zeitschr. f. d. Luther. Theol. u. Kirche for 1865, p.
1 sqq. [reprinted in his Neutest. Studien, p. 134 sq.]);
and Paul, alluding (as in Philem. 11) to the meaning of
the word as an appellative, speaks of him as ‘a genuine
Synzygus’, i. e. a colleague in fact as well as in name.
594
avAaywryéew
Cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc.; [Hackett in B. D. Am.
ed. s. v. Yoke-fellow ].*
ov-two-rovew, -@: 1 aor. cuvefworoinca; to make one
alive together with another (Vulg. convivifico): Chris-
tians, r@ Xptore@ [L br. adds év, so WH mrg. |, with Christ,
Eph. ii. 5; otv r@ Xp. Col. ii. 13; in both these pass.
new moral life is referred to.*
ovkapivos, -ov, 7, Hebr. mMpw (of which only the plur.
D'2pw is found in the O. T., 1 K. x. 27; Is.ix.10; Am.
vii. 14; once NiNpw), a sycamine, a tree having the form
and foliage of the mulberry, but fruit resembling the fig
(i. q. ovxopopea, q.v. [but Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the
Bible, 2d ed. p. 396 sq.; BB.DD., ete., regard the syca-
mine as the black-mulberry tree, and the sycomore as
the fig-mulberry]): Lk. xvii. 6. (Often in Theophr. ;
Strab. 17, p. 823; Diod. 1,34; Dioscorid. 1, 22.) [CE.
Vanicek, Fremdworter, p. 54; esp. Léw, Aram. Pflan-
zennamen, § 332, cf. § 338; BB.DD. u.s.; ‘Bible Edu-
cator’ iv. 343; Pickering, Chron. Hist. of Plants, pp.
106, 258.]*
cvki, -7s, 7, (contr. fr. cvxéa), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
MINN, a fig-tree: Mt. xxi. 19-21; xxiv. 32; Mk. xi. 13,
20 sq.; xiii. 28; Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; xxi. 29; Jn. i. 48 (49),
50 (51); das. iii. 12; Rev. vi.13. [Cf. Léw, Aram. Pflan-
zennamen, § 335. ]|*
ovKo-popéa (Lehm. ouxopwpea, [ Rec. **>** -ywpata, cf.
Tdf.’s note on Lk. as below; WH. App. pp. 152 and
151]), -as, 7, (fr. cdkov and popea the mulberry tree),
i. G. cuxapwvos { but see the word, and reff.], a sycomore-
tree: Lk. xix. 4. (Geop. 10, 3, 7.)*
cixoy, -ov, Td, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 73sn, a jig, the
ripe fruit of 7 ovxn [q. v.]: Mt. vii. 16; Mk. xi. 13; Lk.
vi. 44; Jas. ili. 12.*
cvkopavtéw, -@; 1 aor. eovcofavrnca; (fr. cuxopayrns,
and this fr. odkor ‘fig’, and gaivw ‘to show’. At Athens
those were called ouxopdvra: whose business it was to
inform against any one whom they might detect export-
ing figs out of Attica; and as sometimes they seem to
have extorted money from those loath to be exposed, the
name ovkodpayvtns from the time of Aristophanes down
was a general term of opprobrium to designate a malig-
nant informer, a calumniator; a malignant and base ac-
cuser from love of gain, [but cf. L. and S. s. v.]; hence
the verb cuxopavr@ signifies) 1. to accuse wrong-
fully, to calumniate, to attack by malicious devices, (Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to exact money wrong-
fully; to extort from, defraud: Lk. iii. 14 [here R. V.
marg. accuse wrongfully]; with a gen. of the pers. and
ace. of the thing, Lk. xix. 8 (rpidxovra pvas mapa twos,
Lys. p. 177, 32. Sept. for puy, to oppress, defraud, Job
xxxv. 9; Eccl..iv. 1; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 122; meévyra,
Prov. xiv. 31 37xxil. 116) mtTwxous, Prov. XXViil. 3).*
ovdaywyew, -@; (cvAn booty, spoil, [ef. cuvdde, init.],
and dyw); to carry off booty: twa, to carry one off as a
captive (and slave), O6vyarépa, Heliod. 10, 35; wapOévov,
Nicet. hist. 5 p. 96; to lead away from the truth and
subject to one’s sway [R. V. make spoil of], Col. ii. 8
(Tatian. or. ad Gr. c. 22, p. 98 ed. Otto).*
aay
TVUAdw
ovidw, -@: 1 aor. éovAnoa; ([akin to] ovAn ‘spoil’
{allied with oxidov (q. v., yet cf.) Curtius p. 696]); fr.
Hom. down; ¢o rob, despoil: twa, 2 Co. xi. 8.*
ovd-hadéo, [T WH ovv- (cf. ov, I. fin.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 76)], -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. cuveAddovv; 1 aor. cuve-
AdAnoa; to talk with: tii, with one, Mk. ix. 4; Lk. ix.
30; xxii. 4, (Ex. xxxiv. 35; Is. vii.6; Polyb. 4, 22, 8);
pera tos, Mt. xvii. 3; Acts xxv. 12; mpds dAAndous [R.V.
spake together one with another], Lk. iv. 36. [Cf. W. § 52,
4, 15.]*
cvd-AapBavw [sometimes cuv- (see below) ]: fut. 2 pers.
sing. ovAAnwyn (LT Tr WH ovaarpyy [see M, w]), Lk. i.
31; pf. [3d pers. sing. cuveiAnpev, Lk. i. 36 Tr txt. WH],
ptep. fem. ouvewAnpvia [ib RG LT]; 2 aor. cwveAaBov ;
1 aor. pass. cvveAnpOnvy (LT Tr WH ouveAnupénv; see
M, #); Mid., pres. impv. 2 pers. sing. ovAAapBavov (T
Tr WH ovp-, cf. ody, I. fin.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 76) Phil.
iv. 3; 2 aor. ovveAaBounv ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down;
Sept. for wom and Galo 1. Active, a. to seize,
take: twa, one as a prisoner, Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48;
Lk. xxii. 54; Jn. xviii. 12 [cf. W. 275 (259)]; Actsi. 16;
xli. 3; Xxiii. 27; a@ypav ixOvev, Lk. v. 9. b. to con-
ceive, of a woman (often so in Sept. for 797): absol.
Lk. i. 24 (Aristot. h. a. 7,1 p. 582%, 19; gen. an. 1, 19 p.
727°, 8 sq.; [Plut. de vitand. aere alien. 4, 4; cf. W. 598
(552); B. § 130, 5]); with ev yaorpi added, Lk. i. 31;
tivd, a son, [ Lk. i. 36]; with ev rm cola added, Lk. ii. 21;
metaph. of ‘lust,’ whose impulses a man indulges, Jas. i.
15. 2. Mid. a. to seize for one’s self; in a
hostile sense, to make (one a permanent) prisoner: twa,
Acts xxvi. 21. b. with the dat. of a pers. to take
hold together with one, to assist, help: Lk.v. 7; to succor,
Phil. iv. 3, (Soph. Phil. 282; Plat. Theag. p. 129€e.;
Diod. 11, 40; in this sense in Grk. writ. more commonly
in the active).*
ova-héyo [cf. ovv, II. fin.; Tdf Proleg. p. 76]; fut.
ovd\d\eEw; 1 aor. ouvvedeEa; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ovA-
Aéyerac; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for Op? ; to gath-
er up (cf. avy, II. 2]: ra Cifana (for removal fr. the
field), Mt. xiii. 28 sq. 30; pass. ib. 40; ri do with a gen.
of the thing, Mt. vii. 16 [ef. W. § 58, 9 b.a.]; ri é« with
a gen. of the place, to collect in order to carry off, Mt.
xiii. 41; in order to keep, Lk. vi. 44; ri eis tt, into a
vessel, Mt. xili. 48.*
ovd-Aoyifopat: (impf. cvveAoy:Counv Lehm.) 1 aor. cur
edoytodpny ; a. to bring together accounts, reckon
up, compute, (Hdt. et sqq.). b. to reckon with one’s
self, to reason, (Plat., Dem., Polyb., al.) : Lk. xx. 5.*
ovA-AvTrEw : 1. to affect with grief together: Aris-
tot. eth. Nic. 9, 11, 4 p. 1171°, 7. 2. Pass., pres.
ptep. ovAAvrovpevos [T WH ov- cf. ovv, I. fin. (Tdf.
Proleg. p. 76)]; to grieve with one’s self [see avy, IIL. 4
(so Fritz., De Wette, al.; but al. regard the avy as ‘sym-
pathetic’; cf. Meyer, Weiss, Morison, on Mk. as be-
low) ], be inwardly grieved, (Hadt., Plat., Polyb., Diod.) :
of the pain of indignation, emi tu, Mk. iii. 5.*
ovp-Balve [Evu- Rec.>e in 1 Pet. iv. 12; see 3, a, s fin.];
impf. ovvéBawvoy; 2 aor. cuveBnv, ptep. ovpBas; pf. ovp-
595
ouppiBalo
BeBnxa ; fr. [ Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. to walk with
the feet near together. 2. to come together, meet with
one; hence 3. of things which fall out at the same
time, to happen, turn out, come to pass, (so occasionally
in the Sept. for 7p and RP); as very often in Grk.
writ. (Sept. Gen. xlii. 4; xliv. 29), cupBaiver ri runt,
something befalls, happens to, one: Mk. x. 32; Acts xx.,
19; 1 Co. x. 11; [1 Pet. iv. 12]; 2 Pet. ii. 22; rd coupe
BeBnxos tun, Acts iii. 10 (Sus. 26); absol. ra cupBeBn-
xora, the things that had happened, Lk. xxiv. 14 (1
Mace. iv. 26; (Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 22, 17]) ; cuveBy foll.
by an ace. with inf. it happened [A.V. so it was] that,
ete.: Acts xxi. 35 [ef. W. 323 (303) ], exx. fr. prof. auth.
are given by Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2.*
ovp-BoddAw [cuv- WH (so Tdf. exc. Lk. xiv. 31); cf. cd,
II. fin.]; impf. cvvéBaddov; 2 aor. cvvéBadov; 2 aor. mid.
ouveBadounv; fr. Hom. down; to throw together, to bring
together ; a. Adyous (Lat. sermones conferre), to con-
verse, Eur. Iphig. Aul. 830; with Adyous omitted [cf.
Eng. confer], Plut. mor. p. 222 c. (W. 593 (552); [B.
145 (127)]): rwi, to dispute with one, Acts xvii. 18
[where A. V. encountered (cf. c. below)]; mpéds addAndous,
to confer with one another, deliberate among them-
selves, Acts iv. 15. b. to bring together in one’s
mind, confer with one’s self [ef. cvv, II. 4], to consider,
ponder: év ty Kapdia, to revolve in the mind, Lk. ii. 19
(cupBarov To oyope 76 dvap, Joseph. antt. 2,5,3). c.
intrans. (W. $38, 1; [B.§130, 4]}), to come together, meet :
Twi, to meet one (on a journey), Acts xx. 14 (Hom. Od.
21, 15; Joseph. antt. 2,7, 5); to encounter in a hostile
sense: tivt, to fight with one (1 Mace. iv. 34; 2 Mace.
Vill.) 23°; xiv. 173) Polyb: 1, 9; 7} 3,111, 1, and often);
with eis méAepov added, Lk. xiv. 31 (es paxnv, Polyb. 3,
56, 6; Joseph. antt. 12, 8,4; mpos paynv, Polyb. 10, 37,
4). Mid. to bring together of one’s property, to contribute,
aid, help: mod ren, one, Acts xviii. 27; often so in Grk.
auth. also, esp. Polyb.; cf. Schweighduser, Lex. Polyb.
p-576; Passow s.v.1b.a.; [L.andS.s.v. 1.2]; Grimm,
Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. v. 8.*
oup-Bactredo ['T cuv- so now WH (in exx. as below); cf.
ovy, II. fin.) : fut. cupBaowevow; 1 aor. cvveBacirevea ;
to reign together: rwi, with one; prop., Polyb. 30, 2, 4;
Leian. dial. deor. 16, 2; often in Plut. [also in Dion. Hal.,
Strabo]; metaph. to possess supreme honor, liberty,
blessedness, with one in the kingdom of God: 1 Co. iv. 8
[ef. W.41b.5 N. 2; B.§139, 10]; 2 Tim. ii. 12; see
Bacthevw.*
ovp-PiBdto [WH our (so Tdf.in Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii.
19); ef. ody, I. fin.]; 1 aor. cvveBiBaca (Acts xix. 33
L T Tr WH, but see below) ; Pass., pres. ptep. cupBiBa-
(épevos; 1 aor. ptcp. cvuBiBacbeis; (8:8afo to mount the
female, copulate with her; to leap, cover, of animals;
allow to be covered, admit to cover) ; 1. to cause to
coalesce, to join together, put together: td o@pa, pass., of
the parts of the body ‘knit together’ into one whole,
compacted together, Eph iv. 16; Col. ii.19; to unite or
knit together in affection, pass., Col. ii. 2 [ef. W. § 63, 2
a.; B. § 144,13 a.] (to reconcile one to another. Hdt. 1,
ovpBovrEvo
74; Thue. 2, 29). 2. to put together in one’s mind,
to compare; by comparison to gather, conclude, consider :
foll. by 671, Acts xvi. 10 (Plat. Hipp. min. p. 369 d.; de
rep. 6 p. 504 a.). 3. to cause a person to unite with
one in a conclusion or come to the same opinion, to prove,
demonstrate: foll. by 67, Acts ix. 22 ([Aristot. top. 7, 5
p- 151%, 36]; foll. by os, [Aristot. rhet. Alex. 4 p. 1426:,
37; etc.]; Jambl. vit. Pyth. c. 13 §60; foll. by the
ace. with inf., Ocell. Lucan. 3,3); by a usage purely
Biblical, w. the ace. of a pers., to teach, instruct, one:
1 Co. ii. 16; for 1357, Is. xl. 14; for yrqin, Ex. xviii.
16; Deut. iv. 9; Is. xl. 13 Alex., Ald., ete.; for 77n,
Ex. iv. 12, 15; Lev. x. 11; nya ‘wi, Theodot. Dan.
ix. 22. (The reading cvveSi8acay in Acts xix. 33, given
by codd. 8 A Bete. [and adopted by L T Tr WH] yields
no sense; [but it may be translated (with R. V. mrg.)
‘some of the multitude instructed Alexander’, ete.;
R. V. txt. translates it they brought Alexander out of the
multitude, etc. ].) *
cup-Bovredw; 1 aor. cuveBovdevoa; 1 aor. mid. cur-
eBovhevodpny; fr. [Theogn., Soph.], Hdt. down; Sept.
for yy) and yyid; 1. to give counsel: Twi, Jn.
xviii. 14; foll. by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to
take counsel with others, take counsel together, to consult,
deliberate : foll. by tva (see tva, II. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4;
Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrg.]; foll. by a telic inf., Acts ix.
3.*
oupBovAroy, -ov, 7d, (cvpBovdos) ; 1. counsel, which
is given, taken, entered upon, (Plut. Romul. 14): Aap-
Bavw (on this phrase see AapBava, I. 6), Mt. xii. 14 5 xxii.
15; xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; zo.@, to consult, deliberate,
Mk. iii. 6 [Tr txt. WH txt. edi8ovw o.]; xv. 1 [T WH
mrg. érousdcavres o.; cf. Weiss ad loc.]. 2. a
council, i. e. an assembly of counsellors or persons in con-
sultation (Plut. Luc. 26): Acts xxv. 12 (the governors
and procurators of provinces had a board of assessors
or advisers with whom they took counsel before render-
ing judgment; see Cic. ad fam. 8, 8; Verr. 2,13; Sueton.
vit. Tiber. 33; Lamprid. vit. Alex. Sever. c. 46; cf. Jo-
seph. b. 7. 2,16, 1).*
ovipBovdos, -ov, 6, (avy and BovAn), an adviser, coun-
sellor: Ro. xi. 34 fr. Is. xl.13. (Tragg., [Hdt.], Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., al.) *
Dupedyv, 6, [indecl., B. 16 (14)], (for deriv. see Sipwv),
Simeon [so A. V. uniformly (on 2 Pet. i. 1 see 5 below) ];
1. the second son of Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxix. 33):
Rev. vii. 7. 2. [R. V. Symeon], one of Abraham’s
descendants: Lk. iii. 30. 3. that devout Simeon
who took the infant Jesus in his arms in the temple:
Lk. ii. 25 [here Rec.be? Sipeav], 34. 4. Symeon [so
R. V.] surnamed Niger, one of the teachers of the
church at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. 5. Peter the apos-
tle: Acts xv. 14 [R. V. Symeon]; 2 Pet. i. 1 [here L WH
txt. Sivwv, and A. V.(R. V.) Simon]; respecting him
see Siuey, 1 and IMerpos, fin.*
oup-padnrys [T WH ovv- (cf. ody, II. fin.) ], -od, 6, a fel-
low-disciple: Jn. xi. 16 (Plat. Euthyd. p.272¢.; Aesop.
fab. 48). (Phrynichus says that ovv is not prefixed to
596
oupTrapayivomat
ronitns, Snnorns, puderns, and the like, but only to those
nouns which denote an association which is rpdoxatpos
i.e. temporary, as ouvepyBos, cvvOiacatns, ovpmorns.
The Latin also observes the same distinction and says
commilito meus, but not concivis, but civis meus; see
Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 471; (cf. p. 172; Win. 25].)*
oup-paptupew, -@ [TWH our (cf. ovy, II. fin.) ]; to bear
witness with, bear joint witness (with one): ouppapru-
povons ths ovvedioews, their conscience also bearing
witness, Ro. ii. 15 (i.e. together with the deeds of the
Gentiles, which accord with the law of God and so bear
witness [ef. W. 580 (539)]) ; foll. by dru, Ro. ix. 1 (be-
sides the fact that the close fellowship I have with Christ
compels me to tell the truth); 76 mvevpare jpor, with
our spirit already giving its testimony, Ro. viii. 16.
Mid. pres. 1 pers. sing. ouppaprupotpa, I testify on my
own behalf besides (i.e. besides those things which I
have already testified in this book), Rev. xxii. 18 Rec.;
but the true reading here, paprupo, was restored by
Grsb. (Soph., Eur., Thuc., Plat., al.) *
ovup-pepito [WH ovr- (cf. ovy, II. fin.)]: to divide at
the same time, divide together; to assign a portion; Mid.
pres. 3 pers. plur. cuppepifovrar: tui, to divide together
with one (so that a part comes to me, a part to him), [R.V.
have their portion with], 1 Co. ix. 13. [Diod., Dion. Hal.,
Diog. Laért. | *
oup-peroxos [T WH ovr- (cf. cdr, I. fin.)], -ov, par
taking together with one, a joint-partaker : twos, of some-
thing, Eph. iii. 6; v. 7. (Joseph. b. j. 1, 24, 6; Just.
Mart. apol. 2, 13.) *
ovp-pisntys [T WH ovr- (cf. ovr, IT. fin.)], -od, 6, an
imitator with others: twos, of one, Phil. iii. 17. Not
found elsewhere.*
cvp-popditw [Tdf. cuv- (cf. adv, II. fin.)]: pres. pass.
ptep. cuppopPifopevos ; (ovppopdos) ; to bring to the same
form with some other pers. or thing, to render like,
(Vule. configuro) : tui [R.V. becoming conformed unto],
Phil. iii. 10 LT Tr WH. Not found elsewhere.*
obp-popdos, -ov, (avy and poppy), having the same form
as another [ef. ovv, II. 1], (Vulg. conformis, configuratus) ;
similar, conformed to, [Leian. amor. 39]: twds (cf.
Matthiae § 379 p. 864; [W. 195 (184); B. § 182, 23]),
Ro. viii. 29 (see eikwy, a.) ; revi (Nicand. th. 321), Phil.
iii. 21 [(here Tdf. ovvp.) ; cf. W. 624 (580) ].*
cup-popdda, -@: pres. pass. ptep. cuvppopPovpevos ; 1. q.
ovppoppita, q. v-: Phil. iii. 10 Rec. Nowhere else.*
ovp-rabéw [T WH ovr (cf. ovr, II. fin.)], -@: 1 aor.
cuverrdbnoa; (cvpmabns) ; a. to be affected with the
same feeling as another, to sympathize with, (Aristot.,
Plut.). b. in reference to the wretched, /o feel for,
have compassion on, (Vulg. compatior) : rwi, Heb. iv. 15
[A. V. to be touched with the feeling of]; x. 34, (Isocr. p.
64 b.; Dion. Hal., Plut.).*
cupralsjs, -és, (ovv and racy), suffering or feeling the
like with another, sympathetic: 1 Pet. iii. 8, ef. Ro. xii.
15. (Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
ovp-rapa-yivopat [T WH ovr (cf. ody, I. fin.)]: 2 aor.
mid. oupmapeyevouny 5 a. lo come together: émi Tt,
oULTAapaKanrew
Lk. xxiii. 48 (Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 9; Hdt., Thuc., Dem.,
Diod.). b. to come to one’s help: rivi, 2 Tim. iv. 16
RG [al. rapayiv., q. v. fin. ]*
ovp-trapa-Karéw [TWH ovr (cf. ovy, II. fin.)],-6: 1
aor. pass. inf. cupmapakAnOjvat ; 1. to call upon or
invite or exhort at the same time or together (Xen., Plat.,
Plut., al.). 2. to strengthen [A.V. comfort] with
others (souls; see mapaxadéa, II. 4): cupmapakdAnOjvat év
bpiv, that I with you may be comforted among you, i. e. in
your assembly, with you, Ro. i. 12.*
ovup-trapa-AapBave [T WH ovv- (cf. odv, II. fin.)]; 2
aor. oupmapeAaBov; to take along together with (Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.); in the N. T. to take with one as a
companion: twa, Acts xii. 253 xv. 37sq.; Gal. ii. 1.*
oup-Tapa-peve : fut. cuumapapeva ; 10 abide together with
(Hippoer., Thuce., Dion. Hal., al.) ; to continue to live to-
gether: twi, with one, Phil. i. 25 [Ree. ; al. rapapeva, q. v. |
(Pst loi? (exit.)U5)s*
cup-mapepe [T WH ovv- (cf. ovv, IT. fin.)]; to be pres-
ent together: tui, with one, Acts xxv. 24. [(Hippocr.,
Xen., Dem., al.) ]*
oup-rdcxe [TWH ovr- (cf. cvv, II. fin.)]; to suffer or
feel pain together (in a medical sense, as in Hippocr. and
Galen): 1 Co. xii. 26; to suffer evils (troubles, persecu-
tions) in like manner with another: Ro. viii. 17.*
oup-mrepme: 1 aor. cuverena; fr. Hdt. down; to send
together with : twa pera twos, 2 Co. viii. 18; revi, ibid. 22.
[CEM S525 4 aida /*
ocup-rept-AapBave [TWH ovv- (cf. adv, II. fin.) ]: 2 aor.
ptep. cuprepraBov; fr. Plat. and Dem. down; als
to comprehend at once. 2. to embrace completely :
twa, Acts xx. 10.* ;
ocup-tive: 2 aor. ouvémor; fr. [Hdt., Arstph.], Xen.
and Plat. down; to drink with: twi, one, Acts x. 41.*
cup-tintre: 2 aor. cuvémecov; fr. Hom. down; to fall
together, collapse, fall in: of a house, Lk. vi. 49 T Tr
WEL
ovp-tAnpdw [in Acts T WH ovr- (cf. ovy, II. fin.) ], -d:
Pass., pres. inf. cuzmwAnpodada; impf. cvverAnpovpyy; fr.
Hdt. down; 1. to fill completely: cuverdnpodvto
[R. V. they were filling with water], of the navigators,
(as sometimes in Grk. writ. what holds of the ship is ap-
plied to those on board; cf. Kypke, Observv. i. p. 248),
Lk. viii. 23. 2. to complete entirely, be fulfilled: of
time (see wAnpdw, 2 b. a.), pass., Lk. ix. 51 [R. V. well
nigh come]; Acts ii. 1.*
ocup-viyo [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)]; impf. ov-
émvyov; 1 aor. ovvéruEa; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. cup-
mviyovrat ; to choke utterly: the seed of the divine word
sown in the mind, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7, 19, (dévdpa
ovpuruydueva, Theophr. c. plant. 6,11, 6); ovpmviyovrat,
they are choked, i.e. the seed of the divine word in their
minds is choked, Lk. viii. 14; rua, to press round or
throng one so as almost to suffocate him, Lk. viii. 42
jA. V. thronged ].*
ovp-todirys [T WH ovr- (cf. ovv, II. fin.)], -ov, 6, (see
cvppabnrns and reff.), possessing the same citizenship
with others, a fellow-citizen: cvproXirat Tév dyi@v, spoken
597
suppuTos
of Gentiles as received into the communion of the saints
i.e. of the people consecrated to God, opp. to ێvor x.
mapotkot, Eph. ii. 19. (Eur. Heracl. 826; Joseph. antt.
19, 2,2; Ael. v. h. 3, 44.)*
ovp-tropevopar [T WH ovp- (cf. adv, II. fin.)]; impf.
COUVETFOPEVOMND 5 1. to go or journey together (Eur.,
Xen., Diod.): rwi, with one, Lk. vii. 11; xiv. 25; xxiv.
15, (Tob. v. 3, 9; npav » Wux1 cupropevdeioa Ged, Plat.
Phaedr. p. 249 ¢.; pera twos, very often in Sept.). 2.
to come together, to assemble: mpds twa, Mk. x. 1 (Polyb.,
Plut.).*
cupmecioy, -ov, Td, (cupmivw), a drinking-party, enter-
tainment, (Lat. convivium); by meton. the party itself,
the guests, (Plut. mor. p. 157 a.; 704d.); plur. rows of
guests: ouprdéova cupmdora, Hebraistically for cara oup-
méata, in parties, by companies, ([B. 30 (27); §129a. 35
W. 229 (214); 464 (432)]; see mpacid), Mk. vi. 39.*
cup-mperButepos [Tl WH ovp- (cf. ovr, II. fin.) }, -ov, 6,
a fellow-elder, Vulg. consenior, (see mpecBurepos, 2 b.): 1
Pet. v. 1. (Eccles. writ.) *
cup-dayw, see cuved bia.
cup-dépw; 1 aor. ptep. cuveveycavres (Acts xix. 19) ;
fr. [Hom. (in mid.)], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to bear or
bring together (Lat. confero), i. e. 1. with a refer-
ence to the object, to bring together: ri, Acts xix.
19. 2. with a reference to the subject, to bear to-
gether or at the same time; to carry with others; to collect
or contribute in order to help, hence to help, be profitable,
be expedient; ovppépet, it is expedient, profitable, and
in the same sense with a neut. plur.: with the subject
mavra, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 233 ri rum, 2 Co. viii. 10; with
an inf. of the object (as in Grk. writ.), Mt. xix. 10; 2 Co.
xii. 1 (where L T Tr WH have cupdepov); with the
ace. and inf. Jn. xviii. 14; oupdeper tui foll. by iva (see
fva, II. 2c. [B. $139, 45; W. 337 (316)]), Mt. v. 29 sq.;
XVili. 6; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7. 7d cupdépor, that which is
profitable (Soph., Eur., Xen., Dem., al.) : 1 Co. xii. 7;
plur. (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 341 e.), Acts xx. 20; advan-
tage, profit, Heb. xii. 10; 7d cup. tevds (often in Grk.
writ.) the advantage of one, one’s profit, 1 Co. vil. 35;
x. 33, (in both which pass. L T Tr WH read ovudopor,
Gave)
obp-bype [T WH ovv- (cf. ovv, II. fin.)]; to consent,
confess: twi foll. by drt, Ro. vii. 16. (Tragg., Xen.,
Plat.) *
obp-dopos, -ov, (cuupépa, q- V-), fit, suitable, useful; fr.
[Hes., Theogn.], Hdt. down; 4 Macc. v. 10; subst. 7d
avppopov, advantage, profit: with a gen. of the pers.
profited, LT Tr WH in 1 Co. vii. 35; x. 33, [ef. B. § 127,
i9n.], (plur. ra cdpqopa, often in prof. auth. [fr. Soph.
down |).*
oup-dvdérys, -ov, 6, (adv and dudn; see suppabyrns).
one who is of the same people, a fellow-countryman,
(Vulg. contribulis): 1 Th. ii. 14. (Kecles. writ.) *
oip-huros, -ov, (suupiw), planted together (Vulg. com-
plantatus) ; born together with, of joint origin, i. e. i.
connate, congenital, innate, implanted by birth or nature,
(3 Mace. iii. 22; Pind., Plat., Aeschyl., Aeschin., Aristot.,
cuppuw
Philo de Abrah. § 31 init.; Joseph. [as, c. Ap. 1, 8,
5]). 2. grown together, united with, (Theophr. de
caus. plant. 5, 5, 2); kindred (Plat. Phaedr. p. 246 a.):
ei cupputo yeydvapev TH Gpormpate Tod Oavatov avrod,
GANG xal (sc. TO Sporwmpare [al. supply Xpiorg@, and take
the éuotmpare as a dat. of respect; for yet another constr.
of the second clause ef. B. § 132, 23]) rhs avacrdcews
éodpeba, if we have become united with the likeness of his
death (which likeness consists in the fact that in the
death of Christ our former corruption and wickedness
has been slain and been buried in Christ’s tomb), i. e.
if it is part and parcel of the very nature of a genuine
Christian to be utterly dead to sin, we shall be united also
with the likeness of his resurrection i. e. our intimate fel-
lowship with his return to life will show itself in a new
life consecrated to God, Ro. vi. 5.*
[cup-hiw (T WH ovr cf. ody, II. fin.): 2 aor. pass.
ptep. nom. plur. fem. cuppvetcat ; 1. trans. to cause
to grow together (Plat., Aristot.). 2. pass. intrans.
to grow together, grow with: Lk. viii. 7.* ]
oup-hwvew, -d; fut. cupporncw ([Mt. xviii. 19 T Tr;
Lk. v.36 LT Tr txt. WH]); 1 aor. cvvehovnoca; 1 aor.
pass. cvvepornOnv; fr. Plat. and Aristot. down; prop. to
sound together, be in accord; of sounds and of musical
instruments. In the N. T. trop. to be in accord, to har-
monize, 1. e. a. to agree together: mepi (as respects)
tivos, Mt. xviii. 19 (Dion. Hal. 2, 47); tui, with a thing,
Acts xv. 15 (often in Grk. auth.); to agree i. e. corre-
spond, of things congruous in nature, Lk. v. 36; pass.
cuvepornbn vir, foll. by an inf., it was agreed between you
to etc. Acts v. 9. b. to agree with one in making a
bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polyb., Diod.) :
peta Twos ex Snvapiov (see éx, II. 4), Mt. xx. 2; w.a dat.
of the pers. and gen. of the price, ibid. 13, (cvvepavnoer
per avTov tpidv AuTpav aonpov apyvpiov, Act. Thom.
§ 2).*
cup-pdvycis, -ews, 7, (cuppwvew), concord, agreement :
mpos twa, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. (Eccl. writ.) *
ocuppovia, -as, 7, (cvppwvos), [fr. Plat. down], music:
Lk. xv. 25. (Polyb. 26, 10,5; [plur. of ‘the music of
the spheres,’ Aristot. de caelo 2, 9 p. 290°, 22; al.]) *
cvppwvos, -ov, (cvv and dwvn), fr. [Hom. h. Mere. 51;
Soph. ], Plat., Aristot. down, harmonious, accordant, agree-
ing; To cvppwvor, thing agreed upon, compact, [ Epict.
diss. 1, 19, 27]: é« oupdwvov, by mutual consent, by
agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 [cf. W. 303 (285); B. § 139, 20]*
ocup-Ynpite: 1 aor. cuverndica; to compute, count up:
tas Tyas, Acts xix. 19. (Mid. ruvi, to vote with one, Ar-
stph. Lys. 142.) *
obp-puxos [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.) ], -ov, (ovv and
Wuxn), of one mind (Vulg. unanimis): of one accord,
Phil. ii. 2. (Ecel. writ.) *
ovv [the older form €vy is still found in some edd. in
composition (as £up-Baive, 1 Pet. iv. 12 Rec®; see L.
and S. s. v. init.; cf. 3, o,s)], a preposition; it is never
used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four
times (texts vary) ], Mark [some five times, or John (three
times) ], (who prefer pera), more frequently by Luke
598 oup
[(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39
times ; on the comparative frequency of these prepp. in
the classics, see L. and S.s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Da-
tive after it, and denotes accompaniment and fellowship,
whether of action, or of belief, or of condition and ex-
perience; (acc. to the grammarians [cf. Donaldson, New
Crat.§181; Kriger §68, 13,1; Kihner ii. p.438]; W.
391 (366), a fellowship far closer and more intimate
than that expressed by pera, although in the N. T.
this distinction is much oftener neglected than observed).
Latin cum, Eng. with.
I. 1. Passages in which the subject of an active
verb is said to be or to do something ovpv run; a.
phrases in which ovv is used of accompaniment: eiut
ovv Ti i. e. —1o be with one, to accompany one, Lk. vii. 12;
viii. 38 (Mk. v.18 per’ adrov) ; xxii. 56 (Mt. xxvi. 69 and
Mk. xiv. 67 pera); Acts xxvii. 2; fo associate with one,
Lk, xxiv. 44; Acts iv. 133 xin: 7s (hla) 2ac Colla s =
2 Pet. i.18; of cvv rim dvres, the attendants of one on a
journey, Mk. ii. 26 (Mt. xii. 4 and Lk. vi. 4 rots per’ adrod);
Acts xxii. 9; of ovv Ti sc. dvtes, — either the compan-
ions of one, Lk. v. 9; ix. 32; xxiv. 24, 33; with the noun
added, of ody euot mavtes adeAdoi, Gal. i. 2; Ro. xvi. 14;
or one’s colleagues, Acts v. 17, 21; of ody avit@ Te-
xvirat, his fellow-craftsmen, Acts xix. 383; eiyt ouy Tum, 10
be on one’s side, Acts xiv. 4 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5,77); to assist
one, n xapts Tov Oeov (7) adv eo, 1 Co. xv. 10. b.
ovy Tw joined to verbs of standing, sitting, going,
ete.: otadnva, Acts ii. 14; ornva, Acts iv.143; émornvat,
Lk. xx. 1; Acts xxiii. 27; xaOioa, Acts viii. 31; peévew,
Lk. i.56; xxiv. 29; Acts xxviii. 16; avamimrew, Lk. xxii.
14; yiverOa, to be associated with, Lk. 11. 13; mapayive-
oa, to arrive, Acts xxiv. 24; épyeoOa, Jn. xxi. 3; Acts
xi. 12; 2 Co.ix. 43; dmwépyeoOa, Acts v. 26; cicepyerOat,
Acts iii. 8; xxv. 23; elovévar, Acts xxi. 18; cuvepyerOat,
Acts xxi. 16; é&€pyeoOa, Jn. xviii. 1; Acts x. 23; xiv.
20; xvi.3; mopeverOa, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxiii. 32
[LT Tr WH dmépxyecOar]; xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 45 dc0-
deve, Lk. viii. 1 sq.; exmAeiv, Acts xviii. 18. with verbs
of living, dying, believing: pv, 1 Th. v. 10; amo-
Ovnokew, Mt. xxvi.35; Ro. vi. 8; meorevew, Acts xviii. 8.
with other verbs: Acts v. 1; xiv. 13; xx. 36; xxi.5;
Phil. ii. 22; Jas.i.11. 2. Passages in which one is
said to be the recipient of some action vv rim, or to be
associated with one to whom some action has reference:
—dative, revi ovv tux: as €S0€e tois dmoardédors adv Oy
Th exkAnoia, Acts xv. 22, where if Luke had said xat 6Ay
7H €kkAnoia he would have claimed for the church the
same rank as for the apostles; but he wishes to give to
the apostles the more influential position; the same ap-
plies also to Acts xxiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 1; Phil.
i. 1. Accusative, avy tui (which precedes) tia or te
(the pers. or thing added): Ro. viii. 32 (ctv aird, i. e.
since he has given him to us); Mk. xv. 27; 1 Co. x. 13;
Twa or tt ovv tun (the pers. or thing associated or
added): Mt. xxv. 27; Mk. viii. 34; 2 Co.i.215; Col. ii
13; iv.9; rl ody ru, a thing with its power or result,
Gal. v. 24; Col. iii. 9: ris or 7} oy rim after passives, as
ouv 599
Mt. xxvii. 38; Mk. ix. 4; Lk. xxiii. 32; 1 Co. xi. 32;
Gal. iii. 9; Col. iii. 3sq.; 1 Th.iv. 17. 3. It stands
where xai might have been used (cf. B. 331 (285)):
éyévero Spy . . « lovdaiwy ody rois dpxovow airay (equiv.
to cal ray apy. avr.), Acts xiv. 5; add, Lk. xxiii. 11;
Acts iii. 4; x.2; xxiii. 15; Eph. iii. 18. 4. Of that
which one has or carries with him, or with which he is
furnished or equipped (adv dppaow, 3 Mace. ii. 7; ody
émAdas, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3,54; many other exx. fr. Grk. writ.
are given by Passow s. v. B. I. 2.a.; [L. and S. I. 4]):
ovv TH XapiTe TavTn, carrying with him this gift or bounty,
2 Co. viii. 19 RG T cod. Sin. (L Tr WH ev rH xap. 7. in
procuring [R. V. in the matter of] this benefit) ; adv 77
Suvupet Tov Kupiov nev "I. Xp. equipped with the power
of our Lord Jesus Christ, 1 Co. v. 4 (so ace. to many in-
terpreters [cf. W. 391 (366)]; but since the N.'T. writ-
ers are wont to designate the powers and virtues with
which one is equipped by the preposition éy, it is more
correct to connect adv rH Suv. with cuvaydevrwy, so that
7 Svvaputs T- kupiov is personified and represented as the
third subject in the gathering; cf. Mt. xviii. 20 [see
Svvayts, a. sub fin.]). 5. ov Xpior@ yr, to live
with Christ, i.e. united (in spiritual bonds) to him, and
to lead a strong life by virtue of this union, 2 Co. xiii. 4;
avv (Rec.) xeupi dyyédov (see xeip), Acts vii. 35 LT Tr
WH. 6. Of the union which arises from the ad-
dition or accession of one thing to another: ody act
tovtors, our ‘beside all this’? [W. 391 (366) ], Lk. xxiv. 21
(Neh. v. 18 ; 3 Mace. i. 22; Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5). a
On the combination Gua civ, 1 Th. iv. 17; v. 10, see
(pa, fin.
II. In composition ody denotes 1. associa-
tion, community, fellowship, participation: guvotkéo,
ovveyul, ovyyerns, oTvupophos, avqv, cupmacyxew, ovy-
xpacda, ete. 2. together, i. e. several persons or
things united or all in one; as, ovyxepavvyp, ovyKdeio,
ovykarew, svAAEy@, TvyKOUIC@, ete. 3. completely:
ovyximT@, cvyKkahitTa, etc. 4. with one’s self, i. e.
in one’s mind: ovAAvreopat [but see the word], cvvouda,
auveldnots, auvtnpew; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 642 sq.
Once or twice in the N.T. after verbs compounded with
ovv the preposition is repeated before the object [W.
§ 52, 4,15]: Mt. xxvii. 44 L T Tr WH;; Col. ii. 13.
As to its Form, ovy in composition before 8, p, 7, d,
yy, passes into cup-, before X into ovA-, before y, x, x into
avy-; before ¢ [and a foll. by a consonant] it is elided,
hence cu¢jv, cu(ntéw, cvetavpda, cvoTedAdw. But in the
older manuscripts assimilation and elision are often ne-
elected (cf. év, III. fin.). Following their authority, LT
Tr WH write cuv(aw, cur(ntéw, ocuv¢ntntns, avvtvyos,
T WH. ovvBacr-
5
Aevo, cuvyvopun, cvvKdOnpat, cvvKabifw, cvvKakoTabew, avY-
TVvaTAVPOw, TVVITPATLATHS, TUVTW[OS ;
KakovxXéo, TvvKAaAe@, TUVKaUTT®, TUVKaTABaive, TvVKaTABe-
ots, cuvkataTiOnus, cuveataWnpiCw, TvvKEpavvupt, TVVKAEL@,
CUVKANpOVOpOS, TUVKOLV@VE@, GUVKOLVwVds, TUVKpLV@, (AoUr-
Kpiros), cvvkUTT@, TVVAAAEw, TYVAUTEW, TUYpAONTHS, TUYPAp-
TUPEW, TUVPETOYOS, TUYWLNTHS, OVVTAGEw, BUYTApayivopat,
GvvTapakadéw. ovyTapadapBava, cvvTadpepl, TvvTdcxa,
ouvaya
ouvreptAapBava, guvrviyw cvvroditns, TUVTOpEevopat, Tuy
mpecButepus, cuvuTevatw, TuvaTuixew, oUYpnpt, TuVpva,
guvyaipo, guvypdopat, ouvyéw, aivvxos; L Tr mrg.
T avvpoppita, cvvonpoyr ;
WH oauvBadAo, cvvBiBalo, cuvpepifa, ovvexnparifa.
ovvdntnats } Tr cuvorarikés ;
But L T Tr Wi retain ovyyévera, cvyyerns, ovyxadirrea,
avykupia, cvyxvats, TVANEyw, TUUBaivo, ocupBovrevo, cup-
BovAtov, aipBovdros, cupmudns, gvpmdcLov, cunpepo, Tip-
opos, cundudrérns, aipputos, cuppovea, suppavnats
auppovia, cippavos (dovppavos), cvaTpepw, svarpopy ;
LT Tr cuppepifo; LT WH ovyyevis, cvoratixés; L
Tr WH cvuppophpito, cvppophpos, avaonpov; L Tr avy-
youn, cvykdOnua, cvyKabilw, cvykakorabew, avyKaKovxEw,
ovykahew, ovykduTTo, TvyKaTaBaiva, ovykatdbeots, ovyKa-
ratlOnut, cvykxatraynpilw, cvykepavvupt, cvyk\€elw, TvyKAN-
povomos, GvyKOWwVvew, TVYyKOLYMVS, TUYKPiV@, TUYKUTTA,
avyxaipw, TvyXew, TvyXpdopat, TANAAE@, TUAAUTEW, TUB
Baddr\w, cupBaciredo, cupBiBalo, cuppabntns, Tuppaptr-
pew, TUUpETOYOS, TUBpYLNTHS, TUuTAIew, TUpTapayivopat,
oupmapakaXéw, cuprapadapBavo, ovpTapeml, TUETATXa,
cuprrepirauBavo, cupmAnpsw, cupTViyw, TupToONTHs, TUp-
Topevopat, cuumpedBvtepos, avupnut, Tvnpia, dvuYuxos,
avotevatw, avotorxew; I, cvdAdAapBava, ocvoxnuatifo.
Tdf. is not uniform in guvAAapBdva, cvpBadrrw, cvpSiBalo,
ovppophos, cvpmAnpdw, cvexnuati{w; nor Tr in cvAdap-
Bave, cvoxnpati¢w; nor WH in ovAdapBava, cvprAnpde.
These examples show that assimilation takes place
chiefly in those words in which the preposition has lost,
more or less, its original force and blends with the
word to which it is prefixed into a single new idea; as
avpBovdtov, cvppéper, cvppopos. Cf. fAlex. Buttmann
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 180]; Philip Buttmann
(the son) ibid. p. 811 sq. [But see Dr. Gregory’s expo-
sition of the facts in the Proleg. to Tdf. p. 73 sq.; Dr.
Hort in WH. App. p. 149; Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att.
Inschr. § 24.]
ovy-dyw ; fut. cuvd€w; 2 aor. cvvyyayov; Pass., pres.
cuvayopnar; pf. ptep. cvyvnypevos; 1 aor. cumyOnv; 1 fut.
ovvaxOjcopa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for Dx, Y2P
and 7'3p ; a. to gather together, to gather: with an
ace. of the thing, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. vi. 12 sq.; xv. 6; har-
vests, dev, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; with eis re added, Mt. iii. 12;
vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; mov, Lk. xii. 173 éxet, Lk.
xii. 18; cuvayew kaprov eis (anv aimmov (see xapmés, 2
d.), Jn. iv. 86; cuvdyw pera twos, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23;
to draw together, collect: fishes, —of a net in which they
are caught, Mt. xiii. 47. b. to bring together, assem-
ble, collect: aiypadwoiay (i. e. alypad@rous), Rev. xiii. 10
RG; eis aiypadwoiar, i. e. Twas, ot dow aiypddrwra, Rev.
xiii. 10 Led. min.; to join together, join in one (those
previously separated): ra réxva tod Oeod ta Steoxopme-
opéva eis ev, Jn. xi. 52, (auraEew eis Ev ra €Ovn Kat Trouoew
guriay, Dion. Hal. 2, 45; dros eis pidiav ovvdovat ta
€Oyn, ibid.) ; to gather together by convoking: twds, Mt.
ii. 4; xxii. 10; cuvédSpiov, Jn. xi. 47; rHv excAnoiav, Acts
xiv. 27; 7d Anos, Acts xv. 30; twas eis with an acc.
of place, Rev. xvi. 16; es rov wéAenov, in order to en-
gage in war, Rev. xvi. 14: xx. 8: émi twa, unto one, Mt.
TvUVaywy?)
xxvii. 27. Pass. to be gathered i.e. come together, gather,
meet, [cf. B. 52 (45) ]: absol., Mt. xxii. 41; xxvii. 17; Mk.
ii2; Lkicxxil. 663: Actsxill, 445) xv. Gsuxx.7; 1 Co.-v.
4; Rev. xix. 19; with the addition of e’s and an ace. of
place, Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts iv. 5; eis deimvov, Rev. xix. 17;
éumpoobev twos, Mt. xxv. 32; émi twa, unto one, Mk. v.
21; emi ro avdro [see avros, III. 1], Mt. xxii. 834; Acts iv.
26; émi twa, against one, Acts iv. 27; mpés tia, unto
one, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi. 30; vil.1; ey
with dat. of the place, Acts iv. 31; év 7 exxAnoia, Acts
xi. 26 ; pera rwos, Mt. xxviii. 12; with adverbs of place:
ob, Mt. xviii. 20; Acts xx. 8; dérov, Mt. xxvi. 57; Jn.
xx. 19 RG; éxet, Jn. xviii. 2; Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii.
37 RGL. c. to lead with one’s. self sc. unto one’s
home, i. e.to recewe hospitably, to entertain, [A.V. to take
in]: €evov, Mt. xxv. 35, 88, 43, (with the addition of eis
Thy oikiay, eis Tov otkov, Deut. xxii. 2; Josh. ii. 18; Judg.
xix. 18, etc.). [Comp.: ém-ouvaya. | *
ovy-aywyy, -7s, 7, (cuvayw), Sept. for IP and very
often for 73y. In Grk. writ. a bringing together, gather-
ing (as of fruits), @ contracting; an assembling together of
men. In the N. T. 1. an assembly of men: rood
Satava, whom Satan governs, Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9. 2:
a synagogue, i. e. a. an assembly of Jews formally
gathered together to offer prayer and listen to the reading
and exposition of the Holy Scriptures; assemblies of the
sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards
also on the second and fifth days of every week [see
reff. below]: Lk. xii. 11; Acts ix. 2; xiii.43; xxvi. 11;
the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians
formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2 (Epiph.
haer. 30, 18 says of the Jewish Christians ocuvaywyiy
ovrot kaXovot THY €avToy exkAnolay Kai ovxt exkAnoiav [ cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 192]); [ef. Trench, Syn. § 1,
and esp. Harnack’s elaborate note on Herm. mand. 11,
9 (less fully and accurately in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. f.
wiss. Theol. for 1876, p. 102 sqq.) respecting the use of
the word by the church Fathers of the 2d, 3d, and 4th
centuries; cf. Hilgenfeld’s comments on the same in his
‘Hermae Pastor’, ed. alt. p. 183 sq. ]. b. the build-
ing where those solemn Jewish assemblies are held (Hebr.
noj20 3, i. e. ‘the house of assembly’). Synagogues
seem to date their origin from the Babylonian exile. In
the time of Jesus and the apostles every town, not only
in Palestine but also among the Gentiles if it contained
a considerable number of Jewish inhabitants, had at least
one synagogue, the larger towns several or even many.
That the Jews held trials and even inflicted punishments
in them, is evident from such pass. as Mt. x.17; xxiii. 34;
WOS, sete GE Wey oste Wile Serableig” AVE ee WR” orahiy IE
xxvi.11. They are further mentioned in Mt. iv. 23; vi.
2. 5 1kt 85s Mis KOA XI 6 ele. 23.29, 39).
iii. 1; vi. 2; xii. 39; Lk. iv. 15 sq. 20, 28, 33, 38, 44; vi. 6;
Vii. 5; viii. 41; [xi. 43]; xiii. 10; xx. 46; Jn. vi. 59; xviii.
20 [here the anarthrous (so G LT Tr WH) sing. has an
indef. or generic force (R. V. txt. in synagogues)]; Acts
Vis Oeeix. 20); Soi. dd, ADS ec. clvemlaeavere lec eeCVal.
5 UU (Gee a athe VENI ANS Ss ab's IR sah, WG Seis hs
600
cuvar\r\aoow
(Joseph. antt. 19, 6,3; b. j. 2, 14, 4. [5; 7, 3, 3; Philo,
quod omn. prob. lib. § 12]). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syn-
agogen; Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xv. p. 299 sqq.; Schiirer,
N. T. Zeitgesch. § 27 (esp. ii.) ; Kneucker in Schenkel
v. p. 443 sq.; [Hamburger, Real-Encyel. ii. p. 1142 sqq.;
Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Synagogue; EHdersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. x.].*
ovv-ayovifonar: 1 aor. mid. inf. cuvayevicacda; fr.
Thue. and Xen. down; to strive together with one, to help
one in striving: Twi €v Tats mpooevxais, in prayers, i. e. to
offer intense prayers with one, Ro. xv. 30; in what sense
intense prayer may be likened to a struggle, see Philippi
ad loc. [(cf. dyovi¢. in Col. iv. 12 and Bp. Lghtft.’s note) ].*
ovv-abdéw, -o; 1 aor. ovrmOAnoa; to strive at the same
time with another: with a dat. commodi [ef. W. § 31, 4],
for something, Phil. i. 27; revi &v run, together with one in
something, Phil. iv.3. (univ. to heip, assist, Diod. 3, 4.) *
cvv-abpoitw: 1 aor. ptep. cuvabpoicas ; pf. pass. ptep.
sumOporpevos; fr.[ Eur., Arstph., al.], Isocr. down; Sept.
chiefly for Y2p and er to gather together with others;
to assemble: twas, Acts xix. 25; pass. to be gathered to-
gether i. e. come together, Lk. xxiv. 383 RG; Acts xii. 12.*
cvv-aipw; 1 aor. inf. cvvapar; 1. to take up to-
gether with another or others. 2. to bring together
with others: déyov, lo cast up or settle accounts, to make a
reckoning with, (an expression not found in Grk. auth.),
Mt. xviii. 23 sq.; wera twos, Mt. xxv. 19.*
TVV-ALXLGAWTOS, -ov, 6, a fellow-prisoner (Vulg. concap-
tivus): Ro. xvi. 7; Col. iv. 10; Philem. 23, (Leian. asin.
27). (Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.; Fritzsche, Com. on
Rom. vol. i. p. xxi. note. ] *
cvv-aKodovdew, -d; 1mpf. cuynKodovovy; 1 aor. wuvnKo-
Aovbnoa; fr. Arstph., Thuc., Isocr. down; to follow to-
gether with others, to accompany: twi, one, Mk. v. 37
[where Lehm. dkodovO.]; xiv. 51 LT Tr WH; Lk. xxiii.
49.*
cvv-arite: (vv, and ddi¢o fr. dAns, crowded, in a mass;
[ef. dAvouws, init.]); to gather together, assemble; pass.
pres. ptep. cuvadrCopevos; to be assembled, meet with: tii,
with one, Acts i. 4, where adrois is to be supplied. (Hdt.,
Xen., [ Plut. de placit. phil. 902], Joseph., Leian., Jambl.)
[But Meyer defends the rendering given by some of the
ancient versions (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) eating with (de-
riving the word from ovvados), so A. V. and R. V. mrg.;
such passages as Manetho 5, 339; Clem. hom. 13, 4 (al-
though Dressel after cod. Ottob. reads here wvvavA.— yet
the recogn. 7, 29 renders cibum sumimus) ; Chrysost. iii.
88 c. (ed. Migne iii. i. 104 mid.); 89 a. (ibid. bottom) ;
91d. (ibid. 107 mid.), seem to give warrant for this in-
terpretation; ef. Valckenaer, Opusce. ii. p. 277 sq. But
see at lencth Woolsey in the Bib. Sacr. for Oct. 1882,
pp- 605-618.] *
ovv-ahrdoow: (see kata\Adoow) ; to reconcile (Thuc.,
Xen., Plat., Dio Cass.; in diff. senses by diff. prof. auth.) :
aumAXagaev aitovs eis eipnuyy, (Vulg. reconciliabat, i. e.
sought to reconcile), conative impf. [cf. B. 205 (178);
R. V. would have set them at one again], Acts vii. 26 L. T
Tr WH [see ouvedaivo |.*
}
ovvavaBaww
cvv-ava-Batye: 2 aor. cuvaveBnv; to ascend at the same
time, come up together with to a higher place: rwi, with
one, foll. by efs with the acc. of the place, Mk. xv. 41;
Acts xiii. 31. (Hdt., Xen., Dion. Hal., Strabo, al.; Sept.
several times for my.) 4
ovv-avd-Ketar; 3 pers. plur. impf. cuvavéxewro; to re-
cline together, feast together, [A. V. ‘sit down with’, ‘sit at
meat with’, (cf. avdxesar) |: Twi, with one, Mt. ix. 10;
Mk. ii. 15; Lk. xiv. 10; Jn. xii. 2 Ree.; of cuvavakeipevor,
[‘they that sat at meat with’], the guests, Mt. xiv. 9;
Mk. vi. 22, 26[RGL]; Lk. vii.49; xiv.15. (3 Mace.
v. 39]; eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
cvv-ava-piyvunr: to mix up together; Pass., pres. impv.
2 pers. plur. -uiyvuade; inf. -piyyycOa; reflex. and met-
aph. tii, to keep company with, be intimate with, one:
PP Con ve 95-115. 2 Th. iil..14. here BT -cbe. Li Tr Wii
-c6ai}. (Plut. Philop. 21; [Sept. Hos. vii. 8 Alex.].) *
ovv-ava-ravopat: 1 aor. subj. cuvavarravowpar; to take
rest together with: twi, with one, Is. xi. 6; to sleep together,
to lie with, of husband and wife (Dion. Hal., Plut.); met-
aph. revi, to rest or refresh one’s spirit with one (i. e. to give
and get refreshment by mutual intercourse), Ro. xv. 32
[Lehm. om. }.* ig
ovv-avTdw, -@: fut. cvvayrnow; 1 aor. cvvnvtnoa; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for p39, waa, MIP, DAP, ete.; to meet
with: twi, Lk. ix. [18 WH mrg.], 37; xxii. 10; Acts x.
25; Heb. vii. 1 [cf. B. 293 (252)], 10; trop. of events,
to happen, to befall: Acts xx. 22 (Plut. Sulla 2; mid. ra
avvavt@peva, Polyb. 22, 7,14; the Hebr. mp also is used
ofevents;) Mecles..ii. 14; ix.11; ete:).*
cvy-dyTyots, -ews, 7, a meeting with (Eurip. Ion 535;
Dion. Hal. antt. 4, 66): eis cuvdvrnciv rim, to meet one
[B. § 146, 3], Mt. viii. 34 RG (for DSP, Gen. xiv. 17;
mex G5) Exo 1y.12 75 xvii. 7).*
ovv-avTi-AapBavopar; 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing.
avvavTiAaBnrat; to lay hold along with, to strive to obtain
with others, help in obtaining, (tis éhevbepias, Diod. 14, 8);
to take hold with another (who is laboring), hence univ.
to help: twi. one, Lk. x. 40; Ro. viii. 26, (Ps. Ixxxviii.
(ixxxix.) 22; Ex. xviii. 22; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 4).*
cuv-am-dywo: Pass., pres. ptep. cuvaraydopeves; 1 aor.
ovvarnxOnv; to lead away with or together: trmov, Xen.
Cyr. 8,3, 23; rpunpecs, Hell. 5, 1, 23; rév Aadv ped Eavrod,
Sept. Ex. xiv. 6; pass. metaph. to be carried away with:
with dat. of the thing, i. e. by a thing, so as to experi-
ence with others the force of that which carries away
(Zosim. hist. 5, 6, 9 airy 9 Saaptn cvvarnyero th Kowy THs
‘EAAdOos dA@oet), to follow the impulse of a thing to
what harmonizes with it, Gal. ii. 13; 2 Pet. iii. 17; to
suffer one’s self to be carried away together with (some-
thing that carries away), rots tarewvois (opp. to ra tyra
poveiv), i.e. to yield or submit one’s self to lowly things,
conditions, employments, — not to evade their power,
Roz xtc 16.*
ocvv-atro-SynoKw: 2 aor. cuvareOavov; to die together;
with dat. of the pers. to die with one (Sir. xix. 10, and
often in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Mk. xiv. 31; se.
buds epol, that ye may die together with me, i.e. that my
601
ovuVoew
love to you may not leave me even were I appointed to
die, 2 Co. vii. 3; sc. 76 Xpror@ [cf. W. 143 (136) ], to meet
death as Christ did for the cause of God, 2 Tim. ii. 11.*
ovv-arr-ddAvpt: 2 aor. mid. cuvar@Aduny ; fr. Hdt. down;
to destroy together (Ps. xxv. (xxvi.) 9); mid. to perish
together (to be slain along with): tui, with one, Heb. xi.
oiler
ovy-atro-oTéAAw: 1 aor. cuvaréotetdu; to send with:
twa, 2 Co. xii. 18. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen., Dem., Plut.,
alse
ovv-appodroyew, -: pres. pass. ptcp. cvvappoAoyovpevos ;
(appoddyos binding, joining; fr. dpuds a joint, and A€ya);
to join closely together; to frame together: oixodopn, the
parts of a building, Eph. ii. 21; c@pa, the members of
the body, Eph. iv. 16. (Eccles. writ.; classic writ. use
ouvappoocew and cuvappdgerv.) *
ovy-aprate: 1 aor. ournptraca ; plupf. OVUUNPTAKELY 5 1
aor. pass. cuynpracOnv ; to seize by force: twa, Acts Vi.
12; xix. 29; to catch or lay hold of (one, so that he is
no longer his own master), Lk. viii. 29; to seize by force
and carry away, Acts xxvii.15. (Tragg., Arstph., Xen.,
al.) *
ovv-avédve: fo cause to grow together; pres. inf. pass.
cuvavéaverba, to grow together: Mt xiii. 30. (Xen.,
Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
cvvB-, see cupB- and at», IT. fin.
ouvy-, see cuyy- and ody, II. fin.
ovv-Seopos, -ov, 6, (cuvdew) ; 1. that which binds to-
gether, a band, bond: of the ligaments by which the mem-
bers of the human body are united together (Eur. Hipp.
199; Tim. Locr. p. 100 b. [i.e. 3, 3, p. 386 ed. Bekk.] ;
Aristot. h. a. 10; 7, 3 p. 638°, 9; Galen), Col. ii. 19
[where see Bp. Lghtft.]; trop.: 76 cuvdéope tis eipyvns;
i. €. 7 elpnyn as cvvdecpe, Eph. iv. 3 (ovvdeopos edvotas
x. pirias, Plut. Num. 6); #ris €ori ovvd. ris TedevoTNTOs,
that in which all the virtues are so bound together that
perfection is the result, and not one of them is wanting
to that perfection, Col. iii. 14 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].
eis avSecpov adixias 6p® oe dvta, I see that you have
fallen into (cf. efi, V. 2 a. p. 179°, and see below) the
bond of iniquity, i.e. forged by iniquity to fetter souls,
Acts viii. 23 (the phrase ovvd. adikias occurs in another
sense in Is. lviii. 6). 2. that which is bound to-
gether, a bundle: prop. odvd. émurtoday, dian. 4, 12,
11 [6 ed. Bekk.]; hence some interpreters think that
by ovv6. dduxias, in Acts viii. 23 above, Simon is described
as “a bundle of iniquity”, compacted as it were of iniq-
uity, (just as Cic. in Pison. 9, 21 calls a certain man “ani-
mal ex omnium scelerum importunitate . .. concretum”’);
but besides the circumstance that this interpretation is
extremely bold, no examples can be adduced of this
tropical use of the noun.*
cvv-Sé0: in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down; 1. to tie
together, to bind together. ®. to bind or fasten on all
sides. 3. to bind just as (i. e. jointly with) another :
pf. pass. ptep. as cvvdedepevor, as fellow-prisoners [A.V.
as bound with them], Heb. xiii. 3 (cuvdedeuevos TH oF
voxow, Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 3).*
ouvooeata
cvv-Sofd{w: 1 aor. pass. cvvedo£ac On; 1. to ap-
prove together, join in approving: vépot ouvdedSoEacpevor
ind ravrav, Aristot. pol. 5, 7 (9), 20 p. 1310*, 15. 2.
to glorify together (Vulg. conglorifico) : sc. abv Xpiar@, to
be exalted to the same glory to which Christ has been
raised, Ro. viii. 17.*
ovv-Sovdos, -ov, 6, (avy and dovdos), a fellow-servant ;
one who serves the same master with another; thus used
of a. the associate of a servant (or slave) in the
proper sense: Mt. xxiv. 49. b. one who with others
serves (ministers to) a king: Mt. xviii. 28, 29, 31,33. — ¢.
the colleague of one who is Christ’s servant in publishing
the gospel: Col.i. 7; iv. 7 [(where cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]. d.
one who with others acknowledges the same Lord, Jesus,
and obeys his commands: Rev. vi. 11. e. one who
with others is subject to the same divine authority in the
Messianic economy: so of angels as the fellow-servants
of Christians, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. (Moeris says, p.
273, duddSovdos arrik@s, svvSovdos EAAnuikos. But the
word is used by Arstph., Eur., Lysias.) *
cvvdpopy, -7s, 1), (suvTpex@), a running together, con-
course, esp. hostile or riotous: Acts xxi. 30. (Aristot.
rhetor. 3, 10 p. 1411%, 29; Polyb., Diod., al.; 3 Mace.
iii. 8.) *
ouv-eye(pw : 1 aor. ournyerpa; 1 aor. pass. ovrmyepOny ;
to raise together, to cause torise together; Vulg.conresuscito
[also conresurgo, resurgo]|; (ra memraxora, 4 Macc. ii. 14;
pass. to rise together from their seats, Is. xiv. 9; trop.
Avmas kat Opyvovs, Plut. mor. p. 117 ¢,.); in the N. T.
trop. to raise up together from moral death (see Oava-
tos, 2) to a new and blessed life devoted to God: nuas
T® Xpior@ (risen from the dead, because the ground of
the new Christian life lies in Christ’s resurrection), Eph.
ii. 6; Col. iii. 1; €» Xprore@, Col. it. 12.*
cvvedprov, -ov, 76, (cvv and edpa; hence prop. ‘a sitting
together’), in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down, any assembly
(esp. of magistrates, judges, ambassadors), whether con-
vened to deliberate or to pass judgment; Vulg. concilium ;
in the Scriptures 1. any session or assembly of per-
sons deliberating or adjudicating (Prov. xxii. 10; Ps. xxv.
(xxvi.) 4; Jer. xv. 17; 2 Mace. xiv. 5; 4 Mace. xvii.
17): ouvnyayov ovvedpiov, [A. V. gathered a council], Jn.
xi. 47. 2. spec. a. the Sanhedrin, the great council
at Jerusalem (‘Talm. }°.7793D), consisting of seventy-one
members, viz. scribes (see ypauparevs, 2), elders, prom-
inent members of the high-priestly families (hence called
apxvepeis; see apxtepevs, 2), and the high-priest, the pres-
ident of the body. The fullest periphrasis for Sanhe-
drin is found in Mt. xxvi. 3 RG; Mk. xiv. 43, 53, (viz.
of adpxtepets Kal of ypappareis Kal of mpeaBurepor). The
more important causes were brought before this tribunal,
inasmuch as the Roman rulers of Judea had left to it
the power of trying such cases, and also of pronouncing
sentence of death, with the limitation that a capital
sentence pronounced by the Sanhedrin was not valid
unless it were confirmed by the Roman procurator
(cf. Jn. xviii. 31; Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1). The Jews
trace the origin of the Sanhedrin to Num. xi. 16 sq. The
602
/
cuveldnalg
Sanhedrin [A. V. council] is mentioned in Mt. v. 22;
xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv.55; xv.1; Lk. xxii.66; Acts iv. 15;
Ve 2512. ty d45/4 1h: viol lowest OO xxl ol, Go uonAOs
28; xxiv. 20; used [(as in class. Grk.)] of the place
of meeting in Acts iv. 15. b. the smaller tribunal
or council (so A. V.) which every Jewish town had for
the decision of the less important cases (see xpiots, 4) :
Mig. ac. 7s) Miki sii 79, Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syne-
drium; Leyrer in Herzog ed.1s. v. Synedrium [Strack
in ed. 2]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 23, II.,
II. [and in Riehm p. 1595 sqq.]; Holtzmann in Schenkel
v. p. 446sqq.; [BB. DD.s. v. Sanhedrim (esp. Ginsburg
in Alex.’s Kitto); Hamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. pp. 1147
-1155; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 553 sqq.; Far-
rar, Life of Christ, Excurs. xiii. ].*
ovv-elSnois, -ews, 7, (cvveidov), Lat. conscientia, [lit.
‘joint-knowledge’; see ovr, II. 4], i.e. a. the con-
sciousness of anything: with a gen of the obj., ra@v dyap-
tiv, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (rod puaous, Diod.
4, 65; ouveidnots evyevns, consciousness of nobility; a
soul mindful of its noble origin, Hdian. 7, 1, 8 [3 ed.
Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what
is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and
shun the latter, commending the one, condemning the other ;
conscience: with a gen. of the subj., 7 o. twos, Ro. ii.
15 (where the idea of 4 cuveiSnots is further explained
. 7) kal avoNoyoupevwn [cf. W. 580 (539);
see drooyéopat, 2, and cuppaptupéw]); Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co.
wall. 7. [ief.. W.:§ 30; 1a.]; 10,12) x. 295 BiCom sive
v.11; Heb. ix. 14 (9 rov @avaAov ouveidyats, Philo, fragm.,
vol. ii. p. 659 ed. Mangey [vi. p. 217 sq. ed. Richter]) ;
7 idia ouveidnots, 1 Tim. iv. 2; adn ovveid. i. q. Gdov
tivdos ouv. 1 Co. x. 293; dia tH cuveidnow, for conscience’
sake, because conscience requires it (viz. the conduct
in question), Ro. xiii. 5; in order not to occasion
scruples of conscience (in another), 1 Co. x. 283; pndev
avakpivew 6a TH ovveid. (anxiously) questioning nothing,
as though such questioning were demanded by con-
science, 1 Co. x. 25, 27; dua cuveidnow deov, because con-
science is impressed and governed by the idea of God
(and so understands that griefs are to be borne accord-
ing to God’s will), 1 Pet. ii. 19; 7 ovveid. rod cid@dov, a
conscience impressed and controlled by an idea of the
idol (i.e. by a notion of the idol’s existence and power),
1 Co. viii. 7 Ree.; reXec@oai tiva Kata THY cuvetdnow (sc.
avtov), so to perfect one that his own conscience is sat-
isfied, i.e. that he can regard himself as free from guilt,
Heb. ix. 9; edéyxeoOat vd ths ovv. In. viii. 9 (b7d rod
cuveddros, Philo de Josepho § 9 fin.; cuvéyeoOat tH our
6. Sap. xvii. 10); ouveidnars is said paprupeiv, Ro. ix.
1; ouppaprupetv, Ro. ii. 15; 7d papripiov rns ovv. 2 Co.
ia: With epithets: dadevns, not strong enough to
distinguish clearly between things lawful for a Christian
and things unlawful, 1 Co. viii. 7,cf.10; ouveid. dyadn,
a conscience reconciled to God, 1 Pet. iii. 21; free from
guilt, consciousness of rectitude, of right conduct, Acts
xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, (Hdian. 6, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]) ; yew
ovveid. dyadny, 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16, (€v dyaOy our
by kal pera&d..
UVELOOV
ed. irapxewv, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 41,1); éyew ovv. xadjy,
Heb. xiii. 18 ; cvv. kadapa, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2'Tim. i. 3, (Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 7, cf. dyvy avy. ibid. 1, 3; Kkadapds ry ovr
evdnoet, Ionat. ad Trall. 7, 2) ;
16; movnpa, a mind conscious of wrong-doing, Leb. x.
22 (Lev cuvesdnoes mo npa, ‘Teaching’ ete. 4, 14]; dmpe-
ms, Leian. amor. 4). 1) wuveidnors Ka@api¢erat amo Krh.
Heb. ix. 14; podvveras, 1 Co. viii. 7; pucaiverar, Tit. i. 15,
ampookoros, Acts XXiv.
(undev Exovoiws WevderOar nde puaivery THY avTOv TuVELON-
ow, Dion. Hal. jud. Thue. 8. daow npiv 9 cuveidnots
6eds, Menand. 597 p. 103 ed. Didot; Bporots dmacw 9 ovvr-
eidnats Oeds, ibid. 654 p. 101 ed. Didot ; Epictet. fragm.
97 represents 7 ouveidnots as filling the same office in
adults which a tutor [madaywyds, q.v.] holds towards
boys; with Philo, Plutarch, and others, 76 cuvecdds is
more common. In Sept. once for p73, Eccl. x. 20; [i.q.
conscience, Sap. xvii. 11; ef. Delitzsch, Brief an d. Rom.
p-11]). Cf. esp. Jahnel, Diss. de conscientiae notione,
qualis fuerit apud veteres et apud Christianos usque ad
aevi medii exitum. Berol. 1862 [also the same, Ueber den
Begr. Gewissen in d. Griech. Philos. (Berlin, 1872) ];
Kidhler, Das Gewissen. I. die Entwickelung seiner Na-
men u. seines Begriffes. i. Alterth. u. N. T. (Halle, 1878) ;
[also in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Gewissen; Zezschwilz, Pro-
fancriicitét u.s.w. pp. 52-57; Schenkel, s. v. Gewissen
both in Herzog ed. 1, and in his BL.; P. Ewald, De
vocis guy. ap. script. Novi Test. vi ac potestate (pp. 91;
1883); other reff. in Schaff-Herzog, s. v. Conscience ].*
cvv-eidov, ptep. cuvmdav; pf. civoda, ptep. fem. gen.
ovvedvias (Acts v.2 R G,-y7s LT Tr WH; ef. B. 12 (11);
[Tdf. Proleg. p.117; WH. App. p.156]); (see etd) ; fr.
Hdt. down ; 1. to see (have seen) together with oth-
ers. 2. to see (have seen) in one’s mind, with one’s
self (cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 120; on Mark
pp: 36 and 78; [see ovv, II. 1 and 4]), i. e. to understand,
perceive, comprehend: cvvdav, when he had understood
it, Acts xii. 12 [A.V. considered]; xiv. 6 [became aware],
(2 Mace. iv. 41; xiv. 26,30; 3 Mace. v.50; Polyb. 1, 4,
6; 3, 6,9; ete.; Joseph. antt. 7, 15,1; b.j. 4, 5,4; Plut.
Them. 7). Perfect cvvoSa [cf. cvy, u.s.] 1. to
know with another, be privyto [so A.V.]: Actsv.2. 2.
to know in one’s mind or with one’s self; to be conscious of:
Ti euauT@, 1 Co. iv. 4 [R. V. know nothing against myself
(cf. Wright, Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v. ‘ By’)] (ry
aduxiav, Joseph. antt. 1, 1,4; exx. fr, Grk. writ. are given
by Passow s. v. cvvowda, a.; [L. and S. s. v. atvoida, 2];
foll. by 6re, [Dion. Hal. ii. 995, 9]; Barn. ep. 1, (4) 3).*
ovv-ept, ptep. gen. plur. masc. cvvdvrev; impf. 3 pers.
plur. cvvqoay; (cir, and eiui to be) ; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 270
down ; to be with: twi, one, Lk. ix. 18 [WH mre. cuvnyrn-
cay]; Acts xxii. 11.*
ovy-ent, ptcp. sumer; (ovv, and ete to go); fr. Hom.
down; to come together: Lk. viii. 4.*
ovv-cio-epxopn.at: 2 aor. cuverandOov; to enter together:
Twi, with one, —foll. by an ace. of the place, Jn. vi. 22;
Xvili. 15. (Hur., Thuce., Xen., al.; Sept.) *
cvv-éxdypos, -ov, 6, 7, (avy, and ékdnunos away from one’s
people), a fellow-traveller, companion in travel: Acts
608
Guvepyos
xix. 29; 2 Co. viii. 19. ([Diod. fr. lib. 37, 5,1 and 4 ed:
Dind.]; Joseph. vit.14; Plut. Oth. 5; Palaeph. fab. 46, 4.)*
ouv-ex-ekTds, -7, -dv, (see exAexrds), elected or chosen
(by God to eternal life) together with: 1 Pet. v. 13.*
ovv-eAatvw: 1 aor. cuvnAaca; fr. Hom. down; to drive
together, to compel; trop. to constrain by exhortation,
urge: twa es eipnyny, to be at peace again, Acts vii. 26
RG (eis rov ths coias epwra, Ael. v. h. 4, 15).*
ovv-eTl-papTupew, -, ptcp. gen. sing. masc. cvveripap-
tupourtos ; to attest together with; to join in bearing wit-
ness, to unite in adding testimony: Heb. ii. 4. (Aristot.,
Polyb., [Plut.], Athen., Sext. Emp.; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
23, 5; 43, 1.) *
ovv-er-riOnpr: 2 aor. mid. cuverebéunv; to place upon
(or near) together with, help in putting on; mid. to attack
Jointly, to assail together, set upon with, (see émuriOnut,
2b.): Acts xxiv.9 GLTTrWH[RV. joined in the
charge] (so in Thue. 6, 10; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,3; Plat.
Phileb. p. 16 a.; Polyb. 5, 78, 4; Diod. 1, 21).*
ovv-eropar: impf. cuverdunv; fr. Hom. down; to fol-
low with, to accompany: twi, one, Acts xx. 4.*
ouvepyéw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. curynpyer; (cuvepyds,
q. v.); fr. Eur., Xen., Dem. down; Vulg. codperor [(in
2 Co. vi. 1 adjuvo)]; to work together, help in work, be a
partner in labor: 1 Co. xvi. 16; 2 Co. vi. 1; to put forth
power together with and thereby to assist, Mk. xvi. 20;
tui, with one 4 miatis cuynpyer Tos epyots, faith (was
not inactive, but by coworking) caused Abraham to pro-
duce works, Jas. ii. 22 [here Trtxt. ovvépye (hardly
collat. form of cuveipyw to unite, but) a misprint for
~yei]; Twit ets te (in prof. writ. also mpds 71, see Passow
[or L. and S8.] s. v.), to assist, help, (be serviceable to)
one for a thing, Ro. viii. 28 [ A. V. @/l things work together
for good]; ri tun ets Tu, a breviloquence equiv. to ovvep-
yav ropifa ri Tun, so that ace. to the reading mavra our
epyct 6 Oeds the meaning is, ‘for them that love God,
God coworking provides all things for good or so that
it is well with them’ (Fritzsche), [R. V. mrg. God work-
eth all things with them for good}, Ro. viii. 28 Lehm. [WH
in br.; ef. B. 193 (167) ], (€avrois ra oupdhepovra, Xen.
mem. 3, 5,16). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. vol. ii. p.
193 sq.*
cuvepyds, -dv, (ovvy and EPTQ), [fr. Pind.], Eurip.,
Thue. down, a companion in work, fellow-worker, (Vulg.
adjutor [Phil. ii. 25; 3 Jn. 8 codperator]): in the N. T.
with a gen. of the pers., one who labors with another in
furthering the cause of Christ, Ro. xvi. 3,9, 21; Phil. ii.
25; iv. 3; [1 Th. iii. 2 Rec.]; Philem. 1, 24; @eov, one
whom God employs as an assistant, as it were (a fellow-
worker with God), 1 Th. iii. 2 (G@ Ltxt. WH mrg. but
with rod Gcod in br.; Ree. et al. Suakovor, q. v. 1). plur.:
1 Co. iii. 9; with gen. of the thing (a joint-promoter [A. V.
helper]), ovv. €opev ths xapas, we labor with you to the
end that we may rejoice in your Christian state, 2 Co. i.
24. eis tuas, (my) fellow-worker to you-ward, in refer-
ence to you, 2 Co. viii. 23; e’s tiv Bac. rt. Oeod, for the
advancement of the kingdom of God, Col. iv. 11; 17 dAn-
Geta, for (the benefit of) the truth, [al. render (so R. V.)
ovvepyopat
‘with the truth’; see Westcott ad loc.], 3Jn.8. (2
Mace. viii. 7; xiv. 5.) *
ovv-épxopat; impf. curypxdunv; 2 aor. suvndGov, once
(Acts x.45 T Tr WH) 3 pers. plur. cuvmAGav (see dzép-
xouat, init.) ; pf. ptep. cvvehndvOas; plupf. 3 pers. plur.
cuveanrvéecayv; fr. Hom. down (Il. 10, 224 in tmesis) ;
1. to come together, i.e. a. to assemble: absol., Mk.
11.20% Acts i: G5 fi 6sxn 27 eeevin sy eaks32)) ©x11225
[xxii. 30 GLTTr WH]; xxviii. 17; [1 Co. xiv. 20;
foll. by ée with gen. of place, Lk. v.17 Lehm. txt.]; fol.
by eis with an ace. of the place, Acts v. 16; mpds twa,
Mk. vi. 33 Rec.; émi rd adrd [see ent, C. I.1 d.], 1 Co. xi.
20; xiv. 23 [here Ltxt. \@y]; with a dat. of the pers.
with one, which so far as the sense is concerned is equiv.
to unto one (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2; [L.
and S. s.v. II. 1 and 3; ef. W. 215 (202)]), Mk. xiv. 53
[here T WH txt. om. Trmrg. br. the dat.]; Jn. xi. 33;
with adverbs of place: évOade, Acts xxv. 17; dzov, Jn.
[foll. by an infin. of purpose, Lk. v.15]; foll.
by eis, — indicating either the end, as eis rd hayeiv, 1 Co.
xi. 33; or the result, 1 Co. xi. 17, 34; év éxkAnoia, in
sacred assembly [R. V. mrg. in congregation], 1 Co. xi.
18 (W. § 50, 4 a.). b. Like the Lat. convenio i. q.
coeo: of conjugal cohabitation, Mt. i. 18 [but cf. Weiss
ad loc. (and the opinions in Meyer)] (Xen. mem. 2, 2,
4; Diod. 3, 58; Philo de caritat. § 14; de fortitud. § 7;
de speciall. lege. §4; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1 and 7, 9, 5;
Apollod. bibl. 1, 3, 3); with emi rd atré added, 1 Co. vii.
5 Ree. 2. to go (depart) or come with one, to ac-
company one (see épxopat, II. p. 252"): tui, with one, Lk.
xxii. 55 [Tr txt. br. the dat.]; Acts i. 21 [here A. V.
company with]; ix. 39; x. 23,45; xi. 12; with eds ro
Zpyov added, Acts xv. 38; ovv tun, Acts xxi. 16.*
ovy-eobiw ; impf. cvvnobiov; 2 aor. cuvédayor; to eat
with, take food together with [cf. ovv, II. 1]: rwi, with
one, ik.xv.25 Actsixv413rxind; 1/Co. vi 11,((2)S2xii:
ily) pera tivos, Gal. ii. 12; Gen. xliii. 31; Ex. xviii. 12,
[ef. W. § 52, 4, 15}. (Plat., Plut., Leian.)*
civeris, -ews, 1, (Tuvinpt, q. V-) 5 1. a running
together, a flowing together: of two rivers, Hom. Od. 10,
515. 2 a. fr. Pind. down, understanding: Lk.
ii. 47; 1Co.i. 19 (fr. Is. xxix. 14); Eph. iii. 4; Col: i.
2; 2 Tim. ii. 7; avevparexn, Col. i. 9. b. the under-
standing, i. e. the mind so far forth as it understands: Mk.
xii. 33; Sap.iv.11. (Sept. for M73, 733A, HyI, p3n,
bow, ete.; also for 9 vn, a poem. ,; [Syy. see eaiitte fin. ;
cf. Bp. Lehttt. on Col. i. 9; Schmidt ch. 147, 8.]*
cvverds, -7, -dv, (cuvinpt), fr. Pind. down, Sept. for 051,
1131, ete., intelligent, having understanding, wise, learned:
Mt: xiv 253 icex 215) Acts xii 78 Co. sould (rst
xxix. 14). [Syn. see codds, fin.]*
ouv-ev-SoKew, -@; (see evdoxéw, init.) ; a. to be
pleased together with, to approve together (with others) :
absol. (yet so that the thing giving pleasure is evident
from the context), Acts xxii. 20 GLT Tr WH; witha
dat. of the thing, Lk. xi. 48; Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Rec.
({Polyb. 24, 4,13]; 1 Macc. i. 57; 2 Mace. xi. 24). iD:
to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to,
XVill. 20;
604
ouvndea
([Polyb. 32, 22, 9]; 2 Mace. xi. 35); foll. by an inf. 1 Co.
vii. 12 sq. [R.V. here be content]; w. a dat. of a pers. to
applaud [R. V. consent with], Ro.i.32. (Diod.; eccles.
writ.) *
cuv-evwXéw, -@: pres. pass. ptep. cuveuwxovpevos ; (eva-
xéo, to feed abundantly, to entertain; fr. ed and gx);
io entertain together; pass. to feast sumptuously with:
Jude 12; rwi, with one, 2 Pet. ii. 13. ([Aristot. eth.
Eud. 7, 12, 14 p. 1245, 5], Joseph., Leian., al.) *
ovv-eb-lornut: to place over or appoint together; 2 aor.
cuverectyny; to rise up together: kata Twos, against one,
Acts xvi. 22. [(From Thue. down.) ]*
ovv-exo; fut. cuveEo; 2 aor. ouvécyov; Pass., pres.
ovvexopar; impf. ovverxdpnv; fr. Hom. down; 1.
to hold together ; any whole, lest it fall to pieces or some-
thing fall away from it: 76 cuvéxov ta wavra, the deity
as holding all things together, Sap. i. 7 (see Grimm ad
loc.). 2. to hold together with constraint, to com-
press, i. e. a. to press together with the hand: ra
ara, to stop the ears, Acts vii. 57 (rd ordya, Is. lii. 15;
Tov ovpavoy, to shut, that it may not rain, Deut. xi. 17; 1
K. viii. 35). b. to press on every side: twa, Lk. viii.
45; with mwavrodev added, of a besieged city, Lk. xix.
43. 3. to hold completely, i. e. a. to hold fast:
prop. a prisoner, Lk. xxii. 63 (ra aiypddowra, Leian. Tox.
39); metaph. in pass. to be held by, closely occupied with,
any business (Sap. xvii. 19 (20); Hdian. 1, 17, 22, (9
ed. Bekk.); Ael. v. h. 14, 22): 76 Ady, in teaching the
word, Acts xviii. 5 GLT Tr WH [here R.V. constrained
by]. B. to constrain, oppress, of ills laying hold of
one and distressing him; pass. to be holden with i.q.
afflicted with, suffering from: vécos, Mt. iv. 24; mupera,
Lk. iv. 38; dvcevrepio, Acts xxviii. 8 (many exx. fr. Grk.
writ. fr. pxesehiy and Hdt. down are given in Passow
s. v. cuvexo, I.a.; [L. and 8S. s.v. 1. 4]); of affections
of the mind: $68, Lk. viii. 37 (dduppé, Ael. v. h. 14,
22; adynddm, Plut. de fluv. 2, 1; aOupia, ib. 7,5; 19, 1;
AUmyn, 17, 3; for other exx. see Grimm on Sap. xvii.
10). y. to urge, impel: trop. the soul, ) ayaa...
cuvexet nuas, 2 Co. v. 14[ A.V. constraineth]; mas (how
greatly, how sorely) ovvéxouat, Lk. xii. 50 [A. V. strait-
ened]; t@ mvevpart, Acts xviii. 5 Rec. ouvéyouar éx
rav dvo, | am hard pressed on both sides, my mind is
impelled or disturbed from each side [R. V. J am in a
strait betwixt the two], Phil. i. 23.*
cuvt-, see cu¢-, and ovr, II. sub fin.
ovv-7Sopan ; 1. in Grk. writ. chiefly fr. Soph.,
Eur., Xen. down, to rejoice together with (another or
others [ef. adv, II. 1]). 2. in the N. T. once to re-
joice or delight with one’s self or inwardly (see ody, II.
4): rwi, in a thing, Ro. vii. 22, where cf. Fritzsche; [al.
refer this also to 1; cf. Meyer].*
ovvjPeva, -as, 7, (ovvnOys, and this fr. ovv and 760s), fr.
Tsoer., Xen., Plat. down, Lat. consuetudo, i. e. 1. in-
tercourse (with one), intimacy: 4 Mace. xiii. 21. 2
custom: Jn. xviii. 39 [ef. B. §139, 45]; 1 Co. xi. 16. 3.
a being used to: with a gen. of the object to which one
is accustomed, 1 Co. viii. 7 L T Tr WH.*
CUVNALKLOTNS
605
CUVOLKED
curndKidrns, -ov, 6, (fr. ody, and AAtkia q. V-), one of | (253 sq.); W. 109 (104)], the man of understanding,
the same age, an equal in age: Gal. i. 14. (Diod. 1, 53
fin.; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 49 init.; but in both pass. the
best codd. have Acorns; [Corp. inserr. iii. p. 434 no.
4929]; Alciphr. 1,12). Cf. cuppabnrns.*
ovv-Oarrw: 2 aor. pass. cvveradny; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down; to bury together with: 76 Xpiot@, together
with Christ, pass., da rod Bartioparos eis Tov Oavaror sc.
avrov, Ro. vi. 4; é€v r@ Bantiopart, Col. ii. 12. For all
who in the rite of baptism are plunged under the water,
thereby declare that they put faith in the expiatory
death of Christ for the pardon of their past sins; there-
fore Paul likens baptism to a burial by which the former
sinfulness is buried, i. e. utterly taken away.*
ocuvv-Ordw, -d: 1 fut. pass. cvvO\acOncoua; to break to
pieces, shatter, (Vulg. confringo, conquasso): Mt. xxi.
44 [but Tom. L Trmrg. WH br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18.
(Sept.; [Manetho, Alex. ap. Athen., Eratosth., Aristot.
(v. 1.)], Diod., Plut., al.) *
ovv-PriBw ; impf. cvvedduBov; to press together, press on
all sides: twa, of a thronging multitude, Mk. v. 24, 31.
(Plat., Aristot., Strab., Joseph., Plut.) *
ovv-Opinrrea, ptep. nom. plur. masc. cuvOpimrovres; to
break in pieces, to crush: metaph. ryyv «apdiav, to break
one’s heart, i.e. to deprive of strength and courage,
dispirit, incapacitate for enduring trials, Acts xxi. 13.
Cin eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
ovy-tew, See GuVinpe.
ovv-inut, 2 pers. plur. guviere, 3 pers. plur. cumodow
(Mt. xiii. 13 RGT; 2 Co. x. 12 Ree., fr. the unused
form ouméw), and cumace (2 Co. x.12LT Tr WH), and
ovviovory (Mt. xiii. 13 L Tr WH fr. the unused ouvia),
subjune. 3 pers. plur. cuxéou. (RG LT Tr in Mk. iv. 12
and Lk. viii. 10, fr. the unused oumeé or fr. cuvinut) and
ovyioot (WI in Mk. and Lk. ll. ce., fr.the unused cuvia),
impv. 2 pers. plur. ovviere, inf. cutevar, ptep. cumav (Ro.
iii. 11 RG T fr. cuméw), and cuviwyr (ibid. L Tr WH, and
often in Sept., fr. cvvio), and cumeis (Mt. xiii. 23 L T Tr
WH; Eph. v.17 RG; but quite erroneously cumey, Grsb.
in Mt. 1. c. (Alf. in Ro. iii.11; cf. WH. App. p.167; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 122]; W.81(77 sq.); B.48 (42); Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. i. p. 174 sq.); fut. cuvpow (Ro. xv. 21); 1 aor.
cuyjxa; 2 aor. subjune. ouryre, cvvaot, impv. 2 pers.
plur. ovvere (Mk. vii. 14 LT Tr WH); (ody, and tye to
send) ; 1. prop. to set or bring together, in a hostile
sense, of combatants, Hom. Il. 1, 8; 7, 210. 2. to
put (as it were) the perception with the thing per-
ceived; to set or join together in the mind, i.e. to wnder-
stand, (so fr. Hom. down; Sept. for }3 and Sawn):
with an ace. of the thing, Mt. xiii. 23, 51; Lk. ii. 50;
Xviii. 34; xxiv. 45; foll. by orc, Mt. xvi. 12; xvii. 13;
foll. by an indirect quest., Eph. v.17; et tots dprous, ‘on
the loaves’ as the basis of their reasoning [see emi, B. 2
a. a.], Mk. vi. 52; where what is understood is evident
from the preceding context, Mt. xiii. 19; xv. 10; Mk.
vii. 14; absol., Mt. xiii. 13-15; xv.10; Mk. iv. 12; viii.
17, 21; Lk. viii. 10; Acts vii. 25°; xxviii. 26 sq.; Ro. xv.
21; 2 Co. x. 12; 6 cumwy or ovrviwy as subst. [B. 295
Hebraistically i. q. a good and upright man (as having
knowledge of those things which pertain to salvation ;
see pwpds): Ro. iii. 11 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2). [Sy¥N. see
yvocke, fin.]*
cuvvuctaye and guard, see the foll. word.
ovy-iornpe (Ro. iii. 5; v. 8; xvi. 1; 2 Co. x. 18; Gal.
ii. 18 Rec.; ptep. cumoravres, 2 Co.iv. 2LT Tr; vi.4 L
T Tr), or gunaravw (2 Co. v. 12; Gal. ii. 18 GL T Tr
WH; inf. cumoravev, 2 Co. iii. 1 RG T WH; ptep. ovr
totavov, 2 Co. iv. 2 WH; vi.4 WH; x. 12,18 LT Tr
WH), or cumorde (inf. cunorav, 2 Co. iii. 1 L Tr; ptep
ouuotav, 2 Co. iv. 2 RG; vi.4 RG; x. 18 Ree.; see
iornpt) ; 1 aor. cvveotnoa; pf. cvvéctynxa; 2 pf. ptep. cn~
eor@s (nom. plur. neut. -réra, 2 Pet. iii.5 WH mrg.]; pres.
pass. inf. gvvicracOat; fr. Hom. Il. 14, 96 down; a te
to place together, to set in the same place, to bring or band
together; in the 2 aor., pf. and plupf. intransitively, to
stand with (or near): ouveotas tim, Lk. ix. 32. Z
to set one with another i.e. by way of presenting or
introducing him, i. e. to commend (Xen., Plat., Dem.,
Polyb., Joseph., Plut.) : red, 2 Co. iii. 1; vi. 4; x. 12,
18; rea ten, Ro. xvi. 1; 2 Co. v. 12 [ef. B. 393 (836)];
Twa Tpos Guveldnaiy Tivos, 2 Co. iv. 2; pass. bd Twos, 2
Co. xii. 11, (1 Mace. xii. 43; 2 Mace. iv. 24). 3.
to put together by way of composition or combination,
to teach by combining and comparing, hence to show,
prove, establish, exhibit, [W.23 (22)]: ri, Ro. iii. 5; v. 8,
(etvorav, Polyb. 4, 5, 6); éavrods as twes, 2 Co. vi. 4;
with two acc. one of the object, the other of the predi-
cate, Gal. ii. 18 (Diod. 13,91; cuvictnow airov mpopnrnp,
Philo rer. div. haer. § 52); foll. by an ace. with inf. [cef.
B. 274 (236)], 2 Co. vii. 11 (Diod. 14, 45). 4. to
put together (i. e. unite parts into one whole), pf., plupf.
and 2 aor. to be composed of, consist: e& vdaros x. 60 v8a-
tos, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [ef. W. § 45,6 a.; (see above, init.)]; to
cohere, hold together: ta mavta ovveatnkev €v adta, Col. i.
17 (Plat. de rep. 7 p. 530 a.; Tim. p. 61 a.; [Bonitz’s
index to Aristotle (Berlin Acad. ed.) s. v. cunoravat], and
often in eccles. writ.; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]).*
[ovv-kata-vedo: 1 aor. ptcp. cvvkaravedcas; to consent
to, agree with: Acts xviii. 27 WH (rejected) mrg. (Polyb.
3, 52:/6 eral.) *]
OUVK-, SCe OVYK-
ouvaA-, see gvAA-
CUVP-, SCC TUPLL-
ovv-oSetw; to journey with, travel in company with : with
a dat. of the pers., Acts ix. 7. (Hdian. 4, 7, 11 [6 ed.
Bekk.], Leian., Plut., al.; Sap. vi. 25.) *
cvvodia, -as, }, (svvodos), a journey in company; by
meton. a company of travellers, associates on a journey, a
caravan, [A.V. company]: Lk. ii. 44. (Strab., Plut.,
[Epict., Joseph.; évvodeia, Gen. xxxvii. 25 cod. Venet.
i. q. family, Neh. vii. 5, 64, Sept. ], al.) *
cvv-oixéw, -6; to dwell together (Vulg. cohabito) : of the
domestic association and intercourse of husband and
wife, 1 Pet. iii. 7; for many exx. of this use, see Passow
“s.v.1; [L. and S.s.v. IL. 21."
cf. ouv, I. fin.
‘CUVOLKOS0 MEW
cvy-o1Kodopew, -@: pres. pass. guvorxodopoipat; (Vulg.
coaedifico) ; to build together i.e. a. to build together
or with others [1 Esdr. v. 65 (66)]. b. to put togeth-
er or construct by building, out of several things to build
up one whole, (oikia ed ovv@xodopnpern Kal cuvnppoopern,
of the human body, Philo de praem. et poen. § 20): Eph.
ii. 22. (Besides, in Thuc., Diod., Dio Cass., Plut.) *
ovv-opirew, -@; to talk with: tui, one, Acts x. 27. (to
hold intercourse with, [Ceb. tab. 13; Joseph. b. j. 5, 13,
1], Epiphan., Tzetz.) *
cvv-opopéw, -@; (curdpuopos, having joint boundaries,
bordering on, fr. cvv and dyopos, and this fr. duds joint,
and dpos a boundary); to border on, be contiguous to,
[A. V. join hard]: rwi, to a thing, Acts xviii. 7. (By-
zant. writ.) *
ovv-0xH, -7s, 7, (cuvexw, q. V-), a holding together, nar-
rowing; narrows, the contracting part of a way, Hom. Il.
23, 330. Metaph. straits, distress, anguish: Lk. xxi. 25;
with xapdias added, 2 Co. ii. 4,(contractio animi, Cic. Tuse.
1, 37, 90; opp. to effusio, 4, 31, 66; ouvoxny k. TadatTro-
piav, Job xxx. 3; [ef. Judg. ii. 3; plur. Ps. xxiv. (xxv)
Uae: Co FN i
ouvT-, see cupT-
[cvve-, see suvo- and avac-]
cuvvert-, See GUCT-
ovv-taccw: 1 aor. cuveragéa; fr. Hdt. down; a.
to put in order with or together, to arrange ; b. to
(put together), constitute, i. e. to prescribe, appoint, (Aes-
chin., Dem.; physicians are said ouvtaccew ddppakor,
Ael. v. h. 9, 13; [Plut. an sen. sit gerend. resp. 4, 8]):
twi, Mt. xxi. 6 L Tr WH; xxvi. 19; xxvii. 10; Sept.
often for 71¥.*
cuvreea, -as, 7, (ouvTeAns), completion, consummation,
end, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. on; Sept. chiefly for
173; for YP. in Dan. xii. 4, 138; in other senses fr. Aes-
chyl. down): aiavos or tov aiavos, Mt. xiii. 39,40 L T Tr
WH, 49; xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; rod aiévos tovrov, Mt. xiii.
40 RG; rév aiaver, Heb. ix. 26 (see aiay, 3 p. 19° bot.
[ef. Herm. sim. 9, 12, 3 and Hilgenfeld ad loc.]); katpod
and xatpov, Dan. ix. 27; xil. 4; tov nyepor, ibid. 13;
avépwrov, of his death, Sir. xi. 27 (25); cf. xxi. 9.*
cuv-reA€w, -@ ; fut. cuvrehéow; 1 aor. cuveréXeoa; Pass.,
pres. inf. ouvreXcioPat ; 1 aor. ouvereheaOny (Jn. ii. 3 T
WH ‘rejected’ mrg.), ptep. cuvreAeo Geis; fr. Thue. and
Xen. down; Sept. often for 193; also sometimes for
DIA, WY, ete. ; 1. to end together or at the same
2. to end completely; bring to an end, finish,
complete: tovs ddyous, Mt. vii. 28 RG; tov wecpacpdr,
Lk. iv. 13; npépas, pass., Lk. iv. 2; Acts xxi. 27, (Jobi.
5; Tob. x. 7). 3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment;
pass. to come to pass, Mk. xiii. 4; Adyov, a word, i. e. a
prophecy, Ro. ix. 28 (pjya, Lam. ii. 17). 4. to
effect, make, [ef. our conclude]: d:a6nxnv, Heb. viii. 8
(Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 8, 15). 5. to finish,i.e. in a use
foreign to Grk. writ., to make an end of: cuverchéaOn 6
oivos Tov ydpou, [was at an end with], Jn. ii.3 Tdf. after
cod. Sin. (Ezek. vii. 15 for Das; to bring to an end, de-
stroy, for 143, Jer. xiv. 12; xvi. 4).*
ef. avy, II. fin.
time.
606
cuvTpipa
ovv-rénvw; pf. pass. ptep. cuvretunpevos; fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down; 1. to cut to pieces, [ef. ovv, IT
3]. 2. to cut short; metaph. to despatch briefly, ex
ecule or finish quickly ; to hasten, (cuvrépvey sc. rhv odd,
to take a short cut, go the shortest way, Hdt. 7, 123; se.
Tov Adyor, to speak briefly, Eur. Tro. 441; ras dmoxpices,
to abridge, sum up, Plat. Prot. p.334d.; év Bpaxet roddovs
Adyous, Arstph. Thesm. 178): Adyoyr [q. v. I. 2 b. a.], to
bring a prophecy or decree speedily to accomplishment,
Ro. ix. 28; Adyos cuvretunpevos, a short word, i. e. an ex-
pedited prophecy or decree, ibid. [RG Tr mrg. in br.]
(both instances fr. Sept. of Is. x. 23); ef. Fritzsche ad
loc. vol. ii. p. 350.*
ovv-Typéw, -@ : impf. 3 pers. sing. guvernper; pres. pass.
3 pers. plur. cuvrnpotvrar; [fr. Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p.
816°, 8 down | ; a. to preserve (a thing from perish-
ing or being lost) : ti, pass. (opp. to dwéAAvoOat), Mt. ix.
17; Lk. v. 88 [T WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; teva, to guard
one, keep him safe, fr. a plot, Mk. vi. 20 (€avrév avapdp-
tytov, 2 Mace. xii. 42 [ef. Tob. i. 11; Sir. xiii. 12]). b.
to keep within one’s self, keep in mind (a thing, lest it be
forgotten [cf. ovv, II. 4]): wavra ra pyyara, Lk. ii. 19 (7a
pyua év th kapdia pov, Dan. vii. 28 Theod.; ryv yvounv
map éavt@, Polyb. 31, 6, 5; [absol. Sir. xxxix. 2]).*
ovy-rinpr: Mid., 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. cvveBevto; plpf.
3 pers. plur. cuvereOewvto; fr. Hom. down; to put with or
together, to place together; to join together; Mid. a.
to place in one’s mind, i. e. to resolve, determine; to
make an agreement, to engage, (often so in prof. writ. fr.
Hat. down; cf. Passow s. v. 2 b.; [L. and S.s. v. B. II.]):
ouverébewro, they had agreed together [W. § 38, 3], foll.
by wa, Jn. ix. 22 [W. § 44, 8b.]; cuvedevto, they agreed
together, foll. by rod with an inf. [B. 270 (232)], Acts
xxiii. 20; they covenanted, foll. by an inf. [B. u.s.], Lk.
xxii. 5. b. fo assent to, to agree to: Acts xxiv. 9
Rec. [see ovvereriOnpu | (rei, Lys. in Harpocr. [s. v. Kap-
kivos] p- 106, 9 Bekk.).*
cvv-répws, (svvTéuvw), [fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down],
adv., concisely i. e. briefly, in few words: axovaat twos,
Acts xxiv. 4 (ypdawat, Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 1; didacxecy, ibid.
1, 6,2; [etmeiv, ibid. 2, 14,1; eEayyeArew, Mk. xvi. WH
(rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]); for exx. fr. Grk.
writ. see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin.*
cuv-rpéx@; 2 aor. cuvedpapov; fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl.,
Hat. down ; 1. to run together: of the gathering
of a multitude of people, éxet, Mk. vi. 33; mpds twa, Acts
iii. 11. 2. to run along with others; metaph. to rush
with i. e. cast one’s self, plunge, 1 Pet. iv. 4. [Comp.:
émt-cuvTpexa. | *
cvv-tpiBw, ptep. neut. -rpi8ov Lk. ix. 39 RG Tr, -rpi-
Bov 1. T WH (cf. Veitch s. v. rpiBa, fin.) ; fut. cwrtpivro;
1 aor. ovvérpuya; Pass., pres. cuvrpiBoua; pf. inf. cv~
retpipdac [RG Tr WH; but -rpipéa LT (cf. Veitch
u. 8.)], ptep. ourrerpippeévos; 2 fut. cvvrpSyooua; fr.
Hat. [(?), Eurip.] down; Sept. very often for 12¥; to
break, to break in preces, shiver, [cf. ovv, I. 3]: xadapoy,
Mt. xii. 20; ras mé8as, pass. Mk. v. 4; 7d dAdBaorpov (the
sealed orifice of the vase [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Alabaster]),
TUYT PLO
Mk. xiv. 3; dorovv, pass. Jn. xix 36 (Ex. xii. 46; Ps.
xXxxiii. (xxxiv.) 21); ta oxetdy, Rev. ii. 27; to tread
down: tov Zatavay ind tovs médas (by a pregn. constr.
[W. § 66, 2 d.]), to put Satan under foot and (as a con-
queror) trample on him, Ro. xvi. 20; to break down,
crush : twa, to tear one’s body and shatter one’s strength,
Lk. ix. 39. Pass. to suffer extreme sorrow and be, as it
were, crushed : of cuvretpypeévor tiv Kapdiav [cf. W. 229
(215)], i. q. of €xovres THY Kapdiav ovvrerpysperny, [ A. V
the broken-hearted |, Lk. iv. 18 Ree. fr. Is. lxi. 1 ([ef. Ps.
XXXiii. (xxxiv.) 19; exlvi. (exlvii.) 3, ete.]; cuvrpyBnvae
ty Svavoia, Polyb. 21, 10, 2; 31, 8, 11; rots dpovnpuact,
Diod. 11, 78; [rats édwiow, 4,66; rats yuyxais, 16, §1]).*
oviv-Tpipa, -Tos, TO, (cuvTpiBw), Sept. chiefly for \aw ;
1. that which is broken or shattered, a fracture: Aristot.
de audibil. p. 802", 34; of a broken limb, Sept. Lev. xxi.
118}. 2. trop. calamity, ruin, destruction: Ro. iti. 16,
fr. Is. lix. 7, where it stands for 7, a devastation, laying
waste, as in xxii. 4; Sap. ili. 3; 1 Mace. ii. 7; [ete.].*
wiv-tpodos, -ov, 6, (cuvtpepw), [fr. Hdt. down], nour-
ished with one (Vulg. collactaneus [Eng. foster-brother ]) ;
brought up with one; univ. companion of one’s child-
hood and youth: twés (of some prince or king), Acts
Bid.) (1) Mace.1. 65) 2 Mace. ix. 29; 'Polyibi'5;. 9) 45
Diod: 1, 53; Joseph: b. j. 1, 10, 9; Ael. v. h. 12, 26.)*
Luvrvxy and (so Tdf. edd. 7, 8; ef. Lipsius, Gramm.
Untersuch. p. 31; [Tdf. Proleg. p.103; Kiihner § 84 fin. ;
on the other hand, Chandler § 199]) Suvrvyn, 7, [ace.
-nv], Syntyche, a woman belonging to the church at
Philippi: Phil. iv. 2. (The name occurs several times
in Grk. inserr. [see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. 1. e.].)*
ovv-rvyxave: 2 aor. inf. cvvrvyxeiv; fr. [Soph.], Hat.
down; to meet with, come to [A. V. come at] one: with a
dat. of the pers., Lk. viii. 19.*
ouv-vtro-Kplvopar: 1 aor. pass. cuvumeKpiOnv, with the
force of the mid. [ef. B. 52 (45)]; to dissemble with:
tui, one, Gal. ii. 13. (Polyb. 3, 92, 5 and often; see
Schweighaeuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 604; Plut. Marius, 14,
17.)*
cvv-vToupyéw, -@ ; (Umoupyew to serve, fr. toupyéds, and
this fr. imé and EPTQ); to help together: twi, by any
thing, 2 Co.i. 11. (Leian. bis accusat. ec. 17 cuvaywu-
Couevns THs nOovns, imep advtH Ta ToAAA EvvuTroupyei.) *
cvvd-, see cupp-
ovvxX-, See TUYX-
cuvp-, see cupry-
cvv-wdlve ; a. prop. to feel the pains of trevail
with, be in travail together: oide emt Tdv Cawv Tas adivas 6
ef. ovv, II. fin.
ouvotkos Kal cuv@diver ye Ta TOAAA Horrep Kal adexrpvoves,
Porphyr. de abstin. 3,10; [cf. Aristot. eth. Eud. 7, 6
p: 12402, 36]. b. metaph. to undergo agony (like a
woman in childbirth) along with: Ro. viii. 22 (where
ovv refers to the several parts of which 7 «riows consists,
cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; kaxois, Eur. Hel. 727.*
cvvepocla, -as, 7, (cvvdnvunt), fr. Arstph. and Thue.
down, a swearing together; a conspiracy: ocvv@pociav
move (see motew, I. 1 c. p. 525* top), Acts xxiii. 13 Ree. ;
moveicOat (see roew, I. 3), ibid. L T Tr WH.*
607
/
oup@
Lvpdxoverar [so accented commonly (Chandler §§ 172,
175); but acc. to Pape, Eigennamen, s. v., -kodoat in
Ptol. 3, 4, 9; 8, 9, 4], -@v, ai, Syracuse, a large maritime
city of Sicily, having an excellent harbor and surrounded
by a wall 180 stadia in length [so Strabo 6 p. 270; “but
this statement exceeds the truth, the actual circuit being
about 14 Eng. miles or 122 stadia” (Leake p. 279); see
Dict. of Geogr. s. v. p. 1067°]; now Siragosa: Acts
XXVili. 12.*
Zvpla, -us, 7, Syria; in the N. T. a region of Asia,
bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges,
on the E. by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by
Palestine, and on the W. by Phenicia and the Mediter-
ranean, [cf. BB.DD.s. v. Syria; Ryssel in Herzog ed. 2,
s.v. Syrien; cf. also’Avtidyeca, 1 and Aapackds|: Mt. iv.
245 Lk. n. 23 Acts xv. 23, 41; xvill. 185) xx.35 xxi 3
Gal. i. 21. [On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.]*
Zvpos, -ov, 6, a Syrian, 1. e. a native or an inhabitant
of Syria: Lk. iv. 27; fem. Svpa, a Syrian woman, Mk.
vii. 26 Tr WH mrg. [(Hadt., al.)]*
Zvpodoivicca (so Rec.; a form quite harmonizing
with the analogies of the language, for as Kié forms
the fem. Ki&ttooa, Opa& the fem. Opacaa, ava€ the fem.
dvacca, so the fem. of Soin is always, by the Greeks,
called Soinaca), Suvpopowixicaa (so LT WH; hardly a
pure form, and one which must be derived fr. @owwixn ;
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 296 sq.; W. 95 (91)), Supaqor-
viceooa (Grsb.; a form which conflicts with the law of
composition), -ns, 7, (Tr WH mrg. Svpa Powixicoa), a
Syrophenician woman, i. e. of Syrophoenice by race,
that is, from the Phoenice forming a part of Syria (Svpo
being prefixed for distinction’s sake, for there were also
ABudoinxes, i. e. the Carthaginians. The Greeks in-
cluded both Pheenicia and Palestine under the name
7 Supia; hence Svupia 7 Wadaorivn in Hat. 3, 91; 4, 39;
Just. Mart. apol. i. 1; and 7 ®owixn Supia, Diod. 19, 93 ;
Supopowiky, Just. Mart. dial. c. Tryph. ec. 78, p. 305 a.) :
Mk. vii. 26 [cf. B. D. s. v. Syro-Pheenician]. (The mase.
Supopoimé is found in Leian. concil. deor. ce. 4; [Syro-
phoenix in Juv. sat. 8, 159 (cf. 160) ].) *
Lipris[Lehm. cipris; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Chand-
ler § 650], -ews, ace. -wv, 7, (cpa, q. v. [al. fr. Arab. sert
i.e. ‘desert’; al. al., see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ]), Syrtis,
the name of two places in the African or Libyan Sea
between Carthage and Cyrenaica, full of shallows and
sandbanks, and therefore destructive to ships; the west-
ern Syrtis, between the islands Cercina and Meninx [or
the promontories of Zeitha and Brachodes], was called
Syrtis minor, the eastern [extending from the promon-
tory of Cephalae on the W. to that of Boreum on the E.]
was called Syrtis major (sinus Psyllicus); this latter
must be the one referred to in Acts xxvii. 17, for upon
this the ship in which Paul was sailing might easily be
cast after leaving Crete. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Quicksands. ] *
cvpw; impf. érupov; fr. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. (in comp.),
Aristot.], Theocr. down; [Sept. 2S. xvii. 13]; to draw,
drag: ri, Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xii. 4; twa, one (before the
judge, to prison, to punishment; én ta Bacavorypra, cis
svoTapacow
ré Secpwrnpiov, Epict. diss. 1, 29, 22; al.), Acts viii. 3;
é£@ tis wodews, Acts xiv. 19; emt rods modirdpxas, Acts
xvii. 6. [CoMP.: xataovpo. | *
ovenrapicow: 1 aor. cuvermapaga; to convulse com-
pletely (see pryyvupt, c.): twa, Mk. ix. 20 LT Tr mrg.
WH;; Lk. ix. 42. (Max. Tyr. diss. 13, 5.) *
cto-onpov [Tdf. ovr- (cf. ovv, II. fin.) ], -ov, ré, (ovv
and ona), a common sign or concerted signal, a sign given
acc. to agreement: Mk. xiv.44. (Diod., Strab., Plut., al.;
for D3, a standard, Is. v. 26; xlix. 22; lxii.10.) The
word is condemned by Phrynichus, ed. Lob. p. 418, who
remarks that Menander was the first to use it; cf. Sturz,
De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 196.*
cio-copos [LT Tr WH ovr (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -ov,
(avy and capa), belonging to the same body (i.e. metaph.
to the same church) [R. V. fellow-members of the body]:
Eph. iii. 6. (Eccles. writ.) *
ov-oTaciartys, -ov, 6, (see sractacTns), a companion
in insurrection, fellow-rioter: Mk. xv. 7 RG (Joseph.
antt. 14, 2, 1).*
overatiés [Tr cur (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -7, -dv, (our
tornpt, q- V.), commendatory, introductory: ématoXai ovat.
[Ace epistles of commendation], 2 Co. iii. 1*, 1» RG,
and often in eccles. writ., many exx. of which have been
collected by Lydius, Agonistica sacra (Zutph. 1700), p.
123, 15; [Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. ii. 1194 sq]. (ypdp-
para rap avtov AaBetv ovotarika, Epict. diss. 2, 3, 1; [cf.
Diog. Laért. 8, 87]; 7d Kaos tavtés emtotoNlov avaTa-
tixwtepov, Aristot. in Diog. Laért. 5, 18, and in Stob. flor.
65, 11, ii. 435 ed. Gaisf.) * ;
overavpdo [LT Tr WH ovp- (cf. ody, II. fin.) ], -@:
Pass., pf. cuveoravp@par; 1 aor. cuvectavpwoOny ; to cru-
cify along with; twa tux, one with another; prop.:
Mt. xxvii. 44 (adv aire LT Tr WH); Mk. xv. 32 (ovv
ara L TWH); In. xix. 32;
dvOpwros suvectavpobn SC. T@ XpiorG, i. e. (dropping the
figure) the death of Christ upon the cross has wrought
the extinction of our former corruption, Ro. vi. 6; Xpurr@
ovveotavpwpat, by the death of Christ upon the cross [
have become utterly estranged from (dead to) my for-
mer habit of feeling and action, Gal. ii. 19 (20).*
ov-oréd\Aw: 1 aor. cuvéoretda; pf. pass. ptep. cuvertadA-
pevos; prop. to place together ; a. to draw together,
contract, (ra ioria, Arstph. ran. 999; rv xeipa, Sir. iv.
31; els dAtyov avotéAXo, Theophr. de caus. plant. 1, 15,
1); to diminish (rqv Siaray, Isocr. p. 280 d.; Dio Cass.
39, 37); to shorten, abridge, pass. 6 katpds ovvertadpevos
eotiv, the time has been drawn together into a brief
compass, is shortened, 1 Co. vii. 29. b. to roll to-
gether, wrap up, wrap round with bandages, etc., to en-
shroud (twa wémdos, Eur. Troad. 378): rid, i.e. his
corpse (for burial), Acts v. 6.*
ovorevato [T WH ovr- (cf. ovv, II. fin.)]; to groan
together: Ro. viii. 22, where ovv has the same force as
in cuv@dive, b. (revi, with one, Eur. Ion 935; Test. xii.
Patr. (test. Isach. § 7) p. 629).*
ov-oroixéw [T WH ovr (cf. civ, II. fin.)], -@; (see orot-
xéw) ; tostand or march in the same row (file) with: so once
metaph.: 6 madauds av
608
DE uy aa
prop. of soldiers, Polyb. 10, 21,7; hence to stand ove
against, be parallel with; trop. to answer to, resemble: r:yt-
so once of a type in the O. T. which answers to the anti-
type in the New, Gal. iv. 25 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
ov-rtpatiatys [T Tr WH ov~ (so Lchm. in Philem.;
cf. avy, II. fin.) ], -ov, 6, a fellow-soldier, Xen., Plat., al. ;
trop. an associate in labors and conflicts for the cause of
Christ: Phil. ii. 25; Philem. 2.*
cvetpépw: 1 aor. ptcp. cverpéyas; pres. pass. ptep.
avotpedduevos; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; 1.
to twist together, roll together (into a bundle): d@pvydvev
mAnOos, Acts xxviii. 3. 2. to collect, combine, unite:
twas, pass. [reflexively (?)] of men, to [gather themselves
together,| assemble: Mt. xvii. 22 LT Trtxt. WH, see
avactpépa, 3 a.*
ov-oTpopy, -7s, 7, (svoTpeda) ; a. a twisting up
together, a binding together. b. a secret combination,
a coalition, conspiracy: Acts xxiii. 12 (Ps. lxiii. (Ixiv.)
3; [2K.xv.15; Am. vii. 10]); @ concourse of disorderly
persons, a riot (Polyb. 4, 34, 6), Acts xix. 40.*
ov-rxnpatite [WH cur- (so Tin Ro., Tr in 1 Pet.; cf:
avy, II. fin.) ]: pres. pass. cveynparigopar; (oynparita, to
form) ; a later Grk. word; to conform [(Aristot. top. 6,
14 p. 151, 8; Plut. de profect. in virt. 12 p. 83 b.)];
pass. reflexively, tii, to conform one’s self (i.e. one’s
mind and character) to another’s pattern, [ fashion one’s
self according to, (cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 130
sq-)]: Ro. xii. 2; 1 Pet. i. 14 [ef. W. 352 (330 sq.)].
(mpés rt, Plut. Num. 20 com. text.) *
Luxdp (Rec.*" Siyap), 7, Sychar, a town of Samaria,
near to the well of the patriarch Jacob, and not far from
Flavia Neapolis (Suxap mpo ths Néas wéAews, Euseb. in
his Onomast. [p. 346, 5 ed. Larsow and Parthey]) tow-
ards the E., the representative of which is to be found
apparently in the modern hamlet al Askar (or ’Asker) :
Jn. iv. 5, where cf. Biumlein, Ewald, Briickner [in De
Wette (4th and foll. edd.) ], Godet; add, Ewald, Jahrbb.
f. bibl. Wissensch. viii. p. 255 sq.; Bddeker, Palestine,
pp- 328, 337; [ Lieut. Conder in the Palest. Explor. Fund
for July 1877, p. 149 sq. and in Survey of West. Pal.:
‘Special Papers’, p. 231; Hdersheim, Jesus the Messiah,
Appendix xv.].. The name does not seem to differ
from 33}0, a place mentioned by the Talmudists in
IDI Py ‘the fountain Sucar’ and 7310 Py nypa ‘ the
valley of the fountain Sucar’; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeit-
sehr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1856, p. 240sqq. Most in-
terpreters, however, think that Suvydp is the same as
Suxeu (q. V- 2), and explain the form as due to a soften-
ing of the harsh vulgar pronunciation (cf. Credner, Einl.
in d. N. T. vol. i. p. 264 sq.), or conjecture that it was
fabricated by way of reproach by those who wished to
suggest the noun pv, ‘falsehood’, and thereby brand
the city as given up to idolatry [cf. Hab. ii. 18], or the
word 73, ‘drunken’ (on account of Is. xxviii. 1), and
thus call it the abode of papoi, see Sir. l. 26, where
the Shechemites are called Aads pwpds; ef. Test. xii. Patr.
(test. Levi § 7) p. 564 Sux, Aeyouevn modus aovvéerov.
To these latter opinions there is this objection, among
Suyéeu
others, that the place mentioued by the Evangelist was
very near Jacob’s well, from which Shechem, or Flavia
Neapolis, was distant about a mile and a half. [Cf. B.D.
s. v. Sychar; also Porter in Alex.’s Kitto, ibid.] *
Zuxep, Hebr. Daw [i.e. ‘shoulder,’ ‘ridge’ ], Shechem
TA: V. Sychem (see below)], prop. name of Le a
man of Canaan, son of Hamor (see "Eypdp), prince in
the city of Shechem (Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sqq.):
Acts vii. 16 RG. 2. a city of Samaria (in Sept.
sometimes Svyxép, indecl., sometimes Sika, gen. -wy, as in
Joseph. and Euseb.; once riy Sixtuwa tiv év dper Edpaip,
1 K. xii. 25 [for still other var. see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)
s.v. Shechem ]), Vulg. Sichem [ed. Tdf. Sychem; cf. B.D.
u. s.], situated in a valley abounding in springs at the
foot of Mt. Gerizim (Joseph. antt. 5, 7, 2; 11, 8, 6); laid
waste by Abimelech (Judg. ix. 45), it was rebuilt by
Jeroboam and made the seat of government (1 K. xii.
25). From the time of Vespasian it was called by the
Romans Neapolis (on coins Flavia Neapolis); whence by
corruption comes its modern name, Nablus [or Ndbu-
lus]; ace. to Prof. Socin (in Biideker’s Palestine p. 331)
it contains about 13,000 inhabitants (of whom 600 are
Christians, and 140 Samaritans) together with a few
[about 100”] Jews: Acts vii. 16.*
ohayh, -7s, 7, (opdtw), slaughter: Acts viii. 32 (after
Is. liii. 7) ; mpoBara oayns, sheep destined for slaughter
(Zech. xi. 4; Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23), Ro. viii. 365; muepa
opayns (Jer. xii. 3), iq. day of destruction, Jas. v. 5.
(Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for N20, 7370,
ete.) *
ohdy.ov, -ov, 7d, (opayn), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
that which is destined for slaughter, a victim [A.V. slain
beast]: Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 512 (477) ] (Am. v. 25; Ezek.
S15 IMC)
chdtw, Attic opdrrw: fut. opdéw, Rev. vi. 4LT Tr
WH; 1 aor. éogaéa; Pass., pf. ptep. €opaypévos; 2 aor.
eopayny; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for unw, to
slay, slaughter, butcher: prop., apviov, Rev. v. 6, 12;
xiii. 8, twa, to put to death by violence (often so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12; Rev. v. 9; vi. 4,
9; xviii. 24. Keady é€opaypévn eis Oavatrov, mortally
wounded [R.V. smitten unto death], Rev. xiii. 3. [Comp.:
xata-opaca. |*
od5pa (properly neut. plur. of epodpds, vehement, vio-
lent), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, exceedingly, greatly:
placed after adjectives, Mt.ii.10; Mk. xvi. 4; Lk. xviii.
23; Rev. xvi. 21; with verbs, Mt. xvii. 6, 235; xviii.
Sle xike 250 xOxKyie 2o xo Oa Aebs Wiens se
ohodpas, adv., fr. Hom. Od. 12, 124 down, exceedingly:
Acts xxvii. 18.*
odpayitw (Rev. vii. 3 Rec.) ; 1 aor. éodpayiwa; 1 aor.
mid. ptep. eppayioapevos ; Pass., pf. ptep. eoppayropéevos ;
1 aor. éodpayiodnv; [in 2 Co. xi. 10 Rec.* gives the form
odpayicera “de coniectura vel errore” (Tdf.; see his
note ad loc.)]; (cdpayis, q- v-); Sept.for DNN; to set a
seal upon, mark with a seal, to seal; a. for secu-
rity: ri, Mt. xxvii. 66; sc. ryv G8uacor, to close it,
lest Satan after being cast into it should come out;
609
oyedov
hence the addition érdvw airod, over him i.e. Satan, Rev.
xx. 3, (€v 6 —i. e. Shpati —Kepavvds eotw eahpayiopevos,
Aeschyl. Eum. 828; mid. oppayigoua tiv bvpav, Bel and
the Dragon 14 Theodot.). b. Since things sealed up
are concealed (as, the contents of a letter), oppayito
means trop. to hide (Deut. xxxii. 34), keep in silence,
keep secret: ri, Rev. x. 4; xxii. 10, (ras duaptias, Dan.
ix. 24 Theodot.; tas dvopias, Job xiv. 17; rods Adyous
atyn, Stob. flor. 34, 9 p. 215; Oavpara moda aopA odpr-
yicoarto ovyn, Nonn. paraphr. evang. Ioan. 21, 140). Cc.
in order to mark a person or thing; hence to set a mark
upon by the impress of a seal, to stamp: angels are said
oppayife twas emt Tov peroror, i.e. with the seal of
God (see odpayis, ¢.) to stamp his servants on their
foreheads as destined for eternal salvation, and by
this means to confirm their hopes, Rev. vii. 3, cf. Ewald
ad loc.; [B.D.s. vv. Cuttings and Forehead]; hence oi
eoppaytopevot, fourteen times in Ree. vss. 4—8, four times
by GLT Tr WH, (8evoior onpavtpacw eappayopévor,
Eur. Iph. Taur®1372); metaph.: rwa 7@ mvedipare and
ev T@ Tv., respecting God, who by the gift of the Holy
Spirit indicates who are his, pass., Eph. i. 13; iv. 30;
absol., mid. with twa, 2 Co. i. 22. d. in order to
prove, confirm, or attest a thing; hence trop. to
confirm, authenticate, place beyond doubt, (a written
document 7@ SaxrvAiw, Esth. viii. 8) : foll. by é7u, Jn. iii.
33 teva, to prove by one’s testimony to a person that he
is what he professes to be, Jn. vi. 27. Somewhat unu-
sual is the expression odpay:oduevos adtois tov Kaprov
tovrov, when I shall have confirmed (sealed) to them
this fruit (of love), meaning apparently, when [I shall
have given authoritative assurance that this money was
collected for their use, Ro. xv. 28. [Comp.: kara-
oppayi¢a. |*
opayis, -idos, 7, (akin, apparently, to the verb dpdcow
or ppayvupt), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for onin, a seal; i.e.
a. the seal placed upon books (cf. B. D. s.v. Writing, sub
fin.; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 27]: Rev. v.13; Adoa
ras ogp., ib. 2,5 [Ree.]; dvoiga, ib. [5G LT Tr WH],
OF Mvan lero, Oster os) Lor availed. b. @ signet-ring:
Rev. vii. 2. c. the inscription or impression made by
a seal: Rev. ix.4 (the name of God and Christ stamped
upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident
from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. ii. 19. d. that by which any-
thing is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a
token or proof): Ro. iv. 11; 1 Co.ix.2. [Cf. BB.DD.
s. v. Seal.]*
ovdpdy, -ov, 7d, i. q. opupdy, q. v.: Acts iii. 7 T WH.
(Hesych. ogudpa: 7 repipépera rev today.) *
odupis, i. q. omupis, q. v-, (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 113;
Curtius p. 503; [Steph. Thesaur. s. vv.]), Lchm. in Mt.
xvi. 10 and Mk. viii. 8; WH uniformly (see their App.
p. 148).*
oupdv, -ov, 76, fr. Hom. down, the ankle [ A.V. ankle-
bone]: Acts iii. 7 [T WH ogvdper, q. v.].*
oxeddv, (ey, oxeiv), adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. near,
hard by. 2. fr. Soph. down [of degree, i.e.] well-nigh,
nearly, almost; so in the N. T. three times before was >
oyna
Acts xill. 44; xix. 26; Heb. ix. 22 [but see W. 554 (515)
n.; (R. V. J may almost say)]; (2 Macc. v. 2; 3 Macc.
v. 14).*
oX ipa, -Tos, 76, (€xw, oxetv), fr. Aeschyl. down, Lat.
habitus (cf. Eng. haviour (fr. have) ], A. V. fashion, Vulg.
Jigura {but in Phil. habitus], (tacitly opp. to the mate-
rial or substance): rod kécpuou rovrov, 1 Co. vii. 31; the
habitus, as comprising everything in a person which
strikes the senses, the figure, bearing, discourse, actions,
manner of life, etc., Phil. ii. 7 (8). [Syn. see poppy
fin., and Schmidt ch. 182, 5.]*
oxifw [( Lk. v.36 RG Lmrg.)]; fut. cxiow (Lk. v. 36
L txt. T Tr txt. WH [cf. B. 37 (32 sq.)]); 1 aor. érxica ;
Pass., pres. ptep. oxefduevos; 1 aor. éoxic@nv; [allied w,
Lat. scindo, caedo, etc. (cf. Curtius § 295) ]; fr. [( Hom.
h. Merc.) ] Hesiod down ; Sept. several times for pa, Is.
xxxvii. 1 for D7 ; to cleave, cleave asunder, rend : ri, Lk.
v. 36; pass. ai wérpar, Mt. xxvil. 51; of ovpavol, Mk.i. 10;
To kataréracua, Lk, xxiii. 45; with eis dvo added, into two
parts, in twain [(eis dvo uépn, of a river, Polyb. 2, 16,
11)], Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; 76 Slxrvov, Jn. xxi. 11;
to divide by rending, ri, Jn. xix. 24. trop. in pass. to
be split into factions, be divided: Acts xiv. 4; xxiii. 7,
(Xen. cony. 4, 59; tod mAjPous cxifouévov Kata alpecw,
Diod. 12, 66) .*
oxiopa, -ros, 76, (oxlfw), a cleft, rent ; a. prop.
arent: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21, (Aristot., Theophr.), _b.
metaph. a division, dissension: Jn. vii. 43; ix. 16; x.
191 Cos VO xis 18) sal. 25, <(eccles:; writ, (iClem:
Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 6, etc. ; ‘Teaching’ 4,3; etc.]). (Cf. reff.
S$. V. alpeois, 5. | *
oxotviov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of the noun cyxotvos, 6 and 7, a
rush), fr. Hdt. down, prop. a cord or rope made of rushes ;
univ. a@ rope: Jn. li. 15; Acts xxvii. 32.*
cxoAdfw ; 1 aor. subjunc. cxodAdow, 1 Co. vii. 5G LT
Tr WEL (axoNG, i= Vans 1. to cease from labor;
to loiter. 2. to be free from labor, to be at leisure,
to be idle ; rvl, to have leisure for a thing, i.e. to give one’s
self to a thing: iva sxoddonre (Rec. cxoddfnre) TH Tpoc-
evx7, 1 Co. vii. 5 (for exx. fr. prof. auth. see Passow
B1 Ve 5 (UuandiSiussy. LET )))e 3. of things; e. g. of
places, to be unoccupied, empty: oikos sxoddgwv, Mt. xii.
44; [Lk. xi. 25 WH br. Tr mrg. br.], (rézos, Plut. Gai.
Grac. 12; of a centurion’s vacant office, Eus. h. e. 7, 15;
in eccl. writ. of vacant eccl. offices, [also of officers with-
out charge; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]).*
oXoAn, -Hs, 7, (fr. oxetv; hence prop. Germ. das An-
halten; (cf. Eng. ‘to hold on,’ equiv. to either to stop or
to persist]); 1. fr. Pind. down, freedom from labor,
leisure. 2. ace. to later Grk. usage, a place where
there is leisure for anything, a school (cf. L. and S. s. v.
III.; W. 23]: Acts xix. 9 (Dion. Hal. de jud. Isocr. 1;
de vi Dem. 44; often in Plut.).*
cotw [al. cdtw (cf. WH. Intr. § 410; Meisterhans p.
87) ]; fut. cdow; 1 aor. éowoa; pf. céowxa; Pass., pres.
ofouac; impf. éowfdunr ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Acts iv. 9) céow-
oracand (acc. to Tdf.) céowra (cf. Kiihner i. 912 ; [ Photius
8. V.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p.99; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor.
610
cwla
éodOnv ; 1 fut. cwOjoouat ; (ods ‘safe and sound’ [cf. Lat.
sanus ; Curtius § 570; Vaniéek p. 1038]); fr. Hom. down;
Sept. very often for DWIM, also for YDa, 5x2, and S°xN,
sometimes for 2; to save, to keep safe and sound, to
rescue from danger or destruction (opp. to amdddum,
q. V.); Vulg. saluumfacio (or fio), salvo, [salvifico, libero,
etc: ||; a. univ., 7uvd, one (from injury or peril) ;
to save a suffering one (from perishing), e.g. one suffer-
ing from disease, to make well, heal, restore to health: Mt.
ix, 22; Mk. v. 34; x. 52; Lk, vii. 50 [al. understand this
as including spiritual healing (see b. below)]; viii.
48 ; xvii. 19; xviii. 42; Jas. v.15; pass., Mt. ix. 21; Mk.
v. 23, 28; vi. 56; Lk. viii. 36, 50; Jn. xi. 12; Acts iv. 9
[cf. B. § 144, 25]; xiv. 9. to preserve one who is in
danger of destruction, to save (i.e. rescue): Mt. viii. 253
xiv. 30; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 40, 42,49; Mk. xiii. 20; xv. 30
sq:; Lk. xxiii. 35, 37, 39 ; pass., Acts xxvii. 20, 31; 1 Pet.
iv. 18; rHv Yuxjv, (physical) life, Mt. xvi. 25; Mk. iii.
4; vili.35; Lk. vi.9; ix.24and RG Lin xvii. 33; owtey
Twa éx With gen. of the place, to bring safe forth from,
Jude 5; é« THs apas ravTys, from the peril of this hour,
Jn. xii. 27; with gen. of the state, éx @avdrov, Heb. v. 7 ;
cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 70 sq.; [W. § 30,6 a.;
see éx, I. 5]. b. to save in the technical biblical
sense ; — negatively, to deliver from the penalties of the
Messianic judgment, Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5); to save from the
evils which obstruct the reception of the Messianic deliver-
ance: amd TOv auapti@y, Mt. i. 21 ; ad THs dpyijs SC. TOU Geod,
from the punitive wrath of God at the judgment of the
last day, Ro. v. 9; dd ris yeveds THs ckodlas TavTys, Acts
ii. 40; Puxhy éx Oavdrov (See Pavaros, 2), Jas. v. 20; [ék
mupds apratovres, Jude 23] ;— positively, to make one a
partaker of the salvation by Christ (opp. to amédAumt, q. V.):
hence cwterdac and eicépxecbar eis THY Bac. Tod Oeod are
interchanged, Mt. xix. 25, cf. 24; Mk. x. 26, cf. 25; Lk.
Xviii. 26, cf. 25; so owfecGac and (why aidmov éxeav, Jn.
iii. 17, cf. 16. Since salvation begins in this life (in deliv-
erance from error and corrupt notions, in moral purity,
in pardon of sin, and in the blessed peace of a soul recon-
ciled to God), but on the visible return of Christ from
heaven will be perfected in the consummate blessings of
6aid@y 6 wé\\wy, We can understand why 76 cwfecba is
spoken of in some passages as a present possession, in
others as a good yet future : —as a blessing beginning
(or begun) on earth, Mt. xviii. 11 Rec.; Lk. viii. 12;
xix. 10; Jn.v. 34; °x: 9.;, xii, 47.5 Ro, xi. 143) 1 Corn, 215
Vii. 16+ ix: 22;x. 335.xv. 25) 2h. 1G; 20 Phe 105
2 Tim.i.9; Tit. iii.5; 1 Pet. iii. 21; 77 édmld: (dat. of the
instrument) é7W6nuer (aor. of the time when they turned
to Christ), Ro. viii. 24; xapirl éore cecwopévor dia Tis
miarews, Eph. ii. 5 [ef. B. § 144, 25], 8 ;—as a thing still
future, Mt. x. 22; xxiv.13; [Mk. xiii. 18]; Ro. v. 10;
1 Co. iii. 15; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Jas. iv. 12; thy puxqv, Mk.
viii. 85; Lk, ix. 24; Wuxds, Lk. ix. 56 Rec.; 7d wvedua,
pass. 1 Co. v.5; by a pregnant construction (see els, C.
1 p. 185> bot.), Tuva els THv Baordelay Tod Kuplov aldnoy,
to save and transport into etc. 2 Tim. iv, 18 (9 etcéBeva
h cdfovea els THy fwinv alwvov, 4 Macc. xv. 2; many exx.
CWUa
of this constr. are given in Passow vol. ii. p. 1802; [cf.
Wr ENON IS! RE Wy WE AN). univ.: [Mk. xvi. 16]; Acts ii.
Bbiyate eS 14s xiv. 9; xv. il, [11] 5 xvi, 80 sq.3-Ro.
I Aleks Owls +) x1..26)5) 1 Timi, 40 ive 16): Heb: vil. Zor
Jas. ii. 14; duaprwdods, 1 Tim. i. 15; ras puxds, Jas. i.
21; of cwiduevor, Rev. xxi. 24 Rec.; Lk. xiii. 23; Acts
ii. 47 ; opp. to of dmoddtuevor, 1 Co. i. 18; 2 Co. ii. 15,
(see dodduus, La. B.). [Comp.: dia-, éx- cwfw.]*
oGpa, -Tos, 76, (appar. fr. ods ‘entire’, [but cf. Curtius
§ 570; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ‘to cover’, cf. Vaniéek p. 1055;
Curtius p. 696]), Sept. for “w3, 73, ete.; A522 (a
corpse), also for Chald. DW3; a body; and 1. the
body both of men and of animals (on the distinction be-
tween it and cdpé see cdpé, esp. 2 init.; [cf. Dickson, St.
Paul’s use of ‘ Flesh’ and ‘Spirit’, p. 247 sqq.]); a.
as everywh. in Hom. (who calls the living body déuas)
and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or
corpse: univ. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG;
[Mk. xv. 45 RG]; Acts ix. 40; plur. Jn. xix. 31; 76 o.
tivos, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq.; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 52,55; Jn.
xix. 38, 40; xx. 12; Jude 9; _ of the body of an animal
offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb, xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix, 14 ; Num.
xix. 3). b. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living
body : — of animals, Jas. iii. 3;——-of man: 7d odpa, ab-
sol., Lk. xi. 34; xii. 23; 1 Co. vi. 13, ete.; év copare
efvar, of earthly life with its troubles, Heb. xiii. 3; dis-
tinguished fr. 76 afua, 1 Co. xi. 27; 7d cOua and 7a uédAn
of it, 1 Co. xii. 12, 14-20; Jas. ili.6; 7d cdpua the tem-
ple of 7d a&y.ov mvetua, 1 Co. vi. 19; the instrument of
the soul, ra 61a Tod cw. SC. mpaxOévra, 2 Co. v.10; itis
distinguished —fr. 7d mvedua, in Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. v. 3;
vi. 20 Rec.; vii. 34; Jas. ii. 26, (4 Mace. xi. 11);—fr. 7
Yux%, in Mt. vi. 25; x. 28; Lk. xii. 22, (Sap. i. 4; viii. 19
sq.; 2 Mace. vii. 37; xiv. 38; 4 Macc. i. 28, etc.);—fr.
n ux and 76 rvedua together, in 1 Th. v. 23 (cf. Song of
the Three, 63); odua puxexdy and o. mvevmarixéy are dis-
tinguished, 1 Co. xv. 44 (see mvevyarixds, 1 and Puyxuxds,
a.); Too. Tivos, Mt. v. 29sq.; Lk. xi. 34; Ro. iv. 19; viii.
23 [cf. W. 187 (176)], etc.; 6 vads Tod cwu. adrod, the
temple which was his body, Jn. ii. 21; plur., Ro. i. 24;
1 Co. vi. 15; Eph. v. 28; the gen. of the possessor is
omitted where it is easily learned from the context, as
I Comvasen2 Comvy. LOsiv..8 bebo x22 (23) etch 70
cdma THs TaTevwcews Huay, the body of our humiliation
(subjective gen.), i.e. which we wear in this servile and
lowly human life, opp. to 7d o. THs 56Ens adrod (1. €. Tod
Xpisrod), the body which Christ has in his glorified state
with God in heaven, Phil. ili. 21; 6:4 rod cw. rod Xpi-
orov, through the death of Christ’s body, Ro. vii. 4; dca
THS Tpoapopas TOU gw. Inoot Xpiorod, through the sacri-
ficial offering of the body of Jesus Christ, Heb. x. 10;
To o. THs capkés, the body consisting of flesh, i.e. the
physical body (tacitly opp. to Christ’s spiritual body,
the church, see 3 below), Col. i. 22 (differently in ii. 11
[see just below]); c@ua rod Oavdrov, the body subject to
death, given over to it [cf. W. § 30, 2 B.], Ro. vii. 24;
the fact that the body includes 7 capt, and in the flesh
also the incentives to sin (see odpt, 4), gives origin to
611
TWLATLKOS
the foll. phrases: wy Baoidevérw 4 auapria év TQ Ovntw
vuav gwpatt, Ro. vi. 12 [cf. W. 524 (488)]; ai mpates
Tov owparos, Ro. viii. 18. Since the body is the instru-
ment of the soul (2 Co. v. 10), and its members the in-
struments either of righteousness or of iniquity (Ro. vi.
13, 19), the foll. expressions are easily intelligible: oda
THs duaptias, the body subject to, the thrall of, sin (cf.
W. § 30, 2 B.], Ro. vi. 6; 7d ¢. THs capxés, subject to the
incitements of the flesh, Col. ii. 11 (where Rec. has 76 c.
TOv duaptiav Ths aapkos). dokdfere Tov Bedy €v TH THpare
buay, 1 Co. vi. 20; peyadivery Tov Xpiordv ev TO cwHpart,
elre 51a (wis, etre bia Gavdrov, Phil. i. 20; mapacrjoa ra
gwHpara Ovolav (Goav... TH Gew@ (i.e. by bodily purity [cf.
Mey. ad loc. ]), Ro. xii. 1. c. Since acc. to ancient
law in the case of slaves the body was the chief thing
taken into account, it is a usage of later Grk. to call
slaves simply oduara; once so in the N. T.: Rev. xviil.
13, where the Vulg. correctly translates by mancipia
[A. V. slaves], (cdpara rob otkov, Gen. xxxvi. 6; cupuara
kal xtHvn, Tob. x. 10; "Iovdatka swuara, 2 Mace. viii. 11;
exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by Lob. ad Phryn. p. 378 sq.
[add (fr. Soph. Lex. s.v.), Polyb. 1, 29,7; 4, 38, 4, also
3, 17, 10 bis]; the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ.
said cduata Soda, oikerixa, etc.). 2. The name is
transferred to the bodies of plants, 1 Co. xv. 57 sq.,
and of stars [cf. our ‘heavenly bodies’], hence Paul
distinguishes between cwyuara érovpdua, bodies celestial,
i.e. the bodies of the heavenly luminaries and of angels
(see éroupdmos, 1), and o. érlyea, bodies terrestrial (i. e.
bodies of men, animals, and plants), 1 Co. xv. 40 (adray
gua THs Tov b\wy picews .. . TO TOua TOD Kbcpov, Diod.
Tye 3. trop. cdua is used of a (large or small)
number of men closely united into one society, or family as
it were; a social, ethical, mystical body; so in the N. T.
of the church: Ro. xii.5; 1 Co. x.17; xii. 13; Eph. ii. 16 ;
iv. 16; v. 23; Col. i. 18; ii. 19; iii. 15; with rod Xpicrod
added, 1 Co. x. 16; xii.27; Eph.i.23; iv.12; v.30; Col.
i. 24; of which spiritual body Christ is the head, Eph.
iv. 15 sq.; v. 23; Col. i. 18; ii. 19, who by the influence
of his Spirit works in the church as the soul does in the
body. éy cGua x. év mvedpa, Eph. iv. 4. 4. noKa
and rd cGua are distinguished as the shadow and the
thing itself which casts the shadow: Col. ii. 17; oxcay
airnobuevos Bacirelas, is Hptacev éavT@~ 7d o Gua, Joseph.
b. j. 2, 2,5; [(Philo de confus. ling. § 37; Leian. Her-
mot. 79) J.
coparikds, -7, -dv, (oSua), fr. Aristot. down, corporeal
(Vulg. corporalis), bodily ; a. having a bodily form
or nature: cwuatikm elder, Lk. iii. 22 (opp. to doapuaros,
Philo de opif. mund. § 4). b. pertaining to the body:
h yuuvacta, 1 Tim. iv. 8 (és, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 65 éme-
Ovuiae wu. 4 Mace. i. 32; [ércBuular kat Adoval, Aristot.
eth. Nic. 7, 7 p. 1149», 26; al.; dwéxou rGv capkixdy kal
gwuaTikav émiduucav, ‘Teaching’ etc. 1, 4]).*
copatikas, adv., bodily, corporeally (Vulg.corporaliter),
i. gq. €v cwuarixe elder, yet denoting his exalted and spir-
itual body, visible only to the inhabitants of heaven, Col.
ii. 9, where see Meyer [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ].*
a7ra rpos
Larratpos, -ov, 6, [cf. W. 103 (97)], Sopater, a Chris-
tian, one of Paul’s companions: Acts xx. 4. [See Swoi-
martpos. |*
cwpevw: fut. cwpetow; pf. pass. ptep. cerwpevpevos;
(capds, a heap); [fr. Aristot. down]; to heap together,
to heap up: ti émt tt, Ro. xii. 20 (fr. Prov. xxv. 22; see
avOpaé) ; Twa Ten, to overwhelm one with a heap of any-
thing: trop. dyapriats, to load one with the conscious-
ness of many sins, pass. 2 Tim. iii. 6. [Comp.: én
owpeva. |*
XwoGévys, -ov, 6, Sosthenes ; 1. the ruler of the
Jewish synagogue at Corinth, and an opponent of Chris-
tianity: Acts xviii. 17. 2. a certain Christian, an
associate of the apostle Paul: 1 Co.i.1. The name
was a common one among the Greeks.*
Zwolratpos, -ov, 6, Sosipater, a certain Christian, one
of Paul’s kinsmen, (perhaps the same man who in Acts
xx. 4 is called Samarpos [q. v.; yet the latter was from
Bereea, Sosipater in Corinth]; cf. Sexpdarns and Swot-
kpdtys, Soxdetdys and Sworxdeidys, see Fritzsche, Ep. ad
Rom. vol. iii. p. 316; [ef. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp.
79, 80]): Ro. xvi. 21.*
carp, -jpos, 6, (cal), fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down,
Sept. for pur, npaw, [yw], savior, deliverer; pre-
server; (Vulg. [exe. Lk. i. 47 (where sal utaris) | salvator,
Luth. Heiland) [cf. B. D. s. v. Saviour, I.]; (Cic. in Verr.
ii. 2, 63 Hoc quantum est? ita magnum, ut Latine uno
verbo exprimi non possit. Is est nimirum ‘soter’, qui
salutem dedit. ‘The name was given by the ancients to
deities, esp. tutelary deities, to princes, kings, and in
general to men who had conferred signal benefits upon
their country, and in the more degenerate days by
way of flattery to personages of influence; see Passow
[or L. and 8.] s. v.; Paulus, Exgt. Hdbch. iib. d. drei
erst. Evang. i. p. 103 sq.; [Wetstein on Lk. ii. 11; B. D.
u.s.]). In the N. T. the word is applied to God, —car.
pov, he who signally exalts me, Lk.i.47; 6 o@r. quay, the
author of our salvation through Jesus Christ (on the
Christian conception of ‘to save’, see dw, b. [and
on the use of gwrnp cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iv. 14]), 1 Tim.
1.1; 11.3; Tit.i.35 it. 10; iii. 4; with dca "Inood Xpurrod
added, Jude 25 [Rec. om. &:a "I. X.]; corip mavtor,
1 Tim. iv. 10 (cf. Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 5; xxvi. (xxvii.) 1;
Is. xii. 2; xvii. 10; xlv. 15, 21; Mic. vii. 7, etc.) ;— to
the Messiah, and Jesus as the Messiah, through
whom God gives salvation: Lk. ii.11; Acts v. 31; xiii.
23; 6 owt. Tov kdopov, Jn. iv. 42; 1 Jn. iv. 14; quar,
2 Tim. i. 10; Tit. i. 4; ii. 13; iii. 6; ce@rjp "Incods Xpr-
ards, 2 Pet.i.[1 (where Rec.e2°! inserts judy) ], 11; ii.
20; ill. 18; 6 Kiptos kal cwrnp, 2 Pet. iii. 2; carhp rod
Gaparos, univ. (‘the savior’ i. e.) preserver of the body,
i. e. of the church, Eph. v. 23 (carp dvtes drdvrev éori
kat yevérwp, of God the preserver of the world, Aristot.
de mundo, ec. 6 p. 397°, 20); oarnp is used of Christ
as the giver of future salvation, on his return from
heaven, Phil. iii. 20. [The title is confined (with the
exception of the writings of St Luke) to the later writ-
ings of the N. T” (Westcott u. 8.) ]*
612
cowdpovéw
owtnpia, -as, 1), (swrnp), deliverance, preservation, safety,
salvation: deliverance from the molestation of enemies,
Acts vii. 25; with é& éy@pav added, Lk. i. 71; preserva-
tion (of physical life), safety, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi.
7. in an ethical sense, that which conduces to the soul’s
safely or salvation: owrnpia twit éyévero, Lk. xix. 9; ipyet-
aOai tt owrnpiav, 2 Pet. iii.15; in the technical biblical
sense, the Messiani¢ salvation (see cafw, b.), a.
univ.: Jn.iv. 22; Actsiv. 12; xiii.47; Ro. xi.11; 2 Th. ii.
13; 2 Tim. iii.15; Heb. ii.3; vi.9; Jude3; opp. to dma-
Aeta, Phil. i. 28; aidmos cwrnpia, Heb. v. 9 (for naw
rip, Is. xlv. 17); [add, Mk. xvi. WH in the (rejected)
‘Shorter Conclusion’]; 6 Adyos tis ww@rnpias tavtys, in-
struction concerning that salvation which John tie Bap-
tist foretold [ef. W. 237 (223)], Acts xiii. 26; rd edayyé-
Atov THs GoTnpias buov, Eph. i. 13; 666s owrnpias, Acts
xvi. 17; képas owrnpias (see képas, b.), Lk. i. 69; rjpepa
cetnpias, the time in which the offer of salvation is
made, 2 Co. vi. 2 (fr. Is. xlix. 8); karepya¢eoOat rHv Eavrod
oortnpiay, Phil. ii. 12; KAnpovopeivy owrnpiav, Heb. i. 14;
[6 dpxynyos tis owrnpias, Heb. ii. 10]; eis ww@rnpiav, unto
(the attainment of) salvation, Ro. [i. 16]; x. [1], 10;
1 Pet. ii. 2 [ Rec. om. ]. b. salvation as the present
possession of all true Christians (see ca{w, b.): 2 Co.
i. 63; vii. 10; Phil. i.19; carnpia ev apéoe dpaptiar,
Lk. i. 77; carnpias ruxetv pera ddEns aiwviov, 2 Tim.
1. 10: c. future salvation, the sum of benefits
and blessings which Christians, redeemed from all
earthly ills, will enjoy after the visible return of Christ
from heaven in the consummated and eternal king-
dom of God Ros xmietiee he veo Hebsrs2Se
Pet. i. 5, 10; Rev. xii. 10; €Amls carnpias, 1 Th. v. 8;
koniCerOa owrnpiay Yuyxar, 1 Pet.i. 9; 7 cwrnpia ro Oe
jpov (dat. of the possessor, sc. éoriv [cf. B. § 129, 22];
ef. AYIWwN mm, Ps. iii. 9), the salvation which is
bestowed on us belongs to God, Rev. vii. 10; 7 owrnpia
. +. Tov Geod (gen. of the possessor [cf. B. § 132, 11, i. a.],
for Rec. r@ Oe@) pay se. eariv, Rev. xix. 1. (Tragg.,
[Hdt.], Thue., Xen., Plat., al. Sept. for pur, nyaw,
Maw, nua escape.) *
cwrhptos, -ov, (awrnp), fr. Aeschyl., Eur., Thue. down,
saving, bringing salvation: 4 xdpis 9 ow@rnpwos, Tit. ii. 11
(Sap. i. 14; 3 Mace. vii. 18; %) oernpios Siara, Clem.
Alex. Paedag. p. 48 ed. Sylb.). Neut. 7d oarnpiov
(Sept. often for Myiw, less freq. for PW?), as often in
Grk. writ., substantively, safety, in the N. T. (the Mes-
sianic) salvation (see a@{w, b. and in gernpia): with
rov Geov added, decreed by God, Lk. iii. 6 (fr. Is. xl. 5);
Acts xxviii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35,12; he who em-
bodies this salvation, or through whom God is about to
achieve it: of the Messiah, Lk. ii. 30 (76 war. judy "In
ois Xp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 1 [where see Harnack]) ;
simply, equiv. to the hope of (future) salvation, Eph. vi.
17. (In the Sept. 75 car. often for Dow, a thank-offer-
ing [or ‘ peace-offering’], and the plur. occurs in the same
sense in Xen., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Leian., Hdian.) *
ow-ppovew, -@; 1 aor. impv. cappovycate; (cHpPpwr,
q- v.); fr. Tragg., Xen., Plat. down; to be of sound
cwppovitw
mind, i. e. a. to be in one’s right mind: of one
who has ceased datuoviteoOa, Mk. v.15; Lk. viii. 35;
opp. to ékarjva, 2 Co. v. 13, (the awdpovayv and paveis
are contrasted in Plat. de rep. i. p. 331 ¢.; ca@ppovodca
and paveioa, Phaedr. p. 244b.; 6 peunvas.. . eowppd-
ynoe, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6). b. to exercise self-control;
i. e. a. to put a moderate estimate upon one’s self,
think of one’s self soberly: opp. to imepdpoveiv, Ro. xii.
3 B. to curb one’s passions, Tit. ii. 6; joined with
vn (as in Leian. Nigrin. 6), [R. V. be of sound mind
and be sober], 1 Pet. iv. 7.*
cadppovitw, 3 pers. plur. ind. -ovow, Tit. ii. 4 L mrg. T
Tr, al. subjunc. -(wot; to make one cadpar, restore one
to his senses; to moderate, control, curb, discipline; to hold
one to his duty; so fr. Eur. and Thue. down; to admon-
ish, to exhort earnestly, [R. V. train]: twa foll. by an inf.
Tite. 4
cappovicpds, -ov, 6, (aapporita) 1. an admon-
tshing or calling to soundness of mind, to moderation and
self-control: Joseph. antt. 17, 9,2; b. j. 2,1,3; App.
Pun. 8,65; Aesop. fab. 38; Plut.; [Philo, lege. alleg. 3,
69]. 2. self-control, moderation, (cappovcpot ties
} merdvorat tav vewv, Plut. mor. p. 712 ¢. i. e. quaest.
conviv. 8, 3): mvedpa cwdpoucpov, 2 Tim. i. 7, where
see Huther; [but Huther, at least in his later edd., takes
the word transitively, i. q. correction (R. V. disci-
line); see also Holtzmann ad loc. |.*
613
Ttara.Twpla
cwdpdvas, (cHppwr), adv., fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down,
with sound mind, soberly, temperately, discreetly: 'Tit. ii.
12 (Sap. ix. 11).*
cwppocivy, -ns, 7, (capper), fr. Hom. (where cao dpo-
avy) down ; a. soundness of mind (opp. to pavia,
Xen. mem. 1, 1,16; Plat. Prot. p.323 b.): pyyara cwppo-
cums, words of sanity [A. V. soberness], Acts xxvi.
b. self-control, sobriety, (ea virtus, cujus pro-
prium est, motus animi appetentes regere et sedare sem-
perque adversantem libidini moderatam im omni re ser-
vare constantiam, Cic. Tusc. 3, 8,17; 4 owdpoo. ear
kat nOovdv tiwv Kai émOupidv éyxpdrea. Plat. rep. 4,
430e.; cf. Phaedo p. 68¢.; sympos. p. 196¢.; Diog.
Laért. 3, 91; 4 Macc. i. 31; aadpoodivn Sé dpery Ov fv
mpos Tas Oovas TOU GaHpaTos oUTws Exovow ws 6 vopos
keAevet, dko\agia S€ rovvaytiov, Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 9):
1 Tim. ii. 15; joined with aides (as in Xen. Cyr. 8, 1,
30 sq.) ibid. 9; [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xx., and see
aidas |.*
codppwv, -ov, (fr. cdos, contr. cas [cf. cago, init.], and
pry, hence the poet. cad dpav; cf. appar, rarewdsppor,
peyadddppeov), [fr. Hom. down] ; a. of sound mind,
sane, in one’s senses, (see cwppovéew, a. and cwdpocivn,
anys b. curbing one’s desires and impulses, self-con-
trolled, temperate, [R.V. soberminded], ([émibupet 6 oa-
pov av dei cat ws Set kai Gre, Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 15 fin.],
see sodpoovrn, b.): 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i. 8; ii. 2, 5.*
\20.
T
|T, 7: on the receding of rz in the vocabulary of the N. T.
before oa, see under 3, ¢, s.|
TaBépvat, -av, ai, (a Lat. word [ef. B. 17 (15)]), tav-
erns: Tpets TaBépvat (gen. Tprav TaBepvav), Three Tav-
erns, the name of an inn or halting-place on the Ap-
pian way between Rome and The Market of Appius
[see” Amos]; it was ten Roman miles distant from the
latter place and thirty-three from Rome (Cic. ad Attic.
2, 10, (12)) [cf. B.D. s. v. Three Taverns]: Acts xxviii.
15.*
Topi0a [WH TaBecda, see their App. p. 155, and s. v.
et,4; the better accent seems to be -6a (see Kautzsch as
below) ], 4, (820, a Chald. name in the ‘emphatic state’
'Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. u. s. w. p. 11, writes it
x10, stat. emphat. of #720], Hebr. *3y, i. e. Sopxds,
q.v.), Tabitha, a Christian woman of Joppa, noted for
her works of benevolence: Acts ix. 36,40. [Cf. B. D.
8s. v. Tabitha. ]*
waypa, -ros, Td, (rdoow) 5
beex arranged, thing placed in order.
a. pron. that which has
b. spec. a body
of soldiers, a corps: 2S. xxiii. 13; Xen. mem. 3, 1, 11;
often in Polyb.; Diod. 17, 80; Joseph. b. j. 1, 9,1; 8, 4,
2; [esp. for the Roman ‘legio’ (exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v.
3)]; hence univ. a band, troop, class: éaoros év TG i8io
tdaypare (the same words occur in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 37,
3 and 41, 1), 1 Co. xv. 23, where Paul specifies several
distinct bands or classes of those raised from the dead
[A. V. order. Of the ‘order’ of the Essenes in Joseph.
b. j. 2, 8, 3. 8)"
taxtés, -7, -dv, (racow), fr. Thue. (4, 65) down, or-
dered, arranged, fixed, stated: taxti qpépa (Polyb. 3, 34,
9; Dion. Hal. 2, 74), Acts xii. 21 [A. V. set].*
Todowt@wpeéw, <3: 1 aor. impv. tadautwpnoate; (Tadai-
mwpos, q- V-); fr. Eur. and Thuc. down; Sept. for
TW; a. to toil heavily, to: endure labors and hard-
ships; to be afflicted; to feel afflicted and miserable: Jas.
iv. 9. b. in Grk. writ. and Sept. also transitively
[ef. L. and S. s. v. II.], to afflict: Ps. xvi. (xvii.) 93 Is.
bo. i big
Tadatrwpla, -as, 7, (Tadairwpos. q. V.), hardship, trouble,
TaXal7wpos 614
calamity, misery: Ro. iii. 16 (fr. Is. lix. 7); plur. [mis-
eries], Jas. v. 1. (Hdt., Thuc., Isocr., Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., al.; Sept. chiefly for 1¥.) *
tadalrwpos, -ov, (fr. TAAAQ, TAAQ, to bear, undergo,
and md@pos a callus [al. rwpds, but cf. Suidas (ed. Gaisf. )
p. 3490 c. and note; al. connect the word with epaw,
meipaw, cf. Curtius § 466]), enduring toils and troubles ;
afflicted, wretched: Ro. vii, 24; Rev. iii. 17. (Is. xxxiii.
1) Lobsexill. LOR Sap, iis Lbs xii. 10); [Pind], Traces,
Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Aesop., al.) *
TadavTiaios, -a, -ov, (Tddavrov, q. V.; like Spaxpatos,
oTlypmiatos, SaxTuAatos, AiTpiatos, etc.; see Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 544), of the weight or worth of a talent: Rev. xvi. 21.
(Dem., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
Ttadavrov, -ov, 76, [TAAAQ, TAAQ [to bear]) ; 1.
the scale of a balance, a balance, a pair of scales (Hom.).
2. that which is weighed, a talent, i.e. a. a weight,
varying in different places and times. b. asum of
money weighing a talent and varying in different states
and acc. to the changes in the laws regulating the cur-
rency ; the Attic talent was equal to 60 Attic minae
or 6000 drachmae, and worth about 200 pounds sterling
or 1000 dollars [cf. L. and S.s.v. II. 2b.]. But in the
N. T. probably the Syrian talent is referred to, which
was equal to about 237 dollars [but see BB. DD. s. v.
Money]: Mt. xviii. 24; xxv. 15 sq. [18 Lchm.], 20, 22,
24 sq. 28. (Sept. for "35, Luth. Centner, the heaviest
Hebrew weight ; on which see Kneucker in Schenkel y.
p. 460 sq.; [BB. DD. s. v. Weighis].) *
Todvda [WH radecéd, see their App. p. 155, ands. v.
ec, ©; more correctly accented -@4 (see Kautzsch, as be-
low, p. 8; ef. Taf. Proleg. p. 102)], a Chald. word xmv>v
[ace. to Kautzsch (Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 12) more cor-
rectly amy, fem. of won ‘a youth’ ], a damsel, maiden:
Mk. v. 41.*
tapetov [So T WH uniformly], more correctly rametov
[R GL Tr in Mt. vi. 6], (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 493; W.
94 (90); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 88 sq.]), -ov, 74, (Tapedw), fr.
Thuc. and Xen. down; 1. a storechamber, store-
room: Lk. xii. 24 (Deut. xxviii. 8; Prov. iii. 10 [Philo,
quod omn., prob. lib. § 12]). 2. a chamber, esp. ‘an
inner chamber’; a secretroom: Mt. vi. 6; xxiv. 26; Lk.
xii. 8, (Xen. Hell. 5,4, 5; Sir. xxix. 12; Tob. vii. 15, and
often in Sept. for 1).*
Tavuv, See viv, 1 f. a. p. 430° top.
TaEis, -ews, 7, (tdoow), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down;
1. an arranging, arrangement. 2. order, i.e. a fixed
succession observing also a fixed time: Lk. i. 8. 3.
due or right order: kara rdév, in order, 1 Co. xiv. 40;
orderly condition, Col. ii. 5 [some give it here a military
sense, ‘ orderly array’, see orepéwya, C.]. 4. the post,
rank, or position which one holds in civil or other affairs ;
and since this position generally depends on one’s talents,
experience, resources, rdéis becomes equiv. to character,
fashion, quality, style, (2 Macc. ix. 18; i. 19; od yap
ioroplas, adda Koupeakis Nadas éuol doxodor Taki exer,
Polyb. 3, 20, 5): xara thy rdév (for which in vii. 15 we
have kara Thy duovdrnTa) Medxioedéx, after the manner
TATELVOW
of the priesthood [A. V. order] of Melchizedek (acc.
to the Sept. of Ps. cix. (cx.) 5 "M737-5v), Heb. v. 6,
10; vi. 20; vii. 11, 17, 21 (where T Tr WH om. the
phrase).*
tatreivos, -7), -dv, fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down, Sept.
for “3, 120, DEW, etc., low, i.e. a. prop. not rising
far from the ground: Ezek. xvii. 24. b. metaph.
a. as to condition, lowly, of low degree: with a subst.
Jas. i. 9; substantively of ramevol, opp. to durdora, Lk.
i. 52; i.q. brought low with grief, depressed, (Sir. xxv.
23), 2 Co. vil. 6. Neut. 7a rarewd, Ro. xii. 16 (on
which see cuvamrdyw, fin.). B. lowly in spirit, hum-
ble: opp. to vrepnpavos, Jas. iv. 6; 1 Pet. v. 5 (fr. Prov.
iii. 34) ; with 77 xapdlg added, Mt. xi. 29 (7r@ mwvevduari, Ps.
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19); in a bad sense, deporting one’s self
abjectly, deferring servilely to others, (Xen. mem. 3, 10, :
5; Plat. legg. 6 p. 774 c.; often in Isocr.), 2 Co. x. 1.
(Cf. reff. s. v. rare:voppoctvn, fin. ]*
Tamervoppocvvn, -7s, 7, (Tarevidpwy ; Opp. to peyado-
ppoctyn, vWnroppoctyyn, [cf. W. 99 (94)]), the having a
humble opinion of one’s self ; a deep sense of one’s (moral)
littleness ; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind; (Vulg.
humilitas, Luth. Demuth): Acts xx. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Phil.
ii. 8; Col. iii. 12; 1 Pet. v. 5; used of an affected and
ostentatious humility in Col. ii. 18, 25. (The word occurs
neither in the O. T., nor in prof. auth. — [but in Joseph.
b. j. 4, 9, 2 in the sense of pusillanimity ; also Epictet.
diss. 8, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See Trench, N. T. Syn.
§ xlii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.l.c.; Zezschwitz, Profangri-
citit, u.s.w., pp. 20, 62; W. 26].) *
Taewodppey, -ov, (Tarevds and dpjv), humble-minded,
i.e. having a modest opinion of one’s self: 1 Pet. iii. 8,
where Rec. Piddppoves. (Prov. xxix. 23; in a bad sense,
pusillanimous, mean-spirited, uixpods 7 TUXN Kal mep.oects
moet kal tarewddpovas, Plut. de Alex. fort. 2, 4; [de
tranquill. animi 17. See W. § 34, 3 and reff. s. v. rame-
voppoovrn, fin. |.) *
Tatretvow, - ; fut. rareveow ; 1 aor. érarelvwoa; Pass.,
pres. ramrevoduar; 1 aor. érarewsOnv; 1 fut. ramrecvwO7-
gouar; (tamewds); to make low, bring low, (Vulg. hu-
milio) ; a. prop.: épos, Bouvdy, i.e. to level, reduce
to a plain, pass. Lk. iii. 5 fr. Is. xl. 4. b. metaph.
to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circum-
stances ; i.e. a. to assign a lower rank or place to ; to
abase ; T.vd, pass., to be ranked below others who are hon-
ored or rewarded [R. V. to humble]: Mt. xxiii. 12; Lk.
xiv. 11; xviii. 14. B. rarevd éuautdy, to humble or
abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Co. xi. 7; in pass. of
one who submits to want, Phil. iv. 12; éavrév, of one
who stoops to the condition of a servant, Phil. ii. 8. c.
to lower, depress, [Eng. humble]: rwvd, one’s soul, bring
down one’s pride ; éuaurév, to have a modest opinion of
one’s self, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid
of all haughtiness, Mt. xviii. 4; xxiii. 12; aks exive ils
Xviii. 14; pass. ramecvoduar évwdmiov xuplov (see évwmuoy, 2
b. fin.) in a mid. sense [B. 52 (46)], to confess and de-
plore one’s spiritual littleness and unworthiness, Jas. iv.
10 (in the same sense rarewvody thy Puxny avrod, Sir. li.
TATELVWOLS
17; vii. 17; Sept. for WE] 730, he aflicted his soul, of
persons fasting, Lev. xvi. 29, 31; xxiii. 27, 32; Is. lviii.
8, 5, 10; riv Puxjy Tivos, to disturb, distress, the soul
of one, Protev. Jac. c. 2. 13. 15 [rather, to humiliate ; see
the passages]) ; vrd rhv xeipa Tr. Oeod, to submit one’s
self in a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Pet.
v. 6 (cf. Gen. xvi. 9) ; i.g. to put to the blush, 2 Co. xii.
21. ({Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., Diod., Plut.; Sept. for
mv, Saw and Saya, N27, DDT, etc.) [See reff. s. v.
Tamevoppoctyy. | * '
Tatelvwcts, -ews, 7, (Tarevdw), lowness, low estate, [hu-
miliation]: Lk. i. 48; Acts viii. 33 (fr. Is. lili. 8); Phil.
iii. 21 (on which see cua, 1b.) ; metaph. spiritual abase-
ment, leading one to perceive and lament his (moral)
littleness and guilt, Jas. i. 10, see Kern ad loc. (In va-
rious senses, by Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut.;
Sept. for 30.) [See reff. s. v. rarecvoppoovyn. | *
Tapacow ; impf. érdpaccov; 1 aor. érdpata ; Pass., pres.
impv. 3 pers. sing. rapaccécOw; impf. érapaccduny ; pf.
TeTapayuat; Laor. érapax6yv ; fr. Hom.down; to agitate,
trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and
fro) ; a. prop.: 7d vdwp, Jn. v. 4 [RL], 7, (Ezek.
XXxli. 2; tov mévrov, Hom. Od. 5, 291; 76 wéXayos, Eur.
Tro. 88; rédv rorayudy, Aesop. fab. 87 (25)). b. trop.
to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of
mind, disturb his equanimity ; to disquiet, make restless,
(Sept. for 533, etc.; pass. tapdocoua for 127, to be
stirred up, irritated); a. to stir wp: Tov bxXov, Acts
Xvii. 8; [rovs dxdous, Acts xvii. 13 LT Tr WH]. B.
to trouble: tivd, to strike one’s spirit with fear or dread,
PaASsesWUGy Ws ors) Kavi Zor Mile. svi, OO) Auk) L2t sexy.
88]; 1 Pet. iii. 14; rapaocera 4 xapdla, Jn. xiv. 1, 27;
to affect with great pain or sorrow: éavréy (cf. our to
trouble one’s self), Jn. xi. 33 [A. V. was troubled (some
understand the word here of bodily agitation) ] (ceauvrév
uh Tdpacoe, Antonin. 4, 26); rerdpaxrac 7 Yvxy, JN. xii.
27 (Ps. vi. 4) ; érapdxOn TO wvevpari, In. xiii. 21. y:
to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of
one by suggesting scruples or doubts, (Xen. mem. 2, 6,
13): Gal. i. 7; v. 10; revd Adyors, Acts xv. 24. [Comp.:
Sia-, éx- Tapdoow. | *
Tapaxy, -7s, 7, (rapdoow), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, dis-
turbance, commotion: prop. Tod vdaros, Ju. v. 4 [RL];
metaph. a twmult, sedition: in plur. Mk. xiii. 8 RG.*
TAdpaxos, -ov, 6, (Tapdcow), commotion, stir (of mind):
Acts xii. 18; twmult LA. V. stir], Acts xix. 23. (Sept.;
Xen., Plut., Leian.) *
Tapcets, -éws, 6, (Tapods, q.v.), belonging to Tarsus,
of Tarsus: Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39.*
Tapods, -o0, 7, [on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 317,
318], in prof. auth. also Tapool, -dv, ai, Tarsus, a mari-
time city, the capital of Cilicia during the Roman period
(Joseph. antt. 1, 6, 1), situated on the river Cydnus,
which divided it into two parts (hence the plural Tapgol).
It was not only large and populous, but also renowned
for its Greek learning and its numerous schools of phi-
losophers (Strab. 14 p. 678 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 303
sq.]). Moreover it was a free city (Plin. 5, 22), and
615
,
TavTa
exempt alike from the jurisdiction of a Roman governor,
and the maintenance of a Roman garrison; although it
was not a Roman ‘colony’. It had received its free-
dom from Antony (App. b. civ. 5, 7) on the condition
that it might retain its own magistrates and laws, but
should acknowledge the Roman sovereignty and furnish
auxiliaries in time of war. It is now called Tarso or
Tersus, a mean city of some 6000 inhabitants [others
set the number very much higher]. It was the birth-
place of the apostle Paul: Acts ix. 30; xi. 25; xxii. 3.
[BB.DD. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq. cf. 2.]*
Taptapdw, -@: 1 aor. ptcp. raprapwoas ; (rdprapos, the
name of a subterranean region, doleful and dark, re-
garded by the ancient Greeks as the abode of the
wicked dead, where they suffer punishment for their evil
deeds ; it answers to the Gehenna of the Jews, see yé-
evva); to thrust down to Tartarus (sometimes in the Scho-
liasts) [cef. W. 25 (24) n.]; to hold captive in Tartarus :
Twa cepats [q. V.] (dou, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [A. V. cast down to
hell (making the dat. depend on rapédwxev) ].*
Taco: 1 aor. @ratia; pf. inf. reraxévar (Acts xviii. 2
T Tr mrg.); Pass., pres. ptep. tacoduevos; pf. 3 pers.
sing. réraxrat, ptep. Terayuévos ; 1 aor, mid. ératduny; fr.
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; Sept. for DW, and occa-
sionally for ]02, 8, MW, etc.; to put in place; to sta-
tion ; a. to place in a certain order (Xen. mem. 3,
1, 7 [9]), to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint: Tuva,
pass. ai éfovelac bd Oeod rerayuévar eioiv [A. V. or-
dained |, Ro. xiii. 1; [ka:povs, Acts xvii. 26 Lchm.]; éavrdy
els Suaxoviay rivl, to consecrate [R. V. set] one’s self to
minister unto one, 1 Co. xvi. 15 (éri rhy dtaxoviay, Plat.
de rep. 2p. 371 ¢.; els Thy dovdetav, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 11);
éc0r Foav TeTaypéevor eis (wiv aiwvov, aS Many as were
appointed [A. V. ordained] (by God) to obtain eternal
life, or to whom God had decreed eternal life, Acts xiii.
48; rid brd Twa, to put one under another’s control
[A. V. set under], pass., Mt. viii. 9 L WH in br., cod.
Sin.; Lk. vii. 8, (dé twa, Polyb. 3, 16,3; 5, 65, 7; Diod.
2, 26,8; 4,9, 5); rut re, to assign (appoint) a thing to
one, pass. Acts xxii. 10 (Xen. de rep. Lac. 11, 6). b.
to appoint, ordain, order: foll. by the acc. with inf., Acis
xv. 2; [xviii. 2T Trmrg.]; (foll. by an inf., Xen. Hier.
10,4; Cyr. 4,5,11). Mid. (as often in Grk. writ.) prop.
to appoint on one’s own responsibility or authority : ot
érdtato avrois 6 “Incots sc. wopever@ar, Mt. xxviii. 16 ;
to appoint mutually, i.e. agree upon: huépay (Polyb. 18,
19, 1, etce.), Acts xxviii, 28. [Comp.: dva-(-mar), dv7e-,
dro-, da-, émi-dia-(-war), éri-, Tpo-, Tpog-, Tuvy-, VTo-Tdgow,
Syn. see xeXevw, fin.]*
Taitpos, -ov, 6, [fr. r. meaning ‘thick’, ‘stout’; allied
w. oravpés, q. V.; cf. Vanicek p. 1127 ; Fick Pt. i. p. 246.
Cf. Eng. steer], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for "1%, a bull (ox):
Mt. xxii.4; Acts xiv. 13; Heb. ix.13; x. 4.*
ravTa, by crasis for ra a’rd: 1 Th.ii. 14 RL mrg., and
some manuscripts [(but see Tdf. on Lk. as below) ] and
edd. also in Lk. vi. 23 [L mrg.], 26 [L mrg.]; xvii. 30
GL. [See W.§ 5,3; B.10; WH. App. p. 145; Meister-
hans § 18, 1: cf. adrés, III. ] *
Tay 616 Té
taby, -7s, 7), (Panrw), fr. Hdt. down; Sept. several
times for MP and 3p, burial: Mt. xxvii. 7.*
Tabos, -ov, 6, (Gaza) ; 1. burial (so from Hom.
down). 2. a grave, sepulchre, (so fr. Hes. down) :
Mt. xxiii. 27, 29; xxvii. 61, 64, 66; xxviil. 1; in a com-
parison: tapos avewypevos 6 AdpvyE avror, their speech
threatens destruction to others, it is death to some one
whenever they open their mouth, Ro. iii. 13. Sept. for
12), and sometimes for m3p.*
Taxa, (rayvs), adv. ; 1. hastily, quickly, soon, (so
fr. Hom. down). 2. as often in Grk. writ. fr. [Hes.,
Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, perhaps, peradventure: Ro. v. 7;
Philem. 15.*
[raxevov, WH for raxtov, q. v.; and cf. s. v. et, e.]
Tax€ws, (rayvs), adv., [fr. Hom. down], quickly, shortly:
Ee xive cia xvin6> in: XI. ol; 2 Oo0.1v.49s Gale os
Phil. ii. 19, 24; 2 Tim. iv. 9; with the added suggestion
of inconsiderateness [hastily]: 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Tim. v. 22.*
taxuvos, -7, -dv, fr. Theocr. down, swift, quick: of
events soon to come or just impending, 2 Pet. i. 14; ii.
1, (Is. lix. 7; Sap. xiii. 2; Sir. xviii. 26).*
taxiov [WH rayerov; see their App. p. 154 and ef.
et, ¢], (neut. of the compar. raxyiwy), adv., for which the
more ancient writ. used @accov or Oarrov, see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 76 sq.; W. § 11, 24.; [B. 27°(24)]; more
swiftly, more quickly: in comparison, Jn. xx. 4 [ef. W.
604 (562)]; with the suppression of the second mem-
ber of the comparison [W. 243 (228)]: Heb. xiii. 19
(sooner, se. than would be the case without your prayers
for me), 23 (se. than I depart) ; Jn. xili. 27 (sc. than you
seem to have resolved to); 1 Tim. iii. 14 RG T (se. than
I anticipated).*
raxirra, (neut. plur. of the superl. rdyvoros, fr. rayus),
adv., [fr. Hom. down], very quickly: @s taxtota, as
quickly as possible [A. V. with all speed], Acts xvii. 15.*
7x0, -ous, 76, fr. Hom. down, quickness, speed: ev raxet
(often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down),
quickly, shortly, Acts xii. 7; xxii. 18; [xxv.4]; Ro. xvi.
20; speedily, soon, (Germ. in Bilde), Lk. xviii. 8; 1 Tim.
rh HEI GMM VIBES" litera ILS ooh, (OS
raxv, (neut. of the adj. raxvs), adv., [fr. Pind. down],
quickly, speedily, (without delay): Mt. v. 25; xxviii. 7
sq.; Mk. xvi. 8 Rec.; Lk. xv. 22 L Trbr. WH; Jn. xi.
29; epyeoba, Kev. i. 5 Rec.P°", 16; ii.11; xi. 14;
xxii. 7,12, 20; forthwith, i.e. while in the use of my
name he is performing mighty works, Mk. ix. 39.*
tax vs, -eia, -v, fr. Hom. down, quick, fleet, speedy: opp.
to Bpadvs (as in Xen. mem. 4, 2, 25), eis rd dxodoa, [A. V.
swift to hear], Jas. i. 19.*
ré, (as 6¢ comes fr. 87, pev fr. pny, so ré fr. the adv.
TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with cai, cf. Curtius §§ 27, 647;
Vanicek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat.
§ 195]), a copulative enclitic particle (on the use of
which cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. IT.
2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently
in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat
rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in
Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times;
nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in
the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of
Rev., viz. i.2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from
the particle «ai in that the latter is conjunctive, ré
adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baumlein (Griech.
Partikeln, p. 145), «ai introduces something new under
the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas ré
marks it as having an inner connection with what pre-
cedes; hence kai is the more general particle, ré the
more special and precise; «ai may often stand for ré,
but not ré for kai. (Cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer., s. v. xai,
init.) ].
1. re, standing alone (i. e. not followed by another ré,
or by kai, or other particle), joins a. parts of one
and the same sentence, as ouvayévres cupBovdAwv re
AaBdvres, Mt. xxviii. 12; €v dyamn mvevpari te mpadryros,
1 Co. iv. 215 "add; Acts ii: '335"x. 22° x1. 26," x 11s
xxii. 10 [WH txt. om.], 24; xxiv. 5; xxvii. 20 sq.; xxviii.
PBIB NEI 6G)8 i B13 18 Ih b. complete sentences:
Jn! iv. 42; vi. 18; Acts 11.873 iv. do; v.19, 99,42. ve
7,12sq.; vili. 3, 13, 25,31; x. 28, 33, 48 [here T Tr WH
dé (see 6 below)]; xi. 21; xii. 6,8[L Tr WH 6¢ (see 6
below) ], 12; xiii. 4; xv. 4,39; xvi. 13, 23 [WH txt. 6é
(see 6 below)], 34; xvii.5 [RG], 19 [Trtxt. WH 8¢ (see 6
below) J, 26; xviii. 11 [RG], 26; xix. 11, 18, 29; xx. 3, 7;
xxi. [18* Tdf. ], 18°, 20 [not Lchm.], 37; xxii. 8; xxiii. 5;
xxiv. 27; xxvii. 5, 8,17, 29 [Trmrg. 6¢ (see 6 below)],
43; Ro. ii. 19; Heb. xii. 2; introduces a sentence serv-
ing to illustrate the matter in hand, Acts i. 15; iv.
ih3s 2. re... kal, and té Kai, not only... but also,
as well. ..as, both...and; things are thus connected
which are akin, or which are united to each other by
some inner bond, whether logical or real; [ace. to W.
439 (408); Biumlein u. s. p. 224 sq., these particles give
no intimation respecting the relative value of the two
members; but acc. to Rost, Griech. Gram. § 134,4; Don-
aldson, Gr. Gram. § 551; Jelf § 758; Klotz ad Devar.
II. 2, p. 740, the member with «cai is the more em-
phatic]; a. parts of one and the same sentence
(which is completed by a single finite verb): éc6lewv re
kal rive, Lk. xii. 45; oBntpa te cat onpeta, Lk. xxi. 11;
dpxtepets Te Kal ypaupareis, Lk. xxii. 66; aovnpots re Kat
ayabovs, Mt. xxii. 10; ‘Hpodns re kai Idvtios TWiAGaros,
Acts iv. 27; dvdpes re kai yuvaixes, Acts viii. 12; ix. 2;
Xxll. 4; mavrn Te x. mavraxovd, Acts xxiv. 3; dopadf Te
kat BeBaiay, Heb. vi. 19; add, Actsi.1; ii. 9 sq.; ix. 29;
XIV. 1.55 XV.0> XVI A. xix. AO dG soot eee
XxVi. 22; Ro.i.12, 14,16; ai. 9: x. 12-40 Co.) Gal,
24, 30; Heb. iv. 12° Rec., 12"; v.1 [here Lom. Tr WH
br. ve], 7, 14; vil. 83.1x..9, 195 x, 33< x1. os AS, alle cis
ré is annexed to the article, which is—either repeated
after the cai before the following noun, Lk. ii. 16; xxiii.
12; Jn. ii.15; Acts v. 24; viii. 38; xvii. 10; xviii. 5;
xxi, 25 [RG]; xxvi. 30;— or (less commonly) omitted,
Actsi. 135; xiii. 1; [xxi. 25 LT Tr WH]; Ro.i.20. ré
is annexed to a preposition, which after the following
kai is——either repeated, Acts i. 8 where L om. Tr br. the
repeated ¢y; Phil. i. 7 [Rom.Lbr. the second év];—
= a ee ae a i
TELXOS
or omitted, Acts x. 39 [Trtxt. WH]; xxv. 23; xxviii.
23. ré is annexed to a relative pronoun, although it
does not belong so much to the pronoun as to the sub-
stantive connected with it, Acts xxvi. 22. 1t is annexed
to an adverb, ére te kai, [and moreover], Acts xxi. 28.
When more than two members are joined together, the
first two are joined by ré cai or ré.. . «ai, the rest by
kai: Lk. xii.45; Acts i.13; v.24[RG]; xxi. 25; 1Co.
mh Ss Jeleley. mig Ce b. ré... «ai connect whole sen-
tences (each of which has its own finite verb, or its own
subject): Acts ii.3sq. RG; xvi. 26 RG; té... «al...
cat, Acts xxi. 30. 3. re... d€ are so combined
that ré adds a sentence to what has been previously
said, and d¢ introduces something opposed to this added
sentence [W. 439 (409)]: Acts xix. 2 LT Tr WH; 3RG
LTrtxt. WH txt.; xxii. 28 RG. 4. rTé...7é pre-
sents as parallel (or coordinate) the ideas or sen-
tences which it connects, as... so (ef. Kiihner § 520; [Jelf
§ 754, 3; W.§ 53,4]; on the Lat. que... que cf. Herzog
on Sallust, Cat. 9, 3): Acts ii. 46; xvi. 11 sq. RG;
xvii. 4; xxvi. 10 L T Tr WH txt., 16; Heb. vi. 2 [Tr br.
WH txt. om. second ré], (Sap. vii. 13; xv. 7);
Petree Nctsux. Loupe’ Ar W Ea;
Acts xxvi. 20 [LT Tr WH].
eav Te, see eav, I. 3 e.
Te kal
GG (hh ob 6 Baie cis [Ou
eire .. . etre, see et, III.
HOR MeaviTer-tl- PTE Ss pre ss
Té, neither ...nor...and, Acts xxvii. 20 (Xen. an. 4,
4, 6). 5. ré yap (which began to be frequent fr.
Aristot. down), Lat. namque, etenim, for also, for indeed,
[W. 448 (417)], are so used that the former particle
connects, the latter gives the reason: Ro. i. 26 (so that
in 27 we must read 6puoiws dé cai [with L Tr mrg.], see
in 6 below); vii. 7 (4 Mace. v. 22); ré yap . . . cai, Heb.
ii. 11; édv re yap... éav te, for whether .. . or (whether),
Ro. xiv. 8; édv re yap kai, for although (Lat. namque
etiamsi), 2 Co. x. 8 [RG]. 6. The reading often
varies in codd. and edd. between ré and d€; as, Mt. xxiii.
6; Acts iii. 10; iv. 14; viii. 1,6; ix. 24;'xill. 46; Jude
6, ete. [see in 1 b. above]. In Ro. i. 27, following Lehm.
[Tr mre.], we ought certainly to read dpoiws dé kai; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc. p. 77; [B. 361 (309) n.]. 7. As
respects Position (ef. Kiihner § 520 Anm. 5; W. 559
sq. (520)), ré is properly annexed to that word or idea
which is placed in parallelism with another (as "Iovdatoi
re kai "EXAnves); but writers also take considerable lib-
erty in placing it, and readily subjoin it to an article or
a preposition; for examples see in 2 a. above.
retxos, -ous, 7d, [cf. Aryyavw; allied with it are Eng.
‘dike’ and ‘ditch ’], fr. Hom. down, Sept. very freq. for
min ‘wall’; the wall round a city, town-wali: Acts ix.
25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. xi. 30; Rev. xxi. 12, 14 sq., 17-19.*
TEKBAPLOV, -ov, TO, (fr. Texuaipw to show or prove by
sure signs; fr. réxuap a sign), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
that from which something is surely and plainly known ;
an indubitable evidence, a proof, (Hesych. rexpnprov-
onpeiov adnbés): Acts i. 3 (Sap. v.11; 3 Mace. ili. 24).*
texvioy, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of réxvov, q. v-; [on the accent,
ef. W. 52; Chandler § 347]), a little child; in the N.T.
used as a term of kindly address by teachers to their
617
TEKVOD
disciples [always in the plur. little children: Mk. x. 24
Lehm.]; Jn. xiii. 33; Gal. iv. 19 (where L txt. T Tr WH
mrg. réxva); 1Jn. ii. 1, 12, 28; iii. 7 [WH mrg. radial,
185 iv. 4; v.21. (Anthol.)*
TeKvoyovew, -; (rexvoydvos, and this fr. réxkvov and
TENQ) ; to beget or bear children: 1'Tim. v.14. (An-
thol. 9, 22, 4.)*
rexvoyovia, -as, 7, child-bearing: 1 Tim. ii. 15. (Aris-
tot. ha. 7; 1,/8' fip. 582°, 28)].) *
TéKVOV, -ov, TO, (Tikrw, Texetv), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
chiefly for }3, sometimes for 192, offspring; plur. chil-
dren ; a. prop. a. univ. and without regard to
sex, child: Mk. xiii. 12; Lk. i. 7; Acts vii.5; Rev. xii.
A Se gplur, Misi 5) °x. 215 xv. 265: Ms win 275 i
19; Lk.i. 17 5: xiv. 26; Acts xxi. 5; 2Co. xii. 14; Eph:
viv beiColanim2hieqeswil! Thais 711 saly Limvi eat
i.6; 2Jn.1, 4,13, and often; with emphasis: to be
regarded as true, genuine children, Ro. ix. 7; réxva
erayyeAias, children begotten by virtue of the divine
promise, Ro. ix. 8; accounted as children begotten by
virtue of God’s promise, Gal. iv. 28; Ta 7téxva ths capkés,
children by natural descent, Ro. ix. 8. in a broader
sense (like the Hebr. 0°33), posterity: Mt. ii. 18; ili. 9;
Lkeai. $;) Acts 1.°39)5; xin! 33) (32): with emphasis:
genuine posterity, true offspring, Jn. viii. 39; (of wo-
men) to be regarded as children, 1 Pet. iii. 6. B.
spec. a male child, a son: Mt. xxi. 28; Acts xxi. 21;
Rey. xii. 5; in the voe., in kindly address, Mt. xxi. 28 ;
Lk. ii. 48; xv. 31. b. metaph. the name is trans-
ferred to that intimate and reciprocal relationship formed
between men by the bonds of love, friendship, trust,
just as between parents and children; a. in affec-
tionate address, such as patrons, helpers, teachers, and
the like, employ; voc. child (son), my child, children,
(Lat. fili, mi fili, etc., for carissime, etc.): Mt. ix. 2; Mk.
ii. 5; x. 24 [here Lehm. rexvia, q. v.]- B. just as in
Hebrew, Syriac, Arabic, Persian, so in the N. T., pupils
or disciples are called children of their teachers, because
the latter by their instruction nourish the minds of their
pupils and mould their characters (see yevvdw, 2 b.):
Philem. 10; 2 Tim. i. 2; 3 Jn.4; in affectionate ad-
dress; GalJiv. 19'L txt. T Tr WH meg. 31 Dimer 182
Tim. ii. 1; with év cupio added, 1 Co. iv. 17; ev miore,
1 Tim. i. 2; cara xowny rioru, Tit. i. 4, (8237 133, sons
i.e. disciples of the prophets, 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 35; 2 K.
ii. 3, 5, 7; among the Persians, ‘sons of the Magi’ i. e.
their pupils). y- téxva Tov Oeod, children of God, —in
the O. T. of ‘the people of Israel’ as especially dear to
God: Is. xxx. 1; Sap. xvi. 21;— inthe N.T., in Paul’s
writings, all who are animated by the Spirit of God (Ro.
viii. 14) and thus are closely related to God: Ro. viii.
16 sq. 21; Eph.v.1; Phil. ii. 15; those to whom, as dear-
ly beloved of God, he has appointed salvation by Christ,
Ro. ix. 8; inthe writings of John, all who ex Oeod eyev-
mOnaav (have been begotten of God, see yevvdw, 2d.) : Jn.
i. 12sq.; 1 Jn. iii. 1 sq. 10; v. 2; those whom God knows
to be qualified to obtain the nature and dignity of his
children, Jn. xi. 52. [Cf. Westcott on the Epp. of St.
TEKVOTPOPew
John, pp. 94, 120; “In St. Paul the expressions ‘sons
of God’, ‘children of God’, mostly convey the idea of
liberty (see however Phil. ii. 15), in St. John of g uile-
lessness and love; in accordance with this distinction
St. Paul uses vioi as well as réxva, St. John réxva only”
(Bp. Lghtft.) ; cf. vids tod Geod, 4.] 8. rexva Tov Oua-
BodXov, those who in thought and action are prompted by the
devil, and so reflect his character: 1 Jn. iii. 10. C.
metaph. and Hebraistically, one is called réxvov of any-
thing who depends upon it, is possessed by a desire or
affection for it, is addicted to it; or who is liable to any
fate; thus in the N. T. we find a. children of a
city, i. e. its citizens, inhabitants, (Jer. ii. 30; Joel ii.
23; 1 Mace. i. 38; viol Sidv, Ps. cxlix. 2): Mt. xxiii.
$7; Lk. xi. 84; xix. 44; Gal. iv. 25. B. réxva tis
codias, the votaries of wisdom, those whose souls have,
as it were, been nurtured and moulded by wisdom: Mt.
xi. 19 (where T Tr txt. WH have hastily adopted épyav
for réxvwv; cf. Keim ii. p. 369 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 43 sq.;
per contra, see Tdf.’s note and WH. App. ad loc. ]); Lk.
vii. 35; réxva traxons, those actuated by a desire to obey,
obedient, 1 Pet. i. 14; rod dards, both i!lumined by the
light and loving the light, Eph. v. 8. Y- kaTdpas
texva, exposed to cursing, 2 Pet. ii. 14; rjs épyns, doomed
to God’s wrath or penalty, Eph. ii. 3; ef. Steiger on 1
Pet. i. 14; W. 238 (223); [B. 161 (141)]. In the same
way é€xyovos is used sometimes in Grk. writ.; as, éxy.
ddixias, Serhias, Plat. lege. 3 p. 691¢.; 10 p. 901e.
[Syn. ré«vov, vids: r.and vi. while concurring in point-
ing to parentage, differ in that 7. gives prominence to the
physical and outward aspects, vi. to the inward, ethical, legal.
Cf. b. y. above; vids rod Ged, fin.; mats, fin. and reff. (esp.
that to Hohne).]
Tekvo-Tpodpéw, -@: 1 aor. erexvorpédynaa; (Texvotpddos,
and this from réxvov and tpépw) ; to bring up children:
1 Tim. v.10. (qéper ddwp, drav rexvorpopy, sc. the bee,
Aristot. h. a. 9, 40 [27], 14 [p. 625», 20].) *
TEKTWY, -OVOS, 6, (TeKeiv, TikTw; akin to Téxvn, Teva,
hence prop. ‘ begetter’ [Curtius § 235]), fr. Hom. down,
Sept. for wn; @ worker in wood, a carpenter: Mt. xiii.
55; Mk. vi. 3 [see WH. App. on the latter pass.].*
TEELOS, -a, -ov, (TéAos), in classic Grk. sometimes also
-os, -ov, (cf. W. § 11, 1), fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times
for Dv, DA, etc.; prop. brought to its end, finished ;
wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect: épyov,
Jas.i.43 ayarn, 1 Jn. iv. 183; 6 vdpos, Jas. i. 25; [ depnua,
Jas. i. 17]; redecorépa oxnvy, a more perfect (excellent)
tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11; 76 réAevov, substantively, that
which is perfect: consummate human integrity and vir-
tue Ro. xii. 2 [al. take it here as an adj. belonging to
O€Anpa]; the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in
by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10; of
men, full-grown, adult; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl.
Ag. 1504; Plat. legg.11 p.929¢c.): Heb. v.14; réA. avnp
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4sq.; 8, 7,6; Philo de cherub. § 32; opp.
to madiov vymtov, Polyb. 5, 29,2; for other exx. fr. other
auth. see Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 133 sq.), péxpe
. . eis Gvdpa téXcov, until we rise to the same level of
618 TEAELOW
knowledge which we ascribe to a full-grown man, until
we can be likened toa full-grown man, Eph. iv. 13 (opp.
to vymio, 14); TréAetoe tais ppeci (opp. to madia and
unmatovtes tais ppeci), 1 Co. xiv. 20 [here A. V. men] ;
absol. oi réAevor, the perfect, i.e. the more intelligent,
ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Co. ii. 6[R.V. mrg.
full-grown] (opp. to vnmtot év Xp, iii. 1; in simple opp.
to vamos, Philo de legg. alleg. i. § 30; for p23, opp. to
pavOaver, 1 Chr. xxv. 8; [ef. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 28;
Phil. iii. 15]); of mind and eharacter, one who has
reached the proper height of virtue and integrity: Mt.
v. 48; xix. 21; Phil. iii. 15 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. u.s.]; Jas.
i.4; in an absol. sense, of God: Mt. v.48; rédeuos
avnp, Jas. ili. 2 (red. Sixavos, Sir. xliv. 17); as respects
understanding and goodness, Col. iv. 12; réA. dvOpwmos
év Xpioro, Col. i. 28 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.u.s. Syn. see
6AdkAnpos, and Trench § xxii.].*
TeNELOTNS, -NTOS, 9, (TEAELOS, G. V-), perfection ; a.
i. e. the state of the more intelligent : Heb. vi. 1 [here R.V.
mrg. full growth]. b. perfection: (rhs ayanns, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 50,1 [where see Harnack]); absol. moral
and spiritual perfection, Col. iii. 14 [A.V. perfectness], on
which pass. see cuvdecpos, 1. (Prov. xi. 3 Alex.; Judg.
ix. 16,19; Sap. vi. 16; xii.17; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 5;
Plat. deff. p. 412 b. d.; [Aristot. phys. 3, 6 p. 207%, 21; 8,
7 p. 261%, 36]; Antonin. 5, 15.) (Cf. reff. s. v. réXetos,
and B. Hartung, Der Begriff der rededrns im N. T.
(4to. Leipz. 1881).]*
reXetow (in prof. auth. also reAedw, which Hat. uses
everywhere [and which is “the prevailing form in Attic
prose” (L. and 8.)]; other writ. use both forms indif-
ferently), -6: 1 aor. éreXeiwoa; pf. rereAciwxa; Pass. (or
Mid.), pres. reAecodpar; pf. rereAeiwpar; 1 aor. ereAer@Onv;
(réXevos); fr. Hdt., Soph., Thuc., and Plat. down; equiv.
to réAevov mae, to make perfect or complete; 1. to
carry through completely; to accomplish, finish, bring to
an end: rov Spdpov, Acts xx. 243; 76 €pyov, Jn. iv. 34; v.
36; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi.16; rév otkov, 2 Chr. viii. 16); ras
npépas, Lk. ii. 43; mid. [pres. ef. B. 38 (33) ] reecodpar,
I finish, complete, what was given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32
[some (so A. V.) take it here as pass., J am perfected
(understanding it of his death; ef. Hilicott, Life of our
Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n.1; Keim ii. 615 n.1)]. 2. to
complete (perfect), i.e. add*what is yet wanting in order
to render a thing full: tiv ayamny, pass., 1 Jn. ii. 5; iv.
12,17; 4 Svvapis pow ev dobeveia tedXevovTat, MY power
shows itself most efficacious in them that are weak, 2 Co.
xii. 9 RG; &k rev epyov 4 miotis erehec@On, by works
faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, Jas. ii.
22; reredetwrai tis ev TH Ayam, one has been made perfect
in love, his love lacks nothing, 1 Jn. iv. 18 (of reXew-
Oévres ev ayamn, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 3; [redkec@oae thy
exkAnoiav cov ev tH ayamn aov, ‘Teaching’ ete. 10, 5]);
iva dot TeTEAEL@pevor eis Ev, that they may be perfected into
one, i.e. perfectly united, Jn. xvii. 23. tid, to bring
one’s character to perfection: #5n rereAeiwpat, I am already
made perfect, Phil. iii. 12 (Sap. iv. 13; & Wuyn... érap
redewwOijs kal BpaBeiwv kai orepdaver a&iwO7s, Philo de legg.
TENELWS
alleg. 3, 23; uy)... reAewOeioa ev dperdav Odo Kal
ént Tov dpov edixopevy Tov Kadod, id. de somn. 1, 21; i.q.
to be found perfect, Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 10). 3. to
bring to the end (goal) proposed: oddév, Heb. vii. 19;
twa, [to perfect or consummate] i.e. to raise to the state
befitting him: so of God exalting Jesus to the state of
heavenly majesty, Heb. ii. 10; in pass., Heb. v. 9; vii.
28; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who
put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, pass.,
Heb. xi. 40; xii. 23, ([Act. Petr. et Paul. § 88, ed. Tdf.
p- 39; Act. Barnab. § 9, id. p. 68; cf. ‘Teaching’ ete.
16, 2]; with paprupio added, of the death of the apost.
Paul, Euseb. h. e. 2, 22, 2 [ef. Heinichen’s note on 7, 15,
5]); to make one meet for future entrance on this state
and give him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Heb.
x. 1,14; twa kata cuveidnow, Heb. ix. 9; cf. Bleek, Brief
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 297 sqq.; C. R. Késtlin, Lehrbegriff
des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843) p. 421
sqq-; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Hebr.-Br., § 42, p. 340 sqq.;
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 72
sqq- |. 4. to accomplish, i.e. bring to a close or ful-
filment by event : tiv ypadpny, the prophecies of Scripture,
pass., Jn. xix. 28 [cf. W. 459 (428); B. § 151, 20].*
tedelus, (rédevos), adv., perfectly, completely: 1 Pet. i.
13. [Plat., Isocr., Aristot., ete.; cf. W. 463 (431).]*
tedeiwots, -ews, 7, (TeAetdw), & completing, perfecting;
a. fulfilment, accomplishment; the event which verifies
a promise (see reAewdo, 4): Lk. i. 45 [Judith x. 9; Philo
de vit. Moys. iii. § 39]. b. consummation, perfection,
(see teAedw, 3): Heb. vii. 11. (In various senses in
Aristot., Theophr., Diod.) [(Cf. reff. s. v. reXerdw, 3.] *
TeAELWTHS, -00, 6, (TeAEtdw), (Vulg. consummator), a per-
Jecter: ths mictews, one who has in his own person raised
faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest
example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs no-
where else.*
tekerhopew, -@; (reAcopdpos, fr. reXos and dépw); to
bring to (perfection or) maturity (sc. xaprovs) : Lk. viii.
14. (Used alike of fruits, and of pregnant women and
animals bringing their young to maturity; 4 Mace. xiii.
19; Theophr., Geop., Philo, Diod., Joseph., al.; [Ps. lxiv.
(ixv.) 10 Symm. ].) *
tehevtaw, -@; 1 aor. érehevtyoa; pf. ptep. rereeutnKas
(Jn. xi. 39L T Tr WH); (redeurn); fr. Hom. down; 1.
trans. to finish; to bring to an end or close: rév Biov, to
finish life, to die, often fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down. 2.
intrans. [cf. B. §130, 4] to have an end or close, come to an
end; hence to die, very often so fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down (Sept. for m3), and always in the N.'1.: Mt. ii.
19; ix. 18; xxii. 25; Mk. ix. 44, 46 [(these two vss. T
WH om. Tr br.)], 48; Lk. vii. 2; Jn. xi. 39 L T Tr WH;
Acts ii. 29; vii. 15; Heb. xi. 22; @avdrw redevtdrw (in
imitation of the Hebr. ny nyo, Ex. xxi. 12, 15-17,
etc.), [A. V. let him die the death i. e.] let him surely die
[ W. 339 (319); B. § 133, 22], Mt.xv.4; Mk. vii. 10.*
teeth, -7s, 7), (TeAew), end [see réNos, 1 a. init.]; the
end of life, decease, death: Mt. ii. 15 (and often in Grk.
writ. fr. Pind. and Thuc. down; Sept. for nin; with
619
TENOS
Bidrovo added, Hom. Il. 7, 104; rod Biov, Hdt. 1, 30, and
often in Attic writ.).*
Ted€w, -@; 1 aor. érédeoa [cf. W. § 13, 3 c.]; pf. reréAexa
(2 Tim. iv. 7); Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. reAeirac (2 Co.
xii. 9 L T Tr WH); pf. reréAeopar; 1 aor. éredeoOnv;
1 fut. rekeoOnoopa; (rédos); fr. Hom. down; aa
bring to a close, to finish, to end : érn, pass., passed, finished,
Rev. xx. 3, 5, 7, ({so fr. Hom. and Hes. down; Aristot.
h. a. 7, 1 init. p. 580°, 14 év tots éreot rots dis’ éwra tere-
Necpevots]; tpiav Tehoupevwy nuepov, Leian. Alex. 38);
tov Spopov (Hom. Il. 23, 373, 768; Soph. Electr. 726),
2 Tim. iv. 7; rods Adyous, Mt. vii. 28 LT Tr WH; xix.
1; xxvi. 1}; ras mapaBodds, Mt. xiii. 53; [aype reAeoOdow
ai wAnyai, Rev. xv. 8]; a rare use is redeiv Tas moAets, i. e.
your flight or journey through the cities [R. V. ye shall
not have gone through the cities, etc.], Mt. x. 23 (similar
are avvewv Tous Torovs, Polyb. 5, 8, 1; ra €An, 3, 79,5; con-
summare Italiam, Flor. 1, (13) 18, 1; explere urbes, Ti-
bull. 1, 4, 69; conficere aequor immensum, Verg. Georg.
2, 541; also xii. signorum orbem, Cic. nat. deor. 2, 20,
52); with the ptep. of a verb (like dpyouat, ravopat, cf.
W. § 45, 4a.; B. § 144, 14), Mt. xi. 1. 2. to per-
form, execute, complete, fulfil, (so that the thing done
corresponds to what has been said, the order, command,
ete), ie: a. with special reference to the sub-
ject-matter, to carry out the contents of a command :
Tov vopov, Ro. ii. 27 [ef. W. 134 (127)]; Jas. ii. 8; ray
emtOupiay (i. €. 7d emOupovpevov), Gal. v. 16. B. with
reference also to the form, to do just as commanded, and
generally involving a notion of time, to perform the last
act which completes a process, to accomplish, fulfil:
Gmavra (mavra) ta xara vopov, Lk. ii. 39; THv paprupiar,
the duty of testifying, Rev. xi. 7; 7d puvornpiov, pass.
Rey. x. 7 [cef. W. 277 (260)]; 76 Bamriopa, pass. Lk. xii.
50; wavra, pass. Jn. xix. 28 [the distinction betw. rehéw
and reAetow may be seen in this vs.]; rods Adyous (Ta
pneata) Tov Geov, pass. Rev. xvii. 17; dmavra (mavra) ra
yeypappeva, Acts xiii. 29; pass., Lk. xviii. 31 [see ypdpa,
2¢.]; with év euoi (in me) added, in my experience, Lk.
xxii. 837; ev wAnyais, in the infliction of calamities, Rev.
xv. 1; rereXeorat, [A. V. it is finished] everything has
been accomplished which by the appointment of the
Father as revealed in the Scriptures I must do and bear,
Jn. xix. 30. i.q. reAetdw, 2, q. v. (made perfect): 2 Co.
sa OL Tyr Ww Ee. 3. to pay: ta didpaypa, Mt.
Xvii. 24; ddpous, Ro. xiii. 6, (rov dpov, Plat. Ale. 1 p.-
123 a.; ra réAn, often in Attic writ.). [COoMp.: dzo-,
dua-, ek-, €mt-, Tuv- TeEw. | *
réXos, -ovs, 76, [cf. Curtius § 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
mostly for YP3 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the
limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ.
always of the end of some act or state, but not of the
end of a period of time, which they call reAeury ; in the
Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is
everywhere called zépas) : tis Baotdeias, Lk. i. 33; was,
Heb. vii. 3; rod catapyoupevov, 2 Co. iii. 13; Ta réAn Tov
aiwvev, 1 Co. x. 11 (réAos rev nuepov, Neh. xiii. 6; Trav
énta eray, 2K. viii. 3; dpxi Kat TéAos Kal peadtys xpdvor,
réXos
Sap. vii. 18); i. q. he who puts an end to: teAos vdéuou
Xpiords, Christ has brought the law to an end (ragip
éatw avOpwmots tedos tod Bivvy Oavatos, Dem. 1306, 25),
Ro. x. 4; ef. Fritzsche ad loc., vol. ii. p. 377 sq. mavrav
ro TéAos, the end of all things (i. e. of the present order
of things), 1 Pet. iv. 7; also in the phrases éws réXovs,
1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co.i.13; péype redovs, Heb. iii. 6 [Tr mrg.
WH br. the cl.], 14; dype tédouvs, Heb. vi. 14; Rev. ii.
26. What ‘end’ is intended the reader must deter-
mire by the context; thus, ro reAos denotes the end of
the Messianic pangs (dolores Messiae; see @div) in Mt.
xxiv. 6, 14, (opp. to dpyy @divev); Mk. xiii. 7 (cf. 9);
Lk. xxi. 9; 7d réXos in 1 Co. xv. 24 denotes either the
end of the eschatological events, or the end of the res-
urrection i.e. the last or third act of the resurrection (to
include those who had not belonged to the number of of
Tov Xpictov €v tH mapovoia avrov), 1 Co. xv. 24 cf. 23;
see De Wette ad loc.; Weitzel in the Theol. Stud. u.
Krit. for 1836, p. 978; Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wis-
sensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 388 sqq.; [yet ef. Heinrici in
Meyer (6te Aufl.) ad loc.]. eis r€Nos, —to the very end
appointed for these evils, Mt. x. 22; xxiv.13; Mk. xiii.
13; also at the end, at last, finally, Lk. xviii. 5 (Vulg. in
novissimo) [i. e. lest at last by her coming she wear me
out; but al. take it i.q. Hebr. ny29 (cf. Job xiv. 20 ete.
see Trommius) and connect it with the ptep., lest by her
coming to the last i.e. continually; see trwiaga, sub fin. } ;
Jn. xiii. 1 [al. to the uttermost, completely (cf. our to the
very Jasi); see Westcott, and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aufl.)
ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 29], ef. dyamda, sub fin.,
(Xen. oec. 17, 10; Hes. opp. 292; Hdt. 3, 40; 9, 37;
Soph. Phil. 409; Eur. Ion 1615; Ael. v.h. 10, 16); to
the (procurement of their) end, i.e. to destruction [A. V.
to the uttermost (cf. reff. u. s.)], 1 Th. ii. 16 (for maa?
2 Chr. xii. 12); réAos éxew, to have an end, be finished,
(often in Grk. writ.), Lk. xxii. 37 [al. give réAos here
the sense of fulfilment (cf. reX€w, 2)]; i. q. to perish, Mk.
iii. 26. ro O€ reAos, adverbially, finally (denique vero):
1 Pet. iii. 8 (Plat. lege. 6 p. 768 b.; Kai 76 ye réXos, ibid.
5 p. 740 e.; but generally in prof. auth. réAos in this
sense wants the article; cf. Passow ii. p. 18574; [L. and
S. s. v. I. 4 a.]). b. the end i.e. the last in any suc-
cession or series: ()) dpx7 Kai (rd) TéAos, of God, who by
his perpetuity survives all things, i. e. eternal, Rev. i. 8
Ree.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. c. that by which.a thing is
Jinished, its close, issue: Mt. xxvi. 58; final lot, fate, as
if a recompense: with a gen. of the thing, Ro. vi. 21
sq-; Heb. vi. 8; 1 Pet. i.9; with a gen. of the person
whom the destiny befalls, 2 Co. xi. 15; Phil. iii. 19; 1
Pet. iv. 17; ov kupiov (gen. of author), the closing ex-
perience which befell Job by God’s command, Jas. v. 11
(referring to Job xlii. [esp. 12]). d. the end to
which all things relate, the aim, purpose: 1 Tim. i. 5
(often so in philos. fr. Plat. de rep. 6 p. 494a. down; cf.
Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 378). 2. toll, custom, [i. e.
an indirect tax on goods; see ddpos and kjvoos|: Mt.
xvii. 25; Ro. xiii. 7, (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Aeschin., Dem.,
alishd Maec, x,. 31): 0515/85)"
620
TEO TApakoVTAaTEcaapES
:
Tedavns, -ov, 6, (fr. réAos [(q. v. 2)] tax, and dvéoua to
buy; cf. dnpootans, dyovns, Sexatovns), fr. Arstph.,
Aeschin., Aristot., Polyb. down; 1. a renter or
farmer of taxes (Lat. publicanus); among the Romans
usually a man of equestrian rank. 2. a tax-gatherer,
collector of taxes or tolls, (Vulg. publicanus incorrectly ;
[so A. V. publican]), one employed by a publican or far-
mer-general in collecting the taxes. The tax-collectors
were, as aclass, detested not only by the Jews but by other
‘nations also, both on account of their employment and ot
the harshness, greed, and deception, with which they
prosecuted it; (hence they are classed by Artem. oneir.
1, 23; 4,57, with camnAos Kal Tots pera avatdeias Cot Kat
Anorais Kat fvyoxpovoras kal mapadoyiorais avOpwrats ;
Leian. necyom. c. 11 puts together potyoi, mopvoBocxot
kat TeA@vat Kal Kddakes Kai cveopavra: [ Theophr. charact.
6 (epi amovoias) mavdoyedau, Kal mopvoBooKjoa, Kat
Tedkovnca|): Mt. v.46, 47 Rec.; x. 3; Lk. iii.12; v. 27,
293; vil. 295 xviii. 10, 11,13; the plur. is joined with
dpaptedol, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; [xi. 19]; Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk.
v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1; with wépva, Mt. xxi. 31 sq.3 6 €Om-
kos k. 6 TeAwyns, Mt. xviii. 17. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Zoll,
Zollner; [BB. DD. s.v. Publican; Wetstein on Mt. v.
46; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 515 sqq. ].*
TeAoVLOV, -ov, Td, (TeAwuns, Cf. Sexat@vior) ; [1. cus-
toms, toll: Strabo 16, 1, 27. 2.] toll-house, place of
toll, tax-office: the place in which the tax-collector sat
to collect the taxes [Wiclif, tolbothe]: Mt.ix.9; Mk. ii.
MALO AD Baas Pile
Tépas, gen. teparos, pl. repara (cf. xépas, init.), rd, (ap-
parently akin to the verb rnpéw; accordingly something
so strange as to cause it to be ‘ watched’ or ‘observed’ ;
[others connect it with dornp, aorpamn, etc., hence ‘asign
in the heavens’; Vaniéek p. 1146; Curtius § 205]; see
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 270), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for Ndi, a prodigy, portent; miracle [A.V. wonder] per-
formed by any one; in the N. T. it is found only in the
plur. and joined with onyeta; for the passages see onyetov,
p- 574".
Téprttos, -ov, 6, Tertius, an amanuensis of the apostle
Paul: Ro. xvi. 22. [B. D:s. v.]*
Téprvddos, -ov, 6, Tertullus, a Roman orator: Acts
xxiv. 1 sq. [See é7rwp.] *
rercapaxovra It G, but several times [i. e. betw. 8 and
14] in Lchm. and everywhere in T WH (and Tr, exe.
Rev. xxi. 17) reacepdxovra (a form originally Ionic [yet
cf. B. as below]; see Kiihner § 187, 5; B. 28 (25) sq. 3
cf. W.43; [Tdf. Proleg. p.80; WH. App. p. 150]), oi,
ai, rd, indecl. numeral, forty: Mt. iv. 2; M2. i. 13; Lk.
iv. 2; Jn. ii. 20; ete.
[rercapaxovra-Sto, forty-two: Rev. xi. 2 Rec.be; xiii. 5
Rece.ez Sed
rercapakovraerys (T Tr WH reocep-, see reaaapaxor-
ta; LT accent -érys, see éxarovraétns), -€s, (resoapaxor-
ra, and éros), of forty years, forty years old: Acts vii.
23; xiii. 18. (Hes. opp. 441.) *
[rexcapaxovra-réccapes, -ov, forty-four: Rev. xxi. 17
Rec. bes els *]
TETT APES
Técoapes, -wr, ol, ai, reaoapa, Td, Zen. Terodpor, dat.
recoapou, ({Lchm. reads réooepes 7 times to 33, Tdf. 6
to 35, Tr 6 to 33, WH 6 to 34; Lchm. sometimes has
téooepa, Tr WH always; L Tr sometimes have réo-
oepas (see WH. App. p. 150)]; but no editor adopts e in
the gen. or dat. ; see treovapaxovra and reff.), four: Mt.
Melivers lige Mic ds" ksi 37s Jne xh 7 5) Acta x. iis
Rev. iv. 4, etc.
Teroapes-Kat-SeKaros, -n, -ov, the fourteenth: Acts xxvii.
27, 33.*
[tTexoep- see reaaap- (cf. Meisterhans § 21, 4)]
TeTapTaios, -a, -ov, (rérapros), an ordinal numeral, used
in answer to the question on what day ? one who does or
suffers a thing till the fourth day or on the fourth day:
Teraptaids ear, i. e. he has been four days in the tomb,
or it is the fourth day since he was buried, [A. V. he
hath been dead four days], Jn. xi. 39 (Hdn yap Hoav wep-
mraiot, already five days dead, Xen. an. 6, 4 (2), 9).*
téraptos, -7, -ov, (fr. rérrapes), the fourth: Mt. xiv. 25;
Mk. vi. 48; Acts x. 30; Rev. iv. 7, etc. [From Hom.
down. |
terpa-, in composition i. q. teropa, Aeolic [Doric
rather ] for réooapa.
[Terpaapxew, see rerpapyxew. |
[Tetpadpxys, see Terpapxns.- |
Tetptiywvos, -ov, (fr. rérpa, q. v., and yavos [i. e. ywvia]),
quadrangular, square; [A. V. four-square] (Vulg. in
quadro positus); Rev. xxi. 16. (Sept.; Hdt., Plat., Ar-
istot., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
TeTpadioy, -ov, Td, (rerpds, the number four), @ quater-
nion (16 ek Tecodpwr cuvecros, Suid.) : tév orpati@rar,
a guard consisting of four soldiers (for among the Ro-
mans this was the usual number of the guard to which
the custody of captives and prisons was intrusted ; two
soldiers were confined with the prisoner and two kept
guard outside), Acts xii. 4, where the four quaternions
mentioned were on guard one at a time during each of
the four watches. (Philo in Flace. § 13 i.e. ed. Mang.
vol. ii. p. 533, 25.)* :
TeTpakio-x (Avot, -at, -a, (rerpaxis and yidoe), four thou-
sand: Mt. xv. 38; xvi.10; Mk. viii. 9,20; Acts xxi. 38.
[(Hdt., Arstph., Thue., al.) ]*
TeTpakécrot, -ar -a, (fr. rerpaxis, and the term. -dotos
indicating one hundred; [ef. G. Meyer, Gr. Gram. § 16
f.]), four hundred: Acts v. 36; vii. 6; xiii. 20; Gal. iii.
17. [(Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.) ]*
tetpdunvos, -ov, (fr. rérpa, q. V-, and pny; cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 549), of four months, lasting four months: te-
Tpdpnvds eotw sc. xpovos, Jn. iv. 35, where Ree. rerpd-
pnvev eorw, as in Jude. xix. 2 Alex.; xx. 47. (Thuc.,
Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
Tetpatdéos, (-ods), -dn (-7), -dov (-obv), (fr. rérpa, and
mAdos, to which corresponds the Lat. -plus in duplus,
triplus, fr. IAEQ [but cf. Vanicéek p. 501]), quadruple,
fourfold: Lk. xix. 8. (Sept.; Xen., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
TeTpd-trovs, -ouv, Zen. -odos, (fr. rérpa, q. V-, and rovs a
foot), fr. Hdt. and Thue. down, four-footed : neut. plur.
sc. beasts, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro.i. 23. (Sept. for 73.) *
621
TNALKOUTOS
terpapxéw ['T WH rerpaapy. (see WH. App. p. 145)],
-®; (rTerpdpxns, q. V.), to be governor of a tetrarchy, be
tetrarch: with a gen. of the region, Lk. iii.1. [(Joseph.
Bajeen LO; 7.)
verpapxys [‘l’ WH rerpadpyns; see the preceding word,
and ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117], -ov, 6, (fr. rérpa, q. v-, and
apx@), a tetrarch; i.e. 1. a governor of the fourth
part of any region. Thus Strabo, 12 p. 567, states that
Galatia was formerly divided into three parts, each one
of which was distributed into four smaller subdivisions
each of which was governed by ‘a tetrarch’; again, in
lib. 9 p. 430, he relates that Thessaly, before the time
of Philip of Macedon, had been divided into four ‘ tet-
rarchies’ each of which had its own ‘tetrarch’. pak
the word lost its strict etymological force, and came to
denote the governor of a third part or half of a country,
or even the ruler of an entire country or district provided
it were of comparatively narrow limits; a petty prince
[ef. e. g. Plut. Anton. 56, 3,i. p. 942a.]. Thus Antony
made Herod (afterwards king) and Phasael, sons of
Antipater, tetrarchs of Palestine, Joseph. antt. 14, 13, 1.
After the death of Herod the Great, his sons, Archelaus
styled an ethnarch but Antipas and Philip with the title
of ‘tetrarchs’, divided and governed the kingdom left
by their father; Joseph. antt. 17, 11, 4. Cf. Fischer,
De vitiis ete. p. 428; Win. RWB. s. v. Tetrarch, and
esp. Keim in Schenkel v. p. 487 sqq. The tetrarch
Herod Antipas is mentioned in Mt. xiv.1; Lk. iii. 19 ;
bes (2 ANG saig 16.
TevX@, See TUYXAVO.
teppde, -@: 1 aor. ptep. reppwoas; (réppa ashes) ; to
reduce to ashes: 2 Pet. ii. 6. (Aristot. [?], Theophr.,
Dio Cass., Philo, Antonin., al.) *
réXvn, -ns, 7, (fr. Texetv, see Textwv), fr. Hom. down,
art: univ. Rev. xviii. 22 [here A. V. craft]; of the plas-
tic art, Acts xvii. 29; of a trade (as often in Grk. writ.),
Acts xviii. 3.*
rexvirns, -ov, 6, (réxvn), fr. Soph. [(?), Plato], Xen.
down, Sept. several times for WIM, an artificer, crafts-
man: Acts xix. 24, 38; Rev. xviii. 22; of God the framer
of the higher and eternal course of things, Heb. xi. 10
(of God the architect of the world, Sap. xiii. 1, where
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. p. 234 [ef. also Trench, Syn.
§ ev.; Piper, Monumentale Theol. § 26]).*
vhkw: fr. Hom. down; to make liquid; pass. to become
liquid, to melt; to perish or be destroyed by melting: 2 Pet.
iii. 12, where for the pres. 3 pers. sing. tnxerat Lehm.
gives the fut. taxnoerae [see WH on the pass. and in
their App. p. 171], ef. Is. xxxiv. 4 raxjoovrar macat ai
Suvdpets rGv ovpavav. (CE. Veitch s. v.]*
m™mAavyas, adv., (fr. the adj. rpAavyjs, far-shining, fr.
myve afar, and adyn radiance), at a distance and clear-
ly: Mk. viii. 25 [where TWH mrg. dyAavyés, q. v-]-
(adj., Job xxxvii. 20; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 9; and esp. in
the Grk. poets fr. Pind. down; tyAavyecrepov dpay, Diod.
1, 50.)*
TnAtKk-obros, -avTy, -oiTo, (fr. rydikos and obros [but
then (it is urged) it should have been tnAryodros; hence
TNPEw
better connected with airds: as. al. Cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. § 79 A. 4; Kiihner §173, 6: Vanicek p. 268; L. and
S. s.v. obros, init.]),in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl.down; 1.
of such an age; used of any age, of so great an age, so
old; also so young. 2. of so great a size, in bulk:
mAota, Jas. ili. 4. 3. intensively, such and so great
(Lat. tantus talisque): 2 Co. i. 10; Heb. ii. 3; Rev. xvi.
teh
rnpew, -@; impf. érnpouv; fut. tnpyow; 1 aor. érnpyoa;
pf. rernpnxa, 3 pers. plur. ternpjxaow (Jn. xvii. 6 RG)
and trernpyxav (ibid. LT Tr WH, [see yivouat, init. ]) ;
Pass., pres. typodpat; impf. érnpovpnv; pf. rernpnuac;
1 aor. érnpyOnv; (typos, found only once, Aeschyl. suppl.
248, where it is doubtful whether it means ‘ guarding’ or
‘watching ’), fr. Pind., Soph., Thuc. down; Sept. several
times for WW, I¥i, ete.; to attend to carefully, take
care of; i.e. a. prop. to guard: twd, a prisoner,
Mt. xxvii. 36, 54; Acts xvi. 23; pass., Acts xii. 5;
[xxiv. 23]; xxv. 4, 21[°]; ri, xii. 65 of rnpodvres, [((R.V.)
the watchers] the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant.iii.3). —_b.
metaph. to keep: twa, one in that state in which he is,
Tv éavtov mapevov, his own virgin daughter, sc. as a
Virgin i. e. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37; €avrdv, himself such
as he is, i. e. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but here T Tr
WH airév]; with a pred. accus. added: G@yvov, 1 Tim.
v. 22; domdov ard Tov kdopou, Jas. i. 27; aBapy tim,
2 Co. xi. 9, (dadovv, Antonin. 6, 30; twa duepmrov 7a
Oem, Sap. x. 5); ri with a pred. accus. 1 Tim. vi. 14
[but see in ce. below]; pass. tnpodpa, with an adv.,
duéumros, 1 Th. v. 23; with a dat. of the pers., Xpucra,
devoted to Christ, [W. 421 (392)], Jude 1; rnpew tia
ev tun, to keep ini. e. cause one to persevere or stand
firm in a thing: év ro dvdpare Geod (see p. 447° bot.), Jn.
xvii. 11 sq.; év dydwn Oeod, Jude 21; twa &k Tivos, by
guarding to cause one to escape in safety out of ete.: ék
Tov movnpov, out of the power and assaults of Satan, Jn.
xvii. 15 [ef. B. 327 (281); W. 410 (383)]; ee ris Spas
rov mecpacpov, Rev. iii. 10. to keep: i. e. not to leave,
tv apxnv, Jude 6; not to throw away, ra ivadria, Rev.
xvi. 15. to hold firmly: tiv évétnra tov mvetparos, Eph.
iv. 3; anything as a mental deposit, ryv miorw, 2 Tim.
iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 12 [cf. W. 536 (499); B. 78 (68)]. to
show one’s self to be actually holding a thing fast,
i.e. c. to observe: sc. més ktX. Rey. iii. 3; ri, Mt.
xxiii. 3; Acts xxi. 25 [Rec.]; rjv mapddoow, Mk. vii. 9
[WH (rejected) mrg. ornonte] (ra ék mapaddcews Tov
satépav, Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); tov vdpov, Acts xv. 5
and Ree. in 24; Jas. ii. 10; 76 cd8Barov, the command
respecting sabbath-keeping, Jn. ix. 16; tas évrodds (of
either God or Christ), Mt. xix.17; Jn. xiv. 15, 21; xv.
10; 1 Jn. ii. 3sq.; iii. 22,24; v.2 (where LT Tr WH
mo@pev); V.3; Rev. xii. 17; xiv. 12 [see above, b. fin.];
thy evroAnv, 1 Tim. vi. 14 [see in b. above; aadvra dca
éveretAdunv, Mt. xxviii. 20]; tov Adyov, either of Christ
or of God, Jn. viii. 51 sq. 55; xiv. 23; xv. 20; xvii. 6;
1 Jn. ii. 5; Rev. iii. 8; rods Adyous, of Christ, Jn. xiv.
243 Tov Adyoy ris bropovis pov (i.e. Incov), Rev. iii. 10;
Ta €pya uov, the works that I command, Rev. ii. 26; rovs
622
TiO np
Adyous tis mpopyteias, Rev. xxii. 7; tov BiBdéov rovrou,
Rev. xxii. 9; ta ev 1H mpodnreia yeypappeva, Rev. i. 3;
cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 194 sq. d.
to reserve: teva eis Tt, to undergo something, 2 Pet. ii. 4
[ef. W. 342 (321); els rv Tov SeBacrou didyvoow, Acts
xxv. 21°]; Jude 6; rua eis npépav xpicews, 2 Pet. ii. 9;
Tovds ovpavods mupi (to be burned with fire) eis ie pav
kpioews, 2 Pet. ill. 7; ri ets twa, a thing for one’s advan-
tage, 1 Pet. i. 4; ri els quepay twa, to be used some day
for some purpose, Jn. xii. 7; ri €ws dpru, Jn. ii. 10; ri
with the dat. of the pers., for rewarding or punishing
one, pass., 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Comp.: d:a-, wapa-,
ouv-Tnpew. | *
[SYN. Tn péw, puvAdoow: rnp. to watch or keep, ova. to
guard; typ. expresses watchful care and is suggestive of
present possession, vA. indicates safe custody and often
implies assault from without; tp. may mark the result
of which pva. is the means (e.g. Jn. xvii. 12 where the
words occur together, cf. Wisd. x. 5). See Westcott on Jn.
viii. 51; Schmidt ch. 208, esp. § 4.]
THPYTIs, -ews, 7, (TNPEw) ; a. a watching: of pris-
oners (Thuc. 7, 86); the place where prisoners are
kept, a prison, [R. V. ward]: Acts iv. 3; v.18. b.
a keeping, i. e. complying with, obeying: rdv évrodar,
1 Co. vii. 19; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 23; vduev, Sap. vi. 19.*
Tipepids, -ddos, 7, (fr. TiBepros), a city of Galilee, near
the Lake of Gennesaret, which Herod Antipas, tetrarch
of Galilee, greatly enlarged [but see BB.DD. s. v. and
esp. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 234 note] and beau-
tified, and named Tiberias in honor of Tiberius Caesar
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2,3). It is now called Tubariyeh, a
poor and wretched town of about 3000 inhabitants,
swarming with fleas for which the place is notorious
throughout Syria: Jn. vi. 1, 23; xxi. 1. Cf. Robinson
ii. 380-394; Win. RWB.s. v.; Riietschi in Herzog ed. 1
xvi. 161; Weizsdcker in Schenkel v. 526 sq.; [Mihlau
in Riehm p. 1661 sq.]; Bideker pp. 367-369.*
TuPepros, -ov, 6, Ziberius, the Roman emperor (fr.
[Aug. 19] a.p. 14 to [March 16] A. bp. 37) in whose
reign Christ was crucified: Lk. iii. 1.*
Tibéw, 1. q. TiOnpt, q. V-
r(Onpt, 3 pers. plur. rGéaow (Mt. v.15; [W.§ 14,1 a.;
B. 44 (38)]); impf. (fr. rem) 3 pers. sing. éridet (2 Co.
iii. 13), 3 pers. plur. éri@ovv (Mk. vi. 56 [RG L]; Acts iii.
2; iv. 35) [and (IT Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.) éeridecar, cf. B. 45
(39); WH. App. p. 167]; fut. @70; 1 aor. €6nxa; 2 aor.
(€Onv) subj. 68, [impv. 2 pers. plur. Oére, Lk. xxi. 14 LT Tr
WH (for RG 2 aor. mid. impv. Oéo6e) ], inf. Aeivat, ptep.
Geis; pf. réOexa; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. ri@erat (Mk.
xv. 47 RG); pf. 3 pers. sing. réOecrar (Mk. xv. 47 LT
Tr WH); 1 aor. éréOnv; 2 aor. mid. eGéuny (2 pers. sing.
ov, Acts v. 4); (see émeri@nwe); fr. Hom. down; Sept-
mostly for piv and Dw, 703, Mw and MY, WIT,
ete. ; 1. to set, put, place, i.e. causative of Keto Oat ;
hence a. to place or lay: ri, as Oewéduor, [ Lk. vi.
48]; xiv. 29; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (eweiAca, Hom. II. 12, 29) ;
ALGov, Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 6; ri, opp. to aipew, Lk. xix.
21 sq. (cf. Xen. oec. 8, 2); twit mpooxoupa [or (ace. to WH
mrg.) oxavdadov|, Ro. xiv. 13; ri eis t+, Lk. xi. 33 [W.
7 Ont
238 (223)]; tua od, drov, éxei, [@s], of the dead laid
to rest somewhere, Mk. xv. 47; xvi. 6; [Lk. xxiii. 55];
Jn. xi. 34; xix. 42; xx. 2, 13,15; év with dat. of the
place, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. vi. 29; [xv.46 LTr WH]; Lk.
xxiii. 53; Jn. xix.41; Acts vii. 16; ix. 37; eis pynpeior,
Acts xiii. 29; Rev. xi. 9; (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
very often of the laying away or depositing anywhere
of the bones or ashes of the dead ; like Lat. ponere i. q.
sepelire, cf. Klotz, Handworterb. d. Lat. Spr. ii. 822°;
[ Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. pono, I. B. 10]). Tl or Twa
ent twos, [Lk. viii. 16> LT Tr WH]; Acts v. 15; Jn.
xix.19; [Rev.x.2GLTTr WH]; éié re, [Mk. iv. 21
ft Te Will § viii. 25 Tr txt. WH ]\;:2: Co. iit. 18seRey.
x. 2[Rec.]; ézi twa, to put upon one, rds xetpas, Mk.
xX. 16; [rv deEcdv, Rev.i.17G LT Tr WH]; ri tro7,
Mt. v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. xi. 33; dmoxatw rivos, Lk.
Vill. 16; tid tad To's wodas (see movs), 1 Co. xv. 25
[ef. W. 523 (487)]; ri mapa rovs modas Tr. to lay at one’s
feet, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf. mpés]; v.23 tiva evamov
t. Lk. v. 18; metaph. ei twa ro mvedua, i. e. to imbue
one with, Mt. xii. 18. Mid. to have one put or placed:
Twa eis vdakny, to order one to be put in prison, Acts
xii. 4; év (rH) pvdaky, Mt. xiv. 3 [here LT Tr WH dzo-
7id.|; Acts v. 25, (Gen. xli. 10; xlii. 17, 30; [B. 329
(283) ; W. 414 (886) ]); eis rnpnow, Acts iv. 3; év rnp7-
ge, Acts v.18. to place for one’s self: as BovAny, to lay
a plan [A. V. advised], Acts xxvii. 12 (Judg. xix. 30;
Bovdas év Wyn pov, Ps. xii. (xiii.) 3); ra pedn, to set,
dispose, 1 Co. xii. 18; [katpovs ev rH idia eoucia, set
within his own authority, Acts i. 7 (so R. V. txt.; but
al. refer it to 2 below) ]; ri eis ra @Ta pov, to receive
[ A. V. let sink] into the ears, i. e. to fix in the mind, Lk.
ix. 44; els tiv Kapdiav, to propose to one’s self, to pur-
pose, foll. by an inf. Lk. xxi. 14 [RG]; also ri & 77
kapOia, to lay a thing up in one’s heart to be remembered
and pondered, Lk. i. 66; [xxi. 14 L T Tr WH], (1 S.
xxi. 12; [W.§ 2,1 ¢., and B. as above]); to propose to
one’s self something [A. V. conceived this thing in thine
heart], Acts v. 4; also ev7@ mvevpart, foll. by an inf. [A.V.
to purpose in the spirit}, Acts xix. 21; to place (or posit)
for the execution of one’s purpose, Oépevos ev npiv Tov Noyov
Ts KatadXay7s, since he has placed (deposited) in our
minds the doctrine concerning reconciliation (sc. to be
made known to others), 2 Co. v. 19. b. to put down,
lay down; i. e. a. to bend downwards: ta yévara,
to bend or bow the knees, to kneel, Mk. xv. 19; Lk. xxii.
41; Acts vii. 60; ix. 40; xx. 36; xxi. 5, (Lat. genua
pono, Ovid. fast. 2, 438; Curt. 8, 7, 13). B. like Lat.
pono (cf. Klotz s. v.; [Harpers’ Dict. s. v. I. B. 9]), to lay
off or aside, to wear or carry no longer: ra iparia (Lat.
vestes pono), Jn. xiii. 4 (Plut. Ale. 8) ; ryv Wuyny, to lay
down, give up, one’s life, Jn. x. 17 sq.; with tép twos
added, Jn. x. 11,15; xiii. 37sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16,
(€Onxe [or teOeuxev] THY odpKa avrov Kupios, Barn. ep. 6, 3
[irrelevant ; see the passage]; unlike the Lat. phrases
vitam ponere, Cic. ad fam. 9, 24, 4; Propert. eleg. 2, 10,
43: [animam ponere], Sil. Ital. 10, 303; spiritum ponere,
Val. Max. 7, 8, 8, since these phrases mean only do die;
623
1(AAw
more like the expression prius animam quam odium dee
ponere, Nep. Hann. 1, 3). y-. to lay by, lay aside
money: map’ éavt@, 1 Co. xvi. 2. c. to set on (serve)
something to eat or drink: oivoy, Jn. ii. 10 (Xen. mem.
3,14, 1; soalso Lat. pono; cf. Klotz u. s. p. 822°; [Har-
pers’ Dict. s. v. I. B. 8]). d. to set forth, something
to be explained by discourse: tiv Baowdeiav rt. Oeod &v
mapaBody, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Tr txt. WH (on this pass.
see mapaBodn, 2). 2. to make (Lat. constituo), twa
with a pred. acc.: tid bromdd.ov, Mt. xxii. 44 [where
LT Tr WH troxara, put underneath}; Mk. xii. 36 [WH
tmoxato]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 138,
(fr. Ps. cix. (cx.) 1); add, Ro. iv. 17 (fr. Gen. xvii. 5) ;
Heb. i. 2; pass.,1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim.i.11; +i with a
pred. ace.: 1 Co. ix. 18 (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
often in the poets, rarely in prose writ., as Ael. v. h. 13,
6; Leian. dial. marin. 14, 2; in the O. T. cf. Gen. xvii.
5; Lev. xxvi. 31; Is. v. 20; Sap. x.21; 2 Macc. v. 215
3 Mace. v. 43). Mid. to make (or set) for one’s self or
for one’s use: twa with a pred. acc., Acts xx. 28; 1 Co.
xii. 28, (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, even in prose, to
make one one’s own, as twa didov to make one a friend,
see Passow p. 1893*; [L. and S8.s. v. B.1.]). riOévae revex
els Tt, to appoint one to (destine one to be) anything, pass.,
1 Pet. ii. 8; w. ets re instead of the pred. ace. (Hebrais-
tically [cf. W. 228 (214); B. § 131, 7]), Acts xiii. 47
fr. Is. xlix. 6 (Jer. i. 5). Mid. to appoint for one’s use:
twa eis Suakoviay, to appoint one to one’s service, 1 Tim.
i. 12 [W. § 45, 4 fin.]; to appoint with one’s self or in
one’s mind : twa eis dpynv, to decree one to be subject
to wrath, 1 Th. v. 9 ; [to this use many refer Acts i. 7, see
e€ovoia 1, and ev, 1.5 d. B.; ef. 1 a. above].
Twa wa, Jn. Xv. 163 ruOévat Td pepos Tivds pera Tivos (see
peépos, 1), Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 3. to set, fiz,
establish, (Lat. statuo) ; a. to set forth (Germ. au/-
stellen): tmddevypa, 2 Pet. ii. 6. b. to establish, or-
dain, (Germ. festsetzen, anordnen) : vépov, to enact, Gai,
iii. 19 Grsb. (very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down,
both in the act. and the mid.; cf. Passow s. v. II. 3 b.;.
fl. and §. s. vA. TIT. 5)).
amo-, Sta-, avtt-Ota-, €k-, €1l-, Ovv-Emt-, KaTa-, TvV-kKaTA-s.
peTa-, Tapa-, TEpl-, Tpo-, Tpoa-, Tuv-, U7o- TiOnt. | *
tixtw; fut. réfouar; 2 aor. €rexov; 1 aor. pass. éreyOnv 3
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Wh; to bring forth, bear, produce:
(fruit from the seed); prop., of women giving birth:
absol., Lk. i. 57 [B. 267 (230)]; ii.6; Jn. xvi. 21; Gal.
iv. 27; Heb. xi. 11 Rec.; Rev. xii. 2, 4; vidv, Mt. i. 21,
23212) Mukai SLs .:7') Rev. 2015) 13);" pass; Minit. s
Lk. ii.11; of the earth bringing forth its fruits : Boraynp,
Heb. vi. 7 (Eur. Cycl. 333; yatav, i) ta mdvta tixrerat,
Aeschyl. Cho. 127; ys tis mavra tuxtovons, Philo opif.
m. § 45, who draws out at length the comparison of the
earth to a mother). metaph. to bear, Sring forth:
dpaptiay, in the simile where 7 émOupia is likened to a.
female, Jas. i. 15 (dperny, Plat. conv. p. 212 a.).*
ti\Aw; impf. ériAdov; fr. Hom. down; to pluck, pluck
off: oraxvas, Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 23 fon this cf. p- 524>
top]; Lk. vi. 1.*
Tibevas
[Comp.: dva-, mpoc-ava-,.
Tiatos 624 TOs
Tipatos Cane fr. Chald. sv, Hebr. 83, to be un-
clean), -ou, 6, Times, the name of a man: Mk.x. 46.*
Tide, -@; fut. ryznow; 1 aor. ériunoa; pf. pass. ptcp.
retysnuevos; 1 aor. mid. éeryynoapny; (Tyn); fr. Hom.
down ; 1. to estimate, to fix the value; mid. to fix
the value of something belonging to one’s self (Vulg. ap-
pretio; ef. Hagen, Sprachl. Erorterungen zur Vulgata,
Freib. 1863, p. pK twa, [R. V. to price], Mt. xxvii. 9
(on which see amd, I. 2); Sept. for p>pn, Lev. xxvii. 8,
12, 14. 2. to honor [so uniformly A. V.], to have in
‘honor, to revere, venerate; Sept. for 133: God, Mt. xv. 8;
Mk. vii. 6; Jn. v. 233. viii. 49; Christ, Jn. v. 23; parents,
Mt. xv. 4sq.; xix.19; Mk. vii.10; x.19; Lk. xviii. 20;
Eph. vi. 2; other men, 1 Tim. v. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 17; with
modAats tysais added, to honor with many honors, Acts
xxvii. 10; of God, rewarding Christians with honor
and glory in his kingdom, Jn. xii. 26. [Comp.: ém-
Tide. | *
Tinh, -7s, 9, (fr. Ti, to estimate, honor, pf. pass. réri-
pac), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 71, (a valuing, rating),
W33, IP, 395 1. a valuing by which the price is
fixed; hence the price itself: of the price paid or re-
ceived for a person or thing bought or sold, with a gen.
of the pers. Mt. xxvii. 9; with a gen. of the thing, Nets
v. 2sq.; plur., Acts iv. 34; xix. 19; ru aiparos, the
price paid for killing, [cf. pieced neney, *], Mt. xxvii. 6;
nyopacOnre Tiuns, (not gratis, but) with a price, i. e. (con-
textually, with emphasis) at a great price [B. § 132, 13;
yet see W. 595 (553)], 1 Co. vi. 20 [here Vulg. magno
pretio]; vii. 23; @veicOar tins dpyvpiov, to buy for a
price reckoned in silver, i.e. for silver, Acts vii. 165 thing
prized [A.V. honor], Rev. xxi. 24 [Rec.], 26. 2.
honor which belongs or is shown to one: the honor of
one who outranks others, pre-eminence, ddééa x. Timn,
Heb. ii. 7,9; 2 Pet. ‘ 17; in the doxologies: r@ Oe@ (sc.
éorw [cf. B.§ 129, 22 Rem.]) reun or 7 ren, 1 Tim. i. is
vi. 16; Rev. v.13; vii. 12; xix. 1 Rec.; the honor which
one has by reason of the rank and state of the office which
he holds, Heb. v. 4 (and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Bleek
on Heb. 1. ¢.); veneration: d8dvat, XaBeiv, rywnv, Rev. iv.
9,11; v.12; deference, reverence, Ro. xii. 10; xiii. 7;
1 Tim. v. 17; vi. 1; honor appearing in the rewards of
the future life, Ro. ii. 7,10; 1 Pet. i. 7; praise of which
one is judged worthy, 1 Pet. ii. 7 [here R.V. txt. precious-
ness (cf. 1 above)]; mark of honor, wodXais tipais typav
riva, Acts xxviii. 10; univ. in phrases: év tip7, honor-
ably, 1 Th. iv. 4 (on this pass. see krdopat); ovK ev Timn
tut, not in any honor, i.e. worthy of no honor, Col. ii.
23 [al. value; see mAnopovn]; eis Tyuny, Ro. ix. 21; 2'Tim.
ii. 20 sq., (on these pass. see oxevos, 1); meperiBéva TWh
TLLNY, ; iGo: xii. 23 (see mepiriOnus, b.) ; tTypny amovewew
revi, to show honor to one, 1 Pet. iii. 7; duddvae runny,
1 Co. xii. 24; éyew tyunv, to have honor, be honored,
Jn. iv. 44; Heb. iii. 3.*
ttutos, -a, -ov, (ry), fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. held
«as of great price, i.e. precious: diOos, Rev. xvii. 4; xviii.
12,16; xxi. 19; plur. 1 Co. iii. 12 [R. V. costly stones] ;
compar. tistmrepos, 1 Pet. i. 7 Rec.; superl. ryptoraros,
Rev. xviii. 212; xxi. 11. b. metaph. held in honor,
esteemed, especially dear: Heb. xiii. 4; revi, to one, Acts
v. 34; xx. 24 [here with a gen. also, ace. to the text of
T Tr WH (otdevds \dyov ete. not worth a word; ef. Meyer
ad loe.)]; Kapmos ris ys, Jas. v. 7; aiua, 1 Pet. i. 19;
emayyeApara, 2 Pet. i. 4.*
TUMLOTHS, -NTOS, 1, (TiuLos) ; a. prop. preciousness,
costliness; an abundance of costly things: Rev. xviii.
19. b. metaph. worth, excellence: Aristot. de partt.
an. 1, 5 [p. 644°, 32]; eth. Nic. 10, 7 fin. [p. 11784, 1];
Siapepovor Tysudryre ai Wuyal Kat aripia ddAndov, de gen.
anim. 2, 3 [p. 736°, 31].*
‘Tud8eos, -ov, 6, voce. Tyuddee (1 Tim. vi. 20; cf. Kriiger
§ 16 Anm. 2; [W.§8,2c.; B.12]), Timothy, a resident of
Lystra, apparently, whose father was a Greek and moth-
er a Jewess, Acts xvi. 1 sqq. He was Paul’s companion
in travel, and fellow-laborer: Acts xvii. 14 sq.3 xviii. 53
xix. 22; xx.4; Ro. xvi. 21; 1 Co.iv.17; xvi.10; 2Co.
15193 Phila: i899); (Col mistletoe
2 > Th. ie elim a 2.8 sive. 20° 2am 2) enilems
1; Heb. xiii. 23.*
Tipov [on the accent ef. W. § 6, 1, 1.], -wvos, 6, Timon,
one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem:
Acts vi. 5.*
TuLwpew, -@; 1 aor. pass. eryuwpHOnv; (fr. ryuwpds, and
this fr. rin and odpos, see Ovpwpds); fr. Soph. and
Hdt. down; prop. to be a guardian or avenger of honor ;
hence 1. to succor, come to the help of: twi, one,
Soph., Hdt., Thue., al. 2. to avenge: Tevi, one,
Hadt., Xen., al. 3. in the N.T. typwpe twa, to take
vengeance on one, to punish: Acts xxii. 5; xxvi. 11,
(Soph. O. R.107; in Grk. writ. the mid. is more com. in
this sense).*
Tinwpia, -as, 7, (Tiwpos, SCE TyLwpEew) 5 1. aren
dering help; assistance, [(Hdt., Thue., al.)]. 2.
vengeance, penalty, punishment: Heb. x. 29 (Prov. xix.
29; xxiv. 22; in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down). [SyNn. see xéAaors, fin.]*
rivw: fut. ticw; fr. Hom. down; to pay, to recompense :
Siknv, to pay penalty, suffer punishment, 2 Th. i. 9 (Plat.
Phaedo p. 81 d.; Theaet. p.177a.; Ael.v.h. 13,2; dixas,
id. 1, 24; Oanv, Hom. Od. 2, 193; mouvds, Pind. Ol. 2, 106;
¢npiay, Sept. Prov. xxvii. 12). [Comp.: dzo-riva.]*
tis, neut. ri, gen. tivos, interrogative pronoun, [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. who, which, what? Sept. ris for
9, rt for 1; a. used Adjectively, in a direct
question: ris Baowheds, Lk. xiv. 31; ris yurn, Lk. xv. 83
ri meproodv, Mt. v. 47; ri onpetov, Jn. ii. 18, and many
other passages. in an indirect question, 1 Th. iv. 2, ete. ;
riva #) rotov karpdv, 1 Pet.i.11; used instead of a pred.
in a direct quest., tis (se. éorw) 9 airia, Acts x. 21; tis
kal roramy 4 ‘yun, Lk. vii. 39; add, Ro. iii. 15 2 Co. ix.
18, ete.; neut., Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk.v.9; in an indir. quest.
with the optative, Lk. viii. 9; ris foll. by av, Jn. xiii. 24
RG; Acts xxi. 33 [RG]; ri with the optative, Lk. xv.
26 [Tr WH add a, so L br.]; xviii. 36 [L br. Tr or. WH
mrg. add dé]; with the indicative, Eph. i. 18; b.
used alone or Substantively: in a direct quest., res
TG
bréSeréev ipiv pryciv; Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; Rev. xviii.
18, etc.; rivos, Mt. xxii. 20, 28; Mk xii. 16; rim, Lk.
xiii. 18; riva, Jn. xviii. 4, 7; ri OeAeré por Sodva ; Mt. xxvi.
15; ri in an indirect quest., foll. by the indicative, Mt.
vi. 3; Jn. xiii. 12; 1 Co. xiv. 16; Rev. ii. 7, 11,17, and
very often; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Mt. vi. 25; Lk.
xii. 11, ete.; foll. by the optative w. av, Lk. i. 62; vi. 11,
etc. Emphatic words get prominence by being placed
before the pronoun [B. §151, 16]: dpeis dé riva pe Aéyere
eivat, Mt. xvi. 15; Mk. viii. 29; Lk. ix. 20; kat types ri
mounconev (or mounooper), Lk. iii. 14; odros dé ri, Jn. xxi.
21 [cf. e. B.]; add, Jn. i.19; vili. 5; ix. 17; Acts xix.
15; Ro. ix. 19 [cf. W. 274 (257)], 20; xiv. 4,10; Eph.
iv. 9; Jas.iv.12; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Passow
p- 1908»; [L. and S.s. v. B.I.1b.]. A question is often
asked by ris as the leading word, when the answer ex-
pected is “no one”: Acts viii. 33; Ro. vii. 24; viii. 33
s8q.; ix.19; x. 16; xi. 34sq.; 1Co.ix.7; 2Co. xi. 29;
Heb.i.5,13. tis ef wy, who... save (or but), (i.e. no one
but), Mk. ii. 7; Lk. v. 21; Ro. xi. 15; 1Co. ii. 11; Heb.
iii. 18); PY (Ins 1225 vv. 5. c. two questions are
blended into one: ris ti apy, what each should take, Mk.
xv. 24; ris ti Stempayparevoaro, Lk. xix. 15 [not Tr
WH]; ey dé tis iunv Svvards koddoa tov Oedv; who
was 1? was I able to withstand God? Acts xi. 17; cf. W.
§66, 5,3; Passow p. 1909"; Ast, Lex. Platon. iii. p. 394;
Franz V. Fritzsche, Index ad Leian. dial. deor. p. 164;
the same constr. occurs in Lat. writ.; cf. Ramshorn, Lat.
Gram. p. 567. is is joined with conjunctions: kai ris,
Mk. x. 26; Lk. x. 29; xviii. 26; Rev. vi. 17, (see «ai, I.
2¢2.); tisdpa, see dpa,1; tis odv, Lk. x. 36 [here T WH
om. L Tr br. ody]; 1 Co. ix. 18. ris with a partitive gen.:
Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk. x. 36; Acts vii. 52; Heb.
i.5,13; with ek and a gen. of the class, Mt. vi. 27; Lk.
xiv. 28; Jn. viii. 46; in an indir. quest. with the optat.,
Lk. xxii. 23 [ef. W. $41 b. 4 ¢.]; with ay added, Lk. ix.
46. d. in indir. questions the neuter article is some-
times placed before the pronouns tis and ri; see 6, II.
10 a. e. Respecting the neuter ri the following
particulars may be noted: a. Ti odToi wou KaTapap-
tupovow; a condensed expression for tr! rodrdé éotiv, 3
ovTol gov katap.; Mt. xxvi. 62; Mk. xiv. 60, (B. 251
(216) explains this expression differently); also ri rodro
axovw mepi cov; [(R.V.)] what is this (that) I hear of thee?
(unless preference be given to the rendering, ‘why do I
hear this of thee’ [see under B. below]), Lk. xvi. 2; cf.
Bornemann ad loc.; [W. § 66, 5, 3]. B. ri mpos nuas ;
sc. éoriv, what is that tous? [W. 586 (545); B. 138
(121) ], Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. xxi. 225 ri cote. oi; see eye,
4; ri por etc. what have I to do with etc. 1 Co. v. 12;
vi oot Or vpiv Soxet; [what thinkest thou etc.], Mt. xvii.
253 xxii. 17,42; xxvi. 66; Jn. xi. 56 (here before ér
supply in thought Soke? tpiv, to introduce a second ques-
tion [R. V. What think ye? That he will not come ete.]).
ri Oéhecs ; and ri OeAXere ; foll. by asubjunc., our what wilt
thou (that) I should etc.: Mt. xx. 32 [here Lehm. br. in-
serts iva]; Mk. x. 51; xv. 12 [WH om. Tr br. 6cA.]; Lk.
EviL 41; 1 Co. iv. 21; ri with the deliberative subj. :
625
tis
Mt. vi. 31; xxvii. 22; Mk. iv. 30 [here L mrg. T Tr
txt. WH ads]; Lk. xii. 17; xiii. 18; Jn. xii.27; ri foll.
by a fut.: Acts iv. 16 (where Led. ster. T Tr WH rou-
gopev); 1 Co. xv. 29; ri (sc. eoriv [B. 358 (307); W.
§ 64, 2 a.]) Gre ete., how is it that ete. i.e. why ete,
Mk. ii.16 RGL; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v.4,9; ri yéyovev, ore
etc. [R. V. what is come to pass that ete.], Jn. xiv. 22;
obros d€ ri (sc. ora: or yevnoerar [W. 586 (546); B. 394
(338) ]), what will be his lot? Jn. xxi. 21 (cf. Acts xii.
18 ri dpa 6 Weérpos éeyevero; Xen. Hell. 2, 3,17 ri écorro
9 wodtreia). tii. gq. dua ri, why? wherefore ? (Matthiae
§ 488, 8; Kriiger § 46, 3 Anm. 4; [W. § 21, 3 N. 2]):
Mt. vi. 28; vii.3; Mk. ii. 7sq.; xi. 3; Lk. ii. 48; vi. 41;
xii. 573 xxiv. 38; Jn. vii. 19; xviii. 23; Acts xiv. 15;
xxvi. 8; Ro. iii. 7; ix. 19sq.5 1 Co. iv. 7; x. 830; xv. 29
sq.; Gal. iii. 19; v.11; Col. ii. 20, and often. {a ri or
ivari, see Ss. v. p. 305%. dca ri [or dtari (see dia, B. II. 2a.
p- 134°) ], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; Mk.
vii. 5; xi. 31; Lk. xix. 23, 31; Jn. vil. 45; xiii. 87; Acts
v.3; 1Co.vi.7; 2 Co. xi. 11; Rev. xvii. 7, and often. is
ti, to what? to what end? to what purpose? Mt. xiv. 31;
xxvi.8; Mk. xiv. 4; xv. 34, (Sap. iv. 17; Sir. xxxix. 21).
TL oup, etc. why then, ete.: Mt. xvii. 10; xix. 7; xxvii. 22;
Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 153 Jn. i. 25; see also in od», b. a.3
ti ouv epovper, see ibid. ti yap; see yap, IL. 5. y-
Hebraistically for 7, how, how greatly, how much, with
adjectives and verbs in exclamations [W. § 21 N. 3; ct.
B. 254 (218)]: Mt. vii. 14 G LTr; Lk. xii. 49 [on this
see et, [4 fin.], (Ps. iii. 25 2S. vis 205. Cant.i. 105) 74
mond TO ayabdv gov; Symm. Ps. xxx. 19). 2. equiv.
to mérepos, -a, -ov, whether of two, which of the two: Mt.
xxi. 31; xxiii.17 [here Li; see below]; xxvii. 17, 21;
Lk. xxii. 27; neut. ri, Mt. ix. 5; [xxiii. 17 Lchm., 19];
Minin 95) Ibkive 2a: Phill 1. (29): cfivAlsts Wexi Blate ir
p- 394; Matthiae § 488, 4; W.169 (159). 3. equiv.
to roios, -a, -ov, of what sort, what (kind): Mk.i. 27; vi.
2; Lk. iv. 363 viii. 9; xxiv. 17; Jn. vii. 36; Acts xvii.
19; 1 Co. xv. 2; Eph. i.18sq. Cf. Hermann on Viger
p- 731. 4. By a somewhat inaccurate usage, yet one
not unknown to Grk. writ., it is put for the relatives és
and ders: thus, riva (LT Tr WH ri) pe imovoeire eiva,
ovk etal eyo (where one would expect év), Acts xiii. 25 ;
Svdjcerat bpiv, ri NaAnoere [-onre T Tr WH; Lbr.thecl.],
Mt. x. 19; éroipacoy, ti Seervyoo, Lk. xvii. 8; [oida rivas
eEeAeEduny, Jn. xiii. 18 T Tr txt. WH]; esp. after éyew
(as in the Grk. writ.): ov« €youvot, ti paywow, Mt. xv.
32; Mk. vi. 36; viii. 1 sq.; cf. W.§ 25,1; B. 251 (216);
on the distinction betw. the Lat. habeo quid and habeo
quod cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. p. 565 sq.
tls, neut. ri, gen. twds, indefinite (enclitic) pronoun
(bearing the same relation to the interrog. ris that mov,
mas, wore do to the interrogatives zrov, ras, méTe) ; a.
@ certain, a certain one; used of persons and things con-
cerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak
more particularly ; a. joined to nouns substantive,
as well as to adjectives and to numerals used substan-
tively ; as, Saapeirns tis, Lk. x. 33; iepeds, Lk. i. 5; x,
31; avnp, Lk. viii. 27; Acts iii. 2; viii. 9, xiv.8, dvOpw-
Tis
sos, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; Acts ix. 33; plur. Jude 4;
réros, Lk. xi.1; Acts xxvii. 8; copy, Lk. x. 38; xvii. 12,
and in many other pass.; with proper names (as ris
Sipov), Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts ix.43; xxi. 16;
xxv.19. 68vo rués with a partit. gen., Lk. vii. 18 (19);
Acts xxiii. 23; érepos, Acts viii. 34; plur. Acts xxvii. 1;
it indicates that the thing with which it is connected
belongs to a certain class and resembles it: dmapynv
twa, a kind of firstfruits, Jas. i. 18, cf. W. § 25, 2a;
joined to adjectives of quality and quantity, it requires
us to conceive of their degree as the greatest possible ;
as, hoBepa tis €xdoyxr), a certain fearful expectation, Heb.
x. 27, where see Delitzsch [or Alford] (Sewn ris Svvapts,
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; other exx. fr. the Grk. writ. are
given in W. § 25,2c.; [L. and S.s. v. A. II. 8]; Mat-
thiae § 487, 4; [Bnhdy. p. 442]; incredibilis quidam
amor, Cic. pro Lig. c. 2,5); peéyas tes, Acts vill. 9. b.
it stands alone, or substantively: univ. rls one, a certain
one, Mt. xii. 47 [but WH in mrg. only]; Lk. ix. 49, 57;
xiii. 6, 23; Jn. xi. 1; Acts v.25; xviii. 7; plur. reves, cer-
tain, some: Lk. xiii.1; Acts xv.1; Ro. iii.8; 1 Co. iv.
US Peve S45 2 Co. ahh Gal 12302 hss) 2 Pam:
i. 3,193 iv.1; v.15; vi. 10; 2 Pet. iii.9; reves ev tpiv,
some among you, 1 Co. xv. 12; a participle may be
added, — either with the article, ruvés of ete., Lk. xviii.
9: 2 Co. x. 23. Gali. 7; ‘or without it, 1 Tim. vi. 21;
ris and tuvés with a partit. gen.: Lk. xi. 1; xiv. 15; 2 Co.
x. 12. 2. a. joined to nouns and signifying
some: xpdovov tid, some time, a while, 1 Co. xvi. 7; juépat
tweés, some (or certain) days, Acts ix. 19; x. 48; xv. 36;
Xvi. 12; xxiv. 24; xxv. 13; pépos 71, Lk. xi. 36 [here WH
mrg. br. 7]; Acts v.2; 1 Co. xi.18; ri Bpdoipor, Lk.
xxiv. 41; add, Mk. xvi.18; Jn. v.14; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii.
20; xxviii. 21; Heb. xi. 40; Bpayd m1, Acts v. 34 (where
LT TrWHom. re); Heb. ii. 7; meptoadrepdv m1, 2 Co. x.
8; puxpdv tt, 2 Co. xi. 16; it serves modestly to qualify
or limit the measure of things, even though that is thought
to be ample or large [cf. 1 a. sub fin.]: kovvwvia tis, a cer-
tain contribution, Ro. xv. 26; xapméds, Ro. i. 13; yapiopa,
ibid. 11. with a participle, a@ernoas tus, if any one has
set at nought, Heb. x. 28 [but this ex. belongs rather
under the next head]. b. standing alone, or used
substantively, and signifying some one, something; any
one, anything: univ., Mt. xii. 29; Mk. ix. 30; xi. 16; Lk.
viii. 46; Jn. ii. 25; vi. 46; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. v. 7; 1Co.
xv. 35; 2Co. xi. 20sq.; Heb. iii.4; Jas. ii.18; 2 Pet. ii.
19, etc.; tis €& tyav, Jas. ii. 16; €& dudv ts, Heb. iii. 13;
with a partitive gen., Lk. vii. 36; xi.45; 1 Co. vi.1;
neut. ri with a partit. gen., Acts iv. 32; Ro. xv. 18; Eph.
v.27. eis Tus, see eis, 3 p. 187% —_—sit. answers not in-
frequently to the indefinite one (Germ. man, French on):
Mk. viii.4; Jn.ii. 25; xvi. 30; Ro. viii. 24; Heb. v. 12
(where some [viz RGT Tr (cf. W. 169 (160); R. V.
mrg. which be the rudiments ete.; ef. ce. below) ] incor-
rectly read tiva [yet cf. B. 268 (230) note, cf. 260 (223)
note]), ete.; cf. Matthiae § 487, 2. et rus, see e?, III. 16;
€ap Ts, Twos, etc.: Mt. xxi. 3; xxiv. 23; Mk. xii. 19; Lk.
KVL. SE; “Ju. Vii51; vil. 175! vill 51 8q.5 1x22, Sis x. 9;
626
Tis
xi. 9 sq. 57; xii. 26,47; Acts ix. 2 [here Tdf. dv]; xiii.
41; 1:Co..v. 115 wR 1050. 28; /Col. 11135, 1 Tim: 13:
2 Tim. ii, 5, 215 as. 114% W195) Ln. ii. 15; iv.\205 ty:
16; Rev. iii. 20; xxii. 18 sq.; dv rwov, Jn. xx. 23 [here
Lehm. éav]; éav py tes, Jn. iii. 8,5; xv.6; Acts viii. 31;
ov... Ts, nol... any one, i.e. no one, Jn. x. 283; ovre
... tis, Acts xxviii. 21; ovd€ ... 71s, Mt. xi. 27; xii. 19;
ovk... Ud Twos, 1 Co. vi. 12; gy tes, lest any (man), Mt.
xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Acts xxvii. 42; 1 Co.i.15; xvi. 11;
2 Co. viii. 20; xi. 16; xii. 6; Eph. ii. 9; 1 Th. v. 15; Heb.
iv. 11; xii. 15; hath any (one), Jn. iv. 33 [cf. wyres, 2]; py
twa, 2 Co. xii. 17; mpos To pi)... tea, 1 Th.ii.9; éore
... pn twa, Mt. viii. 28; like the Lat. aliquis, it is used
with the verb etvac emphatically: to be somebody, i. e.
somebody of importance, some eminent personage, [W.
§ 25,2¢.; B.§ 127, 16], Acts v. 36 (see exx. fr. the Grk.
writ. in Passow s. v. B. II. 2d.; [L. and S. ibid. A. IT. 5];
on the phrase ti eiyas see e.B. below). —Plur. tus,
some (of that number or class of men indicated by the
context): Mk. xiv. 4,65; Lk. xxi. 5; Jn. xiii. 29; reves
are distinguished from of mavres, 1 Co. viii. 7; ix. 22.
twes with an anarthrous participle, Mk. xiv. 57; Lk.
xiii. 1; ravrd twes Are, such (of this sort) were some of
you, 1 Co. vi. 11 [ef. odros, I. 2d.]; rwés with a partitive
gen., Mt. ix.3; xii. 38; xxviii.11; Mk. vii.1sq.; xii.
133) Lk ivie2s xix89 » Actsvi £5 5 sevilylS; 25; and
often; foll. by é« and a partit. gen., Lk. xi. 15; Jn. vi.
G45 Vin 25; 445 1x. 1165 xi. 87,463) Acts =1420 sey 2A:
ete.; Paul employs twvés by meiosis in reference to many,
when he would mention something censurable respecting
them in a mild way: Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. x. 7-10. G;
Sometimes the subject tis, rwes, or the object rid, twas,
is not added to the verb, but is left to be understood by
the reader (cf. B. § 132,6; [W. §§ 58,2; 64,4]): be-
fore the partit. gen. Acts xxi.16; before dxd, Mt. xxvii.
9 (1 Mace. vii. 33); before éx, Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xxi.
16; [Jn.i. 24 T Tr WH (cf. R. V.mrg.); vii. 40 LT
Tr WH (cf. R. V.mrg.)]; xvi. 17; [2 Jn. 4; Rey. ii.
10]. [Other exx. of its apparent omission are the fol-
lowing: as subject, — of a finite verb (W. § 58, 9 b. B.;
B. § 129,19): noi, 2Co.x.10 RGT Tr txt. WH tat. ;
ray Aady TO Weddos, Jn. viii. 44 (acc. to one interpreta-
tion; see R.V. marg.); of an infin.: od xpeiav éxere
ypapew bpiv, 1 Th.iv.9 RGT Tr txt. WH; xpetav €xere
tov diddoxew tpas, tiva etc. Heb. v.12 RG T Tr (but see
2b. above). as object: dds poe meeiv, Jn. iv. 7; cf. Mk.
v.43. See Kiihner § 352¢.; Kriiger § 55, 3, 21.] d.
It stands in partitions: tis... €repos dé, one... and
another, 1 Co. iii. 4; plur. reves (uév) . . - wes (Se), Lk.
ix. 7 sq.; Acts xvii. 18; Phil. i. 15; ef. Passow s. v. B.
Il. 2e.; [L. and S. ibid. A. II. 11. ¢.]. e. Besides
what has been already adduced, the foll. should be no-
ticed respecting the use of the neut. ri; a. univ.
anything, something: Mt. v. 23; Mk. viii. 23; Lk. xi. 54;
Acts xxv. 5,11; 1 Co. x. 31, and very often; ovdé.. . ré
neither ... anything, 1 Tim. vi. 7. 8. like the Lat.
aliquid it is used emphatically, equiv. to something of
consequence, something extraordinary (cf. b. above): i
Titwos
the phrase eivai r1, 1 Co. iii. 7; Gal. ii. 6; vi. 3; cf. Pas-
sow s.v. B. II. 2d.; [L. and S.s. v. A. I. 5]; and on the
Lat. aliquid esse see Klotz, Handworterb. d. Lat. Spr. i.
298°; [Harpers’ Dict. s. v. aliquis, I. C. 1] (on the
other hand, in 1 Co. x. 19 ri eivae means to be anything,
actually to exist); ¢idévae [LT Tr WH eyvaxevar] rr, i. e.
much, 1 Co. viii. 2. 3. As respects the Position
of the word, when used adjectively it stands— now be-
fore its noun (ris dvyp, Acts iii. 2; xiv. 8; ris padnrns,
Acts ix. 10; twas érépous, Acts xxvii. 1; ri dyaOév, Jn. i.
47); now, and indeed far more frequently, after it, as
iepevs tis, Lk. i. 5; x. 315 dvnp tus, Lk. viii. 27, etc., ete.
Tivés, used substantively, is found at the beginning of a
sentence in Mt. xxvii. 47; Lk. vi. 2; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Tim.
v.24; Phil. i.15; cf. W. § 25,2 Note, and 559 (520).
The particle 6 may stand betw. it and its substantive
(as Sapapeirns dé Tus), as in Lk. x. 33, 38; Acts viii. 9;
Heb. x. 27.
Tirtos, -ov, 6, the praenomen of a certain Corinthian,
a Jewish proselyte, also surnamed Justus: Acts xviii. 7
T Tr br. WH (see Tizos).*
tlrXos, -ov, 6, a Lat. word, a title; an inscription, giv-
ing the accusation or crime for which a criminal suf-
fered: Jn. xix. 19, 20, and after i+ Ev. Nic. ce. 10, 1 fin.
(Sueton. Calig. c. 32 praecedente titulo qui causam
poenae indicaret; again, Domit. ce. 10 canibus objecit
cum hoe titulo: impie locutus parmularius.) *
Tiros [Rec.* in the subscription, Tiros; cf. Lipsius,
Gram. Unters. p. 42 sq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Pape,
Eigennamen, s. v.; W.§6, 1 m.], -ov, 6, Titus, a Gentile
Christian, Paul’s companion in some of his journeys and
assistant in Christian work: 2 Co. ii. 13; vii. 6, 13 sq.;
vill, 6916. 93. x1.118)0Gal ai. 1,352 Tim. iv 1050 Lites.
4. Heis not mentioned in the Book of Acts. But since
Titus is the praenomen, perhaps he appears in the
Acts under his second, or, if he was a Roman, under
his third name; cf. Riickert on 2 Cor. p. 410. He is
by no means, however, to be identified (after Wieseler,
Com. ii. d. Brief a. d. Galater, p. 573 sq. [also his Chron.
d. apost. Zeit. p. 204]) with the Titus of Acts xviii. 7,
even if the reading (of some authorities [see Tdf.’s note
ad loc.]) Tirov [see Tirtos above] *Iovcrov be the true
one.*
ttw, a form from which some N. T. lexicons [e. g.
Wahl, Bretschneider, Robinson, Bloomfield, Schirlitz,
Harting, al.] incorrectly derive ricovow in 2 Th.i.9; see
tive.
rovyapodr, (fr. the enclitic rot or ra, yap, and odv, Germ.
doch denn nun; cf. Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 1; [Ellicott on
1 Th. iv. 8]), a particle introducing a conclusion with
some special emphasis or formality, and generally occu-
pying the first place in the sentence, wherefore then, for
which reason, therefore, consequently: 1'Th.iv. 8; Heb.
xii. 1, (for ra-by, Job xxii. 10; xxiv. 22; 4 Macc. i. 34;
vi. 28 var.; xiii.15; Soph., Xen., Plato, sqq-) ; ef. Klotz
ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 738.*
tolye in xairovye, see ye, 3 f.
toltvuy, (fr. the enclitic zoé and viv). fr. Pind. Jand
627
TOALORe
Hdt.] down, therefore, then, accordingly ; contrary to the
use of the more elegant Grk. writ., found at the begin-
ning of the sentence (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342 sq.; [W.
559 (519 sq.); B. § 150, 19]): Heb. xiii. 13 (Is. iii. 10;
v.13); as in the better writ., after the first word: Lk.
xx. 25 [yet T Tr WH put it first here also]; 1 Co. ix.
26 and Ree. in Jas. ii. 24, (Sap. i. 11; viii. 9; 4 Mace.
i. 13, 15 sqq.).*
Tovdade, rordde, Towdvde, (roios and 8é), fr. Hom. down,
such, generally with an implied suggestion of something
excellent or admirable: 2 Pet. i. 17.*
ToLodTos, ToLavTH, ToLovTo and to.ovrov (only this sec-
ond form of the neut. occurs in the N. T., and twice [but
in Mt. xviii. 5'T WH have -ro}), (fr. rotos and odros [al.
say lengthened fr. roios or connected with airés; cf.
tnAtkovTos |), [fr. Hom. down], such as this, of this kind or
sort; a. joined to nouns: Mt. ix. 8; xviii. 5; Mk.
iv. 33; vi. 2; vii. 8 [here TWH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13;
ix. 37 [here Tdf. rovrwyv]; Jn. ix. 16; Acts xvi. 24; 1
Co. v.13 xi.16; 2 Co. iii. 4, 12; xii. 3; Heb. vii. 26;
vill. 1; xii. 3; xiii. 16; Jas. iv. 16. b. oios...
rovouros: Mk. xiii. 19;-1Co. xv. 48; 2Co. x. 11 3 ToLov=-
ros ... Omotos, Acts xxvi. 29; rotovros dv &s etc. Philem.
9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. c. used substantive-
ly, a. without an article: Jn. iv. 23; neut. pydev ro00-
tov, Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; plur., Lk. ix. 9; xiii. 2 [here T
Tr txt. WH raira]. B. with the article, 6 rovodros
one who is of such a character, such a one, [B. §124,5; W.
111 (106); Kriiger § 50, 4,6; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1,
5, 2; Ellicott on Gal. v. 21]: Acts xxii. 22; 1 Co. v. 5,
1132 Cot. Gxaq.s x. 115) xi) 25> Galo-yi. 1) Was ae
11; plur., Mt. xix.14; Mk.x.14; Lk. xviii. 16; Jn. viii.
5; Ro. [ii. 14 Lmrg.]; xvi. 18; 1 Co. vii. 28; xvi. 16,18;
20 Conexielior wens 1. 029)2 92. siiiae 2 sh lun Daneevaa es
Rec.; 3 Jn. 8; neut. plur., Acts xix. 25; Ro. i. 32; ii. 2
sq-; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v. 21, 23; Eph. v. 27; Heb. xi. 14.*
rotxos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for VP @
wall [esp. of a house; cf. retyos]: Acts xxiii. 3.*
76kOS, -ov, 6, (fr. rikra, pf. réroKa) ; Le birth 7 Des
the act of bringing forth. b. that which has been
brought forth, offspring; (in both senses from Homer
down). 2. interest of money, usury, (because it
multiplies money, and as it were ‘breeds’ [cf. e.g. Mer-
chant of Venice i. 3]): Mt. xxv. 27; Lk. xix. 23, (so in
Grk. writ. fr Pind. and Arstph. down; Sept. for 3v/).*
ToApdw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. érdéAya, plur. éré\pov;
fut. rokujow; 1 aor. erdApnoa; (TéAua or TéApn [* dar-
ing’; Curtius § 236]); fr. Hom. down; to dare; a.
not to dread or shun through fear: foll. by an inf., Mt.
xxii. 46; Mk. xii. 34; Lk. xx. 40; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. § 65,
7b.]; Acts v. 18; vii. 32; Ro. xv.18; 2Co.x.12; Phil.
i. 14; Jude 9; toAunoas eiondOev, took courage and went
in, Mk. xv. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22; Plut. vit. Cam. 22,
6]. b. to bear, endure; to bring one’s self to; [cf.
W. u.s.]: foll. by an inf., Ro. v. 7; 1 Co. vi. 1. c.
absol. to be bold; bear one’s self boldly, deal boldly : 2Co.
xi. 21; émi twa, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [Comp.: dro
ToAua. | *
TOApLN POTEPOV
[Syn. ToAmdw, Pappéw: 8. denotes confidence in one’s
own strength or capacity, t. boldness or daring in under-
taking; 6. has reference more to the character, +. to its
manifestation. Cf. Schmidt ch. 24,4; ch. 141. The words
are found together in 2 Co. x. 2.]
rohunpdtepov, (neut. compar. from the adj. ToApnpos)s
[Thue., sqq-], more boldly: Ro. xv. 15 [L ed. ster. Tr
txt. WH -répos; W. 243 (228) ].*
ToApnris, -00, 6, (roAudw), @ daring man: 2 Pet. il.
10. (Thue. 1, 70; Joseph. b. j. 3, 10, 2; Philo de Jo-
seph. §38, Plut., Leian.) *
Topudrepos, -a, -ov, (compar. fr. Towos cutting, sharp, and
this fr. réuvw), sharper: Heb. iv. 12 ([Pseudo-] Phocylid.
vs. 116 [(Gnom. Poet. Graec. ed. Brunck p. 116) ] omAov
rot Adyos avSpi topwrepédv eate oidypov ; add, Timon in
Athen. 10 p. 445e.; Leian. Tox. 11)."
r6£ov, -ov, 76, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for nwp, a
bow: Rev. vi. 2.*
roTrd{vov, -ov, Td, (neut. of the adj. romdtuos, fr. romagos),
topaz, a greenish-yellow precious stone (our chrysolith
[see BB. DD., esp. Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 18]): Rev.
xxi. 20 (Diod., Strab.; Sept. for 7703, Ex. xxviii. 175
Xxxvi. 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13. The Grk. writ.
more commonly use the form romagos).*
rémos, -ov, 6, in Attic fr. Aeschyl. and his contempo-
raries on; Sept. DYP2; place; i.e. 1. prop. any
portion of space marked off, as it were, from surrounding
space ; used of a. an inhabited place, as a city,
village, district: Lk. iv. 37; x. 1; Acts xii. 17; xvi. 3;
Xxvii. 2,8; 1Co.i.2; 2Co.ii. 14; 1 Th.i.8; Rev. xviii.
17[GLT Tr WH]; tov rorov kai 7d eros, the place
which the nation inhabit, i.e. the holy land and the
Jewish people, Jn. xi. 48 (cf. 2 Mace. v. 19 sq.) ; TOTOs
dyos, the temple (which the Sept. of Is. lx. 13 calls 6
dyios témos Tod Ocod), Mt. xxiv. 15. of a house, Acts
iv. 31. of uninhabited places, with adjectives: €pnpos,
Mt. xiv. 13,15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 31 sq.; Lk. iv. 42; ix.
10 RGL, 12; medwos, Lk. vi. 17; Gvvdpos, plur., Mt. xii.
43; Lk. xi. 24. of any place whatever: xara romovs,
[R.V. in divers places] i.e. the world over [but see xara,
II. 3 a.a.], Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk. xiii. 8; [ev wavti romeo, 2 Th.
iii. 16 Lchm.]; of places in the sea, rpayeis témot, Acts
xxvii. 29 [R.V. rocky ground]; rom. dOadacvos, [ A. V.
place where two seas met}, ibid. 41. of that ‘place’
where what is narrated occurred: Lk. x. 32; xix. 5;
xxii. 40; Jn.v.13; vi. 10; xviii. 2. of a place or spot
where one can settle, abide, dwell: ێrowsatew rit rozop,
Jn. xiv. 2 sq., cf. Rev. xii. 6; yew romov, a place to dwell
in, Rev. l. ¢.; ov« qv adrois tomos é€v TH Katadvpart, Lk.
ii. 7; d:d0var revi rorov, to give one place, give way to
one, Lk. xiv. 9*; romos ovx etpébn avrois, Rev. xx. 11;
of the seat which one gets in any gathering, as at a
feast, Lk. xiv. 10; rév €xyarov romov Karéxecv, ibid. 9»;
of the place or spot occupied by things placed in it, Jn.
xx. 7. the particular place referred to is defined by
the words appended: — by a genitive, rom. tis Bacdvov,
Lk. xvi. 28; ris katamatcews, Acts vii. 42: xpaviov, Mt.
xxvil. 33; Mk. xv. 22; Jn. xix. 17; [tov Tomov Tay HAwY,
In. xx. 25> L T Tr mrg.]; — by the addition of od, ézrov, |
628
TOGOUTOS
颒 or év @, foll. by finite verbs, Mt. xxviii. 6; Mk
xvi. 6; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 23; x.40; xi. 6, 30; xix.41; Acts
vii. 833; Ro. ix. 26;— by the addition of a proper name:
romos Neyouevos, OY Kadovpevos, Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. xv.
22; Lk. xxiii. 833; Jn. xix. 13; Rev. xvi. 16; 6 romos
tivds, the place which a person or thing occupies or has
aright to: Rev. ii. 5; vi. 14; xii.8; where a thing is
hidden, ris payaipas i.e. its sheath, Mt. xxvi. 52. the
abode assigned by God to one after death wherein to re-
ceive his merited portion of bliss or of misery: (6 tidus
Tonos (twos), univ. Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 1 [cf. 6 aimmos
romos, Tob. ili. 6]); applied to Gehenna, Acts i. 25 (see
iStos, 1 c.); 6 dpetdopevos Toros, of heaven, Polye. ad
Philip. 9, 2; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 4; also 6 @yos TOTrOS,
ibid. 5, 7; [6 apuopevos 7. Barn. ep. 19, 1; Act. Paul et
Theel. 28; see esp. Harnack’s note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
5, 4]. b. a place (passage) in a book: Lk. iv. 17
(kai év Ao tore dyoiv, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 20[(but this
is doubtful; cf. L. and S.s.v. 1.4; yet ef. Kiihner ad
loc.); Philo de Joseph. § 26; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8,4]; in
the same sense ywpa in Joseph. antt. 1, 8, 3). oe
metaph. a. the condition or station held by one in
any company or assembly: avamAnpoiv tov Torey Tod iSu@-
rov, [R. V. jfilleth the place of the unlearned], 1 Co. xiv.
16; rAs Staxovias tavtTns Kal drocrodns, [R.V. the place in
this ministry, ete.], Acts i. 25 LT Tr WH. b. op-
portunity, power, occasion for acting : Torov Nau Paver TAS
dmodoyias, opportunity to make his defence, Acts xxv.
16 (éxew T. dmodoyias, Joseph. antt. 16, 8, 5); Tomov 6100-
va Th Opyn (sc. Tod Oeod), Ro. xii. 19; 7@ duaBoro, Eph.
iv. 27, (r@ iarpa, to his curative efforts in one’s case,
Sir. xxxviii. 12; vou biorov, ibid. xix. 17; rdmov dud6-
vat Twi, foll. by an inf., ibid. iv. 5); rém. peravoias evpt-
oxew, Heb. xii. 17, on this pass. see evpicxe, 3 (dddvat,
Sap. xii. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 5; Lat. locum relin-
quere paenitentiae, Liv. 44, 10; 24, 26; [Plin. ep. ad Trai.
96 (97), 10 cf. 2]; €xew romov peravoias, Tat. or. ad
Graee. 15 fin. ; dea 7d pu) KatadeimeaOai opiot Térov Eheous
pnd€é cvyyvepns, Polyb. 1, 88, 2); rérov Exew sc. Tov evay-
yeriter Oat, Ro. xv. 23; 7. Cyreiv, with a gen. of the thing
for which influence is sought among men: dca67nKns, pass.
Heb. viii. 7 [(cf. peéppopat) ]-
[Syn. ré70s 1, xdpa, xwplov: tdm. place, indefinite ; a
portion of space viewed in reference to its occupancy, or as
appropriated to a thing; x#pa region, country, extensive ;
space, yet bounded; xwpioy parcel of ground (Jn. iv. 5), cir-
cumscribed ; a definite portion of space viewed as enclosed
or complete in itself ; témos and xwplov (plur., R. V. lands)
occur together in Acts xxviii. 7. Cf. Schmidt ch. 41.]
rorotTos, -avTn, -odto (Heb. vii. 22 LT Tr WH) and
-odrov, (fr. réa0s and obros; [al. say lengthened fr. rowos;
cf. rnAckodros, init.]), so great; with nouns: of quantity,
roo. mAovros, Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount,
riotts, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9; [daa edd£acev éavtyy, ToO-
coirov dére Bacancpdr, Rev. xviii. 7]; of size, vedos, Heb.
xii. 1; plur. so many: ixOves, Jn. xxi. 11; onpeta, Jn.
sah Bile yen peovar, 1 Co. xiv. 10; érn, Lk. xv. 29 [(here
A.V. these many)], (in prof. writ., esp. the Attic, we
often find roaodros kai roworos and the reverse; see Hein-
TOTE 6
dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923>; [L. and S.
s.vv.])3; foll. by ore, so many as to be able, ete. [B. 244
(210)], Mt. xv. 33; of time: so long, ypdvos, [Jn. xiv. 9];
Heb. iv. 7; of length of space, 7d piKos toaotrdy éeorw
écov ete. Rev. xxi. 16 Rec.; absol., plur. so many, Jn.
vi. 9; neut. plur. [so many things], Gal. iii. 4; towovrou,
for so much (of price), Acts v. 8 (9); dat. rovovr@, pre-
ceded or tollowed by éc@ (as often in the Grk. writ. fr.
Hd..down |W. § 35, 4 N. 2]), by so much : roo. kpeirrav,
by so much better, Heb. i. 4; rocovt@ paddov éo@ ete.
Heb. x. 25; xa@’ daov. .. kata Tocodtor, by how much...
by so much, Leb. vii. 22.*
v5te, demonstr. adv. of time, (fr. the neut. art. ro,
and the enclit. ré [q. v.]; answering to the relative
ore [Kiihner $506, 2 ¢.]), fr. Hom. down, then; at that
time ; a. then i.e. at the time when the things under
consideration were taking place, (of a concomitant
event): Mt. ii. 17 (rere éwAnpwOn) ; ill. 0, 13; xii. 22, 38 ;
KVeds ix. 13 5 xx020; xxvii. 9) 16\9 Roo vir 2! ;, fol) by:
a more precise specification of the time by means of an
added participle, Mt. ii. 16; Gal. iv. 8; opp. to viv, Gal.
iv. 29; Heb. xii. 26; 6 rére kdopos, the world that then
Wass2 Wet 6* b. then i. e. when the thing un-
der consideration had been said or done, thereupon; so
in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transi-
tion from one thing mentioned to another which could
not take place before it [W. 540 (503); B. § 151, 31
fin.]: Mt. iv.1,55 xxvi. 14; xxvii. 38; Actsi. 12; x. 48;
xxi. 33; not infreq. of things which took place imme-
diately afterwards, so that it is equiv. to which having
been done or heard: Mt. ii. 7; 11.1535 iv.10sq.5 viii. 26 ;
Kos Xv.285 xvil. 19: xxvi. 36, 45). xxvil) 26%sq. 5
Lk. xi. 26; tore odv, Jn. xi. 14 [Lchm. br. ody]; xix. 1,
16; xx. 8; ev@éws tore, Acts xvii. 14; Tore preceded
by a more definite specification of time, as pera rd
Wopiov, Jn. xiii. 27; or by an aor. ptep. Acts xxviii. 1.
Gre... Tore, etc., when... then: Mt. xiii. 26; xxi. 1; Jn.
xii. 163; as... Tore, etc., Jn. vii. 10; xi.6; preceded by
a gen. absol. which specifies time, Acts xxvii. 21. dad
tore from that time on, see azé, I. 4 b. p. 58°. cof
things future; then (at length) when the thing under
discussion takes place (or shall have taken place): tére
simply, Mt. xxiv. 23, 40; xxv. 1, 34, 37,41, 44 sq.; opp.
to dprt, 1 Co. xiii. 12; kali rdre, Mt. vii. 23; xvi. 27;
mxive 10, 14,305 Mk xine21):26)sq- LK. xxi'275" Co:
iv.5; Gal. vi. 4; 2Th.ii.8; «ai rére preceded by mpa-
tov, Mt. v. 24; vii. 5; Lk. vi.42. érav (with a subjune.
pres.)...Tdre, etc. when... then, etc. [W. § 69, 5], 2 Co.
xii. 10; 1 Th. v.33 éray (with an aor. subj. i. q. Lat. fut.
pi.) ... Tore, etc., Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 16; xxv. 31; Mk.
Me 20; xi. 14; Lk. v.35; xxi. 20'sq.5)Jn-n: 10 Wi
om. L. Tr br. rére]; viii. 28; 1 Co. xv. 28, 54; xvi. 2;
Col. iii. 4. Of the N. T. writ. Matthew uses rére most
frequently, ninety-one times [(so Holtzmann, Syn. Evang.
p- 293); rather, eighty-nine times acc. to RT, ninety
times acc. toG L Tr WH]; it is not found in [Eph., Phil.
Philem., the Past. Epp., the Epp. of Jn., Jas., Jude], the
Rev.
9 tpaxynrivor
rovvavtlov (by crasis for rd evavriov[ B. 10]), [(Arstph.,
Thue., al.) |, on the contrary, contrariwise, (Vulg. e con-
trario), accus. used adverbially [W. 230 (216)]: 2 Co.
rhe 8 (Gene rhe 7 i Neel bth Che
rovvona (by crasis for 7d évona |B. 10; WH. App. p.
145]), [fr. Hom. Il. 3, 235 down], the name; accus. absol.
[B. § 131, 12; W. 230 (216) cf. dvopa, 1] by name: Mt.
REVI, 57."
routers [cf. W. p. 45; B.11(10)] for rodr gor, and
this for rovré éore, see eipi, II. 3.
tpa&yos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a he-goat: plur., Heb.
ix. 12sq-/ 195 x: 4.*
tpdmeta, -ns, 7, (fr. rérpa, and wé¢a a foot), fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for mow, a table ; al a. a table
on which food is placed, an eating-table : Mt. xv. 27; Mk.
vil. 28; Lk. xvi. 21; xix. 23; xxi: 21, 30; the table in
the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves
were placed (see mpodeots, 1), Heb. ix. 2. b. equiv.
to the food placed upon the table (cf. Fritzsche on Add.
to Esth. iv. 14): mapariOévar tpamefav, (like the Lat.
mensam apponere [cf. our ‘to set a good table’ ]), to set a
table, i.e. food, before one (Thue. 1,130; Ael. v. h. 2,17),
Acts xvi. 34; Qsaxoveiy tais tpaméCas (see dtaxovew, 3),
Acts vi. 2. c. a banquet, feast, (fr. Hdt. down): Ro.
xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23); peréxew tpamétns Satpo-
viev, to partake of a feast prepared by [(?) see below]
demons (the idea is this: the sacrifices of the Gentiles
inure to the service of demons who employ them in pre-
paring feasts for their worshippers; accordingly one who
participates in those feasts, enters into communion and
fellowship with the demons); xupiov, to partake of a feast
prepared by [(?) see below] the Lord (just as when he
first instituted the supper), 1 Co. x. 21 [but it seems
more natural to take the genitives day. and kup. simply
as possessive (cf. W. 189 (178); B. § 127, 27), and
to modify the above interpretation accordingly ]. 2.
the table or stand of a money-changer, where he sits, ex-
changing different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and
paying back with interest loans or deposits, (Lys., Isocr.,
Dem., Aristot., Joseph., Plut., al.): Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi.
15; Jn. ii. 15; 1d dpydiprov dSiddvar ext (Hv) Tparre Cav, to put
the money into a (the) bank at interest, Lk. xix. 23.*
rpamelirns [-Ceirns T WH; see WH. App. p. 154, and
cf. et, ¢], -ov, 6, (tpamega, q. V.), @ money-changer, broker,
banker, one who exchanges money for a fee, and pays
interest on deposits: Mt. xxv. 27. (Cebet. tab. 31;
[Lys.], Dem., Joseph., Plut., Artem., al.) *
Tpadpa, -ros, Td, (TPAQ, TPQQ, titpacKw, to wound,
akin to @pavw), a wound: Lk. x. 34. (From Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down; Sept. several times for }¥3.) *
Tpavparitw: 1 aor. ptep. tpavyaricas; pf. pass. ptep.
rerpavparicpévos ; (rpadpa) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
to wound: Lk. xx. 12; Acts xix. 16.*
TpaxnAlw: (Tpdxyndos) 5 1. to seize and twist the
neck or throat; used of combatants who handle thus
their antagonists (Philo, Plut., Diog. Laért., al.). 2:
to bend back the neck of the victim to be slain, to lay
bare or expose by bending back; hence trop. to iay bare,
TPAXNAOS
uncover, expose: pf. pass. ptep. rerpayndtopevos tivi, laid
bare, laid open, made manifest to one, Heb. iv. 13.*
Tpaxnros, -ov, 6, [allied w. rpeyo; named from its mov-
ableness; cf. Vanicek p. 304], fr. Eur. and Arstph. down,
Sept. chiefly for 81¥, also for 13, etc., the neck: Mt.
xvii. 635 Mk. 1m425 (LK my, 2050 xvils 2s) Acts xv. 10);
Xx. 37; Tov €avtod TpaynAov brorievat (SC. bd TOV Otdn-
pov), [A.V. to lay down one’s own neck i. e.] to be ready
to incur the most imminent peril to life, Ro. xvi. 4.*
Tpaxvs, -eta, -v, fr. Hom. down, rough: ddoi, Lk. iii. 5;
toro, rocky places (in the sea), Acts xxvii. 29.*
Tpaxwvitis, -vdos, 7, Trachonitis, a rough [(Grk. rpa-
xvs)] region, tenanted by robbers, situated between An-
‘tilibanus [on the W.] and the mountains of Batanaea [on
the E.], and bounded on the N. by the territory of Da-
mascus: Lk. iii. 1 (Joseph. antt. 16, 9, 3 and often).
[See Porter in BB. DD.]*
Tpeis, of, ai, tpla, ra, three: Mt. xii. 40; Mk. viii. 2;
Lk. i. 56; Jn. ii. 19, and often. [From Hom. down.]
Tpels TaBepvar, see raBépva.
Tpénw; used only in the pres. and impf.; fr. Hom.
down; to tremble: Mk. v. 83; Lk. viii. 47; Acts ix. 6
Rec.; with a ptep. (cf. W. § 45,4a.; [B. § 144, 15a.]),
to fear, be afraid, 2 Pet. ii. 10. [Syn. see PoBéo, fin.]*
tpédw; 1 aor. Opera; Pass., pres. rpépopar; pf. ptep.
teOpappevos ; fr. Hom. down; to nourish, support; to feed :
twa, Mt. vi. 26; xxv. 37; Lk. xii. 24; Acts xii. 20; Rev.
xii. 6, 14; to give suck, Lk. xxiii. 29 LT Tr WH; to
fatten, Jas. v. 5 [here A. V. nourish]. to bring up,
nurture, Lk. iv. 16 [here TWH mre. dvatpépo] (1 Mace.
iii. 33; xi. 39, and often in prof. auth.). [Comp.: ava-,
€k-, ev- Tpea. | *
tpéx; impf. erpexov; 2 aor. €Spayov; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 739; to run; a. prop.: of persons in haste,
Mk. v. 6; Jn. xx. 2,4; witha telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8;
Spay with a finite verb, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36;
Lk. xv. 20; tpéyo emi with an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv.
12[T om. LTr br. WH reject the vs.]; eis wodepor,
Rev. ix. 9; of those who run in a race-course (év cradia),
1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph.: of doctrine rapidly
propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1[R.V. run]; by a metaphor
taken from the runners in a race, to exert one’s self, strive
hard ; to spend one’s strength in performing or attaining
something: Ro. ix.16; Gal. v. 7; eis cevov, Gal. ii. 2 [W.
504 (470); B. § 148, 10]; Phil. ii. 16; rov dyava, Heb.
xii. 1 (see dyav, 2); the same expression occurs in Grk.
writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires
the exertion of all one’s efforts to overcome, Hdt. 8,
102; Eur. Or. 878; Ale. 489; Electr. 883; Iph. Aul.
1456; Dion. Hal. 7, 48, ete.; miserabile currunt certa-
men, Stat. Theb. 3,116. [Comp.: eio-, kara-, rept-, mpo-,
TP00-, Tuv-, eTt- Guv-, UTro- TpExX@. |*
TpHpa, -aTos, 70, (TiTpdaw, Tirpnut, TPAQ, to bore through,
pierce), a perforation, hole: Bedovns, Lk. xviii. 25 LT Tr
WH; [padidos, Mt. xix. 24 WH txt.]. (Arstph., Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.) *
TpLGKoVTO, of, al, Ta, (Tpeis), thirty: Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv.
8; Lk. iii. 23, ete. [From Hom. down.]
630
Tpojos
TpiaKdctot, -at, -a, three hundred: Mk. xiv. 5, Jn. xii.
5. [From Hom. down.]*
tpiBodos, -ov, 6, (rpeis and Badd, [(cf. Bédos), three-
pointed ]), a thistle, a prickly wild plant, hurtful to other
plants: Mt. vii. 16; Heb. vi. 8. (Arstph., al.; Sept. for
VIN, Gen. iii. 18; Hos. x. 8; for o'y°3¥ thorns, Prov.
xxii. 5.) [Cf B. D. s. v. Thorns and Thistles, 4; Léw,
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 302.]*
tplBos, -ov, 7, (Tpi8o to rub), a worn way, a path: Mt.
iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, fr. Is. xl. 3. (Hom. hymn.
Mere. 448; Hadt., Eur., Xen., al.; Sept. for M2}, Ns,
72D, FI ete.)*
Tpietia, -as, 7), (Tpets and eros), a space of three years:
Acts xx. 81. (Theophr., Plut., Artem. oneir. 4, 1; al.) *
tpitw; to squeak, makea shrill ery, (Hom., Hdt., Aris-
tot., Plut., Leian., al.) : trans. rovs dddvras, to grind or
gnash the teeth, Mk. ix. 18; xara twos, Kv. Nicod. ec. 5.*
Tpipnvos, -ov, (Tpeis and pny), of three months (Soph.,
Aristot., Theophr., al.) ; neut. used as subst. a space of
three months (Polyb., Plut., 2 K. xxiv. 8): Heb. xi. 23.*
tpis, (rpeis), adv., thrice: Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv.
30,°725 (LK, xxi34, 61); Jn. xills 38s) 2) Cosme ose
8; ént rpis [see ent, C. I. 2 d. p. 235° bot.], Acts x. 16;
xi. 10. [From Hom. down.]*
tplrreyos, -ov, (rpeis and oréyn), having three roofs or
stories: Dion. Hal. 3, 68; [Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 5]; 76 rpi-
areyor, the third story, Acts xx. 9 (Gen. vi. 16 Symm.);
7) Tporeyyn, Artem. oneir. 4, 46.*
Tpio-xiAvot, -at, -a, (rpis and yiduor), three thousand:
Acts ii. 41. [From Hom. down.]*
tplros, -n, -ov, the third: with substantives, Mk. xv. 25;
Lk, xxiv 21¢, Acts1-a53 2\Couxi. 25) Revedved saver
vill. 10; xi. 14, ete.; 7H tpity Nuepa, Mt. xvi. 21; xvii. 23;
xx. 19; Mk. ix. 31 [Rec.]; x. 34 Rec.; Lk. xxiv. 46; Acts
x.40; 1Co.xv.43; TH qpépa tH Tpitn, Lk. xviii. 33; Jn.
ii. 1 [Lmrg. Tr WH mre. 7A tpitn jpepa]; €os rhs Tpit.
jpepas, Mt. xxvii. 64; tpirov, acc. masc. substantively,
a third [(se. servant)], Lk. xx.12; neut. rd rpirov with
a gen. of the thing, the third part of anything, Rev. viii.
7-12; ix.15,18; xii.4; neut. adverbially, 7d rpirov
the third time, Mk. xiv.41; Jn. xxi.17; also without
the article, rpirov a third time, Lk. xxiii. 22; tovro rpi-
tov, this is (now) the third time (see otros, I. d.), Jn.
xxi. 14; 2 Co. xii. 14 [not Rec."]; xiii. 1; tpivoy in
enumerations after mparov, Sevrepov, in the third place,
thirdly, 1 Co. xii. 28; ék rpirov, a third time [W. § 51,
d.], Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. é« rpirov].
tpixuvos, -7, -ov, (Opté, q: v.), made of hair (Vulg. cili-
cinus): Rev. vi. 12 [see odxkos, b.]. (Xen., Plat., Sept.,
al.) *
Tpixds, see Opié.
Tpopos, -ov, 6, (rpéuw), fr. Hom. down, a trembling,
quaking with fear: Mk. xvi. 8; pera pdBou x. Tpdpov,
with fear and trembling, used to describe the anxiety of
one who distrusts his ability completely to meet all re-
quirements, but religiously does his utmost to fulfil his
duty, 2 Co. vii.15; Eph. vi.5; Phil. ii. 12; &v @. x. €v tp.
(Is. xix. 16), 1 Co. if. 3 (@déBos and rpduns are joined in
TpoTH
Gen. ix. 2; Ex.xv.16; Deut. [ii. 25]; xi. 25, etc.; év d.
...ev Tp. Ps.ii.11). [Sy¥n. cf. PoBéa, fin.] *
Tpomy, -ns, 4, (fr. rpém@ to turn), a turning: of the
heavenly bodies, Jas. i. 17 (on this see dwookiacpa); often
so in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hes. down [see L.
and S. s. v. 1]; cf. Job xxxviii. 33; Sap. vii. 18; Deut.
XXxili. 14; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
TpStros, -ov, 6, (fr. tpémw, see tpomn), fr. [Pind.], Ae-
schyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. a manner, way, fashion:
dv Tpdroy, as, even as, like as, [W. § 32,6; B.§ 131, 12]:
Mt. xxili. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Actsi.11; vii.28; 2 Tim.
iii. 8, (Gen. xxvi. 29; Ex. xiv. 13; [Deut. xi. 25; Ps. xli.
(xlii.) 2]; Ezek. xlii. 7; xlv.6; Mal. iii. 17; Xen. mem.
1, 2,59; anab. 6, 1 (3), 1; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466.e.); ray
Opotov TovTots Tpomor, [in like manner with these], Jude 7;
xa@’ ov tpdrov, as, Acts xv. 11; xxvii. 25; kata mavra
tpdmov, lio. iii. 2; kata pndéva rpdrov, in no wise, 2 Th.
ii. 3 (4 Mace. iv. 24; x.7; kata ovdéva tpdmov, 2 Mace.
xi. 31; 4 Mace. v.16); mavti rpdr@, Phil. i. 18 (1 Mace.
xiv. 35, and very often in the Grk. writ.) ; also év wavri
tpdér@, 2 Th. iii. 16 [here Lehm. ev 7. rémw; cf. W. § 31,
8d.]. 2. manner of life, character: Heb. xiii. 5
[R. V. mre. ‘turn of mind’; (cf. rods rpdrovs kupiov €xetv,
‘Teaching’ 11, 8) ].*
Tpotro-popéw, -@: 1 aor. erporopédpyaa; (fr. tpdmos, and
épo to bear); to bear one’s manners, endure one’s charac-
ter: twa, Acts xii. 18 K Tr txt. WH (see their App. ad
loc.), after codd. 8 B ete.; Vulg. mores eorum sustinuit;
(Cie. ad Attic. 13,29; Schol. on Arstph. ran. 1432;
Sept. Deut. i. 31 cod. Vat.; [Orig. in Jer. 248; Apost.
constt. 7, 36 (p. 219, 19 ed. Lagarde) ]}); see rpopodopéew.*
tpodt, -7s, 7), (Tpepa, 2 pf. rérpopa), food, nourish-
ment: Mt. ili. 4; vi. 25; x. 10; xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 23; Jn.
iv.8; Acts ii.46; ix. 19; xiv. 17; xxvii. 33 sq. 36, 38;
Jas. ii. 15; of the food of the mind, i.e. the substance
of instruction, Heb. v. 12,14. (Tragg., Xen., Plat.,
sqq-; Sept. for om2, 22k, 719, etc.) *
Tpddipos [on its accent cf. W.§ 6, 11.], -ov, 6, Trophi-
mus, an Hphesian Christian, a friend of the apostle Paul:
Acts xx.45 xxi. 29; 2 Tim. iv. 20.*
Tpodés, -ov, 7, (Tpepw; see tpopy), a nurse: 1 Th. ii.
7. (From Hom. down; for API?» Gen. xxxv. 8; 2K.
x. 25) Is. xlix: 23:)*
tpoo-copéw, -H: 1 aor. éerpopoddpnca; (rpopds and
dep); to bear like a nurse or mother, i. e. to take the most
anxious and tender care of: twa, Acts xiii. 18 GL T Tr
mrg. [R. V. mrg. bear as a nursing-father] (Deut. i. 31
cod. Alex. etc.; 2 Mace. vii. 27; Macar. hom. 46, 3 and
other eccles. writ.) ; see rpomodopéw.*
TpPoXLG, -ds, 7, (Tpoxds, q. V-), a track of a wheel, a rut;
a track, a path: tpoxias opOas moujcate Tots roo vpar,
i. e. follow the path of rectitude, do right, Heb. xii. 13
after Prov. iv. 26 (where for "ayn, asin sie lip salve dle
v. 6, 21; in some of the later poets equiv. to rpoxds).*
TpoxX 6s, -ov, 6, (tTp¢xw), fr. Hom. down, a wheel: Jas. iii.
6 (on this pass. see yéveors 3; [ef. W. 54 (53) ]).*
tpbPAuov [so T (cf. Proleg. p. 102) WH; -BrAiov RG L
Tr] (on the accent see Passow s. v.; [Chandler § 350;
631
TPwYe
Gottling p. 408]), -ov, rd, a dish, a deep dish [cf. B. D.
s. v. Dish]: Mt. xxvi. 23; Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Plut.,
Leian., Ael. v.h. 9, 37; Sept. for TWP» for which also
in Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 10; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 14.) *
Tpvyaw,-@; 1 aor. erpvynoa; (fr. rpvyn [lit. ‘dryness ”]
fruit gathered ripe in autumn, harvest); fr. Hom. down;
Sept. sevefal times for ¥3, 778, WP; to gather in ripe
Jruits; to gather the harvest or vintage: as in the Grk.
writ., with ace. of the fruit gathered, Lk. vi. 44; Rev.
xiv. 18; or of the plant from which it is gathered, Rev.
iy. LO."
tpvyav, -dvos, 7, (fr. tpvfm to murmur, sigh, coo, of
doves; cf. yoyyi¢w), a turtle-dove: Lk. ii. 24. (Arstph.,
Theocr., al.; Ael. v.h. 1,15; Sept. for 7A.) *
TpupAda, -as, 7, (i. G. Tpdpa, or Tpvpn, fr. Tp¥w to wear
away, perforate), a hole, [eye of a needle]: Mk. x. 25,
and R Gin Lk. xviii. 25. (Judg. xv. 11; Jer. xiii. 4;
xvi. 16; Sotad.in Plut. mor. p. 11 a. [i. e. de educ. puer.
§ 14]; Geop.) *
TpvTHLA, -Tos, TO, (rTpuTdw to bore), a hole, [eye of a
needle]: Mt. xix. 24 [here WH txt. rpqya,q.v.]. (Ar-
stph., Plut., Geop., al.) *
Tpvpawwa, -ns, 7, (tpupdw, q.v-), Tryphaena, a Chris-
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [B.D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil. p. 175 sq. ]*
Tpvpdw, -@: 1 aor. érpupynca; (tpupn, q.v-) 3; to live
delicately, live luxuriously, be given to a soft and luxuri-
ous life: Jas. v. 5. (Neh. ix. 25; Is. lxvi. 11; Isoer.,
Eur., Xen., Plat., sqq.) [Comp.: év-rpupdo. Syn. cf.
Trench § liv.]*
tpvpy, -7s, 7, (fr. Opimrw to break down, enervate;
pass. and mid. to live softly and delicately), softness,
effeminacy, luxurious living: Lk. vii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 13.
(Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, sqq.; Sept.) *
Tpvpadca, -ns, 7, (rpupaw, q.v-), Tryphosa, a Chris-
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [See reff. under Tpvdaua. | *
Tpwas, and (so L T WH [see I,¢ and reff. in Pape,
Eigennamen, s. v.]) Tp@ds, -ddos, 7, [on the art. with it
see W. §5, b.], Troas, a city near the Hellespont, for-
merly called ’Avrvydveta Tp., but by Lysimachus ’AXeEav-
Speva 7 Tp. in honor of Alexander the Great ; it flourished
under the Romans [and with its environs was raised by
Augustus to a colonia juris italici, ‘the Troad’; ef.
Strab. 13,1, 26; Plin. 5,33]: Acts xvi. 8,11; xx.5 s8q.;
2Coumi2y 2b: ive 13... [Be Dis v-]*
TpwyvAAvov (so Ptolem. 5, 2, 8), or Tpwyidcov [ (better
~yodwov; see WH. App. p. 159)] (so Strab. 14, p. 636),
-ov, To, Trogyllium, the name of a town and promontory
of Tonia, not far from the island Samos, at the foot of
Mt. Mycale, between Ephesus and the mouth of the
river Maeander: Acts xx.15 RG. [Cf. B.D.s. v.]*
Tpeyw; to gnaw, craunch, chew raw vegetables or fruits
(as nuts, almonds, ete.) : a@ypworw, of mules, Hom. Od.
6, 90, and often in other writers of animals feeding;
also of men fr. Hdt. down (as cixa, Hdt. 1, 71; Borpus,
Arstph. eqq. 1077; blackberries, Barn. ep. 7, 8 [where
see Harnack, Cunningham, Miiller]; xpouvov pera Set-
mvov, Xen. conv. 4, 8); univ. to eat: absol. (Sv0 tpwyouev
TUYX avo 632
Tupuos
ddeAgoi, we mess together, Polyb. 32, 9, 9) joined with | 1. the mark of a stroke or blow; print: tév fAov, In. xx.
mive, Mt. xxiv. 38 (so also Dem. p. 402, 21; Plut. symp.
1,1, 2; Ev. Nicod. c. 15, p. 640 ed. Thilo [p. 251 ed.
Tdf.]); tov dprov, Jn. xiii. 18 (see dpros 2 and éo6ia b.);
ficuratively, Jn. vi. 58; rv odpka, the ‘flesh’ of Christ
(see cap&, 1), Jn. vi. 54, 56 sq.*
Tvyxavw; 2 aor. érvyov; pf. (Heb. viii. 6) rérevya [so
cod. B], and (so L T Tr mrg. WH cod. 8) rérvxa a later
and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is
everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67
(59); Kiihner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; Phryn. ed. Lob.
p-595; WH. App. p.171]), in some texts also rerdynka
(a form com. in the earlier writ. [Rutherford, New Phryn.
p- 483 sq., and reff. as above]); a verb in freq. use fr.
Hom. down; “est Lat. attingere et contingere; Germ.
treffen, c. accus. i. q. etwas erlangen, neut. es trifft sich.”
Ast, Lex. Platon. s. v.; hence 1. trans. a.
prop. to hit the mark«(opp. to dpaprdvew to miss the
mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Hom.,
Xen., Leian.). b. trop. to reach, attain, obtain, get,
become master of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200
(188)), Lk. xx. 35 [W. 609 (566)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3);
XW. 1225) mEviis oe 2 Lamyai. 05 Geb. willie 6h oxi.
35. 2. intrans. to happen, chance, fall out: ei rvxor
(if it so fall out), it may be, perhaps, (freq. in prof. auth.),
1 Co. xiv. 10, where see Meyer; or, considered in ref.
to the topic in hand, it may be i.q. to specify, to take a
case, as, for example, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Vulg. in each pass.
ut puta; [ef. Meyer u. s.]); ruxdv, adverbially, perhaps,
it may be, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (cf. B. $145, 8; [W. § 45,8 N. 1];
see exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Passow s. v. I. 2 b.; [L. and 8.
s. v. B. III. 2; Soph. Lex. s.v.]). to meet one; hence 6
tuxav, he who meets one or presents himself unsought, any
chance, ordinary, common person, (see Passow s. v. II. 2;
[L.and8.s.v. A. II.1b.; Soph. Lex. s.v.]): od ruxer, not
common, i.e. eminent, exceptional, [A. V. special], Acts
xix. 11; xxviii. 2, (3 Mace. iii. 7); to chance to be:
jucOavy Tvyxavovra, half dead as he happened to be, just
as he was, Lk. x. 30 RG. [Comp.: €v-, vmep-ev-, emt-,
Tapa-, ovv- TuyxXave. | x
Tuptravitw : (TUpmavov) ; 1. to beat the drum or
timbrel. 2. to torture with the tympanum, an in-
strument of punishment: érupmavic@noav (Vulg. distenti
sunt), Heb. xi. 85 [R. V. were tortured (with marg. Or,
beaten to death) | (Plut. mor. p. 60 a.; joined with davacko-
homi¢er@a, Leian. Jup. trag. 19); the tympanum seems
to have been a wheel-shaped instrument of torture, over
which criminals were stretched as though they were
skins, and then horribly beaten with clubs or thongs
[ef. our ‘to break upon the wheel’; see Eng. Dicts. s. v.
Wheel]; ef. [Bleek on Heb. u. s.]; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi.
19 sq.*
tumikas, (fr. the adj. rumds, and this fr. rimos), adv.,
by way of example (prefiguratively) : tavta TumtK@s ouve-
Bawoy eéxeivois, these things happened unto them as a
warning to posterity [R. V. by way of example], 1 Co. x.
11 LT Tr WH. (Eccles. writ.) *
rimos, -ov, 6, (rumrw), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down;
25°, 25° [where LT Trmrg. romov], (Athen. 13 p. 585 ¢.
Tovs TUTOUs Tov TAnyav iSovaa). 2. a figure formed
by a blow or impression; hence univ. a figure, image: of
the images of the gods, Acts vii. 43 (Amos v. 26; Jo-
seph.-antt. 1,19, 11; 15, 9,5). [Cf. xtpsoe rimos Geos,
Barn. ep. 19,7; ‘ Teaching’ 4, 11.] 3. form: &8da-
xs, 1. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and sub-
stance of religion and represents it to the mind, Ro. vi.
17; i. q. manner of writing, the contents and form of a
letter, Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Mace. iii. 30). 4. an ex-
ample ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in
conformity to which a thing must be made: Acts vii. 443
Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. xxv. 40). B. in an ethical sense,
a dissuasive example, pattern of warning: plur. of ruin-
ous events which serve as admonitions or warnings to
others, 1 Co. x.6, 11 RG; an example to be imitated: of
men worthy of imitation, Phil. iii.17; with a gen. of the
pers. to whom the example is offered, 1 Tim. iv. 12; 1
Pet. v. 3: rvmov éavrév didovae tivi, 2 Th. iii. 9; yeverOat
tumov [turovs KR Lmrg. WH mrg.; cf. W. § 27, 1 note]
twi, 1 Th. i. 7; mapéxecOau éavtov rimov Kahav epywv, to
show one’s self an example of good works, Tit.ii. 7. y.
in a doctrinal sense, a type i.e. a person or thing prefigur-
ing a future (Messianic) person or thing: in this sense
Adam is called rimos tov péAXovros sc. “Addy, i. e. of
Jesus Christ, each of the two having exercised a pre-emi-
nent influence upon the human race (the former destrue-
tive, the latter saving), Ro. v. 14.*
tomrw; impf. érumrov; pres. pass. inf. rimrecOar; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for 73M; to strike, smite, beat (with
a staff, a whip, the fist, the hand, ete.) : twd, Mt. xxiv.
49; Lk. xii. 45; Acts xviii. 17; xxi. 32; xxiii.3; 76 oTépa
twos, Acts Xxill. 2; 1d mpdcwmdy twos, Lk. xxii. 64 [here
Lbr. T Tr WH om. the cl.]; riva evi [Tdf. eis] tiv ota-
yova, Lk. vi. 293 eis t. keadry tivos, Mt. xxvii. 30; [rh
kepadrny twos, Mk. xv. 19]; €avrev ta ornOn (Lat. plan-
gere pectora), of mourners, to smite their breasts, Lk.
xxiii. 48; also r. els rd ornOos, Lk. xviii. 13 [but G LT
Tr WH om. es]. God is said rimrew to smite one on
whom he inflicts punitive evil, Acts xxiii. 3 (Ex. viii. 2;
2S. xxiv. 17; Ezek. vii. 9; 2 Mace. iii. 39). to smite
metaph. i.e. fo wound, disquiet : rhv ovveidnoiv twos, one’s
conscience, 1 Co. viii. 12 (iva ti trimer oe 9 Kapdia cov;
18.1. 8; rov dé dyos 6&0 kara hpéva tie Babeiav, Hom.
Tl. 19,125; KauBicea érupe 7 adnOnin tev Adyar, Hat. 3,
64).*
Tupavvos, -ov, 6, Tyrannus, an Ephesian in whose
school Paul taught the gospel, but of whom we have no
further knowledge [cf. B. D.s. v.]: Acts xix. 9.*
tupBdtw: pres. pass. tupBaouar; (TvpByn, Lat. turba,
confusion; [ef. Curtius § 250]); [fr. Soph. down]; to
disturb, trouble: prop. rov mdov, Arstph. vesp. 257; trop.
in pass. fo be troubled in mind, disquieted: wept moda,
Lk. x. 41 RG (with the same constr. in Arstph. pax
1007; ju) @yav tupBagov, Nilus epist. 2, 258).*
Tipvos, -ov, 6, 7, a Tyrian, inhabitant of Tyre: Acts
xii. 20. » i CHidt? al:)]*
Tvpos |
Tipos, -ov, 7, (Hebr. 1\x or 78; fr. Aram. 930 a rock),
Tyre, a Pheeniian city on the Mediterranean, very an-
cient, large, splendid, flourishing in commerce, and pow-
erful by land and sea. In the time of Christ and the
apostles it was subject to the Romans, but continued to
possess considerable wealth and prosperity down to
A.D. 1291. It is at present an obscure little place con-
taining some five thousand inhabitants, part Mohamme-
dans part Christians, with a few Jews (cf. Bideker’s
Palestine p. 425sq.; {Murray’s ditto p. 370 sq.]). It is
mentioned Acts xxi. 3, 7, and (in company with Sidon)
in Mt. xi. 21sq.; xv. 21; Lk. vi. 17; x.138q.; Mk. iii. 8;
vii. 24 (where T om. Trmrg. WH br. kai Svdévos), 31.
[BB. DD.]*
Tubs, -ov, 6, (rUpw, to raise a smoke; hence prop.
‘darkened by smoke’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 43),
blind ; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 27sq.; xi. 5; Mk. viii. 22
sq.; x. 46; Lk. vii. 21sq.; xiv. 13,21; Jn. ix. 1 sq. 13;
x. 21, ete. b. as often in prof. auth. fr. Pind. down,
mentally blind: Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 17,19, 24, 26; Jn.
ix. 39-41; Ro. ii. 19; 2 Pet. i. 9; Rev. iti. 17.
tupdsw, -@: 1 aor. eruphaoa; pf. reridoxa; fr. [ Pind.
and] Hdt. down; to blind, make blind; in the N. T.
metaph. to blunt the mental discernment, darken the mind:
[, v: on the use and the omission of the mark of diaeresis
with, see Tdf. Proleg. p.108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.
136 sqq.; cf. Scrivener, Collation of Cod. Sin. ete. 2d ed. p.
XXxviii.|
vakivOuvos, -7, -ov, (vaxwOos), of hyacinth, of the color
of hyacinth, i.e. of a red color bordering on black
(Hesych. vakivivov- vropuedavifov): Rev. ix. 17 (Hom.,
Theoer., Lcian., al.; Sept.).*
vaKvOos, -ov, 6, hyacinth, the name of a flower (Hom.
and other poets; Theophr.), also of a precious stone of
the same color, i. e. dark-blue verging towards black
[A. V. jacinth (so R. V. with mre. sapphire) ; ef. B.D.
s.v. Jacinth; Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 9] (Philo, Joseph.,
Galen, Heliod., al.; Plin. h.n.37, 9, 41): Kev. xxi. 20.*
UdAwvos, -7, -ov, (Vados, q. V-), ina fragment of Corinna
and occasionally in the Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down, of
glass or transparent like glass, glassy: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2.*
tados, -ov, 6, [prob. allied w. der, verds (q.v.); hence
‘rain-drop’, Curtius § 604; Vaniéek p. 1046; but al.
make it of Egypt. origin (cf. L. and S.s. v.)], fr. Hat. |
((8. 24] who writes vedos; [cf. W. 22]) down; a
any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass: Rev. xxi.
18, 21.*
633
UBpiatns
Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 11; 1a vonpatra, 2 Co. iv. 4, (ri
Wuxi tupr@beinv, Plat. Phaedo p. 99 e.).*
tupdw, -@: Pass., pf. rerbgwpat; 1 aor. ptep. rupwdeis ;
(rudos, smoke; pride); prop. to raise a smoke, to wrap
in a mist; used only metaph. 1. to make proud,
puff up with pride, render insolent; pass. to be puffed
up with haughtiness or pride, 1 Tim. iii. 6 (Strab., Jo-
seph., Diog. Laért., al.). 2. to blind with pride or
conceit, to render foolish or stupid: 1 Tim. vi. 4; pf.
ptep. beclouded, besotted, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Dem., Aristot.,
Polyb., Plut., al.).*
Tvpw: (Todos, smoke); fr. Hdt. down; to cause or
emit smoke (Plaut. fumifico), raise a smoke; pass. (pres.
ptep. rupopevos) to smoke (Vulg. fumigo): Mt. xii. 20.*
Tupwvikds, -7), -ov, (rupav [cf. Chandler ed. 1 § 659],
a whirlwind, hurricane, typhoon), like a whirlwind,
tempestuous : dvepos, Acts xxvil. 14.*
Tvxukos [so WH; W. §6,11.] but RGLT Tr Tux
kos (Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 103;
Chandler § 266]),-ov, 6, Tychicus, an Asiatic Christian,
friend and companion of the apostle Paul: Acts xx. 4;
iph. vi. 21; Col.iv. 7; 2 Tim. iv. 12; Tit. 1.12. [See
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l.c.; B. D. s. v.J*
TUXSV, See TUyXaVa, 2.
¥t
bPpite; 1 aor. VBpica; Pass., 1 aor. ptep. vBproeis ;
1 fut. vBprcOnoopa ; (vBpis); fr. Hom. down; as
intrans. to be insolent; to behave insolently, wantonly,
outrageously. 2. trans. to act insolently and shame-
fully towards one (so even Hom.), to treat shamefully,
[cf. W. §32,1b.8.]: Mt. xxii. 6; Lk. xviii. 32; Acts
xiv. 5; [1 Th. ii. 2]; of one who injures another by
speaking evil of him, Lk. xi. 45. [Comp.: é€v-vBpito.]*
BPprs, -ews, 7, (fr. irep [(see Curtius p. 540); ef. Lat.
superbus, Eng. ‘uppishness ’]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
TIN1, MSI, TIT, ete. ; a. insolence ; impudence, pride,
haughtiness. b. a wrong springing from insolence,
an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental in-
jury and the wantonness of its infliction being prom-
inent; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26; 2, 2,5; see
bBpiorys]: prop., plur. 2 Co. xii. 10 (Hesych. dBpers-
tpavpara, dveidn); trop. injury inflicted by the violence of
a tempest: Acts xxvii. 10, 21, (tiv axd Trav uBpev UBpu,
Joseph. antt. 3, 6,4; Seicaca Oaddrrns U8pw, Anthol. 7,
29a. fet. Pind. Pyth. 1, 140]).*
SPpirris, -o00, 6, (U8pi¢@), fr. Hom. down, an insolent
man, ‘one who, uplifted with pride, either heaps insulting
language upon others or does them some shameful act of
vytaiva 634 vlog
wrong’ (Fritzsche, Ep.ad Rom. i. p. 86; ef. Trench, Syn.
§ xxix.; Schmidt ch. 177; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 5
(see uBpis)]): Ro. i. 80; 1 Tim. i. 13.*
vytaive; (vyus); fr. Hdt. down; to be sound, to be
well, to be in good health: prop., Lk. v. 31; vii. 10; xv.
27; [3 Jn. 2]; metaph. the phrase tysaivey ev rh micrer
[B. § 133, 19 ]is used of one whose Christian opinions are
free from any admixture of error, Tit. i. 13; rH wioret,
Th aydarn, TH bwopovy, [cf. B. u. s.], of one who keeps these
graces sound and strong, Tit. ii. 2; 9 tysaivovoa d.da-
oxa\ia, the sound i.e. true and incorrupt doctrine, 1
Tim. i. 10; 2 Tim. iv. 3; Tit.i.9; ii. 15; also Adyou tysai-
vovres (Philo de Abrah. § 38), 1 Tim. vi. 3; 2 Tim. i. 13,
(iytaivovoa. epi GeGv So€at cai adnGeis, Plut. de aud.
poet. c. 4).*
vyihs, -€s, ace. vy (four times in the N. T., Jn. v. 11,
15; vii. 23; Tit. ii. 8; for which tya is more com. in
Attie [cf. Meisterhans p. 66]), fr. Hom. down, sound:
prop. [ A. V. whole], of a man who is sound in body, Mt.
xv. 31 [WH only in mrg., but Tr br. in mrg.]; Acts iv.
10; yivopa, Jn. v.4 [RL], 6,9, 14; movety twa tyeq
(Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.), to make one whole i.e. restore
him to health, Jn. v.11,15; vii. 23; byujs do ete. sound
and thus free from ete. (see azo, I. 3 d.), Mk. v. 84; of
the members of the body, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5 Rec.;
Lk. vi. 10 Rec.; | metaph. Adyos vy. [A. V. sound speech]
i. e. teaching which does not deviate from the truth (see
vyaive), Tit. ii. 8 (in the Grk. writ., often equiv. te whole-
some, fit, wise: pvOos, Il. 8, 524; Adyos ovk tyns, Hat. 1,
8; see other exx. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II.
2 and 3]).*
dypds, -d, -ov, (Vo to moisten; [but al. fr. a different
r. meaning ‘to moisten’, fr. which also Lat. umor,
umidus; cf. Vaniéek p. 867; Curtius § 158]), fr. Hom.
down, damp, moist, wet; opp. to Enpos (q. v.), full of sap,
green: &vdov, Lk. xxiii. 31 (for 207 sappy, in Job viii.
16).*
USpia, -as, 7, (Vdwp), a vessel for holding water; a water-
jar, water-pot: Jn. ii. 6 sq.; iv. 28. (Arstph., Athen., al. ;
Sept. for 12. [Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 23.]) *
Upotrotéw, -@; (Udpordtns); to drink water, [be a
drinker of water; W. 498 (464)]: 1 Tim. v. 23. (Hat.
1, 71; Xen., Plat., Leian., Athen., al.; Ael. v. h. 2, 38.)*
Vpwmikds, -7, -dv, (VSpay, the dropsy, i. e. internal
water), dropsical, suffering from dropsy: Lk. xiv. 2.
(Hipper., [Aristot.], Polyb. 13, 2, 2; [al.].) *
tSap, (Vo [but cf. Curtius § 300]), gen. ddaros, 76, fr.
Hom. down, Hebr. 0°, water: of the water in rivers,
Mt. iii. 16; Rev. xvi. 12; in wells, Jn. iv. 7; in fountains,
Jas. iii. 12; Rev. viii. 10; xvi.4; in pools, Jn. v. 3 sq.
[RL], 7; of the water of the deluge, 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet.
ili. 6 [W. 604 sq. (562)]; of water in any of earth’s re-
positories, Rev. viii. 10 sq.; xi.63 6 @yyedos rév iddrov,
Rev. xvi. 5; of water as a primary element, out of and
through which the world that was before the deluge
arose and was compacted, 2 Pet. iii. 5. plur. ra ddara,
of the waves of the Lake of Galilee, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; (so
also the sing. ré Udap in Lk. viii. 25); of the waves of
the sea, Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2, (on both these pass. see havn,
1); woAAa vdara, many springs or fountains, Jn. iii. 23;
fig. used of many peoples, Rev. xvii. 1, as the seer him-
self explains it in vs. 15, ef. Nah. ii. 8; of a quantity of
water likened to a river, Rev. xii. 15; of a definite quan-
tity of water drawn for drinking, Jn. ii. 7; wornprov vda-
tos, Mk. ix. 41; for washing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Lk. vii. 44;
Jn. xiii. 5; Heb. x. 22 (23); 1d Aourpoy rod datos, of
baptism, Eph. v. 26 [ef. W. 138 (130)]; kepapsov vdaros,
Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxi. 10. in opp. to other things,
whether elements or liquids: opp. to 76 mvevpari x. Tupi
[ef. B. § 133,19; W. 217 (204), 412 (384)], Mt. iii. 11;
Lk. iii. 16; to mvevpare alone, Jn. i. 26, 31,33; Actsi. 5,
(in all these pass. the water of baptism is intended); to
T®@ mupi alone, Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22; to r@ otva, Jn. ii.
9; iv.46; to r@ atpare, Jn. xix. 34; Heb. ix. 19; 1 Jn.
v. 6,8. Allegorically, that which refreshes and keeps
alive the soul is likened to water, viz. the Spirit and truth —
of God, Jn. iv. 14 sq. (ddwp codias, Sir. xv. 3); on the
expressions Udwp (av, 7d dep T- (ans, Caoar myyal vdd-
tov, see (aw, II. a. and (7, 2 b. p. 274*.
terés, -ov, 6, (Vm to rain), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
ova and 10, rain: Acts xiv.17; xxviii. 2; Heb. vi. 7;
Jas. v. 7 (where LT Tr WH om. éerév; on this pass. see
dyipos and mpaipos); ibid. 18; Rev. xi. 6.*
viobecia, -as, 7, (fr. vids and Oéous, cf. dpobecia, vopo-
@ecia; in prof. auth. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down we find
Gers vids or Oerds mais, an adopted son), adoption, adop-
tion as sons (Vulg. adoptio filiorum) : [Diod. 1. 31 § 27, 5
(vol. x. 31,13 Dind.)]; Diog. Laért. 4,53; Inserr. In
the N. T. it is used to denote a. that relationship
which God was pleased to establish between himself and
the Israelites in preference to all other nations (see vids
tov Geov, 4 init.): Ro. ix. 4. b. the nature and
condition of the true disciples of Christ, who by receiv-
ing the Spirit of God into their souls become the sons
of God (see vids Tod Oeod, 4): Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 55
Eph. i. 5; it also includes the blessed state looked for
in the future life after the visible return of Christ from
heaven; hence drekdexecOar viobeciav, to wait for adop-
tion, i. e. the consummate condition of the sons of God,
which will render it evident that they are the sons of *
God, Ro. viii. 23, cf. 19.*
vids, -od, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for }3 and Chald. 93,
a son (male offspring) ; 1. prop. a. rarely of
the young of animals: Mt. xxi. 5 (Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 1;
Sir. xxxviii. 25); generally of the offspring of men, and
in the restricted sense, male issue (one begotten by a father
and born of a mother): Mt.x.37; Lk.i.13; [xiv. 5 iyi
Tr WH]; Acts vii. 29; Gal. iv. 22, etc.; 6 vids twos, Mt.
vii. 9; Mk. ix.17; Lk. iti. 2; Jn. i. 42 (43), and very
often. as in Grk. writ., vids is often to be supplied by
the reader [W. § 30, 3 p. 598 (551)]: as rév rod ZeBedaiov,
Mt. iv. 21; Mk.i.19. plur. vioi twos, Mt. xx. 20 sq. ;
Lk. v.10; Jn. iv. 12; Acts ii. 17; Heb. xi. 21, ete. with
the addition of an adj., as spwrdroxos, Mt. i. 25,[R G];
Lk. ii. 7; povoyevns, Lk. vii. 12. of vioi, genuine sons,
are distinguished fr. of vé6o in Heb. xii. 8. i. q. réxvow
en
er
vios
with dponv added, a man child [B. 80 (70)], Rev. xii. 5;
of one (actually or to be) regarded as a son, although
properly not one, Jn. xix. 26; Acts vii. 21; Heb. xi. 24;
in kindly address, Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11 (see réxvov,
a. B.). b. in a wider sense (like @vydrnp, rexvov), a
descendant, one of the posterity of any one: twos, Mt. i.
20; 6 vids Aavid, of the Messiah, Mt. xxii. 42,45; Mk.
xii. 35, 37; Lk. xx. 41,44; of Jesus the Messiah, Mt. ix.
20 RU. 23; xv..22; xx. 30 sq. ; xxi. 9, 155) Mk. x. 47 8q.5
Lk. xviii. 38 sq. plur. viot tevos, Mt. xxiii. 31; Heb. vii.
5; viot “Iopand, Israelites [the children of Israel], Mt.
SV os) Acts ix. 1 Disa x. S65) 2) Comite, 13%.) Heb: xi.
21 sq.; Rev. ii. 14; vii. 4; xxi. 12, (see "Iopand); viol
*ABpaap, sons of Abraham, is trop. applied to those who
by their faith in Christ are akin to Abraham, Gal. iii.
Ue 2. trop. and ace. to the Hebr. mode of speech
[W. 33 (32)], vids with the gen. of a person is used
of one who depends on another or is his follower: oi vioi
of teachers, i. q. pupils (see réxvoy, b. 8. [cf. Iren. haer.
4, 41, 2 qui enim ab aliquo edoctus est, verbo filius do-
centis dicitur, et ille eius pater]), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi.
19; tov wovnpov, who in thought and action are prompted
by the evil one and obey him, Mt. xiii. 38; vids d:a8edov,
Acts xiii. 10; with the gen. of a thing, one who is
connected with or belongs to a thing by any kind of
close relationship [W. § 34, 3 N.2; B. § 132, 10]: viol
Tov vuppavos (see vupdov), Mt. ix.15; Mk. ii.19; Lk.
v. 34, (77s dkpas, the garrison of the citadel, 1 Macc. iv.
2; in Ossian ‘a son of the hill’ i.e. ‘a hunter’, ‘a son of
the sea’ i.e. ‘a sailor’; cf. Jen. Lit. Zeit. for 1836 No.
58 p. 462 sq.); Tod ai@vos Tovrov, those whose character
belongs to this age [is ‘ worldly ’], Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 34;
rhs amebeias, i. e. aneiOeis, Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 6
[here T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.], (dvopias, Ps. Ixxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 23; tis tmepnpavias, 1 Mace. ii. 47); Bpovrigs,
who resemble thunder, thundering, (see Boavepyés), Mk.
iii.17; rod ards, instructed in evangelical truth and
devotedly obedient to it, Lk. xvi.8; Jn. xii. 36; with
kal THs nuépas added, 1 Th. v. 5; ris avacrdcews, sharers
in the resurrection, Lk. xx. 36; mapakdnoews, Acts iv.
36; one to whom any thing belongs: as viol trav mpodn-
Tov x. THs SvaOyKns, those to whom the prophetic and
covenant promises belong, Acts ili. 25; for whom a thing
is destined, as viol ts Baotdeias, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 38;
ths amwdeias, Jn. xvii. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3; one who is worthy
of a thing, as yeévyns, Mt. xxiii. 15; eipnyns, Lk. x. 6,
(Oavdrov, 1S. xx. 31; 2S. xii. 55 nian 12, Sept. a&sos
mrnyov, Deut. xxv. 2). [SYN. see réxvor. ]
vids Tod dvOpadmov, Sept. for O78 73, Cha'd. was 13,
son of man; it is 1. prop. a periphrasis for ‘man’,
esp. com. in the poet. bks. of the O. T., and usually car-
rying with it a suggestion of weakness and mortality:
Num. xxiii. 19; Job xvi. 21; xxv. 6; Ps. viii. 5; Is. li.
12; Sir. xvii. 30 (25), ete.; often in Ezekiel, where God
addresses the prophet by this name, as ii. 1, 33 iii. 1 (ii.
10), ete.; plur. DINT °33 (because DIN wants the plur.),
viol trav dvOparav, Gen. xi. 5; 1S. xxvi. 19; Ps. x. (xi.)
4; Prov. viii. 31, ete. Sointhe N. T.: Mk. iii. 28; Eph.
635 vids
iii. 5, (Sap. ix. 6); sing. dpotos vim adp. [like unto a son
of man], of Christ in the apocalyptic vision, Rey. i. 13
[here vidv T WH txt.]; xiv. 14 [vidv T WH], (after Dan.
vii. 13). 2. In Dan. vii. 13 sq., cf. 18, 22, 27, the
appellation son of man (W38 13) symbolically denotes
the fifth kingdom, universal and Messianic; and by
this term its humanity is indicated in contrast with the
barbarity and ferocity of the four preceding kingdoms
(the Babylonian, the Median, the Persian, the Macedo-
nian) typified under the form of beasts (vs. 2 sqq.).
But in the book of Enoch (written towards the close of
the 2d cent. before Christ [but cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) ;
Lipsius in Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. v.; Dillmann in Her-
zog (ed. 2, vol. xii. p. 350 sq.) ; Schodde, Book of Enoch,
p- 20 sqq.]) the name ‘son of man’ is employed to desig-
nate the person of the Messiah: 46, 2sq.; 48, 2; 62, 7.
9.14; 63,11; 69, 26 sq.; 70,1; 71,17. (The chapters
in which the name occurs are the work, if not of the
first author of the book (as Ewald and Dillmann think
[but see B. D. Am. ed. p. 740°; and Herzog as above p.
351]), at least of a Jewish writer (cf. Schiirer, Neutest.
Zeitgesch. § 32 V. 2 p. 626), certainly not (as Hilgen-
feld, Volkmar, Keim, and others imagine) of a Chris-
tian interpolator.) In the language of the Jews in Jn.
xii. 34 the titles Xpuords and vids tod advOpdrov are used
as synonyms. 3. The title 6 vids rod dvOpdrov, the
Son of Man, is used by Jesus of himself (speaking in
the third person) in Mt. viii. 20; ix. 6; x. 23; xi. 19;
xii. 8,32,40; xiii. 37,41; xvi. 13, 27 sq.; xvii. 9, 12, 22;
SQvatiG ALil IOLA oeibse Wale orcas ilfsh WSIS Borate, Alo SiO, civ, St)
44; xxiv. 30 (twice); xxv. 13 Rec., 31; xxvi. 2, 24, 45,
647- Mike tielOm 2S vali sde sO nixenOenl ors) sexy Sateen
Sabo AAS sane yecls 18 Wie VElS fae Gye sai UES Tike.
22, 26, 44, 56 Rec., 58; xi. 30; xii. 8, 10,40; xvii. 22,
DUA OX, BANG saya teh CHUNG Sob-6 MINE Sock Vl Blog sean, 2.
48,69; xxiv: 7; Jn.i. 51 (52); iii.13.sq.; vi. 27, 53, 62)s
Vili. 28; xii. 23, 34; xiii. 31, (once without the article,
Jn. v. 27), doubtless in order that (by recalling Dan. vii.
13 sq.— not, as some suppose, Ps. viii. 5) he might thus
intimate his Messiahship (as is plain from such pass. as
dweobe T. vi. T. avOp....é€pxdpmevov ert trav vede
AGv Tov ovpavod, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62, cf. Dan.
vii. 13; rov vi. Tr. avOp. Epxdpevov ev TH Bactdela avrod,
Mt. xvi. 28; drav xadion 6 vi. r. avOp. él Opdvov SdEns
avrov, Mt. xix. 28); and also (as appears to be the
case at least fr. Mk. ii. 28, where 6 vids rod dvOpamov
stands in emphatic antithesis to the repeated 6 avépwzos
preceding), that he might designate himself as the head
of the human race, the man kar’ efoxnv, the one who
both furnished the pattern of the perfect man and acted
on behalf of all mankind. Christ seems to have pre-
ferred this to the other Messianic titles, because by its
lowliness it was least suited to foster the expectation of
an earthly Messiah in royal splendor. There are no
traces of the application of the name to Jesus in the
apostolic age except in the speech of Stephen, Acts vii.
56, and that of James, the brother of Jesus, in a frag-
ment from Hegesippus given in Eus. h. e. 2, 23 (25), 13,
ee
vles
each being a reminiscence of the words of Jesus in Mt.
xxvi.64,(to which may be added, fr. the apostolic fathers,
Ignat. ad Ephes. 20, 2 €v “Incod Xpior@ TO kata odpka €k
yévous Aavid, T@ vid avOpwrov kai vio Oeov). ‘This dis-
use was owing no doubt to the fact that the term did not
seem to be quite congruous with the divine nature and
celestial majesty of Christ; hence in Barn. ep. 12,10 we
read, Incovs ox vids dvOpazov (i.e. like Joshua), ddX’
vids rod Geod (cf. Harnack’s note on the pass.]. On this
title, see esp. Holtzmann in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. fiir
wissenschaftl. Theol., 1865, p. 212 sqq.; Keim ii. p. 65
sqq- (CEng. trans. vol. iii. p. 79 sqq.) ; Immer, Theol. d.
N. T. p. 105 sqq.; Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 33:sq.; and
other reff. in Meyer on Mt. viii. 20; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Son of Man].* P
vids tod Oeov, son of God; 1. ina physical
sense, in various applications: originating by direct
creation, not begotten by man,—as the first man
Adam, Lk. iii. 88; Jesus, begotten of the Holy Ghost
without the intervention of a human father, Lk. i. 35;
in a heathen sense, as uttered by the Roman centurion
of Jesus, a ‘demigod ’ or ‘hero’, Mt. xxvii. 54; Mk. xv.
39. 2.in a metaphysical sense, in various ap-
plications: plur., of men, who although the issue of hu-
man parents yet could not come into being without the
volition of God, the primary author of all things, Heb.
ii. 10, ef. vss. 11, 13; of men as partaking of immortal life
after the resurrection, and thus becoming more closely
related to God, Lk. xx. 36; of angels, as beings superior
to men, and more closely akin to God, Deut. xxxii. 43 ;
for DTN °33 in Sept. of Gen. vi. 2, 4; Ps. xxviii. (xxix.)
1; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 7 (a phrase which in Job i. 6; ii-
1; xxxviii. 7 is translated a@yyeou Geov) ; in the highest
sense Jesus Christ is called 6 vids rot Geovd as of a nature
superhuman and closest to God: Ro. i. 4; viii. 3; Gal.
iv. 4; and esp. in the Ep. to the Heb., i. 2 (1), 5, 8; iii. 6;
iv. 145°v25,,05 Vio6; Vil-d, 285 x.29. *[\CiaB. DD. s.v..s0n
of God, and reff. in Am. ed. ] 3. ina theocratic
sense: of kings and magistrates, as vicegerents of God
the supreme ruler, 2 S. vii. 14; Ps. ii. 7; viol iwiarou,
Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxil.) 6; mpwroroxos (sc. Tov Oeov), of the
king of Israel, Ps. 1xxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28. In accordance
with Ps. ii. 7 and 2 S. vii. 14, the Jews called the Mes-
siah 6 vids rod Geod pre-eminently, as the supreme repre-
sentative of God, and equipped for his office with the
fulness of the Holy Spirit, i. e. endued with divine
power beyond any of the sons of men, Enoch 105, 2. In
the N. T. it is used of Jesus —in the utterances of the
devil, Mt. iv. 3,6; Lk. iv. 3,9; in passages where Jesus
is addressed by this title by others, Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 33;
KxVi. 40; AS Mike Sie ls veils ave 415s vii 28):
xxii. 70; Jn. xix. 7; Acts viii. 37 Rec.; ix. 20; xiii. 33;
in the language of Jesus
concerning himself, Mt. xxviii. 19; Jn. ix. 35; x. 36, cf.
Mt. xxi. 37 sq.; Mk. xii.6; besides, in Rev.ii.18; 6 vi.
t. 6., (6) Baoideds Tod "Iopand, Jn.i.49 (50); 6 Xpuords 6
vi. r.6., Mt. xxvi. 63; Jn. xi. 27; "Incods Xpioros vi. rt.
[L Tr WH marg. om. rod] 6. Mk. i. 1 [here T WH txt. om.
vids tov tv Wiorov, Lk. i. 32;
636
‘T wévaros
(see WH. App. p. 23)]; 6 Xpiorés 6 vids rod evAoynrod,
Mk. xiv. 61; with the added ethical idea of one who
enjoys intimate intercourse with God: 6 Xpuoros 6 vi. r.
Geod Cavros, Mt. xvi. 16, and Ree. in Jn. vi. 69. in the
solemn utterances of God concerning Jesus: 6 vids pov
6 ayanntés, Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk.i.11; ix. 7; Lk. iii.
22; ix. 35[RGLtxt.]; 2 Pet. i.17, ef. Mt. ii. 15. 4,
in an et hical sense with very various reference; those
whom God esteems as sons, whom he loves, protects and
benefits above others: so of the Jews, Deut. xiv. 1; Sap.
xii. 19 sqq.; Xviil. 4; viot Kal Ovyarépes Tov Geo9, Is. xliii.
6; Sap. ix. 7; mpwrdroxos rod Oeov, Ex. iv. 22; in the
N. T. of Christians, Ro. ix. 26; Rev. xxi. 7; those whose
character God, as a loving father, shapes by chastisement,
Heb. xii. 5-8; those who revere God as their father, the
pious worshippers of God, Sap. ii. 13 [here mais xvpiov],
18; those who in character and life resemble God (Sir. iv.
10 vioi tWiorov; [ef. Epict. dissert. 1, 9, 6]): Mt. v. 9,
45; viol tpiorov, Lk. vi. 35; viol x. @vyarepes, spoken of
Christians, 2 Co. vi. 18; those who are governed by the
Spirit of God, Ro. vill. 14 (Goo mvevpare Ocod Gyovrat, obrou
vioi eat ToU Oeov), repose the same calm and joyful trust
in God which children do in their parents, Ro. viii. 14
sqq-; Gal. iii. 26; iv. 6 sq., and hereafter in the blessed-
ness and glory of the life eternal will openly wear this dig-
nity of sons of God, Ro. viii. 19 (droxahuyis Tdv vidvy Tod
Geov), cf. 1 Jn. iil. 2, (see réxvoy, b. y. [and reff.]). pre-
eminently of Jesus, as enjoying the supreme love of God,
united to him in affectionate intimacy, privy to his saving
counsels, obedient to the Father’s will in all his acts: Mt.
xi 279 Lk. x. 22% Jn./ili. 35 sqrs ved 9) sq. “ha smany,
passages of the writings of John and of Paul, this ethi-
cal sense so blends with the metaphysical and the theo-
cratic, that it is often very difficult to decide which of
these elements is predominant in a particular case: Jn.
i. 343 iii.173; v. 21-23, 25 sq.; vi. 405 Vili. 35 sq.; xi..4;
xiv. 133 xvii} 1 JnJi.3, 73 Ws 22=245 820 5 ve 10;
14 sq.; v. 5, 9-13, 20; 2Jn.3,9; Ro.i. 3,9; v.10; viii.
3):29, 825 4°Cord. 93 xv. 283 2)Cos ano) Galvin day mie
20; Eph. iv. 13; 1 Th. i. 10; 6 vids rs ayarns avrot
(i. e. God’s), Col. i. 18; 6 Xpeoros 6 vi. r. 6. Jn. xx. 315 6
povoyerys vi-, Jn. i. 18 [here Tr WH povoy. Geds, L mre.
6 p. @. (see povoy. and reff.) ]; iii. 18; 6 vi. 7. 6. 6 povoy.,
ity 163) 1 Jaa. 9; (see povoyenis)- It can hardly be
doubted that a reverent regard for the transcendent
difference which separates Christ from all those who by
his grace are exalted to the dignity of sons of God led
John always to call Christians réxva tov G@eod, not as
Paul does vioi and rékva tod Ocod indiscriminately ; the
like reverence moved Luther to translate the plur. viot
r. 6. everywhere by Kinder Gottes ; [cf., however, réxvov,
b. y. and reff.]. This appellation is not found in 2
Th., Phil., Philem., the Pastoral Epp., nor in 1 Pet. or in
the Ep. of James.* j
An, -ns, 9, a forest, a wood; felled wood, fuel: Jas. tii.
5. (From Hom. down; Sept.) *
dpets, See ov.
*Ypévatos [on its accent cf. W. § 6, 11; Chandler
Upe~EVOS
§ 233], -ov, 6, CYpjy, -évos, 6, the god of marriage), Hy-
meneus, a heretic, one of the opponents of the apostle
Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim.ii.17. [B.D.s.v.]*
dpérepos, -a, -ov, (duets), possess. pron. of the 2d pers.
plur., your, yours ; a. possessed by you: with sub-
stantives, Jn. vili.17; 2 Co. viii. 8 [Rec.e quer]; Gal.
vi. 13; neut. 7d dp. substantively, opp. to rs dAddrpuor,
Lk. xvi. 12 [(WH txt. 76 fuer.) ; cf. W. § 61, 8a.]. b. al-
lotted to you: tip. owrnpia, Acts xxvii. 34; 7d dp. ereos,
Ro, xi. 31; 6 xaipds 6 dyér., the time appointed, oppor-
eune, for you, Jn. vii. 6; as a predicate, iperépa early f
Baotdeia tod Oeod, Lk. vi. 20. c. proceeding from you:
Tov Hyer. Sc. Adyov, Jn. xv. 20; [1 Co. xvi. 17 LT Tr WH
txtel]- d. objectively (see euds, c. 8.; [W. § 22, 7; B.
§ 132, 3]): iperépa (Rec." jer.) xavxnors, glorying in
you, 1 Co. xv. 31. [On the use of the word in the N. T.
cf. B. § 127, 21.]*
tpvéw, -@: impf. vuvovv; fut. duvpow; 1 aor. ptep.
vpynoas; (Uuvos); fr. Hes. down; Sept. often for 5bm,
NNN, Vw, Wt; 1. trans. to sing the praise of,
sing hymns to: twa, Acts xvi. 25; Heb. ii. 12. 2:
intrans. to sing a hymn, to sing: Mt. xxvi. 30; Mk. xiv.
26, (in both pass. of the singing of the paschal hymns;
these were Pss. exiii.—exviii. and Ps. exxxvi., which the
Jews call the ‘great Hallel’, [but see Ginsburg in Kitto
s. v. Hallel; Edersheim, The Temple ete. p. 191 sq.;
Buxtorf (ed. Fischer) p. 314 sq.]); Ps. Ixiv. (Ixv.) 13
(14); 1 Mace. xiii. 47.*
dpvos, -ov, 6, in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a song in
praise of gods, heroes, conquerors, [cf. Trench as below,
p- 297], but in the Scriptures of God; a sacred song,
hymn: plur., Eph. v.19; Col. iii. 16. (1 Mace. iv. 33;
2 Mace. i. 30; x. 7; [Jud. xvi. 13], etc.; of the Psalms
of David, Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 3; for nbn, Ps. xxxixa(xh)
Palsy, (ava 2e tor yw, 4s: xii. 10.) *
[Syn. buvos, pPaauds, GdH: Bd7H is the generic term;
WaAu. and Suv. are specific, the former designating a song
which took its general character from the O. T. ‘ Psalms’ (al-
though not restricted tothem, see 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26), the latter
a song of praise. “ While the leading idea of adu. is a
musical accompaniment, and that of Sur. praise to God,
#07 is the general word for a song, whether accompanied or
unaccompanied, whether of praise or on any other subject.
Thus it was quite possible for the same song to be at once
Wadpos, Suvosand w5n” (Bp. Lehtft. on Col. ili. 16). The
words occur together in Col. iii. 16 and Eph. v. 19. See
Trench, Syn. § lxxviii.]
dn-dyo; impf. dmpyov; 1. trans. fo lead under,
bring under, (Lat. subducere); so in various applications
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; once in the Scriptures,
imnyaye Kipios tiv Oddaccay, for yin, he caused to re-
cede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the
N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hat.
down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one’s self, to go
away, depart, (cf. dyw, 4; and see B. 204 (177)]: absol.,
Mk. vi. 33; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Tr mrg. sropevecGat) ;
xvii. 14; Jn. viii. 21; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5); of épyxé-
gevor kat of tmdyovres, coming and going, Mk. vi. 31;
trayet x. modet, Mt. xiii. 44; tarjyov x. émiorevov, Jn. xii.
637 ,
e ,
UTTaKOn
11; [tva imdynte x. xaorov épyre, In. xv. 16]; adbinui
Twa Urdye, to permit one to depart freely wherever he
wishes, Jn. xi. 44; xviii.8; dmaye is used by one in
dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 RT Tr WH]; viii. 13;
xx. 14; Mk. [ii. 9 Tdf.]; vii. 29; x.52; with eis elpnyy>
added, Mk. v. 34; tmdyere ev eipyvy, Jas. ii. 16; or in
sending one somewhere to do something, Lk. x. 3; plur.
Mt. viii. 32; with oriental circumstantiality (see dpi-
arnt, II. 1 ¢.) draye is prefixed to the imperatives of
other verbs: Mt. v. 24; viii. 4; [xviii. 15 GLT Tr WH];
xix. 21; xxi. 28; xxvii.65; xxviii. 10; Mk.i. 44; x. 21;
xvi. 7; Jn. iv.16; ix.7; Rev. x.8; with «ai inserted,
Mt. xviii. 15 Rec.; Mk. vi. 38 [T Tr WH om. Tr br. kaif];
Rev. xvi. 1. Particularly, imdyo is used to denote the
final departure of one who ceases to be another’s com-
panion or attendant, Jn. vi. 67; euphemistically, of one
who departs from life, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. with
designations of place: aod (for mot [W. § 54, 7; B. 71
(62) ]), In. xii. 35; xiv.5; xvi.5; 1Jn.ii.11; opp. to
epxeo Oar, to come, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; dou (for dao [W.
and B. u.s.]), Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36; xiv. 4; Rev.
xiv. 4; ekei, Jn. xi.8; mpds rov méuypavrd pe, mpds Tov
matépa, mpos Tov Gedy, to depart (from earth) to the father
(in heaven) is used by Jesus of himself, Jn. vii. 33; xiii.
85 xyi..b, 10,16 [| T Tr WH om. L br. thee], 17; foll:
by eis with an acc. of the place, Mt. ix. 6; xx. 4,7; Mk.
Hy xin? sexi. Lose Like xix. 30% Jnavi. Ales dawoes
(243)]; vii. 3; ix. 11; xi. 315; ets atyyadawoiay, Rev. xiii.
10; eis dmwAetav, Rev. xvii. 8,11; foll. by ets w. an ace.
of the place and mpds twa, Mt. xxvi. 18; Mk. v. 19;
brayo éri teva, Lk. xii. 58; dmdyo with an inf. denoting
the purpose, Jn. xxi. 3; jerd tivos with an ace. of the
way, Mt. v.41. On the phrase tmaye éricw pov [ Mt. iv.
10GLbr.; xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; Lk. iv. 8 RL in br.],
see dricw, 2a. fin.*
da-akoy, -75, 7, (fr. iraxovw, q. v.), obedience, compli-
ance, submission, (opp. to mapaxon): absol. eis tmaxony,
unto obedience i. e. to obey, Ro. vi. 16 [ef. W. 612 (569);
B. § 151, 28d.]; obedience rendered to any one’s coun-
sels: with a subject. gen., 2 Co. vii. 15; x. 6; Philem.
21; with a gen. of the object, —of the thing to which
one submits himself, r7s miorews (see miorts, 1 b. a. p.
513°), Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; trys dAnOeias, 1 Pei.i. 22; of the
person, tov Xpiorod, 2 Co. x.5; the obedience of one
who conforms his conduct to God’s commands, absol.
1 Pet. i. 2; opp. to duapria, Ro. vi. 16 ; réxva iakojs, i. e.
imnxoot, 1 Pet. i. 14; with a subjective gen. Ro. xv. 18;
an obedience shown in observing the requirements of
Christianity, im. ipdv, i.e. contextually, the report con-
cerning your obedience, Ro. xvi. 19; the obedience with
which Christ followed out the saving purpose of God,
esp. by his sufferings and death: absol. Heb. v. 8; with
a gen. of the subject, Ro. v.19. (The word is not
found in prof. auth.; nor in the Sept., except in 2 S.
xxii. 36 with the sense of favorable hearing; in 2S.
xxiii. 23 Aq. we find 6 émt draxony twos, Vulg. qui alicui
est a secretis, where it bears its primary and proper
signification of listening; see bmaxova.) *
UTAaKOVw
tn-axovw; impf. impxovov; 1 aor. dmjxovoa; fr. Hom.
down; (o listen, hearken ; 1. prop.: of one who on
a knock at the door comes to listen who it is, (the duty
of the porter), Acts xii. 13 [where A.,V. hearken, R. V.
answer] (Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Crito p. 43 a.; Phaedo
p- 59e.; Dem., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to hearken to
a command, i.e. to obey, be obedient unto, submit to, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): absol. Phil. ii. 12 [ef. W. 594
(552); imjxovoer eEedOciv, [R. V. obeyed to go out i. e.]
went out obediently, Heb. xi. 8; with a dat. of the pers.
(in Grk. writ. also w. a gen.), Mt. viii. 27; Mk. i. 27;
iv. 41; Like vill. 253 xvii-'6; Ro. vi. 16; Eph. vi: 1,5;
Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb. v.9; 1 Pet.iii.6; with a dat. of
the thing, 77 micres (see riots, 1 b. a. p. 513° near top),
Acts vi. 7; imneotvcarte eis dv rapeddOnte timov bSayjs,
by attraction for r@ time Tis dudaxjs eis dv Krdv.[W. § 24,
2b.; ef. rdmos, 3], Ro. vi. 17; 7@ evayyedig, Ro. x. 16;
2 Th.i. 83 7 Ady, 2 Th. iii. 14; 77 dpapria (Rec.), rais
extOvpias (LT Tr WH), i. e. to allow one’s self to be
captivated by, governed by, etc., Ro. vi. 12.*
UravSpos, -ov, (Ud and avnp), under i. e. subject to a
man: yun, married, Ro. vii. 2. (Num. v. [20], 29; Sir.
ix. 9; [Prov. vi. 24]; xli. 21; Polyb. 10, 26, 3; [Diod. 32,
10, 4 vol. v. 50,17 ed. Dind.]; Plut., Artem., Heliod.) *
in-avtdw, -@: 1 aor. tmqvrnca; to go to meet, to meet:
mivi, Mt. viii. 28; Lk. vill. 27; Jn. xi. 20, 30; xii.18; also
LT Tr WH in Mk. v. 2; Jn. iv. 51; and T Tr WH in
Mt. xxviii. 9; Acts xvi. 16; [and T in Lk. xvii. 12 (so
WH nrg. but without the dat.) ]; ina military reference,
of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 LTTrWH. (Pind,
Soph., Eur., Xen., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., al.) *
vn-dvTyCIs, -ews, ), (UmavTdw), a going to meet: In. xii.
13, and LT Tr WH in Mt. viii. 34 [B. § 146, 3] and xxv.
1 [cf. B. Le]. (Sudg. xi. 34; Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4;
App. b..¢. 4, \6:) *
Srapéts, -ews, 7, (irdpxo, q- V-), [fr. Aristot. down],
possessions, goods, wealth, property, (i. q- Ta tmapyxovta) :
Acts ii. 45; Heb. x. 34, (for w339, 2 Chr. xxxv. 7; Dan.
xi. 24 Theodot.; for 1320, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 48; Jer.
ix. 10; for 14, Prov. xviii. 11; xix. 14; Polyb., Dion.
Hal., Diod., Plut., Artem.).*
in-dpxw; impf. imjpyov; 1. prop. to begin below,
to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl.,
Hat., sqq.-). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be
ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.): univ.
and simply, Acts xix. 40 [ef. B. § 151, 29 note]; xxvii.
12, 21; €v rum, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18; with
a dat. of the pers. tmapyet pot tt, something is mine, I
have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i.
8 (where Lehm. wapdvra; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17;
Job ii. 4, ete.) ; ra daapyxovrd Tux, one’s substance, one’s
property, Lk. viii. 3; xii.15 Ltxt.T Tr WH; Acts iv.
32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40); also ra
Ux. twos, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv.47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21;
xii. 15 RG Lurg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mre. the
dat.]; xiv. $3; xvi. 13 xix. 8; 1 Co.xni3;"Heb. x 84,
(often in Sept. for nape, BAD, D°DD3; Sir. Ai i; Tob. i
20, ete.; 7a ida Urdpyovra, Polyb. 4, 3, 1). 3. to be,
638
uTrép
with a predicate nom. (as often in Attic) [cf. B. § 144,
14, 15 a., 18; W. 350 (828)]: as dpyov rijs ouraywyis
UmHpPXED, Lk. viii. 41; add, Lk. ix. 48; Acts vii. 55;
Vill 6 axvies aE. 36; xxi. 20; 1 Co. vii. 26; xii. 225
Jas. ii. 15; 2 Pet. ili. 11; the ptep. with a predicate
nom. » being i. e. who is etc., since or Ss gh he ete. is:
Lk.’xvi. 143 xxiii. 50; Acts i li. 30; ili. 2; xiv. 8 Ree.;
XVii. 24; [xxii 3]; Ro. iv. 19; 1 Co. xi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 17;
Kil. 16; Ga 1.14; ii. 14; pir. Lk. xi. 13; Acts xvi. 20,
Bis xvii. 2oae Pet. ii. 19: vmdpxew foll. by év w. a
dat. of the thing, to be contained in, Acts x. 12; io be in
a place, Phil. iii. 20; in some state, Lk. xvi. 23; & rH
e£ovaia tis, to be left in one’s power or disposal, Acts
v. 4; év iuariope evddEw Kai tpupy, to be gorgeously ap-
parelled and to live delicately, Lk. vii. 25; év poppy
Geov umapew, to be in the form of God (see popdn), Phil.
ii. 6 [here R.V. mrg. Gr. being originally (?; yet ef. 1 Co.
xi. 7)]; foll. by év with a dat. plur. of the pers., among,
Acts iv. 34 RG; 1Co. xi. 18. 7. paxpav a6 twos, Acts
Xvii. 27; apds THs wTnpias, to be conducive to safety,
Acts xxvii. 34. [Comp.: mpo- umapxo. | *
tm-e(kw; fr. Hom. down; to resist no longer, but to give
way, yield, (prop. of combatants); metaph. to yield to
authority and admonition, to submit : Heb. xiii. 17.*
um-evavTios, -a, -ov; a. opposite to; set over against :
immot dmev. GAAnAoLs, Meeting one another, Hes. scut.
347. b. trop. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.), opposed
to, contrary to: twi, Col.ii.14 [where see Bp. Lghtft.];
6 vrev. as subst. (Xen., Polyb., Plut.), an adversary, Heb.
x. 27, ef. Sept. Is. xxvi. 11, (Sept. for 28, 1¥); often
in the O. T. Apocr.*
dnép, [cf. Eng. up, over, etc. ], Lat. super, over, a prep-
osition, which stands before either the gen. or the ace.
according as it is used to express the idea of state and
rest or of motion over and beyond a place.
I. with the GeniTIvE; cf. W. 382 (358) sq. as
prop. of place, i. e. of position, situation, extension :
over, above, beyond, across. In this sense it does not
occur in the N. T.; but there it always, though joined
to other classes of words, has a tropical signification de-
rived from its original meaning. 2. i.q. Lat. pro,
for, i.e. for one’s safety, for one’s advantage or benefit,
(one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as
standing or bending ‘over’ the one whom he would shield
or defend [cf. W. u.s.]) : mpooetxoua dep t. Mt. v.44;
Lk. vi. 28 [T Trmrg. WH zepi (see 6 below) ]; Col. i. 3
L Tr WH mrg. (see 6 below); [Jas. v.16 L Trmrg. WH
txt.], 9; e&youa, Jas. v. 16 [RGT Tr txt. WH mrg.];
after Sonat, Acts viii. 24; and nouns denoting prayer, as
dénous, Ro. x. 1; 2 Co. i. 11; ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; Eph. vi.
19; mpocevxn, Acts xii. 5 (here L T Tr WH zepi [see 6
below]); Ro. xv. 30; 1 Tim. ii. 1, 2; evar dxép tr. (opp.
to card tuvos), to be for one i. e. to be on one’s side, to
favor and further one’s cause, Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50;
Ro. viii. 31, cf. 2 Co. xiii. 8; 7d dnp 7. that which is for
one’s advantage, Phil. iv. 10 [but see dva@a\dkw and
ppovéw, fin.] ; evtvyx ave and Umepevtvyxaver, Ro. viii. 26
RG, 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, cf. ix. 24; Aéyo, Acts xxvi. 1
e
uTrée
R WH txt. [see6 below]; pepeva, 1 Co. xii. 25; dypumva,
Heb. xiii. 17; dyavigoua ev rais mpocevyais, Col. iv. 12,
cf. Ro. xv. 30; mpeoBedo, Eph. vi. 20; 2Co. v.20; with
subst.: ¢7ros, 2 Co. vii. 7; [Col. iv. 13 Rec.]; wédvos, Col.
iv. 13 [GLT Tr WH]; ozovdy, 2 Co. vii. 12; viii. 16;
Sudxovos, Col. i. 7; to offer offerings for, Acts xxi. 26;
to enter the heavenly sanctuary for (used of Christ),
Heb. vi. 20; dpxtepea xadioracda, Heb.v.1; after the
ideas of suffering, dying, giving up life, ete.:
Ro. ix. 3; xvi.4; 2Co. xii. 15; after rv Wuyny ribévae
(imép twos), in order to avert ruin, death, etc., from
one, Jn. x. 113; xiii. 37sq.; of Christ dying to procure
salvation for his own, Jn. x. 15; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16;
Christ is said 7é aiya airod éxyivew, pass., Mk. xiv. 24
LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the
pass.]; drodéoGa, Jn. xviii. 14 Rec.; droOvicxeww, Jn. xi.
50 sqq.; [xviii. 14 LT Tr WH]; Acts xxi. 13; Ro. v. 7;
of Christ undergoing death for man’s salvation, Ro. v.
6, 8; xiv. 15; 1 Th.v. 10 [here T Tr WH txt. wepi (see
6 below); 1 Pet. iii. 18LT Tr WH txt.]; yeveo@ar 6avd-
tov, Heb. ii. 9; cravpwOjva, 1 Co. i. 13 (here L txt. Tr
mrg. WH mrg. epi [see 6 below]); [of God giving up
his Son, Ro. viii. 32]; mapadwddvat teva Eaurdv, Gal. ii. 20;
Eph. v. 2, 25; d:dd6vac éavrov, Tit. ii. 14; with a predi-
cate accus. added, avridurpov, 1 Tim. ii. 6; 76 cdpa adrod
8ddvat, pass. Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.], ef. 1 Co.
xi. 24; ruOjvat (AvOjvat, see Ova, init.),1 Co. v. 7; madeiv,
1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 187 RG WHmmrg.; iv. 1 RG]; dyagew
éautév, Jn. xvii. 19. Since what is done for one’s ad-
vantage frequently cannot be done without acting in
his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death
of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force
of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead),
we easily understand how vzép, like the Lat. pro and
our for, comes to signify 3. in the place of, instead
of, (which is more precisely expressed by dvri; hence
the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv.
haer. 5, 1, 7@ iSio aiyatt AuTpwcapévov jyas Tov Kupiov
cal Sdvros thy Wuxny Vmep TOV Hpetepav Wuyxav Kal TH
adpka THY éavToU aGvTi Tey juerepor Gapkay): iva vrép
gov pot Staxovn, Philem. 13; vép rév vexpov Banrifer Oar
(see Barriga, fin.), 1 Co. xv. 29; [add, Col. i. 7 Ltxt. Tr
txt. WH txt.]; in expressions concerning the death of
Christ: eis imép mdvtwv dnéOavey (for the inference is
drawn dpa of mdvres dréOavor, i.e. all are reckoned as
dead), 2 Co. v. 14 (15), 15; add, 21; Gal. iii. 13. [On
this debated sense of vmép, see Meyer and Van Hengel
on Ro. v. 6; Ellicott on Gal. and Philem. ll. ee.; Wieseler
on Gal. i. 4; Trench, Syn. § 1xxxii.; W. 383 (358) note.
Since anything whether of an active or passive char-
acter which is undertaken on behalf of a person or
thing is undertaken ‘on account of’ that person or
thing, vmép is used 4. of the impelling or moving
eause; on account of, for the sake of, any person or thing :
trép tis Tov Kéopov Cons, to procure (true) life for man-
kind, Jn. vi. 51; (o do or suffer anything brép tov dvéparos
Geod, "Inood, tov kupiov: Acts v.41; ix. 16; xv. 265 xxi.
18; Ro. i. 5; 3 Jn. 73 mdoxew vrép Tov Xpiorod, Phil. i.
639
e ,
UTrép
29; vmép tis Bactdelas rot Geov, 2 Th. i. 5; orevoywpiat
vmép Tov Xptorov, 2 Co. xii. 10 [it is better to connect
imép etc. here with eddoxd] ; dmrobvicKew vmép Oeod,
Ignat. ad Rom. 4. examples with a gen. of the thing
are, Jn. xi. 4; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Co.i. 6; xii. 19; imép ris
evdoxias, to satisfy (his) good-pleasure, Phil. ii.13; with
a gen. of the pers., 2 Co.i.6; Eph. iii.1,13; Coi. i. 24;
Sogdlew, evyapoteiv vaep r. (gen. of the thing), Ro. xv.
9; 1 Co. x. 30; uvmép mdvror, for all favors, Eph. v. 20;
evxaptoreiy brep with a gen. of the pers., Ro. i. 8 (here
LT Tr WH zepi [see 6 below]); 2 Co. i. 11; Eph.i. 16;
dyava éyew vrép with a gen. of the pers. Col. ii. 1 L T Tr
WH [see 6 below]; vmép (r&v) duapriady (or dyvonudray),
to offer sacrifices, Heb. v. 1,3 (here L. T Tr WH mepi [see
6 below]); vii. 27; ix. 7; x. 123; dmoOaveiv, of Christ,
1 Co. xv. 3; €avrdv dodvat, Gal. i.4 R WH txt. [see 6 be-
low]. 5. Like the Lat. super (ef. Klotz, HWB. d.
Lat. Spr. ii. p. 1497”; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. IL. B.
2 b.]), it freq. refers to the object under consideration,
concerning, of, as respects, with regard to, ({ef. B. § 147,
21]; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in W. 383 (358 sq.));
so after kavxacOa, xavxnua, kavynots, [R. V. on behalf
of]: 2 Co. v.12; vii. 4,14; viii. 24; ix. 2sq.; xii. 5;
2 Th.i. 4[here LT Tr WH éy- (or é-) xavyaoOa]; pv-
awovcba, 1 Co. iv. 6 [al. refer this to 4 above; see Meyer
ed. Heinrici (cf. @votda, 2 fin.)]; éAmis, 2 Co. i. 7 (6);
ayvociv, 8 (here LT Tr WHmrg. zepi [see 6 below]);
gpoveiv, Phil. i. 7 (2 Mace. xiv. 8); éepwrav, 2 Th. ii. 1;
kpagew, to proclaim concerning, Ro. ix. 27; [mapaxaneiv,
1 Th. iii. 2G LT Tr WH (see 6 below)]; after cizeiv,
Jn. i. 30 LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; (so after verbs of
saying, writing, etc., 2S. xviii. 5; 2 Chr. xxxi. 9; Joel i.
3; Judith xv.4; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; 2 Mace. xi. 35); etre
tmep Tirov, whether inquiry be made about Titus, 2 Co.
Vili. 235 daép Tovrou, concerning this, 2 Co. xii. 8. 6.
In the N. T. Mss., as in those of prof. auth. also, the
prepositions dxép and epi are confounded, [cf. W. 383
(358) note; § 50,3; B.§ 147,21; Kiihner § 435, I. 2e.;
Meisterhans § 49, 12; also Wieseler or Ellicott on Gal. as
below; Meyer on 1 Co. xv. 3, (see wepi I. c. 8.) ]; this oe:
curs in the foll. pass.: Mk. xiv. 24; [Lk. vi. 28]; Jn. 1
30; Actsian..53) xxvi. 1s Ro.i. 83.1 Co. 1. 135 2Ca.n/8*
Gal.ne4's Cola. 35 ie 15) [.1 Th. 2% v. 10)5) Hebsya de
[For trép ex mepiocod or dmép exmepioaod, see vzepexme-
pioooo. |
II. with the AccuSATIVE (cf. W. § 49, e.); over, be-
yond, away over; more than; 1. prop. of the
place ‘over’ or ‘beyond’ which, as in the Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down; not thus used in the N. T., wheré 1t 1s
always 2. metaph. of the measure or degree
exceeded [cf. B. § 147, 21]; a. univ.: eivat inép
twva, to be above i. e. superior to one, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi.
40; 1d dvopa Tb Urép Tay dvoya sc. by, the name superior
to every (other) name, Phil. ii. 9; kepadny imép mavra
sc. ovaav, the supreme head or lord [A.V. head over all
things], Eph. i. 22; vmép Soddoy dvra, more than a ser-
vant, Philem. 16; more than [R.V. beyond], ibid. 21;
Umép mavra, above (i.e. more and greater than) all, Eph
vTrepaipw
iii. 20°; dmép rv Aaumpdryra Tod HAiov, above (i.e. sur-
passing) the brightness of the sun, Acts xxvi. 133; more
(to a greater degree) than, dudeiv twa vmép twa, Mt.
x. 87 (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Fritzsche ad
loc.) ; beyond, 1Co. iv. 6; 2 Co. xii. 6; dmép 6 duvacbe,
beyond what ye are able, beyond your strength, 1 Co.
x. 13 [ef. W. 590 (549)]; also daep Suvapuw, 2 Co. i. 8;
opp. to cara Sivapw (as in Hom. II. 3, 59 ear’ atcav, ot
tnép aicay, cf. 6,487; 17, 321. 327), 2 Co. viii. 3 (where
LT Tr WH apa divapyy). b. with words imply-
ing comparison: mpoxémrew, Gal. i. 14; of the measure
beyond which one is reduced, 9rracGat, 2 Co. xii. 138 [W.
§ 49 e.], (mAcovdtw, 1 Esdr. viii. 72; mepiacevw, 1 Mace.
iii. 30; vmepBdddo, Sir. xxv. 11); after comparatives
i. q. than, Lk. xvi. 8 ; Heb. iv. 12, (Judg. xi. 25 ; 1 K. xix.
4; Sir. xxx.17); cf. W. § 35, 2; [B.§ 147, 21]. c
urép is used adverbially; as, daép eyo (L tmepeya (cf. W.
46 (45)), WH tmep ya (cf. W. § 14, 2 Note) ], much more
(or ina much greater degree) I, 2 Co. xi. 23; cf. Kypke
ad loc.; W. 423 (394). [For tzép Xiav see drepXiav. |
III. In ComrositTion drép denotes 1. over, above,
beyond: tmepavea, imepexewa, Urepexteiva. 2. excess
of measure, more than: Umepexreptoood, trepukao. 3.
aid, for; in defence of: trepevtvyydvo. Cf. Viger. ed.
Hermann p. 668; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 351; [Elli-
cott on Eph. iii. 20].*
Umep-alpw: pres. mid. vrepaipopa; (vmép and aipw) ;
to lift or raise up over some thing; mid. to lift one’s self
up, be exalted, be haughty: 2 Co. xii. 7 [R.V. to be exalted
overmuch]; émi twa, above one, 2 Th. ii. 4; with a dat.
incom. tui, to carry one’s self haughtily to, behave inso-
lently towards one, 2 Mace. v. 23; (very variously in
prof. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Plato down).*
Urépaxpos, -ov, (Vulg. superadultus) ; 1. beyond
the axpn or bloom of life, past prime, (Plat. de rep. 5 p.
460 e. dp’ obv cot EvvdoKe? pérpios xpdvos akpns Ta etkoow
€rn ‘yuvatki, avdpt dé ta tpidkovra): Eustath. 2
overripe, plump and ripe, (and so in greater danger of
defilement): of a virgin [R. V. pas. the flower of her
age], 1 Co. vii. 36.*
dmep-dve, (vrep and dvw), adv., above: tuvds [ef. W.§ 54,
6], above a thing,— of place, Eph. iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5;
of rank and power, Eph.i.21. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb.,
Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al., [W. § 50, 7 Note 1; B.
§ 146, 4].)*
Umep-avédve ; to increase beyond measure; to grow ex-
ceedingly: 2 Th. i. 3. [Andoc., Galen, Dio Cass., al.]*
imep-Baive ; fr. Hom. down; to step over, go beyond ;
metaph. to transgress: Sixny, vdpous, ete., often fr. Hat.
and Pind. down; absol. to overstep the proper limits i. e.
to transgress, trespass, do wrong, sin: joined with dyap-
rave, Hom. Il. 9, 501; Plat. rep. 2 p. 366 a.; spec. of
one who defrauds another in business, overreaches,
(Luth. 2u weit greifen), with cai meovexreiy added, 1 Th.
iv. 6 [but see mpayya, b. ].*
UrepBaddAdvras, (fr. the ptep. of the verb bmepBadro,
as évrw, fr. dv), above measure: 2 Co. xi. 238. (Job xv.
31; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al.) *
640
UTEpeY@
trep-BaAXw; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. fo surpass
in throwing; to throw over or beyond any thing. a
intrans. to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel; ptep. dmep-
Bddrov, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. [in Eph. i. 19; iii.
19] supereminens; (Aeschyl., Hat., Eur., Isocr., Xen.,
Plat., al.) : 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 14; Eph. i. 19; ii. 7; with
a gen. of the object surpassed (Aeschyl. Prom. 923;
Plat. Gorg. p. 475 b.; cf. Matthiae § 358, 2), ) dmepBad-
Aovea THs yoaoews ayarn Xpiorod, the love of Christ which
passeth knowledge, Eph. iii. 19 [ef. W. 346 (324) note].*
dmep-Body, -Hs, 9, (UrepBadra, q. V.), fr. Hat. [8, 112, 4]
and Thue. down ; 1. prop. a throwing beyond. 2.
metaph. superiority, excellence, pre-eminence, [R. V. ex-
ceeding greatness]: with a gen. of the thing, 2 Co. iv. 7;
xii. 7; ka vrepBorgy, beyond measure, exceedingly, pre-
eminently: Ro. vii. 18; 1 Co. xii. 31 [ef. W. § 54,2b.; B.
§ 125, 11 fin.]; 2 Co. i. 8; Gal. i. 13, (4 Macc. iii. 18 ;
Soph. O. R. 1196; Isoer. p. 84d. [i. e. mpos Bir. 5]; Polyb.
3, 92,10; Diod. 2,163; 17,47); «a& dm. eis dmepBornp,
beyond all measure, [R. V. more and more exceedingly],
'Coviv1 i."
vaep-eyS [Lchm.], i. q. vrép éyw (see vnép, II. 2c.): 2
Co. xi. 23. Cf. W. 46 (45).*
imep-cidov; (see eidw); fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down; to
overlook, take no notice of, not atiend to: ri, Acts xvii.
30.*
" darep-exewa,, (i. q. varép exeiva, like éméxewa, i. q. én” éxeiva
[W. §6,11.]), beyond: ra dm. twos, the regions lying be
yond the country of one’s residence, 2 Co. x. 16 [cf. W.
§ 54,6]. (Byzant. and eccles. writ.; éméxewa pnropes
Aeyouot . . . Umepexewwa S€ pdvov of avppaxes, Thom. Mag.
p- 336 [W. 463 (431)].) *
dmep-ex-repiscot, [Rec. dmép éxmep. and in Eph. dmép
éx mep.; see meptcads, 1], adv., (Vulg. [in Eph. iii. 20]
superabundanter), superabundantly; beyond measure;
exceedingly: 1 Th. v.18 RG WH txt.; iii. 10; [exceed-
ing abundantly foll. by dmép i. q.] far more than, Eph. iii.
20 [B. § 132, 21]. Not found elsewhere [exe. in Dan.
iii, 22 Ald., Compl. Cf. B. § 146, 4].*
daep-ex-mrepioaas, adv., beyond measure: 1 Th. v. 13
LT Tr WH mrg. [R. V. exceeding highly]; see éxmepic-
gas. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11.) *
wrep-ex-telvw; to extend beyond the prescribed bounds,
stretch out beyond measure, stretch out overmuch: 2 Co. x.
14 [cf. W. 474 (442)]. (Anth. 9, 643, 6 acc. to the
emendation of Wm. Dind.; Greg. Naz., Eustath.) *
dmep-ex-xtvo (-vwve, LT Tr WH; see exxéa, init.) ; to
pour out beyond measure; pass. to overflow, run over,
(Vulg. supereffluo): Lk. vi. 38; Joel ii. 24 [Alex., ete.].
(Not found elsewhere.) *
dmep-ev-rvyxdvw; to intercede for one: drép twos [ W.
§ 52, 4,17], Ro. viii. 26; on this pass. see mvedua p. 522°.
(Eccl. writ.) *
tmep-€xo; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to have or
hold over one (as tiv xetpa, of a protector, with a gen.
of the pers. protected; so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down;
Joseph. antt. 6, 2, 2). 2. intrans. to stand out, rise
above, overtop, (so prop. first in Hom. Il. 3, 210); met
UTepnpavia
aph. a. to be above, be superior in rank, authority,
power: Baowdet ws vmepéexovrs, [ A. V. as supreme], 1 Pet.
ui. 13; eEovoia: vrepexoveat, of magistrates (A. V. higher
powers), Ro. xiii. 1 (of dmepéxovres, substantively, the
prominent men, rulers, Polyb. 28, 4,9; 30,4, 17; of
kings, Sap. vi. 6). b. to excel, to be superior: tuvés,
better than [cf. B. § 132, 22], Phil. ii. 3 (Sir. xxxvi. 7;
Xen. venat. 1, 11; Plat. Menex. p. 237d.; Dem. p. 689,
10; Diod. 17, 77); to surpass: twa or ri [ef. B. § 180,
4], Phil. iv. 7; 7d dmrepexov, subst. the excellency, sur-
passing worth [ef. W. § 34, 2], Phil. iii. 8.*
wrepynpavia, -as, 9, (vmepnpavos, q. V-), pride, haughli-
ness, arrogance, the characteristic of one who, with a
swollen estimate of his own powers or merits, looks
down on others and even treats them with insolence
and contempt: Mk. vii. 22. (From Xen. and Plat. down;
Sept. for M83 and 11825 often in the O. T. Apocr.) *
wmeptavos, -ov, (fr. drép and daivoua, with the con-
nective [or Epie extension (ef. Curtius § 392)]9; cf.
umepn hepis, Susy Aeyys, Tavn eyys, evn yevns), fr. Hes.
down ; 1. showing one’s self above others, overtop-
ping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent, (Plat., Plut.,
al.). 2. especially in a bad sense, with an over-
weening estimate of one’s means or merits, despising others
or even treating them with contempt, haughty, [cf. Westcott,
Epp. of St. John, p. 64°]: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2; opp.
to rarewwol, Jas. iv. 63; 1 Pet. v. 5, (in these two pass.
after Prov. iii. 34); with dtavoia capdias added, Lk. i. 51.
(Sept. for 1, D1, 783, ete.; often in the O. T. Apocr.)
[See Trench, Syn. § xxix. ; Schmidt ch. 176, 8.]*
vmepAtav (formed like tmepayav, trépev), and written
separately umép Aiav (so R Tr [ef. W. § 50, 7 Note; B.
§ 146, 4]), over much; pre-eminently: ot repdiav awdaro-
how, the most eminent apostles, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11.*
Urep-vikdw, -@; (Cyprian supervinco); to be more than
a@ conqueror, to gain a surpassing victory: Ro. viii. 37.
(Leon. tactic. 14, 25 ma x. py dmepuxa; Socrat. h. e. 3,
21 may Kadov, inepixav S€ éripOovov. Found in other
ecel. writ. Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 15, uses dep ex vixav.) *
Umép-oyKos, -ov, (vmep, and dyxos a swelling), over-
swollen ; metaph. immoderate, extravagant: dadeiv, pOcy-
yer Oa, inépoyka, [A.V. great swelling words] expressive
of arrogance, Jude 16; 2 Pet. ii. 18; with emt rév Oedv
added, Dan. xi. 36 Theodot., cf. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26.
(Xen., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., Arr.) *
drepoxh, -7s, 4, (fr. Urepoxos, and this fr. drepexa, q.V-),
prop. elevation, pre-eminence, superiority, (prop. in Polyb.,
Plut., al.); metaph. excellence (Plat.. aristot., Polyb.,
Joseph., Plut., al.) : of év vmep. sc. dvres, [R. V. those that
are in high place], of magistrates, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (ev vzep.
xeioOa, to have great honor and authority, 2 Mace. iii.
11); Ka’ dmepoyxny Aoyov i) copias, [A.V. with excellency
of speech or of wisdom i. e.] with distinguished elo-
quence or wisdom, 1 Co. ii. 1.*
tmep-mepicoevw: 1 aor. vreperepiccevoa; Pres. pass.
dmepreptooevopa; (Vulg. superabundo); to abound be-
yond measure, abound exceedingly: Ro. v. 20; pass. (see
mepiocetv@, 2), to overflow, to enjoy abundanily: with a
641
vmnpérns
dat. of the thing, 2 Co. vii. 4. (Moschion de pass. mulier.
p- 6, ed. Dewez; Byzant. writ.) *
imep-mrepioads, adv., beyond measure, exceedingly: Mk.
vii. 87. Scarcely found elsewhere.*
dmep-rAcovdtw: 1 aor. umepeAcovaca; (Vulg. supers
abundo); to be exceedingly abundant: 1 'Tim. i. 14 (rén
Umeprreovdtovra aépa, Heron. spirit. p. 165, 40; several
times also in eccl. writ. [dmepmAeovdfer absol. overflows,
Herm. mand. 5, 2,5]; to possess in excess, éav Umepm)eo-
vaon 6 divOperos, e£apaptraver, Ps. Sal. v. 19).*
dmep-updw, -@: 1 aor. drepiooa; (Ambros. super-
exallo); metaph. a. to exalt to the highest rank and
power, raise to supreme majesty: twd, Phil. ii. 9; pass.
Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 9. b. to extol most highly: Song of
the Three ete. 28 sqq. ; Dan. iii. (iv.) 34 Theodot. _—c.
pass. to be lifted up with pride, exalted beyond measure; to
carry one’s self loftily: Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 35. (Eecl.
and Byzant. writ.) *
Umep-ppovew, -@; (vrépppwv); fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt.
down; to think more highly of one’s self than is proper:
Ro. Xt 3."
umep@ov, -ov, Td, (fr. Urepgos or Umepwios, ‘upper,’ and
this fr. vrép; like marpwtos, matpaos, fr. marnp; [cf. W.
96 (91) ]), in the Grk. writ. (often in Hom.) the highest
part of the house, the upper rooms or story where the wo-
men resided; in bibl. Grk. (Sept. for my), a room in
the upper part of a house, sometimes built upon the flat
roof of the house (2 K. xxiii. 12), whither Orientals
were wont to retire in order to sup, meditate, pray,
etc.; [R. V. upper chamber; cf. B.D. s. v. House; McC.
and S.s.v.]: Acts 1.13; ix. 37, 39; xx. 8, (Joseph. vit.
30).*
wn-éxw; prop. to hold under, to put under, place under-
neath; as rv xetpa, Hom. Il. 7,188; Dem., Plat., al.;
metaph. to sustain, undergo: Sixny, to suffer punishment,
Jude 7 (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Soph. down ; also
Sikas, kpiow, Tyszwpiay, etc.; Cnuiav, Eurip. Ion 1308; 2
Mace. iv. 48).*
JmhKoos, -uv, (akon; See vraxovw, 2), fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down, giving ear, obedient: Phil. ii. 8; with dat.
of the pers. Acts vil. 39; ets mavra, 2 Co. ii. 9.*
danpetéw, -@; 1 aor. Umnpérnoa: fr. Hdt. down; to be
umnpetns (q- V-), prop. a. to act as rower, to row,
(Diod., Ael.). b. to minister, render service: twit,
AGS ESI SC IEXK OA XXTVe ose
danperys, -ov, 6, (tr. dad, and épérns fr. épéoow to row),
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. prop. an under
rower, subordinate rower. b. any one who serves with
his hands; a servant; in the N.T. of the officers and
attendants of magistrates as —of the oflicer who exe-
cutes penalties, Mt. v. 25; of the attendants of a king,
ot Um. of €uol, my servants, retinue, the soldiers 1 should
have if I were a king, Jn. xviii. 836; of the servants or
officers of the Sanhedrin, Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54, 65;
Jn. vii. 32, 45sq.; xviii. 3, 12, 22; xix.6; Acts v. 22, 26;
joined with Sov\os (Plat. polit. p. 289 ¢.), Jn. xviii. 18;
of the attendant of a synagogue, Lk. iv. 20; of any one
ministering or rendering service, Acts xiii. 5. Cc. any
of
UTTVOS
one who aids another in any work; an assistant: of a
preacher of the gospel [A. V. minister, q. v. in B. D.],
Acts xxvi. 16; dmnpérat Adyou, Lk. i. 2; Xpeorod, 1 Co.
iv. 1. [SyN. see dcdxovos, fin. ] *
Umvos, -ov, 6, [i e. avmvos, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus;
‘Curtius § 391], fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 71, sleep: prop.,
Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; Jn. xi. 13; Acts xx.9; metaph.
<& tmvou éyepbjvat (see éyeipw, 1), Ro. xiii. 11.*
ind (i. e. Lat. sub [Curtius § 393]), prep., under, in
prof. auth. used with the gen. dat. and acc., but in the
N. T. with the gen. and ace. only. [On the use and
the omission of elision with it before words beginning
with a vowel, see WH. App. p. 146°; Tdf. Proleg. p. iv.
(addenda et emendanda). ]
I. with the Genitive (cf. W. 364 (342), 368 sq. (346) ;
B. § 147, 29), it is used 1. prop. in a local sense, of
situation or position under something higher, as ind
xGovds, often fr. Hom. down; 6 é€rt yas kat umd yas
xovods, Plat. legg. 5 p. 728 a.; hence 2. metaph.
of the efficient cause, as that under the power of
which an event is conceived of as being; here the Lat.
uses a or ab, and the Eng. by; thus a. after pas-
sive verbs,— with the gen. of aperson: Mt. i. 22; ii.
15sq.; Mk.i. 5; ii.3; [viii. 31 LT Tr WH]; Lk. ii.18;
[vi. 18 Rec.]; Jn. x. 14 RG; xiv. 21; Acts iv.11; xv.
4; [xxii. 30 LT Tr WH]; Rom. xv. 15[RGL]; 1 Co.
i.11; 2Co.i.4,16; Gal.i.11; Eph.ii.11; Phil. iii. 12;
1 Th.i.4; 2 Th.ii. 18; Heb. iii. 4, and in many other
pass.; avis evexOeions trd tHs peyadomperods ddéEns,
when a voice was brought by the majestic glory [cf. R. V.
mrg. ], i.e. came down to him from God, 2 Pet. i.17; after
yivopat, to be done, effected, Lk. ix.7 RLinbr.; xiii. 17;
xxiii. 8; Eph. v. 12; yiverai tun éemBovdy, Acts xx. 3;
i emitipia H Ud TAY TAELOver, SC. emiTysnOetaa, 2 Co. ii. 6 ;
— with the gen. of a thing: Mt. viii. 24; xi. 7; xiv. 24;
Lk. vii. 24; viii. 14 [see mopevw, fin.]; Jn. viii. 9; Acts
XXvii. 41; Ro.iii. 21; xii. 21; 1 Co. x. 29; 2Co. v. 4; Eph.
v. 183. Col. 1.185 Jas. 4. 143° 01.95, 11.4, 65 2 Pet-n-7,
17; Jude 12; Rev. vi. 13. b. with neuter verbs,
and with active verbs which carry a passive meaning:
macxew vmd twos, Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14,
(Hom. Il. 11, 119; Thue. 1, 77; Xen. symp. 1, 9; Cyr.
6,1, 36; Hier. 7,8); daodéoOa, to perish, 1 Co. x. 9 sq.
(very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 3, 32 on); tmopevew
tt, Heb. xii. 3 [ef. dvridoyia, 2]; AapBaveww sc. myyas, to
be beaten, 2 Co. xi. 24; after a term purely active, of
a force by which something is bidden to be done: dzro-
kreivat ev poudaia kal imd tov Onpiwv ts yns, by the wild
beasts, Rev. vi. 8 [ef. ix. 18 Ree.], (so ddece Oupdv bq’
"Extopos, Hom. Il. 17, 616; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1393;
[B. 341 (293)]).
II. with the AccusATIVE (W. § 49, k.) ; 1s Of
motion, in answer to the question ‘whither?’: to come
tnd THY oTéyny, Mt. viii.8; Lk. vii. 6; émovvdyev, Mt.
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; with verbs of putting or plac-
ing: Mt. v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. x1.33; 1 Corxyv. 25; of
placing under or subjecting, Lk. vii.8; Ro. vii.
14; xvi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 27; Gal. iii. 22; iv.3; Eph. i. 22;
642
UTrodevypa
1 Pet. v.63 yo twa bm euavurdv, Mt. viii. 9; Lk. vii. 8;
yiveoOa, born under i.e. subject to, Gal. iv.4; of fall
ing, trop. Jas. v. 12 [where R* eis trdxpiow]- 2.
of situation, position, tarrying: after xaracky-
voov, Mk. iv. 32; «a@npat, Jas. ii.3; with the verb eivae
((o and under) in a local or prop. sense, Jn. i. 48 (49);
Acts iv. 12; Ro. ili. 13; 1Co.x.1; 4 bd (rév) odpavdy
se. yopa, Lk. xvii. 24; mdon kricet tH bwd Tov odp. sc.
oven, Col. i. 23; Ta bxd tov ovpavdy se. dvra, Acts ii. 5,
(ra id oeAnvnv, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. § 12); etvae id
twa or tt, to be under, i. e. subject to the power of, any
person or thing: Ro. iii. 9; vi. 14,15; 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal.
iii. 10, 25; iv. 2,21; v.18; 1 Tim. vi.l; 26 ée£ovciav
sc. av, Mt. viii. 9 (where L WH br. read ind &&. tracod-
pevos [set under authority], so also cod. Sin.); of id
vopov sc. dvtes, 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. iv. 5, (iad éxmdn€uw eivar,
Protev. Jac. 18). tnpety twa, Jude 6; ppovpeiaGa, Gal.
iii. 23. 3. of time, like the Lat. sub (ef. sub vespe-
ram), i. q. about (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow p.
2111°; [L. and S.s. v. C. III.]): i76 rov dpOpov, about day-
break, Acts v. 21. This prep. occurs with the accus.
nowhere else in the N.T. The apostle John uses it only
twice with the gen. (xiv. 21; 3 Jn. 12— three times,
if x. 14 RG is counted [ef. viii. 9]), and once with the
accus. (i. 48 (49)).
III. in Composition iad denotes 1. locality,
under: tmoxato, tromdduv, tranidlo, irodéw; of the
goal of motion, i. e. dd 71, as trodéxouat (under one’s
roof); tmoAapBave (to receive by standing under); izo-
BadA@, vroriOnut; trop. in expressions of subjection,
compliance, ete., as traxove, imakon, imnKoos, UrddtKos,
Uravdpos, Uraya, tmoeina, Uroxwpew. 2. small in
degree, slightly, as imomvew.
dmo-BddAw: 2 aor. dmeBadov; [fr. Hom. down]; il
to throw or put under. 2. to suggest to the mind. 3.
to instruct privately, instigate, suborn: twa, Acts vi. 11
(émeBANOnoav Karnyopo, App. bell. civ. 1, 74; Mnvurns
tis ioBAntods, Joseph. b. j. 5, 10, 4).*
Uroypappds, -ov, 6, (Umoypapw), prop. 1. a writ-
ing-copy, including all the letters of the alphabet, given
to beginners as an aid in learning to draw them: Clem.
Alex. strom. 5, 8, 50. Hence 2. an example set
before one: 1 Pet. ii. 21 (2 Mace. ii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 16, 17; 33,8; [Philo, fragm. vol. ii. 667 Mang. (vi.
229 Richter) ], and often in eccl. writ.; 6 Iladdos tzo-
povijs yevopevos péytotos troypappds, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
5, 7 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]).*
dm6-Serypa, -ros, Td, (UodeiKvupt, q. V.), a word rejected
by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writ. used
mapddetypa; see Lob. ad Phryn. p.12; [Rutherford, New
Phryn. p.62]. It is used by Xen. r. eq. 2, 2, and among
subsequent writ. by Polyb., Philo, Joseph., App., Plut.,
Hdian., al.; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 554; a.
a sign suggestive of anything, delineation of a thing, repre-
sentation, figure, copy: joined with oxi, Heb. viii. 5;
with a gen. of the thing represented, Heb. ix. 23. b.
an example: for imitation, dddvat rwi, Jn. xiii. 15; xara-
AeAourevar, 2 Mace. vi. 28; with a gen. of the thing to
¢ f
UTrodELKV UE
be imitated, Jas. v. 10 (Sir. xliv. 16; 2 Mace. vi. 31); for
warning: with a gen. of the thing to be shunned, rijs dzet-
6cias, Heb. iv. 11; with a gen. of the pers. to be warned,
2 Pet. il. 6 (rods ‘Popaious ... eis tmdderypa Tay GAov
eOvev karaphesey tiv iepav médw, Joseph. b. j. 2, 16, 4).*
vro-Selxvupt: fut. tmodeiEw; 1 aor. iméderEa; fr. Hat.
and Thue. down; Sept. several times for 17373 ; a
prop. to show by placing under (i.e. before) the eyes:
tméderEev adtois tov wAOVTOY aiTov, Esth. v. 11; add, Sir.
xlix. 8; [al. give iad in this compound the force of
‘privily’; but cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 126]. 2. to
show by words and arguments, i. e. do teach (for 7717, 2
Chr. xv. 3) [A.V. freq. to warn]: zwvi, foll. by an inf. of
the thing, Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; to teach by the use of a
figure, tui, foll. by indir. disc., Lk. vi. 47; xii. 5; to show
or teach by one’s example, foll. by érz, Acts xx. 35; to
show i.e. make known (future things), foll. by indir.
disc. Acts ix. 16.*
vmo-Sexopar (see vd, III. 1): 1 aor. tredeEdunv; pf.
trodedeypat; fr. Hom. down; to receive as a guest: tid,
Lk. xix. 6; Acts xvii. 7; Jas. ii. 25; eds rév otkov, Lk. x.
38. [Cf. d¢youar, fin. ]*
dmo-Sé: 1 aor. imédyoa; 1 aor. mid. imeOnoapny; pf.
pass. or mid. ptcp. vmodedqyevos; fr. Hdt. down (in
Hom. with tmesis); to under-bind; mostly in the mid.
to bind under one’s self, bind on; [ptep. shod]; with an
ace. of the thing: gavddda, Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii. 8, (izo-
djpara, Xen. mem. 1,6, 6; Plat. Gorg. p.490e.); with
an ace. of the member of the body: rods médas with ev
érousacia added, with readiness [see éropacia, 2], Eph.
Vi. 15 (wdda cavddd@, cavdadios, Lcian. quom. hist. sit
conscrib. 22; Ael. v.h. 1,18). [Cf. B. § 135, 2.]*
brdhqpa, -Tos, 76, (Urodew), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
Sy, what is bound under, a sandal, a sole fastened to
the foot with thongs: Mt. iii. 11; x. 10; Mk.i. 7; Lk.
ats 16 76x46 XV.i2 25 Xxi1.. 8D 5 in. 1.27; with rav rodép
added, Acts vil. 33 ; xiii. 25, (odds, Plat. Alc. 1 p. 128 a.).
[See wavdadcov. | *
Urd8ukos, -ov, i. G. dd Sixny dv, under judgment, one who
has lost his suit; with a dat. of the pers. debtor to one,
owing satisfaction to: t@ Oe@, i. e. liable to punishment
from God, Ro. iii. 19 [see Morison, Critical Exposition
of Romans Third, p. 147 sq.]. (Aeschyl., Plat., Andoc.,
Lys., Isae., Dem., al. ) :
trro-Liy.os, -a, -ov, i. g. md Cvydv dy, i es the yoke;
neut. To iz. as subst. a beast of burden (so fr. Theogn.
and Hdt. down); in bibl. Grk. (since the ass was the
common animal used by the Orientals an journeys and
for carrying burdens [cf. B. D.s. v. Ass, 1]) spec. an ass:
Mt. xxi. 5 (Zech. ix. 9); 2 Pet. ii. 16; Sept. for inn,
an ass.*
dro-Lovvupe; fr. Hdt. down; /o under-gird: tb mdoiov,
to bind a ship together laterally with taofmpara (Plat.
de rep. 10 p. 616 ¢.), i.e. with girths or cables, to enable
it to survive the force of waves and tempest, Acts xxvii.
17 (where see Overbeck [or Hackett ; esp. Smith, Voyage
and Shipwreck, etc., pp. 107 sq. 204 sqq. (cf. BonOeva) }).
(Polyb. 27, 3, 3.)*
643
UTroAnVLOV
tro-katro, under, underneath: twds [W. § 54,6; B.
§ 146, 1], Mt. xxii.44 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 11; vii. 28;
[xii. 36 WH]; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. i. 50 (51); Heb. ii. 8;
Rev. v. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; vi. 9; xii.1. (Sept.;
Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) [Cf. W. § 50,
7N.1; B. § 146, 4.]*
Urro-Kpivopar ; 1. to take up another’s statements
in reference to what one has decided for one’s self (mid.
kpivopat), i.e. to reply, answer, (Hom., Hadt., al.). 2:
to make answer (speak) on the stage, i.e. to personate
any one, play a part, (often so fr. Dem. down). Hence
3. to simulate, feign, pretend, (fr. Dem. and Polyb,
down): foll. by an acc. with the inf. Lk. xx. 20. (2
Mace. vi. 21, 24; 4 Mace. vi. 15; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 15;
XXXVi. (xxxili.) 2.) [CoMmp.: ovy-vmoxpivopat. |*
Umd-Kpiois, -ews, 9, (UroKpivopat, q. Vv.) ; 1. an
answering; an answer (Hat.). 2. the acting of @
stage-player (Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian.,
Artem., al.). 3. dissimulation, hypocrisy : Mt. xxiii.
28s) Mike satel Gs Lk. xdi. 1s Gal miss bo Timoay.2:
[Jas. v.12 Rec."]; 1 Pet. ii. 1 [ef. B. § 128, 2], (2 Mace.
vi. 25; Polyb. 35, 2,13; Lcian. am. 3; Aesop. fab. 106
(284); [Philo, quis rer. div. haeres § 8; de Josepho
§14])."
Urro-KpiT Hs, -ov, 6, (Smoxpivopat, q. V.) ; 1. one who
answers, an interpreter, (Plat., Leian.). 2. an actor,
stage-player, (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Ael., Hdian.). 3.
in bibl. Grk. a dissembler, pretender, hypocrite: Mt. vi. 2,
5,16; vii.5; xv. 7; xvi. 3 Rec.; xxii. 18; xxiii. 13 Rec.,
14 (13 Tdf.), 15, 23, 25, 27, 29; xxiv. 51; Mk. vii. 6; Lk.
vi. 42; xi. 44 RLinbr.; xii.56; xiii.15. (Job xxxiv.
80; xxxvi. 13, for 43M profane, impious.) [Mention is
made of Heimsoeth, De voce imoxpitns comment. (Bonnae,
1874, 4to.).]*
tro-AapBave; 2 aor. dwedaBov; 1. to take up
(lit. under [ef. iad, III. 1]) in order to raise, to bear on
high, (Hat. 1, 24); to take up and carry away (éorep via
avepo. trodaBdrres, Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 17): teva, Acts i.
9 (see 6pOadpds, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, wel-
come: twa, 3 Jn. 8 LT Tr WH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 3:
to take up i. e. follow in speech, in order either to reply
to or controvert or supplement what another has said
(very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): izoAaSav
eirev, Lk. x. 30 (for 13), Job ii. 43 iv. 1; vi. 1; ix. 1;
xi. 1; xii. 1, eic.). 4. to take up in the mind, i.e.
to assume, suppose: Acts ii. 15; foll. by dre (se. mciov
ayarnoet), Lk. vii. 43, (Job xxv. 3; Tob. vi. 18; Sap.
xvii. 2; 3 Mace. iii. 8; 4 Mace. v. 17 (18) ete., and often
in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat. down).*
trd-eppa [-Acuya WH (see their App. p. 154; cf. I,
t)], ros, 76, @ remnant (see xatddecupa): Ro. ix. 27 LT
TrWH. (Sept.; Aristot., Theophr., Plut., Galen.) *
vro-Aclww: 1 aor. pass. imeheiPOnv; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for vxwi and Wnin; to leave behind [see ind,
III. 1]; pass. to be left behind, left remaining, Sept. for
Nw) and 3): used of a survivor, Ro. xi. 3.*
UroAnvoy, -ov, Td, (i. €. Td Ud THY Anvdv, cf. Td imo
Giytov), a vessel placed under a press (and in the Orieni
;
UTONLTUVO
usually sunk in the earth) to receive the expressed juice
of the grapes, apit: [@pu§ev trodquoy, R. V. he digged a
pit for the winepress}, Mk. xii. 1; see Anvés [and B. D.
s. v. Winepress]. (Demiopr. ap. Poll. 10 (29), 130;
Geop.; Sept. for 3p, Is. xvi. 10; Joel iii. 13 (iv. 18);
Ilagg. ii, 16; Zech. xiv. 10 Alex.) *
jro-Ayprdve; (Aymdve, less common form of the verb
Aeir@) ; to leave, leave behind: 1 Pet. ii. 21. (Themist. ;
eccl. and Byzant. writ.; to fail, Dion. Hal. 1, 23.)*
tro-pevw ; imp. drépevov; fut. 2 pers. plur. dropeveire ;
1 aor. imeuewa; pf. ptep. dmopenernxas; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for Mp, 73n, ons 1. to remain i. e. tarry
behind: foll. by év with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43;
éxet, Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain i.e. abide, not re-
cede or flee; trop. a. to persevere: absol. and em-
phat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one’s
faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure], Mt. x. 22;
xxiv. 135 Mko xii. 1332 Dims ii 12*[et.vs-10 in ibe]
Jas. v. 113; with 79 Odie added, when trial assails
[A. V. in tribulation (i.e. dat. of circumstances or condi-
tion) ], (cf. Kiihner § 426, 3 [Jelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12
(quite different is dropevew TO kupig, mm) Onin, Lam.
iii. 21, 24; Mic. vii.7; 2K.vi. 33; "9 man, Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 20, to cleave faithfully to [A. V. wait for] the
Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to
Grk. usage [cf. W. § 52, 16]). b. to endure, bear
bravely and calmly: absol., ill-treatment, 1 Pet. ii. 20;
eis matdeiap, i. e. els TA matdeveoOa, [ for or unto chasten-
ing], Heb. xii. 7 ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH which
is defended at length by Delitzsch ad loc. [and adopted
by Riehm (Lehrbegriff u. s. w. p. 758 note), Alford, Moul-
ton, al.], but successfully overthrown [?] by Fritzsche
(De conformatione N. Ti. critica quam Lchm. edidit,
p- 24 sqq-.) [and rejected by the majority of commenta-
tors (Bleek, Liinemann, Kurtz, al.)]. with an ace. of
the thing, 1 Co. xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. x. 323; xii.
2sq. 7 RG; Jas..i. 12."
tro-pipvicKe; fut. imopynow; 1 aor. inf. dmoprqjcat; 1
aor. pass. tmepvyoOny; fr. Hom. down; [cf. our ‘sug-
gest’, see avdpryors |; 1. actively, to cause one to
remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind: ré (to
another), 2 Tim. ii. 14; twa mt, Jn. xiv. 26 (Thue. 7,
64; Xen. Hier. 1,3; Plat., Isocr., Dem.) ; with implied
censure, 3 Jn. 10; teva trepi tivos, to put one in remem-
brance, admonish, of something: 2 Pet.i. 12 (Plat. Phaedr.
p- 275 d.); teva, foll. by ért, Jude 5 (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 8;
Plat. de rep. 5 p. 452.¢.; Ael.v.h. 4,17); reva, foll. by
an inf. (indicating what must be done), Tit. iii. 1 (Xen.
hipparch. 8, 10). 2. passively, to be reminded, to
remember: tuvds, Lk. xxii. 61.*
UT6-LyATIS, -ews, 7), (UropiuyyoKkw), fr. Eur., Thuc.,
Plat. down; a. transitively, (Vulg. commonitio),
a reminding (2 Mace. vi. 17): é€v tropynoe, by putting
vou in remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 13; iii, 1 [W. § 61 38
b. ]. b. intrans. remembrance: with a gen. of the
obj. 2 Tim. 1. 5 [(R. V. having been reminded of etc.) ;
al. adhere to the trans. sense (see Ellicott, Huther,
Holtzmann ad loc.). Syn. se2 dvayvnors, fin.] *
644
UTOcTacLs
U1ro-povh, -As, 7, (Umopevo) ; 1. steadfastness, con-
stancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in
Jas. v. 11 sufferentia); in the N. T. the characteristic
of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate pur-
pose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the
greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; xxi. 19;
Ro. v. 3'8q.3 xv. 4sq.3 2'Co. vi 43oxi. 12 Col... 11;
2 Th. i145 1 Vim) vi. 5 2am st 2 Heb;
x. 86; Jas. i. 3sq.; v.11; 2 Pet.i.6; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 19;
xiii. 10; xiv. 12, (cf. 4 Mace. i. 11; ix. 8, 30; xv. 80 (27);
xvii. 4, 12, 23); with agen. of the thing persevered
in [W. § 30, 1 fin.]: tod Epyou dyaod, Ro. ii. 7; rHs €Ami-
dos, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B.155 (136)]; 8¢ tropovis, [with pa-
tience (cf. W. § 51, 1b.) i.e.] patiently and steadfastly,
Ro. viii. 25; Heb. xii. 1. 2. a patient, steadfast
waiting for; [al. question this sense in the New Test.,
and render the gen. by ‘characterizing’, ‘in respect to’,
ete.]: Xpucrod (gen. of the obj.), the return of Christ
from heaven, 2 Th. iii.5; Rev. i. 9 (where L T Tr WH
év "Inood [which is in Jesus]); iii. 10, (cf. Ps. xxxviii.
(&xxix:) "8:57 for Tp; expectation, hope, 2 Esdr. x. 2;
Jer. xiv. 8; xvii. 13; for mpm, hope, Ps. [ix. 19]; Ixi.
(Ixii.) 6; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 5; [Job xiv.19]; for nonin, Prov.
x. 28 Symm.; topeévetv tia, Xen. an. 4, 1, 21; App. b.
civ. 5, 81). 3. a patient enduring, sustaining : tar
raOnudtav, 2 Co. i. 6 (Avans, Plat. defin. p. 412 ¢.; @ava-
tov, Plut. Pelop. 1). [SyN. see paxpoOupia, fin. ] *
diro-voew, -@; impf. imevdouv; fr. Hdt. down; to sup-
pose, surmise: Acts xxv. 18; foll. by an acc. with the
inf., Acts xiii. 25 [(cf. ris, 4)]; xxvii. 27.*
Umdvowa, -as, 9, (Umovoew), fr. Thue. down, a surmising :
1 Tim. vi. 4.*
iro-miatw, a later form of tromela, to keep down, keep
in subjection: 1 Co. ix. 27 Tdf. ed. 7 after the faulty
reading of some Mss. for trwmdfo, q.v. Cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 461; [Soph. Lex. s. v.; W.§5,1d. 5; see
apdidace |.*
vro-théw: 1 aor. bmémrevoa; (Vulg. subnavigo); to
sail under, i. e. to sail close by, pass to the leeward of :
with the ace. of the place, Acts xxvii. 4,7. (Dio Cass.,
Dio Chr., al.) *
Uro-rvew: 1 aor. tremvevoa; a. to blow under-
neath (Aristot.). b. to blow softly [see bd, III. 2]:
Acts xxvii. 13.*
Srordbiov, -ov, Td, (Ud and aovs), a footstool (Lat.
suppedaneum): Mt. v. 35; Acts vii. 49 (fr. Is. xvi. 1) ;
Jas. ii. 3; TeOévae Twa vor. tav Today Twos, to make
one the footstool of one’s feet, i.e. to subject, reduce un-
der one’s power, (a metaph. taken from the practice
of conquerors who placed their feet on the necks of their
conquered enemies): Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36
[here WH dtmoxaro ray w.]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35;
Heb. i. 13; x. 18, after Ps. cix. (ex.) 2. (Leian., Athen.,
al.; Sept. for 070; [cf. W 26].)*
iré-cracis, -ews, 7), (Upiornus), a word very com. in
Grk. auth., esp. fr. Aristot. on, in widely different
senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve
to illustrate N. T. usage; 1. @ setting or placing
UTOcTEAAw
645
UTropépw
under; thing put under, substructure, foundation: Ps. | diapOopav, Acts xiii. 34; dd with a gen. of place, Lk.
iv. 1; xxiv. 9 [WH br. dwo etc.]; dao with a gen. of the
lxviii. (Ixix.) 3; rod otikov, Ezek. xliii. 11; tod rdaqou,
Diod. 1, 66. 2. that which has foundation, is firm;
hence, a. that which has actual existence; a sub-
stance, real being: tav ev dépt pavracpdtev Ta pev €ore
kar’ uaa, ta dé kad’ Urdoraow, Aristot. de mundo, 4, |
19 p. 395", 30; davraciav pév exew mAovTov, UndcTacw
d¢ pn, Artem. oneir. 3, 14; (9 avy)) vmdoracw idiay odk
exer, yevvarat dé ex pdoyéds, Philo de incorruptibil. mundi
§18; similarly in other writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s.v. 5; L.
and S. s. v. III. 2]. b. the substantial quality, na-
ture, of any pers. or thing: rod Geov [R. V. substance],
Heb. i. 3 (Sap. xvi. 21; We... tivos Uroardaews 7 Tivos
eldous Tuyydvovow ous épeite kal vopitere Geovs, Epist. ad
Diogn. 2,1; [ef. Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]). c. steadi-
ness of mind, jirmness, courage, resolution, (ot dé ‘Podiot
Gewpovvtes thy Tov Buavtivey vocracw, Polyb. 4, 50,
10; ovx ovTe@ Ti Sivamuy, os THY UTdoTaGW aiTod Kai TOA-
play KkatamemAnypevav Tav évartiov, id. 6, 55, 2; add,
Diod. 16,32 sq.; Joseph. antt. 18, 1,6); confidence, firm
trust, assurance : 2 Co. ix.4; xi. 17; Heb. iii. 143 xi. 1,
(for MpA, Ruth i. 12; Ezek. xix. 5; for nin, Ps.
XXXViil. (xxxix.) 8). Cf. Bleck, Br. and. Hebr. ii. 1 pp.
60 sqq. 462 sqq.; Schlatter, Glaube im N. T. p. 581.*
vro-orehAw : impf. vméoreAAov; 1 aor. mid. ireoretAd-
unr ; 1. Act. to draw down, let down, lower: icriov,
Pind. Isthm. 2, 59; to withdraw, [draw back]: éuavroy,
of a timid person, Gal. ii. 12 ([cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loe.];
often so in Polyb.). 2. Mid. to withdraw one’s self,
i. e. to be timid, to cower, shrink; of those who from timid-
ity hesitate to avow what they believe, Heb. x. 38 (fr.
Habak. ii. 4 [ef. W. 523 (487)]); to be unwilling to utter
from fear, to shrink from declaring, to conceal, dissemble :
foll. by rod with the inf. [W. 325 (305); B. 270 (232)],
Acts xx. 27; ovdێ, ibid. 20, (often so in Dem.; cf.
Reiske, Index graecit. Dem. p. 774 sq.; Joseph. vit. § 54;
Daye, -20;11).*
Uro-cTOAH, -7s, ), (VrooTEAXw, G.V.), prop. @ withdraw-
ing (Vulg. subtractio), [in a good sense, Plut. anim. an
corp. aff. sint pej. § 3 sub fin.]; the timidity of one stealthi-
ly retreating: ov« é€opéev troatons (see eiwi, IV. 1 g.),
we have no part in shrinking back etc., we are free from
the cowardice of ete. [R.V. we are not of them that shrink
back ete.}, Heb. x. 39 (Ad@pa ta Toa Kal peO drocrodjs
€xaxovpynoev, Joseph. b. j. 2, 14, 2; dxoarodjy rovovvrar,
antt. 16, 4, 3).*
uro-orpehw ; impf. déorpepor; fut. drootpéypw; 1 aor.
Unéorpeyra; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 23¥/; BE
trans. fo turn back, to turn about: as trmous, Hom. Tl. 5,
581. 2. intrans. to turn back i.e. to return: absol.,
MK. xiv. 40 [here L WH amddw édOav Tr env]; Lk. ii.
20 (here Rec. émurrpép.), 43; viii. 37,40; ix.10; x.17;
xvii. 15; xix. 12; xxiii. 48,56; Acts viii. 28; foll. by an
inf. of purpose, Lk. xvii. 18; foll. by dé with a gen. of
place, Acts xx. 3; ets with an ace. of place, Lk. i. 563 ii.
39 [here T Tr mrg. WH émorpéd.], 453 iv.143 vii. 10;
Vili. 39; xi. 24; xxiv. 33, 52; Acts i. 12; viii. 255 xiii.
US; xiv. 21; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; xxiii. 32; Gal. i. 17; eds
business, Heb. vii. 1; ék with a gen. of place, Acts
Xil. 25; &€k THs dylas evrodjs, of those who after embraec-
ing Christianity apostatize, 2 Pet. ii. 21 T Tr WH, but
Lchm. (against the authorities) eis ra dmicw dnd ris
ete.”
vro-oTpdvvupt and vroorpwrviw (later forms, found in
Plut., Themist., Athen., al., for the earlier izoaropévvups
and vmooropyups): impf. 3 pers. plur. vweotpavvvov; to
strew, spread under: ri, Lk. xix. 36 (Is. lviii. 5).*
tro-Tayn, -7s, 1), 1. the act of subjecting (Dion.
Hal.). 2. obedience, subjection: 2 Co. ix. 138 (on
which see énodoyia, b.) ; Gal. ii. 8; 1 Tim. ii. 11; iii. 4.*
vmo-rasow: 1 aor. vréra~a; Pass., pf. drorérayua; 2
aor. vmetaynv ; 2 fut. vroraynoopay; pres. mid. dmerdo-
copa ; to arrange under, to subordinate ; to subject, put in
subjection: tui te or twa, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Heb. ii.5; Phil.
iii. 21; pass., Ro. viii. 20 [see dia, B. II. 1 b.]; 1 Co.
xv. 27° sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22; twa or tt vad rods médas
twos, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Eph. i. 22; vmoxdrw ray wodav twos,
Heb. ii. 8; mid. to subject one’s self, to obey; to submit
to one’s control; to yield to one’s admonition or advice:
absol., Ro. xiii. 5; 1 Co. xiv. 34 [ef. B. § 151, 30]; revi,
Iie rie GL ox, Tr, PAVE INOR vans 705 Sah, 1G tl (Choy sab, 3p
xvi. 16; Eph. v. 21 sq. [but in 22G T WH txt. om. Tr
mrg. br. vrordoo. |, 24; Col. iii. 18; Tit. ii. 5, 9; iii. 1;
1 Pet. ii. 18; i1.1,5; v. 5; 2 aor. pass. with mid. force,
to obey [R. V. subject one’s self, B. 52 (46)], Ro. x. 3;
impv. obey, be subject: Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet.ii.13; v.53; 2
fut. pass. Heb. xii. 9. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb., Plut.,
Arr., Hdian.) *
tro-TiOnpt: 1 aor. dméOnka; pres. mid. ptep. vroriéue-
vos; fr. Hom. down; to place under (cf. imé, III. 1): ri,
Ro. xvi. 4 (on which see rpdyyAos). ‘Mid. metaph. to
supply, suggest, (mid. from one’s own resources) ; witha
dat. of the pers. and ace. of the thing: radra, these in-
structions, 1 Tim. iv. 6. (Often so in prof. auth. fr.
Hom. down.) *
tmo-rpéxw: 2 aor. vareSpanov; fr. Hom. down; prop.
to run under; in N. T. once, viz. of navigators, fo run
past a place on the shore, and therefore in a higher posi-
tion (see dromdéw): maiov, Acts xxvii. 16 [R. V. run-
ning under the ‘ce of; cf. Hackett ad loc.].*
$ro-ritwcis, -ews, 7, (UroTUTd@, to delineate, outline) ;
a. an outline, sketch, brief and summary exposition, (Sext.
Empir., Diog. Laért., al.). b. an example, pattern:
mpos vror. Tay peAdovTay moTevew xT. for an example
of those who should hereafter believe, i.e. to show by
the example of my conversion that the same grace which
T had obtained would not be wanting also to those who
should hereafter believe, 1 Tim. i. 16; the pattern
placed before one to be held fast and copied, model:
vytavvtav héyav, 2) Pime as Uses
$ro-pépw; 1 aor. vapveyxa; 2 aor. inf. vreveyxetv; fr.
Hom. down; to bear by being under, bear up (a thing
placed on one’s shoulders) ; trop. o bear patiently, to en
dure, (often so fr. Xen. and Plat. down): ré, 1 Co. x.
UTroYwpEew
13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet. ii.19. (Prov. vi. 33; Ps. lxviii.
(Ixix.) 8; Mic. vii. 9; Job ii. 10.)*
Sro-xwpew, -&; 1 aor. drexopyoa; fr. Hom. down; to
go back [see vad, III. 1 fin.]; to withdraw: ets rérov epn-
pov, Lk. ix. 10; with ev and a dat. of the place (see ey,
I. 7), Lk. v. 16 [ef. W. § 50, 4. a.; B. 312 (268)].*
tiromdtw; (fr. ime@mov, compounded of iad and dy,
eros, which denotes a. that part of the face which
is under the eyes; b. a blow in that part of the face;
a black and blue spot, a bruise); prop. to beat black and
blue, to smite so as to cause bruises and livid spots, (Aris-
tot. rhet. 3,11, 15 p. 1413%, 20; Plut. mor. p. 921 f.; Diog.
Laért. 6, 89): 7d o@pa, like a boxer I buffet my body,
handle it roughly, discipline it by hardships, 1 Co. ix. 27;
metaph. (wéAers imwmtacpeva, cities terribly scourged
and afflicted by war, bearing the marks of devastation,
Arstph. pax 541) ¢o give one intolerable annoyance [‘ beat
one out’, ‘wear one out’], by entreaties [cf. redos, 1 a. ],
Lk. xviii. 5 (cf. aliquem rogitando obtundat, Ter. Eun.
3, 5, 6).*
us, tds, 6, 9, fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for
Vit}, a swine: 2 Pet. ii. 22.*
$oowmros [on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144;
Lehm. (in both his edd.) spells it with one ¢ in Jn.], -ov,
9, (Hebr. ayix, Ex. xii. 22; Num. xix. 6, 18, etc.), hyssop,
a plant a bunch of which was used by the Hebrews in
their ritual sprinklings: Heb. ix. 19; vooame, i. q.
Kakdp@ toowrov, Jn. xix. 29. Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.
Ysop; Arnold in Herzog xviii. p. 337sq.; Furrer in
Schenkel v. 685 sq.; [Riehm p. 1771 sq.; Léw, Aram.
Pflanzennamen, § 93; Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 455
sq.; B.D.s. v. (esp. Am. ed.) ].*
vortepéw, -@; 1 aor. torepnaa; pf. torépnxa; Pass.,
pres. torepodpar; 1 aor. ptep. barepndeis; (Uorepos); 1.
Act. to be tarepos i. e. behind ; i.e. a. to come late
or too tardily (so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Heb. iv.
1; to be left behind in the race and so fail to reach the
goal, to fall short of the end; with dé and the gen. in-
dicating the end, metaph. fail to become a partaker: aro
tis xapitos, Heb. xii. 15 [al. render here fall back (i.e.
away) from; cf. W.§ 30,6 b.; B. 322 (276) sq. cf. § 132,
5] (Eccl. vi. 2). b. to be inferior, in power, influ-
ence, rank, 1 Co. xii. 24 (where LT Tr WH pass. iore-
povpevm) ; in virtue, ré ére dorep ; in what am I still de-
ficient [A.V. what lack I yet (cf. B. § 131, 10)], Mt. xix.
20 (Sir. li. 24; va yv@ ri torep@ eyo, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.)
5; pnd ev AX pndevi peper apetns totepodytas, Plat. de
rep. 6 p.484d.); pndév or ovder foll. by a gen. (depend-
ing on the idea of comparison contained in the verb [B.
§ 132, 22]) of the person, to be inferior to [A.V. to be be-
hind] another in nothing, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11. oe
to fail, be wanting, (Diose. 5, 86): Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.];
ev oo [T WH Trimrg. oe (cf. B. u. s.)] torepet, Mk. x.
21. d. to be in want of, lack: with a gen. of the
thing [W. § 30, 6], Lk. xxii. 35 (Joseph. antt.2,2,1). 2.
Pass. to suffer want [W. 260 (244)]: Lk. xv. 14; 2 Co.
xi. 9 (8); Heb. xi. 37, (Sir. xi. 11); opp. to mepuoceverr,
to abound, Phil. iv. 12; revds, to be devoid [R. V. fall
646
ipnrodp povéw
short] of, Ro. iii. 23 (Diod. 18, 71; Joseph. antt. 15, 6,
7); &v ru, to suffer want in any respect, 1 Co. i. 7, opp.
to mdoutifec@a ev rin, ibid. 5; to lack (be inferior) in
excellence, worth, opp. to meproaevev, [ A. V. to be the worse
..» the better}, 1 Co. viii. 8. [Comp.: ad-vorepéw.] *
torepnpa, -ros, Td, (VoTEpEew) ; a. deficiency, that
which is lacking: plur. with a gen. of the thing whose
deficiency is to be filled up, Col. i. 24 (on which see
avravarAnpde, and Otis sub fin.) ; 1 Th. iii. 10; 76 dor.
with a gen. [or its equiv.] of the pers., the absence of one,
1 Co. xvi. 17 [vp. being taken objectively (W. § 22,
7; B. $132, 3); al. take dy. subjectively and render that
which was lacking on your part]; 76 tpav tor. ths mpds
pe Aecroupyias, your absence, owing to which something
was lacking in the service conferred on me (by you),
Phil. ii. 30. b. in reference to property and re-
‘sources, poverty, want, destitution: Lk. xxi. 4; 2 Co. viii.
14 (13); ix.12; xi. 9, (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10; Judg.
xviii. 10, ete.; eccl. writ.).*
torépnois, -ews, 7, (UcTepew), want, poverty: Mk. xii.
44; xa@ dorépnow, on account of want, Phil. iv. 11 [ef.
kata, II. 3 ce. y. p. 328” bot.]. (Eccl. writ.) *
vorepos, -a, -ov, latter, later, coming after: év doarépots
katpois, 1 Tim. iv. 1; 6 vor. i. q. the second, Mt. xxi. 31
LTr WH, but cf. Fritzsche’s and Meyer’s crit. notes
[esp. WH. App.] ad loc. Neut. vorepov, fr. Hom.
down, adverbially, afterward, after this, later, lastly, used
alike of a shorter and of a longer period: Mt. iv. 2; xxi.
29.325, Bitsy exe lye) exocval 16 Ose Vikeextva ed Aste keomvan
Rec.; [xx. 32. L.0 Tr WH];..dn: xin./36 ; Heb, ir aii:
with a gen. after one, Mt. xxii. 27; Lk. xx. 832 [RG].*
dpaive ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 118; to weave: Lk.
xii. 27 T WH (rejected) mrg.*
tpavTds, -7, -Ov, (UVpaive, q.v.), fr. Hom.down; woven:
Jn: (xix, 235. (Vor) igh) bx: xxxviljs0) (aux, ae)
XXxvi. 35 (xxxix. 27); for 1wn, Ex. xxvi. 31, etc.) *
vyNAds, -7, -ov, (Ve on high, vos), [fr. Hom. down],
high; lofty ; a. prop. of place: épos, Mt. iv. 8;
xvii.1; Mk. ix.2; Lk.iv.5 RGLbr.; Rev. xxi. 10; teiyos.
Rev. xxi. 12; neut. ra dynAa (the heights of heaven;
Sept. for Div, Ps. xcii. (xcili.) 4; exii. (exiii.) 5; Is.
xxxliil. 5; lvii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high; cf. B. § 124,
8d.], Heb.i.3; exalted on high: iyndorepos trav ovpavar,
[made higher than the heavens], of Christ raised to the
right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv.10); pera
Bpaxiovos vndod, with a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with
signal power, Acts xiii. 17 (Sept. often év Bpayion tynr@
for m0) yiva, as in Ex. vi.6; Deut. v. 15). b.
metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk.
Xvi. 15; UWnra gpoveiv, to set the mind on, to seek, high
things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii.
16; also Ro. xi. 20 Lmrg. T Tr WH; 1 Tim. vi. 17 T
WH mrg.; (Leian. Icaromen. 11, Hermot. 5).*
dnro-ppovew, -@; (vyndodpev, and this fr. dyndos
and pny); to be high-minded, proud: Ro. xi. 20[RGL
txt.]; 1 Tim. vi. 17 [RGL Tr WH txt.], (Schol. ad
Pind. Pyth. 2, 91). In Grk. writ. peyahoppoveiv is more
common.*
— thpiotos
thers, -7, -ov, (superl.; fr. dye on high), in Grk. writ.
mostly poetic, highest, most high; a. of place: neut.
Ta vYuora (Sept. for o)71D), the highest regions, i. e.
heaven (see dyydds, a.), Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 10; Lk. ii.
14; xix. 38, (Job xvi. 19; Is. lvii. 15). b. of rank:
of God, 6 Geds 6 vYtoros, the most high God, Mk. v. 7;
Lk. viii. 28; Acts xvi. 17; Heb. vii. 1; [Gen. xiv. 18;
Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 23]; and simply 6 doros, the
Most High, Acts vii. 48; and without the article (cf. B.
§ 124, 8 b. note; [ WH. Intr. § 416]), Lk. i. 32, 35, 76;
vi. 35, and very often in Sir.; (Hebr. ry, ry ON,
Woy ods, roy mim; Zebds Byuoros, Pind. Nem. 1,
90; 11, 2; Aeschyl. Eum. 28).*
tipos, -ous, rd, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for
DY, ANP, 73, ete., height: prop. of measure, Eph. iii.
18; Rev. xxi. 16; of place, heaven [A.V. on high], Eph.
iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49;
metaph. rank, high station: Jas.i. 9 (Job v.11; 1 Mace.
i. 40; x. 243 typos dperjs, Plut. Popl. 6).*
tow, -&; fut. tyoow; 1 aor. twou; Pass., 1 aor.
VpoOnv; 1 fut. ipwdijcopa; (vos); [Batr. 81; Hip-
pocr., al.]; Sept. very often for 09, also for Ala, xv),
ou, ete.; to lift up on high, to exalt, (Vulg. exalto) : twa
or ri, prop. of place, Jn. iii. 14°; used of the elevation
of Jesus on the cross, Jn. iii. 14°; viii. 28; xii. 34; with é&
ths yns added, to remove from (lit. out of) the earth by
crucifixion (typodr tia foll. by ék, Ps. ix. 14), Jn. xii. 32
(the Evangelist himself interprets the word of the lift-
ing up upon the cross, but a careful comparison of viii. 28
and xii. 32 renders it probable that Jesus spoke of the
heavenly exaltation which he was to attain by the cru-
cifixion (cf. xii. 23 sqq., xiii. 31 sqq., Lk. xxiv. 26), and
employed the Aramaic word 015, the ambiguity of which
allowed it to be understood of the crucifixion; cf. Bleek,
647
paive
Beitrage zur Evangelienkritik, p. 231 sq.; [the ‘lifting
up’ includes death and the victory over death; the pas-
sion itself is regarded as a glorification; cf. Westcott
ad loc.]); Twa €ws rod oipavod (opp. to karaSiBagew [or
kataBaivew] €ws adov), metaph. to raise to the very sum-
mit of opulence and prosperity, pass., Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x.
15, [al. understand exaltation in privilege as referred to
in these pass. (see vs. 21 in Mt.)]; simply rwd, to exalt,
to raise to dignity, honor, and happiness: Lk.i. 52 (where
opp. to tamew); Acts xiii. 17; to that state of mind
which ought to characterize a Christian, 2 Co. xi. 7; to
raise the spirits by the blessings of salvation, Jas. iv. 10;
1 Pet. v. 6; epavrdy, to exalt one’s self (with haughti-
ness and empty pride), (opp. to ramewa), Mt. xxiii. 12;
Lk. xiv. 11; xviii. 14;—in these same pass. Wodnoerat
occurs, he shall be raised to honor. By a union of the
literal and the tropical senses God is said iyyéoa Christ
th Se&a adrov, Acts v. 31; pass. Acts ii. 33; the dative
in this phrase, judged according to Greek usage, hardly
bears any other meaning chan with (by means of) his
right hand (his power) [R. V. txt.]; but the context
forbids it to denote anything except at (to) the right hand
of God [so R. V. mrg.]; hence the opinion of those
has great probability who regard Peter’s phrase as
formed on the model of the Aramaean MEMS cf. Bleek,
Einl. in das N. T. ed. 1, p. 346 [but see W. 214 (201),
215 (202); Meyer ad loc. Comp.: imep-vpdw. | *
thpopa, -ros, 7d, (iypdw), thing elevated, height: prop.
of space, opp. to Bafos, Ro. viii. 39 (rod dépos, Philo de
praem. et poen. §1; drav tyrwopa AdBy péycoTov 6 HALOS,
Plut. mor. p. 782 d.); spec. elevated structure i. e. bar-
rier, rampart, bulwark: 2 Co. x.5. [Sept. (in Jud. x. 8;
xiii. 4, actively) ; cod. Ven. for ‘heave-offering’ in Lev.
vii. 14, 32; Num. xviii. 24 sqq.]*
©
ayos, -ov, 6, (Pdyw), @ voracious man, a glutton, (it
is a subst., and differs fr. gayds the adj.; cf. gvyds,
gewdds; see Fritzsche on Mark p. 790 sqq., but cf.
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 28; W. § 16, 3c. a., [and
§ 6, 1i.; esp. Chandler § 230]): joined with olvorédrns,
Mifsexts 1 9ien Woke vais 342%
daye, see eobia.
datdovns (so Rec.eras steph) or deAdvys (with most Mss.
including cod. Sin., Rec.b°" G LT Tr [WH (ef. their
Intra § 404 and App. p. 151°; W. Dindorf in Steph.
Thes. s. v. pawdAns, col. 583)]), by metath. for the more
com. dawdAns (found in [Epict. 4, 8, 24]; Artem. oneir.
% 3; 5,29; Pollux 7, (13) 61; Athen. 3 p. 97), -ov, 6, Lat.
paenula, a travelling-cloak, used for protection against
stormy weather: 2 Tim. iv. 13, where others errone-
ously understand it to mean a case or receptacle for
°
books as even the Syriac renders it Lodo Luam.*
gatvw ; [1 aor. act. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. davy, LT WH
in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and dvapaivw; W
§15 s. v.; B. 41 (35))]; Pass., pres. q@aivopar; 2 aor.
eparnv; 2 fut. parvycopa and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) davodpae
(cf. Kiihner § 343s. v.; [Veitch s.v.]); (@dw); in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down; to bring forth into the ‘light, cause
to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransi-
tively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly
Paré«
(cf. L. and S.s. v. A. II.)] express by the passive), Sept.
for VN: 1rd has daiver, Jn. i. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 8; 6 Adxvos,
Jn. v. 35; 2 Pet. i. 19,(1 Mace. iv. 50; Gen. 1.17); 6
Atos, Rev. i. 16 ; 6 HA. kal 7 oeAnvn, Rev. xxi. 23; 4 nyeépa,
Rev. viii. 12 Rec. 2. Passive, a. to shine, be
bright or resplendent: 9 jpepa, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(see
above); xviii. 23 RG Tr—but see Veitchs.v.; moreover,
the foll. exx. should be brought under the next head; see
Meyer on Phil. ii. 15]; os pworipes, Phil. ii. 15; 6 dornp,
Mt. ii. 7; ) dorpamn, Mt. xxiv. 27. b. to become
evident, to be brought forth into light, come to view, appear:
Mt. xxiv. 30; opp. to d@avigecOa, Jas. iv. 14; of the
appearance of angels: tui, Mt. i. 20; ii. 18, 19, (2 Mace.
iii. 33; x. 29; xi. 8; of God, Joseph. antt. 7, 7, 3; for
717) in ref. to the same, Num. xxiii. 3); of those re-
stored to life, Lk. ix. 8; rwi, Mk. xvi. 9; of growing
vegetation, to come to light, Mt. xili. 26; univ. to appear,
be seen: awépeva, Heb. xi. 3; impersonally, daiverat,
it is seen, exposed to view: oddémore ean ovtas ev TO
*IopanA, never was it seen in such (i. e. so remarkable)
a fashion — never was such a sight seen — in Israel, Mt.
Be BB c. to meet the eyes, strike the sight, become
clear or manifest, with a predicate nom. (be seen to be)
[cf. B. §144, 15 a., 18]: Mt. vi. 16, 18; xxiii. 27sq.; 2
Co. xiii. 7; ta (se. 7 dpapria) dary dpaptia (equiv. to
duaptwdds), Ro. vii. 13; with the dat. of the pers. added,
Mt. vi. 5 (sc. mpocevxdpevor praying); to be seen, appear:
& daptwAds rod daveirat; i.e. he will nowhere be seen,
will perish, 1 Pet. iv. 18. d. to appear to the mind,
seem lo one’s judgment or opinion: ti tpiv paiverar, [A.V.
what think ye], Mk. xiv. 64 (1 Esdr. ii. 18 (21)); épavn-
cay évartov aitav eoei Anpol, Lk. xxiv. 11[W. § 33 f.; B.
§133, 3. Syn. see doxéo, fin. ]*
adex [L txt. Tr WH @ddex (but see Tdf- Proleg. p.
104); Limrg. @ddey], 6, Peleg, (192 ‘division ’), son of
Eber (Gen. x. 25): Lk. iii. 35.* i
davepds, -d, -dv, (aivopza), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, ap-
parent, manifest, evident, known, (opp. to xpumrdés and
andéxpupos): Gal. v.19; év raow, among all, 1 Tim. iv.
15 Rec.; ev adrois, in their minds, Ro. i. 19; revi, dat. of
the pers., manifest to one, of a pers. or thing that has
become known, Acts iv. 16; vii. 13; [1 Tim. iv. 15 GL
TTrWH]; qavepdv yiveoOa: Mk. vi. 14; [LK. viii.
17]; 1 Co. iii. 13; xiv. 25; ev ipiv, among you, 1 Co.
xi. 19; év with a dat. of the place, Phil. i. 13 [see
mpatapiov, 3}; avepdv moreiv tia, [A. V. to make one
known, i. e.| disclose who and what he is, Mt. xii. 16;
Mk. iii. 125; eis havepdv edGeiv, to come to light, come to
open view, Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 173 dp TO avepo, in
public, openly (opp. to év té xpumr@), Mt. vi. 4 Rec., 6
RG, [18 Ree.]; Ro. ii. 28 [here A.V. outward, outward-
ly]. manifest i.e. to be plainly recognized or known:
foll. by ¢v with a dat. of the thing in (by) which, 1 Jn.
iii. 10. [Sywn. see dos, fin.]*
avepso, -@; fut. pavepoow; 1 aor. ehavépwoa; Pass.,
pres. @avepovpa; pf. meaveépopar; 1 aor. epavepoOnv; 1
fut. pavenwOnoopar; (pavepos) ; to make manifest or visi-
bie or known what has been hidden or unknown, to
648
pavepow
manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or in any other
way; a. with an acc. of the thing: pass., Mk. iv.
22; Eph. v. 13; Rev. iii. 18; ra épya reos, pass. Jn. iii.
21; with & rum added, Jn. ix. 3; ryv Sd€av aitod, of
Christ, Jn. ii. 11; sc. rHv yroow, 2 Co. xi.6 LT Tr WH;
tas Bovdas Tov kapdiov, of God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; ray
Conny THs yuooews adtod Ov udv ev marti Tom@, 2 Co. ii.
143 thy omovdny dpav evoriov Tov Oeov, pass. 2 Co. vii.
12; ray Can rod “Incov ev TS Taopart, ev tH OvnTh capki,
pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 sq.; ydpus tov Oeod havepwheica dia Tis
| emupaveias Tod Xpiorovd, 2 Tim. i. 10; pass. used of some-
thing hitherto non-existent but now mdde actual and
visible, realized, 1 Jn. iii. 2 (Germ. verwirklicht werden,
in. die Erscheinung treten); 680s, Heb. ix. 8 (ef. iter
per Alpes patefieri volebat, Caes. bell. gall. 3,1); to
bring to light or make manifest, by the advent, life, death,
resurrection, of Jesus Christ: rd puotnpioy, pass. Ro.
xvi. 26; with rois dyio added, Col. i. 26; to make
known by teaching: 7é évopa Tod Oeov Tots avOpwrots,
Jn. xvii. 6 3 7 puotHpiov Tov Xpiorov, Col. iv.4; tov Adyor
avtov, of God giving instruction through the preachers
of the gospel, Tit. i. 3; tS yvwardy tod Geod avrois, of
God teaching the Gentiles concerning himself by the
works of nature, Ro. i. 19; pass. Occavocvvn Geov (made
known in the gospel [cf. d:cacoovvy, 1 ¢. p. 149» bot.]),
Ro. iii. 213 pass. to become manifest, be made known: ev
rovT@ sc. ore ete. herein that, etc. [see odros, I. 2b.], 1 Jn.
iv. 9; ra Stkatwpara Tov Geod, Rev. xv. 4. b. with an
ace. of the person, to expose to view, make manifest, show
one :- €avrév 76 Koopo, of Christ coming forth from his
retirement in Galilee and showing himself publicly at
Jerusalem, Jn. vii. 4; rots paOnrais, of the risen Christ,
Jn. xxi.1; pass. to be made manifest, to show one’s self,
appear: éumpoobev rod Bnpatos Tov Xprorod, 2 Co. v. 10;
of Christ risen from the dead, rots pa@yrais airod, Jn.
xxi. 14; Mk. xvi. 14; with é&v érépa poppy added, Mk.
xvi. 12 (absol. gavepwOeis, Barn. ep. 15, 9); of Christ
previously hidden from view in heaven but after his inear-
nation made visible on earth as a man among men, Heb.
ix. 26 (opp. to devrepov dpOnoec Oa, of his future return
from heaven, ibid. 28); 1 Pet. i. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 5,8; with
év oapxi added, 1 Tim. iii. 16, (Barn. ep. 5, 6; 6, 7. 9.
14 ete.); % Coy (the life embodied in Christ; the centre
and source of life) é@avepobn, 1 Jn. i. 2; of Christ now
hidden from sight in heaven but hereafter to return
visibly, Col. iii. 4 (cf.3); 1 Pet. v.4; 1 Jn. il. 28; [ef.
Westcott on the Epp. of St. John p. 79 sq.]. of Chris-
tians, who after the Saviour’s return will be manifested
év d6&n [see ddéa, HT. 4 b.], Col. iii. 4. Pass. to be-
come known, to be plainly recognized, thoroughly under-
stood: who and what one is, revi, Jn. i. 81; what sort
of person one is, 76 bea, 2 Co. v. 115 év rais ouverdqoeow
vparv, ibid.; pavepovpuat foil. by ért, 2 Comins rn ai
19; év marti pavepwbévres ev maou eis Ypas, in every way
made manifest (such as we are) among all men t@ you-
ward, 2 Co. xi. 6 [but L T Tr WA give the act. pavepa-
gavres, we have made it manifest]. (Hdt., Dion. Hal.,
| Dio Cass. Joseph.) [SyNn. see drroxadimra, fin. ] *
pavepas
havepas, (see Gavepds), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down],
adv., manifestly ; i.e. a. plainly, clearly: iSetv twa,
Acts x. 3. b. openly: Mk. i. 45; opp. to év kpuzr@,
Jn. vii. 10.*
avepwots, -ews, H, (havepow), manifestation: with a
gen. of the object, 1 Co. xii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 2. ([Aristot.
de plantis 2, 1 and 93 also for o-18 (Sept. dyA@ors)
Lev. viii. 8 cod. Ven.] Eccles. writ.; Hesych.) [Syn.
See dmoxaNvrra, fin. | *
paves, -ov, 6, (paivw), a torch [A. V. lantern; Hesych.
“Arruxot O€ AuxvovKov exddouv d jpeis viv havov; cf. Phryn.
p- 59 and Lob.’s note; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 131;
Athen. 15 p. 699 d. sqq. and Casaubon’s notes ch. xviii.
see Aapzmds and reff.]: Jn. xviii. 3. (Arstph., Xen.,
Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
PavovyA, (98139 i. e. mpédcwmrov Gcod), indecl., Phanuel,
the father of Anna the prophetess: Lk. ii. 36.*
havratw: (haiyw); pres. pass. ptep. pavraopevos; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to cause to appear, make visi-
ble, expose to view, show : rd pavtaopevov, the appearance,
sighty Heb. xii. 21.*
gavtacla, -as, 9, show, showy appearance, display,
pomp: Acts xxv. 23. (Polyb. 15, 25, 5, etc.; [Diod.
12, 83]; al.) *
pdvracpa, -ros, té, (partdtw), an appearance; spec.
an apparition, spectre: Mt. xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 49. (Aes-
chyl., Eur., Plat., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.; Sap. xvii. 14
(15).)*
dapayé, -ayyos, 7, a valley shut in by cliffs and preci-
pices; a ravine: Lk. iii. 5. (Alem., Eur., Thue., Dem.,
Polyb., al.; Sept.) *
Papas, (NID; in Joseph. antt. 2,13 and 14 bapaadéns
[also Sapady, -dvos, 8, 6, 2, etc.]), 6, [indecl. B. 15 (14)],
Pharaoh, the common title of the ancient kings of Egypt
(6 papawy kar’ Aiyurtiovs Bacidéa onpaivet, Joseph. antt.
8, 6, 2 [ace. to Ebers (in Riehm s. v. Pharao) the name
is only the Hebr. form of the Egyptian per-da denoting
(as even Horapollo 1, 62 testifies) great house, a current
title of kings akin to the Turkish “ sublime porte”; al.
al.; see BB. DD.s. v.]): Acts vii. 13, 21; Ro. ix. 17; Heb.
xi. 24; bapaw with Bacweds Alyorrov added in apposi-
tion (as if @apaw were a proper name, as sometimes in
the O. T.: on 99p Nyy, 1 K. iii. 1; ix.16; 2 K,
xvii. 7; Is. xxxvi. 6, ete.; 1 Esdr. i. 23), Acts vii. 10.
Cf. Vaihinger in Herzog xi. p. 490 sqq.; [Ebers in Riehm
u. s. ].*
Papés [on its accent see Tdf. Proleg. p. 104], é, (v2
4 breach, Gen. xxxviii. 29), Perez [A. V. P2ares], a son
of Judah by Tamar his daughter-in-law: Mt. i. 3; Lk.
iii. 33.*
Papiratos, -ov, 6, a Pharisee, a member of the sect or
party of the Pharisees (Syr. Laozs, rabbinic 7wn3,
fr. #19 ‘to separate’, because deviating in their life from
the general usage; Suidas s.v. quotes Cedrenus as fol-
lows, Bapicaior, of Epunvevdpevor dbwprrpevoes apd rd pepi-
gewv x. ahopilev éavrods rév GAdav drdvrev ets Te Th KaOa-
pararoy tov Blov Kat dxpiBécrarov, Kai eis Th Tod y6Lov
649
pappakevs
évrdAuara). The first and feeble beginnings of this sect
seem to be traceable to the age immediately succeeding
the return from exile. In addition to the books of the
O. T. the Pharisees recognized in oral tradition (see
mapddoats, 2) a standard of belief and life (Joseph. antt.
13, 10,6; Mt.xv.1; Mk. vii. 3). They sought for dis-
tinction and praise by the observance of external rites
and by the outward forms of piety, such as ablutions,
fastings, prayers, and alms-giving; and, comparatively
negligent of genuine piety, they prided themselves on
their fancied good works. They held strenuously to a
belief in the existence of good and evil angels, and to
the expectation of a Messiah; and they cherished the
hope that the dead, after a preliminary experience
either of reward or of penalty in Hades, would be re-
called to life by him and be requited each according to
his individual deeds. In opposition to the usurped do-
minion of the Herods and the rule of the Romans, they
stoutly upheld the theocracy and their country’s cause,
and possessed great influence with the common people.
According to Josephus (antt. 17, 2, 4) they numbered
more than 6000. They were bitter enemies of Jesus
and his cause; and were in turn severely rebuked by
him for their avarice, ambition, hollow reliance on out-
ward works, and affectation of piety in order to gain
notoriety: Mt. iii. 7; v. 203 vii. 29 Lchm.; ix. 11, 14,
34; xii. 2, 14, 24, 38 Lchm. om.; xv. 1, 12; xvi. 1,6, 11sq.3
xix. 33 xxi. 453 [xxii. 15, 34, 41]; xxiii. 2, 18-15, 23, 25-
27, 293 xxvil 623 ¢MK. 41516518) 24546 vis 1.545
Vili 15 15's) (axel Lin br. Tt); x25) xi 13); kswaee
21, 30, 833 vi. 2, 75 vii. 30, 36 sq. 39; xi. 37-39, 42-44
{but in 44G TTr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 533; xii. 1;
xiii. 31; xiv. 1,3; xv. 2; xvi.14; xvii. 20; xviii. 10 sq.;
xix. 39; Jn. i. 245 iii. 13; iv. 1; vii. 32, 45, 47sq.3 viii.
3, 13; ix. [13], 15sq. 40; xi. 46 sq. 57; xii. 19,425 xviii.
3): Acts v. 343 xv. D> xxi, 6-9 xxvi- 55) Philo me 5.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Pharisiier; Reuss in Herzog xi.
p- 496, and the works referred to above s. v. Saddouxaios,
fin. [esp. Sieffert’s dissertation in Herzog ed. 2 (vol. xiii.
p- 210 sqq.) and the copious reff. at its close]. An ad-
mirable idea of the opinions and practices of the Phari-
sees may be gathered also from Paret, Ueber d. Phari-
siismus des Josephus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1856, No. 4, p. 809 sqq.*
dappaxela [WH xia, so T (exc. in Gal. v. 20; cf. the
Proleg. p. 88); see I, ¢],-as, 9, (pappaxedo) ; a. the
use or the administering of drugs (Xen. mem. 4, 2,
17). b. poisoning (Plat., Polyb., al.): Rev. ix. 21
fhere WH txt. Tr mrg. @appydkwv ; many interpp. refer
the pass. to next head]. c. sorcery, magical arts,
often found in connection with idolatry and fostered by
it: Gal. v. 20 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] (Sap. xii. 4;
xviii. 13; for D'DvD, Is. xlvii. 9; for 0°09, Ex. vii. 22;
viii. 18; for oon, Ex. vii. 11); trop. of the decep.
tions and seductions of idolatry, Rev. xviii. 23.*
happakets, -éws, 6, (Pappaxor), one who prepares or
uses magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Rec’
(Soph., Plat., Joseph., Leian., Plut., al.) *
dppaxop
[pdppaxoy, -ov, 7d, fr. Hom. down, a drug; an enchani-
ment: Tr mrg. WH txt. in Rev. ix. 21 (R.V. sorceries),
for dappakeia, q. v. (in b.).*]
appaxés, -7, -dv, (pappacaw [to use a ddppaxor)), [fr.
Arstph. down]; 1. pertaining to magical arts. 2.
6 happakés, subst., i. e. pappakeds, g.v.: Rev. xxi. 8GL
T Tr WH; xxii. 15. (Sept. several times for 21.) *
dass, -ews, 9, (fr. paivw) 5 1. in the Attic ora-
tors, the exposure of (informing against) those who have
embezzled the property of the state, or violated the laws
respecting the importation or exportation of merchandise,
or defrauded their wards. 2. univ. a disclosure of
secret crime (xowas dé paces exadodvro macat al pnvocess
tv Aavbavdvrav adiknudrev, Pollux 8, 6, 47): Susan. 55
Theod.; of information by report [A. V. tidings], Acts
xxi. 31.*
ddckw; impf. épackov; (AQ, dypé); fr. Hom. down;
io affirm, allege, to pretend or profess: foll. by the ace.
with the inf., Acts xxiv. 9; xxv. 19; with the inf. and
an ace. referring to the subject, Rev. ii. 2 Rec. ; foll. by
an inf. with a subject nom., Ro. i. 22.*
itv, -ns, 9, [((waréouar to eat; Vanicek p. 445)], a
crib, manger: Lk. ii. 7, 12, 16; xiii. 15. (From Hom.
down; Sept. for 0138, Job xxxix. 9; Prov. xiv. 4; Is.
i. 8; plur. for 0°59, Hab. iii. 17.) *
daddos, -7, -ov, (akin to Germ. faul and flau), easy,
slight, ordinary, mean, worthless, of no account; ethically,
bad, wicked, base (Theogn. [?], Eur., Xen., Plat., Plut.) :
Jas. iii. 16; padAdv te A€yev wepi twos, Tit. ii. 8; adda
mpacoew, [R.V. to do ill}, Jn. iii. 20; ra cb. tpdooew opp.
to ra dyaba moveiv, Jn. v. 29; Gavdov (opp. to dyabdv)
mpdcoew, Ro. ix. 11 LT Tr WH; 2 Co. v. 10 T Tr txt.
WH. [See Trench, Syn. § lxxxiv.]*
éyyos, -ovs, 76, (akin to gaivew), fr. Aeschyl. and
Pind. down, light: of the moon, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. |
24; of a candle or lamp, Lk. xi. 33 R GT Trmrg. [ef.
dorparn, ib. vs. 36]. (Joel ii. 10; iii. (iv.) 15 (20); Ezek.
i. 4, 18; 27:5; Hos. vii..6.)*
[Syn.: adyh, péyyos, Pas: das light— the general
term, (of the light of a fire in Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xxii. 56);
géyyos amore concrete and emphatic term (cf. Lk. xi. 33), the
bright sunshine, the beam of light, ete. ; avy a still stronger
term, suggesting the fiery nature of the light ; used of shoot-
ing, heating, rays. A Greek spoke of 7Alov gas, péy-
ryos, aiyh; or, pwrds péyyos, aiyh; or, Péyyous adyh; but
these formulas are not reversible. Schmidt ch. 33; cf.
Trench § xlvi.]
elSopar; fut. petoouar; 1 aor. épetodunv; depon. mid.;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 99n, 0:n, 4WM (to keep back);
to spare: absol. 2 Co. xiii. 2; tevds, to spare one [W.
§ 30, 10d.; B. § 132, 15], Acts xx. 29; Ro. viii. 823 xi.
21; 1 Co. vii. 28; 2Co. i. 23; 2 Pet. ii. 4sq.3 to absiain
[A. V. forbear], an inf. denoting the act abstained from
being supplied from the context : cavyacat, 2 Co. xii. 6
(pi heidSou —se. Siddoxew — el Exers Siddoxeww, Xen. Cyr.
1, 6, 35; with the inf. added, Aéyew «axa, Eur. Or. 393;
Spacai 71 rdv Tupavxay, Plat. de rep. 9 p. 574 b.)."
dhaSopévas, (fr. the ptep. peddpevos), adv., sparingly :
2 Co. ix. 6 (mildly, Plut. Alex. 25).*
650
péepw
dedAcvns, see haddvys.
dépw; (allied to Germ. fiihren, fah-en, [ Bug. bear, ete.
Scotch bairn, ete. etce.; cf. Curtius §411]); impf. &e-
pov; Pass., pres. dépopat; impf. épepdpyv; fut. act. otoe
(Jn. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 26) 5 1 aor. #veyxa, ptep. évéyxas;
2 aor. inf. éveyxeiy (Mt. vii. 18 T WH); 1 aor. pass.
nvexOnv (2 Pet. i. 17, 21); [cf. WH. App. p. 164; B. 68
(60); W. 90 (85 sq.); esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.]; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. for #37 and Nw}; to bear, i.e. 1. to
carry; _ a. to carry some burden: tiv oravpiv dnt
obev twos, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one’s self (which the
Grk. writ. express by the mid.), [A. V. ¢o bring]: ri, Lk.
xxiv. 1; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing; pass.
like the Lat. feror i.q. moveor, to be conveyed or borne,
with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof.
auth. fr. Hom. down): of persons borne in a ship over
the sea, [A. V. io be driven], Acts xxvii. 15,17; of a
gust of wind, éo rush, Acts ii. 2 (cf. Jer. xviii. 14); avy
évexGeioa, was brought, came, 2 Pet. i. 17,18 (see td, I.
2a.); of the mind, to be moved inwardly, prompted,
imd mvevparos dyiov, 2 Pet. i. 21; pépopa emi me [R. V.
press on], Heb. vi. 1. c. ace. to a less freq. use to
bear up, i. e. uphold (keep from falling): @épwv ra ravra
70 phpate ths Suvduews avrod, of God [the Son] the pre-
server of the universe, Heb. i. 3 (so in the Targums and
Rabbinical writ. 530 is often used, e. g. in yy bay, of
God ; od duvnoopat éye povos pepew tov Aady rodTov, Num.
xi. 14, ef. 11; add, Deut. i. 9, for Nvi; 6 7a py [per]
évra hépov kal Ta mavta yevvor, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 75
fr. native Grk. writ. we have gépew riv wodw, Plut.
Lucull. 6; cf. Bleek, Brief a.d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 70 sq.). 2.
to bear i. e. endure (exx. without number in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; ef. Passow s. v. B. I. 3; [L. and S.s. v.
A. TII.]) : rév dvediopdv, Heb. xiii. 13; ri, to endure the
rigor of a thing, Heb. xii. 20; rua, to bear patiently
one’s conduct, or to spare one (abstain from punishing
or destroying), Ro. ix. 22. 3. to bring, bring to,
bring forward ; a. prop.: tid, Acts v. 16; ti, Mk.
{vi.27RGT Tr WH); xi. 2T Tr WH; xii. 16; Lk. xv.
23; Acts iv. 84, 37; v.23 2 Tim. iv. 13; teva mpds twa,
Mk. i. 32; ii.3 [T Tr mrg. WH); ix. 17 [W. 278 (262)],
19 sq.3 [rea ei twa, Lk. xii. 11 Tr mrg.]; twa rum, Mk.
vii. 82; viii. 223 [rua emi tuvos, Lk. v. 18]; ri run, Mk.
xii. 15; Jn. ii. 8; with &d¢ added, Mt. xiv. 18 [here Tr
mrg. br. Se]; xvii. 17; rt mpds twa, Mk. xi. 7 [T Tr
WH]; 7 eis with an acc. of the place, Rev. xxi. 24, 26;
wi émt wivaxc, Mt. xiv. 11; Mk. vi. [27 Lehm.], 28; amd
rwos (a part of [see azd, I. 2]), Jn. xxi. 10; hépo rut
dayetv, Jn. iv. 33. b. to move to, apply: tov Saxru-
Aov, rv xeipa, Se, eis with an acc. of the place, [A. V.
reach], Jn. xx. 27. fig., qéperar tpiv tt, a thing is
offered (lit. ‘is being brought’) to you: » xdpis, 1 Pet.
i. 13. c. to bring by announcing: ddaxnv, 2 Jn. 10
(revi dyyeAtny, pdOov, Adyor, iy, ete., in Hom., Pind.,
al.); 40 announce (see Passow s. v. p. 2231"; [L. and S.
s.v. A. TV. 4]) : @avarov, Heb. ix. 16. a. tobeari.e.
bring forth, produce ; a. prop.: xaprépr, [ Mt. vii. 18*
T WH, 18° T]; Mk. iv. 8 [on év é&jxovra ete. WH txt..
hevyw
see ev, I. 5 f.]; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2, 4 sq. 8, 16; (Hom.
Od. 4, 229; Hes. opp. 117; Xen. mem. 2, 1, 28; al.). 8.
to bring forward in speech: mpodnreia, 2 Pet. i. 21 [A. V.
came]; Kpiow Kard tevos, 2 Pet. ii. 115 [Karmyopiay xara
twos, Jn. xviii. 29 RG L Tr (but here T WH om. xara) ];
aitimpara kata Tivos, Acts xxv. 7 RG [but G om. carat. ];
airiay, ibid. 18 L T Tr WH; (adoas airias, reasons, Dem.
p- 1328, 22; dmodoyicpovs, Polyb. 1, 32, 4). e. to
lead, conduct, [A. V. bring, carry, etc. (Germ. fiihren) |:
éni with an ace. of the place, Mk. xv. 22; Acts xiv. 13;
(€xet) Gov, Jn. xxi. 18; metaph. a gate is said dépew
(Lat. ferre [Eng. lead ]) eis rnv modu, Acts xii. 10 (dds
¢. eis ipdv, Hdt. 2, 122; dud ris ayopas és Td mpds 7A, id.
2, 138 [cf. L.andS.s.v. A. VII.]). [Comp.: dva-, dro-,
Sia-, eio-, map-evo-, €k-, EM t-, KATA-, Tapa, TEpt-, TPO-, Tpoo~,
our, bro-pépo. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.]*
hedyo ; fut. pevEouar; 2 aor. épvyov; fr. Hom. down ;
Sept. for 03] and m2; to flee, i.e. a. to flee
away, seek safety by flight: absol., Mt. viii. 33; xxvi. 56;
Mk. v. 14; xiv. 50; Lk. viii. 34; Jn. x. 12, [13 (here GT
Trtxt. WH om. L Trmrg. br. the el.)]; Acts vii. 29; foll.
by eis with an ace. of the place, Mt. ii.13; x. 23; [xxiv.
16, here RG TWH mre. éwi]; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 21;
[Jn. vi. 15 Tdf.]; Rev. xii. 6; foll. by émi with an ace.
of the place, Mt. xxiv. 16 [here L Tr WH txt. eis]; ék
tov mAviov, Acts xxvii. 30; foll. by adwé with a gen. of the
place, in a purely local sense, to leave by fleeing, as in
Grk. writ. (cf. W. 223 (210); [B. § 131, 1]), Mk. xvi. 8;
by dzé with a gen. of the pers. inspiring fear or threat-
ening danger (after the Hebr.), Jn. x.5; Jas. iv. 7;
poetically, pevéerat am aitév 6 Odvaros, death shall flee
from them, opp. to ¢yryaovct Oavarov, Rev. ix. 6. b.
metaph. to flee (to shun or avoid by flight) something ab-
horrent, esp. vices: with an acc. of the thing, 1 Co. vi.
18 (Sap. i. 5; 4 Mace. viii. 18); opp. to Sudkeev, 1 Tim. vi.
11; 2Tim. ii. 22; Hebraistically foll. by dé with a gen.
of the thing, 1 Co. x. 14 (dré duaprias, Sir. xxi. 2). ec.
to be saved by flight, to escape safe out of danger: absol.
Heb. xii. 25 RG; with an ace. of the thing, Heb. xi. 34;
Hebraistically foll. by dé with a gen. — of the thing, Mt.
iii. 7; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; of the pers. Mk. xiv. 52 [T
Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mre. br. dw atrér]. d. poeti-
cally, to flee away i. q. vanish: maca vicos epuye Kat dpn
ovx evpéOncav, Rev. xvi. 20; with the Hebraistie addi-
tion dé mpoo@moy tivds (as in Deut. xxviii. 7; Josh. vii.
4; viii.5; 2 Chr. x. 2, ete.; see mpdcwmov, 1 b. p. 551°
mid.), Rev. xx. 11. [Comp. and Syn.: dod. (empha-
sizes the inner endeavor or aversion), duad. (suggests
the space which the flight must traverse), ékp. (looks
rather to the physical possibility), cara. (points to the
place or the person where refuge is sought); Schmidt,
Syn. ch. 109.]*
}qré (Lehm. SA, [so Trin Acts xxiv. 22 (by mis-
take ?)]; cf. Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37; B. 138
(12); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 104; and reff. s. v. knpv&]), [lit.
‘happy’, ‘fortunate *], -cxos, 6, (Claudius [but in Tacit.
hist. 5, 9 called Antonius]) Felix, the eleventh procura-
tor of Judea, (apparently between a.p. 52 and 60).
651
Dijotos
He was a freedman of Claudius and his mother Antonia,
and the brother of Pallas, the powerful favorite of the
emperor. He first married Drusilla [(?) see Dict. of
Grk. and Rom. Biogr. s. v. 4], the granddaughter of
Cleopatra and Antony; and afterwards Drusilla, the
daughter of Herod Agrippa. Acc. to Tacitus “per
omnem saevitiam ac libidinem jus regium servili in-
genio exercuit”, and by his cruelty and injustice he
stimulated the rage of the turbulent Jews against the
Roman rule. When he had retired from the province
and come to Rome, the Jews of Cesarea accused him
before the emperor, but through the intercession of his
brother Pallas he was acquitted by Nero (cf. Tacit.
hist. 5, 9,5 sq.; annal. 12, 54; Suet. vit. Claudii, 28;
Joseph. antt. 20, 7, 1 sq. and 8, 5 sq.; 7, 9; b. j. 2, 13):
Acts xxiii. 24, 26; xxiv. 3, 22, 24.sq. 27; xxv. 14. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v.; Paret in Herzog iv. 354; [V. Schmidt
in Herzog ed. 2, iv. 518 sq.]; Overbeck in Schenkel ii.
263 sq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 303 sq. § 19, 4;
[Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xli.].*
oyun; -ns, 7, (pypt), fame, report: Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv.
14. [(From Hom. down.) ]*
npi; impf. epnv; (fr. daw, to bring forth into the
light [cf. Curtius §407]); hence [fr. Hom. down] prop.
to make known one’s thoughts, to declare; to say: &pn, he
said (once on a time), Mt. xxvi. 61; historical writers,
in quoting the words.of any one, prefix gyaiv, én, (Lat.
ait, inquit): Lk. xxii. 58; Acts viii. 36, and often;
gyoiv and én are used of a person replying, Mt. xiii.
29; Lk. vii. 40; Jn. i. 23; ix. 38; Acts vii. 2, ete.; of
one who asks a question, Mt. xxvii. 23; Acts xvi. 30;
xxi. 37; &pn peyddy tH hovg, Acts xxvi. 24; dmokpiGels
épy, Mt. viii. 8; yoiv is interjected into the recorded
speech of another [cf. W. § 61, 6], Mt. xiv.8; Acts xxv.
5, 22; xxvi. 25; also én, Acts xxiii. 35; qyoiv, like the
Lat. ait, inquit, is employed esp. in the later Grk. usage
with an indefinite subject (‘impersonally’) [ef. man sagt,
on dit, they say] (inserted in a sentence containing the
words of another [cf. W. u. s.]): 2 Co. x. 10 where L
Tr mrg. WH mrg. ¢asiv (cf. Passow ii. p. 2238°; [L.
and S. s.v. 11.1]; B. § 129, 19; [W. §58, 9b.8.; § 64,
3]). dnoivsc. 6 Geds, 1 Co. vi. 16 [here Lehm. br. dyciv] ;
Heb. viii. 5; [W.522 (486 sq.)]. The constructions of
the verb are the foll.: @n airé, adrois, he replied to
him, to them, Mt. iv. 7; xiii. 28; xxi. 27, ete.; Mk. [ix.
12 T Trtxt. WH]; xiv. 29; Lk. vii. 44; Acts xxvi. 32;
daroxptbeis aire ey, Lk. xxiii. 3; ey mpos teva, LK. xxii.
70; Acts x. 28; xvi. 37; xxvi. 1; with an acc. of the
thing, 1 Co. x. 15, 19; foll. by drt, 1 Co. x. 19; todro ete.
drt, 1 Co. vii. 29 [Rec.be el ; al. om. dr]; xv. 50; foll.
by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 8. [On its alleged omission,
see W.§ 64, 7a. Comp.: cdip-pnue. |
dnpltw: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. épnuioOy; esp. freq.
in the poets fr. Hesiod down; to spread a report, to
disseminate by report: Mt. xxviii. 15 T WH mrg. (after
codd. 8A 33 etc.) for Seagdnp. q. v.*
iors, -ov, 6, (Porcius) Festus, a procurator ef Judea,
the successor of Felix [e. A.D. 60] (see @nAc& [and reff.,
pbdve
esp. Schiirer p. 308 sq.]): Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 1, 4, 9,
12-14, 22-24; xxvi. 24 sq. 32. (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 9
and 9, 1; b. j. 2, 14, 1.) *
ave: 1 aor. épOaca [W.§15s.v.]; pf. &pOaxa (1 Th.
ii. 16 Ltxt. WH mrg.); fr. Hom. down; 1. to come
before, precede, anticipate: jpeis od py pPbdcwper (see pn,
IV. 2) rods KotunOevras, we shall not get the start of those
who have fallen asleep, i.e. we shall not attain to the
fellowship of Christ sooner than the dead, nor have pre-
cedence in blessedness, 1 Th. iv. 15; &pOacev ém airovs
9 8pyn, (God’s penal) wrath came upon them unexpect-
edly, 1 Th. ii. 16; epOacev ef’ tpas 7 Bactreia Tov Geod,
the kingdom of God has come upon you sooner than you
expected, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. xi. 20; [but all the preceding
exx. except the first are referred by the majority of re-
cent interpp. to the foll. head ;—a meaning esp. common
when the verb is construed with prepositions ]. 2:
in the Alex. [and other later] writ. the idea of pri-
ority disappears, to come to, arrive at: ets tt, Phil. iii.
16; to reach, attain to, a thing, Ro. ix. 31; aype tuvds,
2 Co. x. 14; (ri, to a thing, Tob. v. 19; ws tov ovpa-
vov, Test. xii. Patr. p. 530 |i. e. test. Rub. 5 fin.]; 7 pe-
yarwovrn cov eueyadivOn kai epbacev eis Tov ovpavdr,
Dan. 4, 19 Theod. [cf. 17, 25; pO. €ws rév odpavar, 2 Chr.
Xxvili. 9; epOacev 6 pny 6 EBdopos, 2 Esdr. iii. 1; Philo
de mund. opif. §1; de legg. alleg. iii. 76 ; de confus. lingg.
§ 29; Plut. apotheg. Lacon. § 28; de Alex. s. virt. s.
fort. orat. ii. 5. Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.; Geldart, Mod.
Greek, p. 206; W.§2,1b.]). [Comp.: mpo-péavo. ]*
8aprtos, -7, -dv, (POcipw), corruptible, perishable, (Vulg.
corruptibilis): 1 Co. ix. 25; 1 Pet. i. 23; avOpamos, i.e.
mortal, opp. to 6 apOapros Oeds, Ro. i. 23; ov POaprois
apyupio 7 xpvoie, not with corruptible things, with silver
or gold, 1 Pet. i. 18 [W. § 59, 5 fin.] (xpuods x. dipyupos,
ovoiat POaprai, Philo de cherub. § 14; ov dpyupov ovdé
xpuody Twa, } GAXo Tay ev dias POaprais, de congr. eru-
dit. grat. § 20); neut. rd pOaprév, that which is liable
to corruption, [76 péaprév rovro this eorruptible (A.V.)],
1 Co. xv. 53sq. (Diod. 1, 6; Philo de lege. alle. 2, 1;
de cherub. § 2; [Aristot.], Plut., Sext. Emp., al.; 2 Mace.
vii. 16; Sap. ix. 15; xiv. 8.)*
P0eyyopar; 1 aor. ptep. pbeyEduevos; (Péeyyos [but
ef. Vaniéek p. 1176], AG); depon. mid.; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. fo give out a sound, noise, or cry; used
by the Grks. of any sort of sound or voice, whether of
man or animal or inanimate object —as of thunder, mu-
sical instruments, etc.; [POéyy. denotes sound in its re-
lation to the hearer rather than to its cause; the
peya Aador is a braggart, the péeya Pbeyydpuevos is a lofty
orator; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 53]. 2. to proclaim;
to speak, utter: Actsiv.18 3 tmépoyka, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (ddcKa,
Sap. i. 8); tmoliyrov dpwvor ev avOpwrivn pova pbeyéd-
pevov, 2 Pet. ii. 16. [Comp.: dio-pééyyopat. | *
Picipw; fut. Hepa; 1 aor. €pOerpa; Pass., pres. hbeipo-
pat; 2 aor. ebOapnv; 2 fut. POapnoowa; (akin to Germ.
verderben); Sept. for nmw; [fr. Hom. down]; to cor-
rupt, to destroy: prop. Tov vady rod Oeod (in the opinion
the Jews the temple was corrupted, or ‘destroyed’,
652
pGopa
when any one defiled or in the slightest degree damaged
anything in it, or if its guardians neglected their duties:
cf. Deyling, Observv. sacrae, vol. ii. p. 505 sqq.), drop-
ping the fig., to lead away a Christian church from that
state of knowledge and holiness in which it ought to
abide, 1 Co. ili. 17*; twa, to punish with death, 1 Co.
ili. 17°; i. q. to bring to want or beggary (ef. our ruin
[A. V. corrupt]), 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. to be destroyed, to
perish: €& tm, by a thing, Jude 10; vy with a dat. denot-
ing the condition, év r7 POopa adrar, 2 Pet. ii. 12 LT Tr
WH. in an ethical sense, /o corrupt, deprave : pbeipov-
ow 70n xpnora opiriat Kakai (a saying of Menander [see
400s, 2], which seems to have passed into a proverb [see
Wetstein ad loc.; Gataker, Advers. miscel. l. i.e. 1 p-
174 sq.]), 1 Co. xv. 33; the character of the inhabitants
of the earth, Rev. xix. 2; pass. dOeipouat and twos, to
be so corrupted as to fall away from a thing [see ard,
I. 3d.], 2 Co. xi. 3; POetpdpevoy xara ras emOvulas,
[R. V. waxeth corrupt ete.], Eph. iv. 22. [Comp.: dar,
xata-peipo. | *
bO.v-oTwpwos, -7, -6v, (POwdwwpov, late autumn; fr.
POivw to wane, waste away, and dm@pa autumn), au
tumnal (Polyb. 4, 37, 2; Aristot. h. a. 5, 11; [Strab.],
Plut.): devdpa Péwwor. autumn trees, i. e. trees such as
they are at the close of autumn, dry, leafless and with-
out fruit, hence dkapra is added; used of unfruitful,
worthless men, Jude 12 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. A Fresh Re-
vision ete. p. 134 sq. ].*
HOcyyos, -ov, 6, (Pbeyyouar, q. v.), a@ musical sound,
whether vocal or instrumental (Sap. xix. 17): 1 Co.
xiv. 7; Ro. x. 18, in this latter pass. Paul transfers
what is said in Ps. xviii. (xix.) 5 to the voices of the
preachers of the gospel. (Hom., Tragg., Xen., Plat.,
al.) *
bOovéw, -6; (pOdvos) ; fr. Hom. down; to envy: tui,
one, Gal. v. 26 [here Ltxt. Tr mrg. WH mrg. read the
accus.; see B. § 132,15 Rem.; W. § 31, 1 b.].*
8ovos, -ov, 6, fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down, envy: Ro. i.
29: Gal. v.21; 1 Tim.vi.4; Tit.iii.3; 1 Pet.ii. 13 da
pOdvor, for envy, i. e. prompted by envy [see é:a, B. IL.
2b.], Mt. xxvii. 18; Mk. xv. 10; Phil. i. 15, (Dio Cass.
44,36); mpos POdvov emurobe? To mvedpa 6 Karoknoev [but
see xarotxiCw| ev quiv; doth the Spirit which took up its
abode within us (i. e. the Holy Spirit) long enviously?
(see mpés, I. 3 g.), Jas. iv. 5 [but 1 (WH in second mrg.)
drop the interrog.]; see on the pass. Grimm in the
Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 934sqq. [Sy¥N. see
Gros, 2 fin.]*
0opd, -as, 7, (pOeipw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
1. corruption, destruction, perishing, (opp. to yéveats, ori-
gin, often in Plat., Aristot., Plut.; opp. to cwrnpia, Plat.
Phileb. p. 35 e.; for nnw, Ps. cii. (cili.) 45 Jon. ii. 7):
Ro. viii. 21 (on which see dovdeia) ; 2 Pet. ii. 12" [some
(cf. R. V. mre.) take $9. here actively: ets Ocpav, to dee
stroy|; €v pOopa, in a state of corruption or decomposi-
tion (of the body at burial\, 1 Co. xv. 42; by meton.
that which is subject to corruption, what is perishable, opp.
to dbOapcia, ibid. 50; in the Christian sense, the loss of
piarn
salvation, eternal m?sery (which elsewhere is called dro-
Neva), Col. ii. 22 (see amdxpnots); opp. to fw aiwnos,
Gal. vi. 8, cf. Schott ad loc. 2. in the N. T. inan
ethical sense, corruption i. e. moral decay: 2 Pet. i. 4;
ii. 12° [some take the word here actively (R.V. txt. in
their destroying), al. refer it to 1 above], 19; with rhs
(ons added, Sap. xiv. 12.*
giddn, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for p11, @ broad,
shallow bowl, deep saucer [ Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Patera;
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Vial]: Rev. v. 8; xv. 7; xvi. 1-4, 8,
LOMO il/i-texvite des iocK,, OF
prA-dyabos, -ov, (fr. pidos and dyads), loving goodness :
Tit.i.8. (Sap. vii. 22; Plut. praec. conjug.c.17; also
comp. Thes. c. Rom. c. 2; [@iAdyados od didavros, Aris-
tot. magn. mor. ii. 14 p. 1212518; Polyb. 6, 53,9; Philo
de vit. Moys. ii. § 2].)*
Pradserpaa [TWH -ia (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 87), see
I, e], -as, 7, Phi.adelphia (now Alahshar, Allahschir, [or
Ala-Shehr i. e. “The White City ” (Sayce)]), a city of
Lydia in Asia Minor, situated near the eastern base
of Mount Tmolus, founded and named by the Per-
gamene king Attalus II. Philadelphus. After the death
of king Attalus III. Philometor, B. c. 133, it together
with his entire kingdom came by his will under the
jurisdiction of the Romans: Rey. i. 11; ili. 7.*
prraserpia, -as, 7, (pidadedgos), the love of brothers
(or sisters), brotherly love, (prop., 4 Mace. xiii. 22; xiv.
1; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 12]; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4;
Leian. dial. deor. 26,2; Plut. libell. epi @iradeA pias;
[ef. Babrius 47, 15]); in the N.T. the love which Chris-
tians cherish for each other as ‘brethren’ (see adeAdés,
4); [love of the brethren] (Vulg. caritas or amor fra-
ternitatis): Ro. xii. 10; 1 Th.iv.9; Heb. xiii. 1; 1 Pet.
17 22)02) Pets 1%; .ch: 1 Inve 1.7
pA-ddehos, -ov, (piros and ddeAgos), loving brother or
sister (Soph., Plut., Anthol.) ; in a broader sense, loving
one like abrother, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 17; loving one’s fellow-
countrymen, of an Israelite, 2 Mace. xv. 14; of a Chris-
tian loving Christians, 1 Pet. iii. 8 [R.V. loving as breth-
ren].*
iAravSpos, -ov, (pidos and dynp), [fr. Aeschyl. down
(in other senses) ], loving her husband: Tit. ii. 4 (pdav-
Spa kai cappoves yuvaixes, Plut. praec. conj. ec. 28).*
rravOpwmia, -as, 7, (piAdvOpwmos), fr. Xen. and Plat.
down, love of mankind, benevolence, (Vulg. humanitas),
[R.V. kindness]: Acts xxviii. 2; Tit. iii. 4. [Cf Field,
Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad ll. ce.] *
prravOpdtws, adv., humanely, kindly: Acts xxvii. 3.
(Isocr., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. ix. 27.)*
didapyupla, -as, 7, (prrdpyupos), love of money, avarice :
1 Tim. vi. 10. (lsocr., Polyb., Ceb. tab. c. 23; Diod. 5,
26; [Diog. Laért. 6, 50; Stob. flor. 10, 38; Philo de
mut. nom. § 40]; Plut., Leian., Hdian. 6, 9,17 (8); 4
Mace. i. 26.) [Cf Trench, Syn. § xxiv.]*
id-deyupos, -ov, (pidos and dpyupos), loving money,
avaricious: Lk. xvi. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Soph., Xen.,
Plat., al.) *
Q-avros, -ov, (hidos and ards), loving one’s self; too
653
pirew
intent on one’s own interests, selfish: 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Aris-
tot. [(cf. pirdyabos) ; rhet. 1, 11, 26 (where cf. Cope)
dvaykn mavtas didavrous eivat 7) paddov 7 Hrrov|; Philo,
legg. alleg. 1, 15; Plut., [Epict.], Leian., Sext. Emp.;
dua 7d does wavras eivat piAavrous, Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 1.)
[Cf. Trench, Syn. § xciii.]*
piréw, -@ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. epider; 1 aor. epidnaa;
pf. mepiAnka; (pidros); fr. Hom. down; 1. to love;
to be friendly to one, (Sept. several times for 38): rea,
Mt. x. 37; Jn. v. 20 [here L mrg. ayaa]; xi. 8, 36; xv.
19:5 xvi. 275 xx..25. xxi. 15-17; 1.Co. xvi..223 Rev. iii:
19; with év wioree added, with a love founded in and
springing from faith, Tit. iii.15; ri, to love i. e. delight
in, long for, a thing: tay mpwroxdoiav, Mt. xxiii. 63
doracpous, Lk. xx. 46; thy Wuyi, to be desirous of pre-
serving one’s life (opp. to puceiv, to hate it when it can-
not be kept without denying Christ), Jn. xii. 25; with
nouns denoting virtues or vices: Td Weddos, Rev. xxii.
15 (codiar, Prov. xxix. 3; viii. 17); foll. by an inf., like
the Lat. amo facere, to love to do, i.e. to do with pleasure :
Mt. vi. 5 (Is. lvi. 10; Pind. Nem. 1,15; Aeschyl. septem
619; Agam. 763; Suppl. 769; Eur. Iph. Taur. 1198;
Rhes. 394; Xen. hipparch. 7, 9; Ael. v. h. 14, 37). 2.
to kiss: twa, Mt. xxvi. 48; Mk. xiv. 44; Lk. xxii. 47,
(often in the Grk. writ.; Sept. for pw3, Gen. xxvii. 26
sq., and often). 3. As to the distinction between
dyarav and guidciv: the former, by virtue of its connec-
tion with d@yaya, properly denotes a love founded in ad-
miration, veneration, esteem, like the Lat. diligere, to
be kindly disposed to one, wish one well; but dideiv de-
notes an inclination prompted by sense and emotion,
Lat. amare ; 6 pn Tov Sedpuevos ovde te dyaren av: 6 b€ pH
ayaren [-rav (?)], ov av dirdoi, Plat. Lys. p. 215 b. ;
epiAnoare avrov (Julius Caesar) as rarépa kal nyarnoare
as evepyernv, Dio Cass. 44, 48; ut scires, eum a me
non diligi solum, verum etiam amari, Cic. ad fam. 13,
47; L. Clodius valde me diligit vel, ut éeudartixorepov
dicam, valde me amat, id. ad Brut. 1. Hence men are
said ayamav God, not dideiv; and God is said dyarnoa
rov kdopov (Jn. iii. 16), and dudetv the disciples of Christ
(Jn. xvi. 27); Christ bids us dyawav (not gudr¢iv) rovs
€xOpous (Mt. v. 44), because love as an emotion can-
not be commanded, but only love as a choice. Wis
dom says, rods eve Pidovvtas ayara, Prov. viii. 17. As
a further aid in judging of the difference between the
two words compare the foll. pass.: Jn. xi. 3, 5, 36; xxi.
15-17; [even in some cases where they might appear
to be used interchangeably (e.g. Jn. xiv. 23; xvi. 27)
the difference can still be traced]. From what has
been said, it is evident that dyarar is not, and cannot
be, used of sexual love [but it is so used occasionally by
the later writers; cf. Plut. Pericl. 24,12 p. 165e.; symp.
7 p. 180 b. 6 épapevos tov épactiy ayana; ef. Steph.
Thesaur. i. p. 209 a.; Soph. Lex. s. v. dyamaw, 2; Wool
sey in the Andover Rev. for Aug. 1885, p.170sq.]. Cf.
Tittmann, Syn. N. T. i. p. 50 sqq.: Cremer s. v. dyaraw
[4te Aufl. p. 9 sq.]; Trench § xii.; [Schmidt ch. 136,
esp. §6; Cope, Aristot. rhet. vol. i. App. A. (also given
piry
in the Journ. of Philol. for 1868, p. 88 sqq.) ; also Héhne
in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w.
for 1882, p. 6 sqq.; esp. Woolsey u.s.. COMP.: «ara-
préa. ] *
An, 7, see pidros, 2.
diAqSovos, -ov, (Pidos and Sov), loving pleasure: 2
Tim. iii. 4. (Polyb. 40, 6, 10; Plut., Leian., al.) *
Anna, -ros, rd, fr. Aeschyl. down, a kiss (see giréw,
2): Lk. vii. 45; xxii. 48, (Prov. xxvii. 6; Cant. i. 2);
Gov, the kiss with which, as a sign of fraternal affection,
Christians were accustomed to welcome or dismiss their
companions in the faith: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2
Co. xiii. 12; 1 Th. v. 26; it is alsocalled piAnya dyamns,
1 Pet. v.14. Cf. Kahle, De osculo sancto (Regiom.
1867); [B. D.s. v. Kiss; also Dict. of Christ. Antiq.
s. v. Kiss ].*
Pirqpov, -ovos, 6, Philemon, of Colossz, converted to
Christianity by Paul (Philem. 19), and the recipient of
the lovely little letter which bears his name in the N. T.:
Philem. 1. [BB. DD.s. v.; esp. Bp. Lghift. Com. on
Col. and Philem., Intr.]*
Anrtos ([Chandler § 325; but] R L T Tr diAnros, see
Tuxexds [ Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]),-ov, 6, Philetus, a heretic :
3 Pana. /7.>
guAla, -as, 7, (pidos), friendship: with a gen. of the
object, Jas. iv. 4. [(Theogn., Hadt., al.) ]*
Pirurmictos, -ov, 6, @ Philippian: Phil. iv. 15.*
Piturrot, -wy, of, [on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3], Philippi,
a city of Macedonia Prima [see B.D s. v. Macedonia],
situated on [near] the northern coast of the Augean
Sea, between the rivers Strymon and Nestus, and the
cities Neapolis and Amphipolis. It took its name from
Philip I. of Macedon, who built it up from a village called
Kpnvides, and adorned and fortified it: Acts xvi. 12 (on
this pass. see koAova); xx. 6; Phil. i. 1; 1 Th. ii. 2.
[See Bp. Lghifi. Com. on Philip., Intr. iii.]*
@urtos, -ov, 6, Philip; 1. ason of Herod the
Great by his fifth wife, Cleopatra of Jerusalem (Joseph.
antt. 17, 1,3), and by far the best of his sons. He was
tetrarch of Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, Batanza,
and (ace. to the disputed statement of Lk. iii. 1) of Itu-
rea also[ef. Schiirer as below; but see B.D. Am. ed.
s. v. Itureea]; and the founder of the cities of Cxsarea
Philippi (in the Decapolis) and Julias. After having
lived long in celibacy, he married Salome, the daughter
of Herod [Philip, the disinherited ; see below] his half-
brother (Joseph. antt. 18, 5,4). He ruled mildly, justly
and wisely thirty-seven years, and in A. D. 84died with-
out issue, leaving a grateful memory of his reign in the
minds of his subjects (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 and 4, 6;
be 9.39, 1) MES evi 13.52 Mike wast ak a, 1s). cf:
Keim in Schenkel iii. p. 40 sqq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeit-
gesch. §17, a.; [BB. DD.]. In Mt. xiv. 3; Mk. vi. 17,
and Lk. iii. 19 Ree. it is said that his wife was Herodias
(see ‘Hpwédids) ; thus Herod, the son of Herod the Great
by Mariamne the daughter of the high-priest Simon
(Joseph. antt. 18, 5,1; b.j. 1, 28,4), who lived as a pri-
vate citizen in comparative obscurity and was the first
654
iros
husband of Herodias (Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 4), seems to
have been confounded with Philip, who as a ruler was
better known (cf. Volkmar, Ueber ein. histor. Irrthum
in den Evangg., in Zeller’s Theol. Jahrbb. for 1846, p. 363
sqq-)- Many interpreters (see esp. Krebs, Observv. ete.
p: 87 sq.; [Deyling, Observv. sacr. vol. ii. (ed. 2) p. 342
sqq-]), in vindication of the Evangelists, make the some-
what improbable conjecture that the first husband of
Herodias had two names, one a family name Herod, the
other a proper name Philip; [yet so Winer, RWB. s. v.
Philippus, 5; BB. DD.; Gerlach in the Zeitschr. f. Luth.
Theol. for 1869, p. 32 sq.; Meyer on Mt. 1. c.; Weiss on
Mk. 1. ¢.]. 2. Philip of Bethsaida [in Galilee], one
of the apostles: Mt.x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Jn. i,
43-48 (44-49); vi. 5, 7; xii. 21 sq. xiv. 8sq.; Acts i.
13. 3. Philip, one of the seven deacons of the
church at Jerusalem, and also an ‘evangelist’ (edayyedt-
o7ns, q.v-): Acts vi. 5; viii. 5-40; xxi. 8.*
Hrd0-Beos, -ov, (Pidos and Geds), loving [A.V. lovers of}
God: 2 Tim. iii. 4. ((Aristot. rhet. 2, 17, 6], Philo,
Leian., al.) *
Purodoyos, -ov, 6, [lit. ‘fond of talk’], Philologus, a
certain Christian: Ro. xvi.15. [Cf Bp. Lghift. Com.
on Philip., note on “ Czsar’s Household ” § 10.]*
dudroverkla, -as, 7, (eddverkos, q. V.), love of strife, eager-
ness to contend, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.; 4 Mace. i. 26);
contention: Lk. xxii. 24. (2 Mace. iv. 4; Thue. 8, 763
Joseph. antt. 7, 8,4; Antonin. 3, 4; in a good sense,
emulation, Xen., Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) *
pi\0-vetkos, -ov, (pidos, and veikos strife), fond of strife,
contentious: 1 Co. xi. 16. (Pind., Plat., Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut., al.; in a good sense, emulous, Xen., Plat., Plut.,
al.) *
dir0-Eevla, -as, 7, (pirddéevos, q. v-), love to strangers,
hospitality: Ro. xii. 13; Heb. xiii. 2. (Plat., Polyb.,
alae
didr0-fevos, -ov, (pidtos and &évos), fr. Hom. down, hos-
pitable, generous to quests, [given to hospitality]: 1 Tim.
1) Tite ds8* 1) Pet.siv.19->
iAo-mpwredw ; (piAdmparos, fond of being first, strive
ing after the first place; fr. piAos and mpéros: Artem.
oneir. 2, 32; Plut. [Alcib. 2, 2]; mor. p. 471e. [i.e. de
tranquil. an. 12; p. 793 e. i. e. an seni sit etc. 18, 8]);
to aspire after pre-eminence, to desire to be first: 3 Jn. 9.
(Several times in eccles. writ.) *
bios, -n, -ov, fr. Hom. down, friendly [ef. L. and S.
s. v. I. and II.]: @idov etvat run, to be friendly to one,
wish him well, Acts xix. 31; 1. 6 didos, Sept. for
Y, IO, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6; xi. 5; xv. 65 xvi.
9; xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii. 3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); joined with
ovyyeveis, Lk. xxi. 16; an associate, opp. to doddos, In. xv.
15; pidot avayxain, [A. V. near friends] Lat. necessitate
conjuncti, Acts x. 24; @ide, friend, in kindly address,
Lk. xiv. 10; with a gen. of the subject, 6 pidos twds,
Lk. xi. 6, [8]; xii. 4; xiv. 125 xv. 29; Jn. xi. 11; xv.
13 sq.; spec. he who associates familiarly with one, a come
panion, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34; 6 q. tod vupdiov, the
rabbinical ;awiv [q.v. in Buxtorf or Levy] (i.e. ‘son of
dirocopia
gladness”), one of the bridegroom’s friends who on his
behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him
various services in closing the marriage and celebrating
the nuptials [B. D.s. v. Marriage, HI.; Edersheim, Jew-
ish Social Life, p. 152], Jn. iii. 29; pidos rod Kaicapos, on
Caesar’sside, loyal to his interests, Jn. xix. 12; Geo, esp.
dear to God, peculiarly favored with his intimacy, Jas.
fi. 23 ({ef. Harnack and Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
10,1; Rénsch in the Zeitschr. f. wissenschaftl. Theol. for
1873, p.583 sq.]; also in prof. auth. cf. Grimm, Exeget.
Hdbch. on Sap. vii. 27 p. 164); with a gen. of the thing,
one who finds his pleasure in a thing, pidos tot xdopov,
Jas. iv. 4. 2. Fem. pian, 9, a (female) friend: Lk.
sayy, Hee
drro-codta, -as, 9, (fr. Peddcodos), prop. love (and pur-
suit) of wisdom; used in the Grk. writ. of either zeal for
or skill in any art or science, any branch of knowledge,
see Passow s. v. [cf. L.and S. s.v.]. Once in the N. T.
of the theology, or rather theosophy, of certain Jewish-
Christian ascetics, which busied itself with refined and
speculative inquiries into the nature and classes of
angels, into the ritual of the Mosaic law and the regu-
lations of Jewish tradition respecting practical life: Col.
fi. 8; see Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 1 p. 298 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. 1. c., and Prof. Westcott in B.D. s. v. Philoso-
phy].”
Ad-codos, -ov, 6, (Pidos and aodéds), a philosopher, one
given to the pursuit of wisdom or learning [Xen., Plat.,
al.]; in a narrower sense, one who investigates and dis-
cusses the causes of things and the highest good: Acts xvii.
18. [See reff. under the preceding word.]*
irdoropyos, -ov, (idos, and arepy7 the mutual love of
parents and children; also of husbands and wives), Jov-
ing affection, prone to love, loving tenderly; used chiefly
of the reciprocal tenderness of parents and children:
t pradedAdia (dat. of respect) els ddAndovs, [R. V. in
love of the brethren tenderly affectioned one to another],
Ro. xii. 10. (Xen., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) Cf£. Fritzsche,
Com. on Rom. vol. iii. p. 69.*
gidcrexvos, -ov, (piros and réxvoy), loving one’s off-
spring or children: joined with idav8pos (as in Plut.
mor. p. 769 ¢.), of women, Tit. ii.4. (4 Mace. xv. 8-5;
Hadt. 2, 66; Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Plut., Leian., al.) *
grroripdopar, -ovpar; (rAdrewos, and this fr. @idos
and run); depon. pass. (with fut. mid.); freq. in Grk.
writ. fr. Andoc., Lysias, Xen., Plat. down; a. to be
fond of honor ; to be actuated by love of honor; from a
love of honor to strive to bring something to pass. b.
foll. by an inf., to be ambitious to ete., i Th. iv.11; Ro.
xv. 20; to strive earnestly, make it one’s aim, 2 Co. v. 9.”
rodpovas, (Prrcppwr, q. V.), adv., kindly, in a friendly
manner, [ A.V. courteously}: Acts xxviii. 7. (2 Mace. iii.
9; 4 Mace. viii. 5; occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.
and] Hdt. down.)*
prodpay, -or, (Pidos and pnp), fr. Pind. and AeschyL
down, friendly, kind: 1 Pet. iii. 8 Rec.*
ipsa, -&, [inf. puoi», 1 Pet. ii. 15 WH (see their App.
p. 166 and Intr. § 410; B. 44 (38); see drodexarde};
655
poféo
fut. giudow@; 1 aor. épiuwoa: Pass., pf. impv. 2 pers.
sing. wehipwoo; 1 aor. épipwoOnv; (pds a muzzle) ; to
close the mouth with a muzzle, to muzzle: prop. Body, the
ox, 1 Co. ix. 9 RG L WH txt. (see xyud); 1 Tim. v.18,
fr. Deut. xxv. 4 where for pdm; (univ. to fasten, com-
press, t@ §vAw tov aixéva twds, Arstph. nub. 592);
metaph. to stop the mouth, make speechless, reduce to si-
lence: twa, Mt. xxii. 34; 1 Pet. ii. 15; pass. to become
speechless, hold one’s peace, Mt. xxii. 12; Mk. i. 25; iv.
39; Lk. iv. 35, (Joseph. b. j. prooem. § 5; lib. 1, 22, 3;
Leian. de morte peregr. 15; univ. to be kept in check,
4 Mace. i. 35).”
Pd<yor [i. e. burning"), -ovres, 6, Phlegon, a Christian
at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.*
proyiio; (PAE, q. v.); to ignite, set on fire, (Sir. iii.
30; Ex. ix. 24; Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 3; to burn up, 1 Macc.
iii. 5; Soph. Philoct. 1199): in fig. disc. to operate de-
structively, have a most pernicious power, Jas. iii. 6; in
the pass. of that in which the destructive influences are
kindled, ibid. (see zip, p. 558° top).*
HAE, gen. hroyds, h, (PA€yw [to burn ; cf. Lat. ‘flagro’,
ete.]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 392 and 2779, a flame:
Lk. xvi. 24; on the phrases Prd wupés and wip proyds
see nip, p. 558%
drvapéw, -@; (PAvapos, q. V-); to utter nonsense, talk
idly, prate, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.) ; to bring
forward idle accusations, make empty charges, Xen. Hell.
6, 3,12; joined with Braagnpeiv, Isocr. 5, 33: rea Acyos
movnpois, to accuse one falsely with malicious words,
8 Jn. 10 [A. V. prating against ete.].*
dvapos, -ov, (Ava, ‘to boil up,’ ‘ throw up bubbles’,
of water; and since bubbles are hollow and useless
things, ‘to indulge in empty and foolish talk’); of per
sons, ultering or doing silly things, garrulous, babbling,
[A. V. tattlers]}: 1 Tim. v. 18 [Dion. Hal. de comp.
verb. 26, vol. v. 215, 3; al.]; of things, foolish, trifling,
vain: grocogia, 4 Mace. v. 10. (Plat., Joseph. vit.
§ 81; often in Plut.; Aeschyl. dial. Socr. 8, 13; al.)*
oBepds, -d, -dv, (PoBew), fr. Aeschyl. down, [fearful
i. e.] 1. (actively) inspiring fear, terrible, forme
dable; Sept. for 873. 2. (passively) affected with
fear, timid; in the N. T., only in the former (active)
sense: Heb. x. 27, 313 xii. 21.*
hoBéw, -@: Pass., pres. hoBodpar; imp. épeBovpnys
1 aor. époBnbnv; fut. poBnOncoua; (poBos); fr. Hom. ;
down; to terrify, frighten, Sap. xvii. 9; to put to flight by
terrifying (to scare away). Pass. 1. to be put to
flight, to flee, (Hom.). 2. to fear, be afraid; Sept.
very often for 8}; absol. to be struck with fear, to be
seized with alarm: of those who fear harm or injury, Mt.
x. 313 xiv. 30; xxv. 25; Mk. v. 83, 36; x. 32; xvi. 8;
Lk. viii. 50; xii. 7,32; Jn. xii. 153 xix. 8; Acts xvi. 38;
xxii. 29; [Ro. xiii.4]; Heb. xiii.6; 1 Jn.iv. 18; opp. to
tYWAodpoveiv, Ro. xi. 20; of those startled by strange
sights or occurrences, Mt. xiv. 27; xvii.7; xxviii. 5, 103
Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 18, 30; ii. 10; ix. 34; [xxiv. 36 L in
br.]; Jn. vi. 19, 20; Acts xviii.9; xxvii. 24, [but in the
last two pass. perh. the exhortation has a wider ref-}*
pont pov
Rev. i. 17; with ogo8pa added, Mt. xvii. 6; xxvii. 54;
of those struck with amazement, [Mt.ix.8 LT Tr WH];
Mk. v. 15; Lk. v. 10; viii. 25, 35. with an acc. of
the contents [cognate acc.] (see dyamda, sub fin.) : poBov
peyay, lit. to ‘fear a great fear,’ fear exceedingly, Mk.
iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9, (1 Mace. x. 8); @oBov airay, the fear
which they inspire [see dos, 1], 1 Pet. iii. 14 (Is. viii.
12; rov Tavradou, to be filled with the same fear as Tan-
talus, Schol. ad Eur. Or. 6); with the synonymous gron-
ow (q- V-), 1 Pet. iii. 6. twa, to fear one, be afraid of
one, lest he do harm, be displeased, ete.: Mt. x. 26; xiv.
5; xxi. 26,46; Mk. xi. 18, 32 [cf. B. § 151, 11]; xii. 12;
Lk. xix. 21; xx.19; xxii. 2; Jn. ix. 22; Acts v. 26[ef.
B. § 139, 48; W. 505 (471)]; ix.26; Ro. xiii. 3; Gal. ii.
12; rdv Geov, God, the judge and avenger, Mt. x. 28; Lk.
xii. 5; xxiii. 40, (Ex. i. 17, 21; 1 S. xii. 18); ri, to fear
danger from something, Heb. xi. 23, 27; to fear (dread
to undergo) some suffering, Rev. ii. 10. in imitation of
the Hebr. (j 8})), foll. by dad twos (cf. B. § 147, 3):
Mt. x. 28; Lk. xii. 4, (Jer. i. 8, 17; x.2; Lev. xxvi. 2;
1 Mace. ii. 62; viii. 12; Jud. v. 23). as in the Grk.
writ., hoBovpat wi, to fear lest, with the subjune. aor.:
Acts [xxiii. 10 LT Tr WH]; xxvii. 173 pamos, lest per-
chance, Acts xxvii. 29 [here L pyr (q. v. 2), al. pov
(q-v.)]; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20; hoBnOdper (i. q. let us take
anxious care) pymoré tts boxy, lest any one may seem
[see Soxéw, 2 fin.], Heb. iv. 1; PoBodpar ipas, pyros
eexorriaxa, Gal. iv. 11 (see pps, 1 b.)3 oB8orpas with
an inf. to fear (i.e. hesitate) to do something (for fear
of harm), Mt. i. 20; ii. 22; Mk. ix. 82; Lk. ix. 45, (for
numerous exx. in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down see
Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2315*; [L. and S.s. v. B. II.
4}). 3. to reverence, venerate, to treat with defer-
ence or reverential obedience: twa, Mk. vi. 20; Eph. v.
83; rév Geav, used of his devout worshippers, Lk. i. 50;
xviii. 2,4; Acts x. 2, 22, 35; [Col. iii. 22 Rec.]; 1 Pet.
ii. 17; Rev. xiv. 7; xix. 5; also rév xvpsov, Col. iii. 22
[GLTTrWH]; Rev. xv. 4; rd dvoua tov Geod, Rev.
xi. 18, (Deut. iv. 10; v.29; vi. 2, 18,24; xiii. 4; xiv.
22 (23); Prov. iii. 7; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10, and many
other pass.; very often in Sir., cf. Wahl, Clavis Apocr.
V.T.s. v.fin.); of poBovpevor r. Oedy spec. of proselytes :
Acts xiii. 16, 26, (see cé8@). COMP.: éx- hoBéw.*
[Syn.: éxtAhooeobar to be astonished, prop. to be struck
with terror, of a sudden and startling alarm; but, like our
“astonish ” in popular use, often employed on comparative-
ly slight occasions, and even then with strengthening parti-
cles (as o¢dipa Mt. xix. 25, iweprepiooas Mk. vii. 87) ; #7 0-
ety to terrify, to agitate with fear; tp éuecp to tremble, pree
dominantly physical; ¢oBety to fear, the general term;
often used of a protracted state. Cf. Schmidt ch. 139.]
$oBytpov [or -Opov (so LTrWH; see WH. App.
p- 149)], -ov, ro, (poBéw), that which strikes terror, a
terror, (cause of) fright: Lk. xxi.11. (Plat. Ax. p. 867a.;
Hippoer., Leian., al., (“but always in plur.” (L. and S.)];
for sin, Is. xix. 17.) *
6Bos, -ov, 6, (PeBoua; like dopos, rpdpos, mévos, fr.
Dipe, ro¢uw, revowar) fr. Hom. down, Sept. for AY1, WM3,
656
poink
TDS (terror), MAM (id.); 1. fear, dread, terror,
in a subjective sense (ov8év dare poBos e pi mpo-
Sogia taév axd Aoyiopod BonOnydrwr, Sap. xvii. 11; mpoo-
Soxiav Aeyw KaKoU TovTO, cite PdBov, etre Séos Kadeire,
Plat. Protag. p. 358 d.): univ., 1 Jn. iv. 18; pdBos émi
twa winter, [Acts xix. 17 L. Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; éme
ninre, Lk. i. 12; Acts xix. 17[RGT WH; Rev. xi.1a
LT TrWH)]; éyevero, Lk. i. 65; Acts v. 5,11; AapBaves
tuvd, Lk. vii. 16 (Hom. Il. 11, 402); yiverat run, Acts ii. 43;
mAnoOnva poBov, Lk. v. 26; avvexerOa Poo, Lk. viii.
37; Exew poBov, 1 Tim. v. 20 (Hdt.8, 12); xarepydteaOai
tut Poor, 2 Co. vii. 115; PoBetcbat PoBov (see HoBéw, 2),
Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; with a gen. of the object added,
1 Pet. iii. 14 [so W. § 82, 2; al. subject. gen.]; dé pdBou,
for fear, Lk. xxi. 263; amd rod Pd. for the fear, with
which they were struck, Mt. xiv. 26; with a gen. of the
object added, Mt. xxviii. 4; els poor, unto (that ye
may) fear, Ro. viii. 15; pera PoBov, Mt. xxviii. 8; with
kat tpopov added, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12;
ev Poo k. €v Tpdp@ (see rpopos), 1 Co. ii. 3; Teva ev PoBo
oagev (Rec.), ekeav (LT Tr WH), with anxious heed
lest ye be defiled by the wickedness of those whom ye
are rescuing, Jude 23; plur. @dBor, feelings of fear,
fears, [W. 176 (166) ], 2 Co. vii. 5; poBos ruds, gen. of
the obj. (our fear of one): tev Iovdaiwr, Jn. vii. 13; xix.
38; xx. 19; Baoanopov, Rev. xviii. 10, 15; @avdrov, Heb.
ii. 15 (Xen. mem. 1,4, 7). In an objective sense,
that which strikes terror: poBos ayadav epywv, or more
correctly (with L T Tr WH) 7@ dya0o épyg, a terror to
(or for), Ro. xiii. 3. 2. reverence, respect, (for aue
thority, rank, dignity): Ro. xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 16
(15); 9 €v poB@ avaorpodn, behavior coupled with [cf.
ev, I. 5 e.] reverence for one’s husband, 1 Pet. iii. 2
poBos with a gen. of the obj.: rod xupiov, Acts ix. 31;
2 Co. v.11; Xpeorod, Eph. v. 21 [not Ree.]; deovd, Ro. iii.
18; 2 Co. vii. 1; [Eph. v. 21 Ree.]; @eod is omitted as
suggested by the context, 1 Pet.i.17; (often in the O. T.
mim OXY and oN MNP). [S¥N. see dedia, dos,
fin.; cf. poBéw.] *
SoiBn, -ns, 9, [lit. ‘bright’, ‘radiant’], Phebe or Phebe,
a deaconess of the church at Cenchree, near Corinth:
Ro. xvi. 1 [(see 8idkovos, 2 fin.) J."
Powlxn, -ns, 7, Phenice or Phenicia, in the apostolic
age a tract of the province of Syria, situated on the
coast of the Mediterranean between the river Eleu-
therus and the promontory of Carmel, some thirty miles
long and two or three broad, [but see BB. DD. s. v.]:
Acts xi. 193 xv. 33 xxi. 2.*
Powlkirwa, see Svpopoincca.
hotwé (or, as some prefer to write it, potm£; cf. W. §6,
lc.; [and reff. s. v. knpvé]), -txos, 6; I. as an ap-
pellative, a palm-tree (fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1A):
ra Baia rev dow. (see Baiov), the branches of the palm-
trees, Jn. xii. 13; but poimxes itself [A. V. palms] is put
for the branches in Rev. vii. 9 (2 Mace. x. 7; xiv. 4;
[so Aristot. magn. mor. § 34 p. 11964, 36]). IL.a
prop. name, Pheniz, a city and haven of Crete [B. D.
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Phenice]: Acts xxvii. 12.*
overs
hovevs, -éws, 6, (pdvos), fr. Hom. down, a murderer, a
homicide: Mt. xxii. 7; Acts vii. 52; xxviii. 4; 1 Pet.
iv. 15; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15; dvjp govevs [cf. dvyp, 3],
Acts iii. 14.*
[Syn.: doves any murderer,—the genus of which oudptos
the assassin is a species; while dv@pwroxrdvos (q. v-) has in
the N. T. a special emphasis. Trench § lxxxiii.] ‘
hovetw; fut. povetow; 1 aor. épdvevoa; (hovevs); fr.
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. mostly for ny,
also for 199, 137, etc.; to kill, slay, murder; absol. to
commit murder [A. V. kill]: Mt. v. 21; Jas. iv. 2; od (q. v.
6) govevoes, Mt. v. 21; xix. 18; Ro. xiii. 9, (Ex. xx.
15); py hovedons, Mk. x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; Jas. ii. 11.
twa: Mt. xxiii. 31, 35; Jas. v. 6.*
$6vos, -ov, 6, (BENQ; cf. dos, init.), fr. Hom. down,
murder, slaughter: Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts ix.
1; Ro.i. 29; év pdv@ paxaipas, Heb. xi. 37 (Ex. xvii. 13;
Num. xxi. 24; Deut. xiii. 15; xx.13); plur. @dvor, mur-
ders: Mt.xv.19; Mk. vii. 21; Gal. v. 21 [T WH om. L
Tr br. gov.]; Rev. ix. 21.*
hopéw, -&; fut. Popeow [1 Co. xv. 49 RG WH mrg.];
1 aor. épédpeca, (later forms for the earlier dopynow and
épdpnoa, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 315; Kiihner [and esp.
Veitch]s. v.; W. §13,3¢.; [B. 37 (32)]); (frequent. of
ep, and differing from it by denoting not the simple
and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or ha-
bitual bearing ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 585sq.; Hermann
on Soph. Electr. 715; [Trench § lviii.; Schmidt, ch. 105,
6]; accordingly, dyyeAinv hépew means ‘to carry a (sin-
gle) message’, Hdt. 3,53 and 122; dyyeAiny hopee, ‘ to
serve as (fill the oflice of) a messenger’, Hdt. 3, 34;
hence we are said qopeiy those things which we carry
about with us or wear, as e. g. our clothing); fr. Hom.
down; to bear constantly, wear: of clothing, garments,
armor, etc., Mt. xi. 8; Jn. xix. 5; Ro. xiii. 4 (on this
pass. see paxatpa, 2); 1 Co. xv. 49 [see above, and WH.
Intr. § 404]; Jas. ii. 3, (Sir. xi. 5; x1. 4).*
dépov, -ov, 7d, Lat. forum; see ”Ammuos.
dédpos, -ov, 6, (fr. depo, hence prop. 6 épera; cf.
oBos), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for D1) and (2 Esdr. iv. 20;
vi. 8; Neh. v. 4) for 77, tribute, esp. the annual tax
levied upon houses, lands, and persons [cf. Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritschl p. 387, 13; Grotius as quoted in Trench
§ evii. 7; see réAos, 2]: hdpov, pdpovs Si8dvat Kaicapr,
Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2, (1 Mace. viii. 4, 7); dmodiddvat, Ro.
xiii. 7; rede, Ro. xiii. 6.*
hopritw; pf. pass. ptep. reopricpevos; (pédpros, q. V-);
to place a burden upon, to load: oprifew twa popriov
(on the double acc. see B. 149 (130)), to load one with
a burden (of rites and unwarranted precepts), Lk. xi.
46 ; mecbopticpevos ‘heavy laden’ (with the burdensome
requirements of the Mosaic law and of tradition, and
with the consciousness of sin), Mt. xi. 28. (Ezek. xvi.
83; Hes. opp. 692; Leian. navig. 45; Anthol. 10, 5, 5;
eccles. writ.) [Comp.: dmo-poprigopa.]*
hopriov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of ddpros, but dimin. only in
form not in signif.; cf. Bim. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 440; [W.
§ 2.1. fin.]), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for xv, a burden,
657
ppevarataw
load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Grk.
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 645, 695 down), Acts xxvii. 10 GL
TTr WH. Metaph.: of burdensome rites, plur., [ Mt.
xxiii.4]; Lk. xi.46; of the obligations Christ lays upon
his followers, and styles a ‘burden’ by way of contrast
to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which
was most oppressive, Mt. xi. 30 (adrés pdvos divarat Ba-
ordgat Zhvavos dopriov, Diog. Laért. 7, 5, 4 (171); see
¢vyés, 1 b.); of faults, the consciousness of which op-
presses the soul, Gal. vi. 5 [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.
SYN. see dyxos, fin.]*
ddpros, -ov, 6, (fr. pépw), fr. Hom. down, a load, bur-
den: Acts xxvii. 10 Ree. [of a ship’s lading].*
Poprovvatos (or Povpr. KR G), -ov, 6, [a Lat. name,
‘happy ’], Fortunatus, a Christian of Corinth [cf. Bp.
Lehtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59 (65)]: 1 Co. xvi. 17."
payéddtov, -ov, 7d, (Lat. flagellum; B. 18 (16)), a
scourge: Jn. ii. 15.*
payedAda, -@: 1 aor. ptep. dpayeAhooas; [Lat. fla
gello]; to scourge: twa, Mt. xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15.
(Eccles. writ.) *
dpaypds, -ov, 6, (Ppdoaw to fence round), a hedge,
a fence: Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 23; trop. that
which separates, prevents two from coming together,
Eph. ii. 14 [A. V. partition], see peadroxov. (Sept. Sir.
xxxvi. 30 (27); Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plut., al.) *
pdt: 1 aor. impv. dpdcov; fr. Hom. down; to indi-
cate plainly, make known, declare, whether by gesture
(hovicat pev ovk exe, 7H SE xerpt Eppater, Hdt. 4, 113),
or by writing or speaking, or in other ways; fo explain:
Twi tiv mapaBoAnv, the thought shadowed forth in the
parable, Mt. xiii. 36 [RG T Tr txt.]; xv. 15. (Twice
in Sept. for 7.279, Job vi. 24; 17in, <ileS.)
dpdcow: 1 aor. éppaga; Pass., 2 aor. subj. 3 pers.
sing. dpay9; 2 fut. 3 pers. sing. ppaynoerat (2 Co. xi. 10
Reezez G LT Tr WH); [(allied w. Lat. farcio, Germ.
Berg, Eng. borough; cf. Vanicek p. 614); fr. Hom.
down]; to fence in, block up, stop up, close up, (ra ara
Tov pi) dxovaa, Prov. xxi. 133; thy 68dv ev oxohoWw, Hos,
ii. 6; mynv, Prov. xxv. 26; oropata Aeovrov, Heb. xi.
33): f Kabynors arn ov payncera, this glorying shall
not be stopped, i. e. no one shall get from my conduct
an argument to prove that it is empty, 2 Co. xi. 10 [on
the reading of Rec.” (oppayicerac) see oppayi¢a, init. ];
trop. to put to silence, [A. V. stop]: té oropa, Ro. iii. 19.*
péap, -aros, 74, fr. the Hom. hymn Cer. 99 and Hat. 6,
119 down; Sept. for 13 and (in 1S. xix. 22; 2S. iii, 26;
Jer. xviii. (xli.) 7,9) W (a pit, cistern), a well: Lk.
xiv. 5; Jn.iv.11sq.3 hp. ris dBvaaou, the pit of the abyss
(because the nether world is thought to increase in size
the further it extends from the surface of the earth and
so to resemble a cistern, the orifice of which is narrow),
Rev. ix. 1 sq.*
dpev-ararde, -; (ppevandrns, q. V-): Twd, to deceive
any one’s mind, Gal. vi. 3 [more is implied by this word
than by draray, for it brings out the idea of subjec-
tive fancies” (Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; cf. Green, Crit.
Notes ad loc.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
dpevarratns
dpevardrns, -ov, 6, (pony and amarn), a mind-deceiver ;
Vulg. seductor; [A. V. deceiver]: Tit.i.10. (Several
times in eccles. writ.) *
dphv, ppevos, H, plur. ppéves, fr. Hom. down, Sept. sev-
eral times in Prov. for 39; 1. the midriff or dia-
phragm, the parts about the heart. 2. the mind;
the faculty of perceiving and judging: also in the plur.;
as, 1 Co. xiv. 20.*
dplocw; very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to
be rough, Lat. horreo, horresco, i.e. 1. to bristle,
stiffen, stand up: éppiéav pov rpixes, Job iv. 15 Sept.;
with ép6ai added, Hes. opp. 510; ép0as... hpioae tpixas
(cogn. ace. of the part affected), Hes. scut. 391; with
cold, da 74 Yoxos, Plut. quaest. nat. 13, 2 p.915b. 2.
to shudder, to be struck with extreme fear, to be horrified :
absol., Jas. ii. 19; 4 Mace. xiv. 9; like the Lat. horreo,
horresco, constr. with an acc. of the object exciting
the fear, Hom. II. 11, 383, and often.*
povéw, -; impf., 1 pers. sing. éppdvovr, 2 pers. plur.
éppoveire ; fut. 2 pers. plur. dpovygere ; pres. pass. impv.
8 pers. sing. dpovetcOw, Phil. ii. 5 RG (see 3 below) ;
(ppv); fr. Hom. down; 1. to have understanding,
be wise, (Hom., al.). 2. to feel, to think: absol. as
wyrwos eppdvour, 1 Co. xiii.115 to have an opinion of one’s
self, think of one’s self: pn imepppovety map’ 6 Set ppoveiv,
Ro. xii. 3 (pei€ov ppoveiv 7) kar’ avdpa, Soph. Ant. 768) ;
dpoveiv eis td cwdpovetv, [R. V. so to think as to think
soberly], to be modest, not to let one’s opinion (though
just) of himself exceed the bounds of modesty, ibid. ;
inép 6 yéyparrat, in one’s opinion of one’s self to go be-
yond the standard prescribed in Scripture, 1 Co. iv. 6
RG [cf. B. 394 sq. (838); W. § 64,4]. with an acc. of
the thing, to think, judge: & dpoveis, what your opinion
is, Acts xxviii. 22; ovdév dAdo, Gal. v. 105 ri érépas,
Phil. iii. 15; several persons are said dpoveiv 76 aird,
to be of the same mind, i.e. to agree together, cherish
the same views, be harmonious: 2 Co. xiii. 11; Phil. ii.
2; iii. 16 Rec.; iv. 2; with év ddAjAas added, Ro. xv. 5;
also rd €v qpovovvres, having that one mind, Phil. ii. 2
(the phrase 76 év having reference to 7d adrd; see Meyer
{but cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc.) ; ri trép twos, to hold some
opinion, judge, think, concerning one, Phil. i. 7; 75 adrd
€is adAnAovs, to be of the same mind towards one anoth-
er, Ro. xii. 16. 3. to direct one’s mind to a thing, to
seck or strive for; ta twos, to seek one’s interests or ad-
vantage; to be of one’s party, side with him, (in public
affairs, Add. to Esth. viii. 5; 1 Mace. x. 20; Dio Cass.
51, 4; Hdian. 8, 6, 14 (6); for other exx. fr. Xen. [or
Hat. 1, 162 fin ] down see Passow s. v. II.; [L. and S.
Il. 2 ¢.]; hence) ra rod Geos and ra r&v dvOp., to be in-
tent on promoting what God wills (spec. his saving pur-
poses), and what pleases men, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33;
Ta THs GapKds and Ta Tov mvevpatos (cdpé [q. Vv. 4] and
mvevpa | q. v. p. 522") being personified), to pursue those
things which gratify the flesh, ... the Holy Spirit, Ro.
viii. 5, cf. 6. ra emiyeca, Phil. iii. 19; ra &vw and ra em
Tys yns, Col. iii. 2, (dvOpamwa, Ovnra, Aristot. eth. Nic.
10, 7 p. 1177, 32) ; rodro dpoveire (pres. impv.) ev vpir,
658
gpvacce
[R. V. have this mind in you], be intent within yourselves
on this, Phil. ii.5 LT Tr WH; pass. @poveirai re €v rem,
some habit of thought (expressed by deeds) exists in
one, Phil. ii.5 RG [A. V. let this mind be in you]; iynrd
(see dynAds, b.). poveiv jucpar, to regard a day, observe
it as sacred, Ro. xiv. 6; gp. imép tevos, to take thought,
have a care, for one, Phil. iv. 10 [see dvaOddAo, fin.
Comp. : xata-, mupa-, wept-, imep- ppovew. | *
povnpa, -ros, 7d, (Ppovew, q. V-), what one has in mind,
the thoughts and purposes, [A. V. mind]: Ro. viii. 6 sq.
27. (Hesych. dpdvnpa: BovAnpa, Gé\nna. In various
other senses also fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
povycis, -ews, 7, (ppovew), understanding : joined with
copia (as 1 K. iv. 25 (29); Dan. i. 17 Theod.; 9 copia
avipt tikre. ppdvycw, Prov. x. 23), Eph. i. 8 [A. V. pru-
dence; see godia, fin.]; spec. knowledge and holy love
of the will of God A. V. wisdom], Lk. i. 17 (Sap. iii. 15;
Sept. for 73, 732A, 793M; used variously by Grk.
writ. fr. Soph. and Eur. down).*
povipos, -ov, (ppovew) ; a. intelligent, wise [so
A.V. uniformly]: 1 Co. x. 15; opp. to pwpds, 1 Co. iv.
10; opp. to d&ppwv, 2 Co. xi. 19; hpdvipos map’ éauta,
one who deems himself wise, [A. V. wise in one’s own
conceits], Ro. xi. 255 xii. 16, (Prov. iii. 7). b. pru-
dent, i.e. mindful of one’s interests: Mt.x.16; xxiv. 45;
LK. xii. 42; opp. to papos, Mt. vii. 24 (cf. 26); xxv. 2, 4,
8sq. compar. dpomparepos, Lk. xvi. 8. (From Soph.,
Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for {2}, 03m, ,'32.) [SyN.
see gods, fin.]*
dpovipws, adv., prudently, wisely: Lk. xvi. 8. [From
Arstph. down.]*
dpovtitw; (pporris [‘ thought’, fr. ppovew]); fr. Theogn.
and Hdt. down; to think, to be careful; to be thoughtful
or anxious: foll. by an inf. Tit. iii. 8.*
povpéw, -: impf. éppovpovy; fut. povpyow; Pass.,
pres. ptcp. povpovpevos; impf. eppovpovuny; (ppoupés,
contr. fr. xpoopds fr. mpoopaw to see before, foresee) ; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 1. to guard, protect by a
military guard, either in order to prevent hostile inva-
sion, or to keep the inhabitants of a besieged city from
flight; (often so fr. Thuc.down): tv mdhuy, i.e. not he
surrounded the city with soldiers, but by posting sentries
he kept the gates quarded, 2 Co. xi. 32 [R.V. guarded], cf.
Acts ix. 24. 2. metaph.: rivd, pass., td vdpov, under
the control of the Mosaic law, that we might not escape
from its power, with ouvykexAewpevor [ouv(y)KActdpevoe
LT Tr WH] added, Gal. iii. 23 [R. V. kept in ward; cf.
Plut. de defect. orac. § 29; Sap. xvii. 15]; to protect by
guarding (Soph. O. R. 1479), to keep: ras xapdias év
Xpwora, i. e. in close connection with Christ, Phil. iv. 73
riva eis 7, by watching and guarding to preserve one for
the attainment of something [R. V. guarded unto ete.],
pass. 1 Pet. i. 5.*
dpvdccw: 1 aor. 8 pers. plur. éppvatav; (everywhere
in prof. auth. and also in Mace. as a depon. mid. dpudeao-
par [W. 24]); to neigh, stamp the ground, prance, snort;
to be high-spirited: prop. of horses (Anthol. 5, 202 45
Callim. lav. Pallad. vs. 2); of men, to take on lofty airs,
ppuyavov
behave arrogantly, (2 Macc. vii. 834; 8 Mace. ii. 2; An-
thol., Diod., Plut., al.; [ef. Wetstein on Acts as below]);
active for W, to be tumultuous, to rage, Acts iv. 25 fr.
_ Ps. ii. 1.*
pptyavov, -ov, 76, (fr. ppvyw or ppvocw, ppirra, to dry,
parch; cf. Lat. frigo, frux, fructus), a dry stick, dry
twig; generally in the plur. this word comprises all dry
sticks, brush-wood, fire-wood, or similar material used
as fuel: Acts xxviii. 3. (Hdt. 4,62; Arstph., Thuc.,
Xen., Philo, al.; Sept. for wp straw, stubble, Is. xl. 24;
xli. 2; xlvii. 14; for on bramble, Job xxx. 7.) *
Ppvyla, -as, 7, Phrygia, a region of Asia Minor,
bounded by Bithynia, Galatia, Lycaonia, Pisidia, Lydia,
and Mysia. ‘Those of its cities mentioned in the N. T.
are Laodicea, Hierapolis, and Colossze: Acts ii. 10; xvi.
6; xviii. 23. [B.D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col., Intr.,
diss. i. esp. pp. 17 sq. 23 sq. | *
Piyehdos and (LTTr WH [see WH. App. p. 159)
Piyedos, -ov, 6, Phygellus [better Phyg’-elus], a Christian,
who was with Paul at Rome and deserted him [see B.D.
s. v. and the Comm.]: 2 Tim. i. 15.*
dvyn, -js, 7, (pevye), fr. Hom. down, flight: Mt. xxiv.
20; Mk. xiii. 18 Rec.*
pvdaky, -7s, 7, (pvAdoow), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
NyNw, Ww, 71D (a prison), 873 (enclosure, con-
finement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense,
a watching, keeping watch: puvAdooew dvdakas, to keep
watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6,
10, ete.; Plat. legg. 6 p. 758 d. down; [cf. @udakas exer,
ete. fr. Hom. (Il. 9, 1 ete.) on]; often also in Sept. for
nw WY). b. like the Lat. custodia and more
freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Har-
pers’ Lat. Dict.] s.v.), iq. persons keeping watch, a
guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. ward] (and
very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the
place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10;
xxv. 36, [39], 43 sq.; Mk. vi. 17, 27 (28); Lk. iii. 20;
Medel? exxit33 st Actsiv. 19, 225) vill..3 5) xii. 5 eq. Adis
avi. 27,40; xxii.4; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in
Heb. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment]; 2 Co. xi. 23; 1 Pet. iii.
19; Rev. xviii. 2 [twice; rendered in A. V. hold and
cage (R. V. hold)]; xx. 7, (Hdt. 3, 152; Thue. 3, 34;
Plut., al.; Sept. for 1700, x03 ma, and xbyan EN
wD) 5 (piNlew or mbes ria ets (r.) Gudakny or ev
(rH) pudacy: Mt. v. 25; xiv. 3 [RG, al. dréOero]; xviii.
80; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19, 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts v. 25;
viii. 3 [here mapadiddvae eis .]; xii. 4; xvi. 23 sq. 37;
Rev. ii. 10. d. of the time (of night) during which
guard was kept, a watch i.e. the period of time during
which a part of the guard were on duty, and at the end
of which others relieved them. As the earlier Greeks
divided the night commonly into three parts [see L. and
S. s. v. I. 4], so, previously to the exile, the Israelites
also had three watches in a night; subsequently, how-
ever, after they became subject to Rome, they adopted
the Roman custom of dividing the night into four
watches: Mt. xxiv. 43; év t7 Sevrépa, rpirn, Lk. xii.
88; reraprn, Mt. xiv. 25; Mk. vi. 48. Cf. Win. RWB.
659
purdccw
s.v. Nachtwache; [McC. and S. s. v. Night-watch; B.D.
s. v. Watches of Night].*
pvdraxitw; (pudraxy [or piAat]); to cast into prison,
imprison: Acts xxii. 19. (Sap. xviii. 4; eccles. and
Byzant. writ.) *
vAdakrrptoy, -ov, 7d, (neut. of the adj. puAakrypuos, -a,
-ov, fr. pudaxrnp [‘ poetic for PvAaé”]) ; 1. a forti-
Jjied place provided with a garrison, a station for a guard
or garrison. 2. a preservative or safeguard, an ame
ulet: Dem. p. 71, 24; Diosc. 5, 158 (159) sq., often in
Plut. The Jews gave the name of dudakrnpia (in the
Talm. 77 *han prayer-illets, Germ. Gebetsriemen; [ef. O. T.
‘frontlets”]) to small strips of parchment on which were
written the foll. pass. from the law of Moses, Ex. xiii.
1-10, 11-16; Deut. vi. 4-9; xi. 18-21, and which, en-
closed in little cases, they were accustomed when en-
gaged in prayer to wear fastened by a leather strap to
the forehead and to the left arm over against the heart,
in order that they might thus be solemnly reminded of
the duty of keeping the commands of God in the head and
in the heart, acc. to the directions given in Ex. xiii. 16;
Deut. vi. 8; xi. 18; (cf. Joseph. antt. 4, 8,13). These
scrolls were thought to have power, like amulets, to
avert various evils and to drive away demons (Targ. on
Cant. viii. 3); hence their Greek name. [But see Gins-
burg in Alex.’s Kitto s. vv. Phylacteries (sub fin.) and
Mezuza.] The Pharisees were accustomed ra dvAa-
KTnpta avtev mAaTvvev, to widen, make broad, their phylace
teries, that they might render them more conspicuous
and show themselves to be more eager than the majority
to be reminded of God’s law: Mt. xxiii. 5. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Phylakterien; Leyrer in Herzog xi. 639
sqq-; Kneucker in Schenkel i. 601 sq.; Delitzsch in Riehm
270 sq.; [Edersheim, Jewish Social Life ete., p. 220
sqq-; B. D.s.v. Frontlets; esp. Hamburger, Real-Encycl.
s. v. Tephillin, vol. ii. p. 1203 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.’s
Kitto u. s.].*
pvdak, -axos, 6, (Pvddoow), a guard, keeper: Acts v.
23; xii. 6,19. (From Hom. down; Sept. for 7.) *
urdoow; fut. @uddéw; 1 aor. épidAata; Mid., pres.
gvAdocopat; 1 aor. épvdagduny; pres. pass. vdAdoocopat ;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. times too many to count for 1nw,
occasionally for 7¥3, [ete.]; 1. Act. to guard (Lat.
custodio); i. e. a. to watch, to keep watch: with
gvdakny added, Lk. ii. 8 (see vAakn, a.). b. to
guard or watch, have an eye upon: twa, one, lest he es-
cape, Acts xii. 45 xxviii. 16; pass., Acts xxiii. 35; Lk.
viii. 29; ri, any thing, lest it be carried off: ra ipdria,
Acts xxii. 20. c. to guard a person (or thing) that
he may remain safe, i.e. lest he suffer violence, be de-
spoiled, ete., i. q. to protect: tyv aidny, Lk. xi. 213 and
twos, to protect one from a pers. or thing, 2 Th. iii. $
[see rovnpds, p. 531°], (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,7; Ps. exl. (exli.)
9; cf. B. § 147, 3; [W. 223 (209)])53 trav mapaOneny (or
mapaxataOyxnv), to keep from being snatched away, pre-
serve safe and unimpaired, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14;
with the addition of ets ria juepar, i.e. that it may be
forthcoming on that day, 2 Tim.i.12; to guard from
pury
being lost or perishing, i. e. (with the predominant idea
of a happy issue), to preserve: teva, Jn. xvii. 12 (where
é@vaAaéa is explained by the foll. ovdeis €£ avrav amadeTo
[cf. rnpéw, fin.]); 2 Pet. ii. 5; teva with a pred. accus.
Jude 24; dudd&ee (opp. to dmohéoer) Tr. uxny eis Cony
aidv. i. e. will keep it with the result that he will have
life eternal, Jn. xii. 253 éavrdv dad t. to guard one’s self
from a thing, 1 Jn. v. 21 [where cf. Westcott]. d.
to guard, i.e. to care for, take care not to violate; to ob-
serve: rov vopov, Acts vii. 538; xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13, (Lev.
xix. 37, ete.; Soph. Trach. 616; al.; vopous, Xen. Hell.
1, 7, 30; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 484b.; polit. p. 292 a.); sin-
gle precepts of the Mosaic law, Mt. xix. 20 LT Tr WH;
Mk. x. 20 Lehm.; Lk. xviii. 21 LT Tr txt. WH; [ra
Sixaropata Tov vdpou, Ro. ii. 26]; rév Adéyov Tov Geov, Lk.
xi. 28; ra pnara of Jesus, Jn. xii. 47 LT Tr WH;
apostolic directions, Acts xvi. 4; 1 Tim. v. 21. 2
Mid. a. to observe for one’s self something to es-
cape, i.e. to avoid, shun, flee from: by ause com. in Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, with an ace. of the
obj., ri, Acts xxi. 25 [A. V. keep themselves from]; twa,
2 Tim. iv. 15 [A.V. be thou ware of]; am6 twos, to keep
one’s self from a thing, Lk. xii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 8, 93
[Hell. 7, 2,10]); ta pn, 2 Pet. iii. 17 (Grws py, Xen.
mem. 1, 2, 37; other exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2360"; [L.
and S. s. v. C. IT.]). b. by a usage foreign to Grk.
writ. but very freq. in the Sept. (cf. W. 253 (238)), to
guard for one’s self (i. e. for one’s safety’s sake) so as
not to violate, i.e. to keep, observe: taira mavra (the pre-
cepts of the Mosaic law), Mt. xix. 20 RG; Mk. x. 20
RGTTr WH; Lk. xviii. 21 RG Tr mrg., (Ex. xii. 17;
Lev. xviii. 4; xx. 8, 22; xxvi. 3, and many other pass.).
[Comp.: d:a-puvddcow. SyYN. see rnpé, fin.] *
dvd4, -fs, 9, (fr. pio), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; 1.
a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one
of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for 70
and vlwv; also for NNDwvN, see warpia, 2): Heb. vii. 13
sq.; with the addition of the genitives ’Aojp, Benapiy,
etc., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 213; Ro. xi.13 Phil. iii. 5; Rev.
v. 5; vii. 5-8; Sadexa . rod "Iopand, Mt. xix. 28; Lk.
xxii. 80; Jas 1.1; Rev. xxi. 12; [aoa gvAq vidv Iopana,
Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv.
30; Rev. [i. 7]; v.95 vii. 9; [xi.9]5 xiii. 7; xiv. 6.*
vddov, -ov, Td, (Pv@), a leaf: Mt. xxi. 19; xxiv. 32;
Mk. xi. 13; xiii. 28; Rev. xxii. 2. [From Hom. down.]*
ipapa, -ros, 76, (hupdaw to mix), any substance mixed
with water and kneaded ; amass, lump: of dough (Num.
xv. 20 sq.; [plur., Ex. viii. 3; xii. 34]; Aristot. probl. 21,
18 p. 929%, 25; Plut. quaest. conv. 6, 7, 2, 15 p. 698 e.),
1 Co. v. 6 sq.; Gal. v. 9, (on the meaning of which pass.
see (iun); Ro. xi. 16; of clay (Plut. praee. ger. reip. 15,
4p. 811c.), Ro. ix. 21 [ef. B. § 140, 3 Rem.].*
gvoikds, -7, -dv, (hvors), natural; i.e. a. pro-
duced by nature, inborn, (very often so fr. Xen. [mem.
8, 9, 1] down). b. agreeable to nature, (Dion. Hal.,
Plut., al.) : opp. to rapa diaw, Ro. i. 26, [27]. Cc.
governed by (the instincts of) nature: {oa yeyevynpéva
guard, 2 Pet. ii. 12 [R. V. Zorn mere animals].*
660
pious
ovoikds, adv., in a natural manner, by nature, under
the guidance of nature: by the aid of the bodily senses,
Jude 10. [(Aristot., Philo, al.)]*
dvoid, -; Pass., pres. Puovoipat; pt. ptep. mepvorwpe __
vos; 1 aor. epvatwOny 5 1. (fr. dows), to make nate
ural, to cause a thing to pass into nature, (Clem. Alex.;
Simplic.). 2. i. G. Pvodw, puodw (fr. Pica a pair
of bellows), to inflate, blow up, blow out, to cause to swell
up; trop. to puff up, make proud: 1 Co. viii. 1; pass. to
be puffed up, to bear one’s self loftily, be proud: 1 Co. iv.
18sq.; Vv. 25 xiii. 45 dd rod woos THs caps adtod, Col.
ii. 18; émép twos (see tép, I. 2 [and cf. 5]) card twos,
1 Co. iv. 6 [see iva, II. 1d.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)*
picts, -ews, 4, (fr. pio, q. v., as Lat. natura fr. nascor,
ingenium fr. geno, gigno), fr. Hom. Od. 10, 303 down;
nature, i.e. a. the nature of things, the force, laws,
order, of nature; as opp. to what is monstrous, abnor-
mal, perverse: 6, 9, Td mapa vow, that which is con-
trary to nature’s laws, against nature, Ro. i. 26 (oi mapa
vow rH ’Adpodity xpopevor, Athen. 13 p. 605; 6 made-
paoris ... Tv mapa piow Sovnv dSidker, Philo de spec.
lege. i.§ 7); as opposed to what has been produced by the
art of man: of cara diow kdddot, the natural branches,
i.e. branches by the operation of nature, Ro. xi. 21, 24
[W. 193 (182)], contrasted with of éyxevrpurbévres mapas
gvow, contrary to the plan of nature, cf. 24; 9 Kara
iow dypieAaos, ibid.; as opposed to what is imagi-
nary or fictitious: of py pice dvres Oeol, who are
gods not by nature, but acc. to the mistaken opinion of
the Gentiles (Aeydpevor Geol, 1 Co. viii. 5), Gal. iv. 8;
nature, i.e. natural sense, native conviction or knowledge,
as opp. to what is learned by instruction and accome
plished by training or prescribed by law: 9 gvots (i.e.
the native sense of propriety) &Sdoxer tt, 1 Co. xi. 143
gicet roveiv Ta Tod vépov, natura magistra, guided by their
natural sense of what is right and proper, Ro.ii.14. db.
birth, physical origin: jpeis pices "lovdaior, we so far as
our origin is considered, i.e. by birth, are Jews, Gal. ii.
15 (pice vewtepos, Soph. O. C. 1295; rd pev pices
martpis, Tov Sé vdpe@ ToAiThy énenoinrro, Isocr. Evagr. 21;
diaer BapBapoe dvres, vd 5é°ENAnves, Plat. Menex.
p- 245 d.3 ef. Grimm on Sap. xiii. 1); 9 ék @ioews dxpo-
Bvoria, who by birth is uncircumcised or a Gentile (opp.
to one who, although circumcised, has made himself a
Gentile by his iniquity and spiritual perversity), Ro. ii.
27 c. a mode of feeling and acting which by long
habit has become nature: jpev ioe: réxva dpyns, by (our
depraved) nature we were exposed to the wrath of God,
Eph. ii, 3 (this meaning is evident from the preceding
context, and stands in contrast with the change of
heart and life wrought through Christ by the blessing
of divine grace; hice: mpds Tras Ko\doets emetkds Exovow
of bapicaior, Joseph. antt. 13,10,6. [Others (see Meyer)
would lay more stress here upon the constitution in
which this ‘habitual course of evil’ has its origin, wheth-
er that constitution be regarded (with some) as already
developed at birth, or (better) as undeveloped; cf.
Aristot. pol. 1, 2 p. 1252%, 32 sq. olov exaordy eort THs
duotwos
yevéoews Teheabecions, taitny papéev thy vow eivar éxd-
arov, dorep avOpwrov, etc. ; see the exx. in Bonitz’s index
s.v. Cf. W. § 31, 6a.]). a. the sum of innate prop-
erties and powers by which one person differs from oth-
ers, distinctive native peculiarities, natural character-
istics: @vows Onpioy (the natural strength, ferocity and
intractability of beasts [A. V. (every) kind of beasts]), 4
gvais 9 avOpwrivn (the ability, art, skill, of men, the
qualities which are proper to their nature and necessa-
rily emanate from it), Jas. ili. 7 [ef. W. § 31, 10]; @eias
Kowavot diaews, (the holiness distinctive of the divine
nature is specially referred to), 2 Pet. i.4 CApevape...
Geias SoxovvTt perecynkevar @iaews Kata Te codiav kai
mpdyvacw Tav écopever, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 26).*
uolwos, -ews, 7, (pvoiwde, q-v-), (Vulg. inflatio), a
puffing up of soul, loftiness, pride: plur.[A.V. swellings |
2 Co. xii. 20. (Eecles. writ.) *
hurela, -as, 7, (pureva, q. V-); 1. a planting
(Xen., Theophr., Plut., Ael., al.). 2. thing planted,
a plant, (i. q. purevpa): Mt. xv. 13, [Athen. 5 p. 207 d.;
Boeckh, Corp. inserr. No. 4521 vol. iii. p. 240].*
outed; impf. épirevov; 1 aor. epirevoa; pf. pass.
ptep. medurevpévos; 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. dv-
tevOnt ; (purédv) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for uj, several
times for 9Nw; to plant: absol., Lk. xvii. 28; 1 Co. iii.
6-8; gureiav, Mt. xv. 13; dureddva, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk.
xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9; 1 Co. ix. 7; ri ev with a dat. of the
place, pass., Lk. xiii. 6; xvii. 6.*
vo; 2 aor. pass. (epinv) ptcp. @vev (for which the
Attic writ. more com. use the 2 aor. act. épuy with the
ptcp. dus, div, in a pass. or intrans. sense; cf. Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 321; Kriiger § 40 s.v.; Kiihner § 343
s.v.; [Veitch s.v.]; W. § 15s. v.; [B. 68 (60)]); [ef.
Lat. fui, fore, etc.; Curtius § 417]; fr. Hom.down; 1.
to beget, bring forth, produce; pass. to be born, to spring
up, to grow: LK. viii. 6, 8 ; 2. intrans. to shoot forth,
spring up: Heb. xii. 15 [W. 252 (237). Comp.: ék-,
oup-pvw. | *
dwreds, -ov, 6, @ lurking-hole, burrow; a lair: of ani-
mals, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. (Aristot., Ael., Plut.,
Geop., al.) *
dovéw, -; impf. 8 pers. sing. paver; fut. povyow; 1
aor. €povqca; 1 aor. inf. pass. PwvyOjvat; (peri) ; 1.
as fr. Hom. down, intrans. to sound, emit a sound, to
speak: of a cock, to crow, Mt. xxvi. 34, 74sq.; Mk. xiv.
30, 68 [L br. WH om. the cl. (see the latter’s App. ad
loc.)], 72; Lk. xxii. 34, 60 sq.; Jn. xiii. 38; xviii. 27, (of
the cries of other animals, Is. xxxviii. 14; Jer. xvii. 11;
Zeph. ii. 14 ; rarely so in prof. auth. as [ Aristot. (see L.
and S. s. v. I. 2)], Aesop. fab. 36 [225 ed. Halm]);_ of
men, to cry, cry out, cry aloud, speak with a loud voice :
foll. by the words uttered, Lk. viii. 8; with @ovy peyady
added [(cf. W. § 32, 2 fin.), Mk. i. 26 T Tr WH]; Acts
xvi. 28; éavyoe Acywr, Lk. viii. 54; hovgoas etrev, Lk.
xvi. 24; govncas povy pey. etrev, Lk. xxiii. 46; epav.
xpavyn [L T Tr WH avi] pey. Aéyov, Rev. xiv. 18;
\povncavres éruvEavovre (WH txt. eridovro), Acts x.
18]. 2. as fr. [Hom. Od. 24, 535] Soph. down,
661
povn
trans. a. to call, call to one’s self: rwd, — either
by one’s own voice, Mt. xx. 32; xxvii. 47; Mk. ix. 35;
x. 49 [ef. B.§ 141, 5 fin.]; xv. 35; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; i. 95
iv. 16; x.3 LT Tr WH;; xi. 28°; xviii. 38; Acts ix. 41 :
x. 7;—or through another; to send for, summon: Mk.
iil. 31 RG; Lk. xvi. 2; Jn. ix. 18, 24; xi. 28>; etre hovn:
Ojva adt@ rovs krd. Lk. xix. 15; ov. teva ex, with a gen
of the place, to call out of (i.e. bid one to quit a place
and come to one), Jn. xii. 17. b. to invite: Lk. xiv
12. c. i. q. to address, accost, call by a name: tid,
foll. by a nom. of the title (see W. § 29,1; [B. §131, 8]),
Jn. xiii. 13. [Comp.: dva-, ém-, xpoo-, cup-povéw.] *
povn, -7s, }, (Paw to shine, make clear, [ef. Curtius
§ 407; L. and S. s. v. ¢do]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
AP 5 1. a sound, tone: of inanimate things, as of
musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH give it
only in mrg.; ef. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; Rev.
xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3; xxiv. 8; Sir. 1.16; 1 Mace.
v. 31; dpyaver, Plat. de rep. 3 p. 397 a.; oupiyyov, Eur.
Tro. 127; Wadrnpiov kai addod, Plut. mor. p. 713 ¢.); of
wind, Jn. iii. 8; Acts ii. 6; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1; xiv.
2; xix. 6, cf. iv. 53 villi. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; noise, of a
millstone, Rev. xviii. 22; of a thronging multitude, Rev.
xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek.
i. 24), ibid.; of waters (Ezek. i. 24; 4 Esdr. vi. 17), Rev.
i. 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6; also with the gen. of a thing im-
plying speech, the sound [A.V. voice]: rod domacpod,
Lk. i. 445 pnudrov, Heb. xii. 19; the ery (of men), davy
peyaAn, a loud cry, Mk. xv. 37; the clamor of men mak-
ing a noisy demand, Lk. xxiii. 23, ef. Acts xix. 34;
absol. a cry i.e. wailing, lamentation, Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer.
XXXVili. (xxxi.) 15). 2. a voice, i.e. the sound of
uttered words: dade havas, Rev. x. 3; those who begin
to ery out or call to any one are said tiv @orqv alpen,
Lk. xvii. 13; mpds twa, Acts iv. 24; horyv émaipev, Lk.
xi. 27; Acts ti. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22; [@. xpd¢ew (or ék-
kpd¢ew), Acts xxiv. 21 (cf. B. § 143,11)]; @av7 peyddy
added to verbs: to Aéyew, Rev. v.12: viii. 13; (ev dov9
pey- Rev. xiv. 7 [Lchm. om. év; xiv. 9]); to eizeiv, Lk.
viii. 28; Acts xiv.10; to @avar, Acts xxvi. 24; to aivety rov
6edv, Lk. xix. 37; with verbs of crying out, shout-
ing: dvaBoay, Mt. xxvii. 46 [RG@Ltxt.T]; Boa, [Mt.
xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH]; Mk. xv.34; Actsviii.7; poveiy,
[Mk.i, 26 T Tr WH]; Lk. xxiii. 46; Acts xvi. 28; [Rev.
xiv. 18 LT Tr WH); dvaporeiv, Lk.i. 42(RGLTr mrg.];
knpvacew (ev pov. pey.), Rev. v. 2 [Rec. om. ev]; Kpavyd-
ew, Jn. xi. 43; dvaxpdagew, Lk. iv. 33; xpdgew, Mt. xxvii.
50; Mk.i. 26[RGL]; v. 7; Acts vii. 57, 60; Rev. vi. 10;
vii. 2, 10; x. 3; [xvili. 2 Rec.]; xix. 17; cpa. ev hav. pey-
Rey. xiv. 15; év icxupa dovy, Rev. xviii. 2 [GL T Tr
WHY]; pera avis pey. Sofdfew rov 0. Lk. xvii. 15; of
declarations from heaven, heard though no speaker is
seen: (Sov wri A€yovea, Mt. iii. 17; xvii. 5; epyerar
gov, Mk. ix. 7[ RGU Tr txt.]; Jn. xii. 28; eépyerar,
Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; yiverac povn, Mk. i. 11[Tom. WH
br. eyév.; ix. 7 T Tr mrg. WH]; Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35 sq.;
Jn. xii. 30; [Acts vii. 31 (where Rec. adds mpés adrév) ];
mpés twa, Acts x. 13, 15; [paris évexOeions ait, 2 Pet
pas
i. 17]; éyévovto wvat peyddat, Rev. xi. 15; [dmexpidn
govy, Acts xi.9]; dxovew Povny (cf. B. §§ 132,17; 144,
16 a.], Acts ix. 4; xxii. 9, [14]; xxvi. 14; 2 Pet. i. 18;
Rev. i. 10; iv.1[B. § 129, 8b.]; vi. 6 [here L T TrWH
insert &s], 7 [here G om. Tr br. gav.]; ix. 13 [B. u.s.];
x. 4,8; xi.12(/RGLWHarg.]; xii. 10; xiv. 2; xviii.
4; xix. 63 dxovew dovas [B. § 132,17; W.§30, 7 d.],
Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 7; Rev. [xi. 12 T Tr WH txt.];
xiv. 13; xvi. 1; xxi.33 Bdrérew thy hor. i.e. the one
who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12. evn with a gen. of
the subject: Bodvros, Mt. iti. 3; Mk.i.3; Lk. iii. 4; Jn.
i. 23, all fr. Is. xl. 3; [dyyéAov orav peddy cadmifew, Rev.
x. 7]; 9d. twos, the natural (familiar) sound of one’s
voice, Acts xii. 14; Rev. iii. 20, (Cant. v. 2); the man-
ner of speaking, as a shepherd’s (cry or call to his
sheep), Jn. x. 3-5; to such ‘voices’ Jesus likens his
precepts approved (‘heard’) by all the good, Jn. x. 16,
27, cf. xviii. 37; dvOpémrov, human utterance, 2 Pet. ii.
16; ¢. twos, the voice of a clamorous person, Mt. xii. 19
(Is. xlii. 2); of one exulting, jubilant, Jn. iii. 29; Rev.
XViil. 23; dyyéA@v woAAGy, singing the praises of Christ,
Rey. v. 11 sq.; the sound of the words of Christ as he
shall recall the dead to life (the Resurrection-cry), Jn.
Vv. 25, 28; dpxayyédov, the awakening shout of the arch-
angel, the leader of the angelic host, 1 Th. iv.16; rod
@ceov, of God,—teaching, admonishing, whether in the
O. T. Scriptures or in the gospel, Jn. v. 37; Heb. iii. 7,
15; iv. 7; shaking the earth, Heb. xii. 26; the speech,
discourse, Ocov ovk avOp. Acts xii. 22; [ras havas trav
mpopnrer, the predictions (‘read every sabbath’), Acts
xiii. 27] ; dAAagéat ~Hv d. (see adddoow), Gal.iv. 20. 3.
speech, i.e. a language, tongue: 1 Co. xiv.10 sq. (Joseph.
ce. Ap. 1, 1; [1, 9, 2; 1, 14, 1,ete.]; Ceb. tab. 33; Ael.
v. h. 12, 48; Diog. Laért. 8, 3; for other exx. fr. Grk.
writ. see Passow s. v. p. 2377; [L. and S. s. v. II. 3];
Gen. xi. 1; Deut. xxviii. 49; 77 é8paids hava, 4 Mace.
sii. 73 1H matpio pov7, 2 Mace. vii. 8, 21, 27). [SyYN.
ef. Schmidt ch. 1 §27; Trench § lxxxix.; and see Aadéa,
ad init.]*
4s, pards, rd, (contr. fr. ddos, fr. daw to shine), fr.
Hom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form ¢dos) down,
Hebr. Wx, light (opp. to rd oxdros, 9 oKoria) ; 1.
prop. a. univ.: 6 Oeds 6 eirav ex oxdrous pas Adupat,
2 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3); AevKa Os TO has, Mt. xvii. 2;
vepedn pords [Grsb. txt.] i. e. consisting of light, i. q.
gorewn in RLT Tr WH, Mt. xvii. 5; 75 pads rod Kédcpov,
of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; 7d has ovk Earw ev aira, the light
(i.e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he
does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi.
10; the light emitted bya lamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33 LTr
txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels
when they appear on earth: hence dyyeAos dards, 2 Co.
xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear,
Acts xii. 7; a light of thiskind shone around Paul when
he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [9], 11[W. 371
(348)]; with the addition of otpavdOev, Acts xxvi. 13;
of dé [or ee] rod otpavod, Acts ix. 3. b. by meton.
anything emitting light: a heavenly luminary (or star),
662
pas
plur. Jas. i. 17 [see warjp, 3 a.]; fire, because it is light
and gives light: Lk. xxii. 56; OeppaiverOat mpos rd pas,
Mk. xiv. 54, (1 Mace. xii. 29; Xen. Hell. 6, 2,29; Cyr.
7, 5, 27); a lamp or torch: plur. péra, Acts xvi. 29 (as
execv, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 8; in plur. often in Plut.). Cc.
light i.e. brightness (Lat. splendor), [see a. above]:
ndiov, Rev. xxii. 5; of a lamp, Jn. vy. 35 (where it sym-
bolizes his rank, influence, worth, mighty deeds) ; with
the addition of Avyvou, Rev. xviii. 23 (Jer. xxv. 10); of
the divine Shechinah (see 60&a, III. 1), Rev. xxi. 24 (Ps.
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 16; Is. Ix. 1, 19 sq.). 2. as is
often used in poetic discourse, in metaphor, and in
parable ; a. The extremely delicate, subtile, pure,
brilliant quality of light has led to the use of dés as an
appellation of God, i. e. as by nature incorporeal, spote
less, holy, [cf. Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 15 sqq.]:
1 Jn. i. 5 (Sap. vii. 26 where cf. Grimm); he is said eivat
év to geri, in a state of supreme sanctity, 1 Jn. i. 7;
as oixkav ampoorror, a fig. describing his nature as alike
of consummate majesty and inaccessible to human com-
prehension, 1 Tim. vi. 16 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2); used of
that heavenly state, consummate and free from every
imperfection, to which the true disciples of Christ will
be exalted, i. q. the kingdom of light, Col. i. 12. b.
By a fig. freq. in the N. T. [ef. in classie Grk. rijs ddn-
Geias 76 as, Eur. I. T. 1046 ete.; see L. and S. s. v.
II. 2], pas is used to denote truth and its knowledge, to-
gether with the spiritual purity congruous with it, (opp. to
TO oxoros b., 7 oKoTia, q.V.): 7 Cw nv Tb pas tev avOpe-
mov, had the nature of light in men, i. e. became the
source of human wisdom, Jn. i. 4; esp. the saving truth
embodied in Christ and by his love and effort imparted
to mankind, Mt. iv. 16; Jn. i. 5; iii. 19-21; Acts xxvi.
18, 23; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. v. 13* [ef. below]; 75 das rd
dAnOuwoy, 1 In. ii. 8; 7d Oavpacriv rod Oeot das, 1 Pet.
ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2 cf. 59, 2); 7d has tyay,
the divine truth with which ye are imbued, Mt. v. 16;
éxew 70 P. THs Cans, the light by which the true life is
gained, Jn. viii. 12; ra 6rAa[Lchm. mrg. épya] tod dards,
Ro. xiii. 12; xkapmés tov dards, Eph. v.9 GL T Tr WH;
év t@ parti mepirareiv, to live agreeably to saving wis-
dom, 1 Jn. i. 7; €v 76 art etvar, to be imbued with
saving wisdom, pévetv, to continue devoted to it, to per-
severe in keeping it, 1 Jn. ii. 9 sq.; of viol rod dards
(see vids, 2 p. 635%), Lk. xvi. 8; Jn. xii. 36; 1 Th. v. 5;
réxva tou dh. (see réxvov, ¢. B. p. 618"), Eph. v. 8. by
meton. dds is used of one in whom wisdom and spiritual
purity shine forth, and who imparts the same to others:
has rev ev oxorer, Ro. ii. 19; [pads eOvar, Acts xiii. 47];
in a pre-eminent sense is Jesus the Messiah ealled
gas and rd has: Lk. ii. 32; In. i. 78q-3 xii. 35 sq. 463
7b pas Tov kdopov, In. viii. 12; ix. 5, (rd Pads Tod Kdopov
7d Sobey ev byiv ets harioudy mavris avOpdrov, Test. xii.
Patr. test. Levi § 14); 7d pas 7d dAnOwwov, In. i. 9; by
the same name the disciples of Jesus are distinguished,
Mt. v. 14; Christians are called das év xupie, having
obtained saving wisdom in communion with Christ, Eph.
v.8. nav rd favepotpevoy pas éorw, everything made
fwornp
manifest by the aid of Christian truth has taken on the
nature of light, so that its true character and quality
are no longer hidden, Eph. v. 13» [al. take as here in
an outward or physical sense, and regard the state-
ment as a general truth confirmatory of the assertion
made respecting spiritual ‘q@ards’ just before (cf.
above) ]. c. By a fig. borrowed from daylight pas
is used of that which is exposed to the view of all: év Td
dori (opp. to év ri oxoria), openly, publicly, (év aet,
Pind. Nem. 4, 63), Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3. d. reason,
mind; the power of understanding esp. moral and spir-
itual truth: 1d das 70 év oi, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 35.
[Sxn. see héyyos, fin.] *
pworhp, -jpos, 6, (pas, Packa) ; 1. that which
gives light, an illuminator, (Vulg. luminar): of the stars
(luminaries), Phil. ii. 15 (Sap. xiii. 2; Sir. xliii. 7; Gen.
i. 14, 16; Heliod. 2, 24; [Anthol. Pal. 15, 17; of sun and
moon, Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi 14]; eccles. writ.). Za
light, brightness: Rev. xxi. 11 (Anthol. 11, 359) [al. refer
this to 1; ef. Trench § xlvi.].*
em fapen -ov, (pas and dépa), light-bringing, giving
light, (Arstph., Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; as subst. 6 @. (Lat.
Lucifer), the planet Venus, the morning-star, day-star,
(Plat. Tim. Loer. p. 96 e.; Plut., al.): 2 Pet. i. 19, on
the meaning of this pass. see Avxvos.*
oteves [WH doris, see I, ¢], -7, -dv, (pas), light,
i. e. composed of light, of a bright character: vepédn, Mt.
xvii. 5[not Grsb.]; of dpOadpot kupiov puptomAagias Hriouv
porewworepot, Sir. xxiii. 19. full of light, well lighted,
opp. to oxorewwos, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (7a oxorewa
kai Ta Porewad oopata, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1).*
doritw; fut. doricw (Rev. xxii.5 L WH; 1Co. iv. 5),
Attic por (Rev. xxii. 5 GT Tr); 1 aor. eparica; pf.
pass. ptep. reporirpevos; 1 aor. pass. épwricOny; iL
intrans. to give light, to shine, (Aristot., Theophr., Plut.,
al.; Sept. for 7ix, Num. viii. 2, etc.) : émi ria, Rev. xxii.
5 [Rom. WH br. éxi]. 2. trans. =a. _prop. to en-
lighten, light up, illumine: rwi, Lk. xi. 365 shy méAuy,
\
663
xaipw
Rev. xxi. 23 (dxriot tov xoopov, of the sun, Diod. 3, 48,
Sept. for Nit); 9 y7 epwricbn ex tis So&ns airod, [A.V.
was lightened | shone with his glory, Rev. xviii. 1. b.
to bring to light, render evident: ta xpumta tov oKorovs,
1 Co. iv. 5; [Eph. iii. 9 ace. to the reading of T L br.
WH txt. (but see c.)], (riv alpeciv twos, the preference,
opinion, of one, Polyb. 23, 3,10; riv ddnOevav, Epict.
diss. 1, 4, 31; mehwricpévav tov mpaypatav ind THs GAn-
Geias, Leian. cal. non tem. ered. 82); to cause something
to exist and thus to come to light and become clear to all:
Conv x. apOapoiay dia Tod evayyediov, Opp. to xarapyjoat
tov Oavaroy, 2 ‘Tim. i. 10. c. by a use only bibl. and
eccles. to enlighten spiritually, imbue with saving knowl-
edge: twa, Jn.i.9; with a saving knowledge of the
gospel: hence porta bevres of those who have been
made Christians, Heb. vi. 4; x. 32; foll. by an indir.
quest. Eph. iii. 9 [see b. above], (Sir. xlv. 17; for 1X7,
Ps. exviii. (exix.) 130; for 77/7, to instruct, inform,
teach, Judg. xiii. 8 Alex.; 2 K. xii. 2; pwztotow adrods
Td Kpia Tou Oeov ths yjs, 2 K. xvii. 27 [cf. 28; al.]); to
give understanding to: mepwricpévor rors dpOarpors THs
capdlas [ Rec. dtavoias], as respects the eyes of your soul,
Eph. i. 18 [B. § 145, 6]; [(cf. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 20,
etc.) ].*
poticpds, -0v, 6, (partie) 5 a. the act of enlight-
ening, ilumination : mpos Pariopor THs yvaceas, i. q. mpos
To partilew tiv yvaow, that by teaching we may bring to
light ete. 2 Co. iv. 6 (on which pass. see mpdcemor, 1 a.
sub fin. p. 551° top). b. brightness, bright light, (é&
jaAtov, Sext. Emp. p. 522, 93 aad oednvns, Plut. [de fac.
in orb. lun. § 16, 13] p. 929 d. [ib. § 18, 4 p. 931 a.]; Sept.
for Wx, Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 1; xliii. (xliv.) 43; Ixxvii.
(Ixxviii.) 14; Job iii. 9; for js, Ps. Ixxxix. (xe.) 8):
eis TO pu) avyaoat [katavyaoa Lmrg. Tr mrg.] rév d. tod
evayyeXiov, that the brightness of the gospel might not
shine forth [R. V. dawn (upon them)], i. e. (dropping
the fig.) that the enlightening truth of the gospel might
not be manifest or be apprehended, 2 Co. iv. 4.*
X
xatpea; impf. éyatpov; fut. yapyooua (Lk. 1. 14; Jn.
xvi. 20, 22; Phil. i. 18, for the earlier form yarpjoa, cf.
[W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60)]; Béitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 322 sq. ;
Matthiae § 255 s.v.; Kiihner § 343 s.v.; Kriiger § 40
s.v.3 [Veitch s. v.]), once yap@ (Rev. xi. 10 Rec., a form
occurring nowhere else); 2 aor. [pass. as act.] éydpnv
[et ovyxaipe, init.]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for naw,
"1, wav; to rejoice, be glad; a. in the prop. and
strict sense: [Mk. xiv. 11]; Lk. xv. 5, [32]; xix. 6, 37;
xxii. 5; xxiii. 8; Jn. iv. 36; vili.56; xx. 20; Actsv.41;
viii. $9 ; xi. 28; xiii. 48; 2 Co. [vi. 10] ; vii. 7; xii. 9, 11
[some refer this to b. in the sense of farewell]; Phil. ii.
17, 28; Col. ii. 5; 1 Th. v.16; 1 Pet. iv. 13; 3 Jn. 8;
opp. to kAaiew, Ro. xii. 15; 1 Co. vii. 830; opp. to cAatew
x. Opnveiv, Jn. xvi. 20; opp. to Avmny Exew, ib. 22; joined
with dya\\aoba, Mt. v. 125 Rev. xix. 7; with oxiprav,
Lk. vi. 23 ; yaipew év kupio (see ev, I. 6 b. p. 211° mid. [ef.
B. 185 (161)]), Phil. iii. 1; iv. 4, 10; yaipev yapdav
peydrny (cf. xapa, a.], to rejoice exceedingly, Mt. ii. 10;
also yap@ xaipew (W. § 54, 3; B. § 133, 22), Jn. iii. 29°
yarata 664 wpa
xapd 7 xaipopev, 1 Th. iii. 9; yatpew emi with a dat. of
the object, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk.i.14; xiii. 17; Acts xv. 31;
Ro. xvi. 19 L T Tr WH;; 1 Co. xiii. 6; xvi. 17; 2 Co. vii.
13; Rev. xi. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 35; Cyr. 8,4, 12; Plat.
lege. 5 p. 739d.; cf. Kiihner § 425 Anm. 6; [W. $33 a.;
B. $133, 23]; in the Grk. writ. generally with a simple
dat. of the obj. as Prov. xvii. 19); dca me, Jn. ili. 29 ;
Sed twa, Jn. xi. 15; 1 Th. iii. 9; &v rovr@, Phil. i. 18;
[ev r. ma@npaci pov, Col. i. 24]; with an ace. of the obj.,
7d adto, Phil. ii. 18 (ravta, Dem. p. 323,65; cf. Matthiae
§ 414 p. 923; Kriiger § 46, 5, 9); rd ep’ bpiv (see 6, IT.
8 p. 436%), Ro. xvi. 19 RG; dmé twos, i. q. xapav Exew,
to derive joy from one, 2 Co. ii. 3; yap. foll. by éru,
Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9,16; 2Jn.4; év rovr@ or, Lk.
x. 20; with a dat. of the cause: ry éAmid: xaiportes, let
the hope of future blessedness give you joy, Ro. xii. 12
[yet ef. W. §31,1k., 7 d.]. b. in a broader sense,
to be well, to thrive; in salutations, the impv. xatpe, hail !
Lat. salve, (so fr. Hom. down): Mt. xxvi.49; xxvii. 29;
Mk. xv. 18; Lk. i. 28; Jn. xix. 3; plur. yaipere, [A. V.
all hail], Mt. xxviii. 9; at the beginning of letters the
inf. yaipew (sc. Aéeyee or Kedever): Acts Xv. 235; xxiii.
26; Jas. i. 1, (often in the bks. of Mace.; cf. Grimm on
1 Mace. x. 18; Otto in the Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for
1867, p. 678 sqq.; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 99
sqq-; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,27; Ael.v.h.1, 25); fully, xaipew
A€ya, to give one greeting, salute, 2Jn.10,[11]. [Comp. :
ouv-xaipo. | *
xaAala, -ns, 7, (yaddw, q. v. [so Etym. Magn. 805, 1;
but Curtius (§ 181) says “certainly has nothing to do
with it ”]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 193, hail: Rev. viii.
(8 oats) oS -an alee
XaAdw, -@; fut. yakdow; 1 aor. é€yddaca; 1 aor. pass.
€xaddoOnv; fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; a. to
loosen, slacken, relax. b. to let down from a higher
place to a lower: ri or twa, Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v.4sq.; Acts
xxvii. 17, 30, [in these two pass. in a nautical sense, to
lower]; twa év amvpids, Acts ix. 25; pass. 2 Co. xi. 33.*
Kad$aios, -ov, 6, a Chaldean; yn Xaddaiov the land of
the Chaldeans, Chaldea: Acts vii. 4, where a reference
to Gen. xi. 28, 31 and xv. 7 seems to show that southern
Armenia is referred to. The different opinions of oth-
er interpreters are reviewed by Dillmann on Genesis
(3te Aufl.) p. 223 sq.; [ef. Schrader in Riehm s. v.;
Sayce in Encycl. Brit. s. v. Babylonia ].*
XaAerds, -7, -dv, (fr. yahéarw to oppress, annoy, [(?)]),
fr. Hom. down, hard (Lat. difficilis) ; a. hard to do,
to take, to approach. b. hard to bear, troublesome,
dangerous: katpot xaXeroil, [R.V. grievous], 2 Tim. iii. 1 ;
harsh, fierce, savage: of men, Mt. viii. 28 (Is. xviii. 2
and often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down).*
XaAwaywyew, -G; 1 aor. inf. yakwaywynoar; (xadwvos
and dyw); to lead by a bridle, to guide, (trmov, Walz,
Rhett. Graec. i. p.425, 19); trop. to bridle, hold in check,
restrain: tiv yAoooay, Jas. i. 26 ; 7d o@pa, Jas. iil. 2; Tas
tav noovayv dpeEece, Leian. tyrann. 4. [(Poll. 1 § 215.) ]*
XaAwés, -od, 6, (yaa), a bridle: Jas. iii. 3; Rev. xiv.
20. (From Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) *
XGAkeos, -€a, -eov, contr. -ovs, -7, -odv, (yaAxos), fr. Hom.
down, brazen, [A. V. of brass]: Rev. ix. 20.*
XaAkeds, -ews, 6, (xadkds), fr. Hom. down, a worker in
copper or iron, a’smith: 2 Tim. iv. 14 [A. V. copper-
smith ].*
XarknSav, -ovos, 6, chalcedony, a precious stone de-
scribed by Plin. h. n. 37,5 (18), 72 [see B. D. (esp. Am.
ed.) s. v.]: Rev. xxi. 19.*
XaAktov, -ov, 70, (xaAkos), a (copper or) brazen vessel:
Mk. vii. 4. ([Arstph.], Xen. oec. 8, 19; [al.].) *
XaAKo-A(Bavov (so Suidas [but see ed. Gaisf. s. v.]), -ov,
To, more correctly xadxoAiBavos, -ov, 9, (acc. to the read-
ing as it ought to be restored [(but see the edd.)] in
Rev. i. 15 as ev kapiva remupopern ; cf. Diisterdieck’s crit.
note [see B. 80 (69) note]),a word of doubtful meaning,
found only in Rev. i. 15, and ii. 18, chalcolibanus, Vulg.
aurichaleum or orichalcum (so cod. Amiat., [al. aeric.] ;
Luther Messing, [R. V. burnished brass]); ace. to the
testimony of an ancient Greek [Ansonius] in Salmasius
(Exercitt. ad Solin. p. 810 a.: 6 AiBavos exer tpia etdn
dévdpav, kai 6 pev appnv dvouaterar xadxodiBavos, HAroedys
kat muppos iyouv EavOos), a certain kind of (yellow)
frankincense; but both the sense of the passages in Rev.
and a comparison of Dan. x. 6 and Ezek. i. 7, which
seem to have been in the writer’s thought, compel us to
understand some metal, like gold if not more precious (cf.
Hebr. 9pm, a metal composed of gold and silver, Sept.
MAEKTPOV, Vulg. electrum, Ezek. i. 4,27; viii. 2); this in-
terpretation is confirmed by the gloss of Suidas: eidos
NAEKTpov TYLwTEpoV xpUToOV, Eat SE TO AExTpov addAOTUTOV
xpvciov peprypevoy véd@ x. Avbeig. The word is com-
pounded, no doubt, of xadxds and AiBavos, not of yadkos
and ey) ‘white. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Metalle; Wetzel
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1869, p. 92 sqq.; cf.
Ewald, Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 117 sq.; [Lee in the
‘Speaker’s Com.’ ad loc. ].*
XaAkés, -od, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Nwn3, brass:
1 Co. xiii. 1; Rev. xviii. 12; (like the Lat. aes) what is
made of brass, money, coins of brass (also of silver and
of gold), Mt. x. 9; Mk.vi.8; xii. 41. [B. D. s. v. Brass;
Dict. of Antigq. s.v. aes.]*
Xopat, adv. ; a. on the ground, on the earth. b.
to the ground; in both senses fr. Hom. down; in the
latter sense Jn. ix. 6 [where, however, Eng. idiom re:
tains on]; xviii. 6.*
Xavadv, 7, Hebr. }}33 [lit. ‘lowland ’], Canaan, the
land of Canaan, indecl. prop. name: in the narrower
sense, of that part of Palestine lying west of the Jordan,
Acts vii. 11; in a wider sense, of all Palestine, Acts
oie, dg)i=
Xavavatios, -a, -ov, Hebr. »3913, Canaanite; the name
of the ancient inhabitants of Palestine before its con-
quest by the Israelites; in Christ’s time i. q. Phanician
[R.V. Canaanitish]: Mt. xv. 22.*
xapé, -Gs, 7, (xalpw), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph. down,
Sept. for ANDY and jiww, joy, gladness ; a ken:
14; xv.7,10; Jn. xv. 113 xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 13; Acts viii.
8; 2 Co. vii. 18; viii. 2; Gal. v. 22; Col. i.11; Phil. it
xaparypa
2; 1Jn.i.4; 2Jn.12; opp. toxarnpea, Jas. iv. 9; opp.
$o Avan, Jn. xvi. 20; 2 Co. ii.3; Heb. xii.11; ipar, i.e.
the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the ‘sor-
row’ which Paul on returning to Corinth would both
experience and give, ii. 1-3); yapa ras wiorews, spring-
ing from faith, Phil. i. 25; yaipew yapav pey. Mt. ii. 10
[W. § 32, 2; B. 131, 5]; adyadAvaoda yxapa, 1 Pet. i. 8;
xapav [Ree.* yapw] mod\Anv exew emi with a dat. of the
thing, Philem. 7; mAnpodv twa yapas, Ro. xv. 13; mAy-
povoOa xapas, Acts xiii. 52; 2 Tim. i. 4; movety tu yapay
peyaAnv, Acts xv. 3; amo tis xapas, for joy, Mt. xiii. 44;
Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts xii. 14; ev yapa (épxeoOar), Ro. xv.
325 pera xapas, with joy, Mt. xiii. 20; xxviii. 8; Mk. iv.
16 Wi kyvint 13 3x7 xxive52 Acts xx. 24 Rec.; Phil:
i. 4; ii. 29; Heb. x. 34; xiii. 17, (Polyb. 11, 33, 7; 22,
17,12; Xen. Hiero 1, 25); with mvedparos dyiov added,
joy wrought by the Holy Spirit, 1 Th. i. 6; yapa ev
mvevpate ayi@, joyousness caused by [ef. ev, I. 6 (p. 211°
bot.) and B. § 133, 23] the Holy Spirit, Ro. xiv. 17; yapa
emt tun, 2 Co. vil.4; xalpew yapa dia tt, Jn. iii. 29 [ef.
xaipo, a.]; also dia twe (a relative pron. intervening),
1 Th. iii. 9; 4 xapa ort, Jn. xvi. 21; yapa iva (see iva, II.
2d.), 3 Jn. 4. b. by meton. the cause or occasion
of joy: Lk. it. 10; Jas. i. 2; [so 2 Co. i. 15 WH txt. Tr
mrg. (al. ydpis, q. v. 3 b.)]; of persons who are one’s
‘joy’: 1 Th. ii. 19sq.; Phil. iv. 1; of a joyful condition
or state: avri... xapas, to attain to blessedness at the
right hand of God in heaven, Heb. xii. 2; the same
idea is expressed in the parable by the words, 7 yapa
tov kupiov, the blessedness which the Lord enjoys, Mt.
Ravel wo."
XGpaypa, -ros, 7d, (yapdcow to engrave); a. a
stamp, an imprinted mark: of the mark stamped on the
forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers
of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq.; xiv. 9,11; xv. 2 Ree.;
xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4, (updos, the mark branded upon
horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thing carved, sculp-
ture, graven work: of idolatrous images, Acts xvii. 29.
(In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.) *
Xapaxrip, -7pos, 6, (xapacow to engrave, cut into), fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. prop. the instrument
used in engraving or carving, (cf. ¢warnp, Naymrtnp, dov-
tp, pvontnp; cf. our ‘stamp’ or ‘die’). 2. the
mark (figure or letters) stamped upon that instrument or
wrought out on it; hence univ. a mark or figure burned
in (Lev. xiii. 28) or stamped on, an impression; the
exact expression (the image) of any person or thing,
marked likeness, precise reproduction in every respect (cf.
facsimile) : x. ths tmoardaews Tod Oeod, of Christ, ace. to
his nature as 6 Oeios Novos, Heb. i. 3; oppayids Oeov, fs
6 xapaxtnp eat 6 aid.os Aoyos, Philo de plant. Noé § 5;
x: Ocias duvapews, of the human mind, Philo, quod det.
potiori ins. § 23; God rév avOpwrov exacev ths Eavtod
eikdvos xapaxtnpa, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 33,43; of murrot év
dyamn xapaxtnpa Ocod ratpos dia "Invod Xpicrod (Exovow),
Tgnat. ad Magnes. 5, 2. the peculiarity, by which things
are recognized and distinguished from each other, [cf.
Eng. characteristic]: 2 Mace. iv. 10.*
665
Yapls
xdpag, -axos, 6, (xapacoe) ; 1. a pale or stake, a
palisade, [(Arstph., Dem., al.)]. 2. a palisade or
rampart (i. e. pales between which earth, stones, trees
and timbers are heaped and packed together): Lk. xix.
43 (Is. xxxvii. 33; Ezek. iv. 2; xxvi. 8; Polyb.; Joseph.
vit. 43; Arr. exp. Alex. 2,19, 9; Plut., al.).*
xapf{opar; depon. mid.; fut. xapioopat (Ro. viii. 32 ;
Leian. d. mar. 9, 1, for which Grk. writ. com. use the
Attic xapiodpa: [cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq.; B. 37 (82);
W.§15s.v.]); pf. Kexaptopa; 1 aor. éyapioapnv; 1 aor.
pass. éyapioOnv (Acts iii. 14; 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29, [ef.
B. 52 (46) ]) ; fut. pass. yaproOnoopnat with a pass. signif.
(Philem. 22); (yapis); often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ;
to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to doa
favor to, gratify; a. univ. to show one’s self gra-
cious, kind, benevolent: twi, Gal. iii. 18 [al. (supply 7.
kAnpovopiav and) refer this to c. below]. b. to grant
forgiveness, to pardon: 2 Co. ii. 7; with a dat. of the
pers., Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 18; with an acc. of the thing,
2 Co. ii. 10 [ef. W. § 39,1 b. and 3 N. 3]; revi trav ddixiar,
2 Co. xii. 13 ; ra mapamre@para, Col. ii. 13. c. to give
graciously, give freely, bestow: tuwi tt, Lk. vii. 21; Ro.
viii. 32; Phil. ii. 9; pass., 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29; where
a debt is referred to, to forgive [cf. b. above], Lk. vii.
42 sq.; Twi twa, graciously to restore one to another who
desires his safety (e. g. a captive [R.V. grant]), pass.,
Acts iii. 14; Philem. 22; or to preserve for one a person in
peril, Acts xxvii. 24; ria Tu, to give up to another one
whom he may punish or put to death, Acts xxv. 11 [(ef.
R. V. mrg.)]; with the addition of eis dm@Xetay, ib. 16.*
Xap, ace. of the subst. yapis used absol.; prop. in favor
of, for the pleasure of : xapw Exropos, Hom. Il. 15, 744,
al.; 1 Mace. ix. 10; Judith viii. 19; like the Lat. abl.
gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposi-
tion, and is joined to the gen., for, on account of, for the
sake of: Gal. iii. 19 (on which see mapaBacrs) ; 1 Tim.
v.14; Tit.i.11; Jude 16; rovrov xapu, on this account,
for this cause, Eph. iii. 1 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54); rovrov x.
iva, Eph. iii. 14 [ef. W. 566 (526)]; Tit. i. 5; ob xapu,
for which cause, Lk. vii. 47; xapw Tivos ; for what cause ?
wherefore? 1 Jn. iii. 12. Except in 1 Jn. iii. 12, xyapev is
everywhere in the N. T. placed after the gen., as it gen-
erally is in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. I. 3 a. p. 2416;
Herm. ad Vig. p. 701); in the O. T. Apocr. it is placed
sometimes before, sometimes after; cf. Wahl, Clavis
Apocr. s.v. 6 b.; Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 29.*
Xdpts, -tros, ace. ydpw, and twice in LT Tr WH the
rarer form xdpira (Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4) which is also
poetic (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. $44 Anm.1; [ WH. App.
157%; B. 13 (12)]), ace. plur. ydpiras (Acts xxiv. 27
RG), 9, (xaipw), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. [, grace;
i.e. 1. prop. that which affords joy, pleasure, de-
light, sweetness, charm, loveliness : grace of speech (Eccl.
x. 12; Sir. xxi. 163; xxxvii. 21; Hom. Od. 8,175; rav
Adyov, Dem. 51, 9; 1419, 16; xadpires popar, verbal
pleasantries which the foolish affect in order to ingra-
tiate themseives. Sir. xx. 13), Adyoe xdpiros (gen. of
quality), Lk. iv. 22; ydpw 8:8dvat rots dkovovow, Eph. iv
xapes
29; & xdpirt, with grace [the subst. das being added ;
see Bp. Lghtft.], Col. iv. 6. 2. good-will, loving-
kindness, favor: in a broad sense, xdpis mapa tim, Lk.
ii. 52; yew ydapw mpés tiva, to have favor with one, Acts
ii. 47; yxdpis évavtiov tuvds, Acts vii. 10; [xdpw xara
rivos aiteicbat Gras (q. v. II. 2), Acts xxv. 3 (but al.
refer this to 3 b. below)]; xapes (of God) €oriv émi twa,
attends and assists one, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; ydpw
(xdpira) xdpiras KatatiberOai Tin (see kataTiOnur), Acts
xxiv. 27; xxv. 9; favor (i.e. act of favoring [cf. W. § 66
fin.]), 2 Co. viii. 4. xdpis is used of the kindness of a
master towards his inferiors or servants, and soesp.
of God towards men: evpickew xapw rapa to 6. Lk. i.
30; évdmov rod Geod, Acts vii. 46; rodTo xdpis sc. eoriv,
this wins for us (God’s) favor [R.V. is acceptable], 1 Pet.
ii. 19; with mapa Oem added, ib. 20; mapadidoc Oat TH X-
tod beov, to be committed or commended to the protect-
ing and helping favor of God, Acts xiv. 26; xv. 40. The
apostles and N. T. writers at the beginning and end of
their Epp. crave for their readers the favor (‘grace’) of
God or of Christ, to which all blessings, esp. spiritual,
are due: Ro.i. 7; xvi. 20, 24[RG]; 1Co.i.3; xvi. 23;
2Co. i. 23 xiii. 13 (14); Gal. i. 3; vi. 18; Eph. i. 2; vi.
24; Phil. i.2; iv. 23; Col. i.2; iv.18; 1 Th.i.13 v.28;
2 Dh 211.18; 1 Lames. 2s vi. 21(22) 5.2 Pima: 2 v.22
Tit. i. 4; iii. 15; Philem. 3, 25; Heb. xiii. 25; 1 Pet. i. 2;
2 Pet. i. 2; ii.18[cf.3 a.]; 2Jn.3; Rev.i.4; xxii. 21; cf.
Oito, Ueber d. apostol. Segensgruss xapis tpiv etc., in the
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1867, p. 678sqq. | More-
over, the word yaprs contains the idea of kindness which
bestows upon one what he has not deserved: Ro. xi. 6;
hence xara ydpw and xara ddeiAnua are contrasted in
Ro. iv. 4, 16; xdpere and é& épywv in Ro. xi. 6; kar’
éxhoyny xadpttos, ib. 5; but the N. T. writers use xdpis
pre-eminently of that kindness by which God bestows
favors even upon the ill-deserving, and grants to
sinners the pardon of their offences, and bids them ac-
cept of eternal salvation through Christ: Ro. iii. 24;
v. 17, 20 sq.; [vi. 1]; 1Co. xv. 10; Gal. i.15; ii. 21; Eph.
i. 6, [7]; ii. 5, 78q.3 Phil.i.7; Col.i.6; 2 Th. ii. 16;
1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim.i.9; Heb. ii. 9 [here Treg. mrg.
xopis]; x. 295; xii.15; xiii. 9; 1 Pet.i.10; Jude 4; edpi-
oxew xapwv, Heb. iv. 16; 4 xapts tod beod H owrnpros, Tit.
ii. 11; 6 Adyos rhs xdprros, the message of his grace, Acts
xiv. 3; xx. 32; 7d evayyédtov THs xapiTos Tov Oeod, Acts
xx. 2435 it is styled ‘the grace of Christ, in that through
pity for sinful men Christ left his state of blessedness
with God in heaven, and voluntarily underwent the
hardships and miseries of human life, and by his suffer-
ings and death procured salvation for mankind: [Acts
xv. 11]; 2 Co. viii. 9; Ro. v. 15; Gal.i.6; [Tit. iii. 7];
Jn. i. 14, 17. xapis is used of the merciful kindness
by which God, exerting his holy influence upon souls, turns
them to Christ, keeps, strengthens, increases them in Chris-
tian faith, knowledge, affection, and kindles them to the
exercise of the Christian virtues: 2 Co. iv. 15; vi. 1;
2 Th.i.12; of remuorrevxdres dia ths xaperos, Acts xviii.
27; ind xadpw eivat, to be subject to the power of grace,
666
Yapts
opp. to bmd védpov eivat, Ro. vi. 14 sq.3 éemimrew tis
xap. Gal. v. 4; mpoopever rH x. Acts xiii. 43 [GL T Tr
WH]; eémpeévew, ibid. Rec.; ev r7 yapire (RG WH txt.
om. the art.), prompted by grace, Col. iii. 16; the grace
of God promoting the progress and blessings of the
Christian religion, Acts xi. 23; [prompting its posses-
sors to benefactions, 2 Co. ix. 14]; sustaining and aiding
the efforts of the men who labor for the cause of
Christ, 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. i. 12; the favor of Christ,
assisting and strengthening his followers and ministers
to bear their troubles, 2 Co. xii. 9. 3. what is
due to grace; a. the spiritual condition of one
governed by the power of divine grace, what the theolo-
gians call the ‘ status gratiae’: éornxévat év Th x. Ro. v.
2; eis rnv x. 1 Pet. v.12; avéavew év yapitt, 2 Pet. iii.
18; evduvapotoba év tH xapite TH ev Xpiore, 2 Tim. ii.
a b. a token or proof of grace, 2 Co. i. 15 [A. V.
benefit (WH txt. Tr mrg. xapav, q. v. under b.)]; @ gift
of grace; benefaction, bounty: used of alms, 1 Co. xvi. 3;
2 Co. viii. 6 sq. 19, (Sir. iii. 29 (31); xxix. 15; xxx. 6;
4 Mace. v. 8; Xen. Ages. 4, 3sq.; Hier. 8, 4) ; maca yapts,
all earthly blessings, wealth, etc., which are due to divine
goodness, 2 Co. ix. 8; 6 Oeds maons xaptros, the author
and giver of benefits of every kind, 1 Pet.v.10. the aid
or succor of divine grace: diSdvat xapw tarrewois, 1 Pet.
v. 5; Jas. iv.6; the salvation offered to Christians is
called ydpus, a gift of divine grace, 1 Pet.i.10,13; of the
various blessings of Christ experienced by souls: AaBetv
Xapw avti xdpiros (see avri, 2 e. p. 49° bot.), Jn. i. 165
xapts Cwijs, the gift of grace seen in the reception of life
[cf. Con, 2 b.], 1 Pet. iii. 7; capacity and ability due to the
grace of God (Germ. Ginadenausriistung), Eph. iv. 7;
mAnpns xapiros, Acts vi. 8G LT Tr WH; zroukidn xaprs,
the aggregate of the extremely diverse powers and gifts
granted to Christians, 1 Pet.iv.10; used of the power
to undertake and administer the apostolic office: AaPetv
xapw Kal drooroAn», i.e. xdpw ths amoorods, Ro. i. 5; 9
x: 7 Sobciod por (Paul), Ro. xii. 3,6; xv. 15; 1Co. iii. 10;
Gal. ii. 9; Eph. iii. 2,7; 806. dpiv, of the gifts of knowl-
edge and utterance conferred upon Christians, 1 Co. i.
4; €866n po. 9 x- avrn, foll. by an inf., Eph. iii. 8; of the
desire to give alms roused by the grace of God, 2 Co.
viii. 1. 4. thanks (for benefits, services, favors);
prop.: xdprrt, with thanksgiving, 1 Co. x. 30; yapw éxew
ri (Lat. gratiam habere alicui), to be thankful to one,
Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xii. 28, (2
Mace. iii. 33, and countless times in prof. auth.; cf. Pas-
sow 8. V. p. 2416* sub fin.; [L. and S.s.v. II. 2]; As¢, Lex.
Plat. ii. p. 539 sq.; Bleek, Brief a.d. Hebr. ii. 2, p. 975) ;
foll. by éxi with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7 T edd. 2
and 7, Rec. (cf. p. 233" mid.); apts T@ Oe@ SC. EaTa,
Ro. vii. 25 LT Tr WH txt.; foll. by drt, Ro. vi. 17 (x. rots
Geots, rt etc. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 72; 8, 7,3; an. 3, 3, 14; oec.
8, 16); with a ptep. added to the dat. (by apposition),
1 Co. xv. 573 2 Co. ii. 14; viii. 16; foll. by éwi with a dat.
of the thing [cf. émi, B. 2 a. 8.], 2 Co. ix. 15. i. q-
recompense, reward, Lk. vi. 32-34 (for which Mt. v. 46
uses pucOds).*
Yapiopa
Xdpiopa, -ros, 7d, (yapiCopar), a gift of grace; a favor
which one recewwes without any merit of his own; in the
N.'T. [where (exc. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the
giftof divine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24
fin. Swped kai evepyecia kal yapiopa Oeod ra mavta boa ev
K0op@ kal avTos 6 Kdopos eotiv) ; used of the natural gift
of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co.
vii. 7; deliverance from great peril to life, rd eis nuas x.
bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11; the gift of faith, knowl-
edge, holiness, virtue, Ro. i. 115 the economy of divine
grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation
is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of
Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23; plur.
of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro.
xi. 29; in the technical Pauline sense yapicpara [ A. V.
gifis] denote extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain
Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ,
the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace
operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit [cf. Cremer in
Herzog ed. 2 vol. v. 10 sqq. s. v. Geistesgaben]: Ro. xii.
6; 1Co.i. 7; xii. 4, 31; 1 Pet.iv.10; yapiopara iapdrov,
1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; spec. the sum of those powers requisite
for the discharge of the office of an evangelist: 1 Tim. iv.
14; 2 Tim.i. 6. ((Of temporal blessings, ‘ Teaching’
1,5 (cf. Sopyua in Herm. mand. 2, 4)]; eccl. writ.) *
Xapitdw, -@: 1 aor. éyapirwoa; pf. pass. ptep. Kexapt-
Twpevos ; (xapts) ; 1. to make graceful i. e. charm-
ing, lovely, agreeable: pass. Sir. xviii. 17; rats dadd£ous
orpopais xaptrovpevos oppiv, Liban. vol. iv. p. 1071,
14. 2. to pursue with grace, compass with favor; to
honor with blessings: twa, Eph. i. 6; pass. Lk. i. 28,
[some would take it in these two exx. subjectively
(R. V.mrg. endued with grace)]; Ps. xviii. 26 Symm. ;
[Herm. sim. 9, 24,3; Test. xii. Patr. test. Joseph. 1];
eccles. and Byzant. writ.*
Xappdv, (Hebr. }1n [i. e. (prob.) ‘parched’, ‘arid’],
Gen. xi. 31; xii. 5; xxvii. 43), Haran [so R. V.; A. V.
(after the Grk.) Charran], called Kappa: in Grk. writ.
and Carrae in Lat., a city of Mesopotamia, of great anti-
quity and made famous by the defeat of Crassus: Acts
vii. 2,4. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v.; Vathinger in Herzog v.
539; [Schultz in Herzog ed. 2, s. v.]; Steiner in Schenkel
ii. 592; Schrader in Riehm p. 571.*
Xaprys, -ov, 6, (yapacow), paper: 2 Jn. 12; Jer. xliii.
(xxxvi.) 23. ([Plat. Com. fragm. 10 p. 257 (Didot) ; ef.
inser. (B.c. 407) in Kirchhoff, Inserr. Attic. i. No. 324];
Ceb. tab. 4; Diose. 1, 115.) [Cf. Birt, Antikes Buch-
wesen, index i. s.v.; Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeo-
graphie, p. 23; Hdersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. p. 270
sq-]*
Xaopa, -ros, Td, (xaivo to yawn), a gaping opening, a
chasm, gulf: i.q. a great interval, Lk. xvi. 26. (Hes.
theog. 740; Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) *
XétAos, -ovs, Td, gen. plur. in the uncontr. form yeiéov
(Heb. xiii. 15; see dpos), (xéw i. q. XAQ, yaivw), fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for NDw, a lip; a. in the N. T. of the
speaking mouth [cf. W. 32]: Mt. xv. 8; Mk. vii. 6; Ro.
iii. 13; 1 Co. xiv. 21; Heb. xiii. 15 (on which see xapwés,
667
xelp
2¢.)3 1 Pet. iii. 10. b. metaph.: yeidos ris Oaddo-
ons, the sea-shore, Heb. xi. 12 (Gen. xxii. 17; Ex. vii.
15; xiv. 30, ete.; of the shore of a lake, Joseph. b. j.
3, 10,7; of the banks of rivers, Hdt. 2, [70]. 94; [Ar-
istot. de mirab. aud. 46; 150; cf. hist. an. 6,16 p. 570%,
22]; Polyb. 3, 14, 6; [ef. W. pp. 18, 30]).*
Xetpatw: pres. pass. ptep. xetwaCdpevos ; (xetpa stormy
weather, winter [cf. xetuav]); to afflict with a tempest, to
toss about upon the waves: pass. Acts xxvii. 18 [R. V.
labored with the storm]. (Aeschyl., Thuc., Plat., Diod.,
Plut., Leian., al.) [Come.: mapa-yepmaco. |*
xelpappos, (for the more com. xeipappoos [sc. rorapuds |,
Att. contr. xetuappovs [q. v. in L. and S. fin.], ef. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 234), -ov, 6, (yetwa winter, and péw, pdos), fr.
Hom. down, Sept. very often for 5n3, lit. flowing in
winter, a torrent: Jn. xviii. 1 [where A. V. brook].*
XEtLOv, -Ovos, 6, (xetua, and this fr. yé on account of
the ‘pouring’ rains; [al. connect it with yi-dv, snow,
frost (cf. Lat. hiems, ete.); see Curtius $194; L. and S.
Ss. V. xtov, fin.]), winter ; a. stormy or rainy weather,
a tempest (so fr. Hom. down): Mt. xvi. 3 [Tdf. br. WH
reject the pass.]; Acts xxvii. 20. b. winter, the
winter season, (so fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down): Jn. x. 22;
2 Tim. iv. 21; yeuevos, in winter (-time), in the winter
(Plat. de rep. 3 p.415 e.; Xen. mem. 3, 8,9; al. [cf. W.
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. xiii. 18.*
xelp, gen. xerpds, acc. xetpav (1 Pet. v. 6 Tdf.; see dpony,
fin.), 7, [fr. r. meaning ‘to lay hold of’; ef. Lat. heres,
ete.; Curtius § 189; Vanicek p. 249 sq. ], fr. Hom. down,
Hebr. 7, the hand: Mt. iii. 12; Mk. iii. 1; Lk. vi. 6;
1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often; the gen. with the
verbs drropuat, emiAapBavoya, kpatéw, meatw, etc., which
see in their places; the dat. with épyatopat, eoOia, ete. ;
6 donacpos TH evn xeupt, 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th.
iii. 17; the acc. with the verbs alpw, dé, éxmeravvupt,
exteivo, euBanre, émitiOnut, Kabapi(w, Kataceiw, vinta,
ete. 9) érideows Tov xeipov [see érideors and reff. ],
1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim. i.6; Heb.vi.2; év xeupi twos, in
imitation of the Hebr. “5 73 [cf. B. $133, 20 ef. 319 sq.
(274); Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency,
of any one, by means of any one, Acts vii. 35 Rec.; Gal.
iii. 19; adv xerpt dyyeAov, with the aid or service of the
angel [cf. B. u.s.], Acts vii. 35 LT Tr WH; those things
in the performance of which the hands take the princi-
pal part (as e. g. in working miracles), are said to be
done dia xetpds or xecp@v or rev [ cf. B. § 124, 8 d.] xeupav
twos, Mk. vi. 2; Acts v. 12; xiv. 3; xix. 11; univ., Acts
li. 23; vii. 25; xi. 30; xv. 23; emi yeipa@v, Mt. iv.6; Lk.
iv. 11; émt tv x., Rev. xiv. 9; xx. 1 [here Treg. mrg.
ev TH x-], 43 ex, Acts xxviii. 4; Rev. viii. 4; efs ry x.
(on his hand), Lk. xv. 22; 7 xetp, as an acting subject
(see yAéooa, 1), Lk. xxii. 21; plur., Acts xvii. 25; xx.
34; 1Jn.i.1; ra epya rav x., Acts vii. 41; Rev. ix. 20;
exdukeiv TO aipa Tivos &k Twos (see exdixéw, b. and ék I. 7),
Rev. xix. 2. By meton. 7 yelp is put for power, activity,
(for exx. fr. prof. auth. fr. Hom. down see Passow s. v.
p- 2431°; [L.and S.s. v. p.1720°]): mapad:ddvae teva eis
xX€ipas twer, into the hostile hands (Deut. i. 27; Job xvi.
NElpaywyew
11), Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi.45; Mk. ix. 31; Lk. ix. 44; xxiv.
7; Acts xxi.11; xxviii. 17; d:ddvae re ev rH xerpi Twos,
to commit to one’s protecting and upholding power, Jn.
iii. 35; also eis r. yeipds twos, Jn. xiii. 3; rwa e« trav
xetp. or éx xetpds twos (fr. the hostile power of any one)
anayew, Acts xxiv. 7 Rec.; efek€oOat, Acts xii. 11 (Gen.
xxxii. 11; Ex. xviii. 8 sq.) ; ée&€pxeoOar, Jn. x. 39; pu-
oOjva, Lk. i. 74; owrnpia, ib. 71; expevyew tas xeipas
twos, 2 Co. xi. 33. By a fig. use of language xeip
or xetpes are attributed to God, symbolizing his might,
activity, power; conspicuous a. in creating the
universe : €pya Tav xetpa@v adtov, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.)
26). B. in upholding and preserving: Lk.
xxiii. 46; Jn. x. 29 (cf. 28); yelp kupiov éori pera twos,
God is present, protecting and aiding one, Lk. i. 66;
Acts xi. 21. y: in punishing: yelp xupiov emi oé,
Acts xiii. 11 (1 S. xii. 15) ; eumimrew els x. Oeod CdvrTos,
Heb. x. 31. §. in determining and controlling
the destinies of men: Acts iv. 28; tamewvovaGar tmd
Tiv Kparatay xeipa Tov Geod, 1 Pet. v. 6.
Xelpaywyéw, -@; pres. pass. ptep. yeipaywyovpevos ;
(xetpaywyds, q.V-; ct. yakwaywyew) ; to lead by the hand:
tuvd, Acts ix.8; xxii.11. (Anacr., Diod., Plut., Leian.,
Artem., al.) *
Xerp-aywyds, -dv, (xeip and dyw), leading one by the
hand: Acts xiii. 11. (Artem. oneir. 1, 48; Plut., al.) *
Xetpdypador, -ov, 7d, (xeip and ypdda), a handwriting ;
what one has written with his own hand (Polyb. 30, 8, 4;
Dion. Hal. 5, 8; al.) ; spec. a note of hand, or writing
in which one acknowledges that money has either been
deposited with him or lent to him by another, to be re-
turned at an appointed time (Tob. v. 3; ix. 5; Plut.
mor. p. 829 a. de vitand. aere al. 4, 3; Artem. oneir. 3,
40); metaph. applied in Col. ii. 14 [(where R.V. bond) ]
to the Mosaic law, which shows men to be chargeable
with offences for which they must pay the penalty.*
Xetpo-rrointos, -ov, (xeip and morew), made by the hand
i. e. the skill of man (see axetporoinros) : of temples, Mk.
xiv. 58; Acts vil. 48; xvii. 24; Heb. ix. 11, 24; of cir-
cumcision, Eph. ii.11. (In Sept. of idols; of other things,
occasionally in Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Polyb., Diod.) *
Xetpo-rovew, -@: 1 aor. ptep. xetporovnaas; 1 aor. pass.
ptep. xetporovnbeis; (fr. xetpordvos extending the hand,
and this fr. ye(p and teiyw); fr. [Arstph.], Xen., Plat.,
Isoer. down ; a. prop. to vote by stretching out the
hand (cf. Xen. an. 3, 2, 33 dro Soxet ratra, avatewdrw
THY X€ipa* avereway aravtes). b. to create or appoint
by vote: twa, one to have charge of some office or duty,
pass. 2 Co. viii. 19, and in the spurious subscriptions in
2 Tim: iv. 23 3) Tit. iii. 15. c. with the loss of the
notion of extending the hand, to elect, appoint, create:
twa, Acts xiv. 23 (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow
8. V. p. 2440°; xetpotovetaOat tnd Oeod Bacrhéa, Philo de
praem. et poen. §9; [Baciéws Urapyxos €xetporoveiro, de
Joseph. $41]; Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 2; [7, 11,1; of the
choice of Jon. as high-priest, 13, 2,2; ef. Hatch in Dict.
of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Ordination, p. 1501; Harnack on
‘Teaching’ etc. 15, 1]). [Comp.: mpo-xeporovew. ] *
668
XAlapy os
xelpwv, -ov, (compar. of caxds; derived fr. the obsol.
xépys, which has been preserved in the dat. xépni, acc.
xépya, plur. xépnes, xépna; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 268
[ef. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. xépns]), (fr. Hom. down],
worse: Mt. ix. 16; xxvii. 64; Mk. ii. 21; yiverat Ta
€oxara xelpova tov mpateov, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet.
li. 20; ets 7d xeipov epxerOa, [to grow worse], of one
whose illness increases, Mk. v. 26; iva pi xeipdv ool re
yemrat, lest some worse thing befall thee, Jn. v. 14;
mdo@ xelpav tinwpia, [A.V. how much sorer punishment],
Heb. x. 29; ént rd yxeipov mpoxdmrew ([A. V. wax worse
and worse}; see mpoxérre, 2), 2 Tim. iii. 13; of the moral
character, amicrov xeipov, 1 Tim. v. 8.*
XepovBip, (RG) and XepovPely (LT Tr WH; in Mss.
also XepouBiv, XepovBein; [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; WH.
App. p.155*; and s. v. et, ¢]), rd (neut. gend. also in most
places in the Sept.; rarely, as Ex. xxv. 18, 19, of Xep.;
XepovBes in Ex. xxv. 18 [but this is a mistake; the
form in -evs seems not to occur in the O. T.]; in Philo
ta XepovBip, in Joseph. of XepovBeis, antt. 3, 6,5; af
XepouBeis, ibid. 8, 3,3; the use of the neut. gender
seemed most suitable, because they were (@a; XepouBeis
(@a €ore merewd, poppy S ovderi trav im avOparwv éwpa-
pevav maparAnova, Joseph. antt. 3, 6,5), Hebr. 02393
(hardly of Semitic origin, but cognate to the Grk. ypiy,
ypumés [for the various opinions cf. Gesenius’s Hebr.
Lex. ed. Miihlau and Volck s. v. 3393]), cherubim, two
golden figures of living creatures with two wings; they
were fastened to the lid of the ark of the covenant in
the Holy of holies (both of the sacred tabernacle and of
Solomon’s temple) in such a manner that their faces
were turned towards each other and down towards the
lid, which they overshadowed with their expanded
wings. Between these figures God was regarded as
having fixed his dwelling-place (see do€a, III. 1): Heb.
ix. 5. In Ezek. i. and x. another and far more elabor-
ate form is ascribed to them; but the author of the
Ep. to the Heb. has Ex. xxv. 18-20 in mind. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Cherubim; Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 710
sq.; Dillmann in Schenkel i. 509 sqq.; Riehm, De Na-
tura et Notione Symbolica Cheruborum (Basil. 1864) ;
also his ‘ Die Cherubim in d. Stiftshiitte u. im Tempel’
in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1871 p. 399 sqq.; and in
his HWB. p. 227 sqq.3 [ef. Lenormant, Beginnings of
History, (N. Y. 1882), ch. iii.].*
Xhpa, -as, 7, (fem. of the adj. yjpos, ‘bereft’; akin to
xépoos, sterile, barren, and the Lat. careo, [but ef. Cur-
tius § 192]), fr. Hom. II. 6, 408 down, Sept. for TID DN,
a widow: Mt. xxiii. 14 (18) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40, 42 sq.;
Lk. ii. 87; iv. 253 vii. 12; xviii. 3,5; xx. 47; xxi. 28q.3
Acts vi. 1; ix. 39,413; 1Co. vii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 3-5, 9, 11,
16; Jas. i. 27; with yuvn added (2 S. xiv. 5, and often
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 2, 289 down), Lk. iv. 26;
a city stripped of inhabitants and riches is represented
under the figure of a widow, Rev. xviii. 7,*
xés (Rec.; also Grsb. in Acts and Heb.), i. q. eyes
(q. v-), yesterday; Sept. for inn. [Hom. (h. Merc.), al.]
X'Alapxos, -ov, 6, (x/Acoe and dpyw; [on the form of
KuALas
the word ct. reff. s. v. xarovrdpyns, and L. and S. s. v.
xAudpxns]), the commander of a thousand soldiers, a
chiliarch; the commander of a Roman cohort (a military
tribune): Jn. xviii. 12; Acts xxi. 31-33, 57; xxii. 24,
26-29; xxiii. 10, 15, 17-19, 22; xxiv. 7 Rec., 22; xxv.
23, (Sept. for DDN yw and DD IN WN). any military
commander [R.V. high or chief captain, captain]: Mk.
vi. 21; Rev. vi. 15; xix. 18. [(Aeschyl., Xen., al.)]*
xtduds, -ddos, }, (xiAvor), @ thousand, the number one
thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv. 4; 1 Co. x. 8;
Rey. v. 11; vii. 4-S; xi. 13; xiv. 1-3; xxi. 16; Sept.
for 2s, DDN. [Hadt. on.]*
xAron, -at, -a, a thousand: 2 Pet.iii. 8; Rev. xi. 3, ete.
Xtos, -ov, 7, Chios, an island in the Agean Sea, be-
tween Samos and Lesbos, not far from the shore of
Lydia: Acts xx. 15.*
xitav, -dvos, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for njAd and
N33, a tunic, an undergarment, usually worn next the
skin: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 9; Lk. iii. 11; ix.3; Jude 23;
it is distinguished from 76 inarvoy (q. V. 2) or Ta ivdria in
Mt. v. 40; Lk. vi. 29; Jn. xix. 23; Acts ix. 39; univ. a
garment, vestment (Aeschyl. suppl. 903), plur. (Plut. Tib.
Gracch. 19), Mk. xiv. 63. [Cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v.
Tunica; and reff. s. v. iudtiopy, u.s.] *
xdv, -dvos, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for i5v%, snow:
Mt. xxviii.3; Mk. ix. 3 (where it is omitted by GT Tr
WH); Rev. i. 14.*
xAapus, -vdos, 7, (acc. to the testimony of Pollux 10,
38, 164, first used by Sappho), a chlamys, an outer gar-
ment usually worn over the yr [q. v.]; spec. the Lat.
paludamentum [q.v-. in Richy Dict. of Antiq. s. v. sub
fin.], a kind of short cloak worn by soldiers, military
officers, magistrates, kings, emperors, ete. (2 Mace. xii.
85; Joseph. antt. 5, 1,10; Hdian., Ael., al.; often in
Plut.): Mt. xxvii. 28, 31, [A.V. robe ; see Meyer ad loc.;
Trench, Syn. §1.; Rich (as above) s.v. Chlamys; and
other reff. s. v. iuartov ].*
xAcudtw; impf. éxyAevafov; (xAevn, jesting, mockery) ;
to deride, mock, jeer: Actsii.13 Rec. ; xvii. 32. (2 Mace.
vii. 27; Sap. xi. 15; Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Leian., al.) [Comp.: d:a-yAevaga. | *
xAtapds, -d, -dv, (xAiw, to become warm, liquefy, melt),
tepid, lukewarm: metaph. of the condition of a soul
wretchedly fluctuating between a torpor and a fervor of
love, Rev. iii. 16. (Hdt., Pind., Diod., Plut., Athen.,
Geop.) *
XAcy [(i. e. ‘tender verdure’; an appellation of De-
meter, ‘the Verdant ’)], -ys, 7, Chloe, a Christian woman
of Corinth: 1 Co.i. 11. [Cf. B.D. s. v.]*
XAwpos, -z, -dv, (contr. fr. yAoepds, fr. xAdn, tender
green grass or corn) ; 1. green: xépros, Mk. vi. 39
(Gen. i. 30); Rev. viii. 7; may xAwpdy, ix. 4. 2.
yellowish, pale: trmos, Rev. vi. 8. (In both senses fr.
Hom. down.) *
xis’, six hundred and sixty-six (x’—=600; &=60;
S$” ==6),a mystical number the meaning of which is clear
when it is written in Hebr. letters, 1Dp 13, i. e. Népov
Kaicap, ‘ Nero Caesar’, (sometimes the Jews write 0p
669
Xopacw
for the more common ‘0p, the Syriac always g-tQ0,
cf. Ewald, Die Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 263 note;
[Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. ed. 1, § 25 III. p. 449 note];
J —— G0 ne) =——20051 | —1058 1 —0 0, p= 10030 G60; =>
200): Rev. xiii, 18 RGT Tr. [For adigest of opin-
ions respecting this much debated number see Lee in
the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ ad loc.]*
Xoikds, -7 -dv, (xovs, q. V-), made of earth, earthy: 1 Co.
xv. 47-49. (yupvot rovTovs tod xoikod Bapovs, Anon. in
Walz, Rhett. i. p. 613, 4; [Hippol. haer. 10, 9 p. 314,
95].)*
xotve, -txos, 7, fr. Hom. Od. 19, 28 down, a choeniz,
a dry measure, containing four cotylae or two sextarii
[i.e. less than our ‘quart’; cf. L. and S. s. v.] (or as
much as would support a man of moderate appetite for
a day; hence called in Athen. 3 § 20 p. 98 e. nueporpopir
[cf. 4 xoimé jyepnovos tpopy, Diog. Laért. 8, 18]): Rev.
vi. 6 [where A.V. measure (see Am. appendix ad loc.) ].*
Xotpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a swine: plur., Mt. vii.
6; viii. 30, [31], 32; Mk. v. 11-13, 14 Ree., [16]; Lk.
Vili. 32 sq.3 xv. 15sq. (Not found in the O. T.) *
XOAda, -@; (oA, q.V-) 5 L. to be atrabilious; to
be mad (Arstph. nub. 833). 2. to be angry, en-
raged, (for xoodpa:, more com. in the earlier Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down) : rei, Jn. vii. 23 (3 Mace. iii. 1; Artem.,
Nicand., Mosch., Diog. Laért., al.).*
XOAH, -s, 7, (i. q- xddos, fr. yew to pour out [now
thought to be connected with yxAdn, xA@pés, etc. * yellow-
ish green’; cf. Curtius § 200; Vanicek p. 247)]), fire:
found in Archilochus (8th cent. B. c.), afterwards in
Aeschyl. et sqq. 1. bile, gall: Mt. xxvii. 34 (cf.
Sept. Ps. xviii. (Ixix.) 22) [ef. B. D.s.v. Gall]; Acts viii.
23 (on which see mexpia) ; for 197, Job xvi. 13. 2;
in the O. T. it is also used of other bitter things; for
my, wormwood, Prov. v. 4; Lam. iii. 15; hence some
understand the word in Mt. xxvii. 34 to mean myrrh, on
account of Mk. xv. 23; but see opzvpvita, 2; [B. D.u.s.].*
X0s, see xous.
Xopatly ([so GL, also Mt. xi. 21 Rec.; Lk. x. 13 Rec.*!"];
Xopa¢eiv T Tr WH; [Xopativ, Lk. x. 13 Rec.*te; see
et, «; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; WH. App. p. 155*]), 7, indecl.
Chorazin, a town of Galilee, which is mentioned neither
in the O. T. nor by Josephus; acc. to Jerome (in his
Onomast. [cf. Euseb. onomast. ed. Larsow and Parthey
p. 374]) two miles distant from Capernaum; perhaps the
same place which in the talmud, Menach. f. 85, 1 is called
pri [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 139], the re-
mains of which Robinson (Biblical Researches, iii. 347,
359 sq.) thinks must be sought for in the ruins of the
modern Tell Him; but Wilson (Recovery of Jerusalem
Am. ed. pp. 270, 292 sqq.; Our Work in Palestine,
p- 188), with whom [Thomson (Land and Book, ii. 8)],
Socin (in Baedeker’s Palestine and Syria, Eng. ed. p.
374), Wolff (in Riehm p. 235), [the Conders (Hdbk. to
the Bible, p. 324), and the majority of recent scholars]
agree, holds to the more probable opinion which identi-
fies it with Kerdzeh, a heap of ruins lying an hour’s
Kopnyew
journey to the N.E. of Tell Ham: Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x.
13. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim i. p. 605 [Eng. trans.
ii. 367] and ii. 118 [Eng. trans. iii. 143].*
xopnyew, -@; fut. 3 pers. sing. yopnyjoet (2 Co. ix. 10
GLTTr WH); 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. yopnyjoat (ib.
Ree.) ; (xopnyés, the leader of a chorus; fr. xopds and
ayo [yéopat]); fr. [Simon.], Xen., Plat. down; 1.
to be a chorus-leader, lead a chorus. 2. to furnish
the chorus at one’s own expense; to procure and supply
all things necessary to fit out the chorus (so very often in
the Attic writ.). 3. in later writ. ([ Aristot.], Polyb.,
Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.; 1 K. iv. 7; 1 Mace.
xiv. 10; 2 Macc. iii. 3, ete.), to supply, furnish abundant-
ly: ri, 2 Co. ix. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 11. [Comp.: émt-xopr-
yew. | *
Xopos, -ov, 6, (by metath. fr. dpyos, dpyeouat, [(?); prob.
related to xdpros (Lat. hortus), xpdvos, etc., denoting
primarily ‘an enclosure for dancing’; cf. Curtius § 189]),
fr. Hom. down, a band (of dancers and singers), a cire
cular dance, a dance, dancing: Lk. xv. 25 (for NIN,
Ex. xv. 20; Judg. xi. 34, ete.; for in, Lam. v. 15; Ps,
cl. 4).*
xopraf{w: 1 aor. éydpraca; 1 aor. pass. éxopracdny;
fut. pass. yopracOncopar; (xépros, q. V.)$; first in Hesiod
(opp. 450) ; a. to feed with herbs, grass, hay, to jill
or satisfy with food, to fatten; animals (so uniformly
in the earlier Grk. writ. [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 12
W. 23]): #pvea éx trav caper, pass. Rev. xix. 21 [here
A.V. were jilled). b. in later (cf. Sturz, Dial.
iaaced. and Alex. p. 200 sqq.) and Biblical Greek, to
fill or satisfu men (Sept. for pay and jravn; with
some degree of Eontemipt in Plat. de rep. 9 p. 586 a.
kexuores eis ynv Kal eis Tpamé{as Bookovrat xopratopevoe
kal dxevovTes). a. prop.: twa, Mt. xv. 33; pass.,
Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 42; vii. 27; viii. 8; Lk. ix.
17; Jn. vi. 26; Jas. ii. 16; opp. to mewav, Phil. iv. 12;
tua Tivos (like miumAnue (cf. W. § 30, 8 b.]): dptwv, with
bread, Mk. viii. 4 (Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 15); riva dro with
a gen. of the thing (cf. B. § 132, 12], pass. Lk. xvi. 21
(Ps. ciii. (civ.) 13); [reva éx w. gen. of the thing (B. u.s.),
pass. Lk. xv. 16 Trmrg. WH]. B. metaph.: riva,
to fulfil or satisfy the desire of any one, Mt. v. 6; Lk.
vi. /215;(Ps./evisi(evii.)9):*
XoOptacpa, -ros, rd, (xopratw), feed, fodder, for animals
(Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; food, (vegetable) sus-
tenance, whether for men or flocks: plur. Acts vii. 11.*
XOPTos, -ov, 6; 1. the place where grass grows
and animals graze: Hom. I. 11, 774; 24, 640. 2.
fr. Hes. down, grass, herbage, hay, provender: of green
grass, Mt. vi. 30; xiv. 19; Lk. xii. 28; Jn. vi. 10; Jas.
i. 10sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24 (fr. Is. xl. 6 sqq.) 3 Rev. ix. 4; xdpr.
xAwpds, Mk. vi. 39; Rev. viii. 7; ydpros of growing crops,
Mt. xiii. 26; Mk. iv. 28; of hay, 1 Co. iii. 12. (Sept.
for ST grass, and 3i}).) *
Xovtas, - (Tdf. Proleg. p.104; B. 20 (18)], 6, Chuzas
[ A.V. (less correctly) Chusa], the steward of Herod
Antipas: Lk. viii. 3.*
Xods, -ods, acc. -ovy, 6, (contr. for xdos, fm xé€w, to pour),
670
xpela
fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop. earth dug out, an earth-heap
(Germ. Schutt): 6 yods 6 eEopuxdeis, Hdt. 2, 150. 2.
dust (Sept. for 19)): Mk. vi. 11; Rev. xviii. 19, ((Josh.
vii. 11; Sap. v. 15; Sir. xliv. 21, etc.]; Plut. mor.
p- 1096 b. [i. e. non posse suaviter ete. 13, 7]).*
Xpdopat, ypauar; impf. 3 pers. plur. éypavro; 1 aor,
expnoapnv; pf. éxpnua (1 Co. ix. 15 GLT Tr WH);
fr. Hom. down ; (mid. of xpd [thought to be allied by
metath. with yep (cf. Curtius § 189)], ‘to grant a loan’,
‘to lend’ [but cf. L. and S.s. v.; they regard the radica\
sense as ‘to furnish what is needful ’]; hence) 1.
prop. to receive a loan; to borrow. 2. to take for
one’s use; to use: rwi [W. § 31, 1i.], to make use of a
thing, Acts xxvii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 12, 15; 1 Tim. i. 8; v.
23; T@ xdope, the good things of this world, 1 Co. vii.
31 RG (see below) ; paddAov xpjoa, sc. the opportunity
of becoming free, ib. 21 (where others, less fitly, supply
T@ kAnOnvat Sovdop [see reff. s. v. ei, III. 6 a.]). contrary
to the regular usage of class. Grk. with an acc.: rév Ké-
opoy, 1 Co. vii. 31 LT Tr WH; see Meyer ad loc.; B.
§ 133, 18; W.u.s.; (also in Sap. vii. 14 ace. to some
codd.; [L. and S. give (Pseudo-)Aristot. oecon. 2, 22
p- 1350*, 7]). with the dat. of a virtue or vice describing
the mode of thinking or acting : r7 éAadpia, [R. V. ‘shew
fickleness’], 2 Co. i. 17; woAAW wappyoia, ib. iii. 12, (for
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, see Passow
ii. p. 2497°; [L. and S. s. v. II. a.]). with adverbs (see
Passow ii. p. 24979; [L. and S. s.v. 1V.]): drordpas, to
deal sharply, use sharpness, 2 Co. xiii. 10. of the use of
persons: twit, to bear one’s self towards, to deal with,
treat, one (often so in Grk. writ.; see Passow ii. p. 24965
[L. and S. s.v. III. 1 and 2]), Acts xxvii. 3.*
Xpdw, see kixpnpt.
xpela, -as, 9, (xp), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph.down; 1.
necessity, need: ra mpos thy xpetav [LT Tr WH ap. ras
xpelas (cf. below) ], such things as suited the exigency,
such things as we needed for sustenance and the jour-
ney, Acts xxviii. 10; eis ras dvaykaias ypetas, [A. V. for
necessary uses] i. e. to supply what is absolutely neces-
sary for life [(cf. Babr. fab. 136, 9) ; al. understand the
‘wants’ here as comprising those of charity or of wor-
ship], Tit. iii. 14; mpds otkodouny tis xpetas, for the edi-
fication of souls, of which there is now special need,
Eph. iv. 29 [cf. R. V. and mrg.]; éore xpeia, there is
need, foll. by an ace. with inf. Heb. vii. 11; €ore xpeta
tivds, there is need of something, Rev. xxii. 5 Grsb.; Lk.
x. 42 [(but not WH mrg.)]; €x xpelav twos, to have
need of (be in want of) some thing (often in the Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, cf. Passow s. v. 1; [L. and S.
s.v. II.1]), Mt. vi. 8; xxi.3; Mk. xi.3; Lk. [ix. 11; xv.
7]; xix. 31, 345; xxii. 71; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Co. xii. 21, 243
jd bl eh gee ie Hae x. 86; Rev. iii. 17 RG (see ition).
xxi. 23; xxii. 5 (not Greb.) 5 rod with an inf. Heb. v.
12 [W.§ 44, 4 a.; cf. ris, 2 b. p. 626* bot.]; the gen. of
the thing is evident fr. the context, Acts ii. 453 iv. 35;
with he gen. of a pers. whose aid, testimony, etc., is
needed, Mt. ix. 12; xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 17; xiv. 63; Lk.
v.31; €xw xpetav, foll. by an ue (cf. B. § 140, 3), Tet
xpewperrerns
have need to etc., Mt. iii.14; xiv.16; Jn. xiii. 10; 1 Th.
i. 8; iv. 9 [with which cf. v. 1 (see W. 339 (318); B.
§ 140, 3)]; foll. by ta (see tva, II. 2 c. [B. § 139, 46;
ef. Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 18]), Jn. ii. 25; xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii.
27; xpeiav exw, absol., to have need: Mk. in. 25; [Eph.
iv. 28]; 1 Jn. iii. 17; ovdev ypeiav éxw, to have need as
to nothing [cf. B. § 131, 10], Rev. in, 17 LT Tr WH.
» xpeia with a gen. of the subj. the condition of one de-
prived of those thungs which he is scarcely able to do with-
oul, want, need: Netroupyds THs xpeias pou (see Aecroupyds,
2 fin.), Phil. ii. 25; adnpodv thy ypeiav tds (Thue. 1.
70), Phil. iv. 19; [add, eis (Lchm. br. eis) tiv xperav poe
éméupare, unto (i. e. to relieve, cf. ets, B. IL. 3c. y. p. 185°
top) my need, Phil. iv. 16]; plur. one’s necessities :
dnnpereiv tais x. to provide for one’s necessities, Acts
xX. 34; Kowwveiv tais x. [cf. p. 352" top}, Ro. xii. 13. 2.
duty, business, (so esp. fr. Polyb. down [cf. Jud. xii. 10;
1 Mace. xii. 45; xiii. 37; 2 Mace. vin. 24, ete.]): Acts
vi. 3.*
Xpemerderns (LT Tr WH xpeod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 691; W.§5,1d.13; [WH. App. p. 152°; Tdf. Pro-
leg. p.89; T (?; seeu.s.) WH -perérns, cf. WH. App.
p- 154° (see I, ¢)]), -ov, 6, (xpéos or ypéws, a loan, a debt,
and ddeAérns, q. v-),a@ debtor : Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 5. (Prov.
xxix. 13; Job xxxi. 37; Aesop. fab. 289 [ed. Coray, 11
ed. Halm]; several times in Plut.; [also in Diod., Dion.
Hal. ; see Soph. Lex. s.v.].) *
xpy; (fr. xpaw, ypaee contr. yp); impers. verb, it is
necessary; it behooves: foll. by an inf. Jas. iii. 10 [(B.
§§ 131, 3; 132, 12). From Hom. on. Syn. see dei, fin.]*
xento; (xen); fr. Hom. down ; to have need of, to be
in want of: with a gen. of the obi. [W. § 30, 8 a.], Mt.
vi. 32; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 30; Ro. xvi. 2 [here w. gen. of a
pers.]; 2Co. iii. 1.*
XP%PO, -ros, Td, (ypdouar), in Grk. writ. whatever is
for use, whatever one uses, a thing, matter, affair, event,
business; spec. money (rarely so in the sing. in prof.
auth., as Hdt. 3, 38; Diod. 13, 106 [cf. L. and S.s.v. I.
sub fin.]): Actsiv.37; plur. riches (often in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. Od. 2, 78; 16, 315 ete. down), Mk. x. 24 [T
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; of ra ypyuarta éyovres, they
that have riches, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; money, Acts
viii. 18, 20; xxiv. 26, (for O02 silver, Job xxvii. 17; for
D’DD), riches, Josh. xxii. 8; 2 Chr. i. 11 sq.).*
Xenparltw; fut. yonuatiow (Ro. vii. 3 (ef. B. 37 (33)];
in Grk. writ. everywh. the Attic -.4, so too Jer. xxxii.
16 (xxv. 30); xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2); 1 aor. éypnudtica; pf.
pass. xexypnuaricpat; 1 aor. pass. éypnua.ioOnv; (xpnua
business); in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; 1. to
transact business, esp. to manage public affairs ; to advise
or consult with one about public affairs; to make answer
to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests, ete. ;
used of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence in
some later Grk. writ. 2. to give a response to those
consulting an oracle (Diod. 3, 6; 15, 10; Plut. mor.
p- 435 c. [i. e. de defect. orace. 46]; several times in
Leian.); hence used of God in Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14;
10, 1. 3; 11, 8, 4; univ. (dropping all ref. to a previous
671
XPNaTOs
consultation), to grve a divine command or admonition,
to teach from heaven, [(Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 80))]: with
a. dat. of the pers. Job xl. 3; pass. foll. by an inf. [A. V.
revealed etc.], Lk. ii. 26 (ypnparigew Adyous mpés Twa,
Jer. Xxxvii. (xxx.) 2); pass. to be divinely commanded,
admonished, instructed, [R.V. warned of God], Mt. ii.
12, 22; Acts x. 22; Heb. viii. 5; xi. 7, (this pass. use
is hardly found elsewh. exc. in Joseph. antt. 3, 8,8; [11,
8,4]; cf. B.§134,4; [W.§ 39, 1a.]); to be the mouth-
piece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands of
God, (twi, Jer. xxxili. (xxvi.) 2; xxxvi. (xxix.) 23):
of Moses, Heb. xii. 25 [R. V. warned]. 3. to assume
or take to one’s self a name from one’s public business
(Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; univ. to receive a name or
title, be called: Acts xi. 26; Ro. vii. 3, (Joseph. antt. [8,
6, 2]; 13, 11, 3; b. j. 2, 18, 7; [e. Apion. 2, 3,1; Philo,
quod deus immut. § 25 fin.; leg. ad Gaium § 43]; ’Avrio-
xov tov ’Emepavy xpnuarigovra, Diod. in Miiller’s fragm.
vol. ii. p. xvii. no. xxi. 45 "IdxwBov tov ypnpatioavra
adedpov rod xupiov, Acta Philippi init. p. 75 ed. Tdf.;
‘laxwBouv ... bv kai ddehpov rod Xpiotrov xpnpatioa vi
Geion Adyou meptexovow, Eus. h. e. 7, 19; [ef. Soph. Lex.
Biv. Ail )ee
XPNpatiopds, -ov, 6, (xpnwutiCw, q.v.), a divine response,
an oracle: Ro. xi. 4. (2 Mace. ii. 4; ef. Diod. 1,1; 14,
7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17,5; [ef. Artem. oneir. 1, 2 p. 8;
Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. (vol. ii. col. 1532)]; in various
other senses in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) *
XPyTpos, -7, -ov, (xpdopat), first in Theogn. 406, fit for
use, useful: 2 Tim. ii. 14.*
XPficts, -ews, 7), (ypdouat), use: of the sexual use of a
woman, Ro. i. 26 sq. (matduxn, Leian. amor. 25; dpéées
mapa tas xpyoeas, Plut. placit. philos. 5, 5; [ef. Isocr.
p- 386 c.; Plat. legg. 8 p. 841 a.; Aristot., al.]).*
Xpyorevopar ; (xpnords, q.v.); to show one’s self mild,
to be kind, use kindness: 1 Co. xiii.4. (Eccles. writ., as
Euseb h. e. 5, 1,463; text, towards one, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
13, 2; 14, 8.) *
Xpnetoroyla, -as, 7, (fr. xpnoroAdyos, and this fr.
xpnoros, q. v., and Aéeyw; cf. Jul. Capitol. in the life of
Pertinax ce. 13 “Omnes, qui libere fabulas conferebant,
male Pertinaci loquebantur, ypyoroddyov eum appel-
lantes, qui bene loqueretur et male faceret”), fair speak-
ing, the smooth and plausible address which simulates
goodness: Ro. xvi. 18. (Eustath. p. 1437, 27 [on II. 23,
598]; eccles. writ.) *
xpnords, -7, -dv, (xpdoua), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for
310; 1. prop. jit for use, useful; virtuous, good:
#On xpnord, 1 Co. xv. 33 ([Treg. ypyora (but cf. B. 11)],
see 700s, 2). 2. manageable, i.e. mild, pleasant, (opp.
to harsh, hard, sharp, bitter): of things, ypnordrepos oivos,
pleasanter, Lk. v. 39 [here T Tr txt. ypyordés; so WH
in br.] (of wine also in Plut. mor. p. 240d. [i.e. Lacaen.
apophtheg. (Gorg. 2); p. 1073 a. (i. e. de com. notit.
28)]; of food and drink, Plat. de rep. 4 p. 488 a.; cixa,
Sept. Jer. xxiv. 3, 5); 6 ¢uyés (opp. to burdensome),
Mt. xi. 30 [A. V. easy]; of persons, kind, benevolent: of
God, 1 Pet. ii. 3 [A. V. gracious] fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.)
XPNTTOTHS
3; rb xpnordv Tod beod i. q. 9 xpnoTdtns [W. § 34, 2], Ro.
ii. 4; of men, eis twa towards one, Eph. iv. 32; éri tea,
Lk. vi. 35 [here of God; in both pass. A. V. kind].*
Xpnerérys, -yTos, 9, (xpyoTos) ;
ness, integrity: Ro. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) [A. V.
‘doeth good’. 2. benignity, kindness: Ro.ii.4; 2
Co. vi. 6; Gal. v. 22; Col. iii. 12; Tit. iii. 45 9 xp. twos
éri twa, Ro. xi. 22 (opp. to droropia [q. v-]); Eph. ii. 7.
(Sept.; Eur., Isae., Diod., Joseph., Ael., Hdian.; often
in Plut.) [See Trench, Syn. § Ixiii.]*
xpiopa (so RG Led. min. WH) and ypicua (L ed.
maj. T Tr; on the accent see W.§ 6,1e.; Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35; [7df Proleg. p. 102]), -ros,
7d, (xpia, q-v-), anything smeared on, unguent, ointment,
usually prepared by the Hebrews from oil and aromatic
herbs. Anointing was the inaugural ceremony for
priests (Ex. xxviii. 37; xl. 13 (15); Lev. vi. 22; Num.
xxxv. 25), kings (1S. ix. 16; x. 1; xv. 1}; xvi. 3, 13),
and sometimes also prophets (1 K. xix. 16 cf. Is. lxi. 1),
and by it they were regarded as endued with the Holy
Spirit and divine gifts (1S. xvi. 13; Is. lxi.1; Jo
seph. antt. 6, 8, 2 mpds rév Aavidéyy—when anointed
by Samuel —peraBaiver 76 Oeiov Katadurév SdovAov: «at
6 pev mpodnrevew ipEato, rod Oetov wveiparos eis adrdv
petotxwwapevov) ; [see BB. DD. s.vv. Ointment, Anoint-
ing]. Hence in 1 Jn. ii. 20 (where dé tov dytov is so
used as to imply that this ypicya renders them dytous
[cf. Westcott ad loc.]) and 27, ré ypioya is used of the
g'fi of the Holy Spirit, as the efficient aid in getting a
knowledge of the truth; see ypiw. (Xen., Theophr.,
Diod., Philo, al.; for Mmwn, Ex. xxix. 7; xxx. 25;
RW) Axl Agi(S) oye
Xprotiaves [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 16 note], -ov,
6, (Xpuorés), a Christian, a follower of Christ: Acts xi.
26; xxvi. 28; 1 Pet. iv. 16. The name was first given
to the worshippers of Jesus by the Gentiles, but from the
second century (Justin Mart. [e. g. apol. 1, 4 p. 55 a.;
dial. c. Tryph. § 35; cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 12, 4]) onward
accepted by them as a title of honor. Cf. Lipsius,
Ueber Ursprung u. iiltesten Gebrauch des Christen-
namens. 4to pp. 20, Jen. 1873. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 2;
Farrar in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; on the ‘Titles of Believers
in the N. T.’ see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 125 sq. ;
ef. Dict. of Chris. Antiqq. s. v. ‘ Faithful ’.] *
Xpirtes, -7, -dv, (xpiw), Sept. for Twn, anointed: 6
fepeds 6 xptords, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; of yptorol iepeis, 2
Mace. i. 10; the patriarchs are called, substantively, of
xptoro. Oeov, Ps. civ. (ev.) 15; the sing. 6 xptords rod
kupiov (Nim Mw) in the O. T. often of the king of
Israel (see xpicpa), as 1S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11; xxvi.
9,11, 23]; 28.1. 145 Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (xviii.) 51; Hab.
ili. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus,
as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1; of the coming king whom the
Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the
author of their highest felicity: the name 6 yptords
(wn, Chald. Smwn) is not found in the O. T. but is
first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [ef.
Schodde’s note]; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which
672
YplaT os
some have attempted to prove that the section contain-
ing these passages is of Christian origin are not
convincing [cf. vids rod avOpazov, 2 and reff.]), after Ps.
1. moral good- | ii. 2 referred to the Messiah; [ef. Psalter of Sol. 17, 36;
18, 6. 8]. Cf. Keim ii. 549 [Eng. trans. iv. 263 sq.;
Westcott ‘ Additional Note’on1Jn.v.1. On the gen-
eral subject see Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29.] In
the N. T. it is used 1. of the Messiah, viewed in
his generic aspects [the word, that is to say, being used
as an appellative rather than a proper name], 6 yptords?
Mt. ii.4; xvi.16; xxiii. 10; xxiv. 5, 23; xxvi. 63; Mk.
viii. 29; xii. 355 xiii. 213 xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 15; iv. 41; xx.
41; xxii. 67 (66); xxiii. 39; xxiv. 26, 46; Jn. i. 20, 25,
[41 (42) Rec.]; iii. 28; iv. 29; vi. 69 Rec.; vii. 26, 31,
Al; xi. 273 xii. 34; xx. 31; Acts ii. 30 Rec.,31; ii. 183
Vill. 537 1x.:225) xvi. 3°5\ xvii, 5, 28siaxva. Lok
yop jes esa Be 6 xptords Kupiov or Tod Oeod, Lk. ii. 265 ix.
20; Actsiv. 26; without the article, Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2;
Jn. i. 41 (42) LT Tr WH; ix. 22; Acts ii. 3653 ‘6 xpw
atds, 6 Baowheds Tod Iopand, Mk. xv. 32; 6 xptords se
used as to refer to Jesus, Rev. xx. 4,6; with rod Ocod
added, Rev. xi. 15; xii. 10. 2. It is added, as an
appellative (‘ Messiah’, ‘anointed’), to the proper name
"Inoods; a. "Inoovs 6 xptords, Jesus the Christ (‘Mes
siah’): Acts v.42 RG; ix. 34[RG]; 1 Co. iii. 11 Rece.;
1Jn.v.6 [RGL]; "Inaois 6 Acydpevos xptorés, who they
say is the Messiah [(cf. b. below) ], Mt. xxvii. 22; with-
out the art. Incods xptotds, Jesus as Christ or Messiah,
Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7, [but in all three exx. it
seems better to take yp. as a prop. name (see b. below) ]};
6 xptorés "Inaois, the Christ (Messiah) who is Jesus, [Mt.
ji. 18 WH mrg. (see b. below)]; Acts v. 42 LT Tr WH
[R. V. Jesus as the Christ]; xix. 4 Ree. b. 6 Xpe
ards is a proper name (cf. W.§ 18,9 N.1; [as respects
the use of a large or a small initial letter the critical edd.
vary: Tdf. seems to use the capital initial in all cases;
Treg. is inconsistent (using a small letter, for in-
stance, in all the exx. under 1 above, exe. Lk. xxii. 67
and Jn. iv. 29; in Mt.i.1 a capital, in Mk. ila
small letter, ete.); WH have adopted the principle of
using a capital when the art. is absent and avoiding it
when the art. is present (1 Pet. being intentionally ex-
cepted; the small letter being retained also in such exx.
as Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2; Acts ii. 36, etc.) ; see WH. Intr.
§415]): Mt.i.17; xi. 2; Ro. i. 16 Rec.; vii. 4; ix.5;
xiv. 18 [here L om. Tr br. the art.]; xv. 19; 1Co. i. 6,
ete. without the article, Mk. ix.'41; Ro. vi. 43 viii. 9,
17; 1Co.i. 12; Gal. ii. 16 sq. 19 (20), 21; iii. 27; Phil.
i. 10, 13, 19-21, 23; ii. 16; Col. ii. 5,8; Heb. iii. 6, and
often. "Inoods Xpiorés, Mt. i 1, 18 [here Tr om. ’I., WH
txt. br. "I.; al 6’I. Xp. which is unique; see WH. App.
ad loc.]; Mk. i. 1; Jn. i. 17; Acts ii. 38; 111.6; iv.10;
viii. 12 ; [ix.34.4T Tr WH]; x. 86 ; xi. 17.5)xv. 26 ;)xvE
18, 31 [RG]; xx. 21 [here L WH txt. om. Tr br. Xp.];
xxviii. 81 [Tdf. om. Xp.]; Ro. i. 1 [RG WH txt. (see be-
low)], 6, 8; ii. 16 [RG Trtxt. WH mrg. (see below) ];
1 Co. i. 7-9; iii. 11 [G T Tr WH (Ree. ’I. 6 Xp.)]; xv.
57, and very often in the Epp. of Paul and Peter; Heb.
xpie
xiao. Sn. 1.8, 7 ( RG); iitsfv.6GITrwH};
2 Jn. 7 [(see a. above) ]; Jude 4,17, 21; Rev.i. 1 sq. 5;
xxii. 21 [RG (WH br. al. om. Xp.)]. Xpiords "Inaods,
Ro. [i. 1 T Tr WH mrg. (see above) ; ii. 16 T Tr mrg.
WH txt. (see above) ]; vi. 3[ WH br. ’I.]; 1 Co. i. 2, 30;
[iii. 11 Lehm. (see above)]; Gal. iii. 14 [here Tr txt.
WH txt. 1. X.]; iv.14; v.6 [WH br. ’I.]; vi. 15; Phil. ii.
5; ili. 3,14; Col.ii.6; 1 Tim.i. 2; ii.5. "Incods 6 Aeyo-
pevos Xpioros, surnamed ‘ Christ’ [(cf. a. above) ], Mt. i.
16. on the phrases év Xpurt@, év Xpor@ "Incod, see ev,
I. 6b. p. 211° [ef. W. § 20, 2a.]. Xpsoros and "Incois Xp.
év tuo, preached among, 2 Co. i. 19; Col. i. 27 [al. (so
R.V.) would take év here internally (asin the foll. exx.),
within; cf. év, I. 2]; Xpuords &v tow is used of the per-
son of Christ, who by his holy power and Spirit lives in
the souls of his followers, and so moulds their characters
that they bear his likeness, Ro. viii. 10 (cf. 9); 2 Co.
xiii. 5; Gal. ii. 20; Eph. iii. 17; a mind conformed to
the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 19.
xpiw: 1 aor. éypica; (akin to yeip [(?), see Curtius
§ 201], xpaivw ; prop. ‘to touch with the hand’, ‘to be-
smear’); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Mw; to anoint (on
the persons who received anointing among the Hebrews,
see xpiopa); in the N. 'T. only trop. of God a. con-
secrating Jesus to the Messianic office, and furnishing
him with powers necessary for its administration (see
xpiopa): Lk. iv. 18 (after Is. lxi. 1) ; contrary to com-
mon usage with an acc. of the thing, ¢Aaov (like verbs
of clothing, putting on, ete. [cf. W. § 32, 4a.; B.§ 131,
6]), Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; in Theoph. ad Autol.
1, 12 we find xpieo@a: €Aatov Geod and xp. hari Kal rvev-
part almost in the same sentence); mvevpate dyi@ kat
Suvapet, Acts x. 38; also ypiew used absol., Acts iv.
27. b. enduing Christians with the gifts of the
Holy Spirit [cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. ii. 20]: 2 Co. i. 21.
[Comp.: év-, émt- xpia. SYN. see ddeida, fin. ]*
xpovitw; fut. ypovicw (Heb. x. 37 T Tr txt. WH), Attic
xpome (ibid. RG L Tr mrg.); (xpovos) ; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down; Sept. for 18 ; to linger, delay, tarry: Mt.
xxv. 5; Heb. x. 37; foll. by év with a dat. of the place,
Lk. i. 21; foll. by an inf., Mt. xxiv. 48 [LT Tr WH om.
inf.]: Lk. xii. 45.*
Xpovos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for oy, Fy’, ete.
time : Heb. xi. 32; Rev. x. 6; 6 yp. rod patwvopevov aareépos,
the time since the star began to shine [cf. daive, 2 a.],
Mt. ii. 7; [6 xp. rod rexeiv adrny (Gen. xxv. 24), Lk. i.57
(B. 267 (230); cf. W. § 44, 4 a.)]; ris emayyedias, Acts
vii. 17; rs mapotxias, 1 Pet. i.17; ypovor dizoxatacrdcews,
Acts iii. 21; of yp. ris dyvoias, Acts xvii. 30; xpovov
diayevopevov, Acts XXVii. 9; mécos ypdvos €ativ, as TOUTO
yeyovev, Mk. ix. 21; 6 mapednArvOas xp. 1 Pet. iv. 3 (where
Ree. adds rod Biov) ; teaoapaxovtaerns, Acts vii. 23 ; xiii.
18; oreypy xpdvov, Lk. iv. 5; mAnpwpa rod xpdvov, Gal.
iv. 4; movetv ([q. v. II. d.] to spend) xpdvov, Acts xv. 33;
XVili. 23; Bidoat Tov emiAourov xpdvor. 1 Pet. iv. 2; duddvar
xpévov tui (i.e. a space of time, respite), iva etc. Rev. ii.
21 [(Joseph. b. j. 4,3, 10)]; plur. joined with xazpoi,
Acts i. 7; 1 Th. v. 1, (see xatpos, 2 e. p. 3194) ; em’ €axarav
673
Xpuo tov
(LT Tr WH éoxdrov) rav yp. (see €rxaros, 1 fin.), 1 Pet.
i. 20; [add, én’ eoydrov tov (‘Tr WH om. rod) xpovou,
Jude 18 L T Tr WH]. with prepositions: dypt, Acts
ili. 21; da tov xp., on account of the length of time,
Heb. v. 12 (Polyb. 2, 21,2; Aleiphr. 1, 26,9); ék xpovwr
ixavov, for a long time, Lk. viii. 27 [RGL Tr mrg. (see
below) ]; €v xpovm, Acts i. 6, 21; ev €aydrw xpova, Jude
18 Rec.; emi xpdvov, [A. V. for a while], Lk. xviii. 4; emt
meiova xp. [A. V. a longer time], Acts xviii. 20; ef’ dcov
xp: for so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii.
39; Gal. iv. 1; xara tov ypovor, according to (the rela-
tions of) the time, Mt. ii. 16; pera woddv xpovov, Mt. xxv.
19; peta tocovtov xp. Heb. iv. 7; mpd ypovwv aiwvier,
[R. V. before times eternal], 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2. the
dative is used to express the time during which some-
thing occurs (dat. of duration of time, cf. W. §31, 9;
[B. § 133, 26]): [ypov@ ixard, for a long time, Lk. viii.
27T Trtxt. WH]; ixavé xpovm, Acts viii. 11 ; [rovotre
xpove, Jn. xiv. 9 LT Trmrg. WH mrg.]; moddois xpdvoes
[R. V. mrg. of a long time (A. V. oftentimes) ; cf. modis,
c.], Lk. viii. 29; atwvious, [R. V. through times eternal],
Ro. xvi. 25. the accus. is used in answer to the
question how long: yxpovor, for a while, Acts xix. 22;
Rev. vi. 11 (where in RL T TrWH ucxpov is added) ;
also yp. tuvd, [A.V. a while], 1 Co. xvi. 7; dcov xp. [A.V.
while], Mk. ii. 19; xpovous ixavovs, for a long time, Lk.
Xx. 95 puxpov xpovoy, Jn. vii. 33; xii. 35; Rev. xx. 3;
mov xp. Jn. v. 6; tocodrov xp. Jn. xiv. 9 [RG Tr txt.
WH txt.]; ixavov, [A. V. long time], Acts xiv. 3; ovk
oArlyor, [R. V. no little time], Acts xiv. 28; rév mavra xp.
Acts xx. 18. [On the ellipsis of ypdvos in such phrases
as ap ov, ev to €&ns (Lk. vii. 11 Lmrg. Tr txt. WH txt.),
év t@ Kabegéns (Lk. viii. 1), && ixavod, etc., see ard, I. 4 b.
p- 58° top, é&ns, cabeEns, ek IV. 1, etc. SYN. see xarpos,
fin.; cf. aiwy, fin. | *
XpovoTpiBéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. ypovorpi8jca; (xpovos
and rpiBw),; to wear away time, spend time: Acts xx. 16.
(Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 3 [p. 1406%, 37]; Plut., Heliod.,
Eustath., Byz. writ.) *
XpUoeos, -€a, -eov, contr. -ovs, -7, -odv, [but ace. sing.
fem. -oav, Rev. i.13 LT Tr WH; gen. plur. -céwy, Rev.
ii. 1 L Tr; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (23); Phryn. ed.
Lob. p. 207; L. and 8. 8s. v. init.)], (ypucos), fr. Hom.
down, golden; made of gold; also overlaid or covered
with gold: 2 Tim. ii. 20; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20;
liels iv. 43 v.85, ville 35 ix.7 Grsb:,.13;.203; xiv. 145 xv,
Gisq.; xvii. 43> xxi. 15.*
xpvolov, -ov, 70, (dimin. of ypucds, cf. popriov), fr. Hdt.
down, Sept. for 171, gold, both that which lies imbedded
in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e.;
Sept. Gen. ii. 11; hence peraddevdev, Leian. de sacr. 11) :
xp: memupwpevov ex mupos, [R. V. refined by fire], Rev.
iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought,
Heb, ix. 4; [1 Co. iii,12 T Tr WH]; 1:Pet. 1/7; Rev.
Xxi. 18,21; i. q. gold coin, ‘gold’: Acts iii. 6; xx. 33;
1 Pet. i.18; golden ornaments, precious things made of
gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt.; 1 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 4
GLWHtxt.; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. ypucos).*
ypuTooaKkTUALOS
Xpuro-SaxtiAtos, -ov, (xpucds and daxrvdwos), gold-
ringed, adorned with gold rings: Jas. ii. 2. (Besides
only in Hesych. s. v. xpuooxcAAnros; [W. 26].) [Cf.
B. D.s. v. Ring. ] *
xpvod-Avbos, -ov, 6, (xypucos and dios), chrysolith, chryso-
lite, a precious stone of a golden color ; our topaz [cf. BB.
OD. s. v. Chrysolite ; esp. Riehm, HWB. s.v. Edelsteine
5 and 19]: Rev. xxi.20. (Diod. 2, 52; Joseph. antt. 3,
7,5; Sept. for vwon, Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix.
15), (Ezek. i. 16 Aq.].) *
Xpve0-mpacos [-ov Lchm.], -ov, 6, (fr. xpucds, and rpdcov
a leek), chrysoprase, a precious stone in color like a leek,
of a translucent golden-green [cf. BB. DD.s.v.; Riehm,
HWB. s. v. Edelsteine 6]: Rev. xxi. 20.*
Xpuods, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 371, gold (6 emi
ys kal 6 ime yas, Plat. lege. 5 p. 728 a.): univ., Mt. ii.
11; 1Co. ii. §2[RGL (al. ypucior, q. v.)]; Rev. ix. 7;
iq. precious things made of gold, golden ornaments, Mt.
xxiii. 16 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 9 [here L WH txt. xpvoiov]; Jas.
v. 3; Rev. xvif 4 (L WH txt. ypuaiov); xviii. 12,16 (L
Tr txt. WH txt. ypuoiov); an image made of gold, Acts
xvii. 29; stampod gold, gold coin, Mt. x. 9.*
Xpvoots, see ypuueos.
Xpvodsw, -@: pf. pass. ptep. kexpyrwpévos; to adorn with
gold, to gild: kexpuowuérn xpuo@, [A.V. decked with gold],
Rev. xvii. 4; and ev [GL Trom. WH br. é&y] xpvo@,
xviii. 16, of a woman ornamented with gold so profusely
that she seems to be gilded; Sept. for 291 159¥0 in Ex.
xxvi. 32. (Hdt., Arstpn., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) *
Xpds, gen. xparos, 6, (cf. xpoud, the skin [cf. Curtius
§ 201]), fr. Hom. down, (who [generally] uses the gen.
xpods ete. [cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom., or L. and S. s. v.]), the
surface of the body, the skin: Acts xix. 12; Sept. for
1w3, twice for Wy, Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. Alex.*
"xodJs, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for M05, Jame :
Acts iii. 2, 11 Ree.; xiv. 8; plur., Mt. xi. 5; xv. 30sq. ;
xxi. 14; Lk. vii. 22; xiv. 13, 21; Jn.v.3; Acts viii. 7;
ri xwddv, Heb. xii. 13 (on which see éxrpémw, 1). de-
prived of a foot, maimed, [A. V. halt]: Mt. xviii. 8; Mk.
ix. 45.*
xHpa, -as, n, (XAQ [cf. Curtius §179], to lie open, be
ready to receive), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 8, 42°19
‘a province’; 1. prop. the space lying between two
places or limits. 2. a region or country; i. e. a tract
of land: % x. eyyos THs épnpyov, In. xi. 54; [in an ellipti-
cal phrase, 7 dorpam) ()) dotpdmrrovoa ex THs tnd Tov
ovpavov eis tH bn’ ovpavdy Napa, A.V. part... part, Lk.
xvii. 24 (cf. W. § 64, 5); on the ellipsis of yépa in other
phrases (¢& évavrias, év Se&a, etc.), see W. 1. c.3 B. 82
(72)]; land as opp. to the sea, Acts xxvii. 27; land as
inhabited, a province or country, Mk. v. 10; [vi. 55 L
mre. T Tr WH]; Lk. xv. 13-15; xix. 12; Acts xiii. 49;
with a gen. of the name of the region added: Tpayavi-
tidos, Lk. iii. 1; ris "Iovdaias, Acts xxvi. 20; [(or an
equiv. adj.) ] Tadarixn, Acts xvi. 6; xviii. 235 trav “Iou-
daiwv, Acts x. 39; plur. ris Iovdaias Kat Sapapeias, [A. V.
regions}, Acts viii. 1; é€v yapa x. axed Oavarov, in a re-
gion of densest darkness (see oxid, a), Mt. iv. 16; revds,
674
XP lov
the country of one, Mt. ii. 12; x. for its inhabitants,
Mk. i. 5; Acts xii. 20; the (rural) region environing a
city or village, the country, Lk. ii. 8; Tepyeonvav, Tepa-
onvev, Tadapnvav, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. v. 1; Lk. viii. 26;
the region with towns and villages which surrounds the
metropolis, Jn. xi. 55. 3. land which is ploughed
or cultivated, ground. Lk. xii. 16; plur., Lk. xxi. 21
[R.V. country]; Jn.iv.35 (A.V. fields]; Jas. v. 4 [A. V.
Jjields]. [SY¥N. see réros, fin.]*
[Xwpatlv, see Xopativ. | i
xpew, -O; fut. inf. yopnoew (Jn. xxi. 25 Tr WH);
1 aor. €x@pyoa; (x@pos, a place, space, and this fr. XAQ,
cf. x@pa) ; 1. prop. to leave a space (which may be
occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place,
yield, (Hom. Il. 12,406; 16, 592; al.); to retire, pass:
of a thing, ets 71, Mt. xv. 17. metaph. to betake one’s
self, turn one’s self: eis petdavovay, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [A. V.
come ; cf. peravora, p. 406*]. 2. to go forward, ad-
vance, proceed, (prop. vv&, Aeschyl. Pers. 384); to make
progress, gain ground, succeed, (Plat. Eryx. p. 398 b.;
lege. 3 p. 684e.; [ywpet rd kaxov, Arstph. nub. 907, vesp.
1483; al.]; Polyb. 10, 35, 4; 28,15, 12; al.): 6 Adyos 6
eos ov xwpet ev tyiv, gaineth no ground among you or
within you [R. V. hath not free course (with mrg. hath
no place) in you], Jn. viii. 37 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars
iii. ad loc. ]. 3. to have space or room for receiving
or holding something (Germ. fassen) ; prop.: ti, a thing
to fill the vacant space, Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; of a
space large enough to hold a certain number of people,
Mk. ii. 2 (Gen. xiii. 6 [ef. Plut. praec. ger. reipub. 8, 5
p- 804 b.]); of measures, which hold a certain quantity,
Jn. ii.6; 1 K. vii. 24 (38); 2 Chr. iv. 5, and in Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt. down. metaph. to receive with the mind or
understanding, to understand, (rb Kdatwvos dpovnua, Plut.
Cat. min. 64; dcov aire 7 Wuxy xopet, Ael. v. h. 3, 9); to
be ready to receive, keep in mind, and practise: tév déyov
rovrov, this saying, Mt. xix. 11 sq. [(ef. Plut. Lycurg.
13, 5)]; twa, to receive one into one’s heart, make room
for one in one’s heart, 2 Co. vii. 2. [COMP.: dyva-, dro-,
éx-, Umo- xopew. SYN. cf. epyopat. | *
xopitw; fut. ywpiow [B. 37 (83)]; 1 aor. inf. ywpioa;
pres. mid. yapifopar; pf. pass. ptep. keywpropevos; 1 aor.
pass. €xapicOnv; (xepis, q.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to separate,
divide, part, pul asunder : ri, opp. to ovgevyvupe, Mt. xix.
6; Mk. x. 93 ria aro twos, Ro. viii. 35, 39, (Sap. i. 3);
pf. pass. ptep. Heb. vii. 26. Mid. and 1 aor. pass.
with a reflex. signif. to separate one’s self from, to de-
part; a. to leave a husband or wife: of divorce, 1
Co. vii. 11, 15; dd avSpds, ib. 10 (a woman keywptopern
dd tod avdpds, Polyb. 32, 12, 6 [al.]). b. to depart,
go away: [absol. Philem. 15 (euphemism for épvye),
R. V. was parted from thee]; foll. by aaé with a gen. of
the place, Acts i. 4; é« with a gen. of the place, Acts
xviii. 1 sq. ([W. § 36,6 a.]; es with an acc. of the place,
2 Mace. v. 21; xii. 12; Polyb., Diod., al.). [Come.:
amro-, Sia- xwpi¢a. | *
xoplov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of ydpos or xapa), fr. Hat.
down ; 1. a space, a place; a region, district. 2
Xwpls
a piece of ground, a fietd, land, (Thue., Xen., Plat., al.) :
Mt. xxvi. 86; Mk. xiv. 32; Jn. iv. 5[A. V. parcel of
ground]; Acts i. 18 sq.; iv. 34 [plur. lands]; v. 3, 8; a
farm, estate: plur. Acts xxviii. 7. [SYN. see réros, fin. ]*
xopls, (XAQ, see ywpa [cf. Curtius § 192]), adv., fr.
Hom. down; 1. separately, apart: Jn. xx. 7. 2.
as a prep. with the gen. [W. § 54, 6]; a. without any
pers. or thing (making no use of, having no association
with, apart from, aloof from, ete.) : 1 Co. [iv. 8]; xi. 11;
Phil. 11.14; 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 21; Heb. [ii. 9 Treg. mrg.];
xi. 405; mapaBodjs, without making use of a parable, Mt.
xiii. 834; Mk. iv. 345 dpx@pooias, Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21;
x aiwaros, Heb. ix. 7, 18; aiparexxvoias, Heb. ix. 22;
without i. e. being absent or wanting: Ro. vii. 8sq. [R.V.
apart from]; Heb. xi. 6; xii. 8,14; Jas. ii. 18 (Ree. éx),
20, 26, [in these three exx. R. V. apart from]; without
connection and fellowship with one, Jn. xv. 5 [R.V.
675
aprevdomas
apart from]; destitute of the fellowship and blessings
of one: xwpis Xpiorod [ef. W. § 54, 2a.; R. V. separate
Jrom Christ], Eph. ii. 12; without the intervention (pare
ticipation or co-operation) of one, Jn. i. 3; Ro. iii. 21,
[28; iv. 6; x. 14]; x. ewediov, without laying a foun-
dation, Lk. vi. 49; x. ris ons yvopns, without consulting
you, (cf. yron, fin. (Polyb. 3, 21, 1. 2. 7)1, Philem. 14;
‘without leaving room for’: x. avridoyias, Heb. vii. 7;
oiktippa@v, X. 28. x. Tod owparos, freed from the body,
2 Co. xii. 3 L T Tr WH (Ree. ékrés, q. v. b. a.) 3; xoopis
dpaprias, without association with sin, i. e. without yield-
ing to sin, without becoming stained with it, Heb. iv.
15; not to expiate sin, Heb. ix. 28. b. besides:
Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38; 2 Co. xi. 28. (Syn. cf. avev.]*
X4pos, -ov, 6, the north-west wind (Lat. Corus or
Caurus): for the quarter of the heavens from which
this wind blows, Acts xxvii. 12 (on which see Ady, 2).*
SY
Paw; fut. pare; (fr. dw, to rub, wipe; to handle,
touch, [but cf. Curtius p. 730]) ; a. to pluck off,
pull out: @etpav, the hair, Aeschyl. Pers. 1062. b.
to cause to vibrate by touching, to twang: ré&wy vevpas
xetpi, Eur. Bacch. 784; spec. xdpdqy, to touch or strike
the chord, to twang the strings of a musical instrument so
that they gently vibrate (Aristot. probl. 19, 23 [p. 919»,
2]); and absol. to play on a stringed instrument, to play
the harp, etc.: Aristot., Plut., Arat., (in Plat. Lys. p. 209b.
with kai kpovew T@ mAHKTp@ added [but not as ex plan-
atory of it; the Schol. ad loc. says WyAa, Td dvev
mAnkTpov TO Saxriro Tas xopdas emapacGat]; it is distin-
guished from x:Oapiew in Hdt. 1, 155) ; Sept. for t3] and
much oftener for 7131; to sing to the music of the harp;
in the N. T. to sing a hymn, to celebrate the praises of God
in song, Jas. v.13 [R.V. sing praise]; r@ kupio, TO dvdpate
avtov, (often so in Sept.), in honor of God, Eph. v. 19
[here A. V. making melody]; Ro. xv. 9; Wad 76 mvev-
pratt, War@ dé kat To voi, ‘I will sing God’s praises indeed
-with my whole soul stirred and borne away by the Holy
Spirit, but I will also follow reason as my guide, so that
what I sing may be understood alike by myself and by
the listeners’, 1 Co. xiv. 15.*
Wades, -ov, 6, (Wado), a striking, twanging, [(Eur.,
al.)]; spec. a striking the chords of a musical instru-
ment [(Pind., Aeschyl., al.)]; hence a pious song, a
psalm, (Sept. chiefly for 7119), Eph. v.19; Col. iii. 16;
the phrase éyew Wadpdy is used of one who has it in his
heart to sing or recite a song of the sort, 1 Co. xiv. 26
[cf. Heinrici ad loc., and Bp. Lghtft. on Col. u. s.]; one
of the songs of the book of the O. T. which is entitled
Wadpoi, Acts xiii. 33; plur. the (book of) Psalms, Lk.
xxiv.44; BiBdos Wadpov, Lk. xx. 42; Actsi. 20. [Syn.
see Upvos, fin. ]*
evd-ddeAdos, -ov, 6, (Wevdys and ddeAdds), a false
brother, i. e. one who ostentatiously professes to be a
Christian, but is destitute of Christian knowledge and
piety: 2Co. xi. 26; Gal. ii. 4.*
evd-atronroXos, -ov, 6, (revdys and améarodos), a false
apostle, one who falsely claims to be an ambassador of
Christ: 2 Co. xi. 13.*
evdys, -€s, (Weddopuar), fr. Hom. II. 4, 235 down, lying,
deceitful, false: Rev. ii. 2; paprupes, Acts vi. 13; sub-
stantively of WevdSeis, [A. V. liars], Rev. xxi. 8 {here
Lehm. evorns, q. v-]-*
evSo-8SdoKados, -ov, 6, (Yevdjs and ddacKados), a
false teacher: 2 Pet. ii. 1.*
tevSo-Aoyos, -ov, (revdns and A€yw), speaking (teach-
ing) falsely, speaking lies: 1 Tim. iv. 2. (Arstph. ran.
1521; Polyb., Leian., Aesop, al.) *
WedSopnar; 1 aor. eyevodunyv; (depon. mid. of evda
[allied w. yrbupifw etc. (Vaniéek p. 1195)] ‘ to deceive’,
‘cheat’: hence prop. to show one’s self deceitful, to play
false); fr. Hom. down; to lie, to speak deliberate false-
hoods: Heb. vi. 18; 1 Jn.i.6; Rev. iii. 9; od Pev8ouat,
Ro. ix. 1; 2Co. xi. 31; Gal.i.20; 1Tim.ii.7; ed, to
deceive one by a lie, to lie to, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plut.,
al.): Actsv. 3; like verbs of saying, with a dat. of the
pers. (cf. W. § 31,5; B. § 133, 1; Green p. 100 sq.), Acts
v. 4 (Ps. xvii. (xviii-) 45 ; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 36; Ixxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 36; Josh. xxiv. 27; [Jer. v. 12], ete.); ets teva,
Col. iii. 9; xara twos, against one, Mt. v. 11 [LGom
yrevdouaptup 676
Tr mrg. br. Wevd. ; al. connect xa” ipav with eimwor and
make wWevd. a simple adjunct of mode (A. V. falsely) ];
kata THs GAnOeias, Jas. iii. 14 [here Tdf. makes edd.
absol.; cf. W. 470 (438) n.2]. (Sept. for wmd and 345.)*
evSo-paptup, unless more correctly Wevdoudprus or
rather wWevdSouaprus (as adrouaprup; see Passow s. v.
Wevdouaprus [esp. Lob. Paralip. p. 217; ef. Etym. Magn.
506, 26]), -vpos, 6, (Wevdns and paprup [q. v.]), a false
witness: Mt. xxvi. 60; tod Oeov, false witnesses of i. e.
concerning God [W. § 30, 1 a.], 1 Co. xv. 15. (Plat.
Gorg. p. 472 b.; Aristot. pol. 2, 9, 8 [p. 1274», 6; but
the true reading here is Wevdouaprupedv (see Bentley’s
Works ed. Dyce, vol. i. p.408) ; a better ex. is Aristot.
rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432*, 6; cf. Plut. praec. ger. reip.
29,1; Constt. apost. 5,9; Pollux 6, 36, 153].) *
WevSo-paptupéw, -O: impf. eyevdouapripour; fut. yev-
Sopaprupnoe; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. sing. yevdouaprupyans ;
to utter falsehoods in giving testimony, to testify falsely,
to bear false witness, (Xen. mem. 4, 4,11; Plat. rep. 9,
p- 575 b.; lege. 11 p. 937 ¢.; Aristot. rhet. 1, 14, 6 p.
1375*, 12; [rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432*, 6]; Joseph.
antt. 3, 5,5): Mt. xix. 18; [Mk. x. 19]; Lk. xviii. 20;
Ro. xiii. 9 Ree.; xara tivos, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. (as Ex. xx.
16; Deut. v. 20).*
evdo-paprupta, -as, 7, (Wevdopaptupew), false testimony,
false witness: Mt. xv.19; xxvi. 59. (Plat., Plut.; often
in the Attic orators.) *
WevSopudprus, see yevdouaprup.
evdo-rpodArys, -ov, 6, (Wevdyns and mpopyrns), one who,
acting the part of a divinely inspired prophet, utters false-
hoods under the name of divine prophecies, a false prophet:
Mt. vii. 15; xxiv. 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vi. 26; Acts
xi 6362 Petit. Wns ive ls Neve xvie loisexix. 20)
xx. 10.) @Jer- vi.13 ;\ xcxnil*(xuvi.)"S, 11, 165 xxx1ve
(xxvii.) 7; xxxvi. (xxix.) 1,8; Zech. xiii. 2; Joseph.
antt. 8, 13,1; 10, 7,3; b. j. 6,5, 2; [rév rovovrov evbv-
Bod@ dvopate Wevdorpopytny mpocayopever, Ku3dnevovra
Thy anOn mpodnteiav k. TA yunora vobois etpnpace emt
oxidCovra xrA. Philo de spec. lege. iii. § 8]; eccles. writ.
[‘ Teaching’ 11, 5 ete. (where see Harnack)]; Grk. writ.
use Yrevddpavtis.) *
petSos, -ovs, 7d, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for >pv, 313,
wn, a lie; conscious and intentional falsehood: univ.
Rev. xiv. 5 (where Ree. dd\os) ; opp. to 4 dAndeva, Jn.
vili. 44; Eph. iv. 25; od« gate yetdos, opp. to adnbés
€orwv, is no lie, 1 Jn. ii. 27; répata evdous, [A. V. lying
wonders | exhibited for the treacherous purpose of de-
ceiving men, 2 Th. ii. 9; in a broad sense, whatever is
not what it professes to be: so of perverse, impious, deceit-
ful precepts, 2 Th. ii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 21; of idolatry, Ro.
1. 25; movety Wevdos, to act in accordance with the pre-
cepts and principles of idolatry, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15,
[ef. xxi. 8, and p. 526” mid.].*
pevb0-xpirros, -ov, 6, (Wevdns and ypicros), a false
Christ (or Messiah), (one who falsely lays claim to the
name and office of the Messiah): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk.
milis-22:*
Pevdavupos, -ov, (Yevdos [Wevdys, rather] and dvoyua),
iOupiatys
falsely named [A.V. falsely so called]: 1 Tim. vi. 20.
(Aeschyl., Philo, Plut., Sext. Emp.) *
etopa, -ros, Td, (Wevdw), a falsehood, a lie, (Plat. Meno
p- 71d.; Plut., Leian.; Sept.); spec. the perfidy by
which a man by sinning breaks faith with God, Ro. iii
lige
evorns, -ov, 6, (Wevdo), fr. Hom. down, a liar: Jn.
Vill. 44, 55';'1 Jno. 10 3 1.422 av 20- v.10 > 2 Lim. a.
10; Tit. i. 12; [Rev. xxi. 8 Lehm. (al. wevdys, q. v-)]3
one who breaks faith, a false or faithless man (see
Wedoua), Ro. iii. 4 cf. Prov. xix. 22.*
Wnrahdw, -@: 1 aor. endadpyoa, optat. 3 pers. plur.
Wprapnoeav (Acts xvii. 27, the Holic form; see zoréo,
init.) ; pres. pass. ptcp. Wyradapevos; (fr. dw, to
touch) ; to handle, touch, feel: ri or twa, Lk. xxiv. 39;
Heb. xii. 18 [see R. V. txt. and mrg., cf. B. § 134,8; W.
343 (322)]; 1Jn.i.1; metaph. mentally to seek after
tokens of a person or thing: Oedv, Acts xvii. 27 [A.V. feel
after]. (Hlom., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Philo, Plut.;
often for win, wn, Ww.) [SYN. see drre, 2c.]*
Wnhito; 1 aor. eyndica; (Wdos, g.v.); to count with
pebbles, to compute, calculate, reckon: tiv Samavnv, Lk.
xiv. 28; Tov dpiOudv, to explain by computing, Rev. xiii.
18. (Polyb., Plut., Palaeph., Anthol.; commonly and
indeed chiefly in the mid. in the Grk. writ. to give one’s
vote by casting a pebble into the urn; to decide by voting.)
[Come.: ovy- kata-, cup- Wnpito. |*
WAdhos, -ov, 7, (fr. aw, see Wadro), a small, worn,
smooth stone; pebble, [fr. Pind., Idt., down; (in Hom.
Wnois) }5 1. since in the ancient courts of justice
the accused were condemned by black pebbles and ac-
quitted by white (cf. Passow s. v. yndos, 2 ¢., vol. ii. p.
2574»; [L.and S. s. v.4 d.]; Ovid. met. 15, 41; [Plut.
Alcib. 22, 2]), and a man on his acquittal was spoken of
as vexnoas (Theophr. char. 17 (19), 3) and the pidos
acquitting him called vxyrnpios (Heliod. 3, 3 sub fin.),
Christ promises that to the one who has gained eternal
life by coming off conqueror over temptation (r@ vixouvTe
[A. V. to him that overcometh]) he will give Wapov AcuKyy,
Rev. ii. 17; but the figure is explained differently by
different interpp.; cf. Diisterdieck [or Lee in the ‘Speak-
er’s Com.’] ad loe.; [B. D. s. v. Stones, 8]. Ewald (Die
Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 136; [ef. Lee u.s.; Plumptre in
B. D. s. v. Hospitality, fin.]) understands it to be the
tessera hospitalis [cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Tessera,
3; Becker, Charicles, se. i. note 17], which on being shown
secures admission to the enjoyment of the heavenly
manna; the Greek name, however, for this tessera, is
not WHpos, but ovpPorov. 2. a vote (on account of
the use of pebbles in voting): xarapépw (q- v.), Acts
Xxvi. 10.*
Ybupirpds, -0d, 6, (Wibupitw, to whisper, speak into
one’s ear), a whispering, i.e. secret slandering, (Vulg.
susurratio, Germ. Ohrenbldserei): joined w. karadadua
[ef. Ro. i. 29 (30)], 2 Co. xii. 20; Clem. Rom. 30, 3; 35, 5.
(Plut.; Sept. for wm, of the magical murmuring of a
charmer of snakes, Eccl. x. 11.) *
Wilupirrrs, -ov, 6, (see the preced. word). a whisperer,
pixiov
secret slanderer, detractor, (Germ. Ohrenbldser): Ro. i.
29 (30). (At Athens an epithet of Hermes, Dem. p.
1358, 6; also of 6”Epws and Aphrodite, Suidas p. 3957
c.; [ef. W. 24].)*
Wx lov, -ov, 70, (dimin. of Wig, Yuyxos, 7, a morsel), a Little
morsel, @ crumb (of bread or meat): Mt. xv. 27; Mk.
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21 [T WHom.LTrbr. .]. (Not
found in Grk. auth. [cf. W. 24; 96 (91)].)*
Wx 4, -js, 7, (roxe, to breathe, blow), fr. Hom. down,
Sept. times too many to count for w93}, occasionally also
for 39 and anid 1. breath (Lat. anima), i.e. a.
the breath of life; the vital force which animates the body
and shows itself in breathing: Acts xx. 10; of antnals,
Rey. viii. 9, (Gen. ix. 4 sq.3 xxxv. 18; émorpadrijro 7
ux Tod snaubaaen 1 K. xvii. 21); so also in those pass.
where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold
division of human nature by the Greeks, 4 uy is dis-
tinguished from 76 mvedpa (see mvetpa, 2 p. 520* [and
reff. s. v. rv. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. iv. 12. life:
Hepysvav tH Woxn, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 223 rv Wuxnv
ayarav, Rev. xii. 11; [piceiv, Lk. xiv. 26]; riOévar, Jn.
x. 11, 15,17; xiii. 37 sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; wapa-
d:8dvar, Acts xv. 26; Suddvar (Avrpov, q. v-), Mt. xx. 28 ;
Mk. x. 45; ¢nreiv ryv yuyny twos (see Cyréw, 1 a.), Mt.
m. 205) Ro. x1..3; add, Mt. vi. 25; Mk. iit.4:; Lk, vi. 9;
<i 20,295 Acts xx. 94) xxvil. 10522. Ro: xvi. 4 2) Co.
i. 23; Phil ii. 30; 1 Th.ii. 8; in the pointed aphorisms
of Christ, intended to fix themselves in the minds of his
hearers, the phrases evpioxew, cage, amoddvvar THY
Wuxnv avrod, etc., designate as yvyx7 in one of the anti-
thetic members the life which is lived on earth, in the
other, the (blessed) life in the eternal kingdom of God:
Mt. x. 39; xvi. 25 sq.; Mk. viii. 35-37; Lk. ix. 24, 56
Rec.; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; the life destined to enjoy
the Messianic salvation is meant also in the foll. phrases
[(where R. V. soul)]: mepiroinots uxns, Heb. x. 39;
xracOa tas Yuyds, Lk. xxi. 19; tmép trav Wuxar, [here
A.V. (not R.V.) for you; cf.c. below], 2Co. xii. 15. ce.
that in which there is life; a living being: uxn (aoa, a
living soul, 1 Co. xv. 45; [Rev. xvi. 3 R Tr mrg.], (Gen.
ii. 7; plur. i. 20); maca yoy Cans, Rev. xvi. 3 [G LT
Tr txt. WH] (Lev. xi. 10); aca Wexts every soul, i. e.
every one, Acts ii. 43; iii. 23; Ro. xiii. 1, (so w3- 53,
Lev. vii. 17 (27); xvii. 12); with dvOparou added, every
soul of man (DIS Wa), Num. xxxi. 40, 46, [ef. 1 Mace.
ii. 38]), Ro. ii. 9. uxat, souls (like the Lat. capita) i. e.
persons (in enumerations; cf. Germ. Heclenzanl): Acts
HAL sve ds xxvil, 375 1, Pet, iii. 20, Bs yen. xlvi. 15,
18, 22,.265.27 9 Ex. i. 53 xtioA* Lev., ii. .ly Nam.cxix.
11,13, 18; [Deut. x. 92) ; the exx. fr. Gok. ape (cf.
Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2590”) are of a different sort
[yet cf. L.and 8. s. v. II. 2]); yuyat avOparer of slaves
[A. V. souls of men (R.V. with mrg. ‘ Or lives’}}, Rev.
xviii. 13 (so [Num. xxxi. 35]; Ezek. xxvii. 13; see oda,
le. [cf. W. § 22, 7 N. 3]). 2. the soul (Lat. ani-
mus), a. the seat of the feelings, desires, affectiens,
aversions, (our soul, heart, etc. [R. V. almost uniformly
soul]; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii.
677
puxiKos
p- 2589>; ; [L. and§. s. v. IT. 3]; Hebr. w53, cf. Gesenius,
Dhessur: ii. p. 901in 3): Lk.i. 46; ii. 35; Jn. x. 24 [ef.
aipw, 1 b.]; Acts xiv. 2, 22; xv. 24; Heb. vi. 19; 2 Pet.
ii. 8,14; 7 émiOvpia tis W. Rev. xviii. 14; pi fee Tats
Wouyxais evpioxew, Mt. xi. 29; WYuyn, ... dvaravov, paye,
mie [ WH br. these three impvs. ], edpaivou (personifica-
tion and direct address), Lk. xii. 19, ef. 18 (4 ux ava-
mavoerat, Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 28; evppaivew riv uyny, Ael.
v.h. 1,32); evdoxet 7 ux pov (anthropopathically, of
God), Mt. xii. 18; Heb. x. 38; mepitumds eorw 4 Wuy7
pou, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34; 9 Woy pov rerapakrat,
Jn. xii. 27; rais uyais tuav exdvdpevor, [ fainting in your
souls (cf. ékhdw, 2 b.)], Heb. xii. 3; ev dAy 7H WuxH cov,
with all thy soul, Mt. xxii. 37; [Lk. x. 27 Ltxt. T Tr
WH]; e& ddns ths Wuxjs cov (Lat. ex toto animo), with
[lit. from (cf. éx, Il. 12 b.)] all thy soul, Mk. xii. 30, 33
[here T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the phrase]; Lk. x. 27
[R G], (Deut. vi.5; [Epict. diss. 3, 22,18 (cf. Xen. anab.
7, 7,43)]; Antonin. 3,45; [esp. 4, 31; 12, 29]; 6Ay 7H
Wuxn portigev tiwds (rather, with ee taal: Xen.
mem. 3, 11,10); sua Wuyxy, with one soul [cf. wvedpa, 2
p- 520* bot.], Phil. i. 27; rod mdjOous .. . Hv 7 Kapdia Kal
7 Wx? pia, Acts iv. 32 (épwrneis ti core Gidos, &py* pia
Wux7) S00 copaow evorxodaa, Diog. Laért. 5, 20[ cf. Aristot.
eth. Nic. 9, 8, 2 p. 1168, 7; on the elliptical azo puas
(se. yruyxijs?), see dd, III.]); &k Wuyijs, from the heart,
heartily, [Eph. vi. 6 (Tr WH with vs. 7)]; Col. iii. 23,
(ex rhs Wuxns often in Xen.; 7d ex uyx7s révOos, Joseph.
antt. 17, 6, 5). b. the (human) soul in so far as it
is so constituted that by the right use of the aids offered it
by God it can attain its highest end and secure eternal
blessedness, the soul regarded as a moral being designed
for everlasting life: 3 Jn. 2; aypumveiv trép rdv Yuyar,
Heb. xiii. 17; émOupia, airwes otparevovra Kata Tijs
Woxjs, 1 Pet. ii. 11; éemicxoros rév Wuxar, ib. 25; co tew
Tas Yuyds, Jas. i. 21; Wuyny éx Oavarov, from eternal
death, Jas. v. 20; carnpia yuxar, 1 Pet. 1.95 dyvitew
Tas Wuxas éavtav, ib. 22; [ras Wuxas miot@ xtiotn wapa-
ridecOa, 1 Pet. iv. 19]. c. the soul as an essence
which differs from the body and is not dissolved by death
(distinguished fr. 73 o@pa, as the other part of human
nature [so in Grk. writ. fr. Isocr. and Xen. down; cf.
exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2589* bot.; L. and S. s. v. I. 2]):
Mt. x. 28, cf. 4 Mace. xiii. 14 (it is called a@avaros, Hat.
2, 123; Plat. Phaedr. p. 245 c., 246 a., al.; apOapros, Jo-
seph. b. j. 2, 8,14; divadvOjvac rv Yruxqy ard Tov copatos.
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 14); the soul freed from the body, a
disembodied soul, Acts ii. 27, 31 Rec.; Rev. vi. 9; xx.
4, (Sap. iii. 1; [on the Homeric use of the word, see
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. 3 and reff. sub fin., also Proudjit
in Bib. Sacr. for 1858, pp. 753-805 ]).*
Wuxikes, -7, -dv, (Wux7), (Vulg. animalis, Germ. sinn-
lich), of or belonging to the wuxn; a. having the
nature and characteristics of the :uxn i.e. of the prin-
ciple of animal life, which men have in common with the
brutes (see puyy, 1a.), [A. V. natural]: capa Woyrxsr,
1 Co. xv. 44; substantively, 716 yruxexov [W. 592 (551)],
ib. 46; since both these expressions do not differ in
apuyos
substance or conception from capé kai afya in vs. 50,
Paul might have also written capxuxdéy; but prompted
by the phrase Wvyxq (ca in vs. 45 (borrowed fr. Gen. ii.
7), he wrote Wuxixdv. b. governed by the wuxn
i.e. the sensuous nature with its subjection to appetite
and passion (as though made up of nothing but yuy7) :
dvOpwmos (i. q. capxtxds [or odpxwos, q. Vv. 3] in iii. 1),
1 Co. ii. 14; Wuyixoi, mvedpa py Exovres, Jude 19 [A. V.
sensual (R. V. with mrg. ‘Or natural, Or animal’); so in
the foll. ex.]; codia, a wisdom in harmony with the
corrupt desires and affections, and springing from them
(see codia, a. p. 581» bot.), Jas. iii, 15. (In various
other senses in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down.)*
oxos (RG Tr WH), more correctly pixos (LT; cf.
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 102]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 44
sq-), -ous, Td, (Wvxe, q. v), fr. Hom. down, cold: Jn.
xviii. 18; Acts xxviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 27; for 1p, Gen.
viii. 22; for 77), Ps. exlvii. 6 (17), Job xxxvii. 8.*
Wuxpds, -d, -dv, (Wtyo, q. v.), fr. Hom. down, cold,
cool: neut. of cold water, awornpiov :uypod, Mt. x. 42
(LWuxpd Aodvra, Hat. 2, 37]; Wuxpdy mivew, Epict.
ench. 29, 2; mdvverOar uyxpe, diss. 4, 11, 19; cf. W.
591 (550)); metaph. like the Lat. frigidus, cold i. e.
sluggish, inert, in mind (yp. rHv dpyqv, Leian. Tim. 2): of
678
Moe
one destitute of warm Christian faith and the desire for
holiness, Rev. iii. 15 sq.*
poxo: 2 fut. pass. puyjooua [ef. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 318 ; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 421s. v.]; fr. Hom. down ; to
breathe, blow, cool by blowing ; pass. to be made or to grow
cool or cold: trop. of waning love, Mt. xxiv. 12.*
Wopito; 1 aor. eyapica; (Yapds, a bit,a morsel; see
Wopior) ; a. to feed by putting a bit or crumb (of
food) into the mouth (of infants, the young of animals,
etc.) : twa tut (Arstph., Aristot., Plut., Geop., Artem.
oneir. 5, 62; Porphyr., Jambl.). b. univ. to feed,
nourish, (Sept. for DONT) [W. § 2,1b.]: revd, Ro. xii.
20; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55,2; with the acc. of the
thing, to give a thing to feed some one, feed out to, (Vulg.
distribuo in cibos pauperum [A. V. bestow... to feed the
poor]): 1 Co. xiii.3; inthe O. T. red rn, Sir. xv. 3; Sap.
xvi. 20; Num. xi.4; Deut. xxxii.13; Ps. lxxix. (Ixxx.)
6: Is. lviii. 14, etc.; cf. W.§ 32, 4 a. note.*
Yoplov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of Wopds), a fragment, bit,
morsel, [A. V. sop]: Jn. xiii. 26 sq. 30. (Ruth ii. 14;
Job xxxi. 17, [but in both yopds]; Antonin. 7,3; Diog.
Laért. 6, 37.) *
oxo; (fr. obsol. Yaw for aw) ; to rub, rub to pieces:
ras ordxvas tais xepoiv, Lk. vi. 1. [(mid. in Nicand.)]*
Q
2, w: omega, the last (24th) letter of the Grk. alpha-
bet: eyo eu 76 Q [WH OQ, Ld, To], i. q. 7d TEAos, i. e.
the last (see A, a, GAga [and B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.
and art. ‘ Alpha’, also art. A and Q by Piper in Herzog
(cf. Schaff-Herzog), and by Tyrwhitt in Dict. of Chris.
Antiq.]), Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. [On the
interchange of and o in Mss. see Scrivener, Plain In-
troduction ete. p. 627; ‘Six Lectures’ etc. p.176; WH.
Intr. § 404; cf. esp. Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. Inschr.
pon *
#, an interjection, prefixed to vocatives (on its use in
the N.G)-cf.' B: 41409(122) 5° PW 5'29, 4371), Oe at as
used a. in address: & Oeddire, Acts i. 13 add,
Acts xviii. 14; xxvii. 21 [here Tdf. 6 (ex errore) ; on
the pass. which follow cf. B. u. s.]; Ro. ii. 1,3; ix. 20;
1 Tim. vi. 20; and, at the same time, reproof, Jas. ii.
20. b. in exclamation: and that of admiration,
Mt. xv. 28; Ro. xi. 33 [here Rec.* Lchm. 6; ef. Chand-
ler §§ 902, (esp.) 904]; of reproof, Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts
xiii. 10; Gal. iii. 1; with the nom. (W. § 29, 2), Mt.
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix.41. [(From Hom. down.) ]*
"OBYS (RG; see *Iw8nd), 6, (Hebr. 2p [i. e. ‘ser-
vant’ sc. of Jehovah]), Obed, the grandfather of king
David: Mt.i.5; Lk. iii. 82, (Ruth iv. 17sq.; 1 Chr. ii.
22).*
de, adv., (fr. d8e); 1. so, in this manner, (very
often in Hom.). 2. adv. of place; a. hither,
to this place (Hom. II. 18, 392; Od.1, 182; 17, 545; cf.
B. 71 (62 sq.) [cf. W. § 54, 7; but its use in Hom. of
place is now generally denied; see Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s. v. p. 484; L.andS.s. v. I1.]): Mt. viii. 29; xiv.
18 [Tr mrg. br. de]; xvii. 17; xxii. 12; Mk. xi. 3; Lk.
ix: 415 xiv.'21; ‘xix. 27%; | dnsvi. 253ixx 1274) Actix. 21
Rev. iv.1; xi. 12, (Sept. for 559, Ex. iii. 5; Judg. xviii.
3; Ruth ii. 14); éws Ode, [even unto this place], Lk.
xx. 5! b. here, in this place: Mt. xii. 6, 41 sq. ;
xiv. 17-) Mk. 1)'5 >) xvi. 64 1ukMx. 33} xxi 38 jecxive
6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. vi. 9; xi. 21, 32, and often,
(Sept. for 75); 7a Sde, the things that are done here,
Col. iv. 9; &8de, in this city, Acts ix. 14; in this world,
Heb. xiii. 14; opp. to éxet (here, i. e. according to the
Levitical law still in force; there, i.e. in the passage in
Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Heb. vii. 8; &de
with some addition, Mt. xiv. 8; Mk. vi. 3; viii.4; Lk.
iv. 23; &d¢ 6 Xptords, } Sde, here is Christ, or there, [so
A.V., but R. V. here is the Christ, or, Here (cf. &8¢ ai
&de, hither and thither, Ex. ii. 12 ete.)], Mt. xxiv. 23;
ode 4... éxet, Mk. xiii. 21 [T WH om. 4; Tr mrg. reads
cat]; Lk. xvii. 21, 23 [here T Tr WH mrg. exet.. . S8¢
(WH txt. éxet J... Sde)]; Jas. ii. 3 Phere Rec. exet ig...
35x
de; GLT Tr WH om. dde (WH txt. and marg. vary-
ing the place of éxet)]. Metaph. in this thing, Rev. xiii.
10, 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9, [the phrase &5¢ éorw in at
least two of these pass. (viz. xiii. 18; xiv. 12) seems to
be equiv. to ‘here there is opportunity for’, ‘need of’
ete. (so in Epict. diss. 3, 22, 105)]; in this state of things,
under these circumstances, 1 Co. iv. 2 L [who, however,
connects it with vs. 1] TTr WH; cf. Meyer ad loc.
5, -7s, 7, (i. q. dowdy, fr. deidw i.e. Ga, to sing), fr.
Soph. and Eur. down, Sept. for Vw and HVwW, a song,
lay, ode; in the Scriptures a song in praise of God or
Christ: Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3; Movoéws x. Tov apviov, the
song which Moses and Christ taught them to sing, Rev.
xv. 3; plur. with the epithet mvevparixai, Eph. v. 19
[here L br. wv.]; Col. iii. 16. [Syn. see duvos, fin.]*
adiv (1 Th. v. 3; Is. xxxvii. 3) for dds (the earlier
form; cf. W. § 9,2 e. N. 1), -ivos, 7, fr. Hom. Tl. 11, 271
down, the pain of childbirth, travail-pain, birth-pang:
1 Th. v. 3; plur. ddives ([ pangs, throes, R. V. travail];
Germ. Wehen), i. q. intolerable anguish, in reference to
the dire calamities which the Jews supposed would pre-
cede the advent of the Messiah, and which were called
mw ‘73n [see the Comm. (esp. Keil) on Mt. 1.c.1],
Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9); dives Oavdrov [Tr mrg.
adov], the pangs of death, Acts ii. 24, after the Sept.
who translated the words nyo ‘9an by dsives 6., deriv-
ing the word ‘93m not, as they ought, from ban i 1. e.
oxowiov ‘cord’, but from ban, avis, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5;
cxiv. (cxvi.) 3; 2S. xxii. 6.*
aive; fr. Hein. down; Sept. for Syn, thrice for San;
to feel the pains of childbirth, to travail: Gal. iv. 27;
Rev. xii. 2; in fig. disc. Paul uses the phrase ods ma\w
adiva, i. e. whose souls I am striving with intense effort
and anguish to conform to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv.
19. [Comp.: cuvr-wdiva. | *
aos, -ov, 6, (OID i. q. Pépw [(?); allied w. Lat. wmerus,
cf. Vanicek p. 38; Curtius §487]), fr. Hom. down, the
shoulder: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xv. 5.*
avéopar, -ovpat: 1 aor. dvqodunv (which form, as well
as éwvnodpny, belongs to later Grk., for which the earlier
writ. used empiduny; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 137 sqq.;
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 210 sqq.; Veitch s. v.];
W. §12, 2; §16s.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to buy: witha
gen. of the price, Acts vii. 16.*
adv [so RG Tr, but L T WH @dv; see (Etym. Magn.
822, 40) I,¢], -ov, rd, fr. Hdt. down, an egg: Lk. xi. 12,
(for ¥°3, found only in the plur. O°¥°3, Deut. xxii.
G sq. ; ds: x. 145 ete: ).*
&pa, -as, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ny and in Dan.
for NW; 1. a certain definite time or season fixed
by natural law and returning with the revolving year;
of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn,
winter, as &pa tov Oepovs, mpaipos kK. dWipos, Xeupepia,
etc.; often in the Grk. writ. [cf. L. andS.s.v. A. I. 1e.,
and on the inherent force of the word esp. Schmidt ch.
44 §6 sq.]. 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising
and the setting of the sun), a day: &pa mapnddev, Mt.
xiv. 153 76n Spas wodAjs yevowerns (or yvoperns), [A. V.
679
cA
apa
when the day was now far spent], Mk. vi. 35 (see modus, c.
[but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited roAAjjs
épas means early]); dias [oye T Tr mrg. WH txt. ] dn
ovons ths Spas [WH mrg. br. ras dpas], Mk. xi. 11
(6We ris Spas, Polyb. 3, 83,7; rhs Spas eyiyvero de,
Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. @ twelfth part of the day-time,
an hour, (the twelve hours of the day are reckoned from
the rising to the setting of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 [cf. BB.
DD. s. v. Hour; Riehm’s HWB. s. v. Uhr]): Mt. xxiv.
36; xxv. 18; Mk. xiii. 32; xv. 25,38; Lk. xxii. 59; xxiii.
44; Jn.i.39 (40); iv. 6; xix. 14; with rijs nuépas added,
Acts ii. 15; of the hours of the night, Lk. xii. 39;
xxii. 59; with ris vuerds added, Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 23;
dat. pa, in stating the time when [W. §31, 9; B.
§ 133, 26]: Mt. xxiv. 44; Mk. xv. 34; Lk. xii. 39 sq.;
preceded by ev, Mt. xxiv. 50; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xvi. 33;
accus. to specify when [W. § 32,6; B. § 131, 11]: Jn.
iv.52; Acts x.3; 1Co.xv. 30; Rev. iii.3; also to express
duration [W. and B. ll.ec.]: Mt. xx. 12 [cf. rod, I.
1a. fin.]; xxvi. 40; Mk.xiv.37; preceded by preposi-
tions: awd, Mt. xxvii. 45; Acts xxiii. 23; €ws, Mt. xxvii.
45; péxpt, Acts x. 30; mepi with the accus. Acts x. 9.
improp. used for a very short time: wa Spa, Rev. xviii.
10 [Rec. év, WH mrg. ace.], 17 (16), 19; mpods Spay,
[A. V. for a season], Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8; Gal. ii. 5
[here A. V. for an hour]; Philem. 15; mpos xatpov Spas,
[for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17. 4. any definite
time, point of time, moment: Mt. xxvi. 45; more precisely
defined —by a gen. of the thing, Lk.i.10; xiv.17; Rev.
iii.10; xiv.7,15; by agen. of the pers. the jit or oppor-
tune time for one, Lk. xxii. 53; Jn.ii.4; by a pronoun
or an adj.: # dpre Spa, [A. V. this present hour], 1 Co.
iv. 11; ésydrn dpa, the last hour 1.e. the end of this age
and very near the return of Christ from heaven (see
éoxaros, 1 p. 2535), 1 Jn. ii. 18 [cef. Westcott ad loc.];
avr TH Spa, that very hour, Lk. ii. 38 [here A.V. (not
R.V.) that instant]; xxiv. 33; Acts xvi. 18; xxii.13; é
aith 7H Spa, in that very hour, Lk. vii. 21 [R GL txt.];
xii. 12; xx. 193 ev 77 Spa exetvn, Mt. vill. 13; ev exeivy
7H Spa, Mt. x. 19 [Lchm. br. the cl.]; Mk. xiii. 11; [Lk.
vii. 21 L mrg. T Tr WH]; Rev. xi. 13; dm’ exeivns ras
dpas, In. xix. 27; dad rhs Spas éxeivns, Mt. ix. 22; xv.
28; xvii.18; by a conjunction: @pa ére, Jn. iv. 21, 23;
v. 25: xvi. 25; ta (see tva, II. 2 d.), Jn. xii. 235 xiii.
1; xvi. 2,32; by cai and a finite verb, Mt. xxvi. 45;
by a relative pron. Spa ev 7, Jn. v. 28; by the addition
of an acc. with an inf. Ro. xiii. 11 (ovr@ dpa ovvayxOnvas
ra krnyn, Gen. xxix. 7; see exx. in the Grk. writ., fr.
Aeschyl. down, in Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2620°; [L. and
S.s.v. B. I. 8]; so the Lat. tempus est, Cic. Tuse. 1, 41,
99; ad Att. 10,8). Owing to the context Spa some-
times denotes the fatal hour, the hour of death : Mt. xxvi.
45; Mk. xiv. 35,41; Jn. xii. 27; xvi. 4 [here L Tr WH
read } Spa avtavi.e. the time when these predictions
are fulfilled]; xvii. 1; 7 Spa ruvds, ‘one’s hour’, i.e.
the time when one must undergo the destiny appointed
him by God: so of Christ, Jn. vii. 30; viii. 20, cf. xvi. 21.
[On the omission of the word see é£avrys, (4¢’ is? ch
@patos
p 58° top), W. § 64,5s.v.; B.82 (71); on the omission
of the art. with it (e.g. 1 Jn. ii. 18), see W. § 19s. v.]
dpaios, -a, -ov, (fr. dpa, ‘the bloom and vigor of life’,
‘beauty’ in the Grk. writ., who sometimes join the word
in this sense with ydpis [which suggests grace of move-
ment] or xdAXos [which denotes, rather, symmetry of
form]), fr. Hes. down, ripe, mature, (of fruits, of human
age, ete.); hence blooming, beautiful, (of the human
body, Xen., Plat., al.; with r7 dyer added, Gen. xxvi.
7; xxix.17; xxxix.6; 1K.i. 6): addes, Ro. x. 15; of a
certain gate of the temple, Acts iii. 2, 10; [raqoe kexo-
napeévot, Mt. xxiii. 27]; oxedos, 2 Chr. xxxvi. 19. [Cf.
Trench, Syn. § evi.]*
wpbopor; depon. mid.; Sept. for ixw; to roar, to howl,
(of a lion, wolf, dog, and other beasts): 1 Pet. v. 8
(Judg. xiv.5; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 145 Jer. ii. 15; Sap. xvii.
18; Theocr., Plut., al.); of men, to raise a loud and in-
articulate cry: either of grief, Hdt. 3, 117; or of joy,
id. 4, 75; to sing with a loud voice, Pind. Ol. 9, 163.”
ws [Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 és; cf. W.
462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s.v. p. 494° bot.], an adverbial form of the rela-
tive pron. és, 7, 6 which is used in comparison, as, like
as, even as, according as, in the same manner as, ete.
(Germ. wie); but it also assumes the nature of a con-
junction, of time, of purpose, and of consequence.
On its use in the Grk. writ. ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2,
ch. xxxv. p. 756 sqq.; [L. and S. s. v.].
I. as as an adverb of camparison; 1. It
answers to some demonstrative word (ovras, or the like),
either in the same clause or in another member of the
same sentence [cf. W. § 53, 5]: ovrws ... ds, Jn. vii. 46
[L WH om. Tr br. as ete.]; 1 Co. iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26;
Eph. v. 28, 33; Jas. ii. 12; ovrws... as éav [T Tr WH
om. eay (cf. Eng. as should a man cast ete.)]... Bdadn,
sa ete....as if ete. Mk. iv. 26; as... ovrws, Acts viii.
32; xxiii. 11; 1 Co. vii..17;2.Co.xi/3 [RG]; 1 Th. y.
2; ws ay (édv) foll. by subj. [(cf. dy, II. 2 a. fin.)]...
ovrws, 1 Th. ii. 7sq.; os... oro Kai, Ro. v. 15 [here
WH br. cai], 18; 2Co.i. 7 LT Tr WH; vii. 14; os [T
Tr WI kadas] ... xara ra ara [LG raird, Ree. radra],
Lk. xvii. 28-30; toos... @s Kal, Acts xi. 17; sometimes
in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative
word (ovr@s, or the like) is omitted and must’ be sup-
plied by the mind,as Mt. viii. 13; Col. ii.6; as...
kai (where ovr xai might have been expected [W. u.s.;
B. § 149, 8 c.]), Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 [here G T Tr WH
om. L br. the cl.]; Acts vii. 51 [Lehm. cade]; Gal. i. 9;
Phil. i. 20, (see cai, II. 1 a.); to this construction must
be referred also 2 Co. xiii. 2 és mapdv rd Sedrepov, Kai
ara@v viv, as when I was present the second time, so now
being absent [(cf. p. 317° top); al. render (cf. R. V.
mrg.) as if I were present the second time, even though
Lam now absent). 2. os with the word or words
forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preced-
ing verb that ovrws must be mentally inserted before
the same. When thus used és refers a. to the
680
e
@sS
verb, and is equiv. to in the same manner as, after the
fashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (nom.)
of the verb: Mt. vi. 29; vii. 29; xiii. 43; 1 Th. ii. 11;
2 Pet.ii.12; Jude 10, etc.; toan acc. governed by the
verb: as dyanav rév rAnoiov cov os ceautdv, Mt. xix. 19;
xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9; Gal. v.
14; Jas. ii. 8; add, Philem.17; Gal. iv. 14; [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) would bring in also Acts iii. 22; vii. 37
(cf. c. below)]; or to another oblique case: as Phil. ii.
22; toa subst. with a prep.: as as ev kpumra, Jn. Vii.
10 [Tdf. om. as]; os &v qucpa odayis, Jas. v. 5 (RG;
al. om. as]; as dia Enpas, Heb. xi. 29; add, Mt. xxvi. 55;
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; Ro. xiii. 18; Heb. iii. 8;
when joined to a nom. or an ace. it can be rendered like,
(like) as, (Lat. instar, veluti): Mt. x. 16; Lk. xxi. 35;
EX. S1 41 Costit..10 1 Thoyj4s32 Pim 7 = aa.
10; 1 Pet. v. 8; 2 Pet. iii. 10; kadety ra py dyta os Svra
(see kadéa, 1 b. 8. sub fin.), Ro. iv. 17. b. @s joined
to a verb makes reference to the ‘substance’ of the
act expressed by the verb, i. e. the action designated by
the verb is itself said to be done ws, in like manner
(just) as, something else: Jn. xv. 6 (for 7d BadAcobas
é&o is itself the very thing which is declared to happen
[i.e. the unfruitful disciple is ‘cast forth’ just as the
severed branch is ‘cast forth’]); 2 Co. iii. 1 [Lchm. és
[wep ]]; generally, however, the phrase as «ai is employed
[W. § 53, 5], 1 Co. ix.5; xvi. 10 [here WH txt. om. rat];
Eph. ii.3; 1 Th. v.6 [L T Tr WH om. cai]; 2 Tim. iii.
9) Elebs i. 2h 2 ete allied oe c. es makes refer-
ence to similarity or equality, in such expres-
sions as eivat ds twa, i. e. ‘to be like’ or ‘equal to’ one,
Mt. xxii. 30; xxviii. 8; Mk. vi. 34; xii. 25; Lk. vi. 40;
Ki. 44 5, xviii: 115, xxii. 26.sq.;, Ro, ix. 275)1 Cos viii,
29-31; 2 Co.ii.17; 1 Pet.i. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 8; iva py os
kar’ dvaykny To dyabdy cov 7, that thy benefaction may not
be like something extorted by force, Philem. 14; yiveoOat
és twa, Mt. x. 25; xviii. 3; Lk. xxii. 263 Ro. ix. 29; 1 Co.
iv. 13; ix. 20-22 [in vs. 22 T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br.
os]; Gal. iv. 12; pévew ds twa, 1 Co. vii. 8; movety riva
és twa, Lk. xv. 19; passages in which éoriv, nv, dy (or
6 év) is left to be supplied by the reader: as 9 dovy
airod &s pavi bddrav, Rev. i. 15; épOadpors, sc. dvras,
Rev. ii. 18; miorw se. odoav, Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 6;
add, Rev. iv. 7s, ix, 2, 5,:%7—9, 175, x15. x11-055 sie
xiv. 2; xx. 8; xxi. 21; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37, [many (cf.
R. V. mrg.) refer these last two pass. to a. above]; x.
11; xi. 5, etc.; before Ss one must sometimes supply
ri, ‘something like’ or ‘having the appearance of’ this
or that: thus és éddacoa, i. e. something having the ap-
pearance of [R. V. as it were] a sea, Rev. iv. 6 GLT Tr
WH;; viii. 8; ix. 7; xv. 2, (so in imitation of the Hebr.
>, ef. Deut. iv. 32; Dan. x. 18; ef. Gesenius, Thes. p.
648° [ Soph. Lex. s.v.2]); passages where the compar
ison is added to some adjective: as, iyujs os, Mt. xil. 135
Nevxd ds, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk. ix. 3 [R L]; add, Heb. xii. 165
Rev.i. 14; vi. 12; viii. 10; x.9; xxi. 25; xxii. 1. d.
&s so makes reference to the quality of a person,
manner (‘form’) of the action expressed by the finite ‘ thing, or action, as to be equiv. to such as, exactly like, as
WS
it were; Germ. als; and a. to a quality which
really belongs tothe person or thing: as éovoiav
éxov, Mt. vii. 29; Mk. i. 22; ws povoyevots mapa rarpés,
Jn. i. 14; add, [((L T Tr WH in Mt. v. 48; vi. 5, 16)];
Acts xvii. 22; Ro. vi. 13 [here L T Tr WH ooed]; xv.
15; 1Co.iii.1; vii. 25; 2 Co. vi. 4; xi. 16; Eph. v. 1,
8; 15; Col. iii, 12; 1 Th. ii. 4;°1 Tim. v. 1 sq.; 2) Tim.
ii. 3; Tit.i. 7; Philem. 9, 16 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.];
Heb. iii. 5 sq.; vi. 19; xi. 9; xiii. 17; 1 Pet.i. 14,19; ii.
2,5, 11; iii. 7; iv. 10, 15sq. 19[ RG]; 2 Pet. i. 19; 2Jn.
G Jase 12 Revs inl 7; ov. 63 *avis 21 xvil 12, ete.;
@s ovK adndws sc. Tpéxov, as one who is not running
ete. 1 Co. ix. 26; concisely, as é& ecidukpiweias and ék
cod sc. Aadovvres, borrowed from the neighboring
Aadodpev, 2 Co. ii. 17; Twa Ss twa or te after verbs
of esteeming, knowing, declaring, ete. [W.
§§ 32,4 b.; 59,6]: as, after AoyiCew, Aoyifer Oa, Ro.
viii. 36; 1 Co. iv. 1 (where ovrws precedes); 2 Co. x.
25 HyetoOa, 2 Th. ili. 15; eyew, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, 46
[but here L. T Tr WH read es (cf. éya, I. 1 f.)], (revas
as Oeovs, Ev. Nicod. ¢. 5); amodeckvivat, 1 Co. iv. 9;
trapaBddXew [or dpotody (q. v.)], Mk. iv. 31; diaBadrrew,
pass. Lk. xvi. 1; edéyxeu, pass. Jas. ii. 9; evpioxew, pass.
Phil. ii. 7 (8). B. toa quality which is supposed,
pretended, feigned, assumed: os duapr@dds kpi-
vouat, Ro. iii. 7; as movnpdv, Lk. vi. 22; add, 1 Co. iv. 7;
viii. 7; 2 Co. vi. 8-10; xi. 15 sq.3 xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 12;
frequently it can be rendered as if, as though, Acts iii.
#2% Sexi, 15; 205) xxvil. 305.1 Co: v.85 -2'Colx. 143 x1
17; Col. ii. 20; Heb. xi. 27; xiii. 3; emuoroAns Os Sv
jpav, sc. yeypaunperns, 2 Th. ii. 2. 3. os with the
gen. absol. presents the matter spoken of — either as
the belief of the writer, 2 Co. v. 20; 2 Pet. i. 3; or as
some one’s erroneous opinion : 1 Co. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12;
cf. W. § 65, 9; [B.§ 145, 7; esp. $144, 22]. In gen-
eral, by the use of os the matter spoken of is presented —
either as a mere matter of opinion: as in as &€& epyev
se. 6 Iopaid vouov Sixavoovyyns ediwgev, Ro. ix. 32 (where
it marks the imaginary character of the help the
Israelites relied on, they thought to attain righteous-
ness in that way [A. V. as it were by works]);—or
as a purpose: mopeverOa ws én Oddacoar, that, as
they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts xvii. 14, ef.
Meyer ad loc.; W. 617 (573 sq.), [but L T Tr WH
read és, as far as to ete.];—or as merely the thought
of the writer: Gal. iii. 16; before ért, 2 Co. xi. 21; —or
as the thought and pretence of others: also before dre,
2 Th. ii. 2: cf. W. u. s.3 [B. § 149, 3; on @e dre in 2 Co.
v.19 (A.V. to wit) see W. and B. Il. ce. (ef. Esth. iv.
14; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 11,1 and Miiller’s note; L.andS.
s.v. G. 2; Soph. Lex. s. ¥. 7)]; as ay, as if, as though,
2 Co. x. 9 [ef. W. 310 (291) ; but cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1,
and see ay, IV. ]. 4. ws has its own verb, with which
it forms a complete sentence ; a. os with a finite
verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be trans-
lated as, just as, (Lat. sicut, eo modo quo): Eph. vi. 20;
Gols WSs iv: 45° 1¢ Pet. i-'6);. 2 Pets ii 13 Pani. 75
Rev. ii. 28 (27) [this ex. is referred by some (cf. R. V.
681 as
mrg.) to 2 a. above]; vi. 13; ix.3; xviii. 6 [here és kai;
the ex. seems to belong under 2 b. above]. in phrases
in which there is an appeal—either to the O. T. (és
yéypanrat), Mk. i. 2 [here T Tr WH xaos]; vii. 6; Lk.
iii. 4; Acts xiii. 33; or in general to the testimony of
others, Acts xvii. 28; xxii. 5; xxv. 10; Ro. ix. 25: 1
Co. x. 7RG (cf. dSa7ep, b.). in phrases like sovets
@s mpooeragev or ouveraéev, etc.: Mt. i. 24; xxvi. 19;
XXVili, 15; Lk. xiv. 22 [here TTrtxt. WH 6]; Tit. i.
5; likewise, Mt. viii. 13; xv. 28; Rev. x. 7; sc. yevnO7-
To pot, Mt. xxvi. 39. in short parenthetic or inserted
sentences: ws elaOer, Mk. x. 1; ws évopitero, Lk. iii. 23 ;
as Aoyi€opat, 1 Pet. v. 12; as trokapBavere, Acts ii. 15;
ws Néyovow, Rev. ii. 24; as av iyeobe, [R. V. howsoever
ye might be led} utcunque agebamini [ef. B. § 139, 13;
383 sq. (329); W. § 42, 3 a.], 1 Co. xii. 2. as serves
to add an explanatory extension [and is rendered in
A. V. how (that)]: Acts x. 88; rv... imaxony, as ete.
2 Co. vii. 15; rod Adyou rod Kupiov, as eimev ait@, Lk.
Xxii. 615 rod pruaros, as edeyev, Acts xi. 16, (Xen. Cyr.
8, 2,14; an. 1, 9,11); ef. Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc.
p- 141. b. os is used to present, in the form of a
comparison, a motive which is urged upon one, —as
dies july Ta dpewjpata Nar, ws Kat npeis apnxapev (RG
agienev) xd. (for which Lk. xi. 4 gives kai yap avrot
agdiopev), Mt. vi. 12, —or which actuates one, as ydpw
Exo TO Oe@ .. . HS ddidAetmTov EXw THY TEpl God preEiar,
2 Tim. i. 8 (for the dear remembrance of Timothy moves
Paul’s gratitude to God); [ef. Jn. xix. 33 (ef. II. a. be-
low)]; in these examples ws has almost the force of a
causal particle; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 766; [L. and
S. s. v. B. IV.; W. 448 (417) ]. c. ws adds in a
rather loose way something which serves to illustrate
what precedes, and is equiv. to the case is as though
[R. V. it is as when]: Mk. xiii. 34, where cf. Fritzsche
p- 587; unless one prefer, with Meyer et al., to make it
an instance of anantapodoton [ef. A. V. ‘For the Son
of Man is as aman’ ete.]; see Somep, a. fin. 5. ac-
cording as: Ro. xii. 3; 1 Co. iii. 5; Rev. xxii. 12. 6.
és, like the Germ. wie, after verbs of reading, nar-
rating, testifying, and the like, introduces that
which is read, narrated, etc. ; hence it is commonly said
to be equivalent to dru (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 765);
put there is this difference between the two, that 67s ex-
presses the thing itself, ds the mode or quality
of the thing [hence usually rendered how], (cf. W. § 53,
9; [Meyer on Ro. i. 9; cf. L. and S. s. v. B. I.]): thus
after dvay.wooxew, Mk. xii. 26 (where T Tr WH zs) ;
Lk. vi. 4 [here Tr WH br. as; Ltxt. reads rs]; pvno67-
va, Lk. xxiv. 6 [Lmrg. 60a]; beaoOa, Lk. xxiii. 55;
irouynoa, Jude 5 [here drt (not as) is the particle], 7
fal. regard &s here as introducing a confirmatory illus-
tration of what precedes (A.V. even as ete.) ; cf. Huther,
or Briickner’s De Wette, ad loc.]; eidéva, Acts x. 38;
Ro. xi. 2; 1 Th. ii. 113; éwicracOa, Acts x. 28 [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) connect os with the adj. immediately
following (see 8 below)]; xx. 18, 20; damayyédXew, Lk.
viii. 47; e&nyeioOat, Lk. xxiv. 35; pdprus, Ro. i. 9 [here
@sS
al. connect &s with the word which follows it (cf. 8
below) ]; Phil.i.8. 7. as before numerals denotes
nearly, about: as, os duoxidtor, Mk. v. 13; add, Mk. viii.
9; Lk. ii. 37 (here L T Tr WH éas); viii. 42; Jn. i. 39
(40); [iv.6 LT Tr WH]; vi. 19 (here Lehm. aget) ;
xi. 18; [xix.39G LT TrWH]; xxi. 8; Actsi.15 [ Tdf.
éoei]; v. 7, [36 LT Tr WH]; xiii. [18 (yet not WH
txt.) ; cf. cai, I. 2f.], 20; xix. 34 [WH aoei]; Rev. viii.
1, (3,1 S. xi. 1; xiv. 2, etc.) ; for exx. fr. Grk. writ.
see Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2631; [L. and 8. s. v. E;
Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]. 8. as is prefixed to adjectives
and adverbs, and corresponds to the Lat. quam, how,
Germ. wie, (so fr. Hom. down): s @paia, Ro. x. 15;
add, Ro. xi. 33; &s dciws, 1 Th. ii. 10, (Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.)
1); with a superlative, as much as can be: as taxioTa,
as quickly as possible (very often in prof. auth.), Acts
xvii. 15; ef. Viger. ed. Hermann, pp. 562, 850; Passow
ii. 2 p. 2631” bot.; [L. and 8. s. v. Ab. IIT.].
II. os as a particle of time; a. as, when,
since; Lat. ut, cum, [W. § 41 b. 3,1; § 53, 8]: with the
indic., &s d¢ émopevovro, Mt. xxviii. 8 (9); Mk. ix. 21 [Tr
mre. ¢£ ob]; Lk. i. 23, 41, 44; ii. 15, 39; iv. 255 v. 4;
Vil. 1s ekiils, SV. 20s XIX D5 295 UXXI. 66; KI DOS
xxiv. 32; Jn. ii. 9, 23; iv. 1, 40, [45 Tdf.]; vi. 12, 16;
Vii-..10 Vill..7 >. -X1..6;,20, 295 32.sq.° Xvili.6; [ict xix:
33 (see I. 4 b. above)]; xx. 11; xxi.9; Actsi.10; v.
24: vii. 23; viii. 36; ix. 235 x. 7,17, 25; xiii. [18 WH
txt. (see I. 7 above) ], 25, 29; xiv.5; xvi. 4,10, 15; xvii.
13% xvii. Gs) xix. OY 2 Ler kx. 14/78 2) xxi 812 27s soaks
11), 25>. xxvss 145, xxvii! 1,527 5) xxvuni._4,,(iom. I1.4,
600; 2, 321; 3, 21; -Hdt. 1, 65, 80; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,4.
8. 20; oftenin the O: T. Apocr. esp. 1 Mace. ; ef. Wahl,
Clavis apocr. V. T.,s. v. 1V.e. p. 507 sq.). b. while,
when, (Lat. dum, quando): Lk. xx.37}; as long as, while,
Jn. [ix. 4 Tr mrg. WH mrg. (cf. éws, I. 2)]; xii. 35, [36],
LT Tr WH [(cf. és, u. s.)]; Lk. xii. 58; Gal. vi. 10
[here A.V.as (so R.V. in Lk.1. c.); T WH read the subj.
(as we may have ete.); Meyer (on Jn. xii. 35; Gal. 1. c.)
everywhere denies the meaning while; but cf. L. and S.
s. v. B. V. 2.3 Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c.]. C. ws dv, as
soon as: with the subj. pres. Ro. xv. 24 [A. V. here
whensoever|; with the 2 aor. subj. having the force of
the fut. perf., 1 Co. xi. 34 [R. V. whensoever]; Phil. ii.
23. ([Cf. B. 232 (200); W. § 42, 5a.; Soph. Lex. s. v.
6.]
III. ws as a final particle (Lat. wt), in order that,
in order to [ef. Gildersleeve in Am. Journ. of Philol. No.
16, p. 419 sq.]: foll. by an inf. [(cf. B. 244 (210); W. 318
(299) ; Kriiger § 65, 3, 4), Lk. ix.52 Lmrg. WH]; Acts
xx. 24, (3 Mace. i. 2; 4 Mace. xiv. 1); &s eos elreiv,
so to say (see eizov, 1 a.), Heb. vii. 9 [L mre. eter].
IV. ds as a consecutive particle, introducing a
consequence, so that: so (acc. to the less freq. usage)
with the indic. (Hdt. 1, 163; 2, 135; W. 462 (431)),
Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, (Hebr. 1ws, Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11);
[but many interpp. question this sense with the indic.
(the exx. fr. Hdt. are not parallel), and render os in
Heb. Il. ce. as (so R. V.)].
682
OOTTEp
doavva [see WH. Intr. § 408; but L'T de.; see Lady.
Proleg. p. 107], (derived from Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 25
NI Twin, i.e. ‘save, I pray’, Sept. cacov 67; [in
form the word seems to be the Greek reproduction of
an abbreviated pronunciation of the Hebr. (83-pwin) 5
al. would make it Nipwis (‘save us’); ef. Hilgenfeld,
Evang. sec. Hebraeos (ed. alt. 1884) p. 25 and p. 122;
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 173]), hosanna; be
propitious: Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9sq.; Jn. xii. 13; with
T® via Aavid added, be propitious to the Messiah, Mt.
xxi. 9, 15, [cf. ocavva rH Oe@ AaBid, ‘Teaching’ 10, 6
(where see Harnack’s note) |.*
ao-atTws, (ws and airws), adv., [asa single word, Post-
Homeric], in like manner, likewise: put after the verb,
Mt. xx. 5; xxi. 30, 36; put before the verb, Mk. xiv. 31;
Lk. xiii. 3 (here L T Tr WH opoias), 5 (T Trtxt. WH);
Ro. viii. 26; 1 Tim. v. 25; Tit. ii. 6; as often in Grk.
writ. the verb must be supplied from the preceding con-
text, Mt. xxv. 17; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xx. 31; xxii. 207 WH
reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim. ii. 9 (se. SovAopat,
cf. 8); iii. 8 (sc. det, cf. 7), 11; Tit. ii. 3 (sc. amperes
eiva).*
wo-el, (ds and ef [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]), adv., fr. Hom.
down, prop. as if, i. e. a. as it were (had been), as
though, as, like as, like: Mt. iii. 16; ix. 36 [Treg. os];
Lk. iii. 22 (L T Tr WH os); Acts ii. 3; vi. 15; ix. 18
[LT Tr WH os]; Ro. vi. 18 LT Tr WH; Heb. i. 12;
also Rec. in Mk.i.10; Jn. i. 325 yiverOa ooei, Mt. xxviii.
4 RG; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the
pass.]; elvat woei, Mt. xxviii. 3 [LT Tr WH os], and
Ree. in Heb. xi. 12 and Rev. i. 14; daiverOat aoei tt, to
appear like a thing, Lk. xxiv. 11. b. about, nearly:
a. before numerals: Mt. xiv. 21; Lk. i. 56 [RG]; iii.
23; ix. 14, 28; xxii. 41,59; xxiii.44; Jn. vi. 1O[RGL
(al. os)]; Acts ii.41; iv.4[RG]; x.3 [in LT Tr WH
it is strengthened here by the addition of wepi]; xix. 7;
also, Rec. in Mk. vi. 44; R Gin Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [@?],
39; Acts v.36; Lehm. in Jn. vi. 19, (Judg. iii. 29; Neh.
vii. 66; Xen. Hell. 1, 2, 9; 2,4, 25). B. before a
measure of space: @oei Aiov Bodny, Lk. xxii. 41.*
‘Qoné [G T Tr, but RL ‘Qe.; see WH. Intr. § 408;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], (pwin ‘deliverance’), 6, Hosea, a
well-known Hebrew prophet, son of Beeri and contem-
porary of Isaiah (Hos. i. 1 sq.): Ro. ix. 25.*
do-mep, ([cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]; fr. as and the enclit.
particle wép, which, “in its usual way, augments and
brings out the force of as” Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 7683
see wep), adv., [fr. Hom. down], just as, even as ; a.
in a protasis with a finite verb, and followed by ovras or
ovtas kai in the apodosis [ef. W. §§ 53, 5; 60,5]: Mt.
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27,37 sq. 38 (LT Tr [cf. os init. J
WH as); Lk. xvii. 24; Jn. v. 21, 26; Ro. v. 19, 21; vi.
4,193. xi. 80 ;/1.Co. xi 123 xv. 22\xvi. 1; 2iGonn. 7 (here
LT Tr WHas); Gal. iv. 29; Eph. v. 24[LT Tr WH
as|; Jas. ii. 26; domep... iva wai ([ef. W. § 43, 5 a.;
B. 241 (208); ef. wa, I. 4 b.]), 2 Co. viii. 7; evAoyiap
- +» €roipny eivat (cl. W. § 44, 1 c.] ovrws as eddoyiay Ka
uy Sorep etc. ‘that your bounty might so be ready as a
womTrepet
matter of bounty and not as if” ete. 2 Co. ix. 5 [but only
Rec. reads éomep, and even so the example does not
strictly belong under this head]; the apodosis which
should have been introduced by ovrws is wanting [W.
§ 64, 7b.; p. 569 (580) ; cf. B. § 151,12 and 23 ¢.]: Ro.
v. 12 (here what Paul subjoined in vs. 13 sq. to prove the
truth of his statement mdvres jjpaprov, prevented him
from adding the apodosis, which had it corresponded
accurately to the terms of the protasis would have run
as follows: ovr kat dv évis dvOpamov 7 Sixatoovrn els Tov
Kdopop ciondOe Kai Sia rs Suxacoovwns 9 wn: Kai ovTws eis
mavras avOpwmous 9 Cw SteAedoera, ep @ mavres SiKaww-
Onoovra; this thought he unfolds in vs. 15 sqq. in an-
other form); Mt. xxv. 14 (here the extended details of
the parable caused the writer to forget the apodosis
which he had in mind at the beginning; [ef. as, I.
4¢.]). b. it stands in close relation to what pre-
cedes: Mt. v. 48 (LT Tr WH 4s); vi. 2,5 (LT Tr
WH as), 7,16 (L TTr WH as); xx. 28; xxv. 323 Acts
iii. 17; xi. 15; 1Co. viii.5; 1Th.v.3; Heb. iv. 10; vii.
27; ix. 25; Rev. x. 3; domep yéyparra, 1 Co. x. 7L.T
Tr WH; eipi domep tts, to be of one’s sort or class (not
quite identical in meaning with és or dei ris, to be like
one [cf. Bengel ad loc.]), Lk. xviii. 11 [but L Tr WH
mrg. ds]; yivoua, Acts ii. 2 (the gen. is apparently not
to be explained by the omission of jyos, bat rather as
gen. absol.: just as when a mighty wind olows, i. e. just
as a sound is made when a mighty wind blows [R.V. as
of the rushing of a mighty wind]); éotw oo &omep 6
€Ouxds xd. let him be regarded by thee as belonging to
the number of etc. Mt. xviii. 17.*
do-rep-el, (domep and e [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]), adv.,
fr. Aeschy]l. down, as, as it were: 1 Co. xv. 8.*
do-re, (fr. os and the enclit. ré [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]),
a consecutive conjunction, i.e. expressing conse-
quence or result, fr. Hom. down, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 770 sqq.3 W. § 41 b. 5 N. 1 p. 301 (282 sq.); [B.
§ 139, 50]; 1. so that, [A. V. frequently insomuch
that]; a. with an inf. (or acc. and inf.) [B. § 142,
3; the neg. in this construction is py, B. § 148, 6; W.
480 (447) ]: preceded by the demonstr. odrws, Acts xiv.
1; rogovros, Mt. xv. 33 (so many loaves as to fill etc.) ;
without a demonstr. preceding (where éore defines
more accurately the magnitude, extent, or quantity),
Mt. viii. 24, 28; xii. 22; xiii. 2, 82, 54; xv. 31; xxvii.
14; Mk. i. 27,45; ii. 2, 12; iii. 10, 203 iv. 1, 32, 37; ix.
26; xv.5; Lk. v. 7; xii. 1; Acts i. 19; v. 15; xv. 39;
xvi. 26; xix. 10, 12,16; Ro. vii. 6; xv. 19; 1Co.i. 7; v.
ex. 2; 2'Cosis Ss is ts a. vs viln.¢ 5 Phil a. 18° 4
Th. i. 7sq.; 2 Th. i. 4; ii. 4; Heb. xiii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 21;
it is used also of a designed result, so as to i.q. in
order to, for to, Mt. x.1; xxiv. 24 [their design]; xxvii.
1; Lk. iv. 29 (Ree. e’s 7d); ix. 52 [Lmrg. WH ss, q. v.
IIL]; and LT Tr WH in Lk. xx. 20 [RGeis rd], (1
Mace. i. 49; iv. 2, 28; x. 3; 2 Mace. ii.6; Thuc. 4, 23;
Xen. Cyr. 3, 2,16; Joseph. antt. 18, 5,10; Eus. h.e. 3,
683
aPéripos
28, 3[cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 5]); cf. W. 318 (298); B. § 139,
50 Rem. b. so that, with the indicative [B. 244
(210) ; cf. W. 301 (283); Meyer or Ellicott on Gal.
as below]: Gal. ii. 13, and often in prof. auth. ; preceded
by ovres, Jn. ili. 16. 2. so then, therefore, wherefore :
with the indic. (cf. Passow s. v. II. 1 b., vol. ii. p. 2639";
[L. and S.s. v. B. II. 2; the neg. in this constr. is od,
B. § 148, 5]), Mt. xii. 12; xix. 6; xxiii. 31; Mk. ii. 28;
x. 8; Ro. vii. 4, 12; xiii. 2; 1 Co. iii. 7; vii.38; xi. 27;
xiv. 22; 2 Co.iv.12; v.16sq.3; Gal. iii. 9, 24; iv. 7, 16;
once with a hortatory subj.1 Co. v.8 [here L mrg. ind.].
before an imperative: 1 Co. iii. 21; [iv. 5]; x. 12; xi.
33; xiv. 89; xv. 58; Phil. ii. 12; iv. 1; 1 Th. iv. 18;
Jas. 1.19 [LT Tr WH read tove; cf. p.174*top]; 1 Pet.
iv. 19
araptov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of ods, ards; cf. yuvatkaptop
[W. 24, 96 (91)]), i. gq. driov (q. v.), the ear: Mk. xiv.
47 L TTr WH; Jn. xviii. 10 TTrWH. (Anthol. 11,
75, 2; Anaxandrides ap. Athen. 3, p. 95 c.) *
arlov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of ods, ards, but without the
dimin. force; “the speech of common life applied the
diminutive form to most of the parts of the body, as ra
pwia the nose, rd dppatiov, orn Gidiov, xeAvMov, Tapkiov
the body” Lod. ad Phryn. p. 211 sq. [cf. W. 25 (24)]),
a later Greek word, the ear: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv. 47
[RG(c.@ tpov)]; Lk. xxii. 515; Jn. xviii. 10 [RG L
(cf. drdptov) |, 26. (Sept. for ji, Deut. xv. 17; 1S. ix.
15° xx. 2 13; 2S: xxu.45; Is. |. 45 Am. i. 125) =
adbédera, [WH -Ala (cf. I, ¢)], -as, 4, (@PeAns), fr. [Soph.
and] Hat. down, usefulness, advantage, profit: Ro. iii. 1;
tis apedeias xapw (Polyb. 8, 82, 8 [yet in the sense of
‘booty’]), Jude 16. (Job xxii. 8; Ps. xxix. (xxx.)
10.)*
adedéw, -O; fut. dPeAjow; 1 aor. SPeAnoa; Pass., pres.
d&pedodpar; 1 aor. apedyOnv; 1 fut. apeAnOjnoopar (Mt.
xvi. 26 LT Tr WH); (éedos); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down; Sept. for yim; to assist, to be useful or advan-
tageous, to profit: absol. Ro. ii. 25; with acc. ovd€v, to be
of no use, to effect nothing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Jn. vi. 63; xii.
19, [in these exx. (Jn. vi. 63 excepted) A. V. prevail];
tivd, to help or profit one, Heb. iv. 2; teva te to help, profit,
one ina thing ([but the second ace. is a cognate acc. or
the ace. of a neut. adj. or pron.; ef. W. 227 (213)] so fr.
Hat. 3, 126 down) : ovdév riva, 1 Co. xiv. 6; Gal. v. 23
ri SpeAnoe [or dpedet (rov)] avOpwmov, édy xrd.; [(T
WH follow with an inf.)], what will (or ‘ doth’) it profit
aman if ete. [(or ‘to’ etc.)]? Mk. viii. 36; pass. opedov-
pat, to be helped or profited: Heb. xiii. 9; with acc. pndev,
Mk. v. 26; od8€v, 1 Co. xiii. 3; with acc. of the interrog.
ri, Mt. xvi. 26; Lk. ix. 25 [here WH mrg. gives the
act.]; Tl é rwos (gen. of pers.), to be profited by one
in some particular [ef. Mey. on Mt. as below; éx, II. 5],
Mitexv. 5: Miky vite 1d.*
axpéAtpos, -ov, (@pedew), profitable: revi (dat. of advan-
tage), Tit. iii. 8; mpds re (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 607 d. [W.
213 (200)]), 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. iii. 16.*
ae alt!
fas 2 :
sa hel
sy byt: 99 oT
id Di
i twaeeeod.
ae viré
Si9,:
| sieaerr 1
APPENDIX,
PREFATORY REMARKS.
HE lists of words herewith subjoined, as an aid to researches involving the language of the
New Testament, require a few preliminary remarks by way of explanation.
In the attempt to classify the vocabulary of the New Testament, words which occur in
secular authors down to and including Aristotle (who died B.c. 322) are regarded as belonging
to the classical period of the language, and find no place in the lists.
Words first met with between B.c. 322 and s.c. 150 are regarded as “Later Greek” and
registered in the list which bears that heading; but between B.c. 280 and B.c. 150 they have
“Sept.” appended to them in case they also occur in that version.
Words which first appear in the secular authors between B.c. 150 and B.c. 100 and are also
found in the Septuagint are credited to “Biblical Greek” (list 1 p. 693), but with the name of
the secular author added.
Words which first appear between B.c. 100 and a.p. 1 are registered solely as “ Later Greek.”
Words which first occur between a.p. 1 and a.p. 50 are enrolled as “Later Greek,” but
with the name of the author appended.
Words which appear first in the secular authors of the last half of the first century of our
era have an asterisk prefixed to them, and are enrolled both in the list of “Later Greek”
and in the list of “ Biblical Greek.”
A New Testament word credited to Biblical Greek, if not found in the Septuagint but
occurring in the Apocryphal books of the Old Testament, is so designated by an appended
« Apocr.”’?
Whenever a word given in either the Biblical or the Later Greek list is also found in the
Anthologies or the Inscriptions, that fact has been noted (as an intimation that such word
may possibly be older than it appears to be); and if the word belong to “ Later Greek,” the
name of the oldest determinate author in which it occurs is also given.
The New Testament vocabulary has thus been classified according to hard and fast
chronological lines. But to obviate in some measure the incorrect impression which the rigor
of such a method might give, it will be noticed that a twofold recognition has been accorded
to words belonging to the periods in which the secular usage and the sacred may be supposed to
overlap: viz., for the period covered by the preparation of the Septuagint, for the fifty years
which followed its completion, and for the last half of the first Christian century. Nevertheless,
the uncertainty inseparable from the results no scholar will overlook. Indeed, the surprises
1 Tt should be noted that in the following lists the term “Sept.” is used in its restricted sense to designate merely
the canonical books of the Greek Old Testament ; but in the body of the lexicon “Sept.” often includes all the
books of the Greek version, — as well the apocryphal as the canonical. In the lists of words peculiar to individual
writers an appended “ fr. Sept.” signifies that the word occurs only in a quotation from the Septuagint.
688
almost every one has experienced in investigating the age of some word in his vernacular which
has dropped out of use for whole stretches of time and then reappeared, may admonish him of
the precarious character of conclusions respecting the usage of an ancient language, of which
only fragmentary relics survive, and those often but imperfectly examined. The rough and
problematical results here given are not without interest; but they should not be taken for
more than they are worth.
The scheme of distribution adopted will be rendered more distinct by the subjoined
CHRONOLOGICAL CONSPECTUS.
Words in use before B.c. 322. . «. - « « « + « « « « ~ are ranked as classical, and remain unregistered.
Words first used between B.c. 8322 and B.c. 280 . . . . - + . are enrolled as Later Greek.
receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz.
as Later Greek with Sept. usage noted.
receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz.
as Biblical Greek with secular usage noted.
- are enrolled simply as Later Greek.
are Varcolian as Later Greek but with the name of the
author appended.
receive a double enrolment, viz. both as Biblical and
as Later Greek (with asterisk prefixed and name
of secular author appended).
Words first used between B.c. 280 and B.c. 150 . . .
Words first used between B.c. 150 and B.c. 100 . ...
Words first used between z.c.100 and a.p 1...
Words first used between a.D. land ap. 50... . ‘
Words first used between a.D. 50 and 2p.100... - ;
The selection of the distinctive New Testament significations has not been so simple a
matter as might be anticipated : —
It is obvious that the employment of a word in a figure of speech cannot be regarded as
giving it a new and distinct signification. Accordingly, such examples as dvax\ivw in the
description of future blessedness (Mt. viii. 11), aveuos to designate the ever-changing doctrinal
currents (Eph. iv. 14), dzapyy of first converts (Ro. xvi. 5), zéAus of the consummated kingdom
wi God (Heb. xiii. 14 etc.), cravpow as applied to the odpé (Gal. v. 24 etc.), y<ip to denote God’s
power (Lk. i. 66 etc.), and similar uses, are omitted.
Again, the mere application of a word to spiritual or religious relations does not in general
amount to a new signification. Accordingly, such terms as ywdoxew Gedv, dotA0s Xpiotod, tarynperys
tod Adyov, AvTpov and paptvpéw in the Christian reference, pew in St. John’s phraseology, and
the like, have been excluded. Yet this restriction has not been so rigorously enforced as to
rule out such words as éxdéyouat, karéw, knptoow, kpivw, tpodyte’w, and others, in what would be
confessed on all hands to be characteristic or technical New Testament senses.
In general, however, the list is a restricted rather than an inclusive one.
An appended mark of interrogation indicates uncertainty owing to diversity of text. In
the lists of words peculiar to individual New Testament writers —
a. When the use of a word by an author (or book) is unquestioned in any single passage
such word is credited to him without an interrogation-mark, even though its use be disputed by
some edition of the text in every other passage of that author.
6. When a word is found in one author (or book) according to all editions, but though
occurring in others is questioned there by some form of the text in every instance, it is credited
to the first, and the name of the others is appended in parenthesis with a question-mark.
689
c. When a word is found in two authors (or books), but in one of them stands in a
quotation from the Septuagint, it is credited to the one using it at first hand, and its use by
the other is noted with “Sept.” or “fr. Sept.” appended.
d. A word which is found in but a single author (or book) is credited to the same with a
question-mark, even though its use be disputed by one or another form of the text in every
instance of its occurrence.
e. A word which is found in two or more authors (or books) yet is disputed by one or
another form of the text in every instance, is excluded from the lists altogether.
The monumental misjudgments committed by some who have made questions of authorship
turn on vocabulary alone will deter students, it is to be hoped, from misusing the lists
exhibiting the peculiarities of the several books.
Explanations which apply only to particular lists are given at the beginning of those lists.
Proper names of persons, countries, rivers, places, have been omitted.
In drawing up the lists free use has been made of the collections to be found in Winer’s
Grammar, the various Introductions and Encyclopedias, the articles by Professor Potwin in
the Bibliotheca Sacra for 1875, 1876, 1880, such works as those of Holtzmann on the Synoptical
Gospels and the Pastoral Epistles, and especially the copious catalogues given by Zeller in his
Theologische Jahrbiicher for 1843, pp. 445-525.
In conclusion, a public expression of my thanks is due to W. W. Fenn, A. B., a student in
the Theological department of the University, for very efficient and painstaking assistance.
J. H.T;
CONTENTS.
I. Larter, 7. ¢. post-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WorDs IN THE NEw TESTAMENT .
Il. BorrowEp Worps ... af “hetittas Balsches
1. Words borrowed from the meee sth iow aerate Seciae ate
2; Words’ borrowed from the Latin—<-<r4—« 6-1.)
3. Words borrowed from other Foreign Tongues .. .
TI. Breuicat, t.e. New TesTtaMENT, GREEK . . . 2 6 « o «
1. Dlblical WiOldS y 00 os va Soveasct << Pe vena cil ona mee aes
2. biplical Signilicabions, ts «6. pen jestas;e sities Po gyen Ne a
IV. Worps pecutiar To InpivipvAL New TESTAMENT WRITERS
a Do Matthew 's: <s) ee 2. et, eee
Se Le MARK OMe et a ne ey cole Se ee eel ee nee
oo LO. Wake, sw Ss See en) ee
4. To all three oe tts a eer eo oo
Bi Dos ON S55. 0 4 ole takes peetoueton soa ie: worket es ate oane
Galo (Pale sorceress : Wide. sae
- To the Longer Epistles aia Philemon wee
b. To the Pastoral Epistles
e. To both the Pastoral and the other Pauline Epistles
%. To the Epistle to the Hebrews . . . . «© « « «
Selo ames: soi aia ceeded Wenn ienrey eee ewido
92. Lo Beater ly. Ties a ie i eens) teem
BOMEDTOUde. ee tee Ss fe) her te se el ee Norte
dd: To the Apocalypse. «5 «) ‘s) =) 6 fe) snus
12. To the Apocalypse and the Fourth Gospel . .. .
WT .. MORMS..OF VERBSi cvs. aa-Aieb eh 2A uke, 6-8 om, Sere Kouonalounte
ADDITIONS AND COREECTIONS 7.056 «6s «6: « © (e's tee
e
PAGE
691
692
692
693
693
693
693
696
698
698
699
699
703
703
704
704
706
707
708
708
709
799
709
710
711
725
APPENDIX.
L
LATER, ie POST-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WORDS IN THE
*dyaborods Plot.
ayvonua
adnhorns
ad.aXeintas
abeopos
adérnovs Cicero
GOAnots Polyb., inser.
dxapéouae
dxaraAvtos
dkatamravoTos
akpacia
“axpoatnpiov Plut.
akupow
a\dBaorpov (-rov Hat.)
a\extopopavia Aesop
"Ade~avdpuvos (or -dpivos)
a\ndo Anthol.
ad\Anyopew Philo
dyapavtwos Inscr.?
dpuetaberos
aweTavdnros
“avayevvaw Joseph.
avadeEts
avaGeya Anthol.
avabewpew
avavtippntos
avavTippntes
dvaTrohdyntos
*dvardocopa Plut. (Sept. ?)
avaxvots
‘averaicxuvros Joseph.
*avOurarevo Plut.
avOvracos Inscr., Polyb.
avridtarcOnus Philo
*avrudovdope@ Plut.
* Avrioxevs
*dvrAnua Plut.
avropbahuee
avuTroraxtos
arapaBaros
arrapriopés
dravyacua Philo
N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks.
*“dreipactos Joseph.
*drexSvoua Joseph. ?
am(or ap-)eAmifo
atrepiondatws
*amddexros Plut.
arobncaupilo
dmroxapadoxia
andxptya Polyb., Inser.
amoelxo
aroropia
amohitpaots
anooracia Archim., Sept.
drodopri¢ouat Philo
*andxpnots Plut.
am pdauros
*Apa Strab.
apotpiaw
*dpmaypds Plut.
dptepev Vitruv.
*dpxteparixds J oseph., Inscr.
“Aovdpxns Strab., Inscr.
aoodp.ov Anth., Dion. Hal.,
Inser.
adoroxew
apéapcia Philo
*aywwOos Aret. (-Ocov Xen.
on).
Babéews
*Barriopds Joseph.
*Bantiotns Joseph.
Biaorns Philv (Bvaras Pind.)
*yayypawa Plut.
ya¢a Theophr., Inser.
yovuTreréw
ypawdns Strab.
*yupynrevo Plut.
SecorSatwovia Polyb., Inser.
*SecnopviAas Joseph.
*Snvaprov Plut.
dtayrwpi¢o Philo
didrayya Sap., Inser.
dtavyalw
Scadnpica
didaxrixds Philo
Oveppnveto
dteria Philo, Inser.
d:6adaoaos
divxos Philo
dovdaywyéo
duc evréptov (-repia Hippocr.)
ducepunvevtos
eykakew OY éxkakéw
€ykom OF é€xkomh
€6vapxns Philo
€Ouikds
éxOaTravaw
€xOapBos
éxOavpatw Sir.
exvnpw Anthol.
éxmadat Philo
€xmAnpwots
éxrevera
*ehadpia Aret.
€Xenuoovvn Sept. (Gen.)
€Xevats
*eupatvoua Joseph.
€umdoxy
*evddunots Joseph.
évépynpa
*evopki(w? Joseph., inser.
€v@mtov
*éEaptitw Joseph., Inscr.
e&irxvo
*¢Eopxiatns Joseph.
*eEumvos Joseph.
*érayewvitoyat Plut., Inser.
*érraOpoitw Plut.
érdv (B.C. 265)
emapxia
érappivo
*érevdvw Joseph. (-8tve Hat.)
émBapéw Dion. Hal, Inscr.
émOavarios
*Emtxoupesos
NEW TESTAMENT.
émuoknvow
*émowpevo Plut
emrayi
emixopnyew
érepoyhoogos
evOvdpopew
evkaipew
eUKoTros
*eivovxitw Joseph.
*eizouia Joseph., Inser.
*eimpdadextos Plut.
*ed\yuxéw Joseph., Anthol,
Inser.
Ceards
jpcOavns Anthol.
T]p4L@ pLov
ijpepos
“Hped.avoi Joseph.
Oevdtns Philo
*Ocorvevoros Plut., Ora.
Sibyl.
*Oedrns Plut.
Enpropaxew
Opnoxeia (-«in Hdt.)
6prap Bevo
Svivos
| Supopayێw
| iepoupyew Philo, Inser.
' juarurpds
*"lovdaixés Joseph.
*Iovdaixés Joseph.
iodripos Philo
*xabeEjs Plut., Inses
caOnpepwds
KakovxXew
karaBaoée
karaBapvve
xatayoviComas
kardakpiua
KaTavTa@
*xarapriots Plute
kaTaoTnpa
LATER GREEK.
xaravyag{o? Apol. Rhod.,
Anthol.
*xarevhoyew ? Plut.
KaTnXe@
xatortpi¢ouas Philo
kavpati¢a
kavoTnpiate ?
xevodogia
xevddo&sos
KevTupiov
KeppaTioTns
kooua (-via, ete.) Inser.
*xopBav (-Bavas) Joseph.
xpaBarros or kpaBBaros
KpumTy
xtntwp Diod., Inscr., Anth.
ktigpa
kK@porols
*yabnrevo Plut.
padnrpia
*waxedAov Plut.
papyapirns
*waraodoyia Plut.
peOeppnvev@
*uecoupaynpa Plut.
peTapoppow
petptorabéw Philo
*wwaopds Plut.
piuov
poppéw Anth.
poppacts
vapdos Anth.
*vexpow Plut., Anth., Inscr.
*vexpwors Aret.
VEw@TEPLKOS
vnolov
*£éorns ? Joseph., Anthol.
Evpdw (Evpew Hat.)
6dnyos
oixereca ? Strab., Inser.
*oixcaxés Plut.
1. Words borrowed from
the Hebrew.
N. B. Hebraisms in signifi-
cation and construction
(whether ‘proper’ or ‘ improper ’)
are excluded; so, too, are words
of Semitic origin which had pre-
viously found thew way into
Greek usage.
"ABadday
"ABBa
”AxeA dad
692
*olxodeooréw Plut.
oixripywv ‘Theocr., Sept.,
Anthol.
dvdprov
madyyeveoia Philo
mavoxetov ? (-ketov Arstph.)
mavdoxevs ? (-xevs Plato)
mapatnpnots Epigr.
Tapuxetpacia
mapeioaktos
Tapevoepxopuat
TApeKTOS
mat potrapadoros
Inser.
TeptauT@
TEploxn
TepiTEip@
mepmepevouat M. Antonin.
mo\\ar\aciov
*roupepas Joseph.
moAvtpdras Philo
Topo pds
mortars (modamds Aeschyl.)
*rpair@piov Joseph., Inscr.
mpai7radera (-ia) ? Philo
*rpoyveots Plut., Anthol.
mpoeATrivo
mpoevayyeAiCouat Philo
*qpoxatayye\Aw Joseph.
M™pokorn
*“rpooairns Plut.
mpowavexa ?
TpoaKatpos
mpookAnpow Philo
mpookduars ?
Tpookorn
*rpoopnyvupe Joseph.
mpoopatas
mpognrixos Philo
padtovpynpa
pitas
Diod.,
portndov
poudaia Sept.
*caBBatiocpos Plut.
*Zaddovkaios Joseph.
gadmorns Theophr., Inser.
(-riyerns ‘Thuc.)
oanetpos
capow
aéBacpa
o¢Baoros Strab., Inser.
onpeow
onptkos
*ouxaptos Joseph.
oivare
*ourcatos Joseph.
oxoria Apoll. Rhod., Sept.,
Anthol.
oxvBarov Anthol., Strab.
oK@AnKOBpwTos
omidow
orao.acTns ?
oTpatodoyew
oTpatoredapyns
atpyvos Lycoph.,
Anthol.
*ovyyevis? Plut., Inser.
ovykatabeots
*avyxataynpitw Piut.
auykAnpovopos Philo
ovyxpaopuat ¢
ovntnots ?
oupBacirevo
ovpBovAcov Inscre
ouppepiC@
ovppoprpos
oupTViyo
ovvab\éw
ovvexdnuos Palaeph.
ouvndtxtoTns Inser.
ovvKeataveva ?
*suvodevo Plut.
Sept.,
TI.
BORROWED WORDS.
dAAnovia Sept.
apnv Sept.
Badd Sept.
Bap
Baros Apocr.
Bee CeBovd (-BovB)
BeAlap (-Aiad)
Boavepyes
TaBBada
yéevva (yasev. Josh. xviii. 16)
Toedyoda
“EBpaikés
“E8paios Sept.
*EBpais Apocr.
‘EBpaiori Apocr.
edwi (cf. rd)
*Eppavounr Sept.
eppaba
CCavov
nari or HAL or AAet (cf. Awe)
Tovdaitw Sept.
*Tovdaixds Apocr. and -xas
BorrowEep Worps
ovvuTroKpivoyat
OvoTapacow
guotarikés (-katepoy Ariss
tot.)
*cvoractactns ? Joseph.
ovoToLXéw
*copatixas Plut.
owdppovcuos Philo, Aesop
*ramewoppoovvy Joseph.
taxivos Theocr., Sept.
TdaxLov
TEA@VLOV
tetpad.ov Philo
*rerpapxew Joseph.
TeTpapxns
TOMMTEPOS
Tptetia
TploTeyos
tpoxid Nicand., Sept.
Anthol.
*rupewvixes Plut.
viobecia Diod., Inser.
umeptrAcovatw
troypaupos Philo
vToAumrava
trorddiov Chares, Sept.
*jrootoAn Joseph.
vmorayn
vmotureots Quint.
‘pedopevas Plut.
gprraderdia (Alex. ?) Philo
Arndovos Anth.
gpvacow Callim., Sept.
Anth.
xapiopa Philo
xetpoypapov Polyb., Inser.
xoptacpa Phylarch., Sept.
oxo
otiov Sept., Anth.
Tota 318 (75*, 16 ?)
*Jovdaiopuds Apocr.
Kavavaios ?
Kavavirns?
Katnyep ?
kopBav or KopBavas
Kdpos Sept.
Kop OF KOU OF KOUpE
Aaya or Aappa or Aeud OF
Anya, ete.
papeovas
pavva Sept.
BorrowEep Worpbs.
Papav aéa (uapavada)
Meooias
ModAéy Sept.
(pepe ?)
macya Sept.
nmpoodBBarov? Sept. Apocr.
paBBi, -Bet
paBBovi, -Bovvi, -vei
paxd or paka or paxd
aaBay Gavi, -vei
caBawé Sept.
oaBBaricpds
oaBBarov Sept.
Zaddovkaios
caray or garavas Sept.
adrov Sept.
aixepa Sept.
tah6a
693
doowmos Sept.
Papioatos
XepovBip, -Beiv, Sept.
ooavva
TOTAL 57.
2. Words borrowed from
the Latin.
N. B. Proper names are ex-
cluded, together with Latinisms
which had already been adopted
by profane authors.
Onvaptov
Oidwpt epyaciar i. gq. operam
do
exo i. q. aestimo
kKivoos
koOpavrns
koAwvia ete.
kovoT@odia
AauBavw (q.v. I. 3 e.) iq.
capto
TO ixavov AapBaverr i. q. satis
accipere
avpBovdcov AapBavew i. q.
consilium capere
Aeyewy (through Aram. ?)
Aévrvov
AiBeprivos
puaKehXov
pen Bpava
pddtos
EéoTns
T PALT@pLov
peda or -dn? (cf. 3 below.)
otKdptos
Ht.
BIBLICAL Worps,
oupurivOrov
covddprov (cf. IIT. 1)
omeKovAdTwp
taBepvat (ai)
tithos
paworns paenula (cf. hat
Adyns in ITT. 1)
pdpov
ppayeddov
ppayed\d\éw
x@pos (?)
Toray 30,
3. Words borrowed from
other Foreign Tongues,
Baiov (Egyptian)
péda or -8n (Gallic? cf. 2)
BIBLICAL, #.c. NEW TESTAMENT, GREEK.
1. Biblical Words.
*ABaddav Sept.
"ABBA
aBvocos, n, Sept. (as adj.
Aeschyl. et sqq.-)
dyaboepyéw (-Ooupyéw ?)
ayaborroréw Sept.
dyaboroatia
*adyaborods Plut.
dyabaovvn Sept.
aya\Xiaots Sept.
dyah\idw Sept.
ayarn Sept.
dyeveahoyntos
dyiafw Sept., Anthol.
dyacpos Sept.
dytétns Apocr.
dytwovvn Sept.
a@yvahos
dynopos Sept., Inser.
dyvorns Inscr.
adeAporns Apocr.
advapbopia ?
aeréw Sept., Polyb., Inscr.
aiparexxvota
siveors Sept.
sicxpoKxepdas
siriaua ?
— |_—
N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks.
aixzakwaota Sept., Polyb.
aixpadwrevo Sept.
aixwadwti¢o Sept., Inser.
axaOaprns ?
axatayveoros Epigr., Inser.,
Apocr.
dxarakddurtos Sept., Polyb.
akaTakptros
dkxatamaaros ?
dxaraotacia Sept., Polyb.
dxatacxetos Sept.
Axed dap
*axpoarnptov Plut.
dxpoBvoria Sept.
axpoyouaios Sept.
ava?
a\dAntos Anthol.
ddtetw Sept.
aXioynpa
a\Andovia Sept.
adXoyevns Sept.
ad \orpi(o)erioxoros
dAdn Sept. ? [Apocr.
dpdpavtos Orac. Sib., Inscr.,
auebvoros Sept., Anthol.
aunv Sevt.
dudidf Sept., Anthol.
*avayevvdw Joseph.
avataw Inscr.
dvafavvupe Sept.
avabepati¢a Sept., Inscr.
dvakawow
avakaiveots
avaretpos? Apocr. (-snpos,
Plato sqq.)
avaorarow Sept. ?
‘avaracoopat Plut. (Sept. ?)
avekOunyntos
avekAaAntos
avéeos ?
avepiCo
avevdexTos
ave&ikakos
dve&txviaoros Sept.
*dverraicxuvros Joseph.
dveratw Sept.?
avevOeros
avOpwmapeckos Sept.
*avbumarevo Plut.
avitews ?
avrarodopa Sept.
avraroxpivopa Sept., Aesop
*dvtiAotdopew Plut.
dvritutpov Sept., Orph.
avTiuseTpew
avtipuc Gia
dvturapépyouat Anthol.
Apocr+
avrixptoros
*avtAnpa Plut.
avuToxpitos Apocr.
araoratopat ?
*amreipaotos Joseph,
amekdéyopat
*arrexOvopat Joseph. ?
amekOvats
amredeyj.0s
ameArrila Polyb.,
Anth.
arevarrt Sept., Polyb.,Inser.
amepitpntos Sept.
dmodexarow Sept. (-redw ?)
*amodexros Plut.
amoxaduyis Sept.
amoxata\\doow
dmoxeparifoa Sept. (David
over Goliath)
amroxuAiw Sept.
” Aro v@v
dmockiacpa
Sept.,
aroovvaywyos
aropbeyyouat Sept.
*amoxpnots Plut.
ampookoros Apocr.
ampocwroAn(1)1res
dpyupoxorros Sept., Inser.
apxeros Chrysipp., Anthol.
BrisLicAL WORDS.
“‘Appayedav ete.
*dpmaypos Plut.
appados
apoevoxoitns Anthol., Orac.
Sibyl.
aptvyevyntos
ol Gprot THs mpobecews Sept.
apxayyedos
*apyvepartxos Joseph., Inscr.
apxiToiunv
apx.ovvaywyos Inscr.
adpxtredovns
apxtpixAwos
acaive? (q. Vv.)
aomaAos Anthol.
dorarew Anthol.
dotnpexros Anthol.
acpanifw Sept., Polyb.
avdevtéw
avuToKaTaKptTos
apedpav
apeAorns
apbopia?
adiAayabos
adiAdpyupos
apurvow Sept., Anthol.
apvotepéw Sept., Polyb.
dyeiporroinros
axpetow Sept., Polyb.
*aywOos Aret. (-Qcov from
Xen. on}
Badd Sept.
Babpos Sept.
Baiov Sept. ? Apocr.
Banticpa
*Barriopos Joseph.
*Barriotns Joseph.
Bap
BaciXickos? Sept., Polyb.,
Aesop, Inser.
Baros Apocr.
Barrodoyew
BderAvypa Sept.
BdeduKros Sept.
BeBnrOow Sept.
BeeACeBovrd (-BovB)
BeAiap (-AtaA)
BnpvAdos Apocr., Anthol.
BBAapidvoyv
Biwors Apocr.
BAnréos
Boave (or -1-) pyés
Borifa
Boris Sept., Anthol.
Bpadut\0€w
Bpoxn Sept.
Bupcevs Inser.
Ta88aa
*yayypawa Plut.
yafoduddxiov Sept.
694
yaniv
yéevva (Sept. Josh. xviii. 16)
yeopytov Sept.
yroorns Sept.
yoyyite Sept.
yoyyuvopes Sept.
yoyyvorns
To yo6a
*yupyntevo Plut.
yupuvorns
Sapomwdns
Sevyparica
detAtdw Sept.
dexadvo Sept.
dexacé Sept.
dexaoxr@ Sept.
dexarevre Sept., Polyb.
dexarécaapes Sept., Polyb.
dexarow Sept.
Sexros Sept.
SeEvoBoros (-AdBos)
*SeopopiAak Joseph.
deutepomporos ?
*8nvaptov Plut.
diayoyyi@ Sept.
Staypryyopew
OvaxabapiCo
dtaxareheyxopas
dvakiyurravm Apocr.
diavevw Sept., Polyb.
ScarrapatpiBn ?
dtackopri¢a Sept., Polyb.
dvaoropa Apocr.
diarayn Sept., Inser.
didpaxpov Sept.
biden. epyaciay
dvevOvpeopar?
Svepunveia ?
Sveppnveurns ?
Sixavoxpioia Sept.?
diAoyos
d:0dedw Sept., Polyb., Inser.,
Anthol.
duopupias ?
Su@ktns
doypari¢w Sept., Anthol.
Soxipy
Soxipsov (-petov, Plato)
Sodtdw Sept.
ddrns Sept.
Suvaydw Sept.
duvatéw
ducBacraktos Sept.
Swd5exddvdrov Orac. Sib.
Swpopopia?
€Bdounxovraxis Sept.
€Bdounkovramevre Sept.
‘EBpaixos
“EBpatos Sept.
‘EBpais Apocr.
‘EBpaiort Apoer.
éyxaina Sept.
eyxawwi¢w Sept.
eykavxdopa ? Sept., Aesop
€yxouBdoua
édpaiwpa
€Gehobpnokeia
€OuiKas
eidwAetov Apocr.
eidwddOuros Apocr.
eiSw@Aodarpeia
e(S@Aoddtpys
eipnvorroew Sept.
exyauila ?
exyapioxe ?
exdixew Sept., Inser.
exdixnots Sept., Polyb., In-
scr.
ex(nrew Sept.
ex(ntnots ?
exOapBewm Sept.? Apocr.,
Orph.
expuxtnpif@ Sept.
exrretpat@ Sept.
exrepiooas ?
extropvevo Sept.
expi(o@ Sept., Orac. Sib.,
Inser.
€xtpopos ?
eAawv Sept.
*ehadpia Aret.
eAaxtororepos
edeypos ? Sept.
edeyéis Sept.
€Aeos, Td, Sept., Polyb.
ed\Aoyaw (yew)
edi Sept. (cf. Hrd)
*€upaivona Joseph.
*Eppavound Sept.
euper@ ?
eumravypovn ?
€umatypos Sept.
eumaixtns Sept.
eumrepimrarew Sept.
éevayxanrifonat Sept., Anthol.
évavtt? Sept.
evdidvoxKw Sept.
*€vOdunois Joseph.
evdoEalw Sept.
évdupa Sept.
evduvapow Sept.
évedpov ? Sept.
evevhoyew? Sept.
évvevnxovTaevvea
*évopxitw? Joseph., Inscr.
évradpa Sept.
evrapiatw Sept., Anthol.
evtad.iac pos
évrponos Sept., Anthol.
evwriCopat Sept.
BIBLicAL Worps.
eEayopate Sept., Polyb.
eEaxodovbéw Sept., Polyb.
efamwa Sept.
efarropéw Sept., Polyb.
*eEapri¢w Joseph., Inscr.
eEaotpdarre Sept.
e&€papua
e&nxéw Sept., Polyb.
eEodobpevw Sept.
eEopodoyéew Sept.
*eEopxiotns Joseph.
eEovdevéew (-vdw) Sept.
eEovbevéw (-vdw) Sept.
e~urvitw Sept.
*eEurvos Joseph.
e£a@repos Sept.
*éraywvi¢ouat Plut., Inser.
*eraOpoitw Plut.
eravaravw Sept.
emapxevos Inscr.
erravpiov Sept.
*érevdvw Joseph. (-dive
Hat.)
emvyapBpedrw Sept.
eriyvaots Sept., Polyb.
émiOvatao oopat
emdtopOdw Inscr.
emxatapatos Sept., Inser.
’Emtxovpeos Anthol.
emideixy@ ?
emtAnopovn Apocr.
emLovcLos
emu dOnats
emumdOnros
émirobia
emimopevopat Sept., Polyb.
emippanT@
emurkom Sept.
emuovvayw Sept,
Aesop
émisvvaywyn Apocr.
emLOVVTpEX@
emurvataors Sept.
*eritwpevo Plut.
erupavoxw Sept.
exupaoke Inscr.
emxopnyia
épijpaors Sept.
epiduoy ? Apocr.
érepodiOacKadew
érepotuyew
evayyedoTns
evapeatos Apocr.
evdoxéw Sept., Polyb.
evdoxia Sept., Inser.
evxordrepov (-xoros Polyb.)
evoyntds Sept.
evpeTadoros
*civovyitw Joseph.
evrdpedpos ?
Polyb.,
BiBLicAL WorpDs.
*edmouia Joseph., Inser.
*eiapoadextos Plut.
eumpooedpos
eUTporwnew
evpakvA@v
evpo(or-v-)kAvdov }
*eiuyxéew Joseph., Anthol.,
Inscr.
?pnuepia Sept.
eppaba
(evernpia
Ci€avov
ri (cf. eAwi)
“Hpwdiavoi Joseph.
qtTnwa Sept.
Oceatpi¢a
devadys
Gehnows Sept.
Oeodidaxros
Geoudyos Alleg. Homer.
*Oconvevotos Plut., Orac.
Sibyl.
*deorns Plut.
OopuBata ?
OpnoKos
Ovovaornpiov Sept.
ieparevpa Sept.
iepatevo Sept. Inser.
ixavow Sept.
idapérns Sept.
ikacpos Sept.
itaornptos Sept.
iparivo
"Tovdaitw Sept.
*Tovdaixos Apocr.
*lovdaikas Joseph.
"IovSaicpos Apocr.
ioayyedos
xabapito Sept. (Hippoer. ?)
xabapiopos Sept.
*xaOeéjs Plut., Inser.
kadodidaoKados
kaXorrovew Sept. ?
kdpudos ?
Kavavaios ?
Kavavirns?
KapdtoyvaoTns
karayyeAeus
kataGepa ?
catabepariva?
xaraxavxdaopat Sept.
catakAnpodoréw? Sept. ?
katakAnpovopew ? Sept.
karakodovbéw Sept., Polyb.
KaTaKpliots
karadaAta
kaTaados
kardAeypa? Sept.
carahiOalo
xardAvua Sept., Polyb.
695
raravdbepa?
katavabepariCw ?
katavraw Sept., Polyb.
karavuéis Sept.
katavuoow Sept.
kararéracpa Sept.
*xarapriots Plut.
KaTapTic LOE
kataoknvwots Sept.» Polyb.,
Inser.
caracopi¢oua Sept., Inscr.
KaTaoTpnvidaw
katacxeots Sept.
katapporntns Sept.
kaTeiOwAos
carévavte Sept., Inser.
katevwmov Sept.
xate£ovoal@
*catevioyew? Plut.
katrepioTnun
Katnyop?
kattow Apocr.
karokntnpiov Sept.
carotxia Sept., Polyb.
kavoow
kavowr Sept.
kavxnows Sept.
Kevodbwvia .
keadiow (-Aade ‘Thue.
knvoos Inscr.
kAvdevigonat Sept.
KoOpavTns
Koxkwvos Sept.
codapifa
KoA@via etc.
*xopBav or kopBavas J oseph.
kopos Sept.
xoopoxpatap Orph., Inser.
koume ete.
kovotwdia
kparavow Sept.
Kpvotadril@
KvAtopa ? or kuAuruos ?
kuptaxos Inscr.
KUpLOTNS
Aapa ete.
Aakeuvros Sept.
Aatropew Sept.
Aeyov ete. (cf. list IL 2)
Necroupytkos Sept.
Aevriov
ABeprivos Inser.
ABoBoréw Sept.
Noyia (7)
oyopaxyew
oyouaxia
Autpwtys Sept. (Philo)
Avxvia Sept., Inser.
*uabntrevo Plut.
*uaxeAXov Plut.
paxpoberv Sept., Polyb.
paxpodupéw Sept.
paxpobvpos
papwvas
pavva Sept.
papav ada (wapavaba)
*uwaraodoyia Plut.
paraorns Sept., Inser.
paraow Sept.
peyadeorns Sept., Inser.
peyadwovrn Sept.
peyoray Sept.
peOodeia
pedioowos? (-aios, Nicand.)
pep Bpava
peptorys
peoitns Sept., Polyb.
precorotyov (-xos, Eratos.)
*necoupavnya Plut.
Meooias
perouxeoia Sept., Anthol.
*waopos Plut.
pucOarodocia
pucbarodorns
picOos Sept., Anthol.
poy(y)Aados Sept.
poodtos
potyanis Sept.
podvopos Sept.
poo xorroLew
pudcxos ?
pvdwos? Inser.
pvdos Sept., Anthol., Orac.
Sibyl.
(pwpe *)
*vexpow Plut., Anthol., In-
ser.
*vexpoots Aret.
veoputos Sept. (lit.; so Ar-
stph. in Pollux 1, 231)
vikos Sept., Anthol., Orph.
vurrnp
vowodiddoKados
vooro.d’? Sept.(veorora Hadt.,
al.)
vupdov Apocr.
vuxOnpepov Orac. Sibyl.
Sevodoxéw Graec. Ven. (-xéw,
Hat.)
*£éorns? Joseph., Anthol.
*oixcaxos Plut.
*oixodeamorew Plut.
oikodoun Sept. (Aristot. ?)
oixoupyos ?
dxranpepos (Graec. Ven.)
dduyomcria ?
ddvyomurros
ddtyoWuxos Sept.
dAtyws Anthol.
OAobpeutns
BrisLticaL Worps.
édo(or -e-)Opevw Sept., An-
thol.
OAokavT@pa Sept.
éAoxAnpia Sept.
6peipopa? Sept. ?
dporata ?
dvediopos Sept.
oveKos
éntave Sept.
érracia Sept., Anthol.
dpborodéw
épboTopew Sept.
opbpite Sept.
opOpivos ? Sept., Anthol.
épxwpocia Sept.
6pobecia
ova
ovai Sept.
opearn
dpbarpodovrcia
dxAotrovéw
ovapwov
mayWevw Sept.
ma.didbev
mapm\nbet
mavtoxpatwp Sept., Anthol.,
Inser.
mapaBidfopa Sept., Polyb.
mapaBo\evopat
mapaBovAevouat?
mapadtatpiBn ?
mrapaderypati¢w Sept., Polyb.
mapa(nAow Sept.
mapadurTtkos
mapartkpaivw Sept.
Tapamixkpaopos Sept.
mapantopa Sept., Polyb.
mapadpovia
maperiOnpos Sept., Polyb.
mapo.kia Sept.
mrapopovatw ?
mapopy.opos Sept.
macxa Sept.
matpidpxns Sept.
mevOos
metpacpos Sept.
Tevopovn
medexiC@ Sept., Polyb.
mevrexatoexatos Sept.
merolOnats Sept.
mepiactpantrw Apocr.
mepibeots
meptxadappa Sept.
meptxepadaia Sept., Polyby
Inser.
mepixpatrns Apocr.
TEepiKpUTT@
meprovaros Sept.
mepoceia Sept., Inser.
mepitoun Sept.
BIBLICAL WogrDs.
mepivnua Sept., Inser.
mAnupvpa ete. Sept., Anthol.
mAnpopopia
TVEULATLKOS
moXcrdpxns Inscr., Epigr.
*rokupepos Joseph.
mohvaotrhayxvos
moppuporakis
moTapLopdopnros
*mpait@piov Joseph., Inscr.
mpeoBuréptoy Inscr.
MpoarT.dopas
TpoapzapTave
mpoBrera Sept.
*rpéyvoors Plut., Arthol.
mpoevapxopat
mpoetrayyeAo
*zpoxarayyéAAw Joseph.
mpdoKptua
Tpokup6@
mpopapTupopas
Mpowepivaw
mpoopite
mpoc Baroy ? Sept.?, Apo-
crypha
*rpocairns Plut.
(mpocaxéw ?)
mpoodaravaw Inscr.
Tporedw
mpoceyyit@? Sept., Polyb.,
Anthol.
mpocevxn Sept., Inser.
mpoondvrtos Sept.
mpooKaprépyots
mpookoppa Sept.
mpookuyntns Inscr.
mpocoxbifw Sept. Orac.
Sibyl.
mpoorraiw ? (Soph. ?)
™Tpdomrewvos
*rpoopyyvuye Joseph.
mpoopay.ov Inscr.
mpoaxvats
mpoowroAn(m)rréw
mpoowmoAn(j)arys
mpoowmroAn(1)ia
mpodnreia Sept., Inser.
mpwivds Sept.
mpwroxabedpia
mpwrtokhicia (7) Apocr.
mpwrordka (ra) Sept.
mperoroxos Sept., Anthol.
(-rékos, act., Hom. down)
16 Tip Td aimnoyr ete.
muppato? (-pi¢e Sept.)
paBBi, -Bei
paBBovi ete.
paxa ete
pavrifw Sept.
éevtiopos Sept.
696
pédn or peda
pumapevopuat ?
caBayOavi, -vel
caBaw Sept.
*caBBario;zds Plut.
odBBarov Sept., Anthol.
caynyn Sept.
*Saddovkaios Joseph.
oapowos ?
oapdiovvE ?
cata or caravas Sept.
oarov Sept.
oeAnuatopa
onroSperos
Sibyl.
abeviw
*ouxaptos Joseph.
gixepa Sept.
ounexivOcov
owdta
*ourcatos Joseph.
atronerpiov (-tpov Plut.)}
oxavdarilo
axavdadov Sept.
oKnvorro.os
ok\npoxapdia Sept.
okA\npotpaxnros Sept.
oxori¢w Sept., Polyb.
opapayduvos
opupvilo
aovddpiov (cwddpiov Her-
mippus)
o7ekovAdTop
onhayxvigona Sept. ?
ornke Sept.
oTpatorédapyos ?
arvyvate Sept., Poly.
*ovyyevis ? Plut., Inser.
ovykaxorrabéw
ovyKaKxovxew
*ovykcatayn pile
ovyKoLv@vos
outntnrns
oulwotrorew
TvKopL0pEea
ovhaywyew
avA\akéw Sept,
ouppinThs
ouppoppita?
ocuppoppow ?
oupmpeoBurepos
ovuppuderns
oupnparnats
ovpyuxos
Cvvaly LAAWTOS
ovvavakeyat Apocr.
ovvavaplyvupe Sept.?
Sept., Orac.
[Inser.
Polyb.,
ovvavarravopar? Sept.
ovvayTihapBavopat
Inscr.
Sept.,
ovvappohoyew
ovveyeipw Sept.
ouvekhextos
ouvOpinre
*cuvodeva Plut.
ovvopopew
ovoonuov (Menander in
Phryn.), Sept.
ovoo wos
*cvotac.aotns Joseph.
ovoTavpow
opvdpov?
*copatixos Plut.
taBépva (ai)
taka
tarewoppov? Sept.
*ranewoppoovry Joseph.
TapTapow
rexviov Anthol.
texvoyovew Anthol.
TeheLwrns
Teo capakovradvo?
Tecoapakovtarécoapes ?
*rerpapxéew Joseph.
titdos Inscr.
torraciov Sept.
tporodopew? Sept.
tpopodopéew? Sept. ?
Tpupadia Sept. (Sotad.)
TumiKas ?
*rupevexos Plut.
imaxon Sept.
Umavdpos Sept., Polyb.
bmavrnots Sept.
Urepexewva
bmepexnepioaod Sept. ¢
imepexrepiooas ?
imepexreivo Anthol.?
imepexxuva Sept. ?
dmepevruyxXav@
UmEpyiKaw
Umeprepiowev@
UrepTrEpLooc@s
trepuipow Sept.
troAnnov Sept.
tromaleo ?
imomhéw Anthol.
*trooroAn Joseph.
broorpavvusn Sept.
doownos Sept.
torépnua Sept.
borepnots
ivnrodpovew ?
dWoua Sept., Orac. Sib.
gdyos
gac(or de-)Aduvns (awvddrns
Rhinthon, c. B.c. 300, in
Pollux 7, 61)
Papicaios
*pheOopevws Plut.
BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS
Pirorpwrevo
opov
payedAdtov
ppayeAdow
ppevararaw
pevararns
gudakifw Sept.
guoiwors
poornp Sept., Anthol.
poriopds Sept.
xXawayoyéeo
xarkndeov (Pliny)
xaAKod (Bavov
xapitéw Apocr.
XepouBip etc. Sept.
xoikos
xpewperrerns
Aesop
xXpnorevouat
xpnotodoyia
xpucodaxriduos
xpvacdOos Sept.
xpvcorpacos
X@pos
WevdddedA dos
Yevdarcooro\os
Wevdo0diddoKados
Wevdorpodyrns Sext.
Wevdoxpiotos
Ybupiotués Sent.
yuxlov
Wopioy Sept.
@cavva
Tota. 767, (76*, 89 7)
etc. Sept.
2. Biblical Significations.
N. B. ‘‘ Sept.” or “ Apocr.” ig
added to a word in case it occur
in the same sense in the Septua-
gint version or (if not there) in
the Apocryphal books of the O.T.
Moreover, characteristic N. T.
significations which also occur
in Philo and Josephus but inno
other secular authors have been
included in the list, with the
proper designations appended.
See the Prefatory Remarks, p.
688.
7 &Bvooos (Sept.)
ayarn 2
dyyedos 2 (Sept., Philo)
aden 2
ddeddés 2 (Sept., Philo), 4,
5 (Sept.)
adudkpttos 2
adporis
ddvvaréw b. (Sept.)
aipeots 5
aipetixds 2
697
BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS.
aiay 2 (Apocr.), 3 dtxard@ 2, 3, (Sept.) nuepa 1b., 3 (Sept.)
ad7ndea I. 1c. dikaiwots jovxatw c. (Sept.)
adnbevw b. diAoyos 2 @avaros 2 (Sept., Philo)
dpuapria 3, 4 Stoke 3 6dw 4 (Sept.)
duntap 5 (Philo)
avaOepa 2 a., b.
(dvacravpow)
avahéepo 2 (Sept.)
avOoporoyéouat 3 fin. (Sept.)
dda III. (Sept.)
doEafw 4 (Sept.)
Svvapis b.
ddpa 3 (Sept.)
dwped b. (Sept.)
Oeds 4 (Sept.)
Oewpéw 2 c. sub fin.
OptapBevtw 2
Opo€w fin. (Sept.)
Ovyarnp b. (Sept.)
avopos 1 eyyus 1 b. Oupuatrnpiov 2 (Philo, Jo-
avons eyeipw 2, 4 seph.)
avoxn éyepors fin. ios 1 d. (Apocr.)
avriknyis (Sept.) eOukds 3 iepevs b.
itaopds 2 (Sept.)
iAaortnptov, Td, 1 (Sept.), 2
loxv@ 2 a. (Sept.)
ka@apifw 1 b. (Apocr.), 2
(Sept.)
xadevdw 2 b. (Sept.)
kakia 3 (Sept.)
kaxow 2 (Sept.)
kaxodoyew 2 (Sept.)
Kaew 1 b. B.
kappvw (Sept.)
kapnta b. (Sept.)
kavev 1
avtioyia 2 (Sept.)
avtituros 1, 2
amraTwp
arravyaopa (Apocr.)
dm\érns fin. (Joseph.)
amrobyncke II.
aroxadintw 2 c. (Sept.)
aroxddvyis 2 a.
arokpive 2 (Sept.)
arodAvpe 1 a. B.
arodvtpwocts 2
arootaovoy 1 (Sept.), 2
dmooroAn 4
€Ovos 4 (Sept.), 5
ei I. 5 (Sept.), III. 9 (Sept.)
etd II. 3 (Sept.)
etdwdov 2 (Sept.)
eiui II. 5 (Sept.)
eirov 5 (Sept.)
eipnvn 3 (Sept.), 4, 5, 6 (Sept.)
ex I. 7 (Sept.)
exBaots 2 (Apocr.)
exdoyn 4
exkAnoia 2 (Sept.), 4
exAéyouat (Sept.)
exextés (Sept.)
ardatonos 2, 3 exhoyn kaprés 2 c. (Sept.)
admooromariva €xotaots 3 (Sept.) karacxvve 2 fin. (Sept.)
drotacow 1 éXeos 2, 3 katdrravots 2 (Sept.)
aradea 2 b. “EXAnvis 2 kataoToAn 2 (Sept.)
apecxeia (Philo)
apxn 5
acvveros fin. (Apoc.)
avyatw 2 (Sept.)
avros II. 2 (Sept.)
agpurvée b.
advotepéw 2 (Sept.)
Banritw II.
Barriopos (Joseph.)
Baorrela 3
euBatev@ 2 (Apocr., Philo)
euBpidoma fin.
ev I. 6 b., 8 b. (Sept.), 8e.
evavtiov 2 fin. (Sept.)
evepyew 3
e€avactaots fin.
€£060s fin. (Philo)
efonodoyew 2 (Sept.)
e€ovcia 4 c. BB., d.
erepotaw 2 (Sept.)
KaTaToun
képas b. (Sept.)
kebadaida 2
knpuvypa (Sept.)
knpvé 1 fin.
knpvooe b.
kAnpovopeéw 2 fin.
kAnpovopia 2 a., b.
kAnpovopos 1 b., 2 (Sept.)
kAnpéw 4 (Apocr.)
Bderw 2 c. mid. emepaTnua 3 KAnows 2
yapew 2 emyapBpevo 2 (Sept.) kAnros a., b.
yeveors 3 emixadew 2 (Sept.) kowdia 5 (Sept.)
yevvaw 2 b. (Philo), c., d.
yéoca 2 init.
yeappa 2 e. (Philo, Ji oseph.)
ypapparevs 2 (Sept.)
Saipwv 2 (Joseph.)
b€o 2 ¢.
6 d:aBodos Sept.
SiaOyxy 2 (i. q. 13)
dtaxovia 3, 4
Sidxovos 2
dtaxpivopat 3
Stavoiye 2
kowvds 2 (Apocr.)
kowdw 2 (Apocr.)
kowvavia 3
komm 2 (Sept.)
koruaw 2 (Sept.)
koopikds 2, 3
kdopos 5 (Apocr.), 6, 7, 8
(Sept.)
kpiva 5 a. B., 6 (Sept.)
kpiots 3 b., 4(Sept.), 5(Sept.)
Kpitnptov 3
kpitns 2 (Sept.)
emtoxerrropuat b. (Sept.)
emtokorrn b. (Sept.),c. (Sept.)
ériokoros fin.
emustpopn Apocr.
emtiuia Apocr.
epevyopat 3 (Sept.)
evayyeri¢o IIT
evayyeAwov 2 a., b.
evOoxéw 2 (Sept.)
evdoyéw 2, 3, 4, (Sept.)
evdoyia 3 Sept., 4, 5 (Sept.)
evomdayxvos (Apocr.)
Starrovotpa c. (Apocr.) éyo I. 1 f. kriows 2 (Apocr.), 3
Grarideuat Suadnxny etc.| (dw I. 2 KTiopa
(Sept.) Gai Dia, be cae
biSau 1V. 5 Cwoyovew 3 (Sept.) AapBava I. 3 e. (cf. list I. 2)
Sixaocvvn 1 c. Cworrorew 2 Adokw 2
BrsticaL SIGNIFICATIONS,
Aecroupyew 2c. (Apocr.)
Aetroupyia 3 b.
AtBavards 2
Atkudw 3 (Sept.)
Adyos ITI.
Avtpwors fin. (Sept.)
padntevw 2
pakpobupew 2 (Sept.)
paxpoOupia 2 (Sept.)
paprus Cc.
peattevo 2 (Philo)
petaipw 2
poxanris b. (Sept.)
potxds fin.
pvornptoy 2, 3 (Sept)
popaive 2 (Sept.)
pepés fin. (Sept.)
vexpos 2
vewrtepos d.
vopos 2 (Apocr.), 3,4 (Sept.)
vopn 2 fin. (Sept.)
oikodopew b. B.
oikodoun 1
Oporoyew 4
dvopna 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept. 4
ériaw 2 (Sept.)
avpavds 2 (Sept.)
dpetderns b.
opeiAnua b.
dpetre ec.
épéarpds in phrases (Sept.)
oxvpapa 2 (Sept.)
7 Oia
dyrauov 2
mratoeia 2 b. (Sept.), ce. (Sept.)
tra.devo 2 b. (Sept.), ce. (Sept.)
mais 2 fin. (Sept. ; i.g. 13’)
mapakAntos 3 (Philo)
mapaBoAn 3, 4, (Sept.)
mapaderoos 3, 4
tapakon 2
mapackeun 3 (Joseph.)
mapOevos 2
mapotkos 2 (Sept.)
mappnaia 3 (Philo)
matacow 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.)
meipatw 2 d. (Sept.)
metpacpds b., c., (Sept)
TEVTNKOOTH (Apocr.)
mepiratew b.
mepurroinats 2, $
mepiooeia 4
mepiooevpa 2
Tepiroeva 2
TEPLTOLN Ax Y-y De
morevo 1 b.
miotts 1 b.
mvedpa 3 Coy Gey 4
mveupatiKos 3
Topeia
BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS.
mopevo b. (Sept.)
mopveia b. (Sept.)
sopvevw 3 (Sept.)
aopyn 2
motnptov b.
mpeoBurepos 2 a., b., Cc
mpodyw 2 b.
mpocavex@ 2
mpocevxn 2 (Philo}
mpoonadvtos (Joseph.)
mpooKadew b.
mpoortOnu 2 sub fin. (Sept.)
mpocwroy 1 b., c., 2, (Sept.)
mpopnrevea b., c., d., (Sept.)
mpopnrns II. 1 (Sept.)
mpwrtéroxos b.
pjpa 2 (Sept.)
fifa 2 (Sept.)
WORDS
698
od8Barov 2
capkikos 1
oapktvos 3
adpé 2 b. (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4
oeBaCopa 2
oxavdari{w (Apocr.)
oxavoadov b. (Sept.)
oxnvornyia 2 (Sept.)
oxéros b.
copia b.
ataupés 2 b.
orédavos b. a.
ornpite b.
aTo.xetov 3
ordpa 2 (Sept.)
otpatia 3 (Sept.)
outnrew b.
ovpBiBage 8 fin.
ovvaye c. (Sept.)
ovvaywyn 2 (Joseph., Philo)
cvvaipw 2
aovvdoéala 2
ouveyeipe fin.
ovvedpiov 2 b.
ovvtehew 5 (Sept.)
ovvrpiypa 2 (Sept.)
oxicua b.
cata b. (Sept.)
capa 3
carnp (Sept.)
cornpia a. (Sept.), b., c.
catnptov, To (Sept.)
texvov c. (Sept.)
tis 1 e. y. (Sept)
TpaxnriCa 2
tumos 4 y.
IV.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
viobecia a., b.
vids 2 (Sept.)
vids Tod avOpwrov 3 (Sept.)
vids Tod Oeod 2, 3, (Sept.)
iroxpitns 3 (Sept.)
bromvew b.
trorimwats b.
gvAakrnptovy 2
pudrdoow 2 b. (Sept.)
patito 2c. (Sept.)
xapi¢ouar b.
xapts 2 sub fin., 3 a
xaptopa (Philo)
xapitdw 2
xptords 2
xpi a., b.
Wuyn 1e., 2b.
Wopite b.
PECULIAR TO INDIVIDUAL NEW TESTAMENT WRITERS.
N.B. A word which occurs only in a quotation by the N. T. writer from the Septuagint isso marked. In the Apocalypse, which
contains no express quotations, a word is so designated only when the context plainly indicates a (conscious or unconscious}
reminiscence on the part of the writer.
1. To Matthew
ayyeiov
dyyos?
@ykioTpov
a0aos
aipa aO@ov
aiva Sikavov
aipoppoew
aipetif@
dkny
dupiSdnorpov (Mk. #)
axptBow
avaBiBalo
avairos
aynfov
anayxo
arovinte
Bap ?
Bapurtpos ?
Bacanorns
(Bacireia TaY ovpavay, see
ovpavds)
Barrohoyew
Biaorns
Bpoxn
Sainov (Mk.? Lk.? Rev.?)
davevov
é 8eiva
déoun
Siaxadapi¢o (Lk. ?)
Svaxodrio
diahAdoow
diacapew
didpaxpov
dreEodos
duets
dioralea
dwrilw
diyalo
€Bdopunkovrdakus
eyepous
eyxpirto (Lk. ?)
6 €Ovxos (3 Jn. ?)
evOupéopa (Acts ?)
eidea (idéa)
eipnvorro.ds
ex\aptra
"Eppavouna fr. Sept.
€urropia
epmpnbw
efopkil@
€E@repos
ertyapBpeve
éruxabivo
€TLOPKE@
émotreipw?
epevyopuat
For other explanations see the Prefatory Remarks, p. 688 sq.
€picw
epipuov?
éraipos
evdia ?
evvoe@
evvovxil@
evpvx@pos
CCaviov
NAL
Oavpdovos
(Océ voc.)
beporns
Apnvos?
dupdw
(iSéa, see efS€éa)
lora
Kaba
KaOnyntns
katabeparilwt
katapavOave
caravabepatiCo ?
katatrovrilw
kjros fr. Sept,
KovoTwodia
kpudpatos ?
KUpLVOV
Kava [ovpB.)
(AapBdve cupBovrALov, see
paXakia
peTaip@
perotkeoia
piduov
pc bow
prov?
vopio pa
voociov (Lk. ?)
oikerera ?
oiktakds
Odtyomortia?
évap (Kar dvap)
duos (Mk. ? Lk.?)
ovdapas
Bacwela Tay ovpavar
mayW<evw
mapabaddootos
mapaxovw (Mk. ?)
mapariOevar mapaBoAny
mapoporata ?
mapovfis
meCos?
muxpos (Lk. ?)
mAaTus
mAnpooy To pnbev
modvAoyia
mpoBiBatw (Acts?)
mpooraiw
mpopbava
muppata?
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
pak(or -y-)a (or paka)
barrie
oaynyn
oeAnuidfopas
orioros
oratnp
oupBovrdtov Aap Bdvecr
ovvaipw (Adyov)
ovvavtnots?
ovvavéava
ovvrdcow
Ta\avTov
tapy
TeeuTH
rovvopua?
tpareCirns
Xavavatos
xAapts
evdopaprupla
pixe
Torat 187 (2 fr. Sept., 21 ?)
2. To Mark.
dypevo
@\ahos
ahexropoavta
a\\ayoo ?
apprBdrro t
audodoy
dvakuAlw?
avakos
avarrndaw ?
avacteval@
amddnpos
arooreyal@
Greiion } ?
aTtpow
adpifa
Boave(or-n-)pyés
yvapevs
dnravyas? (cf. rmAavyas)
diapratw (Mt. ?)
duo xiAtoe
dvous?
dvcKodos
éyyora?
eirev?
éxOapBew
exOavpate ?
éexrepiooas ?
éxoBos (Heb. fr. Sept.)
€Xwt
evayxarlComas
eveihew
evvuxos
efamwa
e£ovd(or-6-)evdw ?
emBadr)o (intr.)
emuxepadarov ?
eTuppanTw
ETLOVITPEX®
exaras (Exe)
eppaba
OapBew (Acts?)
Oavaoipos
Ouydrptov
TO ikavov trovety
xataBapvvw ?
kaTadt@K@
KATAKOTT@
karevdoyew ?
katoixnots
KevTUpi@v
kebaraid@ }
Kepadidp
kovpe etc.
kuAio
K@poroXts
peOdprov ?
pnkive
poy(y)tAdhos
pupiCa
VOUVEX@S
E€arns
dOorrotew ?
(68dv trovéw PY
dupa (Mt. ?)
domep?
ova
dxeros?
oyrios (adj.)?
mard.obev
mapmonvs ?
mavraxdbev ?
Trapop.oLos
men (Mt. ?)
TeEpiTpex@
mpacia
mpoavAtov
Tpoueptvaw
mpooaBBarov?
mpoceyyit@?
m™pookecpadatov
mpocoppico
poo Tropevopat
muypn?
oxodn€ fr. Sept.
opupvilo
omekovAaTwp
cractacrns ?
ortBas (oroBas)?
699
oTiABo
ovdAuTéw
oupBovAcov rorety ?
Ouptroatov
avv0XiBa
Supahouwixicoa
Supopowixicca le
Supopoincca
ovoonpov
ovotaovaarns ?
Tad.da
thAravyas? (cf. dnravyas)
tpiv@
tpupadia (Lk.?)
brepnpavia
bmeprepicoas
vmoAnvov
Xa\kiov
Tota 102 (1 fr. Sept., 82 ?)
3. To Luke.
N. B. Words found only in the
Gospel are followed by a G.;
those found only in the Acts, by
an A.; those undesignated are
common to both.
ayaboupyéw A. ?
aykaAn G.
dyuuopos A.
a@yvooros A.
Gyopatos A.
aypa G.
aypdapparos A.
dypavAéw G.
dyovia G.?
andta G.?
*A@nvatos A.
aOpoite G.?
aivos G. (Mt. fr. Sept.)
aio Oavopat G.
atrvov(Td)
airi@pa (-apa) A.
aixpadoros G. fr. Sept.
axaraxpiros A.
axpiBea A.
axpiBns A.
dkpoarnptoy A.
adkwdvtas A.
*AdeEavSpevs A.
*AdeEavdpivos (or -vds) A-
aXioynua A.
GAdoyevns Ge
GAdoduros A.
Gudprupos A.
Gumedoupyds G
Gpiva A.
dpdua(or -é-)fw G.?
avaBabuds A.
avaBadr A-
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS,
dvaBrers G. fr. Sept.
avaBoXn A.
avayvopifo s.? fr. Sept.
avadeixvups
avadevkis G.
avabidops A.
ava(nréw
avabépart avabepariferw A.
avaOnpa G.?
avaidea G.
dvaipects A.
avaxabifw A. (G.?)
avaxp.ows A.
dvahn(p)Yus G.
GvavTippntos A.
dvavTippytas Ae
avaTreiOw A.
dvdretpos } a
avarnpos
avanTUco@ G.?
dvackeval@ As
dvaoTaw
avaracoopas Ge
avatpéepe A. (G-%)
avapaive
avapavew G-
avayukis A.
dvéx\eutTos Ge
avevOexTos Ge
dvetdl@ As
avevOeros A.
avevpick@
dvOopodoyéeopat Ge
avéuratevi@ A.?
avOUraros A.
avouxodopew A. fr. Sept.
avTetrov
avTiBarrw Ge
avTLKaX€@ Ge
avrukpv ete. A.
avruTapepxopas Ge
avrurépa(-v) } 4
ae i 2
avrimepa
avTiTimTw A.
avropOa\ pew As
GV@TEPLKOS A-
(d&ido w. inf.)
amautéw G-
amrapticpos G-
draomatopat As?
Grrewpt abeO As
GTrEAAUYW Ae
amreheypos A.
am(or ad-)edrife 6.
drepituntos A. fr. Sept
drroypapn
drrodexatev@ Ge?
dmrodéxopat
aToONBo G.
arrokaTaoTacts A+
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
drrokdel@ G.
drocix@ G.?
aTrop.doow G.
amominT@ A.
GrroTN€@ A.
dromhvva G.?
drorviyo G. (Mt. ?)
arropia G.
aroppinT@ A.
Grookevat@ A.?
amrootopatiC@ Ge
erotwacow
aropbeyyopuat A.
adropoprifouat As
amrowuxw G.
dpaye (apa ye) As
GpYyUpOKOTOS As
"Apayy A.
"Apetos mayos A.
“Apeomayitns Ac
(dpnv) apvos Ge
aporpov G.
GPTEM@V As
GpxXtepartKds Ac
apxtteho@uns Ge
donmos A.
*Acvavos A.
Aaidpyns A»
douria A.
GOUTOS Ae
doKé@ A.
GT MEVOS As
dooov A.?
doTodnT@ G.
oTUUMOvOS As
aoatwy G-
GTEKVOS Ge
arep G.
avy? A.
Avyovotos Ge
avotnpos G.
avtontns G.
aitoxeip A.
adpavros G.
aeAdrns A.
apedmi€w (cf. dredrifw) c.
adits A.
apvo A.
adppos G.
aude G.
axAvs A.
Babéws G.?
Babuve G.
Bad(A)dvriov G.
Barre c. (Jn.? Rev. %)
Bapive c.?
Ta Bacivea G.
Baots A.
8aros (Heb. Bath) a.
Beddvn c.f
Bepovaios A»
Bia a.
Biawos A.
Biwots A.
BoAn G.
Borg A.
Bouvds G. fr. Sept.
Bpadum\oێ@ As
Bptye A.
Bpacipos G.
Bupoevs A.
Bouds A.
yata A.
T'aAarikos Ae
yeAdw G.
yepovcia Ae
yipas G-
YAEUKOS Ae
yvoorns A.
SaktvAtos G.
dav(€)ioTHs Ge
damravy G.
SevorOatpovia As
Secordaipwv A.
dexadvo A. ?
dexaoxt® G.?
deEvoBdAos ?
de£codaBos }
AepBaios A.
decpew G.?
SeopopuAa& A.
Secparns As
Seurepaios A.
Sevrepdmparos GP
Snpnyopew Ae
Ojmos A.
Onudotos As
dtaBadr@ G.
duayyehA@ (Ro. fr. Sept.)
Staywocke A.
Suayvepila G.?
duayvecis AY
Siayoyyll@ G.
Staypnyopew G.
diadéxopuat A.
diadoxos A.
diadidwpe (Jn.? Rev. 7?)
dtaxabaipw G.?
Staxareheyxopas A-
Staxov@ A.
dvaharé@ G.
dtaXeir@ G.
OudXexTos A.
Stadiprrave A?
duadv@ A.
dtapayopuat Ae
diapepio pds Ge
Stavéwo A.
dtavevo G.
Stavénua G
700
Stavuxrepevoa G.
dtavia A.
Statéw A.
Starrovéw A.
Staropéw
Starrpayparevopuas G.
Starpia A.
diaceiw G.
dtaorreipw A.
Suaornpa A.
d:arapacow G. fr. Sept.
OtareA€w A.
dtarnpéw
dtapevyo A.
diapOopa A.
diapvAdcow G. fr. Sept.
dtaxerpiCa A.
diaydevato A. ?
diayapilo G.
StevOupeopar A. ?
dueE€pyopat A?
dvepwrae A.
Sueria A.
dunynots G.
d:Oddaogos Ae
Suiornpe
Stic yupiCopas
duxalw G.?
ducaorys A. (G-%)
diodeve
Suomerns A.
didp0wpa A?
AtdoKoupot A.
dovAn
doy G.
Spaxpn G.
dvaBaoraxtos G. (Mt. ?)
Sucevrepia (-réptov) As
Swdexadvdrov A.
éa G. (Mk. ?)
€Bdounkovra
€BSounkovraeé A.?
€Bdopunkovramevre A. ?
‘EBpaixés G. ?
eyxaberos G.
éykAnpa A.
éy(or ev-)Kvos G.
édadita c. fr. Sept.
edacos A.
bila G.
eloxad€opat A-
eiomnddw A.
eloTpexX@ A.
éxatovrapxns A. G.? (Mt. ?)
€xBoAn A-
exyapiokw G.?
exdupycouat A.
exOoTos Ae
EKELOE A.
€xOapBos A.
InDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
€xOeros A.
éxkoupBaw A.
exxopila G.
éxxpévapat (Or exxpepopat) G
éxAadé@ A.
éxdeizrw G.? (Heb. fr. Sept.)
expuKTnpil@ G.
€KTEUT@ A.
exmnOaw A.? t
exTAew Aw
exTAnps@ As
exTANp@Ots Ae
exoal@ AP
€xTapaoo@ As
EKTEAE@ Ge
EKTEVELA A.
EKTEVETTEPOV Go?
exTiOnpe A.
EKX@pPEW Ge
exyiyo A.
eAawv A. (G. ?)
"Edau(e)itns &-
devas A.
Eko G.
“EXANvuioThS As
€uBarrw G.
éuBiBato A.
€paivopat A.
eumimpaw A.?
€u(or év-)rvew A-
eucbavns A. (Ro. fr. Sept.)
évavte
evdens A.
evdexerar (impers.) G.
evd.dvoxo G. (Mk.?)
evédpa A.
evedpevo A. (G.?)
évedpov A.?
eucxvo A. (G.?)
éevkvos cf. &yxvos
evvea G.
ev(v)eds A.
evvev@ G.
(ra) évovra G.
évoyew G.? (Heb. fr. Sept.)
evrvew cf. éumvew
€vTOmTLos A.
évrpopos A. (Heb. ?)
evirnov A. fr. Septe
évricopat A.
e€atréw G.-
e&adAopat A-
efaorpart@ G.
eEeupet A.
é&ns
eEodoOpeva }
efo\eOpeve
eEopKiorns A
efox7 As
| ێumvos A.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
efwbew A.
emabpoile G.
émairew G-
émakpodopat A.
EMAVAYKES Ac
€mravepyopuat G-
emapxetos Ae?
> ,
emapx(e)ia A.
éraviis A. fr. Sept.
ETEYELP@ A.
evetOnm@ep Ge
em (or €p-) €idov
meus (ecpe) A.
errevoépxopat Geb
eréxewa A. fr. Sept.
TO ewiBaddov G.
eniBiBato
émiBodw Ae?
emBovdn A.
> ,
emytvopat Ae
eTLOnMe@ As
ETLKEAAW Ae?
*Emxovp(€)eos A.
e€mtkoupia As
> ,
emuKpiva G-
emNciy@ G.?
ETLEELA Ac
ETULEAGS Go
€TLVEUW Ac
> ,
emivowa A.
> ‘ ;
emuTropevop.aL 'G. [Sept.)
emippintw Ge (1 Pet. fr.
ETLOLTLO LOS Ge
> U
emuokeval@ A. ?
emioratns G.
emloTnpil@ Ac
emiatpopy A.
emeoanns A.
eTLTXU@ G-
emitoauTé Ae? ,
> Ul
EMLTPOTTEU@ G.?
emit porn A-
emupayns A-? fr. Sept.
eripavew
eTLXELPEw
eTLXE@ Ge
ém)hnoOn xpdvos A
> , eae. -
emAnoOnoay npépar
€MOKEAN@ Ae ?
epeldw A.
épnpot (al) Ge
ed
éaOnous ?
éomépa
éorepwds Ge?
edye G.?
> ,
EVEPYETEW Aw
evepyeTns Ge
evOudpopew Ae
eVOupos A.
svOvpws A?
701
evAaBns
evmopew A.
evmopia A.
evpaxvA@p
evpoxAvowy A.
evpukhudov
evTOVas
evpopew G.
evppoovrn A.
épdddopat A.
(epetdor, cf. émeidov)
’*Edéctos A-
epnuepia G.
Cevyos G.
¢euxtnpia Ae
<nTpa A.
Cwoyovew (1 Tim. 7?)
yepoveva Ge
Nyepovia Ge
npubavns Ge
nxos (76) Ge
NX@ Ge?
dapBos
Odpoos A.
Ged A.
Gcopaxéw Ae?
Ocouaxos Ae
Opn A-
Oewpia Ge
Onpeto G.
OoprBala G.? (cf. rypBatw)
Opava G. fr. Sept.
OpopBos G.?
Oupude G.
Oupopayew A.
taous
idpas c.?
iepateva G.
iepdavdog As
ikpds G.
immevs A.
iodyyedos G.
tows G.
"TraQtk0s Ae
KaOaTrT@ Ac
xabeEns
KaOnwepwwds As
kabinue
KaOdXoVU Ac
kaborAil@ G-
Kadore
kaxetOev A. G. ? (Mk. ?)
kdkwots A. fr. Sept.
KapStoyv@OTHe A-
KapTropdpos Ae
katraBaots G:
KaTayyeevs Ac
KaTabew G-
karadixn A.?
karak\ei@
KatakAnpodotéw ? fr.
, Ae
karaxAnpovopew ? Sept.
katak\ive G
katako\ovbew
karakpnuvil@ Ge
kata\tOalw G-
katdouros A. fr. Sept.
KATALEV@ A.
KaTavev@ G.
KaTavuco@ A.
katamintw A. (G.?)
KataT\éw G.
KaTapiOpew A.
KaTaceio A.
catacopivoua A. fr. Sept.
kaTaoTEeAAw A
KaTacUp®@ G.
kataopalw Ge
KATATXEOLS As
KATATPEX@ A-
Katapéepw A.
karappovntns A. fr. Sept.
kataWuxo G-
KATELO@AOS A-
KaTePploTnpe As
KaTotkia A.
katdpOapa A?
Kepapos Gs
KepaTLov Ge
Knplov G.?
kKiXpnt Ge
kAaots
kAwdptov A.?
kNive ) Hpépa G-
KAwvidtov G-
kKAtola G.
KOLT@V As
koAupBda@ A.
ko\ovia (-veta ete.) As
komreTds A.
korrpia G.
kémptov Ge?
Kopa& G-
kopos G.
Kouvpila Ac
kpauTd\n Ge
Kpdat.ioros
Kpuntn (or Kptmrn) G.
KTHT@P A.
Aakti€@ A.
Aaprporns A-
Aaumpas G.
Aa€eutés G.
AdoK@ A-
eios G. fr. Sept
Aeris As
Ajpos G.
ALBeprivos A.
Aixude G. (Mt. ?)
Auunv A.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
Alp a.
Adytog A.
Avkaomaré A.
Avpaivopas As
Avowredet G.
Aurporns A.
payeia (~yia) &
payev@ A.
padnrpia A.
pakpoOtpas Ap
pavia A.
pavTevopas A-
paoTi€@ As
pacros G. (Rev. ¥)
peyaneios A. (G-')
pericavos GP
pepioTns G.
peonuBpia Ae
PETTOM Aw
peraBadrA®@ A-
peTaKaXew@ A.
peTramepmw A-
perewpil@ Ge
perorkiC@ A.
peTpios A.
pndapas A.
pinmou Ae?
picbtos G.
picbapa Ae
pva G.
poyis G.?
Hoo XOTTOLE@ A»
vavKANpos A-
vaus A.
veavias A.
veooods (vooods) G fr. Sept
vewkOpos A.
vnoiov A.
voooid G.?
vooods, See veooods
dySonxorra G.
6deVo G.
ddouTropew@ As
ddvvaw
OOdun As
Olknpa As
oikoddpuos Ae t
oikovopew G.
OKvew@ A.
d\oxAnpia A.
duBpos G.
bprew
6uOTEXVOS A-
dverdos G.
brére G. F
OmTave A-
ontés G.
Opyud A-
dp(e)uwds G.
opbpi{e@ G.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
épOpios G.?
bpu& G.?
dpobecia A.
ovpavdbep A.
> ,
ovcia Ge
opus G.
er
OxAE@ A. (G.?)
OxAOTOLE@ As
maOnrés A.
mais, 1), G
mayne G.
mravdoxetov (or -kiov) G.
mavdoxevs (or -KEUS) G.
mravotkt (Or-Kel) A.
mavtaxy OY mavraxy A?
mavtn (or -Tn) A-
mapaBadd@ A. (Mk. %)
mapaBiagopat
mapabogos G.
Trapabewpew A.
Taparvew@ A.
mapaxabeCopat G. ?
mapaxabiCw G.?
TapakaNvnT@ Ge
mapahéyouat Ae
mapadvos G.
Tapavopew A.
mapaTAew A.
Tapaonuos As
mapareiva A-
Tapatnpnots G.
TApaTVYXAV@ As
Tapaxeyagia Ac
mapeuBdarro G.?
TapEvoXAE@ Ac
mrapOevia G.
TapolxXopat As
TApOTPUV@ Ac
TaTP@vos As
medwwos G-
meCev@ A.
metpaw A. (Heb. ?)
TEVvixpos G.
TEVTEKALOEKATOS Ge
mepaitepw A.?
mepianta@ G.?
MEplagTpanT@ s
mepixabila G.?
TEpiKpaTHs Ac
TEPLKPUTTT@ Ge
TEPLKUKAG® Ge
meptkauTr@
TEPLULEV® As
Tepe Ae
Te pLorKe@ G.
TreplovKos G.
TeEptoxn A.
meptp(p) iru A.
TEPLOTTAw G.
TEPLTPETM As
102
myyavov G.
mueCw Ge
mipmpaw A.?
muvakidtov G. ?
muvakis G.?
mew (Rev. ?)
m)7e(4)upa (or -tpa) 6.
moos A.
TVLKTOS A+
mvon A.
monitns (Heb.?
tro\XNarAagiov G. (Mt. ?)
TONLTapXNS A-
[Sept.)
Tlovtixds A.
moppw G. (Mt. and Mk. fr.
moppupdr@dts As
TpayLaTevopat G-
mpaktap G-
mpeoBeia G.
mpnyns A-
mpoBarro
mpoxarayyeAAw A. (2 Co.?)
Mpoknpvoo@ A.
MpopedeTaw G-
mpoopa@ A.
mpoTropevo
mpocavaBaiva Ge
mpocavanickw G. ?
mpocavexw A.?
TMpOoTamrethew A-
mpooaxéew A.?
mpooSarravdw G.
mpooOeopat A.
mpoadokia
Mpooedw A.
mpocepyacopat G.
mpooeyxetv EavTols
TpooKAnpow A.
mpook\ive A.?
mpooAadew A.
TpOOTELVOS A.
TpooTnyvupe A.
mpoomroew G. (Jn. ? ?)
Tpoopyyvups G- (Mt. ?)
mpooaras A.
mpoowWavo G.
TpocwroAn()rms A-
mpotdoow A.?
TpOTElv@ A.
MpoTpeTr@ A.
mpovTapy@
mpopepw G-
mpoxetpil@ A.
MpoxetpoTovew A.
mp (OF -@-, OF -~G) pa A.
™pwaToorarns A.
mpatas A. ?
MTOEW G.
TTUTO@ Ge
TUOwY As
upd A.
paBdodyxos A.
padvovpynpa A.
padvoupyia A.
Prypa G.
pyto@p A.
‘Popaikos G. ?
Povvupe A.
oddos G.
cavis A.
ocBaotds A.
Sidavtos
ouKaptos A.
oikepa G.
oupiKivOtov Ac
owtal@ G.
oureuTos G.
outiov A.?
OlTomeTptov G-
OKaTTw G.
okay A.
OKEUT Ae
oKnvorrowos A.
OKipTaw G-
oKA\npotpaxndos A.
oxvAov (or oxvAov) G.
OKwAnKOBperTos A-
copds G.
OTapyavow G.
OTEpHOADyoS A-
OTéupa A.
OTEPEO@ A.
oTLypn G-
oTparnyos
otparia (cf. 2 Co. x. 4 Tdf.)
otparorredapyns ? } A
otparorédapxos? J”
otpatéredov G.
Srwikds A.
ovyyevera
ovyyevis G.?
ovykahinT@ G.
ovykataBaive A.
ovykarariOnue G.
ovykaraynpile@ A.
ovyKivew A.
ovyKopil@ A.
OVYKUTT®@ G.
ovykupia G.
OvyxXew A.
Ovyxvots A.
au(v)(nrnots A.?
Ovkapuvos G.
ouKopopea
-pwpéa ¢ Ge
-pwpaia
ovKopavTe@ Ge
ovddoyiCopat G
oupSaro
ovurrapayivopat G.(2Tim.?)
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS
Oupmaperp A.
ouuTeptAapBave@ A-
CULTIV® A.
ouprinta G.?
oupTAnpow
ouppVve G.
ovppovia G.
oupynpila a.
auvabpoifa a. (G.?)
auvakodovbéw G. (Mk.?}
auvadi¢@ A.
ovvad\acow A.?
ovvaprate
ovvdpopn A-
ouveyse (eipi) A. (G.?)
ouveyne (et) G.
ovvedavveo A. ?
ouveritiOnus A.?
GuveTropat A.
ovvepiotne A.
ovvOd\dw G. (Mt. ?)
ovvOpinra@ A.
ouvKatavev@ Ae?
ouvodev@ A.
ovvodia G.
TVVOMIAE® A.
TvVOpLOpEe@ A.
ouvropes A. (Mk. ? ?)
ovvtpodos A.
CuvTUyXav@ G.
ovvepocia A. !
Supos G. (Mk. ?)
Svptis (or ciptis) A.
ovorapacoe G. (Mk. ?)y
ovotpedpa A. (Mt. ?)
ovotpopy A.
opay.ov a. fr. Sept.
opodpas A.
ovdpdv a.?
ogupov a.?
oXOAn A.
TAKTOS A.
taviv (Ta viv) Ac
Tapaxos A.
Taxiora A.
TEKUNpLoV A.
Teheapopew G.
Teg oapakovTaeTns A.
TegoapecKatOeKaToS As
TeTpad.ov A.
TetparrAdos G-
TeTpapXEew G. [xapdia
ridecOa eis Ta Ora or ep
TLIL@pEW A.
TOLXOS A.
Tpavpa G.
Tpavpariv@
Tpaxus
Tptetia A.
TpluTEyos As
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
TptoxiAcoe A.
Tporopopew? ba fr. Sept.
Tpopoope w ?
tpvyov G. fr. Sept.
rupBalo G. ? (cf. dopyBage)
Tvptos A.
TUP@MUKOS As -
bypds G.
Udpwmkds G.
Umepetoov A.
UmEpEKXUV® Ge
Umep@ov A.
UMNpETEw A.
UmToBadX@ A.
UmoCa@vyupe A.
Umokpivoua G.
vrodapBava (3 Jn. ?)
Umovoew@ A.
UmomAe@ A.
tromvew A.
UrocTpavvupt Ge
UmoTpex@ A.
Umroywpew G.
vpaiva G.?
avracia A.
papayé G. fr. Sept.
dats A.
garvn G.
piravOparas A.
$idn (4) 6.
iAoveckia G.
prridaopos A.
pidodpovas A-
poBnOpov(or -rpov) Ge
dpros A.?
ppovipws G.
gpvaccw A. fr. Sept.
ppvyavov A.
pvudakif@ A.
puara€ A.
Xahdaios As
xapaé Ge
xaopa Ge.
xXEtuat@ As
XElpaywyew Ae
XEtpuywyOs As
xAevatw A.
xopds G.
xopracpa A.
xpewperderns (or xpeo@ua.) G.
xpovorpiBew A.
Xp@s A-
X@pos A-
Waxo Ge
@veopat Ae
@dv G.
Gospel 312 (11 fr. Sept., 52?)
Acts 478 (15 fr. Sept., 49?)
Both 61.
Tora 851 (26 fr. Sept., 101?)
708
4. To all three Synoptists.
ayavaxtéw
ayeAn
ava?
a\dBacrpov
aXuevs
apny Neyo vpiv
avaBode ?
avak\iva
avextos
amraipo
arrobnpéew
amroxepani¢vo
amrokvAlw
oi dprou THs mpobemews
aoBeortos
aoKos
Bartistns
BeehCeBovr (-Bov8)
yarnyn
yapioxw?
dtaBA€rr@ ?
diadoyi¢oua (Jn.?)
dvoKdAws
éxatovratAagiov ?
exdidwpt
€utraivo
eumTUM
emriBAnua
emeypapn
emiovvay@
epnpoous
EVKOT@TEPOV ETA
O€pos
Onralo
Kak@s EXE
Kapndos
Kataye\d@
kpaomredov
Kpnvds
Kapos
Aeyewr (-yror)
Aempa
Aempds
pakpos ?
p.od.os
vuppav
oikodeororns
Opxeopat
mapadutikos ?
Tevoepa
Tepidvumos
mpa [Sept.)
(oppo Mt. and Mk. fr.
miva&
mpoBaive
mpwroxabedpia
mpwroxrAiola
mupyos
pais?
pnyvupe (Gal. fr. Sept.)
civart
owdav
oKvAAw ?
omhayxvicopas
Ta ondoptua
oraxus
oreyn
oupTViy@
ovvTnpEew
TeA@vns
TEA@VLOV
TIAK®
tpiBos fr. Sept.
vids Aavid
bmoxpitns
eyyos ?
xotpos
Wevdopaptupew (Ro. ?)
Wexiov
Tora. 78 (1fr. Sept., 10 ?)
5. To John.
N. B. Words peculiar to the
Gospel, or to one or another of
the Epistles, are so marked.
dyyeNXia 1 Ep.
ayyeddo G. ?
c ,
GNLEV@ G.
adhaxdbev G.
aXon G.
duaptiav €xew G., 1 Ep.
auny apny G.
dv (éav) G.? 1 Ep?
> , eee
avapaptntos G. (viii. 7)
{ Cons
avaoraots ! ¢ 7 G.
| kpicvews
avOpaxia G.
avOpwrokrovos G.y 1 Ep.
avrixptoros 1 Er., 2 Ep.
avThé@ G.
avTAnpa G.
> , i, ?
dmekpiOn kal eume G.
ameépxopuat eis Ta Orriow G.
amoovvaywyos G.
ap(p)ados G.
> ,
apxttpikAwos G.
6 dpyav Tov Kdcpov (rovTov) G.
avropepos G. (vill. 4).
Baiov G.
Baotdiokos G. ?
BiBpacke G.
TaSBaéa G.
vyeveTn G-
yevunOivat avwber G., €k (Tov)
Oeod G. 1 Ep. ex (Tov) mvev-
uaros G.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
yepav G.
yA@oodkopoy G.
daxpio G.
detAcd@ G.
Snore G.? (v. 4)
ditalovvio G.
didupos G.
eykaina G.
eivat €k TOU KéopOU G., 1 EP.
> | €k TOY dv }
CLMOL Gis) tanh co
| €k Tév Kato
exveto rh
eKVEw
eAvypa G.?
€umoptov G.
eupvoda G.
eLépxeoOar €x (amd, mapa)
Tov Oeod G.
eEutvil@ G.
émdpatos G. ?
emevOutns G.
eridexopuat 3 EP.
emtxplo G.
()) €oxarn npépa G.
Covvups G. (Acts ?)
Aos G.
nmep G.?
GeooeBis Ge
Onkn G.
Opéupa G.
idaopds 1 Ep.
xabaipw G. (Heb. ?)
xataypape G.? (viii. 6).
keOpos G.?
kepia G.
Keppa G.
KEppaTtoTns G-
KnTroupos G-
kivnots G. (Vv. 3)
KAnpa G.
Kolunots G.
KoAupBnOpa G.
Kopryorepov ExELY Be
kpiOwos G.-
Nevtiov G-
\LOdoTpwror Ge
Airpa G.
oyxn G-
pLewO@ G-
Mecoias G-
peTpntns Ge
lypa G.?
povn G-
vikn 1 Ep.
vurTnp G-
voonua G.? (v. 4)
vuoo@ G.
a6@ G.
d6émov G. (Lk. ?)
duod G. (Lk.?)
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
évaptov G.
ovKovY G.
owadptov G.
macddptov G. (Mt.?)
mevOepos G-
mept0ew G. [3 zp.
mepurateiv ev adnOeia 2 Er.
mepimateiy ev TH okoTia (Or
ev T@ oKOTEL) G-, 1 Ep,
mepinareiy cv tT ort 1 EP.
qroteiv THY GdjnOevav G., 1 Ep.
moTEpos G-
mpoBarttkn G-
mpoBatiov G. ?
mpocatrew G. (Mk. ? Lk.?)
mpooKuVnTHS Ge
mpoopaytov G.
TTEpva Ge
mTVGHA Ge
pew G.
‘Papaiore Ge
oxé)os G.
oKnvornyia G.
ovyXpaopur Gee
ovppabnrijs G
ov veroepxXopat G.
rexviov G., 1 Ep. (Mk.? Gal. ?)
TeTapTatos G.
TeTpaunvos G.
rievar Wuxny G., 1 Ep.
TiThos G.
vdoia G.
imam now G. (Mt. ?)
upartés G.
paves G.
prorpateta 3 EP.
pAvapéw 3 Ep.
payedAArov G.
xXapai G.
xaprns 2 Ep.
xeluappos G.
XoAd@ G.
xpiopa 1 sp.
Wuxiy Teva, see reGévar yy.
Yopior G.
Gospel 114 (12 ?)
Epp. 11
Gospel and Epp. 8 (1 ?)
Tora. 133 (18 7?)
6. To Paul.
a. To THE LONGER EPISTLES
AND PHILEMON.
N. B. Words peculiar to any
single Epistle are so designated
by the appended abbreviation.
aBapns 2 Co.
dyabacivn
avauos 1 Co.
704
dyavdxrnots 2 Co.
dyevys 1 Co.
dytwovrn
dyvdtns 2 Co.
ayvas Phil.
dyptedauos Ro.
dypumvia 2 Co.
adamavos 1 Co.
adndws 1 Co.
ad.akeintas
adporis 2 Co.
aéa cf. papav aba
adeos Eph.
dOupéw Col.
aivtypa 1 Co.
aicOnots Phil.
aioxpodoyia Col.
aicxpétns Eph.
aitidopat Ro.
aixpadwrevo Eph. fr. Sept.
Co eisc)
dxaspéonat Phil.
dxatakdduntos 1 Co.
akov 1 Co.
a\adnros Ro.
adnbevo
G\Anyopéw Gal.
Gduros Phil.
dpeuntos 1 Th.
dperaxivntos 1 Ca.
dperapedntos
dyuetavontos Ro.
dyerpos 2 Co.
dvaOaddo Phil.
avaxatvd@
dvaxahinro 2 Co.
avaxepahatd@
avakénte Gal. ?
dvadoyia Ro.
avapevo 1 Th.
avavedo Eph.
avaéwos 1 Co.
avakiws 1 Co.
avaroddyntos Ro.
avdpi¢a 1 Co.
davexdunynros 2 Co.
avedenpov Ro.
aveepeu(or -pav-)rnros Ro.
ave&tyvianros
aveyids Col.
avnko
divOpaé Ro. fr. Sept.
avOpwrdpeckos
avOpamwwov Aێyw Ro.
avoréis Eph.
avopos Ro.
avoxn Ro.
avtavarAnpéw Col.
avtamddoats Col.
avtiAn(u)yes 1 Co.
avripuobia
avttotpatrevoua Ro.
ama\yew Eph.
amrahAorpidw
dmapackevaaros 2 Co,
an(or ad-)etdov Phil.
areyt absum
areirov 2 Co.
aimexSvopat Col.
améxdvots Col.
dme\evbepos 1 Co.
areptomdotws 1 Co.
amhorns
arddeéts 1 Co.
amrokapadoxia
amoxata\\dcow
améxpta 2 Co.
droppavifa 1 Th.
drootuyew Ro.
aroriva Philem.
amotoApaw Ro.
amoropuia Ro.
amrovata Phil.
améxpnats Col.
dpa ovv
apa Ro.
appaBav
dpeoxeia Col.
appota 2 Co.
dépraypos Phil.
appntos 2 Co.
apxirextav 1 Co.
doaivw 1 Th. ?
aobevnpa Bn.
aoopos Eph.
doris Ro.
dotatéw 1 Co.
aovvberos Ro.
doxnpovew 1 Co.
doynpov 1 Co.
draxtew 2 Th.
Graxtos 1 Th.
draxtas 2 Th,
Gropos 1 Co.
avyagw 2 Co.?
avOaiperos 2 Co.
avdds 1 Co.
avénous
adrdpxns Phil.
agpetdia Col.
abt
adixvéopa Ro.
’Ayaixos 1 Co.
dypewdo Ro. fr. Sept.
éyonoros Philem.
apuxos 1 Co.
Badd Ro. fr. Sept.
Bacxaivo Gal.
BeAiad or BeAiap 2 Co.
Bedos Eph.
i a E
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS
BpaBetov
BpaBevo Col.
Bpsdxos 1 Co.
Buds 2 Co.
Tadarns Gal.
yeapyov 1 Co.
yoiws Phi.
ypanrés Ro.
yuprytedo 1 Co.
Saxvw Gal..
Aapacknvos 2 Co.
Sevypati¢w Col. (Mt. 2)
Staipects 1 Co.
dvacroAn
didaxrds 1 Co. (Jn. fr. Sept.y
Stepunveia 1 Co.?
Suepunveutns 1 Co.?
duxatoxpioia Ro.
dtxaiwots Ro.
dudrrep 1 Co.
dtyooracia
divos 1 Co.
Soypari¢@ Col
doxyy
dddAvos 2 Co.
dodida Ro. fr. Sept.
Sodow 2 Co.
ddrns 2 Co.
SovAaywyéw 1 Co.
Spaccopa 1 Co.
Suvapde Col. (Eph.? Heb.
duvatéw 2 Co. (Ro. ?)
dvodnuéew 1 Co.?
dvognpia 2 Co.
Swpodopia Ro.?
éyypapw 2 Co. (Lk. 7)
eyytrepov Ro.
éyxavydopat 2 Th. ?
eyxevtpif@ Ro.
éykorn (OV €kk-, OF éve-) 3 Ca
€yxpatevoua, 1 Co
eykpiva 2 Co.
édpaios
€OedoOpnaxeta Col.
eOvdpyns 2 Co.
eOuxas Gal.
eidwdetov 1 Co.
eixy, -ky (Mt. 2)
eixo Gal.
ei\uxpivera (or -via)
eipnvorrotew Col.
eiadéxopat 2 Co.
éxatovraétns Ro.
éxSatravaw 2 Co.
exdnpew 2 Co.
€xdixos
éxSiako 1 Th. (Lk. ?)
éxxaiw Ro.
exxidw Ro.
exk\€i@
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
éxxomr cf. éyxomm
éxvnpo 1 Co.
éxovovos Philem.
éxnerdvvupe Ro. fr. Sept.
exntvo Gal.
extpépw Eph.
éxrpopua 1 Co.
expoBew 2 Co.
EKOY
éAarrovew 2 Co. fr. Sept.
edadppia 2 Co.
eXaxiorérepos Eph.
eA\Aoyde or ~yéw
éuBatevw Col.
éumepuratéw 2 Co. fr. Sept.
evapxopat
évderypa 2 Th.
evderEus
evdnuéw 2 Co.
evdoéd(w 2 Th.
evepyeta
évepynua 1 Co.
evxorry Cf. éyKomy
evopxita 1 Th.?
évorns Eph.
évtpom 1 Co.
evtuTow 2 Co.
eEayopalw
e€aiow 1 Co.? and fr. Sept.
e€avaoraocis Phil.
e€arataw (1 Tim. ?)
eEarropew 2 Co.
eSeyeipw
e&nxéo 1 Th.
e&icyvo Eph.
éoptato 1 Co.
erraxova 2 Co. fr. Sept.
éravapiynoke Ro.
éneirep Ro. ?
émexteivo Phil.
érevddw 2 Co.
emiBapew
emOvataooopa Gal.
emOvo Eph.
émOavatvos 1 Co.
erOupntns 1 Co.
emtxadimt@ No. fr. Sept.
émuxatapatos Gal. fr. Sept.
(Jn. ?)
émimoOnats 2 Co.
émumoOnros Phil.
émumobia Ro.
émurknvow 2 Co.
émuamaw 1 Co.
emitysia 2 Co.
enxtpavoxo Eph.
emtxopnyia
érrovon.at@ Ro.
énraxiocxicot Ro.
epebiC@ 2 Co. (Col.?)
705
épunveia 1 Co.
€punveutns 1 Co.?
ti épovpev Ro.
érepoyAwaoos 1 Co.
érepotuyew 2 Co.
érépws Phil.
éroiacia Eph.
evvora Eph. (1 Co. ?)
evmapedpos } 1
evmpooedpos
evmpooanéew Gal.
evonpos 1 Co.
evoynpoveas
evoxnpooviyn 1 Co
evtpamedia Eph.
evpnuia 2 Co.
evpnpos Phil.
evxapioros Col.
evyvxew Phil.
evadia
épevperns Ro.
edixveopa 2 Co.
6 nyannpévos (of Christ)
Eph.
i) dyvoeire Ro.
wotota 2 Co.
700s 1 Co. fr. Menander
qvixa 2 Co.
nrou Ro.
ce
HTT@y OY yoTwv
nxew 1 Co. (Lk. 2)
Gevdtns Ro.
6é\o ev Col.
GeodiSaxtos 1 Th.
Geoarvyns Ro.
Gedrns Col.
Onpa Ro.
Onptopaxéw 1 Co.
Ounros
6prapBevo
Oupeds Eph.
tapa 1 Co.
iepdduros 1 Co.?
icpoovAéw Ro.
icpoupyéo Ro.
ixavorns 2 Ca.
ixavow
itapds 2 Co.
idapotns Ro.
ineipopat (? cf. Suetpopac)
iva (‘where’)?
*Tovdait@ Gal.
"lovdaixas Gal.
Tovdaiopds Gal.
iodrns
iodWuxos Phil.
istopéw Gal.
xabaipeots 2 Co.
xaOo (1 Pet.?)
xabopaw Ro.
kawvérns Ro.
xaxonbeva Ro.
kaddpn 1 Co.
kad\teAaos Ro.
xadorroew 2 Th.
KdAvppa 2 Co.
KapTT@
Kavev
kamnAevw 2 Co.
kataBapéw 2 Co.
cataBpaBevo Col.
karadovAd@
cataxadunt@ 1 Co.
kataxpiya Ro.
kardxptots 2 Co.
katdAados Ro.
kardAeypa Ro.?
kata\\ayn
kata\\aoow
xatavapxaw 2 Co.
cardvuéts Ro. fr. Sept.
catdptiots 2 Co.
kataptiopos Eph.
katackoréew Gal.
kataotpavvyn 1 Co.
katatoun Phil.
karavyd¢@ 2 Co.?
karaxOéos Phil.
kataxpdopuat 1 Co.
katontpicopnat 2 Co.
katwtepos Eph.
KeXevopa 1 Th.
kevodo&ia Phil.
xevddoéos Gal.
kKEevow
knudw 1 Co.?
kivduvos
kAnpdo Eph.
kNiwa
kAvdevigowat Eph.
ko\akeia 1 Th.
Kopaw 1 Co.
Koun 1 Co.
koopoxpatap Eph.
kKpeas
kpui, -p7) Eph.
kuBeia Eph.
kuBepynats 1 Co.
KvpBarov 1 Co.
kuptaxov Seixvorv 1 Co.
Kupo@
Aaodixeds Col. (Rev. ?)
Adpuyé Ro.
Aetupa Ro.
AjYes Phil.
Aoyia 1 Co.
Aoytopds
AoiSopos 1 Co.
Avats 1 Co.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS,
paxapiopos
paxeAXov 1 Co.
paxpoxpémos Eph.
papav aa (papavabd) 1 Co.
paraw Ko.
peyadws Phil.
peyeOos Eph.
peOodeia Eph.
pebvoos 1 Co.
peodrotxov Eph.
peraxivew Col.
petadAdoow Ra.
petra xnparivo
peroxn 2 Co.
Pine (yrfre ‘ye, pty Te ye) b
0.
uodrvopds 2 Co.
poppy Col.
popddw Gal.
6x Oo
pvéw Phil.
puxrnpive Gai.
popdopa 2 Co.
pepia 1 Co.
popodoyia Eph.
vekpa@os
vn 1 Co.
vnreata 1 Co,
vonpua
vonobecia Ro.
voupnvia Col.
vuxOnpepov 2 Co.
vetos Ro. fr. Sept.
oixteipw Ro. fr. Sept.
éxtanpepos Phil.
OA€Opros 2 Th.?
oAryéWuxos 1 Th.
dAobpevtns 1 Co.
dAoreAjs 1 Th.
dpuetpopat 1 Th.? (cf. ipeip.)
épiria 1 Co. fr. Menander
évivnut Philem.
épatés Col.
dépeEs Ro.
dpborrodéw Gal.
éaye Ro.
éciws 1 Th.
dodpnars 1 Co.
opOa podovrcia
dxvpopa 2 Co.
ma0os
madayayos
maife 1 Co. fr. Sept.
madaétns Ro.
maAn Eph.
mavodpyos 2 Co.
mapaBorevopat ? } Phil
mapaBovAevopas ?
Trapa(nrs@
TapaKel mat
inprvipuaAL WRITERS.
wapapvbia 1 Co.
mapapvdcov Phil.
maparAnovov Phil.
mapautixa 2 Co.
mapappovew 2 Co.
mapedpeva (cf. mpogedp.) 1
Co.?
mapeioaxtos Gal.
Tapeoepyouat
mapeots Ro.
mapnyopia Col.
wapodos 1 Co.
mapopyitw
mapopytopuos Eph.
warpixds Gal.
metOds 1 Co.
(Iet8a 1 Co. ?)
mecopovn Gal.
mevns 2 Co. fr. Sept.
mevraxis 2 Co.
metroiOnots
meptepyatopa 2 Th.
mepixabappa 1 Co.
mepixepadraia 1 Th. (Eph.
fr. Sept.)
reptheirw 1 Th.
rrepinua 1 Co.
meprepevopat 1 Co.
meépvat 2 Co.
mOavodoyia Col.
meotns Ro.
mAdaopa Ro.
ro Aeiorov (adv.) 1 Co.
meoverTEe@
m\eovertns
mAnopovn Col.
mAoutila
Toinua
moXirevpa Phil.
moXvrroixtAos Eph.
mpeoBeva
mpoatpew 2 Co.
mpoattidopat Ro.
apoaxove Col.
mpoapaprave 2 Co.
mpoyivona Ro.
mpodidape Ro.
mpoeArritw Eph.
mpoevapxopuat 2 Co.
mpoerrayyéAdw Ro, (2 Co. ?)
mpoeTotual@
mpoevayyeAcCouas Gal.
mpoex@ Ro.
mponyeouat Ro.
mpobeon0s Gal.
mporadréw Gal.
mpoxarapri{w 2 Co.
mpoxupdo Gal.
mpoheyo
mporacye 1 Th.
mporrarap Ro. ?
mpocavarAnpdw 2 Co.
mpocavariOnus Gal.
mpocedpevo (cf. mapedp.) 1
mpoondde Col.
mpoxaprépnots Eph.
mpookorn 2 Co.
mpoorn(pt) Wes Ro.
mpocopeiAw Philem.
mpooratis Ro.
mpoogurns Phil.
mpwreva Col.
ntnva (ta) 1 Co.
mtaxevw 2 Co.
muktevo 1 Co.
caiverOa 1 Th.?
capyavn 2 Co.
carav (not -vas) 2 Co.?
oeBafoua Ro.
onperow 2 Th.
okdnporns Ro.
oxodroy 2 Co.
oxvBador Phil.
arovdaios 2 Co. (2 T.?)
orevoxwpéw 2 Co.
orepeopa Col.
ovyyvopn 1 Co.
ovykabi{w Eph. (LE.?)
ovyxaunte Ro. fr. Sept.
ovyxarabects 2 Co.
au(ntntins 1 Co.
avtvyos Phil.
ovdaywyew Col.
avpBovros Ro. fr. Sept.
cuppaprupéw Ro. (Rev. ?)
cuppepica 1 Co.
ovpperoxos Eph.
cvppiyntns Phil.
ovppoppito Phil.?
ocuppoppow Phil.?
ovurrapaxadew Ro.
706
oupmrapapévw Phil.?
Ouprac xe
cupréumw 2 Co.
oupmonditns Eph.
ovppnur Ro.
atppopov, 74, 1 Co.?
ovppvrerns 1 Th.
oupputos Ro.
cuppavnats 2 Co.
aippavos 1 Co.
ovpwuyxos Phil.
cuvayevifona Ro.
ovvabdew Phil.
ouvarxypadr@ros
ovvavapiyvupe
cuvavaravopa Ro.?
ovvarroateAdw 2 Co.
cuvapporoyeo Eph.
ovvdoEa~w Ro.
ouveyeipa
curvndopa Ro.
ovvnAkoTns Gal.
ovvOarTo
cuvoixodopew Eph.
cuvrépvw Ro. fr. Sept.
ovvrpiupa Ro. fr. Sept.
cuvuTrokpivopat Gal.
cuvuTroupyew 2 Co.
auvadive Ro.
ovoowpos Eph.
ovotatixos 2 Co.
ovotevatw Ro.
ovoto.yew Gal.
OvoTpaTLaTHsS
oxnpa
coparikas Col.
taypa 1 Co.
Taxa
tivo 2 Th.
ToApnporepov or -répws Ro.
tpaxndov trorOéva Ro.
tpodpos 1 Th.
tumixas 1 Co. ?
ei TUyot, TUXOP, 1 Co.
viobecia
dpvos
dmavdpos Ro.
dmepaipo
imépaxpos 1 Co.
imepavéave 2 Th.
imepBaivo 1 Th.
irepBaddovtas 2 Co.
*arepBadro
tmepBorn
imepeyo 2 Co. .
trepexerva 2 Co.
Umepexrreptoaov
imepexreptocas 1 Th.?
Umepexteivo 2 Co.
trepevrvyyave Ro.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
imepXiav 2 Co.
tmepuixdw Ro.
bmeprepiooedo
trepuyow Phil.
imepppovew Ro.
trodixos Ro.
trodepa Ro. ?
trodeirw Ro.
tromatw 1 Co.?
dypopua
davépwors
pedopevas 2 Co. :
pOoyyos 1 Co. (Ro. fr. Sept.)
pbovéew Gal. :
@iirmnovos Phil.
didovercos 1 Co.
drocogia Col.
giArcoropyos Ro.
doripeopat
gpevararaw Gal.
dpnyv 1 Co.
dporvnpa Ro.
dvpapa
gvotw
gvoiwots 2 Co.
potiopos 2 Co.
xetpoypador Col.
xoikos 1 Co.
xpnpariopos Ro.
xpos Ro.
xpnotevopna 1 Co.
xpnotodoyia Ro.
WevdaderAgos
WevdardaToAos 2 Co.
Wetopa Ro.
Yidupicpos 2 Co.
Wibupiotns Ro.
Yopivo
aorepet 1 Co.
Ro. 113 (13 fr. Sept., 6 2)
1 Co. 110 (2 fr. Sept., 12 ?)
2 Co. 99 (4 fr. Sept., 4 ?)
Gal. 34 (1 fr. Sept., 1?)
Eph. 48 (1 fr. Sept.)
Phil. 41 (4 ?)
Col. 38
1 Thess. 23 ( 5?)
2 Thess. 11 (2 ?)
Philem. 5.
Common to two or more Epis-
tles 110.
Tora. 627 (21 fr. Sept., 34 ?)
Bb. To THE PASTORAL
EPISTLES,
N. B. Words peculiar to some
single Epistle of the three are
so designated.
dyaboepyew 1 T.
a&vveia 1 T.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
dywyn 2 T.
adndorns 1 T.
adiapbopia Tit.? (cf. apbo-
pia
dOréo 2 T.
aidws 1 T. (Heb. ?)
aipertxos Tit.
aioxpoxepdns
aixyakotevo 2 T.? (Eph.
fr. Sept.)
axaipws 2 T.
dxatayvacres Tit.
axpatns 2 T.
dros 1 T.
apayos
auoBn 1 T.
dvatomupew 2 T.
avadvows 2 T.
avarnpw 2 T.
avarpero
avayuxo 2 T.
avdparodtatns 1 T.
avdpodpovos 1 T.
avegixaxos 2 T.
averraicxuvtos 2 T.
averiAnnros 1 T.
avnpepos 2 T.
avoo.os
avridtatiOnus 2 Te
avrideots 1 T.
4vridutpov 1'T.
drraidevtos 2 FT.
arépavros 1 T.
amoBAnros 1 T.
amodexros 1 T.
drodox7 1 T.
drobncavpifo 1 'T.
drotperw 2 T.
ampoottos 1 T.
dptuos 2 T.
domovdos 2 T. (Ro. ?)
doToxéw
avdevrew 1 T.
avroxaraxpitos Tit.
apOopia Tit.? (cf. dditapo-
pia)
apiwrayabos 2 T.
awWevdns Tit.
Babes 1 T.
Bao.reds tav aldvew 1 T.
BdedvKros Tit.
BeAtiov 2 T.
BdaBepos 1 T.
yayypawa 2 T.
yeveadoyia
yons 2 T.
(ra) iepa ypdupara 2 T.
ypawdns 1 T.
yupvacia 1 T.
yevatxdaptov 2 T.
707
deriia 2 T.
diaBeBacopat
SiaBodos (as adj.)
duayo
d:araparpiBn 1 T.? (cf. rapa-
Scar piBn)
Starpopy 1 T.
Stdaxrixds
dAoyos 1 T.
Scaxrns 1 T.
eykparns Tit.
éSpaiwpa 1 T.
éxyova (ra) 1 T.
&xdnros 2 T.
éx(ntnois 1 T.?
éxdexrol ayyeAoe 1 T.
exotpéepa Tit.
€\arrov (adv.) 1 T.
edeypos 2 T.?
7) pakapia éAmis Tit.
evdvve intrans. 2 T.
évreviis 1 T.
évrpepo 1 T.
eravopbwots 2 T.
emapkew 1 T.
émtdtopbow Tit.
é€riopxos 1 T.
exuAnoow 1 T.
emuoropuitw Tit.
émicwpevo 2 T.
érepodidacKkaréw 1 a6
evpetadoros 1 T.
evoeBas
jpepos 1 T.
Gedrvevoros 2 T.
OecooeBea 1 T.
ieporpenns Tit.
*Iovdaikos ‘Tit.
kaAodidackados Tit.
katahéyw 1 T.
katraoTnpa ‘Tit.
kataoroAn 1 T.
kataotpnuidw 1 T.
katraotpopn 2 T. (2 Pet.?)
katapbeipw 2 T. (2 Pet.?)
katnyopia (Lk. and Jn. ?)
kavotnpiate ? } iT.
kauTnpiata ?
kevopovia
KvnOw 2 T.
xowovtxos 1 T.
koopuos 1 T.
Koopios 1 T.?
Aoyopayéw 2 T.
Aoyopuaxia 1 T.
Aoyos byins Tit.
pappn
paraodoyia 1 T.
paraoddyos Tit. [Mk.?)
pederdw1 T. (Acts fr. Sept.,
pepBpava 2 T.
perddn(p) Yes 1 Te
pnderore 2 T.
pntpadg@as? } iT.
pnTpod@as? .
pntpomons 1 T.
povow 1 T.
veoputos 1 T.
veorepixos 2 T.
vnpadeos
Vopipas
vooéw 1 T.
Eevodoxew 1 T.
oikodeororew 1 T.
oikodopia 1 T.?
oikoupyos ? } Tit.
oikoupos ?
7) kaX7) Gpodoyia 1 T.
dpodoyoupevas 1 T.
opyidos Tit.
OpOoropew 2 T.
mapadiarpiBn 1 T.? (cf. dca-
maparpiBn)
mapaOnkn 2 T. (1 T.?)
mapaxataOnkn 2 T. (1 T.?)
mapouvos
matpad@as ? } iT
Tatpod@as ? f
mepuictacda (“ to avoid ”)
meptovovos Tit.
mepireipo 1 T.
mepippovew Tit.
motos 6 doyos (cf. Rev. xxi.
5 ete.)
motow 2 T.
mreypa 1 T.
wAnKTNS
mopiopyos 1 T.
mpaypareia 2 T.
mpaimdbea (-Oia) 1 T.?
mpeoBores Tit.
mporyovos
mpoxptya 1 T.
mpooKAnars ? } iT
mpookArots ? .
mpopntns (of a poet) Tit.
pynras 1 T.
Geuvorns
oxeracpa 1 T.
orehavda 2 T. (Heb. fr.
Sept.)
ordpaxos 1 T.
orparodoyew 2 T.
oruvynros Tit.
ovykaxorabew 2 T.
acalw eis tiv Bactdetiav rh.
Dear
catnptos (as adj.) Tit.
oodpovita Tit.
codpoucuds 2 T.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
cadpovas Tit.
cadpev
TEKVOYOVE®
rexvoyovia 1 T.
texvorpopew 1 T.
Tupow
tytaive metaph. (77 ayarn,
mioret, vmopovp, etc.)
bdpororéw 1 'T.
tmeprAcovatw 1 T.
imovoa 1 T.
trorimwas
arovns ?
oad }2 T. (cf. IIL 1)
prrayabos Tit.
diravdpos Tit.
rrapyvpia 1 T.
giravtos 2 T.
purndovos 2 T.
prrcbeos 2 T.
gudrdrexvos Tit.
pdAvapos 1 T.
pevarrarns Tit.
gdpovri¢e Tit.
xarkevs 2 T.
xapis, deos, eipnvy awd @.
(as a salutation)
xprotpos 2 T.
Wevdoroyos 1 T.
Wevdavupos 1 T.
apedtuos
1 Tim. 82 (6)
2 Tim. 53 (2?)
Tit. 33 (22)
Tota. 168 (10 ?)
e. BoTtH TO THE PASTORAL
AND THE OTHER PAULINE
EPISTLES.
ad.ad eurros
> ,
aGavacia
aio xpos
° ,
aixpadorevw?
adXalov
> U
aioaw
avaxaivoots
avéykAnTos
arroTopws
dpoevoxoimns
darovdos ?
doropyos
aTipia
avurapKeut
apGapoia
> ’
apopnn
,
yunotos
exxabaipeo
EVOLKE®
efarrara@?
InDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
émitayn
emupavera
epts
eUxpnoTos
qos?
iepos (Mk. ?)
Kepdos
Aourpov
pveia
poppocis
vavaye@
vovecia
ddvvn
oiketos
oikew
dd\eOpos
doTpaxwwos
mAdoow
mpoioTne
mpoKomy
Tpovoe@
oenvos
onevde
otpareia?
ov(ao
oupBacred@
THPEVO
bBpiorns
imepoxn
trorayy
brroriOnpe
bYnrodpovew ¢
xpnororns
Tora. 58 (6 ?)
7. To the Epistle to the
Hebrews.
da yeveahoynros
dyorns (2 Co. ?)
ayvonpa
abernots
aéAnows
atyetos
aiparexyvole
aiveots
aia Ontnproy
airtos (6)
axataAvutTos
akhuwns
axpoOinow
dAvoreAns
aueraberos
aunrop
avaxawila
avadoyifouas
avapiOunros
avacravpé@
avrayovitouu
avrixabiornps
arapaBaros
dratwp
adravyacpa
aretpos
aToBAEera@
déoronos of Christ
dppos
adavns
adpavic pos
apopovdw
adopaw
BonOos fr. Sept.
Bois ? fr. Sept.
Boravn
yeveahoyew
yeapyeo
yvoos
Sdpadts
dexarn
dexatow
déos ?
deppa
Snpuoupyos
dyrov
dudraypa ?
diahopartepos
Suqverns
Sticvéopac
di0pbacrs
Soxtpacia ?
ducepunvevtos
eavTrep
(7) €B8opn
eyyvos
eyxavil@
ei pny ?
exBaive ?
éxdox7
exhavOava
€xTpopos ?
Edeyxos (2 Tim. 7)
eumrarypos
evuBpiva
e€&us
emevoayayn
emiAelro
emxorrew (1 Pet. ?)
€7r0s
evapecrew
evapeoTos
evdurns fr. Sept.
evAaSeva
evAaBéopa (Acts?)
evTepioraros
evTro.ia
7 pny? (cf. ef pyr)
bearpiCo
deAnous
Oevedov karaBadAopat
708
beparrav
OvedXa
OupaTnptoy
iepwotvn
ixernptos
kadaporns
kairot (Lk. ?)
Kakovxe@
KapTepew
kataywviCoua
katadnXos
KaTavanioKke
karacKua(@
kaTaoKoTros
xarato&evw? fr. Sept.
kavots
xepanis fr. Sept.
conn fr. Sept.
KpLTLKOS
k@dov fr. Sept.
AecroupytKos
AeviriKxos
Pepto pos
peoiTev@
perabeous
pereretta
petpiorrabew
poeta
pnor7
pic barrodocia
pa barroNorns
pvedos
vecdbos
vobos
vopobetéew
vobpos
Oykos
1) oikoupervn 4 eANovTA
dAvywpéw fr. Sept.
ddobpeva, ddeOpedvwo
OpowoTns
6 dvedtopds Tod Xprcrov
épkapocia
mavnyups
mapadevyparitw (Mt. ?)
mapartikpaive
naparixpacpos fr. Sept.
TaparinTe
tmaparAnaios
Tapappew
mapinnt (Lk. ?)
mapotxew (Lk. ?)
Teipa
TIyyvupe
ToAUpEp@S
ToAvTpoTas
mpito (mpiw)
mpoBrémrw
mpoOpopos
mpooayopev@
InpDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
mpocoxbitw fr. Sept.
mpooparos
mpoaxvots
MpwroroKa
parti (Mk.? Rev. ?)
oaSBaticpos
6 oxoros?
oTdpLvos
ovyKaKkovxyew
ouptrabew
ovvarodupe
avvdew
ouveTpmaptupew
TeAELwTns
Tiwpia
‘TOM@TEPOS
Tpayos
Tpaxnrile
Tplunvos
tpoxia fr. Sept.
TuptraviC@
imeiko
tmoaroAn
avrala
oBepos
Xapakrip
XepouBip, -Betv
Tora 169 (12 fr. Sept., 11 2)
8. To James.
a
aye
> ,
advakpttos
akatrdoraros
dxaracyxeros ?
c Ld
dAvKos
ap.ae
dvédeos ?
>. ,
avepiCo
dvitews ?
amreipagros
ees
dames
amroKve@
drockiaopa
amroredéw (Lk. ?*
> ,
avyew?
> ,
dducrepew?
Bo
,
Bpve
yeres
dayorwdys
diyvuxos
EIKQ
€uuros
> ,
evadwos
ef€\Ko
€otxa (see EIKQ)
emiAnopovn
eTLOTHLOV
> ,
€mtTNOELOS
InpDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
6 evOivev
evmetOns
evmperea
epnuepos
Gavarnpopos
OpnoKos
ids (Ro. fr. Sept.)
raxorrabeva
katnpea
KaTiow
karoukil@?
KEv@s
papaive
peyadavxew?
petayo
peratpere ?
vowoberns
oAoAVC@
spoiwars fr. Sept.
dyrios
mapa\\ayn
aiKpos
troia?
Toinow
mo\voTrAayXVvos
mpoowmodn (m)aTréw
rrpds(or-é)ipos
pirile
pumapia
pumapes (Rev. ?)
onre
onTtoBpetos
Tahaitwpew
tadamapia (Ro. fr. Sept.)
Taxvs
Tpomn
Tpoxos
tpupaw
vAn
gudia
proyife
dppiccw
xawayayéo
xe)
xpuoodaxtvhuos
Tora 73 (1 fr. Sept., 9 ?)
9. To Peter.
WN. B. Words peculiar to one
Epistle or the other are so
marked by the numeral which
follows them; words unmarked
are common to both.
ayaboroiia 1
ayaGorrods 1
adehporns 1
Gdixos 1
adoros 1
abecpos 2
> ~
aicxpokepdas 1
axararacrtos ?
axatdravoros?
G\dorpi(o)erioxomos 1
Maors 2
apuabns 2
Gpapavtivos 1
dudpavtos 1
Guapnros 2 (Phil. ?)
> ,
avayevvaw 1
avayxaoTa@s 1
> ,
avaf@vvupse 1
dvaxvots 1
avexdaAntos 1
avtidowWopew 1
droyivopat 1
> ,
amoGeots
> ,
atroven@ 1
dropevyw 2
adrpocwmoAn(s)rres 1
dpyew 2
dpryevinros 1
apxtroiuny 1
dotnpixtos 2
avxpnpos 2
Bude 1
Bréupa 2
BopBopos 2
Bpadutns 2
yuvatketos 1
diavya¢w 2
dvavoentos 2
éykatouxew 2
eyxouBoopat 1
éxacrote 2
exmahut 2
éxrevys 1 (Lk. 24
éxrevas 1 (Lk. ?)
eeyéis 2
€umavypovn 2
eumAokn 1
evdvors 1
evtpupaw 2
eEayyéAdw 1 (Mk. ? ?)
eEaxo\ovbew 2
2e! 9
e&€papya 2
e€epavvda ?
> , 1
e&epevvdw ?
> ,
emayyeApa 2
enepotnua 1
> U
exixadvppa 1
emriNourros 1
emidvots 2
emipaprupew 1
érontevo 1
emontns 2
teparevpa 1
icotysos 2
709
xaxorrotos 1 (Jn. ?)
karaxhit@ 2
kavodw 2
kdéos 1
kparatos 1
kriotns 1
KtAuopa ? } 2
kuAcopds ?
AnOn 2
peyaompenns 2
piacpa 2
puacpos 2
pojun 2
pvetrato 2
porowy 1 fr. Sept.
p@pos 2
olvodAvyia 1
oAtyws ? 2
OpixAn ? 2
opdppev 1
émAi¢w 1
mapavopia 2
mapadpovia 2
mapecayw 2
mapeopepw 2
matpotrapadoros 2
mepiOeats 1
mAaorTos 2
motos 1
mpobupws 1
mpopaptvpopmas 1
mronows 1
portndov 2
pvros 1
ceipa ?
oewpos ? 2
otpos ?
obevow 4
stopa 1
ornprypos 2
otpeBrcw 2
ovpmabys 1
oupmpeoButepos 1
auvek\exros 1
Guvoikew 1
rare.voppav 1?
Taptapow 2
Taxwos 2
Tedeiws 1
Teppow 2
THKw 2
towabe 2
ToAuntys 2
iroypappos 1
imotdytov 2 (Mt. fr. Sept.)
tmoduumdvo 1
ds 2
prradergos 1
pirodppev 1?
daodhopos 2
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
Wevdodidacxaros 2
@pvopa 1
1 Epistle 63 (1 fr. Sept., 2?)
2 Epistle 57 (5 ?)
Common to Both 1
Tora. 121.
10. To Jude.
els mavras Tovs ai@vas
Tp TavTos Tov aidvos
amod.opiCo
anrTaoros
yoyyvorns
detypa
exropvev@
evurate (Lk. fr. Sept.)
efeheyxa ?
erraywviCopas
erappica
pepyipotpos
Omiaw capkéds
maperodvw
mAavntTns
mpdcana Oavpato
omdds
tméxo
pOworwpwos
uotikas
Torat 20 (1 ?)
11. To the Apocalypse.
76 A kai ro Q
*ABaddav
aixnakwoia (Eph. fr. Sept.)
dxadaprns ?
dxpalo
akparos fr. Sept.
G@\Andovia
ada (see 7d A kal rd Q)
apebvortos
6 apnv
Gj.@j.ov i
ava eis €xacros
*ATroA ov
Gpxos OY dpxtos
“Appayedar ete.
awOos
BadXew oravdarov évamor
Bacauopos
Batpaxos
Bnpvddos
Bi BXapidiov
BBALSdprop ?
Borpus
Bvoowos
To Saxpvov ?
TO dexaroy as subst.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
diadnpa
dcavyns ?
Siahavns?
ditAd@
Siopupias ?
Opaxev
dwd€xaros
eyxpio
ciNicow ?
éheavrivos
‘EAAnuixds (Lk. ?)
€"ew
euper@ ?
evddpnats (€vdapnors)
€£axdotot
"Eqecivos ?
(revo?
Evdov tis fons fr. Sept.,
Cons mnyat idarwv? fr.
Sept., (7d) ddop ris)
fans fr. Sept.
Ceards
TuL@ptov (Hiwpor)
6 i
6 Oavaros 6 Sedtepos
Gaipa (2 Co. ?)
Ouipa (péya) Oavpdgey
Gevwdns
Oeoddyos ?
Ovivos
taoms
immuxds
(pes
kardbepa F
xatavabepa ? | fr Sept.
xaraoppayife
KaTiyyep ?
Kavpa
xepautxds fr. Sept.
KEpavvupe
xiOapwdds
ku (v)dp@pov
kA€upa
KoANovptov (KoAAUptov)
KptOn
KpuvoTadXil@
kpvoTad\os
KukAev@ ?
KukAdGev
jcypcau Syston
AevkoBicowov?
AtBavards
Nivov ? (Mt. fr. Sept.)
Aurrapos
patos?
pacbds ? }
pdppapos
pac(o)dopat
pecoupaynpa
péT@rov
unpos
povotkds
puKdopat
pudwos ?
vedpos fr. Sept.
NuxoAaitns
dAvvOos
Opidos ?
émov exet (Hebr. OW WW)
om@pa
dpacts (Lk. fr. Sept.)
Spynua
dpveov
7) ovai
ovai w. acc. of pers. ?
ovpa
710
mapdants
medekil@
TéeLTTOS
meptp(p)atva ?
(meraopat) méeTopas
mAnTo@
mddvve (Lk. ?)
mroonpns
mévos (Col. ?)
ToTapopopntros
Tpwivos etc.
6 mparos x. 6 €axaTos
Tupiwos
muppos
pedn (peda)
putraive ?
pumapevopat?
pumdw ?
cadmorTns
oamdetpos
oadpdwos ?
odpd.ov ?
capdiovvé ?
capddvvé ? }
oepidades
onptkds (orperds)
aidnpos
oxoré (Eph. ?)
opapaydwwos
opdpaydos
Spupvaios ?
OTpnVvidw
oTpivos
o@para slaves
TaXavtiatos
Teooapakovradvo ?
Tegoapakovtaréecaapes ?
TeTpayavos
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
TULLOTAS
TOfov
Tomactov
Tpixiwos
taxivOwos
bdakwwOos
tdadwos
vahos
appakevs?
appaxov?
cappakos
gahy
xarala
xa\keos
xadknoav
xadkoniBavoy
xAcapés
xoimé
xpucdAOos
Xpvcompacos
xpvadw
TO Q (see 7d A kal rd Q)
Tota 156 (7 fr. Sept., 33 ?}
12. To the Apocalypse and
the Fourth Gospel.
Bpovry (cf. Mk. iii. 17)
d€xatos
‘EBpaiott
EKKEVTE@
Kuk\ev@ ?
dys
toppupous
oKnvow
going
Tora 9 (1 ?)
V.
FORMS OF VERBS.
The List which follows is not intended to be a mere museum of grammatical curiosities on the one hand, or a catalogue of all the
verbal forms occurring in the Greek Testament on the other ; butit is a collection of those forms (or their representatives) which may
possibly occasion a beginner some perplexity. The practical end, accordingly, for which the list has been prepared has prescribed @
generous liberty as respects admission to it. Yet the following classes of forms have been for the most part excluded: forms which arg
traceable by means of the cross references given in the body of the Lexicon, or which hold so isolated a position in its alphabet that even
a tyro can hardly miss them; forms easily recognizable as compounded, in case the simple form has been noted; forms readily explains
able by the analogy of some form which is given,
Ordinarily it has been deemed sufficient to give the representative form of a tense, viz., the First Person (or in the case of the Imperay
tive the Second Person) Singular, the Nominative Singular Masculine of a Participle, etc.; but when some other form seemed likely to
prove more embarrassing, or was the only one found in the New Testament, it has often been the form selected.
The word “‘ of”’ in the descriptions introduces not necessarily the stem from which a given form comes, but the entry in the Lexicon
under which the form will be found. The epithet “ Alex.”, it is hardly necessary to add, has been employed only for convenience and in
its technical sense.
éydyere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ayo.
dydyy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ayo.
dyvicOnr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of dyrigw.
alcSwvrat, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. of aicdavopas.
airelrw, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of airéw.
axjkoa, 2 pf. act. of dxove.
GAAayfjoopat, 2 fut. pass. of ad\Adcoo.
G@Adéat, 1 aor. act. inf. of add\Aacow.
dAAdge, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of dAAagow.
dpapricy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of duaprdve.
auncdvrwy, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. plur. of dude.
avéBa and dva nor, 2 aor. act. impv. of dvaBaive.
avaBeBnka, pf. act. of dvaBaivo.
dvayayeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvdya.
dvayvovs, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of avaywacke.
dvayvavor, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvaywackw.
dyayveoby, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dvaywookw.
dvakexvAurrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvakuAiw.
avadot, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of avadicxe.
dvadwbfre, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of dvadioxe.
dvapvyicow, fut. act. of dvapipynoko.
avarratjoopat, fut. mid. of dvarave (cf. also rave, init.).
dvamrecat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of avarinra.
avoareoe, dvdmecov, 2 and 1 aor. act. impv. of dvaminra.
dvaora and dvdernés, 2 aor. act. impv. of aviornpe.
dvareOpappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dvarpeda.
avareihy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dvaréAXo.
dvaréradkev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvaréddo.
avapavavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of avadaiva.
dvadavevres, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. of dvadpaive.
dvaxQévres, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of dvaye.
dvapavres, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masce. of avarre.
dvéyvere, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of dvaywooke.
GveOGAere, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of dvabdAAw.
dveMdunv, 2 aor. mid. of avariOnus.
dvé8n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of avinut.
dvebpéparo, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of dvarpeda.
dveihero (-aro, Alex.), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers, sing. of dvaipéa.
aveihov (-ate, -av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. of dvapéw.
dvexopnv, impf. mid. of dvéxa.
avehet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvatpéw.
aveheiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvatpée.
dvéhwor, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvatpéw.
dvevéykat, -kas, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of dvapépa.
dveveyketv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvapépo.
avévres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of dvinus.
dvéfopat, fut. mid. of aveyo.
avérerov (-cav, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 8 pers. plur. of dvatinta.
dvéoeoa, 1 aor. act. of dvaceta.
avertpadnpev, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of dvaorpépe.
dverxopny, 2 aor. mid. of dvéxa.
avéretka, 1 aor. act. of dvatéAAo.
averpady, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvarpéeda.
dvedpov (-av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dveupioxes
dvéwya, 2 pf. act. of dvoiye.
dvewypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of dvoiye.
dvewydra, 2 pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. mase. of dvotye.
dvéwta, 1 aor. act. of dvoiye.
dvewx Ofjvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dvoiye.
avhyayov, 2 aor. act. of avdyw.
avjyyeada, 1 aor. act. of avayyédAo.
avnyyéAny, 2 aor. pass. of dvayyéAdo.
avqveyxev, 1 or 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvapépa.
GvypeOny, 1 aor. pass. of dvatpéw.
avqOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvdrw.
a&vqxOnv, 1 aor. pass. of avaya.
avOcterat, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of avréya.
av0éornke, pf. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of avOiorns.
évOleravrat, pres. mid. 3 pers. plur. of avOiornus.
dvOloraro, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of avOiorns
forms OF VERBS.
dvévres, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of dvinus.
dvovyfoerat, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvoiya.
dyovyaotv, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvotye.
évoigat, 1 aor. act. inf. of dvotye.
dvolfy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dvotya.
dvortov, 1 aor. act. impv. of dvoiyw.
évotow, fut. act. of dvapépa.
dvo.xOAoerat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvolye.
éyoux Gacy, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvotya.
dvramoSotvat, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvramodidwpu.
avraroSéce, fut. act. of dvrarodidwpe.
aytéotny, 2 aor. act. of avOiornut.
avtirravat, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvOiornm.
dvtioryte, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of dvOiornps.
av&, 2 aor. act. subj. of dvinue.
drahAdfy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dra\Adoow.
émap0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dzaipa.
drrapyyncdc8w, 1 aor. mid. impv. 3 pers. sing. of drapvéopat.
crapvioy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of amapvéopat.
Gratdrw, pres. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of drardw.
drarnScioa, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of dmarde.
GréBnoay, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of droBaive.
GréSeEev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dmodeixvups.
dréSero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of amodidope.
GreS(Socayv, drediSouv, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of drodiéaut.
iméSoto, -Socbe, etc., 2 aor. mid. of arodidapt.
daréSwxev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of amodidapmt.
dréBavev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of drobyjcke.
Garevrayea, 1 aor. mid. 1 pers. plur. of dzeizov.
drretxov, impf. act. of dwéxa.
arekatertaOny, 1 aor. pass. of droxadiornus
dmrekatéotyy, 2 aor. act. of dmroxabiornps.
drexp(8nv, 1 aor. pass. of droxpiva.
darextavOny, 1 aor. pass. of droxreiva.
GreknriGeacay, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of drépyouee
GarehOv, 2 aor. act. ptep. of dmépxopat.
Gareveyketv, 2 aor. act. inf. of aropépa.
Garevex Ofvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of drodépa.
Garerrvlyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dromviyw.
Grérvigav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dromviyo.
Grectddny, 2 aor. pass. of drocréAAo.
dréorahka, pf. act. of drooréAdo.
drecrodpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of drooréAAo.
aréoreika, 1 aor. act. of drooreAdo.
Gxréorn (yoav), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of aqi-
OTH [LA-
Grextpdbycayv, 2 aor. pass. 8 pers. plur. of dwoarpéda.
dmetdgfaro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of drordoow.
amyjecav, impf. 3 pers. plur. of dete.
drjAacev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dmeAatvor
arnynkétes, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of drahyéw.
dirij\ Gov (-Say, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. of dmépyouat.
darm\AGx Bar, pf. pass. inf. of drakAdooo.
arnpyyrduny, 1 aor. of drapvéopa.
arycTracdéuny, 1 aor. of dracmdtopat.
GroBdvres, 2 aor. act. ptep. of droBaive.
droBicerat, fut. 3 pers. sing. of droBalve.
GrodeSerypévov, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of drodelkvups.
712
Forms or VERBS.
droSeikvivra (-Seryviovra), pres. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc.
of amodeixvupe.
Grodetgat, 1 aor. act. inf. of dmodetevups.
GrrobiSdvar, -86Tw, pres. act. inf. and impv. (8 pers. sing.)
of drodidapt.
daroSiSobv, pres. act. ptep. neut. of drodisopm.
drroSo0jvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of drodidpe.
daroot, -86, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of daodidapu-
dardSos, -Sore, 2 aor. act. impv. of drodidape.
dmoSobvat, -Sovs, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of dwodidopme.
daroSain, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of drodidwps.
aroavetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of droOvncKe.
drokaliord, -raver, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of droxabiorns
drokatnAAdyynte, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of dzoxarah-
Adoow.
drroxpOels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of dzoxpive.
drroxtalva, -KTelva, -KTEVVM, -KTEVO, PIES. ; SCC amoKTEiv@.
aroxtavels, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of dokreiva.
daroktévvuvtes, pres. ptep. nom. plur. masce. of droxreive.
Groxteve, fut. act. of doxreiva.
darohécan, -héow, 1 aor. act. inf. and subj. of dmodAupe
arokéow, fut. act. of amodAAvpt.
drodotpat, fut. mid. of darohAupe.
drrod, fut. act. of dwdAupu.
dréhwda, 2 pf. act. of arddAvme.
Garo(p)phpavras, 1 aor. act. ptep. ace. plur. mase. of
arro(p) pinta.
darooTahs, 2 aor. pass. subj. of drocreA\o.
drooret\as, 1 aor. act. ptep. of drocré\Ao.
Grocty, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dpiornpt
éroorioonat, fut. mid. of ddiornpu.
dnéaryte (-cTiTw), 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (3 pers.
sing.) of apiornue.
droctpadys, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of amoarpepo
dréotpepov, 1 aor. act. impv. of droarpédw.
drotragdpevos, 1 aor. mid. ptcp. of arordcow
drrov, pres. mid. impv. of dara.
aarédeoa, 1 aor. act. of dmdéd\Aupe.
darwdspnv, 2 aor. mid. of dmrodAAupu.
darwordpevos, 1 aor. mid. ptcp. of dtwbéw
dpa, 1 aor. act. inf. of atpe.
dpas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of atpe.
dpéoet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of dpecke.
dpéoy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dpéoxe.
dpy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of atpe.
py (-Oacww), 1 aor. pass. subj. 8 pers. sing. (plur.) of
apo. 3
dpOhcerar, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of atpa.
apOnt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of atpa.
dpkéoy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of doxéw.
dpov, 1 aor. act. impv. of aipw.
dprayévra, 2 aor. pass. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of épwrafe.
ép& (-otcww), fut. act. 1 pers. sing. (3 pers. plur.) of aipe
avéy0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of avgape.
ddéOnv, 1 aor. pass. of adinu.
adctrev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of adaipéa
ddeivar, 2 aor. act. inf. of dbinu.
ddeis, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of (dhew) dhinm
Forms or VERBS.
dels, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ddinus.
adedet, fut. act. 8 pers. sing. of datpéw.
ddedetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dparpéw.
dbédy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ddarpéw.
des, 2 aor. act. impv. of apinut.
ddéwvrar, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dpinus.
aby, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dinus.
apijxa, 1 aor. act. of dpinut.
dblepev, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of dpinus.
dblevrat, -ovrat, pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ddinus.
dplkero, 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. of ddixvéopat.
aplopev, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of (ddiw) apinus.
apiotoww, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of (dg@idw) adding.
adtoraco, pres. mid. impv. of dpiornu.. *
a&dloraro, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of apiornus
dopret, -odov, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. and plur. af ddo-
piga.
Gbaopev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of ddinus
dpwporwpevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of dpoporde.
&xOfjvor, 1 aor. pass. inf. of &yo.
dxOjceoGe, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of dyes
dias, 1 aor. act. ptep. of dara.
diy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of drre.
Badd, fut. act. of Barro.
Bod, -Ay, (-Ae), 2 aor. act. subj. (impv.) of Bare.
BapeloOw, pres. impv. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Bape
Bay, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Barre.
BeBappevov, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of Barra.
BeBAnxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of Bare.
BeBAnpevos, pf. pass. ptcep. of Budrw.
BeBAynrar, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of BaAAes
BAnGels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of Badr.
BAROnT, 1 aor. pass. impv. of BddrAw
yopncdrocay, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. plur. af yapdes.
yeyevnpat, pf. pass. of yivopat
yeyevvnpar, pf. pass. of yerrdo.
yéyovav (-vas), 2 pf. act. 3 pers. plur. (ptep.) of yivopas.
yeysver, pipf. act. 3 pers. sing. (without augm.) of yivopas.
yevdyevos, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. (Tat. ed. %) of -yivopas.
yevér8w, 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ylvopat.
yevnOrjrw, 1 aor. pass. impv. 8 pers. sing. of yivouas
yévqote, 2 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of yivopas
yévovrat, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of yivopsm
Yinas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of yanéw.
yipus, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of yauéw.
yoi, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ywooKe
yous, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ywadcke.
v4, yvo, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 3 pers. sing. of yuwdore.
yvab., 2 aor. act. impv. of ywooKw.
yopicw, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of ywopife.
yvoo8y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of yewdone.
yoorPrycera, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ywoone
yworoun, fut. of ywookw.
yrerte, 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ywobowe.
713
Forms oF VERB®
Sapfropar, 2 fut. pass. of 8épe.
SSexrar, pf. 3 pers. sing. of déyopat.
SeSexas, pf. act. ptcp. of déa.
SéSepar, pf. pass. of déa.
SeSiwypévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of didko.
Sé5ora1, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of diSaps.
SeSaxecav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of didops
Séq, pres. subj. of impers. dei.
S<Ofjvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of déo.
Selpavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of 8épw.
S€Ear, 1 aor. impv. of d¢youa.
SeEjrow (-wvrat), 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of 8éxopam
Sioa, 1 aor. act. inf. of déa.
Sop, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Bée.
SiaBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of daBaivo.
StaBAvat, 2 aor. act. inf. of diaBaiva.
SidSes, 2 aor. act. impv. of dadidwpe.
Staxabdpar, 1 aor. act. inf. of dcaxabaipa.
StadAAdyyO1, 2 aor. pass. impv. of d:adAdoo.
Stapeivy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of duapéve.
Stapepevnkdres, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of Scapéven
Stapévers, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of Siapeva.
Stapeveis, fut. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of Scapévw.
SiavolxOynrt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of dcavolye.
Stap(p)éas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of Scapphyvups
Stacrapévres, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of d&e
OTFELPWe
StacracOy, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of d:aomde.
Stacrdoys, 2 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of diornus
Stacrpéar, 3 aor. act. inf. of dsactpedo.
Starayels, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of duardocw.
StaraxOévra, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. neut. of duardooe
Stareraypévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of duaracco.
Stareraxévar, pf. act. inf. of d:araco.
SiSdact, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of diSape
SeBycav, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of diaBaive
Suetdov, 2 aor. act. of diarpéw.
Suevéyey, 1 or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dapépe.
Suep(p)fyvuro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of deappyyvupe.
Suép(p)néev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of duappyyvupe.
Step(p)hocero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of duappryvupe
Sverdbyoay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of d:acadéw.
Steomdépyoav, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dcacmetpa.
Sveorrdc Qa, pf. pass. inf. of dacmdo.
Sterreddyyy, 1 aor. mid. of dcacréAro.
Siéorn, 2 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of duiornpe.
Steotpappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dcacrpéde.
Stéraga, 1 aor. act. of diatdcow.
SuehOdipny, 2 aor. pass. of diabdcipo.
SuehOappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of duapGeipw.
Sinxdvovy, impf. act. of draxovew.
Sujvoryev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. Of diavotya.
Bujvortev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of diavotyw.
SinvolxOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of d:avoéyam
Stopvyfvat, 2 aor. pass. inf. of dsopiocw.
StopuxOfvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dvoptace.
SidSeve, impf. 3 pers. sing. of dvodevo.
Siwfdrw, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of Sidra
ForMs OF VERBS.
SiéEnre, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of &dxw.
SiwxOjcovrat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of didke.
So0cicav, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. ace. sing. fem. of didaps
S007, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of didaus.
So0Avat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of didope.
Sot, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of di8ape.
86s, Sére, Sdrw, 2 aor. act. impv. of 8idwpe
Sodvat, 2 aor. act. inf. of didape
Sots, 2 aor. act. ptep. of didapu.
Sévg, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of dvvapat.
86, 5éy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of 8i8pu.
Sun, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of didape.
Sapev, SHre, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 2 pers. plur. of 88a.
Séoy (-copev), 1 aor. act. subj. 8 pers. sing. (1 pers.
plur.) of 8/dapu.
%Badov (-av, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. of BdAAo.
Bdorkave, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Backatve.
&BSeAvypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of BdeAvoow.
&BéBAnro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of BadAw.
€BA7Onv, 1 aor. pass. of Badro.
éyyuet, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of éyyifa.
éyyloat, 1 aor. act. inf. of éyyiga.
éyeyéve, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of yivopan
éye.pat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of éyeipa.
éyetpa, 1 aor. act. inf. of eyeipa.
éyelpov, pres. pass. impv. of eyeipw.
éyevfOnv, 1 aor. pass. of yivopat.
éyevvyOnv, 1 aor. pass. of yevvde.
éyepet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of éeyefpa.
éyepOels, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of éyeipa.
éyepOrjrerar, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éyelpa
éyép0yrt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of eyetpa.
eéyfyeppar, pf. pass. of éyeipa.
éynpa, 1 aor. act. of yapyéo.
éykpivat, 1 aor. act. inf. of éyxpive.
eyvoxay (i. q. eyydxacw), pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of yewadoko.
éyvoxévar, pf. act. inf. of yvooKke.
éyvov, 2 aor. act. of ywacke.
Eyvaora, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ywooKna.
€yxptoot, 1 aor. mid. impv. of éyypia.
éyxptca., 1 aor. act. inf. of eyyplo.
€yxptoov, 1 aor. act. impv. of éyxpio.
eadiotcww, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of édapi{e.
eSdero, éSeciro, éSetro, impf. 3 pers. sing. of Séoman
Se, impf. of impers. det.
Seipayv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of 8épe.
€5yc0a, 1 aor. act. of dé.
€Stwta, 1 aor. act. of didkw.
€odvotcav, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of Borcdéeo.
€Spapov, 2 aor. act. of rpexa.
€5u, ESvcev, 2 and 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of dipw.
Etnv. éffre, ELov, impf. act. of Cao.
é{yora, 1 aor. act. of (do.
€0eunv, 2 aor. mid. of rine.
€Bero (-evro), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of riOnyus.
€6yxa, 1 aor. act. of riOnut.
714
Forms OF VERBS
ov, 2 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ri@nus.
€Opeya, 1 aor. act. of rpéha.
€000n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Ove.
ela, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of édw.
elaca, 1 aor. act. of édw.
elSa, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of edo.
elQicpévov, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of ite.
eX\aro (-ero), aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of afpéw.
eAnmrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of AanBdvw.
eAndes (-as), pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of AauBdve.
elxov, impf. act. of éAxo.
eiAkwpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of éxdo.
etapev, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of etke.
eloSpapotca, 2 aor. act. ptcp. fem. of eiorpéyo.
eloeAyAvdav (-Adbacrv), pf. 3 pers. plur. of elcépyopat.
eloyje, impf. 3 pers. sing. of etoecus.
elolacw, pres. ind. 3 pers. plur. of etceupe.
eiorhxacav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of tornpe.
elxav, elxooav, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of ya.
elwv, impf. of édw.
éxaé(or &)pirev, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of kabapita.
éxaSe(or «)ploOy, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cabapite.
€xSdcerar, -Sadoerar, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of éxdidape.
éxéxpata and €xpagta, 1 aor. act. of kpato.
éxépaca, 1 aor. act. of cepavvupe.
éxépSyoa, 1 aor. act. of kepdaive.
éxxaddpare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of éxxabaipe.
éxxadpy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of éxxabaipw.
éxxexupevos, pf. pass. ptep. of exyéw.
éxxoroy, 2 fut. pass. 2 pers. sing. of éxxémra.
éxkopov, 1 aor. act. impv. of éxkéaTa.
ékAaca, 1 aor. act. of Kd.
ékAavoa, 1 aor. act. of KAaio.
&kdeAnoGe, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of ékAavOave.
éxAnOnv, 1 aor. pass. of karéw.
éxdacGe, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. plur. of xéare.
éxmAcdoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of éxmdEw.
éxpaga, 1 aor. act. of kpato.
é€xpvBn, 2 aor. pass. 8 pers. sing. of kpumre
éxodoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ékoalo.
éxtevets, fut. act. 2 pers. sing. of éxreiva.
éxtyoapyy, 1 aor. of xrdopat.
éxriorot, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of xrife.
éxtpamy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of exrpéme.
éxtparhoovrat, 2 fut. pass. 8 pers. plur. of éxrpémra.
éxbdy, pres. subj. or 2 aor. act. subj. 8 pers. sing. of éepvw
xvi, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of éxpia.
éxxéat, 1 aor. act. inf. of éxxéw.
éxxéare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ékxéw.
éxxéere, pres. (or 2 aor.) act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ékyée,
&xxuvvdpevos, Exxuvdpevos, see exyew.
&dBare (-Bere), 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of AauBdve.
&dxyoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Ado.
2raxe, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Aayxdve.
éXénoov, 1 aor. act. impv. of eAeéw.
Acioopar, fut. of Eoyoua.
&nAaxéres, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of éAavpw.
€&hArv0a, pf. of épyouat
Forms OF VERBS. °
&0aeOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of Abate.
édxtoat or €Aktoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of €Ako.
€doyaro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éAdAoyéw.
éddpevos, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of aipéew.
&dmotow, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of eAmi{e.
gpaQov, 2 aor. act. of pavOave.
tpaccGvro, épacavro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of pao(o)dopat.
éuBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of euBaive.
éuBawas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of euBdrre.
épBfva, 2 aor. act. inf. of euBaive.
pée, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of piyvups.
éuremAnopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of eumimAnue.
éurdaxels, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of eumAjoco.
éurdyo 06, 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing. of eumimaAnue.
éveSvvapodro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of évduvapdw.
évetxev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of évéxa.
évévevov, impf. act. of évveva.
évérAnoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éumiaAnpe.
éverAqoOyoay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éumimAnpe.
évérpyoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éumpnbe.
évérrvov, -cay, impf. and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of eure.
évertnKkora, pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. mase. of éviornpe.
éver Tata, -Aoav, -dros, pf. act. ptep. ace. masc. and fem.
and gen. sing. of éviorn.
évererAapnv, 1 aor. mid. of évréAXo.
évebavicav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of éudavige.
évehtonoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éuduade.
évexOels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of dépo.
évnpynka, pf. act. of evepyéw.
évkpivar, 1 aor. act. int. of éeyxpive.
évoikody, pres. act. ptcp. nom. sing. neut. of évorkéw.
évredetrat, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of évréAXo.
évréradrat, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of évTéhdo.
évrpamy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of évrpémra.
évrparqoovrat, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of évrpéma.
évuée, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ricco.
évioragtay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of vuardto.
évaknoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of évorkéw.
éEad(e)ipOAvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of eEareipa.
éEavactyoy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of eEaviorne.
éEavéoryoav, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of é€aviornue.
édpare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ¢faipa.
é€apeire, fut act. 2 pers. plur. of é€aipo.
é£ap0y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of e£aipo.
eéSero or é&éSoro, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of éxdidope.
e€ciharo or é€eiero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of é£atpéa.
é€exavOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxxalo.
ééxAway, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of éxkA\iva.
éfexoarns, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of éxkdémra.
éfeAe, 2 aor. act. impv. of efaipéo.
é€edeEw, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of éxdéyo.
e€éAnrar, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of e£aipéw.
e€eveykavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ékgépa.
éfeveyxeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of exdepw.
éévevoa, 1 aor. act. either of éxvevo or exvéw.
eEereraca, 1 aor. act. of éxmeravyupe.
e€emAdyynoav, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxmAjooo.
éférda, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of éxméo.
715
Forms OF VERBS.
e€eoraxévat, pf. act. inf. of eEliaornpe.
ééorpamrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éxorpepa.
éeraoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of é&erato.
ékerpdaryoayv, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxrpéme.
ef€xee, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of exe.
éexUOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxyéw
ééwoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of é£obéa.
eéqeoav, impf. 3 pers. plur. of éferpue.
eEnpappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of Enpaiva.
eEjpava and -pavOnv, 1 aor. act. and pass. of Enpaive.
éjpavrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Enpaive.
éeEnpevvyoa, 1 aor. act. of e&epevvda.
éénptirpeévos, pf. pass. ptep. of eaprite.
éqxnrar, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of é&nxéw.
éfveva, pres. inf. of cere.
ehirravev, éhurtav, see eEiornut.
éEotoover, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of éxpépw.
éEGoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of é£wbéw.
éEwoev or éEGoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éEwbéw
édpaka, pf. act. of dpa.
érayayetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of érayo.
éraQev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of macxa.
éravatrajcopat, fut. mid. of éravaravw (see matw).
érdtas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of erayea.
émdpas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ézaipa.
éretpdow, 1 aor, mid. 2 pers. sing. of wetpata.
éreiparo (-pdvro), impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of metpde.
émeoa, 1 aor. act. of zeidw.
érelcOyncay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of welo.
éretxev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of énéyo.
éréxetAav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of émxeAXo.
émexexAnto, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of émxadéo.
éreAdOero (-Sovro), 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of émAay
Oavopat.
éreActxov, impf. act. of emiAcixo.
érerroier, 2 plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of meidw.
émeca, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of rimro.
éreotyoay, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of épiorn.
ér€oxev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éméyw.
éreripa, impf. 3 pers. sing. of émitiysdo.
éwerpamn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of émurpérea.
émehavn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éemipaiva.
éréxpioev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of émtypio.
érnkpoavro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of émaxpodopat.
éryveorev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éeravéo.
érnéev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers sing. of myyvupe.
érfjpa, 1 aor. act. of éraipa.
érnjpOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of eraipa.
émfjpkev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of éraipa.
érgnoxvvOny and érarxtvOny, 1 aor. of eraucxvvopas.
ér(BAeor, 1 aor. mid. impv. of émPXero.
emuBrépat, 1 aor. act. inf. of émiBréza.
ériBAeov, 1 aor. act. impv. of émPAEra.
mise, impv. of emetdov.
ériOes, 2 aor. act. impv. of émiri@npe.
émuxéxAnoat, pf. mid. 2 pers. sing. of érixadéw.
émuxekAyto, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of emtxadew.
émuxAndevra, 1 aor. pass. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of émmaXea
Forms oF VEBBS.
émixpavOncav, 1 aor. pass. 8 pers. plur. of srexpairw.
émAcAnopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of émAavOdvona.
émipeAHOntt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of émueAdouat.
&mov, 2 aor. act. of wiv.
émumAnégs, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of émemAnoow.
émuro8jcare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of émmodéa
émotdoa, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of épiornus
éxlotarot, pres. ind. mid. 3 pers. sing. of épiornps
érlorarat, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing. of ériorapat.
émlornOt, 2 aor. act. impv. of édiornpe.
émiotéOns, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of muorde.
émureOy, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of émeriOnus.
émribéacr, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of émeriOnus.
émriGet, pres. act. impv. of émeriOnus
emtipijoat (-pioor), 1 aor. act. inf. (opt. 3 pers. sing.)
of emitido.
émpavor, 1 aor. act. inf. of émupaive.
érdavqPncrav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of sAande.
érddoOy, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mAdoow.
érAhyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rAqoow.
érAycayv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of miymAnpe.
éwAjobn (-Oncav), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plar.) of
TipTAnpt-
érhovrjcare, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of sAouréw.
érdouticOnre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of rAouri{w
érdvvay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mAdvo.
Ervevoayv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mo.
éxviyovro, impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of mviyo.
émvigav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mviyo.
érpd0n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of murpdoKw.
érploOncrayv, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of mpitw.
érpophtevov (-ca), impf. (1 aor.) act. of mpopyretax
émtuce, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rrva.
éréxethav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of éroxéAAw.
ép(p)dvricre, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of partite. |
ép(p)dmoav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of sazite.
Eppitwpévor, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of ped.
ép(p)uppévor, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of giara
Ep(p)urrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of pimrw.
Ep(p)upay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of pirre.
ép(p)icaro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of dvopas
€p(p)ic6nv, 1 aor. pass. of propa.
Eppaco, Eppwobe, pf. pass. impv. of pavrupe.
érddmicre, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cadrite.
ErBeoay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cBevvupe.
écreloOnv, 1 aor. pass. of celw.
écxvApévor, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of oxvAAo.
éorappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ozeipa.
éorafny, 1 aor. pass. of torn.
éordvar, érrdvar, pf. act. inf. of terns.
éorjkacay, -keray, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of Zormpus
Errmeev, impt. 3 pers. sing. of ornke.
éornkds, pf. act. ptep. of tornpe.
Eormy, aor. act. of iorype
lornprypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ermpifa.
lorijpixrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ornpitar
fords (-és), pf. act. ptep. neut. (mase. and neut.) of terns.
lorpdipnoay, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of a=pédor.
6 ©
Forms oF VERBS
éorpwpévov, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of crparvva.
értpwcay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of stpavwe.
értwocav, impve 3 pers. plur. of ety.
éoaypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of adata.
éxppayirpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of oppayite.
éoxnka, pf. act. of éxa.
éoxnkéra, pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of éyw
eoxov, 2 aor. act. of éya.
érdn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Oamra.
éréOnv, 1 aor. pass. of riOnpt.
éreOvqxet, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of @vycxe.
érexev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of tikrw.
éréx@n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of tikra.
ér(0a, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ri@nus
érvQn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Avo.
einpertykévar (edapertyxévar), pf. act. inf. of ebapeoréen
evéduny (edfalpnv), 1 aor. (opt.) of evyoua.
etpapev, evpav, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of etpicxo.
eipdpevos and evpdspevos, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. of evtpicxax
eipeaovv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of etpioxw.
eipykevar, pf. act. inf. of eipioxa.
evhpavOnre, 1 aor. pass. impv. of eddppaive.
%hayov, 2 aor. act. of eobiw.
éhadAdpevos, Epaddpevos, 2 aor. ptep. of épddAAopat
éhavyy, 2 aor. pass. of daive.
Zbackev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ddcke.
éheloaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of deidopat.
éheoras, pf. act. ptep. of épiornu.
EpOaxa, -ca, pf. and 1 aor. act. of hbava.
ébOdpnyv, 2 aor. pass. of décipa.
Eide (Emde), impv. of éretdov.
étrer, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of hidéa.
ébicrarat, pres. mid. 3 pers. sing. of épiornpus
%bpatay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dpdoow.
ébpiatav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dpvdcow.
&pvyov, 2 aor. act. of dedya.
éxdpynyv, 2 aor. pass. (as act.) of xaipw.
éxptoa, 1 aor. act. of xpia.
éxpavro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ypdopat.
éWetiow, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of WedSopat
édpaxay, -pdxaciv, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of dode
éwpaxet, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of épdw.
éwpakds, pf. act. ptep. of dpde.
éépov, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of épdw.
tBévvure, pres. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (Tdf.) of oSévpums
tn, tnv or Civ, tis, {6, see (ao.
taoot, 1 aor. mid. impv. of Céovvupe.
téoe, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of avpupme.
HPovdnPny, etc., see BovAopas
wyayov, 2 aor. act. of dye.
‘yara, impf. act. 8 pers. sing. of dyamdw.
YyamnKéot, pf. act. ptep. dat. plur. of dyaméw.
nyyetAay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ayyéAdo.
qyyKxa, -ca, pf. and 1 aor. act. of éyyife.
— oe er
Forms OF VERBS.
ajyetpev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éyelpe.
yepOnv, 1 aor. pass. of éyeipa.
wyero (-yovro), impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of dya.
Hynpat, pf. of pyéopat.
yyvixdres, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of dyvige.
ayviopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of ayrige.
Hyvoovv, impf. act. of dyvoéw.
YSeacav, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of otda (see ide, IT.).
WSvvaro (€Svvaro), impf. 3 pers. sing. of divayas.
qSvv70n, WSvvacOn, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of Sivayas.
OeAov, impf. of Gero.
yKact, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of fro.
FKodovOrkapev, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of dxodovbéw.
wAaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of GAopat.
WAartwpéevos, pf. pass. ptep. of édarrdw.
sAavvero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of €Aadve.
HAchOnv, 1 aor. pass. of eAeéw.
HAenpevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of éAeéw.
weno, 1 aor. act. of edeéw.
wAeupa, 1 aor. act. of dreipa.
WAkopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of Edkdo.
WAdagav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dAAdoom.
WAAcro, impf. 3 pers. sing. of GAopat.
qAmika, -oa, pf. and 1 aor. act. of emia.
jpapryka, pf. act. of duaprdave.
Yeaptov, 2 aor. act. of duaprave.
ypeOa, qyev, impf. 1 pers. plur. of etpi.
qpeddov and épedAov, impf. of weAAw.
spnv, impf. of eful.
sepreopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of dudrévvupe
qveyka, 1 aor. act. of depo.
qvexspny, impf. mid. of dvéya.
qverxopnyv, 2 aor. mid. of dvéya.
qvexOnv, 1 aor. pass. of hepa.
qvewypevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of dvotya.
qvewta (vega Tr ?), 1 aor. act. of dvolye.
yvedxOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dvoiya.
qvolynv, 2 aor. pass. of avotya.
qvorypevos, pi. pass. ptcp. of dvoiye.
yvorga, 1 aor. act. of dvoiya.
qyvolxOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dvotya.
wéer, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of Fro.
mEq, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Fro.
jgiov, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of aéida.
yélwra, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of d&do.
yrat70n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of adratdw.
qyre(Onoav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dmebéw.
qme(Bouv, impf. act. of dmebéa.
jeter, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dee.
ynictovv, impf. act. of dmoréo.
qmoper, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of aropéw.
yrrovro, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of dre.
pa, 1 aor. act. of aipo.
tp-(elp-)-yafspny, -cdyny, impf. and 1 aor. of épydfopuas.
qpeO.ra, 1 aor. act. of epebifa.
Mpeoa, 1 aor. act. of dpéoke.
fipeckov, impf. act. of dpeoxw.
%p7L40n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of épyudw.
TY Forms or VERBS
Rpnpeopevny, pf. pass. ptep. acc. sing. fem. of dpnyde.
ypenyv, 1 aor. pass. of aipw.
apkev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of atpe.
pHévos, pf. pass. ptep. of aipw.
jpvetro, impf. 8 pers. sing. of dpvéopun.
ypyynpor, pf. pass. of dpveopat.
ypvnpevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of dpvéouat
jpvncdpuny, 1 aor. of doveopat.
pvyow, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of dpvéopas
jpidpnv, 1 aor. mid. of dpye.
ipTayyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dprdtw.
yetace, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dprate.
aptac On, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of donate.
ypTupevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of dpria.
ypxovto, impf. 3 pers. plur. of épyopat.
Ypotevv, ypdtev, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of épwrde.
qs, yo0a, impf. 2 pers. sing. of eui.
qoOvov, impf. act. of écbio.
aood0nre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of #rrde.
qryKapev, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of airéw.
Arya, -cdunv, 1 aor. act. and mid. of uiréw.
jriaca, 1 aor. act. of drydto.
Aripyoe, 1 aor. act. of drisde.
ATipeapevos, pl. pass. ptep. of arysde.
qrotpaxa, pf. act. of erode.
qjrotvro, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of airéw.
arrqOnre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of yrraw.
ytTyTar, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of 7rrdw.
qr, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of eipi.
nvSdcnoa, 1 aor. act. of eddoxéw.
nvSoxodpev, impf. act. 1 pers. plur. of evdoxée.
nixatpovy, impf. of edxarpéw.
nvdrjocapev, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of aidéw.
nvdrcyet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of evdoyéw.
nidoynka, -oa, pf. and 1 aor. act. of eddAoyéw.
nvéqoa, 1 aor. act. of avfave.
neropetro, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of edopéw.
niptoKero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of eipioxe.
nipickov, impf. act. of ebpicxe.
neddpyoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of edpopéa.
nidpaven, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of eddpaive.
nixaplernoayv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of edyapioréw.
nixdspny, impf. of et youat.
due, impf. 3 pers. sing. of dpinut (ddia).
aXOnv, 1 aor. pass. of ayo.
AxperdOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dxypede.
ybapny, 1 aor. mid. of dare.
Ocat, 1 aor. act. inf. of Garr.
Octvar, Gels, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of riOnt.
Oguevos, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of riOnut.
Oévres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of rine.
Oéoc6e, 2 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ri@nus.
Ogre, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of riOnpe.
Biyys, Olyy, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 and 3 pers. sing. of Gey
avo.
@6, 2 aor. act. subj. of riOnue.
ForMs Os VERBS.
iddn (-09), 1 aor. pass. ind. (subj.) 3 pers. sing. of tdouat.
tara, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ddouas.
larat, pres. 8 pers. sing. of idopuas.
taro, impf. 3 pers. sing. (doyat.
Wav, Sov, collat. forms of efdov.
tract, 3 pers. plur. of the 2 pf. oi8a (see ei8w, IL).
tot, impv. 2 pers. sing. of edi.
tordvopev and iordépev, pres. ind. 1 pers. plur. of tornus.
tore, 2 pers. plur. ind. or impv. of oida (see etSa, 11.).
torixev, plpf. act. of tornus.
lopevos, pres. ptep. of idopat.
xaSapret, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of xaBapife.
xaSaploa, 1 aor. act. inf. of cadapifa.
kaaploy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xabapife.
kadaploOynrt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of cabapifo.
kaQetde, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cabapéw.
Ka0eXo, fut. act. of cadaipew.
KdOy, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of «a@nua.
kaSfjKav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of caOinpss.
kalrjoecGe, fut. 2 pers. plur. of kd@nuas.
xafpe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cabamre.
xaBov, pres. impv. of «eaOnpas.
Kadéoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of cadéw.
KdAerov, 1 aor. act. impv. of cadéo.
Kayne, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of «dye.
kataBa and kardByO, 2 aor. act. impv. of caraBaive.
karaBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of caraBaivo.
xaraBeBnka, pf. act. of caraBaivo.
karaBy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of caraBalve.
Karaxanjcopat, 2 fut. pass. of xaraxaio.
Katraxatoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of caraxaio.
karaxavx, pres. impv. of karaxavydouat,
KatahdBy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of cara\auBdva.
katamiy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of caramive.
xataro8y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xaramive.
katapricat, 1 aor. act. inf. or opt. (3 pers. sing.) of ka
Taptifa.
Katacknvoiv (-votv), pres. act. inf. of karacxnvdo.
katdoXwpev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of caréyo.
kateayGow, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of carayrups.
karéatay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of karayvupe.
kared£te, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of kardyvupe.
karéBn (-noav), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of earaBaivw.
kateyvwopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of caraywaockw.
karetnppevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of caradapBavw.
kateAndevar, pf. act. inf. of caraday Bava.
karexan, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of caraxaiw.
katékhace, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of caraxAd@.
KarékAeora, 1 aor. act. of caraxdelw.
karevexQels, 1 aor, pass. ptep. of carapepw.
kateviynoay, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of caraypiaow.
xateréorycay, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of xareplornpe
karéme, 2 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of caramivw.
kareréGny, 1 aor. pass. of carativo.
kareckappéva, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. nent. of xcra-
ondnra.
718
Forms or VERBs.
katertpenpevos, -orpappevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of caraorpepa.
katertpooycoay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of caracrpovvups.
karevOivar, 1 aor. act. inf. of carevOive.
katevdivar, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of karevOuve.
karépayov, 2 aor. act. of carecGiw.
karyyyetAa, 1 aor. act. of xarayyéAho.
katnyyéAn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of karayyéAAw.
katyveyka, 1 aor. act. of carahepa.
karqvTynKa, -ca, pf. and 1 aor. act. of karavrdo.
katnpasw, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of xarapdopat.
KaTjpyyrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of xarapyéw.
katypticpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of karapri¢a.
katnpticw, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of caraprife.
katryoxivOny, 1 aor. pass. of karauryiva.
karhxnvrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of carnyێw.
Karnxyoe, 1 aor. act. subj. of xarnyéo.
katrlwroat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of catwWo.
katwkiorev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of carotite.
KavOyowpar, KAUXyTwpAL, See Kalo.
kavxdoat, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of kavydoyat.
KexaSa(or €)ptiopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of cabapite.
kexaSappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of xadaipa.
kexadvppévos, pf. pass. ptep. of cadumra.
Kekavpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of kaiw.
Kexepacpévov, pf. pass. ptep. gen. sing. mase. of kepdvvups
Kéxevopat, pf. pass. of Keio
Kéxnka, pf. act. of caréa.
KéKAnrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of «adéw.
KéxAukev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of xriva.
Kéxpykas, pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of kduve.
Kekopeopévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of kopevvups.
Kéxpaye, 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of xpdato.
kexpdfovrat, fut. mid. 3 pers. plur. of kpatw.
kekparykévat, pf. act. inf. of kparéa.
kekparnvrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of cparew.
kekplket, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of xpiva.
Kéxptat, pf. pass. of Kpive.
Kekpuppevos, pf. pass. ptep. of xpumrw.
Kepdrare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of cepdvvums.
Kepdava, kepSyo, fut. act. of xepdaivw.
kepSdvw, 1 aor. act. subj. of cepdaive.
Kexapirpar, pf. of yapifopas.
Kexaptropevn, pf. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of yaperde.
Kexpypat, pf. of ypaopuat.
kexwpiopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of ywpita.
knpvéar (al. knpdgar), 1 aor. act. inf. of kypyace.
KAdorat, 1 aor. act. inf. of KAdo.
KAatcare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of xAaia.
KAatow, KAatcopat, fut. of Kalo.
KAeirPaov, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of KAeio.
KANO rs, KANIGpev, KAnOAvar, KANVEV, 1 aor. pass. Of Kadéw
kAGpev, pres. ind. act. 1 pers. plur. of «Ado.
KAdpevov, pres. pass. ptep. neut. of «Ada.
KAGvres, pres. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of eAd@.
Kowopevos, pres. pass. ptcp. of Koide.
KoAATOnTt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of KoAAd@.
Koptetras, (Attic) fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of xopi{e.
koulraca, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. sing. fem. of coulfw.
Forms oF VERBS.
KopecOevres, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur, masc. of kopévyups.
koas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of kérre.
Kpafov (not xpdfov), pres. ptcp. neut. of xpdta.
kpdgas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of kpato.
kpagovow, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of «pdgo.
Kparet, pres. impv. of xparéw.
kptOnceoGe, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of xpiva.
Kp\Odorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of kpiva.
kpuBfjvat, 2 aor. pass. inf. of xpimra.
kryocacGe, 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of xrdomat.
Krqoyobe, 1 aor. mid subj. 2 pers. plur. of eraoua.
AadBe(-By), 2 aor. act. impv. (subj. 3 pers. sing.) of AauBave.
Aabciv, 2 aor. act. inf. of Aavdava.
Aaxotcr, 2 aor. act. ptcp. dat. plur. of Aayyave.
Adxwpev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of Aayxave.
Aehov(c)pévos, pf. pass. ptep. of Aova.
AAvorar, pf. pass. 2 pers. sing. of Avo.
An()$0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of AauBadva.
An(p)popat, fut. of AapBavo.
Atary, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Aeira.
pabere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of pavOava.
pdOnre, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of pavdava.
paddy, 2 aor. act. ptep. of pavdava.
paxaptotcr, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of paxapito.
pakpo8tpnoov, 1 aor. act. impv. of paxpobupéo.
peOordvat, pres. act. inf. of weAiorne.
peOvo8dorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of pedioKo.
petvor, 1 aor. inf. of péva.
pelvavres, 1 aor. ptcp. nom. plur. masce. of pevo.
pelvare, petvov, 1 aor. impv. of péva.
pelvy, -qTe, -wowv, 1 aor. subj. of péeva.
peAera, pres. act. impv. of pehetdw
pepadnkas, pf. act. ptep. of pavdava.
pepevykeoay, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of péve.
pepiappevos or -opevos, pf. pass. ptep. of paiva.
peplavrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. or plur. of waive.
peprypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of uiyvupe.
pepyyoGe, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of pupynoka.
pepinpat, pf. pass. of pvéo.
pevetre, fut. ind. 2 pers. plur. of pevw.
pévere, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of péva.
peraBa, peraBnOr, 2 aor. act. impv. of peraBaiva.
peracra0s, 1 aor. pass. subj. of pePiornpe.
petartpapyte, 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of wera-
oTpepa.
peréOnxev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of perariOnps.
peteotycev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of pediornue.
peréoxnyxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of peréxo.
perereOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of perariOnus.
permAAagav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of peraAAdoow.
perijpev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of peraipo.
perorxid, (Attic) fut. act. of perorkicw.
perwnirev, 1 aor. act. 3 vers. sing. of perouito
719
Forms or VERBS
prav0dowy, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of puaive.
pyno Piva, 1 aor. pass inf. of peprqcka.
prio Ont, -re, 1 aor. pass. impv. of pipvyocKe.
pvyo06, -O7js, 1 aor. pass. subj. of piprnoKe.
veviknka, pf. act of vkdo.
vevonobernro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of vouoberéw.
vypare, 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of »ndo.
voet, pres. act. impv. of voéw.
voovpeva, pres. pass. ptep. neut. plur. of voéw.
dSuvacoat, pres. ind. mid. 2 pers. sing. of déuvaw.
otcw, fut. act. of pépo.
opvivat, dpvdev, pres. act. inf. of durio.
dpocat, -as, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of duvie.
opooy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dpuvve.
ovaiuny, 2 aor. mid. opt. of dvivnue.
dpaoat, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of dpde.
opbecis, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of dpda.
oer, oy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of dpdw.
oerGe, fut. 2 pers. plur. of dpdaw.
dnobe, 1 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of dpdw.
madetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of racy.
awa0y, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of macya.
maioy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of aia.
mapaBorcvoduevos, 1 aor. ptep. of mapaBodevouat.
mapaBovAevorduevos, 1 aor. ptcp. of mapaBovAcvopat.
mapadedoxeoav, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of rapadidom.
mapadidot, mapas, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of rapadidape.
mapadidsovs (apasovs), pres. (2 aor.) ptep. of mapadidape,
mapade (-S0t), 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of rapadidape.
mapadetvar, 2 aor. act. inf. of mapariOnue.
mwapadov, 2 aor. mid. impv. of maparidnpe.
mapadactv, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of rapariOnye.
mwapattod, pres. impv. of mapairéopat.
mapakekaduppevos, pf. pass. ptep. of rupaxadirro.
mapakexetpaxortt, pf. act. ptep. dat. sing. of mapaxemata.
mapakAnPacwy, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of mapaxadéw
mapakvwas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of mapakirra.
mapady(p)pOyoerat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mapaap-
Barve.
mapatActoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of rapathéw.
mrapap(p)vapev, 2 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. plur. of mapappéa.
mapactioat, 1 aor. act. inf. of mapiornpe.
mapacryoare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of mapiornue
mapacrire, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of rapiornpe.
mapacxoy, 2 aor. act. ptep. of mapéxa.
mapatiéc8woray, pres. impv. 3 pers. plur. of mapariOnue
maped(Socav, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of rapadidape.
mapedevro, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of apariOne.
amdpet, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of mdpecpe.
mapeupevos, pf. pass. ptcep. of rapinpe.
mapetvat, 2 aor. act. inf. of rapinue and pres. inf. of mapeqm
waperdtouvety, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of mapeodye.
Forms OF VERBS. 720
wapeceSinoav, 2 aor, pass. 8 pers. plur. of rapecodvw.
mapecéSucayv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of rapedvo.
mapereveyKavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of
mapeto pepo.
mapactyKecayv, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of sapiornue.
wapeixav, impf, (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of mapéxo.
wapexopnny, impf. mid. of mapéexo.
mapéxuev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rapakimra.
mapeAdBooav, 2 aor. act. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of mapa-
Aap Bava.
mapedctoovrat, fut. 3 pers. plur. of rapépxopat.
mapeAndrvdévar (-04s), pf. act. inf. (ptep.) of wapépxopat.
mapehOdrw (-0érw), 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of
mapépxopat.
mapeveykeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of rapapépo.
wapéfet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of zapéxo.
wapéfy, fut. mid. 2 pers. sing. of rapéexo.
srapemixpavay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of sapamtxpaiva.
maperkevacrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rapackevdfo.
mapertykores and mapertates, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur.
masc. of mapiornut.
mapertycare, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of mapiornu.
mapéreve, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rapateive.
mapetrpovv, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of mapatnpéw.
mapryyetAay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mapayyédA.
mapnkodovOnkas (-cas), pf. (1 aor.) act. 2 pers. sing. of
mapako\ovbew.
mapyvet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of rapawvéw.
mapyTnpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of maparreopat.
mapytycavro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of maparéopat.
mapwknoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of maporkéa.
mapwtivero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rapogvva.
mapotpuvay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of raporpive.
mapwxnpevos, pf. ptep. of mapolxopat.
mwoavedre, 1 aor. act. impv. 8 pers. sing. of mave.
weiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of riva.
melas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of meio.
melow, fut. act. of reido.
mwéravrat, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of rave.
aretretpapevos, pf. pass. ptep. of metpaw.
metretpacpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of metpagto.
mérevopat, -pévos, pf. pass. ind. and ptcp. of weiBw.
metmuccpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mea.
memorevkecayv, pipf. act. 3 pers. plur. of merreva.
memortevkoct, pf. act. ptep. dat. plur. of moreva.
merAavyoe, pf. pass. 2 pers. plur. of wAavda.
mwerAdruvrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rAarive.
memrAnpwxevat, pf. act. inf. of rAnpde.
mérrova, 2 pf. of reidw.
mwérovda, 2 pt. of macy.
merrétixev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of rorite.
mémpaxe, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of mimpdoxa.
mempapevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mupacke.
mempaxa, pf. act. of mpdcco.
méTTOKG,, -Kes, -Kav, pf. act. of rinrra.
metrupwpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of aupde.
méroxe (-Kav), pi. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of mine.
®exwpwpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of mwpde.
Forms or VERBS.
mepidipas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of repidrre.
mrepSpapdvres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of mepirpéxo.
amepteSSero, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of repidéw,
mepreLwopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of repitwvrda.
meptexpuov, 2 aor. of mepixpimrw (or impf. of arepxpuBo)
meptcdctv, 2 aor. act. inf. of meptatpew.
mepieTrecov, 2 aor. act. of mepumimre.
mepteomaro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of renomdo.
mepiecxov, 2 aor. act. of mepiexa.
meprereov, 2 aor. act. of mepirépvo.
mepi{woat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of mepifavvia.
mepinpetro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of aepiatpew.
mepiOevres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of wepiriOnue.
mepitoraco, pres. mid. (pass.) impv. of wepuicrnpe.
mepiréeonte, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of wepirinto.
Tepipepappevov, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of wepippaiva.
mepip(p)ygavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of wepipprryvums.
mepiccevoat 1 aor. act. inf., and meprocetoo. 1 aor. act.
opt. 8 pers. sing., of reprraevo.
mepiTeTpNHEVOS, pi. pass. ptep. of wepitépve.
mepiTiéaciv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of meperiOnpe.
mrepiTpmOAvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of mepiréuva.
ameceiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of rinro.
meoetrar (-obvrar), fut. 3 pers. sing. (plir.) of rinro.
aéoete, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of wimta.
méryrat, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of wéropat.
meTdpevos, pres. ptep. of merdopa.
mepavepwtat (-vepdo8ar), pf. pass. (inf.) of davepda.
mepipooo, pf. pass. impy. of dipda.
macat, 1 aor. act. inf. of mata
ale, 2 aor. act. impv. of wiv.
mciv, 2 aor. act. inf. of rive.
mlerar, mlerGe, fut. 2 pers. sing. and plur. of wive.
arty, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of riva.
muxpavet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of mexpaive.
miv, 2 aor. act. inf. of riva.
miw, 2 aor. act. subj. of rive,
mAdoas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of rAdcow.
mdéEavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of mréxw.
weovdrat, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of mreovdgo.
wAnPivat, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of wAnOivo.
wAnPiver, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of mAnOiva.
wAnOvvet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of rAnOiva.
mAnPvvOAvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of rAnOiva.
TrAnpwbh}, -Ofre, -04, -Bdorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. of wAnpde.
wAnpacat 1 aor. inf., and wAnpdcat 1 aor. opt. 3 pers
sing., of mAnpda.
mAroas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ariumAnpe.
wAnobels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of miprAnme.
mAno bys, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of wipaAnue.
mvéy, pres. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of mvéo.
moujoeayv, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of motéw.
mowsatver, pres. act. 8 pers. sing. of rotpaiva.
mowdvare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of mopaive.
mowmavet, fut. act. 3 pers, sing. of romaivo.
amropevov, pres. mid. impv. of ropeva.
apadev, 1 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of mirpdoKe.
wpaQjvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of murpacke.
i a aa
ForMS OF VERBS
mpoBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of mpoBaive.
mpoPeBykvia, pf. act. ptep. fem. of mpoBaive.
mpoyeyovorwy, pf. act. ptcp. gen. plur. of mpoyivowas
mpocBiBacav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of .-poSiBdtw.
mpoeyvarpévos, pi. pass. ptep. of mpoywacke.
mpocdcvoerat, fut. 3 pers. sing. of mpoepyopat.
mpoeviiptaro (-ac0_e), 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. (2 pers. plur.)
of poevapxopat.
mpoetmyyelkaro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of mpoemayyéAAw.
mpoetnyyeApevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of mpoerayyeAA.
mpoeotares, pf. act. ptep. aom. plur. masc. of spoiernps.
mpocrevay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mporeive.
mpoepyrevov, impf. act. of mpopyreva.
mpoep0acev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rpopdavw.
mpoewpaxdres, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of mpoopde.
mpofyev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of mpodyw.
mponAmikoras, pf. act. ptep. acc. plur. masc. of mpoedrife.
TponpapTyKds, pf. act. ptcp. of mpoayaprdave.
mpoytiacdweda, 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. of mpoasridopat.
mpontolpaca, 1 aor. act. of mpoeroundto.
MpoKexnpvypevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of mpoxnpvcow.
mpoKexepiopevos, pf. pass, ptep. of mpoxerpito.
™poKeXetpoTovhpwevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of mpoxerporovew.
Tpoopounv and mpowpoyny, impf. mid. of mpoopdw.
mpocavedevro, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of mpocavariOnus.
mpooepydcaro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of mpovepya-
Copa.
mpooekAlOy, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of moocKAiva.
®pocekoNAxOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mpoaxoAAde.
mpooekivouv, impf. act. of mpookuvéw.
mpocevrvoxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of mpoodépa.
mporerere, av, -cov, 2 aor. act. of mpoorimre.
mpocép(p)nga, 1 aor. act. of mpoophyvume.
mporérxnka, pf. act. of mpocexa.
mpocepavet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of rporpavéw.
mpoceavros, pres. act. ptcp. gen. sing. of mpoceda.
mpoorveyka, (-Kov), 1 aor. (2 aor.) act. of mpoadépw.
mpoonvexOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of apoopépw.
®poonpydcaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of mpocepyatauat.
mpoonvgaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of mpocedyouat.
mpoonvxero, impf. 3 pers. sing. of mpocedyouat.
mpoobes, 2 aor. act. impv. of mpacridnpt.
@pockivygoy, 1 aor. act. impv. of mpockuvéw,
mpocAaod, 2 aor. mid. impv. of rpocAapBdvw.
Tpocpetvar, 1 aor. act. inf. of mpocpeév.
mpooméas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mpoompyvums.
mportivat, 2 aor. act. inf. of xpoiornps.
mpocwpplciycav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of spogop-
pila.
mpordyOioa, 1 aor. act. of mpocoybila
mpotpedyevos, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of mporpére.
mpouTipxov, impf. act. of mpovmdpxw.
mtatonre, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of srraiw.
®ronlevres, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masce. of rro€éw.
mronOfjre, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of wro€e.
mrvtas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of rriccw.
micas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of rrve.
mvOduevos, 2 aor. ptep. of ruvOdvopas.
T21
Forms oF VERBS.
pavrlowvrar, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of Jarrite.
Pepavtiopévor (or pepavr. or éppavr.), pf. pass. ptep. nom.
plur. mase. of pavri¢e.
Pepippevos (or éppippévos or épinp..), pf. pass. ptep. of démren
petoovory, fut. 3 pers. plur. of péw.
Pagov, 1 aor. act. impv. of pryyrupu.
py geow, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of pyyvupe.
pipav (better pipav), 1 aor. act. ptep. neut. of pire.
puTavOrjre, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of puraivw.
puTapevd4}Te, 1 aor. pass. impv. 8 pers. sing. of pumapeto
peat.
pica, -rdcbw, 1 aor. mid. impv. of piopas.
pvc (-Odpev), 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing. (plur.) of
pvopas.
capot, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing. of capda.
oPéoa, 1 aor. act. inf. of cBévvupe.
oPéoa, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of oBévvupe.
oPeobryoero, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of oBévvups,
ceoradevpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of cadeva.
cecapwpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of capda.
oéonme, 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of one.
ceorynpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ovyda.
céowka, pf. act. of gala.
cécwrrat and céowra, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of odte.
onpavat, 1 aor. act. inf. of onpaive.
oPevorar, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of cbevde.
clevece, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of cbevda.
eyo, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ovyde.
oKvAdov, pres. mid. impv. of oxvAA@.
oapels, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of ometpw.
ometcov, 1 aor. act. impv. of omevdo.
ora0y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of forme.
oradfver, 1 aor pass. inf. of torus.
otds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of torn.
or0. (crijvar), 2 aor. act. impv. (inf.) of fornue.
ornpléat, 1 aor. act. inf. or 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. of
atnpila.
otrpttov and orrpicov, 1 aor. act. impv. of ornpife.
otnplte, ornplow, oTnpra, fut. act. of ornpite.
oTITY, THOS, oTIoHTE, etc., 1 aor. act. subj. of formus
oryocopat, 1 fut. mid. of tornpe.
otpadels -hévres, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of orpéda.
otpadijre, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of orpépe.
otpdcov, 1 aor. act. impv. of orparvia.
ovykatarebepevos, pf. mid. ptep. of cvyxarariOnps.
ovykararibépevos, pres. mid. ptep. of ovyxarariOnue.
ovykekepacpévos and ovykekpapévos, pf. pass. ptep.
OvyKEpavvupe.
ovykexvrat, pf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of cvyxéw.
cvdA\aBotca, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of avAAape
Bavo.
ovdA7(») Wy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of ovAAapBava.
cuprapakrnPfvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of cvprapaxadéo.
cuprapovtes, pres, ptep. nom. plur. masc. of cupmdperpe.
ovpdvetcat, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of cupdie-
ouvaydyere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of gurayo.
Forms or VERBS.
ovvaveKewro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of cuvavdkerpat.
cuvaraxévres, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of
ouvaTrayo.
cvvaré0avov, 2 aor. act. of cvvarobvycKe.
cvvaryxOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers sing. of cuvaraya.
cvvarédero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of guvamd\Avpe.
cvvapat, 1 aor. act. inf. of cuvaipa.
cvvaxOycoper, 1 fut. pass. of cvvdye.
cuvSeSenévor, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of cuvdéw.
ovvefevéev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ougedyvupe
cvvebevto, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of cuvTiOnpe.
cuveSuins (or-as), pf. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of cuveidov.
cuverypvia, pf. act. ptep. fem. of cvAdapBdva.
cuvetarero, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ouveropat.
ovveixero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cuvexa.
cuvexopicay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cvyKxopuiga.
ovwvednrAvdacay, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of cuvepxopat.
cuvednrvdviat, pf. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of cvvépyopat.
ouveréoty, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cuvediornm.
ovuvériov, 2 aor. act. of cuptive.
ocvvertopatey, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cvamapdcoo.
cuverradpévos, pt. pass. ptep. of cvarehAi@
cuvertéaca (-Tata), 2 pf. ptep. nom. sing. fem. (neut.
plur.) of cuviornpe
cuvéeragta, 1 aor. act. of cuvtacco.
cuveradnpev, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of cuvOdarta.
cuvere, 2 aor, act. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of cuvinue.
ovverebevro, plpf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of ovvTiOnpe.
cuvetypet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of cuvrnpew.
ovvedayes, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. sing. of cuvecGia.
ovuvexeav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cuvyxeo.
ovvexeov, impf. (2 aor ? cf. exyéw) 3 pers. plur. of cvyyéo.
cuvexv9n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cvyxéw.
cuvelypiray, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cup ndito.
ouvnyepOnre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of cuveyetpa.
cuvnypevos, pi. pass. ptep. of ovvaya.
cuvn Anca, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cuvabdéo.
cvvnPpoirpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of cvvabpoita.
ovvikav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cuvinum.
cvvyAacev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of cuvedaive.
cvviAAacoev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing of cuvadAdooe.
cuvyvTycev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cuvarrda.
cuvypyet, impf. 3 pers. sing of cuvepyéw.
cuvnpraxe, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of cvvaprdta.
ovvipmacav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cuvapratw
cvviicav, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ovverpe.
cvvyc bev, impf. 3 pers. sing. of cuvecbia.
ovate, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of cuvinus.
ovv7 x6 (-noav), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of cvvaya.
cuvidet, guviotct, cuviover, pres. act. 8 pers. plur. of
OUViNLt.
cuviday, ptcp. of cuvetdov.
cuviels, cuviev, cvvidy (not -wyv), pres. ptep. of ovvinus.
ovviere, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of cvvinus.
cvviovtos, ptcp. gen. sing. of cvverpe (ete).
cucray, -Gv, pres. inf. and ptep. of cuviorn.
cuviwst and cvndot, pres. subj. 3 pers. plur. of cuvinuc.
ovvévrTay, ptep. gen. plur. of ovveupe (eit).
122 ForMS OF VERBS.
ovvradévres, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc of ovr
barra
cuvTedeo Gels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of curredéw.
cuvTetpnpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of cuvréuva.
cuvretpippevos, pf. pass. ptep. of cvvrpiBo.
cuvretpipOat or -rpibOar, pf. pass. inf. of cvrtpiBo.
cvvtpiBov or -rpiBov, pres. act. ptcp. neut. of curTpiBa. ,
cuvuTrekpiOncayv, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of auvumoxpis
vopat.
cvvdor, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of cuvinue.
ow0y, -PAvar, -OfTE, -Odorv, 1 aor. pass. of cafe.
coat, 1 aor. act. inf. of cao.
raxyoerat, fut pass. 3 pers. sing. of thKw, q. V.
rapaxOfAvet, 1 aor. pass. inf of rapaoow.
rOdatat, pf. 3 pers sing. of Gedopat.
TéOeka, pt. act. of riOnue.
TeOcwediwro, plpf. pass. 5 pers. sing. of Gepediow.
ré0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ri@nps.
reOAuupévos, pt. pass. ptep. of AA(Bo.
reOvavar, 2 pf. act. inf. of Oyncke.
reOvynkévar, pf act. inf. of @rycke.
reOpappevos, pf. pass. ptep. of rpéda.
reOpavepevos, pf. pass. ptep. of Arava.
reOupéva, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of dia.
reBdov, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur of rine.
réxy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of rikrw.
reXeo Pow, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of redێo.
réy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of rikto.
reraypévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of taco.
réraxrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of taco.
rerapaypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of rapacca.
rerdpaxrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rapacco,
reraxévar, pf. act. inf. of racca.
rerédeorat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Tedew.
rérevya, pf. act of ruyxave.
retypykay, -acww, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of rypéw
reTusimpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of ryudw.
retpaynrtcpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of rpayndifa.
retidwrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rudda.
réruxa, TeTUXHKA, Pf. act. of ruyxava.
Tex Qets, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of rikrw.
riOcacv, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. plur. of riOnut.
rloovcry, fut. act. 8 pers. plur. of rive.
drédcéa, 1 aor. act. of imodcixvupe.
dmeOnxa, 1 aor. act. of vroriOnu.
imédaBev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of vroAauBav
dmedclbOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dodeira.
vréperva, 1 aor. of imopeva.
omépevov, impf. of dropeva.
vrepvygOny, 1 aor. pass. of tropupyncKe.
vreveyxetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dmopépa
vrevoovy, impf. act. of tovoew.
vmewAcvoapev, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of trom\ew.
vmepidsav, ptep. of vrepeidov.
Forms OF VERBS.
Sréotpepa, 1 aor. act. of imoorpéo.
Srectpdvvvov, impf. 3 pers. plur. of iroorpdvvums
Urerdyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of jmordcow.
wrérata, 1 aor. act. of imordoc.
Urfyov, impf. act. of imdyo.
dmjkovov, impf. act. of draxove.
Urrveyka, 1 aor. act. of imopépa.
Umfpxov, impf. act. of dmapyo.
trodéSexrat, pf. 3 pers. sing. of imodéxouat.
SrodeSypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of trode.
SroSyoa, 1 aor. mid. impv. of trodew.
SmoSpapycvres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of vmo-
TPEXo.
tropelvas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of imopeva.
tropepevykora, pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc. of dropéva.
tropvijoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of tmoppvyoKo.
sropvyce, fut. act. of taouyuvyoKe.
§romvedcavros, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. of imomvéw.
dmooreiAnrat, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ioaréAAa.
trorayy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of droray rw.
Srorayyronar, 2 fut. pass. of trordcow.
drorayyrte, 2 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of isordcoe.
vrordtar, 1 aor. act. inf. of imordoow.
trotaccécOwray, pres. mid. impv. 3 pers. plur. of imo-
Taco.
troréraxrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of iworacow.
vorepyxevar, pf. act. inf. of torepew.
wo0, 1 aor. pass. subj. of ido.
ddyeorar, fut. 2 pers. sing. oi éobio.
éavy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of paiva.
havi, -vys, -vaorv, 2 aor. pass. subj. of daive.
avycopa. and havotper, 2 fut. pass. of dative.
detropor, fut. of Peidonat.
evéopar, fut. of devyo.
0apq, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Hbeipa.
Plapycopat, 2 fut. pass. of dbeipa.
0dcopev, 1 aor. subj. 1 pers. plur, of Péarw.
Ocpet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of Pbeipw.
pipoty, -pody, pres. act. inf. of diudw.
id0yr, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. of diude.
payy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dpacow.
ppayycopa, 2 fut. pass. of dpdooe.
pacov, 1 aor. impv. of dpatw.
dpoveioQw, pres. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of dpovew.
723
Forms OF VERBS,
$vév, 2 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of due.
vAafov, 1 aor. act. impv. of duAdcow.
pis, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of dia.
pvrevOnr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of dureva.
port, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of porife.
XoAGowv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of yahde.
Xapfivar, 2 aor. pass. inf. of xaipa.
Xapyoopat, fut. mid. of yaipw.
xdpyre, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of yaipw.
Xapfire, 2 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. of yaipo.
xapotow, fut. 3 pers. plur. of xaipw (Rev. xi. 10 unique).
Xpficat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ypaopat.
XpyonTat, 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ypdopat.
Xpfirov, 1 aor. act. impv. of kiypne.
XpfiTa, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xpdomas.
xpovet, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of ypovite.
xp, pres. impv. of ypdopax.
Xopfoa, 1 aor. act. inf. of yapéo.
xoploat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ywpita.
Xopoteat, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of ywpee.
xwpotor, pres, act. 3 pers. plur. of ywpew.
WnAadyoeray, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of wakaddw
Wuyyoerat, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Wuyxa.
Poutiow, 1 aor. act. subj. of Wopuite.
@kodépyto, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of oixodouew
akodcpouy, impf. act. of oixodopéw.
outta, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dutAéw.
cpoddyouv, impf. act. of duodoyew.
apooa, 1 aor. act. of duvups.
avelioe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvediga.
avépaca, 1 aor. act. of dvopageo.
HpOprtev, impf. 3 pers. sing. of sag
apie, 1 aor. act. of Satta,
apirpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dpife.
Sppnoa, 1 aor. act. of dpuaw.
aputev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dpvcce.
apxrjoacGe, 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. of dpyeouat.
dberdov, impf. of ddeirw.
&bOny, 1 aor. pass. of doce.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
HE printing of the Lexicon was nearly finished before the plan of the Appendix, as respects its details,
my had been decided on. Consequently facts respecting a word’s use are occasionally assumed there
which are not expressly stated under the word itself. Professor Grimm held it to be unnecessary to refer to
profane usage in the case of familiar and current words. And although the number of classic vouchers for the
age of a word has been greatly multiplied, they have not been given with that invariable completeness which
the chronological distribution of the vocabulary in the Appendix renders desirable. Consistency would require
that it be expressly noted that the following words ere in use as early as Homer or Hesiod: @yxuorpov, ayvas,
dypa, adpérns, dbeui(o)ros, APnvaios, Aiyimrwos, Alloy, aicxpds, 6, dua(or n)Kdoror, ett, exeiBev, exeive, “EAXds,
“ENAny, Evexa, evredber, €&, cEdyw, ebaipw, eeu, e&€pxouar, éénkovra, éEw, emeyeipw, emel, emerdy, ereidov, erecta,
émixadvnTa, eos, Entd, Atos, Oapoéw, Oapoos, Kpns, KTjwa, pnkere, pytis (pyTL), vintw, xo; that the following
are as old as Pindar, Herodotus, or the Tragedians: dyvacia, aipoppoéw, éxdoxn, évouxéw, EEaxdoro, eEwbev,
€xawvos, Edéatos, Opoew, Kowvdw, Koddfw, Kpdomedov, Maxedwv, pdraios, pevTor, petéxoa, pndémote, pnderw, Mndos,
Pwpaive, vn, ovKovY, OvXi, dxETOS, TapdonLos, TapoOLKOs, Opa, MpooTaTis, TTAadLov, OTAaTHP, TTOd, TuVOLKew, Xaddaios ;
that the following may be found inThucydides, Aristophanes, Plato, or Xenophon: dypapyparos, adamavos, ad7nba,
"Ayala, ¢yytora, eyyvrepov, emideows, emKabilo, emurxevatw, KaTadad€w, pataoAdyos, pyTLye, pva, PovVTLKIS, VUVL,
dbdui0v, mapowvos, pais, orovdaiws, oTapvos, TuVaywyn, Tvvaipo, opupis, Pacis, Pirogopia ; that the following are
in use from Aristotle on: émexreivw, émuotnpitw, evOvTns, fxos, Kepatiov, Kon, papyapitns (Theophr.), vapdos
(Theophr.), mparws; that the following may be found in the 3d century before Christ: Ba@éws, emay (inscr.
B. C. 265), — dexaeé and Sexaoxre in the Sept.; that the following appear in Polybius: ’AXeEavdpuvds, "Avtioxevs,
mpocavexw ; while Diod. Sic., Dion. Hal., or Strabo vouch for ”Apay, "Aovapyns, "Emcxovpetos, Taxtov.
Other words without vouchers either first make their appearance in the New Testament writings, or are
so treated in the Lexicon as to furnish a student with the means of tracing their history.
Many interesting facts relative to noteworthy New Testament forms, and even constructions, will be found
in Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften, Berlin, 1885 (2d much “ enlarged and improved ” edition
1888). See, for example, on the various forms of dape, inus, tornpt, TiOnus, § 74; on the intrusion into the
2 aor. of the a of the 1 aor. (#veyxay, eiras, etpapevos, etc.) § 66, 6. 7.8; on yi(y)vopat, yt(y)vooka, § 63, 20. 21;
on éw and éveors, § 74, 12; on (é)6édo, § 63, 23; on the fut. yapjooua, § 64, 7. On anomalies or variations in
augment, § 62; on éAmis, ad’ idiav, § 32, 2. 4; on évexev, elvexev, § 83, 26; on the use of the cases and prepo-
sitions, §§ 82, 83; of the art. with mas, § 84, 41; ete., etc. References to it (of necessity restricted to the first
edition, 1885) have been introduced into the body of the Lexicon where the plates easily permitted.
p- 1°, s. v."ABBa ; respecting its accent see Tdf. Proleg.
p- 102; Kautzsch, Grammatik d. Biblisch-Aramiischen
u. s. w. (Leipzig, 1884) p. 8.
p- 4°, line 1, add “See Westcott, Fipp. of St. John,
p- 48 sq.”
p- 7», first paragraph, add to the reff. EH. Issel, Der
Begriff der Heiligkeit im N. T. (Leiden, 1887).
p: 13°, s. v. Geos, 1. 8; on the application of the term
to Christians by the heathen see Bp. Lghtft.’s note on
Ign. ad Trall. 3, vol. ii. p. 160.
p- 19%, line 13 from bot. before Longin. insert of am
aia@vos ‘Pwpaio, Dion Cass. 63, 20, 2 ef. 5;
p- 27%, s. v. adnOns, fin., add to the reff. A. Schlatter,
Der Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885), p. 169.
p. 72, last line but one, after “ Arabian king ” insert
Aretas IV., styled Admatpis ‘lover of his country,’
who reigned B.c. 9 (or 8) to A. D. 39 (or 40) (see Gut-
schmid’s List of Nabathaean kings in J. Euting, Nab.
Inschriften aus Arabien, Berlin 1885, p. 84 sq.)
p- 74%, s. v. ‘Appayedar, fin., add But see WH ws.
p- 74>, s. v. dpmaypds, fin., add to the reff. Wetzel in
Stud. u. Krit. for 1887, pp. 535-552.
p- 78%, s. v. dpxvepevs 3, for the application of the
term to Christ by the early writers see Bp. Lghtft. on
726
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36 p. 118 sq., and on Ign. ad Philad.
9 vol. ii. p. 274.
p- 823, s. v. "Aovyxpitos, line 1, after "Acuvep. add (cf.
ov», II. last paragraph )
p: 87>, first paragraph, last line, for Rev. viii. 6, etc.).
read Rey. viii. 6; xviii. 7; cf. Scrivener’s Greek Tes-
tament (1887) p. v. note). Tr reads atra@v in Rev.
vil. 11.
ibid. after “Cf.” insert Meisterhans ed. 2 § 59, 4. 5;
p- 979, line 15, “wn mia90 —probably the article
should be stricken out; cf. Prof. Geo. F. Moore in the
Andover Review for July 1887, p. 105.
p- 98%, s. v. Baoweia, fin., to the reff. add Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 264 sqq.
p. 98, s. v. Baora¢w, line 1, before fut. insert impf. 3
pers. sing. €Bacrafev; and after 1 aor. ¢3acraca; add,
Pass., pres. inf. BaorafeoObar; impf. 3 pers. sing. éBa-
otateTo ;
p. 1002, s. v. BeeACeBovd, last line but one, add (within
the brackets) But see Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2, vol.
ii. p. 209 sq.; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.
p- 101%, top, — On the recent identification of the
pool (‘twin pools’) of Bethesda, near the church of St.
Anne, see Pal. Kxplor. Fund for July, 1888
p- 1074, line 1, for -€a WH read -6a Tr WH.
v. 107%, s. v. Fa¢a, line 7, for 16, 30 read 16, 2, 30
p- 108°, s. v. TadcAaia, last line but four, for 16, 34
read 16, 2, 34
p- 111°, s. v. yeevva, line 29, for 2 K.i. read 2 K. i. 10-12
p- 120, une 2, add to the reff. (within the brackets)
Caspari, Chron.-geogr. Ein]. pp. 83-90; Schiirer, Neu-
test. Zeitgesch. $23, I. vol. ii. p. 83 (Eng. trans. ii}
p-. 94)
p- 131°, Syn. add The words are associated in 2 Co.
xi. 4.
p- 164%, s. v. “EBpais fin., add to the reff. Kautzsch
p- 17 sq.; Neubauer in Studia Biblica (Oxford, 1885)
pp- 39-74.
p- 198%, insert in its place “ ék-mepirood, see éxmepic-
cas and umepexmepicaod.”
p- 256%, s. v. ed, line 3— “contrary to ordinary Grk.
usage” etc.; yet cf. Schmidt, vol. iv. p. 398.
p. 268), s v. éws, II. 2 ¢., for gws pds in Lk. xxiv.
50, note the rendering given in R. V.: until they were
over agaist ete.
p. 274%, s. v. wn, fin., to the works referred to add
“ Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 204 sqq.”
p- 276, s. v. ndvocpos, fin., add to the reff. “ Low,
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 200.”
p- 287, s. v. eds, 1 fin., add to the reff. “For 6eoi
in application to (deceased) Christians, see Theoph. ad
Autol. 2, 27; Hippol. refut. omn. haer. 10, 34; Iren.
haer. 3,.6)/1) tin. * 4. 4,114, 88, 4 oF esp. Harnack,
Dogmengesch. 1. p: 82 note.”
S. v. Geds 2, add “On patristic usage ef. Harnack,
Dogmengesch. i. pp. 131, 695 ; Bp. Lght/t. Ignat. vol. ii.
pe 2607
s. v. Oeds 3, add “On 6 Oeds and Oeds, esp. in the
writings of John, see Wesicoil, Epp. of St. John, p.
165 sqq.”
p. 292%, s. v. OptapBevw, add to the reff. at the close
“ Findlay in the Expositor, vol. x. p. 403 sqq.; xi. 78;
Waite in the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ on 2 Co. 1. c. p. 404
sq.”
p- 297%, first paragraph, last line but six, car’ iSiav —
add, On kar’ idiav (WH’s ‘alt.’ in Mt. xiv. 23; xvii. 1,
19; xx. 17; xxiv.3; Mk. iv. 34; vi. 31; ix. 28; xiii. 3),
see their App. pp. 143, 145 ; Meisterhans n. 30
p- 300%, s. v. "Ingots, line 10, read “in the Zeitschr.
f.d. Luth. Theol. 1876, p. 209 sq.; [Keim i. 384 sq. (Eng.
trans. il. 97 sq.) ].”
p: 306%, Syn., last line, add to the reff. E. Héhne in
the Ztschrft. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w. 1886, pp.
607-617.
p. 314°, s. v. kaOodrxds, line 5, after “Smyrn. c. 8”
insert “[see esp. Bp. Lghtft.’s note |”
p- 319°, s.v. kaiw, line 7, to the reff. on kavynoopar
add “ Bp. Lgheft. on Col., 7th ed., p. 395 n.”
p- 354%, line 15, the words els tovs KéArovus ad’tay are
wanting in good Mss.
p- 358%, s. v. kodpe; add “See Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, i. 631 note.”
p- 365%, line 18, on this use of xvpios add ref. to Bp.
Lehtft. on Ign., mart. Polye. 8, p. 959.
p- 376%, s. v. Aempa, add to the reff. Clark in the
‘Speaker’s Com.’ on Lev. pp. 559 sqq. 570 sqq.; Sir Ris-
don Bennett, Diseases of the Bible. 1887. (“ By-Paths
of Bible Knowledge ” vol. ix.)
p- 382%, first paragraph, line 15, add For a transla-
tion of Liicke’s discussion see Christian Examiner for
1849 pp. 165 sqq. 412 sqq. ‘To the reff. given may be
added Mansel in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Philosophy; Zeller,
Philos. der Griechen, 3te Theil, 27, p. 369 sq. (1881) ;
Drummond, Philo Judaeus, vol. ii. pp. 156-273.
p- 4028, line 18 sq., on év peo and ava peoor cf. R. F.
Weymouth in Journ. of Philol. 1869, ii. pp. 318-322.
p- 417°, insert in its place (before povy) podvas, .see
KaTapovas.
p- 420°, s. v. Mojs, line 1, “ constantly so in the text.
Rec.” — not quite correct ; Rec.st uses Mwiojs in Acts
VB IVES Sates, BIS oar 1h, bie DeiMon woe, eyo Jel. we, WS)
p- 4212, line 20, “by L Tr WH” — Tr does not seem
to be consistent; he uses the diwresis, for example, in
ACTS xv. ev Dis) 2) AIM Tes ee bene 9.
p- 425%, s. v. pnorevo, line 6, after xviii. 12 insert [(cf.
‘Teaching’ 8,1 and Harnack or Schaff ad loc.) ]
p- 433%, introduce as line 1 (before 6, 7, 70) — O, 0: —
on its interchange with omega see Q, .
p- 445%, s. v. 6poimpa, last line “p. 301 sqq.” —add
Dickson, St. Paul’s Use of the Terms ‘Flesh’ and
‘Spirit’ (Glasgow, 1883), p. 322 sqq.
p- 465%, line 32 mid., add see H. Gebhardt, Der Him-
mel im N. T., in Ztschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. kirchl.
eer ores
i he
T
p- 474%, Syn. sub fin., on the elasticity of the term mais
as respects age, see Bp. Lghift. Apostolic Fathers, Pt.
II. vol. i. p. 482 note.
p- 501», under c. 6., after Ro. viii. 3 add fal. find
here the same idiom as in Heb. x. 6 below (cf. R. V.
txt.)
p- De line 18 sq., add to the reff. Lipsius, Apokr.
Apostelgesch. ii.1 (1887) p. 1 sqq.
p- 512%, s. v. muorrixéds, line 9, add [but see Rev. Wm.
Houghton in Proc. of Soc. of Bibl. Archaeol. Jan. 10,
1888]
p- 514%, to the reff. s. v. miorts add A. Schlatter, Der
Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885).
p- 521%, paragraph 4 a., line 4, “the Sept. renders by ”
etc. — not correct; the rendering of the Sept. in both
passages is ro mv. TO dytov.
p. 529%, par. c., line 5 sq., “so moAAjs dpas, Polyb.
5, 8, 3” — but see p. 679, line 2.
p- 5364, line 15, after 1 Pet. v. 1 sq.insert ['T WH om. }
p- 537%, s. v. mpoBarixds fin.— see under Bnéeoda,
p- 101° above.
p- 566, s. v. Sad insert [Lchm. Sada]
p- 568», line 2, add On the Christology of the Sa-
maritans see Westcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gos-
pels, 5th ed., p. 159 sq.
p- 5728, first paragraph, end; add to the reff. Dorner,
System d. Christ. Glaubenslehre, § 85, vol. ii. 1 p. 188
ADDITIONAL
p. 42°, line 1, after Jn. ii. 15 add [WH txt. avérpever]
p. 250%, s. v. gounvedw, line 1, after ‘Epune insert [but see
Curtius § 502]
p. 268°, line 20, after Hdt. 2, 143 add [here modern
edd. read éc 0]
p. 268, line 21, before Plut. insert [Polyb. 4, 19, 12],
p. 2812, line 7, after 22—N.B. here WH R mrg. read
avrov (for a’rye rnc), and thus make the daughter’s
name Herodias (as well as the mother’s); but see Schirer,
Gesch. § 17, note °°.
p. 298%, s. v. ‘Ieprys, last line, add see esp. Schiirer,
Gesch. § 15, note °°.
p. 299°, according to Professor Sayce (in 8. 8. Times,
Feb. 7, 1891, p. 88) it appears from the Tel el-Amarna
tablets that Uru-salim is equivalent to ‘the city of the
god Salim.’
27
sqq.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2, xv. 358 sq. ;
esp. Weser in Stud. u. Krit. for 1882 pp. 284-303.
p- 584%, line 24, for “ Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16
note?” read Geiger, in Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Morgenl.
Gesellsch. 1858, pp. 307-309; Delitzsch in Luth. Zeitschr.
1877 p. 603 sq.; Driver in the Expositor for Jan. 1889
p- 18 sq.
p. 608, s. v. cvorpatiatns, line 1, for T Tr WH ov»
(so Lchm. in Philem.; read L T Tr WH ovp- (
p- 619%, s. v. réAos 1 a., line 2, — “in the Grk. writ.””
etc. add cf. Schmidt ch. 193 esp. §§ 3 and 9.
p- 626%, line 38, before 2 Jn. 4 insert Acts xix. 33
R.V. mrg. (cf. cvpBiBago, 3 fin.) ;
p- 6534, s. v. BadadeApera, line 3, “ The White City ”
(Sayce), add, al. “the pied or striped city” (cf. Bp.
Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. ii. sect. i. p. 245)
p- 665», s. v. xapi¢opat, last line, after ib. 16 add [but
GLTTr WH om. éis az.]
p. 669%, line 7, add to ref. Schaff, Hist. i. 841 sqq.;
the Expositor for Nov. 1885, p. 381 sq. ; Salmon, Introd.,
Lect. xiv.
p- 672%, s. v. Xpuortavds, line 7 sqq., add — yet see Bp.
Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. IT. vol. i. p. 400 sqq.
p- 678, s. v. Woye, fin., add [Comp. : ava-, atro-, €k-,
cata-, also ev-yrvxe. |
p- 708, col. 2, insert (in its place) “ évoyAew fr. Sept.
(ik. 2)”
CORRECTIONS.
p. 886, s. v. waOnrne, line 5, after Jn. ix. 28; insert
[adrov i. e. of Paul, Acts ix. 25 L T Tr WH];
p. 548°, line 9, after reject; add [in Jn. iv. 22 the un-
expressed antecedent of 6 (47s) may be in the acc. or in
the dat. (after the analogy of vs. 21); in vs. 28 both con-
structions occur];
p. 548°, s. v. zpocpévw, line 5, after 7g «upip insert
[WH prefix éy in br. |
p. 6052, line 8 from bottom, after xvii. 13; insert [Acts
vii. 25°];
p. 6214, line 6, for the gen, or dat. read the gen., dat.,
or nom.
p. 630%, s. v. Tpaywriric, at end, add esp. Schirer,
Gesch. § 17°, note *.
p. 658°, s. v. ¢pdvoc, line 5, after Ro. xi. 25 insert
[here Tr txt. WH txt. é» éavroic, |
p. 664, s. v. Xavacy, line 1, dele [lit. ‘lowland’]
i
PA Grimm, Carl Ludwig Wilibal
881 A qreek-English lexicon
G8 Corr. ed.
1889
cop.d
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
bafindeeisee ils oad
:
itt
tababes ad
tit
bet
tata!
if
eres
z +t
peseeatss gets
3
+33
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11